Note For specific Windows 10 Mobile requirements, see the [Minimum hardware requirements for Windows 10 Mobile](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkID=699266) topic. |
-| Memory |
Windows 10 (32-bit) - 1 GB
Windows 10 (64-bit) - 2 GB
|
-| Hard drive space |
Windows 10 (32-bit) - 16 GB
Windows 10 (64-bit) - 20 GB
|
-| DVD drive | DVD-ROM drive (if installing from a DVD-ROM) |
-| Display | Super VGA (800 x 600) or higher-resolution monitor with 256 colors |
-| Graphics card | Microsoft DirectX 9 or later with Windows Display Driver Model (WDDM) 1.0 driver |
-| Peripherals | Internet connection and a compatible pointing device |
-
----
-
-
-## Supported languages
-
-Microsoft Edge supports all of the same languages as Windows 10 and you can use the [Microsoft Translator extension](https://www.microsoft.com/p/translator-for-microsoft-edge/9nblggh4n4n3) to translate foreign language web pages and text selections for 60+ languages.
-
-If the extension does not work after install, restart Microsoft Edge. If the extension still does not work, provide feedback through the Feedback Hub.
-
-
-| Language | Country/Region | Code |
-|----------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------|----------------|
-| Afrikaans (South Africa) | South Africa | af-ZA |
-| Albanian (Albania) | Albania | sq-AL |
-| Amharic | Ethiopia | am-ET |
-| Arabic (Saudi Arabia) | Saudi Arabia | ar-SA |
-| Armenian | Armenia | hy-AM |
-| Assamese | India | as-IN |
-| Azerbaijani (Latin, Azerbaijan) | Azerbaijan | az-Latn-AZ |
-| Bangla (Bangladesh) | Bangladesh | bn-BD |
-| Bangla (India) | India | bn-IN |
-| Basque (Basque) | Spain | eu-ES |
-| Belarusian (Belarus) | Belarus | be-BY |
-| Bosnian (Latin) | Bosnia and Herzegovina | bs-Latn-BA |
-| Bulgarian (Bulgaria) | Bulgaria | bg-BG |
-| Catalan (Catalan) | Spain | ca-ES |
-| Central Kurdish (Arabic) | Iraq | ku-Arab-IQ |
-| Cherokee (Cherokee) | United States | chr-Cher-US |
-| Chinese (Hong Kong SAR) | Hong Kong Special Administrative Region | zh-HK |
-| Chinese (Simplified, China) | People's Republic of China | zh-CN |
-| Chinese (Traditional, Taiwan) | Taiwan | zh-TW |
-| Croatian (Croatia) | Croatia | hr-HR |
-| Czech (Czech Republic) | Czech Republic | cs-CZ |
-| Danish (Denmark) | Denmark | da-DK |
-| Dari | Afghanistan | prs-AF |
-| Dutch (Netherlands) | Netherlands | nl-NL |
-| English (United Kingdom) | United Kingdom | en-GB |
-| English (United States) | United States | en-US |
-| Estonian (Estonia) | Estonia | et-EE |
-| Filipino (Philippines) | Philippines | fil-PH |
-| Finnish (Finland) | Finland | fi_FI |
-| French (Canada) | Canada | fr-CA |
-| French (France) | France | fr-FR |
-| Galician (Galician) | Spain | gl-ES |
-| Georgian | Georgia | ka-GE |
-| German (Germany) | Germany | de-DE |
-| Greek (Greece) | Greece | el-GR |
-| Gujarati | India | gu-IN |
-| Hausa (Latin, Nigeria) | Nigeria | ha-Latn-NG |
-| Hebrew (Israel) | Israel | he-IL |
-| Hindi (India) | India | hi-IN |
-| Hungarian (Hungary) | Hungary | hu-HU |
-| Icelandic | Iceland | is-IS |
-| Igbo | Nigeria | ig-NG |
-| Indonesian (Indonesia) | Indonesia | id-ID |
-| Irish | Ireland | ga-IE |
-| isiXhosa | South Africa | xh-ZA |
-| isiZulu | South Africa | zu-ZA |
-| Italian (Italy) | Italy | it-IT |
-| Japanese (Japan) | Japan | ja-JP |
-| Kannada | India | kn-IN |
-| Kazakh (Kazakhstan) | Kazakhstan | kk-KZ |
-| Khmer (Cambodia) | Cambodia | km-KH |
-| K'iche' | Guatemala | quc-Latn-GT |
-| Kinyarwanda | Rwanda | rw-RW |
-| KiSwahili | Kenya, Tanzania | sw-KE |
-| Konkani | India | kok-IN |
-| Korean (Korea) | Korea | ko-KR |
-| Kyrgyz | Kyrgyzstan | ky-KG |
-| Lao (Laos) | Lao P.D.R. | lo-LA |
-| Latvian (Latvia) | Latvia | lv-LV |
-| Lithuanian (Lithuania) | Lithuania | lt-LT |
-| Luxembourgish (Luxembourg) | Luxembourg | lb-LU |
-| Macedonian (Former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia) | Macedonia (FYROM) | mk-MK |
-| Malay (Malaysia) | Malaysia, Brunei, and Singapore | ms-MY |
-| Malayalam | India | ml-IN |
-| Maltese | Malta | mt-MT |
-| Maori | New Zealand | mi-NZ |
-| Marathi | India | mr-IN |
-| Mongolian (Cyrillic) | Mongolia | mn-MN |
-| Nepali | Federal Democratic Republic of Nepal | ne-NP |
-| Norwegian (Nynorsk) | Norway | nn-NO |
-| Norwegian, Bokmål (Norway) | Norway | nb-NO |
-| Odia | India | or-IN |
-| Polish (Poland) | Poland | pl-PL |
-| Portuguese (Brazil) | Brazil | pt-BR |
-| Portuguese (Portugal) | Portugal | pt-PT |
-| Punjabi | India | pa-IN |
-| Punjabi (Arabic) | Pakistan | pa-Arab-PK |
-| Quechua | Peru | quz-PE |
-| Romanian (Romania) | Romania | ro-RO |
-| Russian (Russia) | Russia | ru-RU |
-| Scottish Gaelic | United Kingdom | gd-GB |
-| Serbian (Cyrillic, Bosnia, and Herzegovina) | Bosnia and Herzegovina | sr-Cyrl-BA |
-| Serbian (Cyrillic, Serbia) | Serbia | sr-Cyrl-RS |
-| Serbian (Latin, Serbia) | Serbia | sr-Latn-RS |
-| Sesotho sa Leboa | South Africa | nso-ZA |
-| Setswana (South Africa) | South Africa and Botswana | tn-ZA |
-| Sindhi (Arabic) | Pakistan | sd-Arab-PK |
-| Sinhala | Sri Lanka | si-LK |
-| Slovak (Slovakia) | Slovakia | sk-SK |
-| Slovenian (Slovenia) | Slovenia | sl-SL |
-| Spanish (Mexico) | Mexico | es-MX |
-| Spanish (Spain, International Sort) | Spain | en-ES |
-| Swedish (Sweden) | Sweden | sv-SE |
-| Tajik (Cyrillic) | Tajikistan | tg-Cyrl-TJ |
-| Tamil (India) | India and Sri Lanka | ta-IN |
-| Tatar | Russia | tt-RU |
-| Telugu | India | te-IN |
-| Thai (Thailand) | Thailand | th-TH |
-| Tigrinya (Ethiopia) | Ethiopia | ti-ET |
-| Turkish (Turkey) | Turkey | tr-TR |
-| Turkmen | Turkmenistan | tk-TM |
-| Ukrainian (Ukraine) | Ukraine | uk-UA |
-| Urdu | Pakistan | ur-PK |
-| Uyghur | People's Republic of China | ug-CN |
-| Uzbek (Latin, Uzbekistan) | Uzbekistan | uz-Latn-UZ |
-| Valencian | Spain | ca-ES-valencia |
-| Vietnamese | Vietnam | vi-VN |
-| Welsh | United Kingdom | cy-GB |
-| Wolof | Senegal | wo-SN |
-| Yoruba | Nigeria | yo-NG |
-
----
diff --git a/browsers/edge/available-policies.md b/browsers/edge/available-policies.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 37bef54e3a..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/available-policies.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,222 +0,0 @@
----
-description: You can customize your organization’s browser settings in Microsoft Edge with Group Policy or Microsoft Intune, or other MDM service. When you do this, you set the policy once and then copy it onto many computers—that is, touch once, configure many.
-ms.assetid: 2e849894-255d-4f68-ae88-c2e4e31fa165
-ms.reviewer:
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.mktglfcycl: explore
-ms.topic: reference
-ms.sitesec: library
-title: Group Policy and Mobile Device Management settings for Microsoft Edge (Microsoft Edge for IT Pros)
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Group Policy and Mobile Device Management (MDM) settings for Microsoft Edge
-
-> Applies to: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10 and Windows 10 Mobile
-
-You can customize your organization’s browser settings in Microsoft Edge with Group Policy or Microsoft Intune, or other MDM service. When you do this, you set the policy once and then copy it onto many computers—that is, touch once, configure many. For example, you can set up multiple security settings in a Group Policy Object (GPO) linked to a domain, and then apply those settings to every computer in the domain.
-
-Other policy settings in Microsoft Edge include allowing Adobe Flash content to play automatically, provision a favorites list, set default search engine, and more. You configure a Group Policy setting in the Administrative Templates folders, which are registry-based policy settings that Group Policy enforces. Group Policy stores these settings in a specific registry location, which users cannot change. Also, Group Policy-aware Windows features and applications look for these settings in the registry, and if found the policy setting gets used instead of the regular settings.
-
-**_You can find the Microsoft Edge Group Policy settings in the following location of the Group Policy Editor:_**
-
- *Computer Configuration\\Administrative Templates\\Windows Components\\Microsoft Edge\\*
-
-When you edit a Group Policy setting, you have the following configuration options:
-
-- **Enabled** - writes the policy setting to the registry with a value that enables it.
-- **Disabled** - writes the policy setting to the registry with a value that disables it.
-- **Not configured** - leaves the policy setting undefined. Group Policy does not write the policy setting to the registry and has no impact on computers or users.
-
-Some policy settings have additional options you can configure. For example, if you want to set the default search engine, set the Start page, or configure the Enterprise Mode Site List, you would type the URL.
-
-
-## Allow a shared books folder
-[!INCLUDE [allow-shared-folder-books-include.md](includes/allow-shared-folder-books-include.md)]
-
-## Allow Address bar drop-down list suggestions
-[!INCLUDE [allow-address-bar-suggestions-include.md](includes/allow-address-bar-suggestions-include.md)]
-
-## Allow Adobe Flash
-[!INCLUDE [allow-adobe-flash-include.md](includes/allow-adobe-flash-include.md)]
-
-## Allow clearing browsing data on exit
-[!INCLUDE [allow-clearing-browsing-data-include.md](includes/allow-clearing-browsing-data-include.md)]
-
-## Allow configuration updates for the Books Library
-[!INCLUDE [allow-config-updates-books-include.md](includes/allow-config-updates-books-include.md)]
-
-## Allow Cortana
-[!INCLUDE [allow-cortana-include.md](includes/allow-cortana-include.md)]
-
-## Allow Developer Tools
-[!INCLUDE [allow-dev-tools-include.md](includes/allow-dev-tools-include.md)]
-
-## Allow extended telemetry for the Books tab
-[!INCLUDE [allow-ext-telemetry-books-tab-include.md](includes/allow-ext-telemetry-books-tab-include.md)]
-
-## Allow Extensions
-[!INCLUDE [allow-extensions-include.md](includes/allow-extensions-include.md)]
-
-## Allow fullscreen mode
-[!INCLUDE [allow-full-screen-include](includes/allow-full-screen-include.md)]
-
-## Allow InPrivate browsing
-[!INCLUDE [allow-inprivate-browsing-include.md](includes/allow-inprivate-browsing-include.md)]
-
-## Allow Microsoft Compatibility List
-[!INCLUDE [allow-microsoft-compatibility-list-include.md](includes/allow-microsoft-compatibility-list-include.md)]
-
-## Allow Microsoft Edge to pre-launch at Windows startup, when the system is idle, and each time Microsoft Edge is closed
-[!INCLUDE [allow-prelaunch-include](includes/allow-prelaunch-include.md)]
-
-## Allow Microsoft Edge to load the Start and New Tab page at Windows startup and each time Microsoft Edge is closed
-[!INCLUDE [allow-tab-preloading-include](includes/allow-tab-preloading-include.md)]
-
-## Allow printing
-[!INCLUDE [allow-printing-include.md](includes/allow-printing-include.md)]
-
-## Allow Saving History
-[!INCLUDE [allow-saving-history-include.md](includes/allow-saving-history-include.md)]
-
-## Allow search engine customization
-[!INCLUDE [allow-search-engine-customization-include.md](includes/allow-search-engine-customization-include.md)]
-
-## Allow sideloading of Extensions
-[!INCLUDE [allow-sideloading-extensions-include.md](includes/allow-sideloading-extensions-include.md)]
-
-## Allow web content on New Tab page
-[!INCLUDE [allow-web-content-new-tab-page-include.md](includes/allow-web-content-new-tab-page-include.md)]
-
-## Always show the Books Library in Microsoft Edge
-[!INCLUDE [always-enable-book-library-include.md](includes/always-enable-book-library-include.md)]
-
-## Configure additional search engines
-[!INCLUDE [configure-additional-search-engines-include.md](includes/configure-additional-search-engines-include.md)]
-
-## Configure Autofill
-[!INCLUDE [configure-autofill-include.md](includes/configure-autofill-include.md)]
-
-## Configure collection of browsing data for Microsoft 365 Analytics
-[!INCLUDE [configure-browser-telemetry-for-m365-analytics-include](includes/configure-browser-telemetry-for-m365-analytics-include.md)]
-
-## Configure cookies
-[!INCLUDE [configure-cookies-include.md](includes/configure-cookies-include.md)]
-
-## Configure Do Not Track
-[!INCLUDE [configure-do-not-track-include.md](includes/configure-do-not-track-include.md)]
-
-## Configure Favorites
-[!INCLUDE [configure-favorites-include.md](includes/configure-favorites-include.md)]
-
-## Configure Favorites Bar
-[!INCLUDE [configure-favorites-bar-include.md](includes/configure-favorites-bar-include.md)]
-
-## Configure Home Button
-[!INCLUDE [configure-home-button-include.md](includes/configure-home-button-include.md)]
-
-## Configure kiosk mode
-[!INCLUDE [configure-microsoft-edge-kiosk-mode-include.md](includes/configure-microsoft-edge-kiosk-mode-include.md)]
-
-## Configure kiosk reset after idle timeout
-[!INCLUDE [configure-edge-kiosk-reset-idle-timeout-include.md](includes/configure-edge-kiosk-reset-idle-timeout-include.md)]
-
-## Configure Open Microsoft Edge With
-[!INCLUDE [configure-open-edge-with-include.md](includes/configure-open-edge-with-include.md)]
-
-## Configure Password Manager
-[!INCLUDE [configure-password-manager-include.md](includes/configure-password-manager-include.md)]
-
-## Configure Pop-up Blocker
-[!INCLUDE [configure-pop-up-blocker-include.md](includes/configure-pop-up-blocker-include.md)]
-
-## Configure search suggestions in Address bar
-[!INCLUDE [configure-search-suggestions-address-bar-include.md](includes/configure-search-suggestions-address-bar-include.md)]
-
-## Configure Start pages
-[!INCLUDE [configure-start-pages-include.md](includes/configure-start-pages-include.md)]
-
-## Configure the Adobe Flash Click-to-Run setting
-[!INCLUDE [configure-adobe-flash-click-to-run-include.md](includes/configure-adobe-flash-click-to-run-include.md)]
-
-## Configure the Enterprise Mode Site List
-[!INCLUDE [configure-enterprise-mode-site-list-include.md](includes/configure-enterprise-mode-site-list-include.md)]
-
-## Configure Windows Defender SmartScreen
-[!INCLUDE [configure-windows-defender-smartscreen-include.md](includes/configure-windows-defender-smartscreen-include.md)]
-
-## Disable lockdown of Start pages
-[!INCLUDE [disable-lockdown-of-start-pages-include.md](includes/disable-lockdown-of-start-pages-include.md)]
-
-## Do not sync
-[!INCLUDE [do-not-sync-include.md](includes/do-not-sync-include.md)]
-
-## Do not sync browser settings
-[!INCLUDE [do-not-sync-browser-settings-include.md](includes/do-not-sync-browser-settings-include.md)]
-
-## Keep favorites in sync between Internet Explorer and Microsoft Edge
-[!INCLUDE [keep-fav-sync-ie-edge-include.md](includes/keep-fav-sync-ie-edge-include.md)]
-
-## Prevent access to the about:flags page
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-access-about-flag-include.md](includes/prevent-access-about-flag-include.md)]
-
-## Prevent bypassing Windows Defender SmartScreen prompts for files
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-bypassing-win-defender-files-include.md](includes/prevent-bypassing-win-defender-files-include.md)]
-
-## Prevent bypassing Windows Defender SmartScreen prompts for sites
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-bypassing-win-defender-sites-include.md](includes/prevent-bypassing-win-defender-sites-include.md)]
-
-## Prevent certificate error overrides
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-certificate-error-overrides-include.md](includes/prevent-certificate-error-overrides-include.md)]
-
-## Prevent changes to Favorites on Microsoft Edge
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-changes-to-favorites-include.md](includes/prevent-changes-to-favorites-include.md)]
-
-## Prevent Microsoft Edge from gathering Live Tile information when pinning a site to Start
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-live-tile-pinning-start-include](includes/prevent-live-tile-pinning-start-include.md)]
-
-## Prevent the First Run webpage from opening on Microsoft Edge
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-first-run-webpage-open-include.md](includes/prevent-first-run-webpage-open-include.md)]
-
-## Prevent turning off required extensions
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-turning-off-required-extensions-include.md](includes/prevent-turning-off-required-extensions-include.md)]
-
-## Prevent users from turning on browser syncing
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-users-to-turn-on-browser-syncing-include](includes/prevent-users-to-turn-on-browser-syncing-include.md)]
-
-## Prevent using Localhost IP address for WebRTC
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-localhost-address-for-webrtc-include.md](includes/prevent-localhost-address-for-webrtc-include.md)]
-
-## Provision Favorites
-[!INCLUDE [provision-favorites-include](includes/provision-favorites-include.md)]
-
-## Send all intranet sites to Internet Explorer 11
-[!INCLUDE [send-all-intranet-sites-ie-include.md](includes/send-all-intranet-sites-ie-include.md)]
-
-## Set default search engine
-[!INCLUDE [set-default-search-engine-include.md](includes/set-default-search-engine-include.md)]
-
-## Set Home Button URL
-[!INCLUDE [set-home-button-url-include](includes/set-home-button-url-include.md)]
-
-## Set New Tab page URL
-[!INCLUDE [set-new-tab-url-include.md](includes/set-new-tab-url-include.md)]
-
-## Show message when opening sites in Internet Explorer
-[!INCLUDE [show-message-opening-sites-ie-include](includes/show-message-opening-sites-ie-include.md)]
-
-## Unlock Home Button
-[!INCLUDE [unlock-home-button-include.md](includes/unlock-home-button-include.md)]
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-- [Mobile Device Management (MDM) settings](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-configuration-service-provider)
-- [Group Policy and the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=617921)
-- [Group Policy and the Local Group Policy Editor](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=617922)
-- [Group Policy and the Advanced Group Policy Management (AGPM)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=617923)
-- [Group Policy and Windows PowerShell](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=617924).
diff --git a/browsers/edge/change-history-for-microsoft-edge.md b/browsers/edge/change-history-for-microsoft-edge.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 2529a88fea..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/change-history-for-microsoft-edge.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,104 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Change history for Microsoft Edge (Microsoft Edge for IT Pros)
-description: Discover what's new and updated in the Microsoft Edge for both Windows 10 and Windows 10 Mobile.
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: reference
-ms.mktglfcycl: explore
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.author: dansimp
----
-
-# Change history for Microsoft Edge
-Discover what's new and updated in the Microsoft Edge for both Windows 10 and Windows 10 Mobile.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You've reached the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 45 and earlier. To see the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later, go to the [Microsoft Edge documentation landing page](https://docs.microsoft.com/DeployEdge/).
-
-#### [2018](#tab/2018/)
-## October 2018
-
-The Microsoft Edge team introduces new group policies and MDM settings for Microsoft Edge on Windows 10. The new policies let you enable/disable
-full-screen mode, printing, favorites bar, saving history. You can also prevent certificate error overrides, and configure the New Tab page, Home button, and startup options, as well as manage extensions.
-
-We have discontinued the **Configure Favorites** group policy, so use the [Provision Favorites](available-policies.md#provision-favorites) policy instead.
-
->>You can find the Microsoft Edge Group Policy settings in the following location of the Group Policy Editor unless otherwise noted in the policy:
->>
->> **Computer Configuration\\Administrative Templates\\Windows Components\\Microsoft Edge\\**
-
-
-
-| **New or updated** | **Group Policy** | **Description** |
-|--------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| New | [Allow fullscreen mode](group-policies/browser-settings-management-gp.md#allow-fullscreen-mode) | [!INCLUDE [allow-fullscreen-mode-shortdesc](shortdesc/allow-fullscreen-mode-shortdesc.md)] |
-| New | [Allow Microsoft Edge to pre-launch at Windows startup, when the system is idle, and each time Microsoft Edge is closed](group-policies/prelaunch-preload-gp.md#allow-microsoft-edge-to-pre-launch-at-windows-startup-when-the-system-is-idle-and-each-time-microsoft-edge-is-closed) | [!INCLUDE [allow-prelaunch-shortdesc](shortdesc/allow-prelaunch-shortdesc.md)] |
-| New | [Allow Microsoft Edge to load the Start and New Tab page at Windows startup and each time Microsoft Edge is closed](group-policies/prelaunch-preload-gp.md#allow-microsoft-edge-to-load-the-start-and-new-tab-page-at-windows-startup-and-each-time-microsoft-edge-is-closed) | [!INCLUDE [allow-tab-preloading-shortdesc](shortdesc/allow-tab-preloading-shortdesc.md)] |
-| New | [Allow printing](group-policies/browser-settings-management-gp.md#allow-printing) | [!INCLUDE [allow-printing-shortdesc](shortdesc/allow-printing-shortdesc.md)] |
-| New | [Allow Saving History](group-policies/browser-settings-management-gp.md#allow-saving-history) | [!INCLUDE [allow-saving-history-shortdesc](shortdesc/allow-saving-history-shortdesc.md)] |
-| New | [Allow sideloading of Extensions](group-policies/extensions-management-gp.md#allow-sideloading-of-extensions) | [!INCLUDE [allow-sideloading-of-extensions-shortdesc](shortdesc/allow-sideloading-of-extensions-shortdesc.md)] |
-| New | [Configure collection of browsing data for Microsoft 365 Analytics](group-policies/telemetry-management-gp.md#configure-collection-of-browsing-data-for-microsoft-365-analytics) | [!INCLUDE [configure-browser-telemetry-for-m365-analytics-shortdesc](shortdesc/configure-browser-telemetry-for-m365-analytics-shortdesc.md)] |
-| New | [Configure Favorites Bar](group-policies/favorites-management-gp.md#configure-favorites-bar) | [!INCLUDE [configure-favorites-bar-shortdesc](shortdesc/configure-favorites-bar-shortdesc.md)] |
-| New | [Configure Home Button](group-policies/home-button-gp.md#configure-home-button) | [!INCLUDE [configure-home-button-shortdesc](shortdesc/configure-home-button-shortdesc.md)] |
-| New | [Configure kiosk mode](available-policies.md#configure-kiosk-mode) | [!INCLUDE [configure-kiosk-mode-shortdesc](shortdesc/configure-kiosk-mode-shortdesc.md)] |
-| New | [Configure kiosk reset after idle timeout](available-policies.md#configure-kiosk-reset-after-idle-timeout) | [!INCLUDE [configure-kiosk-reset-after-idle-timeout-shortdesc](shortdesc/configure-kiosk-reset-after-idle-timeout-shortdesc.md)] |
-| New | [Configure Open Microsoft Edge With](group-policies/start-pages-gp.md#configure-open-microsoft-edge-with) | [!INCLUDE [configure-open-microsoft-edge-with-shortdesc](shortdesc/configure-open-microsoft-edge-with-shortdesc.md)] |
-| New | [Prevent certificate error overrides](group-policies/security-privacy-management-gp.md#prevent-certificate-error-overrides) | [!INCLUDE [prevent-certificate-error-overrides-shortdesc](shortdesc/prevent-certificate-error-overrides-shortdesc.md)] |
-| New | [Prevent users from turning on browser syncing](group-policies/sync-browser-settings-gp.md#prevent-users-from-turning-on-browser-syncing) | [!INCLUDE [prevent-users-to-turn-on-browser-syncing-shortdesc](shortdesc/prevent-users-to-turn-on-browser-syncing-shortdesc.md)] |
-| New | [Prevent turning off required extensions](group-policies/extensions-management-gp.md#prevent-turning-off-required-extensions) | [!INCLUDE [prevent-turning-off-required-extensions-shortdesc](shortdesc/prevent-turning-off-required-extensions-shortdesc.md)] |
-| New | [Set Home Button URL](group-policies/home-button-gp.md#set-home-button-url) | [!INCLUDE [set-home-button-url-shortdesc](shortdesc/set-home-button-url-shortdesc.md)] |
-| New | [Set New Tab page URL](group-policies/new-tab-page-settings-gp.md#set-new-tab-page-url) | [!INCLUDE [set-new-tab-url-shortdesc](shortdesc/set-new-tab-url-shortdesc.md)] |
-| Updated | [Show message when opening sites in Internet Explorer](group-policies/interoperability-enterprise-guidance-gp.md#show-message-when-opening-sites-in-internet-explorer) | [!INCLUDE [show-message-when-opening-sites-in-ie-shortdesc](shortdesc/show-message-when-opening-sites-in-ie-shortdesc.md)] |
-| New | [Unlock Home Button](group-policies/home-button-gp.md#unlock-home-button) | [!INCLUDE [unlock-home-button-shortdesc](shortdesc/unlock-home-button-shortdesc.md)] |
-
-#### [2017](#tab/2017/)
-## September 2017
-
-|New or changed topic | Description |
-|---------------------|-------------|
-|[Microsoft Edge - Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) for IT Pros](microsoft-edge-faq.md) | New |
-
-## February 2017
-
-|New or changed topic | Description |
-|----------------------|-------------|
-|[Available Group Policy and Mobile Device Management (MDM) settings for Microsoft Edge](available-policies.md) |Added new Group Policy and MDM settings for the Windows Insider Program. Reformatted for easier readability outside of scrolling table. |
-
-
-#### [2016](#tab/2016/)
-## November 2016
-
-|New or changed topic | Description |
-|----------------------|-------------|
-|[Browser: Microsoft Edge and Internet Explorer 11](enterprise-guidance-using-microsoft-edge-and-ie11.md) |Added the infographic image and a download link.|
-|[Use Enterprise Mode to improve compatibility](emie-to-improve-compatibility.md) |Added a note about the 65 second wait before checking for a newer version of the site list .XML file. |
-|[Available policies for Microsoft Edge](available-policies.md) |Added notes to the Configure the Enterprise Mode Site List Group Policy and the EnterpriseModeSiteList MDM policy about the 65 second wait before checking for a newer version of the site list .XML file. |
-|Microsoft Edge - Deployment Guide for IT Pros |Added a link to the Microsoft Edge infographic, helping you to evaluate the potential impact of using Microsoft Edge in your organization. |
-|[Browser: Microsoft Edge and Internet Explorer 11](enterprise-guidance-using-microsoft-edge-and-ie11.md) |Added a link to the Microsoft Edge infographic, helping you to evaluate the potential impact of using Microsoft Edge in your organization. |
-
-## July 2016
-
-|New or changed topic | Description |
-|----------------------|-------------|
-|[Microsoft Edge requirements and language support](hardware-and-software-requirements.md)| Updated to include a note about the Long Term Servicing Branch (LTSB). |
-|[Enterprise guidance about using Microsoft Edge and Internet Explorer 11](enterprise-guidance-using-microsoft-edge-and-ie11.md) | Content moved from What's New section. |
-|[Available policies for Microsoft Edge](available-policies.md) |Updated |
-
-
-## June 2016
-
-|New or changed topic | Description |
-|----------------------|-------------|
-|[Security enhancements for Microsoft Edge](security-enhancements-microsoft-edge.md) |New |
-
-## May 2016
-
-|New or changed topic | Description |
-|----------------------|-------------|
-|[Available Policies for Microsoft Edge](available-policies.md) | Added new policies and the Supported versions column for Windows 10 Insider Preview. |
-
-* * *
diff --git a/browsers/edge/docfx.json b/browsers/edge/docfx.json
index 640106062b..d77b68f7fb 100644
--- a/browsers/edge/docfx.json
+++ b/browsers/edge/docfx.json
@@ -42,9 +42,18 @@
"folder_relative_path_in_docset": "./"
}
},
- "titleSuffix": "Edge"
+ "titleSuffix": "Edge",
+ "contributors_to_exclude": [
+ "rjagiewich",
+ "traya1",
+ "rmca14",
+ "claydetels19",
+ "jborsecnik",
+ "tiburd",
+ "garycentric"
+ ]
},
- "externalReference": [],
+ "fileMetadata": {},
"template": "op.html",
"dest": "browsers/edge",
"markdownEngineName": "markdig"
diff --git a/browsers/edge/edge-technical-demos.md b/browsers/edge/edge-technical-demos.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d8eb14bd02..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/edge-technical-demos.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft Edge training and demonstrations
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-description: Get access to training and demonstrations for Microsoft Edge.
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: article
-ms.manager: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: high
----
-
-# Microsoft Edge training and demonstrations
-
-Explore security and compatibility features of Microsoft Edge, and get tips to increase manageability, productivity, and support for legacy apps.
-
-## Virtual labs
-
-Microsoft Hands-On Labs let you experience a software product or technology using a cloud-based private virtual machine environment. Get free access to one or more virtual machines, with no additional software or setup required.
-
-Check out the **Use Internet Explorer Enterprise Mode to fix compatibility issues (WS00137)" on the [self-paced labs site](https://www.microsoft.com/handsonlabs/SelfPacedLabs/?storyGuid=e4155067-2c7e-4b46-8496-eca38bedca02).
-
-## Features and functionality
-
-Find out more about new and improved features of Microsoft Edge, and how you can leverage them to bring increased productivity, security, manageability, and support for legacy apps to your secure, modern desktop.
-
-### Building a faster browser: Behind the scenes improvements in Microsoft Edge
-
-Get a behind the scenes look at Microsoft Edge and the improvements we've made to make it faster and more efficient.
-
-> [!VIDEO https://channel9.msdn.com/events/webplatformsummit/microsoft-edge-web-summit-2017/es14/player]
-
-### Building a safer browser: Four guards to keep users safe
-
-Learn about our security strategy and how we use the Four Guards to keep your users safe while they browse the Internet.
-
-> [!VIDEO https://channel9.msdn.com/events/webplatformsummit/microsoft-edge-web-summit-2017/es03/player]
diff --git a/browsers/edge/emie-to-improve-compatibility.md b/browsers/edge/emie-to-improve-compatibility.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 40444da9f6..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/emie-to-improve-compatibility.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,65 +0,0 @@
----
-description: If you're having problems with Microsoft Edge, this topic tells how to use the Enterprise Mode site list to automatically open sites using IE11.
-ms.assetid: 89c75f7e-35ca-4ca8-96fa-b3b498b53bE4
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: reference
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.pagetype: appcompat
-title: Use Enterprise Mode to improve compatibility (Microsoft Edge for IT Pros)
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Use Enterprise Mode to improve compatibility
-
-> Applies to: Windows 10
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You've reached the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 45 and earlier. To see the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later, go to the [Microsoft Edge documentation landing page](https://docs.microsoft.com/DeployEdge/).
-
-If you have specific websites and apps that have compatibility problems with Microsoft Edge, you can use the Enterprise Mode site list so that the websites open in Internet Explorer 11 automatically. Additionally, if you know that your intranet sites aren't going to work correctly with Microsoft Edge, you can set all intranet sites to automatically open using IE11 with the **Send all intranet sites to IE** group policy.
-
-Using Enterprise Mode means that you can continue to use Microsoft Edge as your default browser, while also ensuring that your apps continue working on IE11.
-
-
-[!INCLUDE [interoperability-goals-enterprise-guidance](../includes/interoperability-goals-enterprise-guidance.md)]
-
-## Enterprise guidance
-Microsoft Edge is the default browser experience for Windows 10 and Windows 10 Mobile. However, if you're running web apps that rely on ActiveX controls, continue using Internet Explorer 11 for the web apps to work correctly. If you don't have IE11 installed anymore, you can download it from the Microsoft Store or the [Internet Explorer 11 download page](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?linkid=290956). Also, if you use an earlier version of Internet Explorer, upgrade to IE11.
-
-Windows 7, Windows 8, and Windows 10 support IE11 so that you can continue using legacy apps even as you migrate to Windows 10 and Microsoft Edge.
-
-If you're having trouble deciding whether Microsoft Edge is right for your organization, then take a look at the infographic about the potential impact of using Microsoft Edge in an organization.
-
-
-[Click to enlarge](img-microsoft-edge-infographic-lg.md)
-[Click to download image](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=53892)
-
-
-|Microsoft Edge |IE11 |
-|---------|---------|
-|Microsoft Edge takes you beyond just browsing to actively engaging with the web through features like Web Note, Reading View, and Cortana.
**Web Note.** Microsoft Edge lets you annotate, highlight, and call things out directly on web pages.
**Reading view.** Microsoft Edge lets you enjoy and print online articles in a distraction-free layout optimized for your screen size. While in reading view, you can also save web pages or PDF files to your reading list, for later viewing.
**Cortana.** Enabled by default in Microsoft Edge, Cortana lets you highlight words for more info and gives you one-click access to things like restaurant reservations and reviews, without leaving the webpage.
**Compatibility and security.** Microsoft Edge lets you continue to use IE11 for sites that are on your corporate intranet or that are included on your Enterprise Mode Site List. You must use IE11 to run older, less secure technology, such as ActiveX controls.
|IE11 offers enterprises additional security, manageability, performance, backward compatibility, and modern standards support.
**Backward compatibility.** IE11 supports 9 document modes that include high-fidelity emulations for older versions of IE.
**Modern web standards.** IE11 supports modern web technologies like HTML5, CSS3, and WebGL, which help to ensure today's modern websites and apps work just as well as your old, legacy websites and apps. **IE11 does not support some modern CSS properties, JavaScript modules and certain APIs.**
**More secure.** IE11 was designed with security in mind and is more secure than older versions. Using security features like Windows Defender SmartScreen and Enhanced Protected Mode can help IE11 reduce your risk.
**Faster.** IE11 is significantly faster than previous versions of Internet Explorer, taking advantage of network optimization and hardware-accelerated text, graphics, and JavaScript rendering.
**Easier migration to Windows 10.** IE11 is the only version of IE that runs on Windows 7, Windows 8.1, and Windows 10. Upgrading to IE11 on Windows 7 can also help your organization support the next generation of software, services, and devices.
**Administration.** IE11 can use the Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK) 11 or MSIs for deployment and includes more than 1,600 Group Policies and preferences for granular control.
|
-
-
-## Configure the Enterprise Mode Site List
-[!INCLUDE [Available policy options](includes/configure-enterprise-mode-site-list-include.md)]
-
-
-## Related topics
-- [Blog: How Microsoft Edge and Internet Explorer 11 on Windows 10 work better together in the Enterprise](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkID=624035)
-- [Enterprise Mode for Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?linkid=618377)
-- [Download the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.2)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=716853)
-- [Download the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkID=394378)
-- [Use the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](https://docs.microsoft.com/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/use-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager)
-- [Web Application Compatibility Lab Kit for Internet Explorer 11](https://technet.microsoft.com/browser/mt612809.aspx)
-- [Download Internet Explorer 11](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?linkid=290956)
-- [Microsoft Edge - Deployment Guide for IT Pros](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/microsoft-edge/index)
-- [Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) - Deployment Guide for IT Pros](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=760644)
-- [Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) - Administrator's Guide](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=760646)
-- [Internet Explorer 11 - FAQ for IT Pros](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/internet-explorer/ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11)
diff --git a/browsers/edge/group-policies/address-bar-settings-gp.md b/browsers/edge/group-policies/address-bar-settings-gp.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d718092a90..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/group-policies/address-bar-settings-gp.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,37 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft Edge - Address bar group policies
-description: Microsoft Edge, by default, shows a list of search suggestions in the address bar. You can minimize network connections from Microsoft Edge to Microsoft services, hiding the functionality of the Address bar drop-down list.
-services:
-keywords:
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-ms.topic: reference
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.mktglfcycl: explore
-ms.sitesec: library
----
-
-# Address bar
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You've reached the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 45 and earlier. To see the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later, go to the [Microsoft Edge documentation landing page](https://docs.microsoft.com/DeployEdge/).
-
-Microsoft Edge, by default, shows a list of search suggestions in the address bar. You can minimize network connections from Microsoft Edge to Microsoft services by hiding the functionality of the Address bar drop-down list.
-
-You can find the Microsoft Edge Group Policy settings in the following location of the Group Policy Editor unless otherwise noted in the policy:
-
- **Computer Configuration\\Administrative Templates\\Windows Components\\Microsoft Edge\\**
-
-
-
-## Allow Address bar drop-down list suggestions
-[!INCLUDE [allow-address-bar-suggestions-include.md](../includes/allow-address-bar-suggestions-include.md)]
-
-## Configure search suggestions in Address bar
-[!INCLUDE [configure-search-suggestions-address-bar-include.md](../includes/configure-search-suggestions-address-bar-include.md)]
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/group-policies/adobe-settings-gp.md b/browsers/edge/group-policies/adobe-settings-gp.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7d9d3e6652..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/group-policies/adobe-settings-gp.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft Edge - Adobe Flash group policies
-description: Adobe Flash Player still has a significant presence on the internet, such as digital ads. However, open standards, such as HTML5, provide many of the capabilities and functionalities becoming an alternative for content on the web. With Adobe no longer supporting Flash after 2020, Microsoft has started to phase out Flash from Microsoft Edge by adding the Configure the Adobe Flash Click-to-Run setting group policy giving you a way to control the list of websites that have permission to run Adobe Flash content.
-services:
-keywords:
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-ms.topic: reference
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.mktglfcycl: explore
-ms.sitesec: library
----
-
-# Adobe Flash
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You've reached the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 45 and earlier. To see the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later, go to the [Microsoft Edge documentation landing page](https://docs.microsoft.com/DeployEdge/).
-
-Adobe Flash Player still has a significant presence on the internet, such as digital ads. However, open standards, such as HTML5, provide many of the capabilities and functionalities becoming an alternative for content on the web. With Adobe no longer supporting Flash after 2020, Microsoft has started to phase out Flash from Microsoft Edge by adding the [Configure the Adobe Flash Click-to-Run setting](#configure-the-adobe-flash-click-to-run-setting) group policy giving you a way to control the list of websites that have permission to run Adobe Flash content.
-
-To learn more about Microsoft’s plan for phasing out Flash from Microsoft Edge and Internet Explorer, see [The End of an Era — Next Steps for Adobe Flash]( https://blogs.windows.com/msedgedev/2017/07/25/flash-on-windows-timeline/#3Bcc3QjRw0l7XsZ4.97) (blog article).
-
-
-You can find the Microsoft Edge Group Policy settings in the following location of the Group Policy Editor unless otherwise noted in the policy:
-
- **Computer Configuration\\Administrative Templates\\Windows Components\\Microsoft Edge\\**
-
-## Allow Adobe Flash
-[!INCLUDE [allow-adobe-flash-include.md](../includes/allow-adobe-flash-include.md)]
-
-
-## Configure the Adobe Flash Click-to-Run setting
-[!INCLUDE [configure-adobe-flash-click-to-run-include.md](../includes/configure-adobe-flash-click-to-run-include.md)]
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/group-policies/books-library-management-gp.md b/browsers/edge/group-policies/books-library-management-gp.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b2689d9638..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/group-policies/books-library-management-gp.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft Edge - Books Library group policies
-description: Microsoft Edge decreases the amount of storage used by book files by downloading them to a shared folder. You can also allow Microsoft Edge to update the configuration data for the library automatically.
-services:
-keywords:
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-ms.topic: reference
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.mktglfcycl: explore
-ms.sitesec: library
----
-
-# Books Library
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You've reached the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 45 and earlier. To see the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later, go to the [Microsoft Edge documentation landing page](https://docs.microsoft.com/DeployEdge/).
-
-Microsoft Edge decreases the amount of storage used by book files by downloading them to a shared folder in Windows. You can configure Microsoft Edge to update the configuration data for the library automatically or gather diagnostic data, such as usage data.
-
-
-You can find the Microsoft Edge Group Policy settings in the following location of the Group Policy Editor unless otherwise noted in the policy:
-
- **Computer Configuration\\Administrative Templates\\Windows Components\\Microsoft Edge\\**
-
-## Allow a shared books folder
-[!INCLUDE [allow-shared-folder-books-include.md](../includes/allow-shared-folder-books-include.md)]
-
-## Allow configuration updates for the Books Library
-[!INCLUDE [allow-config-updates-books-include.md](../includes/allow-config-updates-books-include.md)]
-
-## Allow extended telemetry for the Books tab
-[!INCLUDE [allow-ext-telemetry-books-tab-include.md](../includes/allow-ext-telemetry-books-tab-include.md)]
-
-## Always show the Books Library in Microsoft Edge
-[!INCLUDE [always-enable-book-library-include.md](../includes/always-enable-book-library-include.md)]
diff --git a/browsers/edge/group-policies/browser-settings-management-gp.md b/browsers/edge/group-policies/browser-settings-management-gp.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 2301806f5f..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/group-policies/browser-settings-management-gp.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,56 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft Edge - Browser experience group policies
-description: Not only do the other Microsoft Edge group policies enhance the browsing experience, but we must also talk about some of the most common or somewhat common browsing experiences. For example, printing web content is a common browsing experience. However, if you want to prevent users from printing web content, Microsoft Edge has a group policy that allows you to prevent printing.
-services:
-keywords:
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-ms.topic: reference
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.mktglfcycl: explore
-ms.sitesec: library
----
-
-# Browser experience
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You've reached the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 45 and earlier. To see the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later, go to the [Microsoft Edge documentation landing page](https://docs.microsoft.com/DeployEdge/).
-
-Not only do the other Microsoft Edge group policies enhance the browsing experience, but we also want to mention some of the other and common browsing experiences. For example, printing web content is a common browsing experience. However, if you want to prevent users from printing web content, Microsoft Edge has a group policy that allows you to prevent printing. The same goes for Pop-up Blocker; Microsoft Edge has a group policy that lets you prevent pop-up windows or let users choose to use Pop-up Blocker. You can use any one of the following group policies to continue enhancing the browsing experience for your users.
-
-
-
-You can find the Microsoft Edge Group Policy settings in the following location of the Group Policy Editor unless otherwise noted in the policy:
-
- **Computer Configuration\\Administrative Templates\\Windows Components\\Microsoft Edge\\**
-
-## Allow clearing browsing data on exit
-[!INCLUDE [allow-clearing-browsing-data-include](../includes/allow-clearing-browsing-data-include.md)]
-
-## Allow fullscreen mode
-[!INCLUDE [allow-full-screen-include](../includes/allow-full-screen-include.md)]
-
-## Allow printing
-[!INCLUDE [allow-printing-include](../includes/allow-printing-include.md)]
-
-## Allow Saving History
-[!INCLUDE [allow-saving-history-include](../includes/allow-saving-history-include.md)]
-
-## Configure Autofill
-[!INCLUDE [configure-autofill-include](../includes/configure-autofill-include.md)]
-
-## Configure Pop-up Blocker
-[!INCLUDE [configure-pop-up-blocker-include](../includes/configure-pop-up-blocker-include.md)]
-
-## Do not sync
-[!INCLUDE [do-not-sync-include](../includes/do-not-sync-include.md)]
-
-To learn about the policies to sync the browser settings, see [Sync browser settings](sync-browser-settings-gp.md).
-
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/group-policies/developer-settings-gp.md b/browsers/edge/group-policies/developer-settings-gp.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 67c6d1284c..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/group-policies/developer-settings-gp.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft Edge - Developer tools
-description: Microsoft Edge, by default, allows users to use the F12 developer tools as well as access the about:flags page. You can prevent users from using the F12 developer tools or from accessing the about:flags page.
-services:
-keywords:
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-ms.topic: reference
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.mktglfcycl: explore
-ms.sitesec: library
----
-
-# Developer tools
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You've reached the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 45 and earlier. To see the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later, go to the [Microsoft Edge documentation landing page](https://docs.microsoft.com/DeployEdge/).
-
-Microsoft Edge, by default, allows users to use the F12 developer tools as well as access the about:flags page. You can prevent users from using the F12 developer tools or from accessing the about:flags page.
-
-You can find the Microsoft Edge Group Policy settings in the following location of the Group Policy Editor unless otherwise noted in the policy:
-
- **Computer Configuration\\Administrative Templates\\Windows Components\\Microsoft Edge\\**
-
-## Allow Developer Tools
-[!INCLUDE [allow-dev-tools-include](../includes/allow-dev-tools-include.md)]
-
-## Prevent access to the about:flags page
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-access-about-flag-include](../includes/prevent-access-about-flag-include.md)]
diff --git a/browsers/edge/group-policies/extensions-management-gp.md b/browsers/edge/group-policies/extensions-management-gp.md
deleted file mode 100644
index dc9b9406b4..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/group-policies/extensions-management-gp.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,37 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft Edge - Extensions group policies
-description: Currently, Microsoft Edge allows users to add or personalize, and uninstall extensions. You can prevent users from uninstalling extensions or sideloading of extensions, which does not prevent sideloading using Add-AppxPackage via PowerShell. Allowing sideloading of extensions installs and runs unverified extensions.
-services:
-keywords:
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-ms.topic: reference
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.mktglfcycl: explore
-ms.sitesec: library
----
-
-# Extensions
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You've reached the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 45 and earlier. To see the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later, go to the [Microsoft Edge documentation landing page](https://docs.microsoft.com/DeployEdge/).
-
-Currently, Microsoft Edge allows users to add or personalize, and uninstall extensions. You can prevent users from uninstalling extensions or sideloading of extensions, which does not prevent sideloading using Add-AppxPackage via PowerShell. Allowing sideloading of extensions installs and runs unverified extensions.
-
-You can find the Microsoft Edge Group Policy settings in the following location of the Group Policy Editor unless otherwise noted in the policy:
-
- **Computer Configuration\\Administrative Templates\\Windows Components\\Microsoft Edge\\**
-
-## Allow Extensions
-[!INCLUDE [allow-extensions-include](../includes/allow-extensions-include.md)]
-
-## Allow sideloading of extensions
-[!INCLUDE [allow-sideloading-extensions-include](../includes/allow-sideloading-extensions-include.md)]
-
-## Prevent turning off required extensions
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-turning-off-required-extensions-include](../includes/prevent-turning-off-required-extensions-include.md)]
diff --git a/browsers/edge/group-policies/favorites-management-gp.md b/browsers/edge/group-policies/favorites-management-gp.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 9a022da181..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/group-policies/favorites-management-gp.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft Edge - Favorites group policies
-description: Configure Microsoft Edge to either show or hide the favorites bar on all pages. Microsoft Edge hides the favorites bar by default but shows the favorites bar on the Start and New tab pages. Also, by default, the favorites bar toggle, in Settings, is set to Off but enabled allowing users to make changes.
-services:
-keywords:
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-ms.topic: reference
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.mktglfcycl: explore
-ms.sitesec: library
----
-
-# Favorites
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You've reached the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 45 and earlier. To see the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later, go to the [Microsoft Edge documentation landing page](https://docs.microsoft.com/DeployEdge/).
-
-You can customize the favorites bar, for example, you can turn off features such as Save a Favorite and Import settings, and hide or show the favorites bar on all pages. Another customization you can make is provisioning a standard list of favorites, including folders, to appear in addition to the user’s favorites. If it’s important to keep the favorites in both IE11 and Microsoft Edge synced, you can turn on syncing where changes to the list of favorites in one browser reflect in the other.
-
->[!TIP]
->You can find the Favorites under C:\\Users\\<_username_>\\Favorites.
-
-You can find the Microsoft Edge Group Policy settings in the following location of the Group Policy Editor unless otherwise noted in the policy:
-
- **Computer Configuration\\Administrative Templates\\Windows Components\\Microsoft Edge\\**
-
-## Configure Favorites Bar
-[!INCLUDE [configure-favorites-bar-include](../includes/configure-favorites-bar-include.md)]
-
-## Keep favorites in sync between Internet Explorer and Microsoft Edge
-[!INCLUDE [keep-fav-sync-ie-edge-include](../includes/keep-fav-sync-ie-edge-include.md)]
-
-## Prevent changes to Favorites on Microsoft Edge
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-changes-to-favorites-include](../includes/prevent-changes-to-favorites-include.md)]
-
-## Provision Favorites
-[!INCLUDE [provision-favorites-include](../includes/provision-favorites-include.md)]
diff --git a/browsers/edge/group-policies/home-button-gp.md b/browsers/edge/group-policies/home-button-gp.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8f498a5d58..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/group-policies/home-button-gp.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft Edge - Home button group policies
-description: Microsoft Edge shows the home button, by default, and by clicking it the Start page loads. With the relevant Home button policies, you can configure the Home button to load the New tab page or a specific page. You can also configure Microsoft Edge to hide the home button.
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.mktglfcycl: explore
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.topic: reference
----
-
-# Home button
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You've reached the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 45 and earlier. To see the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later, go to the [Microsoft Edge documentation landing page](https://docs.microsoft.com/DeployEdge/).
-
-Microsoft Edge shows the home button, by default, and by clicking it the Start page loads. With the relevant Home button policies, you can configure the Home button to load the New tab page or a specific page. You can also configure Microsoft Edge to hide the home button.
-
-## Relevant group policies
-
-- [Configure Home Button](#configure-home-button)
-- [Set Home Button URL](#set-home-button-url)
-- [Unlock Home Button](#unlock-home-button)
-
-You can find the Microsoft Edge Group Policy settings in the following location of the Group Policy Editor unless otherwise noted in the policy:
-
- **Computer Configuration\\Administrative Templates\\Windows Components\\Microsoft Edge\\**
-
-## Configuration options
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Configure Home Button
-[!INCLUDE [configure-home-button-include.md](../includes/configure-home-button-include.md)]
-
-## Set Home Button URL
-[!INCLUDE [set-home-button-url-include](../includes/set-home-button-url-include.md)]
-
-## Unlock Home Button
-[!INCLUDE [unlock-home-button-include.md](../includes/unlock-home-button-include.md)]
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/group-policies/index.yml b/browsers/edge/group-policies/index.yml
index cb590ce308..a1604c10e5 100644
--- a/browsers/edge/group-policies/index.yml
+++ b/browsers/edge/group-policies/index.yml
@@ -1,231 +1,79 @@
-### YamlMime:YamlDocument
+### YamlMime:Landing
-documentType: LandingData
-
-title: Microsoft Edge Legacy group policies
+title: Microsoft Edge Legacy group policies # < 60 chars
+summary: Microsoft Edge Legacy works with Group Policy and Microsoft Intune to help you manage your organization's computer settings. Group Policy objects (GPOs) can include registry-based Administrative Template policy settings, security settings, software deployment information, scripts, folder redirection, and preferences. # < 160 chars
metadata:
-
- document_id:
-
- title: Microsoft Edge Legacy group policies
-
- description: Learn how to configure group policies in Microsoft Edge Legacy on Windows 10.
-
- text: Some of the features in Microsoft Edge Legacy gives you the ability to set a custom URL for the New Tab page or Home button. Another new feature allows you to hide or show the Favorites bar, giving you more control over the favorites bar. (To see the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later, go to the [Microsoft Edge documentation landing page](https://docs.microsoft.com/DeployEdge/).)
-
+ title: Microsoft Edge Legacy # Required; page title displayed in search results. Include the brand. < 60 chars.
+ description: Find the tools and resources you need to help deploy and use Microsoft Edge in your organization. # Required; article description that is displayed in search results. < 160 chars.
keywords: Microsoft Edge Legacy, Windows 10, Windows 10 Mobile
-
ms.localizationpriority: medium
-
+ ms.prod: edge
author: shortpatti
-
ms.author: pashort
-
- ms.date: 10/02/2018
-
- ms.topic: article
-
+ ms.topic: landing-page
ms.devlang: na
-
-sections:
-
-- title:
-
-- items:
-
- - type: markdown
-
- text: (Note - You've reached the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 45 and earlier. To see the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later, go to the [Microsoft Edge documentation landing page](https://docs.microsoft.com/DeployEdge/).) Microsoft Edge Legacy works with Group Policy and Microsoft Intune to help you manage your organization's computer settings. Group Policy objects (GPOs) can include registry-based Administrative Template policy settings, security settings, software deployment information, scripts, folder redirection, and preferences.
-
-- items:
-
- - type: list
-
- style: cards
-
- className: cardsE
-
- columns: 3
-
- items:
-
- - href: https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-edge/deploy/group-policies/address-bar-settings-gp
-
- html:
Learn how you can configure Microsoft Edge to show search suggestions in the address bar.
Learn how Microsoft Edge kiosk mode works with assigned access to let IT administrators create a tailored browsing experience designed for kiosk devices.
View all available group policies for Microsoft Edge on Windows 10.
-
- image:
-
- src: https://docs.microsoft.com/media/common/i_policy.svg
-
- title: All group policies
+ ms.date: 08/28/2020 #Required; mm/dd/yyyy format.
+
+# linkListType: architecture | concept | deploy | download | get-started | how-to-guide | learn | overview | quickstart | reference | sample | tutorial | video | whats-new
+
+landingContent:
+# Cards and links should be based on top customer tasks or top subjects
+# Start card title with a verb
+ # Card (optional)
+ - title: What's new
+ linkLists:
+ - linkListType: whats-new
+ links:
+ - text: Documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later
+ url: /DeployEdge/
+ - text: Microsoft Edge Legacy desktop app will reach end of support on March 9, 2021
+ url: https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/t5/microsoft-365-blog/microsoft-365-apps-say-farewell-to-internet-explorer-11-and/ba-p/1591666
+
+ # Card (optional)
+ - title: Group policies configure guidance part 1
+ linkLists:
+ - linkListType: reference
+ links:
+ - text: All group policies
+ url: ../available-policies.md
+ - text: Address bar
+ url: ./address-bar-settings-gp.md
+ - text: Adobe Flash
+ url: ./adobe-settings-gp.md
+ - text: Books Library
+ url: ./books-library-management-gp.md
+ - text: Browser experience
+ url: ./browser-settings-management-gp.md
+ - text: Developer tools
+ url: ./developer-settings-gp.md
+ - text: Extensions
+ url: ./extensions-management-gp.md
+ - text: Favorites
+ url: ./favorites-management-gp.md
+ - text: Home button
+ url: ./home-button-gp.md
+
+ # Card (optional)
+ - title: Group policies configure guidance part 2
+ linkLists:
+ - linkListType: reference
+ links:
+ - text: Interoperability and enterprise mode
+ url: ./interoperability-enterprise-guidance-gp.md
+ - text: New Tab page
+ url: ./new-tab-page-settings-gp.md
+ - text: Kiosk mode deployment in Microsoft Edge
+ url: ../microsoft-edge-kiosk-mode-deploy.md
+ - text: Prelaunch Microsoft Edge and preload tabs
+ url: ./prelaunch-preload-gp.md
+ - text: Search engine customization
+ url: ./search-engine-customization-gp.md
+ - text: Security and privacy
+ url: ./security-privacy-management-gp.md
+ - text: Start page
+ url: ./start-pages-gp.md
+ - text: Sync browser
+ url: ./sync-browser-settings-gp.md
+ - text: Telemetry and data collection
+ url: ./telemetry-management-gp.md
diff --git a/browsers/edge/group-policies/interoperability-enterprise-guidance-gp.md b/browsers/edge/group-policies/interoperability-enterprise-guidance-gp.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f1a0929bb3..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/group-policies/interoperability-enterprise-guidance-gp.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,83 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft Edge - Interoperability and enterprise mode guidance
-description: Microsoft Edge lets you continue to use IE11 for sites that are on your corporate intranet or included on your Enterprise Mode Site List. If you are running web apps that continue to use ActiveX controls, x-ua-compatible headers, or legacy document modes, you need to keep running them in IE11. IE11 offers additional security, manageability, performance, backward compatibility, and modern standards support.
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.mktglfcycl: explore
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.topic: reference
----
-
-# Interoperability and enterprise mode guidance
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You've reached the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 45 and earlier. To see the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later, go to the [Microsoft Edge documentation landing page](https://docs.microsoft.com/DeployEdge/).
-
-Microsoft Edge is the default browser experience for Windows 10 and Windows 10 Mobile. However, Microsoft Edge lets you continue to use IE11 for sites that are on your corporate intranet or included on your Enterprise Mode Site List. If you are running web apps that continue to use ActiveX controls, x-ua-compatible headers, or legacy document modes, you need to keep running them in IE11. IE11 offers additional security, manageability, performance, backward compatibility, and modern standards support.
-
->[!TIP]
->If you are running an earlier version of Internet Explorer, we recommend upgrading to IE11, so that any legacy apps continue to work correctly.
-
-**Technology not supported by Microsoft Edge**
-
-
-- ActiveX controls
-
-- Browser Helper Objects
-
-- VBScript
-
-- x-ua-compatible headers
-
-- \ tags
-
-- Legacy document modes
-
-If you have specific websites and apps that you know have compatibility problems with Microsoft Edge, you can use the Enterprise Mode site list so that the websites automatically open using Internet Explorer 11. Additionally, if you know that your intranet sites aren't going to work correctly with Microsoft Edge, you can set all intranet sites to open using IE11 automatically.
-
-Using Enterprise Mode means that you can continue to use Microsoft Edge as your default browser, while also ensuring that your apps continue working on IE11.
-
-## Relevant group policies
-
-
-1. [Configure the Enterprise Mode Site List](#configure-the-enterprise-mode-site-list)
-
-2. [Send all intranet sites to Internet Explorer 11](#send-all-intranet-sites-to-internet-explorer-11)
-
-3. [Show message when opening sites in Internet Explorer](#show-message-when-opening-sites-in-internet-explorer)
-
-4. [(IE11 policy) Send all sites not included in the Enterprise Mode Site List to Microsoft Edge](#ie11-policy-send-all-sites-not-included-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-to-microsoft-edge)
-
-You can find the Microsoft Edge Group Policy settings in the following location of the Group Policy Editor unless otherwise noted in the policy:
-
- **Computer Configuration\\Administrative Templates\\Windows Components\\Microsoft Edge\\**
-
-## Configuration options
-
-
-
-
-## Configure the Enterprise Mode Site List
-
-[!INCLUDE [configure-enterprise-mode-site-list-include](../includes/configure-enterprise-mode-site-list-include.md)]
-
-
-## Send all intranet sites to Internet Explorer 11
-
-[!INCLUDE [send-all-intranet-sites-ie-include](../includes/send-all-intranet-sites-ie-include.md)]
-
-
-## Show message when opening sites in Internet Explorer
-
-[!INCLUDE [show-message-opening-sites-ie-include](../includes/show-message-opening-sites-ie-include.md)]
-
-
-## (IE11 policy) Send all sites not included in the Enterprise Mode Site List to Microsoft Edge
-
-[!INCLUDE [ie11-send-all-sites-not-in-site-list-include](../includes/ie11-send-all-sites-not-in-site-list-include.md)]
diff --git a/browsers/edge/group-policies/new-tab-page-settings-gp.md b/browsers/edge/group-policies/new-tab-page-settings-gp.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 2f61f0bd35..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/group-policies/new-tab-page-settings-gp.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft Edge - New Tab page group policies
-description: Microsoft Edge loads the default New tab page by default. With the relevant New Tab policies, you can set a URL to load in the New Tab page and prevent users from making changes. You can also load a blank page instead or let the users choose what loads.
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.mktglfcycl: explore
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.topic: reference
----
-
-
-# New Tab page
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You've reached the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 45 and earlier. To see the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later, go to the [Microsoft Edge documentation landing page](https://docs.microsoft.com/DeployEdge/).
-
-Microsoft Edge loads the default New tab page by default. With the relevant New Tab policies, you can set a URL to load in the New Tab page and prevent users from making changes. You can also load a blank page instead or let the users choose what loads.
-
->[!NOTE]
->New tab pages do not load while running InPrivate mode.
-
-## Relevant group policies
-
-- [Set New Tab page URL](#set-new-tab-page-url)
-- [Allow web content on New Tab page](#allow-web-content-on-new-tab-page)
-
-You can find the Microsoft Edge Group Policy settings in the following location of the Group Policy Editor unless otherwise noted in the policy:
-
- **Computer Configuration\\Administrative Templates\\Windows Components\\Microsoft Edge\\**
-
-## Configuration options
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Set New Tab page URL
-[!INCLUDE [set-new-tab-url-include](../includes/set-new-tab-url-include.md)]
-
-## Allow web content on New Tab page
-[!INCLUDE [allow-web-content-new-tab-page-include](../includes/allow-web-content-new-tab-page-include.md)]
diff --git a/browsers/edge/group-policies/prelaunch-preload-gp.md b/browsers/edge/group-policies/prelaunch-preload-gp.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5c4bf7c5fe..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/group-policies/prelaunch-preload-gp.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft Edge - Prelaunch and tab preload group policies
-description: Microsoft Edge pre-launches as a background process during Windows startup when the system is idle waiting to be launched by the user. Pre-launching helps the performance of Microsoft Edge and minimizes the amount of time required to start up Microsoft Edge.
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.reviewer:
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.topic: reference
----
-
-# Prelaunch Microsoft Edge and preload tabs in the background
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You've reached the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 45 and earlier. To see the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later, go to the [Microsoft Edge documentation landing page](https://docs.microsoft.com/DeployEdge/).
-
-Microsoft Edge pre-launches as a background process during Windows startup when the system is idle waiting to be launched by the user. Pre-launching helps the performance of Microsoft Edge and minimizes the amount of time required to start up Microsoft Edge. You can also configure Microsoft Edge to prevent Microsoft Edge from pre-launching.
-
-Additionally, Microsoft Edge preloads the Start and New Tab pages during Windows sign in, which minimizes the amount of time required to start Microsoft Edge and load a new tab. You can also configure Microsoft Edge to prevent preloading of tabs.
-
-
-## Relevant group policies
-
-- [Allow Microsoft Edge to pre-launch at Windows startup, when the system is idle, and each time Microsoft Edge is closed](#allow-microsoft-edge-to-pre-launch-at-windows-startup-when-the-system-is-idle-and-each-time-microsoft-edge-is-closed)
-- [Allow Microsoft Edge to load the Start and New Tab page at Windows startup and each time Microsoft Edge is closed](#allow-microsoft-edge-to-load-the-start-and-new-tab-page-at-windows-startup-and-each-time-microsoft-edge-is-closed)
-
-You can find the Microsoft Edge Group Policy settings in the following location of the Group Policy Editor unless otherwise noted in the policy:
-
- **Computer Configuration\\Administrative Templates\\Windows Components\\Microsoft Edge\\**
-
-## Configuration options
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Allow Microsoft Edge to pre-launch at Windows startup, when the system is idle, and each time Microsoft Edge is closed
-[!INCLUDE [allow-prelaunch-include](../includes/allow-prelaunch-include.md)]
-
-## Allow Microsoft Edge to load the Start and New Tab page at Windows startup and each time Microsoft Edge is closed
-[!INCLUDE [allow-tab-preloading-include](../includes/allow-tab-preloading-include.md)]
diff --git a/browsers/edge/group-policies/search-engine-customization-gp.md b/browsers/edge/group-policies/search-engine-customization-gp.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 480d0e275f..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/group-policies/search-engine-customization-gp.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft Edge - Search engine customization group policies
-description: Microsoft Edge, by default, uses the search engine specified in App settings, which lets users make changes. You can prevent users from making changes and still use the search engine specified in App settings by disabling the Allow search engine customization policy. You can also use the policy-set search engine specified in the OpenSearch XML file in which you can configure up to five additional search engines and setting any one of them as the default.
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.reviewer:
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.topic: reference
----
-
-# Search engine customization
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You've reached the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 45 and earlier. To see the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later, go to the [Microsoft Edge documentation landing page](https://docs.microsoft.com/DeployEdge/).
-
-Microsoft Edge, by default, uses the search engine specified in App settings, which lets users make changes. You can prevent users from making changes and still use the search engine specified in App settings by disabling the Allow search engine customization policy. You can also use the policy-set search engine specified in the OpenSearch XML file in which you can configure up to five additional search engines and setting any one of them as the default.
-
-## Relevant group policies
-
-- [Set default search engine](#set-default-search-engine)
-- [Allow search engine customization](#allow-search-engine-customization)
-- [Configure additional search engines](#configure-additional-search-engines)
-
-You can find the Microsoft Edge Group Policy settings in the following location of the Group Policy Editor unless otherwise noted in the policy:
-
- **Computer Configuration\\Administrative Templates\\Windows Components\\Microsoft Edge\\**
-
-## Configuration options
-
-
-
-
-## Set default search engine
-[!INCLUDE [set-default-search-engine-include](../includes/set-default-search-engine-include.md)]
-
-## Allow search engine customization
-[!INCLUDE [allow-search-engine-customization-include](../includes/allow-search-engine-customization-include.md)]
-
-## Configure additional search engines
-[!INCLUDE [configure-additional-search-engines-include](../includes/configure-additional-search-engines-include.md)]
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/group-policies/security-privacy-management-gp.md b/browsers/edge/group-policies/security-privacy-management-gp.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 033d73b50e..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/group-policies/security-privacy-management-gp.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,78 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft Edge - Security and privacy group policies
-description: Microsoft Edge helps to defend from increasingly sophisticated and prevalent web-based attacks against Windows. While most websites are safe, some sites have been designed to steal personal information or gain access to your system’s resources.
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.topic: reference
----
-
-# Security and privacy
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You've reached the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 45 and earlier. To see the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later, go to the [Microsoft Edge documentation landing page](https://docs.microsoft.com/DeployEdge/).
-
-Microsoft Edge is designed with improved security in mind, helping to defend people from increasingly sophisticated and prevalent web-based attacks against Windows. Because Microsoft Edge is designed like a Universal Windows app, changing the browser to an app, it fundamentally changes the process model so that both the outer manager process and the different content processes all live within app container sandboxes.
-
-Microsoft Edge runs in 64-bit not just by default, but anytime it’s running on a 64-bit operating system. Because Microsoft Edge doesn’t support legacy ActiveX controls or 3rd-party binary extensions, there’s no longer a reason to run 32-bit processes on a 64-bit system.
-
-The value of running 64-bit all the time is that it strengthens Windows Address Space Layout Randomization (ASLR), randomizing the memory layout of the browser processes, making it much harder for attackers to hit precise memory locations. In turn, 64-bit processes make ASLR much more effective by making the address space exponentially larger and, therefore, more difficult for attackers to find sensitive memory components.
-
-For more details on the security features in Microsoft Edge, see [Help protect against web-based security threats](#help-protect-against-web-based-security-threats) below.
-
-You can find the Microsoft Edge Group Policy settings in the following location of the Group Policy Editor unless otherwise noted in the policy:
-
- **Computer Configuration\\Administrative Templates\\Windows Components\\Microsoft Edge\\**
-
-## Configure cookies
-[!INCLUDE [configure-cookies-include](../includes/configure-cookies-include.md)]
-
-## Configure Password Manager
-[!INCLUDE [configure-password-manager-include](../includes/configure-password-manager-include.md)]
-
-## Configure Windows Defender SmartScreen
-[!INCLUDE [configure-windows-defender-smartscreen-include](../includes/configure-windows-defender-smartscreen-include.md)]
-
-## Prevent bypassing Windows Defender SmartScreen prompts for files
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-bypassing-win-defender-files-include](../includes/prevent-bypassing-win-defender-files-include.md)]
-
-## Prevent bypassing Windows Defender SmartScreen prompts for sites
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-bypassing-win-defender-sites-include](../includes/prevent-bypassing-win-defender-sites-include.md)]
-
-## Prevent certificate error overrides
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-certificate-error-overrides-include](../includes/prevent-certificate-error-overrides-include.md)]
-
-## Prevent using Localhost IP address for WebRTC
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-localhost-address-for-webrtc-include](../includes/prevent-localhost-address-for-webrtc-include.md)]
-
-
-## Help protect against web-based security threats
-
-While most websites are safe, some sites have been intentionally designed to steal sensitive and private information or gain access to your system’s resources. You can help protect against threats by using strong security protocols to ensure against such threats.
-
-Thieves use things like _phishing_ attacks to convince someone to enter personal information, such as a banking password, into a website that looks like a legitimate bank but isn't. Attempts to identify legitimate websites through the HTTPS lock symbol and the EV Cert green bar have met with only limited success since attackers are too good at faking legitimate experiences for many people to notice the difference.
-
-Another method thieves often use _hacking_ to attack a system through malformed content that exploits subtle flaws in the browser or various browser extensions. This exploit lets an attacker run code on a device, taking over a browsing session, and perhaps the entire device.
-
-Microsoft Edge addresses these threats to help make browsing the web a safer experience.
-
-
-| Feature | Description |
-|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| **[Windows Hello](https://blogs.windows.com/bloggingwindows/2015/03/17/making-windows-10-more-personal-and-more-secure-with-windows-hello/)** | Microsoft Edge is the first browser to natively support Windows Hello to authenticate the user and the website with asymmetric cryptography technology, powered by early implementation of the [Web Authentication (formerly FIDO 2.0 Web API) specification](https://w3c.github.io/webauthn/). |
-| **Microsoft SmartScreen** | Defends against phishing by performing reputation checks on sites visited and blocking any sites that are thought to be a phishing site. SmartScreen also helps to defend against installing malicious software, drive-by attacks, or file downloads, even from trusted sites. Drive-by attacks are malicious web-based attacks that compromise your system by targeting security vulnerabilities in commonly used software and may be hosted on trusted sites. |
-| **Certificate Reputation system** | Collects data about certificates in use, detecting new certificates and flagging fraudulent certificates automatically, and sends the data to Microsoft. The systems and tools in place include
Certificate Reputation system: Protects users from fraudulent certificates.
|
-| **Microsoft EdgeHTML and modern web standards** | Microsoft Edge uses Microsoft EdgeHTML as the rendering engine. This engine focuses on modern standards letting web developers build and maintain a consistent site across all modern browsers. It also helps to defend against hacking through these security standards features:
Support for the W3C standard for [Content Security Policy (CSP)](https://developer.microsoft.com/microsoft-edge/platform/documentation/dev-guide/security/content-Security-Policy), which can help web developers defend their sites against cross-site scripting attacks.
Support for the [HTTP Strict Transport Security (HSTS)](https://developer.microsoft.com/microsoft-edge/platform/documentation/dev-guide/security/HSTS/) security feature (IETF-standard compliant). HSTS helps ensure that connections to important sites, such as to your bank, are always secured.
**NOTE:** Both Microsoft Edge and Internet Explorer 11 support HSTS. |
-| **Code integrity and image loading restrictions** | Microsoft Edge content processes support code integrity and image load restrictions, helping to prevent malicious DLLs from loading or injecting into the content processes. Only [properly signed images](https://blogs.windows.com/msedgedev/2015/11/17/microsoft-edge-module-code-integrity/) are allowed to load into Microsoft Edge. Binaries on remote devices (such as UNC or WebDAV) can’t load. |
-| **Memory corruption mitigations** | Memory corruption attacks frequently happen to apps written in C or C++ don’t provide safety or buffer overflow protection. When an attacker provides malformed input to a program, the program’s memory becomes corrupt allowing the attacker to take control of the program. Although attackers have adapted and invented new ways to attack, we’ve responded with memory safety defenses, mitigating the most common forms of attack, including and especially [use-after-free (UAF)](https://cwe.mitre.org/data/definitions/416.html) vulnerabilities. |
-| **Memory Garbage Collector (MemGC) mitigation** | MemGC replaces Memory Protector and helps to protect the browser from UAF vulnerabilities. MemGC frees up memory from the programmer and automating it. Only freeing memory when the automation detects no references left pointing to a given block of memory. |
-| **Control Flow Guard** | Attackers use memory corruption attacks to gain control of the CPU program counter to jump to any code location they want. Control Flow Guard, a Microsoft Visual Studio technology, compiles checks around code that performs indirect jumps based on a pointer. Those jumps get restricted to function entry points with known addresses only making attacker take-overs must more difficult constraining where an attack jumps. |
-| **All web content runs in an app container sandbox** | Microsoft Edge takes the sandbox even farther, running its content processes in containers not just by default, but all of the time. Microsoft Edge doesn’t support 3rd party binary extensions, so there is no reason for it to run outside of the container, making Microsoft Edge more secure. |
-| **Extension model and HTML5 support** | Microsoft Edge does not support binary extensions because they can bring code and data into the browser’s processes without any protection. So if anything goes wrong, the entire browser itself can be compromised or go down. We encourage everyone to use our scripted HTML5-based extension model. For more info about the new extensions, see the [Microsoft Edge Developer Center](https://developer.microsoft.com/microsoft-edge/extensions/). |
-| **Reduced attack surfaces** | Microsoft Edge does not support VBScript, JScript, VML, Browser Helper Objects, Toolbars, ActiveX controls, and [document modes](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/jj676915.aspx). Many IE browser vulnerabilities only appear in legacy document modes, so removing support reduced attack surface making the browser more secure.
It also means that it’s not as backward compatible. With this reduced backward compatibility, Microsoft Edge automatically falls back to Internet Explorer 11 for any apps that need backward compatibility. This fall back happens when you use the Enterprise Mode Site List. |
-
----
diff --git a/browsers/edge/group-policies/start-pages-gp.md b/browsers/edge/group-policies/start-pages-gp.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5ea55bba9f..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/group-policies/start-pages-gp.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft Edge - Start pages group policies
-description: Microsoft Edge loads the pages specified in App settings as the default Start pages. With the relevant Start pages policies, you can configure Microsoft Edge to load either the Start page, New tab page, previously opened pages, or a specific page or pages. You can also configure Microsoft Edge to prevent users from making changes.
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.mktglfcycl: explore
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.topic: reference
----
-
-# Start pages
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You've reached the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 45 and earlier. To see the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later, go to the [Microsoft Edge documentation landing page](https://docs.microsoft.com/DeployEdge/).
-
-Microsoft Edge loads the pages specified in App settings as the default Start pages. With the relevant Start pages policies, you can configure Microsoft Edge to load either the Start page, New tab page, previously opened pages, or a specific page or pages. You can also configure Microsoft Edge to prevent users from making changes.
-
-## Relevant group policies
-
-- [Configure Open Microsoft Edge With](#configure-open-microsoft-edge-with)
-- [Configure Start Pages](#configure-start-pages)
-- [Disable Lockdown of Start pages](#disable-lockdown-of-start-pages)
-
-You can find the Microsoft Edge Group Policy settings in the following location of the Group Policy Editor unless otherwise noted in the policy:
-
- **Computer Configuration\\Administrative Templates\\Windows Components\\Microsoft Edge\\**
-
-## Configuration options
-
-
-
-
-## Configure Open Microsoft Edge With
-[!INCLUDE [configure-open-edge-with-include](../includes/configure-open-edge-with-include.md)]
-
-## Configure Start Pages
-[!INCLUDE [configure-start-pages-include](../includes/configure-start-pages-include.md)]
-
-## Disable Lockdown of Start pages
-[!INCLUDE [disable-lockdown-of-start-pages-include](../includes/disable-lockdown-of-start-pages-include.md)]
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/group-policies/sync-browser-settings-gp.md b/browsers/edge/group-policies/sync-browser-settings-gp.md
deleted file mode 100644
index cdce19d2e5..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/group-policies/sync-browser-settings-gp.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft Edge - Sync browser settings
-description: By default, the “browser” group syncs automatically between the user’s devices, letting users make changes. The “browser” group uses the Sync your Settings option in Settings to sync information like history and favorites.
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.topic: reference
----
-
-# Sync browser settings
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You've reached the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 45 and earlier. To see the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later, go to the [Microsoft Edge documentation landing page](https://docs.microsoft.com/DeployEdge/).
-
-By default, the “browser” group syncs automatically between the user’s devices, letting users make changes. The “browser” group uses the Sync your Settings option in Settings to sync information like history and favorites. You can configure Microsoft Edge to prevent the “browser” group from syncing and prevent users from turning on the _Sync your Settings_ toggle in Settings. If you want syncing turned off by default but not disabled, select the _Allow users to turn “browser” syncing_ option in the Do not sync browser policy.
-
-
-## Relevant policies
-- [Do not sync browser settings](#do-not-sync-browser-settings)
-- [Prevent users from turning on browser syncing](#prevent-users-from-turning-on-browser-syncing)
-
-You can find the Microsoft Edge Group Policy settings in the following location of the Group Policy Editor unless otherwise noted in the policy:
-
- **Computer Configuration\\Administrative Templates\\Windows Components\\Microsoft Edge\\**
-
-## Configuration options
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Verify the configuration
-To verify the settings:
-1. In the upper-right corner of Microsoft Edge, click **More** \(**...**\).
-2. Click **Settings**.
-3. Under Account, see if the setting is toggled on or off.

-
-
-## Do not sync browser settings
-[!INCLUDE [do-not-sync-browser-settings-include](../includes/do-not-sync-browser-settings-include.md)]
-
-## Prevent users from turning on browser syncing
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-users-to-turn-on-browser-syncing-include](../includes/prevent-users-to-turn-on-browser-syncing-include.md)]
diff --git a/browsers/edge/group-policies/telemetry-management-gp.md b/browsers/edge/group-policies/telemetry-management-gp.md
deleted file mode 100644
index fb3329f960..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/group-policies/telemetry-management-gp.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft Edge - Telemetry and data collection group policies
-description: Microsoft Edge gathers diagnostic data, intranet history, internet history, tracking information of sites visited, and Live Tile metadata. You can configure Microsoft Edge to collect all or none of this information.
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.topic: reference
----
-
-# Telemetry and data collection
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You've reached the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 45 and earlier. To see the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later, go to the [Microsoft Edge documentation landing page](https://docs.microsoft.com/DeployEdge/).
-
-Microsoft Edge gathers diagnostic data, intranet history, internet history, tracking information of sites visited, and Live Tile metadata. You can configure Microsoft Edge to collect all or none of this information.
-
-You can find the Microsoft Edge Group Policy settings in the following location of the Group Policy Editor unless otherwise noted in the policy:
-
- **Computer Configuration\\Administrative Templates\\Windows Components\\Microsoft Edge\\**
-
-## Allow extended telemetry for the Books tab
-[!INCLUDE [allow-ext-telemetry-books-tab-include.md](../includes/allow-ext-telemetry-books-tab-include.md)]
-
-## Configure collection of browsing data for Microsoft 365 Analytics
-[!INCLUDE [configure-browser-telemetry-for-m365-analytics-include](../includes/configure-browser-telemetry-for-m365-analytics-include.md)]
-
-## Configure Do Not Track
-[!INCLUDE [configure-do-not-track-include.md](../includes/configure-do-not-track-include.md)]
-
-## Prevent Microsoft Edge from gathering Live Tile information when pinning a site to Start
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-live-tile-pinning-start-include](../includes/prevent-live-tile-pinning-start-include.md)]
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/148766.png b/browsers/edge/images/148766.png
deleted file mode 100644
index cf568656a7..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/148766.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/148767.png b/browsers/edge/images/148767.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 7f8b92a620..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/148767.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/Picture1-sm.png b/browsers/edge/images/Picture1-sm.png
deleted file mode 100644
index e5dddbd698..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/Picture1-sm.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/Picture2-sm.png b/browsers/edge/images/Picture2-sm.png
deleted file mode 100644
index ad6cebca98..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/Picture2-sm.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/Picture5-sm.png b/browsers/edge/images/Picture5-sm.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 705fcecdd3..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/Picture5-sm.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/Picture6-sm.png b/browsers/edge/images/Picture6-sm.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 1b020cf8fb..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/Picture6-sm.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/allow-shared-books-folder_sm.png b/browsers/edge/images/allow-shared-books-folder_sm.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 0eb5feb868..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/allow-shared-books-folder_sm.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/allow-smart-screen-validation.PNG b/browsers/edge/images/allow-smart-screen-validation.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index f118ea8b9c..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/allow-smart-screen-validation.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/check-gn.png b/browsers/edge/images/check-gn.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 8aab16a59a..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/check-gn.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/home-buttom-custom-url-v4-sm.png b/browsers/edge/images/home-buttom-custom-url-v4-sm.png
deleted file mode 100644
index dcacfdd7cf..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/home-buttom-custom-url-v4-sm.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/home-button-hide-v4-sm.png b/browsers/edge/images/home-button-hide-v4-sm.png
deleted file mode 100644
index adf5961b64..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/home-button-hide-v4-sm.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/home-button-start-new-tab-page-v4-sm.png b/browsers/edge/images/home-button-start-new-tab-page-v4-sm.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 5f4d97445d..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/home-button-start-new-tab-page-v4-sm.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/icon-thin-line-computer.png b/browsers/edge/images/icon-thin-line-computer.png
deleted file mode 100644
index d7fc810e2f..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/icon-thin-line-computer.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/img-microsoft-edge-infographic-lg.png b/browsers/edge/images/img-microsoft-edge-infographic-lg.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 3f66d66901..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/img-microsoft-edge-infographic-lg.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/load-blank-page-not-new-tab-page-sm.png b/browsers/edge/images/load-blank-page-not-new-tab-page-sm.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 5cd776f936..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/load-blank-page-not-new-tab-page-sm.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/load-default-new-tab-page-sm.png b/browsers/edge/images/load-default-new-tab-page-sm.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 3fd9b6b714..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/load-default-new-tab-page-sm.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/load-urls-defined-in-configure-open-edge-with-sm.png b/browsers/edge/images/load-urls-defined-in-configure-open-edge-with-sm.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f82383cb1d..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/load-urls-defined-in-configure-open-edge-with-sm.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/microsoft-edge-infographic-sm.png b/browsers/edge/images/microsoft-edge-infographic-sm.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 1794540e5c..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/microsoft-edge-infographic-sm.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/prelaunch-edge-and-preload-tabs-sm.png b/browsers/edge/images/prelaunch-edge-and-preload-tabs-sm.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 2e0c2caaa5..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/prelaunch-edge-and-preload-tabs-sm.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/prelaunch-edge-only-sm.png b/browsers/edge/images/prelaunch-edge-only-sm.png
deleted file mode 100644
index e5ae065226..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/prelaunch-edge-only-sm.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/preload-tabs-only-sm.png b/browsers/edge/images/preload-tabs-only-sm.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 1ea5a5af23..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/preload-tabs-only-sm.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/prevent-syncing-browser-settings-sm.png b/browsers/edge/images/prevent-syncing-browser-settings-sm.png
deleted file mode 100644
index fb88466201..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/prevent-syncing-browser-settings-sm.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/set-default-search-engine-v4-sm.png b/browsers/edge/images/set-default-search-engine-v4-sm.png
deleted file mode 100644
index cf43642b65..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/set-default-search-engine-v4-sm.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/sync-browser-settings-automatically-sm.png b/browsers/edge/images/sync-browser-settings-automatically-sm.png
deleted file mode 100644
index ff9695d64c..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/sync-browser-settings-automatically-sm.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/sync-settings.PNG b/browsers/edge/images/sync-settings.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 5c72626abd..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/sync-settings.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/use-enterprise-mode-with-microsoft-edge-sm.png b/browsers/edge/images/use-enterprise-mode-with-microsoft-edge-sm.png
deleted file mode 100644
index bc64f2dade..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/use-enterprise-mode-with-microsoft-edge-sm.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/images/users-choose-new-tab-page-sm.png b/browsers/edge/images/users-choose-new-tab-page-sm.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 21e7c7ea7f..0000000000
Binary files a/browsers/edge/images/users-choose-new-tab-page-sm.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/browsers/edge/img-microsoft-edge-infographic-lg.md b/browsers/edge/img-microsoft-edge-infographic-lg.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 9b329c580b..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/img-microsoft-edge-infographic-lg.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
----
-description: A full-sized view of the Microsoft Edge infographic.
-title: Full-sized view of the Microsoft Edge infographic
-ms.date: 11/10/2016
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-author: dansimp
----
-
-Return to: [Browser: Microsoft Edge and Internet Explorer 11](enterprise-guidance-using-microsoft-edge-and-ie11.md)
-Download image: [Total Economic Impact of Microsoft Edge: Infographic](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=53892)
-
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-address-bar-suggestions-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/allow-address-bar-suggestions-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index fdcebd090e..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-address-bar-suggestions-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,52 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1703 or later*
->*Default setting: Enabled or not configured (Allowed)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [allow-address-bar-drop-down-shortdesc](../shortdesc/allow-address-bar-drop-down-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
-### Supported values
-
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|-----------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled | 0 | 0 | Prevented. Hide the Address bar drop-down list and disable the *Show search and site suggestions as I type* toggle in Settings. |  |
-| Enabled or not configured **(default)** | 1 | 1 | Allowed. Show the Address bar drop-down list and make it available. | |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Allow Address bar drop-down list suggestions
-- **GP name:** AllowAddressBarDropdown
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[AllowAddressBarDropdown](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser\#browser-allowaddressbardropdown)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/AllowAddressBarDropdown
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\Software\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\ServiceUI
-- **Value name:** ShowOneBox
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
-### Related policies
-
-[Configure search suggestions in Address bar](../available-policies.md#configure-search-suggestions-in-address-bar): [!INCLUDE [configure-additional-search-engines-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-additional-search-engines-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-adobe-flash-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/allow-adobe-flash-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 3a7671c32a..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-adobe-flash-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10*
->*Default setting: Enabled or not configured (Allowed)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [allow-adobe-flash-shortdesc](../shortdesc/allow-adobe-flash-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description |
-|-----------------------|:---:|:--------:|-------------|
-| Disabled | 0 | 0 | Prevented |
-| Enabled **(default)** | 1 | 1 | Allowed |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Allow Adobe Flash
-- **GP name:** AllowFlash
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[AllowFlash](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser\#browser-allowflash)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/AllowFlash
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\Software\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\Addons
-- **Value name:** FlashPlayerEnabled
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-clearing-browsing-data-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/allow-clearing-browsing-data-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index bd8b84f244..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-clearing-browsing-data-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1703 or later*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured (Prevented)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [allow-clearing-browsing-data-on-exit-shortdesc](../shortdesc/allow-clearing-browsing-data-on-exit-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|------------------------------------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | 0 | 0 | Prevented. Users can configure the *Clear browsing data* option in Settings. | |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Allowed. Clear the browsing data upon exit automatically. |  |
-
----
-
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Allow clearing browsing data on exit
-- **GP name:** AllowClearingBrowsingDataOnExit
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[ClearBrowsingDataOnExit](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser\#browser-clearbrowsingdataonexit)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/ClearBrowsingDataOnExit
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry
-- **Path:** HKLM\\Software\\Policies\\Microsoft\\MicrosoftEdge\\Privacy
-- **Value name:** ClearBrowsingHistoryOnExit
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-config-updates-books-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/allow-config-updates-books-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 02b449e5e2..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-config-updates-books-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,49 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1803 or later*
->*Default setting: Enabled or not configured (Allowed)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [allow-configuration-updates-for-books-library-shortdesc](../shortdesc/allow-configuration-updates-for-books-library-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|--------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled | 0 | 0 | Prevented. |  |
-| Enabled or not configured **(default)** | 1 | 1 | Allowed. Microsoft Edge updates the configuration data for the Books Library automatically. | |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Allow configuration updates for the Books Library
-- **GP name:** AllowConfigurationUpdateForBooksLibrary
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[AllowConfigurationUpdateForBooksLibrary](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-allowconfigurationupdateforbookslibrary)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/AllowConfigurationUpdateForBooksLibrary
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\Software\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\BooksLibrary
-- **Value name:** AllowConfigurationUpdateForBooksLibrary
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-### Related topics
-
-[!INCLUDE [man-connections-win-comp-services-shortdesc-include](man-connections-win-comp-services-shortdesc-include.md)]
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-cortana-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/allow-cortana-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 248600e48b..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-cortana-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10*
->*Default setting: Enabled (Allowed)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [allow-cortana-shortdesc](../shortdesc/allow-cortana-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|--------------------------|:---:|:--------:|------------------------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled | 0 | 0 | Prevented. Users can still search to find items on their device. |  |
-| Enabled **(default)** | 1 | 1 | Allowed. | |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Allow Cortana
-- **GP name:** AllowCortana
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Experience/[AllowCortana](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-experience#experience-allowcortana)
-- **Supported devices:** Mobile
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Experience/AllowCortana
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\Software\Policies\Microsoft\Windows\Windows Search
-- **Value name:** AllowCortana
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-dev-tools-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/allow-dev-tools-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8a715d6905..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-dev-tools-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1511 or later*
->*Default setting: Enabled (Allowed)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [allow-developer-tools-shortdesc](../shortdesc/allow-developer-tools-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|--------------|:---:|:--------:|-------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled | 0 | 0 | Prevented |  |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Allowed | |
-
----
-
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Allow Developer Tools
-- **GP name:** AllowDeveloperTools
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[AllowDeveloperTools](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-allowdevelopertools)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full Path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/AllowDeveloperTools
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\Software\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\F12
-- **Value name:** AllowDeveloperTools
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-enable-book-library-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/allow-enable-book-library-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index be4dcd7cfd..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-enable-book-library-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1709 or later*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured*
-
-[!INCLUDE [always-show-books-library-shortdesc](../shortdesc/always-show-books-library-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|---------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|-----------------------------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | 0 | 0 | Show the Books Library only in countries or regions where supported. |  |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Show the Books Library, regardless of the device’s country or region. | |
-
----
-### ADMX info and settings
-
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Always show the Books Library in Microsoft Edge
-- **GP name:** AlwaysEnableBooksLibrary
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[Browser/AlwaysEnableBooksLibrary](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-alwaysenablebookslibrary)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop and Mobile
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/AlwaysEnableBooksLibrary
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\SOFTWARE\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\Main
-- **Value name:** AlwaysEnableBooksLibrary
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-ext-telemetry-books-tab-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/allow-ext-telemetry-books-tab-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1b39d3081d..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-ext-telemetry-books-tab-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1803 or later*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured (Gather and send only basic diagnostic data)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [allow-extended-telemetry-for-books-tab-shortdesc](../shortdesc/allow-extended-telemetry-for-books-tab-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|---------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | 0 | 0 | Gather and send only basic diagnostic data. |  |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Gather all diagnostic data. For this policy to work correctly, you must set the diagnostic data in *Settings > Diagnostics & feedback* to **Full**. | |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Allow extended telemetry for the Books tab
-- **GP name:** EnableExtendedBooksTelemetry
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** [Browser/EnableExtendedBooksTelemetry](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-enableextendedbookstelemetry)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop and Mobile
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/EnableExtendedBooksTelemetry
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\\Software\\Policies\\Microsoft\\MicrosoftEdge\\BooksLibrary
-- **Value name:** EnableExtendedBooksTelemetry
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-extensions-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/allow-extensions-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 977e027f08..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-extensions-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,49 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1607 or later*
->*Default setting: Enabled or not configured (Allowed)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [allow-extensions-shortdesc](../shortdesc/allow-extensions-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description |
-|--------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|-------------|
-| Disabled | 0 | 0 | Prevented |
-| Enabled or not configured **(default)** | 1 | 1 | Allowed |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Allow Extensions
-- **GP name:** AllowExtensions
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[AllowExtensions](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-allowextensions)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/AllowExtensions
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\\Software\\Policies\\Microsoft\\MicrosoftEdge\\Extensions
-- **Value name:** ExtensionsEnabled
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-### Related topics
-
-[!INCLUDE [microsoft-browser-extension-policy-shortdesc](../shortdesc/microsoft-browser-extension-policy-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-full-screen-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/allow-full-screen-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 34d3dc32be..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-full-screen-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1809*
->*Default setting: Enabled or not configured (Allowed)*
-
-
-[!INCLUDE [allow-fullscreen-mode-shortdesc](../shortdesc/allow-fullscreen-mode-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|--------------------------|:---:|:--------:|-------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled | 0 | 0 | Prevented |  |
-| Enabled **(default)** | 1 | 1 | Allowed | |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Allow fullscreen mode
-- **GP name:** AllowFullScreenMode
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[AllowFullscreen](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-allowfullscreenmode)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/AllowFullscreen
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\Software\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\Main
-- **Value name:** AllowFullScreenMode
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-inprivate-browsing-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/allow-inprivate-browsing-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0d66095576..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-inprivate-browsing-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1511 or later*
->*Default setting: Enabled or not configured (Allowed)*
-
-
-[!INCLUDE [allow-inprivate-browsing-shortdesc](../shortdesc/allow-inprivate-browsing-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|--------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|-------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled | 0 | 0 | Prevented |  |
-| Enabled or not configured **(default)** | 1 | 1 | Allowed | |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Allow InPrivate browsing
-- **GP name:** AllowInPrivate
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[AllowInPrivate](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-allowinprivate)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop and Mobile
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/AllowInPrivate
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\\Software\\Policies\\Microsoft\\MicrosoftEdge\\Main
-- **Value name:** AllowInPrivate
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-microsoft-compatibility-list-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/allow-microsoft-compatibility-list-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 580909fe1d..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-microsoft-compatibility-list-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1607 or later*
->*Default setting: Enabled or not configured (Allowed)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [allow-microsoft-compatibility-list-shortdesc](../shortdesc/allow-microsoft-compatibility-list-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|--------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|-------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled | 0 | 0 | Prevented |  |
-| Enabled or not configured **(default)** | 1 | 1 | Allowed | |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Allow Microsoft Compatibility List
-- **GP name:** AllowCVList
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[AllowMicrosoftCompatibilityList](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-allowmicrosoftcompatibilitylist)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop and Mobile
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/AllowMicrosoftCompatibilityList
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\\Software\\Policies\\Microsoft\\MicrosoftEdge\\BrowserEmulation
-- **Value name:** MSCompatibilityMode
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-prelaunch-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/allow-prelaunch-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1953faa630..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-prelaunch-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1809*
->*Default setting: Enabled or not configured (Allowed)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [allow-prelaunch-shortdesc](../shortdesc/allow-prelaunch-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|--------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|-------------|:-------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled | 0 | 0 | Prevented |  |
-| Enabled or not configured **(default)** | 1 | 1 | Allowed | |
-
----
-
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Allow Microsoft Edge to pre-launch at Windows startup, when the system is idle, and each time Microsoft Edge is closed
-- **GP name:** AllowPreLaunch
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[AllowPrelaunch](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-allowprelaunch)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/AllowPrelaunch
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\Software\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\Main
-- **Value name:** AllowPrelaunch
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-printing-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/allow-printing-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 47055ba966..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-printing-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1809*
->*Default setting: Enabled or not configured (Allowed)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [allow-printing-shortdesc](../shortdesc/allow-printing-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|--------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|-------------|:-------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled | 0 | 0 | Prevented |  |
-| Enabled or not configured **(default)** | 1 | 1 | Allowed | |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Allow printing
-- **GP name:** AllowPrinting
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[AllowPrinting](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-allowprinting)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/AllowPrinting
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\\Software\\Policies\\Microsoft\\MicrosoftEdge\\Main
-- **Value name:** AllowPrinting
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-saving-history-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/allow-saving-history-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 874d301abb..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-saving-history-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1809*
->*Default setting: Enabled or not configured (Allowed)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [allow-saving-history-shortdesc](../shortdesc/allow-saving-history-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|--------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|-------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled | 0 | 0 | Prevented |  |
-| Enabled or not configured **(default)** | 1 | 1 | Allowed | |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Allow Saving History
-- **GP name:** AllowSavingHistory
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[AllowSavingHistory](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-allowsavinghistory)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/AllowSavingHistory
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\\Software\\Policies\\Microsoft\\MicrosoftEdge\\Main
-- **Value name:** AllowSavingHistory
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-search-engine-customization-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/allow-search-engine-customization-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index eb4891088f..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-search-engine-customization-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1703 or later*
->*Default setting: Enabled or not configured (Allowed)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [allow-search-engine-customization-shortdesc](../shortdesc/allow-search-engine-customization-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|--------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|-------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled | 0 | 0 | Prevented |  |
-| Enabled or not configured **(default)** | 1 | 1 | Allowed | |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-
-##### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Allow search engine customization
-- **GP name:** AllowSearchEngineCustomization
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[AllowSearchEngineCustomization](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-allowsearchenginecustomization)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop and Mobile
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/AllowSearchEngineCustomization
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\\Software\\Policies\\Microsoft\\MicrosoftEdge\\Protected
-- **Value name:** AllowSearchEngineCustomization
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
-### Related policies
-
-- [Set default search engine](../available-policies.md#set-default-search-engine): [!INCLUDE [set-default-search-engine-shortdesc](../shortdesc/set-default-search-engine-shortdesc.md)]
-
-- [Configure additional search engines](../available-policies.md#configure-additional-search-engines): [!INCLUDE [configure-additional-search-engines-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-additional-search-engines-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Related topics
-
-- [!INCLUDE [man-connections-win-comp-services-shortdesc-include](man-connections-win-comp-services-shortdesc-include.md)]
-
-- [!INCLUDE [search-provider-discovery-shortdesc-include](search-provider-discovery-shortdesc-include.md)]
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-shared-folder-books-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/allow-shared-folder-books-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index fadbac9ad5..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-shared-folder-books-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1803*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured (Not allowed)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [allow-a-shared-books-folder-shortdesc](../shortdesc/allow-a-shared-books-folder-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|---------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | 0 | 0 | Prevented. Microsoft Edge downloads book files to a per-user folder for each user. |  |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Allowed. Microsoft Edge downloads book files to a shared folder. For this policy to work correctly, you must also enable the **Allow a Windows app to share application data between users** group policy, which you can find:
Also, the users must be signed in with a school or work account. | |
-
----
-
-
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Allow a shared Books folder
-- **GP name:** UseSharedFolderForBooks
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[UseSharedFolderForBooks](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-usesharedfolderforbooks)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/UseSharedFolderForBooks
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\\Software\\Policies\\Microsoft\\MicrosoftEdge\\BooksLibrary
-- **Value name:** UseSharedFolderForBooks
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-### Related policies
-
-**Allow a Windows app to share application data between users:** [!INCLUDE [allow-windows-app-to-share-data-users-shortdesc](../shortdesc/allow-windows-app-to-share-data-users-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-sideloading-extensions-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/allow-sideloading-extensions-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 987387dbe6..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-sideloading-extensions-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1809*
->*Default setting: Enabled (Allowed)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [allow-sideloading-of-extensions-shortdesc](../shortdesc/allow-sideloading-of-extensions-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|----------------------------|:---:|:--------:|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled or not configured | 0 | 0 | Prevented. Disabling does not prevent sideloading of extensions using Add-AppxPackage via PowerShell. To prevent this, you must enable the **Allows development of Windows Store apps and installing them from an integrated development environment (IDE)** group policy, which you can find:
For the MDM setting, set the **ApplicationManagement/AllowDeveloperUnlock** policy to 1 (enabled). |  |
-| Enabled **(default)** | 1 | 1 | Allowed. | |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Allow sideloading of Extensions
-- **GP name:** AllowSideloadingOfExtensions
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[AllowSideloadingExtensions](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-allowsideloadingofextensions)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/AllowSideloadingExtensions
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\Software\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\Extensions
-- **Value name:** AllowSideloadingOfExtensions
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-### Related policies
-
-- [Allows development of Windows Store apps and installing them from an integrated development environment (IDE)](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-applicationmanagement#applicationmanagement-allowdeveloperunlock): When you enable this policy and the **Allow all trusted apps to install** policy, you allow users to develop Windows Store apps and install them directly from an IDE.
-
-- [Allow all trusted apps to install](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-applicationmanagement#applicationmanagement-allowalltrustedapps): When you enable this policy, you can manage the installation of trusted line-of-business (LOB) or developer-signed Windows Store apps.
-
-### Related topics
-
-[Enable your device for development](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/uwp/get-started/enable-your-device-for-development): Access development features, along with other developer-focused settings to make it possible for you to develop, test, and debug apps. Learn how to configure your environment for development, the difference between Developer Mode and sideloading, and the security risks of Developer mode.
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-tab-preloading-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/allow-tab-preloading-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 2083558b86..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-tab-preloading-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1802*
->*Default setting: Enabled or not configured (Allowed)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [allow-tab-preloading-shortdesc](../shortdesc/allow-tab-preloading-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|--------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|-------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled | 0 | 0 | Prevented. |  |
-| Enabled or not configured **(default)** | 1 | 1 | Allowed. Preload Start and New Tab pages. | |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Allow Microsoft Edge to load the Start and New Tab pages in the background at Windows startup and each time Microsoft Edge is closed
-- **GP name:** AllowTabPreloading
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[AllowTabPreloading](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-allowtabpreloading)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/AllowTabPreloading
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKCU\SOFTWARE\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\TabPreloader
-- **Create Value name:** AllowTabPreloading
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-- **DWORD Value:** 1
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-web-content-new-tab-page-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/allow-web-content-new-tab-page-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 88e91371ac..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/allow-web-content-new-tab-page-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 11/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10*
->*Default setting: Enabled (the default New Tab page loads)*
-
-
-[!INCLUDE [allow-web-content-on-new-tab-page-shortdesc](../shortdesc/allow-web-content-on-new-tab-page-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description |
-|-----------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| Disabled | 0 | 0 | Load a blank page instead of the default New Tab page and prevent users from making changes. |
-| Enabled or not configured **(default)** | 1 | 1 | Load the default New Tab page and the users make changes. |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Allow web content on New Tab page
-- **GP name:** AllowWebContentOnNewTabPage
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[AllowWebContentOnNewTabPage](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-allowwebcontentonnewtabpage)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/AllowWebContentOnNewTabPage
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\\Software\\Policies\\Microsoft\\MicrosoftEdge\\ServiceUI
-- **Value name:** AllowWebContentOnNewTabPage
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-### Related policies
-[Set New Tab page URL](../available-policies.md#set-new-tab-page-url): [!INCLUDE [set-new-tab-url-shortdesc](../shortdesc/set-new-tab-url-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/always-enable-book-library-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/always-enable-book-library-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7cb4f04653..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/always-enable-book-library-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1709 or later*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured*
-
-
-[!INCLUDE [always-show-books-library-shortdesc](../shortdesc/always-show-books-library-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|---------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|-----------------------------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | 0 | 0 | Show the Books Library only in countries or regions where supported. |  |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Show the Books Library, regardless of the device’s country or region. | |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Always show the Books Library in Microsoft Edge
-- **GP name:** AlwaysEnableBooksLibrary
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[AlwaysEnableBooksLibrary](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-alwaysenablebookslibrary)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop and Mobile
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/AlwaysEnableBooksLibrary
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\\Software\\Policies\\Microsoft\\MicrosoftEdge\\Main
-- **Value name:** AlwaysEnableBooksLibrary
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-additional-search-engines-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/configure-additional-search-engines-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e1ff2e9999..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-additional-search-engines-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1703 or later*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured (Prevented)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [configure-additional-search-engines-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-additional-search-engines-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|---------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | 0 | 0 | Prevented. Use the search engine specified in App settings.
If you enabled this policy and now want to disable it, all previously configured search engines get removed. |  |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Allowed. Add up to five additional search engines and set any one of them as the default.
For each search engine added you must specify a link to the OpenSearch XML file that contains, at a minimum, the short name and URL template (HTTPS) of the search engine. For more information about creating the OpenSearch XML file, see [Search provider discovery](https://developer.microsoft.com/en-us/microsoft-edge/platform/documentation/dev-guide/browser/search-provider-discovery/). | |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Configure additional search engines
-- **GP name:** ConfigureAdditionalSearchEngines
-- **GP element:** ConfigureAdditionalSearchEngines_Prompt
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[ConfigureAdditionalSearchEngines](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-configureadditionalsearchengines)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop and Mobile
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/ConfigureAdditionalSearchEngines
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\\Software\\Policies\\Microsoft\\MicrosoftEdge\\OpenSearch
-- **Value name:** ConfigureAdditionalSearchEngines
-- **Value type:** REG_SZ
-
-### Related policies
-
-- [Set default search engine](../available-policies.md\#set-default-search-engine): [!INCLUDE [set-default-search-engine-shortdesc](../shortdesc/set-default-search-engine-shortdesc.md)]
-
-- [Allow search engine customization](../available-policies.md#allow-search-engine-customization): [!INCLUDE [allow-search-engine-customization-shortdesc](../shortdesc/allow-search-engine-customization-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
-### Related topics
-
-- [!INCLUDE [microsoft-browser-extension-policy-shortdesc](../shortdesc/microsoft-browser-extension-policy-shortdesc.md)]
-
-- [Search provider discovery](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-edge/dev-guide/browser/search-provider-discovery): Rich search integration is built into the Microsoft Edge address bar, including search suggestions, results from the web, your browsing history, and favorites.
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-adobe-flash-click-to-run-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/configure-adobe-flash-click-to-run-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 852be617a5..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-adobe-flash-click-to-run-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1703 or later*
->*Default setting: Enabled or not configured (Does not load content automatically)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [configure-adobe-flash-click-to-run-setting-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-adobe-flash-click-to-run-setting-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|--------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled | 0 | 0 | Load and run Adobe Flash content automatically. | |
-| Enabled or not configured **(default)** | 1 | 1 | Do not load or run Adobe Flash content and require action from the user. |  |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Configure the Adobe Flash Click-to-Run setting
-- **GP name:** AllowFlashClickToRun
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[AllowFlashClickToRun](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-allowflashclicktorun)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/AllowFlashClickToRun
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\\Software\\Policies\\Microsoft\\MicrosoftEdge\\Security
-- **Value name:** FlashClickToRunMode
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-autofill-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/configure-autofill-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1ef991e263..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-autofill-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10*
->*Default setting: Not configured (Blank)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [configure-autofill-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-autofill-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|---------------------------------|:-----:|:--------:|-----------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Not configured **(default)** | Blank | Blank | Users can choose to use Autofill. | |
-| Disabled | 0 | no | Prevented. |  |
-| Enabled | 1 | yes | Allowed. | |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Configure Autofill
-- **GP name:** AllowAutofill
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[AllowAutofill](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser\#browser-allowautofill)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/AllowAutofill
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\\Software\\Policies\\Microsoft\\MicrosoftEdge\\Main
-- **Value name:** Use FormSuggest
-- **Value type:** REG_SZ
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-browser-telemetry-for-m365-analytics-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/configure-browser-telemetry-for-m365-analytics-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1525399652..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-browser-telemetry-for-m365-analytics-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,65 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1809*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured (No data collected or sent)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [configure-browser-telemetry-for-m365-analytics-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-browser-telemetry-for-m365-analytics-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
-> [!IMPORTANT]
-> For this policy to work, enable the **Allow Telemetry** group policy with the _Enhanced_ option and enable the **Configure the Commercial ID** group policy by providing the Commercial ID.
->
-> You can find these policies in the following location of the Group Policy Editor:
->
-> **Computer Configuration\\Administrative Templates\\Windows Components\\Data Collection and Preview Builds\\**
->
Allow Telemetry = Enabled and set to Enhanced
Configure the Commercial ID = String of the Commercial ID
Configure collection of browsing data for Microsoft 365 Analytics = Enabled
-
-
-### Supported values
-
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|---------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|-----------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | 0 | 0 | No data collected or sent |  |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Send intranet history only | |
-| Enabled | 2 | 2 | Send Internet history only | |
-| Enabled | 3 | 3 | Send both intranet and Internet history | |
-
----
-
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Configure collection of browsing data for Microsoft 365 Analytics
-- **GP name:** ConfigureTelemetryForMicrosoft365Analytics
-- **GP element:** ZonesListBox
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[ConfigureTelemetryForMicrosoft365Analytics](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-configuretelemetryformicrosoft365analytics)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/ConfigureTelemetryForMicrosoft365Analytics
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Policies\DataCollection
-- **Value name:** MicrosoftEdgeDataOptIn
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-### Related policies
-- Allow Telemetry: Allows Microsoft to run diagnostics on the device and troubleshoot. The default setting for Allow Telemetry is set to _Enhanced_ (2 for MDM).
-
-- Configure the Commercial ID: Define the Commercial ID used to associate the device's telemetry data as belonging to a given organization.
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-cookies-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/configure-cookies-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 36922a6177..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-cookies-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured (Allow all cookies from all sites)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [configure-cookies-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-cookies-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|---------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|-----------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Enabled | 0 | 0 | Block all cookies from all sites. |  |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Block only cookies from third party websites. | |
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | 2 | 2 | Allow all cookies from all sites. | |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Configure cookies
-- **GP name:** Cookies
-- **GP element:** CookiesListBox
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[AllowCookies](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser\#browser-allowcookies)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop and Mobile
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/AllowCookies
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\\Software\\Policies\\Microsoft\\MicrosoftEdge\\Main
-- **Value name:** Cookies
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-do-not-track-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/configure-do-not-track-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f4868357b9..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-do-not-track-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10*
->*Default setting: Not configured (Do not send tracking information)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [configure-do-not-track-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-do-not-track-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|---------------------------------|:-----:|:--------:|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Not configured **(default)** | Blank | Blank | Do not send tracking information but let users choose to send tracking information to sites they visit. | |
-| Disabled | 0 | 0 | Never send tracking information. | |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Send tracking information. |  |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Configure Do Not Track
-- **GP name:** AllowDoNotTrack
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[AllowDoNotTrack](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-allowdonottrack)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop and Mobile
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/AllowDoNotTrack
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\\Software\\Policies\\Microsoft\\MicrosoftEdge\\Main
-- **Value name:** DoNotTrack
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-edge-kiosk-reset-idle-timeout-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/configure-edge-kiosk-reset-idle-timeout-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ccdd275e01..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-edge-kiosk-reset-idle-timeout-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,56 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1809*
->*Default setting: 5 minutes*
-
-[!INCLUDE [configure-kiosk-reset-after-idle-timeout-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-kiosk-reset-after-idle-timeout-shortdesc.md)]
-
-You must set the Configure kiosk mode policy to enabled (1 - InPrivate public browsing) and configure Microsoft Edge as a single-app in assigned access for this policy to take effect; otherwise, Microsoft Edge ignores this setting. To learn more about assigned access and kiosk configuration, see [Configure kiosk and shared devices running Windows desktop editions](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/configuration/kiosk-shared-pc).
-
-### Supported values
-
-- **Any integer from 1-1440 (5 minutes is the default)** – The time in minutes from the last user activity before Microsoft Edge kiosk mode resets to the default kiosk configuration. A confirmation dialog displays for the user to cancel or continue and automatically continues after 30 seconds.
-
-- **0** – No idle timer.
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Configure kiosk reset after idle timeout
-- **GP name:** ConfigureKioskResetAfterIdleTimeout
-- **GP element:** ConfigureKioskResetAfterIdleTimeout_TextBox
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[ConfigureKioskResetAfterIdleTimeout](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-configurekioskresetafteridletimeout)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/ConfigureKioskResetAfterIdleTimeout
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\Software\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\KioskMode
-- Value name:ConfigureKioskResetAfterIdleTimeout
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
-
-### Related policies
-
-[Configure kiosk mode](../available-policies.md#configure-kiosk-mode): [!INCLUDE [configure-kiosk-mode-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-kiosk-mode-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
-
-### Related topics
-[Deploy Microsoft Edge kiosk mode](../microsoft-edge-kiosk-mode-deploy.md): Microsoft Edge kiosk mode works with assigned access to allow IT administrators, to create a tailored browsing experience designed for kiosk devices. In this deployment guidance, you learn about the different Microsoft Edge kiosk mode types to help you determine what configuration is best suited for your kiosk device. You also learn about the other group policies to help you enhance the how to set up your Microsoft Edge kiosk mode experience.
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-enterprise-mode-site-list-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/configure-enterprise-mode-site-list-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0c02984f58..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-enterprise-mode-site-list-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured*
-
-
-[!INCLUDE [configure-enterprise-mode-site-list-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-enterprise-mode-site-list-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description |
-|---------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | 0 | 0 | Turned off. Microsoft Edge does not check the Enterprise Mode Site List, and in this case, users might experience problems while using legacy apps. |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Turned on. Microsoft Edge checks the Enterprise Mode Site List if configured. If an XML file exists in the cache container, IE11 waits 65 seconds and then checks the local cache for a new version from the server. If the server has a different version, Microsoft Edge uses the server file and stores it in the cache container. If you already use a site list, Enterprise Mode continues to work during the 65 seconds, but uses the existing file. To add the location to your site list, enter it in the **{URI}** box.
For details on how to configure the Enterprise Mode Site List, see [Interoperability and enterprise guidance](../group-policies/interoperability-enterprise-guidance-gp.md). |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Configure the Enterprise Mode Site List
-- **GP name:** EnterpriseModeSiteList
-- **GP element:** EnterSiteListPrompt
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[EnterpriseModeSiteList](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-enterprisemodesitelist)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop and Mobile
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/EnterpriseModeSiteList
-- **Data type:** String
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\Software\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\Main\EnterpriseMode
-- **Value name:** SiteList
-- **Value type:** REG_SZ
-
-### Related Policies
-
-[Show message opening sites in IE](../available-policies.md#show-message-when-opening-sites-in-internet-explorer)
-
-[!INCLUDE [show-message-when-opening-sites-in-ie-shortdesc](../shortdesc/show-message-when-opening-sites-in-ie-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Related topics
-
-- [Use Enterprise Mode to improve compatibility](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-edge/deploy/emie-to-improve-compatibility). If you have specific websites and apps that you know have compatibility problems with Microsoft Edge, you can use the Enterprise Mode site list so that the websites automatically open using Internet Explorer 11. Additionally, if you know that your intranet sites aren't going to work correctly with Microsoft Edge, you can set all intranet sites to open using IE11 automatically. Using Enterprise Mode means that you can continue to use Microsoft Edge as your default browser, while also ensuring that your apps continue working on IE11.
-
-- [Use the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](https://docs.microsoft.com/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/use-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager). You can use IE11 and the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager to add individual website domains and domain paths and to specify whether the site renders using Enterprise Mode or the default mode.
-
-- [Enterprise Mode for Internet Explorer 11](https://docs.microsoft.com/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/enterprise-mode-overview-for-ie11). Learn how to set up and use Enterprise Mode and the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager in your company.
-
-- [Enterprise Mode and the Enterprise Mode Site List](https://docs.microsoft.com/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/what-is-enterprise-mode). Internet Explorer and Microsoft Edge can work together to support your legacy web apps, while still defaulting to the higher bar for security and modern experiences enabled by Microsoft Edge. Working with multiple browsers can be difficult, particularly if you have a substantial number of internal sites. To help manage this dual-browser experience, we are introducing a new web tool targeted explicitly towards larger organizations: the [Enterprise Mode Site List Portal](https://github.com/MicrosoftEdge/enterprise-mode-site-list-portal).
-
-- [Enterprise Mode and the Enterprise Mode Site List XML file](https://docs.microsoft.com/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/what-is-enterprise-mode#enterprise-mode-and-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-xml-file). The Enterprise Mode Site List is an XML document that specifies a list of sites, their compat mode, and their intended browser. When you use the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager schema v.2, you can automatically start a webpage using a specific browser. In the case of IE11, the webpage can also launch in a specific compat mode, so it always renders correctly. Your users can quickly view this site list by typing about:compat in either Microsoft Edge or IE11.
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-favorites-bar-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/configure-favorites-bar-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e4e4ae2cb6..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-favorites-bar-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1809*
->*Default setting: Not configured (Hidden but shown on the Start and New Tab pages)*
-
-
-[!INCLUDE [allow-favorites-bar-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-favorites-bar-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
-### Supported values
-
-
-|Group Policy |MDM |Registry |Description |
-|---|:---:|:---:|---|
-|Not configured **(default)** |Blank |Blank |Hidden but shown on the Start and New Tab pages.
Favorites Bar toggle (in Settings) = **Off** and enabled letting users make changes. |
-|Disabled |0 |0 |Hidden on all pages.
Favorites Bar toggle (in Settings) = **Off** and disabled preventing users from making changes
Show bar/Hide bar option (in the context menu) = hidden
|
-|Enabled |1 |1 |Shown on all pages.
Favorites Bar toggle (in Settings) = **On** and disabled preventing users from making changes
Show bar/Hide bar option (in the context menu) = hidden
|
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Configure Favorites Bar
-- **GP name:** ConfigureFavoritesBar
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[ConfigureFavoritesBar](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-configurefavoritesbar)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop and Mobile
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/ConfigureFavoritesBar
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\Software\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\Main
-- **Value name:** ConfigureFavoritesBar
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-favorites-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/configure-favorites-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 500c9acc12..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-favorites-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->Discontinued in the Windows 10 October 2018 Update. Use the **[Provision Favorites](../available-policies.md#provision-favorites)** group policy instead.
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-home-button-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/configure-home-button-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 3082d3014b..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-home-button-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/28/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1809*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured (Show home button and load the Start page)*
-
-
-[!INCLUDE [configure-home-button-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-home-button-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description |
-|---------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|----------------------------------------------------------------|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | 0 | 0 | Load the Start page. |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Load the New Tab page. |
-| Enabled | 2 | 2 | Load the custom URL defined in the Set Home Button URL policy. |
-| Enabled | 3 | 3 | Hide the home button. |
-
----
-
-
->[!TIP]
->If you want to make changes to this policy:
Enable the **Unlock Home Button** policy.
Make changes to the **Configure Home Button** policy or **Set Home Button URL** policy.
Disable the **Unlock Home Button** policy.
-
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Configure Home Button
-- **GP name:** ConfigureHomeButton
-- **GP element:** ConfigureHomeButtonDropdown
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[ConfigureHomeButton](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-configurehomebutton)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop and Mobile
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/ConfigureHomeButton
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\Software\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\Internet Settings
-- **Value name:** ConfigureHomeButton
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-### Related policies
-
-- [Set Home Button URL](../available-policies.md#set-home-button-url): [!INCLUDE [set-home-button-url-shortdesc](../shortdesc/set-home-button-url-shortdesc.md)]
-
-- [Unlock Home Button](../available-policies.md#unlock-home-button): [!INCLUDE [unlock-home-button-shortdesc](../shortdesc/unlock-home-button-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-kiosk-mode-supported-values-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/configure-kiosk-mode-supported-values-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index bda51bb3e5..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-kiosk-mode-supported-values-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
-| | |
-|----------|------|
-|**Single-app**
Displays a specific site in full-screen mode, running Microsoft Edge InPrivate protecting user data.
**Digital signage** does not require user interaction.
***Example.*** Use digital signage for things like a rotating advertisement or menu.
**Interactive signage**, on the other hand, requires user interaction within the page but doesn’t allow for any other uses, such as browsing the internet.
***Example.*** Use interactive signage for things like a building business directory or restaurant order/pay station.
Runs a limited multi-tab version of Microsoft Edge, protecting user data. Microsoft Edge is the only app users can use on the device, preventing them from customizing Microsoft Edge. Users can only browse publically or end their browsing session.
The single-app public browsing mode is the only kiosk mode that has an End session button. Microsoft Edge also resets the session after a specified time of user inactivity. Both restart Microsoft Edge and clear the user’s session.
Example. A public library or hotel concierge desk are two examples of public browsing that provides access to Microsoft Edge and other apps.
Runs a full-version of Microsoft Edge with all browsing features and preserves the user data and state between sessions.
Some features may not work depending on what other apps you have configured in assigned access. For example, installing extensions or books from the Microsoft store are not allowed if the store is not available. Also, if Internet Explorer 11 is set up in assigned access, you can enable [EnterpriseModeSiteList](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-enterprisemodesitelist) to automatically switch users to Internet Explorer 11 for sites that need backward compatibility support.
Runs a multi-tab version of Microsoft Edge InPrivate with a tailored experience for kiosks that runs in full-screen mode. Users can open and close Microsoft Edge and launch other apps if allowed by assigned access. Instead of an End session button to clear their browsing session, the user closes Microsoft Edge normally.
In this configuration, Microsoft Edge can interact with other applications. For example, if Internet Explorer 11 is set up in multi-app assigned access, you can enable [EnterpriseModeSiteList](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-enterprisemodesitelist) to automatically switch users to Internet Explorer 11 for sites that need backward compatibility support.
Example. A public library or hotel concierge desk are two examples of public browsing that provides access to Microsoft Edge and other apps.
Policy setting = Enabled (1) |
-
----
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-microsoft-edge-kiosk-mode-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/configure-microsoft-edge-kiosk-mode-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1c08a3d745..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-microsoft-edge-kiosk-mode-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/27/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1809*
->*Default setting: Not configured*
-
-[!INCLUDE [configure-kiosk-mode-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-kiosk-mode-shortdesc.md)]
-
-For this policy to work, you must configure Microsoft Edge in assigned access; otherwise, Microsoft Edge ignores the settings in this policy. To learn more about assigned access and kiosk configuration, see [Configure kiosk and shared devices running Windows desktop editions](https://aka.ms/E489vw).
-
-### Supported values
-
-[!INCLUDE [configure-kiosk-mode-supported-values-include](configure-kiosk-mode-supported-values-include.md)]
-
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Configure kiosk mode
-- **GP name:** ConfigureKioskMode
-- **GP element:** ConfigureKioskMode_TextBox
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[ConfigureKioskMode](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-configurekioskmode)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/ConfigureKioskMode
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\Software\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\KioskMode
-- **Value name:** ConfigureKioskMode
-- **Value type:** REG_SZ
-
-### Related policies
-[Configure kiosk reset after idle timeout](../available-policies.md#configure-kiosk-reset-after-idle-timeout): [!INCLUDE [configure-kiosk-reset-after-idle-timeout-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-kiosk-reset-after-idle-timeout-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
-### Related topics
-[Deploy Microsoft Edge kiosk mode](../microsoft-edge-kiosk-mode-deploy.md): Microsoft Edge kiosk mode works with assigned access to allow IT administrators, to create a tailored browsing experience designed for kiosk devices. In this deployment guidance, you learn about the different Microsoft Edge kiosk mode types to help you determine what configuration is best suited for your kiosk device. You also learn about the other group policies to help you enhance the how to set up your Microsoft Edge kiosk mode experience.
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-open-edge-with-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/configure-open-edge-with-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a86cf568ce..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-open-edge-with-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,68 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1809*
->*Default setting: Enabled (A specific page or pages)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [configure-open-microsoft-edge-with-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-open-microsoft-edge-with-shortdesc.md)]
-
-**Version 1703 or later:** If you don't want to send traffic to Microsoft, use the \ value, which honors both domain and non domain-joined devices when it's the only configured URL.
-
-**version 1809:** When you enable this policy (Configure Open Microsoft Edge With) and select an option, and also enable the Configure Start Pages policy, Microsoft Edge ignores the Configure Start Page policy.
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description |
-|--------------------------|:-----:|:--------:|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| Not configured | Blank | Blank | If you don't configure this policy and you enable the Disable Lockdown of Start Pages policy, users can change or customize the Start page. |
-| Enabled | 0 | 0 | Load the Start page. |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Load the New Tab page. |
-| Enabled | 2 | 2 | Load the previous pages. |
-| Enabled **(default)** | 3 | 3 | Load a specific page or pages. |
-
----
-
-
->[!TIP]
->If you want to make changes to this policy:
Set the **Disabled Lockdown of Start Pages** policy to not configured.
Make changes to the **Configure Open Microsoft With** policy.
Enable the **Disabled Lockdown of Start Pages** policy.
-
-
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Configure Open Microsoft Edge With
-- **GP name:** ConfigureOpenMicrosoftEdgeWith
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[ConfigureOpenEdgeWith](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-configureopenmicrosoftedgewith)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/ConfigureOpenEdgeWith
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\Software\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\Internet Settings
-- **Value name:** ConfigureOpenEdgeWith
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-### Related policies
-
-- [Configure Start pages](../available-policies.md#configure-start-pages): [!INCLUDE [configure-start-pages-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-start-pages-shortdesc.md)]
-
-- [Disable lockdown of Start pages](../available-policies.md#disable-lockdown-of-start-pages): [!INCLUDE [disable-lockdown-of-start-pages-shortdesc](../shortdesc/disable-lockdown-of-start-pages-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
-
-
-
----
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-password-manager-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/configure-password-manager-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5f075480ea..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-password-manager-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,49 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10*
->*Default setting: Enabled (Allowed/users can change the setting)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [configure-password-manager-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-password-manager-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|--------------------------|:-----:|:--------:|--------------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Not configured | Blank | Blank | Users can choose to save and manage passwords locally. | |
-| Disabled | 0 | no | Not allowed. |  |
-| Enabled **(default)** | 1 | yes | Allowed. | |
-
----
-
-Verify not allowed/disabled settings:
-1. Click or tap **More** (…) and select **Settings** > **View Advanced settings**.
-2. Verify the settings **Save Password** is toggled off or on and is greyed out.
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Configure Password Manager
-- **GP name:** AllowPasswordManager
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[AllowPasswordManager](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-allowpasswordmanager)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop and Mobile
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/AllowPasswordManager
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\Software\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\Main
-- **Value name:** FormSuggest Passwords
-- **Value type:** REG_SZ
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-pop-up-blocker-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/configure-pop-up-blocker-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 43374d7ccd..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-pop-up-blocker-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10*
->*Default setting: Disabled (Turned off)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [configure-pop-up-blocker-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-pop-up-blocker-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|---------------------------|:-----:|:--------:|-------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Not configured | Blank | Blank | Users can choose to use Pop-up Blocker. | |
-| Disabled **(default)** | 0 | 0 | Turned off. Allow pop-up windows to open. | |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Turned on. Prevent pop-up windows from opening. |  |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Configure Pop-up Blocker
-- **GP name:** AllowPopups
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[AllowPopups](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-allowpopups)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/AllowPopups
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-### Registry
-- **Path:** HKLM\\Software\\Policies\\Microsoft\\MicrosoftEdge\\Main
-- **Value name:** AllowPopups
-- **Value type:** REG_SZ
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-search-suggestions-address-bar-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/configure-search-suggestions-address-bar-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5e74e11ac7..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-search-suggestions-address-bar-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10*
->*Default setting: Not configured (Blank)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [configure-search-suggestions-in-address-bar-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-search-suggestions-in-address-bar-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|---------------------------------|:-----:|:--------:|---------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Not configured **(default)** | Blank | Blank | Users can choose to see search suggestions. | |
-| Disabled | 0 | 0 | Prevented. Hide the search suggestions. |  |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Allowed. Show the search suggestions. | |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Configure search suggestions in Address bar
-- **GP name:** AllowSearchSuggestionsinAddressBar
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[AllowSearchSuggestionsinAddressBar](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-allowsearchsuggestionsinaddressbar)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop and Mobile
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/AllowSearchSuggestionsinAddressBar
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\\Software\\Policies\\Microsoft\\MicrosoftEdge\\SearchScopes
-- **Value name:** ShowSearchSuggestionsGlobal
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-start-pages-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/configure-start-pages-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 911d1b11c9..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-start-pages-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1703 or later*
->*Default setting: Blank or not configured (Load pages specified in App settings)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [configure-start-pages-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-start-pages-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description |
-|----------------|:------:|:--------:|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| Not configured | Blank | Blank | Load the pages specified in App settings as the default Start pages. |
-| Enabled | String | String | Enter the URLs of the pages you want to load as the Start pages, separating each page using angle brackets:
\\
**Version 1703 or later:** If you do not want to send traffic to Microsoft, use the \ value, which honors both domain and non-domain-joined devices when it's the only configured URL.
**Version 1809:** When you enable the Configure Open Microsoft Edge With policy with any option selected, and you enable the Configure Start Pages policy, the Configure Open Microsoft Edge With policy takes precedence, ignoring the Configure Start Pages policy. |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Configure Start pages
-- **GP name:** HomePages
-- **GP element:** HomePagesPrompt
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[HomePages](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-homepages)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/HomePages
-- **Data type:** String
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\SOFTWARE\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\Internet Settings
-- **Value name:** ProvisionedHomePages
-- **Value type:** REG_SZ
-
-
-### Related policies
-
-- [Disable Lockdown of Start Pages](../available-policies.md#disable-lockdown-of-start-pages): [!INCLUDE [disable-lockdown-of-start-pages-shortdesc](../shortdesc/disable-lockdown-of-start-pages-shortdesc.md)]
-
-- [Configure Open Microsoft Edge With](../available-policies.md#configure-open-microsoft-edge-with): [!INCLUDE [configure-open-microsoft-edge-with-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-open-microsoft-edge-with-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-windows-defender-smartscreen-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/configure-windows-defender-smartscreen-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c17f639024..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/configure-windows-defender-smartscreen-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10*
->*Default setting: Enabled (Turned on)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [configure-windows-defender-smartscreen-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-windows-defender-smartscreen-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|----------------|:-----:|:--------:|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Not configured | Blank | Blank | Users can choose to use Windows Defender SmartScreen. | |
-| Disabled | 0 | 0 | Turned off. Do not protect users from potential threats and prevent users from turning it on. | |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Turned on. Protect users from potential threats and prevent users from turning it off. |  |
-
----
-
-To verify Windows Defender SmartScreen is turned off (disabled):
-1. Click or tap **More** (…) and select **Settings** > **View Advanced settings**.
-2. Verify the setting **Help protect me from malicious sites and download with Windows Defender SmartScreen** is disabled.

-
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Configure Windows Defender SmartScreen
-- **GP name:** AllowSmartScreen
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[AllowSmartScreen](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-allowsmartscreen)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop and Mobile
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/AllowSmartScreen
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\SOFTWARE\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\PhishingFilter
-- **Value name:** EnabledV9
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/disable-lockdown-of-start-pages-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/disable-lockdown-of-start-pages-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d2ae261042..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/disable-lockdown-of-start-pages-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10*
->*Default setting: Enabled (Start pages are not editable)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [disable-lockdown-of-start-pages-shortdesc](../shortdesc/disable-lockdown-of-start-pages-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|----------------|:---:|:--------:|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Not configured | 0 | 0 | Locked. Start pages configured in either the Configure Open Microsoft Edge With policy and Configure Start Pages policy are not editable. |  |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Unlocked. Users can make changes to all configured start pages.
When you enable this policy and define a set of URLs in the Configure Start Pages policy, Microsoft Edge uses the URLs defined in the Configure Open Microsoft Edge With policy. | |
-
----
-
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Disable lockdown of Start pages
-- **GP name:** DisableLockdownOfStartPages
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[DisableLockdownOfStartPages](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-disablelockdownofstartpages)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/DisableLockdownOfStartPages
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\Software\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\Internet Settings
-- **Value name:** DisableLockdownOfStartPages
-- **Value type:** REG_SZ
-
-
-
-
-
-### Related Policies
-- [Configure Start pages](../available-policies.md#configure-start-pages): [!INCLUDE [configure-start-pages-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-start-pages-shortdesc.md)]
-
-- [Configure Open Microsoft Edge With](../available-policies.md#configure-open-microsoft-edge-with): [!INCLUDE [configure-open-microsoft-edge-with-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-open-microsoft-edge-with-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Related topics
-
-[!INCLUDE [microsoft-browser-extension-policy-shortdesc](../shortdesc/microsoft-browser-extension-policy-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/do-not-sync-browser-settings-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/do-not-sync-browser-settings-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c20bdd6781..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/do-not-sync-browser-settings-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured (Allowed/turned on)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [do-not-sync-browser-settings-shortdesc](../shortdesc/do-not-sync-browser-settings-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description |
-|---------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | 0 | 0 | Allowed/turned on. The “browser” group syncs automatically between user’s devices and lets users to make changes. |
-| Enabled | 2 | 2 | Prevented/turned off. The “browser” group does not use the *Sync your Settings* option. |
-
----
-
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Do not sync browser settings
-- **GP name:** DisableWebBrowserSettingSync
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Sync your settings
-- **GP ADMX file name:** SettingSync.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** [Experience/DoNotSyncBrowserSettings](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-experience#experience-donotsyncbrowsersetting)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Experience/DoNotSyncBrowserSettings
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\\Software\Policies\Microsoft\Windows\SettingSync
-- **Value name:** DisableWebBrowserSettingSyncUserOverride
-- **Value
-
-### Related policies
-
-[Prevent users from turning on browser syncing](../available-policies.md#prevent-users-from-turning-on-browser-syncing): [!INCLUDE [prevent-users-to-turn-on-browser-syncing-shortdesc](../shortdesc/prevent-users-to-turn-on-browser-syncing-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
-
-### Related topics
-
-[About sync setting on Microsoft Edge on Windows 10 devices](https://windows.microsoft.com/windows-10/about-sync-settings-on-windows-10-devices)
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/do-not-sync-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/do-not-sync-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e959162f90..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/do-not-sync-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured (Allowed/turned on)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [do-not-sync-shortdesc](../shortdesc/do-not-sync-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|---------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | 0 | 0 | Allowed/turned on. Users can choose what to sync to their device. | |
-| Enabled | 2 | 2 | Prevented/turned off. Disables the *Sync your Settings* toggle and prevents syncing. |  |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Do not sync
-- **GP name:** AllowSyncMySettings
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Sync your settings
-- **GP ADMX file name:** SettingSync.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Experience/[AllowSyncMySettings](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-experience#experience-allowsyncmysettings)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Experience/AllowSyncMySettings
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\Software\Policies\Microsoft\Windows\SettingSync
-- **Value name:** DisableSettingSyn
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-### Related topics
-[About sync setting on Microsoft Edge on Windows 10 devices](https://windows.microsoft.com/windows-10/about-sync-settings-on-windows-10-devices): Learn about what settings are synced.
-
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/enable-device-for-dev-shortdesc-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/enable-device-for-dev-shortdesc-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index afb78c58e3..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/enable-device-for-dev-shortdesc-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-[Enable your device for development](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/uwp/get-started/enable-your-device-for-development): Developers can access special development features, along with other developer-focused settings, which makes it possible for them to develop, test, and debug apps. Learn how to configure your environment for development, the difference between Developer Mode and sideloading, and the security risks of Developer mode.
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/ie11-send-all-sites-not-in-site-list-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/ie11-send-all-sites-not-in-site-list-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d64fe44479..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/ie11-send-all-sites-not-in-site-list-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
->*Supported versions: Internet Explorer 11 on Windows 10, version 1607 or later*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured*
-
-By default, all sites open the currently active browser. With this policy, you can automatically open all sites not included in the Enterprise Mode Site List in Microsoft Edge. When you enable this policy, you must also turn on the Internet Explorer\Use the Enterprise Mode IE website list policy and include at least one site in the Enterprise Mode Site List.
-
->[!NOTE]
->If you’ve also enabled the Microsoft Edge [Send all intranet sites to Internet Explorer 11](../available-policies.md#send-all-intranet-sites-to-internet-explorer-11) policy, all intranet sites continue to open in Internet Explorer 11.
-
-You can find the group policy settings in the following location of the Group Policy Editor:
-
- **Computer Configuration\\Administrative Templates\\Windows Components\\Internet Explorer\\**
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/keep-fav-sync-ie-edge-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/keep-fav-sync-ie-edge-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index eb790351a1..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/keep-fav-sync-ie-edge-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1703 or later*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured (Turned off/not syncing)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [keep-favorites-in-sync-between-ie-and-edge-shortdesc](../shortdesc/keep-favorites-in-sync-between-ie-and-edge-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|---------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | 0 | 0 | Turned off/not syncing | |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Turned on/syncing |  |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Keep favorites in sync between Internet Explorer and Microsoft Edge
-- **GP name:** SyncFavoritesBetweenIEAndMicrosoftEdge
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[SyncFavoritesBetweenIEAndMicrosoftEdge](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-syncfavoritesbetweenieandmicrosoftedge)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/SyncFavoritesBetweenIEAndMicrosoftEdge
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\SOFTWARE\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\Main
-- **Value name:** SyncFavoritesBetweenIEAndMicrosoftEdge
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/man-connections-win-comp-services-shortdesc-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/man-connections-win-comp-services-shortdesc-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 211b16465b..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/man-connections-win-comp-services-shortdesc-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-[Manage connections from Windows operating system components to Microsoft services](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/configuration/manage-connections-from-windows-operating-system-components-to-microsoft-services): Learn about the network connections from Windows to Microsoft services. Also, learn about the privacy settings that affect the data shared with either Microsoft or apps and how to manage them in an enterprise. You can configure diagnostic data at the lowest level for your edition of Windows and evaluate which other connections Windows makes to Microsoft services you want to turn off in your environment.
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-access-about-flag-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-access-about-flag-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 144451edb0..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-access-about-flag-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1607 or later*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured (Allowed)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-access-to-about-flags-page-shortdesc](../shortdesc/prevent-access-to-about-flags-page-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|---------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|-------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | 0 | 0 | Allowed | |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Prevented |  |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Prevent access to the about:flags page in Microsoft Edge
-- **GP name:** PreventAccessToAboutFlagsInMicrosoftEdge
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[PreventAccessToAboutFlagsInMicrosoftEdge](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-preventaccesstoaboutflagsinmicrosoftedge)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop and Mobile
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/PreventAccessToAboutFlagsInMicrosoftEdge
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\SOFTWARE\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\Main
-- **Value name:** PreventAccessToAboutFlagsInMicrosoftEdge
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-bypassing-win-defender-files-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-bypassing-win-defender-files-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1c3c2ebf02..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-bypassing-win-defender-files-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1511 or later*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured (Allowed/turned off)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-bypassing-windows-defender-prompts-for-files-shortdesc](../shortdesc/prevent-bypassing-windows-defender-prompts-for-files-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|---------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | 0 | 0 | Allowed/turned off. Users can ignore the warning and continue to download the unverified file(s). | |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Prevented/turned on. |  |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Prevent bypassing Windows Defender SmartScreen prompts for files
-- **GP name:** PreventSmartScreenPromptOverrideForFiles
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[PreventSmartScreenPromptOverrideForFiles](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-preventsmartscreenpromptoverrideforfiles)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop and Mobile
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/PreventSmartScreenPromptOverrideForFiles
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\SOFTWARE\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\PhishingFilter
-- **Value name:** PreventOverrideAppRepUnknown
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-bypassing-win-defender-sites-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-bypassing-win-defender-sites-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a6b5e9dde9..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-bypassing-win-defender-sites-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1511 or later*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured (Allowed/turned off)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-bypassing-windows-defender-prompts-for-sites-shortdesc](../shortdesc/prevent-bypassing-windows-defender-prompts-for-sites-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|---------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | 0 | 0 | Allowed/turned off. Users can ignore the warning and continue to the site. | |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Prevented/turned on. |  |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Prevent bypassing Windows Defender SmartScreen prompts for sites
-- **GP name:** PreventSmartscreenPromptOverride
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[PreventSmartscreenPromptOverride](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-preventsmartscreenpromptoverride)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop and Mobile
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/PreventSmartscreenPromptOverride
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\SOFTWARE\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\PhishingFilter
-- **Value name:** PreventOverride
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-certificate-error-overrides-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-certificate-error-overrides-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ab20b1ca5b..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-certificate-error-overrides-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1809*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured (Allowed/turned off)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-certificate-error-overrides-shortdesc](../shortdesc/prevent-certificate-error-overrides-shortdesc.md)]
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|---------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | 0 | 0 | Allowed/turned on. Override the security warning to sites that have SSL errors. | |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Prevented/turned on. |  |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Prevent certificate error overrides
-- **GP name:** PreventCertErrorOverrides
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[PreventCertErrorOverrides](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-preventcerterroroverrides)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop and Mobile
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/PreventCertErrorOverrides
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\Software\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\Internet Setting
-- **Value name:** PreventCertErrorOverrides
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-changes-to-favorites-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-changes-to-favorites-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0b6691b746..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-changes-to-favorites-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1709 or later*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured (Allowed/not locked down)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-changes-to-favorites-shortdesc](../shortdesc/prevent-changes-to-favorites-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|---------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | 0 | 0 | Allowed/unlocked. Users can add, import, and make changes to the Favorites list. | |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Prevented/locked down. |  |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Prevent changes to Favorites on Microsoft Edge
-- **GP name:** LockdownFavorites
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[LockdownFavorites](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-lockdownfavorites)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop and Mobile
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/LockdownFavorites
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\SOFTWARE\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\Favorites
-- **Value name:** LockdownFavorites
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-first-run-webpage-open-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-first-run-webpage-open-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index be8eec24b9..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-first-run-webpage-open-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1703 or later*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured (Allowed)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-first-run-webpage-from-opening-shortdesc](../shortdesc/prevent-first-run-webpage-from-opening-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|---------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|--------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | 0 | 0 | Allowed. Load the First Run webpage. | |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Prevented. |  |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Prevent the First Run webpage from opening on Microsoft Edge
-- **GP name:** PreventFirstRunPage
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[PreventFirstRunPage](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-preventfirstrunpage)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop and Mobile
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/PreventFirstRunPage
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry
-- **Path:** HKLM\SOFTWARE\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\Main
-- **Value name:** PreventFirstRunPage
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-live-tile-pinning-start-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-live-tile-pinning-start-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ea8f458f04..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-live-tile-pinning-start-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1703 or later*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured (Collect and send)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-edge-from-gathering-live-tile-info-shortdesc](../shortdesc/prevent-edge-from-gathering-live-tile-info-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|---------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|--------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | 0 | 0 | Collect and send Live Tile metadata. | |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Do not collect data. |  |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Prevent Microsoft Edge from gathering Live Tile information when pinning a site to Start
-- **GP name:** PreventLiveTileDataCollection
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[PreventLiveTileDataCollection](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-preventlivetiledatacollection)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop and Mobile
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/PreventLiveTileDataCollection
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\SOFTWARE\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\Main
-- **Value name:** PreventLiveTileDataCollection
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-localhost-address-for-webrtc-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-localhost-address-for-webrtc-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0bc6ba7764..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-localhost-address-for-webrtc-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1511 or later*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured (Allowed/show localhost IP addresses)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-using-localhost-ip-address-for-webrtc-shortdesc](../shortdesc/prevent-using-localhost-ip-address-for-webrtc-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|---------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|---------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | 0 | 0 | Allowed. Show localhost IP addresses. | |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Prevented. |  |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Prevent using Localhost IP address for WebRTC
-- **GP name:** HideLocalHostIPAddress
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[PreventUsingLocalHostIPAddressForWebRTC](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-preventusinglocalhostipaddressforwebrtc)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/PreventUsingLocalHostIPAddressForWebRTC
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\SOFTWARE\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\Main
-- **Value name:** HideLocalHostIPAddress
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-turning-off-required-extensions-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-turning-off-required-extensions-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e1a4a50a05..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-turning-off-required-extensions-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1809*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured (Allowed)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-turning-off-required-extensions-shortdesc](../shortdesc/prevent-turning-off-required-extensions-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | Description |
-|---------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | Allowed. Users can uninstall extensions. If you previously enabled this policy and you decide to disable it, the list of extension PFNs defined in this policy get ignored. |
-| Enabled | Provide a semi-colon delimited list of extension PFNs. For example, adding the following OneNote Web Clipper and Office extension prevents users from turning it off:
After defining the list of extensions, you deploy them through any available enterprise deployment channel, such as Microsoft Intune.
Removing extensions from the list does not uninstall the extension from the user’s computer automatically. To uninstall the extension, use any available enterprise deployment channel. If you enable the [Allow Developer Tools](../group-policies/developer-settings-gp.md#allow-developer-tools) policy, then this policy does not prevent users from debugging and altering the logic on an extension. |
-
----
-
-
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Prevent turning off required extensions
-- **GP name:** PreventTurningOffRequiredExtensions
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** [Experience/PreventTurningOffRequiredExtensions](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-preventturningoffrequiredextensions)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/PreventTurningOffRequiredExtensions
-- **Data type:** String
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\Software\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\Extensions
-- **Value name:** PreventTurningOffRequiredExtensions
-- **Value type:** REG_SZ
-
-### Related policies
-[Allow Developer Tools](../available-policies.md#allow-developer-tools): [!INCLUDE [allow-developer-tools-shortdesc](../shortdesc/allow-developer-tools-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
-### Related topics
-
-- [Find a package family name (PFN) for per-app VPN](https://docs.microsoft.com/sccm/protect/deploy-use/find-a-pfn-for-per-app-vpn): There are two ways to find a PFN so that you can configure a per-app VPN.
-- [How to manage apps you purchased from the Microsoft Store for Business with Microsoft Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/windows-store-for-business): The Microsoft Store for Business gives you a place to find and purchase apps for your organization, individually, or in volume. By connecting the store to Microsoft Intune, you can manage volume-purchased apps from the Azure portal.
-- [How to assign apps to groups with Microsoft Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/apps-deploy): Apps can be assigned to devices whether or not Intune manages them.
-- [Manage apps from the Microsoft Store for Business with System Center Configuration Manager](https://docs.microsoft.com/sccm/apps/deploy-use/manage-apps-from-the-windows-store-for-business): Configuration Manager supports managing Microsoft Store for Business apps on both Windows 10 devices with the Configuration Manager client, and also Windows 10 devices enrolled with Microsoft Intune.
-- [How to add Windows line-of-business (LOB) apps to Microsoft Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/lob-apps-windows): A line-of-business (LOB) app is one that you add from an app installation file. Typically, these types of apps are written in-house.
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-users-to-turn-on-browser-syncing-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-users-to-turn-on-browser-syncing-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d04f548fca..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/prevent-users-to-turn-on-browser-syncing-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1809*
->*Default setting: Enabled or not configured (Prevented/turned off)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [prevent-users-to-turn-on-browser-syncing-shortdesc](../shortdesc/prevent-users-to-turn-on-browser-syncing-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description |
-|--------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|---------------------------------------------------------|
-| Disabled | 0 | 0 | Allowed/turned on. Users can sync the browser settings. |
-| Enabled or not configured **(default)** | 1 | 1 | Prevented/turned off. |
-
----
-
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Prevent users from turning on browser syncing
-- **GP name:** PreventUsersFromTurningOnBrowserSyncing
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Sync your settings
-- **GP ADMX file name:** SettingSync.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Experience/[PreventUsersFromTurningOnBrowserSyncing](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-experience#experience-preventusersfromturningonbrowsersyncing)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Experience/PreventUsersFromTurningOnBrowserSyncing
-- **Data type:** String
-
-
-### Related policies
-[Do not sync browser settings](../available-policies.md#do-not-sync-browser-settings): [!INCLUDE [do-not-sync-browser-settings-shortdesc](../shortdesc/do-not-sync-browser-settings-shortdesc.md)].
-
-### Related topics
-[About sync setting on Microsoft Edge on Windows 10 devices](https://windows.microsoft.com/windows-10/about-sync-settings-on-windows-10-devices)
-
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/provision-favorites-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/provision-favorites-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index fdb0016715..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/provision-favorites-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,52 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1511 or later*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured (Customizable)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [provision-favorites-shortdesc](../shortdesc/provision-favorites-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
->[!IMPORTANT]
->Enable only this policy or the Keep favorites in sync between Internet Explorer and Microsoft Edge policy. If you enable both, Microsoft Edge prevents users from syncing their favorites between the two browsers.
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | Description | Most restricted |
-|---------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | Users can customize the favorites list, such as adding folders, or adding and removing favorites. | |
-| Enabled | Define a default list of favorites in Microsoft Edge. In this case, the Save a Favorite, Import settings, and context menu options (such as Create a new folder) are turned off.
To define a default list of favorites, do the following:
In the upper-right corner of Microsoft Edge, click the ellipses (**...**) and select **Settings**.
Click **Import from another browser**, click **Export to file** and save the file.
In the **Options** section of the Group Policy Editor, provide the location that points the file with the list of favorites to provision. Specify the URL as:
HTTP location: "SiteList"=
Local network: "SiteList"="\network\shares\URLs.html"
Local file: "SiteList"=file:///c:/Users/Documents/URLs.html
|  |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Provision Favorites
-- **GP name:** ConfiguredFavorites
-- **GP element:** ConfiguredFavoritesPrompt
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[ProvisionFavorites](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-provisionfavorites)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/ProvisionFavorites
-- **Data type:** String
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\Software\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\Favorites
-- **Value name:** ConfiguredFavorites
-- **Value type:** REG_SZ
-
-### Related policies
-[Keep favorites in sync between Internet Explorer and Microsoft Edge](../available-policies.md#keep-favorites-in-sync-between-internet-explorer-and-microsoft-edge): [!INCLUDE [keep-favorites-in-sync-between-ie-and-edge-shortdesc](../shortdesc/keep-favorites-in-sync-between-ie-and-edge-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/search-provider-discovery-shortdesc-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/search-provider-discovery-shortdesc-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ef83bc4778..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/search-provider-discovery-shortdesc-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-[Search provider discovery](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-edge/dev-guide/browser/search-provider-discovery): Microsoft Edge follows the OpenSearch 1.1 specification to discover and use web search providers. When a user browses to a search service, the OpenSearch description is picked up and saved for later use. Users can then choose to add the search service to use in the Microsoft Edge address bar.
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/send-all-intranet-sites-ie-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/send-all-intranet-sites-ie-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 2d8195f03e..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/send-all-intranet-sites-ie-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured*
-
-[!INCLUDE [send-all-intranet-sites-to-ie-shortdesc](../shortdesc/send-all-intranet-sites-to-ie-shortdesc.md)]
-
->[!TIP]
->Microsoft Edge does not support ActiveX controls, Browser Helper Objects, VBScript, or other legacy technology. If you have websites or web apps that still use this technology and needs IE11 to run, you can add them to the Enterprise Mode site list, using Enterprise Mode Site List Manager.
-
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|---------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | 0 | 0 | All sites, including intranet sites, open in Microsoft Edge automatically. |  |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Only intranet sites open in Internet Explorer 11 automatically.
Enabling this policy opens all intranet sites in IE11 automatically, even if the users have Microsoft Edge as their default browser.
In Group Policy Editor, navigate to:
**Computer Configuration\\Administrative Templates\\Windows Components\\File Explorer\\Set a default associations configuration file**
Click **Enable** and then refresh the policy to view the affected sites in Microsoft Edge.
A message opens stating that the page needs to open in IE. At the same time, the page opens in IE11 automatically; in a new frame if it is not yet running, or in a new tab.
| |
-
----
-
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Send all intranet sites to Internet Explorer 11
-- **GP name:** SendIntranetTraffictoInternetExplorer
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[SendIntranetTraffictoInternetExplorer](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-sendintranettraffictointernetexplorer)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/SendIntranetTraffictoInternetExplorer
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\\Software\\Policies\\Microsoft\\MicrosoftEdge\\Main
-- **Value name:** SendIntranetTraffictoInternetExplorer
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-### Related Policies
-- [Configure the Enterprise Mode Site List](../available-policies.md#configure-the-enterprise-mode-site-list): [!INCLUDE [configure-enterprise-mode-site-list-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-enterprise-mode-site-list-shortdesc.md)]
-
-- [Show message when opening sites in Internet Explorer](../available-policies.md#show-message-when-opening-sites-in-internet-explorer): [!INCLUDE [show-message-when-opening-sites-in-ie-shortdesc](../shortdesc/show-message-when-opening-sites-in-ie-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
-### Related topics
-- [Blog: How Microsoft Edge and Internet Explorer 11 on Windows 10 work better together in the Enterprise](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkID=624035). Many customers depend on legacy features only available in older versions of Internet Explorer and are familiar with our Enterprise Mode tools for IE11. The Enterprise Mode has been extended to support to Microsoft Edge by opening any site specified on the Enterprise Mode Site List in IE11. IT Pros can use their existing IE11 Enterprise Mode Site List, or they can create a new one specifically for Microsoft Edge. By keeping Microsoft Edge as the default browser in Windows 10 and only opening legacy line of business sites in IE11 when necessary, you can help keep newer development projects on track, using the latest web standards on Microsoft Edge.
-
-- [Enterprise Mode for Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?linkid=618377). Learn how to set up and use Enterprise Mode and the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager in your company.
-
-- [Use the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](https://docs.microsoft.com/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/use-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager). You can use IE11 and the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager to add individual website domains and domain paths and to specify whether the site renders using Enterprise Mode or the default mode.
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/set-default-search-engine-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/set-default-search-engine-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 104cb3ebdd..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/set-default-search-engine-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,60 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1703 or later*
->*Default setting: Not configured (Defined in App settings)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [set-default-search-engine-shortdesc](../shortdesc/set-default-search-engine-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|---------------------------------|:-----:|:--------:|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Not configured **(default)** | Blank | Blank | Use the search engine specified in App settings. If you don't configure this policy and disable the [Allow search engine customization](../group-policies/search-engine-customization-gp.md#allow-search-engine-customization) policy, users cannot make changes. | |
-| Disabled | 0 | 0 | Remove or don't use the policy-set search engine and use the search engine for the market, letting users make changes. | |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Use the policy-set search engine specified in the OpenSearch XML file, preventing users from making changes.
Specify a link to the OpenSearch XML file that contains, at a minimum, the short name and the URL template (HTTPS) of the search engine. For more information about creating the OpenSearch XML file, see [Search provider discovery](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-edge/dev-guide/browser/search-provider-discovery). Use this format to specify the link you want to add.
If you want your users to use the default Microsoft Edge settings for each market, then set the string to **EDGEDEFAULT**.
If you would like your users to use Microsoft Bing as the default search engine, then set the string to **EDGEBING**. |  |
-
----
-
-
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Set default search engine
-- **GP name:** SetDefaultSearchEngine
-- **GP element:** SetDefaultSearchEngine_Prompt
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** [SetDefaultSearchEngine](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-setdefaultsearchengine)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/SetDefaultSearchEngine
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\\Software\\Policies\\Microsoft\\MicrosoftEdge\\OpenSearch
-- **Value name:** SetDefaultSearchEngine
-- **Value type:** REG_SZ
-
-### Related policies
-
-- [Configure additional search engines](../available-policies.md#configure-additional-search-engines): [!INCLUDE [configure-additional-search-engines-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-additional-search-engines-shortdesc.md)]
-
-- [Allow search engine customization](../available-policies.md#allow-search-engine-customization): [!INCLUDE [allow-search-engine-customization-shortdesc](../shortdesc/allow-search-engine-customization-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Related topics
-
-- [!INCLUDE [microsoft-browser-extension-policy-shortdesc](../shortdesc/microsoft-browser-extension-policy-shortdesc.md)]
-
-- [Search provider discovery](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-edge/dev-guide/browser/search-provider-discovery): The Microsoft Edge address bar uses rich search integration, including search suggestions, results from the web, your browsing history, and favorites.
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/set-home-button-url-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/set-home-button-url-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 3cf0692dbb..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/set-home-button-url-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,52 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1809*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured (Blank)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [set-home-button-url-shortdesc](../shortdesc/set-home-button-url-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description |
-|---------------------------------------------|:------:|:--------:|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | Blank | Blank | Show the home button, load the Start pages, and lock down the home button to prevent users from changing what page loads. |
-| Enabled - String | String | String | Enter a URL in string format, for example, https://www.msn.com.
For this policy to work, you must also enable the [Configure Home Button](../available-policies.md#configure-home-button) policy and select the *Show home button & set a specific page* option. |
-
----
-
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Set Home Button URL
-- **GP name:** SetHomeButtonURL
-- **GP element:** SetHomeButtonURLPrompt
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[SetHomeButtonURL](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-sethomebuttonurl)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop and Mobile
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/SetHomeButtonURL
-- **Data type:** String
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\Software\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\Internet Settings
-- **Value name:** ConfigureHomeButtonURL
-- **Value type:** REG_SZ
-
-### Related policies
-
-- [Configure Home Button](../available-policies.md#configure-home-button): [!INCLUDE [configure-home-button-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-home-button-shortdesc.md)]
-
-- [Unlock Home Button](../available-policies.md#unlock-home-button): [!INCLUDE [unlock-home-button-shortdesc](../shortdesc/unlock-home-button-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/set-new-tab-url-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/set-new-tab-url-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 58536ae480..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/set-new-tab-url-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1809*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured (Blank)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [set-new-tab-url-shortdesc](../shortdesc/set-new-tab-url-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description |
-|---------------------------------------------|:------:|:--------:|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | Blank | Blank | Load the default New Tab page. |
-| Enabled - String | String | String | Enter a URL in string format, for example, https://www.msn.com.
Enabling this policy prevents users from making changes.
|
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Set New Tab page URL
-- **GP name:** SetNewTabPageURL
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[SetNewTabPageURL](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-setnewtabpageurl)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/SetNewTabPageURL
-- **Data type:** String
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\Software\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\Internet Settings
-- **Value name:** NewTabPageUR
-- **Value type:** REG_SZ
-
-
-### Related policies
-
-[Allow web content on New Tab page](../available-policies.md#allow-web-content-on-new-tab-page): [!INCLUDE [allow-web-content-on-new-tab-page-shortdesc](../shortdesc/allow-web-content-on-new-tab-page-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/show-message-opening-sites-ie-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/show-message-opening-sites-ie-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 024279e776..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/show-message-opening-sites-ie-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1607 and later*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured (No additional message)*
-
-
-[!INCLUDE [show-message-when-opening-sites-in-ie-shortdesc](../shortdesc/show-message-when-opening-sites-in-ie-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description | Most restricted |
-|---------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------:|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | 0 | 0 | No additional message displays. |  |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Show an additional message stating that a site has opened in IE11. | |
-| Enabled | 2 | 2 | Show an additional message with a *Keep going in Microsoft Edge* link to allow users to open the site in Microsoft Edge. | |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Show message when opening sites in Internet Explorer
-- **GP name:** ShowMessageWhenOpeningSitesInInternetExplorer
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[ShowMessageWhenOpeningSitesInInternetExplorer](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-showmessagewhenopeningsitesininternetexplorer)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/ShowMessageWhenOpeningSitesInInternetExplorer
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\Software\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\Main
-- **Value name:** ShowMessageWhenOpeningSitesInInternetExplorer
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-### Related policies
-
-- [Configure the Enterprise Mode Site List](../available-policies.md#configure-the-enterprise-mode-site-list): [!INCLUDE [configure-enterprise-mode-site-list-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-enterprise-mode-site-list-shortdesc.md)]
-
-- [Send all intranet sites to Internet Explorer 11](../available-policies.md#send-all-intranet-sites-to-internet-explorer-11): [!INCLUDE [send-all-intranet-sites-to-ie-shortdesc](../shortdesc/send-all-intranet-sites-to-ie-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/includes/unlock-home-button-include.md b/browsers/edge/includes/unlock-home-button-include.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c7dae69002..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/includes/unlock-home-button-include.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-
->*Supported versions: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1809*
->*Default setting: Disabled or not configured (Home button is locked)*
-
-[!INCLUDE [unlock-home-button-shortdesc](../shortdesc/unlock-home-button-shortdesc.md)]
-
-### Supported values
-
-| Group Policy | MDM | Registry | Description |
-|---------------------------------------------|:---:|:--------:|-----------------------------------------------|
-| Disabled or not configured **(default)** | 0 | 0 | Locked, preventing users from making changes. |
-| Enabled | 1 | 1 | Unlocked, letting users make changes. |
-
----
-
-### ADMX info and settings
-#### ADMX info
-- **GP English name:** Unlock Home Button
-- **GP name:** UnlockHomeButton
-- **GP path:** Windows Components/Microsoft Edge
-- **GP ADMX file name:** MicrosoftEdge.admx
-
-#### MDM settings
-- **MDM name:** Browser/[UnlockHomeButton](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-unlockhomebutton)
-- **Supported devices:** Desktop
-- **URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/UnlockHomeButton
-- **Data type:** Integer
-
-#### Registry settings
-- **Path:** HKLM\SOFTWARE\Policies\Microsoft\MicrosoftEdge\Internet Settings
-- **Value name:** UnlockHomeButton
-- **Value type:** REG_DWORD
-
-### Related policies
-
-- [Configure Home Button](../available-policies.md#configure-home-button): [!INCLUDE [configure-home-button-shortdesc](../shortdesc/configure-home-button-shortdesc.md)]
-
-- [Set Home Button URL](../available-policies.md#set-home-button-url): [!INCLUDE [set-home-button-url-shortdesc](../shortdesc/set-home-button-url-shortdesc.md)]
-
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/index.yml b/browsers/edge/index.yml
index 61b851adf2..04b23cd56e 100644
--- a/browsers/edge/index.yml
+++ b/browsers/edge/index.yml
@@ -1,163 +1,93 @@
-### YamlMime:YamlDocument
+### YamlMime:Landing
-documentType: LandingData
-
-title: Microsoft Edge Legacy Group Policy configuration options
+title: Microsoft Edge Group Legacy Policy configuration options # < 60 chars
+summary: Learn how to deploy and configure group policies in Microsoft Edge Legacy on Windows 10. Some of the features coming to Microsoft Edge Legacy gives you the ability to set a custom URL for the New Tab page or Home button. Another new feature allows you to hide or show the Favorites bar, giving you more control over the favorites bar. # < 160 chars
metadata:
-
- document_id:
-
- title: Microsoft Edge Group Legacy Policy configuration options
-
- description:
-
- text: (Note - You've reached the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 45 and earlier. To see the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later, go to the [Microsoft Edge documentation landing page](https://docs.microsoft.com/DeployEdge/).) Learn how to deploy and configure group policies in Microsoft Edge Legacy on Windows 10. Some of the features coming to Microsoft Edge Legacy gives you the ability to set a custom URL for the New Tab page or Home button. Another new feature allows you to hide or show the Favorites bar, giving you more control over the favorites bar.
-
+ title: Microsoft Edge Group Legacy Policy configuration options # Required; page title displayed in search results. Include the brand. < 60 chars.
+ description: Learn about interoperability goals and enterprise guidance along with system requirements, language support and frequently asked questions. # Required; article description that is displayed in search results. < 160 chars.
+ ms.prod: microsoft-edge
keywords: Microsoft Edge Legacy, Windows 10
-
ms.localizationpriority: medium
-
- author: shortpatti
-
- ms.author: pashort
-
- ms.date: 08/09/2018
-
- ms.topic: article
-
- ms.devlang: na
-
-sections:
-
-- title:
-
-- items:
-
- - type: markdown
-
- text: (Note - You've reached the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 45 and earlier. To see the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later, go to the [Microsoft Edge documentation landing page](https://docs.microsoft.com/DeployEdge/).) Learn about interoperability goals and enterprise guidance along with system requirements, language support and frequently asked questions.
-
-- items:
-
- - type: list
-
- style: cards
-
- className: cardsE
-
- columns: 3
-
- items:
-
- - href: https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-edge/deploy/change-history-for-microsoft-edge
-
- html:
Learn more about the latest group policies and features added to Microsoft Edge.
-
-
-
-
-
-
+ ms.topic: landing-page # Required
+ ms.collection: collection # Optional; Remove if no collection is used.
+ author: shortpatti #Required; your GitHub user alias, with correct capitalization.
+ ms.author: pashort #Required; microsoft alias of author; optional team alias.
+ ms.date: 07/07/2020 #Required; mm/dd/yyyy format.
+
+# linkListType: architecture | concept | deploy | download | get-started | how-to-guide | learn | overview | quickstart | reference | sample | tutorial | video | whats-new
+
+landingContent:
+# Cards and links should be based on top customer tasks or top subjects
+# Start card title with a verb
+ # Card (optional)
+ - title: About Microsoft Edge
+ linkLists:
+ - linkListType: whats-new
+ links:
+ - text: Documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later
+ url: /DeployEdge
+ - text: Microsoft 365 apps say farewell to Internet Explorer 11 and Windows 10 sunsets Microsoft Edge Legacy
+ url: https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/t5/microsoft-365-blog/microsoft-365-apps-say-farewell-to-internet-explorer-11-and/ba-p/1591666
+ - text: Latest group policies and features added to Microsoft Edge
+ url: ./change-history-for-microsoft-edge.md
+ - linkListType: overview
+ links:
+ - text: System requirements and supported languages
+ url: ./about-microsoft-edge.md
+ - text: Compare Windows 10 editions
+ url: https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/WindowsForBusiness/Compare
+ - text: Security & protection
+ url: ./group-policies/security-privacy-management-gp.md
+ - text: Interoperability & enterprise guidance
+ url: ./group-policies/interoperability-enterprise-guidance-gp.md
+ - text: Group policies & configuration options
+ url: ./group-policies/index.yml
+
+ # Card (optional)
+ - title: Microsoft Edge resources
+ linkLists:
+ - linkListType: overview
+ links:
+ - text: Minimum system requirements
+ url: ./about-microsoft-edge.md#minimum-system-requirements
+ - text: Supported languages
+ url: ./about-microsoft-edge.md#supported-languages
+ - text: Document change history
+ url: ./change-history-for-microsoft-edge.md
+ - text: Microsoft Edge Dev blog
+ url: https://blogs.windows.com/msedgedev
+ - text: Microsoft Edge Dev on Twitter
+ url: ./about-microsoft-edge.md#supported-languages
+ - text: Microsoft Edge changelog
+ url: ./change-history-for-microsoft-edge.md
+ - text: Measuring the impact of Microsoft Edge
+ url: https://blogs.windows.com/msedgedev
+
+ # Card (optional)
+ - title: IE11 resources
+ linkLists:
+ - linkListType: overview
+ links:
+ - text: Deploy Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) - IT Pros
+ url: /internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/
+ - text: Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11)
+ url: /internet-explorer/ie11-ieak
+ - linkListType: download
+ links:
+ - text: Download Internet Explorer 11
+ url: https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?linkid=290956
+
+ # Card (optional)
+ - title: Additional resources
+ linkLists:
+ - linkListType: overview
+ links:
+ - text: Group Policy and the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC)
+ url: /internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-group-policy-mgmt-console-ie11
+ - text: Group Policy and the Local Group Policy Editor
+ url: /internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-local-group-policy-editor-ie11
+ - text: Group Policy and the Advanced Group Policy Management (AGPM)
+ url: /internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-advanced-group-policy-mgmt-ie11
+ - text: Group Policy and Windows PowerShell
+ url: /internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-windows-powershell-ie11
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/edge/managing-group-policy-admx-files.md b/browsers/edge/managing-group-policy-admx-files.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8b93e0ebc2..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/managing-group-policy-admx-files.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Managing group policy ADMX files
-description: Learn how to centrally administer and incorporate ADMX files when editing the administrative template policy settings inside a local or domain-based Group Policy object.
-ms.assetid:
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.date: 10/19/2018
----
-
-# Managing group policy ADMX files
-
->Applies to: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10
-
-ADMX files, which are registry-based policy settings provide an XML-based structure for defining the display of the Administrative Template policy settings in the Group Policy Object Editor. The ADMX files replace ADM files, which used a different markup language.
-
->[!NOTE]
->The administrative tools you use—Group Policy Object Editor and Group Policy Management Console—remain mostly unchanged. In the majority of situations, you won’t notice the presence of ADMX files during your day-to-day Group Policy administration tasks.
-
-Unlike ADM files, ADMX files are not stored in individual GPOs by default; however, this behavior supports less common scenarios. For domain-based enterprises, you can create a central store location of ADMX files accessible by anyone with permission to create or edit GPOs. Group Policy tools continue to recognize other earlier ADM files you have in your existing environment. The Group Policy Object Editor automatically reads and displays Administrative Template policy settings from both the ADMX and ADM files.
-
-Some situations require a better understanding of how ADMX files are structured and the location of the files. In this article, we show you how ADMX files are incorporated when editing Administrative Template policy settings in a local or domain-based Group Policy object (GPO).
diff --git a/browsers/edge/microsoft-edge-faq.md b/browsers/edge/microsoft-edge-faq.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 632905e3cb..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/microsoft-edge-faq.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft Edge - Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) for IT Pros
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-description: Answers to frequently asked questions about Microsoft Edge features, integration, support, and potential problems.
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: article
-ms.mktglfcycl: general
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) for IT Pros
-
->Applies to: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10 and Windows 10 Mobile
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You've reached the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 45 and earlier. To see the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later, go to the [Microsoft Edge documentation landing page](https://docs.microsoft.com/DeployEdge/).
-
-## How can I get the next major version of Microsoft Edge, based on Chromium?
-In December 2018, Microsoft [announced](https://blogs.windows.com/windowsexperience/2018/12/06/microsoft-edge-making-the-web-better-through-more-open-source-collaboration/#8jv53blDvL6TIKuS.97) our intention to adopt the Chromium open source project in the development of Microsoft Edge on the desktop, to create better web compatibility for our customers and less fragmentation of the web for all web developers. You can get more information at the [Microsoft Edge Insiders site](https://www.microsoftedgeinsider.com/).
-
-## What’s the difference between Microsoft Edge and Internet Explorer 11? How do I know which one to use?
-Microsoft Edge is the default browser for all Windows 10 devices. It’s built to be highly compatible with the modern web. For some enterprise web apps and a small set of sites that were built to work with older technologies like ActiveX, [you can use Enterprise Mode](emie-to-improve-compatibility.md) to automatically send users to Internet Explorer 11.
-
-For more information on how Internet Explorer and Microsoft Edge work together to support your legacy web apps, while still defaulting to the higher security and modern experiences enabled by Microsoft Edge, see [Legacy apps in the enterprise](https://blogs.windows.com/msedgedev/2017/04/07/legacy-web-apps-enterprise/#RAbtRvJSYFaKu2BI.97).
-
-## Does Microsoft Edge work with Enterprise Mode?
-[Enterprise Mode](https://docs.microsoft.com/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/enterprise-mode-overview-for-ie11) helps you run many legacy web applications with better backward compatibility. You can configure both Microsoft Edge and Internet Explorer to use the same Enterprise Mode Site List, switching seamlessly between browsers to support both modern and legacy web apps.
-
-## How do I customize Microsoft Edge and related settings for my organization?
-You can use Group Policy or Microsoft Intune to manage settings related to Microsoft Edge, such as security settings, folder redirection, and preferences. See [Group Policy and Mobile Device Management (MDM) settings for Microsoft Edge](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-edge/deploy/group-policies/) for a list of policies currently available for Microsoft Edge and configuration information. Note that the preview release of Chromium-based Microsoft Edge might not include management policies or other enterprise functionality; our focus during the preview is modern browser fundamentals.
-
-## Is Adobe Flash supported in Microsoft Edge?
-Adobe Flash is currently supported as a built-in feature of Microsoft Edge on PCs running Windows 10. In July 2017, Adobe announced that Flash support will end after 2020. With this change to Adobe support, we’ve started to phase Flash out of Microsoft Edge by adding the [Configure the Adobe Flash Click-to-Run setting group policy](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-edge/deploy/available-policies#configure-the-adobe-flash-click-to-run-setting) - this lets you control which websites can run Adobe Flash content.
-
-To learn more about Microsoft’s plan for phasing Flash out of Microsoft Edge and Internet Explorer, see [The End of an Era — Next Steps for Adobe Flash](https://blogs.windows.com/msedgedev/2017/07/25/flash-on-windows-timeline/#3Bcc3QjRw0l7XsZ4.97) (blog article).
-
-## Does Microsoft Edge support ActiveX controls or BHOs like Silverlight or Java?
-No. Microsoft Edge doesn’t support ActiveX controls and BHOs like Silverlight or Java. If you’re running web apps that use ActiveX controls, x-ua-compatible headers, or legacy document modes, you need to keep running them in IE11. IE11 offers additional security, manageability, performance, backward compatibility, and standards support.
-
-## How often will Microsoft Edge be updated?
-In Windows 10, we’re delivering Windows as a service, updated on a cadence driven by quality and the availability of new features. Microsoft Edge security updates are released every two to four weeks, while bigger feature updates are included in the Windows 10 releases on a semi-annual cadence.
-
-## How can I provide feedback on Microsoft Edge?
-Microsoft Edge is an evergreen browser - we’ll continue to evolve both the web platform and the user interface with regular updates. To send feedback on user experience, or on broken or malicious sites, use the **Send Feedback** option under the ellipses icon (**...**) in the Microsoft Edge toolbar.
-
-## Will Internet Explorer 11 continue to receive updates?
-We’re committed to keeping Internet Explorer a supported, reliable, and safe browser. Internet Explorer is still a component of Windows and follows the support lifecycle of the OS on which it’s installed. For details, see [Lifecycle FAQ - Internet Explorer](https://support.microsoft.com/help/17454/). While we continue to support and update Internet Explorer, the latest features and platform updates will only be available in Microsoft Edge.
-
-## How do I find out what version of Microsoft Edge I have?
-In the upper right corner of Microsoft Edge, click the ellipses icon (**...**), and then click **Settings**. Look in the **About Microsoft Edge** section to find your version.
-
-## What is Microsoft EdgeHTML?
-Microsoft EdgeHTML is the web rendering engine that powers the current Microsoft Edge web browser and Windows 10 web app platform. (As opposed to *Microsoft Edge, based on Chromium*.)
diff --git a/browsers/edge/microsoft-edge-faq.yml b/browsers/edge/microsoft-edge-faq.yml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..126a8572e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/browsers/edge/microsoft-edge-faq.yml
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+### YamlMime:FAQ
+metadata:
+ title: Microsoft Edge - Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) for IT Pros
+ ms.reviewer:
+ audience: itpro
+ manager: dansimp
+ description: Answers to frequently asked questions about Microsoft Edge features, integration, support, and potential problems.
+ author: dansimp
+ ms.author: dansimp
+ ms.prod: edge
+ ms.topic: article
+ ms.mktglfcycl: general
+ ms.sitesec: library
+ ms.localizationpriority: medium
+
+title: Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) for IT Pros
+summary: |
+ Applies to: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10 and Windows 10 Mobile
+
+ > [!NOTE]
+ > You've reached the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 45 and earlier. To see the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later, go to the [Microsoft Edge documentation landing page](/DeployEdge/).
+
+
+sections:
+ - name: Ignored
+ questions:
+ - question: How can I get the next major version of Microsoft Edge, based on Chromium?
+ answer: |
+ In December 2018, Microsoft [announced](https://blogs.windows.com/windowsexperience/2018/12/06/microsoft-edge-making-the-web-better-through-more-open-source-collaboration/#8jv53blDvL6TIKuS.97) our intention to adopt the Chromium open source project in the development of Microsoft Edge on the desktop, to create better web compatibility for our customers and less fragmentation of the web for all web developers. You can get more information at the [Microsoft Edge Insiders site](https://www.microsoftedgeinsider.com/).
+
+ - question: What's the difference between Microsoft Edge and Internet Explorer 11? How do I know which one to use?
+ answer: |
+ Microsoft Edge is the default browser for all Windows 10 devices. It's built to be highly compatible with the modern web. For some enterprise web apps and a small set of sites that were built to work with older technologies like ActiveX, [you can use Enterprise Mode](emie-to-improve-compatibility.md) to automatically send users to Internet Explorer 11.
+
+ For more information on how Internet Explorer and Microsoft Edge work together to support your legacy web apps, while still defaulting to the higher security and modern experiences enabled by Microsoft Edge, see [Legacy apps in the enterprise](https://blogs.windows.com/msedgedev/2017/04/07/legacy-web-apps-enterprise/#RAbtRvJSYFaKu2BI.97).
+
+ - question: Does Microsoft Edge work with Enterprise Mode?
+ answer: |
+ [Enterprise Mode](/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/enterprise-mode-overview-for-ie11) helps you run many legacy web applications with better backward compatibility. You can configure both Microsoft Edge and Internet Explorer to use the same Enterprise Mode Site List, switching seamlessly between browsers to support both modern and legacy web apps.
+
+ - question: How do I customize Microsoft Edge and related settings for my organization?
+ answer: |
+ You can use Group Policy or Microsoft Intune to manage settings related to Microsoft Edge, such as security settings, folder redirection, and preferences. See [Group Policy and Mobile Device Management (MDM) settings for Microsoft Edge](./group-policies/index.yml) for a list of policies currently available for Microsoft Edge and configuration information. Note that the preview release of Chromium-based Microsoft Edge might not include management policies or other enterprise functionality; our focus during the preview is modern browser fundamentals.
+
+ - question: Is Adobe Flash supported in Microsoft Edge?
+ answer: |
+ Adobe Flash is currently supported as a built-in feature of Microsoft Edge on PCs running Windows 10. In July 2017, Adobe announced that Flash support will end after 2020. With this change to Adobe support, we've started to phase Flash out of Microsoft Edge by adding the [Configure the Adobe Flash Click-to-Run setting group policy](./available-policies.md#configure-the-adobe-flash-click-to-run-setting) - this lets you control which websites can run Adobe Flash content.
+
+ To learn more about Microsoft's plan for phasing Flash out of Microsoft Edge and Internet Explorer, see [The End of an Era — Next Steps for Adobe Flash](https://blogs.windows.com/msedgedev/2017/07/25/flash-on-windows-timeline/#3Bcc3QjRw0l7XsZ4.97) (blog article).
+
+ - question: Does Microsoft Edge support ActiveX controls or BHOs like Silverlight or Java?
+ answer: |
+ No, Microsoft Edge doesn't support ActiveX controls and Browser Helper Objects (BHOs) like Silverlight or Java. If you're running web apps that use ActiveX controls, x-ua-compatible headers, or legacy document modes, you need to keep running them in Internet Explorer 11. Internet Explorer 11 offers additional security, manageability, performance, backward compatibility, and standards support.
+
+ - question: How often will Microsoft Edge be updated?
+ answer: |
+ In Windows 10, we're delivering Windows as a service, updated on a cadence driven by quality and the availability of new features. Microsoft Edge security updates are released every two to four weeks, while bigger feature updates are included in the Windows 10 releases on a semi-annual cadence.
+
+ - question: How can I provide feedback on Microsoft Edge?
+ answer: |
+ Microsoft Edge is an evergreen browser - we'll continue to evolve both the web platform and the user interface with regular updates. To send feedback on user experience, or on broken or malicious sites, use the **Send Feedback** option under the ellipses icon (**...**) in the Microsoft Edge toolbar.
+
+ - question: Will Internet Explorer 11 continue to receive updates?
+ answer: |
+ We're committed to keeping Internet Explorer a supported, reliable, and safe browser. Internet Explorer is still a component of Windows and follows the support lifecycle of the OS on which it's installed. For details, see [Lifecycle FAQ - Internet Explorer](https://support.microsoft.com/help/17454/). While we continue to support and update Internet Explorer, the latest features and platform updates will only be available in Microsoft Edge.
+
+ - question: How do I find out which version of Microsoft Edge I have?
+ answer: |
+ In the upper-right corner of Microsoft Edge, select the ellipses icon (**...**), and then select **Settings**. Look in the **About Microsoft Edge** section to find your version.
+
+ - question: What is Microsoft EdgeHTML?
+ answer: |
+ Microsoft EdgeHTML is the web rendering engine that powers the current Microsoft Edge web browser and Windows 10 web app platform (as opposed to *Microsoft Edge, based on Chromium*).
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/edge/microsoft-edge-forrester.md b/browsers/edge/microsoft-edge-forrester.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 23c3505440..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/microsoft-edge-forrester.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,37 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Forrester Total Economic Impact - Microsoft Edge
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-description: Review the results of the Microsoft Edge study carried out by Forrester Research
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: article
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: high
----
-# Measuring the impact of Microsoft Edge - Total Economic Impact (TEI) of Microsoft Edge
-
-Forrester Research measures the return on investment (ROI) of Microsoft Edge in its latest TEI report and survey. Browse and download these free resources to learn about the impact Microsoft Edge can have in your organization, including significant cost savings in reduced browser help desk tickets and improved browser security, to increased speed, performance, and user productivity.
-
-## Forrester report video summary
-View a brief overview of the Forrester TEI case study that Microsoft commissioned to examine the value your organization can achieve by utilizing Microsoft Edge:
-
-> ![VIDEO ]
-
-## Forrester Study report
-
-Forrester interviewed several customers with more than six months of experience using Microsoft Edge – all customers reported improvements in browser security, increased user productivity, and efficiencies gained in supporting the software.
-
-[Download the full report](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=55847)
-
-## Forrester Study report infographic
-Get a graphical summary of the TEI of Microsoft Edge Forrester Study report and highlights of the three-year financial impact of Microsoft Edge.
-
-[Download the report infographic](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=55956)
-
-## Forrester survey infographic
-
-Forrester surveyed 168 customers using Microsoft Edge form the US, Germany, UK, and Japan, ranging in size from 500 to over 100,000 employees. This document is an abridged version of this survey commissioned by Microsoft and delivery by Forrester consulting.
-
-[Download the survey infographic](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=53892)
diff --git a/browsers/edge/microsoft-edge-kiosk-mode-deploy.md b/browsers/edge/microsoft-edge-kiosk-mode-deploy.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c336f03247..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/microsoft-edge-kiosk-mode-deploy.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,269 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploy Microsoft Edge kiosk mode
-description: Microsoft Edge kiosk mode works with assigned access to allow IT admins to create a tailored browsing experience designed for kiosk devices. To use Microsoft Edge kiosk mode, you must configure Microsoft Edge as an application in assigned access.
-ms.assetid:
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.date: 10/29/2018
----
-
-# Deploy Microsoft Edge kiosk mode
-
->Applies to: Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1809
->Professional, Enterprise, and Education
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You've reached the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 45 and earlier. To see the documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later, go to the [Microsoft Edge documentation landing page](https://docs.microsoft.com/DeployEdge/).
-
-In the Windows 10 October 2018 Update, we added the capability to use Microsoft Edge as a kiosk using assigned access. With assigned access, you create a tailored browsing experience locking down a Windows 10 device to only run as a single-app or multi-app kiosk. Assigned access restricts a local standard user account so that it only has access to one or more Windows app, such as Microsoft Edge in kiosk mode.
-
-In this topic, you learn how to configure the behavior of Microsoft Edge when it's running in kiosk mode with assigned access. You also learn how to set up your kiosk device using either Windows Setting or Microsoft Intune or other MDM service.
-
-At the end of this topic, you can find a list of [supported policies](#supported-policies-for-kiosk-mode) for kiosk mode and a [feature comparison](#feature-comparison-of-kiosk-mode-and-kiosk-browser-app) of the kiosk mode policy and kiosk browser app. You also find instructions on how to provide us feedback or get support.
-
-
-## Kiosk mode configuration types
-
->**Policy** = Configure kiosk mode (ConfigureKioskMode)
-
-Microsoft Edge kiosk mode supports four configurations types that depend on how Microsoft Edge is set up with assigned access, either as a single-app or multi-app kiosk. These configuration types help you determine what is best suited for your kiosk device or scenario.
-
-- Learn about [creating a kiosk experience](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows-hardware/customize/enterprise/create-a-kiosk-image)
-
- - [Set up a kiosk or digital signage on Windows 10 Pro, Enterprise, or Education](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/configuration/setup-kiosk-digital-signage)
-
- - [Create a Windows 10 kiosk that runs multiple apps](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/configuration/lock-down-windows-10-to-specific-apps).
-
-- Learn about configuring a more secure kiosk experience: [Other settings to lock down](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/configuration/setup-kiosk-digital-signage#other-settings-to-lock-down).
-
-
-### Important things to remember before getting started
-
-- The public browsing kiosk types run Microsoft Edge InPrivate mode to protect user data with a browsing experience designed for public kiosks.
-
-- Microsoft Edge kiosk mode has a built-in timer to help keep data safe in public browsing sessions. When the idle time (no user activity) meets the time limit, a confirmation message prompts the user to continue, and if no user activity Microsoft Edge resets the session to the default URL. By default, the idle timer is 5 minutes, but you can choose a value of your own.
-
-- Optionally, you can define a single URL for the Home button, Start page, and New Tab page. See [Supported policies for kiosk mode](#supported-policies-for-kiosk-mode) to learn more.
-
-- No matter which configuration type you choose, you must set up Microsoft Edge in assigned access; otherwise, Microsoft Edge ignores the settings in this policy (Configure kiosk mode/ConfigureKioskMode).
Learn more about assigned access:
-
- - [Configure kiosk and shared devices running Windows desktop editions](https://aka.ms/E489vw).
-
- - [Kiosk apps for assigned access best practices](https://aka.ms/H1s8y4).
-
- - [Guidelines for choosing an app for assigned access (kiosk mode)](https://aka.ms/Ul7dw3).
-
-
-### Supported configuration types
-
-[!INCLUDE [configure-kiosk-mode-supported-values-include](includes/configure-kiosk-mode-supported-values-include.md)]
-
-## Set up Microsoft Edge kiosk mode
-
-Now that you're familiar with the different kiosk mode configurations and have the one you want to use in mind, you can use one of the following methods to set up Microsoft Edge kiosk mode:
-
-- **Windows Settings.** Use only to set up a couple of single-app devices because you perform these steps physically on each device. For a multi-app kiosk device, use Microsoft Intune or other MDM service.
-
-- **Microsoft Intune or other MDM service.** Use to set up several single-app or multi-app kiosk devices. Microsoft Intune and other MDM service providers offer more options for customizing the Microsoft Edge kiosk mode experience using any of the [Supported policies for kiosk mode](#supported-policies-for-kiosk-mode).
-
-
-### Prerequisites
-
-- Microsoft Edge on Windows 10, version 1809 (Professional, Enterprise, and Education).
-
-- URL to load when the kiosk launches. The URL that you provide sets the Home button, Start page, and New Tab page.
-
-- _**For Microsoft Intune or other MDM service**_, you must have the AppUserModelID (AUMID) to set up Microsoft Edge:
-
- ```
- Microsoft.MicrosoftEdge_8wekyb3d8bbwe!MicrosoftEdge
- ```
-
-
-### Use Windows Settings
-
-Windows Settings is the simplest and the only way to set up one or a couple of single-app devices.
-
-
-1. On the kiosk device, open Windows Settings, and in the search field type **kiosk** and then select **Set up a kiosk (assigned access)**.
-
-2. On the **Set up a kiosk** page, click **Get started**.
-
-3. Type a name to create a new kiosk account, or choose an existing account from the populated list and click **Next**.
-
-4. On the **Choose a kiosk app** page, select **Microsoft Edge** and then click **Next**.
-
-5. Select how Microsoft Edge displays when running in kiosk mode:
-
- - **As a digital sign or interactive display** - Displays a specific site in full-screen mode, running Microsoft Edge InPrivate protecting user data.
-
- - **As a public browser** - Runs a limited multi-tab version of Microsoft Edge, protecting user data.
-
-6. Select **Next**.
-
-7. Type the URL to load when the kiosk launches.
-
-8. Accept the default value of **5 minutes** for the idle time or provide a value of your own.
-
-9. Click **Next**.
-
-10. Close the **Settings** window to save and apply your choices.
-
-11. Restart the kiosk device and sign in with the local kiosk account to validate the configuration.
-
-**_Congratulations!_**
You’ve just finished setting up a single-app kiosk device using Windows Settings.
-
-**_What's next?_**
-
-- User your new kiosk device.
- OR
-- Make changes to your kiosk device. In Windows Settings, on the **Set up a kiosk** page, make your changes to **Choose a kiosk mode** and **Set up Microsoft Edge**.
-
----
-
-
-### Use Microsoft Intune or other MDM service
-
-With this method, you can use Microsoft Intune or other MDM services to configure Microsoft Edge kiosk mode in assigned access and how it behaves on a kiosk device. To learn about a few app fundamentals and requirements before adding them to Intune, see [Add apps to Microsoft Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/apps-add).
-
->[!IMPORTANT]
->If you are using a local account as a kiosk account in Microsoft Intune, make sure to sign into this account and then sign out before configuring the kiosk device.
-
-1. In Microsoft Intune or other MDM service, configure [AssignedAccess](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/assignedaccess-csp) to prevent users from accessing the file system, running executables, or other apps.
-
-2. Configure the following MDM settings to setup Microsoft Edge kiosk mode on the kiosk device and then restart the device.
-
- | | |
- |---|---|
- | **[ConfigureKioskMode](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-configurekioskmode)**
 | Configure the display mode for Microsoft Edge as a kiosk app.
**URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/ConfigureKioskMode
**Data type:** Integer
**Allowed values:**
**Single-app kiosk experience**
**0** - Digital signage and interactive display
**1** - InPrivate Public browsing
**Multi-app kiosk experience**
**0** - Normal Microsoft Edge running in assigned access
 | Change the time in minutes from the last user activity before Microsoft Edge kiosk mode resets the user's session.
**URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/ConfigureKioskResetAfterIdleTimeout
**Data type:** Integer
**Allowed values:**
**0** - No idle timer
**1-1440 (5 minutes is the default)** - Set reset on idle timer
 | Set one or more start pages, URLs, to load when Microsoft Edge launches.
**URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/HomePages
**Data type:** String
**Allowed values:**
Enter one or more URLs, for example, \\ |
- | **[ConfigureHomeButton](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-configurehomebutton)**
 | Configure how the Home Button behaves.
**URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/ConfigureHomeButton
**Data type:** Integer
**Allowed values:**
**0 (default)** - Not configured. Show home button, and load the default Start page.
**1** - Enabled. Show home button and load New Tab page
**2** - Enabled. Show home button & set a specific page.
 | If you set ConfigureHomeButton to 2, configure the home button URL.
**URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/SetHomeButtonURL
**Data type:** String
**Allowed values:** Enter a URL, for example, https://www.bing.com |
- | **[SetNewTabPageURL](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-setnewtabpageurl)**
 | Set a custom URL for the New Tab page.
**URI full path:** ./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Browser/SetNewTabPageURL
**Data type:** String
**Allowed values:** Enter a URL, for example, https://www.msn.com |
-
-
-**_Congratulations!_**
You’ve just finished setting up a kiosk or digital signage with policies for Microsoft Edge kiosk mode using Microsoft Intune or other MDM service.
-
-**_What's next?_**
-*1) For multi-app assigned access, you must configure Internet Explorer 11.*
-*2) For digital/interactive signage to enable Flash, set [AllowFlashClickToRun](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-browser#browser-allowflashclicktorun) to 0.*
-
-**Legend:**
-  = Not applicable or not supported
-  = Supported
-
----
-
-## Feature comparison of kiosk mode and kiosk browser app
-In the following table, we show you the features available in both Microsoft Edge kiosk mode and Kiosk Browser app available in Microsoft Store. Both kiosk mode and kiosk browser app work in assigned access.
-
-
-| **Feature** | **Microsoft Edge kiosk mode** | **Microsoft Kiosk browser app** |
-|-----------------------------------------------------------|:---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------:|:-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------:|
-| Print support |  |  |
-| Multi-tab support |  |  |
-| Allow/Block URL support |   |
-| Configure Home Button |  |  |
-| Set Start page(s) URL |  | 
*Same as Home button URL* |
-| Set New Tab page URL |  |  |
-| Favorites management |  |  |
-| End session button |  | 
*In Microsoft Intune, you must create a custom URI to enable. Dedicated UI configuration introduced in version 1808.* |
-| Reset on inactivity |  |  |
-| Internet Explorer integration (Enterprise Mode site list) | 
*Multi-app mode only* |  |
-| Available in Microsoft Store |  |  |
-| SKU availability | Windows 10 October 2018 Update Professional, Enterprise, and Education | Windows 10 April 2018 Update Professional, Enterprise, and Education |
-
-**\*Windows Defender Firewall**
-To prevent access to unwanted websites on your kiosk device, use Windows Defender Firewall to configure a list of allowed websites, blocked websites or both, using IP addresses. For more details, see [Windows Defender Firewall with Advanced Security Deployment Guide](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/security/threat-protection/windows-firewall/windows-firewall-with-advanced-security-deployment-guide).
-
----
-
-## Provide feedback or get support
-
-To provide feedback on Microsoft Edge kiosk mode in Feedback Hub, select **Microsoft Edge** as the **Category**, and **All other issues** as the subcategory.
-
-**_For multi-app kiosk only._** If you have set up the Feedback Hub in assigned access, you can you submit the feedback from the device running Microsoft Edge in kiosk mode in which you can include diagnostic logs. In the Feedback Hub, select **Microsoft Edge** as the **Category**, and **All other issues** as the subcategory.
-
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/microsoft-edge.yml b/browsers/edge/microsoft-edge.yml
index 5c105dcdc2..54276502a1 100644
--- a/browsers/edge/microsoft-edge.yml
+++ b/browsers/edge/microsoft-edge.yml
@@ -1,61 +1,144 @@
-### YamlMime:YamlDocument
+### YamlMime:Landing
+
+title: Microsoft Edge Legacy # < 60 chars
+summary: Find the tools and resources you need to help deploy and use Microsoft Edge in your organization. # < 160 chars
-documentType: LandingData
-title: Microsoft Edge
metadata:
- document_id:
- title: Microsoft Edge
- description: Find the tools and resources you need to help deploy and use Microsoft Edge in your organization.
+ title: Microsoft Edge Legacy # Required; page title displayed in search results. Include the brand. < 60 chars.
+ description: Find the tools and resources you need to help deploy and use Microsoft Edge in your organization. # Required; article description that is displayed in search results. < 160 chars.
keywords: Microsoft Edge, issues, fixes, announcements, Windows Server, advisories
+ ms.prod: edge
ms.localizationpriority: medium
author: lizap
ms.author: elizapo
manager: dougkim
- ms.topic: article
+ ms.topic: landing-page
ms.devlang: na
+ ms.date: 08/19/2020 #Required; mm/dd/yyyy format.
-sections:
-- items:
- - type: markdown
- text: "
- Find the tools and resources you need to help deploy and use Microsoft Edge in your organization.
- "
-- title: What's new
-- items:
- - type: markdown
- text: "
- Find out the latest and greatest news on Microsoft Edge.
-
**The latest in Microsoft Edge** See what's new for users and developers in the next update to Microsoft Edge - now available with the Windows 10 April 2018 update! Find out more
**Evaluate the impact** Review the latest Forrester Total Economic Impact (TEI) report to learn about the impact Microsoft Edge can have in your organization. Download the reports
**Microsoft Edge for iOS and Android** Microsoft Edge brings familiar features across your PC and phone, which allows browsing to go with you, no matter what device you use. Learn more
**Application Guard** Microsoft Edge with Windows Defender Application Guard is the most secure browser on Windows 10 Enterprise. Learn more
-
- "
-- title: Compatibility
-- items:
- - type: markdown
- text: "
- Even if you still have legacy apps in your organization, you can default to the secure, modern experience of Microsoft Edge and provide a consistent level of compatibility with existing legacy applications.
-
**Web Application Compatibility Lab Kit** The Web Application Compatibility Lab Kit is a primer for the features and techniques used to provide web application compatibility during a typical enterprise migration to Microsoft Edge. Find out more
-
- "
-- title: Security
-- items:
- - type: markdown
- text: "
- Microsoft Edge uses Windows Hello and Windows Defender SmartScreen to defend against phishing and malware. Take a look at some of the additional features behind the strong defense that Microsoft Edge provides against web-based attacks.
-
**NSS Labs web browser security reports** See the results of two global tests measuring how effective browsers are at protecting against socially engineered malware and phishing attacks. Download the reports
**Microsoft Edge sandbox** See how Microsoft Edge has significantly reduced the attack surface of the sandbox by configuring the app container to further reduce its privilege. Find out more
**Windows Defender SmartScreen** Manage your organization's computer settings with Group Policy and MDM settings to display a warning page to employees or block a site entirely. Read the docs
-
- "
-- title: Deployment and end user readiness
-- items:
- - type: markdown
- text: "
- Find resources and learn about features to help you deploy Microsoft Edge in your organization to get your users up and running quickly.
-
**Sign up for the Windows IT Pro Insider** Get the latest tools, tips, and expert guidance on deployment, management, security, and more. Learn more
**Microsoft Edge Dev blog** Keep up with the latest browser trends, security tips, and news for IT professionals. Read the blog
**Microsoft Edge Dev on Twitter** Get the latest news and updates from the Microsoft Web Platform team. Visit Twitter
-
- "
+# linkListType: architecture | concept | deploy | download | get-started | how-to-guide | learn | overview | quickstart | reference | sample | tutorial | video | whats-new
+
+landingContent:
+# Cards and links should be based on top customer tasks or top subjects
+# Start card title with a verb
+ # Card (optional)
+ - title: What's new
+ linkLists:
+ - linkListType: whats-new
+ links:
+ - text: Documentation for Microsoft Edge version 77 or later
+ url: /DeployEdge/
+ - text: Microsoft Edge Legacy desktop app will reach end of support on March 9, 2021
+ url: https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/t5/microsoft-365-blog/microsoft-365-apps-say-farewell-to-internet-explorer-11-and/ba-p/1591666
+ - text: The latest in Microsoft Edge
+ url: https://blogs.windows.com/msedgedev/2018/04/30/edgehtml-17-april-2018-update/#C7jCBdbPSG6bCXHr.97
+ - text: Microsoft Edge for iOS and Android
+ url: https://blogs.windows.com/windowsexperience/2017/11/30/microsoft-edge-now-available-for-ios-and-android
+ - text: Application Guard
+ url: /windows/security/threat-protection/windows-defender-application-guard/wd-app-guard-overview
+ - linkListType: download
+ links:
+ - text: Evaluate the impact
+ url: ./microsoft-edge-forrester.md
+
+ # Card (optional)
+ - title: Test your site on Microsoft Edge
+ linkLists:
+ - linkListType: overview
+ links:
+ - text: Test your site on Microsoft Edge for free on BrowserStack
+ url: https://developer.microsoft.com/microsoft-edge/tools/remote/
+ - text: Use sonarwhal to improve your website
+ url: https://sonarwhal.com/
+
+ # Card (optional)
+ - title: Improve compatibility with Enterprise Mode
+ linkLists:
+ - linkListType: how-to-guide
+ links:
+ - text: Use Enterprise mode to improve compatibility
+ url: ./emie-to-improve-compatibility.md
+ - text: Turn on Enterprise Mode and use a site list
+ url: /internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/turn-on-enterprise-mode-and-use-a-site-list
+ - text: Enterprise Site List Portal
+ url: https://github.com/MicrosoftEdge/enterprise-mode-site-list-portal
+
+ # Card (optional)
+ - title: Web Application Compatibility Lab Kit
+ linkLists:
+ - linkListType: overview
+ links:
+ - text: Overview
+ url: ./emie-to-improve-compatibility.md
+
+ # Card (optional)
+ - title: Security
+ linkLists:
+ - linkListType: download
+ links:
+ - text: NSS Labs web browser security reports
+ url: https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=54773
+ - linkListType: overview
+ links:
+ - text: Microsoft Edge sandbox
+ url: https://blogs.windows.com/msedgedev/2017/03/23/strengthening-microsoft-edge-sandbox/
+ - text: Windows Defender SmartScreen
+ url: /windows/security/threat-protection/windows-defender-smartscreen/windows-defender-smartscreen-overview
+
+ # Card (optional)
+ - title: Deployment
+ linkLists:
+ - linkListType: overview
+ links:
+ - text: Microsoft Edge deployment guide
+ url: ./index.yml
+ - text: Microsoft Edge FAQ
+ url: ./microsoft-edge-faq.yml
+ - text: System requirements and language support
+ url: /microsoft-edge/deploy/hardware-and-software-requirements
+ - text: Group Policy and MDM settings in Microsoft Edge
+ url: ./available-policies.md
+ - text: Microsoft Edge training and demonstrations
+ url: ./edge-technical-demos.md
+ - linkListType: download
+ links:
+ - text: Web Application Compatibility Lab Kit
+ url: https://www.microsoft.com/itpro/microsoft-edge/web-app-compat-toolkit
+
+ # Card (optional)
+ - title: End user readiness
+ linkLists:
+ - linkListType: video
+ links:
+ - text: Microsoft Edge tips and tricks (video, 20:26)
+ url: https://myignite.microsoft.com/sessions/56630?source=sessions
+ - linkListType: download
+ links:
+ - text: Quick Start - Microsoft Edge (PDF, .98 MB)
+ url: https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=825648
+ - text: Find it faster with Microsoft Edge (PDF, 605 KB)
+ url: https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=825661
+ - text: Use Microsoft Edge to collaborate (PDF, 468 KB)
+ url: https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=825653
+ - text: Group Policy and MDM settings in Microsoft Edge
+ url: ./available-policies.md
+ - text: Microsoft Edge training and demonstrations
+ url: ./edge-technical-demos.md
+ - linkListType: how-to-guide
+ links:
+ - text: Import bookmarks
+ url: https://microsoftedgetips.microsoft.com/2/39
+ - text: Password management
+ url: https://microsoftedgetips.microsoft.com/2/18
+
+ # Card (optional)
+ - title: Stay informed
+ linkLists:
+ - linkListType: overview
+ links:
+ - text: Sign up for the Windows IT Pro Insider
+ url: https://aka.ms/windows-it-pro-insider
+ - text: Microsoft Edge Dev blog
+ url: https://blogs.windows.com/msedgedev
+ - text: Microsoft Edge Dev on Twitter
+ url: https://twitter.com/MSEdgeDev
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/edge/shortdesc/microsoft-browser-extension-policy-shortdesc.md b/browsers/edge/shortdesc/microsoft-browser-extension-policy-shortdesc.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 91065aa687..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/shortdesc/microsoft-browser-extension-policy-shortdesc.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
----
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-[Microsoft browser extension policy](https://docs.microsoft.com/legal/windows/agreements/microsoft-browser-extension-policy):
-This document describes the supported mechanisms for extending or modifying the behavior or user experience of Microsoft Edge and Internet Explorer or the content displayed by these browsers. Any technique not explicitly listed in this document is considered **unsupported**.
diff --git a/browsers/edge/troubleshooting-microsoft-edge.md b/browsers/edge/troubleshooting-microsoft-edge.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 3c50d4d50e..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/troubleshooting-microsoft-edge.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Troubleshoot Microsoft Edge
-description:
-ms.assetid:
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.sitesec: library
-title: Deploy Microsoft Edge kiosk mode
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.date: 10/15/2018
----
-
-# Troubleshoot Microsoft Edge
-
-
-## Microsoft Edge and IPv6
-We are aware of the known issue with Microsoft Edge and all UWP-based apps, such as Store, Mail, Feedback Hub, and so on. It only happens if you have disabled IPv6 (not recommended), so a temporary workaround is to enable it.
-
-## Microsoft Edge hijacks .PDF and .HTM files
-
-
-
-## Citrix Receiver in Microsoft Edge kiosk mode
-If you want to deliver applications to users via Citrix through Microsoft Edge, you must create the kiosk user account and then log into the account to install Citrix Receiver BEFORE setting up assigned access.
-
-1. Create the kiosk user account.
-2. Log into the account.
-3. Install Citrix Receiver.
-4. Set up assigned access.
-
-
-## Missing SettingSync.admx and SettingSync.adml files
-
-Make sure to [download](https://www.microsoft.com/download/windows.aspx) the latest templates to C:\windows\policydefinitions\.
diff --git a/browsers/edge/use-powershell-to manage-group-policy.md b/browsers/edge/use-powershell-to manage-group-policy.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 58a6b06b27..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/use-powershell-to manage-group-policy.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Use Windows PowerShell to manage group policy
-description:
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.mktglfcycl: explore
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.pagetype: security
-title: Security enhancements for Microsoft Edge (Microsoft Edge for IT Pros)
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-author: dansimp
----
-
-# Use Windows PowerShell to manage group policy
-
-Windows PowerShell supports group policy automation of the same tasks you perform in Group Policy Management Console (GPMC) for domain-based group policy objects (GPOs):
-
-- Maintain GPOs (GPO creation, removal, backup, and import)
-- Associate GPOs with Active Directory service containers (group policy link creation, update, and removal)
-- Set permissions on GPOs
-- Modify inheritance flags on Active Directory organization units (OUs) and domains
-- Configure registry-based policy settings and group policy preferences registry settings (update, retrieval, and removal)
-- Create starter GPOs
-
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/edge/web-app-compat-toolkit.md b/browsers/edge/web-app-compat-toolkit.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8ec157e607..0000000000
--- a/browsers/edge/web-app-compat-toolkit.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Web Application Compatibility lab kit
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-description: Learn how to use the web application compatibility toolkit for Microsoft Edge.
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: article
-ms.manager: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: high
----
-
-# Web Application Compatibility lab kit
-
->Updated: October, 2017
-
-Upgrading web applications to modern standards is the best long-term solution to ensure compatibility with today’s web browsers, but using backward compatibility can save time and money. Internet Explorer 11 has features that can ease your browser and operating system upgrades, reducing web application testing and remediation costs. On Windows 10, you can standardize on Microsoft Edge for faster, safer browsing and fall back to Internet Explorer 11 just for sites that need backward compatibility.
-
-The Web Application Compatibility Lab Kit is a primer for the features and techniques used to provide web application compatibility during a typical enterprise migration to Microsoft Edge. It walks you through how to configure and set up Enterprise Mode, leverage Enterprise Site Discovery, test web apps using the F12 developer tools, and manage the Enterprise Mode Site List.
-
-The Web Application Compatibility Lab Kit includes:
-
-- A pre-configured Windows 7 and Windows 10 virtual lab environment with:
- - Windows 7 Enterprise Evaluation
- - Windows 10 Enterprise Evaluation (version 1607)
- - Enterprise Mode Site List Manager
- - Enterprise Site Discovery Toolkit
-- A "lite" lab option to run the lab on your own Windows 7 or Windows 10 operating system
-- A step-by-step lab guide
-- A web application compatibility overview video
-- A white paper and IT Showcase studies
-
-Depending on your environment, your web apps may "just work” using the methods described below. Visit [Microsoft Edge Dev](https://developer.microsoft.com/microsoft-edge/) for tools and guidance for web developers.
-
-There are two versions of the lab kit available:
-
-- Full version (8 GB) - includes a complete virtual lab environment
-- Lite version (400 MB) - includes guidance for running the Lab Kit on your own Windows 7 or Windows 10 operating system
-
-The Web Application Compatibility Lab Kit is also available in the following languages:
-
-- Chinese (Simplified)
-- Chinese (Traditional)
-- French
-- German
-- Italian
-- Japanese
-- Korean
-- Portuguese (Brazil)
-- Russian
-- Spanish
-
-[DOWNLOAD THE LAB KIT](https://www.microsoft.com/evalcenter/evaluate-windows-10-web-application-compatibility-lab)
-
->[!TIP]
->Please use a broad bandwidth to download this content to enhance your downloading experience. Lab environment requires 8 GB of available memory and 100 GB of free disk space.
diff --git a/browsers/enterprise-mode/collect-data-using-enterprise-site-discovery.md b/browsers/enterprise-mode/collect-data-using-enterprise-site-discovery.md
index 64c7c36696..4fc4fb1ecc 100644
--- a/browsers/enterprise-mode/collect-data-using-enterprise-site-discovery.md
+++ b/browsers/enterprise-mode/collect-data-using-enterprise-site-discovery.md
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ Before you start, you need to make sure you have the following:
- IETelemetry.mof file
- - Sample System Center 2012 report templates
+ - Sample Configuration Manager report templates
You must use System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager or later for these samples to work.
diff --git a/browsers/enterprise-mode/create-change-request-enterprise-mode-portal.md b/browsers/enterprise-mode/create-change-request-enterprise-mode-portal.md
index cbfc5f11b5..867bb143b8 100644
--- a/browsers/enterprise-mode/create-change-request-enterprise-mode-portal.md
+++ b/browsers/enterprise-mode/create-change-request-enterprise-mode-portal.md
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ ms.prod: ie11
title: Create a change request using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
ms.sitesec: library
ms.date: 07/27/2017
-ms.reviewer:
+ms.reviewer:
manager: dansimp
ms.author: dansimp
---
@@ -17,16 +17,16 @@ ms.author: dansimp
**Applies to:**
-- Windows 10
-- Windows 8.1
-- Windows 7
-- Windows Server 2012 R2
-- Windows Server 2008 R2 with Service Pack 1 (SP1)
+- Windows 10
+- Windows 8.1
+- Windows 7
+- Windows Server 2012 R2
+- Windows Server 2008 R2 with Service Pack 1 (SP1)
Employees assigned to the Requester role can create a change request. A change request is used to tell the Approvers and the Administrator that a website needs to be added or removed from the Enterprise Mode Site List. The employee can navigate to each stage of the process by using the workflow links provided at the top of each page of the portal.
->[!Important]
->Each Requester must have access to a test machine with Administrator rights, letting him or her get to the pre-production environment to make sure that the requested change is correct.
+> [!Important]
+> Each Requester must have access to a test machine with Administrator rights, letting him or her get to the pre-production environment to make sure that the requested change is correct.
**To create a new change request**
1. The Requester (an employee that has been assigned the Requester role) signs into the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal, and clicks **Create new request**.
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ Employees assigned to the Requester role can create a change request. A change r
2. Fill out the required fields, based on the group and the app, including:
- **Group name.** Select the name of your group from the dropdown box.
-
+
- **App name.** Type the name of the app you want to add, delete, or update in the Enterprise Mode Site List.
- **Search all apps.** If you can't remember the name of your app, you can click **Search all apps** and search the list.
@@ -58,16 +58,16 @@ Employees assigned to the Requester role can create a change request. A change r
- **App best viewed in.** Select the best browser experience for the app. This can be Internet Explorer 5 through Internet Explorer 11 or one of the IE7Enterprise or IE8Enterprise modes.
- **Is an x-ua tag used?** Select **Yes** or **No** whether an x-ua-compatible tag is used by the app. For more info about x-ua-compatible tags, see the topics in [Defining document compatibility](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/cc288325(v=vs.85).aspx).
-
+
4. Click **Save and continue** to save the request and get the app info sent to the pre-production environment site list for testing.
-
+
A message appears that the request was successful, including a **Request ID** number, saying that the change is being made to the pre-production environment site list.
5. The Requester gets an email with a batch script, that when run, configures their test machine for the pre-production environment, along with the necessary steps to make sure the changed info is correct.
- **If the change is correct.** The Requester asks the approvers to approve the change request by selecting **Successful** and clicking **Send for approval**.
-
+
- **If the change is incorrect.** The Requester can rollback the change in pre-production or ask for help from the Administrator.
## Next steps
-After the change request is created, the Requester must make sure the suggested changes work in the pre-production environment. For these steps, see the [Verify your changes using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal](verify-changes-preprod-enterprise-mode-portal.md) topic.
+After the change request is created, the Requester must make sure the suggested changes work in the pre-production environment. For these steps, see [Verify your changes using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal](verify-changes-preprod-enterprise-mode-portal.md).
diff --git a/browsers/enterprise-mode/enterprise-mode-features-include.md b/browsers/enterprise-mode/enterprise-mode-features-include.md
index 8090fc9ba8..9da0e79778 100644
--- a/browsers/enterprise-mode/enterprise-mode-features-include.md
+++ b/browsers/enterprise-mode/enterprise-mode-features-include.md
@@ -1,4 +1,5 @@
### Enterprise Mode features
+
Enterprise Mode includes the following features:
- **Improved web app and website compatibility.** Through improved emulation, Enterprise Mode lets many legacy web apps run unmodified on IE11, supporting several site patterns that aren’t currently supported by existing document modes.
@@ -8,9 +9,9 @@ Download the [Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.2)](https://go.microso
- **Centralized control.** You can specify the websites or web apps to interpret using Enterprise Mode, through an XML file on a website or stored locally. Domains and paths within those domains can be treated differently, allowing granular control. Use Group Policy to let users turn Enterprise Mode on or off from the Tools menu and to decide whether the Enterprise browser profile appears on the Emulation tab of the F12 developer tools.
- >[!Important]
- >All centrally-made decisions override any locally-made choices.
+ > [!Important]
+ > All centrally-made decisions override any locally-made choices.
- **Integrated browsing.** When Enterprise Mode is set up, users can browse the web normally, letting the browser change modes automatically to accommodate Enterprise Mode sites.
-- **Data gathering.** You can configure Enterprise Mode to collect local override data, posting back to a named server. This lets you "crowd source" compatibility testing from key users; gathering their findings to add to your central site list.
\ No newline at end of file
+- **Data gathering.** You can configure Enterprise Mode to collect local override data, posting back to a named server. This lets you "crowd source" compatibility testing from key users; gathering their findings to add to your central site list.
diff --git a/browsers/enterprise-mode/set-up-enterprise-mode-portal.md b/browsers/enterprise-mode/set-up-enterprise-mode-portal.md
index 21efc17c35..ff7107b46a 100644
--- a/browsers/enterprise-mode/set-up-enterprise-mode-portal.md
+++ b/browsers/enterprise-mode/set-up-enterprise-mode-portal.md
@@ -35,8 +35,8 @@ You must download the deployment folder (**EMIEWebPortal/**), which includes all
2. Install the Node.js® package manager, [npm](https://www.npmjs.com/).
- >[!Note]
- >You need to install the npm package manager to replace all the third-party libraries we removed to make the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal open-source.
+ > [!NOTE]
+ > You need to install the npm package manager to replace all the third-party libraries we removed to make the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal open-source.
3. Open File Explorer and then open the **EMIEWebPortal/** folder.
@@ -105,8 +105,8 @@ Create a new Application Pool and the website, by using the IIS Manager.
9. Double-click the **Authentication** icon, right-click on **Windows Authentication**, and then click **Enable**.
- >[!Note]
- >You must also make sure that **Anonymous Authentication** is marked as **Enabled**.
+ > [!NOTE]
+ > You must also make sure that **Anonymous Authentication** is marked as **Enabled**.
10. Return to the **<website_name> Home** pane, and double-click the **Connection Strings** icon.
@@ -116,8 +116,8 @@ Create a new Application Pool and the website, by using the IIS Manager.
- **Initial catalog.** The name of your database.
- >[!Note]
- >Step 3 of this topic provides the steps to create your database.
+ > [!NOTE]
+ > Step 3 of this topic provides the steps to create your database.
## Step 3 - Create and prep your database
Create a SQL Server database and run our custom query to create the Enterprise Mode Site List tables.
@@ -216,8 +216,8 @@ Register the EMIEScheduler tool and service for production site list changes.
1. Open File Explorer and go to EMIEWebPortal.SchedulerService\EMIEWebPortal.SchedulerService in your deployment directory, and then copy the **App_Data**, **bin**, and **Logs** folders to a separate folder. For example, C:\EMIEService\.
- >[!Important]
- >If you can't find the **bin** and **Logs** folders, you probably haven't built the Visual Studio solution. Building the solution creates the folders and files.
+ > [!IMPORTANT]
+ > If you can't find the **bin** and **Logs** folders, you probably haven't built the Visual Studio solution. Building the solution creates the folders and files.
2. In Visual Studio start the Developer Command Prompt as an administrator, and then change the directory to the location of the InstallUtil.exe file. For example, _C:\Windows\Microsoft.NET\Framework\v4.0.30319_.
diff --git a/browsers/enterprise-mode/turn-on-enterprise-mode-and-use-a-site-list.md b/browsers/enterprise-mode/turn-on-enterprise-mode-and-use-a-site-list.md
index 1a704aa67e..4651adf5cf 100644
--- a/browsers/enterprise-mode/turn-on-enterprise-mode-and-use-a-site-list.md
+++ b/browsers/enterprise-mode/turn-on-enterprise-mode-and-use-a-site-list.md
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
Before you can use a site list with Enterprise Mode, you must turn the functionality on and set up the system for centralized control. By allowing
centralized control, you can create one global list of websites that render using Enterprise Mode. Approximately 65 seconds after Internet Explorer 11 starts, it looks for a properly formatted site list. If a new site list if found, with a different version number than the active list, IE11 loads and uses the newer version. After the initial check, IE11 won’t look for an updated list again until you restart the browser.
->[!NOTE]
->We recommend that you store and download your website list from a secure web server (https://), to help protect against data tampering. After the list is downloaded, it's stored locally on your employees' computers so if the centralized file location is unavailable, they can still use Enterprise Mode.
+> [!NOTE]
+> We recommend that you store and download your website list from a secure web server (https://), to help protect against data tampering. After the list is downloaded, it's stored locally on your employees' computers so if the centralized file location is unavailable, they can still use Enterprise Mode.
**Group Policy**
diff --git a/browsers/enterprise-mode/verify-changes-preprod-enterprise-mode-portal.md b/browsers/enterprise-mode/verify-changes-preprod-enterprise-mode-portal.md
index a72f720a3f..3e06b8b806 100644
--- a/browsers/enterprise-mode/verify-changes-preprod-enterprise-mode-portal.md
+++ b/browsers/enterprise-mode/verify-changes-preprod-enterprise-mode-portal.md
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ ms.prod: ie11
title: Verify your changes using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
ms.sitesec: library
ms.date: 07/27/2017
-ms.reviewer:
+ms.reviewer:
manager: dansimp
ms.author: dansimp
---
@@ -17,18 +17,18 @@ ms.author: dansimp
**Applies to:**
-- Windows 10
-- Windows 8.1
-- Windows 7
-- Windows Server 2012 R2
-- Windows Server 2008 R2 with Service Pack 1 (SP1)
+- Windows 10
+- Windows 8.1
+- Windows 7
+- Windows Server 2012 R2
+- Windows Server 2008 R2 with Service Pack 1 (SP1)
->[!Important]
->This step requires that each Requester have access to a test machine with Administrator rights, letting him or her get to the pre-production environment to make sure that the requested change is correct.
+> [!Important]
+> This step requires that each Requester have access to a test machine with Administrator rights, letting him or her get to the pre-production environment to make sure that the requested change is correct.
The Requester successfully submits a change request to the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal and then gets an email, including:
-- **EMIE_RegKey**. A batch file that when run, sets the registry key to point to the local pre-production Enterprise Mode Site List.
+- **EMIE_RegKey**. A batch file that when run, sets the registry key to point to the local pre-production Enterprise Mode Site List.
- **Test steps**. The suggested steps about how to test the change request details to make sure they're accurate in the pre-production environment.
diff --git a/browsers/includes/import-into-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-mgr-include.md b/browsers/includes/import-into-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-mgr-include.md
index 22464cc569..31961c97a1 100644
--- a/browsers/includes/import-into-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-mgr-include.md
+++ b/browsers/includes/import-into-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-mgr-include.md
@@ -1,22 +1,23 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-If you need to replace your entire site list because of errors, or simply because it’s out of date, you can import your exported Enterprise Mode site list using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager.
-
->[!IMPORTANT]
->Importing your file overwrites everything that’s currently in the tool, so make sure it’s what want to do.
-
-1. In the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager, click **File \> Import**.
-
-2. Go to the exported .EMIE file.
For example, `C:\users\\documents\sites.emie`
-
-1. Click **Open**.
-
-2. Review the alert message about all of your entries being overwritten and click **Yes**.
+---
+author: eavena
+ms.author: eravena
+ms.date: 10/02/2018
+ms.reviewer:
+audience: itpro
+manager: dansimp
+ms.prod: edge
+ms.topic: include
+---
+
+If you need to replace your entire site list because of errors, or simply because it’s out of date, you can import your exported Enterprise Mode site list using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager.
+
+> [!IMPORTANT]
+> Importing your file overwrites everything that’s currently in the tool, so make sure it’s what want to do.
+
+1. In the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager, click **File \> Import**.
+
+2. Go to the exported .EMIE file.
For example, `C:\users\\documents\sites.emie`
+
+1. Click **Open**.
+
+2. Review the alert message about all of your entries being overwritten and click **Yes**.
diff --git a/browsers/includes/interoperability-goals-enterprise-guidance.md b/browsers/includes/interoperability-goals-enterprise-guidance.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 04470d33af..0000000000
--- a/browsers/includes/interoperability-goals-enterprise-guidance.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
----
-author: eavena
-ms.author: eravena
-ms.date: 10/15/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: edge
-ms.topic: include
----
-
-## Interoperability goals and enterprise guidance
-
-Our primary goal is that your websites work in Microsoft Edge. To that end, we've made Microsoft Edge the default browser.
-
-You must continue using IE11 if web apps use any of the following:
-
-* ActiveX controls
-
-* x-ua-compatible headers
-
-* <meta> tags with an http-equivalent value of X-UA-Compatible header
-
-* Enterprise mode or compatibility view to addressing compatibility issues
-
-* legacy document modes
-
-If you have uninstalled IE11, you can download it from the Microsoft Store or the [Internet Explorer 11 download page](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?linkid=290956). Alternatively, you can use Enterprise Mode with Microsoft Edge to transition only the sites that need these technologies to load in IE11.
-
->[!TIP]
->If you want to use Group Policy to set Internet Explorer as your default browser, you can find the info here, [Set the default browser using Group Policy](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=620714).
-
-
-|Technology |Why it existed |Why we don't need it anymore |
-|---------|---------|---------|
-|ActiveX |ActiveX is a binary extension model introduced in 1996 which allowed developers to embed native Windows technologies (COM/OLE) in web pages. These controls can be downloaded and installed from a site and were subsequently loaded in-process and rendered in Internet Explorer. | |
-|Browser Helper Objects (BHO) |BHOs are a binary extension model introduced in 1997 which enabled developers to write COM objects that were loaded in-process with the browser and could perform actions on available windows and modules. A common use was to build toolbars that installed into Internet Explorer. | |
-|Document modes | Starting with IE8, Internet Explorer introduced a new “document mode” with every release. These document modes could be requested via the x-ua-compatible header to put the browser into a mode which emulates legacy versions. |Similar to other modern browsers, Microsoft Edge has a single “living” document mode. To minimize the compatibility burden, we test features behind switches in about:flags until stable and ready to be turned on by default. |
-
-
----
-
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/TOC.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/TOC.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c2812cb730..0000000000
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/TOC.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,188 +0,0 @@
-# [IE11 Deployment Guide for IT Pros](ie11-deploy-guide/index.md)
-
-## [Change history for the Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) Deployment Guide](ie11-deploy-guide/change-history-for-internet-explorer-11.md)
-
-## [System requirements and language support for Internet Explorer 11](ie11-deploy-guide/system-requirements-and-language-support-for-ie11.md)
-
-## [List of updated features and tools - Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)](ie11-deploy-guide/updated-features-and-tools-with-ie11.md)
-
-## [Install and Deploy Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)](ie11-deploy-guide/install-and-deploy-ie11.md)
-### [Customize Internet Explorer 11 installation packages](ie11-deploy-guide/customize-ie11-install-packages.md)
-#### [Using IEAK 11 to create packages](ie11-deploy-guide/using-ieak11-to-create-install-packages.md)
-#### [Create packages for multiple operating systems or languages](ie11-deploy-guide/create-install-packages-for-multiple-operating-systems-or-languages.md)
-#### [Using .INF files to create packages](ie11-deploy-guide/using-inf-files-to-create-install-packages.md)
-### [Choose how to install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)](ie11-deploy-guide/choose-how-to-install-ie11.md)
-#### [Install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) - System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager](ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-system-center-configuration-manager.md)
-#### [Install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) - Windows Server Update Services (WSUS)](ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-windows-server-update-services-wsus.md)
-#### [Install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) - Microsoft Intune](ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-microsoft-intune.md)
-#### [Install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) - Network](ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-the-network.md)
-#### [Install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) - Operating system deployment systems](ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-operating-system-deployment-systems.md)
-#### [Install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) - Third-party tools](ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-third-party-tools.md)
-### [Choose how to deploy Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)](ie11-deploy-guide/choose-how-to-deploy-ie11.md)
-#### [Deploy Internet Explorer 11 using Automatic Version Synchronization (AVS)](ie11-deploy-guide/deploy-ie11-using-automatic-version-synchronization-avs.md)
-#### [Deploy Internet Explorer 11 using software distribution tools](ie11-deploy-guide/deploy-ie11-using-software-distribution-tools.md)
-### [Virtualization and compatibility with Internet Explorer 11](ie11-deploy-guide/virtualization-and-compatibility-with-ie11.md)
-
-## [Collect data using Enterprise Site Discovery](ie11-deploy-guide/collect-data-using-enterprise-site-discovery.md)
-
-## [Enterprise Mode for Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)](ie11-deploy-guide/enterprise-mode-overview-for-ie11.md)
-### [Tips and tricks to manage Internet Explorer compatibility](ie11-deploy-guide/tips-and-tricks-to-manage-ie-compatibility.md)
-### [Enterprise Mode and the Enterprise Mode Site List](ie11-deploy-guide/what-is-enterprise-mode.md)
-### [Set up Enterprise Mode logging and data collection](ie11-deploy-guide/set-up-enterprise-mode-logging-and-data-collection.md)
-### [Turn on Enterprise Mode and use a site list](ie11-deploy-guide/turn-on-enterprise-mode-and-use-a-site-list.md)
-### [Enterprise Mode schema v.2 guidance](ie11-deploy-guide/enterprise-mode-schema-version-2-guidance.md)
-### [Enterprise Mode schema v.1 guidance](ie11-deploy-guide/enterprise-mode-schema-version-1-guidance.md)
-### [Check for a new Enterprise Mode site list xml file](ie11-deploy-guide/check-for-new-enterprise-mode-site-list-xml-file.md)
-### [Turn on local control and logging for Enterprise Mode](ie11-deploy-guide/turn-on-local-control-and-logging-for-enterprise-mode.md)
-### [Use the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](ie11-deploy-guide/use-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md)
-#### [Add single sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.2)](ie11-deploy-guide/add-single-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-2-enterprise-mode-tool.md)
-#### [Add single sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1)](ie11-deploy-guide/add-single-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-1-enterprise-mode-tool.md)
-#### [Add multiple sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using a file and the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.2)](ie11-deploy-guide/add-multiple-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-2-schema-and-enterprise-mode-tool.md)
-#### [Add multiple sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using a file and the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1)](ie11-deploy-guide/add-multiple-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-1-schema-and-enterprise-mode-tool.md)
-#### [Edit the Enterprise Mode site list using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](ie11-deploy-guide/edit-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md)
-#### [Fix validation problems using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](ie11-deploy-guide/fix-validation-problems-using-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md)
-#### [Search your Enterprise Mode site list in the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](ie11-deploy-guide/search-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md)
-#### [Save your site list to XML in the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](ie11-deploy-guide/save-your-site-list-to-xml-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md)
-#### [Export your Enterprise Mode site list from the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](ie11-deploy-guide/export-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-from-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md)
-#### [Import your Enterprise Mode site list to the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](ie11-deploy-guide/import-into-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md)
-#### [Delete sites from your Enterprise Mode site list in the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](ie11-deploy-guide/delete-sites-from-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md)
-#### [Remove all sites from your Enterprise Mode site list in the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](ie11-deploy-guide/remove-all-sites-from-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md)
-### [Use the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal](ie11-deploy-guide/use-the-enterprise-mode-portal.md)
-#### [Set up the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal](ie11-deploy-guide/set-up-enterprise-mode-portal.md)
-##### [Use the Settings page to finish setting up the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal](ie11-deploy-guide/configure-settings-enterprise-mode-portal.md)
-##### [Add employees to the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal](ie11-deploy-guide/add-employees-enterprise-mode-portal.md)
-#### [Workflow-based processes for employees using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal](ie11-deploy-guide/workflow-processes-enterprise-mode-portal.md)
-##### [Create a change request using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal](ie11-deploy-guide/create-change-request-enterprise-mode-portal.md)
-##### [Verify your changes using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal](ie11-deploy-guide/verify-changes-preprod-enterprise-mode-portal.md)
-##### [Approve a change request using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal](ie11-deploy-guide/approve-change-request-enterprise-mode-portal.md)
-##### [Schedule approved change requests for production using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal](ie11-deploy-guide/schedule-production-change-enterprise-mode-portal.md)
-##### [Verify the change request update in the production environment using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal](ie11-deploy-guide/verify-changes-production-enterprise-mode-portal.md)
-##### [View the apps currently on the Enterprise Mode Site List](ie11-deploy-guide/view-apps-enterprise-mode-site-list.md)
-##### [View the available Enterprise Mode reports from the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal](ie11-deploy-guide/view-enterprise-mode-reports-for-portal.md)
-### [Using IE7 Enterprise Mode or IE8 Enterprise Mode](ie11-deploy-guide/using-enterprise-mode.md)
-### [Fix web compatibility issues using document modes and the Enterprise Mode site list](ie11-deploy-guide/fix-compat-issues-with-doc-modes-and-enterprise-mode-site-list.md)
-### [Remove sites from a local Enterprise Mode site list](ie11-deploy-guide/remove-sites-from-a-local-enterprise-mode-site-list.md)
-### [Remove sites from a local compatibility view list](ie11-deploy-guide/remove-sites-from-a-local-compatibililty-view-list.md)
-### [Turn off Enterprise Mode](ie11-deploy-guide/turn-off-enterprise-mode.md)
-
-
-## [Group Policy and Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)](ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-ie11.md)
-### [Group Policy management tools](ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-objects-and-ie11.md)
-#### [Group Policy and the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC)](ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-group-policy-mgmt-console-ie11.md)
-#### [Group Policy and the Local Group Policy Editor](ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-local-group-policy-editor-ie11.md)
-#### [Group Policy and Advanced Group Policy Management (AGPM)](ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-advanced-group-policy-mgmt-ie11.md)
-#### [Group Policy and Windows Powershell](ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-windows-powershell-ie11.md)
-#### [Group Policy and Shortcut Extensions](ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-shortcut-extensions-ie11.md)
-### [New group policy settings for Internet Explorer 11](ie11-deploy-guide/new-group-policy-settings-for-ie11.md)
-### [Set the default browser using Group Policy](ie11-deploy-guide/set-the-default-browser-using-group-policy.md)
-### [ActiveX installation using group policy](ie11-deploy-guide/activex-installation-using-group-policy.md)
-### [Group Policy and compatibility with Internet Explorer 11](ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-compatibility-with-ie11.md)
-### [Group policy preferences and Internet Explorer 11](ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-preferences-and-ie11.md)
-### [Administrative templates and Internet Explorer 11](ie11-deploy-guide/administrative-templates-and-ie11.md)
-### [Enable and disable add-ons using administrative templates and group policy](ie11-deploy-guide/enable-and-disable-add-ons-using-administrative-templates-and-group-policy.md)
-
-## [Manage Internet Explorer 11](ie11-deploy-guide/manage-ie11-overview.md)
-### [Auto detect settings Internet Explorer 11](ie11-deploy-guide/auto-detect-settings-for-ie11.md)
-### [Auto configuration settings for Internet Explorer 11](ie11-deploy-guide/auto-configuration-settings-for-ie11.md)
-### [Auto proxy configuration settings for Internet Explorer 11](ie11-deploy-guide/auto-proxy-configuration-settings-for-ie11.md)
-
-## [Troubleshoot Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)](ie11-deploy-guide/troubleshoot-ie11.md)
-### [Setup problems with Internet Explorer 11](ie11-deploy-guide/setup-problems-with-ie11.md)
-### [Install problems with Internet Explorer 11](ie11-deploy-guide/install-problems-with-ie11.md)
-### [Problems after installing Internet Explorer 11](ie11-deploy-guide/problems-after-installing-ie11.md)
-### [Auto configuration and auto proxy problems with Internet Explorer 11](ie11-deploy-guide/auto-configuration-and-auto-proxy-problems-with-ie11.md)
-### [User interface problems with Internet Explorer 11](ie11-deploy-guide/user-interface-problems-with-ie11.md)
-### [Group Policy problems with Internet Explorer 11](ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-problems-ie11.md)
-### [.NET Framework problems with Internet Explorer 11](ie11-deploy-guide/net-framework-problems-with-ie11.md)
-### [Enhanced Protected Mode problems with Internet Explorer](ie11-deploy-guide/enhanced-protected-mode-problems-with-ie11.md)
-### [Fix font rendering problems by turning off natural metrics](ie11-deploy-guide/turn-off-natural-metrics.md)
-### [Intranet problems with Internet Explorer 11](ie11-deploy-guide/intranet-problems-and-ie11.md)
-### [Browser cache changes and roaming profiles](ie11-deploy-guide/browser-cache-changes-and-roaming-profiles.md)
-
-## [Out-of-date ActiveX control blocking](ie11-deploy-guide/out-of-date-activex-control-blocking.md)
-### [Blocked out-of-date ActiveX controls](ie11-deploy-guide/blocked-out-of-date-activex-controls.md)
-
-## [Deprecated document modes and Internet Explorer 11](ie11-deploy-guide/deprecated-document-modes.md)
-
-## [What is the Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit?](ie11-deploy-guide/what-is-the-internet-explorer-11-blocker-toolkit.md)
-### [Internet Explorer 11 delivery through automatic updates](ie11-deploy-guide/ie11-delivery-through-automatic-updates.md)
-### [Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit FAQ](ie11-faq/faq-ie11-blocker-toolkit.md)
-
-## [Missing Internet Explorer Maintenance settings for Internet Explorer 11](ie11-deploy-guide/missing-internet-explorer-maintenance-settings-for-ie11.md)
-
-## [Missing the Compatibility View Button](ie11-deploy-guide/missing-the-compatibility-view-button.md)
-
-## [Deploy pinned websites using Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT) 2013](ie11-deploy-guide/deploy-pinned-sites-using-mdt-2013.md)
-
-# [IE11 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) Guide for IT Pros](ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11.md)
-
-# [Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) - Administration Guide for IT Pros](ie11-ieak/index.md)
-## [What IEAK can do for you](ie11-ieak/what-ieak-can-do-for-you.md)
-## [Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK) information and downloads](ie11-ieak/ieak-information-and-downloads.md)
-## [Before you start using IEAK 11](ie11-ieak/before-you-create-custom-pkgs-ieak11.md)
-### [Hardware and software requirements for IEAK 11](ie11-ieak/hardware-and-software-reqs-ieak11.md)
-### [Determine the licensing version and features to use in IEAK 11](ie11-ieak/licensing-version-and-features-ieak11.md)
-### [Security features and IEAK 11](ie11-ieak/security-and-ieak11.md)
-### [File types used or created by IEAK 11](ie11-ieak/file-types-ieak11.md)
-### [Tasks and references to consider before creating and deploying custom packages using IEAK 11](ie11-ieak/create-manage-deploy-custom-pkgs-ieak11.md)
-### [Create the build computer folder structure using IEAK 11](ie11-ieak/create-build-folder-structure-ieak11.md)
-### [Set up auto detection for DHCP or DNS servers using IEAK 11](ie11-ieak/auto-detection-dhcp-or-dns-servers-ieak11.md)
-### [Use proxy auto-configuration (.pac) files with IEAK 11](ie11-ieak/proxy-auto-config-examples.md)
-### [Customize the toolbar button and Favorites List icons using IEAK 11](ie11-ieak/guidelines-toolbar-and-favorites-list-ieak11.md)
-### [Use the uninstallation .INF files to uninstall custom components](ie11-ieak/create-uninstall-inf-files-for-custom-components.md)
-### [Add and approve ActiveX controls using the IEAK 11](ie11-ieak/add-and-approve-activex-controls-ieak11.md)
-### [Register an uninstall app for custom components using IEAK 11](ie11-ieak/register-uninstall-app-ieak11.md)
-### [Customize Automatic Search for Internet Explorer using IEAK 11](ie11-ieak/customize-automatic-search-for-ie.md)
-### [Create multiple versions of your custom package using IEAK 11](ie11-ieak/create-multiple-browser-packages-ieak11.md)
-### [Before you install your package over your network using IEAK 11](ie11-ieak/prep-network-install-with-ieak11.md)
-### [Use the RSoP snap-in to review policy settings](ie11-ieak/rsop-snapin-for-policy-settings-ieak11.md)
-### [IEAK 11 - Frequently Asked Questions](ie11-faq/faq-ieak11.md)
-### [Troubleshoot custom package and IEAK 11 problems](ie11-ieak/troubleshooting-custom-browser-pkg-ieak11.md)
-
-## [Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) Customization Wizard options](ie11-ieak/ieak11-wizard-custom-options.md)
-### [Use the File Locations page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](ie11-ieak/file-locations-ieak11-wizard.md)
-### [Use the Platform Selection page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](ie11-ieak/platform-selection-ieak11-wizard.md)
-### [Use the Language Selection page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](ie11-ieak/language-selection-ieak11-wizard.md)
-### [Use the Package Type Selection page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](ie11-ieak/pkg-type-selection-ieak11-wizard.md)
-### [Use the Feature Selection page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](ie11-ieak/feature-selection-ieak11-wizard.md)
-### [Use the Automatic Version Synchronization page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](ie11-ieak/auto-version-sync-ieak11-wizard.md)
-### [Use the Custom Components page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](ie11-ieak/custom-components-ieak11-wizard.md)
-### [Use the Internal Install page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](ie11-ieak/internal-install-ieak11-wizard.md)
-### [Use the User Experience page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](ie11-ieak/user-experience-ieak11-wizard.md)
-### [Use the Browser User Interface page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](ie11-ieak/browser-ui-ieak11-wizard.md)
-### [Use the Search Providers page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](ie11-ieak/search-providers-ieak11-wizard.md)
-### [Use the Important URLs - Home Page and Support page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](ie11-ieak/important-urls-home-page-and-support-ieak11-wizard.md)
-### [Use the Accelerators page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](ie11-ieak/accelerators-ieak11-wizard.md)
-### [Use the Favorites, Favorites Bar, and Feeds page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](ie11-ieak/favorites-favoritesbar-and-feeds-ieak11-wizard.md)
-### [Use the Browsing Options page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](ie11-ieak/browsing-options-ieak11-wizard.md)
-### [Use the First Run Wizard and Welcome Page Options page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](ie11-ieak/first-run-and-welcome-page-ieak11-wizard.md)
-### [Use the Compatibility View page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](ie11-ieak/compat-view-ieak11-wizard.md)
-### [Use the Connection Manager page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](ie11-ieak/connection-mgr-ieak11-wizard.md)
-### [Use the Connection Settings page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](ie11-ieak/connection-settings-ieak11-wizard.md)
-### [Use the Automatic Configuration page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](ie11-ieak/auto-config-ieak11-wizard.md)
-### [Use the Proxy Settings page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](ie11-ieak/proxy-settings-ieak11-wizard.md)
-### [Use the Security and Privacy Settings page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](ie11-ieak/security-and-privacy-settings-ieak11-wizard.md)
-### [Use the Add a Root Certificate page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](ie11-ieak/add-root-certificate-ieak11-wizard.md)
-### [Use the Programs page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](ie11-ieak/programs-ieak11-wizard.md)
-### [Use the Additional Settings page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](ie11-ieak/additional-settings-ieak11-wizard.md)
-### [Use the Wizard Complete - Next Steps page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](ie11-ieak/wizard-complete-ieak11-wizard.md)
-
-## [Using Internet Settings (.INS) files with IEAK 11](ie11-ieak/using-internet-settings-ins-files.md)
-### [Use the Branding .INS file to create custom branding and setup info](ie11-ieak/branding-ins-file-setting.md)
-### [Use the BrowserToolbars .INS file to customize the Internet Explorer toolbar](ie11-ieak/browsertoolbars-ins-file-setting.md)
-### [Use the CabSigning .INS file to review the digital signatures for your apps](ie11-ieak/cabsigning-ins-file-setting.md)
-### [Use the ConnectionSettings .INS file to review the network connections for install](ie11-ieak/connectionsettings-ins-file-setting.md)
-### [Use the CustomBranding .INS file to specify the custom branding location](ie11-ieak/custombranding-ins-file-setting.md)
-### [Use the ExtRegInf .INS file to specify installation files and mode](ie11-ieak/extreginf-ins-file-setting.md)
-### [Use the FavoritesEx .INS file for your Favorites icon and URLs](ie11-ieak/favoritesex-ins-file-setting.md)
-### [Use the HideCustom .INS file to hide GUIDs](ie11-ieak/hidecustom-ins-file-setting.md)
-### [Use the ISP_Security .INS file to add your root certificate](ie11-ieak/isp-security-ins-file-setting.md)
-### [Use the Media .INS file to specify your install media](ie11-ieak/media-ins-file-setting.md)
-### [Use the Proxy .INS file to specify a proxy server](ie11-ieak/proxy-ins-file-setting.md)
-### [Use the Security Imports .INS file to import security info](ie11-ieak/security-imports-ins-file-setting.md)
-### [Use the URL .INS file to use an auto-configured proxy server](ie11-ieak/url-ins-file-setting.md)
-
-## [IExpress Wizard for Windows Server 2008 R2 with SP1](ie11-ieak/iexpress-wizard-for-win-server.md)
-### [IExpress Wizard command-line options](ie11-ieak/iexpress-command-line-options.md)
-### [Internet Explorer Setup command-line options and return codes](ie11-ieak/ie-setup-command-line-options-and-return-codes.md)
-
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/TOC.yml b/browsers/internet-explorer/TOC.yml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2c6602e1de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/TOC.yml
@@ -0,0 +1,361 @@
+- name: IE11 Deployment Guide for IT Pros
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/index.md
+ items:
+ - name: Change history for the Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) Deployment Guide
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/change-history-for-internet-explorer-11.md
+ - name: System requirements and language support for Internet Explorer 11
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/system-requirements-and-language-support-for-ie11.md
+ - name: List of updated features and tools - Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/updated-features-and-tools-with-ie11.md
+ - name: Install and Deploy Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/install-and-deploy-ie11.md
+ items:
+ - name: Customize Internet Explorer 11 installation packages
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/customize-ie11-install-packages.md
+ items:
+ - name: Using IEAK 11 to create packages
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/using-ieak11-to-create-install-packages.md
+ - name: Create packages for multiple operating systems or languages
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/create-install-packages-for-multiple-operating-systems-or-languages.md
+ - name: Using .INF files to create packages
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/using-inf-files-to-create-install-packages.md
+ - name: Choose how to install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/choose-how-to-install-ie11.md
+ items:
+ - name: Install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) - System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-system-center-configuration-manager.md
+ - name: Install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) - Windows Server Update Services (WSUS)
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-windows-server-update-services-wsus.md
+ - name: Install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) - Microsoft Intune
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-microsoft-intune.md
+ - name: Install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) - Network
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-the-network.md
+ - name: Install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) - Operating system deployment systems
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-operating-system-deployment-systems.md
+ - name: Install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) - Third-party tools
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-third-party-tools.md
+ - name: Choose how to deploy Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/choose-how-to-deploy-ie11.md
+ items:
+ - name: Deploy Internet Explorer 11 using Automatic Version Synchronization (AVS)
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/deploy-ie11-using-automatic-version-synchronization-avs.md
+ - name: Deploy Internet Explorer 11 using software distribution tools
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/deploy-ie11-using-software-distribution-tools.md
+ - name: Virtualization and compatibility with Internet Explorer 11
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/virtualization-and-compatibility-with-ie11.md
+ - name: Collect data using Enterprise Site Discovery
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/collect-data-using-enterprise-site-discovery.md
+ - name: Enterprise Mode for Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/enterprise-mode-overview-for-ie11.md
+ items:
+ - name: Tips and tricks to manage Internet Explorer compatibility
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/tips-and-tricks-to-manage-ie-compatibility.md
+ - name: Enterprise Mode and the Enterprise Mode Site List
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/what-is-enterprise-mode.md
+ - name: Set up Enterprise Mode logging and data collection
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/set-up-enterprise-mode-logging-and-data-collection.md
+ - name: Turn on Enterprise Mode and use a site list
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/turn-on-enterprise-mode-and-use-a-site-list.md
+ - name: Enterprise Mode schema v.2 guidance
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/enterprise-mode-schema-version-2-guidance.md
+ - name: Enterprise Mode schema v.1 guidance
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/enterprise-mode-schema-version-1-guidance.md
+ - name: Check for a new Enterprise Mode site list xml file
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/check-for-new-enterprise-mode-site-list-xml-file.md
+ - name: Turn on local control and logging for Enterprise Mode
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/turn-on-local-control-and-logging-for-enterprise-mode.md
+ - name: Use the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/use-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
+ items:
+ - name: Add single sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.2)
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/add-single-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-2-enterprise-mode-tool.md
+ - name: Add single sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1)
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/add-single-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-1-enterprise-mode-tool.md
+ - name: Add multiple sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using a file and the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.2)
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/add-multiple-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-2-schema-and-enterprise-mode-tool.md
+ - name: Add multiple sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using a file and the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1)
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/add-multiple-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-1-schema-and-enterprise-mode-tool.md
+ - name: Edit the Enterprise Mode site list using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/edit-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
+ - name: Fix validation problems using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/fix-validation-problems-using-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
+ - name: Search your Enterprise Mode site list in the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/search-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
+ - name: Save your site list to XML in the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/save-your-site-list-to-xml-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
+ - name: Export your Enterprise Mode site list from the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/export-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-from-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
+ - name: Import your Enterprise Mode site list to the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/import-into-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
+ - name: Delete sites from your Enterprise Mode site list in the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/delete-sites-from-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
+ - name: Remove all sites from your Enterprise Mode site list in the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/remove-all-sites-from-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
+ - name: Review neutral sites for Internet Explorer mode using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/review-neutral-sites-with-site-list-manager.md
+ - name: Use the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/use-the-enterprise-mode-portal.md
+ items:
+ - name: Set up the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/set-up-enterprise-mode-portal.md
+ items:
+ - name: Use the Settings page to finish setting up the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/configure-settings-enterprise-mode-portal.md
+ - name: Add employees to the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/add-employees-enterprise-mode-portal.md
+ - name: Workflow-based processes for employees using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/workflow-processes-enterprise-mode-portal.md
+ items:
+ - name: Create a change request using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/create-change-request-enterprise-mode-portal.md
+ - name: Verify your changes using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/verify-changes-preprod-enterprise-mode-portal.md
+ - name: Approve a change request using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/approve-change-request-enterprise-mode-portal.md
+ - name: Schedule approved change requests for production using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/schedule-production-change-enterprise-mode-portal.md
+ - name: Verify the change request update in the production environment using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/verify-changes-production-enterprise-mode-portal.md
+ - name: View the apps currently on the Enterprise Mode Site List
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/view-apps-enterprise-mode-site-list.md
+ - name: View the available Enterprise Mode reports from the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/view-enterprise-mode-reports-for-portal.md
+ - name: Using IE7 Enterprise Mode or IE8 Enterprise Mode
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/using-enterprise-mode.md
+ - name: Fix web compatibility issues using document modes and the Enterprise Mode site list
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/fix-compat-issues-with-doc-modes-and-enterprise-mode-site-list.md
+ - name: Remove sites from a local Enterprise Mode site list
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/remove-sites-from-a-local-enterprise-mode-site-list.md
+ - name: Remove sites from a local compatibility view list
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/remove-sites-from-a-local-compatibililty-view-list.md
+ - name: Turn off Enterprise Mode
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/turn-off-enterprise-mode.md
+ - name: Group Policy and Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-ie11.md
+ items:
+ - name: Group Policy management tools
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-objects-and-ie11.md
+ items:
+ - name: Group Policy and the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC)
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-group-policy-mgmt-console-ie11.md
+ - name: Group Policy and the Local Group Policy Editor
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-local-group-policy-editor-ie11.md
+ - name: Group Policy and Advanced Group Policy Management (AGPM)
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-advanced-group-policy-mgmt-ie11.md
+ - name: Group Policy and Windows Powershell
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-windows-powershell-ie11.md
+ - name: Group Policy and Shortcut Extensions
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-shortcut-extensions-ie11.md
+ - name: New group policy settings for Internet Explorer 11
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/new-group-policy-settings-for-ie11.md
+ - name: Set the default browser using Group Policy
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/set-the-default-browser-using-group-policy.md
+ - name: ActiveX installation using group policy
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/activex-installation-using-group-policy.md
+ - name: Group Policy and compatibility with Internet Explorer 11
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-compatibility-with-ie11.md
+ - name: Group policy preferences and Internet Explorer 11
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-preferences-and-ie11.md
+ - name: Administrative templates and Internet Explorer 11
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/administrative-templates-and-ie11.md
+ - name: Enable and disable add-ons using administrative templates and group policy
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/enable-and-disable-add-ons-using-administrative-templates-and-group-policy.md
+ - name: Manage Internet Explorer 11
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/manage-ie11-overview.md
+ items:
+ - name: Auto detect settings Internet Explorer 11
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/auto-detect-settings-for-ie11.md
+ - name: Auto configuration settings for Internet Explorer 11
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/auto-configuration-settings-for-ie11.md
+ - name: Auto proxy configuration settings for Internet Explorer 11
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/auto-proxy-configuration-settings-for-ie11.md
+ - name: Troubleshoot Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/troubleshoot-ie11.md
+ items:
+ - name: Setup problems with Internet Explorer 11
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/setup-problems-with-ie11.md
+ - name: Install problems with Internet Explorer 11
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/install-problems-with-ie11.md
+ - name: Problems after installing Internet Explorer 11
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/problems-after-installing-ie11.md
+ - name: Auto configuration and auto proxy problems with Internet Explorer 11
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/auto-configuration-and-auto-proxy-problems-with-ie11.md
+ - name: User interface problems with Internet Explorer 11
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/user-interface-problems-with-ie11.md
+ - name: Group Policy problems with Internet Explorer 11
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-problems-ie11.md
+ - name: .NET Framework problems with Internet Explorer 11
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/net-framework-problems-with-ie11.md
+ - name: Enhanced Protected Mode problems with Internet Explorer
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/enhanced-protected-mode-problems-with-ie11.md
+ - name: Fix font rendering problems by turning off natural metrics
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/turn-off-natural-metrics.md
+ - name: Intranet problems with Internet Explorer 11
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/intranet-problems-and-ie11.md
+ - name: Browser cache changes and roaming profiles
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/browser-cache-changes-and-roaming-profiles.md
+ - name: Out-of-date ActiveX control blocking
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/out-of-date-activex-control-blocking.md
+ items:
+ - name: Blocked out-of-date ActiveX controls
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/blocked-out-of-date-activex-controls.md
+ - name: Deprecated document modes and Internet Explorer 11
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/deprecated-document-modes.md
+ - name: What is the Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit?
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/what-is-the-internet-explorer-11-blocker-toolkit.md
+ items:
+ - name: Internet Explorer 11 delivery through automatic updates
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/ie11-delivery-through-automatic-updates.md
+ - name: Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit FAQ
+ href: ie11-faq/faq-ie11-blocker-toolkit.yml
+ - name: Missing Internet Explorer Maintenance settings for Internet Explorer 11
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/missing-internet-explorer-maintenance-settings-for-ie11.md
+ - name: Missing the Compatibility View Button
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/missing-the-compatibility-view-button.md
+ - name: Deploy pinned websites using Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT) 2013
+ href: ie11-deploy-guide/deploy-pinned-sites-using-mdt-2013.md
+- name: IE11 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) Guide for IT Pros
+ href: ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11.yml
+- name: Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) - Administration Guide for IT Pros
+ href: ie11-ieak/index.md
+ items:
+ - name: What IEAK can do for you
+ href: ie11-ieak/what-ieak-can-do-for-you.md
+ - name: Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK) information and downloads
+ href: ie11-ieak/ieak-information-and-downloads.md
+ - name: Before you start using IEAK 11
+ href: ie11-ieak/before-you-create-custom-pkgs-ieak11.md
+ items:
+ - name: Hardware and software requirements for IEAK 11
+ href: ie11-ieak/hardware-and-software-reqs-ieak11.md
+ - name: Determine the licensing version and features to use in IEAK 11
+ href: ie11-ieak/licensing-version-and-features-ieak11.md
+ - name: Security features and IEAK 11
+ href: ie11-ieak/security-and-ieak11.md
+ - name: File types used or created by IEAK 11
+ href: ie11-ieak/file-types-ieak11.md
+ - name: Tasks and references to consider before creating and deploying custom packages using IEAK 11
+ href: ie11-ieak/create-manage-deploy-custom-pkgs-ieak11.md
+ - name: Create the build computer folder structure using IEAK 11
+ href: ie11-ieak/create-build-folder-structure-ieak11.md
+ - name: Set up auto detection for DHCP or DNS servers using IEAK 11
+ href: ie11-ieak/auto-detection-dhcp-or-dns-servers-ieak11.md
+ - name: Use proxy auto-configuration (.pac) files with IEAK 11
+ href: ie11-ieak/proxy-auto-config-examples.md
+ - name: Customize the toolbar button and Favorites List icons using IEAK 11
+ href: ie11-ieak/guidelines-toolbar-and-favorites-list-ieak11.md
+ - name: Use the uninstallation .INF files to uninstall custom components
+ href: ie11-ieak/create-uninstall-inf-files-for-custom-components.md
+ - name: Add and approve ActiveX controls using the IEAK 11
+ href: ie11-ieak/add-and-approve-activex-controls-ieak11.md
+ - name: Register an uninstall app for custom components using IEAK 11
+ href: ie11-ieak/register-uninstall-app-ieak11.md
+ - name: Customize Automatic Search for Internet Explorer using IEAK 11
+ href: ie11-ieak/customize-automatic-search-for-ie.md
+ - name: Create multiple versions of your custom package using IEAK 11
+ href: ie11-ieak/create-multiple-browser-packages-ieak11.md
+ - name: Before you install your package over your network using IEAK 11
+ href: ie11-ieak/prep-network-install-with-ieak11.md
+ - name: Use the RSoP snap-in to review policy settings
+ href: ie11-ieak/rsop-snapin-for-policy-settings-ieak11.md
+ - name: IEAK 11 - Frequently Asked Questions
+ href: ie11-faq/faq-ieak11.yml
+ - name: Troubleshoot custom package and IEAK 11 problems
+ href: ie11-ieak/troubleshooting-custom-browser-pkg-ieak11.md
+ - name: Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) Customization Wizard options
+ href: ie11-ieak/ieak11-wizard-custom-options.md
+ items:
+ - name: Use the File Locations page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+ href: ie11-ieak/file-locations-ieak11-wizard.md
+ - name: Use the Platform Selection page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+ href: ie11-ieak/platform-selection-ieak11-wizard.md
+ - name: Use the Language Selection page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+ href: ie11-ieak/language-selection-ieak11-wizard.md
+ - name: Use the Package Type Selection page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+ href: ie11-ieak/pkg-type-selection-ieak11-wizard.md
+ - name: Use the Feature Selection page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+ href: ie11-ieak/feature-selection-ieak11-wizard.md
+ - name: Use the Automatic Version Synchronization page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+ href: ie11-ieak/auto-version-sync-ieak11-wizard.md
+ - name: Use the Custom Components page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+ href: ie11-ieak/custom-components-ieak11-wizard.md
+ - name: Use the Internal Install page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+ href: ie11-ieak/internal-install-ieak11-wizard.md
+ - name: Use the User Experience page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+ href: ie11-ieak/user-experience-ieak11-wizard.md
+ - name: Use the Browser User Interface page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+ href: ie11-ieak/browser-ui-ieak11-wizard.md
+ - name: Use the Search Providers page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+ href: ie11-ieak/search-providers-ieak11-wizard.md
+ - name: Use the Important URLs - Home Page and Support page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+ href: ie11-ieak/important-urls-home-page-and-support-ieak11-wizard.md
+ - name: Use the Accelerators page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+ href: ie11-ieak/accelerators-ieak11-wizard.md
+ - name: Use the Favorites, Favorites Bar, and Feeds page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+ href: ie11-ieak/favorites-favoritesbar-and-feeds-ieak11-wizard.md
+ - name: Use the Browsing Options page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+ href: ie11-ieak/browsing-options-ieak11-wizard.md
+ - name: Use the First Run Wizard and Welcome Page Options page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+ href: ie11-ieak/first-run-and-welcome-page-ieak11-wizard.md
+ - name: Use the Compatibility View page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+ href: ie11-ieak/compat-view-ieak11-wizard.md
+ - name: Use the Connection Manager page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+ href: ie11-ieak/connection-mgr-ieak11-wizard.md
+ - name: Use the Connection Settings page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+ href: ie11-ieak/connection-settings-ieak11-wizard.md
+ - name: Use the Automatic Configuration page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+ href: ie11-ieak/auto-config-ieak11-wizard.md
+ - name: Use the Proxy Settings page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+ href: ie11-ieak/proxy-settings-ieak11-wizard.md
+ - name: Use the Security and Privacy Settings page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+ href: ie11-ieak/security-and-privacy-settings-ieak11-wizard.md
+ - name: Use the Add a Root Certificate page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+ href: ie11-ieak/add-root-certificate-ieak11-wizard.md
+ - name: Use the Programs page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+ href: ie11-ieak/programs-ieak11-wizard.md
+ - name: Use the Additional Settings page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+ href: ie11-ieak/additional-settings-ieak11-wizard.md
+ - name: Use the Wizard Complete - Next Steps page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+ href: ie11-ieak/wizard-complete-ieak11-wizard.md
+ - name: Using Internet Settings (.INS) files with IEAK 11
+ href: ie11-ieak/using-internet-settings-ins-files.md
+ items:
+ - name: Use the Branding .INS file to create custom branding and setup info
+ href: ie11-ieak/branding-ins-file-setting.md
+ - name: Use the BrowserToolbars .INS file to customize the Internet Explorer toolbar
+ href: ie11-ieak/browsertoolbars-ins-file-setting.md
+ - name: Use the CabSigning .INS file to review the digital signatures for your apps
+ href: ie11-ieak/cabsigning-ins-file-setting.md
+ - name: Use the ConnectionSettings .INS file to review the network connections for install
+ href: ie11-ieak/connectionsettings-ins-file-setting.md
+ - name: Use the CustomBranding .INS file to specify the custom branding location
+ href: ie11-ieak/custombranding-ins-file-setting.md
+ - name: Use the ExtRegInf .INS file to specify installation files and mode
+ href: ie11-ieak/extreginf-ins-file-setting.md
+ - name: Use the FavoritesEx .INS file for your Favorites icon and URLs
+ href: ie11-ieak/favoritesex-ins-file-setting.md
+ - name: Use the HideCustom .INS file to hide GUIDs
+ href: ie11-ieak/hidecustom-ins-file-setting.md
+ - name: Use the ISP_Security .INS file to add your root certificate
+ href: ie11-ieak/isp-security-ins-file-setting.md
+ - name: Use the Media .INS file to specify your install media
+ href: ie11-ieak/media-ins-file-setting.md
+ - name: Use the Proxy .INS file to specify a proxy server
+ href: ie11-ieak/proxy-ins-file-setting.md
+ - name: Use the Security Imports .INS file to import security info
+ href: ie11-ieak/security-imports-ins-file-setting.md
+ - name: Use the URL .INS file to use an auto-configured proxy server
+ href: ie11-ieak/url-ins-file-setting.md
+ - name: IExpress Wizard for Windows Server 2008 R2 with SP1
+ href: ie11-ieak/iexpress-wizard-for-win-server.md
+ items:
+ - name: IExpress Wizard command-line options
+ href: ie11-ieak/iexpress-command-line-options.md
+ - name: Internet Explorer Setup command-line options and return codes
+ href: ie11-ieak/ie-setup-command-line-options-and-return-codes.md
+ - name: KB Troubleshoot
+ items:
+ - name: Internet Explorer and Microsoft Edge FAQ for IT Pros
+ href: kb-support/ie-edge-faqs.yml
+- name: Microsoft Edge and Internet Explorer troubleshooting
+ href: /troubleshoot/browsers/welcome-browsers
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/docfx.json b/browsers/internet-explorer/docfx.json
index 50208546bb..927e4c51ac 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/docfx.json
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/docfx.json
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
"**/*.yml"
],
"exclude": [
+ "**/includes/**",
"**/obj/**"
]
}
@@ -38,7 +39,16 @@
"folder_relative_path_in_docset": "./"
}
},
- "titleSuffix": "Internet Explorer"
+ "titleSuffix": "Internet Explorer",
+ "contributors_to_exclude": [
+ "rjagiewich",
+ "traya1",
+ "rmca14",
+ "claydetels19",
+ "jborsecnik",
+ "tiburd",
+ "garycentric"
+ ]
},
"externalReference": [],
"template": "op.html",
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/activex-installation-using-group-policy.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/activex-installation-using-group-policy.md
index 8fe62f2f79..855b556dd8 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/activex-installation-using-group-policy.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/activex-installation-using-group-policy.md
@@ -1,49 +1,50 @@
----
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.pagetype: security
-description: How to use Group Policy to install ActiveX controls.
-author: dansimp
-ms.prod: ie11
-ms.assetid: 59185370-558c-47e0-930c-8a5ed657e9e3
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-title: ActiveX installation using group policy (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
----
-
-
-# Group Policy and ActiveX installation
-
-ActiveX controls are installed and invoked using the HTML object tag with the CODEBASE attribute. This attribute, through a URL, makes Internet Explorer:
-
-- Get the ActiveX control if it's not already installed.
-
-- Download the installation package.
-
-- Perform trust verification on the object.
-
-- Prompt for installation permission, using the IE Information Bar.
-
-During installation, the rendering page registers and invokes the control, so that after installation, any standard user can invoke the control.
-
-**Important** ActiveX control installation requires administrator-level permissions.
-
-## Group Policy for the ActiveX Installer Service
-
-You use the ActiveX Installer Service (AXIS) and Group Policy to manage your ActiveX control deployment. The AXIS-related settings can be changed using either the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC) or the Local Group Policy Editor, and include:
-
-- **Approved Installation Sites for ActiveX Controls.** A list of approved installation sites used by AXIS to determine whether it can install a particular ActiveX control.
-
-- **ActiveX installation policy for sites in trusted zones.** Identifies how AXIS should behave when a website tries to install an ActiveX control. First, AXIS looks to see if the site appears in either the list of approved installation sites or in the **Trusted sites** zone. If the does, then AXIS checks to make sure the control meets your company's policy requirements. If the ActiveX control meets all of these requirements, the control is installed.
-
-For more information about the ActiveX Installer Service, see [Administering the ActiveX Installer Service in Windows 7](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=214503).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+---
+ms.localizationpriority: medium
+ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
+ms.pagetype: security
+description: How to use Group Policy to install ActiveX controls.
+author: dansimp
+ms.prod: ie11
+ms.assetid: 59185370-558c-47e0-930c-8a5ed657e9e3
+ms.reviewer:
+audience: itpro
+manager: dansimp
+ms.author: dansimp
+title: ActiveX installation using group policy (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
+ms.sitesec: library
+ms.date: 07/27/2017
+---
+
+
+# Group Policy and ActiveX installation
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
+ActiveX controls are installed and invoked using the HTML object tag with the CODEBASE attribute. This attribute, through a URL, makes Internet Explorer:
+
+- Get the ActiveX control if it's not already installed.
+
+- Download the installation package.
+
+- Perform trust verification on the object.
+
+- Prompt for installation permission, using the IE Information Bar.
+
+During installation, the rendering page registers and invokes the control, so that after installation, any standard user can invoke the control.
+
+**Important** ActiveX control installation requires administrator-level permissions.
+
+## Group Policy for the ActiveX Installer Service
+
+You use the ActiveX Installer Service (AXIS) and Group Policy to manage your ActiveX control deployment. The AXIS-related settings can be changed using either the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC) or the Local Group Policy Editor, and include:
+
+- **Approved Installation Sites for ActiveX Controls.** A list of approved installation sites used by AXIS to determine whether it can install a particular ActiveX control.
+
+- **ActiveX installation policy for sites in trusted zones.** Identifies how AXIS should behave when a website tries to install an ActiveX control. First, AXIS looks to see if the site appears in either the list of approved installation sites or in the **Trusted sites** zone. If the does, then AXIS checks to make sure the control meets your company's policy requirements. If the ActiveX control meets all of these requirements, the control is installed.
+
+For more information about the ActiveX Installer Service, see [Administering the ActiveX Installer Service in Windows 7](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-7/dd631688(v=ws.10)).
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/add-employees-enterprise-mode-portal.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/add-employees-enterprise-mode-portal.md
index 664bc596e1..455bae28bd 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/add-employees-enterprise-mode-portal.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/add-employees-enterprise-mode-portal.md
@@ -1,68 +1,72 @@
----
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.pagetype: appcompat
-description: Details about how to add employees to the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal.
-author: dansimp
-ms.prod: ie11
-title: Add employees to the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
----
-
-# Add employees to the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal
-
-**Applies to:**
-
-- Windows 10
-- Windows 8.1
-- Windows 7
-- Windows Server 2012 R2
-- Windows Server 2008 R2 with Service Pack 1 (SP1)
-
-After you get the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal up and running, you must add your employees. During this process, you'll also assign roles and groups.
-
-The available roles are:
-
-- **Requester.** The primary role to assign to employees that need to access the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal. The Requester can create change requests, validate changes in the pre-production environment, rollback pre-production and production changes in case of failure, send personal approval requests, view personal change requests, and sign off and close personal change requests.
-
-- **App Manager.** This role is considered part of the Approvers group. The App Manager can approve change requests, validate changes in the pre-production environment, rollback pre-production and production changes in case of failure, send personal approval requests, view personal requests, and sign off and close personal requests.
-
-- **Group Head.** This role is considered part of the Approvers group. The Group Head can approve change requests, validate changes in the pre-production environment, rollback pre-production and production changes in case of failure, send personal approval requests, view personal requests, and sign off and close personal requests.
-
-- **Administrator.** The role with the highest-level rights; we recommend limiting the number of employees you grant this role. The Administrator can perform any task that can be performed by the other roles, in addition to adding employees to the portal, assigning employee roles, approving registrations to the portal, configuring portal settings (for example, determining the freeze schedule, determining the pre-production and production XML paths, and determining the attachment upload location), and using the standalone Enterprise Mode Site List Manager page.
-
-**To add an employee to the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal**
-1. Open the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal and click the **Employee Management** icon in the upper-right area of the page.
-
- The **Employee management** page appears.
-
-2. Click **Add a new employee**.
-
- The **Add a new employee** page appears.
-
-3. Fill out the fields for each employee, including:
-
- - **Email.** Add the employee's email address.
-
- - **Name.** This box autofills based on the email address.
-
- - **Role.** Pick a single role for the employee, based on the list above.
-
- - **Group name.** Pick the name of the employee's group. The group association also assigns a group of Approvers.
-
- - **Comments.** Add optional comments about the employee.
-
- - **Active.** Click the check box to make the employee active in the system. If you want to keep the employee in the system, but you want to prevent access, clear this check box.
-
-4. Click **Save**.
-
-**To export all employees to an Excel spreadsheet**
-1. On the **Employee management** page, click **Export to Excel**.
-
-2. Save the EnterpriseModeUsersList.xlsx file.
-
- The Excel file includes all employees with access to the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal, including user name, email address, role, and group name.
+---
+ms.localizationpriority: medium
+ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
+ms.pagetype: appcompat
+description: Details about how to add employees to the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal.
+author: dansimp
+ms.prod: ie11
+title: Add employees to the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
+ms.sitesec: library
+ms.date: 07/27/2017
+ms.reviewer:
+audience: itpro
+manager: dansimp
+ms.author: dansimp
+---
+
+# Add employees to the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
+**Applies to:**
+
+- Windows 10
+- Windows 8.1
+- Windows 7
+- Windows Server 2012 R2
+- Windows Server 2008 R2 with Service Pack 1 (SP1)
+
+After you get the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal up and running, you must add your employees. During this process, you'll also assign roles and groups.
+
+The available roles are:
+
+- **Requester.** The primary role to assign to employees that need to access the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal. The Requester can create change requests, validate changes in the pre-production environment, rollback pre-production and production changes in case of failure, send personal approval requests, view personal change requests, and sign off and close personal change requests.
+
+- **App Manager.** This role is considered part of the Approvers group. The App Manager can approve change requests, validate changes in the pre-production environment, rollback pre-production and production changes in case of failure, send personal approval requests, view personal requests, and sign off and close personal requests.
+
+- **Group Head.** This role is considered part of the Approvers group. The Group Head can approve change requests, validate changes in the pre-production environment, rollback pre-production and production changes in case of failure, send personal approval requests, view personal requests, and sign off and close personal requests.
+
+- **Administrator.** The role with the highest-level rights; we recommend limiting the number of employees you grant this role. The Administrator can perform any task that can be performed by the other roles, in addition to adding employees to the portal, assigning employee roles, approving registrations to the portal, configuring portal settings (for example, determining the freeze schedule, determining the pre-production and production XML paths, and determining the attachment upload location), and using the standalone Enterprise Mode Site List Manager page.
+
+**To add an employee to the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal**
+1. Open the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal and click the **Employee Management** icon in the upper-right area of the page.
+
+ The **Employee management** page appears.
+
+2. Click **Add a new employee**.
+
+ The **Add a new employee** page appears.
+
+3. Fill out the fields for each employee, including:
+
+ - **Email.** Add the employee's email address.
+
+ - **Name.** This box autofills based on the email address.
+
+ - **Role.** Pick a single role for the employee, based on the list above.
+
+ - **Group name.** Pick the name of the employee's group. The group association also assigns a group of Approvers.
+
+ - **Comments.** Add optional comments about the employee.
+
+ - **Active.** Click the check box to make the employee active in the system. If you want to keep the employee in the system, but you want to prevent access, clear this check box.
+
+4. Click **Save**.
+
+**To export all employees to an Excel spreadsheet**
+1. On the **Employee management** page, click **Export to Excel**.
+
+2. Save the EnterpriseModeUsersList.xlsx file.
+
+ The Excel file includes all employees with access to the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal, including user name, email address, role, and group name.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/add-multiple-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-1-schema-and-enterprise-mode-tool.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/add-multiple-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-1-schema-and-enterprise-mode-tool.md
index 8ead60630e..57c8991c7d 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/add-multiple-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-1-schema-and-enterprise-mode-tool.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/add-multiple-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-1-schema-and-enterprise-mode-tool.md
@@ -1,112 +1,116 @@
----
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.pagetype: appcompat
-description: You can add multiple sites to your Enterprise Mode site list by creating a custom text (TXT) or Extensible Markup Language (XML) file of problematic sites and then adding it in the Bulk add from file area of the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager.
-author: dansimp
-ms.prod: ie11
-ms.assetid: 20aF07c4-051a-451f-9c46-5a052d9Ae27c
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-title: Add multiple sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using a file and the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1) (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
----
-
-
-# Add multiple sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using a file and the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1)
-
-**Applies to:**
-
-- Windows 8.1
-- Windows 7
-
-You can add multiple sites to your Enterprise Mode site list by creating a custom text (TXT) or Extensible Markup Language (XML) file of problematic sites and then adding it in the **Bulk add from file** area of the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager. You can only add specific URLs, not Internet or Intranet Zones.
-
-If you want to add your websites one at a time, see Add sites to the [Enterprise Mode site list using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1)](add-single-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-1-enterprise-mode-tool.md).
-
-## Create an Enterprise Mode site list (TXT) file
-You can create and use a custom text file to add multiple sites to your Enterprise Mode site list at the same time.
**Important** This text file is only lets you add multiple sites at the same time. You can’t use this file to deploy Enterprise Mode into your company.
-
-You must separate each site using commas or carriage returns. For example:
-
-```
-microsoft.com, bing.com, bing.com/images
-```
-**-OR-**
-
-```
-microsoft.com
-bing.com
-bing.com/images
-```
-
-## Create an Enterprise Mode site list (XML) file using the v.1 version of the Enterprise Mode schema
-You can create and use a custom XML file with the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager to add multiple sites to your Enterprise Mode site list at the same time. For more info about the v.1 version of the Enterprise Mode schema, see [Enterprise Mode schema v.1 guidance](enterprise-mode-schema-version-1-guidance.md).
-
-Each XML file must include:
-
-- **Version number.** This number must be incremented with each version of the Enterprise Mode site list, letting Internet Explorer know whether the list is new. Approximately 65 seconds after Internet Explorer 11 starts, it compares your site list version to the stored version number. If your file has a higher number, the newer version is loaded.
**Important** After this check, IE11 won’t look for an updated list again until you restart the browser.
-
-- **<emie> tag.** This tag specifies the domains and domain paths that must be rendered using IE7 Enterprise Mode, IE8 Enterprise Mode, or the default IE11 browser environment.
**Important** If you decide a site requires IE7 Enterprise Mode, you must add `forceCompatView=”true”` to your XML file. That code tells Enterprise Mode to check for a `DOCTYPE` tag on the specified webpage. If there is, the site renders using Windows Internet Explorer 7. If there’s no tag, the site renders using Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.
-
-- <docMode> tag.This tag specifies the domains and domain paths that need either to appear using the specific doc mode you assigned to the site. Enterprise Mode takes precedence over document modes, so sites that are already included in the Enterprise Mode site list won’t be affected by this update and will continue to load in Enterprise Mode, as usual. For more specific info about using document modes, see [Fix web compatibility issues using document modes and the Enterprise Mode site list](fix-compat-issues-with-doc-modes-and-enterprise-mode-site-list.md).
-
-### Enterprise Mode v.1 XML schema example
-The following is an example of what your XML file should look like when you’re done adding your sites. For more info about how to create your XML file, see [Enterprise Mode schema v.1 guidance](enterprise-mode-schema-version-1-guidance.md).
-
-```
-
-
- www.cpandl.com
- www.woodgrovebank.com
- adatum.com
- contoso.com
- relecloud.com
- /about
-
- fabrikam.com
- /products
-
-
-
- contoso.com
- /travel
-
- fabrikam.com
- /products
-
-
-
-```
-
-To make sure your site list is up-to-date; wait 65 seconds after opening IE and then check that the `CurrentVersion` value in the `HKEY\CURRENT\USER\Software\Microsoft\Internet Explorer\Main\EnterpriseMode\` registry key matches the version number in your file.
**Important** If `CurrentVersion` is not set or is wrong, it means that the XML parsing failed. This can mean that the XML file isn’t there, that there are access problems, or that the XML file format is wrong. Don’t manually change the `CurrentVersion` registry setting. You must make your changes to your site list and then update the list using the import function in the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (.
-
-## Add multiple sites to the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1)
-After you create your .xml or .txt file, you can bulk add the sites to the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1).
-
- **To add multiple sites**
-
-1. In the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1), click **Bulk add from file**.
-
-2. Go to your site list (either .txt or .xml) to add the included sites to the tool, and then click **Open**.
-Each site is validated and if successful, added to the global site list when you click **OK** to close the menu. If a site doesn’t pass validation, you can try to fix the issues or pick the site and click **Add to list** to ignore the validation problem. For more information about fixing validation problems, see [Fix validation problems using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](fix-compat-issues-with-doc-modes-and-enterprise-mode-site-list.md).
-
-3. Click **OK** to close the **Bulk add sites to the list** menu.
-
-4. On the **File** menu, click **Save to XML**, and save your file.
-You can save the file locally or to a network share. However, you must make sure you deploy it to the location specified in your registry key. For more information about the registry key, see [Turn on Enterprise Mode and use a site list](turn-on-enterprise-mode-and-use-a-site-list.md).
-
-## Next steps
-After you’ve added all of your sites to the tool and saved the file to XML, you can configure the rest of the Enterprise Mode functionality to use it. You can also turn Enterprise Mode on locally, so your users have the option to use Enterprise Mode on individual websites from the **Tools** menu. For more information, see [Turn on local control and logging for Enterprise Mode](turn-on-local-control-and-logging-for-enterprise-mode.md).
-
-## Related topics
-- [Enterprise Mode schema v.1 guidance](enterprise-mode-schema-version-1-guidance.md)
-- [Download the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkID=394378)
-
-
-
-
-
-
+---
+ms.localizationpriority: medium
+ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
+ms.pagetype: appcompat
+description: You can add multiple sites to your Enterprise Mode site list by creating a custom text (TXT) or Extensible Markup Language (XML) file of problematic sites and then adding it in the Bulk add from file area of the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager.
+author: dansimp
+ms.prod: ie11
+ms.assetid: 20aF07c4-051a-451f-9c46-5a052d9Ae27c
+ms.reviewer:
+audience: itpro
+manager: dansimp
+ms.author: dansimp
+title: Add multiple sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using a file and the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1) (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
+ms.sitesec: library
+ms.date: 07/27/2017
+---
+
+
+# Add multiple sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using a file and the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1)
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
+**Applies to:**
+
+- Windows 8.1
+- Windows 7
+
+You can add multiple sites to your Enterprise Mode site list by creating a custom text (TXT) or Extensible Markup Language (XML) file of problematic sites and then adding it in the **Bulk add from file** area of the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager. You can only add specific URLs, not Internet or Intranet Zones.
+
+If you want to add your websites one at a time, see Add sites to the [Enterprise Mode site list using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1)](add-single-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-1-enterprise-mode-tool.md).
+
+## Create an Enterprise Mode site list (TXT) file
+You can create and use a custom text file to add multiple sites to your Enterprise Mode site list at the same time.
**Important** This text file is only lets you add multiple sites at the same time. You can’t use this file to deploy Enterprise Mode into your company.
+
+You must separate each site using commas or carriage returns. For example:
+
+```
+microsoft.com, bing.com, bing.com/images
+```
+**-OR-**
+
+```
+microsoft.com
+bing.com
+bing.com/images
+```
+
+## Create an Enterprise Mode site list (XML) file using the v.1 version of the Enterprise Mode schema
+You can create and use a custom XML file with the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager to add multiple sites to your Enterprise Mode site list at the same time. For more info about the v.1 version of the Enterprise Mode schema, see [Enterprise Mode schema v.1 guidance](enterprise-mode-schema-version-1-guidance.md).
+
+Each XML file must include:
+
+- **Version number.** This number must be incremented with each version of the Enterprise Mode site list, letting Internet Explorer know whether the list is new. Approximately 65 seconds after Internet Explorer 11 starts, it compares your site list version to the stored version number. If your file has a higher number, the newer version is loaded.
**Important** After this check, IE11 won’t look for an updated list again until you restart the browser.
+
+- **<emie> tag.** This tag specifies the domains and domain paths that must be rendered using IE7 Enterprise Mode, IE8 Enterprise Mode, or the default IE11 browser environment.
**Important** If you decide a site requires IE7 Enterprise Mode, you must add `forceCompatView=”true”` to your XML file. That code tells Enterprise Mode to check for a `DOCTYPE` tag on the specified webpage. If there is, the site renders using Windows Internet Explorer 7. If there’s no tag, the site renders using Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.
+
+- <docMode> tag.This tag specifies the domains and domain paths that need either to appear using the specific doc mode you assigned to the site. Enterprise Mode takes precedence over document modes, so sites that are already included in the Enterprise Mode site list won’t be affected by this update and will continue to load in Enterprise Mode, as usual. For more specific info about using document modes, see [Fix web compatibility issues using document modes and the Enterprise Mode site list](fix-compat-issues-with-doc-modes-and-enterprise-mode-site-list.md).
+
+### Enterprise Mode v.1 XML schema example
+The following is an example of what your XML file should look like when you’re done adding your sites. For more info about how to create your XML file, see [Enterprise Mode schema v.1 guidance](enterprise-mode-schema-version-1-guidance.md).
+
+```
+
+
+ www.cpandl.com
+ www.woodgrovebank.com
+ adatum.com
+ contoso.com
+ relecloud.com
+ /about
+
+ fabrikam.com
+ /products
+
+
+
+ contoso.com
+ /travel
+
+ fabrikam.com
+ /products
+
+
+
+```
+
+To make sure your site list is up-to-date; wait 65 seconds after opening IE and then check that the `CurrentVersion` value in the `HKEY\CURRENT\USER\Software\Microsoft\Internet Explorer\Main\EnterpriseMode\` registry key matches the version number in your file.
**Important** If `CurrentVersion` is not set or is wrong, it means that the XML parsing failed. This can mean that the XML file isn’t there, that there are access problems, or that the XML file format is wrong. Don’t manually change the `CurrentVersion` registry setting. You must make your changes to your site list and then update the list using the import function in the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (.
+
+## Add multiple sites to the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1)
+After you create your .xml or .txt file, you can bulk add the sites to the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1).
+
+ **To add multiple sites**
+
+1. In the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1), click **Bulk add from file**.
+
+2. Go to your site list (either .txt or .xml) to add the included sites to the tool, and then click **Open**.
+Each site is validated and if successful, added to the global site list when you click **OK** to close the menu. If a site doesn’t pass validation, you can try to fix the issues or pick the site and click **Add to list** to ignore the validation problem. For more information about fixing validation problems, see [Fix validation problems using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](fix-compat-issues-with-doc-modes-and-enterprise-mode-site-list.md).
+
+3. Click **OK** to close the **Bulk add sites to the list** menu.
+
+4. On the **File** menu, click **Save to XML**, and save your file.
+You can save the file locally or to a network share. However, you must make sure you deploy it to the location specified in your registry key. For more information about the registry key, see [Turn on Enterprise Mode and use a site list](turn-on-enterprise-mode-and-use-a-site-list.md).
+
+## Next steps
+After you’ve added all of your sites to the tool and saved the file to XML, you can configure the rest of the Enterprise Mode functionality to use it. You can also turn Enterprise Mode on locally, so your users have the option to use Enterprise Mode on individual websites from the **Tools** menu. For more information, see [Turn on local control and logging for Enterprise Mode](turn-on-local-control-and-logging-for-enterprise-mode.md).
+
+## Related topics
+- [Enterprise Mode schema v.1 guidance](enterprise-mode-schema-version-1-guidance.md)
+- [Download the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkID=394378)
+
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/add-multiple-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-2-schema-and-enterprise-mode-tool.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/add-multiple-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-2-schema-and-enterprise-mode-tool.md
index 2fa52865ab..37ef55dea6 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/add-multiple-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-2-schema-and-enterprise-mode-tool.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/add-multiple-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-2-schema-and-enterprise-mode-tool.md
@@ -16,7 +16,10 @@ ms.date: 10/24/2017
---
-# Add multiple sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using a file and the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.2)
+# Add multiple sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using a file and the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.2)
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
**Applies to:**
@@ -116,7 +119,3 @@ After you’ve added all of your sites to the tool and saved the file to XML, yo
- [Download the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.2)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=716853)
- [Enterprise Mode schema v.2 guidance](enterprise-mode-schema-version-2-guidance.md)
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/add-single-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-1-enterprise-mode-tool.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/add-single-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-1-enterprise-mode-tool.md
index 8b8435daff..8c5e4b4426 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/add-single-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-1-enterprise-mode-tool.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/add-single-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-1-enterprise-mode-tool.md
@@ -1,66 +1,70 @@
----
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.pagetype: appcompat
-description: Enterprise Mode is a compatibility mode that runs on Internet Explorer 11, letting websites render using a modified browser configuration that's designed to emulate either Windows Internet Explorer 7 or Windows Internet Explorer 8, avoiding the common compatibility problems associated with web apps written and tested on older versions of Internet Explorer.
-author: dansimp
-ms.prod: ie11
-ms.assetid: 042e44e8-568d-4717-8fd3-69dd198bbf26
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-title: Add sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1) (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
----
-
-
-# Add single sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1)
-
-**Applies to:**
-
-- Windows 8.1
-- Windows 7
-- Windows Server 2008 R2 with Service Pack 1 (SP1)
-
-Enterprise Mode is a compatibility mode that runs on Internet Explorer 11, letting websites render using a modified browser configuration that’s designed to emulate either Windows Internet Explorer 7 or Windows Internet Explorer 8, avoiding the common compatibility problems associated with web apps written and tested on older versions of Internet Explorer.
**Important** You can only add specific URLs, not Internet or Intranet Zones.
-
-
Note If you're using the v.2 version of the Enterprise Mode schema, you'll need to use the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1). For more info, see Add sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.2).
-
- **To add a site to your compatibility list using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1)**
-
-1. In the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1), click **Add**.
-
-2. Type the URL for the website that’s experiencing compatibility problems, like *<domain>.com* or *<domain>.com*/*<path>* into the **URL** box.
-Don't include the `https://` or `https://` designation. The tool automatically tries both versions during validation.
-
-3. Type any comments about the website into the **Notes about URL** box.
-Administrators can only see comments while they’re in this tool.
-
-4. Choose **IE7 Enterprise Mode**, **IE8 Enterprise Mode**, or the appropriate document mode for sites that must be rendered using the emulation of a previous version of IE, or pick **Default IE** if the site should use the latest version of IE.
-
-The path within a domain can require a different compatibility mode from the domain itself. For example, the domain might look fine in the default IE11 browser, but the path might have problems and require the use of Enterprise Mode. If you added the domain previously, your original compatibility choice is still selected. However, if the domain is new, **IE8 Enterprise Mode** is automatically selected.
-
-Enterprise Mode takes precedence over document modes, so sites that are already included in the Enterprise Mode site list won’t be affected by this update and will continue to load in Enterprise Mode, as usual. For more specific info about using document modes, see [Fix web compatibility issues using document modes and the Enterprise Mode site list](fix-compat-issues-with-doc-modes-and-enterprise-mode-site-list.md).
-
-5. Click **Save** to validate your website and to add it to the site list for your enterprise.
- If your site passes validation, it’s added to the global compatibility list. If the site doesn’t pass validation, you’ll get an error message explaining the problem. You’ll then be able to either cancel the site or ignore the validation problem and add it to your list anyway.
-
-6. On the **File** menu, go to where you want to save the file, and then click **Save to XML**.
- You can save the file locally or to a network share. However, you must make sure you deploy it to the location specified in your registry key. For more information about the registry key, see [Turn on local control and logging for Enterprise Mode](turn-on-local-control-and-logging-for-enterprise-mode.md).
-
-## Next steps
-After you’ve added all of your sites to the tool and saved the file to XML, you can configure the rest of the Enterprise Mode functionality to use it. You can also turn Enterprise Mode on locally, so your users have the option to use Enterprise Mode on individual websites from the **Tools** menu. For more information, see [Turn on local control and logging for Enterprise Mode](turn-on-local-control-and-logging-for-enterprise-mode.md).
-
-## Related topics
-- [Download the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkID=394378)
-
-
-
-
-
-
+---
+ms.localizationpriority: medium
+ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
+ms.pagetype: appcompat
+description: Enterprise Mode is a compatibility mode that runs on Internet Explorer 11, letting websites render using a modified browser configuration that's designed to emulate either Windows Internet Explorer 7 or Windows Internet Explorer 8, avoiding the common compatibility problems associated with web apps written and tested on older versions of Internet Explorer.
+author: dansimp
+ms.prod: ie11
+ms.assetid: 042e44e8-568d-4717-8fd3-69dd198bbf26
+ms.reviewer:
+audience: itpro
+manager: dansimp
+ms.author: dansimp
+title: Add sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1) (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
+ms.sitesec: library
+ms.date: 07/27/2017
+---
+
+
+# Add single sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1)
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
+**Applies to:**
+
+- Windows 8.1
+- Windows 7
+- Windows Server 2008 R2 with Service Pack 1 (SP1)
+
+Enterprise Mode is a compatibility mode that runs on Internet Explorer 11, letting websites render using a modified browser configuration that’s designed to emulate either Windows Internet Explorer 7 or Windows Internet Explorer 8, avoiding the common compatibility problems associated with web apps written and tested on older versions of Internet Explorer.
**Important** You can only add specific URLs, not Internet or Intranet Zones.
+
+
Note If you're using the v.2 version of the Enterprise Mode schema, you'll need to use the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1). For more info, see Add sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.2).
+
+ **To add a site to your compatibility list using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1)**
+
+1. In the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1), click **Add**.
+
+2. Type the URL for the website that’s experiencing compatibility problems, like *<domain>.com* or *<domain>.com*/*<path>* into the **URL** box.
+Don't include the `https://` or `https://` designation. The tool automatically tries both versions during validation.
+
+3. Type any comments about the website into the **Notes about URL** box.
+Administrators can only see comments while they’re in this tool.
+
+4. Choose **IE7 Enterprise Mode**, **IE8 Enterprise Mode**, or the appropriate document mode for sites that must be rendered using the emulation of a previous version of IE, or pick **Default IE** if the site should use the latest version of IE.
+
+The path within a domain can require a different compatibility mode from the domain itself. For example, the domain might look fine in the default IE11 browser, but the path might have problems and require the use of Enterprise Mode. If you added the domain previously, your original compatibility choice is still selected. However, if the domain is new, **IE8 Enterprise Mode** is automatically selected.
+
+Enterprise Mode takes precedence over document modes, so sites that are already included in the Enterprise Mode site list won’t be affected by this update and will continue to load in Enterprise Mode, as usual. For more specific info about using document modes, see [Fix web compatibility issues using document modes and the Enterprise Mode site list](fix-compat-issues-with-doc-modes-and-enterprise-mode-site-list.md).
+
+5. Click **Save** to validate your website and to add it to the site list for your enterprise.
+ If your site passes validation, it’s added to the global compatibility list. If the site doesn’t pass validation, you’ll get an error message explaining the problem. You’ll then be able to either cancel the site or ignore the validation problem and add it to your list anyway.
+
+6. On the **File** menu, go to where you want to save the file, and then click **Save to XML**.
+ You can save the file locally or to a network share. However, you must make sure you deploy it to the location specified in your registry key. For more information about the registry key, see [Turn on local control and logging for Enterprise Mode](turn-on-local-control-and-logging-for-enterprise-mode.md).
+
+## Next steps
+After you’ve added all of your sites to the tool and saved the file to XML, you can configure the rest of the Enterprise Mode functionality to use it. You can also turn Enterprise Mode on locally, so your users have the option to use Enterprise Mode on individual websites from the **Tools** menu. For more information, see [Turn on local control and logging for Enterprise Mode](turn-on-local-control-and-logging-for-enterprise-mode.md).
+
+## Related topics
+- [Download the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkID=394378)
+
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/add-single-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-2-enterprise-mode-tool.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/add-single-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-2-enterprise-mode-tool.md
index 46a8edef5e..c7273e1661 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/add-single-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-2-enterprise-mode-tool.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/add-single-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-2-enterprise-mode-tool.md
@@ -7,7 +7,8 @@ author: dansimp
ms.prod: ie11
ms.assetid: 513e8f3b-fedf-4d57-8d81-1ea4fdf1ac0b
ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
+audience: itpro
+manager: dansimp
ms.author: dansimp
title: Add sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.2) (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
ms.sitesec: library
@@ -15,7 +16,10 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
---
-# Add single sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.2)
+# Add single sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.2)
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
**Applies to:**
@@ -57,16 +61,20 @@ You can add individual sites to your compatibility list by using the Enterprise
5. In conjunction with the compatibility mode, you'll need to use the **Open in** box to pick which browser opens the site.
- - **IE11**. Opens the site in IE11, regardless of which browser is opened by the employee.
+ - **IE11**. Opens the site in IE11, regardless of which browser is opened by the employee. If you have enabled [Internet Explorer mode integration on Microsoft Edge](/deployedge/edge-ie-mode), this option will open sites in Internet Explorer mode.
- **MSEdge**. Opens the site in Microsoft Edge, regardless of which browser is opened by the employee.
- **None**. Opens in whatever browser the employee chooses.
-6. Click **Save** to validate your website and to add it to the site list for your enterprise.
+6. If you have enabled [Internet Explorer mode integration on Microsoft Edge](/deployedge/edge-ie-mode), and you have sites that still need to opened in the standalone Internet Explorer 11 application, you can check the box for **Standalone IE**. This checkbox is only relevant when associated to 'Open in' IE11. Checking the box when 'Open In' is set to MSEdge or None will not change browser behavior.
+
+7. The checkbox **Allow Redirect** applies to the treatment of server side redirects. If you check this box, server side redirects will open in the browser specified by the open-in tag. For more information, see [here](./enterprise-mode-schema-version-2-guidance.md#updated-schema-attributes).
+
+8. Click **Save** to validate your website and to add it to the site list for your enterprise.
If your site passes validation, it’s added to the global compatibility list. If the site doesn’t pass validation, you’ll get an error message explaining the problem. You’ll then be able to either cancel the site or ignore the validation problem and add it to your list anyway.
-7. On the **File** menu, go to where you want to save the file, and then click **Save to XML**.
+9. On the **File** menu, go to where you want to save the file, and then click **Save to XML**.
You can save the file locally or to a network share. However, you must make sure you deploy it to the location specified in your registry key. For more information about the registry key, see [Turn on local control and logging for Enterprise Mode](turn-on-local-control-and-logging-for-enterprise-mode.md).
## Next steps
@@ -76,7 +84,3 @@ After you’ve added all of your sites to the tool and saved the file to XML, yo
- [Download the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.2)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=716853)
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/administrative-templates-and-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/administrative-templates-and-ie11.md
index f08c08fcdb..4de574cbe2 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/administrative-templates-and-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/administrative-templates-and-ie11.md
@@ -1,82 +1,86 @@
----
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.pagetype: security
-description: Administrative templates and Internet Explorer 11
-author: dansimp
-ms.prod: ie11
-ms.assetid: 2b390786-f786-41cc-bddc-c55c8a4c5af3
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-title: Administrative templates and Internet Explorer 11 (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
----
-
-
-# Administrative templates and Internet Explorer 11
-
-Administrative Templates are made up of a hierarchy of policy categories and subcategories that define how your policy settings appear in the Local Group Policy Editor, including:
-
-- What registry locations correspond to each setting.
-
-- What value options or restrictions are associated with each setting.
-
-- The default value for many settings.
-
-- Text explanations about each setting and the supported version of Internet Explorer.
-
-For a conceptual overview of Administrative Templates, see [Managing Group Policy ADMX Files Step-by-Step Guide](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=214519).
-
-## What are Administrative Templates?
-Administrative Templates are XML-based, multi-language files that define the registry-based Group Policy settings in the Local Group Policy Editor. There are two types of Administrative Templates:
-
-- **ADMX.** A language-neutral setup file that states the number and type of policy setting, and the location by category, as it shows up in the Local Group Policy Editor.
-
-- **ADML.** A language-specific setup file that provides language-related information to the ADMX file. This file lets the policy setting show up in the right language in the Local Group Policy Editor. You can add new languages by adding new ADML files in the required language.
-
-## How do I store Administrative Templates?
-As an admin, you can create a central store folder on your SYSVOL directory, named **PolicyDefinitions**. For example, %*SystemRoot*%\\PolicyDefinitions. This folder provides a single, centralized storage location for your Administrative Templates (both ADMX and ADML) files, so they can be used by your domain-based Group Policy Objects (GPOs).
-
Important Your Group Policy tools use the ADMX files in your store, ignoring any local copies. For more information about creating a central store, see Scenario 1: Editing the Local GPO Using ADMX Files.
-
-## Administrative Templates-related Group Policy settings
-When you install Internet Explorer 11, it updates the local administrative files, Inetres.admx and Inetres.adml, both located in the **PolicyDefinitions** folder.
-
Note You won't see the new policy settings if you try to view or edit your policy settings on a computer that isn't running IE11. To fix this, you can either install IE11, or you can copy the updated Inetres.admx and Inetres.adml files from another computer to the PolicyDefinitions folder on this computer.
-
-IE11 provides these new policy settings, which are editable in the Local Group Policy Editor, and appear in the following policy paths:
-
-- Computer Configuration\\Administrative Templates\\Windows Components\\
-
-- User Configuration\\Administrative Templates\\Windows Components\\
-
-
-|Catalog |Description |
-| ------------------------------------------------ | --------------------------------------------|
-|IE |Turns standard IE configuration on and off. |
-|Internet Explorer\Accelerators |Sets up and manages Accelerators. |
-|Internet Explorer\Administrator Approved Controls |Turns ActiveX controls on and off. |
-|Internet Explorer\Application Compatibility |Turns the **Cut**, **Copy**, or **Paste** operations on or off. This setting also requires that `URLACTION_SCRIPT_PASTE` is set to **Prompt**. |
-|Internet Explorer\Browser Menus |Shows or hides the IE menus and menu options.|
-|Internet Explorer\Corporate Settings |Turns off whether you specify the code download path for each computer. |
-|Internet Explorer\Delete Browsing History |Turns the **Delete Browsing History** settings on and off. |
-|Internet Explorer\Internet Control Panel |Turns pages on and off in the **Internet Options** dialog box. Also turns on and off the subcategories that manage settings on the **Content**, **General**, **Security** and **Advanced** pages. |
-|Internet Explorer\Internet Settings |Sets up and manages the **Advanced settings**, **AutoComplete**, **Display Settings**, and **URL Encoding** options. |
-|Internet Explorer\Persistence Behavior |Sets up and manages the file size limits for Internet security zones. |
-|Internet Explorer\Privacy |Turns various privacy-related features on and off. |
-|Internet Explorer\Security Features |Turns various security-related features on and off in the browser, Windows Explorer, and other applications. |
-|Internet Explorer\Toolbars |Turns on and off the ability for users to edit toolbars in the browser. You can also set the default toolbar buttons here. |
-|RSS Feeds |Sets up and manages RSS feeds in the browser. |
-
-
-## Editing Group Policy settings
-Regardless which tool you're using to edit your Group Policy settings, you'll need to follow one of these guides for step-by-step editing instructions:
-
-- **If you're using the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC) or the Local Group Policy Editor.** See [Edit Administrative Template Policy Settings](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=214521) for step-by-step instructions about editing your Administrative Templates.
-
-- **If you're using GPMC with Advanced Group Policy Management (AGPM).** See [Checklist: Create, Edit, and Deploy a GPO](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=214522) for step-by-step instructions about how to check out a GPO from the AGPM archive, edit it, and request deployment.
-
-## Related topics
-- [Administrative templates (.admx) for Windows 10 April 2018 Update](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=56880)
-- [Administrative templates (.admx) for Windows 10 October 2018 Update](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=57576)
-- [Administrative Templates (.admx) for Windows 8.1 and Windows Server 2012 R2](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=746580)
+---
+ms.localizationpriority: medium
+ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
+ms.pagetype: security
+description: Administrative templates and Internet Explorer 11
+author: dansimp
+ms.prod: ie11
+ms.assetid: 2b390786-f786-41cc-bddc-c55c8a4c5af3
+ms.reviewer:
+audience: itpro
+manager: dansimp
+ms.author: dansimp
+title: Administrative templates and Internet Explorer 11 (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
+ms.sitesec: library
+ms.date: 07/27/2017
+---
+
+
+# Administrative templates and Internet Explorer 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
+Administrative Templates are made up of a hierarchy of policy categories and subcategories that define how your policy settings appear in the Local Group Policy Editor, including:
+
+- What registry locations correspond to each setting.
+
+- What value options or restrictions are associated with each setting.
+
+- The default value for many settings.
+
+- Text explanations about each setting and the supported version of Internet Explorer.
+
+For a conceptual overview of Administrative Templates, see [Managing Group Policy ADMX Files Step-by-Step Guide](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-vista/cc709647(v=ws.10)).
+
+## What are Administrative Templates?
+Administrative Templates are XML-based, multi-language files that define the registry-based Group Policy settings in the Local Group Policy Editor. There are two types of Administrative Templates:
+
+- **ADMX.** A language-neutral setup file that states the number and type of policy setting, and the location by category, as it shows up in the Local Group Policy Editor.
+
+- **ADML.** A language-specific setup file that provides language-related information to the ADMX file. This file lets the policy setting show up in the right language in the Local Group Policy Editor. You can add new languages by adding new ADML files in the required language.
+
+## How do I store Administrative Templates?
+As an admin, you can create a central store folder on your SYSVOL directory, named **PolicyDefinitions**. For example, %*SystemRoot*%\\PolicyDefinitions. This folder provides a single, centralized storage location for your Administrative Templates (both ADMX and ADML) files, so they can be used by your domain-based Group Policy Objects (GPOs).
+
Important Your Group Policy tools use the ADMX files in your store, ignoring any local copies. For more information about creating a central store, see Scenario 1: Editing the Local GPO Using ADMX Files.
+
+## Administrative Templates-related Group Policy settings
+When you install Internet Explorer 11, it updates the local administrative files, Inetres.admx and Inetres.adml, both located in the **PolicyDefinitions** folder.
+
Note You won't see the new policy settings if you try to view or edit your policy settings on a computer that isn't running IE11. To fix this, you can either install IE11, or you can copy the updated Inetres.admx and Inetres.adml files from another computer to the PolicyDefinitions folder on this computer.
+
+IE11 provides these new policy settings, which are editable in the Local Group Policy Editor, and appear in the following policy paths:
+
+- Computer Configuration\\Administrative Templates\\Windows Components\\
+
+- User Configuration\\Administrative Templates\\Windows Components\\
+
+
+|Catalog |Description |
+| ------------------------------------------------ | --------------------------------------------|
+|IE |Turns standard IE configuration on and off. |
+|Internet Explorer\Accelerators |Sets up and manages Accelerators. |
+|Internet Explorer\Administrator Approved Controls |Turns ActiveX controls on and off. |
+|Internet Explorer\Application Compatibility |Turns the **Cut**, **Copy**, or **Paste** operations on or off. This setting also requires that `URLACTION_SCRIPT_PASTE` is set to **Prompt**. |
+|Internet Explorer\Browser Menus |Shows or hides the IE menus and menu options.|
+|Internet Explorer\Corporate Settings |Turns off whether you specify the code download path for each computer. |
+|Internet Explorer\Delete Browsing History |Turns the **Delete Browsing History** settings on and off. |
+|Internet Explorer\Internet Control Panel |Turns pages on and off in the **Internet Options** dialog box. Also turns on and off the subcategories that manage settings on the **Content**, **General**, **Security** and **Advanced** pages. |
+|Internet Explorer\Internet Settings |Sets up and manages the **Advanced settings**, **AutoComplete**, **Display Settings**, and **URL Encoding** options. |
+|Internet Explorer\Persistence Behavior |Sets up and manages the file size limits for Internet security zones. |
+|Internet Explorer\Privacy |Turns various privacy-related features on and off. |
+|Internet Explorer\Security Features |Turns various security-related features on and off in the browser, Windows Explorer, and other applications. |
+|Internet Explorer\Toolbars |Turns on and off the ability for users to edit toolbars in the browser. You can also set the default toolbar buttons here. |
+|RSS Feeds |Sets up and manages RSS feeds in the browser. |
+
+
+## Editing Group Policy settings
+Regardless which tool you're using to edit your Group Policy settings, you'll need to follow one of these guides for step-by-step editing instructions:
+
+- **If you're using the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC) or the Local Group Policy Editor.** See [Edit Administrative Template Policy Settings](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2008-R2-and-2008/cc771479(v=ws.11)) for step-by-step instructions about editing your Administrative Templates.
+
+- **If you're using GPMC with Advanced Group Policy Management (AGPM).** See [Checklist: Create, Edit, and Deploy a GPO](/microsoft-desktop-optimization-pack/agpm/checklist-create-edit-and-deploy-a-gpo-agpm40) for step-by-step instructions about how to check out a GPO from the AGPM archive, edit it, and request deployment.
+
+## Related topics
+- [Administrative templates (.admx) for Windows 10 April 2018 Update](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=56880)
+- [Administrative templates (.admx) for Windows 10 October 2018 Update](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=57576)
+- [Administrative Templates (.admx) for Windows 8.1 and Windows Server 2012 R2](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=746580)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/approve-change-request-enterprise-mode-portal.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/approve-change-request-enterprise-mode-portal.md
index 977e17394e..07687792a3 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/approve-change-request-enterprise-mode-portal.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/approve-change-request-enterprise-mode-portal.md
@@ -1,62 +1,66 @@
----
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.pagetype: appcompat
-description: Details about how Approvers can approve open change requests in the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal.
-author: dansimp
-ms.prod: ie11
-title: Approve a change request using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
----
-
-# Approve a change request using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal
-
-**Applies to:**
-
-- Windows 10
-- Windows 8.1
-- Windows 7
-- Windows Server 2012 R2
-- Windows Server 2008 R2 with Service Pack 1 (SP1)
-
-After a change request is successfully submitted to the pre-defined Approver(s), employees granted the role of **App Manager**, **Group Head**, or **Administrator**, they must approve the changes.
-
-## Approve or reject a change request
-The Approvers get an email stating that a Requester successfully opened, tested, and submitted the change request to the Approvers group. The Approvers can accept or reject a change request.
-
-**To approve or reject a change request**
-1. The Approver logs onto the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal, **All Approvals** page.
-
- The Approver can also get to the **All Approvals** page by clicking **Approvals Pending** from the left pane.
-
-2. The Approver clicks the expander arrow (**\/**) to the right side of the change request, showing the list of Approvers and the **Approve** and **Reject** buttons.
-
-3. The Approver reviews the change request, making sure it's correct. If the info is correct, the Approver clicks **Approve** to approve the change request. If the info seems incorrect, or if the app shouldn't be added to the site list, the Approver clicks **Reject**.
-
- An email is sent to the Requester, the Approver(s) group, and the Administrator(s) group, with the updated status of the request.
-
-
-## Send a reminder to the Approver(s) group
-If the change request is sitting in the approval queue for too long, the Requester can send a reminder to the group.
-
-- From the **My Approvals** page, click the checkbox next to the name of each Approver to be reminded, and then click **Send reminder**.
-
- An email is sent to the selected Approver(s).
-
-
-## View rejected change requests
-The original Requester, the Approver(s) group, and the Administrator(s) group can all view the rejected change request.
-
-**To view the rejected change request**
-
-- In the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal, click **Rejected** from the left pane.
-
- All rejected change requests appear, with role assignment determining which ones are visible.
-
-
-## Next steps
-After an Approver approves the change request, it must be scheduled for inclusion in the production Enterprise Mode Site List. For the scheduling steps, see the [Schedule approved change requests for production using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal](schedule-production-change-enterprise-mode-portal.md) topic.
+---
+ms.localizationpriority: medium
+ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
+ms.pagetype: appcompat
+description: Details about how Approvers can approve open change requests in the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal.
+author: dansimp
+ms.prod: ie11
+title: Approve a change request using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
+ms.sitesec: library
+ms.date: 07/27/2017
+ms.reviewer:
+audience: itpro
+manager: dansimp
+ms.author: dansimp
+---
+
+# Approve a change request using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
+**Applies to:**
+
+- Windows 10
+- Windows 8.1
+- Windows 7
+- Windows Server 2012 R2
+- Windows Server 2008 R2 with Service Pack 1 (SP1)
+
+After a change request is successfully submitted to the pre-defined Approver(s), employees granted the role of **App Manager**, **Group Head**, or **Administrator**, they must approve the changes.
+
+## Approve or reject a change request
+The Approvers get an email stating that a Requester successfully opened, tested, and submitted the change request to the Approvers group. The Approvers can accept or reject a change request.
+
+**To approve or reject a change request**
+1. The Approver logs onto the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal, **All Approvals** page.
+
+ The Approver can also get to the **All Approvals** page by clicking **Approvals Pending** from the left pane.
+
+2. The Approver clicks the expander arrow (**\/**) to the right side of the change request, showing the list of Approvers and the **Approve** and **Reject** buttons.
+
+3. The Approver reviews the change request, making sure it's correct. If the info is correct, the Approver clicks **Approve** to approve the change request. If the info seems incorrect, or if the app shouldn't be added to the site list, the Approver clicks **Reject**.
+
+ An email is sent to the Requester, the Approver(s) group, and the Administrator(s) group, with the updated status of the request.
+
+
+## Send a reminder to the Approver(s) group
+If the change request is sitting in the approval queue for too long, the Requester can send a reminder to the group.
+
+- From the **My Approvals** page, click the checkbox next to the name of each Approver to be reminded, and then click **Send reminder**.
+
+ An email is sent to the selected Approver(s).
+
+
+## View rejected change requests
+The original Requester, the Approver(s) group, and the Administrator(s) group can all view the rejected change request.
+
+**To view the rejected change request**
+
+- In the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal, click **Rejected** from the left pane.
+
+ All rejected change requests appear, with role assignment determining which ones are visible.
+
+
+## Next steps
+After an Approver approves the change request, it must be scheduled for inclusion in the production Enterprise Mode Site List. For the scheduling steps, see the [Schedule approved change requests for production using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal](schedule-production-change-enterprise-mode-portal.md) topic.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/auto-configuration-and-auto-proxy-problems-with-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/auto-configuration-and-auto-proxy-problems-with-ie11.md
index d45374e404..f87e4e9cc9 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/auto-configuration-and-auto-proxy-problems-with-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/auto-configuration-and-auto-proxy-problems-with-ie11.md
@@ -1,62 +1,62 @@
----
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.pagetype: networking
-description: Auto configuration and auto proxy problems with Internet Explorer 11
-author: dansimp
-ms.prod: ie11
-ms.assetid: 3fbbc2c8-859b-4b2e-abc3-de2c299e0938
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-title: Auto configuration and auto proxy problems with Internet Explorer 11 (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
----
-
-
-# Auto configuration and auto proxy problems with Internet Explorer 11
-You might experience some problems using automatic configuration and auto-proxy with Internet Explorer 11.
-
-## Branding changes aren't distributed using automatic configuration
-If you've turned on the **Disable external branding of Internet Explorer** Group Policy Object, you won't be able to use automatic configuration to distribute your branding changes to your users' computers. When this object is turned on, it prevents the branding of IE by a non-Microsoft company or entity, such as an Internet service provider or Internet content provider. For more information about automatic configuration, see [Auto configuration settings for Internet Explorer 11](auto-configuration-settings-for-ie11.md) and [Use the Automatic Configuration page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](../ie11-ieak/auto-config-ieak11-wizard.md). For more information about Group Policy settings, see [Group policy objects and Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)](group-policy-objects-and-ie11.md).
-
-## Proxy server setup issues
-If you experience issues while setting up your proxy server, you can try these troubleshooting steps:
-
-- Check to make sure the proxy server address is right.
-
-- Check that both **Automatically detect settings** and **Automatic configuration** are turned on in the browser.
-
-- Check that the browser is pointing to the right automatic configuration script location.
-
- **To check your proxy server address**
-
-1. On the **Tools** menu, click **Internet Options**, and then **Connections**.
-
-2. Click **Settings** or **LAN Settings**, and then look at your proxy server address.
-
-3. If you have multiple proxy servers, click **Advanced** to look at all of the additional addresses.
**Note** If IE11 uses a proxy server for local IP addresses, regardless whether you turned on the **Bypass Proxy Server for Local Addresses** option, see [Internet Explorer Uses Proxy Server for Local IP Address Even if the "Bypass Proxy Server for Local Addresses" Option Is Turned On](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=85652).
-
- **To check that you've turned on the correct settings**
-
-4. On the **Tools** menu, click **Internet Options**, and then click **Connections**.
-
-5. Click **Settings** or **LAN Settings**.
-
-6. In the **Automatic configuration** area, check that you've clicked the **Automatically detect settings** box. If you've turned on automatic configuration, check to make sure that you've also clicked the **Use automatic configuration script** box.
**Note** If at this point everything is set up correctly, but the proxy server still isn't behaving properly, click the **Detect my network settings** box in the **Error** dialog box to try to detect the proxy server, again.
-
- **To check that you're pointing to the correct automatic configuration script location**
-
-7. On the **Tools** menu, click **Internet Options**, and then click **Connections**.
-
-8. Click **Settings** or **LAN Settings**.
-
-9. In the **Automatic configuration** area, check that you've chosen the **Use automatic configuration script** box, and that it has the correct location to your automatic configuration script or for your automatic proxy URL.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+---
+ms.localizationpriority: medium
+ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
+ms.pagetype: networking
+description: Auto configuration and auto proxy problems with Internet Explorer 11
+author: dansimp
+ms.prod: ie11
+ms.assetid: 3fbbc2c8-859b-4b2e-abc3-de2c299e0938
+ms.reviewer:
+audience: itpro
+manager: dansimp
+ms.author: dansimp
+title: Auto configuration and auto proxy problems with Internet Explorer 11 (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
+ms.sitesec: library
+ms.date: 07/27/2017
+---
+
+
+# Auto configuration and auto proxy problems with Internet Explorer 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+You might experience some problems using automatic configuration and auto-proxy with Internet Explorer 11.
+
+## Branding changes aren't distributed using automatic configuration
+If you've turned on the **Disable external branding of Internet Explorer** Group Policy Object, you won't be able to use automatic configuration to distribute your branding changes to your users' computers. When this object is turned on, it prevents the branding of IE by a non-Microsoft company or entity, such as an Internet service provider or Internet content provider. For more information about automatic configuration, see [Auto configuration settings for Internet Explorer 11](auto-configuration-settings-for-ie11.md) and [Use the Automatic Configuration page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](../ie11-ieak/auto-config-ieak11-wizard.md). For more information about Group Policy settings, see [Group policy objects and Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)](group-policy-objects-and-ie11.md).
+
+## Proxy server setup issues
+If you experience issues while setting up your proxy server, you can try these troubleshooting steps:
+
+- Check to make sure the proxy server address is right.
+
+- Check that both **Automatically detect settings** and **Automatic configuration** are turned on in the browser.
+
+- Check that the browser is pointing to the right automatic configuration script location.
+
+ **To check your proxy server address**
+
+1. On the **Tools** menu, click **Internet Options**, and then **Connections**.
+
+2. Click **Settings** or **LAN Settings**, and then look at your proxy server address.
+
+3. If you have multiple proxy servers, click **Advanced** to look at all of the additional addresses.
**Note** If IE11 uses a proxy server for local IP addresses, regardless whether you turned on the **Bypass Proxy Server for Local Addresses** option, see [Internet Explorer Uses Proxy Server for Local IP Address Even if the "Bypass Proxy Server for Local Addresses" Option Is Turned On](/troubleshoot/browsers/internet-explorer-uses-proxy-server-local-ip-address).
+
+ **To check that you've turned on the correct settings**
+
+4. On the **Tools** menu, click **Internet Options**, and then click **Connections**.
+
+5. Click **Settings** or **LAN Settings**.
+
+6. In the **Automatic configuration** area, check that you've clicked the **Automatically detect settings** box. If you've turned on automatic configuration, check to make sure that you've also clicked the **Use automatic configuration script** box.
**Note** If at this point everything is set up correctly, but the proxy server still isn't behaving properly, click the **Detect my network settings** box in the **Error** dialog box to try to detect the proxy server, again.
+
+ **To check that you're pointing to the correct automatic configuration script location**
+
+7. On the **Tools** menu, click **Internet Options**, and then click **Connections**.
+
+8. Click **Settings** or **LAN Settings**.
+
+9. In the **Automatic configuration** area, check that you've chosen the **Use automatic configuration script** box, and that it has the correct location to your automatic configuration script or for your automatic proxy URL.
+
+
+
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/auto-configuration-settings-for-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/auto-configuration-settings-for-ie11.md
index 1b9a0ba9c8..10ff22508d 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/auto-configuration-settings-for-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/auto-configuration-settings-for-ie11.md
@@ -1,74 +1,74 @@
----
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.pagetype: networking
-description: Auto configuration settings for Internet Explorer 11
-author: dansimp
-ms.prod: ie11
-ms.assetid: 90308d59-45b9-4639-ab1b-497e5ba19023
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-title: Auto configuration settings for Internet Explorer 11 (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
----
-
-
-# Auto configuration settings for Internet Explorer 11
-Automatic configuration lets you apply custom branding and graphics to your internal Internet Explorer installations, running on Windows 8.1 or Windows Server 2012 R2. For more information about adding custom branding and graphics to your IE package, see [Customize the toolbar button and Favorites List icons using IEAK 11](../ie11-ieak/guidelines-toolbar-and-favorites-list-ieak11.md).
**Important** You'll only see and be able to use the **IE Customization Wizard 11 - Automatic Configuration** page if you're creating an internal IE installation package. For more information about the **IE Customization Wizard 11 - Automatic Configuration** page, see [Use the Automatic Configuration page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](../ie11-ieak/auto-config-ieak11-wizard.md).
-
-## Adding the automatic configuration registry key
-For custom graphics and branding, add the `FEATURE\AUTOCONFIG\BRANDING` registry key to your IE installation package.
**Important** Follow these directions carefully because serious problems can occur if you update your registry incorrectly. For added protection, back up your registry so you can restore it if a problem occurs.
-
- **To add the registry key**
-
-1. On the **Start** screen, type **regedit**, and then click **Regedit.exe**.
-
-2. Right-click the `HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Internet Explorer\Main\FeatureControl` subkey, point to **New**, and then click **Key**.
-
-3. Enter the new key name, `FEATURE\AUTOCONFIG\BRANDING`, and then press Enter.
-
-4. Right-click `FEATURE\AUTOCONFIG\BRANDING`, point to **New**, and then click **DWORD (32-bit) Value**.
-
-5. Enter the new DWORD value name, **iexplore.exe**, and then press Enter.
-
-6. Right-click **iexplore.exe**, and then click **Modify**.
-
-7. In the **Value data** box, enter **1**, and then click **OK**.
-
-8. Exit the registry editor.
-
-## Updating your automatic configuration settings
-After adding the `FEATURE\AUTOCONFIG\BRANDING` registry key, you can change your automatic configuration settings to pick up the updated branding.
-
Important Your branding changes won't be added or updated if you've previously chosen the Disable external branding of IE setting in the User Configuration\Administrative Templates\Windows Components\Internet Explorer Group Policy object. This setting is intended to prevent branding by a third-party, like an Internet service or content provider. For more information about Group Policy, including videos and the latest technical documentation, see the Group Policy TechCenter.
-
- **To update your settings**
-
-1. Open the IE Customization Wizard 11, and go to the **Automatic Configuration** page.
-
-2. Choose the **Automatically detect configuration settings** check box to allow automatic detection of browser settings.
-
-3. Choose the **Enable Automatic Configuration** box to let you change the rest of the configuration options, including:
-
- - **Automatically configure every box:** Type how often IE should check for configuration updates. Typing **0** (zero), or not putting in any number, means that automatic configuration only happens when the computer restarts.
-
- - **Automatic Configuration URL (.INS file) box:** Type the location of your automatic configuration script.
-
- - **Automatic proxy URL (.JS, .JVS, or .PAC file) box:** Type the location of your automatic proxy script.
**Important** Internet Explorer 11 no longer supports using file server locations with your proxy configuration (.pac) files. To keep using your .pac files, you have to keep them on a web server and reference them using a URL, like `https://share/test.ins`.
-
-If your branding changes aren't correctly deployed after running through this process, see [Auto configuration and auto proxy problems with Internet Explorer 11](auto-configuration-and-auto-proxy-problems-with-ie11.md).
-
-## Locking your automatic configuration settings
-You have two options to restrict your users' ability to override the automatic configuration settings, based on your environment.
-
-- **Using Microsoft Active Directory.** Choose **Disable changing Automatic Configuration settings** from the Administrative Templates setting.
-
-- **Not Using Active Directory.** Choose the **Disable changing Automatic Configuration settings** setting in the `User Configuration\Administrative Templates\Windows Components\Internet Explorer` Group Policy object.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+---
+ms.localizationpriority: medium
+ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
+ms.pagetype: networking
+description: Auto configuration settings for Internet Explorer 11
+author: dansimp
+ms.prod: ie11
+ms.assetid: 90308d59-45b9-4639-ab1b-497e5ba19023
+ms.reviewer:
+audience: itpro
+manager: dansimp
+ms.author: dansimp
+title: Auto configuration settings for Internet Explorer 11 (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
+ms.sitesec: library
+ms.date: 07/27/2017
+---
+
+
+# Auto configuration settings for Internet Explorer 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+Automatic configuration lets you apply custom branding and graphics to your internal Internet Explorer installations, running on Windows 8.1 or Windows Server 2012 R2. For more information about adding custom branding and graphics to your IE package, see [Customize the toolbar button and Favorites List icons using IEAK 11](../ie11-ieak/guidelines-toolbar-and-favorites-list-ieak11.md).
**Important** You'll only see and be able to use the **IE Customization Wizard 11 - Automatic Configuration** page if you're creating an internal IE installation package. For more information about the **IE Customization Wizard 11 - Automatic Configuration** page, see [Use the Automatic Configuration page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](../ie11-ieak/auto-config-ieak11-wizard.md).
+
+## Adding the automatic configuration registry key
+For custom graphics and branding, add the `FEATURE\AUTOCONFIG\BRANDING` registry key to your IE installation package.
**Important** Follow these directions carefully because serious problems can occur if you update your registry incorrectly. For added protection, back up your registry so you can restore it if a problem occurs.
+
+ **To add the registry key**
+
+1. On the **Start** screen, type **regedit**, and then click **Regedit.exe**.
+
+2. Right-click the `HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Internet Explorer\Main\FeatureControl` subkey, point to **New**, and then click **Key**.
+
+3. Enter the new key name, `FEATURE\AUTOCONFIG\BRANDING`, and then press Enter.
+
+4. Right-click `FEATURE\AUTOCONFIG\BRANDING`, point to **New**, and then click **DWORD (32-bit) Value**.
+
+5. Enter the new DWORD value name, **iexplore.exe**, and then press Enter.
+
+6. Right-click **iexplore.exe**, and then click **Modify**.
+
+7. In the **Value data** box, enter **1**, and then click **OK**.
+
+8. Exit the registry editor.
+
+## Updating your automatic configuration settings
+After adding the `FEATURE\AUTOCONFIG\BRANDING` registry key, you can change your automatic configuration settings to pick up the updated branding.
+
Important Your branding changes won't be added or updated if you've previously chosen the Disable external branding of IE setting in the User Configuration\Administrative Templates\Windows Components\Internet Explorer Group Policy object. This setting is intended to prevent branding by a third-party, like an Internet service or content provider. For more information about Group Policy, including videos and the latest technical documentation, see the Group Policy TechCenter.
+
+ **To update your settings**
+
+1. Open the IE Customization Wizard 11, and go to the **Automatic Configuration** page.
+
+2. Choose the **Automatically detect configuration settings** check box to allow automatic detection of browser settings.
+
+3. Choose the **Enable Automatic Configuration** box to let you change the rest of the configuration options, including:
+
+ - **Automatically configure every box:** Type how often IE should check for configuration updates. Typing **0** (zero), or not putting in any number, means that automatic configuration only happens when the computer restarts.
+
+ - **Automatic Configuration URL (.INS file) box:** Type the location of your automatic configuration script.
+
+ - **Automatic proxy URL (.JS, .JVS, or .PAC file) box:** Type the location of your automatic proxy script.
**Important** Internet Explorer 11 no longer supports using file server locations with your proxy configuration (.pac) files. To keep using your .pac files, you have to keep them on a web server and reference them using a URL, like `https://share/test.ins`.
+
+If your branding changes aren't correctly deployed after running through this process, see [Auto configuration and auto proxy problems with Internet Explorer 11](auto-configuration-and-auto-proxy-problems-with-ie11.md).
+
+## Locking your automatic configuration settings
+You have two options to restrict your users' ability to override the automatic configuration settings, based on your environment.
+
+- **Using Microsoft Active Directory.** Choose **Disable changing Automatic Configuration settings** from the Administrative Templates setting.
+
+- **Not Using Active Directory.** Choose the **Disable changing Automatic Configuration settings** setting in the `User Configuration\Administrative Templates\Windows Components\Internet Explorer` Group Policy object.
+
+
+
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/auto-detect-settings-for-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/auto-detect-settings-for-ie11.md
index 6d58aac85b..bf9f448755 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/auto-detect-settings-for-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/auto-detect-settings-for-ie11.md
@@ -1,55 +1,55 @@
----
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.pagetype: networking
-description: Auto detect settings Internet Explorer 11
-author: dansimp
-ms.prod: ie11
-ms.assetid: c6753cf4-3276-43c5-aae9-200e9e82753f
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-title: Auto detect settings Internet Explorer 11 (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
----
-
-
-# Auto detect settings Internet Explorer 11
-After you specify the specific settings related to automatic detection on your Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) and Domain Name System (DNS) servers, you can set up your users' browser settings from a central location.
-
-Automatic detection works even if the browser wasn't originally set up or installed by the administrator.
-
-- **Using DHCP servers:** For local area network (LAN)-based users. This server type lets you specify your global and subnet TCP/IP parameters centrally, defining your users' parameters by using reserved addresses. By doing it this way, a computer can move between subnets, automatically reconfiguring for TCP/IP when it starts.
-
-- **Using DNS servers:** For users on dial-up connections. This server type uses a set of protocols and services on a TCP/IP network, which lets users search for other computers by using hierarchical, user-friendly names (hosts), instead of numeric IP addresses.
**Note** DHCP has a higher priority than DNS for automatic configuration. If DHCP provides the URL to a .pac, .jvs, .js, or .ins configuration file, the process stops and the DNS lookup doesn't happen.
-
-## Updating your automatic detection settings
-To use automatic detection, you have to set up your DHCP and DNS servers.
**Note** Your DHCP servers must support the `DHCPINFORM` message, to obtain the DHCP options.
-
- **To turn on automatic detection for DHCP servers**
-
-1. Open the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11, and go to the **Automatic Configuration** page.
-
-2. Choose the **Automatically detect configuration settings** box to automatically detect your browser settings. For more information about the **Automatic Configuration** page, see [Use the Automatic Configuration page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](../ie11-ieak/auto-config-ieak11-wizard.md).
-
-3. Open the [DHCP Administrative Tool](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=302212), create a new option type, using the code number 252, and then associate it with the URL to your configuration file. For detailed instructions about how to do this, see [Create an option 252 entry in DHCP](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=294649).
-
- **To turn on automatic detection for DNS servers**
-
-4. Open the IE Customization Wizard 11, and go to the **Automatic Configuration** page.
-
-5. Choose the **Automatically detect configuration settings** box to automatically detect your browser settings.
-
-6. In your DNS database file, create a host record named, **WPAD**. This record has the IP address of the web server storing your automatic configuration (.js, .jvs, .pac, or .ins) file.
**-OR-**
Create a canonical name (CNAME) alias record named, **WPAD**. This record has the resolved name (not the IP address) of the server storing your automatic configuration (.pac) file.
**Note** For more information about creating a **WPAD** entry, see [Creating a WPAD entry in DNS](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=294651).
-
-7. After the database file propagates to the server, the DNS name, `wpad..com` resolves to the server name that includes your automatic configuration file.
**Note** Internet Explorer 11 creates a default URL template based on the host name, **wpad**. For example, `https://wpad..com/wpad.dat`. Because of this, you need to set up a file or redirection point in your web server **WPAD** record, named **wpad.dat**. The **wpad.dat** record delivers the contents of your automatic configuration file.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+---
+ms.localizationpriority: medium
+ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
+ms.pagetype: networking
+description: Auto detect settings Internet Explorer 11
+author: dansimp
+ms.prod: ie11
+ms.assetid: c6753cf4-3276-43c5-aae9-200e9e82753f
+ms.reviewer:
+audience: itpro
+manager: dansimp
+ms.author: dansimp
+title: Auto detect settings Internet Explorer 11 (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
+ms.sitesec: library
+ms.date: 07/27/2017
+---
+
+
+# Auto detect settings Internet Explorer 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+After you specify the specific settings related to automatic detection on your Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) and Domain Name System (DNS) servers, you can set up your users' browser settings from a central location.
+
+Automatic detection works even if the browser wasn't originally set up or installed by the administrator.
+
+- **Using DHCP servers:** For local area network (LAN)-based users. This server type lets you specify your global and subnet TCP/IP parameters centrally, defining your users' parameters by using reserved addresses. By doing it this way, a computer can move between subnets, automatically reconfiguring for TCP/IP when it starts.
+
+- **Using DNS servers:** For users on dial-up connections. This server type uses a set of protocols and services on a TCP/IP network, which lets users search for other computers by using hierarchical, user-friendly names (hosts), instead of numeric IP addresses.
**Note** DHCP has a higher priority than DNS for automatic configuration. If DHCP provides the URL to a .pac, .jvs, .js, or .ins configuration file, the process stops and the DNS lookup doesn't happen.
+
+## Updating your automatic detection settings
+To use automatic detection, you have to set up your DHCP and DNS servers.
**Note** Your DHCP servers must support the `DHCPINFORM` message, to obtain the DHCP options.
+
+ **To turn on automatic detection for DHCP servers**
+
+1. Open the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11, and go to the **Automatic Configuration** page.
+
+2. Choose the **Automatically detect configuration settings** box to automatically detect your browser settings. For more information about the **Automatic Configuration** page, see [Use the Automatic Configuration page in the IEAK 11 Wizard](../ie11-ieak/auto-config-ieak11-wizard.md).
+
+3. Open the [DHCP Administrative Tool](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2008-R2-and-2008/dd145324(v=ws.10)), create a new option type, using the code number 252, and then associate it with the URL to your configuration file. For detailed instructions about how to do this, see [Create an option 252 entry in DHCP](/previous-versions/tn-archive/bb794881(v=technet.10)).
+
+ **To turn on automatic detection for DNS servers**
+
+4. Open the IE Customization Wizard 11, and go to the **Automatic Configuration** page.
+
+5. Choose the **Automatically detect configuration settings** box to automatically detect your browser settings.
+
+6. In your DNS database file, create a host record named, **WPAD**. This record has the IP address of the web server storing your automatic configuration (.js, .jvs, .pac, or .ins) file.
**-OR-**
Create a canonical name (CNAME) alias record named, **WPAD**. This record has the resolved name (not the IP address) of the server storing your automatic configuration (.pac) file.
**Note** For more information about creating a **WPAD** entry, see [Creating a WPAD entry in DNS](/previous-versions/tn-archive/cc995062(v=technet.10)).
+
+7. After the database file propagates to the server, the DNS name, `wpad..com` resolves to the server name that includes your automatic configuration file.
**Note** Internet Explorer 11 creates a default URL template based on the host name, **wpad**. For example, `https://wpad..com/wpad.dat`. Because of this, you need to set up a file or redirection point in your web server **WPAD** record, named **wpad.dat**. The **wpad.dat** record delivers the contents of your automatic configuration file.
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/auto-proxy-configuration-settings-for-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/auto-proxy-configuration-settings-for-ie11.md
index bd7bd5c030..faba1eb9ac 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/auto-proxy-configuration-settings-for-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/auto-proxy-configuration-settings-for-ie11.md
@@ -1,50 +1,51 @@
----
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.pagetype: networking
-description: Auto proxy configuration settings for Internet Explorer 11
-author: dansimp
-ms.prod: ie11
-ms.assetid: 5120aaf9-8ead-438a-8472-3cdd924b7d9e
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-title: Auto proxy configuration settings for Internet Explorer 11 (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
----
-
-
-# Auto proxy configuration settings for Internet Explorer 11
-Configure and maintain your proxy settings, like pointing your users' browsers to your automatic proxy script, through the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11 running on either Windows 8.1 or Windows Server 2012 R2.
-
-## Updating your auto-proxy settings
-You can use your Internet settings (.ins) files to set up your standard proxy settings. You can also specify script files (.js, .jvs, or .pac) to configure and maintain your advanced proxy settings. IE uses your auto-proxy script files to dynamically determine whether to connect to a host or use a proxy server. If a proxy server connection fails, Internet Explorer 11 automatically attempts to connect to another proxy server that you have specified.
-
- **To update your settings**
-
-1. Create a script file with your proxy information, copying it to a server location.
-
-2. Open the IE Customization Wizard 11, and go to the **Automatic Configuration** page.
-
-3. Choose the **Enable Automatic Configuration** box to let you change the rest of the configuration options, including:
-
- - **Automatically configure every box:** Type how often IE should check for configuration updates. Typing **0** (zero), or not putting in any number, means that updates only happen when the computer restarts.
-
- - **Automatic Configuration URL (.INS file) box:** Type the location of the .ins file you want to use for automatic configuration. For more information about setting up **Automatic Configuration**, see [Auto configuration settings for Internet Explorer 11](auto-configuration-settings-for-ie11.md).
-
- - **Automatic proxy URL (.JS, .JVS, or .PAC file) box:** Type the location of your automatic proxy script. This script runs whenever IE11 makes a network request and can include multiple proxy servers for each protocol type.
**Important** IE11 no longer supports using file server locations with your proxy configuration (.pac) files. To keep using your .pac files, you have to keep them on a web server and reference them using a URL, like `https://share/test.ins`.
-
-## Locking your auto-proxy settings
-You have two options to restrict your users' ability to override the automatic configuration settings, based on your environment.
-
-- **Using Microsoft Active Directory.** Choose **Disable changing proxy settings** from the Administrative Templates setting.
-
-- **Not Using Active Directory.** Choose the **Prevent changing proxy settings** setting in the `User Configuration\Administrative Templates\Windows Components\Internet Explorer` Group Policy object. For more information about Group Policy, see the [Group Policy TechCenter](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=214514).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+---
+ms.localizationpriority: medium
+ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
+ms.pagetype: networking
+description: Auto proxy configuration settings for Internet Explorer 11
+author: dansimp
+ms.prod: ie11
+ms.assetid: 5120aaf9-8ead-438a-8472-3cdd924b7d9e
+ms.reviewer:
+audience: itpro
+manager: dansimp
+ms.author: dansimp
+title: Auto proxy configuration settings for Internet Explorer 11 (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
+ms.sitesec: library
+ms.date: 07/27/2017
+---
+
+
+# Auto proxy configuration settings for Internet Explorer 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+Configure and maintain your proxy settings, like pointing your users' browsers to your automatic proxy script, through the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11 running on either Windows 8.1 or Windows Server 2012 R2.
+
+## Updating your auto-proxy settings
+You can use your Internet settings (.ins) files to set up your standard proxy settings. You can also specify script files (.js, .jvs, or .pac) to configure and maintain your advanced proxy settings. IE uses your auto-proxy script files to dynamically determine whether to connect to a host or use a proxy server. If a proxy server connection fails, Internet Explorer 11 automatically attempts to connect to another proxy server that you have specified.
+
+ **To update your settings**
+
+1. Create a script file with your proxy information, copying it to a server location.
+
+2. Open the IE Customization Wizard 11, and go to the **Automatic Configuration** page.
+
+3. Choose the **Enable Automatic Configuration** box to let you change the rest of the configuration options, including:
+
+ - **Automatically configure every box:** Type how often IE should check for configuration updates. Typing **0** (zero), or not putting in any number, means that updates only happen when the computer restarts.
+
+ - **Automatic Configuration URL (.INS file) box:** Type the location of the .ins file you want to use for automatic configuration. For more information about setting up **Automatic Configuration**, see [Auto configuration settings for Internet Explorer 11](auto-configuration-settings-for-ie11.md).
+
+ - **Automatic proxy URL (.JS, .JVS, or .PAC file) box:** Type the location of your automatic proxy script. This script runs whenever IE11 makes a network request and can include multiple proxy servers for each protocol type.
**Important** IE11 no longer supports using file server locations with your proxy configuration (.pac) files. To keep using your .pac files, you have to keep them on a web server and reference them using a URL, like `https://share/test.ins`.
+
+## Locking your auto-proxy settings
+You have two options to restrict your users' ability to override the automatic configuration settings, based on your environment.
+
+- **Using Microsoft Active Directory.** Choose **Disable changing proxy settings** from the Administrative Templates setting.
+
+- **Not Using Active Directory.** Choose the **Prevent changing proxy settings** setting in the `User Configuration\Administrative Templates\Windows Components\Internet Explorer` Group Policy object. For more information about Group Policy, see the [Group Policy TechCenter](/windows/deployment/deploy-whats-new).
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/blocked-out-of-date-activex-controls.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/blocked-out-of-date-activex-controls.md
index 12bd5502e3..17f6488e0a 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/blocked-out-of-date-activex-controls.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/blocked-out-of-date-activex-controls.md
@@ -1,43 +1,47 @@
----
-title: Blocked out-of-date ActiveX controls
-description: This page is periodically updated with new ActiveX controls blocked by this feature.
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.date: 05/10/2018
-ms.topic: article
-ms.prod: ie11
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.pagetype: security
-ms.assetid: ''
-ms.reviewer:
-ms.sitesec: library
----
-
-# Blocked out-of-date ActiveX controls
-
-ActiveX controls are small apps that let websites provide content, like videos and games, and let you interact with content, like toolbars. Unfortunately, because many ActiveX controls aren't automatically updated, they can become outdated as new versions are released. It's very important that you keep your ActiveX controls up to date because malicious software (or malware) can target security flaws in outdated controls, damaging your computer by collecting info from it, installing unwanted software, or by letting someone else control it remotely. To help avoid this situation, Internet Explorer includes a security feature called _out-of-date ActiveX control blocking_.
-
-We'll periodically update this page with new ActiveX controls blocked by this feature. We'll typically provide one month's advance notice before adding new controls to the list.
-
-You will receive a notification if a webpage tries to load one of the following of ActiveX control versions:
-
-**Java**
-
-| Java 2 Platform, Standard Edition (J2SE) 1.4, everything below (but not including) update 43 |
-|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| J2SE 5.0, everything below (but not including) update 99 |
-| Java SE 6, everything below (but not including) update 181 |
-| Java SE 7, everything below (but not including) update 171 |
-| Java SE 8, everything below (but not including) update 161 |
-| Java SE 9, everything below (but not including) update 4 |
-
-**Silverlight**
-
-
-| Everything below (but not including) Silverlight 5.1.50907.0 |
-|--------------------------------------------------------------|
-| |
-
-For more information, see [Out-of-date ActiveX control blocking](out-of-date-activex-control-blocking.md) and [Internet Explorer begins blocking out-of-date ActiveX controls](https://blogs.msdn.com/b/ie/archive/2014/08/06/internet-explorer-begins-blocking-out-of-date-activex-controls.aspx). You can also view Microsoft's complete list of out-of-date ActiveX controls in the XML-based [version list](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=403864).
+---
+title: Blocked out-of-date ActiveX controls
+description: This page is periodically updated with new ActiveX controls blocked by this feature.
+author: dansimp
+ms.author: dansimp
+audience: itpro
+manager: dansimp
+ms.date: 05/10/2018
+ms.topic: article
+ms.prod: ie11
+ms.localizationpriority: medium
+ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
+ms.pagetype: security
+ms.assetid: ''
+ms.reviewer:
+ms.sitesec: library
+---
+
+# Blocked out-of-date ActiveX controls
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
+ActiveX controls are small apps that let websites provide content, like videos and games, and let you interact with content, like toolbars. Unfortunately, because many ActiveX controls aren't automatically updated, they can become outdated as new versions are released. It's very important that you keep your ActiveX controls up to date because malicious software (or malware) can target security flaws in outdated controls, damaging your computer by collecting info from it, installing unwanted software, or by letting someone else control it remotely. To help avoid this situation, Internet Explorer includes a security feature called _out-of-date ActiveX control blocking_.
+
+We'll periodically update this page with new ActiveX controls blocked by this feature. We'll typically provide one month's advance notice before adding new controls to the list.
+
+You will receive a notification if a webpage tries to load one of the following of ActiveX control versions:
+
+**Java**
+
+| Java 2 Platform, Standard Edition (J2SE) 1.4, everything below (but not including) update 43 |
+|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| J2SE 5.0, everything below (but not including) update 99 |
+| Java SE 6, everything below (but not including) update 181 |
+| Java SE 7, everything below (but not including) update 171 |
+| Java SE 8, everything below (but not including) update 161 |
+| Java SE 9, everything below (but not including) update 4 |
+
+**Silverlight**
+
+
+| Everything below (but not including) Silverlight 5.1.50907.0 |
+|--------------------------------------------------------------|
+| |
+
+For more information, see [Out-of-date ActiveX control blocking](out-of-date-activex-control-blocking.md) and [Internet Explorer begins blocking out-of-date ActiveX controls](https://blogs.msdn.com/b/ie/archive/2014/08/06/internet-explorer-begins-blocking-out-of-date-activex-controls.aspx). You can also view Microsoft's complete list of out-of-date ActiveX controls in the XML-based [version list](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=403864).
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/browser-cache-changes-and-roaming-profiles.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/browser-cache-changes-and-roaming-profiles.md
index fe61c67cf5..3fc8a84465 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/browser-cache-changes-and-roaming-profiles.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/browser-cache-changes-and-roaming-profiles.md
@@ -1,38 +1,39 @@
----
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.pagetype: performance
-description: Browser cache changes and roaming profiles
-author: dansimp
-ms.prod: ie11
-ms.assetid: 85f0cd01-6f82-4bd1-9c0b-285af1ce3436
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-title: Browser cache changes and roaming profiles (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.date: 10/16/2017
----
-
-
-# Browser cache changes and roaming profiles
-We’ve redesigned the browser cache to improve the performance, flexibility, reliability, and scalability of Internet Explorer and the apps that rely on the Windows Internet (WinINet) cache. Our new database design stops multiple clients from simultaneously accessing and using cached information, while also providing a higher level of data integrity.
-
-You won’t notice any changes to the management of your roaming profile data if you use our new database implementation in conjunction with the [roaming user profile guidelines](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=401544). This means that IE data that’s stored in the `AppData\Roaming` user profile folder is still be uploaded to your normal profile storage location after a user successfully logs off.
**Note** Cookies in a roaming profile can only be set by Internet Explorer for the desktop, with Enhanced Protected Mode turned off. Cookies set by the immersive version of IE or by Microsoft Store apps, can’t be part of a roaming profile. For more information about persistent cookies and roaming, see [Persistent cookies are not roamed in Internet Explorer](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=401545).
-
-To get the best results while using roaming profiles, we strongly recommend the following:
-
-- Create a separate roaming repository for each domain account that uses roaming.
-
-- Restrict roaming user profiles so they work on only one computer at a time. Using a single roaming profile on multiple computers isn’t supported (via console or Remote Desktop) and can cause unpredictable results, including cookie loss.
-
-- Allow all computers that let users sign-on with a roaming profile have identical IE cookie policies and settings.
-
-- Make sure to delete the user’s local roaming profile at sign off for any computer using user profile roaming. You can do this by turning on the **Delete cached copies of roaming profiles** Group Policy Object.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+---
+ms.localizationpriority: medium
+ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
+ms.pagetype: performance
+description: Browser cache changes and roaming profiles
+author: dansimp
+ms.prod: ie11
+ms.assetid: 85f0cd01-6f82-4bd1-9c0b-285af1ce3436
+ms.reviewer:
+audience: itpro
+manager: dansimp
+ms.author: dansimp
+title: Browser cache changes and roaming profiles (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
+ms.sitesec: library
+ms.date: 10/16/2017
+---
+
+
+# Browser cache changes and roaming profiles
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+We’ve redesigned the browser cache to improve the performance, flexibility, reliability, and scalability of Internet Explorer and the apps that rely on the Windows Internet (WinINet) cache. Our new database design stops multiple clients from simultaneously accessing and using cached information, while also providing a higher level of data integrity.
+
+You won’t notice any changes to the management of your roaming profile data if you use our new database implementation in conjunction with the [roaming user profile guidelines](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2012-R2-and-2012/jj649079(v=ws.11)). This means that IE data that’s stored in the `AppData\Roaming` user profile folder is still be uploaded to your normal profile storage location after a user successfully logs off.
**Note** Cookies in a roaming profile can only be set by Internet Explorer for the desktop, with Enhanced Protected Mode turned off. Cookies set by the immersive version of IE or by Microsoft Store apps, can’t be part of a roaming profile. For more information about persistent cookies and roaming, see [Persistent cookies are not roamed in Internet Explorer](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=401545).
+
+To get the best results while using roaming profiles, we strongly recommend the following:
+
+- Create a separate roaming repository for each domain account that uses roaming.
+
+- Restrict roaming user profiles so they work on only one computer at a time. Using a single roaming profile on multiple computers isn’t supported (via console or Remote Desktop) and can cause unpredictable results, including cookie loss.
+
+- Allow all computers that let users sign-on with a roaming profile have identical IE cookie policies and settings.
+
+- Make sure to delete the user’s local roaming profile at sign off for any computer using user profile roaming. You can do this by turning on the **Delete cached copies of roaming profiles** Group Policy Object.
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/change-history-for-internet-explorer-11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/change-history-for-internet-explorer-11.md
index d3cae2a67a..f358312bbc 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/change-history-for-internet-explorer-11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/change-history-for-internet-explorer-11.md
@@ -1,56 +1,60 @@
----
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-title: Change history for Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) - Deployment Guide for IT Pros (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
-description: This topic lists new and updated topics in the Internet Explorer 11 Deployment Guide documentation for Windows 10 and Windows 10 Mobile.
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.prod: ie11
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
----
-
-
-# Change history for Internet Explorer 11
-This topic lists new and updated topics in the Internet Explorer 11 documentation for both Windows 10 and Windows 10 Mobile.
-
-## April 2017
-|New or changed topic | Description |
-|----------------------|-------------|
-|[Enterprise Mode for Internet Explorer 11](enterprise-mode-overview-for-ie11.md)|Updates to the Enterprise Mode section to include info about the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal. |
-
-## March 2017
-|New or changed topic | Description |
-|----------------------|-------------|
-|[New group policy settings for Internet Explorer 11](new-group-policy-settings-for-ie11.md) |Updated to add the Allow VBScript to run in Internet Explorer and the Hide the button (next to the New Tab button) that opens Microsoft Edge settings. |
-
-## November 2016
-|New or changed topic | Description |
-|----------------------|-------------|
-|[Collect data using Enterprise Site Discovery](collect-data-using-enterprise-site-discovery.md) |Updated the DocMode reason section to correct Code 8 and to add Code 9.|
-
-## August 2016
-|New or changed topic | Description |
-|----------------------|-------------|
-|[Enterprise Mode schema v.2 guidance](enterprise-mode-schema-version-2-guidance.md) |Updated to remove the IP range restrictions and to add code examples for both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses. |
-|[Enterprise Mode schema v.1 guidance](enterprise-mode-schema-version-1-guidance.md) |Updated to remove the IP range restrictions and to add code examples for both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses. |
-|[Collect data using Enterprise Site Discovery](collect-data-using-enterprise-site-discovery.md)|Added the Understanding the returned reason codes section to the topic. |
-
-## July 2016
-|New or changed topic | Description |
-|----------------------|-------------|
-|[New group policy settings for Internet Explorer 11](new-group-policy-settings-for-ie11.md) |Updated to include the comprehensive list of Group Policies that were added with Internet Explorer 11. |
-
-## June 2016
-|New or changed topic | Description |
-|----------------------|-------------|
-|[New group policy settings for Internet Explorer 11](new-group-policy-settings-for-ie11.md) |Updated with 2 new policies, Send all sites not included in the Enterprise Mode Site List to Microsoft Edge and Show message when opening sites in Microsoft Edge using Enterprise Mode. |
-
-
-## May 2016
-|New or changed topic | Description |
-|----------------------|-------------|
-|[Enterprise Mode schema v.1 guidance](enterprise-mode-schema-version-1-guidance.md) | Added info about using <emie> and <docMode> together. |
-
+---
+ms.localizationpriority: medium
+title: Change history for Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) - Deployment Guide for IT Pros (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
+description: This topic lists new and updated topics in the Internet Explorer 11 Deployment Guide documentation for Windows 10 and Windows 10 Mobile.
+ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
+ms.prod: ie11
+ms.sitesec: library
+author: dansimp
+ms.date: 07/27/2017
+ms.reviewer:
+audience: itpro
+manager: dansimp
+ms.author: dansimp
+---
+
+
+# Change history for Internet Explorer 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+This topic lists new and updated topics in the Internet Explorer 11 documentation for both Windows 10 and Windows 10 Mobile.
+
+## April 2017
+|New or changed topic | Description |
+|----------------------|-------------|
+|[Enterprise Mode for Internet Explorer 11](enterprise-mode-overview-for-ie11.md)|Updates to the Enterprise Mode section to include info about the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal. |
+
+## March 2017
+|New or changed topic | Description |
+|----------------------|-------------|
+|[New group policy settings for Internet Explorer 11](new-group-policy-settings-for-ie11.md) |Updated to add the Allow VBScript to run in Internet Explorer and the Hide the button (next to the New Tab button) that opens Microsoft Edge settings. |
+
+## November 2016
+|New or changed topic | Description |
+|----------------------|-------------|
+|[Collect data using Enterprise Site Discovery](collect-data-using-enterprise-site-discovery.md) |Updated the DocMode reason section to correct Code 8 and to add Code 9.|
+
+## August 2016
+|New or changed topic | Description |
+|----------------------|-------------|
+|[Enterprise Mode schema v.2 guidance](enterprise-mode-schema-version-2-guidance.md) |Updated to remove the IP range restrictions and to add code examples for both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses. |
+|[Enterprise Mode schema v.1 guidance](enterprise-mode-schema-version-1-guidance.md) |Updated to remove the IP range restrictions and to add code examples for both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses. |
+|[Collect data using Enterprise Site Discovery](collect-data-using-enterprise-site-discovery.md)|Added the Understanding the returned reason codes section to the topic. |
+
+## July 2016
+|New or changed topic | Description |
+|----------------------|-------------|
+|[New group policy settings for Internet Explorer 11](new-group-policy-settings-for-ie11.md) |Updated to include the comprehensive list of Group Policies that were added with Internet Explorer 11. |
+
+## June 2016
+|New or changed topic | Description |
+|----------------------|-------------|
+|[New group policy settings for Internet Explorer 11](new-group-policy-settings-for-ie11.md) |Updated with 2 new policies, Send all sites not included in the Enterprise Mode Site List to Microsoft Edge and Show message when opening sites in Microsoft Edge using Enterprise Mode. |
+
+
+## May 2016
+|New or changed topic | Description |
+|----------------------|-------------|
+|[Enterprise Mode schema v.1 guidance](enterprise-mode-schema-version-1-guidance.md) | Added info about using <emie> and <docMode> together. |
+
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/check-for-new-enterprise-mode-site-list-xml-file.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/check-for-new-enterprise-mode-site-list-xml-file.md
index 0b2d9ff141..9b4b3e6f1f 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/check-for-new-enterprise-mode-site-list-xml-file.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/check-for-new-enterprise-mode-site-list-xml-file.md
@@ -1,51 +1,55 @@
----
-title: Check for a new Enterprise Mode site list xml file (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
-description: You can have centralized control over Enterprise Mode by creating a single, global XML site list that includes the list of websites to render using Enterprise Mode.
-ms.assetid: 2bbc7017-622e-4baa-8981-c0bbda10e9df
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: ie11
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.pagetype: appcompat
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.date: 08/14/2017
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-
-# Check for a new Enterprise Mode site list xml file
-
-**Applies to:**
-
-- Windows 10
-- Windows 8.1
-- Windows 7
-- Windows Server 2012 R2
-- Windows Server 2008 R2 with Service Pack 1 (SP1)
-
-You can have centralized control over Enterprise Mode by creating a single, global XML site list that includes the list of websites to render using Enterprise Mode. You can add and remove sites from your XML list as frequently as you want, changing which sites should render in Enterprise Mode for your employees. For information about turning on Enterprise Mode and using site lists, see [Turn on Enterprise Mode and use a site list](turn-on-enterprise-mode-and-use-a-site-list.md).
-
-The information in this topic only covers HTTPS protocol. We strongly recommend that you use HTTPS protocol instead of file protocol due to increased performance.
-
-**How Internet Explorer 11 looks for an updated site list**
-
-1. Internet Explorer starts up and looks for an updated site list in the following places:
-
- 1. **In the cache container.** IE first checks the cache container to see if it finds your XML site list.
-
- 2. **In the local cache.** If there’s nothing in the cache container, IE checks your local cache for the site list.
-
- 3. **On the server.** Based on standard IE caching rules, IE might look for a copy of your site list in the location you put specified in the **SiteList** value of the registry.
-
-2. If there’s an .xml file in the cache container, IE waits 65 seconds and then checks the local cache for a newer version of the file from the server, based on standard caching rules. If the server file has a different version number than the version in the cache container, the server file is used and stored in the cache container.
**Note** If you’re already using a site list, enterprise mode continues to work during the 65 second wait; it just uses your existing site list instead of your new one.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+---
+title: Check for a new Enterprise Mode site list xml file (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
+description: You can have centralized control over Enterprise Mode by creating a single, global XML site list that includes the list of websites to render using Enterprise Mode.
+ms.assetid: 2bbc7017-622e-4baa-8981-c0bbda10e9df
+ms.reviewer:
+audience: itpro
+manager: dansimp
+ms.prod: ie11
+ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
+ms.pagetype: appcompat
+ms.sitesec: library
+author: dansimp
+ms.author: dansimp
+ms.date: 08/14/2017
+ms.localizationpriority: medium
+---
+
+
+# Check for a new Enterprise Mode site list xml file
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
+**Applies to:**
+
+- Windows 10
+- Windows 8.1
+- Windows 7
+- Windows Server 2012 R2
+- Windows Server 2008 R2 with Service Pack 1 (SP1)
+
+You can have centralized control over Enterprise Mode by creating a single, global XML site list that includes the list of websites to render using Enterprise Mode. You can add and remove sites from your XML list as frequently as you want, changing which sites should render in Enterprise Mode for your employees. For information about turning on Enterprise Mode and using site lists, see [Turn on Enterprise Mode and use a site list](turn-on-enterprise-mode-and-use-a-site-list.md).
+
+The information in this topic only covers HTTPS protocol. We strongly recommend that you use HTTPS protocol instead of file protocol due to increased performance.
+
+**How Internet Explorer 11 looks for an updated site list**
+
+1. Internet Explorer starts up and looks for an updated site list in the following places:
+
+ 1. **In the cache container.** IE first checks the cache container to see if it finds your XML site list.
+
+ 2. **In the local cache.** If there’s nothing in the cache container, IE checks your local cache for the site list.
+
+ 3. **On the server.** Based on standard IE caching rules, IE might look for a copy of your site list in the location you put specified in the **SiteList** value of the registry.
+
+2. If there’s an .xml file in the cache container, IE waits 65 seconds and then checks the local cache for a newer version of the file from the server, based on standard caching rules. If the server file has a different version number than the version in the cache container, the server file is used and stored in the cache container.
**Note** If you’re already using a site list, enterprise mode continues to work during the 65 second wait; it just uses your existing site list instead of your new one.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/choose-how-to-deploy-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/choose-how-to-deploy-ie11.md
index c35d115df7..810264c501 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/choose-how-to-deploy-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/choose-how-to-deploy-ie11.md
@@ -1,31 +1,35 @@
----
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-description: Choose how to deploy Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)
-author: dansimp
-ms.prod: ie11
-ms.assetid: 21b6a301-c222-40bc-ad0b-27f66fc54d9d
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-title: Choose how to deploy Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
----
-
-
-# Choose how to deploy Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)
-In this section, you can learn about how to deploy your custom version of Internet Explorer using Automatic Version Synchronization (AVS) or using your software distribution tools.
-
-## In this section
-
-| Topic | Description |
-|------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------ |
-|[Deploy IE11 using Automatic Version Synchronization (AVS)](deploy-ie11-using-automatic-version-synchronization-avs.md) |Guidance about how to deploy your custom browser packages using Automatic Version Synchronization (AVS). |
-|[Deploy IE11 using software distribution tools](deploy-ie11-using-software-distribution-tools.md) |Guidance about how to deploy your custom browser packages using System Center 2012 R2, Windows Server Update Services (WSUS), Group Policy software installation, or Microsoft Deployment toolkit (MDT). |
-
-
-
-
-
-
+---
+ms.localizationpriority: medium
+ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
+description: Choose how to deploy Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)
+author: dansimp
+ms.prod: ie11
+ms.assetid: 21b6a301-c222-40bc-ad0b-27f66fc54d9d
+ms.reviewer:
+audience: itpro
+manager: dansimp
+ms.author: dansimp
+title: Choose how to deploy Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
+ms.sitesec: library
+ms.date: 07/27/2017
+---
+
+
+# Choose how to deploy Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+In this section, you can learn about how to deploy your custom version of Internet Explorer using Automatic Version Synchronization (AVS) or using your software distribution tools.
+
+## In this section
+
+| Topic | Description |
+|------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------ |
+|[Deploy IE11 using Automatic Version Synchronization (AVS)](deploy-ie11-using-automatic-version-synchronization-avs.md) |Guidance about how to deploy your custom browser packages using Automatic Version Synchronization (AVS). |
+|[Deploy IE11 using software distribution tools](deploy-ie11-using-software-distribution-tools.md) |Guidance about how to deploy your custom browser packages using System Center 2012 R2, Windows Server Update Services (WSUS), Group Policy software installation, or Microsoft Deployment toolkit (MDT). |
+
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/choose-how-to-install-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/choose-how-to-install-ie11.md
index 563f38160c..187e1eade3 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/choose-how-to-install-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/choose-how-to-install-ie11.md
@@ -1,37 +1,38 @@
----
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-description: Choose how to install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)
-author: dansimp
-ms.prod: ie11
-ms.assetid: 9572f5f1-5d67-483e-bd63-ffea95053481
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-title: Choose how to install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
----
-
-
-# Choose how to install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)
-Before you install Internet Explorer 11, you should:
-
-- **Migrate Group Policy Objects.** Decide if your Group Policy Objects should migrate to the new version.
-
-- **Check vendor support for updated functionality.** Check whether third-party vendors have new versions or updates to necessary add-ons, apps, or code libraries.
-
-- **Choose the right version of Internet Explorer.** IE11 comes pre-installed on Windows 8.1 and Windows Server 2012 R2 or you can download it for Windows 7 SP1 or Windows Server 2008 R2 with Service Pack 1 (SP1) from the [Internet Explorer Downloads](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=214251) site.
-
-- **Choose how you'll deploy your installation package.** Your deployment method should be based on whether you're installing to computers already running Windows, or if you're deploying IE11 as part of a Windows installation.
-
- - **Existing computers running Windows.** Use System Center R2 2012 System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager, System Center Essentials 2010, Windows Server Updates Services (WSUS), or Microsoft Intune to deploy IE11. For more information about how to use these systems, see [System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkID=276664), [System Center Essentials 2010](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=395200), [Windows Server Update Services](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkID=276790), and [Microsoft Intune Overview](https://www.microsoft.com/cloud-platform/microsoft-intune).
-
- - **As part of a Windows deployment.** Update your Windows images to include IE11, and then add the update to your MDT deployment share or to your Windows image. For instructions about how to create and use Windows images, see [Create and Manage a Windows Image Using DISM](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=299408). For general information about deploying IE, see [Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=331148), [Windows ADK Overview](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=276669).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+---
+ms.localizationpriority: medium
+ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
+description: Choose how to install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)
+author: dansimp
+ms.prod: ie11
+ms.assetid: 9572f5f1-5d67-483e-bd63-ffea95053481
+ms.reviewer:
+audience: itpro
+manager: dansimp
+ms.author: dansimp
+title: Choose how to install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
+ms.sitesec: library
+ms.date: 07/27/2017
+---
+
+
+# Choose how to install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+Before you install Internet Explorer 11, you should:
+
+- **Migrate Group Policy Objects.** Decide if your Group Policy Objects should migrate to the new version.
+
+- **Check vendor support for updated functionality.** Check whether third-party vendors have new versions or updates to necessary add-ons, apps, or code libraries.
+
+- **Choose the right version of Internet Explorer.** IE11 comes pre-installed on Windows 8.1 and Windows Server 2012 R2 or you can download it for Windows 7 SP1 or Windows Server 2008 R2 with Service Pack 1 (SP1) from the [Internet Explorer Downloads](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=214251) site.
+
+- **Choose how you'll deploy your installation package.** Your deployment method should be based on whether you're installing to computers already running Windows, or if you're deploying IE11 as part of a Windows installation.
+
+ - **Existing computers running Windows.** Use System Center R2 2012 System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager, System Center Essentials 2010, Windows Server Updates Services (WSUS), or Microsoft Intune to deploy IE11. For more information about how to use these systems, see [System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager](/previous-versions/system-center/system-center-2012-R2/gg682129(v=technet.10)), [System Center Essentials 2010](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=395200), [Windows Server Update Services](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2012-R2-and-2012/hh852345(v=ws.11)), and [Microsoft Intune Overview](https://www.microsoft.com/cloud-platform/microsoft-intune).
+
+ - **As part of a Windows deployment.** Update your Windows images to include IE11, and then add the update to your MDT deployment share or to your Windows image. For instructions about how to create and use Windows images, see [Create and Manage a Windows Image Using DISM](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-8.1-and-8/hh825251(v=win.10)). For general information about deploying IE, see [Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT)](/mem/configmgr/mdt/), [Windows ADK Overview](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-8.1-and-8/hh825486(v=win.10)).
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/collect-data-using-enterprise-site-discovery.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/collect-data-using-enterprise-site-discovery.md
index 12049fdcb9..1acd936993 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/collect-data-using-enterprise-site-discovery.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/collect-data-using-enterprise-site-discovery.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Collect data using Enterprise Site Discovery
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
@@ -25,7 +28,7 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
Use Internet Explorer to collect data on computers running Windows Internet Explorer 8 through Internet Explorer 11 on Windows 10, Windows 8.1, or Windows 7. This inventory information helps you build a list of websites used by your company so you can make more informed decisions about your IE deployments, including figuring out which sites might be at risk or require overhauls during future upgrades.
>**Upgrade Readiness and Windows upgrades**
->You can use Upgrade Readiness to help manage your Windows 10 upgrades on devices running Windows 8.1 and Windows 7 (SP1). You can also use Upgrade Readiness to review several site discovery reports. For more information, see [Manage Windows upgrades with Upgrade Readiness](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/deployment/upgrade/manage-windows-upgrades-with-upgrade-readiness).
+>You can use Upgrade Readiness to help manage your Windows 10 upgrades on devices running Windows 8.1 and Windows 7 (SP1). You can also use Upgrade Readiness to review several site discovery reports. For more information, see [Manage Windows upgrades with Upgrade Readiness](/windows/deployment/upgrade/manage-windows-upgrades-with-upgrade-readiness).
## Before you begin
@@ -33,7 +36,7 @@ Before you start, you need to make sure you have the following:
- Latest cumulative security update (for all supported versions of Internet Explorer):
- 1. Go to the [Microsoft Security Bulletin](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkID=718223) page, and change the filter to **Windows Internet Explorer 11**.
+ 1. Go to the [Microsoft Security Bulletin](/security-updates/) page, and change the filter to **Windows Internet Explorer 11**.

@@ -148,7 +151,7 @@ You need to set up your computers for data collection by running the provided Po
**To set up Enterprise Site Discovery**
-- Start PowerShell in elevated mode (using admin privileges) and run IETelemetrySetUp.ps1 by by-passing the PowerShell execution policy, using this command: `powershell -ExecutionPolicy Bypass .\IETelemetrySetUp.ps1`. For more info, see [about Execution Policies](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?linkid=517460).
+- Start PowerShell in elevated mode (using admin privileges) and run IETelemetrySetUp.ps1 by by-passing the PowerShell execution policy, using this command: `powershell -ExecutionPolicy Bypass .\IETelemetrySetUp.ps1`. For more info, see [about Execution Policies](/powershell/module/microsoft.powershell.core/about/about_execution_policies).
### WMI only: Set up your firewall for WMI data
If you choose to use WMI as your data output, you need to make sure that your WMI data can travel through your firewall for the domain. If you’re sure, you can skip this section; otherwise, follow these steps:
@@ -477,7 +480,3 @@ You can completely remove the data stored on your employee’s computers.
## Related topics
* [Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.2) download](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=746562)
* [Enterprise Mode for Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)](enterprise-mode-overview-for-ie11.md)
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/configure-settings-enterprise-mode-portal.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/configure-settings-enterprise-mode-portal.md
index d01fccf729..db62af6aab 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/configure-settings-enterprise-mode-portal.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/configure-settings-enterprise-mode-portal.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.author: dansimp
# Use the Settings page to finish setting up the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/create-change-request-enterprise-mode-portal.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/create-change-request-enterprise-mode-portal.md
index d15192b9d3..2c525dd36c 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/create-change-request-enterprise-mode-portal.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/create-change-request-enterprise-mode-portal.md
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ ms.prod: ie11
title: Create a change request using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
ms.sitesec: library
ms.date: 07/27/2017
-ms.reviewer:
+ms.reviewer:
audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
ms.author: dansimp
@@ -16,18 +16,21 @@ ms.author: dansimp
# Create a change request using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
-- Windows 10
-- Windows 8.1
-- Windows 7
-- Windows Server 2012 R2
-- Windows Server 2008 R2 with Service Pack 1 (SP1)
+- Windows 10
+- Windows 8.1
+- Windows 7
+- Windows Server 2012 R2
+- Windows Server 2008 R2 with Service Pack 1 (SP1)
Employees assigned to the Requester role can create a change request. A change request is used to tell the Approvers and the Administrator that a website needs to be added or removed from the Enterprise Mode Site List. The employee can navigate to each stage of the process by using the workflow links provided at the top of each page of the portal.
->[!Important]
->Each Requester must have access to a test machine with Administrator rights, letting him or her get to the pre-production environment to make sure that the requested change is correct.
+> [!Important]
+> Each Requester must have access to a test machine with Administrator rights, letting him or her get to the pre-production environment to make sure that the requested change is correct.
**To create a new change request**
1. The Requester (an employee that has been assigned the Requester role) signs into the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal, and clicks **Create new request**.
@@ -37,7 +40,7 @@ Employees assigned to the Requester role can create a change request. A change r
2. Fill out the required fields, based on the group and the app, including:
- **Group name.** Select the name of your group from the dropdown box.
-
+
- **App name.** Type the name of the app you want to add, delete, or update in the Enterprise Mode Site List.
- **Search all apps.** If you can't remember the name of your app, you can click **Search all apps** and search the list.
@@ -58,17 +61,18 @@ Employees assigned to the Requester role can create a change request. A change r
- **App best viewed in.** Select the best browser experience for the app. This can be Internet Explorer 5 through Internet Explorer 11 or one of the IE7Enterprise or IE8Enterprise modes.
- - **Is an x-ua tag used?** Select **Yes** or **No** whether an x-ua-compatible tag is used by the app. For more info about x-ua-compatible tags, see the topics in [Defining document compatibility](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/cc288325(v=vs.85).aspx).
-
+ - **Is an x-ua tag used?** Select **Yes** or **No** whether an x-ua-compatible tag is used by the app. For more info about x-ua-compatible tags, see the topics in [Defining document compatibility](/previous-versions/windows/internet-explorer/ie-developer/compatibility/cc288325(v=vs.85)).
+
4. Click **Save and continue** to save the request and get the app info sent to the pre-production environment site list for testing.
-
+
A message appears that the request was successful, including a **Request ID** number, saying that the change is being made to the pre-production environment site list.
5. The Requester gets an email with a batch script, that when run, configures their test machine for the pre-production environment, along with the necessary steps to make sure the changed info is correct.
- **If the change is correct.** The Requester asks the approvers to approve the change request by selecting **Successful** and clicking **Send for approval**.
-
+
- **If the change is incorrect.** The Requester can rollback the change in pre-production or ask for help from the Administrator.
## Next steps
-After the change request is created, the Requester must make sure the suggested changes work in the pre-production environment. For these steps, see the [Verify your changes using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal](verify-changes-preprod-enterprise-mode-portal.md) topic.
+
+After the change request is created, the Requester must make sure the suggested changes work in the pre-production environment. For these steps, see [Verify your changes using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal](verify-changes-preprod-enterprise-mode-portal.md).
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/create-install-packages-for-multiple-operating-systems-or-languages.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/create-install-packages-for-multiple-operating-systems-or-languages.md
index 6c260e93aa..395703b43d 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/create-install-packages-for-multiple-operating-systems-or-languages.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/create-install-packages-for-multiple-operating-systems-or-languages.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Create packages for multiple operating systems or languages
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
You'll create multiple versions of your custom browser package if:
- You support more than 1 version of Windows®.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/customize-ie11-install-packages.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/customize-ie11-install-packages.md
index fc43585ae7..18ac122bc2 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/customize-ie11-install-packages.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/customize-ie11-install-packages.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Customize Internet Explorer 11 installation packages
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
You can customize Internet Explorer 11 to support various browser behaviors, multiple operating system versions and languages, and Setup information (.inf) files.
|Topic |Description |
@@ -33,13 +36,10 @@ In addition, you can configure IE before, during, or after deployment, using the
- **Group Policy**. Configures and enforces IE11 settings. For more information about settings and configuration options, see [Group policy objects and Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)](group-policy-objects-and-ie11.md).
- **Unattend.xml**. Customizes some of the IE settings during your Windows installation. This option only applies if you're updating a Windows image with IE11.
**Note**
-You'll only see the new IE11 Unattend.xml settings if your Unattend.xml file's associated with a Windows image that includes the IE11 update. For more information about editing and using the Unattend.xml file, see [Unattended Windows Setup Reference](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=276788). For more information about using the Windows System Image Manager, see [Windows System Image Manager Technical Reference](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=276789).
+You'll only see the new IE11 Unattend.xml settings if your Unattend.xml file's associated with a Windows image that includes the IE11 update. For more information about editing and using the Unattend.xml file, see [Unattended Windows Setup Reference](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-8.1-and-8/ff699026(v=win.10)). For more information about using the Windows System Image Manager, see [Windows System Image Manager Technical Reference](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-8.1-and-8/hh824929(v=win.10)).
-
-
-
-
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/delete-sites-from-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/delete-sites-from-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
index b2c4c0f80a..843d917596 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/delete-sites-from-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/delete-sites-from-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
@@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Delete sites from your Enterprise Mode site list in the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/deploy-ie11-using-automatic-version-synchronization-avs.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/deploy-ie11-using-automatic-version-synchronization-avs.md
index b9089ee16a..0f0c56de35 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/deploy-ie11-using-automatic-version-synchronization-avs.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/deploy-ie11-using-automatic-version-synchronization-avs.md
@@ -15,6 +15,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
---
# Deploy Internet Explorer 11 using Automatic Version Synchronization (AVS)
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
You can deploy Internet Explorer 11 to your users' computers by using your custom browser packages and Automatic Version Synchronization (AVS).
## What is Automatic Version Synchronization?
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/deploy-ie11-using-software-distribution-tools.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/deploy-ie11-using-software-distribution-tools.md
index dc31c3230e..9e65453694 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/deploy-ie11-using-software-distribution-tools.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/deploy-ie11-using-software-distribution-tools.md
@@ -16,19 +16,19 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Deploy Internet Explorer 11 using software distribution tools
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
If you already manage software distribution and updates on your network through software distribution tools, you can also use these tools for ongoing deployments of Internet Explorer. Software distribution tools include:
-- **System Center R2 2012 System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager.** Deploy and install Internet Explorer 11 on your user's computers through a software distribution package. For more information about using this tool, see [System Center R2 2012 Configuration Manager](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkID=276664).
+- **System Center R2 2012 System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager.** Deploy and install Internet Explorer 11 on your user's computers through a software distribution package. For more information about using this tool, see [System Center R2 2012 Configuration Manager](/previous-versions/system-center/system-center-2012-R2/gg682129(v=technet.10)).
-- **Windows Server Update Services (WSUS).** Download a single copy of the IE11 updates, caching them to local servers so your users' computers can receive the updates directly from the WSUS servers, instead of through Windows Update. For more information about using this tool, see [Windows Server Update Services](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkID=276790).
+- **Windows Server Update Services (WSUS).** Download a single copy of the IE11 updates, caching them to local servers so your users' computers can receive the updates directly from the WSUS servers, instead of through Windows Update. For more information about using this tool, see [Windows Server Update Services](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2012-R2-and-2012/hh852345(v=ws.11)).
-- **Group Policy Software Installation.** Deploy and install IE11 on your user's computers through a combination of Group Policy and Microsoft Active Directory. For more information about using this tool, see [Group Policy Software Installation overview](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=296365).
+- **Group Policy Software Installation.** Deploy and install IE11 on your user's computers through a combination of Group Policy and Microsoft Active Directory. For more information about using this tool, see [Group Policy Software Installation overview](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2003/cc738858(v=ws.10)).
-- **Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT).** Add the IE11 update to your deployment share, using MDT to update your previously-deployed Windows image. For more information about using this tool, see [Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkID=331148).
+- **Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT).** Add the IE11 update to your deployment share, using MDT to update your previously-deployed Windows image. For more information about using this tool, see [Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT)](/mem/configmgr/mdt/).
-
-
-
-
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/deploy-pinned-sites-using-mdt-2013.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/deploy-pinned-sites-using-mdt-2013.md
index 567b8fbeb8..c6d0cce921 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/deploy-pinned-sites-using-mdt-2013.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/deploy-pinned-sites-using-mdt-2013.md
@@ -17,6 +17,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Deploy pinned websites using Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT) 2013
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
@@ -27,10 +30,10 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
You can pin websites to the Windows 8.1 taskbar for quick access. You pin a website simply by dragging its tab to the taskbar. Some websites can also extend the icon’s Jump List.
-The ability to pin websites to the Windows 8.1 taskbar can help make end users in businesses more productive. As an IT professional, for example, you can pin intranet and SharePoint websites to the taskbar to make them immediately available to users. In this article, you learn how to deploy pinned websites by using Lite Touch Installation in the [Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT) 2013](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=398474).
+The ability to pin websites to the Windows 8.1 taskbar can help make end users in businesses more productive. As an IT professional, for example, you can pin intranet and SharePoint websites to the taskbar to make them immediately available to users. In this article, you learn how to deploy pinned websites by using Lite Touch Installation in the [Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT) 2013](/mem/configmgr/mdt/).
## Deploying pinned websites in MDT 2013
-This topic requires that you have a complete MDT 2013 deployment share that contains Windows 8.1 which comes with Internet Explorer 11. If you’re deploying to Windows 7 clients and need to learn how to add IE11 to an MDT 2013 deployment share as an update, see [Installing Internet Explorer 11 using Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=398475) in the TechNet library.
+This topic requires that you have a complete MDT 2013 deployment share that contains Windows 8.1 which comes with Internet Explorer 11. If you’re deploying to Windows 7 clients and need to learn how to add IE11 to an MDT 2013 deployment share as an update, see [Installing Internet Explorer 11 using Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT)](./install-ie11-using-operating-system-deployment-systems.md) in the TechNet library.
Deploying pinned websites in MDT 2013 is a 4-step process:
@@ -106,17 +109,14 @@ With the .website files ready to copy to the **Public Links** folder on target c
## Updating intranet websites for pinning
The MDT 2013 deployment share and task sequences are now ready to pin websites to the taskbar during deployment. This pinning feature can include intranet sites important in your organization.
-You can make your intranet websites act more like applications by extending them to fully support the Windows 8.1 taskbar. This includes creating custom Jump Lists, thumbnail previews, and notifications. For info about extending your intranet websites, see [Pinned Sites Developer Documentation](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=398484) on MSDN. For more ideas about what to pin, see [Add-ons](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=398483) in the Internet Explorer Gallery.
+You can make your intranet websites act more like applications by extending them to fully support the Windows 8.1 taskbar. This includes creating custom Jump Lists, thumbnail previews, and notifications. For info about extending your intranet websites, see [Pinned Sites Developer Documentation](/previous-versions/windows/internet-explorer/ie-developer/samples/gg491731(v=vs.85)) on MSDN. For more ideas about what to pin, see [Add-ons](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=398483) in the Internet Explorer Gallery.
## Related topics
-- [Unattended Windows Setup Reference](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=276788)
-- [Windows System Image Manager Technical Reference](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=276789)
-- [Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=331148)
-- [Windows ADK Overview](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=276669)
+- [Unattended Windows Setup Reference](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-8.1-and-8/ff699026(v=win.10))
+- [Windows System Image Manager Technical Reference](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-8.1-and-8/hh824929(v=win.10))
+- [Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT)](/mem/configmgr/mdt/)
+- [Windows ADK Overview](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-8.1-and-8/hh825486(v=win.10))
-
-
-
-
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/deprecated-document-modes.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/deprecated-document-modes.md
index f0f44c2897..e8d1ec3d7d 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/deprecated-document-modes.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/deprecated-document-modes.md
@@ -17,6 +17,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Deprecated document modes and Internet Explorer 11
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/edit-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/edit-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
index 8ad5f3e6ad..29574ab860 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/edit-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/edit-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
@@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Edit the Enterprise Mode site list using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/enable-and-disable-add-ons-using-administrative-templates-and-group-policy.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/enable-and-disable-add-ons-using-administrative-templates-and-group-policy.md
index 2ab127eec5..e21f3e41ed 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/enable-and-disable-add-ons-using-administrative-templates-and-group-policy.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/enable-and-disable-add-ons-using-administrative-templates-and-group-policy.md
@@ -17,6 +17,9 @@ ms.date: 4/12/2018
# Enable and disable add-ons using administrative templates and group policy
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Add-ons let your employees personalize Internet Explorer. You can manage IE add-ons using Group Policy and Group Policy templates.
There are four types of add-ons:
@@ -81,8 +84,8 @@ Every add-on has a Class ID (CLSID) that you use to enable and disable specific
2. From the copied information, select and copy just the **Class ID** value.
- >[!NOTE]
- >You want to copy the curly brackets as well as the CLSID: **{47833539-D0C5-4125-9FA8-0819E2EAAC93}**.
+ > [!NOTE]
+ > You want to copy the curly brackets as well as the CLSID: **{47833539-D0C5-4125-9FA8-0819E2EAAC93}**.
3. Open the Group Policy Management Editor and go to: Computer Configuration\Policies\Administrative Templates\Windows Components\Internet Explorer\Security Features\Add-on Management.
**-OR-**
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/enhanced-protected-mode-problems-with-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/enhanced-protected-mode-problems-with-ie11.md
index d0998607dc..0335e7c1dc 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/enhanced-protected-mode-problems-with-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/enhanced-protected-mode-problems-with-ie11.md
@@ -17,15 +17,15 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Enhanced Protected Mode problems with Internet Explorer
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Enhanced Protected Mode further restricts Protected Mode to deny potential attackers access to sensitive or personal information. If this feature is turned on, users might start to see errors asking them to turn it off, like **This webpage wants to run "npctrl.dll. If you trust this site, you can disable Enhanced Protected Mode for this site to run the control**. If your users click the **Disable** box, Enhanced Protected Mode is turned off for only the single visit to that specific site. After the user leaves the site, Enhanced Protected Mode is automatically turned back on.
You can use your company’s Group Policy to turn Enhanced Protected Mode on or off for all users. For more information, see the [Group policy objects and Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)](group-policy-objects-and-ie11.md) information in this guide.
-For more information about Enhanced Protected Mode, see the [Enhanced Protected Mode](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=267512) post on IEBlog, and both the [Understanding Enhanced Protected Mode](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=282662) and the [Enhanced Protected Mode and Local Files](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=282663) blog posts on IEInternals.
+For more information about Enhanced Protected Mode, see the [Enhanced Protected Mode](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=267512) post on IEBlog, and both the [Understanding Enhanced Protected Mode](/archive/blogs/ieinternals/understanding-enhanced-protected-mode) and the [Enhanced Protected Mode and Local Files](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=282663) blog posts on IEInternals.
-
-
-
-
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/enterprise-mode-overview-for-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/enterprise-mode-overview-for-ie11.md
index 71104a8786..e5e3c31095 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/enterprise-mode-overview-for-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/enterprise-mode-overview-for-ie11.md
@@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Enterprise Mode for Internet Explorer 11
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/enterprise-mode-schema-version-1-guidance.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/enterprise-mode-schema-version-1-guidance.md
index 81e964a54b..6832c2797b 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/enterprise-mode-schema-version-1-guidance.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/enterprise-mode-schema-version-1-guidance.md
@@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Enterprise Mode schema v.1 guidance
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
@@ -163,27 +166,58 @@ This table includes the attributes used by the Enterprise Mode schema.
exclude
-
Specifies the domain or path is excluded from applying Enterprise Mode. This attribute is only supported on the <domain> and <path> elements in the <emie> section.
-
Example
+
Specifies the domain or path excluded from applying Enterprise Mode. This attribute is only supported on the <domain> and <path> elements in the <emie> section. If this attribute is absent, it defaults to false.
+
+
Specifies that the page should load in the current browser, otherwise it will open in IE11. This attribute is supported on all <domain> or <path> elements. If this attribute is absent, it defaults to false.
+
+
Specifies that the page should load in IE7 document mode (Compat View). This attribute is only supported on <domain> or <path> elements in the <emie> section. If the page is also configured to load in Enterprise Mode, it will load in IE7 Enterprise Mode. Otherwise (exclude="true"), it will load in IE11's IE7 document mode. If this attribute is absent, it defaults to false.
+
+
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/enterprise-mode-schema-version-2-guidance.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/enterprise-mode-schema-version-2-guidance.md
index a321e5a744..299c6c093f 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/enterprise-mode-schema-version-2-guidance.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/enterprise-mode-schema-version-2-guidance.md
@@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ ms.date: 12/04/2017
# Enterprise Mode schema v.2 guidance
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/export-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-from-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/export-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-from-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
index cf235b25aa..ce2f14b162 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/export-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-from-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/export-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-from-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
@@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Export your Enterprise Mode site list from the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/fix-compat-issues-with-doc-modes-and-enterprise-mode-site-list.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/fix-compat-issues-with-doc-modes-and-enterprise-mode-site-list.md
index f1d72eb1a1..333686dc07 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/fix-compat-issues-with-doc-modes-and-enterprise-mode-site-list.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/fix-compat-issues-with-doc-modes-and-enterprise-mode-site-list.md
@@ -17,13 +17,16 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Fix web compatibility issues using document modes and the Enterprise Mode site list
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
The Internet Explorer 11 Enterprise Mode site list lets you specify document modes for specific websites, helping you fix compatibility issues without changing a single line of code on the site. This addition to the site list is a continuation of our commitment to help you upgrade and stay up-to-date on the latest version of Internet Explorer, while still preserving your investments in existing apps.
## What does this mean for me?
Enterprises can have critical apps that are coded explicitly for a specific browser version and that might not be in their direct control, making it very difficult and expensive to update to modern standards or newer browser versions. Because you can decide which URLs should open using specific document modes, this update helps ensure better compatibility, faster upgrades, and reduced testing and fixing costs.
## How does this fix work?
-You can continue to use your legacy and orphaned web apps, by specifying a document mode in the centralized Enterprise Mode site list. Then, when IE11 goes to a site on your list, the browser loads the page in the specified document mode just as it would if it were specified through an X-UA-Compatible meta tag on the site. For more information about document modes and X-UA-compatible headers, see [Defining document compatibility](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=518412).
+You can continue to use your legacy and orphaned web apps, by specifying a document mode in the centralized Enterprise Mode site list. Then, when IE11 goes to a site on your list, the browser loads the page in the specified document mode just as it would if it were specified through an X-UA-Compatible meta tag on the site. For more information about document modes and X-UA-compatible headers, see [Defining document compatibility](/previous-versions/windows/internet-explorer/ie-developer/compatibility/cc288325(v=vs.85)).
**Important**
Enterprise Mode takes precedence over document modes, so sites that are already included in the Enterprise Mode site list won’t be affected by this update and will continue to load in Enterprise Mode, as usual.
@@ -45,7 +48,7 @@ To see if this fix might help you, run through this process one step at a time,

2. Starting with the **11 (Default)** option, test your broken scenario.
-If that doesn’t work, continue down to the next lowest document mode, stopping as soon as you find a document mode that fixes your problems. For more information about the Emulation tool, see [Emulate browsers, screen sizes, and GPS locations](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=518417).
+If that doesn’t work, continue down to the next lowest document mode, stopping as soon as you find a document mode that fixes your problems. For more information about the Emulation tool, see [Emulate browsers, screen sizes, and GPS locations](/previous-versions/windows/internet-explorer/ie-developer/samples/dn255001(v=vs.85)).
3. If none of the document modes fix your issue, change the **Browser Profile** to **Enterprise**, pick the mode you want to test with starting with **8** (IE8 Enterprise Mode), and then test your broken scenario.
@@ -104,7 +107,4 @@ To help you move forward, you can now use the Enterprise Mode site list to speci
- [Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](use-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md)
-
-
-
-
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/fix-validation-problems-using-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/fix-validation-problems-using-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
index c3c7ead8ff..54da1d4ba1 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/fix-validation-problems-using-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/fix-validation-problems-using-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
@@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Fix validation problems using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-advanced-group-policy-mgmt-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-advanced-group-policy-mgmt-ie11.md
index d2fadc609c..93486e7113 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-advanced-group-policy-mgmt-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-advanced-group-policy-mgmt-ie11.md
@@ -17,6 +17,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Group Policy, Advanced Group Policy Management (AGPM), and Internet Explorer 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Advanced Group Policy Management (AGPM) is an add-on license that available for the Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack (MDOP). This license gives you change control and a role assignment-model that helps optimize Group Policy management and reduce the risk of widespread failures.
From AGPM you can:
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-group-policy-mgmt-console-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-group-policy-mgmt-console-ie11.md
index df5754f0b6..14284fdfe7 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-group-policy-mgmt-console-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-group-policy-mgmt-console-ie11.md
@@ -17,6 +17,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Group Policy, the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC), and Internet Explorer 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
A Microsoft Management Console (MMC)-based tool that uses scriptable interfaces to manage Group Policy. The 32-bit and 64-bit versions are included with Windows Server R2 with Service Pack 1 (SP1) and Windows Server 2012 R2.
## Why use the GPMC?
@@ -36,14 +39,11 @@ The GPMC lets you:
- Create scriptable interfaces to support all of the operations available within the GPMC. You can't use scripts to edit individual policy settings in a GPO.
-For more information about the GPMC, see [Group Policy Management Console](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=214515) on TechNet.
+For more information about the GPMC, see [Group Policy Management Console](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2008-R2-and-2008/cc753298(v=ws.11)) on TechNet.
## Searching for Group Policy settings
To search for Group Policy settings in the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC), use the [Group Policy Search tool](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=279857). To find the Group Policy settings, click **Windows Components**, and then click **Internet Explorer**.
-
-
-
-
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-ie11.md
index d80c5af350..7e8c419582 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-ie11.md
@@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Group Policy and Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-local-group-policy-editor-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-local-group-policy-editor-ie11.md
index 4ca3868ed5..c3a615888f 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-local-group-policy-editor-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-and-local-group-policy-editor-ie11.md
@@ -17,9 +17,12 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Group Policy, the Local Group Policy Editor, and Internet Explorer 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
A Microsoft Management Console (MMC)-based tool that manages both computer and user-related configurations for an individual computer policy. This tool is included with Windows® 7 Service Pack 1 (SP1) and Windows 8.1.
-Here's a list of the policy settings you can use, based on the configuration type. For more info, see [Local Group Policy Editor](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=294912).
+Here's a list of the policy settings you can use, based on the configuration type. For more info, see [Local Group Policy Editor](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2008-R2-and-2008/cc725970(v=ws.11)).
|Computer configuration |User configuration |
|-----------------------|-------------------|
@@ -31,7 +34,4 @@ Here's a list of the policy settings you can use, based on the configuration typ
-
-
-
-
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-compatibility-with-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-compatibility-with-ie11.md
index 8a5b6d7859..12b360b126 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-compatibility-with-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-compatibility-with-ie11.md
@@ -17,6 +17,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Group Policy and compatibility with Internet Explorer 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Internet Explorer 11 has many Group Policy entries that can be configured for keeping your environment managed and safe. This table includes all of our recommendations around security, performance, and compatibility with the previous versions of Internet Explorer, regardless of which Zone the website is in.
|Activity |Location |Setting the policy object |
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-objects-and-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-objects-and-ie11.md
index 403471f4c7..6420ff7796 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-objects-and-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-objects-and-ie11.md
@@ -17,12 +17,15 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Group Policy management tools
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Group Policy, based on Microsoft Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS), lets you manage your organization's computer and user settings as part of your Group Policy objects (GPOs), which are added and changed in the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC). GPOs can include registry-based Administrative Template policy settings, security settings, software deployment information, scripts, folder redirection, and preferences. The most effective way to target a specific GPO is to use Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI) filters. Like, creating a WMI filter that applies a GPO only to computers with a specific make and model.
By using Group Policy, you can set up a policy setting once, and then copy that setting onto many computers. For example, you can set up multiple Internet Explorer 11 security settings in a GPO that's linked to a domain, and then apply all of those settings to every computer in the domain.
**Note**
-For more information about Group Policy, see the [Group Policy TechCenter](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=214514). This site provides links to the latest technical documentation, videos, and downloads for Group Policy.
+For more information about Group Policy, see the [Group Policy TechCenter](/windows/deployment/deploy-whats-new). This site provides links to the latest technical documentation, videos, and downloads for Group Policy.
## Managing settings with GPOs
After deploying IE11 to your organization, you can continue to manage the browser settings by using Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) together with the following Group Policy-related setting management groups:
@@ -50,7 +53,3 @@ You can use any of these tools to create, manage, view, and troubleshoot Group P
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-preferences-and-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-preferences-and-ie11.md
index ae5c5f783e..938e3e036e 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-preferences-and-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-preferences-and-ie11.md
@@ -17,6 +17,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Group policy preferences and Internet Explorer 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Group Policy preferences are less strict than Group Policy settings, based on:
| |Group Policy preferences |Group Policy settings |
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-problems-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-problems-ie11.md
index 008e2624c0..8cec1052e4 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-problems-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-problems-ie11.md
@@ -17,14 +17,14 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Group Policy problems with Internet Explorer 11
-If you're having problems with Group Policy and Internet Explorer 11, or if you're looking for high-level information about the concepts and techniques used to troubleshoot Group Policy, as well as links to detailed reference topics, procedures, and troubleshooting scenario guides, see [Group Policy Analysis and Troubleshooting Overview](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=279872).
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+If you're having problems with Group Policy and Internet Explorer 11, or if you're looking for high-level information about the concepts and techniques used to troubleshoot Group Policy, as well as links to detailed reference topics, procedures, and troubleshooting scenario guides, see [Group Policy Analysis and Troubleshooting Overview](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2012-R2-and-2012/jj134223(v=ws.11)).
## Group Policy Object-related Log Files
-You can use the Event Viewer to review Group Policy-related messages in the **Windows Logs**, **System** file. All of the Group Policy-related events are shown with a source of **GroupPolicy**. For more information about the Event Viewer, see [What information appears in event logs? (Event Viewer)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=294917).
+You can use the Event Viewer to review Group Policy-related messages in the **Windows Logs**, **System** file. All of the Group Policy-related events are shown with a source of **GroupPolicy**
-
-
-
-
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-shortcut-extensions-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-shortcut-extensions-ie11.md
index 1f0caf9bc3..8a23dbf697 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-shortcut-extensions-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-shortcut-extensions-ie11.md
@@ -17,6 +17,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Group Policy, Shortcut Extensions, and Internet Explorer 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Group Policy includes the Shortcuts preference extension, which lets you configure shortcuts to:
- **File system objects.** Traditional shortcuts that link to apps, files, folders, drives, shares, or computers. For example, linking a shortcut to an app from the **Start** screen.
@@ -40,11 +43,8 @@ You can create and configure shortcuts for any domain-based Group Policy Object
5. Type the required shortcut settings and your comments into the **Description** box, and click **OK**.
-For more information about shortcut extensions, including step-by-step guidance, see [Shortcuts Extension](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=214525) and [Configure a Shortcut Item](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=301837).
+For more information about shortcut extensions, including step-by-step guidance, see [Shortcuts Extension](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2008-R2-and-2008/cc730592(v=ws.11)) and [Configure a Shortcut Item](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2008-R2-and-2008/cc753580(v=ws.11)).
-
-
-
-
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-windows-powershell-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-windows-powershell-ie11.md
index 2de349942d..9b5677e069 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-windows-powershell-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-windows-powershell-ie11.md
@@ -17,6 +17,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Group Policy, Windows Powershell, and Internet Explorer 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Your domain-joined Group Policy Objects (GPOs) can use any of Group Policy-related “cmdlets” that run within Windows PowerShell.
Each cmdlet is a single-function command-line tool that can:
@@ -29,11 +32,8 @@ Each cmdlet is a single-function command-line tool that can:
- Configure registry-based policy settings and registry settings for Group Policy preferences.
-For more info about PowerShell and Group Policy management, see [Use Windows PowerShell to Manage Group Policy](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=276828).
+For more info about PowerShell and Group Policy management, see [Use Windows PowerShell to Manage Group Policy](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2008-R2-and-2008/dd759177(v=ws.11)).
-
-
-
-
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/ie11-delivery-through-automatic-updates.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/ie11-delivery-through-automatic-updates.md
index b4149169e2..cd8bea93d3 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/ie11-delivery-through-automatic-updates.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/ie11-delivery-through-automatic-updates.md
@@ -17,17 +17,18 @@ ms.date: 05/22/2018
---
# Internet Explorer 11 delivery through automatic updates
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Internet Explorer 11 makes browsing the web faster, easier, safer, and more reliable than ever. To help customers become more secure and up-to-date, Microsoft will distribute Internet Explorer 11 through Automatic Updates and the Windows Update and Microsoft Update sites. Internet Explorer 11 will be available for users of the 32-bit and 64-bit versions of Windows 7 Service Pack 1 (SP1), and 64-bit version of Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1. This article provides an overview of the delivery process and options available for IT administrators to control how and when Internet Explorer 11 is deployed to their organization through Automatic Updates.
-- [Automatic updates delivery process](https://docs.microsoft.com/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/ie11-delivery-through-automatic-updates#automatic-updates-delivery-process)
+- [Automatic updates delivery process](#automatic-updates-delivery-process)
-- [Internet Explorer 11 automatic upgrades](https://docs.microsoft.com/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/ie11-delivery-through-automatic-updates#internet-explorer-11-automatic-upgrades)
+- [Internet Explorer 11 automatic upgrades](#internet-explorer-11-automatic-upgrades)
-- [Options for blocking automatic delivery](https://docs.microsoft.com/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/ie11-delivery-through-automatic-updates#options-for-blocking-automatic-delivery)
+- [Options for blocking automatic delivery](#options-for-blocking-automatic-delivery)
-- [Availability of Internet Explorer 11](https://docs.microsoft.com/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/ie11-delivery-through-automatic-updates#availability-of-internet-explorer-11)
-
-- [Prevent automatic installation of Internet Explorer 11 with WSUS](https://docs.microsoft.com/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/ie11-delivery-through-automatic-updates#prevent-automatic-installation-of-internet-explorer-11-with-wsus)
+- [Prevent automatic installation of Internet Explorer 11 with WSUS](#prevent-automatic-installation-of-internet-explorer-11-with-wsus)
## Automatic updates delivery process
@@ -37,8 +38,8 @@ current version of Internet Explorer.
Internet Explorer 11 replaces Internet Explorer 8, Internet Explorer 9, or Internet Explorer 10. If you decide you don’t want Internet Explorer 11, and you’re running Windows 7 SP1 or Windows Server 2008 R2 with SP1, you can uninstall it from the **View installed updates** section of the **Uninstall an update** page of the Control Panel.
->[!Note]
->If a user installs Internet Explorer 11 and then removes it, it won’t be re-offered to that computer through Automatic Updates. Instead, the user will have to manually re-install the app.
+> [!NOTE]
+> If a user installs Internet Explorer 11 and then removes it, it won’t be re-offered to that computer through Automatic Updates. Instead, the user will have to manually re-install the app.
## Internet Explorer 11 automatic upgrades
@@ -52,20 +53,20 @@ If you use Automatic Updates in your company, but want to stop your users from a
- **Download and use the Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit.** Includes a Group Policy template and a script that permanently blocks Internet Explorer 11 from being offered by Windows Update or Microsoft Update as a high-priority update. You can download this kit from the [Microsoft Download Center](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=40722).
- >[!Note]
- >The toolkit won't stop users with local administrator accounts from manually installing Internet Explorer 11. Using this toolkit also prevents your users from receiving automatic upgrades from Internet Explorer 8, Internet Explorer 9, or Internet Explorer 10 to Internet Explorer 11. For more information, see the [Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit frequently asked questions](../ie11-faq/faq-ie11-blocker-toolkit.md).
+ > [!NOTE]
+ > The toolkit won't stop users with local administrator accounts from manually installing Internet Explorer 11. Using this toolkit also prevents your users from receiving automatic upgrades from Internet Explorer 8, Internet Explorer 9, or Internet Explorer 10 to Internet Explorer 11. For more information, see the [Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit frequently asked questions](../ie11-faq/faq-ie11-blocker-toolkit.yml).
- **Use an update management solution to control update deployment.**
- If you already use an update management solution, like [Windows Server Update Services (WSUS)](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows-server/administration/windows-server-update-services/get-started/windows-server-update-services-wsus) or the more advanced [System Center 2012 Configuration Manager](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=276664), you should use that instead of the Internet Explorer Blocker Toolkit.
+ If you already use an update management solution, like [Windows Server Update Services (WSUS)](/windows-server/administration/windows-server-update-services/get-started/windows-server-update-services-wsus) or the more advanced [Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager](/previous-versions/system-center/system-center-2012-R2/gg682129(v=technet.10)), you should use that instead of the Internet Explorer Blocker Toolkit.
- >[!Note]
- >If you use WSUS to manage updates, and Update Rollups are configured for automatic installation, Internet Explorer will automatically install throughout your company. This scenario is discussed in detail in the Knowledge Base article [here](https://support.microsoft.com/kb/946202).
+ > [!NOTE]
+ > If you use WSUS to manage updates, and Update Rollups are configured for automatic installation, Internet Explorer will automatically install throughout your company. This scenario is discussed in detail in the Knowledge Base article [here](https://support.microsoft.com/kb/946202).
Additional information on Internet Explorer 11, including a Readiness Toolkit, technical overview, in-depth feature summary, and Internet Explorer 11 download is available on the [Internet Explorer 11 page of the Microsoft Edge IT Center](https://technet.microsoft.com/microsoft-edge/dn262703.aspx).
## Availability of Internet Explorer 11
-Automatic Updates will start to distribute Internet Explorer 11 shortly after the final release of the product and will distribute it through the System Center Configuration Manager, Microsoft Systems Management Server, and WSUS.
+Automatic Updates will start to distribute Internet Explorer 11 shortly after the final release of the product and will distribute it through the Microsoft Endpoint Manager and WSUS.
## Prevent automatic installation of Internet Explorer 11 with WSUS
@@ -81,13 +82,13 @@ Internet Explorer 11 will be released to WSUS as an Update Rollup package. There
4. Click the rule that automatically approves an update that is classified as
Update Rollup, and then click **Edit.**
- >[!Note]
- >If you don’t see a rule like this, you most likely haven’t configured WSUS to automatically approve Update Rollups for installation. In this situation, you don’t have to do anything else.
+ > [!NOTE]
+ > If you don’t see a rule like this, you most likely haven’t configured WSUS to automatically approve Update Rollups for installation. In this situation, you don’t have to do anything else.
5. Click the **Update Rollups** property under the **Step 2: Edit the properties (click an underlined value)** section.
- >[!Note]
- >The properties for this rule will resemble the following:
When an update is in Update Rollups
Approve the update for all computers
+ > [!NOTE]
+ > The properties for this rule will resemble the following:
When an update is in Update Rollups
Approve the update for all computers
6. Clear the **Update Rollup** check box, and then click **OK**.
@@ -101,12 +102,12 @@ Internet Explorer 11 will be released to WSUS as an Update Rollup package. There
11. Expand *ComputerName*, expand **Updates**, and then click **All Updates**.
-12. Choose **Unapproved** in the **Approval**drop down box.
+12. Choose **Unapproved** in the **Approval** drop down box.
13. Check to make sure that Microsoft Internet Explorer 11 is listed as an unapproved update.
- >[!Note]
- >There may be multiple updates, depending on the imported language and operating system updates.
+ > [!NOTE]
+ > There may be multiple updates, depending on the imported language and operating system updates.
**Optional**
@@ -126,8 +127,8 @@ If you need to reset your Update Rollups packages to auto-approve, do this:
7. Click **OK** to close the **Automatic Approvals** dialog box.
->[!Note]
->Because auto-approval rules are only evaluated when an update is first imported into WSUS, turning this rule back on after the Internet Explorer 11 update has been imported and synchronized to the server won’t cause this update to be auto-approved.
+> [!NOTE]
+> Because auto-approval rules are only evaluated when an update is first imported into WSUS, turning this rule back on after the Internet Explorer 11 update has been imported and synchronized to the server won’t cause this update to be auto-approved.
## Additional resources
@@ -136,8 +137,8 @@ If you need to reset your Update Rollups packages to auto-approve, do this:
- [Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit download](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=40722)
-- [Internet Explorer 11 FAQ for IT pros](https://docs.microsoft.com/internet-explorer/ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11)
+- [Internet Explorer 11 FAQ for IT pros](../ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11.yml)
-- [Internet Explorer 11 delivery through automatic updates](https://technet.microsoft.com/microsoft-edge/dn449235)
+- [Internet Explorer 11 delivery through automatic updates]()
-- [Internet Explorer 11 deployment guide](https://docs.microsoft.com/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/index)
+- [Internet Explorer 11 deployment guide](./index.md)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/images/configmgrhardwareinventory.png b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/images/configmgrhardwareinventory.png
index d2508016be..7626296e87 100644
Binary files a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/images/configmgrhardwareinventory.png and b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/images/configmgrhardwareinventory.png differ
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/img-ie11-docmode-lg.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/img-ie11-docmode-lg.md
index 5097f83564..30de0a2c97 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/img-ie11-docmode-lg.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/img-ie11-docmode-lg.md
@@ -9,6 +9,11 @@ manager: dansimp
ms.author: dansimp
---
+# Full-sized flowchart detailing how document modes are chosen in IE11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
Return to: [Deprecated document modes and Internet Explorer 11](deprecated-document-modes.md)
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/import-into-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/import-into-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
index 5ab9dd5e58..f585e3210d 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/import-into-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/import-into-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
@@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Import your Enterprise Mode site list to the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/index.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/index.md
index 74f09e116d..561c0f9983 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/index.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/index.md
@@ -14,6 +14,9 @@ manager: dansimp
# Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) - Deployment Guide for IT Pros
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
@@ -44,7 +47,7 @@ Because this content isn't intended to be a step-by-step guide, not all of the s
|[What is the Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit?](what-is-the-internet-explorer-11-blocker-toolkit.md) |The IE11 Blocker Toolkit lets you turn off the automatic delivery of IE11 through the Automatic Updates feature of Windows Update. |
|[Missing Internet Explorer Maintenance (IEM) settings for Internet Explorer 11](missing-internet-explorer-maintenance-settings-for-ie11.md) |The Internet Explorer Maintenance (IEM) settings have been deprecated in favor of Group Policy preferences, Administrative Templates (.admx), and the Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11).
Because of this change, your IEM-configured settings will no longer work on computers running Internet Explorer 10 or newer. To fix this, you need to update the affected settings using Group Policy preferences, Administrative Templates (.admx), or the IEAK 11.
Because Group Policy Preferences and IEAK 11 run using asynchronous processes, you should choose to use only one of the tools within each group of settings. For example, using only IEAK 11 in the Security settings or Group Policy Preferences within the Internet Zone settings. Also, it's important to remember that policy is enforced and can't be changed by the user, while preferences are configured, but can be changed by the user. |
|[Missing the Compatibility View Button](missing-the-compatibility-view-button.md) |Compatibility View was introduced in Internet Explorer 8 to help existing content continue to work with Windows Internet Explorer 7, while developers updated their content to support modern interoperable web standards. Since then, the IE web platform, and the web itself, have changed so that most public web content looks for standards-based features instead of IE 7-compatible behavior.
Thanks to these changes, using IE11 in the latest standards mode is more compatible with the web than ever before. As a result, IE11 simplifies web page compatibility for users by removing the Compatibility View button and reducing the number of compatibility options in the F12 developer tools for developers. |
-|[Deploy pinned websites using Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT) 2013](deploy-pinned-sites-using-mdt-2013.md) |You can pin websites to the Windows 8.1 taskbar for quick access. You pin a website simply by dragging its tab to the taskbar. Some websites can also extend the icon’s Jump List.
The ability to pin websites to the Windows 8.1 taskbar can help make end-users in businesses more productive. As an IT professional, for example, you can pin intranet and SharePoint websites to the taskbar to make them immediately available to employees. In this article, you learn how to deploy pinned websites by using Lite Touch Installation in the [Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT) 2013](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=398474).
+|[Deploy pinned websites using Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT) 2013](deploy-pinned-sites-using-mdt-2013.md) |You can pin websites to the Windows 8.1 taskbar for quick access. You pin a website simply by dragging its tab to the taskbar. Some websites can also extend the icon’s Jump List.
The ability to pin websites to the Windows 8.1 taskbar can help make end-users in businesses more productive. As an IT professional, for example, you can pin intranet and SharePoint websites to the taskbar to make them immediately available to employees. In this article, you learn how to deploy pinned websites by using Lite Touch Installation in the [Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT) 2013](/mem/configmgr/mdt/).
## IE11 naming conventions
@@ -57,7 +60,6 @@ IE11 offers differing experiences in Windows 8.1:
|Internet Explorer 11 or IE11 |The whole browser, which includes both IE and Internet Explorer for the desktop. |
## Related topics
-- [Internet Explorer 11 - FAQ for IT Pros](../ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11.md)
+- [Internet Explorer 11 - FAQ for IT Pros](../ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11.yml)
- [Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) - Administrator's Guide](../ie11-ieak/index.md)
-- [Microsoft Edge - Deployment Guide for IT Pros](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=760643)
-
+- [Microsoft Edge - Deployment Guide for IT Pros](/microsoft-edge/deploy/)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-and-deploy-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-and-deploy-ie11.md
index e9fcf44f0e..47a4d07569 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-and-deploy-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-and-deploy-ie11.md
@@ -17,6 +17,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Install and Deploy Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-microsoft-intune.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-microsoft-intune.md
index 7dd92ecc08..125703ca28 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-microsoft-intune.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-microsoft-intune.md
@@ -15,7 +15,10 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) using Microsoft Intune
-Internet Explorer 11 is available as an update in Microsoft Intune. Microsoft Intune uses Windows cloud services to help you manage updates, monitor and protect your computers, provide remote assistance, track hardware and software inventory, and set security policies. For more information, see the [Documentation Library for Microsoft Intune](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=301805).
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+Internet Explorer 11 is available as an update in Microsoft Intune. Microsoft Intune uses Windows cloud services to help you manage updates, monitor and protect your computers, provide remote assistance, track hardware and software inventory, and set security policies. For more information, see the [Documentation Library for Microsoft Intune](/mem/intune/).
## Adding and deploying the IE11 package
You can add and then deploy the IE11 package to any computer that's managed by Microsoft Intune.
@@ -26,7 +29,7 @@ You can add and then deploy the IE11 package to any computer that's managed by M
2. Add your IE11 package as either an external link or as a Windows installer package (.exe or .msi).
-For more info about how to decide which one to use, and how to use it, see [Deploy and configure apps](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=301806).
+For more info about how to decide which one to use, and how to use it, see [Deploy and configure apps](/mem/intune/).
**To automatically deploy and install the IE11 package**
@@ -36,7 +39,7 @@ For more info about how to decide which one to use, and how to use it, see [Depl
3. After the package is on your employee's computers, the installation process runs, based on what you set up in your wizard.
-For more info about this, see [Deploy and configure apps](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=301806).
+For more info about this, see [Deploy and configure apps](/mem/intune/).
**To let your employees install the IE11 package**
@@ -48,7 +51,4 @@ For more info about this, see [Update apps using Microsoft Intune](https://go.mi
-
-
-
-
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-operating-system-deployment-systems.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-operating-system-deployment-systems.md
index 5dade69199..469b700481 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-operating-system-deployment-systems.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-operating-system-deployment-systems.md
@@ -17,6 +17,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) using Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT) and your Windows images
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
You can install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) using Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT) and your Windows images.
You'll need to extract the .cab file for each supported operating system and platform combination and the .msu file for each prerequisite update. Download the IE11 update and prerequisites here:
@@ -29,7 +32,7 @@ After you install the .msu file updates, you'll need to add them to your MDT dep
## Installing IE11 using Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT)
-MDT adds IE11 to your Windows images, regardless whether you are creating or deploying a customized or non-customized image. MDT also lets you perform offline servicing during the System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager task sequence, letting you add IE11 before starting Windows. For info, see [Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?linkid=331148).
+MDT adds IE11 to your Windows images, regardless whether you are creating or deploying a customized or non-customized image. MDT also lets you perform offline servicing during the System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager task sequence, letting you add IE11 before starting Windows. For info, see [Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT)](/mem/configmgr/mdt/).
**To add IE11 to a MDT deployment share**
@@ -48,13 +51,10 @@ You can add the IE11 update while you're performing offline servicing, or slipst
These articles have step-by-step details about adding packages to your Windows images:
-- For Windows 8.1, see [Add or Remove Packages Offline Using DISM](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=276791).
+- For Windows 8.1, see [Add or Remove Packages Offline Using DISM](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-8.1-and-8/hh824838(v=win.10)).
-- For Windows 7 SP1, see [Add or Remove Packages Offline](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=214490).
+- For Windows 7 SP1, see [Add or Remove Packages Offline](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-7/dd744559(v=ws.10)).
-
-
-
-
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-system-center-configuration-manager.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-system-center-configuration-manager.md
index 2b40174159..8beef9b99d 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-system-center-configuration-manager.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-system-center-configuration-manager.md
@@ -17,7 +17,10 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) using System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager
-You can install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) by using [System Center R2 2012 Configuration Manager](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?linkid=276664). Complete these steps for each operating system and platform combination.
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+You can install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) by using [System Center R2 2012 Configuration Manager](/previous-versions/system-center/system-center-2012-R2/gg682129(v=technet.10)). Complete these steps for each operating system and platform combination.
**To install IE11**
@@ -33,7 +36,4 @@ You can also use System Center Essentials 2010 to deploy IE11 installation packa
-
-
-
-
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-the-network.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-the-network.md
index 9da3cd91fa..d0d9d17be1 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-the-network.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-the-network.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) using your network
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
You can install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) over your network by putting your custom IE11 installation package in a shared network folder and letting your employees run the Setup program on their own computers. You can create the network folder structure manually, or you can run Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11).
**Note** If you support multiple architectures and operating systems, create a subfolder for each combination. If you support multiple languages, create a subfolder for each localized installation file.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-third-party-tools.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-third-party-tools.md
index 5d230773e3..d593de27c6 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-third-party-tools.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-third-party-tools.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) using third-party tools
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
You can install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) using third-party electronic software distribution (ESD) systems and these command-line options:
## Setup Modes
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-windows-server-update-services-wsus.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-windows-server-update-services-wsus.md
index 62bfab42b9..07b0485309 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-windows-server-update-services-wsus.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-windows-server-update-services-wsus.md
@@ -16,7 +16,10 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Install Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) using Windows Server Update Services (WSUS)
-Windows Server Update Services (WSUS) lets you download a single copy of the Microsoft product update and cache it on your local WSUS servers. You can then configure your computers to get the update from your local servers instead of Windows Update. For more information about WSUS, see [Windows Server Update Services](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkID=276790).
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+Windows Server Update Services (WSUS) lets you download a single copy of the Microsoft product update and cache it on your local WSUS servers. You can then configure your computers to get the update from your local servers instead of Windows Update. For more information about WSUS, see [Windows Server Update Services](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2012-R2-and-2012/hh852345(v=ws.11)).
**To import from Windows Update to WSUS**
@@ -47,7 +50,3 @@ Windows Server Update Services (WSUS) lets you download a single copy of the Mic
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-problems-with-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-problems-with-ie11.md
index 3ebe727aeb..3e6ffbfad8 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-problems-with-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/install-problems-with-ie11.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Install problems with Internet Explorer 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Most Internet Explorer 11 installations are straightforward and work the way they should. But it's possible that you might have problems.
If you do, you can:
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/intranet-problems-and-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/intranet-problems-and-ie11.md
index 16331ab49c..803fc7fb83 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/intranet-problems-and-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/intranet-problems-and-ie11.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Fix intranet search problems with Internet Explorer 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
After upgrading to Internet Explorer 11, you might experience search issues while using your intranet site.
## Why is my intranet redirecting me to search results?
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/manage-ie11-overview.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/manage-ie11-overview.md
index 2270749c81..66b29a20c4 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/manage-ie11-overview.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/manage-ie11-overview.md
@@ -17,6 +17,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Manage Internet Explorer 11
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/missing-internet-explorer-maintenance-settings-for-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/missing-internet-explorer-maintenance-settings-for-ie11.md
index c0087953b7..e3e56157b3 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/missing-internet-explorer-maintenance-settings-for-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/missing-internet-explorer-maintenance-settings-for-ie11.md
@@ -17,6 +17,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Missing Internet Explorer Maintenance settings for Internet Explorer 11
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
@@ -41,9 +44,9 @@ For more information about all of the new options and Group Policy, see:
- [Group Policy Settings Reference for Windows and Windows Server](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=279876)
-- [Group Policy ADMX Syntax Reference Guide](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=276830)
+- [Group Policy ADMX Syntax Reference Guide](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2008-R2-and-2008/cc753471(v=ws.10))
-- [Enable and Disable Settings in a Preference Item](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=282671)
+- [Enable and Disable Settings in a Preference Item](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2008-R2-and-2008/cc754299(v=ws.11))
## IEM replacements
The IEM settings have replacements you can use in either Group Policy Preferences or IEAK 11.
@@ -95,5 +98,4 @@ The Advanced IEM settings, including Corporate and Internet settings, were also
|IEM setting |Description |Replacement tool |
|------------|------------|-----------------|
|Corporate settings |Specifies the location of the file with the settings you use to make IE work best in your organization. |On the Additional Settings page of IEAK 11, expand Corporate Settings, and then customize how your organization handles temporary Internet files, code downloads, menu items, and toolbar buttons. |
-|Internet settings |Specifies the location of the file that includes your default IE settings. |In the Internet Settings Group Policy Preferences dialog box, click the Advanced tab, and then update your Internet-related settings, as required
-OR-
On the Additional Settings page of IEAK 11, expand Internet Settings, and then customize your default values in the Internet Options dialog box. |
-
+|Internet settings |Specifies the location of the file that includes your default IE settings. |In the Internet Settings Group Policy Preferences dialog box, click the Advanced tab, and then update your Internet-related settings, as required
-OR-
On the Additional Settings page of IEAK 11, expand Internet Settings, and then customize your default values in the Internet Options dialog box. |
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/missing-the-compatibility-view-button.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/missing-the-compatibility-view-button.md
index fbc40cbf73..faa927931e 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/missing-the-compatibility-view-button.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/missing-the-compatibility-view-button.md
@@ -17,6 +17,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Missing the Compatibility View Button
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/net-framework-problems-with-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/net-framework-problems-with-ie11.md
index 3e564954a6..6c68a1ec01 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/net-framework-problems-with-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/net-framework-problems-with-ie11.md
@@ -16,6 +16,12 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# .NET Framework problems with Internet Explorer 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
+## Summary
+
If you’re having problems launching your legacy apps while running Internet Explorer 11, it’s most likely because Internet Explorer no longer starts apps that use managed browser hosting controls, like in .NET Framework 1.1 and 2.0.
**To turn managed browser hosting controls back on**
@@ -24,11 +30,14 @@ If you’re having problems launching your legacy apps while running Internet Ex
2. **For 32-bit processes on x64 systems:** Go to the `HKLM\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\MICROSOFT\.NETFramework` registry key and change the **EnableIEHosting** value to **1**.
-For more information, see the [Web Applications](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=308903) section of the Application Compatibility in the .NET Framework 4.5 page.
+## More information
-
-
-
+IEHost is a Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1-based technology that provides a better model than ActiveX controls to host controls within the browser. The IEHost controls are lightweight and are operated under the .NET security model where they are operated inside a sandbox.
+From the .NET Framework 4, we remove the IEHost.dll file for the following reasons:
+- IEHost/HREF-EXE-style controls are exposed to the Internet. This poses a high security risk, and most customers who install the Framework are benefiting very little from this security risk.
+- Managed hosting controls and invoking random ActiveX controls may be unsafe, and this risk cannot be countered in the .NET Framework. Therefore, the ability to host is disabled. We strongly suggest that IEHost should be disabled in any production environment.
+- Potential security vulnerabilities and assembly versioning conflicts in the default application domain. By relying on COM Interop wrappers to load your assembly, it is implicitly loaded in the default application domain. If other browser extensions do the same function, they have the risks in the default application domain such as disclosing information, and so on. If you are not using strong-named assemblies as dependencies, type loading exceptions can occur. You cannot freely configure the common language runtime (CLR), because you do not own the host process, and you cannot run any code before your extension is loaded.
+For more information about .NET Framework application compatibility, see [Application compatibility in the .NET Framework](/dotnet/framework/migration-guide/application-compatibility).
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/new-group-policy-settings-for-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/new-group-policy-settings-for-ie11.md
index bf70df22fd..557d57b34a 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/new-group-policy-settings-for-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/new-group-policy-settings-for-ie11.md
@@ -17,6 +17,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# New group policy settings for Internet Explorer 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Internet Explorer 11 gives you some new Group Policy settings to help you manage your company's web browser configurations, including:
@@ -46,7 +49,7 @@ Internet Explorer 11 gives you some new Group Policy settings to help you manage
| Turn off the ability to launch report site problems using a menu option | Administrative Templates\Windows Components\Internet Explorer\Browser menus | Internet Explorer 11 | This policy setting allows you to manage whether users can start the **eport Site Problems** dialog box from the **Internet Explorer** settings area or from the **Tools** menu.
If you enable this policy setting, users won’t be able to start the **Report Site Problems** dialog box from the Internet Explorer settings or the Tools menu.
If you disable or don’t configure this policy setting, users will be able to start the **Report Site Problems** dialog box from the **Internet Explorer** settings area or from the **Tools** menu. |
| Turn off the flip ahead with page prediction feature | Administrative Templates\Windows Components\Internet Explorer\Internet Control Panel\Advanced Page | At least Internet Explorer 10 on Windows 8 | This policy setting determines whether a user can swipe across a screen or click Forward to go to the next pre-loaded page of a website.
If you enable this policy setting, flip ahead with page prediction is turned off and the next webpage isn’t loaded into the background.
If you disable this policy setting, flip ahead with page prediction is turned on and the next webpage is loaded into the background.
If you don’t configure this setting, users can turn this behavior on or off, using the **Settings** charm.
**Note** Microsoft collects your browsing history to improve how flip ahead with page prediction works. This feature isn’t available for Internet Explorer for the desktop. |
| Turn on 64-bit tab processes when running in Enhanced Protected Mode on 64-bit versions of Windows | Administrative Templates\Windows Components\Internet Explorer\Internet Control Panel\Advanced Page | IE11 on Windows 10 | This policy setting determines whether IE11 uses 64-bit processes (for greater security) or 32-bit processes (for greater compatibility) when running in Enhanced Protected Mode on 64-bit versions of Windows.
If you enable this policy setting, IE11 will use 64-bit tab processes when running in Enhanced Protected Mode on 64-bit versions of Windows.
If you disable this policy setting, IE11 will use 32-bit tab processes when running in Enhanced Protected Mode on 64-bit versions of Windows.
If you don't configure this policy setting, users can turn this feature on or off using IE settings. This feature is turned off by default.
**Important** When using 64-bit processes, some ActiveX controls and toolbars might not be available. |
-| Turn on Site Discovery WMI output | Administrative Templates\Windows Components\Internet Explorer | At least Internet Explorer 8 | This policy setting allows you to manage the WMI output functionality of the Internet Explorer Site Discovery Toolkit.
If you enable this policy setting, the Internet Explorer Site Discovery Toolkit will log its collected data to an WMI class, which can be aggregated by using a client-management solution, such as System Center Configuration Manager.
If you disable or don’t configure this setting, the Internet Explorer Site Discovery Toolkit won’t log its collected data to an WMI class.
**Note:** Enabling or disabling this setting won’t impact any other output methods available to the Internet Explorer Site Discovery Toolkit. |
+| Turn on Site Discovery WMI output | Administrative Templates\Windows Components\Internet Explorer | At least Internet Explorer 8 | This policy setting allows you to manage the WMI output functionality of the Internet Explorer Site Discovery Toolkit.
If you enable this policy setting, the Internet Explorer Site Discovery Toolkit will log its collected data to an WMI class, which can be aggregated by using a client-management solution, such as Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager.
If you disable or don’t configure this setting, the Internet Explorer Site Discovery Toolkit won’t log its collected data to an WMI class.
**Note:** Enabling or disabling this setting won’t impact any other output methods available to the Internet Explorer Site Discovery Toolkit. |
| Turn on Site Discovery XML output | Administrative Templates\Windows Components\Internet Explorer | At least Internet Explorer 8 | This policy setting allows you to manage the XML output functionality of the Internet Explorer Site Discovery Toolkit.
If you enable this policy setting, the Internet Explorer Site Discovery Toolkit will log its collected data to an XML file, stored in your specified location.
If you disable or don’t configure this setting, the Internet Explorer Site Discovery Toolkit won’t log its collected data to an XML file.
**Note:** Enabling or disabling this setting won’t impact any other output methods available to the Internet Explorer Site Discovery Toolkit. |
| Use the Enterprise Mode IE website list | Administrative Templates\Windows Components\Internet Explorer | IE11 on Windows 10, version 1511 | This policy setting lets you specify where to find the list of websites you want opened using Enterprise Mode, instead of Standard mode, because of compatibility issues. Users can’t edit this list.
If you enable this policy setting, Internet Explorer downloads the Enterprise Mode website list from the `HKEY_CURRENT_USER or HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE`\Software\Policies\Microsoft\Internet Explorer\Main\EnterpriseMode hive, opening all included websites using Enterprise Mode. We recommend storing and downloading your list from a secure web server `(https://)`, to help protect against data tampering.
If you disable or don’t configure this policy setting, Internet Explorer opens all websites using **Standard** mode. |
@@ -71,5 +74,4 @@ After you've finished updating and deploying your Group Policy, you can use the
1. Open and run the Resultant Set of Policy (RSoP) wizard, specifying the information you want to see.
2. Open your wizard results in the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC).
-For complete instructions about how to add, open, and use RSoP, see [Use the RSoP Snap-in](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=395201)
-
+For complete instructions about how to add, open, and use RSoP, see [Use the RSoP Snap-in](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2003/cc736424(v=ws.10))
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/out-of-date-activex-control-blocking.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/out-of-date-activex-control-blocking.md
index 5591606f32..75283c1f64 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/out-of-date-activex-control-blocking.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/out-of-date-activex-control-blocking.md
@@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ ms.date: 05/10/2018
# Out-of-date ActiveX control blocking
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
@@ -105,7 +108,10 @@ reg add "HKCU\Software\Microsoft\Internet Explorer\VersionManager" /v DownloadVe
```
Turning off this automatic download breaks the out-of-date ActiveX control blocking feature by not letting the version list update with newly outdated controls, potentially compromising the security of your computer. Use this configuration option at your own risk.
-## Out-of-date ActiveX control blocking on managed devices
+## Out-of-date ActiveX control blocking
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+ on managed devices
Out-of-date ActiveX control blocking includes four new Group Policy settings that you can use to manage your web browser configuration, based on your domain controller. You can download the administrative templates, including the new settings, from the [Administrative templates (.admx) for Windows 10](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=746579) page or the [Administrative Templates (.admx) for Windows 8.1 and Windows Server 2012 R2](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=746580) page, depending on your operating system.
### Group Policy settings
@@ -162,7 +168,7 @@ Here’s a detailed example and description of what’s included in the VersionA
- **Allowed/Blocked** Whether IE blocked the ActiveX control.
-- **Enhanced Protected Mode (EPM)-compatible.** Whether the loaded ActiveX control is compatible with [Enhanced Protected Mode](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=403865).
**Note** Enhanced Protected Mode isn’t supported on Internet Explorer 9 or earlier versions of IE. Therefore, if you’re using Internet Explorer 8 or Internet Explorer 9, all ActiveX controls will always be marked as not EPM-compatible.
+- **Enhanced Protected Mode (EPM)-compatible.** Whether the loaded ActiveX control is compatible with [Enhanced Protected Mode](/troubleshoot/browsers/enhanced-protected-mode-add-on-compatibility).
**Note** Enhanced Protected Mode isn’t supported on Internet Explorer 9 or earlier versions of IE. Therefore, if you’re using Internet Explorer 8 or Internet Explorer 9, all ActiveX controls will always be marked as not EPM-compatible.
- **Reason.** The ActiveX control can be blocked or allowed for any of these reasons:
@@ -198,9 +204,8 @@ Before running the PowerShell script, you must copy both the .ps1 and .mof file
```
powershell –ExecutionPolicy Bypass .\ConfigureWMILogging.ps1
```
- For more info, see [about_Execution_Policies](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?linkid=517460).
+ For more info, see [about_Execution_Policies](/powershell/module/microsoft.powershell.core/about/about_execution_policies).
3. **Optional:** Set up your domain firewall for WMI data. For more info, see [Collect data using Enterprise Site Discovery](collect-data-using-enterprise-site-discovery.md).
-The inventory info appears in the WMI class, `IEAXControlBlockingAuditInfo`, located in the WMI namespace, *root\\cimv2\\IETelemetry*. To collect the inventory info from your client computers, we recommend using System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager or any agent that can access the WMI data. For more info, see [Collect data using Enterprise Site Discovery](collect-data-using-enterprise-site-discovery.md).
-
+The inventory info appears in the WMI class, `IEAXControlBlockingAuditInfo`, located in the WMI namespace, *root\\cimv2\\IETelemetry*. To collect the inventory info from your client computers, we recommend using System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager or any agent that can access the WMI data. For more info, see [Collect data using Enterprise Site Discovery](collect-data-using-enterprise-site-discovery.md).
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/problems-after-installing-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/problems-after-installing-ie11.md
index 80a59c9305..fbcbcbadb9 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/problems-after-installing-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/problems-after-installing-ie11.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 10/16/2017
# Problems after installing Internet Explorer 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
After you install Internet Explorer 11 in your organization, you might run into the following issues. By following these suggestions, you should be able to fix them.
## Internet Explorer is in an unusable state
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/remove-all-sites-from-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/remove-all-sites-from-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
index df8a2b1707..4c973ffad6 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/remove-all-sites-from-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/remove-all-sites-from-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
@@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Remove all sites from your Enterprise Mode site list using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/remove-sites-from-a-local-compatibililty-view-list.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/remove-sites-from-a-local-compatibililty-view-list.md
index 4995a12e9a..f30c495bb3 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/remove-sites-from-a-local-compatibililty-view-list.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/remove-sites-from-a-local-compatibililty-view-list.md
@@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Remove sites from a local compatibility view list
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/remove-sites-from-a-local-enterprise-mode-site-list.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/remove-sites-from-a-local-enterprise-mode-site-list.md
index c9b859509b..93b323b78a 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/remove-sites-from-a-local-enterprise-mode-site-list.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/remove-sites-from-a-local-enterprise-mode-site-list.md
@@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Remove sites from a local Enterprise Mode site list
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/review-neutral-sites-with-site-list-manager.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/review-neutral-sites-with-site-list-manager.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..bc7c2ddc2a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/review-neutral-sites-with-site-list-manager.md
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+---
+ms.localizationpriority: medium
+ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
+ms.pagetype: appcompat
+description: How to use Site List Manager to review neutral sites for IE mode
+author: dansimp
+ms.prod: ie11
+ms.assetid: f4dbed4c-08ff-40b1-ab3f-60d3b6e8ec9b
+ms.reviewer:
+audience: itpro
+manager: dansimp
+ms.author: dansimp
+title: Review neutral sites for Internet Explorer mode using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager
+ms.sitesec: library
+ms.date: 04/02/2020
+---
+
+# Review neutral sites for Internet Explorer mode using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
+**Applies to:**
+
+- Windows 10
+- Windows 8
+- Windows Server 2012 R2
+- Microsoft Edge version 77 or later
+
+> [!NOTE]
+> This feature is available on the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager version 11.0.
+
+## Overview
+
+While converting your site from v.1 schema to v.2 schema using the latest version of the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager, sites with the *doNotTransition=true* in v.1 convert to *open-in=None* in the v.2 schema, which is characterized as a "neutral site". This is the expected behavior for conversion unless you are using Internet Explorer mode (IE mode). When IE mode is enabled, only authentication servers that are used for modern and legacy sites should be set as neutral sites. For more information, see [Configure neutral sites](/deployedge/edge-ie-mode-sitelist#configure-neutral-sites). Otherwise, a site meant to open in Edge might potentially be tagged as neutral, which results in inconsistent experiences for users.
+
+The Enterprise Mode Site List Manager provides the ability to flag sites that are listed as neutral sites, but might have been added in error. This check is automatically performed when you are converting from v.1 to v.2 through the tool. This check might flag sites even if there was no prior schema conversion.
+
+## Flag neutral sites
+
+To identify neutral sites to review:
+
+1. In the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.2), click **File > Flag neutral sites**.
+2. If selecting this option has no effect, there are no sites that needs to be reviewed. Otherwise, you will see a message **"Engine neutral sites flagged for review"**. When a site is flagged, you can assess if the site needs to be removed entirely, or if it needs the open-in attribute changed from None to MSEdge.
+3. If you believe that a flagged site is correctly configured, you can edit the site entry and click on **"Clear Flag"**. Once you select that option for a site, it will not be flagged again.
+
+## Related topics
+
+- [About IE Mode](/deployedge/edge-ie-mode)
+- [Configure neutral sites](/deployedge/edge-ie-mode-sitelist#configure-neutral-sites)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/save-your-site-list-to-xml-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/save-your-site-list-to-xml-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
index 28b18117e1..7b80dd178d 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/save-your-site-list-to-xml-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/save-your-site-list-to-xml-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
@@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Save your site list to XML in the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/schedule-production-change-enterprise-mode-portal.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/schedule-production-change-enterprise-mode-portal.md
index 4565b9f0c1..4d5e66ec80 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/schedule-production-change-enterprise-mode-portal.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/schedule-production-change-enterprise-mode-portal.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.author: dansimp
# Schedule approved change requests for production using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/search-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/search-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
index bc468576ed..f96a952626 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/search-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/search-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
@@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Search your Enterprise Mode site list in the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
@@ -31,7 +34,7 @@ You can search to see if a specific site already appears in your global Enterpri
**To search your compatibility list**
- From the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager, type part of the URL into the **Search** box.
- The search query searches all of the text. For example, entering *“micro”* will return results like, www.microsoft.com, microsoft.com, and microsoft.com/images. Wildcard characters aren’t supported.
+ The search query searches all of the text. For example, entering *“micro”* will return results like, `www.microsoft.com`, `microsoft.com`, and `microsoft.com/images`. Wildcard characters aren’t supported.
## Related topics
- [Download the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.2)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=716853)
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/set-the-default-browser-using-group-policy.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/set-the-default-browser-using-group-policy.md
index b6c1af8258..6edccdda73 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/set-the-default-browser-using-group-policy.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/set-the-default-browser-using-group-policy.md
@@ -17,6 +17,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Set the default browser using Group Policy
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
You can use the Group Policy setting, **Set a default associations configuration file**, to set the default browser for your company devices running Windows 10.
**To set the default browser as Internet Explorer 11**
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/set-up-enterprise-mode-logging-and-data-collection.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/set-up-enterprise-mode-logging-and-data-collection.md
index fd55a40ebd..dd26f8e369 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/set-up-enterprise-mode-logging-and-data-collection.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/set-up-enterprise-mode-logging-and-data-collection.md
@@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Set up Enterprise Mode logging and data collection
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
@@ -41,7 +44,7 @@ When you turn logging on, you need a valid URL that points to a server that can
**To set up an endpoint server**
-1. Configure an IIS server to work with your Enterprise Mode data collection process. If you’re unsure how to set up IIS, see the [IIS installation webpage](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=507609).
+1. Configure an IIS server to work with your Enterprise Mode data collection process. If you’re unsure how to set up IIS, see the [IIS installation webpage](/iis/install/installing-iis-7/installing-necessary-iis-components-on-windows-vista).
2. Open Internet Information Services (IIS) and turn on the ASP components from the **Add Roles and Features Wizard**, **Server Roles** page.
This lets you create an ASP form that accepts the incoming POST messages.
@@ -155,7 +158,3 @@ You may need to do some additional package cleanup to remove older package versi
- [Turn on Enterprise Mode and use a site list](turn-on-enterprise-mode-and-use-a-site-list.md)
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/set-up-enterprise-mode-portal.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/set-up-enterprise-mode-portal.md
index e63d79527c..c022c08569 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/set-up-enterprise-mode-portal.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/set-up-enterprise-mode-portal.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.author: dansimp
# Set up the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
@@ -36,8 +39,8 @@ You must download the deployment folder (**EMIEWebPortal/**), which includes all
2. Install the Node.js® package manager, [npm](https://www.npmjs.com/).
- >[!Note]
- >You need to install the npm package manager to replace all the third-party libraries we removed to make the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal open-source.
+ > [!NOTE]
+ > You need to install the npm package manager to replace all the third-party libraries we removed to make the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal open-source.
3. Open File Explorer and then open the **EMIEWebPortal/** folder.
@@ -49,8 +52,8 @@ You must download the deployment folder (**EMIEWebPortal/**), which includes all
6. Go back up a directory, open the solution file **EMIEWebPortal.sln** in Visual Studio, open **Web.config** from **EMIEWebPortal/** folder, and replace MSIT-LOB-COMPAT with your server name hosting your database, replace LOBMerged with your database name, and build the entire solution.
- >[!Note]
- >Step 3 of this topic provides the steps to create your database.
+ > [!NOTE]
+ > Step 3 of this topic provides the steps to create your database.
7. Copy the contents of the **EMIEWebPortal/** folder to a dedicated folder on your file system. For example, _D:\EMIEWebApp_. In a later step, you'll designate this folder as your website in the IIS Manager.
@@ -109,8 +112,8 @@ Create a new Application Pool and the website, by using the IIS Manager.
9. Double-click the **Authentication** icon, right-click on **Windows Authentication**, and then click **Enable**.
- >[!Note]
- >You must also make sure that **Anonymous Authentication** is marked as **Enabled**.
+ > [!NOTE]
+ > You must also make sure that **Anonymous Authentication** is marked as **Enabled**.
## Step 3 - Create and prep your database
Create a SQL Server database and run our custom query to create the Enterprise Mode Site List tables.
@@ -209,8 +212,8 @@ Register the EMIEScheduler tool and service for production site list changes.
1. Open File Explorer and go to EMIEWebPortal.SchedulerService\EMIEWebPortal.SchedulerService in your deployment directory, and then copy the **App_Data**, **bin**, and **Logs** folders to a separate folder. For example, C:\EMIEService\.
- >[!Important]
- >If you can't find the **bin** and **Logs** folders, you probably haven't built the Visual Studio solution. Building the solution creates the folders and files.
+ > [!IMPORTANT]
+ > If you can't find the **bin** and **Logs** folders, you probably haven't built the Visual Studio solution. Building the solution creates the folders and files.
2. In Visual Studio start the Developer Command Prompt as an administrator, and then change the directory to the location of the InstallUtil.exe file. For example, _C:\Windows\Microsoft.NET\Framework\v4.0.30319_.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/setup-problems-with-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/setup-problems-with-ie11.md
index 7dd3e837c0..70d197c391 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/setup-problems-with-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/setup-problems-with-ie11.md
@@ -17,6 +17,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Setup problems with Internet Explorer 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Installing Internet Explorer creates the following log files, which are stored in the Windows installation folder (typically, the C:\\Windows folder):
- `IE11_main.log`
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/system-requirements-and-language-support-for-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/system-requirements-and-language-support-for-ie11.md
index a8953ad3f4..818b3acf64 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/system-requirements-and-language-support-for-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/system-requirements-and-language-support-for-ie11.md
@@ -17,6 +17,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# System requirements and language support for Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
@@ -28,7 +31,7 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
Internet Explorer 11 is available for a number of systems and languages. This topic provides info about the minimum system requirements and language support.
## Minimum system requirements for IE11
-IE11 is pre-installed on Windows 8.1, Windows 10, and Windows Server 2012 R2 and is listed here for reference. For more info about IE11 on Windows 10, see [Browser: Microsoft Edge and Internet Explorer 11](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/mt156988.aspx).
+IE11 is pre-installed on Windows 8.1, Windows 10, and Windows Server 2012 R2 and is listed here for reference. For more info about IE11 on Windows 10, see [Browser: Microsoft Edge and Internet Explorer 11](/microsoft-edge/deploy/emie-to-improve-compatibility).
**Important**
IE11 isn't supported on Windows 8 or Windows Server 2012.
@@ -56,7 +59,3 @@ Computers running localized versions of Windows should run the same version of I
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/tips-and-tricks-to-manage-ie-compatibility.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/tips-and-tricks-to-manage-ie-compatibility.md
index c5a68132d8..14bd40e745 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/tips-and-tricks-to-manage-ie-compatibility.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/tips-and-tricks-to-manage-ie-compatibility.md
@@ -17,6 +17,9 @@ ms.date: 05/10/2018
# Tips and tricks to manage Internet Explorer compatibility
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
Find out how to achieve better backward compatibility for your legacy web applications with the Enterprise Mode Site List.
Jump to:
@@ -85,8 +88,8 @@ To see if the site works in the Internet Explorer 5, Internet Explorer 7, Intern
- Run the site in each document mode until you find the mode in which the site works.
- >[!NOTE]
- >You will need to make sure the User agent string dropdown matches the same browser version as the Document mode dropdown. For example, if you were testing to see if the site works in Internet Explorer 10, you should update the Document mode dropdown to 10 and the User agent string dropdown to Internet Explorer 10.
+ > [!NOTE]
+ > You will need to make sure the User agent string dropdown matches the same browser version as the Document mode dropdown. For example, if you were testing to see if the site works in Internet Explorer 10, you should update the Document mode dropdown to 10 and the User agent string dropdown to Internet Explorer 10.
- If you find a mode in which your site works, you will need to add the site domain, sub-domain, or URL to the Enterprise Mode Site List for the document mode in which the site works, or ask the IT administrator to do so. You can add the *x-ua-compatible* meta tag or HTTP header as well.
@@ -116,8 +119,8 @@ If IE8 Enterprise Mode doesn't work, IE7 Enterprise Mode will give you the Compa
If the site works, inform the IT administrator that the site needs to be added to the IE7 Enterprise Mode section.\
->[!NOTE]
->Adding the same Web path to the Enterprise Mode and sections of the Enterprise Mode Site List will not work, but we will address this in a future update.
+> [!NOTE]
+> Adding the same Web path to the Enterprise Mode and sections of the Enterprise Mode Site List will not work, but we will address this in a future update.
### Update the site for modern web standards
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/troubleshoot-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/troubleshoot-ie11.md
index 39d999c947..bf8ceeb867 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/troubleshoot-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/troubleshoot-ie11.md
@@ -17,6 +17,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Troubleshoot Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/turn-off-enterprise-mode.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/turn-off-enterprise-mode.md
index 1df0d6b95e..7e4561fa2a 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/turn-off-enterprise-mode.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/turn-off-enterprise-mode.md
@@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Turn off Enterprise Mode
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/turn-off-natural-metrics.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/turn-off-natural-metrics.md
index 90442b3bbc..178085c2ad 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/turn-off-natural-metrics.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/turn-off-natural-metrics.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Fix font rendering problems by turning off natural metrics
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
By default, Internet Explorer 11 uses “natural metrics”. Natural metrics use inter-pixel spacing that creates more accurately rendered and readable text, avoiding many common font rendering problems with Windows Internet Explorer 9 or older sites.
However, you might find that many intranet sites need you to use Windows Graphics Device Interface (GDI) metrics. To avoid potential compatibility issues, you must turn off natural metrics for those sites.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/turn-on-enterprise-mode-and-use-a-site-list.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/turn-on-enterprise-mode-and-use-a-site-list.md
index 29c8de2486..8c84054dc3 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/turn-on-enterprise-mode-and-use-a-site-list.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/turn-on-enterprise-mode-and-use-a-site-list.md
@@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ ms.localizationpriority: medium
# Turn on Enterprise Mode and use a site list
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
@@ -28,8 +31,8 @@ ms.localizationpriority: medium
Before you can use a site list with Enterprise Mode, you need to turn the functionality on and set up the system for centralized control. By allowing centralized control, you can create one global list of websites that render using Enterprise Mode. Approximately 65 seconds after Internet Explorer 11 starts, it looks for a properly formatted site list. If a new site list if found, with a different version number than the active list, IE11 loads and uses the newer version. After the initial check, IE11 won’t look for an updated list again until you restart the browser.
->[!NOTE]
->We recommend that you store and download your website list from a secure web server (https://), to help protect against data tampering. After the list is downloaded, it's stored locally on your employees' computers so if the centralized file location is unavailable, they can still use Enterprise Mode.
+> [!NOTE]
+> We recommend that you store and download your website list from a secure web server (https://), to help protect against data tampering. After the list is downloaded, it's stored locally on your employees' computers so if the centralized file location is unavailable, they can still use Enterprise Mode.
**To turn on Enterprise Mode using Group Policy**
@@ -63,9 +66,4 @@ Before you can use a site list with Enterprise Mode, you need to turn the functi
- [Download the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkID=394378)
- [Add multiple sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using a file and the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1)](add-multiple-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-1-schema-and-enterprise-mode-tool.md)
- [Add multiple sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using a file and the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.2)](add-multiple-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-2-schema-and-enterprise-mode-tool.md)
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/turn-on-local-control-and-logging-for-enterprise-mode.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/turn-on-local-control-and-logging-for-enterprise-mode.md
index 1324c12963..b4db0fb7a4 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/turn-on-local-control-and-logging-for-enterprise-mode.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/turn-on-local-control-and-logging-for-enterprise-mode.md
@@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Turn on local control and logging for Enterprise Mode
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/updated-features-and-tools-with-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/updated-features-and-tools-with-ie11.md
index 446375289c..ace67f0ddc 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/updated-features-and-tools-with-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/updated-features-and-tools-with-ie11.md
@@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# List of updated features and tools - Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
@@ -37,15 +40,12 @@ Internet Explorer 11 includes several new features and tools. This topic includ
- **Out-of-date ActiveX control blocking**. Helps to keep your ActiveX controls up-to-date, because malicious software (or malware) can target security flaws in outdated controls, damaging your computer by collecting info from it, installing unwanted software, or by letting someone else control it remotely. For more info, see [Out-of-date ActiveX control blocking](out-of-date-activex-control-blocking.md).
-- **Do Not Track (DNT) exceptions.** IE11 lets websites ask whether to track users as they browse a website. If the user approves the request, IE records an exception to the "Do Not Track" rule and sends headers to the website that allow tracking. By respecting these headers and requesting exceptions to the default privacy settings, website owners can develop a trusted relationship with their users about privacy. For more info, see [Internet Explorer 11 - FAQ for IT Pros](../ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11.md).
+- **Do Not Track (DNT) exceptions.** IE11 lets websites ask whether to track users as they browse a website. If the user approves the request, IE records an exception to the "Do Not Track" rule and sends headers to the website that allow tracking. By respecting these headers and requesting exceptions to the default privacy settings, website owners can develop a trusted relationship with their users about privacy. For more info, see [Internet Explorer 11 - FAQ for IT Pros](../ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11.yml).
- **IE Administration Kit (IEAK).** Lets you create custom, branded versions of IE11. For more info and to download the tool, see [Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) - Administration Guide for IT Pros](../ie11-ieak/index.md).
-- **Unattend Settings.** Lets you update the Unattend.xml file, to customize the home page, favorites, search providers, feeds, Accelerators, Web Slices, and settings for top result searches. For more info, see the [Unattend Settings: Microsoft-Windows-IE-InternetExplorer](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=263709).
+- **Unattend Settings.** Lets you update the Unattend.xml file, to customize the home page, favorites, search providers, feeds, Accelerators, Web Slices, and settings for top result searches. For more info, see the [Unattend Settings: Microsoft-Windows-IE-InternetExplorer](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-8.1-and-8/ff715726(v=win.10)).
-
-
-
-
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/use-the-enterprise-mode-portal.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/use-the-enterprise-mode-portal.md
index c26e39ddcc..fe55abfdc6 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/use-the-enterprise-mode-portal.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/use-the-enterprise-mode-portal.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ author: dansimp
# Use the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/use-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/use-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
index 58ffc300ce..cbfcfecf93 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/use-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/use-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
@@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ ms.date: 12/04/2017
# Use the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
@@ -26,7 +29,7 @@ ms.date: 12/04/2017
- Windows Server 2012 R2
- Windows Server 2008 R2 with Service Pack 1 (SP1)
-Enterprise Mode is a compatibility mode that runs on Internet Explorer 11, letting websites render using a modified browser configuration that’s designed to emulate either Windows Internet Explorer 8 or Windows Internet Explorer 7, avoiding the common compatibility problems associated with web apps written and tested on older versions of Internet Explorer.
+Enterprise Mode is a compatibility mode that runs on Internet Explorer 11, letting websites render using a modified browser configuration that's designed to emulate either Windows Internet Explorer 8 or Windows Internet Explorer 7, avoiding the common compatibility problems associated with web apps written and tested on older versions of Internet Explorer.
You can use IE11 and the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager to add individual website domains and domain paths and to specify whether the site renders using Enterprise Mode or the default mode.
@@ -49,12 +52,14 @@ The following topics give you more information about the things that you can do
|[Add multiple sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using a file and the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1)](add-multiple-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-1-schema-and-enterprise-mode-tool.md) |How to add several websites to your site list at the same time, using a text or XML file and the WEnterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1). |
|[Edit the Enterprise Mode site list using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](edit-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md) |How to edit the compatibility mode for specific websites.
This topic applies to both versions of the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager. |
|[Fix validation problems using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](fix-validation-problems-using-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md) |How to fix common site list validation errors.
This topic applies to both versions of the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager. |
+|[Review neutral sites for Internet Explorer mode using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](review-neutral-sites-with-site-list-manager.md) |How to flag sites listed as neutral, to ensure that they are intentional and not a result of schema conversion. This topic applies to the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager version 11.0 or later. |
|[Search your Enterprise Mode site list in the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](search-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md) |How to look to see if a site is already in your global Enterprise Mode site list.
This topic applies to both versions of the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager. |
|[Save your site list to XML in the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](save-your-site-list-to-xml-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md) |How to save a site list as XML, so you can deploy and use it with your managed systems.
This topic applies to both versions of the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager. |
|[Export your Enterprise Mode site list from the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](export-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-from-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md) |How to export your site list so you can transfer your data and contents to someone else.
This topic applies to both versions of the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager. |
|[Import your Enterprise Mode site list to the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](import-into-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md) |How to import your site list to replace a corrupted or out-of-date list.
This topic applies to both versions of the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager. |
|[Delete sites from your Enterprise Mode site list in the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](delete-sites-from-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md) |How to delete a website from your site list.
This topic applies to both versions of the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager. |
|[Remove all sites from your Enterprise Mode site list in the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](remove-all-sites-from-your-enterprise-mode-site-list-in-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md) |How to delete all of the websites in a site list.
This topic applies to both versions of the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager. |
+| [Review neutral sites for Internet Explorer mode using the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](review-neutral-sites-with-site-list-manager.md)|How to flag sites listed as neutral, to ensure that they are intentional and not a result of schema conversion.
This topic applies to the latest version of the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager.
## Related topics
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/user-interface-problems-with-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/user-interface-problems-with-ie11.md
index 3a1f3b4596..b7669cf1ca 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/user-interface-problems-with-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/user-interface-problems-with-ie11.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# User interface problems with Internet Explorer 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Some of the features in both Internet Explorer 11 and IEAK 11 have moved around. Here are some of the more common changes.
## Where did features go in the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11?
@@ -46,14 +49,6 @@ For IE11, the UI has been changed to provide just the controls needed to support
## Where did the search box go?
IE11 uses the **One Box** feature, which lets users type search terms directly into the **Address bar**. Any text entered into the **Address bar** that doesn't appear to be a URL is automatically sent to the currently selected search provider.
->[!NOTE]
->Depending on how you've set up your intranet search, the text entry might resolve to an intranet site. For more information about this, see [Intranet problems with Internet Explorer 11](intranet-problems-and-ie11.md).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+> [!NOTE]
+> Depending on how you've set up your intranet search, the text entry might resolve to an intranet site. For more information about this, see [Intranet problems with Internet Explorer 11](intranet-problems-and-ie11.md).
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/using-enterprise-mode.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/using-enterprise-mode.md
index 6bff79cc82..677f1c974a 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/using-enterprise-mode.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/using-enterprise-mode.md
@@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Using IE7 Enterprise Mode or IE8 Enterprise Mode
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/using-ieak11-to-create-install-packages.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/using-ieak11-to-create-install-packages.md
index 710c69e3cb..7015595563 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/using-ieak11-to-create-install-packages.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/using-ieak11-to-create-install-packages.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Using Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) to create packages
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) helps you set up, deploy, and maintain Internet Explorer 11.
**Note** IEAK 11 works in network environments, with or without Microsoft Active Directory.
@@ -30,7 +33,7 @@ Before you begin, you should:
- **Check the operating system requirements.** Check that the requirements for the computer you're building your installation package from, and the computers you're installing IE11 to, all meet the system requirements for IEAK 11 and IE11. For Internet Explorer requirements, see [System requirements and language support for Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)](system-requirements-and-language-support-for-ie11.md). For IEAK 11 requirements, see [Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) - Administration Guide for IT Pros](../ie11-ieak/index.md).
-- **Decide on your distribution method.** Decide how to distribute your custom installation package: Windows Update, System Center System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager, or your network.
+- **Decide on your distribution method.** Decide how to distribute your custom installation package: Windows Update, Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager, or your network.
- **Gather URLs and branding and custom graphics.** Collect the URLs for your company's own **Home**, **Search**, and **Support** pages, plus any custom branding and graphic files for the browser toolbar button and the **Favorites** list icons.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/using-inf-files-to-create-install-packages.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/using-inf-files-to-create-install-packages.md
index 1f7b62dfa5..0f65a6f4ac 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/using-inf-files-to-create-install-packages.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/using-inf-files-to-create-install-packages.md
@@ -16,7 +16,10 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Using Setup Information (.inf) files to create install packages
-IEAK 11 uses Setup information (.inf) files to provide uninstallation instructions. Uninstallation instructions let your employees remove components, like files, registry entries, or shortcuts, through the **Uninstall or change a program** box. For details about .inf files, see [INF File Sections and Directives](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=327959).
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+IEAK 11 uses Setup information (.inf) files to provide uninstallation instructions. Uninstallation instructions let your employees remove components, like files, registry entries, or shortcuts, through the **Uninstall or change a program** box. For details about .inf files, see [INF File Sections and Directives](/windows-hardware/drivers/install/).
**To add uninstallation instructions to the .inf files**
@@ -34,13 +37,9 @@ IEAK 11 uses Setup information (.inf) files to provide uninstallation instructi
- You can't delete directories.
-- You can't use **RenFiles** to move a file to a different location, it only lets you rename a file in its existing location. For detailed information, see [INF RenFiles Directive](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=298508).
+- You can't use **RenFiles** to move a file to a different location, it only lets you rename a file in its existing location. For detailed information, see [INF RenFiles Directive](/windows-hardware/drivers/install/inf-renfiles-directive).
-- You can't use **CopyFiles** to copy a file to another place on your hard drive, it can only copy files from the source disk to the destination directory. For information, see [INF CopyFiles Directive](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=298510).
+- You can't use **CopyFiles** to copy a file to another place on your hard drive, it can only copy files from the source disk to the destination directory. For information, see [INF CopyFiles Directive](/windows-hardware/drivers/install/inf-copyfiles-directive).
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/verify-changes-preprod-enterprise-mode-portal.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/verify-changes-preprod-enterprise-mode-portal.md
index 8a161b2ffb..a31c831abd 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/verify-changes-preprod-enterprise-mode-portal.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/verify-changes-preprod-enterprise-mode-portal.md
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ ms.prod: ie11
title: Verify your changes using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
ms.sitesec: library
ms.date: 07/27/2017
-ms.reviewer:
+ms.reviewer:
audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
ms.author: dansimp
@@ -16,20 +16,23 @@ ms.author: dansimp
# Verify your changes using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
-- Windows 10
-- Windows 8.1
-- Windows 7
-- Windows Server 2012 R2
-- Windows Server 2008 R2 with Service Pack 1 (SP1)
+- Windows 10
+- Windows 8.1
+- Windows 7
+- Windows Server 2012 R2
+- Windows Server 2008 R2 with Service Pack 1 (SP1)
->[!Important]
->This step requires that each Requester have access to a test machine with Administrator rights, letting him or her get to the pre-production environment to make sure that the requested change is correct.
+> [!Important]
+> This step requires that each Requester have access to a test machine with Administrator rights, letting him or her get to the pre-production environment to make sure that the requested change is correct.
The Requester successfully submits a change request to the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal and then gets an email, including:
-- **EMIE_RegKey**. A batch file that when run, sets the registry key to point to the local pre-production Enterprise Mode Site List.
+- **EMIE_RegKey**. A batch file that when run, sets the registry key to point to the local pre-production Enterprise Mode Site List.
- **Test steps**. The suggested steps about how to test the change request details to make sure they're accurate in the pre-production environment.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/verify-changes-production-enterprise-mode-portal.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/verify-changes-production-enterprise-mode-portal.md
index 42db6c85c5..1ccd3e4d0c 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/verify-changes-production-enterprise-mode-portal.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/verify-changes-production-enterprise-mode-portal.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.author: dansimp
# Verify the change request update in the production environment using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/view-apps-enterprise-mode-site-list.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/view-apps-enterprise-mode-site-list.md
index 2be252275c..9aa736bacb 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/view-apps-enterprise-mode-site-list.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/view-apps-enterprise-mode-site-list.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.author: dansimp
# View the apps included in the active Enterprise Mode Site List from the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/view-enterprise-mode-reports-for-portal.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/view-enterprise-mode-reports-for-portal.md
index 20ad5ac557..f2db72080d 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/view-enterprise-mode-reports-for-portal.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/view-enterprise-mode-reports-for-portal.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.author: dansimp
# View the available Enterprise Mode reports from the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/virtualization-and-compatibility-with-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/virtualization-and-compatibility-with-ie11.md
index e5de6fffdd..a216f90395 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/virtualization-and-compatibility-with-ie11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/virtualization-and-compatibility-with-ie11.md
@@ -17,21 +17,21 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Virtualization and compatibility with Internet Explorer 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
If your company is considering upgrading to the latest version of Internet Explorer, but is hesitant because of a large number of web apps that need to be tested and moved, we recommend that you consider virtualization. Virtualization lets you set up a virtual environment where you can run earlier versions of IE.
**Important**
-We strongly suggest that while you're using virtualization, you also update your web apps so they run natively in the newer version of IE. For more information about how to update your code, see the [Internet Explorer 11 Compatibility Cookbook (Windows)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=279707) to learn about the developer features that have been changed or deprecated since Internet Explorer 10.
+We strongly suggest that while you're using virtualization, you also update your web apps so they run natively in the newer version of IE. For more information about how to update your code, see the [Internet Explorer 11 Compatibility Cookbook (Windows)](/previous-versions//dn384049(v=vs.85)) to learn about the developer features that have been changed or deprecated since Internet Explorer 10.
The Microsoft-supported options for virtualizing web apps are:
- **Microsoft Enterprise Desktop Virtualization (MED-V).** Uses Microsoft Virtual PC to provide an enterprise solution for desktop virtualization. With MED-V, you can easily create, deliver, and manage corporate Virtual PC images on any Windows®-based desktop. For more information, see [MED-V](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=271653).
-- **Client Hyper-V.** Uses the same virtualization technology previously available in Windows Server, but now installed for Windows 8.1. For more information, see [Client Hyper-V](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=271654).
+- **Client Hyper-V.** Uses the same virtualization technology previously available in Windows Server, but now installed for Windows 8.1. For more information, see [Client Hyper-V](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-8.1-and-8/hh857623(v=ws.11)).
For more information about virtualization options, see [Microsoft Desktop Virtualization](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=271662).
-
-
-
-
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/what-is-enterprise-mode.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/what-is-enterprise-mode.md
index da309b68cd..5ea3970866 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/what-is-enterprise-mode.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/what-is-enterprise-mode.md
@@ -18,13 +18,16 @@ ms.date: 10/25/2018
# Enterprise Mode and the Enterprise Mode Site List
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
-- Windows 10
-- Windows 8.1
-- Windows 7
-- Windows Server 2012 R2
-- Windows Server 2008 R2 with Service Pack 1 (SP1)
+- Windows 10
+- Windows 8.1
+- Windows 7
+- Windows Server 2012 R2
+- Windows Server 2008 R2 with Service Pack 1 (SP1)
Internet Explorer and Microsoft Edge can work together to support your legacy web apps, while still defaulting to the higher bar for security and modern experiences enabled by Microsoft Edge. Working with multiple browsers can be difficult, particularly if you have a substantial number of internal sites. To help manage this dual-browser experience, we are introducing a new web tool specifically targeted towards larger organizations: the [Enterprise Mode Site List Portal](https://github.com/MicrosoftEdge/enterprise-mode-site-list-portal).
@@ -33,7 +36,7 @@ If you have specific websites and apps that you know have compatibility problems
Using Enterprise Mode means that you can continue to use Microsoft Edge as your default browser, while also ensuring that your apps continue working on IE11.
->[!TIP]
+> [!TIP]
> If you are running an earlier version of Internet Explorer, we recommend upgrading to IE11, so that any legacy apps continue to work correctly.
For Windows 10 and Windows 10 Mobile, Microsoft Edge is the default browser experience. However, Microsoft Edge lets you continue to use IE11 for sites that are on your corporate intranet or included on your Enterprise Mode Site List.
@@ -54,20 +57,23 @@ Download the [Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.2)](https://go.microso
- **Centralized control.** You can specify the websites or web apps to interpret using Enterprise Mode, through an XML file on a website or stored locally. Domains and paths within those domains can be treated differently, allowing granular control. Use Group Policy to let users turn Enterprise Mode on or off from the Tools menu and to decide whether the Enterprise browser profile appears on the Emulation tab of the F12 developer tools.
- >[!Important]
- >All centrally-made decisions override any locally-made choices.
+ > [!Important]
+ > All centrally-made decisions override any locally-made choices.
- **Integrated browsing.** When Enterprise Mode is set up, users can browse the web normally, letting the browser change modes automatically to accommodate Enterprise Mode sites.
- **Data gathering.** You can configure Enterprise Mode to collect local override data, posting back to a named server. This lets you "crowd source" compatibility testing from key users; gathering their findings to add to your central site list.
-## Enterprise Mode and the Enterprise Mode Site List XML file
+## Enterprise Mode and the Enterprise Mode Site List
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+ XML file
The Enterprise Mode Site List is an XML document that specifies a list of sites, their compat mode, and their intended browser. Using [Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.2)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=716853), you can automatically start a webpage using a specific browser. In the case of IE11, the webpage can also be launched in a specific compat mode, so it always renders correctly. Your employees can easily view this site list by typing _about:compat_ in either Microsoft Edge or IE11.
Starting with Windows 10, version 1511 (also known as the Anniversary Update), you can also [restrict IE11 to only the legacy web apps that need it](https://blogs.windows.com/msedgedev/2016/05/19/edge14-ie11-better-together/), automatically sending sites not included in the Enterprise Mode Site List to Microsoft Edge.
### Site list xml file
-This is a view of the [raw EMIE v2 schema.xml file](https://gist.github.com/kypflug/9e9961de771d2fcbd86b#file-emie-v2-schema-xml). There are equivalent Enterprise Mode Site List policies for both [Microsoft Edge](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-edge/deploy/emie-to-improve-compatibility) and [Internet Explorer 11](turn-on-enterprise-mode-and-use-a-site-list.md). The Microsoft Edge list is used to determine which sites should open in IE11; while the IE11 list is used to determine the compat mode for a site, and which sites should open in Microsoft Edge. We recommend using one list for both browsers, where each policy points to the same XML file location.
+This is a view of the [raw EMIE v2 schema.xml file](https://gist.github.com/kypflug/9e9961de771d2fcbd86b#file-emie-v2-schema-xml). There are equivalent Enterprise Mode Site List policies for both [Microsoft Edge](/microsoft-edge/deploy/emie-to-improve-compatibility) and [Internet Explorer 11](turn-on-enterprise-mode-and-use-a-site-list.md). The Microsoft Edge list is used to determine which sites should open in IE11; while the IE11 list is used to determine the compat mode for a site, and which sites should open in Microsoft Edge. We recommend using one list for both browsers, where each policy points to the same XML file location.
```xml
@@ -121,11 +127,11 @@ There are 2 versions of this tool, both supported on Windows 7, Windows 8.1, and
- [Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.1)](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=42501). This is an older version of the schema that you must use if you want to create and update your Enterprise Mode Site List for devices running the v.1 version of the schema.
- We strongly recommend moving to the new schema, v.2. For more info, see [Enterprise Mode schema v.2 guidance](enterprise-mode-schema-version-2-guidance.md).
+ We strongly recommend moving to the new schema, v.2. For more info, see [Enterprise Mode schema v.2 guidance](enterprise-mode-schema-version-2-guidance.md).
- [Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.2)](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=49974). The updated version of the schema, including new functionality. You can use this version of the schema to create and update your Enterprise Mode Site List for devices running the v.2 version of the schema.
- If you open a v.1 version of your Enterprise Mode Site List using this version, it will update the schema to v.2, automatically. For more info, see [Enterprise Mode schema v.1 guidance](enterprise-mode-schema-version-1-guidance.md).
+ If you open a v.1 version of your Enterprise Mode Site List using this version, it will update the schema to v.2, automatically. For more info, see [Enterprise Mode schema v.1 guidance](enterprise-mode-schema-version-1-guidance.md).
If your list is too large to add individual sites, or if you have more than one person managing the site list, we recommend using the Enterprise Site List Portal.
@@ -166,4 +172,4 @@ Because the tool is open-source, the source code is readily available for examin
- [Microsoft Services Support](https://www.microsoft.com/microsoftservices/support.aspx)
-- [Find a Microsoft partner on Pinpoint](https://partnercenter.microsoft.com/pcv/search)
+- [Find a Microsoft partner on Pinpoint](https://partnercenter.microsoft.com/pcv/search)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/what-is-the-internet-explorer-11-blocker-toolkit.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/what-is-the-internet-explorer-11-blocker-toolkit.md
index 98f659748d..3ec3c7c763 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/what-is-the-internet-explorer-11-blocker-toolkit.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/what-is-the-internet-explorer-11-blocker-toolkit.md
@@ -19,6 +19,9 @@ ms.date: 05/10/2018
# What is the Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit?
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
@@ -29,8 +32,8 @@ ms.date: 05/10/2018
The Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit lets you turn off the automatic delivery of IE11 through the **Automatic Updates** feature of Windows Update.
->[!IMPORTANT]
->The IE11 Blocker Toolkit does not stop users from manually installing IE11 from the [Microsoft Download Center](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?linkid=327753). Also, even if you have installed previous versions of the toolkit before, like for Internet Explorer 10, you still need to install this version to prevent the installation of IE11.
+> [!IMPORTANT]
+> The IE11 Blocker Toolkit does not stop users from manually installing IE11 from the [Microsoft Download Center](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?linkid=327753). Also, even if you have installed previous versions of the toolkit before, like for Internet Explorer 10, you still need to install this version to prevent the installation of IE11.
## Install the toolkit
@@ -47,7 +50,7 @@ Wait for the message, **Blocking deployment of IE11 on the local machine. The op
6. Close the Command Prompt.
-For answers to frequently asked questions, see [Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit: Frequently Asked Questions](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=314063).
+For answers to frequently asked questions, see [Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit: Frequently Asked Questions](../ie11-faq/faq-ie11-blocker-toolkit.yml).
## Automatic updates
Internet Explorer 11 makes browsing the web faster, easier, safer, and more reliable than ever. To help customers become more secure and up-to-date, Microsoft will distribute Internet Explorer 11 through Automatic Updates and the Windows Update and Microsoft Update sites. Internet Explorer 11 will be available for users of the 32-bit and 64-bit versions of Windows 7 Service Pack 1 (SP1), and 64-bit version of Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1. This article provides an overview of the delivery process and options available for IT administrators to control how and when Internet Explorer 11 is deployed to their organization through Automatic Updates.
@@ -69,13 +72,13 @@ If you use Automatic Updates in your company, but want to stop your users from a
- **Download and use the Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit.** Includes a Group Policy template and a script that permanently blocks Internet Explorer 11 from being offered by Windows Update or Microsoft Update as a high-priority update. You can download this kit from the [Microsoft Download Center](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=40722).
- >[!NOTE]
- >The toolkit won't stop users with local administrator accounts from manually installing Internet Explorer 11. Using this toolkit also prevents your users from receiving automatic upgrades from Internet Explorer 8, Internet Explorer 9, or Internet Explorer 10 to Internet Explorer 11. For more information, see the [Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit frequently asked questions](https://docs.microsoft.com/internet-explorer/ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11).
+ > [!NOTE]
+ >The toolkit won't stop users with local administrator accounts from manually installing Internet Explorer 11. Using this toolkit also prevents your users from receiving automatic upgrades from Internet Explorer 8, Internet Explorer 9, or Internet Explorer 10 to Internet Explorer 11. For more information, see the [Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit frequently asked questions](../ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11.yml).
-- **Use an update management solution to control update deployment.** If you already use an update management solution, like [Windows Server Update Services (WSUS)](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows-server/administration/windows-server-update-services/get-started/windows-server-update-services-wsus) or the more advanced [System Center 2012 Configuration Manager](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=276664), you should use that instead of the Internet Explorer Blocker Toolkit.
+- **Use an update management solution to control update deployment.** If you already use an update management solution, like [Windows Server Update Services (WSUS)](/windows-server/administration/windows-server-update-services/get-started/windows-server-update-services-wsus) or the more advanced [System Center 2012 Configuration Manager](/previous-versions/system-center/system-center-2012-R2/gg682129(v=technet.10)), you should use that instead of the Internet Explorer Blocker Toolkit.
->[!NOTE]
->If you use WSUS to manage updates, and Update Rollups are configured for automatic installation, Internet Explorer will automatically install throughout your company.
+> [!NOTE]
+> If you use WSUS to manage updates, and Update Rollups are configured for automatic installation, Internet Explorer will automatically install throughout your company.
### Prevent automatic installation of Internet Explorer 11 with WSUS
@@ -90,13 +93,13 @@ Internet Explorer 11 will be released to WSUS as an Update Rollup package. There
4. Click the rule that automatically approves an update that is classified as Update Rollup, and then click **Edit.**
- >[!NOTE]
- >If you don’t see a rule like this, you most likely haven’t configured WSUS to automatically approve Update Rollups for installation. In this situation, you don’t have to do anything else.
+ > [!NOTE]
+ > If you don’t see a rule like this, you most likely haven’t configured WSUS to automatically approve Update Rollups for installation. In this situation, you don’t have to do anything else.
5. Click the **Update Rollups** property under the **Step 2: Edit the properties (click an underlined value)** section.
- >[!NOTE]
- >The properties for this rule will resemble the following:
When an update is in Update Rollups
Approve the update for all computers
+ > [!NOTE]
+ > The properties for this rule will resemble the following:
When an update is in Update Rollups
Approve the update for all computers
6. Clear the **Update Rollup** check box, and then click **OK**.
@@ -116,8 +119,8 @@ After the new Internet Explorer 11 package is available for download, you should
6. Check to make sure that Microsoft Internet Explorer 11 is listed as an unapproved update.
->[!NOTE]
->There may be multiple updates, depending on the imported language and operating system updates.
+> [!NOTE]
+> There may be multiple updates, depending on the imported language and operating system updates.
### Optional - Reset update rollups packages to auto-approve
@@ -135,8 +138,8 @@ After the new Internet Explorer 11 package is available for download, you should
7. Click **OK** to close the **Automatic Approvals** dialog box.
->[!NOTE]
->Because auto-approval rules are only evaluated when an update is first imported into WSUS, turning this rule back on after the Internet Explorer 11 update has been imported and synchronized to the server won’t cause this update to be auto-approved.
+> [!NOTE]
+> Because auto-approval rules are only evaluated when an update is first imported into WSUS, turning this rule back on after the Internet Explorer 11 update has been imported and synchronized to the server won’t cause this update to be auto-approved.
@@ -144,10 +147,10 @@ After the new Internet Explorer 11 package is available for download, you should
- [Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit download](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=40722)
-- [Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit - Frequently Asked Questions](../ie11-faq/faq-ie11-blocker-toolkit.md)
+- [Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit - Frequently Asked Questions](../ie11-faq/faq-ie11-blocker-toolkit.yml)
-- [Internet Explorer 11 FAQ for IT pros](https://docs.microsoft.com/internet-explorer/ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11)
+- [Internet Explorer 11 FAQ for IT pros](../ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11.yml)
- [Internet Explorer 11 delivery through automatic updates](ie11-delivery-through-automatic-updates.md)
-- [Internet Explorer 11 deployment guide](https://docs.microsoft.com/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/index)
+- [Internet Explorer 11 deployment guide](./index.md)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/workflow-processes-enterprise-mode-portal.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/workflow-processes-enterprise-mode-portal.md
index de71b3a8ff..dd8e3bcce6 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/workflow-processes-enterprise-mode-portal.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/workflow-processes-enterprise-mode-portal.md
@@ -17,6 +17,9 @@ ms.author: dansimp
# Workflow-based processes for employees using the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows 10
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8917b1de22..0000000000
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,204 +0,0 @@
----
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.mktglfcycl: explore
-description: Frequently asked questions about Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros
-author: dansimp
-ms.prod: ie11
-ms.assetid: 140e7d33-584a-44da-8c68-6c1d568e1de3
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-title: Internet Explorer 11 - FAQ for IT Pros (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.date: 10/16/2017
----
-
-
-# Internet Explorer 11 - FAQ for IT Pros
-Answering frequently asked questions about Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) features, operating system support, integration with the Windows operating system, Group Policy, and general configuration.
-
-## Frequently Asked Questions
-
-**Q: What operating system does IE11 run on?**
-
-- Windows 10
-
-- Windows 8.1
-
-- Windows Server 2012 R2
-
-- Windows 7 with Service Pack 1 (SP1)
-
-- Windows Server 2008 R2 with Service Pack 1 (SP1)
-
-
-**Q: How do I install IE11 on Windows 10, Windows 8.1, or Windows Server 2012 R2?**
-IE11 is preinstalled with Windows 8.1 and Windows Server 2012 R2. No additional action is required.
-
-**Q: How do I install IE11 on Windows 7 with SP1 or Windows Server 2008 R2 with SP1?**
-You can install IE11 on computers running either Windows 7 with SP1 or Windows Server 2008 R2 with SP1. To download IE11, see the IE11 [home page](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=290956).
-
-**Q: How does IE11 integrate with Windows 8.1?**
-IE11 is the default handler for the HTTP and HTTPS protocols and the default browser for Windows 8.1. There are two experiences in Windows 8.1: Internet Explorer and Internet Explorer for the desktop. IE is the default browser for touch-first, immersive experiences. Internet Explorer for the desktop provides a more traditional window and tab management experience. The underlying platform of IE11 is fully interoperable across both IE and the familiar Internet Explorer for the desktop, letting developers write the same markup for both experiences.
-
-**Q: What are the new or improved security features?**
-IE11 offers improvements to Enhanced Protected Mode, password manager, and other security features. IE11 also turns on Transport Layer Security (TLS) 1.2 by default.
-
-**Q: How is Microsoft supporting modern web standards, such as WebGL?**
-Microsoft is committed to providing an interoperable web by supporting modern web standards. Doing this lets developers use the same markup across web browsers, helping to reduce development and support costs.
-Supported web standards include:
-
-- Web Graphics Library (WebGL)
-
-- Canvas 2D L2 extensions, including image smoothing using the nearest neighbor, dashed lines, and fill rules
-
-- Fullscreen API
-
-- Encrypted media extensions
-
-- Media source extensions
-
-- CSS flexible box layout module
-
-- And mutation observers like DOM4 and 5.3
-
-For more information about specific changes and additions, see the [IE11 guide for developers](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=313188).
-
-**Q: What test tools exist to test for potential application compatibility issues?**
-The Compat Inspector tool supports Windows Internet Explorer 9 through IE11. For more information, see [Compat Inspector User Guide](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=313189). In addition, you can use the new [F12 Developer Tools](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=313190) that are included with IE11, or the [modern.ie](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?linkid=308902) website for Microsoft Edge.
-
-**Q: Why am I having problems launching my legacy apps with Internet Explorer 11**?
-It’s most likely because IE no longer starts apps that use managed browser hosting controls, like in the .NET Framework 1.1 and 2.0. You can get IE11 to use managed browser hosting controls again, by:
-
-- **For x86 systems or for 32-bit processes on x64 systems:** Go to the `HKLM\SOFTWARE\MICROSOFT\.NETFramework` registry key and change the **EnableIEHosting** value to **1**.
-
-- **For x64 systems or for 64-bit processes on x64 systems:** Go to the `HKLM\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\.NETFramework` registry key and change the **EnableIEHosting** value to **1**.
-
-For more information, see the [Web Applications](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=308903) section of the Application Compatibility in the .NET Framework 4.5 page.
-
-**Q: Is there a compatibility list for IE?**
-Yes. You can review the XML-based [compatibility version list](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=403864).
-
-**Q: What is Enterprise Mode?**
-Enterprise Mode is a compatibility mode designed for Enterprises. This mode lets websites render using a modified browser configuration that’s designed to avoid the common compatibility problems associated with web apps written and tested on older versions of IE, like Windows Internet Explorer 7 or Windows Internet Explorer 8.
-For more information, see [Turn on Enterprise Mode and use a site list](../ie11-deploy-guide/turn-on-enterprise-mode-and-use-a-site-list.md).
-
-**Q: What is the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager tool?**
-Enterprise Mode Site List Manager tool gives you a way to add websites to your Enterprise Mode site list, without having to manually code XML.
-For more information, see all of the topics in [Use the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](../ie11-deploy-guide/use-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md).
-
-**Q: Are browser plug-ins supported in IE11?**
-The immersive version of IE11 provides an add-on–free experience, so browser plugins won't load and dependent content won't be displayed. This doesn't apply to Internet Explorer for the desktop. For more information, see [Browsing Without Plug-ins](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=242587). However, Internet Explorer for the desktop and IE11 on Windows 7 with SP1 do support browser plugins, including ActiveX controls such as Adobe Flash and Microsoft Silverlight.
-
-**Q: Is Adobe Flash supported on IE11?**
-Adobe Flash is included as a platform feature and is available out of the box for Windows 8.1, running on both IE and Internet Explorer for the desktop. Users can turn this feature on or off using the **Manage Add-ons** dialog box, while administrators can turn this feature on or off using the Group Policy setting, **Turn off Adobe Flash in IE and prevent applications from using IE technology to instantiate Flash objects**.
-**Important**
-The preinstalled version of Adobe Flash isn't supported on IE11 running on either Windows 7 with SP1 or Windows Server 2008 R2 with SP1. However, you can still download and install the separate Adobe Flash plug-in.
-
-**Q: Can I replace IE11 on Windows 8.1 with an earlier version?**
-No. Windows 8.1 doesn't support any of the previous versions of IE.
-
-**Q: Are there any new Group Policy settings in IE11?**
-IE11 includes all of the previous Group Policy settings you've used to manage and control web browser configuration since Internet Explorer 9. It also includes the following new Group Policy settings, supporting new features:
-
-- Turn off Page Prediction
-
-- Turn on the swiping motion for Internet Explorer for the desktop
-
-- Allow Microsoft services to provide more relevant and personalized search results
-
-- Turn off phone number detection
-
-- Allow IE to use the SPDY/3 network protocol
-
-- Let users turn on and use Enterprise Mode from the **Tools** menu
-
-- Use the Enterprise Mode IE website list
-
-For more information, see [New group policy settings for IE11](../ie11-deploy-guide/new-group-policy-settings-for-ie11.md).
-
-
-**Q: Where can I get more information about IE11 for IT pros?**
-Visit the [Springboard Series for Microsoft Browsers](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=313191) webpage on TechNet.
-
-
-
-**Q: Can I customize settings for IE on Windows 8.1?**
-Settings can be customized in the following ways:
-
-- IE11 **Settings** charm.
-
-- IE11-related Group Policy settings.
-
-- IEAK 11 for settings shared by both IE and Internet Explorer for the desktop.
-
-**Q: Can I make Internet Explorer for the desktop my default browsing experience?**
-Group Policy settings can be set to open either IE or Internet Explorer for the desktop as the default browser experience. Individual users can configure their own settings in the **Programs** tab of **Internet Options**. The following table shows the settings and results:
-
-|Setting |Result |
-|--------|-------|
-|Let IE decide |Links open in the same type of experience from where they're launched. For example, clicking a link from a Microsoft Store app, opens IE. However, clicking a link from a desktop app, opens Internet Explorer for the desktop. |
-|Always in IE11 |Links always open in IE. |
-|Always in Internet Explorer for the desktop |Links always open in Internet Explorer for the desktop. |
-
-
-**Q. Can IEAK 11 build custom Internet Explorer 11 packages in languages other than the language of the in-use IEAK 11 version?**
-Yes. You can use IEAK 11 to build custom Internet Explorer 11 packages in any of the supported 24 languages. You'll select the language for the custom package on the Language Selection page of the customization wizard.
-
-IEAK 11 is available in 24 languages but can build customized Internet Explorer 11 packages in all languages of the supported operating systems. Select a language below and download IEAK 11 from the download center:
-
-| | | |
-|---------|---------|---------|
-|[English](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/en-us/ieak.msi) |[French](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/fr-fr/ieak.msi) |[Norwegian (Bokmål)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/nb-no/ieak.msi) |
-|[Arabic](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/ar-sa/ieak.msi) |[Chinese (Simplified)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/zh-cn/ieak.msi) |[Chinese(Traditional)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/zh-tw/ieak.msi) |
-|[Czech](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/cs-cz/ieak.msi) |[Danish](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/da-dk/ieak.msi) |[Dutch](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/nl-nl/ieak.msi) |
-|[Finnish](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/fi-fi/ieak.msi) |[German](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/de-de/ieak.msi) |[Greek](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/el-gr/ieak.msi) |
-|[Hebrew](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/he-il/ieak.msi) |[Hungarian](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/hu-hu/ieak.msi) |[Italian](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/it-it/ieak.msi) |
-|[Japanese](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/ja-jp/ieak.msi) |[Korean](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/ko-kr/ieak.msi) |[Polish](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/pl-pl/ieak.msi) |
-|[Portuguese (Brazil)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/pt-br/ieak.msi) |[Portuguese (Portugal)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/pt-pt/ieak.msi) |[Russian](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/ru-ru/ieak.msi) |
-|[Spanish](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/es-es/ieak.msi) |[Swedish](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/sv-se/ieak.msi) |[Turkish](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/tr-tr/ieak.msi) |
-
-
-
-
-**Q. What are the different modes available for the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard?**
-The IEAK Customization Wizard displays pages based on your licensing mode selection, either **Internal** or **External**. For more information on IEAK Customization Wizard modes, see [Determine the licensing version and features to use in IEAK 11](../ie11-ieak/licensing-version-and-features-ieak11.md).
-
-The following table displays which pages are available in IEAK 11, based on the licensing mode:
-
-| **Wizard Pages** | **External** | **Internal** |
-|-------------------------------------------|--------------|--------------|
-| Welcome to the IEAK | Yes | Yes |
-| File Locations | Yes | Yes |
-| Platform Selection | Yes | Yes |
-| Language Selection | Yes | Yes |
-| Package Type Selection | Yes | Yes |
-| Feature Selection | Yes | Yes |
-| Automatic Version Synchronization | Yes | Yes |
-| Custom Components | Yes | Yes |
-| Corporate Install | No | Yes |
-| User Experience | No | Yes |
-| Browser User Interface | Yes | Yes |
-| Search Providers | Yes | Yes |
-| Important URLs - Home page and Support | Yes | Yes |
-| Accelerators | Yes | Yes |
-| Favorites, Favorites Bar, and Feeds | Yes | Yes |
-| Browsing Options | No | Yes |
-| First Run Wizard and Welcome Page Options | Yes | Yes |
-| Compatibility View | Yes | Yes |
-| Connection Manager | Yes | Yes |
-| Connection Settings | Yes | Yes |
-| Automatic Configuration | No | Yes |
-| Proxy Settings | Yes | Yes |
-| Security and Privacy Settings | No | Yes |
-| Add a Root Certificate | Yes | No |
-| Programs | Yes | Yes |
-| Additional Settings | No | Yes |
-| Wizard Complete | Yes | Yes |
-
-
-## Related topics
-- [Microsoft Edge - Deployment Guide for IT Pros](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=760643)
-- [Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) - Deployment Guide for IT Pros](../ie11-deploy-guide/index.md)
-- [Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) - Administrator's Guide](../ie11-ieak/index.md)
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11.yml b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11.yml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b025aa3409
--- /dev/null
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11.yml
@@ -0,0 +1,253 @@
+### YamlMime:FAQ
+metadata:
+ ms.localizationpriority: medium
+ ms.mktglfcycl: explore
+ description: Frequently asked questions about Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros
+ author: dansimp
+ ms.prod: ie11
+ ms.assetid: 140e7d33-584a-44da-8c68-6c1d568e1de3
+ ms.reviewer:
+ audience: itpro
+ manager: dansimp
+ ms.author: dansimp
+ title: Internet Explorer 11 - FAQ for IT Pros (Internet Explorer 11 for IT Pros)
+ ms.sitesec: library
+ ms.date: 10/16/2017
+
+title: Internet Explorer 11 - FAQ for IT Pros
+summary: |
+ [!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+ Answering frequently asked questions about Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) features, operating system support, integration with the Windows operating system, Group Policy, and general configuration.
+
+
+sections:
+ - name: Ignored
+ questions:
+ - question: |
+ Frequently Asked Questions
+ answer: |
+ - question: |
+ What operating system does IE11 run on?
+ answer: |
+ - Windows 10
+
+ - Windows 8.1
+
+ - Windows Server 2012 R2
+
+ - Windows 7 with Service Pack 1 (SP1)
+
+ - Windows Server 2008 R2 with Service Pack 1 (SP1)
+
+
+ - question: |
+ How do I install IE11 on Windows 10, Windows 8.1, or Windows Server 2012 R2?
+ answer: |
+ IE11 is preinstalled with Windows 8.1 and Windows Server 2012 R2. No additional action is required.
+
+ - question: |
+ How do I install IE11 on Windows 7 with SP1 or Windows Server 2008 R2 with SP1?
+ answer: |
+ You can install IE11 on computers running either Windows 7 with SP1 or Windows Server 2008 R2 with SP1. To download IE11, see the IE11 [home page](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=290956).
+
+ - question: |
+ How does IE11 integrate with Windows 8.1?
+ answer: |
+ IE11 is the default handler for the HTTP and HTTPS protocols and the default browser for Windows 8.1. There are two experiences in Windows 8.1: Internet Explorer and Internet Explorer for the desktop. IE is the default browser for touch-first, immersive experiences. Internet Explorer for the desktop provides a more traditional window and tab management experience. The underlying platform of IE11 is fully interoperable across both IE and the familiar Internet Explorer for the desktop, letting developers write the same markup for both experiences.
+
+ - question: |
+ What are the new or improved security features?
+ answer: |
+ IE11 offers improvements to Enhanced Protected Mode, password manager, and other security features. IE11 also turns on Transport Layer Security (TLS) 1.2 by default.
+
+ - question: |
+ How is Microsoft supporting modern web standards, such as WebGL?
+ answer: |
+ Microsoft is committed to providing an interoperable web by supporting modern web standards. Doing this lets developers use the same markup across web browsers, helping to reduce development and support costs.
+ Supported web standards include:
+
+ - Web Graphics Library (WebGL)
+
+ - Canvas 2D L2 extensions, including image smoothing using the nearest neighbor, dashed lines, and fill rules
+
+ - Fullscreen API
+
+ - Encrypted media extensions
+
+ - Media source extensions
+
+ - CSS flexible box layout module
+
+ - And mutation observers like DOM4 and 5.3
+
+ For more information about specific changes and additions, see the [IE11 guide for developers](/previous-versions/windows/internet-explorer/ie-developer/dev-guides/bg182636(v=vs.85)).
+
+ - question: |
+ What test tools exist to test for potential application compatibility issues?
+ answer: |
+ The Compat Inspector tool supports Windows Internet Explorer 9 through IE11. For more information, see [Compat Inspector User Guide](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=313189). In addition, you can use the new [F12 Developer Tools](/previous-versions/windows/internet-explorer/ie-developer/dev-guides/bg182632(v=vs.85)) that are included with IE11, or the [modern.ie](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?linkid=308902) website for Microsoft Edge.
+
+ - question: |
+ Why am I having problems launching my legacy apps with Internet Explorer 11?
+ answer: |
+ It’s most likely because IE no longer starts apps that use managed browser hosting controls, like in the .NET Framework 1.1 and 2.0. You can get IE11 to use managed browser hosting controls again, by:
+
+ - **For x86 systems or for 32-bit processes on x64 systems:** Go to the `HKLM\SOFTWARE\MICROSOFT\.NETFramework` registry key and change the **EnableIEHosting** value to **1**.
+
+ - **For x64 systems or for 64-bit processes on x64 systems:** Go to the `HKLM\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\.NETFramework` registry key and change the **EnableIEHosting** value to **1**.
+
+ For more information, see the [Web Applications](/dotnet/framework/migration-guide/application-compatibility) section of the Application Compatibility in the .NET Framework 4.5 page.
+
+ - question: |
+ Is there a compatibility list for IE?
+ answer: |
+ Yes. You can review the XML-based [compatibility version list](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=403864).
+
+ - question: |
+ What is Enterprise Mode?
+ answer: |
+ Enterprise Mode is a compatibility mode designed for Enterprises. This mode lets websites render using a modified browser configuration that’s designed to avoid the common compatibility problems associated with web apps written and tested on older versions of IE, like Windows Internet Explorer 7 or Windows Internet Explorer 8.
+ For more information, see [Turn on Enterprise Mode and use a site list](../ie11-deploy-guide/turn-on-enterprise-mode-and-use-a-site-list.md).
+
+ - question: |
+ What is the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager tool?
+ answer: |
+ Enterprise Mode Site List Manager tool gives you a way to add websites to your Enterprise Mode site list, without having to manually code XML.
+ For more information, see all of the topics in [Use the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager](../ie11-deploy-guide/use-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md).
+
+ - question: |
+ Are browser plug-ins supported in IE11?
+ answer: |
+ The immersive version of IE11 provides an add-on–free experience, so browser plugins won't load and dependent content won't be displayed. This doesn't apply to Internet Explorer for the desktop. For more information, see [Browsing Without Plug-ins](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=242587). However, Internet Explorer for the desktop and IE11 on Windows 7 with SP1 do support browser plugins, including ActiveX controls such as Adobe Flash and Microsoft Silverlight.
+
+ - question: |
+ Is Adobe Flash supported on IE11?
+ answer: |
+ Adobe Flash is included as a platform feature and is available out of the box for Windows 8.1, running on both IE and Internet Explorer for the desktop. Users can turn this feature on or off using the **Manage Add-ons** dialog box, while administrators can turn this feature on or off using the Group Policy setting, **Turn off Adobe Flash in IE and prevent applications from using IE technology to instantiate Flash objects**.
+ **Important**
+ The preinstalled version of Adobe Flash isn't supported on IE11 running on either Windows 7 with SP1 or Windows Server 2008 R2 with SP1. However, you can still download and install the separate Adobe Flash plug-in.
+
+ - question: |
+ Can I replace IE11 on Windows 8.1 with an earlier version?
+ answer: |
+ No. Windows 8.1 doesn't support any of the previous versions of IE.
+
+ - question: |
+ Are there any new Group Policy settings in IE11?
+ answer: |
+ IE11 includes all of the previous Group Policy settings you've used to manage and control web browser configuration since Internet Explorer 9. It also includes the following new Group Policy settings, supporting new features:
+
+ - Turn off Page Prediction
+
+ - Turn on the swiping motion for Internet Explorer for the desktop
+
+ - Allow Microsoft services to provide more relevant and personalized search results
+
+ - Turn off phone number detection
+
+ - Allow IE to use the SPDY/3 network protocol
+
+ - Let users turn on and use Enterprise Mode from the **Tools** menu
+
+ - Use the Enterprise Mode IE website list
+
+ For more information, see [New group policy settings for IE11](../ie11-deploy-guide/new-group-policy-settings-for-ie11.md).
+
+
+ - question: |
+ Where can I get more information about IE11 for IT pros?
+ answer: |
+ Visit the [Springboard Series for Microsoft Browsers](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=313191) webpage on TechNet.
+
+
+
+ - question: |
+ Can I customize settings for IE on Windows 8.1?
+ answer: |
+ Settings can be customized in the following ways:
+
+ - IE11 **Settings** charm.
+
+ - IE11-related Group Policy settings.
+
+ - IEAK 11 for settings shared by both IE and Internet Explorer for the desktop.
+
+ - question: |
+ Can I make Internet Explorer for the desktop my default browsing experience?
+ answer: |
+ Group Policy settings can be set to open either IE or Internet Explorer for the desktop as the default browser experience. Individual users can configure their own settings in the **Programs** tab of **Internet Options**. The following table shows the settings and results:
+
+ |Setting |Result |
+ |--------|-------|
+ |Let IE decide |Links open in the same type of experience from where they're launched. For example, clicking a link from a Microsoft Store app, opens IE. However, clicking a link from a desktop app, opens Internet Explorer for the desktop. |
+ |Always in IE11 |Links always open in IE. |
+ |Always in Internet Explorer for the desktop |Links always open in Internet Explorer for the desktop. |
+
+
+ - question: |
+ Can IEAK 11 build custom Internet Explorer 11 packages in languages other than the language of the in-use IEAK 11 version?
+ answer: |
+ Yes. You can use IEAK 11 to build custom Internet Explorer 11 packages in any of the supported 24 languages. You'll select the language for the custom package on the Language Selection page of the customization wizard.
+
+ IEAK 11 is available in 24 languages but can build customized Internet Explorer 11 packages in all languages of the supported operating systems. Select a language below and download IEAK 11 from the download center:
+
+ | | | |
+ |---------|---------|---------|
+ |[English](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/en-us/ieak.msi) |[French](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/fr-fr/ieak.msi) |[Norwegian (Bokmål)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/nb-no/ieak.msi) |
+ |[Arabic](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/ar-sa/ieak.msi) |[Chinese (Simplified)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/zh-cn/ieak.msi) |[Chinese(Traditional)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/zh-tw/ieak.msi) |
+ |[Czech](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/cs-cz/ieak.msi) |[Danish](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/da-dk/ieak.msi) |[Dutch](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/nl-nl/ieak.msi) |
+ |[Finnish](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/fi-fi/ieak.msi) |[German](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/de-de/ieak.msi) |[Greek](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/el-gr/ieak.msi) |
+ |[Hebrew](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/he-il/ieak.msi) |[Hungarian](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/hu-hu/ieak.msi) |[Italian](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/it-it/ieak.msi) |
+ |[Japanese](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/ja-jp/ieak.msi) |[Korean](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/ko-kr/ieak.msi) |[Polish](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/pl-pl/ieak.msi) |
+ |[Portuguese (Brazil)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/pt-br/ieak.msi) |[Portuguese (Portugal)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/pt-pt/ieak.msi) |[Russian](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/ru-ru/ieak.msi) |
+ |[Spanish](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/es-es/ieak.msi) |[Swedish](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/sv-se/ieak.msi) |[Turkish](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/tr-tr/ieak.msi) |
+
+
+
+
+ - question: |
+ What are the different modes available for the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard?
+ answer: |
+ The IEAK Customization Wizard displays pages based on your licensing mode selection, either **Internal** or **External**. For more information on IEAK Customization Wizard modes, see [Determine the licensing version and features to use in IEAK 11](../ie11-ieak/licensing-version-and-features-ieak11.md).
+
+ The following table displays which pages are available in IEAK 11, based on the licensing mode:
+
+ | **Wizard Pages** | **External** | **Internal** |
+ |-------------------------------------------|--------------|--------------|
+ | Welcome to the IEAK | Yes | Yes |
+ | File Locations | Yes | Yes |
+ | Platform Selection | Yes | Yes |
+ | Language Selection | Yes | Yes |
+ | Package Type Selection | Yes | Yes |
+ | Feature Selection | Yes | Yes |
+ | Automatic Version Synchronization | Yes | Yes |
+ | Custom Components | Yes | Yes |
+ | Corporate Install | No | Yes |
+ | User Experience | No | Yes |
+ | Browser User Interface | Yes | Yes |
+ | Search Providers | Yes | Yes |
+ | Important URLs - Home page and Support | Yes | Yes |
+ | Accelerators | Yes | Yes |
+ | Favorites, Favorites Bar, and Feeds | Yes | Yes |
+ | Browsing Options | No | Yes |
+ | First Run Wizard and Welcome Page Options | Yes | Yes |
+ | Compatibility View | Yes | Yes |
+ | Connection Manager | Yes | Yes |
+ | Connection Settings | Yes | Yes |
+ | Automatic Configuration | No | Yes |
+ | Proxy Settings | Yes | Yes |
+ | Security and Privacy Settings | No | Yes |
+ | Add a Root Certificate | Yes | No |
+ | Programs | Yes | Yes |
+ | Additional Settings | No | Yes |
+ | Wizard Complete | Yes | Yes |
+
+
+additionalContent: |
+
+ ## Related topics
+
+ - [Microsoft Edge - Deployment Guide for IT Pros](/microsoft-edge/deploy/)
+ - [Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) - Deployment Guide for IT Pros](../ie11-deploy-guide/index.md)
+ - [Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) - Administrator's Guide](../ie11-ieak/index.md)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-faq/faq-ie11-blocker-toolkit.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-faq/faq-ie11-blocker-toolkit.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a4cb639bc5..0000000000
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-faq/faq-ie11-blocker-toolkit.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,121 +0,0 @@
----
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.mktglfcycl: explore
-description: Get answers to commonly asked questions about the Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit.
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.prod: ie11
-ms.assetid:
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-title: Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit - Frequently Asked Questions
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.date: 05/10/2018
----
-
-# Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit - Frequently Asked Questions
-
-Get answers to commonly asked questions about the Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit.
-
->[!Important]
->If you administer your company’s environment using an update management solution, such as Windows Server Update Services (WSUS) or System Center 2012 Configuration Manager, you don’t need to use the Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit. Update management solutions let you completely manage your Windows Updates and Microsoft Updates, including your Internet Explorer 11 deployment.
-
-- [Automatic updates delivery process](#automatic-updates-delivery-process)
-
-- [How the Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit works](#how-the-internet-explorer-11-blocker-toolkit-works)
-
-- [Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit and other update services](#internet-explorer-11-blocker-toolkit-and-other-update-services)
-
-## Automatic Updates delivery process
-
-
-**Q. Which users will receive Internet Explorer 11 as an important update?**
-A. Users running either Windows 7 with Service Pack 1 (SP1) or the 64-bit version of Windows Server 2008 R2 with Service Pack 1 (SP1) will receive Internet Explorer 11 as an important update, if Automatic Updates are turned on. Windows Update is manually run. Automatic Updates will automatically download and install the Internet Explorer 11 files if it’s turned on. For more information about how Internet Explorer works with Automatic Updates and information about other deployment blocking options, see [Internet Explorer 11 Delivery through automatic updates](../ie11-deploy-guide/ie11-delivery-through-automatic-updates.md).
-
-**Q. When is the Blocker Toolkit available?**
-A. The Blocker Toolkit is currently available from the [Microsoft Download Center](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=40722).
-
-**Q. What tools can I use to manage Windows Updates and Microsoft Updates in my company?**
-A. We encourage anyone who wants full control over their company’s deployment of Windows Updates and Microsoft Updates, to use [Windows Server Update Services (WSUS)](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows-server/administration/windows-server-update-services/get-started/windows-server-update-services-wsus), a free tool for users of Windows Server. You can also use the more advanced configuration management tool, [System Center 2012 Configuration Manager](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/gg682041.aspx).
-
-**Q. How long does the blocker mechanism work?**
-A. The Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit uses a registry key value to permanently turn off the automatic delivery of Internet Explorer 11. This behavior lasts as long as the registry key value isn’t removed or changed.
-
-**Q. Why should I use the Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit to stop delivery of Internet Explorer 11? Why can’t I just disable all of Automatic Updates?**
-A. Automatic Updates provide you with ongoing critical security and reliability updates. Turning this feature off can leave your computers more vulnerable. Instead, we suggest that you use an update management solution, such as WSUS, to fully control your environment while leaving this feature running, managing how and when the updates get to your user’s computers.
-
-The Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit safely allows Internet Explorer 11 to download and install in companies that can’t use WSUS, Configuration Manager, or
-other update management solution.
-
-**Q. Why don’t we just block URL access to Windows Update or Microsoft Update?**
-A. Blocking the Windows Update or Microsoft Update URLs also stops delivery of critical security and reliability updates for all of the supported versions of the Windows operating system; leaving your computers more vulnerable.
-
-## How the Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit works
-
-**Q. How should I test the Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit in my company?**
-A. Because the toolkit only sets a registry key to turn on and off the delivery of Internet Explorer 11, there should be no additional impact or side effects to your environment. No additional testing should be necessary.
-
-**Q. What’s the registry key used to block delivery of Internet Explorer 11?**
-A. HKLM\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\Internet Explorer\\Setup\\11.0
-
-**Q. What’s the registry key name and values?**
-The registry key name is **DoNotAllowIE11**, where:
-
-- A value of **1** turns off the automatic delivery of Internet Explorer 11 using Automatic Updates and turns off the Express install option.
-
-- Not providing a registry key, or using a value of anything other than **1**, lets the user install Internet Explorer 11 through Automatic Updates or a
- manual update.
-
-**Q. Does the Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit stop users from manually installing Internet Explorer 11?**
-A. No. The Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit only stops computers from automatically installing Internet Explorer 11 through Automatic Updates. Users can still download and install Internet Explorer 11 from the Microsoft Download Center or from external media.
-
-**Q. Does the Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit stop users from automatically upgrading to Internet Explorer 11?**
-A. Yes. The Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit also prevents Automatic Updates from automatically upgrading a computer from Internet Explorer 8, Internet Explorer 9, or Internet Explorer 10 to Internet Explorer 11.
-
-**Q. How does the provided script work?**
-A. The script accepts one of two command line options:
-
-- **Block:** Creates the registry key that stops Internet Explorer 11 from installing through Automatic Updates.
-
-- **Unblock:** Removes the registry key that stops Internet Explorer 11 from installing through Automatic Updates.
-
-**Q. What’s the ADM template file used for?**
-A. The Administrative Template (.adm file) lets you import the new Group Policy environment and use Group Policy Objects to centrally manage all of the computers in your company.
-
-**Q. Is the tool localized?**
-A. No. The tool isn’t localized, it’s only available in English (en-us). However, it does work, without any modifications, on any language edition of the supported operating systems.
-
-## Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit and other update services
-
-**Q: Is there a version of the Internet Explorer Blocker Toolkit that will prevent automatic installation of IE11?**
-Yes. The IE11 Blocker Toolkit is available for download. For more information, see [Toolkit to Disable Automatic Delivery of IE11](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=328195) on the Microsoft Download Center.
-
-**Q. Does the Internet Explorer 11 blocking mechanism also block delivery of Internet Explorer 11 through update management solutions, like WSUS?**
-A. No. You can still deploy Internet Explorer 11 using one of the upgrade management solutions, even if the blocking mechanism is activated. The Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit is only intended for companies that don’t use upgrade management solutions.
-
-**Q. If WSUS is set to 'auto-approve' Update Rollup packages (this is not the default configuration), how do I stop Internet Explorer 11 from automatically installing throughout my company?**
-A. You only need to change your settings if:
-
-- You use WSUS to manage updates and allow auto-approvals for Update Rollup installation.
-
- -and-
-
-- You have computers running either Windows 7 SP1 or Windows Server 2008 R2 (SP1) with Internet Explorer 8, Internet Explorer 9, or Internet Explorer 10 installed.
-
- -and-
-
-- You don’t want to upgrade your older versions of Internet Explorer to Internet Explorer 11 right now.
-
-If these scenarios apply to your company, see [Internet Explorer 11 delivery through automatic updates](../ie11-deploy-guide/ie11-delivery-through-automatic-updates.md) for more information on how to prevent automatic installation.
-
-
-## Additional resources
-
-- [Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit download](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=40722)
-
-- [Internet Explorer 11 FAQ for IT pros](https://docs.microsoft.com/internet-explorer/ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11)
-
-- [Internet Explorer 11 delivery through automatic updates](../ie11-deploy-guide/ie11-delivery-through-automatic-updates.md)
-
-- [Internet Explorer 11 deployment guide](https://docs.microsoft.com/internet-explorer/ie11-deploy-guide/index)
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-faq/faq-ie11-blocker-toolkit.yml b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-faq/faq-ie11-blocker-toolkit.yml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..217b48f990
--- /dev/null
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-faq/faq-ie11-blocker-toolkit.yml
@@ -0,0 +1,161 @@
+### YamlMime:FAQ
+metadata:
+ ms.localizationpriority: medium
+ ms.mktglfcycl: explore
+ description: Get answers to commonly asked questions about the Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit.
+ author: dansimp
+ ms.author: dansimp
+ ms.prod: ie11
+ ms.assetid:
+ ms.reviewer:
+ audience: itpro
+ manager: dansimp
+ title: Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit - Frequently Asked Questions
+ ms.sitesec: library
+ ms.date: 05/10/2018
+
+title: Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit - Frequently Asked Questions
+summary: |
+ [!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
+ Get answers to commonly asked questions about the Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit.
+
+ > [!Important]
+ > If you administer your company’s environment using an update management solution, such as Windows Server Update Services (WSUS) or System Center 2012 Configuration Manager, you don’t need to use the Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit. Update management solutions let you completely manage your Windows Updates and Microsoft Updates, including your Internet Explorer 11 deployment.
+
+ - [Automatic updates delivery process](/internet-explorer/ie11-faq/faq-ie11-blocker-toolkit#automatic-updates-delivery-process)
+
+ - [How the Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit works](/internet-explorer/ie11-faq/faq-ie11-blocker-toolkit#how-the-internet-explorer-11-blocker-toolkit-works)
+
+ - [Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit and other update services](/internet-explorer/ie11-faq/faq-ie11-blocker-toolkit#internet-explorer-11-blocker-toolkit-and-other-update-services)
+
+
+sections:
+ - name: Automatic Updates delivery process
+ questions:
+ - question: |
+ Which users will receive Internet Explorer 11 important update?
+ answer: |
+ Users running either Windows 7 with Service Pack 1 (SP1) or the 64-bit version of Windows Server 2008 R2 with Service Pack 1 (SP1) will receive Internet Explorer 11 important update, if Automatic Updates are turned on. Windows Update is manually run. Automatic Updates will automatically downloand install the Internet Explorer 11 files if it’s turned on. For more information about how Internet Explorer works with Automatic Updates and information about other deployment blocking options, see [Internet Explorer 11 Delivery through automatic updates](../ie11-deploy-guide/ie11-delivery-through-automatic-updates.md).
+
+ - question: |
+ When is the Blocker Toolkit available?
+ answer: |
+ The Blocker Toolkit is currently available from the [Microsoft DownloCenter](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=40722).
+
+ - question: |
+ Whtools cI use to manage Windows Updates and Microsoft Updates in my company?
+ answer: |
+ We encourage anyone who wants full control over their company’s deployment of Windows Updates and Microsoft Updates, to use [Windows Server Update Services (WSUS)](/windows-server/administration/windows-server-update-services/get-started/windows-server-update-services-wsus), a free tool for users of Windows Server. You calso use the more advanced configuration management tool, [System Center 2012 Configuration Manager](/previous-versions/system-center/system-center-2012-R2/gg682041(v=technet.10)).
+
+ - question: |
+ How long does the blocker mechanism work?
+ answer: |
+ The Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit uses a registry key value to permanently turn off the automatic delivery of Internet Explorer 11. This behavior lasts long the registry key value isn’t removed or changed.
+
+ - question: |
+ Why should I use the Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit to stop delivery of Internet Explorer 11? Why can’t I just disable all of Automatic Updates?
+ answer: |
+ Automatic Updates provide you with ongoing criticsecurity and reliability updates. Turning this feature off cleave your computers more vulnerable. Instead, we suggest thyou use update management solution, such WSUS, to fully control your environment while leaving this feature running, managing how and when the updates get to your user’s computers.
+
+ The Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit safely allows Internet Explorer 11 to downloand install in companies thcan’t use WSUS, Configuration Manager, or
+ other update management solution.
+
+ - question: |
+ Why don’t we just block URL access to Windows Update or Microsoft Update?
+ answer: |
+ Blocking the Windows Update or Microsoft Update URLs also stops delivery of criticsecurity and reliability updates for all of the supported versions of the Windows operating system; leaving your computers more vulnerable.
+
+ - name: How the Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit works
+ questions:
+ - question: |
+ How should I test the Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit in my company?
+ answer: |
+ Because the toolkit only sets a registry key to turn on and off the delivery of Internet Explorer 11, there should be no additionimpact or side effects to your environment. No additiontesting should be necessary.
+
+ - question: |
+ What’s the registry key used to block delivery of Internet Explorer 11?
+ answer: |
+ HKLM\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\Internet Explorer\\Setup\\11.0
+
+ - question: |
+ What’s the registry key name and values?
+ answer: |
+ The registry key name is **DoNotAllowIE11**, where:
+
+ - A value of **1** turns off the automatic delivery of Internet Explorer 11 using Automatic Updates and turns off the Express install option.
+
+ - Not providing a registry key, or using a value of anything other th**1**, lets the user install Internet Explorer 11 through Automatic Updates or a
+ manuupdate.
+
+ - question: |
+ Does the Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit stop users from manually installing Internet Explorer 11?
+ answer: |
+ No. The Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit only stops computers from automatically installing Internet Explorer 11 through Automatic Updates. Users cstill downloand install Internet Explorer 11 from the Microsoft DownloCenter or from externmedia.
+
+ - question: |
+ Does the Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit stop users from automatically upgrading to Internet Explorer 11?
+ answer: |
+ Yes. The Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit also prevents Automatic Updates from automatically upgrading a computer from Internet Explorer 8, Internet Explorer 9, or Internet Explorer 10 to Internet Explorer 11.
+
+ - question: |
+ How does the provided script work?
+ answer: |
+ The script accepts one of two command line options:
+
+ - **Block:** Creates the registry key thstops Internet Explorer 11 from installing through Automatic Updates.
+
+ - **Unblock:** Removes the registry key thstops Internet Explorer 11 from installing through Automatic Updates.
+
+ - question: |
+ What’s the ADM template file used for?
+ answer: |
+ The Administrative Template (.adm file) lets you import the new Group Policy environment and use Group Policy Objects to centrally manage all of the computers in your company.
+
+ - question: |
+ Is the tool localized?
+ answer: |
+ No. The tool isn’t localized, it’s only available in English (en-us). However, it does work, without any modifications, on any language edition of the supported operating systems.
+
+ - name: Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit and other update services
+ questions:
+ - question: |
+ Is there a version of the Internet Explorer Blocker Toolkit thwill prevent automatic installation of IE11?
+ answer: |
+ Yes. The IE11 Blocker Toolkit is available for download. For more information, see [Toolkit to Disable Automatic Delivery of IE11](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=328195) on the Microsoft DownloCenter.
+
+ - question: |
+ Does the Internet Explorer 11 blocking mechanism also block delivery of Internet Explorer 11 through update management solutions, like WSUS?
+ answer: |
+ No. You cstill deploy Internet Explorer 11 using one of the upgrade management solutions, even if the blocking mechanism is activated. The Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit is only intended for companies thdon’t use upgrade management solutions.
+
+ - question: |
+ If WSUS is set to 'auto-approve' Update Rollup packages (this is not the default configuration), how do I stop Internet Explorer 11 from automatically installing throughout my company?
+ answer: |
+ You only need to change your settings if:
+
+ - You use WSUS to manage updates and allow auto-approvals for Update Rollup installation.
+
+ -and-
+
+ - You have computers running either Windows 7 SP1 or Windows Server 2008 R2 (SP1) with Internet Explorer 8, Internet Explorer 9, or Internet Explorer 10 installed.
+
+ -and-
+
+ - You don’t want to upgrade your older versions of Internet Explorer to Internet Explorer 11 right now.
+
+ If these scenarios apply to your company, see [Internet Explorer 11 delivery through automatic updates](../ie11-deploy-guide/ie11-delivery-through-automatic-updates.md) for more information on how to prevent automatic installation.
+
+
+additionalContent: |
+
+ ## Additionresources
+
+ - [Internet Explorer 11 Blocker Toolkit download](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=40722)
+
+ - [Internet Explorer 11 Ffor IT pros](./faq-for-it-pros-ie11.yml)
+
+ - [Internet Explorer 11 delivery through automatic updates](../ie11-deploy-guide/ie11-delivery-through-automatic-updates.md)
+
+ - [Internet Explorer 11 deployment guide](../ie11-deploy-guide/index.md)
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-faq/faq-ieak11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-faq/faq-ieak11.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8064c74737..0000000000
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-faq/faq-ieak11.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,121 +0,0 @@
----
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.pagetype: security
-description: Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK) helps corporations, Internet service providers (ISPs), Internet content providers (ICPs), and independent software vendors (ISVs) to deploy and manage web-based solutions.
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.manager: elizapo
-ms.prod: ie11
-ms.assetid:
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
-manager: dansimp
-title: IEAK 11 - Frequently Asked Questions
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.date: 05/10/2018
----
-
-# IEAK 11 - Frequently Asked Questions
-
-Get answers to commonly asked questions about the Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11), and find links to additional material you might find helpful.
-
-**What is IEAK 11?**
-
-IEAK 11 enables you to customize, brand, and distribute customized Internet Explorer 11 browser packages across an organization. Download the kit from the [Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK) information and downloads](../ie11-ieak/ieak-information-and-downloads.md).
-
-**What are the supported operating systems?**
-
-You can customize and install IEAK 11 on the following supported operating systems:
-
-- Windows 8
-
-- Windows Server 2012
-
-- Windows 7 Service Pack 1 (SP1)
-
-- Windows Server 2008 R2 Service Pack 1 (SP1)
-
->[!Note]
->IEAK 11 does not support building custom packages for Windows RT.
-
-
-**What can I customize with IEAK 11?**
-
-The IEAK 11 enables you to customize branding and settings for Internet Explorer 11. For PCs running Windows 7, the custom package also includes the Internet Explorer executable.
-
->[!Note]
->Internet Explorer 11 is preinstalled on PCs running Windows 8. Therefore, the executable is not included in the customized package.
-
-**Can IEAK 11 build custom Internet Explorer 11 packages in languages other than the language of the in-use IEAK 11 version?**
-Yes. You can use IEAK 11 to build custom Internet Explorer 11 packages in any of the supported 24 languages. You'll select the language for the custom package on the Language Selection page of the customization wizard.
-
->[!Note]
->IEAK 11 is available in 24 languages but can build customized Internet Explorer 11 packages in all languages of the supported operating systems. To download IEAK 11, see [Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK) information and downloads](../ie11-ieak/ieak-information-and-downloads.md).
-
-**Q: Is there a version of the Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK) supporting IE11?**
-Yes. The Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) is available for download. IEAK 11 lets you create custom versions of IE11 for use in your organization. For more information, see the following resources:
-
-- [Internet Explorer Administration Kit Information and Downloads](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=214250) on the Internet Explorer TechCenter.
-
-- [Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) - Administrator's Guide](../ie11-ieak/index.md)
-
-**What are the different modes available for the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard?**
-The IEAK Customization Wizard displays pages based on your licensing mode selection, either **Internal** or **External**. For more information on IEAK Customization Wizard modes, see [What IEAK can do for you](../ie11-ieak/what-ieak-can-do-for-you.md).
-
-The following table displays which pages are available in IEAK 11, based on the licensing mode:
-
-| **Wizard Pages** | **External** | **Internal** |
-|-------------------------------------------|--------------|--------------|
-| Welcome to the IEAK | Yes | Yes |
-| File Locations | Yes | Yes |
-| Platform Selection | Yes | Yes |
-| Language Selection | Yes | Yes |
-| Package Type Selection | Yes | Yes |
-| Feature Selection | Yes | Yes |
-| Automatic Version Synchronization | Yes | Yes |
-| Custom Components | Yes | Yes |
-| Corporate Install | No | Yes |
-| User Experience | No | Yes |
-| Browser User Interface | Yes | Yes |
-| Search Providers | Yes | Yes |
-| Important URLs - Home page and Support | Yes | Yes |
-| Accelerators | Yes | Yes |
-| Favorites, Favorites Bar, and Feeds | Yes | Yes |
-| Browsing Options | No | Yes |
-| First Run Wizard and Welcome Page Options | Yes | Yes |
-| Compatibility View | Yes | Yes |
-| Connection Manager | Yes | Yes |
-| Connection Settings | Yes | Yes |
-| Automatic Configuration | No | Yes |
-| Proxy Settings | Yes | Yes |
-| Security and Privacy Settings | No | Yes |
-| Add a Root Certificate | Yes | No |
-| Programs | Yes | Yes |
-| Additional Settings | No | Yes |
-| Wizard Complete | Yes | Yes |
-
-
-**Q. Can IEAK 11 build custom Internet Explorer 11 packages in languages other than the language of the in-use IEAK 11 version?**
-Yes. You can use IEAK 11 to build custom Internet Explorer 11 packages in any of the supported 24 languages. You'll select the language for the custom package on the Language Selection page of the customization wizard.
-
-IEAK 11 is available in 24 languages but can build customized Internet Explorer 11 packages in all languages of the supported operating systems. Select a language below and download IEAK 11 from the download center:
-
-| | | |
-|---------|---------|---------|
-|[English](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/en-us/ieak.msi) |[French](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/fr-fr/ieak.msi) |[Norwegian (Bokmål)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/nb-no/ieak.msi) |
-|[Arabic](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/ar-sa/ieak.msi) |[Chinese (Simplified)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/zh-cn/ieak.msi) |[Chinese(Traditional)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/zh-tw/ieak.msi) |
-|[Czech](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/cs-cz/ieak.msi) |[Danish](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/da-dk/ieak.msi) |[Dutch](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/nl-nl/ieak.msi) |
-|[Finnish](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/fi-fi/ieak.msi) |[German](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/de-de/ieak.msi) |[Greek](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/el-gr/ieak.msi) |
-|[Hebrew](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/he-il/ieak.msi) |[Hungarian](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/hu-hu/ieak.msi) |[Italian](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/it-it/ieak.msi) |
-|[Japanese](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/ja-jp/ieak.msi) |[Korean](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/ko-kr/ieak.msi) |[Polish](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/pl-pl/ieak.msi) |
-|[Portuguese (Brazil)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/pt-br/ieak.msi) |[Portuguese (Portugal)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/pt-pt/ieak.msi) |[Russian](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/ru-ru/ieak.msi) |
-|[Spanish](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/es-es/ieak.msi) |[Swedish](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/sv-se/ieak.msi) |[Turkish](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/tr-tr/ieak.msi) |
-
-
-## Additional resources
-
-[Download IEAK 11](https://technet.microsoft.com/microsoft-edge/bb219517)
-[IEAK 11 overview](https://technet.microsoft.com/microsoft-edge/dn532244)
-[IEAK 11 product documentation](https://docs.microsoft.com/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/index)
-[IEAK 11 licensing guidelines](../ie11-ieak/licensing-version-and-features-ieak11.md)
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-faq/faq-ieak11.yml b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-faq/faq-ieak11.yml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e2400b19af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-faq/faq-ieak11.yml
@@ -0,0 +1,140 @@
+### YamlMime:FAQ
+metadata:
+ ms.localizationpriority: medium
+ ms.mktglfcycl: support
+ ms.pagetype: security
+ description: Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK) helps corporations, Internet service providers (ISPs), Internet content providers (ICPs), and independent software vendors (ISVs) to deploy and manage web-based solutions.
+ author: dansimp
+ ms.author: dansimp
+ ms.manager: elizapo
+ ms.prod: ie11
+ ms.assetid:
+ ms.reviewer:
+ audience: itpro
+ manager: dansimp
+ title: IEAK 11 - Frequently Asked Questions
+ ms.sitesec: library
+ ms.date: 05/10/2018
+
+title: IEAK 11 - Frequently Asked Questions
+summary: |
+ [!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
+ Get answers to commonly asked questions about the Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11), and find links to additional material you might find helpful.
+
+
+sections:
+ - name: Ignored
+ questions:
+ - question: |
+ What is IEAK 11?
+ answer: |
+ IEAK 11 enables you to customize, brand, and distribute customized Internet Explorer 11 browser packages across an organization. Download the kit from the [Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK) information and downloads](../ie11-ieak/ieak-information-and-downloads.md).
+
+ - question: |
+ What are the supported operating systems?
+ answer: |
+ You can customize and install IEAK 11 on the following supported operating systems:
+
+ - Windows 8
+
+ - Windows Server 2012
+
+ - Windows 7 Service Pack 1 (SP1)
+
+ - Windows Server 2008 R2 Service Pack 1 (SP1)
+
+ > [!NOTE]
+ > IEAK 11 does not support building custom packages for Windows RT.
+
+
+ - question: |
+ What can I customize with IEAK 11?
+ answer: |
+ The IEAK 11 enables you to customize branding and settings for Internet Explorer 11. For PCs running Windows 7, the custom package also includes the Internet Explorer executable.
+
+ > [!NOTE]
+ > Internet Explorer 11 is preinstalled on PCs running Windows 8. Therefore, the executable is not included in the customized package.
+
+ - question: |
+ Can IEAK 11 build custom Internet Explorer 11 packages in languages other than the language of the in-use IEAK 11 version?
+ answer: |
+ Yes. You can use IEAK 11 to build custom Internet Explorer 11 packages in any of the supported 24 languages. You'll select the language for the custom package on the Language Selection page of the customization wizard.
+
+ > [!NOTE]
+ > IEAK 11 is available in 24 languages but can build customized Internet Explorer 11 packages in all languages of the supported operating systems. To download IEAK 11, see [Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK) information and downloads](../ie11-ieak/ieak-information-and-downloads.md).
+
+ - question: |
+ Is there a version of the Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK) supporting IE11?
+ answer: |
+ Yes. The Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) is available for download. IEAK 11 lets you create custom versions of IE11 for use in your organization. For more information, see the following resources:
+
+ - [Internet Explorer Administration Kit Information and Downloads](../ie11-ieak/ieak-information-and-downloads.md) on the Internet Explorer TechCenter.
+
+ - [Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) - Administrator's Guide](../ie11-ieak/index.md)
+
+ - question: |
+ What are the different modes available for the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard?
+ answer: |
+ The IEAK Customization Wizard displays pages based on your licensing mode selection, either **Internal** or **External**. For more information on IEAK Customization Wizard modes, see [What IEAK can do for you](../ie11-ieak/what-ieak-can-do-for-you.md).
+
+ The following table displays which pages are available in IEAK 11, based on the licensing mode:
+
+ | **Wizard Pages** | **External** | **Internal** |
+ |-------------------------------------------|--------------|--------------|
+ | Welcome to the IEAK | Yes | Yes |
+ | File Locations | Yes | Yes |
+ | Platform Selection | Yes | Yes |
+ | Language Selection | Yes | Yes |
+ | Package Type Selection | Yes | Yes |
+ | Feature Selection | Yes | Yes |
+ | Automatic Version Synchronization | Yes | Yes |
+ | Custom Components | Yes | Yes |
+ | Corporate Install | No | Yes |
+ | User Experience | No | Yes |
+ | Browser User Interface | Yes | Yes |
+ | Search Providers | Yes | Yes |
+ | Important URLs - Home page and Support | Yes | Yes |
+ | Accelerators | Yes | Yes |
+ | Favorites, Favorites Bar, and Feeds | Yes | Yes |
+ | Browsing Options | No | Yes |
+ | First Run Wizard and Welcome Page Options | Yes | Yes |
+ | Compatibility View | Yes | Yes |
+ | Connection Manager | Yes | Yes |
+ | Connection Settings | Yes | Yes |
+ | Automatic Configuration | No | Yes |
+ | Proxy Settings | Yes | Yes |
+ | Security and Privacy Settings | No | Yes |
+ | Add a Root Certificate | Yes | No |
+ | Programs | Yes | Yes |
+ | Additional Settings | No | Yes |
+ | Wizard Complete | Yes | Yes |
+
+
+ - question: |
+ Can IEAK 11 build custom Internet Explorer 11 packages in languages other than the language of the in-use IEAK 11 version?
+ answer: |
+ Yes. You can use IEAK 11 to build custom Internet Explorer 11 packages in any of the supported 24 languages. You'll select the language for the custom package on the Language Selection page of the customization wizard.
+
+ IEAK 11 is available in 24 languages but can build customized Internet Explorer 11 packages in all languages of the supported operating systems. Select a language below and download IEAK 11 from the download center:
+
+ | | | |
+ |---------|---------|---------|
+ |[English](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/en-us/ieak.msi) |[French](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/fr-fr/ieak.msi) |[Norwegian (Bokmål)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/nb-no/ieak.msi) |
+ |[Arabic](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/ar-sa/ieak.msi) |[Chinese (Simplified)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/zh-cn/ieak.msi) |[Chinese(Traditional)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/zh-tw/ieak.msi) |
+ |[Czech](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/cs-cz/ieak.msi) |[Danish](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/da-dk/ieak.msi) |[Dutch](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/nl-nl/ieak.msi) |
+ |[Finnish](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/fi-fi/ieak.msi) |[German](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/de-de/ieak.msi) |[Greek](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/el-gr/ieak.msi) |
+ |[Hebrew](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/he-il/ieak.msi) |[Hungarian](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/hu-hu/ieak.msi) |[Italian](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/it-it/ieak.msi) |
+ |[Japanese](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/ja-jp/ieak.msi) |[Korean](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/ko-kr/ieak.msi) |[Polish](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/pl-pl/ieak.msi) |
+ |[Portuguese (Brazil)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/pt-br/ieak.msi) |[Portuguese (Portugal)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/pt-pt/ieak.msi) |[Russian](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/ru-ru/ieak.msi) |
+ |[Spanish](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/es-es/ieak.msi) |[Swedish](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/sv-se/ieak.msi) |[Turkish](https://download.microsoft.com/download/A/B/1/AB1954BF-8B20-4F01-808A-FE5EE5269F08/MSI/tr-tr/ieak.msi) |
+
+additionalContent: |
+
+ ## Additional resources
+
+ -[Download IEAK 11](../ie11-ieak/ieak-information-and-downloads.md)
+ -[IEAK 11 overview](../ie11-ieak/index.md)
+ -[IEAK 11 product documentation](../ie11-ieak/index.md)
+ -[IEAK 11 licensing guidelines](../ie11-ieak/licensing-version-and-features-ieak11.md)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/accelerators-ieak11-wizard.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/accelerators-ieak11-wizard.md
index b211933353..40a7886b0a 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/accelerators-ieak11-wizard.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/accelerators-ieak11-wizard.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the Accelerators page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
The **Accelerators** page of the Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK 11) Customization Wizard lets you add accelerators to your employee computers. Accelerators are contextual menu options that can quickly get to a web service from any webpage. For example, an accelerator can look up a highlighted word in the dictionary or a selected location on a map.
**Note**
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/add-and-approve-activex-controls-ieak11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/add-and-approve-activex-controls-ieak11.md
index 7e89dab65d..b4d0459c78 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/add-and-approve-activex-controls-ieak11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/add-and-approve-activex-controls-ieak11.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Add and approve ActiveX controls using IEAK 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
There are two main approaches to how you can control the use of ActiveX controls in your company. For more info about ActiveX controls, including how to manage the controls using Group Policy, see [Group Policy and ActiveX installation](../ie11-deploy-guide/activex-installation-using-group-policy.md) in the [Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) - Deployment Guide for IT Pros](../ie11-deploy-guide/index.md).
**Note**
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/add-root-certificate-ieak11-wizard.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/add-root-certificate-ieak11-wizard.md
index eae4f678e5..c04501eea7 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/add-root-certificate-ieak11-wizard.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/add-root-certificate-ieak11-wizard.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the Add a Root Certificate page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
We’re sorry. While we continue to recommend that you digitally sign your package, we’ve removed all of the functionality that allowed you to add a root certificate using the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11. The wizard page itself will be removed in a future version of the IEAK.
Click **Next** to go to the [Programs](programs-ieak11-wizard.md) page or **Back** to go to the [Security and Privacy Settings](security-and-privacy-settings-ieak11-wizard.md) page.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/additional-settings-ieak11-wizard.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/additional-settings-ieak11-wizard.md
index 60be35bc0d..ebff04a24a 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/additional-settings-ieak11-wizard.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/additional-settings-ieak11-wizard.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the Additional Settings page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
The **Additional Settings** page of the Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK 11) Customization Wizard lets you pick additional custom, corporate, and Internet settings that relate to your employee’s desktop, operating system, and security. If you don’t change a setting, it’ll be ignored.
The additional settings appear in administration (.adm) files that are stored in your `:\Program Files\Windows IEAK 11\policies` folder. You can also create your own .adm files with options that can be configured using the wizard. Any edits you make to your own .adm file are stored as .ins files, which are used to build the .inf files for your custom install package.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/auto-config-ieak11-wizard.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/auto-config-ieak11-wizard.md
index d3883b39ca..879c328e43 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/auto-config-ieak11-wizard.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/auto-config-ieak11-wizard.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the Automatic Configuration page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
The **Automatic Configuration** page of the Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK 11) Customization Wizard lets you provide URLs to the files that’ll automatically configure Internet Explorer 11 for a group of employees or devices.
**Note**
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/auto-detection-dhcp-or-dns-servers-ieak11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/auto-detection-dhcp-or-dns-servers-ieak11.md
index 1a46247c5c..fadc8246a0 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/auto-detection-dhcp-or-dns-servers-ieak11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/auto-detection-dhcp-or-dns-servers-ieak11.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Set up auto detection for DHCP or DNS servers using IEAK 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Set up your network to automatically detect and customize Internet Explorer 11 when it’s first started. Automatic detection is supported on both Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) and Domain Name System (DNS), letting your servers detect and set up your employee’s browser settings from a central location, using a configuration URL (.ins file) or a JavaScript proxy configuration file (.js, .jvs, or .pac).
Before you can set up your environment to use automatic detection, you need to turn the feature on.
@@ -37,7 +40,7 @@ Automatic detection works even if the browser wasn't originally set up or instal
**To set up automatic detection for DHCP servers**
-- Open the [DHCP Administrative Tool](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=302212), create a new option type, using the code number 252, and then associate it with the URL to your configuration file. For detailed instructions about how to do this, see [Create an option 252 entry in DHCP](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=294649).
+- Open the [DHCP Administrative Tool](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2008-R2-and-2008/dd145324(v=ws.10)), create a new option type, using the code number 252, and then associate it with the URL to your configuration file. For detailed instructions about how to do this, see [Create an option 252 entry in DHCP](/previous-versions/tn-archive/bb794881(v=technet.10)).
**Examples:**
`https://www.microsoft.com/webproxy.pac`
@@ -54,10 +57,9 @@ Automatic detection works even if the browser wasn't originally set up or instal
`mailserver1 IN A 192.55.200.51`
-OR-
Create a canonical name (CNAME) alias record, named WPAD. This record lets you use more than one name to point to a single host, letting you host both an FTP server and a web server on the same computer. It also includes the resolved name (not the IP address) of the server storing your automatic configuration (.pac) file.
- Note For more info about creating a WPAD entry, see Creating a WPAD entry in DNS.
+ Note For more info about creating a WPAD entry, see Creating a WPAD entry in DNS.
2. After the database file propagates to the server, the DNS name, `wpad..com` resolves to the server name that includes your automatic configuration file.
**Note**
-IE11 creates a default URL template based on the host name,**wpad**. For example, `https://wpad..com/wpad.dat`. Because of this, you need to set up a file or redirection point in your web server **WPAD** record, named **wpad.dat**. The **wpad.dat** record delivers the contents of your automatic configuration file.
-
+IE11 creates a default URL template based on the host name,**wpad**. For example, `https://wpad..com/wpad.dat`. Because of this, you need to set up a file or redirection point in your web server **WPAD** record, named **wpad.dat**. The **wpad.dat** record delivers the contents of your automatic configuration file.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/auto-version-sync-ieak11-wizard.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/auto-version-sync-ieak11-wizard.md
index c317a46e0e..b4565ed485 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/auto-version-sync-ieak11-wizard.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/auto-version-sync-ieak11-wizard.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the Automatic Version Synchronization page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
The **Automatic Version Synchronization** page of the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11 runs the synchronization process every time you run the wizard, downloading the Internet Explorer 11 Setup file to your computer. The Setup file includes the required full and express packages.
**Important**
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/before-you-create-custom-pkgs-ieak11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/before-you-create-custom-pkgs-ieak11.md
index 3508c186af..7271837b2e 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/before-you-create-custom-pkgs-ieak11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/before-you-create-custom-pkgs-ieak11.md
@@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ ms.date: 04/24/2018
# Before you start using IEAK 11
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
Before you run IEAK 11 and the Customization Wizard, make sure you have met the following requirements:
- Have you determined which licensing version of the Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 to install? For info, see [Determine the licensing version and features to use in IEAK 11](licensing-version-and-features-ieak11.md).
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/branding-ins-file-setting.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/branding-ins-file-setting.md
index 5c9c189f24..351b1bbb76 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/branding-ins-file-setting.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/branding-ins-file-setting.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the Branding .INS file to create custom branding and setup info
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Info about the custom branding and setup information in your browser package.
|Name |Value | Description |
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/browser-ui-ieak11-wizard.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/browser-ui-ieak11-wizard.md
index c1f3999a3a..0116384f6d 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/browser-ui-ieak11-wizard.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/browser-ui-ieak11-wizard.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the Browser User Interface page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
The **Browser User Interface** page of the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11 lets you change the toolbar buttons and the title bar text in IE.
**Note** The customizations you make on this page apply only to Internet Explorer for the desktop.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/browsertoolbars-ins-file-setting.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/browsertoolbars-ins-file-setting.md
index b2b123ff69..05fb2324f7 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/browsertoolbars-ins-file-setting.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/browsertoolbars-ins-file-setting.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the BrowserToolbars .INS file to customize the Internet Explorer toolbar and buttons
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Info about how to customize the Internet Explorer toolbar.
|Name |Value |Description |
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/browsing-options-ieak11-wizard.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/browsing-options-ieak11-wizard.md
index a39adaff3e..3214ea32c0 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/browsing-options-ieak11-wizard.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/browsing-options-ieak11-wizard.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the Browsing Options page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
The **Browsing Options** page of the Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK 11) Customization Wizard lets you decide how you want to manage items in the **Favorites, Favorites Bar, and Feeds** section, including the Microsoft-provided default items.
The choices that you make on this page affect only the items shown on the **Favorites, Favorites Bar, and Feeds** page.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/cabsigning-ins-file-setting.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/cabsigning-ins-file-setting.md
index e5bf7ebb40..321f45caf5 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/cabsigning-ins-file-setting.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/cabsigning-ins-file-setting.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the CabSigning .INS file to customize the digital signature info for your apps
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Info about how to customize the digital signature info for your apps.
|Name |Value |Description |
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/compat-view-ieak11-wizard.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/compat-view-ieak11-wizard.md
index cda9702eb4..b6138064be 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/compat-view-ieak11-wizard.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/compat-view-ieak11-wizard.md
@@ -17,6 +17,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the Compatibility View page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
We’re sorry. We’ve changed the way Compatibility View works in Internet Explorer 11 and have removed all of the functionality included on the **Compatibility View** page of the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11. For more info about the changes we’ve made to the Compatibility View functionality, see [Missing the Compatibility View Button](../ie11-deploy-guide/missing-the-compatibility-view-button.md).
Click **Next** to go to the [Programs](programs-ieak11-wizard.md) page or **Back** to go to the [Security and Privacy Settings](security-and-privacy-settings-ieak11-wizard.md) page.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/connection-mgr-ieak11-wizard.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/connection-mgr-ieak11-wizard.md
index aaec7b0fa2..e9051c955b 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/connection-mgr-ieak11-wizard.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/connection-mgr-ieak11-wizard.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the Connection Manager page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
We're sorry. We've removed all of the functionality included on the Connection Manager page of the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11.
Click **Next** to go to the [Connection Settings](connection-settings-ieak11-wizard.md) page or **Back** to go to the [Compatibility View](compat-view-ieak11-wizard.md) page.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/connection-settings-ieak11-wizard.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/connection-settings-ieak11-wizard.md
index 66beabdbca..bc00c58bec 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/connection-settings-ieak11-wizard.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/connection-settings-ieak11-wizard.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the Connection Settings page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
The **Connection Settings** page of the Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK 11) Customization Wizard lets you import the connection settings from your computer, to preset the connection settings on your employee’s computers.
**Note** Using the options on the **Additional Settings** page of the wizard, you can let your employees change their connection settings. For more information see the [Additional Settings](additional-settings-ieak11-wizard.md) page. You can also customize additional connection settings using the **Automatic Configuration** page in the wizard. For more information see the [Automatic Configuration](auto-config-ieak11-wizard.md) page.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/connectionsettings-ins-file-setting.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/connectionsettings-ins-file-setting.md
index 779e024e57..0e7777a64e 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/connectionsettings-ins-file-setting.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/connectionsettings-ins-file-setting.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the ConnectionSettings .INS file to review the network connections for install
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Info about the network connection settings used to install your custom package. This section creates a common configuration on all of your employee’s computers.
|Name |Value |Description |
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/create-build-folder-structure-ieak11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/create-build-folder-structure-ieak11.md
index 91f26adf5b..0befbc922f 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/create-build-folder-structure-ieak11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/create-build-folder-structure-ieak11.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Create the build computer folder structure using IEAK 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Create your build environment on the computer that you’ll use to build your custom browser package. Your license agreement determines your folder structure and which version of Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) you’ll use: **Internal** or **External**.
|Name |Version |Description |
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/create-manage-deploy-custom-pkgs-ieak11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/create-manage-deploy-custom-pkgs-ieak11.md
index 3e8043c959..e2a0fb48a9 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/create-manage-deploy-custom-pkgs-ieak11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/create-manage-deploy-custom-pkgs-ieak11.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Tasks and references to consider before creating and deploying custom packages using IEAK 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Review this list of tasks and references to help you use the Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) to set up, deploy, and manage Internet Explorer 11 in your company.
|Task |References |
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/create-multiple-browser-packages-ieak11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/create-multiple-browser-packages-ieak11.md
index 6196fabf79..5d88bfa81a 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/create-multiple-browser-packages-ieak11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/create-multiple-browser-packages-ieak11.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Create multiple versions of your custom package using IEAK 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
You'll need to create multiple versions of your custom browser package if:
- You support more than 1 version of the Windows operating system.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/create-uninstall-inf-files-for-custom-components.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/create-uninstall-inf-files-for-custom-components.md
index 3cf498605c..ba3904ae39 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/create-uninstall-inf-files-for-custom-components.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/create-uninstall-inf-files-for-custom-components.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use uninstallation .INF files to uninstall custom components
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
The Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) uses Setup information (.inf) files to provide installation instructions for your custom browser packages. You can also use this file to uninstall your custom components by removing the files, registry entries, and shortcuts, and adding your custom component to the list of programs that can be uninstalled from **Uninstall or change a program**.
**To uninstall your custom components**
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/custom-components-ieak11-wizard.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/custom-components-ieak11-wizard.md
index 571b73d327..1a981a5a16 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/custom-components-ieak11-wizard.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/custom-components-ieak11-wizard.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the Custom Components page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
The **Custom Components** page of the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11 lets you add up to 10 additional components that your employees can install at the same time they install IE. These components can be created by Microsoft or your organization as either compressed cabinet (.cab) or self-extracting executable (.exe) files. If you’re using Microsoft components, make sure you have the latest version and software patches from the [Microsoft Support](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=258658) site. To include Microsoft Update components, you must bundle the associated files into a custom component.
**Important** You should sign any custom code that’s being downloaded over the Internet. The default settings of Internet Explorer 11 will automatically reject any unsigned code. For more info about digitally signing custom components, see [Security features and IEAK 11](security-and-ieak11.md).
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/custombranding-ins-file-setting.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/custombranding-ins-file-setting.md
index e7469fa864..7a5556235d 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/custombranding-ins-file-setting.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/custombranding-ins-file-setting.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the CustomBranding .INS file to create custom branding and setup info
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Provide the URL to your branding cabinet (.cab) file.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/customize-automatic-search-for-ie.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/customize-automatic-search-for-ie.md
index 3c0af97192..9ed59cf64e 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/customize-automatic-search-for-ie.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/customize-automatic-search-for-ie.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Customize Automatic Search for Internet Explorer using IEAK 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Internet Explorer lets websites advertise any search provider that uses the open search standard described at the A9 website ( [OpenSearch 1.1 Draft 5](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=208582)). When IE detects new search providers, the **Search** box becomes active and adds the new providers to the drop-down list of providers.
Using the **Administrative Templates** section of Group Policy, you can prevent the search box from appearing, you can add a list of acceptable search providers, or you can restrict your employee’s ability to add or remove search providers.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/extreginf-ins-file-setting.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/extreginf-ins-file-setting.md
index 06e8d6c3f3..7d0a2f9882 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/extreginf-ins-file-setting.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/extreginf-ins-file-setting.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the ExtRegInf .INS file to specify installation files and mode
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Info about how to specify your Setup information (.inf) files and the installation mode for your custom components.
|Name |Value |Description |
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/favorites-favoritesbar-and-feeds-ieak11-wizard.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/favorites-favoritesbar-and-feeds-ieak11-wizard.md
index 47bf04d6e2..030dc054d2 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/favorites-favoritesbar-and-feeds-ieak11-wizard.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/favorites-favoritesbar-and-feeds-ieak11-wizard.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the Favorites, Favorites Bar, and Feeds page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
The **Favorites, Favorites Bar, and Feeds** page of the Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK 11) Customization Wizard lets you add:
- **Links.** Used so your employees can quickly connect with your important websites. These links can appear in the **Links** folder or on the **Favorites Bar**.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/favoritesex-ins-file-setting.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/favoritesex-ins-file-setting.md
index 694b8d994d..ac736e20df 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/favoritesex-ins-file-setting.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/favoritesex-ins-file-setting.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the FavoritesEx .INS file for your Favorites icon and URLs
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Info about where you store your **Favorites** icon file, whether your **Favorites** are available offline, and the URLs for each **Favorites** site.
|Name |Value |Description |
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/feature-selection-ieak11-wizard.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/feature-selection-ieak11-wizard.md
index b27bc3273a..f72747f486 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/feature-selection-ieak11-wizard.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/feature-selection-ieak11-wizard.md
@@ -15,6 +15,9 @@ ms.sitesec: library
# Use the Feature Selection page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
The **Feature Selection** page of the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11 lets you choose which parts of the setup processes and Internet Explorer 11 to change for your company, including:
- **Setup Customizations.** Lets you add custom components, decide which components to install, provide your download site information, and modify the Setup title bar and graphics.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/file-locations-ieak11-wizard.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/file-locations-ieak11-wizard.md
index f3224c2055..0aee908cd4 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/file-locations-ieak11-wizard.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/file-locations-ieak11-wizard.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the File Locations page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
The **File Locations** page of the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11 lets you change the location of your folders, including:
- Where you’ll create and store your custom installation package.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/file-types-ieak11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/file-types-ieak11.md
index 38703f9131..616e3b9938 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/file-types-ieak11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/file-types-ieak11.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# File types used or created by IEAK 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
A list of the file types used or created by tools in IEAK 11:
|File type |Description |
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/first-run-and-welcome-page-ieak11-wizard.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/first-run-and-welcome-page-ieak11-wizard.md
index 507450938d..9d6fe74f8a 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/first-run-and-welcome-page-ieak11-wizard.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/first-run-and-welcome-page-ieak11-wizard.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the First Run Wizard and Welcome Page Options page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
The **First Run Wizard and Welcome Page Options** page of the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11 lets you decide what your employee’s see the first time they log on to IE, based on their operating system.
- **Windows 8.1 Update and newer.** No longer includes a **Welcome** page, so if you pick the **Use Internet Explorer 11 Welcome Page** or the **Use a custom Welcome page** option, IEAK creates an initial **Home** page that loads before all other **Home** pages, as the first tab. This only applies to the Internet Explorer for the desktop.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/guidelines-toolbar-and-favorites-list-ieak11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/guidelines-toolbar-and-favorites-list-ieak11.md
index 0864538448..e3d95badec 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/guidelines-toolbar-and-favorites-list-ieak11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/guidelines-toolbar-and-favorites-list-ieak11.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Customize the Toolbar button and Favorites List icons using IEAK 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Use these customization guidelines to change the browser toolbar button and the **Favorites List** icons, using your own branding and graphics.
**Important** Check your license agreement to make sure this customization is available.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/hardware-and-software-reqs-ieak11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/hardware-and-software-reqs-ieak11.md
index 0ba0f580a8..2da43b7f38 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/hardware-and-software-reqs-ieak11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/hardware-and-software-reqs-ieak11.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Hardware and software requirements for Internet Explorer 11 and the IEAK 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Before you can use the Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 and the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11, you must first install Internet Explorer 11. For more info about installing IE11, see the [Determine the licensing version and features to use in IEAK 11](licensing-version-and-features-ieak11.md) page.
## Hardware requirements
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/hidecustom-ins-file-setting.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/hidecustom-ins-file-setting.md
index 7d50512355..6c46e306f3 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/hidecustom-ins-file-setting.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/hidecustom-ins-file-setting.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the HideCustom .INS file to hide the GUID for each custom component
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Info about whether to hide the globally unique identifier (GUID) for each of your custom components.
|Name |Value |Description |
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/ie-setup-command-line-options-and-return-codes.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/ie-setup-command-line-options-and-return-codes.md
index 51dc959759..c9d24160a9 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/ie-setup-command-line-options-and-return-codes.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/ie-setup-command-line-options-and-return-codes.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Internet Explorer Setup command-line options and return codes
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
You can use command-line options along with a tool like IExpress to package your custom version of Internet Explorer and to perform a batch installation across your organization.
## IE Setup command-line options
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/ieak-information-and-downloads.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/ieak-information-and-downloads.md
index b8c3d25c24..69b71a1820 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/ieak-information-and-downloads.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/ieak-information-and-downloads.md
@@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ ms.date: 05/10/2018
# Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK) information and downloads
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
>Applies to: Windows 10
The Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK) simplifies the creation, deployment, and management of customized Internet Explorer packages. You can use the IEAK to configure the out-of-box Internet Explorer experience or to manage user settings after Internet Explorer deployment. To find more information on the IEAK, see [What IEAK can do for you](what-ieak-can-do-for-you.md).
@@ -29,7 +32,7 @@ The Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK) simplifies the creation, deploym
[IEAK 11 licensing guidelines](licensing-version-and-features-ieak11.md)
-[IEAK 11 - Frequently Asked Questions](../ie11-faq/faq-ieak11.md)
+[IEAK 11 - Frequently Asked Questions](../ie11-faq/faq-ieak11.yml)
[Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) - Administrator's Guide](before-you-create-custom-pkgs-ieak11.md)
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/ieak11-wizard-custom-options.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/ieak11-wizard-custom-options.md
index f27ec8b5b9..0aa9964807 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/ieak11-wizard-custom-options.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/ieak11-wizard-custom-options.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) Customization Wizard options
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Use the Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) and the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11 to customize your browser install packages for deployment to your employee's devices.
## IE Customization Wizard 11 options
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/iexpress-command-line-options.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/iexpress-command-line-options.md
index cd7c730569..57128dfefe 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/iexpress-command-line-options.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/iexpress-command-line-options.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# IExpress Wizard command-line options
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
**Applies to:**
- Windows Server 2008 R2 with SP1
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/iexpress-wizard-for-win-server.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/iexpress-wizard-for-win-server.md
index 35dc9f9cc5..fe4bb3a985 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/iexpress-wizard-for-win-server.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/iexpress-wizard-for-win-server.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# IExpress Wizard for Windows Server 2008 R2 with SP1
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Use the IExpress Wizard and its associated command-line options to create self-extracting files that automatically run your custom Internet Explorer Setup (.inf or .exe file) program that’s contained inside.
## IExpress Wizard location
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/important-urls-home-page-and-support-ieak11-wizard.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/important-urls-home-page-and-support-ieak11-wizard.md
index 022767b179..b32b5bacab 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/important-urls-home-page-and-support-ieak11-wizard.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/important-urls-home-page-and-support-ieak11-wizard.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the Important URLs - Home Page and Support page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
The **Important URLS – Home Page and Support** page of the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11 lets you choose one or more **Home** pages and an online support page for your customized version of IE.
**To use the Important URLS – Home Page and Support page**
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/index.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/index.md
index 3187f8b507..5b662eeca6 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/index.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/index.md
@@ -14,12 +14,15 @@ manager: dansimp
# Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) - Administrator's Guide
-The Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK) simplifies the creation, deployment, and management of customized Internet Explorer packages. You can use the IEAK to configure the out-of-box Internet Explorer experience or to manage user settings after Internet Explorer deployment.
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
+The Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK) simplifies the creation, deployment, and management of customized Internet Explorer packages. You can use the IEAK to configure the out-of-box Internet Explorer experience or to manage user settings after Internet Explorer deployment.
Use this guide to learn about the several options and processes you'll need to consider while you're using the Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) to customize, deploy, and manage Internet Explorer 11 for your employee's devices.
->[!IMPORTANT]
->Because this content isn't intended to be a step-by-step guide, not all of the steps are necessary.
+> [!IMPORTANT]
+> Because this content isn't intended to be a step-by-step guide, not all of the steps are necessary.
## Included technology
@@ -40,10 +43,10 @@ IE11 and IEAK 11 offers differing experiences between Windows 7 and Windows 8.1
|Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11 |Step-by-step wizard screens that help you create custom IE11 installation packages. |
## Related topics
-- [IEAK 11 - Frequently Asked Questions](../ie11-faq/faq-ieak11.md)
-- [Download IEAK 11](ieak-information-and-downloads.md)
-- [IEAK 11 administrators guide](https://docs.microsoft.com/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/index)
+- [IEAK 11 - Frequently Asked Questions](../ie11-faq/faq-ieak11.yml)
+- [Download IEAK 11](ieak-information-and-downloads.md)
+- [IEAK 11 administrators guide]()
- [IEAK 11 licensing guidelines](licensing-version-and-features-ieak11.md)
-- [Internet Explorer 11 - FAQ for IT Pros](../ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11.md)
+- [Internet Explorer 11 - FAQ for IT Pros](../ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11.yml)
- [Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) - Deployment Guide for IT Pros](../ie11-deploy-guide/index.md)
-- [Microsoft Edge - Deployment Guide for IT Pros](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=760643)
+- [Microsoft Edge - Deployment Guide for IT Pros](/microsoft-edge/deploy/)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/internal-install-ieak11-wizard.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/internal-install-ieak11-wizard.md
index 15db2bc20f..6936f198d0 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/internal-install-ieak11-wizard.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/internal-install-ieak11-wizard.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the Internal Install page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
The **Internal Install** page of the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11 lets you customize Setup for the default browser and the latest browser updates, based on your company’s guidelines.
**Note** The customizations made on this page only apply to Internet Explorer for the desktop on Windows 7.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/isp-security-ins-file-setting.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/isp-security-ins-file-setting.md
index b625916fd1..666c5f8b17 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/isp-security-ins-file-setting.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/isp-security-ins-file-setting.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the ISP_Security .INS file to add your root certificate
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Info about where you store the root certificate you’re adding to your custom package.
|Name |Value |Description |
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/language-selection-ieak11-wizard.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/language-selection-ieak11-wizard.md
index b2f66781b7..a343a30e51 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/language-selection-ieak11-wizard.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/language-selection-ieak11-wizard.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the Language Selection page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
The **Language Selection** page of the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11 lets you choose the language for your Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) custom package. You can create custom Internet Explorer 11 packages in any of the languages your operating system version is available in.
**Important** Make sure that the language of your IEAK 11 installation matches the language of your custom IE11 package. If the languages don’t match, IEAK 11 won’t work properly.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/licensing-version-and-features-ieak11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/licensing-version-and-features-ieak11.md
index 296dec1688..fd6904f4a8 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/licensing-version-and-features-ieak11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/licensing-version-and-features-ieak11.md
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ author: dansimp
ms.author: dansimp
ms.prod: ie11
ms.assetid: 69d25451-08af-4db0-9daa-44ab272acc15
-ms.reviewer:
+ms.reviewer:
audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
title: Determine the licensing version and features to use in IEAK 11 (Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 for IT Pros)
@@ -16,13 +16,16 @@ ms.date: 10/23/2018
# Determine the licensing version and features to use in IEAK 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
In addition to the Software License Terms for the Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11, referred to as the "software"), these Guidelines further define how you may and may not use the software to create versions of Internet Explorer 11 with optional customizations (referred to as the "customized browser") for internal use and distribution in accordance with the IEAK 11 Software License Terms. IEAK 11 is for testing purposes only and is not intended to be used in a production environment.
During installation, you must pick a version of IEAK 11, either **External** or **Internal**, based on your license agreement. Your version selection decides the options you can chose, the steps you follow to deploy your Internet Explorer 11 package, and how you manage the browser after deployment.
- **External Distribution as an Internet Service Provider (ISP), Internet Content Provider (ICP), or Developer.** If you are an ISP or an ICP, your license agreement also states that you must show the Internet Explorer logo on your packaging and promotional goods, as well as on your website.
- >[!IMPORTANT]
- >Original Equipment Manufacturers (OEMs) that install IEAK 11 as part of a Windows product, under an OEM license agreement with Microsoft, must use their appropriate Windows OEM Preinstallation document (OPD) as the guide for allowable customizations.
+ > [!IMPORTANT]
+ > Original Equipment Manufacturers (OEMs) that install IEAK 11 as part of a Windows product, under an OEM license agreement with Microsoft, must use their appropriate Windows OEM Preinstallation document (OPD) as the guide for allowable customizations.
- **Internal Distribution via a Corporate Intranet.** This version is for network admins that plan to directly deploy IE11 into a corporate environment.
@@ -30,32 +33,32 @@ During installation, you must pick a version of IEAK 11, either **External** or
| Feature | Internal | External |
|-------------------------------------------|:--------------------------------------------------------------------------------:|:------------------------------------------------------------------------------------:|
-| Welcome screen |  |  |
-| File locations |  |  |
-| Platform selection |  |  |
-| Language selection |  |  |
-| Package type selection |  |  |
-| Feature selection |  |  |
-| Automatic Version Synchronization (AVS) |  |  |
-| Custom components |  |  |
-| Internal install |  |  |
-| User experience |  |  |
-| Browser user interface |  |  |
-| Search providers |  |  |
-| Important URLs – Home page and support |  |  |
-| Accelerators |  |  |
-| Favorites, Favorites bar, and feeds |  |  |
-| Browsing options |  |  |
-| First Run wizard and Welcome page options |  |  |
-| Connection manager |  |  |
-| Connection settings |  |  |
-| Automatic configuration |  |  |
-| Proxy settings |  |  |
-| Security and privacy settings |  |  |
-| Add a root certificate |  |  |
-| Programs |  |  |
-| Additional settings |  |  |
-| Wizard complete |  |  |
+| Welcome screen |  |  |
+| File locations |  |  |
+| Platform selection |  |  |
+| Language selection |  |  |
+| Package type selection |  |  |
+| Feature selection |  |  |
+| Automatic Version Synchronization (AVS) |  |  |
+| Custom components |  |  |
+| Internal install |  |  |
+| User experience |  |  |
+| Browser user interface |  |  |
+| Search providers |  |  |
+| Important URLs – Home page and support |  |  |
+| Accelerators |  |  |
+| Favorites, Favorites bar, and feeds |  |  |
+| Browsing options |  |  |
+| First Run wizard and Welcome page options |  |  |
+| Connection manager |  |  |
+| Connection settings |  |  |
+| Automatic configuration |  |  |
+| Proxy settings |  |  |
+| Security and privacy settings |  |  |
+| Add a root certificate |  |  |
+| Programs |  |  |
+| Additional settings |  |  |
+| Wizard complete |  |  |
---
@@ -64,10 +67,10 @@ During installation, you must pick a version of IEAK 11, either **External** or
Two installation modes are available to you, depending on how you are planning to use the customized browser created with the software. Each mode requires a separate installation of the software.
-- **External Distribution**
+- **External Distribution**
This mode is available to anyone who wants to create a customized browser for distribution outside their company (for example, websites, magazines, retailers, non-profit organizations, independent hardware vendors, independent software vendors, Internet service providers, Internet content providers, software developers, and marketers).
-- **Internal Distribution**
+- **Internal Distribution**
This mode is available to companies for the creation and distribution of a customized browser only to their employees over a corporate intranet.
The table below identifies which customizations you may or may not perform based on the mode you selected.
@@ -94,14 +97,14 @@ The table below identifies which customizations you may or may not perform based
| **Connection Settings and Manage** | Yes | Yes |
-Support for some of the Internet Explorer settings on the wizard pages varies depending on your target operating system. For more information, see [Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11 options](https://docs.microsoft.com/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/ieak11-wizard-custom-options).
+Support for some of the Internet Explorer settings on the wizard pages varies depending on your target operating system. For more information, see [Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11 options](./ieak11-wizard-custom-options.md).
## Distribution guidelines
Two installation modes are available to you, depending on how you are planning to use the customized browser created with the software. Each mode requires a separate installation of the software.
-- **External Distribution**
- You shall use commercially reasonable efforts to maintain the quality of (i) any non-Microsoft software distributed with Internet Explorer 11, and (ii) any media used for distribution (for example, optical media, flash drives), at a level that meets or exceeds the highest industry standards. If you distribute add-ons with Internet Explorer 11, those add-ons must comply with the [Microsoft browser extension policy](https://docs.microsoft.com/legal/windows/agreements/microsoft-browser-extension-policy).
+- **External Distribution**
+ You shall use commercially reasonable efforts to maintain the quality of (i) any non-Microsoft software distributed with Internet Explorer 11, and (ii) any media used for distribution (for example, optical media, flash drives), at a level that meets or exceeds the highest industry standards. If you distribute add-ons with Internet Explorer 11, those add-ons must comply with the [Microsoft browser extension policy](/legal/windows/agreements/microsoft-browser-extension-policy).
-- **Internal Distribution - corporate intranet**
- The software is solely for use by your employees within your company's organization and affiliated companies through your corporate intranet. Neither you nor any of your employees may permit redistribution of the software to or for use by third parties other than for third parties such as consultants, contractors, and temporary staff accessing your corporate intranet.
+- **Internal Distribution - corporate intranet**
+ The software is solely for use by your employees within your company's organization and affiliated companies through your corporate intranet. Neither you nor any of your employees may permit redistribution of the software to or for use by third parties other than for third parties such as consultants, contractors, and temporary staff accessing your corporate intranet.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/media-ins-file-setting.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/media-ins-file-setting.md
index a441fe7be2..f628def610 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/media-ins-file-setting.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/media-ins-file-setting.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the Media .INS file to specify your install media
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
The types of media on which your custom install package is available.
|Name |Value |Description |
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/pkg-type-selection-ieak11-wizard.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/pkg-type-selection-ieak11-wizard.md
index ce2517bf60..ae7b3c6150 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/pkg-type-selection-ieak11-wizard.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/pkg-type-selection-ieak11-wizard.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the Package Type Selection page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
The **Package Type Selection** page of the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11 lets you pick which type of media you’ll use to distribute your custom installation package. You can pick more than one type, if you need it.
**Important** You can't create a full installation package for deployment to Windows 10 computers. That option only works for computers running Windows 7 or Windows 8.1.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/platform-selection-ieak11-wizard.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/platform-selection-ieak11-wizard.md
index 342ac46d58..67d9caac65 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/platform-selection-ieak11-wizard.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/platform-selection-ieak11-wizard.md
@@ -15,6 +15,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the Platform Selection page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
The **Platform Selection** page of the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11 lets you pick the operating system and architecture (32-bit or 64-bit) for the devices on which you’re going to install the custom installation package.
**To use the Platform Selection page**
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/prep-network-install-with-ieak11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/prep-network-install-with-ieak11.md
index 809110fc8b..4720c446af 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/prep-network-install-with-ieak11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/prep-network-install-with-ieak11.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Before you install your package over your network using IEAK 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Employees can install the custom browser package using a network server. However, you must either lower the intranet security level or make the server a trusted site.
**To lower your intranet security**
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/programs-ieak11-wizard.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/programs-ieak11-wizard.md
index 8b46cc1615..acfbbc74ae 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/programs-ieak11-wizard.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/programs-ieak11-wizard.md
@@ -15,6 +15,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the Programs page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
The **Programs** page of the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11 lets you pick the default programs to use for Internet services, like email, contact lists, and newsgroups, by importing settings from your computer.
**Important** The customizations you make on this page only apply to Internet Explorer for the desktop.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/proxy-auto-config-examples.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/proxy-auto-config-examples.md
index 06213a78ae..56a0823f9a 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/proxy-auto-config-examples.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/proxy-auto-config-examples.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use proxy auto-configuration (.pac) files with IEAK 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
These are various ways you can use a proxy auto-configuration (.pac) file to specify an automatic proxy URL. We've included some examples here to help guide you, but you'll need to change the proxy names, port numbers, and IP addresses to match your organization's info.
Included examples:
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/proxy-ins-file-setting.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/proxy-ins-file-setting.md
index 80e2e5d2c0..9def48f2d3 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/proxy-ins-file-setting.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/proxy-ins-file-setting.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the Proxy .INS file to specify a proxy server
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Info about whether to use a proxy server. If yes, this also includes the host names for the proxy server.
|Name |Value |Description |
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/proxy-settings-ieak11-wizard.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/proxy-settings-ieak11-wizard.md
index a99dc70ae0..ba113af6cc 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/proxy-settings-ieak11-wizard.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/proxy-settings-ieak11-wizard.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the Proxy Settings page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
The **Proxy Settings** page of the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11 lets you pick the proxy servers used by your employees to connect for services required by the custom install package.
Using a proxy server lets you limit access to the Internet. You can also use the **Additional Settings** page of the wizard to further restrict your employees from changing the proxy settings.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/register-uninstall-app-ieak11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/register-uninstall-app-ieak11.md
index c6fb131002..f3b4414183 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/register-uninstall-app-ieak11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/register-uninstall-app-ieak11.md
@@ -15,6 +15,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Register an uninstall app for custom components using IEAK 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Register the uninstall apps for any custom components you’ve included in your Internet Explorer 11 package. Registering these apps lets your employees remove the components later, using **Uninstall or change a program** in the Control Panel.
## Register your uninstallation program
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/rsop-snapin-for-policy-settings-ieak11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/rsop-snapin-for-policy-settings-ieak11.md
index 8bf7232c7c..52e023abde 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/rsop-snapin-for-policy-settings-ieak11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/rsop-snapin-for-policy-settings-ieak11.md
@@ -16,7 +16,10 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Using the Resultant Set of Policy (RSoP) snap-in to review policy settings
-After you’ve deployed your custom Internet Explorer package to your employees, you can use the Resultant Set of Policy (RSoP) snap-in to view your created policy settings. The RSoP snap-in is a two-step process. First, you run the RSoP wizard to determine what information should be viewed. Second, you open the specific items in the console window to view the settings. For complete instructions about how to use RSoP, see [Resultant Set of Policy](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=259479).
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+After you’ve deployed your custom Internet Explorer package to your employees, you can use the Resultant Set of Policy (RSoP) snap-in to view your created policy settings. The RSoP snap-in is a two-step process. First, you run the RSoP wizard to determine what information should be viewed. Second, you open the specific items in the console window to view the settings. For complete instructions about how to use RSoP, see [Resultant Set of Policy](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2008-R2-and-2008/cc772175(v=ws.11)).
**To add the RSoP snap-in**
@@ -39,9 +42,4 @@ You’ll only need to go through the resulting RSoP Wizard first time you run th
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/search-providers-ieak11-wizard.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/search-providers-ieak11-wizard.md
index f66425a743..c092a2101b 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/search-providers-ieak11-wizard.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/search-providers-ieak11-wizard.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the Search Providers page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
The **Search Providers** page of the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11 lets you add a default search provider (typically, Bing®) and additional providers to your custom version of IE.
**Note** The Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11 offers improved and extended search settings. However, you can still optionally include support for Search Suggestions and Favicons, as well as Accelerator previews by using an .ins file from a previous version of IEAK.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/security-and-ieak11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/security-and-ieak11.md
index 71d99f8b9f..6c1c936553 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/security-and-ieak11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/security-and-ieak11.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Security features and IEAK 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Use Internet Explorer in conjunction with your new and existing security measures, to make sure the computers in your company aren’t compromised while on the Internet.
## Enhanced Protection Mode
@@ -35,21 +38,21 @@ Because of this, the custom .cab files created by the Internet Explorer Customiz
### Understanding digital certificates
To sign your package and custom programs digitally, you must first obtain a digital certificate. You can obtain a certificate from a certification authority or a privately-controlled certificate server. For more info about obtaining certificates or setting up a certificate server, see the following:
-- Microsoft-trusted certification authorities ([Windows root certificate program requirements](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=759697)).
+- Microsoft-trusted certification authorities ([Windows root certificate program requirements](/previous-versions//cc751157(v=technet.10))).
-- Certificates overview documentation ([Certificates](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=759698)).
+- Certificates overview documentation ([Certificates](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2008-R2-and-2008/cc732331(v=ws.11))).
-- Microsoft Active Directory Certificate Services ( [Active Directory Certificate Services](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=259521)).
+- Microsoft Active Directory Certificate Services ( [Active Directory Certificate Services](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2008-R2-and-2008/cc732625(v=ws.11))).
-- Enterprise public key infrastructure (PKI) snap-in documentation ([Enterprise PKI](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=259526)).
+- Enterprise public key infrastructure (PKI) snap-in documentation ([Enterprise PKI](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2008-R2-and-2008/cc771400(v=ws.11))).
After you get a certificate, you should note the public and private keys, which are a matched set of keys that are created by the software publisher for encryption and decryption. They are generated on your device at the time the certificate is requested, and your private key is never sent to the certification authority or any other party.
### Understanding code signing
Code signing varies, depening on how you plan to distribute your custom install package.
-- **If you plan to distribute custom packages over the Internet**, you must sign all custom components and the CMAK profile package (if used). Before you start the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard, make sure that both are signed. Typically, their respective manufacturers will have signed them. Otherwise, you can sign these using the Sign Tool (SignTool.exe) ( [SignTool.exe (Sign Tool)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=71298)) or use the File Signing Tool (Signcode.exe) ([Signcode.exe (File Signing Tool)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=71299)). You should read the documentation included with these tools for more info about all of the signing options.
-In addition, after you run the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard, we highly recommend that you sign the IEAK package and the branding.cab file (if you are using it separately from the package). You can do this also using the tools mentioned above. For more information, download Code-Signing Best Practices ([Code-Signing Best Practices](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=71300)).
+- **If you plan to distribute custom packages over the Internet**, you must sign all custom components and the CMAK profile package (if used). Before you start the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard, make sure that both are signed. Typically, their respective manufacturers will have signed them. Otherwise, you can sign these using the Sign Tool (SignTool.exe) ( [SignTool.exe (Sign Tool)](/dotnet/framework/tools/signtool-exe)) or use the File Signing Tool (Signcode.exe) ([Signcode.exe (File Signing Tool)](/previous-versions/9sh96ycy(v=vs.100))). You should read the documentation included with these tools for more info about all of the signing options.
+In addition, after you run the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard, we highly recommend that you sign the IEAK package and the branding.cab file (if you are using it separately from the package). You can do this also using the tools mentioned above. For more information, download Code-Signing Best Practices ([Code-Signing Best Practices](/previous-versions/windows/hardware/design/dn653556(v=vs.85))).
- **If you plan to distribute your custom packages over an intranet**, sign the custom files or preconfigure the Local intranet zone with a Low security setting, because the default security setting does not allow users to download unsigned programs or code.
@@ -62,5 +65,4 @@ You must keep your private key, private. To do this, we recommend:
- **Tamper-proof storage.** Save your private keys on secure, tamper-proof hardware devices.
-- **Security.** Protect your private keys using physical security measures, such as cameras and card readers.
-
+- **Security.** Protect your private keys using physical security measures, such as cameras and card readers.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/security-and-privacy-settings-ieak11-wizard.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/security-and-privacy-settings-ieak11-wizard.md
index 16ffc69435..c78a131719 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/security-and-privacy-settings-ieak11-wizard.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/security-and-privacy-settings-ieak11-wizard.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the Security and Privacy Settings page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
The **Security and Privacy Settings** page of the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11 lets you manage your security zones, privacy settings, and content ratings. These settings help restrict the types of content your employees can access from the Internet, including any content that might be considered offensive or otherwise inappropriate in a corporate setting.
**To use the Security and Privacy Settings page**
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/security-imports-ins-file-setting.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/security-imports-ins-file-setting.md
index e65b0e2b77..b4fd0c45b2 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/security-imports-ins-file-setting.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/security-imports-ins-file-setting.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Use the Security Imports .INS file to import security info
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
Info about how to import security information from your local device to your custom package.
|Name |Value |Description |
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/troubleshooting-custom-browser-pkg-ieak11.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/troubleshooting-custom-browser-pkg-ieak11.md
index 7b0db0bbc4..e4fcd7c739 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/troubleshooting-custom-browser-pkg-ieak11.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/troubleshooting-custom-browser-pkg-ieak11.md
@@ -16,6 +16,9 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Troubleshoot custom package and IEAK 11 problems
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
While the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard has been around for quite a while, there are still some known issues that you might encounter while deploying or managing your custom IE install package.
## I am unable to locate some of the wizard pages
@@ -98,14 +101,14 @@ Pressing the **F1** button on the **Automatic Version Synchronization** page of
## Certificate installation does not work on IEAK 11
IEAK 11 doesn't install certificates added using the Add a Root Certificate page of the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11. Administrators can manually install certificates using the Certificates Microsoft Management Console snap-in (Certmgr.msc) or using the command-line tool, Certificate Manager (Certmgr.exe).
->[!NOTE]
->This applies only when using the External licensing mode of IEAK 11.
+> [!NOTE]
+> This applies only when using the External licensing mode of IEAK 11.
## The Additional Settings page appears in the wrong language when using a localized version of IEAK 11
When using IEAK 11 in other languages, the settings on the Additional Settings page appear in the language of the target platform, regardless of the IEAK 11 language.
->[!NOTE]
->This applies only when using the Internal licensing mode of IEAK 11.
+> [!NOTE]
+> This applies only when using the Internal licensing mode of IEAK 11.
To work around this issue, run the customization wizard following these steps:
1. On the **Language Selection** page, select the language that matches the language of your installed IEAK 11.
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/url-ins-file-setting.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/url-ins-file-setting.md
index 965fda174e..06a1d3c029 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/url-ins-file-setting.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/url-ins-file-setting.md
@@ -1,40 +1,44 @@
----
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-description: Use the \[URL\] .INS file setting to decide whether to use an auto-configured proxy server.
-author: dansimp
-ms.prod: ie11
-ms.assetid: 05b09dfa-cf11-408d-92c2-b4ae434a59a7
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-title: Use the URL .INS file to use an auto-configured proxy server (Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 for IT Pros)
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
----
-
-
-# Use the URL .INS file to use an auto-configured proxy server
-Info about whether to use an auto-configured proxy server. If yes, this also includes the URLs to the pages that appear when your employees first connect to that server.
-
-|Name |Value |Description |
-|-----|------|------------|
-|AutoConfig |
**0.** Don’t automatically configure the browser.
**1.** Automatically configure the browser.
|Determines whether to automatically configure the customized browser on your employee’s device. |
-|AutoConfigJSURL |`` |The URL for the proxy auto-config file (.js or .jvs) |
-|AutoConfigTime |*integer* |Automatically configures the browser on your employee’s device after its run for a specified length of time. |
-|AutoConfigURL |`` |The URL for the proxy auto-config (.pac) file. |
-|FirstHomePage |`` |The page (URL) that appears the first time the custom browser is opened on the employee’s device. |
-|Help_Page |`` |The URL to your internal technical support site. |
-|Home_Page |`` |The URL to your default **Home** page. |
-|NoWelcome |
**0.** Display the **Welcome** page.
**1.** Don’t display the **Welcome** page.
|Determines whether to show the **Welcome** page the first time the browser’s used on an employee’s device. |
-|Quick_Link_1 |`` |The URL to your first Quick Link. |
-|Quick_Link_1_Name |`` |The name of the site associated with Quick_Link_1. |
-|Quick_Link_2 |`` |The URL to your second Quick Link. |
-|Quick_Link_2_Name |`` |The name of the site associated with Quick_Link_2. |
-|Quick_Link_X |`` |The URL to another Quick Link. |
-|Quick_Link_X_Icon |`` |A Quick Links icon (.ico) file. |
-|Quick_Link_X_Name |`` |The name of the site associated with another Quick Link. |
-|Quick_Link_X_Offline |
**0.** Don’t make the Quick Links available offline.
**1.** Make the Quick Links available offline.
|Determines whether to make the Quick Links available for offline browsing. |
-|Search_Page |`` |The URL to the default search page. |
-|UseLocalIns |
**0.** Don’t use a local .ins file.
**1.** Use a local .ins file.
|Determines whether to use a local Internet Settings (.ins) file |
-
+---
+ms.localizationpriority: medium
+ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
+description: Use the \[URL\] .INS file setting to decide whether to use an auto-configured proxy server.
+author: dansimp
+ms.prod: ie11
+ms.assetid: 05b09dfa-cf11-408d-92c2-b4ae434a59a7
+ms.reviewer:
+audience: itpro
+manager: dansimp
+ms.author: dansimp
+title: Use the URL .INS file to use an auto-configured proxy server (Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 for IT Pros)
+ms.sitesec: library
+ms.date: 07/27/2017
+---
+
+
+# Use the URL .INS file to use an auto-configured proxy server
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+Info about whether to use an auto-configured proxy server. If yes, this also includes the URLs to the pages that appear when your employees first connect to that server.
+
+|Name |Value |Description |
+|-----|------|------------|
+|AutoConfig |
**0.** Don’t automatically configure the browser.
**1.** Automatically configure the browser.
|Determines whether to automatically configure the customized browser on your employee’s device. |
+|AutoConfigJSURL |`` |The URL for the proxy auto-config file (.js or .jvs) |
+|AutoConfigTime |*integer* |Automatically configures the browser on your employee’s device after its run for a specified length of time. |
+|AutoConfigURL |`` |The URL for the proxy auto-config (.pac) file. |
+|FirstHomePage |`` |The page (URL) that appears the first time the custom browser is opened on the employee’s device. |
+|Help_Page |`` |The URL to your internal technical support site. |
+|Home_Page |`` |The URL to your default **Home** page. |
+|NoWelcome |
**0.** Display the **Welcome** page.
**1.** Don’t display the **Welcome** page.
|Determines whether to show the **Welcome** page the first time the browser’s used on an employee’s device. |
+|Quick_Link_1 |`` |The URL to your first Quick Link. |
+|Quick_Link_1_Name |`` |The name of the site associated with Quick_Link_1. |
+|Quick_Link_2 |`` |The URL to your second Quick Link. |
+|Quick_Link_2_Name |`` |The name of the site associated with Quick_Link_2. |
+|Quick_Link_X |`` |The URL to another Quick Link. |
+|Quick_Link_X_Icon |`` |A Quick Links icon (.ico) file. |
+|Quick_Link_X_Name |`` |The name of the site associated with another Quick Link. |
+|Quick_Link_X_Offline |
**0.** Don’t make the Quick Links available offline.
**1.** Make the Quick Links available offline.
|Determines whether to make the Quick Links available for offline browsing. |
+|Search_Page |`` |The URL to the default search page. |
+|UseLocalIns |
**0.** Don’t use a local .ins file.
**1.** Use a local .ins file.
|Determines whether to use a local Internet Settings (.ins) file |
+
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/user-experience-ieak11-wizard.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/user-experience-ieak11-wizard.md
index ed8f2be8f1..364daedbbc 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/user-experience-ieak11-wizard.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/user-experience-ieak11-wizard.md
@@ -1,60 +1,64 @@
----
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-description: How to use the User Experience page in the IEAK 11 Customization Wizard to decide user interaction with the Setup process.
-author: dansimp
-ms.prod: ie11
-ms.assetid: d3378058-e4f0-4a11-a888-b550af994bfa
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-title: Use the User Experience page in the IEAK 11 Wizard (Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 for IT Pros)
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
----
-
-
-# Use the User Experience page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
-The **User Experience** page of the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11 lets you decide how much you want your employees to interact with the custom package’s Setup process.
-
-**Note** You’ll only see this page if you are running the **Internal** version of the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11.
The customizations you make on this page only apply to Internet Explorer for the desktop on Windows 7.
-
-**To use the User Experience page**
-
-1. Choose how your employee should interact with Setup, including:
-
- - **Interactive installation**. Lets your employees change installation options while installing your custom package. This experience shows all of the progress and error messages throughout the process.
-
- - **Hands-free installation**. Lets you make all of the decisions for your employees. However, they’ll still see all of the progress and error messages throughout the process.
-
- - **Completely silent installation**. Lets you make all of the decisions for your employees and hides all of the progress and error messages. Because this mode is completely silent, if the installation fails, your employees won’t know and they won’t be able to run the installation package again.
-
Both the hands-free and completely silent installation options will:
-
- - Answer prompts so Setup can continue.
-
- - Accept the license agreement.
-
- - Determine that Internet Explorer 11 is installed and not just downloaded.
-
- - Perform your specific installation type.
-
- - Install IE in the default location, unless it is already installed. In that case, the new version of the browser is installed in the same location as the previous version.
-
-2. Choose if your employee’s device will restart at the end of Setup.
-
- - **Default**. Prompts your employees to restart after installing IE.
-
- - **No restart**. Doesn’t restart the computer after installing IE. The employee will have to manually restart later.
-
- - **Force restart**. Automatically restarts the computer after installing IE.
-
-3. Click **Next** to go to the [Browser User Interface](browser-ui-ieak11-wizard.md) page or **Back** to go to the [Internal Install](internal-install-ieak11-wizard.md) page.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+---
+ms.localizationpriority: medium
+ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
+description: How to use the User Experience page in the IEAK 11 Customization Wizard to decide user interaction with the Setup process.
+author: dansimp
+ms.prod: ie11
+ms.assetid: d3378058-e4f0-4a11-a888-b550af994bfa
+ms.reviewer:
+audience: itpro
+manager: dansimp
+ms.author: dansimp
+title: Use the User Experience page in the IEAK 11 Wizard (Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 for IT Pros)
+ms.sitesec: library
+ms.date: 07/27/2017
+---
+
+
+# Use the User Experience page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+The **User Experience** page of the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11 lets you decide how much you want your employees to interact with the custom package’s Setup process.
+
+**Note** You’ll only see this page if you are running the **Internal** version of the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11.
The customizations you make on this page only apply to Internet Explorer for the desktop on Windows 7.
+
+**To use the User Experience page**
+
+1. Choose how your employee should interact with Setup, including:
+
+ - **Interactive installation**. Lets your employees change installation options while installing your custom package. This experience shows all of the progress and error messages throughout the process.
+
+ - **Hands-free installation**. Lets you make all of the decisions for your employees. However, they’ll still see all of the progress and error messages throughout the process.
+
+ - **Completely silent installation**. Lets you make all of the decisions for your employees and hides all of the progress and error messages. Because this mode is completely silent, if the installation fails, your employees won’t know and they won’t be able to run the installation package again.
+
Both the hands-free and completely silent installation options will:
+
+ - Answer prompts so Setup can continue.
+
+ - Accept the license agreement.
+
+ - Determine that Internet Explorer 11 is installed and not just downloaded.
+
+ - Perform your specific installation type.
+
+ - Install IE in the default location, unless it is already installed. In that case, the new version of the browser is installed in the same location as the previous version.
+
+2. Choose if your employee’s device will restart at the end of Setup.
+
+ - **Default**. Prompts your employees to restart after installing IE.
+
+ - **No restart**. Doesn’t restart the computer after installing IE. The employee will have to manually restart later.
+
+ - **Force restart**. Automatically restarts the computer after installing IE.
+
+3. Click **Next** to go to the [Browser User Interface](browser-ui-ieak11-wizard.md) page or **Back** to go to the [Internal Install](internal-install-ieak11-wizard.md) page.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/using-internet-settings-ins-files.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/using-internet-settings-ins-files.md
index 3efd12ffa8..c9bb888bed 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/using-internet-settings-ins-files.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/using-internet-settings-ins-files.md
@@ -1,37 +1,41 @@
----
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-description: Info about how to use Internet Settings (.ins) files and the IEAK 11 to configure your custom browser package.
-author: dansimp
-ms.prod: ie11
-ms.assetid: a24a7cdb-681e-4f34-a53c-6d8383c5f977
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-title: Using Internet Settings (.INS) files with IEAK 11 (Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 for IT Pros)
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
----
-
-
-# Using Internet Settings (.INS) files with IEAK 11
-Use the Internet Settings (.ins) files and the Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) to configure your custom browser and its components. You can create multiple versions of your custom package by customizing copies of this file.
-
-Here's a list of the available .INS file settings:
-
-|Setting |Description |
-|-----------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-|[Branding](branding-ins-file-setting.md) |Customize the branding and setup information in your browser package. |
-|[BrowserToolbars](browsertoolbars-ins-file-setting.md) |Customize the appearance of the IE toolbar. |
-|[CabSigning](cabsigning-ins-file-setting.md) |Digital signature information for your programs. |
-|[ConnectionSettings](connectionsettings-ins-file-setting.md) |Info about the networking connection settings used to install your custom package. |
-|[CustomBranding](custombranding-ins-file-setting.md) |URL location to your branding cabinet (.cab) file. |
-|[ExtRegInf](extreginf-ins-file-setting.md) |Names of your Setup information (.inf) files and the installation mode for components. |
-|[FavoritesEx](favoritesex-ins-file-setting.md) |Add a path to your icon file for **Favorites**, decide whether **Favorites** are available offline, and add URLs to each**Favorites** site. |
-|[HideCustom](hidecustom-ins-file-setting.md) |Whether to hide the globally unique identifier (GUID) for each custom component. |
-|[ISP_Security](isp-security-ins-file-setting.md) |The root certificate you’re adding to your custom package. |
-|[Media](media-ins-file-setting.md) |Types of media in which your custom installation package is available. |
-|[Proxy](proxy-ins-file-setting.md) |Whether to use a proxy server. |
-|[Security Imports](security-imports-ins-file-setting.md) |Whether to import security information for your custom package. |
-|[URL](url-ins-file-setting.md) |Whether to use an auto-configured proxy server. |
-
+---
+ms.localizationpriority: medium
+ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
+description: Info about how to use Internet Settings (.ins) files and the IEAK 11 to configure your custom browser package.
+author: dansimp
+ms.prod: ie11
+ms.assetid: a24a7cdb-681e-4f34-a53c-6d8383c5f977
+ms.reviewer:
+audience: itpro
+manager: dansimp
+ms.author: dansimp
+title: Using Internet Settings (.INS) files with IEAK 11 (Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 for IT Pros)
+ms.sitesec: library
+ms.date: 07/27/2017
+---
+
+
+# Using Internet Settings (.INS) files with IEAK 11
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+Use the Internet Settings (.ins) files and the Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 (IEAK 11) to configure your custom browser and its components. You can create multiple versions of your custom package by customizing copies of this file.
+
+Here's a list of the available .INS file settings:
+
+|Setting |Description |
+|-----------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+|[Branding](branding-ins-file-setting.md) |Customize the branding and setup information in your browser package. |
+|[BrowserToolbars](browsertoolbars-ins-file-setting.md) |Customize the appearance of the IE toolbar. |
+|[CabSigning](cabsigning-ins-file-setting.md) |Digital signature information for your programs. |
+|[ConnectionSettings](connectionsettings-ins-file-setting.md) |Info about the networking connection settings used to install your custom package. |
+|[CustomBranding](custombranding-ins-file-setting.md) |URL location to your branding cabinet (.cab) file. |
+|[ExtRegInf](extreginf-ins-file-setting.md) |Names of your Setup information (.inf) files and the installation mode for components. |
+|[FavoritesEx](favoritesex-ins-file-setting.md) |Add a path to your icon file for **Favorites**, decide whether **Favorites** are available offline, and add URLs to each**Favorites** site. |
+|[HideCustom](hidecustom-ins-file-setting.md) |Whether to hide the globally unique identifier (GUID) for each custom component. |
+|[ISP_Security](isp-security-ins-file-setting.md) |The root certificate you’re adding to your custom package. |
+|[Media](media-ins-file-setting.md) |Types of media in which your custom installation package is available. |
+|[Proxy](proxy-ins-file-setting.md) |Whether to use a proxy server. |
+|[Security Imports](security-imports-ins-file-setting.md) |Whether to import security information for your custom package. |
+|[URL](url-ins-file-setting.md) |Whether to use an auto-configured proxy server. |
+
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/what-ieak-can-do-for-you.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/what-ieak-can-do-for-you.md
index 5e8b4e979e..b6c2cc7087 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/what-ieak-can-do-for-you.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/what-ieak-can-do-for-you.md
@@ -1,68 +1,72 @@
----
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.pagetype: security
-description: Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK) helps corporations, Internet service providers (ISPs), Internet content providers (ICPs), and independent software vendors (ISVs) to deploy and manage web-based solutions.
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.manager: elizapo
-ms.prod: ie11
-ms.assetid:
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-title: What IEAK can do for you
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.date: 05/10/2018
----
-
-# What IEAK can do for you
-
-Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK) helps corporations, Internet service providers (ISPs), Internet content providers (ICPs), and independent software vendors (ISVs) to deploy and manage web-based solutions.
-
-IEAK 10 and newer includes the ability to install using one of the following installation modes:
-
-- Internal
-
-- External
-
-## IEAK 11 users
-Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK) helps corporations, Internet service providers (ISPs), Internet content providers (ICPs), and independent software vendors (ISVs) to deploy and manage web-based solutions.
-
-IEAK 10 and newer includes the ability to install using one of the following installation modes:
-- Internal
-- External
-
->[!NOTE]
->IEAK 11 works in network environments, with or without Microsoft Active Directory service.
-
-
-### Corporations
-IEAK helps corporate administrators establish version control, centrally distribute and manage browser installation, configure automatic connection profiles, and customize large portions of Internet Explorer, including features, security, communications settings, and other important functionality.
-
-Corporate administrators install IEAK using Internal mode (for Internet Explorer 10 or newer) or Corporate mode (for Internet Explorer 9 or older).
-
-### Internet service providers
-IEAK helps ISPs customize, deploy and distribute, add third-party add-ons, search providers, and custom components, as well as include web slices and accelerators all as part of a custom Internet Explorer installation package.
-
-ISPs install IEAK using External mode (for Internet Explorer 10 or newer) or Internet Service Provider (ISP) mode (for Internet Explorer 9 or older).
-
-### Internet content providers
-IEAK helps ICPs customize the appearance of Internet Explorer and its Setup program, including letting you add your company name or specific wording to the Title bar, set up a customer support webpage, set up the user home page and search providers, add links to the Favorites and the Explorer bars, add optional components, web slices and accelerators, and determine which compatibility mode Internet Explorer should use.
-
-ICPs install IEAK using External mode (for Internet Explorer 10 or newer) or Internet Content Provider (ICP) mode (for Internet Explorer 9 or older)
-
-### Independent software vendors
-IEAK helps ISVs distribute (and redistribute) a custom version of Internet Explorer that can include custom components, programs, and controls (like the web browser control) that you create for your users. ISVs can also determine home pages, search providers, and add websites to the Favorites bar.
-
-ISVs install IEAK using External mode (for Internet Explorer 10 or newer) or Internet Content Provider (ICP) mode (for Internet Explorer 9 or older).
-
-## Additional resources
-
-- [IEAK 11 - Frequently Asked Questions](../ie11-faq/faq-ieak11.md)
-- [Download IEAK 11](ieak-information-and-downloads.md)
-- [IEAK 11 overview](index.md)
-- [IEAK 11 administrators guide](https://docs.microsoft.com/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/index)
-- [IEAK 11 licensing guidelines](licensing-version-and-features-ieak11.md)
-- [Internet Explorer 11 - FAQ for IT Pros](../ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11.md)
-- [Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) - Deployment Guide for IT Pros](../ie11-deploy-guide/index.md)
-- [Microsoft Edge - Deployment Guide for IT Pros](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=760643)
+---
+ms.localizationpriority: medium
+ms.mktglfcycl: support
+ms.pagetype: security
+description: Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK) helps corporations, Internet service providers (ISPs), Internet content providers (ICPs), and independent software vendors (ISVs) to deploy and manage web-based solutions.
+author: dansimp
+ms.author: dansimp
+ms.manager: elizapo
+ms.prod: ie11
+ms.assetid:
+ms.reviewer:
+audience: itpro
+manager: dansimp
+title: What IEAK can do for you
+ms.sitesec: library
+ms.date: 05/10/2018
+---
+
+# What IEAK can do for you
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+
+Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK) helps corporations, Internet service providers (ISPs), Internet content providers (ICPs), and independent software vendors (ISVs) to deploy and manage web-based solutions.
+
+IEAK 10 and newer includes the ability to install using one of the following installation modes:
+
+- Internal
+
+- External
+
+## IEAK 11 users
+Internet Explorer Administration Kit (IEAK) helps corporations, Internet service providers (ISPs), Internet content providers (ICPs), and independent software vendors (ISVs) to deploy and manage web-based solutions.
+
+IEAK 10 and newer includes the ability to install using one of the following installation modes:
+- Internal
+- External
+
+> [!NOTE]
+> IEAK 11 works in network environments, with or without Microsoft Active Directory service.
+
+
+### Corporations
+IEAK helps corporate administrators establish version control, centrally distribute and manage browser installation, configure automatic connection profiles, and customize large portions of Internet Explorer, including features, security, communications settings, and other important functionality.
+
+Corporate administrators install IEAK using Internal mode (for Internet Explorer 10 or newer) or Corporate mode (for Internet Explorer 9 or older).
+
+### Internet service providers
+IEAK helps ISPs customize, deploy and distribute, add third-party add-ons, search providers, and custom components, as well as include web slices and accelerators all as part of a custom Internet Explorer installation package.
+
+ISPs install IEAK using External mode (for Internet Explorer 10 or newer) or Internet Service Provider (ISP) mode (for Internet Explorer 9 or older).
+
+### Internet content providers
+IEAK helps ICPs customize the appearance of Internet Explorer and its Setup program, including letting you add your company name or specific wording to the Title bar, set up a customer support webpage, set up the user home page and search providers, add links to the Favorites and the Explorer bars, add optional components, web slices and accelerators, and determine which compatibility mode Internet Explorer should use.
+
+ICPs install IEAK using External mode (for Internet Explorer 10 or newer) or Internet Content Provider (ICP) mode (for Internet Explorer 9 or older)
+
+### Independent software vendors
+IEAK helps ISVs distribute (and redistribute) a custom version of Internet Explorer that can include custom components, programs, and controls (like the web browser control) that you create for your users. ISVs can also determine home pages, search providers, and add websites to the Favorites bar.
+
+ISVs install IEAK using External mode (for Internet Explorer 10 or newer) or Internet Content Provider (ICP) mode (for Internet Explorer 9 or older).
+
+## Additional resources
+
+- [IEAK 11 - Frequently Asked Questions](../ie11-faq/faq-ieak11.yml)
+- [Download IEAK 11](ieak-information-and-downloads.md)
+- [IEAK 11 overview](index.md)
+- [IEAK 11 administrators guide](./index.md)
+- [IEAK 11 licensing guidelines](licensing-version-and-features-ieak11.md)
+- [Internet Explorer 11 - FAQ for IT Pros](../ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11.yml)
+- [Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) - Deployment Guide for IT Pros](../ie11-deploy-guide/index.md)
+- [Microsoft Edge - Deployment Guide for IT Pros](/microsoft-edge/deploy/)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/wizard-complete-ieak11-wizard.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/wizard-complete-ieak11-wizard.md
index e81b0eedea..03de7ed423 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/wizard-complete-ieak11-wizard.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/ie11-ieak/wizard-complete-ieak11-wizard.md
@@ -1,31 +1,35 @@
----
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-description: How to use the Wizard Complete - Next Steps page in the IEAK 11 Customization Wizard to build your custom Internet Explorer install package.
-author: dansimp
-ms.prod: ie11
-ms.assetid: aaaac88a-2022-4d0b-893c-b2404b45cabc
-ms.reviewer:
-audience: itpro
manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-title: Use the Wizard Complete - Next Steps page in the IEAK 11 Wizard (Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 for IT Pros)
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
----
-
-
-# Use the Wizard Complete - Next Steps page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
-The **Wizard Complete – Next Steps** page of the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11 lets you build your custom installation package, after you click **Finish**.
-
-In most cases, your next steps will be to prepare your files for installation from your network or from another distribution method. If you haven’t already done it, you’ll need to digitally sign any program or .cab files that are going to be distributed over the Internet or over an intranet that isn’t configured to allow downloads.
-
-After that, the steps you’ll use to distribute your customized browser will vary, depending on your version of IEAK (Internal or External) and the media you’re using to distribute the package. For more information, see the [Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) - Deployment Guide for IT Pros](../ie11-deploy-guide/index.md).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+---
+ms.localizationpriority: medium
+ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
+description: How to use the Wizard Complete - Next Steps page in the IEAK 11 Customization Wizard to build your custom Internet Explorer install package.
+author: dansimp
+ms.prod: ie11
+ms.assetid: aaaac88a-2022-4d0b-893c-b2404b45cabc
+ms.reviewer:
+audience: itpro
+manager: dansimp
+ms.author: dansimp
+title: Use the Wizard Complete - Next Steps page in the IEAK 11 Wizard (Internet Explorer Administration Kit 11 for IT Pros)
+ms.sitesec: library
+ms.date: 07/27/2017
+---
+
+
+# Use the Wizard Complete - Next Steps page in the IEAK 11 Wizard
+
+[!INCLUDE [Microsoft 365 workloads end of support for IE11](../includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md)]
+
+The **Wizard Complete – Next Steps** page of the Internet Explorer Customization Wizard 11 lets you build your custom installation package, after you click **Finish**.
+
+In most cases, your next steps will be to prepare your files for installation from your network or from another distribution method. If you haven’t already done it, you’ll need to digitally sign any program or .cab files that are going to be distributed over the Internet or over an intranet that isn’t configured to allow downloads.
+
+After that, the steps you’ll use to distribute your customized browser will vary, depending on your version of IEAK (Internal or External) and the media you’re using to distribute the package. For more information, see the [Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) - Deployment Guide for IT Pros](../ie11-deploy-guide/index.md).
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c92fd17fd3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/includes/microsoft-365-ie-end-of-support.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+---
+author: pamgreen-msft
+ms.author: pamgreen
+ms.date: 10/02/2018
+ms.reviewer:
+audience: itpro
+manager: pamgreen
+ms.prod: ie11
+ms.topic: include
+---
+
+> [!IMPORTANT]
+> The Internet Explorer 11 desktop application will be retired and go out of support on June 15, 2022. For a list of what’s in scope, see [the FAQ](https://aka.ms/IEModeFAQ). The same IE11 apps and sites you use today can open in Microsoft Edge with Internet Explorer mode. [Learn more here](https://blogs.windows.com/msedgedev/).
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/index.md b/browsers/internet-explorer/index.md
index 6c3085d888..cba6e52972 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/index.md
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/index.md
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ ms.date: 07/27/2017
# Internet Explorer 11 (IE11)
Find info about Internet Explorer 11 that's important to IT Pros.
-- [Internet Explorer 11 - FAQ for IT Pros](ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11.md)
+- [Internet Explorer 11 - FAQ for IT Pros](ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11.yml)
- [Internet Explorer 11 (IE11) - Deployment Guide for IT Pros](ie11-deploy-guide/index.md)
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/internet-explorer.yml b/browsers/internet-explorer/internet-explorer.yml
index 4c11b5c85e..6aa0242523 100644
--- a/browsers/internet-explorer/internet-explorer.yml
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/internet-explorer.yml
@@ -1,69 +1,174 @@
-### YamlMime:YamlDocument
+### YamlMime:Landing
-documentType: LandingData
-title: Internet Explorer 11
+title: Internet Explorer 11 documentation
+summary: Consistent, reliable web browsing on Windows 7, Windows 8.1, and Windows 10, with the security, performance, backward compatibility, and modern standards support that large organizations need.
metadata:
- document_id:
- title: Internet Explorer 11
- description: Consistent, reliable web browsing on Windows 7, Windows 8.1, and Windows 10, with the security, performance, backward compatibility, and modern standards support that large organizations need.
- keywords: Internet Explorer 11. IE11
- ms.localizationpriority: medium
- author: lizap
+ title: Internet Explorer 11 documentation
+ description: Consistent, reliable web browsing on Windows 7, Windows 8.1, and Windows 10, with the security, performance, backward compatibility, and modern standards support that large organizations need.
+ ms.topic: landing-page
+ author: lizap
ms.author: elizapo
- manager: dougkim
- ms.topic: article
- ms.devlang: na
+ ms.date: 07/06/2020
-sections:
-- items:
- - type: markdown
- text: "
- Consistent, reliable web browsing on Windows 7, Windows 8.1, and Windows 10, with the security, performance, backward compatibility, and modern standards support that large organizations need.
- "
-- title: Explore
-- items:
- - type: markdown
- text: "
- Find tools, step-by-step guides, updates, and other resources to help you get started.
-
- "
-- title: Plan
-- items:
- - type: markdown
- text: "
- Find information and tips to help you assess compatibility and prioritize processes as you plan for Internet Explorer 11.
-
- "
-- title: Deploy
-- items:
- - type: markdown
- text: "
- Find the resources you need to successfully deploy Internet Explorer 11 in your organization.
-
- "
-- title: Manage
-- items:
- - type: markdown
- text: "
- Find everything you need to manage Internet Explorer 11 effectively in your organization. Get information on Group Policy, blocked out-of-date ActiveX controls, scripts, and more.
-
- "
-- title: Support
-- items:
- - type: markdown
- text: "
- Get help from product specialists and community experts, and find solutions to commonly encountered issues.
-
**Sign up for the Windows IT Pro Insider** Get the latest tools, tips, and expert guidance on deployment, management, security, and more. Learn more
**Microsoft Edge Dev blog** Keep up with the latest browser trends, security tips, and news for IT professionals. Read the blog
**Microsoft Edge Dev on Twitter** Get the latest news and updates from the Microsoft Web Platform team. Visit Twitter
-
- "
+# linkListType: architecture | concept | deploy | download | get-started | how-to-guide | learn | overview | quickstart | reference | sample | tutorial | video | whats-new
+
+landingContent:
+# Cards and links should be based on top customer tasks or top subjects
+# Start card title with a verb
+ # Card
+ - title: Explore
+ linkLists:
+ - linkListType: get-started
+ links:
+ - text: IE11 features and tools
+ url: ./ie11-deploy-guide/updated-features-and-tools-with-ie11.md
+ - text: System requirements and language support
+ url: ./ie11-deploy-guide/system-requirements-and-language-support-for-ie11.md
+ - text: Frequently asked questions
+ url: ./ie11-faq/faq-for-it-pros-ie11.yml
+ - text: Internet Explorer 11 deployment guide
+ url: ./ie11-deploy-guide/index.md
+ - text: Use Enterprise Mode to improve compatibility
+ url: /microsoft-edge/deploy/emie-to-improve-compatibility
+ - text: Lifecycle FAQ - Internet Explorer
+ url: https://support.microsoft.com/help/17454/lifecycle-faq-internet-explorer
+ - linkListType: download
+ links:
+ - text: Download IE11 with Windows 10
+ url: https://www.microsoft.com/evalcenter/evaluate-windows-10-enterprise
+ - text: Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema, v.2)
+ url: https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=49974
+ - text: Cumulative security updates for Internet Explorer 11
+ url: https://www.catalog.update.microsoft.com/Search.aspx?q=cumulative%20security%20update%20for%20internet%20explorer%2011
+ - linkListType: learn
+ links:
+ - text: Getting started with Windows 10 for IT professionals
+ url: https://mva.microsoft.com/training-courses/getting-started-with-windows-10-for-it-professionals-10629?l=fCowqpy8_5905094681
+ - text: 'Windows 10: Top Features for IT Pros'
+ url: https://mva.microsoft.com/training-courses/windows-10-top-features-for-it-pros-16319?l=xBnT2ihhC_7306218965
+ - text: Manage and modernize Internet Explorer with Enterprise Mode
+ url: https://channel9.msdn.com/events/teched/newzealand/2014/pcit307
+ - text: 'Virtual Lab: Enterprise Mode'
+ url: https://www.microsoft.com/handsonlabs/SelfPacedLabs/?storyGuid=e4155067-2c7e-4b46-8496-eca38bedca02
+
+ # Card
+ - title: Plan
+ linkLists:
+ - linkListType: get-started
+ links:
+ - text: What is Enterprise Mode?
+ url: ./ie11-deploy-guide/what-is-enterprise-mode.md
+ - text: Tips and tricks to manage Internet Explorer compatibility
+ url: ./ie11-deploy-guide/tips-and-tricks-to-manage-ie-compatibility.md
+ - text: Download the Enterprise Site Discovery Toolkit
+ url: https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=44570
+ - text: Collect data using Enterprise Site Discovery
+ url: ./ie11-deploy-guide/collect-data-using-enterprise-site-discovery.md
+ - text: Manage Windows upgrades with Upgrade Readiness
+ url: /windows/deployment/upgrade/manage-windows-upgrades-with-upgrade-readiness
+ - text: 'Demo: Plan and manage Windows 10 upgrades and feature updates with'
+ url: https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/t5/Microsoft-Ignite-Content-2017/Windows-Analytics-Plan-and-manage-Windows-10-upgrades-and/td-p/98639
+ - linkListType: how-to-guide
+ links:
+ - text: Turn on Enterprise Mode and use a site list
+ url: ./ie11-deploy-guide/turn-on-enterprise-mode-and-use-a-site-list.md
+ - text: Add sites to the Enterprise Mode site list
+ url: ./ie11-deploy-guide/add-multiple-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-2-schema-and-enterprise-mode-tool.md
+ - text: Edit the Enterprise Mode site list
+ url: ./ie11-deploy-guide/edit-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-enterprise-mode-site-list-manager.md
+ - text: Turn on local control and logging for Enterprise Mode
+ url: ./ie11-deploy-guide/turn-on-local-control-and-logging-for-enterprise-mode.md
+
+ # Card
+ - title: Deploy
+ linkLists:
+ - linkListType: get-started
+ links:
+ - text: IEAK 11 user's guide
+ url: ./ie11-ieak/index.md
+ - text: Download IEAK 11
+ url: ./ie11-ieak/ieak-information-and-downloads.md
+ - text: Frequently asked questions about IEAK 11
+ url: ./ie11-faq/faq-ieak11.yml
+ - text: Customization and distribution guidelines
+ url: ./ie11-ieak/licensing-version-and-features-ieak11.md#customization-guidelines
+ - linkListType: deploy
+ links:
+ - text: Install Internet Explorer 11 through automatic updates (recommended)
+ url: ./ie11-deploy-guide/ie11-delivery-through-automatic-updates.md
+ - text: Install Internet Explorer 11 as part of an operating system deployment
+ url: ./ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-operating-system-deployment-systems.md
+ - text: Install Internet Explorer 11 over the network
+ url: ./ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-the-network.md
+ - text: Install Internet Explorer 11 with System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager
+ url: ./ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-system-center-configuration-manager.md
+ - text: Install Internet Explorer 11 with Windows Server Update Services (WSUS)
+ url: ./ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-windows-server-update-services-wsus.md
+ - text: Install Internet Explorer 11 with Microsoft Intune
+ url: ./ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-microsoft-intune.md
+ - text: Install Internet Explorer 11 with third-party tools
+ url: ./ie11-deploy-guide/install-ie11-using-third-party-tools.md
+
+ # Card
+ - title: Manage
+ linkLists:
+ - linkListType: tutorial
+ links:
+ - text: Group Policy for beginners
+ url: /previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-7/hh147307(v=ws.10)
+ - text: New Group Policy settings for IE11
+ url: ./ie11-deploy-guide/new-group-policy-settings-for-ie11.md
+ - text: Administrative templates for IE11
+ url: https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=40905
+ - text: Group Policy preferences for IE11
+ url: ./ie11-deploy-guide/group-policy-preferences-and-ie11.md
+ - text: Configure Group Policy preferences
+ url: https://support.microsoft.com/help/2898604/how-to-configure-group-policy-preference-settings-for-internet-explorer-11-in-windows-8.1-or-windows-server-2012-r2
+ - text: Blocked out-of-date ActiveX controls
+ url: ./ie11-deploy-guide/blocked-out-of-date-activex-controls.md
+ - text: Out-of-date ActiveX control blocking
+ url: ./ie11-deploy-guide/out-of-date-activex-control-blocking.md
+ - text: Update to block out-of-date ActiveX controls in Internet Explorer
+ url: https://support.microsoft.com/help/2991000/update-to-block-out-of-date-activex-controls-in-internet-explorer
+ - text: Script to join user to AD with automatic Local user Profile Migration
+ url: https://gallery.technet.microsoft.com/scriptcenter/script-to-join-active-7b16d9d3
+ - text: Scripts for IT professionals
+ url: https://gallery.technet.microsoft.com/scriptcenter/site/search?query=Microsoft%20Edge%20or%20Internet
+
+ # Card
+ - title: Support
+ linkLists:
+ - linkListType: get-started
+ links:
+ - text: Change or reset Internet Explorer settings
+ url: https://support.microsoft.com/help/17441/windows-internet-explorer-change-reset-settings
+ - text: Troubleshoot problems with setup, installation, auto configuration, and more
+ url: ./ie11-deploy-guide/troubleshoot-ie11.md
+ - text: Disable VBScript execution in Internet Explorer for Internet Zone and Restricted Sites Zone
+ url: https://support.microsoft.com/help/4012494/option-to-disable-vbscript-execution-in-internet-explorer-for-internet
+ - text: Frequently asked questions about IEAK 11
+ url: ./ie11-faq/faq-ieak11.yml
+ - text: Internet Explorer 8, 9, 10, 11 forum
+ url: https://social.technet.microsoft.com/forums/ie/home?forum=ieitprocurrentver
+ - text: Contact a Microsoft support professional
+ url: https://support.microsoft.com/contactus
+ - text: Support options for Microsoft Partners
+ url: https://mspartner.microsoft.com/Pages/Support/get-support.aspx
+ - text: Microsoft Services Premier Support
+ url: https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/microsoftservices/support.aspx
+ - text: Microsoft Small Business Support Center
+ url: https://smallbusiness.support.microsoft.com/product/internet-explorer
+ - text: General support
+ url: https://support.microsoft.com/products/internet-explorer
+
+ # Card
+ - title: Stay informed
+ linkLists:
+ - linkListType: get-started
+ links:
+ - text: Sign up for the Windows IT Pro Insider
+ url: https://aka.ms/windows-it-pro-insider
+ - text: Microsoft Edge Dev blog
+ url: https://blogs.windows.com/msedgedev
+ - text: Microsoft Edge Dev on Twitter
+ url: https://twitter.com/MSEdgeDev
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/browsers/internet-explorer/kb-support/ie-edge-faqs.yml b/browsers/internet-explorer/kb-support/ie-edge-faqs.yml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..50862d688d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/browsers/internet-explorer/kb-support/ie-edge-faqs.yml
@@ -0,0 +1,245 @@
+### YamlMime:FAQ
+metadata:
+ title: IE and Microsoft Edge FAQ for IT Pros
+ description: Describes frequently asked questions about Internet Explorer and Microsoft Edge for IT professionals.
+ audience: ITPro
+ manager: msmets
+ author: ramakoni1
+ ms.author: ramakoni
+ ms.reviewer: ramakoni, DEV_Triage
+ ms.prod: internet-explorer
+ ms.technology:
+ ms.topic: kb-support
+ ms.custom: CI=111020
+ ms.localizationpriority: medium
+ ms.date: 01/23/2020
+
+title: Internet Explorer and Microsoft Edge frequently asked questions (FAQ) for IT Pros
+summary: |
+
+sections:
+ - name: Cookie-related questions
+ questions:
+ - question: |
+ What is a cookie?
+ answer: |
+ An HTTP cookie (the web cookie or browser cookie) is a small piece of data that a server sends to the user's web browser. The web browser may store the cookie and return it to the server together with the next request. For example, a cookie might be used to indicate whether two requests come from the same browser in order to allow the user to remain logged-in. The cookie records stateful information for the stateless HTTP protocol.
+
+ - question: |
+ How does Internet Explorer handle cookies?
+ answer: |
+ For more information about how Internet Explorer handles cookies, see the following articles:
+
+ - [Beware Cookie Sharing in Cross-Zone Scenarios](/archive/blogs/ieinternals/beware-cookie-sharing-in-cross-zone-scenarios)
+ - [A Quick Look at P3P](/archive/blogs/ieinternals/a-quick-look-at-p3p)
+ - [Internet Explorer Cookie Internals FAQ](/archive/blogs/ieinternals/internet-explorer-cookie-internals-faq)
+ - [Privacy Beyond Blocking Cookies](/archive/blogs/ie/privacy-beyond-blocking-cookies-bringing-awareness-to-third-party-content)
+ - [Description of Cookies](https://support.microsoft.com/help/260971/description-of-cookies)
+
+ - question: |
+ Where does Internet Explorer store cookies?
+ answer: |
+ To see where Internet Explorer stores its cookies, follow these steps:
+
+ 1. Start File Explorer.
+ 2. Select **Views** \> **Change folder and search options**.
+ 3. In the **Folder Options** dialog box, select **View**.
+ 4. In **Advanced settings**, select **Do not show hidden files, folders, or drivers**.
+ 5. Clear **Hide protected operation system files (Recommended)**.
+ 6. Select **Apply**.
+ 7. Select **OK**.
+
+ The following are the folder locations where the cookies are stored:
+
+ **In Windows 10**
+ C:\Users\username\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache
+
+ **In Windows 8 and Windows 8.1**
+ C:\Users\username\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCookies
+
+ **In Windows 7**
+ C:\Users\username\AppData\Roaming\Microsoft\Windows\Cookies
+ C:\Users\username\AppData\Roaming\Microsoft\Windows\Cookies\Low
+
+ - question: |
+ What is the per-domain cookie limit?
+ answer: |
+ Since the June 2018 cumulative updates for Internet Explorer and Microsoft Edge, the per-domain cookie limit is increased from 50 to 180 for both browsers. The cookies vary by path. So, if the same cookie is set for the same domain but for different paths, it's essentially a new cookie.
+
+ There's still a 5 Kilobytes (KB) limit on the size of the cookie header that is sent out. This limit can cause some cookies to be lost after they exceed that value.
+
+ The JavaScript limitation was updated to 10 KB from 4 KB.
+
+ For more information, see [Internet Explorer Cookie Internals (FAQ)](/archive/blogs/ieinternals/internet-explorer-cookie-internals-faq).
+
+ - name: Additional information about cookie limits
+ questions:
+ - question: |
+ What does the Cookie RFC allow?
+ answer: |
+ RFC 2109 defines how cookies should be implemented, and it defines minimum values that browsers support. According to the RFC, browsers would ideally have no limits on the size and number of cookies that a browser can handle. To meet the specifications, the user agent should support the following:
+
+ - At least 300 cookies total
+ - At least 20 cookies per unique host or domain name
+
+ For practicality, individual browser makers set a limit on the total number of cookies that any one domain or unique host can set. They also limit the total number of cookies that can be stored on a computer.
+
+ - question: |
+ Cookie size limit per domain
+ answer: |
+ Some browsers also limit the amount of space that any one domain can use for cookies. This means that if your browser sets a limit of 4,096 bytes per domain for cookies, 4,096 bytes is the maximum available space in that domain even though you can set up to 180 cookies.
+
+ - name: Proxy Auto Configuration (PAC)-related questions
+ questions:
+ - question: |
+ Is an example Proxy Auto Configuration (PAC) file available?
+ answer: |
+ Here is a simple PAC file:
+
+ ```vb
+ function FindProxyForURL(url, host)
+ {
+ return "PROXY proxyserver:portnumber";
+ }
+ ```
+
+ > [!NOTE]
+ > The previous PAC always returns the **proxyserver:portnumber** proxy.
+
+ For more information about how to write a PAC file and about the different functions in a PAC file, see [the FindProxyForURL website](https://findproxyforurl.com/).
+
+ **Third-party information disclaimer**
+ The third-party products that this article discusses are manufactured by companies that are independent of Microsoft. Microsoft makes no warranty, implied or otherwise, about the performance or reliability of these products.
+
+ - question: |
+ How to improve performance by using PAC scripts
+ answer: |
+ - [Browser is slow to respond when you use an automatic configuration script](https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/topic/effa1aa0-8e95-543d-6606-03ac68e3f490)
+ - [Optimizing performance with automatic Proxyconfiguration scripts (PAC)](/troubleshoot/browsers/optimize-pac-performance)
+
+ - name: Other questions
+ questions:
+ - question: |
+ How to set home and start pages in Microsoft Edge and allow user editing
+ answer: |
+ For more information, see the following blog article:
+
+ [How do I set the home page in Microsoft Edge?](https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/microsoft-edge/change-your-browser-home-page-a531e1b8-ed54-d057-0262-cc5983a065c6)
+
+ - question: |
+ How to add sites to the Enterprise Mode (EMIE) site list
+ answer: |
+ For more information about how to add sites to an EMIE list, see [Add multiple sites to the Enterprise Mode site list using a file and the Enterprise Mode Site List Manager (schema v.2)](../ie11-deploy-guide/add-multiple-sites-to-enterprise-mode-site-list-using-the-version-2-schema-and-enterprise-mode-tool.md).
+
+ - question: |
+ What is Content Security Policy (CSP)?
+ answer: |
+ By using [Content Security Policy](/microsoft-edge/dev-guide/security/content-security-policy), you create an allow list of sources of trusted content in the HTTP headers. You also pre-approve certain servers for content that is loaded into a webpage, and instruct the browser to execute or render only resources from those sources. You can use this technique to prevent malicious content from being injected into sites.
+
+ Content Security Policy is supported in all versions of Microsoft Edge. It lets web developers lock down the resources that can be used by their web application. This helps prevent [cross-site scripting](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cross-site_scripting) attacks that remain a common vulnerability on the web. However, the first version of Content Security Policy was difficult to implement on websites that used inline script elements that either pointed to script sources or contained script directly.
+
+ CSP2 makes these scenarios easier to manage by adding support for nonces and hashes for script and style resources. A nonce is a cryptographically strong random value that is generated on each page load that appears in both the CSP policy and in the script tags on the page. Using nonces can help minimize the need to maintain a list of allowed source URL values while also allowing trusted scripts that are declared in script elements to run.
+
+ For more information, see the following articles:
+
+ - [Introducing support for Content Security Policy Level 2](https://blogs.windows.com/msedgedev/2017/01/10/edge-csp-2/)
+ - [Content Security Policy](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Content_Security_Policy)
+
+ - question: |
+ Where to find Internet Explorer security zones registry entries
+ answer: |
+ Most of the Internet Zone entries can be found in [Internet Explorer security zones registry entries for advanced users](https://support.microsoft.com/help/182569/internet-explorer-security-zones-registry-entries-for-advanced-users).
+
+ This article was written for Internet Explorer 6 but is still applicable to Internet Explorer 11.
+
+ The default Zone Keys are stored in the following locations:
+
+ - HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Internet Settings\Zones
+ - HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Internet Settings\Zones
+
+ - question: |
+ Why don't HTML5 videos play in Internet Explorer 11?
+ answer: |
+ To play HTML5 videos in the Internet Zone, use the default settings or make sure that the registry key value of **2701** under **Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Internet Settings\Zones\3** is set to **0**.
+
+ - 0 (the default value): Allow
+ - 3: Disallow
+
+ This key is read by the **URLACTION\_ALLOW\_AUDIO\_VIDEO 0x00002701** URL action flag that determines whether media elements (audio and video) are allowed in pages in a URL security zone.
+
+ For more information, see [Unable to play HTML5 Videos in IE](/archive/blogs/askie/unable-to-play-html5-videos-in-ie).
+
+ For Windows 10 N and Windows KN editions, you must also download the feature pack that is discussed in [Media feature pack for Windows 10 N and Windows 10 KN editions](https://support.microsoft.com/help/3010081/media-feature-pack-for-windows-10-n-and-windows-10-kn-editions).
+
+ For more information about how to check Windows versions, see [Which version of Windows operating system am I running?](https://support.microsoft.com/help/13443/windows-which-version-am-i-running)
+
+ - question: |
+ What is the Enterprise Mode Site List Portal?
+ answer: |
+ This is a new feature to add sites to your enterprise mode site list XML. For more information, see [Enterprise Mode Site List Portal](https://github.com/MicrosoftEdge/enterprise-mode-site-list-portal).
+
+ - question: |
+ What is Enterprise Mode Feature?
+ answer: |
+ For more information about this topic, see [Enterprise Mode and the Enterprise Mode Site List](../ie11-deploy-guide/what-is-enterprise-mode.md).
+
+ - question: |
+ Where can I obtain a list of HTTP Status codes?
+ answer: |
+ For information about this list, see [HTTP Status Codes](/windows/win32/winhttp/http-status-codes).
+
+ - question: |
+ What is end of support for Internet Explorer 11?
+ answer: |
+ Internet Explorer 11 is the last major version of Internet Explorer. Internet Explorer 11 will continue receiving security updates and technical support for the lifecycle of the version of Windows on which it is installed.
+
+ For more information, see [Lifecycle FAQ — Internet Explorer and Edge](https://support.microsoft.com/help/17454/lifecycle-faq-internet-explorer).
+
+ - question: |
+ How to configure TLS (SSL) for Internet Explorer
+ answer: |
+ For more information about how to configure TLS/SSL for Internet Explorer, see [Group Policy Setting to configure TLS/SSL](https://gpsearch.azurewebsites.net/#380).
+
+ - question: |
+ What is Site to Zone?
+ answer: |
+ Site to Zone usually refers to one of the following:
+
+ **Site to Zone Assignment List**
+ This is a Group Policy policy setting that can be used to add sites to the various security zones.
+
+ The Site to Zone Assignment List policy setting associates sites to zones by using the following values for the Internet security zones:
+
+ - Intranet zone
+ - Trusted Sites zone
+ - Internet zone
+ - Restricted Sites zone
+
+ If you set this policy setting to **Enabled**, you can enter a list of sites and their related zone numbers. By associating a site to a zone, you can make sure that the security settings for the specified zone are applied to the site.
+
+ **Site to Zone Mapping**
+ Site to Zone Mapping is stored as the name of the key. The protocol is a registry value that has a number that assigns it to the corresponding zone. Internet Explorer will read from the following registry subkeys for the sites that are deployed through the Site to Zone assignment list:
+
+ - HKEY\_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Policies\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Internet Settings\ZoneMap
+ - HKEY\_CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE\Policies\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Internet Settings\ZoneMapKey
+
+ **Site to Zone Assignment List policy**
+ This policy setting is available for both Computer Configuration and User Configuration:
+
+ - Computer Configuration > Administrative Templates > Windows Components > Internet Explorer > Internet Control Panel > Security Page
+ - User Configuration > Administrative Templates > Windows Components > Internet Explorer > Internet Control Panel > Security Page
+
+ **References**
+ [How to configure Internet Explorer security zone sites using group polices](/archive/blogs/askie/how-to-configure-internet-explorer-security-zone-sites-using-group-polices)
+
+ - question: |
+ What are the limits for MaxConnectionsPerServer, MaxConnectionsPer1_0Server for the current versions of Internet Explorer?
+ answer: |
+ For more information about these settings and limits, see [Connectivity Enhancements in Windows Internet Explorer 8](/previous-versions/cc304129(v=vs.85)).
+
+ - question: |
+ What is the MaxConnectionsPerProxy setting, and what are the maximum allowed values for this setting?
+ answer: |
+ The **MaxConnectionsPerProxy** setting controls the number of connections that a single-user client can maintain to a given host by using a proxy server.
+
+ For more information, see [Understanding Connection Limits and New Proxy Connection Limits in WinInet and Internet Explorer](/archive/blogs/jpsanders/understanding-connection-limits-and-new-proxy-connection-limits-in-wininet-and-internet-explorer).
diff --git a/devices/hololens/TOC.md b/devices/hololens/TOC.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d9ff00d3a8..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/TOC.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
-# [HoloLens overview](index.md)
-
-# Get Started with HoloLens 2
-## [HoloLens 2 hardware](hololens2-hardware.md)
-## [Get your HoloLens 2 ready to use](hololens2-setup.md)
-## [Set up your HoloLens 2](hololens2-start.md)
-## [HoloLens 2 fit and comfort FAQ](hololens2-fit-comfort-faq.md)
-## [Supported languages for HoloLens 2](hololens2-language-support.md)
-## [Getting around HoloLens 2](hololens2-basic-usage.md)
-
-# Get started with HoloLens (1st gen)
-## [HoloLens (1st gen) hardware](hololens1-hardware.md)
-## [Get your HoloLens (1st gen) ready to use](hololens1-setup.md)
-## [Set up your HoloLens (1st gen)](hololens1-start.md)
-## [HoloLens (1st gen) fit and comfort FAQ](hololens1-fit-comfort-faq.md)
-## [Install localized version of HoloLens (1st gen)](hololens1-install-localized.md)
-## [Getting around HoloLens (1st gen)](hololens1-basic-usage.md)
-
-# HoloLens in commercial environments
-## [Commercial feature overview](hololens-commercial-features.md)
-## [Deployment planning](hololens-requirements.md)
-## [Unlock Windows Holographic for Business features](hololens1-upgrade-enterprise.md)
-## [Configure HoloLens using a provisioning package](hololens-provisioning.md)
-## [Enroll HoloLens in MDM](hololens-enroll-mdm.md)
-## [Set up ring based updates for HoloLens](hololens-updates.md)
-## [Enable Bitlocker device encryption for HoloLens](hololens-encryption.md)
-
-# Navigating Windows Holographic
-## [Start menu and mixed reality home](holographic-home.md)
-## [Use your voice with HoloLens](hololens-cortana.md)
-## [Find and save files](holographic-data.md)
-## [Create, share, and view photos and video](holographic-photos-and-videos.md)
-
-# User management and access management
-## [Accounts on HoloLens](hololens-identity.md)
-## [Share your HoloLens with multiple people](hololens-multiple-users.md)
-## [Set up HoloLens as a kiosk (single application access)](hololens-kiosk.md)
-## [Set up limited application access](hololens-kiosk.md)
-
-# Holographic Applications
-## [Try 3D Viewer](holographic-3d-viewer-beta.md)
-## [Find, install, and uninstall applications](holographic-store-apps.md)
-## [Install and uninstall custom applications](holographic-custom-apps.md)
-
-# Accessories and connectivity
-## [Connect to Bluetooth and USB-C devices](hololens-connect-devices.md)
-## [Use the HoloLens (1st gen) clicker](hololens1-clicker.md)
-## [Connect to a network](hololens-network.md)
-## [Use HoloLens offline](hololens-offline.md)
-
-# Hologram optics and placement in space
-## [Tips for viewing clear Holograms](hololens-calibration.md)
-## [Environment considerations for HoloLens](hololens-environment-considerations.md)
-## [Spatial mapping on HoloLens](hololens-spaces.md)
-
-# Update, troubleshoot, or recover HoloLens
-## [Update HoloLens](hololens-update-hololens.md)
-## [Restart, reset, or recover](hololens-recovery.md)
-## [Troubleshoot HoloLens](hololens-troubleshooting.md)
-## [Known issues](hololens-known-issues.md)
-## [Frequently asked questions](hololens-faq.md)
-## [Hololens services status](hololens-status.md)
-
-# [Release Notes](hololens-release-notes.md)
-# [Give us feedback](hololens-feedback.md)
-# [Join the Windows Insider program](hololens-insider.md)
-# [Change history for Microsoft HoloLens documentation](change-history-hololens.md)
diff --git a/devices/hololens/breadcrumb/toc.yml b/devices/hololens/breadcrumb/toc.yml
deleted file mode 100644
index 2ac60b3585..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/breadcrumb/toc.yml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-- name: Docs
- tocHref: /
- topicHref: /
- items:
- - name: Hololens
- tocHref: /hololens
- topicHref: /hololens/index
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/devices/hololens/change-history-hololens.md b/devices/hololens/change-history-hololens.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4b3449e838..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/change-history-hololens.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,88 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Change history for Microsoft HoloLens documentation
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-description: This topic lists new and updated topics for HoloLens.
-keywords: change history
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Change history for Microsoft HoloLens documentation
-
-This topic lists new and updated topics in the [Microsoft HoloLens documentation](index.md).
-
-## April 2019
-
-New or changed topic | Description
---- | ---
-[Restore HoloLens 2 using Advanced Recovery Companion](hololens-recovery.md) | New
-
-## November 2018
-
-New or changed topic | Description
---- | ---
-[How HoloLens stores data for spaces](hololens-spaces.md) | New
-
-## Windows 10 Holographic for Business, version 1809
-
-The topics in this library have been updated for Windows 10 Holographic for Business, version 1809.
-
-
-## October 2018
-
-New or changed topic | Description
---- | ---
-[Preview new mixed reality apps for HoloLens](hololens-public-preview-apps.md) | Removed, and redirected to [Mixed reality apps](https://docs.microsoft.com/dynamics365/#pivot=mixed-reality-apps)
-[Microsoft Remote Assist app](hololens-microsoft-remote-assist-app.md) | Removed, and redirected to [Overview of Dynamics 365 Remote Assist](https://docs.microsoft.com/dynamics365/mixed-reality/remote-assist/)
-[Microsoft Dynamics 365 Layout app](hololens-microsoft-dynamics-365-layout-app.md) | Removed, and redirected to [Overview of Dynamics 365 Layout](https://docs.microsoft.com/dynamics365/mixed-reality/layout/)
-[Insider preview for Microsoft HoloLens](hololens-insider.md) | Added instructions for opting out of Insider builds.
-
-
-## July 2018
-
-New or changed topic | Description
---- | ---
-Insider preview for Microsoft HoloLens | New (topic retired on release of Windows 10, version 1809)
-
-
-## May 2018
-
-New or changed topic | Description
---- | ---
-[Preview new mixed reality apps for HoloLens](hololens-public-preview-apps.md) | New
-[Microsoft Remote Assist app](hololens-microsoft-remote-assist-app.md) | New
-[Microsoft Layout app](hololens-microsoft-layout-app.md) | New
-[Set up HoloLens in kiosk mode](hololens-kiosk.md) | Added instructions for setting up a guest account for kiosk mode.
-
-## Windows 10 Holographic for Business, version 1803
-
-The topics in this library have been updated for Windows 10 Holographic for Business, version 1803. The following new topics have been added:
-
-- [What's new in Microsoft HoloLens](hololens-whats-new.md)
-- [Manage updates to HoloLens](hololens-updates.md)
-- [Share HoloLens with multiple people](hololens-multiple-users.md)
-
-
-## February 2018
-
-New or changed topic | Description
---- | ---
-[Unlock Windows Holographic for Business features](hololens1-upgrade-enterprise.md) | Replaced the instructions for upgrading to Windows Holographic for Business using Microsoft Intune with a link to the new Intune topic.
-
-## December 2017
-
-New or changed topic | Description
---- | ---
-[Enable Bitlocker device encryption for HoloLens](hololens-encryption.md) | New
-
-## January 2017
-
-| New or changed topic | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-| All topics | Changed all references from **Windows Holographic Enterprise** to **Windows Holographic for Business** |
diff --git a/devices/hololens/docfx.json b/devices/hololens/docfx.json
index 4f53494c32..9b7317309d 100644
--- a/devices/hololens/docfx.json
+++ b/devices/hololens/docfx.json
@@ -45,12 +45,19 @@
"folder_relative_path_in_docset": "./"
}
- }
+ },
+ "contributors_to_exclude": [
+ "rjagiewich",
+ "traya1",
+ "rmca14",
+ "claydetels19",
+ "jborsecnik",
+ "tiburd",
+ "garycentric"
+ ]
},
"fileMetadata": {},
- "template": [
- null
- ],
+ "template": [],
"dest": "devices/hololens",
"markdownEngineName": "markdig"
},
diff --git a/devices/hololens/holographic-3d-viewer-beta.md b/devices/hololens/holographic-3d-viewer-beta.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0973813221..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/holographic-3d-viewer-beta.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,202 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Using 3D Viewer on HoloLens
-description: Describes the types of files and features that 3D Viewer Beta on HoloLens supports, and how to use and troubleshoot the app.
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: Teresa-Motiv
-ms.author: v-tea
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: high
-ms.date: 10/30/2019
-ms.reviewer: scooley
-audience: ITPro
-manager: jarrettr
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
----
-
-# Using 3D Viewer on HoloLens
-
-3D Viewer lets you view 3D models on HoloLens. You can open and view *supported* .fbx files from Microsoft Edge, OneDrive, and other apps.
-
-If you're having trouble opening a 3D model in 3D Viewer, or certain features of your 3D model are unsupported, see [Supported content specifications](#supported-content-specifications).
-
-To build or optimize 3D models for use with 3D Viewer, see [Optimizing 3D models for 3D Viewer](#optimizing-3d-models-for-3d-viewer-beta).
-
-There are two ways to open a 3D model on HoloLens. See [Viewing 3D models on HoloLens](#viewing-3d-models-on-hololens) to learn more.
-
-If you're having trouble after reading these topics, see [Troubleshooting](#troubleshooting).
-
-## Supported content specifications
-
-### File format
-
-- FBX format
-- Maximum FBX release 2015.1.0
-
-### File size
-
-- Minimum 5 KB
-- Maximum 500 MB
-
-### Geometry
-
-- Polygonal models only. No subdivision surfaces or NURBs
-- Right-handed coordinate system
-- Shear in transformation matrices is not supported
-
-### Textures
-
-- Texture maps must be embedded in the FBX file
-- Supported image formats
- - JPEG and PNG images
- - BMP images (24-bit RGB true-color)
- - TGA images (24-bit RGB and 32-bit RGBQ true-color)
-- Maximum texture resolution of 2048x2048
-- Maximum of one diffuse map, one normal map, and one reflection cube map per mesh
-- Alpha channel in diffuse textures causes pixels to be discarded if below 50%
-
-### Animation
-
-- Scale/rotation/translation animation on individual objects
-- Skeletal (rigged) animation with skinning
- - Maximum of 4 influences per vertex
-
-### Materials
-
-- Lambert and Phong materials are supported, with adjustable parameters
-- Supported material properties for Lambert
- - Main Texture (RGB + Alpha Test)
- - Diffuse Color (RGB)
- - Ambient Color (RGB)
-- Supported material properties for Phong
- - Main Texture (RGB + Alpha Test)
- - Diffuse Color (RGB)
- - Ambient Color (RGB)
- - Specular Color (RGB)
- - Shininess
- - Reflectivity
-- Custom materials are not supported
-- Maximum of one material per mesh
-- Maximum of one material layer
-- Maximum of 8 materials per file
-
-### File and model limitations
-
-There are hard limits on the size of files, as well as the number of models, vertices, and meshes that can be open simultaneously in 3D Viewer Beta:
-
-- 500 MB maximum file size per model
-- Vertices: 600,000 combined on all open models
-- Meshes: 1,600 combined on all open models
-- Maximum of 40 models open at one time
-
-## Optimizing 3D models for 3D Viewer Beta
-
-### Special considerations
-
-- Avoid black materials or black areas in texture maps. Holograms are made of light, thus HoloLens renders black (the absence of light) as transparent.
-- Before exporting to FBX from your creation tool, ensure all geometry is visible and unlocked and no layers that contain geometry are turned off or templated. Visibility is not respected.
-- Avoid very large translation offsets between nodes (for example, 100,000 units). This can cause the model to jitter while being moved/scaled/rotated.
-
-### Performance optimization
-
-Keep performance in mind while authoring content and validate in the 3D Viewer Beta app on HoloLens during the authoring process for best results. 3D Viewer Beta renders content real-time and performance is subject to HoloLens hardware capabilities.
-
-There are many variables in a 3D model that can impact performance. 3D Viewer Beta will show a warning on load if there are more than 150,000 vertices or more than 400 meshes. Animations can have an impact on the performance of other open models. There are also hard limits on the total number models, vertices, and meshes that can be open simultaneously in 3D Viewer Beta (see [File and model limitations](#file-and-model-limitations)).
-
-If the 3D model isn't running well due to model complexity, consider:
-
-- Reducing polygon count
-- Reducing number of bones in rigged animation
-- Avoiding self-occlusion
-
-Double-sided rendering is supported in 3D Viewer Beta, although it is turned off by default for performance reasons. This can be turned on via the **Double Sided** button on the **Details** page. For best performance, avoid the need for double-sided rendering in your content.
-
-### Validating your 3D model
-
-Validate your model by opening it in 3D Viewer Beta on HoloLens. Select the **Details** button to view your model's characteristics and warnings of unsupported content (if present).
-
-### Rendering 3D models with true-to-life dimensions
-
-By default, 3D Viewer Beta displays 3D models at a comfortable size and position relative to the user. However, if rendering a 3D model with true-to-life measurements is important (for example, when evaluating furniture models in a room), the content creator can set a flag within the file's metadata to prevent resizing of that model by both the application and the user.
-
-To prevent scaling of the model, add a Boolean custom attribute to any object in the scene named Microsoft_DisableScale and set it to true. 3D Viewer Beta will then respect the FbxSystemUnit information baked into the FBX file. Scale in 3D Viewer Beta is 1 meter per FBX unit.
-
-## Viewing 3D models on HoloLens
-
-### Open an FBX file from Microsoft Edge
-
-FBX files can be opened directly from a website using Microsoft Edge on HoloLens.
-
-1. In Microsoft Edge, navigate to the webpage containing the FBX file you want to view.
-1. Select the file to download it.
-1. When the download is complete, select the **Open** button in Microsoft Edge to open the file in 3D Viewer Beta.
-
-The downloaded file can be accessed and opened again later by using Downloads in Microsoft Edge. To save a 3D model and ensure continued access, download the file on your PC and save it to your OneDrive account. The file can then be opened from the OneDrive app on HoloLens.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Some websites with downloadable FBX models provide them in compressed ZIP format. 3D Viewer Beta cannot open ZIP files directly. Instead, use your PC to extract the FBX file and save it to your OneDrive account. The file can then be opened from the OneDrive app on HoloLens.
-
-### Open an FBX file from OneDrive
-
-FBX files can be opened from OneDrive by using the OneDrive app on HoloLens. Be sure you've installed OneDrive using Microsoft Store app on HoloLens and that you've already uploaded the FBX file to OneDrive on your PC.
-
-Once in OneDrive, FBX files can be opened on HoloLens using 3D Viewer Beta in one of two ways:
-
-- Launch OneDrive on HoloLens and select the FBX file to open it in 3D Viewer Beta.
-- Launch 3D Viewer Beta, air tap to show the toolbar, and select **Open File**. OneDrive will launch, allowing you to select an FBX file.
-
-## Troubleshooting
-
-### I see a warning when I open a 3D model
-
-You will see a warning if you attempt to open a 3D model that contains features that are not supported by 3D Viewer Beta, or if the model is too complex and performance may be affected. 3D Viewer Beta will still load the 3D model, but performance or visual fidelity may be compromised.
-
-For more info, see [Supported content specifications](#supported-content-specifications) and [Optimizing 3D models for 3D Viewer Beta](#optimizing-3d-models-for-3d-viewer-beta).
-
-### I see a warning and the 3D model doesn't load
-
-You will see an error message when 3D Viewer Beta cannot load a 3D model due to complexity or file size, or if the FBX file is corrupt or invalid. You will also see an error message if you have reached the limit on the total number of models, vertices, or meshes that can be open simultaneously.
-
-For more info, see [Supported content specifications](#supported-content-specifications) and [File and model limitations](#file-and-model-limitations).
-
-If you feel your model meets the supported content specifications and has not exceeded the file or model limitations, you may send your FBX file to the 3D Viewer Beta team at holoapps@microsoft.com. We are not able to respond personally, but having examples of files that do not load properly will help our team improve on future versions of the app.
-
-### My 3D model loads, but does not appear as expected
-
-If your 3D model does not look as expected in 3D Viewer Beta, air tap to show the toolbar, then select **Details**. Aspects of the file which are not supported by 3D Viewer Beta will be highlighted as warnings.
-
-The most common issue you might see is missing textures, likely because they are not embedded in the FBX file. In this case, the model will appear white. This issue can be addressed in the creation process by exporting from your creation tool to FBX with the embed textures option selected.
-
-For more info, see [Supported content specifications](#supported-content-specifications) and [Optimizing 3D models for 3D Viewer Beta](#optimizing-3d-models-for-3d-viewer-beta).
-
-### I experience performance drops while viewing my 3D model
-
-Performance when loading and viewing a 3D model can be affected by the complexity of the model, number of models open simultaneously, or number of models with active animations.
-
-For more info, see [Optimizing 3D models for 3D Viewer Beta](#optimizing-3d-models-for-3d-viewer-beta) and [File and model limitations](#file-and-model-limitations).
-
-### When I open an FBX file on HoloLens, it doesn't open in 3D Viewer Beta
-
-3D Viewer Beta is automatically associated with the .fbx file extension when it is installed.
-
-If you try to open an FBX file and see a dialog box that directs you to Microsoft Store, you do not currently have an app associated with the .fbx file extension on HoloLens.
-
-Verify that 3D Viewer Beta is installed. If it is not installed, download it from Microsoft Store on HoloLens.
-
-If 3D Viewer Beta is already installed, launch 3D Viewer Beta, then try opening the file again. If the issue persists, uninstall and reinstall 3D Viewer Beta. This will re-associate the .fbx file extension with 3D Viewer Beta.
-
-If attempting to open an FBX file opens an app other than 3D Viewer Beta, that app was likely installed after 3D Viewer Beta and has taken over association with the .fbx file extension. If you prefer 3D Viewer Beta to be associated with the .fbx file extension, uninstall and reinstall 3D Viewer Beta.
-
-### The Open File button in 3D Viewer Beta doesn't launch an app
-
-The **Open File** button will open the app associated with the file picker function on HoloLens. If OneDrive is installed, the **Open File** button should launch OneDrive. However, if there is currently no app associated with the file picker function installed on HoloLens, you will be directed to Microsoft Store.
-
-If the **Open File** button launches an app other than OneDrive, that app was likely installed after OneDrive and has taken over association with the file picker function. If you prefer OneDrive to launch when selecting the **Open File** button in 3D Viewer Beta, uninstall and reinstall OneDrive.
-
-If the **Open File** button is not active, it's possible that you have reached the limit of models that can be open in 3D Viewer Beta at one time. If you have 40 models open in 3D Viewer Beta, you will need to close some before you will be able to open additional models.
-
-## Additional resources
-
-- [Support forums](http://forums.hololens.com/categories/3d-viewer-beta)
-- [Third-party notices](https://www.microsoft.com/{lang-locale}/legal/products)
diff --git a/devices/hololens/holographic-custom-apps.md b/devices/hololens/holographic-custom-apps.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0a86a7b37a..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/holographic-custom-apps.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Manage custom apps for HoloLens
-description: Side load custom apps on HoloLens. Learn more about installing, and uninstalling holographic apps.
-ms.assetid: 6bd124c4-731c-4bcc-86c7-23f9b67ff616
-ms.date: 07/01/2019
-manager: v-miegge
-keywords: hololens, sideload, side load, side-load, store, uwp, app, install
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: mattzmsft
-ms.author: mazeller
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# Install and manage custom applications (non-store)
-
-HoloLens supports many existing applications from the Microsoft Store, as well as new apps built specifically for HoloLens. This article focuses on custom holographic applications.
-
-For more information about store apps, see [Manage apps with the store](holographic-store-apps.md).
-
-## Install custom apps
-
-You can install your own applications on HoloLens either by using the Device Portal or by deploying the apps from Visual Studio.
-
-### Installing an application package with the Device Portal
-
-1. Establish a connection from [Device Portal](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/using-the-windows-device-portal) to the target HoloLens.
-1. In the left navigation, navigate to the **Apps** page .
-1. Under **App Package** browse to the .appx file that is associated with your application.
- > [!IMPORTANT]
- > Make sure to reference any associated dependency and certificate files.
-
-1. Select **Go**.
- 
-
-### Deploying from Microsoft Visual Studio 2015
-
-1. Open your app's Visual Studio solution (.sln file).
-1. Open the project's **Properties**.
-1. Select the following build configuration: **Master/x86/Remote Machine**.
-1. When you select **Remote Machine**:
- - Make sure the address points to the Wi-Fi IP address of your HoloLens.
- - Set authentication to **Universal (Unencrypted Protocol)**.
-1. Build your solution.
-1. To deploy the app from your development PC to your HoloLens, select **Remote Machine**. If you already have an existing build on the HoloLens, select **Yes** to install this newer version.
-
- 
-1. The application will install and auto launch on your HoloLens.
-
-After you've installed an app, you'll find it in the **All apps** list (**Start** > **All apps**).
diff --git a/devices/hololens/holographic-data.md b/devices/hololens/holographic-data.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1f28c4fac9..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/holographic-data.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,100 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Find and save files on HoloLens
-description: Use File Explorer on HoloLens to view and manage files on your device
-keywords: how-to, file picker, files, photos, videos, pictures, OneDrive, storage, file explorer
-ms.assetid: 77d2e357-f65f-43c8-b62f-6cd9bf37070a
-author: mattzmsft
-ms.author: mazeller
-manager: v-miegge
-ms.reviewer: jarrettrenshaw
-ms.date: 12/30/2019
-keywords: hololens
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.topic: article
-audience: ITPro
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# Find, open, and save files on HoloLens
-
-Files you create on HoloLens, including photos and videos, are saved directly to your HoloLens device. View and manage them in the same way you would manage files on Windows 10:
-
-- Using the File Explorer app to access local folders.
-- Within an app's storage.
-- In a special folder (such as the video or music library).
-- Using a storage service that includes an app and file picker (such as OneDrive).
-- Using a desktop PC connected to your HoloLens by using a USB cable, using MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) support.
-
-## View files on HoloLens using File Explorer
-
-> Applies to all HoloLens 2 devices and HoloLens (1st gen) as of the [Windows 10 April 2018 Update (RS4) for HoloLens](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/release-notes-april-2018).
-
-Use File Explorer on HoloLens to view and manage files on your device, including 3D objects, documents, and pictures. Go to **Start** > **All apps** > **File Explorer** to get started.
-
-> [!TIP]
-> If there are no files listed in File Explorer, select **This Device** in the top left pane.
-
-If you don’t see any files in File Explorer, the "Recent" filter may be active (clock icon is highlighted in left pane). To fix this, select the **This Device** document icon in the left pane (beneath the clock icon), or open the menu and select **This Device**.
-
-## Find and view your photos and videos
-
-[Mixed reality capture](holographic-photos-and-videos.md) lets you take mixed reality photos and videos on HoloLens. These photos and videos are saved to the device's Camera Roll folder.
-
-You can access photos and videos taken with HoloLens by:
-
-- accessing the Camera Roll directly through the [Photos app](holographic-photos-and-videos.md).
-- uploading photos and videos to cloud storage by syncing your photos and videos to OneDrive.
-- using the Mixed Reality Capture page of the [Windows Device Portal](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/using-the-windows-device-portal#mixed-reality-capture).
-
-### Photos app
-
-The Photos app is one of the default apps on the **Start** menu, and comes built-in with HoloLens. Learn more about [using the Photos app to view content](holographic-photos-and-videos.md).
-
-You can also install the [OneDrive app](https://www.microsoft.com/p/onedrive/9wzdncrfj1p3) from the Microsoft Store to sync photos to other devices.
-
-### OneDrive app
-
-[OneDrive](https://onedrive.live.com/) lets you access, manage, and share your photos and videos with any device and with any user. To access the photos and videos captured on HoloLens, download the [OneDrive app](https://www.microsoft.com/p/onedrive/9wzdncrfj1p3) from the Microsoft Store on your HoloLens. Once downloaded, open the OneDrive app and select **Settings** > **Camera upload**, and turn on **Camera upload**.
-
-### Connect to a PC
-
-If your HoloLens is running the [Windows 10 April 2018 update](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/release-notes-april-2018) or later, you can connect your HoloLens to a Windows 10 PC by using a USB cable to browse photos and videos on the device by using MTP (media transfer protocol). You'll need to make sure the device is unlocked to browse files if you have a PIN or password set up on your device.
-
-If you have enabled the [Windows Device Portal](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/using-the-windows-device-portal), you can use it to browse, retrieve, and manage the photos and videos stored on your device.
-
-## Access files within an app
-
-If an application saves files on your device, you can use that application to access them.
-
-### Requesting files from another app
-
-An application can request to save a file or open a file from another app by using [file pickers](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/app-model#file-pickers).
-
-### Known folders
-
-HoloLens supports a number of [known folders](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/app-model#known-folders) that apps can request permission to access.
-
-## View HoloLens files on your PC
-
-Similar to other mobile devices, connect HoloLens to your desktop PC using MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) and open File Explorer on the PC to access your HoloLens libraries for easy transfer.
-
-To see your HoloLens files in File Explorer on your PC:
-
-1. Sign in to HoloLens, then plug it into the PC using the USB cable that came with the HoloLens.
-
-1. Select **Open Device to view files with File Explorer**, or open File Explorer on the PC and navigate to the device.
-
-To see info about your HoloLens, right-click the device name in File Explorer on your PC, then select **Properties**.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> HoloLens (1st gen) does not support connecting to external hard drives or SD cards.
-
-## Sync to the cloud
-
-To sync photos and other files from your HoloLens to the cloud, install and set up OneDrive on HoloLens. To get OneDrive, search for it in the Microsoft Store on your HoloLens.
-
-HoloLens doesn't back up app files and data, so it's a good idea to save your important stuff to OneDrive. That way, if you reset your device or uninstall an app, your info will be backed up.
diff --git a/devices/hololens/holographic-home.md b/devices/hololens/holographic-home.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 9b554c0638..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/holographic-home.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,87 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Start menu and mixed reality home
-description: Navigate the mixed reality home in Windows Holographic.
-ms.assetid: 742bc126-7996-4f3a-abb2-cf345dff730c
-ms.date: 08/07/2019
-keywords: hololens
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: scooley
-ms.author: scooley
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: high
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# Start menu and mixed reality home
-
-Just like the Windows PC experience starts with the desktop, Windows Holographic starts with mixed reality home. Using the Start menu you can open and place app windows, immersive app launchers, and 3D content in mixed reality home, and their placement in your physical space will be remembered.
-
-## Use the Start menu
-
-The Start menu on HoloLens is where you'll open apps, see important status info, and access tools like the camera.
-
-Wherever you are in HoloLens, you can always open the Start menu by using **Start gesture**. On HoloLens (1st gen) the Start gesture is [bloom](https://support.microsoft.com/help/12644/hololens-use-gestures). On HoloLens 2, the [Start gesture](hololens2-basic-usage.md#start-gesture) is to tap the Start icon that appears on your wrist. You can also open the Start menu using your voice by saying "Go to Start".
-
-> [!TIP]
-> When the Start menu is open, use the Start gesture to close it, or look at the Start menu and say "Close".
-
-At the top of the Start menu, you'll see status indicators for Wi-Fi, battery, volume, and a clock. On HoloLens 2 there is also a listening indicator that shows whether the device is speech enabled and is listening for voice commands. At the bottom you'll find the **Photo** and **Video** buttons which allow you to take photos and video recordings. There is also a **Connect** button that allows you to project what you see to another device using Miracast.
-
-### Find apps on Start menu
-
-The Start menu has a **Pinned apps** list and an **All apps** list.
-
-- The **Pinned apps** list shows apps that have been pinned. You can add and remove apps from the **Pinned apps** list using the context menu that appears when you **select and hold** on an app tile.
-
-- The **All apps** list shows all apps that are installed on the device. Select the **All apps** button on the right side of the **Start** menu to get to the list.
-
-On both app lists, use the **Page up** and **Page down** buttons on the right side of the Start menu to page through all the apps in the list. Both app lists will automatically open to the page that was last used during a device session.
-
-> [!TIP]
-> On HoloLens 2, you can directly scroll the app lists using your index finger. Just touch the list with your finger tip and drag upwards or downwards.
-
-### Open apps from Start menu
-
-To open an app from the Start menu, simply **select** an **app tile**. You can also say the name of an app to open it.
-
-When you open an app from the Start menu, one of the following will happen, depending on how the app is designed:
-
-- An **app window** is placed. The app is then loaded in the window and you can use it like a touch screen.
-- A **3D app launcher** for an immersive app is placed. You need to then **select** the launcher to open the immersive app.
-- An app window is placed which acts as a **launcher** for an immersive app. The immersive app will proceed to launch automatically.
-
-App windows and app launchers placed in mixed reality home will stay around until you decide to remove them. They give you a convenient shortcut in the world to use those app windows or to launch immersive apps without having to open them again from the Start menu.
-
-> [!NOTE]
->Like on a phone, system resources is managed automatically on HoloLens. For example, when you open a new immersive app, all other running apps will immediately become inactive. There is no need to remove app windows and launchers in mixed reality home to free up system resources.
-
-## Using apps on HoloLens
-
-Apps on HoloLens can use app window view or immersive view. With app window view the app simply shows its content inside a window. With immersive view an app takes you away from mixed realty home where it can then display its content in the physical environment all around you. Apps can also choose to use both views.
-
-### Use app windows
-
-On HoloLens (1st gen) app windows are placed and used in mixed reality home, where you can [move, resize, and rotate](hololens1-basic-usage.md#move-resize-and-rotate-apps) them as you like. In addition to using app windows with gaze and gesture, you can also use them with Bluetooth connected mouse and keyboard.
-
-On HoloLens 2, in addition to using app windows in mixed reality home, you can also use one app window at a time inside an immersive app. You can also put an app window into **Follow me** mode where it will stay in front of you as you walk around. When you open an app window while inside an immersive app, it will open in **Follow me** mode automatically. You can [move, resize, and rotate](hololens2-basic-usage.md#move-resize-and-rotate-holograms) app windows directly using your hands in both mixed reality home and inside an immersive app.
-
-> [!NOTE]
->
-> - Up to three app windows can be active in mixed reality home at a time. You can open more, but only three will remain active.
-> - When an app window is not active, it will show content that looks darkened compared to an active window. Some will simply show the app icon instead of any content. To activate an inactive window simply **select** it.
-> - Each open app can have one active window at a time, except Microsoft Edge, which can have up to three.
-
-### Close apps
-
-To close an app that uses an app window, simply close the app window with the **Close** button on the title bar. You can also look at the window and say "Close".
-
-To exit an app that uses immersive view, use the Start gesture to bring up the **Start menu**, then select the **Mixed reality home** button.
-
-If an immersive app is in a broken state and you need to restart it, you can make sure the app is first completely shut down by closing its launcher in mixed reality home, then launching it from the Start menu.
-
-## Related info
-
-[Find, Install, and Uninstall applications from the Microsoft Store](holographic-store-apps.md)
diff --git a/devices/hololens/holographic-photos-and-videos.md b/devices/hololens/holographic-photos-and-videos.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 10e6bb4756..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/holographic-photos-and-videos.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,150 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Capture and manage mixed reality photos and videos
-description: Learn how to capture, view, and share mixed reality photos and videos, using HoloLens.
-keywords: hololens, photo, video, capture, mrc, mixed reality capture, photos, camera, stream, livestream, demo
-ms.assetid: 1b636ec3-6186-4fbb-81b2-71155aef0593
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: mattzmsft
-ms.author: mazeller
-ms.topic: article
-audience: ITPro
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.date: 10/28/2019
-manager: jarrettr
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# Create mixed reality photos and videos
-
-HoloLens gives users the experience of mixing the real world with the digital world. Mixed reality capture (MRC) lets you capture that experience as a photo or video, or share what you see with others in real-time.
-
-Mixed reality capture uses a first-person point of view so other people can see holograms as you see them. For a third-person point of view, use [spectator view](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/spectator-view). Spectator view is especially useful for demos.
-
-While it's fun to share videos amongst friends and colleagues, videos can also help teach other people to use an app or to communicate problems with apps and experiences.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> If you can't launch mixed reality capture experiences and your HoloLens is a work device, check with your system administrator. Access to the camera can be restricted through company policy.
-
-## Capture a mixed reality photo
-
-There are several ways to take a photo of mixed reality on HoloLens; you can use hardware buttons, voice, or the Start menu.
-
-### Hardware buttons to take photos
-
-To take a quick photo of your current view, press the volume up and volume down buttons at the same time. This is a bit like the HoloLens version of a screenshot or print screen.
-
-- [Button locations on HoloLens 2](hololens2-hardware.md)
-- [Button locations on HoloLens (1st gen)](hololens1-hardware.md#hololens-components)
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Holding the **volume up** and **volume down** buttons for three seconds will start recording a video rather than taking a photo. To stop recording, tap both **volume up** and **volume down** buttons simultaneously.
-
-### Voice commands to take photos
-
-Cortana can also take a picture. Say: "Hey Cortana, take a picture."
-
-### Start menu to take photos
-
-Use the Start gesture to go to **Start**, then select the **camera** icon.
-
-Point your head in the direction of what you want to capture, then [air tap](hololens2-basic-usage.md#touch-holograms-near-you) to take a photo. You can continue to air tap and capture additional photos. Any photos you capture will be saved to your device.
-
-Use the Start gesture again to end photo capture.
-
-## Capture a mixed reality video
-
-There are several ways to record a video of mixed reality on HoloLens; you can use hardware buttons, voice, or the Start menu.
-
-### Hardware buttons to record videos
-
-The quickest way to record a video is to press and hold the **volume up** and **volume down** buttons simultaneously until a three-second countdown begins. To stop recording, tap both buttons simultaneously.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Quickly pressing the **volume up** and **volume down** buttons at the same time will take a photo rather than recording a video.
-
-### Voice to record videos
-
-Cortana can also record a video. Say: "Hey Cortana, start recording." To stop a video, say "Hey Cortana, stop recording."
-
-### Start menu to record videos
-
-Use the Start gesture to go to **Start**, then select the **video** icon. Point your head in the direction of what you want to capture, then [air tap](hololens2-basic-usage.md#touch-holograms-near-you) to start recording. There will be a three second countdown and your recording will begin.
-
-To stop recording, use the Start gesture and select the highlighted **video** icon. The video will be saved to your device.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> **Applies to HoloLens (1st gen) only**
-> The [Windows 10 October 2018 Update](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/release-notes-october-2018) changes how the Start gesture and Windows button behave on HoloLens (1st gen). Before the update, the Start gesture or Windows button would stop a video recording. After the update, however, the Start gesture or Windows button opens the **Start** menu (or the **quick actions menu** if you are in an immersive app), from which you can select the highlighted **video** icon to stop recording.
-
-## Share what you see in real-time
-
-You can share what you see in HoloLens with friends and colleagues in real-time. There are a few methods available:
-
-1. Connecting to a Miracast-enabled device or adapter to watch on a TV.
-1. Using [Windows Device Portal](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/using-the-windows-device-portal) to watch on a PC
-1. Using the [Microsoft HoloLens companion app](https://www.microsoft.com/store/productId/9NBLGGH4QWNX) to watch on a PC.
-1. Deploying the [Microsoft Dynamics 365 Remote Assist](https://dynamics.microsoft.com/en-us/mixed-reality/remote-assist) app, which enables front-line workers to stream what they see to a remote expert. The remote expert can then guide the front-line worker verbally or by annotating in their world.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Sharing what you see via Windows Device Portal or Microsoft HoloLens companion app requires your HoloLens to be in [Developer mode](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/using-the-windows-device-portal#setting-up-hololens-to-use-windows-device-portal).
-
-### Stream video with Miracast
-
-Use the Start gesture to go to **Start**, then select the **connect** icon. From the picker that appears, select the Miracast-enabled device or adapter to which you want to connect.
-
-To stop sharing, use the Start gesture and select the highlighted **connect** icon. Because you were streaming, nothing will be saved to your device.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Miracast support was enabled on HoloLens (1st gen) beginning with the [Windows 10 October 2018 Update](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/release-notes-october-2018).
-
-### Real time video with Windows Device Portal
-
-Because sharing via Windows Device Portal requires Developer mode to be enabled on HoloLens, follow the instructions in our developer documentation to [set up Developer mode and navigate Windows Device Portal](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/using-the-windows-device-portal).
-
-### Microsoft HoloLens companion app
-
-Because sharing via the Microsoft HoloLens companion app requires Developer mode to be enabled on HoloLens, follow the instructions in our developer documentation to [set up Developer mode](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/using-the-windows-device-portal). Then, download the [Microsoft HoloLens companion app](https://www.microsoft.com/store/productId/9NBLGGH4QWNX) and follow the instructions within the app to connect to your HoloLens.
-
-Once the app is set up with your HoloLens, select the **Live stream** option from the app's main menu.
-
-## View your mixed reality photos and videos
-
-Mixed reality photos and videos are saved to the device's "Camera Roll". You can browse the contents of this folder on your HoloLens with the File Explorer app (navigate to Pictures > Camera Roll).
-
-You can also view your mixed reality photos and videos in the Photos app, which is pre-installed on HoloLens. To pin a photo in your world, select it in the Photos app and choose **Place in mixed world**. You can move the photo around your world after it's been placed.
-
-To view and/or save your mixed reality photos and videos on a PC connected to HoloLens, you can use [Windows Device Portal](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/using-the-windows-device-portal#mixed-reality-capture) or your [PC's File Explorer via MTP](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/release-notes-april-2018#new-features-for-hololens).
-
-## Share your mixed reality photos and videos
-
-After capturing a mixed reality photo or video, a preview will appear. Select the **share** icon above the preview to bring up the share assistant. From there, you can select the end point to which you'd like to share that photo or video.
-
-You can also share mixed reality photos and videos from OneDrive, by automatically uploading your mixed reality photos and videos. Open the OneDrive app on HoloLens and sign in with a personal [Microsoft account](https://account.microsoft.com) if you haven't already. Select the **settings** icon and choose **Camera upload**. Turn Camera upload on. Your mixed reality photos and videos will now be uploaded to OneDrive each time you launch the app on HoloLens.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You can only enable camera upload in OneDrive if you’re signed into OneDrive with a personal Microsoft account. If you set up HoloLens with a work or school account, you can add a personal Microsoft account in the OneDrive app to enable this feature.
-
-## Limitations of mixed reality capture
-
-- While using mixed reality capture, the framerate of HoloLens will be halved to 30 Hz.
-- Videos have a maximum length of five minutes.
-- The resolution of photos and videos may be reduced if the photo/video camera is already in use by another application, while live streaming, or when system resources are low.
-
-## Default file format and resolution
-
-### Default photo format and resolution
-
-| Device | Format | Extension | Resolution |
-|----------|----------|----------|----------|
-| HoloLens 2 | [JPEG](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/JPEG) | .jpg | 3904x2196px |
-| HoloLens (1st gen) | [JPEG](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/JPEG) | .jpg | 1408x792px |
-
-### Recorded video format and resolution
-
-| Device | Format | Extension | Resolution | Speed | Audio |
-|----------|----------|----------|----------|----------|----------|
-| HoloLens 2 | [MPEG-4](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/MPEG-4) | .mp4 | 1920x1080px | 30fps | 48kHz Stereo |
-| HoloLens (1st gen) | [MPEG-4](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/MPEG-4) | .mp4 | 1216x684px | 24fps | 48kHz Stereo |
diff --git a/devices/hololens/holographic-store-apps.md b/devices/hololens/holographic-store-apps.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 085f14c50e..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/holographic-store-apps.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Find, install, and uninstall applications
-description: The Microsoft Store is your source for apps and games that work with HoloLens. Learn more about finding, installing, and uninstalling holographic apps.
-ms.assetid: cbe9aa3a-884f-4a92-bf54-8d4917bc3435
-ms.reviewer: v-miegge
-ms.date: 08/30/2019
-manager: jarrettr
-keywords: hololens, store, uwp, app, install
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: mattzmsft
-ms.author: mazeller
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: high
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# Find, install, and uninstall applications from the Microsoft Store
-
-The Microsoft Store is your go-to source for apps and games that work with HoloLens. When you go to the Store on your HoloLens, any apps you see there will run on it.
-
-Apps on HoloLens use either 2D view or holographic view. Apps that use 2D view look like windows and can be positioned all around you. Apps that use holographic view surround you and become the only app you see.
-
-HoloLens supports many existing applications from the Microsoft Store, as well as new apps built specifically for HoloLens. This article focuses on holographic applications from the Microsoft Store.
-
-To learn more about installing and running custom apps, read [Custom holographic applications](holographic-custom-apps.md).
-
-## Find apps
-
-Open the Microsoft Store from the **Start** menu. Then browse for apps and games. You can use Cortana to search by saying "Hey, Cortana" and then saying your search terms.
-
-## Install apps
-
-To download apps, you'll need to be signed in with a Microsoft account. To buy them, you'll need a payment method associated with the Microsoft account you use on your HoloLens. To set up a payment method, go to [account.microsoft.com](https://account.microsoft.com/) and select **Payment & billing** > **Payment options** > **Add a payment option**.
-
-1. To open the [**Start** menu](holographic-home.md), perform a [bloom](hololens1-basic-usage.md) gesture or tap your wrist.
-2. Select the Store app and then tap to place this tile into your world.
-3. Once the Store app opens, use the search bar to look for any desired application.
-4. Select **Get** or **Install** on the application's page (a purchase may be required).
-
-## Uninstall apps
-
-There are two ways to uninstall applications. You can uninstall applications through the Microsoft Store or Start menu.
-
-### Uninstall from the Start menu
-
-On the **Start** menu or in the **All apps** list, gaze at the app. Tap and hold until the menu appears, then select **Uninstall**.
-
-### Uninstall from the Microsoft Store
-
-Open the Microsoft Store from the **Start** menu, and then browse for the application you'd like to uninstall. On the Store page, each application that you have installed has an **Uninstall** button.
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens-FAQ.md b/devices/hololens/hololens-FAQ.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a183165e4a..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens-FAQ.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,217 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Frequently asked questions about HoloLens and holograms
-description: Do you have a quick question about HoloLens or interacting with holograms? This article provides a quick answer and more resources.
-keywords: hololens, faq, known issue, help
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: Teresa-Motiv
-ms.author: v-tea
-ms.topic: article
-audience: ITPro
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.date: 10/30/2019
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: jarrettr
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# HoloLens and holograms: Frequently asked questions
-
-Here are some answers to questions you might have about using HoloLens, placing holograms, working with spaces, and more.
-
-Any time you're having problems, make sure HoloLens is [charged up](https://support.microsoft.com/help/12627/hololens-charge-your-hololens). Try [restarting it](hololens-restart-recover.md) to see if that fixes things. And please use the Feedback app to send us info about the issue—you'll find it on the [**Start** menu](holographic-home.md).
-
-For tips about wearing your HoloLens, see [HoloLens fit and comfort: FAQ](https://support.microsoft.com/help/13405/hololens-fit-and-comfort-faq).
-
-This FAQ addresses the following questions and issues:
-
-
-- [My holograms don't look right or are moving around](#my-holograms-dont-look-right-or-are-moving-around)
-- [I see a message that says "Finding your space"](#i-see-a-message-that-says-finding-your-space)
-- [I'm not seeing the holograms I expect to see in my space](#im-not-seeing-the-holograms-i-expect-to-see-in-my-space)
-- [I can't place holograms where I want](#i-cant-place-holograms-where-i-want)
-- [Holograms disappear or are encased in other holograms or objects](#holograms-disappear-or-are-encased-in-other-holograms-or-objects)
-- [I can see holograms that are on the other side of a wall](#i-can-see-holograms-that-are-on-the-other-side-of-a-wall)
-- [When I place a hologram on a wall, it seems to float](#when-i-place-a-hologram-on-a-wall-it-seems-to-float)
-- [Apps appear too close to me when I'm trying to move them](#apps-appear-too-close-to-me-when-im-trying-to-move-them)
-- [I'm getting a low disk space error](#im-getting-a-low-disk-space-error)
-- [HoloLens doesn't respond to my gestures](#hololens-doesnt-respond-to-my-gestures)
-- [HoloLens doesn't respond to my voice](#hololens-doesnt-respond-to-my-voice)
-- [I'm having problems pairing or using a Bluetooth device](#im-having-problems-pairing-or-using-a-bluetooth-device)
-- [I'm having problems with the HoloLens clicker](#im-having-problems-with-the-hololens-clicker)
-- [I can't connect to Wi-Fi](#i-cant-connect-to-wi-fi)
-- [My HoloLens isn't running well, is unresponsive, or won't start](#my-hololens-isnt-running-well-is-unresponsive-or-wont-start)
-- [How do I delete all spaces?](#how-do-i-delete-all-spaces)
-- [I cannot find or use the keyboard to type in the HoloLens 2 Emulator](#i-cannot-find-or-use-the-keyboard-to-type-in-the-hololens-2-emulator)
-
-## My holograms don't look right or are moving around
-
-If your holograms don't look right (for example, they're jittery or shaky, or you see black patches on top of them), try one of these fixes:
-
-- [Clean your device visor](hololens1-hardware.md#care-and-cleaning) and make sure nothing is blocking the sensors.
-- Make sure you're in a well-lit room without a lot of direct sunlight.
-- Try walking around and gazing at your surroundings so HoloLens can scan them more completely.
-- If you've placed a lot of holograms, try removing some.
-
-If you're still having problems, trying running the Calibration app, which calibrates your HoloLens just for you, to help keep your holograms looking their best. Go to **Settings **>** System **>** Utilities**. Under Calibration, select **Open Calibration**.
-
-[Back to list](#list)
-
-## I see a message that says Finding your space
-
-When HoloLens is learning or loading a space, you might see a brief message that says "Finding your space." If this message continues for more than a few seconds, you'll see another message under the Start menu that says "Still looking for your space."
-
-These messages mean that HoloLens is having trouble mapping your space. When this happens, you'll be able to open apps, but you won't be able to place holograms in your environment.
-
-If you see these messages often, try the following:
-
-- Make sure you're in a well-lit room without a lot of direct sunlight.
-- Make sure your device visor is clean. [Learn how](hololens1-hardware.md#care-and-cleaning).
-- Make sure you have a strong Wi-Fi signal. If you enter a new environment that has no Wi-Fi or a weak signal, HoloLens won't be able find your space. Check your Wi-Fi connection by going to **Settings **> **Network & Internet** >** Wi-Fi**.
-- Try moving more slowly.
-
-[Back to list](#list)
-
-## I'm not seeing the holograms I expect to see in my space
-
-If you don't see holograms you placed, or you're seeing some you don't expect, try the following:
-
-- Try turning on some lights. HoloLens works best in a well-lit space.
-- Remove holograms you don't need by going to **Settings** > **System** > **Holograms** > **Remove nearby holograms**. Or, if needed, select **Remove all holograms**.
-
- > [!NOTE]
- > If the layout or lighting in your space changes significantly, your device might have trouble identifying your space and showing your holograms.
-
-[Back to list](#list)
-
-## I can't place holograms where I want
-
-Here are some things to try if you're having trouble placing holograms:
-
-- Stand about 1 to 3 meters from where you're trying to place the hologram.
-- Don't place holograms on black or reflective surfaces.
-- Make sure you're in a well-lit room without a lot of direct sunlight.
-- Walk around the rooms so HoloLens can rescan your surroundings. To see what's already been scanned, air tap to reveal the mapping mesh graphic.
-
-[Back to list](#list)
-
-## Holograms disappear or are encased in other holograms or objects
-
-If you get too close to a hologram, it will temporarily disappear—just move away from it. Also, if you've placed a lot of holograms close together, some may disappear. Try removing a few.
-
-Holograms can also be blocked or encased by other holograms or by objects such as walls. If this happens, try one of the following:
-
-- If the hologram is encased in another hologram, move it to another location: select **Adjust**, then tap and hold to position it.
-- If the hologram is encased in a wall, select **Adjust**, then walk toward the wall until the hologram appears. Tap and hold, then pull the hologram forward and out of the wall.
-- If you can't move the hologram with gestures, use your voice to remove it. Gaze at the hologram, then say "Remove." Then reopen it and place it in a new location.
-
-[Back to list](#list)
-
-## I can see holograms that are on the other side of a wall
-
-If you're very close to a wall, or if HoloLens hasn't scanned the wall yet, you'll be able to see holograms that are in the next room. Stand 1 to 3 meters from the wall and gaze to scan it.
-
-If HoloLens has problems scanning the wall, it might be because there's a black or reflective object nearby (for example, a black couch or a stainless steel refrigerator). If there is, scan the other side of the wall.
-
-[Back to list](#list)
-
-## When I place a hologram on a wall, it seems to float
-
-Holograms placed on walls will appear to be an inch or so away from the wall. If they appear farther away, try the following:
-
-- Stand 1 to 3 meters from the wall when you place a hologram and face the wall straight on.
-- Air tap the wall to reveal the mapping mesh graphic. Make sure the mesh is lined up with the wall. If it isn't, remove the hologram, rescan the wall, and try again.
-- If the issue persists, run the Calibration app. You'll find it in **Settings** > **System** > **Utilities**.
-
-[Back to list](#list)
-
-## Apps appear too close to me when I'm trying to move them
-
-Try walking around and looking at the area where you're placing the app so HoloLens will scan it from different angles. [Cleaning your device visor](hololens1-hardware.md#care-and-cleaning) may also help.
-
-[Back to list](#list)
-
-## I'm getting a low disk space error
-
-Free up some storage space by doing one or more of the following:
-
-- Remove some of the holograms you've placed, or remove some saved data from within apps. [How do I find my data?](holographic-data.md)
-- Delete some pictures and videos in the Photos app.
-- Uninstall some apps from your HoloLens. In the All apps list, tap and hold the app you want to uninstall, then select **Uninstall**. (This will also delete any of the app's data stored on the device.)
-
-[Back to list](#list)
-
-## HoloLens doesn't respond to my gestures
-
-To make sure HoloLens can see your gestures, keep your hand in the gesture frame, which extends a couple of feet on either side of you. HoloLens can also best see your hand when you hold it about 18 inches in front of your body (though you don't have to be precise about this). When HoloLens can see your hand, the cursor will change from a dot to a ring. Learn more about [using gestures in HoloLens 2](hololens2-basic-usage.md) or [using gestures in HoloLens (1st gen)](hololens1-basic-usage.md).
-
-[Back to list](#list)
-
-## HoloLens doesn't respond to my voice
-
-If Cortana isn't responding to your voice, make sure Cortana is on. In the **All apps** list, select **Cortana** > **Menu** > **Notebook** > **Settings** to make changes. To learn more about what you can say, see [Use your voice with HoloLens](hololens-cortana.md).
-
-[Back to list](#list)
-
-## I'm having problems pairing or using a Bluetooth device
-
-If you're having problems [pairing a Bluetooth device](hololens-connect-devices.md), try the following:
-
-- Go to **Settings** > **Devices** and make sure Bluetooth is turned on. If it is, try turning if off and on again.
-- Make sure your Bluetooth device is fully charged or has fresh batteries.
-- If you still can't connect, [restart your HoloLens](hololens-recovery.md).
-
-If you're having trouble using a Bluetooth device, make sure it's a supported device. Supported devices include:
-
-- English-language QWERTY Bluetooth keyboards, which can be used anywhere you use the holographic keyboard.
-- Bluetooth mice.
-- The [HoloLens clicker](hololens1-clicker.md).
-
-Other Bluetooth HID and GATT devices can be paired, but they might require a companion app from Microsoft Store to work with HoloLens.
-
-HoloLens doesn't support Bluetooth audio profiles. Bluetooth audio devices, such as speakers and headsets, may appear as available in HoloLens settings, but they aren't supported.
-
-[Back to list](#list)
-
-## I'm having problems with the HoloLens clicker
-
-Use the [clicker](hololens1-clicker.md) to select, scroll, move, and resize holograms. Additional clicker gestures may vary from app to app.
-
-If you're having trouble using the clicker, make sure its charged and paired with your HoloLens. If the battery is low, the indicator light will blink amber. To see if its paired, go to **Settings** > **Devices** and see if it shows up there. [Pair the clicker](hololens-connect-devices.md#pair-the-clicker).
-
-If the clicker is charged and paired and you're still having problems, reset it by holding down the main button and the pairing button for 15 seconds. Then pair the clicker with your HoloLens again.
-
-If that doesn't help, see [Restart or recover the HoloLens clicker](hololens1-clicker.md#restart-or-recover-the-clicker).
-
-[Back to list](#list)
-
-## I can't connect to Wi-Fi
-
-Here are some things to try if you can't connect to Wi-Fi on HoloLens:
-
-- Make sure Wi-Fi is turned on. Bloom to go to Start, then select **Settings** > **Network & Internet** > **Wi-Fi** to check. If Wi-Fi is on, try turning it off and on again.
-- Move closer to the router or access point.
-- Restart your Wi-Fi router, then [restart HoloLens](hololens-recovery.md). Try connecting again.
-- If none of these things work, check to make sure your router is using the latest firmware. You can find this information on the manufacturers website.
-
-[Back to list](#list)
-
-## My HoloLens isn't running well, is unresponsive, or won't start
-
-If your device isn't performing properly, see [Restart, reset, or recover HoloLens](hololens-recovery.md).
-
-[Back to list](#list)
-
-## How do I delete all spaces?
-
-*Coming soon*
-
-[Back to list](#list)
-
-## I cannot find or use the keyboard to type in the HoloLens 2 Emulator
-
-*Coming soon*
-
-[Back to list](#list)
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens-calibration.md b/devices/hololens/hololens-calibration.md
deleted file mode 100644
index cfc55d1070..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens-calibration.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,149 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Improve visual quality and comfort
-description: Calibrating your IPD (interpupillary distance) can improve the quality of your visuals. Both HoloLens and Windows Mixed Reality immersive headsets offer ways to customize IPD.
-author: Teresa-Motiv
-ms.author: xerxesb
-ms.date: 9/13/2019
-ms.topic: article
-keywords: calibration, comfort, visuals, quality, ipd
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: Teresa-Motiv
-ms.localizationpriority: high
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: jarrettr
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# Improve visual quality and comfort
-
-HoloLens 2 and HoloLens (1st gen) both work better when they're calibrated to your unique eyes.
-
-While both devices need to calibrate for the best hologram viewing experience, they use different calibration technologies and techniques. Jump to [HoloLens 2 calibration](#calibrating-your-hololens-2) or [HoloLens (1st gen) calibration](#calibrating-your-hololens-1st-gen).
-
-## Calibrating your HoloLens 2
-
-HoloLens 2 uses eye-tracking technology to improve your experience seeing and interacting with the virtual environment. Calibrating the HoloLens 2 ensures that it can accurately track your eyes (and the eyes of anyone else who uses the device). After calibration, holograms will appear correctly even as the visor shifts on your head.
-
-HoloLens 2 prompts a user to calibrate the device under the following circumstances:
-
-- The user is using the device for the first time
-- The user previously opted out of the calibration process
-- The calibration process did not succeed the last time the user used the device
-- The user has deleted their calibration profiles
-- The visor is raised and the lowered and any of the above circumstances apply (this may be disabled in **Settings > System > Calibration**.)
-
-
-
-During this process, you'll look at a set of targets (gems). It's fine if you blink or close your eyes during calibration but try not to stare at other objects in the room. This allows HoloLens to learn about your eye position to render your holographic world.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-If calibration was successful, you'll see a success screen. If not, read more about diagnosing calibration failures [here](#troubleshooting-hololens-2-calibration).
-
-
-
-### Calibration when sharing a device or session
-
-Multiple users can share a HoloLens 2 device, without a need for each person to go through device setup. When a new user puts the device on their head for th first time, HoloLens 2 automatically prompts the user to calibrate visuals. When a user that has previously calibrated visuals puts the device on their head, the display seamlessly adjusts for quality and a comfortable viewing experience.
-
-### Manually starting the calibration process
-
-1. Use the start gesture to open the [**Start** menu](hololens2-basic-usage.md#start-gesture).
-1. If the Settings app isn't pinned to **Start**, select **All Apps**.
-1. Select **Settings**, and then select **System** > **Calibration** > **Eye Calibration** > **Run eye calibration**.
-
- 
-
-### Troubleshooting HoloLens 2 calibration
-
-Calibration should work for most people, but there are cases where calibration fails.
-
-Some potential reasons for calibration failure include:
-
-- Getting distracted and not following the calibration targets
-- Dirty or scratched device visor or device visor not positioned properly
-- Dirty or scratched glasses
-- Certain types of contact lenses and glasses (colored contact lenses, some toric contact lenses, IR blocking glasses, some high prescription glasses, sunglasses, or similar)
-- More-pronounced makeup and some eyelash extensions
-- Hair or thick eyeglass frames if they are blocking the device from seeing your eyes
-- Certain eye physiology, eye conditions or eye surgery such as narrow eyes, long eyelashes, amblyopia, nystagmus, some cases of LASIK or other eye surgeries
-
-If calibration is unsuccessful try:
-
-- Cleaning your device visor
-- Cleaning your glasses
-- Pushing your device visor as close to your eyes as possible
-- Moving objects in your visor out of the way (such as hair)
-- Turning on a light in your room or moving out of direct sunlight
-
-If you followed all guidelines and calibration is still failing, please let us know by filing feedback in [Feedback Hub](hololens-feedback.md).
-
-### Calibration data and security
-
-Calibration information is stored locally on the device and is not associated with any account information. There is no record of who has used the device without calibration. This mean new users will get prompted to calibrate visuals when they use the device for the first time, as well as users who opted out of calibration previously or if calibration was unsuccessful.
-
-Calibration information can always be deleted from the device in **Settings** > **Privacy** > **Eye tracker**.
-
-### Disable calibration
-
-You can also disable the calibration prompt by following these steps:
-
-1. Select **Settings** > **System** > **Calibration**.
-1. Turn off **When a new person uses this HoloLens, automatically ask to run eye calibration**.
-
-> [!IMPORTANT]
-> This setting may adversely affect hologram rendering quality and comfort. When you turn off this setting, features that depend on eye tracking (such as text scrolling) no longer work in immersive applications.
-
-### HoloLens 2 eye-tracking technology
-
-The device uses its eye-tracking technology to improve display quality, and to ensure that all holograms are positioned accurately and comfortable to view in 3D. Because it uses the eyes as landmarks, the device can adjust itself for every user and tune its visuals as the headset shifts slightly throughout use. All adjustments happen on the fly without a need for manual tuning.
-
-HoloLens applications use eye tracking to track where you are looking in real time. This is the main capability developers can leverage to enable a whole new level of context, human understanding and interactions within the Holographic experience. Developers don’t need to do anything to leverage this capability.
-
-## Calibrating your HoloLens (1st gen)
-
-HoloLens (1st gen) adjusts hologram display according to the your [interpupillary distance](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Interpupillary_distance) (IPD). If the IPD is not accurate, holograms may appear unstable or at an incorrect distance. You can improve the quality of your visuals by calibrating the device to your interpupillary distance (IPD).
-
-When you set up your Hololens (1st gen) device, it prompts to calibrate your visuals after Cortana introduces herself. It's recommended that you complete the calibration step during this setup phase. However you can skip it by waiting until Cortana prompts you and then saying "Skip."
-
-During the calibration process, HoloLens asks you to align your finger with a series of six targets per eye. HoloLens uses this process to set the IPD correctly for your eyes.
-
-
-
-### Manually start the calibration process
-
-If you need to update the calibration or if a new user needs to adjust it, you can manually run the Calibration app at any time. The Calibration app is installed by default. You can access it by using eihter the **Start** menu or the Settings app.
-
-To use the **Start** menu to run the Calibration app, follow these steps:
-
-1. Use the [bloom](hololens1-basic-usage.md) gesture to open the **Start** menu.
-1. To view all apps, select **+**.
-1. Select **Calibration**.
-
-
-
-
-
-To use the Settings app to run the Calibration app, follow these steps:
-
-1. Use the [bloom](hololens1-basic-usage.md) gesture to open the **Start** menu.
-1. If **Settings** isn't pinned to **Start**, select **+** to view all apps.
-1. Select **Settings**.
-1. Select **System** > **Utilities** > **Open Calibration**.
-
-
-
-## Immersive headsets
-
-Some immersive headsets provide the ability to customize the IPD setting. To change the IPD for your headset, open the Settings app and select **Mixed reality** > **Headset display**, and then move the slider control. You’ll see the changes in real time in your headset. If you know your IPD, maybe from a visit to the optometrist, you can enter it directly as well.
-
-You can also adjust this setting on your PC by selecting **Settings** > **Mixed reality** > **Headset display**.
-
-If your headset does not support IPD customization, this setting will be disabled.
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens-commercial-features.md b/devices/hololens/hololens-commercial-features.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 309d81e904..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens-commercial-features.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,78 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Commercial features
-description: The Microsoft HoloLens Commercial Suite includes features that make it easier for businesses to manage HoloLens devices. HoloLens 2 devices are equipped with commercial features by default.
-keywords: HoloLens, commercial, features, mdm, mobile device management, kiosk mode
-author: scooley
-ms.author: scooley
-ms.date: 08/26/2019
-ms.topic: article
-audience: ITPro
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.localizationpriority: high
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: jarrettr
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# Commercial features
-
-HoloLens includes features that make it easier for businesses to manage HoloLens devices.
-
-Every HoloLens 2 device has commercial features available.
-
-HoloLens (1st gen) came with two licensing options, the developer license and a commercial license. To unlock HoloLens's commercial capabilities, upgrade from the developer license to a commercial license. To purchase the Microsoft HoloLens Commercial Suite, contact your local Microsoft account manager.
-
->[!VIDEO https://www.youtube.com/embed/tNd0e2CiAkE]
-
-## Key commercial features
-
-- **Kiosk mode.** You can use HoloLens in demo or showcase experiences by using kiosk mode, to limit which apps can run.
-
- 
-
-- **Mobile Device Management (MDM) for HoloLens.** Your IT department can manage multiple HoloLens devices simultaneously by using solutions such as Microsoft Intune. You can manage settings, select apps to install, and set security configurations that are tailored to your organization's needs.
-
- 
-
-- **Windows Update for Business.** Windows Update for Business provides controlled operating system updates to devices and support for the long-term servicing channel.
-- **Data security.** BitLocker data encryption is enabled on HoloLens to provide the same level of security protection as any other Windows device.
-- **Work access.** Anyone in your organization can remotely connect to the corporate network through virtual private network (VPN) on a HoloLens. HoloLens can also access Wi-Fi networks that require credentials.
-- **Microsoft Store for Business.** Your IT department can also set up an enterprise private store, containing only your company’s apps for your specific HoloLens usage. Securely distribute your enterprise software to selected group of enterprise users.
-
-## Feature comparison between editions
-
-|Features |HoloLens Development Edition |HoloLens Commercial Suite |HoloLens 2 |
-|---|:---:|:---:|:---:|
-|Device Encryption (BitLocker) | |✔️ |✔️ |
-|Virtual Private Network (VPN) | |✔️ |✔️ |
-|[Kiosk mode](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/using-the-windows-device-portal#kiosk-mode) | |✔️ |✔️ |
-|**Management and deployment** | | | |
-|Mobile Device Management (MDM) | |✔️ |✔️ |
-|Ability to block unenrollment | |✔️ |✔️ |
-|Cert-based corporate Wi-Fi access | |✔️ |✔️ |
-|Microsoft Store (Consumer) |Consumer |Filter by using MDM |Filter by using MDM |
-|[Business Store Portal](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-store/working-with-line-of-business-apps) | |✔️ |✔️ |
-|**Security and identity** | | | |
-|Sign in by using Azure Active Directory (AAD) account |✔️ |✔️ |✔️ |
-|Sign in by using Microsoft Account (MSA) |✔️ |✔️ |✔️ |
-|Next Generation Credentials with PIN unlock |✔️ |✔️ |✔️ |
-|[Secure boot](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows-hardware/design/device-experiences/oem-secure-boot) |✔️ |✔️ |✔️ |
-|**Servicing and support** | | | |
-|Automatic system updates as they arrive |✔️ |✔️ |✔️ |
-|[Windows Update for Business](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/deployment/update/waas-manage-updates-wufb) | |✔️ |✔️ |
-|Long-Term Servicing Channel (LTSC) | |✔️ |✔️ |
-
-## Enabling commercial features
-
-Your organization's IT admin can set up commercial features such as Microsoft Store for Business, kiosk mode, and enterprise Wi-Fi access. The [Microsoft HoloLens](https://docs.microsoft.com/hololens) documentation provides step-by-step instructions for enrolling devices and installing apps from Microsoft Store for Business.
-
-## See also
-
-- [Microsoft HoloLens](https://docs.microsoft.com/hololens)
-- [Kiosk mode](/windows/mixed-reality/using-the-windows-device-portal.md#kiosk-mode)
-- [CSPs supported in HoloLens devices](/windows/client-management/mdm/configuration-service-provider-reference#csps-supported-in-hololens-devices)
-- [Microsoft Store For Business and line of business applications](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/sbucci/2016/04/13/windows-store-for-business-and-line-of-business-applications/)
-- [Working with line-of-business apps](/microsoft-store/working-with-line-of-business-apps)
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens-connect-devices.md b/devices/hololens/hololens-connect-devices.md
deleted file mode 100644
index bbe2dad4d3..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens-connect-devices.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,74 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Connect to Bluetooth and USB-C devices
-description: This guide walks through connecting to Bluetooth and USB-C devices and accessories.
-ms.assetid: 01af0848-3b36-4c13-b797-f38ad3977e30
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: Teresa-Motiv
-ms.author: v-tea
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: high
-ms.date: 09/13/2019
-manager: jarrettr
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# Connect to Bluetooth and USB-C devices
-
-## Pair Bluetooth devices
-
-Pair a Bluetooth mouse and keyboard with HoloLens, then use them to interact with holograms and to type anywhere you'd use the holographic keyboard.
-
-Classes of Bluetooth devices supported by HoloLens 2:
-
-- Mouse
-- Keyboard
-- Bluetooth audio output (A2DP) devices
-
-Classes of Bluetooth devices supported by HoloLens (1st gen):
-
-- Mouse
-- Keyboard
-- HoloLens (1st gen) clicker
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Other types of Bluetooth devices, such as speakers, headsets, smartphones, and game pads, may appear as available in HoloLens settings, but aren't supported on HoloLens (1st gen). [Learn more](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=746660).
-
-### Pair a Bluetooth keyboard or mouse
-
-1. Turn on your keyboard or mouse and make it discoverable. The way you make it discoverable depends on the device. To learn how to do this, check the device or visit the manufacturer's website.
-
-1. Use the bloom gesture (HoloLens (1st gen) or the start gesture (HoloLens 2) to go to **Start**, then select **Settings**.
-1. Select **Devices** and make sure that Bluetooth is on. When you see the device name, select **Pair** and follow the instructions.
-
-### Pair the clicker
-
-> Applies to HoloLens (1st gen) only.
-
-1. Use the bloom gesture to go to **Start**, then select **Settings**.
-
-1. Select **Devices** and make sure that Bluetooth is on.
-1. Use the tip of a pen to press and hold the clicker's pairing button until the status light blinks white. Make sure to hold the button down until the light starts blinking. [Where's the pairing button?](hololens1-clicker.md)
-1. On the pairing screen, select **Clicker** > **Pair**.
-
-## Connect USB-C devices
-
-> Applies to HoloLens 2 only.
-
-HoloLens 2 lets you connect a wide range of USB-C devices.
-
-HoloLens 2 supports the following devices classes:
-
-- Mass storage devices (such as thumb drives)
-- Ethernet adapters (including ethernet with charging)
-- USB-C to 3.5mm digital audio adapters
-- USB-C digital audio headsets (including headset adapters with charging)
-- Wired mouse
-- Wired keyboard
-- Combination PD hubs (USB A + PD charging)
-
-## Connect to Miracast
-
-Use Miracast by opening the **Start** menu and selecting the display icon or saying "Connect" while gazing at the **Start** menu. Choose an available device from the list that appears and complete pairing to begin projection.
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens-cortana.md b/devices/hololens/hololens-cortana.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 82ded27dd3..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens-cortana.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,122 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Use your voice with HoloLens
-description: Cortana can help you do all kinds of things on your HoloLens
-ms.assetid: fd96fb0e-6759-4dbe-be1f-58bedad66fed
-ms.date: 11/8/2019
-keywords: hololens
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: v-miegge
-audience: ITPro
-ms.author: v-miegge
-ms.topic: article
-manager: jarrettr
-ms.localizationpriority: high
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# Use your voice with HoloLens
-
-You can use your voice to do almost anything on HoloLens, such as taking a quick photo or opening an app. Many voice commands are built into HoloLens, while others are available through Cortana.
-
-This article teaches you how to control HoloLens and your holographic world with your voice and with Cortana.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Speech is only supported in [some languages](hololens2-language-support.md). The speech language is based on the Windows display language, not the keyboard language.
->
-> You can verify the Windows display language by selecting **Settings** > **Time and Language** > **Language**.
-
-## Built-in voice commands
-
-Get around HoloLens faster with these basic commands. In order to use these you need to enable Speech during first run of the device or in **Settings** > **Privacy** > **Speech**. You can always check whether speech is enabled by looking at the status at the top of Start menu.
-
-### General speech commands
-
-Use these commands throughout Windows Mixed Reality to get around faster. Some commands use the gaze cursor, which you bring up by saying “select.”
-
->[!NOTE]
->Hand rays are not supported on HoloLens (1st Gen).
-
-| Say this | To do this |
-| - | - |
-| "Select" | Say "select" to bring up the gaze cursor. Then, turn your head to position the cursor on the thing you want to select, and say “select” again. |
-|Open the Start menu | "Go to Start" |
-|Close the Start menu | "Close" |
-|Leave an immersive app | Say "Go to Start" to bring up the quick actions menu, then say "Mixed reality home." |
-|Hide and show hand ray | "Hide hand ray" / "Show hand ray" |
-|See available speech commands | "What can I say?" |
-
-### Hologram commands
-
-To use these commands, gaze at a 3D object, hologram, or app window.
-
-| Say this | To do this |
-| - | - |
-| "Bigger" | Make it bigger |
-| "Smaller" | Make it smaller |
-| "Face me" | Turn it to face you |
-| "Move this" | Move it (follow your gaze) |
-| "Close" | Close it |
-| "Follow me" / "Stop following" | Make it follow you as you move around |
-
-### See it, say it
-
-Many buttons and other elements on HoloLens also respond to your voice—for example, **Follow me** and **Close** on the app bar, or the **Back** button in Edge. To find out if a button is voice-enabled, rest your **gaze cursor** on it for a moment to see a voice tip.
-
-### Dictation mode
-
-Tired of typing? Switch to dictation mode any time that the holographic keyboard is active. To get started, select the microphone button or say "Start dictating." To stop dictating, select the button again or say "Stop dictating." To delete what you just dictated, say "Delete that."
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> To use dictation mode, you have to have an internet connection.
-
-HoloLens dictation uses explicit punctuation, meaning that you say the name of the punctuation you want to use. For instance, you might say "Hey **comma** what are you up to **question mark**."
-
-Here are the punctuation keywords that you can use:
-
-- Period, comma, question mark, exclamation point/exclamation mark
-- New line/new paragraph
-- Semicolon, colon
-- Open quote(s), close quote(s)
-- Hashtag, smiley/smiley face, frowny, winky
-- Dollar, percent
-
-Sometimes it's helpful to spell out things like email addresses. For instance, to dictate example@outlook.com, you'd say "E X A M P L E at outlook dot com."
-
-## Do more with Cortana
-
-Cortana can help you do all kinds of things on your HoloLens, from searching the web to shutting down your device. She can give you suggestions, ideas, reminders, alerts, and more. To get her attention, select Cortana on **Start** or say "Hey Cortana" anytime.
-
-
-
-Here are some things you can try saying (remember to say "Hey Cortana" first).
-
-**Hey, Cortana**...
-
-- What can I say?
-- Increase the volume.
-- Decrease the brightness.
-- Shut down.
-- Restart.
-- Go to sleep.
-- Mute.
-- Launch <*app name*>.
-- Move <*app name*> here (gaze at the spot that you want the app to move to).
-- Go to Start.
-- Take a picture.
-- Start recording. (Starts recording a video.)
-- Stop recording. (Stops recording a video.)
-- What time is it?
-- Show me the latest NBA scores.
-- How much battery do I have left?
-- Tell me a joke.
-
-Some Cortana features that you're used to from Windows on your PC or phone (for example, reminders and notifications) aren't supported in Microsoft HoloLens, and the Cortana experience may vary from one region to another.
-
-### Turn Cortana off
-
-Cortana is on the first time you use HoloLens when you enable speech. You can turn her off in Cortana's settings. In the **All apps** list, select **Cortana** > **Settings**. Then turn off Cortana can give you suggestions, ideas, reminders, alerts, and more.
-
-If Cortana isn't responding to "Hey Cortana," check that speech is enabled on Start and go to Cortana's settings and check to make sure she's on.
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens-encryption.md b/devices/hololens/hololens-encryption.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6c8b9118e6..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens-encryption.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,99 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Enable Bitlocker encryption for HoloLens (HoloLens)
-description: Enable Bitlocker device encryption to protect files stored on the HoloLens
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.date: 01/26/2019
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
----
-
-# Enable encryption for HoloLens
-
-HoloLens (1st gen) and HoloLens 2 both support device encryption using BitLocker, however, BitLocker is always enabled on HoloLens 2.
-
-This article will help you enable and manage BitLocker on HoloLens (1st gen).
-
-On HoloLens (1st gen) you can enable BitLocker device encryption manually or using mobile device management (MDM). Follow these instructions to enable [BitLocker device encryption](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/security/information-protection/bitlocker/bitlocker-device-encryption-overview-windows-10#bitlocker-device-encryption) to protect files and information stored on the HoloLens. Device encryption helps protect your data using the AES-CBC 128 encryption method, which is equivalent to [EncryptionMethodByDriveType method 3](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/bitlocker-csp#encryptionmethodbydrivetype) in the BitLocker configuration service provider (CSP). Personnel who have the correct encryption key (such as a password) can decrypt it or perform a data recovery.
-
-## Enable device encryption using MDM
-
-You can use your Mobile Device Management (MDM) provider to apply a policy that requires device encryption. The policy to use is the [Security/RequireDeviceEncryption setting](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-security#security-requiredeviceencryption) in the Policy CSP.
-
-[See instructions for enabling device encryption using Microsoft Intune.](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/compliance-policy-create-windows#windows-holographic-for-business)
-
-For other MDM tools, see your MDM provider's documentation for instructions. If your MDM provider requires custom URI for device encryption, use the following configuration:
-
-- **Name**: a name of your choice
-- **Description**: optional
-- **OMA-URI**: `./Vendor/MSFT/Policy/Config/Security/RequireDeviceEncryption`
-- **Data type**: integer
-- **Value**: `1`
-
-## Enable device encryption using a provisioning package
-
-Provisioning packages are files created by the Windows Configuration Designer tool that apply a specified configuration to a device.
-
-### Create a provisioning package that upgrades the Windows Holographic edition and enables encryption
-
-1. [Create a provisioning package for HoloLens.](hololens-provisioning.md)
-1. Go to **Runtime settings** > **Policies** > **Security**, and select **RequireDeviceEncryption**.
-
- 
-
-1. Find the XML license file that was provided when you purchased the Commercial Suite.
-
-1. Browse to and select the XML license file that was provided when you purchased the Commercial Suite.
- >[!NOTE]
- >You can configure [additional settings in the provisioning package](hololens-provisioning.md).
-
-1. On the **File** menu, click **Save**.
-
-1. Read the warning explaining that project files may contain sensitive information and click **OK**.
-
- >[!IMPORTANT]
- >When you build a provisioning package, you may include sensitive information in the project files and provisioning package (.ppkg) file. Although you have the option to encrypt the .ppkg file, project files are not encrypted. You should store the project files in a secure location and delete the project files when no longer needed.
-
-1. On the **Export** menu, click **Provisioning package**.
-1. Change **Owner** to **IT Admin**, which will set the precedence of this provisioning package higher than provisioning packages applied to this device from other sources, and then select **Next**.
-1. Set a value for **Package Version**.
-
- >[!TIP]
- >You can make changes to existing packages and change the version number to update previously applied packages.
-
-1. On the **Select security details for the provisioning package**, click **Next**.
-1. Click **Next** to specify the output location where you want the provisioning package to go once it's built. By default, Windows ICD uses the project folder as the output location.
-
- Optionally, you can click Browse to change the default output location.
-
-1. Click **Next**.
-1. Click **Build** to start building the package. The project information is displayed in the build page and the progress bar indicates the build status.
-1. When the build completes, click **Finish**.
-
-### Apply the provisioning package to HoloLens
-
-1. Connect the device via USB to a PC and start the device, but do not continue past the **fit** page of the initial setup experience (the first page with the blue box).
-1. Briefly press and release the **Volume Down** and **Power** buttons simultaneously.
-1. HoloLens will show up as a device in File Explorer on the PC.
-1. In File Explorer, drag and drop the provisioning package (.ppkg) onto the device storage.
-1. Briefly press and release the **Volume Down** and **Power** buttons simultaneously again while on the **fit** page.
-1. The device will ask you if you trust the package and would like to apply it. Confirm that you trust the package.
-1. You will see whether the package was applied successfully or not. If it failed, you can fix your package and try again. If it succeeded, proceed with device setup.
-
->[!NOTE]
->If the device was purchased before August 2016, you will need to sign into the device with a Microsoft account, get the latest OS update, and then reset the OS in order to apply the provisioning package.
-
-## Verify device encryption
-
-Encryption is silent on HoloLens. To verify the device encryption status:
-
-- On HoloLens, go to **Settings** > **System** > **About**. **BitLocker** is **enabled** if the device is encrypted.
-
- 
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens-enroll-mdm.md b/devices/hololens/hololens-enroll-mdm.md
deleted file mode 100644
index dc042a0f9f..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens-enroll-mdm.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Enroll HoloLens in MDM
-description: Enroll HoloLens in mobile device management (MDM) for easier management of multiple devices.
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.assetid: 2a9b3fca-8370-44ec-8b57-fb98b8d317b0
-author: scooley
-ms.author: scooley
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.date: 07/15/2019
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# Enroll HoloLens in MDM
-
-You can manage multiple Microsoft HoloLens devices simultaneously using solutions like [Microsoft Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/windows-holographic-for-business). You will be able to manage settings, select apps to install and set security configurations tailored to your organization's need. See [Manage devices running Windows Holographic with Microsoft Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/windows-holographic-for-business), the [configuration service providers (CSPs) that are supported in Windows Holographic](https://msdn.microsoft.com/windows/hardware/commercialize/customize/mdm/configuration-service-provider-reference#hololens), and the [policies supported by Windows Holographic for Business](https://msdn.microsoft.com/windows/hardware/commercialize/customize/mdm/policy-configuration-service-provider#hololenspolicies).
-
->[!NOTE]
->Mobile device management (MDM), including the VPN, Bitlocker, and kiosk mode features, is only available when you [upgrade to Windows Holographic for Business](hololens1-upgrade-enterprise.md).
-
-## Requirements
-
- Your organization will need to have Mobile Device Management (MDM) set up in order to manage HoloLens devices. Your MDM provider can be Microsoft Intune or a 3rd party provider that uses Microsoft MDM APIs.
-
-## Auto-enrollment in MDM
-
-If your organization uses Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) and an MDM solution that accepts an AAD token for authentication (currently, only supported in Microsoft Intune and AirWatch), your IT admin can configure Azure AD to automatically allow MDM enrollment after the user signs in with their Azure AD account. [Learn how to configure Azure AD enrollment.](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/deploy-use/set-up-windows-device-management-with-microsoft-intune#azure-active-directory-enrollment)
-
-When auto-enrollment is enabled, no additional manual enrollment is needed. When the user signs in with an Azure AD account, the device is enrolled in MDM after completing the first-run experience.
-
-## Enroll through Settings app
-
- When the device is not enrolled in MDM during the first-run experience, the user can manually enroll the device with the organization's MDM server using the Settings app.
-
-1. Go to **Settings** > **Accounts** > **Work access**.
-1. Select **Enroll into device management** and enter your organizational account. You will be redirected to your organization's sign in page.
-1. Upon successful authentication to the MDM server, a success message is shown.
-
-Your device is now enrolled with your MDM server. The device will need to restart to acquire policies, certificates, and apps. The Settings app will now reflect that the device is enrolled in device management.
-
-## Unenroll HoloLens from Intune
-
-You cannot [unenroll](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune-user-help/unenroll-your-device-from-intune-windows) HoloLens from Intune remotely. If the administrator unenrolls the device using MDM, the device will age out of the Intune dashboard.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens-environment-considerations.md b/devices/hololens/hololens-environment-considerations.md
deleted file mode 100644
index bdd500b298..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens-environment-considerations.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,121 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Environment considerations for HoloLens
-description: Get the best possible experience using HoloLens when you optimize the device for your eyes and environment. Many different environmental factors are fused together to enable tracking, but as a Mixed Reality developer, there are several factors you can keep in mind to tune a space for better holograms.
-keywords: holographic frame, field of view, fov, calibration, spaces, environment, how-to
-author: dorreneb
-ms.author: dobrown
-manager: jarrettr
-ms.date: 8/29/2019
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.topic: article
-audience: ITPro
-ms.localizationpriority: high
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# Environment considerations for HoloLens
-
-HoloLens blends the holographic with the "real" world, placing holograms in your surroundings. A holographic app window "hangs" on the wall, a holographic ballerina spins on the tabletop, bunny ears sit on top of your unwitting friend’s head. When you’re using an immersive game or app, the holographic world will spread to fill your surroundings but you’ll still be able to see and move around the space.
-
-The holograms you place will stay where you’ve put them, even if you turn off your device.
-
-## Setting up an environment
-
-HoloLens devices know how to place stable and accurate holograms by *tracking* users in a space. Without proper tracking, the device does not understand the environment or the user within it so holograms can appear in the wrong places, not appear in the same spot every time, or not appear at all. The data used to track users is represented in the *spatial map*.
-
-Tracking performance is heavily influenced by the environment the user is in, and tuning an environment to induce stable and consistent tracking is an art rather than a science. Many different environmental factors are fused together to enable tracking, but as a Mixed Reality developer, there are several factors you can keep in mind to tune a space for better tracking.
-
-### Lighting
-
-Windows Mixed Reality uses visual light to track the user's location. When an environment is too bright, the cameras can get saturated, and nothing is seen. If the environment is too dark, the cameras cannot pick up enough information, and nothing is seen. Lighting should be even and sufficiently bright that a human can see without effort, but not so bright that the light is painful to look at.
-
-Areas where there are points of bright light in an overall dim area are also problematic, as the camera has to adjust when moving in and out of bright spaces. This can cause the device to "get lost" and think that the change in light equates to a change in location. Stable light levels in an area will lead to better tracking.
-
-Any outdoor lighting can also cause instability in the tracker, as the sun may vary considerably over time. For example, tracking in the same space in the summer vs. winter can produce drastically different results, as the secondhand light outside may be higher at different times of year.
-
-If you have a luxmeter, a steady 500-1000 lux is a good place to start.
-
-#### Types of lighting
-
-Different types of light in a space can also influence tracking. Light bulbs pulse with the AC electricity running through it - if the AC frequency is 50Hz, then the light pulses at 50Hz. For a human, this pulsing is not noticed. However, HoloLens' 30fps camera sees these changes - some frames will be well-lit, some will be poorly lit, and some will be over-exposed as the camera tries to compensate for light pulses.
-
-In the USA, electricity frequency standard is 60Hz, so light bulb pulses are harmonized with HoloLens' framerate - 60Hz pulses align with HoloLens' 30 FPS framerate. However, many countries have an AC frequency standard of 50Hz, which means some HoloLens frames will be taken during pulses, and others will not. In particular, fluorescent lighting in Europe has been known to cause issues.
-
-There are a few things you can try to resolve flickering issues. Temperature, bulb age, and warm-up cycles are common causes of fluorescent flickering and replacing bulbs may help. Tightening bulbs and making sure current draws are constant can also help.
-
-### Items in a space
-
-HoloLens uses unique environmental landmarks, also known as *features*, to locate itself in a space.
-
-A device can almost never track in a feature-poor area, as the device has no way of knowing where in space it is. Adding features to the walls of a space is usually a good way to improve tracking. Posters, symbols taped to a wall, plants, unique objects, or other similar items all help. A messy desk is a good example of an environment that leads to good tracking - there are a lot of different features in a single area.
-
-Additionally, use unique features in the same space. The same poster repeated multiple times over a wall, for example, will cause device confusion as the HoloLens won't know which of the repetitive posters it is looking at. One common way of adding unique features is to use lines of masking tape to create unique, non-repetitive patterns along the walls and floor of a space.
-
-A good question to ask yourself is: if you saw just a small amount of the scene, could you uniquely locate yourself in the space? If not, it's likely the device will have problems tracking as well.
-
-#### Wormholes
-
-If you have two areas or regions that look the same, the tracker may think they are the same. This results in the device tricking itself into thinking it is somewhere else. We call these types of repetitive areas *wormholes*.
-
-To prevent wormholes, try to prevent identical areas in the same space. Identical areas can sometimes include factory stations, windows on a building, server racks, or work stations. Labelling areas or adding unique features to each similar-looking areas can help mitigate wormholes.
-
-### Movement in a space
-
-If your environment is constantly shifting and changing, the device has no stable features to locate against.
-
-The more moving objects that are in a space, including people, the easier it is to lose tracking. Moving conveyor belts, items in different states of construction, and lots of people in a space have all been known to cause tracking issues.
-
-The HoloLens can quickly adapt to these changes, but only when that area is clearly visible to the device. Areas that are not seen as frequently may lag behind reality, which can cause errors in the spatial map. For example, a user scans a friend and then turns around while the friend leaves the room. A 'ghost' representation of the friend will persist in the spatial mapping data until the user re-scans the now empty space.
-
-### Proximity of the user to items in the space
-
-Similarly to how humans cannot focus well on objects close to the eyes, HoloLens struggles when objects are close to it's cameras. If an object is too close to be seen with both cameras, or if an object is blocking one camera, the device will have far more issues with tracking against the object.
-
-The cameras can see no closer than 15cm from an object.
-
-### Surfaces in a space
-
-Strongly reflective surfaces will likely look different depending on the angle, which affects tracking. Think of a brand new car - when you move around it, light reflects and you see different objects in the surface as you move. To the tracker, the different objects reflected in the surface represent a changing environment, and the device loses tracking.
-
-Less shiny objects are easier to track against.
-
-### Wi-Fi fingerprint considerations
-
-As long as Wi-Fi is enabled, map data will be correlated with a Wi-Fi fingerprint, even when not connected to an actual WiFi network/router. Without Wi-Fi info, the space and holograms may be slightly slower to recognize. If the Wi-Fi signals change significantly, the device may think it is in a different space altogether.
-
-Network identification (such as SSID or MAC address) is not sent to Microsoft, and all Wi-Fi references are kept local on the HoloLens.
-
-## Mapping new spaces
-
-When you enter a new space (or load an existing one), you’ll see a mesh graphic spreading over the space. This means your device is mapping your surroundings. While a HoloLens will learn a space over time, there are tips and tricks to map spaces.
-
-## Environment management
-
-There are two settings which enable users to “clean up” holograms and cause HoloLens to “forget" a space. They exist in **Holograms and environments** in the settings app, with the second setting also appearing under **Privacy** in the settings app.
-
-1. **Delete nearby holograms**. When you select this setting, HoloLens will erase all anchored holograms and all stored map data for the “current space” where the device is located. A new map section would be created and stored in the database for that location once holograms are again placed in that same space.
-
-1. **Delete all holograms**.By selecting this setting, HoloLens will erase ALL map data and anchored holograms in the entire databases of spaces. No holograms will be rediscovered and any holograms need to be newly placed to again store map sections in the database.
-
-## Hologram quality
-
-Holograms can be placed throughout your environment—high, low, and all around you—but you’ll see them through a [holographic frame](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/holographic-frame) that sits in front of your eyes. To get the best view, make sure to adjust your device so you can see the entire frame. And don’t hesitate to walk around your environment and explore!
-
-For your [holograms](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/hologram) to look crisp, clear, and stable, your HoloLens needs to be calibrated just for you. When you first set up your HoloLens, you’ll be guided through this process. Later on, if holograms don’t look right or you’re seeing a lot of errors, you can make adjustments.
-
-If you are having trouble mapping spaces, try deleting nearby holograms and remapping the space.
-
-### Calibration
-
-If your holograms look jittery or shaky, or if you’re having trouble placing holograms, the first thing to try is the [Calibration app](hololens-calibration.md). This app can also help if you’re experiencing any discomfort while using your HoloLens.
-
-To get to the Calibration app, go to **Settings** > **System** > **Utilities**. Select **Open Calibration** and follow the instructions.
-
-If someone else is going to be using your HoloLens, they should run the Calibration app first so the device is set up properly for them.
-
-## See also
-
-- [Spatial mapping design](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/spatial-mapping)
-- [Holograms](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/hologram)
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens-feedback.md b/devices/hololens/hololens-feedback.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 3199517a90..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens-feedback.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,82 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Give us feedback
-description: Create actionable feedback for HoloLens and Windows Mixed Reality developers by using the Feedback Hub.
-ms.assetid: b9b24c72-ff86-44a9-b30d-dd76c49479a9
-author: mattzmsft
-ms.author: mazeller
-ms.date: 09/13/2019
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.topic: article
-keywords: feedback, bug, issue, error, troubleshoot, help
-manager: jarrettr
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# Give us feedback
-
-Use the Feedback Hub to tell us which features you love, which features you could do without, or when something could be better.
-
-## Feedback for Windows Mixed Reality immersive headset on PC
-
-> [!IMPORTANT]
-> Before you report an issue, make sure that your environment meets the following requirements so that you can successfully upload logs and other information:
->
-> - Have a minimum of 3GB free disk space available on the main drive of the device.
-> - To upload cabs or other large files, connect to a non-metered network.
-
-1. Make sure that you have the immersive headset connected to your PC, and then on the desktop, select **Feedback Hub**.
-1. In the left pane, select **Feedback**.
- 
-1. To enter new feedback, select **Add new feedback**.
- 
-1. To make feedback actionable, in **What kind of feedback is this?** select **Problem**.
-1. In **Summarize your issue**, enter a meaningful title for your feedback.
-1. In **Give us more detail**, provide details and repro steps.
- 
-
- As the top category, select **Mixed Reality**. Then select an applicable subcategory, as explained in the following table:
-
- |Subcategory |Description |
- |----------|----------|
- | Apps | Issues about a specific application. |
- | Developer | Issues about authoring or running an app for Mixed Reality. |
- | Device | Issues about the head-mounted device (HMD) itself. |
- | Home experience | Issues about your VR environment and your interactions with the your mixed reality home. |
- | Input | Issues about input methods, such as motion controllers, speech, gamepad, or mouse and keyboard. |
- | Set up | Anything that is preventing you from setting up the device. |
- | All other issues | Anything else. |
-
-1. If possible, add traces or video to your feedback to help us identify and fix the issue more quickly. To do this, follow these steps:
- 1. To start collecting traces, select **Start capture**. The app starts collecting traces and a video capture of your mixed reality scenario.
-
- 
- 1. Do not close the Feedback Hub app, but switch to the scenario that produces the issue. Run through the scenario to produce the circumstances that you have described.
- 1. After you finish your scenario, go back to the Feedback Hub app and select **Stop capture**. The app stops collecting information, stores the information in a file, and attaches the file to your feedback.
-1. Select **Submit**.
- 
- The Thank You page indicates that your feedback has been successfully submitted.
- 
-
-To easily direct other people (such as co-workers, Microsoft staff, [forum](https://forums.hololens.com/) readers et al) to the issue, go to **Feedback** > **My Feedback**, select the issue, select **Share**. This action provides a shortened URL that you can give to others so that they can upvote or escalate your issue.
-
-## Feedback for HoloLens
-
-1. Use the **bloom** gesture to open the **Start** menu, and then select **Feedback Hub**.
-
- 
-1. Place the app in your environment and then select the app to launch it.
-1. To see if someone else has given similar feedback, in the Feedback search box, enter a few keywords about the topic.
-
- 
-1. If you find similar feedback, select it, add any details, then select **Upvote**.
-
- 
-1. If you don’t find any similar feedback, select **Add new feedback**, select a topic from **Select a category**, and then select a subcategory from **Select a subcategory**.
-
- 
-1. Enter your feedback.
-1. If you are reporting a reproducible issue, you can select **Reproduce**. Without closing Feedback Hub, reproduce the issue. After you finish, come back to Feedback Hub and select **I’m done**. The app adds a mixed reality capture of your repro and relevant diagnostic logs to your feedback.
-1. Select **Post feedback**, and you’re done.
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens-identity.md b/devices/hololens/hololens-identity.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 3cc6cc4cfc..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens-identity.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,111 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Managing user identity and login on HoloLens
-description: Manage user identity, security, and login on HoloLens.
-keywords: HoloLens, user, account, aad, adfs, microsoft account, msa, credentials, reference
-ms.assetid: 728cfff2-81ce-4eb8-9aaa-0a3c3304660e
-author: scooley
-ms.author: scooley
-ms.date: 1/6/2019
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.topic: article
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-audience: ITPro
-manager: jarrettr
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# User identity and signin
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> This article is a technical reference for IT Pros and tech enthusiasts. If you're looking for HoloLens set up instructions, read "[Setting up your HoloLens (1st gen)](hololens1-start.md)" or "[Setting up your HoloLens 2](hololens2-start.md)".
-
-Like other Windows devices, HoloLens always operates under a user context. There is always a user identity. HoloLens treats identity in almost the same manner as other Windows 10 devices do. This article is a deep-dive reference for identity on HoloLens, and focuses on how HoloLens differs from other Windows 10 devices.
-
-HoloLens supports several kinds of user identities. You can use one or more user accounts to sign in. Here's an overview of the identity types and authentication options on HoloLens:
-
-| Identity type | Accounts per device | Authentication options |
-| --- | --- | --- |
-| [Azure Active Directory (AAD)](https://docs.microsoft.com/azure/active-directory/) | 32 (see details) |
Azure web credential provider
Azure Authenticator App
Biometric (Iris) – HoloLens 2 only
PIN – Optional for HoloLens (1st gen), required for HoloLens 2
PIN – Optional for HoloLens (1st gen), required for HoloLens 2
Password
|
-| [Local account](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/security/identity-protection/access-control/local-accounts) | 1 | Password |
-
-Cloud-connected accounts (AAD and MSA) offer more features because they can use Azure services.
-
-## Setting up users
-
-The most common way to set up a new user is during the HoloLens out-of-box experience (OOBE). During setup, HoloLens prompts for a user to sign in by using the account that they want to use on the device. This account can be a consumer Microsoft account or an enterprise account that has been configured in Azure. See Setting up your [HoloLens (1st gen)](hololens1-start.md) or [HoloLens 2](hololens2-start.md).
-
-Like Windows on other devices, signing in during setup creates a user profile on the device. The user profile stores apps and data. The same account also provides Single Sign-on for apps such as Edge or Skype by using the Windows Account Manager APIs.
-
-If you use an enterprise or organizational account to sign in to HoloLens, HoloLens enrolls in the organization's IT infrastructure. This enrollment allows your IT Admin to configure Mobile Device Management (MDM) to send group policies to your HoloLens.
-
-By default, as for other Windows 10 devices, you'll have to sign in again when HoloLens restarts or resumes from standby. You can use the Settings app to change this behavior, or the behavior can be controlled by group policy.
-
-### Linked accounts
-
-As in the Desktop version of Windows, you can link additional web account credentials to your HoloLens account. Such linking makes it easier to access resources across or within apps (such as the Store) or to combine access to personal and work resources. After you connect an account to the device, you can grant permission to use the device to apps so that you don't have to sign in to each app individually.
-
-Linking accounts does not separate the user data created on the device, such as images or downloads.
-
-### Setting up multi-user support (AAD only)
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> **HoloLens (1st gen)** began supporting multiple AAD users in the [Windows 10 April 2018 Update](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/release-notes-april-2018) as part of [Windows Holographic for Business](hololens-upgrade-enterprise.md).
-
-HoloLens supports multiple users from the same AAD tenant. To use this feature, you must use an account that belongs to your organization to set up the device. Subsequently, other users from the same tenant can sign in to the device from the sign-in screen or by tapping the user tile on the Start panel. Only one user can be signed in at a time. When a user signs in, HoloLens signs out the previous user.
-
-All users can use the apps installed on the device. However, each user has their own app data and preferences. Removing an app from the device removes it for all users.
-
-## Removing users
-
-You can remove a user from the device by going to **Settings** > **Accounts** > **Other people**. This action also reclaims space by removing all of that user's app data from the device.
-
-## Using single sign-on within an app
-
-As an app developer, you can take advantage of linked identities on HoloLens by using the [Windows Account Manager APIs](https://docs.microsoft.com/uwp/api/Windows.Security.Authentication.Web.Core), just as you would on other Windows devices. Some code samples for these APIs are available [here](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=620621).
-
-Any account interrupts that might occur, such as requesting user consent for account information, two-factor authentication, and so forth, must be handled when the app requests an authentication token.
-
-If your app requires a specific account type that hasn't been linked previously, your app can ask the system to prompt the user to add one. This request triggers the account settings pane to launch as a modal child of your app. For 2D apps, this window renders directly over the center of your app. For Unity apps, this request briefly takes the user out of your holographic app to render the child window. For information about customizing the commands and actions on this pane, see [WebAccountCommand Class](https://docs.microsoft.com/uwp/api/Windows.UI.ApplicationSettings.WebAccountCommand).
-
-## Enterprise and other authentication
-
-If your app uses other types of authentication, such as NTLM, Basic, or Kerberos, you can use [Windows Credential UI](https://docs.microsoft.com/uwp/api/Windows.Security.Credentials.UI) to collect, process, and store the user's credentials. The user experience for collecting these credentials is very similar to other cloud-driven account interrupts, and appears as a child app on top of your 2D app or briefly suspends a Unity app to show the UI.
-
-## Deprecated APIs
-
-One way in which developing for HoloLens differs from developing for Desktop is that the [OnlineIDAuthenticator](https://docs.microsoft.com/uwp/api/Windows.Security.Authentication.OnlineId.OnlineIdAuthenticator) API is not fully supported. Although the API returns a token if the primary account is in good-standing, interrupts such as those described in this article do not display any UI for the user and fail to correctly authenticate the account.
-
-## Frequently asked questions
-
-### Is Windows Hello for Business supported on HoloLens?
-
-Windows Hello for Business (which supports using a PIN to sign in) is supported for HoloLens. To allow Windows Hello for Business PIN sign-in on HoloLens:
-
-1. The HoloLens device must be [managed by MDM](hololens-enroll-mdm.md).
-1. You must enable Windows Hello for Business for the device. ([See instructions for Microsoft Intune.](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/windows-hello))
-1. On HoloLens, the user can then use **Settings** > **Sign-in Options** > **Add PIN** to set up a PIN.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Users who sign in by using a Microsoft account can also set up a PIN in **Settings** > **Sign-in Options** > **Add PIN**. This PIN is associated with [Windows Hello](https://support.microsoft.com/help/17215/windows-10-what-is-hello), rather than [Windows Hello for Business](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/security/identity-protection/hello-for-business/hello-overview).
-
-#### Does the type of account change the sign-in behavior?
-
-Yes, the behavior for the type of account affects the sign-in behavior. If you apply policies for sign-in, the policy is always respected. If no policy for sign-in is applied, these are the default behaviors for each account type:
-
-- **Microsoft account**: signs in automatically
-- **Local account**: always asks for password, not configurable in **Settings**
-- **Azure AD**: asks for password by default, and configurable by **Settings** to no longer ask for password.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Inactivity timers are currently not supported, which means that the **AllowIdleReturnWithoutPassword** policy is only respected when the device goes into StandBy.
-
-## Additional resources
-
-Read much more about user identity protection and authentication on [the Windows 10 security and identity documentation](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/security/identity-protection/).
-
-Learn more about setting up hybrid identity infrastructure thorough the [Azure Hybrid identity documentation](https://docs.microsoft.com/azure/active-directory/hybrid/).
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens-insider.md b/devices/hololens/hololens-insider.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 633f296a3e..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens-insider.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Insider preview for Microsoft HoloLens (HoloLens)
-description: It’s simple to get started with Insider builds and to provide valuable feedback for our next major operating system update for HoloLens.
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: scooley
-ms.author: scooley
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-audience: ITPro
-ms.date: 1/6/2020
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# Insider preview for Microsoft HoloLens
-
-Welcome to the latest Insider Preview builds for HoloLens! It’s simple to get started and provide valuable feedback for our next major operating system update for HoloLens.
-
-## Start receiving Insider builds
-
-On a device running the Windows 10 April 2018 Update, go to **Settings** -> **Update & Security** -> **Windows Insider Program** and select **Get started**. Link the account you used to register as a Windows Insider.
-
-Then, select **Active development of Windows**, choose whether you’d like to receive **Fast** or **Slow** builds, and review the program terms.
-
-Select **Confirm -> Restart Now** to finish up. After your device has rebooted, go to **Settings -> Update & Security -> Check for updates** to get the latest build.
-
-## Stop receiving Insider builds
-
-If you no longer want to receive Insider builds of Windows Holographic, you can opt out when your HoloLens is running a production build, or you can [recover your device](hololens-recovery.md) using the Windows Device Recovery Tool to recover your device to a non-Insider version of Windows Holographic.
-
-To verify that your HoloLens is running a production build:
-
-- Go to **Settings > System > About**, and find the build number.
-- [See the release notes for production build numbers.](hololens-release-notes.md)
-
-To opt out of Insider builds:
-
-- On a HoloLens running a production build, go to **Settings > Update & Security > Windows Insider Program**, and select **Stop Insider builds**.
-- Follow the instructions to opt out your device.
-
-## Provide feedback and report issues
-
-Please use [the Feedback Hub app](hololens-feedback.md) on your HoloLens to provide feedback and report issues. Using Feedback Hub ensures that all necessary diagnostics information is included to help our engineers quickly debug and resolve the problem. Issues with the Chinese and Japanese version of HoloLens should be reported the same way.
-
->[!NOTE]
->Be sure to accept the prompt that asks whether you’d like Feedback Hub to access your Documents folder (select **Yes** when prompted).
-
-## Note for developers
-
-You are welcome and encouraged to try developing your applications using Insider builds of HoloLens. Check out the [HoloLens Developer Documentation](https://developer.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/development) to get started. Those same instructions work with Insider builds of HoloLens. You can use the same builds of Unity and Visual Studio that you're already using for HoloLens development.
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens-kiosk.md b/devices/hololens/hololens-kiosk.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1ca366ecf5..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens-kiosk.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,218 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Set up HoloLens in kiosk mode (HoloLens)
-description: Use a kiosk configuration to lock down the apps on HoloLens.
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.date: 11/13/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
----
-
-# Set up HoloLens in kiosk mode
-
-
-
-In Windows 10, version 1803, you can configure your HoloLens devices to run as multi-app or single-app kiosks. You can also configure guest access for a HoloLens kiosk device by [designating a SpecialGroup account in your XML file.](#add-guest-access-to-the-kiosk-configuration-optional)
-
-When HoloLens is configured as a multi-app kiosk, only the allowed apps are available to the user. The benefit of a multi-app kiosk, or fixed-purpose device, is to provide an easy-to-understand experience for individuals by putting in front of them only the things they need to use, and removing from their view the things they don’t need to access.
-
-Single-app kiosk mode starts the specified app when the user signs in, and restricts the user's ability to launch new apps or change the running app. When single-app kiosk mode is enabled for HoloLens, the bloom gesture and Cortana are disabled, and placed apps aren't shown in the user's surroundings.
-
-The following table lists the device capabilities in the different kiosk modes.
-
-Kiosk mode | Voice and Bloom commands | Quick actions menu | Camera and video | Miracast
---- | --- | --- | --- | ---
-Single-app kiosk |  |  |  | 
-Multi-app kiosk |  |  with **Home** and **Volume** (default)
Photo and video buttons shown in Quick actions menu if the Camera app is enabled in the kiosk configuration.
Miracast is shown if the Camera app and device picker app are enabled in the kiosk configuration. |  if the Camera app is enabled in the kiosk configuration. |  if the Camera app and device picker app are enabled in the kiosk configuration.
-
->[!NOTE]
->Use the Application User Model ID (AUMID) to allow apps in your kiosk configuration. The Camera app AUMID is `HoloCamera_cw5n1h2txyewy!HoloCamera`. The device picker app AUMID is `HoloDevicesFlow_cw5n1h2txyewy!HoloDevicesFlow`.
-
-The [AssignedAccess Configuration Service Provider (CSP)](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/assignedaccess-csp) enables kiosk configuration.
-
->[!WARNING]
->The assigned access feature which enables kiosk mode is intended for corporate-owned fixed-purpose devices. When the multi-app assigned access configuration is applied on the device, certain policies are enforced system-wide, and will impact other users on the device. Deleting the multi-app configuration will remove the assigned access lockdown profiles associated with the users, but it cannot revert all [the enforced policies](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/configuration/lock-down-windows-10-to-specific-apps#policies-set-by-multi-app-kiosk-configuration). A factory reset is needed to clear all the policies enforced via assigned access.
->
->Be aware that voice commands are enabled for kiosk mode configured in Microsoft Intune or provisioning packages, even if the Cortana app is not selected as a kiosk app.
-
-For HoloLens devices running Windows 10, version 1803, there are three methods that you can use to configure the device as a kiosk:
-- You can use [Microsoft Intune or other mobile device management (MDM) service](#set-up-kiosk-mode-using-microsoft-intune-or-mdm-windows-10-version-1803) to configure single-app and multi-app kiosks.
-- You can [use a provisioning package](#setup-kiosk-mode-using-a-provisioning-package-windows-10-version-1803) to configure single-app and multi-app kiosks.
-- You can [use the Windows Device Portal](#set-up-kiosk-mode-using-the-windows-device-portal-windows-10-version-1607-and-version-1803) to configure single-app kiosks. This method is recommended only for demonstrations, as it requires that developer mode be enabled on the device.
-
-For HoloLens devices running Windows 10, version 1607, you can [use the Windows Device Portal](#set-up-kiosk-mode-using-the-windows-device-portal-windows-10-version-1607-and-version-1803) to configure single-app kiosks.
-
-## Start layout for HoloLens
-
-If you use [MDM, Microsoft Intune](#set-up-kiosk-mode-using-microsoft-intune-or-mdm-windows-10-version-1803), or a [provisioning package](#setup-kiosk-mode-using-a-provisioning-package-windows-10-version-1803) to configure a multi-app kiosk, the procedure requires a Start layout. Start layout customization isn't supported in Holographic for Business, so you'll need to use a placeholder Start layout.
-
->[!NOTE]
->Because a single-app kiosk launches the kiosk app when a user signs in, there is no Start screen displayed.
-
-### Start layout file for MDM (Intune and others)
-
-Save the following sample as an XML file. You can use this file when you configure the multi-app kiosk in Microsoft Intune (or in another MDM service that provides a kiosk profile).
-
->[!NOTE]
->If you need to use a custom setting and full XML configuration to set up a kiosk in your MDM service, use the [Start layout instructions for a provisioning package](#start-layout-for-a-provisioning-package).
-
-```xml
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-### Start layout for a provisioning package
-
-You will [create an XML file](#setup-kiosk-mode-using-a-provisioning-package-windows-10-version-1803) to define the kiosk configuration to be included in a provisioning package. Use the following sample in the `StartLayout` section of your XML file.
-
-```xml
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- ]]>
-
-
-```
-
-## Set up kiosk mode using Microsoft Intune or MDM (Windows 10, version 1803)
-
-For HoloLens devices that are managed by Microsoft Intune, you [create a device profile](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/device-profile-create) and configure the [Kiosk settings](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/kiosk-settings).
-
-For other MDM services, check your provider's documentation for instructions. If you need to use a custom setting and full XML configuration to set up a kiosk in your MDM service, [create an XML file that defines the kiosk configuration](#create-a-kiosk-configuration-xml-file), and make sure to include the [Start layout](#start-layout-for-a-provisioning-package) in the XML file.
-
-## Setup kiosk mode using a provisioning package (Windows 10, version 1803)
-
-Process:
-1. [Create an XML file that defines the kiosk configuration.](#create-a-kiosk-configuration-xml-file)
-2. [Add the XML file to a provisioning package.](#add-the-kiosk-configuration-xml-file-to-a-provisioning-package)
-3. [Apply the provisioning package to HoloLens.](#apply-the-provisioning-package-to-hololens)
-
-### Create a kiosk configuration XML file
-
-Follow [the instructions for creating a kiosk configuration XML file for desktop](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/configuration/lock-down-windows-10-to-specific-apps#configure-a-kiosk-using-a-provisioning-package), with the following exceptions:
-
-- Do not include Classic Windows applications (Win32) since they aren't supported on HoloLens.
-- Use the [placeholder Start XML](#start-layout-for-hololens) for HoloLens.
-
-#### Add guest access to the kiosk configuration (optional)
-
-In the [Configs section of the XML file](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/configuration/lock-down-windows-10-to-specific-apps#configs), you can configure a special group named **Visitor** to allow guests to use the kiosk. When the kiosk is configured with the **Visitor** special group, a "**Guest**" option is added to the sign-in page. The **Guest** account does not require a password, and any data associated with the account is deleted when the account signs out.
-
-Use the following snippet in your kiosk configuration XML to enable the **Guest** account:
-
-```xml
-
-
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-### Add the kiosk configuration XML file to a provisioning package
-
-1. Open [Windows Configuration Designer](https://www.microsoft.com/store/apps/9nblggh4tx22).
-2. Choose **Advanced provisioning**.
-3. Name your project, and click **Next**.
-4. Choose **Windows 10 Holographic** and click **Next**.
-5. Select **Finish**. The workspace for your package opens.
-6. Expand **Runtime settings** > **AssignedAccess** > **MultiAppAssignedAccessSettings**.
-7. In the center pane, click **Browse** to locate and select the kiosk configuration XML file that you created.
-
- 
-
-8. (**Optional**: If you want to apply the provisioning package after device initial setup and there is an admin user already available on the kiosk device, skip this step.) Create an admin user account in **Runtime settings** > **Accounts** > **Users**. Provide a **UserName** and **Password**, and select **UserGroup** as **Administrators**. With this account, you can view the provisioning status and logs if needed.
-9. (**Optional**: If you already have a non-admin account on the kiosk device, skip this step.) Create a local standard user account in **Runtime settings** > **Accounts** > **Users**. Make sure the **UserName** is the same as the account that you specify in the configuration XML. Select **UserGroup** as **Standard Users**.
-10. On the **File** menu, select **Save.**
-11. On the **Export** menu, select **Provisioning package**.
-12. Change **Owner** to **IT Admin**, which will set the precedence of this provisioning package higher than provisioning packages applied to this device from other sources, and then select **Next.**
-
-13. On the **Provisioning package security** page, do not select **Enable package encryption** or provisioning will fail on HoloLens. You can choose to enable package signing.
-
- - **Enable package signing** - If you select this option, you must select a valid certificate to use for signing the package. You can specify the certificate by clicking **Browse** and choosing the certificate you want to use to sign the package.
-
-14. Click **Next** to specify the output location where you want the provisioning package to go when it's built. By default, Windows Configuration Designer uses the project folder as the output location. Optionally, you can click **Browse** to change the default output location.
-
-15. Click **Next**.
-
-16. Click **Build** to start building the package. The provisioning package doesn't take long to build. The project information is displayed in the build page and the progress bar indicates the build status.
-
-
-### Apply the provisioning package to HoloLens
-
-1. Connect HoloLens via USB to a PC and start the device, but do not continue past the **Fit** page of OOBE (the first page with the blue box).
-
-3. HoloLens will show up as a device in File Explorer on the PC.
-
-4. In File Explorer, drag and drop the provisioning package (.ppkg) onto the device storage.
-
-5. Briefly press and release the **Volume Down** and **Power** buttons simultaneously again while on the **fit** page.
-
-6. The device will ask you if you trust the package and would like to apply it. Confirm that you trust the package.
-
-7. You will see whether the package was applied successfully or not. If it failed, you can fix your package and try again. If it succeeded, proceed with OOBE.
-
-
-## Set up kiosk mode using the Windows Device Portal (Windows 10, version 1607 and version 1803)
-
-1. [Set up the HoloLens to use the Windows Device Portal](https://developer.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/using_the_windows_device_portal#setting_up_hololens_to_use_windows_device_portal). The Device Portal is a web server on your HoloLens that you can connect to from a web browser on your PC.
-
- >[!IMPORTANT]
- >When you set up HoloLens to use the Device Portal, you must enable **Developer Mode** on the device. **Developer Mode** on a device that has been upgraded to Windows Holographic for Business enables side-loading of apps, which risks the installation of apps that have not been certified by the Microsoft Store. Administrators can block the ability to enable **Developer Mode** using the **ApplicationManagement/AllowDeveloper Unlock** setting in the [Policy CSP](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904962.aspx). [Learn more about Developer Mode.](https://msdn.microsoft.com/windows/uwp/get-started/enable-your-device-for-development#developer-mode)
-
-2. On a PC, connect to the HoloLens using [Wi-Fi](https://developer.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/Using_the_Windows_Device_Portal.html#connecting_over_wi-fi) or [USB](https://developer.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/Using_the_Windows_Device_Portal.html#connecting_over_usb).
-
-3. [Create a user name and password](https://developer.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/Using_the_Windows_Device_Portal.html#creating_a_username_and_password) if this is the first time you connect to the Windows Device Portal, or enter the user name and password that you previously set up.
-
- >[!TIP]
- >If you see a certificate error in the browser, follow [these troubleshooting steps](https://developer.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/Using_the_Windows_Device_Portal.html#security_certificate).
-
-4. In the Windows Device Portal, click **Kiosk Mode**.
-
- 
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >The kiosk mode option will be available if the device is [enrolled in device management](hololens-enroll-mdm.md) and has a [license to upgrade to Windows Holographic for Business](hololens1-upgrade-enterprise.md).
-
-5. Select **Enable Kiosk Mode**, choose an app to run when the device starts, and click **Save**.
-
-
-## Kiosk app recommendations
-
-- You cannot select Microsoft Edge, Microsoft Store, or the Shell app as a kiosk app.
-- We recommend that you do **not** select the Settings app and the File Explorer app as a kiosk app.
-- You can select Cortana as a kiosk app.
-- To enable photo or video capture, the HoloCamera app must be enabled as a kiosk app.
-
-## More information
-
-
-
-Watch how to configure a kiosk in a provisioning package.
->[!VIDEO https://www.microsoft.com/videoplayer/embed/fa125d0f-77e4-4f64-b03e-d634a4926884?autoplay=false]
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens-known-issues.md b/devices/hololens/hololens-known-issues.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 3cb3f43717..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens-known-issues.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,160 +0,0 @@
----
-title: HoloLens known issues
-description: This is the list of known issues that may affect HoloLens developers.
-keywords: troubleshoot, known issue, help
-author: mattzmsft
-ms.author: mazeller
-ms.date: 8/30/2019
-ms.topic: article
-HoloLens and holograms: Frequently asked questions
-manager: jarrettr
-ms.prod: hololens
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens 1
----
-
-# HoloLens known issues
-
-This is the current list of known issues for HoloLens that affect developers. Check here first if you are seeing an odd behavior. This list will be kept updated as new issues are discovered or reported, or as issues are addressed in future HoloLens software updates.
-
-## Unable to connect and deploy to HoloLens through Visual Studio
-
->[!NOTE]
->Last Update: 8/8 @ 5:11PM - Visual Studio has released VS 2019 Version 16.2 which includes a fix to this issue. We recommend updating to this newest version to avoid experiencing this error.
-
-Visual Studio has released VS 2019 Version 16.2 which includes a fix to this issue. We recommend updating to this newest version to avoid experiencing this error.
-
-Issue root-cause: Users who used Visual Studio 2015 or early releases of Visual Studio 2017 to deploy and debug applications on their HoloLens and then subsequently used the latest versions of Visual Studio 2017 or Visual Studio 2019 with the same HoloLens will be affected. The newer releases of Visual Studio deploy a new version of a component, but files from the older version are left over on the device, causing the newer version to fail. This causes the following error message: DEP0100: Please ensure that target device has developer mode enabled. Could not obtain a developer license on \ due to error 80004005.
-
-### Workaround
-
-Our team is currently working on a fix. In the meantime, you can use the following steps to work around the issue and help unblock deployment and debugging:
-
-1. Open Visual Studio
-1. Select **File** > **New** > **Project**.
-1. Select **Visual C#** > **Windows Desktop** > **Console App (.NET Framework)**.
-1. Give the project a name (such as "HoloLensDeploymentFix") and make sure the Framework is set to at least .NET Framework 4.5, then Select **OK**.
-1. Right-click on the **References** node in Solution Explorer and add the following references (select to the **Browse** section and select **Browse**):
-
- ``` CMD
- C:\Program Files (x86)\Windows Kits\10\bin\10.0.18362.0\x86\Microsoft.Tools.Deploy.dll
- C:\Program Files (x86)\Windows Kits\10\bin\10.0.18362.0\x86\Microsoft.Tools.Connectivity.dll
- C:\Program Files (x86)\Windows Kits\10\bin\10.0.18362.0\x86\SirepInterop.dll
- ```
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >If you don't have 10.0.18362.0 installed, use the most recent version that you have.
-
-1. Right-click on the project in Solution Explorer and select **Add** > **Existing Item**.
-1. Browse to C:\Program Files (x86)\Windows Kits\10\bin\10.0.18362.0\x86 and change the filter to **All Files (\*.\*)**.
-1. Select both SirepClient.dll and SshClient.dll, and Select **Add**.
-1. Locate and select both files in Solution Explorer (they should be at the bottom of the list of files) and change **Copy to Output Directory** in the **Properties** window to **Copy always**.
-1. At the top of the file, add the following to the existing list of `using` statements:
-
- ``` CMD
- using Microsoft.Tools.Deploy;
- using System.Net;
- ```
-
-1. Inside of `static void Main(...)`, add the following code:
-
- ``` PowerShell
- RemoteDeployClient client = RemoteDeployClient.CreateRemoteDeployClient();
- client.Connect(new ConnectionOptions()
- {
- Credentials = new NetworkCredential("DevToolsUser", string.Empty),
- IPAddress = IPAddress.Parse(args[0])
- });
- client.RemoteDevice.DeleteFile(@"C:\Data\Users\DefaultAccount\AppData\Local\DevelopmentFiles\VSRemoteTools\x86\CoreCLR\mscorlib.ni.dll");
- ```
-
-1. Select **Build** > **Build Solution**.
-1. Open a Command Prompt Window and cd to the folder that contains the compiled .exe file (for example, C:\MyProjects\HoloLensDeploymentFix\bin\Debug)
-1. Run the executable and provide the device's IP address as a command-line argument. (If connected using USB, you can use 127.0.0.1, otherwise use the device’s Wi-Fi IP address.) For example, "HoloLensDeploymentFix 127.0.0.1"
-
-1. After the tool has exited without any messages (this should only take a few seconds), you will now be able to deploy and debug from Visual Studio 2017 or newer. Continued use of the tool is not necessary.
-
-We will provide further updates as they become available.
-
-## Issues launching the Microsoft Store and apps on HoloLens
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Last Update: 4/2 @ 10 AM - Issue resolved.
-
-You may experience issues when trying to launch the Microsoft Store and apps on HoloLens. We've determined that the issue occurs when background app updates deploy a newer version of framework packages in specific sequences while one or more of their dependent apps are still running. In this case, an automatic app update delivered a new version of the .NET Native Framework (version 10.0.25531 to 10.0.27413) caused the apps that are running to not correctly update for all running apps consuming the prior version of the framework. The flow for framework update is as follows:
-
-1. The new framework package is downloaded from the store and installed
-1. All apps using the older framework are ‘updated’ to use the newer version
-
-If step 2 is interrupted before completion then any apps for which the newer framework wasn’t registered will fail to launch from the start menu. We believe any app on HoloLens could be affected by this issue.
-
-Some users have reported that closing hung apps and launching other apps such as Feedback Hub, 3D Viewer or Photos resolves the issue for them—however, this does not work 100% of the time.
-
-We have root caused that this issue was not caused the update itself, but a bug in the OS that resulted in the .NET Native framework update being handled incorrectly. We are pleased to announce that we have identified a fix and have released an update (OS version 17763.380) containing the fix.
-
-To see if your device can take the update, please:
-
-1. Go to the Settings app and open **Update & Security**.
-1. Select **Check for Updates**.
-1. If update to 17763.380 is available, please update to this build to receive the fix for the App Hang bug
-1. Upon updating to this version of the OS, the Apps should work as expected.
-
-Additionally, as we do with every HoloLens OS release, we have posted the FFU image to the [Microsoft Download Center](https://aka.ms/hololensdownload/10.0.17763.380).
-
-If you would not like to take the update, we have released a new version of the Microsoft Store UWP app as of 3/29. After you have the updated version of the Store:
-
-1. Open the Store and confirm that it loads.
-1. Use the bloom gesture to open the menu.
-1. Attempt to open previously broken apps.
-1. If it still cannot be launched, tap and hold the icon of the broken app and select uninstall.
-1. Resinstall these apps from the store.
-
-If your device is still unable to load apps, you can sideload a version of the .NET Native Framework and Runtime through the download center by following these steps:
-
-1. Please download [this zip file](https://download.microsoft.com/download/8/5/C/85C23745-794C-419D-B8D7-115FBCCD6DA7/netfx_1.7.zip) from the Microsoft Download Center. Unzipping will produce two files. Microsoft.NET.Native.Runtime.1.7.appx and Microsoft.NET.Native.Framework.1.7.appx
-1. Please verify that your device is dev unlocked. If you haven’t done that before the instructions to do that are [here](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/using-the-windows-device-portal).
-1. You then want to get into the Windows Device Portal. Our recommendation is to do this over USB and you would do that by typing http://127.0.0.1:10080 into your browser.
-1. After you have the Windows Device Portal up we need you to “side load” the two files that you downloaded. To do that you need to go down the left side bar until you get to the **Apps** section and select **Apps**.
-1. You will then see a screen that is similar to the below. You want to go to the section that says **Install App** and browse to where you unzipped those two APPX files. You can only do one at a time, so after you select the first one, then click on “Go” under the Deploy section. Then do this for the second APPX file.
-
- 
-1. At this point we believe your applications should start working again and that you can also get to the Store.
-1. In some cases, it is necessary run the additional step of launching the 3D Viewer app before affected apps will launch.
-
-We appreciate your patience as we have gone through the process to get this issue resolved, and we look forward to continued working with our community to create successful Mixed Reality experiences.
-
-## Device Update
-
-- 30 seconds after a new update, the shell may disappear one time. Please perform the **bloom** gesture to resume your session.
-
-## Visual Studio
-
-- See [Install the tools](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/install-the-tools) for the most up-to-date version of Visual Studio that is recommended for HoloLens development.
-- When deploying an app from Visual Studio to your HoloLens, you may see the error: **The requested operation cannot be performed on a file with a user-mapped section open. (Exception from HRESULT: 0x800704C8)**. If this happens, try again and your deployment will generally succeed.
-
-## Emulator
-
-- Not all apps in the Microsoft Store are compatible with the emulator. For example, Young Conker and Fragments are not playable on the emulator.
-- You cannot use the PC webcam in the Emulator.
-- The Live Preview feature of the Windows Device Portal does not work with the emulator. You can still capture Mixed Reality videos and images.
-
-## Unity
-
-- See [Install the tools](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/install-the-tools) for the most up-to-date version of Unity recommended for HoloLens development.
-- Known issues with the Unity HoloLens Technical Preview are documented in the [HoloLens Unity forums](https://forum.unity3d.com/threads/known-issues.394627/).
-
-## Windows Device Portal
-
-- The Live Preview feature in Mixed Reality capture may exhibit several seconds of latency.
-- On the Virtual Input page, the Gesture and Scroll controls under the Virtual Gestures section are not functional. Using them will have no effect. The virtual keyboard on the same page works correctly.
-- After enabling Developer Mode in Settings, it may take a few seconds before the switch to turn on the Device Portal is enabled.
-
-## API
-
-- If the application sets the [focus point](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/focus-point-in-unity) behind the user or the normal to camera.forward, holograms will not appear in Mixed Reality Capture photos or videos. Until this bug is fixed in Windows, if applications actively set the [focus point](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/focus-point-in-unity) they should ensure the plane normal is set opposite camera-forward (for example, normal = -camera.forward).
-
-## Xbox Wireless Controller
-
-- Xbox Wireless Controller S must be updated before it can be used with HoloLens. Ensure you are [up to date](https://support.xbox.com/xbox-one/accessories/update-controller-for-stereo-headset-adapter) before attempting to pair your controller with a HoloLens.
-- If you reboot your HoloLens while the Xbox Wireless Controller is connected, the controller will not automatically reconnect to HoloLens. The Guide button light will flash slowly until the controller powers off after 3 minutes. To reconnect your controller immediately, power off the controller by holding the Guide button until the light turns off. When you power your controller on again, it will reconnect to HoloLens.
-- If your HoloLens enters standby while the Xbox Wireless Controller is connected, any input on the controller will wake the HoloLens. You can prevent this by powering off your controller when you are done using it.
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens-multiple-users.md b/devices/hololens/hololens-multiple-users.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4bd8b317ef..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens-multiple-users.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Share your HoloLens with multiple people
-description: You can configure HoloLens to be shared by multiple Azure Active Directory accounts, or by multiple users that use a single account.
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: scooley
-ms.author: scooley
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.date: 09/16/2019
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# Share your HoloLens with multiple people
-
-It's common to share one HoloLens with many people or to have many people share a set of HoloLens devices. This article describes the different ways in which you can share a device.
-
-## Share with multiple people, each using their own account
-
-**Prerequisite**: The HoloLens device must be running Windows 10, version 1803 or later. HoloLens (1st gen) also need to be [upgraded to Windows Holographic for Business](hololens-upgrade-enterprise.md).
-
-When they use their own Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) accounts, multiple users can each keep their own user settings and user data on the device.
-
-To make sure that multiple people can use their own accounts on your HoloLens, follow these steps to configure it:
-
-1. Make sure the the device is running Windows 10, version 1803 or later.
- > [!IMPORTANT]
- > If you are using a HoloLens (1st gen) device, [upgrade the device to Windows Holographic for Business](hololens1-upgrade-enterprise.md).
-1. When you set up the device, select **My work or school owns it** and sign in by using an Azure AD account.
-1. After you finish setup, make sure that the account settings (**Settings** > **Accounts**) includes **Other users**.
-
-To use HoloLens, each user follows these steps:
-
-1. If another user has been using the device, do one of the following:
- - Press the power button once to go to standby, and then press the power button again to return to the lock screen
- - HoloLens 2 users may select the user tile on the top of the Pins panel to sign out the current user.
-
-1. Use your Azure AD account credentials to sign in to the device.
- If this is the first time that you have used the device, you have to [calibrate](hololens-calibration.md) HoloLens to your own eyes.
-
-To see a list of the device users or to remove a user from the device, go to **Settings** > **Accounts** > **Other users**.
-
-## Share with multiple people, all using the same account
-
-Multiple users can also share a HoloLens device while using a single user account.
-
-**On HoloLens 2**, when a new user puts the device on their head for the first time (while keeping the same account signed in), the device prompts the new user to quickly calibrate and personalize the viewing experience. The device can store the calibration information so that in the future, the device can automatically optimize the quality and comfort of each user's viewing experience. The users do not need to calibrate the device again.
-
-**On HoloLens (1st gen)** users sharing an account will need to ask to recalibrate in the Settings app. Read more about [calibration](hololens-calibration.md).
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens-network.md b/devices/hololens/hololens-network.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 19c9669559..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens-network.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,93 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Connect to a network
-description: Instructions on how to connect to internet with HoloLens and how to identify the device's IP address.
-ms.assetid: 0895606e-96c0-491e-8b1c-52e56b00365d
-author: mattzmsft
-ms.author: mazeller
-keywords: HoloLens, wifi, wireless, internet, ip, ip address
-ms.date: 08/30/19
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.localizationpriority: high
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: jarrettr
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# Connect to a network
-
-To do most things on your HoloLens, you have to be connected to a network. This guide will help you:
-
-- Connect to a network using Wi-Fi or (for HoloLens 2 only) Ethernet over USB-C
-- Disable and re-enable Wi-Fi
-
-Read more about [using HoloLens offline](hololens-offline.md).
-
-## Connecting for the first time
-
-The first time you use your HoloLens, you'll be guided through connecting to a Wi-Fi network. If you have trouble connecting to Wi-Fi during setup, make sure that your network is either an open, password-protected network or a captive portal network. Make sure that the network doesn't require you to use a certificate to connect. After setup, you can connect to other types of Wi-Fi networks.
-
-## Connecting to Wi-Fi after setup
-
-1. Select **Start** > **Settings**.
- - *HoloLens (1st gen) only*: Use your gaze to position the Settings app, then air tap to place it, or say "Place."
-1. Select **Network & Internet** > **Wi-Fi**. If you don't see your network, scroll down the list.
-1. Select a network, then select **Connect**.
-1. If you are prompted for a network password type it and then select **Next**.
-
-## Connecting to Wi-Fi on HoloLens (1st gen)
-
-HoloLens contains a 802.11ac-capable, 2x2 Wi-Fi radio. Connecting HoloLens to a Wi-Fi network is similar to connecting a Windows 10 Desktop or Mobile device to a Wi-Fi network.
-
-
-
-1. Open the **Start** menu.
-1. Select the Settings app from **Start** or from the **All Apps** list on the right of the **Start** menu. The Settings app will be auto-placed in front of you.
-1. Select **Network & Internet**.
-1. Make sure Wi-Fi is turned on.
-1. Select a Wi-Fi network from the list.
-1. If needed, type in the Wi-Fi network password.
-
-You can also confirm you are connected to a Wi-Fi network by checking the Wi-Fi status in the **Start** menu:
-
-1. Open the **Start** menu.
-1. Look at the top left of the **Start** menu for Wi-Fi status. The state of Wi-Fi and the SSID of the connected network will be shown.
-
-## Disabling Wi-Fi on HoloLens (1st gen)
-
-### Using the Settings app on HoloLens
-
-1. Open the **Start** menu.
-1. Select the **Settings** app from **Start** or from the **All Apps** list on the right of the **Start** menu. The **Settings** app will be auto-placed in front of you.
-1. Select **Network & Internet**.
-1. Select the Wi-Fi slider switch to move it to the **Off** position. This will turn off the RF components of the Wi-Fi radio and disable all Wi-Fi functionality on HoloLens.
-
- > [!WARNING]
- > When the Wi-Fi radio is disabled, HoloLens will not be able to automatically load your [spaces](hololens-spaces.md).
-
-1. Move the slider switch to the **On** position to turn on the Wi-Fi radio and restore Wi-Fi functionality on Microsoft HoloLens. The selected Wi-Fi radio state (**On** or **Off**) will persist across reboots.
-
-## Identifying the IP Address of your HoloLens on the Wi-Fi network
-
-### By using the Settings app
-
-1. Open the **Start** menu.
-1. Select the **Settings** app from **Start** or from the **All Apps** list on the right of the **Start** menu. The **Settings** app will be auto-placed in front of you.
-1. Select **Network & Internet**.
-1. Scroll down to beneath the list of available Wi-Fi networks and select **Hardware properties**.
-
- 
-
- The IP address appears next to **IPv4 address**.
-
-### By using Cortana
-
-Say "Hey Cortana, What's my IP address?" and Cortana will display and read out your IP address.
-
-### By using Windows Device Portal
-
-1. In a web browser on your PC, open the [device portal](/windows/mixed-reality/using-the-windows-device-portal.md#networking).
-1. Navigate to the **Networking** section.
- This section displays your IP address and other network information. By using this method, you can copy and paste of the IP address on your development PC.
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens-offline.md b/devices/hololens/hololens-offline.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6ee4fb35c1..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens-offline.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Use HoloLens offline
-description: To set up HoloLens, you'll need to connect to a Wi-Fi network
-keywords: hololens, offline, OOBE
-audience: ITPro
-ms.date: 07/01/2019
-ms.assetid: b86f603c-d25f-409b-b055-4bbc6edcd301
-author: v-miegge
-ms.author: v-miegge
-manager: v-miegge
-ms.topic: article
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.localizationpriority: high
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# Use HoloLens offline
-
-HoloLens support a limited set of offline experiences for connectivity conscious customers and for customers who have environmental limits on connectivity.
-
-## Near-offline setup
-
-HoloLens need a network connection to go through initial device set up. If your corporate network has network restrictions, the following URLs will need to be available:
-
-| Purpose | URL |
-|------|------|
-| IDPS | https://sdx.microsoft.com/frx/idps |
-| [NCSI](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/privacy/manage-connections-from-windows-operating-system-components-to-microsoft-services#bkmk-ncsi) | http://www.msftconnecttest.com/connecttest.txt |
-| AADv9 | https://login.microsoftonline.com/WebApp/CloudDomainJoin/9 |
-| AADv10 | https://login.microsoftonline.com/WebApp/CloudDomainJoin/10 |
-| AAD Pin | https://account.live.com/aadngc?uiflavor=win10&showSuccess=1 |
-| MSA | https://login.live.com/ppsecure/inlineconnect.srf?id=80600 |
-| MSA Pin | https://account.live.com/msangc?fl=enroll |
-
-Additional references:
-
-- [Technical reference for AAD related IP ranges and URLs](https://docs.microsoft.com/office365/enterprise/urls-and-ip-address-ranges)
-
-## HoloLens limitations
-
-After your HoloLens is set up, you can use it without a Wi-Fi connection, but apps that use Internet connections will have limited capabilities when you use HoloLens offline.
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens-provisioning.md b/devices/hololens/hololens-provisioning.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b22a4ef671..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens-provisioning.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,200 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Configure HoloLens using a provisioning package (HoloLens)
-description: Windows provisioning makes it easy for IT administrators to configure end-user devices without imaging.
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.date: 11/13/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
----
-
-# Configure HoloLens using a provisioning package
-
-
-
-[Windows provisioning](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/configuration/provisioning-packages/provisioning-packages) makes it easy for IT administrators to configure end-user devices without imaging. Windows Configuration Designer is a tool for configuring images and runtime settings which are then built into provisioning packages.
-
-Some of the HoloLens configurations that you can apply in a provisioning package:
-- Upgrade to Windows Holographic for Business
-- Set up a local account
-- Set up a Wi-Fi connection
-- Apply certificates to the device
-
-To create provisioning packages, you must install Windows Configuration Designer [from Microsoft Store](https://www.microsoft.com/store/apps/9nblggh4tx22) or [from the Windows Assessment and Deployment Kit (ADK) for Windows 10](https://developer.microsoft.com/windows/hardware/windows-assessment-deployment-kit). If you install Windows Configurations Designer from the Windows ADK, select **Configuration Designer** from the **Select the features you want to install** dialog box.
-
-
-
-
-## Create a provisioning package for HoloLens using the HoloLens wizard
-
-The HoloLens wizard helps you configure the following settings in a provisioning package:
-
-- Upgrade to the enterprise edition
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >Settings in a provisioning package will only be applied if the provisioning package includes an edition upgrade license to Windows Holographic for Business or if [the device has already been upgraded to Windows Holographic for Business](hololens1-upgrade-enterprise.md).
-
-- Configure the HoloLens first experience (OOBE)
-- Configure Wi-Fi network
-- Enroll device in Azure Active Directory or create a local account
-- Add certificates
-- Enable Developer Mode
-
->[!WARNING]
->You must run Windows Configuration Designer on Windows 10 to configure Azure Active Directory enrollment using any of the wizards.
-
-Provisioning packages can include management instructions and policies, customization of network connections and policies, and more.
-
-> [!TIP]
-> Use the desktop wizard to create a package with the common settings, then switch to the advanced editor to add other settings, apps, policies, etc.
-
-
-### Create the provisioning package
-
-Use the Windows Configuration Designer tool to create a provisioning package.
-
-1. Open Windows Configuration Designer (by default, %windir%\Program Files (x86)\Windows Kits\10\Assessment and Deployment Kit\Imaging and Configuration Designer\x86\ICD.exe).
-
-2. Click **Provision HoloLens devices**.
-
- 
-
-3. Name your project and click **Finish**.
-
-4. Read the instructions on the **Getting started** page and select **Next**. The pages for desktop provisioning will walk you through the following steps.
-
-> [!IMPORTANT]
-> When you build a provisioning package, you may include sensitive information in the project files and in the provisioning package (.ppkg) file. Although you have the option to encrypt the .ppkg file, project files are not encrypted. You should store the project files in a secure location and delete the project files when they are no longer needed.
-
-### Configure settings
-
-
-
-
Browse to and select the enterprise license file to upgrade the HoloLens edition.You can also toggle Yes or No to hide parts of the first experience.To set up the device without the need to connect to a Wi-Fi network, toggle Skip Wi-Fi setup to On.Select a region and timezone in which the device will be used.
-
In this section, you can enter the details of the Wi-Fi wireless network that the device should connect to automatically. To do this, select On, enter the SSID, the network type (Open or WPA2-Personal), and (if WPA2-Personal) the password for the wireless network.
-
You can enroll the device in Azure Active Directory, or create a local account on the deviceBefore you use a Windows Configuration Designer wizard to configure bulk Azure AD enrollment, set up Azure AD join in your organization. The maximum number of devices per user setting in your Azure AD tenant determines how many times the bulk token that you get in the wizard can be used. To enroll the device in Azure AD, select that option and enter a friendly name for the bulk token you will get using the wizard. Set an expiration date for the token (maximum is 30 days from the date you get the token). Click Get bulk token. In the Let's get you signed in window, enter an account that has permissions to join a device to Azure AD, and then the password. Click Accept to give Windows Configuration Designer the necessary permissions. To create a local account, select that option and enter a user name and password. Important: (For Windows 10, version 1607 only) If you create a local account in the provisioning package, you must change the password using the Settings app every 42 days. If the password is not changed during that period, the account might be locked out and unable to sign in.
-
To provision the device with a certificate, click Add a certificate. Enter a name for the certificate, and then browse to and select the certificate to be used.
Do not set a password to protect your provisioning package. If the provisioning package is protected by a password, provisioning the HoloLens device will fail.
-
-
-After you're done, click **Create**. It only takes a few seconds. When the package is built, the location where the package is stored is displayed as a hyperlink at the bottom of the page.
-
- **Next step**: [How to apply a provisioning package](#apply)
-
-
-## Create a provisioning package for HoloLens using advanced provisioning
-
->[!NOTE]
->Settings in a provisioning package will only be applied if the provisioning package includes an edition upgrade license to Windows Holographic for Business or if [the device has already been upgraded to Windows Holographic for Business](hololens1-upgrade-enterprise.md).
-
-1. On the Windows Configuration Designer start page, select **Advanced provisioning**.
-2. In the **Enter project details** window, specify a name for your project and the location for your project. Optionally, enter a brief description to describe your project.
-
-3. Click **Next**.
-
-4. In the **Choose which settings to view and configure** window, select **Windows 10 Holographic**, and then click **Next**.
-
-6. Click **Finish**.
-
-7. Expand **Runtime settings** and customize the package with any of the settings [described below](#what-you-can-configure).
-
- >[!IMPORTANT]
- >(For Windows 10, version 1607 only) If you create a local account in the provisioning package, you must change the password using the **Settings** app every 42 days. If the password is not changed during that period, the account might be locked out and unable to sign in. If the user account is locked out, you must [perform a full device recovery](https://developer.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/reset_or_recover_your_hololens#perform_a_full_device_recovery).
-
-8. On the **File** menu, click **Save**.
-
-4. Read the warning that project files may contain sensitive information, and click **OK**.
-
- >[!IMPORTANT]
- >When you build a provisioning package, you may include sensitive information in the project files and in the provisioning package (.ppkg) file. Although you have the option to encrypt the .ppkg file, project files are not encrypted. You should store the project files in a secure location and delete the project files when they are no longer needed.
-
-3. On the **Export** menu, click **Provisioning package**.
-
-4. Change **Owner** to **IT Admin**, which will set the precedence of this provisioning package higher than provisioning packages applied to this device from other sources, and then select **Next**.
-
-5. Set a value for **Package Version**.
-
- >[!TIP]
- >You can make changes to existing packages and change the version number to update previously applied packages.
-
-6. On the **Select security details for the provisioning package**, click **Next**.
-
- >[!WARNING]
- >If you encrypt the provisioning package, provisioning the HoloLens device will fail.
-
-7. Click **Next** to specify the output location where you want the provisioning package to go once it's built. By default, Windows Configuration Designer uses the project folder as the output location.
-
- Optionally, you can click **Browse** to change the default output location.
-
-8. Click **Next**.
-
-9. Click **Build** to start building the package. The project information is displayed in the build page and the progress bar indicates the build status.
-
-10. When the build completes, click **Finish**.
-
-
-## Apply a provisioning package to HoloLens during setup
-
-1. Connect the device via USB to a PC and start the device, but do not continue past the **Fit** page of OOBE (the first page with the blue box).
-
-2. Briefly press and release the **Volume Down** and **Power** buttons simultaneously. (This step isn't needed in Windows 10, version 1803.)
-
-3. HoloLens will show up as a device in File Explorer on the PC.
-
-4. In File Explorer, drag and drop the provisioning package (.ppkg) onto the device storage.
-
-5. Briefly press and release the **Volume Down** and **Power** buttons simultaneously again while on the **fit** page.
-
-6. The device will ask you if you trust the package and would like to apply it. Confirm that you trust the package.
-
-7. You will see whether the package was applied successfully or not. If it failed, you can fix your package and try again. If it succeeded, proceed with OOBE.
-
->[!NOTE]
->If the device was purchased before August 2016, you will need to sign into the device with a Microsoft account, get the latest OS update, and then reset the OS in order to apply the provisioning package.
-
-## Apply a provisioning package to HoloLens after setup
-
->[!NOTE]
->Windows 10, version 1809 only
-
-On your PC:
-1. Create a provisioning package as described at [Create a provisioning package for HoloLens using the HoloLens wizard](hololens-provisioning.md).
-2. Connect the HoloLens device via USB to a PC. HoloLens will show up as a device in File Explorer on the PC.
-3. Drag and drop the provisioning package to the Documents folder on the HoloLens.
-
-On your HoloLens:
-1. Go to **Settings > Accounts > Access work or school**.
-2. In **Related Settings**, select **Add or remove a provisioning package**.
-3. On the next page, select **Add a package** to launch the file picker and select your provisioning package. If the folder is empty, make sure you select **This Device** and select **Documents**.
-
-After your package has been applied, it will show in the list of **Installed packages**. To view package details or to remove the package from the device, select the listed package.
-
-## What you can configure
-
-Provisioning packages make use of configuration service providers (CSPs). If you're not familiar with CSPs, see [Introduction to configuration service providers (CSPs) for IT pros](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/manage/how-it-pros-can-use-configuration-service-providers).
-
-In Windows Configuration Designer, when you create a provisioning package for Windows Holographic, the settings in **Available customizations** are based on [CSPs that are supported in Windows Holographic](https://msdn.microsoft.com/windows/hardware/commercialize/customize/mdm/configuration-service-provider-reference#hololens). The following table describes settings that you might want to configure for HoloLens.
-
-
-
-| Setting | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-| **Certificates** | Deploy a certificate to HoloLens. |
-| **ConnectivityProfiles** | Deploy a Wi-Fi profile to HoloLens. |
-| **EditionUpgrade** | [Upgrade to Windows Holographic for Business.](hololens1-upgrade-enterprise.md) |
-| **Policies** | Allow or prevent developer mode on HoloLens. [Policies supported by Windows Holographic for Business](https://msdn.microsoft.com/windows/hardware/commercialize/customize/mdm/policy-configuration-service-provider#hololenspolicies) |
-
->[!NOTE]
->App installation (**UniversalAppInstall**) using a provisioning package is not currently supported for HoloLens.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens-recovery.md b/devices/hololens/hololens-recovery.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b2e0d48bc7..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens-recovery.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,131 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Reset or recover your HoloLens
-ms.reviewer: Both basic and advanced instructions for rebooting or resetting your HoloLens.
-description: How to use Advanced Recovery Companion to flash an image to HoloLens 2.
-keywords: how-to, reboot, reset, recover, hard reset, soft reset, power cycle, HoloLens, shut down, arc, advanced recovery companion
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: mattzmsft
-ms.author: mazeller
-ms.date: 08/30/2019
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: high
-manager: jarrettr
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# Restart, reset, or recover HoloLens
-
-If you’re experiencing problems with your HoloLens you may want to try a restart, reset, or even re-flash with device recovery.
-
-Here are some things to try if your HoloLens isn’t running well. This article will guide you through the recommended recovery steps in succession.
-
-This article focuses on the HoloLens device and software, if your holograms don't look right, [this article](hololens-environment-considerations.md) talks about environmental factors that improve hologram quality.
-
-## Restart your HoloLens
-
-First, try restarting the device.
-
-### Perform a safe restart by using Cortana
-
-The safest way to restart the HoloLens is by using Cortana. This is generally a great first-step when experiencing an issue with HoloLens:
-
-1. Put on your device
-1. Make sure it’s powered on, a user is logged in, and the device is not waiting for a password to unlock it.
-1. Say “Hey Cortana, reboot” or "Hey Cortana, restart."
-1. When she acknowledges she will ask you for confirmation. Wait a second for a sound to play after she has finished her question, indicating she is listening to you and then say “Yes.”
-1. The device will now restart.
-
-### Perform a safe restart by using the power button
-
-If you still can't restart your device, you can try to restart it by using the power button:
-
-1. Press and hold the power button for five seconds.
- 1. After one second, you will see all five LEDs illuminate, then slowly turn off from right to left.
- 1. After five seconds, all LEDs will be off, indicating the shutdown command was issued successfully.
- 1. Note that it’s important to stop pressing the button immediately after all the LEDs have turned off.
-1. Wait one minute for the shutdown to cleanly succeed. Note that the shutdown may still be in progress even if the displays are turned off.
-1. Power on the device again by pressing and holding the power button for one second.
-
-### Perform a safe restart by using Windows Device Portal
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> To do this, HoloLens has to be configured as a developer device.
-> Read more about [Windows Device Portal](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/using-the-windows-device-portal).
-
-If the previous procedure doesn't work, you can try to restart the device by using [Windows Device Portal](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/using-the-windows-device-portal). In the upper right corner, there is an option to restart or shut down the device.
-
-### Perform an unsafe forced restart
-
-If none of the previous methods are able to successfully restart your device, you can force a restart. This method is equivalent to pulling the battery from the HoloLens. It is a dangerous operation which may leave your device in a corrupt state. If that happens, you'll have to flash your HoloLens.
-
-> [!WARNING]
-> This is a potentially harmful method and should only be used in the event none of the above methods work.
-
-1. Press and hold the power button for at least 10 seconds.
-
- - It’s okay to hold the button for longer than 10 seconds.
- - It’s safe to ignore any LED activity.
-1. Release the button and wait for two or three seconds.
-1. Power on the device again by pressing and holding the power button for one second.
-If you’re still having problems, press the power button for 4 seconds, until all of the battery indicators fade out and the screen stops displaying holograms. Wait 1 minute, then press the power button again to turn on the device.
-
-## Reset to factory settings
-
->[!NOTE]
->The battery needs at least 40 percent charge to reset.
-
-If your HoloLens is still experiencing issues after restarting, try resetting it to factory state. Resetting your HoloLens keeps the version of the Windows Holographic software that’s installed on it and returns everything else to factory settings.
-
-If you reset your device, all your personal data, apps, and settings will be erased. Resetting will only install the latest installed version of Windows Holographic and you will have to redo all the initialization steps (calibrate, connect to Wi-Fi, create a user account, download apps, and so forth).
-
-1. Launch the Settings app, and then select **Update** > **Reset**.
-1. Select the **Reset device** option and read the confirmation message.
-1. If you agree to reset your device, the device will restart and display a set of spinning gears with a progress bar.
-1. Wait about 30 minutes for this process to complete.
-1. The reset will complete and the device will restart into the out-of-the-box experience.
-
-## Re-install the operating system
-
-If the device is still having a problem after rebooting and resetting, you can use a recovery tool on your computer to reinstall the HoloLens' operating system and firmware.
-
-HoloLens (1st gen) and HoloLens 2 use different tools but both tools will auto-detect your HoloLens and install new software.
-
-All of the data HoloLens needs to reset is packaged in a Full Flash Update (ffu). This is similar to an iso, wim, or vhd. [Learn about FFU image file formats.](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows-hardware/manufacture/desktop/wim-vs-ffu-image-file-formats)
-
-### HoloLens 2
-
-The Advanced Recovery Companion is a new app in Microsoft Store restore the operating system image to your HoloLens 2 device.
-
-1. On your computer, get [Advanced Recovery Companion](https://www.microsoft.com/p/advanced-recovery-companion/9p74z35sfrs8?activetab=pivot:overviewtab) from Microsoft Store.
-2. Connect HoloLens 2 to your computer.
-3. Start Advanced Recovery Companion.
-4. On the **Welcome** page, select your device.
-5. On the **Device info** page, select **Install software** to install the default package. (If you have a Full Flash Update (FFU) image that you want to install instead, select **Manual package selection**.)
-6. Software installation will begin. Do not use the device or disconnect the cable during installation. When you see the **Installation finished** page, you can disconnect and use your device.
-
->[!TIP]
->In the event that a HoloLens 2 gets into a state where Advanced Recovery Companion cannot recognize the device, and it does not boot, try forcing the device into Flashing Mode and recovering it with Advanced Recovery Companion:
-
-1. Connect the HoloLens 2 to a PC with Advanced Recovery Companion installed.
-1. Press and hold the **Volume Up and Power buttons** until the device reboots. Release the Power button, but continue to hold the Volume Up button until the third LED is lit. It will the the only lit LED.
- 1. The device should be visible in **Device Manager** as a **Microsoft HoloLens Recovery** device:
-1. Launch Advanced Recovery Companion, and follow the on-screen prompts to reflash the OS to the HoloLens 2.
-
-### HoloLens (1st gen)
-
-If necessary, you can install a completely new operating system on your HoloLens (1st gen) with the Windows Device Recovery Tool.
-
-Before you use this tool, determine if restarting or resetting your HoloLens fixes the problem. The recovery process may take some time. When you're done, the latest version of the Windows Holographic software approved for your HoloLens will be installed.
-
-To use the tool, you’ll need a computer running Windows 10 or later, with at least 4 GB of free storage space. Please note that you can’t run this tool on a virtual machine.
-
-To recover your HoloLens
-
-1. Download and install the [Windows Device Recovery Tool](https://support.microsoft.com/help/12379/windows-10-mobile-device-recovery-tool-faq) on your computer.
-1. Connect the HoloLens (1st gen) to your computer using the Micro USB cable that came with your HoloLens.
-1. Run the Windows Device Recovery Tool and follow the instructions.
-
-If the HoloLens (1st gen) isn’t automatically detected, select **My device was not detected** and follow the instructions to put your device into recovery mode.
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens-release-notes.md b/devices/hololens/hololens-release-notes.md
deleted file mode 100644
index aaf200a4b0..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens-release-notes.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,108 +0,0 @@
----
-title: What's new in Microsoft HoloLens
-description: Learn about updates in each new HoloLens release.
-author: scooley
-ms.author: scooley
-manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.date: 12/02/2019
-audience: ITPro
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens 1
-- HoloLens 2
-
----
-
-# HoloLens Release Notes
-
-## HoloLens 2
-> [!Note]
-> HoloLens Emulator Release Notes can be found [here](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/hololens-emulator-archive).
-
-### January Update - build 18362.1043
-
-- Stability improvements for exclusive apps when working with the HoloLens 2 emulator.
-
-### December Update - build 18362.1042
-
-- Introduces LSR (Last Stage Reproduction) fixes. Improves visual rendering of holograms to appear more stable and crisp by more accurately accounting for their depth. This will be more noticeable if apps do not set the depth of holograms correctly, after this update.
-- Fixes stability of exclusive apps and navigation between exclusive apps.
-- Resolves an issue where Mixed Reality Capture couldn't record video after device is left in standby state for multiple days.
-- Improves hologram stability.
-
-### November Update - build 18362.1039
-
-- Fixes for **"Select"** voice commands during initial set-up for en-CA and en-AU.
-- Improvements in visual quality of objects placed far away in latest Unity and MRTK versions.
-- Fixes addressing issues with holographic applications being stuck in a paused state on launch until the pins panel is brought up and dismissed again.
-- OpenXR runtime conformance fixes and improvements for HoloLens 2 and the emulator.
-
-## HoloLens (1st gen)
-
-### Windows 10 Holographic, version 1809
-
-> **Applies to:** Hololens (1st gen)
-
-| Feature | Details |
-|---|---|
-| **Quick actions menu** | When you're in an app, the Bloom gesture will now open a Quick actions menu to give you quick access to commonly used system features without having to leave the app. See [Set up HoloLens in kiosk mode](hololens-kiosk.md) for information about the Quick actions menu in kiosk mode.
 |
-| **Stop video capture from the Start or quick actions menu** | If you start video capture from the Start menu or quick actions menu, you’ll be able to stop recording from the same place. (Don’t forget, you can always do this with voice commands too.) |
-| **Project to a Miracast-enabled device** | Project your HoloLens content to a nearby Surface device or TV/Monitor if using Microsoft Display adapter. On **Start**, select **Connect**, and then select the device you want to project to. **Note:** You can deploy HoloLens to use Miracast projection without enabling developer mode. |
-| **New notifications** | View and respond to notification toasts on HoloLens, just like you do on a PC. Gaze to respond to or dismiss them (or if you’re in an immersive experience, use the bloom gesture). |
-| **HoloLens overlays** (file picker, keyboard, dialogs, etc.) | You’ll now see overlays such as the keyboard, dialogs, file picker, etc. when using immersive apps. |
-| **Visual feedback overlay UI for volume change** | When you use the volume up/down buttons on your HoloLens you’ll see a visual display of the volume level. |
-| **New UI for device boot** | A loading indicator was added during the boot process to provide visual feedback that the system is loading. Reboot your device to see the new loading indicator—it’s between the "Hello" message and the Windows boot logo. |
-| **Nearby sharing** | Addition of the Windows Nearby Sharing experience, allowing you to share a capture with a nearby Windows device. When you capture a photo or video on HoloLens (or use the share button from an app such as Microsoft Edge), select a nearby Windows device to share with. |
-| **Share from Microsoft Edge** | Share button is now available on Microsoft Edge windows on HoloLens. In Microsoft Edge, select **Share**. Use the HoloLens share picker to share web content. |
-
-#### For international customers
-
-| Feature | Details |
-| --- | --- |
-| Localized Chinese and Japanese builds | Use HoloLens with localized user interface for Simplified Chinese or Japanese, including localized Pinyin keyboard, dictation, and voice commands. [Learn how to install the Chinese and Japanese versions of HoloLens.](hololens1-install-localized.md) |
-| Speech Synthesis (TTS) | Speech synthesis feature now supports Chinese, Japanese, and English. |
-
-#### For administrators
-
-| Feature | Details |
-|---|----|
-| [Enable post-setup provisioning](hololens-provisioning.md) | You can now apply a runtime provisioning package at any time using **Settings**. |
-| Assigned access with Azure AD groups | You can now use Azure AD groups for configuration of Windows assigned access to set up single or multi-app kiosk configuration. |
-| PIN sign-in on profile switch from sign-in screen | PIN sign-in is now available for **Other User**. |
-| Sign in with Web Credential Provider using password | You can now select the Globe sign-in option to launch web sign-in with your password. From the sign-in screen, select **Sign-In options** and select the Globe option to launch web sign-in. Enter your user name if needed, then your password. **Note:** You can choose to bypass any PIN/Smartcard options when prompted during web sign-in. |
-| Read device hardware info through MDM so devices can be tracked by serial number | IT administrators can see and track HoloLens by device serial number in their MDM console. Refer to your MDM documentation for feature availability and instructions. |
-| Set HoloLens device name through MDM (rename) | IT administrators can see and rename HoloLens devices in their MDM console. Refer to your MDM documentation for feature availability and instructions. |
-
-### Windows 10, version 1803 for Microsoft HoloLens
-
-> **Applies to:** Hololens (1st gen)
-
-Windows 10, version 1803, is the first feature update to Windows Holographic for Business since its release in Windows 10, version 1607. This update introduces the following changes:
-
-- Previously, you could only verify that upgrade license for Commercial Suite had been applied to your HoloLens device by checking to see if VPN was an available option on the device. Now, **Settings** > **System** will display **Windows Holographic for Business** after the upgrade license is applied. [Learn how to unlock Windows Holographic for Business features](hololens1-upgrade-enterprise.md).
-
-- You can view the operating system build number in device properties in the File Explorer app and in the [Windows Device Recovery Tool (WDRT)](https://support.microsoft.com/help/12379/windows-10-mobile-device-recovery-tool-faq).
-- Provisioning a HoloLens device is now easier with the new **Provision HoloLens devices** wizard in the Windows Configuration Designer tool. In the wizard, you can configure the setup experience and network connections, set developer mode, and obtain bulk Azure AD tokens. [Learn how to use the simple provisioning wizard for HoloLens](hololens-provisioning.md#wizard).
-
- 
-
-- When you create a local account in a provisioning package, the password no longer expires every 42 days.
-
-- You can [configure HoloLens as a single-app or multi-app kiosk](hololens-kiosk.md). Multi-app kiosk mode lets you set up a HoloLens to only run the apps that you specify, and prevents users from making changes.
-
-- Media Transfer Protocol (MTP) is enabled so that you can connect the HoloLens device to a PC by USB and transfer files between HoloLens and the PC. You can also use the File Explorer app to move and delete files from within HoloLens.
-
-- Previously, after you signed in to the device with an Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) account, you then had to **Add work access** in **Settings** to get access to corporate resources. Now, you sign in with an Azure AD account and enrollment happens automatically.
-
-- Before you sign in, you can choose the network icon below the password field to choose a different Wi-Fi network to connect to. You can also connect to a guest network, such as at a hotel, conference center, or business.
-
-- You can now easily [share HoloLens with multiple people](hololens-multiple-users.md) using Azure AD accounts.
-
-- When setup or sign-in fails, choose the new **Collect info** option to get diagnostic logs for troubleshooting.
-
-- Individual users can sync their corporate email without enrolling their device in mobile device management (MDM). You can use the device with a Microsoft Account, download and install the Mail app, and add an email account directly.
-
-- You can check the MDM sync status for a device in **Settings** > **Accounts** > **Access Work or School** > **Info**. In the **Device sync status** section, you can start a sync, see areas managed by MDM, and create and export an advanced diagnostics report.
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens-requirements.md b/devices/hololens/hololens-requirements.md
deleted file mode 100644
index eb068d6e65..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens-requirements.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,145 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Set up HoloLens in a commercial environment
-description: Learn more about deploying and managing HoloLens in enterprise environments.
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.assetid: 88bf50aa-0bac-4142-afa4-20b37c013001
-author: scooley
-ms.author: scooley
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.date: 07/15/2019
----
-
-# Deploy HoloLens in a commercial environment
-
-You can deploy and configure HoloLens at scale in a commercial setting.
-
-This article includes:
-
-- Infrastructure requirements and recommendations for HoloLens management
-- Tools for provisioning HoloLens
-- Instructions for remote device management
-- Options for application deployment
-
-This guide assumes basic familiarity with HoloLens. Follow the [get started guide](hololens1-setup.md) to set up HoloLens for the first time.
-
-## Infrastructure for managing HoloLens
-
-HoloLens is, at its core, a Windows mobile device integrated with Azure. It works best in commercial environments with wireless network availability (wi-fi) and access to Microsoft services.
-
-Critical cloud services include:
-
-- Azure active directory (AAD)
-- Windows Update (WU)
-
-Commercial customers will need enterprise mobility management (EMM) or mobile device management (MDM) infrastructure to manage HoloLens devices at scale. This guide uses [Microsoft Intune](https://www.microsoft.com/enterprise-mobility-security/microsoft-intune) as an example, though any provider with full support for Microsoft Policy can support HoloLens. Ask your mobile device management provider if they support HoloLens 2.
-
-HoloLens does support a limited set of cloud disconnected experiences.
-
-## Initial set up at scale
-
-The HoloLens out of box experience is great for setting up one or two devices or for experiencing HoloLens for the first time. If you're provisioning many HoloLens devices, however, selecting your language and settings manually for each device gets tedious and limits scale.
-
-This section:
-
-- Introduces Windows provisioning using provisioning packages
-- Walks through applying a provisioning package during first setup
-
-### Create and apply a provisioning package
-
-The best way to configure many new HoloLens device is with Windows provisioning. You can use it to specify desired configuration and settings required to enroll the devices into management and then apply that configuration to target devices in minutes.
-
-A [provisioning package](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/configuration/provisioning-packages/provisioning-packages) (.ppkg) is a collection of configuration settings. With Windows 10, you can create provisioning packages that let you quickly and efficiently configure a device.
-
-### Upgrade to Windows Holographic for Business
-
-- HoloLens Enterprise license XML file
-
-Some of the HoloLens configurations you can apply in a provisioning package:
-
-- Apply certificates to the device
-- Set up a Wi-Fi connection
-- Pre-configure out of box questions like language and locale
-- (HoloLens 2) bulk enroll in mobile device management
-- (HoloLens v1) Apply key to enable Windows Holographic for Business
-
-Follow [this guide](https://docs.microsoft.com/hololens/hololens-provisioning) to create and apply a provisioning package to HoloLens.
-
-### Set up user identity and enroll in device management
-
-The last step in setting up HoloLens for management at scale is to enroll devices with mobile device management infrastructure. There are several ways to enroll:
-
-1. Bulk enrollment with a security token in a provisioning package.
- Pros: this is the most automated approach
- Cons: takes initial server-side setup
-1. Auto-enroll on user sign in.
- Pros: easiest approach
- Cons: users will need to complete set up after the provisioning package has been applied
-1. _not recommended_ - Manually enroll post-setup.
- Pros: possible to enroll after set up
- Cons: most manual approach and devices aren't centrally manageable until they're manually enrolled.
-
-Learn more about MDM enrollment [here](hololens-enroll-mdm.md).
-
-## Ongoing device management
-
-Ongoing device management will depend on your mobile device management infrastructure. Most have the same general functionality but the user interface may vary widely.
-
-This article outlines [policies and capabilities HoloLens supports](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/configuration-service-provider-reference#hololens).
-
-[This article](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/windows-holographic-for-business) talks about Intune's management tools for HoloLens.
-
-### Push compliance policy via Intune
-
-[Compliance policies](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/device-compliance-get-started) are rules and settings that devices must meet to be compliant in your corporate infrastructure. Use these policies with Conditional Access to block access to company resources for devices that are non-compliant.
-
-For example, you can create a policy that requires Bitlocker be enabled.
-
-[Create compliance policies with Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/compliance-policy-create-windows).
-
-### Manage updates
-
-Intune includes a feature called Update rings for Windows 10 devices, including HoloLens 2 and HoloLens v1 (with Holographic for Business). Update rings include a group of settings that determine how and when updates are installed.
-
-For example, you can create a maintenance window to install updates, or choose to restart after updates are installed. You can also choose to pause updates indefinitely until you're ready to update.
-
-Read more about [configuring update rings with Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/windows-update-for-business-configure).
-
-## Application management
-
-Manage HoloLens applications through:
-
-1. Microsoft Store
- The Microsoft Store is the best way to distribute and consume applications on HoloLens. There is a great set of core HoloLens applications already available in the store or you can [publish your own](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/uwp/publish/).
- All applications in the store are available publicly to everyone, but if it isn't acceptable, checkout the Microsoft Store for Business.
-
-1. [Microsoft Store for Business](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-store/)
- Microsoft Store for Business and Education is a custom store for your corporate environment. It lets you use the Microsoft Store built into Windows 10 and HoloLens to find, acquire, distribute, and manage apps for your organization. It also lets you deploy apps that are specific to your commercial environment but not to the world.
-
-1. Application deployment and management via Intune or another mobile device management solution
- Most mobile device management solutions, including Intune, provide a way to deploy line of business applications directly to a set of enrolled devices. See this article for [Intune app install](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/apps-deploy).
-
-1. _not recommended_ Device Portal
- Applications can also be installed on HoloLens directly using the Windows Device Portal. This isn't recommended since Developer Mode has to be enabled to use the device portal.
-
-Read more about [installing apps on HoloLens](https://docs.microsoft.com/hololens/hololens-install-apps).
-
-## Get support
-
-Get support through the Microsoft support site.
-
-[File a support request](https://support.microsoft.com/supportforbusiness/productselection?sapid=e9391227-fa6d-927b-0fff-f96288631b8f).
-
-## Technical Reference
-
-### Wireless network EAP support
-
-- PEAP-MS-CHAPv2
-- PEAP-TLS
-- TLS
-- TTLS-CHAP
-- TTLS-CHAPv2
-- TTLS-MS-CHAPv2
-- TTLS-PAP
-- TTLS-TLS
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens-spaces.md b/devices/hololens/hololens-spaces.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 26790eacca..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens-spaces.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,114 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Mapping physical spaces with HoloLens
-description: HoloLens learns what a space looks like over time. Users can facilitate this process by moving the HoloLens in certain ways through the space.
-ms.assetid: bd55ecd1-697a-4b09-8274-48d1499fcb0b
-author: dorreneb
-ms.author: dobrown
-ms.date: 09/16/2019
-keywords: hololens, Windows Mixed Reality, design, spatial mapping, HoloLens, surface reconstruction, mesh, head tracking, mapping
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: high
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens 1 (1st gen)
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# Mapping physical spaces with HoloLens
-
-HoloLens blends holograms with your physical world. To do that, HoloLens has to learn about the physical world around you and remember where you place holograms within that space.
-
-Over time, the HoloLens builds up a *spatial map* of the environment that it has seen. HoloLens updates the map as the environment changes. As long as you are logged in and the device is turned on, HoloLens creates and updates your spatial maps. If you hold or wear the device with the cameras pointed at a space, the HoloLens tries to map the area. While the HoloLens learns a space naturally over time, there are ways in which you can help HoloLens map your space more quickly and efficiently.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> If your HoloLens can’t map your space or is out of calibration, HoloLens may enter Limited mode. In Limited mode, you won’t be able to place holograms in your surroundings.
-
-This article explains how HoloLens maps spaces, how to improve spatial mapping, and how to manage the spatial data that HoloLens collects.
-
-## Choosing and setting up and your space
-
-Features in your environment can make it difficult for the HoloLens to interpret a space. Light levels, materials in the space, the layout of objects, and more can all affect how HoloLens maps an area.
-
-HoloLens works best in certain kinds of environments. To produce the best spatial map, choose a room that has adequate light and plenty of space. Avoid dark spaces and rooms that have a lot of dark, shiny, or translucent surfaces (for instance, mirrors or gauzy curtains).
-
-HoloLens is optimized for indoor use. Spatial mapping also works best when Wi-Fi is turned on, although it doesn't have to be connected to a network. HoloLens can obtain Wi-Fi access points even if it is not connected or authenticated. HoloLens functionality does not change whether the access points are internet-connected or intranet/local only.
-
-Only use HoloLens in safe places with no tripping hazards. [More on safety](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4023454/safety-information).
-
-## Mapping your space
-
-Now you're ready to start mapping your spare. When HoloLens starts mapping your surroundings, you'll see a mesh graphic spreading over the space. In mixed reality home, you can trigger the map to show by selecting on a mapped surface.
-
-Here are guidelines for building a great spatial map.
-
-### Understand the scenarios for the area
-
-It is important to spend the most time where you will be using the HoloLens, so that the map is relevant and complete. For example, if a user scenario for HoloLens involves moving from Point A to Point B, walk that path two to three times, looking in all directions as you move.
-
-### Walk slowly around the space
-
-If you walk too quickly around the area, it's likely that the HoloLens will miss mapping areas. Walk slowly around the space, stopping every 5-8 feet to look around at your surroundings.
-
-Smooth movements also help the HoloLens map more efficiently.
-
-### Look in all directions
-
-Looking around as you map the space gives the HoloLens more data on where points are relative to each other.
-
-If you don't look up, for example, the HoloLens may not know where the ceiling in a room is.
-
-Don't forget to look down at the floor as you map the space.
-
-### Cover key areas multiple times
-
-Moving through an area multiple times will help pick up features you may have missed on the first walkthrough. To build an ideal map, try traversing an area two to three times.
-
-If possible, while repeating these movements, spend time walking through an area in one direction, then turn around and walk back the way you came.
-
-### Take your time mapping the area
-
-It can take between 15 and 20 minutes for the HoloLens to fully map and adjust itself to its surroundings. If you have a space in which you plan to use a HoloLens frequently, taking that time up front to map the space can prevent issues later on.
-
-## Possible errors in the spatial map
-
-Errors in spatial mapping data fall into a few categories:
-
-- *Holes*: Real-world surfaces are missing from the spatial mapping data.
-- *Hallucinations*: Surfaces exist in the spatial mapping data that do not exist in the real world.
-- *Wormholes*: HoloLens 'loses' part of the spatial map by thinking it is in a different part of the map than it actually is.
-- *Bias*: Surfaces in the spatial mapping data are imperfectly aligned with real-world surfaces, either pushed in or pulled out.
-
-If you see any of these errors please use the [FeedbackHub](hololens-feedback.md) to send feedback.
-
-## Security and storage for spatial data
-
-Windows 10 version 1803 update for Microsoft HoloLens and later stores mapping data in a local (on-device) database.
-
-HoloLens users cannot directly access the map database, even when the device is plugged into a PC or when using the File Explorer app. When BitLocker is enabled on HoloLens, the stored map data is also encrypted along with the entire volume.
-
-### Remove map data and known spaces from HoloLens
-
-There are two options for deleting map data in **Settings > System > Holograms**:
-
-- To delete nearby holograms, select **Remove nearby holograms**. This command clears the map data and anchored holograms for the current space. If you continue to use the device in the same space, it creates and stores a brand new map section to replace the deleted information.
-
- > [!NOTE]
- > "Nearby" holograms are holograms that are anchored within the same map section in the current space.
-
- For example, you can use this option to clear work-related map data without affecting any home-related map data.
-
-- To delete all holograms, select **Remove all holograms**. This command clears all map data that is stored on the device as well as all anchored holograms. You will need to explicitly place any holograms. You will not be able to rediscover the previously-placed holograms.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> After you remove nearby or all holograms, HoloLens immediately starts scanning and mapping the current space.
-
-### Wi-Fi data in spatial maps
-
-HoloLens stores Wi-Fi characteristics to help correlate hologram locations and map sections that are stored within the HoloLens database of known spaces. Information about Wi-Fi characteristics is not accessible to users, and not sent to Microsoft using the cloud or using telemetry.
-
-As long as Wi-Fi is enabled, HoloLens correlates map data with nearby Wi-Fi access points. There is no difference in behavior whether a network is connected or just detected nearby. If Wi-Fi is disabled, HoloLens still searches the space. However, HoloLens has to search more of the map data within the spaces database, and may need more time to find holograms. Without the Wi-Fi info, the HoloLens has to compare active scans to all hologram anchors and map sections that are stored on the device in order to locate the correct portion of the map.
-
-## Related topics
-
-- [Spatial mapping design](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/spatial-mapping-design)
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens-status.md b/devices/hololens/hololens-status.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e6ccdbd207..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens-status.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
----
-title: HoloLens status
-description: Shows the status of HoloLens online services.
-author: todmccoy
-ms.author: v-todmc
-ms.reviewer: luoreill
-manager: jarrettr
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.localizationpriority: high
-ms.sitesec: library
----
-
-# HoloLens status
-
-✔️ **All services are active**
-
-**Key** ✔️ Good, ⓘ Information, ⚠ Warning, ❌ Critical
-
-Area|HoloLens (1st gen)|HoloLens 2
-----|:----:|:----:
-[Azure services](https://status.azure.com/status)|✔️|✔️
-[Store app](https://www.microsoft.com/store/collections/hlgettingstarted/hololens)|✔️|✔️
-[Apps](https://www.microsoft.com/hololens/apps)|✔️|✔️
-[MDM](https://docs.microsoft.com/hololens/hololens-enroll-mdm)|✔️|✔️
-
-## Notes and related topics
-
-[Frequently asked questions about using Skype for HoloLens](https://support.skype.com/faq/FA34641/frequently-asked-questions-about-using-skype-for-hololens)
-
-For more details about the status of the myriad Azure Services that can connect to HoloLens, see [Azure status](https://azure.microsoft.com/status/).
-
-For more details about current known issues, see [HoloLens known issues](hololens-known-issues.md).
-
-Follow HoloLens on [Twitter](https://twitter.com/HoloLens) and subscribe on [Reddit](https://www.reddit.com/r/HoloLens/).
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens-troubleshooting.md b/devices/hololens/hololens-troubleshooting.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7102984f4c..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens-troubleshooting.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,94 +0,0 @@
----
-title: HoloLens troubleshooting
-description: Solutions for common HoloLens issues.
-author: mattzmsft
-ms.author: mazeller
-ms.date: 12/02/2019
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.topic: article
-ms.custom: CSSTroubleshooting
-audience: ITPro
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-keywords: issues, bug, troubleshoot, fix, help, support, HoloLens
-manager: jarrettr
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# Troubleshooting HoloLens issues
-
-This article describes how to resolve several common HoloLens issues.
-
-## My HoloLens is unresponsive or won’t start
-
-If your HoloLens won't start:
-
-- If the LEDs next to the power button don't light up, or only one LED briefly blinks, you may need to charge your HoloLens.
-- If the LEDs light up when you press the power button but you can't see anything on the displays, hold the power button until all five of the LEDs turn off.
-
-If your HoloLens becomes frozen or unresponsive:
-
-- Turn off your HoloLens by pressing the power button until all five of the LEDs turn themselves off, or for 10 seconds if the LEDs are unresponsive. To start your HoloLens, press the power button again.
-
-If these steps don't work, you can try [recovering your device](hololens-recovery.md).
-
-## Holograms don't look good
-
-If your holograms are unstable, jumpy, or don’t look right, try:
-
-- Cleaning your device visor and sensor bar on the front of your HoloLens.
-- Increasing the light in your room.
-- Walking around and looking at your surroundings so that HoloLens can scan them more completely.
-- Calibrating your HoloLens for your eyes. Go to **Settings** > **System** > **Utilities**. Under **Calibration**, select **Open Calibration**.
-
-## HoloLens doesn’t respond to gestures
-
-To make sure that HoloLens can see your gestures. Keep your hand in the gesture frame - when HoloLens can see your hand, the cursor changes from a dot to a ring.
-
-Learn more about using gestures on [HoloLens (1st gen)](hololens1-basic-usage.md#use-hololens-with-your-hands) or [HoloLens 2](hololens2-basic-usage.md#the-hand-tracking-frame).
-
-If your environment is too dark, HoloLens might not see your hand, so make sure that there’s enough light.
-
-If your visor has fingerprints or smudges, use the microfiber cleaning cloth that came with the HoloLens to clean your visor gently.
-
-## HoloLens doesn’t respond to my voice commands
-
-If Cortana isn’t responding to your voice commands, make sure Cortana is turned on. On the All apps list, select **Cortana** > **Menu** > **Notebook** > **Settings** to make changes. To learn more about what you can say, see [Use your voice with HoloLens](hololens-cortana.md).
-
-## I can’t place holograms or see holograms that I previously placed
-
-If HoloLens can’t map or load your space, it enters Limited mode and you won’t be able to place holograms or see holograms that you’ve placed. Here are some things to try:
-
-- Make sure that there’s enough light in your environment so HoloLens can see and map the space.
-- Make sure that you’re connected to a Wi-Fi network. If you’re not connected to Wi-Fi, HoloLens can’t identify and load a known space.
-- If you need to create a new space, connect to Wi-Fi, then restart your HoloLens.
-- To see if the correct space is active, or to manually load a space, go to **Settings** > **System** > **Spaces**.
-- If the correct space is loaded and you’re still having problems, the space may be corrupt. To fix this issue, select the space, then select **Remove**. After you remove the space, HoloLens starts to map your surroundings and create a new space.
-
-## My HoloLens can’t tell what space I’m in
-
-If your HoloLens can’t identify and load the space you’re in automatically, check the following factors:
-
-- Make sure that you’re connected to Wi-Fi
-- Make sure that there’s plenty of light in the room
-- Make sure that there haven’t been any major changes to the surroundings.
-
-You can also load a space manually or manage your spaces by going to **Settings** > **System** > **Spaces**.
-
-## I’m getting a “low disk space” error
-
-You’ll need to free up some storage space by doing one or more of the following:
-
-- Delete some unused spaces. Go to **Settings** > **System** > **Spaces**, select a space that you no longer need, and then select **Remove**.
-- Remove some of the holograms that you’ve placed.
-- Delete some pictures and videos from the Photos app.
-- Uninstall some apps from your HoloLens. In the **All apps** list, tap and hold the app you want to uninstall, and then select **Uninstall**.
-
-## My HoloLens can’t create a new space
-
-The most likely problem is that you’re running low on storage space. Try one of the [previous tips](#im-getting-a-low-disk-space-error) to free up some disk space.
-
-## The HoloLens emulators isn't working
-
-Information about the HoloLens emulator is located in our developer documentation. Read more about [troubleshooting the HoloLens emulator](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/using-the-hololens-emulator#troubleshooting).
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens-update-hololens.md b/devices/hololens/hololens-update-hololens.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 14d8993c95..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens-update-hololens.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,92 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Update HoloLens
-description: Check your HoloLens' build number, update, and roll back updates.
-keywords: how-to, update, roll back, HoloLens, check build, build number
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: scooley
-ms.author: scooley
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.date: 11/27/2019
-audience: ITPro
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: jarrettr
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# Update HoloLens
-
-HoloLens uses Windows Update, just like other Windows 10 devices. Your HoloLens will automatically download and install system updates whenever it is plugged-in to power and connected to the Internet, even when it is in standby.
-
-This article will walk through HoloLens tools for:
-
-- viewing your current operating system version (build number)
-- checking for updates
-- manually updating HoloLens
-- rolling back to an older update
-
-## Check your operating system version (build number)
-
-You can verify the system version number, (build number) by opening the Settings app and selecting **System** > **About**.
-
-## Check for updates and manually update
-
-You can check for updates any time in settings. To see available updates and check for new updates:
-
-1. Open the **Settings** app.
-1. Navigate to **Update & Security** > **Windows Update**.
-1. Select **Check for updates**.
-
-If an update is available, it will start downloading the new version. After the download is complete, select the **Restart Now** button to trigger the installation. If your device is below 40% and not plugged in, restarting will not start installing the update.
-
-While your HoloLens is installing the update, it will display spinning gears and a progress indicator. Do not turn off your HoloLens during this time. It will restart automatically once it has completed the installation.
-
-HoloLens applies one update at a time. If your HoloLens is more than one version behind the latest you may need to run through the update process multiple times to get it fully up to date.
-
-## Go back to a previous version - HoloLens 2
-
-In some cases, you might want to go back to a previous version of the HoloLens software. You can do this by using the Advanced Recovery Companion to reset your HoloLens to the earlier version.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Going back to an earlier version deletes your personal files and settings.
-
-To go back to a previous version of HoloLens 2, follow these steps:
-
-1. Make sure that you don't have any phones or Windows devices plugged in to your PC.
-1. On your PC, download the [Advanced Recovery Companion](https://www.microsoft.com/p/advanced-recovery-companion/9p74z35sfrs8?activetab=pivot:overviewtab) from the Microsoft Store.
-1. Download the [most recent HoloLens 2 release](https://aka.ms/hololens2download).
-1. When you have finished these downloads, open **File explorer** > **Downloads**. Right-click the zipped folder that you just downloaded, and select **Extract all** > **Extract** to unzip it.
-1. Connect your HoloLens to your PC using a USB-A to USB-C cable. (Even if you've been using other cables to connect your HoloLens, this one works best.)
-1. The Advanced Recovery Companion automatically detects your HoloLens. Select the **Microsoft HoloLens** tile.
-1. On the next screen, select **Manual package selection** and then select the installation file contained in the folder that you unzipped in step 4. (Look for a file with the .ffu extension.)
-1. Select **Install software**, and follow the instructions.
-
-## Go back to a previous version - HoloLens (1st Gen)
-
-In some cases, you might want to go back to a previous version of the HoloLens software. You can do this by using the Windows Device Recovery Tool to reset your HoloLens to the earlier version.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Going back to an earlier version deletes your personal files and settings.
-
-To go back to a previous version of HoloLens 1, follow these steps:
-
-1. Make sure that you don't have any phones or Windows devices plugged in to your PC.
-1. On your PC, download the [Windows Device Recovery Tool (WDRT)](https://support.microsoft.com/help/12379).
-1. Download the [HoloLens Anniversary Update recovery package](https://aka.ms/hololensrecovery).
-1. When the downloads finish, open **File explorer** > **Downloads**. Right-click the zipped folder you just downloaded, and select **Extract all** > **Extract** to unzip it.
-1. Connect your HoloLens to your PC using the micro-USB cable that it came with. (Even if you've been using other cables to connect your HoloLens, this one works best.)
-1. The WDRT will automatically detect your HoloLens. Select the **Microsoft HoloLens** tile.
-1. On the next screen, select **Manual package selection** and choose the installation file contained in the folder you unzipped in step 4. (Look for a file with the .ffu extension.)
-1. Select **Install software**, and follow the instructions.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> If the WDRT doesn't detect your HoloLens, try restarting your PC. If that doesn't work, select **My device was not detected**, select **Microsoft HoloLens**, and then follow the instructions.
-
-## Windows Insider Program on HoloLens
-
-Want to see the latest features in HoloLens? If so, join the Windows Insider Program; you'll get access to preview builds of HoloLens software updates before they're available to the general public.
-
-[Get Windows Insider preview for Microsoft HoloLens](hololens-insider.md).
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens-updates.md b/devices/hololens/hololens-updates.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e0b662bd3d..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens-updates.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,97 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Managing updates to HoloLens
-description: Administrators can use mobile device management to manage updates to HoloLens devices.
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: Teresa-Motiv
-ms.author: v-tea
-audience: ITPro
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: high
-ms.date: 11/7/2019
-ms.reviewer: jarrettr
-manager: jarrettr
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# Managing HoloLens updates
-
-HoloLens uses Windows Update, just like other Windows 10 devices. When an update is available, it will be automatically downloaded and installed the next time your device is plugged in and connected to the Internet.
-
-This article will walk through all of the way to manage updates on HoloLens.
-
-## Manually check for updates
-
-While HoloLens periodically checks for system updates so you don't have to, there may be circumstances in which you want to manually check.
-
-To manually check for updates, go to **Settings** > **Update & Security** > **Check for updates**. If the Settings app says your device is up to date, you have all the updates that are currently available.
-
-## Go back to a previous version (HoloLens 2)
-
-In some cases, you might want to go back to a previous version of the HoloLens software. You can do this by using the Advanced Recovery Companion to reset your HoloLens to the earlier version.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Going back to an earlier version deletes your personal files and settings.
-
-To go back to a previous version of HoloLens 2, follow these steps:
-
-1. Make sure that you don't have any phones or Windows devices plugged in to your PC.
-1. On your PC, download the [Advanced Recovery Companion](https://www.microsoft.com/p/advanced-recovery-companion/9p74z35sfrs8?activetab=pivot:overviewtab) from the Microsoft Store.
-1. Download the [most recent HoloLens 2 release](https://aka.ms/hololens2download).
-1. When you have finished these downloads, open **File explorer** > **Downloads**. Right-click the zipped folder that you just downloaded, and select **Extract all** > **Extract** to unzip it.
-1. Connect your HoloLens to your PC using a USB-A to USB-C cable . (Even if you've been using other cables to connect your HoloLens, this one works best.)
-1. The Advanced Recovery Companion automatically detects your HoloLens. Select the **Microsoft HoloLens** tile.
-1. On the next screen, select **Manual package selection** and then select the installation file contained in the folder that you unzipped in step 4. (Look for a file with the .ffu extension.)
-1. Select **Install software**, and follow the instructions.
-
-## Go back to a previous version (HoloLens (1st gen))
-
-In some cases, you might want to go back to a previous version of the HoloLens software. You can do this by using the Windows Device Recovery Tool to reset your HoloLens to the earlier version.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Going back to an earlier version deletes your personal files and settings.
-
-To go back to a previous version of HoloLens (1st gen), follow these steps:
-
-1. Make sure that you don't have any phones or Windows devices plugged in to your PC.
-1. On your PC, download the [Windows Device Recovery Tool (WDRT)](https://support.microsoft.com/help/12379).
-1. Download the [HoloLens Anniversary Update recovery package](https://aka.ms/hololensrecovery).
-1. When the downloads finish, open **File explorer** > **Downloads**. Right-click the zipped folder you just downloaded, and select **Extract all** > **Extract** to unzip it.
-1. Connect your HoloLens to your PC using the micro-USB cable that it came with. (Even if you've been using other cables to connect your HoloLens, this one works best.)
-1. The WDRT will automatically detect your HoloLens. Select the **Microsoft HoloLens** tile.
-1. On the next screen, select **Manual package selection** and choose the installation file contained in the folder you unzipped in step 4. (Look for a file with the .ffu extension.)
-1. Select **Install software**, and follow the instructions.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> If the WDRT doesn't detect your HoloLens, try restarting your PC. If that doesn't work, select **My device was not detected**, select **Microsoft HoloLens**, and then follow the instructions.
-
-# Use policies to manage updates to HoloLens
-
->[!NOTE]
->HoloLens (1st gen) devices must be [upgraded to Windows Holographic for Business](hololens1-upgrade-enterprise.md) to manage updates.
-
-To configure how and when updates are applied, use the following policies:
-
-- [Update/AllowAutoUpdate](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-update#update-allowautoupdate)
-- [Update/ScheduledInstallDay](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-update#update-scheduledinstallday)
-- [Update/ScheduledInstallTime](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-update#update-scheduledinstalltime)
-
-To turn off the automatic check for updates, set the following policy to value **5** – Turn off Automatic Updates:
-
-- [Update/AllowAutoUpdate](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-update#update-allowautoupdate)
-
-In Microsoft Intune, you can use **Automatic Update Behavior** to change this policy. (See [Manage software updates in Microsoft Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/windows-update-for-business-configure))
-
-For devices on Windows 10, version 1607 only: You can use the following update policies to configure devices and get updates from the Windows Server Update Service (WSUS), instead of Windows Update:
-
-- [Update/AllowUpdateService](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-update#update-allowupdateservice)
-- [Update/RequireUpdateApproval](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-update#update-requireupdateapproval)
-- [Update/UpdateServiceUrl](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-update#update-updateserviceurl)
-
-For more information about using policies to manage HoloLens, see the following articles:
-
-- [Policies supported by HoloLens 2](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-configuration-service-provider#policies-supported-by-hololens-2)
-- [Policies supported by Windows Holographic for Business](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-configuration-service-provider#a-href-idhololenspoliciesapolicies-supported-by-windows-holographic-for-business)
-- [Manage software updates in Microsoft Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/windows-update-for-business-configure)
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens-whats-new.md b/devices/hololens/hololens-whats-new.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 59c777fdec..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens-whats-new.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,87 +0,0 @@
----
-title: What's new in Microsoft HoloLens (HoloLens)
-description: Windows Holographic for Business gets new features in Windows 10, version 1809.
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.date: 11/13/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
----
-
-# What's new in Microsoft HoloLens
-
-## Windows 10, version 1809 for Microsoft HoloLens
-
-> **Applies to:** Hololens (1st gen)
-
-### For everyone
-
-| Feature | Details |
-|---|---|
-| **Quick actions menu** | When you're in an app, the Bloom gesture will now open a Quick actions menu to give you quick access to commonly used system features without having to leave the app. See [Set up HoloLens in kiosk mode](hololens-kiosk.md) for information about the Quick actions menu in kiosk mode.
 |
-| **Stop video capture from the Start or quick actions menu** | If you start video capture from the Start menu or quick actions menu, you’ll be able to stop recording from the same place. (Don’t forget, you can always do this with voice commands too.) |
-| **Project to a Miracast-enabled device** | Project your HoloLens content to a nearby Surface device or TV/Monitor if using Microsoft Display adapter. On **Start**, select **Connect**, and then select the device you want to project to. **Note:** You can deploy HoloLens to use Miracast projection without enabling developer mode. |
-| **New notifications** | View and respond to notification toasts on HoloLens, just like you do on a PC. Gaze to respond to or dismiss them (or if you’re in an immersive experience, use the bloom gesture). |
-| **HoloLens overlays** (file picker, keyboard, dialogs, etc.) | You’ll now see overlays such as the keyboard, dialogs, file picker, etc. when using immersive apps. |
-| **Visual feedback overlay UI for volume change** | When you use the volume up/down buttons on your HoloLens you’ll see a visual display of the volume level. |
-| **New UI for device boot** | A loading indicator was added during the boot process to provide visual feedback that the system is loading. Reboot your device to see the new loading indicator—it’s between the "Hello" message and the Windows boot logo. |
-| **Nearby sharing** | Addition of the Windows Nearby Sharing experience, allowing you to share a capture with a nearby Windows device. When you capture a photo or video on HoloLens (or use the share button from an app such as Microsoft Edge), select a nearby Windows device to share with. |
-| **Share from Microsoft Edge** | Share button is now available on Microsoft Edge windows on HoloLens. In Microsoft Edge, select **Share**. Use the HoloLens share picker to share web content. |
-
-### For administrators
-
-| Feature | Details |
-|---|----|
-| [Enable post-setup provisioning](hololens-provisioning.md) | You can now apply a runtime provisioning package at any time using **Settings**. |
-| Assigned access with Azure AD groups | You can now use Azure AD groups for configuration of Windows assigned access to set up single or multi-app kiosk configuration. |
-| PIN sign-in on profile switch from sign-in screen | PIN sign-in is now available for **Other User**. |
-| Sign in with Web Credential Provider using password | You can now select the Globe sign-in option to launch web sign-in with your password. From the sign-in screen, select **Sign-In options** and select the Globe option to launch web sign-in. Enter your user name if needed, then your password. **Note:** You can choose to bypass any PIN/Smartcard options when prompted during web sign-in. |
-| Read device hardware info through MDM so devices can be tracked by serial # | IT administrators can see and track HoloLens by device serial number in their MDM console. Refer to your MDM documentation for feature availability and instructions. |
-| Set HoloLens device name through MDM (rename) | IT administrators can see and rename HoloLens devices in their MDM console. Refer to your MDM documentation for feature availability and instructions. |
-
-### For international customers
-
-
-Feature | Details
---- | ---
-Localized Chinese and Japanese builds | Use HoloLens with localized user interface for Simplified Chinese or Japanese, including localized Pinyin keyboard, dictation, and voice commands.
-Speech Synthesis (TTS) | Speech synthesis feature now supports Chinese, Japanese, and English.
-
-[Learn how to install the Chinese and Japanese versions of HoloLens.](hololens1-install-localized.md)
-
-
-## Windows 10, version 1803 for Microsoft HoloLens
-
-> **Applies to:** Hololens (1st gen)
-
-Windows 10, version 1803, is the first feature update to Windows Holographic for Business since its release in Windows 10, version 1607. This update introduces the following changes:
-
-- Previously, you could only verify that upgrade license for Commercial Suite had been applied to your HoloLens device by checking to see if VPN was an available option on the device. Now, **Settings** > **System** will display **Windows Holographic for Business** after the upgrade license is applied. [Learn how to unlock Windows Holographic for Business features](hololens1-upgrade-enterprise.md).
-
-- You can view the operating system build number in device properties in the File Explorer app and in the [Windows Device Recovery Tool (WDRT)](https://support.microsoft.com/help/12379/windows-10-mobile-device-recovery-tool-faq).
-
-- Provisioning a HoloLens device is now easier with the new **Provision HoloLens devices** wizard in the Windows Configuration Designer tool. In the wizard, you can configure the setup experience and network connections, set developer mode, and obtain bulk Azure AD tokens. [Learn how to use the simple provisioning wizard for HoloLens](hololens-provisioning.md#wizard).
-
- 
-
-- When you create a local account in a provisioning package, the password no longer expires every 42 days.
-
-- You can [configure HoloLens as a single-app or multi-app kiosk](hololens-kiosk.md). Multi-app kiosk mode lets you set up a HoloLens to only run the apps that you specify, and prevents users from making changes.
-
-- Media Transfer Protocol (MTP) is enabled so that you can connect the HoloLens device to a PC by USB and transfer files between HoloLens and the PC. You can also use the File Explorer app to move and delete files from within HoloLens.
-
-- Previously, after you signed in to the device with an Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) account, you then had to **Add work access** in **Settings** to get access to corporate resources. Now, you sign in with an Azure AD account and enrollment happens automatically.
-
-- Before you sign in, you can choose the network icon below the password field to choose a different Wi-Fi network to connect to. You can also connect to a guest network, such as at a hotel, conference center, or business.
-
-- You can now easily [share HoloLens with multiple people](hololens-multiple-users.md) using Azure AD accounts.
-
-- When setup or sign-in fails, choose the new **Collect info** option to get diagnostic logs for troubleshooting.
-
-- Individual users can sync their corporate email without enrolling their device in mobile device management (MDM). You can use the device with a Microsoft Account, download and install the Mail app, and add an email account directly.
-
-- You can check the MDM sync status for a device in **Settings** > **Accounts** > **Access Work or School** > **Info**. In the **Device sync status** section, you can start a sync, see areas managed by MDM, and create and export an advanced diagnostics report.
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens1-basic-usage.md b/devices/hololens/hololens1-basic-usage.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 282eaada0a..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens1-basic-usage.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,138 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Getting around HoloLens (1st gen)
-description: A brief tour of the HoloLens (1st gen) interface
-ms.assetid: 064f7eb0-190e-4643-abeb-ed3b09312042
-ms.date: 9/16/2019
-ms.reviewer: jarrettr
-manager: jarrettr
-keywords: hololens
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: v-miegge
-ms.author: v-miegge
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: high
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
----
-
-# Getting around HoloLens (1st gen)
-
-Ready to step into the world of holograms? Here's some information to get started.
-
-This guide provides an intro to mixed reality, gestures for interacting with holograms, and an intro to Windows Holographic.
-
-## Discover mixed reality
-
-On HoloLens, holograms blend with your physical environment to look and sound like they're part of your world. Even when holograms are all around you, you can still see your surroundings, move freely, and interact with other people and objects. We call this experience "mixed reality."
-
-The holographic frame positions your holograms where your eyes are most sensitive to detail, and the see-through lenses leave your peripheral vision unobscured. With spatial sound, you can pinpoint a hologram even if it’s behind you. And because HoloLens learns and understands your environment, you can place holograms on and around real objects—and so can your apps and games. So a character in a game might sit down on your sofa, or [space robots could bust out of your walls](https://www.microsoft.com/store/apps/9nblggh5fv3j).
-
-## Use HoloLens with your hands
-
-Getting around HoloLens is a lot like using your smart phone. You can use your hands to manipulate holographic windows, menus, and buttons. Instead of pointing, clicking, or tapping, you'll use your gaze, your [voice](hololens-cortana.md), and gestures to select apps and holograms and to get around HoloLens.
-
-When you know these basic interactions, getting around on HoloLens will be a snap.
-
-We'll walk you through the basics the first time you use your HoloLens. You'll also find a gesture tutorial on your **Start** menu—look for the Learn Gestures app.
-
-### The hand-tracking frame
-
-HoloLens has sensors that can see a few feet to either side of you. When you use your hands, you'll need to keep them inside that frame, or HoloLens won't see them. As you move around, the frame moves with you.
-
-
-
-### Open the Start menu with bloom
-
-To open the **Start** menu:
-
-1. Hold your hand in front of you so it's in the gesture frame.
-1. Bloom: bring all of your fingers together then open your hand.
- 
-
-### Select holograms with gaze and air tap
-
-To select an app or other hologram, air tap it while looking directly at the hologram you're selecting. To do this, follow these steps:
-
-1. Gaze at the hologram you want to select.
-1. Point your index finger straight up toward the ceiling.
-1. Air tap: lower your finger, then quickly raise it.
- 
-
-### Select a hologram by using your voice
-
-1. The gaze cursor is a dot that you move around by moving your head. You can use it to target voice commands with precision.
-1. Gaze at the hologram that you want to select.
-1. To select the hologram, say "Select."
-
-## Holograms and apps
-
-Now it's time to put gestures to the test!
-
-You'll find your installed apps in the [Start menu](holographic-home.md) and there are more apps for HoloLens (1st gen) in the Microsoft Store.
-
-Open the **Start** menu and select an app!
-
-Using apps on HoloLens is a little different from on a PC: Some apps use a 2D view and look like other Windows applications. Other apps (immersive apps) use a 3D view and when you launch them, they become the only app you see.
-
-When you place an app window or app launcher, it will stay put until you remove it. You can move or resize these holograms in your mixed reality home at any time.
-
-## Move, resize, and rotate apps
-
-Moving and resizing apps on HoloLens works a bit differently than it does on a PC. Instead of dragging the app, you'll use your gaze, along with a [gesture](https://support.microsoft.com/help/12644/hololens-use-gestures) or the [clicker](hololens1-clicker.md). You can also rotate an app window in 3D space.
-
-> [!TIP]
-> Rearrange apps using your voice - gaze at an app and say "Face me," "Bigger," or "Smaller." Or have Cortana move an app for you: say "Hey Cortana, move \**app name\** here."
-
-### Move an app
-
-Gaze at the app (at the title bar of an app window), and then do one of the following.
-
-- Tap and hold to select the app. Move your hand to position the app, and raise your finger to place it.
-- Select **Adjust**, tap and hold, and move your hand to position the app. Raise your finger to place it, then select **Done**.
-- Select **Adjust**, click and hold the clicker, and move your hand to position the app. Release the clicker, then select **Done**.
-
-> [!TIP]
-> If you drop apps when you move them, make sure to keep your hand in the gesture frame by following it with your gaze.
-
-### Resize an app
-
-Gaze at the app, and then do one of the following.
-
-- Gaze at a corner or edge of an app window, and tap and hold. Move your hand to change the app's size, and raise your finger when you're done.
-- Select **Adjust**. Gaze at one of the blue squares at the corners of the app, tap and hold, then move your hand to resize the app. Raise your finger to release it, then select **Done**.
-- Select **Adjust**. Gaze at one of the blue squares at the corners of the app, click and hold the clicker, then move your hand to resize the app. Release the clicker, then select **Done**.
-
-> [!TIP]
-> In Adjust mode, you can move or resize any hologram.
-
-### Rotate an app
-
-Gaze at the app, and tap and hold with both hands to select it. Rotate the app by keeping one hand steady and moving your other hand around it. When you're done, raise both index fingers.
-
-### Scroll content in an app window
-
-Gaze at the content of the app window. Tap and hold and then move your hand slightly upwards or downwards to scroll the content.
-
-## Meet the HoloLens (1st gen) Clicker
-
-The [HoloLens (1st Gen) clicker](hololens1-clicker.md) gives you another way to interact with holograms. [Pair it](hololens-connect-devices.md) with your HoloLens and then use it along with your gaze to select, scroll, and more.
-
-## Next steps
-
-Congratulations! you're ready to use HoloLens (1st gen).
-
-Now you can configure your HoloLens (1st gen) to meet your specific needs.
-
-[Connect bluetooth devices like mouse and keyboard](hololens-connect-devices.md)
-
-[Learn more about Voice and Cortana](hololens-cortana.md)
-
-### Help! I don't see my holograms
-
-If you don’t see holograms that you’ve placed while using HoloLens, here are some things to try:
-
-- Make sure that you’re looking in the right area—remember, holograms stay where you left them!
-- Make sure that you're in a well-lit room without a lot of direct sunlight.
-- Wait. When HoloLens has trouble recognizing your space, previously placed holograms can take up to a minute to reappear.
-- If issue persists, you may want to clear out your Holograms storage data in **Settings** > **System** > **Holograms**, then place holograms in mixed reality home again.
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens1-clicker.md b/devices/hololens/hololens1-clicker.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 9da6a40ba5..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens1-clicker.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,97 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Use the HoloLens clicker
-description: This article outlines how to use the HoloLens clicker, including clicker pairing, charging, and recovery.
-ms.assetid: 7d4a30fd-cf1d-4c9a-8eb1-1968ccecbe59
-ms.date: 09/16/2019
-manager: jarrettr
-keywords: hololens
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: v-miegge
-ms.author: v-miegge
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: high
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
----
-
-# Use the HoloLens (1st gen) clicker
-
-The clicker was designed specifically for HoloLens (1st gen) and gives you another way to interact with holograms. It comes with HoloLens (1st gen), in a separate box.
-
-Use it in place of hand gestures to select, scroll, move, and resize apps.
-
-## Clicker hardware and pairing
-
-The HoloLens (1st gen) clicker has a finger loop to make it easier to hold, and an indicator light.
-
-
-
-### Clicker indicator lights
-
-Here's what the lights on the clicker mean.
-
-- **Blinking white**. The clicker is in pairing mode.
-- **Fast-blinking white**. Pairing was successful.
-- **Solid white**. The clicker is charging.
-- **Blinking amber**. The battery is low.
-- **Solid amber**. The clicker ran into an error and you'll need to restart it. While pressing the pairing button, click and hold for 15 seconds.
-
-### Pair the clicker with your HoloLens (1st gen)
-
-1. Use the bloom gesture to go to **Start**, then select **Settings** > **Devices** and verify that Bluetooth is on.
-1. On the clicker, press and hold the pairing button until the status light blinks white.
-1. On the pairing screen, select **Clicker** > **Pair**.
-
-### Charge the clicker
-
-When the clicker battery is low, the battery indicator will blink amber. Plug the Micro USB cable into a USB power supply to charge the device.
-
-## Use the clicker with HoloLens (1st gen)
-
-### Hold the clicker
-
-To put on the clicker, slide the loop over your ring or middle finger so that the Micro USB port faces toward your wrist. Rest your thumb in the indentation.
-
-
-
-### Clicker gestures
-
-Clicker gestures are small wrist rotations, not the larger movements used for HoloLens hand gestures. And HoloLens recognizes your gestures and clicks even if the clicker is outside the [gesture frame](hololens1-basic-usage.md), so you can hold the clicker in the position that's most comfortable for you.
-
-- **Select**. To select a hologram, button, or other element, gaze at it, then click.
-
-- **Click and hold**. Click and hold your thumb down on the button to do some of the same things you would with tap and hold, such as move or resize a hologram.
-
-- **Scroll**. On the app bar, select **Scroll Tool**. Click and hold, then rotate the clicker up, down, left, or right. To scroll faster, move your hand farther from the center of the scroll tool.
-
-- **Zoom**. On the app bar, select **Zoom Tool**. Click and hold, then rotate the clicker up to zoom in, or down to zoom out.
-
-> [!TIP]
-> To zoom in or out when using Microsoft Edge, gaze at a page and double-click.
-
-## Restart or recover the clicker
-
-Here are some things to try if the HoloLens clicker is unresponsive or isn’t working well.
-
-### Restart the clicker
-
-Use the tip of a pen to press and hold the pairing button. At the same time, click and hold the clicker for 15 seconds. If the clicker was already paired with your HoloLens, it will stay paired after it restarts.
-
-If the clicker won't turn on or restart, try charging it by using the HoloLens charger. If the battery is very low, it might take a few minutes for the white indicator light to turn on.
-
-### Re-pair the clicker
-
-Select **Settings** > **Devices** and select the clicker. Select **Remove**, wait a few seconds, then pair the clicker again.
-
-### Recover the clicker
-
-If restarting and re-pairing the clicker don’t fix the problem, the Windows Device Recovery Tool can help you recover it. The recovery process may take some time, and it will install the latest version of the clicker software. To use the tool, you’ll need a computer running Windows 10 or later that has at least 4 GB of free storage space.
-
-To recover the clicker:
-
-1. Download and install the [Windows Device Recovery Tool](https://dev.azure.com/ContentIdea/ContentIdea/_queries/query/8a004dbe-73f8-4a32-94bc-368fc2f2a895/) on your computer.
-1. Connect the clicker to your computer by using the Micro USB cable that came with your HoloLens.
-1. Run the Windows Device Recovery Tool and follow the instructions.
-
-If the clicker isn’t automatically detected, select **My device was not detected** and follow the instructions to put your device into recovery mode.
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens1-fit-comfort-faq.md b/devices/hololens/hololens1-fit-comfort-faq.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d76375918c..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens1-fit-comfort-faq.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,64 +0,0 @@
----
-title: HoloLens (1st gen) fit and comfort frequently asked questions
-description: Answers to frequently asked questions about how to fit your HoloLens (1st gen).
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: Teresa-Motiv
-ms.author: v-tea
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: high
-ms.date: 10/09/2019
-ms.reviewer: jarrettr
-audience: ITPro
-manager: jarrettr
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
----
-
-# HoloLens (1st gen) fit and comfort frequently asked questions
-
-Here are some tips on how to stay comfortable and have the best experience using your HoloLens.
-
-For step-by-step instructions and a video about putting on and adjusting your device, see [Get your HoloLens (1st gen) ready to use](hololens1-setup.md).
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> The fit and comfort tips in this topic are meant only as general guidance—they don't replace any laws or regulations, or your good judgment when using HoloLens. Stay safe, and have fun!
-
-Here are some tips on how to stay comfortable and have the best experience using your HoloLens.
-
-## I'm experiencing discomfort when I use my device. What should I do?
-
-If you experience discomfort, take a break until you feel better. Try sitting in a well-lit room and relaxing for a bit. The next time your use your HoloLens, try using it for a shorter period of time at first.
-
-For more information, see [Health and safety on HoloLens](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=746661).
-
-## I can't see the whole holographic frame, or my holograms are cut off
-
-To see the top edge of the holographic frame, move the device so it sits higher on your head, or angle the headband up slightly in front. To see the bottom edge, move the device to sit lower on your head, or angle the headband down slightly in front. If the left or right edge of the view frame isn't visible, make sure the HoloLens visor is centered on your forehead.
-
-## I need to look up or down to see holograms
-
-Try adjusting the position of your device visor so the holographic frame matches your natural gaze. Here's how:
-
-- **If you need to look up to see holograms**. First, shift the back of the headband a bit higher on your head. Then use one hand to hold the headband in place and the other to gently rotate the visor so you have a good view of the holographic frame.
-- **If you need to look down to see holograms**. First, shift the back of the headband a bit lower on your head. Then place your thumbs under the device arms and your index fingers on top of the headband, and gently squeeze with your thumbs to rotate the visor so you have a good view of the holographic frame.
-
-## The device slides down when I'm using it, or I need to make the headband too tight to keep it secure
-
-The overhead strap can help keep your HoloLens secure on your head, particularly if you're moving around a lot. The strap may also let you loosen the headband a bit. [Learn how to use it](hololens1-setup.md#adjust-fit).
-
-You can also experiment with the positioning of the headband—depending on your head size and shape, you may need to slide it up or down to reposition it on your forehead.
-
-## My HoloLens feels heavy on my nose
-
-If your HoloLens is adjusted correctly, the nose pad should rest lightly on your nose. If it feels heavy on your nose, try rotating the visor up or adjusting the angle of the headband. You can also slide the device visor out—grasp the device arms just behind the visor and pull forward gently.
-
-## How can I adjust HoloLens to fit with my glasses?
-
-The device visor can slide in and out to accommodate eyewear. Grasp the device arms just behind the visor and pull forward gently to adjust it.
-
-## My arm gets tired when I use gestures. What can I do?
-
-When using gestures, there's no need to extend your arm out far from your body. Keep it closer to your side, where it's more comfortable and will get less tired. [Learn more about gestures](hololens1-basic-usage.md#use-hololens-with-your-hands).
-
-And be sure to try out [voice commands](hololens-cortana.md) and the [HoloLens clicker](hololens1-clicker.md).
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens1-hardware.md b/devices/hololens/hololens1-hardware.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 285f44dd6a..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens1-hardware.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,166 +0,0 @@
----
-title: HoloLens (1st gen) hardware
-description: An outline of the components that make up Microsoft HoloLens (1st gen), the world's first fully untethered holographic computer running Windows.
-ms.assetid: 527d494e-2ab6-46ca-bd5a-bfc6b43cc833
-ms.date: 09/16/2019
-keywords: hololens
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: mattzmsft
-ms.author: mazeller
-ms.topic: article
-manager: jarrettr
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
----
-
-# HoloLens (1st gen) hardware
-
-
-
-Microsoft HoloLens (1st gen) is the world's first fully untethered holographic computer. HoloLens redefines personal computing through holographic experiences to empower you in new ways. HoloLens blends cutting-edge optics and sensors to deliver 3D holograms pinned to the real world around you.
-
-## HoloLens components
-
-
-
-Your HoloLens includes the following features:
-
-- **Visor**. Contains the HoloLens sensors and displays. You can rotate the visor up while you are wearing the HoloLens.
-- **Headband**. To put the HoloLens on, use the adjustment wheel to expand the headband. With the HoloLens in place, tighten the adjustment wheel until the headband is comfortable.
-- **Brightness buttons**. When you're wearing the HoloLens, the brightness buttons are on the left side of the device.
-- **Volume buttons**. When you're wearing the HoloLens, the volume buttons are on the right side of the device.
-- **Device arms**. When you pick up, put on, or take off your HoloLens, always grasp or hold it by the device arms.
-
-## In the box
-
-> [!VIDEO https://www.microsoft.com/videoplayer/embed/c7ceb904-9d5f-4194-9e10-e8a949dbad7d]
-
-The HoloLens box contains the following items:
-
-- **Nose pads**. Select a nose pad that fits the shape of your nose and accommodates your eyewear.
-- **Overhead strap**. When you're wearing the HoloLens while you move around, use the overhead strap to help keep the device in place. Additionally, if you're wearing the HoloLens for extended periods, using the overhead strap may make the device more comfortable to wear.
-- **Micro USB cable**. Use the micro-USB cable to connect your HoloLens to the power supply for charging, or use it to connect your HoloLens to your computer.
-- **Power supply**. Plugs into a power outlet.
-- **Microfiber cloth**. Use the cloth to clean your HoloLens visor.
-
->[!TIP]
->The [clicker](hololens1-clicker.md) ships with HoloLens (1st Gen), in a separate box.
-
-### Power Supply details
-
-The power supply and the USB cable that come with the device are the best supported mechanism for charging. The power supply is an 18W charger. It supplies 9V at 2A.
-
-Charging rate and speed may vary depending on the environment in which the device is running.
-
-In order to maintain/advance Internal Battery Charge Percentage while the device is on, it must be connected minimum to a 15W charger.
-
-## Device specifications
-
-### Display
-
-
-
-| | |
-| - | - |
-| Optics | See-through holographic lenses (waveguides) |
-| Holographic resolution | 2 HD 16:9 light engines producing 2.3M total light points |
-| Holographic density | \>2.5k radiants (light points per radian) |
-| Eye-based rendering | Automatic pupillary distance calibration |
-
-### Sensors
-
-
-
-- 1 inertial measurement unit (IMU)
-- 4 environment understanding cameras
-- 1 depth camera
-- 1 2MP photo / HD video camera
-- Mixed reality capture
-- 4 microphones
-- 1 ambient light sensor
-
-### Input, output, and connectivity
-
-- Built-in speakers
-- Audio 3.5mm jack
-- Volume up/down
-- Brightness up/down
-- Power button
-- Battery status LEDs
-- Wi-Fi 802.11ac
-- Micro USB 2.0
-- Bluetooth 4.1 LE
-
-### Power
-
-- Battery Life
-- 2-3 hours of active use
-- Up to 2 weeks of standby time
-- Fully functional when charging
-- Passively cooled (no fans)
-
-### Processors
-
-
-
-- Intel 32-bit architecture with TPM 2.0 support
-- Custom-built Microsoft Holographic Processing Unit (HPU 1.0)
-
-### Memory
-
-- 64 GB Flash
-- 2 GB RAM
-
-### Fit
-
-| | |
-| - | - |
-| Sizing | Single size with adjustable band. Fits over glasses |
-| Weight | 579 grams |
-
-## Device capabilities
-
-Using the following to understand user actions:
-
-- Gaze tracking
-- Gesture input
-- Voice support
-
-Using the following to understand the environment:
-
-- Spatial sound
-
-## Pre-installed software
-
-- Windows 10
-- Windows Store
-- Holograms
-- Microsoft Edge
-- Photos
-- Settings
-- Windows Feedback
-- Calibration
-- Learn Gestures
-
-## Device certifications
-
-### Safety
-
-HoloLens has been tested and found to conform to the basic impact protection requirements of ANSI Z87.1, CSA Z94.3 and EN 166.
-
-## Care and cleaning
-
-Handle your HoloLens carefully. To lift, carry, and adjust your HoloLens, use the device arms—not the overhead strap. To keep the visor free of dust and fingerprints and avoid touching it. Repeated cleaning could damage the visor, so try to keep your device clean.
-
-Don't use any cleaners or solvents on your HoloLens, and don't submerge it in water or apply water directly to it.
-
-To clean the visor, remove any dust using a camel or goat hair lens brush or a bulb-style lens blower. Lightly moisten the microfiber cloth with a small amount of distilled water, then use it to wipe the visor gently in a circular motion.
-
-To clean the rest of the device, including the headband and device arms, use a lint-free cloth moistened with mild soap and water. Let your HoloLens dry completely before using it again.
-
-
-
-> [!div class="nextstepaction"]
-> [Set up and start your HoloLens (1st gen)](hololens1-setup.md)
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens1-install-localized.md b/devices/hololens/hololens1-install-localized.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 52e4862bbe..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens1-install-localized.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Install localized versions of HoloLens
-description: Learn how to install the Chinese or Japanese versions of HoloLens
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: high
-ms.date: 9/16/2019
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: jarrettr
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
----
-
-# Install localized versions of HoloLens (1st gen)
-
-In order to switch to the Chinese or Japanese version of HoloLens, you’ll need to use the Windows Device Recovery Tool (WDRT) to download the build for the language on a PC and then install it on your HoloLens.
-
-> [!IMPORTANT]
-> Using WDRT to install the Chinese or Japanese builds of HoloLens deletes existing data, such as personal files and settings, from your HoloLens.
-
-1. On your PC, download and install [the Windows Device Recovery Tool (WDRT)](https://support.microsoft.com/help/12379).
-1. Download the package for the language you want to your PC: [Simplified Chinese](https://aka.ms/hololensdownload-ch) or [Japanese](https://aka.ms/hololensdownload-jp).
-1. When the download finishes, select **File Explorer** > **Downloads**. Right-click the zipped folder that you just downloaded, and select **Extract all** > **Extract** to unzip it.
-1. Connect your HoloLens to your PC using the micro-USB cable that it shipped with. (Even if you've been using other cables to connect your HoloLens, this one works best.)
-1. After the tool automatically detects your HoloLens, select the Microsoft HoloLens tile.
-1. On the next screen, select **Manual package selection** and select the installation file that resides in the folder that you unzipped in step 4. (Look for a file that has the extension “.ffu”.)
-1. Select **Install software** and follow the instructions.
-1. After the build installs, HoloLens setup automatically starts. Put on the device and follow the setup directions.
-
-When you’re done with setup, go to **Settings** > **Update & Security** > **Windows Insider Program**, and check that you’re configured to receive the latest preview builds. Like the English preview builds, the Windows Insider Program keeps the Chinese and Japanese versions of HoloLens up-to-date with the latest preview builds.
-
-> [!NOTE]
->
-> - You can’t use the Settings app to change the system language between English, Japanese, and Chinese. Flashing a new build is the only supported way to change the device system language.
-> - While you can use the on-screen Pinyin keyboard to enter Simplified Chinese or Japanese text, using a Bluetooth hardware keyboard to type Simplified Chinese or Japanese text is not supported at this time. However, on Chinese or Japanese HoloLens, you can continue to use a Bluetooth keyboard to type in English (to toggle a hardware keyboard to type in English, press the ~ key).
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens1-setup.md b/devices/hololens/hololens1-setup.md
deleted file mode 100644
index cbbc2315b7..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens1-setup.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,106 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Prepare a new HoloLens
-description: This guide walks through first time set up.
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: JesseMcCulloch
-ms.author: jemccull
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: high
-ms.date: 8/12/2019
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: jarrettr
-appliesto:
-- Hololens (1st gen)
----
-
-# Get your HoloLens (1st gen) ready to use
-
-Follow along to set up a HoloLens (1st gen) for the first time.
-
-## Charge your HoloLens (1st gen)
-
-To charge your HoloLens, connect the power supply to the charging port by using the included Micro USB cable. Then plug the power supply into a power outlet. When the device is charging, the battery indicator will light up in a wave pattern.
-
-
-
-When your HoloLens is on, the battery indicator shows the battery level in increments. When only one of the five lights is on, the battery level is below 20 percent. If the battery level is critically low and you try to turn on the device, one light will blink briefly, then go out.
-
-> [!TIP]
-> To get an estimate of your current battery level, say "Hey Cortana, how much battery do I have left?"
-
-The power supply and USB cable that come with the device are the best way to charge your HoloLens (1st gen). The power supply provides 18W of power (9V 2A).
-
-Charging rate and speed may vary depending on the environment in which the device is running.
-
-## Adjust fit
-
-> [!VIDEO https://www.microsoft.com/videoplayer/embed/be3cb527-f2f1-4f85-b4f7-a34fbaba980d]
-
-| | |
-|:--- |:--- |
-|1. Rotate the headband up to about 20-30 degrees.||
-|2. Push the headband back. Do not pull it back, or manipulate the band behind the hinge, because over time this can break the band.||
-|3. Turn the adjustment wheel to extend the headband all the way out. ||
-|4. Hold the device by the device arms, and place it on your head. Make sure that the headband sits at the top of your forehead, and then tighten the adjustment wheel.||
-|5. Slide the visor back, and then check the fit of the device. The headband should sit at the top of the forehead, just below your hairline, with the speakers above your ears. The lenses should be centered over your eyes.||
-
-## Turn on your HoloLens
-
-Use the power button to turn HoloLens on and off or to put it in standby mode.
-
-
-
-If your device doesn't respond or won't start, see [Restart, reset, or recover HoloLens](hololens-restart-recover.md).
-
-When your HoloLens is off or in standby, turn it on by pressing the power button for one second. If it doesn't turn on, plug it in and charge it for at least 30 minutes.
-
-> [!TIP]
-> To restart HoloLens, say "Hey Cortana, reboot the device."
-
-### Put HoloLens in standby
-
-To put your HoloLens in standby while it's turned on, press the power button once. The battery indicators blink off. To wake it from standby, press the power button again.
-
-HoloLens automatically goes into standby after 3 minutes of inactivity. When it's in standby, it automatically shuts down after 4 hours, or after the battery level drops by 10 percent.
-
-### Shut down HoloLens
-
-To shut down (turn off) HoloLens, hold the power button down for four seconds. The battery indicators turn off one by one and the device shuts down.
-
-HoloLens automatically shuts down when the battery level drops to one percent, even if it's plugged in. After you've recharged the battery to three percent, you'll be able to turn HoloLens on again.
-
-## Adjust volume and brightness
-
-The brightness and volume buttons are on top of the device arms—volume to your right and brightness to your left.
-
-
-
-## HoloLens indicator lights
-
-
-
-Not sure what the indicator lights on your HoloLens mean? Here's some help.
-
-|When the lights do this |It means |
-| - | - |
-|Scroll from the center outward. |HoloLens is starting up. |
-|Stay lit (all or some). |HoloLens is on and ready to use. Battery life is shown in 20 percent increments. |
-|Scroll, then light up, then scroll. |HoloLens is on and charging. Battery life is shown in 20 percent increments. |
-|Turn off one by one. |HoloLens is shutting down. |
-|Turn off all at once. |HoloLens is going into standby. |
-|All light up, then one blinks briefly, then all turn off. |Battery is critically low. HoloLens needs to charge. |
-|All scroll, then one blinks, then all scroll. |Battery is critically low. HoloLens is charging. |
-
-## Safety and comfort
-
-### Use in safe surroundings
-
-Use your HoloLens in a safe space that’s free of obstructions and tripping hazards. Don’t use it when you need a clear field of view and your full attention, such as while you’re operating a vehicle or doing other potentially hazardous activities.
-
-### Stay comfortable
-
-Keep your first few sessions with HoloLens brief and be sure to take breaks. If you experience discomfort, stop and rest until you feel better. This might include temporary feelings of nausea, motion sickness, dizziness, disorientation, headache, fatigue, eye strain, or dry eyes.
-
-> [!div class="nextstepaction"]
-> [Start and configure your HoloLens (1st gen)](hololens1-start.md)
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens1-start.md b/devices/hololens/hololens1-start.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 466fc431b2..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens1-start.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,75 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Set up HoloLens (1st gen)
-description: This guide walks through first time set up. You'll need a Wi-Fi network and either a Microsoft (MSA) or Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) account.
-ms.assetid: 0136188e-1305-43be-906e-151d70292e87
-ms.prod: hololens
-author: Teresa-Motiv
-ms.author: v-tea
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 8/12/19
-manager: jarrettr
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: high
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
----
-
-# Set up your HoloLens (1st gen)
-
-The first time you turn on your HoloLens, you'll be guided through calibrating your device, setting up your device, and signing in. This article walks through the HoloLens (1st gen) first start and setup experience.
-
-In the next section, you'll learn how to work with HoloLens and interact with holograms. To skip ahead to that article, see [Get started with HoloLens (1st gen)](hololens1-basic-usage.md).
-
-## Before you start
-
-Before you get started, make sure you have the following available:
-
-**A Wi-Fi connection**. You'll need to connect your HoloLens to a Wi-Fi network to set it up. The first time you connect, you'll need an open or password-protected network that doesn't require navigating to a website or using certificates to connect. [Learn more about the websites that HoloLens uses](hololens-offline.md).
-
-**A Microsoft account or a work account**. You'll also need to use a Microsoft account (or a work account, if your organization owns the device) to sign in to HoloLens. If you don't have a Microsoft account, go to [account.microsoft.com](http://account.microsoft.com) and set one up for free.
-
-**A safe, well-lit space with no tripping hazards**. [Health and safety info](http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=746661).
-
-**The optional comfort accessories** that came with your HoloLens, to help you get the most comfortable fit. [More on fit and comfort](https://support.microsoft.com/help/12632/hololens-fit-your-hololens).
-
-> [!NOTE]
->
-> - The first time that you use your HoloLens, [Cortana](hololens-cortana.md) is already on and ready to guide you (though she won't be able to respond to your questions until after you set up your device). You can turn Cortana off at any time in Cortana's settings.
-> - In order to switch to the Chinese or Japanese version of HoloLens, you’ll need to download the build for the language on a PC and then install it on your HoloLens. For more information, see [Install localized versions of HoloLens (1st gen)](hololens1-install-localized.md).
-
-## Start your Hololens and set up Windows
-
-The first time you start your HoloLens, your first task is to set up Windows Holographic on your device.
-
-1. Connect to the internet (HoloLens guides you to select Wi-Fi network).
-
-1. Sign in to your user account. Choose between **My work or school owns it** and **I own it**.
- - When you choose **My work or school owns it**, you sign in by using an Azure AD account. If your organization uses Azure AD Premium and has configured automatic MDM enrollment, HoloLens automatically enrolls in MDM. If your organization does not use Azure AD Premium, automatic MDM enrollment isn't available, so you will need to [manually enroll HoloLens in device management](hololens-enroll-mdm.md#enroll-through-settings-app). To sign in to your device the first time by using a work or school account, follow these steps:
- 1. Enter your organizational account information.
- 1. Accept the privacy statement.
- 1. Sign in by using your Azure AD credentials. This may redirect to your organization's sign-in page.
- 1. Continue setting up the device.
- - When you choose **I own it**, you sign in by using a Microsoft account. After setup is complete, you can [manually enroll HoloLens in device management](hololens-enroll-mdm.md#enroll-through-settings-app).
- 1. Enter your Microsoft account information.
- 1. Enter your password. If your Microsoft account requires [two-step verification (2FA)](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/microsoft_blog/2013/04/17/microsoft-account-gets-more-secure/), complete the verification process.
-
-1. The device sets your time zone based on information that it obtains from the Wi-Fi network.
-
-## Calibration
-
-After Cortana introduces herself, the next setup step is calibration. For the best HoloLens experience, you should complete the calibration process during setup.
-
-HoloLens (1st gen) uses the distance between your pupils (IPD or [interpupillary distance](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Interpupillary_distance)) to make holograms clear and easy to interact with. If the IPD is not correct, holograms may appear to be unstable or at an incorrect distance.
-
-During calibration, HoloLens asks you to align your finger with a series of six targets per eye. HoloLens uses this process to set the correct IPD for your eyes. If the calibration needs to be updated or adjusted for a new user, the new user can run the Calibration app outside of setup.
-
-
-
-*IPD finger-alignment screen at second step*
-
-Congratulations! Setup is complete and you can begin using HoloLens.
-
-## Next steps
-
-> [!div class="nextstepaction"]
-> [Get started with HoloLens (1st gen)](hololens1-basic-usage.md)
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens1-upgrade-enterprise.md b/devices/hololens/hololens1-upgrade-enterprise.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5e535af10d..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens1-upgrade-enterprise.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,91 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Unlock Windows Holographic for Business features
-description: When you upgrade to Windows Holographic for Business, HoloLens provides extra features that are designed for business.
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.date: 9/16/2019
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: jarrettr
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens (1st gen)
----
-
-# Unlock Windows Holographic for Business features
-
-Microsoft HoloLens is available in the *Development Edition*, which runs Windows Holographic (an edition of Windows 10 that is designed for HoloLens), and in the [Commercial Suite](hololens-commercial-features.md), which provides extra features designed for business.
-
-When you purchase the Commercial Suite, you receive a license that upgrades Windows Holographic to Windows Holographic for Business. You can apply this license to the device either by using the organization's [mobile device management (MDM) provider](#edition-upgrade-by-using-mdm) or a [provisioning package](#edition-upgrade-by-using-a-provisioning-package).
-
-> [!TIP]
-> In Windows 10, version 1803, you can check that the HoloLens has been upgraded to the business edition by selecting **Settings** > **System**.
-
-## Edition upgrade by using MDM
-
-The enterprise license can be applied by any MDM provider that supports the [WindowsLicensing configuration service provider (CSP)](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904983.aspx). The latest version of the Microsoft MDM API will support WindowsLicensing CSP.
-
-For step-by-step instructions for upgrading HoloLens by using Microsoft Intune, see [Upgrade devices running Windows Holographic to Windows Holographic for Business](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/holographic-upgrade).
-
- On other MDM providers, the specific steps for setting up and deploying the policy might vary.
-
-## Edition upgrade by using a provisioning package
-
-Provisioning packages are files created by the Windows Configuration Designer tool that apply a specified configuration to a device.
-
-### Create a provisioning package that upgrades the Windows Holographic edition
-
-1. [Create a provisioning package for HoloLens.](hololens-provisioning.md)
-1. Go to **Runtime settings** > **EditionUpgrade**, and select **EditionUpgradeWithLicense**.
-
- 
-
-1. Find the XML license file that was provided when you purchased the Commercial Suite.
-
- > [!NOTE]
- > You can configure [additional settings in the provisioning package](hololens-provisioning.md).
-
-1. On the **File** menu, select **Save**.
-
-1. Read the warning that project files may contain sensitive information and click **OK**.
-
- > [!IMPORTANT]
- > When you build a provisioning package, you may include sensitive information in the project files and provisioning package (.ppkg) file. Although you have the option to encrypt the .ppkg file, project files are not encrypted. You should store the project files in a secure location and delete the project files when no longer needed.
-
-1. On the **Export** menu, select **Provisioning package**.
-
-1. Change **Owner** to **IT Admin**, which sets the precedence of this provisioning package to be higher than others applied to this device from different sources, and then select **Next**.
-
-1. Set a value for **Package Version**.
-
- > [!TIP]
- > You can make changes to existing packages and change the version number to update previously applied packages.
-
-1. On **Select security details for the provisioning package**, select **Next**.
-
-1. Select **Next** to specify the output location where you want the provisioning package to go once it's built. By default, Windows ICD uses the project folder as the output location.
-
- Optionally, you can select **Browse** to change the default output location.
-
-1. Select **Next**.
-
-1. Select **Build** to start building the package. The build page displays the project information, and the progress bar indicates the build status.
-
-1. When the build completes, select **Finish**.
-
-### Apply the provisioning package to HoloLens
-
-1. Using the USB cable, connect the device to a PC. Start the device, but do not continue past the **fit** page of the initial setup experience (the first page with the blue box). On the PC, HoloLens shows up as a device in File Explorer.
-
- > [!NOTE]
- > If the HoloLens device is running Windows 10, version 1607 or earlier, open File Explorer by briefly pressing and releasing the **Volume Down** and **Power** buttons simultaneously on the device.
-
-1. In File Explorer, drag and drop the provisioning package (.ppkg) onto the device storage.
-
-1. While HoloLens is still on the **fit** page, briefly press and release the **Volume Down** and **Power** buttons simultaneously again.
-
-1. HoloLens asks you if you trust the package and would like to apply it. Confirm that you trust the package.
-
-1. You will see whether the package was applied successfully or not. If it was not applied successfully, you can fix your package and try again. If successful, proceed with device setup.
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens2-basic-usage.md b/devices/hololens/hololens2-basic-usage.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 59426de18e..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens2-basic-usage.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,192 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Getting around HoloLens 2
-description: A guide to using HoloLens 2 with your hands
-ms.assetid: 5f791a5c-bdb2-4c5d-bf46-4a198de68f21
-ms.date: 9/17/2019
-keywords: hololens
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: scooley
-ms.author: scooley
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: high
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# Getting around HoloLens 2
-
-Ready to explore the world of holograms?
-
-This guide provides an intro to:
-
-- Interacting with mixed reality
-- Using your hands and voice for interacting with holograms on HoloLens 2
-- Navigating Windows 10 on HoloLens (Windows Holographic)
-
-## Discover mixed reality
-
-On HoloLens, holograms blend the digital world with your physical environment to look and sound like they're part of your world. Even when holograms are all around you, you can always see your surroundings, move freely, and interact with people and objects. We call this experience "mixed reality".
-
-The holographic frame positions your holograms where your eyes are most sensitive to detail and the see-through lenses leave your peripheral vision clear. With spatial sound, you can pinpoint a hologram by listening, even if it’s behind you. And, because HoloLens understands your physical environment, you can place holograms on and around real objects such as tables and walls.
-
-Getting around HoloLens is a lot like using your smart phone. You can use your hands to touch and manipulate holographic windows, menus, and buttons.
-
-Once you know these basic interactions, getting around on HoloLens will be a snap.
-
-> [!TIP]
-> If you have a HoloLens near you right now, the **Tips** app provides literal hands-on tutorials for hand interactions on HoloLens.
-> Use the start gesture to go to **Start** or say "Go to Start" and select **Tips**.
-
-## The hand-tracking frame
-
-HoloLens has sensors that can see a few feet to either side of you. When you use your hands, you'll need to keep them inside that frame, or HoloLens won't see them. However, the frame moves with you as you move around.
-
-
-
-## Touch holograms near you
-
-When a hologram is near you, bring your hand close to it and a white ring should appear on the tip of your index finger. This is the **touch cursor** which helps you touch and interact with holograms with precision. To **select** something, simply **tap** it with the touch cursor. **Scroll** content by **swiping** on the surface of the content with your finger, just like you're using a touch screen.
-
-To **grab** a hologram near you, pinch your **thumb** and **index finger** together on the hologram and hold. To let go, release your fingers. Use this **grab gesture** to move, resize, and rotate 3D objects and app windows in mixed reality home.
-
-To bring up a **context menu**, like the ones you'll find on an app tile in the Start menu, **tap and hold** like you do on a touch screen.
-
-## Use hand ray for holograms out of reach
-
-> [!VIDEO https://www.microsoft.com/videoplayer/embed/RE3ZOum]
-
-When there are no holograms near your hands, the **touch cursor** will hide automatically and **hand rays** will appear from the palm of your hands. Hand rays allow you to interact with holograms from a distance.
-
-> [!TIP]
-> If you find hand rays distracting, you can hide them by saying “Hide hand rays”. To make them reappear, say "Show hand rays."
-
-### Select using air tap
-
-To select something using **hand ray**, follow these steps:
-
-1. Use a hand ray from your palm to target the item. You don't need to raise your entire arm, you can keep your elbow low and comfortable.
-1. Point your index finger straight up toward the ceiling.
-1. To perform the **air tap** gesture, pinch your thumb and index finger together and then quickly release them.
-
- 
-
-### Grab using air tap and hold
-
-> [!VIDEO https://www.microsoft.com/videoplayer/embed/RE3Wxnh]
-
-To grab a hologram or scroll app window content using **hand ray**, start with an **air tap**, but keep your fingers together instead of releasing them.
-
-Use **air tap and hold** to perform the following actions with hand ray:
-
-- **Scroll**. To scroll app window content, air tap and hold on the content and then move your hand ray up and down or side to side.
-- **Grab**. To grab an app window or hologram, target the app title bar or hologram with your hand ray and then air tap and hold.
-- **Open context menus**. To open context menus, air tap and hold with your hand ray.
-
-## Start gesture
-
-> [!VIDEO https://www.microsoft.com/videoplayer/embed/RE3Wxng]
-
-The Start gesture opens the **Start menu**. To perform the Start gesture, hold out your hand with your palm facing you. You’ll see a **Start icon** appear over your inner wrist. Tap this icon using your other hand. The Start menu will open **where you’re looking**.
-
-> [!TIP]
->
-> - You can use the Start gesture as long as your hands are inside the hand-tracking frame. You do not need to be looking down at the Start icon. Keep your elbow low and comfortable, and look in the direction where you want the Start menu to open.
-> - If the Start menu didn't open at the position you want, simply move your head around to reposition it.
-> - If you have trouble reading the smaller text on the Start menu, step closer to it after it opens.
-> - If your hand is slightly off to the side of the frame, you may still be able to view the Start menu by tapping your inner wrist, even if you don't see the icon.
-
-
-
-To **close** the Start menu, do the Start gesture when the Start menu is open. You can also look at the Start menu and say "Close".
-
-### One-handed Start gesture
-
-> [!IMPORTANT]
-> For the one-handed Start gesture to work:
->
-> 1. You must update to the November 2019 update (build 18363.1039) or later.
-> 1. Your eyes must be calibrated on the device so that eye tracking functions correctly. If you do not see orbiting dots around the Start icon when you look at it, your eyes are not [calibrated](https://docs.microsoft.com/hololens/hololens-calibration#calibrating-your-hololens-2) on the device.
-
-You can also perform the Start gesture with only one hand. To do this, hold out your hand with your palm facing you and look at the **Start icon** on your inner wrist. **While keeping your eye on the icon**, pinch your thumb and index finger together.
-
-
-
-## Start menu, mixed reality home, and apps
-
-Ready to put all these hand interactions to the test?!
-
-You'll find your installed apps in the [Start menu](holographic-home.md) and you can find additional apps for HoloLens in the [Microsoft Store](holographic-store-apps.md).
-
-Just as Windows PC always starts its experience at the desktop, HoloLens always starts in **mixed reality home** when turned on. Using the Start menu, you can open and place app windows, as well as app launchers and 3D content in mixed reality home. Their placements in your physical space will be remembered by HoloLens.
-
-Open the **Start menu**, then select the **Settings** app tile. An app window will open in front of you.
-
-Settings is an example of a HoloLens app that uses a 2D **app window**. It's very similar to a Windows application on PC.
-
-Now you can open the **Start menu** again and select the **Tips** app tile. A 3D **app launcher** for the app will appear in front of you. To open the app, you need to select the **play** button on the launcher.
-
-Tips is an example of an **immersive app**. An immersive app takes you away from mixed reality home when it runs and becomes the only app you see. To exit, you need to bring up the Start menu and select the **mixed reality home** button at the bottom.
-
-[Go here to learn more](holographic-home.md) about Start menu and mixed reality home, including info on how to use and manage apps on HoloLens 2.
-
-## Move, resize, and rotate holograms
-
-In mixed reality home you can move, resize, and rotate app windows and 3D objects using your hands, hand ray and voice commands.
-
-### Moving holograms
-
-Move a hologram or app by following these steps:
-
-1. Grab the hologram by pinching your index finger and thumb on the hologram or face your hand down and then close your fist over it. Grab a 3D hologram anywhere inside its blue bounding box. For an app window, grab its title bar.
-1. Without letting go, move your hand to position the hologram. When moving an app window this way, the app window automatically turns to face you as it moves, making it easier to use at its new position.
-1. Release your fingers to place it.
-
-### Resizing holograms
-
-> [!VIDEO https://www.microsoft.com/videoplayer/embed/RE3ZYIb]
-
-Grab and use the **resize handles** that appear on the corners of 3D holograms and app windows to resize them.
-
-For an app window, when resized this way the window content correspondingly increases in size and becomes easier to read.
-
-If you want to resize an app window so that **more content** appears in the window, use the resize handles located on the sides and bottom edges of the app window.
-
-There are two ways to resize a hologram that's further away from you. You can either grab two corners of the hologram, or use the resize controls.
-
-### Rotating holograms
-
-For 3D holograms, grab and use the rotate handles that appear on the vertical edges of the bounding box.
-
-For app windows, moving an app window will cause it to automatically rotate and face you.
-
-You can also grab a 3D hologram or app window with **both hands** (or hand ray) at once and then:
-
-- Move your hands closer together or further apart to resize the hologram.
-- Move your hands closer and further away from your body to rotate the hologram.
-
-### Follow me, stop following
-
-Holograms and app windows stay where you placed them in the world. That's not always convenient if you need to move around and you want an application to stay visible. To ask an app to start or stop following you, select **Follow me** in the top right corner of the app window (next to the **Close** button). An app window that is following you will also follow you into, an out of, an immersive app.
-
-## Use HoloLens with your voice
-
-You can use your voice to do most of the same things you do with hands on HoloLens, like taking a quick photo or opening an app.
-
-| To do this | Say this |
-| - | - |
-| Open the Start menu | "Go to Start" |
-| Select | Say "select" to bring up the gaze cursor. Then, turn your head to position the cursor on the thing you want to select, and say “select” again. |
-| See available speech commands | "What can I say?" |
-
- [See more voice commands and ways to use speech with HoloLens](hololens-cortana.md)
-
-## Next steps
-
-Congratulations! You're ready to use HoloLens 2!
-
-Now you can configure your HoloLens 2 to meet your specific needs. Other things you may want to try include:
-
-- [Connecting bluetooth devices like a mouse and keyboard](hololens-connect-devices.md)
-- [Installing apps from the store](holographic-store-apps.md)
-- [Sharing your HoloLens with other people](hololens-multiple-users.md)
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens2-fit-comfort-faq.md b/devices/hololens/hololens2-fit-comfort-faq.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e97e03f502..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens2-fit-comfort-faq.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
----
-title: HoloLens 2 fit and comfort FAQ
-description: Answers to frequently asked questions about how to fit your HoloLens 2.
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: Teresa-Motiv
-ms.author: v-tea
-ms.topic: article
-audience: ItPro
-ms.localizationpriority: high
-ms.date: 11/07/2019
-ms.reviewer: jarrettr
-manager: jarrettr
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# HoloLens 2 fit and comfort frequently asked questions
-
-Here are some tips on how to stay comfortable and have the best experience using your HoloLens.
-
-For step-by-step instructions and a video about putting on and adjusting your device, see [Get your HoloLens 2 ready to use](hololens2-setup.md).
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> The fit and comfort tips in this topic are meant only as general guidance—they don't replace any laws or regulations, or your good judgment when using HoloLens. Stay safe, and have fun!
-
-Here are some tips on how to stay comfortable and have the best experience using your HoloLens.
-
-## I'm experiencing discomfort when I use my device. What should I do?
-
-If you experience discomfort, take a break until you feel better. Try sitting in a well-lit room and relaxing for a bit. The next time your use your HoloLens, try using it for a shorter period of time at first.
-
-For more information, see [Health and safety on HoloLens](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=746661).
-
-## I can't see the whole holographic frame, or my holograms are cut off
-
-To see the top edge of the holographic frame, move the device so it sits higher on your head, or angle the headband up slightly in front. To see the bottom edge, move the device to sit lower on your head, or angle the headband down slightly in front. If the left or right edge of the view frame isn't visible, make sure the HoloLens visor is centered on your forehead.
-
-## I need to look up or down to see holograms
-
-Try adjusting the position of your device visor so the holographic frame matches your natural gaze. Here's how:
-
-- **If you need to look up to see holograms**. First, shift the back of the headband a bit higher on your head. Then use one hand to hold the headband in place and the other to gently rotate the visor so you have a good view of the holographic frame.
-- **If you need to look down to see holograms**. First, shift the back of the headband a bit lower on your head. Then place your thumbs under the device arms and your index fingers on top of the headband, and gently squeeze with your thumbs to rotate the visor so you have a good view of the holographic frame.
-
-## Hologram image color or brightness does not look right
-
-For HoloLens 2, take the following steps to ensure the highest visual quality of holograms presented in displays:
-
-- **Increase brightness of the display.** Holograms look best when the display is at its brightest level.
-- **Bring visor closer to your eyes.** Swing the visor down to the closest position to your eyes.
-- **Shift visor down.** Try moving the brow pad on your forehead down, which will result in the visor moving down closer to your nose.
-- **Run eye calibration.** The display uses your IPD and eye gaze to optimize images on the display. If you don't run eye calibration, the image quality may be made worse.
-
-## The device slides down when I'm using it, or I need to make the headband too tight to keep it secure
-
-The overhead strap can help keep your HoloLens secure on your head, particularly if you're moving around a lot. The strap may also let you loosen the headband a bit. [Learn how to use it](hololens2-setup.md#adjust-fit).
-
-You can also experiment with the positioning of the headband—depending on your head size and shape, you may need to slide it up or down to reposition it on your forehead.
-
-## How can I adjust HoloLens to fit with my glasses?
-
-To accommodate eyewear, you can tilt the visor.
-
-## My arm gets tired when I use gestures. What can I do?
-
-When using gestures, there's no need to extend your arm out far from your body. Keep it closer to your side, where it's more comfortable and will get less tired. You can also use hand rays to interact with holograms without raising your arms [Learn more about gestures and hand rays](hololens2-basic-usage.md#the-hand-tracking-frame).
-
-And be sure to try out [voice commands](hololens-cortana.md).
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens2-hardware.md b/devices/hololens/hololens2-hardware.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ca62dbf852..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens2-hardware.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,162 +0,0 @@
----
-title: HoloLens 2 hardware
-description: An outline of the components that make up Microsoft HoloLens 2, the latest evolution of Microsoft's fully untethered holographic computer running Windows 10.
-ms.assetid: 651d0430-bfbc-4685-a4fd-db7c33ce9325
-ms.date: 9/17/2019
-keywords: hololens
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: scooley
-ms.author: scooley
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: high
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# HoloLens 2 hardware
-
-
-
-Microsoft HoloLens 2 is an untethered holographic computer. It refines the holographic computing journey started by HoloLens (1st gen) to provide a more comfortable and immersive experience paired with more options for collaborating in mixed reality.
-
-## HoloLens components
-
-- **Visor**. Contains the HoloLens sensors and displays. You can rotate the visor up while wearing the HoloLens.
-- **Headband**. To put the HoloLens on, use the adjustment wheel to expand the headband. With the HoloLens in place, tighten the adjustment wheel by turning to the right, until the headband is comfortable.
-- **Brightness buttons**. When wearing the HoloLens, the brightness buttons are on the left side of the device.
-- **Volume buttons**. When wearing the HoloLens, the volume buttons are on the right side of the device.
-
-## In the box
-
-- **Brow pad**. You can remove and replace the brow pad, as needed.
-- **Overhead strap**. When you're wearing the HoloLens while moving around, use the overhead strap to help keep the device in place. When wearing the HoloLens for extended periods, the overhead strap may make the device more comfortable to wear.
-- **USB-C cable**. Use the USB-C cable to connect your HoloLens to the power supply for charging, or to connect your HoloLens to your computer.
-- **Power supply**. Plugs into a power outlet.
-- **Microfiber cloth**. Use to clean your HoloLens visor.
-
-### Power Supply details
-
-The power supply and the USB cable that come with the device are the best supported mechanism for charging. The power supply is an 18W charger. It's supplies 9V at 2A.
-
-Charging rate and speed may vary depending on the environment in which the device is running.
-
-In order to maintain/advance Internal Battery Charge Percentage while the device is on, it must be connected minimum to a 15W charger.
-
-## Device specifications
-
-### Display
-
-| | |
-| - | - |
-| Optics | See-through holographic lenses (waveguides) |
-| Holographic resolution | 2k 3:2 light engines |
-| Holographic density | >2.5k radiants (light points per radian) |
-| Eye-based rendering | Display optimization for 3D eye position |
-
-### Sensors
-
-| | |
-| - | - |
-| Head tracking | 4 visible light cameras |
-| Eye tracking | 2 Infrared (IR) cameras |
-| Depth | 1-MP Time-of-Flight depth sensor |
-| Inertial measurement unit (IMU) | Accelerometer, gyroscope, magnetometer |
-| Camera | 8-MP stills, 1080p30 video |
-
-### Audio and speech
-
-| | |
-| - | - |
-| Microphone array | 5 channels |
-| Speakers | Built-in spatial sound |
-
-### Compute and connectivity
-
-| | |
-| - | - |
-| System on chip | Qualcomm Snapdragon 850 Compute Platform [details](https://www.qualcomm.com/products/snapdragon-850-mobile-compute-platform) |
-| Holographic processing unit | Second-generation custom-built holographic processing unit |
-| Memory | 4-GB LPDDR4x system DRAM |
-| Storage | 64-GB UFS 2.1 |
-| WiFi | 802.11ac 2x2 |
-| Bluetooth | 5.0 |
-| USB | USB Type-C |
-
-### Power
-
-| | |
-| - | - |
-| Battery Life | 2-3 hours of active use. Up to 2 weeks of standby time. |
-| Battery technology | [Lithium batteries](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=43388) |
-| Charging behavior | Fully functional when charging |
-| Cooling type | Passively cooled (no fans) |
-| Power draw | In order to maintain/advance Internal Battery Charge Percentage while the device is on, it must be connected minimum to a 15W charger. |
-
-### Fit
-
-| | |
-| - | - |
-| Sizing | Single size with adjustable band. Fits over eyeglasses |
-| Weight | 566 grams |
-
-## Device capabilities
-
-### Human understanding
-
-| | |
-| - | - |
-| Hand tracking | Two-handed fully articulated model, direct manipulation |
-| Eye tracking | Real-time tracking |
-| Voice | Command and control on-device; Cortana natural language with internet connectivity |
-
-### Environment understanding
-
-| | |
-| - | - |
-| Six Degrees of Freedom (6DoF) tracking | World-scale positional tracking |
-| Spatial mapping | Real-time environment mesh |
-| Mixed reality capture | Mixed hologram and physical environment photos and videos |
-
-## Pre-installed software
-
-- Windows Holographic Operating System
-- Microsoft Edge
-- Dynamics 365 Remote Assist
-- Dynamics 365 Layout
-- Dynamics 365 Guides
-- 3D Viewer
-- OneDrive for Business
-- HoloLens Tips
-- Cortana
-
-## Device certifications
-
-### Safety
-
-HoloLens 2 has been tested and conforms to the basic impact protection requirements of ANSI Z87.1, CSA Z94.3 and EN 166.
-
-## Care and cleaning
-
-Handle your HoloLens carefully. Use the headband to lift and carry the HoloLens 2.
-
-As you would for eyeglasses or protective eye-wear, try to keep the HoloLens visor free of dust and fingerprints. When possible, avoid touching the visor. Repeated cleaning could damage the visor, so keep your device clean!
-
-Don't use any cleaners or solvents on your HoloLens, and don't submerge it in water or apply water directly to it.
-
-To clean the visor, remove any dust by using a camel or goat hair lens brush or a bulb-style lens blower. Lightly moisten the microfiber cloth with a small amount of distilled water, then use it to wipe the visor gently in a circular motion.
-
-Clean the rest of the device, including the headband and device arms, with a lint-free microfiber cloth moistened with mild soap and water. Let your HoloLens dry completely before reuse.
-
-
-
-### Replace the brow pad
-
-The brow pad is magnetically attached to the device. To detach it, pull gently away. To replace it, snap it back into place.
-
-
-
-## Next step
-
-> [!div class="nextstepaction"]
-> [Set up and start your HoloLens 2](hololens2-setup.md)
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens2-language-support.md b/devices/hololens/hololens2-language-support.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 9c56ec9d8c..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens2-language-support.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Supported languages for HoloLens 2
-description:
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: Teresa-Motiv
-ms.author: v-tea
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.date: 9/12/2019
-audience: ITPro
-ms.reviewer: jarrettr
-manager: jarrettr
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# Supported languages for HoloLens 2
-
-HoloLens 2 supports the following languages, including voice commands and dictation features, keyboard layouts, and OCR recognition within apps.
-
-- Chinese Simplified (China)
-- English (Australia)
-- English (Canada)
-- English (Great Britain)
-- English (United States)
-- French (Canada)
-- French (France)
-- German (Germany)
-- Italian (Italy)
-- Japanese (Japan)
-- Spanish (Spain)
-
-HoloLens 2 is also available in the following languages. However, this support does not include speech commands or dictation features.
-
-- Chinese Traditional (Taiwan and Hong Kong)
-- Dutch (Netherlands)
-- Korean (Korea)
-
-## Changing language or keyboard
-
-The setup process configures your HoloLens for a region and language. You can change this configuration by using the **Time & language** section of **Settings**.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Your speech and dictation language depends on the Windows display language.
-
-## To change the Windows display language
-
-1. Go to the **Start** menu, and then select **Settings** > **Time and language** > **Language**.
-2. Select **Windows display language**, and then select a language.
-
-If the supported language you’re looking for is not in the menu, follow these steps:
-
-1. Under **Preferred languages** select **Add a language**.
-2. Search for and add the language.
-3. Select the **Windows display language** menu again and choose the language you added.
-
-The Windows display language affects the following settings for Windows and for apps that support localization:
-
-- The user interface text language.
-- The speech language.
-- The default layout of the on-screen keyboard.
-
-## To change the keyboard layout
-
-To add or remove a keyboard layout, open the **Start** menu and then select **Settings** > **Time & language** > **Keyboard**.
-
-If your HoloLens has more than one keyboard layout, use the **Layout** key to switch between them. The **Layout** key is in the lower right corner of the on-screen keyboard.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> The on-screen keyboard can use Input Method Editor (IME) to enter characters in languages such as Chinese. However, HoloLens does not support external Bluetooth keyboards that use IME.
->
-> While you use IME with the on-screen keyboard, you can continue to use a Bluetooth keyboard to type in English. To switch between keyboards, press ~.
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens2-setup.md b/devices/hololens/hololens2-setup.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 79189a7cf6..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens2-setup.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,120 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Prepare a new HoloLens 2
-description: This guide walks through first time set up and hardware guide.
-keywords: hololens, lights, fit, comfort, parts
-ms.assetid: 02692dcf-aa22-4d1e-bd00-f89f51048e32
-ms.date: 9/17/2019
-keywords: hololens
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: scooley
-ms.author: scooley
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: high
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# Get your HoloLens 2 ready to use
-
-The procedures below will help you set up a HoloLens 2 for the first time.
-
-## Charge your HoloLens
-
-Connect the power supply to the charging port by using the USB-C cable (included). Plug the power supply into a power outlet. The power supply and USB-C-to-C cable that come with the device are the best way to charge your HoloLens 2. The charger supplies 18W of power (9V at 2A).
-
-Charging rate and speed may vary depending on the environment in which the device is running.
-
-- When the device is charging, the battery indicator lights up to indicate the current level of charge. The last light will fade in and out to indicate active charging.
-- When your HoloLens is on, the battery indicator displays the battery level in increments.
-- When only one of the five lights is on, the battery level is below 20 percent.
-- If the battery level is critically low and you try to turn on the device, one light will blink briefly, then go out.
-
-## Adjust fit
-
-Place the HoloLens 2 on your head. If you wear eyeglasses, leave them on. The brow pad should sit comfortably on your forehead and the back band should sit in the middle-back of your head.
-
-If necessary, extend the headband by turning the adjustment wheel, and then loosen the overhead strap.
-
-
-
-### Attach and detach the overhead strap
-
-The overhead strap isn't required, but it can make wearing HoloLens 2 more comfortable during long periods of use.
-
-To detach the front of the overhead strap, unhook the strap and slide it through the retractable loop on the brow pad. To reattach it, pull out the loop and slide the strap back through.
-
-To detach the back of the overhead strap, press the button below each connection tab and pull gently. To reattach it, push the connection tabs back into the slots until they click.
-
-
-
-## Turn on the HoloLens 2
-
-To turn on your HoloLens 2, press the Power button. The LED lights below the Power button display the battery level.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> To power on HoloLens 2 for the very first time, after unboxing, press and hold the power button for at least 4 seconds to turn it on. Next time you power on HoloLens 2, it’ll start after a short power button press.
-
-### Power button actions for different power transitions
-
-| To do this | Perform this action | The HoloLens 2 will do this |
-| - | - | - |
-| To turn on | Single button press. | All five lights turn on, then change to indicate the battery level. After four seconds, a sound plays. |
-| To sleep | Single button press. | All five lights turn on, then fade off one at a time. After the lights turn off, a sound plays and the screen displays "Goodbye." |
-| To wake from sleep | Single button press. | All five lights turn on, then change to indicate the battery level. A sound immediately plays. |
-| To turn off | Press and hold for 5s. | All five lights turn on, then fade off one at a time. After the lights turn off, a sound plays and the screen displays "Goodbye." |
-| To force the Hololens to restart if it is unresponsive | Press and hold for 10s. | All five lights turn on, then fade off one at a time. After the lights turn off. |
-
-## HoloLens behavior reference
-
-Not sure what the indicator lights on your HoloLens mean? Want to know how HoloLens should behave while charging? Here's some help!
-
-### Charging behavior
-
-| State of the Device | Action | HoloLens 2 will do this |
-| - | - | - |
-| OFF | Plug in USB Cable | Device transitions to ON with indicator lights showing battery level and device starts charging.
-| ON | Remove USB Cable | Device stops charging
-| ON | Plug in USB Cable | Device starts charging
-| SLEEP | Plug in USB Cable | Device starts charging
-| SLEEP | Remove USB Cable | Device stops charging
-| ON with USB cable plugged in | Turn off Device | Device transitions to ON with indicator lights showing battery level and device will start charging |
-
-### Lights that indicate the battery level
-
-| Number of lights | Battery level |
-| - | - |
-| Four solid lights, one light fading in and out | Between 100% and 81% (fully charged) |
-| Three solid lights, one light fading in and out | Between 80% and 61% |
-| Two solid lights, one light fading in and out | Between 60% and 41% |
-| One solid light, one light fading in and out | Between 40% and 21% |
-| One light fading in and out | Between 20% and 5% or lower (critical battery) |
-
-### Sleep Behavior
-
-| State of the Device | Action | HoloLens 2 will do this |
-| - | - | - |
-| ON | Single Power button press | Device transitions to SLEEP and turns off all indicator lights |
-| ON | No movement for 3 minutes | Device transition to SLEEP and turns off all indicator lights |
-| SLEEP | Single Power button Press | Device transitions to ON and turns on indicator lights |
-
-### Lights to indicate problems
-
-| When you do this | The lights do this | It means this |
-| - | - | - |
-| You press the Power button. | One light flashes five times, then turns off. | The HoloLens battery is critically low. Charge your HoloLens. |
-| You press the Power button. | All five lights flash five times, then turn off. | HoloLens cannot start correctly and is in an error state. [Reinstall the operating system](hololens-recovery.md) to recover your device. |
-| You press the Power button. | The 1st, 3rd, and 5th lights flash together continually. | HoloLens may have a hardware failure. To be sure, [reinstall the OS](hololens-recovery.md#hololens-2), and try again. After reinstalling the OS, if the light-flash pattern persists, contact [support](https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/supportforbusiness/productselection?sapid=3ec35c62-022f-466b-3a1e-dbbb7b9a55fb). |
-
-## Safety and comfort
-
-### Use HoloLens in safe surroundings
-
-Use your HoloLens in a safe space, free of obstructions and tripping hazards. Don’t use it when you need a clear field of view or can't commit your full attention, such as while you’re operating a vehicle or doing other potentially hazardous activities.
-
-### Stay comfortable
-
-Keep your first few sessions with HoloLens brief and be sure to take breaks. If you experience discomfort, stop and rest until you feel better. This might include temporary feelings of nausea, motion sickness, dizziness, disorientation, headache, fatigue, eye strain, or dry eyes.
-
-> [!div class="nextstepaction"]
-> [Start and configure your HoloLens 2](hololens2-start.md)
diff --git a/devices/hololens/hololens2-start.md b/devices/hololens/hololens2-start.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 78d3697f03..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/hololens2-start.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,93 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Set up your HoloLens 2
-description: This guide walks through first time set up. You'll need a Wi-Fi network and either a Microsoft (MSA) or Azure Active Directory (AAD) account.
-ms.assetid: 507305f4-e85a-47c5-a055-a3400ae8a10e
-ms.date: 9/17/2019
-keywords: hololens
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: scooley
-ms.author: scooley
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: high
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens 2
----
-
-# Set up your HoloLens 2
-
-The first time you turn on your HoloLens, you'll be guided through setting up your device, signing in with a user account, and calibrating the HoloLens to your eyes. This section walks through the HoloLens 2 initial setup experience.
-
-In the next section, you'll learn how to work with HoloLens and interact with holograms. To skip ahead to that article, see [Get started with HoloLens 2](hololens2-basic-usage.md).
-
-## Before you start
-
-Before you get started, make sure you have the following available:
-
-**A network connection**. You'll need to connect your HoloLens to a network to set it up. With HoloLens 2, you can connect with Wi-Fi or by using ethernet (you'll need a USB-C-to-Ethernet adapter). The first time you connect, you'll need an open or password-protected network that doesn't require navigating to a website or using certificates to connect. [Learn more about the websites that HoloLens uses](hololens-offline.md).
-
-**A Microsoft account**. You'll also need to sign in to HoloLens with a Microsoft account (or with your work account, if your organization owns the device). If you don't have a Microsoft account, go to [account.microsoft.com](https://account.microsoft.com) and set one up for free.
-
-**A safe, well-lit space with no tripping hazards**. [Health and safety info](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=746661).
-
-**The optional comfort accessories** that came with your HoloLens, to help you get the most comfortable fit. [More on fit and comfort](hololens2-setup.md#adjust-fit).
-
-## Set up Windows
-
-The first time you start your HoloLens 2, your first task is to set up Windows Holographic. When you start your HoloLens, you will hear music and see a Windows logo.
-
-
-
-HoloLens 2 will walk you through the following steps:
-
-1. Select your language.
- 
-
-1. Select your region.
- 
-
-1. Calibrate HoloLens to your eyes. If you choose to skip calibration, you'll be prompted the next time you log in.
-
- To calibrate, you'll look at a set of targets (referred to as gems). It's fine if you blink or close your eyes during calibration, but try not to stare at other objects in the room or physical space. HoloLens uses this process to learn about your eye position so that it can better render your holographic world. After calibration, holograms will appear correctly even as the visor shifts on your head.
-
- Calibration information is stored locally on the device and is not associated with any account information. For more information, see [Calibration data and security](hololens-calibration.md#calibration-data-and-security).
-
- 
-
-1. Connect to the internet (select Wi-Fi or your ethernet connection).
- HoloLens sets your time zone automatically based on information obtained from the Wi-Fi network. After setup finishes, you can change the time zone by using the Settings app.
-
- 
-> [!NOTE]
-> If you progress past the Wi-Fi step and later need to switch to a different network while still in setup, you can press the **Volume Down** and **Power** buttons simultaneously to return to this step if you are running an OS version from October 2019 or later. For earlier versions, you may need to [reset the device](hololens-recovery.md) or restart it in a location where the Wi-Fi network is not available to prevent it from automatically connecting.
->
-> Also note that during HoloLens Setup, there is a credential timeout of two minutes. The username/password needs to be entered within two minutes otherwise the username field will be automatically cleared.
-
-1. Sign in to your user account. You'll choose between **My work or school owns it** and **I own it**.
- - When you choose **My work or school owns it**, you sign in with an Azure AD account. If your organization uses Azure AD Premium and has configured automatic MDM enrollment, HoloLens automatically enrolls in MDM. If your organization does not use Azure AD Premium, automatic MDM enrollment isn't available. In that case, you need to [manually enroll HoloLens in device management](hololens-enroll-mdm.md#enroll-through-settings-app).
- 1. Enter your organizational account information.
- 1. Accept the privacy statement and the end user license agreement.
- 1. Sign in by using your Azure AD credentials. This may redirect to your organization's sign-in page.
- 1. Continue setting up the device.
- - When you choose **I own it**, you sign in with a Microsoft account. After setup is complete, you can [manually enroll HoloLens in device management](hololens-enroll-mdm.md#enroll-through-settings-app).
- 1. Enter your Microsoft account information.
- 2. Enter your password. If your Microsoft account requires [two-step verification (2FA)](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/microsoft_blog/2013/04/17/microsoft-account-gets-more-secure/), complete the verification process.
-
- 
-
-1. Select whether to enable speech on HoloLens 2, and whether to send diagnostic telemetry.
- 
-
-1. Select your telemetry level. If you can, please enable Full telemetry. This information really helps the HoloLens engineering team.
- 
-
-1. Learn how to use the start gesture on HoloLens 2.
- 
- 
-
-Congratulations! Setup is complete and you're ready to use HoloLens!
-
-## Next steps
-
-> [!div class="nextstepaction"]
-> [Get started with HoloLens 2](hololens2-basic-usage.md)
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/01-magic-moment.png b/devices/hololens/images/01-magic-moment.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 0d55443b55..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/01-magic-moment.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/02-00-magic-moment.png b/devices/hololens/images/02-00-magic-moment.png
deleted file mode 100644
index ae76fb70ea..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/02-00-magic-moment.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/02-01-magic-moment-bird-intro.png b/devices/hololens/images/02-01-magic-moment-bird-intro.png
deleted file mode 100644
index ae76fb70ea..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/02-01-magic-moment-bird-intro.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/02-02-bird-palm.png b/devices/hololens/images/02-02-bird-palm.png
deleted file mode 100644
index fda1f3dcdd..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/02-02-bird-palm.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/02-03-bird-button.png b/devices/hololens/images/02-03-bird-button.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 749a1ab6fc..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/02-03-bird-button.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/04-language.png b/devices/hololens/images/04-language.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 1106322c29..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/04-language.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/05-region.png b/devices/hololens/images/05-region.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f350298813..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/05-region.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/06-et-corners.png b/devices/hololens/images/06-et-corners.png
deleted file mode 100644
index af48472f60..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/06-et-corners.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/07-et-adjust-for-your-eyes.png b/devices/hololens/images/07-et-adjust-for-your-eyes.png
deleted file mode 100644
index e127ba9a9d..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/07-et-adjust-for-your-eyes.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/07-et-hold-head-still.png b/devices/hololens/images/07-et-hold-head-still.png
deleted file mode 100644
index a4952767bf..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/07-et-hold-head-still.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/08-et-gems.png b/devices/hololens/images/08-et-gems.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 8eaba193f0..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/08-et-gems.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/09-et-adjusting.png b/devices/hololens/images/09-et-adjusting.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 038dcab588..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/09-et-adjusting.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/10-et-failure1.png b/devices/hololens/images/10-et-failure1.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 249abff7f6..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/10-et-failure1.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/10-et-failure2.png b/devices/hololens/images/10-et-failure2.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f4b2f34334..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/10-et-failure2.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/10-et-success.png b/devices/hololens/images/10-et-success.png
deleted file mode 100644
index c74c89056e..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/10-et-success.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/11-network.png b/devices/hololens/images/11-network.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 1fc3884721..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/11-network.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/12-agreement.png b/devices/hololens/images/12-agreement.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 96695c1888..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/12-agreement.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/13-device-owner.png b/devices/hololens/images/13-device-owner.png
deleted file mode 100644
index fe66cd5386..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/13-device-owner.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/14-sign-in-msa.png b/devices/hololens/images/14-sign-in-msa.png
deleted file mode 100644
index c0e3aa4d9e..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/14-sign-in-msa.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/15-iris-enrollment.png b/devices/hololens/images/15-iris-enrollment.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 6bda392726..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/15-iris-enrollment.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/16-iris-hold-head-still.png b/devices/hololens/images/16-iris-hold-head-still.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 09205015c0..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/16-iris-hold-head-still.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/17-iris-dots.png b/devices/hololens/images/17-iris-dots.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 2ac6119b89..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/17-iris-dots.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/18-iris-enrollment-done.png b/devices/hololens/images/18-iris-enrollment-done.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 6405ab8581..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/18-iris-enrollment-done.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/19-pin-create.png b/devices/hololens/images/19-pin-create.png
deleted file mode 100644
index fd0c1ee5e8..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/19-pin-create.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/20-pin-setup.png b/devices/hololens/images/20-pin-setup.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 752fc54e5c..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/20-pin-setup.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/201608-enterprisemanagement-400px.png b/devices/hololens/images/201608-enterprisemanagement-400px.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 11c204f0f6..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/201608-enterprisemanagement-400px.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/201608-kioskmode-400px.png b/devices/hololens/images/201608-kioskmode-400px.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 8d21453b8f..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/201608-kioskmode-400px.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/20190322-DevicePortal.png b/devices/hololens/images/20190322-DevicePortal.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 7fdd2e34b3..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/20190322-DevicePortal.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/22-do-more-with-voice.png b/devices/hololens/images/22-do-more-with-voice.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 2bf874c80d..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/22-do-more-with-voice.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/23-do-more-with-voice-learn.png b/devices/hololens/images/23-do-more-with-voice-learn.png
deleted file mode 100644
index b805befc49..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/23-do-more-with-voice-learn.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/24-telemetry.png b/devices/hololens/images/24-telemetry.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 004d1d5dff..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/24-telemetry.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/25-telemetry-info.png b/devices/hololens/images/25-telemetry-info.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 4c4075a68f..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/25-telemetry-info.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/26-01-startmenu-learning.png b/devices/hololens/images/26-01-startmenu-learning.png
deleted file mode 100644
index e24da1b854..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/26-01-startmenu-learning.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/26-02-startmenu-learning.png b/devices/hololens/images/26-02-startmenu-learning.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 1a81a79178..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/26-02-startmenu-learning.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/26-03-startmenu-learning.png b/devices/hololens/images/26-03-startmenu-learning.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 55d59d18f5..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/26-03-startmenu-learning.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/26-04-startmenu-learning.png b/devices/hololens/images/26-04-startmenu-learning.png
deleted file mode 100644
index b7d62f5650..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/26-04-startmenu-learning.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/B-Calibration-4-Gem.png b/devices/hololens/images/B-Calibration-4-Gem.png
deleted file mode 100644
index fbfd95cb32..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/B-Calibration-4-Gem.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/C-Settings.Calibration.png b/devices/hololens/images/C-Settings.Calibration.png
deleted file mode 100644
index d27f3d754c..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/C-Settings.Calibration.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/D-CheckThisOut-Prompt.png b/devices/hololens/images/D-CheckThisOut-Prompt.png
deleted file mode 100644
index a81a75a153..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/D-CheckThisOut-Prompt.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/FitGuideSetep5.png b/devices/hololens/images/FitGuideSetep5.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 9529fe69b0..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/FitGuideSetep5.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/FitGuideStep1.png b/devices/hololens/images/FitGuideStep1.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 846ef9fc0b..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/FitGuideStep1.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/FitGuideStep2.png b/devices/hololens/images/FitGuideStep2.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 6ac59ff43b..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/FitGuideStep2.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/FitGuideStep3.png b/devices/hololens/images/FitGuideStep3.png
deleted file mode 100644
index e255da8f15..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/FitGuideStep3.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/FitGuideStep4.png b/devices/hololens/images/FitGuideStep4.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 77e99f3d55..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/FitGuideStep4.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/HoloLens2_AppBarFollowing.gif b/devices/hololens/images/HoloLens2_AppBarFollowing.gif
deleted file mode 100644
index 84d7f2589e..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/HoloLens2_AppBarFollowing.gif and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/HoloLens2_BoundingBox.gif b/devices/hololens/images/HoloLens2_BoundingBox.gif
deleted file mode 100644
index 451bcae997..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/HoloLens2_BoundingBox.gif and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/HoloLens2_BoundingBox_Rotate.gif b/devices/hololens/images/HoloLens2_BoundingBox_Rotate.gif
deleted file mode 100644
index 43a764a954..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/HoloLens2_BoundingBox_Rotate.gif and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/HoloLens2_Loader.gif b/devices/hololens/images/HoloLens2_Loader.gif
deleted file mode 100644
index 81d8232494..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/HoloLens2_Loader.gif and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/HoloLens2_Proximity.gif b/devices/hololens/images/HoloLens2_Proximity.gif
deleted file mode 100644
index f39f326ea7..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/HoloLens2_Proximity.gif and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/about-encryption.png b/devices/hololens/images/about-encryption.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 348e493503..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/about-encryption.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/account-management-details.png b/devices/hololens/images/account-management-details.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 20816830a4..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/account-management-details.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/account-management.PNG b/devices/hololens/images/account-management.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index da53cb74b8..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/account-management.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/add-certificates-details.PNG b/devices/hololens/images/add-certificates-details.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 966a826a46..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/add-certificates-details.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/add-certificates.PNG b/devices/hololens/images/add-certificates.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 7a16dffd26..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/add-certificates.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/addnewfeedback-500px.jpg b/devices/hololens/images/addnewfeedback-500px.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 8948dd2dae..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/addnewfeedback-500px.jpg and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/adk-install.png b/devices/hololens/images/adk-install.png
deleted file mode 100644
index c087d3bae5..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/adk-install.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/apps.png b/devices/hololens/images/apps.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 4e00aa96fc..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/apps.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/backicon.png b/devices/hololens/images/backicon.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 3007e448b1..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/backicon.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/calibration-livecube-200px.png b/devices/hololens/images/calibration-livecube-200px.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 44b0142e40..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/calibration-livecube-200px.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/calibration-settings-500px.jpg b/devices/hololens/images/calibration-settings-500px.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 0419f0307f..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/calibration-settings-500px.jpg and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/calibration-shell.png b/devices/hololens/images/calibration-shell.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f833452cc5..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/calibration-shell.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/check_blu.png b/devices/hololens/images/check_blu.png
deleted file mode 100644
index d5c703760f..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/check_blu.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/check_grn.png b/devices/hololens/images/check_grn.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f9f04cd6bd..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/check_grn.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/checklistbox.gif b/devices/hololens/images/checklistbox.gif
deleted file mode 100644
index cbcf4a4f11..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/checklistbox.gif and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/checklistdone.png b/devices/hololens/images/checklistdone.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 7e53f74d0e..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/checklistdone.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/checkmark.png b/devices/hololens/images/checkmark.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f9f04cd6bd..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/checkmark.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/cortana-on-hololens.png b/devices/hololens/images/cortana-on-hololens.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 6205d3d2fd..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/cortana-on-hololens.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/crossmark.png b/devices/hololens/images/crossmark.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 69432ff71c..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/crossmark.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/developer-setup-details.png b/devices/hololens/images/developer-setup-details.png
deleted file mode 100644
index d445bf5759..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/developer-setup-details.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/developer-setup.png b/devices/hololens/images/developer-setup.png
deleted file mode 100644
index a7e49873b0..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/developer-setup.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/device-encryption.PNG b/devices/hololens/images/device-encryption.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 651429dfe0..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/device-encryption.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/deviceportal-appmanager.jpg b/devices/hololens/images/deviceportal-appmanager.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 68576fcfc7..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/deviceportal-appmanager.jpg and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/displays-400px.jpg b/devices/hololens/images/displays-400px.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 0ed5558bdc..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/displays-400px.jpg and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/doneicon.png b/devices/hololens/images/doneicon.png
deleted file mode 100644
index d80389f35b..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/doneicon.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/encrypt-assign.png b/devices/hololens/images/encrypt-assign.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f5b0c85a3c..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/encrypt-assign.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/encrypt-create-profile.png b/devices/hololens/images/encrypt-create-profile.png
deleted file mode 100644
index b0f06ef40f..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/encrypt-create-profile.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/encrypt-custom.png b/devices/hololens/images/encrypt-custom.png
deleted file mode 100644
index b3635e9ee4..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/encrypt-custom.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/encrypt-oma-uri.png b/devices/hololens/images/encrypt-oma-uri.png
deleted file mode 100644
index e2754b7db4..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/encrypt-oma-uri.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/feedback1-600px.png b/devices/hololens/images/feedback1-600px.png
deleted file mode 100644
index ba7cec37da..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/feedback1-600px.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/feedback2-600px.png b/devices/hololens/images/feedback2-600px.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 89d44622a6..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/feedback2-600px.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/feedback3-600px.png b/devices/hololens/images/feedback3-600px.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 0431687b55..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/feedback3-600px.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/feedback4-600px.png b/devices/hololens/images/feedback4-600px.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 35594f2ca8..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/feedback4-600px.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/feedback5-600px.png b/devices/hololens/images/feedback5-600px.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 967987d6ae..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/feedback5-600px.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/feedback6-600px.png b/devices/hololens/images/feedback6-600px.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 431a4da9da..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/feedback6-600px.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/finish-details.png b/devices/hololens/images/finish-details.png
deleted file mode 100644
index ff3f53e5c8..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/finish-details.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/finish.PNG b/devices/hololens/images/finish.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 975caba764..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/finish.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/five.png b/devices/hololens/images/five.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 961f0e15b7..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/five.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/four.png b/devices/hololens/images/four.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 0fef213b37..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/four.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-air-tap.gif b/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-air-tap.gif
deleted file mode 100644
index 9139718cdb..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-air-tap.gif and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-button-sleep.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-button-sleep.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 29f75da34f..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-button-sleep.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-button-turn-off.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-button-turn-off.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 8e3f4a2c72..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-button-turn-off.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-button-turn-on.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-button-turn-on.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 25ce3fcc58..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-button-turn-on.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-button-wake.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-button-wake.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 135b1e3a04..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-button-wake.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-gesture-frame.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-gesture-frame.png
deleted file mode 100644
index cc1a9f667d..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-gesture-frame.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-screenshot-with-callouts.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-screenshot-with-callouts.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 769310e749..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-screenshot-with-callouts.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-start-alternative.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-start-alternative.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 763cd8600e..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-start-alternative.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-start-gesture.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-start-gesture.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 109c6235bb..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-2-start-gesture.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-air-tap.gif b/devices/hololens/images/hololens-air-tap.gif
deleted file mode 100644
index 9139718cdb..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-air-tap.gif and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-bloom.gif b/devices/hololens/images/hololens-bloom.gif
deleted file mode 100644
index db7d8378e5..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-bloom.gif and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-box-contents.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens-box-contents.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 51b4b5e163..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-box-contents.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-buttons.jpg b/devices/hololens/images/hololens-buttons.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 868487b0bf..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-buttons.jpg and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-charging.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens-charging.png
deleted file mode 100644
index a5dd4d7dcd..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-charging.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-cleaning-visor.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens-cleaning-visor.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 68f990d43b..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-cleaning-visor.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-clicker-500px.jpg b/devices/hololens/images/hololens-clicker-500px.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 4dd7d954f4..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-clicker-500px.jpg and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-frame.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens-frame.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 5789f1b8c8..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-frame.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-gaze.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens-gaze.png
deleted file mode 100644
index d21ffef0b2..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-gaze.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-lights.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens-lights.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f3a19b84a3..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-lights.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-power.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens-power.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 80c3e7c215..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-power.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-vector-white.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens-vector-white.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 583a307449..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens-vector-white.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens.png
deleted file mode 100644
index ce54ae4281..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-exploded-large.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-exploded-large.png
deleted file mode 100644
index fc639a0f62..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-exploded-large.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-exploded-medium.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-exploded-medium.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 3e1fbea7de..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-exploded-medium.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-fit.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-fit.png
deleted file mode 100644
index dacaf4cbd7..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-fit.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-headstrap.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-headstrap.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 805637214b..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-headstrap.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-lift-visor.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-lift-visor.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 4d83f2c730..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-lift-visor.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-remove-browpad.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-remove-browpad.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 619f14e4fd..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-remove-browpad.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-side-render-medium.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-side-render-medium.png
deleted file mode 100644
index d4650c05e2..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-side-render-medium.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-side-render-small.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-side-render-small.png
deleted file mode 100644
index a1a612e05a..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-side-render-small.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-side-render-xs.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-side-render-xs.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 08d5f966cd..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-side-render-xs.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-side-render.png b/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-side-render.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 143fb8fc50..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/hololens2-side-render.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/icd-create-options-1703.PNG b/devices/hololens/images/icd-create-options-1703.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 007e740683..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/icd-create-options-1703.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/icd-export-menu.png b/devices/hololens/images/icd-export-menu.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 20bd5258eb..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/icd-export-menu.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/icd-install.PNG b/devices/hololens/images/icd-install.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index a0c80683ff..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/icd-install.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/icd-settings.png b/devices/hololens/images/icd-settings.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 111b7f38c7..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/icd-settings.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/icd-simple-edit.png b/devices/hololens/images/icd-simple-edit.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 421159ac17..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/icd-simple-edit.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/icd1.PNG b/devices/hololens/images/icd1.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 25f905d4fe..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/icd1.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/intune1.PNG b/devices/hololens/images/intune1.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index c87c58d36a..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/intune1.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/intune2.PNG b/devices/hololens/images/intune2.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 61ca386c3c..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/intune2.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/intune3.png b/devices/hololens/images/intune3.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 39a812a1a7..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/intune3.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/ipd-finger-alignment-300px.jpg b/devices/hololens/images/ipd-finger-alignment-300px.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 7a4c929867..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/ipd-finger-alignment-300px.jpg and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/keyboard.png b/devices/hololens/images/keyboard.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 6962567b83..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/keyboard.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/kiosk.png b/devices/hololens/images/kiosk.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 9cc771c779..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/kiosk.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/launchicon.png b/devices/hololens/images/launchicon.png
deleted file mode 100644
index d469c68a2c..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/launchicon.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/minimenu.png b/devices/hololens/images/minimenu.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 7aa0018011..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/minimenu.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/motherboard-400px.jpg b/devices/hololens/images/motherboard-400px.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 5a2a085477..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/motherboard-400px.jpg and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/multiappassignedaccesssettings.png b/devices/hololens/images/multiappassignedaccesssettings.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 86e2e0a451..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/multiappassignedaccesssettings.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/one.png b/devices/hololens/images/one.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 7766e7d470..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/one.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/provision-hololens-devices.png b/devices/hololens/images/provision-hololens-devices.png
deleted file mode 100644
index c5ece7102f..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/provision-hololens-devices.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/recover-clicker-1.png b/devices/hololens/images/recover-clicker-1.png
deleted file mode 100644
index ad54e6ee09..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/recover-clicker-1.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/recover-clicker-2.png b/devices/hololens/images/recover-clicker-2.png
deleted file mode 100644
index d7a9d6fd0d..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/recover-clicker-2.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/searchfeedback-500px.jpg b/devices/hololens/images/searchfeedback-500px.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 952e29a6ec..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/searchfeedback-500px.jpg and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/see-through-400px.jpg b/devices/hololens/images/see-through-400px.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index d9fba1c9e0..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/see-through-400px.jpg and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/sensor-bar-400px.jpg b/devices/hololens/images/sensor-bar-400px.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index bf0b8f7f21..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/sensor-bar-400px.jpg and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/set-up-device-details.PNG b/devices/hololens/images/set-up-device-details.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 7325e06e86..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/set-up-device-details.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/set-up-device.PNG b/devices/hololens/images/set-up-device.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 577117a26a..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/set-up-device.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/set-up-network-details-desktop.PNG b/devices/hololens/images/set-up-network-details-desktop.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 83911ccbd0..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/set-up-network-details-desktop.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/set-up-network.PNG b/devices/hololens/images/set-up-network.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 19fd3ff7bb..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/set-up-network.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/seven.png b/devices/hololens/images/seven.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 285a92df0b..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/seven.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/six.png b/devices/hololens/images/six.png
deleted file mode 100644
index e8906332ec..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/six.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/startmenu.jpg b/devices/hololens/images/startmenu.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index b685db51ee..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/startmenu.jpg and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/three.png b/devices/hololens/images/three.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 887fa270d7..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/three.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/two.png b/devices/hololens/images/two.png
deleted file mode 100644
index b8c2d52eaf..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/two.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/upvotefeedback-500px.jpg b/devices/hololens/images/upvotefeedback-500px.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index f1eda89efa..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/upvotefeedback-500px.jpg and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/use-hololens-clicker-1.png b/devices/hololens/images/use-hololens-clicker-1.png
deleted file mode 100644
index ad54e6ee09..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/use-hololens-clicker-1.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/use-hololens-clicker-2.png b/devices/hololens/images/use-hololens-clicker-2.png
deleted file mode 100644
index d7a9d6fd0d..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/use-hololens-clicker-2.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/uwp-dependencies.PNG b/devices/hololens/images/uwp-dependencies.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 4e2563169f..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/uwp-dependencies.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/uwp-license.PNG b/devices/hololens/images/uwp-license.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index ccb5cf7cf4..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/uwp-license.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/vs2015-remotedeployment.jpg b/devices/hololens/images/vs2015-remotedeployment.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index a7d6b43dc3..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/vs2015-remotedeployment.jpg and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/wifi-hololens-600px.jpg b/devices/hololens/images/wifi-hololens-600px.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index eb6930a29f..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/wifi-hololens-600px.jpg and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/wifi-hololens-hwdetails.jpg b/devices/hololens/images/wifi-hololens-hwdetails.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index e4b45047cf..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/wifi-hololens-hwdetails.jpg and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/windows-device-portal-home-page.png b/devices/hololens/images/windows-device-portal-home-page.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 55e4b0eaad..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/windows-device-portal-home-page.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/wizard-steps.png b/devices/hololens/images/wizard-steps.png
deleted file mode 100644
index d97bae9a05..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/wizard-steps.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/images/wsfb-private.png b/devices/hololens/images/wsfb-private.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 35ce83829b..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/hololens/images/wsfb-private.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/hololens/index.md b/devices/hololens/index.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 98835e4ce5..0000000000
--- a/devices/hololens/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft HoloLens
-description: Landing page Microsoft HoloLens.
-ms.prod: hololens
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.assetid: 0947f5b3-8f0f-42f0-aa27-6d2cad51d040
-author: scooley
-ms.author: scooley
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.date: 10/14/2019
-audience: ITPro
-appliesto:
-- HoloLens 1
-- HoloLens 2
-
----
-
-# Microsoft HoloLens
-
-
-
-
Microsoft HoloLens is the first fully self-contained holographic computer running Windows 10.
-
-
Now, with the introduction of HoloLens 2, every device provides commercial ready management enhanced by the reliability, security, and scalability of cloud and AI services from Microsoft.
-
-## Guides in this section
-
-| Guide | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-| [Get started with HoloLens 2](hololens2-setup.md) | Set up HoloLens 2 for the first time. |
-| [Get started with HoloLens (1st gen)](hololens1-setup.md) | Set up HoloLens (1st gen) for the first time. |
-| [Get started with HoloLens in a commercial or classroom environment](hololens-requirements.md) | Plan for a multi-device HoloLens deployment and create a strategy for ongoing device management.This section is tailored to IT professionals managing devices with existing device management infrastructure. |
-
-## Quick reference by topic
-
-| Topic | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-| [What's new in HoloLens](hololens-whats-new.md) | Discover new features in the latest updates via HoloLens release notes. |
-| [Install and manage applications on HoloLens](hololens-install-apps.md) | Install and manage important applications on HoloLens at scale. |
-| [HoloLens update management](hololens-updates.md) | Use mobile device management (MDM) policies to configure settings for updates. |
-| [HoloLens user management](hololens-multiple-users.md) | Multiple users can shared a HoloLens device by using their Azure Active Directory accounts. |
-| [HoloLens application access management](hololens-kiosk.md) | Manage application access for different user groups. |
-| [Recover and troubleshoot HoloLens issues](https://support.microsoft.com/products/hololens) | Learn how to gather logs from HoloLens, recover a misbehaving device, or reset HoloLens when necessary. |
-| [Get support](https://support.microsoft.com/products/hololens) | Connect with Microsoft support resources for HoloLens in enterprise. |
-
-## Related resources
-
-* [Documentation for Holographic app development](https://developer.microsoft.com/windows/mixed-reality/development)
-* [HoloLens release notes](https://docs.microsoft.com/hololens/hololens-release-notes)
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/General-Data-Privacy-Regulation-and-Surface-Hub.md b/devices/surface-hub/General-Data-Privacy-Regulation-and-Surface-Hub.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e499178078..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/General-Data-Privacy-Regulation-and-Surface-Hub.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
----
-title: General Data Privacy Regulation and Surface Hub
-description: Informs users who are subject to EU data protection laws of their options regarding how to delete or restrict diagnostic data produced by Surface Hub.
-ms.assetid: 087713CF-631D-477B-9CC6-EFF939DE0186
-keywords: GDPR
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: Teresa-MOTIV
-ms.author: v-tea
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# General Data Privacy Regulation and Surface Hub
-
-In May 2018, a European privacy law, the General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR), took effect. The GDPR imposes new rules on companies, government agencies, non-profits, and other organizations that offer goods and services to people in the European Union (EU), or that collect and analyze data tied to EU residents.
-
-Surface Hub customers concerned about privacy under the new GDPR regulations can manage their device privacy with the following options that are provided by Microsoft:
-
-* **Option 1:** Surface Hub devices in regions enforcing GDPR regulations will install KB4284830 when publicly available to automatically reduce diagnostic data emission to basic. Customers opting to provide a higher level of diagnostic data can use the Surface Hub Settings application or Mobile Device Management to override the default basic setting.
-
-* **Option 2:** Surface Hub customers who want to remove any existing diagnostic data can download the **Surface Hub Delete Diagnostic Data** application from the Microsoft Store. This app will allow customers to request deletion of associated diagnostic data directly from their Surface Hub device.
-
-Microsoft has extensive expertise in protecting data, championing privacy, and complying with complex regulations, and currently complies with both EU-U.S. Privacy Shield and EU Model Clauses. We believe that the GDPR is an important step forward for clarifying and enabling individual privacy rights. We want to help you focus on your core business while efficiently preparing for the GDPR.
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/TOC.md b/devices/surface-hub/TOC.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 59d2d76a0d..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/TOC.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,130 +0,0 @@
-# [Microsoft Surface Hub](index.md)
-
-# Surface Hub 2S
-
-## Overview
-### [What's new in Surface Hub 2S for IT admins](surface-hub-2s-whats-new.md)
-### [Surface Hub 2S tech specs](surface-hub-2s-techspecs.md)
-### [Operating system essentials (Surface Hub)](differences-between-surface-hub-and-windows-10-enterprise.md)
-### [Adjust Surface Hub 2S brightness, volume, and input](surface-hub-2s-onscreen-display.md)
-### [Use Microsoft Whiteboard on a Surface Hub](https://support.office.com/article/use-microsoft-whiteboard-on-a-surface-hub-5c594985-129d-43f9-ace5-7dee96f7621d)
-
-## Plan
-### [Surface Hub 2S Site Readiness Guide](surface-hub-2s-site-readiness-guide.md)
-#### [Site planning for Surface Hub 2S](surface-hub-2s-site-planning.md)
-#### [Surface Hub 2S quick start](surface-hub-2s-quick-start.md)
-#### [Install and mount Surface Hub 2S](surface-hub-2s-install-mount.md)
-#### [Customize wall mount of Surface Hub 2S](surface-hub-2s-custom-install.md)
-#### [Setup worksheet](setup-worksheet-surface-hub.md)
-#### [Surface Hub 2S ports and keypad overview](surface-hub-2s-port-keypad-overview.md)
-#### [Connect devices to Surface Hub 2S](surface-hub-2s-connect.md)
-### [Prepare your environment for Microsoft Surface Hub 2S](surface-hub-2s-prepare-environment.md)
-### [Configure Easy Authentication for Surface Hub 2S](surface-hub-2s-phone-authenticate.md)
-
-## Deploy
-### [Surface Hub 2S adoption and training](surface-hub-2s-adoption-kit.md)
-### [Surface Hub 2S adoption videos](surface-hub-2s-adoption-videos.md)
-
-### [First time setup for Surface Hub 2S](surface-hub-2s-setup.md)
-### [Connect devices to Surface Hub 2S](surface-hub-2s-connect.md)
-### [Surface Hub 2S deployment checklist](surface-hub-2s-deploy-checklist.md)
-### [Create Surface Hub 2S device account](surface-hub-2s-account.md)
-### [Create provisioning packages for Surface Hub 2S](surface-hub-2s-deploy.md)
-### [Deploy apps to Surface Hub 2S using Intune](surface-hub-2s-deploy-apps-intune.md)
-### [Create Surface Hub 2S on-premises accounts with PowerShell](surface-hub-2s-onprem-powershell.md)
-
-## Manage
-### [Manage Surface Hub 2S with Microsoft Intune](surface-hub-2s-manage-intune.md)
-### [Local management for Surface Hub 2S settings](local-management-surface-hub-settings.md)
-### [Manage device account password rotation](surface-hub-2s-manage-passwords.md)
-### [Manage Windows updates](manage-windows-updates-for-surface-hub.md)
-### [Miracast on existing wireless network or LAN](miracast-over-infrastructure.md)
-### [Save your BitLocker key](save-bitlocker-key-surface-hub.md)
-### [Microsoft Exchange properties](exchange-properties-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md)
-### [Applying ActiveSync policies to device accounts](apply-activesync-policies-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md)
-
-## Secure
-### [Secure and manage Surface Hub 2S with SEMM and UEFI](surface-hub-2s-secure-with-uefi-semm.md)
-### [How Surface Hub addresses Wi-Fi Direct security issues](surface-hub-wifi-direct.md)
-
-## Troubleshoot
-### [Recover and reset Surface Hub 2S](surface-hub-2s-recover-reset.md)
-### [Troubleshoot Miracast on Surface Hub](miracast-troubleshooting.md)
-### [How to pack and ship your Surface Hub 2S for service](surface-hub-2s-pack-components.md)
-### [Change history](surface-hub-2s-change-history.md)
-
-# Surface Hub
-## Overview
-### [What's new in Windows 10, version 1703 for Surface Hub?](surfacehub-whats-new-1703.md)
-### [Operating system essentials (Surface Hub)](differences-between-surface-hub-and-windows-10-enterprise.md)
-### [Technical information for 55” Microsoft Surface Hub](surface-hub-technical-55.md)
-### [Technical information for 84” Microsoft Surface Hub](surface-hub-technical-84.md)
-### [Use Microsoft Whiteboard on a Surface Hub](https://support.office.com/article/use-microsoft-whiteboard-on-a-surface-hub-5c594985-129d-43f9-ace5-7dee96f7621d)
-
-## Plan
-### [Prepare your environment for Microsoft Surface Hub](prepare-your-environment-for-surface-hub.md)
-### [Surface Hub Site Readiness Guide](surface-hub-site-readiness-guide.md)
-### [Physically install Microsoft Surface Hub](physically-install-your-surface-hub-device.md)
-
-## Deploy
-### [Create and test a device account](create-and-test-a-device-account-surface-hub.md)
-#### [Online deployment](online-deployment-surface-hub-device-accounts.md)
-#### [On-premises deployment (single forest)](on-premises-deployment-surface-hub-device-accounts.md)
-#### [On-premises deployment (multiple forests)](on-premises-deployment-surface-hub-multi-forest.md)
-#### [Hybrid deployment](hybrid-deployment-surface-hub-device-accounts.md)
-#### [Online or hybrid deployment using Skype Hybrid Voice environment](skype-hybrid-voice.md)
-#### [Create a device account using UI](create-a-device-account-using-office-365.md)
-#### [Microsoft Exchange properties](exchange-properties-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md)
-#### [Applying ActiveSync policies to device accounts](apply-activesync-policies-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md)
-#### [Password management](password-management-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md)
-#### [Create provisioning packages](provisioning-packages-for-surface-hub.md)
-#### [Admin group management](admin-group-management-for-surface-hub.md)
-### [Set up Microsoft Surface Hub](set-up-your-surface-hub.md)
-#### [Setup worksheet](setup-worksheet-surface-hub.md)
-#### [First-run program](first-run-program-surface-hub.md)
-
-## Manage
-### [Manage Microsoft Surface Hub](manage-surface-hub.md)
-### [PowerShell for Surface Hub](appendix-a-powershell-scripts-for-surface-hub.md)
-### [Remote Surface Hub management](remote-surface-hub-management.md)
-#### [Manage settings with an MDM provider](manage-settings-with-mdm-for-surface-hub.md)
-#### [Monitor your Surface Hub](monitor-surface-hub.md)
-#### [Windows updates](manage-windows-updates-for-surface-hub.md)
-### [Manage Surface Hub settings](manage-surface-hub-settings.md)
-#### [Local management for Surface Hub settings](local-management-surface-hub-settings.md)
-#### [Accessibility](accessibility-surface-hub.md)
-#### [Change the Surface Hub device account](change-surface-hub-device-account.md)
-#### [Device reset](device-reset-surface-hub.md)
-#### [Use fully qualified domain name with Surface Hub](use-fully-qualified-domain-name-surface-hub.md)
-#### [Wireless network management](wireless-network-management-for-surface-hub.md)
-### [Implement Quality of Service on Surface Hub](surface-hub-qos.md)
-### [Install apps on your Surface Hub](install-apps-on-surface-hub.md)
-### [Configure Surface Hub Start menu](surface-hub-start-menu.md)
-### [Set up and use Microsoft Whiteboard](whiteboard-collaboration.md)
-### [End a Surface Hub meeting with End session](i-am-done-finishing-your-surface-hub-meeting.md)
-### [Connect other devices and display with Surface Hub](connect-and-display-with-surface-hub.md)
-### [Miracast on existing wireless network or LAN](miracast-over-infrastructure.md)
-### [Enable 802.1x wired authentication](enable-8021x-wired-authentication.md)
-### [Using a room control system](use-room-control-system-with-surface-hub.md)
-
-## Secure
-### [Sign in to Surface Hub with Microsoft Authenticator](surface-hub-authenticator-app.md)
-### [Save your BitLocker key](save-bitlocker-key-surface-hub.md)
-### [How Surface Hub addresses Wi-Fi Direct security issues](surface-hub-wifi-direct.md)
-
-## Troubleshoot
-### [Using the Surface Hub Recovery Tool](surface-hub-recovery-tool.md)
-### [Surface Hub SSD replacement](surface-hub-ssd-replacement.md)
-### [Top support solutions for Surface Hub](support-solutions-surface-hub.md)
-### [Troubleshoot Microsoft Surface Hub](troubleshoot-surface-hub.md)
-### [Surface Hub Update History](surface-hub-update-history.md)
-### [Known issues and additional information about Microsoft Surface Hub](known-issues-and-additional-info-about-surface-hub.md)
-### [How to use cloud recovery for BitLocker on a Surface Hub](use-cloud-recovery-for-bitlocker-on-surfacehub.md)
-### [Using the Surface Hub Hardware Diagnostic Tool to test a device account](use-surface-hub-diagnostic-test-device-account.md)
-### [Troubleshoot Miracast on Surface Hub](miracast-troubleshooting.md)
-### [Surface Hub Miracast channels 149-165 not supported in Europe, Japan, Israel](surfacehub-miracast-not-supported-europe-japan-israel.md)
-### [What to do if the Connect app in Surface Hub exits unexpectedly](connect-app-in-surface-hub-unexpectedly-exits.md)
-### [Surface Hub may install updates and restart outside maintenance hours](surface-hub-installs-updates-and-restarts-outside-maintenance-hours.md)
-### [General Data Privacy Regulation and Surface Hub](general-data-privacy-regulation-and-surface-hub.md)
-### [Useful downloads for Surface Hub administrators](surface-hub-downloads.md)
-### [Change history for Surface Hub](change-history-surface-hub.md)
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/accessibility-surface-hub.md b/devices/surface-hub/accessibility-surface-hub.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 031501c2b4..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/accessibility-surface-hub.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,68 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Accessibility (Surface Hub)
-description: Accessibility settings for the Microsoft Surface Hub can be changed by using the Settings app. You'll find them under Ease of Access. Your Surface Hub has the same accessibility options as Windows 10.
-ms.assetid: 1D44723B-1162-4DF6-99A2-8A3F24443442
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: Accessibility settings, Settings app, Ease of Access
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Accessibility (Surface Hub)
-
-Microsoft Surface Hub has the same accessibility options as Windows 10.
-
-
-## Default accessibility settings
-
-The full list of accessibility settings are available to IT admins in the **Settings** app. The default accessibility settings for Surface Hub include:
-
-| Accessibility feature | Default settings |
-| --------------------- | ----------------- |
-| Magnifier | Off |
-| High contrast | No theme selected |
-| Closed captions | Defaults selected for Font and Background and window |
-| Keyboard | **On-screen Keyboard**, **Sticky Keys**, **Toggle Keys**, and **Filter Keys** are all off. |
-| Mouse | Defaults selected for **Pointer size**, **Pointer color** and **Mouse keys**. |
-| Other options | Defaults selected for **Visual options** and **Touch feedback**. |
-
-The accessibility feature Narrator is not available in the **Settings** app. By default, Narrator is turned off. To change the default settings for Narrator, perform the following steps using a keyboard and mouse.
-
-1. Dismiss the Welcome screen.
-2. Open **Quick Actions** > **Ease of Access** from the status bar.
-
- 
-
-3. Turn Narrator on.
-4. Click **Task Switcher**.
-5. Select **Narrator Settings** from Task Switcher. You can now edit the default Narrator settings.
-
-Additionally, these accessibility features and apps are returned to default settings when users press [End session](finishing-your-surface-hub-meeting.md):
-- Narrator
-- Magnifier
-- High contrast
-- Filter keys
-- Sticky keys
-- Toggle keys
-- Mouse keys
-
-
-## Change accessibility settings during a meeting
-
-During a meeting, users can toggle accessibility features and apps in a couple ways:
-- [Keyboard shortcuts](https://support.microsoft.com/help/13813/windows-10-microsoft-surface-hub-keyboard-shortcuts)
-- **Quick Actions** > **Ease of Access** from the status bar
-
-> 
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-[Manage Microsoft Surface Hub](manage-surface-hub.md)
-
-[Microsoft Surface Hub administrator's guide](surface-hub-administrators-guide.md)
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/admin-group-management-for-surface-hub.md b/devices/surface-hub/admin-group-management-for-surface-hub.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8125113887..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/admin-group-management-for-surface-hub.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,86 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Admin group management (Surface Hub)
-description: Every Microsoft Surface Hub can be configured individually by opening the Settings app on the device.
-ms.assetid: FA67209E-B355-4333-B903-482C4A3BDCCE
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: admin group management, Settings app, configure Surface Hub
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Admin group management (Surface Hub)
-
-
-Every Surface Hub can be configured locally using the Settings app on the device. To prevent unauthorized users from changing settings, the Settings app requires admin credentials to open the app.
-
-
-## Admin Group Management
-
-You can set up administrator accounts for the device in one of three ways:
-
-- Create a local admin account
-- Domain join the device to Active Directory (AD)
-- Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) join the device
-
-
-### Create a local admin account
-
-To create a local admin, [choose to use a local admin during first run](first-run-program-surface-hub.md#use-a-local-admin). This will create a single local admin account on the Surface Hub with the username and password of your choice. Use these credentials to open the Settings app.
-
-Note that the local admin account information is not backed by any directory service. We recommend you only choose a local admin if the device does not have access to Active Directory (AD) or Azure Active Directory (Azure AD). If you decide to change the local admin’s password, you can do so in Settings. However, if you want to change from using the local admin account to using a group from your domain or Azure AD tenant, then you’ll need to [reset the device](device-reset-surface-hub.md) and go through the first-time program again.
-
-### Domain join the device to Active Directory (AD)
-
-You can domain join the Surface Hub to your AD domain to allow users from a specified security group to configure settings. During first run, choose to use [Active Directory Domain Services](first-run-program-surface-hub.md#use-active-directory-domain-services). You'll need to provide credentials that are capable of joining the domain of your choice, and the name of an existing security group. Anyone who is a member of that security group can enter their credentials and unlock Settings.
-
-#### What happens when you domain join your Surface Hub?
-Surface Hubs use domain join to:
-- Grant admin rights to members of a specified security group in AD.
-- Backup the device's BitLocker recovery key by storing it under the computer object in AD. See [Save your BitLocker key](save-bitlocker-key-surface-hub.md) for details.
-- Synchronize the system clock with the domain controller for encrypted communication
-
-Surface Hub does not support applying group policies or certificates from the domain controller.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> If your Surface Hub loses trust with the domain (for example, if you remove the Surface Hub from the domain after it is domain joined), you won't be able to authenticate into the device and open up Settings. If you decide to remove the trust relationship of the Surface Hub with your domain, [reset the device](device-reset-surface-hub.md) first.
-
-
-### Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) join the device
-
-You can Azure AD join the Surface Hub to allow IT pros from your Azure AD tenant to configure settings. During first run, choose to use [Microsoft Azure Active Directory](first-run-program-surface-hub.md#use-microsoft-azure-active-directory). You will need to provide credentials that are capable of joining the Azure AD tenant of your choice. After you successfully Azure AD join, the appropriate people will be granted admin rights on the device.
-
-By default, all **global administrators** will be given admin rights on an Azure AD joined Surface Hub. With **Azure AD Premium** or **Enterprise Mobility Suite (EMS)**, you can add additional administrators:
-1. In the [Azure classic portal](https://manage.windowsazure.com/), click **Active Directory**, and then click the name of your organization's directory.
-2. On the **Configure** page, under **Devices** > **Additional administrators on Azure AD joined devices**, click **Selected**.
-3. Click **Add**, and select the users you want to add as administrators on your Surface Hub and other Azure AD joined devices.
-4. When you have finished, click the checkmark button to save your change.
-
-#### What happens when you Azure AD join your Surface Hub?
-Surface Hubs use Azure AD join to:
-- Grant admin rights to the appropriate users in your Azure AD tenant.
-- Backup the device's BitLocker recovery key by storing it under the account that was used to Azure AD join the device. See [Save your BitLocker key](save-bitlocker-key-surface-hub.md) for details.
-
-### Automatic enrollment via Azure Active Directory join
-
-Surface Hub now supports the ability to automatically enroll in Intune by joining the device to Azure Active Directory.
-
-For more information, see [Enable Windows 10 automatic enrollment](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/windows-enroll#enable-windows-10-automatic-enrollment).
-
-### Which should I choose?
-
-If your organization is using AD or Azure AD, we recommend you either domain join or Azure AD join, primarily for security reasons. People will be able to authenticate and unlock Settings with their own credentials, and can be moved in or out of the security groups associated with your domain.
-
-| Option | Requirements | Which credentials can be used to access the Settings app? |
-|---------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------|-------|
-| Create a local admin account | None | The user name and password specified during first run |
-| Domain join to Active Directory (AD) | Your organization uses AD | Any AD user from a specific security group in your domain |
-| Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) join the device | Your organization uses Azure AD Basic | Global administrators only |
-| | Your organization uses Azure AD Premium or Enterprise Mobility Suite (EMS) | Global administrators and additional administrators |
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/appendix-a-powershell-scripts-for-surface-hub.md b/devices/surface-hub/appendix-a-powershell-scripts-for-surface-hub.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8196982606..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/appendix-a-powershell-scripts-for-surface-hub.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1692 +0,0 @@
----
-title: PowerShell for Surface Hub (Surface Hub)
-description: PowerShell scripts to help set up and manage your Microsoft Surface Hub.
-ms.assetid: 3EF48F63-8E4C-4D74-ACD5-461F1C653784
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: PowerShell, set up Surface Hub, manage Surface Hub
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 01/10/2018
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# PowerShell for Surface Hub
-
-
-PowerShell scripts to help set up and manage your Microsoft Surface Hub.
-
-- [PowerShell scripts for Surface Hub admins](#scripts-for-admins)
- - [Create an on-premises account](#create-on-premises-ps-scripts)
- - [Create a device account using Office 365](#create-os356-ps-scripts)
- - [Account verification script](#acct-verification-ps-scripts)
- - [Enable Skype for Business (EnableSfb.ps1)](#enable-sfb-ps-scripts)
-- [Useful cmdlets](#useful-cmdlets)
- - [Creating a Surface Hub-compatible Exchange ActiveSync policy](#create-compatible-as-policy)
- - [Allowing device IDs for ActiveSync](#whitelisting-device-ids-cmdlet)
- - [Auto-accepting and declining meeting requests](#auto-accept-meetings-cmdlet)
- - [Accepting external meeting requests](#accept-ext-meetings-cmdlet)
-
-
-## Prerequisites
-
-To successfully execute these PowerShell scripts, you will need to install the following prerequisites:
-
-- [Microsoft Online Services Sign-in Assistant for IT Professionals RTW](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=41950)
-- [Microsoft Azure Active Directory Module for Windows PowerShell (64-bit version)](https://www.powershellgallery.com/packages/MSOnline/1.1.183.17)
-- [Windows PowerShell Module for Skype for Business Online](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=39366)
-
-## PowerShell scripts for Surface Hub administrators
-
-
-What do the scripts do?
-
-- Create device accounts for setups using pure single-forest on-premises (Microsoft Exchange and Skype 2013 and later only) or online (Microsoft Office 365), that are configured correctly for your Surface Hub.
-- Validate existing device accounts for any setup (on-premises or online) to make sure they're compatible with Surface Hub.
-- Provide a base template for anyone wanting to create their own device account creation or validation scripts.
-
-What do you need in order to run the scripts?
-
-- Remote PowerShell access to your organization's domain or tenant, Exchange servers, and Skype for Business servers.
-- Admin credentials for your organization's domain or tenant, Exchange servers, and Skype for Business servers.
-
->[!NOTE]
->Whether you’re creating a new account or modifying an already-existing account, the validation script will verify that your device account is configured correctly. You should always run the validation script before adding a device account to Surface Hub.
-
-
-
-## Running the scripts
-
-
-The account creation scripts will:
-
-- Ask for administrator credentials
-- Create device accounts in your domain/tenant
-- Create or assign a Surface Hub-compatible ActiveSync policy to the device account(s)
-- Set various attributes for the created account(s) in Exchange and Skype for Business.
-- Assign licenses and permissions to the created account(s)
-
-These are the attributes that are set by the scripts:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Cmdlet
-
Attribute
-
Value
-
-
-
-
-
Set-Mailbox
-
RoomMailboxPassword
-
User-provided
-
-
-
-
EnableRoomMailboxAccount
-
True
-
-
-
-
Type
-
Room
-
-
-
Set-CalendarProcessing
-
AutomateProcessing
-
AutoAccept
-
-
-
-
RemovePrivateProperty
-
False
-
-
-
-
DeleteSubject
-
False
-
-
-
-
DeleteComments
-
False
-
-
-
-
AddOrganizerToSubject
-
False
-
-
-
-
AddAdditionalResponse
-
True
-
-
-
-
AdditionalResponse
-
"This is a Surface Hub room!"
-
-
-
New-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy
-
PasswordEnabled
-
False
-
-
-
-
AllowNonProvisionableDevices
-
True
-
-
-
Enable-CSMeetingRoom
-
RegistrarPool
-
User-provided
-
-
-
-
SipAddress
-
Set to the User Principal Name (UPN) of the device account
-
-
-
Set-MsolUserLicense (O365 only)
-
AddLicenses
-
User-provided
-
-
-
Set-MsolUser (O365 only)
-
PasswordNeverExpires
-
True
-
-
-
Set-AdUser (On-prem only)
-
Enabled
-
True
-
-
-
Set-AdUser (On-prem only)
-
PasswordNeverExpires
-
True
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Account creation scripts
-
-
-These scripts will create a device account for you. You can use the [Account verification script](#acct-verification-ps-scripts) to make sure they ran correctly.
-
-The account creation scripts cannot modify an already existing account, but can be used to help you understand which cmdlets need to be run to configure the existing account correctly.
-
-### Create an on-premises account
-
-Creates an account as described in [On-premises deployment](on-premises-deployment-surface-hub-device-accounts.md).
-
-```PowerShell
-# SHAccountCreateOnPrem.ps1
-
-$Error.Clear()
-$ErrorActionPreference = "Stop"
-$status = @{}
-
-# Cleans up set state such as remote powershell sessions
-function Cleanup()
-{
- if ($sessExchange)
- {
- Remove-PSSession $sessExchange
- }
- if ($sessCS)
- {
- Remove-PSSession $sessCS
- }
-}
-
-function PrintError($strMsg)
-{
- Write-Host $strMsg -foregroundcolor Red
-}
-
-function PrintSuccess($strMsg)
-{
- Write-Host $strMsg -foregroundcolor Green
-}
-
-function PrintAction($strMsg)
-{
- Write-Host $strMsg -ForegroundColor Cyan
-}
-
-
-# Cleans up and prints an error message
-function CleanupAndFail($strMsg)
-{
- if ($strMsg)
- {
- PrintError($strMsg);
- }
- Cleanup
- exit 1
-}
-
-# Exits if there is an error set and prints the given message
-function ExitIfError($strMsg)
-{
- if ($Error)
- {
- CleanupAndFail($strMsg);
- }
-}
-
-## Collect account data ##
-$credNewAccount = (Get-Credential -Message "Enter the desired UPN and password for this new account")
-$strUpn = $credNewAccount.UserName
-$strDisplayName = Read-Host "Please enter the display name you would like to use for $strUpn"
-if (!$credNewAccount -Or [System.String]::IsNullOrEmpty($strDisplayName) -Or [System.String]::IsNullOrEmpty($credNewAccount.UserName) -Or $credNewAccount.Password.Length -le 0)
-{
- CleanupAndFail "Please enter all of the requested data to continue."
- exit 1
-}
-
-
-## Sign in to remote powershell for exchange and lync online ##
-
-$credExchange = $null
-$credExchange=Get-Credential -Message "Enter credentials of an Exchange user with mailbox creation rights"
-if (!$credExchange)
-{
- CleanupAndFail("Valid credentials are required to create and prepare the account.");
-}
-$strExchangeServer = Read-Host "Please enter the FQDN of your exchange server (e.g. exch.contoso.com)"
-
-# Lync info
-$credLync = Get-Credential -Message "Enter credentials of a Skype for Business admin (or cancel if they are the same as Exchange)"
-if (!$credLync)
-{
- $credLync = $credExchange
-}
-$strLyncFQDN = Read-Host "Please enter the FQDN of your Lync server (e.g. lync.contoso.com) or enter to use [$strExchangeServer]"
-if ([System.String]::IsNullOrEmpty($strLyncFQDN))
-{
- $strLyncFQDN = $strExchangeServer
-}
-
-
-PrintAction "Connecting to remote sessions. This can occasionally take a while - please do not enter input..."
-try
-{
- $sessExchange = New-PSSession -ConfigurationName microsoft.exchange -Credential $credExchange -AllowRedirection -Authentication Kerberos -ConnectionUri "http://$strExchangeServer/powershell" -WarningAction SilentlyContinue
-}
-catch
-{
- CleanupAndFail("Failed to connect to exchange. Please check your credentials and try again. If this continues to fail, you may not have permission for remote powershell - if not, please perform the setup manually. Error message: $_")
-}
-PrintSuccess "Connected to Remote Exchange Shell"
-
-try
-{
- $sessLync = New-PSSession -Credential $credLync -ConnectionURI "https://$strLyncFQDN/OcsPowershell" -AllowRedirection -WarningAction SilentlyContinue
-}
-catch
-{
- CleanupAndFail("Failed to connect to Lync. Please check your credentials and try again. Error message: $_")
-}
-PrintSuccess "Connected to Lync Server Remote PowerShell"
-
-
-Import-PSSession $sessExchange -AllowClobber -WarningAction SilentlyContinue
-Import-PSSession $sessLync -AllowClobber -WarningAction SilentlyContinue
-
-## Create the Exchange mailbox ##
-# Note: These exchange commandlets do not always throw their errors as exceptions
-
-# Because Get-Mailbox will throw an error if the mailbox is not found
-$Error.Clear()
-PrintAction "Creating a new account..."
-try
-{
- $mailbox = $null
- $mailbox = (New-Mailbox -UserPrincipalName $credNewAccount.UserName -Alias $credNewAccount.UserName.substring(0,$credNewAccount.UserName.indexOf('@')) -room -Name $strDisplayName -RoomMailboxPassword $credNewAccount.Password -EnableRoomMailboxAccount $true)
-} catch { }
-ExitIfError "Failed to create a new mailbox on exchange.";
-$status["Mailbox Setup"] = "Successfully created a mailbox for the new account"
-
-
-$strEmail = $mailbox.WindowsEmailAddress
-PrintSuccess "The following mailbox has been created for this room: $strEmail"
-
-
-## Create or retrieve a policy that will be applied to surface hub devices ##
-# The policy disables requiring a device password so that the SurfaceHub does not need to be lockable to use Active Sync
-$strPolicy = Read-Host 'Please enter the name for a new Surface Hub ActiveSync policy that will be created and applied to this account.
-We will configure that policy to be compatible with Surface Hub devices.
-If this script has been used before, please enter the name of the existing policy.'
-
-$easpolicy = $null
-try {
- $easpolicy = Get-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy $strPolicy
-}
-catch {}
-
-if ($easpolicy)
-{
- if (!$easpolicy.PasswordEnabled -and ($easpolicy.AllowNonProvisionableDevices -eq $null -or $easpolicy.AllowNonProvisionableDevices ))
- {
- PrintSuccess "An existing policy has been found and will be applied to this account."
- }
- else
- {
- PrintError "The policy you provided is incompatible with the surface hub."
- $easpolicy = $null
- $status["Device Password Policy"] = "Failed to apply the EAS policy to the account because the policy was invalid."
- }
-}
-else
-{
- $Error.Clear()
- PrintAction "Creating policy..."
- $easpolicy = New-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy -Name $strPolicy -PasswordEnabled $false -AllowNonProvisionableDevices $true
- if ($easpolicy)
- {
- PrintSuccess "A new device policy has been created; you can use this same policy for all future Surface Hub device accounts."
- }
- else
- {
- PrintError "Could not create $strPolicy"
- }
-}
-
-if ($easpolicy)
-{
- # Convert mailbox to user type so we can apply the policy (necessary)
- # Sometimes it takes a while for this change to take affect so we have some nasty retry loops
- $Error.Clear();
- try
- {
- Set-Mailbox $credNewAccount.UserName -Type Regular
- } catch {}
- if ($Error)
- {
- $Error.Clear()
- $status["Device Password Policy"] = "Failed to apply the EAS policy to the account."
- }
- else
- {
- # Loop until resource type goes away, up to 5 times
- for ($i = 0; $i -lt 5 -And (Get-Mailbox $credNewAccount.UserName).ResourceType; $i++)
- {
- Start-Sleep -s 5
- }
- # If the mailbox is still a Room we cannot apply the policy
- if (!((Get-Mailbox $credNewAccount.UserName).ResourceType))
- {
- $Error.Clear()
- # Set policy for account
- Set-CASMailbox $credNewAccount.UserName -ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy $strPolicy
- if (!$Error)
- {
- $status["ActiveSync Policy"] = "Successfully applied $strPolicy to the account"
- }
- else
- {
- $status["ActiveSync Policy"] = "Failed to apply the EAS policy to the account."
- }
- $Error.Clear()
-
- # Convert back to room mailbox
- Set-Mailbox $credNewAccount.UserName -Type Room
- # Loop until resource type goes back to room
- for ($i = 0; ($i -lt 5) -And ((Get-Mailbox $credNewAccount.UserName).ResourceType -ne "Room"); $i++)
- {
- Start-Sleep -s 5
- }
- if ((Get-Mailbox $credNewAccount.UserName).ResourceType -ne "Room")
- {
- # A failure to convert the mailbox back to a room is unfortunate but means the mailbox is unusable.
- $status["Mailbox Setup"] = "A mailbox was created but we could not set it to a room resource type."
- }
- else
- {
- try
- {
- Set-Mailbox $credNewAccount.UserName -RoomMailboxPassword $credNewAccount.Password -EnableRoomMailboxAccount $true
- } catch { }
- if ($Error)
- {
- $status["Mailbox Setup"] = "A room mailbox was created but we could not set its password."
- }
- $Error.Clear()
- }
-
- }
- }
-}
-PrintSuccess "Account creation completed."
-
-PrintAction "Setting calendar processing rules..."
-
-$Error.Clear();
-## Prepare the calendar for automatic meeting responses ##
-try {
- Set-CalendarProcessing -Identity $credNewAccount.UserName -AutomateProcessing AutoAccept
-} catch { }
-if ($Error)
-{
- $status["Calendar Acceptance"] = "Failed to configure the account to automatically accept/decline meeting requests"
-}
-else
-{
- $status["Calendar Acceptance"] = "Successfully configured the account to automatically accept/decline meeting requests"
-}
-
-
-$Error.Clear()
-try {
- Set-CalendarProcessing -Identity $credNewAccount.UserName -RemovePrivateProperty $false -AddOrganizerToSubject $false -AddAdditionalResponse $true -DeleteSubject $false -DeleteComments $false -AdditionalResponse "This is a Surface Hub room!"
-} catch { }
-if ($Error)
-{
- $status["Calendar Response Configuration"] = "Failed to configure the account's response properties"
-}
-else
-{
- $status["Calendar Response Configuration"] = "Successfully configured the account's response properties"
-}
-
-$Error.Clear()
-## Configure the Account to not expire ##
-PrintAction "Configuring password not to expire..."
-Start-Sleep -s 20
-try
-{
- Set-AdUser $mailbox.UserPrincipalName -PasswordNeverExpires $true -Enabled $true
-}
-catch
-{
-
-}
-
-if ($Error)
-{
- $status["Password Expiration Policy"] = "Failed to set the password to never expire"
-}
-else
-{
- $status["Password Expiration Policy"] = "Successfully set the password to never expire"
-}
-
-PrintSuccess "Completed Exchange configuration"
-
-## Setup Skype for Business. This is somewhat optional and if it fails we SfbEnable can be used later ##
-PrintAction "Configuring account for Skype for Business."
-
-# Getting registrar pool
-$strRegPool = $strLyncFQDN
-$Error.Clear()
-$strRegPoolEntry = Read-Host "Enter a Skype for Business Registrar Pool, or leave blank to use [$strRegPool]"
-if (![System.String]::IsNullOrEmpty($strRegPoolEntry))
-{
- $strRegPool = $strRegPoolEntry
-}
-
-# Try to SfB-enable the account. Note that it may not work right away as the account needs to propagate to active directory
-PrintAction "Enabling Skype for Business..."
-Start-Sleep -s 10
-$Error.Clear()
-try {
- Enable-CsMeetingRoom -Identity $credNewAccount.UserName -RegistrarPool $strRegPool -SipAddressType EmailAddress
-}
-catch { }
-
-if ($Error)
-{
- $status["Skype for Business Account Setup"] = "Failed to setup the Skype for Business meeting room - you can run EnableSfb.ps1 to try again."
- $Error.Clear();
-}
-else
-{
- $status["Skype for Business Account Setup"] = "Successfully enabled account as a Skype for Business meeting room"
-}
-
-Write-Host
-
-## Cleanup and print results ##
-Cleanup
-$strDisplay = $mailbox.DisplayName
-$strUsr = $credNewAccount.UserName
-PrintAction "Summary for creation of $strUsr ($strDisplay)"
-if ($status.Count -gt 0)
-{
- ForEach($k in $status.Keys)
- {
- $v = $status[$k]
- $color = "yellow"
- if ($v[0] -eq "S") { $color = "green" }
- elseif ($v[0] -eq "F")
- {
- $color = "red"
- $v += " Go to https://aka.ms/shubtshoot"
- }
-
- Write-Host -NoNewline $k -ForegroundColor $color
- Write-Host -NoNewline ": "
- Write-Host $v
- }
-}
-else
-{
- PrintError "The account could not be created"
-}
-```
-
-### Create a device account using Office 365
-
-Creates an account as described in [Create a device account using Office 365](create-a-device-account-using-office-365.md)
-
-```PowerShell
-# SHAccountCreateO365.ps1
-
-$Error.Clear()
-$ErrorActionPreference = "Stop"
-$status = @{}
-
-# Cleans up set state such as remote powershell sessions
-function Cleanup()
-{
- if ($sessExchange)
- {
- Remove-PSSession $sessExchange
- }
- if ($sessCS)
- {
- Remove-PSSession $sessCS
- }
-}
-
-function PrintError($strMsg)
-{
- Write-Host $strMsg -foregroundcolor Red
-}
-
-function PrintSuccess($strMsg)
-{
- Write-Host $strMsg -foregroundcolor Green
-}
-
-function PrintAction($strMsg)
-{
- Write-Host $strMsg -ForegroundColor Cyan
-}
-
-
-# Cleans up and prints an error message
-function CleanupAndFail($strMsg)
-{
- if ($strMsg)
- {
- PrintError($strMsg);
- }
- Cleanup
- exit 1
-}
-
-# Exits if there is an error set and prints the given message
-function ExitIfError($strMsg)
-{
- if ($Error)
- {
- CleanupAndFail($strMsg);
- }
-}
-
-
-## Check dependencies ##
-try {
- Import-Module SkypeOnlineConnector
- Import-Module MSOnline
-}
-catch
-{
- PrintError "Some dependencies are missing"
- PrintError "Please install the Windows PowerShell Module for Lync Online. For more information go to http://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=39366"
- PrintError "Please install the Azure Active Directory module for PowerShell from https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?linkid=236297"
- CleanupAndFail
-}
-
-
-
-## Collect account data ##
-$credNewAccount = (Get-Credential -Message "Enter the desired UPN and password for this new account")
-$strUpn = $credNewAccount.UserName
-$strDisplayName = Read-Host "Please enter the display name you would like to use for $strUpn"
-if (!$credNewAccount -Or [System.String]::IsNullOrEmpty($strDisplayName) -Or [System.String]::IsNullOrEmpty($credNewAccount.UserName) -Or $credNewAccount.Password.Length -le 0)
-{
- CleanupAndFail "Please enter all of the requested data to continue."
- exit 1
-}
-
-
-## Sign in to remote powershell for exchange and lync online ##
-$credAdmin = $null
-$credAdmin=Get-Credential -Message "Enter credentials of an Exchange and Skype for Business admin"
-if (!$credadmin)
-{
- CleanupAndFail "Valid admin credentials are required to create and prepare the account."
-}
-PrintAction "Connecting to remote sessions. This can occasionally take a while - please do not enter input..."
-try
-{
- $sessExchange = New-PSSession -ConfigurationName microsoft.exchange -Credential $credAdmin -AllowRedirection -Authentication basic -ConnectionUri "https://outlook.office365.com/powershell-liveid/" -WarningAction SilentlyContinue
-}
-catch
-{
- CleanupAndFail "Failed to connect to exchange. Please check your credentials and try again. Error message: $_"
-}
-
-try
-{
- $sessCS = New-CsOnlineSession -Credential $credAdmin
-}
-catch
-{
- CleanupAndFail "Failed to connect to Skype for Business Online Datacenter. Please check your credentials and try again. Error message: $_"
-}
-
-try
-{
- Connect-MsolService -Credential $credAdmin
-}
-catch
-{
- CleanupAndFail "Failed to connect to Azure Active Directory. Please check your credentials and try again. Error message: $_"
-}
-
-Import-PSSession $sessExchange -AllowClobber -WarningAction SilentlyContinue
-Import-PSSession $sessCS -AllowClobber -WarningAction SilentlyContinue
-
-## Create the Exchange mailbox ##
-# Note: These exchange commandlets do not always throw their errors as exceptions
-
-# Because Get-Mailbox will throw an error if the mailbox is not found
-$Error.Clear()
-PrintAction "Creating a new account..."
-try
-{
- $mailbox = $null
- $mailbox = (New-Mailbox -MicrosoftOnlineServicesID $credNewAccount.UserName -room -Name $strDisplayName -RoomMailboxPassword $credNewAccount.Password -EnableRoomMailboxAccount $true)
-} catch { }
-ExitIfError "Failed to create a new mailbox on exchange.";
-$status["Mailbox Setup"] = "Successfully created a mailbox for the new account"
-
-
-$strEmail = $mailbox.WindowsEmailAddress
-PrintSuccess "The following mailbox has been created for this room: $strEmail"
-
-
-## Create or retrieve a policy that will be applied to surface hub devices ##
-# The policy disables requiring a device password so that the SurfaceHub does not need to be lockable to use Active Sync
-$strPolicy = Read-Host 'Please enter the name for a new Surface Hub ActiveSync policy that will be created and applied to this account.
-We will configure that policy to be compatible with Surface Hub devices.
-If this script has been used before, please enter the name of the existing policy.'
-
-$easpolicy = $null
-try {
- $easpolicy = Get-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy $strPolicy
-}
-catch {}
-
-if ($easpolicy)
-{
- if (!$easpolicy.PasswordEnabled -and ($easpolicy.AllowNonProvisionableDevices -eq $null -or $easpolicy.AllowNonProvisionableDevices ))
- {
- PrintSuccess "An existing policy has been found and will be applied to this account."
- }
- else
- {
- PrintError "The policy you provided is incompatible with the surface hub."
- $easpolicy = $null
- $status["ActiveSync Policy"] = "Failed to apply the EAS policy to the account because the policy was invalid."
- }
-}
-else
-{
- $Error.Clear()
- PrintAction "Creating policy..."
- $easpolicy = New-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy -Name $strPolicy -PasswordEnabled $false -AllowNonProvisionableDevices $true
- if ($easpolicy)
- {
- PrintSuccess "A new device policy has been created; you can use this same policy for all future Surface Hub device accounts."
- }
- else
- {
- PrintError "Could not create $strPolicy"
- }
-}
-
-if ($easpolicy)
-{
- # Convert mailbox to user type so we can apply the policy (necessary)
- # Sometimes it takes a while for this change to take affect so we have some nasty retry loops
- $Error.Clear();
- try
- {
- Set-Mailbox $credNewAccount.UserName -Type Regular
- } catch {}
- if ($Error)
- {
- $Error.Clear()
- $status["Device Password Policy"] = "Failed to apply the EAS policy to the account."
- PrintError "Failed to convert to regular account"
- }
- else
- {
- # Loop until resource type goes away, up to 5 times
- for ($i = 0; $i -lt 5 -And (Get-Mailbox $credNewAccount.UserName).ResourceType; $i++)
- {
- Start-Sleep -s 5
- }
- # If the mailbox is still a Room we cannot apply the policy
- if (!((Get-Mailbox $credNewAccount.UserName).ResourceType))
- {
- $Error.Clear()
- # Set policy for account
- Set-CASMailbox $credNewAccount.UserName -ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy $strPolicy
- if (!$Error)
- {
- $status["Device Password Policy"] = "Successfully applied $strPolicy to the account"
- }
- else
- {
- $status["Device Password Policy"] = "Failed to apply the EAS policy to the account."
- PrintError "Failed to apply policy"
- }
- $Error.Clear()
-
- # Convert back to room mailbox
- Set-Mailbox $credNewAccount.UserName -Type Room
- # Loop until resource type goes back to room
- for ($i = 0; ($i -lt 5) -And ((Get-Mailbox $credNewAccount.UserName).ResourceType -ne "Room"); $i++)
- {
- Start-Sleep -s 5
- }
- if ((Get-Mailbox $credNewAccount.UserName).ResourceType -ne "Room")
- {
- # A failure to convert the mailbox back to a room is unfortunate but means the mailbox is unusable.
- $status["Mailbox Setup"] = "A mailbox was created but we could not set it to a room resource type."
- }
- else
- {
- Set-Mailbox $credNewAccount.UserName -RoomMailboxPassword $credNewAccount.Password -EnableRoomMailboxAccount $true
- if ($Error)
- {
- $status["Mailbox Setup"] = "A room mailbox was created but we could not set its password."
- }
- $Error.Clear()
- }
-
- }
- }
-}
-else
-{
- $status["Device Password Policy"] = "Failed to apply the EAS policy to the account."
- PrintError "Failed to obtain policy"
-}
-PrintSuccess "Account creation completed."
-
-PrintAction "Setting calendar processing rules..."
-
-$Error.Clear();
-## Prepare the calendar for automatic meeting responses ##
-try {
- Set-CalendarProcessing -Identity $credNewAccount.UserName -AutomateProcessing AutoAccept
-} catch { }
-if ($Error)
-{
- $status["Calendar Acceptance"] = "Failed to configure the account to automatically accept/decline meeting requests"
-}
-else
-{
- $status["Calendar Acceptance"] = "Successfully configured the account to automatically accept/decline meeting requests"
-}
-
-
-$Error.Clear()
-try {
- Set-CalendarProcessing -Identity $credNewAccount.UserName -RemovePrivateProperty $false -AddOrganizerToSubject $false -AddAdditionalResponse $true -DeleteSubject $false -DeleteComments $false -AdditionalResponse "This is a Surface Hub room!"
-} catch { }
-if ($Error)
-{
- $status["Calendar Response Configuration"] = "Failed to configure the account's response properties"
-}
-else
-{
- $status["Calendar Response Configuration"] = "Successfully configured the account's response properties"
-}
-
-$Error.Clear()
-## Configure the Account to not expire ##
-PrintAction "Configuring password not to expire..."
-try
-{
- Set-MsolUser -UserPrincipalName $credNewAccount.UserName -PasswordNeverExpires $true
-}
-catch
-{
-
-}
-
-if ($Error)
-{
- $status["Password Expiration Policy"] = "Failed to set the password to never expire"
-}
-else
-{
- $status["Password Expiration Policy"] = "Successfully set the password to never expire"
-}
-
-PrintSuccess "Completed Exchange configuration"
-
-## Setup Skype for Business. This is somewhat optional and if it fails we SfbEnable can be used later ##
-PrintAction "Configuring account for Skype for Business."
-
-# Getting registrar pool
-$strRegPool = $null
-try {
- $strRegPool = (Get-CsTenant).TenantPoolExtension
-}
-catch {}
-$Error.Clear()
-if (![System.String]::IsNullOrEmpty($strRegPool))
-{
- $strRegPool = $strRegPool.Substring($strRegPool[0].IndexOf(':') + 1)
-}
-<#
-$strRegPoolEntry = Read-Host "Enter a Skype for Business Registrar Pool, or leave blank to use [$strRegPool]"
-if (![System.String]::IsNullOrEmpty($strRegPoolEntry))
-{
- $strRegPool = $strRegPoolEntry
-}
-#>
-
-# Try to SfB-enable the account. Note that it may not work right away as the account needs to propagate to active directory
-PrintAction "Enabling Skype for Business on $strRegPool"
-Start-Sleep -s 10
-$Error.Clear()
-try {
- Enable-CsMeetingRoom -Identity $credNewAccount.UserName -RegistrarPool $strRegPool -SipAddressType EmailAddress
-}
-catch { }
-
-if ($Error)
-{
- $status["Skype for Business Account Setup"] = "Failed to setup the Skype for Business meeting room - you can run EnableSfb.ps1 to try again."
- $Error.Clear();
-}
-else
-{
- $status["Skype for Business Account Setup"] = "Successfully enabled account as a Skype for Business meeting room"
-}
-
-## Now we need to assign a Skype for Business license to the account ##
-# Assign a license to thes
-$countryCode = (Get-CsTenant).CountryAbbreviation
-$loc = Read-Host "Please enter the usage location for this device account (where the account is being used). This is a 2-character code that is used to assign licenses (e.g. $countryCode)"
-try {
- $Error.Clear()
- Set-MsolUser -UserPrincipalName $credNewAccount.UserName -UsageLocation $loc
-}
-catch{}
-if ($Error)
-{
- $status["Office 365 License"] = "Failed to assign an Office 365 license to the account"
- $Error.Clear()
-}
-else
-{
- PrintAction "We found the following licenses available for your tenant:"
- $skus = (Get-MsolAccountSku | Where-Object { !$_.AccountSkuID.Contains("INTUNE"); })
- $i = 1
- $skus | % {
- Write-Host -NoNewline $i
- Write-Host -NoNewLine ": AccountSKUID: "
- Write-Host -NoNewLine $_.AccountSkuid
- Write-Host -NoNewLine " Active Units: "
- Write-Host -NoNewLine $_.ActiveUnits
- Write-Host -NoNewLine " Consumed Units: "
- Write-Host $_.ConsumedUnits
- $i++
- }
- $iLicenseIndex = 0;
- do
- {
- $iLicenseIndex = Read-Host 'Choose the number for the SKU you want to pick'
- } while ($iLicenseIndex -lt 1 -or $iLicenseIndex -gt $skus.Length)
- $strLicenses = $skus[$iLicenseIndex - 1].AccountSkuId
-
- if (![System.String]::IsNullOrEmpty($strLicenses))
- {
- try
- {
- $Error.Clear()
- Set-MsolUserLicense -UserPrincipalName $credNewAccount.UserName -AddLicenses $strLicenses
- }
- catch
- {
-
- }
- if ($Error)
- {
- $Error.Clear()
- $status["Office 365 License"] = "Failed to add a license to the account. Make sure you have remaining licenses."
- }
- else
- {
- $status["Office 365 License"] = "Successfully added license to the account"
- }
- }
- else
- {
- $status["Office 365 License"] = "You opted not to install a license on this account"
- }
-}
-
-
-Write-Host
-
-## Cleanup and print results ##
-Cleanup
-$strDisplay = $mailbox.DisplayName
-$strUsr = $credNewAccount.UserName
-PrintAction "Summary for creation of $strUsr ($strDisplay)"
-if ($status.Count -gt 0)
-{
- ForEach($k in $status.Keys)
- {
- $v = $status[$k]
- $color = "yellow"
- if ($v[0] -eq "S") { $color = "green" }
- elseif ($v[0] -eq "F")
- {
- $color = "red"
- $v += " Go to https://aka.ms/shubtshoot for help"
- }
-
- Write-Host -NoNewline $k -ForegroundColor $color
- Write-Host -NoNewline ": "
- Write-Host $v
- }
-}
-else
-{
- PrintError "The account could not be created"
-}
-```
-
-## Account verification script
-
-
-This script will validate the previously-created device account on a Surface Hub, no matter which method was used to create it. This script is basically pass/fail. If one of the test errors out, it will show a detailed error message, but if all tests pass, the end result will be a summary report. For example, you might see:
-
-``` syntax
-15 tests executed
-0 failures
-2 warnings
-15 passed
-```
-
-Details of specific settings will not be shown.
-
-```PowerShell
-# SHAccountValidate.ps1
-
-$Error.Clear()
-$ErrorActionPreference = "Stop"
-
-
-# Cleans up set state such as remote powershell sessions
-function Cleanup()
-{
- if ($sessEx)
- {
- Remove-PSSession $sessEx
- }
- if ($sessSfb)
- {
- Remove-PSSession $sessSfb
- }
-}
-
-function PrintError($strMsg)
-{
- Write-Host $strMsg -foregroundcolor "red"
-}
-
-function PrintSuccess($strMsg)
-{
- Write-Host $strMsg -foregroundcolor "green"
-}
-
-function PrintAction($strMsg)
-{
- Write-Host $strMsg -ForegroundColor Cyan
-}
-
-
-# Cleans up and prints an error message
-function CleanupAndFail($strMsg)
-{
- if ($strMsg)
- {
- PrintError($strMsg);
- }
- Cleanup
- exit 1
-}
-
-# Exits if there is an error set and prints the given message
-function ExitIfError($strMsg)
-{
- if ($Error)
- {
- CleanupAndFail($strMsg);
- }
-}
-
-$strUpn = Read-Host "What is the email address of the account you wish to validate?"
-if (!$strUpn.Contains('@'))
-{
- CleanupAndFail "$strUpn is not a valid email address"
-}
-$strExServer = Read-Host "What is your exchange server? (leave blank for online tenants)"
-if ($strExServer.Equals(""))
-{
- $fExIsOnline = $true
-}
-else
-{
- $fExIsOnline = $false
-}
-$credEx = Get-Credential -Message "Please provide exchange user credentials"
-
-$strRegistrarPool = Read-Host ("What is the Skype for Business registrar pool for $strUpn" + "? (leave blank for online tenants)")
-$fSfbIsOnline = $strRegistrarPool.Equals("")
-
-$fHasOnPrem = $true
-if ($fSfbIsOnline -and $fExIsOnline)
-{
- do
- {
- $strHasOnPrem = (Read-Host "Do you have an on-premises Active Directory (Y/N) (No if your domain services are hosted entirely online)").ToUpper()
- } while ($strHasOnPrem -ne "Y" -and $strHasOnPrem -ne "N")
- $fHasOnPrem = $strHasOnPrem.Equals("Y")
-}
-
-$fHasOnline = $false
-if ($fSfbIsOnline -or $fExIsOnline)
-{
- $fHasOnline = $true
-}
-
-if ($fSfbIsOnline)
-{
- try {
- Import-Module SkypeOnlineConnector
- }
- catch
- {
- CleanupAndFail "To verify Skype for Business in online tenants you need the Lync Online Connector module from http://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=39366"
- }
-}
-else
-{
- $credSfb = (Get-Credential -Message "Please enter Skype for Business admin credentials")
-}
-
-if ($fHasOnline)
-{
- $credSfb = $credEx
- try {
- Import-Module MSOnline
- }
- catch
- {
- CleanupAndFail "To verify accounts in online tenants you need the Azure Active Directory module for PowerShell from https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?linkid=236297"
- }
-}
-
-PrintAction "Connecting to Exchange Powershell Session..."
-[System.Management.Automation.Runspaces.AuthenticationMechanism] $authType = [System.Management.Automation.Runspaces.AuthenticationMechanism]::Kerberos
-if ($fExIsOnline)
-{
- $authType = [System.Management.Automation.Runspaces.AuthenticationMechanism]::Basic
-}
-try
-{
- $sessEx = $null
- if ($fExIsOnline)
- {
- $sessEx = New-PSSession -ConfigurationName microsoft.exchange -Credential $credEx -AllowRedirection -Authentication $authType -ConnectionUri "https://outlook.office365.com/powershell-liveid/" -WarningAction SilentlyContinue
- }
- else
- {
- $sessEx = New-PSSession -ConfigurationName microsoft.exchange -Credential $credEx -AllowRedirection -Authentication $authType -ConnectionUri https://$strExServer/powershell -WarningAction SilentlyContinue
- }
-}
-catch
-{
-}
-
-if (!$sessEx)
-{
- CleanupAndFail "Connecting to Exchange Powershell failed, please validate your server is accessible and credentials are correct"
-}
-
-PrintSuccess "Connected to Exchange Powershell Session"
-
-PrintAction "Connecting to Skype for Business Powershell Session..."
-
-if ($fSfbIsOnline)
-{
- $sessSfb = New-CsOnlineSession -Credential $credSfb
-}
-else
-{
- $sessSfb = New-PSSession -Credential $credSfb -ConnectionURI "https://$strRegistrarPool/OcsPowershell" -AllowRedirection -WarningAction SilentlyContinue
-}
-
-if (!$sessSfb)
-{
- CleanupAndFail "Connecting to Skype for Business Powershell failed, please validate your server is accessible and credentials are correct"
-}
-
-PrintSuccess "Connected to Skype for Business Powershell"
-
-if ($fHasOnline)
-{
- $credMsol = $null
- if ($fExIsOnline)
- {
- $credMsol = $credEx
- }
- elseif ($fSfbIsOnline)
- {
- $credMsol = $credSfb
- }
- else
- {
- CleanupAndFail "Internal error - could not determine MS Online credentials"
- }
- try
- {
- PrintAction "Connecting to Azure Active Directory Services..."
- Connect-MsolService -Credential $credMsol
- PrintSuccess "Connected to Azure Active Directory Services"
- }
- catch
- {
- # This really shouldn't happen unless there is a network error
- CleanupAndFail "Failed to connect to MSOnline"
- }
-}
-
-
-PrintAction "Importing remote sessions into the local session..."
-try
-{
- $importEx = Import-PSSession $sessEx -AllowClobber -WarningAction SilentlyContinue -DisableNameChecking
- $importSfb = Import-PSSession $sessSfb -AllowClobber -WarningAction SilentlyContinue -DisableNameChecking
-}
-catch
-{
-}
-if (!$importEx -or !$importSfb)
-{
- CleanupAndFail "Import failed"
-}
-PrintSuccess "Import successful"
-
-
-$mailbox = $null
-try
-{
- $mailbox = Get-Mailbox -Identity $strUpn
-}
-catch
-{
-}
-
-if (!$mailbox)
-{
- CleanupAndFail "Account exists check failed. Unable to find the mailbox for $strUpn - please make sure the Exchange account exists on $strExServer"
-}
-
-$exchange = $null
-if (!$fExIsOnline)
-{
- $exchange = Get-ExchangeServer
- if (!$exchange -or !$exchange.IsE14OrLater)
- {
- CleanupAndFail "A compatible exchange server version was not found. Please use at least exchange 2010."
- }
-}
-
-
-$strAlias = $mailbox.UserPrincipalName
-$strDisplayName = $mailbox.DisplayName
-
-$strLinkedAccount = $strLinkedDomain = $strLinkedUser = $strLinkedServer = $null
-$credLinkedDomain = $Null
-if (!$fExIsOnline -and ![System.String]::IsNullOrEmpty($mailbox.LinkedMasterAccount) -and !$mailbox.LinkedMasterAccount.EndsWith("\SELF"))
-{
- $strLinkedAccount = $mailbox.LinkedMasterAccount
- $strLinkedDomain = $strLinkedAccount.substring(0,$strLinkedAccount.IndexOf('\'))
- $strLinkedUser = $strLinkedAccount.substring($strLinkedAccount.IndexOf('\') + 1)
- $strLinkedServer = Read-Host "What is the domain controller for the $strLinkedDomain"
- $credLinkedDomain = (Get-Credential -Message "Please provide credentials for $strLinkedDomain")
-}
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Write-Host
-Write-Host
-Write-Host
-PrintAction "Performing verification checks on $strDisplayName..."
-$Global:iTotalFailures = 0
-$global:iTotalWarnings = 0
-$Global:iTotalPasses = 0
-
-function Validate()
-{
- Param(
- [string]$Test,
- [bool] $Condition,
- [string]$FailureMsg,
- [switch]$WarningOnly
- )
-
- Write-Host -NoNewline -ForegroundColor White $Test.PadRight(100,'.')
- if ($Condition)
- {
- Write-Host -ForegroundColor Green "Passed"
- $global:iTotalPasses++
- }
- else
- {
- if ($WarningOnly)
- {
- Write-Host -ForegroundColor Yellow ("Warning: "+$FailureMsg)
- $global:iTotalWarnings++
- }
- else
- {
- Write-Host -ForegroundColor Red ("Failed: "+$FailureMsg)
- $global:iTotalFailures++
- }
- }
-}
-
-## Exchange ##
-
-Validate -WarningOnly -Test "The mailbox $strUpn is enabled as a room account" -Condition ($mailbox.RoomMailboxAccountEnabled -eq $True) -FailureMsg "RoomMailboxEnabled - without a device account, the Surface Hub will not be able to use various key features."
-$calendarProcessing = Get-CalendarProcessing -Identity $strUpn -WarningAction SilentlyContinue -ErrorAction SilentlyContinue
-Validate -Test "The mailbox $strUpn is configured to accept meeting requests" -Condition ($calendarProcessing -ne $null -and $calendarProcessing.AutomateProcessing -eq 'AutoAccept') -FailureMsg "AutomateProcessing - the Surface Hub will not be able to send mail or sync its calendar."
-Validate -WarningOnly -Test "The mailbox $strUpn will not delete meeting comments" -Condition ($calendarProcessing -ne $null -and !$calendarProcessing.DeleteComments) -FailureMsg "DeleteComments - the Surface Hub may be missing some meeting information on the welcome screen and Skype."
-Validate -WarningOnly -Test "The mailbox $strUpn keeps private meetings private" -Condition ($calendarProcessing -ne $null -and !$calendarProcessing.RemovePrivateProperty) -FailureMsg "RemovePrivateProperty - the Surface Hub will make show private meetings."
-Validate -Test "The mailbox $strUpn keeps meeting subjects" -Condition ($calendarProcessing -ne $null -and !$calendarProcessing.DeleteSubject) -FailureMsg "DeleteSubject - the Surface Hub will not keep meeting subject information."
-Validate -WarningOnly -Test "The mailbox $strUpn does not prepend meeting organizers to subjects" -Condition ($calendarProcessing -ne $null -and !$calendarProcessing.AddOrganizerToSubject) -FailureMsg "AddOrganizerToSubject - the Surface Hub will not display meeting subjects as intended."
-
-if ($fExIsOnline)
-{
- #No online specifics
-}
-else
-{
- #No onprem specifics
-}
-
-#ActiveSync
-$casMailbox = Get-Casmailbox $strUpn -WarningAction SilentlyContinue -ErrorAction SilentlyContinue
-Validate -Test "The mailbox $strUpn has a mailbox policy" -Condition ($casMailbox -ne $null) -FailureMsg "PasswordEnabled - unable to find policy - the Surface Hub will not be able to send mail or sync its calendar."
-if ($casMailbox)
-{
- $policy = $null
- if ($fExIsOnline -or $exchange.IsE15OrLater)
- {
- $strPolicy = $casMailbox.ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy
- $policy = Get-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy -Identity $strPolicy -WarningAction SilentlyContinue -ErrorAction SilentlyContinue
- Validate -Test "The policy $strPolicy does not require a device password" -Condition ($policy.PasswordEnabled -ne $True) -FailureMsg "PasswordEnabled - policy requires a device password - the Surface Hub will not be able to send mail or sync its calendar."
- }
- else
- {
- $strPolicy = $casMailbox.ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy
- $policy = Get-ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy -Identity $strPolicy -WarningAction SilentlyContinue -ErrorAction SilentlyContinue
- Validate -Test "The policy $strPolicy does not require a device password" -Condition ($policy.PasswordEnabled -ne $True) -FailureMsg "PasswordEnabled - policy requires a device password - the Surface Hub will not be able to send mail or sync its calendar."
- }
-
- if ($policy -ne $null)
- {
- Validate -Test "The policy $strPolicy allows non-provisionable devices" -Condition ($policy.AllowNonProvisionableDevices -eq $null -or $policy.AllowNonProvisionableDevices -eq $true) -FailureMsg "AllowNonProvisionableDevices - policy will not allow the SurfaceHub to sync"
- }
-
-}
-
-
-# Check the default access level
-$orgSettings = Get-ActiveSyncOrganizationSettings
-$strDefaultAccessLevel = $orgSettings.DefaultAccessLevel
-Validate -Test "ActiveSync devices are allowed" -Condition ($strDefaultAccessLevel -eq 'Allow') -FailureMsg "DeviceType Windows Mail is accessible - devices are not allowed by default - the surface hub will not be able to send mail or sync its calendar."
-
-# Check if there exists a device access rule that bans the device type Windows Mail
-$blockingRules = Get-ActiveSyncDeviceAccessRule | where {($_.AccessLevel -eq 'Block' -or $_.AccessLevel -eq 'Quarantine') -and $_.Characteristic -eq 'DeviceType'-and $_.QueryString -eq 'WindowsMail'}
-Validate -Test "Windows mail devices are not blocked or quarantined" -Condition ($blockingRules -eq $null -or $blockingRules.Length -eq 0) -FailureMsg "DeviceType Windows Mail is accessible - devices are blocked or quarantined - the surface hub will not be able to send mail or sync its calendar."
-
-## End Exchange ##
-
-
-
-## SfB ##
-$strLyncIdentity = $null
-if ($fSfbIsOnline)
-{
- $strLyncIdentity = $strUpn
-}
-else
-{
- $strLyncIdentity = $strAlias
-}
-
-$lyncAccount = $null
-try {
- $lyncAccount = Get-CsMeetingRoom -Identity $strLyncIdentity -WarningAction SilentlyContinue -ErrorAction SilentlyContinue
-} catch {
- try {
- $lyncAccount = Get-CsUser -Identity $strLyncIdentity -WarningAction SilentlyContinue -ErrorAction SilentlyContinue
- } catch { }
-}
-Validate -Test "There is a Lync or Skype for Business account for $strLyncIdentity" -Condition ($lyncAccount -ne $null -and $lyncAccount.Enabled) -FailureMsg "SfB Enabled - there is no Skype for Business account - meetings will not support Skype for Business"
-if ($lyncAccount)
-{
- Validate -Test "The meeting room has a SIP address" -Condition (![System.String]::IsNullOrEmpty($lyncAccount.SipAddress)) -FailureMsg "SfB Enabled - there is no SIP Address - the device account cannot be used to sign into Skype for Business."
-}
-## End SFB ##
-
-
-if ($fHasOnline)
-{
- #License validation and password expiry
- $accountOnline = Get-MsolUser -UserPrincipalName $strUpn -WarningAction SilentlyContinue -ErrorAction SilentlyContinue
- Validate -Test "There is an online user account for $strUpn" -Condition ($accountOnline -ne $null) -FailureMsg "Could not find a Microsoft Online account for this user even though some services are online"
- if ($accountOnline)
- {
- Validate -Test "The password for $strUpn will not expire" -Condition ($accountOnline.PasswordNeverExpires -eq $True) -FailureMsg "PasswordNeverExpires - the admin will need to update the device account's password on the Surface Hub when it expires."
- if ($fIsSfbOnline -and !$fIsExOnline)
- {
- $strLicenseFailureMsg = "Has O365 license - The devices will not be able to use Skype for Business services."
- }
- elseif ($fIsExOnline -and !$fIsSfbOnline)
- {
- $strLicenseFailureMsg = "Has O365 license - The devices will not be able to use Exchange Online services."
- }
- else
- {
- $strLicenseFailureMsg = "Has O365 license - The devices will not be able to use Skype for Business or Exchange Online services."
- }
- Validate -Test "$strUpn is licensed" -Condition ($accountOnline.IsLicensed -eq $True) -FailureMsg $strLicenseFailureMsg
-
- Validate -Test "$strUpn is allowed to sign in" -Condition ($accountOnline.BlockCredential -ne $True) -FailureMsg "BlockCredential - This user is not allowed to sign in."
- }
-}
-
-#If there is an on-prem component, we can get the authoritative AD user from mailbox
-if ($fHasOnPrem)
-{
- $accountOnPrem = $null
- if ($strLinkedAccount)
- {
- $accountOnPrem = Get-AdUser $strLinkedUser -server $strLinkedServer -credential $credLinkedDomain -properties PasswordNeverExpires -WarningAction SilentlyContinue -ErrorAction SilentlyContinue
- }
- else
- {
- #AD User enabled validation
- $accountOnPrem = Get-AdUser $mailbox.UserPrincipalName -properties PasswordNeverExpires -WarningAction SilentlyContinue -ErrorAction SilentlyContinue
- }
- $strOnPremUpn = $accountOnPrem.UserPrincipalName
- Validate -Test "There is a user account for $strOnPremUpn" -Condition ($accountOnprem -ne $null) -FailureMsg "Could not find an Active Directory account for this user"
- if ($accountOnPrem)
- {
- Validate -WarningOnly -Test "The password for $strOnPremUpn will not expire" -Condition ($accountOnprem.PasswordNeverExpires -eq $True) -FailureMsg "PasswordNeverExpires - the admin will need to update the device account's password on the Surface Hub when it expires."
- Validate -Test "$strOnPremUpn is enabled" -Condition $accountOnPrem.Enabled -FailureMsg "AccountEnabled - this device account will not sign in"
- }
-}
-
-
-$global:iTotalTests = ($global:iTotalFailures + $global:iTotalPasses + $global:iTotalWarnings)
-
-Write-Host -NoNewline $global:iTotalTests "tests executed: "
-Write-Host -NoNewline -ForegroundColor Red $Global:iTotalFailures "failures "
-Write-Host -NoNewline -ForegroundColor Yellow $Global:iTotalWarnings "warnings "
-Write-Host -ForegroundColor Green $Global:iTotalPasses "passes "
-
-Cleanup
-```
-
-## Enable Skype for Business
-
-
-This script will enable Skype for Business on a device account. Use it only if Skype for Business wasn't previously enabled during account creation.
-
-```PowerShell
-## This script performs only the Enable for Skype for Business step on an account. It should only be run if this step failed in SHAccountCreate and the other steps have been completed ##
-# EnableSfb.ps1
-
-$Error.Clear()
-$ErrorActionPreference = "Stop"
-
-# Cleans up set state such as remote powershell sessions
-function Cleanup()
-{
- if ($sessCS)
- {
- Remove-PSSession $sessCS
- }
-}
-
-function PrintError($strMsg)
-{
- Write-Host $strMsg -foregroundcolor "red"
-}
-
-function PrintSuccess($strMsg)
-{
- Write-Host $strMsg -foregroundcolor "green"
-}
-
-# Cleans up and prints an error message
-function CleanupAndFail($strMsg)
-{
- if ($strMsg)
- {
- PrintError($strMsg);
- }
- Cleanup
- exit 1
-}
-
-# Exits if there is an error set and prints the given message
-function ExitIfError($strMsg)
-{
- if ($Error)
- {
- CleanupAndFail($strMsg);
- }
-}
-
-## Check dependencies ##
-
-$input = Read-Host "Is the account you wish to enable part of an online environment (enter O) or on-premises environment (enter P)"
-if ($input -eq "P")
-{
- $online = $false
-}
-elseif ($input -eq "O")
-{
- $online = $true
-}
-else
-{
- CleanupAndFail "Invalid selection"
-}
-if ($online)
-{
- try {
- Import-Module SkypeOnlineConnector
- }
- catch
- {
- PrintError "Some dependencies are missing"
- PrintError "Please install the Windows PowerShell Module for Lync Online. For more information go to http://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=39366"
- PrintError "Please install the Azure Active Directory module for PowerShell from https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?linkid=236297"
- CleanupAndFail
- }
-}
-else
-{
- $strRegPool = Read-Host "Enter the FQDN of your Skype for Business Registrar Pool"
-}
-
-
-## Collect account data ##
-Write-Host "----------- Enter info for the account to enable -----------." -foregroundcolor "magenta"
-$strRoomUri=Read-Host 'Please enter the UPN of the account you are enabling (e.g. confroom@surfacehub.microsoft.com)'
-
-if ([System.String]::IsNullOrEmpty($strRoomUri))
-{
- CleanupAndFail "Please enter all of the requested data to continue."
- exit 1
-}
-Write-Host "--------------------------------------------------------------." -foregroundcolor "magenta"
-
-
-
-## Sign in to remote powershell for exchange and lync online ##
-Write-Host "`n------------------ Establishing connection -----------------." -foregroundcolor "magenta"
-$credAdmin=Get-Credential -Message "Enter credentials of a Skype for Business admin"
-if (!$credadmin)
-{
- CleanupAndFail("Valid admin credentials are required to create and prepare the account.");
-}
-Write-Host "Connecting to remote sessions. This can occasionally take a while - please do not enter input..."
-
-try
-{
- if ($online)
- {
- $sessCS = New-CsOnlineSession -Credential $credAdmin
- }
- else
- {
- $sessCS = New-PSSession -Credential $credAdmin -ConnectionURI "https://$strRegPool/OcsPowershell" -AllowRedirection -WarningAction SilentlyContinue
- }
-}
-catch
-{
- CleanupAndFail("Failed to connect to Skype for Business server. Please check your credentials and try again. Error message: $_")
-}
-
-Import-PSSession $sessCS -AllowClobber
-
-
-Write-Host "--------------------------------------------------------------." -foregroundcolor "magenta"
-
-# Getting registrar pool
-if ($online)
-{
- try {
- $strRegPool = $null;
- $strRegPool = (Get-CsTenant).RegistrarPool
- } catch {}
- if ($Error)
- {
- $Error.Clear();
- $strRegPool = "";
- Write-Host "We failed to lookup your Skype for Business Registrar Pool, but you can still enter it manually"
- }
- else
- {
- $strRegPool = $strRegPool[0].Substring($strRegPool[0].IndexOf(':') + 1)
- }
-}
-
-
-$Error.Clear()
-try {
- Enable-CsMeetingRoom -Identity $strRoomUri -RegistrarPool $strRegPool -SipAddressType EmailAddress
-}
-catch {}
-
-ExitIfError("Failed to setup Skype for Business meeting room")
-
-PrintSuccess "Successfully enabled $strRoomUri as a Skype for Business meeting room"
-
-Cleanup
-```
-
-## Useful cmdlets
-
-
-### Creating a Surface Hub-compatible ActiveSync policy
-
-For Surface Hub to use Exchange services, a device account configured with a compatible ActiveSync policy must be provisioned on the device. This policy has the following requirements:
-
-``` syntax
-PasswordEnabled == 0
-```
-
-In the following cmdlets, `$strPolicy` is the name of the ActiveSync policy, and `$strRoomUpn` is the UPN of the device account you want to apply the policy to.
-
-Note that in order to run the cmdlets, you need to set up a remote PowerShell session and:
-
-- Your admin account must be remote-PowerShell-enabled. This allows the admin to use the PowerShell cmdlets that are needed by the script. (This permission can be set using `set-user $admin -RemotePowerShellEnabled $true`)
-- Your admin account must have the "Reset Password" role if you plan to run the creation scripts. This allows the admin to change the password of the account, which is needed for the script. The Reset Password Role can be enabled using the Exchange Admin Center.
-
-Create the policy.
-
-```PowerShell
-# Create new policy with PasswordEnabled == false
-New-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy -Name $strPolicy -PasswordEnabled $false –AllowNonProvisionableDevices $true
-```
-
-To apply the policy, the mailbox cannot be a room type, so it has to be converted into a user first.
-
-```PowerShell
-# Convert user to regular type
-Set-Mailbox $strRoomUpn -Type Regular
-# Set policy for account
-Set-CASMailbox $strRoomUpn -ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy $strPolicy
-```
-
-Now the device account just needs to be converted back into a room type.
-
-```PowerShell
-# Convert back to room mailbox
-Set-Mailbox $strRoomUpn -Type Room
-```
-
-### Allowing device IDs for ActiveSync
-
-To allow an account `$strRoomUpn`, run the following command:
-
-```PowerShell
-Set-CASMailbox –Identity $strRoomUpn –ActiveSyncAllowedDeviceIDs “”
-```
-
-To find a device's ID, run:
-
-```PowerShell
-Get-ActiveSyncDevice -Mailbox $strRoomUpn
-```
-
-This retrieves device information for every device that the account has been provisioned on, Including the `DeviceId` property.
-
-### Auto-accepting and declining meeting requests
-
-For a device account to automatically accept or decline meeting requests based on its availability, the **AutomateProcessing** attribute must be set to **AutoAccept**. This is recommended as to prevent overlapping meetings.
-
-```PowerShell
-Set-CalendarProcessing $strRoomUpn -AutomateProcessing AutoAccept
-```
-
-### Accepting external meeting requests
-
-For a device account to accept external meeting requests (a meeting request from an account not in the same tenant/domain), the device account must be set to allow processing of external meeting requests. Once set, the device account will automatically accept or decline meeting requests from external accounts as well as local accounts.
-
->**Note** If the **AutomateProcessing** attribute is not set to **AutoAccept**, then setting this will have no effect.
-
-
-
-```PowerShell
-Set-CalendarProcessing $strRoomUpn -ProcessExternalMeetingMessages $true
-```
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/apply-activesync-policies-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md b/devices/surface-hub/apply-activesync-policies-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7ea2bc584c..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/apply-activesync-policies-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Applying ActiveSync policies to device accounts (Surface Hub)
-description: The Microsoft Surface Hub's device account uses ActiveSync to sync mail and calendar. This allows people to join and start scheduled meetings from the Surface Hub, and allows them to email any whiteboards they have made during their meeting.
-ms.assetid: FAABBA74-3088-4275-B58E-EC1070F4D110
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: Surface Hub, ActiveSync policies
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 06/20/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Applying ActiveSync policies to device accounts (Surface Hub)
-
-
-The Microsoft Surface Hub's device account uses ActiveSync to sync mail and calendar. This allows people to join and start scheduled meetings from the Surface Hub, and allows them to email any whiteboards they have made during their meeting.
-
-For these features to work, the ActiveSync policies for your organization must be configured as follows:
-
-- There can't be any global policies that block synchronization of the resource mailbox that's being used by the Surface Hub’s device account. If there is such a blocking policy, you need to whitelist the Surface Hub as an allowed device.
-- You must set a mobile device mailbox policy where the **PasswordEnabled** setting is set to False. Other mobile device mailbox policy settings are not compatible with the Surface Hub.
-
-## Whitelisting the DeviceID
-
-
-Your organization may have a global policy that prevents syncing of device accounts provisioned on Surface Hubs. To configure this property, see [Allowing device IDs for ActiveSync](appendix-a-powershell-scripts-for-surface-hub.md#whitelisting-device-ids-cmdlet).
-
-## Setting PasswordEnabled
-
-
-The device account must have an ActiveSync policy where the **PasswordEnabled** attribute is set to False or 0. To configure this property, see [Creating a Surface Hub-compatible Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync policy](appendix-a-powershell-scripts-for-surface-hub.md#create-compatible-as-policy).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/breadcrumb/toc.yml b/devices/surface-hub/breadcrumb/toc.yml
deleted file mode 100644
index d846a15189..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/breadcrumb/toc.yml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-- name: Docs
- tocHref: /
- topicHref: /
- items:
- - name: Surface Hub
- tocHref: /surface-hub
- topicHref: /surface-hub/index
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/change-history-surface-hub.md b/devices/surface-hub/change-history-surface-hub.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 2d55222b1b..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/change-history-surface-hub.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,195 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Change history for Surface Hub
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-description: This topic lists new and updated topics for Surface Hub.
-keywords: change history
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Change history for Surface Hub
-
-This topic lists new and updated topics in the [Surface Hub Admin Guide]( surface-hub-administrators-guide.md).
-
-## April 2019
-
-New or changed topic | Description
---- | ---
-[Surface Hub Site Readiness Guide](surface-hub-site-readiness-guide.md) | New; previously available for download only
-[Technical information for 55” Microsoft Surface Hub](surface-hub-technical-55.md) | New; previously available for download and on [Surface Hub Tech Spec](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4483539/surface-hub-tech-spec)
-[Technical information for 84” Microsoft Surface Hub](surface-hub-technical-84.md) | New; previously available for download and on [Surface Hub Tech Spec](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4483539/surface-hub-tech-spec)
-[Surface Hub SSD replacement](surface-hub-ssd-replacement.md) | New; previously available for download only
-[Implement Quality of Service on Surface Hub](surface-hub-qos.md) | New
-
-## July 2018
-
-New or changed topic | Description
---- | ---
-[Set up and use Whiteboard to Whiteboard collaboration](whiteboard-collaboration.md) | Added information and links for new Microsoft Whiteboard app release.
-
-## June 2018
-
-New or changed topic | Description
---- | ---
-[On-premises deployment (single forest)](on-premises-deployment-surface-hub-device-accounts.md) and [On-premises deployment (multiple forests)](on-premises-deployment-surface-hub-multi-forest.md) | Added (prerelease) instructions for disabling anonymous email and IM.
-
-## May 2018
-
-New or changed topic | Description
---- | ---
-[Using the Surface Hub Recovery Tool](surface-hub-recovery-tool.md) | New
-
-## April 2018
-
-New or changed topic | Description
---- | ---
-[Hybrid deployment](hybrid-deployment-surface-hub-device-accounts.md) | Updated instructions for Skype for Business Hybrid.
-
-
-## March 2018
-
-New or changed topic | Description
---- | ---
-[Create and test a device account (Surface Hub)](create-and-test-a-device-account-surface-hub.md) | Added section for account verification and testing, with link to new Surface Hub Hardware Diagnostic app.
-
-## February 2018
-
-New or changed topic | Description
---- | ---
-[Manage settings with an MDM provider (Surface Hub)](manage-settings-with-mdm-for-surface-hub.md) | Updated instructions for custom settings using Microsoft Intune.
-[Hybrid deployment](hybrid-deployment-surface-hub-device-accounts.md) | Updated instructions and scripts.
-| [Online deployment](online-deployment-surface-hub-device-accounts.md) | Updated instructions and scripts.
-
-## January 2018
-
-New or changed topic | Description
---- | ---
-[Configure Surface Hub Start menu](surface-hub-start-menu.md) | New
-[PowerShell for Surface Hub](appendix-a-powershell-scripts-for-surface-hub.md) | Added prerequisites for running the scripts
-
-## November 2017
-
-New or changed topic | Description
---- | ---
-[Enable 802.1x wired authentication](enable-8021x-wired-authentication.md) | New
-[Manage settings with an MDM provider (Surface Hub)](manage-settings-with-mdm-for-surface-hub.md) | Added settings for 802.1x wired authentication.
-
-## October 2017
-
-New or changed topic | Description |
---- | ---
-[Install apps on your Microsoft Surface Hub](install-apps-on-surface-hub.md) | Updated instructions to use Windows Team device family
-[Hybrid deployment](hybrid-deployment-surface-hub-device-accounts.md) | Updated the instructions for Exchange on-premises
-[Create a device account using UI](create-a-device-account-using-office-365.md) | Updated the instructions
-[Differences between Surface Hub and Windows 10 Enterprise](differences-between-surface-hub-and-windows-10-enterprise.md) | Clarified user sign-in on Surface Hub
-[Set up and use Whiteboard to Whiteboard collaboration](whiteboard-collaboration.md) | Removed **How to control and manage Whiteboard to Whiteboard collaboration** due to issues with the EnterpriseModernAppmanagement CSP losing state during End Session.
-| [Manage settings with an MDM provider (Surface Hub)](manage-settings-with-mdm-for-surface-hub.md) | Removed settings for managing Whiteboard collaboration. |
-[Top support solutions for Surface Hub](support-solutions-surface-hub.md) | Added link to Surface Hub warranty information
-
-
-## September 2017
-
-New or changed topic | Description
---- | ---
-[Top support solutions for Surface Hub](support-solutions-surface-hub.md) | New
-[PowerShell for Surface Hub](appendix-a-powershell-scripts-for-surface-hub.md) | Updated account creation scripts
-
-## August 2017
-
-
-| New or changed topic | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-[Accessibility](accessibility-surface-hub.md) | Added information about Narrator
-[Sign in to Surface Hub with Microsoft Authenticator](surface-hub-authenticator-app.md) | New
-
-
-
-
-
-## July 2017
-
-| New or changed topic | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-| [Windows updates](manage-windows-updates-for-surface-hub.md) | Changed deferral recommendations for Windows Updates |
-| [Set up and use Whiteboard to Whiteboard collaboration](whiteboard-collaboration.md) | Added Whiteboard URLs to prerequisites |
-| [Hybrid deployment](hybrid-deployment-surface-hub-device-accounts.md#skype-for-business-online) | Updated the Skype for Business Online requirements |
-| [Prepare your environment for Surface Hub](prepare-your-environment-for-surface-hub.md) | Added that Surface Hub supports 802.1X using PEAP-MSCHAPv2 |
-
-## June 2017
-
-| New or changed topic | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-| [Set up and use Whiteboard to Whiteboard collaboration](whiteboard-collaboration.md) | New |
-| [Manage settings with an MDM provider (Surface Hub)](manage-settings-with-mdm-for-surface-hub.md) | Added settings for managing Whiteboard collaboration |
-
-## RELEASE: Windows 10, version 1703
-
-The topics in this library have been updated for Windows 10, version 1703 (also known as the Creators Update). The following new topics have been added:
-
-- [Miracast on existing wireless network or LAN](miracast-over-infrastructure.md)
-
->[Looking for the Surface Hub admin guide for Windows 10, version 1607?](https://download.microsoft.com/download/7/2/5/7252051B-7E97-4781-B5DF-58D4B1A4BB88/surface-hub-admin-guide-1607.pdf)
-
-
-## May 2017
-
-| New or changed topic | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-| [Online or hybrid deployment using Skype Hybrid Voice environment](skype-hybrid-voice.md) | New |
-
-
-## February 2017
-
-| New or changed topic | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-| [Useful downloads for Surface Hub administrators](surface-hub-downloads.md) | New |
-
-## January 2017
-
-| New or changed topic | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-| [How Surface Hub addresses Wi-Fi Direct security issues](surface-hub-wifi-direct.md) | New |
-| [On-premises deployment (multiple forests)](on-premises-deployment-surface-hub-multi-forest.md) | New |
-| [Connect other devices and display with Surface Hub](connect-and-display-with-surface-hub.md) | Added graphics cards verified to work with 84" Surface Hubs and added information about the lengths of cables. |
-| [Online deployment](online-deployment-surface-hub-device-accounts.md) | Updated procedures for adding a device account for your Microsoft Surface Hub when you have a pure, online deployment. |
-
-## December 2016
-
-| New or changed topic | Description|
-| --- | --- |
-| [Connect other devices and display with Surface Hub](connect-and-display-with-surface-hub.md) | Added information about Bluetooth accessories. |
-| [Manage settings with an MDM provider](manage-settings-with-mdm-for-surface-hub.md) | Updated example procedures to include screenshots. |
-
-## November 2016
-
-| New or changed topic | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-| [Differences between Surface Hub and Windows 10 Enterprise](differences-between-surface-hub-and-windows-10-enterprise.md) | New |
-| [Connect other devices and display with Surface Hub](connect-and-display-with-surface-hub.md) | Added information for Video Out and a table to help select a display method. |
-| [Hybrid deployment](hybrid-deployment-surface-hub-device-accounts.md) | Added instructions for creating accounts for Surface Hub in a Skype for Business hybrid environment. |
-
-
-
-## RELEASE: Windows Anniversary Update for Surface Hub (Windows 10, version 1607)
-The topics in this library have been updated for Windows 10, version 1607 (also known as Windows Anniversary Update for Surface Hub). These topics had significant updates for this release:
-- [Windows Updates (Surface Hub)](manage-windows-updates-for-surface-hub.md)
-- [Manage settings with an MDM provider (Surface Hub)](manage-settings-with-mdm-for-surface-hub.md)
-- [Monitor your Microsoft Surface Hub](monitor-surface-hub.md)
-- [Create provisioning packages (Surface Hub)](provisioning-packages-for-certificates-surface-hub.md)
-- [Install apps on your Microsoft Surface Hub](install-apps-on-surface-hub.md)
-- [Device reset (Surface Hub)](device-reset-surface-hub.md)
-
-## October 2016
-| New or changed topic | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-| [Admin group management (Surface Hub)](admin-group-management-for-surface-hub.md) |Add note about automatic enrollment, and update table. |
-| [Password management (Surface Hub)](password-management-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md) | Updates to content. |
-| [Create and test a device account (Surface Hub)](create-and-test-a-device-account-surface-hub.md) | Reorganize and streamline guidance on creating a device account. |
-| [Introduction to Surface Hub](intro-to-surface-hub.md) | Move Surface Hub dependencies table to [Prepare your environment for Surface Hub](prepare-your-environment-for-surface-hub.md). |
-| [Prepare your environment for Surface Hub](prepare-your-environment-for-surface-hub.md) | Add dependency table and reorganize topic. |
-| [Local management for Surface Hub settings](local-management-surface-hub-settings.md) | New topic. |
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/change-surface-hub-device-account.md b/devices/surface-hub/change-surface-hub-device-account.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 142af6e80e..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/change-surface-hub-device-account.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,93 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Change the Microsoft Surface Hub device account
-description: You can change the device account in Settings to either add an account if one was not already provisioned, or to change any properties of an account that was already provisioned.
-ms.assetid: AFC43043-3319-44BC-9310-29B1F375E672
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: change device account, change properties, Surface Hub
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Change the Microsoft Surface Hub device account
-
-
-You can change the device account in Settings to either add an account if one was not already provisioned, or to change any properties of an account that was already provisioned.
-
-## Details
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Value
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
User Principal Name
-
The user principal name (UPN) of the device account.
-
-
-
Password
-
The corresponding password of the device account.
-
-
-
Domain
-
The domain that the device account belongs to. This field does not need to be provided for Office 365 accounts.
-
-
-
User name
-
The user name of the device account. This field does not need to be provided for Office 365 accounts.
-
-
-
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) address
-
The SIP address of the device account.
-
-
-
Microsoft Exchange server
-
This is the Exchange server of the device account. The device account’s username and password must be able to authenticate to the specified Exchange server.
-
-
-
Enable Exchange services
-
When checked, all Exchange services will be enabled (for example, calendar on the welcome screen, emailing whiteboards). When not checked, all Exchange services will be disabled, and the Exchange server does not need to be provided.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## What happens?
-
-
-The UPN and password are used to validate the account in AD or Azure AD. If the validation fails, you may need to provide the domain and user name.
-
-Using the credentials provided, we will try to discover the SIP address. If a SIP address can't be found, then Skype for Business will use the UPN as the SIP address. If this is not the SIP address for the account, you will need to provide the SIP address.
-
-The Exchange server address will need to be provided if the device can't find a server associated with the login credentials. Microsoft Surface Hub will use the Exchange server to talk to ActiveSync, which enables several key features on the device.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Manage Microsoft Surface Hub](manage-surface-hub.md)
-
-[Microsoft Surface Hub administrator's guide](surface-hub-administrators-guide.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/connect-and-display-with-surface-hub.md b/devices/surface-hub/connect-and-display-with-surface-hub.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5fd13d7b95..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/connect-and-display-with-surface-hub.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,494 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Connect other devices and display with Surface Hub
-description: You can connect other device to your Surface Hub to display content.
-ms.assetid: 8BB80FA3-D364-4A90-B72B-65F0F0FC1F0D
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Connect other devices and display with Surface Hub
-
-
-You can connect other devices to your Microsoft Surface Hub to display content. This topic describes the Guest Mode, Replacement PC Mode, and Video Out functionality available through wired connections, and also lists accessories that you can connect to Surface Hub using [Bluetooth](#bluetooth-accessories).
-
->[!NOTE]
->Surface Hub will use the video input that you select until a new connection is made, the existing connection is disrupted, or the Connect App is closed.
-
-## Which method should I choose?
-
-When connecting external devices and displays to a Surface Hub, there are several available options. The method you use will depend upon your scenario and needs.
-
-| When you want to: | Use this method: |
-| --- | --- |
-| Mirror the Surface Hub's display on another device. | [Video Out](#video-out) |
-| Present another device's display on the Surface Hub screen and interact with both the device's content and the built-in Surface Hub experience. | [Guest Mode](#guest-mode) |
-| Power the Surface Hub from an external Windows 10 PC, turning off the embedded computer of the Surface Hub. Cameras, microphones, speakers, and other peripherals, are sent to the external PC, in addition to pen and touch. | [Replacement PC Mode](#replacement-pc-mode) |
-
-
-## Guest Mode
-
-
-Guest Mode uses a wired connection, so people can display content from their devices to the Surface Hub. If the source device is Windows-based, that device can also provide Touchback and Inkback. Surface Hub's internal PC takes video and audio from the connected device and presents them on the Surface Hub. If Surface Hub encounters a High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP) signal, the source will be displayed as a black image. To display your content without violating HDCP requirements, use the keypad on the right side of the Surface Hub to directly choose the external source.
-
->[!NOTE]
->When an HDCP source is connected, use the side keypad to change source inputs.
-
-### Ports
-
-Use these ports on the Surface Hub for Guest Mode.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Interface
-
Type
-
Description
-
Capabilities
-
-
-
-
-
Display Port 1.1a
-
Video input
-
Guest input #1
-
-
Support simultaneous guest input display with guest input #2 and guest input #3 (one full resolution, two thumbnail).
-
HDCP compliant in bypass mode
-
Touchback enabled
-
-
-
-
HDMI 1.4
-
Video input
-
Guest input #2
-
-
Support simultaneous guest input display with guest input #1 and guest input #3 (one full resolution, two thumbnail).
-
HDCP compliant in bypass mode
-
Touchback enabled
-
-
-
-
VGA
-
Video input
-
Guest input #3
-
-
Support simultaneous guest input display with guest input #1 and guest input #2 (one full resolution, two thumbnail).
-
HDCP compliant in bypass mode
-
Touchback enabled
-
-
-
-
3.5 mm jack
-
Audio input
-
Analog audio input
-
-
Ingest into Surface Hub PC, usually with the VGA video input.
-
-
-
-
USB 2.0, type B
-
USB out
-
Touchback
-
-
Provides access to the HID input devices mouse, touch, keyboard, and stylus back to the guest PC.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Port locations
-
-These are the port connections used for Guest Mode on the 55" and 84" Surface Hubs.
-
-
-
-Wired port connections on 55" Surface Hub
-
-
-
-Wired port connections on 84" Surface Hub
-
-### Port enumeration
-
-When a Surface hub is connected to a guest computer with the wired connect USB port, a number of USB devices are discovered and configured. These peripheral devices are created for Touchback and Inkback. The peripheral devices can be viewed in Device Manager. Device Manager will show duplicate names for some devices.
-
-**Human interface devices**
-
-- HID-compliant consumer control device
-
-- HID-compliant pen
-
-- HID-compliant pen (duplicate item)
-
-- HID-compliant pen (duplicate item)
-
-- HID-compliant touch screen
-
-- USB Input Device
-
-- USB Input Device (duplicate item)
-
-**Keyboards**
-
-- Standard PS/2 keyboard
-
-**Mice and other pointing devices**
-
-- HID-compliant mouse
-
-**Universal serial bus controllers**
-
-- Generic USB hub
-
-- USB composite device
-
-### Guest Mode connectivity
-
-Your choice of video cable will be determined by what is available from your source input. The Surface Hub has three choices of video input: DisplayPort, HDMI, and VGA. See the following chart for available resolutions.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Signal Type
-
Resolution
-
Frame rate
-
HDMI - RGB
-
DisplayPort
-
VGA
-
-
-
-
-
PC
-
640 x 480
-
59.94/60
-
X
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
PC
-
720 x 480
-
59.94/60
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
PC
-
1024 x 768
-
60
-
X
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
HDTV
-
720p
-
59.94/60
-
X
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
HDTV
-
1080p
-
59.94/60
-
X
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Source audio is provided by DisplayPort and HDMI cables. If you must use VGA, Surface Hub has an audio input port that uses a 3.5 mm plug. Surface Hub also uses a USB cable that provides Touchback and Inkback from the Surface Hub to compatible Windows 10 devices. The USB cable can be used with any video input that is already connected with a cable.
-
-Someone using Guest Mode to connect a PC would use one of these options:
-
-**DisplayPort** -- DisplayPort cable and USB 2.0 cable
-
-**HDMI** -- HDMI cable and USB 2.0 cable
-
-**VGA** -- VGA cable, 3.5 mm audio cable, and USB 2.0 cable
-
-If the computer you are using for Guest Mode is not compatible with Touchback and Inkback, then you won't need the USB cable.
-
-## Replacement PC Mode
-
-
-In Replacement PC Mode, the embedded computer of the Surface Hub is turned off and an external PC is connected to the Surface Hub. Connections to replacement PC ports give access to key peripherals on the Surface Hub, including the screen, pen, and touch features. This does mean that your Surface Hub won’t have the benefit of the Windows Team experience, but you will have the flexibility offered by providing and managing your own Windows computer.
-
-### Software requirements
-
-You can run Surface Hub in Replacement PC Mode with 64-bit versions of Windows 10 Home, Windows 10 Pro, and Windows 10 Enterprise. You can download the [Surface Hub Replacement PC driver package](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=52210) from the Microsoft Download Center. We recommend that you install these drivers on any computer you plan to use as a replacement PC.
-
-### Hardware requirements
-
-Surface Hub is compatible with a range of hardware. Choose the processor and memory confirmation for your replacement PC so that it supports the programs you'll be using. Your replacement PC hardware needs to support 64-bit versions of Windows 10.
-
-### Graphics adapter
-
-In Replacement PC Mode, Surface Hub supports any graphics adapter that can produce a DisplayPort signal. You'll improve your experience with a graphics adapter that can match Surface Hub's resolution and refresh rate. For example, the best and recommended replacement PC experience on the Surface Hub is with a 120Hz video signal.
-
-**55" Surface Hubs** - For best experience, use a graphics card capable of 1080p resolution at 120Hz.
-
-**84" Surface Hubs** - For best experience, use a graphics card capable of outputting four DisplayPort 1.2 streams to produce 2160p at 120Hz (3840 x 2160 at 120Hz vertical refresh). We've verified that this works with the NVIDIA Quadro K2200, NVIDIA Quadro K4200, NVIDIA Quadro M6000, AMD FirePro W5100, AMD FirePro W7100, and AMD FirePro W9100. These are not the only graphics cards - others are available from other vendors.
-
-Check directly with graphics card vendors for the latest drivers.
-
-
-
-
-
-### Ports
-
-Replacement PC ports on 55" Surface Hub
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Description
-
Type
-
Interface
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
PC video
-
Video input
-
DP 1.2
-
-
Full screen display of 1080p at 120 Hz, plus audio
-
HDCP compliant
-
-
-
-
Internal peripherals
-
USB output
-
USB 2.0 type B
-
-
Touch
-
Pen
-
Speakers
-
Microphone
-
Cameras
-
NFC sensor
-
Ambient light sensor
-
Passive infrared sensor
-
-
-
-
USB hub
-
USB output
-
USB 2.0 type B
-
-
Underneath USB ports
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Replacement PC ports on 84" Surface Hub
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Description
-
Type
-
Interface
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
PC video
-
Video input
-
DP 1.2 (2x)
-
-
Full screen display of 2160p at 120 Hz, plus audio
-
HDCP compliant
-
-
-
-
Internal peripherals
-
USB output
-
USB 2.0 type B
-
-
Touch
-
Pen
-
Speakers
-
Microphone
-
Cameras
-
NFC sensor
-
Ambient light sensor
-
Passive infrared sensor
-
-
-
-
USB hub
-
USB output
-
USB 2.0 type B
-
-
Underneath USB ports
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Replacement PC setup instructions
-
-**To use Replacement PC Mode**
-
-1. Download and install the [Surface Hub Replacement PC driver package](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=52210) on the replacement PC.
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >We recommend that you set sleep or hibernation on the replacement PC so the Surface Hub will turn off the display when it isn't being used.
-
-2. Turn off the Surface Hub using the power switch next to the power cable.
-
-3. Connect the cables from the Surface Hub's replacement PC ports to the replacement PC. These ports are usually covered by a removable plastic cover.
-
- 55" Surface Hub -- connect one DisplayPort cable, and two USB cables.
-
- 84" Surface Hub -- connect two DisplayPort cables, and two USB cables.
-
-4. Toggle the Mode switch to **Replacement PC**. The Mode switch is next to the Replacement PC ports.
-
-5. Turn on the Surface Hub using the power switch next to the power cable.
-
-6. Press the power button on the right side of the Surface Hub.
-
-You can switch the Surface Hub to use the internal PC.
-
-**To switch back to internal PC**
-
-1. Turn off the Surface Hub using the power switch next to the power cable.
-
-2. Toggle the Mode switch to Internal PC. The Mode switch is next to the Replacement PC ports.
-
-3. Turn on the Surface Hub using the power switch next to the power cable.
-
-
-## Video Out
-
-The Surface Hub includes a Video Out port for mirroring visual content from the Surface Hub to another display.
-
-### Ports
-
-Video Out port on the 55" Surface Hub
-
-
-
-Video Out port on the 84" Surface Hub
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Description
-
Type
-
Interface
-
Capabilities
-
-
-
-
-
Video Output Mirror
-
Video Output
-
Video Output
-
-
Supports connection to a standard DisplayPort monitor (only supports an x4 Link displaying 1080p60 resolution at 24bpp)
-
Supports use with HDMI monitors (supporting 1080p60) by using a DisplayPort-to-HDMI adaptor
-
-
-
-
-
-## Cables
-
-Both the 55” and 84” Surface Hub devices have been tested to work with Certified DisplayPort and HDMI cables. While vendors do sell longer cables that may work with the Surface Hub, only those cables that have been certified by testing labs are certain to work with the Hub. For example, DisplayPort cables are certified only up to 3 meters, however many vendors sell cables that are 3 times that length. If a long cable is necessary, we strongly suggest using HDMI. HDMI has many cost-effective solutions for long-haul cables, including the use of repeaters. Nearly every DisplayPort source will automatically switch to HDMI signaling if a HDMI sink is detected.
-
-
-## Bluetooth accessories
-
-You can connect the following accessories to Surface Hub using Bluetooth:
-
-- Mice
-- Keyboards
-- Headsets
-- Speakers
-
->[!NOTE]
->After you connect a Bluetooth headset or speaker, you might need to change the [default microphone and speaker settings](local-management-surface-hub-settings.md).
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/connect-app-in-surface-hub-unexpectedly-exits.md b/devices/surface-hub/connect-app-in-surface-hub-unexpectedly-exits.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 439d3c68d7..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/connect-app-in-surface-hub-unexpectedly-exits.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
----
-title: What to do if the Connect app in Surface Hub exits unexpectedly
-description: Describes how to resolve an issue where the Connect app in Surface Hub exits to the Welcome screen after cycling through inputs.
-ms.assetid: 9576f4e4-d936-4235-8a03-d8a6fe9e8fec
-keywords: surface, hub, connect, input, displayport
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: todmccoy
-ms.author: v-todmc
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# What to do if the Connect app in Surface Hub exits unexpectedly
-
-At times, a wired Connect session that is started from the Welcome screen by connecting a DisplayPort input will exit back to the Welcome screen after using the side keypad or the source button to cycle through all source inputs.
-
-This is an issue in the Connect app and its default full-screen state. By changing the size of the app, or by selecting a DisplayPort input thumbnail in the Connect app, you can prevent input cycling from affecting the app.
-
-The way to resolve this issue is to first launch the Connect app from the Welcome screen, and THEN connect a DisplayPort input. If the input is already connected, manually select the thumbnail.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/create-a-device-account-using-office-365.md b/devices/surface-hub/create-a-device-account-using-office-365.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ff76987746..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/create-a-device-account-using-office-365.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,387 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Create a device account using UI (Surface Hub)
-description: If you prefer to use a graphical user interface, you can create a device account for your Microsoft Surface Hub with either the Office 365 UI or the Exchange Admin Center.
-ms.assetid: D11BCDC4-DABA-4B9A-9ECB-58E02CC8218C
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: create device account, Office 365 UI, Exchange Admin center, Microsoft 365 admin center, Skype for Business, mobile device mailbox policy
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 05/04/2018
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Create a device account using UI (Surface Hub)
-
-
-If you prefer to use a graphical user interface, you can create a device account for your Microsoft Surface Hub with either the [Office 365 UI](#create-device-acct-o365) or the [Exchange Admin Center](#create-device-acct-eac).
-
-## Create a device account using Office 365
-
-
-1. [Create the account in the Microsoft 365 Admin Center](#create-device-acct-o365-admin-ctr).
-2. [Create a mobile device mailbox (ActiveSync) policy from the Microsoft Exchange Admin Center](#create-device-acct-o365-mbx-policy).
-3. [Use PowerShell to complete device account creation](#create-device-acct-o365-complete-acct).
-4. [Use PowerShell to configure Exchange properties of the account](#create-device-acct-o365-configure-exch-prop).
-5. [Enable the account with Skype for Business](#create-device-acct-o365-skype-for-business).
-
-### Create the account in the admin center
-
-1. Sign in to Office 365 by visiting https://portal.office.com
-2. Provide the admin credentials for your Office 365 tenant. This will take you to your Microsoft 365 Admin Center.
-
- 
-
-3. In the admin center, navigate to **Resources** in the left panel, and then click **Rooms & equipment**.
-
- 
-
-4. Click **Add** to create a new Room account. Enter a display name and email address for the account, and then click **Add**.
-
- 
-
-5. Select the Room account you just created in the Active Users list. In the right panel, you can see the account properties and several optional actions. Click **Reset password** to change the password, and unselect **Make this user change their password when they first sign in**, because it is not possible to change the password from the Surface Hub sign-in flow.
-
-6. In the **Assigned license** section, click **Edit**, and then click the dropdown arrow next to the appropriate license to expand the details. Select a user location, and in the list of licenses, toggle on **Skype for Business Online (Plan 2)**, and then click **Save**. The license may vary depending on your organization (for example, you might have Plan 2 or Plan 3).
-
-### Create a mobile device mailbox (ActiveSync) policy from the Exchange Admin Center
-
-1. In the admin center’s left panel, click **ADMIN**, and then click **Exchange**.
-
- 
-
-2. This will open another tab on your browser to take you to the Exchange Admin Center, where you can create and set the Mailbox Setting for Surface Hub.
-
- 
-
-3. To create a Mobile Device Mailbox Policy, click **Mobile** from the left panel and then click **Mobile device mailbox policies**. Surface Hubs require an account with a mobile device mailbox policy that does not require a password, so if you already have an existing policy that matches this requirement, you can apply that policy to the account. Otherwise use the following steps to create a new one to be used only for Surface Hub device accounts.
-
- 
-
-4. To create a New Surface Hub mobile device mailbox policy, click the **+** button from the controls above the list of policies to add a new policy. For the name, provide a name that will help you distinguish this policy from other device accounts (for example, *SurfaceHubDeviceMobilePolicy*). Make sure the policy does not require a password for the devices assigned to, so make sure **Require a Password** remains unchecked, then click **Save**.
-
- 
-
-5. After you have created the new mobile device mailbox policy, go back to the **Exchange Admin Center** and you will see the new policy listed.
-
- 
-
-
-
-### Use PowerShell to complete device account creation
-
-From here on, you'll need to finish the account creation process using PowerShell to set up some configuration.
-
-In order to run cmdlets used by these PowerShell scripts, the following must be installed for the admin PowerShell console:
-
-- [Microsoft Online Services Sign-In Assistant for IT Professionals RTW](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=41950)
-- [Windows Azure Active Directory Module for Windows PowerShell](https://www.microsoft.com/web/handlers/webpi.ashx/getinstaller/WindowsAzurePowershellGet.3f.3f.3fnew.appids)
-- [Skype for Business Online, Windows PowerShell Module](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=39366)
-
-Install the following module in Powershell
-``` syntax
- install-module AzureAD
- Install-module MsOnline
-```
-
-### Connecting to online services
-
-1. Run Windows PowerShell as Administrator.
-
- 
-
-2. Create a Credentials object, then create a new session that connects to Skype for Business Online, and provide the global tenant administrator account, then click **OK**.
-
- 
-
-3. To connect to Microsoft Online Services, run:
-
- ``` syntax
- Connect-MsolService -Credential $Cred
- ```
-
- 
-
-4. Now to connect to Skype for Business Online Services, run:
-
- ``` syntax
- $sfbsession = New-CsOnlineSession -Credential $cred
- ```
-
- 
-
-5. Finally, to connect to Exchange Online Services, run:
-
- ``` syntax
- $exchangeSession = New-PSSession -ConfigurationName Microsoft.Exchange -ConnectionUri "https://outlook.office365.com/powershell-liveid/" -Credential $cred -Authentication "Basic" –AllowRedirection
- ```
-
- 
-
-6. Now you have to import the Skype for Business Online Session and the Exchange Online session you have just created, which will import the Exchange and Skype Commands so you can use them locally.
-
- ``` syntax
- Import-PSSession $exchangesession -AllowClobber -WarningAction SilentlyContinue
- Import-PSSession $sfbsession -AllowClobber -WarningAction SilentlyContinue
- ```
-
- Note that this could take a while to complete.
-
- 
-
-7. Once you’re connected to the online services you need to run a few more cmdlets to configure this account as a Surface Hub device account.
-
-### Use PowerShell to configure Exchange properties of the account
-
-Now that you're connected to the online services, you can finish setting up the device account. You'll use the device account email address to:
-
-- Change the mailbox type from regular to room.
-- Set the password and enable the room mailbox account
-- Change various Exchange properties
-- Set the user account password to never expire.
-
-1. You’ll need to enter the account’s mail address and create a variable with that value:
-
- ```powershell
- $mailbox = (Get-Mailbox )
- ```
-
- To store the value get it from the mailbox:
-
- ```powershell
- $strEmail = $mailbox.WindowsEmailAddress
- ```
-
- Print the value:
-
- ```powershell
- $strEmail
- ```
-
- You will see the correct email address.
-
- 
-
-2. Run the following cmdlet:
-
- ```powershell
- Set-CASMailbox $strEmail -ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy "SurfaceHubDeviceMobilePolicy"
- ```
-
-4. Various Exchange properties can be set on the device account to improve the meeting experience. You can see which properties need to be set in the [Exchange properties](exchange-properties-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md) section.
-
- ``` syntax
- Set-CalendarProcessing -Identity $strEmail -AutomateProcessing AutoAccept -AddOrganizerToSubject $false –AllowConflicts $false –DeleteComments $false -DeleteSubject $false -RemovePrivateProperty $false
- Set-CalendarProcessing -Identity $strEmail -AddAdditionalResponse $true -AdditionalResponse "This is a Surface Hub room!"
- ```
-
- 
-
-5. If you decide to have the password not expire, you can set that with PowerShell cmdlets too. See [Password management](password-management-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md) for more information.
-
- ``` syntax
- Set-MsolUser -UserPrincipalName $strEmail -PasswordNeverExpires $True
- ```
-
-### Enable the account with Skype for Business
-
-Enable the device account with Skype for Business.
-
-In order to enable Skype for Business, your environment will need to meet the following prerequisites:
-
-- You'll need to have Skype for Business Online Standalone Plan 2 or higher in your O365 plan. The plan needs to support conferencing capability.
-- If you need Enterprise Voice (PSTN telephony) using telephony service providers for the Surface Hub, you need Skype for Business Online Standalone Plan 3.
-- Your tenant users must have Exchange mailboxes.
-- Your Surface Hub account does require a Skype for Business Online Standalone Plan 2 or Skype for Business Online Standalone Plan 3 license, but it does not require an Exchange Online license.
-
-1. Start by creating a remote PowerShell session from a PC.
-
- ```PowerShell
- Import-Module SkypeOnlineConnector
- $cssess=New-CsOnlineSession -Credential $cred
- Import-PSSession $cssess -AllowClobber
- ```
-
-2. To enable your Surface Hub account for Skype for Business Server, run this cmdlet:
-
- ```PowerShell
- Enable-CsMeetingRoom -Identity $strEmail -RegistrarPool "sippoolbl20a04.infra.lync.com" -SipAddressType EmailAddress
- ```
-
- If you aren't sure what value to use for the `RegistrarPool` parameter in your environment, you can get the value from an existing Skype for Business user using this cmdlet:
-
- ```PowerShell
- Get-CsOnlineUser -Identity ‘alice@contoso.microsoft.com’| fl *registrarpool*
- ```
-
-## Create a device account using the Exchange Admin Center
-
->[!NOTE]
->This method will only work if you are syncing from an on-premises Active Directory.
-
-You can use the Exchange Admin Center to create a device account:
-
-1. [Create an account and mailbox with the Exchange Admin Center](#create-device-acct-exch-admin-ctr).
-2. [Create a mobile device mailbox policy from the Exchange Admin Center](#create-device-acct-exch-mbx-policy).
-3. [Use PowerShell to configure the account](#create-device-acct-exch-powershell-conf).
-4. [Enable the account with Skype for Business](#create-device-acct-exch-skype-for-business).
-
-### Create an account and mailbox with the Exchange Admin Center
-
-1. Sign in to your Exchange Admin Center using Exchange admin credentials.
-2. Once you are at the Exchange Admin Center (EAC), navigate to **Recipients** in the left panel.
-
- 
-
-3. On the controls above the list of mailboxess, choose **+** to create a new one, and provide a **Display name**, **Name**, and **User logon name**, and then click **Save**.
-
- 
-
-### Create a mobile device mailbox policy from the Exchange Admin Center
-
->[!NOTE]
->If you want to create and assign a policy to the account you created, and are using Exchange 2010, look up the corresponding information regarding policy creation and policy assignment when using the EMC (Exchange management console).
-
-
-
-1. Go to the Exchange Admin Center.
-
- 
-
-2. To create a mobile device mailbox policy, click **Mobile** from the left panel, then **Mobile device mailbox policies**. Surface Hubs require an account with a mobile device mailbox policy that does not require a password, so if you already have an existing policy that matches this requirement, you can apply that policy to the account. Otherwise use the following steps to create a new one to be used only for Surface Hub device accounts.
-
- 
-
-3. To create a new mobile device account mailbox policy, click the **+** button from the controls above the list of policies to add a new policy. For the name provide a name that will help you distinguish this policy from other device accounts (for example, *SurfaceHubDeviceMobilePolicy*). The policy must not be password-protected, so make sure **Require a Password** remains unchecked, then click **Save**.
-
- 
-
-4. After you have created the new mobile device mailbox policy, go back to the Exchange Admin Center and you will see the new policy listed.
-
- 
-
-5. To apply the ActiveSync policy without using PowerShell, you can do the following:
-
- - In the EAC, click **Recipients** > **Mailboxes** and select a mailbox.
-
- 
-
- - In the **Details** pane, scroll to **Phone and Voice Features** and click **View details** to display the **Mobile Device Details** screen.
-
- 
-
- - The mobile device mailbox policy that’s currently assigned is displayed. To change the mobile device mailbox policy, click **Browse**.
-
- 
-
- - Choose the appropriate mobile device mailbox policy from the list, click **OK** and then click **Save**.
-
- 
-
-### Use PowerShell to configure the account
-
-Now that you're connected to the online services, you can finish setting up the device account. You'll use the device account email address to:
-
-- Change the mailbox type from regular to room.
-- Change various Exchange properties
-- Set the user account password to never expire.
-
-1. You’ll need to enter the account’s mail address and create a variable with that value:
-
- ``` syntax
- $mailbox = (Get-Mailbox )
- ```
-
- To store the value got it from the mailbox:
-
- ``` syntax
- $strEmail = $mailbox.WindowsEmailAddress
- ```
-
- Print the value by running:
-
- ``` syntax
- $strEmail
- ```
-
- You will see the correct email address.
-
-2. You need to convert the account into a room mailbox, so run:
-
- ``` syntax
- Set-Mailbox $strEmail -Type Room
- ```
-
-3. In order for the device account to be authenticated on a Surface Hub, you need to enable the room mailbox account and set a password, so the account can be used by the device to get meeting information using ActiveSync and log in to Skype for Business.
-
- ``` syntax
- Set-Mailbox $strEmail -RoomMailboxPassword (ConvertTo-SecureString -String "" -AsPlainText -Force) -EnableRoomMailboxAccount $true
- ```
-
-4. Various Exchange properties can be set on the device account to improve the meeting experience. You can see which properties need to be set in the [Exchange properties](exchange-properties-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md) section.
-
- ``` syntax
- Set-CalendarProcessing -Identity $strEmail -AutomateProcessing AutoAccept -AddOrganizerToSubject $false –AllowConflicts $false –DeleteComments $false -DeleteSubject $false -RemovePrivateProperty $false
- Set-CalendarProcessing -Identity $strEmail -AddAdditionalResponse $true -AdditionalResponse "This is a Surface Hub room!"
- ```
-
-5. Now we have to set some properties in AD. To do that, you need the alias of the account (this is the part of the UPN that becomes before the “@”).
-
- ``` syntax
- $strAlias = “”
- ```
-
-6. The user needs to be enabled in AD before it can authenticate with a Surface Hub. Run:
-
- ``` syntax
- Set-ADUser $strAlias -Enabled $True
- ```
-
-7. If you decide to have the password not expire, you can set that with PowerShell cmdlets too. See [Password management](password-management-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md) for more information.
-
- ``` syntax
- Set-ADUser $strAlias -PasswordNeverExpires $True
- ```
-
-### Enable the account with Skype for Business
-
-Enable the device account with Skype for Business.
-
-In order to enable Skype for Business, your environment will need to meet the following prerequisites:
-
-- You'll need to have Skype for Business Online Standalone Plan 2 or higher in your O365 plan. The plan needs to support conferencing capability.
-- If you need Enterprise Voice (PSTN telephony) using telephony service providers for the Surface Hub, you need Skype for Business Online Standalone Plan 3.
-- Your tenant users must have Exchange mailboxes.
-- Your Surface Hub account does require a Skype for Business Online Standalone Plan 2 or Skype for Business Online Standalone Plan 3 license, but it does not require an Exchange Online license.
-
-1. Start by creating a remote PowerShell session from a PC.
-
- ```PowerShell
- Import-Module SkypeOnlineConnector
- $cssess=New-CsOnlineSession -Credential $cred
- Import-PSSession $cssess -AllowClobber
- ```
-
-2. Retrieve your Surface Hub account Registrar Pool
-
-If you aren't sure what value to use for the `RegistrarPool` parameter in your environment, you can get the value from an existing Skype for Business user using this cmdlet:
-
- ```PowerShell
- Get-CsOnlineUser -Identity ‘alice@contoso.microsoft.com’| fl *registrarpool*
- ```
-
-3. To enable your Surface Hub account for Skype for Business Server, run this cmdlet:
-
- ```PowerShell
- Enable-CsMeetingRoom -Identity $strEmail -RegistrarPool "sippoolbl20a04.infra.lync.com" -SipAddressType EmailAddress
- ```
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/create-and-test-a-device-account-surface-hub.md b/devices/surface-hub/create-and-test-a-device-account-surface-hub.md
deleted file mode 100644
index dc72c7463a..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/create-and-test-a-device-account-surface-hub.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,75 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Create and test a device account (Surface Hub)
-description: This topic introduces how to create and test the device account that Microsoft Surface Hub uses to communicate with Microsoft Exchange and Skype.
-ms.assetid: C8605B5F-2178-4C3A-B4E0-CE32C70ECF67
-ms.reviewer: rikot
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: create and test device account, device account, Surface Hub and Microsoft Exchange, Surface Hub and Skype
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 03/06/2018
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.audience: itpro
----
-
-# Create and test a device account (Surface Hub)
-
-
-This topic introduces how to create and test the device account that Microsoft Surface Hub uses to communicate with Microsoft Exchange and Skype.
-
-A **device account** is an Exchange resource account that Surface Hub uses to:
-
-- Display its meeting calendar
-- Join Teams or Skype for Business calls
-- Send email (for example, email whiteboard content from a meeting)
-
-Once the device account is provisioned to a Surface Hub, people can add this account to a meeting invitation the same way that they would invite a meeting room.
-
-## Configuration overview
-
-This table explains the main steps and configuration decisions when you create a device account.
-
-| Step | Description | Purpose |
-|------|---------------------------------|--------------------------------------|
-| 1 | Created a logon-enabled Exchange resource mailbox (Exchange 2013 or later, or Exchange Online) | This resource mailbox allows the device to maintain a meeting calendar, receive meeting requests, and send mail. It must be logon-enabled to be provisioned to a Surface Hub. |
-| 2 | Configure mailbox properties | The mailbox must be configured with the correct properties to enable the best meeting experience on Surface Hub. For more information on mailbox properties, see [Mailbox properties](exchange-properties-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md). |
-| 3 | Apply a compatible mobile device mailbox policy to the mailbox | Surface Hub is managed using mobile device management (MDM) rather than through mobile device mailbox policies. For compatibility, the device account must have a mobile device mailbox policy where the **PasswordEnabled** setting is set to False. Otherwise, Surface Hub can't sync mail and calendar info. |
-| 4 | Enable mailbox with Skype for Business (Lync Server 2013 or later, or Skype for Business Online) | Skype for Business must be enabled to use conferencing features like video calls, IM, and screen sharing. |
-| 5 | (Optional) Whitelist ActiveSync Device ID | Your organization may have a global policy that prevents device accounts from syncing mail and calendar info. If so, you need to whitelist the ActiveSync Device ID of your Surface Hub. |
-| 6 | (Optional) Disable password expiration | To simplify management, you can turn off password expiration for the device account and allow Surface Hub to automatically rotate the device account password. For more information about password management, see [Password management](password-management-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md). |
-
-## Detailed configuration steps
-
-We recommend setting up your device accounts using remote PowerShell. There are PowerShell scripts available to help create and validate device accounts For more information on PowerShell scripts and instructions, see [Appendix A: PowerShell](appendix-a-powershell-scripts-for-surface-hub.md).
-
-For detailed steps using PowerShell to provision a device account, choose an option from the table, based on your organization deployment.
-
-| Organization deployment | Description |
-|---------------------------------|--------------------------------------|
-| [Online deployment (Office 365)](online-deployment-surface-hub-device-accounts.md) | Your organization's environment is deployed entirely on Office 365. |
-| [On-premises deployment (single-forest)](on-premises-deployment-surface-hub-device-accounts.md) | Your organization has servers that it controls and uses to host Active Directory, Exchange, and Skype for Business (or Lync) in a single-forest environment. |
-| [On-premises deployment (multiple forests)](on-premises-deployment-surface-hub-multi-forest.md) | Your organization has servers that it controls and uses to host Active Directory, Exchange, and Skype for Business (or Lync) in a multi-forest environment. |
-| [Hybrid deployment](hybrid-deployment-surface-hub-device-accounts.md) | Your organization has a mix of services, with some hosted on-premises and some hosted online through Office 365. |
-| [Online or hybrid deployment using Skype Hybrid Voice environment](skype-hybrid-voice.md) | Your organization has Skype for Business home pools and Exchange servers in the cloud, and uses an on-premises pool of Skype for Business 2015 or Cloud Connector edition connected via Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). |
-
-
-If you prefer to use a graphical user interface (UI), some steps can be done using UI instead of PowerShell.
-For more information, see [Creating a device account using UI](create-a-device-account-using-office-365.md).
-
-## Account verification and testing
-
-There are two methods available that you can use to validate and test a Surface Hub device account: [account verifications scripts](appendix-a-powershell-scripts-for-surface-hub.md#acct-verification-ps-scripts) and the [Surface Hub Hardware Diagnostic app](https://www.microsoft.com/store/apps/9nblggh51f2g). The account verification script will validate a previously-created device account using PowerShell from your desktop. The Surface Hub Hardware Diagnostic app is installed on your Surface Hub and provides detailed feedback about signin and communication failures. Both are valuable tools to test newly created device accounts and should be used to ensure optimal account availability.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/device-reset-surface-hub.md b/devices/surface-hub/device-reset-surface-hub.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6d7d33415f..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/device-reset-surface-hub.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,123 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Reset or recover a Surface Hub
-description: Describes the reset and recovery processes for the Surface Hub, and provides instructions.
-ms.assetid: 44E82EEE-1905-464B-A758-C2A1463909FF
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: reset Surface Hub, recover
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 07/31/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Reset or recover a Surface Hub
-
-This article describes how to reset or recover a Microsoft Surface Hub.
-
-[Resetting the Surface Hub](#reset-a-surface-hub) returns its operating system to the last cumulative Windows update, and removes all local user files and configuration information. The information that is removed includes the following:
-
-- The device account
-- Account information for the device's local administrators
-- Domain-join or Azure AD-join information
-- Mobile Device Management (MDM) enrollment information
-- Configuration information that was set by using MDM or the Settings app
-
-[Recovering a Surface Hub from the cloud](#recover-a-surface-hub-from-the-cloud) also removes this information. In addition, the Surface Hub downloads a new operating system image and installs it. You can specify whether the recovery process preserves other information that is stored on the Surface Hub.
-
-## Reset a Surface Hub
-
-You may have to reset your Surface Hub for reasons such as the following:
-
-- You are re-purposing the device for a new meeting space and want to reconfigure it.
-- You want to change how you locally manage the device.
-- The user name or password for the device account or the Administrator account has been lost.
-- After you install an update, the performance of the device decreases.
-
-During the reset process, if you see a blank screen for long periods of time, please wait and do not take any action.
-
-> [!WARNING]
-> The device reset process may take up to six hours. Do not turn off or unplug the Surface Hub until the process has finished. If you interrupt the process, the device becomes inoperable. The device requires warranty service in order to become functional again.
-
-1. On your Surface Hub, open **Settings**.
-
- 
-
-1. Select **Update & Security**.
-
- 
-
-1. Select **Recovery**, and then, under **Reset device**, select **Get started**.
-
- 
-
- After the reset process finishes, the Surface Hub starts the [first run program](first-run-program-surface-hub.md) again. If the reset process encounters a problem, it rolls the Surface Hub back to the previously-existing operating system image and then displays the Welcome screen.
-
-
-
-## Recover a Surface Hub from the cloud
-
-If for some reason the Surface Hub becomes unusable, you can still recover it from the cloud without assistance from Microsoft Support. The Surface Hub can download a fresh operating system image from the cloud, and use that image to reinstall its operating system.
-
-You may have to use this type of recovery process under the following circumstances:
-
-- [The Surface Hub or its related accounts have entered an unstable state](#recover-a-surface-hub-in-a-bad-state)
-- [The Surface Hub is locked](#recover-a-locked-surface-hub)
-
->[!IMPORTANT]
->The **Recover from the cloud** process requires an open internet connection (no proxy or other authentications). An ethernet connection is recommended.
-
-### Recover a Surface Hub in a bad state
-
-If the device account gets into an unstable state or if the administrator account encounters problems, you can use the Settings app to start the cloud recovery process. You should only use the cloud recovery process when the [device reset](#reset-a-surface-hub) process doesn't fix the problem.
-
-1. On your Surface Hub, select **Settings** > **Update & security** > **Recovery**.
-
-1. Under **Recover from the cloud**, select **Restart now**.
-
- 
-
-### Recover a locked Surface Hub
-
-On rare occasions, a Surface Hub may encounter an error while cleaning up user and app data at the end of a session. When this happens, the device automatically restarts and tries the operation again. But if this operation fails repeatedly, the device automatically locks to protect user data. To unlock it, you must [reset the device](#reset-a-surface-hub) or, if that doesn't work, recover it from the cloud.
-
-1. Locate the power switch on the bottom of Surface Hub. The power switch is next to the power cord connection. For more information about the power switch, see the [Surface Hub Site Readiness Guide (PDF)](surface-hub-site-readiness-guide.md).
-
-1. While the Surface Hub displays the Welcome screen, use the power switch to turn off the Surface Hub.
-
-1. Use the power switch to turn the Surface Hub back on. The device starts and displays the Surface Hub Logo screen. When you see spinning dots under the Surface Hub Logo, use the power switch to turn the Surface Hub off again.
-
-1. Repeat step 3 three times, or until the Surface Hub displays the “Preparing Automatic Repair” message. After it displays this message, the Surface Hub displays the Windows RE screen.
-
-1. Select **Advanced Options**.
-
-1. Select **Recover from the cloud**. (Optionally, you can select **Reset**. However, **Recover from the cloud** is the recommended approach.)
-
- 
-1. If you are prompted to enter the Bitlocker key, do one of the following:
-
- - To preserve the information that Bitlocker protects on the Surface Hub, enter the Bitlocker key.
- - To discard the protected information, select **Skip this drive**
-
-1. When you are prompted, select **Reinstall**.
-
- 
-
-1. To repartition the disk, select **Yes**.
-
- 
-
- First, the recovery process downloads the operating system image from the cloud.
-
- 
-
- When the download finishes, the recovery process restores the Surface Hub according to the options that you selected.
-
-## Related topics
-
-[Manage Microsoft Surface Hub](manage-surface-hub.md)
-
-[Microsoft Surface Hub administrator's guide](surface-hub-administrators-guide.md)
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/differences-between-surface-hub-and-windows-10-enterprise.md b/devices/surface-hub/differences-between-surface-hub-and-windows-10-enterprise.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 73a50f66c9..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/differences-between-surface-hub-and-windows-10-enterprise.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,172 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Operating system essentials (Surface Hub)
-description: This topic explains unique aspects of the Windows 10 Team operating system and how it differs from Windows 10 Enterprise.
-keywords: change history
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 06/20/2019
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Operating system essentials (Surface Hub)
-
-The Surface Hub operating system, Windows 10 Team, is based on Windows 10 Enterprise, providing rich support for enterprise management, security, and other features. However, there are important differences between them. While the Enterprise edition is designed for PCs, Windows 10 Team is designed from the ground up for large screens and meeting rooms. When you evaluate security and management requirements for Surface Hub, it's best to consider it as a new operating system. This article is designed to help highlight the key differences between Windows 10 Team on Surface Hub and Windows 10 Enterprise, and what the differences mean for your organization.
-
-## User interface
-
-### Shell (OS user interface)
-
-The Surface Hub's shell is designed from the ground up to be large screen and touch optimized. It doesn't use the same shell as Windows 10 Enterprise.
-
-*Organization policies that this may affect:* Settings related to controls in the Windows 10 Enterprise shell don't apply for Surface Hub.
-
-### Lock screen and screensaver
-
-Surface Hub doesn't have a lock screen or a screen saver, but it has a similar feature called the welcome screen. The welcome screen shows scheduled meetings from the device account's calendar, and easy entry points to the Surface Hub's top apps - Skype for Business, Whiteboard, and Connect.
-
-*Organization policies that this may affect:* Settings for lock screen, screen timeout, and screen saver don't apply for Surface Hub.
-
-### User sign-in
-
-Surface Hub is designed to be used in communal spaces, such as meeting rooms. Unlike Windows PCs, anyone can walk up and use a Surface Hub without requiring a user to sign in. To enable this communal functionality, Surface Hub does not support Windows sign-in the same way that Windows 10 Enterprise does (e.g., signing in a user to the OS and using those credentials throughout the OS). Instead, there is always a local, auto signed-in, low-privilege user signed in to the Surface Hub. It doesn't support signing in any additional users, including admin users (e.g., when an admin signs in, they are not signed in to the OS).
-
-Users can sign in to a Surface Hub, but they will not be signed in to the OS. For example, when a user signs in to Apps or My Meetings and Files, the users is signed in only to the apps or services, not to the OS. As a result, the signed-in user is able to retrieve their cloud files and personal meetings stored in the cloud, and these credentials are discarded when **End session** is activated.
-
-
-*Organization policies that this may affect:* Generally, Surface Hub uses lockdown features rather than user access control to enforce security. Policies related to password requirements, interactive logon, user accounts, and access control don't apply for Surface Hub.
-
-### Saving and browsing files
-
-Users have access to a limited set of directories on the Surface Hub:
-- Music
-- Videos
-- Documents
-- Pictures
-- Downloads
-
-Files saved locally in these directories are deleted when users press **End session**. To save content created during a meeting, users should save files to a USB drive or to OneDrive.
-
-*Organization policies that this may affect:* Policies related to access permissions and ownership of files and folders don't apply for Surface Hub. Users can't browse and save files to system directories and network folders.
-
-## Applications
-
-### Default applications
-
-With few exceptions, the default Universal Windows Platform (UWP) apps on Surface Hub are also available on Windows 10 PCs.
-
-UWP apps pre-installed on Surface Hub:
-- Alarms & Clock
-- Calculator
-- Connect
-- Excel Mobile
-- Feedback Hub
-- File Explorer*
-- Get Started
-- Maps
-- Microsoft Edge
-- Microsoft Power BI
-- OneDrive
-- Photos
-- PowerPoint Mobile
-- Settings*
-- Skype for Business*
-- Store
-- Whiteboard*
-- Word Mobile
-
-*Apps with an asterisk (*) are unique to Surface Hub*
-
-*Organization policies that this may affect:* Use guidelines for Windows 10 Enterprise to determine the features and network requirements for default apps on the Surface Hub.
-
-### Installing apps, drivers, and services
-
-To help preserve the appliance-like nature of the device, Surface Hub only supports installing Universal Windows Platform (UWP) apps, and does not support installing classic Win32 apps, services and drivers. Furthermore, only admins have access to install UWP apps.
-
-*Organization policies that this may affect:* Employees can only use the apps that have been installed by admins, helping mitigate against unintended use. Surface Hub doesn't support installing Win32 agents required by most traditional PC management and monitoring tools.
-
-## Security and lockdown
-
-For Surface Hub to be used in communal spaces, such as meeting rooms, its custom OS implements many of the security and lockdown features available in Windows 10.
-
-Surface Hub implements these Windows 10 security features:
-- [UEFI Secure Boot](https://msdn.microsoft.com/windows/hardware/commercialize/manufacture/desktop/secure-boot-overview)
-- [User Mode Code Integrity (UMCI) with Device Guard](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/keep-secure/introduction-to-device-guard-virtualization-based-security-and-code-integrity-policies)
-- [Application restriction policies using AppLocker](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/keep-secure/applocker-overview)
-- [BitLocker Drive Encryption](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/keep-secure/bitlocker-overview)
-- [Trusted Platform Module (TPM)](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/keep-secure/trusted-platform-module-overview)
-- [Windows Defender](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/keep-secure/windows-defender-in-windows-10)
-- [User Account Control (UAC)](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/keep-secure/user-account-control-overview) for access to the Settings app
-
-These Surface Hub features provide additional security:
-- Custom UEFI firmware
-- Custom shell and Start menu limits device to meeting functions
-- Custom File Explorer only grants access to files and folders under My Documents
-- Custom Settings app only allows admins to modify device settings
-- Downloading advanced Plug and Play drivers is disabled
-
-*Organization policies that this may affect:* Consider these features when performing your security assessment for Surface Hub.
-
-## Management
-
-### Device settings
-
-Device settings can be configured through the Settings app. The Settings app is customized for Surface Hub, but also contains many familiar settings from Windows 10 Desktop. A User Accounts Control (UAC) prompt appears when opening up the Settings app to verify the admin's credentials, but this does not sign in the admin.
-
-*Organization policies that this may affect:* Employees can use the Surface Hub for meetings, but cannot modify any device settings. In addition to lockdown features, this ensures that employees only use the device for meeting functions.
-
-### Administrative features
-
-The administrative features in Windows 10 Enterprise, such as the Microsoft Management Console, Run, Command Prompt, PowerShell, registry editor, event viewer, and task manager are not supported on Surface Hub. The Settings app contains all of the administrative features locally available on Surface Hub.
-
-*Organization policies that this may affect:* Surface Hubs are not managed like traditional PCs. Use MDM to configure settings and OMS to monitor your Surface Hub.
-
-### Remote management and monitoring
-
-Surface Hub supports remote management through mobile device management (MDM) solutions such as [Microsoft Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/) and monitoring through [Azure Monitor](https://azure.microsoft.com/services/monitor/).
-
-*Organization policies that this may affect:* Surface Hub doesn't support installing Win32 agents required by most traditional PC management and monitoring tools, such as System Center Operations Manager.
-
-### Group Policy
-
-Surface Hub does not support Windows Group Policy, including auditing. Instead, use MDM to apply policies to your Surface Hub. For more information about MDM, see [Manage settings with an MDM provider](manage-settings-with-mdm-for-surface-hub.md).
-
-*Organization policies that this may affect:* Use MDM to manage Surface Hub rather than group policy.
-
-### Remote assistance
-
-Surface Hub does not support remote assistance.
-
-*Organization policies that this may affect:* Policies related to remote assistance don't apply for Surface Hub.
-
-## Network
-
-### Domain join and Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) join
-
-Surface Hub uses domain join and Azure AD join primarily to provide a directory-backed admin group. Users can't sign in with a domain account. For more information, see [Admin group management](admin-group-management-for-surface-hub.md).
-
-*Organization policies that this may affect:* Group policies are not applied when a Surface Hub is joined to your domain. Policies related to domain membership don't apply for Surface Hub.
-
-### Accessing domain resources
-
-Users can sign in to Microsoft Edge to access intranet sites and online resources (such as Office 365). If your Surface Hub is configured with a device account, the system uses it to access Exchange and Skype for Business. However, Surface Hub doesn't support accessing domain resources such as file shares and printers.
-
-*Organization policies that this may affect:* Policies related to accessing domain objects don't apply for Surface Hub.
-
-
-
-### Diagnostic data
-
-The Surface Hub OS uses the Windows 10 Connected User Experience and Telemetry component to gather and transmit diagnostic data. For more information, see [Configure Windows diagnostic data in your organization](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/manage/configure-windows-diagnostic-data-in-your-organization).
-
-*Organization policies that this may affect:* Configure diagnostic data levels for Surface Hub in the same way as you do for Windows 10 Enterprise.
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/Guide-SurfaceHub2S-Navigation.pptx b/devices/surface-hub/downloads/Guide-SurfaceHub2S-Navigation.pptx
deleted file mode 100644
index b06a6e8b44..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/Guide-SurfaceHub2S-Navigation.pptx and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/Guide-SurfaceHub2S-Office365.pptx b/devices/surface-hub/downloads/Guide-SurfaceHub2S-Office365.pptx
deleted file mode 100644
index 4fa5e3abd9..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/Guide-SurfaceHub2S-Office365.pptx and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/Guide-SurfaceHub2S-Teams.pptx b/devices/surface-hub/downloads/Guide-SurfaceHub2S-Teams.pptx
deleted file mode 100644
index 210102de52..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/Guide-SurfaceHub2S-Teams.pptx and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/Guide-SurfaceHub2S-Whiteboard.pptx b/devices/surface-hub/downloads/Guide-SurfaceHub2S-Whiteboard.pptx
deleted file mode 100644
index 6d39d374a7..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/Guide-SurfaceHub2S-Whiteboard.pptx and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/Outline-SurfaceHub2S-EndUser.pdf b/devices/surface-hub/downloads/Outline-SurfaceHub2S-EndUser.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 6c5b52d377..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/Outline-SurfaceHub2S-EndUser.pdf and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/Outline-SurfaceHub2S-HelpDesk.pdf b/devices/surface-hub/downloads/Outline-SurfaceHub2S-HelpDesk.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index ae296c8c08..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/Outline-SurfaceHub2S-HelpDesk.pdf and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/Outline-SurfaceHub2S-PowerUser.pdf b/devices/surface-hub/downloads/Outline-SurfaceHub2S-PowerUser.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 9f64a7c4f2..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/Outline-SurfaceHub2S-PowerUser.pdf and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCConnectYourPC.pdf b/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCConnectYourPC.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index fbdb9d9164..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCConnectYourPC.pdf and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCJoinTeamsMeeting.pdf b/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCJoinTeamsMeeting.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 62b86d2a00..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCJoinTeamsMeeting.pdf and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCManageTeamsMeeting.pdf b/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCManageTeamsMeeting.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index a6af26dcf9..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCManageTeamsMeeting.pdf and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCNavigationBasics.pdf b/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCNavigationBasics.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 6d8eb75ad5..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCNavigationBasics.pdf and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCScheduleTeamsMeeting.pdf b/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCScheduleTeamsMeeting.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index a33cf1b1e1..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCScheduleTeamsMeeting.pdf and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCShareSendFile.pdf b/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCShareSendFile.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 56d5c9f8c2..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCShareSendFile.pdf and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCSignInToViewMeetingsFiles.pdf b/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCSignInToViewMeetingsFiles.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 61caa64f94..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCSignInToViewMeetingsFiles.pdf and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCStartNewTeamsMeeting.pdf b/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCStartNewTeamsMeeting.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index d7a7c89268..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCStartNewTeamsMeeting.pdf and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCWhiteboardAdvanced.pdf b/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCWhiteboardAdvanced.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index aed2f55671..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCWhiteboardAdvanced.pdf and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCWhiteboardTools.pdf b/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCWhiteboardTools.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index c6dfcc3523..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/QRCWhiteboardTools.pdf and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/SurfaceHubAdoptionToolKit.pdf b/devices/surface-hub/downloads/SurfaceHubAdoptionToolKit.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 79675aaaaa..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/SurfaceHubAdoptionToolKit.pdf and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/TrainingGuide-SurfaceHub2S-EndUser.pdf b/devices/surface-hub/downloads/TrainingGuide-SurfaceHub2S-EndUser.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 9fa82b77c5..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/TrainingGuide-SurfaceHub2S-EndUser.pdf and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/TrainingGuide-SurfaceHub2S-HelpDesk.pdf b/devices/surface-hub/downloads/TrainingGuide-SurfaceHub2S-HelpDesk.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 36d552a91a..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/TrainingGuide-SurfaceHub2S-HelpDesk.pdf and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/TrainingGuide-SurfaceHub2S-PowerUser.pdf b/devices/surface-hub/downloads/TrainingGuide-SurfaceHub2S-PowerUser.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 216737e393..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/downloads/TrainingGuide-SurfaceHub2S-PowerUser.pdf and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/enable-8021x-wired-authentication.md b/devices/surface-hub/enable-8021x-wired-authentication.md
deleted file mode 100644
index bf91e2e42c..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/enable-8021x-wired-authentication.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Enable 802.1x wired authentication
-description: 802.1x Wired Authentication MDM policies have been enabled on Surface Hub devices.
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 11/15/2017
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Enable 802.1x wired authentication
-
-The [November 14, 2017 update to Windows 10](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4048954/windows-10-update-kb4048954) (build 15063.726) enables 802.1x wired authentication MDM policies on Surface Hub devices. The feature allows organizations to enforce standardized wired network authentication using the [IEEE 802.1x authentication protocol](http://www.ieee802.org/1/pages/802.1x-2010.html). This is already available for wireless authentication using WLAN profiles via MDM. This topic explains how to configure a Surface Hub for use with wired authentication.
-
-Enforcement and enablement of 802.1x wired authentication on Surface Hub can be done through MDM [OMA-URI definition](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune-classic/deploy-use/windows-10-policy-settings-in-microsoft-intune#oma-uri-settings).
-
-The primary configuration to set is the **LanProfile** policy. Depending on the authentication method selected, other policies may be required, either the **EapUserData** policy or through MDM policies for adding user or machine certificates (such as [ClientCertificateInstall](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/clientcertificateinstall-csp) for user/device certificates or [RootCATrustedCertificates](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/rootcacertificates-csp) for device certificates).
-
-## LanProfile policy element
-
-To configure Surface Hub to use one of the supported 802.1x authentication methods, utilize the following OMA-URI.
-
-```
-./Vendor/MSFT/SurfaceHub/Dot3/LanProfile
-```
-
-This OMA-URI node takes a text string of XML as a parameter. The XML provided as a parameter should conform to the [Wired LAN Profile Schema](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/cc233002.aspx) including elements from the [802.1X schema](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/cc233003.aspx).
-
-In most instances, an administrator or user can export the LanProfile XML from an existing PC that is already configured on the network for 802.1X using this following NETSH command.
-
-```
-netsh lan export profile folder=.
-```
-
-Running this command will give the following output and place a file titled **Ethernet.xml** in the current directory.
-
-```
-Interface: Ethernet
-Profile File Name: .\Ethernet.xml
-1 profile(s) were exported successfully.
-```
-
-## EapUserData policy element
-
-If your selected authentication method requires a username and password as opposed to a certificate, you can use the **EapUserData** element to specify credentials for the device to use to authenticate to the network.
-
-```
-./Vendor/MSFT/SurfaceHub/Dot3/EapUserData
-```
-
-This OMA-URI node takes a text string of XML as a parameter. The XML provided as a parameter should conform to the [PEAP MS-CHAPv2 User Properties example](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/desktop/bb891979). In the example, you will need to replace all instances of *test* and *ias-domain* with your information.
-
-
-
-## Adding certificates
-
-If your selected authentication method is certificate-based, you will need to [create a provisioning package](provisioning-packages-for-surface-hub.md), [utilize MDM](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/clientcertificateinstall-csp), or import a certificate from settings (**Settings** > **Update and Security** > **Certificates**) to deploy those certificates to your Surface Hub device in the appropriate Certificate Store. When adding certificates, each PFX must contain only one certificate (a PFX cannot have multiple certificates).
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/exchange-properties-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md b/devices/surface-hub/exchange-properties-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b6fca3a49e..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/exchange-properties-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,104 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft Exchange properties (Surface Hub)
-description: Some Microsoft Exchange properties of the device account must be set to particular values to have the best meeting experience on Microsoft Surface Hub.
-ms.assetid: 3E84393B-C425-45BF-95A6-D6502BA1BF29
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: Microsoft Exchange properties, device account, Surface Hub, Windows PowerShell cmdlet
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 06/20/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Microsoft Exchange properties (Surface Hub)
-
-
-Some Microsoft Exchange properties of the device account must be set to particular values to have the best meeting experience on Microsoft Surface Hub. The following table lists various Exchange properties based on PowerShell cmdlet parameters, their purpose, and the values they should be set to.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Property
-
Description
-
Value
-
Impact
-
-
-
-
-
AutomateProcessing
-
The AutomateProcessing parameter enables or disables calendar processing on the mailbox.
-
AutoAccept
-
The Surface Hub will be able to automatically accept or decline meeting requests based on its availability.
-
-
-
AddOrganizerToSubject
-
The AddOrganizerToSubject parameter specifies whether the meeting organizer's name is used as the subject of the meeting request.
-
$False
-
The welcome screen will not show the meeting organizer twice (instead of showing it as both the organizer and in the meeting subject).
-
-
-
AllowConflicts
-
The AllowConflicts parameter specifies whether to allow conflicting meeting requests.
-
$False
-
The Surface Hub will decline meeting requests that conflict with another meeting’s time.
-
-
-
DeleteComments
-
The DeleteComments parameter specifies whether to remove or keep any text in the message body of incoming meeting requests.
-
$False
-
The message body of meetings can be retained and retrieved from a Surface Hub if you need it during a meeting.
-
-
-
DeleteSubject
-
The DeleteSubject parameter specifies whether to remove or keep the subject of incoming meeting requests.
-
$False
-
Meeting request subjects can be shown on the Surface Hub.
-
-
-
RemovePrivateProperty
-
The RemovePrivateProperty parameter specifies whether to clear the private flag for incoming meeting requests.
-
$False
-
Private meeting subjects will show as Private on the welcome screen.
-
-
-
AddAdditionalResponse
-
The AddAdditionalResponse parameter specifies whether additional information will be sent from the resource mailbox when responding to meeting requests.
-
$True
-
When a response is sent to a meeting request, custom text will be provided in the response.
-
-
-
AdditionalResponse
-
The AdditionalResponse parameter specifies the additional information to be included in responses to meeting requests.
-
-Note This text will not be sent unless AddAdditionalResponse is set to $True.
-
-
-
-
-
Your choice—the additional response can be used to inform people how to use a Surface Hub or point them towards resources.
-
Adding an additional response message can provide people an introduction to how they can use a Surface Hub in their meeting.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/finishing-your-surface-hub-meeting.md b/devices/surface-hub/finishing-your-surface-hub-meeting.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8776870779..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/finishing-your-surface-hub-meeting.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,95 +0,0 @@
----
-title: End session - ending a Surface Hub meeting
-description: To end a Surface Hub meeting, tap End session. Surface Hub cleans up the application state, operating system state, and the user interface so that Surface Hub is ready for the next meeting.
-keywords: I am Done, end Surface Hub meeting, finish Surface Hub meeting, clean up Surface Hub meeting
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# End a Surface Hub meeting with End session
-Surface Hub is a collaboration device designed to be used in meeting spaces by different groups of people. At the end of a meeting, users can tap **End session** to clean up any sensitive data and prepare the device for the next meeting. Surface Hub will clean up, or reset, the following states:
-- Applications
-- Operating system
-- User interface
-
-This topic explains what **End session** resets for each of these states.
-
-## Applications
-When you start apps on Surface Hub, they are stored in memory and data is stored at the application level. Data is available to all users during that session (or meeting) until date is removed or overwritten. When **End session** is selected, Surface Hub application state is cleared out by closing applications, deleting browser history, resetting applications, and removing Skype logs.
-
-### Close applications
-Surface Hub closes all visible windows, including Win32 and Universal Windows Platform (UWP) applications. The application close stage uses the multitasking view to query the visible windows. Win32 windows that do not close within a certain timeframe are closed using **TerminateProcess**.
-
-### Delete browser history
-Surface Hub uses Delete Browser History (DBH) in Edge to clear Edge history and cached data. This is similar to how a user can clear out their browser history manually, but **End session** also ensures that application states are cleared and data is removed before the next session, or meeting, starts.
-
-### Reset applications
-**End session** resets the state of each application that is installed on the Surface Hub. Resetting an application clears all background tasks, application data, notifications, and user consent dialogs. Applications are returned to their first-run state for the next people that use Surface Hub.
-
-### Remove Skype logs
-Skype does not store personally-identifiable information on Surface Hub. Information is stored in the Skype service to meet existing Skype for Business guidance. Local Skype logging information is the only data removed when **End session** is selected. This includes Unified Communications Client Platform (UCCP) logs and media logs.
-
-## Operating System
-The operating system hosts a variety of information about the state of the sessions that needs to be cleared after each Surface Hub meeting.
-
-### File System
-Meeting attendees have access to a limited set of directories on the Surface Hub. When **End session** is selected, Surface Hub clears these directories:
-- Music
-- Videos
-- Documents
-- Pictures
-- Downloads
-
-Surface Hub also clears these directories, since many applications often write to them:
-- Desktop
-- Favorites
-- Recent
-- Public Documents
-- Public Music
-- Public Videos
-- Public Downloads
-
-### Credentials
-User credentials that are stored in **TokenBroker**, **PasswordVault**, or **Credential Manager** are cleared when you tap **End session**.
-
-## User interface
-User interface (UI) settings are returned to their default values when **End session** is selected.
-
-### UI items
-- Reset Quick Actions to default state
-- Clear Toast notifications
-- Reset volume levels
-- Reset sidebar width
-- Reset tablet mode layout
-- Sign user out of Office 365 meetings and files
-
-### Accessibility
-Accessibility features and apps are returned to default settings when **End session** is selected.
-- Filter keys
-- High contrast
-- Sticky keys
-- Toggle keys
-- Mouse keys
-- Magnifier
-- Narrator
-
-### Clipboard
-The clipboard is cleared to remove data that was copied to the clipboard during the session.
-
-## Frequently asked questions
-**What happens if I forget to tap End session at the end of a meeting, and someone else uses the Surface Hub later?**
-Surface Hub only cleans up meeting content when users tap **End session**. If you leave the meeting without tapping **End session**, the device will return to the welcome screen after some time. From the welcome screen, users have the option to resume the previous session or start a new one. You can also disable the ability to resume a session if **End session** is not pressed.
-
-**Are documents recoverable?**
-Removing files from the hard drive when **End session** is selected is just like any other file deletion from a hard disk drive. Third-party software might be able to recover data from the hard disk drive, but file recovery is not a supported feature on Surface Hub. To prevent data loss, always save the data you need before leaving a meeting.
-
-**Do the clean-up actions from End session comply with the US Department of Defense clearing and sanitizing standard: DoD 5220.22-M?**
-No. Currently, the clean-up actions from **End session** do not comply with this standard.
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/first-run-program-surface-hub.md b/devices/surface-hub/first-run-program-surface-hub.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 3d38a356f5..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/first-run-program-surface-hub.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,461 +0,0 @@
----
-title: First-run program (Surface Hub)
-description: The term \ 0034;first run \ 0034; refers to the series of steps you'll go through the first time you power up your Microsoft Surface Hub, and means the same thing as \ 0034;out-of-box experience \ 0034; (OOBE). This section will walk you through the process.
-ms.assetid: 07C9E84C-1245-4511-B3B3-75939AD57C49
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: first run, Surface Hub, out-of-box experience, OOBE
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# First-run program (Surface Hub)
-
-
-The term "first run" refers to the series of steps you'll go through the first time you power up your Microsoft Surface Hub, and means the same thing as "out-of-box experience" (OOBE). This section will walk you through the process.
-
-By now, you should have gone through all of the previous steps:
-
-- [Prepare your environment for Surface Hub](prepare-your-environment-for-surface-hub.md)
-- [Physically install your Surface Hub device](physically-install-your-surface-hub-device.md), and
-- [Setup worksheet](setup-worksheet-surface-hub.md)
-
-Assuming that's the case, first run should be both simple and quick.
-The normal procedure goes through six steps:
-
-1. [Hi there page](#first-page)
-2. [Set up for you page](#set-up-for-you)
-3. [Device account page](#device-account)
-4. [Name this device page](#name-this-device)
-5. [Set up admins for this device page](#setup-admins)
-6. [Update the Surface Hub](#update-surface-hub)
-
-Each of these sections also contains information about paths you might take when something is different. For example, most Surface Hubs will use a wired network connection, but some of them will be set up with wireless instead. Details are described where appropriate.
-
->[!NOTE]
->You should have the separate keyboard that came with your Surface Hub set up and ready before beginning. See the Surface Hub Setup Guide for details.
-
-
-
-## Hi there page
-
-
-This is the first screen you'll see when you power up the Surface Hub for the first time. It's where you input localization information for your device.
-
->[!NOTE]
->This is also where you begin the optional process of deploying a provisioning package. See [Create provisioning packages](provisioning-packages-for-certificates-surface-hub.md) if that's what you're doing.
-
- Select a language and the initial setup options are displayed.
-
-
-
-### Details
-
-If the default values shown are correct, then you can click **Next** to go on. Otherwise, you'll need to enter data in the appropriate boxes.
-
-- **Country/region:** Select the country or region where the Surface Hub will be used.
-- **App language:** Apps and features will display in this language and language format.
-- **Keyboard layout:** Select the keyboard layout for the on-screen and physical keyboards that will be used with your device.
-- **Time zone:** Select the time zone where the Surface Hub will be used.
-
-### What happens?
-
->[!NOTE]
-> Once the settings on this page are entered, you can't come back to this screen unless you reset the device (see [Device reset](device-reset-surface-hub.md)). Make sure that the settings are properly configured before proceeding.
-
-
-
-When the settings are accepted, the device will check for a wired network connection. If the connection is fine, it will display the [Set up for you page](#set-up-for-you). If there is a problem with the wired connection, the device will display the [Network setup page](#network-setup).
-
-If no wired connection can be found, then the device will attempt to set up a wireless connection, and will display the [Network setup page](#network-setup).
-
-## Network setup page
-
-
-If your device does not detect a wired connection that it can use to connect to a network or the Internet, you will see this page. Here you can either connect to a wireless network, or skip making the network connection.
-
-
-
-### Details
-
-This screen is shown only if the device fails to detect a wired network. If you see this screen, you have three choices:
-
-- You can select one of the wireless networks shown. If the network is secured, you'll be taken to a login page. See [Wireless network setup](#wireless) for details.
-- Click **Skip this step** to skip connecting to a network. You'll be taken to the [Set up for you page](#set-up-for-you).
- >[!NOTE]
- >If you skip this, the device will not have a network connection, and nothing that requires a network connection will work on your Surface Hub, including system updates and email and calendar synchronization. You can connect to a wireless network later using Settings (see [Wireless network management](wireless-network-management-for-surface-hub.md)).
-
-
-
-- You can plug in a network cable while this screen is visible. The device will detect it, and will add **Next** to the screen. Click **Next** to continue with making the wired connection.
-
-### What happens?
-
-If the device has a wired connection when it starts, and can establish a network or Internet connection, then this page will not be displayed. If you want to connect the device to a wireless connection, make sure no Ethernet cable is plugged in at first run, which will bring you to this screen. No matter what you choose to set up now, you can [use Settings](wireless-network-management-for-surface-hub.md) to set up different connections later.
-
-If you want to connect to a secured wireless network from this page, click on the network of your choice, and then provide the necessary information (password or account credentials) to connect. See [Wireless network setup](#wireless).
-
-## Wireless network setup
-
-
-This page will be shown when you've selected a secured wireless network.
-
-
-
-### Details
-
-- **User name:** Enter the user name for the selected wireless network.
-- **Password:** This is the password for the network.
-
-### What happens?
-
-The device will attempt to connect to the specified network. If it's successful, you'll be taken to the [Set up for you page](#set-up-for-you).
-
-## Network proxy setup
-
-
-This page will be shown when the device detects a wired connection with limited connectivity. You have three options:
-
-- You can select a wireless network to use instead of the limited wired connection.
-- You can skip connecting to a network by selecting **Skip this step**. You'll be taken to the [Set up for you page](#set-up-for-you).
- **Note** If you skip this, the device will not have a network connection, and nothing that requires a network connection will work on your Surface Hub, including things like email and calendar synchronization. You can connect to a wireless network later using Settings (see [Wireless network management](wireless-network-management-for-surface-hub.md)).
-
-
-
-- You can select **Enter proxy settings** which will allow you to specify how to use the network proxy. You'll be taken to the next screen.
-
-
-
-This is the screen you'll see if you clicked **Enter proxy settings** on the previous screen.
-
-
-
-### Details
-
-In order to make a network connection, you'll need to fill in either a script name, or the proxy server and port info.
-
-- **Proxy script:** Provide the address of a proxy script.
-- **Proxy server and port:** You can provide the proxy server address and port.
-
-### What happens?
-
-When you click **Next**, the device will attempt to connect to the proxy server. If successful, you'll be taken to the [Set up for you page](#set-up-for-you).
-
-You can skip connecting to a network by selecting **Skip this step**. You'll be taken to the [Set up for you page](#set-up-for-you).
-
->[!NOTE]
->If you skip this, the device will not have a network connection, and nothing that requires a network connection will work on your Surface Hub, including things like email and calendar synchronization. You can connect to a wireless network later using Settings (see [Wireless network management](wireless-network-management-for-surface-hub.md)).
-
-
-
-## Set up for you page
-
-
-This screen is purely informational, and shows which recommended settings have been enabled by default.
-
-
-
-### Details
-
-You should read this screen and note which services have been enabled by default. All of them can be changed using the Settings app if need be, but you should be careful about the effects of doing so. See [Intro to Surface Hub](intro-to-surface-hub.md) for details.
-
-Once you're done reviewing the settings, click **Next** to go on.
-
-### What happens?
-
-The settings shown on the page have already been made, and can't be changed until after first run is completed.
-
-## Device account page
-
-
-On this page, the Surface Hub will ask for credentials for the device account that you previously configured. (See [Create and test a device account](create-and-test-a-device-account-surface-hub.md).) The Surface Hub will attempt to discover various properties of the account, and may ask for more information on another page if it does not succeed.
-
->[!NOTE]
->This section does not cover specific errors that can happen during first run. See [Troubleshoot Surface Hub](troubleshoot-surface-hub.md) for more information on errors.
-
-
-
-
-### Details
-
-Use either a **user principal name (UPN)** or a **domain\\user name** as the account identifier in the first entry field. Use the format that matches your environment, and enter the password.
-
-
-| Environment | Required format for device account |
-|-------------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------|
-| Device account is hosted only online. | username@domain.com |
-| Device account is hosted only on-prem. | DOMAIN\username |
-| Device account is hosted online and on-prem (hybrid). | DOMAIN\username |
-
-Click **Skip setting up a device account** to skip setting up a device account. However, if you don't set up a device account, the device will not be fully integrated into your infrastructure. For example, people won't be able to:
-
-- See a meeting calendar on the Welcome screen
-- Start a meeting from the Welcome screen
-- Email whiteboards from OneNote
-- Use Skype for Business for meetings
-
-If you skip setting it up now, you can add a device account later by using the Settings app.
-
-If you click **Skip setting up a device account**, the device will display a dialog box showing what will happen if the device doesn't have a device account. If you choose **Yes, skip this**, you will be sent to the [Name this device page](#name-this-device).
-
-
-
-### What happens?
-
-The device will use the UPN or DOMAIN\\User name and password for the device account to do the following:
-
-- Check if the account exists in Active Directory (AD) or Azure Active Directory (Azure AD):
-
- - If a UPN was entered: the device will look for the account in Azure AD.
- - If a DOMAIN\\User name was entered: the device will look for the account in AD.
-- Look up the Microsoft Exchange server for the account’s mailbox.
-- Look up the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) address for the account.
-- Pull the account’s display name and alias attributes.
-
-## Exchange server page
-
-
-This page will only be shown if there's a problem. Typically, it means that the device account that you provided was found in Active Directory (AD) or Azure Active Directory (Azure AD), but the Exchange server for the account was not discovered.
-
-
-
-### Details
-
-Enter the name of the Exchange server where the device account's mailbox is hosted.
-
-Click **Skip setting up Exchange services** to skip this step. If you do, people will not be able to:
-
-- See a meeting calendar on the welcome screen.
-- Start a meeting from the welcome screen.
-- Email whiteboards from OneNote.
-
-See [Intro to Surface Hub](intro-to-surface-hub.md) for details on setup dependencies.
-
-You can enable Exchange services for a device account later by using the Settings app.
-
-If you click **Skip setting up Exchange services**, the device will display a dialog showing what will happen. If you choose **Yes, skip this**, then Exchange services will not be set up.
-
-
-
-### What happens?
-
-The Surface Hub will attempt to validate the device account on the Exchange server that you enter here. If the Exchange server can be reached and validates, then first run will proceed.
-
-If you choose to skip setting up Exchange services, the Surface Hub will stop looking for the Exchange server, and no Exchange services (mail and calendar) will be enabled.
-
-## Exchange policies page
-
-
-This page will be shown when:
-
-- The device account is using an Exchange Active Sync (EAS) policy where the PasswordEnabled policy is set to 1.
-- There’s no connection to Exchange.
-- Exchange returns a status code indicating an error. (For example: The account has been provisioned to too many devices.)
-- Exchange supported protocols are not supported by the Surface Hub.
-- Exchange returns incorrect XML.
-
-
-
-### Details
-
-This page is purely informational, so no input is required. However, you have two options for proceeding: either skipping ahead or retrying the validation that caused the error. Before deciding which option is best, please read the following **What happens?** section. You may be able to fix the problem elsewhere before you click on one of the options.
-
-- **Click here to continue using unsupported policies**: click on this to continue first run. The Surface Hub will not be able to use Exchange services, or sync.
-- **Retry**: check the policy on the Exchange server again.
-
-### What happens?
-
-The Surface Hub checks whether the device account’s EAS policy has the PasswordEnabled policy set to 0 (False). If this is not the case, mail and calendar can't be synced and the Surface Hub can't use any Exchange services. You can use your Exchange management tools from a PC to check that the device account has the PasswordEnabled policy set to 0. If that's not the case, you can reconfigure the account and click **Retry** here.
-
-If the policy has already been configured properly, check that your device is properly connected to the network or Internet, and can reach your Exchange server, because this page will also be shown if the Surface Hub can't reach the Exchange server.
-
-Another possible reason for not being able to reach Exchange is because of certificate-based authentication. You may wind up on this page because of certificate issues. Note that if the device displays error codes 0x80072F0D or 0X800C0019, then a certificate is required. Because provisioning is done on the first page of the first run process, you must disable Exchange services by clicking **Click here to continue using unsupported policies**, and then install the correct certificates through the Settings app.
-
-If you choose to skip this check, the Surface Hub will stop looking for the Exchange server and validating EAS policies, and no Exchange services will be enabled. See [Intro to Surface Hub](intro-to-surface-hub.md) for details on setup dependencies.
-
-## Name this device page
-
-
-This page asks you to provide two names that will be used for identifying the Surface Hub.
-
-
-
-### Details
-
-If the default values shown are correct, then you can click **Next** to go on. Otherwise, enter data in one or both of the text boxes.
-
-- **Friendly name:** This is the name that people will see when they want to wirelessly connect to the Surface Hub.
-- **Device name:** Can be set to any unique name as described on the screen.
-
-As long as both names are within the length requirements and do not use restricted characters, clicking **Next** will take you to the next page, [Set up admins for this device](#setup-admins).
-
-### What happens?
-
-The Surface Hub requires two names for the device, which will default to:
-
-- **Friendly name:** Defaults to the Display Name of the device account
-- **Device name:** Defaults to the alias of the device account
-
-While either of the names can be changed later, keep in mind that:
-
-- The friendly name should be recognizable and different so that people can distinguish one Surface Hub from another when trying to wirelessly connect.
-- If you decide to domain join the device, the device name must not be the same as any other device on the account’s Active Directory domain. The device can't join the domain if it is using the same name as another domain-joined device.
-
->[!NOTE]
->If you want to enable [Miracast over Infrastructure](miracast-over-infrastructure.md), the device name needs to be discoverable via DNS. You can achieve this by either allowing your Surface Hub to register automatically via Dynamic DNS, or by manually creating an A or AAAA record for the Surface Hub's device name.
-
-## Set up admins for this device page
-
-
-On this page, you will choose from several options for how you want to set up admin accounts to locally manage your device.
-
-Because every Surface Hub can be used by any number of authenticated employees, settings are locked down so that they can't change from session to session. Only admins can configure the settings on the device, and on this page, you’ll choose which type of admins have that privilege.
-
->[!NOTE]
->The purpose of this page is primarily to determine who can configure the device from the device’s UI; that is, who can actually visit a device, log in, open up the Settings app, and make changes to the Settings.
-
-
-
-
-
-### Details
-
-Choose one of the three available options:
-
-- **Use Microsoft Azure Active Directory**
-- **Use Active Directory Domain Services**
-- **Use a local admin**
-
-### What happens?
-
-This is what happens when you choose an option.
-
-- **Use Microsoft Azure Active Directory**
-
- Clicking this option allows you to join the device to Azure AD. Once you click **Next**, the device will restart to apply some settings, and then you’ll be taken to the [Use Microsoft Azure Active Directory](#use-microsoft-azure) page and asked to enter credentials that can allow you to join Azure AD. Members of the Azure Global Admins role from the joined organization will be able to use the Settings app. The specific people that will be allowed depends on your Azure AD subscription and how you’ve configured the settings for your Azure AD organization.
-
- > [!IMPORTANT]
- > Administrators added to the Azure Device Administrators role after you join the device to Azure AD will be unable to use the Settings app.
- >
- > If you join Surface Hub to Azure AD during first-run setup, single sign-on (SSO) for Office apps will not work properly. Users will have to sign in to each Office app individually.
-
-- **Use Active Directory Domain Services**
-
- Click this option to join the device to AD. Once you click **Next**, you’ll be taken to the [Use Active Directory Domain Services](#use-active-directory) page and asked to enter credentials that allow you to join the specified domain. After joining, you can pick a security group from the joined domain, and people from that security group will be able to use the Settings app.
-
-- **Use a local admin**
-
- Choosing this option will allow you to create a single local admin. This admin won’t be backed by any directory service, so we recommend you only choose this case if the device does not have access to Azure AD or AD. Once you create an admin’s user name and password on the [Use a local admin](#use-a-local-admin) page, you will need to re-enter those same credentials whenever you open the Settings app.
-
- Note that a local admin must have physical access to the Surface Hub to log in.
-
->[!NOTE]
->After you finish this process, you won't be able to change the device's admin option unless you reset the device.
-
-
-
-### Use Microsoft Azure Active Directory
-
-If you've decided to join your Surface Hub to Azure Active Directory (Azure AD), you'll see this **What happens next** page. Read it and click **Next** to go to the **Let's get you signed in page**.
-
-Joining Azure AD has two primary benefits:
-
-1. Some employees from your organization will be able to access the device as admins, and will be able to start the Settings app and configure the device. People that have admin permissions will be defined in your Azure AD subscription.
-2. If your Azure AD is connected to a mobile device management (MDM) solution, the device will enroll with that MDM solution so you can apply policies and configuration.
-
-
-
-### Details
-
-The following input is required:
-
-- **User's UPN:** The user principal name (UPN) of an account that can join Azure AD.
-- **Password:** The password of the account you’re using to join Azure AD.
-
-
-
-If you get to this point and don't have valid credentials for an Azure AD account, the device will allow you to continue by creating a local admin account. Click **Set up Windows with a local account instead**.
-
-
-
-### What happens?
-
-Once you enter valid Azure AD account credentials, the device will try to join the associated Azure AD organization. If this succeeds, then the device will provision employees in that organization to be local admins on the device. If your Azure AD tenant was configured for it, the device will also enroll into MDM.
-
-### Use Active Directory Domain Services
-
-This page will ask for credentials to join a domain so that the Surface Hub can provision a security group as administrators of the device.
-
-Once the device has been domain joined, you must specify a security group from the domain you joined. This security group will be provisioned as administrators on the Surface Hub, and anyone from the security group can enter their domain credentials to access Settings.
-
-
-
-### Details
-
-The following input is required:
-
-- **Domain:** This is the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the domain that you want to join. A security group from this domain can be used to manage the device.
-- **User name:** The user name of an account that has sufficient permission to join the specified domain.
-- **Password:** The password for the account.
-
-After the credentials are verified, you will be asked to type a security group name. This input is required.
-
-
-
-### What happens?
-
-Using the provided domain, account credentials from the [Use Active Directory Domain Services page](#use-active-directory) and the device name from the [Name this device](#name-this-device) page, the Surface Hub will attempt to join the domain. If the join is successful, first run will continue, and will ask for a security group. If the join is not successful, first run will halt and ask you to change the information provided.
-
-If the join is successful, you'll see the **Enter a security group** page. When you click the **Select** button on this page, the device will search for the specified security group on your domain. If found, the group will be verified. Click **Finish** to complete the first run process.
-
->[!NOTE]
->If you domain join the Surface Hub, you can't unjoin the device without resetting it.
-
-
-
-### Use a local admin
-
-If you decide not to use Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) or Active Directory (AD) to manage the Surface Hub, you'll need to create a local admin account.
-
-
-
-### Details
-
-The following input is required:
-
-- **User name:** This is the user name of the local admin account that will be created for this Surface Hub.
-- **Password:** This is the password of the device account.
-- **Re-enter password:** Verifying the password as in the previous box.
-
-### What happens?
-
-This page will attempt to create a new admin account using the credentials that you enter here. If it's successful, then first run will end. If not, you'll be asked for different credentials.
-
-## Update the Surface Hub
-
-
->[!IMPORTANT]
->Before you do the updates, make sure you read [Save your BitLocker key](save-bitlocker-key-surface-hub.md) in order to make sure you have a backup of the key.
-
-
-
-In order to get the latest features and fixes, you should update your Surface Hub as soon as you finish all of the preceding first-run steps.
-
-1. Make sure the device has access to the Windows Update servers or to Windows Server Update Services (WSUS). To configure WSUS, see [Using WSUS](manage-windows-updates-for-surface-hub.md#use-windows-server-update-services).
-2. Open Settings, click **Update & security**, then **Windows Update**, and then click **Check for updates**.
-3. If updates are available, they will be downloaded. Once downloading is complete, click the **Update now** button to install the updates.
-4. Follow the onscreen prompts after the updates are installed. You may need to restart the device.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/hybrid-deployment-surface-hub-device-accounts.md b/devices/surface-hub/hybrid-deployment-surface-hub-device-accounts.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ea543e69f2..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/hybrid-deployment-surface-hub-device-accounts.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,413 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Hybrid deployment (Surface Hub)
-description: A hybrid deployment requires special processing to set up a device account for your Microsoft Surface Hub.
-ms.assetid: 7BFBB7BE-F587-422E-9CE4-C9DDF829E4F1
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: hybrid deployment, device account for Surface Hub, Exchange hosted on-prem, Exchange hosted online
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 08/30/2018
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Hybrid deployment (Surface Hub)
-
-A hybrid deployment requires special processing to set up a device account for your Microsoft Surface Hub. If you’re using a hybrid deployment, in which your organization has a mix of services, with some hosted on-premises and some hosted online, then your configuration will depend on where each service is hosted. This topic covers hybrid deployments for [Exchange hosted on-premises](#exchange-on-premises), [Exchange hosted online](#exchange-online), Skype for Business on-premises, Skype for Business online, and Skype for Business hybrid. Because there are so many different variations in this type of deployment, it's not possible to provide detailed instructions for all of them. The following process will work for many configurations. If the process isn't right for your setup, we recommend that you use PowerShell (see [Appendix: PowerShell](appendix-a-powershell-scripts-for-surface-hub.md)) to achieve the same end result as documented here, and for other deployment options. You should then use the provided Powershell script to verify your Surface Hub setup. (See [Account Verification Script](appendix-a-powershell-scripts-for-surface-hub.md#acct-verification-ps-scripts).)
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> In an Exchange hybrid environment, follow the steps for [Exchange on-premises](#exchange-on-premises). To move Exchange objects to Office 365, use the [New-MoveRequest](https://docs.microsoft.com/powershell/module/exchange/move-and-migration/new-moverequest?view=exchange-ps) cmdlet.
-
-## Exchange on-premises
-
-Use this procedure if you use Exchange on-premises.
-
-1. For this procedure, you'll be using AD admin tools to add an email address for your on-premises domain account. This account will be synced to Office 365.
-
-- In **Active Directory Users and Computers** AD tool, right-click on the folder or Organizational Unit that your Surface Hub accounts will be created in, click **New**, and **User**.
-- Type the display name from the previous cmdlet into the **Full name** box, and the alias into the **User logon name** box. Click **Next**.
-
-
-
-- Type the password for this account. You'll need to retype it for verification. Make sure the **Password never expires** checkbox is the only option selected.
-
-> **Important** Selecting **Password never expires** is a requirement for Skype for Business on the Surface Hub. Your domain rules may prohibit passwords that don't expire. If so, you'll need to create an exception for each Surface Hub device account.
-
-
-
-- Click **Finish** to create the account.
-
-
-
-2. Enable the remote mailbox.
-
-Open your on-premises Exchange Management Shell with administrator permissions, and run this cmdlet.
-
-```PowerShell
-Enable-RemoteMailbox 'HUB01@contoso.com' -RemoteRoutingAddress 'HUB01@contoso.com' -Room
-```
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> If you don't have an on-premises Exchange environment to run this cmdlet, you can make the same changes directly to the Active Directory object for the account.
->
-> msExchRemoteRecipientType = 33
->
-> msExchRecipientDisplayType = -2147481850
->
-> msExchRecipientTypeDetails = 8589934592
-
-3. After you've created the account, run a directory synchronization. When it's complete, go to the users page in your Microsoft 365 admin center and verify that the account created in the previous steps has merged to online.
-
-4. Connect to Microsoft Exchange Online and set some properties for the account in Office 365.
-
-Start a remote PowerShell session on a PC and connect to Microsoft Exchange. Be sure you have the right permissions set to run the associated cmdlets.
-
-The next steps will be run on your Office 365 tenant.
-
-```PowerShell
-Set-ExecutionPolicy RemoteSigned
-$cred=Get-Credential -Message "Please use your Office 365 admin credentials"
-$sess= New-PSSession -ConfigurationName Microsoft.Exchange -ConnectionUri 'https://ps.outlook.com/powershell' -Credential $cred -Authentication Basic -AllowRedirection
-Import-PSSession $sess
-```
-
-5. Create a new Exchange ActiveSync policy, or use a compatible existing policy.
-
-After setting up the mailbox, you will need to either create a new Exchange ActiveSync policy or use a compatible existing policy.
-
-Surface Hubs are only compatible with device accounts that have an ActiveSync policy where the **PasswordEnabled** property is set to False. If this isn’t set properly, then Exchange services on the Surface Hub (mail, calendar, and joining meetings), will not be enabled.
-
-If you haven’t created a compatible policy yet, use the following cmdlet—this one creates a policy called "Surface Hubs". Once it’s created, you can apply the same policy to other device accounts.
-
-```PowerShell
-$easPolicy = New-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy -Name “SurfaceHubs” -PasswordEnabled $false
-```
-
-Once you have a compatible policy, you will need to apply the policy to the device account.
-
-```PowerShell
-Set-CASMailbox 'HUB01@contoso.com' -ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy $easPolicy.id
-```
-
-6. Set Exchange properties.
-
-Setting Exchange properties on the device account to improve the meeting experience. You can see which properties need to be set in the [Exchange properties](exchange-properties-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md) section.
-
-```PowerShell
-Set-CalendarProcessing -Identity 'HUB01@contoso.com' -AutomateProcessing AutoAccept -AddOrganizerToSubject $false –AllowConflicts $false –DeleteComments $false -DeleteSubject $false -RemovePrivateProperty $false
-Set-CalendarProcessing -Identity 'HUB01@contoso.com' -AddAdditionalResponse $true -AdditionalResponse 'This is a Surface Hub room!'
-```
-
-7. Connect to Azure AD.
-
-You first need to install Azure AD module for PowerShell version 2. In an elevated PowerShell prompt, run the following command:
-
-```PowerShell
-Install-Module -Name AzureAD
-```
-
-You need to connect to Azure AD to apply some account settings. You can run this cmdlet to connect.
-
-```PowerShell
-Import-Module AzureAD
-Connect-AzureAD -Credential $cred
-```
-
-8. Assign an Office 365 license.
-
-The device account needs to have a valid Office 365 (O365) license, or Exchange and Skype for Business will not work. If you have the license, you need to assign a usage location to your device account—this determines what license SKUs are available for your account.
-
-You can use `Get-AzureADSubscribedSku` to retrieve a list of available SKUs for your O365 tenant.
-
-Once you list out the SKUs, you'll need to assign the SkuId you want to the `$License.SkuId` variable.
-
-```PowerShell
-Set-AzureADUser -ObjectId "HUB01@contoso.com" -UsageLocation "US"
-
-Get-AzureADSubscribedSku | Select Sku*,*Units
-$License = New-Object -TypeName Microsoft.Open.AzureAD.Model.AssignedLicense
-$License.SkuId = SkuId You selected
-
-$AssignedLicenses = New-Object -TypeName Microsoft.Open.AzureAD.Model.AssignedLicenses
-$AssignedLicenses.AddLicenses = $License
-$AssignedLicenses.RemoveLicenses = @()
-
-Set-AzureADUserLicense -ObjectId "HUB01@contoso.com" -AssignedLicenses $AssignedLicenses
-```
-
-Next, you enable the device account with [Skype for Business Online](#skype-for-business-online), [Skype for Business on-premises](#skype-for-business-on-premises), or [Skype for Business hybrid](#skype-for-business-hybrid).
-
-### Skype for Business Online
-
-To enable Skype for Business online, your tenant users must have Exchange mailboxes (at least one Exchange mailbox in the tenant is required). The following table explains which plans or additional services you need.
-
-| Skype room system scenario | If you have Office 365 Premium, Office 365 ProPlus, or Skype for Business Standalone Plan 2, you need: | If you have an Enterprise-based plan, you need: | If you have Skype for Business Server 2015 (on-premises or hybrid), you need: |
-| --- | --- | --- | --- |
-| Join a scheduled meeting | Skype for Business Standalone Plan 1 | E1, 3, 4, or 5 | Skype for Business Server Standard CAL |
-| Initiate an ad-hoc meeting | Skype for Business Standalone Plan 2 | E 1, 3, 4, or 5 | Skype for Business Server Standard CAL or Enterprise CAL |
-| Initiate an ad-hoc meeting and dial out from a meeting to phone numbers | Skype for Business Standalone Plan 2 with Audio Conferencing**Note** PSTN consumption billing is optional | E1 or E3 with Audio Conferencing, or E5| Skype for Business Server Standard CAL or Enterprise CAL |
-| Give the room a phone number and make or receive calls from the room or join a dial-in conference using a phone number | Skype for Business Standalone Plan 2 with Phone System and a PSTN Voice Calling plan | E1 or E3 with Phone System and a PSTN Voice Calling plan, or E5 | Skype for Business Server Standard CAL or Plus CAL |
-
-The following table lists the Office 365 plans and Skype for Business options.
-
-| O365 Plan | Skype for Business | Phone System | Audio Conferencing | Calling Plans |
-| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
-| O365 Business Essentials | Included | | | |
-| O365 Business Premium | Included | | | |
-| E1 | Included | Add-on | Add-on | Add-on (requires Phone System add-on) |
-| E3 | Included | Add-on | Add-on | Add-on (requires Phone System add-on) |
-| E5 | Included | Included | Included | Add-on |
-
-1. Start by creating a remote PowerShell session from a PC to the Skype for Business online environment.
-
-```PowerShell
-Import-Module SkypeOnlineConnector
-$cssess=New-CsOnlineSession -Credential $cred
-Import-PSSession $cssess -AllowClobber
-```
-
-2. To enable your Surface Hub account for Skype for Business Server, run this cmdlet:
-
-```PowerShell
-Enable-CsMeetingRoom -Identity 'HUB01@contoso.com' -RegistrarPool 'sippoolbl20a04.infra.lync.com' -SipAddressType UserPrincipalName
-```
-
-If you aren't sure what value to use for the `RegistrarPool` parameter in your environment, you can get the value from an existing Skype for Business user using this cmdlet:
-
-```PowerShell
-Get-CsOnlineUser -Identity ‘HUB01@contoso.com’| fl *registrarpool*
-```
-
-3. Assign Skype for Business license to your Surface Hub account.
-
- Once you've completed the preceding steps to enable your Surface Hub account in Skype for Business Online, you need to assign a license to the Surface Hub. Using the O365 administrative portal, assign either a Skype for Business Online (Plan 2) or a Skype for Business Online (Plan 3) license to the device.
-
-- Login as a tenant administrator, open the O365 Administrative Portal, and click on the Admin app.
-
-- Click on **Users and Groups** and then **Add users, reset passwords, and more**.
-
-- Click the Surface Hub account, and then click the pen icon to edit the account information.
-
-- Click **Licenses**.
-
-- In **Assign licenses**, select Skype for Business (Plan 1) or Skype for Business (Plan 2), depending on your licensing and Enterprise Voice requirements. You'll have to use a Plan 2 license if you want to use Enterprise Voice on your Surface Hub.
-
-- Click **Save**.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You can also use the Windows Azure Active Directory Module for Windows Powershell to run the cmdlets needed to assign one of these licenses, but that's not covered here.
-
-For validation, you should be able to use any Skype for Business client (PC, Android, etc.) to sign in to this account.
-
-### Skype for Business on-premises
-
-To run this cmdlet, you will need to connect to one of the Skype front-ends. Open the Skype PowerShell and run:
-
-```PowerShell
-Enable-CsMeetingRoom -Identity 'HUB01@contoso.com' -RegistrarPool registrarpoolfqdn -SipAddressType UserPrincipalName
-```
-
-### Skype for Business hybrid
-
-If your organization has set up [hybrid connectivity between Skype for Business Server and Skype for Business Online](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/jj205403.aspx), the guidance for creating accounts differs from a standard Surface Hub deployment.
-
-The Surface Hub requires a Skype account of the type `meetingroom`, while a normal user would use a user type account in Skype. If your Skype server is set up for hybrid where you might have users on the local Skype server as well as users hosted in Office 365, you might run into a few issues when trying to create a Surface Hub account.
-
-In Skype for Business Server 2015 hybrid environment, any user that you want in Skype for Business Online must first be created in the on-premises deployment, so that the user account is created in Active Directory Domain Services. You can then move the user to Skype for Business Online. The move of a user account from on-premises to online is done via the [Move-CsUser](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/gg398528.aspx) cmdlet. To move a Csmeetingroom object, use the [Move-CsMeetingRoom](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/jj204889.aspx?f=255&mspperror=-2147217396) cmdlet.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> To use the Move-CsMeetingRoom cmdlet, you must have installed [the May 2017 cumulative update 6.0.9319.281 for Skype for Business Server 2015](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4020991/enables-the-move-csmeetingroom-cmdlet-to-move-a-meeting-room-from-on-p) or [the July 2017 cumulative update 5.0.8308.992 for Lync Server 2013](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4034279/enables-the-move-csmeetingroom-cmdlet-to-move-a-meeting-room-from-on-p).
-
-
-## Exchange online
-
-Use this procedure if you use Exchange online.
-
-1. Create an email account in Office 365.
-
-Start a remote PowerShell session on a PC and connect to Exchange. Be sure you have the right permissions set to run the associated cmdlets.
-
-```PowerShell
-Set-ExecutionPolicy RemoteSigned
-$cred=Get-Credential -Message "Please use your Office 365 admin credentials"
-$sess= New-PSSession -ConfigurationName Microsoft.Exchange -ConnectionUri https://outlook.office365.com/PowerShell-liveid/ -Credential $cred -Authentication Basic -AllowRedirection
-Import-PSSession $sess
-```
-
-2. Set up a mailbox.
-
-After establishing a session, you’ll either create a new mailbox and enable it as a RoomMailboxAccount, or change the settings for an existing room mailbox. This will allow the account to authenticate into the Surface Hub.
-
-If you're changing an existing resource mailbox:
-
-```PowerShell
-Set-Mailbox -Identity 'HUB01' -EnableRoomMailboxAccount $true -RoomMailboxPassword (ConvertTo-SecureString -String -AsPlainText -Force)
-```
-
-If you’re creating a new resource mailbox:
-
-```PowerShell
-New-Mailbox -MicrosoftOnlineServicesID 'HUB01@contoso.com' -Alias HUB01 -Name "Hub-01" -Room -EnableRoomMailboxAccount $true -RoomMailboxPassword (ConvertTo-SecureString -String -AsPlainText -Force)
-```
-
-3. Create Exchange ActiveSync policy.
-
-After setting up the mailbox, you will need to either create a new Exchange ActiveSync policy, or use a compatible existing policy.
-
-Surface Hubs are only compatible with device accounts that have an ActiveSync policy where the **PasswordEnabled** property is set to False. If this isn’t set properly, Exchange services on the Surface Hub (mail, calendar, and joining meetings) will not be enabled.
-
-If you haven’t created a compatible policy yet, use the following cmdlet—this one creates a policy called "Surface Hubs". Once it’s created, you can apply the same policy to other device accounts.
-
-```PowerShell
-$easPolicy = New-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy -Name “SurfaceHubs” -PasswordEnabled $false
-```
-
-Once you have a compatible policy, you will need to apply the policy to the device account. However, policies can only be applied to user accounts and not resource mailboxes. You need to convert the mailbox into a user type, apply the policy, and then convert it back into a mailbox—you may need to re-enable it and set the password again too.
-
-```PowerShell
-Set-Mailbox 'HUB01@contoso.com' -Type Regular
-Set-CASMailbox 'HUB01@contoso.com' -ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy $easPolicy.id
-Set-Mailbox 'HUB01@contoso.com' -Type Room
-$credNewAccount = Get-Credential -Message "Please provide the Surface Hub username and password"
-Set-Mailbox 'HUB01@contoso.com' -RoomMailboxPassword $credNewAccount.Password -EnableRoomMailboxAccount $true
-```
-
-4. Set Exchange properties.
-
-Various Exchange properties must be set on the device account to improve the meeting experience. You can see which properties need to be set in the [Exchange properties](exchange-properties-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md) section.
-
-```PowerShell
-Set-CalendarProcessing -Identity 'HUB01@contoso.com' -AutomateProcessing AutoAccept -AddOrganizerToSubject $false –AllowConflicts $false –DeleteComments $false -DeleteSubject $false -RemovePrivateProperty $false
-Set-CalendarProcessing -Identity 'HUB01@contoso.com' -AddAdditionalResponse $true -AdditionalResponse "This is a Surface Hub room!"
-```
-
-5. Add an email address for your on-premises domain account.
-
-For this procedure, you'll be using AD admin tools to add an email address for your on-premises domain account.
-
-- In **Active Directory Users and Computers** AD tool, right-click on the folder or Organizational Unit that your Surface Hub accounts will be created in, click **New**, and **User**.
-- Type the display name from the previous cmdlet into the **Full name** box, and the alias into the **User logon name** box. Click **Next**.
-
-
-
-- Type the password for this account. You'll need to retype it for verification. Make sure the **Password never expires** checkbox is the only option selected.
-
-> [!IMPORTANT]
-> Selecting **Password never expires** is a requirement for Skype for Business on the Surface Hub. Your domain rules may prohibit passwords that don't expire. If so, you'll need to create an exception for each Surface Hub device account.
-
-
-
-- Click **Finish** to create the account.
-
-
-
-6. Run directory synchronization.
-
-After you've created the account, run a directory synchronization. When it's complete, go to the users page and verify that the two accounts created in the previous steps have merged.
-
-7. Connect to Azure AD.
-
-You first need to install Azure AD module for PowerShell version 2. In an elevated PowerShell prompt, run the following command:
-
-```PowerShell
-Install-Module -Name AzureAD
-```
-
-You need to connect to Azure AD to apply some account settings. You can run this cmdlet to connect:
-
-```PowerShell
-Import-Module AzureAD
-Connect-AzureAD -Credential $cred
-```
-
-8. Assign an Office 365 license.
-
-The device account needs to have a valid Office 365 (O365) license, or Exchange and Skype for Business will not work. If you have the license, you need to assign a usage location to your device account—this determines what license SKUs are available for your account.
-
-Next, you can use `Get-AzureADSubscribedSku` to retrieve a list of available SKUs for your O365 tenant.
-
-Once you list out the SKUs, you'll need to assign the SkuId you want to the `$License.SkuId` variable.
-
-```PowerShell
-Set-AzureADUser -ObjectId "HUB01@contoso.com" -UsageLocation "US"
-
-Get-AzureADSubscribedSku | Select Sku*,*Units
-$License = New-Object -TypeName Microsoft.Open.AzureAD.Model.AssignedLicense
-$License.SkuId = SkuId You selected
-
-$AssignedLicenses = New-Object -TypeName Microsoft.Open.AzureAD.Model.AssignedLicenses
-$AssignedLicenses.AddLicenses = $License
-$AssignedLicenses.RemoveLicenses = @()
-
-Set-AzureADUserLicense -ObjectId "HUB01@contoso.com" -AssignedLicenses $AssignedLicenses
-```
-
-Next, you enable the device account with [Skype for Business Online](#skype-for-business-online), [Skype for Business on-premises](#skype-for-business-on-premises), or [Skype for Business hybrid](#skype-for-business-hybrid).
-
-### Skype for Business Online
-
-In order to enable Skype for Business, your environment will need to meet the [prerequisites for Skype for Business online](#skype-for-business-online).
-
-1. Start by creating a remote PowerShell session to the Skype for Business online environment from a PC.
-
-```PowerShell
-Import-Module SkypeOnlineConnector
-$cssess=New-CsOnlineSession -Credential $cred
-Import-PSSession $cssess -AllowClobber
-```
-
-2. To enable your Surface Hub account for Skype for Business Server, run this cmdlet:
-
-```PowerShell
-Enable-CsMeetingRoom -Identity 'HUB01@contoso.com' -RegistrarPool
-'sippoolbl20a04.infra.lync.com' -SipAddressType UserPrincipalName
-```
-
- If you aren't sure what value to use for the `RegistrarPool` parameter in your environment, you can get the value from an existing Skype for Business user using this cmdlet:
-
-```PowerShell
-Get-CsOnlineUser -Identity 'HUB01@contoso.com'| fl *registrarpool*
-```
-
-10. Assign Skype for Business license to your Surface Hub account
-
-Once you've completed the preceding steps to enable your Surface Hub account in Skype for Business Online, you need to assign a license to the Surface Hub. Using the O365 administrative portal, assign either a Skype for Business Online (Plan 2) or a Skype for Business Online (Plan 3) license to the device.
-
-- Sign in as a tenant administrator, open the O365 Administrative Portal, and click on the Admin app.
-
-- Click on **Users and Groups** and then **Add users, reset passwords, and more**.
-
-- Click the Surface Hub account, and then click the pen icon to edit the account information.
-
-- Click **Licenses**.
-
-- In **Assign licenses**, select Skype for Business (Plan 2) or Skype for Business (Plan 3), depending on your licensing and Enterprise Voice requirements. You'll have to use a Plan 3 license if you want to use Enterprise Voice on your Surface Hub.
-
-- Click **Save**.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You can also use the Windows Azure Active Directory Module for Windows PowerShell to run the cmdlets needed to assign one of these licenses, but that's not covered here.
-
-For validation, you should be able to use any Skype for Business client (PC, Android, etc) to sign in to this account.
-
-### Skype for Business on-premises
-
-To run this cmdlet, you will need to connect to one of the Skype front-ends. Open the Skype PowerShell and run:
-
-```PowerShell
-Enable-CsMeetingRoom -Identity 'HUB01@contoso.com' -RegistrarPool registrarpoolfqdn -SipAddressType UserPrincipalName
-```
-
-### Skype for Business hybrid
-
-If your organization has set up [hybrid connectivity between Skype for Business Server and Skype for Business Online](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/jj205403.aspx), the guidance for creating accounts differs from a standard Surface Hub deployment.
-
-The Surface Hub requires a Skype account of the type *meetingroom*, while a normal user would use a *user* type account in Skype. If your Skype server is set up for hybrid where you might have users on the local Skype server as well as users hosted in Office 365, you might run into a few issues when trying to create a Surface Hub account.
-
-In Skype for Business Server 2015 hybrid environment, any user that you want in Skype for Business Online must first be created in the on-premises deployment, so that the user account is created in Active Directory Domain Services. You can then move the user to Skype for Business Online. The move of a user account from on-premises to online is done via the [Move-CsUser](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/gg398528.aspx) cmdlet. To move a Csmeetingroom object, use the [Move-CsMeetingRoom](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/jj204889.aspx?f=255&mspperror=-2147217396) cmdlet.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> To use the Move-CsMeetingRoom cmdlet, you must have installed [the May 2017 cumulative update 6.0.9319.281 for Skype for Business Server 2015](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4020991/enables-the-move-csmeetingroom-cmdlet-to-move-a-meeting-room-from-on-p) or [the July 2017 cumulative update 5.0.8308.992 for Lync Server 2013](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4034279/enables-the-move-csmeetingroom-cmdlet-to-move-a-meeting-room-from-on-p).
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/01-diagnostic.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/01-diagnostic.png
deleted file mode 100644
index fde5951776..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/01-diagnostic.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/01-escape.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/01-escape.png
deleted file mode 100644
index badfc5883d..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/01-escape.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/02-all-apps.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/02-all-apps.png
deleted file mode 100644
index a29e9d8428..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/02-all-apps.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/02-skip-this-drive.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/02-skip-this-drive.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 930f0b26d3..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/02-skip-this-drive.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/03-recover-from-cloud.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/03-recover-from-cloud.png
deleted file mode 100644
index be422cecc8..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/03-recover-from-cloud.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/03-welcome.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/03-welcome.png
deleted file mode 100644
index b71ebe0752..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/03-welcome.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/04-test-results-1.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/04-test-results-1.png
deleted file mode 100644
index e0b53f2dc3..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/04-test-results-1.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/04-yes.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/04-yes.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 9c26b795ce..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/04-yes.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/05-test-results-2.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/05-test-results-2.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 55b7c7abed..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/05-test-results-2.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/05a-reinstall.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/05a-reinstall.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 60d90928ba..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/05a-reinstall.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/05b-downloading.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/05b-downloading.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 59393e7162..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/05b-downloading.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/06-account-settings.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/06-account-settings.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 35a92f2ff8..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/06-account-settings.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/06-out-of-box.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/06-out-of-box.png
deleted file mode 100644
index a513b46c5b..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/06-out-of-box.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/07-account-settings-details.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/07-account-settings-details.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 421f372b03..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/07-account-settings-details.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/07-cancel.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/07-cancel.png
deleted file mode 100644
index a788960011..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/07-cancel.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/08-test-account.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/08-test-account.png
deleted file mode 100644
index d7cbf9620d..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/08-test-account.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/08-troubleshoot.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/08-troubleshoot.png
deleted file mode 100644
index d2af1969bd..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/08-troubleshoot.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/09-network.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/09-network.png
deleted file mode 100644
index d69f2d67ec..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/09-network.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/09-recover-from-cloud2.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/09-recover-from-cloud2.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 64650a91bb..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/09-recover-from-cloud2.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/10-cancel.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/10-cancel.png
deleted file mode 100644
index ffef745522..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/10-cancel.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/10-environment.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/10-environment.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 376e077249..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/10-environment.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/11-certificates.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/11-certificates.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 13b45396b3..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/11-certificates.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/12-trust-model.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/12-trust-model.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 996bb4fdd4..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/12-trust-model.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/2s-mount-pattern.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/2s-mount-pattern.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 92262fb428..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/2s-mount-pattern.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/35mm.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/35mm.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 7a414337b6..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/35mm.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/ICDstart-option.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/ICDstart-option.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 1ba49bb261..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/ICDstart-option.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/OOBE-2.jpg b/devices/surface-hub/images/OOBE-2.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 0c615a2ec4..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/OOBE-2.jpg and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/account-management-details.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/account-management-details.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 66712394ec..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/account-management-details.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/account-management.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/account-management.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 34165dfcd6..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/account-management.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/add-applications-details.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/add-applications-details.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 2efd3483ae..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/add-applications-details.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/add-applications.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/add-applications.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 2316deb2fd..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/add-applications.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/add-certificates-details.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/add-certificates-details.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 78cd783282..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/add-certificates-details.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/add-certificates.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/add-certificates.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 24cb605d1c..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/add-certificates.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/add-config-file-details.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/add-config-file-details.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index c7b4db97e6..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/add-config-file-details.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/add-config-file.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/add-config-file.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 5b779509d9..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/add-config-file.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/adjust-room-audio.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/adjust-room-audio.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 3d0eef5ed7..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/adjust-room-audio.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/analog.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/analog.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 1f1666903b..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/analog.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/approve-signin.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/approve-signin.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 7736b95431..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/approve-signin.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/approve-signin2.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/approve-signin2.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 2ccfc40ecc..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/approve-signin2.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/apps.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/apps.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 5cb3b7ec8f..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/apps.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/attendees.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/attendees.png
deleted file mode 100644
index fd468aa971..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/attendees.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/caution.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/caution.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 0f87b07c0f..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/caution.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/choose-package.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/choose-package.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 2bf7a18648..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/choose-package.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/connect-aad.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/connect-aad.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 8583866165..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/connect-aad.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/deploy1.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/deploy1.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 1c5c119303..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/deploy1.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/deploy2.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/deploy2.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 2b035e979f..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/deploy2.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/deploy3.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/deploy3.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 56621a24dc..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/deploy3.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/deploymentoptions-01.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/deploymentoptions-01.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 05a5eb45c6..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/deploymentoptions-01.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/developer-setup.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/developer-setup.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 8c93d5ed91..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/developer-setup.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/device-family.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/device-family.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 1efe12fc57..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/device-family.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/dport.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/dport.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 2842f96ad4..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/dport.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/dportio.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/dportio.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 02bf145d60..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/dportio.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/dportout.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/dportout.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 4b6bb87663..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/dportout.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/ease-of-access.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/ease-of-access.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 2cb79254f8..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/ease-of-access.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/end-session.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/end-session.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 4b28583af4..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/end-session.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/enroll-mdm-details.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/enroll-mdm-details.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index f3a7fea8da..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/enroll-mdm-details.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/enroll-mdm.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/enroll-mdm.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index b7cfdbc767..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/enroll-mdm.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/express-settings.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/express-settings.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 99e9c4825a..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/express-settings.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/finish-details.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/finish-details.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 727efac696..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/finish-details.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/finish.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/finish.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 7c65da1799..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/finish.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/five.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/five.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 961f0e15b7..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/five.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/four.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/four.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 0fef213b37..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/four.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/getstarted.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/getstarted.png
deleted file mode 100644
index e5b85dd8ae..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/getstarted.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/h2gen-platemount.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/h2gen-platemount.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 4a8ca76fd4..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/h2gen-platemount.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/h2gen-railmount.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/h2gen-railmount.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 0c8bf8ffb6..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/h2gen-railmount.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/hdmi.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/hdmi.png
deleted file mode 100644
index a2c69ace45..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/hdmi.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/hub2s-rear.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/hub2s-rear.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f30a81159c..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/hub2s-rear.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/hub2s-schematic.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/hub2s-schematic.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 28c328a005..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/hub2s-schematic.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/hybriddeployment-01a.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/hybriddeployment-01a.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 9eb84f777f..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/hybriddeployment-01a.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/hybriddeployment-02a.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/hybriddeployment-02a.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 85229d2d0d..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/hybriddeployment-02a.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/hybriddeployment-03a.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/hybriddeployment-03a.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 42cd08d900..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/hybriddeployment-03a.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/icd-common-settings.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/icd-common-settings.png
deleted file mode 100644
index c2a8eb807f..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/icd-common-settings.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/icd-new-project.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/icd-new-project.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 8a5c64fa4e..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/icd-new-project.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/icd-simple-edit.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/icd-simple-edit.png
deleted file mode 100644
index aea2e24c8a..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/icd-simple-edit.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/idcfeatureschecklist.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/idcfeatureschecklist.png
deleted file mode 100644
index a58d20fcb2..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/idcfeatureschecklist.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/iec.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/iec.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 7ca6e9237b..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/iec.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/intune-save-policy.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/intune-save-policy.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f53cc85602..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/intune-save-policy.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/intune-template.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/intune-template.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 047aed6502..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/intune-template.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/key-55.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/key-55.png
deleted file mode 100644
index d0ee9a5d13..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/key-55.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/license-terms.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/license-terms.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 8dd34b0a18..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/license-terms.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/manage1.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/manage1.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 4caf53b809..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/manage1.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/manage2.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/manage2.png
deleted file mode 100644
index cb232cffa6..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/manage2.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/manage3.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/manage3.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 9da88b808e..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/manage3.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/manage4.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/manage4.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 5c9553718e..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/manage4.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/managesettingsmdm-enroll.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/managesettingsmdm-enroll.png
deleted file mode 100644
index fe33277b4e..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/managesettingsmdm-enroll.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/mfa-options.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/mfa-options.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 5bd3defd01..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/mfa-options.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/networkmgtwired-01.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/networkmgtwired-01.png
deleted file mode 100644
index d2c1748b0b..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/networkmgtwired-01.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/networkmgtwired-02.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/networkmgtwired-02.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 7312b644d0..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/networkmgtwired-02.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/networkmgtwireless-01.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/networkmgtwireless-01.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 0ccdc9f5c7..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/networkmgtwireless-01.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/networkmgtwireless-02.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/networkmgtwireless-02.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 5e9ccb9d99..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/networkmgtwireless-02.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/networkmgtwireless-03.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/networkmgtwireless-03.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 33954daf1a..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/networkmgtwireless-03.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/networkmgtwireless-04.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/networkmgtwireless-04.png
deleted file mode 100644
index c1d0e6ec6d..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/networkmgtwireless-04.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/new-user-hybrid-voice.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/new-user-hybrid-voice.png
deleted file mode 100644
index e291f9ebca..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/new-user-hybrid-voice.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/new-user-password-hybrid-voice.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/new-user-password-hybrid-voice.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 1ae4d5560b..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/new-user-password-hybrid-voice.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/oma-uri.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/oma-uri.png
deleted file mode 100644
index b6d4a325d0..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/oma-uri.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/one.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/one.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 42b4742c49..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/one.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/oobe.jpg b/devices/surface-hub/images/oobe.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 53a5dab6bf..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/oobe.jpg and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/plan1.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/plan1.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 891e1e43a6..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/plan1.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/plan2.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/plan2.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 3ad1f2b9fc..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/plan2.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/plan3.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/plan3.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 1891d1d2b5..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/plan3.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/ppkg-config.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/ppkg-config.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 10a2b7de58..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/ppkg-config.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/ppkg-csv.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/ppkg-csv.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 0648f555e1..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/ppkg-csv.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/product-license-hybrid-voice.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/product-license-hybrid-voice.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 3d16aeb467..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/product-license-hybrid-voice.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/prov.jpg b/devices/surface-hub/images/prov.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 1593ccb36b..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/prov.jpg and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/provisioningpackageoobe-01.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/provisioningpackageoobe-01.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 72774987c7..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/provisioningpackageoobe-01.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/provisioningpackageoobe-02.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/provisioningpackageoobe-02.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 43d283a316..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/provisioningpackageoobe-02.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/provisioningpackageoobe-03.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/provisioningpackageoobe-03.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 84b037292f..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/provisioningpackageoobe-03.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/provisioningpackageoobe-04.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/provisioningpackageoobe-04.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 9c854e8084..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/provisioningpackageoobe-04.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/provisioningpackagesettings-01.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/provisioningpackagesettings-01.png
deleted file mode 100644
index b42614c566..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/provisioningpackagesettings-01.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/provisioningpackagesettings-02.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/provisioningpackagesettings-02.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f6cae68e8b..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/provisioningpackagesettings-02.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/provisioningpackagesettings-03.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/provisioningpackagesettings-03.png
deleted file mode 100644
index e4538d7368..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/provisioningpackagesettings-03.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/proxy-details.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/proxy-details.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index fcc7b06a41..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/proxy-details.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/proxy.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/proxy.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index cdfc02c454..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/proxy.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/qos-create.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/qos-create.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 7cd4726ddb..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/qos-create.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/qos-setting.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/qos-setting.png
deleted file mode 100644
index d775d9a46f..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/qos-setting.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/recover-from-cloud.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/recover-from-cloud.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 7d409edc5f..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/recover-from-cloud.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/recover-from-the-cloud.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/recover-from-the-cloud.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 07c1e22851..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/recover-from-the-cloud.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/recover-progress.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/recover-progress.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 316d830a57..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/recover-progress.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/reinstall.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/reinstall.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 2f307841aa..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/reinstall.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/repartition.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/repartition.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 26725a8c54..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/repartition.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/replacement-port-55.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/replacement-port-55.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 5bf0b51b02..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/replacement-port-55.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/replacement-port-84.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/replacement-port-84.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 45284b4ab9..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/replacement-port-84.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/rj11.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/rj11.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f044354caa..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/rj11.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/rj45.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/rj45.png
deleted file mode 100644
index ca88423217..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/rj45.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/room-add.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/room-add.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 6b0597c41a..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/room-add.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/room-control-wiring-diagram.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/room-control-wiring-diagram.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 5a2ecf613e..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/room-control-wiring-diagram.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/room-equipment.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/room-equipment.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 131f8b8c75..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/room-equipment.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/roomcontrolwiring.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/roomcontrolwiring.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 78da10ce77..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/roomcontrolwiring.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sccm-additional.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sccm-additional.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 7c8fbf8e2f..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sccm-additional.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sccm-create.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sccm-create.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 1db436d3ad..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sccm-create.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sccm-oma-uri.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sccm-oma-uri.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 699bc054a1..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sccm-oma-uri.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sccm-platform.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sccm-platform.png
deleted file mode 100644
index e857c50cc3..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sccm-platform.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sccm-team.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sccm-team.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f99acd5738..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sccm-team.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/select-room-hybrid-voice.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/select-room-hybrid-voice.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 961f8355e8..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/select-room-hybrid-voice.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/set-up-device-admins-details.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/set-up-device-admins-details.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 42c04b4b3b..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/set-up-device-admins-details.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/set-up-device-admins.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/set-up-device-admins.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index e0e037903c..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/set-up-device-admins.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/set-up-device-details.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/set-up-device-details.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index be565ac8d9..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/set-up-device-details.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/set-up-device.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/set-up-device.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 0c9eb0e3ff..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/set-up-device.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/set-up-network-details.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/set-up-network-details.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 7e1391326c..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/set-up-network-details.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/set-up-network.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/set-up-network.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index a0e856c103..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/set-up-network.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacct.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacct.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 23c2f22171..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacct.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-01.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-01.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 10710fa4ca..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-01.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-02.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-02.png
deleted file mode 100644
index b55cb6b87e..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-02.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-03.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-03.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 4f15b6e025..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-03.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-05.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-05.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 40dced3c01..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-05.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-06.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-06.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f4f1686037..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-06.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-07.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-07.png
deleted file mode 100644
index aebb0ae29e..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-07.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-08.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-08.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 85c013f98d..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-08.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-09.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-09.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f36fb9817c..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-09.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-10.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-10.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 4a5d1aaee4..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-10.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-11.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-11.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 03d320cd55..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceacctexch-11.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-02.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-02.png
deleted file mode 100644
index e0694bac42..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-02.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-03.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-03.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f93f0f1594..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-03.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-04.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-04.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 8484394faa..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-04.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-05.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-05.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 51150e3bcb..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-05.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-06.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-06.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 3f6567feca..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-06.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-07.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-07.png
deleted file mode 100644
index ce0eb99af2..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-07.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-08.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-08.png
deleted file mode 100644
index e174c7d54c..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-08.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-09.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-09.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 4820c18f0f..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-09.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-10.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-10.png
deleted file mode 100644
index bb461ddf8d..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-10.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-11.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-11.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f88d1246aa..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-11.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-12.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-12.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 29a2fa31d3..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-12.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-13.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-13.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 3e079c3092..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-13.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-14.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-14.png
deleted file mode 100644
index da2175f3d1..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-14.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-15.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-15.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 00e066f97e..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-15.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-16.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-16.png
deleted file mode 100644
index b6e467c72f..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-16.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-17.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-17.png
deleted file mode 100644
index e1501c92a1..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-17.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-18.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-18.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 8f1f3aba04..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-18.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-19.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-19.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 3e9b2a86fc..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-19.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-20.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-20.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 210cfb54c8..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-20.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-21.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-21.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 6ea80e548d..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-21.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-22.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-22.png
deleted file mode 100644
index cacd3294ad..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-22.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-23.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-23.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f15727c542..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-23.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-24.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-24.png
deleted file mode 100644
index a335591f17..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-24.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-25.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-25.png
deleted file mode 100644
index b49e3e9066..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-25.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-26.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-26.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 5a2841ec32..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdeviceaccto365-26.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdomainjoin.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdomainjoin.png
deleted file mode 100644
index c42a637981..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupdomainjoin.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupexchangepolicies.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupexchangepolicies.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 63a4396364..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupexchangepolicies.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupexchangeserver-01.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupexchangeserver-01.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f3b9dc9e18..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupexchangeserver-01.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupexchangeserver-02.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupexchangeserver-02.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 58462ec244..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupexchangeserver-02.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupjoiningazuread-1.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupjoiningazuread-1.png
deleted file mode 100644
index cd24be2c90..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupjoiningazuread-1.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupjoiningazuread-2.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupjoiningazuread-2.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 9ec163f679..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupjoiningazuread-2.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupjoiningazuread-3.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupjoiningazuread-3.png
deleted file mode 100644
index abe6691d92..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupjoiningazuread-3.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setuplocaladmin.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setuplocaladmin.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 30ac056c5a..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setuplocaladmin.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setuplocale.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setuplocale.png
deleted file mode 100644
index e9aa468697..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setuplocale.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupmsg.jpg b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupmsg.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 12935483c5..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupmsg.jpg and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupnamedevice.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupnamedevice.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 5baa35c487..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupnamedevice.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupnetworksetup-1.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupnetworksetup-1.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 49dfbde566..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupnetworksetup-1.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupnetworksetup-2.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupnetworksetup-2.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 4d96e95782..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupnetworksetup-2.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupnetworksetup-3.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupnetworksetup-3.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 62d6e0a772..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupnetworksetup-3.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupnetworksetup-4.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupnetworksetup-4.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 836bb208fb..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupnetworksetup-4.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupsecuritygroup-1.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupsecuritygroup-1.png
deleted file mode 100644
index bab6e2f197..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupsecuritygroup-1.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupsetupadmins.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupsetupadmins.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 109cb1ea92..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupsetupadmins.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupsetupforyou.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupsetupforyou.png
deleted file mode 100644
index c0ea230caf..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupsetupforyou.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupskipdeviceacct.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/setupskipdeviceacct.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 7a71c7f982..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/setupskipdeviceacct.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-bottom.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-bottom.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 3d718d1226..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-bottom.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-clearance.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-clearance.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 12fc35ec49..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-clearance.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-front.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-front.png
deleted file mode 100644
index e1268ee328..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-front.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-guest-ports.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-guest-ports.png
deleted file mode 100644
index af42c738f8..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-guest-ports.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-hand-rear.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-hand-rear.png
deleted file mode 100644
index b1ff007ec2..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-hand-rear.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-hand.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-hand.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 6f8d96ba8e..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-hand.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-rear.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-rear.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 840b941e03..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-rear.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-rpc-ports.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-rpc-ports.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 7df98f2277..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-rpc-ports.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-top.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-top.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f8c93f5d1b..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-55-top.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-bottom.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-bottom.png
deleted file mode 100644
index d7252537e4..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-bottom.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-clearance.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-clearance.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 8fd0cd2c32..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-clearance.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-front.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-front.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 8afa0de18b..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-front.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-guest-ports.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-guest-ports.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 6c7060154b..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-guest-ports.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-hand-top.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-hand-top.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 1e52446eb0..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-hand-top.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-hand.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-hand.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 3e84a8a434..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-hand.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-rear.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-rear.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 5837d4e185..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-rear.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-rpc-ports.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-rpc-ports.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f3a0a52327..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-rpc-ports.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-side.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-side.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 6b1ad8385b..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-side.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-top.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-top.png
deleted file mode 100644
index badc94af0b..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-top.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-wall.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-wall.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 15d2e5a848..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-84-wall.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-device-family-availability.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-device-family-availability.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 30b8a954af..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-device-family-availability.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-org-licensing.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-org-licensing.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 48c7033715..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-org-licensing.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-quick-action.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-quick-action.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 3003e464b3..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-quick-action.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-select-template.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-select-template.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 58ab21481e..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-select-template.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-settings-reset-device.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-settings-reset-device.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f3a9a6dc5c..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-settings-reset-device.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-settings-update-security.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-settings-update-security.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 59212d1805..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-settings-update-security.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-settings.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-settings.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 0134fda740..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh-settings.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-account2.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-account2.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 2a2267ab7c..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-account2.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-account3.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-account3.png
deleted file mode 100644
index b67ff0da37..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-account3.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-account4.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-account4.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 7495f28607..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-account4.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-account5.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-account5.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 3dc9061733..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-account5.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-add-group.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-add-group.png
deleted file mode 100644
index eb44ad8cf9..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-add-group.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-add-room.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-add-room.png
deleted file mode 100644
index c53ee340bc..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-add-room.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-apps-assign.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-apps-assign.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f6a91864c8..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-apps-assign.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-assign-group.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-assign-group.png
deleted file mode 100644
index a2d79bcd34..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-assign-group.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-cartridge.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-cartridge.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 3c7a2e83be..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-cartridge.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-config-file.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-config-file.png
deleted file mode 100644
index d8293c8ff6..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-config-file.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-deploy-apps-sync.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-deploy-apps-sync.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 060c29c17f..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-deploy-apps-sync.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-keepout-zones.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-keepout-zones.png
deleted file mode 100644
index bf318963df..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-keepout-zones.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-keypad.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-keypad.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 595bb19341..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-keypad.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-mobile-stand.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-mobile-stand.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 75c64f06f3..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-mobile-stand.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-mount-config.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-mount-config.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 5cde6108a1..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-mount-config.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-onscreen-display.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-onscreen-display.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 4605f50734..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-onscreen-display.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-pen-pressure.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-pen-pressure.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 67054ca972..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-pen-pressure.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-pen.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-pen.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 1a95b9581e..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-pen.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-ports.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-ports.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 2d30422911..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-ports.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-proxy.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-proxy.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 81946a9906..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-proxy.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-reset.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-reset.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 06b306ec5d..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-reset.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run1.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run1.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 15aa540166..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run1.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run10.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run10.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 5e980fa334..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run10.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run11.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run11.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 02362bc5da..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run11.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run12.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run12.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f619ac4c42..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run12.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run13.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run13.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 77b9e3e2a6..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run13.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run14.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run14.png
deleted file mode 100644
index d88ca872ca..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run14.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run2.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run2.png
deleted file mode 100644
index fd379b2b05..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run2.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run3.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run3.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 8171beecbf..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run3.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run4.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run4.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 1a132dfebb..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run4.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run5.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run5.png
deleted file mode 100644
index ebfe53f3cb..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run5.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run6.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run6.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 896531f4ec..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run6.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run7.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run7.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 59e60d84de..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run7.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run8.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run8.png
deleted file mode 100644
index ec2daf8e4f..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run8.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run9.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run9.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 5bd3abea88..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-run9.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-set-intune1.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-set-intune1.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 9993225210..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-set-intune1.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-set-intune3.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-set-intune3.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f931d828fc..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-set-intune3.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-set-intune5.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-set-intune5.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 9afb1c1445..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-set-intune5.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-set-intune6.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-set-intune6.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 155cbb9930..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-set-intune6.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-set-intune8.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-set-intune8.png
deleted file mode 100644
index a8d9bfe874..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-set-intune8.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-setup-1.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-setup-1.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 1204020f9f..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-setup-1.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-setup-2.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-setup-2.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 0d6501782b..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-setup-2.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-setup-3.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-setup-3.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 2b827f4405..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-setup-3.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-setup-4.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-setup-4.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 0825dadce4..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-setup-4.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-thermal-audio.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-thermal-audio.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 5d9640df9b..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-thermal-audio.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-token.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-token.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 115153a767..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-token.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-token2.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-token2.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 324bc27f63..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-token2.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-token3.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-token3.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 04e173d391..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-token3.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi1.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi1.png
deleted file mode 100644
index ecb5aad455..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi1.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi10.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi10.png
deleted file mode 100644
index eafc0617a2..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi10.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi2.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi2.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 8dbcb3df84..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi2.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi3.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi3.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f9b0fdb754..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi3.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi4.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi4.png
deleted file mode 100644
index ae6f427772..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi4.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi5.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi5.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 18a780074f..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi5.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi6.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi6.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 7b4390574a..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi6.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi7.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi7.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 0302b41a43..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi7.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi8.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi8.png
deleted file mode 100644
index c5ccc27628..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi8.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi9.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi9.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 4747c398c8..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-uefi9.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-wall-front.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-wall-front.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 349e124bb0..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-wall-front.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-wall-side.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-wall-side.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f09cbda81e..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-wall-side.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-wcd.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-wcd.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 8a945dfca4..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sh2-wcd.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/shrt-complete.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/shrt-complete.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 64525f76a3..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/shrt-complete.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/shrt-done.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/shrt-done.png
deleted file mode 100644
index ea05c13051..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/shrt-done.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/shrt-download.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/shrt-download.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 8eee758a54..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/shrt-download.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/shrt-drive-start.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/shrt-drive-start.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 490998f214..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/shrt-drive-start.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/shrt-drive.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/shrt-drive.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 9afeb4b7f3..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/shrt-drive.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/shrt-guidance.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/shrt-guidance.png
deleted file mode 100644
index c878761704..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/shrt-guidance.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/shrt-shortcut.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/shrt-shortcut.png
deleted file mode 100644
index d71d3e163c..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/shrt-shortcut.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/shrt-start.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/shrt-start.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 93356c889b..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/shrt-start.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sign-in-prov.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sign-in-prov.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 55c9276203..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sign-in-prov.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/sign-in.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/sign-in.png
deleted file mode 100644
index bd34f642a7..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/sign-in.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/six.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/six.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 2816328ec3..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/six.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/ssd-click.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/ssd-click.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 5dfcc57c42..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/ssd-click.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/ssd-lift-door.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/ssd-lift-door.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index d395ce91aa..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/ssd-lift-door.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/ssd-location.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/ssd-location.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 9b774456b1..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/ssd-location.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/ssd-lock-tab.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/ssd-lock-tab.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 17c11dc7a2..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/ssd-lock-tab.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/ssd-pull-tab.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/ssd-pull-tab.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index a306f08a13..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/ssd-pull-tab.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-1.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-1.png
deleted file mode 100644
index cab6f33cb7..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-1.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-10.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-10.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 7f3c6ab51c..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-10.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-11.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-11.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 0e0485056a..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-11.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-12.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-12.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 7032cbc1b7..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-12.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-13.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-13.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 465ce22bee..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-13.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-2.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-2.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f8fbc235b6..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-2.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-3.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-3.png
deleted file mode 100644
index e270326ab9..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-3.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-4.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-4.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 42bc3a0389..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-4.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-5.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-5.png
deleted file mode 100644
index d6457cd161..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-5.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-6.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-6.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 73b8a14630..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-6.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-7.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-7.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 54a20e2257..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-7.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-8.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-8.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f2dcac60ed..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-8.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-9.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-9.png
deleted file mode 100644
index c067cbf1d8..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-repack-9.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-camera-1.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-camera-1.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 10530cba1e..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-camera-1.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-camera-2.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-camera-2.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 119dc21a5a..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-camera-2.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-1.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-1.png
deleted file mode 100644
index ceebc3d5fd..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-1.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-10.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-10.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 77ab33c1d5..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-10.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-2.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-2.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 3cf6d0ec62..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-2.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-3.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-3.png
deleted file mode 100644
index d44ad9d37c..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-3.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-4.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-4.png
deleted file mode 100644
index ffbec86f57..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-4.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-5.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-5.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 90ddf71366..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-5.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-6.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-6.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 5020d16853..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-6.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-7.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-7.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 9ea535dff4..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-7.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-8.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-8.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 1a64ae0ebb..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-8.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-9.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-9.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 9d9bc52c66..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surface-hub-2s-replace-cartridge-9.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surfaceblog.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surfaceblog.png
deleted file mode 100644
index ae996a918c..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surfaceblog.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surfacehub.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surfacehub.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 1b9b484ab8..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surfacehub.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/surfacemechanics.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/surfacemechanics.png
deleted file mode 100644
index ad674466fa..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/surfacemechanics.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/switch.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/switch.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 5ea0d21909..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/switch.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/system-settings-add-fqdn.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/system-settings-add-fqdn.png
deleted file mode 100644
index ef00872a16..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/system-settings-add-fqdn.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/three.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/three.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 887fa270d7..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/three.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/trust-package.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/trust-package.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 8a293ea4da..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/trust-package.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/twitter.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/twitter.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 25143adcf6..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/twitter.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/two.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/two.png
deleted file mode 100644
index b8c2d52eaf..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/two.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/usb.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/usb.png
deleted file mode 100644
index a743c6b634..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/usb.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/vga.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/vga.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 016b42d1f4..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/vga.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/video-out-55.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/video-out-55.png
deleted file mode 100644
index e386b7f3d9..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/video-out-55.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/video-out-84.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/video-out-84.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 672ae78556..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/video-out-84.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/wb-collab-example.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/wb-collab-example.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 0ed67c03ea..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/wb-collab-example.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/wb-collab-link.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/wb-collab-link.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 9b0531d0c0..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/wb-collab-link.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/wcd-wizard.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/wcd-wizard.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 706771f756..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/wcd-wizard.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/whats-new-video-thumbnail.PNG b/devices/surface-hub/images/whats-new-video-thumbnail.PNG
deleted file mode 100644
index 44cbffcbb3..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/whats-new-video-thumbnail.PNG and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/who-owns-pc.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/who-owns-pc.png
deleted file mode 100644
index d3ce1def8d..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/who-owns-pc.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen-apps-02a.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen-apps-02a.png
deleted file mode 100644
index caf88b011e..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen-apps-02a.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen-apps-03a.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen-apps-03a.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 20d4218c6b..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen-apps-03a.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen-apps-04a.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen-apps-04a.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 494a661420..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen-apps-04a.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen-apps-06a.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen-apps-06a.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 44e6e2cee7..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen-apps-06a.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen-apps-08a.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen-apps-08a.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 19ce342449..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen-apps-08a.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen-apps-10a.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen-apps-10a.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 820fd3efff..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen-apps-10a.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen-apps-11a.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen-apps-11a.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 2bf0a692ef..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen-apps-11a.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen-apps-12a.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen-apps-12a.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 8ab9d524f4..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen-apps-12a.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen01a.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen01a.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 34b528951e..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen01a.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen02a.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen02a.png
deleted file mode 100644
index f76eec1efb..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen02a.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen02b.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen02b.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 6686186f8b..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen02b.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen02c.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen02c.png
deleted file mode 100644
index eb8fd6b307..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen02c.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen03a.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen03a.png
deleted file mode 100644
index afec8ef352..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen03a.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen04a.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen04a.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 62ea7e595c..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen04a.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen06a.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen06a.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 53c223746b..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen06a.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen07a.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen07a.png
deleted file mode 100644
index e44f5cf0b7..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen07a.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen08a.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen08a.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 7a2b5bbefb..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen08a.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen09a.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen09a.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 29e14902bd..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen09a.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen10a.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen10a.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 556c9fbdb5..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen10a.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen11a.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen11a.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 9f7bf2ba64..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen11a.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen12a.png b/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen12a.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 7c55111ae4..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/wicd-screen12a.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/images/~$rface-hub-site-readiness-guide-en-us.docx b/devices/surface-hub/images/~$rface-hub-site-readiness-guide-en-us.docx
deleted file mode 100644
index 1d44312447..0000000000
Binary files a/devices/surface-hub/images/~$rface-hub-site-readiness-guide-en-us.docx and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/index.md b/devices/surface-hub/index.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f60588a000..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,182 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Surface Hub
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-layout: LandingPage
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.tgt_pltfrm: na
-ms.devlang: na
-ms.topic: landing-page
-description: "Get started with Microsoft Surface Hub."
-ms.localizationpriority: High
----
-# Get started with Surface Hub
-
-Surface Hub 2S is an all-in-one digital interactive whiteboard, meetings platform, and collaborative computing device that brings the power of Windows 10 to team collaboration. Use the links below to learn how to plan, deploy, manage, and support your Surface Hub devices.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/install-apps-on-surface-hub.md b/devices/surface-hub/install-apps-on-surface-hub.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 20c6c45925..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/install-apps-on-surface-hub.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,189 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Install apps on your Microsoft Surface Hub
-description: Admins can install apps can from either the Microsoft Store or the Microsoft Store for Business.
-ms.assetid: 3885CB45-D496-4424-8533-C9E3D0EDFD94
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: install apps, Microsoft Store, Microsoft Store for Business
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 10/23/2018
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-audience: ITPro
----
-
-# Install apps on your Microsoft Surface Hub
-
-You can install additional apps on your Surface Hub to fit your team or organization's needs. There are different methods for installing apps depending on whether you are developing and testing an app, or deploying a released app. This topic describes methods for installing apps for either scenario.
-
-A few things to know about apps on Surface Hub:
-- Surface Hub only runs [Universal Windows Platform (UWP) apps](https://msdn.microsoft.com/windows/uwp/get-started/whats-a-uwp). Apps created using the [Desktop App Converter](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/uwp/porting/desktop-to-uwp-run-desktop-app-converter) will not run on Surface Hub.
-- Apps must be targeted for the [Universal device family](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/apps/dn894631) or Windows Team device family.
-- Surface Hub only supports [offline-licensed apps](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-store/distribute-offline-apps) from [Microsoft Store for Business](https://businessstore.microsoft.com/store).
-- By default, apps must be Store-signed to be installed. During testing and development, you can also choose to run developer-signed UWP apps by placing the device in developer mode.
-- When submitting an app to the Microsoft Store, developers need to set Device family availability and Organizational licensing options to make sure an app will be available to run on Surface Hub.
-- You need admin credentials to install apps on your Surface Hub. Since the device is designed to be used in communal spaces like meeting rooms, people can't access the Microsoft Store to download and install apps.
-
-
-## Develop and test apps
-While you're developing your own app, there are a few options for testing apps on Surface Hub.
-
-### Developer Mode
-By default, Surface Hub only runs UWP apps that have been published to and signed by the Microsoft Store. Apps submitted to the Microsoft Store go through security and compliance tests as part of the [app certification process](https://msdn.microsoft.com/windows/uwp/publish/the-app-certification-process), so this helps safeguard your Surface Hub against malicious apps.
-
-By enabling developer mode, you can also install developer-signed UWP apps.
-
-> [!IMPORTANT]
-> After developer mode has been enabled, you will need to reset the Surface Hub to disable it. Resetting the device removes all local user files and configurations and then reinstalls Windows.
-
-**To turn on developer mode**
-1. From your Surface Hub, start **Settings**.
-2. Type the device admin credentials when prompted.
-3. Navigate to **Update & security** > **For developers**.
-4. Select **Developer mode** and accept the warning prompt.
-
-### Visual Studio
-During development, the easiest way to test your app on a Surface Hub is using Visual Studio. Visual Studio's remote debugging feature helps you discover issues in your app before deploying it broadly. For more information, see [Test Surface Hub apps using Visual Studio](https://msdn.microsoft.com/windows/uwp/debug-test-perf/test-surface-hub-apps-using-visual-studio).
-
-### Provisioning package
-Use Visual Studio to [create an app package](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/apps/hh454036.aspx) for your UWP app, signed using a test certificate. Then use Windows Imaging and Configuration Designer (ICD) to create a provisioning package containing the app package. For more information, see [Create provisioning packages](provisioning-packages-for-certificates-surface-hub.md).
-
-
-## Submit apps to the Microsoft Store
-Once an app is ready for release, developers need to submit and publish it to the Microsoft Store. For more information, see [Publish Windows apps](https://developer.microsoft.com/store/publish-apps).
-
-During app submission, developers need to set **Device family availability** and **Organizational licensing** options to make sure the app will be available to run on Surface Hub.
-
-**To set device family availability**
-1. On the [Windows Dev Center](https://developer.microsoft.com), navigate to your app submission page.
-2. Select **Packages**.
-3. Under **Device family availability**, select these options:
-
- - **Windows 10 Team**
- - **Let Microsoft decide whether to make the app available to any future device families**
-
-
-
-For more information, see [Device family availability](https://msdn.microsoft.com/windows/uwp/publish/upload-app-packages#device-family-availability).
-
-**To set organizational licensing**
-1. On the [Windows Dev Center](https://developer.microsoft.com), navigate to your app submission page.
-2. Select **Pricing and availability**.
-3. Under Organizational licensing, select **Allow disconnected (offline) licensing for organizations**.
-
-
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> **Make my app available to organizations with Store-managed (online) licensing and distribution** is selected by default.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Developers can also publish line-of-business apps directly to enterprises without making them broadly available in the Store. For more information, see [Distribute LOB apps to enterprises](https://msdn.microsoft.com/windows/uwp/publish/distribute-lob-apps-to-enterprises).
-
-For more information, see [Organizational licensing options](https://msdn.microsoft.com/windows/uwp/publish/organizational-licensing).
-
-
-## Deploy released apps
-
-There are several options for installing apps that have been released to the Microsoft Store, depending on whether you want to evaluate them on a few devices, or deploy them broadly to your organization.
-
-To install released apps:
-- Download the app using the Microsoft Store app, or
-- Download the app package from the Microsoft Store for Business, and distribute it using a provisioning package or a supported MDM provider.
-
-### Microsoft Store app
-To evaluate apps released on the Microsoft Store, use the Microsoft Store app on the Surface Hub to browse and download apps.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Using the Microsoft Store app is not the recommended method of deploying apps at scale to your organization:
-> - To download apps, you must sign in to the Microsoft Store app with a Microsoft account or organizational account. However, you can only connect an account to a maximum of 10 devices at once. If you have more than 10 Surface Hubs, you will need to create multiple accounts or remove devices from your account between app installations.
-> - To install apps, you will need to manually sign in to the Microsoft Store app on each Surface Hub you own.
-
-**To browse the Microsoft Store on Surface Hub**
-1. From your Surface Hub, start **Settings**.
-2. Type the device admin credentials when prompted.
-3. Navigate to **This device** > **Apps & features**.
-4. Select **Open Store**.
-
-### Download app packages from Microsoft Store for Business
-To download the app package you need to install apps on your Surface Hub, visit the [Microsoft Store for Business](https://www.microsoft.com/business-store). The Store for Business is where you can find, acquire, and manage apps for the Windows 10 devices in your organization, including Surface Hub.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Currently, Surface Hub only supports offline-licensed apps available through the Store for Business. App developers set offline-license availability when they submit apps.
-
-Find and acquire the app you want, then download:
-- The offline-licensed app package (either an .appx or an .appxbundle)
-- The *unencoded* license file (if you're using provisioning packages to install the app)
-- The *encoded* license file (if you're using MDM to distribute the app)
-- Any necessary dependency files
-
-For more information, see [Download an offline-licensed app](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/manage/distribute-offline-apps#download-an-offline-licensed-app).
-
-### Provisioning package
-You can manually install the offline-licensed apps that you downloaded from the Store for Business on a few Surface Hubs using provisioning packages. Use Windows Imaging and Configuration Designer (ICD) to create a provisioning package containing the app package and *unencoded* license file that you downloaded from the Store for Business. For more information, see [Create provisioning packages](provisioning-packages-for-certificates-surface-hub.md).
-
-### Supported MDM provider
-To deploy apps to a large number of Surface Hubs in your organization, use a supported MDM provider. The table below shows which MDM providers support deploying offline-licensed app packages.
-
-| MDM provider | Supports offline-licensed app packages |
-|-----------------------------|----------------------------------------|
-| On-premises MDM with System Center Configuration Manager (beginning in version 1602) | Yes |
-| Hybrid MDM with System Center Configuration Manager and Microsoft Intune | Yes |
-| [Microsoft Intune standalone](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/windows-store-for-business) | Yes |
-| Third-party MDM provider | Check to make sure your MDM provider supports deploying offline-licensed app packages. |
-
-**To deploy apps remotely using System Center Configuration Manager (either on-prem MDM or hybrid MDM)**
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> These instructions are based on the current branch of System Center Configuration Manager.
-
-1. Enroll your Surface Hubs to System Center Configuration Manager. For more information, see [Enroll a Surface Hub into MDM](manage-settings-with-mdm-for-surface-hub.md#enroll-into-mdm).
-2. Download the offline-licensed app package, the *encoded* license file, and any necessary dependency files from the Store for Business. For more information, see [Download an offline-licensed app](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/manage/distribute-offline-apps#download-an-offline-licensed-app). Place the downloaded files in the same folder on a network share.
-3. In the **Software Library** workspace of the Configuration Manager console, click **Overview** > **Application Management** > **Applications**.
-4. On the **Home** tab, in the **Create** group, click **Create Application**.
-5. On the **General** page of the **Create Application Wizard**, select the **Automatically detect information about this application from installation files** check box.
-6. In the **Type** drop-down list, select **Windows app package (\*.appx, \*.appxbundle)**.
-7. In the **Location** field, specify the UNC path in the form \\server\share\\filename for the offline-licensed app package that you downloaded from the Store for Business. Alternatively, click **Browse** to browse to the app package.
-8. On the **Import Information** page, review the information that was imported, and then click **Next**. If necessary, you can click **Previous** to go back and correct any errors.
-9. On the **General Information** page, complete additional details about the app. Some of this information might already be populated if it was automatically obtained from the app package.
-10. Click **Next**, review the application information on the Summary page, and then complete the Create Application Wizard.
-11. Create a deployment type for the application. For more information, see [Create deployment types for the application](https://docs.microsoft.com/sccm/apps/deploy-use/create-applications#create-deployment-types-for-the-application).
-12. Deploy the application to your Surface Hubs. For more information, see [Deploy applications with System Center Configuration Manager](https://docs.microsoft.com/sccm/apps/deploy-use/deploy-applications).
-13. As needed, update the app by downloading a new package from the Store for Business, and publishing an application revision in Configuration Manager. For more information, see [Update and retire applications with System Center Configuration Manager](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/mt595704.aspx).
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> If you are using System Center Configuration Manager (current branch), you can bypass the above steps by connecting the Store for Business to System Center Configuration Manager. By doing so, you can synchronize the list of apps you've purchased with System Center Configuration Manager, view these in the Configuration Manager console, and deploy them like you would any other app. For more information, see [Manage apps from the Microsoft Store for Business with System Center Configuration Manager](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/mt740630.aspx).
-
-
-## Summary
-
-There are a few different ways to install apps on your Surface Hub depending on whether you are developing apps, evaluating apps on a small number of devices, or deploying apps broadly to your organization. This table summarizes the supported methods:
-
-| Install method | Developing apps | Evaluating apps on a few devices | Deploying apps broadly to your organization |
-| -------------------------- | --------------- | ------------------------------------- | ---------------------- |
-| Visual Studio | X | | |
-| Provisioning package | X | X | |
-| Microsoft Store app | | X | |
-| Supported MDM provider | | | X |
-
-## More information
-
-- [Blog post: Deploy Windows Store apps to Surface Hub using Intune](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/y0av/2018/01/18/7-2/)
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-[Manage Microsoft Surface Hub](manage-surface-hub.md)
-
-[Microsoft Surface Hub administrator's guide](surface-hub-administrators-guide.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/juneworkspace.code-workspace b/devices/surface-hub/juneworkspace.code-workspace
deleted file mode 100644
index f23e17c3ca..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/juneworkspace.code-workspace
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-{
- "folders": [
- {
- "path": "C:\\github\\windows-docs-pr"
- },
- {
- "path": "."
- }
- ],
- "settings": {}
-}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/known-issues-and-additional-info-about-surface-hub.md b/devices/surface-hub/known-issues-and-additional-info-about-surface-hub.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 003795ec22..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/known-issues-and-additional-info-about-surface-hub.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Known issues and additional information about Microsoft Surface Hub
-description: Outlines known issues with Microsoft Surface Hub.
-ms.assetid: aee90a0c-fb05-466e-a2b1-92de89d0f2b7
-keywords: surface, hub, issues
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: todmccoy
-ms.author: v-todmc
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Known issues and additional information about Microsoft Surface Hub
-
-We're listening. Quality is a top priority, and we want to keep you informed about issues impacting customers. The following are some known issues of Microsoft Surface Hub:
-
-- **Skype for Business isn't using proxy for media traffic with RS2**
- For some Surface Hub users who are behind a proxy, Skype for Business won't use the proxy server for media. However, the Surface Hub will be able to sign in to the account. We received your feedback and are aware of the media traffic issue when you are using proxy. We're actively investigating this issue and will release fixes as soon as a solution is identified and tested.
-
-- **For AAD joined devices, when a user tries to sign in to "My meetings & files", Surface Hub reports that there is no Internet connection**
- We’re aware of a set of issues that affect sign-in and document access on Surface Hub. We're actively investigating these issues. As a workaround until a resolution is released, customers can reset their devices and set up their Hub to use a local admin account. After reconfiguring to use the local admin account, "My meetings and files" will work as expected.
-- **Single sign-in when Azure AD joined**
- Surface Hub was designed for communal spaces, which impacts the way user credentials are stored. Because of this, there are currently limitations in how single sign-in works when devices are Azure AD joined. Microsoft is aware of this limitation and is actively investigating options for a resolution.
-- **Miracast over Infrastructure projection to Surface Hub fails if the Surface Hub has a dot character (.) in the friendly name**
- Surface Hub users may experience issues projecting to their device if the Friendly Name includes a period or dot in the name (.) -- for example, "Conf.Room42". To work around the issue, change the Friendly Name of the Hub in **Settings** > **Surface Hub** > **About**, and then restart the device. Microsoft is working on a solution to this issue.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/local-management-surface-hub-settings.md b/devices/surface-hub/local-management-surface-hub-settings.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 810691dfe8..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/local-management-surface-hub-settings.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Local management Surface Hub settings
-description: How to manage Surface Hub settings with Settings.
-keywords: manage Surface Hub, Surface Hub settings
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 07/08/2019
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Local management for Surface Hub settings
-
-After initial setup of Microsoft Surface Hub, the device’s settings can be locally managed through **Settings**.
-
-## Surface Hub settings
-
-Surface Hubs have many settings that are common to other Windows devices, but also have settings which are only configurable on Surface Hubs. This table lists settings only configurable on Surface Hubs.
-
-| Setting | Location | Description |
-| ------- | -------- | ----------- |
-| Device account | Surface Hub > Accounts | Set or change the Surface Hub's device account. |
-| Device account sync status | Surface Hub > Accounts | Check the sync status of the device account’s mail and calendar on the Surface Hub. |
-| Password rotation | Surface Hub > Accounts | Choose whether to let the Surface Hub automatically rotate the device account's password.|
-| Change admin account password | Surface Hub > Accounts | Change the password for the local admin account. This is only available if you configured the device to use a local admin during first run. |
-| Device Management | Surface Hub > Device management | Manage policies and business applications using mobile device management (MDM). |
-| Provisioning packages | Surface Hub > Device management | Set or change provisioning packages installed on the Surface Hub. |
-| Open the Microsoft Store app | Surface Hub > Apps & features | The Microsoft Store app is only available to admins through the Settings app. |
-| Skype for Business domain name | Surface Hub > Calling & Audio | Configure a domain name for your Skype for Business server. |
-| Default Speaker volume | Surface Hub > Calling & Audio | Configure the default speaker volume for the Surface Hub when it starts a session. |
-| Default microphone and speaker settings | Surface Hub > Calling & Audio | Configure a default microphone and speaker for calls, and a default speaker for media playback. |
-| Enable Dolby Audio X2 | Surface Hub > Calling & Audio | Configure the Dolby Audio X2 speaker enhancements. |
-| Open Connect App automatically | Surface Hub > Projection | Choose whether projection will automatically open the Connect app or wait for user input before opening. |
-| Turn off wireless projection using Miracast | Surface Hub > Projection | Choose whether presenters can wirelessly project to the Surface Hub using Miracast. |
-| Require a PIN for wireless projection | Surface Hub > Projection | Choose whether people are required to enter a PIN before they use wireless projection. |
-| Wireless projection (Miracast) channel | Surface Hub > Projection | Set the channel for Miracast projection. |
-| Meeting info shown on the welcome screen | Surface Hub > Welcome screen | Choose whether meeting organizer, time, and subject show up on the welcome screen. |
-| Welcome screen background | Surface Hub > Welcome screen | Choose a background image for the welcome screen. |
-| Idle timeout to Welcome screen | Surface Hub > Session & Power | Choose how long until the Surface Hub returns to the welcome screen after no motion is detected. |
-| Resume session | Surface Hub > Session & Power | Choose to allow users to resume a session after no motion is detected or to automatically clean up a session. |
-| Access to Office 365 meetings and files | Surface Hub > Session & Power | Choose whether a user can sign in to Office 365 to get access to their meetings and files. |
-| Turn on screen with motion sensors | Surface Hub > Session & clean up | Choose whether the screen turns on when motion is detected. |
-| Session time out | Surface Hub > Session & clean up | Choose how long the device needs to be inactive before returning to the welcome screen. |
-| Sleep time out | Surface Hub > Session & clean up | Choose how long the device needs to be inactive before going to sleep mode. |
-| Friendly name | Surface Hub > About | Set the Surface Hub name that people will see when connecting wirelessly. |
-| Maintenance hours | Update & security > Windows Update > Advanced options | Configure when updates can be installed. |
-| Configure Windows Server Update Services (WSUS) server | Update & security > Windows Update > Advanced options | Change whether Surface Hub receives updates from a WSUS server instead of Windows Update. |
-| Recover from the cloud | Update & security > Recovery | Reinstall the operating system on Surface Hub to a manufacturer build from the cloud. |
-| Save BitLocker key | Update & security > Recovery | Backup your Surface Hub's BitLocker key to a USB drive. |
-| Collect logs | Update & security > Recovery | Save logs to a USB drive to send to Microsoft later. |
-
-## Related topics
-
-[Manage Surface Hub settings](manage-surface-hub-settings.md)
-
-[Remote Surface Hub management](remote-surface-hub-management.md)
-
-[Microsoft Surface Hub administrator's guide](surface-hub-administrators-guide.md)
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/manage-settings-with-mdm-for-surface-hub.md b/devices/surface-hub/manage-settings-with-mdm-for-surface-hub.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 91d561934c..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/manage-settings-with-mdm-for-surface-hub.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,283 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Manage settings with an MDM provider (Surface Hub)
-description: Microsoft Surface Hub provides an enterprise management solution to help IT administrators manage policies and business applications on these devices using a mobile device management (MDM) solution.
-ms.assetid: 18EB8464-6E22-479D-B0C3-21C4ADD168FE
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: mobile device management, MDM, manage policies
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 03/07/2018
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Manage settings with an MDM provider (Surface Hub)
-
-Surface Hub and other Windows 10 devices allow IT administrators to manage settings and policies using a mobile device management (MDM) provider. A built-in management component communicates with the management server, so there is no need to install additional clients on the device. For more information, see [Windows 10 mobile device management](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn914769.aspx).
-
-Surface Hub has been validated with Microsoft’s first-party MDM providers:
-- On-premises MDM with System Center Configuration Manager (beginning in version 1602)
-- Hybrid MDM with System Center Configuration Manager and Microsoft Intune
-- Microsoft Intune standalone
-
-You can also manage Surface Hubs using any third-party MDM provider that can communicate with Windows 10 using the MDM protocol.
-
-## Enroll a Surface Hub into MDM
-You can enroll your Surface Hubs using bulk, manual, or automatic enrollment.
-
-### Bulk enrollment
-**To configure bulk enrollment**
-- Surface Hub supports the [Provisioning CSP](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/mt203665.aspx) for bulk enrollment into MDM. For more information, see [Windows 10 bulk enrollment](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/mt613115.aspx).
---OR--
-- If you have an on-premises System Center Configuration Manager infrastructure, see [How to bulk enroll devices with On-premises Mobile Device Management in System Center Configuration Manager](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/mt627898.aspx).
-
-### Manual enrollment
-**To configure manual enrollment**
-1. On your Surface Hub, open **Settings**.
-2. Type the device admin credentials when prompted.
-3. Select **This device**, and navigate to **Device management**.
-4. Under **Device management**, select **+ Device management**.
-5. Follow the instructions in the dialog to connect to your MDM provider.
-
-### Automatic enrollment via Azure Active Directory join
-
-Surface Hub now supports the ability to automatically enroll in Intune by joining the device to Azure Active Directory.
-
-First step is to set up Automatic MDM enrollment. See [Enable Windows 10 automatic enrollment](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/windows-enroll#enable-windows-10-automatic-enrollment).
-
-Then, when devices are setup during First-run, pick the option to join to Azure Active Directory, see [Set up admins for this device page](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface-hub/first-run-program-surface-hub#set-up-admins-for-this-device-page)
-
-## Manage Surface Hub settings with MDM
-
-You can use MDM to manage some [Surface Hub CSP settings](#supported-surface-hub-csp-settings), and some [Windows 10 settings](#supported-windows-10-settings). Depending on the MDM provider that you use, you may set these settings using a built-in user interface, or by deploying custom SyncML. Microsoft Intune and System Center Configuration Manager provide built-in experiences to help create policy templates for Surface Hub. Refer to documentation from your MDM provider to learn how to create and deploy SyncML.
-
-### Supported Surface Hub CSP settings
-
-You can configure the Surface Hub settings in the following table using MDM. The table identifies if the setting is supported with Microsoft Intune, System Center Configuration Manager, or SyncML.
-
-For more information, see [SurfaceHub configuration service provider](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/mt608323).
-
-
-| Setting | Node in the SurfaceHub CSP | Supported with Intune? | Supported with Configuration Manager? | Supported with SyncML\*? |
-|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------|
-| Maintenance hours | MaintenanceHoursSimple/Hours/StartTime MaintenanceHoursSimple/Hours/Duration | Yes | Yes | Yes |
-| Automatically turn on the screen using motion sensors | InBoxApps/Welcome/AutoWakeScreen | Yes | Yes | Yes |
-| Require a pin for wireless projection | InBoxApps/WirelessProjection/PINRequired | Yes | Yes | Yes |
-| Enable wireless projection | InBoxApps/WirelessProjection/Enabled | Yes | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Miracast channel to use for wireless projection | InBoxApps/WirelessProjection/Channel | Yes | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Connect to your Operations Management Suite workspace | MOMAgent/WorkspaceID MOMAgent/WorkspaceKey | Yes | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Welcome screen background image | InBoxApps/Welcome/CurrentBackgroundPath | Yes | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Meeting information displayed on the welcome screen | InBoxApps/Welcome/MeetingInfoOption | Yes | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Friendly name for wireless projection | Properties/FriendlyName | Yes [Use a custom policy.](#example-intune) | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Device account, including password rotation | DeviceAccount/*``* See [SurfaceHub CSP](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/mt608323.aspx). | No | No | Yes |
-| Specify Skype domain | InBoxApps/SkypeForBusiness/DomainName | Yes | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Auto launch Connect App when projection is initiated | InBoxApps/Connect/AutoLaunch | Yes | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Set default volume | Properties/DefaultVolume | Yes | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Set screen timeout | Properties/ScreenTimeout | Yes | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Set session timeout | Properties/SessionTimeout | Yes | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Set sleep timeout | Properties/SleepTimeout | Yes | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Allow session to resume after screen is idle | Properties/AllowSessionResume | Yes | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Allow device account to be used for proxy authentication | Properties/AllowAutoProxyAuth | Yes | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Disable auto-populating the sign-in dialog with invitees from scheduled meetings | Properties/DisableSignInSuggestions | Yes | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Disable "My meetings and files" feature in Start menu | Properties/DoNotShowMyMeetingsAndFiles | Yes | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Set the LanProfile for 802.1x Wired Auth | Dot3/LanProfile | Yes [Use a custom policy.](#example-intune) | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Set the EapUserData for 802.1x Wired Auth | Dot3/EapUserData | Yes [Use a custom policy.](#example-intune) | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-
-\*Settings supported with SyncML can also be configured in a Windows Configuration Designer provisioning package.
-
-### Supported Windows 10 settings
-
-In addition to Surface Hub-specific settings, there are numerous settings common to all Windows 10 devices. These settings are defined in the [Configuration service provider reference](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/configuration-service-provider-reference).
-
-The following tables include info on Windows 10 settings that have been validated with Surface Hub. There is a table with settings for these areas: security, browser, Windows Updates, Windows Defender, remote reboot, certificates, and logs. Each table identifies if the setting is supported with Microsoft Intune, System Center Configuration Manager, or SyncML.
-
-#### Security settings
-
-| Setting | Details | CSP reference | Supported with Intune? | Supported with Configuration Manager? | Supported with SyncML\*? |
-|--------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------|
-| Allow Bluetooth | Keep this enabled to support Bluetooth peripherals. | [Connectivity/AllowBluetooth](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904962.aspx#Connectivity_AllowBluetooth) | Yes. | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Bluetooth policies | Use to set the Bluetooth device name, and block advertising, discovery, and automatic pairing. | Bluetooth/*``* See [Policy CSP](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904962.aspx) | Yes. | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Allow camera | Keep this enabled for Skype for Business. | [Camera/AllowCamera](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904962.aspx#Camera_AllowCamera) | Yes. | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Allow location | Keep this enabled to support apps such as Maps. | [System/AllowLocation](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904962.aspx#System_AllowLocation) | Yes. . | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Allow telemetry | Keep this enabled to help Microsoft improve Surface Hub. | [System/AllowTelemetry](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904962.aspx#System_AllowTelemetry) | Yes. | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Allow USB Drives | Keep this enabled to support USB drives on Surface Hub | [System/AllowStorageCard](https://msdn.microsoft.com/windows/hardware/commercialize/customize/mdm/policy-configuration-service-provider#system-allowstoragecard) | Yes [Use a custom policy.](#example-intune) | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-
-\*Settings supported with SyncML can also be configured in a Windows Configuration Designer provisioning package.
-
-#### Browser settings
-
-| Setting | Details | CSP reference | Supported with Intune? | Supported with Configuration Manager? | Supported with SyncML\*? |
-|-----------------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------|
-| Homepages | Use to configure the default homepages in Microsoft Edge. | [Browser/Homepages](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904962.aspx#Browser_Homepages) | Yes [Use a custom policy.](#example-intune) | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Allow cookies | Surface Hub automatically deletes cookies at the end of a session. Use this to block cookies within a session. | [Browser/AllowCookies](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904962.aspx#Browser_AllowCookies) | Yes [Use a custom policy.](#example-intune) | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Allow developer tools | Use to stop users from using F12 Developer Tools. | [Browser/AllowDeveloperTools](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904962.aspx#Browser_AllowDeveloperTools) | Yes [Use a custom policy.](#example-intune) | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Allow Do Not Track | Use to enable Do Not Track headers. | [Browser/AllowDoNotTrack](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904962.aspx#Browser_AllowDoNotTrack) | Yes [Use a custom policy.](#example-intune) | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Allow pop-ups | Use to block pop-up browser windows. | [Browser/AllowPopups](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904962.aspx#Browser_AllowPopups) | Yes [Use a custom policy.](#example-intune) | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Allow search suggestions | Use to block search suggestions in the address bar. | [Browser/AllowSearchSuggestionsinAddressBar](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904962.aspx#Browser_AllowSearchSuggestionsinAddressBar) | Yes [Use a custom policy.](#example-intune) | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Allow Windows Defender SmartScreen | Keep this enabled to turn on Windows Defender SmartScreen. | [Browser/AllowSmartScreen](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904962.aspx#Browser_AllowSmartScreen) | Yes [Use a custom policy.](#example-intune) | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Prevent ignoring Windows Defender SmartScreen warnings for websites | For extra security, use to stop users from ignoring Windows Defender SmartScreen warnings and block them from accessing potentially malicious websites. | [Browser/PreventSmartScreenPromptOverride](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904962.aspx#Browser_PreventSmartScreenPromptOverride) | Yes [Use a custom policy.](#example-intune) | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Prevent ignoring Windows Defender SmartScreen warnings for files | For extra security, use to stop users from ignoring Windows Defender SmartScreen warnings and block them from downloading unverified files from Microsoft Edge. | [Browser/PreventSmartScreenPromptOverrideForFiles](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904962.aspx#Browser_PreventSmartScreenPromptOverrideForFiles) | Yes [Use a custom policy.](#example-intune) | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-
-\*Settings supported with SyncML can also be configured in a Windows Configuration Designer provisioning package.
-
-#### Windows Update settings
-
-| Setting | Details | CSP reference | Supported with Intune? | Supported with Configuration Manager? | Supported with SyncML\*? |
-|---------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------|
-| Use Current Branch or Current Branch for Business | Use to configure Windows Update for Business – see [Windows updates](manage-windows-updates-for-surface-hub.md). | [Update/BranchReadinessLevel](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904962.aspx#Update_BranchReadinessLevel) | Yes [Use a custom policy.](#example-intune) | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Defer feature updates | See above. | [Update/ DeferFeatureUpdatesPeriodInDays](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904962.aspx#Update_DeferFeatureUpdatesPeriodInDays) | Yes [Use a custom policy.](#example-intune) | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Defer quality updates | See above. | [Update/DeferQualityUpdatesPeriodInDays](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904962.aspx#Update_DeferQualityUpdatesPeriodInDays) | Yes [Use a custom policy.](#example-intune) | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Pause feature updates | See above. | [Update/PauseFeatureUpdates](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904962.aspx#Update_PauseFeatureUpdates) | Yes [Use a custom policy.](#example-intune) | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Pause quality updates | See above. | [Update/PauseQualityUpdates](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904962.aspx#Update_PauseQualityUpdates) | Yes [Use a custom policy.](#example-intune) | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Configure device to use WSUS | Use to connect your Surface Hub to WSUS instead of Windows Update – see [Windows updates](manage-windows-updates-for-surface-hub.md). | [Update/UpdateServiceUrl](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904962.aspx#Update_UpdateServiceUrl) | Yes [Use a custom policy.](#example-intune) | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Delivery optimization | Use peer-to-peer content sharing to reduce bandwidth issues during updates. See [Configure Delivery Optimization for Windows 10](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/manage/waas-delivery-optimization) for details. | DeliveryOptimization/*``* See [Policy CSP](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904962.aspx) | Yes [Use a custom policy.](#example-intune) | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-
-\*Settings supported with SyncML can also be configured in a Windows Configuration Designer provisioning package.
-
-#### Windows Defender settings
-
-| Setting | Details | CSP reference | Supported with Intune? | Supported with Configuration Manager? | Supported with SyncML\*? |
-|-------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------|
-| Defender policies | Use to configure various Defender settings, including a scheduled scan time. | Defender/*``* See [Policy CSP](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904962.aspx) | Yes [Use a custom policy.](#example-intune) | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Defender status | Use to initiate a Defender scan, force a Security intelligence update, query any threats detected. | [Defender CSP](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/mt187856.aspx) | Yes | Yes | Yes |
-
-\*Settings supported with SyncML can also be configured in a Windows Configuration Designer provisioning package.
-
-#### Remote reboot
-
-| Setting | Details | CSP reference | Supported with Intune? | Supported with Configuration Manager? | Supported with SyncML\*? |
-|------------------------------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------|
-| Reboot the device immediately | Use in conjunction with OMS to minimize support costs – see [Monitor your Microsoft Surface Hub](monitor-surface-hub.md). | ./Vendor/MSFT/Reboot/RebootNow See [Reboot CSP](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/mt720802.aspx) | Yes | No | Yes |
-| Reboot the device at a scheduled date and time | See above. | ./Vendor/MSFT/Reboot/Schedule/Single See [Reboot CSP](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/mt720802.aspx) | Yes [Use a custom policy.](#example-intune) | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-| Reboot the device daily at a scheduled date and time | See above. | ./Vendor/MSFT/Reboot/Schedule/DailyRecurrent See [Reboot CSP](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/mt720802.aspx) | Yes [Use a custom policy.](#example-intune) | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-
-\*Settings supported with SyncML can also be configured in a Windows Configuration Designer provisioning package.
-
-#### Install certificates
-
-| Setting | Details | CSP reference | Supported with Intune? | Supported with Configuration Manager? | Supported with SyncML\*? |
-|---------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------|
-| Install trusted CA certificates | Use to deploy trusted root and intermediate CA certificates. | [RootCATrustedCertificates CSP](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904970.aspx) | Yes. See [Configure Intune certificate profiles](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/deploy-use/configure-intune-certificate-profiles). | Yes. See [How to create certificate profiles in System Center Configuration Manager](https://docs.microsoft.com/sccm/protect/deploy-use/create-certificate-profiles). | Yes |
-
-
-\*Settings supported with SyncML can also be configured in a Windows Configuration Designer provisioning package.
-
-#### Collect logs
-
-| Setting | Details | CSP reference | Supported with Intune? | Supported with Configuration Manager? | Supported with SyncML\*? |
-|------------------|----------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|---------------------------|------------------------------------------|-----------------------------|
-| Collect ETW logs | Use to remotely collect ETW logs from Surface Hub. | [DiagnosticLog CSP](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/mt219118.aspx) | No | No | Yes |
-
-
-\*Settings supported with SyncML can also be configured in a Windows Configuration Designer provisioning package.
-
-#### Set network quality of service (QoS) policy
-
-| Setting | Details | CSP reference | Supported with Intune? | Supported with Configuration Manager? | Supported with SyncML\*? |
-|------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------|
-| Set Network QoS Policy | Use to set a QoS policy to perform a set of actions on network traffic. This is useful for prioritizing Skype network packets. | [NetworkQoSPolicy CSP](https://msdn.microsoft.com/windows/hardware/commercialize/customize/mdm/networkqospolicy-csp) | Yes [Use a custom policy.](#example-intune) | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-
-\*Settings supported with SyncML can also be configured in a Windows Configuration Designer provisioning package.
-
-#### Set network proxy
-
-| Setting | Details | CSP reference | Supported with Intune? | Supported with Configuration Manager? | Supported with SyncML\*? |
-|-------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------|
-| Set Network proxy | Use to configure a proxy server for ethernet and Wi-Fi connections. | [NetworkProxy CSP](https://msdn.microsoft.com/windows/hardware/commercialize/customize/mdm/networkproxy-csp) | Yes [Use a custom policy.](#example-intune) | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-
-\*Settings supported with SyncML can also be configured in a Windows Configuration Designer provisioning package.
-
-#### Configure Start menu
-
-| Setting | Details | CSP reference | Supported with Intune? | Supported with Configuration Manager? | Supported with SyncML\*? |
-|----------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------|
-| Configure Start menu | Use to configure which apps are displayed on the Start menu. For more information, see [Configure Surface Hub Start menu](surface-hub-start-menu.md) | [Policy CSP: Start/StartLayout](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-start#start-startlayout) | Yes [Use a custom policy.](#example-intune) | Yes. [Use a custom setting.](#example-sccm) | Yes |
-
-\*Settings supported with SyncML can also be configured in a Windows Configuration Designer provisioning package.
-
-### Generate OMA URIs for settings
-You need to use a setting’s OMA URI to create a custom policy in Intune, or a custom setting in System Center Configuration Manager.
-
-**To generate the OMA URI for any setting in the CSP documentation**
-1. In the CSP documentation, identify the root node of the CSP. Generally, this looks like `./Vendor/MSFT/`
-*For example, the root node of the [SurfaceHub CSP](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/mt608323.aspx) is `./Vendor/MSFT/SurfaceHub`.*
-2. Identify the node path for the setting you want to use.
-*For example, the node path for the setting to enable wireless projection is `InBoxApps/WirelessProjection/Enabled`.*
-3. Append the node path to the root node to generate the OMA URI.
-*For example, the OMA URI for the setting to enable wireless projection is `./Vendor/MSFT/SurfaceHub/InBoxApps/WirelessProjection/Enabled`.*
-
-The data type is also stated in the CSP documentation. The most common data types are:
-- char (String)
-- int (Integer)
-- bool (Boolean)
-
-
-
-## Example: Manage Surface Hub settings with Microsoft Intune
-
-You can use Microsoft Intune to manage Surface Hub settings. For custom settings, follow the instructions in [How to configure custom device settings in Microsoft Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/custom-settings-configure). For **Platform**, select **Windows 10 and later**, and in **Profile type**, select **Device restrictions (Windows 10 Team)**.
-
-
-
-
-## Example: Manage Surface Hub settings with System Center Configuration Manager
-System Center Configuration Manager supports managing modern devices that do not require the Configuration Manager client to manage them, including Surface Hub. If you already use System Center Configuration Manager to manage other devices in your organization, you can continue to use the Configuration Manager console as your single location for managing Surface Hubs.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> These instructions are based on the current branch of System Center Configuration Manager.
-
-**To create a configuration item for Surface Hub settings**
-
-1. On the **Assets and Compliance** workspace of the Configuration Manager console, click **Overview** > **Compliance Settings** > **Configuration Items**.
-2. On the **Home** tab, in the **Create** group, click **Create Configuration Item**.
-3. On the **General** page of the Create Configuration Item Wizard, specify a name and optional description for the configuration item.
-4. Under **Settings for devices managed without the Configuration Manager client**, select **Windows 8.1 and Windows 10**, and then click **Next**.
-
- 
-5. On the **Supported Platforms** page, expand **Windows 10** and select **All Windows 10 Team and higher**. Unselect the other Windows platforms, and then click **Next**.
-
- 
-7. On the **Device Settings** page, under **Device settings groups**, select **Windows 10 Team**.
-
-
-8. On the **Windows 10 Team** page, configure the settings you require.
-
- 
-9. You'll need to create custom settings to manage settings that are not available in the Windows 10 Team page. On the **Device Settings** page, select the check box **Configure additional settings that are not in the default setting groups**.
-
- 
-10. On the **Additional Settings** page, click **Add**.
-11. In the **Browse Settings** dialog, click **Create Setting**.
-12. In the **Create Setting** dialog, under the **General** tab, specify a name and optional description for the custom setting.
-13. Under **Setting type**, select **OMA URI**.
-14. Complete the form to create a new setting, and then click **OK**.
-
- 
-15. On the **Browse Settings** dialog, under **Available settings**, select the new setting you created, and then click **Select**.
-16. On the **Create Rule** dialog, complete the form to specify a rule for the setting, and then click **OK**.
-17. Repeat steps 9 to 15 for each custom setting you want to add to the configuration item.
-18. When you're done, on the **Browse Settings** dialog, click **Close**.
-19. Complete the wizard. You can view the new configuration item in the **Configuration Items** node of the **Assets and Compliance** workspace.
-
-For more information, see [Create configuration items for Windows 8.1 and Windows 10 devices managed without the System Center Configuration Manager client](https://docs.microsoft.com/sccm/compliance/deploy-use/create-configuration-items-for-windows-8.1-and-windows-10-devices-managed-without-the-client).
-
-## Related topics
-
-[Manage Microsoft Surface Hub](manage-surface-hub.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/manage-surface-hub-settings.md b/devices/surface-hub/manage-surface-hub-settings.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a5d76ff156..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/manage-surface-hub-settings.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Manage Surface Hub settings
-description: This section lists topics for managing Surface Hub settings.
-keywords: Surface Hub accessibility settings, device account, device reset, windows updates, wireless network management
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Manage Surface Hub settings
-
-## In this section
-
-|Topic | Description|
-| ------ | --------------- |
-| [Local management for Surface Hub settings](local-management-surface-hub-settings.md) | Learn about Surface Hub settings. |
-| [Accessibility](accessibility-surface-hub.md) | Accessibility settings for the Surface Hub can be changed by using the Settings app. You'll find them under Ease of Access. Your Surface Hub has the same accessibility options as Windows 10.|
-| [Change the Surface Hub device account](change-surface-hub-device-account.md) | You can change the device account in Settings to either add an account if one was not already provisioned, or to change any properties of an account that was already provisioned.|
-| [Device reset](device-reset-surface-hub.md) | You may need to reset your Surface Hub.|
-| [Use fully qualified domain name with Surface Hub](use-fully-qualified-domain-name-surface-hub.md) | Options to configure domain name with Surface Hub. |
-| [Wireless network management](wireless-network-management-for-surface-hub.md) | Surface Hub offers two options for network connectivity to your corporate network and Internet: wireless, and wired. While both provide network access, we recommend you use a wired connection. |
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/manage-surface-hub.md b/devices/surface-hub/manage-surface-hub.md
deleted file mode 100644
index fcd75f6dfd..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/manage-surface-hub.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Manage Microsoft Surface Hub
-description: How to manage your Surface Hub after finishing the first-run program.
-ms.assetid: FDB6182C-1211-4A92-A930-6C106BCD5DC1
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: manage Surface Hub
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 01/17/2018
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Manage Microsoft Surface Hub
-
-After initial setup of Microsoft Surface Hub, the device’s settings and configuration can be modified or changed in a couple ways:
-
-- **Local management** - Every Surface Hub can be configured locally using the **Settings** app on the device. To prevent unauthorized users from changing settings, the Settings app requires admin credentials to open the app. For more information, see [Local management for Surface Hub settings](local-management-surface-hub-settings.md).
-- **Remote management** - Surface Hub allow IT admins to manage settings and policies using a mobile device management (MDM) provider, such as Microsoft Intune, System Center Configuration Manager, and other third-party providers. Additionally, admins can monitor Surface Hubs using Microsoft Operations Management Suite (OMS). For more information, see [Manage settings with an MDM provider](manage-settings-with-mdm-for-surface-hub.md), and [Monitor your Microsoft Surface Hub](monitor-surface-hub.md).
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> These management methods are not mutually exclusive. Devices can be both locally and remotely managed if you choose. However, MDM policies and settings will overwrite any local changes when the Surface Hub syncs with the management server.
-
-## In this section
-
-Learn about managing and updating Surface Hub.
-
-| Topic | Description |
-| ----- | ----------- |
-| [Remote Surface Hub management](remote-surface-hub-management.md) |Topics related to managing your Surface Hub remotely. Include install apps, managing settings with MDM and monitoring with Operations Management Suite. |
-| [Manage Surface Hub settings](manage-surface-hub-settings.md) |Topics related to managing Surface Hub settings: accessibility, device account, device reset, fully qualified domain name, Windows Update settings, and wireless network |
-| [Install apps on your Surface Hub]( https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface-hub/install-apps-on-surface-hub) | Admins can install apps can from either the Microsoft Store or the Microsoft Store for Business.|
-[Configure Surface Hub Start menu](surface-hub-start-menu.md) | Use MDM to customize the Start menu for Surface Hub.
-| [Set up and use Microsoft Whiteboard](whiteboard-collaboration.md) | Microsoft Whiteboard’s latest update includes the capability for two Surface Hubs to collaborate in real time on the same board. |
-| [End a meeting with End session](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface-hub/i-am-done-finishing-your-surface-hub-meeting) | At the end of a meeting, users can tap **End session** to clean up any sensitive data and prepare the device for the next meeting.|
-| [Sign in to Surface Hub with Microsoft Authenticator](surface-hub-authenticator-app.md) | You can sign in to a Surface Hub without a password using the Microsoft Authenticator app, available on Android and iOS. |
-| [Save your BitLocker key](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface-hub/save-bitlocker-key-surface-hub) | Every Surface Hub is automatically set up with BitLocker drive encryption software. Microsoft strongly recommends that you make sure you back up your BitLocker recovery keys.|
-| [Connect other devices and display with Surface Hub](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface-hub/connect-and-display-with-surface-hub) | You can connect other device to your Surface Hub to display content.|
-| [Miracast on existing wireless network or LAN](miracast-over-infrastructure.md) | You can use Miracast on your wireless network or LAN to connect to Surface Hub. |
- [Enable 802.1x wired authentication](enable-8021x-wired-authentication.md) | 802.1x Wired Authentication MDM policies have been enabled on Surface Hub devices.
-| [Using a room control system](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface-hub/use-room-control-system-with-surface-hub) | Room control systems can be used with your Microsoft Surface Hub.|
-[Using the Surface Hub Recovery Tool](surface-hub-recovery-tool.md) | Use the Surface Hub Recovery Tool to re-image the Surface Hub SSD.
-[Surface Hub SSD replacement](surface-hub-ssd-replacement.md) | Learn how to remove and replace the solid state drive in your Surface Hub.
-
-## Related topics
-
-- [View Power BI presentation mode on Surface Hub & Windows 10](https://powerbi.microsoft.com/documentation/powerbi-mobile-win10-app-presentation-mode/)
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/manage-windows-updates-for-surface-hub.md b/devices/surface-hub/manage-windows-updates-for-surface-hub.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4535bd1f1b..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/manage-windows-updates-for-surface-hub.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,145 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Windows updates (Surface Hub)
-description: You can manage Windows updates on your Microsoft Surface Hub by setting the maintenance window, deferring updates, or using Windows Server Update Services (WSUS).
-ms.assetid: A737BD50-2D36-4DE5-A604-55053D549045
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: manage Windows updates, Surface Hub, Windows Server Update Services, WSUS
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Windows updates (Surface Hub)
-
-New releases of the Surface Hub operating system are published through Windows Update, just like releases of Windows 10. There are a couple of ways you can manage which updates are installed on your Surface Hubs, and the timing for when updates are applied.
-- **Windows Update for Business** - New in Windows 10, Windows Update for Business is a set of features designed to provide enterprises additional control over how and when Windows Update installs releases, while reducing device management costs. Using this method, Surface Hubs are directly connected to Microsoft’s Windows Update service.
-- **Windows Server Update Services (WSUS)** - Set of services that enable IT administrators to obtain the updates that Windows Update determines are applicable to the devices in their enterprise, perform additional testing and evaluation on the updates, and select the updates they want to install. Using this method, Surface Hubs will receive updates from WSUS rather than Windows Update.
-
-You can also configure Surface Hub to receive updates from both Windows Update for Business and WSUS. See [Integrate Windows Update for Business with Windows Server Update Services](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/manage/waas-integrate-wufb#integrate-windows-update-for-business-with-windows-server-update-services) for details.
-
-| Capabilities | Windows Update for Business | Windows Server Update Services (WSUS) |
-| ------------ | --------------------------- | ------------------------------------- |
-| Receive updates directly from Microsoft's Windows Update service, with no additional infrastructure required. | Yes | No |
-| Defer updates to provide additional time for testing and evaluation. | Yes | Yes |
-| Deploy updates to select groups of devices. | Yes | Yes |
-| Define maintenance windows for installing updates. | Yes | Yes |
-
-> [!TIP]
-> Use peer-to-peer content sharing to reduce bandwidth issues during updates. See [Optimize update delivery for Windows 10 updates](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/manage/waas-optimize-windows-10-updates) for details.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Surface Hub does not currently support rolling back updates.
-
-
-## Surface Hub servicing model
-
-Surface Hub uses the Windows 10 servicing model, referred to as [Windows as a Service (WaaS)](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/deployment/update/waas-overview). Traditionally, new features were added only in new versions of Windows that were released every few years. Each new version required lengthy and expensive processes to deploy in an organization. As a result, end users and organizations don't frequently enjoy the benefits of new innovation. The goal of Windows as a Service is to continually provide new capabilities while maintaining a high level of quality.
-
-Microsoft publishes two types of Surface Hub releases broadly on an ongoing basis:
-- **Feature updates** - Updates that install the latest new features, experiences, and capabilities. Microsoft expects to publish two new feature updates per year.
-- **Quality updates** - Updates that focus on the installation of security fixes, drivers, and other servicing updates. Microsoft expects to publish one cumulative quality update per month.
-
-In order to improve release quality and simplify deployments, all new releases that Microsoft publishes for Windows 10, including Surface Hub, will be cumulative. This means new feature updates and quality updates will contain the payloads of all previous releases (in an optimized form to reduce storage and networking requirements), and installing the release on a device will bring it completely up to date. Also, unlike earlier versions of Windows, you cannot install a subset of the contents of a Windows 10 quality update. For example, if a quality update contains fixes for three security vulnerabilities and one reliability issue, deploying the update will result in the installation of all four fixes.
-
-The Surface Hub operating system receives updates on the [Semi-Annual Channel](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/deployment/update/waas-overview#naming-changes). Like other editions of Windows 10, the servicing lifetime is finite. You must install new feature updates on machines running these branches in order to continue receiving quality updates.
-
-For more information on Windows as a Service, see [Overview of Windows as a service](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/manage/waas-overview).
-
-
-## Use Windows Update for Business
-Surface Hubs, like all Windows 10 devices, include **Windows Update for Business (WUfB)** to enable you to control how your devices are being updated. Windows Update for Business helps reduce device management costs, provide controls over update deployment, offer quicker access to security updates, as well as provide access to the latest innovations from Microsoft on an ongoing basis. For more information, see [Manage updates using Windows Update for Business](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/manage/waas-manage-updates-wufb).
-
-**To set up Windows Update for Business:**
-1. [Group Surface Hub into deployment rings](#group-surface-hub-into-deployment-rings)
-2. [Configure when Surface Hub receives updates](#configure-when-surface-hub-receives-updates).
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You can use Microsoft Intune, System Center Configuration Manager, or a supported third-party MDM provider to set up WUfB. [Walkthrough: use Microsoft Intune to configure Windows Update for Business.](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/deployment/update/waas-wufb-intune)
-
-
-### Group Surface Hub into deployment rings
-Use deployment rings to control when updates roll out to your Surface Hubs, giving you time to validate them. For example, you can update a small pool of devices first to verify quality before a broader roll-out to your organization. Depending on who manages Surface Hub in your organization, consider incorporating Surface Hub into the deployment rings that you've built for your other Windows 10 devices. For more information about deployment rings, see [Build deployment rings for Windows 10 updates](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/manage/waas-deployment-rings-windows-10-updates).
-
-This table gives examples of deployment rings.
-
-| Deployment ring | Ring size | Servicing branch | Deferral for feature updates | Deferral for quality updates (security fixes, drivers, and other updates) | Validation step |
-| --------- | --------- | --------- | --------- | --------- | --------- |
-| Preview (e.g. non-critical or test devices) | Small | Windows Insider Preview | None. | None. | Manually test and evaluate new functionality. Pause updates if there are issues. |
-| Release (e.g. devices used by select teams) | Medium | Semi-annual channel | None. | None. | Monitor device usage and user feedback. Pause updates if there are issues. |
-| Broad deployment (e.g. most of the devices in your organization) | Large | Semi-annual channel | 120 days after release. | 7-14 days after release. | Monitor device usage and user feedback. Pause updates if there are issues. |
-| Mission critical (e.g. devices in executive boardrooms) | Small | Semi-annual channel | 180 days after release (maximum deferral for feature updates). | 30 days after release (maximum deferral for quality updates). | Monitor device usage and user feedback. |
-
-
-
-
-
-### Configure when Surface Hub receives updates
-Once you've determined deployment rings for your Surface Hubs, configure update deferral policies for each ring:
-- To defer feature updates, set an appropriate [Update/DeferFeatureUpdatesPeriodInDays](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-update#update-deferfeatureupdatesperiodindays) policy for each ring.
-- To defer quality updates, set an appropriate [Update/DeferQualityUpdatesPeriodInDays](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-update#update-deferqualityupdatesperiodindays) policy for each ring.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> If you encounter issues during the update rollout, you can pause updates using [Update/PauseFeatureUpdates](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-update#update-pausefeatureupdates) and [Update/PauseQualityUpdates](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-update#update-pausequalityupdates).
-
-
-## Use Windows Server Update Services
-
-You can connect Surface Hub to your Windows Server Update Services (WSUS) server to manage updates. Updates will be controlled through approvals or automatic deployment rules configured in your WSUS server, so new upgrades will not be deployed until you choose to deploy them.
-
-**To manually connect a Surface Hub to a WSUS server:**
-1. Open **Settings** on your Surface Hub.
-2. Enter the device admin credentials when prompted.
-3. Navigate to **Update & security** > **Windows Update** > **Advanced options** > **Configure Windows Server Update Services (WSUS) server**.
-4. Click **Use WSUS Server to download updates** and type the URL of your WSUS server.
-
-To connect Surface Hub to a WSUS server using MDM, set an appropriate [Update/UpdateServiceUrl](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904962.aspx#Update_UpdateServiceUrl) policy.
-
-**If you use a proxy server or other method to block URLs**
-
-If you use a method other than WSUS to block specific URLs and prevent updates, you will need to add the following Windows update trusted site URLs to the “allow list”:
-- `http(s)://*.update.microsoft.com`
-- `http://download.windowsupdate.com`
-- `http://windowsupdate.microsoft.com`
-
-Once the Windows 10 Team Anniversary Update is installed, you can remove these addresses to return your Surface Hub to its previous state.
-
-## Maintenance window
-
-To ensure the device is always available for use during business hours, Surface Hub performs its administrative functions during a specified maintenance window. During the maintenance window, the Surface Hub automatically installs updates through Windows Update or WSUS, and reboots the device if needed.
-
-Surface Hub follows these guidelines to apply updates:
-- Install the update during the next maintenance window. If a meeting is scheduled to start during a maintenance window, or the Surface Hub sensors detect that the device is being used, the pending update will be postponed to the following maintenance window.
-- If the next maintenance window is past the update’s prescribed grace period, the device will calculate the next available slot during business hours using the estimated install time from the update’s metadata. It will continue to postpone the update if a meeting is scheduled, or the Surface Hub sensors detect that the device is being used.
-- If the next maintenance window is **not** past the update's grace period, the Surface Hub will continue to postpone the update.
-- If a reboot is needed, the Surface Hub will automatically reboot during the next maintenance window.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Allow time for updates when you first setup your Surface Hub. For example, a backlog of virus definitions may be available, which should be immediately installed.
-
-A default maintenance window is set for all new Surface Hubs:
-- **Start time:** 3:00 AM
-- **Duration:** 1 hour
-
-**To manually change the maintenance window:**
-1. Open **Settings** on your Surface Hub.
-2. Navigate to **Update & security** > **Windows Update** > **Advanced options**.
-3. Under **Maintenance hours**, select **Change**.
-
-To change the maintenance window using MDM, set the **MOMAgent** node in the [SurfaceHub configuration service provider](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/mt608323.aspx). See [Manage settings with an MDM provider](manage-settings-with-mdm-for-surface-hub.md) for more details.
-
-
-## More information
-
-- [Blog post: Servicing, Flighting, and Managing updates for Surface Hub (With Intune, of course!)](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/y0av/2018/05/31/7-3/)
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-[Manage Microsoft Surface Hub](manage-surface-hub.md)
-
-[Microsoft Surface Hub administrator's guide](surface-hub-administrators-guide.md)
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/miracast-over-infrastructure.md b/devices/surface-hub/miracast-over-infrastructure.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1b09f33999..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/miracast-over-infrastructure.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,49 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Miracast on existing wireless network or LAN
-description: Windows 10 enables you to send a Miracast stream over a local network.
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 06/20/2019
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Miracast on existing wireless network or LAN
-
-In the Windows 10, version 1703, Microsoft has extended the ability to send a Miracast stream over a local network rather than over a direct wireless link. This functionality is based on the [Miracast over Infrastructure Connection Establishment Protocol (MS-MICE)](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/mt796768.aspx).
-
-Miracast over Infrastructure offers a number of benefits:
-
-- Windows automatically detects when sending the video stream over this path is applicable.
-- Windows will only choose this route if the connection is over Ethernet or a secure Wi-Fi network.
-- Users do not have to change how they connect to a Miracast receiver. They use the same UX as for standard Miracast connections.
-- No changes to current wireless drivers or PC hardware are required.
-- It works well with older wireless hardware that is not optimized for Miracast over Wi-Fi Direct.
-- It leverages an existing connection which both reduces the time to connect and provides a very stable stream.
-
-
-## How it works
-
-Users attempt to connect to a Miracast receiver as they did previously. When the list of Miracast receivers is populated, Windows 10 will identify that the receiver is capable of supporting a connection over the infrastructure. When the user selects a Miracast receiver, Windows 10 will attempt to resolve the device's hostname via standard DNS, as well as via multicast DNS (mDNS). If the name is not resolvable via either DNS method, Windows 10 will fall back to establishing the Miracast session using the standard Wi-Fi direct connection.
-
-
-## Enabling Miracast over Infrastructure
-
-If you have a Surface Hub or other Windows 10 device that has been updated to Windows 10, version 1703, then you automatically have this new feature. To take advantage of it in your environment, you need to ensure the following is true within your deployment:
-
-- The Surface Hub or device (Windows PC or phone) needs to be running Windows 10, version 1703.
-- A Surface Hub or Windows PC can act as a Miracast over Infrastructure *receiver*. A Windows PC or phone can act as a Miracast over Infrastructure *source*.
- - As a Miracast receiver, the Surface Hub or device must be connected to your enterprise network via either Ethernet or a secure Wi-Fi connection (e.g. using either WPA2-PSK or WPA2-Enterprise security). If the Surface Hub or device is connected to an open Wi-Fi connection, Miracast over Infrastructure will disable itself.
- - As a Miracast source, the Windows PC or phone must be connected to the same enterprise network via Ethernet or a secure Wi-Fi connection.
-- The DNS Hostname (device name) of the Surface Hub or device needs to be resolvable via your DNS servers. You can achieve this by either allowing your Surface Hub to register automatically via Dynamic DNS, or by manually creating an A or AAAA record for the Surface Hub's hostname.
-- Windows 10 PCs must be connected to the same enterprise network via Ethernet or a secure Wi-Fi connection.
-- On Windows 10 PCs, the **Projecting to this PC** feature must be enabled within System Settings, and the device must have a Wi-Fi interface enabled in order to respond to discovery requests.
-
-
-It is important to note that Miracast over Infrastructure is not a replacement for standard Miracast. Instead, the functionality is complementary, and provides an advantage to users who are part of the enterprise network. Users who are guests to a particular location and don’t have access to the enterprise network will continue to connect using the Wi-Fi Direct connection method.
-
-The **InBoxApps/WirelessProjection/PinRequired** setting in the [SurfaceHub configuration service provider (CSP)](https://msdn.microsoft.com/windows/hardware/commercialize/customize/mdm/surfacehub-csp) is not required for Miracast over Infrastructure. This is because Miracast over Infrastructure only works when both devices are connected to the same enterprise network. This removes the security restriction that was previously missing from Miracast. We recommend that you continue using this setting (if you used it previously) as Miracast will fall back to regular Miracast if the infrastructure connection does not work.
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/miracast-troubleshooting.md b/devices/surface-hub/miracast-troubleshooting.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 9517857676..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/miracast-troubleshooting.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Troubleshoot Miracast on Surface Hub
-description: Learn how to resolve issues with Miracast on Surface Hub.
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 06/20/2019
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Troubleshoot Miracast on Surface Hub
-
-Surface Hub supports wireless projection through the Miracast protocol. Most wireless monitors and adapters available today use the original implementation of Miracast. Surface Hub uses a slightly different version of Miracast known as **Miracast Autonomous Group Owner (AGO)**. A common troubleshooting step when projecting wirelessly to Surface Hub fails is to test projecting to another wireless monitor or adapter. However, in most cases, these devices are not using Miracast AGO and do not handle wireless projection the same way that Surface Hub does.
-
-In traditional Miracast, the projecting device will connect the access point set up by the Miracast-enabled monitor, and then the monitor will send traffic back to the projecting device using the network channel of the projecting device. Miracast AGO is a two-step connection process:
-
-- The first step is an initial connection using 2.4GHz.
-- After that initial handshake, the projecting device sends traffic to the monitor using the wireless channel settings on the monitor. If Surface Hub is connected to a Wi-Fi network, the access point, it will use the same channel as the connected network, otherwise it will use the Miracast channel from Settings.
-
-There are generally two types of issues with Miracast to Surface Hub: [connection](#connect-issues) and [performance](#performance-issues). In either case, it is a good idea to get a general picture of wireless network activity in the Surface Hub’s location. Running a network scanning tool will show you the available networks and channel usage in the environment.
-
-## Connect issues
-
-Ensure both Wi-Fi and Miracast are both enabled in Settings on Surface Hub.
-
-If you ran a network scan, you should see Surface Hub Miracast listed as an access point. If Surface Hub’s Miracast network shows up on the scan, but you cannot not see it as an available device, you can try to adjust the Miracast channel used by Surface Hub.
-
-When Surface Hub is connected to a Wi-Fi network it will use the same channel settings as the Wi-Fi access point for its Miracast access point. For troubleshooting purposes, disconnect Surface Hub from any Wi-Fi networks (but keep Wi-Fi enabled), so you can control the channel used for Miracast. You can manually select the Miracast channel in Settings. You will need to restart Surface Hub after each change. Generally speaking, you will want to use channels that do not show heavy utilization from the network scan.
-
-It is also possible that the connect issue can be the result of a problem on the connecting device. If the projecting device is running Windows, it should be Windows 8.1 or newer for full Miracast support. Again, for troubleshooting, disconnect the projecting device from any Wi-Fi networks. This will eliminate any channel switching between the access point channel and the Miracast channel set on Surface Hub. Also, some Group Policy and firewall settings may be tied to a Wi-Fi network.
-
-### Check drivers
-
-It is also a good idea to ensure the latest drivers and updates are installed on the projecting device. In Device Manager, open the Wi-Fi adapter and video adapter and check for an updated driver version. [Hotfix 3120232](https://support.microsoft.com/help/3120232/poor-wireless-performance-on-5-ghz-connections-on-surface-pro-3-and-surface-3) is highly recommended for Surface Pro 3 and Surface Pro 4 if they are on an older Wi-Fi driver.
-
-### Check for Miracast support
-
-Next, ensure Miracast is supported on the device.
-
-1. Press Windows Key + R and type `dxdiag`.
-2. Click “Save all information”.
-3. Open the saved dxdiag.txt and find **Miracast**. It should say **Available, with HDCP**.
-
-### Check firewall
-
-The Windows firewall can block Miracast traffic. The simplest test is to disable the firewall and test projection. If Miracast works with the firewall disabled, add an exception for
-
- C:\Windows\System32\WUDFHost.exe
- Allow In/Out connections for TCP and UDP, Ports: All.
-
-### Check Group Policy settings
-
-On domain-joined devices, Group Policy can also block Miracast.
-
-1. Use the Windows Key + R and type `rsop.msc` to execute the **Resultant Set of Policy** snap-in. This will show the current policies applied to the PC.
-2. Review **Computer Configuration** > **Windows Settings** > **Security Settings** > **Wireless Network (IEEE 802.11) Policies**. There should be a setting for wireless policies.
-3. Double click the setting for wireless policies and a dialog box will appear.
-4. Open the **Network Permissions** tab and select **Allow everyone to create all user profiles**.
-
-### Check event logs
-
-The last place to check is in the Event logs. Miracast events will be logged to **Wlanautoconfig**. This is true on both Surface Hub and the projecting device. If you export Surface Hub logs, you can view Surface Hub’s Wlanautoconfig in the **WindowsEventLog** folder. Errors in the event log can provide some additional details on where the connection fails.
-
-## Performance issues
-
-After wireless projection is connected, it is possible to see performance issues causing latency. This is generally a result of overall channel saturation or a situation that causes channel switching.
-
-For channel saturation, refer to the network scan and try to use channels with less traffic.
-
-Channel switching is caused when the Wi-Fi adapter needs to send traffic to multiple channels. Certain channels support Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS). DFS is used on channels 49 through 148. Some Wi-Fi drivers will show poor performance when connected to a DFS channel. If you are seeing poor Miracast performance while connected to a DFS channel, try the projection on a non-DFS channel. Both Surface Hub and projecting device should use non-DFS channels.
-
-If Surface Hub and the projecting device are both connected to Wi-Fi but using different access points with different channels, this will force Surface Hub and the projecting device to channel switch while Miracast is connected. This will result in both poor wireless project and poor network performance over Wi-Fi. The channel switching will affect the performance of all wireless traffic, not just wireless projection.
-
-Channel switching will also occur if the projecting device is connected to an Wi-Fi network using a different channel than the channel that Surface Hub uses for Miracast. So, a best practice is to set Surface Hub’s Miracast channel to the same channel as the most commonly used access point.
-
-If there are multiple Wi-Fi networks or access points in the environment, some channel switching is unavoidable. This is best addressed by ensuring all Wi-Fi drivers are up to date.
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/monitor-surface-hub.md b/devices/surface-hub/monitor-surface-hub.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 262c565327..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/monitor-surface-hub.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,159 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Monitor your Microsoft Surface Hub
-description: Monitoring for Microsoft Surface Hub devices is enabled through Microsoft Operations Management Suite (OMS).
-ms.assetid: 1D2ED317-DFD9-423D-B525-B16C2B9D6942
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: monitor Surface Hub, Microsoft Operations Management Suite, OMS
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Monitor your Microsoft Surface Hub
-
-Monitoring for Microsoft Surface Hub devices is enabled through Microsoft Operations Management Suite (OMS). The [Operations Management Suite](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=718138) is Microsoft's IT management solution that helps you manage and protect your entire IT infrastructure, including your Surface Hubs.
-
-
-Surface Hub is offered as a Log Analytics solution in OMS, allowing you to collect and view usage and reliability data across all your Surface Hubs. Use the Surface Hub solution to:
-- Inventory your Surface Hubs.
-- View a snapshot of usage and reliability data for Skype meetings, wired and wireless projection, and apps on your Surface Hubs.
-- Create custom alerts to respond quickly if your Surface Hubs report software or hardware issues.
-
-## Add Surface Hub to Operations Management Suite
-
-1. **Sign in to Operations Management Suite (OMS)**. You can use either a Microsoft Account or a Work or School account to create a workspace. If your company is already using Azure Active Directory (Azure AD), use a Work or School account when you sign in to OMS. Using a Work or School account allows you to use identities from your Azure AD to manage permissions in OMS.
-2. **Create a new OMS workspace**. Enter a name for the workspace, select the workspace region, and provide the email address that you want associated with this workspace. Select **Create**.
-3. **Link Azure subscription to your workspace**. If your organization already has an Azure subscription, you can link it to your workspace. Note that you may need to request access from your organization’s Azure administrator.
-
- > [!NOTE]
- > If your organization does not have an Azure subscription, create a new one or select the default OMS Azure subscription from the list. Your workspace opens.
-
-4. **Add Surface Hub solution**. In the Solutions Gallery, select the **Surface Hub** tile in the gallery and then select **Add** on the solution’s details page. The solution is now visible on your workspace.
-
-## Use the Surface Hub dashboard
-From the **Overview** page in your OMS workspace, click the Surface Hub tile to see the Surface Hub dashboard. Use the dashboard to get a snapshot of usage and reliability data across your Surface Hubs. Click into each view on the dashboard to see detailed data, modify the query as desired, and create alerts.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Most of these views show data for the past 30 days, but this is subject to your subscription's data retention policy.
-
-**Active Surface Hubs**
-
-Use this view to get an inventory of all your Surface Hubs. Once connected to OMS, each Surface Hub periodically sends a "heartbeat" event to the server. This view shows Surface Hubs that have reported a heartbeat in the past 24 hours.
-
-
-
-**Wireless projection**
-
-Use this view to get usage and reliability data for wireless projection over the past 30 days. The graph shows the total number of wireless connections across all your Surface Hubs, which provides an indication whether people in your organization are using this feature. If it's a low number, it may suggest a need to provide training to help people in your organization learn how to wirelessly connect to a Surface Hub.
-
-Also, the graph shows a breakdown of successful and unsuccessful connections. If you see a high number of unsuccessful connections, devices may not properly support wireless projection using Miracast. For best performance, Microsoft suggests that devices run a WDI Wi-Fi driver and a WDDM 2.0 graphics driver. Use the details view to learn if wireless projection problems are common with particular devices.
-
-When a connection fails, users can also do the following if they are using a Windows laptop or phone:
-- Remove the paired device from **Settings** > **Devices** > **Connected devices**, then try to connect again.
-- Reboot the device.
-
-**Wired projection**
-
-Use this view to get usage and reliability data for wired projection over the past 30 days. If the graph shows a high number of unsuccessful connections, it may indicate a connectivity issue in your audio-visual pipeline. For example, if you use a HDMI repeater or a center-of-room control panel, they may need to be restarted.
-
-**Application usage**
-
-Use this view to get usage data for apps on your Surface Hubs over the past 30 days. The data comes from app launches on your Surface Hubs, not including Skype for Business. This view helps you understand which Surface Hub apps are the most valuable in your organization. If you are deploying new line-of-business apps in your environment, this can also help you understand how often they are being used.
-
-**Application Crashes**
-
-Use this view to get reliability data for apps on your Surface Hubs over the past 30 days. The data comes from app crashes on your Surface Hubs. This view helps you detect and notify app developers of poorly behaving in-box and line-of-business apps.
-
-**Sample Queries**
-
-Use this to create custom alerts based on a recommended set of queries. Alerts help you respond quickly if your Surface Hubs report software or hardware issues. For more inforamtion, see [Set up alerts using sample queries](#set-up-alerts-with-sample-queries).
-
-## Set up alerts with sample queries
-
-Use alerts to respond quickly if your Surface Hubs report software or hardware issues. Alert rules automatically run log searches according to a schedule, and runs one or more actions if the results match specific criteria. For more information, see [Alerts in Log Analytics](https://azure.microsoft.com/documentation/articles/log-analytics-alerts/).
-
-The Surface Hub Log Analytics solution comes with a set of sample queries to help you set up the appropriate alerts and understand how to resolve issues you may encounter. Use them as a starting point to plan your monitoring and support strategy.
-
-This table describes the sample queries in the Surface Hub solution:
-
-| Alert type | Impact | Recommended remediation | Details |
-| ---------- | ------ | ----------------------- | ------- |
-| Software | Error | **Reboot the device**. Reboot manually, or using the [Reboot configuration service provider](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/mt720802(v=vs.85).aspx). Suggest doing this between meetings to minimize impact to your people in your organization. | Trigger conditions: - A critical process in the Surface Hub operating system, such as the shell, projection, or Skype, crashes or becomes non-responsive. - The device hasn't reported a heartbeat in the past 24 hours. This may be due to network connectivity issue or network-related hardware failure, or an error with the diagnostic data reporting system. |
-| Software | Error | **Check your Exchange service**. Verify: - The service is available. - The device account password is up to date – see [Password management](password-management-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md) for details.| Triggers when there's an error syncing the device calendar with Exchange. |
-| Software | Error | **Check your Skype for Business service**. Verify: - The service is available. - The device account password is up to date – see [Password management](password-management-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md) for details. - The domain name for Skype for Business is properly configured - see [Configure a domain name](use-fully-qualified-domain-name-surface-hub.md). | Triggers when Skype fails to sign in. |
-| Software | Error | **Reset the device**. This takes some time, so you should take the device offline. For more information, see [Device reset](device-reset-surface-hub.md).| Triggers when there is an error cleaning up user and app data at the end of a session. When this operation repeatedly fails, the device is locked to protect user data. You must reset the device to continue. |
-| Hardware | Warning | **None**. Indicates negligible impact to functionality.| Triggers when there is an error with any of the following hardware components: - Virtual pen slots - NFC driver - USB hub driver - Bluetooth driver - Proximity sensor - Graphical performance (video card driver) - Mismatched hard drive - No keyboard/mouse detected |
-| Hardware | Error | **Contact Microsoft support**. Indicates impact to core functionality (such as Skype, projection, touch, and internet connectivity). **Note** Some events, including heartbeat, include the device’s serial number that you can use when contacting support.| Triggers when there is an error with any of the following hardware components. **Components that affect Skype**: - Speaker driver - Microphone driver - Camera driver **Components that affect wired and wireless projection**: - Wired touchback driver - Wired ingest driver - Wireless adapter driver - Wi-Fi Direct error **Other components**: - Touch digitizer driver - Network adapter error (not reported to OMS)|
-
-**To set up an alert**
-1. From the Surface Hub solution, select one of the sample queries.
-2. Modify the query as desired. See Log Analytics search reference to learn more.
-3. Click **Alert** at the top of the page to open the **Add Alert Rule** screen. See [Alerts in Log Analytics](https://azure.microsoft.com/documentation/articles/log-analytics-alerts/) for details on the options to configure the alert.
-4. Click **Save** to complete the alert rule. It will start running immediately.
-
-## Enroll your Surface Hub
-
-For Surface Hub to connect to and register with the OMS service, it must have access to the port number of your domains and the URLs. This table list the ports that OMS needs. For more information, see [Configure proxy and firewall settings in Log Analytics](https://azure.microsoft.com/documentation/articles/log-analytics-proxy-firewall/).
-
->[!NOTE]
->Surface Hub does not currently support the use of a proxy server to communicate with the OMS service.
-
-| Agent resource | Ports | Bypass HTTPS inspection? |
-| --------------------------- | ----- | ------------------------ |
-| *.ods.opinsights.azure.com | 443 | Yes |
-| *.oms.opinsights.azure.com | 443 | Yes |
-| *.blob.core.windows.net | 443 | Yes |
-| ods.systemcenteradvisor.com | 443 | No |
-
-The Microsoft Monitoring Agent, used to connect devices to OMS, is integrated with the Surface Hub operating system, so there is no need to install additional clients to connect Surface Hub to OMS.
-
-Once your OMS workspace is set up, there are several ways to enroll your Surface Hub devices:
-- [Settings app](#enroll-using-the-settings-app)
-- [Provisioning package](#enroll-using-a-provisioning-package)
-- [MDM provider](#enroll-using-a-mdm-provider), such as Microsoft Intune and Configuration Manager
-
-You'll need the workspace ID and primary key of your OMS workspace. You can get these from the OMS portal.
-
-### Enroll using the Settings app
-
-**To Enroll using the settings app**
-
-1. From your Surface Hub, start **Settings**.
-2. Enter the device admin credentials when prompted.
-3. Select **This device**, and navigate to **Device management**.
-4. Under **Monitoring**, select **Configure OMS settings**.
-5. In the OMS settings dialog, select **Enable monitoring**.
-6. Type the workspace ID and primary key of your OMS workspace. You can get these from the OMS portal.
-7. Click **OK** to complete the configuration.
-
-A confirmation dialog will appear telling you whether or not the OMS configuration was successfully applied to the device. If it was, the device will start sending data to OMS.
-
-### Enroll using a provisioning package
-You can use a provisioning package to enroll your Surface Hub. For more information, see [Create provisioning packages](provisioning-packages-for-certificates-surface-hub.md).
-
-### Enroll using a MDM provider
-You can enroll Surface Hub into OMS using the SurfaceHub CSP. Intune and Configuration Manager provide built-in experiences to help create policy templates for Surface Hub. For more information, see [Manage Surface Hub settings with an MDM provider](manage-settings-with-mdm-for-surface-hub.md).
-
-## Related topics
-
-[Manage Microsoft Surface Hub](manage-surface-hub.md)
-
-[Microsoft Surface Hub administrator's guide](surface-hub-administrators-guide.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/on-premises-deployment-surface-hub-device-accounts.md b/devices/surface-hub/on-premises-deployment-surface-hub-device-accounts.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 88b0653b00..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/on-premises-deployment-surface-hub-device-accounts.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,164 +0,0 @@
----
-title: On-premises deployment single forest (Surface Hub)
-description: This topic explains how you add a device account for your Microsoft Surface Hub when you have a single-forest, on-premises deployment.
-ms.assetid: 80E12195-A65B-42D1-8B84-ECC3FCBAAFC6
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: single forest deployment, on prem deployment, device account, Surface Hub
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.date: 08/28/2018
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# On-premises deployment for Surface Hub in a single-forest environment
-
-
-This topic explains how you add a device account for your Microsoft Surface Hub when you have a single-forest, on-premises deployment.
-
-If you have a single-forest on-premises deployment with Microsoft Exchange 2013 or later and Skype for Business 2013 or later, then you can [use the provided PowerShell scripts](appendix-a-powershell-scripts-for-surface-hub.md#create-on-premises-ps-scripts) to create device accounts. If you’re using a multi-forest deployment, see [On-premises deployment for Surface Hub in a multi-forest environment](on-premises-deployment-surface-hub-multi-forest.md).
-
-1. Start a remote PowerShell session from a PC and connect to Exchange.
-
- Be sure you have the right permissions set to run the associated cmdlets.
-
- Note here that `$strExchangeServer` is the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of your Exchange server, and `$strLyncFQDN` is the FQDN of your Skype for Business server.
-
- ```PowerShell
- Set-ExecutionPolicy Unrestricted
- $org='contoso.microsoft.com'
- $cred=Get-Credential $admin@$org
- $sessExchange = New-PSSession -ConfigurationName microsoft.exchange -Credential $cred -AllowRedirection -Authentication Kerberos -ConnectionUri "http://$strExchangeServer/powershell" -WarningAction SilentlyContinue
- $sessLync = New-PSSession -Credential $cred -ConnectionURI "https://$strLyncFQDN/OcsPowershell" -AllowRedirection -WarningAction SilentlyContinue
- Import-PSSession $sessExchange
- Import-PSSession $sessLync
- ```
-
-2. After establishing a session, you’ll either create a new mailbox and enable it as a RoomMailboxAccount, or change the settings for an existing room mailbox. This will allow the account to authenticate into the Surface Hub.
-
- If you're changing an existing resource mailbox:
-
- ```PowerShell
- Set-Mailbox -Identity 'HUB01' -EnableRoomMailboxAccount $true -RoomMailboxPassword (ConvertTo-SecureString -String -AsPlainText -Force)
- ```
-
- If you’re creating a new resource mailbox:
-
- ```PowerShell
- New-Mailbox -UserPrincipalName HUB01@contoso.com -Alias HUB01 -Name "Hub-01" -Room -EnableRoomMailboxAccount $true -RoomMailboxPassword (ConvertTo-SecureString -String -AsPlainText -Force)
- ```
-> [!IMPORTANT]
-> ActiveSync Virtual Directory Basic Authentication is required to be enabled as the Surface Hub is unable to authenticate using other authentication methods.
-
-3. After setting up the mailbox, you will need to either create a new Exchange ActiveSync policy, or use a compatible existing policy.
-
- Surface Hubs are only compatible with device accounts that have an ActiveSync policy where the **PasswordEnabled** property is set to False. If this isn’t set properly, then Exchange services on the Surface Hub (mail, calendar, and joining meetings), will not be enabled.
-
- If you haven’t created a compatible policy yet, use the following cmdlet—this one creates a policy called "Surface Hubs". Once it’s created, you can apply the same policy to other device accounts.
-
- ```PowerShell
- $easPolicy = New-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy -Name “SurfaceHubs” -PasswordEnabled $false
- ```
-
- Once you have a compatible policy, then you will need to apply the policy to the device account. However, policies can only be applied to user accounts and not resource mailboxes. You need to convert the mailbox into a user type, apply the policy, and then convert it back into a mailbox—you may need to re-enable it and set the password again too.
-
- ```PowerShell
- $acctUpn = Get-Mailbox -Identity ""
- $credNewAccount.Password = ConvertTo-SecureString -String -AsPlainText -Force
- Set-Mailbox $acctUpn -Type Regular
- Set-CASMailbox $acctUpn -ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy $easPolicy
- Set-Mailbox $acctUpn -Type Room
- Set-Mailbox $acctUpn -RoomMailboxPassword $credNewAccount.Password -EnableRoomMailboxAccount $true
- ```
-
-4. Various Exchange properties can be set on the device account to improve the meeting experience for people. You can see which properties need to be set in the [Exchange properties](exchange-properties-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md) section.
-
- ```PowerShell
- Set-CalendarProcessing -Identity $acctUpn -AutomateProcessing AutoAccept -AddOrganizerToSubject $false –AllowConflicts $false –DeleteComments $false -DeleteSubject $false -RemovePrivateProperty $false
- Set-CalendarProcessing -Identity $acctUpn -AddAdditionalResponse $true -AdditionalResponse "This is a Surface Hub room!"
- ```
-
-5. If you decide to have the password not expire, you can set that with PowerShell cmdlets too. See [Password management](password-management-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md) for more information.
-
- ```PowerShell
- Set-AdUser $acctUpn -PasswordNeverExpires $true
- ```
-
-6. Enable the account in Active Directory so it will authenticate to the Surface Hub.
-
- ```PowerShell
- Set-AdUser $acctUpn -Enabled $true
- ```
-
-7. Enable the device account with Skype for Business by enabling your Surface Hub AD account on a Skype for Business Server pool:
-
- ```PowerShell
- Enable-CsMeetingRoom -SipAddress "sip:HUB01@contoso.com"
- -DomainController DC-ND-001.contoso.com -RegistrarPool LYNCPool15.contoso.com
- -Identity HUB01
- ```
-
- You'll need to use the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) address and domain controller for the Surface Hub, along with your own Skype for Business Server pool identifier and user identity.
-
-8. OPTIONAL: You can also allow your Surface Hub to make and receive public switched telephone network (PSTN) phone calls by enabling Enterprise Voice for your account. Enterprise Voice isn't a requirement for Surface Hub, but if you want PSTN dialing functionality for the Surface Hub client, here's how to enable it:
-
- ```PowerShell
- Set-CsMeetingRoom -Identity HUB01 -DomainController DC-ND-001.contoso.com -LineURI "tel:+14255550555;ext=50555" -EnterpriseVoiceEnabled $true
- ```
-
- Again, you need to replace the provided domain controller and phone number examples with your own information. The parameter value `$true` stays the same.
-
-
- ## Disable anonymous email and IM
-
-
-
-
-Surface Hub uses a device account to provide email and collaboration services (IM, video, voice). This device account is used as the originating identity (the “from” party) when sending email, IM, and placing calls. As this account is not coming from an individual, identifiable user, it is deemed “anonymous” because it originated from the Surface Hub's device account.
-
-Assume you have a per-user client policy assigned to each meeting room device with an identity of **SurfaceHubPolicy**. To disable anonymous email and messaging, you add a clientPolicyEntry to this client policy by using the following commands.
-
-```
-$policyEntry = New-CsClientPolicyEntry -Name AllowResourceAccountSendMessage -value $false
-$clientPolicy = Get-CsClientPolicy -Identity SurfaceHubPolicy
-$clientPolicy.PolicyEntry.Add($policyEntry)
-Set-CsClientPolicy -Instance $clientPolicy
-```
-
-To verify that the policy has been set:
-
-```
-Select-Object -InputObject $clientPolicy -Property PolicyEntry
-```
-
-The output should be:
-
-```
-PolicyEntry
------------
-{Name=AllowResourceAccountSendMessage;Value=False}
-```
-
-
-To change the policy entry:
-
-```
-$policyEntry = New-CsClientPolicyEntry -Name AllowResourceAccountSendMessage -value $true
-$clientPolicy | Set-CsClientPolicy -PolicyEntry @{Replace = $policyEntry}
-```
-
-To remove the policy entry:
-
-```
-$policyEntry = New-CsClientPolicyEntry -Name AllowResourceAccountSendMessage -value $true
-$clientPolicy | Set-CsClientPolicy -PolicyEntry @{Remove = $policyEntry}
-```
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/on-premises-deployment-surface-hub-multi-forest.md b/devices/surface-hub/on-premises-deployment-surface-hub-multi-forest.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f643e4cfe6..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/on-premises-deployment-surface-hub-multi-forest.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
----
-title: On-premises deployment multi-forest (Surface Hub)
-description: This topic explains how you add a device account for your Microsoft Surface Hub when you have a multi-forest, on-premises deployment.
-keywords: multi forest deployment, on prem deployment, device account, Surface Hub
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.date: 08/28/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# On-premises deployment for Surface Hub in a multi-forest environment
-
-
-This topic explains how you add a device account for your Microsoft Surface Hub when you have a multi-forest, on-premises deployment.
-
-If you have a multi-forest on-premises deployment with Microsoft Exchange 2013 or later and Skype for Business 2013 or later, then you can [use the provided PowerShell scripts](appendix-a-powershell-scripts-for-surface-hub.md#create-on-premises-ps-scripts) to create device accounts. If you’re using a single-forest deployment, see [On-premises deployment for Surface Hub in a single-forest environment](on-premises-deployment-surface-hub-device-accounts.md).
-
-1. Start a remote PowerShell session from a PC and connect to Exchange.
-
- Be sure you have the right permissions set to run the associated cmdlets.
-
- Note here that `$strExchangeServer` is the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of your Exchange server, and `$strLyncFQDN` is the FQDN of your Skype for Business server.
-
- ```PowerShell
- Set-ExecutionPolicy Unrestricted
- $org='contoso.microsoft.com'
- $cred=Get-Credential $admin@$org
- $sessExchange = New-PSSession -ConfigurationName microsoft.exchange -Credential $cred -AllowRedirection -Authentication Kerberos -ConnectionUri "http://$strExchangeServer/powershell" -WarningAction SilentlyContinue
- $sessLync = New-PSSession -Credential $cred -ConnectionURI "https://$strLyncFQDN/OcsPowershell" -AllowRedirection -WarningAction SilentlyContinue
- Import-PSSession $sessExchange
- Import-PSSession $sessLync
- ```
-
-2. After establishing a session, create a new mailbox in the Resource Forest. This will allow the account to authenticate into the Surface Hub.
-
- If you're changing an existing resource mailbox:
-
- ```PowerShell
- New-Mailbox -UserPrincipalName HUB01@contoso.com -Alias HUB01 -Name "Hub-01"
- ```
-
-3. After setting up the mailbox, you will need to either create a new Exchange ActiveSync policy, or use a compatible existing policy.
-
- Surface Hubs are only compatible with device accounts that have an ActiveSync policy where the **PasswordEnabled** property is set to **False**. If this isn’t set properly, then Exchange services on the Surface Hub (mail, calendar, and joining meetings), will not be enabled.
-
- If you haven’t created a compatible policy yet, use the following cmdlet-—this one creates a policy called "Surface Hubs". Once it’s created, you can apply the same policy to other device accounts.
-
- ```PowerShell
- $easPolicy = New-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy -Name “SurfaceHubs” -PasswordEnabled $false
- ```
-
- Once you have a compatible policy, then you will need to apply the policy to the device account.
-
- ```PowerShell
- Set-CASMailbox $acctUpn -ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy $easPolicy -ActiveSyncEnabled $true
- Set-Mailbox $acctUpn -Type Room
- ```
-
-4. Various Exchange properties can be set on the device account to improve the meeting experience for people. You can see which properties need to be set in the [Exchange properties](exchange-properties-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md) section.
-
- ```PowerShell
- Set-CalendarProcessing -Identity $acctUpn -AutomateProcessing AutoAccept -AddOrganizerToSubject $false –AllowConflicts $false –DeleteComments $false -DeleteSubject $false -RemovePrivateProperty $false
- Set-CalendarProcessing -Identity $acctUpn -AddAdditionalResponse $true -AdditionalResponse "This is a Surface Hub room!"
- ```
-
-5. If you decide to have the password not expire, you can set that with PowerShell cmdlets too. See [Password management](password-management-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md) for more information. This should be set in the User Forest.
-
- ```PowerShell
- Set-AdUser $acctUpn -PasswordNeverExpires $true
- ```
-
-6. Enable the account in Active Directory so it will authenticate to the Surface Hub. This should be set in the User Forest.
-
- ```PowerShell
- Set-AdUser $acctUpn -Enabled $true
- ```
-
-6. You now need to change the room mailbox to a linked mailbox:
-
- ```PowerShell
- $cred=Get-Credential AuthForest\ADAdmin
- Set-mailbox -Alias LinkedRoomTest1 -LinkedMasterAccount AuthForest\LinkedRoomTest1 -LinkedDomainController AuthForest-4939.AuthForest.extest.contoso.com -Name LinkedRoomTest1 -LinkedCredential $cred -Identity LinkedRoomTest1
- ```
-
-7. Enable the device account with Skype for Business by enabling your Surface Hub AD account on a Skype for Business Server pool:
-
- ```PowerShell
- Enable-CsMeetingRoom -SipAddress "sip:HUB01@contoso.com"
- -DomainController DC-ND-001.contoso.com -RegistrarPool LYNCPool15.contoso.com
- -Identity HUB01
- ```
-
- You'll need to use the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) address and domain controller for the Surface Hub, along with your own Skype for Business Server pool identifier and user identity.
-
-
-## Disable anonymous email and IM
-
-
-
-Surface Hub uses a device account to provide email and collaboration services (IM, video, voice). This device account is used as the originating identity (the “from” party) when sending email, IM, and placing calls. As this account is not coming from an individual, identifiable user, it is deemed “anonymous” because it originated from the Surface Hub's device account.
-
-Assume you have a per-user client policy assigned to each meeting room device with an identity of **SurfaceHubPolicy**. To disable anonymous email and messaging, you add a clientPolicyEntry to this client policy by using the following commands.
-
-```
-$policyEntry = New-CsClientPolicyEntry -Name AllowResourceAccountSendMessage -value $false
-$clientPolicy = Get-CsClientPolicy -Identity SurfaceHubPolicy
-$clientPolicy.PolicyEntry.Add($policyEntry)
-Set-CsClientPolicy -Instance $clientPolicy
-```
-
-To verify that the policy has been set:
-
-```
-Select-Object -InputObject $clientPolicy -Property PolicyEntry
-```
-
-The output should be:
-
-```
-PolicyEntry
------------
-{Name=AllowResourceAccountSendMessage;Value=False}
-```
-
-
-To change the policy entry:
-
-```
-$policyEntry = New-CsClientPolicyEntry -Name AllowResourceAccountSendMessage -value $true
-$clientPolicy | Set-CsClientPolicy -PolicyEntry @{Replace = $policyEntry}
-```
-
-To remove the policy entry:
-
-```
-$policyEntry = New-CsClientPolicyEntry -Name AllowResourceAccountSendMessage -value $true
-$clientPolicy | Set-CsClientPolicy -PolicyEntry @{Remove = $policyEntry}
-```
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/online-deployment-surface-hub-device-accounts.md b/devices/surface-hub/online-deployment-surface-hub-device-accounts.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0cd6fc5219..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/online-deployment-surface-hub-device-accounts.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,153 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Online deployment with Office 365 (Surface Hub)
-description: This topic has instructions for adding a device account for your Microsoft Surface Hub when you have a pure, online deployment.
-ms.assetid: D325CA68-A03F-43DF-8520-EACF7C3EDEC1
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: device account for Surface Hub, online deployment
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 02/21/2018
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Online deployment with Office 365 (Surface Hub)
-
-
-This topic has instructions for adding a device account for your Microsoft Surface Hub when you have a pure, online deployment.
-
-If you have a pure, online (O365) deployment, then you can [use the provided PowerShell scripts](appendix-a-powershell-scripts-for-surface-hub.md#create-os356-ps-scripts) to create device accounts.
-
-1. Start a remote PowerShell session on a PC and connect to Exchange.
-
- Be sure you have the right permissions set to run the associated cmdlets.
-
- ```PowerShell
- Set-ExecutionPolicy RemoteSigned
- $org='contoso.microsoft.com'
- $cred=Get-Credential admin@$org
- $sess= New-PSSession -ConfigurationName Microsoft.Exchange -ConnectionUri https://outlook.office365.com/powershell-liveid/ -Credential $cred -Authentication Basic -AllowRedirection
- Import-PSSession $sess
- ```
-
-2. After establishing a session, you’ll either create a new mailbox and enable it as a RoomMailboxAccount, or change the settings for an existing room mailbox. This will allow the account to authenticate into the Surface Hub.
-
- If you're changing an existing resource mailbox:
-
- ```PowerShell
- Set-Mailbox -Identity 'HUB01' -EnableRoomMailboxAccount $true -RoomMailboxPassword (ConvertTo-SecureString -String -AsPlainText -Force)
- ```
-
- If you’re creating a new resource mailbox:
-
- ```PowerShell
- New-Mailbox -MicrosoftOnlineServicesID HUB01@contoso.com -Alias HUB01 -Name "Hub-01" -Room -EnableRoomMailboxAccount $true -RoomMailboxPassword (ConvertTo-SecureString -String -AsPlainText -Force)
- ```
-
-3. After setting up the mailbox, you will need to either create a new Exchange ActiveSync policy, or use a compatible existing policy.
-
- Surface Hubs are only compatible with device accounts that have an ActiveSync policy where the **PasswordEnabled** property is set to False. If this isn’t set properly, then Exchange services on the Surface Hub (mail, calendar, and joining meetings), will not be enabled.
-
- If you haven’t created a compatible policy yet, use the following cmdlet—this one creates a policy called "Surface Hubs". Once it’s created, you can apply the same policy to other device accounts.
-
- ```PowerShell
- $easPolicy = New-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy -Name "SurfaceHubs" -PasswordEnabled $false -AllowNonProvisionableDevices $True
- ```
-
- Once you have a compatible policy, then you will need to apply the policy to the device account.
-
- ```PowerShell
- Set-CASMailbox 'HUB01@contoso.com' -ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy $easPolicy.Id
- ```
-
-4. Various Exchange properties must be set on the device account to improve the meeting experience. You can see which properties need to be set in the [Exchange properties](exchange-properties-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md) section.
-
- ```PowerShell
- Set-CalendarProcessing -Identity 'HUB01@contoso.com' -AutomateProcessing AutoAccept -AddOrganizerToSubject $false –AllowConflicts $false –DeleteComments $false -DeleteSubject $false -RemovePrivateProperty $false
- Set-CalendarProcessing -Identity 'HUB01@contoso.com' -AddAdditionalResponse $true -AdditionalResponse "This is a Surface Hub room!"
- ```
-
-5. Connect to Azure AD.
-
- You first need to install Azure AD module for PowerShell version 2. In an elevated powershell prompt run the following command :
-
- ```PowerShell
- Install-Module -Name AzureAD
- ```
- You need to connect to Azure AD to apply some account settings. You can run this cmdlet to connect.
-
- ```PowerShell
- Import-Module AzureAD
- Connect-AzureAD -Credential $cred
- ```
-
-6. If you decide to have the password not expire, you can set that with PowerShell cmdlets too. See [Password management](password-management-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md) for more information.
-
- ```PowerShell
- Set-AzureADUser -ObjectId "HUB01@contoso.com" -PasswordPolicies "DisablePasswordExpiration"
- ```
-
-7. Surface Hub requires a license for Skype for Business functionality. In order to enable Skype for Business, your environment will need to meet the [prerequisites for Skype for Business online](hybrid-deployment-surface-hub-device-accounts.md#skype-for-business-online).
-
- Next, you can use `Get-AzureADSubscribedSku` to retrieve a list of available SKUs for your O365 tenant.
-
- Once you list out the SKUs, you'll need to assign the SkuId you want to the `$License.SkuId` variable.
-
- ```PowerShell
- Set-AzureADUser -ObjectId "HUB01@contoso.com" -UsageLocation "US"
-
- Get-AzureADSubscribedSku | Select Sku*,*Units
- $License = New-Object -TypeName Microsoft.Open.AzureAD.Model.AssignedLicense
- $License.SkuId = SkuId You selected
-
- $AssignedLicenses = New-Object -TypeName Microsoft.Open.AzureAD.Model.AssignedLicenses
- $AssignedLicenses.AddLicenses = $License
- $AssignedLicenses.RemoveLicenses = @()
-
- Set-AzureADUserLicense -ObjectId "HUB01@contoso.com" -AssignedLicenses $AssignedLicenses
- ```
-
-8. Enable the device account with Skype for Business.
- If the Skype for Business PowerShell module is not installed, [download the Skype for Business Online Windows PowerShell Module](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=39366).
-
- - Start by creating a remote PowerShell session from a PC.
-
- ```PowerShell
- Import-Module SkypeOnlineConnector
- $cssess=New-CsOnlineSession -Credential $cred
- Import-PSSession $cssess -AllowClobber
- ```
-
- - Next, if you aren't sure what value to use for the `RegistrarPool` parameter in your environment, you can get the value from an existing Skype for Business user using this cmdlet (for example, alice@contoso.com):
-
- ```PowerShell
- Get-CsOnlineUser -Identity 'alice@contoso.com' | fl registrarpool
- ```
- OR by setting a variable
-
- ```PowerShell
- $strRegistrarPool = Get-CsOnlineUser -Identity 'alice@contoso.com' | fl registrarpool | out-string
- $strRegistrarPool = $strRegistrarPool.Substring($strRegistrarPool.IndexOf(':') + 2)
- ```
-
- - Enable the Surface Hub account with the following cmdlet:
-
- ```PowerShell
- Enable-CsMeetingRoom -Identity 'HUB01@contoso.com' -RegistrarPool yourRegistrarPool -SipAddressType EmailAddress
- ```
-
- OR using the $strRegistarPool variable from above
-
- ```PowerShell
- Enable-CsMeetingRoom -Identity 'HUB01@contoso.com' -RegistrarPool $strRegistrarPool -SipAddressType EmailAddress
- ```
-
-For validation, you should be able to use any Skype for Business client (PC, Android, etc) to sign in to this account.
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/password-management-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md b/devices/surface-hub/password-management-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 22e7e1284c..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/password-management-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Password management (Surface Hub)
-description: Every Microsoft Surface Hub device account requires a password to authenticate and enable features on the device.
-ms.assetid: 0FBFB546-05F0-430E-905E-87111046E4B8
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: password, password management, password rotation, device account
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Password management (Surface Hub)
-
-Every Microsoft Surface Hub device account requires a password to authenticate and enable features on the device. For security reasons, you may want to change (or "rotate") this password regularly. However, if the device account’s password changes, the password that was previously stored on the Surface Hub will be invalid, and all features that depend on the device account will be disabled. You will need to update the device account’s password on the Surface Hub from the Settings app to re-enable these features.
-
-To simplify password management for your Surface Hub device accounts, there are two options:
-
-1. Turn off password expiration for the device account.
-2. Allow the Surface Hub to automatically rotate the device account’s password.
-
-
-## Turn off password rotation for the device account
-
-Set the device account’s **PasswordNeverExpires** property to True. You should verify whether this meets your organization’s security requirements.
-
-
-## Allow the Surface Hub to automatically rotate the device account’s password
-
-The Surface Hub can manage a device account’s password by changing it frequently without requiring you to manually update the device account’s information. You can enable this feature in **Settings**. Once enabled, the device account's password will change weekly during maintenance hours.
-
-Note that when the device account’s password is changed, you will not be shown the new password. If you need to sign in to the account, or to provide the password again (for example, if you want to change the device account settings on the Surface Hub), then you'll need use Active Directory or the Office 365 admin portal to reset the password.
-
-> [!IMPORTANT]
-> If your organization uses a hybrid topology (some services are hosted on-premises and some are hosted online through Office 365), you must setup the device account in **domain\username** format. Otherwise, password rotation will not work.
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/physically-install-your-surface-hub-device.md b/devices/surface-hub/physically-install-your-surface-hub-device.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6d06a9ac69..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/physically-install-your-surface-hub-device.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Physically install Microsoft Surface Hub
-description: The Microsoft Surface Hub Readiness Guide will help make sure that your site is ready for the installation.
-ms.assetid: C764DBFB-429B-4B29-B4E8-D7F0073BC554
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: Surface Hub, readiness guide, installation location, mounting options
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Physically install Microsoft Surface Hub
-
-
-The [Microsoft Surface Hub Readiness Guide](surface-hub-site-readiness-guide.md) will help make sure that your site is ready for the installation. It includes planning information for both the 55" and 84" devices, as well as info on moving the Surface Hub from receiving to the installation location, mounting options, and a list of what's in the box.
-
-You may also want to check out the Unpacking Guide. It will show you how to unpack the devices efficiently and safely. There are two guides, one for the 55" and one for the 84". A printed version of the Unpacking Guide is attached to the outside front of each unit's shipping crate.
-
-- Download the 55" Unpacking Guide from the [Microsoft Download Center](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=718145).
-- Download the 84" version from the [Microsoft Download Center](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=718146).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/prepare-your-environment-for-surface-hub.md b/devices/surface-hub/prepare-your-environment-for-surface-hub.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a6eb33d8f4..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/prepare-your-environment-for-surface-hub.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,133 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Prepare your environment for Microsoft Surface Hub
-description: This section contains an overview of the steps required to prepare your environment so that you can use all of the features of Microsoft Surface Hub.
-ms.assetid: 336A206C-5893-413E-A270-61BFF3DF7DA9
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: prepare environment, features of Surface Hub, create and test device account, check network availability
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 12/04/2017
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Prepare your environment for Microsoft Surface Hub
-
-
-This section contains an overview of setup dependencies and the setup process. Review the info in this section to help you prepare your environment and gather information needed to set up your Surface Hub.
-
-
-## Review infrastructure dependencies
-Review these dependencies to make sure Surface Hub features will work in your IT infrastructure.
-
-| Dependency | Purpose |
-|-------------|------------------|
-| Active Directory or Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) |
The Surface Hub's uses an Active Directory or Azure AD account (called a **device account**) to access Exchange and Skype for Business services. The Surface Hub must be able to connect to your Active Directory domain controller or to your Azure AD tenant in order to validate the device account’s credentials, as well as to access information like the device account’s display name, alias, Exchange server, and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) address.
You can also domain join or Azure AD join your Surface Hub to allow a group of authorized users to configure settings on the Surface Hub. |
-| Exchange (Exchange 2013 or later, or Exchange Online) and Exchange ActiveSync |
Exchange is used for enabling mail and calendar features, and also lets people who use the device send meeting requests to the Surface Hub, enabling one-touch meeting join.
ActiveSync is used to sync the device account’s calendar and mail to the Surface Hub. If the device cannot use ActiveSync, it will not show meetings on the welcome screen, and joining meetings and emailing whiteboards will not be enabled. |
-| Skype for Business (Lync Server 2013 or later, or Skype for Business Online) | Skype for Business is used for various conferencing features, like video calls, instant messaging, and screen sharing.|
-| Mobile device management (MDM) solution (Microsoft Intune, System Center Configuration Manager, or supported third-party MDM provider) | If you want to apply settings and install apps remotely, and to multiple devices at a time, you must set up a MDM solution and enroll the device to that solution. See [Manage settings with an MDM provider](manage-settings-with-mdm-for-surface-hub.md) for details. |
-| Microsoft Operations Management Suite (OMS) | OMS is used to monitor the health of Surface Hub devices. See [Monitor your Surface Hub](monitor-surface-hub.md) for details. |
-| Network and Internet access | In order to function properly, the Surface Hub should have access to a wired or wireless network. Overall, a wired connection is preferred. 802.1X Authentication is supported for both wired and wireless connections.**802.1X authentication:** In Windows 10, version 1703, 802.1X authentication for wired and wireless connections is enabled by default in Surface Hub. If your organization doesn't use 802.1X authentication, there is no configuration required and Surface Hub will continue to function as normal. If you use 802.1X authentication, you must ensure that the authentication certification is installed on Surface Hub. You can deliver the certificate to Surface Hub using the [ClientCertificateInstall CSP](https://msdn.microsoft.com/windows/hardware/commercialize/customize/mdm/clientcertificateinstall-csp) in MDM, or you can [create a provisioning package](provisioning-packages-for-surface-hub.md) and install it during first run or through the Settings app. After the certificate is applied to Surface Hub, 802.1X authentication will start working automatically.**Note:** For more information on enabling 802.1X wired authentication on Surface Hub, see [Enable 802.1x wired authentication](enable-8021x-wired-authentication.md).**Dynamic IP:** The Surface Hub cannot be configured to use a static IP. It must use DHCP to assign an IP address.**Proxy servers:** If your topology requires a connection to a proxy server to reach Internet services, then you can configure it during first run, or in Settings. Proxy credentials are stored across Surface Hub sessions and only need to be set once. |
-
-Additionally, note that Surface Hub requires the following open ports:
-- HTTPS: 443
-- HTTP: 80
-- NTP: 123
-
-If you are using Surface Hub with Skype for Business, you will need to open additional ports. Please follow the guidance below:
-- If you use Skype for Business Online, see [Office 365 IP URLs and IP address ranges](https://support.office.com/article/Office-365-URLs-and-IP-address-ranges-8548a211-3fe7-47cb-abb1-355ea5aa88a2?ui=en-US&rs=en-US&ad=US).
-- If you use Skype for Business Server, see [Skype for Business Server: Ports and protocols for internal servers](https://docs.microsoft.com/SkypeForBusiness/plan-your-deployment/network-requirements/ports-and-protocols).
-- If you use a hybrid of Skype for Business Online and Skype for Business Server, you need to open all documented ports from [Office 365 IP URLs and IP address ranges](https://support.office.com/article/Office-365-URLs-and-IP-address-ranges-8548a211-3fe7-47cb-abb1-355ea5aa88a2?ui=en-US&rs=en-US&ad=US) and [Skype for Business Server: Ports and protocols for internal servers](https://docs.microsoft.com/SkypeForBusiness/plan-your-deployment/network-requirements/ports-and-protocols?toc=/SkypeForBusiness/toc.json&bc=/SkypeForBusiness/breadcrumb/toc.json).
-
-Microsoft collects diagnostic data to help improve your Surface Hub experience. Add these sites to your allow list:
-- Diagnostic data client endpoint: `https://vortex.data.microsoft.com/`
-- Diagnostic data settings endpoint: `https://settings.data.microsoft.com/`
-
-### Proxy configuration
-
-If your organization restricts computers on your network from connecting to the Internet, there is a set of URLs that need to be available for devices to use Microsoft Store for Business. Some of the Store for Business features use Microsoft Store app and Microsoft Store services. Devices using Store for Business – either to acquire, install, or update apps – will need access to these URLs. If you use a proxy server to block traffic, your configuration needs to allow these URLs:
-
-- login.live.com
-- login.windows.net
-- account.live.com
-- clientconfig.passport.net
-- windowsphone.com
-- *.wns.windows.com
-- *.microsoft.com
-- www.msftncsi.com (prior to Windows 10, version 1607)
-- www.msftconnecttest.com/connecttest.txt (replaces www.msftncsi.com starting with Windows 10, version 1607)
-
-
-## Work with other admins
-
-Surface Hub interacts with a few different products and services. Depending on the size of your organization, there could be multiple people supporting different products in your environment. You'll want to include people who manage Exchange, Active Directory (or Azure Active Directory), mobile device management (MDM), and network resources in your planning and prep for Surface Hub deployments.
-
-
-## Create and verify device account
-
-A device account is an Exchange resource account that Surface Hub uses to display its meeting calendar, join Skype for Business calls, send email, and (optionally) to authenticate to Exchange. See [Create and test a device account](create-and-test-a-device-account-surface-hub.md) for details.
-
-After you've created your device account, to verify that it's setup correctly, run Surface Hub device account validation PowerShell scripts. For more information, see [PowerShell scripts for Surface Hub](appendix-a-powershell-scripts-for-surface-hub.md) later in this guide.
-
-
-
-## Prepare for first-run program
-There are a few more item to consider before you start the [first-run program](first-run-program-surface-hub.md).
-
-### Create provisioning packages (optional)
-You can use provisioning packages to add certificates, customize settings and install apps. See [Create provisioning packages](provisioning-packages-for-certificates-surface-hub.md) for details. You can [install provisioning packages at first-run](first-run-program-surface-hub.md#first-page).
-
-### Set up admin groups
-Every Surface Hub can be configured locally using the Settings app on the device. To prevent unauthorized users from changing settings, the Settings app requires admin credentials to open the app. See [Admin group management](admin-group-management-for-surface-hub.md) for details on how admin groups are set up and managed. You will [set up admins for the device at first run](first-run-program-surface-hub.md#setup-admins).
-
-### Review and complete Surface Hub setup worksheet (optional)
-When you go through the first-run program for your Surface Hub, there's some information that you'll need to supply. The setup worksheet summarizes that info, and provides lists of environment-specific info that you'll need when you go through the first-run program. For more information, see [Setup worksheet](setup-worksheet-surface-hub.md).
-
-
-## In this section
-
-
For Windows 10, settings that use the registry or a content services platform (CSP) can be configured using provisioning packages. You can also add certificates during first run using provisioning.
Every Surface Hub can be configured individually by opening the Settings app on the device. However, to prevent people who are not administrators from changing the settings, the Settings app requires administrator credentials to open the app and change settings.
-
The Settings app requires local administrator credentials to open the app.
-
-
-
-
-## More information
-
-- [Blog post: Surface Hub and the Skype for Business Trusted Domain List](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/y0av/2017/10/25/95/)
-- [Blog post: Surface Hub in a Multi-Domain Environment](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/y0av/2017/11/08/11/)
-- [Blog post: Configuring a proxy for your Surface Hub](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/y0av/2017/12/03/7/)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/provisioning-packages-for-surface-hub.md b/devices/surface-hub/provisioning-packages-for-surface-hub.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 607c66829e..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/provisioning-packages-for-surface-hub.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,322 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Create provisioning packages (Surface Hub)
-description: For Windows 10, settings that use the registry or a configuration service provider (CSP) can be configured using provisioning packages.
-ms.assetid: 8AA25BD4-8A8F-4B95-9268-504A49BA5345
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: add certificate, provisioning package
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 03/16/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Create provisioning packages (Surface Hub)
-
-This topic explains how to create a provisioning package using the Windows Configuration Designer, and apply it to Surface Hub devices. For Surface Hub, you can use provisioning packages to add certificates, install Universal Windows Platform (UWP) apps, and customize policies and settings.
-
-You can apply a provisioning package using a USB stick during first-run setup, or through the **Settings** app.
-
-
-## Advantages
-- Quickly configure devices without using a mobile device management (MDM) provider.
-
-- No network connectivity required.
-
-- Simple to apply.
-
-[Learn more about the benefits and uses of provisioning packages.](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/configure/provisioning-packages)
-
-
-## Requirements
-
-To create and apply a provisioning package to a Surface Hub, you'll need the following:
-
-- Windows Configuration Designer, which can be installed from Microsoft Store or from the Windows 10 Assessment and Deployment Kit (ADK). [Learn how to install Windows Configuration Designer.](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/configure/provisioning-install-icd)
-- A USB stick.
-- If you apply the package using the **Settings** app, you'll need device admin credentials.
-
-You create the provisioning package on a PC running Windows 10, save the package to a USB drive, and then deploy it to your Surface Hub.
-
-
-## Supported items for Surface Hub provisioning packages
-
-Using the **Provision Surface Hub devices** wizard, you can:
-
-- Enroll in Active Directory, Azure Active Directory, or MDM
-- Create an device administrator account
-- Add applications and certificates
-- Configure proxy settings
-- Add a Surface Hub configuration file
-
->[!WARNING]
->You must run Windows Configuration Designer on Windows 10 to configure Azure Active Directory enrollment using the wizard.
-
-Using the advanced provisioning editor, you can add these items to provisioning packages for Surface Hub:
-
-- **Policies** - Surface Hub supports a subset of the policies in the [Policy configuration service provider](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904962.aspx#surfacehubpolicies).
-- **Settings** - You can configure any setting in the [SurfaceHub configuration service provider](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/mt608323.aspx).
-
->[!TIP]
-> Use the wizard to create a package with the common settings, then switch to the advanced editor to add other settings.
->
->
-
-## Use the Surface Hub provisioning wizard
-
-After you [install Windows Configuration Designer](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/configure/provisioning-install-icd), you can create a provisioning package.
-
-### Create the provisioning package
-
-1. Open Windows Configuration Designer:
- - From either the Start screen or Start menu search, type 'Windows Configuration Designer' and click on the Windows Configuration Designer shortcut,
-
- or
-
- - If you installed Windows Configuration Designer from the ADK, navigate to `C:\Program Files (x86)\Windows Kits\10\Assessment and Deployment Kit\Imaging and Configuration Designer\x86` (on an x64 computer) or `C:\Program Files\Windows Kits\10\Assessment and Deployment Kit\Imaging and Configuration Designer\x86\ICD.exe` (on an x86 computer), and then double-click **ICD.exe**.
-
-2. Click **Provision Surface Hub devices**.
-
-3. Name your project and click **Next**.
-
-### Configure settings
-
-
-
To provision the device with a certificate, click Add a certificate. Enter a name for the certificate, and then browse to and select the certificate to be used.
-
Toggle Yes or No for proxy settings. The default configuration for Surface Hub is to automatically detect proxy settings, so you can select No if that is the setting that you want. However, if your infrastructure previously required using a proxy server and has changed to not require a proxy server, you can use a provisioning package to revert your Surface Hub devices to the default settings by selecting Yes and Automatically detect settings. If you toggle Yes, you can select to automatically detect proxy settings, or you can manually configure the settings by entering a URL to a setup script, or a static proxy server address. You can also identify whether to use the proxy server for local addresses, and enter exceptions (addresses that Surface Hub should connect to directly without using the proxy server).
-
You can enroll the device in Active Directory and specify a security group to use the Settings app, enroll in Azure Active Directory to allow global admins to use the Settings app, or create a local administrator account on the device.To enroll the device in Active Directory, enter the credentials for a least-privileged user account to join the device to the domain, and specify the security group to have admin credentials on Surface Hub. If a provisioning package that enrolls a device in Active Directory is going to be applied to a Surface Hub that was reset, the same domain account can only be used if the account listed is a domain administrator or is the same account that set up the Surface Hub initially. Otherwise, a different domain account must be used in the provisioning package.Before you use a Windows Configuration Designer wizard to configure bulk Azure AD enrollment, set up Azure AD join in your organization. The maximum number of devices per user setting in your Azure AD tenant determines how many times the bulk token that you get in the wizard can be used. To enroll the device in Azure AD, select that option and enter a friendly name for the bulk token you will get using the wizard. Set an expiration date for the token (maximum is 30 days from the date you get the token). Click Get bulk token. In the Let's get you signed in window, enter an account that has permissions to join a device to Azure AD, and then the password. Click Accept to give Windows Configuration Designer the necessary permissions.To create a local administrator account, select that option and enter a user name and password. Important: If you create a local account in the provisioning package, you must change the password using the Settings app every 42 days. If the password is not changed during that period, the account might be locked out and unable to sign in.
-
Toggle Yes or No for enrollment in MDM. If you toggle Yes, you must provide a service account and password or certificate thumbprint that is authorized to enroll the device, and also specify the authentication type. If required by your MDM provider, also enter the URLs for the discovery service, enrollment service, and policy service. Learn more about managing Surface Hub with MDM.
-
You can install multiple Universal Windows Platform (UWP) apps in a provisioning package. For help with the settings, see Provision PCs with apps. Important: Although the wizard interface allows you to select a Classic Win32 app, only include UWP apps in a provisioning package that will be applied to Surface Hub. If you include a Classic Win32 app, provisioning will fail.
-
You don't configure any settings in this step. It provides instructions for including a configuration file that contains a list of device accounts. The configuration file must not contain column headers. When you apply the provisioning package to Surface Hub, if a Surface Hub configuration file is included on the USB drive, you can select the account and friendly name for the device from the file. See Sample configuration file for an example.Important: The configuration file can only be applied during the out-of-box setup experience (OOBE) and can only be used with provisioning packages created using the Windows Configuration Designer released with Windows 10, version 1703.
-
You can set a password to protect your provisioning package. You must enter this password when you apply the provisioning package to a device.
-
-
-After you're done, click **Create**. It only takes a few seconds. When the package is built, the location where the package is stored is displayed as a hyperlink at the bottom of the page.
-
-## Sample configuration file
-
-A Surface Hub configuration file contains a list of device accounts that your device can use to connect to Exchange and Skype for Business. When you apply a provisioning package to Surface Hub, you can include a configuration file in the root directory of the USB flash drive, and then select the desired account to apply to that device. The configuration file can only be applied during the out-of-box setup experience (OOBE) and can only be used with provisioning packages created using the Windows Configuration Designer released with Windows 10, version 1703.
-
-Use Microsoft Excel or other CSV editor to create a CSV file named `SurfaceHubConfiguration.csv`. In the file, enter a list of device accounts and friendly names in this format:
-
-```
-,,
-```
->[!IMPORTANT]
->Because the configuration file stores the device account passwords in plaintext, we recommend that you update the passwords after you've applied the provisioning package to your devices. You can use the [DeviceAccount node](https://msdn.microsoft.com/windows/hardware/commercialize/customize/mdm/surfacehub-csp#deviceaccount) in the [Surface Hub configuration service provider (CSP)](https://msdn.microsoft.com/windows/hardware/commercialize/customize/mdm/surfacehub-csp) to update the passwords via MDM.
-
-
-The following is an example of `SurfaceHubConfiguration.csv`.
-
-```
-Rainier@contoso.com,password,Rainier Surface Hub
-Adams@contoso.com,password,Adams Surface Hub
-Baker@contoso.com,password,Baker Surface Hub
-Glacier@constoso.com,password,Glacier Surface Hub
-Stuart@contoso.com,password,Stuart Surface Hub
-Fernow@contoso.com,password,Fernow Surface Hub
-Goode@contoso.com,password,Goode Surface Hub
-Shuksan@contoso.com,password,Shuksan Surface Hub
-Buckner@contoso.com,password,Buckner Surface Hub
-Logan@contoso.com,password,Logan Surface Hub
-Maude@consoto.com,password,Maude Surface hub
-Spickard@contoso.com,password,Spickard Surface Hub
-Redoubt@contoso.com,password,Redoubt Surface Hub
-Dome@contoso.com,password,Dome Surface Hub
-Eldorado@contoso.com,password,Eldorado Surface Hub
-Dragontail@contoso.com,password,Dragontail Surface Hub
-Forbidden@contoso.com,password,Forbidden Surface Hub
-Oval@contoso.com,password,Oval Surface Hub
-StHelens@contoso.com,password,St Helens Surface Hub
-Rushmore@contoso.com,password,Rushmore Surface Hub
-```
-
-## Use advanced provisioning
-
-After you [install Windows Configuration Designer](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/configure/provisioning-install-icd), you can create a provisioning package.
-
-### Create the provisioning package (advanced)
-
-1. Open Windows Configuration Designer:
- - From either the Start screen or Start menu search, type 'Windows Configuration Designer' and click on the Windows Configuration Designer shortcut,
-
- or
-
- - If you installed Windows Configuration Designer from the ADK, navigate to `C:\Program Files (x86)\Windows Kits\10\Assessment and Deployment Kit\Imaging and Configuration Designer\x86` (on an x64 computer) or `C:\Program Files\Windows Kits\10\Assessment and Deployment Kit\Imaging and Configuration Designer\x86\ICD.exe` (on an x86 computer), and then double-click **ICD.exe**.
-
-2. Click **Advanced provisioning**.
-
-3. Name your project and click **Next**.
-
-4. Select **Common to Windows 10 Team edition**, click **Next**, and then click **Finish**.
-
- 
-
-5. In the project, under **Available customizations**, select **Common Team edition settings**.
-
- 
-
-
-### Add a certificate to your package
-You can use provisioning packages to install certificates that will allow the device to authenticate to Microsoft Exchange.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Provisioning packages can only install certificates to the device (local machine) store, and not to the user store. If your organization requires that certificates must be installed to the user store, use Mobile Device Management (MDM) to deploy these certificates. See your MDM solution documentation for details.
-
-1. In the **Available customizations** pane, go to **Runtime settings** > **Certificates** > **ClientCertificates**.
-
-2. Enter a **CertificateName** and then click **Add**.
-
-2. Enter the **CertificatePassword**.
-
-3. For **CertificatePath**, browse and select the certificate.
-
-4. Set **ExportCertificate** to **False**.
-
-5. For **KeyLocation**, select **Software only**.
-
-
-### Add a Universal Windows Platform (UWP) app to your package
-Before adding a UWP app to a provisioning package, you need the app package (either an .appx, or .appxbundle) and any dependency files. If you acquired the app from the Microsoft Store for Business, you will also need the *unencoded* app license. See [Distribute offline apps](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/manage/distribute-offline-apps#download-an-offline-licensed-app) to learn how to download these items from the Microsoft Store for Business.
-
-1. In the **Available customizations** pane, go to **Runtime settings** > **UniversalAppInstall** > **DeviceContextApp**.
-
-2. Enter a **PackageFamilyName** for the app and then click **Add**. For consistency, use the app's package family name. If you acquired the app from the Microsoft Store for Business, you can find the package family name in the app license. Open the license file using a text editor, and use the value between the \...\ tags.
-
-3. For **ApplicationFile**, click **Browse** to find and select the target app (either an \*.appx or \*.appxbundle).
-
-4. For **DependencyAppxFiles**, click **Browse** to find and add any dependencies for the app. For Surface Hub, you will only need the x64 versions of these dependencies.
-
-If you acquired the app from the Microsoft Store for Business, you will also need to add the app license to your provisioning package.
-
-1. Make a copy of the app license, and rename it to use a **.ms-windows-store-license** extension. For example, "example.xml" becomes "example.ms-windows-store-license".
-
-2. In ICD, in the **Available customizations** pane, go to **Runtime settings** > **UniversalAppInstall** > **DeviceContextAppLicense**.
-
-3. Enter a **LicenseProductId** and then click **Add**. For consistency, use the app's license ID from the app license. Open the license file using a text editor. Then, in the \ tag, use the value in the **LicenseID** attribute.
-
-4. Select the new **LicenseProductId** node. For **LicenseInstall**, click **Browse** to find and select the license file that you renamed in Step 1.
-
-
-### Add a policy to your package
-Surface Hub supports a subset of the policies in the [Policy configuration service provider](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn904962.aspx). Some of those policies can be configured with ICD.
-
-1. In the **Available customizations** pane, go to **Runtime settings** > **Policies**.
-
-2. Select one of the available policy areas.
-
-3. Select and set the policy you want to add to your provisioning package.
-
-
-### Add Surface Hub settings to your package
-
-You can add settings from the [SurfaceHub configuration service provider](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/mt608323.aspx) to your provisioning package.
-
-1. In the **Available customizations** pane, go to **Runtime settings** > **WindowsTeamSettings**.
-
-2. Select one of the available setting areas.
-
-3. Select and set the setting you want to add to your provisioning package.
-
-
-## Build your package
-
-1. When you are done configuring the provisioning package, on the **File** menu, click **Save**.
-
-2. Read the warning that project files may contain sensitive information, and click **OK**.
-
- > [!IMPORTANT]
- > When you build a provisioning package, you may include sensitive information in the project files and in the provisioning package (.ppkg) file. Although you have the option to encrypt the .ppkg file, project files are not encrypted. You should store the project files in a secure location and delete the project files when they are no longer needed.
-
-3. On the **Export** menu, click **Provisioning package**.
-
-4. Change **Owner** to **IT Admin**, which will set the precedence of this provisioning package higher than provisioning packages applied to this device from other sources.
-
-5. Set a value for **Package Version**, and then select **Next.**
-
- > [!TIP]
- > You can make changes to existing packages and change the version number to update previously applied packages.
-
-6. Optional: You can choose to encrypt the package and enable package signing.
-
- - **Enable package encryption** - If you select this option, an auto-generated password will be shown on the screen.
-
- - **Enable package signing** - If you select this option, you must select a valid certificate to use for signing the package. You can specify the certificate by clicking **Browse...** and choosing the certificate you want to use to sign the package.
-
- > [!IMPORTANT]
- > We recommend that you include a trusted provisioning certificate in your provisioning package. When the package is applied to a device, the certificate is added to the system store and any package signed with that certificate thereafter can be applied silently.
-
-7. Click **Next** to specify the output location where you want the provisioning package to go once it's built. By default, Windows ICD uses the project folder as the output location.
-Optionally, you can click **Browse** to change the default output location.
-
-8. Click **Next**.
-
-9. Click **Build** to start building the package. The project information is displayed in the build page and the progress bar indicates the build status.
-If you need to cancel the build, click **Cancel**. This cancels the current build process, closes the wizard, and takes you back to the **Customizations Page**.
-
-10. If your build fails, an error message will show up that includes a link to the project folder. You can scan the logs to determine what caused the error. Once you fix the issue, try building the package again.
-If your build is successful, the name of the provisioning package, output directory, and project directory will be shown.
-
- - If you choose, you can build the provisioning package again and pick a different path for the output package. To do this, click **Back** to change the output package name and path, and then click **Next** to start another build.
-
- - If you are done, click **Finish** to close the wizard and go back to the **Customizations Page**.
-
-11. Select the **output location** link to go to the location of the package. Copy the .ppkg to an empty USB flash drive.
-
-
-## Apply a provisioning package to Surface Hub
-
-There are two options for deploying provisioning packages to a Surface Hub. [During the first run wizard](#apply-a-provisioning-package-during-first-run), you can apply a provisioning package that installs certificates, or after the first-run program is complete, you can apply a provisioning package that configures settings, apps, and certificates by using [Settings](#apply-a-package-using-settings).
-
-
-### Apply a provisioning package during first run
-
-> [!IMPORTANT]
-> During the first-run program, you can only use provisioning packages to install certificates. Use the **Settings** app to install apps and apply other settings.
-
-1. When you turn on the Surface Hub for the first time, the first-run program will display the [**Hi there page**](first-run-program-surface-hub.md#first-page). Make sure that the settings are properly configured before proceeding.
-
-2. Insert the USB flash drive containing the .ppkg file into the Surface Hub. If the package is in the root directory of the drive, the first-run program will recognize it and ask if you want to set up the device. Select **Set up**.
-
- 
-
-3. The next screen asks you to select a provisioning source. Select **Removable Media** and tap **Next**.
-
- 
-
-4. Select the provisioning package (\*.ppkg) that you want to apply, and tap **Next**. Note that you can only install one package during first run.
-
- 
-
-5. The first-run program will show you a summary of the changes that the provisioning package will apply. Select **Yes, add it**.
-
- 
-
-6. If a configuration file is included in the root directory of the USB flash drive, you will see **Select a configuration**. The first device account in the configuration file will be shown with a summary of the account information that will be applied to the Surface Hub.
-
- 
-
-7. In **Select a configuration**, select the device name to apply, and then click **Next**.
-
- 
-
-The settings from the provisioning package will be applied to the device and OOBE will be complete. After the device restarts, you can remove the USB flash drive.
-
-### Apply a package using Settings
-
-1. Insert the USB flash drive containing the .ppkg file into the Surface Hub.
-
-2. From the Surface Hub, start **Settings** and enter the admin credentials when prompted.
-
-3. Navigate to **Surface Hub** > **Device management**. Under **Provisioning packages**, select **Add or remove a provisioning package**.
-
-4. Select **Add a package**.
-
-5. Choose your provisioning package and select **Add**. You may have to re-enter the admin credentials if prompted.
-
-6. You'll see a summary of the changes that the provisioning package will apply. Select **Yes, add it**.
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/remote-surface-hub-management.md b/devices/surface-hub/remote-surface-hub-management.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7a9acbe0fd..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/remote-surface-hub-management.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Remote Surface Hub management
-description: This section lists topics for managing Surface Hub.
-keywords: remote management, MDM, install apps, monitor Surface Hub, Operations Management Suite, OMS
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Remote Surface Hub management
-
-## In this section
-
-|Topic | Description|
-| ------ | --------------- |
-| [Manage settings with an MDM provider]( https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface-hub/manage-settings-with-mdm-for-surface-hub) | Surface Hub provides an enterprise management solution to help IT administrators manage policies and business applications on these devices using a mobile device management (MDM) solution.|
-| [Monitor your Surface Hub]( https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface-hub/monitor-surface-hub) | Monitoring for Surface Hub devices is enabled through Microsoft Operations Management Suite.|
-| [Windows updates](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface-hub/manage-windows-updates-for-surface-hub) | You can manage Windows updates on your Surface Hub by setting the maintenance window, deferring updates, or using WSUS.|
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/save-bitlocker-key-surface-hub.md b/devices/surface-hub/save-bitlocker-key-surface-hub.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6bbfd1532a..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/save-bitlocker-key-surface-hub.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Save your BitLocker key (Surface Hub)
-description: Every Microsoft Surface Hub is automatically set up with BitLocker drive encryption software. Microsoft strongly recommends that you make sure you back up your BitLocker recovery keys.
-ms.assetid: E11E4AB6-B13E-4ACA-BCE1-4EDC9987E4F2
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: Surface Hub, BitLocker, Bitlocker recovery keys
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 07/08/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Save your BitLocker key (Surface Hub)
-
-
-Every Microsoft Surface Hub is automatically set up with BitLocker drive encryption software. Microsoft strongly recommends that you make sure you back up your BitLocker recovery keys.
-
-There are several ways to manage your BitLocker key on the Surface Hub.
-
-1. If you’ve joined the Surface Hub to a domain, the device will back up the key on the domain and store it under the computer object.
-
- If you can’t find the BitLocker key after joining the device to a domain, it’s likely that your Active Directory schema doesn’t support BitLocker key backup. If you don’t want to change the schema, you can save the BitLocker key by going to Settings and following the procedure for using a local admin account, which is detailed later in this list.
-
-2. If you’ve joined the Surface Hub to Azure Active Directory (Azure AD), the BitLocker key will be stored under the account that was used to join the device.
-
-3. If you’re using a local admin account to manage the device, you can save the BitLocker key by going to the **Settings** app and navigating to **Update & security** > **Recovery**. Insert a USB drive and select the option to save the BitLocker key. The key will be saved to a text file on the USB drive.
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-[Manage Microsoft Surface Hub](manage-surface-hub.md)
-
-[Microsoft Surface Hub administrator's guide](surface-hub-administrators-guide.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/set-up-your-surface-hub.md b/devices/surface-hub/set-up-your-surface-hub.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 96f42c3df1..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/set-up-your-surface-hub.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Set up Microsoft Surface Hub
-description: Set up instructions for Surface Hub include a setup worksheet, and a walkthrough of the first-run program.
-ms.assetid: 4D1722BC-704D-4471-BBBE-D0500B006221
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: set up instructions, Surface Hub, setup worksheet, first-run program
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Set up Microsoft Surface Hub
-
-
-Set up instructions for Surface Hub include a setup worksheet, and a walkthrough of the first-run program.
-
-Before you turn on your Microsoft Surface Hub for the first time, make sure you've completed the checklist at the end of the [Prepare your environment for Surface Hub](prepare-your-environment-for-surface-hub.md) section, and that you have the information listed in the [Setup worksheet](setup-worksheet-surface-hub.md). When you do power it on, the device will walk you through a series of setup screens. If you haven't properly set up your environment, or don't have the required information, you'll have to do extra work afterward making sure the settings are correct.
-
-## In this section
-
-
-
When you've finished pre-setup and are ready to start first-time setup for your Surface Hub, make sure you have all the information listed in this section.
The term "first run" refers to the series of steps you'll go through the first time you power up your Surface Hub, and means the same thing as "out-of-box experience" (OOBE). This section will walk you through the process.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/setup-worksheet-surface-hub.md b/devices/surface-hub/setup-worksheet-surface-hub.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6043d88f1d..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/setup-worksheet-surface-hub.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,252 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Setup worksheet (Surface Hub)
-description: When you've finished pre-setup and are ready to start first-time setup for your Microsoft Surface Hub, make sure you have all the information listed in this section.
-ms.assetid: AC6F925B-BADE-48F5-8D53-8B6FFF6EE3EB
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: Setup worksheet, pre-setup, first-time setup
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 06/20/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Setup worksheet (Surface Hub)
-
-
-When you've finished pre-setup and are ready to start first-time setup for your Microsoft Surface Hub, make sure you have all the information listed in this section.
-
-You should fill out one list for each Surface Hub you need to configure, although some information can be used on all Surface Hubs, like the proxy information or domain credentials. Some of this information may not be needed, depending on how you've decided to configure your device, or depending on how the environment is configured for your organization's infrastructure.
-
-
-
-
Property
-
What this is used for
-
Example
-
Actual value
-
-
-
-
Proxy information
-
-
-
If your network uses a proxy for network and/or Internet access, you must provide a script or server/port information.
-
-
-
Proxy script: http://contoso/proxy.pa
-- OR -
-Server and port info: 10.10.10.100, port 80
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Wireless network credentials (username and password)
-
-
-
If you decide to connect your device to Wi-Fi, and your wireless network requires user credentials.
-
-
-
admin1@contoso.com, #MyPassw0rd
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Device account UPN or Domain\username and device account password
-
-
-
This is the User Principal Name (UPN) or the domain\username, and the password of the device account. Mail, calendar, and Skype for Business depend on a compatible device account.
-
-
-
UPN: ConfRoom15@contoso.com, #Passw0rd1
-- OR -
-Domain and username: CONTOSO\ConfRoom15, #Passw0rd1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Device account Microsoft Exchange server
-
-
-
This is the device account's Exchange server.
-Mail, calendar, and Skype for Business depend on a compatible device account.
-For mail and calendar to work, the device account must have a valid Exchange server. The device will try to find this automatically.
This is the device account's Skype for Business SIP address.
-Mail, calendar, and Skype for Business depend on a compatible device account.
-For Skype for Business to work, the device account must have a valid SIP address. The device will try to find this automatically.
-
-
-
sip: ConfRoom15@contoso.com
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Friendly name
-
-
-
The friendly name of the device is the broadcast name that people will see when they try to wirelessly connect to the Surface Hub. This name will be displayed prominently on the Surface Hub's screen.
-We suggest that the friendly name you choose is recognizable and unique so that people can distinguish one Surface Hub from another when trying to connect.
-
-
-
Conference Room 15
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Device name
-
-
-
The device name is the name that will be used for domain join, and is the identity you will see in your MDM provider if the device is enrolled into MDM.
-The device name you choose must not be the same name as any other device on the user’s Active Directory domain (if you decide to domain join the device). The device cannot join the domain if its name is not unique.
-
-
-
-
confroom15
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
IF YOU'RE JOINING AZURE AD
-
-
-
-
-
Azure AD tenant user credentials (username and password)
-
-
-
If you decide to have people in your Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) organization become admins on the device, then you'll need to join Azure AD.
-To join Azure AD, you will need valid user credentials.
-
-
-
admin1@contoso.com, #MyPassw0rd
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
IF YOU'RE JOINING A DOMAIN
-
-
-
-
-
Domain to join
-
-
-
This is the domain you will need to join so that a security group of your choice can be admins for the device.
-You may need the fully qualified domain name (FQDN).
-
-
-
contoso (short name) OR contoso.corp.com (FQDN)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Domain account credentials (username and password)
-
-
-
A domain can't be joined unless you provide sufficient account credentials to join the domain. Once you provide a domain to join and credentials to join the domain, then a security group of your choice can change settings on the device.
-
-
-
admin1, #MyPassw0rd
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Admin security group alias
-
-
-
This is a security group in your Active Directory (AD); any members of this security group can change settings on the device.
-
-
-
SurfaceHubAdmins
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
IF YOU'RE USING A LOCAL ADMIN
-
-
-
-
-
Local admin account credentials (username and password)
-
-
-
If you decide not to join an AD domain or Azure AD, you can create a local admin account on the device.
-
-
-
admin1, #MyPassw0rd
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
IF YOU NEED TO INSTALL CERTIFICATES OR APPS
-
-
-
-
-
USB drive
-
-
-
If you know before first run that you want to install certificates or universal apps, follow the steps in Create provisioning packages. Your provisioning packages will be created on a USB drive.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/skype-hybrid-voice.md b/devices/surface-hub/skype-hybrid-voice.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c805fb9005..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/skype-hybrid-voice.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,108 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Online or hybrid deployment using Skype Hybrid Voice environment (Surface Hub)
-description: This topic explains how to enable Skype for Business Cloud PBX with on premises PSTN connectivity via Cloud Connector Edition or Skype for Business 2015 pool.
-keywords: hybrid deployment, Skype Hybrid Voice
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Online or hybrid deployment using Skype Hybrid Voice environment (Surface Hub)
-
-This topic explains how to enable Skype for Business Cloud PBX with on-premises Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) connectivity via Cloud Connector Edition or Skype for Business 2015 pool. In this option. your Skype for Business home pools and Exchange servers are in the cloud, and are connected by PSTN via an on-premises pool running Skype for Business 2015 or Cloud Connector edition. [Learn more about different Cloud PBX options](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/mt612869.aspx).
-
-If you deployed Skype for Business Cloud PBX with one of the hybrid voice options, follow the steps below to enable the room account for Surface Hub. It is important to create a regular user account first, assign all hybrid voice options and phone numbers, and then convert the account to a room account. If you do not follow this order, you will not be able to assign a hybrid phone number.
-
->[!WARNING]
->If you create an account before configuration of Hybrid voice (you run Enable-CSMeetingRoom command), you will not be able to configure required hybrid voice parameters. In order to configure hybrid voice parameters for a previously configured account or to reconfigure a phone number, delete the E5 or E3 + Cloud PBX add-on license, and then follow the steps below, starting at step 3.
-
-1. Create a new user account for Surface Hub. This example uses surfacehub2@adatum.com. The account can be created in local Active Directory and synchronized to the cloud, or created directly in the cloud.
-
- 
-
-2. Select **Password Never Expires**. This is important for a Surface Hub device.
-
- 
-
-3. In Office 365, add **E5** license or **E3 and Cloud PBX** add-on to the user account created for the room. This is required for Hybrid Voice to work.
-
- 
-
-4. Wait approximately 15 minutes until the user account for the room appears in Skype for Business Online.
-
-5. After the user account for room is created in Skype for Business Online, enable it for Hybrid Voice in Skype for Business Remote PowerShell by running the following cmdlet:
-
- ```
- Set-csuser surfacehub2@adatum.com EnterpriseVoiceEnabled $true -HostedVoiceMail $true -onpremlineuri tel:+15005000102
- ```
-
-6. Validate Hybrid Voice call flow by placing test calls from the Surface Hub.
-
-7. Start a remote PowerShell session on a PC and connect to Exchange by running the following cmdlets.
-
- ```
- Set-ExecutionPolicy Unrestricted
- $cred=Get-Credential -Message "Please use your Office 365 admin credentials"
- $sess= New-PSSession -ConfigurationName Microsoft.Exchange -ConnectionUri https://outlook.office365.com/ps1-liveid/ -Credential $cred -Authentication Basic -AllowRedirection
- Import-PSSession $sess
- ```
-
-8. After establishing a session, modify the user account for the room to enable it as a **RoomMailboxAccount** by running the following cmdlets. This allows the account to authenticate with Surface Hub.
-
- ```
- Set-Mailbox surfacehub2@adatum.com -Type Room
- Set-Mailbox surfacehub2@adatum.com -EnableRoomMailboxAccount $true -RoomMailboxPassword (ConvertTo-SecureString -String -AsPlainText -Force)
- ```
-
-9. After setting up the mailbox, you will need to either create a new Exchange ActiveSync policy, or use a compatible existing policy.
-
- Surface Hubs are only compatible with device accounts that have an ActiveSync policy where the **PasswordEnabled** property is set to **False**. If this isn’t set properly, then Exchange services on the Surface Hub (mail, calendar, and joining meetings), will not be enabled.
-
- If you haven’t created a compatible policy yet, use the following cmdlet (this one creates a policy called "Surface Hubs"). After it’s created, you can apply the same policy to other device accounts.
-
- ```
- $easPolicy = New-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy -Name "SurfaceHubs" -PasswordEnabled $false
- ```
-
- After you have a compatible policy, then you will need to apply the policy to the device account. However, policies can only be applied to user accounts and not resource mailboxes. Run the following cmdlets to convert the mailbox into a user type, apply the policy, and then convert it back into a mailbox (you may need to re-enable the account and set the password again).
-
- ```
- Set-Mailbox surfacehub2@adatum.com -Type Regular
- Set-CASMailbox surfacehub2@adatum.com -ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy $easPolicy.id
- Set-Mailbox surfacehub2@adatum.com -Type Room
- $credNewAccount = Get-Credential -Message "Please provide the Surface Hub username and password"
- Set-Mailbox surfacehub2@adatum.com -RoomMailboxPassword $credNewAccount.Password -EnableRoomMailboxAccount $true
- ```
-
-10. Various Exchange properties must be set on the device account to improve the meeting experience. You can see which properties can be set in [Exchange properties](exchange-properties-for-surface-hub-device-accounts.md). The following cmdlets provide an example of setting Exchange properties.
-
- ```
- Set-CalendarProcessing surfacehub2@adatum.com -AutomateProcessing AutoAccept -AddOrganizerToSubject $false –AllowConflicts $false –DeleteComments $false -DeleteSubject $false -RemovePrivateProperty $false
- Set-CalendarProcessing surfacehub2@adatum.com -AddAdditionalResponse $true -AdditionalResponse "This is a Surface Hub room!"
- ```
-
-11. Enable the mailbox as a meeting device in Skype for Business Online. Run the following cmdlet which enables the account as a meeting device.
-
- ```
- Get-CsTenant | select registrarpool
- Enable-CsMeetingRoom surfacehub2@adatum.com -RegistrarPool 'sippoolbl20a04.infra.lync.com' -SipAddressType UserPrincipalName
- ```
-
- As a result of running this cmdlet, users will be asked if they are in a meeting room, as shown in the following image. **Yes** will mute the microphone and speaker.
-
- 
-
-
-
-At this moment the room account is fully configured, including Hybrid Voice. If you use Skype on-premises, you can configure additional attributes, like description, location, etc., on-premises. If you create a room in Skype Online, these parameters can be set online.
-
-In the following image, you can see how the device appears to users.
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/support-solutions-surface-hub.md b/devices/surface-hub/support-solutions-surface-hub.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b683f85daf..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/support-solutions-surface-hub.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,52 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Top support solutions for Microsoft Surface Hub
-description: Find top solutions for common issues using Surface Hub.
-ms.assetid: CF58F74D-8077-48C3-981E-FCFDCA34B34A
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: Troubleshoot common problems, setup issues
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 10/24/2017
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Top support solutions for Microsoft Surface Hub
-
-Microsoft regularly releases both updates and solutions for Surface Hub. To ensure your devices can receive future updates, including security updates, it's important to keep your Surface Hub devices updated. For a complete listing of the update history, see [Surface Hub update history](https://www.microsoft.com/surface/support/surface-hub/surface-hub-update-history) and [Known issues and additional information about Microsoft Surface Hub](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4025643).
-
->[!TIP]
->Looking for [Surface Hub warranty information](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4040687/surface-surface-documents)?
-
-These are the top Microsoft Support solutions for common issues experienced when using Surface Hub.
-
-## Setup and install issues
-
-- [Setup troubleshooting](troubleshoot-surface-hub.md#setup-troubleshooting)
-- [Exchange ActiveSync errors](troubleshoot-surface-hub.md#exchange-activesync-errors)
-
-## Miracast issues
-
-- [Troubleshoot Miracast on Surface Hub](miracast-troubleshooting.md)
-
-## Download updates issues
-
-- [Surface Hub can't download updates from Windows Update](https://support.microsoft.com/help/3191418/surface-hub-can-t-download-updates-from-windows-update)
-
-## Connect app issues
-
-- [The Connect app in Surface Hub exits unexpectedly](https://support.microsoft.com/help/3157417/the-connect-app-in-surface-hub-exits-unexpectedly)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-Hub-installs-updates-and-restarts-outside-maintenance-hours.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-Hub-installs-updates-and-restarts-outside-maintenance-hours.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 98ad30890e..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-Hub-installs-updates-and-restarts-outside-maintenance-hours.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Surface Hub may install updates and restart outside maintenance hours
-description: troubleshooting information for Surface Hub regarding automatic updates
-ms.assetid: 6C09A9F8-F9CF-4491-BBFB-67A1A1DED0AA
-keywords: surface hub, maintenance window, update
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: Teresa-MOTIV
-ms.author: v-tea
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Surface Hub may install updates and restart outside maintenance hours
-
-Under specific circumstances, Surface Hub installs updates during business hours instead of during the regular maintenance window. The device then restarts if it is necessary. You cannot use the device until the process is completed.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> This isn't expected behavior for missing a maintenance window. It occurs only if the device is out-of-date for a long time.
-
-## Cause
-To ensure that Surface Hub remains available for use during business hours, the Hub is configured to perform administrative functions during a maintenance window that is defined in Settings (see "References," below). During this maintenance period, the Hub automatically installs any available updates through Windows Update or Windows Server Update Service (WSUS). Once updates are complete, the Hub may restart.
-
-Updates can be installed during the maintenance window only if the Surface Hub is turned on but not in use or reserved. For example, if the Surface Hub is scheduled for a meeting that lasts 24 hours, any updates that are scheduled to be installed will be deferred until the Hub is available during the next maintenance window. If the Hub continues to be busy and misses multiple maintenance windows, the Hub will eventually begin to install and download updates. This can occur during or outside the maintenance window. Once the download and installation has begun, the device may restart.
-
-## To avoid this issue
-
-It's important that you set aside maintenance time for Surface Hub to perform administrative functions. Reserving the Surface Hub for 24 hour intervals or using the device during the maintenance window delays installing updates. We recommend that you not use or reserve the Hub during scheduled maintenance period. A two-hour window should be reserved for updating.
-
-One option that you can use to control the availability of updates is Windows Server Update Service (WSUS). WSUS provides control over what updates are installed and when.
-
-## References
-
-[Update the Surface Hub](first-run-program-surface-hub.md#update-the-surface-hub)
-
-[Maintenance window](manage-windows-updates-for-surface-hub.md#maintenance-window)
-
-[Deploy Windows 10 updates using Windows Server Update Services (WSUS)](/windows/deployment/update/waas-manage-updates-wsus)
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-account.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-account.md
deleted file mode 100644
index fb93b0e7d9..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-account.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,96 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "Create Surface Hub 2S device account"
-description: "This page describes the procedure for creating the Surface Hub 2S device account."
-keywords: separate values with commas
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 06/20/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-
-# Create Surface Hub 2S device account
-
-Creating a Surface Hub device account (also known as a Room mailbox) allows Surface Hub 2S to receive, approve, or decline meeting requests and join meetings using Microsoft Teams or Skype for Business. Configure the device account during OOBE setup. If needed you can change it later (without going through OOBE setup).
-
-Unlike standard Room mailboxes that remain disabled by default, you need to enable the Surface Hub 2S device account to sign on to Microsoft Teams and Skype for Business. Surface Hub 2S relies on Exchange ActiveSync, which requires an ActiveSync mailbox policy on the device account. Apply the default ActiveSync mailbox policy that comes with Exchange Online.
-
-Create the account using the Microsoft 365 admin center or by using PowerShell. You can use Exchange Online PowerShell to configure specific features including:
-
-- Calendar processing for every Surface Hub device account.
-- Custom auto replies to scheduling requests.
-- If the default ActiveSync mailbox policy has already been modified by someone else or another process, you will likely have to create and assign a new ActiveSync mailbox policy
-
-## Create account using Microsoft 365 admin center
-
-1. In the Microsoft 365 admin center, go to **Resources** and choose **Rooms & Equipment** and then select **+ Room**.
-
-2. Provide a name and email address for the device account. Leave remaining settings unchanged in the default state.
-
-
-
-
-
-3. Set the password for the device account. To set the password, choose **Users** and then select **Active Users**. Now search for the newly created user to set the password. Ensure that you **do not** select the option **Make this user change their password when they first sign in.**
-
-
-
-4. Assign the room with an Office 365 license. It’s recommended to assign the Office 365 **Meeting Room** license, a new option that automatically enables the account for Skype for Business Online and Microsoft Teams.
-
-
-
-### Finalize setup via PowerShell
-
-- **Skype for Business:** For Skype for Business only (on-premises or online), you can enable the Skype for Business object by running **Enable-CsMeetingRoom** to enable features such as Meeting room prompt for audio and Lobby hold.
-
-- **Microsoft Teams and Skype for Business Calendar:** Set [**Calendar Auto processing**](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-account?source=docs#set-calendar-auto-processing) for this account.
-
-## Create account using PowerShell
-Instead of using the Microsoft Admin Center portal, you can create the account using PowerShell.
-
-### Connect to Exchange Online PowerShell
-
-```powershell
-$365Session = New-PSSession -ConfigurationName Microsoft.Exchange -ConnectionUri https://ps.outlook.com/powershell -Credential (Get-Credential) -Authentication Basic –AllowRedirection
-$ImportResults = Import-PSSession $365Session
-```
-
-### Create a new Room Mailbox
-
-```powershell
-New-Mailbox -MicrosoftOnlineServicesID account@YourDomain.com -Alias SurfaceHub2S -Name SurfaceHub2S -Room -EnableRoomMailboxAccount $true -RoomMailboxPassword (ConvertTo-SecureString -String "" -AsPlainText -Force)
-```
-
-### Set Calendar Auto processing
-
-```powershell
-Set-CalendarProcessing -Identity "account@YourDomain.com" -AutomateProcessing AutoAccept -AddOrganizerToSubject $false –AllowConflicts $false –DeleteComments $false -DeleteSubject $false -RemovePrivateProperty $false -AddAdditionalResponse $true -AdditionalResponse "This room is equipped with a Surface Hub"
-```
-
-### Assign a license
-
-```powershell
-Connect-MsolService
-Set-Msoluser -UserPrincipalName account@YourDomain.com -UsageLocation IE
-Set-MsolUserLicense -UserPrincipalName "account@YourDomain.com" -AddLicenses "contoso:MEETING_ROOM"
-```
-
-## Connect to Skype for Business Online using PowerShell
-
-### Install prerequisites
-
-- [Visual C++ 2017 Redistributable](https://aka.ms/vs/15/release/vc_redist.x64.exe)
-- [Skype for Business Online PowerShell Module](https://www.microsoft.com/download/confirmation.aspx?id=39366)
-
-```powershell
-Import-Module LyncOnlineConnector
-$SfBSession = New-CsOnlineSession -Credential (Get-Credential)
-Import-PSSession $SfBSession -AllowClobber
-
-# Enable the Skype for Business meeting room
-Enable-CsMeetingRoom -Identity account@YourDomain.com -RegistrarPool(Get-CsTenant).Registrarpool -SipAddressType EmailAddress
-```
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-adoption-kit.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-adoption-kit.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 2cc29c519b..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-adoption-kit.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "Surface Hub 2S Adoption and training guides"
-description: "Microsoft has developed downloadable materials that you can make available for your users to aid in adoption of Surface Hub 2S."
-keywords: separate values with commas
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 11/04/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-
-# Surface Hub 2S adoption and training guides
-
-Whether you're a small or large business, a Surface Hub adoption plan is critical in generating the right use cases and helping your users become comfortable with the device. Check out these downloadable guides designed to help you deliver training across your organization.
-
-## On-demand training
-
-- [Surface Hub 2S adoption and training videos](surface-hub-2s-adoption-videos.md)
-
-## Adoption toolkit
-
-- [Surface Hub adoption toolkit](downloads/SurfaceHubAdoptionToolKit.pdf)
-
-## Training guides
-
-- [Training guide – end user](downloads/TrainingGuide-SurfaceHub2S-EndUser.pdf)
-- [Training guide – power user](downloads/TrainingGuide-SurfaceHub2S-PowerUser.pdf)
-- [Training guide – help desk](downloads/TrainingGuide-SurfaceHub2S-HelpDesk.pdf)
-- [Training guide – Microsoft Teams desktop](downloads/Guide-SurfaceHub2S-Teams.pptx)
-
-[Download all training guides](https://download.microsoft.com/download/2/2/3/2234F70E-E65A-4790-93DF-F4C373A75B8E/SurfaceHub2S-TrainerGuides-July2019.zip)
-
-## End user guides
-
-- [Guide to Navigation on Surface Hub](downloads/Guide-SurfaceHub2S-Navigation.pptx)
-- [Guide to Office 365 on Surface Hub](downloads/Guide-SurfaceHub2S-Office365.pptx)
-- [Guide to Microsoft Whiteboard on Surface Hub](downloads/Guide-SurfaceHub2S-Whiteboard.pptx)
-- [Guide to Microsoft Teams on Surface Hub](downloads/Guide-SurfaceHub2S-Teams.pptx)
-
-[Download all end user guides](https://download.microsoft.com/download/E/7/F/E7FC6611-BB55-43E1-AF36-7BD5CE6E0FE0/SurfaceHub2S-EndUserGuides-July2019.zip)
-
-## Quick reference cards
-
-- [Connect your PC](downloads/QRCConnectYourPC.pdf)
-- [Join a Teams Meeting](downloads/QRCJoinTeamsMeeting.pdf)
-- [Manage a Teams meeting](downloads/QRCManageTeamsMeeting.pdf)
-- [Navigation basics](downloads/QRCNavigationBasics.pdf)
-- [Schedule a Teams meeting](downloads/QRCScheduleTeamsMeeting.pdf)
-- [Start a new Teams meeting](downloads/QRCStartNewTeamsMeeting.pdf)
-- [Share or send a file](downloads/QRCShareSendFile.pdf)
-- [Sign in to view meetings and files](downloads/QRCSignInToViewMeetingsFiles.pdf)
-- [Whiteboard advanced](downloads/QRCWhiteboardAdvanced.pdf)
-- [Whiteboard tools](downloads/QRCWhiteboardTools.pdf)
-
-[Download all quick reference cards](https://download.microsoft.com/download/E/7/F/E7FC6611-BB55-43E1-AF36-7BD5CE6E0FE0/SurfaceHub2S-EndUserGuides-July2019.zip)
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-adoption-videos.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-adoption-videos.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5e0419624f..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-adoption-videos.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,137 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "Surface Hub 2S on-demand adoption and training videos"
-description: "This page contains on-demand training for Surface Hub 2S."
-keywords: separate values with commas
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 11/04/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-
-# Surface Hub 2S on-demand adoption and training videos
-
-This page contains comprehensive training for Surface Hub 2S, available on demand.
-
-## Chapter 1 - Training overview
-
-> ![VIDEO ]
-
-- Welcome and introduction
-- Training overview and agenda
-- Software and technology reference
-- Surface Hub messaging
-- Industries and user roles
-- Overview of training services
-- Training best practices
-
-## Chapter 2 - Getting started with Surface Hub
-
-> ![VIDEO ]
-
-- What is Surface Hub?
-- Technical overview
-- Steelcase Roam and the mobility story
-- Surface Hub services
-- Getting started with Surface Hub
-- Gathering expectations
-
-## Chapter 3 - Navigating Surface Hub
-
-> ![VIDEO ]
-
-- Welcome screen
-- Start menu
-- Full screen
-- Clip to Whiteboard
-- Task bar menu
-- Teams/Skype
-- End Session
-
-## Chapter 4 - Whiteboarding and collaboration
-
-> ![VIDEO ]
-
-- Whiteboard introduction
-- Starting the Whiteboard
-- Whiteboard tools
-- Inserting pictures
-- Changing the background
-- Sharing the whiteboard
-- Export the Whiteboard
-
-## Chapter 5 - Exploring Surface Hub apps
-
-> ![VIDEO ]
-
-- Surface Hub apps introduction
-- PowerPoint overview
-- Microsoft Word
-- Microsoft Excel
-- Microsoft Edge
-
-## Chapter 6 - Advanced apps and Office 365
-
-> ![VIDEO ]
-
-- Advanced apps introduction
-- Microsoft Maps
-- Photos
-- Power BI
-- Sign in to Office 365
-- OneDrive
-- CoAuthor documents
-
-## Chapter 7 - Connecting devices
-
-> ![VIDEO ]
-
-- Connect introduction
-- Miracast overview
-- Touch and Pen Input
-- Wired connect overview
-- Line of Business app workflows
-- Troubleshooting Miracast and wired connect
-
-## Chapter 8 - Skype for Business meetings
-
-> ![VIDEO ]
-
-- Introduction to Skype for Business
--Scheduling Skype for Business meetings
-- Start a meeting
-- Start an ad hoc meeting
-- Join a meeting on your calendar
-- Managing a Skype for Business meeting
-- Present content
-
-## Chapter 9 - Microsoft Teams meetings
-
-> ![VIDEO ]
-
-- Introduction to Microsoft Teams
-- Scheduling Microsoft Teams meetings
-- Start a meeting
-- Start an ad hoc meeting
-- Join a meeting on your calendar
-- Managing a Microsoft Teams meeting
-- Present content
-- Conclusion
-
-## Chapter 10 - Basic troubleshooting
-
-> ![VIDEO ]
-
-- Introduction to Surface Hub troubleshooting
-- Application troubleshooting
-- End Session
-- Restart the device
-- Power cycle the device
-- Factory reset
-- Settings
-- Manage Surface Hub
-- Conclusion
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-change-history.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-change-history.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f629bd6bd6..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-change-history.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "Change history for Surface Hub 2S"
-description: "This page shows change history for Surface Hub 2S."
-keywords: separate values with commas
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-audience: Admin
-ms.manager: laurawi
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 06/20/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-
-# Change history for Surface Hub 2S
-
-This topic summarizes new and updated content in the Surface Hub 2S documentation library.
-
-## August 2019
-
-Changes | Description
-|:--- |:---
-|Connect devices to Surface Hub 2S| Updated with guidance for connecting to a second display.
-
-## July 2019
-
-Changes | Description
-|:--- |:--- |
-| Reset and recovery for Surface Hub 2S | Added link to Surface recovery website that enables customers to download a recovery image for Surface Hub 2S |
-| Surface Hub 2S tech specs | Updated power consumption data |
-| Surface Hub 2S Adoption Kit | New |
-
-## June 2019
-
-Changes | Description
-|:--- |:--- |
-| Published new guidance for Surface Hub 2S | New |
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-connect.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-connect.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a32df68734..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-connect.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,134 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "Connect devices to Surface Hub 2S"
-description: "This page explains how to connect external devices to Surface Hub 2S."
-keywords: separate values with commas
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 11/13/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-
-# Connect devices to Surface Hub 2S
-Surface Hub 2S enables you to connect external devices, mirror the display on Surface Hub 2S to another device, and connect multiple third-party peripherals including video conference cameras, conference phones, and room system devices.
-
-You can display content from your devices to Surface Hub 2S. If the source device is Windows-based, that device can also provide TouchBack and InkBack, which takes video and audio from the connected device and presents them on Surface Hub 2S. If Surface Hub 2S encounters a High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP) signal, such as a Blu-ray DVD player, the source is displayed as a black image.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Surface Hub 2S uses the video input selected until a new connection is made, the existing connection is disrupted, or the Connect app is closed.
-
-## Recommended wired configurations
-
-In general, it’s recommended to use native cable connections whenever possible such as USB-C to USB-C or HDMI to HDMI. Other combinations such as MiniDP to HDMI or MiniDP to USB-C will also work. Some additional configuration may be required to optimize the video-out experience, as described on this page.
-
-| **Connection** | **Functionality** | **Description**|
-| --- | --- | ---|
-| HDMI + USB-C | HDMI-in for audio and video
USB-C for TouchBack and InkBack | USB-C supports TouchBack and InkBack with the HDMI A/V connection.
Use USB-C to USB-A to connect to legacy computers.
**NOTE:** For best results, connect HDMI before connecting a USB-C cable. If the computer you're using for HDMI is not compatible with TouchBack and InkBack, you won't need a USB-C cable. |
-| USB-C (via compute module) | Video-in Audio-in | Single cable needed for A/V
TouchBack and InkBack is supported
HDCP enabled |
-| HDMI (in port) | Video, Audio into Surface Hub 2S | Single cable needed for A/V
TouchBack and InkBack not supported
HDCP enabled |
-| MiniDP 1.2 output | Video-out such as mirroring to a larger projector. | Single cable needed for A/V |
-
-When you connect a guest computer to Surface Hub 2S via the USB-C port, several USB devices are discovered and configured. These peripheral devices are created for TouchBack and InkBack. As shown in the following table, the peripheral devices can be viewed in Device Manager, which will show duplicate names for some devices, as shown in the following table.
-
-
-|**Peripheral**| **Listing in Device Manager** |
-| ---------------------------- |------------- | ------------------------------|
-| Human interface devices | HID-compliant consumer control device HID-compliant pen HID-compliant pen (duplicate item) HID-compliant pen (duplicate item) HID-compliant touch screen USB Input Device USB Input Device (duplicate item) |
-| Keyboards | Standard PS/2 keyboard |
-| Mice and other pointing devices | HID-compliant mouse |
-| USB controllers | Generic USB hub USB composite device |
-
-## Connecting video-in to Surface Hub 2S
-
-You can input video to Surface Hub 2S using USB-C or HDMI, as indicated in the following table.
-
-### Surface Hub 2S video-in settings
-
-| **Signal Type** | **Resolution** | **Frame rate** | **HDMI** | **USB-C** |
-| --------------- | -------------- | -------------- | -------- | --------- |
-| PC | 640 x 480 | 60 | X | X |
-| PC | 720 x 480 | 60 | X | X |
-| PC | 1024 x 768 | 60 | X | X |
-| PC | 1920 x 1080 | 60 | X | X |
-| PC | 3840x2560 | 30 | X | X |
-| HDTV | 720p | 60 | X | X |
-| HDTV | 1080p | 60 | X | X |
-| 4K UHD | 3840x2560 | 30 | X | X |
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> The 4K UHD resolution (3840×2560) is only supported when connecting to ports on the compute module. It is not supported on the “guest” USB ports located on the left, top, and right sides of the device.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Video from a connected external PC may appear smaller when displayed on Surface Hub 2S.
-
-## Mirroring Surface Hub 2S display on another device
-
-You can output video to another display using MiniDP, as indicated in the following table.
-
-### Surface Hub 2S video-out settings
-
-| **Signal Type** | **Resolution** | **Frame rate** | **MiniDP** |
-| --------------- | -------------- | -------------- | ---------- |
-| PC | 640 x 480 | 60 | X |
-| PC | 720 x 480 | 60 | X |
-| PC | 1024 x 768 | 60 | X |
-| PC | 1920 x 1080 | 60 | X |
-| PC | 3840 x 2560 | 60 | X |
-| HDTV | 720p | 60 | X |
-| HDTV | 1080p | 60 | X |
-| 4K UHD | 3840 x 2560 | 60 | X |
-
-
-
-Surface Hub 2S includes a MiniDP video-out port for projecting visual content from Surface Hub 2S to another display. If you plan to use Surface Hub 2S to project to another display, note the following recommendations:
-
-- **Keyboard required.** Before you begin, you’ll need to connect either a wired or Bluetooth-enabled external keyboard to Surface Hub 2S. Note that unlike the original Surface Hub, a keyboard for Surface Hub 2S is sold separately and is not included in the shipping package.
-- **Set duplicate mode.** Surface Hub 2S supports video-out in duplicate mode only. However, you will still need to manually configure the display mode when you connect for the first time:
- 1. Enter the **Windows logo key** + **P**, which opens the Project pane on the right side of Surface Hub 2S, and then select **Duplicate** mode.
- 2. When you’re finished with your Surface Hub 2S session, select **End Session**. This ensures that the duplicate setting is saved for the next session.
-- **Plan for different aspect ratios.** Like other Surface devices, Surface Hub 2S uses a 3:2 display aspect ratio (the relationship between the width and the height of the display). Projecting Surface Hub 2S onto displays with different aspect ratios is supported. Note however that because Surface Hub 2S duplicates the display, the MiniDP output will also only display in a 3:2 aspect ratio, which may result in letterboxing or curtaining depending on the aspect ratio of the receiving display.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> if your second monitor uses a 16:9 aspect ratio (the predominant ratio for most TV monitors), black bars may appear on the left and right sides of the mirrored display. If this occurs, you may wish to inform your users that there is no need to adjust the second display.
-
-## Selecting cables
-
-Note the following recommendations:
-
-- **USB.** USB 3.1 Gen 2 cables.
-- **MiniDP.** DisplayPort cables certified for up to 3 meters in length.
-- **HDMI.** If a long cable is necessary, HDMI is recommended due to the wide availability of cost-effective, long-haul cables with the ability to install repeaters if needed.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Most DisplayPort sources will automatically switch to HDMI signaling if HDMI is detected.
-
-## Wirelessly connect to Surface Hub 2S
-
-Windows 10 natively supports Miracast, which lets you wireless connect to Surface Hub 2S.
-
-### To connect using Miracast:
-
-1. On your Windows 10 device, enter **Windows logo key** + **K**.
-2. In the Connect window, look for the name of your Surface Hub 2S in the list of nearby devices. You can find the name of your Surface Hub 2S in the bottom left corner of the display.
-3. Enter a PIN if your system administrator has enabled the PIN setting for Miracast connections. This requires you to enter a PIN number when you connect to Surface Hub 2S for the first time.
-
-> [!NOTE]
->If you do not see the name of the Surface Hub 2S device as expected, it’s possible the previous session was prematurely closed. If so, sign into Surface Hub 2S directly to end the previous session and then connect from your external device.
-
-## Connecting peripherals to Surface Hub 2S
-
-### Bluetooth accessories
-
-You can connect the following accessories to Surface Hub-2S using Bluetooth:
-
-- Mice
-- Keyboards
-- Headsets
-- Speakers
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> After you connect a Bluetooth headset or speaker, you might need to change the default microphone and speaker settings. For more information, see [**Local management for Surface Hub settings**](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface-hub/local-management-surface-hub-settings).
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-custom-install.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-custom-install.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c86ac8b4b3..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-custom-install.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,86 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "Customize wall mount of Surface Hub 2S"
-description: "Learn how to perform a custom install of Surface Hub 2S."
-keywords: separate values with commas
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 06/20/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-
-# Customize wall mount of Surface Hub 2S
-
-If you’re not using certified mounting solutions, you can mount Surface Hub 2S using readily available retail hardware.
-
-## Set wall mount measurements
-
-Surface Hub 2S recommended mounting measurements:
-
-|**Item**|**Description**|**Notes**|
-|:------ |:------------- |:------- |
-|**Height from bottom of Surface Hub 2S**| 1026.5 mm (40.41”) | Recommended |
-|**Height from top of Surface Hub 2S**| 1767.2 mm (69.57”) | Recommended |
-|**Height from center of mount**| 1397 mm (55”) | Recommended |
-
-1. Measure 1026.5 mm (40.41”) from the floor level to set the recommended minimum height.
-2. Measure 1767.2 mm (69.57”) from the floor level to set the recommended top height.
-
-
-
-3. Measure 1397 mm (55”) mm from the floor level to set the recommended center height.
-
-
-
-## Obstruction free mounting
-
-In addition to the visible ports on the sides of the device, certain integrated components must remain free of obstruction in order to function correctly. These include the Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, occupancy, and mic sensors as well thermal cooling vents.
- Keep out zones
-
-|**Item**|**Description**|**Notes**|
-|:---- |:----------- |:----- |
-|**Access**| Ensure unimpeded access to input/output ports, the compute cartridge, Bluetooth radio, Bluetooth sensor, Wi-Fi radio, Wi-Fi sensor, occupancy sensor. | See Figure 1. |
-|**Air flow**| Avoid blocking inlet and outlet air vent zones. | See Figure 2 |
-|**Audio**| Avoid blocking audio exit zone on rear of Surface Hub 2S. | See Figure 2. |
-
-
-***Figure 1. Keep out zones for Surface Hub 2S components***
-
-
-***Figure 2. Avoid blocking thermal inlet/outlet and audio exit zones. ***
-
-The removable compute cartridge containing the I/O ports must remain free of any obstructions or impediments of any kind.
-
-
-***Figure 3.View of compute cartridge on the underside of Surface Hub 2s.***
-
-
-***Figure 4. Unimpeded removal of compute cartridge***
-
-## Selecting a mounting system
-
-Surface Hub 2S uses a 350 mm x 350 mm mounting framework that meets most — but not all — of the criteria listed in the VESA Flat Display Mounting Interface Standard. You can install Surface Hub 2S using any of various off-the-shelf display brackets designed to accommodate displays that diverge from exact VESA specifications, as shown below.
-
-On the back of Surface Hub 2S, you’ll find a square pattern of four M6 x 1.0 threaded holes centered on the circular bump (565 mm in diameter). Attach your mount using four M6 x 1.0–12 mm-long metric bolts. Or, depending on preference, you can use longer bolts up to a maximum of 20 mm.
-Important considerations for mounting systems
-
-|**Item**|**Description**|**Notes**|
-|:------ |:------------- |:------- |
-|**Strength**| Only choose mounts that can safely support devices of at least 28 kg (62 lbs.). | Required |
-|**Stiffness**| Avoid flexible display mounts that can diminish the interactive pen and touch use experience. Most TV mounts are not designed to support touch displays. | Recommended |
-|**Depth**| Keep the device mounted tightly to the wall especially in corridors and along circulation paths within rooms.| Recommended |
-|**Versatility**| Ensure your mounting solution remains hidden from view in both the existing landscape mode and any potential portrait mode (subject to future availability). | Recommended |
-
-
-***Figure 5. Surface Hub 2S mounting configuration***
-
-## Mounting methods compatible with Surface Hub 2S
-
-Surface Hub 2S is compatible with mounts that allow you to place it at angles of 10-70 degrees from the vertical plane. Rail mounts typically have multiple holes and a set of slots, enabling compatibility across a wide range of displays. A rail attached to the wall and two mounts attached to the display enable you to securely install Surface Hub 2S to a wall. When evaluating rail mounts for compatibility, ensure they meet versatility requirements listed earlier.
-
-
-***Figure 6. Surface Hub 2S rail mounts***
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-deploy-apps-intune.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-deploy-apps-intune.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 77fe0fa1ca..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-deploy-apps-intune.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "Deploy apps to Surface Hub 2S using Intune"
-description: "Learn how you can deploy apps to Surface Hub 2S using Intune."
-keywords: separate values with commas
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 06/20/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-
-# Deploy apps to Surface Hub 2S using Intune
-
-You can install additional apps to fit your team or organization's needs.
-
-## Developer guidelines
-
-- Surface Hub only runs [Universal Windows Platform (UWP) apps](https://msdn.microsoft.com/windows/uwp/get-started/whats-a-uwp). Apps created using the [Desktop App Converter](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/uwp/porting/desktop-to-uwp-run-desktop-app-converter) will not run on Surface Hub.
-- Apps must be targeted for the [Universal device family](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/apps/dn894631) or Windows Team device family.
-- Surface Hub only supports [offline-licensed apps](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-store/distribute-offline-apps) from [Microsoft Store for Business](https://businessstore.microsoft.com/store).
-- By default, apps must be Store-signed to be installed. During testing and development, you can also choose to run developer-signed UWP apps by placing the device in developer mode.
-- When developing and submitting apps to the Microsoft Store, set Device family availability and Organizational licensing options to ensure that apps are available to run on Surface Hub.
-- You need admin credentials to install apps on Surface Hub. Designed for use in meeting rooms and other shared spaces, Surface Hub prevents regular users from accessing the Microsoft Store to download and install apps.
-
-## Deployment guidelines
-
-You can deploy Universal Windows Platform (UWP) apps to Surface Hub 2S using Intune, easing app deployment to devices.
-
-1. To deploy apps, enable MDM for your organization. In the Intune portal, select **Intune** as your MDM Authority (recommended).
-
- 
-
-2. Enable the Microsoft Store for Business in Intune. Open Intune, select **Client apps** > **Microsoft Store for Business.**
-
- 
-
-3. In Intune open **Microsoft Store for Business** and select **Settings** > **Distribute** > **Management tools**. Choose **Microsoft Intune** as your management tool.
-
- 
-
-4. In Microsoft Store for Business, select **Settings** > **Shop** > **Shopping Experience**, and then select **Show offline apps**. Offline apps refer to apps that can be synced to Intune and centrally deployed to a device.
-5. After enabling Offline shopping, you can acquire offline licenses for apps that you can sync to Intune and deploy as Device licensing.
-6. In **Intune** > **Client apps** > **Microsoft Store for Business**, select **Sync**.
-7. In the Client apps page, search for the app in the apps list. Assign the apps to the desired device group or groups. Select **Assignments** > **Add group**.
-
-
-
-8. Under assignment type, choose **Required**.
-
-
-
-9. For the selected groups, choose **Device licensing** and then select **OK** and save the assignment.
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-deploy-checklist.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-deploy-checklist.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 08421ad2f6..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-deploy-checklist.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,65 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "Surface Hub 2S deployment checklists"
-description: "Verify your deployment of Surface Hub 2S using pre- and post-deployment checklists."
-keywords: separate values with commas
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 06/20/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-
-# Surface Hub 2S deployment checklists
-
-## Surface Hub 2S pre-deployment checklist
-
-|**Item**|**Response**|
-|:------ |:------ |
-|**Device account name**| |
-|**Device account UPN**| |
-|**ActiveSync Policy**| |
-|**Calendar processing configuration completed**| ☐ Yes ☐ No |
-|**Device-friendly name**| |
-|**Device host name**| |
-|**Affiliation**| ☐ None ☐ Active Directory affiliation ☐ Azure Active Directory |
-|**Microsoft Teams Mode**| ☐ Mode 0 ☐ Mode 1 ☐ Mode 2 |
-|**Device Management**| ☐ Yes, Microsoft Intune ☐ Yes, other mobile device manager [MDM] ☐ None |
-|**Proxy**| ☐ Automatic configuration ☐ Proxy server ☐ Proxy auto-config (PAC) file |
-|**Proxy authentication**| ☐ Device account credentials ☐ Prompt for credentials |
-|**Password rotation**| ☐ On ☐ Off |
-|**Skype for Business additional domain names (on-premises only)**| |
-|**Session timeout time**| |
-|**Session timeout action**| ☐ End session ☐ Allow resume |
-|**My meetings and files**| ☐ Enabled ☐ Disabled |
-|**Lock screen timeout**| |
-|**Sleep idle timeout**| |
-|**Bluetooth**| ☐ On ☐ Off |
-|**Use only BitLocker USB drives**| ☐ On ☐ Off |
-|**Install additional certificates (on-premises only)**| |
-|**Windows update**| ☐ Windows Update for Business ☐ Windows Server Update Services [WSUS] |
-|**Surface app speaker setting**| ☐ Rolling stand ☐ Wall-mounted |
-|**IP Address**| ☐ Wired — DHCP ☐ Wired — DHCP reservation ☐ Wireless — DHCP ☐ Wireless — DHCP reservation |
-
-## Surface Hub 2S post-deployment checklist
-
-|**Check**|**Response**|
-|:------|:---------|
-|**Device account syncing**| ☐ Yes ☐ No |
-|**Bitlocker key**| ☐ Saved to file (no affiliation) ☐ Saved in Active Directory (AD affiliation) ☐ Saved in Azure AD (Azure AD affiliation) |
-|**Device OS updates**| ☐ Completed |
-|**Windows Store updates**| ☐ Automatic ☐ Manual |
-|**Microsoft Teams scheduled meeting**| ☐ Confirmation email received ☐ Meeting appears on start screen ☐ One-touch join functions ☐ Able to join audio ☐ Able to join video ☐ Able to share screen ||
-|**Skype for Business scheduled meeting**| ☐ Confirmation email received ☐ Meeting appears on start screen ☐ One-touch join functions correctly ☐ Able to join audio ☐ Able to join video ☐ Able to share screen ☐ Able to send/receive IM |
-|**Scheduled meeting when already invited**| ☐ Meeting declined |
-|**Microsoft Teams ad-hoc meeting**| ☐ Invite other users work ☐ Able to join audio ☐ Able to join video ☐ Able to share screen |
-|**Skype for Business scheduled meeting**| ☐ Invite other users work ☐ Able to join audio ☐ Able to join video ☐ Able to share screen ☐ Able to send/receive IM |
-|**Microsoft Whiteboard**| ☐ Launch from Welcome / Start screen ☐ Launch from Microsoft Teams |
-|**Incoming Skype/Teams call**| ☐ Able to join audio ☐ Able to join video ☐ Able to share screen ☐ Able to send/receive IM (Skype for Business only) |
-|**Incoming live video streams**| ☐ Maximum 2 (Skype for Business) ☐ Maximum 4 (Microsoft Teams) |
-|**Microsoft Teams Mode 0 behavior**| ☐ Skype for Business tile on Welcome/Start screen ☐ Can join scheduled Skype for Business meetings (Skype UI) ☐ Can join scheduled Teams meetings (Teams UI) |
-|**Microsoft Teams Mode 1 behavior**| ☐ Teams tile on Welcome/Start screen ☐ Can join scheduled Skype for Business meetings (Skype UI) ☐ Can join scheduled Teams meetings (Teams UI) |
-|**Microsoft Teams Mode 2 behavior**| ☐ Teams tile on Welcome / Start screen ☐ Can join scheduled Teams meetings ☐ Fail to join Skype for Business meetings |
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-deploy.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-deploy.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 87908ed944..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-deploy.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,66 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "Create provisioning packages for Surface Hub 2S"
-description: "This page describes how to deploy Surface Hub 2S using provisioning packages and other tools."
-keywords: separate values with commas
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 06/20/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-
-# Create provisioning packages for Surface Hub 2S
-
-You can use Windows Configuration Designer (WCD) to create provisioning packages to automate the deployment process of Surface Hub 2S. Use provisioning packages to add certificates, configure proxies, set up device administrators and device accounts. You can also use provisioning packages along with a configuration file to deploy multiple Surface Hubs with a single USB thumb drive.
-
-### Install Windows Configuration Designer
-
-Install Windows Configuration Designer from the Windows Assessment and Deployment Kit (ADK) for Windows 10. Download and install the [ADK for Windows 10, version 1703](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=845542). For more information, see [Download and install the Windows ADK](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows-hardware/get-started/adk-install).
-
-### Add certificates
-
-You can import Certificate Authority certificates to Surface Hub 2S.
-To add certificates to Surface Hub 2S, you need a copy of each certificate as X.509 in .cer format. You cannot import .crt, .pfx or other container formats. Certificates must be imported into Windows Configuration Designer and arranged by hierarchy:
-
- 
-
-### Configure proxy during OOBE
-
-In Windows Configuration Designer, go to the Configure proxy settings tab and enter the appropriate settings as shown below.
-
- 
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> When configuring proxy settings, turn off **Automatically detect settings** if you intend to use a setup script or a proxy server. You can use a setup script *or* a proxy server, not both.
-
-### Affiliate Surface Hub 2S with Azure Active Directory
-
-You can affiliate Surface Hub 2S with Azure Active Directory using a provisioning package:
-As an Azure Active Directory Global Administrator, you can join large numbers of new Windows devices to Azure Active Directory and Intune using a bulk token.
-
-To create a bulk token, give it a friendly name, configure the expiration date (maximum of 30 days) and use your Admin credentials to acquire the token as shown below:
-
- 
- 
- 
-
-### Provisioning multiple devices (.csv file)
-
-In addition to the provisioning package, you can use a Surface Hub configuration file to make it even easier to set up your devices. A Surface Hub configuration file contains a list of device accounts and friendly names for wireless projection. During first run, you get an option to choose a device account and friendly name from a configuration file.
-
-### To create a Surface Hub configuration file
-
-1. Using Microsoft Excel or another CSV editor, create a CSV file named: **SurfaceHubConfiguration.csv**
-2. Enter a list of device accounts and friendly names in this format:
-
-```
-,,
-```
-
-3. Save the file to the root of the USB thumb drive where you copied the PPKG file.
-
- 
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-install-mount.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-install-mount.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1ae4dcadb6..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-install-mount.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "Install and mount Surface Hub 2S"
-description: "Learn how to install and mount Surface Hub 2S."
-keywords: separate values with commas
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 06/20/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-
-# Install and mount Surface Hub 2S
-
-Surface Hub 2S is designed for ease of mobility with a form factor that enables you to quickly install and begin using the device. Microsoft has partnered with Steelcase on the following certified mounting solutions: Roam Mobile Stand and Roam Wall Mount. Both fully integrate with the design of Surface Hub 2S, enabling unimpeded access to the compute cartridge, power, USB-A, USB-C, and other ports.
-
-You can mount Surface Hub 2S with the certified wall mount or the certified mobile stand, both developed in partnership with Steelcase. Both fully integrate with the design of Surface Hub 2S, enabling unimpeded access to the compute cartridge along with all I/O ports and power.
-
-For more information, see [Officially licensed third-party accessories](http://licensedhardware.azurewebsites.net/surface) and view installation demos from the Surface product team at [Steelcase mobile stand and APC battery set up](https://youtu.be/VTzdu4Skpkg).
-
- 
-
-If you’re not using licensed accessories, see [Customize wall mount of Surface Hub 2S](surface-hub-2s-custom-install.md).
-
-| 1. **Set up your mount first** | |
-|:------ |:-------- |
-| Leave your Surface Hub in the box until the mount is set up and mounting hardware is applied. Mount is not included. Your mount is sold separately. |  |
-| 2. **Attach hardware to the Surface Hub** | |
-| Mounting hardware and specific instructions are found in the box for your mount. |  |
-| 3. **Remove the instructional label before mounting.** | |
-| Get someone to help you lift and mount your Surface Hub. Make sure to hold and lift the Surface Hub from the bottom. |  |
-| 4. **Attach accessories and power on** | |
-| Install accessories and attach power cable as shown. See guides on the screen cling. Remove cling wrap from the screen. Press the power button to power on. |  |
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-manage-intune.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-manage-intune.md
deleted file mode 100644
index be1df464ef..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-manage-intune.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,74 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "Manage Surface Hub 2S with Intune"
-description: "Learn how to update and manage Surface Hub 2S using Intune."
-keywords: separate values with commas
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 06/20/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-
-# Manage Surface Hub 2S with Intune
-
-## Register Surface Hub 2S with Intune
-
-Surface Hub 2S allows IT administrators to manage settings and policies using a mobile device management (MDM) provider. Surface Hub 2S has a built-in management component to communicate with the management server, so there is no need to install additional clients on the device.
-
-### Manual registration
-
-1. Sign in as a local administrator on Surface Hub 2S and open the **Settings** app. Select **Surface Hub** > **Device management** and then select **+** to add.
-2. After authenticating, the device will automatically register with Intune.
-
- 
-
-### Auto registration — Azure Active Directory Affiliated
-
-During the initial setup process, when affiliating a Surface Hub with an Azure AD tenant that has Intune auto enrollment enabled, the device will automatically enroll with Intune. For more information, refer to [Intune enrollment methods for Windows devices](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/enrollment/windows-enrollment-methods). Azure AD affiliation and Intune auto enrollment is required for the Surface Hub to be a "compliant device" in Intune.
-
-## Windows 10 Team Edition settings
-
-Select Windows 10 Team for preset device restriction settings for Surface Hub and Surface Hub 2S.
-
- 
-
-These settings include user experience and app behavior, Azure Log Analytics registration, Maintenance windows configuration, Session settings, and Miracast settings. For a complete list of available Windows 10 Team settings, see [SurfaceHub CSP](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/surfacehub-csp).
-
-## Additional supported configuration service providers (CSPs)
-
-For additional supported CSPs, see [Surface Hub CSPs in Windows 10](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/configuration-service-provider-reference#surfacehubcspsupport).
-
-## Quality of Service (QoS) settings
-
-To ensure optimal video and audio quality on Surface Hub 2S, add the following QoS settings to the device. The settings are identical for Skype for Business and Teams.
-
-|**Name**|**Description**|**OMA-URI**|**Type**|**Value**|
-|:------ |:------------- |:--------- |:------ |:------- |
-|**Audio Ports**| Audio Port range | ./Device/Vendor/MSFT/NetworkQoSPolicy/HubAudio/SourcePortMatchCondition | String | 50000-50019 |
-|**Audio DSCP**| Audio ports marking | ./Device/Vendor/MSFT/NetworkQoSPolicy/HubAudio/DSCPAction | Integer | 46 |
-|**Video Ports**| Video Port range | ./Device/Vendor/MSFT/NetworkQoSPolicy/HubVideo/SourcePortMatchCondition | String | 50020-50039 |
-|**Video DSCP**| Video ports marking | ./Device/Vendor/MSFT/NetworkQoSPolicy/HubVideo/DSCPAction | Integer | 34 |
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> These are the default port ranges. Administrators may change the port ranges in the Skype for Business and Teams control panel.
-
-## Microsoft Teams Mode settings
-
-You can set the Microsoft Teams app mode using Intune. Surface Hub 2S comes installed with Microsoft Teams in mode 0, which supports both Microsoft Teams and Skype for Business. You can adjust the modes as shown below.
-
-### Modes:
-
-- Mode 0 — Skype for Business with Microsoft Teams functionality for scheduled meetings.
-- Mode 1 — Microsoft Teams with Skype for Business functionality for scheduled meetings.
-- Mode 2 — Microsoft Teams only.
-
-To set modes, add the following settings to a custom Device Configuration Profile.
-
-|**Name**|**Description**|**OMA-URI**|**Type**|**Value**|
-|:--- |:--- |:--- |:--- |:--- |
-|**Teams App ID**|App name|./Vendor/MSFT/SurfaceHub/Properties/VtcAppPackageId|String| Microsoft.MicrosoftTeamsforSurfaceHub_8wekyb3d8bbwe!Teams|
-|**Teams App Mode**|Teams mode|./Vendor/MSFT/SurfaceHub/Properties/SurfaceHubMeetingMode|Integer| 0 or 1 or 2|
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-manage-passwords.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-manage-passwords.md
deleted file mode 100644
index accd5d7e84..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-manage-passwords.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "Manage device account password rotation"
-description: "Learn how to configure Surface Hub 2S on-premises accounts with PowerShell"
-keywords: separate values with commas
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 06/20/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-# Manage device account password rotation
-
-You can configure Surface Hub 2S to automatically change a device account password without requiring you to manually update the device account information.
-
-If you turn on Password Rotation, Surface Hub 2S changes the password every 7 days. The automatically generated passwords contain 15-32 characters including a combination of uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters.
-
-Passwords do not change during a meeting. If Surface Hub 2S is turned off, it attempts to change the password immediately when turned on or every 10 minutes until successful.
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-onprem-powershell.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-onprem-powershell.md
deleted file mode 100644
index fb2c98dcbd..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-onprem-powershell.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,72 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "Configure Surface Hub 2S on-premises accounts with PowerShell"
-description: "Learn how to configure Surface Hub 2S on-premises accounts with PowerShell"
-keywords: separate values with commas
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 06/20/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-
-# Configure Surface Hub 2S on-premises accounts with PowerShell
-
-## Connect to Exchange Server PowerShell
-
-> [!IMPORTANT]
-> You'll need the Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) for the Client Access service of the on-premises Exchange server for some of these cmdlets.
-
-```PowerShell
-$ExchServer = Read-Host "Please Enter the FQDN of your Exchange Server"
-$ExchSession = New-PSSession -ConfigurationName Microsoft.Exchange -ConnectionUri http://$ExchServer/PowerShell/ -Authentication Kerberos -Credential (Get-Credential)
-Import-PSSession $ExchSession
-```
-
-```PowerShell
-$ExchServer = Read-Host "Please Enter the FQDN of your Exchange Server"
-$ExchSession = New-PSSession -ConfigurationName Microsoft.Exchange -ConnectionUri http://$ExchServer/PowerShell/ -Authentication Kerberos -Credential (Get-Credential)
-Import-PSSession $ExchSession
-```
-
-## Create the device account
-
-```PowerShell
-New-Mailbox -UserPrincipalName Hub01@contoso.com -Alias Hub01 -Name "Hub 01" -Room -EnableRoomMailboxAccount $true -RoomMailboxPassword (ConvertTo-SecureString -String -AsPlainText -Force)
-```
-
-## Set automatic calendar processing
-
-```PowerShell
-Set-CalendarProcessing -Identity "HUB01@contoso.com" -AutomateProcessing AutoAccept -AddOrganizerToSubject $false –AllowConflicts $false –DeleteComments $false -DeleteSubject $false -RemovePrivateProperty $false -AddAdditionalResponse $true -AdditionalResponse "This room is equipped with a Surface Hub"
-```
-
-## Enable the Skype for Business object
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> It is important that you know the FQDN of the Skype for Business Registrar Pool.
-
-```PowerShell
-Enable-CsMeetingRoom -Identity Contoso\HUB01 -SipAddressType emailaddress -RegistrarPool SfbIEFE01.contoso.local
-```
-
-## Mobile Device Mailbox Policy
-
-You may need to create a Mobile Device Mailbox Policy (also known as ActiveSync Policy) to allow your Surface Hub to connect to your online or on-premises environment.
-
-## Create a Surface Hub mobile device mailbox policy
-
-```PowerShell
-New-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy -Name “Surface Hubs” -PasswordEnabled $false
-```
-
-## Additional settings
-
-It is recommended to add a MailTip to Surface Hub rooms so users remember to make the meeting a Skype for Business or Teams meeting:
-
-```PowerShell
-Set-Mailbox "Surface Hub 2S" -MailTip "This is a Surface Hub room. Please make sure this is a Microsoft Teams meeting."
-```
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-onscreen-display.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-onscreen-display.md
deleted file mode 100644
index da4712505e..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-onscreen-display.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "Adjust Surface Hub 2S brightness, volume, and input"
-description: "Learn how to use the onscreen display to adjust brightness and other settings in Surface Hub 2S."
-keywords: separate values with commas
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 07/09/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-# Adjust Surface Hub 2S brightness, volume, and input
-
-Surface Hub 2S provides an on-screen display for volume, brightness, and input control. The Source button functions as a toggle key to switch between the volume, brightness, and input control menus.
-
-## To show the on-screen display
-
-- Press and hold the **Source** button for 4 seconds.
-
- 
-
- When the on-screen display is visible, use one or more buttons to reach desired settings.
-
-## To adjust volume
-
-- Use the **Volume up/down** button to increase or decrease volume.
-
-## To adjust brightness
-
-1. Press the **Source** button again to switch to the brightness menu.
-2. Use the **Volume up/down** button to increase or decrease brightness.
-
-## To adjust input
-
-1. Press the **Source** button twice to switch to the Source menu.
-2. Use the **Volume up/down** button to switch between PC, HDMI, and USB-C inputs.
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-pack-components.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-pack-components.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 287f43ec7b..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-pack-components.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,85 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "How to pack and ship your Surface Hub 2S for service"
-description: "Instructions for packing Surface Hub 2S components, replacing the Compute cartridge, and replacing the camera"
-keywords: pack, replace components, camera, compute cartridge
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 07/1/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-
-# How to pack and ship your Surface Hub 2S for service
-
-If you replace your Surface Hub 2S, one of its components, or a related accessory, use the instructions in this article when you pack the device for shipment.
-
->[!IMPORTANT]
->When packing your device for shipment, make sure that you use the packaging in which your replacement device arrived.
-
-## How to pack your Surface Hub 2S 50”
-
-Use the following steps to pack your Surface Hub 2S 50" for shipment.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## How to replace and pack your Surface Hub 2S Compute Cartridge
-
-Use the following steps to remove the Surface Hub 2S Compute Cartridge, pack it for shipment, and install the new Compute Cartridge.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## How to replace your Surface Hub 2S Camera
-
-Use the following steps to remove the Surface Hub 2S camera and install the new camera.
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-phone-authenticate.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-phone-authenticate.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f79bbca0d4..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-phone-authenticate.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "Configure password-less phone sign-in for Surface Hub 2S"
-description: "Learn how to simplify signing in to Surface Hub 2S using password-less phone sign-in on your mobile device."
-keywords: separate values with commas
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 06/20/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-
-# Configure password-less phone sign-in for Surface Hub 2S
-
-Password-less phone sign-in simplifies signing-in to your meetings and files on Surface Hub 2S.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Password-less phone sign-in requires that your primary email address must match your UPN.
-
-## To set up password-less phone sign-in
-
-1. Download the [Microsoft Authenticator](https://www.microsoft.com/account/authenticator) app for iPhone or Android to your phone.
-2. From your PC, go to [https://aka.ms/MFASetup](https://aka.ms/MFASetup) , sign in with your account, and select **Next.**
-3. In the Additional security verification screen, select Mobile App and Use verification code, and then select **Setup**.
-
-## To configure mobile app
-
-1. In the Microsoft authenticator app on your phone, add an account, choose **Work or School Account**, and then scan the QR code displayed on your PC
-2. Send a notification to your phone and then approve the sign-in request.
-3. In the Authenticator app on your phone, use the drop-down menu next to your account and select **Enable phone sign-in**.
-4. If required, register your device with your organization and follow the on-screen instructions.
-
-## To sign in to Surface Hub
-
-1. On Surface Hub, sign into **My meetings and files** and select **Send notification** when prompted.
-2. Match the number displayed on your phone with the number displayed on Surface Hub to approve your sign-in request.
-3. If prompted, enter the PIN or biometric ID on your phone to complete sign-in.
-
-## Learn more
-For more information, see [Password-less phone sign-in with the Microsoft Authenticator app](https://docs.microsoft.com/azure/active-directory/authentication/howto-authentication-phone-sign-in).
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-port-keypad-overview.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-port-keypad-overview.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8a667d95ac..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-port-keypad-overview.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "Surface Hub 2S ports and keypad overview"
-description: "This page describes the ports, physical buttons, and configuration information essential for connecting to Surface Hub 2S."
-keywords: separate values with commas
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 06/20/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-
-# Surface Hub 2S ports and keypad overview
-
-This page describes the ports, physical buttons, and configuration information essential for connecting to Surface Hub 2S whether via wired, Wi-Fi, or Bluetooth methods. It also includes best practice recommendations for key connectivity scenarios.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You can find the serial number on the outside of the packaging, on the display by the power cord, or by using the Surface app.
-
-The figure below shows the location of ports and physical buttons on a keypad attached to the underside of the device. The table includes detailed descriptions of each element.
-
- 
-
-## Port and keypad component reference
-
-|**Key**|**Component**|**Description**|**Key parameters**|
-|:--- |:--------- |:----------- |:-------------- |
-| 1 | **USB C** | **USB 3.1 Gen 1** Use as a walk-up port for plugging in peripherals such as thumb-drives. Guest ports are on each side of the device (4).
*NOTE: This is the recommended port for connecting an external camera. Additional camera mount features are incorporated into the design to help support retention of attached cameras.*
NOTE: TouchBack and video ingest are not supported on these ports. | Type C
15 W Port (5V/3A) |
-| 2 | **AC power** | **100-240 V input** Connect to standard AC power and Surface Hub 2S will auto switch to the local power standard such as110 volts in the US and Canada or 220 volts in the UK. | IEC 60320 C14 |
-| 3 | **DC power** | **24V DC input port** Use for connecting to mobile battery. | Xbox1 Dual barrel to Anderson connector |
-| 4 | **Ethernet** | **1000/100/10 Base-T** Use for providing a continuous connection in a corporate environment and related scenarios requiring maximum stability or capacity. | RJ45 |
-| 5 | **USB-A** | **USB 3.1 Gen 1** Use as a walk-up port for plugging in peripherals such as thumb-drives. | Type A 7.5 W Port (5V/1.5A) |
-| 6 | **USB-C** | **USB 3.1 Gen 1** Use as a walk-up port for connecting external PCs and related devices or plugging in peripherals such as thumb-drives.
*NOTE: This is the recommended input port for video, TouchBack, and InkBack.* | Type C 18 W Port (5V/3A, 9V/2A) |
-| 7 | **HDMI-in** | **HDMI 2.0, HDCP 2.2 /1.4** Use for multiple scenarios including HDMI-to-HDMI guest input. | Standard HDMI |
-| 8 | **Mini DP-out** | **Mini DP 1.2 output** Use for video-out scenarios such as mirroring the Surface Hub 2S display to a larger projector.
*NOTE: This supports a maximum resolution of 3840 x 2160 (4K UHD) @60Hz.* | Mini DP |
-| 9 | **Source** | Use to toggle among connected ingest sources — external PC, HDMI, and Mini DP modes. | n/a |
-| 10 | **Volume** | Use +/- to adjust audio locally on the device.
*NOTE: When navigating to the brightness control, use +/- on the volume slider to control display brightness.* | n/a |
-| 11 | **Power** | Power device on/off. Use also to navigate display menus and select items. | n/a |
-
- 
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-prepare-environment.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-prepare-environment.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5f10258934..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-prepare-environment.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "Prepare your environment for Surface Hub 2S"
-description: "Learn what you need to do to prepare your environment for Surface Hub 2S."
-keywords: separate values with commas
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 11/21/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-
-# Prepare your environment for Surface Hub 2S
-
-## Office 365 readiness
-
-If you use Exchange Online, Skype for Business Online, Microsoft Teams, or Microsoft Whiteboard, and intend to manage Surface Hub 2S with Intune, first review the [Office 365 requirements for endpoints](https://docs.microsoft.com/office365/enterprise/office-365-endpoints).
-
-Office 365 endpoints help optimize your network by sending all trusted Office 365 network requests directly through your firewall, bypassing all additional packet-level inspection or processing. This feature reduces latency and your perimeter capacity requirements.
-
-Microsoft regularly updates the Office 365 service with new features and functionality, which may alter required ports, URLs, and IP addresses. To evaluate, configure, and stay up to date with changes, subscribe to the [Office 365 IP Address and URL Web service](https://docs.microsoft.com/office365/enterprise/office-365-ip-web-service).
-
-## Device affiliation
-
-Use Device affiliation to manage user access to the Settings app on Surface Hub 2S.
-With the Windows 10 Team Edition operating system (that runs on Surface Hub 2S), only authorized users can adjust settings using the Settings app. Since choosing the affiliation can impact feature availability, plan appropriately to ensure that users can access features as intended.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You can only set Device affiliation during the initial out-of-box experience (OOBE) setup. If you need to reset Device affiliation, you’ll have to repeat OOBE setup.
-
-## No affiliation
-
-No affiliation is like having Surface Hub 2S in a workgroup with a different local Administrator account on each Surface Hub 2S. If you choose No affiliation, you must locally save the [BitLocker Key to a USB thumb drive](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/security/information-protection/bitlocker/bitlocker-key-management-faq). You can still enroll the device with Intune; however, only the local admin can access the Settings app using the account credentials configured during OOBE. You can change the Administrator account password from the Settings app.
-
-## Active Directory Domain Services
-
-If you affiliate Surface Hub 2S with on-premises Active Directory Domain Services, you need to manage access to the Settings app using a security group on your domain. This helps ensure that all security group members have permissions to change settings on Surface Hub 2S. Also note the following:
-
-- When Surface Hub 2S affiliates with your on-premises Active Directory Domain Services, the BitLocker key can be saved in the Active Directory Schema. For more information, see [Prepare your organization for BitLocker: Planning and policies](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/security/information-protection/bitlocker/prepare-your-organization-for-bitlocker-planning-and-policies).
-- Your organization’s Trusted Root CAs are pushed to the same container in Surface Hub 2S, which means you don’t need to import them using a provisioning package.
-- You can still enroll the device with Intune to centrally manage settings on your Surface Hub 2S.
-
-## Azure Active Directory
-
-When you choose to affiliate your Surface Hub 2S with Azure Active Directory (Azure AD), any user in the Global Admins Security Group can sign in to the Settings app on Surface Hub 2S. Currently, no other group can be delegated to sign in to the Settings app on Surface Hub 2S.
-
-If you enabled Intune Automatic Enrollment for your organization, Surface Hub 2S will automatically enroll itself with Intune. The device’s BitLocker key is automatically saved in Azure AD. When affiliating Surface Hub 2S with Azure AD, single sign-on and Easy Authentication will not work.
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-quick-start.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-quick-start.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 3d7f08641a..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-quick-start.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "Surface Hub 2S quick start"
-description: "View the quick start steps to begin using Surface Hub 2S."
-keywords: separate values with commas
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 06/20/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-
-# Surface Hub 2S quick start
-
-## Unpack Surface Hub 2S
-
-1. Use the handles on each side of the box to move it to the space where you'll set it up.
-2. Before opening, remove the clips (4) on the front and back, and then lift the top off the box using the handles.
-3. In the base of the Surface Hub 2S, open the accessories box containing the setup guide, Surface Hub 2 pen, Surface Hub 2 camera, and the power cable.
-4. On the back of the Surface Hub, there's an instructional label showing you where to attach the mounting hardware. Install them in place and remove the label.
-
-See this video for more information about [unboxing and set up](https://youtu.be/fCrxdNXvru4).
-
-## Install and adjust pen
-
-1. Attach Surface Hub 2 pen magnetically to your preferred side of the device.
-
-
-
-2. To adjust pen pressure, open the Surface app on Surface Hub 2S, select Pen, and adjust the slider.
-
-
-
-## Install camera
-
-Remove the lens cling from the camera and attach it to the USB-C port on the top of the Surface Hub 2S.
-
-## Start Surface Hub 2S
-
-1. Insert the power cable into the back of the device and plug it into a power outlet. Run the cable through any cable guides on your mounting solution and remove the screen clang.
-2. To begin, press the power button on the bottom right.
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-recover-reset.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-recover-reset.md
deleted file mode 100644
index af763b9e26..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-recover-reset.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "Reset and recovery for Surface Hub 2S"
-description: "Learn how to recover and reset Surface Hub 2S."
-keywords: separate values with commas
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 12/05/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-
-# Reset and recovery for Surface Hub 2S
-
-If you encounter problems with Surface Hub 2S, you can reset the device to factory settings or restore by using a USB drive.
-
-To begin, sign in to Surface Hub 2S with admin credentials, open the **Settings** app, select **Update & security**, and then select **Recovery**.
-
-## Reset the device
-
-1. To reset the device, select **Get Started**.
-2. When the **Ready to reset this device** window appears, select **Reset**.
- >[!NOTE]
- >Surface Hub 2S reinstalls the operating system from the recovery partition. This may take up to one hour to complete.
-3. To reconfigure the device, run the first-time Setup program.
-4. If you manage the device using Microsoft Intune or another mobile device management solution, retire and delete the previous record, and then re-enroll the new device. For more information, see [Remove devices by using wipe, retire, or manually unenrolling the device](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/devices-wipe).
-
-
-*Figure 1. Reset and recovery for Surface Hub 2S*
-
-## Recover Surface Hub 2S by using a USB recovery drive
-
-New in Surface Hub 2S, you can now reinstall the device by using a recovery image.
-
-### Recovery from a USB drive
-
-Using Surface Hub 2S, you can reinstall the device by using a recovery image. By doing this, you can reinstall the device to the factory settings if you lost the BitLocker key, or if you no longer have admin credentials to the Settings app.
-
->[!NOTE]
->Use a USB 3.0 drive with 8 GB or 16 GB of storage, formatted as FAT32.
-
-1. From a separate PC, download the .zip file recovery image from the [Surface Recovery website](https://support.microsoft.com/surfacerecoveryimage?devicetype=surfacehub2s) and then return to these instructions.
-1. Unzip the downloaded file onto the root of the USB drive.
-1. Connect the USB drive to any USB-C or USB-A port on Surface Hub 2S.
-1. Turn off the device:
- 1. While holding down the Volume down button, press the Power button.
- 1. Keep holding both buttons until you see the Windows logo.
- 1. Release the Power button but continue to hold the Volume until the Install UI begins.
-
- 
- **Figure 2. Volume and Power buttons**
-
-1. On the language selection screen, select the display language for your Surface Hub 2S.
-1. Select **Recover from a drive** and **Fully clean the drive**, and then select **Recover**. If you're prompted for a BitLocker key, select **Skip this drive**. Surface Hub 2S reboots several times and takes approximately 30 minutes to complete the recovery process.
-
-When the first-time setup screen appears,remove the USB drive.
-
-## Recover a locked Surface Hub
-
-At the end of a session, Surface Hub 2S may occasionally encounter an error during the cleanup of user and app data at the end of a session. If this occurs, the device automatically reboots and resumes the data cleanup. However, if this operation repeatedly fails, the device automatically locks to protect user data.
-
-**To unlock a Surface Hub 2S:**
-- Reset or recover the device from the Windows Recovery Environment. For more information, see [What is Windows RE?](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc765966.aspx)
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> To enter recovery mode, unplug the power cord and plug it in again three times.
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-secure-with-uefi-semm.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-secure-with-uefi-semm.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8d0768ba93..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-secure-with-uefi-semm.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,68 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "Secure and manage Surface Hub 2S with SEMM"
-description: "Learn more about securing Surface Hub 2S with SEMM."
-keywords: separate values with commas
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 06/20/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-
-# Secure and manage Surface Hub 2S with SEMM and UEFI
-
-New in Surface Hub 2S, you can use SEMM to manage the UEFI setting of the device.
-Use the Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator to control the following components:
-
-- Wired LAN
-- Cameras
-- Bluetooth
-- Wi-Fi
-- Occupancy sensor
-
-Use the Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator to turn on or off the following UEFI settings:
-
-- Boot
-
- - IPv6 for PXE Boot
- - Alternate Boot
- - Boot Order Lock
- - USB Boot
-- UEFI Front Page
-
- - Devices
- - Boot
- - Date/Time
-
-## Create UEFI configuration image
-
-Unlike other Surface devices, you cannot use an MSI file or a Win PE image to apply these settings on Surface Hub 2S. Instead, you need to create a USB image to load into the device. To create a Surface Hub 2S UEFI configuration image, download and install the latest version of the Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator from the [Surface Tools for IT](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=46703) page in the Microsoft Download Center. For more information about using UEFI and SEMM, see [Microsoft Surface Enterprise Management Mode](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface/surface-enterprise-management-mode).
-
-## To configure UEFI on Surface Hub 2S
-
-1. Start the UEFI Configurator and on the first screen, choose **Configuration Package**.
-
-2. To add the certificate to your package, you must have a valid certificate with the private key in a .pfx file format to sign and protect the package. Select **+ Certificate Protection.**
-
-3. Enter the certificate’s private key’s password.
-
-4. After importing the private key, continue creating the package.
-
-5. Choose **Hub** and **Surface Hub 2S** as the target for the UEFI configuration package.
-
-6. Choose the components and settings you want to activate or deactivate on Surface Hub 2S.
-
-7. Use the USB option to export the file.
-
-8. Insert and choose the USB drive you’d like to use for this package. The USB drive will be formatted and you lose any information you have on it.
-
-9. Upon successful creation of the package, the Configurator will display the last two characters of your certificate’s thumbprint. You need these characters when you import to the configuration to Surface Hub 2S.
-
-
-## To boot into UEFI
-
-Turn off Surface Hub 2S. Press and hold the **Volume Up** button and press the **Power** Button. Keep holding the Volume Up button until the UEFI menu appears.
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-setup.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-setup.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 08318020fb..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-setup.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,100 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "First time Setup for Surface Hub 2S"
-description: "Learn how to complete first time Setup for Surface Hub 2S."
-keywords: separate values with commas
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 07/03/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-
-# First time Setup for Surface Hub 2S
-
-When you first start Surface Hub 2S, the device automatically enters first time Setup mode to guide you through account configuration and related settings.
-
-## Configuring Surface Hub 2S account
-
-1. **Configure your locale.** Enter region, language, keyboard layout and time zone information. Select **Next**.
-
- 
-1. **Connect to a wireless network.** Choose your preferred wireless network and select **Next.**
-
-- This option is not shown if connected using an Ethernet cable.
-- You cannot connect to a wireless network in hotspots (captive portals) that redirect sign-in requests to a provider’s website.
-
-3. **Enter device account info.** Use **domain\user** for on-premises and hybrid environments and **user\@example.com** for online environments. Select **Next.**
-
- 
-1. **Enter additional info.** If requested, provide your Exchange server address and then select **Next.**
-
- 
-
-1. **Name this device.** Enter a name for your device or use the suggested one based on your account’s display name and user principle name [UPN]. **Select Next**.
-
-- The **Friendly name** is visible on the bottom left corner of Surface Hub 2S and is shown when projecting to the device.
-
-- The **Device name** identifies the device when affiliated with Active Directory or Azure Active Directory, and when enrolling the device with Intune.
-
- 
-
-## Configuring device admin accounts
-
-You can only set up device admins during first time Setup. For more information, refer to [Surface Hub 2S device affiliation](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-prepare-environment#device-affiliation).
-
- In the **Setup admins for this device** window, select one of the following options: Active Directory Domain Services, Azure Active Directory, or Local admin.
-
- 
-
-### Active Directory Domain Services
-
-1. Enter the credentials of a user who has permissions to join the device to Active Directory.
-
- 
-
-2. Select the Active Directory Security Group containing members allowed to log on to the Settings app on Surface Hub 2S.
-
- 
-1. Select **Finish**. The device will restart.
-
-### Azure Active Directory
-
-When choosing to affiliate your device with Azure Active Directory, the device will immediately restart and display the following page. Select **Next**.
-
-
-
-1. Enter the email address or UPN of an account **with Intune Plan 1** or greater and then select **Next.**
-
- 
-
-2. If redirected, authenticate using your organization’s sign-in page and provide additional logon information if requested. The device will restart.
-
-## Local Administrator account
-
-- Enter a username and password for your local admin. The device will restart.
-
- 
-
-## Using provisioning packages
-
-If you insert a USB thumb drive with a provisioning package into one of the USB ports when you start Surface Hub 2S, the device displays the following page.
-
-1. Enter the requested settings and select **Set up**.
-
- 
-
- 
-2. Choose the provisioning package you’d like to use.
-
- 
-
-3. If you created a multiple devices CSV file, you will be able to choose a device configuration. For more information, refer to [Create provisioning packages for Surface Hub 2S](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-deploy#provisioning-multiple-devices-csv-file).
-
-
- 
-
-4. Follow the instructions to complete first time Setup.
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-site-planning.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-site-planning.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 9b04ea0174..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-site-planning.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "Surface Hub 2S site planning"
-description: "Learn more about rooms for Surface Hub 2S."
-keywords: separate values with commas
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 06/20/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-
-# Surface Hub 2S site planning
-
-## Introduction
-
-Designed for team collaboration, Surface Hub 2S can transform the way you work — not only in the conference rooms but any place you want to work. One of the biggest advantages of Surface Hub 2S is the ability to move it from one space to another when used with the Steelcase Roam mobile stand and mobile battery. Providing unplugged, uninterrupted teamwork capabilities, Surface Hub 2S can be integrated into almost any workspace.
-
-## Room considerations
-
-Designed for interactive use in smaller conference rooms and huddle spaces, Surface Hub 2S provides a 4K camera, microphone array, crystal clear speakers, and a brilliant 4K+ resolution display. Optimizing the user experience in larger spaces with more people further away from the display may require peripherals such as an extra camera, microphone, or room systems solution such as Microsoft Teams Rooms.
-
-As a general guideline, install Surface Hub 2S in a space that meets the following criteria:
-
-- People can reach all four edges of the touchscreen.
-- The screen is not in direct sunlight, which could affect viewing or damage the screen.
-- Ventilation openings are not blocked.
-- Microphones are not affected by noise sources, such as fans or vents.
-- Space is well lit with no reflective sources.
-
-Whether mounted to a wall or installed on the mobile stand, the areas where you use the device should maintain:
-
-- Room temperatures no cooler than 10°C (50° F) and no hotter than 35°C (95° F).
-- Relative humidity no lower than 20 percent and no higher than 80 percent.
-
-For detailed room planning guidance and more information about Microsoft Teams Rooms see [Plan Microsoft Teams Rooms.](https://docs.microsoft.com/MicrosoftTeams/room-systems/skype-room-systems-v2-0)
-
-## Managing Surface Hub 2S location
-
-If you plan to use Surface Hub 2S on a mobile stand, you may wish to explore third-party solutions that enable location services. For example, active RFID systems can provide real-time tracking throughout complex office or industrial spaces. For more information, see your A/V provider or other third-party expertise for guidance.
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-site-readiness-guide.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-site-readiness-guide.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8db9d3818e..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-site-readiness-guide.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "Surface Hub 2S site readiness guide"
-description: "Get familiar with site readiness requirements and recommendations for Surface Hub 2S."
-keywords: separate values with commas
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 06/20/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-
-# Surface Hub 2S site readiness guide
-
-|**Topic**|**Description**|
-|:-------|:-------|
-| [Site planning for Surface Hub 2S](surface-hub-2s-site-planning.md) | Review room considerations and planning for peripherals. |
-| [Surface Hub 2S quick start](surface-hub-2s-quick-start.md) | Get an overview of required steps to unpack and start Surface Hub 2S. |
-| [Install and mount Surface Hub 2S](surface-hub-2s-install-mount.md) | Learn about licensed accessories to install and mount Surface Hub 2S. |
-| [Customizing installation of Surface Hub 2S](surface-hub-2s-custom-install.md) | Learn how to custom install without licensed mounting accessories.|
-| [Surface Hub 2S ports and keypad overview](surface-hub-2s-port-keypad-overview.md) | Get details for I/O ports and keypad power and selection controls. |
-| [Connect to Surface Hub 2S](surface-hub-2s-connect.md) | Learn about wired and wireless methods to connect to Surface Hub.|
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-techspecs.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-techspecs.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4e40f9ae25..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-techspecs.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "Surface Hub 2S tech specs"
-description: "View tech specs for Surface Hub 2S including pen, camera, and optional mobile battery specifications."
-keywords: separate values with commas
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-manager: laurawi
-ms.author: greglin
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 11/19/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-
-# Surface Hub 2S tech specs
-
-|**Item**|**Details**|
-|:------ |:--------- |
-|**Dimensions**| 29.2" x 43.2" x 3.0” (741 mm x 1097 mm x 76 mm) |
-|**Shipping dimensions**| 47.64" x 36.89" x 9.92" (1,210 mm x 937 mm x 252 mm)|
-|**Weight**| 61.6 lbs. (28 kg) |
-|**Shipping Weight**| 81.08 lbs. (36.77 kg) |
-|**Resolution**| 3840 x 2560 |
-|**Display**| PixelSense Display, 3:2 aspect ratio, 10-bit color, 15.5 mm border, anti-glare, IPS LCD |
-|**Processor**| Quad-core 8th Generation Intel Core i5 processor, 8 GB RAM, 128 GB SSD 1 |
-|**Graphics**| Intel UHD Graphics 620 |
-|**Wireless**| Wi-Fi 5 (IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac compatible) Bluetooth Wireless 4.1 technology Miracast display |
-|**Connections**| USB-A Mini-DisplayPort 1.2 video output RJ45 gigabit Ethernet (1000/100/10 BaseT) HDMI video input (HDMI 2.0, HDCP 2.2 /1.4) USB-C with DisplayPort input Four USB-C (on display) |
-|**Sensors**| Doppler occupancy 2 Accelerometer Gyroscope |
-|**Audio/Video**| Full-range, front facing 3-way stereo speakers Full band 8-element MEMS microphone array Microsoft Surface Hub 2 Camera, 4K, USB-C connection, 90-degree HFOV |
-|**Pen**| Microsoft Surface Hub 2 Pen (active) |
-|**Software**| Windows 10 Microsoft Teams for Surface Hub 3 Skype for Business Microsoft Whiteboard Microsoft Office (Mobile) Microsoft Power BI 2 |
-|**Exterior**| Casing: Precision machined aluminum with mineral-composite resin Color: Platinum Physical Buttons: Power, Volume, Source |
-|**What’s in the box**| One Surface Hub 2S One Surface Hub 2 Pen One Surface Hub 2 Camera 2.5 m AC Power Cable Quick Start Guide |
-|**Warranty**| 1-year limited hardware warranty |
-|**BTU**| 1518 BTU/hr |
-|**Input Voltage**| 50/60Hz 110/230v nominal, 90-265v max |
-|**Input power, operating**| 445 W (495 W Surge Load) |
-|**Input Current**| 5.46 A |
-|**Input Power, standby**| 5 W max |
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> 1 System software uses significant storage space. Available storage is subject to change based on system software updates and apps usage. 1 GB= 1 billion bytes. See Surface.com/Storage for more details. 2 Doppler sensor not available in Hong Kong, India, Kuwait, and Oman due to government regulations.
- 3 Software license required for some features. Sold separately.
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-unpack.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-unpack.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 950a5caa6f..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-unpack.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "Unpack Surface Hub 2S"
-description: "This page includes information about safely unpacking Surface Hub 2S."
-keywords: separate values with commas
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 06/20/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-
-# Unpack Surface Hub 2S
-
-## Unpacking the Surface Hub 2S
-
-Before you remove Surface Hub 2S from the box, make sure that you have your mounting solution assembled and someone available to help you.
-
-1. Use the handles on each side of the box to move it to the space where you'll set it up.
-2. Before opening, remove the clips (4) on the front and back, and then lift the top off the box using the handles.
-3. In the base of the Surface Hub 2S, open the accessories box containing the setup guide, Surface Hub 2 pen, Surface Hub 2 camera, and the power cable.
-4. On the back of the surface hub, there's an instructional label that shows you where to attach the mounting hardware. Install them in place and remove the label.
-5. If you're using a mobile stand remember to lock the wheels to keep the stand in place
-6. Be sure to lift the Surface Hub 2S with both hands and support the bottom of the device.
-7. Align the installed hardware with the slots on the mount so it rests firmly in place.
-8. Follow any further instructions that came with your mounting solution.
-
-## Install pen and camera
-
-1. Unwrap your Surface Hub 2 pen and attach it magnetically to your preferred side of the device.
-2. Remove the lens cling from the camera and attach it to the USB-C port on the top of the Surface Hub 2S.
-3. Insert the power cable into the back of the device and plug it into a power outlet. Run the cable through any cable guides on your mounting solution and remove the screen clang.
-4. To begin, press the power button on the bottom right.
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-whats-new.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-whats-new.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 13d7eb06ce..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-2s-whats-new.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,65 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "What's new in Surface Hub 2S for IT admins"
-description: "Learn more about new features in Surface Hub 2S."
-keywords: separate values with commas
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-audience: Admin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 06/20/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: Medium
----
-
-# What's new in Surface Hub 2S for IT admins
-
-Surface Hub 2S is an all-in-one collaboration canvas that’s built for teamwork delivering a digital whiteboard, meetings platform, and a Windows 10 computing experience in one device.
-
-|**Capability**|**Summary**|**Learn more**|
-|:-------|:------|:----|
-|**Mobile Device Management and UEFI manageability**| Manage settings and policies using a mobile device management (MDM) provider.
Full integration with Surface Enterprise Management Mode (SEMM) lets you manage hardware components and firmware. | [Managing Surface Hub 2S with Microsoft Intune](surface-hub-2s-manage-intune.md)
[Surface Enterprise Management Mode](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface/surface-enterprise-management-mode) |
-|**Cloud and on-premises coexistence**| Supports on-premises, hybrid, or online. | [Prepare your environment for Microsoft Surface Hub 2S](surface-hub-2s-prepare-environment.md) |
-|**Reset and recovery**| Restore from the cloud or USB drive. | [Recover and reset Surface Hub 2S](surface-hub-2s-recover-reset.md) |
-|**Microsoft Whiteboard**| Ofice 365 integration, intelligent ink, and Bing search bring powerful new capabilities, enabling a persistent digital canvas shareable across most browsers, Windows and iOS devices. | [Announcing a new whiteboard for your Surface Hub](https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/t5/Office-365-Blog/Announcing-a-new-Whiteboard-for-your-Surface-Hub/ba-p/637050) |
-|**Microsoft Teams Meeting Room License**| Extends Office 365 licensing options across Skype for Business, Microsoft Teams, and Intune. | [Teams Meeting Room Licensing Update](https://docs.microsoft.com/MicrosoftTeams/room-systems/skype-room-systems-v2-0) |
-|**On-screen display**| Adjust volume, brightness, and input control directly on the display. | |
-|**Sensor-activated Connected Standby**| Doppler sensor activates Connected Standby after 1 minute of inactivity.
Manage this setting remotely using Intune or directly on the device from the Settings app. | [Surface Hub 2S tech specs](surface-hub-2s-techspecs.md) |
-|**Surface Hub pen**| Ergonomically redesigned and easily attachable on the sides of the device. | |
-|**Surface app for Surface Hub 2S**| Change audio settings and view your device's information from the Surface app | |
-|**Ready for tomorrow**| Removable cartridge facilitates upgrading to new features. | |
-
-For more information about what’s new in Surface Hub 2S, see:
-
-- [Surface Hub 2S product site](https://www.microsoft.com/p/surface-hub-2S/8P62MW6BN9G4?activetab=pivot:overviewtab)
-- [Behind the Design Surface Hub 2S](https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/t5/Surface-IT-Pro-Blog/Behind-the-design-Surface-Hub-2S/ba-p/464099)
-
-## Surface Hub 2S compared with Surface Hub
-
-The following table details the differences between Surface Hub and Surface Hub 2S:
-
-|**Component**| **Surface Hub 55”**|**Surface Hub 84”**| **Surface Hub 2S**|
-|:----- |:---- |:---- |:----- |
-|**Form Factor**| 55” | 84” | 50” |
-|**Dimension**| 31.75” x 59.62” x 3.38” (806.4 mm x 1514.3 mm x 85.8 mm) | 46.12” x 86.7” x 4.15” (1171.5 mm x 2202.9 mm x 105.4 mm) | 29.2" x 43.2" x 3.0" (741 mm x 1097 mm x 76 mm) |
-|**Weight**| 105 lbs. (48 kg) | 280 lbs. (127 kg) | 61.6 lbs. (28 kg) |
-|**Display**| Resolution: 1920 x 1080 @ 120 Hz Contrast ratio: 1300:1 Touch: 100-point multi-touch Projective Capacitance optically bonded sensor | Resolution: 3840 x 2160 @ 120 Hz Contrast Ratio: 1400:1 Touch: 100-point multi-touch Projective Capacitance optically bonded sensor | Resolution: 3840 x 2560 @ 60 Hz |
-|**Aspect Ratio**| 16:9 | 16:9 | 3:2 |
-|**Storage**| SSD 128 GB | SSD 128 GB | SSD 128 GB |
-|**RAM**| 8 GB RAM | 8 GB RAM | 8 GB RAM |
-|**Processor**| 4th Generation Intel® Core i5 | 4th Generation Intel Core i7 | Quad-core 8th Generation Intel Core i5 processor |
-|**Graphics**| Intel HD 4600 | NVIDIA Quadro K2200 | Intel UHD Graphics 620 |
-|**Network**| Wi-Fi (802.11 a/b/g/n/ac) Ethernet 1 Gbps Bluetooth 4.0 low energy Miracast enabled | Wi-Fi (802.11 a/b/g/n/ac) Ethernet 1 Gbps Bluetooth 4.0 low energy Miracast enabled | Wi-Fi 5 (IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac) Ethernet 1 Gbps Bluetooth Wireless 4.1 technology Miracast Display |
-|**Ports**| (1) USB 3.0 (bottom) + (1) USB 3.0 (side access) (2) USB 2.0 DisplayPort Video Output 3.5 mm Stereo Out RJ11 Connector for system-level control
DisplayPort Video Input HDMI Video Input VGA Video Input 3.5 mm Stereo Input (1) USB 2.0 type B Touchback Output | (1) USB 3.0 (bottom) + (1) USB 3.0 (side access) (4) USB 2.0 DisplayPort Video Output 3.5 mm Stereo Out RJ11 Connector for system-level control
DisplayPort Video Input HDMI Video Input VGA Video Input 3.5 mm Stereo Input (1) USB 2.0 type B Touchback Output | (1) USB-A Mini-DisplayPort Video Output HDMI Video Input USB-C with DisplayPort Input (4) USB-C (on display) RJ45 Gigabit Ethernet |
-|**Sensors**| (2) Passive Infrared Presence Sensors, Ambient Light Sensors | (2) Passive Infrared Presence Sensors, Ambient Light Sensors | Doppler occupancy sensor, Accelerometer, Gyroscope |
-|**NFC**| NFC reader | NFC reader | N/A |
-|**Speakers**| (2) Front-facing stereo speakers | (2) Front-facing stereo speakers | Full range front facing 3-way stereo speakers |
-|**Microphone**| High-Performance, 4-Element Array | High-Performance, 4-Element Array | Full band 8-element MEMS microphone array |
-|**Camera**| (2) Wide angle HD cameras 1080p @ 30 fps | (2) Wide angle HD cameras 1080p @ 30 fps | (1) Microsoft Surface Hub 2 Camera, 4K, USB-C connection, 90-degree horizontal field of view |
-|**Pen**| (2) Powered, active, subpixel accuracy | (2) Powered, active, subpixel accuracy | (1) Microsoft Surface Hub 2 Pen (active) |
-|**Physical buttons**| Power, Input Select, Volume, Brightness | Power, Input Select, Volume, Brightness | Power, Volume, Source |
-|**Software**| Windows 10 + Office (Word, PowerPoint, Excel) | Windows 10 + Office (Word, PowerPoint, Excel) | Windows 10 + Office (Word, PowerPoint, Excel) |
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> The NFC reader available in the original Surface Hub is discontinued in Surface Hub 2S and is no longer available.
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-authenticator-app.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-authenticator-app.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 9ad0606641..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-authenticator-app.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,86 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Sign in to Surface Hub with Microsoft Authenticator
-description: Use Microsoft Authenticator on your mobile device to sign in to Surface Hub.
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 08/28/2017
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Sign in to Surface Hub with Microsoft Authenticator
-
-People in your organization can sign in to a Surface Hub without a password using the Microsoft Authenticator app, available on Android and iOS.
-
-## Organization prerequisites
-
-To let people in your organization sign in to Surface Hub with their phones and other devices instead of a password, you’ll need to make sure that your organization meets these prerequisites:
-
-- Your organization must be a hybrid or cloud-only organization, backed by Azure Active Directory (Azure AD). For more information, see [What is Azure Active Directory?](https://docs.microsoft.com/azure/active-directory/active-directory-whatis)
-
-- Make sure you have at minimum an Office 365 E3 subscription.
-
-- [Configure Multi-Factor Authentication](https://docs.microsoft.com/azure/active-directory/authentication/howto-mfa-mfasettings). Make sure **Notification through mobile app** is selected.
-
- 
-
-- Enable content hosting on Azure AD services such as Office, SharePoint, etc.
-
-- Surface Hub must be running Windows 10, version 1703 or later.
-
-- Surface Hub is set up with either a local or domain-joined account.
-
-Currently, you cannot use Microsoft Authenticator to sign in to Surface Hubs that are joined to Azure AD.
-
-## Individual prerequisites
-
-- An Android phone running 6.0 or later, or an iPhone or iPad running iOS9 or later
-
-- The most recent version of the Microsoft Authenticator app from the appropriate app store
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >On iOS, the app version must be 5.4.0 or higher.
- >
- >The Microsoft Authenticator app on phones running a Windows operating system can't be used to sign in to Surface Hub.
-
-- Passcode or screen lock on your device is enabled
-
-- A standard SMTP email address (example: joe@contoso.com). Non-standard or vanity SMTP email addresses (example: firstname.lastname@contoso.com) currently don’t work.
-
-## How to set up the Microsoft Authenticator app
-
->[!NOTE]
->If Company Portal is installed on your Android device, uninstall it before you set up Microsoft Authenticator. After you set up the app, you can reinstall Company Portal.
->
->If you have already set up Microsoft Authenticator on your phone and registered your device, go to the sign-in instructions.
-
-1. Add your work or school account to Microsoft Authenticator for Multi-Factor Authentication. You will need a QR code provided by your IT department. For help, see [Get started with the Microsoft Authenticator app](https://docs.microsoft.com/azure/multi-factor-authentication/end-user/microsoft-authenticator-app-how-to).
-2. Go to **Settings** and register your device.
-3. Return to the accounts page and choose **Enable phone sign-in** from the account dropdown menu.
-
-## How to sign in to Surface Hub during a meeting
-
-1. After you’ve set up a meeting, go to the Surface Hub and select **Sign in to see your meetings and files**.
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >If you’re not sure how to schedule a meeting on a Surface Hub, see [Schedule a meeting on Surface Hub](https://support.microsoft.com/help/17325/surfacehub-schedulemeeting).
-
- 
-
-2. You’ll see a list of the people invited to the meeting. Select yourself (or the person who wants to sign in – make sure this person has gone through the steps to set up their device before your meeting), and then select **Continue**.
-
- 
-
- You'll see a code on the Surface Hub.
-
- 
-
-3. To approve the sign-in, open the Authenticator app, enter the four-digit code that’s displayed on the Surface Hub, and select **Approve**. You will then be asked to enter the PIN or use your fingerprint to complete the sign in.
-
- 
-
-You can now access all files through the OneDrive app.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-downloads.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-downloads.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5e5073588a..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-downloads.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Useful downloads for Microsoft Surface Hub
-description: Downloads related to the Microsoft Surface Hub.
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 08/22/2017
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Useful downloads for Microsoft Surface Hub
-
-This topic provides links to useful Surface Hub documents, such as product datasheets and user's guide.
-
-| Link | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-| [Surface Hub Setup Guide (English, French, Spanish) (PDF)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/0/1/6/016363A4-8602-4F01-8281-9BE5C814DC78/Setup-Guide_EN-FR-SP.pdf) | Get a quick overview of how to set up the environment for your new Surface Hub. |
-| [Surface Hub Quick Reference Guide (PDF)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/9/E/E/9EE660F8-3FC6-4909-969E-89EA648F06DB/Surface%20Hub%20Quick%20Reference%20Guide_en-us.pdf) | Use this quick reference guide to get information about key features and functions of the Surface Hub. |
-| [Surface Hub User Guide (PDF)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/3/6/B/36B6331E-0C63-4E71-A05D-EE88D05081F8/surface-hub-user-guide-en-us.pdf) | Learn how to use Surface Hub in scheduled or ad-hoc meetings. Invite remote participants, use the built-in tools, save data from your meeting, and more. |
-| [Surface Hub Replacement PC Drivers](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=52210) | The Surface Hub Replacement PC driver set is available for those customers who have chosen to disable the Surface Hub’s internal PC and use an external computer with their 84” or 55” Surface Hub. This download is meant to be used with the Surface Hub Admin Guide , which contains further details on configuring a Surface Hub Replacement PC. |
-| [Microsoft Surface Hub Rollout and Adoption Success Kit (ZIP)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/F/A/3/FA3ADEA4-4966-456B-8BDE-0A594FD52C6C/Surface_Hub_Adoption_Kit_Final_0519.pdf) | Best practices for generating awareness and implementing change management to maximize adoption, usage, and benefits of Microsoft Surface Hub. The Rollout and Adoption Success Kit zip file includes the Rollout and Adoption Success Kit detailed document, Surface Hub presentation, demo guidance, awareness graphics, and more. |
-| [Unpacking Guide for 84-inch Surface Hub (PDF)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/5/2/B/52B4007E-D8C8-4EED-ACA9-FEEF93F6055C/84_Unpacking_Guide_English_French-Spanish.pdf) | Learn how to unpack your 84-inch Surface Hub efficiently and safely. [Watch the video (opens in a pop-up media player)](http://compass.xbox.com/assets/75/2b/752b73dc-6e9d-4692-8ba1-0f9fc03bff6b.mov?n=04.07.16_installation_video_03_unpacking_84.mov) |
-| [Unpacking Guide for 55-inch Surface Hub (PDF)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/2/E/7/2E7616A2-F936-4512-8052-1E2D92DFD070/55_Unpacking_Guide_English-French-Spanish.PDF) | Learn how to unpack your 55-inch Surface Hub efficiently and safely. [Watch the video (opens in a pop-up media player)](http://compass.xbox.com/assets/a9/d6/a9d6b4d7-d33f-4e8b-be92-28f7fc2c06d7.mov?n=04.07.16_installation_video_02_unpacking_55.mov) |
-| [Wall Mounting and Assembly Guide (PDF)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/7/0/2/702485E3-B55E-4DE8-B5DD-3B56F90DCF5D/SH-Guide_WACG_Wall_Mounts_EN-FR-ES-NL-DE-IT-PT-AR-DA-FI-NO-SV.pdf) | Detailed instructions on how to safely and securely assemble the wall brackets, and how to mount your Surface Hub onto them. [Watch the video (opens in a pop-up media player)](http://compass.xbox.com/assets/bf/4d/bf4d6f06-370c-45ee-88e6-c409873914e8.mov?n=04.07.16_installation_video_05_wall_mount.mov) |
-| [Floor-Supported Mounting and Assembly Guide (PDF)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/7/0/2/702485E3-B55E-4DE8-B5DD-3B56F90DCF5D/SH-Guide_WACG_Floor_Support_Mount_EN-FR-ES-NL-DE-IT-AR-DA-FI-NO-SV.pdf) | Detailed instructions on how to safely and securely assemble the floor-supported brackets, and how to mount your Surface Hub onto them. [Watch the video (opens in a pop-up media player)](http://compass.xbox.com/assets/ed/de/edde468a-e1d4-4ce8-8b61-c4527dd25c81.mov?n=04.07.16_installation_video_06_floor_support_mount.mov) |
-| [Rolling Stand Mounting and Assembly Guide (PDF)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/7/0/2/702485E3-B55E-4DE8-B5DD-3B56F90DCF5D/SH-Guide_WACG_Rolling_Stands_EN-FR-ES-NL-DE-IT-AR-DA-FI-NO-SV.pdf) | Detailed instructions on how to safely and securely assemble the rolling stand, and how to mount your Surface Hub onto it. [Watch the video (opens in a pop-up media player)](http://compass.xbox.com/assets/1f/94/1f949613-3e4a-41e3-ad60-fe8aa7134115.mov?n=04.07.16_installation_video_04_rolling_stand_mount.mov) |
-| [Mounts and Stands Datasheet (PDF)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/5/0/1/501F98D9-1BCC-4448-A1DB-47056CEE33B6/20160711_Surface_Hub_Mounts_and_Stands_Datasheet.pdf) | Specifications and prices for all Surface Hub add-on stands and mounts that turn your workspace into a Surface Hub workspace. |
-| [Surface Hub Stand and Wall Mount Specifications (PDF)](https://download.microsoft.com/download/7/A/7/7A75BD0F-5A46-4BCE-B313-A80E47AEB581/20160720_Combined_Stand_Wall_Mount_Drawings.pdf) | Illustrated specifications for the 55” and 84” Surface Hub rolling stands, wall mounts, and floor-supported wall mounts. |
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-qos.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-qos.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 105a188ae1..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-qos.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Implement Quality of Service on Surface Hub
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-description: Learn how to configure QoS on Surface Hub.
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Implement Quality of Service (QoS) on Surface Hub
-
-Quality of Service (QoS) is a combination of network technologies that allows the administrators to optimize the experience of real time audio/video and application sharing communications.
-
-Configuring [QoS for Skype for Business](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/networkqospolicy-csp) on the Surface Hub can be done using your [mobile device management (MDM) provider](manage-settings-with-mdm-for-surface-hub.md) or through a [provisioning package](provisioning-packages-for-surface-hub.md).
-
-
-This procedure explains how to configure QoS for Surface Hub using Microsoft Intune.
-
-1. In Intune, [create a custom policy](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/custom-settings-configure).
-
- 
-
-2. In **Custom OMA-URI Settings**, select **Add**. For each setting that you add, you will enter a name, description (optional), data type, OMA-URI, and value.
-
- 
-
-3. Add the following custom OMA-URI settings:
-
- Name | Data type | OMA-URI ./Device/Vendor/MSFT/NetworkQoSPolicy | Value
- --- | --- | --- | ---
- Audio Source Port | String | /HubAudio/SourcePortMatchCondition | Get the values from your Skype administrator
- Audio DSCP | Integer | /HubAudio/DSCPAction | 46
- Video Source Port | String | /HubVideo/SourcePortMatchCondition | Get the values from your Skype administrator
- Video DSCP | Integer | /HubVideo/DSCPAction | 34
- Audio Process Name | String | /HubAudio/AppPathNameMatchCondition | Microsoft.PPISkype.Windows.exe
- Video Process Name | String | /HubVideo/AppPathNameMatchCondition | Microsoft.PPISkype.Windows.exe
-
- >[!IMPORTANT]
- >Each **OMA-URI** path begins with `./Device/Vendor/MSFT/NetworkQoSPolicy`. The full path for the audio source port setting, for example, will be `./Device/Vendor/MSFT/NetworkQoSPolicy/HubAudio/SourcePortMatchCondition`.
-
-
-
-
-4. When the policy has been created, [deploy it to the Surface Hub.](manage-settings-with-mdm-for-surface-hub.md#manage-surface-hub-settings-with-mdm)
-
-
->[!WARNING]
->Currently, you cannot configure the setting **IPProtocolMatchCondition** in the [NetworkQoSPolicy CSP](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/networkqospolicy-csp). If this setting is configured, the policy will fail to apply.
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-recovery-tool.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-recovery-tool.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 75feb89fc2..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-recovery-tool.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,101 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Using the Surface Hub Recovery Tool
-description: How to use the Surface Hub Recovery Tool to re-image the SSD.
-ms.assetid: FDB6182C-1211-4A92-A930-6C106BCD5DC1
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: manage Surface Hub
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 05/22/2018
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Using the Surface Hub Recovery Tool
-
-The [Microsoft Surface Hub Recovery Tool](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=52210) helps you re-image your Surface Hub Solid State Drive (SSD) using a Windows 10 desktop device, without calling support or replacing the SSD. With this tool, you can reimage an SSD that has an unknown Administrator password, boot errors, was unable to complete a cloud recovery, or for a device that has an older version of the operating system. The tool will not fix physically damaged SSDs.
-
-To re-image the Surface Hub SSD using the Recovery Tool, you'll need to remove the SSD from the Surface Hub, connect the drive to the USB-to-SATA cable, and then connect the cable to the desktop PC on which the Recovery Tool is installed. For more information on how to remove the existing drive from your Surface Hub, see [Surface Hub SSD replacement](surface-hub-ssd-replacement.md).
-
-> [!IMPORTANT]
-> Do not let the device go to sleep or interrupt the download of the image file.
-
-If the tool is unsuccessful in reimaging your drive, please contact [Surface Hub Support](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4037644/surface-contact-surface-warranty-and-software-support).
-
-## Prerequisites
-
-### Mandatory
-
-- Host PC running 64-bit version of Windows 10, version 1607 or higher.
-- Internet access
-- Open USB 2.0 or greater port
-- USB-to-SATA cable
-- 10 GB of free disk space on the host computer
-- SSDs shipped with Surface Hub or a SSD provided by Support as a replacement. SSDs not supplied by Microsoft are not supported.
-
-### Recommended
-
-- High-speed Internet connection
-- Open USB 3.0 port
-- USB 3.0 or higher USB-to-SATA cable
-- The imaging tool was tested with the following make and model of cables:
- - Startech USB312SAT3CB
- - Rosewill RCUC16001
- - Ugreen 20231
-
-## Download Surface Hub Recovery Tool
-
-Surface Hub Recovery Tool is available for download from [Surface Hub Tools for IT](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=52210) under the file name **SurfaceHub_Recovery_v1.14.137.0.msi**.
-
-To start the download, click **Download**, choose **SurfaceHub_Recovery_v1.14.137.0.msi** from the list, and click **Next**. From the pop-up, choose one of the following:
-
-- Click **Run** to start the installation immediately.
-- Click **Save** to copy the download to your computer for later installation.
-
-Install Surface Hub Recovery Tool on the host PC.
-
-## Run Surface Hub Recovery Tool
-
-1. On the host PC, select the **Start** button, scroll through the alphabetical list on the left, and select the recovery tool shortcut.
-
- 
-
-2. Click **Start**.
-
- 
-
-3. In the **Guidance** window, click **Next**.
-
- 
-
-4. click **Yes** to download the image. Time to download the recovery image is dependent on internet connection speeds. On an average corporate connection, it can take up to an hour to download the 8GB image file.
-
- 
-
-5. When the download is complete, the tool instructs you to connect an SSD drive. If the tool is unable to locate the attached drive, there is a good chance that the cable being used is not reporting the name of the SSD to Windows. The imaging tool must find the name of the drive as "LITEON L CH-128V2S USB Device" before it can continue. For more information on how to remove the existing drive from your Surface Hub, see [Surface Hub SSD replacement](surface-hub-ssd-replacement.md).
-
- 
-
-6. When the drive is recognized, click **Start** to begin the re-imaging process. On the warning that all data on the drive will be erased, click **OK**.
-
- 
-
- Prior to applying the system image to the drive, the SSD is repartitioned and formatted. Copying the system binaries will take approximately 30 minutes, but can take longer depending on the speed of your USB bus, the cable being used, or antivirus software installed on your system.
-
- 
-
- 
-
-## Troubleshooting and common problems
-
-Issue | Notes
---- | ---
-The tool fails to image the SSD | Make sure you are using a factory-supplied SSD and one of the tested cables.
-The reimaging process appears halted/frozen | It is safe to close and restart the Surface Hub Recovery Tool with no ill effect to the SSD.
-The drive isn’t recognized by the tool | Verify that the Surface Hub SSD is enumerated as a Lite-On drive, "LITEON L CH-128V2S USB Device". If the drive is recognized as another named device, your current cable isn’t compatible. Try another cable or one of the tested cable listed above.
-Error: -2147024809 | Open Disk Manager and remove the partitions on the Surface Hub drive. Disconnect and reconnect the drive to the host machine. Restart the imaging tool again.
-
-If the tool is unsuccessful in reimaging your drive, please contact [Surface Hub Support](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4037644/surface-contact-surface-warranty-and-software-support).
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-site-readiness-guide.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-site-readiness-guide.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d12281f55b..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-site-readiness-guide.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,138 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Surface Hub Site Readiness Guide
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: laurawi
-description: Use this Site Readiness Guide to help plan your Surface Hub installation.
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Surface Hub Site Readiness Guide
-
-Use this Site Readiness Guide to help plan your Surface Hub installation. In this guide, you’ll find:
-- Site readiness topics
-- Detailed hardware specifications on power, ports, and cables
-- Recommendations for moving and storage
-- Links to guidance on unpacking and mounting
-
-## Site readiness planning
-
-The room needs to be large enough to provide good viewing angles, but small enough for the microphones to pick up clear signals from the people in the room. Most rooms that are about 22 feet (seven meters) long will provide a good meeting experience. In the conference area, mount Surface Hub where:
-
-- Everyone in the room can see it.
-- People can reach all four edges of the touchscreen.
-- The screen is not in direct sunlight, which could affect viewing or damage the screen.
-- Ventilation openings are not blocked.
-- Microphones are not affected by noise sources, such as fans or vents.
-You can find more details in the [55” Microsoft Surface Hub technical information](surface-hub-technical-55.md) or [84” Microsoft Surface Hub technical information](surface-hub-technical-84.md) sections. For cleaning, care, and safety information, see the mounting guides and user guide at https://www.microsoft.com/surface/support/surface-hub.
-
-### Hardware considerations
-
-Surface Hub arrives with:
-- Two Microsoft Surface Hub pens
-- A Microsoft wireless keyboard, customized for Surface Hub
-- A 9-foot NEMA 5-15P (US Standard) to C13 power cable
-
-You’ll need to provide:
-- Cat-5e or Cat-6 network cables
-- Display cables (optional)
-- Audio cable (optional)
-- Type A to B USB cable (optional)
-
-For details about cable ports, see the [55” Microsoft Surface Hub technical information](surface-hub-technical-55.md) or [84” Microsoft Surface Hub technical information](surface-hub-technical-84.md) sections. For details about cables, see [Wired Connect](#wired).
-
-Microsoft Surface Hub has an internal PC and does not require an external computer system.
-
-For power recommendations, see [55” Microsoft Surface Hub technical information](surface-hub-technical-55.md) or [84” Microsoft Surface Hub technical information](surface-hub-technical-84.md). For power cable safety warnings, see the mounting guides at https://www.microsoft.com/surface/support/surface-hub.
-
-### Data and other connections
-
-To use Surface Hub, you need an active Ethernet port and a standard power outlet. In addition, you may want to:
-
-- Equip the conference table for Wired Connect.
-- Expand the wall outlet configuration to include:
- - Additional AC outlets
- - Ethernetports
- - Audio ports
- - Video ports (DisplayPort, HDMI, VGA, etc.)
-
-
-## When Surface Hub arrives
-
-Surface Hub is large and heavy, so let Receiving know when it will arrive and what they should do to handle it safely. For details on the packing weights and other specifications, see [55” Microsoft Surface Hub technical information](surface-hub-technical-55.md) or [84” Microsoft Surface Hub technical information](surface-hub-technical-84.md).
-
-Consider the following:
-- Wait to unpack Surface Hub from the shipping container until you’ve moved it to the conference area where you plan to install it.
-- Make sure your loading dock can accept a shipment on a pallet and hold it securely until it can be installed.
-- Check for local labor union rules that would require you to use union labor to unload or move Surface Hub.
-- Do not leave Surface Hub in a hot or humid environment. As with any computer-based or display equipment, heat and humidity can damage Surface Hub. The recommended storage temperatures are 32°F to 95°F with a relative humidity of less than 70 percent.
-
-### Moving Surface Hub
-
-Before you move Surface Hub, make sure that all the doorways, thresholds, hallways, and elevators are big enough to accommodate it. For information on the dimensions and weight of your Surface Hub in its shipping container, see [55” Microsoft Surface Hub technical information](surface-hub-technical-55.md) or [84” Microsoft Surface Hub technical information](surface-hub-technical-84.md).
-
-### Unpacking Surface Hub
-
-For unpacking information, refer to the unpacking guide included in the shipping container. You can open the unpacking instructions before you open the shipping container. These instructions can also be found here: https://www.microsoft.com/surface/support/surface-hub
-
->[!IMPORTANT]
->Retain and store all Surface Hub shipping materials—including the pallet, container, and screws—in case you need to ship Surface Hub to a new location or send it
-for repairs. For the 84” Surface Hub, retain the lifting handles.
-
-### Lifting Surface Hub
-
-The 55” Surface Hub requires two people to safely lift and mount. The 84” Surface Hub requires four people to safely lift and mount. Those assisting must be able to lift 70 pounds to waist height. Review the unpacking and mounting guide for details on lifting Surface Hub. You can find it at https://www.microsoft.com/surface/support/surface-hub.
-
-## Mounting and setup
-
-See your mounting guide at https://www.microsoft.com/surface/support/surface-hub for detailed instructions.
-
-There are three ways to mount your Surface Hub:
-
-- **Wall mount**: Lets you permanently hang Surface Hub on a conference space wall.
-- **Floor support mount**: Supports Surface Hub on the floor while it is permanently anchored to a conference space wall.
-- **Rolling stand**: Supports Surface Hub and lets you move it to other conference locations. For links to guides that provide details about each mounting method, including building requirements, see https://www.microsoft.com/surface/support/surface-hub.
-
-For specifications on available mounts for the original Surface Hub, see the following:
-
-- [Surface Hub Mounts and Stands Datasheet](https://download.microsoft.com/download/5/0/1/501F98D9-1BCC-4448-A1DB-47056CEE33B6/20160711_Surface_Hub_Mounts_and_Stands_Datasheet.pdf)
-- [Surface Hub Stand and Wall Mount Specifications](https://download.microsoft.com/download/7/A/7/7A75BD0F-5A46-4BCE-B313-A80E47AEB581/20160720_Combined_Stand_Wall_Mount_Drawings.pdf)
-
-## The Connect experience
-
-Connect lets people project their laptop, tablet, or phone to the Surface Hub screen. Connect allows wireless or wired connection types.
-
-#### Wireless connect
-
-Since wireless connect is based on Miracast, you don’t need cables or additional setup planning to use it. Your users can load Miracast on most Miracast-enabled Windows 8.1 and Windows 10 devices. Then they can project their display from their computer or phone to the Surface Hub screen.
-
-
-#### Wired connect
-
-With wired connect, a cable transmits information from computers, tablets, or phones to Surface Hub. There are three video cable options, and they all use the same USB 2.0 cable. The cable bundle can include one or all of these connection options.
-
-- DisplayPort (DisplayPort cable + USB 2.0 cable)
-- HDMI (HDMI cable + USB 2.0 cable)
-- VGA (VGA cable + 3.5mm audio cable + USB 2.0 cable)
-
-For example, to provide audio, video, and touchback capability to all three video options, your Wired Connect cable bundle must include:
-
-- A DisplayPort cable
-- An HDMI cable
-- A VGA cable
-- A USB 2.0 cable
-- A 3.5mm cable
-
-When you create your wired connect cable bundles, check the [55” Microsoft Surface Hub technical information](surface-hub-technical-55.md) or [84” Microsoft Surface Hub technical information](surface-hub-technical-84.md) sections for specific technical and physical details and port locations for each type of Surface Hub. Make the cables long enough to reach from Surface Hub to where the presenter will sit or stand.
-
-For details on Touchback and Inkback, see the user guide at https://www.microsoft.com/surface/support/surface-hub.
-
-
-
-## See also
-
-[Watch the video (opens in a pop-up media player)](https://compass.xbox.com/assets/27/aa/27aa7dd7-7cb7-40ea-9bd6-c7de0795f68c.mov?n=04.07.16_installation_video_01_site_readiness.mov)
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-ssd-replacement.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-ssd-replacement.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7896a7d634..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-ssd-replacement.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Surface Hub SSD replacement
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-description: Learn how to replace the solid state drive in a Surface Hub.
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Surface Hub SSD replacement
-
-You might need to remove the solid state drive (SSD) from your Surface Hub so that you can reimage it using the [Surface Hub Recovery Tool](surface-hub-recovery-tool.md) or because you've been sent a replacement drive. You would reimage your SSD when the operating system is no longer bootable, such as from a Windows update failure, BitLocker issues, reset failure, or hardware failure.
-
-
->[!WARNING]
->Make sure the Surface Hub is turned off at the AC switch.
-
-1. Locate the SSD compartment door on the rear, upper portion of the Surface Hub in the locations illustrated below. The door is identifiable as it doesn't have open ventilation slots.
-
- 
-
- *Surface Hub hard drive locations*
-
-2. Locate the locking tab on the hard drive compartment door. On the Surface Hub 55, the locking tab will be located on the left-hand side of the door. On the Surface Hub 84, it will be on the right-hand side as shown in the illustration.
-
- 
-
- *Locking tab on hard drive compartment door*
-
-3. Lift open the compartment door to access the hard drive.
-
- 
-
- *Lift compartment door*
-
-4. Locate the pull tab, which may be partially hidden under the rear cover. Pull on the tab to eject the hard drive from the compartment.
-
- 
-
- *Pull tab*
-
-5. Slide the replacement drive into place until you hear it click.
-
- 
-
- *Slide replacement drive into place*
-
-6. Close the compartment door.
-
-7. Apply power to the Surface Hub.
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-start-menu.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-start-menu.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 468e0d3329..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-start-menu.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,184 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Configure Surface Hub Start menu
-description: Use MDM to customize the Start menu on Surface Hub.
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 08/15/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: laurawi
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Configure Surface Hub Start menu
-
-The [January 17, 2018 update to Windows 10](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4057144) (build 15063.877) enables customized Start menus on Surface Hub devices. You apply the customized Start menu layout using mobile device management (MDM).
-
-When you apply a customized Start menu layout to Surface Hub, users cannot pin, unpin, or uninstall apps from Start.
-
-## How to apply a customized Start menu to Surface Hub
-
-The customized Start menu is defined in a Start layout XML file. You have two options for creating your Start layout XML file:
-
-- Edit the [default Surface Hub Start XML](#default)
-
- -or-
-
-- Configure the desired Start menu on a desktop (pinning only apps that are available on Surface Hub), and then [export the layout](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/configuration/customize-and-export-start-layout#export-the-start-layout).
-
->[!TIP]
->To add a tile with a web link to your desktop start menu, go to the link in Microsoft Edge, select `...` in the top right corner, and select **Pin this page to Start**. See [a Start layout that includes a Microsoft Edge link](#edge) for an example of how links will appear in the XML.
-
-To edit the default XML or the exported layout, familiarize yourself with the [Start layout XML](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/configuration/start-layout-xml-desktop). There are a few [differences between Start layout on a deskop and a Surface Hub.](#differences)
-
-When you have your Start menu defined in a Start layout XML, [create an MDM policy to apply the layout.](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/configuration/customize-windows-10-start-screens-by-using-mobile-device-management#a-href-idbkmk-domaingpodeploymentacreate-a-policy-for-your-customized-start-layout)
-
-
-## Differences between Surface Hub and desktop Start menu
-
-There are a few key differences between Start menu customization for Surface Hub and a Windows 10 desktop:
-
-- You cannot use **DesktopApplicationTile** (https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/configuration/start-layout-xml-desktop#startdesktopapplicationtile) in your Start layout XML because Windows desktop applications (Win32) are not supported on Surface Hub.
-- You cannot use the Start layout XML to configure the taskbar or the Welcome screen for Surface Hub.
-- Surface Hub supports a maximum of 6 columns (6 1x1 tiles), however, you **must** define `GroupCellWidth=8` even though Surface Hub will only display tiles in columns 0-5, not columns 6 and 7.
-- Surface Hub supports a maximum 6 rows (6 1x1 tiles)
-- `SecondaryTile`, which is used for links, will open the link in Microsoft Edge.
-
-
-
-## Example: Default Surface Hub Start layout
-
-```xml
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-
-## Example: Start layout that includes a Microsoft Edge link
-
-This example shows a link to a website and a link to a .pdf file. The secondary tile for Microsoft Edge uses a 150 x 150 pixel icon.
-
-```xml
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-```
-
->[!NOTE]
->The default value for `ForegroundText` is light; you don't need to include `ForegroundText` in your XML unless you're changing the value to dark.
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-technical-55.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-technical-55.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6abc46e411..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-technical-55.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,153 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Technical information for 55" Surface Hub
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-description: Specifications for the 55" Surface Hub
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Technical information for 55" Surface Hub
-
-## Measurements
-
-|
---- | ---
-Pricing | Starting at $8,999
-Size | 31.75” x 59.62” x 3.38” (806.4mm x 1514.3mm x 85.8mm)
-Storage/RAM | SSD 128GB with 8GB RAM
-Processor | 4th Generation Intel® Core™ i5
-Graphics | Intel® HD 4600
-Ports | **Internal PC** • (1) USB 3.0 (bottom) + (1) USB 3.0 (side access) • (2) USB 2.0 • Ethernet 1000 Base-T • DisplayPort • Video Output • 3.5mm Stereo Out • RJ11 Connector for system-level control **Alternate PC** • (2) USB 2.0 type B output • Connection for Camera, Sensors, Microphone, Speakers • (1) DisplayPort Video Input **Guest PC** • DisplayPort Video Input • HDMI Video Input • VGA Video Input • 3.5mm Stereo Input • (1) USB 2.0 type B Touchback™ Output
-Sensors | (2) Passive Infrared Presence Sensors, Ambient Light Sensors
-Speakers | (2) Front-facing stereo speakers
-Microphone | High-Performance, 4-Element Array
-Camera | (2) Wide angle HD cameras 1080p @ 30fps
-Pen | (2) Powered, active, subpixel accuracy
-Physical side buttons | Power, Input Select, Volume, Brightness
-Software | Windows 10 + Office (Word, PowerPoint, Excel)
-What’s in the box | • Surface Hub 55” • (2) Surface Hub Pens • Power Cable • Setup Guide • Start Guide • Safety and Warranty documents • Wireless All-in-One Keyboard
-Mounting features | 4X VESA standard, 400mm x 400mm plus 1150mm x 400mm pattern, 8X M6 X 1.0 threaded mounting locations
-Display height from floor | Recommended height of 55 inches (139.7 cm) to center of screen
-Product weight | Approx. 105 lb. (47.6 kg) without accessories
-Product shipping weight | Approx. 150 lb. (68 kg)
-Product dimensions HxWxD | 31.63 x 59.62 x 3.2 inches (80.34 x 151.44 x 8.14 cm)
-Product shipping dimensions HxWxD | 43 x 65 x 20 inches (109 x 165 x 51 cm)
-Product thickness | Touch surface to mounting surface: ≤ 2.4 inches (6 cm)
-Orientation | Landscape only. Display cannot be used in a portrait orientation.
-BTU | 1706 BTU/h
-Image resolution | 1920 x 1080
-Frame rate | 120Hz
-EDID preferred timing, replacement PC | 1920 x 1080, 120Hz vertical refresh
-EDID preferred timing, wired connect | 1920 x 1080, 60Hz vertical refresh
-Input voltage | (50/60Hz) 110/230v nominal, 90-265v max
-Input power, operating | 500W max
-Input power, standby | 5W nominal
-
-
-## Replacement PC connections
-
-Connector and location | Label | Description
---- | --- | ---
-Switch, bottom I/O |  | Switches the function between using internal PC or external PC.
-Display port, bottom I/O |  | Provides input for replacement PC.
-USB type B, bottom I/O |  | Provides USB connection for replacement PC to internal peripherals.
-USB type B, bottom I/O |  | Provides USB connection for integrated hub.
-
-
-## Wired connect connections
-
-Connector and location | Label | Description
---- | --- | ---
-Display port, bottom I/O |  | Provides input for wired connect PC.
-HDMI, bottom I/O |  | Provides HDMI input for wired connect PC.
-VGA, bottom I/O |  | Provides VGA input for wired connect PC.
-3.5mm, bottom I/O |  | Provides analog audio input.
-USB type B, bottom I/O |  | Provides USB connection for video ingest touchback.
-
-## Additional connections
-
-Connector and location | Label | Description
---- | --- | ---
-USB type A, side I/O |  | Provides 1 USB 3.0 connection for USB devices. Wake-on USB capable.
-USB type A, bottom I/O with blue insulator |  | Provides USB 3.0 connection.
-3.5mm, bottom I/O |  | Provides analog audio out.
-Display port, bottom I/O |  | Provides mirrored video out function to another display.
-IEC/EN60320-C13 receptacle with hard switch |  | Provides AC input and compliance with EU power requirements.
-RJ45, bottom I/O |  | Connects to Ethernet.
-RJ11, bottom I/O |  | Connects to room control systems.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Diagrams of ports and clearances
-
-***Top view of 55" Surface Hub***
-
-
-
----
-
-
-***Front view of 55" Surface Hub***
-
-
-
-
----
-
-***Bottom view of 55" Surface Hub***
-
-
-
-
----
-
-***Replacement PC ports on 55" Surface Hub***
-
-
-
-
----
-
-***Keypad on right side of 55" Surface Hub***
-
-
-
-
----
-
-***Rear view of 55" Surface Hub***
-
-
-
-
----
-
-***Clearances for 55" Surface Hub***
-
-
-
----
-
-
-***Front and bottom handholds and clearances for 55" Surface Hub***
-
-
-
-
----
-
-
-***Rear handholds and clearances for 55" Surface Hub***
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-technical-84.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-technical-84.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0ba7d45aa1..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-technical-84.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,159 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Technical information for 84" Surface Hub
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-description: Specifications for the 84" Surface Hub
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Technical information for 84" Surface Hub
-
-## Measurements
-
-|
---- | ---
-Pricing | Starting at $21,999
-Size | 46.12” x 86.7” x 4.15” (1171.5mm x 2202.9mm x 105.4mm)
-Storage/RAM | SSD 128GB with 8GB RAM
-Processor | 4th Generation Intel® Core™ i7
-Graphics | NVIDIA Quadro K2200
-Ports | **Internal PC** • (1) USB 3.0 (bottom) + (1) USB 3.0 (side access) • (4) USB 2.0 • Ethernet 1000 Base-T • DisplayPort Video Output • 3.5mm Stereo Out • RJ11 Connector for system-level control **Alternate PC** • (2) USB 2.0 type B output • connection for Camera, Sensors, Microphone, Speakers • (2) DisplayPort Video Input **Guest PC** • DisplayPort Video Input • HDMI Video Input • VGA Video Input • 3.5mm Stereo Input • (1) USB 2.0 type B Touchback™ Output
-Sensors | (2) Passive Infrared Presence Sensors, Ambient Light Sensors
-Speakers | (2) Front-facing stereo speakers
-Microphone | High-Performance, 4-Element Array
-Camera | (2) Wide angle HD cameras 1080p @ 30fps
-Pen | (2) Powered, active, subpixel accuracy
-Physical side buttons | Power, Input Select, Volume, Brightness
-Software | Windows 10 + Office (Word, PowerPoint, Excel)
-What’s in the box | • Surface Hub 84” • (2) Surface Hub Pens • Power Cable • Setup Guide • Safety and Warranty documents • Wireless All-in-One Keyboard
-Mounting features | 4X VESA standard, 1200mm x 600mm pattern, 8X M8 X 1.25 threaded mounting locations
-Display height from floor | Recommended height of 54 inches (139.7 cm) to center of screen
-Product weight | Approx. 280 lb. (127 kg.)
-Product shipping weight | Approx. 580 lb. (263 kg.)
-Product dimensions HxWxD | 46 x 86.9 x 4.1 inches (116.8 x 220.6 x 10.4 cm)
-Product shipping dimensions HxWxD | 66.14 x 88.19 x 24.4 inches (168 x 224 x 62 cm)
-Product thickness | Touch surface to mounting surface: ≤ 3.1 inches (7.8 cm)
-Orientation | Landscape only. Display cannot be used in a portrait orientation.
-BTU | 3070.8 BTU/h
-Image resolution | 3840 x 2160
-Frame rate | 120Hz
-Contrast Ratio | 1400:1
-EDID preferred timing, replacement PC | 3840 x 2140, 120Hz vertical refresh
-EDID preferred timing, wired connect | 1920 x 1080, 60Hz vertical refresh
-Input voltage | 110/230v nominal, 90-265v max
-Input power, operating | 900W max
-Input power, standby | 5W nominal, 1-10W max
-
-
-## Replacement PC connections
-
-Connector and location | Label | Description
---- | --- | ---
-Switch, bottom I/O |  | Switches the function between using internal PC or external PC.
-Display port, bottom I/O |  | Provides input for replacement PC.
-Display port, bottom I/O |  | Provides second input for replacement PC.
-USB type B, bottom I/O |  | Provides USB connection for replacement PC to internal peripherals.
-USB type B, bottom I/O |  | Provides USB connection for integrated hub.
-
-
-## Wired connect connections
-
-Connector and location | Label | Description
---- | --- | ---
-Display port, bottom I/O |  | Provides input for wired connect PC.
-HDMI, bottom I/O |  | Provides HDMI input for wired connect PC.
-VGA, bottom I/O |  | Provides VGA input for wired connect PC.
-3.5mm, bottom I/O |  | Provides analog audio input.
-USB type B, bottom I/O |  | Provides USB connection for video ingest touchback.
-
-## Additional connections
-
-Connector and location | Label | Description
---- | --- | ---
-USB type A, side I/O |  | Provides 1 USB 3.0 connection for USB devices. Wake-on USB capable.
-USB type A, bottom I/O with blue insulator |  | Provides USB 3.0 connection.
-3.5mm, bottom I/O |  | Provides analog audio out.
-Display port, bottom I/O |  | Provides mirrored video out function to another display.
-IEC/EN60320-C13 receptacle with hard switch |  | Provides AC input and compliance with EU power requirements.
-RJ45, bottom I/O |  | Connects to Ethernet.
-RJ11, bottom I/O |  | Connects to room control systems.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Diagrams of ports and clearances
-
-***Top view of 84" Surface Hub***
-
-
-
----
-
-
-***Front view of 84" Surface Hub***
-
-
-
-
----
-
-***Bottom view of 84" Surface Hub***
-
-
-
-
----
-
-***Replacement PC ports on 84" Surface Hub***
-
-
-
-
-
----
-
-***Rear view of 84" Surface Hub***
-
-
-
-
----
-
-***Clearances for 84" Surface Hub***
-
-
-
----
-
-
-***Removable lifting handles on 84” Surface Hub ***
-
-
-
-
----
-
-
-***Wall mount threads on back of 84” Surface Hub ***
-
-
-
----
-***Lifting handles in top view of 84” Surface Hub***
-
-
-
----
-***Side view of 84” Surface Hub***
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-update-history.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-update-history.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 943400d44c..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-update-history.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,528 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Surface Hub update history
-description: Surface Hub update history
-ms.assetid: d66a9392-2b14-4cb2-95c3-92db0ae2de34
-keywords:
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: v-miegge
-ms.author: v-miegge
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Surface Hub update history
-
-Windows 10 was designed to be a service, which means it automatically gets better through periodic software updates. The great news is that you usually don’t have to do anything to get the latest Windows 10 updates—they'll download and install whenever they’re available.
-
-Most Windows updates focus on performance and security improvements to keep you going 24/7.
-
-One thing we’re hearing from you is that you want to know more about what's in our Windows 10 updates, so we're providing more details on this page. In the list below, the most recent Windows update is listed first. Installing the most recent update ensures that you also get any previous updates you might have missed, including security updates. Microsoft Store apps are updated through the Microsoft Store (managed by the Surface Hub's system administrator). Details about app updates are provided on a per-app basis.
-We'll be refreshing this page as new updates are released, so stay tuned for the latest info. And thank you for helping us learn and get better with each update!
-
-Please refer to the “[Surface Hub Important Information](https://support.microsoft.com/products/surface-devices/surface-hub)” page for related topics on current and past releases that may require your attention.
-
-## Windows 10 Team Creators Update 1703
-
-
-September 24, 2019—update for Team edition based on KB4516059* (OS Build 15063.2078)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
- * Update to Surface Hub 2S Recovery Settings page to accurately reflect recovery options.
- * Update to Surface Hub 2S Welcome screen to improve device recognizability.
- * Addressed an issue with the Windows Team Edition shell background displaying incorrectly.
- * Addressed an issue with Start Menu layout persistence when configured using MDM policy.
- * Fixed an issue in Microsoft Edge that occurs when browsing some internal websites.
- * Fixed an issue in Skype for Business that occurs when presenting in full-screen mode.
-
-Please refer to the [Surface Hub Admin guide](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface-hub/) for enabling/disabling device features and services.
-*[KB4503289](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4503289)
-
-
-
-August 17, 2019—update for Team edition based on KB4512474* (OS Build 15063.2021)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
- * Ensures that Video Out on Hub 2S defaults to "Duplicate" mode.
- * Improves reliability for some Arabic language usage scenarios on Surface Hub.
-
-Please refer to the [Surface Hub Admin guide](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface-hub/) for enabling/disabling device features and services.
-*[KB4503289](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4503289)
-
-
-
-June 18, 2019—update for Team edition based on KB4503289* (OS Build 15063.1897)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* Addresses an issue with log collection for Microsoft Surface Hub 2S.
-* Addresses an issue preventing a user from signing in to a Microsoft Surface Hub device with an Azure Active Directory account. This issue occurs because a previous session did not end successfully.
-* Adds support for TLS 1.2 connections to identity providers and Exchange in device account setup scenarios.
-* Fixes to improve reliability of Hardware Diagnostic App on Hub 2S.
-* Fix to improve consistency of first-run setup experience on Hub 2S.
-
-Please refer to the [Surface Hub Admin guide](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface-hub/) for enabling/disabling device features and services.
-*[KB4503289](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4503289)
-
-
-
-May 28, 2019—update for Team edition based on KB4499162* (OS Build 15063.1835)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* Ensures that Surface Hub users aren't prompted to enter proxy credentials after the "Use device account credentials" feature has been enabled.
-* Resolves an issue where Skype connections fail periodically because audio/video isn't using the correct proxy.
-* Adds support for TLS 1.2 in Skype for Business.
-* Resolves a SIP connection failure in the Skype client when the Skype server has TLS 1.0 or TLS 1.1 disabled.
-
-Please refer to the [Surface Hub Admin guide](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface-hub/) for enabling/disabling device features and services.
-*[KB4499162](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4499162)
-
-
-
-April 25, 2019—update for Team edition based on KB4493436* (OS Build 15063.1784)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* Resolves video and audio sync issue with some USB devices that are connected to the Surface Hub.
-
-Please refer to the [Surface Hub Admin guide](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface-hub/) for enabling/disabling device features and services.
-*[KB4493436](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4493436)
-
-
-
-November 27, 2018—update for Team edition based on KB4467699* (OS Build 15063.1478)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* Addresses an issue that prevents some users from Signing-In to “My Meetings and Files.”
-
-Please refer to the [Surface Hub Admin guide](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface-hub/) for enabling/disabling device features and services.
-*[KBKB4467699](https://support.microsoft.com/help/KB4467699)
-
-
-
-October 18, 2018 —update for Team edition based on KB4462939* (OS Build 15063.1418)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* Skype for Business fixes:
- * Resolves Skype for Business connection issue when resuming from sleep
- * Resolves Skype for Business network connection issue, when device is connected to Internet
- * Resolves Skype for Business crash when searching for users from directory
-* Resolves issue where the Hub mistakenly reports “No Internet connection” in enterprise proxy environments.
-* Implemented a feature allowing customers to op-in to a new Whiteboard experience.
-
-Please refer to the [Surface Hub Admin guide](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface-hub/) for enabling/disabling device features and services.
-*[KB4462939](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4462939)
-
-
-
-August 31, 2018 —update for Team edition based on KB4343889* (OS Build 15063.1292)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* Adds support for Microsoft Teams
-* Resolves task management issue with Intune registration
-* Enables Administrators to disable Instant Messaging and Email services for the Hub
-* Additional bug fixes and reliability improvements for the Surface Hub Skype for Business App
-
-Please refer to the [Surface Hub Admin guide](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface-hub/) for enabling/disabling device features and services.
-*[KB4343889](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4343889)
-
-
-
-June 21, 2018 —update for Team edition based on KB4284830* (OS Build 15063.1182)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* Telemetry change in support of GDPR requirements in EMEA
-
-Please refer to the [Surface Hub Admin guide](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface-hub/) for enabling/disabling device features and services.
-*[KB4284830](https://support.microsoft.com/help/KB4284830)
-
-
-
-April 17, 2018 —update for Team edition based on KB4093117* (OS Build 15063.1058)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* Resolves a wired projection issue
-* Enables bulk update for certain MDM (Mobile Device Management) policies
-* Resolves phone dialer issue with international calls
-* Addresses image resolution issue when 2 Surface Hubs join the same meeting
-* Resolves OMS (Operations Management Suite) certificate handling error
-* Addresses a security issue when cleaning up at the end of a session
-* Addresses Miracast issue, when Surface Hub is specified to channels 149 through 165
- * Channels 149 through 165 will continue to be unusable in Europe, Japan or Israel due to regional governmental regulations
-
-Please refer to the [Surface Hub Admin guide](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface-hub/) for enabling/disabling device features and services.
-*[KB4093117](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4093117)
-
-
-
-February 23, 2018 —update for Team edition based on KB4077528* (OS Build 15063.907)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* Resolved an issue where MDM settings were not being correctly applied
-* Improved Cleanup process
-
-Please refer to the [Surface Hub Admin guide](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface-hub/) for enabling/disabling device features and services.
-*[KB4077528](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4077528)
-
-
-
-January 16, 2018 —update for Team edition based on KB4057144* (OS Build 15063.877)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* Adds ability to manage Start Menu tile layout via MDM
-* MDM bug fix on password rotation configuration
-
-Please refer to the [Surface Hub Admin guide](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface-hub/) for enabling/disabling device features and services.
-*[KB4057144](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4057144)
-
-
-
-December 12, 2017 —update for Team edition based on KB4053580* (OS Build 15063.786)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* Resolves camera video flashes (tearing or flickers) during Skype for Business calls
-* Resolves Notification Center SSD ID issue
-
-Please refer to the [Surface Hub Admin guide](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface-hub/) for enabling/disabling device features and services.
-*[KB4053580](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4053580)
-
-
-
-November 14, 2017 —update for Team edition based on KB4048954* (OS Build 15063.726)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* Feature update that allows customers to enable 802.1x wired network authentication using MDM policy.
-* A feature update that enables users to dynamically select an application of their choice when opening a file.
-* Fix that ensures that End Session cleanup fully removes all connections between the user’s account and the device.
-* Performance fix that improves cleanup time as well as Miracast connection time.
-* Introduces Easy Authentication utilization during ad-hock meetings.
-* Fix that ensures service components to use the same proxy that is configured across the device.
-* Reduces and more thoroughly secures the telemetry transmitted by the device, reducing bandwidth utilization.
-* Enables a feature allowing users to provide feedback to Microsoft after a meeting concludes.
-
-Please refer to the [Surface Hub Admin guide](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface-hub/) for enabling/disabling device features and services.
-*[KB4048954](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4048954)
-
-
-
-October 10, 2017 —update for Team edition based on KB4041676* (OS Build 15063.674)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* Skype for Business
- * Resolves issue that required a device reboot when resuming from sleep.
- * Fixes issue where external contacts did not resolve through Skype Online Hub account.
-* PowerPoint
- * Fixes problem where some PowerPoint presentations would not project on Hub.
-* General
- * Fix to resolve issue where USB port could not be disabled by System Administrator.
-
-*[KB4041676](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4041676)
-
-
-
-September 12, 2017 —update for Team edition based on KB4038788* (OS Build 15063.605)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* Security
- * Resolves issue with Bitlocker when device wakes from sleep.
-* General
- * Reduces frequency/amount of device health telemetry, improving system performance.
- * Fixes issue that prevented device from collecting system logs.
-
-*[KB4038788](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4038788)
-
-
-
-August 1, 2017 — update for Team edition based on KB4032188* (OS Build 15063.498)
-
-* Skype for Business
- * Resolves Skype for Business Sign-In issue, which required retry or system reboot.
- * Resolves Skype for Business meeting time being incorrectly displayed.
- * Fixes to improve Surface Hub Skype for Business reliability.
-
-*[KB4032188](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4032188)
-
-
-
-June 27, 2017 — update for Team edition based on KB4022716* (OS Build 15063.442)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* Address NVIDIA driver crashes that may necessitate sleeping 84” Surface Hub to power down, requiring a manual restart.
-* Resolved an issue where some apps fail to launch on an 84” Surface Hub.
-
-*[KB4022716](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4022716)
-
-
-
-June 13, 2017 — update for Team edition based on KB4022725* (OS Build 15063.413)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* General
- * Resolved Pen ink dropping issues with pens
- * Resolved issue causing extended time to “cleanup” meeting
-
-*[KB4022725](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4022725)
-
-
-
-May 24, 2017 — update for Team edition based on KB4021573* (OS Build 15063.328)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* General
- * Resolved issue with proxy setting retention during update issue
-
-*[KB4021573](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4021573)
-
-
-
-May 9, 2017 — update for Team edition based on KB4016871* (OS Build 15063.296)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* General
- * Addressed sleep/wake cycle issue
- * Resolved several Reset and Recovery issues
- * Addressed Update History tab issue
- * Resolved Miracast service launch issue
-* Apps
- * Fixed App package update error
-
-*[KB4016871](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4016871)
-
-
-
-Windows 10 Team Creators Update 1703 for Surface Hub — General Release notes (OS Build 15063.0)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* Evolving the large screen experience
- * Improved the meeting carousel in Welcome and Start
- * Join meetings and end the session directly from the Start menu
- * Apps can utilize more of the screen during a session
- * Simplified Skype controls
- * Improved mechanisms for providing feedback
-* Access My Personal Content*
- * Personal single sign-on from Welcome or Start
- * Join meetings and end the session directly from the Start menu
- * Access personal files through OneDrive for Business directly from Start
- * Pre-populated attendee sign-in
- * Streamlined authentication flows with “Authenticator” app**
-* Deployment & Manageability
- * Simplified OOBE experience through bulk provisioning
- * Cloud-based device recovery service
- * Enterprise client certificate support
- * Improved proxy credential support
- * Added and /improved Skype Quality of Service (QoS) configuration support
- * Added ability to set default device volume in Settings
- * Improved MDM support for Surface Hub [settings](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface-hub/remote-surface-hub-management)
-* Improved Security
- * Added ability to restrict USB drives to BitLocker only
- * Added ability to disable USB ports via MDM
- * Added ability to disable “Resume session” functionality on timeout
- * Addition of wired 802.1x support
-* Audio and Projection
- * Dolby Audio “Human Speaker” enhancements
- * Reduced “pen tap” sounds when using Pen during Skype for Business calls
- * Added support for Miracast infrastructure connections
-* Reliability and Performance fixes
- * Resolved several Reset and Recovery issues
- * Resolved Surface Hub Exchange authentication issue when utilizing client certificates
- * Improved Wi-Fi network connection and credentials stability
- * Fixed Miracast audio popping and sync issues during video playback
- * Included setting to disable auto connect behavior
-
-*Single sign-in feature requires use of Office365 and OneDrive for Business
-**Refer to Admin Guide for service requirements
-
-
-
-## Windows 10 Team Anniversary Update 1607
-
-
-March 14th, 2017 — update for Team edition based on KB4013429* (OS Build 14393.953)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* General
- * Security fix for File Explorer to prevent navigation to restricted file locations
-* Skype for Business
- * Fix to address latency during Remote Desktop based screen sharing
-
-*[KB4013429](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4013429)
-
-
-
-January 10th, 2017 — update for Team edition based on KB4000825* (OS Build 14393.693)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* Enabled selection of 106/109 Keyboard Layouts for use with physical Japanese keyboards
-
-*[KB4000825](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4000825)
-
-
-
-December 13, 2016 — update for Team edition based on KB3206632* (OS Build 14393.576)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* Resolves wired connection audio distortion issue
-
-*[KB3206632](https://support.microsoft.com/help/3206632)
-
-
-
-November 4, 2016 — update for Windows 10 Team Anniversary edition based on KB3200970* (OS Build 14393.447)
-
-This update to the Windows 10 Team Anniversary Update (version 1607) for Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* Skype for Business bug fixes to improve reliability
-
-*[KB3200970](https://support.microsoft.com/help/3200970)
-
-
-
-October 25, 2016 — update for Team edition based on KB3197954* (OS Build 14393.351)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* Enabling new Sleep feature in OS and Bios to reduce the Surface Hub’s power consumption and improve its long-term reliability
-* General
- * Resolves scenarios where the on-screen keyboard would sometimes not appear
- * Resolves Whiteboard application shift that occasionally occurs when opening scheduled meeting
- * Resolves issue that prevented Admins from changing the local administrator password, after device has been Reset
- * BIOS change resolving issue with status bar tracking during device Reset
- * UEFI update to resolve powering down issues
-
-*[KB3197954](https://support.microsoft.com/help/3197954)
-
-
-
-October 11, 2016 — update for Team edition based on KB3194496* (OS Build 14393.222)
-
-This update brings the Windows 10 Team Anniversary Update to Surface Hub and includes quality improvements and security fixes. (Your device will be running Windows 10 Version 1607 after it's installed.) Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* Skype for Business
- * Performance improvements when joining meetings, including issues when joining a meeting using federated accounts
- * Video Based Screen Sharing (VBSS) support now available on Skype for Business for Surface Hub
- * Resolved disconnection after 5 minutes of idle time issue
- * Resolved Skype Hub-to-Hub screen sharing failure
- * Improvements to Skype video, including:
- * Loss of video during meeting with multiple video presenters
- * Video cropping during calls
- * Outgoing call video not displaying for other participants
- * Addressed issue with UPN sign in error
- * Addressed issue with dial pad during use of Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) calls
-* Whiteboard
- * User can now save and recall Whiteboard sessions using OneDrive online service (via Share functionality)
- * Improved launching Whiteboard when removing pen from dock
-* Apps
- * Pre-installed OneDrive app, for access to your personal and work files
- * Pre-installed Photos app, to view photos and video
- * Pre-installed PowerBI app, to view dashboards
- * The Office apps – Word, Excel, PowerPoint – are all ink-enabled
- * Edge on Surface Hub now supports Flash-based websites
-* General
- * Enabled Audio Device Selection (for Surface Hubs attached using external audio devices)
- * Enabled support for HDCP on DisplayPort output connector
- * System UI changes to settings for usability optimization (refer to [User and Admin Guides](https://www.microsoft.com/surface/support/surface-hub) for additional details)
- * Bug fixes and performance optimizations to speed up the Azure Active Directory sign-in flow
- * Significantly improved time needed to reset and restore Surface Hub
- * Windows Defender UI has been added within settings
- * Improved UX touch to start
- * Enabled support for greater than 1080p wireless projection via Miracast, on supported devices
- * Resolved “There’s no internet connection” and “Appointments may be out of date” false notification states from launch
- * Improved reliability of on-screen keyboard
- * Additional support for creating Surface Hub provisioning packages using Windows Imaging & Configuration Designer (ICD) and improved Surface Hub monitoring solution on Operations Management Suite (OMS)
-
-*[KB3194496](https://support.microsoft.com/help/3194496)
-
-
-## Updates for Windows 10 Version 1511
-
-
-November 4, 2016 — update for Windows 10 Team (version 1511) on KB3198586* (OS Build 10586.679)
-
-This update to the Windows 10 Team edition (version 1511) to Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes that are outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history). There are no Surface Hub specific items in this update.
-
-*[KB3198586](https://support.microsoft.com/help/3198586)
-
-
-
-July 12, 2016 — KB3172985* (OS Build 10586.494)
-
-This update includes quality improvements and security fixes. No new operating system features are being introduced in this update. Key changes specific to the Surface Hub (those not already included in the [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history)), include:
-
-* Fixed issue that caused Windows system crashes
-* Fixed issue that caused repeated Edge crashes
-* Fixed issue causing pre-shutdown service crashes
-* Fixed issue where some app data wasn’t properly removed after a session
-* Updated Broadcom NFC driver to improve NFC performance
-* Updated Marvell Wi-Fi driver to improve Miracast performance
-* Updated Nvidia driver to fix a display bug in which 84" Surface Hub devices show dim or fuzzy content
-* Numerous Skype for Business issues fixed, including:
- * Issue that caused Skype for Business to disconnect during meetings
- * Issue in which users were unable to join meetings when the meeting organizer was on a federated configuration
- * Enabling Skype for Business application sharing
- * Issue that caused Skype application crashes
-* Added a prompt in “Settings” to inform users that the OS can become corrupted if device reset is interrupted before completion
-
-*[KB3172985](https://support.microsoft.com/help/3172985)
-
-
-
-June 14, 2016 — KB3163018* (OS Build 10586.420)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. No new operating system features are being introduced in this update. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* Constrained release. Refer to July 12, 2016 — [KB3172985](https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/help/3172985) (OS Build 10586.494) for Surface Hub specific package details
-
-*[KB3163018](https://support.microsoft.com/help/3163018)
-
-
-
-May 10, 2016 — KB3156421* (OS Build 10586.318)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. No new operating system features are being introduced in this update. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* Fixed issue that prevented certain Store apps (OneDrive) from installing
-* Fixed issue that caused touch input to stop responding in applications
-
-*[KB3156421](https://support.microsoft.com/help/3156421)
-
-
-
-April 12, 2016 — KB3147458* (OS Build 10586.218)
-
-This update to the Surface Hub includes quality improvements and security fixes. No new operating system features are being introduced in this update. Key updates to Surface Hub, not already outlined in [Windows 10 Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4018124/windows-10-update-history), include:
-
-* Fixed issue where volume level wasn’t properly reset between sessions
-
-*[KB3147458](https://support.microsoft.com/help/3147458)
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-* [Windows 10 feature roadmap](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=785967)
-* [Windows 10 release information](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=724328)
-* [Windows 10 November update: FAQ](https://windows.microsoft.com/windows-10/windows-update-faq)
-* [Microsoft Surface update history](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=724327)
-* [Microsoft Lumia update history](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=785968)
-* [Get Windows 10](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=616447)
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-wifi-direct.md b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-wifi-direct.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8d94858bfa..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub-wifi-direct.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,122 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How Surface Hub addresses Wi-Fi Direct security issues
-description: Guidance about Wi-Fi Direct security risks.
-keywords: change history
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 11/27/2019
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# How Surface Hub addresses Wi-Fi Direct security issues
-
-Microsoft Surface Hub is an all-in-one productivity device that enables teams to better brainstorm, collaborate, and share ideas. Surface Hub relies on Miracast for wireless projection through Wi-Fi Direct.
-
-This article describes Wi-Fi Direct security vulnerabilities, how Surface Hub addresses those risks, and how administrators can configure Surface Hub for the highest level of security. This information will help customers who have high security requirements protect their Surface Hub-connected networks and data in transit.
-
-The intended audiences for this article are IT and network administrators who want to deploy Surface Hub in their corporate environment with optimal security settings.
-
-## Overview
-
-Security for Surface Hub depends extensively on Wi-Fi Direct/Miracast and the associated 802.11, Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA2), and Wireless Protected Setup (WPS) standards. Because the device only supports WPS (as opposed to WPA2 Pre-Shared Key [PSK] or WPA2 Enterprise), the issues often associated with 802.11 encryption are simplified.
-
-Surface Hub operates on par with the field of Miracast receivers. So, it's vulnerable to a similar set of exploits as all WPS-based wireless network devices. But the Surface Hub implementation of WPS has extra precautions built in. Also, its internal architecture helps prevent an attacker who has compromised the Wi-Fi Direct/Miracast layer from moving past the network interface onto other attack surfaces and connected enterprise networks.
-
-## Wi-Fi Direct background
-
-Miracast is part of the Wi-Fi Display standard, which is supported by the Wi-Fi Direct protocol. These standards are supported in modern mobile devices for screen sharing and collaboration.
-
-Wi-Fi Direct or Wi-Fi "peer to peer" (P2P) is a standard from the Wi-Fi Alliance for "Ad-Hoc" networks. Supported devices can communicate directly and create groups of networks without a conventional Wi-Fi access point or Internet connection.
-
-Security for Wi-Fi Direct is provided by WPA2 under the WPS standard. The authentication mechanism for devices can be a numerical pin (WPS-PIN), a physical or virtual push button (WPS-PBC), or an out-of-band message such as near field communication (WPS-OOO). Surface Hub supports both the PIN method and the push-button method, which is the default.
-
-In Wi-Fi Direct, groups are created as one of the following types:
-- *Persistent*, in which automatic reconnection can occur by using stored key material
-- *Temporary*, in which devices can't re-authenticate without user action
-
-Wi-Fi Direct groups determine a *group owner* (GO) through a negotiation protocol, which mimics the "station" or "access point" functionality for the established Wi-Fi Direct group. The Wi-Fi Direct GO provides authentication (via an "internal registrar") and facilitates upstream network connections. For Surface Hub, this GO negotiation doesn't occur. The network only operates in "autonomous" mode, and Surface Hub is always the group owner. Finally, Surface Hub itself doesn't join other Wi-Fi Direct networks as a client.
-
-## How Surface Hub addresses Wi-Fi Direct vulnerabilities
-
-**Vulnerabilities and attacks in the Wi-Fi Direct invitation, broadcast, and discovery process:** Wi-Fi Direct/Miracast attacks may target weaknesses in the group establishment, peer discovery, device broadcast, or invitation processes.
-
-|Wi-Fi Direct vulnerability | Surface Hub mitigation |
-| --- | --- |
-| The discovery process may remain active for an extended period of time, which could allow invitations and connections to be established without the approval of the device owner. | Surface Hub only operates as the group owner, which doesn't perform the client discovery or GO negotiation processes. You can fully disable wireless projection to turn off broadcast. |
-| Invitation and discovery through PBC allows an unauthenticated attacker to perform repeated connection attempts, or unauthenticated connections are automatically accepted. | By requiring WPS PIN security, administrators can reduce the potential for such unauthorized connections or "invitation bombs," in which invitations are repeatedly sent until a user mistakenly accepts one. |
-
-**Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) push button connect (PBC) vs PIN entry:** Public weaknesses have been demonstrated in WPS-PIN method design and implementation. WPS-PBC has other vulnerabilities that could allow active attacks against a protocol that's designed for one-time use.
-
-| Wi-Fi Direct vulnerability | Surface Hub mitigation |
-| --- | --- |
-| WPS-PBC is vulnerable to active attackers. The WPS specification states: "The PBC method has zero bits of entropy and only protects against passive eavesdropping attacks. PBC protects against eavesdropping attacks and takes measures to prevent a device from joining a network that was not selected by the device owner. The absence of authentication, however, means that PBC does not protect against active attack." Attackers can use selective wireless jamming or other denial-of-service techniques to trigger an unintended Wi-Fi Direct GO or connection. Also, an active attacker who merely has physical proximity can repeatedly tear down any Wi-Fi Direct group and attempt the attack until it succeeds. | Enable WPS-PIN security in Surface Hub configuration. The Wi-Fi WPS specification states: "The PBC method should only be used if no PIN-capable registrar is available and the WLAN user is willing to accept the risks associated with PBC." |
-| WPS-PIN implementations can be subject to brute-force attacks that target a vulnerability in the WPS standard. The design of split PIN verification led to multiple implementation vulnerabilities over the past several years across a range of Wi-Fi hardware manufacturers. In 2011, researchers Stefan Viehböck and Craig Heffner released information about this vulnerability and tools such as "Reaver" as a proof of concept. | The Microsoft implementation of WPS in Surface Hub changes the PIN every 30 seconds. To crack the PIN, an attacker must complete the entire exploit in less than 30 seconds. Given the current state of tools and research in this area, a brute-force PIN-cracking attack through WPS is unlikely to succeed. |
-| WPS-PIN can be cracked by an offline attack because of weak initial key (E-S1,E S2) entropy. In 2014, Dominique Bongard described a "Pixie Dust" attack where poor initial randomness for the pseudo random number generator (PRNG) in the wireless device allowed an offline brute-force attack. | The Microsoft implementation of WPS in Surface Hub is not susceptible to this offline PIN brute-force attack. The WPS-PIN is randomized for each connection. |
-
-**Unintended exposure of network services:** Network daemons that are intended for Ethernet or WLAN services may be accidentally exposed because of misconfiguration (such as binding to "all"/0.0.0.0 interfaces). Other possible causes include a poorly configured device firewall or missing firewall rules.
-
-| Wi-Fi Direct vulnerability | Surface Hub mitigation |
-| --- | --- |
-| Misconfiguration binds a vulnerable or unauthenticated network service to "all" interfaces, which includes the Wi-Fi Direct interface. This can expose services that shouldn't be accessible to Wi-Fi Direct clients, which may be weakly or automatically authenticated. | In Surface Hub, the default firewall rules only permit the required TCP and UDP network ports and by default deny all inbound connections. Configure strong authentication by enabling the WPS-PIN mode.|
-
-**Bridging Wi-Fi Direct and other wired or wireless networks:** Network bridging between WLAN or Ethernet networks is a violation of the Wi-Fi Direct specification. Such a bridge or misconfiguration may effectively lower or remove wireless access controls for the internal corporate network.
-
-| Wi-Fi Direct vulnerability | Surface Hub mitigation |
-| --- | --- |
-| Wi-Fi Direct devices could allow unauthenticated or poorly authenticated access to bridged network connections. This might allow Wi-Fi Direct networks to route traffic to internal Ethernet LAN or other infrastructure or to enterprise WLAN networks in violation of existing IT security protocols. | Surface Hub can't be configured to bridge wireless interfaces or allow routing between disparate networks. The default firewall rules add defense in depth to any such routing or bridge connections. |
-
-**The use of Wi-Fi Direct "legacy" mode:** Exposure to unintended networks or devices may occur when you operate in "legacy" mode. Device spoofing or unintended connections could occur if WPS-PIN is not enabled.
-
-| Wi-Fi Direct vulnerability | Surface Hub mitigation |
-| --- | --- |
-| By supporting both Wi-Fi Direct and 802.11 infrastructure clients, the system is operating in a "legacy" support mode. This may expose the connection-setup phase indefinitely, allowing groups to be joined or devices invited to connect well after their intended setup phase terminates. | Surface Hub doesn't support Wi-Fi Direct legacy clients. Only Wi-Fi Direct connections can be made to Surface Hub even when WPS-PIN mode is enabled. |
-
-**Wi-Fi Direct GO negotiation during connection setup:** The group owner in Wi-Fi Direct is analogous to the "access point" in a conventional 802.11 wireless network. The negotiation can be gamed by a malicious device.
-
-|Wi-Fi Direct vulnerability | Surface Hub mitigation |
-| --- | --- |
-| If groups are dynamically established or the Wi-Fi Direct device can be made to join new groups, the group owner negotiation can be won by a malicious device that always specifies the maximum group owner "intent" value of 15. (But the connection fails if the device is configured to always be a group owner.) | Surface Hub takes advantage of Wi-Fi Direct "Autonomous mode," which skips the GO negotiation phase of connection setup. And Surface Hub is always the group owner. |
-
-**Unintended or malicious Wi-Fi deauthentication:** Wi-Fi deauthentication is an old attack in which a local attacker can expedite information leaks in the connection-setup process, trigger new four-way handshakes, target Wi-Fi Direct WPS-PBC for active attacks, or create denial-of-service attacks.
-
-| Wi-Fi Direct vulnerability | Surface Hub mitigation |
-| --- | --- |
-| Deauthentication packets can be sent by an unauthenticated attacker to cause the station to re-authenticate then to sniff the resulting handshake. Cryptographic or brute-force attacks can be attempted on the resulting handshake. Mitigation for these attack includes enforcing length and complexity policies for pre-shared keys, configuring the access point (if applicable) to detect malicious levels of deauthentication packets, and using WPS to automatically generate strong keys. In PBC mode, the user interacts with a physical or virtual button to allow arbitrary device association. This process should happen only at setup, within a short window. After the button is automatically "pushed," the device will accept any station that associates via a canonical PIN value (all zeros). Deauthentication can force a repeated setup process. | Surface Hub uses WPS in PIN or PBC mode. No PSK configuration is permitted. This method helps enforce generation of strong keys. It's best to enable WPS-PIN security for Surface Hub. |
-| In addition to denial-of-service attacks, deauthentication packets can be used to trigger a reconnect that re-opens the window of opportunity for active attacks against WPS-PBC. | Enable WPS-PIN security in the Surface Hub configuration. |
-
-**Basic wireless information disclosure:** Wireless networks, 802.11 or otherwise, are inherently at risk of information disclosure. Although this information is mostly connection or device metadata, this problem remains a known risk for any 802.11 network administrator. Wi-Fi Direct with device authentication via WPS-PIN effectively reveals the same information as a PSK or Enterprise 802.11 network.
-
-| Wi-Fi Direct vulnerability | Surface Hub mitigation |
-| --- | --- |
-| During broadcast, connection setup, or even normal operation of already-encrypted connections, basic information about devices and packet sizes is wirelessly transmitted. At a basic level, a local attacker who's within wireless range can examine the relevant 802.11 information elements to determine the names of wireless devices, the MAC addresses of communicating equipment, and possibly other details, such as the version of the wireless stack, packet sizes, or the configured access point or group owner options. | The Wi-Fi Direct network that Surface Hub uses can't be further protected from metadata leaks, just like for 802.11 Enterprise or PSK wireless networks. Physical security and removal of potential threats from wireless proximity can help reduce potential information leaks. |
-
-**Wireless evil twin or spoofing attacks:** Spoofing the wireless name is a simple, well-known exploit a local attacker can use to lure unsuspecting or mistaken users to connect.
-
-| Wi-Fi Direct vulnerability | Surface Hub mitigation |
-| --- | --- |
-| By spoofing or cloning the wireless name or "SSID" of the target network, an attacker may trick the user into connecting to a fake, malicious network. By supporting unauthenticated, auto-join Miracast, an attacker could capture the intended display materials or launch network attacks on the connecting device. | While there are no specific protections against joining a spoofed Surface Hub, this vulnerability is partially mitigated in two ways. First, any potential attack must be physically within Wi-Fi range. Second, this attack is only possible during the first connection. Subsequent connections use a persistent Wi-Fi Direct group, and Windows will remember and prioritize this prior connection during future Hub use. (Note: Spoofing the MAC address, Wi-Fi channel, and SSID simultaneously was not considered for this report and may result in inconsistent Wi-Fi behavior.) Overall, this weakness is a fundamental problem for any 802.11 wireless network that lacks Enterprise WPA2 protocols such as EAP-TLS or EAP-PWD, which Wi-Fi Direct doesn't support. |
-
-## Surface Hub hardening guidelines
-
-Surface Hub is designed to facilitate collaboration and allow users to start or join meetings quickly and efficiently. The default Wi-Fi Direct settings for Surface Hub are optimized for this scenario.
-
-For additional wireless interface security, Surface Hub users should enable the WPS-PIN security setting. This setting disables WPS-PBC mode and offers client authentication. It provides the strongest level of protection by preventing unauthorized connection to Surface Hub.
-
-If you still have concerns about authentication and authorization for Surface Hub, we recommend that you connect the device to a separate network. You could use Wi-Fi (such as a "guest" Wi-Fi network) or a separate Ethernet network, preferably an entirely different physical network. But a VLAN can also provide added security. Of course, this approach may preclude connections to internal network resources or services and may require additional network configuration to regain access.
-
-Also recommended:
-- [Install regular system updates](manage-windows-updates-for-surface-hub.md)
-- Update the Miracast settings to disable auto-present mode
-
-## Learn more
-
-- [Wi-Fi Direct specifications](http://www.wi-fi.org/discover-wi-fi/wi-fi-direct)
-- [Wireless Protected Setup (WPS) specification](http://www.wi-fi.org/discover-wi-fi/wi-fi-protected-setup)
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub.yml b/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub.yml
deleted file mode 100644
index dac70e8f37..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surface-hub.yml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
-### YamlMime:YamlDocument
-
-documentType: LandingData
-title: Surface Hub
-metadata:
- document_id:
- title: Surface Hub
- description: Find tools and resources to help you install, set up, and manage a Surface Hub in your organization.
- keywords: Surface Hub, Windows 10
- ms.localizationpriority: medium
- author: lizap
- ms.author: elizapo
- manager: dougkim
- ms.topic: article
- ms.devlang: na
-
-sections:
-- items:
- - type: markdown
- text: "
- Find tools and resources to help you install, set up, and manage a Surface Hub in your organization.
- "
-- title: Explore
-- items:
- - type: markdown
- text: "
- Discover how this all-in-one productivity device enables teams to better brainstorm, collaborate, and share ideas.
-
-
- "
-- title: Plan
-- items:
- - type: markdown
- text: "
- Prepare to deploy Surface Hub in your organization. Explore site readiness, assembly, configuration, and Exchange and ActiveSync policies.
-
- "
-- title: Deploy
-- items:
- - type: markdown
- text: "
- Get information for setup, app management and installation, and network management of your Surface Hub.
-
**Surface IT Pro Blog** Get insight into new Surface products plus tips and tricks for IT professionals. Learn more
**Surface on Microsoft Mechanics** View technical demos and walkthroughs of Surface devices, features, and functionality. Get started
**Follow us on Twitter** Keep up with the latest news and see the latest product demonstrations. Visit Twitter
-
- "
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surfacehub-miracast-not-supported-europe-japan-israel.md b/devices/surface-hub/surfacehub-miracast-not-supported-europe-japan-israel.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7a30ff1e37..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surfacehub-miracast-not-supported-europe-japan-israel.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Surface Hub Miracast channels 149-165 not supported in Europe, Japan, Israel
-description: Surface Hub Miracast channels 149-165 not supported in Europe, Japan, Israel
-ms.assetid: 8af3a832-0537-403b-823b-12eaa7a1af1f
-keywords:
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: v-miegge
-ms.author: v-miegge
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Summary
-
-In compliance with regional governmental regulations, all 5-GHz wireless devices in Europe, Japan, and Israel do not support the U-NII-3 band. In Surface Hub, the channels that are associated with U-NII-3 are 149 through 165. This includes Miracast connection on these channels. Therefore, Surface Hubs that are used in Europe, Japan, and Israel can't use channels 149 through 165 for Miracast connection.
-
-## More Information
-
-For more information see the [U-NII](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/U-NII) topic on Wikipedia.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Microsoft provides third-party contact information to help you find additional information about this topic. This information may change without notice. Microsoft does not guarantee the accuracy of third-party information.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/surfacehub-whats-new-1703.md b/devices/surface-hub/surfacehub-whats-new-1703.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0626c4a0d7..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/surfacehub-whats-new-1703.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,71 +0,0 @@
----
-title: What's new in Windows 10, version 1703 for Surface Hub
-description: Windows 10, version 1703 (Creators Update) brings new features to Microsoft Surface Hub.
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 01/18/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# What's new in Windows 10, version 1703 for Microsoft Surface Hub?
-
-Watch Surface Hub engineer Jordan Marchese present updates to Microsoft Surface Hub with Windows 10, version 1703 (Creators Update).
-
-
-
-Windows 10, version 1703 (also called the Creators Update), introduces the following changes for Microsoft Surface Hub.
-
-## New settings
-
-Settings have been added to mobile device management (MDM) and configuration service providers (CSPs) to expand the Surface Hub management capabilities. [New settings include](manage-settings-with-mdm-for-surface-hub.md):
-
-- InBoxApps/SkypeForBusiness/DomainName
-- InBoxApps/Connect/AutoLaunch
-- Properties/DefaultVolume
-- Properties/ScreenTimeout
-- Properties/SessionTimeout
-- Properties/SleepTimeout
-- Properties/AllowSessionResume
-- Properties/AllowAutoProxyAuth
-- Properties/DisableSigninSuggestions
-- Properties/DoNotShowMyMeetingsAndFiles
-- System/AllowStorageCard
-
-Plus settings based on the new [NetworkQoSPolicy CSP](https://msdn.microsoft.com/windows/hardware/commercialize/customize/mdm/networkqospolicy-csp) and [NetworkProxy CSP](https://msdn.microsoft.com/windows/hardware/commercialize/customize/mdm/networkproxy-csp).
-
-
-## Provisioning wizard
-
-An easy-to-use wizard helps you quickly create provisioning packages that you can apply to multiple Surface Hub devices, and includes bulk join to Azure Active Directory. [Learn how to create a provisioning package for Surface Hub.](provisioning-packages-for-certificates-surface-hub.md)
-
-
-
-## Miracast on your existing wireless network or LAN
-
-Microsoft has extended the ability to [send a Miracast stream over a local network](miracast-over-infrastructure.md) rather than over a direct wireless link.
-
-## Cloud recovery
-
-When you reset a Surface Hub device, you now have the ability to download and install a factory build of the operating system from the cloud. [Learn more about cloud recovery.](device-reset-surface-hub.md#cloud-recovery)
-
->[!NOTE]
->Cloud recovery doesn't work if you use proxy servers.
-
-
-
-## End session
-
-**I'm done** is now **End session**. [Learn how to use End session.](i-am-done-finishing-your-surface-hub-meeting.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/troubleshoot-surface-hub.md b/devices/surface-hub/troubleshoot-surface-hub.md
deleted file mode 100644
index af6809a477..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/troubleshoot-surface-hub.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,616 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Troubleshoot Microsoft Surface Hub
-description: Troubleshoot common problems, including setup issues, Exchange ActiveSync errors.
-ms.assetid: CF58F74D-8077-48C3-981E-FCFDCA34B34A
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: Troubleshoot common problems, setup issues, Exchange ActiveSync errors
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 03/16/2018
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Troubleshoot Microsoft Surface Hub
-
-
-Troubleshoot common problems, including setup issues, Exchange ActiveSync errors.
-
-The [Surface Hub Hardware Diagnostic tool](https://www.microsoft.com/store/p/surface-hub-hardware-diagnostic/9nblggh51f2g?rtc=1&activetab=pivot%3aoverviewtab) contains interactive tests which allow you to confirm essential functionality of your Hub is working as expected. In addition to testing hardware, the diagnostic can test the resource account to verify that it is configured properly for your environment. If problems are encountered, results can be saved and shared with the Surface Hub Support Team. For usage information, see [Using the Surface Hub Hardware Diagnostic Tool to test a device account](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4077574/using-the-surface-hub-hardware-diagnostic-tool-to-test-a-device-accoun).
-
-Common issues are listed in the following table, along with causes and possible fixes. The [Setup troubleshooting](#setup-troubleshooting) section contains a listing of on-device problems, along with several types of issues that may be encountered during the first-run experience. The [Exchange ActiveSync errors](#exchange-activesync-errors) section lists common errors the device may encounter when trying to synchronize with an Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync server.
-
-
-
-
-## Setup troubleshooting
-
-
-This section lists causes, and possible fixes to help troubleshoot issues you might find when you set up your Microsoft Surface Hub.
-
-### On-device
-
-Possible fixes for issues on the Surface Hub after you've completed the first-run program.
-
-
-
-
Issue
-
Causes
-
Possible fixes
-
-
-
-
Not receiving automatic accept/decline messages.
-
-
-
The device account isn't configured to automatically accept/decline messages.
-
-
-
Use PowerShell cmdlet Set-CalendarProcessing $upn -AutomateProcessing AutoAccept.
-
-
-
-
-
The device account isn't configured to process external meeting requests.
-
-
-
Use PowerShell cmdlet Set-CalendarProcessing $upn -ProcessExternalMeetingMessages $true.
-
-
-
-
-
Calendar is not showing on the Welcome screen, or message "Appointments of date (no account provisioned)" is being displayed.
-
-
-
No device account is set up on this Surface Hub.
-
-
-
Provision a device account through Settings.
-
-
-
-
-
Calendar is not showing on the Welcome screen or message "Appointments of date (overprovisioned)" is being displayed.
-
-
-
The device account is provisioned on too many devices.
-
-
-
Remove the device account from other devices that it's provisioned to. This can be done using the Exchange admin portal.
-
-
-
-
-
Calendar is not showing on the Welcome screen or message "Appointments of date (invalid credentials)" is being displayed.
-
-
-
The device account's password has expired and is no longer valid.
Calendar is not showing on the Welcome screen or message "Appointments of date (account policy)" is being displayed.
-
-
-
The device account is using an invalid ActiveSync policy.
-
-
-
Make sure the device account has an ActiveSync policy where PasswordEnabled == False.
-
-
-
-
-
Calendar is not showing on the Welcome screen or message "Appointments may be out of date" is being displayed.
-
-
-
Exchange is not enabled.
-
-
Enable the device account for Exchange services through Settings. You need to make sure you have the right set of ActiveSync policies and have also installed any necessary certificates for Exchange services to work.
-
-
-
-
Can't log in to Skype for Business.
-
-
-
The device account does not have a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) address property.
-
-
-
The account does not have a SIP address property and its User Principal Name (UPN) does not match the actual SIP address. The account must have its SIP address set, or the SIP address should be added using the Settings app.
-
-
-
-
-
Can't log in to Skype for Business.
-
-
-
The device account requires a certificate to authenticate into Skype for Business.
-
-
-
Install the appropriate certificate using provisioning packages.
-
-
-
-
-
-### First run
-
-Possible fixes for issues with Surface Hub first-run program.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Issue
-
Causes
-
Possible fixes
-
-
-
-
-
Cannot find account when asked for domain and user name.
-
Domain needs to be the fully qualified domain name (FQDN).
-
The FQDN should be provided in the domain field.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Device account page, issues for new account settings
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Issue
-
Causes
-
Possible fixes
-
-
-
-
-
Unable to find the provided account in Azure AD.
-
The provided account's User Principal Name (UPN) has a tenant that can't be reached in Azure AD.
-
Make sure that you have a working Internet connection, and that the device can reach Microsoft Online Services. Make sure the account credentials are entered correctly.
-
-
-
Unable to reach the specified directory.
-
The provided account domain specifies a domain that can't be reached.
-
Make sure that you have a working network connection, and that the device can reach the domain controller. Make sure the account credentials are entered correctly. You can also try using the FQDN instead.
-
-
-
Can't auto-discover Exchange server.
-
The Exchange server isn't configured for auto-discovery.
-
Enable auto-discovery of the Exchange server for the device account, or enter the account's Exchange server address manually.
-
-
-
Could not discover the SIP address after entering the account credentials.
-
There was no SIP address entry in Active Directory or Azure AD.
-
Make sure the account is enabled with Skype for Business and has a SIP address. If not, you can enter the SIP address manually into the text box.
Account could not authenticate with the specified credentials.
-
-
-
The account is not enabled as a user in Active Directory (AD), needs a password to authenticate, or the password is incorrect.
-
-
-
None
-
-
-
Make sure the credentials are entered correctly. Enable the account as a user in AD and add a password, or set the RoomMailboxPassword
.
-
-
-
-
Error 0x800C0019 is displayed when providing an Exchange server.
-
-
-
The device account requires a certificate to authenticate.
-
-
-
0x800C0019
-
-
-
Install the appropriate certificate using provisioning packages.
-
-
-
-
-
Device account credentials are not valid for the provided Exchange server.
-
-
-
The provided Exchange server is not where the device account's mailbox is hosted.
-
-
-
None
-
-
-
Make sure you are providing the correct Exchange mail server for the device account.
-
-
-
-
-
HTTP timeout while trying to reach Exchange server.
-
-
-
-
0x80072EE2
-
-
-
-
-
-
Couldn't find the provided Exchange server.
-
-
-
The Exchange server provided could not be found.
-
-
-
None
-
-
-
Ensure that you have a working network or Internet connection, and that the Exchange server you provided is correct.
-
-
-
-
-
http not supported.
-
-
-
An Exchange server with http:// instead of https:// was provided.
-
-
-
None
-
-
-
Use an Exchange server that uses https.
-
-
-
-
-
People land on the page titled "There's a problem with this account" regarding ActiveSync.
-
-
-
-
-
The ActiveSync policy PasswordEnabled is set to True (or 1).
-
-
-
None
-
-
-
Create a new ActiveSync policy where PasswordEnabled is set to False (or 0), and then apply that policy to the account.
-
-
-
-
-
The Surface Hub doesn't have a connection to Exchange.
-
-
-
None
-
-
-
Make sure that you have a working network or Internet connection.
-
-
-
-
-
Exchange returns a status code indicating an error.
-
-
-
None
-
-
-
Make sure that you have a working network or Internet connection.
-
-
-
-
-
-### First run, Domain join page issues
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Issue
-
Causes
-
Possible fixes
-
-
-
-
-
When trying to join a domain, an error shows that the account couldn't authenticate using the specified credentials.
-
The credentials provided are not capable of joining the specified domain.
-
Enter correct credentials for an account that exists in the specified domain.
-
-
-
When specifying a group from a domain, an error shows that the group couldn't be found on the domain.
-
The group may have been removed or no longer exists.
-
Verify that the group exists within the domain.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### First run, Exchange server page
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Issue
-
Causes
-
Possible fixes
-
-
-
-
-
People land on this page and are asked for the Exchange server address.
-
The Exchange server isn't configured for auto-discovery.
-
Enable auto-discovery of the Exchange server for the device account, or enter the account's Exchange server address manually.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### First run, On-device issues
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Issue
-
Causes
-
Error codes
-
Possible fixes
-
-
-
-
-
Can't sync mail/calendar.
-
The account has not allowed the Surface Hub as an allowed device.
-
0x86000C1C
-
Add the Surface Hub device ID to the whitelist by setting the ActiveSyncAllowedDeviceIds property for the mailbox.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Exchange ActiveSync errors
-
-
-This section lists status codes, mapping, user messages, and actions an admin can take to solve Exchange ActiveSync errors.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Hex Code
-
Mapping
-
User-Friendly Message
-
Action admin should take
-
-
-
-
-
0x85010002
-
E_HTTP_DENIED
-
The password must be updated.
-
Update the password.
-
-
-
0x80072EFD
-
WININET_E_CANNOT_CONNECT
-
Can’t connect to the server right now. Wait a while and try again, or check the account settings.
-
Verify that the server name is correct and reachable. Verify that the device is connected to the network.
The account is configured with policies not compatible with Surface Hub.
-
Disable the PasswordEnabled policy for this account.
-
We have a bug were we may surface policy errors if the account doesn’t receive any server notifications within the policy refresh interval.
-
-
-
0x86000C4C
-
E_NEXUS_STATUS_MAXIMUMDEVICESREACHED
-
The account has too many device partnerships.
-
Delete one or more partnerships on the server.
-
-
-
0x86000C0A
-
E_NEXUS_STATUS_SERVERERROR_RETRYLATER
-
Can’t connect to the server right now.
-
Wait until the server comes back online. If the issue persists, re-provision the account.
-
-
-
0x85050003
-
E_CREDENTIALS_EXPIRED (Credentials have expired and need to be updated)
-
The password must be updated.
-
Update the password.
-
-
-
0x8505000D
-
E_AIRSYNC_RESET_RETRY
-
Can’t connect to the server right now. Wait a while or check the account’s settings.
-
This is normally a transient error but if the issue persists check the number of devices associated with the account and delete some of them if the number is large.
-
-
-
0x86000C16
-
E_NEXUS_STATUS_USER_HASNOMAILBOX
-
The mailbox was migrated to a different server.
-
You should never see this error. If the issue persists, re-provision the account.
-
-
-
0x85010004
-
E_HTTP_FORBIDDEN
-
Can’t connect to the server right now. Wait a while and try again, or check the account’s settings.
-
Verify the server name to make sure it is correct. If the account is using cert based authentication make sure the certificate is still valid and update it if not.
-
-
-
0x85030028
-
E_ACTIVESYNC_PASSWORD_OR_GETCERT
-
The account’s password or client certificate are missing or invalid.
-
Update the password and/or deploy the client certificate.
-
-
-
0x86000C2A
-
E_NEXUS_STATUS_DEVICE_POLICYREFRESH
-
The account is configured with policies not compatible with Surface Hub.
-
Disable the PasswordEnabled policy for this account.
-
-
-
0x85050002
-
E_CREDENTIALS_UNAVAILABLE
-
The password must be updated.
-
Update the password.
-
-
-
0x80072EE2
-
WININET_E_TIMEOUT
-
The network doesn’t support the minimum idle timeout required to receive server notification, or the server is offline.
-
Verify that the server is running. Verify the NAT settings.
-
-
-
0x85002004
-
E_FAIL_ABORT
-
This error is used to interrupt the hanging sync, and will not be exposed to users. It will be shown in the diagnostic data if you force an interactive sync, delete the account, or update its settings.
-
Nothing.
-
-
-
0x85010017
-
E_HTTP_SERVICE_UNAVAIL
-
Can’t connect to the server right now. Wait a while or check the account’s settings.
-
Verify the server name to make sure it is correct. Wait until the server comes back online. If the issue persists, re-provision the account.
-
-
-
0x86000C0D
-
E_NEXUS_STATUS_MAILBOX_SERVEROFFLINE
-
Can’t connect to the server right now. Wait a while or check the account’s settings.
-
Verify the server name to make sure it is correct. Wait until the server comes back online. If the issue persists, re-provision the account.
-
-
-
0x85030027
-
E_ACTIVESYNC_GETCERT
-
The Exchange server requires a certificate.
-
Import the appropriate EAS certificate on the Surface Hub.
-
-
-
0x86000C2B
-
E_NEXUS_STATUS_INVALID_POLICYKEY
-
The account is configured with policies not compatible with Surface Hub.
-
Disable the PasswordEnabled policy for this account.
-
We have a bug were we may surface policy errors if the account doesn’t receive any server notifications within the policy refresh interval.
-
-
-
0x85010005
-
E_HTTP_NOT_FOUND
-
The server name is invalid.
-
Verify the server name to make sure it is correct. If the issue persists, re-provision the account.
-
-
-
0x85010014
-
E_HTTP_SERVER_ERROR
-
Can’t connect to the server.
-
Verify the server name to make sure it is correct. Trigger a sync and, if the issue persists, re-provision the account.
-
-
-
0x80072EE7
-
WININET_E_NAME_NOT_RESOLVED
-
The server name or address could not be resolved.
-
Make sure the server name is entered correctly.
-
-
-
0x8007052F
-
ERROR_ACCOUNT_RESTRICTION
-
While auto-discovering the Exchange server, a policy is applied that prevents the logged-in user from logging in to the server.
-
This is a timing issue. Re-verify the account's credentials. Try to re-provision when they're correct.
-
-
-
0x800C0019
-
INET_E_INVALID_CERTIFICATE
-
Security certificate required to access this resource is invalid.
-
Install the correct ActiveSync certificate needed for the provided device account.
-
-
-
0x80072F0D
-
WININET_E_INVALID_CA
-
The certificate authority is invalid or is incorrect. Could not auto-discover the Exchange server because a certificate is missing.
-
Install the correct ActiveSync certificate needed for the provided device account.
-
-
-
0x80004005
-
E_FAIL
-
The domain provided couldn't be found. The Exchange server could not be auto-discovered and was not provided in the settings.
-
Make sure that the domain entered is the FQDN, and that there is an Exchange server entered in the Exchange server text box.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related content
-
-- [Troubleshooting Miracast connection to the Surface Hub](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface-hub/miracast-troubleshooting)
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/use-cloud-recovery-for-bitlocker-on-surfacehub.md b/devices/surface-hub/use-cloud-recovery-for-bitlocker-on-surfacehub.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d03cfe3055..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/use-cloud-recovery-for-bitlocker-on-surfacehub.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,77 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to use cloud recovery for BitLocker on a Surface Hub
-description: How to use cloud recovery for BitLocker on a Surface Hub
-ms.assetid: c0bde23a-49de-40f3-a675-701e3576d44d
-keywords: Accessibility settings, Settings app, Ease of Access
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: v-miegge
-ms.author: v-miegge
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Summary
-
-This article describes how to use the cloud recovery function if you are unexpectedly prompted by BitLocker on a Surface Hub device.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You should follow these steps only if a BitLocker recovery key isn't available.
-
-> [!WARNING]
-> * This recovery process deletes the contents of the internal drive. If the process fails, the internal drive will become completely unusable. If this occurs, you will have to log a service request with Microsoft for a resolution.
-> * After the recovery process is complete, the device will be reset to the factory settings and returned to its Out of Box Experience state.
-> * After the recovery, the Surface Hub must be completely reconfigured.
-
-> [!IMPORTANT]
-> This process requires an open Internet connection that does not use a proxy or other authentication method.
-
-## Cloud recovery process
-
-To perform a cloud recovery, follow these steps:
-
-1. Select **Press Esc for more recovery options**.
-
- 
-
-1. Select **Skip this drive**.
-
- 
-
-1. Select **Recover from the cloud**.
-
- 
-
-1. Select **Yes**.
-
- 
-
-1. Select **Reinstall**.
-
- 
-
- 
-
-1. After the cloud recovery process is complete, start the reconfiguration by using the **Out of Box Experience**.
-
- 
-
-## "Something went Wrong" error message
-
-This error is usually caused by network issues that occur during the recovery download. When this issue occurs, don't turn off the Hub because you won't be able to restart it. If you receive this error message, return to the "Recover from the cloud" step, and then restart the recovery process.
-
-1. Select **Cancel**.
-
- 
-
-1. Select **Troubleshoot**.
-
- 
-
-1. Select **Recover from the cloud**.
-
- 
-
-1. If the **Wired network isn't found** error occurs, select **Cancel**, and then let the Surface Hub rediscover the wired network.
-
- 
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/use-fully-qualified-domain-name-surface-hub.md b/devices/surface-hub/use-fully-qualified-domain-name-surface-hub.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 33233a023b..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/use-fully-qualified-domain-name-surface-hub.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Use fully qualified domain name with Surface Hub
-description: Troubleshoot common problems, including setup issues, Exchange ActiveSync errors.
-keywords: ["Troubleshoot common problems", "setup issues", "Exchange ActiveSync errors"]
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
----
-
-# Configure domain name for Skype for Business
-
-There are a few scenarios where you need to specify the domain name of your Skype for Business server:
-- **Multiple DNS suffixes** - When your Skype for Business infrastructure has disjointed namespaces such that one or more servers have a DNS suffix that doesn't match the suffix of the sign-in address (SIP) for Skype for Business.
-- **Skype for Business and Exchange suffixes are different** - When the suffix of the sign-in address for Skype for Business differs from the suffix of the Exchange address used for the device account.
-- **Working with certificates** - Large organizations with on-premises Skype for Business servers commonly use certificates with their own root certificate authority (CA). It is common for the CA domain to be different than the domain of the Skype for Business server which causes the certificate to not be trusted, and sign-in fails. Skype needs to know the domain name of the certificate in order to set up a trust relationship. Enterprises typically use Group Policy to push this out to Skype desktop, but Group Policy is not supported on Surface Hub.
-
-**To configure the domain name for your Skype for Business server**
-1. On Surface Hub, open **Settings**.
-2. Click **Surface Hub**, and then click **Calling & Audio**.
-3. Under **Skype for Business configuration**, click **Configure domain name**.
-4. Type the domain name for your Skype for Business server, and then click **Ok**.
- > [!TIP]
- > You can type multiple domain names, separated by commas. For example: lync.com, outlook.com, lync.glbdns.microsoft.com
-
- 
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/use-room-control-system-with-surface-hub.md b/devices/surface-hub/use-room-control-system-with-surface-hub.md
deleted file mode 100644
index cbc437e783..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/use-room-control-system-with-surface-hub.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,179 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Using a room control system (Surface Hub)
-description: Room control systems can be used with your Microsoft Surface Hub.
-ms.assetid: DC365002-6B35-45C5-A2B8-3E1EB0CB8B50
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: room control system, Surface Hub
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Using a room control system (Surface Hub)
-
-
-Room control systems can be used with your Microsoft Surface Hub.
-
-Using a room control system with your Surface Hub involves connecting room control hardware to the Surface Hub, usually through the RJ11 serial port on the bottom of the Surface Hub.
-
-## Terminal settings
-
-To connect to a room control system control panel, you don't need to configure any terminal settings on the Surface Hub. If you want to connect a PC or laptop to your Surface Hub and send serial commands from the Surface Hub, you can use a terminal emulator program like Tera Term or PuTTY.
-
-| Setting | Value |
-| --- | --- |
-| Baud rate | 115200 |
-| Data bits | 8 |
-| Stop bits | 1 |
-| Parity | none |
-| Flow control | none |
-| Line feed | every carriage return |
-
-
-## Wiring diagram
-
-You can use a standard RJ-11 (6P6C) connector to connect the Surface Hub serial port to a room control system. This is the recommended method. You can also use an RJ-11 4-conductor cable, but we do not recommend this method.
-
-This diagram shows the correct pinout used for an RJ-11 (6P6C) to DB9 cable.
-
-
-
-## Command sets
-
-Room control systems use common meeting-room scenarios for commands. Commands originate from the room control system, and are communicated over a serial connection to a Surface Hub. Commands are ASCII based, and the Surface Hub will acknowledge when state changes occur.
-
-The following command modifiers are available. Commands terminate with a new line character (\n). Responses can come at any time in response to state changes not triggered directly by a management port command.
-
-| Modifier | Result |
-| --- | --- |
-| + | Increment a value |
-| - | Decrease a value |
-| = | Set a discrete value |
-| ? | Queries for a current value |
-
-
-## Power
-
-Surface Hub can be in one of these power states.
-
-| State | Energy Star state| Description |
-| --- | --- | --- |
-| 0 | S5 | Off |
-| 1 | - | Power up (indeterminate) |
-| 2 | S3 | Sleep |
-| 5 | S0 | Ready |
-
-
-In Replacement PC mode, the power states are only Ready and Off and only change the display. The management port can't be used to power on the replacement PC.
-
-| State | Energy Star state| Description |
-| --- | --- | --- |
-| 0 | S5 | Off |
-| 5 | S0 | Ready |
-
-For a control device, anything other than 5 / Ready should be considered off. Each PowerOn command results in two state changes and responses.
-
-| Command | State change| Response |
-| --- | --- | --- |
-| PowerOn | Device turns on (display + PC).PC service notifies SMC that the PC is ready. | Power=0Power=5 |
-| PowerOff | Device transitions to ambient state (PC on, display dim). | Power=0 |
-| Power? | SMC reports the last-known power state. | Power=<#> |
-
-
-
-## Brightness
-
-The current brightness level is a range from 0 to 100.
-
-Changes to brightness levels can be sent by a room control system, or other system.
-
-| Command | State change |Response |
-| --- | --- | --- |
-| Brightness+ | System management controller (SMC) sends the brightness up command.PC service on the room control system notifies SMC of new brightness level. | Brightness = 51 |
-| Brightness- | SMC sends the brightness down command.PC service notifies SMC of new brightness level. | Brightness = 50 |
-
-## Volume
-
-The current volume level is a range from 0 to 100.
-
-Changes to volume levels can be sent by a room control system, or other system.
-
->[!NOTE]
->The Volume command will only control the volume for embedded or Replacement PC mode, not from [Guest sources](connect-and-display-with-surface-hub.md).
-
-| Command | State change | Response(On in [Replacement PC mode](connect-and-display-with-surface-hub.md#replacement-pc-mode)) |
-| --- | --- | --- |
-| Volume+ | SMC sends the volume up command.PC service notifies SMC of new volume level. | Volume = 51 |
-| Volume- | SMC sends the volume down command.PC service notifies SMC of new volume level. | Volume = 50 |
-
-
-
-
-## Mute for audio
-
-Audio can be muted.
-
-| Command | State change | Response |
-| --- | --- | --- |
-| AudioMute+ | SMC sends the audio mute command.PC service notifies SMC that audio is muted. | none |
-
-
-
-
-## Video source
-
-Several display sources can be used.
-
-| State | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-| 0 | Onboard PC |
-| 1 | DisplayPort |
-| 2 | HDMI |
-| 3 | VGA |
-
-
-
-
-Changes to display source can be sent by a room control system, or other system.
-
-| Command | State change | Response |
-| --- | --- | --- |
-| Source=# | SMC changes to the desired source.PC service notifies SMC that the display source has switched. | Source=<#> |
-| Source+ | SMC cycles to the next active input source.PC service notifies SMC of the current input source. | Source=<#> |
-| Source- | SMC cycles to the previous active input source.PC service notifies SMC of the current input source. | Source=<#> |
-| Source? | SMC queries PC service for the active input source.PC service notifies SMC of the current in;put source. | Source=<#> |
-
-## Errors
-
-Errors are returned following the format in this table.
-
-| Error | Notes |
-| --- | --- |
-| Error: Unknown command '<input>'. | The instruction contains an unknown initial command. For example, "VOL+" would be invalid and return " Error: Unknown command 'VOL'". |
-| Error: Unknown operator '<input>'. | The instruction contains an unknown operator. For example, "Volume!" would be invalid and return " Error: Unknown operator '!'". |
-| Error: Unknown parameter '<input>'. | The instruction contains an unknown parameter. For example, "Volume=abc" would be invalid and return " Error: Unknown parameter 'abc'". |
-| Error: Command not available when off '<input>'. | When the Surface Hub is off, commands other than Power return this error. For example, "Volume+" would be invalid and return " Error: Command not available when off 'Volume'". |
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Manage Microsoft Surface Hub](manage-surface-hub.md)
-
-[Microsoft Surface Hub administrator's guide](surface-hub-administrators-guide.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/use-surface-hub-diagnostic-test-device-account.md b/devices/surface-hub/use-surface-hub-diagnostic-test-device-account.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 40a5768d27..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/use-surface-hub-diagnostic-test-device-account.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,135 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Using the Surface Hub Hardware Diagnostic Tool to test a device account
-description: Using the Surface Hub Hardware Diagnostic Tool to test a device account
-ms.assetid: a87b7d41-d0a7-4acc-bfa6-b9070f99bc9c
-keywords: Accessibility settings, Settings app, Ease of Access
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: v-miegge
-ms.author: v-miegge
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Using the Surface Hub Hardware Diagnostic Tool to test a device account
-
-## Introduction
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> The "Account Settings" section of the Surface Hub Hardware Diagnostic tool doesn’t collect any information. The email and password that are entered as input are used only directly on your environment and not collected or transferred to anyone. The login information persists only until the application is closed or you end the current session on the Surface Hub.
-
-> [!IMPORTANT]
-> * Administrator privileges are not required to run this application.
-> * The results of the diagnostic should be discussed with your local administrator before you open a service call with Microsoft.
-
-### Surface Hub Hardware Diagnostic
-
-By default, the [Surface Hub Hardware Diagnostic](https://www.microsoft.com/store/apps/9nblggh51f2g) application isn’t installed in earlier versions of the Surface Hub system. The application is available for free from the Microsoft Store. Administrator privileges are required to install the application.
-
- 
-
-## About the Surface Hub Hardware Diagnostic Tool
-
-The Surface Hub Hardware Diagnostic tool is an easy-to-navigate tool that lets the user test many of the hardware components within the Surface Hub device. This tool can also test and verify a Surface Hub device account. This article describes how to use the Account Settings test within the Surface Hub Hardware Diagnostic tool.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> The device account for the Surface Hub should be created before any testing is done. The Surface Hub Administrator Guide provides instructions and PowerShell scripts to help you create on-premises, online (Office365), or hybrid device accounts. For more information, go to the [Create and test a device account (Surface Hub)](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface-hub/create-and-test-a-device-account-surface-hub) topic in the guide.
-
-### Device account testing process
-
-1. Navigate to **All Apps**, and then locate the Surface Hub Hardware Diagnostic application.
-
- 
-
-1. When the application starts, the **Welcome** page provides a text window to document the reason why you are testing the Hub. This note can be saved to USB together with the diagnostic results at the conclusion of testing. After you finish entering a note, select the **Continue** button.
-
- 
-
-1. The next screen provides you the option to test all or some of the Surface Hub components. To begin testing the device account, select the **Test Results** icon.
-
- 
-
- 
-
-1. Select **Account Settings**.
-
- 
-
- The Account Settings screen is used to test your device account.
-
- 
-
-1. Enter the email address of your device account. The password is optional but is recommended. Select the **Test Account** button when you are ready to continue.
-
- 
-
-1. After testing is finished, review the results for the four areas of testing. Each section can be expanded or collapsed by selecting the Plus or Minus sign next to each topic.
-
- **Network**
-
- 
-
- **Environment**
-
- 
-
- **Certificates**
-
- 
-
- **Trust Model**
-
- 
-
-## Appendix
-
-### Field messages and resolution
-
-#### Network
-
-Field |Success |Failure |Comment |Reference
-|------|------|------|------|------|
-Internet Connectivity |Device does have Internet connectivity |Device does not have Internet connectivity |Verifies internet connectivity, including proxy connection |[Configuring a proxy for your Surface Hub](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/y0av/2017/12/03/7/)
-HTTP Version |1.1 |1.0 |If HTTP 1.0 found, it will cause issue with WU and Store |
-Direct Internet Connectivity |Device has a Proxy configured Device has no Proxy configured |N/A |Informational. Is your device behind a proxy? |
-Proxy Address | | |If configured, returns proxy address. |
-Proxy Authentication |Proxy does not require Authentication |Proxy requires Proxy Auth |Result may be a false positive if a user already has an open session in Edge and has authenticated thru the proxy. |[Configuring a proxy for your Surface Hub](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/y0av/2017/12/03/7/)
-Proxy Auth Types | | |If proxy authentication is used, return the Authentication methods advertised by the proxy. |
-
-#### Environment
-
-Field |Success |Failure |Comment |Reference
-|------|------|------|------|------|
-SIP Domain | | |Informational. |
-Skype Environment |Skype for Business Online, Skype for Business OnPrem, Skype for Business Hybrid |Informational. |What type of environment was detected. Note: Hybrid can only be detected if the password is entered.
-LyncDiscover FQDN | | |Informational. Displays the LyncDiscover DNS result |
-LyncDiscover URI | | |Informational. Displays the URL used to perform a LyncDiscover on your environment.|
-LyncDiscover |Connection Successful |Connection Failed |Response from LyncDiscover web service. |
-SIP Pool Hostname | | |Informational. Display the SIP pool name discovered from LyncDiscover |
-
-#### Certificates (in-premises hybrid only)
-
-LyncDiscover Certificate
-
-Field |Success |Failure |Comment |Reference
-|------|------|------|------|------|
-LyncDiscover Cert CN | | |Informational. Displays the LD cert Common name |
-LyncDiscover Cert CA | | |Informational. Displays the LD Cert CA |
-LyncDiscover Cert Root CA | | |Informational. Displays the LD Cert Root CA, if available. |
-LD Trust Status |Certificate is Trusted. |Certificate is not trusted, please add the Root CA. |Verify the certificate against the local cert store. Returns positive if the machine trusts the certificate.|[Download and deploy Skype for Business certificates using PowerShell](https://blogs.msdn.microsoft.com/surfacehub/2016/06/07/download-and-deploy-skype-for-business-certificates-using-powershell/)/[Supported items for Surface Hub provisioning packages](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface-hub/provisioning-packages-for-surface-hub#supported-items-for-surface-hub-provisioning-packages)
-
-SIP Pool Certification
-
-Field |Success |Failure |Comment |Reference
-|------|------|------|------|------|
-SIP Pool Cert CN | | |(CONTENTS) |
-SIP Pool Cert CA | | |(CONTENTS) |
-SIP Pool Trust Status |Certificate is Trusted. |Certificate is not trusted, please add the Root CA. |Verify the certificate against the local cert store and return a positive if the devices trusts the certificate. |
-SIP Pool Cert Root CA | | |Information. Display the SIP Pool Cert Root CA, if available. |
-
-#### Trust Model (on-premises hybrid only)
-
-Field |Success |Failure |Comment |Reference
-|------|------|------|------|------|
-Trust Model Status |No Trust Model Issue Detected. |SIP Domain and server domain are different please add the following domains. |Check the LD FQDN/ LD Server Name/ Pool Server name for Trust model issue. |[Surface Hub and the Skype for Business Trusted Domain List](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/y0av/2017/10/25/95/)
-Domain Name(s) | | |Return the list of domains that should be added for SFB to connect. |
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/whiteboard-collaboration.md b/devices/surface-hub/whiteboard-collaboration.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a6e9524cd2..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/whiteboard-collaboration.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,70 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Set up and use Microsoft Whiteboard
-description: Microsoft Whiteboard’s latest update includes the capability for two Surface Hubs to collaborate in real time on the same board.
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 03/18/2019
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Set up and use Microsoft Whiteboard
-
-The Microsoft Whiteboard app includes the capability for Surface Hubs and other devices to collaborate in real time on the same board.
-
-## Prerequisites
-
-To use whiteboard collaboration complete the following actions:
-
-- Add Whiteboard.ms, whiteboard.microsoft.com, and wbd.ms to your list of allowed sites.
-- Open port: **HTTPS: 443** (normally configured when you first run Surface Hub.)
-
-## Office 365 requirements
-
-- Whiteboard collaboration is only supported in the Office 365 commercial environment and requires Office 365 with cloud-based Azure Active Directory (Azure AD).
-- You can only run collaborative sessions among users belonging to the same Office 365 tenant.
-- Office 365 Germany or Office 365 operated by 21Vianet do not support whiteboard collaboration.
-
-## Collaborating with whiteboards
-
-To start a collaboration session:
-
-1. In the Whiteboard app, tap the **Sign in** button.
-2. Sign in with your organization ID.
-3. Tap the **Invite** button next to your name at the top of the app.
-4. Write or type the names of the colleagues you wish to collaborate with.
-
-On the other device, such as a Surface Hub, when you are signed in, the shared board will now appear in the board gallery.
-
-### User tips
-- Log in to access your whiteboards. As you work, changes are saved automatically.
-- Name your whiteboards to help organize your content and find it quickly. Select the … to open the menu. Select the **Options** gear icon to access more tools and features of the Whiteboard.
-- Use **Ink to shape** to turn drawing into actual shapes like circles, squares, and triangles.
-- Use **Ink to table** to turn a drawn grid into a table with rows and columns.
-- You can also change the background color and design from solid to grid or dots. Pick the background, then choose the color from the wheel around it.
-- You can export a copy of the Whiteboard collaboration for yourself through the Share charm and leave the board for others to continue working.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> If you are using Whiteboard and cannot sign in, you can collaborate by joining a Teams or Skype for Business meeting, and then sharing your screen. After you’re done, tap **Settings** > **Export to email** or save a copy of the board. The SVG export provides higher resolution than PNG and can be opened in a web browser.
-
-## New features in Whiteboard
-
-The Microsoft Whiteboard app, updated for Surface Hub on July 1, 2019 includes a host of new features including:
-
-- **Automatic Saving** - Boards are saved to the cloud automatically when you sign in, and can be found in the board gallery.
-- **Extended collaboration across devices** - You can collaborate using new apps for Windows 10 PC and iOS, and a web version for other devices.
-- **Richer canvas** - In addition to ink and images, Whiteboard now includes sticky notes, text and GIFs, with more objects coming soon.
-- **Intelligence** – In addition to ink to shape and table, Whiteboard now includes ink beautification to improve handwriting and ink grab to convert images to ink.
-- **More color and background options** - Whiteboard now includes more pen colors and thickness options along with additional background colors and designs.
-- **Teams Integration** – You can automatically launch Whiteboard from a Teams meeting and share with participants (currently in preview).
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-- [Windows 10 Creators Update for Surface Hub](https://www.microsoft.com/surface/support/surface-hub/windows-10-creators-update-surface-hub)
-
-- [Support documentation for Microsoft Whiteboard](https://support.office.com/article/Whiteboard-Help-0c0f2aa0-b1bb-491c-b814-fd22de4d7c01)
diff --git a/devices/surface-hub/wireless-network-management-for-surface-hub.md b/devices/surface-hub/wireless-network-management-for-surface-hub.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0a314fe596..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface-hub/wireless-network-management-for-surface-hub.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,71 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Wireless network management (Surface Hub)
-description: Microsoft Surface Hub offers two options for network connectivity to your corporate network and Internet wireless, and wired. While both provide network access, we recommend you use a wired connection.
-ms.assetid: D2CFB90B-FBAA-4532-B658-9AA33CAEA31D
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: network connectivity, wired connection
-ms.prod: surface-hub
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
----
-
-# Wireless network management (Surface Hub)
-
-
-Microsoft Surface Hub offers two options for network connectivity to your corporate network and Internet: wireless, and wired. While both provide network access, we recommend you use a wired connection.
-
-## Modifying, adding, or reviewing a network connection
-
-
-If a wired network connection is not available, the Surface Hub can use a wireless network for internet access. A properly connected and configured Wi-Fi access point must be available and within range of the Surface Hub.
-
-### Choose a wireless access point
-
-1. On the Surface Hub, open **Settings** and enter your admin credentials.
-2. Click **Network & Internet**. Under **Wi-Fi**, choose an access point. If you want Surface Hub to automatically connect to this access point, click **Connect automatically**. Click **Connect**.
-
- 
-
-3. If the network is secured, you'll be asked to enter the security key. Click **Next** to connect.
-
- 
-
-### Review wireless settings
-
-1. On the Surface Hub, open **Settings** and enter your admin credentials.
-2. Click **Network & Internet**, then **Wi-Fi**, and then click **Advanced options**.
-3. Surface Hub shows you the properties for the wireless network connection.
-
- 
-
-### Review wired settings
-
-1. On the Surface Hub, open **Settings** and enter your admin credentials.
-2. Click **System**, click **Network & Internet**, then click on the network under Ethernet.
-
- 
-
-3. The system will show you the properties for the wired network connection.
-
- 
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Manage Microsoft Surface Hub](manage-surface-hub.md)
-
-[Microsoft Surface Hub administrator's guide](surface-hub-administrators-guide.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface/TOC.md b/devices/surface/TOC.md
deleted file mode 100644
index bc26815d56..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/TOC.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,68 +0,0 @@
-# [Surface](index.md)
-
-## [Get started](get-started.md)
-
-## Overview
-
-### [Surface Pro 7 for Business](https://www.microsoft.com/surface/business/surface-pro-7)
-### [Surface Pro X for Business](https://www.microsoft.com/surface/business/surface-pro-x)
-### [Surface Laptop 3 for Business](https://www.microsoft.com/surface/business/surface-laptop-3)
-### [Surface Book 2 for Business](https://www.microsoft.com/surface/business/surface-book-2)
-### [Surface Studio 2 for Business](https://www.microsoft.com/surface/business/surface-studio-2)
-### [Surface Go](https://www.microsoft.com/surface/business/surface-go)
-### [Secure, work-anywhere mobility with LTE Advanced](https://www.microsoft.com/surface/business/lte-laptops-and-tablets)
-
-## Plan
-
-### [Surface device compatibility with Windows 10 Long-Term Servicing Branch](surface-device-compatibility-with-windows-10-ltsc.md)
-### [Long-Term Servicing Branch for Surface devices](ltsb-for-surface.md)
-### [Wake On LAN for Surface devices](wake-on-lan-for-surface-devices.md)
-### [Considerations for Surface and Endpoint Configuration Manager](considerations-for-surface-and-system-center-configuration-manager.md)
-### [Deploy Surface app with Microsoft Store for Business](deploy-surface-app-with-windows-store-for-business.md)
-### [Enable PEAP, EAP-FAST, and Cisco LEAP on Surface devices](enable-peap-eap-fast-and-cisco-leap-on-surface-devices.md)
-### [Ethernet adapters and Surface deployment](ethernet-adapters-and-surface-device-deployment.md)
-
-## Deploy
-
-### [Deploy Surface devices](deploy.md)
-### [Windows Autopilot and Surface devices](windows-autopilot-and-surface-devices.md)
-### [Deploying, managing, and servicing Surface Pro X](surface-pro-arm-app-management.md)
-### [Surface Pro X app compatibility](surface-pro-arm-app-performance.md)
-### [Deploy the latest firmware and drivers for Surface devices](deploy-the-latest-firmware-and-drivers-for-surface-devices.md)
-### [Surface Deployment Accelerator](microsoft-surface-deployment-accelerator.md)
-### [Step by step: Surface Deployment Accelerator](step-by-step-surface-deployment-accelerator.md)
-### [Deploy Windows 10 to Surface devices with MDT](deploy-windows-10-to-surface-devices-with-mdt.md)
-### [Enable the Surface Laptop keyboard during MDT deployment](enable-surface-keyboard-for-windows-pe-deployment.md)
-### [Upgrade Surface devices to Windows 10 with MDT](upgrade-surface-devices-to-windows-10-with-mdt.md)
-### [Customize the OOBE for Surface deployments](customize-the-oobe-for-surface-deployments.md)
-### [Using the Surface Deployment Accelerator deployment share](using-the-sda-deployment-share.md)
-### [Surface System SKU reference](surface-system-sku-reference.md)
-
-## Manage
-
-### [Optimize Wi-Fi connectivity for Surface devices](surface-wireless-connect.md)
-### [Best practice power settings for Surface devices](maintain-optimal-power-settings-on-Surface-devices.md)
-### [Surface Dock Firmware Update](surface-dock-firmware-update.md)
-### [Battery Limit setting](battery-limit.md)
-### [Surface Brightness Control](microsoft-surface-brightness-control.md)
-### [Surface Asset Tag](assettag.md)
-### [Manage Surface driver and firmware updates](manage-surface-driver-and-firmware-updates.md)
-
-## Secure
-### [Intune management of Surface UEFI settings](surface-manage-dfci-guide.md)
-### [Manage Surface UEFI settings](manage-surface-uefi-settings.md)
-### [Advanced UEFI security features for Surface Pro 3](advanced-uefi-security-features-for-surface-pro-3.md)
-### [Surface Enterprise Management Mode](surface-enterprise-management-mode.md)
-### [Enroll and configure Surface devices with SEMM](enroll-and-configure-surface-devices-with-semm.md)
-### [Unenroll Surface devices from SEMM](unenroll-surface-devices-from-semm.md)
-### [Use System Center Configuration Manager to manage devices with SEMM](use-system-center-configuration-manager-to-manage-devices-with-semm.md)
-### [Surface Data Eraser](microsoft-surface-data-eraser.md)
-
-## Troubleshoot
-### [Top support solutions for Surface devices](support-solutions-surface.md)
-### [Fix common Surface problems using the Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business](surface-diagnostic-toolkit-for-business-intro.md)
-#### [Deploy Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business](surface-diagnostic-toolkit-business.md)
-#### [Use Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business in desktop mode](surface-diagnostic-toolkit-desktop-mode.md)
-#### [Run Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business using commands](surface-diagnostic-toolkit-command-line.md)
-
-### [Change history for Surface documentation](change-history-for-surface.md)
diff --git a/devices/surface/advanced-uefi-security-features-for-surface-pro-3.md b/devices/surface/advanced-uefi-security-features-for-surface-pro-3.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c677b56488..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/advanced-uefi-security-features-for-surface-pro-3.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,172 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Advanced UEFI security features for Surface Pro 3 (Surface)
-description: This article describes how to install and configure the v3.11.760.0 UEFI update to enable additional security options for Surface Pro 3 devices.
-ms.assetid: 90F790C0-E5FC-4482-AD71-60589E3C9C93
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: security, features, configure, hardware, device, custom, script, update
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.pagetype: surface, devices, security
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
----
-
-# Advanced UEFI security features for Surface Pro 3
-
-
-This article describes how to install and configure the v3.11.760.0 UEFI update to enable additional security options for Surface Pro 3 devices.
-
-To address more granular control over the security of Surface devices, the v3.11.760.0 UEFI update provides additional security options that allow you to disable specific hardware devices or to prevent starting from those devices. After the UEFI update is installed on a device, you can configure it manually or automatically by running a script.
-
-## Manually install the UEFI update
-
-
-Before you can configure the advanced security features of your Surface device, you must first install the v3.11.760.0 UEFI update. This update is installed automatically if you receive your updates from Windows Update. For more information about how to configure Windows to update automatically by using Windows Update, see [How to configure and use Automatic Updates in Windows](https://support.microsoft.com/kb/306525).
-
-To update the UEFI on Surface Pro 3, you can download and install the Surface UEFI updates as part of the Surface Pro 3 Firmware and Driver Pack. These firmware and driver packs are available from the [Surface Pro 3 page](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=38826) on the Microsoft Download Center. You can find out more about the firmware and driver packs at [Download the latest firmware and drivers for Surface devices](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface/deploy-the-latest-firmware-and-drivers-for-surface-devices). The firmware and driver packs are available as both self-contained Windows Installer (.msi) and archive (.zip) formats. You can find out more about these two formats and how you can use them to update your drivers at [Manage Surface driver and firmware updates](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface/manage-surface-pro-3-firmware-updates).
-
-## Manually configure additional security settings
-
-
->[!NOTE]
->To enter firmware setup on a Surface device, begin with the device powered off, press and hold the **Volume Up** button, then press and release the **Power** button, then release the **Volume Up** button after the device has begun to boot.
-
-After the v3.11.760.0 UEFI update is installed on a Surface device, an additional UEFI menu named **Advanced Device Security** becomes available. If you click this menu, the following options are displayed:
-
-| Option | Description | Available settings (default listed in bold) |
-|----------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|---------------------------------------------|
-| Network Boot | Enables or disables the ability of your Surface device to boot from the network (also known as PXE boot). | **Enabled**, Not Bootable |
-| Side USB | Enables or disables the USB port on the side of the Surface device. Additionally, the USB port can be enabled, but not allow booting. | **Enabled**, Not Bootable, Disabled |
-| Docking Port | Enables or disables the ports on the Surface docking station. Additionally, the docking port can be enabled, but block booting from any USB or Ethernet port in the docking station. | **Enabled**, Not Bootable, Disabled |
-| Front Camera | Enables or disables the camera on the front of the Surface device. | **Enabled**, Disabled |
-| Rear Camera | Enables or disables the camera on the rear of the Surface device. | **Enabled**, Disabled |
-| On Board Audio | Enables or disables audio on the Surface device. | **Enabled**, Disabled |
-| microSD | Enables or disables the microSD slot on the Surface device. | **Enabled**, Disabled |
-| WiFi | Enables or disables the built-in Wi-Fi transceiver in the Surface device. This also disables Bluetooth. | **Enabled**, Disabled |
-| Bluetooth | Enables or disables the built-in Bluetooth transceiver in the Surface device. | **Enabled**, Disabled |
-
-
-
-## Automate additional security settings
-
-
-As an IT professional with administrative privileges, you can automate the configuration of UEFI settings by leveraging [Surface Pro 3 Firmware Tools (476 KB)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkID=618038) available from the Microsoft Download Center. These tools install a .NET assembly that can be called from any custom application or script.
-
-**Prerequisites**
-
-- The sample scripts below leverage the previously mentioned extension and therefore assume that the tool has been installed on the device being managed.
-- The scripts must be run with administrative privilege.
-- The Windows PowerShell command [**Set-ExecutionPolicy Unrestricted**](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/ee176961.aspx) must be called prior to running sample scripts if they are not digitally signed.
-
-**Sample scripts**
-
->**Note**: The UEFI password used in the sample scripts below is presented in clear text. We strongly recommend saving the scripts in a protected location and running them in a controlled environment.
-
-
-Show all configurable options:
-
-```
-# Load the extension
-[System.Reflection.Assembly]::Load("SurfaceUefiManager, Version=1.0.5483.22783, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=20606f4b5276c705")
-
-# Get the collection of all configurable settings
-$uefiOptions = [Microsoft.Surface.FirmwareOption]::All()
-
-foreach ($uefiOption in $uefiOptions)
-{
- Write-Host "Name:" $uefiOption.Name
- Write-Host " Description =" $uefiOption.Description
- Write-Host " Current Value =" $uefiOption.CurrentValue
- Write-Host " Default Value =" $uefiOption.DefaultValue
- Write-Host " Proposed Value =" $uefiOption.ProposedValue
-
- # This gives usage and validation information
- Write-Host " Allowed Values =" $uefiOption.FriendlyRegEx
- Write-Host " Regular Expression =" $uefiOption.RegEx
-
- Write-Host
-}
-```
-
-Set or change UEFI password:
-
-```
-# Load the extension
-[System.Reflection.Assembly]::Load("SurfaceUefiManager, Version=1.0.5483.22783, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=20606f4b5276c705")
-
-# Must supply UEFI administrator Password if set
-# If it is not currently set this is ignored
-[Microsoft.Surface.FirmwareOption]::Unlock("1234")
-
-$Password = [Microsoft.Surface.FirmwareOption]::Find("Password")
-
-# Set New value to 12345
-$Password.ProposedValue = "12345"
-```
-
-Check status of proposed changes:
-
-```
-# Load the extension
-[System.Reflection.Assembly]::Load("SurfaceUefiManager, Version=1.0.5483.22783, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=20606f4b5276c705")
-
-# Check update status
-$updateStatus = [Microsoft.Surface.FirmwareOption]::UpdateStatus
-$updateIteration = [Microsoft.Surface.FirmwareOption]::UpdateIteration
-Write-Host "Last Update Status =" $updateStatus
-Write-Host "Last Update Iteration =" $updateIteration
-
-# Get the individual results for the last proposed update
-# If the device has never had an update attempt this will be an empty list
-$details = [Microsoft.Surface.FirmwareOption]::UpdateStatusDetails
-Write-Host $details.Count "Settings were proposed"
-if ($details.Count -gt 0)
-{
- Write-Host "Result Details"
- foreach ($detail in $details.GetEnumerator())
- {
- Write-Host " " $detail.Key "=" $detail.Value
- }
-}
-```
-
-Revert UEFI to default values:
-
-```
-# Load the extension
-[System.Reflection.Assembly]::Load("SurfaceUefiManager, Version=1.0.5483.22783, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=20606f4b5276c705")
-
-# Must supply UEFI administrator Password if set
-# If it is not currently set this is ignored
-[Microsoft.Surface.FirmwareOption]::Unlock("1234")
-
-# Get the collection of all configurable settings
-$uefiOptions = [Microsoft.Surface.FirmwareOption]::All()
-
-# Reset all options to the factory default
-foreach ($uefiOption in $uefiOptions)
-{
- $uefiOption.ProposedValue = $uefiOption.DefaultValue
-}
-```
-
-Status code interpretation
-
-- 00 - The proposed update was a success
-- 02 - One of the proposed values had an invalid value
-- 03 - There was a proposed value set that was not recognized
-- 0F - The unlock password did not match currently set password
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface/assettag.md b/devices/surface/assettag.md
deleted file mode 100644
index db6a63ad69..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/assettag.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,118 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Surface Asset Tag Tool
-description: This topic explains how to use the Surface Asset Tag Tool.
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 10/21/2019
-ms.reviewer: hachidan
-manager: dansimp
----
-
-# Surface Asset Tag Tool
-
-Surface Asset Tag is a command line interface (CLI) utility
-that allows you to view, assign, and modify an assigned asset tag value
-for Surface devices. It works on Surface Pro 3 and all newer Surface devices.
-
-## System requirements
-
-- Surface Pro 3 or later
-
-- UEFI firmware version 3.9.150.0 or later
-
-## Using Surface Asset Tag
-
-To run Surface Asset Tag:
-
-1. On the Surface device, download **Surface Asset Tag.zip** from the [Microsoft Download
- Center](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=46703),
- extract the zip file, and save AssetTag.exe in desired folder (in
- this example, C:\\assets).
-
- > [!NOTE]
- > For Surface Pro X, use the application named **AssetTag_x86** in the ZIP file.
-
-2. Open a command console as an Administrator and run AssetTag.exe,
- entering the full path to the tool.
-
-3. Restart Surface.
-
-### Asset Tag tool commands
-In the following examples, AssetTag.exe is saved in a directory on a local machine (C:\assets).
-
-To get the proposed asset tag, run AssetTag -g.
-
-**Example**
-
- ```
- C:\assets\AssetTag.exe -g
- ```
-
- To clear the proposed asset tag, run AssetTag -s.
-
- **Example**
-
- ```
-C:\assets\AssetTag.exe -s
- ```
-To set the proposed asset tag, run AssetTag -s testassettag12.
-
-**Example**
-
-```
-C:\assets\AssetTag.exe -s testassettag12
-```
-
->[!NOTE]
->The asset tag value must contain between 1 and 36 characters. Valid characters include A-Z, a-z, 0-9, period (.) and hyphen (-).
-
-
-## Managing asset tags
-
-You can view the existing asset tag in the UEFI settings under Device
-Information (**Control Panel > Recovery > Advanced Startup > Restart
-now**.)
-
-The figure below shows the results of running the Asset Tag Tool on
-Surface Go.
-
-
-
-> **Figure 1.** Results of running Surface Asset Tag tool on Surface Go
-
-Alternately, you can use WMI to query the existing asset tag on a device:
-
-(Get-WmiObject -query “Select * from Win32_SystemEnclosure”)
-
-**Example**
-
- ```
-C:\Windows\System32> (Get-WmiObject -query “Select * from Win32_SystemEnclosure”)
- ```
-
-### Using PowerShell
-
-You can use the script below as a way of getting the proposed value and
-interpreting any errors.
-
- ```
-AssetTag -g \> $asset\_tag 2\> $error\_message
-$asset\_tag\_return\_code = $LASTEXITCODE
-$asset\_tag = $asset\_tag.Trim(“\`r\`n”)
-
-if ($asset\_tag\_return\_code -eq 0) {
-Write-Output (“Good Tag = ” + $asset\_tag)
-} else {
-Write-Output (
-“Failure: Code = ” + $asset\_tag\_return\_code +
-“Tag = ” + $asset\_tag +
-“Message = ” + $error\_message)
-
-}
- ```
diff --git a/devices/surface/battery-limit.md b/devices/surface/battery-limit.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c5d75cda00..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/battery-limit.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,90 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Battery Limit setting (Surface)
-description: Battery Limit is a UEFI setting that changes how the Surface device battery is charged and may prolong its longevity.
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.pagetype: surface, devices
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.date: 10/31/2019
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.audience: itpro
----
-
-# Battery Limit setting
-
-Battery Limit option is a UEFI setting that changes how the Surface device battery is charged and may prolong its longevity. This setting is recommended in cases in which the device is continuously connected to power, for example when devices are integrated into kiosk solutions.
-
-## How Battery Limit works
-
-Setting the device on Battery Limit changes the protocol for charging the device battery. When Battery Limit is enabled, the battery charge will be limited to 50% of its maximum capacity. The charge level reported in Windows will reflect this limit. Therefore, it will show that the battery is charged up to 50% and will not charge beyond this limit. If you enable Battery Limit while the device is above 50% charge, the Battery icon will show that the device is plugged in but discharging until the device reaches 50% of its maximum charge capacity.
-
-## Supported devices
-The Battery Limit UEFI setting is built into the latest Surface devices including Surface Pro 7 and Surface Laptop 3. Earlier devices require a
- [Surface UEFI firmware update](update.md), available through Windows Update or via the MSI driver and firmware packages on the [Surface Support site](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4023482/surface-download-drivers-and-firmware-for-surface). Check [Enable "Battery Limit" for Surface devices that have to be plugged in for extended periods of time](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4464941) for the specific Surface UEFI version required for each supported device.
-
-## Enabling Battery Limit in Surface UEFI (Surface Pro 4 and later)
-
-The Surface UEFI Battery Limit setting can be configured by booting into Surface UEFI (**Power + Vol Up** when turning on the device). Choose **boot configuration**, and then, under **Advanced Options**, toggle **Enable Battery Limit Mode** to **On**.
-
-
-
-## Enabling Battery Limit in Surface UEFI (Surface Pro 3)
-
-The Surface UEFI Battery Limit setting can be configured by booting into Surface UEFI (**Power + Vol Up** when turning on the device). Choose **Kiosk Mode**, select **Battery Limit**, and then choose **Enabled**.
-
-
-
-
-
-## Enabling Battery Limit using Surface Enterprise Management Mode (SEMM) or Surface Pro 3 firmware PowerShell scripts
-
-The Surface UEFI battery limit is also available for configuration via the following methods:
-
-- Surface Pro 4 and later
- - [Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface/surface-enterprise-management-mode)
- - Surface UEFI Manager Powershell scripts (SEMM_Powershell.zip) in the [Surface Tools for IT downloads](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=46703)
-- Surface Pro 3
- - [SP3_Firmware_Powershell_Scripts.zip](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=46703)
-
-### Using Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator
-
-To configure Battery Limit mode, set the **Kiosk Overrides** setting on the **Advanced Settings** configuration page in SEMM (Surface Pro 4 and later).
-
-
-
-### Using Surface UEFI Manager PowerShell scripts
-
-The battery limit feature is controlled via the following setting:
-
-`407 = Battery Profile`
-
-**Description**: Active management scheme for battery usage pattern
-
-**Default**: `0`
-
-Set this to `1` to enable Battery Limit.
-
-### Using Surface Pro 3 firmware tools
-
-The battery limit feature is controlled via the following setting:
-
-**Name**: BatteryLimitEnable
-
-**Description**: BatteryLimit
-
-**Current Value**: `0`
-
-**Default Value**: `0`
-
-**Proposed Value**: `0`
-
-Set this to `1` to enable Battery Limit.
-
->[!NOTE]
->To configure this setting, you must use [SP3_Firmware_Powershell_Scripts.zip](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=46703).
-
diff --git a/devices/surface/breadcrumb/toc.yml b/devices/surface/breadcrumb/toc.yml
deleted file mode 100644
index 1ab1f047c2..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/breadcrumb/toc.yml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-- name: Docs
- tocHref: /
- topicHref: /
- items:
- - name: Surface
- tocHref: /surface
- topicHref: /surface/index
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/devices/surface/change-history-for-surface.md b/devices/surface/change-history-for-surface.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ebbb3fc3b5..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/change-history-for-surface.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,184 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Change history for Surface documentation (Windows 10)
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-description: This topic lists new and updated topics in the Surface documentation library.
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.audience: itpro
-ms.date: 10/21/2019
----
-
-# Change history for Surface documentation
-
-This topic lists new and updated topics in the Surface documentation library.
-
-## October 2019
-
-| **New or changed topic** | **Description** |
-| ------------------------ | --------------- |
-| [Intune management of Surface UEFI settings](surface-manage-dfci-guide.md)| New document explaining how to configure a DFCI environment in Microsoft Intune and manage firmware settings for targeted Surface devices.|
-| [Deploying, managing, and servicing Surface Pro X](surface-pro-arm-app-management.md)| New document highlighting key considerations for deploying, managing, and servicing Surface Pro X.|
-|Multiple topics| Updated with information on Surface Pro 7, Surface Pro X, and Surface Laptop 3.|
-
-## September 2019
-
-| **New or changed topic** | **Description** |
-| ------------------------ | --------------- |
-| [Surface Dock Firmware Update](surface-dock-firmware-update.md)| New document for Microsoft Surface Dock Firmware Update, newly redesigned to update Surface Dock firmware while running in the background on your Surface device.|
-
-## August 2019
-
-| **New or changed topic** | **Description** |
-| ------------------------ | --------------- |
-| [Optimizing wireless connectivity for Surface devices](surface-wireless-connect.md) | New document highlights key wireless connectivity considerations for Surface devices in mobile scenarios. |
-| [Deploy the latest firmware and drivers for Surface devices](deploy-the-latest-firmware-and-drivers-for-surface-devices.md) | Updated to reflect minor changes in the file naming convention for Surface MSI files. |
-
-
-## July 2019
-
-| **New or changed topic** | **Description** |
-| ------------------------ | --------------- |
-| [Deploy Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business](surface-diagnostic-toolkit-business.md) | Renamed to reflect focus on deployment guidance for IT professionals. Covers minor changes in Version 2.41.139.0. |
-
-
-
-## June 2019
-
-| **New or changed topic** | **Description** |
-| ------------------------ | --------------- |
-|[Fix common Surface problems using the Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business](surface-diagnostic-toolkit-for-business-intro.md) | New introductory page for the Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business. |
-| [Best practice power settings for Surface devices](maintain-optimal-power-settings-on-Surface-devices.md) |Updated with summary of recommendations for managing power settings and optimizing battery life. |
-
-
-## March 2019
-
-| **New or changed topic** | **Description** |
-| ------------------------ | --------------- |
-| [Surface System SKU reference](surface-system-sku-reference.md) | New |
-
-
-## February 2019
-
-New or changed topic | Description
---- | ---
-[Surface Asset Tag](assettag.md) | New
-
-
-## January 2019
-
-New or changed topic | Description
---- | ---
-[Surface Brightness Control](microsoft-surface-brightness-control.md) | New
-[Maintain optimal power settings on Surface devices](maintain-optimal-power-settings-on-Surface-devices.md) | New
-|[Download the latest firmware and drivers for Surface devices](deploy-the-latest-firmware-and-drivers-for-surface-devices.md) | Added Surface Studio 2 |
-
-
-## November 2018
-
-New or changed topic | Description
---- | ---
-|[Download the latest firmware and drivers for Surface devices](deploy-the-latest-firmware-and-drivers-for-surface-devices.md) | Added Surface Pro 6 |
-[Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business](surface-diagnostic-toolkit-business.md) | New
-[Use Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business in desktop mode](surface-diagnostic-toolkit-desktop-mode.md) | New
-[Run Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business using commands](surface-diagnostic-toolkit-command-line.md) | New
-
-## October 2018
-
-New or changed topic | Description
---- | ---
-[Battery Limit setting](battery-limit.md) | New
-|[Download the latest firmware and drivers for Surface devices](deploy-the-latest-firmware-and-drivers-for-surface-devices.md) | Added Surface GO |
-
-## May 2018
-
-|New or changed topic | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-|[Microsoft Surface Data Eraser](microsoft-surface-data-eraser.md) | Added version 3.2.58.0 information |
-|[Surface device compatibility with Windows 10 Long-Term Servicing Channel (LTSC)](surface-device-compatibility-with-windows-10-ltsc.md) | Removed note box around content |
-
-## February 2018
-
-|New or changed topic | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-|[Microsoft Surface Data Eraser](microsoft-surface-data-eraser.md) | Added version 3.2.46.0 information |
-
-## January 2018
-
-|New or changed topic | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-|[Windows Autopilot and Surface devices](windows-autopilot-and-surface-devices.md) | New article |
-|[Microsoft Surface Data Eraser](microsoft-surface-data-eraser.md) | Added version 3.2.45.0 information |
-|[Surface device compatibility with Windows 10 Long-Term Servicing Channel (LTSC)](surface-device-compatibility-with-windows-10-ltsc.md) | Updated Current Branch (CB) or Current Branch for Business (CBB) servicing options with Semi-Annual Channel (SAC) information |
-|[Wake On LAN for Surface devices](wake-on-lan-for-surface-devices.md) | Added Surface Book 2, Surface Laptop, Surface Pro, Surface Pro with LTE Advanced, and Surface Pro information |
-
-## December 2017
-
-|New or changed topic | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-|[Download the latest firmware and drivers for Surface devices](deploy-the-latest-firmware-and-drivers-for-surface-devices.md) | Added Surface Book 2, Surface Laptop, Surface Pro, and Surface Pro with LTE Advanced information |
-
-## October 2017
-
-New or changed topics | Description
---- | ---
-Microsoft Surface Diagnostic Toolkit | Topic removed. The Microsoft Surface Diagnostic Toolkit is no longer available for download.
-
-## September 2017
-
-New or changed topic | Description
---- | ---
-[Top support solutions for Surface devices](support-solutions-surface.md) | New
-
-## June 2017
-
-|New or changed topic | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-|[Surface Data Eraser](microsoft-surface-data-eraser.md) | Update compatible devices, added version 3.2.36 information |
-|[Surface Deployment Accelerator](microsoft-surface-deployment-accelerator.md) | Added version 2.0.8.0 information |
-
-
-## April 2017
-
-|New or changed topic | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-|[Surface device compatibility with Windows 10 Long-Term Servicing Branch](surface-device-compatibility-with-windows-10-ltsc.md) | New (supersedes [Long-Term Servicing Branch for Surface devices](ltsb-for-surface.md))|
-
-
-## January 2017
-
-|New or changed topic | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-|[Wake On LAN for Surface devices](wake-on-lan-for-surface-devices.md) | New |
-
-## December 2016
-
-|New or changed topic | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-|[Download the latest firmware and drivers for Surface devices](deploy-the-latest-firmware-and-drivers-for-surface-devices.md) | Added driver info for Surface Studio; updated info for Surface Book and Surface Pro 4 (Windows 10 .zip cumulative update), Surface Pro 3 (Windows8.1-KB2969817-x64.msu), and Surface 3 (UEFI Asset Tag management tool)|
-
-## November 2016
-
-|New or changed topic | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-|[Surface Enterprise Management Mode](surface-enterprise-management-mode.md) | Added procedure for viewing certificate thumbprint. |
-|[Use System Center Configuration Manager to manage devices with SEMM](use-system-center-configuration-manager-to-manage-devices-with-semm.md) | New |
-
-
-
-## October 2016
-
-| New or changed topic | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-| [Considerations for Surface and System Center Configuration Manager](considerations-for-surface-and-system-center-configuration-manager.md) | New |
-| [Long-term servicing branch for Surface devices](ltsb-for-surface.md) | New |
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface/considerations-for-surface-and-system-center-configuration-manager.md b/devices/surface/considerations-for-surface-and-system-center-configuration-manager.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 2513abc0f9..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/considerations-for-surface-and-system-center-configuration-manager.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,83 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Considerations for Surface and Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager
-description: The management and deployment of Surface devices with Configuration Manager is fundamentally the same as any other PC; this article describes scenarios that may require additional considerations.
-keywords: manage, deployment, updates, driver, firmware
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.pagetype: surface, devices
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.audience: itpro
-ms.date: 11/25/2019
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
----
-
-# Considerations for Surface and System Center Configuration Manager
-
-Fundamentally, management and deployment of Surface devices with System Center Configuration Manager is the same as the management and deployment of any other PC. Like any other PC, a deployment to Surface devices includes importing drivers, importing a Windows image, preparing a deployment task sequence, and then deploying the task sequence to a collection. After deployment, Surface devices are like any other Windows client; to publish apps, settings, and policies, you use the same process as you would use for any other device.
-
-You can find more information about how to use Configuration Manager to deploy and manage devices in the [Documentation for System Center Configuration Manager](https://docs.microsoft.com/sccm/index).
-
-Although the deployment and management of Surface devices is fundamentally the same as any other PC, there are some scenarios that may require additional considerations or steps. This article provides descriptions and guidance for these scenarios. The solutions documented in this article may apply to other devices and manufacturers as well.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> For management of Surface devices it is recommended that you use the Current Branch of System Center Configuration Manager.
-
-## Updating Surface device drivers and firmware
-
-
-For devices that recieve updates through Windows Update, drivers for Surface components (and even firmware updates) are applied automatically as part of the Windows Update process. For devices with managed updates, such as those updated through Windows Server Update Services (WSUS) or System Center Configuration Manager, see [Manage Surface driver and firmware updates](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface/manage-surface-driver-and-firmware-updates/).
-
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Surface device drivers and firmware are signed with SHA-256, which is not natively supported by Windows Server 2008 R2. A workaround is available for Configuration Manager environments running on Windows Server 2008 R2. For more information, see [Can't import drivers into System Center Configuration Manager (KB3025419)](https://support.microsoft.com/kb/3025419).
-
-## Surface Ethernet adapters and Configuration Manager deployment
-
-The default mechanism that Configuration Manager uses to identify devices during deployment is the Media Access Control (MAC) address. Because the MAC address is associated with the Ethernet controller, an Ethernet adapter shared among multiple devices will cause Configuration Manager to identify each of the devices as only a single device. This can cause a Configuration Manager deployment of Windows to not be applied to intended devices.
-
-To ensure that Surface devices using the same Ethernet adapter are identified as unique devices during deployment, you can instruct Configuration Manager to identify devices using another method. This other method could be the MAC address of the wireless network adapter or the System Universal Unique Identifier (System UUID). You can specify that Configuration Manager use other identification methods with the following options:
-
-* Add an exclusion for the MAC addresses of Surface Ethernet adapters, which forces Configuration Manager to overlook the MAC address in preference of the System UUID, as documented in the [Reusing the same NIC for multiple PXE initiated deployments in System Center Configuration Manager OSD](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/system_center_configuration_manager_operating_system_deployment_support_blog/2015/08/27/reusing-the-same-nic-for-multiple-pxe-initiated-deployments-in-system-center-configuration-manger-osd/) blog post.
-
-* Prestage devices by System UUID as documented in the [Reusing the same NIC for multiple PXE initiated deployments in System Center Configuration Manager OSD](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/system_center_configuration_manager_operating_system_deployment_support_blog/2015/08/27/reusing-the-same-nic-for-multiple-pxe-initiated-deployments-in-system-center-configuration-manger-osd/) blog post.
-
-* Use a script to identify a newly deployed Surface device by the MAC address of its wireless adapter, as documented in the [How to Use The Same External Ethernet Adapter For Multiple SCCM OSD](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/askpfeplat/2014/07/27/how-to-use-the-same-external-ethernet-adapter-for-multiple-sccm-osd/) blog post.
-
-Another consideration for the Surface Ethernet adapter during deployments with Configuration Manager is the driver for the Ethernet controller. Beginning in Windows 10, version 1511, the driver for the Surface Ethernet adapter is included by default in Windows. For organizations that want to deploy the latest version of Windows 10 and use the latest version of WinPE, use of the Surface Ethernet adapter requires no additional actions.
-
-For versions of Windows prior to Windows 10, version 1511 (including Windows 10 RTM and Windows 8.1), you may still need to install the Surface Ethernet adapter driver and include the driver in your WinPE boot media. With its inclusion in Windows 10, the driver is no longer available for download from the Microsoft Download Center. To download the Surface Ethernet adapter driver, download it from the Microsoft Update Catalog as documented in the [Surface Ethernet Drivers](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/askcore/2016/08/18/surface-ethernet-drivers/) blog post from the Ask The Core Team blog.
-
-## Deploy Surface app with Configuration Manager
-
-With the release of Microsoft Store for Business, Surface app is no longer available as a driver and firmware download. Organizations that want to deploy Surface app to managed Surface devices or during deployment with the use of Configuration Manager, must acquire Surface app through Microsoft Store for Business and then deploy Surface app with PowerShell. You can find the PowerShell commands for deployment of Surface app, instructions to download Surface app, and prerequisite frameworks from Microsoft Store for Business in the [Deploy Surface app with Microsoft Store for Business](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface/deploy-surface-app-with-windows-store-for-business) article in the TechNet Library.
-
-## Use prestaged media with Surface clients
-
-If your organization uses prestaged media to pre-load deployment resources on to machines prior to deployment with Configuration Manager, the nature of Surface devices as UEFI devices may require you to take additional steps. Specifically, a native UEFI environment requires that you create multiple partitions on the boot disk of the system. If you are following along with the [documentation for prestaged media](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/79465d90-4831-4872-96c2-2062d80f5583?f=255&MSPPError=-2147217396#BKMK_CreatePrestagedMedia), the instructions provide for only single partition boot disks and therefore will fail when applied to Surface devices.
-
-Instructions for applying prestaged media to UEFI devices, such as Surface devices, can be found in the [How to apply Task Sequence Prestaged Media on multi-partitioned disks for BIOS or UEFI PCs in System Center Configuration Manager](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/system_center_configuration_manager_operating_system_deployment_support_blog/2014/04/02/how-to-apply-task-sequence-prestaged-media-on-multi-partitioned-disks-for-bios-or-uefi-pcs-in-system-center-configuration-manager/) blog post.
-
-## Licensing conflicts with OEM Activation 3.0
-
-Surface devices come preinstalled with a licensed copy of Windows. For example, Surface Pro 4 is preinstalled with Windows 10 Professional. The license key for this preinstalled copy of Windows is embedded in the firmware of the device with OEM Activation 3.0 (OA 3.0). When you run Windows installation media on a device with an OA 3.0 key, Windows setup automatically reads the license key and uses it to install and activate Windows. In most situations, this simplifies the reinstallation of Windows, because the user does not have to find or enter a license key.
-
-When you reimage a device by using Windows Enterprise, this embedded license key does not cause a conflict. This is because the installation media for Windows Enterprise is configured to install only an Enterprise edition of Windows and therefore is incompatible with the license key embedded in the system firmware. If a product key is not specified (such as when you intend to activate with Key Management Services [KMS] or Active Directory Based Activation), a Generic Volume License Key (GVLK) is used until Windows is activated by one of those technologies.
-
-However, issues may arise when organizations intend to use versions of Windows that are compatible with the firmware embedded key. For example, an organization that wants to install Windows 10 Professional on a Surface 3 device that originally shipped with Windows 10 Home edition may encounter difficulty when Windows setup automatically reads the Home edition key during installation and installs as Home edition rather than Professional. To avoid this conflict, you can use the Ei.cfg or Pid.txt file to explicitly instruct Windows setup to prompt for a product key, or you can enter a specific product key in the deployment task sequence. For more information, see [Windows Setup Edition Configuration and Product ID Files](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/hh824952.aspx). If you do not have a specific key, you can use the default product keys for Windows, which you can find in [Customize and deploy a Windows 10 operating system](https://dpcenter.microsoft.com/en/Windows/Build/cp-Windows-10-build) on the Device Partner Center.
-
-## Apply an asset tag during deployment
-
-Surface Studio, Surface Book, Surface Pro 4, Surface Pro 3, and Surface 3 devices all support the application of an asset tag in UEFI. This asset tag can be used to identify the device from UEFI even if the operating system fails, and it can also be queried from within the operating system. To read more about the Surface Asset Tag function, see the [Asset Tag Tool for Surface Pro 3](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/askcore/2014/10/20/asset-tag-tool-for-surface-pro-3/) blog post.
-
-To apply an asset tag using the [Surface Asset Tag CLI Utility](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=44076) during a Configuration Manager deployment task sequence, use the script and instructions found in the [Set Surface Asset Tag During a Configuration Manager Task Sequence](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/jchalfant/set-surface-pro-3-asset-tag-during-a-configuration-manager-task-sequence/) blog post.
-
-## Configure push-button reset
-
-When you deploy Windows to a Surface device, the push-button reset functionality of Windows is configured by default to revert the system back to a state where the environment is not yet configured. When the reset function is used, the system discards any installed applications and settings. Although in some situations it can be beneficial to restore the system to a state without applications and settings, in a professional environment this effectively renders the system unusable to the end user.
-
-Push-button reset can be configured, however, to restore the system configuration to a state where it is ready for use by the end user. Follow the process outlined in [Deploy push-button reset features](https://msdn.microsoft.com/windows/hardware/commercialize/manufacture/desktop/deploy-push-button-reset-features) to customize the push-button reset experience for your devices.
diff --git a/devices/surface/customize-the-oobe-for-surface-deployments.md b/devices/surface/customize-the-oobe-for-surface-deployments.md
deleted file mode 100644
index efc6802f8f..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/customize-the-oobe-for-surface-deployments.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,76 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Customize the OOBE for Surface deployments (Surface)
-description: This article will walk you through the process of customizing the Surface out-of-box experience for end users in your organization.
-ms.assetid: F6910315-9FA9-4297-8FA8-2C284A4B1D87
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: deploy, customize, automate, network, Pen, pair, boot
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.pagetype: surface, devices
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.audience: itpro
-ms.date: 10/21/2019
----
-
-# Customize the OOBE for Surface deployments
-
-This article describes customizing the Surface out-of-box experience for end users in your organization.
-
-It is common practice in a Windows deployment to customize the user experience for the first startup of deployed computers — the out-of-box experience, or OOBE.
-
->[!NOTE]
->OOBE is also often used to describe the phase, or configuration pass, of Windows setup during which the user experience is displayed. For more information about the OOBE phase of setup, see [How Configuration Passes Work](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn898581.aspx).
-
-In some scenarios, you may want to provide complete automation to ensure that at the end of a deployment, computers are ready for use without any interaction from the user. In other scenarios, you may want to leave key elements of the experience for users to perform necessary actions or select between important choices. For administrators deploying to Surface devices, each of these scenarios presents a unique challenge to overcome.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> This article does not apply to Surface Pro X. For more information, refer to [Deploying, managing, and servicing Surface Pro X](surface-pro-arm-app-management.md)
-
-This article provides a summary of the scenarios where a deployment might require additional steps. It also provides the required information to ensure that the desired experience is achieved on any newly deployed Surface device. This article is intended for administrators who are familiar with the deployment process, as well as concepts such as answer files and [reference images](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/deploy/create-a-windows-10-reference-image).
-
->[!NOTE]
->Although the OOBE phase of setup is still run during a deployment with an automated deployment solution such as the [Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=618117) or System Center Configuration Manager Operating System Deployment (OSD), it is automated by the settings supplied in the Deployment Wizard and task sequence. For more information see:
->- [Deploy Windows 10 with the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/deploy/deploy-windows-10-with-the-microsoft-deployment-toolkit)
->- [Deploy Windows 10 with System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/deploy/deploy-windows-10-with-system-center-2012-r2-configuration-manager)
-
-
-
-## Scenario 1: Wireless networking in OOBE with MDT 2013
-
-
-When a wireless network adapter is present during OOBE, the **Join a wireless network** page is displayed, which prompts a user to connect to a wireless network. This page is not automatically hidden by deployment technologies, including MDT 2013, and therefore will be displayed even when a deployment is configured for complete automation.
-
-To ensure that an automated deployment is not stopped by this page, the page must be hidden by configuring an additional setting in the answer file, **HideWirelessSetupInOOBE**. You can find additional information about the **HideWirelessSetupInOOBE** setting in [Unattended Windows Setup Reference](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/ff716213.aspx).
-
-## Scenario 2: Surface Pen pairing in OOBE
-
-
-When you first take a Surface Pro 3, Surface Pro 4, Surface Book, or Surface Studio out of the package and start it up, the first-run experience of the factory image includes a prompt that asks you to pair the included Surface Pen to the device. This prompt is only provided by the factory image that ships with the device and is not included in other images used for deployment, such as the Windows Enterprise installation media downloaded from the Volume Licensing Service Center. Because pairing the Bluetooth Surface Pen outside of this experience requires that you enter the Control Panel or PC Settings and manually pair a Bluetooth device, you may want to have users or a technician use this prompt to perform the pairing operation.
-
-To provide the factory Surface Pen pairing experience in OOBE, you must copy four files from the factory Surface image into the reference image. You can copy these files into the reference environment before you capture the reference image, or you can add them later by using Deployment Image Servicing and Management (DISM) to mount the image. The four required files are:
-
-- %windir%\\system32\\oobe\\info\\default\\1033\\oobe.xml
-- %windir%\\system32\\oobe\\info\\default\\1033\\PenPairing\_en-US.png
-- %windir%\\system32\\oobe\\info\\default\\1033\\PenError\_en-US.png
-- %windir%\\system32\\oobe\\info\\default\\1033\\PenSuccess\_en-US.png
-
->[!NOTE]
->You should copy the files from a factory image for the same model Surface device that you intend to deploy to. For example, you should use the files from a Surface Pro 7 to deploy to Surface Pro 7, and the files from Surface Book 2 to deploy Surface Book 2, but you should not use the files from a Surface Pro 7 to deploy Surface Book or Surface Pro 6.
-
-
-
-The step-by-step process for adding these required files to an image is described in [Deploying Surface Pro 3 Pen and OneNote Tips](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/askcore/2014/07/15/deploying-surface-pro-3-pen-and-onenote-tips/). This blog post also includes tips to ensure that the necessary updates for the Surface Pen Quick Note-Taking Experience are installed, which allows users to send notes to OneNote with a single click.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface/deploy-surface-app-with-windows-store-for-business.md b/devices/surface/deploy-surface-app-with-windows-store-for-business.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7c3f3bd079..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/deploy-surface-app-with-windows-store-for-business.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,186 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploy Surface app with Microsoft Store for Business or Microsoft Store for Education (Surface)
-description: Find out how to add and download Surface app with Microsoft Store for Business or Microsoft Store for Education, as well as install Surface app with PowerShell and MDT.
-keywords: surface app, app, deployment, customize
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.pagetype: surface, store
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.audience: itpro
-ms.date: 10/21/2019
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
----
-
-# Deploy Surface app with Microsoft Store for Business and Education
-
-**Applies to**
-
-- Surface Pro 7
-- Surface Laptop 3
-- Surface Pro 6
-- Surface Laptop 2
-- Surface Go
-- Surface Go with LTE
-- Surface Book 2
-- Surface Pro with LTE Advanced (Model 1807)
-- Surface Pro (Model 1796)
-- Surface Laptop
-- Surface Studio
-- Surface Studio 2
-- Surface Book
-- Surface Pro 4
-- Surface 3 LTE
-- Surface 3
-- Surface Pro 3
-
-
-The Surface app is a lightweight Microsoft Store app that provides control of many Surface-specific settings and options, including:
-
-* Enable or disable the Windows button on the Surface device
-
-* Adjust the sensitivity of a Surface Pen
-
-* Customize Surface Pen button actions
-
-* Enable or disable Surface audio enhancements
-
-* Quick access to support documentation and information for your device
-
-Customers using Windows Update will ordinarily receive Surface app as part of automatic updates. But if your organization is preparing images for deployment to your Surface devices, you may want to include the Surface app (formerly called the Surface Hub) in your imaging and deployment process instead of requiring users of each individual device to download and install the app from the Microsoft Store or your Microsoft Store for Business.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> This article does not apply to Surface Pro X. For more information, refer to [Deploying, managing, and servicing Surface Pro X](surface-pro-arm-app-management.md)
-
-## Surface app overview
-
-The Surface app is available as a free download from the [Microsoft Store](https://www.microsoft.com/store/apps/Surface/9WZDNCRFJB8P). Users can download and install it from the Microsoft Store, but if your organization uses Microsoft Store for Business instead, you will need to add it to your store’s inventory and possibly include the app as part of your Windows deployment process. These processes are discussed throughout this article. For more information about Microsoft Store for Business, see [Microsoft Store for Business](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-store/) in the Windows TechCenter.
-
-## Add Surface app to a Microsoft Store for Business account
-
-Before users can install or deploy an app from a company’s Microsoft Store for Business account, the desired app(s) must first be made available and licensed to the users of a business.
-
-1. If you have not already done so, create a [Microsoft Store for Business account](https://www.microsoft.com/business-store).
-
-2. Log on to the portal.
-
-3. Enable offline licensing: click **Manage->Store settings**, and then select the **Show offline licensed apps to people shopping in the store** checkbox, as shown in Figure 1. For more information about Microsoft Store for Business app licensing models, see [Apps in Microsoft Store for Business and Education](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-store/).
- 
- *Figure 1. Enable apps for offline use*
-
-4. Add Surface app to your Microsoft Store for Business account by following this procedure:
- * Click the **Shop** menu.
- * In the search box, type **Surface app**, and then click the search icon.
- * After the Surface app is presented in the search results, click the app’s icon.
- * You are presented with a choice (select **Online** or **Offline**), as shown in Figure 2.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 2. Select the Offline licensing mode and add the app to your inventory*
-
- * Click **Offline** to select the Offline licensing mode.
- * Click **Get the app** to add the app to your Microsoft Store for Business inventory. As shown in Figure 3, you’ll see a dialog box that prompts you to acknowledge that offline apps can be deployed using a management tool or downloaded from the company’s inventory page in their private store.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 3. Offline-licensed app acknowledgement*
- * Click **OK**.
-
-## Download Surface app from a Microsoft Store for Business account
-After you add an app to the Microsoft Store for Business account in Offline mode, you can download and add the app as an AppxBundle to a deployment share.
-1. Log on to the Microsoft Store for Business account at https://businessstore.microsoft.com.
-2. Click **Manage->Apps & software**. A list of all of your company’s apps is displayed, including the Surface app you added in the [Add Surface app to a Microsoft Store for Business account](#add-surface-app-to-a-microsoft-store-for-business-account) section of this article.
-3. Under **Actions**, click the ellipsis (**…**), and then click **Download for offline use** for the Surface app.
-4. Select the desired **Platform** and **Architecture** options from the available selections for the selected app, as shown in Figure 4.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 4. Download the AppxBundle package for an app*
-5. Click **Download**. The AppxBundle package will be downloaded. Make sure you note the path of the downloaded file because you’ll need that later in this article.
-6. Click either the **Encoded license** or **Unencoded license** option. Use the Encoded license option with management tools like System Center Configuration Manager or when you use Windows Configuration Designer to create a provisioning package. Select the Unencoded license option when you use Deployment Image Servicing and Management (DISM) or deployment solutions based on imaging, including the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT).
-7. Click **Generate** to generate and download the license for the app. Make sure you note the path of the license file because you’ll need that later in this article.
-
->[!NOTE]
->When you download an app for offline use, such as the Surface app, you may notice a section at the bottom of the page labeled **Required frameworks**. Your target computers must have the frameworks installed for the app to run, so you may need to repeat the download process for each of the required frameworks for your architecture (either x86 or x64) and also include them as part of your Windows deployment discussed later in this article.
-
-Figure 5 shows the required frameworks for the Surface app.
-
-
-
-*Figure 5. Required frameworks for the Surface app*
-
->[!NOTE]
->The version numbers of the Surface app and required frameworks will change as the apps are updated. Check for the latest version of Surface app and each framework in Microsoft Store for Business. Always use the Surface app and recommended framework versions as provided by Microsoft Store for Business. Using outdated frameworks or the incorrect versions may result in errors or application crashes.
-
-To download the required frameworks for the Surface app, follow these steps:
-1. Click the **Download** button under **Microsoft.VCLibs.140.00_14.0.23816.0_x64__8wekyb3d8bbwe**. This downloads the Microsoft.VCLibs.140.00_14.0.23816.0_x64__8wekyb3d8bbwe.Appx file to your specified folder.
-2. Click the **Download** button under **Microsoft.NET.Native.Runtime.1.1_1.1.23406.0_x64__8wekyb3d8bbwe**. This downloads the Microsoft.NET.Native.Runtime.1.1_1.1.23406.0_x64__8wekyb3d8bbwe.Appx file to your specified folder.
-
->[!NOTE]
->Only the 64-bit (x64) version of each framework is required for Surface devices. Surface devices are native 64-bit UEFI devices and are not compatible with 32-bit (x86) versions of Windows that would require 32-bit frameworks.
-
-## Install Surface app on your computer with PowerShell
-The following procedure provisions the Surface app onto your computer and makes it available for any user accounts created on the computer afterwards.
-1. Using the procedure described in the [How to download Surface app from a Microsoft Store for Business account](#download-surface-app-from-a-microsoft-store-for-business-account) section of this article, download the Surface app AppxBundle and license file.
-2. Begin an elevated PowerShell session.
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >If you don’t run PowerShell as an Administrator, the session won’t have the required permissions to install the app.
-
-3. In the elevated PowerShell session, copy and paste the following command:
- ```
- Add-AppxProvisionedPackage –Online –PackagePath \ Microsoft.SurfaceHub_10.0.342.0_neutral_~_8wekyb3d8bbwe.AppxBundle –LicensePath \ Microsoft.SurfaceHub_8wekyb3d8bbwe_a53ef8ab-9dbd-dec1-46c5-7b664d4dd003.xml
- ```
-
- Where `` is the folder where you downloaded the AppxBundle and license file from the Microsoft Store for Business account.
-
- For example, if you downloaded the files to c:\Temp, the command you run is:
- ````
- Add-AppxProvisionedPackage –Online –PackagePath c:\Temp\ Microsoft.SurfaceHub_10.0.342.0_neutral_~_8wekyb3d8bbwe.AppxBundle –LicensePath c:\Temp\ Microsoft.SurfaceHub_8wekyb3d8bbwe_a53ef8ab-9dbd-dec1-46c5-7b664d4dd003.xml
- ```
-
-4. The Surface app will now be available on your current Windows computer.
-
-Before the Surface app is functional on the computer where it has been provisioned, you must also provision the frameworks described earlier in this article. To provision these frameworks, use the following procedure in the elevated PowerShell session you used to provision the Surface app.
-
-5. In the elevated PowerShell session, copy and paste the following command:
- ```
- Add-AppxProvisionedPackage –Online –SkipLicense –PackagePath \Microsoft.VCLibs.140.00_14.0.23816.0_x64__8wekyb3d8bbwe.Appx
- ```
-6. In the elevated PowerShell session, copy and paste the following command:
- ```
- Add-AppxProvisionedPackage –Online –SkipLicense –PackagePath \Microsoft.NET.Native.Runtime.1.1_1.1.23406.0_x64__8wekyb3d8bbwe.Appx
- ```
-
-## Install Surface app with MDT
-The following procedure uses MDT to automate installation of the Surface app at the time of deployment. The application is provisioned automatically by MDT during deployment and thus you can use this process with existing images. This is the recommended process to deploy the Surface app as part of a Windows deployment to Surface devices because it does not reduce the cross platform compatibility of the Windows image.
-1. Using the procedure described [earlier in this article](#download-surface-app-from-a-microsoft-store-for-business-account), download the Surface app AppxBundle and license file.
-2. Using the New Application Wizard in the MDT Deployment Workbench, import the downloaded files as a new **Application with source files**.
-3. On the **Command Details** page of the New Application Wizard, specify the default **Working Directory** and for the **Command** specify the file name of the AppxBundle, as follows:
-
- * Command:
- ```
- Microsoft.SurfaceHub_10.0.342.0_neutral_~_8wekyb3d8bbwe.AppxBundle
- ```
- * Working Directory: %DEPLOYROOT%\Applications\SurfaceApp
-
-For the Surface app to function on the target computer, it will also require the frameworks described earlier in this article. Use the following procedure to import the frameworks required for the Surface app into MDT and to configure them as dependencies.
-1. Using the procedure described earlier in this article, download the framework files. Store each framework in a separate folder.
-2. Using the New Application Wizard in the MDT Deployment Workbench, import the downloaded files as a new **Application with source files**.
-3. On the **Command Details** page, type the file name of each application you downloaded in the **Command** field and the default Working Directory.
-
-To configure the frameworks as dependencies of the Surface app, use this process:
-1. Open the properties of the Surface app in the MDT Deployment Workbench.
-2. Click the **Dependencies** tab, and then click **Add**.
-3. Select the check box for each framework using the name you provided in the New Application Wizard.
-
-After import, the Surface app will be available for selection in the **Applications** step of the Windows Deployment Wizard. You can also install the application automatically by specifying the application in the deployment task sequence by following this process:
-1. Open your deployment task sequence in the MDT Deployment Workbench.
-2. Add a new **Install Application** task in the **State Restore** section of deployment.
-3. Select **Install a single application** and specify the **Surface App** as the **Application to be installed**.
-
-For more information about including apps into your Windows deployments, see [Deploy Windows 10 with the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/deploy/deploy-windows-10-with-the-microsoft-deployment-toolkit).
diff --git a/devices/surface/deploy-the-latest-firmware-and-drivers-for-surface-devices.md b/devices/surface/deploy-the-latest-firmware-and-drivers-for-surface-devices.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 92527470f2..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/deploy-the-latest-firmware-and-drivers-for-surface-devices.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,105 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploy the latest firmware and drivers for Surface devices (Surface)
-description: This article provides a list of the available downloads for Surface devices and links to download the drivers and firmware for your device.
-ms.assetid: 7662BF68-8BF7-43F7-81F5-3580A770294A
-ms.reviewer: dansimp
-manager: kaushika
-keywords: update Surface, newest, latest, download, firmware, driver, tablet, hardware, device
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.pagetype: surface, devices
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.audience: itpro
-ms.date: 11/25/2019
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
----
-
-# Deploy the latest firmware and drivers for Surface devices
-
-> **Home users:** This article is only intended for technical support agents and IT professionals, and applies only to Surface devices. If you're looking for help to install Surface updates or firmware on a home device, please see [Update Surface firmware and Windows 10](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4023505).
-
-Under typical conditions, Windows Update automatically keeps Windows Surface devices up-to-date by downloading and installing the latest device drivers and firmware. However, you may sometimes have to download and install updates manually. For example, you may have to manually manage updates when you deploy a new version of Windows.
-
-## Downloading MSI files
-
-[Download drivers and firmware for Surface](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4023482/surface-download-drivers-and-firmware-for-surface) provides links to download installation files for the following:
-
-- Administrative tools
-- Drivers for accessories
-- For some devices, updates for Windows
-
-## Deploying MSI files
-
-Specific versions of Windows 10 have separate MSI files. Each MSI file contains all required cumulative driver and firmware updates for Surface devices.
-
-The MSI file names contain useful information, including the minimum supported Windows build number that is required to install the drivers and firmware. For example, to install the drivers that are contained in SurfaceBook_Win10_17763_19.080.2031.0.msi on a Surface Book, the device must be running Windows 10 Fall Creators Update, version 1709 or later.
-
-For more information about build numbers for each Windows version, see [Windows 10 release information](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/windows-10/release-information).
-
-### Surface MSI naming convention
-
-Beginning in August, 2019, MSI files have used the following naming convention:
-
-> *Product*\_*Windows release*\_*Windows build number*\_*Version number*\_*Revision of version number (typically zero)*.
-
-**Example**
-
-Consider the following MSI file:
-
-> SurfacePro6_Win10_18362_19.073.44195_0.msi
-
-This file name provides the following information:
-
-- **Product:** SurfacePro6
-- **Windows release:** Win10
-- **Build:** 18362
-- **Version:** 19.073.44195 – This shows the date and time that the file was created, as follows:
- - **Year:** 19 (2019)
- - **Month and week:** 073 (third week of July)
- - **Minute of the month:** 44195
-- **Revision of version:** 0 (first release of this version)
-
-### Legacy Surface MSI naming convention
-
-Legacy MSI files (files that were built before August, 2019) followed the same overall naming formula, but used a different method to derive the version number.
-
-**Example**
-
-Consider the following MSI file:
-
-> SurfacePro6_Win10_16299_1900307_0.msi
-
-This file name provides the following information:
-
-- **Product:** SurfacePro6
-- **Windows release:** Win10
-- **Build:** 16299
-- **Version:** 1900307 – This shows the date that the file was created and its position in the release sequence, as follows:
- - **Year:** 19 (2019)
- - **Number of release:** 003 (third release of the year)
- - **Product version number:** 07 (Surface Pro 6 is officially the seventh version of Surface Pro)
-- **Revision of version:** 0 (first release of this version)
-
-Use the **version** number to determine the latest files that contain the most recent security updates. For example, consider the following list:
-
-- SurfacePro6_Win10_16299_1900307_0.msi
-- SurfacePro6_Win10_17134_1808507_3.msi
-- SurfacePro6_Win10_17763_1808707_3.msi
-
-In this list, the newest file is the first file (SurfacePro6_Win10_16299_1900307_0.msi). Its **Version** field has the newest date (2019). The other files are from 2018.
-
-## Supported devices
-
-For downloadable MSI files for devices that run Surface Pro 2 and later versions, see [Download drivers and firmware for Surface](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4023482/surface-download-drivers-and-firmware-for-surface). This article contains information about MSI files for the newest Surface devices such as Surface Pro 7, Surface Pro X, and Surface Laptop 3, as they are released.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> There are no downloadable firmware or driver updates available for Surface devices that run Windows RT, including Surface RT and Surface 2. To update these devices, use Windows Update.
-
-For more information about how to deploy Surface drivers and firmware, see the following articles:
-
-- [Manage Surface driver and firmware updates](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface/manage-surface-pro-3-firmware-updates)
-
-- [Surface for Business help](https://www.microsoft.com/surface/support/business)
diff --git a/devices/surface/deploy-windows-10-to-surface-devices-with-mdt.md b/devices/surface/deploy-windows-10-to-surface-devices-with-mdt.md
deleted file mode 100644
index fe487f8337..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/deploy-windows-10-to-surface-devices-with-mdt.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,809 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploy Windows 10 to Surface devices with Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (Surface)
-description: Walk through the recommended process of how to deploy Windows 10 to your Surface devices with the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit.
-keywords: windows 10 surface, automate, customize, mdt
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.pagetype: surface
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.audience: itpro
-ms.date: 10/21/2019
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
----
-
-# Deploy Windows 10 to Surface devices with Microsoft Deployment Toolkit
-
-**Applies to**
-
-- Surface Studio and later
-- Surface Pro 4 and later
-- Surface Book and later
-- Surface Laptop and later
-- Surface Go
-- Surface 3
-- Windows 10
-
-This article walks you through the recommended process to deploy Windows 10 to Surface devices with Microsoft deployment technologies. The process described in this article yields a complete Windows 10 environment including updated firmware and drivers for your Surface device along with applications like Microsoft Office 365 and the Surface app.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> MDT is not currently supported on Surface Pro X. For more information, refer to [Deploying, managing, and servicing Surface Pro X](surface-pro-arm-app-management.md)
-
-When the process is complete, the Surface device will be ready for use by the end user. You can customize this process to include your own applications and configuration to meet the needs of your organization. You can also follow the guidance provided in this article to integrate deployment to Surface devices into existing deployment strategies.
-
-By following the procedures in this article, you can create an up-to-date reference image and deploy this image to your Surface devices, a process known as *reimaging*. Reimaging will erase and overwrite the existing environment on your Surface devices. This process allows you to rapidly configure your Surface devices with identical environments that can be configured to precisely fit your organization’s requirements.
-
-An alternative to the reimaging process is an upgrade process. The upgrade process is non-destructive and instead of erasing the existing environment on your Surface device, it allows you to install Windows 10 while retaining your user data, applications, and settings. You can read about how to manage and automate the upgrade process of Surface devices to Windows 10 at [Upgrade Surface devices to Windows 10 with MDT](upgrade-surface-devices-to-windows-10-with-mdt.md).
-
-The goal of the deployment process presented in this article is automation. By leveraging the many technologies and tools available from Microsoft, you can create a process that requires only a single touch on the devices being deployed. The automation can load the deployment environment; format the device; prepare an updated Windows image with the drivers required for the device; apply that image to the device; configure the Windows environment with licensing, membership in a domain, and user accounts; install applications; apply any Windows updates that were not included in the reference image; and log out.
-
-By automating each aspect of the deployment process, you not only greatly decrease the effort involved, but you create a process that can be easily repeated and where human error becomes less of a factor. Take for example a scenario where you create a reference image for the device manually, but you accidentally install conflicting applications and cause the image to become unstable. In this scenario you have no choice but to begin again the manual process of creating your image. If in this same scenario you had automated the reference image creation process, you could repair the conflict by simply editing a step in the task sequence and then re-running the task sequence.
-
-## Deployment tools
-
-The deployment process described in this article leverages a number of Microsoft deployment tools and technologies. Some of these tools and technologies are included in Windows client and Windows Server, such as Hyper-V and Windows Deployment Services (WDS), while others are available as free downloads from the [Microsoft Download Center](https://www.microsoft.com/download/windows.aspx).
-
-#### Microsoft Deployment Toolkit
-
-The Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT) is the primary component of a Windows deployment. It serves as a unified interface for most of the Microsoft deployment tools and technologies, such as the Windows Assessment and Deployment Kit (Windows ADK), Windows System Image Manager (Windows SIM), Deployment Image Servicing and Management (DISM), User State Migration Tool (USMT), and many other tools and technologies. Each of these is discussed throughout this article. The unified interface, called the *Deployment Workbench*, facilitates automation of the deployment process through a series of stored deployment procedures, known as a *task sequence*. Along with these task sequences and the many scripts and tools that MDT provides, the resources for a Windows deployment (driver files, application installation files, and image files) are stored in a network share known as the *deployment share*.
-
-You can download and find out more about MDT at [Microsoft Deployment Toolkit](https://technet.microsoft.com/windows/dn475741).
-
-#### Windows Assessment and Deployment Kit
-
-Although MDT is the tool you will interact with most during the deployment process, the deployment tools found in the Windows ADK perform most of the deployment tasks during the deployment process. The resources for deployment are held within the MDT deployment share, but it is the collection of tools included in Windows ADK that access the image files, stage drivers and Windows updates, run the deployment experience, provide instructions to Windows Setup, and back up and restore user data.
-
-You can download and find out more about the Windows ADK at [Download the Windows ADK](https://developer.microsoft.com/windows/hardware/windows-assessment-deployment-kit#windowsadk).
-
-#### Windows 10 installation media
-
-Before you can perform a deployment with MDT, you must first supply a set of operating system installation files and an operating system image. These files and image can be found on the physical installation media (DVD) for Windows 10. You can also find these files in the disk image (ISO file) for Windows 10, which you can download from the [Volume Licensing Service Center (VLSC)](https://www.microsoft.com/Licensing/servicecenter/default.aspx).
-
-
->[!NOTE]
->The installation media generated from the [Get Windows 10](https://www.microsoft.com/software-download/windows10/) page differs from physical media or media downloaded from the VLSC, in that it contains an image file in Electronic Software Download (ESD) format rather than in the Windows Imaging (WIM) format. Installation media with an image file in WIM format is required for use with MDT. Installation media from the Get Windows 10 page cannot be used for Windows deployment with MDT.
-
-
-#### Windows Server
-
-Although MDT can be installed on a Windows client, to take full advantage of Windows Deployment Services’ ability to network boot, a full Windows Server environment is recommended. To provide network boot for UEFI devices like Surface with WDS, you will need Windows Server 2008 R2 or later.
-
-
->[!NOTE]
->To evaluate the deployment process for Surface devices or to test the deployment process described in this article with the upcoming release of Windows Server 2016, you can download evaluation and preview versions from the [TechNet Evaluation Center](https://www.microsoft.com/evalcenter).
-
-
-#### Windows Deployment Services
-
-Windows Deployment Services (WDS) is leveraged to facilitate network boot capabilities provided by the Preboot Execution Environment (PXE) server. The boot media generated by MDT is loaded onto the Surface device simply by pressing Enter at the prompt when the device attempts to boot from the attached network adapter or Surface Dock.
-
-#### Hyper-V virtualization platform
-
-The process of creating a reference image should always be performed in a virtual environment. When you use a virtual machine as the platform to build your reference image, you eliminate the need for installation of additional drivers. The drivers for a Hyper-V virtual machine are included by default in the factory Windows 10 image. When you avoid the installation of additional drivers – especially complex drivers that include application components like control panel applications – you ensure that the image created by your reference image process will be as universally compatible as possible.
-
->[!NOTE]
->A Generation 1 virtual machine is recommended for the preparation of a reference image in a Hyper-V virtual environment.
-
-Because customizations are performed by MDT at the time of deployment, the goal of reference image creation is not to perform customization but to increase performance during deployment by reducing the number of actions that need to occur on each deployed device. The biggest action that can slow down an MDT deployment is the installation of Windows updates. When MDT performs this step during the deployment process, it downloads the updates on each deployed device and installs them. By installing Windows updates in your reference image, the updates are already installed when the image is deployed to the device and the MDT update process only needs to install updates that are new since the image was created or are applicable to products other than Windows (for example, Microsoft Office updates).
-
-
->[!NOTE]
->Hyper-V is available not only on Windows Server, but also on Windows clients, including Professional and Enterprise editions of Windows 8, Windows 8.1, and Windows 10. Find out more at [Client Hyper-V on Windows 10](https://msdn.microsoft.com/virtualization/hyperv_on_windows/windows_welcome) and [Client Hyper-V on Windows 8 and Windows 8.1](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/hh857623) in the TechNet Library. Hyper-V is also available as a standalone product, Microsoft Hyper-V Server, at no cost. You can download [Microsoft Hyper-V Server 2012 R2](https://www.microsoft.com/evalcenter/evaluate-hyper-v-server-2012-r2) or [Microsoft Hyper-V Server 2016 Technical Preview](https://www.microsoft.com/evalcenter/evaluate-hyper-v-server-technical-preview) from the TechNet Evaluation Center.
-
-
-#### Surface firmware and drivers
-
-For your deployed Windows environment to function correctly on your Surface devices, you will need to install the drivers used by Windows to communicate with the components of your device. These drivers are available for download in the Microsoft Download Center for each Surface device. You can find the correct Microsoft Download Center page for your device at [Download the latest firmware and drivers for Surface devices](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface/deploy-the-latest-firmware-and-drivers-for-surface-devices).
-
-When you browse to the specific Microsoft Download Center page for your device, you will notice that there are two files available for download. One file is a Windows Installer (.msi) file. This file is used to update drivers on devices that are already running Windows or that have device management solutions. The other file is an archive (.zip) file. This file contains the individual driver files that are used during deployment, or for manual installation with Device Manager. The file that you will need to download is the .zip archive file. You can read more about the difference between the firmware and driver pack file types at [Manage Surface driver and firmware updates](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface/manage-surface-pro-3-firmware-updates).
-
-
-In addition to the driver files that help Windows communicate with the hardware components of the Surface device, the .zip file you download will also contain firmware updates. These firmware updates will update the instructions used by the device hardware to communicate between components and Windows. The firmware of Surface device components is updated by installation of specific driver files and thus is installed along with the other drivers during deployment. The firmware of an out-of-date Surface device is thus updated when the device reboots during and after the Windows deployment process.
-
->[!NOTE]
->Beginning in Windows 10, the drivers for Surface devices are included in the Windows Preinstallation Environment (WinPE). In earlier versions of Windows, specific drivers (like network drivers) had to be imported and configured in MDT for use in WinPE to successfully deploy to Surface devices.
-
-#### Application installation files
-
-In addition to the drivers that are used by Windows to communicate with the Surface device’s hardware and components, you will also need to provide the installation files for any applications that you want to install on your deployed Surface devices. To automate the deployment of an application, you will also need to determine the command-line instructions for that application to perform a silent installation. In this article, the Surface app and Microsoft Office 365 will be installed as examples of application installation. The application installation process can be used with any application with installation files that can be launched from command line.
-
->[!NOTE]
->If the application files for your application are stored on your organization’s network and will be accessible from your Surface devices during the deployment process, you can deploy that application directly from that network location. To use installation files from a network location, use the **Install Application Without Source Files or Elsewhere on the Network** option in the MDT New Application Wizard, which is described in the [Import applications](#import-applications) section later in this article.
-
-#### Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator
-
-If you want to deploy only to Surface devices or you want an accelerated method to perform deployment to Surface devices, you can use the Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator to generate an MDT deployment share complete with Surface device drivers, Surface apps, and pre-configured task sequences to create a reference image and perform deployment to Surface devices. Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator can automatically import boot images into WDS and prepare WDS for network boot (PXE). You can download the Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator from the [Surface Tools for IT](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=46703) page in the Microsoft Download Center.
-
-### Install the deployment tools
-
-Before you can configure the deployment environment with Windows images, drivers, and applications, you must first install the deployment tools that will be used throughout the deployment process. The three main tools to be installed are WDS, Windows ADK, and MDT. WDS provides the capacity for network boot, Windows ADK provides several deployment tools that perform specific deployment tasks, and MDT provides automation and a central interface from which to manage and control the deployment process.
-
-To boot from the network with either your reference virtual machines or your Surface devices, your deployment environment must include a Windows Server environment. The Windows Server environment is required to install WDS and the WDS PXE server. Without PXE support, you will be required to create physical boot media, such as a USB stick to perform your deployment – MDT and Windows ADK will still be required, but Windows Server is not required. Both MDT and Windows ADK can be installed on a Windows client and perform a Windows deployment.
-
->[!NOTE]
->To download deployment tools directly to Windows Server, you must disable [Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dd883248). On Windows Server 2012 R2, this can be performed directly through the **Server Manager** option on the **Local Server** tab. In the **Properties** section, **IE Enhanced Security Configuration** can be found on the right side. You may also need to enable the **File Download** option for the **Internet** zone through the **Security** tab of **Internet Options**.
-
-#### Install Windows Deployment Services
-
-Windows Deployment Services (WDS) is a Windows Server role. To add the WDS role to a Windows Server 2012 R2 environment, use the Add Roles and Features Wizard, as shown in Figure 1. Start the Add Roles and Features Wizard from the **Manage** button of **Server Manager**. Install both the Deployment Server and Transport Server role services.
-
-
-
-*Figure 1. Install the Windows Deployment Services server role*
-
-After the WDS role is installed, you need to configure WDS. You can begin the configuration process from the WDS node of Server Manager by right-clicking your server’s name and then clicking **Windows Deployment Services Management Console**. In the **Windows Deployment Services** window, expand the **Servers** node to find your server, right-click your server, and then click **Configure** in the menu to start the Windows Deployment Services Configuration Wizard, as shown in Figure 2.
-
-
-
-*Figure 2. Configure PXE response for Windows Deployment Services*
-
->[!NOTE]
->Before you configure WDS make sure you have a local NTFS volume that is not your system drive (C:) available for use with WDS. This volume is used to store WDS boot images, deployment images, and configuration.
-
-Using the Windows Deployment Services Configuration Wizard, configure WDS to fit the needs of your organization. You can find detailed instructions for the installation and configuration of WDS at [Windows Deployment Services Getting Started Guide for Windows Server 2012](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/jj648426). On the **PXE Server Initial Settings** page, be sure to configure WDS so that it will respond to your Surface devices when they attempt to boot from the network. If you have already installed WDS or need to change your PXE server response settings, you can do so on the **PXE Response** tab of the **Properties** of your server in the Windows Deployment Services Management Console.
-
->[!NOTE]
->You will add boot images to WDS when you update your boot images in MDT. You do not need to add boot images or Windows images to WDS when you configure the role.
-
-#### Install Windows Assessment and Deployment Kit
-
-To install Windows ADK, run the Adksetup.exe file that you downloaded from [Download the Windows ADK](https://developer.microsoft.com/windows/hardware/windows-assessment-deployment-kit#adkwin10). Windows ADK must be installed before MDT. You should always download and use the most recent version of Windows ADK. A new version is usually released corresponding with each new version of Windows.
-
->[!NOTE]
->You can also use the Adksetup.exe file to download the Windows ADK installation files locally for use on other devices.
-
-When you get to the **Select the features you want to install** page, you only need to select the **Deployment Tools** and **Windows Preinstallation Environment (Windows PE)** check boxes to deploy Windows 10 using MDT, as shown in Figure 3.
-
-
-
-*Figure 3. Only Deployment Tools and Windows PE options are required for deployment with MDT*
-
-#### Install Microsoft Deployment Toolkit
-
-After the Windows ADK installation completes successfully, you can install MDT. When you download MDT, ensure that you download the version that matches the architecture of your deployment server environment. For Windows Server the architecture is 64-bit. Download the MDT installation file that ends in **x64**. When MDT is installed you can use the default options during the installation wizard, as shown in Figure 4.
-
-
-
-*Figure 4. Install the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit with default options*
-
-Before you can open the MDT Deployment Workbench, you must enable execution of scripts in PowerShell. If you do not do this, the following error message may be displayed: *"Initialization Error PowerShell is required to use the Deployment Workbench. Please install PowerShell then relaunch Deployment Workbench."*
-
-To enable the execution of scripts, run the following cmdlet in PowerShell as an Administrator:
-
- `Set-ExecutionPolicy RemoteSigned -Scope CurrentUser`
-
-## Create a reference image
-
-Now that you have installed the required tools, you can begin the first step of customizing your deployment environment to your needs – create a reference image. Because the reference image should be created in a virtual machine where there is no need for drivers to be installed, and because the reference image will not include applications, you can use the MDT deployment environment almost entirely with default settings.
-
-### Create a deployment share
-
-Now that you have the tools installed, the next step is to configure MDT for the creation of a reference image. Before you can perform the process of creating a reference image, MDT needs to be set up with a repository for scripts, images, and other deployment resources. This repository is known as the *deployment share*. After the deployment share is created, you must supply MDT with a complete set of Windows 10 installation files, the last set of tools required before MDT can perform reference image creation.
-
-To create the deployment share, follow these steps:
-
-1. Open the Deployment Workbench from your Start menu or Start screen, as shown in Figure 5.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 5. The MDT Deployment Workbench*
-
-2. Right-click the **Deployment Shares** folder, and then click **New Deployment Share** to start the New Deployment Share Wizard, as shown in Figure 6.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 6. The Summary page of the New Deployment Share Wizard*
-
-3. Create a new deployment share with New Deployment Share Wizard with the following steps:
-
- * **Path** – Specify a local folder where the deployment share will reside, and then click **Next**.
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >Like the WDS remote installation folder, it is recommended that you put this folder on an NTFS volume that is not your system volume.
-
- * **Share** – Specify a name for the network share under which the local folder specified on the **Path** page will be shared, and then click **Next**.
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >The share name cannot contain spaces.
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >You can use a Dollar Sign (**$**) to hide your network share so that it will not be displayed when users browse the available network shares on the server in File Explorer.
-
- * **Descriptive Name** – Enter a descriptive name for the network share (this descriptive name can contain spaces), and then click **Next**. The descriptive name will be the name of the folder as it appears in the Deployment Workbench.
- * **Options** – You can accept the default options on this page. Click **Next**.
- * **Summary** – Review the specified configuration on this page before you click **Next** to begin creation of the deployment share.
- * **Progress** – While the deployment share is being created, a progress bar is displayed on this page to indicate the status of the deployment share creation process.
- * **Confirmation** – When the deployment share creation process completes, the success of the process is displayed on this page. Click **Finish** to complete the New Deployment Share Wizard.
-
-4. When the New Deployment Share Wizard is complete, you can expand the Deployment Shares folder to find your newly created deployment share.
-5. You can expand your deployment share, where you will find several folders for the resources, scripts, and components of your MDT deployment environment are stored.
-
-To secure the deployment share and prevent unauthorized access to the deployment resources, you can create a local user on the deployment share host and configure permissions for that user to have read-only access to the deployment share only. It is especially important to secure access to the deployment share if you intend to automate the logon to the deployment share during the deployment boot process. By automating the logon to the deployment share during the boot of deployment media, the credentials for that logon are stored in plaintext in the bootstrap.ini file on the boot media.
-
->[!NOTE]
->If you intend to capture images (such as the reference image) with this user, the user must also have write permission on the Captures folder in the MDT deployment share.
-
-You now have an empty deployment share that is ready for you to add the resources that will be required for reference image creation and deployment to Surface devices.
-
-### Import Windows installation files
-
-The first resources that are required to perform a deployment of Windows are the installation files from Windows 10 installation media. Even if you have an already prepared reference image, you still need to supply the unaltered installation files from your installation media. The source of these files can be a physical disk, or it can be an ISO file like the download from the Volume Licensing Service Center (VLSC).
-
->[!NOTE]
->A 64-bit operating system is required for compatibility with Surface Studio, Surface Pro 4, Surface Book, Surface Pro 3, and Surface 3.
-
-To import Windows 10 installation files, follow these steps:
-
-1. Right-click the **Operating Systems** folder under your deployment share in the Deployment Workbench, and then click **New Folder** to open the **New Folder** page, as shown in Figure 7.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 7. Create a new folder on the New Folder page*
-
-2. On the **New Folder** page a series of steps is displayed, as follows:
- * **General Settings** – Enter a name for the folder in the **Folder Name** field (for example, Windows 10 Enterprise), add any comments you want in the **Comments** field, and then click **Next**.
- * **Summary** – Review the specified configuration of the new folder on this page, and then click **Next**.
- * **Progress** – A progress bar will be displayed on this page while the folder is created. This page will likely pass very quickly.
- * **Confirmation** – When the new folder has been created, a **Confirmation** page displays the success of the operation. Click **Finish** to close the **New Folder** page.
-3. Expand the Operating Systems folder to see the newly created folder.
-4. Right-click the newly created folder, and then click **Import Operating System** to launch the Import Operating System Wizard, as shown in Figure 8.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 8. Import source files with the Import Operating System Wizard*
-
-5. The Import Operating System Wizard walks you through the import of your operating system files, as follows:
- * **OS Type** – Click **Full Set of Source Files** to specify that you are importing the Windows source files from installation media, and then click **Next**.
- * **Source** – Click **Browse**, move to and select the folder or drive where your installation files are found, and then click **Next**.
- * **Destination** – Enter a name for the new folder that will be created to hold the installation files, and then click **Next**.
- * **Summary** – Review the specified configuration on this page before you click **Next** to begin the import process.
- * **Progress** – While the installation files are imported, a progress bar is displayed on this page.
- * **Confirmation** – When the operating system import process completes, the success of the process is displayed on this page. Click **Finish** to complete Import Operating System Wizard.
-6. Expand the folder you created in Step 1 to see the entry for your newly imported installation files for Windows 10.
-
-Now that you’ve imported the installation files from the installation media, you have the files that MDT needs to create the reference image and you are ready to instruct MDT how to create the reference image to your specifications.
-
-### Create reference image task sequence
-
-As described in the [Deployment tools](#deployment-tools) section of this article, the goal of creating a reference image is to keep the Windows environment as simple as possible while performing tasks that would be common to all devices being deployed. You should now have a basic MDT deployment share configured with default options and a set of unaltered, factory installation files for Windows 10. This simple configuration is perfect for reference image creation because the deployment share contains no applications or drivers to interfere with the process.
-
->[!NOTE]
->For some organizations keeping a simple deployment share without applications or drivers is the simplest solution for creation of reference images. You can easily connect to more than one deployment share from a single Deployment Workbench and copy images from a simple, reference-image-only deployment share to a production deployment share complete with drivers and applications.
-
-To create the reference image task sequence, follow these steps:
-
-1. Right-click the **Task Sequences** folder under your deployment share in the Deployment Workbench, and then click **New Task Sequence** to start the New Task Sequence Wizard, as shown in Figure 9.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 9. Create a new task sequence to deploy and update a Windows 10 reference environment*
-
-2. The New Task Sequence Wizard presents a series of steps, as follows:
- * **General Settings** – Enter an identifier for the reference image task sequence in the **Task Sequence ID** field, a name for the reference image task sequence in the **Task Sequence Name** field, and any comments for the reference image task sequence in the **Task Sequence Comments** field, and then click **Next**.
- >[!NOTE]
- >The **Task Sequence ID** field cannot contain spaces and can be a maximum of 16 characters.
- * **Select Template** – Select **Standard Client Task Sequence** from the drop-down menu, and then click **Next**.
- * **Select OS** – Navigate to and select the Windows 10 image you imported with the Windows 10 installation files, and then click **Next**.
- * **Specify Product Key** – Click **Do Not Specify a Product Key at This Time**, and then click **Next**.
- * **OS Settings** – Enter a name, organization, and home page URL in the **Full Name**, **Organization**, and **Internet Explorer Home Page** fields, and then click **Next**.
- * **Admin Password** – Click **Use the Specified Local Administrator Password**, enter a password in the provided field, and then click **Next**.
- >[!NOTE]
- >During creation of a reference image, any specified Administrator password will be automatically removed when the image is prepared for capture with Sysprep. During reference image creation, a password is not necessary, but is recommended to remain in line with best practices for production deployment environments.
- * **Summary** – Review the specified configuration on this page before you click **Next** to begin creation of the task sequence.
- * **Progress** – While the task sequence is created, a progress bar is displayed on this page.
- * **Confirmation** – When the task sequence creation completes, the success of the process is displayed on this page. Click **Finish** to complete the New Task Sequence Wizard.
-3. Select the **Task Sequences** folder, right-click the new task sequence you created, and then click **Properties**.
-4. Select the **Task Sequence** tab to view the steps that are included in the Standard Client Task Sequence template, as shown in Figure 10.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 10. Enable Windows Update in the reference image task sequence*
-
-5. Select the **Windows Update (Pre-Application Installation)** option, located under the **State Restore** folder.
-6. Click the **Options** tab, and then clear the **Disable This Step** check box.
-7. Repeat Step 4 and Step 5 for the **Windows Update (Post-Application Installation)** option.
-8. Click **OK** to apply changes to the task sequence, and then close the task sequence properties window.
-
-### Generate and import MDT boot media
-
-To boot the reference virtual machine from the network, the MDT deployment share first must be updated to generate boot media with the resources that have been added in the previous sections.
-
-To update the MDT boot media, follow these steps:
-
-1. Right-click the deployment share in the Deployment Workbench, and then click **Update Deployment Share** to start the Update Deployment Share Wizard, as shown in Figure 11.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 11. Generate boot images with the Update Deployment Share Wizard*
-
-2. Use the Update Deployment Share Wizard to create boot images with the following process:
- * **Options** – Click **Completely Regenerate the Boot Images**, and then click **Next**.
- >[!NOTE]
- >Because this is the first time the newly created deployment share has been updated, new boot images will be generated regardless of which option you select on the **Options** page.
- * **Summary** – Review the specified options on this page before you click **Next** to begin generation of boot images.
- * **Progress** – While the boot images are being generated, a progress bar is displayed on this page.
- * **Confirmation** – When the boot images have been generated, the success of the process is displayed on this page. Click **Finish** to complete the Update Deployment Share Wizard.
-3. Confirm that boot images have been generated by navigating to the deployment share in File Explorer and opening the Boot folder. The following files should be displayed, as shown in Figure 12:
- * **LiteTouchPE_x86.iso**
- * **LiteTouchPE_x86.wim**
- * **LiteTouchPE_x64.iso**
- * **LiteTouchPE_x64.wim**
-
-
- 
-
- *Figure 12. Boot images displayed in the Boot folder after completion of the Update Deployment Share Wizard*
-
-To import the MDT boot media into WDS for PXE boot, follow these steps:
-
-1. Open Windows Deployment Services from the Start menu or Start screen.
-2. Expand **Servers** and your deployment server.
-3. Click the **Boot Images** folder, as shown in Figure 13.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 13. Start the Add Image Wizard from the Boot Images folder*
-
-4. Right-click the **Boot Images** folder, and then click **Add Boot Image** to open the Add Image Wizard, as shown in Figure 14.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 14. Import the LiteTouchPE_x86.wim MDT boot image*
-
-5. The Add Image Wizard displays a series of steps, as follows:
- * **Image File** – Click **Browse** and navigate to the **Boot** folder in your deployment share, click **LiteTouchPE_x86.wim**, click **Open**, and then click **Next**.
- * **Image Metadata** – Enter a name and description for the MDT boot media, or click **Next** to accept the default options.
- * **Summary** – Review your selections to import a boot image into WDS, and then click **Next**.
- * **Task Progress** – A progress bar is displayed as the selected image file is copied into the WDS remote installation folder. Click **Finish** when the task is complete to close the Add Image Wizard.
-
->[!NOTE]
->Only the 32-bit boot image, LiteTouchPE_x86.wim, is required to boot from BIOS devices, including Generation 1 Hyper-V virtual machines like the reference virtual machine.
-
-If your WDS configuration is properly set up to respond to PXE clients, you should now be able to boot from the network with any device with a network adapter properly configured for network boot (PXE).
-
->[!NOTE]
->If your WDS server resides on the same server as DHCP or in a different subnet than the devices you are attempting to boot, additional configuration may be required. For more information, see [Managing Network Boot Programs](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc732351).
-
-### Deploy and capture a reference image
-
-Your deployment environment is now set up to create a reference image for Windows 10 complete with Windows Updates.
-
->[!NOTE]
->You cannot install version updates (such as Windows 10, Version 1511) in a reference image. To create a reference image with a new version of Windows, you must use installation files from that version of Windows. When you install a version update in Windows, it effectively performs an upgrade to a new version of Windows, and upgraded installations of Windows cannot be prepared for deployment with Sysprep.
-By using a fully automated task sequence in an MDT deployment share dedicated to reference image creation, you can greatly reduce the time and effort required to create new reference images and it is the best way to ensure that your organization is ready for feature updates and new versions of Windows 10.
-
-You can now boot from the network with a virtual machine to run the prepared task sequence and generate a reference image. When you prepare your virtual machine in Hyper-V for reference image creation, consider the following:
-
-* Use a Generation 1 virtual machine for the simplicity of drivers and to ensure maximum compatibility with both BIOS and UEFI devices.
-* Ensure your virtual machine has at least 1 GB of system memory at boot. You can ensure that the virtual machine has at least 1 GB of memory at boot but allow the memory to adjust after boot by using Dynamic Memory. You can read more about Dynamic Memory in the [Hyper-V Dynamic Memory Overview](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/hh831766).
-* Ensure your virtual machine uses a legacy network adapter to support network boot (PXE); that network adapter should be connected to the same network as your deployment server, and that network adapter should receive an IP address automatically via DHCP.
-* Configure your boot order such that PXE Boot is the first option.
-
-When your virtual machine (VM) is properly configured and ready, start or boot the VM and be prepared to press the F12 key when prompted to boot via PXE from the WDS server.
-
-Perform the reference image deployment and capture using the following steps:
-
-1. Start your virtual machine and press the F12 key when prompted to boot to the WDS server via PXE, as shown in Figure 15.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 15. Start network boot by pressing the F12 key*
-
-2. Click **Run the Deployment Wizard to Install a New Operating System** to begin the MDT deployment process.
-3. Enter your MDT username and password, a user with rights to access the MDT deployment share over the network and with rights to write to the Captures folder in the deployment share.
-4. After your credentials are validated, the Windows Deployment Wizard will start and process the boot and deployment share rules.
-5. The Windows Deployment Wizard displays a series of steps, as follows:
- * **Task Sequence** – Select the task sequence you created for reference image creation (it should be the only task sequence available), and then click **Next**.
- * **Computer Details** – Leave the default computer name, workgroup name, and the **Join a Workgroup** option selected, and then click **Next**. The computer name and workgroup will be reset when the image is prepared by Sysprep and captured.
- * **Move Data and Settings** – Leave the default option of **Do Not Move User Data and Settings** selected, and then click **Next**.
- * **User Data (Restore)** – Leave the default option of **Do Not Restore User Data and Settings** selected, and then click **Next**.
- * **Locale and Time** – Leave the default options for language and time settings selected. The locale and time settings will be specified during deployment of the image to other devices. Click **Next**.
- * **Capture Image** – Click the **Capture an Image of this Reference Computer** option, as shown in Figure 16. In the **Location** field, keep the default location of the Captures folder. You can keep or change the name of the image file in the **File Name** field. When you are finished, click **Next**.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 16. Use the Capture Image page to capture an image of the reference machine after deployment*
-
- * **Ready** – You can review your selections by expanding **Details** on the **Ready** page. Click **Begin** when you are ready to perform the deployment and capture of your reference image.
-
-6. Your reference task sequence will run with the specified options.
-
-As the task sequence processes the deployment, it will automatically perform the following tasks:
-* Install the Windows 10 image from the installation files you supplied
-* Reboot into Windows 10
-* Run Windows updates until all Windows updates have been installed and the Windows environment is fully up to date
-* Run Sysprep and prepare the Windows 10 environment for deployment
-* Reboot into WinPE
-* Capture an image of the Windows 10 environment and store it in the Captures folder in the MDT deployment share
-
->[!NOTE]
->The Windows Update process can take some time to complete as it searches the Internet for updates, downloads those updates, and then installs them. By performing this process now, in the reference environment, you eliminate the need to perform these tasks on each deployed device and significantly reduce the amount of time and bandwidth required to perform your deployment.
-
-When the task sequence completes, your virtual machine will be off and a new reference image complete with updates will be ready in your MDT deployment share for you to import it and prepare your deployment environment for deployment to Surface devices.
-
-## Deploy Windows 10 to Surface devices
-
-With a freshly prepared reference image, you are now ready to configure the deployment process for deployment to the Surface devices. Use the steps detailed in this section to produce a deployment process that requires minimal effort on each Surface device to produce a complete and ready-to-use Windows 10 environment.
-
-### Import reference image
-
-After the reference image has been created and stored in the Captures folder, you need to add it to your MDT deployment share as an image for deployment. You perform this task by using the same process that you used to import the installation files for Windows 10.
-
-To import the reference image for deployment, use the following steps:
-
-1. Right-click the **Operating Systems** folder under your deployment share in the Deployment Workbench or the folder you created in when you imported Windows 10 installation files, and then click **Import Operating System** to start the Import Operating System Wizard.
-2. Import the custom image with the Import Operating System Wizard by using the following steps:
- * **OS Type** – Select Custom Image File to specify that you are importing the Windows source files from installation media, and then click **Next**.
- * **Image** – Click **Browse**, and then navigate to and select the image file in the **Captures** folder in your deployment share. Select the **Move the Files to the Deployment Share Instead of Copying Them** checkbox if desired. Click **Next**.
- * **Setup** – Click **Setup Files are not Neededf**, and then click **Next**.
- * **Destination** – Enter a name for the new folder that will be created to hold the image file, and then click **Next**.
- * **Summary** – Review the specified configuration on this page before you click **Next** to begin the import process.
- * **Progress** – While the image is imported, a progress bar is displayed on this page.
- * **Confirmation** – When the import process completes, the success of the process is displayed on this page. Click **Finish** to complete the Import Operating System Wizard.
-3. Expand the folder in which you imported the image to verify that the import completed successfully.
-
->[!NOTE]
->You can import the reference image into the same deployment share that you used to create your reference image, or you could import the reference image into a new deployment share for deployment to your Surface devices. If you chose to create a new deployment share for deployment of your reference image, remember that you still need to import a full set of installation files from installation media.
-
-Now that your updated reference image is imported, it is time to prepare your deployment environment for deployment to Surface devices complete with drivers, applications, and automation.
-
-### Import Surface drivers
-
-Before you can deploy your updated reference image to Surface devices, or any physical environment, you need to supply MDT with the drivers that Windows will use to communicate with that physical environment. For Surface devices you can download all of the drivers required by Windows in a single archive (.zip) file in a format that is ready for deployment. In addition to the drivers that are used by Windows to communicate with the hardware and components, Surface firmware and driver packs also include updates for the firmware of those components. By installing the Surface firmware and driver pack, you will also bring your device’s firmware up to date. If you have not done so already, download the drivers for your Surface device listed at [Download the latest firmware and drivers for Surface devices](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface/deploy-the-latest-firmware-and-drivers-for-surface-devices).
-
-Many devices require that you import drivers specifically for WinPE in order for the MDT boot media to communicate with the deployment share and to boot properly on that device. Even Surface Pro 3 required that network drivers be imported specifically for WinPE for deployment of Windows 8.1. Fortunately, for Windows 10 deployments to Surface devices, all of the required drivers for operation of WinPE are contained within the out-of-box drivers that are built into Windows 10. It is still a good idea to prepare your environment with folder structure and selection profiles that allow you to specify drivers for use in WinPE. You can read more about that folder structure in **Step 5: Prepare the drivers repository** in [Deploy a Windows 10 image using MDT 2013 Update 2](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/deploy/deploy-a-windows-10-image-using-mdt/#sec05).
-
-To import the Surface drivers (in this example, Surface Pro 4) into MDT, follow these steps:
-
-1. Extract the downloaded archive (.zip) file to a folder that you can easily locate. Keep the driver files separate from other drivers or files.
-2. Open the Deployment Workbench and expand the Deployment Shares node and your deployment share.
-3. If you have not already created a folder structure by operating system version, you should do so now and create under the Windows 10 x64 folder a new folder for Surface Pro 4 drivers named Surface Pro 4. Your Out-of-Box Drivers folder should resemble the following structure, as shown in Figure 17:
- * WinPE x86
- * WinPE x64
- * Windows 10 x64
- * Microsoft Corporation
- * Surface Pro 4
-
- 
-
- *Figure 17. The recommended folder structure for drivers*
-
-4. Right-click the **Surface Pro 4** folder, and then click **Import Drivers** to start the Import Drivers Wizard, as shown in Figure 18.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 18. The Progress page during drivers import*
-
-5. The Import Driver Wizard displays a series of steps, as follows:
- * **Specify Directory** – Click **Browse** and navigate to the folder where you extracted the Surface Pro 4 firmware and drivers in Step 1.
- * **Summary** – Review the specified configuration on this page before you click **Next** to begin the import process.
- * **Progress** – While the drivers are imported, a progress bar is displayed on this page.
- * **Confirmation** – When the import process completes, the success of the process is displayed on this page. Click **Finish** to complete the Import Drivers Wizard.
-6. Click the **Surface Pro 4** folder and verify that the folder now contains the drivers that were imported, as shown in Figure 19.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 19. Drivers for Surface Pro 4 imported and organized in the MDT deployment share*
-
-### Import applications
-
-You can import any number of applications into MDT for installation on your devices during the deployment process. You can configure your applications and task sequences to prompt you during deployment to pick and choose which applications are installed, or you can use your task sequence to explicitly define which applications are installed. For more information, see **Step 4: Add an application** in [Deploy a Windows 10 image using MDT 2013 Update 2](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/deploy/deploy-a-windows-10-image-using-mdt/#sec04).
-
-#### Import Microsoft Office 365 Installer
-
-The Office Deployment Tool is a free download available in the Microsoft Download Center that allows IT professionals and system administrators to download and prepare Office installation packages for Office Click-to-Run. You can find the Office Deployment Tool and instructions to download Click-to-Run for Office 365 installation source files at [Download Click-to-Run for Office 365 products by using the Office Deployment Tool](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/jj219424).
-
-Download and install the version of Office Deployment Tool (ODT), for Office 2013 or Office 2016, that fits your organization’s needs and use the steps provided by that page to download the Office installation files for use with MDT.
-
-After you have downloaded the source files for your version of Office Click-to-Run, you need to edit the Configuration.xml file with instructions to install Office Click-to-Run silently. To configure the Office Deployment Tool for silent installation, follow these steps:
-
-1. Right-click the existing **Configuration.xml** file, and then click **Edit**.
-2. This action opens the file in Notepad. Replace the existing text with the following:
- ```
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- ```
-
-3. Save the file.
-
-The default behavior of Setup.exe is to look for the source files in the path that contains **Setup.exe**. If the installation files are not found in this folder, the Office Deployment Tool will default to online source files from an Internet connection.
-
-For MDT to perform an automated installation of office, it is important to configure the **Display Level** option to a value of **None**. This setting is used to suppress the installation dialog box for silent installation. It is required that the **AcceptEULA** option is set to **True** to accept the license agreement when the **Display Level** option is set to **None**. With both of these options configured, the installation of Office will occur without the display of dialog boxes which could potentially cause the installation to pause until a user can address an open dialog box.
-
-Now that the installation and configuration files are prepared, the application can be imported into the deployment share by following these steps:
-
-1. Open the Deployment Workbench.
-2. Expand the deployment share, right-click the **Applications** folder, and then click **New Application** to start the New Application Wizard, as shown in Figure 20.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 20. Enter the command and directory for Office 2016 Click-to-Run*
-
-3. The New Application Wizard walks you through importing the Office 2016 Click-to-Run files, as follows:
- * **Application Type** – Click **Application with Source Files**, and then click **Next**.
- * **Details** – Enter a name for the application (for example, Office 2016 Click-to-Run) in the **Application Name** field. Enter publisher, version, and language information in the **Publisher**, **Version**, and **Language** fields if desired. Click **Next**.
- * **Source** – Click **Browse** to navigate to and select the folder where you downloaded the Office installation files with the Office Deployment Tool, and then click **Next**.
- * **Destination** – Enter a name for the folder where the application files will be stored in the **Specify the Name of the Directory that Should Be Created** field or click **Next** to accept the default name.
- * **Command Details** – Enter the Office Deployment Tool installation command line:
-
- `Setup.exe /configure configuration.xml`
-
- * **Summary** – Review the specified configuration on this page before you click **Next** to begin the import process.
- * **Progress** – While the installation files are imported, a progress bar is displayed on this page.
- * **Confirmation** – When the import process completes, the success of the process is displayed on this page. Click **Finish** to complete the New Application Wizard.
-
-4. You should now see the **Office 2016 Click-to-Run** item under the **Applications** folder in the Deployment Workbench.
-
-#### Import Surface app installer
-
-The Surface app is a Microsoft Store app that provides the user with greater control over specific Surface device functions and capabilities (for example, control over the sensitivity of the Surface Pen). It is a highly recommended app for Surface devices to provide end users with the best experience and greatest control over their device. Find out more about the Surface app at [Install and use the Surface app](https://www.microsoft.com/surface/support/apps-and-windows-store/surface-app?os=windows-10).
-
-To perform a deployment of the Surface app, you will need to download the app files through Microsoft Store for Business. You can find detailed instructions on how to download the Surface app through Microsoft Store for Business at [Deploy Surface app with Microsoft Store for Business](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface/deploy-surface-app-with-windows-store-for-business).
-
-After you have downloaded the installation files for Surface app, including the AppxBundle and license files, you can import these files into the deployment share through the same process as a desktop application like Microsoft Office. Both the AppxBundle and license files must be together in the same folder for the import process to complete successfully. Use the following command on the **Command Details** page to install the Surface app:
- ```
-DISM.exe /Online /Add-ProvisionedAppxPackage /PackagePath: Microsoft.SurfaceHub_10.0.342.0_neutral_~_8wekyb3d8bbwe.AppxBundle /LicensePath: Microsoft.SurfaceHub_8wekyb3d8bbwe_a53ef8ab-9dbd-dec1-46c5-7b664d4dd003.xml
- ```
-
-### Create deployment task sequence
-
-The next step in the process is to create the deployment task sequence. This task sequence will be configured to completely automate the deployment process and will work along with customized deployment share rules to reduce the need for user interaction down to a single touch. Before you can make customizations to include all of this automation, the new task sequence has to be created from a template.
-
-To create the deployment task sequence, follow these steps:
-1. In the Deployment Workbench, under your Deployment Share, right-click the **Task Sequences** folder, and then click **New Task Sequence** to start the New Task Sequence Wizard.
-2. Use these steps to create the deployment task sequence with the New Task Sequence Wizard:
- * **General Settings** – Enter an identifier for the deployment task sequence in the **Task Sequence ID** field, a name for the deployment task sequence in the **Task Sequence Name** field, and any comments for the deployment task sequence in the **Task Sequence Comments** field, then click **Next**.
- >[!NOTE]
- >The **Task Sequence ID** field cannot contain spaces and can be a maximum of 16 characters.
- * **Select Template** – Click **Standard Client Task Sequence** from the drop-down menu, and then click **Next**.
- * **Select OS** – Navigate to and select the reference image that you imported, and then click **Next**.
- * **Specify Product Key** – Select the product key entry that fits your organization's licensing system. The **Do Not Specify a Product Key at This Time** option can be used for systems that will be activated via Key Management Services (KMS) or Active Directory Based Activation (ADBA). A product key can be specified specifically if your organization uses Multiple Activation Keys (MAK). Click **Next**.
- * **OS Settings** – Enter a name and organization for registration of Windows, and a home page URL for users when they browse the Internet in the **Full Name**, **Organization**, and **Internet Explorer Home Page** fields, and then click **Next**.
- * **Admin Password** – Click **Use the Specified Local Administrator Password**, enter a password in the provided field, and then click **Next**.
- * **Summary** – Review the specified configuration on this page before you click **Next** to begin creation of the task sequence.
- * **Progress** – While the task sequence is being created, a progress bar is displayed on this page.
- * **Confirmation** – When the task sequence creation completes, the success of the process is displayed on this page. Click **Finish** to complete the New Task Sequence Wizard.
-
-After the task sequence is created it can be modified for increased automation, such as the installation of applications without user interaction, the selection of drivers, and the installation of Windows updates.
-
-1. Click the **Task Sequences** folder, right-click the new task sequence you created, and then click **Properties**.
-2. Click the **Task Sequence** tab to view the steps that are included in the new task sequence.
-3. Click the **Windows Update (Pre-Application Installation)** step, located under the **State Restore** folder.
-4. Click the **Options** tab, and then clear the **Disable This Step** check box.
-5. Repeat Step 4 and Step 5 for the **Windows Update (Post-Application Installation)** option.
-6. Between the two **Windows Update** steps is the **Install Applications** step. Click the **Install Applications** step, and then click **Add**.
-7. Hover the mouse over **General** under the **Add** menu, and then click **Install Application**. This will add a new step after the selected step for the installation of a specific application as shown in Figure 21.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 21. A new Install Application step in the deployment task sequence*
-
-8. On the **Properties** tab of the new **Install Application** step, enter **Install Microsoft Office 2016 Click-to-Run** in the **Name** field.
-9. Click **Install a Single Application**, and then click **Browse** to view available applications that have been imported into the deployment share.
-10. Select Office 2016 Click-to-Run from the list of applications, and then click **OK**.
-11. Repeat Steps 6 through 10 for the Surface app.
-12. Expand the **Preinstall** folder, and then click the **Enable BitLocker (Offline)** step.
-13. Open the **Add** menu again and choose **Set Task Sequence Variable** from under the **General** menu.
-14. On the **Properties** tab of the new **Set Task Sequence Variable** step (as shown in Figure 22), configure the following options:
- * **Name** – Set DriverGroup001
- * **Task Sequence Variable** – DriverGroup001
- * **Value** – Windows 10 x64\%Make%\%Model%
-
- 
-
- *Figure 22. Configure a new Set Task Sequence Variable step in the deployment task sequence*
-
-15. Select the **Inject Drivers** step, the next step in the task sequence.
-16. On the **Properties** tab of the **Inject Drivers** step (as shown in Figure 23), configure the following options:
- * In the **Choose a selection profile** drop-down menu, select **Nothing**.
- * Click the **Install all drivers from the selection profile** button.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 23. Configure the deployment task sequence not to choose the drivers to inject into Windows*
-
-17. Click **OK** to apply changes to the task sequence and close the task sequence properties window.
-
-### Configure deployment share rules
-
-The experience of users during a Windows deployment is largely governed by a set of rules that control how the MDT and Windows Deployment Wizard experience should proceed. These rules are stored in two configuration files. Boot media rules are stored in the Bootstrap.ini file that is processed when the MDT boot media is first run. Deployment share rules are stored in the Customsettings.ini file and tell the Windows Deployment Wizard how to operate (for example, what screens to show and what questions to ask). By using these the rules stored in these two files, you can completely automate the process of deployment to where you will not be asked to supply the answer to any questions during deployment and the deployment will perform all tasks completely on its own.
-
-#### Configure Bootstrap.ini
-
-Bootstrap.ini is the simpler of the two rule files. The purpose it serves is to provide instructions from when the MDT boot media starts on a device until the Windows Deployment Wizard is started. The primary use of this file is to provide the credentials that will be used to log on to the deployment share and start the Windows Deployment Wizard.
-
-To automate the boot media rules, follow these steps:
-
-1. Right-click your deployment share in the Deployment Workbench, and then click **Properties**.
-2. Click the **Rules** tab, and then click **Edit Bootstrap.ini** to open Bootstrap.ini in Notepad.
-3. Replace the text of the Bootstrap.ini file with the following text:
-
- ```
- [Settings]
- Priority=Model,Default
-
- [Surface Pro 4]
- DeployRoot=\\STNDeployServer\DeploymentShare$
- UserDomain=STNDeployServer
- UserID=MDTUser
- UserPassword=P@ssw0rd
- SkipBDDWelcome=YES
-
- [Surface Pro 4]
- DeployRoot=\\STNDeployServer\DeploymentShare$
- ```
-
-4. Press Ctrl+S to save Bootstrap.ini, and then close Notepad.
-
-You can use a number of variables in both boot media and deployment share rules to apply rules only when certain conditions are met. For example, you can use MAC addresses to identify specific machines where MDT will run fully automated, but will run with required user interaction on all other devices. You can also use the model of the device to instruct the MDT boot media to perform different actions based on computer model, much as the way **[Surface Pro 4]** is listed in Step 3. You can use the following cmdlet in a PowerShell session to see what the Model variable would be on a device:
-
-```wmic csproduct get name```
-
-Rules used in the text shown in Step 3 include:
-
-* **DeployRoot** – Used to specify the deployment share that the MDT boot media will connect to.
-* **UserDomain** – Used to specify the domain or computer where the MDT user account is located.
-* **UserID** – Used to specify the MDT user account for automatic logon to the deployment share.
-* **UserPassword** – Used to specify the MDT user password for automatic logon to the deployment share.
-* **SkipBDDWelcome** – Used to skip the Welcome page and to start the Windows Deployment Wizard immediately using the specified credentials and deployment share.
-
-#### Configure CustomSettings.ini
-
-The bulk of the rules used to automate the MDT deployment process are stored in the deployment share rules, or the Customsettings.ini file. In this file you can answer and hide all of the prompts from the Windows Deployment Wizard, which yields a deployment experience that mostly consists of a progress bar that displays the automated actions occurring on the device. The deployment share rules are shown directly in the **Rules** tab of the deployment share properties, as shown in Figure 24.
-
-
-
-*Figure 24. Deployment share rules configured for automation of the Windows Deployment Wizard*
-
-To configure automation for the production deployment, copy and paste the following text into the text box on the **Rules** tab of your deployment share properties:
-
- ```
-[Settings]
-Priority=Model,Default
-Properties=MyCustomProperty
-
-[Surface Pro 4]
-SkipTaskSequence=YES
-TaskSequenceID=Win10SP4
-
-[Default]
-OSInstall=Y
-SkipCapture=YES
-SkipAdminPassword=YES
-SkipProductKey=YES
-SkipComputerBackup=YES
-SkipBitLocker=YES
-SkipBDDWelcome=YES
-SkipUserData=YES
-UserDataLocation=AUTO
-SkipApplications=YES
-SkipPackageDisplay=YES
-SkipComputerName=YES
-SkipDomainMembership=YES
-JoinDomain=contoso.com
-DomainAdmin=MDT
-DomainAdminDomain=contoso
-DomainAdminPassword=P@ssw0rd
-SkipLocaleSelection=YES
-KeyboardLocale=en-US
-UserLocale=en-US
-UILanguage=en-US
-SkipTimeZone=YES
-TimeZoneName=Pacific Standard Time
-UserID=MDTUser
-UserDomain=STNDeployServer
-UserPassword=P@ssw0rd
-SkipSummary=YES
-SkipFinalSummary=YES
-FinishAction=LOGOFF
- ```
-Rules used in this example include:
-
-* **SkipTaskSequence** – This rule is used to skip the **Task Sequence** page where the user would have to select between available task sequences.
-* **TaskSequenceID** – This rule is used to instruct the Windows Deployment Wizard to run a specific task sequence. In this scenario the task sequence ID should match the deployment task sequence you created in the previous section.
-* **OSInstall** – This rule indicates that the Windows Deployment Wizard will be performing an operating system deployment.
-* **SkipCapture** – This rule prevents the **Capture Image** page from being displayed, prompting the user to create an image of this device after deployment.
-* **SkipAdminPassword** – This rule prevents the **Admin Password** page from being displayed. The Administrator password specified in the task sequence will still be applied.
-* **SkipProductKey** – This rule prevents the **Specify Product Key** page from being displayed. The product key specified in the task sequence will still be applied.
-* **SkipComputerBackup** – This rule prevents the **Move Data and Settings** page from being displayed, where the user is asked if they would like to make a backup of the computer before performing deployment.
-* **SkipBitLocker** – This rule prevents the **BitLocker** page from being displayed, where the user is asked if BitLocker Drive Encryption should be used to encrypt the device.
-* **SkipBDDWelcome** – This rule prevents the **Welcome** page from being displayed, where the user is prompted to begin Windows deployment.
-* **SkipUserData** – This rule prevents the **User Data (Restore)** page from being displayed, where the user is asked to restore previously backed up user data in the new environment.
-* **UserDataLocation** – This rule prevents the user from being prompted to supply a location on the User Data (Restore) page.
-* **SkipApplications** – This rule prevents the **Applications** page from being displayed, where the user is prompted to select from available applications to be installed in the new environment.
-* **SkipPackageDisplay** – This rule prevents the **Packages** page from being displayed, where the user is prompted to select from available packages to be installed in the new environment.
-* **SkipComputerName** – This rule, when combined with the **SkipDomainMembership** rule, prevents the **Computer Details** page from being displayed, where the user is asked to supply computer name and join a domain or workgroup.
-* **SkipDomainMembership** – This rule, when combined with the **SkipComputerName** rule, prevents the **Computer Details** page from being displayed, where the user is asked to supply computer name and join a domain or workgroup.
-* **JoinDomain** – This rule instructs the Windows Deployment Wizard to have the computer join the specified domain using the specified credentials.
-* **DomainAdmin** – This rule specifies the username for the domain join operation.
-* **DomainAdminDomain** – This rule specifies the domain for the username for the domain join operation.
-* **DomainAdminPassword** – This rule specifies the password for the username for the domain join operation.
-* **SkipLocaleSelection** – This rule, along with the **SkipTimeZone** rule, prevents the **Locale and Time** page from being displayed.
-* **KeyboardLocale** – This rule is used to specify the keyboard layout for the deployed Windows environment.
-* **UserLocale** – This rule is used to specify the geographical locale for the deployed Windows environment.
-* **UILanguage** – This rule is used to specify the language to be used in the deployed Windows environment.
-* **SkipTimeZone** – This rule, along with the **SkipLocaleSelection** rule, prevents the **Locale and Time** page from being displayed.
-* **TimeZoneName** – This rule is used to specify the time zone for the deployed Windows environment.
-* **UserID** – This rule is used to supply the username under which the MDT actions and task sequence steps are performed.
-* **UserDomain** – This rule is used to supply the domain for the username under which the MDT actions and task sequence steps are performed.
-* **UserPassword** – This rule is used to supply the password for the username under which the MDT actions and task sequence steps are performed.
-* **SkipSummary** – This rule prevents the **Summary** page from being displayed before the task sequence is run, where the user is prompted to confirm the selections before beginning the task sequence.
-* **SkipFinalSummary** – This rule prevents the **Summary** page from being displayed when the task sequence has completed.
-* **FinishAction** – This rule specifies whether to log out, reboot, or shut down the device after the task sequence has completed.
-
-You can read about all of the possible deployment share and boot media rules in the [Microsoft Deployment Toolkit Reference](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn781091).
-
-### Update and import updated MDT boot media
-
-The process to update MDT boot media with these new rules and changes to the deployment share is very similar to the process to generate boot media from scratch.
-
-To update the MDT boot media, follow these steps:
-
-1. Right-click the deployment share in the Deployment Workbench, and then click **Update Deployment Share** to start the Update Deployment Share Wizard.
-2. The Update Deployment Share Wizard displays a series of steps, as follows:
- * **Options** – Choose between the **Completely Regenerate the Boot Images** or **Optimize the Boot Image Updating Process** options. Completely regenerating the boot images will take more time, but produces boot media that is not fragmented and does not contain out of date components. Optimizing the boot image updating process will proceed more quickly, but may result in longer load times when booting via PXE. Click **Next**.
- * **Summary** – Review the specified options on this page before you click **Next** to begin the update of boot images.
- * **Progress** – While the boot images are being updated a progress bar is displayed on this page.
- * **Confirmation** – When the boot images have been updated, the success of the process is displayed on this page. Click **Finish** to complete the Update Deployment Share Wizard.
-
-To import the updated MDT boot media into WDS for PXE boot, follow these steps:
-
-1. Open Windows Deployment Services from the Start menu or Start screen.
-2. Expand **Servers** and your deployment server.
-3. Click the **Boot Images** folder.
-4. Right-click the existing MDT boot image, and then click **Replace Image** to open the Replace Boot Image Wizard.
-5. Replace the previously imported MDT boot image with the updated version by using these steps in the Replace Boot Image Wizard:
- * **Image File** – Click **Browse** and navigate to the **Boot** folder in your deployment share, click **LiteTouchPE_x86.wim**, and then click **Open**. Click **Next**.
- * **Available Images** – Only one image should be listed and selected **LiteTouch Windows PE (x86)**, click **Next**.
- * **Image Metadata** – Enter a name and description for the MDT boot media, or click **Next** to accept the default options.
- * **Summary** – Review your selections for importing a boot image into WDS, and then click **Next**.
- * **Task Progress** – A progress bar is displayed as the selected image file is copied into the WDS remote installation folder. Click **Finish** when the task is complete to close the Replace Boot Image Wizard.
-6. Right-click the **Boot Images** folder, and then click **Add Image** to open the Add Image Wizard.
-7. Add the new 64-bit boot image for 64-bit UEFI device compatibility with the Add Image Wizard , as follows:
- * **Image File** – Click **Browse** and navigate to the **Boot** folder in your deployment share, select **LiteTouchPE_x64.wim**, and then click **Open**. Click **Next**.
- * **Image Metadata** – Enter a name and description for the MDT boot media, or click **Next** to accept the default options.
- * **Summary** – Review your selections to import a boot image into WDS, and then click **Next**.
- * **Task Progress** – A progress bar is displayed as the selected image file is copied into the WDS remote installation folder. Click **Finish** when the task is complete to close the Add Image Wizard.
-
->[!NOTE]
->Although it is a best practice to replace and update the boot images in WDS whenever the MDT deployment share is updated, for deployment to Surface devices the 32-bit boot image, LiteTouchPE_x86.wim, is not required. Only the 64-bit boot image is required for 64-bit UEFI devices.
-
-### Deploy Windows to Surface
-
-With all of the automation provided by the deployment share rules and task sequence, performing the deployment on each Surface device becomes as easy as a single touch.
-
->[!NOTE]
->For the deployment to require only a single touch, the Surface devices must be connected to a keyboard, connected to the network with a Microsoft Surface USB Ethernet Adapter or Surface Dock, and configured with PXE boot as the first boot option, as shown in Figure 25.
-
-
-
-*Figure 25. Setting boot priority for PXE boot*
-
-On a properly configured Surface device, simply turn on the device and press Enter when you are prompted to boot from the network. The fully automated MDT deployment process will then take over and perform the following tasks:
-
-* The MDT boot media will be loaded to your Surface device via the network
-* The MDT boot media will use the provided credentials and rules to connect to the MDT deployment share
-* The task sequence and drivers will be automatically selected for your device via make and model information
-* The task sequence will deploy your updated Windows 10 image to the device complete with the selected drivers
-* The task sequence will join your device to the domain
-* The task sequence will install the applications you specified, Microsoft Office and Surface app
-* Windows Update will run, installing any new Windows Updates or updates for installed applications, like Microsoft Office
-* The task sequence will complete silently and log out of the device
-
->[!NOTE]
->For Surface devices not configured to boot to the network as the first boot option, you can hold Volume Down and press Power to boot the system immediately to a USB or network device.
-
-The resulting configuration is a Surface device that is logged out and ready for an end user to enter their credentials, log on, and get right to work. The applications and drivers they need are already installed and up to date.
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface/deploy.md b/devices/surface/deploy.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 68749b654c..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/deploy.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploy Surface devices (Surface)
-description: Get deployment guidance for your Surface devices including information about MDT, OOBE customization, Ethernet adaptors, and Surface Deployment Accelerator.
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.pagetype: surface, devices
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.date: 10/02/2018
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.audience: itpro
----
-
-# Deploy Surface devices
-
-Learn about about deploying ARM- and Intel-based Surface devices.
-
-## Deploying ARM-based devices
-
-| Topic | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-| [Deploying, managing, and servicing Surface Pro X](surface-pro-arm-app-management.md) | Get an overview of key considerations for deploying, managing, and servicing Surface Pro X running the Microsoft SQ1 ARM processor. |
-| [Windows Autopilot and Surface devices](windows-autopilot-and-surface-devices.md) | Learn about Autopilot, the recommended method for deploying Surface Pro X. |
-| [Windows 10 ARM-based PC app compatibility](surface-pro-arm-app-performance.md) | Review app compatibility guidance for Surface Pro X. |
-
-
-## Deploying Intel-based devices
-
-| Topic | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-| [Windows Autopilot and Surface devices](windows-autopilot-and-surface-devices.md) | Find out how to remotely deploy and configure devices with Windows Autopilot. |
-| [Surface device compatibility with Windows 10 Long-Term Servicing Channel](surface-device-compatibility-with-windows-10-ltsc.md) | Find out about compatibility and limitations of Surface devices running Windows 10 Enterprise LTSC edition. |
-| [Deploy Windows 10 to Surface devices with MDT](deploy-windows-10-to-surface-devices-with-mdt.md) | Walk through the recommended process of how to deploy Windows 10 to your Surface devices with the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit.|
-| [Upgrade Surface devices to Windows 10 with MDT](upgrade-surface-devices-to-windows-10-with-mdt.md)| Find out how to perform a Windows 10 upgrade deployment to your Surface devices. |
-| [Customize the OOBE for Surface deployments](customize-the-oobe-for-surface-deployments.md)| Walk through the process of customizing the Surface out-of-box experience for end users in your organization.|
-| [Ethernet adapters and Surface deployment](ethernet-adapters-and-surface-device-deployment.md)| Get guidance and answers to help you perform a network deployment to Surface devices.|
-| [Surface Deployment Accelerator](microsoft-surface-deployment-accelerator.md)| See how Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator provides a quick and simple deployment mechanism for organizations to reimage Surface devices. |
-[Battery Limit setting](battery-limit.md) | Learn how to use Battery Limit, a UEFI setting that changes how the Surface device battery is charged and may prolong its longevity.
-
-## Related topics
-
-[Surface IT Pro Blog](https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/t5/Surface-IT-Pro-Blog/bg-p/SurfaceITPro)
-
diff --git a/devices/surface/documentation/surface-system-sku-reference.md b/devices/surface/documentation/surface-system-sku-reference.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c0aa8460a0..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/documentation/surface-system-sku-reference.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Surface System SKU reference
-description: This topic provides a reference of System SKU names that you can use to quickly determine the machine state of a specific device.
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: coveminer
-ms.author: v-jokai
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 03/12/2019
----
-# Surface System SKU Reference
-This document provides a reference of System SKU names that you can use to quickly determine the machine state of a specific device using PowerShell, WMI, and related tools.
-
-System SKU is a variable (along with System Model and others) stored in System Management BIOS (SMBIOS) tables in the UEFI layer of Surface devices. Use the System SKU name whenever you need to differentiate between devices with the same System Model name, such as Surface Pro and Surface Pro with LTE Advanced.
-
-| **Device**| **System Model** | **System SKU**|
-| --- | ---| --- |
-| Surface 3 WiFI | Surface 3 | Surface_3 |
-| Surface 3 LTE AT&T | Surface 3 | Surface_3_US1 |
-| Surface 3 LTE Verizon | Surface 3 | Surface_3_US2 |
-| Surface 3 LTE North America | Surface 3 | Surface_3_NAG |
-| Surface 3 LTE Outside of North America and T-Mobile In Japan | Surface 3 | Surface_3_ROW |
-| Surface Pro | Surface Pro | Surface_Pro_1796 |
-| Surface Pro with LTE Advanced | Surface Pro | Surface_Pro_1807 |
-| Surface Book 2 13inch | Surface Book 2 | Surface_Book_1832 |
-| Surface Book 2 15inch | Surface Book 2 | Surface_Book_1793 |
-| Surface Go Consumer | Surface Go | Surface_Go_1824_Consumer |
-| Surface Go Commercial | Surface Go | Surface_Go_1824_Commercial |
-| Surface Pro 6 Consumer | Surface Pro 6 | Surface_Pro_6_1796_Consumer |
-| Surface Pro 6 Commercial | Surface Pro 6 | Surface_Pro_6_1796_Commercial |
-| Surface Laptop 2 Consumer | Surface Laptop 2 | Surface_Laptop_2_1769_Consumer |
-| Surface Laptop 2 Commercial | Surface Laptop 2 | Surface_Laptop_2_1769_Commercial |
-
-## Using System SKU variables
-
-### PowerShell
-
- gwmi -namespace root\wmi -class MS_SystemInformation | select SystemSKU
-
-### System Information
-You can also find the System SKU and System Model for a device in System Information.
-- Click **Start** > **MSInfo32**.
-
-### WMI
-You can use System SKU variables in a Task Sequence WMI Condition in the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT) or System Center Configuration Manager. For example:
-
- - WMI Namespace – Root\WMI
- - WQL Query – SELECT * FROM MS_SystemInformation WHERE SystemSKU = "Surface_Pro_1796"
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface/enable-peap-eap-fast-and-cisco-leap-on-surface-devices.md b/devices/surface/enable-peap-eap-fast-and-cisco-leap-on-surface-devices.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 580498d41a..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/enable-peap-eap-fast-and-cisco-leap-on-surface-devices.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,96 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Enable PEAP, EAP-FAST, and Cisco LEAP on Surface devices (Surface)
-description: Find out how to enable support for PEAP, EAP-FAST, or Cisco LEAP protocols on your Surface device.
-ms.assetid: A281EFA3-1552-467D-8A21-EB151E58856D
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: network, wireless, device, deploy, authentication, protocol
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.pagetype: surface, devices
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
----
-
-# Enable PEAP, EAP-FAST, and Cisco LEAP on Surface devices
-
-
-Find out how to enable support for PEAP, EAP-FAST, or Cisco LEAP protocols on your Surface device.
-
-If you use PEAP, EAP-FAST, or Cisco LEAP in your enterprise network, you probably already know that these three wireless authentication protocols are not supported by Surface devices out of the box. Some users may discover this when they attempt to connect to your wireless network; others may discover it when they are unable to gain access to resources inside the network, like file shares and internal sites. For more information, see [Extensible Authentication Protocol](https://technet.microsoft.com/network/bb643147).
-
-You can add support for each protocol by executing a small MSI package from a USB stick or from a file share. For organizations that want to enable EAP support on their Surface devices, the MSI package format supports deployment with many management and deployment tools, like the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT) and System Center Configuration Manager.
-
-## Download PEAP, EAP-FAST, or Cisco LEAP installation files
-
-
-You can download the MSI installation files for PEAP, EAP-FAST, or Cisco LEAP in a single zip archive file from the Microsoft Download Center. To download this file, go to the [Surface Tools for IT](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=46703) page on the Microsoft Download Center, click **Download**, and then select the **Cisco EAP-Supplicant Installer.zip** file.
-
-## Deploy PEAP, EAP-FAST, or Cisco LEAP with MDT
-
-
-If you are already performing a Windows deployment to Surface devices in your organization, it is quick and easy to add the installation files for each protocol to your deployment share and configure automatic installation during deployment. You can even configure a task sequence that updates previously deployed Surface devices to provide support for these protocols using the same process.
-
-To enable support for PEAP, EAP-FAST, or Cisco LEAP on newly deployed Surface devices, follow these steps:
-
-1. Download and extract the installation files for each protocol to separate folders in an easily accessible location.
-
-2. Open the MDT Deployment Workbench and expand your deployment share to the **Applications** folder.
-
-3. Select **New Application** from the **Action** pane.
-
-4. Choose **Application with source files** to copy the MSI files into the Deployment Share.
-
-5. Select the folder you created in step 1 for the desired protocol.
-
-6. Name the folder in the deployment share where the installation files will be stored.
-
-7. Specify the command line to deploy the application:
-
- - For PEAP use **EAP-PEAP.msi /qn /norestart**.
-
- - For LEAP use **EAP-LEAP.msi /qn /norestart**.
-
- - For EAP-FAST use **EAP-FAST.msi /qn /norestart**.
-
-8. Use the default options to complete the New Application Wizard.
-
-9. Repeat steps 3 through 8 for each desired protocol.
-
-After you’ve performed these steps to import the three MSI packages as applications into MDT, they will be available for selection in the Applications page of the Windows Deployment Wizard. Although in some simple deployment scenarios it might be sufficient to have technicians select each package at the time of deployment, it is not recommended. This practice introduces the possibility that a technician could attempt to apply these packages to computers other than Surface devices, or that a Surface device could be deployed without EAP support due to human error.
-
-To hide these applications from the Install Applications page, select the **Hide this application in the Deployment Wizard** checkbox in the properties of each application. After the applications are hidden, they will not be displayed as optional applications during deployment. To deploy them in your Surface deployment task sequence, they must be explicitly defined for installation through a separate step in the task sequence.
-
-To specify the protocol(s) explicitly, follow these steps:
-
-1. Open your Surface deployment task sequence properties from the MDT Deployment Workbench.
-
-2. On the **Task Sequence** tab, select the **Install Applications** step under **State Restore**. This is typically found between the pre-application and post-application Windows Update steps.
-
-3. Use the **Add** button to create a new **Install Application** step from the **General** category.
-
-4. Select **Install a single application** in the step **Properties** tab.
-
-5. Select the desired EAP protocol from the list.
-
-6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each desired protocol.
-
-## Deploy PEAP, EAP-FAST, or Cisco LEAP with Configuration Manager
-
-
-For organizations that manage Surface devices with Configuration Manager, it is even easier to deploy PEAP, EAP-FAST, or Cisco LEAP support to Surface devices. Simply import each MSI file as an application from the Software Library and configure a deployment to your Surface device collection.
-
-For more information on how to deploy applications with Configuration Manager see [How to Create Applications in Configuration Manager](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/gg682159.aspx) and [How to Deploy Applications in Configuration Manager](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/gg682082.aspx).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface/enable-surface-keyboard-for-windows-pe-deployment.md b/devices/surface/enable-surface-keyboard-for-windows-pe-deployment.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 855d637526..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/enable-surface-keyboard-for-windows-pe-deployment.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,120 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to enable the Surface Laptop keyboard during MDT deployment (Surface)
-description: When you use MDT to deploy Windows 10 to Surface laptops, you need to import keyboard drivers to use in the Windows PE environment.
-keywords: windows 10 surface, automate, customize, mdt
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.pagetype: surface
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: Teresa-Motiv
-ms.author: v-tea
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 10/31/2019
-ms.reviewer: scottmca
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.audience: itpro
-manager: jarrettr
-appliesto:
-- Surface Laptop (1st Gen)
-- Surface Laptop 2
-- Surface Laptop 3
----
-
-# How to enable the Surface Laptop keyboard during MDT deployment
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> This article addresses a deployment approach that uses Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT). You can also apply this information to other deployment methodologies.
-
-> [!IMPORTANT]
-> If you are deploying a Windows 10 image to a Surface Laptop that has Windows 10 in S mode preinstalled, see KB [4032347, Problems when deploying Windows to Surface devices with preinstalled Windows 10 in S mode](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4032347/surface-preinstall-windows10-s-mode-issues).
-
-On most types of Surface devices, the keyboard should work during Lite Touch Installation (LTI). However, Surface Laptop requires some additional drivers to enable the keyboard. For Surface Laptop (1st Gen) and Surface Laptop 2 devices, you must prepare the folder structure and selection profiles that allow you to specify keyboard drivers for use during the Windows Preinstallation Environment (Windows PE) phase of LTI. For more information about this folder structure, see [Deploy a Windows 10 image using MDT: Step 5: Prepare the drivers repository](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/deployment/deploy-windows-mdt/deploy-a-windows-10-image-using-mdt?redirectedfrom=MSDN#step-5-prepare-the-drivers-repository).
-
-To add the keyboard drivers to the selection profile, follow these steps:
-
-1. Download the latest Surface Laptop MSI file from the appropriate locations:
- - [Surface Laptop (1st Gen) Drivers and Firmware](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=55489)
- - [Surface Laptop 2 Drivers and Firmware](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=57515)
- - [Surface Laptop 3 with Intel Processor Drivers and Firmware](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=100429)
-
-2. Extract the contents of the Surface Laptop MSI file to a folder that you can easily locate (for example, c:\surface_laptop_drivers). To extract the contents, open an elevated Command Prompt window and run the command from the following example:
-
- ```cmd
- Msiexec.exe /a SurfaceLaptop_Win10_15063_1703008_1.msi targetdir=c:\surface_laptop_drivers /qn
- ```
-
-3. Open the Deployment Workbench and expand the **Deployment Shares** node and your deployment share, then navigate to the **WindowsPEX64** folder.
-
- 
-
-4. Right-click the **WindowsPEX64** folder and select **Import Drivers**.
-5. Follow the instructions in the Import Driver Wizard to import the driver folders into the WindowsPEX64 folder.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Check the downloaded MSI package to determine the format and directory structure. The directory structure will start with either SurfacePlatformInstaller (older MSI files) or SurfaceUpdate (Newer MSI files) depending on when the MSI was released.
-
-To support Surface Laptop (1st Gen), import the following folders:
-
- - SurfacePlatformInstaller\Drivers\System\GPIO
- - SurfacePlatformInstaller\Drivers\System\SurfaceHidMiniDriver
- - SurfacePlatformInstaller\Drivers\System\SurfaceSerialHubDriver
-
-Or for newer MSI files beginning with "SurfaceUpdate", use:
-
-- SurfaceUpdate\SerialIOGPIO
-- SurfaceUpdate\SurfaceHidMiniDriver
-- SurfaceUpdate\SurfaceSerialHubDriver
-
-To support Surface Laptop 2, import the following folders:
-
- - SurfacePlatformInstaller\Drivers\System\GPIO
- - SurfacePlatformInstaller\Drivers\System\SurfaceHIDMiniDriver
- - SurfacePlatformInstaller\Drivers\System\SurfaceSerialHubDriver
- - SurfacePlatformInstaller\Drivers\System\I2C
- - SurfacePlatformInstaller\Drivers\System\SPI
- - SurfacePlatformInstaller\Drivers\System\UART
-
-Or for newer MSI files beginning with "SurfaceUpdate", use:
-
-- SurfaceUpdate\SerialIOGPIO
-- SurfaceUpdate\IclSerialIOI2C
-- SurfaceUpdate\IclSerialIOSPI
-- SurfaceUpdate\IclSerialIOUART
-- SurfaceUpdate\SurfaceHidMini
-- SurfaceUpdate\SurfaceSerialHub
-
-
-To support Surface Laptop 3 with Intel Processor, import the following folders:
-
-- SurfaceUpdate\IclSerialIOGPIO
-- SurfaceUpdate\IclSerialIOI2C
-- SurfaceUpdate\IclSerialIOSPI
-- SurfaceUpdate\IclSerialIOUART
-- SurfaceUpdate\SurfaceHidMini
-- SurfaceUpdate\SurfaceSerialHub
-- SurfaceUpdate\SurfaceHotPlug
-
-
-6. Verify that the WindowsPEX64 folder now contains the imported drivers. The folder should resemble the following:
-
- 
-
-7. Configure a selection profile that uses the WindowsPEX64 folder. The selection profile should resemble the following:
-
- 
-
-8. Configure the Windows PE properties of the MDT deployment share to use the new selection profile, as follows:
-
- - For **Platform**, select **x64**.
- - For **Selection profile**, select the new profile.
- - Select **Include all drivers from the selection profile**.
-
- 
-
-9. Verify that you have configured the remaining Surface Laptop drivers by using either a selection profile or a **DriverGroup001** variable.
- - For Surface Laptop (1st Gen), the model is **Surface Laptop**. The remaining Surface Laptop drivers should reside in the \MDT Deployment Share\Out-of-Box Drivers\Windows10\X64\Surface Laptop folder as shown in the figure that follows this list.
- - For Surface Laptop 2, the model is **Surface Laptop 2**. The remaining Surface Laptop drivers should reside in the \MDT Deployment Share\Out-of-Box Drivers\Windows10\X64\Surface Laptop 2 folder.
-
- 
-
-After configuring the MDT Deployment Share to use the new selection profile and related settings, continue the deployment process as described in [Deploy a Windows 10 image using MDT: Step 6: Create the deployment task sequence](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/deployment/deploy-windows-mdt/deploy-a-windows-10-image-using-mdt#step-6-create-the-deployment-task-sequence).
diff --git a/devices/surface/enroll-and-configure-surface-devices-with-semm.md b/devices/surface/enroll-and-configure-surface-devices-with-semm.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e8a0143aab..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/enroll-and-configure-surface-devices-with-semm.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,150 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Enroll and configure Surface devices with SEMM (Surface)
-description: Learn how to create a Surface UEFI configuration package to control the settings of Surface UEFI, as well as enroll a Surface device in SEMM.
-keywords: surface enterprise management
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.pagetype: surface, devices, security
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.audience: itpro
-ms.date: 10/21/2019
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
----
-
-# Enroll and configure Surface devices with SEMM
-
-With Microsoft Surface Enterprise Management Mode (SEMM), you can securely configure the settings of Surface UEFI on a Surface device and manage those settings on Surface devices in your organization. When a Surface device is managed by SEMM, that device is considered to be *enrolled* (sometimes referred to as activated). This article shows you how to create a Surface UEFI configuration package that will not only control the settings of Surface UEFI, but will also enroll a Surface device in SEMM.
-
-For a more high-level overview of SEMM, see [Microsoft Surface Enterprise Management Mode](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface/surface-enterprise-management-mode).
-
-A streamlined method of managing firmware from the cloud on Surface Pro 7,Surface Pro X and Surface Laptop 3 is now available via public preview. For more information,refer to [Intune management of Surface UEFI settings](surface-manage-dfci-guide.md).
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> SEMM is not supported on Surface Pro X. For more information, refer to [Deploying, managing, and servicing Surface Pro X](surface-pro-arm-app-management.md).
-
-#### Download and install Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator
-The tool used to create SEMM packages is Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator. You can download Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator from the [Surface Tools for IT](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=46703) page in the Microsoft Download Center.
-Run the Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator Windows Installer (.msi) file to start the installation of the tool. When the installer completes, find Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator in the All Apps section of your Start menu.
-
->[!NOTE]
->Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator is supported only on Windows 10.
-
-## Create a Surface UEFI configuration package
-
-The Surface UEFI configuration package performs both the role of applying a new configuration of Surface UEFI settings to a Surface device managed with SEMM and the role of enrolling Surface devices in SEMM. The creation of a configuration package requires you to have a signing certificate to be used with SEMM to secure the configuration of UEFI settings on each Surface device. For more information about the requirements for the SEMM certificate, see [Microsoft Surface Enterprise Management Mode](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface/surface-enterprise-management-mode).
-
-To create a Surface UEFI configuration package, follow these steps:
-
-1. Open Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator from the Start menu.
-2. Click **Start**.
-3. Click **Configuration Package**, as shown in Figure 1.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 1. Select Configuration Package to create a package for SEMM enrollment and configuration*
-
-4. Click **Certificate Protection** to add your exported certificate file with private key (.pfx), as shown in Figure 2. Browse to the location of your certificate file, select the file, and then click **OK**.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 2. Add the SEMM certificate and Surface UEFI password to a Surface UEFI configuration package*
-
-5. When you are prompted to confirm the certificate password, enter and confirm the password for your certificate file, and then click **OK**.
-6. Click **Password Protection** to add a password to Surface UEFI. This password will be required whenever you boot to UEFI. If this password is not entered, only the **PC information**, **About**, **Enterprise management**, and **Exit** pages will be displayed. This step is optional.
-7. When you are prompted, enter and confirm your chosen password for Surface UEFI, and then click **OK**. If you want to clear an existing Surface UEFI password, leave the password field blank.
-8. If you do not want the Surface UEFI package to apply to a particular device, on the **Choose which Surface type you want to target** page, click the slider beneath the corresponding Surface Book or Surface Pro 4 image so that it is in the **Off** position. (As shown in Figure 3.)
-
- 
-
- *Figure 3. Choose the devices for package compatibility*
-
-9. Click **Next**.
-10. If you want to deactivate a component on managed Surface devices, on the **Choose which components you want to activate or deactivate** page, click the slider next to any device or group of devices you want to deactivate so that the slider is in the **Off** position. (Shown in Figure 4.) The default configuration for each device is **On**. Click the **Reset** button if you want to return all sliders to the default position.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 4. Disable or enable individual Surface components*
-
-11. Click **Next**.
-12. To enable or disable advanced options in Surface UEFI or the display of Surface UEFI pages, on the **Choose the advanced settings for your devices** page, click the slider beside the desired setting to configure that option to **On** or **Off** (shown in Figure 5). In the **UEFI Front Page** section, you can use the sliders for **Security**, **Devices**, and **Boot** to control what pages are available to users who boot into Surface UEFI. (For more information about Surface UEFI settings, see [Manage Surface UEFI settings](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface/manage-surface-uefi-settings).) Click **Build** when you have finished selecting options to generate and save the package.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 5. Control advanced Surface UEFI settings and Surface UEFI pages with SEMM*
-
-13. In the **Save As** dialog box, specify a name for the Surface UEFI configuration package, browse to the location where you would like to save the file, and then click **Save**.
-14. When the package is created and saved, the **Successful** page is displayed.
-
->[!NOTE]
->Record the certificate thumbprint characters that are displayed on this page, as shown in Figure 6. You will need these characters to confirm enrollment of new Surface devices in SEMM. Click **End** to complete package creation and close Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator.
-
-
-
-*Figure 6. The last two characters of the certificate thumbprint are displayed on the Successful page*
-
-Now that you have created your Surface UEFI configuration package, you can enroll or configure Surface devices.
-
->[!NOTE]
->When a Surface UEFI configuration package is created, a log file is created on the desktop with details of the configuration package settings and options.
-
-## Enroll a Surface device in SEMM
-When the Surface UEFI configuration package is executed, the SEMM certificate and Surface UEFI configuration files are staged in the firmware storage of the Surface device. When the Surface device reboots, Surface UEFI processes these files and begins the process of applying the Surface UEFI configuration or enrolling the Surface device in SEMM, as shown in Figure 7.
-
-
-
-*Figure 7. The SEMM process for configuration of Surface UEFI or enrollment of a Surface device*
-
-Before you begin the process to enroll a Surface device in SEMM, ensure that you have the last two characters of the certificate thumbprint on hand. You will need these characters to confirm the device’s enrollment (see Figure 6).
-
-To enroll a Surface device in SEMM with a Surface UEFI configuration package, follow these steps:
-
-1. Run the Surface UEFI configuration package .msi file on the Surface device you want to enroll in SEMM. This will provision the Surface UEFI configuration file in the device’s firmware.
-2. Select the **I accept the terms in the License Agreement** check box to accept the End User License Agreement (EULA), and then click **Install** to begin the installation process.
-3. Click **Finish** to complete the Surface UEFI configuration package installation and restart the Surface device when you are prompted to do so.
-4. Surface UEFI will load the configuration file and determine that SEMM is not enabled on the device. Surface UEFI will then begin the SEMM enrollment process, as follows:
- * Surface UEFI will verify that the SEMM configuration file contains a SEMM certificate.
- * Surface UEFI will prompt you to enter to enter the last two characters of the certificate thumbprint to confirm enrollment of the Surface device in SEMM, as shown in Figure 8.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 8. Enrollment in SEMM requires the last two characters of the certificate thumbprint*
-
- * Surface UEFI will store the SEMM certificate in firmware and apply the configuration settings that are specified in the Surface UEFI configuration file.
-
-5. The Surface device is now enrolled in SEMM and will boot to Windows.
-
-You can verify that a Surface device has been successfully enrolled in SEMM by looking for **Microsoft Surface Configuration Package** in **Programs and Features** (as shown in Figure 9), or in the events stored in the **Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator** log, found under **Applications and Services Logs** in Event Viewer (as shown in Figure 10).
-
-
-
-*Figure 9. Verify the enrollment of a Surface device in SEMM in Programs and Features*
-
-
-
-*Figure 10. Verify the enrollment of a Surface device in SEMM in Event Viewer*
-
-You can also verify that the device is enrolled in SEMM in Surface UEFI – while the device is enrolled, Surface UEFI will contain the **Enterprise management** page (as shown in Figure 11).
-
-
-
-*Figure 11. The Surface UEFI Enterprise management page*
-
-
-## Configure Surface UEFI settings with SEMM
-
-After a device is enrolled in SEMM, you can run Surface UEFI configuration packages signed with the same SEMM certificate to apply new Surface UEFI settings. These settings are applied automatically the next time the device boots, without any interaction from the user. You can use application deployment solutions like System Center Configuration Manager to deploy Surface UEFI configuration packages to Surface devices to change or manage the settings in Surface UEFI.
-
-For more information about how to deploy Windows Installer (.msi) files with Configuration Manager, see [Deploy and manage applications with System Center Configuration Manager](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/mt627959).
-
-If you have secured Surface UEFI with a password, users without the password who attempt to boot to Surface UEFI will only have the **PC information**, **About**, **Enterprise management**, and **Exit** pages displayed to them.
-
-If you have not secured Surface UEFI with a password or a user enters the password correctly, settings that are configured with SEMM will be dimmed (unavailable) and the text Some settings are managed by your organization will be displayed at the top of the page, as shown in Figure 12.
-
-
-
-*Figure 12. Settings managed by SEMM will be disabled in Surface UEFI*
diff --git a/devices/surface/ethernet-adapters-and-surface-device-deployment.md b/devices/surface/ethernet-adapters-and-surface-device-deployment.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1b1216cd8d..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/ethernet-adapters-and-surface-device-deployment.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,101 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Ethernet adapters and Surface deployment (Surface)
-description: This article provides guidance and answers to help you perform a network deployment to Surface devices.
-ms.assetid: 5273C59E-6039-4E50-96B3-426BB38A64C0
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: ethernet, deploy, removable, network, connectivity, boot, firmware, device, adapter, PXE boot, USB
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.pagetype: surface, devices
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.audience: itpro
-ms.date: 10/21/2019
----
-
-# Ethernet adapters and Surface deployment
-
-
-This article provides guidance and answers to help you perform a network deployment to Surface devices including Surface Pro 3 and later.
-
-Network deployment to Surface devices can pose some unique challenges for system administrators. Due to the lack of a native wired Ethernet adapter, administrators must provide connectivity through a removable Ethernet adapter.
-
-## Select an Ethernet adapter for Surface devices
-
-
-Before you can address the concerns of how you will boot to your deployment environment or how devices will be recognized by your deployment solution, you have to use a wired network adapter.
-
-The primary concern when selecting an Ethernet adapter is how that adapter will boot your Surface device from the network. If you are pre-staging clients with Windows Deployment Services (WDS) or if you are using System Center Configuration Manager, you may also want to consider whether the removable Ethernet adapters will be dedicated to a specific Surface device or shared among multiple devices. See the [Manage MAC addresses with removable Ethernet adapters](#manage-mac-addresses) section of this article for more information on potential conflicts with shared adapters.
-
-Booting from the network (PXE boot) is only supported when you use an Ethernet adapter or docking station from Microsoft. To boot from the network, the chipset in the Ethernet adapter or dock must be detected and configured as a boot device in the firmware of the Surface device. Microsoft Ethernet adapters, such as the Surface Ethernet Adapter and the [Surface Dock](https://www.microsoft.com/surface/accessories/surface-dock) use a chipset that is compatible with the Surface firmware.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> PXE boot is not supported on Surface Pro X. For more information, refer to [Deploying, managing, and servicing Surface Pro X](surface-pro-arm-app-management.md)
-
-The following Ethernet devices are supported for network boot with Surface devices:
-
-- Surface USB-C to Ethernet and USB 3.0 Adapter
-
-- Surface USB 3.0 to Gigabit Ethernet Adapter
-
-- Surface Dock
-
-- Surface 3 Docking Station
-
-- Surface Pro 3 Docking Station
-
-- Docking Station for Surface Pro and Surface Pro 2
-
-Third-party Ethernet adapters are also supported for network deployment, although they do not support PXE boot. To use a third-party Ethernet adapter, you must load the drivers into the deployment boot image and you must launch that boot image from a separate storage device, such as a USB stick.
-
-## Boot Surface devices from the network
-
-To boot from the network or a connected USB stick, you must instruct the Surface device to boot from an alternate boot device. You can alter the boot order in the system firmware to prioritize USB boot devices, or you can instruct it to boot from an alternate boot device during the boot up process.
-
-To boot a Surface device from an alternative boot device, follow these steps:
-
-1. Ensure the Surface device is powered off.
-2. Press and hold the **Volume Down** button.
-3. Press and release the **Power** button.
-4. After the system begins to boot from the USB stick or Ethernet adapter, release the **Volume Down** button.
-
->[!NOTE]
->In addition to an Ethernet adapter, a keyboard must also be connected to the Surface device to enter the preinstallation environment and navigate the deployment wizard.
-
-
-For Windows 10, version 1511 and later – including the Windows Assessment and Deployment Kit (Windows ADK) for Windows 10, version 1511 – the drivers for Microsoft Surface Ethernet Adapters are present by default. If you are using a deployment solution that uses Windows Preinstallation Environment (WinPE), like the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit, and booting from the network with PXE, ensure that your deployment solution is using the latest version of the Windows ADK.
-
-## Manage MAC addresses with removable Ethernet adapters
-
-
-Another consideration for administrators performing Windows deployment over the network is how you will identify computers when you use the same Ethernet adapter to deploy to more than one computer. A common identifier used by deployment technologies is the Media Access Control (MAC) address that is associated with each Ethernet adapter. However, when you use the same Ethernet adapter to deploy to multiple computers, you cannot use a deployment technology that inspects MAC addresses because there is no way to differentiate the MAC address of the removable adapter when used on the different computers.
-
-The simplest solution to avoid MAC address conflicts is to provide a dedicated removable Ethernet adapter for each Surface device. This can make sense in many scenarios where the Ethernet adapter or the additional functionality of the docking station will be used regularly. However, not all scenarios call for the additional connectivity of a docking station or support for wired networks.
-
-Another potential solution to avoid conflict when adapters are shared is to use the [Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT)](https://technet.microsoft.com/windows/dn475741) to perform deployment to Surface devices. MDT does not use the MAC address to identify individual computers and thus is not subject to this limitation. However, MDT does use Windows Deployment Services to provide PXE boot functionality, and is subject to the limitations regarding pre-staged clients which is covered later in this section.
-
-When you use a shared adapter for deployment, the solution for affected deployment technologies is to use another means to identify unique systems. For Configuration Manager and WDS, both of which can be affected by this issue, the solution is to use the System Universal Unique Identifier (System UUID) that is embedded in the computer firmware by the computer manufacturer. For Surface devices, you can see this entry in the computer firmware under **Device Information**.
-
-To access the firmware of a Surface device, follow these steps:
-
-1. Ensure the Surface device is powered off.
-2. Press and hold the **Volume Up** button.
-3. Press and release the **Power** button.
-4. After the device begins to boot, release the **Volume Up** button.
-
-When deploying with WDS, the MAC address is only used to identify a computer when the deployment server is configured to respond only to known, pre-staged clients. When pre-staging a client, an administrator creates a computer account in Active Directory and defines that computer by the MAC address or the System UUID. To avoid the identity conflicts caused by shared Ethernet adapters, you should use [System UUID to define pre-staged clients](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc742034). Alternatively, you can configure WDS to respond to unknown clients that do not require definition by either MAC address or System UUID by selecting the **Respond to all client computers (known and unknown)** option on the [**PXE Response** tab](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc732360) in **Windows Deployment Server Properties**.
-
-The potential for conflicts with shared Ethernet adapters is much higher with Configuration Manager. Where WDS only uses MAC addresses to define individual systems when configured to do so, Configuration Manager uses the MAC address to define individual systems whenever performing a deployment to new or unknown computers. This can result in improperly configured devices or even the inability to deploy more than one system with a shared Ethernet adapter. There are several potential solutions for this situation that are described in detail in the [How to Use The Same External Ethernet Adapter For Multiple SCCM OSD](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/askpfeplat/2014/07/27/how-to-use-the-same-external-ethernet-adapter-for-multiple-sccm-osd/) blog post on the Ask Premier Field Engineering (PFE) Platforms TechNet blog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface/get-started.md b/devices/surface/get-started.md
deleted file mode 100644
index af2bc13af9..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/get-started.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,168 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Get started with Surface devices
-author: greg-lindsay
-ms.author: greglin
-manager: laurawi
-layout: LandingPage
-ms.assetid:
-ms.audience: itpro
-ms.tgt_pltfrm: na
-ms.devlang: na
-ms.topic: landing-page
-description: "Get started with Microsoft Surface devices"
-ms.localizationpriority: High
----
-# Get started with Surface devices
-
-Harness the power of Surface, Windows, and Office connected together through the cloud. Find tools, step-by-step guides, and other resources to help you plan, deploy, and manage Surface for Business devices in your organization.
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface/ltsb-for-surface.md b/devices/surface/ltsb-for-surface.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5e14c8444d..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/ltsb-for-surface.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Long-Term Servicing Channel for Surface devices (Surface)
-description: LTSB is not supported for general-purpose Surface devices and should be used for specialized devices only.
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.pagetype: surface, devices
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.audience: itpro
----
-
-# Long-Term Servicing Channel (LTSC) for Surface devices
-
->[!WARNING]
->For updated information on this topic, see [Surface device compatibility with Windows 10 Long-Term Servicing Channel](surface-device-compatibility-with-windows-10-ltsc.md). For additional information on this update, see the [Documentation Updates for Surface and Windows 10 LTSB Compatibility](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/surface/2017/04/11/documentation-updates-for-surface-and-windows-10-ltsb-compatibility) post on the Surface Blog for IT Pros.
-
-General-purpose Surface devices in the Long-Term Servicing Channel (LTSC) are not supported. As a general guideline, if a Surface device runs productivity software, such as Microsoft Office, it is a general-purpose device that does not qualify for LTSC and should instead be on the Semi-Annual Channel.
-
->[!NOTE]
->For more information about the servicing branches, see [Overview of Windows as a service](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/manage/waas-overview).
-
-LTSC prevents Surface devices from receiving critical Windows 10 feature updates and certain non-security servicing updates. Customers with poor experiences using Surface devices in the LTSC configuration will be instructed to switch to the Semi-Annual Channel. Furthermore, the Windows 10 Enterprise LTSB edition removes core features of Surface devices, including seamless inking and touch-friendly applications. It does not contain key in-box applications including Microsoft Edge, OneNote, Calendar or Camera. Therefore, productivity is impacted and functionality is limited. LTSC is not supported as a suitable servicing solution for general-purpose Surface devices.
-
-General-purpose Surface devices are intended to run on the Semi-Annual Channel to receive full servicing and firmware updates and forward compatibility with the introduction of new Surface features. In the Semi-Annual Channel, feature updates are available as soon as Microsoft releases them.
-
-Surface devices in specialized scenarios–such as PCs that control medical equipment, point-of-sale systems, and ATMs–might consider the use of LTSC. These special-purpose systems typically perform a single task and do not require feature updates as frequently as other devices in the organization.
-
-## Related topics
-
-- [Surface IT Pro Blog](https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/t5/Surface-IT-Pro-Blog/bg-p/SurfaceITPro)
-
diff --git a/devices/surface/maintain-optimal-power-settings-on-Surface-devices.md b/devices/surface/maintain-optimal-power-settings-on-Surface-devices.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e43a14a63b..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/maintain-optimal-power-settings-on-Surface-devices.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,181 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Best practice power settings for Surface devices
-description: This topic provides best practice recommendations for maintaining optimal power settings and explains how Surface streamlines the power management experience. This article applies to all currently supported Surface devices including Surface Pro 7, Surface Pro X, and Surface Laptop 3.
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.audience: itpro
-ms.date: 10/28/2019
----
-
-# Best practice power settings for Surface devices
-
-Surface devices are designed to take advantage of the latest advances in
-mobile device energy consumption to deliver a streamlined experience
-optimized across workloads. Depending on what you’re doing, Surface
-dynamically fine tunes how power flows to individual hardware
-components, momentarily waking up system components to handle background
-tasks -- such as an incoming email or network traffic -- before returning to a
-low power idle state (S0ix).
-
-## Summary of recommendations for IT administrators
-
-To ensure Surface devices across your organization fully benefit from Surface power optimization features:
-
-- Install the latest drivers and firmware from Windows Update or the Surface Driver and Firmware MSI. This creates the balanced power plan (aka power profile) by default and configures optimal power settings. For more information, refer to [Deploying the latest firmware and drivers for Surface devices](deploy-the-latest-firmware-and-drivers-for-surface-devices.md).
-- Avoid creating custom power profiles or adjusting advanced power settings not visible in the default UI (**System** > **Power & sleep**).
-- If you must manage the power profile of devices across your network (such as in highly managed organizations), use the powercfg command tool to export the power plan from the factory image of the Surface device and then import it into the provisioning package for your Surface devices.
-
->[!NOTE]
->You can only export a power plan across the same type of Surface device. For example, you cannot export a power plan from Surface Laptop and import it on Surface Pro. For more information, refer to [Configure power settings](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows-hardware/customize/power-settings/configure-power-settings).
-
-- Exclude Surface devices from any existing power management policy settings.
-
-## Background
-
-The way Surface implements power management differs significantly from
-the earlier OS standard that gradually reduces and turns off power via a
-series of sleep states; for example, cycling through S1, S2, S3, and so on.
-
-Instead, Surface is imaged with a custom power profile that replaces
-legacy sleep and energy consumption functionality with modern standby
-features and dynamic fine tuning. This custom power profile is
-implemented via the Surface Serial Hub Driver and the system aggregator
-module (SAM). The SAM chip functions as the Surface device power-policy
-owner, using algorithms to calculate optimal power requirements. It
-works in conjunction with Windows power manager to allocate or throttle
-only the exact amount of power required for hardware components to
-function. This article applies to all currently supported Surface devices including Surface Pro 7, Surface Pro X, and Surface Laptop 3.
-
-## Utilizing the custom power profile in Surface
-
-If you go into the power options on a surface device, you'll see that there's a single power plan available. This is the custom power profile. And if you go to the advanced power settings, you’ll see a much smaller subset of power options compared to a generic PC running Windows 10. Unlike generic devices, Surface has firmware and custom components to manage these power options.
-
-
-## Modern Standby
-
-The algorithmically embedded custom power profile enables modern standby
-connectivity for Surface by maintaining a low power state for
-instant on/instant off functionality typical of smartphones. S0ix, also
-known as Deepest Runtime Idle Platform State (DRIPS), is the default
-power mode for Surface devices. Modern standby has two modes:
-
-- **Connected standby.** The default mode for up-to-the minute
- delivery of emails, messaging, and cloud-synced data, connected
- standby keeps Wi-Fi on and maintains network connectivity.
-
-- **Disconnected standby.** An optional mode for extended battery
- life, disconnected standby delivers the same instant-on experience
- and saves power by turning off Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and related network
- connectivity.
-
-To learn more about modern standby, refer to the [Microsoft Hardware Dev
-Center](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows-hardware/design/device-experiences/modern-standby-wake-sources).
-
-## How Surface streamlines the power management experience
-
-Surface integrates the following features designed to help users
-optimize the power management experience:
-
-- [Singular power plan](#singular-power-plan)
-
-- [Simplified power settings user
- interface](#simplified-power-settings-user-interface)
-
-- [Windows performance power
- slider](#windows-performance-power-slider)
-
-### Singular power plan
-
-Surface is designed for a streamlined power management experience that
-eliminates the need to create custom power plans or manually configure
-power settings. Microsoft streamlines the user
-experience by delivering a single power plan (balanced) that replaces
-the multiple power plans from standard Windows builds.
-
-### Simplified power settings user interface
-
-Surface provides a simplified UI in accord with best practice power
-setting recommendations. In general, it's recommended to only adjust settings visible in the default user interface and avoid configuring advanced power settings or Group Policy settings. Using the default screen and sleep timeouts while avoiding maximum
-brightness levels are the most effective ways for users to maintain
-extended battery life.
-
-
-
-Figure 1. Simplified power and sleep settings
-
-### Windows performance power slider
-
-Surface devices running Windows 10 build 1709 and later include a power
-slider allowing you to prioritize battery life when needed or favor performance if desired. You
-can access the power slider from the taskbar by clicking on the battery
-icon. Slide left for longer battery life (battery saver mode) or slide
-right for faster performance.
-
-
-
-Figure 2. Power slider
-
-Power slider enables four states as described in the following table:
-
-| Slider mode| Description |
-|---|---|
-| Battery saver| Helps conserve power and prolong battery life when the system is disconnected from a power source. When battery saver is on, some Windows features are disabled, throttled, or behave differently. Screen brightness is also reduced. Battery saver is only available when using battery power (DC). To learn more, see [Battery Saver](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows-hardware/design/component-guidelines/battery-saver).|
-| Recommended | Delivers longer battery life than the default settings in earlier versions of Windows. |
-| Better Performance | Slightly favors performance over battery life, functioning as the default slider mode. |
-| Best Performance | Favors performance over power for workloads requiring maximum performance and responsiveness, regardless of battery power consumption.|
-
-Power slider modes directly control specific hardware components shown
-in the following table.
-
-| Component | Slider functionality |
-|---|---|
-| Intel Speed Shift (CPU energy registers) and Energy Performance Preference hint. | Selects the best operating frequency and voltage for optimal performance and power. The Energy Performance Preference (PERFEPP) is a global power efficiency hint to the CPU. |
-| Fan speed (RPM)| Where applicable, adjusts for changing conditions such as keeping fan silent in battery saver slider mode.|
-| Processor package power limits (PL1/PL2).| Requires the CPU to manage its frequency choices to accommodate a running average power limit for both steady state (PL1) and turbo (PL2) workloads.|
-| Processor turbo frequency limits (IA turbo limitations). | Adjusts processor and graphics performance allowing processor cores to run faster or slower than the rated operating frequency. |
-
->[!NOTE]
->The power slider is entirely independent of operating system power settings whether configured from Control Panel/ Power Options, Group Policy, or related methods.
-
-To learn more, see:
-
-- [Customize the Windows performance power
- slider](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows-hardware/customize/desktop/customize-power-slider)
-
-- [Battery
- saver.](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows-hardware/design/component-guidelines/battery-saver)
-
-## Best practices for extended battery life
-
-
-| Best practice | Go to | Next steps |
-|---|---|---|
-| Ensure your Surface device is up to date| Windows Update | In the taskbar search box, type **Windows Update** and select **Check for updates**. |
-| Choose the best power setting for what you’re doing | Power slider | In the taskbar, select the battery icon, then choose **Best performance**, **Best battery life**, or somewhere in between.|
-| Conserve battery when it’s low | Battery saver | In the taskbar, select the battery icon and click **Battery settings**. Select **Turn battery saver on automatically if my battery falls below** and then move the slider further to the right for longer battery life. |
-| Configure optimal screen brightness | Battery saver | In the taskbar, select the battery icon and click **Battery settings**, select **Lower screen brightness while in battery saver**. |
-| Conserve power whenever you’re not plugged in | Battery saver| Select **Turn on battery saver status until next charge**.|
-| Investigate problems with your power settings. | Power troubleshooter | In the Taskbar search for troubleshoot, select **Troubleshoot**, and then select **Power** and follow the instructions.|
-| Check app usage | Your apps | Close apps.|
-| Check your power cord for any damage.| Your power cord | Replace power cord if worn or damaged.|
-
-# Learn more
-
-- [Modern
- standby](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows-hardware/design/device-experiences/modern-standby-wake-sources)
-
-
-
-- [Customize the Windows performance power
- slider](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows-hardware/customize/desktop/customize-power-slider)
-
-- [Battery
- saver](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows-hardware/design/component-guidelines/battery-saver)
-- [Deploying the latest firmware and drivers for Surface devices](deploy-the-latest-firmware-and-drivers-for-surface-devices.md)
diff --git a/devices/surface/manage-surface-driver-and-firmware-updates.md b/devices/surface/manage-surface-driver-and-firmware-updates.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7f470ab3ac..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/manage-surface-driver-and-firmware-updates.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,65 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Manage Surface driver and firmware updates (Surface)
-description: This article describes the available options to manage firmware and driver updates for Surface devices.
-ms.assetid: CD1219BA-8EDE-4BC8-BEEF-99B50C211D73
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: Surface, Surface Pro 3, firmware, update, device, manage, deploy, driver, USB
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.pagetype: surface, devices
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.audience: itpro
-ms.date: 10/21/2019
----
-
-# Manage Surface driver and firmware updates
-
-This article describes the available options that you can use to manage firmware and driver updates for Surface devices including Surface Pro 3 and later.
-
-To see a list of the available downloads for Surface devices and links to download the drivers and firmware for your device, see [Deploy the latest firmware and drivers for Surface devices](deploy-the-latest-firmware-and-drivers-for-surface-devices.md).
-
-On Surface devices, the firmware is exposed to the operating system as a driver and is visible in Device Manager. This design allows a Surface device firmware to be automatically updated along with all drivers through Windows Update. This mechanism provides a seamless, automatic experience for receiving the latest firmware and driver updates. Although automatic updating is easy for end users, updating firmware and drivers automatically may not always be appropriate for organizations and businesses. In cases where you strictly manage updates or when you deploy a new operating system to a Surface device, automatic updates from Windows Update may not be appropriate.
-
-## Methods for deploying firmware
-
-Windows Update automatically provides firmware for computers that receive updates directly from Microsoft. However, in environments where Windows Server Update Services (WSUS) manages updates, Windows Update cannot update the firmware. For managed environments, there are a number of options you can use to deploy firmware updates.
-
-### Windows Update
-
-The simplest solution to ensure that firmware on Surface devices in your organization is kept up to date is to allow Surface devices to receive updates directly from Microsoft. You can implement this solution easily by excluding Surface devices from Group Policy that directs computers to receive updates from WSUS.
-
-Although this solution ensures that firmware will be updated as new releases are made available to Windows Update, it does present potential drawbacks. Each Surface device that receives updates from Windows Update downloads each update independently from Microsoft instead of accessing a central location. These operations increase demand on Internet connectivity and bandwidth. Additionally, such updates are not subjected to testing or review by administrators.
-
-For details about Group Policy for client configuration of WSUS or Windows Update, see [Step 4: Configure Group Policy Settings for Automatic Updates](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows-server/administration/windows-server-update-services/deploy/4-configure-group-policy-settings-for-automatic-updates).
-
-### Windows Installer Package
-
-Surface driver and firmware updates are packaged as Windows Installer (MSI) files. To deploy these Windows Installer packages, you can use application deployment utilities such as the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT) or System Center Configuration Manager. Such solutions provide the means for administrators to test and review updates before deploying them, and to centralize deployment. For each device, it is important to select the correct MSI file for the device and its operating system. For more information see [Deploy the latest firmware and drivers for Surface devices](deploy-the-latest-firmware-and-drivers-for-surface-devices.md).
-
-For instructions on how to deploy updates by using Endpoint Configuration Manager (formerly System Center Configuration Manager), refer to [Deploy applications with Configuration Manager](https://docs.microsoft.com/sccm/apps/deploy-use/deploy-applications). For instructions on how to deploy updates by using MDT, see [Deploy a Windows 10 image using MDT](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/deployment/deploy-windows-mdt/deploy-a-windows-10-image-using-mdt).
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> You can deploy applications separately from an operating system deployment through MDT by using a Post OS Installation task sequence.
-
-### Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager
-
-Starting in Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager version 1710, you can synchronize and deploy Microsoft Surface firmware and driver updates by using the Configuration Manager client. The process resembles that for deploying regular updates. For additional information, see KB 4098906, [How to manage Surface driver updates in Configuration Manager](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4098906/manage-surface-driver-updates-in-configuration-manager).
-
-## Considerations when deploying updates and operating systems together
-
-The process of deploying firmware updates during an operating system deployment is straightforward. You can import the firmware and driver pack into either System Center Configuration Manager or MDT, and use them to deploy a fully updated environment to a target Surface device, complete with firmware. For a complete step-by-step guide to using MDT to deploy Windows to a Surface device, see [Deploy Windows 10 to Surface devices with Microsoft Deployment Toolkit](deploy-windows-10-to-surface-devices-with-mdt.md).
-
-> [!IMPORTANT]
-> Select the correct MSI file for each specific device and its operating system. For more information, see [Deploy the latest firmware and drivers for Surface devices](deploy-the-latest-firmware-and-drivers-for-surface-devices.md).
-
-**WindowsPE and Surface firmware and drivers**
-
-System Center Configuration Manager and MDT both use the Windows Preinstallation Environment (WindowsPE) during the deployment process. WindowsPE only supports a limited set of basic drivers such as those for network adapters and storage controllers. Drivers for Windows components that are not part of WindowsPE might produce errors. As a best practice, you can prevent such errors by configuring the deployment process to use only the required drivers during the WindowsPE phase.
-
-## Supported devices
-Downloadable MSI files are available for Surface devices from Surface Pro 2 and later. Information about MSI files for the newest Surface devices such as Surface Pro 7, Surface Pro X, and Surface Laptop 3 will be available from this page upon release.
diff --git a/devices/surface/manage-surface-uefi-settings.md b/devices/surface/manage-surface-uefi-settings.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d205908048..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/manage-surface-uefi-settings.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,217 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Manage Surface UEFI settings (Surface)
-description: Use Surface UEFI settings to enable or disable devices or components, configure security settings, and adjust Surface device boot settings.
-keywords: firmware, security, features, configure, hardware
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.pagetype: devices, surface
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 07/27/2017
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
----
-
-# Manage Surface UEFI settings
-
-All current and future generations of Surface devices use a unique Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) engineered by Microsoft specifically for these devices. Surface UEFI settings provide the ability to enable or disable built-in devices and components, protect UEFI settings from being changed, and adjust the Surface device boot settings.
-
-## Support for cloud-based management
-
-With Device Firmware Configuration Interface (DFCI) profiles built into Microsoft Intune (now available in public preview), Surface UEFI management extends the modern management stack down to the UEFI hardware level. DFCI supports zero-touch provisioning, eliminates BIOS passwords, provides control of security settings including boot options and built-in peripherals, and lays the groundwork for advanced security scenarios in the future. DFCI is currently available for Surface Pro 7, Surface Pro X, and Surface Laptop 3. For more information, refer to [Intune management of Surface UEFI settings](surface-manage-dfci-guide.md).
-
-## Open Surface UEFI menu
-
-To adjust UEFI settings during system startup:
-
-1. Shut down your Surface and wait about 10 seconds to make sure it's off.
-2. Press and hold the **Volume-up** button and - at the same time - press and release the **Power button.**
-3. As the Microsoft or Surface logo appears on your screen, continue to hold the **Volume-up** button until the UEFI screen appears.
-
-## UEFI PC information page
-
-The PC information page includes detailed information about your Surface device:
-
-- **Model** – Your Surface device’s model will be displayed here, such as Surface Book 2 or Surface Pro 7. The exact configuration of your device is not shown, (such as processor, disk size, or memory size).
-- **UUID** – This Universally Unique Identification number is specific to your device and is used to identify the device during deployment or management.
-
-- **Serial Number** – This number is used to identify this specific Surface device for asset tagging and support scenarios.
-- **Asset Tag** – The asset tag is assigned to the Surface device with the [Asset Tag Tool](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=44076).
-
-You will also find detailed information about the firmware of your Surface device. Surface devices have several internal components that each run different versions of firmware. The firmware version of each of the following devices is displayed on the **PC information** page (as shown in Figure 1):
-
-- System UEFI
-
-- SAM Controller
-
-- Intel Management Engine
-
-- System Embedded Controller
-
-- Touch Firmware
-
-
-
-*Figure 1. System information and firmware version information*
-
-You can find up-to-date information about the latest firmware version for your Surface device in the [Surface Update History](https://www.microsoft.com/surface/support/install-update-activate/surface-update-history) for your device.
-
-## UEFI Security page
-
-The Security page allows you to set a password to protect UEFI settings. This password must be entered when you boot the Surface device to UEFI. The password can contain the following characters (as shown in Figure 2):
-
-- Uppercase letters: A-Z
-
-- Lowercase letters: a-z
-
-- Numbers: 1-0
-
-- Special characters: !@#$%^&*()?<>{}[]-_=+|.,;:’`”
-
-The password must be at least 6 characters and is case sensitive.
-
-
-
-*Figure 2. Add a password to protect Surface UEFI settings*
-
-On the Security page you can also change the configuration of Secure Boot on your Surface device. Secure Boot technology prevents unauthorized boot code from booting on your Surface device, which protects against bootkit and rootkit-type malware infections. You can disable Secure Boot to allow your Surface device to boot third-party operating systems or bootable media. You can also configure Secure Boot to work with third-party certificates, as shown in Figure 3. Read more about [Secure Boot](https://msdn.microsoft.com/windows/hardware/commercialize/manufacture/desktop/secure-boot-overview) in the TechNet Library.
-
-
-
-*Figure 3. Configure Secure Boot*
-
-You can also enable or disable the Trusted Platform Module (TPM) device on the Security page, as shown in Figure 4. The TPM is used to authenticate encryption for your device’s data with BitLocker. Read more about [BitLocker](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/keep-secure/bitlocker-overview) in the TechNet Library.
-
-
-
-*Figure 4. Configure Surface UEFI security settings*
-
-## UEFI menu: Devices
-
-The Devices page allows you to enable or disable specific devices and components including:
-
-- Docking and USB Ports
-
-- MicroSD or SD Card Slot
-
-- Rear Camera
-
-- Front Camera
-
-- Infrared (IR) Camera
-
-- Wi-Fi and Bluetooth
-
-- Onboard Audio (Speakers and Microphone)
-
-Each device is listed with a slider button that you can move to **On** (enabled) or **Off** (disabled) position, as shown in Figure 5.
-
-
-
-*Figure 5. Enable and disable specific devices*
-
-## UEFI menu: Boot configuration
-
-The Boot Configuration page allows you to change the order of your boot devices as well as enable or disable boot of the following devices:
-
-- Windows Boot Manager
-
-- USB Storage
-
-- PXE Network
-
-- Internal Storage
-
-You can boot from a specific device immediately, or you can swipe left on that device’s entry in the list using the touchscreen. You can also boot immediately to a USB device or USB Ethernet adapter when the Surface device is powered off by pressing the **Volume Down** button and the **Power** button simultaneously.
-
-For the specified boot order to take effect, you must set the **Enable Alternate Boot Sequence** option to **On**, as shown in Figure 6.
-
-
-
-*Figure 6. Configure the boot order for your Surface device*
-
-You can also turn on and off IPv6 support for PXE with the **Enable IPv6 for PXE Network Boot** option, for example when performing a Windows deployment using PXE where the PXE server is configured for IPv4 only.
-
-## UEFI menu: Management
-The Management page allows you to manage use of Zero Touch UEFI Management and other features on eligible devices including Surface Pro 7, Surface Pro X, and Surface Laptop 3.
-
-
-*Figure 7. Manage access to Zero Touch UEFI Management and other features*
-
-
-Zero Touch UEFI Management lets you remotely manage UEFI settings by using a device profile within Intune called Device Firmware Configuration Interface (DFCI). If you do not configure this setting, the ability to manage eligible devices with DFCI is set to **Ready**. To prevent DFCI, select **Opt-Out**.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> The UEFI Management settings page and use of DFCI is only available on Surface Pro 7, Surface Pro X, and Surface Laptop 3.
-
-For more information, refer to [Intune management of Surface UEFI settings](surface-manage-dfci-guide.md).
-
-## UEFI menu: Exit
-
-Use the **Restart Now** button on the **Exit** page to exit UEFI settings, as shown in Figure 8.
-
-
-
-*Figure 8. Click Restart Now to exit Surface UEFI and restart the device*
-
-## Surface UEFI boot screens
-
-When you update Surface device firmware, by using either Windows Update or manual installation, the updates are not applied immediately to the device, but instead during the next reboot cycle. You can find out more about the Surface firmware update process in [Manage Surface driver and firmware updates](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface/manage-surface-pro-3-firmware-updates). The progress of the firmware update is displayed on a screen with progress bars of differing colors to indicate the firmware for each component. Each component’s progress bar is shown in Figures 9 through 18.
-
-
-
-*Figure 9. The Surface UEFI firmware update displays a blue progress bar*
-
-
-
-*Figure 10. The System Embedded Controller firmware update displays a green progress bar*
-
-
-
-*Figure 11. The SAM Controller firmware update displays an orange progress bar*
-
-
-
-*Figure 12. The Intel Management Engine firmware update displays a red progress bar*
-
-
-
-*Figure 13. The Surface touch firmware update displays a gray progress bar*
-
-
-
-*Figure 14. The Surface KIP firmware update displays a light green progress bar*
-
-
-
-*Figure 15. The Surface ISH firmware update displays a light pink progress bar*
-
-
-
-*Figure 16. The Surface Trackpad firmware update displays a pink progress bar*
-
-
-
-*Figure 17. The Surface TCON firmware update displays a light gray progress bar*
-
-
-
-
-*Figure 18. The Surface TPM firmware update displays a purple progress bar*
-
-
->[!NOTE]
->An additional warning message that indicates Secure Boot is disabled is displayed, as shown in Figure 19.
-
-
-
-*Figure 19. Surface boot screen that indicates Secure Boot has been disabled in Surface UEFI settings*
-
-## Related topics
-
-- [Intune management of Surface UEFI settings](surface-manage-dfci-guide.md)
-
-- [Surface Enterprise Management Mode](surface-enterprise-management-mode.md)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/devices/surface/microsoft-surface-brightness-control.md b/devices/surface/microsoft-surface-brightness-control.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1761581ced..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/microsoft-surface-brightness-control.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,82 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Surface Brightness Control
-description: This topic describes how you can use the Surface Brightness Control app to manage display brightness in point-of-sale and kiosk scenarios.
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.pagetype: surface, devices
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 10/31/2019
-ms.reviewer: hachidan
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.audience: itpro
----
-
-# Surface Brightness Control
-
-When deploying Surface devices in point of sale or other “always-on”
-kiosk scenarios, you can optimize power management using the new Surface
-Brightness Control app.
-
-Available for download with [Surface Tools for IT](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=46703).
-Surface Brightness Control is designed to help reduce thermal load and lower the overall carbon footprint for deployed Surface devices.
-If you plan to get only this tool from the download page, select the file **Surface_Brightness_Control_v1.16.137.0.msi** in the available list.
-The tool automatically dims the screen when not in use and includes the following configuration options:
-
-- Period of inactivity before dimming the display.
-
-- Brightness level when dimmed.
-
-- Maximum brightness level when in use.
-
-**To run Surface Brightness Control:**
-
-- Install surfacebrightnesscontrol.msi on the target device and Surface Brightness Control
- will begin working immediately.
-
-## Configuring Surface Brightness Control
-
-You can adjust the default values via the Windows Registry. For more
-information about using the Windows Registry, refer to the [Registry
-documentation](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/desktop/sysinfo/registry).
-
-1. Run regedit from a command prompt to open the Windows Registry
- Editor.
-
- - Computer\HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\WOW6432Node\Microsoft\Surface\Surface
- Brightness Control\
-
- If you're running an older version of Surface Brightness control, run the following command instead:
-
- - Computer\HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Surface\Surface
- Brightness Control\
-
-
-| Registry Setting | Data| Description
-|-----------|------------|---------------
-| Brightness Control Enabled | Default: 01 Option: 01, 00 Type: REG_BINARY | This setting allows you to turn Surface Brightness Control on or off. To disable Surface Brightness Control, set the value to 00. If you do not configure this setting, Surface Brightness Control is on. |
-| Brightness Control On Power Enabled| Default: 01 Options: 01, 00 Type: REG_BINARY | This setting allows you to turn off Surface Brightness Control when the device is directly connected to power. To disable Surface Brightness Control when power is plugged in, set the value to 00. If you do not configure this setting, Surface Brightness Control is on. |
-| Dimmed Brightness | Default: 20 Option: Range of 0-100 percent of screen brightness Data Type: Positive integer Type: REG_DWORD | This setting allows you to manage brightness range during periods of inactivity. If you do not configure this setting, the brightness level will drop to 20 percent of full brightness after 30 seconds of inactivity. |
-Full Brightness | Default: 100 Option: Range of 0-100 percent of screen brightness Data Type: Positive integer Type: REG_DWORD | This setting allows you to manage the maximum brightness range for the device. If you do not configure this setting, the maximum brightness range is 100 percent.|
-| Inactivity Timeout| Default: 30 seconds Option: Any numeric value Data Type: Integer Type: REG_DWORD | This setting allows you to manage the period of inactivity before dimming the device. If you do not configure this setting, the inactivity timeout is 30 seconds.|
-| Telemetry Enabled | Default: 01 Option: 01, 00 Type: REG_BINARY | This setting allows you to manage the sharing of app usage information to improve software and provide better user experience. To disable telemetry, set the value to 00. If you do not configure this setting, telemetry information is shared with Microsoft in accordance with the [Microsoft Privacy Statement](https://privacy.microsoft.com/privacystatement). |
-
-## Changes and updates
-
-### Version 1.16.137
-*Release Date: 22 October 2019*
-This version of Surface Brightness Control adds support for the following:
--Recompiled for x86, adding support for Surface Pro 7, Surface Pro X, and Surface Laptop 3.
-
-### Version 1.12.239.0
-*Release Date: 26 April 2019*
-This version of Surface Brightness Control adds support for the following:
-- Touch delay fixes.
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-- [Battery limit setting](battery-limit.md)
diff --git a/devices/surface/microsoft-surface-data-eraser.md b/devices/surface/microsoft-surface-data-eraser.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 90b623c490..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/microsoft-surface-data-eraser.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,238 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft Surface Data Eraser (Surface)
-description: Find out how the Microsoft Surface Data Eraser tool can help you securely wipe data from your Surface devices.
-ms.assetid: 8DD3F9FE-5458-4467-BE26-E9200341CF10
-ms.reviewer: hachidan
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-keywords: tool, USB, data, erase
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.pagetype: surface, devices, security
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.audience: itpro
-ms.date: 11/13/2019
----
-
-# Microsoft Surface Data Eraser
-
-
-Find out how the Microsoft Surface Data Eraser tool can help you securely wipe data from your Surface devices.
-
-[Microsoft Surface Data Eraser](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=46703) is a tool that boots from a USB stick and allows you to perform a secure wipe of all data from a compatible Surface device. A Microsoft Surface Data Eraser USB stick requires only the ability to boot from USB. The USB stick is easy to create by using the provided wizard, the Microsoft Surface Data Eraser wrapper, and is easy to use with a simple graphic interface, no command line needed. To learn more about the data wiping capabilities and practices Microsoft uses during the service process for Surface, see [Protecting your data if you send your Surface in for service](https://www.microsoft.com/surface/support/security-sign-in-and-accounts/data-wiping-policy).
-
->[!IMPORTANT]
->Microsoft Surface Data Eraser uses the NVM Express (NVMe) format command to erase data as authorized in [NIST Special Publication 800-88 Revision 1](http://nvlpubs.nist.gov/nistpubs/SpecialPublications/NIST.SP.800-88r1.pdf).
-
-Compatible Surface devices include:
-
-* Surface Pro 7
-* Surface Pro X
-* Surface Laptop 3
-* Surface Pro 6
-* Surface Laptop 2
-* Surface Go
-* Surface Book 2
-* Surface Pro with LTE Advanced (Model 1807)
-* Surface Pro (Model 1796)
-* Surface Laptop
-* Surface Studio
-* Surface Studio 2
-* Surface Book
-* Surface Pro 4
-* Surface 3 LTE
-* Surface 3
-* Surface Pro 3
-* Surface Pro 2
-
-Some scenarios where Microsoft Surface Data Eraser can be helpful include:
-
-- Prepare a Surface device to be sent for repair
-
-- Decommission a Surface device to be removed from corporate or organizational use
-
-- Repurpose a Surface device for use in a new department or for use by a new user
-
-- Standard practice when performing reimaging for devices used with sensitive data
-
->[!NOTE]
->Third-party devices, Surface devices running Windows RT (including Surface and Surface 2), and Surface Pro are not compatible with Microsoft Surface Data Eraser.
-
->[!NOTE]
->Because the ability to boot to USB is required to run Microsoft Surface Data Eraser, if the device is not configured to boot from USB or if the device is unable to boot or POST successfully, the Microsoft Surface Data Eraser tool will not function.
-
->[!NOTE]
->Surface Data Eraser on Surface Studio and Surface Studio 2 can take up to 6 minutes to boot into WinPE before disk erasure can occur.
-
-
-## How to create a Microsoft Surface Data Eraser USB stick
-
-
-To create a Microsoft Surface Data Eraser USB stick, first install the Microsoft Surface Data Eraser setup tool from the Microsoft Download Center using the link provided at the beginning of this article. You do not need a Surface device to *create* the USB stick. After you have downloaded the installation file to your computer, follow these steps to install the Microsoft Surface Data Eraser creation tool:
-
-1. Run the DataEraserSetup.msi installation file that you downloaded from the [Microsoft Download Center](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=46703).
-
-2. Select the check box to accept the terms of the license agreement, and then click **Install**.
-
-3. Click **Finish** to close the Microsoft Surface Data Eraser setup window.
-
-After the creation tool is installed, follow these steps to create a Microsoft Surface Data Eraser USB stick. Before you begin these steps, ensure that you have a USB 3.0 stick that is 4 GB or larger connected to the computer.
-
-1. Start Microsoft Surface Data Eraser from the Start menu or Start screen.
-
-2. Click **Build** to begin the Microsoft Surface Data Eraser USB creation process.
-
-3. Click **Start** to acknowledge that you have a USB stick of at least 4 GB connected, as shown in Figure 1.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 1. Start the Microsoft Surface Data Eraser tool*
-
-4. Select the USB drive of your choice from the **USB Thumb Drive Selection** page as shown in Figure 2, and then click **Start** to begin the USB creation process. The drive you select will be formatted and any existing data on this drive will be lost.
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >If the Start button is disabled, check that your removable drive has a total capacity of at least 4 GB.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 2. USB thumb drive selection*
-
-5. After the creation process is finished, the USB drive has been formatted and all binaries are copied to the USB drive. Click **Success**.
-
-6. When the **Congratulations** screen is displayed, you can eject and remove the thumb drive. This thumb drive is now ready to be inserted into a Surface device, booted from, and wipe any data on the device. Click **Complete** to finish the USB creation process, as shown in Figure 3.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 3. Complete the Microsoft Surface Data Eraser USB creation process*
-
-7. Click **X** to close Microsoft Surface Data Eraser.
-
-## How to use a Microsoft Surface Data Eraser USB stick
-
-
-After you create a Microsoft Surface Data Eraser USB stick, you can boot a supported Surface device from the USB stick by following this procedure:
-
-1. Insert the bootable Microsoft Surface Data Eraser USB stick into the supported Surface device.
-
-2. Boot your Surface device from the Microsoft Surface Data Eraser USB stick. To boot your device from the USB stick follow these steps:
-
- a. Turn off your Surface device.
-
- b. Press and hold the **Volume Down** button.
-
- c. Press and release the **Power** button.
-
- d. Release the **Volume Down** button.
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >If your device does not boot to USB using these steps, you may need to turn on the **Enable Alternate Boot Sequence** option in Surface UEFI. You can read more about Surface UEFI boot configuration in [Manage Surface UEFI Settings](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface/manage-surface-uefi-settings).
-
-3. When the Surface device boots, a **SoftwareLicenseTerms** text file is displayed, as shown in Figure 4.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 4. Booting the Microsoft Surface Data Eraser USB stick*
-
-4. Read the software license terms, and then close the Notepad file.
-
-5. Accept or decline the software license terms by typing **Accept** or **Decline**. You must accept the license terms to continue.
-
-6. The Microsoft Surface Data Eraser script detects the storage devices that are present in your Surface device and displays the details of the native storage device. To continue, press **Y** (this action runs Microsoft Surface Data Eraser and removes all data from the storage device) or press **N** (this action shuts down the device without removing data).
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >The Microsoft Surface Data Eraser tool will delete all data, including Windows operating system files required to boot the device, in a secure and unrecoverable way. To boot a Surface device that has been wiped with Microsoft Surface Data Eraser, you will first need to reinstall the Windows operating system. To remove data from a Surface device without removing the Windows operating system, you can use the **Reset your PC** function. However, this does not prevent your data from being recovered with forensic or data recovery capabilities. See [Recovery options in Windows 10](https://support.microsoft.com/help/12415/windows-10-recovery-options) for more information.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 5. Partition to be erased is displayed in Microsoft Surface Data Eraser*
-
-7. If you pressed **Y** in step 6, due to the destructive nature of the data erasure process, an additional dialog box is displayed to confirm your choice.
-
-8. Click the **Yes** button to continue erasing data on the Surface device.
-
->[!NOTE]
->When you run Surface Data Eraser on the Surface Data Eraser USB drive, a log file is generated in the **SurfaceDataEraserLogs** folder.
-
-## Changes and updates
-
-Microsoft Surface Data Eraser is periodically updated by Microsoft. For information about the changes provided in each new version, see the following:
-
-### 3.28.137
-*Release Date: 11 Nov 2019*
-This version of Surface Data Eraser:
-
-- Includes bug fixes
-
-### Version 3.21.137
-*Release Date: 21 Oct 2019*
-This version of Surface Data Eraser is compiled for x86 and adds support for the following devices:
-
-- Supports Surface Pro 7, Surface Pro X, and Surface Laptop 3
-
-### Version 3.2.78.0
-*Release Date: 4 Dec 2018*
-
-This version of Surface Data Eraser:
-
-- Includes bug fixes
-
-
-### Version 3.2.75.0
-*Release Date: 12 November 2018*
-
-This version of Surface Data Eraser:
-
-- Adds support to Surface Studio 2
-- Fixes issues with SD card
-
-### Version 3.2.69.0
-*Release Date: 12 October 2018*
-
-This version of Surface Data Eraser adds support for the following:
-
-- Surface Pro 6
-- Surface Laptop 2
-
-### Version 3.2.68.0
-This version of Microsoft Surface Data Eraser adds support for the following:
-
-- Surface Go
-
-
-### Version 3.2.58.0
-This version of Microsoft Surface Data Eraser adds support for the following:
-
-- Additional storage devices (drives) for Surface Pro and Surface Laptop devices
-
-
-### Version 3.2.46.0
-This version of Microsoft Surface Data Eraser adds support for the following:
-
-- Surface Pro with LTE Advanced
-
-
-### Version 3.2.45.0
-
-This version of Microsoft Surface Data Eraser adds support for the following:
-
-- Surface Book 2
-
-- Surface Pro 1TB
-
->[!NOTE]
->Surface Data Eraser v3.2.45.0 and above can be used to restore Surface Pro or Surface Laptop devices with the 1TB storage option in the scenario that the device shows two separate 512GB volumes or encounters errors when attempting to deploy or install Windows 10. See [Surface Pro Model 1796 and Surface Laptop 1TB display two drives](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4046105/surface-pro-model-1796-and-surface-laptop-1tb-display-two-drives) for more information.
-
-
-### Version 3.2.36.0
-
-This version of Microsoft Surface Data Eraser adds support for the following:
-
-- Surface Pro
-
-- Surface Laptop
-
->[!NOTE]
->The Microsoft Surface Data Eraser USB drive creation tool is unable to run on Windows 10 S. To wipe a Surface Laptop running Windows 10 S, you must first create the Microsoft Surface Data Eraser USB drive on another computer with Windows 10 Pro or Windows 10 Enterprise.
diff --git a/devices/surface/microsoft-surface-deployment-accelerator.md b/devices/surface/microsoft-surface-deployment-accelerator.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7fbd031cf5..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/microsoft-surface-deployment-accelerator.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,145 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator (Surface)
-description: Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator provides a quick and simple deployment mechanism for organizations to reimage Surface devices.
-ms.assetid: E7991E90-4AAE-44B6-8822-58BFDE3EADE4
-ms.reviewer: hachidan
-manager: dansimp
-ms.date: 10/31/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-keywords: deploy, install, tool
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.pagetype: surface, devices
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.audience: itpro
----
-
-# Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator
-
-Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator (SDA) automates the creation and configuration of a Microsoft recommended deployment experience by using free Microsoft deployment tools.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> SDA is not supported on Surface Pro 7, Surface Pro X, and Surface Laptop 3. For more information refer to [Deploy Surface devices](deploy.md).
-
-SDA is built on the powerful suite of deployment tools available from Microsoft including the Windows Assessment and Deployment Kit (ADK), the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT), and Windows Deployment Services (WDS). The resulting deployment share encompasses the recommended best practices for managing drivers during deployment and automating image creation and can serve as a starting point upon which you build your own customized deployment solution.
-
-**Download Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator**
-
-You can download the installation files for SDA from the Microsoft Download Center. To download the installation files:
-
-1. Go to the [Surface Tools for IT](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=46703) page on the Microsoft Download Center.
-
-2. Click the **Download** button, select the **Surface\_Deployment\_Accelerator\_xxxx.msi** file, and then click **Next**.
-
-## Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator prerequisites
-
-
-Before you install SDA, your environment must meet the following prerequisites:
-
-- SDA must be installed on Windows Server 2012 R2 or later
-
-- PowerShell Script Execution Policy must be set to **Unrestricted**
-
-- DHCP and DNS must be enabled on the network where the Windows Server 2012 R2 environment is connected
-
-- To download Surface drivers and apps automatically the Windows Server 2012 R2 environment must have Internet access and Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration must be disabled
-
-- To support network boot, the Windows Server 2012 R2 environment must have Windows Deployment Services installed and configured to respond to PXE requests
-
-- Access to Windows source files or installation media is required when you prepare a deployment with SDA
-
-- At least 6 GB of free space for each version of Windows you intend to deploy
-
-## How Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator works
-
-
-As you progress through the SDA wizard, you will be asked some basic questions about how your deployment solution should be configured. As you select the desired Surface models to be supported and apps to be installed (see Figure 1), the wizard will prepare scripts that download, install, and configure everything needed to perform a complete deployment and capture of a reference image. By using the network boot (PXE) capabilities of Windows Deployment Services (WDS), the resulting solution enables you to boot a Surface device from the network and perform a clean deployment of Windows.
-
-
-
-*Figure 1. Select desired apps and drivers*
-
-When the SDA completes, you can use the deployment share to deploy over the network immediately. Simply boot your Surface device from the network using a Surface Ethernet Adapter and select the Surface deployment share you created with the SDA wizard. Select the **1- Deploy Microsoft Surface** task sequence and the wizard will walk you through an automated deployment of Windows to your Surface device.
-
-You can modify the task sequence in the MDT Deployment Workbench to [include your own apps](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/deploy/deploy-a-windows-10-image-using-mdt#sec04), or to [pause the automated installation routine](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/mniehaus/2009/06/26/mdt-2010-new-feature-3-suspend-and-resume-a-lite-touch-task-sequence/). While the installation is paused, you can make changes to customize your reference image. After the image is captured, you can configure a deployment task sequence and distribute this custom configuration by using the same network boot capabilities as before.
-
->[!NOTE]
->With SDA v1.9.0258, Surface Pro 3, Surface Pro 4, and Surface Book are supported for Windows 10 deployment, and Surface Pro 3 is supported for Windows 8.1 deployment.
-
-
-
-## Use Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator without an Internet connection
-
-
-For environments where the SDA server will not be able to connect to the Internet, the required Surface files can be downloaded separately. To specify a local source for Surface driver and app files, select the **Copy from a local directory** option and specify the location of your downloaded files (see Figure 2). All of the driver and app files for your selected choices must be placed in the specified folder.
-
-
-
-*Figure 2. Specify a local source for Surface driver and app files*
-
-You can find a full list of available driver downloads at [Download the latest firmware and drivers for Surface devices](deploy-the-latest-firmware-and-drivers-for-surface-devices.md)
-
->[!NOTE]
->Downloaded files do not need to be extracted. The downloaded files can be left as .zip files as long as they are stored in one folder.
-
->[!NOTE]
->Using files from a local directory is not supported when including Office 365 in your deployment share. To include Office 365 in your deployment share, select the **Download from the Internet** check box.
-
-## Changes and updates
-
-SDA is periodically updated by Microsoft. For instructions on how these features are used, see [Step-by-Step: Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface/step-by-step-surface-deployment-accelerator).
-
->[!NOTE]
->To install a newer version of SDA on a server with a previous version of SDA installed, you only need to run the installation file for the new version of SDA. The installer will handle the upgrade process automatically. If you used SDA to create a deployment share prior to the upgrade and want to use new features of the new version of SDA, you will need to create a new deployment share. SDA does not support upgrades of an existing deployment share.
-
-### Version 2.8.136.0
-This version of SDA supports deployment of the following:
-* Surface Book 2
-* Surface Laptop
-* Surface Pro LTE
-
-### Version 2.0.8.0
-This version of SDA supports deployment of the following:
-* Surface Pro
-
->[!NOTE]
->SDA version 2.0.8.0 includes support only for Surface Pro, and does not support other Surface devices such as Surface Pro 4 or Surface Book. To deploy these devices, please continue to use SDA version 1.96.0405.
-
-### Version 1.96.0405
-This version of SDA adds support for the following:
-* Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT) 2013 Update 2
-* Office 365 Click-to-Run
-* Surface 3 and Surface 3 LTE
-* Reduced Windows Assessment and Deployment Kit (Windows ADK) footprint, only the following Windows ADK components are installed:
- * Deployment tools
- * Windows Preinstallation Environment (WinPE)
- * User State Migration Tool (USMT)
-
-### Version 1.90.0258
-This version of SDA adds support for the following:
-* Surface Book
-* Surface Pro 4
-* Windows 10
-
-### Version 1.90.0000
-This version of SDA adds support for the following:
-* Local driver and app files can be used to create a deployment share without access to the Internet
-
-### Version 1.70.0000
-This version is the original release of SDA. This version of SDA includes support for:
-* MDT 2013 Update 1
-* Windows ADK
-* Surface Pro 3
-* Windows 8.1
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-[Step by step: Surface Deployment Accelerator](step-by-step-surface-deployment-accelerator.md)
-
-[Using the Surface Deployment Accelerator deployment share](using-the-sda-deployment-share.md)
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface/step-by-step-surface-deployment-accelerator.md b/devices/surface/step-by-step-surface-deployment-accelerator.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 488bd63a15..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/step-by-step-surface-deployment-accelerator.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,410 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Step by step Surface Deployment Accelerator (Surface)
-description: This article shows you how to install Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator (SDA), configure a deployment share for the deployment of Windows to Surface devices, and perform a deployment to Surface devices.
-ms.assetid: A944FB9C-4D81-4868-AFF6-B9D1F5CF1032
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-keywords: deploy, configure
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.pagetype: surface, devices
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 10/31/2019
----
-
-# Step by step: Surface Deployment Accelerator
-
-This article shows you how to install Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator (SDA), configure a deployment share for the deployment of Windows to Surface devices, and perform a deployment to Surface devices. This article also contains instructions on how to perform these tasks without an Internet connection or without support for Windows Deployment Services network boot (PXE).
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> SDA is not supported on Surface Pro 7, Surface Pro X, and Surface Laptop 3. For more information refer to [Deploy Surface devices](deploy.md).
-
-## How to install Surface Deployment Accelerator
-
-For information about prerequisites and instructions for how to download and install SDA, see [Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator](microsoft-surface-deployment-accelerator.md).
-
-1. Download SDA, which is included in [Surface Tools for IT](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=46703) on the Microsoft Download Center.
-
-2. Run the SDA installation file, named **Surface\_Deployment\_Accelerator\_*xxxx*.msi**, where *xxxx* is the current version number.
-
-3. Accept the End User License Agreement (EULA) by selecting the check box, and then click **Install**, as shown in Figure 1.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 1. SDA setup*
-
-4. Click **Finish** to complete the installation of SDA.
-
-The tool installs in the SDA program group, as shown in Figure 2.
-
-
-
-*Figure 2. The SDA program group and icon*
-
->[!NOTE]
->At this point, the tool has not yet prepared any deployment environment or downloaded any materials from the Internet.
-
-## Create a deployment share
-
-The following steps show you how to create a deployment share for Windows 10 that supports Surface 3, Surface Pro 3, Surface Pro 4, Surface Book, the Surface Firmware Tool, the Surface Asset Tag Tool, and Office 365. As you follow the steps below, make the selections that are applicable for your organization. For example, you could choose to deploy Windows 10 to Surface Book only, without any of the Surface apps.
-
->[!NOTE]
->SDA lets you create deployment shares for both Windows 8.1 and Windows 10 deployments, but you can only create a single deployment share at a time. Therefore, to create both Windows 8.1 and Windows 10 deployment shares, you will need to run the tool twice.
-
-1. Open the SDA wizard by double-clicking the icon in the **Surface Deployment Accelerator** program group on the Start screen.
-
-2. On the **Welcome** page, click **Next** to continue.
-
-3. On the **Verify System** page, the SDA wizard verifies the prerequisites required for an SDA deployment share. This process also checks for the presence of the Windows Assessment and Deployment Kit (Windows ADK) for Windows 10 and the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT) 2013 Update 2. If these tools are not detected, they are downloaded and installed automatically. Click **Next** to continue.
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >As of SDA version 1.96.0405, SDA will install only the components of the Windows ADK that are required for deployment, as follows:
- > * Deployment tools
- > * User State Migration Tool (USMT)
- > * Windows Preinstallation Environment (WinPE)
-
- > [!NOTE]
- > As of SDA version 1.96.0405, SDA will install and use MDT 2013 Update 2. Earlier versions of SDA are compatible only with MDT 2013 Update 1.
-
-4. On the **Windows 8.1** page, to create a Windows 10 deployment share, do not select the **Would you like to support Windows 8.1** check box. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-5. On the **Windows 10** page, to create a Windows 10 deployment share, select the **Would you like to support Windows 10** check box. Supply the following information before you click **Next** to continue:
-
- - **Configure Deployment Share for Windows 10**
-
- - **Local Path** – Specify or browse to a location on the local storage device where you would like to store the deployment share files for the Windows 10 SDA deployment share. For example, **E:\\SDAWin10\\** is the location specified in Figure 3.
-
- - **Share Name** – Specify a name for the file share that will be used to access the deployment share on this server from the network. For example, **SDAWin10** is the deployment share name shown in Figure 3. The local path folder is automatically shared by the SDA scripts under this name to the group **Everyone** with a permission level of **Full Control**.
-
- - **Windows 10 Deployment Services**
-
- - Select the **Import boot media into the local Windows Deployment Service** check box if you would like to boot your Surface devices from the network to perform the Windows deployment. Windows Deployment Services must be installed and configured to respond to PXE boot requests. See [Windows Deployment Services Getting Started Guide for Windows Server 2012](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/jj648426.aspx) for more information about how to configure Windows Deployment Services for PXE boot.
-
- - **Windows 10 Source Files**
-
- - **Local Path** – Specify or browse to the root directory of Windows 10 installation files. If you have an ISO file, mount it and browse to the root of the mounted drive. You must have a full set of source files, not just **Install.wim**.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 3. Specify Windows 10 deployment share options*
-
-6. On the **Configure** page, select the check box next to each device or app that you want to include in your deployment share. Note that Surface Pro 4 and Surface Book only support Windows 10 and are not available for the deployment of Windows 8.1. The Surface Firmware Tool is only applicable to Surface 3 and Surface Pro 3 and cannot be selected unless Surface 3 or Surface Pro 3 drivers are selected, as shown in Figure 4. Click **Next** to continue.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 4. Selecting Surface Firmware Tool requires Surface Pro 3 drivers*
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >You cannot select both Surface 3 and Surface 3 LTE models at the same time.
-
-7. On the **Summary** page confirm your selections and click **Finish** to begin the creation of your deployment share. The process can take several minutes as files are downloaded, the tools are installed, and the deployment share is created. While the SDA scripts are creating your deployment share, an **Installation Progress** window will be displayed, as shown in Figure 5. A typical SDA process includes:
-
- - Download of Windows ADK
-
- - Installation of Windows ADK
-
- - Download of MDT
-
- - Installation of MDT
-
- - Download of Surface apps and drivers
-
- - Creation of the deployment share
-
- - Import of Windows installation files into the deployment share
-
- - Import of the apps and drivers into the deployment share
-
- - Creation of rules and task sequences for Windows deployment
-
- 
-
- *Figure 5. The Installation Progress window*
-
- ### Optional: Workaround for Webclient exception
-
- You may see this error message while installing the latest version of ADK or MDT: _An exception occurred during a WebClient request._ This is due to incompatibility between the Surface Deployment Accelerator (SDA) and Background Intelligent Transfer Service (BITS). To work around this issue, do the following.
-
- In the two PowerShell scripts:
-
- ```PowerShell
- %ProgramFiles%\Microsoft\Surface\Deployment Accelerator\Data\PowerShell\Install-MDT.ps1
- %ProgramFiles%\Microsoft\Surface\Deployment Accelerator\Data\PowerShell\INSTALL-WindowsADK.ps1
- ```
-
- Edit the $BITSTransfer variable in the input parameters to $False as shown below:
-
- ```PowerShell
- Param(
- [Parameter(
- Position=0,
- Mandatory=$False,
- HelpMessage="Download via BITS bool true/false"
- )]
- [string]$BITSTransfer = $False
- )
- ```
-
-8. When the SDA process completes the creation of your deployment share, a **Success** window is displayed. Click **Finish** to close the window. At this point your deployment share is now ready to perform a Windows deployment to Surface devices.
-
- ### Optional: Create a deployment share without an Internet connection
-
- If you are unable to connect to the Internet with your deployment server, or if you want to download the Surface drivers and apps separately, you can specify a local source for the driver and app files at the time of deployment share creation. On the **Configure** page of the SDA wizard, select the **Copy from a Local Directory** check box, as shown in Figure 6. The **Download from the Internet** check box will be automatically deselected. Enter the folder location where you have placed the driver and app files in the **Local Path** field, as shown in Figure 6.
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >All of the downloaded driver and applications files must be located in the same folder. If a required driver or application file is missing from the selected folder when you click **Next**, a warning is displayed and the wizard will not proceed to the next step.
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >The driver and app files do not need to be extracted from the downloaded .zip files.
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >Including Office 365 in your deployment share requires an Internet connection and cannot be performed if you use local files.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 6. Specify the Surface driver and app files from a local path*
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >The **Copy from a Local Directory** check box is only available in SDA version 1.90.0221 or later.
-
- ### Optional: Prepare offline USB media
-
- You can use USB media to perform an SDA deployment if your Surface device is unable to boot from the network. For example, if you do not have a Microsoft Surface Ethernet Adapter or Microsoft Surface dock to facilitate network boot (PXE boot). The USB drive produced by following these steps includes a complete copy of the SDA deployment share and can be run on a Surface device without a network connection.
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >The offline media files for the complete SDA deployment share are approximately 9 GB in size. Your USB drive must be at least 9 GB in size. A 16 GB USB drive is recommended.
-
- Before you can create bootable media files within the MDT Deployment Workbench or copy those files to a USB drive, you must first configure that USB drive to be bootable. Using [DiskPart](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=761073), create a partition, format the partition as FAT32, and set the partition to be active. To run DiskPart, open an administrative PowerShell or Command Prompt window, and then run the following sequence of commands, as shown in Figure 7:
-
- 1. **diskpart** – Opens DiskPart to manage disks and partitions.
-
- 2. **list disk** – Displays a list of the disks available in your system; use this list to identify the disk number that corresponds with your USB drive.
-
- 3. **sel disk 2** – Selects your USB drive; use the number that corresponds with the disk in your system.
-
- 4. **clean** – Removes all configuration from your USB drive.
-
- >[!WARNING]
- >This step will remove all information from your drive. Verify that your USB drive does not contain any needed data before you perform the **clean** command.
-
- 5. **create part pri** – Creates a primary partition on the USB drive.
-
- 6. **format fs=fat32 quick** – Formats the partition with the FAT32 file system, performing a quick format. FAT32 is required to boot the device from UEFI systems like Surface devices.
-
- 7. **assign** – Assigns the next available drive letter to the newly created FAT32 volume.
-
- 8. **active** – Sets the partition to be active, which is required to boot the volume.
-
- 9. **exit** – Exits DiskPart, after which you can close the PowerShell or Command Prompt window.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 7. Use DiskPart to prepare a USB drive for boot*
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >You can format your USB drive with FAT32 from Disk Management, but you must still use DiskPart to set the partition as active for the drive to boot properly.
-
- After you have prepared the USB drive for boot, the next step is to generate offline media from the SDA deployment share. To create this media, follow these steps:
-
- 1. Open the **Deployment Workbench** from the **Microsoft Deployment Toolkit** group on your Start screen.
-
- 2. Expand the **Deployment Shares** node and the **Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator** deployment share.
-
- 3. Expand the folder **Advanced Configuration** and select the **Media** folder.
-
-4. Right-click the **Media** folder and click **New Media** as shown in Figure 8 to start the New Media Wizard.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 8. The Media folder of the SDA deployment share*
-
- 5. On the **General Settings** page in the **Media path** field, enter or browse to a folder where you will create the files for the new offline media. See the example **E:\\SDAMedia** in Figure 9. Leave the default profile **Everything** selected in the **Selection profile** drop-down menu, and then click **Next**.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 9. Specify a location and selection profile for your offline media*
-
- 6. On the **Summary** page verify your selections, and then click **Next** to begin creation of the media.
-
- 7. A **Progress** page is displayed while the media is created.
-
- 8. On the **Confirmation** page, click **Finish** to complete creation of the media.
-
- 9. Right-click the **Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator** deployment share folder, click **Properties**, and then click the **Rules** tab as shown in Figure 10.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 10. Rules of the SDA deployment share*
-
- 10. Use your mouse to highlight all of the text displayed in the text box of the **Rules** tab, and then press **Ctrl+C** to copy the text.
-
- 11. Click **OK** to close the **Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator** deployment share properties.
-
- 12. Right-click the newly created **MEDIA001** item in the **Media** folder, click **Properties**, and then click the **Rules** tab.
-
- 13. Use your mouse to highlight all of the text displayed in the text box of the **Rules** tab, and then press **Ctrl+V** to paste the text you copied from the **Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator** deployment share rules.
-
- 14. Right-click the **Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator** deployment share folder, click **Properties**, and then click the **Rules** tab again. Click the **Bootstrap.ini** button to open Bootstrap.ini in Notepad.
-
- 15. Press **Ctrl+A** to select all of the text in the window, and then press **Ctrl+C** to copy the text.
-
- 16. Close Bootstrap.ini and click **OK** in **Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator** deployment share properties to close the window.
-
- 17. Right-click the newly created **MEDIA001** item in the **Media** folder, click **Properties**, and then click the **Rules** tab again. Click the **Bootstrap.ini** button to open Bootstrap.ini in Notepad.
-
- 18. Press **Ctrl+A** to select all of the text in the window, then press **Ctrl+V** to paste the text from the SDA deployment share Bootstrap.ini file.
-
- 19. Delete the following lines from the Bootstrap.ini as shown in Figure 11, and then save the file:
-
- ```PowerShell
- UserID=
- UserDomain=
- UserPassword=
- DeployRoot=\\SDASERVER\SDAWin10
- UserID=
- UserDomain=
- UserPassword=
- ```
-
- 
-
- *Figure 11. The Bootstrap.ini file of MEDIA001*
-
- 20. Close Bootstrap.ini and click **OK** in **MEDIA001** deployment share properties to close the window.
-
- 21. In the **Deployment Workbench** under the **Media** folder, right-click the newly created **MEDIA001** and click **Update Media Content**, as shown in Figure 12. This will update the media files with the content of the **Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator** deployment share.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 12. Select the Update Media Content option*
-
- 22. The **Update Media Content** window is displayed and shows the progress as the media files are created. When the process completes, click **Finish.**
-
- The final step is to copy the offline media files to your USB drive.
-
- 1. In File Explorer, open the path you specified in Step 5, for example **E:\\SDAMedia**.
-
- 2. Copy all of the files from the Content folder to the root of the USB drive.
-
- Your USB drive is now configured as bootable offline media that contains all of the resources required to perform a deployment to a Surface device.
-
-## SDA task sequences
-
-The SDA deployment share is configured with all of the resources required to perform a Windows deployment to a Surface device. These resources include Windows source files, image, Surface drivers, and Surface apps. The deployment share also contains two pre-configured task sequences, as shown in Figure 13. These task sequences contain the steps required to perform a deployment to a Surface device using the default Windows image from the installation media or to create a reference image complete with Windows updates and applications. To learn more about task sequences, see [MDT 2013 Update 2 Lite Touch components](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/deploy/mdt-2013-lite-touch-components).
-
-
-
-*Figure 13. Task sequences in the Deployment Workbench*
-
-### Deploy Microsoft Surface
-
-The **1 – Deploy Microsoft Surface** task sequence is used to perform a complete deployment of Windows to a Surface device. This task sequence is pre-configured by the SDA wizard and is ready to perform a deployment as soon as the wizard completes. Running this task sequence on a Surface device deploys the unaltered Windows image copied directly from the Windows installation media you specified in the SDA wizard, along with the Surface drivers for your device. The drivers for your Surface device will be automatically selected through the pre-configured deployment share rules.
-
-When you run the task sequence, you will be prompted to provide the following information:
-
-- A computer name
-
-- Your domain information and the credentials required to join the domain
-
-- A product key, if one is required
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >If you are deploying the same version of Windows as the version that came on your device, no product key is required.
-
-- A time zone
-
-- An Administrator password
-
-The Surface apps you specified on the **Configure** page of the SDA wizard are automatically installed when you run this task sequence on a Surface device.
-
-### Create Windows reference image
-
-The **2 – Create Windows Reference Image** task sequence is used to perform a deployment to a virtual machine for the purpose of capturing an image complete with Windows Updates for use in a deployment to Surface devices. By installing Windows Updates in your reference image, you eliminate the need to download and install those updates on each deployed Surface device. The deployment process with an up-to-date image is significantly faster and more efficient than performing a deployment first and then installing Windows Updates on each device.
-
-Like the **1 – Deploy Microsoft Surface** task sequence, the **2 – Create Windows Reference Image** task sequence performs a deployment of the unaltered Windows image directly from the installation media. Creation of a reference image should always be performed on a virtual machine. Using a virtual machine as your reference system helps to ensure that the resulting image is compatible with different hardware configurations.
-
->[!NOTE]
->Using a virtual machine when you create a reference image for Windows deployment is a recommended practice for performing Windows deployments with Microsoft deployment tools including the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit and System Center Configuration Manager. These Microsoft deployment technologies use the hardware agnostic images produced from a virtual machine and a collection of managed drivers to deploy to different configurations of hardware. For more information, see [Deploy a Windows 10 image using MDT 2013 Update 2](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/deploy/deploy-a-windows-10-image-using-mdt).
-
-In addition to the information required by the **1 – Deploy Microsoft Surface** task sequence, you will also be prompted to capture an image when you run this task sequence on your reference virtual machine. The **Location** and **File name** fields are automatically populated with the proper information for your deployment share. All that you need to do is select the **Capture an image of this reference computer** option when you are prompted on the **Capture Image** page of the Windows Deployment Wizard.
-
-## Deployment to Surface devices
-
-
-To perform a deployment from the SDA deployment share, follow this process on the Surface device:
-
-1. Boot the Surface device to MDT boot media for the SDA deployment share. You can do this over the network by using PXE boot, or from a USB drive as described in the [Optional: Prepare offline USB media](#optional) section of this article.
-
-2. Select the deployment share for the version of Windows you intend to deploy and enter your credentials when you are prompted.
-
-3. Select the task sequence you want to run, usually the **1 – Deploy Microsoft Surface** task sequence.
-
-4. Address the task sequence prompts to pick applications, supply a password, and so on.
-
-5. The task sequence performs the automated deployment using the options specified.
-
-### Boot the Surface device from the network
-
-To boot the Surface device from the network, the Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator wizard must have been run on a Windows Server 2012 R2 or later environment that was configured with the Windows Deployment Services (WDS). WDS must have been configured to respond to network boot (PXE boot) requests and the boot files must have been imported into WDS. The SDA wizard will import these file automatically if the **Import boot media into the local Windows Deployment Service** check box was selected on the page for the version of Windows you intend to deploy.
-
-To boot the Surface device from the network, you must also use a Microsoft Surface Ethernet Adapter or the Ethernet port on a Microsoft Surface Dock. Third-party Ethernet adapters are not supported for network boot (PXE boot). A keyboard is also required. Both the Microsoft Surface Type Cover and keyboards connected via USB to the device or dock are supported.
-
-To instruct your Surface device to boot from the network, start with the device powered off and follow these steps:
-
-1. Press and hold the **Volume Down** button, press and release the **Power** button. Continue holding the **Volume Down** button until the device has begun to boot from the network.
-
-2. Press **Enter** when prompted by the dialog on the screen. This prompt indicates that your device has found the WDS PXE server over the network.
-
-3. If you have configured more than one deployment share on this device, you will be prompted to select between the boot images for each deployment share. For example, if you created both a Windows 10 and a Windows 8.1 deployment share, you will be prompted to choose between these two options.
-
-4. Enter the domain credentials that you use to log on to the server where SDA is installed when you are prompted, as shown in Figure 14.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 14. The prompt for credentials to the deployment share*
-
-5. The Windows Deployment Wizard will start from the deployment share to walk you through the deployment process.
-
-### Alternatively boot the devices from the USB stick
-
-To boot a device from the USB stick:
-
-1. Press and hold the **Volume Down** button, press and release the **Power** button. Continue holding the **Volume Down** button until the device has begun to boot from the USB drive.
-
-2. The Windows Deployment Wizard will start from the deployment share to walk you through the deployment process.
-
-### Run the Deploy Microsoft Surface task sequence
-
-To run the Deploy Microsoft Surface task sequence:
-
-1. On the **Task Sequence** page, select the **1 – Deploy Microsoft Surface** task sequence as shown in Figure 15, and then click **Next.**
-
- 
-
- *Figure 15. Select the 1 – Deploy Microsoft Surface task sequence*
-
-2. On the **Computer Details** page, type a name for the Surface device in the **Computer Name** box. In the **Join a domain** section, type your domain name and credentials as shown in Figure 16, and then click **Next**.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 16. Enter the computer name and domain information*
-
-3. On the **Product Key** page, keep the **No product key is required** check box selected if you are deploying the same version and edition of Windows to your Surface devices as they came with from the factory. If you are deploying a different version or edition of Windows to the device, such as Windows Enterprise, select the licensing option that is applicable to your scenario.
-
-4. On the **Locale and Time** page, select your desired **Language Settings** and **Time Zone**, and then click **Next.**
-
-5. On the **Administrator Password** page, type a password for the local Administrator account on the Surface device, and then click **Next.**
-
-6. On the **BitLocker** page, select the **Enable BitLocker** option along with your desired configuration of BitLocker protectors if you want to encrypt the device. Otherwise, keep the **Do not enable BitLocker for this computer** check box selected, and then click **Next.**
-
-7. On the **Ready** page, verify your selections and then click **Begin** to start the automated deployment to this device. The deployment will not require user interaction again. The Windows Deployment Wizard will close and an **Installation Progress** window is displayed to show progress of the task sequence as the image is applied and applications are installed (Figure 17).
-
- 
-
- *Figure 17. The Installation Progress window*
-
-8. When the deployment task sequence completes, a **Success** window is displayed. Click **Finish** to complete the deployment and begin using your Surface device.
diff --git a/devices/surface/support-solutions-surface.md b/devices/surface/support-solutions-surface.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b311e28937..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/support-solutions-surface.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,82 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Top support solutions for Surface devices
-description: Find top solutions for common issues using Surface devices in the enterprise.
-ms.assetid: CF58F74D-8077-48C3-981E-FCFDCA34B34A
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-keywords: Troubleshoot common problems, setup issues
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.pagetype: surfacehub
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 09/26/2019
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.audience: itpro
----
-
-# Top support solutions for Surface devices
-
-> [!Note]
-> **Home users**: This article is only intended for use by IT professionals and technical support agents, and applies only to Surface devices. If you're looking for help with a problem with your home device, please see [Surface Devices Help](https://support.microsoft.com/products/surface-devices).
-
-Microsoft regularly releases both updates and solutions for Surface devices. To ensure your devices can receive future updates, including security updates, it's important to keep your Surface devices updated. For a complete listing of the update history, see [Surface update history](https://www.microsoft.com/surface/support/install-update-activate/surface-update-history) and [Install Surface and Windows updates](https://www.microsoft.com/surface/support/performance-and-maintenance/install-software-updates-for-surface?os=windows-10&=undefined).
-
-
-These are the top Microsoft Support solutions for common issues experienced when using Surface devices in an enterprise.
-
-## Screen cracked or scratched issues
-
-- [Contact Microsoft Support](https://support.microsoft.com/supportforbusiness/productselection)
-
-## Surface Power or battery Issues
-
-- [How to Charge Surface(Surface PSU information)](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4023496)
-
-- [Surface battery won’t charge or Surface won’t run on battery](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4023536)
-
-- [Surface won’t turn on or wake from sleep](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4023537)
-
-- [Maximize your Surface battery life](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4483194)
-
-## Device cover or keyboard issues
-
-- [Troubleshoot your Surface Type Cover or keyboard](https://www.microsoft.com/surface/support/hardware-and-drivers/troubleshoot-surface-keyboards)
-
-## Surface Dock Issues
-
-- [Troubleshoot Surface Dock and docking stations](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4023468/surface-troubleshoot-surface-dock-and-docking-stations)
-
-- [Troubleshoot connecting Surface to a second screen](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4023496)
-
-- [Microsoft Surface Dock Firmware Update](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface/surface-dock-updater)
-
-## Surface Drivers and Firmware
-
-- [Surface Update History](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4036283)
-
-- [Download drivers and firmware for Surface](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4023482)
-
-- [Deploy the latest firmware and drivers for Surface devices](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface/deploy-the-latest-firmware-and-drivers-for-surface-devices)
-
-- [Manage Surface driver and firmware updates](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface/manage-surface-pro-3-firmware-updates)
-
-- [How to manage Surface driver updates in Configuration Manager](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4098906)
-
-## Deployment Issues
-
-- [DISK0 not found when you deploy Windows on Surface Pro Model 1796 or Surface Laptop](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4046108)
-
-- [Surface Pro Model 1796 and Surface Laptop 1TB display two drives](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4046105)
-
-- [System SKU reference](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface/surface-system-sku-reference)
-
-## Reset device
-
-- [Creating and using a USB recovery drive for Surface](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4023512)
-
-- [FAQ: Protecting your data if you send your Surface in for Service](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4023508)
-
-- [Microsoft Surface Data Eraser](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface/microsoft-surface-data-eraser)
diff --git a/devices/surface/surface-device-compatibility-with-windows-10-ltsc.md b/devices/surface/surface-device-compatibility-with-windows-10-ltsc.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 51e39c27a3..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/surface-device-compatibility-with-windows-10-ltsc.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,64 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Surface device compatibility with Windows 10 Long-Term Servicing Channel (Surface)
-description: Find out about compatibility and limitations of Surface devices running Windows 10 Enterprise LTSB edition.
-keywords: ltsb, update, surface servicing options
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.pagetype: surface, devices
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.audience: itpro
-ms.date: 10/21/2019
-ms.reviewer: scottmca
-manager: dansimp
----
-
-# Surface device compatibility with Windows 10 Long-Term Servicing Channel (LTSC)
-
-Surface devices are designed to provide best-in-class experiences in productivity and general-purpose scenarios. Regular updates enable Surface devices to bring to life new innovations and to evolve with the new capabilities delivered by Windows 10 Feature Updates. Feature Updates are available only in Windows 10 Pro or Windows 10 Enterprise editions that receive continuous updates through the Semi-Annual Channel (SAC).
-
-In contrast to the SAC servicing option, formerly known as the Current Branch (CB) or Current Branch for Business (CBB) servicing options, you cannot select the Long-Term Servicing Channel (LTSC) option in Windows 10 settings. To use the LTSC servicing option, you must install a separate edition of Windows 10 Enterprise, known as Windows 10 Enterprise LTSC, formerly known as Windows 10 Enterprise LTSB (Long-Term Servicing Branch. In addition to providing an extended servicing model, the Windows 10 Enterprise LTSC edition also provides an environment with several Windows components removed. The core Surface experiences that are impacted by LTSC include:
-
-* Windows Feature Updates, including enhancements such as:
-
- * Improvements to Direct Ink and palm rejection provided in Windows 10, version 1607 (also referred to as the Anniversary Update)
- * Improved support for high DPI applications provided in Windows 10, version 1703 (also referred to as the Creators Update)
-
-* Pressure sensitivity settings provided by the Surface app
-
-* The Windows Ink Workspace
-
-* Key touch-optimized in-box applications including Microsoft Edge, OneNote, Calendar, and Camera
-
-The use of the Windows 10 Enterprise LTSC environment on Surface devices results in sub-optimal end-user experiences and you should avoid using it in environments where users want and expect a premium, up-to-date user experience.
-
-The LTSC servicing option is designed for device types and scenarios where the key attribute is for features or functionality to never change. Examples include systems that power manufacturing or medical equipment, or embedded systems in kiosks, such as ATMs or airport ticketing systems.
-
->[!NOTE]
->For general information about Windows servicing branches, including LTSC, see [Overview of Windows as a service](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/update/waas-overview#long-term-servicing-branch).
-
-As a general guideline, devices that fulfill the following criteria are considered general-purpose devices and should be paired with Windows 10 Pro or Windows 10 Enterprise using the Semi-Annual Channel servicing option:
-
-* Devices that run productivity software such as Microsoft Office
-
-* Devices that use Microsoft Store applications
-
-* Devices that are used for general Internet browsing (for example, research or access to social media)
-
-Before you choose to use Windows 10 Enterprise LTSC edition on Surface devices, consider the following limitations:
-
-* Driver and firmware updates are not explicitly tested against releases of Windows 10 Enterprise LTSC.
-
-* If you encounter problems, Microsoft Support will provide troubleshooting assistance. However, due to the servicing nature of the Windows LTSC, issue resolution may require that devices be upgraded to a more recent version of Windows 10 Enterprise LTSC, or to Windows 10 Pro or Enterprise with the SAC servicing option.
-
-* Surface device replacements (for example, devices replaced under warranty) may contain subtle variations in hardware components that require updated device drivers and firmware. Compatibility with these updates may require the installation of a more recent version of Windows 10 Enterprise LTSC or Windows 10 Pro or Enterprise with the SAC servicing option.
-
->[!NOTE]
->Organizations that standardize on a specific version of Windows 10 Enterprise LTSC may be unable to adopt new generations of Surface hardware such as Surface Pro 7, Surface Pro X, or Surface Laptop 3 without also updating to a later version of Windows 10 Enterprise LTSC or Windows 10 Pro or Enterprise. For more information, see the **How will Windows 10 LTSBs be supported?** topic in the **Supporting the latest processor and chipsets on Windows** section of [Lifecycle Policy FAQ—Windows products](https://support.microsoft.com/help/18581/lifecycle-policy-faq-windows-products#b4).
-
-Surface devices running Windows 10 Enterprise LTSC edition will not receive new features. In many cases these features are requested by customers to improve the usability and capabilities of Surface hardware. For example, new improvements for High DPI applications in Windows 10, version 1703. Customers that use Surface devices in the LTSC configuration will not see the improvements until they either update to a new Windows 10 Enterprise LTSC release or upgrade to a version of Windows 10 with support for the SAC servicing option.
-
-Devices can be changed from Windows 10 Enterprise LTSC to a more recent version of Windows 10 Enterprise, with support for the SAC servicing option, without the loss of user data by performing an upgrade installation. You can also perform an upgrade installation on multiple devices by leveraging the Upgrade Task Sequence Templates available in the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT) and System Center Configuration Manager. For more information, see [Upgrade Surface devices to Windows 10 with Microsoft Deployment Toolkit](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface/upgrade-surface-devices-to-windows-10-with-mdt).
diff --git a/devices/surface/surface-diagnostic-toolkit-business.md b/devices/surface/surface-diagnostic-toolkit-business.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 62c4129d08..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/surface-diagnostic-toolkit-business.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,199 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploy Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business
-description: This topic explains how to use the Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business.
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 10/31/2019
-ms.reviewer: hachidan
-manager: dansimp
-ms.audience: itpro
----
-
-# Deploy Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business
-
-The Microsoft Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business (SDT) enables IT administrators to quickly investigate, troubleshoot, and resolve hardware, software, and firmware issues with Surface devices. You can run a range of diagnostic tests and software repairs in addition to obtaining device health insights and guidance for resolving issues.
-
-Specifically, SDT for Business enables you to:
-
-- [Customize the package.](#create-custom-sdt)
-- [Run the app using commands.](surface-diagnostic-toolkit-command-line.md)
-- [Run multiple hardware tests to troubleshoot issues.](surface-diagnostic-toolkit-desktop-mode.md#multiple)
-- [Generate logs for analyzing issues.](surface-diagnostic-toolkit-desktop-mode.md#logs)
-- [Obtain detailed report comparing device vs optimal configuration.](surface-diagnostic-toolkit-desktop-mode.md#detailed-report)
-
-
-## Primary scenarios and download resources
-
-To run SDT for Business, download the components listed in the following table.
-
-
-Mode | Primary scenarios | Download | Learn more
---- | --- | --- | ---
-Desktop mode | Assist users in running SDT on their Surface devices to troubleshoot issues. Create a custom package to deploy on one or more Surface devices allowing users to select specific logs to collect and analyze. | SDT distributable MSI package: Microsoft Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business Installer [Surface Tools for IT](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=46703) | [Use Surface Diagnostic Toolkit in desktop mode](surface-diagnostic-toolkit-desktop-mode.md)
-Command line | Directly troubleshoot Surface devices remotely without user interaction, using standard tools such as Configuration Manager. It includes the following commands: `-DataCollector` collects all log files `-bpa` runs health diagnostics using Best Practice Analyzer. `-windowsupdate` checks Windows Update for missing firmware or driver updates. `-warranty` checks warranty information.
| SDT console app: Microsoft Surface Diagnostics App Console [Surface Tools for IT](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=46703) | [Run Surface Diagnostic Toolkit using commands](surface-diagnostic-toolkit-command-line.md)
-
-## Supported devices
-
-SDT for Business is supported on Surface 3 and later devices, including:
-
-- Surface Pro 7
-- Surface Laptop 3
-- Surface Pro 6
-- Surface Laptop 2
-- Surface Go
-- Surface Go with LTE
-- Surface Book 2
-- Surface Pro with LTE Advanced (Model 1807)
-- Surface Pro (Model 1796)
-- Surface Laptop
-- Surface Studio
-- Surface Studio 2
-- Surface Book
-- Surface Pro 4
-- Surface 3 LTE
-- Surface 3
-- Surface Pro 3
-
-## Installing Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business
-
-To create an SDT package that you can distribute to users in your organization:
-
-1. Sign in to your Surface device using the Administrator account.
-2. Download SDT Windows Installer Package (.msi) from the [Surface Tools for IT download page](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=46703) and copy it to a preferred location on your Surface device, such as Desktop.
-3. The SDT setup wizard appears, as shown in figure 1. Click **Next**.
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >If the setup wizard does not appear, ensure that you are signed into the Administrator account on your computer.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 1. Surface Diagnostic Toolkit setup wizard*
-
-4. When the SDT setup wizard appears, click **Next**, accept the End User License Agreement (EULA)
-
-5. On the Install Options screen, change the default install location if desired.
-6. Under Setup Type, select **Advanced**.
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >The standard option allows users to run the diagnostic tool directly on their Surface device provided they are signed into their device using an Administrator account.
-
- 
-
-7. Click **Next** and then click **Install**.
-
-## Installing using the command line
-If desired, you can install SDT at a command prompt and set a custom flag to install the tool in admin mode. SDT contains the following install option flags:
-
-- `SENDTELEMETRY` sends telemetry data to Microsoft. The flag accepts `0` for disabled or `1` for enabled. The default value is `1` to send telemetry.
-- `ADMINMODE` configures the tool to be installed in admin mode. The flag accepts `0` for client mode or `1` for IT Administrator mode. The default value is `0`.
-
-### To install SDT from the command line:
-
-1. Open a command prompt and enter:
-
- ```
- msiexec.exe /i ADMINMODE=1.
- ```
- **Example:**
-
- ```
- C:\Users\Administrator> msiexec.exe/I"C:\Users\Administrator\Desktop\Microsoft_Surface_Diagnostic_Toolkit_for_Business_Installer.msi" ADMINMODE=1
- ```
-
-## Locating SDT on your Surface device
-
-Both SDT and the SDT app console are installed at `C:\Program Files\Microsoft\Surface\Microsoft Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business`.
-
-In addition to the .exe file, SDT installs a JSON file and an admin.dll file (modules\admin.dll), as shown in figure 2.
-
-
-
-*Figure 2. Files installed by SDT*
-
-
-## Preparing the SDT package for distribution
-
-Creating a custom package allows you to target the tool to specific known issues.
-
-1. Click **Start > Run**, enter **Surface** and then click **Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business**.
-2. When the tool opens, click **Create Custom Package**, as shown in figure 3.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 3. Create custom package*
-
-### Language and telemetry settings
-
- When creating a package, you can select language settings or opt out of sending telemetry information to Microsoft. By default, SDT sends telemetry to Microsoft that is used to improve the application in accordance with the [Microsoft Privacy Statement](https://privacy.microsoft.com/privacystatement). If you wish to decline, clear the check box when creating a custom package, as shown below. Or clear the **Send telemetry to Microsoft** check box on the **Install Options** page during SDT Setup.
-
->[!NOTE]
->This setting does not affect the minimal telemetry automatically stored on Microsoft servers when running tests and repairs that require an Internet connection, such as Windows Update and Software repair, or providing feedback using the Smile or Frown buttons in the app toolbar.
-
-
-
-
-*Figure 4. Select language and telemetry settings*
-
-
-### Windows Update page
-
-Select the option appropriate for your organization. Most organizations with multiple users will typically select to receive updates via Windows Server Update Services (WSUS), as shown in figure 5. If using local Windows Update packages or WSUS, enter the path as appropriate.
-
-
-
-*Figure 5. Windows Update option*
-
-### Software repair page
-
-This allows you to select or remove the option to run software repair updates.
-
-
-
-*Figure 6. Software repair option*
-
-### Collecting logs and saving package page
-
-You can select to run a wide range of logs across applications, drivers, hardware, and the operating system. Click the appropriate area and select from the menu of available logs. You can then save the package to a software distribution point or equivalent location that users can access.
-
-
-
-*Figure 7. Log option and save package*
-
-## Next steps
-
-- [Use Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business in desktop mode](surface-diagnostic-toolkit-desktop-mode.md)
-- [Use Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business using commands](surface-diagnostic-toolkit-command-line.md)
-
-## Changes and updates
-### Version 2.43.139.0
-*Release date: October 21, 2019*
-This version of Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business adds support for the following:
-
-- Surface Pro 7
-- Surface Laptop 3
-
-### Version 2.42.139.0
-*Release date: September 24, 2019*
-This version of Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business adds support for the following:
-- Ability to download hardware reports.
-- Ability to contact Microsoft Support directly from the tool.
-
-### Version 2.41.139.0
-*Release date: June 24, 2019*
-This version of Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business adds support for the following:
-- Driver version information included in logs and report.
-- Ability to provide feedback about the app.
-
-
-### Version 2.36.139.0
-*Release date: April 26, 2019*
-This version of Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business adds support for the following:
-- Advanced Setup option to unlock admin capabilities through the installer UI, without requiring command line configuration.
-- Accessibility improvements.
-- Surface brightness control settings included in logs.
-- External monitor compatibility support link in report generator.
diff --git a/devices/surface/surface-diagnostic-toolkit-command-line.md b/devices/surface/surface-diagnostic-toolkit-command-line.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f1e3460df4..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/surface-diagnostic-toolkit-command-line.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,152 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Run Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business using commands
-description: How to run Surface Diagnostic Toolkit in a command console
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 11/15/2018
-ms.reviewer: hachidan
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.audience: itpro
----
-
-# Run Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business using commands
-
-Running the Surface Diagnostic Toolkit (SDT) at a command prompt requires downloading the STD app console. After it's installed, you can run SDT at a command prompt via the Windows command console (cmd.exe) or using Windows PowerShell, including PowerShell Integrated Scripting Environment (ISE), which provides support for autocompletion of commands, copy/paste, and other features. For a list of supported Surface devices in SDT, refer to [Deploy Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business](surface-diagnostic-toolkit-business.md).
-
->[!NOTE]
->To run SDT using commands, you must be signed in to the Administrator account or signed in to an account that is a member of the Administrator group on your Surface device.
-
-## Running SDT app console
-
-Download and install SDT app console from the [Surface Tools for IT download page](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=46703). You can use the Windows command prompt (cmd.exe) or Windows PowerShell to:
-
-- Collect all log files.
-- Run health diagnostics using Best Practice Analyzer.
-- Check update for missing firmware or driver updates.
-
->[!NOTE]
->In this release, the SDT app console supports single commands only. Running multiple command line options requires running the console exe separately for each command.
-
-By default, output files are saved in the same location as the console app. Refer to the following table for a complete list of commands.
-
-Command | Notes
---- | ---
--DataCollector "output file" | Collects system details into a zip file. "output file" is the file path to create system details zip file.
**Example**: `Microsoft.Surface.Diagnostics.App.Console.exe -DataCollector SDT_DataCollection.zip`
--bpa "output file" | Checks several settings and health indicators in the device. “output file" is the file path to create the HTML report.
**Example**: `Microsoft.Surface.Diagnostics.App.Console.exe -bpa BPA.html`
--windowsupdate | Checks Windows Update online servers for missing firmware and/or driver updates.
**Example**: Microsoft.Surface.Diagnostics.App.Console.exe -windowsupdate
--warranty "output file" | Checks warranty information on the device (valid or invalid). The optional “output file” is the file path to create the xml file.
**Example**: Microsoft.Surface.Diagnostics.App.Console.exe –warranty “warranty.xml”
-
-
->[!NOTE]
->To run the SDT app console remotely on target devices, you can use a configuration management tool such as System Center Configuration Manager. Alternatively, you can create a .zip file containing the console app and appropriate console commands and deploy per your organization’s software distribution processes.
-
-## Running Best Practice Analyzer
-
-You can run BPA tests across key components such as BitLocker, Secure Boot, and Trusted Platform Module (TPM) and then output the results to a shareable file. The tool generates a series of tables with color-coded headings and condition descriptors along with guidance about how to approach resolving the issue.
-
-- Green indicates the component is running in an optimal condition (optimal).
-- Orange indicates the component is not running in an optimal condition (not optimal).
-- Red indicates the component is in an abnormal state.
-
-### Sample BPA results output
-
-
-
BitLocker
-
Description:
Checks if BitLocker is enabled on the system drive.
-
Value:
Protection On
-
Condition:
Optimal
-
Guidance:
It is highly recommended to enable BitLocker to protect your data.
-
-
-
-
Secure Boot
-
Description:
Checks if Secure Boot is enabled.
-
Value:
True
-
Condition:
Optimal
-
Guidance:
It is highly recommended to enable Secure Boot to protect your PC.
-
-
-
-
Trusted Platform Module
-
Description:
Ensures that the TPM is functional.
-
Value:
True
-
Condition:
Optimal
-
Guidance:
Without a functional TPM, security-based functions such as BitLocker may not work properly.
-
-
-
-
Connected Standby
-
Description:
Checks if Connected Standby is enabled.
-
Value:
True
-
Condition:
Optimal
-
Guidance:
Connected Standby allows a Surface device to receive updates and notifications while not being used. For best experience, Connected Standby should be enabled.
-
-
-
-
Bluetooth
-
Description:
Checks if Bluetooth is enabled.
-
Value:
Enabled
-
Condition:
Optimal
-
Guidance:
-
-
-
-
Debug Mode
-
Description:
Checks if the operating system is in Debug mode.
-
Value:
Normal
-
Condition:
Optimal
-
Guidance:
The debug boot option enables or disables kernel debugging of the Windows operating system. Enabling this option can cause system instability and can prevent DRM (digital rights managemend) protected media from playing.
-
-
-
-
Test Signing
-
Description:
Checks if Test Signing is enabled.
-
Value:
Normal
-
Condition:
Optimal
-
Guidance:
Test Signing is a Windows startup setting that should only be used to test pre-release drivers.
-
-
-
-
Active Power Plan
-
Description:
Checks that the correct power plan is active.
-
Value:
Balanced
-
Condition:
Optimal
-
Guidance:
It is highly recommended to use the "Balanced" power plan to maximize productivity and battery life.
-
-
-
-
Windows Update
-
Description:
Checks if the device is up to date with Windows updates.
-
Value:
Microsoft Silverlight (KB4023307), Definition Update for Windows Defender Antivirus - KB2267602 (Definition 1.279.1433.0)
-
Condition:
Not Optimal
-
Guidance:
Updating to the latest windows makes sure you are on the latest firmware and drivers. It is recommended to always keep your device up to date
-
-
-
-
Free Hard Drive Space
-
Description:
Checks for low free hard drive space.
-
Value:
66%
-
Condition:
Optimal
-
Guidance:
For best performance, your hard drive should have at least 10% of its capacity as free space.
-
-
-
-
Non-Functioning Devices
-
Description:
List of non-functioning devices in Device Manager.
-
Value:
-
Condition:
Optimal
-
Guidance:
Non-functioning devices in Device Manager may cause unpredictable problems with Surface devices such as, but not limited to, no power savings for the respective hardware component.
-
-
-
-
External Monitor
-
Description:
Checks for an external monitor that may have compatibility issues.
-
Value:
-
Condition:
Optimal
-
Guidance:
Check with the original equipment manufacturer for compatibility with your Surface device.
-
diff --git a/devices/surface/surface-diagnostic-toolkit-desktop-mode.md b/devices/surface/surface-diagnostic-toolkit-desktop-mode.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 738ec1ecae..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/surface-diagnostic-toolkit-desktop-mode.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,95 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Use Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business in desktop mode
-description: How to use SDT to help users in your organization run the tool to identify and diagnose issues with the Surface device.
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 10/31/2019
-ms.reviewer: hachidan
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.audience: itpro
----
-
-# Use Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business in desktop mode
-
-This topic explains how to use the Surface Diagnostic Toolkit (SDT) to help users in your organization run the tool to identify and diagnose issues with the Surface device. Successfully running SDT can quickly determine if a reported issue is caused by failed hardware or user error. For a list of supported Surface devices in SDT, refer to [Deploy Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business](surface-diagnostic-toolkit-business.md).
-
-
-1. Direct the user to install [the SDT package](surface-diagnostic-toolkit-business.md#create-custom-sdt) from a software distribution point or network share. After it is installed, you’re ready to guide the user through a series of tests.
-
-2. Begin at the home page, which allows users to enter a description of the issue, and click **Continue**, as shown in figure 1.
-
- 
-*Figure 1. SDT in desktop mode*
-
-3. When SDT indicates the device has the latest updates, click **Continue** to advance to the catalog of available tests, as shown in figure 2.
-
- 
-*Figure 2. Select from SDT options*
-
-4. You can choose to run all the diagnostic tests. Or, if you already suspect a particular issue such as a faulty display or a power supply problem, click **Select** to choose from the available tests and click **Run Selected**, as shown in figure 3. See the following table for details of each test.
-
- 
-*Figure 3. Select hardware tests*
-
- Hardware test | Description
- --- | ---
- Power Supply and Battery | Checks Power supply is functioning optimally
- Display and Sound | Checks brightness, stuck or dead pixels, speaker and microphone functioning
- Ports and Accessories | Checks accessories, screen attach and USB functioning
- Connectivity | Checks Bluetooth, wireless and LTE connectivity
- Security | Checks security related issues
- Touch | Checks touch related issues
- Keyboard and touch | Checks integrated keyboard connection and type cover
- Sensors | Checks functioning of different sensors in the device
- Hardware | Checks issues with different hardware components such as graphics card and camera
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Running multiple hardware tests to troubleshoot issues
-
-SDT is designed as an interactive tool that runs a series of tests. For each test, SDT provides instructions summarizing the nature of the test and what users should expect or look for in order for the test to be successful. For example, to diagnose if the display brightness is working properly, SDT starts at zero and increases the brightness to 100 percent, asking users to confirm – by answering **Yes** or **No** -- that brightness is functioning as expected, as shown in figure 4.
-
-For each test, if functionality does not work as expected and the user clicks **No**, SDT generates a report of the possible causes and ways to troubleshoot it.
-
-
-*Figure 4. Running hardware diagnostics*
-
-1. If the brightness successfully adjusts from 0-100 percent as expected, direct the user to click **Yes** and then click **Continue**.
-2. If the brightness fails to adjust from 0-100 percent as expected, direct the user to click **No** and then click **Continue**.
-3. Guide users through remaining tests as appropriate. When finished, SDT automatically provides a high-level summary of the report, including the possible causes of any hardware issues along with guidance for resolution.
-
-
-### Repairing applications
-
-SDT enables you to diagnose and repair applications that may be causing issues, as shown in figure 5.
-
-
-*Figure 5. Running repairs*
-
-
-### Generating logs for analyzing issues
-
-SDT provides extensive log-enabled diagnosis support across applications, drivers, hardware, and operating system issues, as shown in figure 6.
-
-
-*Figure 6. Generating logs*
-
-
-
-### Generating detailed report comparing device vs. optimal configuration
-
-Based on the logs, SDT generates a report for software- and firmware-based issues that you can save to a preferred location.
-
-## Related topics
-
-- [Run Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business using commands](surface-diagnostic-toolkit-command-line.md)
-
diff --git a/devices/surface/surface-diagnostic-toolkit-for-business-intro.md b/devices/surface/surface-diagnostic-toolkit-for-business-intro.md
deleted file mode 100644
index df3918d715..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/surface-diagnostic-toolkit-for-business-intro.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Fix common Surface problems using the Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business
-description: This page provides an introduction to the Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business for use in commercial environments.
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 06/11/2019
-ms.reviewer: cottmca
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.audience: itpro
----
-
-# Fix common Surface problems using the Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business
-
-If your Surface isn’t working properly, the Microsoft Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business can help you or your administrator find and solve problems.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business is built for commercial devices. If your device is a personal device and not managed by your work or school run the [Surface Diagnostic Toolkit](https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/help/4037239/surface-fix-common-surface-problems-using-surface-diagnostic-toolkit) instead.
-
-## Run the Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business
-
-Before you run the diagnostic tool, make sure you have the latest Windows updates. Go to [Install Surface and Windows 10 updates](https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/help/4023505/surface-install-surface-and-windows-updates) for more information. If that doesn't solve the problem, you'll need to run the diagnostic tool.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> The Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business only works on Surface devices running Windows 10. It does not work on Surface Pro, Surface Pro 2, or Surface devices configured in S mode.
-
-**To run the Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business:**
-
-1. Download the [Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business](https://aka.ms/SDT4B).
-2. Select Run and follow the on-screen instructions. For full details, refer to [Deploy Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business](https://docs.microsoft.com/surface/surface-diagnostic-toolkit-business).
-
-The diagnosis and repair time averages 15 minutes but could take an hour or longer, depending on internet connection speed and the number of updates or repairs required.
-# If you still need help
-
-If the Surface Diagnostic Toolkit for Business didn’t fix the problem, you can also:
-
-- Make an in-store appointment: We might be able to fix the problem or provide a replacement Surface at your local Microsoft Store. [Locate a Microsoft Store near you](https://www.microsoft.com/store/locations/find-a-store?WT.mc_id=MSC_Solutions_en_us_scheduleappt).
-- Contact customer support: If you want to talk to someone about how to fix your problem, [contact us](https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/help/4037645/contact-surface-warranty-and-software-support-for-business).
-- Get your Surface serviced: If your Surface product needs service, [request it online](https://mybusinessservice.surface.com/).
diff --git a/devices/surface/surface-dock-firmware-update.md b/devices/surface/surface-dock-firmware-update.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 751ea36a4d..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/surface-dock-firmware-update.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,207 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft Surface Dock Firmware Update
-description: This article explains how to use Microsoft Surface Dock Firmware Update, newly redesigned to update Surface Dock firmware while running in the background on your Surface device.
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 10/09/2019
-ms.reviewer: scottmca
-manager: dansimp
-ms.audience: itpro
----
-# Microsoft Surface Dock Firmware Update
-
-This article explains how to use Microsoft Surface Dock Firmware Update, newly redesigned to update Surface Dock firmware while running in the background on your Surface device. Once installed, it will update any Surface Dock attached to your Surface device.
-
-> [!NOTE]
->Microsoft Surface Dock Firmware Update supersedes the earlier Microsoft Surface Dock Updater tool, previously available for download as part of Surface Tools for IT. It was named Surface_Dock_Updater_vx.xx.xxx.x.msi (where x indicates the version of the tool). The earlier tool has been retired, is no longer available for download, and should not be used.
-
-## To run Surface Dock Firmware Update
-
-1. Download and install [Microsoft Surface Dock Firmware Update](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=46703).
- - The file is released in the following naming format: **Surface_Dock_FwUpdate_X.XX.XXX_Win10_XXXXX_XX.XXX.XXXXX_X.MSI** and installs by default to C:\Program Files\SurfaceUpdate.
- - Requires Surface devices running at least Windows 10 version 1803 or later.
-
-2. After you connect Surface Dock to your Surface device, the tool checks the firmware status while running in the background.
-
-4. After several seconds, disconnect your Surface Dock from your device and then wait for 5 seconds before reconnecting. The Surface Dock Firmware Update will normally update the dock silently in background after you disconnect from the dock and reconnect. The process can take a few minutes to complete and will continue even if interrupted.
-
-### Manual installation
-If preferred, you can manually complete the update as follows:
-
-- Reconnect your Surface Dock for 2 minutes and then disconnect it from your device. The DisplayPort firmware update will be installed while the hardware is disconnected. The LED in the Ethernet port of the dock will blink while the update is in progress. Please wait until the LED stops blinking before you unplug your Surface Dock from power.
-
-> [!NOTE]
->
-> - Manually installing the MSI file may prompt you to restart Surface; however, restarting is optional and not required.
-> - You will need to disconnect and reconnect the dock twice before the update fully completes.
-> - To create a log file, specify the path in the Msiexec command. For example, append /l*v %windir%\logs\ SurfaceDockFWI.log".
-
-## Network deployment
-
-You can use Windows Installer commands (Msiexec.exe) to deploy Surface Dock Firmware Update to multiple devices across your network. When using System Center Configuration Manager or other deployment tool, enter the following syntax to ensure the installation is silent:
-
-- **Msiexec.exe /i /quiet /norestart**
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> A log file is not created by default. In order to create a log file, you will need to append "/l*v [path]"
-
-For more information, refer to [Command line options](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/win32/msi/command-line-options) documentation.
-
-> [!IMPORTANT]
-> If you want to keep your Surface Dock updated using any other method, refer to [Update your Surface Dock](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4023478/surface-update-your-surface-dock) for details.
-
-## Intune deployment
-You can use Intune to distribute Surface Dock Firmware Update to your devices. First you will need to convert the MSI file to the .intunewin format, as described in the following documentation: [Intune Standalone - Win32 app management](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/apps/apps-win32-app-management).
-
-Use the following command:
- - **msiexec /i /quiet /q**
-
-## How to verify completion of firmware update
-
-Surface dock firmware consists of two components:
-
-- **Component10:** Micro controller unit (MCU) firmware
-- **Component20:** Display port (DP) firmware.
-
-Successful completion of Surface Dock Firmware Update results in new registry key values for these firmware components.
-
-**To verify updates:**
-
-1. Open Regedit and navigate to the following registry path:
-
-- **HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows NT\CurrentVersion\WUDF\Services\SurfaceDockFwUpdate\Parameters**
-
-2. Look for the registry keys: **Component10CurrentFwVersion and Component20CurrentFwVersion**, which refer to the firmware that is currently on the device.
-
- 
-
-3. Verify the new registry key values match the updated registry key values listed in the Versions reference at the end of this document. If the values match, the firmware was updated successfully.
-
-4. If unable to verify, review Event logging and Troubleshooting tips in the next section.
-
-## Event logging
-
-**Table 1. Log files for Surface Dock Firmware Update**
-
-| Log | Location | Notes |
-| -------------------------------- | --------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| Surface Dock Firmware Update log | Path needs to be specified (see note) | Earlier versions of this tool wrote events to Applications and Services Logs\Microsoft Surface Dock Updater. |
-| Windows Device Install log | %windir%\inf\setupapi.dev.log | For more information about using Device Install Log, refer to [SetupAPI Logging](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows-hardware/drivers/install/setupapi-logging--windows-vista-and-later-) documentation. |
-
-
-**Table 2. Event log IDs for Surface Dock Firmware Update**
-Events are logged in the Application Event Log. Note: Earlier versions of this tool wrote events to Applications and Services Logs\Microsoft Surface Dock Updater.
-
-| Event ID | Event type |
-| -------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| 2001 | Dock firmware update has started. |
-| 2002 | Dock firmware update skipped because dock is known to be up to date. |
-| 2003 | Dock firmware update failed to get firmware version. |
-| 2004 | Querying the firmware version. |
-| 2005 | Dock firmware failed to start update. |
-| 2006 | Failed to send offer/payload pairs. |
-| 2007 | Firmware update finished. |
-| 2008 | BEGIN dock telemetry. |
-| 2011 | END dock telemetry. |
-
-## Troubleshooting tips
-
-- Completely disconnect power for Surface dock from the AC power to reset the Surface Dock.
-- Disconnect all peripherals except for the Surface Dock.
-- Uninstall any current Surface Dock Firmware Update and then install the latest version.
-- Ensure that the Surface Dock is disconnected, and then allow enough time for the update to complete as monitored via an LED in the Ethernet port of the dock. Wait until the LED stops blinking before you unplug Surface Dock from power.
-- Connect the Surface Dock to a different device to see if it is able to update the dock.
-
-## Changes and updates
-
-Microsoft periodically releases new versions of Surface Dock Firmware Update.Note that the MSI file is not self-updating. If you have deployed the MSI to Surface devices and a new version of the firmware is released, you will need to deploy the new version of the MSI.
-
-## Versions reference
-### Version 1.42.139
-*Release Date: September 18 2019*
-
-This version, contained in Surface_Dock_FwUpdate_1.42.139_Win10_17134_19.084.31680_0.MSI, updates firmware in the background.
-**Updated registry key values:**
-
-- Component10CurrentFwVersion updated to **4ac3970**.
-- Component20CurrentFwVersion updated to **4a1d570**.
-
-It adds support for Surface Pro 7 and Surface Laptop 3.
-
-## Legacy versions
-
-### Version 2.23.139.0
-*Release Date: 10 October 2018*
-
-This version of Surface Dock Updater adds support for the following:
-
-- Add support for Surface Pro 6
-- Add support for Surface Laptop 2
-
-
-### Version 2.22.139.0
-*Release Date: 26 July 2018*
-
-This version of Surface Dock Updater adds support for the following:
-
-- Increase update reliability
-- Add support for Surface Go
-
-### Version 2.12.136.0
-*Release Date: 29 January 2018*
-
-This version of Surface Dock Updater adds support for the following:
-* Update for Surface Dock Main Chipset Firmware
-* Update for Surface Dock DisplayPort Firmware
-* Improved display stability for external displays when used with Surface Book or Surface Book 2
-
-Additionally, installation of this version of Surface Dock Updater on Surface Book devices includes the following:
-* Update for Surface Book Base Firmware
-* Added support for Surface Dock firmware updates with improvements targeted to Surface Book devices
-
-
-### Version 2.9.136.0
-*Release date: November 3, 2017*
-
-This version of Surface Dock Updater adds support for the following:
-
-* Update for Surface Dock DisplayPort Firmware
-* Resolves an issue with audio over passive display port adapters
-
-### Version 2.1.15.0
-*Release date: June 19, 2017*
-
-This version of Surface Dock Updater adds support for the following:
-
-* Surface Laptop
-* Surface Pro
-
-### Version 2.1.6.0
-*Release date: April 7, 2017*
-
-This version of Surface Dock Updater adds support for the following:
-
-* Update for Surface Dock DisplayPort firmware
-* Requires Windows 10
-
-### Version 2.0.22.0
-*Release date: October 21, 2016*
-
-This version of Surface Dock Updater adds support for the following:
-
-* Update for Surface Dock USB firmware
-* Improved reliability of Ethernet, audio, and USB ports
-
-### Version 1.0.8.0
-*Release date: April 26, 2016*
-
-This version of Surface Dock Updater adds support for the following:
-
-* Update for Surface Dock Main Chipset firmware
-* Update for Surface Dock DisplayPort firmware
-
diff --git a/devices/surface/surface-enterprise-management-mode.md b/devices/surface/surface-enterprise-management-mode.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 81b911bb6f..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/surface-enterprise-management-mode.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,269 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Surface Enterprise Management Mode (Surface)
-description: See how this feature of Surface devices with Surface UEFI helps you secure and manage firmware settings within your organization.
-keywords: uefi, configure, firmware, secure, semm
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.pagetype: surface, devices, security
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 12/02/2019
-ms.reviewer: scottmca
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.audience: itpro
----
-
-# Microsoft Surface Enterprise Management Mode
-
-Microsoft Surface Enterprise Management Mode (SEMM) is a feature of Surface devices with Surface UEFI that allows you to secure and manage firmware settings within your organization. With SEMM, IT professionals can prepare configurations of UEFI settings and install them on a Surface device. In addition to the ability to configure UEFI settings, SEMM also uses a certificate to protect the configuration from unauthorized tampering or removal.
-
->[!NOTE]
->SEMM is only available on devices with Surface UEFI firmware. This includes most Surface devices including Surface Pro 7, Surface Pro X, and Surface Laptop 3 commercial SKUs with an Intel processor. SEMM is not supported on the 15" Surface Laptop 3 SKU with AMD processor (only available as a retail SKU).
-
-When Surface devices are configured by SEMM and secured with the SEMM certificate, they are considered *enrolled* in SEMM. When the SEMM certificate is removed and control of UEFI settings is returned to the user of the device, the Surface device is considered *unenrolled* in SEMM.
-
-There are two administrative options you can use to manage SEMM and enrolled Surface devices – a standalone tool or integration with System Center Configuration Manager. The SEMM standalone tool, called the Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator, is described in this article. For more information about how to manage SEMM with System Center Configuration Manager, see [Use System Center Configuration Manager to manage devices with SEMM](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface/use-system-center-configuration-manager-to-manage-devices-with-semm).
-
-
-## Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator
-
-The primary workspace of SEMM is Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator, as shown in Figure 1. Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator is a tool that is used to create Windows Installer (.msi) packages or WinPE images that are used to enroll, configure, and unenroll SEMM on a Surface device. These packages contain a configuration file where the settings for UEFI are specified. SEMM packages also contain a certificate that is installed and stored in firmware and used to verify the signature of configuration files before UEFI settings are applied.
-
-
-
-*Figure 1. Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator*
-
-
-You can use the Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator tool in three modes:
-
-* [Surface UEFI Configuration Package](#configuration-package). Use this mode to create a Surface UEFI configuration package to enroll a Surface device in SEMM and to configure UEFI settings on enrolled devices.
-* [Surface UEFI Reset Package](#reset-package). Use this mode to unenroll a Surface device from SEMM.
-* [Surface UEFI Recovery Request](#recovery-request). Use this mode to respond to a recovery request to unenroll a Surface device from SEMM where a Reset Package operation is not successful.
-
-
-#### Download Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator
-
-You can download Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator from the [Surface Tools for IT](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=46703) page in the Microsoft Download Center.
-
-### Configuration package
-
-Surface UEFI configuration packages are the primary mechanism to implement and manage SEMM on Surface devices. These packages contain a configuration file of UEFI settings specified during creation of the package in Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator and a certificate file, as shown in Figure 2. When a configuration package is run for the first time on a Surface device that is not already enrolled in SEMM, it provisions the certificate file in the device’s firmware and enrolls the device in SEMM. When enrolling a device in SEMM, you will be prompted to confirm the operation by providing the last two digits of the SEMM certificate thumbprint before the certificate file is stored and the enrollment can complete. This confirmation requires that a user be present at the device at the time of enrollment to perform the confirmation.
-
-
-
-*Figure 2. Secure a SEMM configuration package with a certificate*
-
-See the [Surface Enterprise Management Mode certificate requirements](#surface-enterprise-management-mode-certificate-requirements) section of this article for more information about the requirements for the SEMM certificate.
-
->[!NOTE]
->You can also specify a UEFI password with SEMM that is required to view the **Security**, **Devices**, **Boot Configuration**, or **Enterprise Management** pages of Surface UEFI.
-
-After a device is enrolled in SEMM, the configuration file is read and the settings specified in the file are applied to UEFI. When you run a configuration package on a device that is already enrolled in SEMM, the signature of the configuration file is checked against the certificate that is stored in the device firmware. If the signature does not match, no changes are applied to the device.
-
-### Enable or disable devices in Surface UEFI with SEMM
-
-The following list shows all the available devices you can manage in SEMM:
-
-* Docking USB Port
-* On-board Audio
-* DGPU
-* Type Cover
-* Micro SD Card
-* Front Camera
-* Rear Camera
-* Infrared Camera, for Windows Hello
-* Bluetooth Only
-* Wi-Fi and Bluetooth
-* LTE
-
- >[!NOTE]
->The built-in devices that appear in the UEFI Devices page may vary depending on your device or corporate environment. For example, the UEFI Devices page is not supported on Surface Pro X; LTE only appears on LTE-equipped devices.
-### Configure advanced settings with SEMM
-**Table 1. Advanced settings**
-
-| Setting | Description |
-| ---------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| IPv6 for PXE Boot | Allows you to manage Ipv6 support for PXE boot. If you do not configure this setting, IPv6 support for PXE boot is disabled. |
-| Alternate Boot | Allows you to manage use of an Alternate boot order to boot directly to a USB or Ethernet device by pressing both the Volume Down button and Power button during boot. If you do not configure this setting, Alternate boot is enabled. |
-| Boot Order Lock | Allows you to lock the boot order to prevent changes. If you do not configure this setting, Boot Order Lock is disabled. |
-| USB Boot | Allows you to manage booting to USB devices. If you do not configure this setting, USB Boot is enabled. |
-| Network Stack | Allows you to manage Network Stack boot settings. If you do not configure this setting, the ability to manage Network Stack boot settings is disabled. |
-| Auto Power On | Allows you to manage Auto Power On boot settings. If you do not configure this setting, Auto Power on is enabled. |
-| Simultaneous Multi-Threading (SMT) | Allows you to manage Simultaneous Multi-Threading (SMT) to enable or disable hyperthreading. If you do not configure this setting, SMT is enabled. |
-|Enable Battery limit| Allows you to manage Battery limit functionality. If you do not configure this setting, Battery limit is enabled |
-| Security | Displays the Surface UEFI **Security** page. If you do not configure this setting, the Security page is displayed. |
-| Devices | Displays the Surface UEFI **Devices** page. If you do not configure this setting, the Devices page is displayed. |
-| Boot | Displays the Surface UEFI **Boot** page. If you do not configure this setting, the DateTime page is displayed. |
-| DateTime | Displays the Surface UEFI **DateTime** page. If you do not configure this setting, the DateTime page is displayed. |
-
-
-
->[!NOTE]
->When you create a SEMM configuration package, two characters are shown on the **Successful** page, as shown in Figure 3.
-
-
-
-*Figure 3. Display of the last two characters of the certificate thumbprint on the Successful page*
-
-These characters are the last two characters of the certificate thumbprint and should be written down or recorded. The characters are required to confirm enrollment in SEMM on a Surface device, as shown in Figure 4.
-
-
-
-*Figure 4. Enrollment confirmation in SEMM with the SEMM certificate thumbprint*
-
->[!NOTE]
->Administrators with access to the certificate file (.pfx) can read the thumbprint at any time by opening the .pfx file in CertMgr. To view the thumbprint with CertMgr, follow this process:
->1. Right-click the .pfx file, and then click **Open**.
->2. Expand the folder in the navigation pane.
->3. Click **Certificates**.
->4. Right-click your certificate in the main pane, and then click **Open**.
->5. Click the **Details** tab.
->6. **All** or **Properties Only** must be selected in the **Show** drop-down menu.
->7. Select the field **Thumbprint**.
-
-To enroll a Surface device in SEMM or to apply the UEFI configuration from a configuration package, all you need to do is run the .msi file with administrative privileges on the intended Surface device. You can use application deployment or operating system deployment technologies such as [System Center Configuration Manager](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/mt346023) or the [Microsoft Deployment Toolkit](https://technet.microsoft.com/windows/dn475741). When you enroll a device in SEMM you must be present to confirm the enrollment on the device. User interaction is not required when you apply a configuration to devices that are already enrolled in SEMM.
-
-For a step-by-step walkthrough of how to enroll a Surface device in SEMM or apply a Surface UEFI configuration with SEMM, see [Enroll and configure Surface devices with SEMM](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface/enroll-and-configure-surface-devices-with-semm).
-
-### Reset package
-
-A Surface UEFI reset package is used to perform only one task — to unenroll a Surface device from SEMM. The reset package contains signed instructions to remove the SEMM certificate from the device’s firmware and to reset UEFI settings to factory default. Like a Surface UEFI configuration package, a reset package must be signed with the same SEMM certificate that is provisioned on the Surface device. When you create a SEMM reset package, you are required to supply the serial number of the Surface device you intend to reset. SEMM reset packages are not universal and are specific to one device.
-
-### Recovery request
-
-In some scenarios, it may be impossible to use a Surface UEFI reset package. (For example, if Windows becomes unusable on the Surface device.) In these scenarios you can unenroll the Surface device from SEMM through the **Enterprise Management** page of Surface UEFI (shown in Figure 5) with a Recovery Request operation.
-
-
-
-*Figure 5. Initiate a SEMM recovery request on the Enterprise Management page*
-
-When you use the process on the **Enterprise Management** page to reset SEMM on a Surface device, you are provided with a Reset Request. This Reset Request can be saved as a file to a USB drive, copied as text, or read as a QR Code with a mobile device to be easily emailed or messaged. Use the Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator Reset Request option to load a Reset Request file or enter the Reset Request text or QR Code. Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator will generate a verification code that can be entered on the Surface device. If you enter the code on the Surface device and click **Restart**, the device will be unenrolled from SEMM.
-
->[!NOTE]
->A Reset Request expires two hours after it is created.
-
-For a step-by-step walkthrough of how to unenroll Surface devices from SEMM, see [Unenroll Surface devices from SEMM](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface/unenroll-surface-devices-from-semm).
-
-## Surface Enterprise Management Mode certificate requirements
-
->[!NOTE]
->The SEMM certificate is required to perform any modification to SEMM or Surface UEFI settings on enrolled Surface devices. If the SEMM certificate is corrupted or lost, SEMM cannot be removed or reset. Manage your SEMM certificate accordingly with an appropriate solution for backup and recovery.
-
-Packages created with the Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator tool are signed with a certificate. This certificate ensures that after a device is enrolled in SEMM, only packages created with the approved certificate can be used to modify the settings of UEFI. The following settings are recommended for the SEMM certificate:
-
-* **Key Algorithm** – RSA
-* **Key Length** – 2048
-* **Hash Algorithm** – SHA-256
-* **Type** – SSL Server Authentication
-* **Key Usage** – Digital signature, Key Encipherment
-* **Provider** – Microsoft Enhanced RSA and AES Cryptographic Provider
-* **Expiration Date** – 15 Months from certificate creation
-* **Key Export Policy** – Exportable
-
-It is also recommended that the SEMM certificate be authenticated in a two-tier public key infrastructure (PKI) architecture where the intermediate certification authority (CA) is dedicated to SEMM, enabling certificate revocation. For more information about a two-tier PKI configuration, see [Test Lab Guide: Deploying an AD CS Two-Tier PKI Hierarchy](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/hh831348).
-
->[!NOTE]
->You can use the following PowerShell script to create a self-signed certificate for use in proof-of-concept scenarios.
- > To use this script, copy the following text into Notepad and save the file as a PowerShell script (.ps1). This script creates a certificate with a password of `12345678`.
The certificate generated by this script is not recommended for production environments.
-
- ```
-if (-not (Test-Path "Demo Certificate")) { New-Item -ItemType Directory -Force -Path "Demo Certificate" }
-if (Test-Path "Demo Certificate\TempOwner.pfx") { Remove-Item "Demo Certificate\TempOwner.pfx" }
-
-# Generate the Ownership private signing key with password 12345678
-$pw = ConvertTo-SecureString "12345678" -AsPlainText -Force
-
-$TestUefiV2 = New-SelfSignedCertificate `
- -Subject "CN=Surface Demo Kit, O=Contoso Corporation, C=US" `
- -Type SSLServerAuthentication `
- -HashAlgorithm sha256 `
- -KeyAlgorithm RSA `
- -KeyLength 2048 `
- -KeyUsage KeyEncipherment `
- -KeyUsageProperty All `
- -Provider "Microsoft Enhanced RSA and AES Cryptographic Provider" `
- -NotAfter (Get-Date).AddYears(25) `
- -TextExtension @("2.5.29.37={text}1.2.840.113549.1.1.1") `
- -KeyExportPolicy Exportable
-
-$TestUefiV2 | Export-PfxCertificate -Password $pw -FilePath "Demo Certificate\TempOwner.pfx"
- ```
-
-For use with SEMM and Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator, the certificate must be exported with the private key and with password protection. Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator will prompt you to select the SEMM certificate file (.pfx) and certificate password when it is required.
-
->[!NOTE]
->For organizations that use an offline root in their PKI infrastructure, Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator must be run in an environment connected to the root CA to authenticate the SEMM certificate. The packages generated by Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator can be transferred as files and therefore can be transferred outside the offline network environment with removable storage, such as a USB stick.
-
-### Managing certificates FAQ
-
-The recommended *minimum* length is 15 months. You can use a
-certificate that expires in less than 15 months or use a certificate
-that expires in longer than 15 months.
-
->[!NOTE]
->When a certificate expires, it does not automatically renew.
-
-**Will existing machines continue to apply the bios settings after 15
-months?**
-
-Yes, but only if the package itself was signed when the certificate was
-valid.
-
-**Will** **the SEMM package and certificate need to be updated on all
-machines that have it?**
-
-If you want SEMM reset or recovery to work, the certificate needs to be
-valid and not expired.
-
-**Can bulk reset packages be created for each surface that we order? Can
-one be built that resets all machines in our environment?**
-
-The PowerShell samples that create a config package for a specific
-device type can also be used to create a reset package that is
-serial-number independent. If the certificate is still valid, you can
-create a reset package using PowerShell to reset SEMM.
-
-## Version History
-
-### Version 2.59.
-* Support to Surface Pro 7, Surface Pro X, and Surface Laptop 3 13.5" and 15" models with Intel processor. Note: Surface Laptop 3 15" AMD processor is not supported.
-- Support to Wake on Power feature
-
-### Version 2.54.139.0
-* Support to Surface Hub 2S
-* Bug fixes
-
-### Version 2.43.136.0
-* Support to enable/disable simulatenous multithreating
-* Separate options for WiFi and Bluetooth for some devices
-* Battery Limit removed for Surface Studio
-
-### Version 2.26.136.0
-* Add support to Surface Studio 2
-* Battery Limit feature
-
-### Version 2.21.136.0
-* Add support to Surface Pro 6
-* Add support to Surface Laptop 2
-
-### Version 2.14.136.0
-* Add support to Surface Go
-
-### Version 2.9.136.0
-* Add support to Surface Book 2
-* Add support to Surface Pro LTE
-* Accessibility improvements
-
-### Version 1.0.74.0
-* Add support to Surface Laptop
-* Add support to Surface Pro
-* Bug fixes and general improvement
-
-## Related topics
-
-[Enroll and configure Surface devices with SEMM](enroll-and-configure-surface-devices-with-semm.md)
-
-[Unenroll Surface devices from SEMM](unenroll-surface-devices-from-semm.md)
diff --git a/devices/surface/surface-manage-dfci-guide.md b/devices/surface/surface-manage-dfci-guide.md
deleted file mode 100644
index efb5fa93b5..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/surface-manage-dfci-guide.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,188 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Intune management of Surface UEFI settings
-description: This article explains how to configure a DFCI environment in Microsoft Intune and manage firmware settings for targeted Surface devices.
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 11/13/2019
-ms.reviewer: jesko
-manager: dansimp
-ms.audience: itpro
----
-# Intune management of Surface UEFI settings
-
-## Introduction
-
-The ability to manage devices from the cloud has dramatically simplified IT deployment and provisioning across the lifecycle. With Device Firmware Configuration Interface (DFCI) profiles built into Microsoft Intune (now available in [public preview](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/configuration/device-firmware-configuration-interface-windows)), Surface UEFI management extends the modern management stack down to the UEFI hardware level. DFCI supports zero-touch provisioning, eliminates BIOS passwords, provides control of security settings including boot options and built-in peripherals, and lays the groundwork for advanced security scenarios in the future. For answers to frequently asked questions, see [Ignite 2019: Announcing remote management of Surface UEFI settings from Intune](https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/t5/Surface-IT-Pro-Blog/Ignite-2019-Announcing-remote-management-of-Surface-UEFI/ba-p/978333).
-
-### Background
-
-Like any computer running Windows 10, Surface devices rely on code stored in the SoC that enables the CPU to interface with hard drives, display devices, USB ports, and other devices. The programs stored in this read-only memory (ROM) are known as firmware (while programs stored in dynamic media are known as software).
-
-In contrast to other Windows 10 devices available in the market today, Surface provides IT admins with the ability to configure and manage firmware through a rich set of UEFI configuration settings. This provides a layer of hardware control on top of software-based policy management as implemented via mobile device management (MDM) policies, Configuration Manager or Group Policy. For example, organizations deploying devices in highly secure areas with sensitive information can prevent camera use by removing functionality at the hardware level. From a device standpoint, turning the camera off via a firmware setting is equivalent to physically removing the camera. Compare the added security of managing at the firmware level to relying only on operating system software settings. For example, if you disable the Windows audio service via a policy setting in a domain environment, a local admin could still re-enable the service.
-
-### DFCI versus SEMM
-
-Until now, managing firmware required enrolling devices into Surface Enterprise Management Mode (SEMM) with the overhead of ongoing manual IT-intensive tasks. As an example, SEMM requires IT staff to physically access each PC to enter a two-digit pin as part of the certificate management process. Although SEMM remains a good solution for organizations in a strictly on-premises environment, its complexity and IT-intensive requirements make it costly to use.
-
-Now with newly integrated UEFI firmware management capabilities in Microsoft Intune, the ability to lock down hardware is simplified and easier to use with new features for provisioning, security, and streamlined updating all in a single console, now unified as [Microsoft Endpoint Manager](https://www.microsoft.com/microsoft-365/microsoft-endpoint-manager). The following figure shows UEFI settings viewed directly on the device (left) and viewed in the Endpoint Manager console (right).
-
-
-
-Crucially, DFCI enables zero touch management, eliminating the need for manual interaction by IT admins. DFCI is deployed via Windows Autopilot using the device profiles capability in Intune. A device profile allows you to add and configure settings which can then be deployed to devices enrolled in management within your organization. Once the device receives the device profile, the features and settings are applied automatically. Examples of common device profiles include Email, Device restrictions, VPN, Wi-Fi, and Administrative templates. DFCI is simply an additional device profile that enables you to manage UEFI configuration settings from the cloud without having to maintain on-premises infrastructure.
-
-## Supported devices
-
-At this time, DFCI is supported in the following devices:
-
-- Surface Pro 7
-- Surface Pro X
-- Surface Laptop 3
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Surface Pro X does not support DFCI settings management for built-in camera, audio, and Wi-Fi/Bluetooth.
-
-## Prerequisites
-
-- Devices must be registered with Windows Autopilot by a [Microsoft Cloud Solution Provider (CSP) partner](https://partner.microsoft.com/membership/cloud-solution-provider) or OEM distributor.
-
-- Before configuring DFCI for Surface, you should be familiar with Autopilot configuration requirements in [Microsoft Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/) and [Azure Active Directory](https://docs.microsoft.com/azure/active-directory/) (Azure AD).
-
-## Before you begin
-
-Add your target Surface devices to an Azure AD security group. For more information about creating and managing security groups, refer to [Intune documentation](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/configuration/device-firmware-configuration-interface-windows#create-your-azure-ad-security-groups).
-
-## Configure DFCI management for Surface devices
-
-A DFCI environment requires setting up a DFCI profile that contains the settings and an Autopilot profile to apply the settings to registered devices. An enrollment status profile is also recommended to ensure settings are pushed down during OOBE setup when users first start the device. This guide explains how to configure the DFCI environment and manage UEFI configuration settings for targeted Surface devices.
-
-## Create DFCI profile
-
-Before configuring DFCI policy settings, first create a DFCI profile and assign it to the Azure AD security group that contains your target devices.
-
-1. Sign into your tenant at devicemanagement.microsoft.com.
-2. In the Microsoft Endpoint Manager Admin Center, select **Devices > Configuration profiles > Create profile** and enter a name; for example, **DFCI Configuration Policy.**
-3. Select **Windows 10 and later** for platform type.
-4. In the Profile type drop down list, select **Device Firmware Configuration Interface** to open the DFCI blade containing all available policy settings. For information on DFCI settings, refer to Table 1 on this page or the [Intune documentation](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/configuration/device-firmware-configuration-interface-windows). You can configure DFCI settings during the initial setup process or later by editing the DFCI profile.
-
- 
-
-5. Click **OK** and then select **Create**.
-6. Select **Assignments** and under **Select groups to include** select the Azure AD security group that contains your target devices, as shown in the following figure. Click **Save**.
-
- 
-
-## Create Autopilot profile
-
-1. In Endpoint Manager at devicemanagement.microsoft.com, select **devices > Windows enrollment** and scroll down to **Deployment profiles**.
-2. Select **Create profile** and enter a name; for example, **My Autopilot profile**, and select **Next**.
-3. Select the following settings:
-
- - Deployment mode: **User-Driven**.
- - Join type: Azure **AD joined**.
-
-4. Leave the remaining default settings unchanged and select **Next**, as shown in the following figure.
-
- 
-
-5. On the Assignments page, choose **Select groups to include** and click your Azure AD security group. Select **Next**.
-6. Accept the summary and then select **Create**. The Autopilot profile is now created and assigned to the group.
-
-## Configure Enrollment Status Page
-
-To ensure that devices apply the DFCI configuration during OOBE before users sign in, you need to configure enrollment status.
-
-For more information, refer to [Set up an enrollment status page](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/enrollment/windows-enrollment-status).
-
-
-## Configure DFCI settings on Surface devices
-
-DFCI includes a streamlined set of UEFI configuration policies that provide an extra level of security by locking down devices at the hardware level. DFCI is designed to be used in conjunction with mobile device management settings at the software level. Note that DFCI settings only affect hardware components built into Surface devices and do not extend to attached peripherals such as USB webcams. (However, you can use Device restriction policies in Intune to turn off access to attached peripherals at the software level).
-
-You configure DFCI policy settings by editing the DFCI profile from Endpoint Manager, as shown in the figure below.
-
-- In Endpoint Manager at devicemanagement.microsoft.com, select **Devices > Windows > Configuration Profiles > “DFCI profile name” > Properties > Settings**.
-
- 
-
-### Block user access to UEFI settings
-
-For many customers, the ability to block users from changing UEFI settings is critically important and a primary reason to use DFCI. As listed in Table 1, this is managed via the setting **Allow local user to change UEFI settings**. If you do not edit or configure this setting, local users will be able to change any UEFI setting not managed by Intune. Therefore, it’s highly recommended to disable **Allow local user to change UEFI settings.**
-The rest of the DFCI settings enable you to turn off functionality that would otherwise be available to users. For example, if you need to protect sensitive information in highly secure areas, you can disable the camera, and if you don’t want users booting from USB drives, you can disable that also.
-
-### Table 1. DFCI scenarios
-
-| Device management goal | Configuration steps |
-| --------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| Block local users from changing UEFI settings | Under **Security Features > Allow local user to change UEFI settings**, select **None**. |
-| Disable cameras | Under **Built in Hardware > Cameras**, select **Disabled**. |
-| Disable Microphones and speakers | Under **Built in Hardware > Microphones and speakers**, select **Disabled**. |
-| Disable radios (Bluetooth, Wi-Fi) | Under **Built in Hardware > Radios (Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, etc…)**, select **Disabled**. |
-| Disable Boot from external media (USB, SD) | Under **Built in Hardware > Boot Options > Boot from external media (USB, SD)**, select **Disabled**. |
-
-> [!CAUTION]
-> The **Disable radios (Bluetooth, Wi-Fi)** setting should only be used on devices that have a wired Ethernet connection.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> DFCI in Intune includes two settings that do not currently apply to Surface devices: (1) CPU and IO virtualization and (2) Disable Boot from network adapters.
-
-Intune provides Scope tags to delegate administrative rights and Applicability Rules to manage device types. For more information about policy management support and full details on all DFCI settings, refer to [Microsoft Intune documentation](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/configuration/device-firmware-configuration-interface-windows).
-
-## Register devices in Autopilot
-
-As stated above, DFCI can only be applied on devices registered in Windows Autopilot by your reseller or distributor and is only supported, at this time, on Surface Pro 7, Surface Pro X, and Surface Laptop 3. For security reasons, it’s not possible to “self-provision” your devices into Autopilot.
-
-## Manually Sync Autopilot devices
-
-Although Intune policy settings typically get applied almost immediately, there may be a delay of 10 minutes before the settings take effect on targeted devices. In rare circumstances, delays of up to 8 hours are possible. To ensure settings apply as soon as possible, (such as in test scenarios), you can manually sync the target devices.
-
-- In Endpoint Manager at devicemanagement.microsoft.com, go to **Devices > Device enrollment > Windows enrollment > Windows Autopilot Devices** and select **Sync**.
-
- For more information, refer to [Sync your Windows device manually](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune-user-help/sync-your-device-manually-windows).
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> When adjusting settings directly in UEFI, you need to ensure the device fully restarts to the standard Windows login.
-
-## Verifying UEFI settings on DFCI-managed devices
-
-In a test environment, you can verify settings in the Surface UEFI interface.
-
-1. Open Surface UEFI, which involves pressing the **Volume +** and **Power** buttons at the same time.
-2. Select **Devices**. The UEFI menu will reflect configured settings, as shown in the following figure.
-
- 
-
- Note how:
-
- - The settings are greyed out because **Allow local user to change UEFI setting** is set to None.
- - Audio is set to off because **Microphones and speakers** are set to **Disabled**.
-
-## Removing DFCI policy settings
-
-When you create a DFCI profile, all configured settings will remain in effect across all devices within the profile’s scope of management. You can only remove DFCI policy settings by editing the DFCI profile directly.
-
-If the original DFCI profile has been deleted, you can remove policy settings by creating a new profile and then editing the settings, as appropriate.
-
-## Removing DFCI management
-
-**To remove DFCI management and return device to factory new state:**
-
-1. Retire the device from Intune:
- 1. In Endpoint Manager at devicemanagement.microsoft.com, choose **Groups > All Devices**. Select the devices you want to retire, and then choose **Retire/Wipe.** To learn more refer to [Remove devices by using wipe, retire, or manually unenrolling the device](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/remote-actions/devices-wipe).
-2. Delete the Autopilot registration from Intune:
- 1. Choose **Device enrollment > Windows enrollment > Devices**.
- 2. Under Windows Autopilot devices, choose the devices you want to delete, and then choose **Delete**.
-3. Connect device to wired internet with Surface-branded ethernet adapter. Restart device and open the UEFI menu (press and hold the volume-up button while also pressing and releasing the power button).
-4. Select **Management > Configure > Refresh from Network** and then choose **Opt-out.**
-
-To keep managing the device with Intune, but without DFCI management, self-register the device to Autopilot and enroll it to Intune. DFCI will not be applied to self-registered devices.
-
-## Learn more
-- [Ignite 2019: Announcing remote management of Surface UEFI settings from Intune](https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/t5/Surface-IT-Pro-Blog/Ignite-2019-Announcing-remote-management-of-Surface-UEFI/ba-p/978333)
-[Windows Autopilot](https://www.microsoft.com/microsoft-365/windows/windows-autopilot)
-- [Windows Autopilot and Surface devices](windows-autopilot-and-surface-devices.md)
-- [Use DFCI profiles on Windows devices in Microsoft Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/configuration/device-firmware-configuration-interface-windows)
diff --git a/devices/surface/surface-pro-arm-app-management.md b/devices/surface/surface-pro-arm-app-management.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 26e145c547..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/surface-pro-arm-app-management.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,174 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying, managing, and servicing Surface Pro X
-description: This article provides an overview of key considerations for deploying, managing, and servicing Surface Pro X.
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.localizationpriority: high
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 11/20/2019
-ms.reviewer: jessko
-manager: dansimp
-ms.audience: itpro
----
-# Deploying, managing, and servicing Surface Pro X
-
-## Introduction
-
-Built to handle high performance commercial requirements, Surface Pro X breaks new ground by incorporating the most powerful processor ever released on an ARM device, the Microsoft SQ1 ARM chipset.
-
-Powered by a 3GHz CPU and a 2.1 teraflop GPU, Surface Pro X provides a full Windows experience. Its 13-hour battery life and built-in 4G LTE make it ideally suited for mobile first-line workers and professionals across the financial, legal, and medical fields or any role demanding extended battery life and continuous connectivity capabilities.
-
-Surface Pro X is designed almost exclusively for a modern, cloud-based environment centered around Microsoft 365, Intune and Windows Autopilot. This article highlights what that looks like and outlines key considerations for deploying, managing, and servicing Surface Pro X.
-
-## Deploying Surface Pro X
-
-For the best experience, deploy Surface Pro X using Windows Autopilot either with the assistance of a Microsoft Cloud Solution Provider or self-provisioned using Autopilot deployment profiles and related features. For more information, refer to:
-
-- [Windows Autopilot and Surface devices](windows-autopilot-and-surface-devices.md)
-- [Overview of Windows Autopilot](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/deployment/windows-autopilot/windows-autopilot)
-
-Autopilot deployment has several advantages: It allows you to use the factory provisioned operating system, streamlined for zero-touch deployment, to include pre-installation of Office Pro Plus.
-
-Organizations already using modern management, security, and productivity solutions are well positioned to take advantage of the unique performance features in Surface Pro X. Customers using modernized line of business apps, Microsoft store (UWP) apps, or remote desktop solutions also stand to benefit.
-
-## Image-based deployment considerations
-
-Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT) and Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager (formerly System Center Configuration Manager) currently do not support Surface Pro X for operating system deployment. Customers relying on image-based deployment should consider Surface Pro 7 while they continue to evaluate the right time to transition to the cloud.
-
-## Managing Surface Pro X devices
-
-### Intune
-
-A component of Microsoft Enterprise Mobility + Security, Intune integrates with Azure Active Directory for identity and access control and provides granular management of enrolled Surface Pro X devices. Intune mobile device management (MDM) policies have a number of advantages over older on-premises tools such as Windows Group Policy. This includes faster device login times and a more streamlined catalog of policies enabling full device management from the cloud. For example, you can manage LTE using eSIM profiles to configure data plans and deploy activation codes to multiple devices.
-
-For more information about setting up Intune, refer to the [Intune documentation](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/).
-
-### Co-management
-
-Once deployed in Autopilot, you can join Surface Pro X devices to Azure AD or Active Directory (Hybrid Azure AD Join) where you will be able to manage the devices with Intune or co-manage them with Endpoint Configuration Manager, which will install the 32-bit x86 ConfigMgr client.
-
-### Third party MDM solutions
-
-You may be able to use third-party MDM tools to manage Surface Pro X devices. For details, contact your MDM provider.
-
-### Antivirus software
-
-Windows Defender will help protect Windows 10 on ARM-based PCs for the supported lifetime of the Windows 10 device.
-
-Some third-party antivirus software cannot be installed on a Windows 10 PC running on an ARM-based processor. Collaboration with third-party antivirus software providers is continuing for AV app readiness on ARM-based PCs. Contact your antivirus software provider to understand when their apps will be available.
-
-## Servicing Surface Pro X
-
-Surface Pro X supports Windows 10, version 1903 and later. As an ARM-based device, it has specific requirements for maintaining the latest drivers and firmware.
-
-Surface Pro X was designed to use Windows Update to simplify the process of keeping drivers and firmware up to date for both home users and small business users. Use the default settings to receive Automatic updates. To verify:
-
-1. Go to **Start** > **Settings > Update & Security > Windows Update** > **Advanced Options.**
-2. Under **Choose how updates are installed,** select **Automatic (recommended)**.
-
-### Recommendations for commercial customers
-
-- Use Windows Update or Windows Update for Business for maintaining the latest drivers and firmware. For more information, see [Deploy Updates using Windows Update for Business](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/deployment/update/waas-manage-updates-wufb).
-- If your procedures require using a Windows Installer .msi file, contact [Surface for Business support](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4037645).
-- For more information about deploying and managing updates on Surface devices, see [Deploy the latest firmware and drivers for Surface devices](deploy-the-latest-firmware-and-drivers-for-surface-devices.md).
-- Note that Windows Server Update Services (WSUS) does not support the ability to deliver drivers and firmware to Surface Pro X.
-
-## Running apps on Surface Pro X
-
-Most apps run on ARM-based Windows 10 PCs with limited exclusions.
-
-### Supported apps
-
-- Most x86 Win32 apps run on Surface Pro X.
-- Native ARM64 and Microsoft Store UWP apps provide an excellent user experience utilizing the full native speed of the ARM-based processor while optimizing battery life.
-- Apps that use drivers designed for a Windows 10 PC running on an ARM-based processor.
-
-### Not supported
-
-- x64 apps won't run on a Windows 10 PC on an ARM-based processor.
-
-For more information about running apps on Surface Pro X, refer to:
-
-- [Windows 10 ARM-based PCs Support FAQ](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4521606)
-- [Windows 10 on ARM documentation](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/arm)
-
-## Virtual Desktops (VDI)
-
-Windows Virtual Desktop enables access to Windows desktops,applications, and data on any computing device or platform, from any location. To learn more, refer to the [Windows Virtual Desktop site](https://aka.ms/wvd).
-
-## Browsing with Surface Pro X
-
-Popular browsers run on Surface Pro X:
-
-- In-box Edge, Firefox, Chrome, and Internet Explorer all run on Surface Pro X.
-- In-box Edge and Firefox run natively and therefore have enhanced performance on a Windows 10 PC on an ARM-based processor.
-
-## Installing and using Microsoft Office
-
-- Use Office 365 for the best experience on a Windows 10 PC on an ARM-based processor.
-- Office 365 “click-to-run” installs Outlook, Word, Excel, and PowerPoint, optimized to run on a Windows 10 PC on an ARM-based processor.
-- Microsoft Teams runs great on Surface Pro X.
-- For “perpetual versions” of Office such as Office 2019, install the 32-bit version.
-
-## VPN
-
-To confirm if a specific third-party VPN supports a Windows 10 PC on an ARM-based processor, contact the VPN provider.
-
-## Comparing key features
-
-The following tables show the availability of selected key features on Surface Pro X with Windows 10 on ARM compared to Intel-based Surface Pro 7.
-
-| Deployment | Surface Pro 7 | Surface Pro X | Notes |
-| --------------------------------------- | ------------- | ------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| Windows Autopilot | Yes | Yes | |
-| Support for Network Boot (PXE) | Yes | Yes | |
-| Windows Configuration Designer | Yes | No | Not recommended for Surface Pro X. |
-| WinPE | Yes | Yes | Not recommended for Surface Pro X. Microsoft does not provide the necessary .ISO and drivers to support WinPE with Surface Pro X. |
-| Endpoint Configuration Manager: Operating System Deployment (OSD) | Yes | No | Not supported on Surface Pro X. |
-| MDT | Yes | No | Not supported on Surface Pro X. |
-
-
-| Management | Surface Pro 7 | Surface Pro X | Notes |
-| --------------------------------------------- | ------------------- | ------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| Intune | Yes | Yes | Manage LTE with eSIM profiles. |
-| Windows Autopilot | Yes | Yes | |
-| Azure AD (co-management) | Yes | Yes | Ability to join Surface Pro X to Azure AD or Active Directory (Hybrid Azure AD Join). |
-| Endpoint Configuration Manager | Yes | Yes | |
-| Power on When AC Restore | Yes | Yes | |
-| Surface Diagnostic Toolkit (SDT) for Business | Yes | Yes | |
-| Surface Dock Firmware Update | Yes | Yes | |
-| Asset Tag Utility | Yes | Yes | |
-| Surface Enterprise management Mode (SEMM) | Yes | Partial | No option to disable hardware on Surface Pro X at the firmware level. |
-| Surface UEFI Configurator | Yes | | No option to disable hardware. on Surface Pro X at the firmware level. |
-| Surface UEFI Manager | Yes | Partial | No option to disable hardware on Surface Pro X at the firmware level. |
-
-
-| Security | Surface Pro 7 | Surface Pro X | Notes |
-| --------------------------------- | ------------- | ------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| BitLocker | Yes | Yes | |
-| Windows Defender | Yes | Yes | |
-| Support for third-party antivirus | Yes | See note |Some third-party antivirus software cannot be installed on a Windows 10 PC running on an ARM-based processor. Collaboration with third-party antivirus software providers is continuing for AV app readiness on ARM-based PCs. Contact your antivirus software provider to understand when their apps will be available. |
-| Conditional Access | Yes | Yes | |
-| Secure Boot | Yes | Yes | |
-| Windows Information Protection | Yes | Yes | |
-| Surface Data Eraser (SDE) | Yes | Yes |
-## FAQ
-
-### Can I deploy Surface Pro X with MDT or Endpoint Configuration Manager?
-
-The Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT) and Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager currently do not support Surface Pro X for operating system deployment.Customers relying on image-based deployment should consider Surface Pro 7 while they continue to evaluate the right time to transition to the cloud.
-
-### How can I deploy Surface Pro X?
-
-Deploy Surface Pro X using Windows Autopilot.
-
-### Will a BMR be available?
-
-Yes.
-
-### Is Intune required to manage Surface Pro X?
-
-Intune is recommended but not required. Once deployed in Autopilot, you can join Surface Pro X devices to Azure AD or Active Directory (Hybrid Azure AD Join) where you will be able to manage the devices with Intune or co-manage them with Endpoint Configuration Manager, which will install the 32-bit x86 ConfigMgr client.
diff --git a/devices/surface/surface-pro-arm-app-performance.md b/devices/surface/surface-pro-arm-app-performance.md
deleted file mode 100644
index baa547d04b..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/surface-pro-arm-app-performance.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Surface Pro X app compatibility
-description: This article provides introductory app compatibility information for Surface Pro X ARM-based PCs.
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 10/03/2019
-ms.reviewer: jessko
-manager: dansimp
-ms.audience: itpro
----
-# Surface Pro X app compatibility
-
-Applications run differently on ARM-based Windows 10 PCs such as Surface Pro X. Limitations include the following:
-
-- **Drivers for hardware, games and apps will only work if they're designed for a Windows 10 ARM-based PC**. For more info, check with the hardware manufacturer or the organization that developed the driver. Drivers are software programs that communicate with hardware devices—they're commonly used for antivirus and antimalware software, printing or PDF software, assistive technologies, CD and DVD utilities, and virtualization software. If a driver doesn’t work, the app or hardware that relies on it won’t work either (at least not fully). Peripherals and devices only work if the drivers they depend on are built into Windows 10, or if the hardware developer has released ARM64 drivers for the device.
-- **64-bit (x64) apps won’t work**. You'll need 64-bit (ARM64) apps, 32-bit (ARM32) apps, or 32-bit (x86) apps. You can usually find 32-bit (x86) versions of apps, but some app developers only offer 64-bit (x64) apps.
-- **Certain games won’t work**. Games and apps won't work if they use a version of OpenGL greater than 1.1, or if they rely on "anti-cheat" drivers that haven't been made for Windows 10 ARM-based PCs. Check with your game publisher to see if a game will work.
-- **Apps that customize the Windows experience might have problems**. This includes some input method editors (IMEs), assistive technologies, and cloud storage apps. The organization that develops the app determines whether their app will work on a Windows 10 ARM-based PC.
-- **Some third-party antivirus software can’t be installed**. You won't be able to install some third-party antivirus software on a Windows 10 ARM-based PC. However, Windows Security will help keep you safe for the supported lifetime of your Windows 10 device.
-- **Windows Fax and Scan isn’t available**. This feature isn’t available on a Windows 10 ARM-based PC.
-
-For more information about app compatibility, refer to [Windows 10 ARM-based PCs FAQ](https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/help/4521606)
diff --git a/devices/surface/surface-system-sku-reference.md b/devices/surface/surface-system-sku-reference.md
deleted file mode 100644
index cb201c332e..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/surface-system-sku-reference.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,74 +0,0 @@
----
-title: System SKU reference (Surface)
-description: See a reference of System Model and System SKU names.
-keywords: uefi, configure, firmware, secure, semm
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.pagetype: surface, devices, security
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 10/31/2019
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.audience: itpro
----
-
-# System SKU reference
-
-This document provides a reference of System Model and System SKU names that you can use to quickly determine the machine state of a specific device by using PowerShell or WMI.
-
-System Model and System SKU are variables that are stored in the System Management BIOS (SMBIOS) tables in the UEFI layer of Surface devices. The System SKU name is required to differentiate between devices that have the same System Model name, such as Surface Pro and Surface Pro with LTE Advanced.
-
-| Device | System Model | System SKU |
-| ---------- | ----------- | -------------- |
-| AMD Surface Laptop 3 | Surface 3 | Surface_Laptop_3_1873 |
-| Surface Laptop 3 | Surface 3 | Surface_Laptop_3_1867:1868 |
-| Surface Laptop 3 | Surface 3 | Surface_3
-| Surface 3 WiFI | Surface 3 | Surface_3 |
-| Surface 3 LTE AT&T | Surface 3 | Surface_3_US1 |
-| Surface 3 LTE Verizon | Surface 3 | Surface_3_US2 |
-| Surface 3 LTE North America | Surface 3 | Surface_3_NAG |
-| Surface 3 LTE Outside of North America and Y!mobile In Japan | Surface 3 | Surface_3_ROW |
-| Surface Pro | Surface Pro | Surface_Pro_1796 |
-| Surface Pro with LTE Advanced | Surface Pro | Surface_Pro_1807 |
-| Surface Book 2 13inch | Surface Book 2 | Surface_Book_1832 |
-| Surface Book 2 15inch | Surface Book 2 | Surface_Book_1793 |
-| Surface Go LTE Consumer | Surface Go | Surface_Go_1825_Consumer |
-| Surface Go LTE Commercial | System Go | Surface_Go_1825_Commercial |
-| Surface Go Consumer | Surface Go | Surface_Go_1824_Consumer |
-| Surface Go Commercial | Surface Go | Surface_Go_1824_Commercial |
-| Surface Pro 6 Consumer | Surface Pro 6 | Surface_Pro_6_1796_Consumer |
-| Surface Pro 6 Commercial | Surface Pro 6 | Surface_Pro_6_1796_Commercial |
-| Surface Laptop 2 Consumer | Surface Laptop 2 | Surface_Laptop_2_1769_Consumer |
-| Surface Laptop 2 Commercial | Surface Laptop 2 | Surface_Laptop_2_1769_Commercial |
-| Surface Pro 7 | Surface Pro 7 | Surface_Pro_7_1866 |
-| Surface Pro X | Surface Pro X | Surface_Pro_X_1876 |
-| Surface Laptop 3 13" Intel | Surface Laptop 3 | Surface_Laptop_3_1867:1868 |
-| Surface Laptop 3 15" Intel | Surface Laptop 3 | Surface_Laptop_3_1872 |
-| Surface Laptop 3 15" AMD | Surface Laptop 3 | Surface_Laptop_3_1873 |
-
-## Examples
-
-**Retrieving the SKU by using PowerShell**
-Use the following PowerShell command to pull the System SKU information:
-
- ``` powershell
-gwmi -namespace root\wmi -class MS_SystemInformation | select SystemSKU
-```
-
-**Retrieving the SKU by using System Information**
-You can also find the System SKU and System Model for a device in **System Information**. To do this, follow these steps:
-
-1. Select **Start**, and then type **MSInfo32** in the search box.
-1. Select **System Information**.
-
-**Using the SKU in a task sequence WMI condition**
-You can use the System SKU information in the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT) or System Center Configuration Manager as part of a task sequence WMI condition.
-
- ``` powershell
- - WMI Namespace – Root\WMI
- - WQL Query – SELECT * FROM MS_SystemInformation WHERE SystemSKU = "Surface_Pro_1796"
- ```
diff --git a/devices/surface/surface-wireless-connect.md b/devices/surface/surface-wireless-connect.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6e225137c2..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/surface-wireless-connect.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,84 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Optimize Wi-Fi connectivity for Surface devices
-description: This topic describes recommended Wi-Fi settings to ensure Surface devices stay connected in congested network environments and mobile scenarios.
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.audience: itpro
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 10/31/2019
-ms.reviewer: tokatz
-manager: dansimp
----
-# Optimize Wi-Fi connectivity for Surface devices
-
-
-To stay connected with all-day battery life, Surface devices implement wireless connectivity settings that balance performance and power conservation. Outside of the most demanding mobility scenarios, users can maintain sufficient wireless connectivity without modifying default network adapter or related settings.
-
-In congested network environments, organizations can implement purpose-built wireless protocols across multiple network access points to facilitate roaming. This page highlights key wireless connectivity considerations in mobile scenarios utilizing Surface Pro 3 and later, Surface Book, Surface Laptop, and Surface Go.
-
-## Prerequisites
-
-This document assumes you have successfully deployed a wireless network that supports 802.11n (Wi-Fi 4) or later in accordance with best practice recommendations from leading equipment vendors.
-
-## Configuring access points for optimal roaming capabilities
-
-If you’re managing a wireless network that’s typically accessed by many different types of client devices, it’s recommended to enable specific protocols on access points (APs) in your WLAN, as described in [Fast Roaming with 802.11k, 802.11v, and 802.11r](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows-hardware/drivers/network/fast-roaming-with-802-11k--802-11v--and-802-11r). Surface devices can take advantage of the following wireless protocols:
-
-- **802.11r.** “**Fast BSS Transition”** accelerates connecting to new wireless access points by reducing the number of frames required before your device can access another AP as you move around with your device.
-- **802.11k.** **“Neighbor Reports”** provides devices with information on current conditions at neighboring access points. It can help your Surface device choose the best AP using criteria other than signal strength such as AP utilization.
-
-Specific Surface devices can also use 802.11v “BSS Transition Management Frames,” which functions much like 802.11k in providing information on nearby candidate APs. These include Surface Go, Surface Pro 7, Surface Pro X, and Surface Laptop 3.
-
-## Managing user settings
-
-You can achieve optimal roaming capabilities through a well-designed network that supports 802.11r and 802.11k across all access points. Ensuring that your network is properly configured to provide users with the best wireless experience is the recommended approach versus attempting to manage user settings on individual devices. Moreover, in many corporate environments Surface device users won’t be able to access advanced network adapter settings without explicit permissions or local admin rights. In other lightly managed networks, users can benefit by knowing how specific settings can impact their ability to remain connected.
-
-### Recommended user settings and best practices
-
-In certain situations, modifying advanced network adapter settings built into Surface devices may facilitate a more reliable connection. Keep in mind however that an inability to connect to wireless resources is more often due to an access point issue, networking design flaw, or environmental site issue.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> How you hold your Surface Pro or Surface Go can also affect signal strength. If you’re experiencing a loss of bandwidth, check that you’re not holding the top of the display, where the Wi-Fi radio receiver is located. Although holding the top of the display does not block wireless signals, it can trigger the device driver to initiate changes that reduce connectivity.
-
-### Keep default Auto setting for dual bandwidth capability
-On most Surface devices, you can configure client network adapter settings to only connect to wireless APs over 5 gigahertz (GHz), only connect over 2.4 GHz, or let the operating system choose the best option (default Auto setting).
-
-**To access network adapter settings go to:**
-
-- **Start** > **Control panel** > **Network and Sharing Center** > **your Wi-Fi adapter** > **Properties** > **Configure** > **Advanced**.
-
-
-
-Keep in mind that 2.4 GHz has some advantages over 5 GHz: It extends further and more easily penetrates through walls or other solid objects. Unless you have a clear use case that warrants connecting to 5 GHz, it’s recommended to leave the Band setting in the default state to avoid possible adverse consequences. For example:
-
-
-- Many hotspots found in hotels, coffee shops, and airports still only use 2.4 GHz, effectively blocking access to devices if Band is set to 5 GHz Only.
-- Since Miracast wireless display connections require the initial handshake to be completed over 2.4 GHz channels, devices won’t be able to connect at 5 GHz Only.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> By default Surface devices will prefer connecting to 5 GHz if available. However, to preserve power in a low battery state, Surface will first look for a 2.4 GHz connection.
-
-You can also toggle the band setting as needed to suit your environment. For example, users living in high density apartment buildings with multiple Wi-Fi hotspots — amid the presence of consumer devices all broadcasting via 2.4 GHz — will likely benefit by setting their Surface device to connect on 5 GHz only and then revert to Auto when needed.
-
-### Roaming aggressiveness settings on Surface Go
-
-Front-line workers using Surface Go may wish to select a signal strength threshold that prompts the device to search for a new access point when signal strength drops (roaming aggressiveness). By default, Surface devices attempt to roam to a new access point if the signal strength drops below **Medium** (50 percent signal strength). Note that whenever you increase roaming aggressiveness, you accelerate battery power consumption.
-
-Leave the roaming aggressiveness setting in the default state unless you’re encountering connectivity issues in specific mobile scenarios such as conducting environmental site inspections while also maintaining voice and video connectivity during a conference meeting. If you don’t notice any improvement revert to the default **Medium** state.
-
-**To enable roaming aggressiveness on Surface Go:**
-
-1. Go to **Start > Control Panel** > **Network and Internet** > **Network and Sharing Center.**
-2. Under **Connections** select **Wi-Fi** and then select **Properties.**
-3. Select **Client for Microsoft Networks** and then select **Configure**
-4. Select **Advanced** > **Roaming Aggressiveness** and choose your preferred value from the drop-down menu.
-
-
-
-## Conclusion
-
-Surface devices are designed with default settings for optimal wireless connectivity balanced alongside the need to preserve battery life. The most effective way of enabling reliable connectivity for Surface devices is through a well-designed network that supports 802.11r and 802.11k. Users can adjust network adapter settings or roaming aggressiveness but should only do so in response to specific environmental factors and revert to default state if there’s no noticeable improvement.
diff --git a/devices/surface/unenroll-surface-devices-from-semm.md b/devices/surface/unenroll-surface-devices-from-semm.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 39b70f6006..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/unenroll-surface-devices-from-semm.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,159 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Unenroll Surface devices from SEMM (Surface)
-description: Learn how to unenroll a device from SEMM by using a Surface UEFI reset package or the Recovery Request option.
-keywords: surface enterprise management
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.pagetype: surface, devices, security
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 01/06/2017
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.audience: itpro
----
-
-# Unenroll Surface devices from SEMM
-
-When a Surface device is enrolled in Surface Enterprise Management Mode (SEMM), a certificate is stored in the firmware of that device. The presence of that certificate and the enrollment in SEMM prevent any unauthorized changes to Surface UEFI settings or options while the device is enrolled in SEMM. To restore control of Surface UEFI settings to the user, the Surface device must be unenrolled from SEMM, a process sometimes described as reset or recovery. There are two methods you can use to unenroll a device from SEMM—a Surface UEFI reset package and a Recovery Request.
-
->[!WARNING]
->To unenroll a device from SEMM and restore user control of Surface UEFI settings, you must have the SEMM certificate that was used to enroll the device in SEMM. If this certificate becomes lost or corrupted, it is not possible to unenroll from SEMM. Back up and protect your SEMM certificate accordingly.
-
-For more information about SEMM, see [Microsoft Surface Enterprise Management Mode](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface/surface-enterprise-management-mode).
-
-## Unenroll a Surface device from SEMM with a Surface UEFI reset package
-
-The Surface UEFI reset package is the primary method you use to unenroll a Surface device from SEMM. Like a Surface UEFI configuration package, the reset package is a Windows Installer (.msi) file that configures SEMM on the device. Unlike the configuration package, the reset package will reset the Surface UEFI configuration on a Surface device to its default settings, remove the SEMM certificate, and unenroll the device from SEMM.
-
-Reset packages are created specifically for an individual Surface device. To begin the process of creating a reset package, you will need the serial number of the device you want to unenroll, as well as the SEMM certificate used to enroll the device. You can find the serial number of your Surface device on the **PC information** page of Surface UEFI, as shown in Figure 1. This page is displayed even if Surface UEFI is password protected and the incorrect password is entered.
-
-
-
-*Figure 1. The serial number of the Surface device is displayed on the Surface UEFI PC information page*
-
->[!NOTE]
->To boot to Surface UEFI, press **Volume Up** and **Power** simultaneously while the device is off. Hold **Volume Up** until the Surface logo is displayed and the device begins to boot.
-
-To create a Surface UEFI reset package, follow these steps:
-
-1. Open Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator from the Start menu.
-2. Click **Start**.
-3. Click **Reset Package**, as shown in Figure 2.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 2. Click Reset Package to create a package to unenroll a Surface device from SEMM*
-
-4. Click **Certificate Protection** to add your SEMM certificate file with private key (.pfx), as shown in Figure 3. Browse to the location of your certificate file, select the file, and then click **OK**.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 3. Add the SEMM certificate to a Surface UEFI reset package*
-
-5. Click **Next**.
-6. Type the serial number of the device you want to unenroll from SEMM (as shown in Figure 4), and then click **Build** to generate the Surface UEFI reset package.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 4. Use the serial number of your Surface device to create a Surface UEFI reset package*
-
-7. In the **Save As** dialog box, specify a name for the Surface UEFI reset package, browse to the location where you would like to save the file, and then click **Save**.
-8. When the package generation has completed, the **Successful** page is displayed. Click **End** to complete package creation and close Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator.
-
-Run the Surface UEFI reset package Windows Installer (.msi) file on the Surface device to unenroll the device from SEMM. The reset package will require a reboot to perform the unenroll operation. After the device has been unenrolled, you can verify the successful removal by ensuring that the **Microsoft Surface Configuration Package** item in **Programs and Features** (shown in Figure 5) is no longer present.
-
-
-
-*Figure 5. The presence of the Microsoft Surface Configuration Package item in Programs and Features indicates that the device is enrolled in SEMM*
-
-## Unenroll a Surface device from SEMM with a Recovery Request
-
-In some scenarios, a Surface UEFI reset package may not be a viable option to unenroll a Surface device from SEMM (for example, where Windows has become unusable). In these scenarios you can unenroll the device by using a Recovery Request generated from within Surface UEFI. The Recovery Request process can be initiated even on devices where you do not have the Surface UEFI password.
-
-The Recovery Request process is initiated from Surface UEFI on the Surface device, approved with Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator on another computer, and then completed in Surface UEFI. Like the reset package, approving a Recovery Request with Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator requires access to the SEMM certificate that was used to enroll the Surface device.
-
-To initiate a Recovery Request, follow these steps:
-
-1. Boot the Surface device that is to be unenrolled from SEMM to Surface UEFI.
-2. Type the Surface UEFI password if you are prompted to do so.
-3. Click the **Enterprise management** page, as shown in Figure 6.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 6. The Enterprise management page is displayed in Surface UEFI on devices enrolled in SEMM*
-
-4. Click or press **Get Started**.
-5. Click or press **Next** to begin the Recovery Request process.
- >[!NOTE]
- >A Recovery Request expires two hours after it is created. If a Recovery Request is not completed in this time, you will have to restart the Recovery Request process.
-6. Select **SEMM Certificate** from the list of certificates displayed on the **Choose a SEMM reset key** page (shown in Figure 7), and then click or press **Next**.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 7. Choose SEMM Certificate for your Recovery Request (Reset Request)*
-
-7. On the **Enter SEMM reset verification code** page you can click the **QR Code** or **Text** buttons to display your Recovery Request (Reset Request) as shown in Figure 8, or the **USB** button to save your Recovery Request (Reset Request) as a file to a USB drive, as shown in Figure 9.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 8. A Recovery Request (Reset Request) displayed as a QR Code*
-
- 
-
- *Figure 9. Save a Recovery Request (Reset Request) to a USB drive*
-
- * To use a QR Code Recovery Request (Reset Request), use a QR reader app on a mobile device to read the code. The QR reader app will translate the QR code into an alphanumeric string. You can then email or message that string to the administrator that will produce the reset verification code with Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator.
- * To use a Recovery Request (Reset Request) saved to a USB drive as a file, use the USB drive to transfer the file to the computer where Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator will be used to produce the Reset Verification Code. The file can also be copied from the USB drive on another device to be emailed or transferred over the network.
- * To use the Recovery Request (Reset Request) as text, simply type the text directly into Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator.
-
-8. Open Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator from the Start menu on another computer.
- >[!NOTE]
- >Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator must run in an environment that is able to authenticate the certificate chain for the SEMM certificate.
-9. Click **Start**.
-10. Click **Recovery Request**, as shown in Figure 10.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 10. Click Recovery Request to begin the process to approve a Recovery Request*
-
-11. Click **Certificate Protection** to authenticate the Recovery Request with the SEMM certificate.
-12. Browse to and select your SEMM certificate file, and then click **OK**.
-13. When you are prompted to enter the certificate password as shown in Figure 11, type and confirm the password for the certificate file, and then click **OK**.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 11. Type the password for the SEMM certificate*
-
-14. Click **Next**.
-15. Enter the Recovery Request (Reset Request), and then click **Generate** to create a reset verification code (as shown in Figure 12).
-
- 
-
- *Figure 12. Enter the Recovery Request (Reset Request)*
-
- * If you displayed the Recovery Request (Reset Request) as text on the Surface device being reset, use the keyboard to type the Recovery Request (Reset Request) in the provided field.
- * If you displayed the Recovery Request (Reset Request) as a QR Code and then used a messaging or email application to send the code to the computer with Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator, copy and paste the code into the provided field.
- * If you saved the Recovery Request (Reset Request) as a file to a USB drive, click the **Import** button, browse to and select the Recovery Request (Reset Request) file, and then click **OK**.
-
-16. The reset verification code is displayed in Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator, as shown in Figure 13.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 13. The reset verification code displayed in Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator*
-
- * Click the **Share** button to send the reset verification code by email.
-
-17. Enter the reset verification code in the provided field on the Surface device (shown in Figure 8), and then click or press **Verify** to reset the device and unenroll the device from SEMM.
-18. Click or press **Restart now** on the **SEMM reset successful** page to complete the unenrollment from SEMM, as shown in Figure 14.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 14. Successful unenrollment from SEMM*
-
-19. Click **End** in Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator to complete the Recovery Request (Reset Request) process and close Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator.
-
-
diff --git a/devices/surface/upgrade-surface-devices-to-windows-10-with-mdt.md b/devices/surface/upgrade-surface-devices-to-windows-10-with-mdt.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ac6102c2ef..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/upgrade-surface-devices-to-windows-10-with-mdt.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,253 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Upgrade Surface devices to Windows 10 with Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (Surface)
-description: Find out how to perform a Windows 10 upgrade deployment to your Surface devices.
-keywords: windows 10 surface, upgrade, customize, mdt
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.pagetype: surface
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.audience: itpro
-ms.date: 10/21/2019
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
----
-
-# Upgrade Surface devices to Windows 10 with Microsoft Deployment Toolkit
-
-#### Applies to
-- Surface Pro 6
-- Surface Laptop 2
-- Surface Go
-- Surface Go with LTE
-- Surface Book 2
-- Surface Pro with LTE Advanced (Model 1807)
-- Surface Pro (Model 1796)
-- Surface Laptop
-- Surface Studio
-- Surface Studio 2
-- Surface Book
-- Surface Pro 4
-- Surface 3 LTE
-- Surface 3
-- Surface Pro 3
-- Surface Pro 2
-- Surface Pro
-- Windows 10
-
-In addition to the traditional deployment method of reimaging devices, administrators that want to upgrade Surface devices that are running Windows 8.1 or Windows 10 have the option of deploying upgrades. By performing an upgrade deployment, Windows 10 can be applied to devices without removing users, apps, or configuration. The users of the deployed devices can simply continue using the devices with the same apps and settings that they used prior to the upgrade. The process described in this article shows how to perform a Windows 10 upgrade deployment to Surface devices.
-
-If you are not already familiar with the deployment of Windows or the Microsoft deployment tools and technologies, you should read [Deploy Windows 10 to Surface devices with MDT](deploy-windows-10-to-surface-devices-with-mdt.md) and familiarize yourself with the traditional deployment method before you proceed.
-
-#### The upgrade concept
-
-When you use the factory installation media to install Windows on a device, you are presented with two options or *installation paths* to install Windows on that device. The first of these installation paths – *clean installation* – allows you to apply a factory image of Windows to that device, including all default settings. The second of these installation paths – *upgrade* – allows you to apply Windows to the device but retains the device’s users, apps, and settings.
-
-When you perform a Windows deployment using traditional deployment methods, you follow an installation path that is very similar to a clean installation. The primary difference between the clean installation and the traditional deployment method of *reimaging* is that with reimaging, you can apply an image that includes customizations. Microsoft deployment technologies, such as the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT), expand the capabilities of the reimaging process by modifying the image during deployment. For example, MDT is able to inject drivers for a specific hardware configuration during deployment, and with pre and post imaging scripts to perform a number of tasks, such as the installation of applications.
-
-For versions of Windows prior to Windows 10, if you wanted to install a new version of Windows on your devices and preserve the configuration of those systems, you had to perform additional steps during your deployment. For example, if you wanted to keep the data of users on the device, you had to back up user data with the User State Migration Tool (USMT) prior to the deployment and restore that data after the deployment had completed.
-
-Introduced with Windows 10 and MDT 2013 Update 1, you can use the upgrade installation path directly with Microsoft deployment technologies such as the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT). With an upgrade deployment you can use the same deployment technologies and process, but you can preserve users settings, and applications of the existing environment on the device.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> MDT is not supported on Surface Pro X. For more information, refer to [Deploying, managing, and servicing Surface Pro X](surface-pro-arm-app-management.md)
-
-## Deployment tools and resources
-
-Performing an upgrade deployment of Windows 10 requires the same tools and resources that are required for a traditional reimaging deployment. You can read about the tools required, including detailed explanations and installation instructions, in [Deploy Windows 10 to Surface devices with MDT](deploy-windows-10-to-surface-devices-with-mdt.md). To proceed with the upgrade deployment described in this article, you will need the following tools installed and configured:
-
-* [Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT)](https://technet.microsoft.com/windows/dn475741)
-* [Windows Assessment and Deployment Kit (Windows ADK)](https://developer.microsoft.com/windows/hardware/windows-assessment-deployment-kit#windowsadk), which includes:
- * Deployment Image Servicing and Management (DISM)
- * Windows Preinstallation Environment (Windows PE)
- * Windows System Image Manager (Windows SIM)
-
-You will also need to have available the following resources:
-
-* Windows 10 installation files, such as the installation media downloaded from the [Volume Licensing Service Center](https://www.microsoft.com/Licensing/servicecenter/default.aspx)
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >Installation media for use with MDT must contain a Windows image in Windows Imaging Format (.wim). Installation media produced by the [Get Windows 10](https://www.microsoft.com/software-download/windows10/) page does not use a .wim file, instead using an Electronic Software Download (.esd) file, which is not compatible with MDT.
-* [Surface firmware and drivers](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface/deploy-the-latest-firmware-and-drivers-for-surface-devices) for Windows 10
-
-* Application installation files for any applications you want to install, such as the Surface app
-
-## Prepare the upgrade deployment
-
-Before you begin the process described in this section, you need to have installed and configured the deployment tools outlined in the previous [Deployment tools and resources](#deployment-tools-and-resources) section. For instructions on how to install and configure the deployment tools, see the **Install the deployment tools** section in the [Deploy Windows 10 to Surface devices with MDT](deploy-windows-10-to-surface-devices-with-mdt.md#install-the-deployment-tools) article. You will also have needed to create a deployment share with MDT, described in the section Create a Deployment Share in the aforementioned article.
-
-### Import Windows 10 installation files
-
-Windows 10 installation files only need to be imported if you have not already done so in the deployment share. To import Windows 10 installation files, follow the steps described in the **Import Windows installation files** section in the [Deploy Windows 10 to Surface devices with MDT](deploy-windows-10-to-surface-devices-with-mdt.md#import-windows-installation-files) article.
-
-### Import Surface drivers
-In the import process example shown in the [Deploy Windows 10 to Surface devices with MDT](deploy-windows-10-to-surface-devices-with-mdt.md) article, drivers for Surface Pro 4 were imported for Windows 10. To perform an upgrade deployment of Windows 10 to Surface Pro 3, drivers for Surface Pro 3 must also be imported. To import the Surface drivers for Surface Pro 3, follow these steps:
-
-1. Download the Surface Pro 3 firmware and driver pack for Windows 10 archive file (.zip), SurfacePro3_Win10_xxxxxx.zip, from the [Surface Pro 3 download page](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=38826) in the Microsoft Download Center.
-2. Extract the contents of the Surface Pro 3 firmware and driver pack archive file to a temporary folder. Keep the driver files separate from other drivers or files.
-3. Open the Deployment Workbench and expand the Deployment Shares node and your deployment share.
-4. If you have not already created a folder structure by operating system version, you should do so next. Under the **Windows 10 x64** folder, create a new folder for Surface Pro 3 drivers named **Surface Pro 3**. Your Out-of-Box Drivers folder should resemble the following structure:
- * WinPE x86
- * WinPE x64
- * Windows 10 x64
- * Microsoft Corporation
- * Surface Pro 4
- * Surface Pro 3
-5. Right-click the **Surface Pro 3** folder, and then click **Import Drivers** to start the Import Drivers Wizard, as shown in Figure 1.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 1. Import Surface Pro 3 drivers for Windows 10*
-
-6. The Import Driver Wizard displays a series of steps, as follows:
- - **Specify Directory** – Click **Browse** and navigate to the folder where you extracted the Surface Pro 3 firmware and drivers in Step 1.
- - **Summary** – Review the specified configuration on this page before you click **Next** to begin the import process.
- - **Progress** – While the drivers are imported, a progress bar is displayed on this page.
- - **Confirmation** – When the import process completes, the success of the process is displayed on this page. Click **Finish** to complete Import Drivers Wizard.
-7. Select the **Surface Pro 3** folder and verify that the folder now contains the drivers that were imported, as shown in Figure 2.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 2. Drivers for Surface Pro 3 imported and organized in the MDT deployment share*
-
-### Import applications
-
-Installation of applications in an upgrade deployment is not always necessary because the applications from the previous environment will remain on the device. (For example, in the [Deploy Windows 10 to Surface devices with MDT](deploy-windows-10-to-surface-devices-with-mdt.md) article, the deployment includes Office 365 which is not required in an upgrade deployment where the user is already using Office 365 on the device.)
-
-There are still some circumstances where you will want to deploy an application, even during an upgrade deployment. For example, you may have Surface Pro 3 devices on which you would like to add the Surface app. To deploy the Surface app in an upgrade scenario use the same process as you would for a traditional deployment. See the [Deploy Surface app with Microsoft Store for Business](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface/deploy-surface-app-with-windows-store-for-business) article for instructions on how to add the Surface app to an MDT task sequence.
-
-### Create the upgrade task sequence
-
-After you have all of the resources in place to perform the deployment (including the installation files, Surface drivers, and application files), the next step is to create the upgrade task sequence. This task sequence is a series of steps that will be performed on the device being upgraded that applies the new Windows environment, compatible drivers, and any applications you have specified.
-
-Create the upgrade task sequence with the following process:
-
-1. In the Deployment Workbench under your Deployment Share, right-click the **Task Sequences** folder, and then click **New Task Sequence** to start the New Task Sequence Wizard.
-2. Use these steps to create the deployment task sequence with the New Task Sequence Wizard:
- - **General Settings** – Enter an identifier for the deployment task sequence in the Task Sequence ID field, a name for the deployment task sequence in the Task Sequence Name field, and any comments for the deployment task sequence in the **Task Sequence Comments** field, and then click **Next**.
- >[!NOTE]
- >The **Task Sequence ID** field cannot contain spaces and can be a maximum of 16 characters.
- - **Select Template** – Select **Standard Client Upgrade Task Sequence** from the drop-down menu, and then click **Next**.
- - **Select OS** – Navigate to and select the Windows image that you imported, and then click **Next**.
- - **Specify Product Key** – Select the product key entry that fits your organization’s licensing system. The **Do Not Specify a Product Key at This Time** option can be used for systems that will be activated via Key Management Services (KMS) or Active Directory Based Activation (ADBA). A product key can be specified specifically if your organization uses Multiple Activation Keys (MAK). Click **Next**.
- - **OS Settings** – Enter a name and organization for registration of Windows, and a home page URL for users when they browse the Internet in the **Full Name**, **Organization**, and **Internet Explorer Home Page** fields, and then click **Next**.
- - **Admin Password** – Select **Use the Specified Local Administrator Password** and enter a password in the provided fields, and then click **Next**.
- - **Summary** – Review the specified configuration on this page before you click **Next** to begin creation of the task sequence.
- - **Progress** – While the task sequence is being created, a progress bar is displayed on this page.
- - **Confirmation** – When the task sequence creation completes, the success of the process is displayed on this page. Click **Finish** to complete New Task Sequence Wizard.
-
-After the task sequence is created, you can modify some additional settings to provide additional automation of the task sequence and require less interaction during deployment. Follow these steps to modify the task sequence:
-
-1. Select the **Task Sequences** folder, right-click the new task sequence you created, and then click **Properties**.
-2. Select the **Task Sequence** tab to view the steps that are included in the new task sequence.
-3. Select the **Windows Update (Pre-Application Installation)** step, located under the **State Restore** folder.
-4. Click the **Options** tab, and then clear the **Disable This Step** check box.
-5. Repeat Step 3 and Step 4 for the **Windows Update (Post-Application Installation)** step.
-6. Between the two Windows Update steps is an **Install Applications** step. Select that step and then click **Add**.
-7. Hover the mouse over **General** under the **Add** menu, and then choose **Install Application**. This will add a new step after the selected step for the installation of a specific application as shown in Figure 3.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 3. A new Install Application step in the deployment task sequence*
-
-8. On the **Properties** tab of the new **Install Application** step, enter **Install Surface App** in the **Name** field.
-9. Select **Install a Single Application**, and then click **Browse** to view available applications that have been imported into the deployment share.
-10. Select **Surface App** from the list of applications, and then click **OK**.
-11. Expand the **Preinstall** folder and select the **Enable BitLocker (Offline)** step.
-12. Open the **Add** menu again and choose **Set Task Sequence Variable** from under the **General** menu.
-13. On the **Properties** tab of the new **Set Task Sequence Variable** step (as shown in Figure 4) configure the following options:
-
- - **Name** – Set DriverGroup001
- - **Task Sequence Variable** – DriverGroup001
- - **Value** – Windows 10 x64\%Make%\%Model%
-
- 
-
- *Figure 4. Configure a new Set Task Sequence Variable step in the deployment task sequence*
-
-14. Select the **Inject Drivers** step, the next step in the task sequence.
-15. On the **Properties** tab of the **Inject Drivers** step (as shown in Figure 5) configure the following options:
- * In the **Choose a selection profile** drop-down menu, select **Nothing**.
- * Click the **Install all drivers from the selection profile** button.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 5. Configure the deployment task sequence to not install drivers*
-
-16. Click **OK** to apply changes to the task sequence and close the task sequence properties window.
-
-Steps 11 through 15 are very important to the deployment of Surface devices. These steps instruct the task sequence to install only drivers that are organized into the correct folder using the organization for drivers from the [Import Surface drivers](#import-surface-drivers) section.
-
-### Deployment share rules
-
-To automate the upgrade process, the rules of the MDT deployment share need to be modified to suppress prompts for information from the user. Unlike a traditional deployment, Bootstrap.ini does not need to be modified because the deployment process is not started from boot media. Similarly, boot media does not need to be imported into WDS because it will not be booted over the network with PXE.
-
-To modify the deployment share rules and suppress the Windows Deployment Wizard prompts for information, copy and paste the following text into the text box on the **Rules** tab of your deployment share properties:
-
-```
-[Settings]
-Priority=Model,Default
-Properties=MyCustomProperty
-
-[Surface Pro 4]
-SkipTaskSequence=YES
-TaskSequenceID=Win10SP4
-
-[Surface Pro 3]
-SkipTaskSequence=YES
-TaskSequenceID=Win10SP3Up
-
-[Default]
-OSInstall=Y
-SkipCapture=YES
-SkipAdminPassword=YES
-SkipProductKey=YES
-SkipComputerBackup=YES
-SkipBitLocker=YES
-SkipBDDWelcome=YES
-SkipUserData=YES
-UserDataLocation=AUTO
-SkipApplications=YES
-SkipPackageDisplay=YES
-SkipComputerName=YES
-SkipDomainMembership=YES
-JoinDomain=contoso.com
-DomainAdmin=MDT
-DomainAdminDomain=contoso
-DomainAdminPassword=P@ssw0rd
-SkipLocaleSelection=YES
-KeyboardLocale=en-US
-UserLocale=en-US
-UILanguage=en-US
-SkipTimeZone=YES
-TimeZoneName=Pacific Standard Time
-UserID=MDTUser
-UserDomain=STNDeployServer
-UserPassword=P@ssw0rd
-SkipSummary=YES
-SkipFinalSummary=YES
-FinishAction=LOGOFF
-```
-
-
-
-For more information about the rules configured by this text, see the **Configure deployment share rules** section in the [Deploy Windows 10 to Surface devices with MDT](deploy-windows-10-to-surface-devices-with-mdt.md#configure-deployment-share-rules) article.
-
-### Update deployment share
-
-To update the deployment share, right-click the deployment share in the Deployment Workbench and click **Update Deployment Share**, then proceed through the Update Deployment Share Wizard. See the **Update and import updated MDT boot media** section of the [Deploy Windows 10 to Surface devices with MDT](deploy-windows-10-to-surface-devices-with-mdt.md#update-and-import-updated-mdt-boot-media) article for detailed steps.
-
-### Run the upgrade deployment
-
-Unlike a traditional deployment, the upgrade task sequence must be launched from within the Windows environment that will be upgraded. This requires that a user on the device to be upgraded navigate to the deployment share over the network and launch a script, LiteTouch.vbs. This script is the same script that displays the Windows Deployment Wizard in Windows PE in a traditional deployment. In this scenario, Litetouch.vbs will run within Windows. To perform the upgrade task sequence and deploy the upgrade to Windows 10 follow these steps:
-
-1. Browse to the network location of your deployment share in File Explorer.
-2. Navigate to the **Scripts** folder, locate **LiteTouch.vbs**, and then double-click **LiteTouch.vbs** to start the Windows Deployment Wizard.
-3. Enter your credentials when prompted.
-4. The upgrade task sequence for Surface Pro 3 devices will automatically start when the model of the device is detected and determined to match the deployment share rules.
-5. The upgrade process will occur automatically and without user interaction.
-
-The task sequence will automatically install the drivers for Surface Pro 3 and the Surface app, and will perform any outstanding Windows Updates. When it completes, it will log out and be ready for the user to log on with the credentials they have always used for this device.
diff --git a/devices/surface/use-system-center-configuration-manager-to-manage-devices-with-semm.md b/devices/surface/use-system-center-configuration-manager-to-manage-devices-with-semm.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 09000265e6..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/use-system-center-configuration-manager-to-manage-devices-with-semm.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,538 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Use Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager to manage devices with SEMM (Surface)
-description: Learn how to manage Microsoft Surface Enterprise Management Mode (SEMM) with Endpoint Configuration Manager.
-keywords: enroll, update, scripts, settings
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.pagetype: surface, devices
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 11/22/2019
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.audience: itpro
----
-
-# Use Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager to manage devices with SEMM
-
-The Microsoft Surface Enterprise Management Mode (SEMM) feature of Surface UEFI devices lets administrators manage and help secure the configuration of Surface UEFI settings. For most organizations, this process is accomplished by creating Windows Installer (.msi) packages with the Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator tool. These packages are then run or deployed to the client Surface devices to enroll the devices in SEMM and to update the Surface UEFI settings configuration.
-
-For organizations with Endpoint Configuration Manager (formerly known as System Center Configuration Manager or SCCM), there is an alternative to using the Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator .msi process to deploy and administer SEMM. Microsoft Surface UEFI Manager is a lightweight installer that makes required assemblies for SEMM management available on a device. By installing these assemblies with Microsoft Surface UEFI Manager on a managed client, SEMM can be administered by Configuration Manager with PowerShell scripts, deployed as applications. With this process, SEMM management is performed within Configuration Manager, which eliminates the need for the external Microsoft Surface UEFI Configurator tool.
-
-> [!Note]
-> Although the process described in this article may work with earlier versions of Endpoint Configuration Manager or with other third-party management solutions, management of SEMM with Microsoft Surface UEFI Manager and PowerShell is supported only with the Current Branch of Endpoint Configuration Manager.
-
-#### Prerequisites
-
-Before you begin the process outlined in this article, familiarize yourself with the following technologies and tools:
-
-* [Surface UEFI](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface/manage-surface-uefi-settings)
-* [Surface Enterprise Management Mode (SEMM)](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface/surface-enterprise-management-mode)
-* [PowerShell scripting](https://technet.microsoft.com/scriptcenter/dd742419)
-* [System Center Configuration Manager application deployment](https://docs.microsoft.com/sccm/apps/deploy-use/deploy-applications)
-* Certificate management
-
-> [!Note]
-> You will also need access to the certificate that you intend to use to secure SEMM. For details about the requirements for this certificate, see [Surface Enterprise Management Mode certificate requirements](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface/surface-enterprise-management-mode#surface-enterprise-management-mode-certificate-requirements).
->
-> It is very important that this certificate be kept in a safe location and properly backed up. If this certificate becomes lost or unusable, it is not possible to reset Surface UEFI, change managed Surface UEFI settings, or remove SEMM from an enrolled Surface device.
-
-#### Download Microsoft Surface UEFI Manager
-
-Management of SEMM with Configuration Manager requires the installation of Microsoft Surface UEFI Manager on each client Surface device. You can download Microsoft Surface UEFI Manager (SurfaceUEFIManager.msi) from the [Surface Tools for IT](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=46703) page on the Microsoft Download Center.
-
-#### Download SEMM scripts for Configuration Manager
-
-After Microsoft Surface UEFI Manager is installed on the client Surface device, SEMM is deployed and managed with PowerShell scripts. You can download samples of the [SEMM management scripts](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=46703) from the Download Center.
-
-## Deploy Microsoft Surface UEFI Manager
-
-Deployment of Microsoft Surface UEFI Manager is a typical application deployment. The Microsoft Surface UEFI Manager installer file is a standard Windows Installer file that you can install with the [standard quiet option](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/desktop/aa367988).
-
-The command to install Microsoft Surface UEFI Manager is as follows.
-
-`msiexec /i "SurfaceUEFIManagerSetup.msi" /q`
-
-The command to uninstall Microsoft Surface UEFI Manager is as follows.
-
-`msiexec /x {541DA890-1AEB-446D-B3FD-D5B3BB18F9AF} /q`
-
-To create a new application and deploy it to a collection that contains your Surface devices, perform the following steps:
-
-1. Open Configuration Manager Console from the **Start** screen or **Start** menu.
-2. Select **Software Library** in the bottom left corner of the window.
-3. Expand the **Application Management** node of the Software Library, and then select **Applications**.
-4. Select the **Create Application** button under the **Home** tab at the top of the window. This starts the Create Application Wizard.
-5. The Create Application Wizard presents a series of steps:
-
- * **General** – The **Automatically detect information about this application from installation files** option is selected by default. In the **Type** field, **Windows Installer (.msi file)** is also selected by default. Select **Browse** to navigate to and select **SurfaceUEFIManagerSetup.msi**, and then select **Next**.
-
- > [!Note]
- > The location of SurfaceUEFIManagerSetup.msi must be on a network share and located in a folder that contains no other files. A local file location cannot be used.
-
- * **Import Information** – The Create Application Wizard will parse the .msi file and read the **Application Name** and **Product Code**. SurfaceUEFIManagerSetup.msi should be listed as the only file under the line **Content Files**, as shown in Figure 1. Select **Next** to proceed.
-
-
- 
-
- *Figure 1. Information from Microsoft Surface UEFI Manager setup is automatically parsed*
-
- * **General Information** – You can modify the name of the application and information about the publisher and version, or add comments on this page. The installation command for Microsoft Surface UEFI Manager is displayed in the Installation Program field. The default installation behavior of Install for system will allow Microsoft Surface UEFI Manager to install the required assemblies for SEMM even if a user is not logged on to the Surface device. Select **Next** to proceed.
- * **Summary** – The information that was parsed in the **Import Information** step and your selections from the **General Information** step is displayed on this page. Select **Next** to confirm your selections and create the application.
- * **Progress** – Displays a progress bar and status as the application is imported and added to the Software Library.
- * **Completion** – Confirmation of the successful application creation is displayed when the application creation process is complete. Select **Close** to finish the Create Application Wizard.
-
-After the application is created in Configuration Manager, you can distribute it to your distribution points and deploy it to the collections including your Surface devices. This application will not install or enable SEMM on the Surface device. It only provides the assemblies required for SEMM to be enabled using the PowerShell script.
-
-If you do not want to install the Microsoft Surface UEFI Manager assemblies on devices that will not be managed with SEMM, you can configure Microsoft Surface UEFI Manager as a dependency of the SEMM Configuration Manager scripts. This scenario is covered in the [Deploy SEMM Configuration Manager Scripts](#deploy-semm-configuration-manager-scripts) section later in this article.
-
-## Create or modify the SEMM Configuration Manager scripts
-
-After the required assemblies have been installed on the devices, the process of enrolling the devices in SEMM and configuring Surface UEFI is done with PowerShell scripts and deployed as a script application with Configuration Manager. These scripts can be modified to fit the needs of your organization and environment. For example, you can create multiple configurations for managed Surface devices in different departments or roles. You can download samples of the scripts for SEMM and Configuration Manager from the link in the [Prerequisites](#prerequisites) section at the beginning of this article.
-
-There are two primary scripts you will need in order to perform a SEMM deployment with Configuration Manager:
-
-* **ConfigureSEMM.ps1** – Use this script to create configuration packages for your Surface devices with your desired Surface UEFI settings to apply the specified settings to a Surface device, to enroll the device in SEMM, and to set a registry key used to identify the enrollment of the device in SEMM.
-* **ResetSEMM.ps1** – Use this script to reset SEMM on a Surface device, which unenrolls it from SEMM and removes the control over Surface UEFI settings.
-
-The sample scripts include examples of how to set Surface UEFI settings and how to control permissions to those settings. These settings can be modified to secure Surface UEFI and set Surface UEFI settings according to the needs of your environment. The following sections of this article explain the ConfigureSEMM.ps1 script and explore the modifications you need to make to the script to fit your requirements.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> The SEMM Configuration Manager scripts and the exported SEMM certificate file (.pfx) should be placed in the same folder with no other files before they are added to Configuration Manager.
-
-### Specify certificate and package names
-
-The first region of the script that you need to modify is the portion that specifies and loads the SEMM certificate, and also indicates SurfaceUEFIManager version, and the names for the SEMM configuration package and SEMM reset package. The certificate name and SurfaceUEFIManager version are specified on lines 56 through 73 in the ConfigureSEMM.ps1 script.
-
- ```
- 56 $WorkingDirPath = split-path -parent $MyInvocation.MyCommand.Definition
- 57 $packageRoot = "$WorkingDirPath\Config"
- 58 $certName = "FabrikamSEMMSample.pfx"
- 59 $DllVersion = "2.26.136.0"
- 60
- 61 $certNameOnly = [System.IO.Path]::GetFileNameWithoutExtension($certName)
- 62 $ProvisioningPackage = $certNameOnly + "ProvisioningPackage.pkg"
- 63 $ResetPackage = $certNameOnly + "ResetPackage.pkg"
- 64
- 65 if (-not (Test-Path $packageRoot)) { New-Item -ItemType Directory -Force -Path $packageRoot }
- 66 Copy-Item "$WorkingDirPath\$certName" $packageRoot
- 67
- 68 $privateOwnerKey = Join-Path -Path $packageRoot -ChildPath $certName
- 69 $ownerPackageName = Join-Path -Path $packageRoot -ChildPath $ProvisioningPackage
- 70 $resetPackageName = Join-Path -Path $packageRoot -ChildPath $ResetPackage
- 71
- 72 # If your PFX file requires a password then it can be set here, otherwise use a blank string.
- 73 $password = "1234"
- ```
-
-Replace the **FabrikamSEMMSample.pfx** value for the **$certName** variable with the name of your SEMM Certificate file on line 58. The script will create a working directory (named Config) in the folder where your scripts are located, and then copies the certificate file to this working directory.
-
-Owner package and reset package will also be created in the Config directory and hold the configuration for Surface UEFI settings and permissions generated by the script.
-
-On line 73, replace the value of the **$password** variable, from **1234** to the password for your certificate file. If a password is not required, delete the **1234** text.
-
-> [!Note]
-> The last two characters of the certificate thumbprint are required to enroll a device in SEMM. This script will display these digits to the user, which allows the user or technician to record these digits before the system reboots to enroll the device in SEMM. The script uses the following code, found on lines 150-155, to accomplish this.
-
-```
-150 # Device owners will need the last two characters of the thumbprint to accept SEMM ownership.
-151 # For convenience we get the thumbprint here and present to the user.
-152 $pw = ConvertTo-SecureString $password -AsPlainText -Force
-153 $certPrint = New-Object System.Security.Cryptography.X509Certificates.X509Certificate2
-154 $certPrint.Import($privateOwnerKey, $pw, [System.Security.Cryptography.X509Certificates.X509KeyStorageFlags]::DefaultKeySet)
-155 Write-Host "Thumbprint =" $certPrint.Thumbprint
-```
-
-Administrators with access to the certificate file (.pfx) can read the thumbprint at any time by opening the .pfx file in CertMgr. To view the thumbprint with CertMgr, follow this process:
-
-1. Right-click the .pfx file, and then select **Open**.
-2. Expand the folder in the navigation pane.
-3. Select **Certificates**.
-4. Right-click your certificate in the main pane, and then select **Open**.
-5. Select the **Details** tab.
-6. **All** or **Properties Only** must be selected in the **Show** drop-down menu.
-7. Select the field **Thumbprint**.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> The SEMM certificate name and password must also be entered in this section of the ResetSEMM.ps1 script to enable Configuration Manager to remove SEMM from the device with the uninstall action.
-
-### Configure permissions
-
-The first region of the script where you will specify the configuration for Surface UEFI is the **Configure Permissions** region. This region begins at line 210 in the sample script with the comment **# Configure Permissions** and continues to line 247. The following code fragment first sets permissions to all Surface UEFI settings so that they may be modified by SEMM only, then adds explicit permissions to allow the local user to modify the Surface UEFI password, TPM, and front and rear cameras.
-
-```
-210 # Configure Permissions
-211 foreach ($uefiV2 IN $surfaceDevices.Values) {
-212 if ($uefiV2.SurfaceUefiFamily -eq $Device.Model) {
-213 Write-Host "Configuring permissions"
-214 Write-Host $Device.Model
-215 Write-Host "======================="
-216
-217 # Here we define which "identities" will be allowed to modify which settings
-218 # PermissionSignerOwner = The primary SEMM enterprise owner identity
-219 # PermissionLocal = The user when booting to the UEFI pre-boot GUI
-220 # PermissionSignerUser, PermissionSignerUser1, PermissionSignerUser2 =
-221 # Additional user identities created so that the signer owner
-222 # can delegate permission control for some settings.
-223 $ownerOnly = [Microsoft.Surface.IUefiSetting]::PermissionSignerOwner
-224 $ownerAndLocalUser = ([Microsoft.Surface.IUefiSetting]::PermissionSignerOwner -bor [Microsoft.Surface.IUefiSetting]::PermissionLocal)
-225
-226 # Make all permissions owner only by default
-227 foreach ($setting IN $uefiV2.Settings.Values) {
-228 $setting.ConfiguredPermissionFlags = $ownerOnly
-229 }
-230
-231 # Allow the local user to change their own password
-232 $uefiV2.SettingsById[501].ConfiguredPermissionFlags = $ownerAndLocalUser
-233
-234 Write-Host ""
-235
-236 # Create a unique package name based on family and LSV.
-237 # We will choose a name that can be parsed by later scripts.
-238 $packageName = $uefiV2.SurfaceUefiFamily + "^Permissions^" + $lsv + ".pkg"
-239 $fullPackageName = Join-Path -Path $packageRoot -ChildPath $packageName
-240
-241 # Build and sign the Permission package then save it to a file.
-242 $permissionPackageStream = $uefiV2.BuildAndSignPermissionPackage($privateOwnerKey, $password, "", $null, $lsv)
-243 $permissionPackage = New-Object System.IO.Filestream($fullPackageName, [System.IO.FileMode]::CreateNew, [System.IO.FileAccess]::Write)
-244 $permissionPackageStream.CopyTo($permissionPackage)
-245 $permissionPackage.Close()
-246 }
-247 }
-```
-
-Each **$uefiV2** variable identifies a Surface UEFI setting by setting name or ID, and then configures the permissions to one of the following values:
-
-* **$ownerOnly** – Permission to modify this setting is granted only to SEMM.
-* **$ownerAndLocalUser** – Permission to modify this setting is granted to a local user booting to Surface UEFI, as well as to SEMM.
-
-You can find information about the available settings names and IDs for Surface UEFI in the [Settings Names and IDs](#settings-names-and-ids) section of this article.
-
-### Configure settings
-
-The second region of the script where you will specify the configuration for Surface UEFI is the **Configure Settings** region of the ConfigureSEMM.ps1 script, which configures whether each setting is enabled or disabled. The sample script includes instructions to set all settings to their default values. The script then provides explicit instructions to disable IPv6 for PXE Boot and to leave the Surface UEFI Administrator password unchanged. You can find this region beginning with the **# Configure Settings** comment at line 291 through line 335 in the sample script. The region appears as follows.
-
-```
-291 # Configure Settings
-292 foreach ($uefiV2 IN $surfaceDevices.Values) {
-293 if ($uefiV2.SurfaceUefiFamily -eq $Device.Model) {
-294 Write-Host "Configuring settings"
-295 Write-Host $Device.Model
-296 Write-Host "===================="
-297
-298 # In this demo, we will start by setting every setting to the default factory setting.
-299 # You may want to start by doing this in your scripts
-300 # so that every setting gets set to a known state.
-301 foreach ($setting IN $uefiV2.Settings.Values) {
-302 $setting.ConfiguredValue = $setting.DefaultValue
-303 }
-304
-305 $EnabledValue = "Enabled"
-306 $DisabledValue = "Disabled"
-307
-308 # If you want to set something to a different value from the default,
-309 # here are examples of how to accomplish this.
-310 # This disables IPv6 PXE boot by name:
-311 $uefiV2.Settings["IPv6 for PXE Boot"].ConfiguredValue = $DisabledValue
-312
-313 # This disables IPv6 PXE Boot by ID:
-314 $uefiV2.SettingsById[400].ConfiguredValue = $DisabledValue
-315
-316 Write-Host ""
-317
-318 # If you want to leave the setting unmodified, set it to $null
-319 # PowerShell has issues setting things to $null so ClearConfiguredValue()
-320 # is supplied to do this explicitly.
-321 # Here is an example of leaving the UEFI administrator password as-is,
-322 # even after we initially set it to factory default above.
-323 $uefiV2.SettingsById[501].ClearConfiguredValue()
-324
-325 # Create a unique package name based on family and LSV.
-326 # We will choose a name that can be parsed by later scripts.
-327 $packageName = $uefiV2.SurfaceUefiFamily + "^Settings^" + $lsv + ".pkg"
-328 $fullPackageName = Join-Path -Path $packageRoot -ChildPath $packageName
-329
-330 # Build and sign the Settings package then save it to a file.
-331 $settingsPackageStream = $uefiV2.BuildAndSignSecuredSettingsPackage($privateOwnerKey, $password, "", $null, $lsv)
-332 $settingsPackage = New-Object System.IO.Filestream($fullPackageName, [System.IO.FileMode]::CreateNew, [System.IO.FileAccess]::Write)
-333 $settingsPackageStream.CopyTo($settingsPackage)
-334 $settingsPackage.Close()
-335 }
-```
-
-Like the permissions set in the **Configure Permissions** section of the script, the configuration of each Surface UEFI setting is performed by defining the **$uefiV2** variable. For each line defining the **$uefiV2** variable, a Surface UEFI setting is identified by setting name or ID and the configured value is set to **Enabled** or **Disabled**.
-
-If you do not want to alter the configuration of a Surface UEFI setting, for example to ensure that the Surface UEFI administrator password is not cleared by the action of resetting all Surface UEFI settings to their default, you can use **ClearConfiguredValue()** to enforce that this setting will not be altered. In the sample script, this is used on line 323 to prevent the clearing of the Surface UEFI Administrator password, identified in the sample script by its setting ID, **501**.
-
-You can find information about the available settings names and IDs for Surface UEFI in the [Settings Names and IDs](#settings-names-and-ids) section later in this article.
-
-### Settings registry key
-
-To identify enrolled systems for Configuration Manager, the ConfigureSEMM.ps1 script writes registry keys that can be used to identify enrolled systems as having been installed with the SEMM configuration script. These keys can be found at the following location.
-
-`HKLM\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Surface\SEMM`
-
-The following code fragment, found on lines 380-477, is used to write these registry keys.
-
-```
-380 # For Endpoint Configuration Manager or other management solutions that wish to know what version is applied, tattoo the LSV and current DateTime (in UTC) to the registry:
-381 $UTCDate = (Get-Date).ToUniversalTime().ToString()
-382 $certIssuer = $certPrint.Issuer
-383 $certSubject = $certPrint.Subject
-384
-385 $SurfaceRegKey = "HKLM:\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Surface\SEMM"
-386 New-RegKey $SurfaceRegKey
-387 $LSVRegValue = Get-ItemProperty $SurfaceRegKey LSV -ErrorAction SilentlyContinue
-388 $DateTimeRegValue = Get-ItemProperty $SurfaceRegKey LastConfiguredUTC -ErrorAction SilentlyContinue
-389 $OwnershipSessionIdRegValue = Get-ItemProperty $SurfaceRegKey OwnershipSessionId -ErrorAction SilentlyContinue
-390 $PermissionSessionIdRegValue = Get-ItemProperty $SurfaceRegKey PermissionSessionId -ErrorAction SilentlyContinue
-391 $SettingsSessionIdRegValue = Get-ItemProperty $SurfaceRegKey SettingsSessionId -ErrorAction SilentlyContinue
-392 $IsResetRegValue = Get-ItemProperty $SurfaceRegKey IsReset -ErrorAction SilentlyContinue
-393 $certUsedRegValue = Get-ItemProperty $SurfaceRegKey CertName -ErrorAction SilentlyContinue
-394 $certIssuerRegValue = Get-ItemProperty $SurfaceRegKey CertIssuer -ErrorAction SilentlyContinue
-395 $certSubjectRegValue = Get-ItemProperty $SurfaceRegKey CertSubject -ErrorAction SilentlyContinue
-396
-397
-398 If ($LSVRegValue -eq $null)
-399 {
-400 New-ItemProperty -Path $SurfaceRegKey -Name LSV -PropertyType DWORD -Value $lsv | Out-Null
-401 }
-402 Else
-403 {
-404 Set-ItemProperty -Path $SurfaceRegKey -Name LSV -Value $lsv
-405 }
-406
-407 If ($DateTimeRegValue -eq $null)
-408 {
-409 New-ItemProperty -Path $SurfaceRegKey -Name LastConfiguredUTC -PropertyType String -Value $UTCDate | Out-Null
-410 }
-411 Else
-412 {
-413 Set-ItemProperty -Path $SurfaceRegKey -Name LastConfiguredUTC -Value $UTCDate
-414 }
-415
-416 If ($OwnershipSessionIdRegValue -eq $null)
-417 {
-418 New-ItemProperty -Path $SurfaceRegKey -Name OwnershipSessionId -PropertyType String -Value $ownerSessionIdValue | Out-Null
-419 }
-420 Else
-421 {
-422 Set-ItemProperty -Path $SurfaceRegKey -Name OwnershipSessionId -Value $ownerSessionIdValue
-423 }
-424
-425 If ($PermissionSessionIdRegValue -eq $null)
-426 {
-427 New-ItemProperty -Path $SurfaceRegKey -Name PermissionSessionId -PropertyType String -Value $permissionSessionIdValue | Out-Null
-428 }
-429 Else
-430 {
-431 Set-ItemProperty -Path $SurfaceRegKey -Name PermissionSessionId -Value $permissionSessionIdValue
-432 }
-433
-434 If ($SettingsSessionIdRegValue -eq $null)
-435 {
-436 New-ItemProperty -Path $SurfaceRegKey -Name SettingsSessionId -PropertyType String -Value $settingsSessionIdValue | Out-Null
-437 }
-438 Else
-439 {
-440 Set-ItemProperty -Path $SurfaceRegKey -Name SettingsSessionId -Value $settingsSessionIdValue
-441 }
-442
-443 If ($IsResetRegValue -eq $null)
-444 {
-445 New-ItemProperty -Path $SurfaceRegKey -Name IsReset -PropertyType DWORD -Value 0 | Out-Null
-446 }
-447 Else
-448 {
-449 Set-ItemProperty -Path $SurfaceRegKey -Name IsReset -Value 0
-450 }
-451
-452 If ($certUsedRegValue -eq $null)
-453 {
-454 New-ItemProperty -Path $SurfaceRegKey -Name CertName -PropertyType String -Value $certName | Out-Null
-455 }
-456 Else
-457 {
-458 Set-ItemProperty -Path $SurfaceRegKey -Name CertName -Value $certName
-459 }
-460
-461 If ($certIssuerRegValue -eq $null)
-462 {
-463 New-ItemProperty -Path $SurfaceRegKey -Name CertIssuer -PropertyType String -Value $certIssuer | Out-Null
-464 }
-465 Else
-466 {
-467 Set-ItemProperty -Path $SurfaceRegKey -Name CertIssuer -Value $certIssuer
-468 }
-469
-470 If ($certSubjectRegValue -eq $null)
-471 {
-472 New-ItemProperty -Path $SurfaceRegKey -Name CertSubject -PropertyType String -Value $certSubject | Out-Null
-473 }
-474 Else
-475 {
-476 Set-ItemProperty -Path $SurfaceRegKey -Name CertSubject -Value $certSubject
-477 }
-```
-
-### Settings names and IDs
-
-To configure Surface UEFI settings or permissions for Surface UEFI settings, you must refer to each setting by either its setting name or setting ID. With each new update for Surface UEFI, new settings may be added. The best way to get a complete list of the settings available on a Surface device, along with the settings name and settings IDs, is to use the ShowSettingsOptions.ps1 script from SEMM_Powershell.zip in [Surface Tools for IT Downloads](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=46703)
-
-The computer where ShowSettingsOptions.ps1 is run must have Microsoft Surface UEFI Manager installed, but the script does not require a Surface device.
-
-The following tables show the available settings for Surface Pro 4 and later including Surface Pro 7, Surface Book, Surface Laptop 3, and Surface Go.
-
-*Table 1. Surface UEFI settings for Surface Pro 4*
-
-| Setting ID | Setting Name | Description | Default Setting |
-| --- | --- | --- | --- |
-|501| Password | UEFI System Password | |
-|200| Secure Boot Keys | Secure Boot signing keys to enable for EFI applications | MsPlus3rdParty |
-|300| Trusted Platform Module (TPM) | TPM device enabled or disabled | Enabled |
-|301| Docking USB Port | Docking USB Port enabled or disabled | Enabled |
-|302| Front Camera | Front Camera enabled or disabled | Enabled |
-|303| Bluetooth | Bluetooth radio enabled or disabled | Enabled |
-|304| Rear Camera | Rear Camera enabled or disabled | Enabled |
-|305| IR Camera | InfraRed Camera enabled or disabled | Enabled |
-|308| Wi-Fi and Bluetooth | Wi-Fi and Bluetooth enabled or disabled | Enabled |
-|310| Type Cover | Surface Type Cover connector | Enabled |
-|320| On-board Audio | On-board audio enabled or disabled | Enabled |
-|330| Micro SD Card | Micro SD Card enabled or disabled | Enabled |
-|370| USB Port 1 | Side USB Port (1) | UsbPortEnabled |
-|400| IPv6 for PXE Boot | Enable IPv6 PXE boot before IPv4 PXE boot |Disabled |
-|401| Alternate Boot | Alternate Boot allows users to override the boot order by holding the volume down button when powering up the device | Enabled |
-|402| Boot Order Lock | Boot Order variable lock enabled or disabled | Disabled |
-|403| USB Boot | Enable booting from USB devices | Enabled |
-|500| TPM clear EFI protocol | Enable EFI protocol for invoking TPM clear | Disabled |
-|600| Security | UEFI Security Page Display enabled or disabled | Enabled |
-|601| Devices | UEFI Devices Page Display enabled or disabled | Enabled |
-|602| Boot | UEFI Boot Manager Page Display enabled or disabled | Enabled |
-
-*Table 2. Surface UEFI settings for Surface Book*
-
-| Setting ID | Setting Name | Description | Default Setting |
-| --- | --- | --- | --- |
-| 501 | Password | UEFI System Password | |
-| 200 | Secure Boot Keys | Secure Boot signing keys to enable for EFI applications | MsPlus3rdParty |
-| 300 | Trusted Platform Module (TPM) | TPM device enabled or disabled | Enabled |
-| 301 | Docking USB Port | Docking USB Port enabled or disabled | Enabled |
-| 302 | Front Camera | Front Camera enabled or disabled | Enabled |
-| 303 | Bluetooth | Bluetooth radio enabled or disabled | Enabled |
-| 304 | Rear Camera | Rear Camera enabled or disabled | Enabled |
-| 305 | IR Camera | InfraRed Camera enabled or disabled | Enabled |
-| 308 | Wi-Fi and Bluetooth | Wi-Fi and Bluetooth enabled or disabled | Enabled |
-| 320 | On-board Audio | On-board audio enabled or disabled | Enabled |
-| 400 | IPv6 for PXE Boot Enable | IPv6 PXE boot before IPv4 PXE boot | Disabled |
-| 401 | Alternate Boot | Alternate Boot allows users to override the boot order by holding the volume down button when powering up the device | Enabled |
-| 402 | Boot Order Lock | Boot Order variable lock enabled or disabled | Disabled |
-| 403 | USB Boot | Enable booting from USB devices | Enabled |
-| 500 | TPM clear EFI protocol | Enable EFI protocol for invoking TPM clear | Disabled |
-| 600 | Security | UEFI Security Page Display enabled or disabled | Enabled |
-| 601 | Devices | UEFI Devices Page Display enabled or disabled | Enabled |
-| 602 | Boot | UEFI Boot Manager Page Display enabled or disabled | Enabled |
-
-## Deploy SEMM Configuration Manager scripts
-
-After your scripts are prepared to configure and enable SEMM on the client device, the next step is to add these scripts as an application in Configuration Manager. Before you open Configuration Manager, ensure that the following files are in a shared folder that does not include other files:
-
-* ConfigureSEMM.ps1
-* ResetSEMM.ps1
-* Your SEMM certificate (for example SEMMCertificate.pfx)
-
-The SEMM Configuration Manager scripts will be added to Configuration Manager as a script application. The command to install SEMM with ConfigureSEMM.ps1 is as follows.
-
-`Powershell.exe -file ".\ConfigureSEMM.ps1"`
-
-The command to uninstall SEMM with ResetSEMM.ps1 is as follows.
-
-`Powershell.exe -file ".\ResetSEMM.ps1"`
-
-To add the SEMM Configuration Manager scripts to Configuration Manager as an application, use the following process:
-
-1. Start the Create Application Wizard using Step 1 through Step 5 from the [Deploy Microsoft Surface UEFI Manager](#deploy-microsoft-surface-uefi-manager) section earlier in this article.
-
-2. Proceed through The Create Application Wizard as follows:
-
- - **General** – Select **Manually specify the application information**, and then select **Next**.
-
- - **General Information** – Enter a name for the application (for example SEMM) and any other information you want such as publisher, version, or comments on this page. Select **Next** to proceed.
-
- - **Application Catalog** – The fields on this page can be left with their default values. Select **Next**.
-
- - **Deployment Types** – Select **Add** to start the Create Deployment Type Wizard.
-
- - Proceed through the steps of the Create Deployment Type Wizard, as follows:
-
- * **General** – Select **Script Installer** from the **Type** drop-down menu. The **Manually specify the deployment type information** option will automatically be selected. Select **Next** to proceed.
- * **General Information** – Enter a name for the deployment type (for example SEMM Configuration Scripts), and then select **Next** to continue.
- * **Content** – Select **Browse** next to the **Content Location** field, and then select the folder where your SEMM Configuration Manager scripts are located. In the **Installation Program** field, type the [installation command](#deploy-semm-configuration-manager-scripts) found earlier in this article. In the **Uninstall Program** field, enter the [uninstallation command](#deploy-semm-configuration-manager-scripts) found earlier in this article (shown in Figure 2). Select **Next** to move to the next page.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 2. Set the SEMM Configuration Manager scripts as the install and uninstall commands*
-
- * **Detection Method** – Select **Add Clause** to add the SEMM Configuration Manager script registry key detection rule. The **Detection Rule** window is displayed, as shown in Figure 3. Use the following settings:
-
- - Select **Registry** from the **Setting Type** drop-down menu.
- - Select **HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE** from the **Hive** drop-down menu.
- - Enter **SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Surface\SEMM** in the **Key** field.
- - Enter **Enabled_Version1000** in the **Value** field.
- - Select **String** from the **Data Type** drop-down menu.
- - Select the **This registry setting must satisfy the following rule to indicate the presence of this application** button.
- - Enter **1** in the **Value** field.
- - Select **OK** to close the **Detection Rule** window.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 3. Use a registry key to identify devices enrolled in SEMM*
-
- * Select **Next** to proceed to the next page.
-
- * **User Experience** – Select **Install for system** from the **Installation Behavior** drop-down menu. If you want your users to record and enter the certificate thumbprint themselves, leave the logon requirement set to **Only when a user is logged on**. If you want your administrators to enter the thumbprint for users and the users do not need to see the thumbprint, select **Whether or not a user is logged on** from the **Logon Requirement** drop-down menu.
-
- * **Requirements** – The ConfigureSEMM.ps1 script automatically verifies that the device is a Surface device before attempting to enable SEMM. However, if you intend to deploy this script application to a collection with devices other than those to be managed with SEMM, you could add requirements here to ensure this application would run only on Surface devices or devices you intend to manage with SEMM. Select **Next** to continue.
-
- * **Dependencies** – Select **Add** to open the **Add Dependency** window.
-
- * Select **Add** to open the **Specify Required Application** window.
-
- - Enter a name for the SEMM dependencies in the **Dependency Group Name** field (for example, *SEMM Assemblies*).
-
- - Select **Microsoft Surface UEFI Manager** from the list of **Available Applications** and the MSI deployment type, and then select **OK** to close the **Specify Required Application** window.
-
- * Keep the **Auto Install** check box selected if you want Microsoft Surface UEFI Manager installed automatically on devices when you attempt to enable SEMM with the Configuration Manager scripts. Select **OK** to close the **Add Dependency** window.
-
- * Select **Next** to proceed.
-
- * **Summary** – The information you have entered throughout the Create Deployment Type wizard is displayed on this page. Select **Next** to confirm your selections.
-
- * **Progress** – A progress bar and status as the deployment type is added for the SEMM script application is displayed on this page.
-
- * **Completion** – Confirmation of the deployment type creation is displayed when the process is complete. Select **Close** to finish the Create Deployment Type Wizard.
-
- - **Summary** – The information that you entered throughout the Create Application Wizard is displayed. Select **Next** to create the application.
-
- - **Progress** – A progress bar and status as the application is added to the Software Library is displayed on this page.
-
- - **Completion** – Confirmation of the successful application creation is displayed when the application creation process is complete. Select **Close** to finish the Create Application Wizard.
-
-After the script application is available in the Software Library of Configuration Manager, you can distribute and deploy SEMM using the scripts you prepared to devices or collections. If you have configured the Microsoft Surface UEFI Manager assemblies as a dependency that will be automatically installed, you can deploy SEMM in a single step. If you have not configured the assemblies as a dependency, they must be installed on the devices you intend to manage before you enable SEMM.
-
-When you deploy SEMM using this script application and with a configuration that is visible to the end user, the PowerShell script will start and the thumbprint for the certificate will be displayed by the PowerShell window. You can have your users record this thumbprint and enter it when prompted by Surface UEFI after the device reboots.
-
-Alternatively, you can configure the application installation to reboot automatically and to install invisibly to the user. In this scenario, a technician will be required to enter the thumbprint on each device as it reboots. Any technician with access to the certificate file can read the thumbprint by viewing the certificate with CertMgr. Instructions for viewing the thumbprint with CertMgr are in the [Create or modify the SEMM Configuration Manager scripts](#create-or-modify-the-semm-configuration-manager-scripts) section of this article.
-
-Removal of SEMM from a device deployed with Configuration Manager using these scripts is as easy as uninstalling the application with Configuration Manager. This action starts the ResetSEMM.ps1 script and properly unenrolls the device with the same certificate file that was used during the deployment of SEMM.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> Microsoft Surface recommends that you create reset packages only when you need to unenroll a device. These reset packages are typically valid for only one device, identified by its serial number. You can, however, create a universal reset package that would work for any device enrolled in SEMM with this certificate.
->
-> We strongly recommend that you protect your universal reset package as carefully as the certificate you used to enroll devices in SEMM. Please remember that, just like the certificate itself, this universal reset package can be used to unenroll any of your organization’s Surface devices from SEMM.
->
-> When you install a reset package, the Lowest Supported Value (LSV) is reset to a value of 1. You can reenroll a device by using an existing configuration package. The device will prompt for the certificate thumbprint before ownership is taken.
->
-> For this reason, the reenrollment of a device in SEMM would require a new package to be created and installed on that device. Because this action is a new enrollment and not a change in configuration on a device already enrolled in SEMM, the device will prompt for the certificate thumbprint before ownership is taken.
diff --git a/devices/surface/using-the-sda-deployment-share.md b/devices/surface/using-the-sda-deployment-share.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 20ad4f6903..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/using-the-sda-deployment-share.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,173 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Using the Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator deployment share (Surface)
-description: Explore the scenarios where you can use SDA to meet the deployment needs of your organization including Proof of Concept, pilot deployment, as well as import additional drivers and applications.
-keywords: deploy, install, automate, deployment solution
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.pagetype: surface, devices
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.audience: itpro
-ms.date: 10/21/2019
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
----
-
-# Using the Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator deployment share
-
-With Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator (SDA), you can quickly and easily set up a deployment solution that is ready to deploy Windows to Surface devices. The prepared environment is built on powerful deployment technologies available from Microsoft, such as the [Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT)](https://technet.microsoft.com/windows/dn475741), and is capable of immediately performing a deployment after configuration. See [Step-by-Step: Surface Deployment Accelerator](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface/step-by-step-surface-deployment-accelerator) for a comprehensive walkthrough of using the SDA wizard to set up a deployment share and perform a deployment.
-
-For more information about SDA and information on how to download SDA, see [Microsoft Surface Deployment Accelerator (SDA)](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface/microsoft-surface-deployment-accelerator).
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> SDA is not supported on Surface Pro 7, Surface Pro X, and Surface Laptop 3. For more information refer to [Deploy Surface devices](deploy.md).
-
-Using SDA provides these primary benefits:
-
-* With SDA, you can create a ready-to-deploy environment that can deploy to target devices as fast as your download speeds allow. The wizard experience enables you to check a few boxes and then the automated process builds your deployment environment for you.
-
-* With SDA, you prepare a deployment environment built on the industry leading deployment solution of MDT. With MDT you can scale from a relatively basic deployment of a few Surface devices to a solution capable of deploying to thousands of devices including all of the different makes and models in your organization and all of the applications required by each device and user.
-
-This article explores four scenarios where you can use SDA to meet the needs of your organization. See [Deploy Windows 10](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/deploy/index) to explore the capabilities of MDT and the Windows deployment technologies available from Microsoft in greater detail.
-
-## Perform a Proof of Concept deployment
-
-One of the primary scenarios for use of SDA is as a Proof of Concept. A *Proof of Concept* (PoC) enables you to test or evaluate the capabilities of a solution or technology. A PoC is often used to illustrate the benefits of the solution or technology to decision makers. For example, if you want to recommend Surface devices as a replacement of older point of sale (POS) systems, you could perform a PoC to demonstrate how Surface devices provide superior computing power, flexibility, and connectivity when compared to alternate options.
-
-Using SDA to prepare a PoC of Surface devices enables you to very quickly prepare a demonstration of Surface device or devices, which gives you more time for customization or preparation. The flexibility of SDA even lets you import resources, like applications and drivers, from existing MDT deployment infrastructure. See the [Work with existing deployment shares](#work-with-existing-deployment-shares) section later in this article for more information.
-
-SDA is also an excellent PoC of the capabilities of MDT. SDA demonstrates just how quickly an MDT deployment environment can be prepared and made ready for deployment to devices. It also shows just how flexible and customizable the MDT solution can be, with support for Windows 10 and Windows 8.1, for Microsoft Store and desktop applications, and several models of Surface devices.
-
-Some recommendations for a successful PoC with SDA are:
-
-* Keep your SDA deployment environment separate from your production network. This ensures optimal performance and reduces potential for conflicts during your PoC deployment.
-
-* Use a fresh and updated instance of Windows Server to house your SDA deployment share to maintain the simplicity and performance of the demonstration environment.
-
-* Test the deployment process before you demonstrate your PoC. This reduces the potential for unexpected situations and keeps the demonstration focused on the deployment process and Surface devices.
-
-* Use offline files with SDA to further reduce installation times.
-
-* For help with your PoC, contact [Surface Support](https://www.microsoft.com/surface/support/contact-us-business).
-
-## Perform a pilot deployment
-
-A pilot deployment differs from a PoC. Where a PoC is usually a closed demonstration that is performed prior to the deployment process in order to get approval for the use of certain technologies or solutions, a *pilot deployment* is performed during the deployment process as a limited scope deployment for testing and validation. The focus of a pilot deployment can be as narrow as only a handful of devices, or wide enough to include a significant portion of your organization.
-
->[!NOTE]
->A pilot deployment should not replace the testing process that should be performed regularly in the lab as the deployment environment is built and developed. A deployment solution should be tested in virtual and physical environments as new applications and drivers are added and when task sequences are modified and before a pilot deployment is performed.
-
-For example, you are tasked with deploying Surface devices to mobile workers and you want to test the organization’s MDT deployment process by providing a small number of devices to executives. You can use SDA to create an isolated Surface deployment environment and then copy the task sequence, applications, and drivers needed from the production deployment share. This not only enables you to quickly create a Surface deployment, but it also minimizes the risk to the production deployment process used for other types of devices.
-
-For small organizations, the pilot deployment environment of SDA may suffice as a complete deployment solution. Even if you do not have an existing deployment environment, you can import drivers and applications (covered later in this article) to provide a complete deployment solution based on MDT. Even without previous knowledge of MDT or Windows deployment, you can follow the [Step-by-Step: Surface Deployment Accelerator](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface/step-by-step-surface-deployment-accelerator) article to get started with a deployment to Surface devices.
-
-## Import additional drivers
-
-The SDA deployment share includes all of the drivers needed for Surface devices. This includes the drivers for the components inside the Surface device, such as the wireless network adapter and the main chipset, as well as drivers for Surface accessories, such as the Surface Dock or Surface USB Ethernet adapters. The SDA deployment share does not, however, include drivers for third-party devices or peripherals.
-
-For example, you may intend to use your Surface device with a thermal printer, credit card reader, and barcode scanner as a POS terminal. In this scenario, the thermal printer, credit card reader, and barcode scanner will very likely require installation of drivers to operate properly. You could potentially download and install these drivers from Windows Update when each peripheral is connected, or you could install the driver package from the manufacturer manually on each Surface device, but the ideal solution is to have these drivers already present in Windows so that when the peripheral is connected, it will just work.
-
-Because SDA is built on MDT, adding the drivers to the SDA deployment share is easy and simple.
-
->[!NOTE]
->The drivers must be in the Setup Information File (.inf) format. If the drivers for your device come as an executable file (.exe), they may need to be extracted or installed to procure the .inf file. Some device drivers come packaged with applications, for example an all-in-one printer bundled with scan software. These applications will need to be installed separately from the drivers.
-
-To import drivers for a peripheral device:
-
-1. Download the drivers for your device from the manufacturer web site.
-
-2. Open the MDT Deployment Workbench.
-
-3. Expand the **Deployment Shares** node and expand the SDA deployment share.
-
-4. Expand the **Out-of-Box Drivers** folder.
-
-5. Select the folder of the Surface model for which you would like to include this driver.
-
-6. Click **Import Drivers** to start the Import Drivers Wizard, as shown in Figure 1.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 1. Provide the location of your driver files*
-
-7. The Import Drivers Wizard presents a series of steps:
-
- - **Specify Directory** – Click **Browse** and navigate to the folder where you stored the drivers in Step 1.
- - **Summary** – Review the specified configuration on this page before you click **Next** to begin the import process.
- - **Progress** – While the drivers are imported, a progress bar is displayed on this page.
- - **Confirmation** – When the import process completes, the success of the process is displayed on this page. Click **Finish** to complete the Import Drivers Wizard.
-
-8. Repeat Steps 5-7 for each Surface model on which you would like to include this driver.
-
-9. Close the Deployment Workbench.
-
-After the drivers are imported for the Surface model, the deployment task sequence will automatically select the drivers during the deployment process and include them in the Windows environment. When you connect your device, such as the barcode scanner in the example, Windows should automatically detect the device and you should be able to use it immediately.
-
->[!NOTE]
->You can even import drivers for other computer makes and models to support other devices. See **Step 5: Prepare the drivers repository** in [Deploy a Windows 10 image using MDT 2013 Update 2](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/deploy/deploy-a-windows-10-image-using-mdt) for more information about how to import drivers for other makes and models.
-
-## Import additional applications
-
-As with drivers, the SDA deployment share can be pre-configured with apps like the Surface App and Microsoft Office 365. You can also add applications to the SDA deployment share and configure them to be installed on your Surface devices during deployment of Windows. In the ideal scenario, your Surface devices deployed with the SDA deployment share will include all of the applications needed to be ready for your end users.
-
-In the previous example for including drivers for a POS system, you would also need to include POS software for processing transactions and recording the input from the barcode scanner and credit card reader. To import an application and prepare it for installation on your Surface devices during Windows deployment:
-
-1. Download the application installation files or locate the installation media for your application.
-
-2. Determine the command line instruction for silent installation, usually provided by the developer of the application. For Windows Installer files (.msi), see [Standard Installer Command-Line Options](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/desktop/aa372024) in the Windows Dev Center.
-
-3. Open the MDT Deployment Workbench.
-
-4. Expand the **Deployment Shares** node and expand the SDA deployment share.
-
-5. Expand the **Applications** folder.
-
-6. Click **New Application** to start the New Application Wizard, as shown in Figure 2.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 2: Provide the command to install your application*
-
-7. Follow the steps of the New Application Wizard:
-
- - **Application Type** – Click **Application with Source Files**, and then click **Next**.
- - **Details** – Enter a name for the application in the **Application Name** field. Enter publisher, version, and language information in the **Publisher**, **Version**, and **Language** fields if desired. Click **Next**.
- - **Source** – Click **Browse** to navigate to and select the folder with the application installation files procured in Step 1, and then click **Next**.
- - **Destination** – Enter a name for the folder where the application files will be stored in the **Specify the Name of the Directory that Should Be Created** field or click **Next** to accept the default name.
- - **Command Details** – Enter the silent command-line instruction, for example `setup.msi /quiet /norestart`
- - **Summary** – Review the specified configuration on this page before you click **Next** to begin the import process.
- - **Progress** – While the installation files are imported, a progress bar is displayed on this page.
- - **Confirmation** – When the import process completes, the success of the process is displayed on this page. Click **Finish** to complete the New Application Wizard.
-
-8. Click the **Task Sequences** folder, right-click **1 - Deploy Microsoft Surface**, and then click **Properties**.
-
-9. Click the **Task Sequence** tab to view the steps that are included in the new task sequence.
-
-10. Select the **Windows Update (Pre-Application Installation)** step, and then click **Add**.
-
-11. Hover the mouse over **General** under the **Add** menu, and then click **Install Application**. This will add a new step after the selected step for the installation of a specific application as shown in Figure 3.
-
- 
-
- *Figure 3. A new Install Application step for Sample POS App*
-
-12. On the **Properties** tab of the new **Install Application** step, enter **Install - Sample POS App** in the **Name** field, where *Sample POS App* is the name of your app.
-
-13. Click **Install a Single Application**, and then click **Browse** to view available applications that have been imported into the deployment share.
-
-14. Select your app from the list of applications, and then click **OK**.
-
-15. Click **OK** to close the task sequence properties.
-
-16. Close the Deployment Workbench.
-
-## Work with existing deployment shares
-
-One of the many benefits of an MDT deployment share is the simplicity of how deployment resources are stored. The MDT deployment share is, at its core, just a standard network file share. All deployment resources, such as Windows images, application installation files, and drivers, are stored in a share that can be browsed with File Explorer, copied and pasted, and moved just like any other file share, provided that you have the necessary permissions. This makes working with deployment resources extremely easy. MDT even allows you to make it easier by allowing you to open multiple deployment shares from the Deployment Workbench and to transfer or copy resources between them.
-
-This ability gives SDA some extra capabilities when used in an environment with an existing MDT infrastructure. For example, if you install SDA on an isolated server to prepare a PoC and then log on to your production MDT deployment share from the Deployment Workbench on your SDA server, you can copy applications, drivers, task sequences, and other components into the SDA deployment share that is prepared with Surface apps and drivers. With this process, in a very short amount time, you can have a deployment environment ready to deploy your organization’s precise requirements to Surface devices.
-
-You can also use this capability in reverse. For example, you can copy the Surface drivers, deployment task sequences, and apps directly into a lab or testing environment following a successful PoC. Using these resources, you can immediately begin to integrate Surface deployment into your existing deployment infrastructure.
diff --git a/devices/surface/wake-on-lan-for-surface-devices.md b/devices/surface/wake-on-lan-for-surface-devices.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 00ad750ca8..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/wake-on-lan-for-surface-devices.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,95 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Wake On LAN for Surface devices (Surface)
-description: See how you can use Wake On LAN to remotely wake up devices to perform management or maintenance tasks, or to enable management solutions automatically – even if the devices are powered down.
-keywords: update, deploy, driver, wol, wake-on-lan
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.pagetype: surface, devices
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.date: 12/30/2019
-ms.reviewer: scottmca
-manager: dansimp
-ms.audience: itpro
----
-
-# Wake On LAN for Surface devices
-
-Surface devices that run Windows 10, version 1607 (also known as Windows 10 Anniversary Update) or later and use a Surface Ethernet adapter to connect to a wired network, are capable of Wake On LAN (WOL) from Connected Standby. With WOL, you can remotely wake up devices to perform management or maintenance tasks or enable management solutions (such as System Center Configuration Manager) automatically. For example, you can deploy applications to Surface devices left docked with a Surface Dock or Surface Pro 3 Docking Station by using System Center Configuration Manager during a window in the middle of the night, when the office is empty.
-
->[!NOTE]
->Surface devices must be connected to AC power and in Connected Standby (Sleep) to support WOL. WOL is not possible from devices that are in hibernation or powered off.
-
-## Supported devices
-
-The following devices are supported for WOL:
-
-* Surface Ethernet adapter
-* Surface USB-C to Ethernet and USB Adapter
-* Surface Dock
-* Surface Docking Station for Surface Pro 3
-* Surface 3
-* Surface Pro 3
-* Surface Pro 4
-* Surface Pro (5th Gen)
-* Surface Pro (5th Gen) with LTE Advanced
-* Surface Book
-* Surface Laptop (1st Gen)
-* Surface Pro 6
-* Surface Book 2
-* Surface Laptop 2
-* Surface Go
-* Surface Go with LTE Advanced
-* Surface Studio 2 (see Surface Studio 2 instructions below)
-* Surface Pro 7
-* Surface Laptop 3
-
-## WOL driver
-
-To enable WOL support on Surface devices, a specific driver for the Surface Ethernet adapter is required. This driver is not included in the standard driver and firmware pack for Surface devices – you must download and install it separately. You can download the Surface WOL driver (SurfaceWOL.msi) from the [Surface Tools for IT](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=46703) page in the Microsoft Download Center.
-
-You can run this Microsoft Windows Installer (.msi) file on a Surface device to install the Surface WOL driver, or you can distribute it to Surface devices with an application deployment solution, such as System Center Configuration Manager. To include the Surface WOL driver during deployment, you can install the .msi file as an application during the deployment process. You can also extract the Surface WOL driver files to include them in the deployment process. For example, you can include them in your Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT) deployment share. You can read more about Surface deployment with MDT in [Deploy Windows 10 to Surface devices with Microsoft Deployment Toolkit](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/surface/deploy-windows-10-to-surface-devices-with-mdt).
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> During the installation of SurfaceWOL.msi, the following registry key is set to a value of 1, which allows easy identification of systems where the WOL driver has been installed. If you chose to extract and install these drivers separately during deployment, this registry key will not be configured and must be configured manually or with a script.
->
-> **HKLM\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Power AllowSystemRequiredPowerRequests**
-
-To extract the contents of SurfaceWOL.msi, use the MSIExec administrative installation option (**/a**), as shown in the following example, to extract the contents to the C:\WOL\ folder:
-
- `msiexec /a surfacewol.msi targetdir=C:\WOL /qn`
-
-## Surface Studio 2 instructions
-
-To enable WOL on Surface Studio 2, you must use the following procedure
-
-1. Create the following registry keys:
-
- ```console
- ; Set CONNECTIVITYINSTANDBY to 1:
- [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Power\PowerSettings\F15576E8-98B7-4186-B944-EAFA664402D9]
- "Attributes"=dword:00000001
- ; Set EnforceDisconnectedStandby to 0 and AllowSystemRequiredPowerRequests to 1:
- [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Power]
- "EnforceDisconnectedStandby"=dword:00000000
- "AllowSystemRequiredPowerRequests"=dword:00000001
- ```
-
-2. Run the following command
-
- ```powercfg /SETACVALUEINDEX SCHEME_BALANCED SUB_NONE CONNECTIVITYINSTANDBY 1```
-
-## Using Surface WOL
-
-The Surface WOL driver conforms to the WOL standard, whereby the device is woken by a special network communication known as a magic packet. The magic packet consists of 6 bytes of 255 (or FF in hexadecimal) followed by 16 repetitions of the target computer’s MAC address. You can read more about the magic packet and the WOL standard on [Wikipedia](https://wikipedia.org/wiki/Wake-on-LAN#Magic_packet).
-
->[!NOTE]
->To send a magic packet and wake up a device by using WOL, you must know the MAC address of the target device and Ethernet adapter. Because the magic packet does not use the IP network protocol, it is not possible to use the IP address or DNS name of the device.
-
-Many management solutions, such as System Center Configuration Manager, provide built-in support for WOL. There are also many solutions, including Microsoft Store apps, PowerShell modules, third-party applications, and third-party management solutions that allow you to send a magic packet to wake up a device. For example, you can use the [Wake On LAN PowerShell module](https://gallery.technet.microsoft.com/scriptcenter/Wake-On-Lan-815424c4) from the TechNet Script Center.
-
->[!NOTE]
->After a device has been woken up with a magic packet, the device will return to sleep if an application is not actively preventing sleep on the system or if the AllowSystemRequiredPowerRequests registry key is not configured to 1, which allows applications to prevent sleep. See the [WOL driver](#wol-driver) section of this article for more information about this registry key.
diff --git a/devices/surface/windows-autopilot-and-surface-devices.md b/devices/surface/windows-autopilot-and-surface-devices.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 36283c8d84..0000000000
--- a/devices/surface/windows-autopilot-and-surface-devices.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Windows Autopilot and Surface devices
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-description: Find out about Windows Autopilot deployment options for Surface devices.
-keywords: autopilot, windows 10, surface, deployment
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.pagetype: surface, devices
-ms.sitesec: library
-author: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.topic: article
-ms.localizationpriority: medium
-ms.audience: itpro
-ms.date: 11/26/2019
----
-
-# Windows Autopilot and Surface devices
-
-Windows Autopilot is a cloud-based deployment technology in Windows 10. You can use Windows Autopilot to remotely deploy and configure devices in a zero-touch process right out of the box.
-
-Windows Autopilot-registered devices are identified over the Internet at first startup through a unique device signature that's called a *hardware hash*. They're automatically enrolled and configured by using modern management solutions such as Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) and mobile device management.
-
-You can register Surface devices at the time of purchase from a Surface partner that's enabled for Windows Autopilot. These partners can ship new devices directly to your users. The devices will be automatically enrolled and configured when they are first turned on. This process eliminates reimaging during deployment, which lets you implement new, agile methods of device management and distribution.
-
-## Modern management
-Autopilot is the recommended deployment option for Surface devices, including Surface Pro 7, Surface Laptop 3, and Surface Pro X, which is specifically designed for deployment through Autopilot.
-
- It's best to enroll your Surface devices with the help of a Microsoft Cloud Solution Provider. This step allows you to manage UEFI firmware settings on Surface directly from Intune. It eliminates the need to physically touch devices for certificate management. See [Intune management of Surface UEFI settings](surface-manage-dfci-guide.md) for details.
-
-## Windows version considerations
-Broad deployment of Surface devices through Windows Autopilot, including enrollment by Surface partners at the time of purchase, requires Windows 10 Version 1709 (Fall Creators Update) or later.
-
-These Windows versions support a 4,000-byte (4k) hash value that uniquely identifies devices for Windows Autopilot, which is necessary for deployments at scale. All new Surface devices, including Surface Pro 7, Surface Pro X, and Surface Laptop 3, ship with Windows 10 Version 1903 or later.
-
-## Surface partners enabled for Windows Autopilot
-
-Select Surface partners can enroll Surface devices in Windows Autopilot for you at the time of purchase. They can also ship enrolled devices directly to your users. The devices can be configured entirely through a zero-touch process by using Windows Autopilot, Azure AD, and mobile device management.
-
-Surface partners that are enabled for Windows Autopilot include:
-
-- [ALSO](https://www.also.com/ec/cms5/de_1010/1010_anbieter/microsoft/windows-autopilot/index.jsp)
-- [Atea](https://www.atea.com/)
-- [Bechtle](https://www.bechtle.com/de-en)
-- [Cancom](https://www.cancom.de/)
-- [CDW](https://www.cdw.com/)
-- [Computacenter](https://www.computacenter.com/uk)
-- [Connection](https://www.connection.com/brand/microsoft/microsoft-surface)
-- [Insight](https://www.insight.com/en_US/buy/partner/microsoft/surface/windows-autopilot.html)
-- [SHI](https://www.shi.com/Surface)
-- [Synnex](https://www.synnexcorp.com/us/microsoft/surface-autopilot/)
-- [Techdata](https://www.techdata.com/)
-
-## Learn more
-For more information about Windows Autopilot, see:
-- [Overview of Windows Autopilot](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/deployment/windows-autopilot/windows-10-autopilot)
-- [Windows Autopilot requirements](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/deployment/windows-autopilot/windows-autopilot-requirements)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/education/developers.yml b/education/developers.yml
index 9e21b6d27f..5b67147739 100644
--- a/education/developers.yml
+++ b/education/developers.yml
@@ -18,16 +18,16 @@ additionalContent:
# Card
- title: UWP apps for education
summary: Learn how to write universal apps for education.
- url: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/uwp/apps-for-education/
+ url: /windows/uwp/apps-for-education/
# Card
- title: Take a test API
summary: Learn how web applications can use the API to provide a locked down experience for taking tests.
- url: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/uwp/apps-for-education/take-a-test-api
+ url: /windows/uwp/apps-for-education/take-a-test-api
# Card
- title: Office Education Dev center
summary: Integrate with Office 365 across devices and services to extend Microsoft enterprise-scale compliance and security to students, teachers, and staff in your education app
- url: https://dev.office.com/industry-verticals/edu
+ url: https://developer.microsoft.com/office/edu
# Card
- title: Data Streamer
summary: Bring new STEM experiences into the classroom with real-time data in Excel using Data Streamer. Data Streamer can send data to Excel from a sensor or application.
- url: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/microsoft-365/education/data-streamer
\ No newline at end of file
+ url: /microsoft-365/education/data-streamer
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/education/docfx.json b/education/docfx.json
index 809a2da28f..8ba1394c6d 100644
--- a/education/docfx.json
+++ b/education/docfx.json
@@ -7,7 +7,8 @@
"**/**.yml"
],
"exclude": [
- "**/obj/**"
+ "**/obj/**",
+ "**/includes/**"
]
}
],
@@ -19,7 +20,8 @@
"**/*.svg"
],
"exclude": [
- "**/obj/**"
+ "**/obj/**",
+ "**/includes/**"
]
}
],
diff --git a/education/includes/education-content-updates.md b/education/includes/education-content-updates.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1f83558533
--- /dev/null
+++ b/education/includes/education-content-updates.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+
+
+
+## Week of April 26, 2021
+
+
+| Published On |Topic title | Change |
+|------|------------|--------|
diff --git a/education/itadmins.yml b/education/itadmins.yml
index 4aa321c59c..849c8bb478 100644
--- a/education/itadmins.yml
+++ b/education/itadmins.yml
@@ -19,70 +19,70 @@ productDirectory:
- title: Phase 1 - Cloud deployment
imageSrc: ./images/EDU-Deploy.svg
links:
- - url: https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-365/education/deploy/create-your-office-365-tenant
+ - url: /microsoft-365/education/deploy/create-your-office-365-tenant
text: 1. Create your Office 365 tenant
- - url: https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-365/education/deploy/secure-and-configure-your-network
+ - url: /microsoft-365/education/deploy/secure-and-configure-your-network
text: 2. Secure and configure your network
- - url: https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-365/education/deploy/aad-connect-and-adfs
+ - url: /microsoft-365/education/deploy/aad-connect-and-adfs
text: 3. Sync your active directory
- - url: https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-365/education/deploy/school-data-sync
+ - url: /microsoft-365/education/deploy/school-data-sync
text: 4. Sync you SIS using School Data Sync
- - url: https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-365/education/deploy/license-users
+ - url: /microsoft-365/education/deploy/license-users
text: 5. License users
# Card
- title: Phase 2 - Device management
imageSrc: ./images/EDU-Device-Mgmt.svg
links:
- - url: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/education/windows/
+ - url: ./windows/index.md
text: 1. Get started with Windows 10 for Education
- - url: https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-365/education/deploy/set-up-windows-10-education-devices
+ - url: /microsoft-365/education/deploy/set-up-windows-10-education-devices
text: 2. Set up Windows 10 devices
- - url: https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-365/education/deploy/intune-for-education
+ - url: /microsoft-365/education/deploy/intune-for-education
text: 3. Get started with Intune for Education
- - url: https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-365/education/deploy/use-intune-for-education
+ - url: /microsoft-365/education/deploy/use-intune-for-education
text: 4. Use Intune to manage groups, apps, and settings
- - url: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/intune/enrollment/enrollment-autopilot
+ - url: /intune/enrollment/enrollment-autopilot
text: 5. Enroll devices using Windows Autopilot
# Card
- title: Phase 3 - Apps management
imageSrc: ./images/EDU-Apps-Mgmt.svg
links:
- - url: https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-365/education/deploy/configure-admin-settings
+ - url: /microsoft-365/education/deploy/configure-admin-settings
text: 1. Configure admin settings
- - url: https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-365/education/deploy/set-up-teams-for-education
+ - url: /microsoft-365/education/deploy/set-up-teams-for-education
text: 2. Set up Teams for Education
- - url: https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-365/education/deploy/deploy-office-365
+ - url: /microsoft-365/education/deploy/deploy-office-365
text: 3. Set up Office 365
- - url: https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-365/education/deploy/microsoft-store-for-education
+ - url: /microsoft-365/education/deploy/microsoft-store-for-education
text: 4. Install apps from Microsoft Store for Education
- - url: https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-365/education/deploy/minecraft-for-education
+ - url: /microsoft-365/education/deploy/minecraft-for-education
text: 5. Install Minecraft - Education Edition
# Card
- title: Complete your deployment
# imageSrc should be square in ratio with no whitespace
imageSrc: ./images/EDU-Tasks.svg
links:
- - url: https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-365/education/deploy/deploy-exchange-online
+ - url: /microsoft-365/education/deploy/deploy-exchange-online
text: Deploy Exchange Online
- - url: https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-365/education/deploy/deploy-sharepoint-online-and-onedrive
+ - url: /microsoft-365/education/deploy/deploy-sharepoint-online-and-onedrive
text: Deploy SharePoint Online and OneDrive
- - url: https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-365/education/deploy/deploy-exchange-server-hybrid
+ - url: /microsoft-365/education/deploy/deploy-exchange-server-hybrid
text: Deploy Exchange Server hybrid
- - url: https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-365/education/deploy/deploy-sharepoint-server-hybrid
+ - url: /microsoft-365/education/deploy/deploy-sharepoint-server-hybrid
text: Deploy SharePoint Server Hybrid
# Card
- title: Security & compliance
imageSrc: ./images/EDU-Lockbox.svg
links:
- - url: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/active-directory/fundamentals/active-directory-deployment-checklist-p2
+ - url: /azure/active-directory/fundamentals/active-directory-deployment-checklist-p2
text: AAD feature deployment guide
- url: https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/t5/Azure-Information-Protection/Azure-Information-Protection-Deployment-Acceleration-Guide/ba-p/334423
text: Azure information protection deployment acceleration guide
- - url: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/cloud-app-security/getting-started-with-cloud-app-security
+ - url: /cloud-app-security/getting-started-with-cloud-app-security
text: Microsoft Cloud app security
- - url: https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-365/compliance/create-test-tune-dlp-policy
+ - url: /microsoft-365/compliance/create-test-tune-dlp-policy
text: Office 365 data loss prevention
- - url: https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-365/compliance/
+ - url: /microsoft-365/compliance/
text: Office 365 advanced compliance
- url: https://social.technet.microsoft.com/wiki/contents/articles/35748.office-365-what-is-customer-lockbox-and-how-to-enable-it.aspx
text: Deploying Lockbox
@@ -90,15 +90,15 @@ productDirectory:
- title: Analytics & insights
imageSrc: ./images/EDU-Education.svg
links:
- - url: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/power-bi/service-admin-administering-power-bi-in-your-organization
+ - url: /power-bi/service-admin-administering-power-bi-in-your-organization
text: Power BI for IT admins
- - url: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/#pivot=get-started
+ - url: /dynamics365/#pivot=get-started
text: Dynamics 365
# Card
- title: Find deployment help
imageSrc: ./images/EDU-FindHelp.svg
links:
- - url: https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-365/education/deploy/find-deployment-help
+ - url: /microsoft-365/education/deploy/find-deployment-help
text: IT admin help
- url: https://social.technet.microsoft.com/forums/en-us/home
text: TechNet
diff --git a/education/trial-in-a-box/TOC.md b/education/trial-in-a-box/TOC.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 71ed4cbd0c..0000000000
--- a/education/trial-in-a-box/TOC.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-# [Microsoft Education Trial in a Box](index.md)
-## [Educator Trial in a Box Guide](educator-tib-get-started.md)
-## [IT Admin Trial in a Box Guide](itadmin-tib-get-started.md)
-## [Microsoft Education Trial in a Box Support](support-options.md)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/education/trial-in-a-box/TOC.yml b/education/trial-in-a-box/TOC.yml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6050d91b67
--- /dev/null
+++ b/education/trial-in-a-box/TOC.yml
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+- name: Microsoft Education Trial in a Box
+ href: index.md
+ items:
+ - name: Educator Trial in a Box Guide
+ href: educator-tib-get-started.md
+ - name: IT Admin Trial in a Box Guide
+ href: itadmin-tib-get-started.md
+ - name: Microsoft Education Trial in a Box Support
+ href: support-options.md
diff --git a/education/trial-in-a-box/itadmin-tib-get-started.md b/education/trial-in-a-box/itadmin-tib-get-started.md
index 1965c6abf7..51e0cf23d8 100644
--- a/education/trial-in-a-box/itadmin-tib-get-started.md
+++ b/education/trial-in-a-box/itadmin-tib-get-started.md
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ To try out the IT admin tasks, start by logging in as an IT admin.
## 2. Configure Device B with Set up School PCs
Now you're ready to learn how to configure a brand new device. You will start on **Device A** by downloading and running the Set up School PCs app. Then, you will configure **Device B**.
-If you've previously used Set up School PCs to provision student devices, you can follow the instructions in this section to quickly configure **Device B**. Otherwise, we recommend you follow the instructions in [Use the Set up School PCs app](https://docs.microsoft.com/education/windows/use-set-up-school-pcs-app) for more detailed information, including tips for successfully running Set up School PCs.
+If you've previously used Set up School PCs to provision student devices, you can follow the instructions in this section to quickly configure **Device B**. Otherwise, we recommend you follow the instructions in [Use the Set up School PCs app](../windows/use-set-up-school-pcs-app.md) for more detailed information, including tips for successfully running Set up School PCs.
### Download, install, and get ready
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ If you've previously used Set up School PCs to provision student devices, you ca
- Set up School PCs will change some account management logic so that it sets the expiration time for an account to 180 days (without requiring sign-in).
- This setting also increases the maximum storage to 100% of the available disk space. This prevents the student's account from being erased if the student stores a lot of files or data or if the student doesn't use the PC over a prolonged period.
- **Let guests sign-in to these PCs** allows guests to use student PCs without a school account. If you select this option, a **Guest** account button will be added in the PC's sign-in screen to allow anyone to use the PC.
- - **Enable Windows 10 Autopilot Reset** enables IT admins to quickly remove personal files, apps, and settings, and reset Windows 10 devices from the lock screen any time and apply original settings and management enrollment the student PC is returned to a fully configured or known approved state. For more info, see [Autopilot Reset](https://docs.microsoft.com/education/windows/autopilot-reset).
+ - **Enable Windows 10 Autopilot Reset** enables IT admins to quickly remove personal files, apps, and settings, and reset Windows 10 devices from the lock screen any time and apply original settings and management enrollment the student PC is returned to a fully configured or known approved state. For more info, see [Autopilot Reset](../windows/autopilot-reset.md).
- **Lock screen background** shows the default background used for student PCs provisioned by Set up School PCs. Select **Browse** to change the default.
7. **Set up the Take a Test app** configures the device for taking quizzes and high-stakes assessments by some providers like Smarter Balanced. Windows will lock down the student PC so that students can't access anything else while taking the test.
@@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ The Microsoft Store for Education is where you can shop for more apps for your s

- In the **Private store** column of the **Products & services** page, the status for some apps will indicate that it's "In private store" while others will say "Adding to private store" or "Not applicable". Learn more about this in Distribute apps using your private store.
+ In the **Private store** column of the **Products & services** page, the status for some apps will indicate that it's "In private store" while others will say "Adding to private store" or "Not applicable". Learn more about this in Distribute apps using your private store.
> [!NOTE]
> Sync happens automatically, but it may take up to 36 hours for your organization's private store and 12 hours for Intune for Education to sync all your purchased apps.
@@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Update settings for all devices in your tenant by adding the **Documents** and *
## Verify correct device setup and other IT admin tasks
Follow these instructions to confirm if you configured your tenant correctly and the right apps and settings were applied to all users or devices on your tenant:
-* [Verify correct device setup](https://docs.microsoft.com/education/get-started/finish-setup-and-other-tasks#verify-correct-device-setup)
+* [Verify correct device setup](/microsoft-365/education/deploy/#verify-correct-device-setup)
1. Confirm that the apps you bought from the Microsoft Store for Education appear in the Windows Start screen's **Recently added** section.
@@ -256,13 +256,13 @@ Follow these instructions to confirm if you configured your tenant correctly and
2. Confirm that the folders you added, if you chose to customize the Windows interface from Intune for Education, appear in the Start menu.
3. If you added **Office 365 for Windows 10 S (Education Preview)** to the package and provisioned **Device B** with it, you need to click on one of the Office apps in the **Start** menu to complete app registration.
-* [Verify the device is Azure AD joined](https://docs.microsoft.com/education/get-started/finish-setup-and-other-tasks#verify-the-device-is-azure-ad-joined) - Confirm that your devices are being managed in Intune for Education.
-* [Add more users](https://docs.microsoft.com/education/get-started/finish-setup-and-other-tasks#add-more-users) - Go to the Microsoft 365 admin center to add more users.
+* [Verify the device is Azure AD joined](/microsoft-365/education/deploy/#verify-the-device-is-azure-ad-joined) - Confirm that your devices are being managed in Intune for Education.
+* [Add more users](/microsoft-365/education/deploy/#add-more-users) - Go to the Microsoft 365 admin center to add more users.
* Get app updates (including updates for Office 365 for Windows 10 S)
1. Open the **Start** menu and go to the **Microsoft Store**.
2. From the **Microsoft Store**, click **...** (See more) and select **Downloads and updates**.
3. In the **Downloads and updates** page, click **Get updates**.
-* [Try the BYOD scenario](https://docs.microsoft.com/education/get-started/finish-setup-and-other-tasks#connect-other-devices-to-your-cloud-infrastructure)
+* [Try the BYOD scenario](/microsoft-365/education/deploy/#connect-other-devices-to-your-cloud-infrastructure)
## Update your apps
@@ -278,4 +278,4 @@ For more information about checking for updates, and how to optionally turn on a
## Get more info
* Learn more at microsoft.com/education
* Find out if your school is eligible for a device trial at aka.ms/EDUTrialInABox
-* Buy Windows 10 devices
+* Buy Windows 10 devices
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/education/windows/TOC.md b/education/windows/TOC.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b55cbbfe02..0000000000
--- a/education/windows/TOC.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
-# [Windows 10 for Education](index.md)
-## [Windows 10 editions for education customers](windows-editions-for-education-customers.md)
-## [Windows 10 configuration recommendations for education customers](configure-windows-for-education.md)
-## [Deployment recommendations for school IT administrators](edu-deployment-recommendations.md)
-## [Set up Windows devices for education](set-up-windows-10.md)
-### [What's new in Set up School PCs](set-up-school-pcs-whats-new.md)
-### [Technical reference for the Set up School PCs app](set-up-school-pcs-technical.md)
-#### [Azure AD Join for school PCs](set-up-school-pcs-azure-ad-join.md)
-#### [Shared PC mode for school devices](set-up-school-pcs-shared-pc-mode.md)
-#### [Provisioning package settings](set-up-school-pcs-provisioning-package.md)
-### [Use the Set up School PCs app](use-set-up-school-pcs-app.md)
-### [Set up student PCs to join domain](set-up-students-pcs-to-join-domain.md)
-### [Provision student PCs with apps](set-up-students-pcs-with-apps.md)
-## [Take tests in Windows 10](take-tests-in-windows-10.md)
-### [Set up Take a Test on a single PC](take-a-test-single-pc.md)
-### [Set up Take a Test on multiple PCs](take-a-test-multiple-pcs.md)
-### [Take a Test app technical reference](take-a-test-app-technical.md)
-## [Reset devices with Autopilot Reset](autopilot-reset.md)
-## [Working with Microsoft Store for Education](education-scenarios-store-for-business.md)
-## [Get Minecraft: Education Edition](get-minecraft-for-education.md)
-### [For teachers: get Minecraft Education Edition](teacher-get-minecraft.md)
-### [For IT administrators: get Minecraft Education Edition](school-get-minecraft.md)
-### [Get Minecraft: Education Edition with Windows 10 device promotion](get-minecraft-device-promotion.md)
-## [Test Windows 10 in S mode on existing Windows 10 education devices](test-windows10s-for-edu.md)
-## [Enable Windows 10 in S mode on Surface Go devices](enable-s-mode-on-surface-go-devices.md)
-## [Deploy Windows 10 in a school](deploy-windows-10-in-a-school.md)
-## [Deploy Windows 10 in a school district](deploy-windows-10-in-a-school-district.md)
-## [Switch to Windows 10 Pro Education in S mode from Windows 10 Pro in S mode](s-mode-switch-to-edu.md)
-## [Change to Windows 10 Pro Education from Windows 10 Pro](change-to-pro-education.md)
-## [Chromebook migration guide](chromebook-migration-guide.md)
-## [Change history for Windows 10 for Education](change-history-edu.md)
diff --git a/education/windows/TOC.yml b/education/windows/TOC.yml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6571e40f23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/education/windows/TOC.yml
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+- name: Windows 10 for Education
+ href: index.md
+ items:
+ - name: Windows 10 editions for education customers
+ href: windows-editions-for-education-customers.md
+ - name: Windows 10 configuration recommendations for education customers
+ href: configure-windows-for-education.md
+ - name: Deployment recommendations for school IT administrators
+ href: edu-deployment-recommendations.md
+ - name: Set up Windows devices for education
+ href: set-up-windows-10.md
+ items:
+ - name: What's new in Set up School PCs
+ href: set-up-school-pcs-whats-new.md
+ - name: Technical reference for the Set up School PCs app
+ href: set-up-school-pcs-technical.md
+ items:
+ - name: Azure AD Join for school PCs
+ href: set-up-school-pcs-azure-ad-join.md
+ - name: Shared PC mode for school devices
+ href: set-up-school-pcs-shared-pc-mode.md
+ - name: Provisioning package settings
+ href: set-up-school-pcs-provisioning-package.md
+ - name: Use the Set up School PCs app
+ href: use-set-up-school-pcs-app.md
+ - name: Set up student PCs to join domain
+ href: set-up-students-pcs-to-join-domain.md
+ - name: Provision student PCs with apps
+ href: set-up-students-pcs-with-apps.md
+ - name: Take tests in Windows 10
+ href: take-tests-in-windows-10.md
+ items:
+ - name: Set up Take a Test on a single PC
+ href: take-a-test-single-pc.md
+ - name: Set up Take a Test on multiple PCs
+ href: take-a-test-multiple-pcs.md
+ - name: Take a Test app technical reference
+ href: take-a-test-app-technical.md
+ - name: Reset devices with Autopilot Reset
+ href: autopilot-reset.md
+ - name: Working with Microsoft Store for Education
+ href: education-scenarios-store-for-business.md
+ - name: "Get Minecraft: Education Edition"
+ href: get-minecraft-for-education.md
+ items:
+ - name: "For teachers: get Minecraft Education Edition"
+ href: teacher-get-minecraft.md
+ - name: "For IT administrators: get Minecraft Education Edition"
+ href: school-get-minecraft.md
+ - name: "Get Minecraft: Education Edition with Windows 10 device promotion"
+ href: get-minecraft-device-promotion.md
+ - name: Test Windows 10 in S mode on existing Windows 10 education devices
+ href: test-windows10s-for-edu.md
+ - name: Enable Windows 10 in S mode on Surface Go devices
+ href: enable-s-mode-on-surface-go-devices.md
+ - name: Deploy Windows 10 in a school
+ href: deploy-windows-10-in-a-school.md
+ - name: Deploy Windows 10 in a school district
+ href: deploy-windows-10-in-a-school-district.md
+ - name: Switch to Windows 10 Pro Education in S mode from Windows 10 Pro in S mode
+ href: s-mode-switch-to-edu.md
+ - name: Change to Windows 10 Pro Education from Windows 10 Pro
+ href: change-to-pro-education.md
+ - name: Chromebook migration guide
+ href: chromebook-migration-guide.md
+ - name: Change history for Windows 10 for Education
+ href: change-history-edu.md
diff --git a/education/windows/autopilot-reset.md b/education/windows/autopilot-reset.md
index e74ce568f1..dba25c2b0f 100644
--- a/education/windows/autopilot-reset.md
+++ b/education/windows/autopilot-reset.md
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ To enable Autopilot Reset in Windows 10, version 1709 (Fall Creators Update), yo
To use Autopilot Reset, [Windows Recovery Environment (WinRE) must be enabled on the device](#winre).
-**DisableAutomaticReDeploymentCredentials** is a policy that enables or disables the visibility of the credentials for Autopilot Reset. It is a policy node in the [Policy CSP](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-credentialproviders), **CredentialProviders/DisableAutomaticReDeploymentCredentials**. By default, this policy is set to 1 (Disable). This ensures that Autopilot Reset isn't triggered by accident.
+**DisableAutomaticReDeploymentCredentials** is a policy that enables or disables the visibility of the credentials for Autopilot Reset. It is a policy node in the [Policy CSP](/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-csp-credentialproviders), **CredentialProviders/DisableAutomaticReDeploymentCredentials**. By default, this policy is set to 1 (Disable). This ensures that Autopilot Reset isn't triggered by accident.
You can set the policy using one of these methods:
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ You can set the policy using one of these methods:
- Windows Configuration Designer
- You can [use Windows Configuration Designer](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/configuration/provisioning-packages/provisioning-create-package) to set the **Runtime settings > Policies > CredentialProviders > DisableAutomaticReDeploymentCredentials** setting and create a provisioning package.
+ You can [use Windows Configuration Designer](/windows/configuration/provisioning-packages/provisioning-create-package) to set the **Runtime settings > Policies > CredentialProviders > DisableAutomaticReDeploymentCredentials** setting and create a provisioning package.
- Set up School PCs app
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ Autopilot Reset is a two-step process: trigger it and then authenticate. Once yo
**To trigger Autopilot Reset**
-1. From the Windows device lock screen, enter the keystroke: **CTRL +  + R**.
+1. From the Windows device lock screen, enter the keystroke: **CTRL + Windows key + R**.

@@ -95,9 +95,9 @@ Autopilot Reset is a two-step process: trigger it and then authenticate. Once yo
## Troubleshoot Autopilot Reset
-Autopilot Reset will fail when the [Windows Recovery Environment (WinRE)](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows-hardware/manufacture/desktop/windows-recovery-environment--windows-re--technical-reference) is not enabled on the device. You will see `Error code: ERROR_NOT_SUPPORTED (0x80070032)`.
+Autopilot Reset will fail when the [Windows Recovery Environment (WinRE)](/windows-hardware/manufacture/desktop/windows-recovery-environment--windows-re--technical-reference) is not enabled on the device. You will see `Error code: ERROR_NOT_SUPPORTED (0x80070032)`.
-To make sure WinRE is enabled, use the [REAgentC.exe tool](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows-hardware/manufacture/desktop/reagentc-command-line-options) to run the following command:
+To make sure WinRE is enabled, use the [REAgentC.exe tool](/windows-hardware/manufacture/desktop/reagentc-command-line-options) to run the following command:
```
reagentc /enable
@@ -107,9 +107,4 @@ If Autopilot Reset fails after enabling WinRE, or if you are unable to enable Wi
## Related topics
-[Set up Windows devices for education](set-up-windows-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
+[Set up Windows devices for education](set-up-windows-10.md)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/education/windows/change-history-edu.md b/education/windows/change-history-edu.md
index 9302c8fdb4..aafc6c622f 100644
--- a/education/windows/change-history-edu.md
+++ b/education/windows/change-history-edu.md
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ This topic lists new and updated topics in the [Windows 10 for Education](index.
|New or changed topic | Description|
|-----------|-------------|
-|[Windows 10 Subscription Activation](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/deployment/windows-10-subscription-activation)|Subscription activation support for Windows 10 Pro Education to Windows 10 Education|
+|[Windows 10 Subscription Activation](/windows/deployment/windows-10-subscription-activation)|Subscription activation support for Windows 10 Pro Education to Windows 10 Education|
## April 2018
New or changed topic | Description
@@ -92,8 +92,8 @@ New or changed topic | Description
| New or changed topic | Description|
| --- | --- |
-| [Get started: Deploy and manage a full cloud IT solution with Microsoft Education](https://docs.microsoft.com/education/get-started/get-started-with-microsoft-education) | New. Learn how you can you can quickly and easily use the new Microsoft Education system to implement a full IT cloud solution for your school. |
-| [Microsoft Education documentation and resources](https://docs.microsoft.com/education) | New. Find links to more content for IT admins, teachers, students, and education app developers. |
+| [Get started: Deploy and manage a full cloud IT solution with Microsoft Education](/microsoft-365/education/deploy/) | New. Learn how you can you can quickly and easily use the new Microsoft Education system to implement a full IT cloud solution for your school. |
+| [Microsoft Education documentation and resources](/education) | New. Find links to more content for IT admins, teachers, students, and education app developers. |
| [Windows 10 configuration recommendations for education customers](configure-windows-for-education.md) | New. Provides guidance on ways to configure the OS diagnostic data, consumer experiences, Cortana, search, as well as some of the preinstalled apps, so that Windows is ready for your school. |
| [Deployment recommendations for school IT administrators](edu-deployment-recommendations.md) | Updated the screenshots and related instructions to reflect the current UI and experience. |
| [Set up Windows devices for education](set-up-windows-10.md) | Updated for Windows 10, version 1703. |
@@ -150,5 +150,5 @@ The topics in this library have been updated for Windows 10, version 1607 (also
| [Use the Set up School PCs app (Preview)](use-set-up-school-pcs-app.md) | New. Learn how the Set up School PCs app works and how to use it. |
| [Set up School PCs app technical reference (Preview)](set-up-school-pcs-technical.md) | New. Describes the changes that the Set up School PCs app makes to a PC. |
| [Take tests in Windows 10 (Preview)](take-tests-in-windows-10.md) [Set up Take a Test on a single PC (Preview)](take-a-test-single-pc.md) [Set up Take a Test on multiple PCs (Preview)](take-a-test-multiple-pcs.md) [Take a Test app technical reference (Preview)](take-a-test-app-technical.md) | New. Learn how to set up and use the Take a Test app. |
-| [Chromebook migration guide](chromebook-migration-guide.md) | Moved from [Windows 10 and Windows 10 Mobile](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/plan/index) library, originally published in November 2015 |
-| [Deploy Windows 10 in a school](deploy-windows-10-in-a-school.md) | Moved from [Windows 10 and Windows 10 Mobile](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/plan/index) library, originally published in May 2016 |
+| [Chromebook migration guide](chromebook-migration-guide.md) | Moved from [Windows 10 and Windows 10 Mobile](/windows/deployment/planning/) library, originally published in November 2015 |
+| [Deploy Windows 10 in a school](deploy-windows-10-in-a-school.md) | Moved from [Windows 10 and Windows 10 Mobile](/windows/deployment/planning/) library, originally published in May 2016 |
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/education/windows/change-to-pro-education.md b/education/windows/change-to-pro-education.md
index e40ce61ea7..b104042dbc 100644
--- a/education/windows/change-to-pro-education.md
+++ b/education/windows/change-to-pro-education.md
@@ -18,12 +18,12 @@ manager: dansimp
Windows 10 Pro Education is a new offering in Windows 10, version 1607. This edition builds on the commercial version of Windows 10 Pro and provides important management controls needed in schools by providing education-specific default settings.
If you have an education tenant and use devices with Windows 10 Pro, global administrators can opt-in to a free change to Windows 10 Pro Education depending on your scenario.
-- [Switch to Windows 10 Pro Education in S mode from Windows 10 Pro in S mode](https://docs.microsoft.com/education/windows/s-mode-switch-to-edu)
+- [Switch to Windows 10 Pro Education in S mode from Windows 10 Pro in S mode](./s-mode-switch-to-edu.md)
To take advantage of this offering, make sure you meet the [requirements for changing](#requirements-for-changing). For academic customers who are eligible to change to Windows 10 Pro Education, but are unable to use the above methods, contact Microsoft Support for assistance.
>[!IMPORTANT]
->If you change a Windows 10 Pro device to Windows 10 Pro Education using Microsoft Store for Education, [subscription activation](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/deployment/windows-10-subscription-activation) won't work.
+>If you change a Windows 10 Pro device to Windows 10 Pro Education using Microsoft Store for Education, [subscription activation](/windows/deployment/windows-10-subscription-activation) won't work.
## Requirements for changing
Before you change to Windows 10 Pro Education, make sure you meet these requirements:
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ You can use Windows Configuration Designer to create a provisioning package that
3. Complete the rest of the process for creating a provisioning package and then apply the package to the devices you want to change to Windows 10 Pro Education.
- For more information about using Windows Configuration Designer, see [Set up student PCs to join domain](https://technet.microsoft.com/edu/windows/set-up-students-pcs-to-join-domain).
+ For more information about using Windows Configuration Designer, see [Set up student PCs to join domain](./set-up-students-pcs-to-join-domain.md).
### Change using the Activation page
@@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ You need to synchronize these identities so that users will have a *single ident

For more information about integrating on-premises AD DS domains with Azure AD, see these resources:
-- [Integrating your on-premises identities with Azure Active Directory](https://azure.microsoft.com/documentation/articles/active-directory-aadconnect/)
+- [Integrating your on-premises identities with Azure Active Directory](/azure/active-directory/hybrid/whatis-hybrid-identity)
- [Azure AD + Domain Join + Windows 10](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/enterprisemobility/2016/02/17/azure-ad-domain-join-windows-10/)
## Related topics
@@ -315,5 +315,4 @@ For more information about integrating on-premises AD DS domains with Azure AD,
[Deploy Windows 10 in a school](deploy-windows-10-in-a-school.md)
[Deploy Windows 10 in a school district](deploy-windows-10-in-a-school-district.md)
[Compare Windows 10 editions](https://www.microsoft.com/WindowsForBusiness/Compare)
-[Windows 10 subscription activation](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/deployment/windows-10-subscription-activation)
-
+[Windows 10 subscription activation](/windows/deployment/windows-10-subscription-activation)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/education/windows/chromebook-migration-guide.md b/education/windows/chromebook-migration-guide.md
index 051954b11f..59da859362 100644
--- a/education/windows/chromebook-migration-guide.md
+++ b/education/windows/chromebook-migration-guide.md
@@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ Assign the setting-migration priority based on how critical the setting is to th
Many of your users may be using Google Apps Gmail to manage their email, calendars, and contacts. You need to create the list of users you will migrate and the best time to perform the migration.
-Office 365 supports automated migration from Google Apps Gmail to Office 365. For more information, see [Migrate Google Apps mailboxes to Office 365](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=690252).
+Office 365 supports automated migration from Google Apps Gmail to Office 365. For more information, see [Migrate Google Apps mailboxes to Office 365](/Exchange/mailbox-migration/migrating-imap-mailboxes/migrate-g-suite-mailboxes).
**Identify the list of user mailboxes to migrate**
@@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ In regards to creating the list of users you will migrate, it might seem that th
Also, when you perform a migration it is a great time to verify that all user mailboxes are active. In many environments there are a significant number of mailboxes that were provisioned for users that are no longer a part of the institution (such as interns or student assistants). You can eliminate these users from your list of user mailboxes to migrate.
-Create your list of user mailboxes to migrate in Excel 2016 based on the format described in step 7 in [Create a list of Gmail mailboxes to migrate](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=690253). If you follow this format, you can use the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet to perform the actual migration later in the process.
+Create your list of user mailboxes to migrate in Excel 2016 based on the format described in step 7 in [Create a list of Gmail mailboxes to migrate](/Exchange/mailbox-migration/migrating-imap-mailboxes/migrate-g-suite-mailboxes). If you follow this format, you can use the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet to perform the actual migration later in the process.
**Identify companion devices that access Google Apps Gmail**
@@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ Table 5. Select on-premises AD DS, Azure AD, or hybrid
X
-
Use System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager for management
+
Use Microsoft Endpoint Manager for management
X
X
@@ -493,7 +493,7 @@ You may ask the question, “Why plan for device, user, and app management befor
Also, planning management before deployment is essential to being ready to support the devices as you deploy them. You want to have your management processes and technology in place when the first teachers, facility, or students start using their new Windows device.
-Table 6 is a decision matrix that lists the device, user, and app management products and technologies and the features supported by each product or technology. The primary device, user, and app management products and technologies include Group Policy, System Center Configuration Manager, Intune, and the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT). Use this decision matrix to help you select the right combination of products and technologies for your plan.
+Table 6 is a decision matrix that lists the device, user, and app management products and technologies and the features supported by each product or technology. The primary device, user, and app management products and technologies include Group Policy, Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager, Intune, and the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT). Use this decision matrix to help you select the right combination of products and technologies for your plan.
Table 6. Device, user, and app management products and technologies
@@ -680,15 +680,15 @@ Table 7. Network infrastructure products and technologies and deployment resourc
@@ -878,7 +878,7 @@ If you do no want to migrate any user or device settings from the Chromebook dev
In the [Plan for email migration](#plan-email-migrate) section, you identified the user mailboxes to migrate, identified the companion devices that access Google Apps Gmail, and identified the optimal timing for migration. You can perform this migration before or after you deploy the Windows devices.
-Office 365 supports automated migration from Google Apps Gmail to Office 365. For more information on how to automate the migration from Google Apps Gmail to Office 365, see [Migrate Google Apps mailboxes to Office 365](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=690252).
+Office 365 supports automated migration from Google Apps Gmail to Office 365. For more information on how to automate the migration from Google Apps Gmail to Office 365, see [Migrate Google Apps mailboxes to Office 365](/Exchange/mailbox-migration/migrating-imap-mailboxes/migrate-g-suite-mailboxes).
Alternatively, if you want to migrate to Office 365 from:
@@ -886,9 +886,9 @@ Alternatively, if you want to migrate to Office 365 from:
- [Cutover Exchange Migration and Single Sign-On](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=690266)
- - [Step-By-Step: Migration of Exchange 2003 Server to Office 365](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=690267)
+ - [Step-By-Step: Migration of Exchange 2003 Server to Office 365](/archive/blogs/canitpro/step-by-step-migration-of-exchange-2003-server-to-office-365)
- - [Step-By-Step: Migrating from Exchange 2007 to Office 365](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=690268)
+ - [Step-By-Step: Migrating from Exchange 2007 to Office 365](/archive/blogs/canitpro/step-by-step-migrating-from-exchange-2007-to-office-365)
- **Another on-premises or cloud-based email service.** Follow the guidance from that vendor.
@@ -929,15 +929,15 @@ For example, if you selected to deploy Windows devices by each classroom, start
In some instances, you may receive the devices with Windows 10 already deployed, and want to use provisioning packages. In other cases, you may have a custom Windows 10 image that you want to deploy to the devices by using Configuration Manager and/or MDT. For information on how to deploy Windows 10 images to the devices, see the following resources:
-- [Windows Imaging and Configuration Designer](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=733911)
+- [Windows Imaging and Configuration Designer](/windows/configuration/provisioning-packages/provisioning-install-icd)
-- [Build and apply a provisioning package](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=733918)
+- [Build and apply a provisioning package](/windows/configuration/provisioning-packages/provisioning-create-package)
- [MDT documentation in the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT) 2013](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=690324)
-- [Step-By-Step: Installing Windows 8.1 From A USB Key](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=690265)
+- [Step-By-Step: Installing Windows 8.1 From A USB Key](/archive/blogs/canitpro/step-by-step-installing-windows-8-1-from-a-usb-key)
-- [Operating System Deployment in Configuration Manager](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=733916)
+- [Operating System Deployment in Configuration Manager](/previous-versions/system-center/system-center-2012-R2/gg682018(v=technet.10))
In addition to the Windows 10 image deployment, you may need to perform the following tasks as a part of device deployment:
@@ -954,15 +954,9 @@ After you complete these steps, your management system should take over the day-
## Related topics
-[Try it out: Windows 10 deployment (for education)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=623254)
+[Try it out: Windows 10 deployment (for education)](../index.yml)
-[Try it out: Windows 10 in the classroom](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=623255)
+[Try it out: Windows 10 in the classroom](../index.yml)
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/education/windows/configure-windows-for-education.md b/education/windows/configure-windows-for-education.md
index 688b66c92b..f662b8ac78 100644
--- a/education/windows/configure-windows-for-education.md
+++ b/education/windows/configure-windows-for-education.md
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ ms.pagetype: edu
ms.localizationpriority: medium
author: dansimp
ms.author: dansimp
-ms.date: 08/31/2017
+ms.date:
ms.reviewer:
manager: dansimp
---
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ manager: dansimp
- Windows 10
-Privacy is important to us, we want to provide you with ways to customize the OS diagnostic data, consumer experiences, Cortana, search, as well as some of the preinstalled apps, for usage with [education editions of Windows 10](windows-editions-for-education-customers.md) in education environments. These features work on all Windows 10 editions, but education editions of Windows 10 have the settings preconfigured. We recommend that all Windows 10 devices in an education setting be configured with **[SetEduPolicies](https://docs.microsoft.com/education/windows/configure-windows-for-education#setedupolicies)** enabled. See the following table for more information. To learn more about Microsoft's commitment to privacy, see [Windows 10 and privacy](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=809305).
+Privacy is important to us, we want to provide you with ways to customize the OS diagnostic data, consumer experiences, Cortana, search, as well as some of the preinstalled apps, for usage with [education editions of Windows 10](windows-editions-for-education-customers.md) in education environments. These features work on all Windows 10 editions, but education editions of Windows 10 have the settings preconfigured. We recommend that all Windows 10 devices in an education setting be configured with **[SetEduPolicies](#setedupolicies)** enabled. See the following table for more information. To learn more about Microsoft's commitment to privacy, see [Windows 10 and privacy](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=809305).
We want all students to have the chance to use the apps they need for success in the classroom and all school personnel to have apps they need for their job. Students and school personnel who use assistive technology apps not available in the Microsoft Store for Education, and use devices running Windows 10 S, will be able to configure the device at no additional charge to Windows 10 Pro Education. To learn more about the steps to configure this, see [Switch to Windows 10 Pro Education from Windows 10 Pro or Windows 10 S](change-to-pro-education.md).
@@ -28,12 +28,12 @@ In Windows 10, version 1703 (Creators Update), it is straightforward to configur
| Area | How to configure | What this does | Windows 10 Education | Windows 10 Pro Education | Windows 10 S |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
-| **Diagnostic Data** | **AllowTelemetry** | Sets Diagnostic Data to [Basic](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/configuration/configure-windows-telemetry-in-your-organization) | This is already set | This is already set | The policy must be set |
+| **Diagnostic Data** | **AllowTelemetry** | Sets Diagnostic Data to [Basic](/windows/configuration/configure-windows-telemetry-in-your-organization) | This is already set | This is already set | The policy must be set |
| **Microsoft consumer experiences** | **SetEduPolicies** | Disables suggested content from Windows such as app recommendations | This is already set | This is already set | The policy must be set |
| **Cortana** | **AllowCortana** | Disables Cortana * Cortana is enabled by default on all editions in Windows 10, version 1703 | If using Windows 10 Education, upgrading from Windows 10, version 1607 to Windows 10, version 1703 will enable Cortana. See the [Recommended configuration](#recommended-configuration) section below for recommended Cortana settings. | If using Windows 10 Pro Education, upgrading from Windows 10, version 1607 to Windows 10, version 1703 will enable Cortana. See the [Recommended configuration](#recommended-configuration) section below for recommended Cortana settings. | See the [Recommended configuration](#recommended-configuration) section below for recommended Cortana settings. |
| **Safe search** | **SetEduPolicies** | Locks Bing safe search to Strict in Microsoft Edge | This is already set | This is already set | The policy must be set |
-| **Bing search advertising** | Ad free search with Bing | Disables ads when searching the internet with Bing in Microsoft Edge | Depending on your specific requirements, there are different ways to configure this as detailed in [Ad-free search with Bing](#ad-free-search-with-bing) | Depending on your specific requirements, there are different ways to configure this as detailed in [Ad-free search with Bing](#ad-free-search-with-bing) | Depending on your specific requirements, there are different ways to configure this as detailed in [Ad-free search with Bing](#ad-free-search-with-bing) |
-| **Apps** | **SetEduPolicies** | Preinstalled apps like Microsoft Edge, Movies & TV, Groove, and Skype become education ready * Any app can detect Windows is running in an education ready configuration through [IsEducationEnvironment](https://docs.microsoft.com/uwp/api/windows.system.profile.educationsettings) | This is already set | This is already set | The policy must be set |
+| **Bing search advertising** | Ad free search with Bing | Disables ads when searching the internet with Bing in Microsoft Edge. See [Ad-free search with Bing](#ad-free-search-with-bing | View configuration instructions as detailed in [Ad-free search with Bing](#ad-free-search-with-bing) | View configuration instructions as detailed in [Ad-free search with Bing](#ad-free-search-with-bing) | View configuration instructions as detailed in [Ad-free search with Bing](#ad-free-search-with-bing) |
+| **Apps** | **SetEduPolicies** | Preinstalled apps like Microsoft Edge, Movies & TV, Groove, and Skype become education ready * Any app can detect Windows is running in an education ready configuration through [IsEducationEnvironment](/uwp/api/windows.system.profile.educationsettings) | This is already set | This is already set | The policy must be set |
## Recommended configuration
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ It is easy to be education ready when using Microsoft products. We recommend the
3. On PCs running Windows 10, version 1703:
1. Provision the PC using one of these methods:
* [Provision PCs with the Set up School PCs app](use-set-up-school-pcs-app.md) - This will automatically set both **SetEduPolicies** to True and **AllowCortana** to False.
- * [Provision PCs with a custom package created with Windows Configuration Designer](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/configure/provisioning-create-package) - Make sure to set both **SetEduPolicies** to True and **AllowCortana** to False.
+ * [Provision PCs with a custom package created with Windows Configuration Designer](/windows/configuration/provisioning-packages/provisioning-create-package) - Make sure to set both **SetEduPolicies** to True and **AllowCortana** to False.
2. Join the PC to Azure Active Directory.
* Use Set up School PCs or Windows Configuration Designer to bulk enroll to Azure AD.
* Manually Azure AD join the PC during the Windows device setup experience.
@@ -74,10 +74,10 @@ You can configure Windows through provisioning or management tools including ind
You can set all the education compliance areas through both provisioning and management tools. Additionally, these Microsoft education tools will ensure PCs that you set up are education ready:
- [Set up School PCs](use-set-up-school-pcs-app.md)
-- [Intune for Education](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune-education/available-settings)
+- [Intune for Education](/intune-education/available-settings)
## AllowCortana
-**AllowCortana** is a policy that enables or disables Cortana. It is a policy node in the Policy configuration service provider, [AllowCortana](https://msdn.microsoft.com/windows/hardware/commercialize/customize/mdm/policy-configuration-service-provider#experience-allowcortana).
+**AllowCortana** is a policy that enables or disables Cortana. It is a policy node in the Policy configuration service provider, [AllowCortana](/windows/client-management/mdm/policy-configuration-service-provider#experience-allowcortana).
> [!NOTE]
> See the [Recommended configuration](#recommended-configuration) section for recommended Cortana settings.
@@ -103,13 +103,13 @@ Set **Computer Configuration > Administrative Templates > Windows Components > S
### Provisioning tools
- [Set up School PCs](use-set-up-school-pcs-app.md) always sets this policy in provisioning packages it creates.
-- [Windows Configuration Designer](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/configure/provisioning-create-package)
+- [Windows Configuration Designer](/windows/configuration/provisioning-packages/provisioning-create-package)
- Under **Runtime settings**, click the **Policies** settings group, set **Experience > Cortana** to **No**.

## SetEduPolicies
-**SetEduPolicies** is a policy that applies a set of configuration behaviors to Windows. It is a policy node in the [SharedPC configuration service provider](https://msdn.microsoft.com/windows/hardware/commercialize/customize/mdm/sharedpc-csp).
+**SetEduPolicies** is a policy that applies a set of configuration behaviors to Windows. It is a policy node in the [SharedPC configuration service provider](/windows/client-management/mdm/sharedpc-csp).
Use one of these methods to set this policy.
@@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Use one of these methods to set this policy.

### Group Policy
-**SetEduPolicies** is not natively supported in Group Policy. Instead, use the [MDM Bridge WMI Provider](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/desktop/dn905224(v=vs.85).aspx) to set the policy in [MDM SharedPC](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/desktop/mt779129(v=vs.85).aspx).
+**SetEduPolicies** is not natively supported in Group Policy. Instead, use the [MDM Bridge WMI Provider](/windows/win32/dmwmibridgeprov/mdm-bridge-wmi-provider-portal) to set the policy in [MDM SharedPC](/windows/win32/dmwmibridgeprov/mdm-sharedpc).
For example:
@@ -144,40 +144,16 @@ For example:
### Provisioning tools
- [Set up School PCs](use-set-up-school-pcs-app.md) always sets this policy in provisioning packages it creates.
-- [Windows Configuration Designer](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/configure/provisioning-create-package)
+- [Windows Configuration Designer](/windows/configuration/provisioning-packages/provisioning-create-package)
- Under **Runtime settings**, click the **SharedPC** settings group, set **PolicyCustomization > SetEduPolicies** to **True**.

## Ad-free search with Bing
-Provide an ad-free experience that is a safer, more private search option for K–12 education institutions in the United States. Additional information is available at https://www.bing.com/classroom/about-us.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> If you enable the guest account in shared PC mode, students using the guest account will not have an ad-free experience searching with Bing in Microsoft Edge unless the PC is connected to your school network and your school network has been configured as described in [IP registration for entire school network using Microsoft Edge](#ip-registration-for-entire-school-network-using-microsoft-edge).
+Provide an ad-free experience that is a safer, more private search option for K–12 education institutions in the United States.
### Configurations
-#### IP registration for entire school network using Microsoft Edge
-Ad-free searching with Bing in Microsoft Edge can be configured at the network level. To configure this, email bingintheclassroom@microsoft.com with the subject "New Windows 10, version 1703 (Creators Update) Registration: [School District Name]" and the include the following information in the body of the email.
-
-**District information**
-- **District or School Name:**
-- **Outbound IP Addresses (IP Range + CIDR):**
-- **Address:**
-- **City:**
-- **State Abbreviation:**
-- **Zip Code:**
-
-**Registrant information**
-- **First Name:**
-- **Last Name:**
-- **Job Title:**
-- **Email Address:**
-- **Opt-In for Email Announcements?:**
-- **Phone Number:**
-
-This will suppress ads when searching with Bing on Microsoft Edge when the PC is connected to the school network.
-
#### Azure AD and Office 365 Education tenant
To suppress ads when searching with Bing on Microsoft Edge on any network, follow these steps:
@@ -185,6 +161,8 @@ To suppress ads when searching with Bing on Microsoft Edge on any network, follo
2. Domain join the Windows 10 PCs to your Azure AD tenant (this is the same as your Office 365 tenant).
3. Configure **SetEduPolicies** according to one of the methods described in the previous sections in this topic.
4. Have students sign in with their Azure AD identity, which is the same as your Office 365 identity, to use the PC.
+> [!NOTE]
+> If you are verifying your Office 365 domain to prove education status (step 1 above), you may need to wait up to 7 days for the ad-free experience to take effect. Microsoft recommends not to roll out the browser to your students until that time.
#### Office 365 sign-in to Bing
To suppress ads only when the student signs into Bing with their Office 365 account in Microsoft Edge, follow these steps:
@@ -192,8 +170,6 @@ To suppress ads only when the student signs into Bing with their Office 365 acco
1. Configure **SetEduPolicies** according to one of the methods described in the previous sections in this topic.
2. Have students sign into Bing with their Office 365 account.
-### More information
-For more information on all the possible Bing configuration methods, see https://aka.ms/e4ahor.
## Related topics
-[Deployment recommendations for school IT administrators](edu-deployment-recommendations.md)
+[Deployment recommendations for school IT administrators](edu-deployment-recommendations.md)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/education/windows/deploy-windows-10-in-a-school-district.md b/education/windows/deploy-windows-10-in-a-school-district.md
index 35146fcace..79c0a643ed 100644
--- a/education/windows/deploy-windows-10-in-a-school-district.md
+++ b/education/windows/deploy-windows-10-in-a-school-district.md
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: Deploy Windows 10 in a school district (Windows 10)
-description: Learn how to deploy Windows 10 in a school district. Integrate the school environment with Office 365, Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS), and Microsoft Azure Active Directory (Azure AD), use System Center Configuration Manager, Intune, and Group Policy to manage devices.
+description: Learn how to deploy Windows 10 in a school district. Integrate the school environment with Office 365, Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS), and Microsoft Azure Active Directory (Azure AD), use Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager, Intune, and Group Policy to manage devices.
keywords: configure, tools, device, school district, deploy Windows 10
ms.prod: w10
ms.mktglfcycl: plan
@@ -20,75 +20,112 @@ manager: dansimp
- Windows 10
-This guide shows you how to deploy the Windows 10 operating system in a school district. You learn how to deploy Windows 10 in classrooms; integrate the school environment with Microsoft Office 365, Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS), and Microsoft Azure Active Directory (Azure AD); and deploy Windows 10 and your apps to new devices or upgrade existing devices to Windows 10. This guide also describes how to use Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager, Microsoft Intune, and Group Policy to manage devices. Finally, the guide discusses common, ongoing maintenance tasks that you will perform after initial deployment as well as the automated tools and built-in features of the operating system.
+This guide shows you how to deploy the Windows 10 operating system in a school district. You learn how to deploy Windows 10 in classrooms; integrate the school environment with Microsoft Office 365, Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS), and Microsoft Azure Active Directory (Azure AD); and deploy Windows 10 and your apps to new devices or upgrade existing devices to Windows 10. This guide also describes how to use Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager, Microsoft Intune, and Group Policy to manage devices. Finally, the guide discusses common, ongoing maintenance tasks that you will perform after initial deployment as well as the automated tools and built-in features of the operating system.
## Prepare for district deployment
Proper preparation is essential for a successful district deployment. To avoid common mistakes, your first step is to plan a typical district configuration. Just as with building a house, you need a blueprint for what your district and individual schools should look like when it’s finished. The second step in preparation is to learn how you will manage the users, apps, and devices in your district. Just as a builder needs to have the right tools to build a house, you need the right set of tools to deploy your district.
->**Note** This guide focuses on Windows 10 deployment and management in a district. For management of other devices and operating systems in education environments, see [Manage BYOD and corporate-owned devices with MDM solutions](https://www.microsoft.com/cloud-platform/mobile-device-management).
+> [!NOTE]
+> This guide focuses on Windows 10 deployment and management in a district. For management of other devices and operating systems in education environments, see [Manage BYOD and corporate-owned devices with MDM solutions](https://www.microsoft.com/cloud-platform/mobile-device-management).
### Plan a typical district configuration
As part of preparing for your district deployment, you need to plan your district configuration — the focus of this guide. Figure 1 illustrates a typical finished district configuration that you can use as a model (the blueprint in our builder analogy) for the finished state.
-
+> [!div class="mx-imgBorder"]
+> 
*Figure 1. Typical district configuration for this guide*
A *district* consists of multiple schools, typically at different physical locations. Figure 2 illustrates a typical school configuration within the district that this guide uses.
-
+> [!div class="mx-imgBorder"]
+> 
*Figure 2. Typical school configuration for this guide*
Finally, each school consists of multiple classrooms. Figure 3 shows the classroom configuration this guide uses.
-
+> [!div class="mx-imgBorder"]
+> 
*Figure 3. Typical classroom configuration in a school*
This district configuration has the following characteristics:
* It contains one or more admin devices.
+
* It contains two or more schools.
+
* Each school contains two or more classrooms.
+
* Each classroom contains one teacher device.
+
* The classrooms connect to each other through multiple subnets.
+
* All devices in each classroom connect to a single subnet.
+
* All devices have high-speed, persistent connections to each other and to the Internet.
+
* All teachers and students have access to Microsoft Store or Microsoft Store for Business.
+
* You install a 64-bit version of Windows 10 on the admin device.
+
* You install the Windows Assessment and Deployment Kit (Windows ADK) on the admin device.
+
* You install the 64-bit version of the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit (MDT) 2013 Update 2 on the admin device.
- >**Note** In this guide, all references to MDT refer to the 64-bit version of MDT 2013 Update 2.
+
+ > [!NOTE]
+ > In this guide, all references to MDT refer to the 64-bit version of MDT 2013 Update 2.
+
* The devices use Azure AD in Office 365 Education for identity management.
-* If you have on-premises AD DS, you can [integrate Azure AD with on-premises AD DS](https://azure.microsoft.com/documentation/articles/active-directory-aadconnect/).
-* Use [Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/), [Mobile Device Management for Office 365](https://support.office.com/en-us/article/Set-up-Mobile-Device-Management-MDM-in-Office-365-dd892318-bc44-4eb1-af00-9db5430be3cd?ui=en-US&rs=en-US&ad=US), or [Group Policy in AD DS](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc725828.aspx) to manage devices.
+
+* If you have on-premises AD DS, you can [integrate Azure AD with on-premises AD DS](/azure/active-directory/hybrid/whatis-hybrid-identity).
+
+* Use [Intune](/intune/), [Mobile Device Management for Office 365](https://support.office.com/en-us/article/Set-up-Mobile-Device-Management-MDM-in-Office-365-dd892318-bc44-4eb1-af00-9db5430be3cd?ui=en-US&rs=en-US&ad=US), or [Group Policy in AD DS](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2008-R2-and-2008/cc725828(v=ws.10)) to manage devices.
+
* Each device supports a one-student-per-device or multiple-students-per-device scenario.
+
* The devices can be a mixture of different make, model, and processor architecture (32-bit or 64-bit) or be identical.
+
* To initiate Windows 10 deployment, use a USB flash drive, DVD-ROM or CD-ROM, or Pre-Boot Execution Environment (PXE) boot.
+
* The devices can be a mixture of different Windows 10 editions, such as Windows 10 Pro, Windows 10 Enterprise, or Windows 10 Education.
-Use these characteristics at a minimum as you deploy your schools. If your district deployment is less complex, you may want to review the guidance in [Deploy Windows 10 in a school](https://technet.microsoft.com/edu/windows/deploy-windows-10-in-a-school).
+Use these characteristics at a minimum as you deploy your schools. If your district deployment is less complex, you may want to review the guidance in [Deploy Windows 10 in a school](./deploy-windows-10-in-a-school.md).
->**Note** This guide focuses on Intune as the mobile device management (MDM) solution. If you want to use an MDM solution other than Intune, ignore the Intune-specific content in this guide. For each section, contact your MDM provider to determine the features and management capabilities for your institution.
+> [!NOTE]
+> This guide focuses on Intune as the mobile device management (MDM) solution. If you want to use an MDM solution other than Intune, ignore the Intune-specific content in this guide. For each section, contact your MDM provider to determine the features and management capabilities for your institution.
Office 365 Education allows:
* Students and faculty to use Microsoft Office to create and edit Microsoft Word, OneNote, PowerPoint, and Excel documents in a browser.
+
* Teachers to use the [OneNote Class Notebook app](https://www.onenote.com/classnotebook) to share content and collaborate with students.
+
* Faculty to use the [OneNote Staff Notebooks app](https://www.onenote.com/staffnotebookedu) to collaborate with other teachers, the administration, and faculty.
+
* Teachers to employ Sway to create interactive educational digital storytelling.
+
* Students and faculty to use email and calendars, with mailboxes up to 50 GB per user.
+
* Faculty to use advanced email features like email archiving and legal hold capabilities.
+
* Faculty to help prevent unauthorized users from accessing documents and email by using Microsoft Azure Rights Management.
+
* Faculty to use advanced compliance tools on the unified eDiscovery pages in the Office 365 Compliance Center.
+
* Faculty to host online classes, parent–teacher conferences, and other collaboration in Skype for Business.
+
* Students and faculty to access up to 1 TB of personal cloud storage that users inside and outside the educational institution can share through OneDrive for Business.
+
* Teachers to provide collaboration in the classroom through Microsoft SharePoint Online team sites.
+
* Students and faculty to use Office 365 Video to manage videos.
+
* Students and faculty to use Yammer to collaborate through private social networking.
+
* Students and faculty to access classroom resources from anywhere on any device (including Windows 10 Mobile, iOS, and Android devices).
For more information about Office 365 Education features and an FAQ, go to [Office 365 Education plans and pricing](https://products.office.com/en-us/academic).
@@ -99,24 +136,28 @@ Now that you have the plan (blueprint) for your district and individual schools
The primary tool you will use to deploy Windows 10 in your school is MDT, which uses Windows ADK components to make deployment easier. You could just use the Windows ADK to perform your deployment, but MDT simplifies the process by providing an intuitive, wizard-driven user interface (UI).
-You can use MDT as a stand-alone tool or integrate it with System Center Configuration Manager. As a stand-alone tool, MDT performs Lite Touch Installation (LTI) deployments—deployments that require minimal infrastructure and allow you to control the level of automation. When integrated with System Center Configuration Manager, MDT performs Zero Touch Installation (ZTI) deployments, which require more infrastructure (such as System Center Configuration Manager) but result in fully automated deployments.
+You can use MDT as a stand-alone tool or integrate it with Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager. As a stand-alone tool, MDT performs Lite Touch Installation (LTI) deployments—deployments that require minimal infrastructure and allow you to control the level of automation. When integrated with Configuration Manager, MDT performs Zero Touch Installation (ZTI) deployments, which require more infrastructure (such as Configuration Manager) but result in fully automated deployments.
-This guide focuses on LTI deployments to deploy the reference device. You can use ZTI deployments with System Center Configuration Manager or LTI deployments to deploy the reference images to your faculty and student devices. If you want to only use MDT, see [Deploy Windows 10 in a school](https://technet.microsoft.com/edu/windows/deploy-windows-10-in-a-school).
+This guide focuses on LTI deployments to deploy the reference device. You can use ZTI deployments with Configuration Manager or LTI deployments to deploy the reference images to your faculty and student devices. If you want to only use MDT, see [Deploy Windows 10 in a school](./deploy-windows-10-in-a-school.md).
MDT includes the Deployment Workbench, a console from which you can manage the deployment of Windows 10 and your apps. You configure the deployment process in the Deployment Workbench, including the management of operating systems, device drivers, apps, and migration of user settings on existing devices.
-LTI performs deployment from a *deployment share* — a network-shared folder on the device on which you installed MDT. You can perform over-the-network deployments from the deployment share or perform deployments from a local copy of the deployment share on a USB drive or DVD. You will learn more about MDT in the [Prepare the admin device](#prepare-the-admin-device) section.
+LTI performs deployment from a *deployment share* — a network-shared folder on the device on which you installed MDT. You can perform over-the-network deployments from the deployment share or perform deployments from a local copy of the deployment share on a USB drive or DVD. You will learn more about MDT in [Prepare the admin device](#prepare-the-admin-device), earlier in this article.
The focus of MDT is deployment, so you also need tools that help you manage your Windows 10 devices and apps. You can manage Windows 10 devices and apps with Intune, the Compliance Management feature in Office 365, or Group Policy in AD DS. You can use any combination of these tools based on your school requirements.
-ZTI performs fully automated deployments using System Center Configuration Manager and MDT. Although you could use System Center Configuration Manager by itself, using System Center Configuration Manager with MDT provides an easier process for deploying operating systems. MDT works with the operating system deployment feature in System Center Configuration Manager.
+ZTI performs fully automated deployments using Configuration Manager and MDT. Although you could use Configuration Manager by itself, using Configuration Manager with MDT provides an easier process for deploying operating systems. MDT works with the operating system deployment feature in Configuration Manager.
The configuration process requires the following devices:
-* **Admin device.** This is the device you use for your day-to-day job functions. It’s also the one you use to create and manage the Windows 10 and app deployment process. You install the Windows ADK, MDT, and the System Center Configuration Manager Console on this device.
+* **Admin device.** This is the device you use for your day-to-day job functions. It’s also the one you use to create and manage the Windows 10 and app deployment process. You install the Windows ADK, MDT, and the Configuration Manager Console on this device.
+
* **Reference devices.** These are the devices that you will use as a template for the faculty and student devices. You install Windows 10 and Windows desktop apps on these devices, and then capture an image (.wim file) of the devices.
+
You will have a reference device for each type of device in your district. For example, if your district has Surface, HP Stream, Dell Inspiron, and Lenovo Yoga devices, then you would have a reference device for each model. For more information about approved Windows 10 devices, see [Explore devices](https://www.microsoft.com/windows/view-all).
+
* **Faculty and staff devices.** These are the devices that the teachers, faculty, and staff use for their day-to-day job functions. You use the admin device to deploy (or upgrade) Windows 10 and apps to these devices.
+
* **Student devices.** The students will use these devices. You will use the admin device deploy (or upgrade) Windows 10 and apps to them.
The high-level process for deploying and configuring devices within individual classrooms, individual schools, and the district as a whole is as follows and illustrated in Figure 4:
@@ -133,13 +174,14 @@ The high-level process for deploying and configuring devices within individual c
6. On the reference devices, deploy Windows 10 and the Windows desktop apps on the device, and then capture the reference image from the devices.
-7. Import the captured reference images into MDT or System Center Configuration Manager.
+7. Import the captured reference images into MDT or Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager.
8. On the student and faculty devices, deploy Windows 10 to new or existing devices, or upgrade eligible devices to Windows 10.
9. On the admin device, manage the Windows 10 devices and apps, the Office 365 subscription, and the AD DS–Azure AD integration.
-
+> [!div class="mx-imgBorder"]
+> 
*Figure 4. How district configuration works*
@@ -160,9 +202,9 @@ Before you select the deployment and management methods, you need to review the
|Scenario feature |Cloud-centric|On-premises and cloud|
|---|---|---|
|Identity management | Azure AD (stand-alone or integrated with on-premises AD DS) | AD DS integrated with Azure AD |
-|Windows 10 deployment | MDT only | System Center Configuration Manager with MDT |
+|Windows 10 deployment | MDT only | Microsoft Endpoint Manager with MDT |
|Configuration setting management | Intune | Group Policy
Intune|
-|App and update management | Intune |System Center Configuration Manager
Intune|
*Table 1. Deployment and management scenarios*
@@ -174,14 +216,14 @@ These scenarios assume the need to support:
Some constraints exist in these scenarios. As you select the deployment and management methods for your device, keep the following constraints in mind:
* You can use Group Policy or Intune to manage configuration settings on a device but not both.
-* You can use System Center Configuration Manager or Intune to manage apps and updates on a device but not both.
+* You can use Microsoft Endpoint Manager or Intune to manage apps and updates on a device but not both.
* You cannot manage multiple users on a device with Intune if the device is AD DS domain joined.
Use the cloud-centric scenario and on-premises and cloud scenario as a guide for your district. You may need to customize these scenarios, however, based on your district. As you go through the [Select the deployment methods](#select-the-deployment-methods), [Select the configuration setting management methods](#select-the-configuration-setting-management-methods), and the [Select the app and update management products](#select-the-app-and-update-management-products) sections, remember these scenarios and use them as the basis for your district.
### Select the deployment methods
-To deploy Windows 10 and your apps, you can use MDT by itself or System Center Configuration Manager and MDT together. For a district, there are a few ways to deploy Windows 10 to devices. Table 2 lists the methods that this guide describes and recommends. Use this information to determine which combination of deployment methods is right for your institution.
+To deploy Windows 10 and your apps, you can use MDT by itself or Microsoft Endpoint Manager and MDT together. For a district, there are a few ways to deploy Windows 10 to devices. Table 2 lists the methods that this guide describes and recommends. Use this information to determine which combination of deployment methods is right for your institution.
@@ -230,8 +272,8 @@ Select this method when you:
-
System Center Configuration Manager
-
System Center Configuration Manager is an on-premises solution that supports operating system management throughout the entire operating system life cycle. You can use System Center Configuration Manager to deploy and upgrade Windows 10. In addition, you can manage Windows desktop and Microsoft Store apps and software updates as well as provide antivirus and antimalware protection.
+
Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager
+
Configuration Manager is an on-premises solution that supports operating system management throughout the entire operating system life cycle. You can use Configuration Manager to deploy and upgrade Windows 10. In addition, you can manage Windows desktop and Microsoft Store apps and software updates as well as provide antivirus and antimalware protection.
Select this method when you:
Want to deploy Windows 10 to institution-owned devices that are domain joined (personal devices are typically not domain joined).
@@ -249,7 +291,7 @@ Select this method when you:
The disadvantages of this method are that it:
-
Carries an additional cost for System Center Configuration Manager server licenses (if the institution does not have System Center Configuration Manager already).
+
Carries an additional cost for Microsoft Endpoint Manager server licenses (if the institution does not have Configuration Manager already).
Can deploy Windows 10 only to domain-joined (institution-owned devices).
Requires an AD DS infrastructure (if the institution does not have AD DS already).
@@ -265,7 +307,7 @@ Record the deployment methods you selected in Table 3.
|Selection | Deployment method|
|--------- | -----------------|
| |MDT by itself |
-| |System Center Configuration Manager and MDT|
+| |Microsoft Endpoint Manager and MDT|
*Table 3. Deployment methods selected*
@@ -320,7 +362,7 @@ Select this method when you:
Intune
Intune is a cloud-based management system that allows you to specify configuration settings for Windows 10, previous versions of Windows, and other operating systems (such as iOS or Android). Intune is a subscription-based cloud service that integrates with Office 365 and Azure AD.
-Intune is the cloud-based management system described in this guide, but you can use other MDM providers. If you use an MDM provider other than Intune, integration with System Center Configuration Manager is unavailable.
+Intune is the cloud-based management system described in this guide, but you can use other MDM providers. If you use an MDM provider other than Intune, integration with Configuration Manager is unavailable.
Select this method when you:
@@ -364,7 +406,7 @@ Record the configuration setting management methods you selected in Table 5. Alt
#### Select the app and update management products
-For a district, there are many ways to manage apps and software updates. Table 6 lists the products that this guide describes and recommends. Although you could manage updates by using [Windows Updates or Windows Server Update Services (WSUS)](https://technet.microsoft.com/windowsserver/bb332157.aspx), you still need to use System Center Configuration Manager or Intune to manage apps. Therefore, it only makes sense to use one or both of these tools for update management.
+For a district, there are many ways to manage apps and software updates. Table 6 lists the products that this guide describes and recommends. Although you could manage updates by using [Windows Updates or Windows Server Update Services (WSUS)](/windows/deployment/deploy-whats-new), you still need to Configuration Manager or Intune to manage apps. Therefore, it only makes sense to use one or both of these tools for update management.
Use the information in Table 6 to determine which combination of app and update management products is right for your district.
@@ -382,10 +424,10 @@ Use the information in Table 6 to determine which combination of app and update
-
System Center Configuration Manager
-
System Center Configuration Manager is an on-premises solution that allows you to specify configuration settings for Windows 10; previous versions of Windows; and other operating systems, such as iOS or Android, through integration with Intune.
System Center Configuration Manager supports application management throughout the entire application life cycle. You can deploy, upgrade, manage multiple versions, and retire applications by using System Center Configuration Manager. You can also manage Windows desktop and Microsoft Store applications.
Select this method when you:
+
Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager
+
Configuration Manager is an on-premises solution that allows you to specify configuration settings for Windows 10; previous versions of Windows; and other operating systems, such as iOS or Android, through integration with Intune.
Configuration Manager supports application management throughout the entire application life cycle. You can deploy, upgrade, manage multiple versions, and retire applications by using Configuration Manager. You can also manage Windows desktop and Microsoft Store applications.
Select this method when you:
-
Selected System Center Configuration Manager to deploy Windows 10.
+
Selected Configuration Manager to deploy Windows 10.
Want to manage institution-owned devices that are domain joined (personally owned devices are typically not domain joined).
Want to manage AD DS domain-joined devices.
Have an existing AD DS infrastructure.
@@ -404,7 +446,7 @@ Use the information in Table 6 to determine which combination of app and update
The disadvantages of this method are that it:
-
Carries an additional cost for System Center Configuration Manager server licenses (if the institution does not have System Center Configuration Manager already).
+
Carries an additional cost for Configuration Manager server licenses (if the institution does not have Configuration Manager already).
Carries an additional cost for Windows Server licenses and the corresponding server hardware.
Can only manage domain-joined (institution-owned devices).
Requires an AD DS infrastructure (if the institution does not have AD DS already).
@@ -441,12 +483,12 @@ Select this method when you:
-
System Center Configuration Manager and Intune (hybrid)
-
System Center Configuration Manager and Intune together extend System Center Configuration Manager from an on-premises management system for domain-joined devices to a solution that can manage devices regardless of their location and connectivity options. This hybrid option provides the benefits of both System Center Configuration Manager and Intune.
-System Center Configuration Manager and Intune in the hybrid configuration allow you to support application management throughout the entire application life cycle. You can deploy, upgrade, manage multiple versions, and retire applications by using System Center Configuration Manager, and you can manage Windows desktop and Microsoft Store applications for both institution-owned and personal devices.
+
Microsoft Endpoint Manager and Intune (hybrid)
+
Configuration Manager and Intune together extend Configuration Manager from an on-premises management system for domain-joined devices to a solution that can manage devices regardless of their location and connectivity options. This hybrid option provides the benefits of both Configuration Manager and Intune.
+Configuration Manager and Intune in the hybrid configuration allow you to support application management throughout the entire application life cycle. You can deploy, upgrade, manage multiple versions, and retire applications by using Configuration Manager, and you can manage Windows desktop and Microsoft Store applications for both institution-owned and personal devices.
Select this method when you:
-
Selected System Center Configuration Manager to deploy Windows 10.
+
Selected Microsoft Endpoint Manager to deploy Windows 10.
Want to manage institution-owned and personal devices (does not require that the device be domain joined).
Want to manage domain-joined devices.
Want to manage Azure AD domain-joined devices.
@@ -466,7 +508,7 @@ Select this method when you:
The disadvantages of this method are that it:
-
Carries an additional cost for System Center Configuration Manager server licenses (if the institution does not have System Center Configuration Manager already).
+
Carries an additional cost for Configuration Manager server licenses (if the institution does not have Configuration Manager already).
Carries an additional cost for Windows Server licenses and the corresponding server hardware.
Carries an additional cost for Intune subscription licenses.
Requires an AD DS infrastructure (if the institution does not have AD DS already).
@@ -483,9 +525,9 @@ Record the app and update management methods that you selected in Table 7.
|Selection | Management method|
|----------|------------------|
-| |System Center Configuration Manager by itself|
+| |Microsoft Endpoint Manager by itself|
| |Intune by itself|
-| |System Center Configuration Manager and Intune (hybrid mode)|
+| |Microsoft Endpoint Manager and Intune (hybrid mode)|
*Table 7. App and update management methods selected*
@@ -505,16 +547,17 @@ When you install the Windows ADK on the admin device, select the following featu
* Windows PE
* USMT
-For more information about installing the Windows ADK, see [Step 2-2: Install Windows ADK](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn781086.aspx#InstallWindowsADK).
+For more information about installing the Windows ADK, see [Step 2-2: Install Windows ADK](/mem/configmgr/mdt/lite-touch-installation-guide#InstallWindowsADK).
### Install MDT
Next, install MDT. MDT uses the Windows ADK to help you manage and perform Windows 10 and app deployment. It is a free tool available directly from Microsoft.
You can use MDT to deploy 32-bit or 64-bit versions of Windows 10. Install the 64-bit version of MDT to support deployment of 32-bit and 64-bit operating systems.
->**Note** If you install the 32-bit version of MDT, you can install only 32-bit versions of Windows 10. Ensure that you download and install the 64-bit version of MDT so that you can install 64-bit and 32-bit versions of the operating system.
+> [!NOTE]
+> If you install the 32-bit version of MDT, you can install only 32-bit versions of Windows 10. Ensure that you download and install the 64-bit version of MDT so that you can install 64-bit and 32-bit versions of the operating system.
-For more information about installing MDT on the admin device, see [Installing a New Instance of MDT](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn759415.aspx#InstallingaNewInstanceofMDT).
+For more information about installing MDT on the admin device, see [Installing a New Instance of MDT](/mem/configmgr/mdt/use-the-mdt#InstallingaNewInstanceofMDT).
Now, you’re ready to create the MDT deployment share and populate it with the operating system, apps, and device drivers you want to deploy to your devices.
@@ -522,29 +565,31 @@ Now, you’re ready to create the MDT deployment share and populate it with the
MDT includes the Deployment Workbench, a graphical UI that you can use to manage MDT deployment shares. A *deployment share* is a shared folder that contains all the MDT deployment content. The LTI Deployment Wizard accesses the deployment content over the network or from a local copy of the deployment share (known as MDT *deployment media*).
-For more information about how to create a deployment share, see [Step 3-1: Create an MDT Deployment Share](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn781086.aspx#CreateMDTDeployShare).
+For more information about how to create a deployment share, see [Step 3-1: Create an MDT Deployment Share](/mem/configmgr/mdt/lite-touch-installation-guide#CreateMDTDeployShare).
### Install the Configuration Manager console
->**Note** If you selected System Center Configuration Manager to deploy Windows 10 or manage your devices (in the [Select the deployment methods](#select-the-deployment-methods) and [Select the configuration setting management methods](#select-the-configuration-setting-management-methods) sections, respectively), perform the steps in this section. Otherwise, skip this section and continue to the next.
+> [!NOTE]
+> If you selected Microsoft Endpoint Manager to deploy Windows 10 or manage your devices (in the [Select the deployment methods](#select-the-deployment-methods) and [Select the configuration setting management methods](#select-the-configuration-setting-management-methods) sections, respectively), perform the steps in this section. Otherwise, skip this section and continue to the next.
-You can use System Center Configuration Manager to manage Windows 10 deployments, Windows desktop apps, Microsoft Store apps, and software updates. To manage System Center Configuration Manager, you use the Configuration Manager console. You must install the Configuration Manager console on every device you use to manage System Center Configuration Manager (specifically, the admin device). The Configuration Manager console is automatically installed when you install System Center Configuration Manager primary site servers.
+You can use Configuration Manager to manage Windows 10 deployments, Windows desktop apps, Microsoft Store apps, and software updates. To manage Configuration Manager, you use the Configuration Manager console. You must install the Configuration Manager console on every device you use to manage Configuration Manager (specifically, the admin device). The Configuration Manager console is automatically installed when you install Configuration Manager primary site servers.
-For more information about how to install the Configuration Manager console, see [Install System Center Configuration Manager consoles](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/mt590197.aspx#bkmk_InstallConsole).
+For more information about how to install the Configuration Manager console, see [Install Microsoft Endpoint Manager consoles](/mem/configmgr/core/servers/deploy/install/installing-sites#bkmk_InstallConsole).
### Configure MDT integration with the Configuration Manager console
->**Note** If you selected MDT only to deploy Windows 10 and your apps (and not System Center Configuration Manager) in the [Select the deployment methods](#select-the-deployment-methods) section, then skip this section and continue to the next.
+> [!NOTE]
+> If you selected MDT only to deploy Windows 10 and your apps (and not Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager) in [Select the deployment methods](#select-the-deployment-methods), earlier in this article, then skip this section and continue to the next.
-You can use MDT with System Center Configuration Manager to make ZTI operating system deployment easier. To configure MDT integration with System Center Configuration Manager, run the Configure ConfigMgr Integration Wizard. This wizard is installed when you install MDT.
+You can use MDT with Configuration Manager to make ZTI operating system deployment easier. To configure MDT integration with Configuration Manager, run the Configure ConfigMgr Integration Wizard. This wizard is installed when you install MDT.
-In addition to the admin device, run the Configure ConfigMgr Integration Wizard on each device that runs the Configuration Manager console to ensure that all Configuration Manager console installation can use the power of MDT–System Center Configuration Manager integration.
+In addition to the admin device, run the Configure ConfigMgr Integration Wizard on each device that runs the Configuration Manager console to ensure that all Configuration Manager console installation can use the power of MDT–Configuration Manager integration.
-For more information, see [Enable Configuration Manager Console Integration for Configuration Manager](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn759415.aspx#EnableConfigurationManagerConsoleIntegrationforConfigurationManager).
+For more information, see [Enable Configuration Manager Console Integration for Configuration Manager](/mem/configmgr/mdt/use-the-mdt#EnableConfigurationManagerConsoleIntegrationforConfigurationManager).
#### Summary
-In this section, you installed the Windows ADK and MDT on the admin device. You also created the MDT deployment share that you will configure and use later to capture a reference image. You can also use the MDT deployment share to deploy Windows 10 and your apps to faculty and students (if that’s the method you selected in the [Select the deployment methods](#select-the-deployment-methods) section). Finally, you installed the Configuration Manager console and configured MDT integration with the Configuration Manager console.
+In this section, you installed the Windows ADK and MDT on the admin device. You also created the MDT deployment share that you will configure and use later to capture a reference image. You can also use the MDT deployment share to deploy Windows 10 and your apps to faculty and students (if that’s the method you selected in [Select the deployment methods](#select-the-deployment-methods), earlier in this article). Finally, you installed the Configuration Manager console and configured MDT integration with the Configuration Manager console.
## Create and configure Office 365
@@ -558,20 +603,20 @@ Complete the following steps to select the appropriate Office 365 Education lice
1. Determine the number of faculty members and students who will use the classroom. Office 365 Education licensing plans are available specifically for faculty and students. You must assign faculty and students the correct licensing plan.
-2. Determine the faculty members and students who need to install Microsoft Office applications on devices (if any). Faculty and students can use Office applications online (standard plans) or run them locally (Office 365 ProPlus plans). Table 8 lists the advantages and disadvantages of standard and Office 365 ProPlus plans.
+2. Determine the faculty members and students who need to install Microsoft Office applications on devices (if any). Faculty and students can use Office applications online (standard plans) or run them locally (Microsoft 365 Apps for enterprise plans). Table 8 lists the advantages and disadvantages of standard and Microsoft 365 Apps for enterprise plans.
|Plan |Advantages |Disadvantages |
|----- |----------- |------------- |
- |Office 365 Education |
Less expensive than Office 365 ProPlus
Can be run from any device
No installation necessary
|
Must have an Internet connection to use it
Does not support all the features found in Office 365 ProPlus
|
- |Office 365 ProPlus |
Only requires an Internet connection every 30 days (for activation)
Supports the full set of Office features
Can be installed on five devices per user (there is no limit to the number of devices on which you can run Office apps online)
|
Requires installation
More expensive than Office 365 Education
|
+ |Office 365 Education |
Less expensive than Microsoft 365 Apps for enterprise
Can be run from any device
No installation necessary
|
Must have an Internet connection to use it
Does not support all the features found in Microsoft 365 Apps for enterprise
|
+ |Microsoft 365 Apps for enterprise |
Only requires an Internet connection every 30 days (for activation)
Supports the full set of Office features
Can be installed on five devices per user (there is no limit to the number of devices on which you can run Office apps online)
|
Requires installation
More expensive than Office 365 Education
|
- *Table 8. Comparison of standard and Office 365 ProPlus plans*
+ *Table 8. Comparison of standard and Microsoft 365 Apps for enterprise plans*
- The best user experience is to run Office 365 ProPlus or use native Office apps on mobile devices. If neither of these options is available, use Office applications online. In addition, all Office 365 plans provide a better user experience by storing documents in OneDrive for Business, which is included in all Office 365 plans. OneDrive for Business keeps content in sync among devices and helps ensure that users always have access to their documents on any device.
+ The best user experience is to run Microsoft 365 Apps for enterprise or use native Office apps on mobile devices. If neither of these options is available, use Office applications online. In addition, all Office 365 plans provide a better user experience by storing documents in OneDrive for Business, which is included in all Office 365 plans. OneDrive for Business keeps content in sync among devices and helps ensure that users always have access to their documents on any device.
3. Determine whether students or faculty need Azure Rights Management.
- You can use Azure Rights Management to protect classroom information against unauthorized access. Azure Rights Management protects your information inside or outside the classroom through encryption, identity, and authorization policies, securing your files and email. You can retain control of the information, even when it’s shared with people outside the classroom or your educational institution. Azure Rights Management is free to use with all Office 365 Education license plans. For more information, see [Azure Rights Management Documentation](https://docs.microsoft.com/rights-management/).
+ You can use Azure Rights Management to protect classroom information against unauthorized access. Azure Rights Management protects your information inside or outside the classroom through encryption, identity, and authorization policies, securing your files and email. You can retain control of the information, even when it’s shared with people outside the classroom or your educational institution. Azure Rights Management is free to use with all Office 365 Education license plans. For more information, see [Azure Rights Management Documentation](/rights-management/).
4. Record the Office 365 Education license plans needed for the classroom in Table 9.
@@ -590,13 +635,19 @@ You will use the Office 365 Education license plan information you record in Tab
To create a new Office 365 Education subscription for use in the classroom, use your educational institution’s email account. There are no costs to you or to students for signing up for Office 365 Education subscriptions.
->**Note** If you already have an Office 365 Education subscription, you can use that subscription and continue to the next section, [Create user accounts in Office 365](#create-user-accounts-in-office-365).
+> [!NOTE]
+> If you already have an Office 365 Education subscription, you can use that subscription and continue to the next section, [Create user accounts in Office 365](#create-user-accounts-in-office-365).
#### To create a new Office 365 subscription
1. In Microsoft Edge or Internet Explorer, type `https://portal.office.com/start?sku=faculty` in the address bar.
- > **Note** If you have already used your current sign-in account to create a new Office 365 subscription, you will be prompted to sign in. If you want to create a new Office 365 subscription, start an In-Private Window by using one of the following methods:
- >
In Microsoft Edge, open the Microsoft Edge app (press Ctrl+Shift+P, or click or tap More actions), and then click or tap New InPrivate window.
In Internet Explorer 11, open Internet Explorer 11 (press Ctrl+Shift+P, or click or tap Settings), click or tap Safety, and then click or tap InPrivate Browsing.
+
+ > [!NOTE]
+ > If you have already used your current sign-in account to create a new Office 365 subscription, you will be prompted to sign in. If you want to create a new Office 365 subscription, start an In-Private Window by using one of the following methods:
+ >
+ > - In Microsoft Edge, open the Microsoft Edge app (press Ctrl+Shift+P, or click or tap More actions), and then click or tap New InPrivate window.
+ >
+ > - In Internet Explorer 11, open Internet Explorer 11 (press Ctrl+Shift+P, or click or tap Settings), click or tap Safety, and then click or tap InPrivate Browsing.
2. On the **Get started** page, in **Enter your school email address**, type your school email address, and then click **Sign up**.
@@ -631,7 +682,8 @@ Now that you have created your new Office 365 Education subscription, add the do
To make it easier for faculty and students to join your Office 365 Education subscription (or *tenant*), allow them to automatically sign up to your tenant (*automatic tenant join*). In automatic tenant join, when a faculty member or student signs up for Office 365, Office 365 automatically adds (joins) the user to your Office 365 tenant.
->**Note** By default, automatic tenant join is enabled in Office 365 Education, with the exception of certain areas in Europe, the Middle East, and Africa. These countries/regions require opt-in steps to add new users to existing Office 365 tenants. Check your country/region requirements to determine the automatic tenant join default configuration. Also, if you use Azure AD Connect, then automatic tenant join is disabled. For more information, see [Office 365 Education Self-Sign up: Technical FAQ](https://support.office.com/en-us/article/Office-365-Education-Self-Sign-up-Technical-FAQ-7fb1b2f9-94c2-4cbb-b01e-a6eca34261d6?ui=en-US&rs=en-US&ad=US&WT.mc_id=eml_CXM__33537_MOD_EDU_Student_Advantage_Rush).
+> [!NOTE]
+> By default, automatic tenant join is enabled in Office 365 Education, with the exception of certain areas in Europe, the Middle East, and Africa. These countries/regions require opt-in steps to add new users to existing Office 365 tenants. Check your country/region requirements to determine the automatic tenant join default configuration. Also, if you use Azure AD Connect, then automatic tenant join is disabled. For more information, see [Office 365 Education Self-Sign up: Technical FAQ](https://support.office.com/en-us/article/Office-365-Education-Self-Sign-up-Technical-FAQ-7fb1b2f9-94c2-4cbb-b01e-a6eca34261d6?ui=en-US&rs=en-US&ad=US&WT.mc_id=eml_CXM__33537_MOD_EDU_Student_Advantage_Rush).
Office 365 uses the domain portion of the user’s email address to know which Office 365 tenant to join. For example, if a faculty member or student provides an email address of user@contoso.edu, then Office 365 automatically performs one of the following tasks:
@@ -640,7 +692,8 @@ Office 365 uses the domain portion of the user’s email address to know which O
You will always want faculty and students to join the Office 365 tenant that you created. Ensure that you perform the steps in the [Create a new Office 365 Education subscription](#create-a-new-office-365-education-subscription) and [Add domains and subdomains](#add-domains-and-subdomains) sections before you allow other faculty and students to join Office 365.
->**Note** You cannot merge multiple tenants, so any faculty or students who create their own tenant will need to abandon their existing tenant and join yours.
+> [!NOTE]
+> You cannot merge multiple tenants, so any faculty or students who create their own tenant will need to abandon their existing tenant and join yours.
By default, all new Office 365 Education subscriptions have automatic tenant join enabled, but you can enable or disable automatic tenant join by using the Windows PowerShell commands in Table 10. For more information about how to run these commands, see [How can I prevent students from joining my existing Office 365 tenant](https://support.office.com/en-us/article/Office-365-Education-Self-Sign-up-Technical-FAQ-7fb1b2f9-94c2-4cbb-b01e-a6eca34261d6?ui=en-US&rs=en-US&ad=US#BKMK_PreventJoins).
@@ -651,13 +704,15 @@ By default, all new Office 365 Education subscriptions have automatic tenant joi
*Table 10. Windows PowerShell commands to enable or disable automatic tenant join*
->**Note** If your institution has AD DS, then disable automatic tenant join. Instead, use Azure AD integration with AD DS to add users to your Office 365 tenant.
+> [!NOTE]
+> If your institution has AD DS, then disable automatic tenant join. Instead, use Azure AD integration with AD DS to add users to your Office 365 tenant.
### Disable automatic licensing
To reduce your administrative effort, automatically assign Office 365 Education or Office 365 Education Plus licenses to faculty and students when they sign up (automatic licensing). Automatic licensing also enables Office 365 Education or Office 365 Education Plus features that do not require administrative approval.
->**Note** By default, automatic licensing is enabled in Office 365 Education. If you want to use automatic licensing, then skip this section and go to the next section.
+> [!NOTE]
+> By default, automatic licensing is enabled in Office 365 Education. If you want to use automatic licensing, then skip this section and go to the next section.
Although all new Office 365 Education subscriptions have automatic licensing enabled by default, you can enable or disable it for your Office 365 tenant by using the Windows PowerShell commands in Table 11. For more information about how to run these commands, see [How can I prevent students from joining my existing Office 365 tenant](https://support.office.com/en-us/article/Office-365-Education-Self-Sign-up-Technical-FAQ-7fb1b2f9-94c2-4cbb-b01e-a6eca34261d6?ui=en-US&rs=en-US&ad=US#BKMK_PreventJoins).
@@ -672,13 +727,13 @@ Although all new Office 365 Education subscriptions have automatic licensing ena
When you create your Office 365 subscription, you create an Office 365 tenant that includes an Azure AD directory, the centralized repository for all your student and faculty accounts in Office 365, Intune, and other Azure AD-integrated apps. Azure AD is available in Free, Basic, and Premium editions. Azure AD Free, which is included in Office 365 Education, has fewer features than Azure AD Basic, which in turn has fewer features than Azure AD Premium.
-Educational institutions can obtain Azure AD Basic edition licenses at no cost if they have a volume license agreement. After your institution obtains its licenses, activate your Azure AD access by completing the steps in [Step 3: Activate your Azure Active Directory access](https://azure.microsoft.com/documentation/articles/active-directory-get-started-premium/#step-3-activate-your-azure-active-directory-access).
+Educational institutions can obtain Azure AD Basic edition licenses at no cost if they have a volume license agreement. After your institution obtains its licenses, activate your Azure AD access by completing the steps in [Step 3: Activate your Azure Active Directory access](/azure/active-directory/fundamentals/active-directory-get-started-premium#step-3-activate-your-azure-active-directory-access).
The following Azure AD Premium features are not in Azure AD Basic:
* Allow designated users to manage group membership
* Dynamic group membership based on user metadata
-* Azure multifactor authentication (MFA; see [What is Azure Multi-Factor Authentication](https://azure.microsoft.com/documentation/articles/multi-factor-authentication/))
+* Azure AD Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA; see [What is Azure AD Multi-Factor Authentication](/azure/active-directory/authentication/concept-mfa-howitworks))
* Identify cloud apps that your users run
* Self-service recovery of BitLocker
* Add local administrator accounts to Windows 10 devices
@@ -691,8 +746,8 @@ You can sign up for Azure AD Premium, and then assign licenses to users. In this
For more information about:
-* Azure AD editions and the features in each, see [Azure Active Directory editions](https://azure.microsoft.com/documentation/articles/active-directory-editions/).
-* How to enable Azure AD premium, see [Associate an Azure AD directory with a new Azure subscription](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/azure/jj573650.aspx#create_tenant3).
+* Azure AD editions and the features in each, see [Azure Active Directory editions](/azure/active-directory/fundamentals/active-directory-whatis).
+* How to enable Azure AD premium, see [Associate an Azure AD directory with a new Azure subscription](/previous-versions/azure/azure-services/jj573650(v=azure.100)#create_tenant3).
#### Summary
@@ -709,9 +764,11 @@ Now that you have an Office 365 subscription, you must determine how you’ll cr
In this method, you have an on-premises AD DS domain. As shown in Figure 5, the Azure AD Connector tool automatically synchronizes AD DS with Azure AD. When you add or change any user accounts in AD DS, the Azure AD Connector tool automatically updates Azure AD.
->**Note** Azure AD Connect also supports synchronization from any Lightweight Directory Access Protocol version 3 (LDAPv3)–compliant directory by using the information provided in [Generic LDAP Connector for FIM 2010 R2 Technical Reference](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn510997.aspx).
+> [!NOTE]
+> Azure AD Connect also supports synchronization from any Lightweight Directory Access Protocol version 3 (LDAPv3)–compliant directory by using the information provided in [Generic LDAP Connector for FIM 2010 R2 Technical Reference](/previous-versions/mim/dn510997(v=ws.10)).
-
+> [!div class="mx-imgBorder"]
+> 
*Figure 5. Automatic synchronization between AD DS and Azure AD*
@@ -721,7 +778,8 @@ For more information about how to perform this step, see the [Integrate on-premi
In this method, you have no on-premises AD DS domain. As shown in Figure 6, you manually prepare a .csv file with the student information from your source, and then manually import the information directly into Azure AD. The .csv file must be in the format that Office 365 specifies.
-
+> [!div class="mx-imgBorder"]
+> 
*Figure 6. Bulk import into Azure AD from other sources*
@@ -742,7 +800,8 @@ In this section, you selected the method for creating user accounts in your Offi
You can integrate your on-premises AD DS domain with Azure AD to provide identity management for your Office 365 tenant. With this integration, you can synchronize the users, security groups, and distribution lists in your AD DS domain with Azure AD with the Azure AD Connect tool. Users will be able to sign in to Office 365 automatically by using their email account and the same password they use to sign in to AD DS.
->**Note** If your institution does not have an on-premises AD DS domain, you can skip this section.
+> [!NOTE]
+> If your institution does not have an on-premises AD DS domain, you can skip this section.
### Select a synchronization model
@@ -752,17 +811,19 @@ You can deploy the Azure AD Connect tool:
- **On premises.** As shown in Figure 7, Azure AD Connect runs on premises, which has the advantage of not requiring a VPN connection to Azure. It does, however, require a virtual machine (VM) or physical server.
- 
+ > [!div class="mx-imgBorder"]
+ > 
*Figure 7. Azure AD Connect on premises*
- **In Azure.** As shown in Figure 8, Azure AD Connect runs on a VM in Azure AD, which has the advantages of being faster to provision (than a physical, on-premises server), offers better site availability, and helps reduce the number of on-premises servers. The disadvantage is that you need to deploy a VPN gateway on premises.
- 
+ > [!div class="mx-imgBorder"]
+ > 
*Figure 8. Azure AD Connect in Azure*
-This guide describes how to run Azure AD Connect on premises. For information about running Azure AD Connect in Azure, see [Deploy Office 365 Directory Synchronization (DirSync) in Microsoft Azure](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn635310.aspx).
+This guide describes how to run Azure AD Connect on premises. For information about running Azure AD Connect in Azure, see [Deploy Office 365 Directory Synchronization (DirSync) in Microsoft Azure](/microsoft-365/enterprise/deploy-microsoft-365-directory-synchronization-dirsync-in-microsoft-azure).
### Deploy Azure AD Connect on premises
@@ -774,9 +835,9 @@ In this synchronization model (illustrated in Figure 7), you run Azure AD Connec
2. In the VM or on the physical device that will run Azure AD Connect, sign in with a domain administrator account.
-3. Install Azure AD Connect by performing the steps in [Install Azure AD Connect](https://azure.microsoft.com/documentation/articles/active-directory-aadconnect/#install-azure-ad-connect).
+3. Install Azure AD Connect by performing the steps in [Install Azure AD Connect](/azure/active-directory/hybrid/whatis-hybrid-identity#install-azure-ad-connect).
-4. Configure Azure AD Connect features based on your institution’s requirements by performing the steps in [Configure sync features](https://azure.microsoft.com/documentation/articles/active-directory-aadconnect/#configure-sync-features).
+4. Configure Azure AD Connect features based on your institution’s requirements by performing the steps in [Configure sync features](/azure/active-directory/hybrid/whatis-hybrid-identity#configure-sync-features).
Now that you have used on premises Azure AD Connect to deploy AD DS and Azure AD synchronization, you’re ready to verify that Azure AD Connect is synchronizing AD DS user and group accounts with Azure AD.
@@ -815,7 +876,8 @@ In this section, you selected your synchronization model, deployed Azure AD Conn
You can bulk-import user and group accounts into your on-premises AD DS domain. Bulk-importing accounts helps reduce the time and effort needed to create users compared to creating the accounts manually in the Office 365 Admin portal. First, you select the appropriate method for bulk-importing user accounts into AD DS. Next, you create the .csv file that contains the user accounts. Finally, you use the selected method to import the .csv file into AD DS.
->**Note** If your institution doesn’t have an on-premises AD DS domain, you can skip this section.
+> [!NOTE]
+> If your institution doesn’t have an on-premises AD DS domain, you can skip this section.
### Select the bulk import method
@@ -823,9 +885,9 @@ Several methods are available to bulk-import user accounts into AD DS domains. T
|Method |Description and reason to select this method |
|-------|---------------------------------------------|
-|Ldifde.exe|This command-line tool allows you to import and export objects (such as user accounts) from AD DS. Select this method if you aren’t comfortable with Microsoft Visual Basic Scripting Edition (VBScript), Windows PowerShell, or other scripting languages. For more information about using Ldifde.exe, see [Step-by-Step Guide to Bulk Import and Export to Active Directory](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/bb727091.aspx), [LDIFDE—Export/Import data from Active Directory—LDIFDE commands](https://support.microsoft.com/kb/555636), [Import or Export Directory Objects Using Ldifde](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc816781.aspx), and [LDIFDE](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc755456.aspx).|
-|VBScript|This scripting language uses the Active Directory Services Interfaces (ADSI) Component Object Model interface to manage AD DS objects, including user and group objects. Select this method if you’re comfortable with VBScript. For more information about using VBScript and ADSI, see [Step-by-Step Guide to Bulk Import and Export to Active Directory](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/bb727091.aspx) and [ADSI Scriptomatic](https://technet.microsoft.com/scriptcenter/dd939958.aspx).|
-|Windows PowerShell|This scripting language natively supports cmdlets to manage AD DS objects, including user and group objects. Select this method if you’re comfortable with Window PowerShell scripting. For more information about using Windows PowerShell, see [Import Bulk Users to Active Directory](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/bettertogether/2011/01/09/import-bulk-users-to-active-directory/) and [PowerShell: Bulk create AD Users from CSV file](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/wiki/contents/articles/24541.powershell-bulk-create-ad-users-from-csv-file.aspx).|
+|Ldifde.exe|This command-line tool allows you to import and export objects (such as user accounts) from AD DS. Select this method if you aren't comfortable with Microsoft Visual Basic Scripting Edition (VBScript), Windows PowerShell, or other scripting languages. For more information about using Ldifde.exe, see [Step-by-Step Guide to Bulk Import and Export to Active Directory](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-2000-server/bb727091(v=technet.10)), [LDIFDE—Export/Import data from Active Directory—LDIFDE commands](https://support.microsoft.com/kb/555636), [Import or Export Directory Objects Using Ldifde](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2008-R2-and-2008/cc816781(v=ws.10)), and [LDIFDE](/previous-versions/orphan-topics/ws.10/cc755456(v=ws.10)).|
+|VBScript|This scripting language uses the Active Directory Services Interfaces (ADSI) Component Object Model interface to manage AD DS objects, including user and group objects. Select this method if you’re comfortable with VBScript. For more information about using VBScript and ADSI, see [Step-by-Step Guide to Bulk Import and Export to Active Directory](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-2000-server/bb727091(v=technet.10)) and [ADSI Scriptomatic](https://technet.microsoft.com/scriptcenter/dd939958.aspx).|
+|Windows PowerShell|This scripting language natively supports cmdlets to manage AD DS objects, including user and group objects. Select this method if you’re comfortable with Window PowerShell scripting. For more information about using Windows PowerShell, see [Import Bulk Users to Active Directory](/archive/blogs/technet/bettertogether/import-bulk-users-to-active-directory) and [PowerShell: Bulk create AD Users from CSV file](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/wiki/contents/articles/24541.powershell-bulk-create-ad-users-from-csv-file.aspx).|
*Table 12. AD DS bulk-import account methods*
@@ -835,9 +897,9 @@ After you have selected your user and group account bulk import method, you’re
|Method |Source file format |
|-------|-------------------|
-|Ldifde.exe |Ldifde.exe requires a specific format for the source file. Use Ldifde.exe to export existing user and group accounts so that you can see the format. For examples of the format that Ldifde.exe requires, see [Step-by-Step Guide to Bulk Import and Export to Active Directory](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/bb727091.aspx), [LDIFDE—Export/Import data from Active Directory—LDIFDE commands](https://support.microsoft.com/kb/555636), [Import or Export Directory Objects Using Ldifde](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc816781.aspx), and [LDIFDE](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc755456.aspx).|
-|VBScript |VBScript can use any .csv file format to create a source file for the bulk-import process. To create the .csv file, use software such as Excel. For examples of how to format your source file in comma-separated values (CSV) format, see [Step-by-Step Guide to Bulk Import and Export to Active Directory](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/bb727091.aspx).|
-|Windows PowerShell |Windows PowerShell can use any .csv file format you want to create as a source file for the bulk-import process. To create the .csv file, use software such as Excel. For examples of how to format your source file in CSV format, see [Import Bulk Users to Active Directory](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/bettertogether/2011/01/09/import-bulk-users-to-active-directory/) and [PowerShell: Bulk create AD Users from CSV file](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/wiki/contents/articles/24541.powershell-bulk-create-ad-users-from-csv-file.aspx). |
+|Ldifde.exe |Ldifde.exe requires a specific format for the source file. Use Ldifde.exe to export existing user and group accounts so that you can see the format. For examples of the format that Ldifde.exe requires, see [Step-by-Step Guide to Bulk Import and Export to Active Directory](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-2000-server/bb727091(v=technet.10)), [LDIFDE—Export/Import data from Active Directory—LDIFDE commands](https://support.microsoft.com/kb/555636), [Import or Export Directory Objects Using Ldifde](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2008-R2-and-2008/cc816781(v=ws.10)), and [LDIFDE](/previous-versions/orphan-topics/ws.10/cc755456(v=ws.10)).|
+|VBScript |VBScript can use any .csv file format to create a source file for the bulk-import process. To create the .csv file, use software such as Excel. For examples of how to format your source file in comma-separated values (CSV) format, see [Step-by-Step Guide to Bulk Import and Export to Active Directory](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-2000-server/bb727091(v=technet.10)).|
+|Windows PowerShell |Windows PowerShell can use any .csv file format you want to create as a source file for the bulk-import process. To create the .csv file, use software such as Excel. For examples of how to format your source file in CSV format, see [Import Bulk Users to Active Directory](/archive/blogs/technet/bettertogether/import-bulk-users-to-active-directory) and [PowerShell: Bulk create AD Users from CSV file](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/wiki/contents/articles/24541.powershell-bulk-create-ad-users-from-csv-file.aspx). |
*Table 13. Source file format for each bulk import method*
@@ -845,13 +907,14 @@ After you have selected your user and group account bulk import method, you’re
With the bulk-import source file finished, you’re ready to import the user and group accounts into AD DS. The steps for importing the file are slightly different for each method.
->**Note** Bulk-import your group accounts first, and then import your user accounts. Importing in this order allows you to specify group membership when you import your user accounts.
+> [!NOTE]
+> Bulk-import your group accounts first, and then import your user accounts. Importing in this order allows you to specify group membership when you import your user accounts.
For more information about how to import user accounts into AD DS by using:
-* Ldifde.exe, see [Step-by-Step Guide to Bulk Import and Export to Active Directory](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/bb727091.aspx), [LDIFDE—Export/Import data from Active Directory—LDIFDE commands](https://support.microsoft.com/kb/555636), [Import or Export Directory Objects Using Ldifde](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc816781.aspx), and [LDIFDE](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc755456.aspx).
-* VBScript, see [Step-by-Step Guide to Bulk Import and Export to Active Directory](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/bb727091.aspx).
-* Windows PowerShell, see [Import Bulk Users to Active Directory](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/bettertogether/2011/01/09/import-bulk-users-to-active-directory/) and [PowerShell: Bulk create AD Users from CSV file](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/wiki/contents/articles/24541.powershell-bulk-create-ad-users-from-csv-file.aspx).
+* Ldifde.exe, see [Step-by-Step Guide to Bulk Import and Export to Active Directory](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-2000-server/bb727091(v=technet.10)), [LDIFDE—Export/Import data from Active Directory—LDIFDE commands](https://support.microsoft.com/kb/555636), [Import or Export Directory Objects Using Ldifde](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2008-R2-and-2008/cc816781(v=ws.10)), and [LDIFDE](/previous-versions/orphan-topics/ws.10/cc755456(v=ws.10)).
+* VBScript, see [Step-by-Step Guide to Bulk Import and Export to Active Directory](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-2000-server/bb727091(v=technet.10)).
+* Windows PowerShell, see [Import Bulk Users to Active Directory](/archive/blogs/technet/bettertogether/import-bulk-users-to-active-directory) and [PowerShell: Bulk create AD Users from CSV file](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/wiki/contents/articles/24541.powershell-bulk-create-ad-users-from-csv-file.aspx).
#### Summary
@@ -865,7 +928,8 @@ You can bulk-import user and group accounts directly into Office 365, reducing t
Now that you have created your new Office 365 Education subscription, you need to create user accounts. You can add user accounts for the teachers, other faculty, and students who will use the classroom.
->**Note** If your institution has AD DS, don’t create security accounts in Office 365. Instead, create the security groups in AD DS, and then use Azure AD integration to synchronize the security groups with your Office 365 tenant.
+> [!NOTE]
+> If your institution has AD DS, don’t create security accounts in Office 365. Instead, create the security groups in AD DS, and then use Azure AD integration to synchronize the security groups with your Office 365 tenant.
You can use the Microsoft 365 admin center to add individual Office 365 accounts manually—a reasonable process when you’re adding only a few users. If you have many users, however, you can automate the process by creating a list of those users, and then use that list to create user accounts (that is, bulk-add users).
@@ -873,7 +937,8 @@ The bulk-add process assigns the same Office 365 Education license plan to all u
For more information about how to bulk-add users to Office 365, see [Add several users at the same time to Office 365 - Admin help](https://support.office.com/en-us/article/Add-several-users-at-the-same-time-to-Office-365-Admin-Help-1f5767ed-e717-4f24-969c-6ea9d412ca88?ui=en-US&rs=en-US&ad=US).
->**Note** If you encountered errors during bulk add, resolve them before you continue the bulk-add process. You can view the log file to see which users caused the errors, and then modify the .csv file to correct the problems. Click **Back** to retry the verification process.
+> [!NOTE]
+> If you encountered errors during bulk add, resolve them before you continue the bulk-add process. You can view the log file to see which users caused the errors, and then modify the .csv file to correct the problems. Click **Back** to retry the verification process.
The email accounts are assigned temporary passwords on creation. You must communicate these temporary passwords to your users before they can sign in to Office 365.
@@ -881,13 +946,15 @@ The email accounts are assigned temporary passwords on creation. You must commun
Assign SharePoint Online resource permissions to Office 365 security groups, not individual user accounts. For example, create one security group for faculty members and another for students. Then, you can assign unique SharePoint Online resource permissions to faculty members and a different set of permissions to students. Add or remove users from the security groups to grant or revoke access to SharePoint Online resources.
->**Note** If your institution has AD DS, don’t create security accounts in Office 365. Instead, create the security groups in AD DS, and then use Azure AD integration to synchronize the security groups with your Office 365 tenant.
+> [!NOTE]
+> If your institution has AD DS, don’t create security accounts in Office 365. Instead, create the security groups in AD DS, and then use Azure AD integration to synchronize the security groups with your Office 365 tenant.
For information about creating security groups, see [Create an Office 365 Group in the admin center](https://support.office.com/en-us/article/Create-an-Office-365-Group-in-the-admin-center-74a1ef8b-3844-4d08-9980-9f8f7a36000f?ui=en-US&rs=en-001&ad=US).
You can add and remove users from security groups at any time.
->**Note** Office 365 evaluates group membership when users sign in. If you change group membership for a user, that user may have to sign out, and then sign in again for the change to take effect.
+> [!NOTE]
+> Office 365 evaluates group membership when users sign in. If you change group membership for a user, that user may have to sign out, and then sign in again for the change to take effect.
### Create email distribution groups
@@ -895,7 +962,8 @@ Microsoft Exchange Online uses an email distribution group as a single email rec
You can create email distribution groups based on job role (such as teacher, administration, or student) or specific interests (such as robotics, drama club, or soccer team). You can create any number of distribution groups, and users can be members of more than one group.
->**Note** Office 365 can take some time to complete the Exchange Online creation process. You will have to wait until the creation process ends before you can perform the following steps.
+> [!NOTE]
+> Office 365 can take some time to complete the Exchange Online creation process. You will have to wait until the creation process ends before you can perform the following steps.
For information about creating email distribution groups, see [Create an Office 365 Group in the admin center](https://support.office.com/en-us/article/Create-an-Office-365-Group-in-the-admin-center-74a1ef8b-3844-4d08-9980-9f8f7a36000f?ui=en-US&rs=en-001&ad=US).
@@ -919,7 +987,7 @@ Microsoft Store for Business allows you to create your own private portal to man
* Distribute apps to your users.
-For more information about Microsoft Store for Business, see [Microsoft Store for Business overview](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/whats-new/windows-store-for-business-overview).
+For more information about Microsoft Store for Business, see [Microsoft Store for Business overview](/microsoft-store/microsoft-store-for-business-overview).
This section shows you how to create a Microsoft Store for Business portal and configure it for your school.
@@ -943,13 +1011,13 @@ After you create the Microsoft Store for Business portal, configure it by using
|Menu selection|What can you do in this menu|
|--------------|----------------------------|
-|Account information |Displays information about your Microsoft Store for Business account (no settings can be changed). You make changes to this information in Office 365 or the Azure Management Portal. For more information, see [Update Microsoft Store for Business account settings](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/manage/update-windows-store-for-business-account-settings).|
-|Device Guard signing |Allows you to upload and sign Device Guard catalog and policy files. For more information about Device Guard, see [Device Guard deployment guide](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/keep-secure/device-guard-deployment-guide).|
-|LOB publishers |Allows you to add line-of-business (LOB) publishers that can then publish apps to your private store. LOB publishers are usually internal developers or software vendors that are working with your institution. For more information, see [Working with line-of-business apps](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/manage/working-with-line-of-business-apps).|
-|Management tools |Allows you to add tools that you can use to distribute (deploy) apps in your private store. For more information, see [Distribute apps with a management tool](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/manage/distribute-apps-with-management-tool).|
-|Offline licensing|Allows you to show (or not show) offline licensed apps to people shopping in your private store. For more information, see the “Licensing model: online and offline licenses” section in [Apps in Microsoft Store for Business](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/manage/apps-in-windows-store-for-business#licensing-model).|
-|Permissions |Allows you to grant other users in your organization the ability to buy, manage, and administer your Microsoft Store for Business portal. You can also remove permissions you have previously granted. For more information, see [Roles and permissions in Microsoft Store for Business](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/manage/roles-and-permissions-windows-store-for-business).|
-|Private store |Allows you to change the organization name used in your Microsoft Store for Business portal. When you create your portal, the private store uses the organization name that you used to create your Office 365 subscription. For more information, see [Distribute apps using your private store](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/manage/distribute-apps-from-your-private-store).|
+|Account information |Displays information about your Microsoft Store for Business account (no settings can be changed). You make changes to this information in Office 365 or the Azure Management Portal. For more information, see [Update Microsoft Store for Business account settings](/microsoft-store/update-microsoft-store-for-business-account-settings).|
+|Device Guard signing |Allows you to upload and sign Device Guard catalog and policy files. For more information about Device Guard, see [Device Guard deployment guide](/windows/security/threat-protection/windows-defender-application-control/windows-defender-application-control-deployment-guide).|
+|LOB publishers |Allows you to add line-of-business (LOB) publishers that can then publish apps to your private store. LOB publishers are usually internal developers or software vendors that are working with your institution. For more information, see [Working with line-of-business apps](/microsoft-store/working-with-line-of-business-apps).|
+|Management tools |Allows you to add tools that you can use to distribute (deploy) apps in your private store. For more information, see [Distribute apps with a management tool](/microsoft-store/distribute-apps-with-management-tool).|
+|Offline licensing|Allows you to show (or not show) offline licensed apps to people shopping in your private store. For more information, see the “Licensing model: online and offline licenses” section in [Apps in Microsoft Store for Business](/microsoft-store/apps-in-microsoft-store-for-business#licensing-model).|
+|Permissions |Allows you to grant other users in your organization the ability to buy, manage, and administer your Microsoft Store for Business portal. You can also remove permissions you have previously granted. For more information, see [Roles and permissions in Microsoft Store for Business](/microsoft-store/roles-and-permissions-microsoft-store-for-business).|
+|Private store |Allows you to change the organization name used in your Microsoft Store for Business portal. When you create your portal, the private store uses the organization name that you used to create your Office 365 subscription. For more information, see [Distribute apps using your private store](/microsoft-store/distribute-apps-from-your-private-store).|
*Table 14. Menu selections to configure Microsoft Store for Business settings*
@@ -957,11 +1025,12 @@ After you create the Microsoft Store for Business portal, configure it by using
Now that you have created your Microsoft Store for Business portal, you’re ready to find, acquire, and distribute apps that you will add to your portal. You do this from the **Inventory** page in Microsoft Store for Business.
->**Note** Your educational institution can now use a credit card or purchase order to pay for apps in Microsoft Store for Business.
+> [!NOTE]
+> Your educational institution can now use a credit card or purchase order to pay for apps in Microsoft Store for Business.
You can deploy apps to individual users or make apps available to users through your private store. Deploying apps to individual users restricts the app to those specified users. Making apps available through your private store allows all your users to install the apps.
-For more information about how to find, acquire, and distribute apps in the portal, see [App inventory management for Microsoft Store for Business](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-store/app-inventory-management-microsoft-store-for-business).
+For more information about how to find, acquire, and distribute apps in the portal, see [App inventory management for Microsoft Store for Business](/microsoft-store/app-inventory-management-microsoft-store-for-business).
#### Summary
@@ -989,13 +1058,15 @@ Depending on your school’s requirements, you may need any combination of the f
* Upgrade institution-owned devices to Windows 10 Education.
* Deploy new instances of Windows 10 Education so that new devices have a known configuration.
->**Note** Although you can use Windows 10 Home on institution-owned devices, Microsoft recommends that you use Windows 10 Pro or Windows 10 Education, instead. Windows 10 Pro and Windows 10 Education provide support for MDM, policy-based management, and Microsoft Store for Business—features not available in Windows 10 Home. For more information about how to upgrade Windows 10 Home to Windows 10 Pro or Windows 10 Education, see [Windows 10 edition upgrade](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/deploy/windows-10-edition-upgrades).
+> [!NOTE]
+> Although you can use Windows 10 Home on institution-owned devices, Microsoft recommends that you use Windows 10 Pro or Windows 10 Education, instead. Windows 10 Pro and Windows 10 Education provide support for MDM, policy-based management, and Microsoft Store for Business—features not available in Windows 10 Home. For more information about how to upgrade Windows 10 Home to Windows 10 Pro or Windows 10 Education, see [Windows 10 edition upgrade](/windows/deployment/upgrade/windows-10-edition-upgrades).
For more information about the Windows 10 editions, see [Compare Windows 10 Editions](https://www.microsoft.com/WindowsForBusiness/Compare).
One other consideration is the mix of processor architectures you will support. If you can, support only 64-bit versions of Windows 10. If you have devices that can run only 32-bit versions of Windows 10, you will need to import both 64-bit and 32-bit versions of the Windows 10 editions listed above.
->**Note** On devices that have minimal system resources (such as devices with only 2 GB of memory or 32 GB of storage), use 32-bit versions of Windows 10 because 64-bit versions of Windows 10 place more stress on device system resources.
+> [!NOTE]
+> On devices that have minimal system resources (such as devices with only 2 GB of memory or 32 GB of storage), use 32-bit versions of Windows 10 because 64-bit versions of Windows 10 place more stress on device system resources.
Finally, as a best practice, minimize the number of operating systems that you deploy and manage. If possible, standardize institution-owned devices on one Windows 10 edition (such as a 64-bit version of Windows 10 Education or Windows 10 Pro). Of course, you cannot standardize personal devices on a specific operating system version or processor architecture.
@@ -1007,7 +1078,7 @@ The advantage to a thin image is that the final deployment configuration is dyna
The advantage of a thick image is that the deployment takes less time than it would for a thin image. The disadvantage of a thick image is that you need to capture a new image each time you want to make a change to the operating system, apps, or other software in the image.
-This guide discusses thick image deployment. For information about thin image deployments, see [Deploy Windows 10 in a school](https://technet.microsoft.com/edu/windows/deploy-windows-10-in-a-school).
+This guide discusses thick image deployment. For information about thin image deployments, see [Deploy Windows 10 in a school](./deploy-windows-10-in-a-school.md).
### Select a method to initiate deployment
The LTI deployment process is highly automated: it requires minimal information to deploy or upgrade Windows 10. The ZTI deployment process is fully automated, but you must manually initiate it. To do so, use the method listed in Table 15 that best meets the needs of your institution.
@@ -1077,7 +1148,7 @@ At the end of this section, you should know the Windows 10 editions and processo
## Prepare for deployment
-Before you can deploy Windows 10 and your apps to devices, you need to prepare your MDT environment, Windows Deployment Services, and System Center Configuration Manager (if you selected it to do operating system deployment in the [Select the deployment methods](#select-the-deployment-methods) section). In this section, you ensure that the deployment methods you selected in the [Select the deployment methods](#select-the-deployment-methods) section have the necessary Windows 10 editions and versions, Windows desktop apps, Microsoft Store apps, and device drivers.
+Before you can deploy Windows 10 and your apps to devices, you need to prepare your MDT environment, Windows Deployment Services, and Microsoft Endpoint Manager (if you selected it to do operating system deployment in the [Select the deployment methods](#select-the-deployment-methods) section). In this section, you ensure that the deployment methods you selected in the [Select the deployment methods](#select-the-deployment-methods) section have the necessary Windows 10 editions and versions, Windows desktop apps, Microsoft Store apps, and device drivers.
### Configure the MDT deployment share
@@ -1101,13 +1172,13 @@ The first step in preparing for Windows 10 deployment is to configure—that is,
Device drivers allow Windows 10 to know a device’s hardware resources and connected hardware accessories. Without the proper device drivers, certain features may be unavailable. For example, without the proper audio driver, a device cannot play sounds; without the proper camera driver, the device cannot take photos or use video chat.
@@ -1120,11 +1191,11 @@ Import device drivers for each device in your institution. For more information
For apps that are not offline licensed, obtain the .appx files from the app software vendor directly.
If you are unable to obtain the .appx files from the app software vendor, then you or the students will need to install the apps on the student devices directly from Microsoft Store or Microsoft Store for Business.
-If you have Intune or System Center Configuration Manager, you can deploy Microsoft Store apps after you deploy Windows 10, as described in the Deploy and manage apps by using Intune and Deploy and manage apps by using System Center Configuration Manager sections. This method provides granular deployment of Microsoft Store apps, and you can use it for ongoing management of Microsoft Store apps. This is the preferred method of deploying and managing Microsoft Store apps.
+If you have Intune or Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager, you can deploy Microsoft Store apps after you deploy Windows 10, as described in the Deploy and manage apps by using Intune and Deploy and manage apps by using Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager sections. This method provides granular deployment of Microsoft Store apps, and you can use it for ongoing management of Microsoft Store apps. This is the preferred method of deploying and managing Microsoft Store apps.
In addition, you must prepare your environment for sideloading Microsoft Store apps. For more information about how to:
@@ -1133,12 +1204,12 @@ In addition, you must prepare your environment for sideloading Microsoft Store a
4. Create MDT applications for Windows desktop apps
You need to create an MDT application for each Windows desktop app you want to deploy. You can obtain the Windows desktop apps from any source, but ensure that you have sufficient licenses for them.
If you have Intune, you can deploy Windows desktop apps after you deploy Windows 10, as described in the Deploy and manage apps by using Intune section. This method provides granular deployment of Windows desktop apps, and you can use it for ongoing management of the apps. This is the preferred method for deploying and managing Windows desktop apps.
Note You can also deploy Windows desktop apps after you deploy Windows 10, as described in the Deploy and manage apps by using Intune section.
-For more information about how to create an MDT application for Window desktop apps, see [Create a New Application in the Deployment Workbench](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn759415.aspx).
+For more information about how to create an MDT application for Window desktop apps, see [Create a New Application in the Deployment Workbench](/mem/configmgr/mdt/use-the-mdt).
@@ -1152,7 +1223,7 @@ For more information about how to create an MDT application for Window desktop a
Upgrade existing devices to 64-bit Windows 10 Education.
Upgrade existing devices to 32-bit Windows 10 Education.
- Again, you will create the task sequences based on the operating systems that you imported in step 1. For more information about how to create a task sequence, see Create a New Task Sequence in the Deployment Workbench.
+ Again, you will create the task sequences based on the operating systems that you imported in step 1. For more information about how to create a task sequence, see Create a New Task Sequence in the Deployment Workbench.
@@ -1160,7 +1231,7 @@ For more information about how to create an MDT application for Window desktop a
6. Update the deployment share
Updating a deployment share generates the MDT boot images you use to initiate the Windows 10 deployment process. You can configure the process to create 32-bit and 64-bit versions of the .iso and .wim files you can use to create bootable media or in Windows Deployment Services.
When you use MDT to deploy Windows 10, the MDT deployment process automatically creates a local Administrator account with the password you specified. As a security best practice, rename the built-in Administrator account and (optionally) disable it.
-Group Policy. To rename the built-in Administrator account, use the Accounts: Rename administrator account Group Policy setting. For more information about how to rename the built-in Administrator account, see To rename the Administrator account using the Group Policy Management Console. You specify the new name for the Administrator account. To disable the built-in Administrator account, use the Accounts: Administrator account status Group Policy setting. For more information about how to disable the built-in Administrator account, see Accounts: Administrator account status.
+Group Policy. To rename the built-in Administrator account, use the Accounts: Rename administrator account Group Policy setting. For more information about how to rename the built-in Administrator account, see To rename the Administrator account using the Group Policy Management Console. You specify the new name for the Administrator account. To disable the built-in Administrator account, use the Accounts: Administrator account status Group Policy setting. For more information about how to disable the built-in Administrator account, see Accounts: Administrator account status.
Intune. Not available.
@@ -1401,7 +1477,7 @@ Use the information in Table 17 to help you determine whether you need to config
Control Microsoft Store access
You can control access to Microsoft Store and whether existing Microsoft Store apps receive updates. You can only disable the Microsoft Store app in Windows 10 Education and Windows 10 Enterprise.
-Group Policy. To disable the Microsoft Store app, use the Turn off the Store Application group policy setting. To prevent Microsoft Store apps from receiving updates, use the Turn off Automatic Download and Install of updates Group Policy setting. For more information about configuring these settings, see Can I use Group Policy to control the Microsoft Store in my enterprise environment?.
+Group Policy. To disable the Microsoft Store app, use the Turn off the Store Application group policy setting. To prevent Microsoft Store apps from receiving updates, use the Turn off Automatic Download and Install of updates Group Policy setting. For more information about configuring these settings, see Can I use Group Policy to control the Microsoft Store in my enterprise environment?.
Intune. To enable or disable Microsoft Store access, use the Allow application store policy setting in the Apps section of a Windows 10 General Configuration policy.
@@ -1429,7 +1505,7 @@ Use the information in Table 17 to help you determine whether you need to config
Use of audio recording
Audio recording (by using the Sound Recorder app) can be a source of disclosure or privacy issues in an education environment. Depending on your institution’s policies, you may want to disable the Sound Recorder app on your devices.
-Group Policy. To disable the Sound Recorder app, use the Do not allow Sound Recorder to run Group Policy setting. You can disable other audio recording apps by using AppLocker policies. To create AppLocker policies, use the information in Editing an AppLocker Policy and Create Your AppLocker Policies.
+Group Policy. To disable the Sound Recorder app, use the Do not allow Sound Recorder to run Group Policy setting. You can disable other audio recording apps by using AppLocker policies. To create AppLocker policies, use the information in Editing an AppLocker Policy and Create Your AppLocker Policies.
Intune. To enable or disable audio recording, use the Allow voice recording policy setting in the Features section of a Windows 10 General Configuration policy.
@@ -1471,84 +1547,87 @@ Use the information in Table 17 to help you determine whether you need to config
Now, you’re ready to use Group Policy to configure settings. The steps in this section assume that you have an AD DS infrastructure. Here, you configure the Group Policy settings you selected in the [Select Microsoft-recommended settings](#select-microsoft-recommended-settings) section.
-For more information about Group Policy, see [Group Policy Planning and Deployment Guide](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc754948.aspx).
+For more information about Group Policy, see [Group Policy Planning and Deployment Guide](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2008-R2-and-2008/cc754948(v=ws.10)).
#### To configure Group Policy settings
-1. Create a Group Policy object (GPO) to contain your Group Policy settings by completing the steps in [Create a new Group Policy object](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc738830.aspx).
+1. Create a Group Policy object (GPO) to contain your Group Policy settings by completing the steps in [Create a new Group Policy object](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2003/cc738830(v=ws.10)).
-2. Configure the settings in the GPO by completing the steps in [Edit a Group Policy object](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc739902.aspx).
+2. Configure the settings in the GPO by completing the steps in [Edit a Group Policy object](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2003/cc739902(v=ws.10)).
-3. Link the GPO to the appropriate AD DS site, domain, or organizational unit by completing the steps in [Link a Group Policy object to a site, domain, or organizational unit](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc738954.aspx).
+3. Link the GPO to the appropriate AD DS site, domain, or organizational unit by completing the steps in [Link a Group Policy object to a site, domain, or organizational unit](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2003/cc738954(v=ws.10)).
### Configure settings by using Intune
Now, you’re ready to use Intune to configure settings. The steps in this section assume that you have an Office 365 subscription. Here, you configure the Intune settings that you selected in the [Select Microsoft-recommended settings](#select-microsoft-recommended-settings) section.
-For more information about Intune, see [Microsoft Intune Documentation](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/).
+For more information about Intune, see [Microsoft Intune Documentation](/intune/).
#### To configure Intune settings
-1. Add Intune to your Office 365 subscription by completing the steps in [Manage Intune licenses](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/get-started/start-with-a-paid-subscription-to-microsoft-intune-step-4).
+1. Add Intune to your Office 365 subscription by completing the steps in [Manage Intune licenses](/intune/get-started/start-with-a-paid-subscription-to-microsoft-intune-step-4).
-2. Enroll devices with Intune by completing the steps in [Get ready to enroll devices in Microsoft Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/deploy-use/get-ready-to-enroll-devices-in-microsoft-intune).
+2. Enroll devices with Intune by completing the steps in [Get ready to enroll devices in Microsoft Intune](/intune/deploy-use/get-ready-to-enroll-devices-in-microsoft-intune).
-3. Configure the settings in Intune Windows 10 policies by completing the steps in [Manage settings and features on your devices with Microsoft Intune policies](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/deploy-use/manage-settings-and-features-on-your-devices-with-microsoft-intune-policies).
+3. Configure the settings in Intune Windows 10 policies by completing the steps in [Manage settings and features on your devices with Microsoft Intune policies](/intune/deploy-use/manage-settings-and-features-on-your-devices-with-microsoft-intune-policies).
-4. Manage Windows 10 devices by completing the steps in [Manage Windows PCs with Microsoft Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/deploy-use/manage-windows-pcs-with-microsoft-intune).
+4. Manage Windows 10 devices by completing the steps in [Manage Windows PCs with Microsoft Intune](/intune/deploy-use/manage-windows-pcs-with-microsoft-intune).
### Deploy and manage apps by using Intune
-If you selected to deploy and manage apps by using System Center Configuration Manager and Intune in a hybrid configuration, then skip this section and continue to the [Deploy and manage apps by using System Center Configuration Manager](#deploy-and-manage-apps-by-using-system-center-configuration-manager) section.
+If you selected to deploy and manage apps by using Microsoft Endpoint Manager and Intune in a hybrid configuration, then skip this section and continue to the [Deploy and manage apps by using Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager](#deploy-and-manage-apps-by-using-microsoft-endpoint-configuration-manager) section.
You can use Intune to deploy Microsoft Store and Windows desktop apps. Intune provides improved control over which users receive specific apps. In addition, Intune allows you to deploy apps to companion devices (such as Windows 10 Mobile, iOS, or Android devices). Finally, Intune helps you manage app security and features, such as mobile application management policies that let you manage apps on devices that are not enrolled in Intune or that another solution manages.
For more information about how to configure Intune to manage your apps, see the following resources:
-- [Add apps with Microsoft Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/deploy-use/add-apps)
-- [Deploy apps with Microsoft Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/deploy-use/deploy-apps)
-- [Update apps using Microsoft Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/deploy-use/update-apps-using-microsoft-intune)
-- [Protect apps and data with Microsoft Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/deploy-use/protect-apps-and-data-with-microsoft-intune)
-- [Help protect your data with full or selective wipe using Microsoft Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/deploy-use/use-remote-wipe-to-help-protect-data-using-microsoft-intune)
+- [Add apps with Microsoft Intune](/intune/deploy-use/add-apps)
+- [Deploy apps with Microsoft Intune](/intune/deploy-use/deploy-apps)
+- [Update apps using Microsoft Intune](/intune/deploy-use/update-apps-using-microsoft-intune)
+- [Protect apps and data with Microsoft Intune](/intune/deploy-use/protect-apps-and-data-with-microsoft-intune)
+- [Help protect your data with full or selective wipe using Microsoft Intune](/intune/deploy-use/use-remote-wipe-to-help-protect-data-using-microsoft-intune)
-### Deploy and manage apps by using System Center Configuration Manager
+### Deploy and manage apps by using Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager
-You can use System Center Configuration Manager to deploy Microsoft Store and Windows desktop apps. System Center Configuration Manager allows you to create a System Center Configuration Manager application that you can use to deploy apps to different devices (such as Windows 10 desktop, Windows 10 Mobile, iOS, or Android devices) by using *deployment types*. You can think of a System Center Configuration Manager application as a box. You can think of deployment types as one or more sets of installation files and installation instructions within that box.
+You can use Microsoft Endpoint Manager to deploy Microsoft Store and Windows desktop apps. Configuration Manager allows you to create a Configuration Manager application that you can use to deploy apps to different devices (such as Windows 10 desktop, Windows 10 Mobile, iOS, or Android devices) by using *deployment types*. You can think of a Configuration Manager application as a box. You can think of deployment types as one or more sets of installation files and installation instructions within that box.
For example, you could create a Skype application that contains a deployment type for Windows 10 desktop, Windows 10 Mobile, iOS, and Android. You can deploy the one application to multiple device types.
->**Note** When you configure System Center Configuration Manager and Intune in a hybrid model, you deploy apps by using System Center Configuration manager as described in this section.
+> [!NOTE]
+> When you configure Configuration Manager and Intune in a hybrid model, you deploy apps by using Configuration Manager as described in this section.
-System Center Configuration Manager helps you manage apps by monitoring app installation. You can determine how many of your devices have a specific app installed. Finally, you can allow users to install apps at their discretion or make apps mandatory.
+Configuration Manager helps you manage apps by monitoring app installation. You can determine how many of your devices have a specific app installed. Finally, you can allow users to install apps at their discretion or make apps mandatory.
-For more information about how to configure System Center Configuration Manager to deploy and manage your apps, see [Deploy and manage applications with System Center Configuration Manager](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/mt627959.aspx).
+For more information about how to configure Configuration Manager to deploy and manage your apps, see [Deploy and manage applications with Configuration Manager](/mem/configmgr/apps/deploy-use/deploy-applications).
### Manage updates by using Intune
-If you selected to manage updates by using System Center Configuration Manager and Intune in a hybrid configuration, then skip this section and continue to the [Manage updates by using System Center Configuration Manager](#manage-updates-by-using-system-center-configuration-manager) section.
+If you selected to manage updates by using Configuration Manager and Intune in a hybrid configuration, then skip this section and continue to the [Manage updates by using Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager](#manage-updates-by-using-microsoft-endpoint-configuration-manager) section.
To help ensure that your users have the most current features and security protection, keep Windows 10 and your apps current with updates. To configure Windows 10 and app updates, use the **Updates** workspace in Intune.
->**Note** You can only manage updates (including antivirus and antimalware updates) for Windows 10 desktop operating systems (not Windows 10 Mobile, iOS, or Android).
+> [!NOTE]
+> You can only manage updates (including antivirus and antimalware updates) for Windows 10 desktop operating systems (not Windows 10 Mobile, iOS, or Android).
For more information about how to configure Intune to manage updates and malware protection, see the following resources:
-- [Keep Windows PCs up to date with software updates in Microsoft Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/deploy-use/keep-windows-pcs-up-to-date-with-software-updates-in-microsoft-intune)
-- [Help secure Windows PCs with Endpoint Protection for Microsoft Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/deploy-use/help-secure-windows-pcs-with-endpoint-protection-for-microsoft-intune)
+- [Keep Windows PCs up to date with software updates in Microsoft Intune](/intune/deploy-use/keep-windows-pcs-up-to-date-with-software-updates-in-microsoft-intune)
+- [Help secure Windows PCs with Endpoint Protection for Microsoft Intune](/intune/deploy-use/help-secure-windows-pcs-with-endpoint-protection-for-microsoft-intune)
-### Manage updates by using System Center Configuration Manager
+### Manage updates by using Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager
-To ensure that your users have the most current features and security protection, use the software updates feature in System Center Configuration Manager to manage updates. The software updates feature works in conjunction with WSUS to manage updates for Windows 10 devices.
+To ensure that your users have the most current features and security protection, use the software updates feature in Configuration Manager to manage updates. The software updates feature works in conjunction with WSUS to manage updates for Windows 10 devices.
You configure the software updates feature to manage updates for specific versions of Windows and apps. Then, the software updates feature obtains the updates from Windows Updates by using the WSUS server in your environment. This integration provides greater granularity of control over updates and more specific targeting of updates to users and devices (compared to WSUS alone or Intune alone), which allows you to ensure that the right user or device gets the right updates.
->**Note** When you configure System Center Configuration Manager and Intune in a hybrid model, you use System Center Configuration manager to manage updates as described in this section.
+> [!NOTE]
+> When you configure Configuration Manager and Intune in a hybrid model, you use Configuration manager to manage updates as described in this section.
-For more information about how to configure System Center Configuration Manager to manage Windows 10 and app updates, see [Deploy and manage software updates in System Center Configuration Manager](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/mt634340.aspx).
+For more information about how to configure Configuration Manager to manage Windows 10 and app updates, see [Deploy and manage software updates in Configuration Manager](/mem/configmgr/sum/understand/software-updates-introduction).
#### Summary
-In this section, you prepared your institution for device management. You identified the configuration settings that you want to use to manage your users and devices. You configured Group Policy or Intune to manage these configuration settings. You configured Intune or System Center Configuration Manager to manage your apps. Finally, you configured Intune or System Center Configuration Manager to manage software updates for Windows 10 and your apps.
+In this section, you prepared your institution for device management. You identified the configuration settings that you want to use to manage your users and devices. You configured Group Policy or Intune to manage these configuration settings. You configured Intune or Microsoft Endpoint Manager to manage your apps. Finally, you configured Intune or Microsoft Endpoint Manager to manage software updates for Windows 10 and your apps.
## Deploy Windows 10 to devices
@@ -1561,8 +1640,8 @@ Prior to deployment of Windows 10, complete the tasks in Table 18. Most of these
|Task| |
|----|----|
|1. |Ensure that the target devices have sufficient system resources to run Windows 10.|
-|2. |Identify the necessary devices drivers, and then import them into the MDT deployment share or System Center Configuration Manager.|
-|3. |For each Microsoft Store and Windows desktop app, create an MDT application or System Center Configuration Manager application.|
+|2. |Identify the necessary devices drivers, and then import them into the MDT deployment share or Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager.|
+|3. |For each Microsoft Store and Windows desktop app, create an MDT application or Configuration Manager application.|
|4. |Notify the students and faculty about the deployment.|
*Table 18. Deployment preparation checklist*
@@ -1571,7 +1650,8 @@ Prior to deployment of Windows 10, complete the tasks in Table 18. Most of these
Use the Deployment Wizard to deploy Windows 10. With the LTI deployment process, you provide only minimal information to the Deployment Wizard at the beginning of the process. After the wizard collects the necessary information, the remainder of the process is fully automated.
->**Note** To fully automate the LTI deployment process, complete the steps in the “Fully Automated LTI Deployment Scenario” section in the [Microsoft Deployment Toolkit Samples Guide](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn781089.aspx#Anchor_6).
+> [!NOTE]
+> To fully automate the LTI deployment process, complete the steps in the “Fully Automated LTI Deployment Scenario” section in the [Microsoft Deployment Toolkit Samples Guide](/mem/configmgr/mdt/samples-guide#Anchor_6).
In most instances, deployments occur without incident. Only in rare occasions do deployments experience problems.
@@ -1580,7 +1660,7 @@ In most instances, deployments occur without incident. Only in rare occasions do
1. **Initiate the LTI deployment process.** Initiate the LTI deployment process by booting over the network (PXE boot) or from local media. You selected the method for initiating the LTI deployment process in the [Select a method to initiate deployment](#select-a-method-to-initiate-deployment) section earlier in this guide.
-2. **Complete the Deployment Wizard.** For more information about how to complete the Deployment Wizard, see the “Running the Deployment Wizard” section of [Using the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn759415.aspx#Anchor_5).
+2. **Complete the Deployment Wizard.** For more information about how to complete the Deployment Wizard, see the “Running the Deployment Wizard” section of [Using the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit](/mem/configmgr/mdt/use-the-mdt#Anchor_5).
#### To use ZTI to deploy Windows 10
@@ -1590,7 +1670,8 @@ In most instances, deployments occur without incident. Only in rare occasions do
After you have deployed Windows 10, the devices are almost ready for use. First, you must set up the printers that each classroom will use. Typically, you connect the printers to the same network as the devices in the same classroom. If you don’t have printers in your classrooms, skip this section and proceed to [Verify deployment](#verify-deployment).
->**Note** If you’re performing an upgrade instead of a new deployment, the printers remain configured as they were in the previous version of Windows. As a result, you can skip this section and proceed to [Verify deployment](#verify-deployment).
+> [!NOTE]
+> If you’re performing an upgrade instead of a new deployment, the printers remain configured as they were in the previous version of Windows. As a result, you can skip this section and proceed to [Verify deployment](#verify-deployment).
#### To set up printers
@@ -1658,9 +1739,9 @@ Table 19 lists the school and individual classroom maintenance tasks, the resour
Verify that Windows Update is active and current with operating system and software updates.
For more information about completing this task when you have:
Verify that you’re using the appropriate Windows 10 servicing options for updates and upgrades (such as selecting whether you want to use Current Branch or Current Branch for Business).
-For more information about Windows 10 servicing options for updates and upgrades, see Windows 10 servicing options.
+For more information about Windows 10 servicing options for updates and upgrades, see Windows 10 servicing options.
x
@@ -1728,7 +1809,7 @@ For more information about completing this task, see the following resources:
For more information, see:
@@ -1739,10 +1820,10 @@ For more information, see:
Install new or update existing Microsoft Store apps used in the curriculum.
Microsoft Store apps are automatically updated from Microsoft Store. The menu bar in the Microsoft Store app shows whether any Microsoft Store app updates are available for download.
-You can also deploy Microsoft Store apps directly to devices by using Intune, System Center Configuration Manager, or both in a hybrid configuration. For more information, see:
+You can also deploy Microsoft Store apps directly to devices by using Intune, Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager, or both in a hybrid configuration. For more information, see:
@@ -1846,13 +1927,13 @@ You have now identified the tasks you need to perform monthly, at the end of an
## Related topics
-* [Try it out: Windows 10 deployment (for educational institutions)](https://technet.microsoft.com/windows/mt574244.aspx)
-* [Try it out: Windows 10 in the classroom](https://technet.microsoft.com/windows/mt574243.aspx)
-* [Chromebook migration guide](https://technet.microsoft.com/edu/windows/chromebook-migration-guide)
-* [Deploy Windows 10 in a school](https://technet.microsoft.com/edu/windows/deploy-windows-10-in-a-school)
-* [Automate common Windows 10 deployment and configuration tasks for a school environment (video)](https://technet.microsoft.com/windows/mt723345)
-* [Deploy a custom Windows 10 Start menu layout for a school (video)](https://technet.microsoft.com/windows/mt723346)
-* [Manage Windows 10 updates and upgrades in a school environment (video)](https://technet.microsoft.com/windows/mt723347)
-* [Reprovision devices at the end of the school year (video)](https://technet.microsoft.com/windows/mt723344)
-* [Use MDT to deploy Windows 10 in a school (video)](https://technet.microsoft.com/windows/mt723343)
-* [Use Microsoft Store for Business in a school environment (video)](https://technet.microsoft.com/windows/mt723348)
+* [Try it out: Windows 10 deployment (for educational institutions)](../index.yml)
+* [Try it out: Windows 10 in the classroom](../index.yml)
+* [Chromebook migration guide](./chromebook-migration-guide.md)
+* [Deploy Windows 10 in a school](./deploy-windows-10-in-a-school.md)
+* [Automate common Windows 10 deployment and configuration tasks for a school environment (video)](./index.md)
+* [Deploy a custom Windows 10 Start menu layout for a school (video)](./index.md)
+* [Manage Windows 10 updates and upgrades in a school environment (video)](./index.md)
+* [Reprovision devices at the end of the school year (video)](./index.md)
+* [Use MDT to deploy Windows 10 in a school (video)](./index.md)
+* [Use Microsoft Store for Business in a school environment (video)](./index.md)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/education/windows/deploy-windows-10-in-a-school.md b/education/windows/deploy-windows-10-in-a-school.md
index 5fd1f4093a..7608e698f0 100644
--- a/education/windows/deploy-windows-10-in-a-school.md
+++ b/education/windows/deploy-windows-10-in-a-school.md
@@ -56,8 +56,8 @@ This school configuration has the following characteristics:
**Note** In this guide, all references to MDT refer to the 64-bit version of MDT 2013 Update 2.
- The devices use Azure AD in Office 365 Education for identity management.
-- If you have on-premises AD DS, you can [integrate Azure AD with on-premises AD DS](https://azure.microsoft.com/documentation/articles/active-directory-aadconnect/).
-- Use [Intune](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/jj676587.aspx), [compliance settings in Office 365](https://support.office.com/en-us/article/Manage-mobile-devices-in-Office-365-dd892318-bc44-4eb1-af00-9db5430be3cd?ui=en-US&rs=en-US&ad=US), or [Group Policy](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc725828%28v=ws.10%29.aspx?f=255&MSPPError=-2147217396) in AD DS to manage devices.
+- If you have on-premises AD DS, you can [integrate Azure AD with on-premises AD DS](/azure/active-directory/hybrid/whatis-hybrid-identity).
+- Use [Intune](/mem/intune/), [compliance settings in Office 365](https://support.office.com/en-us/article/Manage-mobile-devices-in-Office-365-dd892318-bc44-4eb1-af00-9db5430be3cd?ui=en-US&rs=en-US&ad=US), or [Group Policy](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2008-R2-and-2008/cc725828(v=ws.10)?f=255&MSPPError=-2147217396) in AD DS to manage devices.
- Each device supports a one-student-per-device or multiple-students-per-device scenario.
- The devices can be a mixture of different make, model, and processor architecture (32 bit or 64 bit) or be identical.
- To initiate Windows 10 deployment, use a USB flash drive, DVD-ROM or CD-ROM, or Pre-Boot Execution Environment Boot (PXE Boot).
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Now that you have the plan (blueprint) for your classroom, you’re ready to lea
The primary tool you will use to deploy Windows 10 in your school is MDT, which uses Windows ADK components to make deployment easier. You could just use the Windows ADK to perform your deployment, but MDT simplifies the process by providing an intuitive, wizard-driven user interface (UI).
-You can use MDT as a stand-alone tool or integrate it with Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager. As a stand-alone tool, MDT performs Lite Touch Installation (LTI) deployments—deployments that require minimal infrastructure and allow you to control the level of automation. When integrated with System Center Configuration Manager, MDT performs Zero Touch Installation (ZTI) deployments, which require more infrastructure (such as System Center Configuration Manager) but result in fully automated deployments.
+You can use MDT as a stand-alone tool or integrate it with Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager. As a stand-alone tool, MDT performs Lite Touch Installation (LTI) deployments—deployments that require minimal infrastructure and allow you to control the level of automation. When integrated with Configuration Manager, MDT performs Zero Touch Installation (ZTI) deployments, which require more infrastructure (such as Configuration Manager) but result in fully automated deployments.
MDT includes the Deployment Workbench—a console from which you can manage the deployment of Windows 10 and your apps. You configure the deployment process in the Deployment Workbench, including the management of operating systems, device drivers, apps and migration of user settings on existing devices.
@@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ When you install the Windows ADK on the admin device, select the following featu
- Windows Preinstallation Environment (Windows PE)
- User State Migration Tool (USMT)
-For more information about installing the Windows ADK, see [Step 2-2: Install the Windows ADK](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn781086.aspx?f=255&MSPPError=-2147217396#InstallWindowsADK).
+For more information about installing the Windows ADK, see [Step 2-2: Install the Windows ADK](/mem/configmgr/mdt/lite-touch-installation-guide?f=255&MSPPError=-2147217396#InstallWindowsADK).
### Install MDT
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ You can use MDT to deploy 32-bit or 64-bit versions of Windows 10. Install the 6
**Note** If you install the 32-bit version of MDT, you can install only 32-bit versions of Windows 10. Ensure that you download and install the 64-bit version of MDT so that you can install 64-bit and 32 bit versions of the operating system.
-For more information about installing MDT on the admin device, see [Installing a New Instance of MDT](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn759415.aspx#InstallingaNewInstanceofMDT).
+For more information about installing MDT on the admin device, see [Installing a New Instance of MDT](/mem/configmgr/mdt/use-the-mdt#InstallingaNewInstanceofMDT).
Now, you’re ready to create the MDT deployment share and populate it with the operating system, apps, and device drivers you want to deploy to your devices.
@@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Now, you’re ready to create the MDT deployment share and populate it with the
MDT includes the Deployment Workbench, a graphical user interface that you can use to manage MDT deployment shares. A deployment share is a shared folder that contains all the MDT deployment content. The LTI Deployment Wizard accesses the deployment content over the network or from a local copy of the deployment share (known as MDT deployment media).
-For more information about how to create a deployment share, see [Step 3-1: Create an MDT Deployment Share](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn781086.aspx?f=255&MSPPError=-2147217396#CreateMDTDeployShare).
+For more information about how to create a deployment share, see [Step 3-1: Create an MDT Deployment Share](/mem/configmgr/mdt/lite-touch-installation-guide?f=255&MSPPError=-2147217396#CreateMDTDeployShare).
### Summary
@@ -173,9 +173,9 @@ Complete the following steps to select the appropriate Office 365 Education lice
Determine the number of faculty members and students who will use the classroom. Office 365 Education licensing plans are available specifically for faculty and students. You must assign faculty and students the correct licensing plan.
-
Determine the faculty members and students who need to install Office applications on devices (if any). Faculty and students can use Office applications online (standard plans) or run them locally (Office 365 ProPlus plans). Table 1 lists the advantages and disadvantages of standard and Office 365 ProPlus plans.
+
Determine the faculty members and students who need to install Office applications on devices (if any). Faculty and students can use Office applications online (standard plans) or run them locally (Microsoft 365 Apps for enterprise plans). Table 1 lists the advantages and disadvantages of standard and Microsoft 365 Apps for enterprise plans.
-Table 1. Comparison of standard and Microsoft Office 365 ProPlus plans
+Table 1. Comparison of standard and Microsoft Microsoft 365 Apps for enterprise plans
@@ -191,15 +191,15 @@ Complete the following steps to select the appropriate Office 365 Education lice
-
Standard
Less expensive than Office 365 ProPlus
Can be run from any device
No installation necessary
Must have an Internet connection to use it
Does not support all the features found in Office 365 ProPlus
+
Standard
Less expensive than Microsoft 365 Apps for enterprise
Can be run from any device
No installation necessary
Must have an Internet connection to use it
Does not support all the features found in Microsoft 365 Apps for enterprise
Office ProPlus
Only requires an Internet connection every 30 days (for activation)
Supports full set of Office features
Requires installation
Can be installed on only five devices per user (there is no limit to the number of devices on which you can run Office apps online)
-The best user experience is to run Office 365 ProPlus or use native Office apps on mobile devices. If neither of these options is available, use Office applications online. In addition, all Office 365 plans provide a better user experience by storing documents in OneDrive for Business, which is included in all Office 365 plans. OneDrive for Business keeps content in sync among devices and helps ensure that users always have access to their documents on any device.
+The best user experience is to run Microsoft 365 Apps for enterprise or use native Office apps on mobile devices. If neither of these options is available, use Office applications online. In addition, all Office 365 plans provide a better user experience by storing documents in OneDrive for Business, which is included in all Office 365 plans. OneDrive for Business keeps content in sync among devices and helps ensure that users always have access to their documents on any device.
-
Determine whether students or faculty need Azure Rights Management. You can use Azure Rights Management to protect classroom information against unauthorized access. Azure Rights Management protects your information inside or outside the classroom through encryption, identity, and authorization policies, securing your files and email. You can retain control of the information, even when it’s shared with people outside the classroom or your educational institution. Azure Rights Management is free to use with all Office 365 Education license plans. For more information, see Azure Rights Management.
+
Determine whether students or faculty need Azure Rights Management. You can use Azure Rights Management to protect classroom information against unauthorized access. Azure Rights Management protects your information inside or outside the classroom through encryption, identity, and authorization policies, securing your files and email. You can retain control of the information, even when it’s shared with people outside the classroom or your educational institution. Azure Rights Management is free to use with all Office 365 Education license plans. For more information, see Azure Rights Management.
Record the Office 365 Education license plans needed for the classroom in Table 2.
*Table 2. Office 365 Education license plans needed for the classroom*
@@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ Although all new Office 365 Education subscriptions have automatic licensing ena
When you create your Office 365 subscription, you create an Office 365 tenant that includes an Azure AD directory. Azure AD is the centralized repository for all your student and faculty accounts in Office 365, Intune, and other Azure AD–integrated apps. Azure AD is available in Free, Basic, and Premium editions. Azure AD Free, which is included in Office 365 Education, has fewer features than Azure AD Basic, which in turn has fewer features than Azure AD Premium.
-Educational institutions can obtain Azure AD Basic edition licenses at no cost. After you obtain your licenses, activate your Azure AD access by completing the steps in [Step 3: Activate your Azure Active Directory access](https://azure.microsoft.com/documentation/articles/active-directory-get-started-premium/#step-3-activate-your-azure-active-directory-access).
+Educational institutions can obtain Azure AD Basic edition licenses at no cost. After you obtain your licenses, activate your Azure AD access by completing the steps in [Step 3: Activate your Azure Active Directory access](/azure/active-directory/fundamentals/active-directory-get-started-premium#step-3-activate-your-azure-active-directory-access).
The Azure AD Premium features that are not in Azure AD Basic include:
@@ -326,8 +326,8 @@ You can sign up for Azure AD Premium, and then assign licenses to users. In this
For more information about:
-- Azure AD editions and the features in each, see [Azure Active Directory editions](https://azure.microsoft.com/documentation/articles/active-directory-editions/).
-- How to enable Azure AD premium, see [Associate an Azure AD directory with a new Azure subscription](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/azure/jj573650.aspx#create_tenant3).
+- Azure AD editions and the features in each, see [Azure Active Directory editions](/azure/active-directory/fundamentals/active-directory-whatis).
+- How to enable Azure AD premium, see [Associate an Azure AD directory with a new Azure subscription](/previous-versions/azure/azure-services/jj573650(v=azure.100)#create_tenant3).
### Summary
You provision and initially configure Office 365 Education as part of the initial configuration. With the subscription in place, automatic tenant join configured, automatic licensing established, and Azure AD Premium enabled (if required), you’re ready to select the method you will use to create user accounts in Office 365.
@@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ Now that you have an Office 365 subscription, you need to determine how you will
In this method, you have an on-premises AD DS domain. As shown in Figure 4, the Azure AD Connector tool automatically synchronizes AD DS with Azure AD. When you add or change any user accounts in AD DS, the Azure AD Connector tool automatically updates Azure AD.
-**Note** Azure AD Connect also supports synchronization from any Lightweight Directory Access Protocol version 3 (LDAPv3)–compliant directory by using the information provided in [Generic LDAP Connector for FIM 2010 R2 Technical Reference](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn510997.aspx?f=255&MSPPError=-2147217396).
+**Note** Azure AD Connect also supports synchronization from any Lightweight Directory Access Protocol version 3 (LDAPv3)–compliant directory by using the information provided in [Generic LDAP Connector for FIM 2010 R2 Technical Reference](/previous-versions/mim/dn510997(v=ws.10)?f=255&MSPPError=-2147217396).

@@ -393,7 +393,7 @@ You can deploy the Azure AD Connect tool by using one of the following methods:
*Figure 7. Azure AD Connect in Azure*
-This guide describes how to run Azure AD Connect on premises. For information about running Azure AD Connect in Azure, see [Deploy Office 365 Directory Synchronization (DirSync) in Microsoft Azure](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn635310.aspx).
+This guide describes how to run Azure AD Connect on premises. For information about running Azure AD Connect in Azure, see [Deploy Office 365 Directory Synchronization (DirSync) in Microsoft Azure](/microsoft-365/enterprise/deploy-microsoft-365-directory-synchronization-dirsync-in-microsoft-azure).
### Deploy Azure AD Connect on premises
@@ -403,8 +403,8 @@ In this synchronization model (illustrated in Figure 6), you run Azure AD Connec
1. Configure your environment to meet the prerequisites for installing Azure AD Connect by performing the steps in [Prerequisites for Azure AD Connect](https://azure.microsoft.com/documentation/articles/active-directory-aadconnect-prerequisites/).
2. On the VM or physical device that will run Azure AD Connect, sign in with a domain administrator account.
-3. Install Azure AD Connect by performing the steps in [Install Azure AD Connect](https://azure.microsoft.com/documentation/articles/active-directory-aadconnect/#install-azure-ad-connect).
-4. Configure Azure AD Connect features based on your institution’s requirements by performing the steps in [Configure features](https://azure.microsoft.com/documentation/articles/active-directory-aadconnect/#configure-sync-features).
+3. Install Azure AD Connect by performing the steps in [Install Azure AD Connect](/azure/active-directory/hybrid/whatis-hybrid-identity#install-azure-ad-connect).
+4. Configure Azure AD Connect features based on your institution’s requirements by performing the steps in [Configure features](/azure/active-directory/hybrid/whatis-hybrid-identity#configure-sync-features).
Now that you have used on premises Azure AD Connect to deploy AD DS and Azure AD synchronization, you’re ready to verify that Azure AD Connect is synchronizing AD DS user and group accounts with Azure AD.
@@ -445,9 +445,9 @@ Several methods are available to bulk-import user accounts into AD DS domains. T
| Method | Description and reason to select this method |
|--------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| Ldifde.exe | This command-line tool allows you to import and export objects (such as user accounts) from AD DS. Select this method if you aren’t comfortable with Microsoft Visual Basic Scripting Edition (VBScript), Windows PowerShell, or other scripting languages. For more information about using Ldifde.exe, see [Step-by-Step Guide to Bulk Import and Export to Active Directory](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/bb727091.aspx), [LDIFDE—Export/Import data from Active Directory—LDIFDE commands](https://support.microsoft.com/kb/555636), [Import or Export Directory Objects Using Ldifde](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc816781.aspx), and [LDIFDE](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc755456.aspx). |
-| VBScript | This scripting language uses the Active Directory Services Interfaces (ADSI) Component Object Model interface to manage AD DS objects, including user and group objects. Select this method if you’re comfortable with VBScript. For more information about using VBScript and ADSI, see [Step-by-Step Guide to Bulk Import and Export to Active Directory](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/bb727091.aspx) and [ADSI Scriptomatic](https://technet.microsoft.com/scriptcenter/dd939958.aspx). |
-| Windows PowerShell | This scripting language natively supports cmdlets to manage AD DS objects, including user and group objects. Select this method if you’re comfortable with Window PowerShell scripting. For more information about using Windows PowerShell, see [Import Bulk Users to Active Directory](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/bettertogether/2011/01/09/import-bulk-users-to-active-directory/) and [PowerShell: Bulk create AD Users from CSV file](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/wiki/contents/articles/24541.powershell-bulk-create-ad-users-from-csv-file.aspx). |
+| Ldifde.exe | This command-line tool allows you to import and export objects (such as user accounts) from AD DS. Select this method if you aren’t comfortable with Microsoft Visual Basic Scripting Edition (VBScript), Windows PowerShell, or other scripting languages. For more information about using Ldifde.exe, see [Step-by-Step Guide to Bulk Import and Export to Active Directory](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-2000-server/bb727091(v=technet.10)), [LDIFDE—Export/Import data from Active Directory—LDIFDE commands](https://support.microsoft.com/kb/555636), [Import or Export Directory Objects Using Ldifde](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2008-R2-and-2008/cc816781(v=ws.10)), and [LDIFDE](/previous-versions/orphan-topics/ws.10/cc755456(v=ws.10)). |
+| VBScript | This scripting language uses the Active Directory Services Interfaces (ADSI) Component Object Model interface to manage AD DS objects, including user and group objects. Select this method if you’re comfortable with VBScript. For more information about using VBScript and ADSI, see [Step-by-Step Guide to Bulk Import and Export to Active Directory](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-2000-server/bb727091(v=technet.10)) and [ADSI Scriptomatic](https://technet.microsoft.com/scriptcenter/dd939958.aspx). |
+| Windows PowerShell | This scripting language natively supports cmdlets to manage AD DS objects, including user and group objects. Select this method if you’re comfortable with Window PowerShell scripting. For more information about using Windows PowerShell, see [Import Bulk Users to Active Directory](/archive/blogs/technet/bettertogether/import-bulk-users-to-active-directory) and [PowerShell: Bulk create AD Users from CSV file](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/wiki/contents/articles/24541.powershell-bulk-create-ad-users-from-csv-file.aspx). |
@@ -460,9 +460,9 @@ After you have selected your user and group account bulk import method, you’re
| Method | Source file format |
|--------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| Ldifde.exe | Ldifde.exe requires a specific format for the source file. Use Ldifde.exe to export existing user and group accounts so that you can see the format. For examples of the format that Ldifde.exe requires, see [Step-by-Step Guide to Bulk Import and Export to Active Directory](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/bb727091.aspx), [LDIFDE—Export/Import data from Active Directory—LDIFDE commands](https://support.microsoft.com/kb/555636), [Import or Export Directory Objects Using Ldifde](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc816781.aspx), and [LDIFDE](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc755456.aspx). |
-| VBScript | VBScript can use any .csv file format to create a source file for the bulk-import process. To create the .csv file, use software such as Excel. For examples of how to format your source file in comma-separated values (CSV) format, see [Step-by-Step Guide to Bulk Import and Export to Active Directory](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/bb727091.aspx). |
-| Windows PowerShell | Windows PowerShell can use any .csv file format you want to create as a source file for the bulk-import process. To create the .csv file, use software such as Excel. For examples of how to format your source file in CSV format, see [Import Bulk Users to Active Directory](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/bettertogether/2011/01/09/import-bulk-users-to-active-directory/) and [PowerShell: Bulk create AD Users from CSV file](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/wiki/contents/articles/24541.powershell-bulk-create-ad-users-from-csv-file.aspx). |
+| Ldifde.exe | Ldifde.exe requires a specific format for the source file. Use Ldifde.exe to export existing user and group accounts so that you can see the format. For examples of the format that Ldifde.exe requires, see [Step-by-Step Guide to Bulk Import and Export to Active Directory](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-2000-server/bb727091(v=technet.10)), [LDIFDE—Export/Import data from Active Directory—LDIFDE commands](https://support.microsoft.com/kb/555636), [Import or Export Directory Objects Using Ldifde](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2008-R2-and-2008/cc816781(v=ws.10)), and [LDIFDE](/previous-versions/orphan-topics/ws.10/cc755456(v=ws.10)). |
+| VBScript | VBScript can use any .csv file format to create a source file for the bulk-import process. To create the .csv file, use software such as Excel. For examples of how to format your source file in comma-separated values (CSV) format, see [Step-by-Step Guide to Bulk Import and Export to Active Directory](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-2000-server/bb727091(v=technet.10)). |
+| Windows PowerShell | Windows PowerShell can use any .csv file format you want to create as a source file for the bulk-import process. To create the .csv file, use software such as Excel. For examples of how to format your source file in CSV format, see [Import Bulk Users to Active Directory](/archive/blogs/technet/bettertogether/import-bulk-users-to-active-directory) and [PowerShell: Bulk create AD Users from CSV file](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/wiki/contents/articles/24541.powershell-bulk-create-ad-users-from-csv-file.aspx). |
@@ -474,9 +474,9 @@ With the bulk-import source file finished, you’re ready to import the user and
For more information about how to import user accounts into AD DS by using:
-- Ldifde.exe, see [Step-by-Step Guide to Bulk Import and Export to Active Directory](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/bb727091.aspx), [LDIFDE—Export/Import data from Active Directory—LDIFDE commands](https://support.microsoft.com/kb/555636), [Import or Export Directory Objects Using Ldifde](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc816781.aspx), and [LDIFDE](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc755456.aspx).
-- VBScript, see [Step-by-Step Guide to Bulk Import and Export to Active Directory](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/bb727091.aspx).
-- Windows PowerShell, see [Import Bulk Users to Active Directory](https://blogs.technet.microsoft.com/bettertogether/2011/01/09/import-bulk-users-to-active-directory/) and [PowerShell: Bulk create AD Users from CSV file](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/wiki/contents/articles/24541.powershell-bulk-create-ad-users-from-csv-file.aspx).
+- Ldifde.exe, see [Step-by-Step Guide to Bulk Import and Export to Active Directory](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-2000-server/bb727091(v=technet.10)), [LDIFDE—Export/Import data from Active Directory—LDIFDE commands](https://support.microsoft.com/kb/555636), [Import or Export Directory Objects Using Ldifde](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2008-R2-and-2008/cc816781(v=ws.10)), and [LDIFDE](/previous-versions/orphan-topics/ws.10/cc755456(v=ws.10)).
+- VBScript, see [Step-by-Step Guide to Bulk Import and Export to Active Directory](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-2000-server/bb727091(v=technet.10)).
+- Windows PowerShell, see [Import Bulk Users to Active Directory](/archive/blogs/technet/bettertogether/import-bulk-users-to-active-directory) and [PowerShell: Bulk create AD Users from CSV file](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/wiki/contents/articles/24541.powershell-bulk-create-ad-users-from-csv-file.aspx).
### Summary
@@ -506,7 +506,7 @@ Assign SharePoint Online resource permissions to Office 365 security groups, not
**Note** If your institution has AD DS, don’t create security accounts in Office 365. Instead, create the security groups in AD DS, and then use Azure AD integration to synchronize the security groups with your Office 365 tenant.
-For information about creating security groups, see [Create and manage Office 365 groups in Admin Center Preview](https://support.office.com/en-us/article/Create-and-manage-Office-365-groups-in-Admin-Center-Preview-93df5bd4-74c4-45e8-9625-56db92865a6e?ui=en-US&rs=en-US&ad=US).
+For information about creating security groups, see [Create and manage Microsoft 365 groups in Admin Center Preview](https://support.office.com/en-us/article/Create-and-manage-Office-365-groups-in-Admin-Center-Preview-93df5bd4-74c4-45e8-9625-56db92865a6e?ui=en-US&rs=en-US&ad=US).
You can add and remove users from security groups at any time.
@@ -520,7 +520,7 @@ You can create email distribution groups based on job role (such as teachers, ad
**Note** Office 365 can take some time to complete the Exchange Online creation process. You will have to wait until Office 365 completes the Exchange Online creation process before you can perform the following steps.
-For information about how to create security groups, see [Create and manage Office 365 groups in Admin Center Preview](https://support.office.com/en-us/article/Create-and-manage-Office-365-groups-in-Admin-Center-Preview-93df5bd4-74c4-45e8-9625-56db92865a6e?ui=en-US&rs=en-US&ad=US).
+For information about how to create security groups, see [Create and manage Microsoft 365 groups in Admin Center Preview](https://support.office.com/en-us/article/Create-and-manage-Office-365-groups-in-Admin-Center-Preview-93df5bd4-74c4-45e8-9625-56db92865a6e?ui=en-US&rs=en-US&ad=US).
### Summary
@@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ You can assign Azure AD Premium licenses to the users who need the features this
For more information about:
-- Azure AD editions, see [Azure Active Directory editions](https://azure.microsoft.com/documentation/articles/active-directory-editions/).
+- Azure AD editions, see [Azure Active Directory editions](/azure/active-directory/fundamentals/active-directory-whatis).
- How to assign user licenses for Azure AD Premium, see [How to assign EMS/Azure AD Premium licenses to user accounts](https://channel9.msdn.com/Series/Azure-Active-Directory-Videos-Demos/How-to-assign-Azure-AD-Premium-Licenses-to-user-accounts).
## Create and configure a Microsoft Store for Business portal
@@ -545,7 +545,7 @@ Microsoft Store for Business allows you to create your own private portal to man
- Manage apps, app licenses, and updates.
- Distribute apps to your users.
-For more information about Microsoft Store for Business, see [Microsoft Store for Business overview](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/whats-new/windows-store-for-business-overview).
+For more information about Microsoft Store for Business, see [Microsoft Store for Business overview](/microsoft-store/microsoft-store-for-business-overview).
The following section shows you how to create a Microsoft Store for Business portal and configure it for your school.
@@ -568,13 +568,13 @@ After you create the Microsoft Store for Business portal, configure it by using
| Menu selection | What you can do in this menu |
|----------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| Account information | Displays information about your Microsoft Store for Business account (no settings can be changed). You make changes to this information in Office 365 or the Azure Portal. For more information, see [Update Microsoft Store for Business account settings](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/manage/update-windows-store-for-business-account-settings). |
-| Device Guard signing | Allows you to upload and sign Device Guard catalog and policy files. For more information about Device Guard, see [Device Guard deployment guide](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/keep-secure/device-guard-deployment-guide). |
-| LOB publishers | Allows you to add line-of-business (LOB) publishers that can then publish apps to your private store. LOB publishers are usually internal developers or software vendors that are working with your institution. For more information, see [Working with line-of-business apps](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/manage/working-with-line-of-business-apps). |
-| Management tools | Allows you to add tools that you can use to distribute (deploy) apps in your private store. For more information, see [Distribute apps with a management tool](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/manage/distribute-apps-with-management-tool). |
-| Offline licensing | Allows you to show (or not show) offline licensed apps to people shopping in your private store. For more information, see [Licensing model: online and offline licenses](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/manage/apps-in-windows-store-for-business#licensing-model). |
-| Permissions | Allows you to grant other users in your organization the ability to buy, manage, and administer your Microsoft Store for Business portal. You can also remove permissions you have previously granted. For more information, see [Roles and permissions in Microsoft Store for Business](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/manage/roles-and-permissions-windows-store-for-business). |
-| Private store | Allows you to change the organization name used in your Microsoft Store for Business portal. When you create your portal, the private store uses the organization name that you used to create your Office 365 subscription. For more information, see [Distribute apps using your private store](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/manage/distribute-apps-from-your-private-store). |
+| Account information | Displays information about your Microsoft Store for Business account (no settings can be changed). You make changes to this information in Office 365 or the Azure Portal. For more information, see [Update Microsoft Store for Business account settings](/microsoft-store/update-microsoft-store-for-business-account-settings). |
+| Device Guard signing | Allows you to upload and sign Device Guard catalog and policy files. For more information about Device Guard, see [Device Guard deployment guide](/windows/security/threat-protection/windows-defender-application-control/windows-defender-application-control-deployment-guide). |
+| LOB publishers | Allows you to add line-of-business (LOB) publishers that can then publish apps to your private store. LOB publishers are usually internal developers or software vendors that are working with your institution. For more information, see [Working with line-of-business apps](/microsoft-store/working-with-line-of-business-apps). |
+| Management tools | Allows you to add tools that you can use to distribute (deploy) apps in your private store. For more information, see [Distribute apps with a management tool](/microsoft-store/distribute-apps-with-management-tool). |
+| Offline licensing | Allows you to show (or not show) offline licensed apps to people shopping in your private store. For more information, see [Licensing model: online and offline licenses](/microsoft-store/apps-in-microsoft-store-for-business#licensing-model). |
+| Permissions | Allows you to grant other users in your organization the ability to buy, manage, and administer your Microsoft Store for Business portal. You can also remove permissions you have previously granted. For more information, see [Roles and permissions in Microsoft Store for Business](/microsoft-store/roles-and-permissions-microsoft-store-for-business). |
+| Private store | Allows you to change the organization name used in your Microsoft Store for Business portal. When you create your portal, the private store uses the organization name that you used to create your Office 365 subscription. For more information, see [Distribute apps using your private store](/microsoft-store/distribute-apps-from-your-private-store). |
@@ -586,7 +586,7 @@ Now that you have created your Microsoft Store for Business portal, you’re rea
You can deploy apps to individual users or make apps available to users through your private store. Deploying apps to individual users restricts the app to those specified users. Making apps available through your private store allows all your users.
-For more information about how to find, acquire, and distribute apps in the portal, see [App inventory management for Microsoft Store for Business](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-store/app-inventory-management-microsoft-store-for-business).
+For more information about how to find, acquire, and distribute apps in the portal, see [App inventory management for Microsoft Store for Business](/microsoft-store/app-inventory-management-microsoft-store-for-business).
### Summary
@@ -612,7 +612,7 @@ Depending on your school’s requirements, you may need any combination of the f
- **Windows 10 Education**. Use this operating system to:
- Upgrade institution-owned devices to Windows 10 Education.
- Deploy new instances of Windows 10 Education so that new devices have a known configuration.
-- **Windows 10 Pro Education**. Use this operating system to upgrade existing eligible institution-owned devices running Windows 10 Pro Education, version 1903 or later, to Windows 10 Education using [subscription activation](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/deployment/windows-10-subscription-activation).
+- **Windows 10 Pro Education**. Use this operating system to upgrade existing eligible institution-owned devices running Windows 10 Pro Education, version 1903 or later, to Windows 10 Education using [subscription activation](/windows/deployment/windows-10-subscription-activation).
**Note** Although you can use Windows 10 Home on institution-owned devices, Microsoft recommends that you use Windows 10 Pro or Windows 10 Education, instead. Windows 10 Pro and Windows 10 Education provide support for MDM, policy-based management, and Microsoft Store for Business. These features are not available in Windows 10 Home.
@@ -719,14 +719,14 @@ The first step in preparation for Windows 10 deployment is to configure—that i
Device drivers allow Windows 10 to know a device’s hardware resources and connected hardware accessories. Without the proper device drivers, certain features may be unavailable. For example, without the proper audio driver, a device cannot play sounds; without the proper camera driver, the device cannot take photos or use video chat.
-Import device drivers for each device in your institution. For more information about how to import device drivers, see [Import Device Drivers into the Deployment Workbench](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn759415.aspx#ImportDeviceDriversintotheDeploymentWorkbench).
+Import device drivers for each device in your institution. For more information about how to import device drivers, see [Import Device Drivers into the Deployment Workbench](/mem/configmgr/mdt/use-the-mdt#ImportDeviceDriversintotheDeploymentWorkbench).
@@ -741,8 +741,8 @@ If you have Intune, you can deploy Microsoft Store apps after you deploy Windows
In addition, you must prepare your environment for sideloading (deploying) Microsoft Store apps. For more information about how to:
@@ -754,13 +754,13 @@ In addition, you must prepare your environment for sideloading (deploying) Micro
You need to create an MDT application for each Windows desktop app you want to deploy. You can obtain the Windows desktop apps from any source, but ensure that you have sufficient licenses for them.
-To help reduce the effort needed to deploy Microsoft Office 2016 desktop apps, use the Office Deployment Tool, as described in [Deploy Click-to-Run for Office 365 products by using the Office Deployment Tool](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/jj219423.aspx?f=255&MSPPError=-2147217396).
+To help reduce the effort needed to deploy Microsoft Office 2016 desktop apps, use the Office Deployment Tool, as described in [Deploy Click-to-Run for Office 365 products by using the Office Deployment Tool](/deployoffice/deploy-microsoft-365-apps-local-source?f=255&MSPPError=-2147217396).
If you have Intune, you can deploy Windows desktop apps after you deploy Windows 10, as described in the [Deploy apps by using Intune](#deploy-apps-by-using-intune) section. This method provides granular deployment of Windows desktop apps, and you can use it for ongoing management of the apps. This is the preferred method for deploying and managing Windows desktop apps.
**Note** You can also deploy Windows desktop apps after you deploy Windows 10, as described in the [Deploy apps by using Intune](#deploy-apps-by-using-intune) section.
-For more information about how to create an MDT application for Window desktop apps, see [Create a New Application in the Deployment Workbench](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn759415.aspx#CreateaNewApplicationintheDeploymentWorkbench).
+For more information about how to create an MDT application for Window desktop apps, see [Create a New Application in the Deployment Workbench](/mem/configmgr/mdt/use-the-mdt#CreateaNewApplicationintheDeploymentWorkbench).
@@ -776,7 +776,7 @@ For more information about how to create an MDT application for Window desktop a
Upgrade existing devices to Windows 10 Education 32-bit.
-Again, you will create the task sequences based on the operating systems that you imported in Step 1. For more information about how to create a task sequence, see [Create a New Task Sequence in the Deployment Workbench](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn759415.aspx#CreateaNewTaskSequenceintheDeploymentWorkbench).
+Again, you will create the task sequences based on the operating systems that you imported in Step 1. For more information about how to create a task sequence, see [Create a New Task Sequence in the Deployment Workbench](/mem/configmgr/mdt/use-the-mdt#CreateaNewTaskSequenceintheDeploymentWorkbench).
@@ -786,7 +786,7 @@ Again, you will create the task sequences based on the operating systems that yo
Updating a deployment share generates the MDT boot images you use to initiate the Windows 10 deployment process. You can configure the process to create 32 bit and 64 bit versions of the .iso and .wim files you can use to create bootable media or in Windows Deployment Services.
-For more information about how to update a deployment share, see [Update a Deployment Share in the Deployment Workbench](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn759415.aspx#UpdateaDeploymentShareintheDeploymentWorkbench).
+For more information about how to update a deployment share, see [Update a Deployment Share in the Deployment Workbench](/mem/configmgr/mdt/use-the-mdt#UpdateaDeploymentShareintheDeploymentWorkbench).
@@ -799,11 +799,11 @@ You can use Windows Deployment Services in conjunction with MDT to automatically
1. Set up and configure Windows Deployment Services.
Windows Deployment Services is a server role available in all Windows Server editions. You can enable the Windows Deployment Services server role on a new server or on any server running Windows Server in your institution. For more information about how to perform this step, see the following resources:
- - [Windows Deployment Services overview](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/hh831764.aspx)
+ - [Windows Deployment Services overview](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2012-R2-and-2012/hh831764(v=ws.11))
- The Windows Deployment Services Help file, included in Windows Deployment Services
- - [Windows Deployment Services Getting Started Guide for Windows Server 2012](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/jj648426.aspx)
+ - [Windows Deployment Services Getting Started Guide for Windows Server 2012](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2012-R2-and-2012/jj648426(v=ws.11))
-2. Add LTI boot images (Windows PE images) to Windows Deployment Services.
The LTI boot images (.wim files) that you will add to Windows Deployment Services are in the MDT deployment share. Locate the .wim files in the Boot subfolder in the deployment share. For more information about how to perform this step, see [Add LTI Boot Images to Windows Deployment Services](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn759415.aspx#AddLTIBootImagestoWindowsDeploymentServices).
+2. Add LTI boot images (Windows PE images) to Windows Deployment Services.
The LTI boot images (.wim files) that you will add to Windows Deployment Services are in the MDT deployment share. Locate the .wim files in the Boot subfolder in the deployment share. For more information about how to perform this step, see [Add LTI Boot Images to Windows Deployment Services](/mem/configmgr/mdt/use-the-mdt#AddLTIBootImagestoWindowsDeploymentServices).
### Summary
@@ -916,7 +916,7 @@ Microsoft has several recommended settings for educational institutions. Table 1
Use of Microsoft accounts
You want faculty and students to use only Azure AD accounts for institution-owned devices. For these devices, do not use Microsoft accounts or associate a Microsoft account with the Azure AD accounts.
Note Personal devices typically use Microsoft accounts. Faculty and students can associate their Microsoft account with their Azure AD account on these devices.
-Group Policy. Configure the Accounts: Block Microsoft accounts Group Policy setting to use the Users can’t add Microsoft accounts setting option.
+Group Policy. Configure the Accounts: Block Microsoft accounts Group Policy setting to use the Users can’t add Microsoft accounts setting option.
Intune. Enable or disable the camera by using the Allow Microsoft account, Allow adding non-Microsoft accounts manually, and Allow settings synchronization for Microsoft accounts policy settings under the Accounts and Synchronization section of a Windows 10 General Configuration policy.
@@ -924,7 +924,7 @@ Microsoft has several recommended settings for educational institutions. Table 1
Restrict local administrator accounts on the devices
Ensure that only authorized users are local administrators on institution-owned devices. Typically, you don’t want students to be administrators on instruction-owned devices. Explicitly specify the users who will be local administrators on a group of devices.
-Group Policy. Create a Local Group Group Policy preference to limit the local administrators group membership. Select the Delete all member users and Delete all member groups check boxes to remove any existing members. For more information about how to configure Local Group preferences, see Configure a Local Group Item.
+Group Policy. Create a Local Group Group Policy preference to limit the local administrators group membership. Select the Delete all member users and Delete all member groups check boxes to remove any existing members. For more information about how to configure Local Group preferences, see Configure a Local Group Item.
Intune. Not available.
@@ -932,7 +932,7 @@ Microsoft has several recommended settings for educational institutions. Table 1
Restrict the local administrator accounts on the devices
Ensure that only authorized users are local administrators on institution-owned devices. Typically, you don’t want students to be administrators on instruction-owned devices. Explicitly specify the users who will be local administrators on a group of devices.
-Group Policy. Create a Local Group Group Policy preference to limit the local administrators group membership. Select the Delete all member users and Delete all member groups check boxes to remove any existing members. For more information about how to configure Local Group preferences, see Configure a Local Group Item.
+Group Policy. Create a Local Group Group Policy preference to limit the local administrators group membership. Select the Delete all member users and Delete all member groups check boxes to remove any existing members. For more information about how to configure Local Group preferences, see Configure a Local Group Item.
Intune. Not available.
@@ -940,7 +940,7 @@ Microsoft has several recommended settings for educational institutions. Table 1
Manage the built-in administrator account created during device deployment
When you use MDT to deploy Windows 10, the MDT deployment process automatically creates a local Administrator account with the password you specified. As a security best practice, rename the built-in Administrator account and optionally disable it.
-Group Policy. Rename the built-in Administrator account by using the Accounts: Rename administrator account Group Policy setting. For more information about how to rename the built-in Administrator account, see To rename the Administrator account using the Group Policy Management Console. You will specify the new name for the Administrator account. You can disable the built-in Administrator account by using the Accounts: Administrator account status Group Policy setting. For more information about how to disable the built-in Administrator account, see Accounts: Administrator account status.
+Group Policy. Rename the built-in Administrator account by using the Accounts: Rename administrator account Group Policy setting. For more information about how to rename the built-in Administrator account, see To rename the Administrator account using the Group Policy Management Console. You will specify the new name for the Administrator account. You can disable the built-in Administrator account by using the Accounts: Administrator account status Group Policy setting. For more information about how to disable the built-in Administrator account, see Accounts: Administrator account status.
Intune. Not available.
@@ -948,7 +948,7 @@ Microsoft has several recommended settings for educational institutions. Table 1
Control Microsoft Store access
You can control access to Microsoft Store and whether existing Microsoft Store apps receive updates. You can only disable the Microsoft Store app in Windows 10 Education and Windows 10 Enterprise.
-Group Policy. You can disable the Microsoft Store app by using the Turn off the Store Application Group Policy setting. You can prevent Microsoft Store apps from receiving updates by using the Turn off Automatic Download and Install of updates Group Policy setting. For more information about configuring these settings, see Can I use Group Policy to control the Microsoft Store in my enterprise environment?.
+Group Policy. You can disable the Microsoft Store app by using the Turn off the Store Application Group Policy setting. You can prevent Microsoft Store apps from receiving updates by using the Turn off Automatic Download and Install of updates Group Policy setting. For more information about configuring these settings, see Can I use Group Policy to control the Microsoft Store in my enterprise environment?.
Intune. You can enable or disable the camera by using the Allow application store policy setting in the Apps section of a Windows 10 General Configuration policy.
@@ -972,7 +972,7 @@ Microsoft has several recommended settings for educational institutions. Table 1
Use of audio recording
Audio recording (by using the Sound Recorder app) can be a source of disclosure or privacy issues in an education environment. Depending on your institution’s policies, you may want to disable the Sound Recorder app on your devices.
-Group Policy. You can disable the Sound Recorder app by using the Do not allow Sound Recorder to run Group Policy setting. You can disable other audio recording apps by using AppLocker policies. Create AppLocker policies by using the information in Editing an AppLocker Policy and Create Your AppLocker Policies.
+Group Policy. You can disable the Sound Recorder app by using the Do not allow Sound Recorder to run Group Policy setting. You can disable other audio recording apps by using AppLocker policies. Create AppLocker policies by using the information in Editing an AppLocker Policy and Create Your AppLocker Policies.
Intune. You can enable or disable the camera by using the Allow voice recording policy setting in the Features section of a Windows 10 General Configuration policy.
@@ -1008,23 +1008,23 @@ Microsoft has several recommended settings for educational institutions. Table 1
Now, you’re ready to configure settings by using Group Policy. The steps in this section assume that you have an AD DS infrastructure. You will configure the Group Policy settings you select in the [Select Microsoft-recommended settings](#select-microsoft-recommended-settings) section.
-For more information about Group Policy, see [Group Policy Planning and Deployment Guide](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc754948.aspx).
+For more information about Group Policy, see [Group Policy Planning and Deployment Guide](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2008-R2-and-2008/cc754948(v=ws.10)).
#### To configure Group Policy settings
-1. Create a Group Policy object (GPO) that will contain the Group Policy settings by completing the steps in [Create a new Group Policy object](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc738830.aspx).
-2. Configure the settings in the GPO by completing the steps in [Edit a Group Policy object](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc739902.aspx).
-3. Link the GPO to the appropriate AD DS site, domain, or organizational unit by completing the steps in [Link a Group Policy object to a site, domain, or organizational unit](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc738954(v=ws.10).aspx).
+1. Create a Group Policy object (GPO) that will contain the Group Policy settings by completing the steps in [Create a new Group Policy object](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2003/cc738830(v=ws.10)).
+2. Configure the settings in the GPO by completing the steps in [Edit a Group Policy object](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2003/cc739902(v=ws.10)).
+3. Link the GPO to the appropriate AD DS site, domain, or organizational unit by completing the steps in [Link a Group Policy object to a site, domain, or organizational unit](/previous-versions/windows/it-pro/windows-server-2003/cc738954(v=ws.10)).
### Configure settings by using Intune
Now, you’re ready to configure settings by using Intune. The steps in this section assume that you have an Office 365 subscription. You will configure the Intune settings that you selected in the [Select Microsoft-recommended settings](#select-microsoft-recommended-settings) section.
-For more information about Intune, see [Documentation for Microsoft Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/).
+For more information about Intune, see [Documentation for Microsoft Intune](/intune/).
#### To configure Intune settings
-1. Add Intune to your Office 365 subscription by completing the steps in [Get started with a paid subscription to Microsoft Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/get-started/start-with-a-paid-subscription-to-microsoft-intune).
+1. Add Intune to your Office 365 subscription by completing the steps in [Get started with a paid subscription to Microsoft Intune](/intune/get-started/start-with-a-paid-subscription-to-microsoft-intune).
2. Enroll devices with Intune by completing the steps in [Get ready to enroll devices in Microsoft Intune](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn646962.aspx).
3. Configure the settings in Intune Windows 10 policies by completing the steps in [Manage settings and features on your devices with Microsoft Intune policies](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn646984.aspx).
4. Manage Windows 10 devices by completing the steps in [Manage Windows PCs with Microsoft Intune](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn646959.aspx).
@@ -1033,7 +1033,7 @@ For more information about Intune, see [Documentation for Microsoft Intune](http
You can use Intune to deploy Microsoft Store and Windows desktop apps. Intune provides improved control over which users receive specific apps. In addition, Intune allows you deploy apps to companion devices (such as Windows 10 Mobile, iOS, or Android devices) Finally, Intune helps you manage app security and features, such as mobile application management policies that let you manage apps on devices that are not enrolled in Intune or are managed by another solution.
-For more information about how to configure Intune to manage your apps, see [Deploy and configure apps with Microsoft Intune](https://docs.microsoft.com/intune/).
+For more information about how to configure Intune to manage your apps, see [Deploy and configure apps with Microsoft Intune](/intune/).
### Summary
@@ -1063,14 +1063,14 @@ Prior to deployment of Windows 10, ensure that you complete the tasks listed in
Use the Deployment Wizard to deploy Windows 10. The LTI deployment process is almost fully automated: You provide only minimal information to the Deployment Wizard at the beginning of the process. After the wizard collects the necessary information, the remainder of the process is fully automated.
-**Note** To fully automate the LTI deployment process, complete the steps in the “Fully Automated LTI Deployment Scenario” section in the [Microsoft Deployment Toolkit Samples Guide](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn781089.aspx).
+**Note** To fully automate the LTI deployment process, complete the steps in the “Fully Automated LTI Deployment Scenario” section in the [Microsoft Deployment Toolkit Samples Guide](/mem/configmgr/mdt/samples-guide).
In most instances, deployments occur without incident. Only in rare occasions do deployments experience problems.
#### To deploy Windows 10
1. **Initiate the LTI deployment process**. Initiate the LTI deployment process booting over the network (PXE boot) or from local media. You selected the method for initiating the LTI deployment process in the [Select a method to initiate deployment](#select-a-method-to-initiate-deployment) section earlier in this guide.
-2. **Complete the Deployment Wizard**. For more information about how to complete the Deployment Wizard, see the “Running the Deployment Wizard” topic in [Using the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn759415.aspx#Running%20the%20Deployment%20Wizard).
+2. **Complete the Deployment Wizard**. For more information about how to complete the Deployment Wizard, see the “Running the Deployment Wizard” topic in [Using the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit](/mem/configmgr/mdt/use-the-mdt#Running%20the%20Deployment%20Wizard).
### Set up printers
@@ -1141,9 +1141,9 @@ Table 13 lists the school and individual classroom maintenance tasks, the resour
Verify that Windows Update is active and current with operating system and software updates.
For more information about completing this task when you have:
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/education/windows/edu-deployment-recommendations.md b/education/windows/edu-deployment-recommendations.md
index 1f3bcffff3..268f6d2d8b 100644
--- a/education/windows/edu-deployment-recommendations.md
+++ b/education/windows/edu-deployment-recommendations.md
@@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ Keep these best practices in mind when deploying any edition of Windows 10 in sc
## Windows 10 Contacts privacy settings
If you’re an IT administrator who deploys Windows 10 in a school or district, we recommend that you review these deployment resources to make informed decisions about how you can configure telemetry for your school or district:
-* [Configure Windows telemetry in your organization](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=817241) - Describes the types of telemetry we gather and the ways you can manage this data.
-* [Manage connections from Windows operating system components to Microsoft services](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=817240) - Learn about network connections that Windows components make to Microsoft and also the privacy settings (such as location, camera, messaging, and more) that affect data that is shared with either Microsoft or apps and how you can manage this data.
+* [Configure Windows telemetry in your organization](/windows/privacy/configure-windows-diagnostic-data-in-your-organization) - Describes the types of telemetry we gather and the ways you can manage this data.
+* [Manage connections from Windows operating system components to Microsoft services](/windows/privacy/manage-connections-from-windows-operating-system-components-to-microsoft-services) - Learn about network connections that Windows components make to Microsoft and also the privacy settings (such as location, camera, messaging, and more) that affect data that is shared with either Microsoft or apps and how you can manage this data.
In particular, the **Contacts** area in the **Settings** > **Privacy** section lets you choose which apps can access a student’s contacts list. By default, this setting is turned on.
@@ -133,4 +133,4 @@ If you need help deleting the account, you can contact Skype customer service by
To delete an Xbox account, you can follow the instructions here: [How to delete your Microsoft account and personal information associated with it](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=816521).
## Related topics
-[Deploy Windows 10 in a school](deploy-windows-10-in-a-school.md)
+[Deploy Windows 10 in a school](deploy-windows-10-in-a-school.md)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/education/windows/education-scenarios-store-for-business.md b/education/windows/education-scenarios-store-for-business.md
index 3149237ba1..586d6ea6b8 100644
--- a/education/windows/education-scenarios-store-for-business.md
+++ b/education/windows/education-scenarios-store-for-business.md
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ manager: dansimp
Learn about education scenarios for Microsoft Store for Education. IT admins and teachers can use Microsoft Store to find, acquire, distribute, and manage apps.
-Many of the [settings in Microsoft Store for Business](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-store/settings-reference-microsoft-store-for-business) also apply in Microsoft Store for Education. Several of the items in this topic are unique to Microsoft Store for Education.
+Many of the [settings in Microsoft Store for Business](/microsoft-store/settings-reference-microsoft-store-for-business) also apply in Microsoft Store for Education. Several of the items in this topic are unique to Microsoft Store for Education.
## Basic Purchaser role
Applies to: IT admins
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Applies to: IT admins
Self-service sign up makes it easier for teachers and students in your organization to get started with **Minecraft: Education Edition**. If you have self-service sign up enabled in your tenant, teachers can assign **Minecraft: Education Edition** to students before they have a work or school account. Students receive an email that steps them through the process of signing up for a work or school account. For more information on self-service sign up, see [Using self-service sign up in your organization](https://support.office.com/article/Using-self-service-sign-up-in-your-organization-4f8712ff-9346-4c6c-bb63-a21ad7a62cbd?ui=en-US&rs=en-US&ad=US).
### Domain verification
-For education organizations, domain verification ensures you are on the academic verification list. As an admin, you might need to verify your domain using the Office 365 portal. For more information, see [Verify your Office 365 domain to prove ownership, nonprofit or education status](https://support.office.com/article/Verify-your-Office-365-domain-to-prove-ownership-nonprofit-or-education-status-or-to-activate-Yammer-87d1844e-aa47-4dc0-a61b-1b773fd4e590?ui=en-US&rs=en-US&ad=US).
+For education organizations, domain verification ensures you are on the academic verification list. As an admin, you might need to verify your domain using the Microsoft 365 admin center. For more information, see [Verify your Office 365 domain to prove ownership, nonprofit or education status](https://support.office.com/article/Verify-your-Office-365-domain-to-prove-ownership-nonprofit-or-education-status-or-to-activate-Yammer-87d1844e-aa47-4dc0-a61b-1b773fd4e590?ui=en-US&rs=en-US&ad=US).
## Acquire apps
Applies to: IT admins and teachers
@@ -91,22 +91,22 @@ Applies to: IT admins and teachers
Find apps for your school using Microsoft Store for Business. Admins in an education setting can use the same processes as Admins in an enterprise setting to find and acquire apps.
**To acquire apps**
-- For info on how to acquire apps, see [Acquire apps in Microsoft Store for Business](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-store/acquire-apps-windows-store-for-business#acquire-apps)
+- For info on how to acquire apps, see [Acquire apps in Microsoft Store for Business](/microsoft-store/acquire-apps-windows-store-for-business#acquire-apps)
**To add a payment method - debit or credit card**
If the app you purchase has a price, you’ll need to provide a payment method.
- During your purchase, click **Get started! Add a way to pay.** Provide the info needed for your debit or credit card.
-For more information on payment options, see [payment options](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-store/acquire-apps-windows-store-for-business#payment-options).
+For more information on payment options, see [payment options](/microsoft-store/acquire-apps-windows-store-for-business#payment-options).
-For more information on tax rates, see [tax information](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-store/update-windows-store-for-business-account-settings#organization-tax-information).
+For more information on tax rates, see [tax information](/microsoft-store/update-windows-store-for-business-account-settings#organization-tax-information).
### Get started with Minecraft: Education Edition
Teachers and IT administrators can now get trials or subscriptions to Minecraft: Education Edition and add it to Microsoft Store for Business for distribution.
-- [Get started with Minecraft: Education Edition](https://docs.microsoft.com/education/windows/get-minecraft-for-education)
-- [For IT admins – Minecraft: Education Edition](https://docs.microsoft.com/education/windows/school-get-minecraft)
-- [For teachers – Minecraft: Education Edition](https://docs.microsoft.com/education/windows/teacher-get-minecraft)
+- [Get started with Minecraft: Education Edition](./get-minecraft-for-education.md)
+- [For IT admins – Minecraft: Education Edition](./school-get-minecraft.md)
+- [For teachers – Minecraft: Education Edition](./teacher-get-minecraft.md)
## Manage apps and software
Applies to: IT admins and teachers
@@ -135,12 +135,12 @@ Manage and distribute apps to students and others in your organization. Differen
Applies to: IT admins
**To manage and distribute apps**
-- For info on how to distribute **Minecraft: Education Edition**, see [For IT admins – Minecraft: Education Edition](https://docs.microsoft.com/education/windows/school-get-minecraft#distribute-minecraft)
-- For info on how to manage and distribute other apps, see [App inventory management - Microsoft Store for Business](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-store/app-inventory-management-windows-store-for-business)
+- For info on how to distribute **Minecraft: Education Edition**, see [For IT admins – Minecraft: Education Edition](./school-get-minecraft.md#distribute-minecraft)
+- For info on how to manage and distribute other apps, see [App inventory management - Microsoft Store for Business](/microsoft-store/app-inventory-management-windows-store-for-business)
Applies to: Teachers
-For info on how to distribute **Minecraft: Education Edition**, see [For teachers – Minecraft: Education Edition](https://docs.microsoft.com/education/windows/teacher-get-minecraft#distribute-minecraft).
+For info on how to distribute **Minecraft: Education Edition**, see [For teachers – Minecraft: Education Edition](./teacher-get-minecraft.md#distribute-minecraft).
**To assign an app to a student**
@@ -169,9 +169,9 @@ Similarly, you can purchase additional subscriptions of **Minecraft: Education E
## Manage order history
Applies to: IT admins and teachers
-You can manage your orders through Microsoft Store for Business. For info on order history and how to refund an order, see [Manage app orders in Microsoft Store for Business](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/manage/manage-orders-windows-store-for-business).
+You can manage your orders through Microsoft Store for Business. For info on order history and how to refund an order, see [Manage app orders in Microsoft Store for Business](/microsoft-store/manage-orders-microsoft-store-for-business).
It can take up to 24 hours after a purchase, before a receipt is available on your **Order history page**.
> [!NOTE]
-> For **Minecraft: Education Edition**, you can request a refund through Microsoft Store for Business for two months from the purchase date. After two months, refunds require a support call.
+> For **Minecraft: Education Edition**, you can request a refund through Microsoft Store for Business for two months from the purchase date. After two months, refunds require a support call.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/education/windows/enable-s-mode-on-surface-go-devices.md b/education/windows/enable-s-mode-on-surface-go-devices.md
index 0b7fc8c617..e7dce928ea 100644
--- a/education/windows/enable-s-mode-on-surface-go-devices.md
+++ b/education/windows/enable-s-mode-on-surface-go-devices.md
@@ -25,16 +25,16 @@ Here are some things you’ll need before attempting any of these procedures:
- A Surface Go device or Surface Go device image based on Windows 10 Pro
(1803)
- General understanding of [Windows deployment scenarios and related
- tools](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/deployment/windows-deployment-scenarios-and-tools)
+ tools](/windows/deployment/windows-deployment-scenarios-and-tools)
- [Windows ADK for Windows 10
- 1803](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/deployment/windows-adk-scenarios-for-it-pros)
+ 1803](/windows/deployment/windows-adk-scenarios-for-it-pros)
- [Bootable Windows Preinstall Environment
- (WinPE)](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows-hardware/manufacture/desktop/winpe-create-usb-bootable-drive)
+ (WinPE)](/windows-hardware/manufacture/desktop/winpe-create-usb-bootable-drive)
## Enabling S Mode – Windows Image (WIM)
Like enterprise administrators performing large-scale deployment of customized Windows images, education customers can create their own customized Windows images for deployment to multiple classroom devices. An education customer who plans to follow [a traditional image-based deployment
-process](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/deployment/windows-10-deployment-scenarios#traditional-deployment) using a Windows 10 Pro (1803) image for Surface Go devices can enable S mode as follows:
+process](/windows/deployment/windows-10-deployment-scenarios#traditional-deployment) using a Windows 10 Pro (1803) image for Surface Go devices can enable S mode as follows:
1. Use DISM to mount your offline Windows 10 Pro (1803) image.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Your Windows 10 Pro (1803) image now has S mode enabled and is ready to deploy t
Education customers who wish to avoid the additional overhead associated with Windows image creation, customization, and deployment can enable S mode on a per-device basis. Performing the following steps on a Surface Go device will enable S mode on an existing installation of Windows 10 Pro (1803).
1. Create a bootable WinPE media. See [Create a bootable Windows PE USB
- drive](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn938386.aspx) for details.
+ drive](/windows-hardware/manufacture/desktop/winpe-create-usb-bootable-drive) for details.
2. Create an unattend.xml answer file, adding the
amd64_Microsoft_Windows_CodeIntegrity component to Pass 2 offline Servicing
@@ -130,17 +130,16 @@ Upon reboot, you should find your Surface Go device now is now in S mode.
## Additional Info
-[Windows 10 deployment scenarios](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/deployment/windows-10-deployment-scenarios)
+[Windows 10 deployment scenarios](/windows/deployment/windows-10-deployment-scenarios)
-[Windows 10 deployment scenarios and tools](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/deployment/windows-deployment-scenarios-and-tools)
+[Windows 10 deployment scenarios and tools](/windows/deployment/windows-deployment-scenarios-and-tools)
-[Download and install the Windows ADK](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows-hardware/get-started/adk-install)
+[Download and install the Windows ADK](/windows-hardware/get-started/adk-install)
-[Windows ADK for Windows 10 scenarios for IT Pros](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows/deployment/windows-adk-scenarios-for-it-pros)
+[Windows ADK for Windows 10 scenarios for IT Pros](/windows/deployment/windows-adk-scenarios-for-it-pros)
-[Modify a Windows Image Using DISM](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows-hardware/manufacture/desktop/mount-and-modify-a-windows-image-using-dism)
+[Modify a Windows Image Using DISM](/windows-hardware/manufacture/desktop/mount-and-modify-a-windows-image-using-dism)
-[Service a Windows Image Using DISM](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows-hardware/manufacture/desktop/service-a-windows-image-using-dism)
-
-[DISM Image Management Command-Line Options](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows-hardware/manufacture/desktop/dism-image-management-command-line-options-s14)
+[Service a Windows Image Using DISM](/windows-hardware/manufacture/desktop/service-a-windows-image-using-dism)
+[DISM Image Management Command-Line Options](/windows-hardware/manufacture/desktop/dism-image-management-command-line-options-s14)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/education/windows/get-minecraft-device-promotion.md b/education/windows/get-minecraft-device-promotion.md
index bafc4ed6ae..258525651d 100644
--- a/education/windows/get-minecraft-device-promotion.md
+++ b/education/windows/get-minecraft-device-promotion.md
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ manager: dansimp
The **Minecraft: Education Edition** with Windows 10 device promotion ended January 31, 2018.
Qualifying customers that received one-year subscriptions for Minecraft: Education Edition as part of this program and wish to continue using the game in their schools can purchase new subscriptions in Microsoft Store for Education.
-For more information on purchasing Minecraft: Education Edition, see [Add Minecraft to your Store for Education](https://docs.microsoft.com/education/windows/school-get-minecraft?toc=/microsoft-store/education/toc.json).
+For more information on purchasing Minecraft: Education Edition, see [Add Minecraft to your Store for Education](./school-get-minecraft.md?toc=%2fmicrosoft-store%2feducation%2ftoc.json).
>[!Note]
>**Minecraft: Education Edition** with Windows 10 device promotion subscriptions are valid for 1 year from the time
@@ -87,4 +87,4 @@ After that, we’ll add the appropriate number of Minecraft: Education Edition l
Teachers or admins can distribute the licenses:
- [Learn how teachers can distribute **Minecraft: Education Edition**](teacher-get-minecraft.md#distribute-minecraft)
- [Learn how IT administrators can distribute **Minecraft: Education Edition**](school-get-minecraft.md#distribute-minecraft)
--->
+-->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/education/windows/get-minecraft-for-education.md b/education/windows/get-minecraft-for-education.md
index 7037b5ce14..78f1759c45 100644
--- a/education/windows/get-minecraft-for-education.md
+++ b/education/windows/get-minecraft-for-education.md
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Teachers and IT administrators can now get early access to **Minecraft: Educatio
- Trials or subscriptions of **Minecraft: Education Edition** are offered to education tenants that are managed by Azure Active Directory (Azure AD).
- If your school doesn't have an Azure AD tenant, the [IT administrator can set one up](school-get-minecraft.md) as part of the process of getting **Minecraft: Education Edition**.
- Office 365 Education, which includes online versions of Office apps plus 1 TB online storage. [Sign up your school for Office 365 Education.](https://products.office.com/academic/office-365-education-plan)
- - If your school has an Office 365 Education subscription, it includes a free Azure AD subscription. [Register your free Azure AD subscription.](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/mt703369%28v=vs.85%29.aspx)
+ - If your school has an Office 365 Education subscription, it includes a free Azure AD subscription. [Register your free Azure AD subscription.](/windows/client-management/mdm/register-your-free-azure-active-directory-subscription)
@@ -46,5 +46,4 @@ Teachers and IT administrators can now get early access to **Minecraft: Educatio
-[Learn how IT administrators can get and distribute **Minecraft: Education Edition**](school-get-minecraft.md), and how to manage permissions for Minecraft.
-
+[Learn how IT administrators can get and distribute **Minecraft: Education Edition**](school-get-minecraft.md), and how to manage permissions for Minecraft.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/education/windows/images/edu-districtdeploy-fig1.png b/education/windows/images/edu-districtdeploy-fig1.png
index a9ed962f95..9e9cd6c238 100644
Binary files a/education/windows/images/edu-districtdeploy-fig1.png and b/education/windows/images/edu-districtdeploy-fig1.png differ
diff --git a/education/windows/images/edu-districtdeploy-fig2.png b/education/windows/images/edu-districtdeploy-fig2.png
index 3838c18153..dfa00a0132 100644
Binary files a/education/windows/images/edu-districtdeploy-fig2.png and b/education/windows/images/edu-districtdeploy-fig2.png differ
diff --git a/education/windows/images/edu-districtdeploy-fig4.png b/education/windows/images/edu-districtdeploy-fig4.png
index c55ee20d47..ca07e5a968 100644
Binary files a/education/windows/images/edu-districtdeploy-fig4.png and b/education/windows/images/edu-districtdeploy-fig4.png differ
diff --git a/education/windows/index.md b/education/windows/index.md
index b40b009575..81e3f97634 100644
--- a/education/windows/index.md
+++ b/education/windows/index.md
@@ -46,18 +46,18 @@ ms.date: 10/13/2017
Follow these links to find step-by-step guidance on how to deploy Windows 8.1 in an academic environment.
-
Windows 8.1 deployment planning Explore key considerations and questions that should be answered when planning for Windows 8.1 deployment.
BYOD Explore Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) considerations, including device types, infrastructure, and deployment models.
-
Deploying Windows RT 8.1 Get step-by-step instructions on how to configure and deploy Windows RT devices (like Surface and other tablets) in educational environments.
-
Virtual Desktop Infrastructure Learn how to address challenges related to BYOD scenarios using Virtual Desktop Infrastructure (VDI).
-
Microsoft Store apps Explore Microsoft Store app deployment strategies and considerations for educational institutions running Windows 8.1.
-
Windows To Go Learn about the benefits, limitations, and processes involved in deploying Windows To Go.
+
Windows 8.1 deployment planning Explore key considerations and questions that should be answered when planning for Windows 8.1 deployment.
BYOD Explore Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) considerations, including device types, infrastructure, and deployment models.
+
Deploying Windows RT 8.1 Get step-by-step instructions on how to configure and deploy Windows RT devices (like Surface and other tablets) in educational environments.
+
Virtual Desktop Infrastructure Learn how to address challenges related to BYOD scenarios using Virtual Desktop Infrastructure (VDI).
+
Microsoft Store apps Explore Microsoft Store app deployment strategies and considerations for educational institutions running Windows 8.1.
+
Windows To Go Learn about the benefits, limitations, and processes involved in deploying Windows To Go.
## Related topics
-- [Microsoft Education documentation and resources](https://docs.microsoft.com/education)
-- [Windows 10 and Windows 10 Mobile](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/index)
+- [Microsoft Education documentation and resources](/education)
+- [Windows 10 and Windows 10 Mobile](/windows/windows-10/)
+
Try it out: Windows 10 deployment (for education) Learn how to upgrade devices running the Windows 7 operating system to Windows 10 Anniversary Update, and how to manage devices, apps, and users in Windows 10 Anniversary Update.
+-->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/education/windows/s-mode-switch-to-edu.md b/education/windows/s-mode-switch-to-edu.md
index 4860249e19..e479ab26fe 100644
--- a/education/windows/s-mode-switch-to-edu.md
+++ b/education/windows/s-mode-switch-to-edu.md
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ Tenant-wide Windows 10 Pro in S mode > Pro Education in S mode
Tenant-wide Windows 10 Pro > Pro Education
> [!IMPORTANT]
-> While it’s free to switch to Windows 10 Pro, it’s not reversible. The only way to roll back this kind of switch is through a [bare metal recovery (BMR)](https://docs.microsoft.com/windows-hardware/manufacture/desktop/create-media-to-run-push-button-reset-features-s14) reset. This restores a Windows device to the factory state, even if the user needs to replace the hard drive or completely wipe the drive clean. If a device is switched out of S mode via the Microsoft Store, it will remain out of S mode even after the device is reset.
+> While it’s free to switch to Windows 10 Pro, it’s not reversible. The only way to roll back this kind of switch is through a [bare metal recovery (BMR)](/windows-hardware/manufacture/desktop/create-media-to-run-push-button-reset-features-s14) reset. This restores a Windows device to the factory state, even if the user needs to replace the hard drive or completely wipe the drive clean. If a device is switched out of S mode via the Microsoft Store, it will remain out of S mode even after the device is reset.
### Devices running Windows 10, version 1709
@@ -71,4 +71,4 @@ Tenant-wide Windows 10 Pro > Pro Education
[FAQs](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4020089/windows-10-in-s-mode-faq)
[Deploy Windows 10 in a school](deploy-windows-10-in-a-school.md)
[Deploy Windows 10 in a school district](deploy-windows-10-in-a-school-district.md)
-[Compare Windows 10 editions](https://www.microsoft.com/WindowsForBusiness/Compare)
+[Compare Windows 10 editions](https://www.microsoft.com/WindowsForBusiness/Compare)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/education/windows/school-get-minecraft.md b/education/windows/school-get-minecraft.md
index 515bfff44f..e3900603b6 100644
--- a/education/windows/school-get-minecraft.md
+++ b/education/windows/school-get-minecraft.md
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ If you’ve been approved and are part of the Enrollment for Education Solutions
Now that the app is in your Microsoft Store for Education inventory, you can choose how to distribute Minecraft. For more information on distribution options, see [Distribute Minecraft](#distribute-minecraft).
-If you need additional licenses for **Minecraft: Education Edition**, see [Purchase additional licenses](https://technet.microsoft.com/edu/windows/education-scenarios-store-for-business#purchase-additional-licenses).
+If you need additional licenses for **Minecraft: Education Edition**, see [Purchase additional licenses](./education-scenarios-store-for-business.md#purchase-additional-licenses).
### Minecraft: Education Edition - volume licensing
Qualified education institutions can purchase Minecraft: Education Edition licenses through their Microsoft channel partner. Schools need to be part of the Enrollment for Education Solutions (EES) volume licensing program. Educational institutions should work with their channel partner to determine which Minecraft: Education Edition licensing offer is best for their institution. The process looks like this:
@@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ After Minecraft: Education Edition is added to your Microsoft Store for Educatio
- You can assign the app to others.
- You can download the app to distribute.
-Admins can also add Minecraft: Education Edition to the private store. This allows people in your organization to install the app from the private store. For more information, see [Distribute apps using your private store](https://technet.microsoft.com/itpro/windows/manage/distribute-apps-from-your-private-store).
+Admins can also add Minecraft: Education Edition to the private store. This allows people in your organization to install the app from the private store. For more information, see [Distribute apps using your private store](/microsoft-store/distribute-apps-from-your-private-store).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v4/sxs-conflict-detected-dialog-box--app-v-46-sp1-.md b/mdop/appv-v4/sxs-conflict-detected-dialog-box--app-v-46-sp1-.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8e3965c0c2..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v4/sxs-conflict-detected-dialog-box--app-v-46-sp1-.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
----
-title: SXS Conflict Detected Dialog Box (App-V 4.6 SP1)
-description: SXS Conflict Detected Dialog Box (App-V 4.6 SP1)
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 7cbb67ba-cc11-4f10-b903-4a6af233eacb
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# SXS Conflict Detected Dialog Box (App-V 4.6 SP1)
-
-
-The application you are installing requires 64-bit assemblies. You can find more information about the side-by-side assemblies in the Sequencer log file which is located in the following directory:
-
-<App-V Sequencer installation drive> \\**Program Files** \\ **Microsoft Application Virtualization Sequencer** \\ **Logs**
-
-Install public versions of the required 64-bit assemblies on the computer running the App-V Sequencer before sequencing this application. You must also install the assemblies on the computer running the App-V client before you deploy this package.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Dialog Boxes (AppV 4.6 SP1)](dialog-boxes--appv-46-sp1-.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v4/system-error-reportserver.md b/mdop/appv-v4/system-error-reportserver.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b94b419d2f..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v4/system-error-reportserver.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
----
-title: System Error Report
-description: System Error Report
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 4081db2f-92a6-4928-a26b-757048159094
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# System Error Report
-
-
-Generate the System Error Report to track the number of errors and warnings logged over time during the specified reporting period for the specified server, for the specified server group.
-
-This report generates a bar graph that displays the fatal errors, errors, and log warnings in ascending order based on the time the messages were logged.
-
-When you create a report, you specify the parameters that are used for collecting the data when the report is run.
-
-Reports are not run automatically; you must run them explicitly to generate output data. The length of time it takes to run this report is determined by the amount of data collected in the data store.
-
-After you run a report and the output is displayed in the Application Virtualization Server Management Console, you can export the report into the following formats:
-
-- Adobe Acrobat (PDF)
-
-- Microsoft Office Excel
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[How to Create a Report](how-to-create-a-reportserver.md)
-
-[How to Delete a Report](how-to-delete-a-reportserver.md)
-
-[How to Export a Report](how-to-export-a-reportserver.md)
-
-[How to Print a Report](how-to-print-a-reportserver.md)
-
-[How to Run a Report](how-to-run-a-reportserver.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v4/system-utilization-reportserver.md b/mdop/appv-v4/system-utilization-reportserver.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5bccc4c9ab..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v4/system-utilization-reportserver.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
----
-title: System Utilization Report
-description: System Utilization Report
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 4d490d15-2d1f-4f2c-99bb-0685447c0672
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# System Utilization Report
-
-
-Use the System Utilization Report to graph the total daily system usage. You can use this report to determine the load on your Application Virtualization System.
-
-This report tracks the usage over time during the reporting period for the specified server or for the server group.
-
-The System Utilization Report also graphs the following system usage:
-
-- Usage by day of the week
-
-- Usage by hour of the day
-
-The System Utilization Report also includes a summary of the total system usage for specific users and total session counts.
-
-When you create a report, you specify the parameters that are used for collecting the data when the report is run.
-
-Reports are not run automatically; you must run them explicitly to generate output data. The length of time it takes to run this report is determined by the amount of data collected in the data store.
-
-After you run a report and the output is displayed in the Application Virtualization Server Management Console, you can export the report into the following formats:
-
-- Adobe Acrobat (PDF)
-
-- Microsoft Office Excel
-
-**Note**
-The App-V server name reported from the clients must be part of the Default Server Group in order for the System Utilization report to show data. For example, if you are using multiple servers with a Network Load Balancer (NLB), you must add the NLB cluster name to the Default Server Group.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[How to Create a Report](how-to-create-a-reportserver.md)
-
-[How to Delete a Report](how-to-delete-a-reportserver.md)
-
-[How to Export a Report](how-to-export-a-reportserver.md)
-
-[How to Print a Report](how-to-print-a-reportserver.md)
-
-[How to Run a Report](how-to-run-a-reportserver.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v4/target-os-page-learn-more.md b/mdop/appv-v4/target-os-page-learn-more.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 34db517496..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v4/target-os-page-learn-more.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Target OS Page
-description: Target OS Page
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 003fd992-0a7e-494e-9e75-4dd5e0927e15
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Target OS Page
-
-
-Use the **Target OS** page to specify which operating systems in your environment can run this virtual application package.
-
-**Note**
-The operating systems specified on this page can only run this virtual application package if the application you are sequencing supports the operating systems specified. Review the supported operating systems for the application you are sequencing to ensure compatibility.
-
-
-
-This page contains the following elements:
-
-**Allow this package to run on any operating system**
-Enables the virtual application package to be installed and run on all supported operating systems.
-
-**Allow this package to only run on the following operating systems**
-Enables the virtual application package to be installed and run only on the selected supported operating systems.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Create New Package Wizard (AppV 4.6 SP1)](create-new-package-wizard---appv-46-sp1-.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v4/tasks-for-the-application-virtualization-sequencer--app-v-46-sp1-.md b/mdop/appv-v4/tasks-for-the-application-virtualization-sequencer--app-v-46-sp1-.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f3df4eb7f8..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v4/tasks-for-the-application-virtualization-sequencer--app-v-46-sp1-.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Tasks for the Application Virtualization Sequencer (App-V 4.6 SP1)
-description: Tasks for the Application Virtualization Sequencer (App-V 4.6 SP1)
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 58597af9-6a62-4588-ab41-dbf6b7026267
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Tasks for the Application Virtualization Sequencer (App-V 4.6 SP1)
-
-
-Use any of the following links for more information about using the App-V Sequencer.
-
-## In This Section
-
-
-[How to Determine Which Type of Application to Sequence (App-V 4.6 SP1)](how-to-determine-which-type-of-application-to-sequence---app-v-46-sp1-.md)
-Describes how to determine the type of application you want to sequence.
-
-[How to Sequence a New Standard Application (App-V 4.6 SP1)](how-to-sequence-a-new-standard-application--app-v-46-sp1-.md)
-Describes how to sequence a new standard application.
-
-[How to Sequence a New Add-on or Plug-in Application (App-V 4.6 SP1)](how-to-sequence-a-new-add-on-or-plug-in-application--app-v-46-sp1-.md)
-Describes how to sequence a new add-on or plug-in application.
-
-[How to Sequence a New Middleware Application (App-V 4.6 SP1)](how-to-sequence-a-new-middleware-application--app-v-46-sp1-.md)
-Describes how to sequence a new middleware application.
-
-[How to Modify an Existing Virtual Application Package (App-V 4.6 SP1)](how-to-modify-an-existing-virtual-application-package--app-v-46-sp1-.md)
-Describes how to modify an existing virtual application package.
-
-[How to Apply a Package Accelerator to Create a Virtual Application Package (App-V 4.6 SP1)](how-to-apply-a-package-accelerator-to-create-a-virtual-application-package---app-v-46-sp1-.md)
-Describes how to use a Package Accelerator to create a new virtual application package.
-
-[How to Apply an App-V Project Template (App-V 4.6 SP1)](how-to-apply-an-app-v-project-template--app-v-46-sp1-.md)
-Describes how to use a project template to apply standard package settings to a new virtual application package.
-
-[How to Create App-V Package Accelerators (App-V 4.6 SP1)](how-to-create-app-v-package-accelerators--app-v-46-sp1-.md)
-Describes how create a new Package Accelerator.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Application Virtualization Sequencer](application-virtualization-sequencer.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v4/tasks-for-the-application-virtualization-sequencer.md b/mdop/appv-v4/tasks-for-the-application-virtualization-sequencer.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 88d5d425f0..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v4/tasks-for-the-application-virtualization-sequencer.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Tasks for the Application Virtualization Sequencer
-description: Tasks for the Application Virtualization Sequencer
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 398018f4-297a-440d-b614-23f0ab03e7bd
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Tasks for the Application Virtualization Sequencer
-
-
-The links in this section provide the necessary information to complete each associated Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) task.
-
-## In This Section
-
-
-[How to Sequence a New Application](how-to-sequence-a-new-application.md)
-Specifies the tasks associated with sequencing a new application.
-
-[How to Create a Virtual Environment for a Web-Based Application](how-to-create-a-virtual-environment-for-a-web-based-application.md)
-Specifies how to create separate web environments for virtual applications.
-
-[How to Upgrade a Sequenced Virtual Application Package](how-to-upgrade-a-sequenced-virtual-application-package.md)
-Specifies how to upgrade an existing virtual application package.
-
-[How to Branch a Package](how-to-branch-a-package.md)
-Specifies how to branch an existing virtual application package so you can run multiple versions of the same package.
-
-[How to Upgrade a Package Using the Open Package Command](how-to-upgrade-a-package-using-the-open-package-command.md)
-Specifies how to upgrade an existing virtual application package using the command line.
-
-[How to Manage Virtual Applications Using the Command Line](how-to-manage-virtual-applications-using-the-command-line.md)
-Specifies how to manage virtual applications using the command line.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Application Virtualization Sequencer Online Help](application-virtualization-sequencer-online-help.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v4/troubleshooting-application-virtualization-sequencer-issues.md b/mdop/appv-v4/troubleshooting-application-virtualization-sequencer-issues.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c7285083d5..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v4/troubleshooting-application-virtualization-sequencer-issues.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,86 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Troubleshooting Application Virtualization Sequencer Issues
-description: Troubleshooting Application Virtualization Sequencer Issues
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 2712094b-a0bc-4643-aced-5415535f3fec
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Troubleshooting Application Virtualization Sequencer Issues
-
-
-This topic includes information that you can use to help troubleshoot general issues on the Application Virtualization (App-V) Sequencer.
-
-## Creating an SFTD File by Using the App-V Sequencer Increases the Version Number Unexpectedly
-
-
-Use the command line to generate a new .sft file. To create the .sft file by using the command line, enter the following at a command prompt:
-
-**mkdiffpkg.exe <base SFT file name> <diff SFT file name>**
-
-## File Name in OSD File Is Not Correct After Package Upgrade
-
-
-When you open a package for upgrade, you should specify the root Q:\\ drive as the output location for the package. Do not specify an associated file name with the output location.
-
-## Microsoft Word 2003 Default Install Results in an Error When Streamed to a Client
-
-
-When you stream Microsoft Word 2003 to a client, an error is returned, but Microsoft Word continues to run.
-
-**Solution**
-
-Resequence the virtual application package and select **Full Install**.
-
-## Active Upgrade Does Not Work When You Create a Dependent Package
-
-
-When you create a dependent package by using active upgrade and add new registry entries, it appears to function correctly, but the updated registry entries are not available.
-
-**Solution**
-
-Registry settings are always stored with the original version of the package, so updates to the package will not appear to be available unless you repair the original package.
-
-## Detailed information is not visible for Microsoft Office 2007 documents by using the properties page
-
-
-When you try to view detailed information associated with a Microsoft Office 2007 document by using the properties page, the detailed information is not visible.
-
-**Solution**
-
-App-V does not support the required shell extensions for these property pages.
-
-## Some registry keys are not captured when you sequence 16-bit applications
-
-
-In App-V 4.5, registry hooking has been moved from kernel mode to user mode. If you want to sequence a 16-bit application or an application that uses a 16-bit installer, you must first configure the sequencer computer so that the process runs in its own copy of the Windows NT Virtual DOS Machine (NTVDM).
-
-**Solution**
-
-Before you sequence the application, set the following global REGSZ registry key value to "yes" on the sequencing computer:
-
-HKLM\\SYSTEM\\CurrentControlSet\\Control\\WOW\\DefaultSeparateVDM
-
-You must restart the computer before this takes effect.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Application Virtualization Sequencer](application-virtualization-sequencer.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v4/troubleshooting-certificate-permission-issues.md b/mdop/appv-v4/troubleshooting-certificate-permission-issues.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 9b05d6624b..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v4/troubleshooting-certificate-permission-issues.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Troubleshooting Certificate Permission Issues
-description: Troubleshooting Certificate Permission Issues
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 06b8cbbc-93fd-44aa-af39-2d780792d3c3
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Troubleshooting Certificate Permission Issues
-
-
-After the installation of App-V 4.5, if the private key has not been configured with the proper ACL for the Network Service, an event is logged in the NT Event Log and an entry is placed in the `Sft-server.log` file.
-
-## Error Messages
-
-
-### Windows Server 2003
-
-Event ID 36870—A fatal error occurred when attempting to access the SSL server credential private key. The error code returned from the cryptographic module is 0x80090016.
-
-### Windows Server 2008
-
-Event ID 36870—A fatal error occurred when attempting to access the SSL server credential private key. The error code returned from the cryptographic module is 0x8009030d.
-
-## Sft-server.log
-
-
-The following error is placed in the `sft-server.log` file located in the `%ProgramFiles%\Microsoft System Center App Virt Management Server\App Virt Management Server\logs` directory:
-
-Certificate could not be loaded. Error code \[-2146893043\]. Make sure that the Network Service account has proper access to the certificate and its corresponding private key file.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v4/troubleshooting-information-for-the-application-virtualization-client.md b/mdop/appv-v4/troubleshooting-information-for-the-application-virtualization-client.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a8b8781132..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v4/troubleshooting-information-for-the-application-virtualization-client.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,98 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Troubleshooting Information for the Application Virtualization Client
-description: Troubleshooting Information for the Application Virtualization Client
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 260a8dad-847f-4ec0-b7dd-6e6bc52017ed
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Troubleshooting Information for the Application Virtualization Client
-
-
-This topic includes information that you can use to troubleshoot various issues on the Application Virtualization (App-V) Client.
-
-## Publishing Refresh Is Very Slow
-
-
-If publishing refresh on a specific computer takes much longer than expected and if the client is configured to use the **IconSourceRoot** setting, determine whether **IconSourceRoot** contains a nonvalid URL. A nonvalid URL will cause very long delays during publishing refresh.
-
-## Users Cannot Connect to the Server and Go into Disconnected Operations Mode
-
-
-When you are using an App-V Management Server configured with the RTSPS protocol, if the users are unable to connect and they go into disconnected operations mode, determine whether the certificate that is being used on the server is valid. A nonvalid certificate will prevent users from connecting and will cause them to go into disconnected operations mode.
-
-## Users Experience Slow Performance When Applications Are Not Fully Cached
-
-
-When applications are not fully cached, users might occasionally experience temporary slow or intermittent performance when they start or use the application. There are several possible reasons this can occur—for example, when the App-V Client is in the process of auto-loading an application or when an Out Of Sequence request is being processed. When the applications are fully cached, these problems will no longer occur.
-
-## Error Displayed After an Update Is Removed
-
-
-You must use the correct Windows Installer 3.1 command format to remove an update from the App-V Client, as follows:
-
-`Msiexec /I {F82584A0-D706-4D2D-9BC1-7E6D8BE3BB0F} MSIPATCHREMOVE={BE3DD018-9A1F-40FD-9538-C0A995CBD254} /qb /l*v "Uninstall.log"`
-
-Using the older command format `msiexec /package /uninstall ` will cause error 6003 "Application Virtualization client could not be started".
-
-## Error Code 0A-0000E01E Occurs When You Try to Start an Application
-
-
-Error code 0A-0000E01E indicates that the sequenced application package might be corrupt. The solution is to resequence the package.
-
-## Users Cannot Access Files They Have Created on the Q: Drive
-
-
-If users save files to the **Q:** drive, they cannot retrieve them because they do not have read rights to the drive. Users should not save files to the **Q:** drive.
-
-## User Is Prompted with a 1D1 Error
-
-
-When the file streaming URL is incorrectly set in the Open Software Descriptor (OSD) file, the App-V Client returns a 1d1 error instead of a “file not found” error. This error indicates that the application start failed and the user has been forced into disconnected operations mode. Correct the file streaming URL.
-
-## Incorrect Icons Associated with Some Applications
-
-
-When an icon is to be used in a publishing operation, the App-V Client first determines whether it already has a cached copy of the icon, by looking in the icon cache for an item whose original source path matches the path of the icon given to the publishing operation. If the App-V Client finds a match, it will use the already-cached icon; otherwise, it will download the new icon into the cache. If the path to the icon is a scratch directory or if it gets reused for new icons or packages, the lookup in the cache might pick the wrong icon from a previous operation.
-
-## Users Are Prompted for Credentials When Starting an Application
-
-
-If a user attempts to start a virtual application to which the system administrator has restricted access, the user might be prompted to enter credentials. The user should type the user name and password for an account that has permission to launch the application and then press ENTER.
-
-## Publishing Refresh Fails After Upgrading the App-V Client to Version 4.5
-
-
-If the user data directory was previously placed in a non-standard location (%*AllUsersProfile*%\\Documents\\SoftGrid Client\\Users\\%*username*%), users who do not have administrator privileges on the computer will find that publishing refresh fails after the App-V Client is upgraded. During the upgrade, the App-V Client global data directory and all its subdirectories are configured with restricted access rights for administrators only. You can avoid this problem by changing the user data directory before upgrading so that it is not a subdirectory of the global data directory.
-
-## Reboot Required After Install Failure
-
-
-If the client install fails for any reason and if subsequent attempts to install the client also fail, check the Windows Installer log to see whether it shows an error “sftplay failed, error=1072”. If so, restart the computer before trying to install the client again.
-
-## Repairing a Corrupted Virtual Application
-
-
-If for any reason a virtual application package installed using a Windows Installer Package (MSI) file becomes corrupted, reinstall the package. The Repair function available in the Windows Installer will not update the user volumes.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Application Virtualization Client Reference](application-virtualization-client-reference.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v4/troubleshooting-information-for-the-application-virtualization-server.md b/mdop/appv-v4/troubleshooting-information-for-the-application-virtualization-server.md
deleted file mode 100644
index df335aaec7..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v4/troubleshooting-information-for-the-application-virtualization-server.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Troubleshooting Information for the Application Virtualization Server
-description: Troubleshooting Information for the Application Virtualization Server
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: e9d43d9b-84f2-4d1b-bb90-a13740151e0c
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Troubleshooting Information for the Application Virtualization Server
-
-
-This topic includes information that you can use to troubleshoot various issues on the Application Virtualization (App-V) Servers.
-
-## Warning Message 25017 in Setup Log After Installing the Server
-
-
-You might find the following message in the server setup log after installation.
-
-*Warning 25017. The installation Program could not create the Active Directory marker object for the server. The account used to install did not have the sufficient rights to write to Active Directory or Active Directory was unavailable.*
-
-The App-V Management or Streaming Server installer creates a Service Connection Point entry under the Computer object in Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) that corresponds to the computer on which the server is installed if the account used to run the installer has the appropriate rights. Failure to create this entry will not cause the install to fail and this should not otherwise affect the functioning of the product. The likely cause of any failure is that the user account used to run the install did not have sufficient rights to write to AD DS. Although registering the App-V server in AD DS is optional, one benefit of doing so enables centralized management tools to locate the App-V server for inventory and management purposes.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Application Virtualization Server](application-virtualization-server.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v4/troubleshooting-the-application-virtualization-sequencer.md b/mdop/appv-v4/troubleshooting-the-application-virtualization-sequencer.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c832ebe830..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v4/troubleshooting-the-application-virtualization-sequencer.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Troubleshooting the Application Virtualization Sequencer
-description: Troubleshooting the Application Virtualization Sequencer
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 12ea8367-0b84-44e1-a885-e0539486556b
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Troubleshooting the Application Virtualization Sequencer
-
-
-This topic includes information that you can use to help troubleshoot general issues on the Application Virtualization (App-V) Sequencer.
-
-## Creating an SFTD File by Using the App-V Sequencer Increases the Version Number Unexpectedly
-
-
-The version number associated with an SFTD file increases unexpectedly.
-
-**Solution**
-
-Use the command line to generate a new .sft file. To create the .sft file by using the command line, enter the following at a command prompt:
-
-**mkdiffpkg.exe <base SFT file name> <diff SFT file name>**
-
-## File Name in OSD File Is Not Correct After Package Upgrade
-
-
-After you upgrade an existing package, the file name is not correct.
-
-**Solution**
-
-When you open a package for upgrade, you should specify the root Q:\\ drive as the output location for the package. Do not specify an associated file name with the output location.
-
-## Microsoft Word 2003 Default Install Results in an Error When Streamed to a Client
-
-
-When you stream Microsoft Word 2003 to a client, an error is returned but Microsoft Word continues to run.
-
-**Solution**
-
-Resequence the virtual application package, and select **Full Install**.
-
-## Package Upgrade Does Not Work When You Create a Dependent Package
-
-
-When you create a dependent package by using package upgrade and add new registry entries, it appears to function correctly but the updated registry entries are not available.
-
-**Solution**
-
-Registry settings are always stored with the original version of the package, so updates to the package will not appear to be available unless you repair the original package.
-
-## Error When Trying to Sequence .NET 2.0
-
-
-When you sequence a package that requires .NET 2.0, you get an error.
-
-**Solution**
-
-Sequencing packages that require .NET 2.0 is not supported.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Application Virtualization Sequencer](application-virtualization-sequencer.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v4/type-of-application-page--learn-more-.md b/mdop/appv-v4/type-of-application-page--learn-more-.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 529c2aac7d..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v4/type-of-application-page--learn-more-.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Type of Application Page (Learn More)
-description: Type of Application Page (Learn More)
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: d1262d16-7b14-441e-8500-7974bf68d196
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Type of Application Page (Learn More)
-
-
-Use the **Type of Application** page to specify the type of application you are sequencing. It is important to understand and select the correct type of application you are sequencing so you can ensure you take the correct steps toward successful package creation.
-
-This page contains the following elements:
-
-**Standard Application (default)**
-Select this option to create a package that contains an application or a suite of applications. You should select this option for most applications you plan to sequence.
-
-**Add-on or Plug-in**
-Select this option to create a package that extends the functionality of a standard application; for example, a plug-in for Microsoft Excel.
-
-**Middleware**
-Select this option to create a package that is required by a standard application, for example, the Microsoft .NET Framework.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Create New Package Wizard (AppV 4.6 SP1)](create-new-package-wizard---appv-46-sp1-.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v4/unload-app.md b/mdop/appv-v4/unload-app.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e9b1a2c013..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v4/unload-app.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,86 +0,0 @@
----
-title: UNLOAD APP
-description: UNLOAD APP
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: f0d729ae-8772-498b-be11-1a4b35499c53
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# UNLOAD APP
-
-
-Unloads the application and all other applications in the package from the file system cache.
-
-`SFTMIME UNLOAD APP:application [/LOG log-pathname | /CONSOLE | /GUI]`
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
APP:<application>
-
The name and version (optional) of the application to unload.
-
-
-
/LOG
-
If specified, output is logged to the specified path name.
-
-
-
/CONSOLE
-
If specified, output is presented in the active console window (default).
-
-
-
/GUI
-
If specified, output is presented in a Windows dialog box.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-For version 4.6, the following option has been added.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
/LOGU
-
If specified, output is logged to the specified path name in UNICODE format.
If present, user settings will also be removed. (For more information, see the Important note later in this topic.)
-
-
-
/GLOBAL
-
If present, the package will be unpublished for all users on this computer.
-
-
-
/LOG
-
If specified, output is logged to the specified path name.
-
-
-
/CONSOLE
-
If specified, output is presented in the active console window (default).
-
-
-
/GUI
-
If specified, output is presented in a Windows dialog box.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-For version 4.6, the following option has been added.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
/LOGU
-
If specified, output is logged to the specified path name in UNICODE format.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Important**
-Before you can run the **UNPUBLISH PACKAGE** command, the package must already have been added to the Application Virtualization Client.
-
-To use **GLOBAL**, **UNPUBLISH PACKAGE** must be run as local Administrator; otherwise, only **ClearApp** permission is needed.
-
-Using **UNPUBLISH PACKAGE** with **GLOBAL** removes any global file types and shortcuts for the package. **CLEAR** is not applicable.
-
-Using **UNPUBLISH PACKAGE** without **GLOBAL** removes the user shortcuts and file types for the package and, if **CLEAR** is set, also removes user settings and stops background loads under the user’s context.
-
-**UNPUBLISH PACKAGE** works on applications from the same package name or GUID that was used as the source ID for **ADD**, **EDIT**, and **PUBLISH PACKAGE**.
-
-**UNPUBLISH PACKAGE** always clears all the user settings, shortcuts, and file types regardless of the use of the /CLEAR switch.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[SFTMIME Command Reference](sftmime--command-reference.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v4/user-access-permissions-in-application-virtualization-client.md b/mdop/appv-v4/user-access-permissions-in-application-virtualization-client.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b5823c5aa0..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v4/user-access-permissions-in-application-virtualization-client.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,134 +0,0 @@
----
-title: User Access Permissions in Application Virtualization Client
-description: User Access Permissions in Application Virtualization Client
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 7459374c-810c-45e3-b205-fdd1f8514f80
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# User Access Permissions in Application Virtualization Client
-
-
-On the **Permissions** tab on the **Properties** dialog box, accessible by right-clicking the **Application Virtualization** node in the Application Virtualization Client Management Console, administrators can grant users permissions to use the various client functions.
-
-**Note**
-Before changing users permissions, ensure that any permissions changes are consistent with the organization's guidelines for granting user permissions.
-
-
-
-The following table lists and describes the permissions that can be granted to users.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Permission Name
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Add applications
-
Register new applications by passing a new OSD file to the client by using sfttray.exe, sftmime.exe or the MMC.
-
-
-
Change file system cache size
-
Increase the size of the file system cache.
-
-
-
Change file system drive
-
Select a different preferred drive letter for the file system.
-
-
-
Change log settings
-
Change the log level or the log path for the client log file.
-
-
-
Change OSD files
-
Modify OSD files for registered applications and pass them into the client. This does not affect publishing refresh.
-
-
-
Clear application settings
-
Delete file types, shortcuts and any configurations for the current user.
-
-
-
Delete applications
-
Remove all references to an application from the file system and OSD cache for all users on the computer.
-
-
-
Import applications into the cache
-
Load application data directly from a specified SFT file into the file system cache. This affects all users.
-
-
-
Load applications into the cache
-
Start a load of the SFT file for an application from the configured source, such as an App-V Streaming Server. This loads the application for all users on the computer.
-
-
-
Lock and unlock applications in the cache
-
Prevent or allow applications from being unloaded from the file system cache. This affects all users on the computer.
-
-
-
Manage file type associations
-
Add, modify, or delete file type associations for the current user only.
-
-
-
Manage publishing refresh settings
-
Change settings that control the timing of publishing refreshes for all users on the computer.
-
-
-
Manage publishing servers
-
Add, modify, or delete publishing servers for all users on the computer. This permission implicitly includes permission to manage publishing refresh settings.
-
-
-
Publish shortcuts
-
Create new shortcuts to registered applications. The user must also have permission to create files in the local file system.
-
-
-
Repair applications
-
Remove application specific configurations for the current user without removing shortcuts or file type associations.
-
-
-
Start a publishing refresh
-
Start an unscheduled publishing refresh for the current user.
-
-
-
Toggle offline mode
-
Change the entire client from online to offline mode for all users.
-
-
-
Unload applications from the cache
-
Clear application data from the file system cache for all users without removing user-specific settings, shortcuts, or file type associations.
-
-
-
View all applications
-
Allow the user to see the virtual applications for all users registered on the computer.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[How to Change User Access Permissions](how-to-change-user-access-permissions.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v4/using-application-virtualization-servers-as-a-package-management-solution.md b/mdop/appv-v4/using-application-virtualization-servers-as-a-package-management-solution.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e41d0cb21b..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v4/using-application-virtualization-servers-as-a-package-management-solution.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Using Application Virtualization Servers as a Package Management Solution
-description: Using Application Virtualization Servers as a Package Management Solution
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 41597355-e7bb-45e2-b300-7b1724419975
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Using Application Virtualization Servers as a Package Management Solution
-
-
-If you do not have an existing ESD system to deploy your Application Virtualization solution or do not wish to use one, you will need to install one or more Application Virtualization Management Servers as the core of your system architecture. The Application Virtualization Management Server requires a dedicated server computer and needs a Microsoft SQL Server database. The database can be on the same server, or it can be configured on a corporate database server that is accessible to the Application Virtualization Management Server over a high-speed LAN connection. In addition, you will need to install the Microsoft Application Virtualization Management Console, on either the Application Virtualization Management Server or on a designated management workstation, and you will need to install the Microsoft Application Virtualization Management Web Service, which can also be installed on the Application Virtualization Management Server or on a separate IIS server. The Application Virtualization Management Console is used to connect to the Application Virtualization Management Web Service, enabling the system administrator to interact with the Application Virtualization Management Server.
-
-**Note**
-Access to the applications is controlled by means of Security Groups in Active Directory Domain Services, so you will need to plan a process to set up a security group for each virtualized application and for managing which users are added to each group. The Application Virtualization Management Server administrator configures the server to use these Active Directory groups, and the server then automatically controls access to the packages based on Active Directory group membership.
-
-
-
-## In This Section
-
-
-[Overview of the Application Virtualization System Components](overview-of-the-application-virtualization-system-components.md)
-Lists and describes the primary components of the Microsoft Application Virtualization Management System.
-
-[Publishing Virtual Applications Using Application Virtualization Management Servers](publishing-virtual-applications-using-application-virtualization-management-servers.md)
-Provides a brief overview of how virtual applications are published in an Application Virtualization Server-based deployment scenario.
-
-[Planning Your Streaming Solution in an Application Virtualization Server-Based Implementation](planning-your-streaming-solution-in-an-application-virtualization-server-based-implementation.md)
-Describes available options for using Application Virtualization Streaming Servers in conjunction with your Application Virtualization Management Server-based implementation.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Application Virtualization Server-Based Scenario](application-virtualization-server-based-scenario.md)
-
-[Planning for Application Virtualization System Deployment](planning-for-application-virtualization-system-deployment.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v4/using-electronic-software-distribution-as-a-package-management-solution.md b/mdop/appv-v4/using-electronic-software-distribution-as-a-package-management-solution.md
deleted file mode 100644
index af5b7a4cfc..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v4/using-electronic-software-distribution-as-a-package-management-solution.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,49 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Using Electronic Software Distribution as a Package Management Solution
-description: Using Electronic Software Distribution as a Package Management Solution
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 7d96ea70-3e7e-49fa-89cc-586804a10657
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Using Electronic Software Distribution as a Package Management Solution
-
-
-In Application Virtualization, after you have sequenced and tested a package, you need to deploy the virtual application package to the target computers. To accomplish this, you will need to determine where to put the package content and how to deliver it to the end user computers. An efficient, effective electronic software distribution–based deployment plan will help you avoid the situation where large numbers of end users computers need to retrieve the package content over slow network connections.
-
-If you currently have an electronic software distribution (ESD) system in daily operation, you can use it to handle all necessary management tasks in Application Virtualization. This means that you can effectively use your existing infrastructure to the best advantage, without the need to add new servers and application software or incur the additional administrative overhead that these would require. Ideally, if you have System Center Configuration Manager 2007 R2 deployed and operational, you will find that Configuration Manager has built-in capability for performing the Application Virtualization management tasks.
-
-For in-depth information about performing an ESD-based deployment, [Electronic Software Distribution-Based Scenario](electronic-software-distribution-based-scenario.md).
-
-## In This Section
-
-
-[Publishing Virtual Applications Using Electronic Software Distribution](publishing-virtual-applications-using-electronic-software-distribution.md)
-Describes the available ESD-based methods for distributing your sequenced applications to clients.
-
-[Planning Your Streaming Solution in an Electronic Software Distribution Implementation](planning-your-streaming-solution-in-an-electronic-software-distribution-implementation.md)
-Describes available options for using a streaming server to deploy your sequenced applications to clients.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Electronic Software Distribution-Based Scenario](electronic-software-distribution-based-scenario.md)
-
-[Planning for Application Virtualization System Deployment](planning-for-application-virtualization-system-deployment.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v4/verify-applications-page--package-accelerators-.md b/mdop/appv-v4/verify-applications-page--package-accelerators-.md
deleted file mode 100644
index fa38068d5e..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v4/verify-applications-page--package-accelerators-.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Verify Applications Page (Package Accelerators)
-description: Verify Applications Page (Package Accelerators)
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: e58a37db-d042-453f-aa0d-2f324600a35b
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Verify Applications Page (Package Accelerators)
-
-
-Use the **Verify Applications** page to review the installer file dependencies that are saved with the package. These files are required when the Package Accelerator is used to create a new virtual application package.
-
-You can add or edit the following types of information. Only the application **Name** is required; however, you should provide as much information as possible to help ensure that a new virtual application package is created successfully when you use a package accelerator:
-
-- **Name**. You must specify a name.
-
-- **Publisher**. Optionally specify information about the application publisher.
-
-- **Version**. Optionally specify application version information.
-
-- **Language**. Optionally specify language information.
-
-This page contains the following elements:
-
-**Add**
-Adds a new installation file dependency that will be required when the Package Accelerator is applied.
-
-**Delete**
-Deletes a selected dependency file that is currently part of the Package Accelerator.
-
-**Edit**
-Enables you to edit the properties associated with the selected installer file’s dependency.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Create Package Accelerator Wizard (AppV 4.6 SP1)](create-package-accelerator-wizard--appv-46-sp1-.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v4/virtual-application-package-additional-components.md b/mdop/appv-v4/virtual-application-package-additional-components.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8fe48620bc..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v4/virtual-application-package-additional-components.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,49 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Virtual Application Package Additional Components
-description: Virtual Application Package Additional Components
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 476b0f40-ebd6-4296-92fa-61fa9495c03c
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Virtual Application Package Additional Components
-
-
-The App-V Sequencer has detected a directory that contains 64-bit and 32-bit executables and/or dynamic-link library (.dll) files that depend on the same side-by-side assembly. Typically, the Sequencer creates private side-by-side assemblies for all public assemblies that are used by the package; however, it is not possible to create 32-bit and 64-bit versions of the private assemblies in the same directory.
-
-If the Sequencer detects a single conflict, it will perform the following actions:
-
-- Remove all of the existing 64-bit private assemblies in the entire package, whether or not the directory has a conflict.
-
-- Create only 32-bit versions of the private side-by-side assemblies.
-
-You should natively install public versions of all the required 64-bit assemblies on the computer running the Sequencer and on all App-V client computers.
-
-To locate the required existing public assemblies, open the directory where the package is saved and look in the **VFS** folder. For example, if the package root is **Q:\\MyApp**, when you sequence the application, look in **Q:\\MyApp\\VFS\\CSIDL\_Windows\\WinSxS\\Manifests** and locate all of the existing public assemblies. The 64-bit versions of these files will always start with the following text at the beginning of the manifest name: **amd64…**. The exact name and version of the assembly can be found in the associated manifest file.
-
-Use any of the following links to download and install the correct version of the required prerequisites:
-
-- [Microsoft Visual C++ 2005 Redistributable Package (x64)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=152697)
-
-- [Microsoft Visual C++ 2005 SP1 Redistributable Package (x64)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=152698)
-
-- [Microsoft Visual C++ 2008 Redistributable Package (x64)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=152699)
-
-- [Microsoft Visual C++ 2008 SP1 Redistributable Package (x64)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=152700)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v4/virtual-file-system-tab-keep.md b/mdop/appv-v4/virtual-file-system-tab-keep.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 290e0a1d2a..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v4/virtual-file-system-tab-keep.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Virtual File System Tab
-description: Virtual File System Tab
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 9d084e2a-720d-4a25-9cd5-d0d70868b413
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Virtual File System Tab
-
-
-The **Virtual File System** tab allows you to view and modify the file-mapping information.
-
-## In This Section
-
-
-[About the Virtual File System Tab](about-the-virtual-file-system-tab.md)
-Provides general information about the **Virtual File System** tab.
-
-[How to Modify File-Mapping Information](how-to-modify-file-mapping-information.md)
-Provides the procedure to modify the file-mapping information by using the **Virtual File System** tab.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Sequencer Console](sequencer-console.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v4/virtual-registry-tab-keep.md b/mdop/appv-v4/virtual-registry-tab-keep.md
deleted file mode 100644
index cd9e9a01da..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v4/virtual-registry-tab-keep.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Virtual Registry Tab
-description: Virtual Registry Tab
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 25833383-24c4-40a1-b34c-73b2bd3f11e1
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Virtual Registry Tab
-
-
-Use the **Virtual Registry** tab to view and modify the virtual registry key information.
-
-## In This Section
-
-
-[About the Virtual Registry Tab](about-the-virtual-registry-tab.md)
-Provides general information about the **Virtual Registry** tab.
-
-[How to Modify Virtual Registry Key Information](how-to-modify-virtual-registry-key-information.md)
-Provides the procedure to modify the virtual registry key information by using the **Virtual Registry** tab.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Sequencer Console](sequencer-console.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v4/virtual-services-tab-keep.md b/mdop/appv-v4/virtual-services-tab-keep.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 360df6d0a5..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v4/virtual-services-tab-keep.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Virtual Services Tab
-description: Virtual Services Tab
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 9fc4679d-ccb5-4df7-99de-dd7d3a367ecc
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Virtual Services Tab
-
-
-Use the **Virtual Services** tab to view and edit the attributes of embedded services.
-
-## In This Section
-
-
-[About the Virtual Services Tab](about-the-virtual-services-tab.md)
-Provides general information about the **Virtual Services** tab.
-
-[How to Modify Attributes of Embedded Services](how-to-modify-attributes-of-embedded-services.md)
-Provides the procedure to modify the attributes of embedded services by using the **Virtual Services** tab.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Sequencer Console](sequencer-console.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v4/wizard-pages--appv-46-sp1-.md b/mdop/appv-v4/wizard-pages--appv-46-sp1-.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a0a4219295..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v4/wizard-pages--appv-46-sp1-.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Wizard Pages (AppV 4.6 SP1)
-description: Wizard Pages (AppV 4.6 SP1)
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: dadab8cf-fe6d-4cff-8f6c-e9676f244872
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Wizard Pages (AppV 4.6 SP1)
-
-
-Use any of the following links for more information about the App-V wizards.
-
-## In This Section
-
-
-[Create Package Accelerator Wizard (AppV 4.6 SP1)](create-package-accelerator-wizard--appv-46-sp1-.md)
-
-[Create New Package Wizard (AppV 4.6 SP1)](create-new-package-wizard---appv-46-sp1-.md)
-
-[Open Package Wizard (AppV 4.6 SP1)](open-package-wizard---appv-46-sp1-.md)
-
-[Sequencer Wizard - Package Accelerator (AppV 4.6 SP1)](sequencer-wizard---package-accelerator--appv-46-sp1-.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/TOC.md b/mdop/appv-v5/TOC.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6f2058280a..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/TOC.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,223 +0,0 @@
-# [Application Virtualization 5](index.md)
-## [Application Virtualization 5.1](microsoft-application-virtualization-51-administrators-guide.md)
-### [Getting Started with App-V 5.1](getting-started-with-app-v-51.md)
-#### [About App-V 5.1](about-app-v-51.md)
-##### [Release Notes for App-V 5.1](release-notes-for-app-v-51.md)
-#### [Evaluating App-V 5.1](evaluating-app-v-51.md)
-#### [High Level Architecture for App-V 5.1](high-level-architecture-for-app-v-51.md)
-#### [Accessibility for App-V 5.1](accessibility-for-app-v-51.md)
-### [Planning for App-V 5.1](planning-for-app-v-51.md)
-#### [Preparing Your Environment for App-V 5.1](preparing-your-environment-for-app-v-51.md)
-##### [App-V 5.1 Prerequisites](app-v-51-prerequisites.md)
-##### [App-V 5.1 Security Considerations](app-v-51-security-considerations.md)
-#### [Planning to Deploy App-V 5.1](planning-to-deploy-app-v51.md)
-##### [App-V 5.1 Supported Configurations](app-v-51-supported-configurations.md)
-##### [App-V 5.1 Capacity Planning](app-v-51-capacity-planning.md)
-##### [Planning for High Availability with App-V 5.1](planning-for-high-availability-with-app-v-51.md)
-##### [Planning to Deploy App-V 5.1 with an Electronic Software Distribution System](planning-to-deploy-app-v-51-with-an-electronic-software-distribution-system.md)
-##### [Planning for the App-V 5.1 Server Deployment](planning-for-the-app-v-51-server-deployment.md)
-##### [Planning for the App-V 5.1 Sequencer and Client Deployment](planning-for-the-app-v-51-sequencer-and-client-deployment.md)
-##### [Planning for Migrating from a Previous Version of App-V](planning-for-migrating-from-a-previous-version-of-app-v51.md)
-##### [Planning for Using App-V with Office 5.1](planning-for-using-app-v-with-office51.md)
-##### [Planning to Use Folder Redirection with App-V 5.1](planning-to-use-folder-redirection-with-app-v51.md)
-#### [App-V 5.1 Planning Checklist](app-v-51-planning-checklist.md)
-### [Deploying App-V 5.1](deploying-app-v-51.md)
-#### [Deploying the App-V 5.1 Sequencer and Client](deploying-the-app-v-51-sequencer-and-client.md)
-##### [How to Deploy the App-V Client](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-client-51gb18030.md)
-##### [About Client Configuration Settings 5.1](about-client-configuration-settings51.md)
-##### [How to Deploy the App-V 4.6 and the App-V 5.1 Client on the Same Computer](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-46-and-the-app-v--51-client-on-the-same-computer.md)
-##### [How to Install the App-V 5.1 Client for Shared Content Store Mode](how-to-install-the-app-v-51-client-for-shared-content-store-mode.md)
-##### [How to Install the Sequencer](how-to-install-the-sequencer-51beta-gb18030.md)
-##### [How to Modify App-V 5.1 Client Configuration Using the ADMX Template and Group Policy](how-to-modify-app-v-51-client-configuration-using-the-admx-template-and-group-policy.md)
-##### [How to Uninstall the App-V 5.1 Client](how-to-uninstall-the-app-v-51-client.md)
-#### [Deploying the App-V 5.1 Server](deploying-the-app-v-51-server.md)
-##### [How to Deploy the App-V 5.1 Server](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-51-server.md)
-##### [How to Deploy the App-V 5.1 Server Using a Script](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-51-server-using-a-script.md)
-##### [How to Deploy the App-V Databases by Using SQL Scripts 5.1](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-databases-by-using-sql-scripts51.md)
-##### [How to Install the Publishing Server on a Remote Computer](how-to-install-the-publishing-server-on-a-remote-computer51.md)
-##### [How to Install the Management and Reporting Databases on Separate Computers from the Management and Reporting Services 5.1](how-to-install-the-management-and-reporting-databases-on-separate-computers-from-the-management-and-reporting-services51.md)
-##### [How to install the Management Server on a Standalone Computer and Connect it to the Database 5.1](how-to-install-the-management-server-on-a-standalone-computer-and-connect-it-to-the-database51.md)
-##### [About App-V 5.1 Reporting](about-app-v-51-reporting.md)
-##### [How to install the Reporting Server on a Standalone Computer and Connect it to the Database 5.1](how-to-install-the-reporting-server-on-a-standalone-computer-and-connect-it-to-the-database51.md)
-#### [App-V 5.1 Deployment Checklist](app-v-51-deployment-checklist.md)
-#### [Deploying Microsoft Office 2016 by Using App-V 5.1](deploying-microsoft-office-2016-by-using-app-v51.md)
-#### [Deploying Microsoft Office 2013 by Using App-V 5.1](deploying-microsoft-office-2013-by-using-app-v51.md)
-#### [Deploying Microsoft Office 2010 by Using App-V 5.1](deploying-microsoft-office-2010-by-using-app-v51.md)
-### [Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-#### [Creating and Managing App-V 5.1 Virtualized Applications](creating-and-managing-app-v-51-virtualized-applications.md)
-##### [How to Sequence a New Application with App-V 5.1](how-to-sequence-a-new-application-with-app-v-51-beta-gb18030.md)
-##### [How to Modify an Existing Virtual Application Package 5.1](how-to-modify-an-existing-virtual-application-package-51.md)
-##### [How to Create and Use a Project Template 5.1](how-to-create-and-use-a-project-template51.md)
-##### [How to Create a Package Accelerator 5.1](how-to-create-a-package-accelerator51.md)
-##### [How to Create a Virtual Application Package Using an App-V Package Accelerator 5.1](how-to-create-a-virtual-application-package-using-an-app-v-package-accelerator51.md)
-#### [Administering App-V 5.1 Virtual Applications by Using the Management Console](administering-app-v-51-virtual-applications-by-using-the-management-console.md)
-##### [About App-V 5.1 Dynamic Configuration](about-app-v-51-dynamic-configuration.md)
-##### [How to Connect to the Management Console 5.1](how-to-connect-to-the-management-console-51.md)
-##### [How to Add or Upgrade Packages by Using the Management Console](how-to-add-or-upgrade-packages-by-using-the-management-console-51-gb18030.md)
-##### [How to Configure Access to Packages by Using the Management Console 5.1](how-to-configure-access-to-packages-by-using-the-management-console-51.md)
-##### [How to Publish a Package by Using the Management Console 5.1](how-to-publish-a-package-by-using-the-management-console-51.md)
-##### [How to Delete a Package in the Management Console 5.1](how-to-delete-a-package-in-the-management-console-51.md)
-##### [How to Add or Remove an Administrator by Using the Management Console 5.1](how-to-add-or-remove-an-administrator-by-using-the-management-console51.md)
-##### [How to Register and Unregister a Publishing Server by Using the Management Console 5.1](how-to-register-and-unregister-a-publishing-server-by-using-the-management-console51.md)
-##### [How to Create a Custom Configuration File by Using the App-V 5.1 Management Console](how-to-create-a-custom-configuration-file-by-using-the-app-v-51-management-console.md)
-##### [How to Transfer Access and Configurations to Another Version of a Package by Using the Management Console 5.1](how-to-transfer-access-and-configurations-to-another-version-of-a-package-by-using-the-management-console51.md)
-##### [How to Customize Virtual Applications Extensions for a Specific AD Group by Using the Management Console 5.1](how-to-customize-virtual-applications-extensions-for-a-specific-ad-group-by-using-the-management-console51.md)
-##### [Configure Applications and Default Virtual Application Extensions in Management Console](configure-applications-and-default-virtual-application-extensions-in-management-console.md)
-#### [Managing Connection Groups 5.1](managing-connection-groups51.md)
-##### [About the Connection Group Virtual Environment 5.1](about-the-connection-group-virtual-environment51.md)
-##### [About the Connection Group File 5.1](about-the-connection-group-file51.md)
-##### [How to Create a Connection Group 5.1](how-to-create-a-connection-group51.md)
-##### [How to Create a Connection Group with User-Published and Globally Published Packages 5.1](how-to-create-a-connection-group-with-user-published-and-globally-published-packages51.md)
-##### [How to Delete a Connection Group 5.1](how-to-delete-a-connection-group51.md)
-##### [How to Publish a Connection Group 5.1](how-to-publish-a-connection-group51.md)
-##### [How to Use Optional Packages in Connection Groups 5.1](how-to-use-optional-packages-in-connection-groups51.md)
-##### [How to Make a Connection Group Ignore the Package Version 5.1](how-to-make-a-connection-group-ignore-the-package-version51.md)
-##### [How to Allow Only Administrators to Enable Connection Groups 5.1](how-to-allow-only-administrators-to-enable-connection-groups51.md)
-#### [Deploying App-V 5.1 Packages by Using Electronic Software Distribution (ESD)](deploying-app-v-51-packages-by-using-electronic-software-distribution--esd-.md)
-##### [How to deploy App-V 5.1 Packages Using Electronic Software Distribution](how-to-deploy-app-v-51-packages-using-electronic-software-distribution.md)
-##### [How to Enable Only Administrators to Publish Packages by Using an ESD 5.1](how-to-enable-only-administrators-to-publish-packages-by-using-an-esd51.md)
-#### [Using the App-V 5.1 Client Management Console](using-the-app-v-51-client-management-console.md)
-##### [How to Access the Client Management Console 5.1](how-to-access-the-client-management-console51.md)
-##### [How to Configure the Client to Receive Package and Connection Groups Updates From the Publishing Server 5.1](how-to-configure-the-client-to-receive-package-and-connection-groups-updates-from-the-publishing-server-51.md)
-#### [Migrating to App-V 5.1 from a Previous Version](migrating-to-app-v-51-from-a-previous-version.md)
-##### [Check Registry Keys before installing App-V 5.x Server](check-reg-key-svr.md)
-##### [How to Convert a Package Created in a Previous Version of App-V 5.1](how-to-convert-a-package-created-in-a-previous-version-of-app-v51.md)
-##### [How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to a Converted App-V 5.1 Package for All Users on a Specific Computer](how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-a-converted-app-v-51-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md)
-##### [How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to App-V 5.1 for a Specific User](how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-app-v-51-for-a-specific-user.md)
-##### [How to Revert Extension Points from an App-V 5.1 Package to an App-V 4.6 Package For All Users on a Specific Computer](how-to-revert-extension-points-from-an-app-v-51-package-to-an-app-v-46-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md)
-##### [How to Revert Extension Points From an App-V 5.1 Package to an App-V 4.6 Package for a Specific User](how-to-revert-extension-points-from-an-app-v-51-package-to-an-app-v-46-package-for-a-specific-user.md)
-#### [Maintaining App-V 5.1](maintaining-app-v-51.md)
-##### [How to Move the App-V Server to Another Computer 5.1](how-to-move-the-app-v-server-to-another-computer51.md)
-#### [Administering App-V 5.1 by Using PowerShell](administering-app-v-51-by-using-powershell.md)
-##### [How to Load the PowerShell Cmdlets and Get Cmdlet Help 5.1](how-to-load-the-powershell-cmdlets-and-get-cmdlet-help-51.md)
-##### [How to Manage App-V 5.1 Packages Running on a Stand-Alone Computer by Using PowerShell](how-to-manage-app-v-51-packages-running-on-a-stand-alone-computer-by-using-powershell.md)
-##### [How to Manage Connection Groups on a Stand-alone Computer by Using PowerShell 5.1](how-to-manage-connection-groups-on-a-stand-alone-computer-by-using-powershell51.md)
-##### [How to Modify Client Configuration by Using PowerShell 5.1](how-to-modify-client-configuration-by-using-powershell51.md)
-##### [How to Apply the User Configuration File by Using PowerShell 5.1](how-to-apply-the-user-configuration-file-by-using-powershell51.md)
-##### [How to Apply the Deployment Configuration File by Using PowerShell 5.1](how-to-apply-the-deployment-configuration-file-by-using-powershell51.md)
-##### [How to Sequence a Package by Using PowerShell 5.1](how-to-sequence-a-package--by-using-powershell-51.md)
-##### [How to Create a Package Accelerator by Using PowerShell 5.1](how-to-create-a-package-accelerator-by-using-powershell51.md)
-##### [How to Enable Reporting on the App-V 5.1 Client by Using PowerShell](how-to-enable-reporting-on-the-app-v-51-client-by-using-powershell.md)
-##### [How to Install the App-V Databases and Convert the Associated Security Identifiers by Using PowerShell 5.1](how-to-install-the-app-v-databases-and-convert-the-associated-security-identifiers--by-using-powershell51.md)
-### [Troubleshooting App-V 5.1](troubleshooting-app-v-51.md)
-### [Technical Reference for App-V 5.1](technical-reference-for-app-v-51.md)
-#### [Performance Guidance for Application Virtualization 5.1](performance-guidance-for-application-virtualization-51.md)
-#### [Application Publishing and Client Interaction 5.1](application-publishing-and-client-interaction51.md)
-#### [Viewing App-V Server Publishing Metadata 5.1](viewing-app-v-server-publishing-metadata51.md)
-#### [Running a Locally Installed Application Inside a Virtual Environment with Virtualized Applications 5.1](running-a-locally-installed-application-inside-a-virtual-environment-with-virtualized-applications51.md)
-## [Application Virtualization 5.0](microsoft-application-virtualization-50-administrators-guide.md)
-### [Getting Started with App-V 5.0](getting-started-with-app-v-50--rtm.md)
-#### [About App-V 5.0](about-app-v-50.md)
-##### [What's New in App-V 5.0](whats-new-in-app-v-50.md)
-##### [Release Notes for App-V 5.0](release-notes-for-app-v-50.md)
-#### [About App-V 5.0 SP1](about-app-v-50-sp1.md)
-##### [What's new in App-V 5.0 SP1](whats-new-in-app-v-50-sp1.md)
-##### [Release Notes for App-V 5.0 SP1](release-notes-for-app-v-50-sp1.md)
-#### [About App-V 5.0 SP2](about-app-v-50-sp2.md)
-##### [Release Notes for App-V 5.0 SP2](release-notes-for-app-v-50-sp2.md)
-#### [About App-V 5.0 SP3](about-app-v-50-sp3.md)
-##### [Release Notes for App-V 5.0 SP3](release-notes-for-app-v-50-sp3.md)
-#### [Evaluating App-V 5.0](evaluating-app-v-50.md)
-#### [High Level Architecture for App-V 5.0](high-level-architecture-for-app-v-50.md)
-#### [Accessibility for App-V 5.0](accessibility-for-app-v-50.md)
-### [Planning for App-V 5.0](planning-for-app-v-50-rc.md)
-#### [Preparing Your Environment for App-V 5.0](preparing-your-environment-for-app-v-50.md)
-##### [App-V 5.0 Prerequisites](app-v-50-prerequisites.md)
-##### [App-V 5.0 SP3 Prerequisites](app-v-50-sp3-prerequisites.md)
-##### [App-V 5.0 Security Considerations](app-v-50-security-considerations.md)
-#### [Planning to Deploy App-V](planning-to-deploy-app-v.md)
-##### [App-V 5.0 Supported Configurations](app-v-50-supported-configurations.md)
-##### [App-V 5.0 SP3 Supported Configurations](app-v-50-sp3-supported-configurations.md)
-##### [App-V 5.0 Capacity Planning](app-v-50-capacity-planning.md)
-##### [Planning for High Availability with App-V 5.0](planning-for-high-availability-with-app-v-50.md)
-##### [Planning to Deploy App-V 5.0 with an Electronic Software Distribution System](planning-to-deploy-app-v-50-with-an-electronic-software-distribution-system.md)
-##### [Planning for the App-V 5.0 Server Deployment](planning-for-the-app-v-50-server-deployment.md)
-##### [Planning for the App-V 5.0 Sequencer and Client Deployment](planning-for-the-app-v-50-sequencer-and-client-deployment.md)
-##### [Planning for Migrating from a Previous Version of App-V](planning-for-migrating-from-a-previous-version-of-app-v.md)
-##### [Planning for Using App-V with Office](planning-for-using-app-v-with-office.md)
-##### [Planning to Use Folder Redirection with App-V](planning-to-use-folder-redirection-with-app-v.md)
-#### [App-V 5.0 Planning Checklist](app-v-50-planning-checklist.md)
-### [Deploying App-V 5.0](deploying-app-v-50.md)
-#### [Deploying the App-V 5.0 Sequencer and Client](deploying-the-app-v-50-sequencer-and-client.md)
-##### [How to Deploy the App-V Client](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-client-gb18030.md)
-##### [About Client Configuration Settings](about-client-configuration-settings.md)
-##### [How to Deploy the App-V 4.6 and the App-V 5.0 Client on the Same Computer](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-46-and-the-app-v--50-client-on-the-same-computer.md)
-##### [How to Install the App-V 5.0 Client for Shared Content Store Mode](how-to-install-the-app-v-50-client-for-shared-content-store-mode.md)
-##### [How to Install the Sequencer](how-to-install-the-sequencer-beta-gb18030.md)
-##### [How to Modify App-V 5.0 Client Configuration Using the ADMX Template and Group Policy](how-to-modify-app-v-50-client-configuration-using-the-admx-template-and-group-policy.md)
-##### [How to Uninstall the App-V 5.0 Client](how-to-uninstall-the-app-v-50-client.md)
-#### [Deploying the App-V 5.0 Server](deploying-the-app-v-50-server.md)
-##### [How to Deploy the App-V 5.0 Server](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-50-server-50sp3.md)
-##### [How to Deploy the App-V 5.0 Server Using a Script](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-50-server-using-a-script.md)
-##### [How to Deploy the App-V Databases by Using SQL Scripts](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-databases-by-using-sql-scripts.md)
-##### [How to Install the Publishing Server on a Remote Computer](how-to-install-the-publishing-server-on-a-remote-computer.md)
-##### [How to Install the Management and Reporting Databases on Separate Computers from the Management and Reporting Services](how-to-install-the-management-and-reporting-databases-on-separate-computers-from-the-management-and-reporting-services.md)
-##### [How to install the Management Server on a Standalone Computer and Connect it to the Database](how-to-install-the-management-server-on-a-standalone-computer-and-connect-it-to-the-database.md)
-##### [About App-V 5.0 Reporting](about-app-v-50-reporting.md)
-##### [How to install the Reporting Server on a Standalone Computer and Connect it to the Database](how-to-install-the-reporting-server-on-a-standalone-computer-and-connect-it-to-the-database.md)
-#### [App-V 5.0 Deployment Checklist](app-v-50-deployment-checklist.md)
-#### [Deploying Microsoft Office 2016 by Using App-V](deploying-microsoft-office-2016-by-using-app-v.md)
-#### [Deploying Microsoft Office 2013 by Using App-V](deploying-microsoft-office-2013-by-using-app-v.md)
-#### [Deploying Microsoft Office 2010 by Using App-V](deploying-microsoft-office-2010-by-using-app-v.md)
-### [Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-#### [Creating and Managing App-V 5.0 Virtualized Applications](creating-and-managing-app-v-50-virtualized-applications.md)
-##### [How to Sequence a New Application with App-V 5.0](how-to-sequence-a-new-application-with-app-v-50-beta-gb18030.md)
-##### [How to Modify an Existing Virtual Application Package](how-to-modify-an-existing-virtual-application-package-beta.md)
-##### [How to Create and Use a Project Template](how-to-create-and-use-a-project-template.md)
-##### [How to Create a Package Accelerator](how-to-create-a-package-accelerator.md)
-##### [How to Create a Virtual Application Package Using an App-V Package Accelerator](how-to-create-a-virtual-application-package-using-an-app-v-package-accelerator.md)
-#### [Administering App-V 5.0 Virtual Applications by Using the Management Console](administering-app-v-50-virtual-applications-by-using-the-management-console.md)
-##### [About App-V 5.0 Dynamic Configuration](about-app-v-50-dynamic-configuration.md)
-##### [How to Connect to the Management Console](how-to-connect-to-the-management-console-beta.md)
-##### [How to Add or Upgrade Packages by Using the Management Console](how-to-add-or-upgrade-packages-by-using-the-management-console-beta-gb18030.md)
-##### [How to Configure Access to Packages by Using the Management Console](how-to-configure-access-to-packages-by-using-the-management-console-50.md)
-##### [How to Publish a Package by Using the Management Console](how-to-publish-a-package-by-using-the-management-console-50.md)
-##### [How to Delete a Package in the Management Console](how-to-delete-a-package-in-the-management-console-beta.md)
-##### [How to Add or Remove an Administrator by Using the Management Console](how-to-add-or-remove-an-administrator-by-using-the-management-console.md)
-##### [How to Register and Unregister a Publishing Server by Using the Management Console](how-to-register-and-unregister-a-publishing-server-by-using-the-management-console.md)
-##### [How to Create a Custom Configuration File by Using the App-V 5.0 Management Console](how-to-create-a-custom-configuration-file-by-using-the-app-v-50-management-console.md)
-##### [How to Transfer Access and Configurations to Another Version of a Package by Using the Management Console](how-to-transfer-access-and-configurations-to-another-version-of-a-package-by-using-the-management-console.md)
-##### [How to Customize Virtual Applications Extensions for a Specific AD Group by Using the Management Console](how-to-customize-virtual-applications-extensions-for-a-specific-ad-group-by-using-the-management-console.md)
-##### [How to View and Configure Applications and Default Virtual Application Extensions by Using the Management Console](how-to-view-and-configure-applications-and-default-virtual-application-extensions-by-using-the-management-console-beta.md)
-#### [Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups.md)
-##### [About the Connection Group Virtual Environment](about-the-connection-group-virtual-environment.md)
-##### [About the Connection Group File](about-the-connection-group-file.md)
-##### [How to Create a Connection Group](how-to-create-a-connection-group.md)
-##### [How to Create a Connection Group with User-Published and Globally Published Packages](how-to-create-a-connection-group-with-user-published-and-globally-published-packages.md)
-##### [How to Delete a Connection Group](how-to-delete-a-connection-group.md)
-##### [How to Publish a Connection Group](how-to-publish-a-connection-group.md)
-##### [How to Use Optional Packages in Connection Groups](how-to-use-optional-packages-in-connection-groups.md)
-##### [How to Make a Connection Group Ignore the Package Version](how-to-make-a-connection-group-ignore-the-package-version.md)
-##### [How to Allow Only Administrators to Enable Connection Groups](how-to-allow-only-administrators-to-enable-connection-groups.md)
-#### [Deploying App-V 5.0 Packages by Using Electronic Software Distribution (ESD)](deploying-app-v-50-packages-by-using-electronic-software-distribution--esd-.md)
-##### [How to deploy App-V 5.0 Packages Using Electronic Software Distribution](how-to-deploy-app-v-50-packages-using-electronic-software-distribution.md)
-##### [How to Enable Only Administrators to Publish Packages by Using an ESD](how-to-enable-only-administrators-to-publish-packages-by-using-an-esd.md)
-#### [Using the App-V 5.0 Client Management Console](using-the-app-v-50-client-management-console.md)
-##### [How to Access the Client Management Console](how-to-access-the-client-management-console.md)
-##### [How to Configure the Client to Receive Package and Connection Groups Updates From the Publishing Server](how-to-configure-the-client-to-receive-package-and-connection-groups-updates-from-the-publishing-server-beta.md)
-#### [Migrating from a Previous Version](migrating-from-a-previous-version-app-v-50.md)
-##### [How to Convert a Package Created in a Previous Version of App-V](how-to-convert-a-package-created-in-a-previous-version-of-app-v.md)
-##### [How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to a Converted App-V 5.0 Package for All Users on a Specific Computer](how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-a-converted-app-v-50-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md)
-##### [How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to App-V 5.0 for a Specific User](how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-app-v-50-for-a-specific-user.md)
-##### [How to Revert Extension Points from an App-V 5.0 Package to an App-V 4.6 Package For All Users on a Specific Computer](how-to-revert-extension-points-from-an-app-v-50-package-to-an-app-v-46-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md)
-##### [How to Revert Extension Points From an App-V 5.0 Package to an App-V 4.6 Package for a Specific User](how-to-revert-extension-points-from-an-app-v-50-package-to-an-app-v-46-package-for-a-specific-user.md)
-#### [Maintaining App-V 5.0](maintaining-app-v-50.md)
-##### [How to Move the App-V Server to Another Computer](how-to-move-the-app-v-server-to-another-computer.md)
-#### [Administering App-V by Using PowerShell](administering-app-v-by-using-powershell.md)
-##### [How to Load the PowerShell Cmdlets and Get Cmdlet Help](how-to-load-the-powershell-cmdlets-and-get-cmdlet-help-50-sp3.md)
-##### [How to Manage App-V 5.0 Packages Running on a Stand-Alone Computer by Using PowerShell](how-to-manage-app-v-50-packages-running-on-a-stand-alone-computer-by-using-powershell.md)
-##### [How to Manage Connection Groups on a Stand-alone Computer by Using PowerShell](how-to-manage-connection-groups-on-a-stand-alone-computer-by-using-powershell.md)
-##### [How to Modify Client Configuration by Using PowerShell](how-to-modify-client-configuration-by-using-powershell.md)
-##### [How to Apply the User Configuration File by Using PowerShell](how-to-apply-the-user-configuration-file-by-using-powershell.md)
-##### [How to Apply the Deployment Configuration File by Using PowerShell](how-to-apply-the-deployment-configuration-file-by-using-powershell.md)
-##### [How to Sequence a Package by Using PowerShell](how-to-sequence-a-package--by-using-powershell-50.md)
-##### [How to Create a Package Accelerator by Using PowerShell](how-to-create-a-package-accelerator-by-using-powershell.md)
-##### [How to Enable Reporting on the App-V 5.0 Client by Using PowerShell](how-to-enable-reporting-on-the-app-v-50-client-by-using-powershell.md)
-##### [How to Install the App-V Databases and Convert the Associated Security Identifiers by Using PowerShell](how-to-install-the-app-v-databases-and-convert-the-associated-security-identifiers--by-using-powershell.md)
-### [Troubleshooting App-V 5.0](troubleshooting-app-v-50.md)
-### [Technical Reference for App-V 5.0](technical-reference-for-app-v-50.md)
-#### [Performance Guidance for Application Virtualization 5.0](performance-guidance-for-application-virtualization-50.md)
-#### [Application Publishing and Client Interaction](application-publishing-and-client-interaction.md)
-#### [Viewing App-V Server Publishing Metadata](viewing-app-v-server-publishing-metadata.md)
-#### [Running a Locally Installed Application Inside a Virtual Environment with Virtualized Applications](running-a-locally-installed-application-inside-a-virtual-environment-with-virtualized-applications.md)
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-50-dynamic-configuration.md b/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-50-dynamic-configuration.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8a54d8a0da..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-50-dynamic-configuration.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,889 +0,0 @@
----
-title: About App-V 5.0 Dynamic Configuration
-description: About App-V 5.0 Dynamic Configuration
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 88afaca1-68c5-45c4-a074-9371c56b5804
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# About App-V 5.0 Dynamic Configuration
-
-
-You can use the dynamic configuration to customize an App-V 5.0 package for a user. Use the following information to create or edit an existing dynamic configuration file.
-
-When you edit the dynamic configuration file it customizes how an App-V 5.0 package will run for a user or group. This helps to provide a more convenient method for package customization by removing the need to re-sequence packages using the desired settings, and provides a way to keep package content and custom settings independent.
-
-## Advanced: Dynamic Configuration
-
-
-Virtual application packages contain a manifest that provides all the core information for the package. This information includes the defaults for the package settings and determines settings in the most basic form (with no additional customization). If you want to adjust these defaults for a particular user or group, you can create and edit the following files:
-
-- User Configuration file
-
-- Deployment configuration file
-
-The previous .xml files specify package settings and allow for packages to be customized without directly affecting the packages. When a package is created, the sequencer automatically generates default deployment and user configuration .xml files using the package manifest data. Therefore, these automatically generated configuration files simply reflect the default settings that the package innately as from how things were configured during sequencing. If you apply these configuration files to a package in the form generated by the sequencer, the packages will have the same default settings that came from their manifest. This provides you with a package-specific template to get started if any of the defaults must be changed.
-
-**Note**
-The following information can only be used to modify sequencer generated configuration files to customize packages to meet specific user or group requirements.
-
-
-
-### Dynamic Configuration file contents
-
-All of the additions, deletions, and updates in the configuration files need to be made in relation to the default values specified by the package's manifest information. Review the following table:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
User Configuration .xml file
-
-
-
Deployment Configuration .xml file
-
-
-
Package Manifest
-
-
-
-
-
-
-The previous table represents how the files will be read. The first entry represents what will be read last, therefore, its content takes precedence. Therefore, all packages inherently contain and provide default settings from the package manifest. If a deployment configuration .xml file with customized settings is applied, it will override the package manifest defaults. If a user configuration .xml file with customized settings is applied prior to that, it will override both the deployment configuration and the package manifest defaults.
-
-The following list displays more information about the two file types:
-
-- **User Configuration File (UserConfig)** – Allows you to specify or modify custom settings for a package. These settings will be applied for a specific user when the package is deployed to a computer running the App-V 5.0 client.
-
-- **Deployment Configuration File (DeploymentConfig)** – Allows you to specify or modify the default settings for a package. These settings will be applied for all users when a package is deployed to a computer running the App-V 5.0 client.
-
-To customize the settings for a package for a specific set of users on a computer or to make changes that will be applied to local user locations such as HKCU, the UserConfig file should be used. To modify the default settings of a package for all users on a machine or to make changes that will be applied to global locations such as HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE and the all users folder, the DeploymentConfig file should be used.
-
-The UserConfig file provides configuration settings that can be applied to a single user without affecting any other users on a client:
-
-- Extensions that will be integrated into the native system per user:- shortcuts, File-Type associations, URL Protocols, AppPaths, Software Clients and COM
-
-- Virtual Subsystems:- Application Objects, Environment variables, Registry modifications, Services and Fonts
-
-- Scripts (User context only)
-
-- Managing Authority (for controlling co-existence of package with App-V 4.6)
-
-The DeploymentConfig file provides configuration settings in two sections, one relative to the machine context and one relative to the user context providing the same capabilities listed in the UserConfig list above:
-
-- All UserConfig settings above
-
-- Extensions that can only be applied globally for all users
-
-- Virtual Subsystems that can be configured for global machine locations e.g. registry
-
-- Product Source URL
-
-- Scripts (Machine context only)
-
-- Controls to Terminate Child Processes
-
-### File structure
-
-The structure of the App-V 5.0 Dynamic Configuration file is explained in the following section.
-
-### Dynamic User Configuration file
-
-**Header** - the header of a dynamic user configuration file is as follows:
-
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><UserConfiguration **PackageId**="1f8488bf-2257-46b4-b27f-09c9dbaae707" DisplayName="Reserved" xmlns=";
-
-The **PackageId** is the same value as exists in the Manifest file.
-
-**Body** - the body of the Dynamic User Configuration file can include all the app extension points that are defined in the Manifest file, as well as information to configure virtual applications. There are four subsections allowed in the body:
-
-1. **Applications** - All app-extensions that are contained in the Manifest file within a package are assigned with an Application ID, which is also defined in the manifest file. This allows you to enable or disable all the extensions for a given application within a package. The **Application ID** must exist in the Manifest file or it will be ignored.
-
- <UserConfiguration **PackageId**="1f8488bf-2257-46b4-b27f-09c9dbaae707" DisplayName="Reserved" xmlns=";
-
- <Applications>
-
- <!-- No new application can be defined in policy. AppV Client will ignore any application ID that is not also in the Manifest file -->
-
- <Application Id="{a56fa627-c35f-4a01-9e79-7d36aed8225a}" Enabled="false">
-
- </Application>
-
- </Applications>
-
- …
-
- </UserConfiguration>
-
-2. **Subsystems** - AppExtensions and other subsystems are arranged as subnodes under the <Subsystems>:
-
- <UserConfiguration **PackageId**="1f8488bf-2257-46b4-b27f-09c9dbaae707" DisplayName="Reserved" xmlns=";
-
- <Subsystems>
-
- ..
-
- </Subsystems>
-
- ..
-
- </UserConfiguration>
-
- Each subsystem can be enabled/disabled using the “**Enabled**” attribute. Below are the various subsystems and usage samples.
-
- **Extensions:**
-
- Some subsystems (Extension Subsystems) control Extensions. Those subsystems are:- shortcuts, File-Type associations, URL Protocols, AppPaths, Software Clients and COM
-
- Extension Subsystems can be enabled and disabled independently of the content. Thus if Shortcuts are enabled, The client will use the shortcuts contained within the manifest by default. Each Extension Subsystem can contain an <Extensions> node. If this child element is present, the client will ignore the content in the Manifest file for that subsystem and only use the content in the configuration file.
-
- Example using the shortcuts subsystem:
-
- 1. If the user defined this in either the dynamic or deployment config file:
-
- **<Shortcuts Enabled="true">**
-
- **<Extensions>**
-
- ...
-
- **</Extensions>**
-
- **</Shortcuts>**
-
- Content in the manifest will be ignored.
-
- 2. If the user defined only the following:
-
- **<Shortcuts Enabled="true"/>**
-
- Then the content in the Manifest will be integrated during publishing.
-
- 3. If the user defines the following
-
- **<Shortcuts Enabled="true">**
-
- **<Extensions/>**
-
- **</Shortcuts>**
-
- Then all the shortcuts within the manifest will still be ignored. There will be no shortcuts integrated.
-
- The supported Extension Subsystems are:
-
- **Shortcuts:** This controls shortcuts that will be integrated into the local system. Below is a sample with 2 shortcuts:
-
- <Subsystems>
-
- <Shortcuts Enabled="true">
-
- <Extensions>
-
- <Extension Category="AppV.Shortcut">
-
- <Shortcut>
-
- <File>\[{Common Programs}\]\\Microsoft Contoso\\Microsoft ContosoApp Filler 2010.lnk</File>
-
- <Target>\[{PackageRoot}\]\\Contoso\\ContosoApp.EXE</Target>
-
- <Icon>\[{Windows}\]\\Installer\\{90140000-0011-0000-0000-0000000FF1CE}\\inficon.exe</Icon>
-
- <Arguments />
-
- <WorkingDirectory />
-
- <AppUserModelId>ContosoApp.Filler.3</AppUserModelId>
-
- <Description>Fill out dynamic forms to gather and reuse information throughout the organization using Microsoft ContosoApp.</Description>
-
- <Hotkey>0</Hotkey>
-
- <ShowCommand>1</ShowCommand>
-
- <ApplicationId>\[{PackageRoot}\]\\Contoso\\ContosoApp.EXE</ApplicationId>
-
- </Shortcut>
-
- </Extension>
-
- <Extension Category="AppV.Shortcut">
-
- <Shortcut>
-
- <File>\[{AppData}\]\\Microsoft\\Contoso\\Recent\\Templates.LNK</File>
-
- <Target>\[{AppData}\]\\Microsoft\\Templates</Target>
-
- <Icon />
-
- <Arguments />
-
- <WorkingDirectory />
-
- <AppUserModelId />
-
- <Description />
-
- <Hotkey>0</Hotkey>
-
- <ShowCommand>1</ShowCommand>
-
- <!-- Note the ApplicationId is optional -->
-
- </Shortcut>
-
- </Extension>
-
- </Extensions>
-
- </Shortcuts>
-
- **File-Type Associations:** Associates File-types with programs to open by default as well as setup the context menu. (MIME types can also be setup using this susbsystem). Sample File-type Association is below:
-
- <FileTypeAssociations Enabled="true">
-
- <Extensions>
-
- <Extension Category="AppV.FileTypeAssociation">
-
- <FileTypeAssociation>
-
- <FileExtension MimeAssociation="true">
-
- <Name>.docm</Name>
-
- <ProgId>contosowordpad.DocumentMacroEnabled.12</ProgId>
-
- <PerceivedType>document</PerceivedType>
-
- <ContentType>application/vnd.ms-contosowordpad.document.macroEnabled.12</ContentType>
-
- <OpenWithList>
-
- <ApplicationName>wincontosowordpad.exe</ApplicationName>
-
- </OpenWithList>
-
- <OpenWithProgIds>
-
- <ProgId>contosowordpad.8</ProgId>
-
- </OpenWithProgIds>
-
- <ShellNew>
-
- <Command />
-
- <DataBinary />
-
- <DataText />
-
- <FileName />
-
- <NullFile>true</NullFile>
-
- <ItemName />
-
- <IconPath />
-
- <MenuText />
-
- <Handler />
-
- </ShellNew>
-
- </FileExtension>
-
- <ProgId>
-
- <Name>contosowordpad.DocumentMacroEnabled.12</Name>
-
- <DefaultIcon>\[{Windows}\]\\Installer\\{90140000-0011-0000-0000-0000000FF1CE}\\contosowordpadicon.exe,15</DefaultIcon>
-
- <Description>Blah Blah Blah</Description>
-
- <FriendlyTypeName>\[{FOLDERID\_ProgramFilesX86}\]\\Microsoft Contoso 14\\res.dll,9182</FriendlyTypeName>
-
- <InfoTip>\[{FOLDERID\_ProgramFilesX86}\]\\Microsoft Contoso 14\\res.dll,1424</InfoTip>
-
- <EditFlags>0</EditFlags>
-
- <ShellCommands>
-
- <DefaultCommand>Open</DefaultCommand>
-
- <ShellCommand>
-
- <ApplicationId>{e56fa627-c35f-4a01-9e79-7d36aed8225a}</ApplicationId>
-
- <Name>Edit</Name>
-
- <FriendlyName>&Edit</FriendlyName>
-
- <CommandLine>"\[{PackageRoot}\]\\Contoso\\WINcontosowordpad.EXE" /vu "%1"</CommandLine>
-
- </ShellCommand>
-
- </ShellCommand>
-
- <ApplicationId>{e56fa627-c35f-4a01-9e79-7d36aed8225a}</ApplicationId>
-
- <Name>Open</Name>
-
- <FriendlyName>&Open</FriendlyName>
-
- <CommandLine>"\[{PackageRoot}\]\\Contoso\\WINcontosowordpad.EXE" /n "%1"</CommandLine>
-
- <DropTargetClassId />
-
- <DdeExec>
-
- <Application>mscontosowordpad</Application>
-
- <Topic>ShellSystem</Topic>
-
- <IfExec>\[SHELLNOOP\]</IfExec>
-
- <DdeCommand>\[SetForeground\]\[ShellNewDatabase "%1"\]</DdeCommand>
-
- </DdeExec>
-
- </ShellCommand>
-
- </ShellCommands>
-
- </ProgId>
-
- </FileTypeAssociation>
-
- </Extension>
-
- </Extensions>
-
- </FileTypeAssociations>
-
- **URL Protocols**: This controls the URL Protocols that are integrated into the local registry of the client machine e.g. “mailto:”.
-
- <URLProtocols Enabled="true">
-
- <Extensions>
-
- <Extension Category="AppV.URLProtocol">
-
- <URLProtocol>
-
- <Name>mailto</Name>
-
- <ApplicationURLProtocol>
-
- <DefaultIcon>\[{ProgramFilesX86}\]\\Microsoft Contoso\\Contoso\\contosomail.EXE,-9403</DefaultIcon>
-
- <EditFlags>2</EditFlags>
-
- <Description />
-
- <AppUserModelId />
-
- <FriendlyTypeName />
-
- <InfoTip />
-
- <SourceFilter />
-
- <ShellFolder />
-
- <WebNavigableCLSID />
-
- <ExplorerFlags>2</ExplorerFlags>
-
- <CLSID />
-
- <ShellCommands>
-
- <DefaultCommand>open</DefaultCommand>
-
- <ShellCommand>
-
- <ApplicationId>\[{ProgramFilesX86}\]\\Microsoft Contoso\\Contoso\\contosomail.EXE</ApplicationId>
-
- <Name>open</Name>
-
- <CommandLine>\[{ProgramFilesX86}\\Microsoft Contoso\\Contoso\\contosomail.EXE" -c OEP.Note /m "%1"</CommandLine>
-
- <DropTargetClassId />
-
- <FriendlyName />
-
- <Extended>0</Extended>
-
- <LegacyDisable>0</LegacyDisable>
-
- <SuppressionPolicy>2</SuppressionPolicy>
-
- <DdeExec>
-
- <NoActivateHandler />
-
- <Application>contosomail</Application>
-
- <Topic>ShellSystem</Topic>
-
- <IfExec>\[SHELLNOOP\]</IfExec>
-
- <DdeCommand>\[SetForeground\]\[ShellNewDatabase "%1"\]</DdeCommand>
-
- </DdeExec>
-
- </ShellCommand>
-
- </ShellCommands>
-
- </ApplicationURLProtocol>
-
- </URLProtocol>
-
- </Extension>
-
- </Extension>
-
- </URLProtocols>
-
- **Software Clients**: Allows the app to register as an Email client, news reader, media player and makes the app visible in the Set Program Access and Computer Defaults UI. In most cases you should only need to enable and disable it. There is also a control to enable and disable the email client specifically if you want the other clients still enabled except for that client.
-
- <SoftwareClients Enabled="true">
-
- <ClientConfiguration EmailEnabled="false" />
-
- </SoftwareClients>
-
- AppPaths:- If an application for example contoso.exe is registered with an apppath name of “myapp”, it allows you type “myapp” under the run menu and it will open contoso.exe.
-
- <AppPaths Enabled="true">
-
- <Extensions>
-
- <Extension Category="AppV.AppPath">
-
- <AppPath>
-
- <ApplicationId>\[{ProgramFilesX86}\]\\Microsoft Contoso\\Contoso\\contosomail.EXE</ApplicationId>
-
- <Name>contosomail.exe</Name>
-
- <ApplicationPath>\[{ProgramFilesX86}\]\\Microsoft Contoso\\Contoso\\contosomail.EXE</ApplicationPath>
-
- <PATHEnvironmentVariablePrefix />
-
- <CanAcceptUrl>false</CanAcceptUrl>
-
- <SaveUrl />
-
- </AppPath>
-
- </Extension>
-
- </Extensions>
-
- </AppPaths>
-
- **COM**: Allows an Application register Local COM servers. Mode can be Integration, Isolated or Off. When Isol.
-
- <COM Mode="Isolated"/>
-
- **Other Settings**:
-
- In addition to Extensions, other subsystems can be enabled/disabled and edited:
-
- **Virtual Kernel Objects**:
-
- <Objects Enabled="false" />
-
- **Virtual Registry**: Used if you want to set a registry in the Virtual Registry within HKCU
-
- <Registry Enabled="true">
-
- <Include>
-
- <Key Path="\\REGISTRY\\USER\\\[{AppVCurrentUserSID}\]\\Software\\ABC">
-
- <Value Type="REG\_SZ" Name="Bar" Data="NewValue" />
-
- </Key>
-
- <Key Path="\\REGISTRY\\USER\\\[{AppVCurrentUserSID}\]\\Software\\EmptyKey" />
-
- </Include>
-
- <Delete>
-
- </Registry>
-
- **Virtual File System**
-
- <FileSystem Enabled="true" />
-
- **Virtual Fonts**
-
- <Fonts Enabled="false" />
-
- **Virtual Environment Variables**
-
- <EnvironmentVariables Enabled="true">
-
- <Include>
-
- <Variable Name="UserPath" Value="%path%;%UserProfile%" />
-
- <Variable Name="UserLib" Value="%UserProfile%\\ABC" />
-
- </Include>
-
- <Delete>
-
- <Variable Name="lib" />
-
- </Delete>
-
- </EnvironmentVariables>
-
- **Virtual services**
-
- <Services Enabled="false" />
-
-3. **UserScripts** – Scripts can be used to setup or alter the virtual environment as well as execute scripts at time of deployment or removal, before an application executes, or they can be used to “clean up” the environment after the application terminates. Please reference a sample User configuration file that is output by the sequencer to see a sample script. The Scripts section below provides more information on the various triggers that can be used.
-
-4. **ManagingAuthority** – Can be used when 2 versions of your package are co-existing on the same machine, one deployed to App-V 4.6 and the other deployed on App-V 5.0. To Allow App-V vNext to take over App-V 4.6 extension points for the named package enter the following in the UserConfig file (where PackageName is the Package GUID in App-V 4.6:
-
- <ManagingAuthority TakeoverExtensionPointsFrom46="true" PackageName="032630c0-b8e2-417c-acef-76fc5297fe81" />
-
-### Dynamic Deployment Configuration file
-
-**Header** - The header of a Deployment Configuration file is as follows:
-
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><DeploymentConfiguration **PackageId**="1f8488bf-2257-46b4-b27f-09c9dbaae707" DisplayName="Reserved" xmlns=";
-
-The **PackageId** is the same value as exists in the manifest file.
-
-**Body** - The body of the deployment configuration file includes two sections:
-
-- User Configuration section –allows the same content as the User Configuration file described in the previous section. When the package is published to a user, any appextensions configuration settings in this section will override corresponding settings in the Manifest within the package unless a user configuration file is also provided. If a UserConfig file is also provided, it will be used instead of the User settings in the deployment configuration file. If the package is published globally, then only the contents of the deployment configuration file will be used in combination with the manifest.
-
-- Machine Configuration section–contains information that can be configured only for an entire machine, not for a specific user on the machine. For example, HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE registry keys in the VFS.
-
-<DeploymentConfiguration **PackageId**="1f8488bf-2257-46b4-b27f-09c9dbaae707" DisplayName="Reserved" xmlns=";
-
-<UserConfiguration>
-
- ..
-
-</UserConfiguration>
-
-<MachineConfiguration>
-
-..
-
-</MachineConfiguration>
-
-..
-
-</MachineConfiguration>
-
-</DeploymentConfiguration>
-
-**User Configuration** - use the previous **Dynamic User Configuration file** section for information on settings that are provided in the user configuration section of the Deployment Configuration file.
-
-Machine Configuration - the Machine configuration section of the Deployment Configuration File is used to configure information that can be set only for an entire machine, not for a specific user on the computer. For example, HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE registry keys in the Virtual Registry. There are four subsections allowed in under this element
-
-1. **Subsystems** - AppExtensions and other subsystems are arranged as subnodes under <Subsystems>:
-
- <MachineConfiguration>
-
- <Subsystems>
-
- ..
-
- </Subsystems>
-
- ..
-
- </MachineConfiguration>
-
- The following section displays the various subsystems and usage samples.
-
- **Extensions**:
-
- Some subsystems (Extension Subsystems) control Extensions which can only apply to all users. The subsystem is application capabilities. Because this can only apply to all users, the package must be published globally in order for this type of extension to be integrated into the local system. The same rules for controls and settings that apply to the Extensions in the User Configuration also apply to those in the MachineConfiguration section.
-
- **Application Capabilities**: Used by default programs in windows operating system Interface. Allows an application to register itself as capable of opening certain file extensions, as a contender for the start menu internet browser slot, as capable of opening certain windows MIME types. This extension also makes the virtual application visible in the Set Default Programs UI.:
-
- <ApplicationCapabilities Enabled="true">
-
- <Extensions>
-
- <Extension Category="AppV.ApplicationCapabilities">
-
- <ApplicationCapabilities>
-
- <ApplicationId>\[{PackageRoot}\]\\LitView\\LitViewBrowser.exe</ApplicationId>
-
- <Reference>
-
- <Name>LitView Browser</Name>
-
- <Path>SOFTWARE\\LitView\\Browser\\Capabilities</Path>
-
- </Reference>
-
- <CapabilityGroup>
-
- <Capabilities>
-
- <Name>@\[{ProgramFilesX86}\]\\LitView\\LitViewBrowser.exe,-12345</Name>
-
- <Description>@\[{ProgramFilesX86}\]\\LitView\\LitViewBrowser.exe,-12346</Description>
-
- <Hidden>0</Hidden>
-
- <EMailSoftwareClient>Lit View E-Mail Client</EMailSoftwareClient>
-
- <FileAssociationList>
-
- <FileAssociation Extension=".htm" ProgID="LitViewHTML" />
-
- <FileAssociation Extension=".html" ProgID="LitViewHTML" />
-
- <FileAssociation Extension=".shtml" ProgID="LitViewHTML" />
-
- </FileAssociationList>
-
- <MIMEAssociationList>
-
- <MIMEAssociation Type="audio/mp3" ProgID="LitViewHTML" />
-
- <MIMEAssociation Type="audio/mpeg" ProgID="LitViewHTML" />
-
- </MIMEAssociationList>
-
- <URLAssociationList>
-
- <URLAssociation Scheme="http" ProgID="LitViewHTML.URL.http" />
-
- </URLAssociationList>
-
- </Capabilities>
-
- </CapabilityGroup>
-
- </ApplicationCapabilities>
-
- </Extension>
-
- </Extensions>
-
- </ApplicationCapabilities>
-
- **Other Settings**:
-
- In addition to Extensions, other subsystems can be edited:
-
- **Machine Wide Virtual Registry**: Used when you want to set a registry key in the virtual registry within HKEY\_Local\_Machine
-
- <Registry>
-
- <Include>
-
- <Key Path="\\REGISTRY\\Machine\\Software\\ABC">
-
- <Value Type="REG\_SZ" Name="Bar" Data="Baz" />
-
- </Key>
-
- <Key Path="\\REGISTRY\\Machine\\Software\\EmptyKey" />
-
- </Include>
-
- <Delete>
-
- </Registry>
-
- **Machine Wide Virtual Kernel Objects**
-
- <Objects>
-
- <NotIsolate>
-
- <Object Name="testObject" />
-
- </NotIsolate>
-
- </Objects>
-
-2. **ProductSourceURLOptOut**: Indicates whether the URL for the package can be modified globally through PackageSourceRoot (to support branch office scenarios). Default is false and the setting change takes effect on the next launch.
-
- <MachineConfiguration>
-
- ..
-
- <ProductSourceURLOptOut Enabled="true" />
-
- ..
-
- </MachineConfiguration>
-
-3. **MachineScripts** – Package can be configured to execute scripts at time of deployment, publishing or removal. Please reference a sample deployment configuration file that is generated by the sequencer to see a sample script. The Scripts section below provides more information on the various triggers that can be used
-
-4. **TerminateChildProcess**:- An application executable can be specified, whose child processes will be terminated when the application exe process is terminated.
-
- <MachineConfiguration>
-
- ..
-
- <TerminateChildProcesses>
-
- <Application Path="\[{PackageRoot}\]\\Contoso\\ContosoApp.EXE" />
-
- <Application Path="\[{PackageRoot}\]\\LitView\\LitViewBrowser.exe" />
-
- <Application Path="\[{ProgramFilesX86}\]\\Microsoft Contoso\\Contoso\\contosomail.EXE" />
-
- </TerminateChildProcesses>
-
- ..
-
- </MachineConfiguration>
-
-### Scripts
-
-The following table describes the various script events and the context under which they can be run.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Script Execution Time
-
Can be specified in Deployment Configuration
-
Can be specified in User Configuration
-
Can run in the Virtual Environment of the package
-
Can be run in the context of a specific application
-
Runs in system/user context: (Deployment Configuration, User Configuration)
-
-
-
-
-
AddPackage
-
X
-
-
-
-
(SYSTEM, N/A)
-
-
-
PublishPackage
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
(SYSTEM, User)
-
-
-
UnpublishPackage
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
(SYSTEM, User)
-
-
-
RemovePackage
-
X
-
-
-
-
(SYSTEM, N/A)
-
-
-
StartProcess
-
X
-
X
-
X
-
X
-
(User, User)
-
-
-
ExitProcess
-
X
-
X
-
-
X
-
(User, User)
-
-
-
StartVirtualEnvironment
-
X
-
X
-
X
-
-
(User, User)
-
-
-
TerminateVirtualEnvironment
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
(User, User)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Create a Dynamic Configuration file using an App-V 5.0 Manifest file
-
-You can create the Dynamic Configuration file using one of three methods: either manually, using the App-V 5.0 Management Console or sequencing a package, which will be generated with 2 sample files.
-
-For more information about how to create the file using the App-V 5.0 Management Console see, [How to Create a Custom Configuration File by Using the App-V 5.0 Management Console](how-to-create-a-custom-configuration-file-by-using-the-app-v-50-management-console.md).
-
-To create the file manually, the information above in previous sections can be combined into a single file. We recommend you use files generated by the sequencer.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[How to Apply the Deployment Configuration File by Using PowerShell](how-to-apply-the-deployment-configuration-file-by-using-powershell.md)
-
-[How to Apply the User Configuration File by Using PowerShell](how-to-apply-the-user-configuration-file-by-using-powershell.md)
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-50-reporting.md b/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-50-reporting.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f5bce3e29a..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-50-reporting.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,327 +0,0 @@
----
-title: About App-V 5.0 Reporting
-description: About App-V 5.0 Reporting
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 27c33dda-f017-41e3-8a78-1b681543ec4f
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# About App-V 5.0 Reporting
-
-
-Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 includes a built-in reporting feature that helps you collect information about computers running the App-V 5.0 client as well as information about virtual application package usage. You can use this information to generate reports from a centralized database.
-
-## App-V 5.0 Reporting Overview
-
-
-The following list displays the end–to-end high-level workflow for reporting in App-V 5.0.
-
-1. The Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 Reporting server has the following prerequisites:
-
- - Internet Information Service (IIS) web server role
-
- - Windows Authentication role (under **IIS / Security**)
-
- - SQL Server installed and running with SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS)
-
- To confirm SQL Server Reporting Services is running, view `http://localhost/Reports` in a web browser as administrator on the server that will host App-V 5.0 Reporting. The SQL Server Reporting Services Home page should display.
-
-2. Install the App-V 5.0 reporting server and associated database. For more information about installing the reporting server see [How to install the Reporting Server on a Standalone Computer and Connect it to the Database](how-to-install-the-reporting-server-on-a-standalone-computer-and-connect-it-to-the-database.md). Configure the time when the computer running the App-V 5.0 client should send data to the reporting server.
-
-3. If you are not using an electronic software distribution system such as Configuration Manager to view reports then you can define reports in SQL Server Reporting Service. Download predefined appvshort Reports from the Download Center at .
-
- **Note**
- If you are using the Configuration Manager integration with App-V 5.0, most reports are generated from Configuration Manager rather than from App-V 5.0.
-
-
-
-4. After importing the App-V 5.0 PowerShell module using `Import-Module AppvClient` as administrator, enable the App-V 5.0 client. This sample PowerShell cmdlet enables App-V 5.0 reporting:
-
- ``` syntax
- Set-AppvClientConfiguration –reportingserverurl : -reportingenabled 1 – ReportingStartTime <0-23> - ReportingRandomDelay <#min>
- ```
-
- To immediately send App-V 5.0 report data, run `Send-AppvClientReport` on the App-V 5.0 client.
-
- For more information about installing the App-V 5.0 client with reporting enabled see [About Client Configuration Settings](about-client-configuration-settings.md). To administer App-V 5.0 Reporting with Windows PowerShell, see [How to Enable Reporting on the App-V 5.0 Client by Using PowerShell](how-to-enable-reporting-on-the-app-v-50-client-by-using-powershell.md).
-
-5. After the reporting server receives the data from the App-V 5.0 client it sends the data to the reporting database. When the database receives and processes the client data, a successful reply is sent to the reporting server and then a notification is sent to the App-V 5.0 client.
-
-6. When the App-V 5.0 client receives the success notification, it empties the data cache to conserve space.
-
- **Note**
- By default the cache is cleared after the server confirms receipt of data. You can manually configure the client to save the data cache.
-
-
-
-~~~
-If the App-V 5.0 client device does not receive a success notification from the server, it retains data in the cache and tries to resend data at the next configured interval. Clients continue to collect data and add it to the cache.
-~~~
-
-### App-V 5.0 reporting server frequently asked questions
-
-The following table displays answers to common questions about App-V 5.0 reporting
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Question
-
More Information
-
-
-
-
-
What is the frequency that reporting information is sent to the reporting database?
-
The frequency depends on how the reporting task is configured on the computer running the App-V 5.0 client. You must configure the frequency / interval for sending the reporting data. App-V 5.0 Reporting is not enabled by default.
-
-
-
What information is stored in the reporting server database?
-
The following list displays what is stored in the reporting database:
-
-
The operating system running on the computer running the App-V 5.0 client: host name, version, service pack, type - client/server, processor architecture.
-
App-V 5.0 Client information: version.
-
Published package list: GUID, version GUID, name.
-
Application usage information: name, version, streaming server, user (domain\alias), package version GUID, launch status and time, shutdown time.
-
-
-
-
What is the average volume of information that is sent to the reporting server?
-
It depends. The following list displays the three sets of the data sent to the reporting server:
-
-
Operating system, and App-V 5.0 client information. ~150 Bytes, every time this data is sent.
-
Published package list. ~7 KB for 30 packages. This is sent only when the package list is updated with a publishing refresh, which is done infrequently; if there is no change, this information is not sent.
-
Virtual application usage information – about 0.25KB per event. Opening and closing count as one event if both occur before sending the information. When sending using a scheduled task, only the data since the last successful upload is sent to the server. If sending manually through the PowerShell cmdlet, there is an optional argument that controls if the data needs to be re-sent next time around – that argument is DeleteOnSuccess.
-
-
So for example, if twenty applications are opened and closed and reporting information is scheduled to be sent daily, the typical daily traffic should be about 0.15KB + 20 x 0.25KB, or about 5KB/user
-
-
-
-
Can reporting be scheduled?
-
Yes. Besides manually sending reporting using PowerShell Cmdlets (Send-AppvClientReport), the task can be scheduled so it will happen automatically. There are two ways to schedule the reporting:
-
-
Using PowerShell cmdlets - Set-AppvClientConfiguration. For example:
For a complete list of client configuration settings see About Client Configuration Settings and look for the following entries: ReportingEnabled, ReportingServerURL, ReportingDataCacheLimit, ReportingDataBlockSize, ReportingStartTime, ReportingRandomDelay, ReportingInterval.
-
-
By using Group Policy. If distributed using the domain controller, the settings are the same as previously listed.
-
-Note
Group Policy settings override local settings configured using PowerShell.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## App-V 5.0 Client Reporting
-
-
-To use App-V 5.0 reporting you must install and configure the App-V 5.0 client. After the client has been installed, use the **Set-AppVClientConfiguration** PowerShell cmdlet or the **ADMX Template** to configure reporting. The reporting feature cmdlets are available by using the following link and are prefaced by **Reporting**. For a complete list of client configuration settings see [About Client Configuration Settings](about-client-configuration-settings.md). The following section provides examples of App-V 5.0 client reporting configuration using PowerShell.
-
-### Configuring App-V Client reporting using PowerShell
-
-The following examples show how PowerShell parameters can configure the reporting features of the App-V 5.0 client.
-
-**Note**
-The following configuration task can also be configured using Group Policy settings in the App-V 5.0 ADMX template. For more information about using the ADMX template, see [How to Modify App-V 5.0 Client Configuration Using the ADMX Template and Group Policy](how-to-modify-app-v-50-client-configuration-using-the-admx-template-and-group-policy.md).
-
-
-
-**To enable reporting and to initiate data collection on the computer running the App-V 5.0 client**:
-
-`Set-AppVClientConfiguration –ReportingEnabled 1`
-
-**To configure the client to automatically send data to a specific reporting server**:
-
-``` syntax
-Set-AppVClientConfiguration –ReportingServerURL http://MyReportingServer:MyPort/ -ReportingStartTime 20 -ReportingInterval 1 -ReportingRandomDelay 30
-```
-
-`-ReportingInterval 1 -ReportingRandomDelay 30`
-
-This example configures the client to automatically send the reporting data to the reporting server URL http://MyReportingServer:MyPort/. Additionally, the reporting data will be sent daily between 8:00 and 8:30 PM, depending on the random delay generated for the session.
-
-**To limit the size of the data cache on the client**:
-
-`Set-AppvClientConfiguration –ReportingDataCacheLimit 100`
-
-Configures the maximum size of the reporting cache on the computer running the App-V 5.0 client to 100 MB. If the cache limit is reached before the data is sent to the server, then the log rolls over and data will be overwritten as necessary.
-
-**To configure the data block size transmitted across the network between the client and the server**:
-
-`Set-AppvClientConfiguration –ReportingDataBlockSize 10240`
-
-Specifies the maximum data block that the client sends to 10240 MB.
-
-### Types of data collected
-
-The following table displays the types of information you can collect by using App-V 5.0 reporting.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Client Information
-
Package Information
-
Application Usage
-
-
-
-
-
Host Name
-
Package Name
-
Start and End Times
-
-
-
App-V 5.0 Client Version
-
Package Version
-
Run Status
-
-
-
Processor Architecture
-
Package Source
-
Shutdown State
-
-
-
Operating System Version
-
Percent Cached
-
Application Name
-
-
-
Service Pack Level
-
-
Application Version
-
-
-
Operating System Type
-
-
Username
-
-
-
-
-
Connection Group
-
-
-
-
-
-
-The client collects and saves this data in an **.xml** format. The data cache is hidden by default and requires administrator rights to open the XML file.
-
-### Sending data to the server
-
-You can configure the computer that is running the App-V 5.0 client to automatically send data to the specified reporting server. To specify the server use the **Set-AppvClientConfiguration** cmdlet with the following settings:
-
-- ReportingEnabled
-
-- ReportingServerURL
-
-- ReportingStartTime
-
-- ReportingInterval
-
-- ReportingRandomDelay
-
-After you configure the previous settings, you must create a scheduled task. The scheduled task will contact the server specified by the **ReportingServerURL** setting and will initiate the transfer. If you want to manually send data outside of the scheduled times, use the following PowerShell cmdlet:
-
-`Send-AppVClientReport –URL http://MyReportingServer:MyPort/ -DeleteOnSuccess`
-
-If the reporting server has been previously configured, then the **–URL** parameter can be omitted. Alternatively, if the data should be sent to an alternate location, specify a different URL to override the configured **ReportingServerURL** for this data collection.
-
-The **-DeleteOnSuccess** parameter indicates that if the transfer is successful, then the data cache is cleared. If this is not specified, then the cache will not be cleared.
-
-### Manual Data Collection
-
-You can also use the **Send-AppVClientReport** cmdlet to manually collect data. This solution is helpful with or without an existing reporting server. The following list displays information about collecting data with or without a reporting server.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
With a Reporting Server
-
Without a Reporting Server
-
-
-
-
-
If you have an existing App-V 5.0 reporting Server, create a customized scheduled task or script. Specify that the client send the data to the specified location with the desired frequency.
-
If you do not have an existing App-V 5.0 reporting Server, use the –URL parameter to send the data to a specified share. For example:
The previous example will send the reporting data to \MyShare\MyData</strong> location indicated by the -URL parameter. After the data has been sent, the cache is cleared.
-
-Note
If a location other than the Reporting Server is specified, the data is sent using .xml format with no additional processing.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Creating Reports
-
-To retrieve report information and create reports using App-V 5.0 you must use one of the following methods:
-
-- **Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS)** - Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services is available with Microsoft SQL Server. SSRS is not installed when you install the App-V 5.0 reporting server. It must be deployed separately to generate the associated reports.
-
- Use the following link for more information about using [Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=285596).
-
-- **Scripting** – You can generate reports by scripting directly against the App-V 5.0 reporting database. For example:
-
- **Stored Procedure:**
-
- **spProcessClientReport** is scheduled to run at midnight or 12:00 AM.
-
- To run the Microsoft SQL Server Scheduled Stored procedure, the Microsoft SQL Server Agent must be running. You should ensure that the Microsoft SQL Server Agent is set to **AutoStart**. For more information see [Autostart SQL Server Agent (SQL Server Management Studio)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=287045).
-
- The stored procedure is also created when using the App-V 5.0 database scripts.
-
-You should also ensure that the reporting server web service’s **Maximum Concurrent Connections** is set to a value that the server will be able to manage without impacting availability. The recommended number of **Maximum Concurrent Connections** for the **Reporting Web Service** is **10,000**.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the App-V 5.0 Server](deploying-the-app-v-50-server.md)
-
-[How to install the Reporting Server on a Standalone Computer and Connect it to the Database](how-to-install-the-reporting-server-on-a-standalone-computer-and-connect-it-to-the-database.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-50-sp1.md b/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-50-sp1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 2222333447..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-50-sp1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
----
-title: About App-V 5.0 SP1
-description: About App-V 5.0 SP1
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 2848a51b-452e-4c70-b465-f6717cfa667f
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# About App-V 5.0 SP1
-
-
-This service pack contains the following changes:
-
-- The App-V 5.0 sequencer and App-V 5.0 client now support twenty-four languages. You can download the additional language packs using the **Volume Licensing Service Center**.
-
-- The App-V 5.0 server now supports eleven languages. You can download the additional language packs using the **Volume Licensing Service Center**.
-
-- Support has been added for the App-V 5.0 Volume Shadow Copy Service (VSS) Writer feature.
-
- **Important**
- To use VSS and App-V 5.0 you must modify the values for the following server registry keys with the updated database names:
-
- - Management - **HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE** \\ **SOFTWARE** \\ **Microsoft** \\ **AppV** \\ **Server** \\ **ManagementService** \\ **MANAGEMENT\_DB\_NAME**
-
- - Reporting - **HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE** \\ **SOFTWARE** \\ **Microsoft** \\ **AppV** \\ **Server** \\ **ReportingService** \\ **REPORTING\_DB\_NAME**
-
-
-
-## How to Get MDOP Technologies
-
-
-App-V 5.0 is a part of the Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack (MDOP). MDOP is part of Microsoft Software Assurance. For more information about Microsoft Software Assurance and acquiring MDOP, see [How Do I Get MDOP](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[What's new in App-V 5.0 SP1](whats-new-in-app-v-50-sp1.md)
-
-[Release Notes for App-V 5.0 SP1](release-notes-for-app-v-50-sp1.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-50-sp2.md b/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-50-sp2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f3f167d10a..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-50-sp2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,183 +0,0 @@
----
-title: About App-V 5.0 SP2
-description: About App-V 5.0 SP2
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 16ca8452-cef2-464e-b4b5-c10d4630fa6a
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# About App-V 5.0 SP2
-
-
-App-V 5.0 SP2 provides an improved integrated platform, more flexible virtualization, and powerful management for virtualized applications. For more information see, [App-V 5.0 Overview](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=325265) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=325265).
-
-## Changes in Standard App-V 5.0 SP2 Functionality
-
-
-The following sections contain information about the changes in standard functionality for App-V 5.0 SP2.
-
-### Support for Windows Server 2012 R2 and Windows 8.1
-
-App-V 5.0 includes support for Windows Server 2012 R2 and Windows 8.1
-
-### App-V 5.0 SP2 now supports folder redirection for the user’s roaming AppData directory
-
-App-V 5.0 SP2 supports roaming AppData (%AppData%) folder redirection. For more information, see the [Planning to Use Folder Redirection with App-V](planning-to-use-folder-redirection-with-app-v.md).
-
-### Package upgrade improvements and pending tasks
-
-In App-V 5.0 SP2, you are no longer prompted to close a running virtual application when a newer version of the package or connection group is published. If a package or connection group is in use when you try to perform a related task, a message displays to indicate that the object is in use, and that the operation will be attempted at a later time.
-
-Tasks that have been placed in a pending state will be performed according to the following rules:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task type
-
Applicable rule
-
-
-
-
-
User-based task, e.g., publishing a package to a user
-
The pending task will be performed after the user logs off and then logs back on.
-
-
-
Globally based task, e.g., enabling a connection group globally
-
The pending task will be performed when the computer is shut down and then restarted.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-When a task is placed in a pending state, the App-V client also generates a registry key for the pending task, as follows:
-
-
-
-
-
-### Virtualizing Microsoft Office 2013 and Microsoft Office 2010 using App-V 5.0
-
-Use the following link for more information about App-V 5.0 supported Microsoft Office scenarios.
-
-[Virtualizing Microsoft Office 2013 for Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0](../solutions/virtualizing-microsoft-office-2013-for-application-virtualization--app-v--50-solutions.md)
-
-**Note**
-This document focuses on creating a Microsoft Office 2013 App-V 5.0 Package. However, it also provides information about scenarios for Microsoft Office 2010 with App-V 5.0.
-
-
-
-### App-V 5.0 Client Management User Interface Application
-
-In previous versions of App-V 5.0 the Client Management User Interface (UI) was provided with the App-V 5.0 Client installation. With App-V 5.0 SP2 this is no longer the case. Administrators now have the option to deploy the App-V 5.0 Client UI as a Virtual Application (using all supported App-V deployment configurations) or as an installed application.
-
-For more information see [Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0 Client UI Application](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=386345) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=386345).
-
-### Side-by-Side (SxS) Assembly Automatic Packaging and Deployment
-
-App-V 5.0 SP2 now automatically detects side-by-side (SxS) assemblies, and deployment on the computer running the App-V 5.0 SP2 client. A SxS assembly primarily consists of VC++ run-time dependencies or MSXML. In previous versions of App-V, virtual applications that had dependencies on VC run-times required these dependencies to be locally on the computer running the App-V 5.0 SP2 client.
-
-The following functionality is now supported:
-
-- The App-V 5.0 sequencer automatically captures the SxS assembly in the package regardless of whether the VC run-time has already been installed on the computer running the sequencer.
-
-- The App-V 5.0 client automatically installs the required SxS assembly to the computer running the client as required at publishing time.
-
-- The App-V 5.0 sequencer reports the VC run-time dependency using the sequencer reporting mechanism.
-
-- The App-V 5.0 sequencer now allows you to exclude the VC run-time dependency in the event that the dependency is already available on the computer running the sequencer.
-
-### Publishing Refresh Improvements
-
-App-V 5.0 supports several features were added to improve the overall experience of refreshing a set of applications for a specific user.
-
-The following list displays the publishing refresh enhancements:
-
-The following list contains more information about how to enable the new publishing refresh improvements.
-
-- **EnablePublishingRefreshUI** - Enables the publishing refresh progress bar for the computer running the App-V 5.0 Client.
-
-- **HideUI** - Hides the publishing refresh progress bar during a manual sync.
-
-### New Client Configuration Setting
-
-The following new client configuration setting is available with App-V 5.0 SP2:
-
-**EnableDynamicVirtualization** - Enables supported Shell Extensions, Browser Helper Objects, and Active X controls to be virtualized and run with virtual applications.
-
-For more information, see [About Client Configuration Settings](about-client-configuration-settings.md).
-
-### App-V 5.0 Shell extensions
-
-App-V 5.0 SP2 now supports shell extensions.
-
-For more information see the **App-V 5.0 SP2 shell extension support** section of [Creating and Managing App-V 5.0 Virtualized Applications](creating-and-managing-app-v-50-virtualized-applications.md).
-
-## App-V 5.0 documentation updates
-
-
-App-V 5.0 SP2 provides updated documentation for the following scenarios:
-
-- [Migrating from a Previous Version](migrating-from-a-previous-version-app-v-50.md)
-
-- [About App-V 5.0](about-app-v-50.md)
-
-- [About App-V 5.0 Reporting](about-app-v-50-reporting.md) (frequently asked questions section)
-
-## How to Get MDOP Technologies
-
-
-App-V 5.0 is a part of the Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack (MDOP). MDOP is part of Microsoft Software Assurance. For more information about Microsoft Software Assurance and acquiring MDOP, see [How Do I Get MDOP](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Release Notes for App-V 5.0 SP2](release-notes-for-app-v-50-sp2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-50-sp3.md b/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-50-sp3.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a784b0b574..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-50-sp3.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,839 +0,0 @@
----
-title: About App-V 5.0 SP3
-description: About App-V 5.0 SP3
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 67b5268b-edc1-4027-98b0-b3937dd70a6b
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 11/02/2016
----
-
-
-# About App-V 5.0 SP3
-
-
-Use the following sections to review information about significant changes that apply to Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 SP3:
-
-- [App-V 5.0 SP3 software prerequisites and supported configurations](#bkmk-sp3-prereq-configs)
-
-- [Migrating to App-V 5.0 SP3](#bkmk-migrate-to-50sp3)
-
-- [Manually created connection group xml file requires update to schema](#bkmk-update-schema-cg)
-
-- [Improvements to connection groups](#bkmk-cg-improvements)
-
-- [Administrators can publish and unpublish packages for a specific user](#bkmk-usersid-pub-pkgs-specf-user)
-
-- [Enable only administrators to publish and unpublish packages](#bkmk-admins-only-pub-unpub-pkgs)
-
-- [RunVirtual registry key supports packages that are published to the user](#bkmk-runvirtual-reg-key)
-
-- [New PowerShell cmdlets and updateable cmdlet help](#bkmk-posh-cmdlets-help)
-
-- [Primary virtual application directory (PVAD) is hidden but can be turned on](#bkmk-pvad-hidden)
-
-- [ClientVersion is required to view App-V publishing metadata](#bkmk-pub-metadata-clientversion)
-
-- [App-V event logs have been consolidated](#bkmk-event-logs-moved)
-
-## App-V 5.0 SP3 software prerequisites and supported configurations
-
-
-See the following links for the App-V 5.0 SP3 software prerequisites and supported configurations.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Links to prerequisites and supported configurations
Supported operating systems and hardware requirements for the App-V Server, Sequencer, and Client components
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Migrating to App-V 5.0 SP3
-
-
-Use the following information to upgrade to App-V 5.0 SP3 from earlier versions.
-
-### Before you start the upgrade
-
-Review the following information before you start the upgrade:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Items to review before upgrading
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Components to upgrade
-
-
App-V Server
-
Sequencer
-
App-V client or App-V Remote Desktop Services (RDS) client
You can upgrade to App-V 5.0 SP3 directly from any of the following versions:
-
-
App-V 5.0
-
App-V 5.0 SP1
-
App-V 5.0 SP2
-
-
To upgrade to App-V 5.0 SP3, follow the steps in the remaining sections of this article.
-
-
-
Required changes to packages and connection groups after upgrade
-
None. Packages and connection groups will continue to work as they currently do.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Steps to upgrade the App-V infrastructure
-
-Complete the following steps to upgrade each component of the App-V infrastructure to App-V 5.0 SP3.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Step
-
For more information
-
-
-
-
-
Step 1: Upgrade the App-V Server.
-
If you are not using the App-V Server, skip this step and go to the next step.
-
-Note
The App-V 5.0 SP3 client is compatible with the App-V 5.0 SP1 Server.
-
-
-
-### Check registry keys before installing the App-V 5.0 SP3 Server
-
-This is step 3 from the previous table.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
When this step is required
-
You are upgrading from App-V SP1 with any subsequent Hotfix Packages that you installed by using an .msp file.
-
-
-
Which components require that you do this step
-
Only the App-V Server components that you are upgrading.
-
-
-
When you need to do this step
-
Before you upgrade the App-V Server to App-V 5.0 SP3
-
-
-
What you need to do
-
Using the information in the following tables, update each registry key value under HKLM\Software\Microsoft\AppV\Server with the value that you provided in your original server installation. Completing this step restores registry values that may have been removed when App-V SP1 Hotfix Packages were installed.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**ManagementDatabase key**
-
-If you are installing the Management database, set these registry keys under `HKLM\Software\Microsoft\AppV\Server\ManagementDatabase`.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Key name
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
IS_MANAGEMENT_DB_PUBLIC_ACCESS_ACCOUNT_REQUIRED
-
Describes whether a public access account is required to access non-local management databases. Value is set to “1” if it is required.
-
-
-
MANAGEMENT_DB_NAME
-
Name of the Management database.
-
-
-
MANAGEMENT_DB_PUBLIC_ACCESS_ACCOUNT
-
Account used for read (public) access to the Management database.
-
Used when IS_MANAGEMENT_DB_PUBLIC_ACCESS_ACCOUNT_REQUIRED is set to 1.
-
-
-
MANAGEMENT_DB_PUBLIC_ACCESS_ACCOUNT_SID
-
Secure identifier (SID) of the account used for read (public) access to the Management database.
-
Used when IS_MANAGEMENT_DB_PUBLIC_ACCESS_ACCOUNT_REQUIRED is set to 1.
-
-
-
MANAGEMENT_DB_SQL_INSTANCE
-
SQL Server instance for the Management database.
-
If the value is blank, the default database instance is used.
-
-
-
MANAGEMENT_DB_WRITE_ACCESS_ACCOUNT
-
Account used for write (administrator) access to the Management database.
-
-
-
MANAGEMENT_DB_WRITE_ACCESS_ACCOUNT_SID
-
Secure identifier (SID) of the account used for write (administrator) access to the Management database.
-
-
-
MANAGEMENT_REMOTE_SERVER_MACHINE_ACCOUNT
-
Management server remote computer account (domain\account).
-
-
-
MANAGEMENT_SERVER_INSTALL_ADMIN_ACCOUNT
-
Installation administrator login for the Management server (domain\account).
-
-
-
MANAGEMENT_SERVER_MACHINE_USE_LOCAL
-
Valid values are:
-
-
1 – the Management service is on the local computer, that is, MANAGEMENT_REMOTE_SERVER_MACHINE_ACCOUNT is blank.
-
0 - the Management service is on a different computer from the local computer.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**ManagementService key**
-
-If you are installing the Management server, set these registry keys under `HKLM\Software\Microsoft\AppV\Server\ManagementService`.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Key name
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
MANAGEMENT_ADMINACCOUNT
-
Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) group or account that is authorized to manage App-V (domain\account).
-
-
-
MANAGEMENT_DB_SQL_INSTANCE
-
SQL server instance that contains the Management database.
-
If the value is blank, the default database instance is used.
-
-
-
MANAGEMENT_DB_SQL_SERVER_NAME
-
Name of the remote SQL server with the Management database.
-
If the value is blank, the local computer is used.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**ReportingDatabase key**
-
-If you are installing the Reporting database, set these registry keys under `HKLM\Software\Microsoft\AppV\Server\ReportingDatabase`.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Key name
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
IS_REPORTING_DB_PUBLIC_ACCESS_ACCOUNT_REQUIRED
-
Describes whether a public access account is required to access non-local reporting databases. Value is set to “1” if it is required.
-
-
-
REPORTING_DB_NAME
-
Name of the Reporting database.
-
-
-
REPORTING_DB_PUBLIC_ACCESS_ACCOUNT
-
Account used for read (public) access to the Reporting database.
-
Used when IS_REPORTING_DB_PUBLIC_ACCESS_ACCOUNT_REQUIRED is set to 1.
-
-
-
REPORTING_DB_PUBLIC_ACCESS_ACCOUNT_SID
-
Secure identifier (SID) of the account used for read (public) access to the Reporting database.
-
Used when IS_REPORTING_DB_PUBLIC_ACCESS_ACCOUNT_REQUIRED is set to 1.
-
-
-
REPORTING_DB_SQL_INSTANCE
-
SQL Server instance for the Reporting database.
-
If the value is blank, the default database instance is used.
-
-
-
REPORTING_DB_WRITE_ACCESS_ACCOUNT
-
-
-
-
REPORTING_DB_WRITE_ACCESS_ACCOUNT_SID
-
-
-
-
REPORTING_REMOTE_SERVER_MACHINE_ACCOUNT
-
Reporting server remote computer account (domain\account).
-
-
-
REPORTING_SERVER_INSTALL_ADMIN_ACCOUNT
-
Installation administrator login for the Reporting server (domain\account).
-
-
-
REPORTING_SERVER_MACHINE_USE_LOCAL
-
Valid values are:
-
-
1 – the Reporting service is on the local computer, that is, REPORTING_REMOTE_SERVER_MACHINE_ACCOUNT is blank.
-
0 - the Reporting service is on a different computer from the local computer.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**ReportingService key**
-
-If you are installing the Reporting server, set these registry keys under `HKLM\Software\Microsoft\AppV\Server\ReportingService`.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Key name
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
REPORTING_DB_SQL_INSTANCE
-
SQL Server instance for the Reporting database.
-
If the value is blank, the default database instance is used.
-
-
-
REPORTING_DB_SQL_SERVER_NAME
-
Name of the remote SQL server with the Reporting database.
-
If the value is blank, the local computer is used.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Manually created connection group xml file requires update to schema
-
-
-If you are manually creating the connection group XML file, and want to use the new “optional packages” and “use any version” features that are described in [Improvements to connection groups](#bkmk-cg-improvements), you must specify the following schema in the XML file:
-
-`xmlns="http://schemas.microsoft.com/appv/2014/virtualapplicationconnectiongroup"`
-
-For examples and more information, see [About the Connection Group File](about-the-connection-group-file.md).
-
-## Improvements to connection groups
-
-
-You can manage connection groups more easily by using optional packages and other improvements that have been added in App-V 5.0 SP3. The following table summarizes the tasks that you can perform by using the new connection group features, and links to more detailed information about each task.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task/feature
-
Description
-
Links to more information
-
-
-
-
-
Enable a connection group to include optional packages
-
Including optional packages in a connection group enables you to dynamically determine which applications will be included in the connection group’s virtual environment, based on the applications that users are entitled to.
-
You don’t need to manage as many connection groups because you can mix optional and non-optional packages in the same connection group. Mixing packages allows different groups of users to use the same connection group, even though users might have only one package in common.
-
Example: You can enable a package with Microsoft Office for all users, but enable different optional packages, which contain different Office plug-ins, to different subsets of users.
Unpublish or delete an optional package without changing the connection group
-
Unpublish or delete, or unpublish and republish an optional package, which is in a connection group, without having to disable or re-enable the connection group on the App-V client.
Make a connection group ignore the package version
-
Configure a connection group to accept any version of a package, which enables you to upgrade a package without having to disable the connection group. In addition, if there is an optional package with an incorrect version in the connection group, the package is ignored and won’t block the connection group’s virtual environment from being created.
Merging identical package paths into one virtual directory in connection groups
-
If two or more packages in a connection group contain identical directory paths, the paths are merged into a single virtual directory inside the connection group virtual environment.
-
This merging of paths allows an application in one package to access files that are in a different package.
-
-
-
-## Administrators can publish and unpublish packages for a specific user
-
-
-Administrators can use the following cmdlets to publish or unpublish packages for a specific user. To use the cmdlets, enter the **–UserSID** parameter, followed by the user’s security identifier (SID). For more information, see:
-
-- [How to Manage App-V 5.0 Packages Running on a Stand-Alone Computer by Using PowerShell](how-to-manage-app-v-50-packages-running-on-a-stand-alone-computer-by-using-powershell.md#bkmk-pub-pkg-a-user-standalone-posh)
-
-- [How to Manage App-V 5.0 Packages Running on a Stand-Alone Computer by Using PowerShell](how-to-manage-app-v-50-packages-running-on-a-stand-alone-computer-by-using-powershell.md#bkmk-unpub-pkg-specfc-use)
-
-
-
-
-
-## Enable only administrators to publish and unpublish packages
-
-
-You can enable only administrators (not end users) to publish and unpublish packages by using one of the following methods:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Method
-
More information
-
-
-
-
-
Group Policy setting
-
Navigate to the following Group Policy Object node:
-
-
-
-## RunVirtual registry key supports packages that are published to the user
-
-
-App-V 5.0 SP3 adds support for using the **RunVirtual** registry key with virtualized applications that are in user-published packages. The **RunVirtual** registry key lets you run a locally installed application in a virtual environment, along with applications that have been virtualized by using App-V.
-
-Previously, the virtualized applications in App-V packages had to be published globally. For more about **RunVirtual** and about other methods of running locally installed applications in a virtual environment with virtualized applications, see [Running a Locally Installed Application Inside a Virtual Environment with Virtualized Applications](running-a-locally-installed-application-inside-a-virtual-environment-with-virtualized-applications.md).
-
-## New PowerShell cmdlets and updateable cmdlet help
-
-
-New PowerShell cmdlets and updateable cmdlet help are included in App-V 5.0 SP3. To download the cmdlet modules, see [How to Load the PowerShell Cmdlets and Get Cmdlet Help](how-to-load-the-powershell-cmdlets-and-get-cmdlet-help-50-sp3.md#bkmk-load-cmdlets).
-
-### New App-V 5.0 SP3 Server PowerShell cmdlets
-
-New Windows PowerShell cmdlets for the App-V Server have been added to help you manage connection groups.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Cmdlet
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Add-AppvServerConnectionGroupPackage
-
Appends a package to the end of a connection group's package list and enables you to configure the package as optional and/or with no version within the connection group.
-
-
-
Set-AppvServerConnectionGroupPackage
-
Enables you to edit details about the connection group package, such as whether it is optional.
-
-
-
Remove-AppvServerConnectionGroupPackage
-
Removes a package from a connection group.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Getting help for the PowerShell cmdlets
-
-Cmdlet help is available in the following formats:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Format
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
As a downloadable module
-
To get the latest help after downloading the cmdlet module:
-
-
Open Windows PowerShell or Windows PowerShell Integrated Scripting Environment (ISE).
-
Type one of the following commands to load the cmdlets for the module you want:
-
-
-
-For more information, see [How to Load the PowerShell Cmdlets and Get Cmdlet Help](how-to-load-the-powershell-cmdlets-and-get-cmdlet-help-50-sp3.md).
-
-## Primary virtual application directory (PVAD) is hidden but can be turned on
-
-
-The primary virtual application directory (PVAD) is hidden in App-V 5.0 SP3, but you can turn it back on and make it visible by using one of the following methods:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Method
-
Steps
-
-
-
-
-
Use a command line parameter
-
Pass the –EnablePVADControl parameter to the Sequencer.exe.
-
-
-
Create a registry subkey
-
-
In the Registry Editor, navigate to: HKLM\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\AppV\Sequencer\Compatibility
-
-Note
If the Compatibility subkey doesn’t exist, you must create it.
-
-
-
-
-
Create a DWORD Value named EnablePVADControl, and set the value to 1.
-
A value of 0 means that PVAD is hidden.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**More about PVAD:** When you use the Sequencer to create a package, you can enter any installation path for the package. In past versions of App-V, you were required to specify the primary virtual application directory (PVAD) of the application as the path. PVAD is the directory to which you would typically install an application on your local computer if you weren’t using App-V. For example, if you were installing Office on a computer, the PVAD typically would be C:\\Program Files\\Microsoft Office\\.
-
-## ClientVersion is required to view App-V publishing metadata
-
-
-In App-V 5.0 SP3, you must provide the following values in the address when you query the App-V Publishing server for metadata:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Value
-
Additional details
-
-
-
-
-
ClientVersion
-
If you omit the ClientVersion parameter from the query, the metadata excludes the new App-V 5.0 SP3 features.
-
-
-
ClientOS
-
You have to provide this value only if you select specific client operating systems when you sequence the package. If you select the default (all operating systems), do not specify this value in the query.
-
If you omit the ClientOS parameter from the query, only the packages that were sequenced to support any operating system appear in the metadata.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-For syntax and examples of this query, see [Viewing App-V Server Publishing Metadata](viewing-app-v-server-publishing-metadata.md).
-
-## App-V event logs have been consolidated
-
-
-The following event logs, previously located at **Applications and Services Logs/Microsoft/AppV/<App-V component>**, have been moved to **Applications and Services Logs/Microsoft/AppV/ServiceLog**.
-
-To view the logs, select **View** > **Show Analytic and Debug Logs** in the Event Viewer application.
-
-Client-Catalog Client-Integration Client-Orchestration Client-PackageConfig Client-Scripting Client-Service Client-Vemgr Client-VFSC FilesystemMetadataLibrary ManifestLibrary PolicyLibrary Subsystems-ActiveX Subsystems-AppPath Subsystems-Com Subsystems-fta
-
-## How to Get MDOP Technologies
-
-
-App-V is a part of the Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack (MDOP). MDOP is part of Microsoft Software Assurance. For more information about Microsoft Software Assurance and acquiring MDOP, see [How Do I Get MDOP](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Release Notes for App-V 5.0 SP3](release-notes-for-app-v-50-sp3.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-50.md b/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-50.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a81421348c..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-50.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,113 +0,0 @@
----
-title: About App-V 5.0
-description: About App-V 5.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 5799141b-44bc-4033-afcc-212235e15f00
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# About App-V 5.0
-
-
-App-V 5.0 provides an improved integrated platform, more flexible virtualization, and powerful management for virtualized applications. For more information see the [App-V 5.0 Overview](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=325265) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=325265).
-
-## What’s new?
-
-
-The following list displays what is new with App-V 5.0:
-
-- **IT Diagnostics and Monitoring** - App-V 5.0 enhances the ability to generate reporting information about computers running the App-V 5.0 client and virtualized packages.
-
-- **End-to-End Programmability** - Leveraging PowerShell 3.0, App-V 5.0 offers a complete programmability solution for packaging, client and server operations.
-
-- **Simple and Effective Client Console** - App-V 5.0 offers a modern client console designed to simplify the top end user and Tier 1 support engineer scenarios.
-
-- **Virtual Application Extensions** - App-V 5.0 virtual application extensions enable virtual packages to run as if they are installed locally.
-
-- **Local Drive Creation** - App-V 5.0 no longer requires a dedicated local drive letter for virtual application deployment.
-
-- **Shared Content Store** – The App-V 5.0 shared content store offers similar functionality to the streaming server available in previous versions of App-V. It also requires less disk space and updates to virtual applications are available as soon as the new version is ready.
-
-- **Connection Groups** - App-V 5.0 connection groups allow you to connect and run virtual applications interactively.
-
-## Differences between App-V 4.6 and App-V 5.0
-
-
-The following table displays some of the differences between App-V 4.6 and App-V 5.0:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
App-V 4.6
-
App-V 5.0
-
-
-
-
-
Must Use a dedicated drive letter (Q:</strong>).
-
No dedicated drive letter required.
-
-
-
4 GB package size limit requirement.
-
No 4 GB package size limit requirement.
-
-
-
Virtual applications are isolated from locally installed applications.
-
Virtual applications can be extended to support local application interaction.
-
-
-
Dynamic Suite Composition enabled interaction with middleware applications.
-
Peer applications are shared using connection groups. For more information about connection groups see, Managing Connection Groups.
-
-
-
VDI/RDS environments required a read-only shared cache.
-
You can update the shared content store using the standard workflow.
-
-
-
Limited command-line scripting.
-
Supports robust PowerShell scripting for the sequencer, client, and server components.
-
-
-
-
Provides web-based management capabilities.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## How to Get MDOP Technologies
-
-
-App-V 5.0 is a part of the Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack (MDOP). MDOP is part of Microsoft Software Assurance. For more information about Microsoft Software Assurance and acquiring MDOP, see [How Do I Get MDOP](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Getting Started with App-V 5.0](getting-started-with-app-v-50--rtm.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-51-dynamic-configuration.md b/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-51-dynamic-configuration.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 663c596d68..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-51-dynamic-configuration.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,953 +0,0 @@
----
-title: About App-V 5.1 dynamic configuration
-description: You can use the dynamic configuration to customize an App-V 5.1 package for a user. Use the following information to create or edit an existing dynamic configuration file.
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 35bc9908-d502-4a9c-873f-8ee17b6d9d74
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/28/2018
-ms.author: dansimp
----
-
-# About App-V 5.1 dynamic configuration
-With dynamic configuration, you can edit the dynamic configuration file to customize how an App-V 5.1 package runs for a user or group. Package customization removes the need to resequence packages using the desired settings. It also provides a way to keep package content and custom settings independent.
-
-Virtual application packages contain a manifest that provides all the core information for the package. This information includes the defaults for the package settings and determines settings in the most basic form (with no additional customization).
-
-When a package gets created, the sequencer generates default deployment and user configuration .xml files automatically using the package manifest data. Therefore, these generated files reflect the default settings configured during sequencing. If you apply these files to a package in the form generated by the sequencer, the packages have the same default settings that came from their manifest.
-
-Use these generated files to make changes, if necessary, which doesn’t directly affect the package. If you want to add, delete or update the configuration files, make your changes about the default values in the manifest information.
-
->[!TIP]
->The order in which the files read are:
UserConfig.xml
DeploymentConfig.xml
Manifest
The first entry represents what gets read last. Therefore, its content takes precedence, and all packages inherently contain and provide default settings from the package manifest.
If customizing the DeploymentConfig.xml file and apply the customized settings, the default settings in the package manifest get overridden.
If customizing the UserConfig.xml and apply the customized settings, the default settings for both the deployment configuration and the package manifest get overridden.
-
-## User configuration file contents (UserConfig.xml)
-The UserConfig file provides configuration settings that get applied for a specific user when deploying the package to a computer running the App-V 5.1 client. These settings don’t affect any other users on the client.
-
-Use the UserConfig file to specify or modify custom settings for a package:
-
-- Extensions integrated into the native system per user: shortcuts, file-type associations, URL protocols, AppPaths, software clients and COM
-- Virtual subsystems: application objects, environment variables, registry modifications, services and fonts
-- Scripts (user context only)
-- Managing authority (for controlling co-existence of package with App-V 4.6)
-
-### Header
-
-The header of a dynamic user configuration file looks like:
-
-```xml
-
-```
-
-The **PackageId** is the same value as exists in the manifest file.
-
-
-### Body
-
-The body of the dynamic user configuration file can include all the app extension points defined in the manifest file, as well as information to configure virtual applications. There are four subsections allowed in the body:
-
-1. **[Applications](#applications)**
-2. **[Subsystems](#subsystems)**
-3. **[UserScripts](#userscripts)**
-4. **[ManagingAuthority](#managingauthority)**
-
-#### Applications
-
-All app-extensions contained in the manifest file within a package have an Application ID assigned, which you find in the manifest file. The Application ID lets you enable or disable all extensions for a given application within a package. The Application ID must exist in the manifest file, or it gets ignored.
-
-```XML
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-..
-
-
-```
-
-#### Subsystems
-
-AppExtensions and other subsystems arranged as subnodes.
-
-```XML
-
-
-
-
-..
-
-
-
-..
-
-
-```
-
-You can enable or disable each subsystem using the **Enabled** attribute.
-
-**Extensions**
-
-Some subsystems (extension subsystems) control extensions. Those subsystems are Shortcuts, File-Type associations, URL Protocols, AppPaths, Software Clients, and COM.
-
-Extension subsystems can be enabled and disabled independently of the content. For example, if you enable Shortcuts, the client uses the Shortcuts contained within the manifest by default. Each extension subsystem can contain an \ node. If this child element is present, the client ignores the content in the manifest file for that subsystem and only use the content in the configuration file.
-
-_**Examples:**_
-
-- If you define this in either the user or deployment config file, the content in the manifest gets ignored.
-
- ```XML
-
-
-
-
-
- ...
-
-
-
-
- ```
-- If you define only the following, the content in the manifest gets integrated during publishing.
-
- ```XML
-
-
- ```
-
-- If you define the following, all Shortcuts within the manifest still get ignored. In other words, no Shortcuts get integrated.
-
- ```XML
-
-
-
-
-
-
- ```
-
-_**Supported extension subsystems:**_
-
-**Shortcuts** extension subsystem controls what shortcuts get integrated into the local system.
-
-```XML
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- [{Common Programs}]\Microsoft Contoso\Microsoft ContosoApp Filler 2010.lnk
-
- [{PackageRoot}]\Contoso\ContosoApp.EXE
-
-
- [{Windows}]\Installer\{90140000-0011-0000-0000-0000000FF1CE}\inficon.exe
-
-
-
-
-
- ContosoApp.Filler.3
-
- Fill out dynamic forms to gather and reuse information throughout the organization using Microsoft ContosoApp.
-
- 0
-
- 1
-
- [{PackageRoot}]\Contoso\ContosoApp.EXE
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- [{AppData}]\Microsoft\Contoso\Recent\Templates.LNK
-
- [{AppData}]\Microsoft\Templates
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- 0
-
- 1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-**File-Type Associates** extension subsystem associates file types with programs to open by default as well as set up the context menu.
-
->[!TIP]
->You can set up the subsystem with MIME types.
-
-```XML
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- .docm
-
- contosowordpad.DocumentMacroEnabled.12
-
- document
-
- application/vnd.ms-contosowordpad.document.macroEnabled.12
-
-
-
- wincontosowordpad.exe
-
-
-
-
-
- contosowordpad.8
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- true
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- contosowordpad.DocumentMacroEnabled.12
-
- [{Windows}]\Installer\{90140000-0011-0000-0000-000000FF1CE}\contosowordpadicon.exe,15
-
- Blah Blah Blah
-
- [{FOLDERID_ProgramFilesX86}]\Microsoft Contoso 14\res.dll,9182
-
- [{FOLDERID_ProgramFilesX86}]\Microsoft Contoso 14\res.dll,1424
-
- 0
-
-
-
- Open
-
-
-
- {e56fa627-c35f-4a01-9e79-7d36aed8225a}
-
- Edit
-
- &Edit
-
- "[{PackageRoot}]\Contoso\WINcontosowordpad.EXE" /vu "%1"
-
-
-
-
-
- {e56fa627-c35f-4a01-9e79-7d36aed8225a}
-
- Open
-
- &Open
-
- "[{PackageRoot}]\Contoso\WINcontosowordpad.EXE" /n "%1"
-
-
-
-
-
- mscontosowordpad
-
- ShellSystem
-
- [SHELLNOOP]
-
- [SetForeground][ShellNewDatabase"%1"]
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-**URL Protocols** extension subsystem controls the URL protocols integrated into the local registry of the client machine, for example, _mailto:_.
-
-```XML
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- mailto
-
-
-
- [{ProgramFilesX86}]\MicrosoftContoso\Contoso\contosomail.EXE,-9403
-
- 2
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- 2
-
-
-
-
-
- open
-
-
-
- [{ProgramFilesX86}]\Microsoft Contoso\Contoso\contosomail.EXE
-
- open
-
- [{ProgramFilesX86}\Microsoft Contoso\Contoso\contosomail.EXE" -c OEP.Note /m "%1"
-
-
-
-
-
- 0
-
- 0
-
- 2
-
-
-
-
-
- contosomail
-
- ShellSystem
-
- [SHELLNOOP]
-
- [SetForeground][ShellNewDatabase "%1"]
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-**Software Clients** extension subsystem allows the app to register as an email client, news reader, media player and makes the app visible in the Set program access and Computer defaults UI. In most cases, you should only need to enable and disable it. There is also a control to enable and disable the email client specifically if you want the other clients still enabled except for that client.
-
-```XML
-
-
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-**AppPaths** extension subsystem opens apps registered with an application path. For example, if contoso.exe has an apppath name of _myapp_, users can type _myapp_ from the run menu, opening contoso.exe.
-
-```XML
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- [{ProgramFilesX86}]\Microsoft Contoso\Contoso\contosomail.EXE
-
- contosomail.exe
-
- [{ProgramFilesX86}]\Microsoft Contoso\Contoso\contosomail.EXE
-
-
-
- false
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-**COM** extensions subsystem allows an application registered to local COM servers. The mode can be:
-
-- Integration
-- Isolated
-- Off
-
-```XML
-
-
-```
-
-**Virtual Kernel Objects**
-
-```XML
-
-
-```
-
-**Virtual Registry** sets a registry in the virtual registry within HKCU.
-
-```XML
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-**Virtual File System**
-
-```XML
-
-
-```
-
-**Virtual Fonts**
-
-```XML
-
-
-```
-
-**Virtual Environment Variables**
-
-```XML
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-**Virtual services**
-
-```XML
-
-
-```
-
-#### UserScripts
-
-Use UserScripts to set up or alter the virtual environment. You can also execute scripts at the time of deployment or to clean up the environment after the application terminates. To see a sample script, refer to the user configuration file generated by the sequencer.
-The Scripts section below provides more information on the various triggers that can be used.
-
-#### ManagingAuthority
-
-Use ManagingAuthority when two versions of your package co-exist on the same machine, one deployed to App-V 4.6 and another deployed on App-V 5.0. To allow App-V vNext to take over App-V 4.6 extension points for the named package enter the following in the UserConfig file (where PackageName is the Package GUID in App-V 4.6:
-
-```XML
-
-
-```
-
-## Deployment configuration file (DeploymentConfig.xml)
-
-The DeploymentConfig file provides configuration settings for machine context and user context, providing the same capabilities listed in the UserConfig file. The setting get applied when deploying the package to a computer running the App-V 5.1 client.
-
-Use the DeploymentConfig file to specify or modify custom settings for a package:
-
-- All UserConfig settings
-- Extensions that can only be applied globally for all users
-- Virtual subsystems for global machine locations, for example, registry
-- Product source URL
-- Scripts (machine context only)
-- Controls to terminate child processes
-
-### Header
-
-The header of a dynamic deployment configuration file looks like:
-
-```XML
-
-```
-
-The **PackageId** is the same value as exists in the manifest file.
-
-### Body
-
-The body of the dynamic deployment configuration file includes two sections:
-
-- **UserConfiguration:** allows the same content as the user configuration file described in the previous section. When publishing the package to a user, any appextensions configuration settings in this section override corresponding settings in the manifest within the package, unless you provide a user configuration file. If also providing a UserConfig file, it gets used instead of the User settings in the deployment configuration file. If publishing the package globally, then only the contents of the deployment configuration file get used in combination with the manifest. For more details, see [User configuration file contents (UserConfig.xml)](#user-configuration-file-contents-userconfigxml).
-
-- **MachineConfiguration:** contains information that can be configured only for an entire machine, not for a specific user on the machine. For example, HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE registry keys in the VFS.
-
-```XML
-
-
-
-
-
-...
-
-
-
-
-
-...
-
-
-
-...
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-### UserConfiguration
-
-Refer to [User configuration file contents (UserConfig.xml)](#user-configuration-file-contents-userconfigxml) for information on the settings provided for this section.
-
-### MachineConfiguration
-
-Use the MachineConfiguration section to configure information for an entire machine; not for a specific user on the computer. For example, HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE registry keys in the virtual registry. There are four subsections allowed in under this element:
-
-1. **[Subsystems](#subsystems-1)**
-2. **[ProductSourceURLOptOut](#productsourceurloptout)**
-3. **[MachineScripts](#machinescripts)**
-4. **[TerminateChildProcess](#terminatechildprocess)**
-
-#### Subsystems
-
-AppExtensions and other subsystems arranged as subnodes.
-
-```XML
-
-
-
-
-
- …
-
-
-
-…
-
-
-```
-
-You can enable or disable each subsystem using the **Enabled** attribute.
-
-**Extensions**
-
-Some subsystems (extension subsystems) control extensions. The subsystem is Application Capabilities that default programs use. For this type of extension, the package must be published globally for integration into the local system. The same rules for controls and settings that apply to the Extensions in the User Configuration also, apply to those in the MachineConfiguration section.
-
-**Application Capabilities**: Used by default programs that allow an application to register itself as:
-
-- Capable of opening specific file extensions
-- A contender for the start menu internet browser slot
-- Capable of opening specific windows MIME types
-
-This extension also makes the virtual application visible in the Set default programs UI.
-
-```XML
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- [{PackageRoot}]\LitView\LitViewBrowser.exe
-
-
-
- LitView Browser
-
- SOFTWARE\LitView\Browser\Capabilities
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- @[{ProgramFilesX86}]\LitView\LitViewBrowser.exe,-12345
-
-
- @[{ProgramFilesX86}]\LitView\LitViewBrowser.exe,-12346
-
- 0
-
- Lit View E-Mail Client
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-_**Supported extension subsystems:**_
-
-**Machine Wide Virtual Registry** extension subsystem sets a registry key in the virtual registry within HKEY_Local_Machine.
-
-```XML
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-**Machine Wide Virtual Kernel Objects**
-
-```XML
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-#### ProductSourceURLOptOut
-
-Use ProductSourceURLOptOut to indicate that the URL for the package can be modified globally through _PackageSourceRoot_ (to support branch office scenarios). Changes take effect on the next launch.
-
-```XML
-
-
-
- ...
-
-
-
- ...
-
-
-```
-
-#### MachineScripts
-
-The package can be configured to execute scripts at time of deployment, publishing or removal. To see a sample script, refer to the deployment configuration file generated by the sequencer.
-
-The Scripts section below provides more information on the various triggers that can be used.
-
-#### TerminateChildProcess
-
-An application executable can be specified, whose child processes get terminated when the application exe process terminates.
-
-```XML
-
-
-
- ...
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- ...
-
-
-```
-
-
-
-## Scripts
-
-The following table describes the various script events and the context under which they can be run.
-
-| Script Execution Time | Can be specified in Deployment Configuration | Can be specified in User Configuration | Can run in the Virtual Environment of the package | Can be run in the context of a specific application | Runs in system/user context: (Deployment Configuration, User Configuration) |
-|-----------------------------|----------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| AddPackage | X | | | | (SYSTEM, N/A) |
-| PublishPackage | X | X | | | (SYSTEM, User) |
-| UnpublishPackage | X | X | | | (SYSTEM, User) |
-| RemovePackage | X | | | | (SYSTEM, N/A) |
-| StartProcess | X | X | X | X | (User, User) |
-| ExitProcess | X | X | | X | (User, User) |
-| StartVirtualEnvironment | X | X | X | | (User, User) |
-| TerminateVirtualEnvironment | X | X | | | (User, User) |
-
-### Using multiple scripts on a single event trigger
-
-App-V 5.1 supports the use of multiple scripts on a single event trigger for
-App-V packages, including packages that you convert from App-V 4.6 to App-V 5.0
-or later. To enable the use of multiple scripts, App-V 5.1 uses a script
-launcher application, named ScriptRunner.exe, which is installed as part of the
-App-V client installation.
-
-### How to use multiple scripts on a single event trigger
-
-For each script that you want to run, pass that script as an argument to the
-ScriptRunner.exe application. The application then runs each script separately,
-along with the arguments that you specify for each script. Use only one script
-(ScriptRunner.exe) per trigger.
-
-> [!NOTE]
->
-> We recommended that you run the multi-script line from a command prompt
-> first to make sure that all arguments are built correctly before adding them to
-> the deployment configuration file.
-
-### Example script and parameter descriptions
-
-Using the following example file and table, modify the deployment or user
-configuration file to add the scripts that you want to run.
-
-```XML
-
-
- ScriptRunner.exe
-
- -appvscript script1.exe arg1 arg2 –appvscriptrunnerparameters –wait –timeout=10
- -appvscript script2.vbs arg1 arg2
- -appvscript script3.bat arg1 arg2 –appvscriptrunnerparameters –wait –timeout=30 –rollbackonerror
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-
-**Parameters in the example file include:**
-
-#### \
-
-Name of the event trigger for which you are running a script, such as adding a package or publishing a package.
-
-#### \ScriptRunner.exe\
-
-The script launcher application that is installed as part of the App-V client installation.
-
-> [!NOTE]
->
-> Although ScriptRunner.exe is installed as part of the App-V client, the location of the App-V client must be in %path% or ScriptRunner will not run. ScriptRunner.exe is typically located in the C:FilesApplication Virtualizationfolder.
-
-#### \
-
-`-appvscript` - Token that represents the actual script that you want to run.
-
-`script1.exe` – Name of the script that you want to run.
-
-`arg1 arg2` – Arguments for the script that you want to run.
-
-`-appvscriptrunnerparameters` – Token that represents the execution options for script1.exe.
-
-`-wait` – Token that informs ScriptRunner to wait for execution of script1.exe to complete before proceeding to the next script.
-
-`-timeout=x` – Token that informs ScriptRunner to stop running the current script after x number of seconds. All other specified scripts still runs.
-
-`-rollbackonerror` – Token that informs ScriptRunner to stop running all scripts that haven't yet run and to roll back an error to the App-V client.
-
-#### \
-
-Waits for overall completion of ScriptRunner.exe.
-
-Set the timeout value for the overall runner to be greater than or equal to the sum of the timeout values on the individual scripts.
-
-If any individual script reported an error and rollbackonerror was set to true, then ScriptRunner would report the error to App-V client.
-
-ScriptRunner runs any script whose file type is associated with an application installed on the computer. If the associated application is missing, or the script’s file type is not associated with any application on the computer, the script does not run.
-
-### Create a dynamic configuration file using an App-V 5.1 manifest file
-
-You can create the dynamic configuration file using one of three methods: either manually, using the App-V 5.1 Management Console or sequencing a package, which generates two sample files. For more information about how to create the file using the App-V 5.1 Management Console see, [How to create a custom configuration File by using the App-V 5.1 Management Console](how-to-create-a-custom-configuration-file-by-using-the-app-v-51-management-console.md).
-
-To create the file manually, the information above in previous sections can be combined into a single file. We recommend you use files generated by the sequencer.
-
-
-
-- Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization).
-- For App-V issues, use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-- [How to Apply the Deployment Configuration File by Using PowerShell](how-to-apply-the-deployment-configuration-file-by-using-powershell51.md)
-
-- [How to Apply the User Configuration File by Using PowerShell](how-to-apply-the-user-configuration-file-by-using-powershell51.md)
-
-- [Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
----
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-51-reporting.md b/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-51-reporting.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b37f88f1db..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-51-reporting.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,327 +0,0 @@
----
-title: About App-V 5.1 Reporting
-description: About App-V 5.1 Reporting
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 385dca00-7178-4e35-8d86-c58867ebd65c
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# About App-V 5.1 Reporting
-
-
-Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 includes a built-in reporting feature that helps you collect information about computers running the App-V 5.1 client as well as information about virtual application package usage. You can use this information to generate reports from a centralized database.
-
-## App-V 5.1 Reporting Overview
-
-
-The following list displays the end–to-end high-level workflow for reporting in App-V 5.1.
-
-1. The App-V 5.1 Reporting server has the following prerequisites:
-
- - Internet Information Service (IIS) web server role
-
- - Windows Authentication role (under **IIS / Security**)
-
- - SQL Server installed and running with SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS)
-
- To confirm SQL Server Reporting Services is running, view `http://localhost/Reports` in a web browser as administrator on the server that will host App-V 5.1 Reporting. The SQL Server Reporting Services Home page should display.
-
-2. Install the App-V 5.1 reporting server and associated database. For more information about installing the reporting server see [How to install the Reporting Server on a Standalone Computer and Connect it to the Database](how-to-install-the-reporting-server-on-a-standalone-computer-and-connect-it-to-the-database51.md). Configure the time when the computer running the App-V 5.1 client should send data to the reporting server.
-
-3. If you are not using an electronic software distribution system such as Configuration Manager to view reports then you can define reports in SQL Server Reporting Service. Download predefined appvshort Reports from the Download Center at .
-
- **Note**
- If you are using the Configuration Manager integration with App-V 5.1, most reports are generated from Configuration Manager rather than from App-V 5.1.
-
-
-
-4. After importing the App-V 5.1 PowerShell module using `Import-Module AppvClient` as administrator, enable the App-V 5.1 client. This sample PowerShell cmdlet enables App-V 5.1 reporting:
-
- ``` syntax
- Set-AppvClientConfiguration –reportingserverurl : -reportingenabled 1 – ReportingStartTime <0-23> - ReportingRandomDelay <#min>
- ```
-
- To immediately send App-V 5.1 report data, run `Send-AppvClientReport` on the App-V 5.1 client.
-
- For more information about installing the App-V 5.1 client with reporting enabled see [About Client Configuration Settings](about-client-configuration-settings51.md). To administer App-V 5.1 Reporting with Windows PowerShell, see [How to Enable Reporting on the App-V 5.1 Client by Using PowerShell](how-to-enable-reporting-on-the-app-v-51-client-by-using-powershell.md).
-
-5. After the reporting server receives the data from the App-V 5.1 client it sends the data to the reporting database. When the database receives and processes the client data, a successful reply is sent to the reporting server and then a notification is sent to the App-V 5.1 client.
-
-6. When the App-V 5.1 client receives the success notification, it empties the data cache to conserve space.
-
- **Note**
- By default the cache is cleared after the server confirms receipt of data. You can manually configure the client to save the data cache.
-
-
-
-~~~
-If the App-V 5.1 client device does not receive a success notification from the server, it retains data in the cache and tries to resend data at the next configured interval. Clients continue to collect data and add it to the cache.
-~~~
-
-### App-V 5.1 reporting server frequently asked questions
-
-The following table displays answers to common questions about App-V 5.1 reporting
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Question
-
More Information
-
-
-
-
-
What is the frequency that reporting information is sent to the reporting database?
-
The frequency depends on how the reporting task is configured on the computer running the App-V 5.1 client. You must configure the frequency / interval for sending the reporting data. App-V 5.1 Reporting is not enabled by default.
-
-
-
What information is stored in the reporting server database?
-
The following list displays what is stored in the reporting database:
-
-
The operating system running on the computer running the App-V 5.1 client: host name, version, service pack, type - client/server, processor architecture.
-
App-V 5.1 Client information: version.
-
Published package list: GUID, version GUID, name.
-
Application usage information: name, version, streaming server, user (domain\alias), package version GUID, launch status and time, shutdown time.
-
-
-
-
What is the average volume of information that is sent to the reporting server?
-
It depends. The following list displays the three sets of the data sent to the reporting server:
-
-
Operating system, and App-V 5.1 client information. ~150 Bytes, every time this data is sent.
-
Published package list. ~7 KB for 30 packages. This is sent only when the package list is updated with a publishing refresh, which is done infrequently; if there is no change, this information is not sent.
-
Virtual application usage information – about 0.25KB per event. Opening and closing count as one event if both occur before sending the information. When sending using a scheduled task, only the data since the last successful upload is sent to the server. If sending manually through the PowerShell cmdlet, there is an optional argument that controls if the data needs to be re-sent next time around – that argument is DeleteOnSuccess.
-
-
So for example, if twenty applications are opened and closed and reporting information is scheduled to be sent daily, the typical daily traffic should be about 0.15KB + 20 x 0.25KB, or about 5KB/user
-
-
-
-
Can reporting be scheduled?
-
Yes. Besides manually sending reporting using PowerShell Cmdlets (Send-AppvClientReport), the task can be scheduled so it will happen automatically. There are two ways to schedule the reporting:
-
-
Using PowerShell cmdlets - Set-AppvClientConfiguration. For example:
For a complete list of client configuration settings see About Client Configuration Settings and look for the following entries: ReportingEnabled, ReportingServerURL, ReportingDataCacheLimit, ReportingDataBlockSize, ReportingStartTime, ReportingRandomDelay, ReportingInterval.
-
-
By using Group Policy. If distributed using the domain controller, the settings are the same as previously listed.
-
-Note
Group Policy settings override local settings configured using PowerShell.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## App-V 5.1 Client Reporting
-
-
-To use App-V 5.1 reporting you must install and configure the App-V 5.1 client. After the client has been installed, use the **Set-AppVClientConfiguration** PowerShell cmdlet or the **ADMX Template** to configure reporting. The reporting feature cmdlets are available by using the following link and are prefaced by **Reporting**. For a complete list of client configuration settings see [About Client Configuration Settings](about-client-configuration-settings51.md). The following section provides examples of App-V 5.1 client reporting configuration using PowerShell.
-
-### Configuring App-V Client reporting using PowerShell
-
-The following examples show how PowerShell parameters can configure the reporting features of the App-V 5.1 client.
-
-**Note**
-The following configuration task can also be configured using Group Policy settings in the App-V 5.1 ADMX template. For more information about using the ADMX template, see [How to Modify App-V 5.1 Client Configuration Using the ADMX Template and Group Policy](how-to-modify-app-v-51-client-configuration-using-the-admx-template-and-group-policy.md).
-
-
-
-**To enable reporting and to initiate data collection on the computer running the App-V 5.1 client**:
-
-`Set-AppVClientConfiguration –ReportingEnabled 1`
-
-**To configure the client to automatically send data to a specific reporting server**:
-
-``` syntax
-Set-AppVClientConfiguration –ReportingServerURL http://MyReportingServer:MyPort/ -ReportingStartTime 20 -ReportingInterval 1 -ReportingRandomDelay 30
-```
-
-`-ReportingInterval 1 -ReportingRandomDelay 30`
-
-This example configures the client to automatically send the reporting data to the reporting server URL http://MyReportingServer:MyPort/. Additionally, the reporting data will be sent daily between 8:00 and 8:30 PM, depending on the random delay generated for the session.
-
-**To limit the size of the data cache on the client**:
-
-`Set-AppvClientConfiguration –ReportingDataCacheLimit 100`
-
-Configures the maximum size of the reporting cache on the computer running the App-V 5.1 client to 100 MB. If the cache limit is reached before the data is sent to the server, then the log rolls over and data will be overwritten as necessary.
-
-**To configure the data block size transmitted across the network between the client and the server**:
-
-`Set-AppvClientConfiguration –ReportingDataBlockSize 10240`
-
-Specifies the maximum data block that the client sends to 10240 MB.
-
-### Types of data collected
-
-The following table displays the types of information you can collect by using App-V 5.1 reporting.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Client Information
-
Package Information
-
Application Usage
-
-
-
-
-
Host Name
-
Package Name
-
Start and End Times
-
-
-
App-V 5.1 Client Version
-
Package Version
-
Run Status
-
-
-
Processor Architecture
-
Package Source
-
Shutdown State
-
-
-
Operating System Version
-
Percent Cached
-
Application Name
-
-
-
Service Pack Level
-
-
Application Version
-
-
-
Operating System Type
-
-
Username
-
-
-
-
-
Connection Group
-
-
-
-
-
-
-The client collects and saves this data in an **.xml** format. The data cache is hidden by default and requires administrator rights to open the XML file.
-
-### Sending data to the server
-
-You can configure the computer that is running the App-V 5.1 client to automatically send data to the specified reporting server. To specify the server use the **Set-AppvClientConfiguration** cmdlet with the following settings:
-
-- ReportingEnabled
-
-- ReportingServerURL
-
-- ReportingStartTime
-
-- ReportingInterval
-
-- ReportingRandomDelay
-
-After you configure the previous settings, you must create a scheduled task. The scheduled task will contact the server specified by the **ReportingServerURL** setting and will initiate the transfer. If you want to manually send data outside of the scheduled times, use the following PowerShell cmdlet:
-
-`Send-AppVClientReport –URL http://MyReportingServer:MyPort/ -DeleteOnSuccess`
-
-If the reporting server has been previously configured, then the **–URL** parameter can be omitted. Alternatively, if the data should be sent to an alternate location, specify a different URL to override the configured **ReportingServerURL** for this data collection.
-
-The **-DeleteOnSuccess** parameter indicates that if the transfer is successful, then the data cache is cleared. If this is not specified, then the cache will not be cleared.
-
-### Manual Data Collection
-
-You can also use the **Send-AppVClientReport** cmdlet to manually collect data. This solution is helpful with or without an existing reporting server. The following list displays information about collecting data with or without a reporting server.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
With a Reporting Server
-
Without a Reporting Server
-
-
-
-
-
If you have an existing App-V 5.1 reporting Server, create a customized scheduled task or script. Specify that the client send the data to the specified location with the desired frequency.
-
If you do not have an existing App-V 5.1 reporting Server, use the –URL parameter to send the data to a specified share. For example:
The previous example will send the reporting data to \MyShare\MyData</strong> location indicated by the -URL parameter. After the data has been sent, the cache is cleared.
-
-Note
If a location other than the Reporting Server is specified, the data is sent using .xml format with no additional processing.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Creating Reports
-
-To retrieve report information and create reports using App-V 5.1 you must use one of the following methods:
-
-- **Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS)** - Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services is available with Microsoft SQL Server. SSRS is not installed when you install the App-V 5.1 reporting server. It must be deployed separately to generate the associated reports.
-
- Use the following link for more information about using [Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=285596).
-
-- **Scripting** – You can generate reports by scripting directly against the App-V 5.1 reporting database. For example:
-
- **Stored Procedure:**
-
- **spProcessClientReport** is scheduled to run at midnight or 12:00 AM.
-
- To run the Microsoft SQL Server Scheduled Stored procedure, the Microsoft SQL Server Agent must be running. You should ensure that the Microsoft SQL Server Agent is set to **AutoStart**. For more information see [Autostart SQL Server Agent (SQL Server Management Studio)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=287045).
-
- The stored procedure is also created when using the App-V 5.1 database scripts.
-
-You should also ensure that the reporting server web service’s **Maximum Concurrent Connections** is set to a value that the server will be able to manage without impacting availability. The recommended number of **Maximum Concurrent Connections** for the **Reporting Web Service** is **10,000**.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the App-V 5.1 Server](deploying-the-app-v-51-server.md)
-
-[How to install the Reporting Server on a Standalone Computer and Connect it to the Database](how-to-install-the-reporting-server-on-a-standalone-computer-and-connect-it-to-the-database51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f52bcf1b64..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/about-app-v-51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,527 +0,0 @@
----
-title: About App-V 5.1
-description: About App-V 5.1
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 35bc9908-d502-4a9c-873f-8ee17b6d9d74
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# About App-V 5.1
-
-
-Use the following sections to review information about significant changes that apply to Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1:
-
-[App-V 5.1 software prerequisites and supported configurations](#bkmk-51-prereq-configs)
-
-[Migrating to App-V 5.1](#bkmk-migrate-to-51)
-
-[What’s New in App-V 5.1](#bkmk-whatsnew)
-
-[App-V support for Windows 10](#bkmk-win10support)
-
-[App-V Management Console Changes](#bkmk-mgmtconsole)
-
-[Sequencer Improvements](#bkmk-seqimprove)
-
-[Improvements to Package Converter](#bkmk-pkgconvimprove)
-
-[Support for multiple scripts on a single event trigger](#bkmk-supmultscripts)
-
-[Hardcoded path to installation folder is redirected to virtual file system root](#bkmk-hardcodepath)
-
-## App-V 5.1 software prerequisites and supported configurations
-
-
-See the following links for the App-V 5.1 software prerequisites and supported configurations.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Links to prerequisites and supported configurations
Supported operating systems and hardware requirements for the App-V Server, Sequencer, and Client components
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Support for using Configuration Manager with App-V:** App-V 5.1 supports System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager SP1. See [Planning for App-V Integration with Configuration Manager](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/jj822982.aspx) for information about integrating your App-V environment with Configuration Manager and Configuration Manager.
-
-## Migrating to App-V 5.1
-
-
-Use the following information to upgrade to App-V 5.1 from earlier versions. See [Migrating to App-V 5.1 from a Previous Version](migrating-to-app-v-51-from-a-previous-version.md) for more information.
-
-### Before you start the upgrade
-
-Review the following information before you start the upgrade:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Items to review before upgrading
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Components to upgrade, in any order
-
-
App-V Server
-
Sequencer
-
App-V Client or App-V Remote Desktop Services (RDS) Client
-
-
-Note
Prior to App-V 5.0 SP2, the Client Management User Interface (UI) was provided with the App-V Client installation. For App-V 5.0 SP2 installations (or later), you can use the Client Management UI by downloading from Application Virtualization 5.0 Client UI Application.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Upgrading from App-V 4.x
-
You must first upgrade to App-V 5.0. You cannot upgrade directly from App-V 4.x to App-V 5.1. For more information, see:
-
-
“Differences between App-V 4.6 and App-V 5.0” in About App-V 5.0
You can upgrade to App-V 5.1 directly from any of the following versions:
-
-
App-V 5.0
-
App-V 5.0 SP1
-
App-V 5.0 SP2
-
App-V 5.0 SP3
-
-
To upgrade to App-V 5.1, follow the steps in the remaining sections of this topic.
-
Packages and connection groups will continue to work with App-V 5.1 as they currently do.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Steps to upgrade the App-V infrastructure
-
-Complete the following steps to upgrade each component of the App-V infrastructure to App-V 5.1. The following order is only a suggestion; you may upgrade components in any order.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Step
-
For more information
-
-
-
-
-
Step 1: Upgrade the App-V Server.
-
-Note
If you are not using the App-V Server, skip this step and go to the next step.
-
-
-
-
-
Follow these steps:
-
-
Do one of the following, depending on the method you are using to upgrade the Management database and/or Reporting database:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Database upgrade method
-
Step
-
-
-
-
-
Windows Installer
-
Skip this step and go to step 2, “If you are upgrading the App-V Server...”
-
-
-
-### Converting packages created using a prior version of App-V
-
-Use the package converter utility to upgrade virtual application packages created using versions of App-V prior to App-V 5.0. The package converter uses PowerShell to convert packages and can help automate the process if you have many packages that require conversion.
-
-**Note**
-App-V 5.1 packages are exactly the same as App-V 5.0 packages. There has been no change in the package format between the versions and so there is no need to convert App-V 5.0 packages to App-V 5.1 packages.
-
-
-
-## What’s New in App-V 5.1
-
-
-These sections are for users who are already familiar with App-V and want to know what has changed in App-V 5.1. If you are not already familiar with App-V, you should start by reading [Planning for App-V 5.1](planning-for-app-v-51.md).
-
-### App-V support for Windows 10
-
-The following table lists the Windows 10 support for App-V. Windows 10 is not supported in versions of App-V prior to App-V 5.1.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Component
-
App-V 5.1
-
App-V 5.0
-
-
-
-
-
App-V Client
-
Yes
-
No
-
-
-
App-V RDS Client
-
Yes
-
No
-
-
-
App-V Sequencer
-
Yes
-
No
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### App-V Management Console Changes
-
-This section compares the App-V Management Console’s current and previous functionality.
-
-### Silverlight is no longer required
-
-The Management Console UI no longer requires Silverlight. The 5.1 Management Console is built on HTML5 and Javascript.
-
-### Notifications and messages are displayed individually in a dialog box
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
New in App-V 5.1
-
Prior to App-V 5.1
-
-
-
-
-
Number of messages indicator:
-
On the title bar of the App-V Management Console, a number is now displayed next to a flag icon to indicate the number of messages that are waiting to be read.
-
You could see only one message or error at a time, and you were unable to determine how many messages there were.
-
-
-
Message appearance:
-
-
Messages that require user input appear in a separate dialog box that displays on top of the current page that you were viewing, and require a response before you can dismiss them.
-
Messages and errors appear in a list, with one beneath the other.
-
-
You could see only one message or error at a time.
-
-
-
Dismissing messages:
-
Use the Dismiss All link to dismiss all messages and errors at one time, or dismiss them one at a time.
-
You could dismiss messages and errors only one at a time.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Console pages are now separate URLs
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
New in App-V 5.1
-
Prior to App-V 5.1
-
-
-
-
-
Each page in the console has a different URL, which enables you to bookmark specific pages for quick access in the future.
-
The number that appears in some URLs indicates the specific package. These numbers are unique.
-
All console pages are accessed through the same URL.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### New, separate CONNECTION GROUPS page and menu option
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
New in App-V 5.1
-
Prior to App-V 5.1
-
-
-
-
-
The CONNECTION GROUPS page is now part of the main menu, at the same level as the PACKAGES page.
-
To open the CONNECTION GROUPS page, you navigate through the PACKAGES page.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Menu options for packages have changed
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
New in App-V 5.1
-
Prior to App-V 5.1
-
-
-
-
-
The following options are now buttons that appear at the bottom of the PACKAGES page:
-
-
Add or Upgrade
-
Publish
-
Unpublish
-
Delete
-
-
The following options will still appear when you right-click a package to open the drop-down context menu:
-
-
Publish
-
Unpublish
-
Edit AD Access
-
Edit Deployment Config
-
Transfer deployment configuration from…
-
Transfer access and configuration from…
-
Delete
-
-
When you click Delete to remove a package, a dialog box opens and asks you to confirm that you want to delete the package.
-
The Add or Upgrade option was a button at the top right of the PACKAGES page.
-
The Publish, Unpublish, and Delete options were available only if you right-clicked a package name in the packages list.
-
-
-
The following package operations are now buttons on the package details page for each package:
-
-
Transfer (drop-down menu with the following options):
-
-
Transfer deployment configuration from…
-
Transfer access and configuration from…
-
-
Edit (connection groups and AD Access)
-
Unpublish
-
Delete
-
Edit Default Configuration
-
-
These package options were available only if you right-clicked a package name in the packages list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Icons in left pane have new colors and text
-
-The colors of the icons in the left pane have been changed, and text added, to make the icons consistent with other Microsoft products.
-
-### Overview page has been removed
-
-In the left pane of the Management Console, the OVERVIEW menu option and its associated OVERVIEW page have been removed.
-
-### Sequencer Improvements
-
-The following improvements have been made to the package editor in the App-V 5.1 Sequencer.
-
-### Import and export the manifest file
-
-You can import and export the AppxManifest.xml file. To export the manifest file, select the **Advanced** tab and in the Manifest File box, click **Export...**. You can make changes to the manifest file, such as removing shell extensions or editing file type associations.
-
-After you make your changes, click **Import...** and select the file you edited. After you successfully import it back in, the manifest file is immediately updated within the package editor.
-
-**Caution**
-When you import the file, your changes are validated against the XML schema. If the file is not valid, you will receive an error. Be aware that it is possible to import a file that is validated against the XML schema, but that might still fail to run for other reasons.
-
-
-
-### Addition of Windows 10 to operating systems list
-
-In the Deployment tab, Windows 10 32-bit and Windows 10-64 bit have been added to the list of operating systems for which you can sequence a package. If you select **Any Operating System**, Windows 10 is automatically included among the operating systems that the sequenced package will support.
-
-### Current path displays at bottom of virtual registry editor
-
-In the Virtual Registry tab, the path now displays at the bottom of the virtual registry editor, which enables you to determine the currently selected key. Previously, you had to scroll through the registry tree to find the currently selected key.
-
-### Combined “find and replace” dialog box and shortcut keys added in virtual registry editor
-
-In the virtual registry editor, shortcut keys have been added for the Find option (Ctrl+F), and a dialog box that combines the “find” and “replace” tasks has been added to enable you to find and replace values and data. To access this combined dialog box, select a key and do one of the following:
-
-- Press **Ctrl+H**
-
-- Right-click a key and select **Replace**.
-
-- Select **View** > **Virtual Registry** > **Replace**.
-
-Previously, the “Replace” dialog box did not exist, and you had to make changes manually.
-
-### Rename registry keys and package files successfully
-
-You can rename virtual registry keys and files without experiencing Sequencer issues. Previously, the Sequencer stopped working if you tried to rename a key.
-
-### Import and export virtual registry keys
-
-You can import and export virtual registry keys. To import a key, right-click the node under which to import the key, navigate to the key you want to import, and then click **Import**. To export a key, right-click the key and select **Export**.
-
-### Import a directory into the virtual file system
-
-You can import a directory into the VFS. To import a directory, click the **Package Files** tab, and then click **View** > **Virtual File System** > **Import Directory**. If you try to import a directory that contains files that are already in the VFS, the import fails, and an explanatory message is displayed. Prior to App-V 5.1, you could not import directories.
-
-### Import or export a VFS file without having to delete and then add it back to the package
-
-You can import files to or export files from the VFS without having to delete the file and then add it back to the package. For example, you might use this feature to export a change log to a local drive, edit the file using an external editor, and then re-import the file into the VFS.
-
-To export a file, select the **Package Files** tab, right-click the file in the VFS, click **Export**, and choose an export location from which you can make your edits.
-
-To import a file, select the **Package Files** tab and right-click the file that you had exported. Browse to the file that you edited, and then click **Import**. The imported file will overwrite the existing file.
-
-After you import a file, you must save the package by clicking **File** > **Save**.
-
-### Menu for adding a package file has moved
-
-The menu option for adding a package file has been moved. To find the Add option, select the **Package Files** tab, then click **View** > **Virtual File System** > **Add File**. Previously, you right-clicked a folder under the VFS node, and chose **Add File**.
-
-### Virtual registry node expands MACHINE and USER hives by default
-
-When you open the virtual registry, the MACHINE and USER hives are shown below the top-level REGISTRY node. Previously, you had to expand the REGISTRY node to show the hives beneath.
-
-### Enable or disable Browser Helper Objects
-
-You can enable or disable Browser Helper Objects by selecting a new check box, Enable Browser Helper Objects, on the Advanced tab of the Sequencer user interface. If Browser Helper Objects:
-
-- Exist in the package and are enabled, the check box is selected by default.
-
-- Exist in the package and are disabled, the check box is clear by default.
-
-- Exist in the package, with one or more enabled and one or more disabled, the check box is set to indeterminate by default.
-
-- Do not exist in the package, the check box is disabled.
-
-### Improvements to Package Converter
-
-You can now use the package converter to convert App-V 4.6 packages that contain scripts, and registry information and scripts from source .osd files are now included in package converter output.
-
-For more information including examples, see [Migrating to App-V 5.1 from a Previous Version](migrating-to-app-v-51-from-a-previous-version.md).
-
-### Support for multiple scripts on a single event trigger
-
-App-V 5.1 supports the use of multiple scripts on a single event trigger for App-V packages, including packages that you are converting from App-V 4.6 to App-V 5.0 or later. To enable the use of multiple scripts, App-V 5.1 uses a script launcher application, named ScriptRunner.exe, which is installed as part of the App-V client installation.
-
-For more information, including a list of event triggers and the context under which scripts can be run, see the Scripts section in [About App-V 5.1 Dynamic Configuration](about-app-v-51-dynamic-configuration.md).
-
-### Hardcoded path to installation folder is redirected to virtual file system root
-
-When you convert packages from App-V 4.6 to 5.1, the App-V 5.1 package can access the hardcoded drive that you were required to use when you created 4.6 packages. The drive letter will be the drive you selected as the installation drive on the 4.6 sequencing machine. (The default drive letter is Q:\\.)
-
-Previously, the 4.6 root folder was not recognized and could not be accessed by App-V 5.0 packages. App-V 5.1 packages can access hardcoded files by their full path or can programmatically enumerate files under the App-V 4.6 installation root.
-
-**Technical Details:** The App-V 5.1 package converter will save the App-V 4.6 installation root folder and short folder names in the FilesystemMetadata.xml file in the Filesystem element. When the App-V 5.1 client creates the virtual process, it will map requests from the App-V 4.6 installation root to the virtual file system root.
-
-## How to Get MDOP Technologies
-
-
-App-V is a part of the Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack (MDOP). MDOP is part of Microsoft Software Assurance. For more information about Microsoft Software Assurance and acquiring MDOP, see [How Do I Get MDOP](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Release Notes for App-V 5.1](release-notes-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/about-client-configuration-settings.md b/mdop/appv-v5/about-client-configuration-settings.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 9ba08f850a..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/about-client-configuration-settings.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,473 +0,0 @@
----
-title: About Client Configuration Settings
-description: About Client Configuration Settings
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: cc7ae28c-b2ac-4f68-b992-5ccdbd5316a4
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# About Client Configuration Settings
-
-
-The Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 client stores its configuration in the registry. You can gather some useful information about the client if you understand the format of data in the registry. You can also configure many client actions by changing registry entries. This topic lists the App-V 5.0 Client configuration settings and explains their uses. You can use PowerShell to modify the client configuration settings. For more information about using PowerShell and App-V 5.0 see [Administering App-V by Using PowerShell](administering-app-v-by-using-powershell.md).
-
-## App-V 5.0 Client Configuration Settings
-
-
-The following table displays information about the App-V 5.0 client configuration settings:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Setting Name
-
Setup Flag
-
Description
-
Setting Options
-
Registry Key Value
-
Disabled Policy State Keys and Values
-
-
-
-
-
PackageInstallationRoot
-
PACKAGEINSTALLATIONROOT
-
Specifies directory where all new applications and updates will be installed.
-
String
-
Streaming\PackageInstallationRoot
-
Policy value not written (same as Not Configured)
-
-
-
PackageSourceRoot
-
PACKAGESOURCEROOT
-
Overrides source location for downloading package content.
-
String
-
Streaming\PackageSourceRoot
-
Policy value not written (same as Not Configured)
-
-
-
AllowHighCostLaunch
-
Not available.
-
This setting controls whether virtualized applications are launched on Windows 8 machines connected via a metered network connection (For example, 4G).
-
True (enabled); False (Disabled state)
-
Streaming\AllowHighCostLaunch
-
0
-
-
-
ReestablishmentRetries
-
Not available.
-
Specifies the number of times to retry a dropped session.
-
Integer (0-99)
-
Streaming\ReestablishmentRetries
-
Policy value not written (same as Not Configured)
-
-
-
ReestablishmentInterval
-
Not available.
-
Specifies the number of seconds between attempts to reestablish a dropped session.
-
Integer (0-3600)
-
Streaming\ReestablishmentInterval
-
Policy value not written (same as Not Configured)
-
-
-
AutoLoad
-
AUTOLOAD
-
Specifies how new packages should be loaded automatically by App-V on a specific computer.
-
(0x0) None; (0x1) Previously used; (0x2) All
-
Streaming\AutoLoad
-
Policy value not written (same as Not Configured)
-
-
-
LocationProvider
-
Not available.
-
Specifies the CLSID for a compatible implementation of the IAppvPackageLocationProvider interface.
-
String
-
Streaming\LocationProvider
-
Policy value not written (same as Not Configured)
-
-
-
CertFilterForClientSsl
-
Not available.
-
Specifies the path to a valid certificate in the certificate store.
-
String
-
Streaming\CertFilterForClientSsl
-
Policy value not written (same as Not Configured)
-
-
-
VerifyCertificateRevocationList
-
Not available.
-
Verifies Server certificate revocation status before steaming using HTTPS.
-
True(enabled); False(Disabled state)
-
Streaming\VerifyCertificateRevocationList
-
0
-
-
-
SharedContentStoreMode
-
SHAREDCONTENTSTOREMODE
-
Specifies that streamed package contents will be not be saved to the local hard disk.
-
True(enabled); False(Disabled state)
-
Streaming\SharedContentStoreMode
-
0
-
-
-
Name
-
-Note
This setting cannot be modified using the set-AppvclientConfiguration cmdLet. You must use the Set-AppvPublishingServer cmdlet.
-
-
-
-
-
PUBLISHINGSERVERNAME
-
Displays the name of publishing server.
-
String
-
Publishing\Servers{serverId}\FriendlyName
-
Policy value not written (same as Not Configured)
-
-
-
URL
-
-Note
This setting cannot be modified using the set-AppvclientConfiguration cmdLet. You must use the Set-AppvPublishingServer cmdlet.
-
-
-
-
-
PUBLISHINGSERVERURL
-
Displays the URL of publishing server.
-
String
-
Publishing\Servers{serverId}\URL
-
Policy value not written (same as Not Configured)
-
-
-
GlobalRefreshEnabled
-
-Note
This setting cannot be modified using the set-AppvclientConfiguration cmdLet. You must use the Set-AppvPublishingServer cmdlet.
-
-
-
-
-
GLOBALREFRESHENABLED
-
Enables global publishing refresh (Boolean)
-
True(enabled); False(Disabled state)
-
Publishing\Servers{serverId}\GlobalEnabled
-
False
-
-
-
GlobalRefreshOnLogon
-
-Note
This setting cannot be modified using the set-AppvclientConfiguration cmdLet. You must use the Set-AppvPublishingServer cmdlet.
-
-
-
-
-
GLOBALREFRESHONLOGON
-
Triggers a global publishing refresh on logon. ( Boolean)
-
True(enabled); False(Disabled state)
-
Publishing\Servers{serverId}\GlobalLogonRefresh
-
False
-
-
-
GlobalRefreshInterval
-
-Note
This setting cannot be modified using the set-AppvclientConfiguration cmdLet. You must use the Set-AppvPublishingServer cmdlet.
-
-
-
-
-
GLOBALREFRESHINTERVAL
-
Specifies the publishing refresh interval using the GlobalRefreshIntervalUnit. To disable package refresh, select 0.
Migration mode allows the App-V client to modify shortcuts and FTA’s for packages created using a previous version of App-V.
-
True(enabled state); False (disabled state)
-
Coexistence\MigrationMode
-
-
-
-
CEIPOPTIN
-
CEIPOPTIN
-
Allows the computer running the App-V 5.0 Client to collect and return certain usage information to help allow us to further improve the application.
-
0 for disabled; 1 for enabled
-
SOFTWARE/Microsoft/AppV/CEIP/CEIPEnable
-
0
-
-
-
EnablePackageScripts
-
ENABLEPACKAGESCRIPTS
-
Enables scripts defined in the package manifest of configuration files that should run.
-
True(enabled); False(Disabled state)
-
\Scripting\EnablePackageScripts
-
-
-
-
RoamingFileExclusions
-
ROAMINGFILEEXCLUSIONS
-
Specifies the file paths relative to %userprofile% that do not roam with a user's profile. Example usage: /ROAMINGFILEEXCLUSIONS='desktop;my pictures'
-
-
-
-
-
-
RoamingRegistryExclusions
-
ROAMINGREGISTRYEXCLUSIONS
-
Specifies the registry paths that do not roam with a user profile. Example usage: /ROAMINGREGISTRYEXCLUSIONS=software\classes;software\clients
-
String
-
Integration\RoamingRegistryExclusions
-
Policy value not written (same as Not Configured)
-
-
-
IntegrationRootUser
-
Not available.
-
Specifies the location to create symbolic links associated with the current version of a per-user published package. all virtual application extensions, for example shortcuts and file type associations, will point to this path. If you do not specify a path, symbolic links will not be used when you publish the package. For example: %localappdata%\Microsoft\AppV\Client\Integration.
-
String
-
Integration\IntegrationRootUser
-
Policy value not written (same as Not Configured)
-
-
-
IntegrationRootGlobal
-
Not available.
-
Specifies the location to create symbolic links associated with the current version of a globally published package. all virtual application extensions, for example shortcuts and file type associations, will point to this path. If you do not specify a path, symbolic links will not be used when you publish the package. For example: %allusersprofile%\Microsoft\AppV\Client\Integration
-
String
-
Integration\IntegrationRootGlobal
-
Policy value not written (same as Not Configured)
-
-
-
VirtualizableExtensions
-
Not available.
-
A comma -delineated list of file name extensions that can be used to determine if a locally installed application can be run in the virtual environment.
-
When shortcuts, FTAs, and other extension points are created during publishing, App-V will compare the file name extension to the list if the application that is associated with the extension point is locally installed. If the extension is located, the RunVirtual command line parameter will be added, and the application will run virtually.
Enables the client to return information to a reporting server.
-
True (enabled); False (Disabled state)
-
Reporting\EnableReporting
-
False
-
-
-
ReportingServerURL
-
Not available.
-
Specifies the location on the reporting server where client information is saved.
-
String
-
Reporting\ReportingServer
-
Policy value not written (same as Not Configured)
-
-
-
ReportingDataCacheLimit
-
Not available.
-
Specifies the maximum size in megabytes (MB) of the XML cache for storing reporting information. The size applies to the cache in memory. When the limit is reached, the log file will roll over. Set between 0 and 1024.
-
Integer [0-1024]
-
Reporting\DataCacheLimit
-
Policy value not written (same as Not Configured)
-
-
-
ReportingDataBlockSize
-
Not available.
-
Specifies the maximum size in bytes to transmit to the server for reporting upload requests. This can help avoid permanent transmission failures when the log has reached a significant size. Set between 1024 and unlimited.
-
Integer [1024 - Unlimited]
-
Reporting\DataBlockSize
-
Policy value not written (same as Not Configured)
-
-
-
ReportingStartTime
-
Not available.
-
Specifies the time to initiate the client to send data to the reporting server. You must specify a valid integer between 0-23 corresponding to the hour of the day. By default the ReportingStartTime will start on the current day at 10 P.M.or 22.
-
-Note
You should configure this setting to a time when computers running the App-V 5.0 client are least likely to be offline.
-
-
-
-
-
Integer (0 – 23)
-
Reporting\ StartTime
-
Policy value not written (same as Not Configured)
-
-
-
ReportingInterval
-
Not available.
-
Specifies the retry interval that the client will use to resend data to the reporting server.
-
Integer
-
Reporting\RetryInterval
-
Policy value not written (same as Not Configured)
-
-
-
ReportingRandomDelay
-
Not available.
-
Specifies the maximum delay (in minutes) for data to be sent to the reporting server. When the scheduled task is started, the client generates a random delay between 0 and ReportingRandomDelay and will wait the specified duration before sending data. This can help to prevent collisions on the server.
-
Integer [0 - ReportingRandomDelay]
-
Reporting\RandomDelay
-
Policy value not written (same as Not Configured)
-
-
-
EnableDynamicVirtualization
-
-Important
This setting is available only with App-V 5.0 SP2 or later.
-
-
-
-
-
Not available.
-
Enables supported Shell Extensions, Browser Helper Objects, and Active X controls to be virtualized and run with virtual applications.
This setting is available only with App-V 5.0 SP2.
-
-
-
-
-
Not available.
-
Hides the publishing refresh progress bar.
-
1 (Enabled), 0 (Disabled)
-
-
-
-
-
ProcessesUsingVirtualComponents
-
Not available.
-
Specifies a list of process paths (that may contain wildcards), which are candidates for using dynamic virtualization (supported shell extensions, browser helper objects, and ActiveX controls). Only processes whose full path matches one of these items can use dynamic virtualization.
-
String
-
Virtualization\ProcessesUsingVirtualComponents
-
Empty string.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the App-V 5.0 Sequencer and Client](deploying-the-app-v-50-sequencer-and-client.md)
-
-[How to Modify App-V 5.0 Client Configuration Using the ADMX Template and Group Policy](how-to-modify-app-v-50-client-configuration-using-the-admx-template-and-group-policy.md)
-
-[How to Deploy the App-V Client](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-client-gb18030.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/about-client-configuration-settings51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/about-client-configuration-settings51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0ea5586f2b..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/about-client-configuration-settings51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,89 +0,0 @@
----
-title: About Client Configuration Settings
-description: About Client Configuration Settings
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 18bb307a-7eda-4dd6-a83e-6afaefd99470
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# About Client Configuration Settings
-
-
-The Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 client stores its configuration in the registry. You can gather some useful information about the client if you understand the format of data in the registry. You can also configure many client actions by changing registry entries. This topic lists the App-V 5.1 Client configuration settings and explains their uses. You can use PowerShell to modify the client configuration settings. For more information about using PowerShell and App-V 5.1 see [Administering App-V 5.1 by Using PowerShell](administering-app-v-51-by-using-powershell.md).
-
-## App-V 5.1 Client Configuration Settings
-
-
-The following table displays information about the App-V 5.1 client configuration settings:
-
-|Setting name | Setup Flag | Description | Setting Options | Registry Key Value | Disabled Policy State Keys and Values |
-|-------------|------------|-------------|-----------------|--------------------|--------------------------------------|
-| PackageInstallationRoot | PACKAGEINSTALLATIONROOT | Specifies directory where all new applications and updates will be installed. | String | Streaming\PackageInstallationRoot | Policy value not written (same as Not Configured) |
-| PackageSourceRoot | PACKAGESOURCEROOT | Overrides source location for downloading package content. | String | Streaming\PackageSourceRoot | Policy value not written (same as Not Configured) |
-| AllowHighCostLaunch | Not available. |This setting controls whether virtualized applications are launched on Windows 10 machines connected via a metered network connection (For example, 4G). | True (enabled); False (Disabled state) | Streaming\AllowHighCostLaunch | 0 |
-| ReestablishmentRetries | Not available. | Specifies the number of times to retry a dropped session. | Integer (0-99) | Streaming\ReestablishmentRetries | Policy value not written (same as Not Configured) |
-| ReestablishmentInterval | Not available. | Specifies the number of seconds between attempts to reestablish a dropped session. | Integer (0-3600) | Streaming\ReestablishmentInterval | Policy value not written (same as Not Configured) |
-| LocationProvider | Not available. | Specifies the CLSID for a compatible implementation of the IAppvPackageLocationProvider interface. | String | Streaming\LocationProvider | Policy value not written (same as Not Configured) |
-| CertFilterForClientSsl | Not available. | Specifies the path to a valid certificate in the certificate store. | String | Streaming\CertFilterForClientSsl | Policy value not written (same as Not Configured) |
-| VerifyCertificateRevocationList | Not available. | Verifies Server certificate revocation status before steaming using HTTPS. | True(enabled); False(Disabled state) | Streaming\VerifyCertificateRevocationList | 0 |
-| SharedContentStoreMode | SHAREDCONTENTSTOREMODE | Specifies that streamed package contents will be not be saved to the local hard disk. | True(enabled); False(Disabled state) | Streaming\SharedContentStoreMode | 0 |
-| Name **Note** This setting cannot be modified using the **set-AppvclientConfiguration** cmdLet. You must use the **Set-AppvPublishingServer** cmdlet. | PUBLISHINGSERVERNAME | Displays the name of publishing server. | String | Publishing\Servers\{serverId}\FriendlyName | Policy value not written (same as Not Configured) |
-| URL **Note** This setting cannot be modified using the **set-AppvclientConfiguration** cmdLet. You must use the **Set-AppvPublishingServer** cmdlet. | PUBLISHINGSERVERURL | Displays the URL of publishing server. | String | Publishing\Servers\{serverId}\URL | Policy value not written (same as Not Configured) |
-| GlobalRefreshEnabled **Note** This setting cannot be modified using the **set-AppvclientConfiguration** cmdLet. You must use the **Set-AppvPublishingServer** cmdlet. | GLOBALREFRESHENABLED | Enables global publishing refresh (Boolean) | True(enabled); False(Disabled state) | Publishing\Servers\{serverId}\GlobalEnabled | False |
-| GlobalRefreshOnLogon **Note** This setting cannot be modified using the **set-AppvclientConfiguration** cmdLet. You must use the **Set-AppvPublishingServer** cmdlet. | GLOBALREFRESHONLOGON | Triggers a global publishing refresh on logon. ( Boolean) | True(enabled); False(Disabled state) | Publishing\Servers\{serverId}\GlobalLogonRefresh | False |
-| GlobalRefreshInterval **Note** This setting cannot be modified using the **set-AppvclientConfiguration** cmdLet. You must use the **Set-AppvPublishingServer** cmdlet. | GLOBALREFRESHINTERVAL | Specifies the publishing refresh interval using the GlobalRefreshIntervalUnit. To disable package refresh, select 0. | Integer (0-744) | Publishing\Servers\{serverId}\GlobalPeriodicRefreshInterval | 0 |
-| GlobalRefreshIntervalUnit **Note** This setting cannot be modified using the **set-AppvclientConfiguration** cmdLet. You must use the **Set-AppvPublishingServer** cmdlet. | GLOBALREFRESHINTERVALUNI | Specifies the interval unit (Hour 0-23, Day 0-31). | 0 for hour, 1 for day | Publishing\Servers\{serverId}\GlobalPeriodicRefreshIntervalUnit | 1 |
-| UserRefreshEnabled **Note** This setting cannot be modified using the **set-AppvclientConfiguration** cmdLet. You must use the **Set-AppvPublishingServer** cmdlet. | USERREFRESHENABLED | Enables user publishing refresh (Boolean) | True(enabled); False(Disabled state) | Publishing\Servers\{serverId}\UserEnabled | False |
-| UserRefreshOnLogon **Note** This setting cannot be modified using the **set-AppvclientConfiguration** cmdLet. You must use the **Set-AppvPublishingServer** cmdlet. | USERREFRESHONLOGON | Triggers a user publishing refresh onlogon. ( Boolean) Word count (with spaces): 60 | True(enabled); False(Disabled state) | Publishing\Servers\{serverId}\UserLogonRefresh | False |
-| UserRefreshInterval **Note** This setting cannot be modified using the **set-AppvclientConfiguration** cmdLet. You must use the **Set-AppvPublishingServer** cmdlet. | USERREFRESHINTERVAL | Specifies the publishing refresh interval using the UserRefreshIntervalUnit. To disable package refresh, select 0. | Word count (with spaces): 85 Integer (0-744 Hours) | Publishing\Servers\{serverId}\UserPeriodicRefreshInterval | 0 |
-| UserRefreshIntervalUnit **Note** This setting cannot be modified using the **set-AppvclientConfiguration** cmdLet. You must use the **Set-AppvPublishingServer** cmdlet. | USERREFRESHINTERVALUNIT | Specifies the interval unit (Hour 0-23, Day 0-31). | 0 for hour, 1 for day | Publishing\Servers\{serverId}\UserPeriodicRefreshIntervalUnit | 1 |
-| MigrationMode | MIGRATIONMODE | Migration mode allows the App-V client to modify shortcuts and FTA’s for packages created using a previous version of App-V. | True(enabled state); False (disabled state) | Coexistence\MigrationMode | |
-| CEIPOPTIN | CEIPOPTIN | Allows the computer running the App-V 5.1 Client to collect and return certain usage information to help allow us to further improve the application. | 0 for disabled; 1 for enabled | SOFTWARE/Microsoft/AppV/CEIP/CEIPEnable | 0 |
-| EnablePackageScripts | ENABLEPACKAGESCRIPTS | Enables scripts defined in the package manifest of configuration files that should run. | True(enabled); False(Disabled state) | \Scripting\EnablePackageScripts | |
-| RoamingFileExclusions | ROAMINGFILEEXCLUSIONS | Specifies the file paths relative to %userprofile% that do not roam with a user's profile. Example usage: /ROAMINGFILEEXCLUSIONS='desktop;my pictures' | | | |
-| RoamingRegistryExclusions | ROAMINGREGISTRYEXCLUSIONS | Specifies the registry paths that do not roam with a user profile. Example usage: /ROAMINGREGISTRYEXCLUSIONS=software\\classes;software\\clients | String | Integration\RoamingRegistryExclusions | Policy value not written (same as Not Configured) |
-| IntegrationRootUser | Not available. | Specifies the location to create symbolic links associated with the current version of a per-user published package. all virtual application extensions, for example shortcuts and file type associations, will point to this path. If you do not specify a path, symbolic links will not be used when you publish the package. For example: %localappdata%\Microsoft\AppV\Client\Integration.| String | Integration\IntegrationRootUser | Policy value not written (same as Not Configured) |
-|IntegrationRootGlobal | Not available.| Specifies the location to create symbolic links associated with the current version of a globally published package. all virtual application extensions, for example shortcuts and file type associations, will point to this path. If you do not specify a path, symbolic links will not be used when you publish the package. For example: %allusersprofile%\Microsoft\AppV\Client\Integration | String | Integration\IntegrationRootGlobal | Policy value not written (same as Not Configured) |
-| VirtualizableExtensions | Not available. | A comma -delineated list of file name extensions that can be used to determine if a locally installed application can be run in the virtual environment. When shortcuts, FTAs, and other extension points are created during publishing, App-V will compare the file name extension to the list if the application that is associated with the extension point is locally installed. If the extension is located, the **RunVirtual** command line parameter will be added, and the application will run virtually. For more information about the **RunVirtual** parameter, see [Running a Locally Installed Application Inside a Virtual Environment with Virtualized Applications](running-a-locally-installed-application-inside-a-virtual-environment-with-virtualized-applications51.md). | String | Integration\VirtualizableExtensions | Policy value not written |
-| ReportingEnabled | Not available. | Enables the client to return information to a reporting server. | True (enabled); False (Disabled state) | Reporting\EnableReporting | False |
-| ReportingServerURL | Not available. | Specifies the location on the reporting server where client information is saved. | String | Reporting\ReportingServer | Policy value not written (same as Not Configured) |
-| ReportingDataCacheLimit | Not available. | Specifies the maximum size in megabytes (MB) of the XML cache for storing reporting information. The size applies to the cache in memory. When the limit is reached, the log file will roll over. Set between 0 and 1024. | Integer [0-1024] | Reporting\DataCacheLimit | Policy value not written (same as Not Configured) |
-| ReportingDataBlockSize| Not available. | Specifies the maximum size in bytes to transmit to the server for reporting upload requests. This can help avoid permanent transmission failures when the log has reached a significant size. Set between 1024 and unlimited. | Integer [1024 - Unlimited] | Reporting\DataBlockSize | Policy value not written (same as Not Configured) |
-| ReportingStartTime | Not available. | Specifies the time to initiate the client to send data to the reporting server. You must specify a valid integer between 0-23 corresponding to the hour of the day. By default the **ReportingStartTime** will start on the current day at 10 P.M.or 22. **Note** You should configure this setting to a time when computers running the App-V 5.1 client are least likely to be offline. | Integer (0 – 23) | Reporting\ StartTime | Policy value not written (same as Not Configured) |
-| ReportingInterval | Not available. | Specifies the retry interval that the client will use to resend data to the reporting server. | Integer | Reporting\RetryInterval | Policy value not written (same as Not Configured) |
-| ReportingRandomDelay | Not available. | Specifies the maximum delay (in minutes) for data to be sent to the reporting server. When the scheduled task is started, the client generates a random delay between 0 and **ReportingRandomDelay** and will wait the specified duration before sending data. This can help to prevent collisions on the server. | Integer [0 - ReportingRandomDelay] | Reporting\RandomDelay | Policy value not written (same as Not Configured) |
-| EnableDynamicVirtualization **Important** This setting is available only with App-V 5.0 SP2 or later. | Not available. | Enables supported Shell Extensions, Browser Helper Objects, and Active X controls to be virtualized and run with virtual applications. | 1 (Enabled), 0 (Disabled) | HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\AppV\Client\Virtualization | |
-| EnablePublishingRefreshUI **Important** This setting is available only with App-V 5.0 SP2. | Not available. | Enables the publishing refresh progress bar for the computer running the App-V 5.1 Client. | 1 (Enabled), 0 (Disabled) | HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\AppV\Client\Publishing | |
-| HideUI **Important** This setting is available only with App-V 5.0 SP2.| Not available. | Hides the publishing refresh progress bar. | 1 (Enabled), 0 (Disabled) | | |
-| ProcessesUsingVirtualComponents | Not available. | Specifies a list of process paths (that may contain wildcards), which are candidates for using dynamic virtualization (supported shell extensions, browser helper objects, and ActiveX controls). Only processes whose full path matches one of these items can use dynamic virtualization. | String | Virtualization\ProcessesUsingVirtualComponents | Empty string. |
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the App-V 5.1 Sequencer and Client](deploying-the-app-v-51-sequencer-and-client.md)
-
-[How to Modify App-V 5.1 Client Configuration Using the ADMX Template and Group Policy](how-to-modify-app-v-51-client-configuration-using-the-admx-template-and-group-policy.md)
-
-[How to Deploy the App-V Client](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-client-51gb18030.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/about-the-connection-group-file.md b/mdop/appv-v5/about-the-connection-group-file.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6052eca8c9..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/about-the-connection-group-file.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,338 +0,0 @@
----
-title: About the Connection Group File
-description: About the Connection Group File
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: bfeb6013-a7ca-4e36-9fe3-229702e83f0d
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# About the Connection Group File
-
-
-**In this topic:**
-
-- [Connection group file purpose and location](#bkmk-cg-purpose-loc)
-
-- [Structure of the connection group XML file](#bkmk-define-cg-5-0sp3)
-
-- [Configuring the priority of packages in a connection group](#bkmk-config-pkg-priority-incg)
-
-- [Supported virtual application connection configurations](#bkmk-va-conn-configs)
-
-## Connection group file purpose and location
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Connection group purpose
-
A connection group is an App-V feature that enables you to group packages together to create a virtual environment in which the applications in those packages can interact with each other.
-
Example: You want to use plug-ins with Microsoft Office. You can create a package that contains the plug-ins, and create another package that contains Office, and then add both packages to a connection group to enable Office to use those plug-ins.
-
-
-
How the connection group file works
-
When you apply an Application Virtualization 5.0 connection group file, the packages that are enumerated in the file will be combined at runtime into a single virtual environment. Use the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 connection group file to configure existing Application Virtualization 5.0 connection groups.
-
-
-
-## Structure of the connection group XML file
-
-
-**In this section:**
-
-- [Parameters that define the connection group](#bkmk-params-define-cg)
-
-- [Parameters that define the packages in the connection group](#bkmk-params-define-pkgs-incg)
-
-- [App-V 5.0 SP3 example connection group XML file](#bkmk-50sp3-exp-cg-xml)
-
-- [App-V 5.0 through App-V 5.0 SP2 example connection group XML file](#bkmk-50thru50sp2-exp-cg-xm)
-
-### Parameters that define the connection group
-
-The following table describes the parameters in the XML file that define the connection group itself, not the packages.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Field
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Schema name
-
Name of the schema.
-
Applicable starting in App-V 5.0 SP3: If you want to use the new “optional packages” and “use any version” features that are described in this table, you must specify the following schema in the XML file:
Unique GUID identifier for this connection group. The connection group state is associated with this identifier. Specify this identifier only when you create the connection group.
-
You can create a new GUID by typing: [Guid]::NewGuid().
-
-
-
VersionId
-
Version GUID identifier for this version of the connection group.
-
When you update a connection group (for example, by adding or updating a new package), you must update the version GUID to reflect the new version.
-
-
-
DisplayName
-
Display name of the connection group.
-
-
-
Priority
-
Optional priority field for the connection group.
-
“0” - indicates the highest priority.
-
If a priority is required, but has not been configured, the package will fail because the correct connection group to use cannot be determined.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Parameters that define the packages in the connection group
-
-In the <Packages> section of the connection group XML file, you list the member packages in the connection group by specifying each package’s unique package identifier and version identifier, as described in the following table. The first package in the list has the highest precedence.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Field
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
PackageId
-
Unique GUID identifier for this package. This GUID doesn’t change when newer versions of the package are published.
-
-
-
VersionId
-
Unique GUID identifier for the version of the package.
-
Applicable starting in App-V 5.0 SP3: If you specify “*” for the package version, the GUID of the latest available package version is dynamically inserted.
-
-
-
IsOptional
-
Applicable starting in App-V 5.0 SP3: Parameter that enables you to make a package optional within the connection group. Valid entries are:
-
-
“true” – package is optional in the connection group
-
“false” – package is required in the connection group
-
-
-
-### App-V 5.0 SP3 example connection group XML file
-
-The following example connection group XML file shows examples of the fields in the previous tables and highlights the items that are new for App-V 5.0 SP3.
-
-```XML
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-### App-V 5.0 through App-V 5.0 SP2 example connection group XML file
-
-The following example connection group XML file applies to App-V 5.0 through App-V 5.0 SP2. It shows examples of the fields in the previous table, but it excludes the changes described above for App-V 5.0 SP3.
-
-```XML
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Configuring the priority of packages in a connection group
-
-
-Package precedence is configured using the package list order. The first package in the document has the highest precedence. Subsequent packages in the list have descending priority.
-
-Package precedence is the resolution for otherwise inevitable resource collisions during virtual environment initialization. For example, if two packages that are opening in the same virtual environment define the same registry DWORD value, the package with the highest precedence determines the value that is set.
-
-You can use the connection group file to configure each connection group by using the following methods:
-
-- Specify runtime priorities for connection groups.
-
- **Note**
- Priority is required only if the package is associated with more than one connection group.
-
-
-
-- Specify package precedence within the connection group.
-
-The priority field is required when a running virtual application initiates from a native application request, for example, Microsoft Windows Explorer. The App-V client uses the priority to determine which connection group virtual environment the application should run in. This situation occurs if a virtual application is part of multiple connection groups.
-
-If a virtual application is opened using another virtual application the virtual environment of the original virtual application will be used. The priority field is not used in this case.
-
-**Example:**
-
-The virtual application Microsoft Outlook is running in virtual environment **XYZ**. When you open an attached Microsoft Word document, a virtualized version Microsoft Word opens in the virtual environment **XYZ**, regardless of the virtualized Microsoft Word’s associated connection groups or runtime priorities.
-
-## Supported virtual application connection configurations
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Configuration
-
Example scenario
-
-
-
-
-
An. exe file and plug-in (.dll)
-
-
You want to distribute Microsoft Office to all users, but distribute a Microsoft Excel plug-in to only a subset of users.
-
Enable the connection group for the appropriate users.
-
Update each package individually as required.
-
-
-
-
An. exe file and a middleware application
-
-
You have an application requires a middleware application, or several applications that all depend on the same middleware runtime version.
-
All computers that require one or more of the applications receive the connection groups with the application and middleware application runtime.
-
You can optionally combine multiple middleware applications into a single connection group.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Example
-
Example description
-
-
-
-
-
Virtual application connection group for the financial division
-
-
Middleware application 1
-
Middleware application 2
-
Middleware application 3
-
Middleware application runtime
-
-
-
-
Virtual application connection group for HR division
-
-
Middleware application 5
-
Middleware application 6
-
Middleware application runtime
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
An. exe file and an .exe file
-
You have an application that relies on another application, and you want to keep the packages separate for operational efficiencies, licensing restrictions, or rollout timelines.
-
Example:
-
If you are deploying Microsoft Lync 2010, you can use three packages:
-
-
Microsoft Office 2010
-
Microsoft Communicator 2007
-
Microsoft Lync 2010
-
-
You can manage the deployment using the following connection groups:
-
-
Microsoft Office 2010 and Microsoft Communicator 2007
-
Microsoft Office 2010 and Microsoft Lync 2010
-
-
When the deployment has completed, you can either create a single new Microsoft Office 2010 + Microsoft Lync 2010 package, or keep and maintain them as separate packages and deploy them by using a connection group.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/about-the-connection-group-file51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/about-the-connection-group-file51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4b7274562f..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/about-the-connection-group-file51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,338 +0,0 @@
----
-title: About the Connection Group File
-description: About the Connection Group File
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 1f4df515-f5f6-4b58-91a8-c71598cb3ea4
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# About the Connection Group File
-
-
-**In this topic:**
-
-- [Connection group file purpose and location](#bkmk-cg-purpose-loc)
-
-- [Structure of the connection group XML file](#bkmk-define-cg-5-0sp3)
-
-- [Configuring the priority of packages in a connection group](#bkmk-config-pkg-priority-incg)
-
-- [Supported virtual application connection configurations](#bkmk-va-conn-configs)
-
-## Connection group file purpose and location
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Connection group purpose
-
A connection group is an App-V feature that enables you to group packages together to create a virtual environment in which the applications in those packages can interact with each other.
-
Example: You want to use plug-ins with Microsoft Office. You can create a package that contains the plug-ins, and create another package that contains Office, and then add both packages to a connection group to enable Office to use those plug-ins.
-
-
-
How the connection group file works
-
When you apply an App-V 5.1 connection group file, the packages that are enumerated in the file will be combined at runtime into a single virtual environment. Use the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 connection group file to configure existing App-V 5.1 connection groups.
-
-
-
-## Structure of the connection group XML file
-
-
-**In this section:**
-
-- [Parameters that define the connection group](#bkmk-params-define-cg)
-
-- [Parameters that define the packages in the connection group](#bkmk-params-define-pkgs-incg)
-
-- [App-V example connection group XML file](#bkmk-50sp3-exp-cg-xml)
-
-- [App-V 5.0 through App-V 5.0 SP2 example connection group XML file](#bkmk-50thru50sp2-exp-cg-xm)
-
-### Parameters that define the connection group
-
-The following table describes the parameters in the XML file that define the connection group itself, not the packages.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Field
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Schema name
-
Name of the schema.
-
Applicable starting in App-V 5.0 SP3: If you want to use the new “optional packages” and “use any version” features that are described in this table, you must specify the following schema in the XML file:
Unique GUID identifier for this connection group. The connection group state is associated with this identifier. Specify this identifier only when you create the connection group.
-
You can create a new GUID by typing: [Guid]::NewGuid().
-
-
-
VersionId
-
Version GUID identifier for this version of the connection group.
-
When you update a connection group (for example, by adding or updating a new package), you must update the version GUID to reflect the new version.
-
-
-
DisplayName
-
Display name of the connection group.
-
-
-
Priority
-
Optional priority field for the connection group.
-
“0” - indicates the highest priority.
-
If a priority is required, but has not been configured, the package will fail because the correct connection group to use cannot be determined.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Parameters that define the packages in the connection group
-
-In the <Packages> section of the connection group XML file, you list the member packages in the connection group by specifying each package’s unique package identifier and version identifier, as described in the following table. The first package in the list has the highest precedence.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Field
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
PackageId
-
Unique GUID identifier for this package. This GUID doesn’t change when newer versions of the package are published.
-
-
-
VersionId
-
Unique GUID identifier for the version of the package.
-
Applicable starting in App-V 5.0 SP3: If you specify “*” for the package version, the GUID of the latest available package version is dynamically inserted.
-
-
-
IsOptional
-
Applicable starting in App-V 5.0 SP3: Parameter that enables you to make a package optional within the connection group. Valid entries are:
-
-
“true” – package is optional in the connection group
-
“false” – package is required in the connection group
-
-
-
-### App-V example connection group XML file
-
-The following example connection group XML file shows examples of the fields in the previous tables and highlights the items that are new starting in App-V 5.0 SP3.
-
-```XML
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-### App-V 5.0 through App-V 5.0 SP2 example connection group XML file
-
-The following example connection group XML file applies to App-V 5.0 through App-V 5.0 SP2. It shows examples of the fields in the previous table, but it excludes the changes described above for App-V 5.0 SP3.
-
-```XML
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-## Configuring the priority of packages in a connection group
-
-
-Package precedence is configured using the package list order. The first package in the document has the highest precedence. Subsequent packages in the list have descending priority.
-
-Package precedence is the resolution for otherwise inevitable resource collisions during virtual environment initialization. For example, if two packages that are opening in the same virtual environment define the same registry DWORD value, the package with the highest precedence determines the value that is set.
-
-You can use the connection group file to configure each connection group by using the following methods:
-
-- Specify runtime priorities for connection groups. To edit priority by using the App-V Management Console, click the connection group and then click **Edit**.
-
- **Note**
- Priority is required only if the package is associated with more than one connection group.
-
-
-
-- Specify package precedence within the connection group.
-
-The priority field is required when a running virtual application initiates from a native application request, for example, Microsoft Windows Explorer. The App-V client uses the priority to determine which connection group virtual environment the application should run in. This situation occurs if a virtual application is part of multiple connection groups.
-
-If a virtual application is opened using another virtual application the virtual environment of the original virtual application will be used. The priority field is not used in this case.
-
-**Example:**
-
-The virtual application Microsoft Outlook is running in virtual environment **XYZ**. When you open an attached Microsoft Word document, a virtualized version Microsoft Word opens in the virtual environment **XYZ**, regardless of the virtualized Microsoft Word’s associated connection groups or runtime priorities.
-
-## Supported virtual application connection configurations
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Configuration
-
Example scenario
-
-
-
-
-
An. exe file and plug-in (.dll)
-
-
You want to distribute Microsoft Office to all users, but distribute a Microsoft Excel plug-in to only a subset of users.
-
Enable the connection group for the appropriate users.
-
Update each package individually as required.
-
-
-
-
An. exe file and a middleware application
-
-
You have an application requires a middleware application, or several applications that all depend on the same middleware runtime version.
-
All computers that require one or more of the applications receive the connection groups with the application and middleware application runtime.
-
You can optionally combine multiple middleware applications into a single connection group.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Example
-
Example description
-
-
-
-
-
Virtual application connection group for the financial division
-
-
Middleware application 1
-
Middleware application 2
-
Middleware application 3
-
Middleware application runtime
-
-
-
-
Virtual application connection group for HR division
-
-
Middleware application 5
-
Middleware application 6
-
Middleware application runtime
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
An. exe file and an .exe file
-
You have an application that relies on another application, and you want to keep the packages separate for operational efficiencies, licensing restrictions, or rollout timelines.
-
Example:
-
If you are deploying Microsoft Lync 2010, you can use three packages:
-
-
Microsoft Office 2010
-
Microsoft Communicator 2007
-
Microsoft Lync 2010
-
-
You can manage the deployment using the following connection groups:
-
-
Microsoft Office 2010 and Microsoft Communicator 2007
-
Microsoft Office 2010 and Microsoft Lync 2010
-
-
When the deployment has completed, you can either create a single new Microsoft Office 2010 + Microsoft Lync 2010 package, or keep and maintain them as separate packages and deploy them by using a connection group.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/about-the-connection-group-virtual-environment.md b/mdop/appv-v5/about-the-connection-group-virtual-environment.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5b7e566fae..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/about-the-connection-group-virtual-environment.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,114 +0,0 @@
----
-title: About the Connection Group Virtual Environment
-description: About the Connection Group Virtual Environment
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 535fa640-cbd9-425e-8437-94650a70c264
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# About the Connection Group Virtual Environment
-
-
-**In this topic:**
-
-- [How package priority is determined](#bkmk-pkg-priority-deter)
-
-- [Merging identical package paths into one virtual directory in connection groups](#bkmk-merged-root-ve-exp)
-
-## How package priority is determined
-
-
-The virtual environment and its current state are associated with the connection group, not with the individual packages. If an App-V package is removed from the connection group, the state that existed as part of the connection group will not migrate with the package.
-
-If the same package is a part of two different connection groups, you have to indicate which connection group App-V should use. For example, you might have two packages in a connection group that each define the same registry DWORD value.
-
-The connection group that is used is based on the order in which a package appears inside the **AppConnectionGroup** XML document:
-
-- The first package has the highest precedence.
-
-- The second package has the second highest precedence.
-
-Consider the following example section:
-
-```xml
-
-```
-
-Assume that same DWORD value ABC (HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE\\software\\contoso\\finapp\\region) is defined in the first and third package, such as:
-
-- Package 1 (A8731008-4523-4713-83A4-CD1363907160): HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE\\software\\contoso\\finapp\\region=5
-
-- Package 3 (04220DCA-EE77-42BE-A9F5-96FD8E8593F2): HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE\\software\\contoso\\finapp\\region=10
-
-Since Package 1 appears first, the AppConnectionGroup's virtual environment will have the single DWORD value of 5 (HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE\\software\\contoso\\finapp\\region=5). This means that the virtual applications in Package 1, Package 2, and Package 3 will all see the value 5 when they query for HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE\\software\\contoso\\finapp\\region.
-
-Other virtual environment resources are resolved similarly, but the usual case is that the collisions occur in the registry.
-
-## Merging identical package paths into one virtual directory in connection groups
-
-
-If two or more packages in a connection group contain identical directory paths, the paths are merged into a single virtual directory inside the connection group virtual environment. This merging of paths allows an application in one package to access files that are in a different package.
-
-When you remove a package from a connection group, the applications in that removed package are no longer able to access files in the remaining packages in the connection group.
-
-The order in which App-V looks up a file’s name in the connection group is specified by the order in which the App-V packages are listed in the connection group manifest file.
-
-The following example shows the order and relationship of a file name lookup in a connection group for **Package A** and **Package B**.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Package A
-
Package B
-
-
-
-
-
C:\Windows\System32
-
C:\Windows\System32
-
-
-
C:\AppTest
-
C:\AppTest
-
-
-
-
-
-
-In the example above, when a virtualized application tries to find a specific file, Package A is searched first for a matching file path. If a matching path is not found, Package B is searched, using the following mapping rules:
-
-- If a file named **test.txt** exists in the same virtual folder hierarchy in both application packages, the first matching file is used.
-
-- If a file named **bar.txt** exists in the virtual folder hierarchy of one application package, but not in the other, the first matching file is used.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/about-the-connection-group-virtual-environment51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/about-the-connection-group-virtual-environment51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 3acd54097c..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/about-the-connection-group-virtual-environment51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,114 +0,0 @@
----
-title: About the Connection Group Virtual Environment
-description: About the Connection Group Virtual Environment
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: b7bb0e3d-8cd5-45a9-b84e-c9ab4196a18c
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# About the Connection Group Virtual Environment
-
-
-**In this topic:**
-
-- [How package priority is determined](#bkmk-pkg-priority-deter)
-
-- [Merging identical package paths into one virtual directory in connection groups](#bkmk-merged-root-ve-exp)
-
-## How package priority is determined
-
-
-The virtual environment and its current state are associated with the connection group, not with the individual packages. If an App-V package is removed from the connection group, the state that existed as part of the connection group will not migrate with the package.
-
-If the same package is a part of two different connection groups, you have to indicate which connection group App-V should use. For example, you might have two packages in a connection group that each define the same registry DWORD value.
-
-The connection group that is used is based on the order in which a package appears inside the **AppConnectionGroup** XML document:
-
-- The first package has the highest precedence.
-
-- The second package has the second highest precedence.
-
-Consider the following example section:
-
-```xml
-
-```
-
-Assume that same DWORD value ABC (HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE\\software\\contoso\\finapp\\region) is defined in the first and third package, such as:
-
-- Package 1 (A8731008-4523-4713-83A4-CD1363907160): HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE\\software\\contoso\\finapp\\region=5
-
-- Package 3 (04220DCA-EE77-42BE-A9F5-96FD8E8593F2): HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE\\software\\contoso\\finapp\\region=10
-
-Since Package 1 appears first, the AppConnectionGroup's virtual environment will have the single DWORD value of 5 (HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE\\software\\contoso\\finapp\\region=5). This means that the virtual applications in Package 1, Package 2, and Package 3 will all see the value 5 when they query for HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE\\software\\contoso\\finapp\\region.
-
-Other virtual environment resources are resolved similarly, but the usual case is that the collisions occur in the registry.
-
-## Merging identical package paths into one virtual directory in connection groups
-
-
-If two or more packages in a connection group contain identical directory paths, the paths are merged into a single virtual directory inside the connection group virtual environment. This merging of paths allows an application in one package to access files that are in a different package.
-
-When you remove a package from a connection group, the applications in that removed package are no longer able to access files in the remaining packages in the connection group.
-
-The order in which App-V looks up a file’s name in the connection group is specified by the order in which the App-V packages are listed in the connection group manifest file.
-
-The following example shows the order and relationship of a file name lookup in a connection group for **Package A** and **Package B**.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Package A
-
Package B
-
-
-
-
-
C:\Windows\System32
-
C:\Windows\System32
-
-
-
C:\AppTest
-
C:\AppTest
-
-
-
-
-
-
-In the example above, when a virtualized application tries to find a specific file, Package A is searched first for a matching file path. If a matching path is not found, Package B is searched, using the following mapping rules:
-
-- If a file named **test.txt** exists in the same virtual folder hierarchy in both application packages, the first matching file is used.
-
-- If a file named **bar.txt** exists in the virtual folder hierarchy of one application package, but not in the other, the first matching file is used.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/accessibility-for-app-v-50.md b/mdop/appv-v5/accessibility-for-app-v-50.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4cc6cd8431..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/accessibility-for-app-v-50.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,153 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Accessibility for App-V 5.0
-description: Accessibility for App-V 5.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 56696523-6332-4bbe-8ddf-32b1dfe38131
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Accessibility for App-V 5.0
-
-
-Microsoft is committed to making its products and services easier for everyone to use. This section provides information about features and services that make this product and its corresponding documentation more accessible for people with disabilities.
-
-## Access Any Command with a Few Keystrokes
-
-
-**Important**
-The information in this section only applies to the App-V 5.0 sequencer. For specific information about the App-V 5.0 server, see the Keyboard Shortcuts for the App-V 5.0 Management Server section of this document.
-
-
-
-Access keys let you quickly use a command by pressing a few keys. You can get to most commands by using two keystrokes. To use an access key:
-
-1. Press ALT.
-
- The keyboard shortcuts are displayed over each feature that is available in the current view.
-
-2. Press the letter shown in the keyboard shortcut over the feature that you want to use.
-
-**Note**
-To cancel the action that you are taking and hide the keyboard shortcuts, press ALT.
-
-
-
-## Keyboard Shortcuts for the App-V 5.0 Management Server
-
-
-Keyboard Shortcuts for the App-V 5.0 Management Server:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
To do this
-
Press
-
-
-
-
-
Rename App-V 5.0 connection groups or the App-V 5.0 publishing server description.
-
F2
-
-
-
Transfer access and configuration information from an existing App-V 5.0 package.
-
CTRL + Shift + A
-
-
-
Transfer default configurations from an existing App-V 5.0 package.
-
CTRL + Shift + C
-
-
-
Refresh the current page of the App-V 5.0 client console.
-
F5
-
-
-
On the Connections Groups page of the client management console, copies as a new version.
-
CTRL + Shift + C
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Documentation in Alternative Formats
-
-
-If you have difficulty reading or handling printed materials, you can obtain the documentation for many Microsoft products in more accessible formats. You can view an index of accessible product documentation on the Microsoft Accessibility website. In addition, you can obtain additional Microsoft publications from Learning Ally (formerly Recording for the Blind & Dyslexic, Inc.). Learning Ally distributes these documents to registered, eligible members of their distribution service.
-
-For information about the availability of Microsoft product documentation and books from Microsoft Press, contact:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Learning Ally (formerly Recording for the Blind & Dyslexic, Inc.)
-
20 Roszel Road
-
Princeton, NJ 08540
-
-
-
-
Telephone number from within the United States:
-
(800) 221-4792
-
-
-
Telephone number from outside the United States and Canada:
Web addresses can change, so you might be unable to connect to the website or sites mentioned here.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Customer Service for People with Hearing Impairments
-
-
-If you are deaf or hard-of-hearing, complete access to Microsoft product and customer services is available through a text telephone (TTY/TDD) service:
-
-- For customer service, contact Microsoft Sales Information Center at (800) 892-5234 between 6:30 AM and 5:30 PM Pacific Time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.
-
-- For technical assistance in the United States, contact Microsoft Product Support Services at (800) 892-5234 between 6:00 AM and 6:00 PM Pacific Time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays. In Canada, dial (905) 568-9641 between 8:00 AM and 8:00 PM Eastern Time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.
-
-Microsoft Support Services are subject to the prices, terms, and conditions in place at the time the service is used.
-
-## For More Information
-
-
-For more information about how accessible technology for computers helps to improve the lives of people with disabilities, see the [Microsoft Accessibility website](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=8431).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Getting Started with App-V 5.0](getting-started-with-app-v-50--rtm.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/accessibility-for-app-v-51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/accessibility-for-app-v-51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 30d29b8cd1..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/accessibility-for-app-v-51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,174 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Accessibility for App-V 5.1
-description: Accessibility for App-V 5.1
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: ef3f7742-f2e9-4748-ad60-74e0961b1bd9
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Accessibility for App-V 5.1
-
-
-Microsoft is committed to making its products and services easier for everyone to use. This section provides information about features and services that make this product and its corresponding documentation more accessible for people with disabilities.
-
-## Keyboard Shortcuts for the App-V 5.1 Management Server
-
-
-Following are the keyboard Shortcuts for the App-V 5.1 Management Server:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
To do this
-
Press
-
-
-
-
-
Close a dialog box.
-
Esc
-
-
-
Perform the default action of a dialog box.
-
Enter
-
-
-
Refresh the current page of the App-V 5.1 client console.
-
F5
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Keyboard Shortcuts for the App-V 5.1 Sequencer
-
-
-Following are the keyboard shortcuts for the Virtual Registry tab in the package editor in the App-V 5.1 Sequencer:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
To do this
-
Press
-
-
-
-
-
Open the Find dialog box.
-
CTRL + F
-
-
-
Open the Replace dialog box.
-
CTRL + H
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Access Any Command with a Few Keystrokes
-
-**Important**
-The information in this section only applies to the App-V 5.1 sequencer. For specific information about the App-V 5.1 server, see the Keyboard Shortcuts for the App-V 5.1 Management Server section of this document.
-
-
-
-Access keys let you quickly use a command by pressing a few keys. You can get to most commands by using two keystrokes. To use an access key:
-
-1. Press ALT.
-
- An underline appears beneath the keyboard shortcut for each feature that is available in the current view.
-
-2. Press the letter underlined in the keyboard shortcut for the feature that you want to use.
-
-**Note**
-To cancel the action that you are taking and hide the keyboard shortcuts, press ALT.
-
-
-
-## Documentation in Alternative Formats
-
-
-If you have difficulty reading or handling printed materials, you can obtain the documentation for many Microsoft products in more accessible formats. You can view an index of accessible product documentation on the Microsoft Accessibility website. In addition, you can obtain additional Microsoft publications from Learning Ally (formerly Recording for the Blind & Dyslexic, Inc.). Learning Ally distributes these documents to registered, eligible members of their distribution service.
-
-For information about the availability of Microsoft product documentation and books from Microsoft Press, contact:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Learning Ally (formerly Recording for the Blind & Dyslexic, Inc.)
-
20 Roszel Road
-
Princeton, NJ 08540
-
-
-
-
Telephone number from within the United States:
-
(800) 221-4792
-
-
-
Telephone number from outside the United States and Canada:
Web addresses can change, so you might be unable to connect to the website or sites mentioned here.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Customer Service for People with Hearing Impairments
-
-
-If you are deaf or hard-of-hearing, complete access to Microsoft product and customer services is available through a text telephone (TTY/TDD) service:
-
-- For customer service, contact Microsoft Sales Information Center at (800) 892-5234 between 6:30 AM and 5:30 PM Pacific Time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.
-
-- For technical assistance in the United States, contact Microsoft Product Support Services at (800) 892-5234 between 6:00 AM and 6:00 PM Pacific Time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays. In Canada, dial (905) 568-9641 between 8:00 AM and 8:00 PM Eastern Time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.
-
-Microsoft Support Services are subject to the prices, terms, and conditions in place at the time the service is used.
-
-## For More Information
-
-
-For more information about how accessible technology for computers helps to improve the lives of people with disabilities, see the [Microsoft Accessibility website](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=8431).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Getting Started with App-V 5.1](getting-started-with-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/administering-app-v-50-virtual-applications-by-using-the-management-console.md b/mdop/appv-v5/administering-app-v-50-virtual-applications-by-using-the-management-console.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 50214f1054..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/administering-app-v-50-virtual-applications-by-using-the-management-console.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,119 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Administering App-V 5.0 Virtual Applications by Using the Management Console
-description: Administering App-V 5.0 Virtual Applications by Using the Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: e9280dbd-782b-493a-b495-daab25247795
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 10/03/2016
----
-
-
-# Administering App-V 5.0 Virtual Applications by Using the Management Console
-
-
-Use the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 management server to manage packages, connection groups, and package access in your environment. The server publishes application icons, shortcuts, and file type associations to authorized computers that run the App-V 5.0 client. One or more management servers typically share a common data store for configuration and package information.
-
-The management server uses Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) groups to manage user authorization and has SQL Server installed to manage the database and data store.
-
-Because the management servers stream applications to end users on demand, these servers are ideally suited for system configurations that have reliable, high-bandwidth LANs. The management server consists of the following components:
-
-- Management Server – Use the management server to manage packages and connection groups.
-
-- Publishing Server – Use the publishing server to deploy packages to computers that run the App-V 5.0 client.
-
-- Management Database - Use the management database to manage the package access and to publish the server’s synchronization with the management server.
-
-## Management Console tasks
-
-
-The most common tasks that you can perform with the App-V 5.0 Management console are:
-
-- [How to Connect to the Management Console](how-to-connect-to-the-management-console-beta.md)
-
-- [How to Add or Upgrade Packages by Using the Management Console](how-to-add-or-upgrade-packages-by-using-the-management-console-beta-gb18030.md)
-
-- [How to Configure Access to Packages by Using the Management Console](how-to-configure-access-to-packages-by-using-the-management-console-50.md)
-
-- [How to Publish a Package by Using the Management Console](how-to-publish-a-package-by-using-the-management-console-50.md)
-
-- [How to Delete a Package in the Management Console](how-to-delete-a-package-in-the-management-console-beta.md)
-
-- [How to Add or Remove an Administrator by Using the Management Console](how-to-add-or-remove-an-administrator-by-using-the-management-console.md)
-
-- [How to Register and Unregister a Publishing Server by Using the Management Console](how-to-register-and-unregister-a-publishing-server-by-using-the-management-console.md)
-
-- [How to Create a Custom Configuration File by Using the App-V 5.0 Management Console](how-to-create-a-custom-configuration-file-by-using-the-app-v-50-management-console.md)
-
-- [How to Transfer Access and Configurations to Another Version of a Package by Using the Management Console](how-to-transfer-access-and-configurations-to-another-version-of-a-package-by-using-the-management-console.md)
-
-- [How to Customize Virtual Applications Extensions for a Specific AD Group by Using the Management Console](how-to-customize-virtual-applications-extensions-for-a-specific-ad-group-by-using-the-management-console.md)
-
-- [Configure Applications and Default Virtual Application Extensions in Management Console](configure-applications-and-default-virtual-application-extensions-in-management-console.md)
-
-The main elements of the App-V 5.0 Management Console are:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Management Console tab
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Overview
-
-
-
App-V Sequencer - Select this option to review general information about using the App-V 5.0 sequencer.
-
Application Packages Library – Select this option to open the PACKAGES page of the Management Console. Use this page to review packages that have been added to the server. You can also manage the connection groups, as well as add or upgrade packages.
-
SERVERS – Select this option to open the SERVERS page of the Management Console. Use this page to review the list of servers that have been registered with your App-V 5.0 infrastructure.
-
CLIENTS – Select this option to review general information about App-V 5.0 clients.
-
-
-
-
Packages tab
-
Use the PACKAGES tab to add or upgrade packages. You can also manage connection groups by clicking CONNECTION GROUPS.
-
-
-
Servers tab
-
Use the SERVERS tab to register a new server.
-
-
-
Administrators tab
-
Use the ADMINISTRATORS tab to register, add, or remove administrators in your App-V 5.0 environment.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Other resources for this App-V 5.0 deployment
-
-
-- [Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0 Administrator's Guide](microsoft-application-virtualization-50-administrators-guide.md)
-
-- [Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/administering-app-v-51-by-using-powershell.md b/mdop/appv-v5/administering-app-v-51-by-using-powershell.md
deleted file mode 100644
index be798c4983..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/administering-app-v-51-by-using-powershell.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,143 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Administering App-V 5.1 by Using PowerShell
-description: Administering App-V 5.1 by Using PowerShell
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 9e10ff07-2cd9-4dc1-9e99-582f90c36081
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Administering App-V 5.1 by Using PowerShell
-
-
-Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 provides Windows PowerShell cmdlets, which can help administrators perform various App-V 5.1 tasks. The following sections provide more information about using PowerShell with App-V 5.1.
-
-## How to administer App-V 5.1 by using PowerShell
-
-
-Use the following PowerShell procedures to perform various App-V 5.1 tasks.
-
-
Describes how to take an array of account names and to convert each of them to the corresponding SID in standard and hexadecimal formats.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Important**
-Make sure that any script you execute with your App-V packages matches the execution policy that you have configured for PowerShell.
-
-
-
-## PowerShell Error Handling
-
-
-Use the following table for information about App-V 5.1 PowerShell error handling.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Event
-
Action
-
-
-
-
-
Using the RollbackOnError attribute with embedded scripts
-
When you use the RollbackOnError attribute with embedded scripts, the attribute is ignored for the following events:
-
-
Removing a package
-
Unpublishing a package
-
Terminating a virtual environment
-
Terminating a process
-
-
-
-
Package name contains $
-
If a package name contains the character ( $ ), you must use a single-quote ( ‘ ), for example,
-
Add-AppvClientPackage ‘Contoso$App.appv’
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/administering-app-v-51-virtual-applications-by-using-the-management-console.md b/mdop/appv-v5/administering-app-v-51-virtual-applications-by-using-the-management-console.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 26ff07008e..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/administering-app-v-51-virtual-applications-by-using-the-management-console.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,118 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Administering App-V 5.1 Virtual Applications by Using the Management Console
-description: Administering App-V 5.1 Virtual Applications by Using the Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: a4d078aa-ec54-4fa4-9463-bfb3b971d724
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Administering App-V 5.1 Virtual Applications by Using the Management Console
-
-
-Use the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 management server to manage packages, connection groups, and package access in your environment. The server publishes application icons, shortcuts, and file type associations to authorized computers that run the App-V 5.1 client. One or more management servers typically share a common data store for configuration and package information.
-
-The management server uses Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) groups to manage user authorization and has SQL Server installed to manage the database and data store.
-
-Because the management servers stream applications to end users on demand, these servers are ideally suited for system configurations that have reliable, high-bandwidth LANs. The management server consists of the following components:
-
-- Management Server – Use the management server to manage packages and connection groups.
-
-- Publishing Server – Use the publishing server to deploy packages to computers that run the App-V 5.1 client.
-
-- Management Database - Use the management database to manage the package access and to publish the server’s synchronization with the management server.
-
-## Management Console tasks
-
-
-The most common tasks that you can perform with the App-V 5.1 Management console are:
-
-- [How to Connect to the Management Console](how-to-connect-to-the-management-console-51.md)
-
-- [How to Add or Upgrade Packages by Using the Management Console](how-to-add-or-upgrade-packages-by-using-the-management-console-51-gb18030.md)
-
-- [How to Configure Access to Packages by Using the Management Console](how-to-configure-access-to-packages-by-using-the-management-console-51.md)
-
-- [How to Publish a Package by Using the Management Console](how-to-publish-a-package-by-using-the-management-console-51.md)
-
-- [How to Delete a Package in the Management Console](how-to-delete-a-package-in-the-management-console-51.md)
-
-- [How to Add or Remove an Administrator by Using the Management Console](how-to-add-or-remove-an-administrator-by-using-the-management-console51.md)
-
-- [How to Register and Unregister a Publishing Server by Using the Management Console](how-to-register-and-unregister-a-publishing-server-by-using-the-management-console51.md)
-
-- [How to Create a Custom Configuration File by Using the App-V 5.1 Management Console](how-to-create-a-custom-configuration-file-by-using-the-app-v-51-management-console.md)
-
-- [How to Transfer Access and Configurations to Another Version of a Package by Using the Management Console](how-to-transfer-access-and-configurations-to-another-version-of-a-package-by-using-the-management-console51.md)
-
-- [How to Customize Virtual Applications Extensions for a Specific AD Group by Using the Management Console](how-to-customize-virtual-applications-extensions-for-a-specific-ad-group-by-using-the-management-console51.md)
-
-- [How to View and Configure Applications and Default Virtual Application Extensions by Using the Management Console](how-to-view-and-configure-applications-and-default-virtual-application-extensions-by-using-the-management-console-beta.md)
-
-The main elements of the App-V 5.1 Management Console are:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Management Console tab
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Packages tab
-
Use the PACKAGES tab to add or upgrade packages.
-
-
-
Connection Groups tab
-
Use the CONNECTION GROUPS tab to manage connection groups.
-
-
-
Servers tab
-
Use the SERVERS tab to register a new server.
-
-
-
Administrators tab
-
Use the ADMINISTRATORS tab to register, add, or remove administrators in your App-V 5.1 environment.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Important**
-JavaScript must be enabled on the browser that opens the Web Management Console.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Other resources for this App-V 5.1 deployment
-
-
-- [Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.1 Administrator's Guide](microsoft-application-virtualization-51-administrators-guide.md)
-
-- [Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/administering-app-v-by-using-powershell.md b/mdop/appv-v5/administering-app-v-by-using-powershell.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8d6b8071a3..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/administering-app-v-by-using-powershell.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,138 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Administering App-V by Using PowerShell
-description: Administering App-V by Using PowerShell
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 1ff4686a-1e19-4eff-b648-ada091281094
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Administering App-V by Using PowerShell
-
-
-Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 provides Windows PowerShell cmdlets, which can help administrators perform various App-V 5.0 tasks. The following sections provide more information about using PowerShell with App-V 5.0.
-
-## How to administer App-V 5.0 by using PowerShell
-
-
-Use the following PowerShell procedures to perform various App-V 5.0 tasks.
-
-
Describes how to take an array of account names and to convert each of them to the corresponding SID in standard and hexadecimal formats.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## PowerShell Error Handling
-
-
-Use the following table for information about App-V 5.0 PowerShell error handling.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Event
-
Action
-
-
-
-
-
Using the RollbackOnError attribute with embedded scripts
-
When you use the RollbackOnError attribute with embedded scripts, the attribute is ignored for the following events:
-
-
Removing a package
-
Unpublishing a package
-
Terminating a virtual environment
-
Terminating a process
-
-
-
-
Package name contains $
-
If a package name contains the character ( $ ), you must use a single-quote ( ‘ ), for example,
-
Add-AppvClientPackage ‘Contoso$App.appv’
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-50-capacity-planning.md b/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-50-capacity-planning.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 3fe507eacf..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-50-capacity-planning.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,963 +0,0 @@
----
-title: App-V 5.0 Capacity Planning
-description: App-V 5.0 Capacity Planning
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 56f48b00-cd91-4280-9481-5372a0e2e792
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# App-V 5.0 Capacity Planning
-
-
-The following recommendations can be used as a baseline to help determine capacity planning information that is appropriate to your organization’s App-V 5.0 infrastructure.
-
-**Important**
-Use the information in this section only as a general guide for planning your App-V 5.0 deployment. Your system capacity requirements will depend on the specific details of your hardware and application environment. Additionally, the performance numbers displayed in this document are examples and your results may vary.
-
-
-
-## Determine the Project Scope
-
-
-Before you design the App-V 5.0 infrastructure, you must determine the project’s scope. The scope consists of determining which applications will be available virtually and to also identify the target users, and their locations. This information will help determine what type of App-V 5.0 infrastructure should be implemented. Decisions about the scope of the project must be based on the specific needs of your organization.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
More Information
-
-
-
-
-
Determine Application Scope
-
Depending on the applications to be virtualized, the App-V 5.0 infrastructure can be set up in different ways. The first task is to define what applications you want to virtualize.
-
-
-
Determine Location Scope
-
Location scope refers to the physical locations (for example, enterprise-wide or a specific geographic location) where you plan to run the virtualized applications. It can also refer to the user population (for example, a single department) who will run the virtual applications. You should obtain a network map that includes the connection paths as well as available bandwidth to each location and the number of users using virtualized applications and the WAN link speed.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Determine Which App-V 5.0 Infrastructure is Required
-
-
-**Important**
-Both of the following models require the App-V 5.0 client to be installed on the computer where you plan to run virtual applications.
-
-You can also manage your App-V 5.0 environment using an Electronic Software Distribution (ESD) solution such as Microsoft Systems Center Configuration Manager. For more information see [Deploying App-V 5.0 Packages by Using Electronic Software Distribution (ESD)](deploying-app-v-50-packages-by-using-electronic-software-distribution--esd-.md).
-
-
-
-- **Standalone Model** - The standalone model allows virtual applications to be Windows Installer-enabled for distribution without streaming. App-V 5.0 in Standalone Mode consists of the sequencer and the client; no additional components are required. Applications are prepared for virtualization using a process called sequencing. For more information see, [Planning for the App-V 5.0 Sequencer and Client Deployment](planning-for-the-app-v-50-sequencer-and-client-deployment.md). The stand-alone model is recommended for the following scenarios:
-
- - With disconnected remote users who cannot connect to the App-V 5.0 infrastructure.
-
- - When you are running a software management system, such as Configuration Manager 2012.
-
- - When network bandwidth limitations inhibit electronic software distribution.
-
-- **Full Infrastructure Model** - The full infrastructure model provides for software distribution, management, and reporting capabilities; it also includes the streaming of applications across the network. The App-V 5.0 Full Infrastructure Model consists of one or more App-V 5.0 management servers. The Management Server can be used to publish applications to all clients. The publishing process places the virtual application icons and shortcuts on the target computer. It can also stream applications to local users. For more information about installing the management server see, [Planning for the App-V 5.0 Server Deployment](planning-for-the-app-v-50-server-deployment.md). The full infrastructure model is recommended for the following scenarios:
-
- **Important**
- The App-V 5.0 full infrastructure model requires Microsoft SQL Server to store configuration data. For more information see [App-V 5.0 Supported Configurations](app-v-50-supported-configurations.md).
-
-
-
- - When you want to use the Management Server to publish the application to target computers.
-
- - For rapid provisioning of applications to target computers.
-
- - When you want to use App-V 5.0 reporting.
-
-## End-to-end Server Sizing Guidance
-
-
-The following section provides information about end-to-end App-V 5.0 sizing and planning. For more specific information, refer to the subsequent sections.
-
-**Note**
-Round trip response time on the client is the time taken by the computer running the App-V 5.0 client to receive a successful notification from the publishing server. Round trip response time on the publishing server is the time taken by the computer running the publishing server to receive a successful package metadata update from the management server.
-
-
-
-- 20,000 clients can target a single publishing server to obtain the package refreshes in an acceptable round trip time. (<3 seconds)
-
-- A single management server can support up to 50 publishing servers for package metadata refreshes in an acceptable round trip time. (<5 seconds)
-
-## App-V 5.0 Management Server Capacity Planning Recommendations
-
-
-The App-V 5.0 publishing servers require the management server for package refresh requests and package refresh responses. The management server then sends the information to the management database to retrieve information. For more information about App-V 5.0 management server supported configurations see [App-V 5.0 Supported Configurations](app-v-50-supported-configurations.md).
-
-**Note**
-The default refresh time on the App-V 5.0 publishing server is ten minutes.
-
-
-
-When multiple simultaneous publishing servers contact a single management server for package metadata refreshes, the following three factors influence the round trip response time on the publishing server:
-
-1. Number of publishing servers making simultaneous requests.
-
-2. Number of connection groups configured on the management server.
-
-3. Number of access groups configured on the management server.
-
-The following table displays more information about each factor that impacts round trip time.
-
-**Note**
-Round trip response time is the time taken by the computer running the App-V 5.0 publishing server to receive a successful package metadata update from the management server.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Factors impacting round trip response time
-
More Information
-
-
-
-
-
The number of publishing servers simultaneously requesting package metadata refreshes.
-
-
-
A single management server can respond to up to 320 publishing servers requesting publishing metadata simultaneously.
-
Round trip response time for 320 pub servers is ~40 seconds.
-
For <50 publishing servers requesting metadata simultaneously, the round trip response time is <5 seconds.
-
From 50 to 320 publishing servers, the response time increases linearly (approximately 2x).
-
-
-
-
The number of connection groups configured on the management server.
-
-
-
-
For up to 100 connection groups, there is no significant change in the round trip response time on the publishing server.
-
For 100 - 400 connection groups, there is a minor linear increase in the round trip response time.
-
-
-
-
The number of access groups configured on the management server.
-
-
-
-
For up to 40 access groups, there is a linear (approximately 3x) increase in the round trip response time on the publishing server.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-The following table displays sample values for each of the previous factors. In each variation, 120 packages are refreshed from the App-V 5.0management server.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Scenario
-
Variation
-
Number of connection groups
-
Number of access groups
-
Number of publishing servers
-
Network connection type publishing server / management server
-
Round trip response time on the publishing server (in seconds)
-
CPU utilization on management server
-
-
-
-
-
Publishing servers simultaneously contacting management server for publishing metadata.
-
Number of publishing servers
-
-
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
-
-
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
-
-
-
50
-
100
-
200
-
300
-
315
-
320
-
-
-
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
-
-
-
5
-
10
-
19
-
32
-
30
-
37
-
-
-
-
17
-
17
-
17
-
15
-
17
-
15
-
-
-
-
Publishing metadata contains connection groups
-
Number of connection groups
-
-
-
10
-
50
-
100
-
150
-
300
-
400
-
-
-
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
-
-
-
100
-
100
-
100
-
100
-
100
-
100
-
-
-
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
-
-
-
10
-
11
-
11
-
16
-
22
-
25
-
-
-
-
17
-
19
-
22
-
19
-
20
-
20
-
-
-
-
Publishing metadata contains access groups
-
Number of access groups
-
-
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
-
-
-
1
-
10
-
20
-
40
-
-
-
-
100
-
100
-
100
-
100
-
-
-
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
-
-
-
10
-
43
-
153
-
535
-
-
-
-
17
-
26
-
24
-
24
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-The CPU utilization of the computer running the management server is around 25% irrespective of the number of publishing servers targeting it. The Microsoft SQL Server database transactions/sec, batch requests/sec and user connections are identical irrespective of the number of publishing servers. For example: Transactions/sec is ~30, batch requests ~200, and user connects ~6.
-
-Using a geographically distributed deployment, where the management server & publishing servers utilize a slow link network between them, the round trip response time on the publishing servers is within acceptable time limits (<5 seconds), even for 100 simultaneous requests on a single management server.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Scenario
-
Variation
-
Number of connection groups
-
Number of access groups
-
Number of publishing servers
-
Network connection type publishing server / management server
-
Round trip response time on the publishing server (in seconds)
-
CPU utilization on management server
-
-
-
-
-
Network connection between the publishing server and management server
-
1.5 Mbps Slow link Network
-
-
-
0
-
0
-
-
-
-
1
-
1
-
-
-
-
50
-
100
-
-
-
-
1.5Mbps Cable DSL
-
1.5Mbps Cable DSL
-
-
-
-
4
-
5
-
-
-
-
1
-
2
-
-
-
-
Network connection between the publishing server and management server
-
LAN / WIFI Network
-
-
-
0
-
0
-
-
-
-
1
-
1
-
-
-
-
100
-
200
-
-
-
-
Wifi
-
Wifi
-
-
-
-
11
-
20
-
-
-
-
15
-
17
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Whether the management server and publishing servers are connected over a slow link network, or a high speed network, the management server can handle approximately 15,000 package refresh requests in 30 minutes.
-
-## App-V 5.0 Reporting Server Capacity Planning Recommendations
-
-
-App-V 5.0 clients send reporting data to the reporting server. The reporting server then records the information in the Microsoft SQL Server database and returns a successful notification back to the computer running App-V 5.0 client. For more information about App-V 5.0 Reporting Server supported configurations see [App-V 5.0 Supported Configurations](app-v-50-supported-configurations.md).
-
-**Note**
-Round trip response time is the time taken by the computer running the App-V 5.0 client to send the reporting information to the reporting server and receive a successful notification from the reporting server.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Scenario
-
Summary
-
-
-
-
-
Multiple App-V 5.0 clients send reporting information to the reporting server simultaneously.
-
-
-
Round trip response time from the reporting server is 2.6 seconds for 500 clients.
-
Round trip response time from the reporting server is 5.65 seconds for 1000 clients.
-
Round trip response time increases linearly depending on number of clients.
-
-
-
-
Requests per second processed by the reporting server.
-
-
-
-
A single reporting server and a single database, can process a maximum of 139 requests per second. The average is 121 requests/second.
-
Using two reporting servers reporting to the same Microsoft SQL Server database, the average requests/second is similar to a single reporting server = ~127, with a max of 278 requests/second.
-
A single reporting server can process 500 concurrent/active connections.
-
A single reporting server can process a maximum 1500 concurrent connections.
-
-
-
-
Reporting Database.
-
-
-
-
Lock contention on the computer running Microsoft SQL Server is the limiting factor for requests/second.
-
Throughput and response time are independent of database size.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Calculating random delay**:
-
-The random delay specifies the maximum delay (in minutes) for data to be sent to the reporting server. When the scheduled task is started, the client generates a random delay between **0** and **ReportingRandomDelay** and will wait the specified duration before sending data.
-
-Random delay = 4 \* number of clients / average requests per second.
-
-Example: For 500 clients, with 120 requests per second, the Random delay is, 4 \* 500 / 120 = ~17 minutes.
-
-## App-V 5.0 Publishing Server Capacity Planning Recommendations
-
-
-Computers running the App-V 5.0 client connect to the App-V 5.0 publishing server to send a publishing refresh request and to receive a response. Round trip response time is measured on the computer running the App-V 5.0 client. Processor time is measured on the publishing server. For more information about App-V 5.0 Publishing Server supported configurations see [App-V 5.0 Supported Configurations](app-v-50-supported-configurations.md).
-
-**Important**
-The following list displays the main factors to consider when setting up the App-V 5.0 publishing server:
-
-- The number of clients connecting simultaneously to a single publishing server.
-
-- The number of packages in each refresh.
-
-- The available network bandwidth in your environment between the client and the App-V 5.0 publishing server.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Scenario
-
Summary
-
-
-
-
-
Multiple App-V 5.0 clients connect to a single publishing server simultaneously.
-
-
-
A publishing server running dual core processors can respond to at most 5000 clients requesting a refresh simultaneously.
-
For 5000-10000 clients, the publishing server requires a minimum quad core.
-
For 10000-20000 clients, the publishing server should have dual quad cores for more efficient response times.
-
A publishing server with a quad core can refresh up to 10000 packages within 3 seconds. (Supporting 10000 simultaneous clients)
-
-
-
-
Number of packages in each refresh.
-
-
-
-
Increasing number of packages will increase response time by ~40% (up to 1000 packages).
-
-
-
-
Network between the App-V 5.0 client and the publishing server.
-
-
-
-
Across a slow network (1.5 Mbps bandwidth), there is a 97% increase in response time compared to LAN (up to 1000 users).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Note**
-The publishing server CPU usage is always high during the time interval when it has to process simultaneous requests (>90% in most cases). The publishing server can handle ~1500 client requests in 1 second.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Scenario
-
Variation
-
Number of App-V 5.0 clients
-
Number of packages
-
Processor configuration on the publishing server
-
Network connection type publishing server / App-V 5.0 client
-
Round trip time on the App-V 5.0 client (in seconds)
-
-
-
-## App-V 5.0 Streaming Capacity Planning Recommendations
-
-
-Computers running the App-V 5.0 client stream the virtual application package from the streaming server. Round trip response time is measured on the computer running the App-V 5.0 client, and is the time taken to stream the entire package.
-
-**Important**
-The following list identifies the main factors to consider when setting up the App-V 5.0 streaming server:
-
-- The number of clients streaming application packages simultaneously from a single streaming server.
-
-- The size of the package being streamed.
-
-- The available network bandwidth in your environment between the client and the streaming server.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Scenario
-
Summary
-
-
-
-
-
Multiple App-V 5.0 clients stream applications from a single streaming server simultaneously.
-
-
-
If the number of clients simultaneously streaming from the same server increases, there is a linear relationship with the package download/streaming time.
-
-
-
-
Size of the package being streamed.
-
-
-
-
The package size has a significant impact on the streaming/download time only for larger packages with a size ~ 1GB. For package sizes ranging from 3 MB to 100 MB, the streaming time ranges from 20 seconds to 100 seconds, with 100 simultaneous clients.
-
-
-
-
Network between the App-V 5.0 client and the streaming server.
-
-
-
-
Across a slow network (1.5 Mbps bandwidth), there is a 70-80% increase in response time compared to LAN (up to 100 users).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-The following table displays sample values for each of the factors in the previous list:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Scenario
-
Variation
-
Number of App-V 5.0 clients
-
Size of each package
-
Network connection type streaming server / App-V 5.0 client
-
Round trip time on the App-V 5.0 client (in seconds)
-
-
-
-
-
Multiple App-V 5.0 clients streaming virtual application packages from a streaming server.
-
Number of clients.
-
-
-
100
-
200
-
1000
-
-
100
-
200
-
1000
-
-
-
-
3.5 MB
-
3.5 MB
-
3.5 MB
-
-
5 MB
-
5 MB
-
5 MB
-
-
-
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
-
-
-
29
-
39
-
391
-
-
35
-
68
-
461
-
-
-
-
Size of each package being streamed.
-
Size of each package.
-
-
-
100
-
200
-
-
100
-
200
-
-
-
-
21 MB
-
21 MB
-
-
109
-
109
-
-
-
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
-
-
33
-
83
-
-
100
-
160
-
-
-
Network connection between client and App-V 5.0 streaming server.
-
1.5 Mbps Slow link network.
-
-
-
100
-
-
100
-
-
-
-
3.5 MB
-
-
5 MB
-
-
-
-
1.5 Mbps Intra-Continental Network
-
-
-
102
-
-
121
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Each App-V 5.0 streaming server should be able to handle a minimum of 200 clients concurrently streaming virtualized applications.
-
-**Note**
-The actual time to it will take to stream is determined primarily by the number of clients streaming simultaneously, number of packages, package size, the server’s network activity, and network conditions.
-
-
-
-For example, an average user can stream a 100 MB package in less than 2 minutes, when 100 simultaneous clients are streaming from the server. However, a package of size 1 GB could take up to 30 minutes. In most real world environments streaming demand is not uniformly distributed, you will need to understand the approximate peak streaming requirements present in your environment in order to properly size the number of required streaming servers.
-
-The number of clients a streaming server can support can be significantly increased and the peak streaming requirements reduced if you pre-cache your applications. You can also increase the number of clients a streaming server can support by using on-demand streaming delivery and stream optimized packages.
-
-## Combining App-V 5.0 Server Roles
-
-
-Discounting scaling and fault-tolerance requirements, the minimum number of servers needed for a location with connectivity to Active Directory is one. This server will host the management server, management server service, and Microsoft SQL Server roles. Server roles, therefore, can be arranged in any desired combination since they do not conflict with one another.
-
-Ignoring scaling requirements, the minimum number of servers necessary to provide a fault-tolerant implementation is four. The management server, and Microsoft SQL Server roles support being placed in fault-tolerant configurations. The management server service can be combined with any of the roles, but remains a single point of failure.
-
-Although there are a number of fault-tolerance strategies and technologies available, not all are applicable to a given service. Additionally, if App-V 5.0 roles are combined, certain fault-tolerance options may no longer apply due to incompatibilities.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[App-V 5.0 Supported Configurations](app-v-50-supported-configurations.md)
-
-[Planning for High Availability with App-V 5.0](planning-for-high-availability-with-app-v-50.md)
-
-[Planning to Deploy App-V](planning-to-deploy-app-v.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-50-deployment-checklist.md b/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-50-deployment-checklist.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 2b84226c10..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-50-deployment-checklist.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,94 +0,0 @@
----
-title: App-V 5.0 Deployment Checklist
-description: App-V 5.0 Deployment Checklist
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: d6d93152-82b4-4b02-8b11-ed21d3331f00
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# App-V 5.0 Deployment Checklist
-
-
-This checklist can be used to help you during Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 deployment.
-
-**Note**
-This checklist outlines the recommended steps and a high-level list of items to consider when deploying App-V 5.0 features. It is recommended that you copy this checklist into a spreadsheet program and customize it for your use.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
References
-
Notes
-
-
-
-
-
-
Complete the planning phase to prepare the computing environment for App-V 5.0 deployment.
Review the App-V 5.0 supported configurations information to make sure selected client and server computers are supported for App-V 5.0 feature installation.
Run App-V 5.0 Setup to deploy the required App-V 5.0 features for your environment.
-
-Note
Keep track of the names of the servers and associated URL’s created during installation. This information will be used throughout the installation process.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying App-V 5.0](deploying-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-50-planning-checklist.md b/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-50-planning-checklist.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 3eeb21f0b8..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-50-planning-checklist.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,101 +0,0 @@
----
-title: App-V 5.0 Planning Checklist
-description: App-V 5.0 Planning Checklist
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 81d3fa62-3c9e-4de7-a9da-cd13112b0862
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# App-V 5.0 Planning Checklist
-
-
-This checklist can be used to help you plan for preparing your computing environment for Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 deployment.
-
-**Note**
-This checklist outlines the recommended steps and a high-level list of items to consider when planning for an App-V 5.0 deployment. It is recommended that you copy this checklist into a spreadsheet program and customize it for your use.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
References
-
Notes
-
-
-
-
-
-
Review the getting started information about App-V 5.0 to gain a basic understanding of the product before beginning deployment planning.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning for App-V 5.0](planning-for-app-v-50-rc.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-50-prerequisites.md b/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-50-prerequisites.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1d1dcd7770..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-50-prerequisites.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,436 +0,0 @@
----
-title: App-V 5.0 Prerequisites
-description: App-V 5.0 Prerequisites
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 9756b571-c785-4ce6-a95c-d4e134e89429
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# App-V 5.0 Prerequisites
-
-
-Before you begin the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 Setup, you should make sure that you have met the prerequisites to install the product. This topic contains information to help you successfully plan for preparing your computing environment before you deploy the App-V 5.0 features.
-
-**Important**
-**The prerequisites in this article apply only to App-V 5.0**. For additional prerequisites that apply to App-V 5.0 Service Packs, see the following web pages:
-
-- [What's new in App-V 5.0 SP1](whats-new-in-app-v-50-sp1.md)
-
-- [About App-V 5.0 SP2](about-app-v-50-sp2.md)
-
-- [App-V 5.0 SP3 Prerequisites](app-v-50-sp3-prerequisites.md)
-
-
-
-The following table lists prerequisite information that pertains to specific operating systems.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating systems
-
Prerequisite description
-
-
-
-
-
Computers that are running:
-
-
Windows 8
-
Windows Server 2012
-
-
The following prerequisites are already installed:
-
-
Microsoft .NET Framework 4.5 – you do not need Microsoft .NET Framework 4
Be sure to check for subsequent KBs that have superseded this one, and note that some KBs may require that you uninstall previous updates.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Installation prerequisites for App-V 5.0
-
-
-**Note**
-The following prerequisites are already installed for computers that run Windows 8.
-
-
-
-Each of the App-V 5.0 features have specific prerequisites that must be met before the App-V 5.0 features can be successfully installed.
-
-### Prerequisites for the App-V 5.0 client
-
-The following table lists the installation prerequisites for the App-V 5.0 client:
-
-
-
-
-
-### Prerequisites for the App-V 5.0 Remote Desktop Services client
-
-**Note**
-The following prerequisites are already installed for computers that run Windows Server 2012.
-
-
-
-The following table lists the installation prerequisites for the App-V 5.0 Remote Desktop Services client:
-
-
-
-
-
-### Prerequisites for the App-V 5.0 Sequencer
-
-**Note**
-The following prerequisites are already installed for computers that run Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012.
-
-
-
-The following table lists the installation prerequisites for the App-V 5.0 Sequencer. If possible, the computer that runs the Sequencer should have the same hardware and software configurations as the computers that will run the virtual applications.
-
-**Note**
-If the system requirements of a locally installed application exceed the requirements of the Sequencer, you must meet the requirements of that application. Additionally, because the sequencing process is system resource-intensive, we recommend that the computer that runs the Sequencer has plenty of memory, a fast processor, and a fast hard drive. For more information see [App-V 5.0 Supported Configurations](app-v-50-supported-configurations.md).
-
-
-
-
You can download and install either one of the previous KB articles. However, they may have been replaced with a more recent version.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Prerequisites for the App-V 5.0 server
-
-**Note**
-The following prerequisites are already installed for computers that run Windows Server 2012:
-
-- Microsoft .NET Framework 4.5. This eliminates the Microsoft .NET Framework 4 requirement.
-
-- Windows PowerShell 3.0
-
-- Download and install [KB2533623](https://support.microsoft.com/kb/2533623) (http://support.microsoft.com/kb/2533623)
-
- **Important**
- You can still download install the previous KB. However, it may have been replaced with a more recent version.
-
-
-
-
-
-The following table lists the installation prerequisites for the App-V 5.0 server. The account that you use to install the server components must have administrative rights on the computer that you are installing on. This account must also have the ability to query Active Directory Directory Services. Before you install and configure the App-V 5.0 servers, you must specify a port where each component will be hosted. You must also add the associated firewall rules to allow incoming requests to the specified ports.
-
-**Note**
-Web Distributed Authoring and Versioning (WebDAV) is automatically disabled for the Management Service.
-
-
-
-The App-V 5.0 server is supported for a standalone deployment, where all the components are deployed on the same server, and a distributed deployment. Depending on the topology that you use to deploy the App-V 5.0 server, the data that you will need for each component will slightly change.
-
-**Important**
-The installation of the App-V 5.0 server on a computer that runs any previous version or component of App-V is not supported. Additionally, the installation of the server components on a computer that runs Server Core or a Domain Controller is also not supported.
-
-
-
-
Windows Web Server with the IIS role enabled and the following features: Common HTTP Features (static content and default document), Application Development (ASP.NET, .NET Extensibility, ISAPI Extensions and ISAPI Filters), Security (Windows Authentication, Request Filtering), Management Tools (IIS Management Console).
The App-V 5.0 server components are dependent but they have varying requirements and installation options that must be deployed. Use the following information to prepare your environment to run the App-V 5.0 management server.
-
-
Installation location - by default this component will be installed to: %PROGRAMFILES%\Microsoft Application Virtualization Server.
-
Location of the App-V 5.0 management database - SQL Server Name, SQL Instance Name, Database Name.
-
Access rights for the App-V 5.0 management console - This is the user or the group that should be granted access to the management console at the end of the deployment. After the deployment, only these users will have access to the management console until additional administrators are added through the management console.
-
-Note
Security groups and single users are not supported. You must specify an AD DS group.
-
-
-
-
-
App-V 5.0 management service website name – specify a name for the website or use the default name.
-
App-V 5.0 management service port binding - this should be a unique port number that is not used by another website on the computer.
-
Support for Microsoft Silverlight– Microsoft Silverlight must be installed before the management console is available. While this is not a requirement for the deployment, the server must be able to support Microsoft Silverlight.
-
-
-
-
Management Database
-
-
-Note
The database is required only when using the App-V 5.0 management server.
The App-V 5.0 server components are dependent but they have varying requirements and installation options that must be deployed. Use the following information to prepare your environment to run the App-V 5.0 management database.
-
-
Installation location - by default this component will be installed to %PROGRAMFILES%\Microsoft Application Virtualization Server.
-
Custom SQL Server instance name (if applicable) – the format should be INSTANCENAME, because the installation assumes that it is on the local machine. If you specify the name with the following format, SVR\INSTANCE will fail.
-
Custom App-V 5.0 database name (if applicable) – you must specify a unique database name. The default value for the management database is AppVManagement.
-
App-V 5.0 management server location – specifies the machine account on which the management server is deployed. This should be specified in the following format Domain\MachineAccount.
-
App-V 5.0 management server installation administrator - specifies the account that will be used to install the App-V 5.0 management server. You should use the following format: Domain\AdministratorLoginName.
To help reduce the risk of unwanted or malicious data being sent to the reporting server, you should restrict access to the Reporting Web Service per your corporate security policy.
-
-
-
-
-
Windows Web Server with the IIS role with the following features: Common HTTP Features (static content and default document), Application Development (ASP.NET, .NET Extensibility, ISAPI Extensions and ISAPI Filters), Security (Windows Authentication, Request Filtering), Security (Windows Authentication, Request Filtering), Management Tools (IIS Management Console)
-
64-bit ASP.NET registration
-
Installation location - by default this component is installed to %PROGRAMFILES%\Microsoft Application Virtualization Server.
-
App-V 5.0 reporting service website name – specifies the name of the website or the default name that will be used.
-
App-V 5.0 reporting service port binding - This should be a unique port number that is not already used by another website that runs on the computer.
-
-
-
-
Reporting Database
-
-
-Note
The database is required only when using the App-V 5.0 reporting server.
The App-V 5.0 server components are dependent but they have varying requirements and installation options that must be deployed. Use the following information to prepare your environment to run the App-V 5.0 reporting database.
-
-
Installation location - by default this component will be installed to %PROGRAMFILES%\Microsoft Application Virtualization Server.
-
Custom SQL Server instance name (if applicable) – the format should be INSTANCENAME, because the installation assumes that it is on the local machine. If you specify the name with the following format, SVR\INSTANCE will fail.
-
Custom App-V 5.0 database name (if applicable) – you must specify a unique database name. The default value for the reporting database is AppVReporting.
-
App-V 5.0 reporting server location – specifies the machine account on which the reporting server is deployed. This should be specified in the following format Domain\MachineAccount.
-
App-V 5.0 reporting server installation administrator - specifies the account that will be used to install the App-V 5.0 reporting server. You should use the following format: Domain\AdministratorLoginName.
-
Microsoft SQL Server Service and the Microsoft SQL Server Agent Service – these services must be associated with user accounts that have access to query AD.
Windows Web Server with the IIS role with the following features: Common HTTP Features (static content and default document), Application Development (ASP.NET, .NET Extensibility, ISAPI Extensions and ISAPI Filters), Security (Windows Authentication, Request Filtering), Security (Windows Authentication, Request Filtering), Management Tools (IIS Management Console)
-
64-bit ASP.NET registration
-
-
The App-V 5.0 server components are dependent but they have varying requirements and installation options that must be deployed. Use the following information to prepare your environment to run the App-V 5.0 publishing server.
-
-
Installation location - by default this component is installed to %PROGRAMFILES%\Microsoft Application Virtualization Server.
-
App-V 5.0 management service URL – specifies the URL of the App-V 5.0 management service. This is the port that the publishing server communicates with, and it should be specified using the following format: http://localhost:12345.
-
App-V 5.0 publishing service website name – specifies the name of the website or the default name that will be used.
-
App-V 5.0 publishing service port binding - This should be a unique port number that is not already used by another website that runs on the computer.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy App-V](planning-to-deploy-app-v.md)
-
-[App-V 5.0 Supported Configurations](app-v-50-supported-configurations.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-50-security-considerations.md b/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-50-security-considerations.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 3425e93637..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-50-security-considerations.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,128 +0,0 @@
----
-title: App-V 5.0 Security Considerations
-description: App-V 5.0 Security Considerations
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 1e7292a0-7972-4b4f-85a9-eaf33f6c563a
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# App-V 5.0 Security Considerations
-
-
-This topic contains a brief overview of the accounts and groups, log files, and other security-related considerations for App-V 5.0.
-
-**Important**
-App-V 5.0 is not a security product and does not provide any guarantees for a secure environment.
-
-
-
-## PackageStoreAccessControl (PSAC) feature has been deprecated
-
-
-Effective as of June, 2014, the PackageStoreAccessControl (PSAC) feature that was introduced in Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 Service Pack 2 (SP2) has been deprecated in both single-user and multi-user environments.
-
-## General security considerations
-
-
-**Understand the security risks.** The most serious risk to App-V 5.0 is that its functionality could be hijacked by an unauthorized user who could then reconfigure key data on App-V 5.0 clients. The loss of App-V 5.0 functionality for a short period of time due to a denial-of-service attack would not generally have a catastrophic impact.
-
-**Physically secure your computers**. Security is incomplete without physical security. Anyone with physical access to an App-V 5.0 server could potentially attack the entire client base. Any potential physical attacks must be considered high risk and mitigated appropriately. App-V 5.0 servers should be stored in a physically secure server room with controlled access. Secure these computers when administrators are not physically present by having the operating system lock the computer, or by using a secured screen saver.
-
-**Apply the most recent security updates to all computers**. To stay informed about the latest updates for operating systems, Microsoft SQL Server, and App-V 5.0, subscribe to the Security Notification service ().
-
-**Use strong passwords or pass phrases**. Always use strong passwords with 15 or more characters for all App-V 5.0 and App-V 5.0 administrator accounts. Never use blank passwords. For more information about password concepts, see the “Account Passwords and Policies” white paper on TechNet ().
-
-## Accounts and groups in App-V 5.0
-
-
-A best practice for user account management is to create domain global groups and add user accounts to them. Then, add the domain global accounts to the necessary App-V 5.0 local groups on the App-V 5.0 servers.
-
-**Note**
-App-V client computer accounts that need to connect to the publishing server must be part of the publishing server’s **Users** local group. By default, all computers in the domain are part of the **Authorized Users** group, which is part of the **Users** local group.
-
-
-
-### App-V 5.0 server security
-
-No groups are created automatically during App-V 5.0 Setup. You should create the following Active Directory Domain Services global groups to manage App-V 5.0 server operations.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Group name
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
App-V Management Admin group
-
Used to manage the App-V 5.0 management server. This group is created during the App-V 5.0 Management Server installation.
-
-Important
There is no method to create the group using the management console after you have completed the installation.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Database read/write for Management Service account
-
Provides read/write access to the management database. This account should be created during the App-V 5.0 management database installation.
-
-
-
App-V Management Service install admin account
-
-Note
This is only required if management database is being installed separately from the service.
-
-
-
-
-
Provides public access to schema-version table in management database. This account should be created during the App-V 5.0 management database installation.
-
-
-
App-V Reporting Service install admin account
-
-Note
This is only required if reporting database is being installed separately from the service.
-
-
-
-
-
Public access to schema-version table in reporting database. This account should be created during the App-V 5.0 reporting database installation.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Consider the following additional information:
-
-- Access to the package shares - If a share exists on the same computer as the management Server, the **Network** service requires read access to the share. In addition, each App-V client computer must have read access to the package share.
-
- **Note**
- In previous versions of App-V, package share was referred to as content share.
-
-
-
-- Registering publishing servers with Management Server - A publishing server must be registered with the Management server. For example, it must be added to the database, so that the Publishing server machine accounts are able to call into the Management service API.
-
-### App-V 5.0 package security
-
-The following will help you plan how to ensure that virtualized packages are secure.
-
-- If an application installer applies an access control list (ACL) to a file or directory, then that ACL is not persisted in the package. When the package is deployed, if the file or directory is modified by a user it will either inherit the ACL in the **%userprofile%** or inherit the ACL of the target computer’s directory. The former case occurs if the file or directory does not exist in a virtual file system location; the latter case occurs if the file or directory exists in a virtual file system location, for example **%windir%**.
-
-## App-V 5.0 log files
-
-
-During App-V 5.0 Setup, setup log files are created in the **%temp%** folder of the installing user.
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-50-sp3-prerequisites.md b/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-50-sp3-prerequisites.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4b92ce66e0..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-50-sp3-prerequisites.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,659 +0,0 @@
----
-title: App-V 5.0 SP3 Prerequisites
-description: App-V 5.0 SP3 Prerequisites
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: fa8d5578-3a53-4e8a-95c7-e7a5f6e4a31c
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# App-V 5.0 SP3 Prerequisites
-
-
-Before installing Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 SP3, ensure that you have installed all of the following required prerequisite software.
-
-For a list of supported operating systems and hardware requirements for the App-V Server, Sequencer, and Client, see [App-V 5.0 SP3 Supported Configurations](app-v-50-sp3-supported-configurations.md).
-
-## Summary of software preinstalled on each operating system
-
-
-The following table indicates the software that is already installed for different operating systems.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating system
-
Prerequisite description
-
-
-
-
-
Windows 8.1
-
All of the prerequisite software is already installed.
-
-
-
Windows 8
-
Windows Server 2012
-
The following prerequisite software is already installed:
-
-
Microsoft .NET Framework 4.5
-
Windows PowerShell 3.0
-
-Note
Installing PowerShell 3.0 requires a restart.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Windows 7
-
The prerequisite software is not already installed. You must install it before you can install App-V.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## App-V Server prerequisite software
-
-
-Install the required prerequisite software for the App-V 5.0 SP3 Server components.
-
-### What to know before you start
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Account for installing the App-V Server
-
The account that you use to install the App-V Server components must have:
-
-
Administrative rights on the computer on which you are installing the components.
-
The ability to query Active Directory Domain Services.
-
-
-
-
Port and firewall
-
-
Specify a port where each component will be hosted.
-
Add the associated firewall rules to allow incoming requests to the specified ports.
-
-
-
-
-
Web Distributed Authoring and Versioning (WebDAV)
-
WebDAV is automatically disabled for the Management Service.
-
-
-
Supported deployment scenarios
-
-
A stand-alone deployment, where all components are deployed on the same server.
-
A distributed deployment.
-
-
-
-
Unsupported deployment scenarios
-
-
Installing the App-V Server on a computer that runs any previous version or component of App-V.
-
Installing the App-V server components on a computer that runs server core or domain controller.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Management server prerequisite software
-
-
This role must be added to a server operating system that is supported for the Management server.
-
-
-
Web Server (IIS) Management Tools
-
Click IIS Management Scripts and Tools.
-
-
-
Web Server Role Services
-
Common HTTP Features:
-
-
Static Content
-
Default Document
-
-
Application Development:
-
-
ASP.NET
-
.NET Extensibility
-
ISAPI Extensions
-
ISAPI Filters
-
-
Security:
-
-
Windows Authentication
-
Request Filtering
-
-
Management Tools:
-
-
IIS Management Console
-
-
-
-
Default installation location
-
%PROGRAMFILES%\Microsoft Application Virtualization Server
-
-
-
Location of the Management database
-
SQL Server database name, SQL Server database instance name, and database name.
-
-
-
Management console and Management database permissions
-
A user or group that can access the Management console and database after the deployment is complete. Only these users or groups will have access to the Management console and database unless additional administrators are added by using the Management console.
-
-
-
Management service website name
-
Name for the Management console website.
-
-
-
Management service port binding
-
Unique port number for the Management service. This port cannot be used by another process on the computer.
-
-
-
Microsoft Silverlight 5
-
The Management console is available only if Silverlight is installed.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Management server database prerequisite software
-
-The Management database is required only if you are using the App-V 5.0 SP3 Management server.
-
-
This role must be added to a server operating system that is supported for the Management server.
-
-
-
Web Server (IIS) Management Tools
-
Click IIS Management Scripts and Tools.
-
-
-
Web Server Role Services
-
To reduce the risk of unwanted or malicious data being sent to the Reporting server, you should restrict access to the Reporting Web Service per your corporate security policy.
-
Common HTTP Features:
-
-
Static Content
-
Default Document
-
-
Application Development:
-
-
ASP.NET
-
.NET Extensibility
-
ISAPI Extensions
-
ISAPI Filters
-
-
Security:
-
-
Windows Authentication
-
Request Filtering
-
-
Management Tools:
-
-
IIS Management Console
-
-
-
-
Default installation location
-
%PROGRAMFILES%\Microsoft Application Virtualization Server
-
-
-
Reporting service website name
-
Name for the Reporting website.
-
-
-
Reporting service port binding
-
Unique port number for the Reporting service. This port cannot be used by another process on the computer.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Reporting database prerequisite software
-
-The Reporting database is required only if you are using the App-V 5.0 SP3 Reporting server.
-
-
-
-
-
-## Sequencer prerequisite software
-
-
-**What to know before installing the prerequisites:**
-
-- Best practice: The computer that runs the Sequencer should have the same hardware and software configurations as the computers that will run the virtual applications.
-
-- The sequencing process is resource intensive, so make sure that the computer that runs the Sequencer has plenty of memory, a fast processor, and a fast hard drive. The system requirements of locally installed applications cannot exceed those of the Sequencer. For more information, see [App-V 5.0 Supported Configurations](app-v-50-supported-configurations.md).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning for App-V 5.0](planning-for-app-v-50-rc.md)
-
-[App-V 5.0 SP3 Supported Configurations](app-v-50-sp3-supported-configurations.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-50-sp3-supported-configurations.md b/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-50-sp3-supported-configurations.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8341bc668d..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-50-sp3-supported-configurations.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,467 +0,0 @@
----
-title: App-V 5.0 SP3 Supported Configurations
-description: App-V 5.0 SP3 Supported Configurations
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 08ced79a-0ed3-43c3-82e7-de01c1f33e81
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# App-V 5.0 SP3 Supported Configurations
-
-
-This topic specifies the requirements to install and run Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 SP3 in your environment.
-
-## App-V Server system requirements
-
-
-This section lists the operating system and hardware requirements for all of the App-V Server components.
-
-### Unsupported App-V 5.0 SP3 Server scenarios
-
-The App-V 5.0 SP3 Server does not support the following scenarios:
-
-- Deployment to a computer that runs Microsoft Windows Server Core.
-
-- Deployment to a computer that runs a previous version of App-V 5.0 SP3 Server components. You can install App-V 5.0 SP3 side by side with the App-V 4.5 Lightweight Streaming Server (LWS) server only. Deployment of App-V side by side with the App-V 4.5 Application Virtualization Management Service (HWS) server is not supported.
-
-- Deployment to a computer that runs Microsoft SQL Server Express edition.
-
-- Remote deployment of the management server database or the reporting database. You must run the installer directly on the computer that is running Microsoft SQL Server.
-
-- Deployment to a domain controller.
-
-- Short paths. If you plan to use a short path, you must create a new volume.
-
-### Management server operating system requirements
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for the App-V 5.0 SP3 Management server installation.
-
-**Note**
-Microsoft provides support for the current service pack and, in some cases, the immediately preceding service pack. To find the support timelines for your product, see the [Lifecycle Supported Service Packs](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=31975). See [Microsoft Support Lifecycle Support Policy FAQ](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=31976) for more information.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating system
-
Service Pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
-
SP1
-
64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Important**
-Deployment of the Management server role to a computer with Remote Desktop Sharing (RDS) enabled is not supported.
-
-
-
-### Management server hardware requirements
-
-- Processor—1.4 GHz or faster, 64-bit (x64) processor
-
-- RAM—1 GB RAM (64-bit)
-
-- Disk space—200 MB available hard disk space, not including the content directory
-
-### Management server database requirements
-
-The following table lists the SQL Server versions that are supported for the App-V 5.0 SP3 Management database installation.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SQL Server version
-
Service pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft SQL Server 2014
-
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft SQL Server 2012
-
SP2
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2
-
SP3
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Publishing server operating system requirements
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for the App-V 5.0 SP3 Publishing server installation.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating system
-
Service Pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
-
SP1
-
64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Publishing server hardware requirements
-
-App-V adds no additional requirements beyond those of Windows Server.
-
-- Processor—1.4 GHz or faster, 64-bit (x64) processor
-
-- RAM—2 GB RAM (64-bit)
-
-- Disk space—200 MB available hard disk space, not including the content directory
-
-### Reporting server operating system requirements
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for the App-V 5.0 SP3 Reporting server installation.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating system
-
Service Pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
-
SP1
-
64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Reporting server hardware requirements
-
-App-V adds no additional requirements beyond those of Windows Server.
-
-- Processor—1.4 GHz or faster, 64-bit (x64) processor
-
-- RAM—2 GB RAM (64-bit)
-
-- Disk space—200 MB available hard disk space
-
-### Reporting server database requirements
-
-The following table lists the SQL Server versions that are supported for the App-V 5.0 SP3 Reporting database installation.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SQL Server version
-
Service pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft SQL Server 2014
-
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft SQL Server 2012
-
SP2
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2
-
SP3
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## App-V client system requirements
-
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for the App-V 5.0 SP3 client installation.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating system
-
Service pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows 8.1
-
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows 8
-
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Windows 7
-
SP1
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-The following App-V client installation scenarios are not supported, except as noted:
-
-- Computers that run Windows Server
-
-- Computers that run App-V 4.6 SP1 or earlier versions
-
-- The App-V 5.0 SP3 Remote Desktop services client is supported only for RDS-enabled servers
-
-### App-V client hardware requirements
-
-The following list displays the supported hardware configuration for the App-V 5.0 SP3 client installation.
-
-- Processor— 1.4 GHz or faster 32-bit (x86) or 64-bit (x64) processor
-
-- RAM— 1 GB (32-bit) or 2 GB (64-bit)
-
-- Disk— 100 MB for installation, not including the disk space that is used by virtualized applications.
-
-## Remote Desktop Services client system requirements
-
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for App-V 5.0 SP3 Remote Desktop Services (RDS) client installation.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating system
-
Service Pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
-
SP1
-
64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Remote Desktop Services client hardware requirements
-
-App-V adds no additional requirements beyond those of Windows Server.
-
-- Processor—1.4 GHz or faster, 64-bit (x64) processor
-
-- RAM—2 GB RAM (64-bit)
-
-- Disk space—200 MB available hard disk space
-
-## Sequencer system requirements
-
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for the App-V 5.0 SP3 Sequencer installation.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating system
-
Service pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
-
SP1
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows 8.1
-
-
32-bit and 64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows 8
-
-
32-bit and 64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows 7
-
SP1
-
32-bit and 64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Sequencer hardware requirements
-
-See the Windows or Windows Server documentation for the hardware requirements. App-V adds no additional hardware requirements.
-
-## Supported versions of System Center Configuration Manager
-
-
-The App-V client supports the following versions of System Center Configuration Manager:
-
-- Microsoft System Center 2012 Configuration Manager
-
-- System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager
-
-- System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager SP1
-
-For more information about how Configuration Manager integrates with App-V, see [Planning for App-V Integration with Configuration Manager](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/jj822982.aspx).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy App-V](planning-to-deploy-app-v.md)
-
-[App-V 5.0 SP3 Prerequisites](app-v-50-sp3-prerequisites.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-50-supported-configurations.md b/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-50-supported-configurations.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4b23a3738a..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-50-supported-configurations.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,532 +0,0 @@
----
-title: App-V 5.0 Supported Configurations
-description: App-V 5.0 Supported Configurations
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 3787ff63-7ce7-45a8-8f01-81b4b6dced34
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# App-V 5.0 Supported Configurations
-
-
-This topic specifies the requirements that are necessary to install and run Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 in your environment.
-
-**Important**
-**The supported configurations in this article apply only to App-V 5.0**. For supported configurations that apply to App-V 5.0 Service Packs, see the following web pages:
-
-- [What's new in App-V 5.0 SP1](whats-new-in-app-v-50-sp1.md)
-
-- [About App-V 5.0 SP2](about-app-v-50-sp2.md)
-
-- [App-V 5.0 SP3 Supported Configurations](app-v-50-sp3-supported-configurations.md)
-
-
-
-## App-V 5.0 server system requirements
-
-
-**Important**
-The App-V 5.0 server does not support the following scenarios:
-
-
-
-- Deployment to a computer that runs Microsoft Windows Server Core.
-
-- Deployment to a computer that runs a previous version of App-V 5.0 server components.
-
- **Note**
- You can install App-V 5.0 side-by-side with the App-V 4.5 Lightweight Streaming Server (LWS) server only. Deployment of App-V 5.0 side-by-side with the App-V 4.5 Application Virtualization Management Service (HWS) server is not supported.
-
-
-
-- Deployment to a computer that runs Microsoft SQL Server Express edition.
-
-- Remote deployment of the management server database or the reporting database. The installer must be run directly on the computer running Microsoft SQL for the database installation to succeed.
-
-- Deployment to a domain controller.
-
-- Short paths are not supported. If you plan to use a short path you must create a new volume.
-
-### Management Server operating system requirements
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for the App-V 5.0 management server installation.
-
-**Note**
-Microsoft provides support for the current service pack and, in some cases, the immediately preceding service pack. To find the support timelines for your product, see the [Lifecycle Supported Service Packs](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=31975). For additional information about Microsoft Support Lifecycle Policy, see [Microsoft Support Lifecycle Support Policy FAQ](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=31976).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating system
-
Edition
-
Service pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 (Standard, Enterprise, Datacenter, or Web Server)
-
R2
-
SP1 and higher
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 (Standard, Datacenter)
-
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 (Standard, Datacenter)
-
R2
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Important**
-Deployment of the management server role to a computer with Remote Desktop Sharing (RDS) enabled is not supported.
-
-
-
-### Management Server hardware requirements
-
-- Processor—1.4 GHz or faster, 64-bit (x64) processor
-
-- RAM— 1 GB RAM (64-bit)
-
-- Disk space—200 MB available hard disk space, not including the content directory.
-
-### Publishing Server operating system requirements
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for the App-V 5.0 publishing server installation.
-
-**Note**
-Microsoft provides support for the current service pack and, in some cases, the immediately preceding service pack. To find the support timelines for your product, see the [Lifecycle Supported Service Packs](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=31975). For additional information about Microsoft Support Lifecycle Policy, see [Microsoft Support Lifecycle Support Policy FAQ](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=31976).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating system
-
Edition
-
Service pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 (Standard, Enterprise, Datacenter, or Web Server)
-
R2
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 (Standard, Datacenter)
-
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 (Standard, Datacenter)
-
R2
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Publishing Server hardware requirements
-
-- Processor—1.4 GHz or faster. 64-bit (x64) processor
-
-- RAM— 2 GB RAM (64-bit)
-
-- Disk space—200 MB available hard disk space. not including content directory
-
-### Reporting Server operating system requirements
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for the App-V 5.0 reporting server installation.
-
-**Note**
-Microsoft provides support for the current service pack and, in some cases, the immediately preceding service pack. To find the support timelines for your product, see the [Lifecycle Supported Service Packs](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=31975). For additional information about Microsoft Support Lifecycle Policy, see [Microsoft Support Lifecycle Support Policy FAQ](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=31976).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating system
-
Edition
-
Service Pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 (Standard, Enterprise, Datacenter, or Web Server)
-
R2
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 (Standard, Datacenter)
-
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 (Standard, Datacenter)
-
R2
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Reporting Server hardware requirements
-
-- Processor—1.4 GHz or faster. 64-bit (x64) processor
-
-- RAM—2 GB RAM (64-bit)
-
-- Disk space—200 MB available hard disk space
-
-### SQL Server database requirements
-
-The following table lists the SQL Server versions that are supported for the App-V 5.0 database and server installation.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
App-V 5.0 server type
-
SQL Server version
-
Edition
-
Service pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Management / Reporting
-
Microsoft SQL Server 2008
-
(Standard, Enterprise, Datacenter, or the Developer Edition with the following feature: Database Engine Services.)
-
-
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Management / Reporting
-
Microsoft SQL Server 2008
-
(Standard, Enterprise, Datacenter, or the Developer Edition with the following feature: Database Engine Services.)
-
R2
-
SP2
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Management / Reporting
-
Microsoft SQL Server 2012
-
(Standard, Enterprise, Datacenter, or the Developer Edition with the following feature: Database Engine Services.)
-
-
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## App-V 5.0 client system requirements
-
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for the App-V 5.0 client installation.
-
-**Note**
-Microsoft provides support for the current service pack and, in some cases, the immediately preceding service pack. To find the support timelines for your product, see the [Lifecycle Supported Service Packs](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=31975). For additional information about Microsoft Support Lifecycle Policy, see [Microsoft Support Lifecycle Support Policy FAQ](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=31976).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating system
-
Service pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows 7
-
SP1
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows 8
-
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
-Important
Windows 8.1 is only supported by App-V 5.0 SP2
-
-
-
-
-
Windows 8.1
-
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-The following App-V client installation scenarios are not supported, except as noted:
-
-- Computers that run Windows Server
-
-- Computers that run App-V 4.6 SP1 or earlier versions
-
-- The App-V 5.0 Remote Desktop services client is supported only for RDS-enabled servers
-
-### Client hardware requirements
-
-The following list displays the supported hardware configuration for the App-V 5.0 client installation.
-
-- Processor— 1.4 GHz or faster 32-bit (x86) or 64-bit (x64) processor
-
-- RAM— 1 GB (32-bit) or 2 GB (64-bit)
-
-- Disk— 100 MB for installation, not including the disk space that is used by virtualized applications.
-
-## App-V 5.0 Remote Desktop client system requirements
-
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for App-V 5.0 Remote Desktop client installation.
-
-**Note**
-Microsoft provides support for the current service pack and, in some cases, the immediately preceding service pack. To find the support timelines for your product, see the [Lifecycle Supported Service Packs](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=31975). For additional information about Microsoft Support Lifecycle Policy, see [Microsoft Support Lifecycle Support Policy FAQ](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=31976).
-
-
-
-Operating system
-Edition
-Service pack
-Microsoft Windows Server 2008
-
-R2
-
-SP1
-
-Microsoft Windows Server 2012
-
-**Important**
-Windows Server 2012 R2 is only supported by App-V 5.0 SP2
-
-
-
-Microsoft Windows Server 2012 (Standard, Datacenter)
-
-R2
-
-64-bit
-
-
-
-### Remote Desktop client hardware requirements
-
-The following list displays the supported hardware configuration for the App-V 5.0 client installation.
-
-- Processor— 1.4 GHz or faster 32-bit (x86) or 64-bit (x64) processor
-
-- RAM— 1 GB (32-bit) or 2 GB (64-bit)
-
-- Disk— 100 MB for installation, not including the disk space that is used by virtualized applications.
-
-## App-V 5.0 Sequencer system requirements
-
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for App-V 5.0 Sequencer installation.
-
-**Note**
-Microsoft provides support for the current service pack and, in some cases, the immediately preceding service pack. To find the support timelines for your product, see the [Lifecycle Supported Service Packs](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=31975). For additional information about Microsoft Support Lifecycle Policy, see [Microsoft Support Lifecycle Support Policy FAQ](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=31976).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating system
-
Edition
-
Service pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows 7
-
-
SP1
-
32-bit and 64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows 8
-
-
-
32-bit and 64-bit
-
-
-
-Important
Windows 8.1 is only supported by App-V 5.0 SP2
-
-
-
-
-
Windows 8.1
-
-
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2008
-
R2
-
SP1
-
32-bit and 64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012
-
-
-
32-bit and 64-bit
-
-
-
-Important
Windows Server 2012 R2 is only supported by App-V 5.0 SP2
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012
-
R2
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Supported versions of System Center Configuration Manager
-
-
-You can use Microsoft System Center 2012 Configuration Manager or System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager to manage App-V virtual applications, reporting, and other functions. The following table lists the supported versions of Configuration Manager for each applicable version of App-V.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Supported Configuration Manager version
-
App-V version
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft System Center 2012 Configuration Manager
-
-
App-V 5.0
-
App-V 5.0 SP1
-
App-V 5.0 SP2
-
-
-
-
System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager
-
-
App-V 5.0
-
App-V 5.0 SP1
-
App-V 5.0 SP2
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-For more information about how Configuration Manager integrates with App-V, see [Planning for App-V Integration with Configuration Manager](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/jj822982.aspx).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy App-V](planning-to-deploy-app-v.md)
-
-[App-V 5.0 Prerequisites](app-v-50-prerequisites.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-51-capacity-planning.md b/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-51-capacity-planning.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0473ec9858..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-51-capacity-planning.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,963 +0,0 @@
----
-title: App-V 5.1 Capacity Planning
-description: App-V 5.1 Capacity Planning
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 7a98062f-5a60-49d6-ab40-dc6057e1dd5a
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# App-V 5.1 Capacity Planning
-
-
-The following recommendations can be used as a baseline to help determine capacity planning information that is appropriate to your organization’s App-V 5.1 infrastructure.
-
-**Important**
-Use the information in this section only as a general guide for planning your App-V 5.1 deployment. Your system capacity requirements will depend on the specific details of your hardware and application environment. Additionally, the performance numbers displayed in this document are examples and your results may vary.
-
-
-
-## Determine the Project Scope
-
-
-Before you design the App-V 5.1 infrastructure, you must determine the project’s scope. The scope consists of determining which applications will be available virtually and to also identify the target users, and their locations. This information will help determine what type of App-V 5.1 infrastructure should be implemented. Decisions about the scope of the project must be based on the specific needs of your organization.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
More Information
-
-
-
-
-
Determine Application Scope
-
Depending on the applications to be virtualized, the App-V 5.1 infrastructure can be set up in different ways. The first task is to define what applications you want to virtualize.
-
-
-
Determine Location Scope
-
Location scope refers to the physical locations (for example, enterprise-wide or a specific geographic location) where you plan to run the virtualized applications. It can also refer to the user population (for example, a single department) who will run the virtual applications. You should obtain a network map that includes the connection paths as well as available bandwidth to each location and the number of users using virtualized applications and the WAN link speed.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Determine Which App-V 5.1 Infrastructure is Required
-
-
-**Important**
-Both of the following models require the App-V 5.1 client to be installed on the computer where you plan to run virtual applications.
-
-You can also manage your App-V 5.1 environment using an Electronic Software Distribution (ESD) solution such as Microsoft Systems Center Configuration Manager. For more information see [How to deploy App-V 5.1 Packages Using Electronic Software Distribution](how-to-deploy-app-v-51-packages-using-electronic-software-distribution.md).
-
-
-
-- **Standalone Model** - The standalone model allows virtual applications to be Windows Installer-enabled for distribution without streaming. App-V 5.1 in Standalone Mode consists of the sequencer and the client; no additional components are required. Applications are prepared for virtualization using a process called sequencing. For more information see, [Planning for the App-V 5.1 Sequencer and Client Deployment](planning-for-the-app-v-51-sequencer-and-client-deployment.md). The stand-alone model is recommended for the following scenarios:
-
- - With disconnected remote users who cannot connect to the App-V 5.1 infrastructure.
-
- - When you are running a software management system, such as Configuration Manager 2012.
-
- - When network bandwidth limitations inhibit electronic software distribution.
-
-- **Full Infrastructure Model** - The full infrastructure model provides for software distribution, management, and reporting capabilities; it also includes the streaming of applications across the network. The App-V 5.1 Full Infrastructure Model consists of one or more App-V 5.1 management servers. The Management Server can be used to publish applications to all clients. The publishing process places the virtual application icons and shortcuts on the target computer. It can also stream applications to local users. For more information about installing the management server see, [Planning for the App-V 5.1 Server Deployment](planning-for-the-app-v-51-server-deployment.md). The full infrastructure model is recommended for the following scenarios:
-
- **Important**
- The App-V 5.1 full infrastructure model requires Microsoft SQL Server to store configuration data. For more information see [App-V 5.1 Supported Configurations](app-v-51-supported-configurations.md).
-
-
-
- - When you want to use the Management Server to publish the application to target computers.
-
- - For rapid provisioning of applications to target computers.
-
- - When you want to use App-V 5.1 reporting.
-
-## End-to-end Server Sizing Guidance
-
-
-The following section provides information about end-to-end App-V 5.1 sizing and planning. For more specific information, refer to the subsequent sections.
-
-**Note**
-Round trip response time on the client is the time taken by the computer running the App-V 5.1 client to receive a successful notification from the publishing server. Round trip response time on the publishing server is the time taken by the computer running the publishing server to receive a successful package metadata update from the management server.
-
-
-
-- 20,000 clients can target a single publishing server to obtain the package refreshes in an acceptable round trip time. (<3 seconds)
-
-- A single management server can support up to 50 publishing servers for package metadata refreshes in an acceptable round trip time. (<5 seconds)
-
-## App-V 5.1 Management Server Capacity Planning Recommendations
-
-
-The App-V 5.1 publishing servers require the management server for package refresh requests and package refresh responses. The management server then sends the information to the management database to retrieve information. For more information about App-V 5.1 management server supported configurations see [App-V 5.1 Supported Configurations](app-v-51-supported-configurations.md).
-
-**Note**
-The default refresh time on the App-V 5.1 publishing server is ten minutes.
-
-
-
-When multiple simultaneous publishing servers contact a single management server for package metadata refreshes, the following three factors influence the round trip response time on the publishing server:
-
-1. Number of publishing servers making simultaneous requests.
-
-2. Number of connection groups configured on the management server.
-
-3. Number of access groups configured on the management server.
-
-The following table displays more information about each factor that impacts round trip time.
-
-**Note**
-Round trip response time is the time taken by the computer running the App-V 5.1 publishing server to receive a successful package metadata update from the management server.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Factors impacting round trip response time
-
More Information
-
-
-
-
-
The number of publishing servers simultaneously requesting package metadata refreshes.
-
-
-
A single management server can respond to up to 320 publishing servers requesting publishing metadata simultaneously.
-
Round trip response time for 320 pub servers is ~40 seconds.
-
For <50 publishing servers requesting metadata simultaneously, the round trip response time is <5 seconds.
-
From 50 to 320 publishing servers, the response time increases linearly (approximately 2x).
-
-
-
-
The number of connection groups configured on the management server.
-
-
-
-
For up to 100 connection groups, there is no significant change in the round trip response time on the publishing server.
-
For 100 - 400 connection groups, there is a minor linear increase in the round trip response time.
-
-
-
-
The number of access groups configured on the management server.
-
-
-
-
For up to 40 access groups, there is a linear (approximately 3x) increase in the round trip response time on the publishing server.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-The following table displays sample values for each of the previous factors. In each variation, 120 packages are refreshed from the App-V 5.1management server.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Scenario
-
Variation
-
Number of connection groups
-
Number of access groups
-
Number of publishing servers
-
Network connection type publishing server / management server
-
Round trip response time on the publishing server (in seconds)
-
CPU utilization on management server
-
-
-
-
-
Publishing servers simultaneously contacting management server for publishing metadata.
-
Number of publishing servers
-
-
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
-
-
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
-
-
-
50
-
100
-
200
-
300
-
315
-
320
-
-
-
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
-
-
-
5
-
10
-
19
-
32
-
30
-
37
-
-
-
-
17
-
17
-
17
-
15
-
17
-
15
-
-
-
-
Publishing metadata contains connection groups
-
Number of connection groups
-
-
-
10
-
50
-
100
-
150
-
300
-
400
-
-
-
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
-
-
-
100
-
100
-
100
-
100
-
100
-
100
-
-
-
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
-
-
-
10
-
11
-
11
-
16
-
22
-
25
-
-
-
-
17
-
19
-
22
-
19
-
20
-
20
-
-
-
-
Publishing metadata contains access groups
-
Number of access groups
-
-
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
-
-
-
1
-
10
-
20
-
40
-
-
-
-
100
-
100
-
100
-
100
-
-
-
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
-
-
-
10
-
43
-
153
-
535
-
-
-
-
17
-
26
-
24
-
24
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-The CPU utilization of the computer running the management server is around 25% irrespective of the number of publishing servers targeting it. The Microsoft SQL Server database transactions/sec, batch requests/sec and user connections are identical irrespective of the number of publishing servers. For example: Transactions/sec is ~30, batch requests ~200, and user connects ~6.
-
-Using a geographically distributed deployment, where the management server & publishing servers utilize a slow link network between them, the round trip response time on the publishing servers is within acceptable time limits (<5 seconds), even for 100 simultaneous requests on a single management server.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Scenario
-
Variation
-
Number of connection groups
-
Number of access groups
-
Number of publishing servers
-
Network connection type publishing server / management server
-
Round trip response time on the publishing server (in seconds)
-
CPU utilization on management server
-
-
-
-
-
Network connection between the publishing server and management server
-
1.5 Mbps Slow link Network
-
-
-
0
-
0
-
-
-
-
1
-
1
-
-
-
-
50
-
100
-
-
-
-
1.5Mbps Cable DSL
-
1.5Mbps Cable DSL
-
-
-
-
4
-
5
-
-
-
-
1
-
2
-
-
-
-
Network connection between the publishing server and management server
-
LAN / WIFI Network
-
-
-
0
-
0
-
-
-
-
1
-
1
-
-
-
-
100
-
200
-
-
-
-
Wifi
-
Wifi
-
-
-
-
11
-
20
-
-
-
-
15
-
17
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Whether the management server and publishing servers are connected over a slow link network, or a high speed network, the management server can handle approximately 15,000 package refresh requests in 30 minutes.
-
-## App-V 5.1 Reporting Server Capacity Planning Recommendations
-
-
-App-V 5.1 clients send reporting data to the reporting server. The reporting server then records the information in the Microsoft SQL Server database and returns a successful notification back to the computer running App-V 5.1 client. For more information about App-V 5.1 Reporting Server supported configurations see [App-V 5.1 Supported Configurations](app-v-51-supported-configurations.md).
-
-**Note**
-Round trip response time is the time taken by the computer running the App-V 5.1 client to send the reporting information to the reporting server and receive a successful notification from the reporting server.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Scenario
-
Summary
-
-
-
-
-
Multiple App-V 5.1 clients send reporting information to the reporting server simultaneously.
-
-
-
Round trip response time from the reporting server is 2.6 seconds for 500 clients.
-
Round trip response time from the reporting server is 5.65 seconds for 1000 clients.
-
Round trip response time increases linearly depending on number of clients.
-
-
-
-
Requests per second processed by the reporting server.
-
-
-
-
A single reporting server and a single database, can process a maximum of 139 requests per second. The average is 121 requests/second.
-
Using two reporting servers reporting to the same Microsoft SQL Server database, the average requests/second is similar to a single reporting server = ~127, with a max of 278 requests/second.
-
A single reporting server can process 500 concurrent/active connections.
-
A single reporting server can process a maximum 1500 concurrent connections.
-
-
-
-
Reporting Database.
-
-
-
-
Lock contention on the computer running Microsoft SQL Server is the limiting factor for requests/second.
-
Throughput and response time are independent of database size.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Calculating random delay**:
-
-The random delay specifies the maximum delay (in minutes) for data to be sent to the reporting server. When the scheduled task is started, the client generates a random delay between **0** and **ReportingRandomDelay** and will wait the specified duration before sending data.
-
-Random delay = 4 \* number of clients / average requests per second.
-
-Example: For 500 clients, with 120 requests per second, the Random delay is, 4 \* 500 / 120 = ~17 minutes.
-
-## App-V 5.1 Publishing Server Capacity Planning Recommendations
-
-
-Computers running the App-V 5.1 client connect to the App-V 5.1 publishing server to send a publishing refresh request and to receive a response. Round trip response time is measured on the computer running the App-V 5.1 client. Processor time is measured on the publishing server. For more information about App-V 5.1 Publishing Server supported configurations see [App-V 5.1 Supported Configurations](app-v-51-supported-configurations.md).
-
-**Important**
-The following list displays the main factors to consider when setting up the App-V 5.1 publishing server:
-
-- The number of clients connecting simultaneously to a single publishing server.
-
-- The number of packages in each refresh.
-
-- The available network bandwidth in your environment between the client and the App-V 5.1 publishing server.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Scenario
-
Summary
-
-
-
-
-
Multiple App-V 5.1 clients connect to a single publishing server simultaneously.
-
-
-
A publishing server running dual core processors can respond to at most 5000 clients requesting a refresh simultaneously.
-
For 5000-10000 clients, the publishing server requires a minimum quad core.
-
For 10000-20000 clients, the publishing server should have dual quad cores for more efficient response times.
-
A publishing server with a quad core can refresh up to 10000 packages within 3 seconds. (Supporting 10000 simultaneous clients)
-
-
-
-
Number of packages in each refresh.
-
-
-
-
Increasing number of packages will increase response time by ~40% (up to 1000 packages).
-
-
-
-
Network between the App-V 5.1 client and the publishing server.
-
-
-
-
Across a slow network (1.5 Mbps bandwidth), there is a 97% increase in response time compared to LAN (up to 1000 users).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Note**
-The publishing server CPU usage is always high during the time interval when it has to process simultaneous requests (>90% in most cases). The publishing server can handle ~1500 client requests in 1 second.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Scenario
-
Variation
-
Number of App-V 5.1 clients
-
Number of packages
-
Processor configuration on the publishing server
-
Network connection type publishing server / App-V 5.1 client
-
Round trip time on the App-V 5.1 client (in seconds)
-
-
-
-## App-V 5.1 Streaming Capacity Planning Recommendations
-
-
-Computers running the App-V 5.1 client stream the virtual application package from the streaming server. Round trip response time is measured on the computer running the App-V 5.1 client, and is the time taken to stream the entire package.
-
-**Important**
-The following list identifies the main factors to consider when setting up the App-V 5.1 streaming server:
-
-- The number of clients streaming application packages simultaneously from a single streaming server.
-
-- The size of the package being streamed.
-
-- The available network bandwidth in your environment between the client and the streaming server.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Scenario
-
Summary
-
-
-
-
-
Multiple App-V 5.1 clients stream applications from a single streaming server simultaneously.
-
-
-
If the number of clients simultaneously streaming from the same server increases, there is a linear relationship with the package download/streaming time.
-
-
-
-
Size of the package being streamed.
-
-
-
-
The package size has a significant impact on the streaming/download time only for larger packages with a size ~ 1GB. For package sizes ranging from 3 MB to 100 MB, the streaming time ranges from 20 seconds to 100 seconds, with 100 simultaneous clients.
-
-
-
-
Network between the App-V 5.1 client and the streaming server.
-
-
-
-
Across a slow network (1.5 Mbps bandwidth), there is a 70-80% increase in response time compared to LAN (up to 100 users).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-The following table displays sample values for each of the factors in the previous list:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Scenario
-
Variation
-
Number of App-V 5.1 clients
-
Size of each package
-
Network connection type streaming server / App-V 5.1 client
-
Round trip time on the App-V 5.1 client (in seconds)
-
-
-
-
-
Multiple App-V 5.1 clients streaming virtual application packages from a streaming server.
-
Number of clients.
-
-
-
100
-
200
-
1000
-
-
100
-
200
-
1000
-
-
-
-
3.5 MB
-
3.5 MB
-
3.5 MB
-
-
5 MB
-
5 MB
-
5 MB
-
-
-
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
-
-
-
29
-
39
-
391
-
-
35
-
68
-
461
-
-
-
-
Size of each package being streamed.
-
Size of each package.
-
-
-
100
-
200
-
-
100
-
200
-
-
-
-
21 MB
-
21 MB
-
-
109
-
109
-
-
-
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
-
LAN
-
LAN
-
-
-
33
-
83
-
-
100
-
160
-
-
-
Network connection between client and App-V 5.1 streaming server.
-
1.5 Mbps Slow link network.
-
-
-
100
-
-
100
-
-
-
-
3.5 MB
-
-
5 MB
-
-
-
-
1.5 Mbps Intra-Continental Network
-
-
-
102
-
-
121
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Each App-V 5.1 streaming server should be able to handle a minimum of 200 clients concurrently streaming virtualized applications.
-
-**Note**
-The actual time to it will take to stream is determined primarily by the number of clients streaming simultaneously, number of packages, package size, the server’s network activity, and network conditions.
-
-
-
-For example, an average user can stream a 100 MB package in less than 2 minutes, when 100 simultaneous clients are streaming from the server. However, a package of size 1 GB could take up to 30 minutes. In most real world environments streaming demand is not uniformly distributed, you will need to understand the approximate peak streaming requirements present in your environment in order to properly size the number of required streaming servers.
-
-The number of clients a streaming server can support can be significantly increased and the peak streaming requirements reduced if you pre-cache your applications. You can also increase the number of clients a streaming server can support by using on-demand streaming delivery and stream optimized packages.
-
-## Combining App-V 5.1 Server Roles
-
-
-Discounting scaling and fault-tolerance requirements, the minimum number of servers needed for a location with connectivity to Active Directory is one. This server will host the management server, management server service, and Microsoft SQL Server roles. Server roles, therefore, can be arranged in any desired combination since they do not conflict with one another.
-
-Ignoring scaling requirements, the minimum number of servers necessary to provide a fault-tolerant implementation is four. The management server, and Microsoft SQL Server roles support being placed in fault-tolerant configurations. The management server service can be combined with any of the roles, but remains a single point of failure.
-
-Although there are a number of fault-tolerance strategies and technologies available, not all are applicable to a given service. Additionally, if App-V 5.1 roles are combined, certain fault-tolerance options may no longer apply due to incompatibilities.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[App-V 5.1 Supported Configurations](app-v-51-supported-configurations.md)
-
-[Planning for High Availability with App-V 5.1](planning-for-high-availability-with-app-v-51.md)
-
-[Planning to Deploy App-V](planning-to-deploy-app-v51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-51-deployment-checklist.md b/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-51-deployment-checklist.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 955988dde1..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-51-deployment-checklist.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,94 +0,0 @@
----
-title: App-V 5.1 Deployment Checklist
-description: App-V 5.1 Deployment Checklist
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 44bed85a-e4f5-49d7-a308-a2b681f76372
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# App-V 5.1 Deployment Checklist
-
-
-This checklist can be used to help you during Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 deployment.
-
-**Note**
-This checklist outlines the recommended steps and a high-level list of items to consider when deploying App-V 5.1 features. It is recommended that you copy this checklist into a spreadsheet program and customize it for your use.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
References
-
Notes
-
-
-
-
-
-
Complete the planning phase to prepare the computing environment for App-V 5.1 deployment.
Review the App-V 5.1 supported configurations information to make sure selected client and server computers are supported for App-V 5.1 feature installation.
Run App-V 5.1 Setup to deploy the required App-V 5.1 features for your environment.
-
-Note
Keep track of the names of the servers and associated URL’s created during installation. This information will be used throughout the installation process.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying App-V 5.1](deploying-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-51-planning-checklist.md b/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-51-planning-checklist.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 52ac3984ce..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-51-planning-checklist.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,101 +0,0 @@
----
-title: App-V 5.1 Planning Checklist
-description: App-V 5.1 Planning Checklist
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 1e26a861-0612-43a6-972f-375a40a8dcbc
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# App-V 5.1 Planning Checklist
-
-
-This checklist can be used to help you plan for preparing your computing environment for Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 deployment.
-
-**Note**
-This checklist outlines the recommended steps and a high-level list of items to consider when planning for an App-V 5.1 deployment. It is recommended that you copy this checklist into a spreadsheet program and customize it for your use.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
References
-
Notes
-
-
-
-
-
-
Review the getting started information about App-V 5.1 to gain a basic understanding of the product before beginning deployment planning.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning for App-V 5.1](planning-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-51-prerequisites.md b/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-51-prerequisites.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f9709263ec..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-51-prerequisites.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,665 +0,0 @@
----
-title: App-V 5.1 Prerequisites
-description: App-V 5.1 Prerequisites
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 1bfa03c1-a4ae-45ec-8a2b-b10c2b94bfb0
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# App-V 5.1 Prerequisites
-
-
-Before installing Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1, ensure that you have installed all of the following required prerequisite software.
-
-For a list of supported operating systems and hardware requirements for the App-V Server, Sequencer, and Client, see [App-V 5.1 Supported Configurations](app-v-51-supported-configurations.md).
-
-## Summary of software preinstalled on each operating system
-
-
-The following table indicates the software that is already installed for different operating systems.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating system
-
Prerequisite description
-
-
-
-
-
Windows 10
-
All of the prerequisite software is already installed.
-
-
-
Windows 8.1
-
All of the prerequisite software is already installed.
-
-Note
If you are running Windows 8, upgrade to Windows 8.1 before using App-V 5.1.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Windows Server 2012
-
The following prerequisite software is already installed:
-
-
Microsoft .NET Framework 4.5
-
Windows PowerShell 3.0
-
-Note
Installing PowerShell 3.0 requires a restart.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Windows 7
-
The prerequisite software is not already installed. You must install it before you can install App-V.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## App-V Server prerequisite software
-
-
-Install the required prerequisite software for the App-V 5.1 Server components.
-
-### What to know before you start
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Account for installing the App-V Server
-
The account that you use to install the App-V Server components must have:
-
-
Administrative rights on the computer on which you are installing the components.
-
The ability to query Active Directory Domain Services.
-
-
-
-
Port and firewall
-
-
Specify a port where each component will be hosted.
-
Add the associated firewall rules to allow incoming requests to the specified ports.
-
-
-
-
-
Web Distributed Authoring and Versioning (WebDAV)
-
WebDAV is automatically disabled for the Management Service.
-
-
-
Supported deployment scenarios
-
-
A stand-alone deployment, where all components are deployed on the same server.
-
A distributed deployment.
-
-
-
-
Unsupported deployment scenarios
-
-
Installing side-by-side instances of multiple App-V Server versions on the same server.
-
Installing the App-V server components on a computer that runs server core or domain controller.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Management server prerequisite software
-
-
This role must be added to a server operating system that is supported for the Management server.
-
-
-
Web Server (IIS) Management Tools
-
Click IIS Management Scripts and Tools.
-
-
-
Web Server Role Services
-
Common HTTP Features:
-
-
Static Content
-
Default Document
-
-
Application Development:
-
-
ASP.NET
-
.NET Extensibility
-
ISAPI Extensions
-
ISAPI Filters
-
-
Security:
-
-
Windows Authentication
-
Request Filtering
-
-
Management Tools:
-
-
IIS Management Console
-
-
-
-
Default installation location
-
%PROGRAMFILES%\Microsoft Application Virtualization Server
-
-
-
Location of the Management database
-
SQL Server database name, SQL Server database instance name, and database name.
-
-
-
Management console and Management database permissions
-
A user or group that can access the Management console and database after the deployment is complete. Only these users or groups will have access to the Management console and database unless additional administrators are added by using the Management console.
-
-
-
Management service website name
-
Name for the Management console website.
-
-
-
Management service port binding
-
Unique port number for the Management service. This port cannot be used by another process on the computer.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Important**
-JavaScript must be enabled on the browser that opens the Web Management Console.
-
-
-
-### Management server database prerequisite software
-
-The Management database is required only if you are using the App-V 5.1 Management server.
-
-
This role must be added to a server operating system that is supported for the Management server.
-
-
-
Web Server (IIS) Management Tools
-
Click IIS Management Scripts and Tools.
-
-
-
Web Server Role Services
-
To reduce the risk of unwanted or malicious data being sent to the Reporting server, you should restrict access to the Reporting Web Service per your corporate security policy.
-
Common HTTP Features:
-
-
Static Content
-
Default Document
-
-
Application Development:
-
-
ASP.NET
-
.NET Extensibility
-
ISAPI Extensions
-
ISAPI Filters
-
-
Security:
-
-
Windows Authentication
-
Request Filtering
-
-
Management Tools:
-
-
IIS Management Console
-
-
-
-
Default installation location
-
%PROGRAMFILES%\Microsoft Application Virtualization Server
-
-
-
Reporting service website name
-
Name for the Reporting website.
-
-
-
Reporting service port binding
-
Unique port number for the Reporting service. This port cannot be used by another process on the computer.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Reporting database prerequisite software
-
-The Reporting database is required only if you are using the App-V 5.1 Reporting server.
-
-
-
-
-
-## Sequencer prerequisite software
-
-
-**What to know before installing the prerequisites:**
-
-- Best practice: The computer that runs the Sequencer should have the same hardware and software configurations as the computers that will run the virtual applications.
-
-- The sequencing process is resource intensive, so make sure that the computer that runs the Sequencer has plenty of memory, a fast processor, and a fast hard drive. The system requirements of locally installed applications cannot exceed those of the Sequencer. For more information, see [App-V 5.1 Supported Configurations](app-v-51-supported-configurations.md).
-
-
Applies to Windows 7 only: Download and install the KB.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning for App-V 5.1](planning-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-[App-V 5.1 Supported Configurations](app-v-51-supported-configurations.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-51-security-considerations.md b/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-51-security-considerations.md
deleted file mode 100644
index cf442e5690..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-51-security-considerations.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,147 +0,0 @@
----
-title: App-V 5.1 Security Considerations
-description: App-V 5.1 Security Considerations
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 6bc6c1fc-f813-47d4-b763-06fd4faf6a72
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# App-V 5.1 Security Considerations
-
-
-This topic contains a brief overview of the accounts and groups, log files, and other security-related considerations for Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1.
-
-**Important**
-App-V 5.1 is not a security product and does not provide any guarantees for a secure environment.
-
-
-
-## PackageStoreAccessControl (PSAC) feature has been deprecated
-
-
-Effective as of June, 2014, the PackageStoreAccessControl (PSAC) feature that was introduced in Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 Service Pack 2 (SP2) has been deprecated in both single-user and multi-user environments.
-
-## General security considerations
-
-
-**Understand the security risks.** The most serious risk to App-V 5.1 is that its functionality could be hijacked by an unauthorized user who could then reconfigure key data on App-V 5.1 clients. The loss of App-V 5.1 functionality for a short period of time due to a denial-of-service attack would not generally have a catastrophic impact.
-
-**Physically secure your computers**. Security is incomplete without physical security. Anyone with physical access to an App-V 5.1 server could potentially attack the entire client base. Any potential physical attacks must be considered high risk and mitigated appropriately. App-V 5.1 servers should be stored in a physically secure server room with controlled access. Secure these computers when administrators are not physically present by having the operating system lock the computer, or by using a secured screen saver.
-
-**Apply the most recent security updates to all computers**. To stay informed about the latest updates for operating systems, Microsoft SQL Server, and App-V 5.1, subscribe to the Security Notification service ().
-
-**Use strong passwords or pass phrases**. Always use strong passwords with 15 or more characters for all App-V 5.1 and App-V 5.1 administrator accounts. Never use blank passwords. For more information about password concepts, see the “Account Passwords and Policies” white paper on TechNet ().
-
-## Accounts and groups in App-V 5.1
-
-
-A best practice for user account management is to create domain global groups and add user accounts to them. Then, add the domain global accounts to the necessary App-V 5.1 local groups on the App-V 5.1 servers.
-
-**Note**
-App-V client computer accounts that need to connect to the publishing server must be part of the publishing server’s **Users** local group. By default, all computers in the domain are part of the **Authorized Users** group, which is part of the **Users** local group.
-
-
-
-### App-V 5.1 server security
-
-No groups are created automatically during App-V 5.1 Setup. You should create the following Active Directory Domain Services global groups to manage App-V 5.1 server operations.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Group name
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
App-V Management Admin group
-
Used to manage the App-V 5.1 management server. This group is created during the App-V 5.1 Management Server installation.
-
-Important
There is no method to create the group using the management console after you have completed the installation.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Database read/write for Management Service account
-
Provides read/write access to the management database. This account should be created during the App-V 5.1 management database installation.
-
-
-
App-V Management Service install admin account
-
-Note
This is only required if management database is being installed separately from the service.
-
-
-
-
-
Provides public access to schema-version table in management database. This account should be created during the App-V 5.1 management database installation.
-
-
-
App-V Reporting Service install admin account
-
-Note
This is only required if reporting database is being installed separately from the service.
-
-
-
-
-
Public access to schema-version table in reporting database. This account should be created during the App-V 5.1 reporting database installation.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Consider the following additional information:
-
-- Access to the package shares - If a share exists on the same computer as the management Server, the **Network** service requires read access to the share. In addition, each App-V client computer must have read access to the package share.
-
- **Note**
- In previous versions of App-V, package share was referred to as content share.
-
-
-
-- Registering publishing servers with Management Server - A publishing server must be registered with the Management server. For example, it must be added to the database, so that the Publishing server machine accounts are able to call into the Management service API.
-
-### App-V 5.1 package security
-
-The following will help you plan how to ensure that virtualized packages are secure.
-
-- If an application installer applies an access control list (ACL) to a file or directory, then that ACL is not persisted in the package. When the package is deployed, if the file or directory is modified by a user it will either inherit the ACL in the **%userprofile%** or inherit the ACL of the target computer’s directory. The former case occurs if the file or directory does not exist in a virtual file system location; the latter case occurs if the file or directory exists in a virtual file system location, for example **%windir%**.
-
-## App-V 5.1 log files
-
-
-During App-V 5.1 Setup, setup log files are created in the **%temp%** folder of the installing user.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Preparing Your Environment for App-V 5.1](preparing-your-environment-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-51-supported-configurations.md b/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-51-supported-configurations.md
deleted file mode 100644
index aa2a35a202..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/app-v-51-supported-configurations.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,565 +0,0 @@
----
-title: App-V 5.1 Supported Configurations
-description: App-V 5.1 Supported Configurations
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 8b8db63b-f71c-4ae9-80e7-a6752334e1f6
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 09/27/2016
----
-
-
-# App-V 5.1 Supported Configurations
-
-
-This topic specifies the requirements to install and run Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 in your environment.
-
-## App-V Server system requirements
-
-
-This section lists the operating system and hardware requirements for all of the App-V Server components.
-
-### Unsupported App-V 5.1 Server scenarios
-
-The App-V 5.1 Server does not support the following scenarios:
-
-- Deployment to a computer that runs Microsoft Windows Server Core.
-
-- Deployment to a computer that runs a previous version of App-V 5.1 Server components. You can install App-V 5.1 side by side with the App-V 4.5 Lightweight Streaming Server (LWS) server only. Deployment of App-V side by side with the App-V 4.5 Application Virtualization Management Service (HWS) server is not supported.
-
-- Deployment to a computer that runs Microsoft SQL Server Express edition.
-
-- Deployment to a domain controller.
-
-- Short paths. If you plan to use a short path, you must create a new volume.
-
-### Management server operating system requirements
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for the App-V 5.1 Management server installation.
-
-**Note**
-Microsoft provides support for the current service pack and, in some cases, the immediately preceding service pack. To find the support timelines for your product, see the [Lifecycle Supported Service Packs](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=31975). See [Microsoft Support Lifecycle Support Policy FAQ](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=31976) for more information.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating system
-
Service Pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2016
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
-
SP1
-
64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Important**
-Deployment of the Management server role to a computer with Remote Desktop Sharing (RDS) enabled is not supported.
-
-
-
-### Management server hardware requirements
-
-- Processor—1.4 GHz or faster, 64-bit (x64) processor
-
-- RAM—1 GB RAM (64-bit)
-
-- Disk space—200 MB available hard disk space, not including the content directory
-
-### Management server database requirements
-
-The following table lists the SQL Server versions that are supported for the App-V 5.1 Management database installation.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SQL Server version
-
Service pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft SQL Server 2017
-
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft SQL Server 2016
-
SP2
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft SQL Server 2014
-
SP2
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft SQL Server 2012
-
SP2
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2
-
SP3
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Publishing server operating system requirements
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for the App-V 5.1 Publishing server installation.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating system
-
Service Pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2016
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
-
SP1
-
64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Publishing server hardware requirements
-
-App-V adds no additional requirements beyond those of Windows Server.
-
-- Processor—1.4 GHz or faster, 64-bit (x64) processor
-
-- RAM—2 GB RAM (64-bit)
-
-- Disk space—200 MB available hard disk space, not including the content directory
-
-### Reporting server operating system requirements
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for the App-V 5.1 Reporting server installation.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating system
-
Service Pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2016
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
-
SP1
-
64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Reporting server hardware requirements
-
-App-V adds no additional requirements beyond those of Windows Server.
-
-- Processor—1.4 GHz or faster, 64-bit (x64) processor
-
-- RAM—2 GB RAM (64-bit)
-
-- Disk space—200 MB available hard disk space
-
-### Reporting server database requirements
-
-The following table lists the SQL Server versions that are supported for the App-V 5.1 Reporting database installation.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SQL Server version
-
Service pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft SQL Server 2017
-
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft SQL Server 2016
-
SP2
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft SQL Server 2014
-
SP2
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft SQL Server 2012
-
SP2
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2
-
SP3
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## App-V client system requirements
-
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for the App-V 5.1 client installation.
-
-**Note:** With the Windows 10 Anniversary release (aka 1607 version), the App-V client is in-box and will block installation of any previous version of the App-V client
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating system
-
Service pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows 10 (pre-1607 version)
-
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows 8.1
-
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Windows 7
-
SP1
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-The following App-V client installation scenarios are not supported, except as noted:
-
-- Computers that run Windows Server
-
-- Computers that run App-V 4.6 SP1 or earlier versions
-
-- The App-V 5.1 Remote Desktop services client is supported only for RDS-enabled servers
-
-### App-V client hardware requirements
-
-The following list displays the supported hardware configuration for the App-V 5.1 client installation.
-
-- Processor— 1.4 GHz or faster 32-bit (x86) or 64-bit (x64) processor
-
-- RAM— 1 GB (32-bit) or 2 GB (64-bit)
-
-- Disk— 100 MB for installation, not including the disk space that is used by virtualized applications.
-
-## Remote Desktop Services client system requirements
-
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for App-V 5.1 Remote Desktop Services (RDS) client installation.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating system
-
Service Pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2016
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
-
SP1
-
64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Remote Desktop Services client hardware requirements
-
-App-V adds no additional requirements beyond those of Windows Server.
-
-- Processor—1.4 GHz or faster, 64-bit (x64) processor
-
-- RAM—2 GB RAM (64-bit)
-
-- Disk space—200 MB available hard disk space
-
-## Sequencer system requirements
-
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for the App-V 5.1 Sequencer installation.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating system
-
Service pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2016
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2012
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
-
SP1
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows 10
-
-
32-bit and 64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows 8.1
-
-
32-bit and 64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft Windows 7
-
SP1
-
32-bit and 64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Sequencer hardware requirements
-
-See the Windows or Windows Server documentation for the hardware requirements. App-V adds no additional hardware requirements.
-
-## Supported versions of System Center Configuration Manager
-
-
-The App-V client supports the following versions of System Center Configuration Manager:
-
-- Microsoft System Center 2012 Configuration Manager
-
-- System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager
-
-- System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager SP1
-
-The following App-V and System Center Configuration Manager version matrix shows all officially supported combinations of App-V and Configuration Manager.
-
-**Note:** Both App-V 4.5 and 4.6 have exited Mainstream support.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
App-V Version
-
System Center Configuration Manager 2007
-
System Center 2012 Configuration Manager
-
System Center 2012 Configuration Manager SP1
-
System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager
-
System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager SP1
-
System Center 2012 Configuration Manager SP2
-
System Center Configuration Manager Version 1511
-
-
-
-
-
App-V 5.0 SP3
-
MSI-Wrapper Only
-
No
-
2012 SP1 CU4
-
2012 R2 CU1
-
Yes
-
Yes
-
Yes
-
-
-
App-V 5.1
-
MSI-Wrapper Only
-
No
-
2012 SP1 CU4
-
2012 R2 CU1
-
Yes
-
Yes
-
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
-For more information about how Configuration Manager integrates with App-V, see [Planning for App-V Integration with Configuration Manager](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/jj822982.aspx).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy App-V](planning-to-deploy-app-v51.md)
-
-[App-V 5.1 Prerequisites](app-v-51-prerequisites.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/application-publishing-and-client-interaction.md b/mdop/appv-v5/application-publishing-and-client-interaction.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6c060982f7..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/application-publishing-and-client-interaction.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1635 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Application Publishing and Client Interaction
-description: Application Publishing and Client Interaction
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: c69a724a-85d1-4e2d-94a2-7ffe0b47d971
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Application Publishing and Client Interaction
-
-
-This article provides technical information about common App-V client operations and their integration with the local operating system.
-
-- [App-V package files created by the Sequencer](#bkmk-appv-pkg-files-list)
-
-- [What’s in the appv file?](#bkmk-appv-file-contents)
-
-- [App-V client data storage locations](#bkmk-files-data-storage)
-
-- [Package registry](#bkmk-pkg-registry)
-
-- [App-V package store behavior](#bkmk-pkg-store-behavior)
-
-- [Roaming registry and data](#bkmk-roaming-reg-data)
-
-- [App-V client application lifecycle management](#bkmk-clt-app-lifecycle)
-
-- [Integration of App-V packages](#bkmk-integr-appv-pkgs)
-
-- [Dynamic configuration processing](#bkmk-dynamic-config)
-
-- [Side-by-side assemblies](#bkmk-sidebyside-assemblies)
-
-- [Client logging](#bkmk-client-logging)
-
-For additional reference information, see [Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) Documentation Resources Download Page](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=27760).
-
-## App-V package files created by the Sequencer
-
-
-The Sequencer creates App-V packages and produces a virtualized application. The sequencing process creates the following files:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
File
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
.appv
-
-
The primary package file, which contains the captured assets and state information from the sequencing process.
-
Architecture of the package file, publishing information, and registry in a tokenized form that can be reapplied to a machine and to a specific user upon delivery.
-
-
-
-
.MSI
-
Executable deployment wrapper that you can use to deploy .appv files manually or by using a third-party deployment platform.
-
-
-
_DeploymentConfig.XML
-
File used to customize the default publishing parameters for all applications in a package that is deployed globally to all users on a computer that is running the App-V client.
-
-
-
_UserConfig.XML
-
File used to customize the publishing parameters for all applications in a package that is a deployed to a specific user on a computer that is running the App-V client.
-
-
-
Report.xml
-
Summary of messages resulting from the sequencing process, including omitted drivers, files, and registry locations.
-
-
-
.CAB
-
Optional: Package accelerator file used to automatically rebuild a previously sequenced virtual application package.
-
-
-
.appvt
-
Optional: Sequencer template file used to retain commonly reused Sequencer settings.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-For information about sequencing, see [Application Virtualization 5.0 Sequencing Guide](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=27760).
-
-## What’s in the appv file?
-
-
-The appv file is a container that stores XML and non-XML files together in a single entity. This file is built from the AppX format, which is based on the Open Packaging Conventions (OPC) standard.
-
-To view the appv file contents, make a copy of the package, and then rename the copied file to a ZIP extension.
-
-The appv file contains the following folder and files, which are used when creating and publishing a virtual application:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Name
-
Type
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Root
-
File folder
-
Directory that contains the file system for the virtualized application that is captured during sequencing.
-
-
-
[Content_Types].xml
-
XML File
-
List of the core content types in the appv file (e.g. DLL, EXE, BIN).
-
-
-
AppxBlockMap.xml
-
XML File
-
Layout of the appv file, which uses File, Block, and BlockMap elements that enable location and validation of files in the App-V package.
-
-
-
AppxManifest.xml
-
XML File
-
Metadata for the package that contains the required information for adding, publishing, and launching the package. Includes extension points (file type associations and shortcuts) and the names and GUIDs associated with the package.
-
-
-
FilesystemMetadata.xml
-
XML File
-
List of the files captured during sequencing, including attributes (e.g., directories, files, opaque directories, empty directories,and long and short names).
-
-
-
PackageHistory.xml
-
XML File
-
Information about the sequencing computer (operating system version, Internet Explorer version, .Net Framework version) and process (upgrade, package version).
-
-
-
Registry.dat
-
DAT File
-
Registry keys and values captured during the sequencing process for the package.
-
-
-
StreamMap.xml
-
XML File
-
List of files for the primary and publishing feature block. The publishing feature block contains the ICO files and required portions of files (EXE and DLL) for publishing the package. When present, the primary feature block includes files that have been optimized for streaming during the sequencing process.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## App-V client data storage locations
-
-
-The App-V client performs tasks to ensure that virtual applications run properly and work like locally installed applications. The process of opening and running virtual applications requires mapping from the virtual file system and registry to ensure the application has the required components of a traditional application expected by users. This section describes the assets that are required to run virtual applications and lists the location where App-V stores the assets.
-
-
Stores previous integration points that enable restore on package unpublish
-
-
-
Copy on Write (COW) Roaming
-
%AppData%\Microsoft\AppV\Client\VFS
-
Writeable roaming location for package modification
-
-
-
Copy on Write (COW) Local
-
%LocalAppData%\Microsoft\AppV\Client\VFS
-
Writeable non-roaming location for package modification
-
-
-
Machine Registry
-
HKLM\Software\Microsoft\AppV
-
Contains package state information, including VReg for machine or globally published packages (Machine hive)
-
-
-
User Registry
-
HKCU\Software\Microsoft\AppV
-
Contains user package state information including VReg
-
-
-
User Registry Classes
-
HKCU\Software\Classes\AppV
-
Contains additional user package state information
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Additional details for the table are provided in the section below and throughout the document.
-
-### Package store
-
-The App-V Client manages the applications assets mounted in the package store. This default storage location is `%ProgramData%\App-V`, but you can configure it during or after setup by using the `Set-AppVClientConfiguration` PowerShell command, which modifies the local registry (`PackageInstallationRoot` value under the `HKLM\Software\Microsoft\AppV\Client\Streaming` key). The package store must be located at a local path on the client operating system. The individual packages are stored in the package store in subdirectories named for the Package GUID and Version GUID.
-
-Example of a path to a specific application:
-
-``` syntax
-C:\ProgramData\App-V\PackGUID\VersionGUID
-```
-
-To change the default location of the package store during setup, see [How to Deploy the App-V Client](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-client-gb18030.md).
-
-### Shared Content Store
-
-If the App-V Client is configured in Shared Content Store mode, no data is written to disk when a stream fault occurs, which means that the packages require minimal local disk space (publishing data). The use of less disk space is highly desirable in VDI environments, where local storage can be limited, and streaming the applications from a high performance network location (such as a SAN) is preferable. For more information on shared content store mode, see .
-
-**Note**
-The machine and package store must be located on a local drive, even when you’re using Shared Content Store configurations for the App-V Client.
-
-
-
-### Package catalogs
-
-The App-V Client manages the following two file-based locations:
-
-- **Catalogs (user and machine).**
-
-- **Registry locations** - depends on how the package is targeted for publishing. There is a Catalog (data store) for the computer, and a catalog for each individual user. The Machine Catalog stores global information applicable to all users or any user, and the User Catalog stores information applicable to a specific user. The Catalog is a collection of Dynamic Configurations and manifest files; there is discrete data for both file and registry per package version.
-
-### Machine catalog
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Description
-
Stores package documents that are available to users on the machine, when packages are added and published. However, if a package is “global” at publishing time, the integrations are available to all users.
-
If a package is non-global, the integrations are published only for specific users, but there are still global resources that are modified and visible to anyone on the client computer (e.g., the package directory is in a shared disk location).
-
If a package is available to a user on the computer (global or non-global), the manifest is stored in the Machine Catalog. When a package is published globally, there is a Dynamic Configuration file, stored in the Machine Catalog; therefore, the determination of whether a package is global is defined according to whether there is a policy file (UserDeploymentConfiguration file) in the Machine Catalog.
Additional files in the machine catalog when the package is part of a connection group
-
-
PackageGroupDescriptor.xml
-
UserPackageGroupDescriptor.xml (globally published Connection Group)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### User catalog
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Description
-
Created during the publishing process. Contains information used for publishing the package, and also used at launch to ensure that a package is provisioned to a specific user. Created in a roaming location and includes user-specific publishing information.
-
When a package is published for a user, the policy file is stored in the User Catalog. At the same time, a copy of the manifest is also stored in the User Catalog. When a package entitlement is removed for a user, the relevant package files are removed from the User Catalog. Looking at the user catalog, an administrator can view the presence of a Dynamic Configuration file, which indicates that the package is entitled for that user.
-
For roaming users, the User Catalog needs to be in a roaming or shared location to preserve the legacy App-V behavior of targeting users by default. Entitlement and policy are tied to a user, not a computer, so they should roam with the user once they are provisioned.
Additional file in the machine catalog when the package is part of a connection group
-
UserPackageGroupDescriptor.xml
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Shortcut backups
-
-During the publishing process, the App-V Client backs up any shortcuts and integration points to `%AppData%\Microsoft\AppV\Client\Integration\ShortCutBackups.` This backup enables the restoration of these integration points to the previous versions when the package is unpublished.
-
-### Copy on Write files
-
-The Package Store contains a pristine copy of the package files that have been streamed from the publishing server. During normal operation of an App-V application, the user or service may require changes to the files. These changes are not made in the package store in order to preserve your ability to repair the application, which removes these changes. These locations, called Copy on Write (COW), support both roaming and non-roaming locations. The location where the modifications are stored depends where the application has been programmed to write changes to in a native experience.
-
-### COW roaming
-
-The COW Roaming location described above stores changes to files and directories that are targeted to the typical %AppData% location or \\Users\\{username}\\AppData\\Roaming location. These directories and files are then roamed based on the operating system settings.
-
-### COW local
-
-The COW Local location is similar to the roaming location, but the directories and files are not roamed to other computers, even if roaming support has been configured. The COW Local location described above stores changes applicable to typical windows and not the %AppData% location. The directories listed will vary but there will be two locations for any typical Windows locations (e.g. Common AppData and Common AppDataS). The **S** signifies the restricted location when the virtual service requests the change as a different elevated user from the logged on users. The non-**S** location stores user based changes.
-
-## Package registry
-
-
-Before an application can access the package registry data, the App-V Client must make the package registry data available to the applications. The App-V Client uses the real registry as a backing store for all registry data.
-
-When a new package is added to the App-V Client, a copy of the REGISTRY.DAT file from the package is created at `%ProgramData%\Microsoft\AppV\Client\VREG\{Version GUID}.dat`. The name of the file is the version GUID with the .DAT extension. The reason this copy is made is to ensure that the actual hive file in the package is never in use, which would prevent the removal of the package at a later time.
-
-
-
-
-
-When the first application from the package is launched on the client, the client stages or copies the contents out of the hive file, re-creating the package registry data in an alternate location `HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\AppV\Client\Packages\PackageGuid\Versions\VersionGuid\REGISTRY`. The staged registry data has two distinct types of machine data and user data. Machine data is shared across all users on the machine. User data is staged for each user to a userspecific location `HKCU\Software\Microsoft\AppV\Client\Packages\PackageGuid\Registry\User`. The machine data is ultimately removed at package removal time, and the user data is removed on a user unpublish operation.
-
-### Package registry staging vs. connection group registry staging
-
-When connection groups are present, the previous process of staging the registry holds true, but instead of having one hive file to process, there are more than one. The files are processed in the order in which they appear in the connection group XML, with the first writer winning any conflicts.
-
-The staged registry persists the same way as in the single package case. Staged user registry data remains for the connection group until it is disabled; staged machine registry data is removed on connection group removal.
-
-### Virtual registry
-
-The purpose of the virtual registry (VREG) is to provide a single merged view of the package registry and the native registry to applications. It also provides copy-on-write (COW) functionality – that is any changes made to the registry from the context of a virtual process are made to a separate COW location. This means that the VREG must combine up to three separate registry locations into a single view based on the populated locations in the registry COW -> package -> native. When a request is made for a registry data it will locate in order until it finds the data it was requesting. Meaning if there is a value stored in a COW location it will not proceed to other locations, however, if there is no data in the COW location it will proceed to the Package and then Native location until it finds the appropriate data.
-
-### Registry locations
-
-There are two package registry locations and two connection group locations where the App-V Client stores registry information, depending on whether the Package is published individually or as part of a connection group. There are three COW locations for packages and three for connection groups, which are created and managed by the VREG. Settings for packages and connection groups are not shared:
-
-**Single Package VReg:**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Location
-
Description
-
-
-
COW
-
-
Machine Registry\Client\Packages\PkgGUID\REGISTRY (Only elevate process can write)
-
User Registry\Client\Packages\PkgGUID\REGISTRY (User Roaming anything written under HKCU except Software\Classes
-
User Registry Classes\Client\Packages\PkgGUID\REGISTRY (HKCU\Software\Classes writes and HKLM for non elevated process)
User Registry Classes\Client\PackageGroups\GrpGUID\Versions\VerGUID\REGISTRY
-
-
-
-
Native
-
-
Native application registry location
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-There are two COW locations for HKLM; elevated and non-elevated processes. Elevated processes always write HKLM changes to the secure COW under HKLM. Non-elevated processes always write HKLM changes to the non-secure COW under HKCU\\Software\\Classes. When an application reads changes from HKLM, elevated processes will read changes from the secure COW under HKLM. Non-elevated reads from both, favoring the changes made in the unsecure COW first.
-
-### Pass-through keys
-
-Pass-through keys enable an administrator to configure certain keys so they can only be read from the native registry, bypassing the Package and COW locations. Pass-through locations are global to the machine (not package specific) and can be configured by adding the path to the key, which should be treated as pass-through to the **REG\_MULTI\_SZ** value called **PassThroughPaths** of the key `HKLM\Software\Microsoft\AppV\Subsystem\VirtualRegistry`. Any key that appears under this multi-string value (and their children) will be treated as pass-through.
-
-The following locations are configured as pass-through locations by default:
-
-- HKEY\_CURRENT\_USER\\SOFTWARE\\Classes\\Local Settings\\Software\\Microsoft\\Windows\\CurrentVersion\\AppModel
-
-- HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Classes\\Local Settings\\Software\\Microsoft\\Windows\\CurrentVersion\\AppModel
-
-- HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\Windows\\CurrentVersion\\WINEVT
-
-- HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE\\SYSTEM\\CurrentControlSet\\services\\eventlog\\Application
-
-- HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE\\SYSTEM\\CurrentControlSet\\Control\\WMI\\Autologger
-
-- HKEY\_CURRENT\_USER\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\Windows\\CurrentVersion\\Internet Settings
-
-- HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\Windows NT\\CurrentVersion\\Perflib
-
-- HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies
-
-- HKEY\_CURRENT\_USER\\SOFTWARE\\Policies
-
-The purpose of Pass-through keys is to ensure that a virtual application does not write registry data in the VReg that is required for non-virtual applications for successful operation or integration. The Policies key ensures that Group Policy based settings set by the administrator are utilized and not per package settings. The AppModel key is required for integration with Windows Modern UI based applications. It is recommend that administers do not modify any of the default pass-through keys, but in some instances, based on application behavior may require adding additional pass-through keys.
-
-## App-V package store behavior
-
-
-App-V 5 manages the Package Store, which is the location where the expanded asset files from the appv file are stored. By default, this location is stored at %ProgramData%\\App-V, and is limited in terms of storage capabilities only by free disk space. The package store is organized by the GUIDs for the package and version as mentioned in the previous section.
-
-### Add packages
-
-App-V Packages are staged upon addition to the computer with the App-V Client. The App-V Client provides on-demand staging. During publishing or a manual Add-AppVClientPackage, the data structure is built in the package store (c:\\programdata\\App-V\\{PkgGUID}\\{VerGUID}). The package files identified in the publishing block defined in the StreamMap.xml are added to the system and the top level folders and child files staged to ensure proper application assets exist at launch.
-
-### Mounting packages
-
-Packages can be explicitly loaded using the PowerShell `Mount-AppVClientPackage` or by using the **App-V Client UI** to download a package. This operation completely loads the entire package into the package store.
-
-### Streaming packages
-
-The App-V Client can be configured to change the default behavior of streaming. All streaming policies are stored under the following registry key: `HKEY_LOCAL_MAcHINE\Software\Microsoft\AppV\Client\Streaming`. Policies are set using the PowerShell cmdlet `Set-AppvClientConfiguration`. The following policies apply to Streaming:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Policy
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
AllowHighCostLaunch
-
On Windows 8 it allows streaming over 3G and cellular networks
-
-
-
AutoLoad
-
Specifies the Background Load setting:
-
0 - Disabled
-
1 – Previously Used Packages only
-
2 – All Packages
-
-
-
PackageInstallationRoot
-
The root folder for the package store in the local machine
-
-
-
PackageSourceRoot
-
The root override where packages should be streamed from
-
-
-
SharedContentStoreMode
-
Enables the use of Shared Content Store for VDI scenarios
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-These settings affect the behavior of streaming App-V package assets to the client. By default, App-V only downloads the assets required after downloading the initial publishing and primary feature blocks. There are three specific behaviors around streaming packages that must be explained:
-
-- Background Streaming
-
-- Optimized Streaming
-
-- Stream Faults
-
-### Background streaming
-
-The PowerShell cmdlet `Get-AppvClientConfiguration` can be used to determine the current mode for background streaming with the AutoLoad setting and modified with the cmdlet Set-AppvClientConfiguration or from the registry (HKLM\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\AppV\\ClientStreaming key). Background streaming is a default setting where the Autoload setting is set to download previously used packages. The behavior based on default setting (value=1) downloads App-V data blocks in the background after the application has been launched. This setting can be disabled all together (value=0) or enabled for all packages (value=2), whether they have been launched.
-
-### Optimized streaming
-
-App-V packages can be configured with a primary feature block during sequencing. This setting allows the sequencing engineer to monitor launch files for a specific application, or applications, and mark the blocks of data in the App-V package for streaming at first launch of any application in the package.
-
-### Stream faults
-
-After the initial stream of any publishing data and the primary feature block, requests for additional files perform stream faults. These blocks of data are downloaded to the package store on an as-needed basis. This allows a user to download only a small part of the package, typically enough to launch the package and run normal tasks. All other blocks are downloaded when a user initiates an operation that requires data not currently in the package store.
-
-For more information on App-V Package streaming visit: .
-
-Sequencing for streaming optimization is available at: .
-
-### Package upgrades
-
-App-V Packages require updating throughout the lifecycle of the application. App-V Package upgrades are similar to the package publish operation, as each version will be created in its own PackageRoot location: `%ProgramData%\App-V\{PkgGUID}\{newVerGUID}`. The upgrade operation is optimized by creating hard links to identical- and streamed-files from other versions of the same package.
-
-### Package removal
-
-The behavior of the App-V Client when packages are removed depends on the method used for removal. Using an App-V full infrastructure to unpublish the application, the user catalog files (machine catalog for globally published applications) are removed, but retains the package store location and COW locations. When the PowerShell cmdlet `Remove-AppVClientPackge` is used to remove an App-V Package, the package store location is cleaned. Remember that unpublishing an App-V Package from the Management Server does not perform a Remove operation. Neither operation will remove the Package Store package files.
-
-## Roaming registry and data
-
-
-App-V 5 is able to provide a near-native experience when roaming, depending on how the application being used is written. By default, App-V roams AppData that is stored in the roaming location, based on the roaming configuration of the operating system. Other locations for storage of file-based data do not roam from computer to computer, since they are in locations that are not roamed.
-
-### Roaming requirements and user catalog data storage
-
-App-V stores data, which represents the state of the user’s catalog, in the form of:
-
-- Files under %appdata%\\Microsoft\\AppV\\Client\\Catalog
-
-- Registry settings under `HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\AppV\Client\Packages`
-
-Together, these files and registry settings represent the user’s catalog, so either both must be roamed, or neither must be roamed for a given user. App-V does not support roaming %AppData%, but not roaming the user’s profile (registry), or vice versa.
-
-**Note**
-The **Repair-AppvClientPackage** cmdlet does not repair the publishing state of packages, where the user’s App-V state under `HKEY_CURRENT_USER` is missing or mismatched with the data in %appdata%.
-
-
-
-### Registry-based data
-
-App-V registry roaming falls into two scenarios, as shown in the following table.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Scenario
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Applications that are run as standard users
-
When a standard user launches an App-V application, both HKLM and HKCU for App-V applications are stored in the HKCU hive on the machine. This presents as two distinct paths:
The locations are enabled for roaming based on the operating system settings.
-
-
-
Applications that are run with elevation
-
When an application is launched with elevation:
-
-
HKLM data is stored in the HKLM hive on the local computer
-
HKCU data is stored in the User Registry location
-
-
In this scenario, these settings are not roamed with normal operating system roaming configurations, and the resulting registry keys and values are stored in the following location:
-
-
-
-### App-V and folder redirection
-
-App-V 5.0 SP2 supports folder redirection of the roaming AppData folder (%AppData%). When the virtual environment is started, the roaming AppData state from the user’s roaming AppData directory is copied to the local cache. Conversely, when the virtual environment is shut down, the local cache that is associated with a specific user’s roaming AppData is transferred to the actual location of that user’s roaming AppData directory.
-
-A typical package has several locations mapped in the user’s backing store for settings in both AppData\\Local and AppData\\Roaming. These locations are the Copy on Write locations that are stored per user in the user’s profile, and that are used to store changes made to the package VFS directories and to protect the default package VFS.
-
-The following table shows local and roaming locations, when folder redirection has not been implemented.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-The following table shows local and roaming locations, when folder redirection has been implemented for %AppData%, and the location has been redirected (typically to a network location).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-The current App-V Client VFS driver cannot write to network locations, so the App-V Client detects the presence of folder redirection and copies the data on the local drive during publishing and when the virtual environment starts. After the user closes the App-V application and the App-V Client closes the virtual environment, the local storage of the VFS AppData is copied back to the network, enabling roaming to additional machines, where the process will be repeated. The detailed steps of the processes are:
-
-1. During publishing or virtual environment startup, the App-V Client detects the location of the AppData directory.
-
-2. If the roaming AppData path is local or ino AppData\\Roaming location is mapped, nothing happens.
-
-3. If the roaming AppData path is not local, the VFS AppData directory is mapped to the local AppData directory.
-
-This process solves the problem of a non-local %AppData% that is not supported by the App-V Client VFS driver. However, the data stored in this new location is not roamed with folder redirection. All changes during the running of the application happen to the local AppData location and must be copied to the redirected location. The detailed steps of this process are:
-
-1. App-V application is shut down, which shuts down the virtual environment.
-
-2. The local cache of the roaming AppData location is compressed and stored in a ZIP file.
-
-3. A timestamp at the end of the ZIP packaging process is used to name the file.
-
-4. The timestamp is recorded in the registry: HKEY\_CURRENT\_USER\\Software\\Microsoft\\AppV\\Client\\Packages\\<GUID>\\AppDataTime as the last known AppData timestamp.
-
-5. The folder redirection process is called to evaluate and initiate the ZIP file uploaded to the roaming AppData directory.
-
-The timestamp is used to determine a “last writer wins” scenario if there is a conflict and is used to optimize the download of the data when the App-V application is published or the virtual environment is started. Folder redirection will make the data available from any other clients covered by the supporting policy and will initiate the process of storing the AppData\\Roaming data to the local AppData location on the client. The detailed processes are:
-
-1. The user starts the virtual environment by starting an application.
-
-2. The application’s virtual environment checks for the most recent time stamped ZIP file, if present.
-
-3. The registry is checked for the last known uploaded timestamp, if present.
-
-4. The most recent ZIP file is downloaded unless the local last known upload timestamp is greater than or equal to the timestamp from the ZIP file.
-
-5. If the local last known upload timestamp is earlier than that of the most recent ZIP file in the roaming AppData location, the ZIP file is extracted to the local temp directory in the user’s profile.
-
-6. After the ZIP file is successfully extracted, the local cache of the roaming AppData directory is renamed and the new data is moved into place.
-
-7. The renamed directory is deleted and the application opens with the most recently saved roaming AppData data.
-
-This completes the successful roaming of application settings that are present in AppData\\Roaming locations. The only other condition that must be addressed is a package repair operation. The details of the process are:
-
-1. During repair, detect if the path to the user’s roaming AppData directory is not local.
-
-2. Map the non-local roaming AppData path targets are recreated the expected roaming and local AppData locations.
-
-3. Delete the timestamp stored in the registry, if present.
-
-This process will re-create both the local and network locations for AppData and remove the registry record of the timestamp.
-
-## App-V client application lifecycle management
-
-
-In an App-V Full Infrastructure, after applications are sequenced they are managed and published to users or computers via the App-V Management and Publishing servers. This section details the operations that occur during the common App-V application lifecycle operations (Add, publishing, launch, upgrade, and removal) and the file and registry locations that are changed and modified from the App-V Client perspective. The App-V Client operations are performed as a series of PowerShell commands initiated on the computer running the App-V Client.
-
-This document focuses on App-V Full Infrastructure solutions. For specific information on App-V Integration with Configuration Manager 2012 visit: .
-
-The App-V application lifecycle tasks are triggered at user login (default), machine startup, or as background timed operations. The settings for the App-V Client operations, including Publishing Servers, refresh intervals, package script enablement, and others, are configured during setup of the client or post-setup with PowerShell commands. See the How to Deploy the Client section on TechNet at: [How to Deploy the App-V Client](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-client-gb18030.md) or utilize the PowerShell:
-
-```powershell
-get-command *appv*
-```
-
-### Publishing refresh
-
-The publishing refresh process is comprised of several smaller operations that are performed on the App-V Client. Since App-V is an application virtualization technology and not a task scheduling technology, the Windows Task Scheduler is utilized to enable the process at user logon, machine startup, and at scheduled intervals. The configuration of the client during setup listed above is the preferred method when distributing the client to a large group of computers with the correct settings. These client settings can be configured with the following PowerShell cmdlets:
-
-- **Add-AppVPublishingServer:** Configures the client with an App-V Publishing Server that provides App-V packages.
-
-- **Set-AppVPublishingServer:** Modifies the current settings for the App-V Publishing Server.
-
-- **Set-AppVClientConfiguration:** Modifies the currents settings for the App-V Client.
-
-- **Sync-AppVPublishingServer:** Initiates an App-V Publishing Refresh process manually. This is also utilized in the scheduled tasks created during configuration of the publishing server.
-
-The focus of the following sections is to detail the operations that occur during different phases of an App-V Publishing Refresh. The topics include:
-
-- Adding an App-V Package
-
-- Publishing an App-V Package
-
-### Adding an App-V package
-
-Adding an App-V package to the client is the first step of the publishing refresh process. The end result is the same as the `Add-AppVClientPackage` cmdlet in PowerShell, except during the publishing refresh add process, the configured publishing server is contacted and passes a high-level list of applications back to the client to pull more detailed information and not a single package add operation. The process continues by configuring the client for package or connection group additions or updates, then accesses the appv file. Next, the contents of the appv file are expanded and placed on the local operating system in the appropriate locations. The following is a detailed workflow of the process, assuming the package is configured for Fault Streaming.
-
-**How to add an App-V package**
-
-1. Manual initiation via PowerShell or Task Sequence initiation of the Publishing Refresh process.
-
- 1. The App-V Client makes an HTTP connection and requests a list of applications based on the target. The Publishing refresh process supports targeting machines or users.
-
- 2. The App-V Publishing Server uses the identity of the initiating target, user or machine, and queries the database for a list of entitled applications. The list of applications is provided as an XML response, which the client uses to send additional requests to the server for more information on a per package basis.
-
-2. The Publishing Agent on the App-V Client performs all actions below serialized.
-
- Evaluate any connection groups that are unpublished or disabled, since package version updates that are part of the connection group cannot be processed.
-
-3. Configure the packages by identifying an Add or Update operations.
-
- 1. The App-V Client utilizes the AppX API from Windows and accesses the appv file from the publishing server.
-
- 2. The package file is opened and the AppXManifest.xml and StreamMap.xml are downloaded to the Package Store.
-
- 3. Completely stream publishing block data defined in the StreamMap.xml. Stores the publishing block data in the Package Store\\PkgGUID\\VerGUID\\Root.
-
- - Icons: Targets of extension points.
-
- - Portable Executable Headers (PE Headers): Targets of extension points that contain the base information about the image need on disk, directly accessed or via file types.
-
- - Scripts: Download scripts directory for use throughout the publishing process.
-
- 4. Populate the Package store:
-
- 1. Create sparse files on disk that represent the extracted package for any directories listed.
-
- 2. Stage top level files and directories under root.
-
- 3. All other files are created when the directory is listed as sparse on disk and streamed on demand.
-
- 5. Create the machine catalog entries. Create the Manifest.xml and DeploymentConfiguration.xml from the package files (if no DeploymentConfiguration.xml file in the package a placeholder is created).
-
- 6. Create location of the package store in the registry HKLM\\Software\\Microsoft\\AppV\\Client\\Packages\\PkgGUID\\Versions\\VerGUID\\Catalog
-
- 7. Create the Registry.dat file from the package store to %ProgramData%\\Microsoft\\AppV\\Client\\VReg\\{VersionGUID}.dat
-
- 8. Register the package with the App-V Kernel Mode Driver HKLM\\Microsoft\\Software\\AppV\\MAV
-
- 9. Invoke scripting from the AppxManifest.xml or DeploymentConfig.xml file for Package Add timing.
-
-4. Configure Connection Groups by adding and enabling or disabling.
-
-5. Remove objects that are not published to the target (user or machine).
-
- **Note**
- This will not perform a package deletion but rather remove integration points for the specific target (user or machine) and remove user catalog files (machine catalog files for globally published).
-
-
-
-6. Invoke background load mounting based on client configuration.
-
-7. Packages that already have publishing information for the machine or user are immediately restored.
-
- **Note**
- This condition occurs as a product of removal without unpublishing with background addition of the package.
-
-
-
-This completes an App-V package add of the publishing refresh process. The next step is publishing the package to the specific target (machine or user).
-
-
-
-### Publishing an App-V package
-
-During the Publishing Refresh operation, the specific publishing operation (Publish-AppVClientPackage) adds entries to the user catalog, maps entitlement to the user, identifies the local store, and finishes by completing any integration steps. The following are the detailed steps.
-
-**How to publish and App-V package**
-
-1. Package entries are added to the user catalog
-
- 1. User targeted packages: the UserDeploymentConfiguration.xml and UserManifest.xml are placed on the machine in the User Catalog
-
- 2. Machine targeted (global) packages: the UserDeploymentConfiguration.xml is placed in the Machine Catalog
-
-2. Register the package with the kernel mode driver for the user at HKLM\\Software\\Microsoft\\AppV\\MAV
-
-3. Perform integration tasks.
-
- 1. Create extension points.
-
- 2. Store backup information in the user’s registry and roaming profile (Shortcut Backups).
-
- **Note**
- This enables restore extension points if the package is unpublished.
-
-
-
- 3. Run scripts targeted for publishing timing.
-
-Publishing an App-V Package that is part of a Connection Group is very similar to the above process. For connection groups, the path that stores the specific catalog information includes PackageGroups as a child of the Catalog Directory. Review the machine and users catalog information above for details.
-
-
-
-### Application launch
-
-After the Publishing Refresh process, the user launches and subsequently re-launches an App-V application. The process is very simple and optimized to launch quickly with a minimum of network traffic. The App-V Client checks the path to the user catalog for files created during publishing. After rights to launch the package are established, the App-V Client creates a virtual environment, begins streaming any necessary data, and applies the appropriate manifest and deployment configuration files during virtual environment creation. With the virtual environment created and configured for the specific package and application, the application starts.
-
-**How to launch App-V applications**
-
-1. User launches the application by clicking on a shortcut or file type invocation.
-
-2. The App-V Client verifies existence in the User Catalog for the following files
-
- - UserDeploymentConfiguration.xml
-
- - UserManifest.xml
-
-3. If the files are present, the application is entitled for that specific user and the application will start the process for launch. There is no network traffic at this point.
-
-4. Next, the App-V Client checks that the path for the package registered for the App-V Client service is found in the registry.
-
-5. Upon finding the path to the package store, the virtual environment is created. If this is the first launch, the Primary Feature Block downloads if present.
-
-6. After downloading, the App-V Client service consumes the manifest and deployment configuration files to configure the virtual environment and all App-V subsystems are loaded.
-
-7. The Application launches. For any missing files in the package store (sparse files), App-V will stream fault the files on an as needed basis.
-
- 
-
-### Upgrading an App-V package
-
-The App-V 5 package upgrade process differs from the older versions of App-V. App-V supports multiple versions of the same package on a machine entitled to different users. Package versions can be added at any time as the package store and catalogs are updated with the new resources. The only process specific to the addition of new version resources is storage optimization. During an upgrade, only the new files are added to the new version store location and hard links are created for unchanged files. This reduces the overall storage by only presenting the file on one disk location and then projecting it into all folders with a file location entry on the disk. The specific details of upgrading an App-V Package are as follows:
-
-**How to upgrade an App-V package**
-
-1. The App-V Client performs a Publishing Refresh and discovers a newer version of an App-V Package.
-
-2. Package entries are added to the appropriate catalog for the new version
-
- 1. User targeted packages: the UserDeploymentConfiguration.xml and UserManifest.xml are placed on the machine in the user catalog at appdata\\roaming\\Microsoft\\AppV\\Client\\Catalog\\Packages\\PkgGUID\\VerGUID
-
- 2. Machine targeted (global) packages: the UserDeploymentConfiguration.xml is placed in the machine catalog at %programdata%\\Microsoft\\AppV\\Client\\Catalog\\Packages\\PkgGUID\\VerGUID
-
-3. Register the package with the kernel mode driver for the user at HKLM\\Software\\Microsoft\\AppV\\MAV
-
-4. Perform integration tasks.
-
- - Integrate extensions points (EP) from the Manifest and Dynamic Configuration files.
-
- 1. File based EP data is stored in the AppData folder utilizing Junction Points from the package store.
-
- 2. Version 1 EPs already exist when a new version becomes available.
-
- 3. The extension points are switched to the Version 2 location in machine or user catalogs for any newer or updated extension points.
-
-5. Run scripts targeted for publishing timing.
-
-6. Install Side by Side assemblies as required.
-
-### Upgrading an in-use App-V package
-
-**Starting in App-V 5 SP2**: If you try to upgrade a package that is in use by an end user, the upgrade task is placed in a pending state. The upgrade will run later, according to the following rules:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task type
-
Applicable rule
-
-
-
-
-
User-based task, e.g., publishing a package to a user
-
The pending task will be performed after the user logs off and then logs back on.
-
-
-
Globally based task, e.g., enabling a connection group globally
-
The pending task will be performed when the computer is shut down and then restarted.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-When a task is placed in a pending state, the App-V client also generates a registry key for the pending task, as follows:
-
-
-
-
-
-The following operations must be completed before users can use the newer version of the package:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
Add the package to the computer
-
This task is computer specific and you can perform it at any time by completing the steps in the Package Add section above.
-
-
-
Publish the package
-
See the Package Publishing section above for steps. This process requires that you update extension points on the system. End users cannot be using the application when you complete this task.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Use the following example scenarios as a guide for updating packages.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Scenario
-
Requirements
-
-
-
-
-
App-V package is not in use when you try to upgrade
-
None of the following components of the package can be in use: virtual application, COM server, or shell extensions.
-
The administrator publishes a newer version of the package and the upgrade works the next time a component or application inside the package is launched. The new version of the package is streamed and run. Nothing has changed in this scenario in App-V 5 SP2 from previous releases of App-V 5.
-
-
-
App-V package is in use when the administrator publishes a newer version of the package
-
The upgrade operation is set to pending by the App-V Client, which means that it is queued and carried out later when the package is not in use.
-
If the package application is in use, the user shuts down the virtual application, after which the upgrade can occur.
-
If the package has shell extensions (Office 2013), which are permanently loaded by Windows Explorer, the user cannot be logged in. Users must log off and the log back in to initiate the App-V package upgrade.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Global vs user publishing
-
-App-V Packages can be published in one of two ways; User which entitles an App-V package to a specific user or group of users and Global which entitles the App-V package to the entire machine for all users of the machine. Once a package upgrade has been pended and the App-V package is not in use, consider the two types of publishing:
-
-- **Globally published**: the application is published to a machine; all users on that machine can use it. The upgrade will happen when the App-V Client Service starts, which effectively means a machine restart.
-
-- **User published**: the application is published to a user. If there are multiple users on the machine, the application can be published to a subset of the users. The upgrade will happen when the user logs in or when it is published again (periodically, ConfigMgr Policy refresh and evaluation, or an App-V periodic publishing/refresh, or explicitly via PowerShell commands).
-
-### Removing an App-V package
-
-Removing App-V applications in a Full Infrastructure is an unpublish operation, and does not perform a package removal. The process is the same as the publish process above, but instead of adding the removal process reverses the changes that have been made for App-V Packages.
-
-### Repairing an App-V package
-
-The repair operation is very simple but may affect many locations on the machine. The previously mentioned Copy on Write (COW) locations are removed, and extension points are de-integrated and then re-integrated. Please review the COW data placement locations by reviewing where they are registered in the registry. This operation is done automatically and there is no administrative control other than initiating a Repair operation from the App-V Client Console or via PowerShell (Repair-AppVClientPackage).
-
-## Integration of App-V packages
-
-
-The App-V Client and package architecture provides specific integration with the local operating system during the addition and publishing of packages. Three files define the integration or extension points for an App-V Package:
-
-- AppXManifest.xml: Stored inside of the package with fallback copies stored in the package store and the user profile. Contains the options created during the sequencing process.
-
-- DeploymentConfig.xml: Provides configuration information of computer and user based integration extension points.
-
-- UserConfig.xml: A subset of the Deploymentconfig.xml that only provides user- based configurations and only targets user-based extension points.
-
-### Rules of integration
-
-When App-V applications are published to a computer with the App-V Client, some specific actions take place as described in the list below:
-
-- Global Publishing: Shortcuts are stored in the All Users profile location and other extension points are stored in the registry in the HKLM hive.
-
-- User Publishing: Shortcuts are stored in the current user account profile and other extension points are stored in the registry in the HKCU hive.
-
-- Backup and Restore: Existing native application data and registry (such as FTA registrations) are backed up during publishing.
-
- 1. App-V packages are given ownership based on the last integrated package where the ownership is passed to the newest published App-V application.
-
- 2. Ownership transfers from one App-V package to another when the owning App-V package is unpublished. This will not initiate a restore of the data or registry.
-
- 3. Restore the backed up data when the last package is unpublished or removed on a per extension point basis.
-
-### Extension points
-
-The App-V publishing files (manifest and dynamic configuration) provide several extension points that enable the application to integrate with the local operating system. These extension points perform typical application installation tasks, such as placing shortcuts, creating file type associations, and registering components. As these are virtualized applications that are not installed in the same manner a traditional application, there are some differences. The following is a list of extension points covered in this section:
-
-- Shortcuts
-
-- File Type Associations
-
-- Shell Extensions
-
-- COM
-
-- Software Clients
-
-- Application capabilities
-
-- URL Protocol Handler
-
-- AppPath
-
-- Virtual Application
-
-### Shortcuts
-
-The short cut is one of the basic elements of integration with the OS and is the interface for direct user launch of an App-V application. During the publishing and unpublishing of App-V applications.
-
-From the package manifest and dynamic configuration XML files, the path to a specific application executable can be found in a section similar to the following:
-
-```xml
-
-
- [{Common Desktop}]\Adobe Reader 9.lnk
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\Reader\AcroRd32.exe
- [{Windows}]\Installer\{AC76BA86-7AD7-1033-7B44-A94000000001}\SC_Reader.ico
-
-
- 1
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\Reader\AcroRd32.exe
-
-
-```
-
-As mentioned previously, the App-V shortcuts are placed by default in the user’s profile based on the refresh operation. Global refresh places shortcuts in the All Users profile and user refresh stores them in the specific user’s profile. The actual executable is stored in the Package Store. The location of the ICO file is a tokenized location in the App-V package.
-
-### File type associations
-
-The App-V Client manages the local operating system File Type Associations during publishing, which enables users to use file type invocations or to open a file with a specifically registered extension (.docx) to start an App-V application. File type associations are present in the manifest and dynamic configuration files as represented in the example below:
-
-```xml
-
-
-
- .xdp
- AcroExch.XDPDoc
- application/vnd.adobe.xdp+xml
-
-
- AcroExch.XDPDoc
- Adobe Acrobat XML Data Package File
- 65536
- [{Windows}]\Installer\{AC76BA86-7AD7-1033-7B44-A94000000001}\XDPFile_8.ico
-
- Read
-
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\Reader\AcroRd32.exe
- Open
- "[{AppVPackageRoot}]\Reader\AcroRd32.exe" "%1"
-
-
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\Reader\AcroRd32.exe
- Printto
- "[{AppVPackageRoot}]\Reader\AcroRd32.exe" /t "%1" "%2" "%3" "%4"
-
-
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\Reader\AcroRd32.exe
- Read
- Open with Adobe Reader 9
- "[{AppVPackageRoot}]\Reader\AcroRd32.exe" "%1"
-
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-**Note**
-In this example:
-
-- `.xdp` is the extension
-
-- `AcroExch.XDPDoc` is the ProgId value (which points to the adjoining ProgId)
-
-- `"[{AppVPackageRoot}]\Reader\AcroRd32.exe" "%1"` is the command line, which points to the application executable
-
-
-
-### Shell extensions
-
-Shell extensions are embedded in the package automatically during the sequencing process. When the package is published globally, the shell extension gives users the same functionality as if the application were locally installed. The application requires no additional setup or configuration on the client to enable the shell extension functionality.
-
-**Requirements for using shell extensions:**
-
-- Packages that contain embedded shell extensions must be published globally.
-
-- The “bitness” of the application, Sequencer, and App-V client must match, or the shell extensions won’t work. For example:
-
- - The version of the application is 64-bit.
-
- - The Sequencer is running on a 64-bit computer.
-
- - The package is being delivered to a 64-bit App-V client computer.
-
-The following table displays the supported shell extensions.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Handler
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Context menu handler
-
Adds menu items to the context menu. It is called before the context menu is displayed.
-
-
-
Drag-and-drop handler
-
Controls the action upon right-click drag-and-drop and modifies the context menu that appears.
-
-
-
Drop target handler
-
Controls the action after a data object is dragged-and-dropped over a drop target such as a file.
-
-
-
Data object handler
-
Controls the action after a file is copied to the clipboard or dragged-and-dropped over a drop target. It can provide additional clipboard formats to the drop target.
-
-
-
Property sheet handler
-
Replaces or adds pages to the property sheet dialog box of an object.
-
-
-
Infotip handler
-
Allows retrieving flags and infotip information for an item and displaying it inside a popup tooltip upon mouse- hover.
-
-
-
Column handler
-
Allows creating and displaying custom columns in Windows Explorer Details view. It can be used to extend sorting and grouping.
-
-
-
Preview handler
-
Enables a preview of a file to be displayed in the Windows Explorer Preview Pane.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### COM
-
-The App-V Client supports publishing applications with support for COM integration and virtualization. COM integration allows the App-V Client to register COM objects on the local operating system and virtualization of the objects. For the purposes of this document, the integration of COM objects requires additional detail.
-
-App-V supports registering COM objects from the package to the local operating system with two process types: Out-of-process and in-process. Registering COM objects is accomplished with one or a combination of multiple modes of operation for a specific App-V package that includes off, Isolated, and Integrated. The integrated mode is configured for either the out-of-process or in-process type. Configuration of COM modes and types is accomplished with dynamic configuration files (deploymentconfig.xml or userconfig.xml).
-
-Details on App-V integration are available at: .
-
-### Software clients and application capabilities
-
-App-V supports specific software clients and application capabilities extension points that enable virtualized applications to be registered with the software client of the operating system. This enables users to select default programs for operations like email, instant messaging, and media player. This operation is performed in the control panel with the Set Program Access and Computer Defaults, and configured during sequencing in the manifest or dynamic configuration files. Application capabilities are only supported when the App-V applications are published globally.
-
-Example of software client registration of an App-V based mail client.
-
-```xml
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Mozilla Thunderbird
- Mozilla Thunderbird
- [{ProgramFilesX86}]\Mozilla Thunderbird\thunderbird.exe,0
-
-
- "[{ProgramFilesX86}]\Mozilla Thunderbird\uninstall\helper.exe" /SetAsDefaultAppGlobal
- "[{ProgramFilesX86}]\Mozilla Thunderbird\uninstall\helper.exe" /HideShortcuts
- "[{ProgramFilesX86}]\Mozilla Thunderbird\uninstall\helper.exe" /ShowShortcuts
-
- 1
-
-
-
- [{ProgramFilesX86}]\Mozilla Thunderbird\thunderbird.exe
- "[{ProgramFilesX86}]\Mozilla Thunderbird\thunderbird.exe" -mail
-
- [{ProgramFilesX86}]\Mozilla Thunderbird\mozMapi32_InUse.dll
-
- Thunderbird URL
- 2
- [{ProgramFilesX86}]\Mozilla Thunderbird\thunderbird.exe,0
-
- [{ProgramFilesX86}]\Mozilla Thunderbird\thunderbird.exe
- "[{ProgramFilesX86}]\Mozilla Thunderbird\thunderbird.exe" -osint -compose "%1"
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-**Note**
-In this example:
-
-- `` is the overall Software Clients setting to integrate Email clients
-
-- `` is the flag to set a particular Email client as the default Email client
-
-- `[{ProgramFilesX86}]\Mozilla Thunderbird\mozMapi32_InUse.dll` is the MAPI dll registration
-
-
-
-### URL Protocol handler
-
-Applications do not always specifically called virtualized applications utilizing file type invocation. For, example, in an application that supports embedding a mailto: link inside a document or web page, the user clicks on a mailto: link and expects to get their registered mail client. App-V supports URL Protocol handlers that can be registered on a per-package basis with the local operating system. During sequencing, the URL protocol handlers are automatically added to the package.
-
-For situations where there is more than one application that could register the specific URL Protocol handler, the dynamic configuration files can be utilized to modify the behavior and suppress or disable this feature for an application that should not be the primary application launched.
-
-### AppPath
-
-The AppPath extension point supports calling App-V applications directly from the operating system. This is typically accomplished from the Run or Start Screen, depending on the operating system, which enables administrators to provide access to App-V applications from operating system commands or scripts without calling the specific path to the executable. It therefore avoids modifying the system path environment variable on all systems, as it is accomplished during publishing.
-
-The AppPath extension point is configured either in the manifest or in the dynamic configuration files and is stored in the registry on the local machine during publishing for the user. For additional information on AppPath review: .
-
-### Virtual application
-
-This subsystem provides a list of applications captured during sequencing which is usually consumed by other App-V components. Integration of extension points belonging to a particular application can be disabled using dynamic configuration files. For example, if a package contains two applications, it is possible to disable all extension points belonging to one application, in order to allow only integration of extension points of other application.
-
-### Extension point rules
-
-The extension points described above are integrated into the operating system based on how the packages has been published. Global publishing places extension points in public machine locations, where user publishing places extension points in user locations. For example a shortcut that is created on the desktop and published globally will result in the file data for the shortcut (%Public%\\Desktop) and the registry data (HKLM\\Software\\Classes). The same shortcut would have file data (%UserProfile%\\Desktop) and registry data (HKCU\\Software\\Classes).
-
-Extension points are not all published the same way, where some extension points will require global publishing and others require sequencing on the specific operating system and architecture where they are delivered. Below is a table that describes these two key rules.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Virtual Extension
-
Requires target OS Sequencing
-
Requires Global Publishing
-
-
-
-
-
Shortcut
-
-
-
-
-
File Type Association
-
-
-
-
-
URL Protocols
-
X
-
-
-
-
AppPaths
-
X
-
-
-
-
COM Mode
-
-
-
-
-
Software Client
-
X
-
-
-
-
Application Capabilities
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
Context Menu Handler
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
Drag-and-drop Handler
-
X
-
-
-
-
Data Object Handler
-
X
-
-
-
-
Property Sheet Handler
-
X
-
-
-
-
Infotip Handler
-
X
-
-
-
-
Column Handler
-
X
-
-
-
-
Shell Extensions
-
X
-
-
-
-
Browser Helper Object
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
Active X Object
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Dynamic configuration processing
-
-
-Deploying App-V packages to one machine or user is very simple. However, as organizations deploy AppV applications across business lines and geographic and political boundaries, the ability to sequence an application one time with one set of settings becomes impossible. App-V was designed for this scenario, as it captures specific settings and configurations during sequencing in the Manifest file, but also supports modification with Dynamic Configuration files.
-
-App-V dynamic configuration allows for specifying a policy for a package either at the machine level or at the user level. The Dynamic Configuration files enable sequencing engineers to modify the configuration of a package, post-sequencing, to address the needs of individual groups of users or machines. In some instances it may be necessary to make modifications to the application to provide proper functionality within the App-V environment. For example, it may be necessary to make modifications to the \_\*config.xml files to allow certain actions to be performed at a specified time during the execution of the application, like disabling a mailto extension to prevent a virtualized application from overwriting that extension from another application.
-
-App-V Packages contain the Manifest file inside of the appv package file, which is representative of sequencing operations and is the policy of choice unless Dynamic Configuration files are assigned to a specific package. Post-sequencing, the Dynamic Configuration files can be modified to allow the publishing of an application to different desktops or users with different extension points. The two Dynamic Configuration Files are the Dynamic Deployment Configuration (DDC) and Dynamic User Configuration (DUC) files. This section focuses on the combination of the manifest and dynamic configuration files.
-
-### Example for dynamic configuration files
-
-The example below shows the combination of the Manifest, Deployment Configuration and User Configuration files after publishing and during normal operation. These examples are abbreviated examples of each of the files. The purpose is show the combination of the files only and not to be a complete description of the specific categories available in each of the files. For more information review the App-V 5 Sequencing Guide at:
-
-**Manifest**
-
-```xml
-
-
- [{Common Programs}]\7-Zip\7-Zip File Manager.lnk
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\7zFM.exe
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\7zFM exe.O.ico
-
-
-```
-
-**Deployment Configuration**
-
-```xml
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-**User Configuration**
-
-```xml
-
-
-
-
- [{Desktop}]\7-Zip\7-Zip File Manager.lnk
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\7zFM.exe
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\7zFM exe.O.ico
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- [{Desktop}]\7-Zip\7-Zip File Manager.lnk
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\7zFM.exe
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\7zFM.exe.O.ico
-
-
- [{Common Programs}]\7-Zip\7-Zip File Manager.Ink
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\7zFM.exe
- [{AppVPackageRoot)]\7zFM.exe.O.ico
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-## Side-by-side assemblies
-
-
-App-V supports the automatic packaging of side-by-side (SxS) assemblies during sequencing and deployment on the client during virtual application publishing. App-V 5 SP2 supports capturing SxS assemblies during sequencing for assemblies not present on the sequencing machine. And for assemblies consisting of Visual C++ (Version 8 and newer) and/or MSXML run-time, the Sequencer will automatically detect and capture these dependencies even if they were not installed during monitoring. The Side by Side assemblies feature removes the limitations of previous versions of App-V, where the App-V Sequencer did not capture assemblies already present on the sequencing workstation, and privatizing the assemblies which limited to one bit version per package. This behavior resulted in deployed App-V applications to clients missing the required SxS assemblies, causing application launch failures. This forced the packaging process to document and then ensure that all assemblies required for packages were locally installed on the user’s client operating system to ensure support for the virtual applications. Based on the number of assemblies and the lack of application documentation for the required dependencies, this task was both a management and implementation challenge.
-
-Side by Side Assembly support in App-V has the following features.
-
-- Automatic captures of SxS assembly during Sequencing, regardless of whether the assembly was already installed on the sequencing workstation.
-
-- The App-V Client automatically installs required SxS assemblies to the client computer at publishing time when they are not present.
-
-- The Sequencer reports the VC run-time dependency in Sequencer reporting mechanism.
-
-- The Sequencer allows opting to not package the assemblies that are already installed on the Sequencer, supporting scenarios where the assemblies have previously been installed on the target computers.
-
-### Automatic publishing of SxS assemblies
-
-During publishing of an App-V package with SxS assemblies the App-V Client will check for the presence of the assembly on the machine. If the assembly does not exist, the client will deploy the assembly to the machine. Packages that are part of connection groups will rely on the Side by Side assembly installations that are part of the base packages, as the connection group does not contain any information about assembly installation.
-
-**Note**
-UnPublishing or removing a package with an assembly does not remove the assemblies for that package.
-
-
-
-## Client logging
-
-
-The App-V client logs information to the Windows Event log in standard ETW format. The specific App-V events can be found in the event viewer, under Applications and Services Logs\\Microsoft\\AppV\\Client.
-
-**Note**
-In App-V 5.0 SP3, some logs have been consolidated and moved to the following location:
-
-`Event logs/Applications and Services Logs/Microsoft/AppV/ServiceLog`
-
-For a list of the moved logs, see [About App-V 5.0 SP3](about-app-v-50-sp3.md#bkmk-event-logs-moved).
-
-
-
-There are three specific categories of events recorded described below.
-
-**Admin**: Logs events for configurations being applied to the App-V Client, and contains the primary warnings and errors.
-
-**Operational**: Logs the general App-V execution and usage of individual components creating an audit log of the App-V operations that have been completed on the App-V Client.
-
-**Virtual Application**: Logs virtual application launches and use of virtualization subsystems.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/application-publishing-and-client-interaction51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/application-publishing-and-client-interaction51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ba6d7e8fe7..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/application-publishing-and-client-interaction51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1635 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Application Publishing and Client Interaction
-description: Application Publishing and Client Interaction
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 36a4bf6f-a917-41a6-9856-6248686df352
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Application Publishing and Client Interaction
-
-
-This article provides technical information about common App-V client operations and their integration with the local operating system.
-
-- [App-V package files created by the Sequencer](#bkmk-appv-pkg-files-list)
-
-- [What’s in the appv file?](#bkmk-appv-file-contents)
-
-- [App-V client data storage locations](#bkmk-files-data-storage)
-
-- [Package registry](#bkmk-pkg-registry)
-
-- [App-V package store behavior](#bkmk-pkg-store-behavior)
-
-- [Roaming registry and data](#bkmk-roaming-reg-data)
-
-- [App-V client application lifecycle management](#bkmk-clt-app-lifecycle)
-
-- [Integration of App-V packages](#bkmk-integr-appv-pkgs)
-
-- [Dynamic configuration processing](#bkmk-dynamic-config)
-
-- [Side-by-side assemblies](#bkmk-sidebyside-assemblies)
-
-- [Client logging](#bkmk-client-logging)
-
-For additional reference information, see [Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) Documentation Resources Download Page](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=27760).
-
-## App-V package files created by the Sequencer
-
-
-The Sequencer creates App-V packages and produces a virtualized application. The sequencing process creates the following files:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
File
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
.appv
-
-
The primary package file, which contains the captured assets and state information from the sequencing process.
-
Architecture of the package file, publishing information, and registry in a tokenized form that can be reapplied to a machine and to a specific user upon delivery.
-
-
-
-
.MSI
-
Executable deployment wrapper that you can use to deploy .appv files manually or by using a third-party deployment platform.
-
-
-
_DeploymentConfig.XML
-
File used to customize the default publishing parameters for all applications in a package that is deployed globally to all users on a computer that is running the App-V client.
-
-
-
_UserConfig.XML
-
File used to customize the publishing parameters for all applications in a package that is a deployed to a specific user on a computer that is running the App-V client.
-
-
-
Report.xml
-
Summary of messages resulting from the sequencing process, including omitted drivers, files, and registry locations.
-
-
-
.CAB
-
Optional: Package accelerator file used to automatically rebuild a previously sequenced virtual application package.
-
-
-
.appvt
-
Optional: Sequencer template file used to retain commonly reused Sequencer settings.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-For information about sequencing, see [Application Virtualization Sequencing Guide](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=269810).
-
-## What’s in the appv file?
-
-
-The appv file is a container that stores XML and non-XML files together in a single entity. This file is built from the AppX format, which is based on the Open Packaging Conventions (OPC) standard.
-
-To view the appv file contents, make a copy of the package, and then rename the copied file to a ZIP extension.
-
-The appv file contains the following folder and files, which are used when creating and publishing a virtual application:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Name
-
Type
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Root
-
File folder
-
Directory that contains the file system for the virtualized application that is captured during sequencing.
-
-
-
[Content_Types].xml
-
XML File
-
List of the core content types in the appv file (e.g. DLL, EXE, BIN).
-
-
-
AppxBlockMap.xml
-
XML File
-
Layout of the appv file, which uses File, Block, and BlockMap elements that enable location and validation of files in the App-V package.
-
-
-
AppxManifest.xml
-
XML File
-
Metadata for the package that contains the required information for adding, publishing, and launching the package. Includes extension points (file type associations and shortcuts) and the names and GUIDs associated with the package.
-
-
-
FilesystemMetadata.xml
-
XML File
-
List of the files captured during sequencing, including attributes (e.g., directories, files, opaque directories, empty directories,and long and short names).
-
-
-
PackageHistory.xml
-
XML File
-
Information about the sequencing computer (operating system version, Internet Explorer version, .Net Framework version) and process (upgrade, package version).
-
-
-
Registry.dat
-
DAT File
-
Registry keys and values captured during the sequencing process for the package.
-
-
-
StreamMap.xml
-
XML File
-
List of files for the primary and publishing feature block. The publishing feature block contains the ICO files and required portions of files (EXE and DLL) for publishing the package. When present, the primary feature block includes files that have been optimized for streaming during the sequencing process.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## App-V client data storage locations
-
-
-The App-V client performs tasks to ensure that virtual applications run properly and work like locally installed applications. The process of opening and running virtual applications requires mapping from the virtual file system and registry to ensure the application has the required components of a traditional application expected by users. This section describes the assets that are required to run virtual applications and lists the location where App-V stores the assets.
-
-
Stores previous integration points that enable restore on package unpublish
-
-
-
Copy on Write (COW) Roaming
-
%AppData%\Microsoft\AppV\Client\VFS
-
Writeable roaming location for package modification
-
-
-
Copy on Write (COW) Local
-
%LocalAppData%\Microsoft\AppV\Client\VFS
-
Writeable non-roaming location for package modification
-
-
-
Machine Registry
-
HKLM\Software\Microsoft\AppV
-
Contains package state information, including VReg for machine or globally published packages (Machine hive)
-
-
-
User Registry
-
HKCU\Software\Microsoft\AppV
-
Contains user package state information including VReg
-
-
-
User Registry Classes
-
HKCU\Software\Classes\AppV
-
Contains additional user package state information
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Additional details for the table are provided in the section below and throughout the document.
-
-### Package store
-
-The App-V Client manages the applications assets mounted in the package store. This default storage location is `%ProgramData%\App-V`, but you can configure it during or after setup by using the `Set-AppVClientConfiguration` PowerShell command, which modifies the local registry (`PackageInstallationRoot` value under the `HKLM\Software\Microsoft\AppV\Client\Streaming` key). The package store must be located at a local path on the client operating system. The individual packages are stored in the package store in subdirectories named for the Package GUID and Version GUID.
-
-Example of a path to a specific application:
-
-``` syntax
-C:\ProgramData\App-V\PackGUID\VersionGUID
-```
-
-To change the default location of the package store during setup, see [How to Deploy the App-V Client](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-client-51gb18030.md).
-
-### Shared Content Store
-
-If the App-V Client is configured in Shared Content Store mode, no data is written to disk when a stream fault occurs, which means that the packages require minimal local disk space (publishing data). The use of less disk space is highly desirable in VDI environments, where local storage can be limited, and streaming the applications from a high performance network location (such as a SAN) is preferable. For more information on shared content store mode, see .
-
-**Note**
-The machine and package store must be located on a local drive, even when you’re using Shared Content Store configurations for the App-V Client.
-
-
-
-### Package catalogs
-
-The App-V Client manages the following two file-based locations:
-
-- **Catalogs (user and machine).**
-
-- **Registry locations** - depends on how the package is targeted for publishing. There is a Catalog (data store) for the computer, and a catalog for each individual user. The Machine Catalog stores global information applicable to all users or any user, and the User Catalog stores information applicable to a specific user. The Catalog is a collection of Dynamic Configurations and manifest files; there is discrete data for both file and registry per package version.
-
-### Machine catalog
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Description
-
Stores package documents that are available to users on the machine, when packages are added and published. However, if a package is “global” at publishing time, the integrations are available to all users.
-
If a package is non-global, the integrations are published only for specific users, but there are still global resources that are modified and visible to anyone on the client computer (e.g., the package directory is in a shared disk location).
-
If a package is available to a user on the computer (global or non-global), the manifest is stored in the Machine Catalog. When a package is published globally, there is a Dynamic Configuration file, stored in the Machine Catalog; therefore, the determination of whether a package is global is defined according to whether there is a policy file (UserDeploymentConfiguration file) in the Machine Catalog.
Additional files in the machine catalog when the package is part of a connection group
-
-
PackageGroupDescriptor.xml
-
UserPackageGroupDescriptor.xml (globally published Connection Group)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### User catalog
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Description
-
Created during the publishing process. Contains information used for publishing the package, and also used at launch to ensure that a package is provisioned to a specific user. Created in a roaming location and includes user-specific publishing information.
-
When a package is published for a user, the policy file is stored in the User Catalog. At the same time, a copy of the manifest is also stored in the User Catalog. When a package entitlement is removed for a user, the relevant package files are removed from the User Catalog. Looking at the user catalog, an administrator can view the presence of a Dynamic Configuration file, which indicates that the package is entitled for that user.
-
For roaming users, the User Catalog needs to be in a roaming or shared location to preserve the legacy App-V behavior of targeting users by default. Entitlement and policy are tied to a user, not a computer, so they should roam with the user once they are provisioned.
Additional file in the machine catalog when the package is part of a connection group
-
UserPackageGroupDescriptor.xml
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Shortcut backups
-
-During the publishing process, the App-V Client backs up any shortcuts and integration points to `%AppData%\Microsoft\AppV\Client\Integration\ShortCutBackups.` This backup enables the restoration of these integration points to the previous versions when the package is unpublished.
-
-### Copy on Write files
-
-The Package Store contains a pristine copy of the package files that have been streamed from the publishing server. During normal operation of an App-V application, the user or service may require changes to the files. These changes are not made in the package store in order to preserve your ability to repair the application, which removes these changes. These locations, called Copy on Write (COW), support both roaming and non-roaming locations. The location where the modifications are stored depends where the application has been programmed to write changes to in a native experience.
-
-### COW roaming
-
-The COW Roaming location described above stores changes to files and directories that are targeted to the typical %AppData% location or \\Users\\{username}\\AppData\\Roaming location. These directories and files are then roamed based on the operating system settings.
-
-### COW local
-
-The COW Local location is similar to the roaming location, but the directories and files are not roamed to other computers, even if roaming support has been configured. The COW Local location described above stores changes applicable to typical windows and not the %AppData% location. The directories listed will vary but there will be two locations for any typical Windows locations (e.g. Common AppData and Common AppDataS). The **S** signifies the restricted location when the virtual service requests the change as a different elevated user from the logged on users. The non-**S** location stores user based changes.
-
-## Package registry
-
-
-Before an application can access the package registry data, the App-V Client must make the package registry data available to the applications. The App-V Client uses the real registry as a backing store for all registry data.
-
-When a new package is added to the App-V Client, a copy of the REGISTRY.DAT file from the package is created at `%ProgramData%\Microsoft\AppV\Client\VREG\{Version GUID}.dat`. The name of the file is the version GUID with the .DAT extension. The reason this copy is made is to ensure that the actual hive file in the package is never in use, which would prevent the removal of the package at a later time.
-
-
-
-
-
-When the first application from the package is launched on the client, the client stages or copies the contents out of the hive file, re-creating the package registry data in an alternate location `HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\AppV\Client\Packages\PackageGuid\Versions\VersionGuid\REGISTRY`. The staged registry data has two distinct types of machine data and user data. Machine data is shared across all users on the machine. User data is staged for each user to a userspecific location `HKCU\Software\Microsoft\AppV\Client\Packages\PackageGuid\Registry\User`. The machine data is ultimately removed at package removal time, and the user data is removed on a user unpublish operation.
-
-### Package registry staging vs. connection group registry staging
-
-When connection groups are present, the previous process of staging the registry holds true, but instead of having one hive file to process, there are more than one. The files are processed in the order in which they appear in the connection group XML, with the first writer winning any conflicts.
-
-The staged registry persists the same way as in the single package case. Staged user registry data remains for the connection group until it is disabled; staged machine registry data is removed on connection group removal.
-
-### Virtual registry
-
-The purpose of the virtual registry (VREG) is to provide a single merged view of the package registry and the native registry to applications. It also provides copy-on-write (COW) functionality – that is any changes made to the registry from the context of a virtual process are made to a separate COW location. This means that the VREG must combine up to three separate registry locations into a single view based on the populated locations in the registry COW -> package -> native. When a request is made for a registry data it will locate in order until it finds the data it was requesting. Meaning if there is a value stored in a COW location it will not proceed to other locations, however, if there is no data in the COW location it will proceed to the Package and then Native location until it finds the appropriate data.
-
-### Registry locations
-
-There are two package registry locations and two connection group locations where the App-V Client stores registry information, depending on whether the Package is published individually or as part of a connection group. There are three COW locations for packages and three for connection groups, which are created and managed by the VREG. Settings for packages and connection groups are not shared:
-
-**Single Package VReg:**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Location
-
Description
-
-
-
COW
-
-
Machine Registry\Client\Packages\PkgGUID\REGISTRY (Only elevate process can write)
-
User Registry\Client\Packages\PkgGUID\REGISTRY (User Roaming anything written under HKCU except Software\Classes
-
User Registry Classes\Client\Packages\PkgGUID\REGISTRY (HKCU\Software\Classes writes and HKLM for non elevated process)
User Registry Classes\Client\PackageGroups\GrpGUID\Versions\VerGUID\REGISTRY
-
-
-
-
Native
-
-
Native application registry location
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-There are two COW locations for HKLM; elevated and non-elevated processes. Elevated processes always write HKLM changes to the secure COW under HKLM. Non-elevated processes always write HKLM changes to the non-secure COW under HKCU\\Software\\Classes. When an application reads changes from HKLM, elevated processes will read changes from the secure COW under HKLM. Non-elevated reads from both, favoring the changes made in the unsecure COW first.
-
-### Pass-through keys
-
-Pass-through keys enable an administrator to configure certain keys so they can only be read from the native registry, bypassing the Package and COW locations. Pass-through locations are global to the machine (not package specific) and can be configured by adding the path to the key, which should be treated as pass-through to the **REG\_MULTI\_SZ** value called **PassThroughPaths** of the key `HKLM\Software\Microsoft\AppV\Subsystem\VirtualRegistry`. Any key that appears under this multi-string value (and their children) will be treated as pass-through.
-
-The following locations are configured as pass-through locations by default:
-
-- HKEY\_CURRENT\_USER\\SOFTWARE\\Classes\\Local Settings\\Software\\Microsoft\\Windows\\CurrentVersion\\AppModel
-
-- HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Classes\\Local Settings\\Software\\Microsoft\\Windows\\CurrentVersion\\AppModel
-
-- HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\Windows\\CurrentVersion\\WINEVT
-
-- HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE\\SYSTEM\\CurrentControlSet\\services\\eventlog\\Application
-
-- HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE\\SYSTEM\\CurrentControlSet\\Control\\WMI\\Autologger
-
-- HKEY\_CURRENT\_USER\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\Windows\\CurrentVersion\\Internet Settings
-
-- HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\Windows NT\\CurrentVersion\\Perflib
-
-- HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies
-
-- HKEY\_CURRENT\_USER\\SOFTWARE\\Policies
-
-The purpose of Pass-through keys is to ensure that a virtual application does not write registry data in the VReg that is required for non-virtual applications for successful operation or integration. The Policies key ensures that Group Policy based settings set by the administrator are utilized and not per package settings. The AppModel key is required for integration with Windows Modern UI based applications. It is recommend that administers do not modify any of the default pass-through keys, but in some instances, based on application behavior may require adding additional pass-through keys.
-
-## App-V package store behavior
-
-
-App-V 5 manages the Package Store, which is the location where the expanded asset files from the appv file are stored. By default, this location is stored at %ProgramData%\\App-V, and is limited in terms of storage capabilities only by free disk space. The package store is organized by the GUIDs for the package and version as mentioned in the previous section.
-
-### Add packages
-
-App-V Packages are staged upon addition to the computer with the App-V Client. The App-V Client provides on-demand staging. During publishing or a manual Add-AppVClientPackage, the data structure is built in the package store (c:\\programdata\\App-V\\{PkgGUID}\\{VerGUID}). The package files identified in the publishing block defined in the StreamMap.xml are added to the system and the top level folders and child files staged to ensure proper application assets exist at launch.
-
-### Mounting packages
-
-Packages can be explicitly loaded using the PowerShell `Mount-AppVClientPackage` or by using the **App-V Client UI** to download a package. This operation completely loads the entire package into the package store.
-
-### Streaming packages
-
-The App-V Client can be configured to change the default behavior of streaming. All streaming policies are stored under the following registry key: `HKEY_LOCAL_MAcHINE\Software\Microsoft\AppV\Client\Streaming`. Policies are set using the PowerShell cmdlet `Set-AppvClientConfiguration`. The following policies apply to Streaming:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Policy
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
AllowHighCostLaunch
-
On Windows 8 and later, it allows streaming over 3G and cellular networks
-
-
-
AutoLoad
-
Specifies the Background Load setting:
-
0 - Disabled
-
1 – Previously Used Packages only
-
2 – All Packages
-
-
-
PackageInstallationRoot
-
The root folder for the package store in the local machine
-
-
-
PackageSourceRoot
-
The root override where packages should be streamed from
-
-
-
SharedContentStoreMode
-
Enables the use of Shared Content Store for VDI scenarios
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-These settings affect the behavior of streaming App-V package assets to the client. By default, App-V only downloads the assets required after downloading the initial publishing and primary feature blocks. There are three specific behaviors around streaming packages that must be explained:
-
-- Background Streaming
-
-- Optimized Streaming
-
-- Stream Faults
-
-### Background streaming
-
-The PowerShell cmdlet `Get-AppvClientConfiguration` can be used to determine the current mode for background streaming with the AutoLoad setting and modified with the cmdlet Set-AppvClientConfiguration or from the registry (HKLM\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\AppV\\ClientStreaming key). Background streaming is a default setting where the Autoload setting is set to download previously used packages. The behavior based on default setting (value=1) downloads App-V data blocks in the background after the application has been launched. This setting can be disabled all together (value=0) or enabled for all packages (value=2), whether they have been launched.
-
-### Optimized streaming
-
-App-V packages can be configured with a primary feature block during sequencing. This setting allows the sequencing engineer to monitor launch files for a specific application, or applications, and mark the blocks of data in the App-V package for streaming at first launch of any application in the package.
-
-### Stream faults
-
-After the initial stream of any publishing data and the primary feature block, requests for additional files perform stream faults. These blocks of data are downloaded to the package store on an as-needed basis. This allows a user to download only a small part of the package, typically enough to launch the package and run normal tasks. All other blocks are downloaded when a user initiates an operation that requires data not currently in the package store.
-
-For more information on App-V Package streaming visit: .
-
-Sequencing for streaming optimization is available at: .
-
-### Package upgrades
-
-App-V Packages require updating throughout the lifecycle of the application. App-V Package upgrades are similar to the package publish operation, as each version will be created in its own PackageRoot location: `%ProgramData%\App-V\{PkgGUID}\{newVerGUID}`. The upgrade operation is optimized by creating hard links to identical- and streamed-files from other versions of the same package.
-
-### Package removal
-
-The behavior of the App-V Client when packages are removed depends on the method used for removal. Using an App-V full infrastructure to unpublish the application, the user catalog files (machine catalog for globally published applications) are removed, but retains the package store location and COW locations. When the PowerShell cmdlet `Remove-AppVClientPackge` is used to remove an App-V Package, the package store location is cleaned. Remember that unpublishing an App-V Package from the Management Server does not perform a Remove operation. Neither operation will remove the Package Store package files.
-
-## Roaming registry and data
-
-
-App-V 5 is able to provide a near-native experience when roaming, depending on how the application being used is written. By default, App-V roams AppData that is stored in the roaming location, based on the roaming configuration of the operating system. Other locations for storage of file-based data do not roam from computer to computer, since they are in locations that are not roamed.
-
-### Roaming requirements and user catalog data storage
-
-App-V stores data, which represents the state of the user’s catalog, in the form of:
-
-- Files under %appdata%\\Microsoft\\AppV\\Client\\Catalog
-
-- Registry settings under `HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\AppV\Client\Packages`
-
-Together, these files and registry settings represent the user’s catalog, so either both must be roamed, or neither must be roamed for a given user. App-V does not support roaming %AppData%, but not roaming the user’s profile (registry), or vice versa.
-
-**Note**
-The **Repair-AppvClientPackage** cmdlet does not repair the publishing state of packages, where the user’s App-V state under `HKEY_CURRENT_USER` is missing or mismatched with the data in %appdata%.
-
-
-
-### Registry-based data
-
-App-V registry roaming falls into two scenarios, as shown in the following table.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Scenario
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Applications that are run as standard users
-
When a standard user launches an App-V application, both HKLM and HKCU for App-V applications are stored in the HKCU hive on the machine. This presents as two distinct paths:
The locations are enabled for roaming based on the operating system settings.
-
-
-
Applications that are run with elevation
-
When an application is launched with elevation:
-
-
HKLM data is stored in the HKLM hive on the local computer
-
HKCU data is stored in the User Registry location
-
-
In this scenario, these settings are not roamed with normal operating system roaming configurations, and the resulting registry keys and values are stored in the following location:
-
-
-
-### App-V and folder redirection
-
-App-V 5.1 supports folder redirection of the roaming AppData folder (%AppData%). When the virtual environment is started, the roaming AppData state from the user’s roaming AppData directory is copied to the local cache. Conversely, when the virtual environment is shut down, the local cache that is associated with a specific user’s roaming AppData is transferred to the actual location of that user’s roaming AppData directory.
-
-A typical package has several locations mapped in the user’s backing store for settings in both AppData\\Local and AppData\\Roaming. These locations are the Copy on Write locations that are stored per user in the user’s profile, and that are used to store changes made to the package VFS directories and to protect the default package VFS.
-
-The following table shows local and roaming locations, when folder redirection has not been implemented.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-The following table shows local and roaming locations, when folder redirection has been implemented for %AppData%, and the location has been redirected (typically to a network location).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-The current App-V Client VFS driver cannot write to network locations, so the App-V Client detects the presence of folder redirection and copies the data on the local drive during publishing and when the virtual environment starts. After the user closes the App-V application and the App-V Client closes the virtual environment, the local storage of the VFS AppData is copied back to the network, enabling roaming to additional machines, where the process will be repeated. The detailed steps of the processes are:
-
-1. During publishing or virtual environment startup, the App-V Client detects the location of the AppData directory.
-
-2. If the roaming AppData path is local or ino AppData\\Roaming location is mapped, nothing happens.
-
-3. If the roaming AppData path is not local, the VFS AppData directory is mapped to the local AppData directory.
-
-This process solves the problem of a non-local %AppData% that is not supported by the App-V Client VFS driver. However, the data stored in this new location is not roamed with folder redirection. All changes during the running of the application happen to the local AppData location and must be copied to the redirected location. The detailed steps of this process are:
-
-1. App-V application is shut down, which shuts down the virtual environment.
-
-2. The local cache of the roaming AppData location is compressed and stored in a ZIP file.
-
-3. A timestamp at the end of the ZIP packaging process is used to name the file.
-
-4. The timestamp is recorded in the registry: HKEY\_CURRENT\_USER\\Software\\Microsoft\\AppV\\Client\\Packages\\<GUID>\\AppDataTime as the last known AppData timestamp.
-
-5. The folder redirection process is called to evaluate and initiate the ZIP file uploaded to the roaming AppData directory.
-
-The timestamp is used to determine a “last writer wins” scenario if there is a conflict and is used to optimize the download of the data when the App-V application is published or the virtual environment is started. Folder redirection will make the data available from any other clients covered by the supporting policy and will initiate the process of storing the AppData\\Roaming data to the local AppData location on the client. The detailed processes are:
-
-1. The user starts the virtual environment by starting an application.
-
-2. The application’s virtual environment checks for the most recent time stamped ZIP file, if present.
-
-3. The registry is checked for the last known uploaded timestamp, if present.
-
-4. The most recent ZIP file is downloaded unless the local last known upload timestamp is greater than or equal to the timestamp from the ZIP file.
-
-5. If the local last known upload timestamp is earlier than that of the most recent ZIP file in the roaming AppData location, the ZIP file is extracted to the local temp directory in the user’s profile.
-
-6. After the ZIP file is successfully extracted, the local cache of the roaming AppData directory is renamed and the new data is moved into place.
-
-7. The renamed directory is deleted and the application opens with the most recently saved roaming AppData data.
-
-This completes the successful roaming of application settings that are present in AppData\\Roaming locations. The only other condition that must be addressed is a package repair operation. The details of the process are:
-
-1. During repair, detect if the path to the user’s roaming AppData directory is not local.
-
-2. Map the non-local roaming AppData path targets are recreated the expected roaming and local AppData locations.
-
-3. Delete the timestamp stored in the registry, if present.
-
-This process will re-create both the local and network locations for AppData and remove the registry record of the timestamp.
-
-## App-V client application lifecycle management
-
-
-In an App-V Full Infrastructure, after applications are sequenced they are managed and published to users or computers via the App-V Management and Publishing servers. This section details the operations that occur during the common App-V application lifecycle operations (Add, publishing, launch, upgrade, and removal) and the file and registry locations that are changed and modified from the App-V Client perspective. The App-V Client operations are performed as a series of PowerShell commands initiated on the computer running the App-V Client.
-
-This document focuses on App-V Full Infrastructure solutions. For specific information on App-V Integration with Configuration Manager 2012 visit: .
-
-The App-V application lifecycle tasks are triggered at user login (default), machine startup, or as background timed operations. The settings for the App-V Client operations, including Publishing Servers, refresh intervals, package script enablement, and others, are configured during setup of the client or post-setup with PowerShell commands. See the How to Deploy the Client section on TechNet at: [How to Deploy the App-V Client](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-client-51gb18030.md) or utilize the PowerShell:
-
-```powershell
-get-command *appv*
-```
-
-### Publishing refresh
-
-The publishing refresh process is comprised of several smaller operations that are performed on the App-V Client. Since App-V is an application virtualization technology and not a task scheduling technology, the Windows Task Scheduler is utilized to enable the process at user logon, machine startup, and at scheduled intervals. The configuration of the client during setup listed above is the preferred method when distributing the client to a large group of computers with the correct settings. These client settings can be configured with the following PowerShell cmdlets:
-
-- **Add-AppVPublishingServer:** Configures the client with an App-V Publishing Server that provides App-V packages.
-
-- **Set-AppVPublishingServer:** Modifies the current settings for the App-V Publishing Server.
-
-- **Set-AppVClientConfiguration:** Modifies the currents settings for the App-V Client.
-
-- **Sync-AppVPublishingServer:** Initiates an App-V Publishing Refresh process manually. This is also utilized in the scheduled tasks created during configuration of the publishing server.
-
-The focus of the following sections is to detail the operations that occur during different phases of an App-V Publishing Refresh. The topics include:
-
-- Adding an App-V Package
-
-- Publishing an App-V Package
-
-### Adding an App-V package
-
-Adding an App-V package to the client is the first step of the publishing refresh process. The end result is the same as the `Add-AppVClientPackage` cmdlet in PowerShell, except during the publishing refresh add process, the configured publishing server is contacted and passes a high-level list of applications back to the client to pull more detailed information and not a single package add operation. The process continues by configuring the client for package or connection group additions or updates, then accesses the appv file. Next, the contents of the appv file are expanded and placed on the local operating system in the appropriate locations. The following is a detailed workflow of the process, assuming the package is configured for Fault Streaming.
-
-**How to add an App-V package**
-
-1. Manual initiation via PowerShell or Task Sequence initiation of the Publishing Refresh process.
-
- 1. The App-V Client makes an HTTP connection and requests a list of applications based on the target. The Publishing refresh process supports targeting machines or users.
-
- 2. The App-V Publishing Server uses the identity of the initiating target, user or machine, and queries the database for a list of entitled applications. The list of applications is provided as an XML response, which the client uses to send additional requests to the server for more information on a per package basis.
-
-2. The Publishing Agent on the App-V Client performs all actions below serialized.
-
- Evaluate any connection groups that are unpublished or disabled, since package version updates that are part of the connection group cannot be processed.
-
-3. Configure the packages by identifying an Add or Update operations.
-
- 1. The App-V Client utilizes the AppX API from Windows and accesses the appv file from the publishing server.
-
- 2. The package file is opened and the AppXManifest.xml and StreamMap.xml are downloaded to the Package Store.
-
- 3. Completely stream publishing block data defined in the StreamMap.xml. Stores the publishing block data in the Package Store\\PkgGUID\\VerGUID\\Root.
-
- - Icons: Targets of extension points.
-
- - Portable Executable Headers (PE Headers): Targets of extension points that contain the base information about the image need on disk, directly accessed or via file types.
-
- - Scripts: Download scripts directory for use throughout the publishing process.
-
- 4. Populate the Package store:
-
- 1. Create sparse files on disk that represent the extracted package for any directories listed.
-
- 2. Stage top level files and directories under root.
-
- 3. All other files are created when the directory is listed as sparse on disk and streamed on demand.
-
- 5. Create the machine catalog entries. Create the Manifest.xml and DeploymentConfiguration.xml from the package files (if no DeploymentConfiguration.xml file in the package a placeholder is created).
-
- 6. Create location of the package store in the registry HKLM\\Software\\Microsoft\\AppV\\Client\\Packages\\PkgGUID\\Versions\\VerGUID\\Catalog
-
- 7. Create the Registry.dat file from the package store to %ProgramData%\\Microsoft\\AppV\\Client\\VReg\\{VersionGUID}.dat
-
- 8. Register the package with the App-V Kernel Mode Driver HKLM\\Microsoft\\Software\\AppV\\MAV
-
- 9. Invoke scripting from the AppxManifest.xml or DeploymentConfig.xml file for Package Add timing.
-
-4. Configure Connection Groups by adding and enabling or disabling.
-
-5. Remove objects that are not published to the target (user or machine).
-
- **Note**
- This will not perform a package deletion but rather remove integration points for the specific target (user or machine) and remove user catalog files (machine catalog files for globally published).
-
-
-
-6. Invoke background load mounting based on client configuration.
-
-7. Packages that already have publishing information for the machine or user are immediately restored.
-
- **Note**
- This condition occurs as a product of removal without unpublishing with background addition of the package.
-
-
-
-This completes an App-V package add of the publishing refresh process. The next step is publishing the package to the specific target (machine or user).
-
-
-
-### Publishing an App-V package
-
-During the Publishing Refresh operation, the specific publishing operation (Publish-AppVClientPackage) adds entries to the user catalog, maps entitlement to the user, identifies the local store, and finishes by completing any integration steps. The following are the detailed steps.
-
-**How to publish and App-V package**
-
-1. Package entries are added to the user catalog
-
- 1. User targeted packages: the UserDeploymentConfiguration.xml and UserManifest.xml are placed on the machine in the User Catalog
-
- 2. Machine targeted (global) packages: the UserDeploymentConfiguration.xml is placed in the Machine Catalog
-
-2. Register the package with the kernel mode driver for the user at HKLM\\Software\\Microsoft\\AppV\\MAV
-
-3. Perform integration tasks.
-
- 1. Create extension points.
-
- 2. Store backup information in the user’s registry and roaming profile (Shortcut Backups).
-
- **Note**
- This enables restore extension points if the package is unpublished.
-
-
-
- 3. Run scripts targeted for publishing timing.
-
-Publishing an App-V Package that is part of a Connection Group is very similar to the above process. For connection groups, the path that stores the specific catalog information includes PackageGroups as a child of the Catalog Directory. Review the machine and users catalog information above for details.
-
-
-
-### Application launch
-
-After the Publishing Refresh process, the user launches and subsequently re-launches an App-V application. The process is very simple and optimized to launch quickly with a minimum of network traffic. The App-V Client checks the path to the user catalog for files created during publishing. After rights to launch the package are established, the App-V Client creates a virtual environment, begins streaming any necessary data, and applies the appropriate manifest and deployment configuration files during virtual environment creation. With the virtual environment created and configured for the specific package and application, the application starts.
-
-**How to launch App-V applications**
-
-1. User launches the application by clicking on a shortcut or file type invocation.
-
-2. The App-V Client verifies existence in the User Catalog for the following files
-
- - UserDeploymentConfiguration.xml
-
- - UserManifest.xml
-
-3. If the files are present, the application is entitled for that specific user and the application will start the process for launch. There is no network traffic at this point.
-
-4. Next, the App-V Client checks that the path for the package registered for the App-V Client service is found in the registry.
-
-5. Upon finding the path to the package store, the virtual environment is created. If this is the first launch, the Primary Feature Block downloads if present.
-
-6. After downloading, the App-V Client service consumes the manifest and deployment configuration files to configure the virtual environment and all App-V subsystems are loaded.
-
-7. The Application launches. For any missing files in the package store (sparse files), App-V will stream fault the files on an as needed basis.
-
- 
-
-### Upgrading an App-V package
-
-The App-V 5 package upgrade process differs from the older versions of App-V. App-V supports multiple versions of the same package on a machine entitled to different users. Package versions can be added at any time as the package store and catalogs are updated with the new resources. The only process specific to the addition of new version resources is storage optimization. During an upgrade, only the new files are added to the new version store location and hard links are created for unchanged files. This reduces the overall storage by only presenting the file on one disk location and then projecting it into all folders with a file location entry on the disk. The specific details of upgrading an App-V Package are as follows:
-
-**How to upgrade an App-V package**
-
-1. The App-V Client performs a Publishing Refresh and discovers a newer version of an App-V Package.
-
-2. Package entries are added to the appropriate catalog for the new version
-
- 1. User targeted packages: the UserDeploymentConfiguration.xml and UserManifest.xml are placed on the machine in the user catalog at appdata\\roaming\\Microsoft\\AppV\\Client\\Catalog\\Packages\\PkgGUID\\VerGUID
-
- 2. Machine targeted (global) packages: the UserDeploymentConfiguration.xml is placed in the machine catalog at %programdata%\\Microsoft\\AppV\\Client\\Catalog\\Packages\\PkgGUID\\VerGUID
-
-3. Register the package with the kernel mode driver for the user at HKLM\\Software\\Microsoft\\AppV\\MAV
-
-4. Perform integration tasks.
-
- - Integrate extensions points (EP) from the Manifest and Dynamic Configuration files.
-
- 1. File based EP data is stored in the AppData folder utilizing Junction Points from the package store.
-
- 2. Version 1 EPs already exist when a new version becomes available.
-
- 3. The extension points are switched to the Version 2 location in machine or user catalogs for any newer or updated extension points.
-
-5. Run scripts targeted for publishing timing.
-
-6. Install Side by Side assemblies as required.
-
-### Upgrading an in-use App-V package
-
-**Starting in App-V 5 SP2**: If you try to upgrade a package that is in use by an end user, the upgrade task is placed in a pending state. The upgrade will run later, according to the following rules:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task type
-
Applicable rule
-
-
-
-
-
User-based task, e.g., publishing a package to a user
-
The pending task will be performed after the user logs off and then logs back on.
-
-
-
Globally based task, e.g., enabling a connection group globally
-
The pending task will be performed when the computer is shut down and then restarted.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-When a task is placed in a pending state, the App-V client also generates a registry key for the pending task, as follows:
-
-
-
-
-
-The following operations must be completed before users can use the newer version of the package:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
Add the package to the computer
-
This task is computer specific and you can perform it at any time by completing the steps in the Package Add section above.
-
-
-
Publish the package
-
See the Package Publishing section above for steps. This process requires that you update extension points on the system. End users cannot be using the application when you complete this task.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Use the following example scenarios as a guide for updating packages.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Scenario
-
Requirements
-
-
-
-
-
App-V package is not in use when you try to upgrade
-
None of the following components of the package can be in use: virtual application, COM server, or shell extensions.
-
The administrator publishes a newer version of the package and the upgrade works the next time a component or application inside the package is launched. The new version of the package is streamed and run. Nothing has changed in this scenario in App-V 5 SP2 from previous releases of App-V 5.
-
-
-
App-V package is in use when the administrator publishes a newer version of the package
-
The upgrade operation is set to pending by the App-V Client, which means that it is queued and carried out later when the package is not in use.
-
If the package application is in use, the user shuts down the virtual application, after which the upgrade can occur.
-
If the package has shell extensions (Office 2013), which are permanently loaded by Windows Explorer, the user cannot be logged in. Users must log off and the log back in to initiate the App-V package upgrade.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Global vs user publishing
-
-App-V Packages can be published in one of two ways; User which entitles an App-V package to a specific user or group of users and Global which entitles the App-V package to the entire machine for all users of the machine. Once a package upgrade has been pended and the App-V package is not in use, consider the two types of publishing:
-
-- **Globally published**: the application is published to a machine; all users on that machine can use it. The upgrade will happen when the App-V Client Service starts, which effectively means a machine restart.
-
-- **User published**: the application is published to a user. If there are multiple users on the machine, the application can be published to a subset of the users. The upgrade will happen when the user logs in or when it is published again (periodically, ConfigMgr Policy refresh and evaluation, or an App-V periodic publishing/refresh, or explicitly via PowerShell commands).
-
-### Removing an App-V package
-
-Removing App-V applications in a Full Infrastructure is an unpublish operation, and does not perform a package removal. The process is the same as the publish process above, but instead of adding the removal process reverses the changes that have been made for App-V Packages.
-
-### Repairing an App-V package
-
-The repair operation is very simple but may affect many locations on the machine. The previously mentioned Copy on Write (COW) locations are removed, and extension points are de-integrated and then re-integrated. Please review the COW data placement locations by reviewing where they are registered in the registry. This operation is done automatically and there is no administrative control other than initiating a Repair operation from the App-V Client Console or via PowerShell (Repair-AppVClientPackage).
-
-## Integration of App-V packages
-
-
-The App-V Client and package architecture provides specific integration with the local operating system during the addition and publishing of packages. Three files define the integration or extension points for an App-V Package:
-
-- AppXManifest.xml: Stored inside of the package with fallback copies stored in the package store and the user profile. Contains the options created during the sequencing process.
-
-- DeploymentConfig.xml: Provides configuration information of computer and user based integration extension points.
-
-- UserConfig.xml: A subset of the Deploymentconfig.xml that only provides user- based configurations and only targets user-based extension points.
-
-### Rules of integration
-
-When App-V applications are published to a computer with the App-V Client, some specific actions take place as described in the list below:
-
-- Global Publishing: Shortcuts are stored in the All Users profile location and other extension points are stored in the registry in the HKLM hive.
-
-- User Publishing: Shortcuts are stored in the current user account profile and other extension points are stored in the registry in the HKCU hive.
-
-- Backup and Restore: Existing native application data and registry (such as FTA registrations) are backed up during publishing.
-
- 1. App-V packages are given ownership based on the last integrated package where the ownership is passed to the newest published App-V application.
-
- 2. Ownership transfers from one App-V package to another when the owning App-V package is unpublished. This will not initiate a restore of the data or registry.
-
- 3. Restore the backed up data when the last package is unpublished or removed on a per extension point basis.
-
-### Extension points
-
-The App-V publishing files (manifest and dynamic configuration) provide several extension points that enable the application to integrate with the local operating system. These extension points perform typical application installation tasks, such as placing shortcuts, creating file type associations, and registering components. As these are virtualized applications that are not installed in the same manner a traditional application, there are some differences. The following is a list of extension points covered in this section:
-
-- Shortcuts
-
-- File Type Associations
-
-- Shell Extensions
-
-- COM
-
-- Software Clients
-
-- Application capabilities
-
-- URL Protocol Handler
-
-- AppPath
-
-- Virtual Application
-
-### Shortcuts
-
-The short cut is one of the basic elements of integration with the OS and is the interface for direct user launch of an App-V application. During the publishing and unpublishing of App-V applications.
-
-From the package manifest and dynamic configuration XML files, the path to a specific application executable can be found in a section similar to the following:
-
-```xml
-
-
- [{Common Desktop}]\Adobe Reader 9.lnk
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\Reader\AcroRd32.exe
- [{Windows}]\Installer\{AC76BA86-7AD7-1033-7B44-A94000000001}\SC_Reader.ico
-
-
- 1
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\Reader\AcroRd32.exe
-
-
-```
-
-As mentioned previously, the App-V shortcuts are placed by default in the user’s profile based on the refresh operation. Global refresh places shortcuts in the All Users profile and user refresh stores them in the specific user’s profile. The actual executable is stored in the Package Store. The location of the ICO file is a tokenized location in the App-V package.
-
-### File type associations
-
-The App-V Client manages the local operating system File Type Associations during publishing, which enables users to use file type invocations or to open a file with a specifically registered extension (.docx) to start an App-V application. File type associations are present in the manifest and dynamic configuration files as represented in the example below:
-
-```xml
-
-
-
- .xdp
- AcroExch.XDPDoc
- application/vnd.adobe.xdp+xml
-
-
- AcroExch.XDPDoc
- Adobe Acrobat XML Data Package File
- 65536
- [{Windows}]\Installer\{AC76BA86-7AD7-1033-7B44-A94000000001}\XDPFile_8.ico
-
- Read
-
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\Reader\AcroRd32.exe
- Open
- "[{AppVPackageRoot}]\Reader\AcroRd32.exe" "%1"
-
-
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\Reader\AcroRd32.exe
- Printto
- "[{AppVPackageRoot}]\Reader\AcroRd32.exe" /t "%1" "%2" "%3" "%4"
-
-
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\Reader\AcroRd32.exe
- Read
- Open with Adobe Reader 9
- "[{AppVPackageRoot}]\Reader\AcroRd32.exe" "%1"
-
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-**Note**
-In this example:
-
-- `.xdp` is the extension
-
-- `AcroExch.XDPDoc` is the ProgId value (which points to the adjoining ProgId)
-
-- `"[{AppVPackageRoot}]\Reader\AcroRd32.exe" "%1"` is the command line, which points to the application executable
-
-
-
-### Shell extensions
-
-Shell extensions are embedded in the package automatically during the sequencing process. When the package is published globally, the shell extension gives users the same functionality as if the application were locally installed. The application requires no additional setup or configuration on the client to enable the shell extension functionality.
-
-**Requirements for using shell extensions:**
-
-- Packages that contain embedded shell extensions must be published globally.
-
-- The “bitness” of the application, Sequencer, and App-V client must match, or the shell extensions won’t work. For example:
-
- - The version of the application is 64-bit.
-
- - The Sequencer is running on a 64-bit computer.
-
- - The package is being delivered to a 64-bit App-V client computer.
-
-The following table displays the supported shell extensions.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Handler
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Context menu handler
-
Adds menu items to the context menu. It is called before the context menu is displayed.
-
-
-
Drag-and-drop handler
-
Controls the action upon right-click drag-and-drop and modifies the context menu that appears.
-
-
-
Drop target handler
-
Controls the action after a data object is dragged-and-dropped over a drop target such as a file.
-
-
-
Data object handler
-
Controls the action after a file is copied to the clipboard or dragged-and-dropped over a drop target. It can provide additional clipboard formats to the drop target.
-
-
-
Property sheet handler
-
Replaces or adds pages to the property sheet dialog box of an object.
-
-
-
Infotip handler
-
Allows retrieving flags and infotip information for an item and displaying it inside a popup tooltip upon mouse- hover.
-
-
-
Column handler
-
Allows creating and displaying custom columns in Windows Explorer Details view. It can be used to extend sorting and grouping.
-
-
-
Preview handler
-
Enables a preview of a file to be displayed in the Windows Explorer Preview Pane.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### COM
-
-The App-V Client supports publishing applications with support for COM integration and virtualization. COM integration allows the App-V Client to register COM objects on the local operating system and virtualization of the objects. For the purposes of this document, the integration of COM objects requires additional detail.
-
-App-V supports registering COM objects from the package to the local operating system with two process types: Out-of-process and in-process. Registering COM objects is accomplished with one or a combination of multiple modes of operation for a specific App-V package that includes off, Isolated, and Integrated. The integrated mode is configured for either the out-of-process or in-process type. Configuration of COM modes and types is accomplished with dynamic configuration files (deploymentconfig.xml or userconfig.xml).
-
-Details on App-V integration are available at: .
-
-### Software clients and application capabilities
-
-App-V supports specific software clients and application capabilities extension points that enable virtualized applications to be registered with the software client of the operating system. This enables users to select default programs for operations like email, instant messaging, and media player. This operation is performed in the control panel with the Set Program Access and Computer Defaults, and configured during sequencing in the manifest or dynamic configuration files. Application capabilities are only supported when the App-V applications are published globally.
-
-Example of software client registration of an App-V based mail client.
-
-```xml
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Mozilla Thunderbird
- Mozilla Thunderbird
- [{ProgramFilesX86}]\Mozilla Thunderbird\thunderbird.exe,0
-
-
- "[{ProgramFilesX86}]\Mozilla Thunderbird\uninstall\helper.exe" /SetAsDefaultAppGlobal
- "[{ProgramFilesX86}]\Mozilla Thunderbird\uninstall\helper.exe" /HideShortcuts
- "[{ProgramFilesX86}]\Mozilla Thunderbird\uninstall\helper.exe" /ShowShortcuts
-
- 1
-
-
-
- [{ProgramFilesX86}]\Mozilla Thunderbird\thunderbird.exe
- "[{ProgramFilesX86}]\Mozilla Thunderbird\thunderbird.exe" -mail
-
- [{ProgramFilesX86}]\Mozilla Thunderbird\mozMapi32_InUse.dll
-
- Thunderbird URL
- 2
- [{ProgramFilesX86}]\Mozilla Thunderbird\thunderbird.exe,0
-
- [{ProgramFilesX86}]\Mozilla Thunderbird\thunderbird.exe
- "[{ProgramFilesX86}]\Mozilla Thunderbird\thunderbird.exe" -osint -compose "%1"
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-**Note**
-In this example:
-
-- `` is the overall Software Clients setting to integrate Email clients
-
-- `` is the flag to set a particular Email client as the default Email client
-
-- `[{ProgramFilesX86}]\Mozilla Thunderbird\mozMapi32_InUse.dll` is the MAPI dll registration
-
-
-
-### URL Protocol handler
-
-Applications do not always specifically called virtualized applications utilizing file type invocation. For, example, in an application that supports embedding a mailto: link inside a document or web page, the user clicks on a mailto: link and expects to get their registered mail client. App-V supports URL Protocol handlers that can be registered on a per-package basis with the local operating system. During sequencing, the URL protocol handlers are automatically added to the package.
-
-For situations where there is more than one application that could register the specific URL Protocol handler, the dynamic configuration files can be utilized to modify the behavior and suppress or disable this feature for an application that should not be the primary application launched.
-
-### AppPath
-
-The AppPath extension point supports calling App-V applications directly from the operating system. This is typically accomplished from the Run or Start Screen, depending on the operating system, which enables administrators to provide access to App-V applications from operating system commands or scripts without calling the specific path to the executable. It therefore avoids modifying the system path environment variable on all systems, as it is accomplished during publishing.
-
-The AppPath extension point is configured either in the manifest or in the dynamic configuration files and is stored in the registry on the local machine during publishing for the user. For additional information on AppPath review: .
-
-### Virtual application
-
-This subsystem provides a list of applications captured during sequencing which is usually consumed by other App-V components. Integration of extension points belonging to a particular application can be disabled using dynamic configuration files. For example, if a package contains two applications, it is possible to disable all extension points belonging to one application, in order to allow only integration of extension points of other application.
-
-### Extension point rules
-
-The extension points described above are integrated into the operating system based on how the packages has been published. Global publishing places extension points in public machine locations, where user publishing places extension points in user locations. For example a shortcut that is created on the desktop and published globally will result in the file data for the shortcut (%Public%\\Desktop) and the registry data (HKLM\\Software\\Classes). The same shortcut would have file data (%UserProfile%\\Desktop) and registry data (HKCU\\Software\\Classes).
-
-Extension points are not all published the same way, where some extension points will require global publishing and others require sequencing on the specific operating system and architecture where they are delivered. Below is a table that describes these two key rules.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Virtual Extension
-
Requires target OS Sequencing
-
Requires Global Publishing
-
-
-
-
-
Shortcut
-
-
-
-
-
File Type Association
-
-
-
-
-
URL Protocols
-
X
-
-
-
-
AppPaths
-
X
-
-
-
-
COM Mode
-
-
-
-
-
Software Client
-
X
-
-
-
-
Application Capabilities
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
Context Menu Handler
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
Drag-and-drop Handler
-
X
-
-
-
-
Data Object Handler
-
X
-
-
-
-
Property Sheet Handler
-
X
-
-
-
-
Infotip Handler
-
X
-
-
-
-
Column Handler
-
X
-
-
-
-
Shell Extensions
-
X
-
-
-
-
Browser Helper Object
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
Active X Object
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Dynamic configuration processing
-
-
-Deploying App-V packages to one machine or user is very simple. However, as organizations deploy AppV applications across business lines and geographic and political boundaries, the ability to sequence an application one time with one set of settings becomes impossible. App-V was designed for this scenario, as it captures specific settings and configurations during sequencing in the Manifest file, but also supports modification with Dynamic Configuration files.
-
-App-V dynamic configuration allows for specifying a policy for a package either at the machine level or at the user level. The Dynamic Configuration files enable sequencing engineers to modify the configuration of a package, post-sequencing, to address the needs of individual groups of users or machines. In some instances it may be necessary to make modifications to the application to provide proper functionality within the App-V environment. For example, it may be necessary to make modifications to the \_\*config.xml files to allow certain actions to be performed at a specified time during the execution of the application, like disabling a mailto extension to prevent a virtualized application from overwriting that extension from another application.
-
-App-V Packages contain the Manifest file inside of the appv package file, which is representative of sequencing operations and is the policy of choice unless Dynamic Configuration files are assigned to a specific package. Post-sequencing, the Dynamic Configuration files can be modified to allow the publishing of an application to different desktops or users with different extension points. The two Dynamic Configuration Files are the Dynamic Deployment Configuration (DDC) and Dynamic User Configuration (DUC) files. This section focuses on the combination of the manifest and dynamic configuration files.
-
-### Example for dynamic configuration files
-
-The example below shows the combination of the Manifest, Deployment Configuration and User Configuration files after publishing and during normal operation. These examples are abbreviated examples of each of the files. The purpose is show the combination of the files only and not to be a complete description of the specific categories available in each of the files. For more information review the App-V 5 Sequencing Guide at:
-
-**Manifest**
-
-```xml
-
-
- [{Common Programs}]\7-Zip\7-Zip File Manager.lnk
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\7zFM.exe
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\7zFM exe.O.ico
-
-
-```
-
-**Deployment Configuration**
-
-```xml
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-**User Configuration**
-
-```xml
-
-
-
-
- [{Desktop}]\7-Zip\7-Zip File Manager.lnk
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\7zFM.exe
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\7zFM exe.O.ico
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- [{Desktop}]\7-Zip\7-Zip File Manager.lnk
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\7zFM.exe
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\7zFM.exe.O.ico
-
-
- [{Common Programs}]\7-Zip\7-Zip File Manager.Ink
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\7zFM.exe
- [{AppVPackageRoot)]\7zFM.exe.O.ico
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-```
-
-## Side-by-side assemblies
-
-
-App-V supports the automatic packaging of side-by-side (SxS) assemblies during sequencing and deployment on the client during virtual application publishing. App-V 5 SP2 supports capturing SxS assemblies during sequencing for assemblies not present on the sequencing machine. And for assemblies consisting of Visual C++ (Version 8 and newer) and/or MSXML run-time, the Sequencer will automatically detect and capture these dependencies even if they were not installed during monitoring. The Side by Side assemblies feature removes the limitations of previous versions of App-V, where the App-V Sequencer did not capture assemblies already present on the sequencing workstation, and privatizing the assemblies which limited to one bit version per package. This behavior resulted in deployed App-V applications to clients missing the required SxS assemblies, causing application launch failures. This forced the packaging process to document and then ensure that all assemblies required for packages were locally installed on the user’s client operating system to ensure support for the virtual applications. Based on the number of assemblies and the lack of application documentation for the required dependencies, this task was both a management and implementation challenge.
-
-Side by Side Assembly support in App-V has the following features.
-
-- Automatic captures of SxS assembly during Sequencing, regardless of whether the assembly was already installed on the sequencing workstation.
-
-- The App-V Client automatically installs required SxS assemblies to the client computer at publishing time when they are not present.
-
-- The Sequencer reports the VC run-time dependency in Sequencer reporting mechanism.
-
-- The Sequencer allows opting to not package the assemblies that are already installed on the Sequencer, supporting scenarios where the assemblies have previously been installed on the target computers.
-
-### Automatic publishing of SxS assemblies
-
-During publishing of an App-V package with SxS assemblies the App-V Client will check for the presence of the assembly on the machine. If the assembly does not exist, the client will deploy the assembly to the machine. Packages that are part of connection groups will rely on the Side by Side assembly installations that are part of the base packages, as the connection group does not contain any information about assembly installation.
-
-**Note**
-UnPublishing or removing a package with an assembly does not remove the assemblies for that package.
-
-
-
-## Client logging
-
-
-The App-V client logs information to the Windows Event log in standard ETW format. The specific App-V events can be found in the event viewer, under Applications and Services Logs\\Microsoft\\AppV\\Client.
-
-**Note**
-In App-V 5.0 SP3, some logs were consolidated and moved to the following location:
-
-`Event logs/Applications and Services Logs/Microsoft/AppV/ServiceLog`
-
-For a list of the moved logs, see [About App-V 5.0 SP3](about-app-v-50-sp3.md#bkmk-event-logs-moved).
-
-
-
-There are three specific categories of events recorded described below.
-
-**Admin**: Logs events for configurations being applied to the App-V Client, and contains the primary warnings and errors.
-
-**Operational**: Logs the general App-V execution and usage of individual components creating an audit log of the App-V operations that have been completed on the App-V Client.
-
-**Virtual Application**: Logs virtual application launches and use of virtualization subsystems.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/check-reg-key-svr.md b/mdop/appv-v5/check-reg-key-svr.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 44498c1829..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/check-reg-key-svr.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,246 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Check Registry Keys before installing App-V 5.x Server
-description: Check Registry Keys before installing App-V 5.x Server
-author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
----
-
-
-# Check Registry Keys before installing App-V 5.x Server
-
-If you are upgrading the App-V Server from App-V 5.0 SP1 Hotfix Package 3 or later, complete the steps in this section before installing the App-V 5.x Server
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
When this step is required
-
You are upgrading from App-V 5.0 SP1 with any subsequent Hotfix Packages that you installed by using an .msp file.
-
-
-
Which components require that you do this step
-
Only the App-V Server components that you are upgrading.
-
-
-
When you need to do this step
-
Before you upgrade the App-V Server to App-V 5.x
-
-
-
What you need to do
-
Using the information in the following tables, update each registry key value under HKLM\Software\Microsoft\AppV\Server with the value that you provided in your original server installation. Completing this step restores registry values that may have been removed when App-V 5.0 SP1 Hotfix Packages were installed.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**ManagementDatabase key**
-
-If you are installing the Management database, set these registry keys under `HKLM\Software\Microsoft\AppV\Server\ManagementDatabase`.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Key name
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
IS_MANAGEMENT_DB_PUBLIC_ACCESS_ACCOUNT_REQUIRED
-
Describes whether a public access account is required to access non-local management databases. Value is set to “1” if it is required.
-
-
-
MANAGEMENT_DB_NAME
-
Name of the Management database.
-
-
-
MANAGEMENT_DB_PUBLIC_ACCESS_ACCOUNT
-
Account used for read (public) access to the Management database.
-
Used when IS_MANAGEMENT_DB_PUBLIC_ACCESS_ACCOUNT_REQUIRED is set to 1.
-
-
-
MANAGEMENT_DB_PUBLIC_ACCESS_ACCOUNT_SID
-
Secure identifier (SID) of the account used for read (public) access to the Management database.
-
Used when IS_MANAGEMENT_DB_PUBLIC_ACCESS_ACCOUNT_REQUIRED is set to 1.
-
-
-
MANAGEMENT_DB_SQL_INSTANCE
-
SQL Server instance for the Management database.
-
If the value is blank, the default database instance is used.
-
-
-
MANAGEMENT_DB_WRITE_ACCESS_ACCOUNT
-
Account used for write (administrator) access to the Management database.
-
-
-
MANAGEMENT_DB_WRITE_ACCESS_ACCOUNT_SID
-
Secure identifier (SID) of the account used for write (administrator) access to the Management database.
-
-
-
MANAGEMENT_REMOTE_SERVER_MACHINE_ACCOUNT
-
Management server remote computer account (domain\account).
-
-
-
MANAGEMENT_SERVER_INSTALL_ADMIN_ACCOUNT
-
Installation administrator login for the Management server (domain\account).
-
-
-
MANAGEMENT_SERVER_MACHINE_USE_LOCAL
-
Valid values are:
-
-
1 – the Management service is on the local computer, that is, MANAGEMENT_REMOTE_SERVER_MACHINE_ACCOUNT is blank.
-
0 - the Management service is on a different computer from the local computer.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**ManagementService key**
-
-If you are installing the Management server, set these registry keys under `HKLM\Software\Microsoft\AppV\Server\ManagementService`.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Key name
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
MANAGEMENT_ADMINACCOUNT
-
Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) group or account that is authorized to manage App-V (domain\account).
-
-
-
MANAGEMENT_DB_SQL_INSTANCE
-
SQL server instance that contains the Management database.
-
If the value is blank, the default database instance is used.
-
-
-
MANAGEMENT_DB_SQL_SERVER_NAME
-
Name of the remote SQL server with the Management database.
-
If the value is blank, the local computer is used.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**ReportingDatabase key**
-
-If you are installing the Reporting database, set these registry keys under `HKLM\Software\Microsoft\AppV\Server\ReportingDatabase`.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Key name
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
IS_REPORTING_DB_PUBLIC_ACCESS_ACCOUNT_REQUIRED
-
Describes whether a public access account is required to access non-local reporting databases. Value is set to “1” if it is required.
-
-
-
REPORTING_DB_NAME
-
Name of the Reporting database.
-
-
-
REPORTING_DB_PUBLIC_ACCESS_ACCOUNT
-
Account used for read (public) access to the Reporting database.
-
Used when IS_REPORTING_DB_PUBLIC_ACCESS_ACCOUNT_REQUIRED is set to 1.
-
-
-
REPORTING_DB_PUBLIC_ACCESS_ACCOUNT_SID
-
Secure identifier (SID) of the account used for read (public) access to the Reporting database.
-
Used when IS_REPORTING_DB_PUBLIC_ACCESS_ACCOUNT_REQUIRED is set to 1.
-
-
-
REPORTING_DB_SQL_INSTANCE
-
SQL Server instance for the Reporting database.
-
If the value is blank, the default database instance is used.
-
-
-
REPORTING_DB_WRITE_ACCESS_ACCOUNT
-
-
-
-
REPORTING_DB_WRITE_ACCESS_ACCOUNT_SID
-
-
-
-
REPORTING_REMOTE_SERVER_MACHINE_ACCOUNT
-
Reporting server remote computer account (domain\account).
-
-
-
REPORTING_SERVER_INSTALL_ADMIN_ACCOUNT
-
Installation administrator login for the Reporting server (domain\account).
-
-
-
REPORTING_SERVER_MACHINE_USE_LOCAL
-
Valid values are:
-
-
1 – the Reporting service is on the local computer, that is, REPORTING_REMOTE_SERVER_MACHINE_ACCOUNT is blank.
-
0 - the Reporting service is on a different computer from the local computer.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**ReportingService key**
-
-If you are installing the Reporting server, set these registry keys under `HKLM\Software\Microsoft\AppV\Server\ReportingService`.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Key name
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
REPORTING_DB_SQL_INSTANCE
-
SQL Server instance for the Reporting database.
-
If the value is blank, the default database instance is used.
-
-
-
REPORTING_DB_SQL_SERVER_NAME
-
Name of the remote SQL server with the Reporting database.
-
If the value is blank, the local computer is used.
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/configure-applications-and-default-virtual-application-extensions-in-management-console.md b/mdop/appv-v5/configure-applications-and-default-virtual-application-extensions-in-management-console.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c96dff8cbe..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/configure-applications-and-default-virtual-application-extensions-in-management-console.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,52 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Configure Applications and Default Virtual Application Extensions in Management Console
-description: How to View and Configure Applications and Default Virtual Application Extensions by Using the Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 1e1941d3-fb22-4077-8ec6-7a0cb80335d8
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 09/26/2019
----
-
-# Configure Applications and Default Virtual Application Extensions in Management Console
-
-Use the following procedure to *view* and *configure* default package extensions.
-
-**To view and configure default virtual application extensions**
-
-1. To view the package that you want to configure, open the App-V 5.1 Management Console. Select the package that you want to configure, right-click the package name and select **edit default configuration**.
-
-2. To view the applications contained in the specified package, in the **Default Configuration** pane, click **Applications**. To view the shortcuts for that package, click **Shortcuts**. To view the file type associations for that package, click **File Types**.
-
-3. To enable the application extensions, select **ENABLE**.
-
- To enable shortcuts, select **ENABLE SHORTCUTS**. To add a new shortcut for the selected application, right-click the application in the **SHORTCUTS** pane and select **Add new shortcut**. To remove a shortcut, right-click the application in the **SHORTCUTS** pane and select **Remove Shortcut**. To edit an existing shortcut, right-click the application and select **Edit Shortcut**.
-
-4. To view any other application extensions, click **Advanced** and click **Export Configuration**. Type in a filename and click **Save**. You can view all application extensions associated with the package using the configuration file.
-
-5. To edit other application extensions, modify the configuration file and click **Import and Overwrite this Configuration**. Select the modified file and click **Open**. In the dialog box, click **Overwrite** to complete the process.
-
->**Note** If the upload fails and the size of your configuration file is above 4MB, you will need to increase the maximum file size allowed by the server. This can be done by adding the maxRequestLength attribute with a value greater than the size of your configuration file (in KB) to the httpRuntime element on line 26 of `C:\Program Files\Microsoft Application Virtualization Server\ManagementService\Web.config`.
-For example, changing `` to `` will increase the maximum size to 8MB
-
-
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/creating-and-managing-app-v-50-virtualized-applications.md b/mdop/appv-v5/creating-and-managing-app-v-50-virtualized-applications.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 56bd58a27e..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/creating-and-managing-app-v-50-virtualized-applications.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,344 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Creating and Managing App-V 5.0 Virtualized Applications
-description: Creating and Managing App-V 5.0 Virtualized Applications
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 66bab403-d7e0-4e7b-bc8f-a29a98a7160a
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Creating and Managing App-V 5.0 Virtualized Applications
-
-
-After you have properly deployed the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 sequencer, you can use it to monitor and record the installation and setup process for an application to be run as a virtualized application.
-
-**Note**
-For more information about configuring the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 sequencer, sequencing best practices, and an example of creating and updating a virtual application, see the [Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0 Sequencing Guide](https://download.microsoft.com/download/F/7/8/F784A197-73BE-48FF-83DA-4102C05A6D44/App-V 5.0 Sequencing Guide.docx) (https://download.microsoft.com/download/F/7/8/F784A197-73BE-48FF-83DA-4102C05A6D44/App-V 5.0 Sequencing Guide.docx).
-
-
-
-## Sequencing an application
-
-
-You can use the App-V 5.0 Sequencer to perform the following tasks:
-
-- Create virtual packages that can be deployed to computers running the App-V 5.0 client.
-
-- Upgrade existing packages. You can expand an existing package onto the computer running the sequencer and then upgrade the application to create a newer version.
-
-- Edit configuration information associated with an existing package. For example, you can add a shortcut or modify a file type association.
-
- **Note**
- You must create shortcuts and save them to an available network location to allow roaming. If a shortcut is created and saved in a private location, the package must be published locally to the computer running the App-V 5.0 client.
-
-
-
-- Convert existing virtual packages.
-
-The sequencer uses the **%TMP% \\ Scratch** or **%TEMP% \\ Scratch** directory and the **Temp** directory to store temporary files during sequencing. On the computer that runs the sequencer, you should configure these directories with free disk space equivalent to the estimated application installation requirements. Configuring the temp directories and the Temp directory on different hard drive partitions can help improve performance during sequencing.
-
-When you use the sequencer to create a new virtual application, the following listed files are created. These files comprise the App-V 5.0 package.
-
-- .msi file. This Windows Installer (.msi) file is created by the sequencer and is used to install the virtual package on target computers.
-
-- Report.xml file. In this file, the sequencer saves all issues, warnings, and errors that were discovered during sequencing. It displays the information after the package has been created. You can us this report for diagnosing and troubleshooting.
-
-- .appv file. This is the virtual application file.
-
-- Deployment configuration file. The deployment configuration file determines how the virtual application will be deployed to target computers.
-
-- User configuration file. The user configuration file determines how the virtual application will run on target computers.
-
-**Important**
-You must configure the %TMP% and %TEMP% folders that the package converter uses to be a secure location and directory. A secure location is only accessible by an administrator. Additionally, when you sequence the package you should save the package to a location that is secure, or make sure that no other user is allowed to be logged in during the conversion and monitoring process.
-
-
-
-The **Options** dialog box in the sequencer console contains the following tabs:
-
-- **General**. Use this tab to enable Microsoft Updates to run during sequencing. Select **Append Package Version to Filename** to configure the sequence to add a version number to the virtualized package that is being sequenced. Select **Always trust the source of Package Accelerators** to create virtualized packages using a package accelerator without being prompted for authorization.
-
- **Important**
- Package Accelerators created using App-V 4.6 are not supported by App-V 5.0.
-
-
-
-- **Parse Items**. This tab displays the associated file path locations that will be parsed or tokenized into in the virtual environment. Tokens are useful for adding files using the **Package Files** tab in **Advanced Editing**.
-
-- **Exclusion Items**. Use this tab to specify which folders and directories should not be monitored during sequencing. To add local application data that is saved in the Local App Data folder in the package, click **New** and specify the location and the associated **Mapping Type**. This option is required for some packages.
-
-App-V 5.0 supports applications that include Microsoft Windows Services. If an application includes a Windows service, the Service will be included in the sequenced virtual package as long as it is installed while being monitored by the sequencer. If a virtual application creates a Windows service when it initially runs, then later, after installation, the application must be run while the sequencer is monitoring so that the Windows Service will be added to the package. Only Services that run under the Local System account are supported. Services that are configured for AutoStart or Delayed AutoStart are started before the first virtual application in a package runs inside the package’s Virtual Environment. Windows Services that are configured to be started on demand by an application are started when the virtual application inside the package starts the Service via API call.
-
-[How to Sequence a New Application with App-V 5.0](how-to-sequence-a-new-application-with-app-v-50-beta-gb18030.md)
-
-## App-V 5.0 SP2 shell extension support
-
-
-App-V 5.0 SP2 supports shell extensions. Shell extensions will be detected and embedded in the package during sequencing.
-
-Shell extensions are embedded in the package automatically during the sequencing process. When the package is published, the shell extension gives users the same functionality as if the application were locally installed.
-
-**Requirements for using shell extensions:**
-
-- Packages that contain embedded shell extensions must be published globally. The application requires no additional setup or configuration on the client to enable the shell extension functionality.
-
-- The “bitness” of the application, Sequencer, and App-V client must match, or the shell extensions won’t work. For example:
-
- - The version of the application is 64-bit.
-
- - The Sequencer is running on a 64-bit computer.
-
- - The package is being delivered to a 64-bit App-V client computer.
-
-The following table lists the supported shell extensions:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Handler
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Context menu handler
-
Adds menu items to the context menu. It is called before the context menu is displayed.
-
-
-
Drag-and-drop handler
-
Controls the action where right-click, drag and drop and modifies the context menu that appears.
-
-
-
Drop target handler
-
Controls the action after a data object is dragged and dropped over a drop target such as a file.
-
-
-
Data object handler
-
Controls the action after a file is copied to the clipboard or dragged and dropped over a drop target. It can provide additional clipboard formats to the drop target.
-
-
-
Property sheet handler
-
Replaces or adds pages to the property sheet dialog box of an object.
-
-
-
Infotip handler
-
Allows retrieving flags and infotip information for an item and displaying it inside a pop-up tooltip upon mouse hover.
-
-
-
Column handler
-
Allows creating and displaying custom columns in Windows Explorer Details view. It can be used to extend sorting and grouping.
-
-
-
Preview handler
-
Enables a preview of a file to be displayed in the Windows Explorer Preview pane.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Copy on Write (CoW) file extension support
-
-
-Copy on write (CoW) file extensions allow App-V 5.0 to dynamically write to specific locations contained in the virtual package while it is being used.
-
-The following table displays the file types that can exist in a virtual package under the VFS directory, but cannot be updated on the computer running the App-V 5.0 client. All other files and directories can be modified.
-
-.acm
-
-.asa
-
-.asp
-
-.aspx
-
-.ax
-
-.bat
-
-.cer
-
-.chm
-
-.clb
-
-.cmd
-
-.cnt
-
-.cnv
-
-.com
-
-.cpl
-
-.cpx
-
-.crt
-
-.dll
-
-.drv
-
-.exe
-
-.fon
-
-.grp
-
-.hlp
-
-.hta
-
-.ime
-
-.inf
-
-.ins
-
-.isp
-
-.its
-
-.js
-
-.jse
-
-.lnk
-
-.msc
-
-.msi
-
-.msp
-
-.mst
-
-.mui
-
-.nls
-
-.ocx
-
-.pal
-
-.pcd
-
-.pif
-
-.reg
-
-.scf
-
-.scr
-
-.sct
-
-.shb
-
-.shs
-
-.sys
-
-.tlb
-
-.tsp
-
-.url
-
-.vb
-
-.vbe
-
-.vbs
-
-.vsmacros
-
-.ws
-
-.esc
-
-.wsf
-
-.wsh
-
-
-
-## Modifying an existing virtual application package
-
-
-You can use the sequencer to modify an existing package. The computer on which you do this should match the chip architecture of the computer you used to create the application. For example, if you initially sequenced a package using a computer running a 64-bit operating system, you should modify the package using a computer running a 64-bit operating system.
-
-[How to Modify an Existing Virtual Application Package](how-to-modify-an-existing-virtual-application-package-beta.md)
-
-## Creating a project template
-
-
-A .appvt file is a project template that can be used to save commonly applied, customized settings. You can then more easily use these settings for future sequencings.
-
-App-V 5.0 project templates differ from App-V 5.0 Application Accelerators because App-V 5.0 Application Accelerators are application-specific, and App-V 5.0 project templates can be applied to multiple applications. Additionally, you cannot use a project template when you use a Package Accelerator to create a virtual application package. The following general settings are saved with an App-V 5.0 project template:
-
-A template can specify and store multiple settings as follows:
-
-- **Advanced Monitoring Options**. Enables Microsoft Update to run during monitoring. Saves allow local interaction option settings
-
-- **General Options**. Enables the use of **Windows Installer**, **Append Package Version to Filename**.
-
-- **Exclusion Items.** Contains the Exclusion pattern list.
-
-[How to Create and Use a Project Template](how-to-create-and-use-a-project-template.md)
-
-## Creating a package accelerator
-
-
-**Note**
-Package accelerators created using a previous version of App-V must be recreated using App-V 5.0.
-
-
-
-You can use App-V 5.0 package accelerators to automatically generate a new virtual application packages. After you have successfully created a package accelerator, you can reuse and share the package accelerator.
-
-In some situations, to create the package accelerator, you might have to install the application locally on the computer that runs the sequencer. In such cases, you should first try to create the package accelerator with the installation media. If multiple missing files are required, you should install the application locally to the computer that runs the sequencer, and then create the package accelerator.
-
-After you have successfully created a Package Accelerator, you can reuse and share the Package Accelerator. Creating App-V 5.0 Package Accelerators is an advanced task. Package Accelerators can contain password and user-specific information. Therefore you must save Package Accelerators and the associated installation media in a secure location, and you should digitally sign the Package Accelerator after you create it so that the publisher can be verified when the App-V 5.0 Package Accelerator is applied.
-
-[How to Create a Package Accelerator](how-to-create-a-package-accelerator.md)
-
-[How to Create a Virtual Application Package Using an App-V Package Accelerator](how-to-create-a-virtual-application-package-using-an-app-v-package-accelerator.md)
-
-## Sequencer error reporting
-
-
-The App-V 5.0 Sequencer can detect common sequencing issues during sequencing. The **Installation Report** page at the end of the sequencing wizard displays diagnostic messages categorized into **Errors**, **Warnings**, and **Info** depending on the severity of the issue.
-
-You can also find additional information about sequencing errors using the Windows Event Viewer.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Other resources for the App-V 5.0 sequencer
-
-
-- [Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/creating-and-managing-app-v-51-virtualized-applications.md b/mdop/appv-v5/creating-and-managing-app-v-51-virtualized-applications.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c781eb4fea..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/creating-and-managing-app-v-51-virtualized-applications.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,216 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Creating and Managing App-V 5.1 Virtualized Applications
-description: Creating and Managing App-V 5.1 Virtualized Applications
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 26be4331-88eb-4cfb-9d82-e63d7ee54576
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Creating and Managing App-V 5.1 Virtualized Applications
-
-
-After you have properly deployed the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 sequencer, you can use it to monitor and record the installation and setup process for an application to be run as a virtualized application.
-
-**Note**
-For more information about configuring the App-V 5.1 sequencer, sequencing best practices, and an example of creating and updating a virtual application, see the [Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0 Sequencing Guide](https://download.microsoft.com/download/F/7/8/F784A197-73BE-48FF-83DA-4102C05A6D44/App-V 5.0 Sequencing Guide.docx).
-
-**Note**
-The App-V 5.x Sequencer cannot sequence applications with filenames matching "CO_<x>" where x is any numeral. Error 0x8007139F will be generated.
-
-## Sequencing an application
-
-
-You can use the App-V 5.1 Sequencer to perform the following tasks:
-
-- Create virtual packages that can be deployed to computers running the App-V 5.1 client.
-
-- Upgrade existing packages. You can expand an existing package onto the computer running the sequencer and then upgrade the application to create a newer version.
-
-- Edit configuration information associated with an existing package. For example, you can add a shortcut or modify a file type association.
-
- **Note**
- You must create shortcuts and save them to an available network location to allow roaming. If a shortcut is created and saved in a private location, the package must be published locally to the computer running the App-V 5.1 client.
-
-- Convert existing virtual packages.
-
-The sequencer uses the **%TMP% \\ Scratch** or **%TEMP% \\ Scratch** directory and the **Temp** directory to store temporary files during sequencing. On the computer that runs the sequencer, you should configure these directories with free disk space equivalent to the estimated application installation requirements. Configuring the temp directories and the Temp directory on different hard drive partitions can help improve performance during sequencing.
-
-When you use the sequencer to create a new virtual application, the following listed files are created. These files comprise the App-V 5.1 package.
-
-- .msi file. This Windows Installer (.msi) file is created by the sequencer and is used to install the virtual package on target computers.
-
-- Report.xml file. In this file, the sequencer saves all issues, warnings, and errors that were discovered during sequencing. It displays the information after the package has been created. You can us this report for diagnosing and troubleshooting.
-
-- .appv file. This is the virtual application file.
-
-- Deployment configuration file. The deployment configuration file determines how the virtual application will be deployed to target computers.
-
-- User configuration file. The user configuration file determines how the virtual application will run on target computers.
-
-**Important**
-You must configure the %TMP% and %TEMP% folders that the package converter uses to be a secure location and directory. A secure location is only accessible by an administrator. Additionally, when you sequence the package you should save the package to a location that is secure, or make sure that no other user is allowed to be logged in during the conversion and monitoring process.
-
-The **Options** dialog box in the sequencer console contains the following tabs:
-
-- **General**. Use this tab to enable Microsoft Updates to run during sequencing. Select **Append Package Version to Filename** to configure the sequence to add a version number to the virtualized package that is being sequenced. Select **Always trust the source of Package Accelerators** to create virtualized packages using a package accelerator without being prompted for authorization.
-
- **Important**
- Package Accelerators created using App-V 4.6 are not supported by App-V 5.1.
-
-- **Parse Items**. This tab displays the associated file path locations that will be parsed or tokenized into in the virtual environment. Tokens are useful for adding files using the **Package Files** tab in **Advanced Editing**.
-
-- **Exclusion Items**. Use this tab to specify which folders and directories should not be monitored during sequencing. To add local application data that is saved in the Local App Data folder in the package, click **New** and specify the location and the associated **Mapping Type**. This option is required for some packages.
-
-App-V 5.1 supports applications that include Microsoft Windows Services. If an application includes a Windows service, the Service will be included in the sequenced virtual package as long as it is installed while being monitored by the sequencer. If a virtual application creates a Windows service when it initially runs, then later, after installation, the application must be run while the sequencer is monitoring so that the Windows Service will be added to the package. Only Services that run under the Local System account are supported. Services that are configured for AutoStart or Delayed AutoStart are started before the first virtual application in a package runs inside the package’s Virtual Environment. Windows Services that are configured to be started on demand by an application are started when the virtual application inside the package starts the Service via API call.
-
-[How to Sequence a New Application with App-V 5.1](how-to-sequence-a-new-application-with-app-v-51-beta-gb18030.md)
-
-## App-V 5.1 shell extension support
-
-
-App-V 5.1 supports shell extensions. Shell extensions will be detected and embedded in the package during sequencing.
-
-Shell extensions are embedded in the package automatically during the sequencing process. When the package is published, the shell extension gives users the same functionality as if the application were locally installed.
-
-**Requirements for using shell extensions:**
-
-- Packages that contain embedded shell extensions must be published globally. The application requires no additional setup or configuration on the client to enable the shell extension functionality.
-
-- The “bitness” of the application, Sequencer, and App-V client must match, or the shell extensions won’t work. For example:
-
- - The version of the application is 64-bit.
-
- - The Sequencer is running on a 64-bit computer.
-
- - The package is being delivered to a 64-bit App-V client computer.
-
-The following table lists the supported shell extensions:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Handler
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Context menu handler
-
Adds menu items to the context menu. It is called before the context menu is displayed.
-
-
-
Drag-and-drop handler
-
Controls the action where right-click, drag and drop and modifies the context menu that appears.
-
-
-
Drop target handler
-
Controls the action after a data object is dragged and dropped over a drop target such as a file.
-
-
-
Data object handler
-
Controls the action after a file is copied to the clipboard or dragged and dropped over a drop target. It can provide additional clipboard formats to the drop target.
-
-
-
Property sheet handler
-
Replaces or adds pages to the property sheet dialog box of an object.
-
-
-
Infotip handler
-
Allows retrieving flags and infotip information for an item and displaying it inside a pop-up tooltip upon mouse hover.
-
-
-
Column handler
-
Allows creating and displaying custom columns in Windows Explorer Details view. It can be used to extend sorting and grouping.
-
-
-
Preview handler
-
Enables a preview of a file to be displayed in the Windows Explorer Preview pane.
-
-
-
-
-## Copy on Write (CoW) file extension support
-
-Copy on write (CoW) file extensions allow App-V 5.1 to dynamically write to specific locations contained in the virtual package while it is being used.
-
-The following table displays the file types that can exist in a virtual package under the VFS directory, but cannot be updated on the computer running the App-V 5.1 client. All other files and directories can be modified.
-
-| File Type | | | | | |
-|------------ |------------- |------------- |------------ |------------ |------------ |
-| .acm | .asa | .asp | .aspx | .ax | .bat |
-| .cer | .chm | .clb | .cmd | .cnt | .cnv |
-| .com | .cpl | .cpx | .crt | .dll | .drv |
-| .esc | .exe | .fon | .grp | .hlp | .hta |
-| .ime | .inf | .ins | .isp | .its | .js |
-| .jse | .lnk | .msc | .msi | .msp | .mst |
-| .mui | .nls | .ocx | .pal | .pcd | .pif |
-| .reg | .scf | .scr | .sct | .shb | .shs |
-| .sys | .tlb | .tsp | .url | .vb | .vbe |
-| .vbs | .vsmacros | .ws | .wsf | .wsh | |
-
-
-## Modifying an existing virtual application package
-
-
-You can use the sequencer to modify an existing package. The computer on which you do this should match the chip architecture of the computer you used to create the application. For example, if you initially sequenced a package using a computer running a 64-bit operating system, you should modify the package using a computer running a 64-bit operating system.
-
-[How to Modify an Existing Virtual Application Package](how-to-modify-an-existing-virtual-application-package-51.md)
-
-## Creating a project template
-
-
-A .appvt file is a project template that can be used to save commonly applied, customized settings. You can then more easily use these settings for future sequencings.
-
-App-V 5.1 project templates differ from App-V 5.1 Application Accelerators because App-V 5.1 Application Accelerators are application-specific, and App-V 5.1 project templates can be applied to multiple applications. Additionally, you cannot use a project template when you use a Package Accelerator to create a virtual application package. The following general settings are saved with an App-V 5.1 project template:
-
-A template can specify and store multiple settings as follows:
-
-- **Advanced Monitoring Options**. Enables Microsoft Update to run during monitoring. Saves allow local interaction option settings
-
-- **General Options**. Enables the use of **Windows Installer**, **Append Package Version to Filename**.
-
-- **Exclusion Items.** Contains the Exclusion pattern list.
-
-[How to Create and Use a Project Template](how-to-create-and-use-a-project-template51.md)
-
-## Creating a package accelerator
-
-
-**Note**
-Package accelerators created using a previous version of App-V must be recreated using App-V 5.1.
-
-You can use App-V 5.1 package accelerators to automatically generate a new virtual application packages. After you have successfully created a package accelerator, you can reuse and share the package accelerator.
-
-In some situations, to create the package accelerator, you might have to install the application locally on the computer that runs the sequencer. In such cases, you should first try to create the package accelerator with the installation media. If multiple missing files are required, you should install the application locally to the computer that runs the sequencer, and then create the package accelerator.
-
-After you have successfully created a Package Accelerator, you can reuse and share the Package Accelerator. Creating App-V 5.1 Package Accelerators is an advanced task. Package Accelerators can contain password and user-specific information. Therefore you must save Package Accelerators and the associated installation media in a secure location, and you should digitally sign the Package Accelerator after you create it so that the publisher can be verified when the App-V 5.1 Package Accelerator is applied.
-
-[How to Create a Package Accelerator](how-to-create-a-package-accelerator51.md)
-
-[How to Create a Virtual Application Package Using an App-V Package Accelerator](how-to-create-a-virtual-application-package-using-an-app-v-package-accelerator51.md)
-
-## Sequencer error reporting
-
-
-The App-V 5.1 Sequencer can detect common sequencing issues during sequencing. The **Installation Report** page at the end of the sequencing wizard displays diagnostic messages categorized into **Errors**, **Warnings**, and **Info** depending on the severity of the issue.
-
-You can also find additional information about sequencing errors using the Windows Event Viewer.
-
-
-## Other resources for the App-V 5.1 sequencer
-
-
-- [Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-app-v-50-packages-by-using-electronic-software-distribution--esd-.md b/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-app-v-50-packages-by-using-electronic-software-distribution--esd-.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4490ab666a..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-app-v-50-packages-by-using-electronic-software-distribution--esd-.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,57 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying App-V 5.0 Packages by Using Electronic Software Distribution (ESD)
-description: Deploying App-V 5.0 Packages by Using Electronic Software Distribution (ESD)
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: d1d74af4-229f-4578-8c95-554a3d7cd2f3
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying App-V 5.0 Packages by Using Electronic Software Distribution (ESD)
-
-
-You can deploy App-V 5.0 packages using an Electronic Software Distribution (ESD) solution. For information about planning to deploy App-V packages with an ESD, see [Planning to Deploy App-V 5.0 with an Electronic Software Distribution System](planning-to-deploy-app-v-50-with-an-electronic-software-distribution-system.md).
-
-To deploy App-V packages with Microsoft System Center 2012 Configuration Manager, see [Introduction to Application Management in Configuration Manager](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=281816)
-
-## How to deploy virtualized packages using an ESD
-
-
-Describes the methods you can use to deploy App-V packages by using an ESD
-
-[How to deploy App-V 5.0 Packages Using Electronic Software Distribution](how-to-deploy-app-v-50-packages-using-electronic-software-distribution.md)
-
-## How to Enable Only Administrators to Publish Packages by Using an ESD
-
-
-Explains how to configure the App-V client to enable only administrators to publish and unpublish packages when you’re using an ESD.
-
-[How to Enable Only Administrators to Publish Packages by Using an ESD](how-to-enable-only-administrators-to-publish-packages-by-using-an-esd.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Other resources for using an ESD and App-V 5.0
-
-
-Use the following link for more information about [App-V and Citrix Integration](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=330294 ) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=330294).
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-app-v-50.md b/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-app-v-50.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5f13c3d291..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-app-v-50.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying App-V 5.0
-description: Deploying App-V 5.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 77cb19d7-00e6-4b39-b35a-e8a8ca0b807b
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying App-V 5.0
-
-
-Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 (App-V 5.0) supports a number of different deployment options. This section of the App-V 5.0 Administrator’s Guide includes information you should consider about the deployment of App-V 5.0 and step-by-step procedures to help you successfully perform the tasks that you must complete at different stages of your deployment.
-
-## App-V 5.0 Deployment Information
-
-
-- [Deploying the App-V 5.0 Sequencer and Client](deploying-the-app-v-50-sequencer-and-client.md)
-
- This section describes how to install the App-V 5.0 sequencer which is used to virtualize applications, and the App-V 5.0 client which runs on target computers to facilitate virtualized packages.
-
-- [Deploying the App-V 5.0 Server](deploying-the-app-v-50-server.md)
-
- This section provides information about installing the App-V 5.0 management, publishing, database and reporting severs.
-
-- [App-V 5.0 Deployment Checklist](app-v-50-deployment-checklist.md)
-
- This section provides a deployment checklist that can be used to assist with installing App-V 5.0.
-
-## Other Resources for Deploying App-V 5.0
-
-
-- [Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0 Administrator's Guide](microsoft-application-virtualization-50-administrators-guide.md)
-
-- [Getting Started with App-V 5.0](getting-started-with-app-v-50--rtm.md)
-
-- [Planning for App-V 5.0](planning-for-app-v-50-rc.md)
-
-- [Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-- [Troubleshooting App-V 5.0](troubleshooting-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-app-v-51-packages-by-using-electronic-software-distribution--esd-.md b/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-app-v-51-packages-by-using-electronic-software-distribution--esd-.md
deleted file mode 100644
index de4772c416..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-app-v-51-packages-by-using-electronic-software-distribution--esd-.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,57 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying App-V 5.1 Packages by Using Electronic Software Distribution (ESD)
-description: Deploying App-V 5.1 Packages by Using Electronic Software Distribution (ESD)
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: c2e4d176-460d-44ca-9a1d-69d2a733aa42
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying App-V 5.1 Packages by Using Electronic Software Distribution (ESD)
-
-
-You can deploy App-V 5.1 packages using an Electronic Software Distribution (ESD) solution. For information about planning to deploy App-V packages with an ESD, see [Planning to Deploy App-V 5.1 with an Electronic Software Distribution System](planning-to-deploy-app-v-51-with-an-electronic-software-distribution-system.md).
-
-To deploy App-V packages with Microsoft System Center 2012 Configuration Manager, see [Introduction to Application Management in Configuration Manager](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=281816)
-
-## How to deploy virtualized packages using an ESD
-
-
-Describes the methods you can use to deploy App-V packages by using an ESD
-
-[How to deploy App-V 5.1 Packages Using Electronic Software Distribution](how-to-deploy-app-v-51-packages-using-electronic-software-distribution.md)
-
-## How to Enable Only Administrators to Publish Packages by Using an ESD
-
-
-Explains how to configure the App-V client to enable only administrators to publish and unpublish packages when you’re using an ESD.
-
-[How to Enable Only Administrators to Publish Packages by Using an ESD](how-to-enable-only-administrators-to-publish-packages-by-using-an-esd51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Other resources for using an ESD and App-V 5.1
-
-
-Use the following link for more information about [App-V and Citrix Integration](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=330294 ) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=330294).
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-app-v-51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-app-v-51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 719dc32571..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-app-v-51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,64 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying App-V 5.1
-description: Deploying App-V 5.1
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: af8742bf-e24b-402a-bcf4-0f2297f26bc4
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying App-V 5.1
-
-
-Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 supports a number of different deployment options. This section of the App-V 5.1 Administrator’s Guide includes information you should consider about the deployment of App-V 5.1 and step-by-step procedures to help you successfully perform the tasks that you must complete at different stages of your deployment.
-
-## App-V 5.1 Deployment Information
-
-
-- [Deploying the App-V 5.1 Sequencer and Client](deploying-the-app-v-51-sequencer-and-client.md)
-
- This section describes how to install the App-V 5.1 sequencer which is used to virtualize applications, and the App-V 5.1 client which runs on target computers to facilitate virtualized packages.
-
-- [Deploying the App-V 5.1 Server](deploying-the-app-v-51-server.md)
-
- This section provides information about installing the App-V 5.1 management, publishing, database and reporting severs.
-
-- [App-V 5.1 Deployment Checklist](app-v-51-deployment-checklist.md)
-
- This section provides a deployment checklist that can be used to assist with installing App-V 5.1.
-
-## Other Resources for Deploying App-V 5.1
-
-
-- [Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.1 Administrator's Guide](microsoft-application-virtualization-51-administrators-guide.md)
-
-- [Getting Started with App-V 5.1](getting-started-with-app-v-51.md)
-
-- [Planning for App-V 5.1](planning-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-- [Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-- [Troubleshooting App-V 5.1](troubleshooting-app-v-51.md)
-
-- [Technical Reference for App-V 5.1](technical-reference-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-microsoft-office-2010-by-using-app-v.md b/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-microsoft-office-2010-by-using-app-v.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 88c3436957..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-microsoft-office-2010-by-using-app-v.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,315 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying Microsoft Office 2010 by Using App-V
-description: Deploying Microsoft Office 2010 by Using App-V
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 0a9e496e-82a1-4dc0-a496-7b21eaa00f53
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying Microsoft Office 2010 by Using App-V
-
-
-You can create Office 2010 packages for Application Virtualization 5.0 using one of the following methods:
-
-- Application Virtualization (App-V) Sequencer
-
-- Application Virtualization (App-V) Package Accelerator
-
-## App-V support for Office 2010
-
-
-The following table shows the App-V versions, methods of Office package creation, supported licensing, and supported deployments for Office 2010.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Supported item
-
Level of support
-
-
-
-
-
Supported App-V versions
-
-
4.6
-
5.0
-
-
-
-
Package creation
-
-
Sequencing
-
Package Accelerator
-
Office Deployment Kit
-
-
-
-
Supported licensing
-
Volume Licensing
-
-
-
Supported deployments
-
-
Desktop
-
Personal VDI
-
RDS
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Creating Office 2010 App-V 5.0 using the sequencer
-
-
-Sequencing Office 2010 is one of the main methods for creating an Office 2010 package on App-V 5.0. Microsoft has provided a detailed recipe through a Knowledge Base article. To create an Office 2010 package on App-V 5.0, refer to the following link for detailed instructions:
-
-[How To Sequence Microsoft Office 2010 in Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330676)
-
-## Creating Office 2010 App-V 5.0 packages using package accelerators
-
-
-Office 2010 App-V 5.0 packages can be created through package accelerators. Microsoft has provided package accelerators for creating Office 2010 on Windows 8 and Windows 7. To create Office 2010 packages on App-V using Package accelerators, refer to the following pages to access the appropriate package accelerator:
-
-- [App-V 5.0 Package Accelerator for Office Professional Plus 2010 – Windows 8](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330677)
-
-- [App-V 5.0 Package Accelerator for Office Professional Plus 2010 – Windows 7](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330678)
-
-For detailed instructions on how to create virtual application packages using App-V package accelerators, see [How to Create a Virtual Application Package Using an App-V Package Accelerator](how-to-create-a-virtual-application-package-using-an-app-v-package-accelerator.md).
-
-## Deploying the Microsoft Office package for App-V 5.0
-
-
-You can deploy Office 2010 packages by using any of the following App-V deployment methods:
-
-- System Center Configuration Manager
-
-- App-V server
-
-- Stand-alone through PowerShell commands
-
-## Office App-V package management and customization
-
-
-Office 2010 packages can be managed like any other App-V 5.0 packages through known package management mechanisms. No special instructions are needed, for example, to add, publish, unpublish, or remove Office packages.
-
-## Microsoft Office integration with Windows
-
-
-The following table provides a full list of supported integration points for Office 2010.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Extension Point
-
Description
-
Office 2010
-
-
-
-
-
Lync meeting Join Plug-in for Firefox and Chrome
-
User can join Lync meetings from Firefox and Chrome
-
-
-
-
Sent to OneNote Print Driver
-
User can print to OneNote
-
Yes
-
-
-
OneNote Linked Notes
-
OneNote Linked Notes
-
-
-
-
Send to OneNote Internet Explorer Add-In
-
User can send to OneNote from IE
-
-
-
-
Firewall Exception for Lync and Outlook
-
Firewall Exception for Lync and Outlook
-
-
-
-
MAPI Client
-
Native apps and add-ins can interact with virtual Outlook through MAPI
-
-
-
-
SharePoint Plugin for Firefox
-
User can use SharePoint features in Firefox
-
-
-
-
Mail Control Panel Applet
-
User gets the mail control panel applet in Outlook
Windows explorer shell icon overlays when users look at folders OneDrive Pro folders
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Additional resources
-
-
-**Office 2013 App-V 5.0 Packages 5.0 Additional Resources**
-
-[Supported scenarios for deploying Microsoft Office as a sequenced App-V Package](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330680)
-
-**Office 2010 App-V 5.0 Packages**
-
-[Microsoft Office 2010 Sequencing Kit for Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330681)
-
-[Known issues when you create or use an App-V 5.0 Office 2010 package](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330682)
-
-[How to sequence Microsoft Office 2010 in Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330676)
-
-**Connection Groups**
-
-[Deploying Connection Groups in Microsoft App-V v5](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330683)
-
-[Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups.md)
-
-**Dynamic Configuration**
-
-[About App-V 5.0 Dynamic Configuration](about-app-v-50-dynamic-configuration.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-microsoft-office-2010-by-using-app-v51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-microsoft-office-2010-by-using-app-v51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8e68496eec..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-microsoft-office-2010-by-using-app-v51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,316 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying Microsoft Office 2010 by Using App-V
-description: Deploying Microsoft Office 2010 by Using App-V
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: ae0b0459-c0d6-4946-b62d-ff153f52d1fb
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying Microsoft Office 2010 by Using App-V
-
-
-You can create Office 2010 packages for Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 using one of the following methods:
-
-- Application Virtualization (App-V) Sequencer
-
-- Application Virtualization (App-V) Package Accelerator
-
-## App-V support for Office 2010
-
-
-The following table shows the App-V versions, methods of Office package creation, supported licensing, and supported deployments for Office 2010.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Supported item
-
Level of support
-
-
-
-
-
Supported App-V versions
-
-
4.6
-
5.0
-
5.1
-
-
-
-
Package creation
-
-
Sequencing
-
Package Accelerator
-
Office Deployment Kit
-
-
-
-
Supported licensing
-
Volume Licensing
-
-
-
Supported deployments
-
-
Desktop
-
Personal VDI
-
RDS
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Creating Office 2010 App-V 5.1 using the sequencer
-
-
-Sequencing Office 2010 is one of the main methods for creating an Office 2010 package on App-V 5.1. Microsoft has provided a detailed recipe through a Knowledge Base article. To create an Office 2010 package on App-V 5.1, refer to the following link for detailed instructions:
-
-[How To Sequence Microsoft Office 2010 in Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330676)
-
-## Creating Office 2010 App-V 5.1 packages using package accelerators
-
-
-Office 2010 App-V 5.1 packages can be created through package accelerators. Microsoft has provided package accelerators for creating Office 2010 on Windows 10, Windows 8 and Windows 7. To create Office 2010 packages on App-V using Package accelerators, refer to the following pages to access the appropriate package accelerator:
-
-- [App-V 5.0 Package Accelerator for Office Professional Plus 2010 – Windows 8](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330677)
-
-- [App-V 5.0 Package Accelerator for Office Professional Plus 2010 – Windows 7](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330678)
-
-For detailed instructions on how to create virtual application packages using App-V package accelerators, see [How to Create a Virtual Application Package Using an App-V Package Accelerator](how-to-create-a-virtual-application-package-using-an-app-v-package-accelerator51.md).
-
-## Deploying the Microsoft Office package for App-V 5.1
-
-
-You can deploy Office 2010 packages by using any of the following App-V deployment methods:
-
-- System Center Configuration Manager
-
-- App-V server
-
-- Stand-alone through PowerShell commands
-
-## Office App-V package management and customization
-
-
-Office 2010 packages can be managed like any other App-V 5.1 packages through known package management mechanisms. No special instructions are needed, for example, to add, publish, unpublish, or remove Office packages.
-
-## Microsoft Office integration with Windows
-
-
-The following table provides a full list of supported integration points for Office 2010.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Extension Point
-
Description
-
Office 2010
-
-
-
-
-
Lync meeting Join Plug-in for Firefox and Chrome
-
User can join Lync meetings from Firefox and Chrome
-
-
-
-
Sent to OneNote Print Driver
-
User can print to OneNote
-
Yes
-
-
-
OneNote Linked Notes
-
OneNote Linked Notes
-
-
-
-
Send to OneNote Internet Explorer Add-In
-
User can send to OneNote from IE
-
-
-
-
Firewall Exception for Lync and Outlook
-
Firewall Exception for Lync and Outlook
-
-
-
-
MAPI Client
-
Native apps and add-ins can interact with virtual Outlook through MAPI
-
-
-
-
SharePoint Plugin for Firefox
-
User can use SharePoint features in Firefox
-
-
-
-
Mail Control Panel Applet
-
User gets the mail control panel applet in Outlook
Windows explorer shell icon overlays when users look at folders OneDrive Pro folders
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Additional resources
-
-
-**Office 2013 App-V Packages Additional Resources**
-
-[Supported scenarios for deploying Microsoft Office as a sequenced App-V Package](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330680)
-
-**Office 2010 App-V Packages**
-
-[Microsoft Office 2010 Sequencing Kit for Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330681)
-
-[Known issues when you create or use an App-V 5.0 Office 2010 package](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330682)
-
-[How to sequence Microsoft Office 2010 in Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330676)
-
-**Connection Groups**
-
-[Deploying Connection Groups in Microsoft App-V v5](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330683)
-
-[Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups51.md)
-
-**Dynamic Configuration**
-
-[About App-V 5.1 Dynamic Configuration](about-app-v-51-dynamic-configuration.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-microsoft-office-2013-by-using-app-v.md b/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-microsoft-office-2013-by-using-app-v.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6ac193ddbc..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-microsoft-office-2013-by-using-app-v.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,894 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying Microsoft Office 2013 by Using App-V
-description: Deploying Microsoft Office 2013 by Using App-V
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 02df5dc8-79e2-4c5c-8398-dbfb23344ab3
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 11/02/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying Microsoft Office 2013 by Using App-V
-
-
-Use the information in this article to use Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0, or later versions, to deliver Microsoft Office 2013 as a virtualized application to computers in your organization. For information about using App-V to deliver Office 2010, see [Deploying Microsoft Office 2010 by Using App-V](deploying-microsoft-office-2010-by-using-app-v.md). To successfully deploy Office 2013 with App-V, you need to be familiar with Office 2013 and pp-V.
-
-This topic contains the following sections:
-
-- [What to know before you start](#bkmk-before-you-start)
-
-- [Creating an Office 2013 package for App-V with the Office Deployment Tool](#bkmk-create-office-pkg)
-
-- [Publishing the Office package for App-V 5.0](#bkmk-pub-pkg-office)
-
-- [Customizing and managing Office App-V packages](#bkmk-custmz-manage-office-pkgs)
-
-## What to know before you start
-
-
-Before you deploy Office 2013 by using App-V, review the following planning information.
-
-### Supported Office versions and Office coexistence
-
-Use the following table to get information about supported versions of Office and about running coexisting versions of Office.
-
-
Considerations for installing different versions of Office on the same computer
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Packaging, publishing, and deployment requirements
-
-Before you deploy Office by using App-V, review the following requirements.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
Requirement
-
-
-
-
-
Packaging
-
-
All of the Office applications that you want to deploy to users must be in a single package.
-
In App-V 5.0 and later, you must use the Office Deployment Tool to create packages. You cannot use the Sequencer.
-
If you are deploying Microsoft Visio 2013 and Microsoft Project 2013 along with Office, you must include them in the same package with Office. For more information, see Deploying Visio 2013 and Project 2013 with Office.
-
-
-
-
Publishing
-
-
You can publish only one Office package to each client computer.
-
You must publish the Office package globally. You cannot publish to the user.
-
-
-
-
Deploying any of the following products to a shared computer, for example, by using Remote Desktop Services:
You don’t use shared computer activation if you’re deploying a volume licensed product, such as:
-
-
Office Professional Plus 2013
-
Visio Professional 2013
-
Project Professional 2013
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Excluding Office applications from a package
-
-The following table describes the recommended methods for excluding specific Office applications from a package.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
Use the ExcludeApp setting when you create the package by using the Office Deployment Tool.
-
-
Enables you to exclude specific Office applications from the package when the Office Deployment Tool creates the package. For example, you can use this setting to create a package that contains only Microsoft Word.
Modify the DeploymentConfig.xml file after the package has been created. This file contains the default package settings for all users on a computer that is running the App-V Client.
-
-
-
-## Creating an Office 2013 package for App-V with the Office Deployment Tool
-
-
-Complete the following steps to create an Office 2013 package for App-V 5.0 or later.
-
-**Important**
-In App-V 5.0 and later, you must the Office Deployment Tool to create a package. You cannot use the Sequencer to create packages.
-
-
-### Review prerequisites for using the Office Deployment Tool
-
-The computer on which you are installing the Office Deployment Tool must have:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Prerequisite
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Prerequisite software
-
.Net Framework 4
-
-
-
Supported operating systems
-
-
64-bit version of Windows 8
-
64-bit version of Windows 7
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Note**
-In this topic, the term “Office 2013 App-V package” refers to subscription licensing and volume licensing.
-
-
-### Create Office 2013 App-V Packages Using Office Deployment Tool
-
-You create Office 2013 App-V packages by using the Office Deployment Tool. The following instructions explain how to create an Office 2013 App-V package with Volume Licensing or Subscription Licensing.
-
-Create Office 2013 App-V packages on 64-bit Windows computers. Once created, the Office 2013 App-V package will run on 32-bit and 64-bit Windows 7 and Windows 8 computers.
-
-### Download the Office Deployment Tool
-
-Office 2013 App-V Packages are created using the Office Deployment Tool, which generates an Office 2013 App-V Package. The package cannot be created or modified through the App-V sequencer. To begin package creation:
-
-1. Download the [Office Deployment Tool for Click-to-Run](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=36778).
-
-2. Run the .exe file and extract its features into the desired location. To make this process easier, you can create a shared network folder where the features will be saved.
-
- Example: \\\\Server\\Office2013
-
-3. Check that a setup.exe and a configuration.xml file exist and are in the location you specified.
-
-### Download Office 2013 applications
-
-After you download the Office Deployment Tool, you can use it to get the latest Office 2013 applications. After getting the Office applications, you create the Office 2013 App-V package.
-
-The XML file that is included in the Office Deployment Tool specifies the product details, such as the languages and Office applications included.
-
-1. **Customize the sample XML configuration file:** Use the sample XML configuration file that you downloaded with the Office Deployment Tool to customize the Office applications:
-
- 1. Open the sample XML file in Notepad or your favorite text editor.
-
- 2. With the sample configuration.xml file open and ready for editing, you can specify products, languages, and the path to which you save the Office 2013 applications. The following is a basic example of the configuration.xml file:
-
- ```xml
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- ```
-
- **Note**
- The configuration XML is a sample XML file. The file includes lines that are commented out. You can “uncomment” these lines to customize additional settings with the file.
-
- The above XML configuration file specifies that Office 2013 ProPlus 32-bit edition, including Visio ProPlus, will be downloaded in English to the \\\\server\\Office 2013, which is the location where Office applications will be saved to. Note that the Product ID of the applications will not affect the final licensing of Office. Office 2013 App-V packages with various licensing can be created from the same applications through specifying licensing in a later stage. The table below summarizes the customizable attributes and elements of XML file:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Input
-
Description
-
Example
-
-
-
-
-
Add element
-
Specifies the products and languages to include in the package.
-
N/A
-
-
-
OfficeClientEdition (attribute of Add element)
-
Specifies the edition of Office 2013 product to use: 32-bit or 64-bit. The operation fails if OfficeClientEdition is not set to a valid value.
-
OfficeClientEdition="32"
-
OfficeClientEdition="64"
-
-
-
Product element
-
Specifies the application. Project 2013 and Visio 2013 must be specified here as an added product to be included in the applications.
-
Product ID ="O365ProPlusRetail "
-
Product ID ="VisioProRetail"
-
Product ID ="ProjectProRetail"
-
Product ID ="ProPlusVolume"
-
Product ID ="VisioProVolume"
-
Product ID = "ProjectProVolume"
-
-
-
Language element
-
Specifies the language supported in the applications
-
Language ID="en-us"
-
-
-
Version (attribute of Add element)
-
Optional. Specifies a build to use for the package
-
Defaults to latest advertised build (as defined in v32.CAB at the Office source).
-
15.1.2.3
-
-
-
SourcePath (attribute of Add element)
-
Specifies the location in which the applications will be saved to.
-
Sourcepath = "\Server\Office2013”
-
-
-
-
- After editing the configuration.xml file to specify the desired product, languages, and also the location which the Office 2013 applications will be saved onto, you can save the configuration file, for example, as Customconfig.xml.
-
-2. **Download the applications into the specified location:** Use an elevated command prompt and a 64 bit operating system to download the Office 2013 applications that will later be converted into an App-V package. Below is an example command with description of details:
-
- ``` syntax
- \\server\Office2013\setup.exe /download \\server\Office2013\Customconfig.xml
- ```
-
- In the example:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
\server\Office2013
-
is the network share location that contains the Office Deployment Tool and the custom Configuration.xml file, Customconfig.xml.
-
-
-
Setup.exe
-
is the Office Deployment Tool.
-
-
-
/download
-
downloads the Office 2013 applications that you specify in the customConfig.xml file. These bits can be later converted in an Office 2013 App-V package with Volume Licensing.
-
-
-
\server\Office2013\Customconfig.xml
-
passes the XML configuration file required to complete the download process, in this example, customconfig.xml. After using the download command, Office applications should be found in the location specified in the configuration xml file, in this example \Server\Office2013.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Convert the Office applications into an App-V package
-
-After you download the Office 2013 applications through the Office Deployment Tool, use the Office Deployment Tool to convert them into an Office 2013 App-V package. Complete the steps that correspond to your licensing model.
-
-**Summary of what you’ll need to do:**
-
-- Create the Office 2013 App-V packages on 64-bit Windows computers. However, the package will run on 32-bit and 64-bit Windows 7 and Windows 8 computers.
-
-- Create an Office App-V package for either Subscription Licensing package or Volume Licensing by using the Office Deployment Tool, and then modify the CustomConfig.xml configuration file.
-
- The following table summarizes the values you need to enter in the CustomConfig.xml file for the licensing model you’re using. The steps in the sections that follow the table will specify the exact entries you need to make.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Product ID
-
Volume Licensing
-
Subscription Licensing
-
-
-
-
-
Office 2013
-
ProPlusVolume
-
O365ProPlusRetail
-
-
-
Office 2013 with Visio 2013
-
ProPlusVolume
-
VisioProVolume
-
O365ProPlusRetail
-
VisioProRetail
-
-
-
Office 2013 with Visio 2013 and Project 2013
-
ProPlusVolume
-
VisioProVolume
-
ProjectProVolume
-
O365ProPlusRetail
-
VisioProRetail
-
ProjectProRetail
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**How to convert the Office applications into an App-V package**
-
-1. In Notepad, reopen the CustomConfig.xml file, and make the following changes to the file:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
What to change the value to
-
-
-
-
-
SourcePath
-
Point to the Office applications downloaded earlier.
-
-
-
ProductID
-
Specify the type of licensing, as shown in the following examples:
In this example, the following changes were made to create a package with Volume licensing:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SourcePath
-
is the path, which was changed to point to the Office applications that were downloaded earlier.
-
-
-
Product ID
-
for Office was changed to ProPlusVolume.
-
-
-
Product ID
-
for Visio was changed to VisioProVolume.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
ExcludeApp (optional)
-
Lets you specify Office programs that you don’t want included in the App-V package that the Office Deployment Tool creates. For example, you can exclude Access and InfoPath.
-
-
-
PACKAGEGUID (optional)
-
By default, all App-V packages created by the Office Deployment Tool share the same App-V Package ID. You can use PACKAGEGUID to specify a different package ID for each package, which allows you to publish multiple App-V packages, created by the Office Deployment Tool, and manage them by using the App-V Server.
-
An example of when to use this parameter is if you create different packages for different users. For example, you can create a package with just Office 2013 for some users, and create another package with Office 2013 and Visio 2013 for another set of users.
-
- Note
Even if you use unique package IDs, you can still deploy only one App-V package to a single device.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-2. Use the /packager command to convert the Office applications to an Office 2013 App-V package.
-
- For example:
-
- ``` syntax
- \\server\Office2013\setup.exe /packager \\server\Office2013\Customconfig.xml \\server\share\Office2013AppV
- ```
-
- In the example:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
\server\Office2013
-
is the network share location that contains the Office Deployment Tool and the custom Configuration.xml file, Customconfig.xml.
-
-
-
Setup.exe
-
is the Office Deployment Tool.
-
-
-
/packager
-
creates the Office 2013 App-V package with Volume Licensing as specified in the customConfig.xml file.
-
-
-
\server\Office2013\Customconfig.xml
-
passes the configuration XML file (in this case customConfig) that has been prepared for the packaging stage.
-
-
-
\server\share\Office 2013AppV
-
specifies the location of the newly created Office App-V package.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-~~~
-After you run the **/packager** command, the following folders appear up in the directory where you specified the package should be saved:
-
-- **App-V Packages** – contains an Office 2013 App-V package and two deployment configuration files.
-
-- **WorkingDir**
-
-**Note**
-To troubleshoot any issues, see the log files in the %temp% directory (default).
-~~~
-
-
-
-3. Verify that the Office 2013 App-V package works correctly:
-
- 1. Publish the Office 2013 App-V package, which you created globally, to a test computer, and verify that the Office 2013 shortcuts appear.
-
- 2. Start a few Office 2013 applications, such as Excel or Word, to ensure that your package is working as expected.
-
-## Publishing the Office package for App-V 5.0
-
-
-Use the following information to publish an Office package.
-
-### Methods for publishing Office App-V packages
-
-Deploy the App-V package for Office 2013 by using the same methods you use for any other package:
-
-- System Center Configuration Manager
-
-- App-V Server
-
-- Stand-alone through PowerShell commands
-
-### Publishing prerequisites and requirements
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Prerequisite or requirement
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
Enable PowerShell scripting on the App-V clients
-
To publish Office 2013 packages, you must run a script.
-
Package scripts are disabled by default on App-V clients. To enable scripting, run the following PowerShell command:
Extension points in the Office App-V package require installation at the computer level.
-
When you publish at the computer level, no prerequisite actions or redistributables are needed, and the Office 2013 package globally enables its applications to work like natively installed Office, eliminating the need for administrators to customize packages.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### How to publish an Office package
-
-Run the following command to publish an Office package globally:
-
-- `Add-AppvClientPackage | Publish-AppvClientPackage –global`
-
-- From the Web Management Console on the App-V Server, you can add permissions to a group of computers instead of to a user group to enable packages to be published globally to the computers in the corresponding group.
-
-## Customizing and managing Office App-V packages
-
-
-To manage your Office App-V packages, use the same operations as you would for any other package, but there are a few exceptions, as outlined in the following sections.
-
-- [Enabling Office plug-ins by using connection groups](#bkmk-enable-office-plugins)
-
-- [Disabling Office 2013 applications](#bkmk-disable-office-apps)
-
-- [Disabling Office 2013 shortcuts](#bkmk-disable-shortcuts)
-
-- [Managing Office 2013 package upgrades](#bkmk-manage-office-pkg-upgrd)
-
-- [Managing Office 2013 licensing upgrades](#bkmk-manage-office-lic-upgrd)
-
-- [Deploying Visio 2013 and Project 2013 with Office](#bkmk-deploy-visio-project)
-
-### Enabling Office plug-ins by using connection groups
-
-Use the steps in this section to enable Office plug-ins with your Office package. To use Office plug-ins, you must use the App-V Sequencer to create a separate package that contains just the plug-ins. You cannot use the Office Deployment Tool to create the plug-ins package. You then create a connection group that contains the Office package and the plug-ins package, as described in the following steps.
-
-**To enable plug-ins for Office App-V packages**
-
-1. Add a Connection Group through App-V Server, System Center Configuration Manager, or a PowerShell cmdlet.
-
-2. Sequence your plug-ins using the App-V 5.0 Sequencer. Ensure that Office 2013 is installed on the computer being used to sequence the plug-in. It is recommended you use Office 365 ProPlus(non-virtual) on the sequencing computer when you sequence Office 2013 plug-ins.
-
-3. Create an App-V 5.0 package that includes the desired plug-ins.
-
-4. Add a Connection Group through App-V server, System Center Configuration Manager, or a PowerShell cmdlet.
-
-5. Add the Office 2013 App-V package and the plug-ins package you sequenced to the Connection Group you created.
-
- **Important**
- The order of the packages in the Connection Group determines the order in which the package contents are merged. In your Connection group descriptor file, add the Office 2013 App-V package first, and then add the plug-in App-V package.
-
-
-
-6. Ensure that both packages are published to the target computer and that the plug-in package is published globally to match the global settings of the published Office 2013 App-V package.
-
-7. Verify that the Deployment Configuration File of the plug-in package has the same settings that the Office 2013 App-V package has.
-
- Since the Office 2013 App-V package is integrated with the operating system, the plug-in package settings should match. You can search the Deployment Configuration File for “COM Mode” and ensure that your plug-ins package has that value set as “Integrated” and that both "InProcessEnabled" and "OutOfProcessEnabled" match the settings of the Office 2013 App-V package you published.
-
-8. Open the Deployment Configuration File and set the value for **Objects Enabled** to **false**.
-
-9. If you made any changes to the Deployment Configuration file after sequencing, ensure that the plug-in package is published with the file.
-
-10. Ensure that the Connection Group you created is enabled onto your desired computer. The Connection Group created will likely “pend” if the Office 2013 App-V package is in use when the Connection Group is enabled. If that happens, you have to reboot to successfully enable the Connection Group.
-
-11. After you successfully publish both packages and enable the Connection Group, start the target Office 2013 application and verify that the plug-in you published and added to the connection group works as expected.
-
-### Disabling Office 2013 applications
-
-You may want to disable specific applications in your Office App-V package. For instance, you can disable Access, but leave all other Office application main available. When you disable an application, the end user will no longer see the shortcut for that application. You do not have to re-sequence the application. When you change the Deployment Configuration File after the Office 2013 App-V package has been published, you will save the changes, add the Office 2013 App-V package, and then republish it with the new Deployment Configuration File to apply the new settings to Office 2013 App-V Package applications.
-
-**Note**
-To exclude specific Office applications (for example, Access and InfoPath) when you create the App-V package with the Office Deployment Tool, use the **ExcludeApp** setting. For more information, see [Reference for Click-to-Run configuration.xml file](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/jj219426.aspx).
-
-
-
-**To disable an Office 2013 application**
-
-1. Open a Deployment Configuration File with a text editor such as **Notepad** and search for “Applications."
-
-2. Search for the Office application you want to disable, for example, Access 2013.
-
-3. Change the value of "Enabled" from "true" to "false."
-
-4. Save the Deployment Configuration File.
-
-5. Add the Office 2013 App-V Package with the new Deployment Configuration File.
-
- ```xml
-
-
- InfoPath Filler 2013
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Lync 2013
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Access 2013
-
-
-
-
- ```
-
-6. Re-add the Office 2013 App-V package, and then republish it with the new Deployment Configuration File to apply the new settings to Office 2013 App-V Package applications.
-
-### Disabling Office 2013 shortcuts
-
-You may want to disable shortcuts for certain Office applications instead of unpublishing or removing the package. The following example shows how to disable shortcuts for Microsoft Access.
-
-**To disable shortcuts for Office 2013 applications**
-
-1. Open a Deployment Configuration File in Notepad and search for “Shortcuts”.
-
-2. To disable certain shortcuts, delete or comment out the specific shortcuts you don’t want. You must keep the subsystem present and enabled. For example, in the example below, delete the Microsoft Access shortcuts, while keeping the subsystems <shortcut> </shortcut> intact to disable the Microsoft Access shortcut.
-
- ``` syntax
- Shortcuts
-
- -->
-
-
-
-
- [{Common Programs}]\Microsoft Office 2013\Access 2013.lnk
- [{AppvPackageRoot}])office15\MSACCESS.EXE
- [{Windows}]\Installer\{90150000-000F-0000-0000-000000FF1CE)\accicons.exe.Ø.ico
-
-
- Microsoft.Office.MSACCESS.EXE.15
- true
- Build a professional app quickly to manage data.
- l
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\office15\MSACCESS.EXE
-
- ```
-
-3. Save the Deployment Configuration File.
-
-4. Republish Office 2013 App-V Package with new Deployment Configuration File.
-
-Many additional settings can be changed through modifying the Deployment Configuration for App-V packages, for example, file type associations, Virtual File System, and more. For additional information on how to use Deployment Configuration Files to change App-V package settings, refer to the additional resources section at the end of this document.
-
-### Managing Office 2013 package upgrades
-
-To upgrade an Office 2013 package, use the Office Deployment Tool. To upgrade a previously deployed Office 2013 package, perform the following steps.
-
-**How to upgrade a previously deployed Office 2013 package**
-
-1. Create a new Office 2013 package through the Office Deployment Tool that uses the most recent Office 2013 application software. The most recent Office 2013 bits can always be obtained through the download stage of creating an Office 2013 App-V Package. The newly created Office 2013 package will have the most recent updates and a new Version ID. All packages created using the Office Deployment Tool have the same lineage.
-
- **Note**
- Office App-V packages have two Version IDs:
-
- - An Office 2013 App-V Package Version ID that is unique across all packages created using the Office Deployment Tool.
-
- - A second App-V Package Version ID, x.x.x.x for example, in the AppX manifest that will only change if there is a new version of Office itself. For example, if a new Office 2013 release with upgrades is available, and a package is created through the Office Deployment Tool to incorporate these upgrades, the X.X.X.X version ID will change to reflect that the Office version itself has changed. The App-V server will use the X.X.X.X version ID to differentiate this package and recognize that it contains new upgrades to the previously published package, and as a result, publish it as an upgrade to the existing Office 2013 package.
-
-
-
-2. Globally publish the newly created Office 2013 App-V Packages onto computers where you would like to apply the new updates. Since the new package has the same lineage of the older Office 2013 App-V Package, publishing the new package with the updates will only apply the new changes to the old package, and thus will be fast.
-
-3. Upgrades will be applied in the same manner of any globally published App-V Packages. Because applications will probably be in use, upgrades might be delayed until the computer is rebooted.
-
-### Managing Office 2013 licensing upgrades
-
-If a new Office 2013 App-V Package has a different license than the Office 2013 App-V Package currently deployed. For instance, the Office 2013 package deployed is a subscription based Office 2013 and the new Office 2013 package is Volume Licensing based, the following instructions must be followed to ensure smooth licensing upgrade:
-
-**How to upgrade an Office 2013 License**
-
-1. Unpublish the already deployed Office 2013 Subscription Licensing App-V package.
-
-2. Remove the unpublished Office 2013 Subscription Licensing App-V package.
-
-3. Restart the computer.
-
-4. Add the new Office 2013 App-V Package Volume Licensing.
-
-5. Publish the added Office 2013 App-V Package with Volume Licensing.
-
-An Office 2013 App-V Package with your chosen licensing will be successfully deployed.
-
-### Deploying Visio 2013 and Project 2013 with Office
-
-The following table describes the requirements and options for deploying Visio 2013 and Project 2013 with Office.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
How do I package and publish Visio 2013 and Project 2013 with Office?
-
You must include Visio 2013 and Project 2013 in the same package with Office.
How can I deploy Visio 2013 and Project 2013 to specific users?
-
Use one of the following methods:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
If you want to...
-
...then use this method
-
-
-
-
-
Create two different packages and deploy each one to a different group of users
-
Create and deploy the following packages:
-
-
A package that contains only Office - deploy to computers whose users need only Office.
-
A package that contains Office, Visio, and Project - deploy to computers whose users need all three applications.
-
-
-
-
If you want only one package for the whole organization, or if you have users who share computers:
-
Follows these steps:
-
-
Create a package that contains Office, Visio, and Project.
-
Deploy the package to all users.
-
Use Microsoft AppLocker to prevent specific users from using Visio and Project.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Additional resources
-
-
-**Office 2013 App-V 5.0 Packages 5.0 Additional Resources**
-
-[Office Deployment Tool for Click-to-Run](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkID=330672)
-
-[Supported scenarios for deploying Microsoft Office as a sequenced App-V Package](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330680)
-
-**Office 2010 App-V 5.0 Packages**
-
-[Microsoft Office 2010 Sequencing Kit for Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330681)
-
-[Known issues when you create or use an App-V 5.0 Office 2010 package](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330682)
-
-[How to sequence Microsoft Office 2010 in Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330676)
-
-**Connection Groups**
-
-[Deploying Connection Groups in Microsoft App-V v5](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330683)
-
-[Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups.md)
-
-**Dynamic Configuration**
-
-[About App-V 5.0 Dynamic Configuration](about-app-v-50-dynamic-configuration.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-microsoft-office-2013-by-using-app-v51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-microsoft-office-2013-by-using-app-v51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 2e781bfa2b..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-microsoft-office-2013-by-using-app-v51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,902 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying Microsoft Office 2013 by Using App-V
-description: Deploying Microsoft Office 2013 by Using App-V
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 9a7be05e-2a7a-4874-af25-09c0f5037876
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 11/02/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying Microsoft Office 2013 by Using App-V
-
-
-Use the information in this article to use Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1, or later versions, to deliver Microsoft Office 2013 as a virtualized application to computers in your organization. For information about using App-V to deliver Office 2010, see [Deploying Microsoft Office 2010 by Using App-V](deploying-microsoft-office-2010-by-using-app-v51.md). To successfully deploy Office 2013 with App-V, you need to be familiar with Office 2013 and App-V.
-
-This topic contains the following sections:
-
-- [What to know before you start](#bkmk-before-you-start)
-
-- [Creating an Office 2013 package for App-V with the Office Deployment Tool](#bkmk-create-office-pkg)
-
-- [Publishing the Office package for App-V 5.1](#bkmk-pub-pkg-office)
-
-- [Customizing and managing Office App-V packages](#bkmk-custmz-manage-office-pkgs)
-
-## What to know before you start
-
-
-Before you deploy Office 2013 by using App-V, review the following planning information.
-
-### Supported Office versions and Office coexistence
-
-Use the following table to get information about supported versions of Office and about running coexisting versions of Office.
-
-
Considerations for installing different versions of Office on the same computer
-
-
-
-
-
-### Packaging, publishing, and deployment requirements
-
-Before you deploy Office by using App-V, review the following requirements.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
Requirement
-
-
-
-
-
Packaging
-
-
All of the Office applications that you want to deploy to users must be in a single package.
-
In App-V 5.1 and later, you must use the Office Deployment Tool to create packages. You cannot use the Sequencer.
-
If you are deploying Microsoft Visio 2013 and Microsoft Project 2013 along with Office, you must include them in the same package with Office. For more information, see Deploying Visio 2013 and Project 2013 with Office.
-
-
-
-
Publishing
-
-
You can publish only one Office package to each client computer.
-
You must publish the Office package globally. You cannot publish to the user.
-
-
-
-
Deploying any of the following products to a shared computer, for example, by using Remote Desktop Services:
You don’t use shared computer activation if you’re deploying a volume licensed product, such as:
-
-
Office Professional Plus 2013
-
Visio Professional 2013
-
Project Professional 2013
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Excluding Office applications from a package
-
-The following table describes the recommended methods for excluding specific Office applications from a package.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
Use the ExcludeApp setting when you create the package by using the Office Deployment Tool.
-
-
Enables you to exclude specific Office applications from the package when the Office Deployment Tool creates the package. For example, you can use this setting to create a package that contains only Microsoft Word.
Modify the DeploymentConfig.xml file after the package has been created. This file contains the default package settings for all users on a computer that is running the App-V Client.
-
-
-
-## Creating an Office 2013 package for App-V with the Office Deployment Tool
-
-
-Complete the following steps to create an Office 2013 package for App-V 5.1 or later.
-
-**Important**
-In App-V 5.1 and later, you must the Office Deployment Tool to create a package. You cannot use the Sequencer to create packages.
-
-
-
-### Review prerequisites for using the Office Deployment Tool
-
-The computer on which you are installing the Office Deployment Tool must have:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Prerequisite
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Prerequisite software
-
.Net Framework 4
-
-
-
Supported operating systems
-
-
64-bit version of Windows 8 or later
-
64-bit version of Windows 7
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Note**
-In this topic, the term “Office 2013 App-V package” refers to subscription licensing and volume licensing.
-
-
-
-### Create Office 2013 App-V Packages Using Office Deployment Tool
-
-You create Office 2013 App-V packages by using the Office Deployment Tool. The following instructions explain how to create an Office 2013 App-V package with Volume Licensing or Subscription Licensing.
-
-Create Office 2013 App-V packages on 64-bit Windows computers. Once created, the Office 2013 App-V package will run on 32-bit and 64-bit Windows 7, Windows 8.1, and Windows 10 computers.
-
-### Download the Office Deployment Tool
-
-Office 2013 App-V Packages are created using the Office Deployment Tool, which generates an Office 2013 App-V Package. The package cannot be created or modified through the App-V sequencer. To begin package creation:
-
-1. Download the [Office Deployment Tool for Click-to-Run](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=36778).
-
-2. Run the .exe file and extract its features into the desired location. To make this process easier, you can create a shared network folder where the features will be saved.
-
- Example: \\\\Server\\Office2013
-
-3. Check that a setup.exe and a configuration.xml file exist and are in the location you specified.
-
-### Download Office 2013 applications
-
-After you download the Office Deployment Tool, you can use it to get the latest Office 2013 applications. After getting the Office applications, you create the Office 2013 App-V package.
-
-The XML file that is included in the Office Deployment Tool specifies the product details, such as the languages and Office applications included.
-
-1. **Customize the sample XML configuration file:** Use the sample XML configuration file that you downloaded with the Office Deployment Tool to customize the Office applications:
-
- 1. Open the sample XML file in Notepad or your favorite text editor.
-
- 2. With the sample configuration.xml file open and ready for editing, you can specify products, languages, and the path to which you save the Office 2013 applications. The following is a basic example of the configuration.xml file:
-
- ```xml
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- ```
-
- **Note**
- The configuration XML is a sample XML file. The file includes lines that are commented out. You can “uncomment” these lines to customize additional settings with the file.
-
-
-
-~~~
- The above XML configuration file specifies that Office 2013 ProPlus 32-bit edition, including Visio ProPlus, will be downloaded in English to the \\\\server\\Office 2013, which is the location where Office applications will be saved to. Note that the Product ID of the applications will not affect the final licensing of Office. Office 2013 App-V packages with various licensing can be created from the same applications through specifying licensing in a later stage. The table below summarizes the customizable attributes and elements of XML file:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Input
-
Description
-
Example
-
-
-
-
-
Add element
-
Specifies the products and languages to include in the package.
-
N/A
-
-
-
OfficeClientEdition (attribute of Add element)
-
Specifies the edition of Office 2013 product to use: 32-bit or 64-bit. The operation fails if OfficeClientEdition is not set to a valid value.
-
OfficeClientEdition="32"
-
OfficeClientEdition="64"
-
-
-
Product element
-
Specifies the application. Project 2013 and Visio 2013 must be specified here as an added product to be included in the applications.
-
Product ID ="O365ProPlusRetail "
-
Product ID ="VisioProRetail"
-
Product ID ="ProjectProRetail"
-
Product ID ="ProPlusVolume"
-
Product ID ="VisioProVolume"
-
Product ID = "ProjectProVolume"
-
-
-
Language element
-
Specifies the language supported in the applications
-
Language ID="en-us"
-
-
-
Version (attribute of Add element)
-
Optional. Specifies a build to use for the package
-
Defaults to latest advertised build (as defined in v32.CAB at the Office source).
-
15.1.2.3
-
-
-
SourcePath (attribute of Add element)
-
Specifies the location in which the applications will be saved to.
-
Sourcepath = "\\Server\Office2013”
-
-
-
-
-
-
- After editing the configuration.xml file to specify the desired product, languages, and also the location which the Office 2013 applications will be saved onto, you can save the configuration file, for example, as Customconfig.xml.
-~~~
-
-2. **Download the applications into the specified location:** Use an elevated command prompt and a 64 bit operating system to download the Office 2013 applications that will later be converted into an App-V package. Below is an example command with description of details:
-
- ``` syntax
- \\server\Office2013\setup.exe /download \\server\Office2013\Customconfig.xml
- ```
-
- In the example:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
\server\Office2013
-
is the network share location that contains the Office Deployment Tool and the custom Configuration.xml file, Customconfig.xml.
-
-
-
Setup.exe
-
is the Office Deployment Tool.
-
-
-
/download
-
downloads the Office 2013 applications that you specify in the customConfig.xml file. These bits can be later converted in an Office 2013 App-V package with Volume Licensing.
-
-
-
\server\Office2013\Customconfig.xml
-
passes the XML configuration file required to complete the download process, in this example, customconfig.xml. After using the download command, Office applications should be found in the location specified in the configuration xml file, in this example \Server\Office2013.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Convert the Office applications into an App-V package
-
-After you download the Office 2013 applications through the Office Deployment Tool, use the Office Deployment Tool to convert them into an Office 2013 App-V package. Complete the steps that correspond to your licensing model.
-
-**Summary of what you’ll need to do:**
-
-- Create the Office 2013 App-V packages on 64-bit Windows computers. However, the package will run on 32-bit and 64-bit Windows 7, Windows 8, and Windows 10 computers.
-
-- Create an Office App-V package for either Subscription Licensing package or Volume Licensing by using the Office Deployment Tool, and then modify the CustomConfig.xml configuration file.
-
- The following table summarizes the values you need to enter in the CustomConfig.xml file for the licensing model you’re using. The steps in the sections that follow the table will specify the exact entries you need to make.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Product ID
-
Volume Licensing
-
Subscription Licensing
-
-
-
-
-
Office 2013
-
ProPlusVolume
-
O365ProPlusRetail
-
-
-
Office 2013 with Visio 2013
-
ProPlusVolume
-
VisioProVolume
-
O365ProPlusRetail
-
VisioProRetail
-
-
-
Office 2013 with Visio 2013 and Project 2013
-
ProPlusVolume
-
VisioProVolume
-
ProjectProVolume
-
O365ProPlusRetail
-
VisioProRetail
-
ProjectProRetail
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**How to convert the Office applications into an App-V package**
-
-1. In Notepad, reopen the CustomConfig.xml file, and make the following changes to the file:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
What to change the value to
-
-
-
-
-
SourcePath
-
Point to the Office applications downloaded earlier.
-
-
-
ProductID
-
Specify the type of licensing, as shown in the following examples:
In this example, the following changes were made to create a package with Volume licensing:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SourcePath
-
is the path, which was changed to point to the Office applications that were downloaded earlier.
-
-
-
Product ID
-
for Office was changed to ProPlusVolume.
-
-
-
Product ID
-
for Visio was changed to VisioProVolume.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
ExcludeApp (optional)
-
Lets you specify Office programs that you don’t want included in the App-V package that the Office Deployment Tool creates. For example, you can exclude Access and InfoPath.
-
-
-
PACKAGEGUID (optional)
-
By default, all App-V packages created by the Office Deployment Tool share the same App-V Package ID. You can use PACKAGEGUID to specify a different package ID for each package, which allows you to publish multiple App-V packages, created by the Office Deployment Tool, and manage them by using the App-V Server.
-
An example of when to use this parameter is if you create different packages for different users. For example, you can create a package with just Office 2013 for some users, and create another package with Office 2013 and Visio 2013 for another set of users.
-
- Note
Even if you use unique package IDs, you can still deploy only one App-V package to a single device.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-2. Use the /packager command to convert the Office applications to an Office 2013 App-V package.
-
- For example:
-
- ``` syntax
- \\server\Office2013\setup.exe /packager \\server\Office2013\Customconfig.xml \\server\share\Office2013AppV
- ```
-
- In the example:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
\server\Office2013
-
is the network share location that contains the Office Deployment Tool and the custom Configuration.xml file, Customconfig.xml.
-
-
-
Setup.exe
-
is the Office Deployment Tool.
-
-
-
/packager
-
creates the Office 2013 App-V package with Volume Licensing as specified in the customConfig.xml file.
-
-
-
\server\Office2013\Customconfig.xml
-
passes the configuration XML file (in this case customConfig) that has been prepared for the packaging stage.
-
-
-
\server\share\Office 2013AppV
-
specifies the location of the newly created Office App-V package.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-~~~
-After you run the **/packager** command, the following folders appear up in the directory where you specified the package should be saved:
-
-- **App-V Packages** – contains an Office 2013 App-V package and two deployment configuration files.
-
-- **WorkingDir**
-
-**Note**
-To troubleshoot any issues, see the log files in the %temp% directory (default).
-~~~
-
-
-
-3. Verify that the Office 2013 App-V package works correctly:
-
- 1. Publish the Office 2013 App-V package, which you created globally, to a test computer, and verify that the Office 2013 shortcuts appear.
-
- 2. Start a few Office 2013 applications, such as Excel or Word, to ensure that your package is working as expected.
-
-## Publishing the Office package for App-V 5.1
-
-
-Use the following information to publish an Office package.
-
-### Methods for publishing Office App-V packages
-
-Deploy the App-V package for Office 2013 by using the same methods you use for any other package:
-
-- System Center Configuration Manager
-
-- App-V Server
-
-- Stand-alone through PowerShell commands
-
-### Publishing prerequisites and requirements
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Prerequisite or requirement
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
Enable PowerShell scripting on the App-V clients
-
To publish Office 2013 packages, you must run a script.
-
Package scripts are disabled by default on App-V clients. To enable scripting, run the following PowerShell command:
Extension points in the Office App-V package require installation at the computer level.
-
When you publish at the computer level, no prerequisite actions or redistributables are needed, and the Office 2013 package globally enables its applications to work like natively installed Office, eliminating the need for administrators to customize packages.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### How to publish an Office package
-
-Run the following command to publish an Office package globally:
-
-- `Add-AppvClientPackage | Publish-AppvClientPackage –global`
-
-- From the Web Management Console on the App-V Server, you can add permissions to a group of computers instead of to a user group to enable packages to be published globally to the computers in the corresponding group.
-
-## Customizing and managing Office App-V packages
-
-
-To manage your Office App-V packages, use the same operations as you would for any other package, but there are a few exceptions, as outlined in the following sections.
-
-- [Enabling Office plug-ins by using connection groups](#bkmk-enable-office-plugins)
-
-- [Disabling Office 2013 applications](#bkmk-disable-office-apps)
-
-- [Disabling Office 2013 shortcuts](#bkmk-disable-shortcuts)
-
-- [Managing Office 2013 package upgrades](#bkmk-manage-office-pkg-upgrd)
-
-- [Managing Office 2013 licensing upgrades](#bkmk-manage-office-lic-upgrd)
-
-- [Deploying Visio 2013 and Project 2013 with Office](#bkmk-deploy-visio-project)
-
-### Enabling Office plug-ins by using connection groups
-
-Use the steps in this section to enable Office plug-ins with your Office package. To use Office plug-ins, you must use the App-V Sequencer to create a separate package that contains just the plug-ins. You cannot use the Office Deployment Tool to create the plug-ins package. You then create a connection group that contains the Office package and the plug-ins package, as described in the following steps.
-
-**To enable plug-ins for Office App-V packages**
-
-1. Add a Connection Group through App-V Server, System Center Configuration Manager, or a PowerShell cmdlet.
-
-2. Sequence your plug-ins using the App-V 5.1 Sequencer. Ensure that Office 2013 is installed on the computer being used to sequence the plug-in. It is recommended you use Office 365 ProPlus(non-virtual) on the sequencing computer when you sequence Office 2013 plug-ins.
-
-3. Create an App-V 5.1 package that includes the desired plug-ins.
-
-4. Add a Connection Group through App-V server, System Center Configuration Manager, or a PowerShell cmdlet.
-
-5. Add the Office 2013 App-V package and the plug-ins package you sequenced to the Connection Group you created.
-
- **Important**
- The order of the packages in the Connection Group determines the order in which the package contents are merged. In your Connection group descriptor file, add the Office 2013 App-V package first, and then add the plug-in App-V package.
-
-
-
-6. Ensure that both packages are published to the target computer and that the plug-in package is published globally to match the global settings of the published Office 2013 App-V package.
-
-7. Verify that the Deployment Configuration File of the plug-in package has the same settings that the Office 2013 App-V package has.
-
- Since the Office 2013 App-V package is integrated with the operating system, the plug-in package settings should match. You can search the Deployment Configuration File for “COM Mode” and ensure that your plug-ins package has that value set as “Integrated” and that both "InProcessEnabled" and "OutOfProcessEnabled" match the settings of the Office 2013 App-V package you published.
-
-8. Open the Deployment Configuration File and set the value for **Objects Enabled** to **false**.
-
-9. If you made any changes to the Deployment Configuration file after sequencing, ensure that the plug-in package is published with the file.
-
-10. Ensure that the Connection Group you created is enabled onto your desired computer. The Connection Group created will likely “pend” if the Office 2013 App-V package is in use when the Connection Group is enabled. If that happens, you have to reboot to successfully enable the Connection Group.
-
-11. After you successfully publish both packages and enable the Connection Group, start the target Office 2013 application and verify that the plug-in you published and added to the connection group works as expected.
-
-### Disabling Office 2013 applications
-
-You may want to disable specific applications in your Office App-V package. For instance, you can disable Access, but leave all other Office application main available. When you disable an application, the end user will no longer see the shortcut for that application. You do not have to re-sequence the application. When you change the Deployment Configuration File after the Office 2013 App-V package has been published, you will save the changes, add the Office 2013 App-V package, and then republish it with the new Deployment Configuration File to apply the new settings to Office 2013 App-V Package applications.
-
-**Note**
-To exclude specific Office applications (for example, Access and InfoPath) when you create the App-V package with the Office Deployment Tool, use the **ExcludeApp** setting. For more information, see [Reference for Click-to-Run configuration.xml file](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/jj219426.aspx).
-
-
-
-**To disable an Office 2013 application**
-
-1. Open a Deployment Configuration File with a text editor such as **Notepad** and search for “Applications."
-
-2. Search for the Office application you want to disable, for example, Access 2013.
-
-3. Change the value of "Enabled" from "true" to "false."
-
-4. Save the Deployment Configuration File.
-
-5. Add the Office 2013 App-V Package with the new Deployment Configuration File.
-
- ```xml
-
-
- InfoPath Filler 2013
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Lync 2013
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Access 2013
-
-
-
-
- ```
-
-6. Re-add the Office 2013 App-V package, and then republish it with the new Deployment Configuration File to apply the new settings to Office 2013 App-V Package applications.
-
-### Disabling Office 2013 shortcuts
-
-You may want to disable shortcuts for certain Office applications instead of unpublishing or removing the package. The following example shows how to disable shortcuts for Microsoft Access.
-
-**To disable shortcuts for Office 2013 applications**
-
-1. Open a Deployment Configuration File in Notepad and search for “Shortcuts”.
-
-2. To disable certain shortcuts, delete or comment out the specific shortcuts you don’t want. You must keep the subsystem present and enabled. For example, in the example below, delete the Microsoft Access shortcuts, while keeping the subsystems <shortcut> </shortcut> intact to disable the Microsoft Access shortcut.
-
- ``` syntax
- Shortcuts
-
- -->
-
-
-
-
- [{Common Programs}]\Microsoft Office 2013\Access 2013.lnk
- [{AppvPackageRoot}])office15\MSACCESS.EXE
- [{Windows}]\Installer\{90150000-000F-0000-0000-000000FF1CE)\accicons.exe.Ø.ico
-
-
- Microsoft.Office.MSACCESS.EXE.15
- true
- Build a professional app quickly to manage data.
- l
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\office15\MSACCESS.EXE
-
- ```
-
-3. Save the Deployment Configuration File.
-
-4. Republish Office 2013 App-V Package with new Deployment Configuration File.
-
-Many additional settings can be changed through modifying the Deployment Configuration for App-V packages, for example, file type associations, Virtual File System, and more. For additional information on how to use Deployment Configuration Files to change App-V package settings, refer to the additional resources section at the end of this document.
-
-### Managing Office 2013 package upgrades
-
-To upgrade an Office 2013 package, use the Office Deployment Tool. To upgrade a previously deployed Office 2013 package, perform the following steps.
-
-**How to upgrade a previously deployed Office 2013 package**
-
-1. Create a new Office 2013 package through the Office Deployment Tool that uses the most recent Office 2013 application software. The most recent Office 2013 bits can always be obtained through the download stage of creating an Office 2013 App-V Package. The newly created Office 2013 package will have the most recent updates and a new Version ID. All packages created using the Office Deployment Tool have the same lineage.
-
- **Note**
- Office App-V packages have two Version IDs:
-
- - An Office 2013 App-V Package Version ID that is unique across all packages created using the Office Deployment Tool.
-
- - A second App-V Package Version ID, x.x.x.x for example, in the AppX manifest that will only change if there is a new version of Office itself. For example, if a new Office 2013 release with upgrades is available, and a package is created through the Office Deployment Tool to incorporate these upgrades, the X.X.X.X version ID will change to reflect that the Office version itself has changed. The App-V server will use the X.X.X.X version ID to differentiate this package and recognize that it contains new upgrades to the previously published package, and as a result, publish it as an upgrade to the existing Office 2013 package.
-
-
-
-2. Globally publish the newly created Office 2013 App-V Packages onto computers where you would like to apply the new updates. Since the new package has the same lineage of the older Office 2013 App-V Package, publishing the new package with the updates will only apply the new changes to the old package, and thus will be fast.
-
-3. Upgrades will be applied in the same manner of any globally published App-V Packages. Because applications will probably be in use, upgrades might be delayed until the computer is rebooted.
-
-### Managing Office 2013 licensing upgrades
-
-If a new Office 2013 App-V Package has a different license than the Office 2013 App-V Package currently deployed. For instance, the Office 2013 package deployed is a subscription based Office 2013 and the new Office 2013 package is Volume Licensing based, the following instructions must be followed to ensure smooth licensing upgrade:
-
-**How to upgrade an Office 2013 License**
-
-1. Unpublish the already deployed Office 2013 Subscription Licensing App-V package.
-
-2. Remove the unpublished Office 2013 Subscription Licensing App-V package.
-
-3. Restart the computer.
-
-4. Add the new Office 2013 App-V Package Volume Licensing.
-
-5. Publish the added Office 2013 App-V Package with Volume Licensing.
-
-An Office 2013 App-V Package with your chosen licensing will be successfully deployed.
-
-### Deploying Visio 2013 and Project 2013 with Office
-
-The following table describes the requirements and options for deploying Visio 2013 and Project 2013 with Office.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
How do I package and publish Visio 2013 and Project 2013 with Office?
-
You must include Visio 2013 and Project 2013 in the same package with Office.
How can I deploy Visio 2013 and Project 2013 to specific users?
-
Use one of the following methods:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
If you want to...
-
...then use this method
-
-
-
-
-
Create two different packages and deploy each one to a different group of users
-
Create and deploy the following packages:
-
-
A package that contains only Office - deploy to computers whose users need only Office.
-
A package that contains Office, Visio, and Project - deploy to computers whose users need all three applications.
-
-
-
-
If you want only one package for the whole organization, or if you have users who share computers:
-
Follows these steps:
-
-
Create a package that contains Office, Visio, and Project.
-
Deploy the package to all users.
-
Use Microsoft AppLocker to prevent specific users from using Visio and Project.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Additional resources
-
-
-**Office 2013 App-V Packages Additional Resources**
-
-[Office Deployment Tool for Click-to-Run](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkID=330672)
-
-[Supported scenarios for deploying Microsoft Office as a sequenced App-V Package](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330680)
-
-**Office 2010 App-V Packages**
-
-[Microsoft Office 2010 Sequencing Kit for Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330681)
-
-[Known issues when you create or use an App-V 5.0 Office 2010 package](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330682)
-
-[How to sequence Microsoft Office 2010 in Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330676)
-
-**Connection Groups**
-
-[Deploying Connection Groups in Microsoft App-V v5](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330683)
-
-[Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups51.md)
-
-**Dynamic Configuration**
-
-[About App-V 5.1 Dynamic Configuration](about-app-v-51-dynamic-configuration.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-microsoft-office-2016-by-using-app-v.md b/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-microsoft-office-2016-by-using-app-v.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f66484192f..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-microsoft-office-2016-by-using-app-v.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,796 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying Microsoft Office 2016 by Using App-V
-description: Deploying Microsoft Office 2016 by Using App-V
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: cc675cde-cb8d-4b7c-a700-6104b78f1d89
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 07/25/2017
----
-
-
-# Deploying Microsoft Office 2016 by Using App-V
-
-
-Use the information in this article to use Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0, or later versions, to deliver Microsoft Office 2016 as a virtualized application to computers in your organization. For information about using App-V to deliver Office 2013, see [Deploying Microsoft Office 2013 by Using App-V](deploying-microsoft-office-2013-by-using-app-v.md). For information about using App-V to deliver Office 2010, see [Deploying Microsoft Office 2010 by Using App-V](deploying-microsoft-office-2010-by-using-app-v.md).
-
-This topic contains the following sections:
-
-- [What to know before you start](#bkmk-before-you-start)
-
-- [Creating an Office 2016 package for App-V with the Office Deployment Tool](#bkmk-create-office-pkg)
-
-- [Publishing the Office package for App-V 5.0](#bkmk-pub-pkg-office)
-
-- [Customizing and managing Office App-V packages](#bkmk-custmz-manage-office-pkgs)
-
-## What to know before you start
-
-
-Before you deploy Office 2016 by using App-V, review the following planning information.
-
-### Supported Office versions and Office coexistence
-
-Use the following table to get information about supported versions of Office and about running coexisting versions of Office.
-
-
Considerations for installing different versions of Office on the same computer
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Packaging, publishing, and deployment requirements
-
-Before you deploy Office by using App-V, review the following requirements.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
Requirement
-
-
-
-
-
Packaging
-
-
-
All of the Office applications that you want to deploy to users must be in a single package.
-
In App-V 5.0 and later, you must use the Office Deployment Tool to create packages. You cannot use the Sequencer.
-
If you are deploying Microsoft Visio 2016 and Microsoft Project 2016 along with Office, you must include them in the same package with Office. For more information, see Deploying Visio 2016 and Project 2016 with Office.
-
-
-
-
Publishing
-
-
You can publish only one Office package to each client computer.
-
You must publish the Office package globally. You cannot publish to the user.
-
-
-
-
Deploying any of the following products to a shared computer, for example, by using Remote Desktop Services:
-
-
-
-### Excluding Office applications from a package
-
-The following table describes the recommended methods for excluding specific Office applications from a package.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
Use the ExcludeApp setting when you create the package by using the Office Deployment Tool.
-
-
Enables you to exclude specific Office applications from the package when the Office Deployment Tool creates the package. For example, you can use this setting to create a package that contains only Microsoft Word.
Modify the DeploymentConfig.xml file after the package has been created. This file contains the default package settings for all users on a computer that is running the App-V Client.
-
-
-
-## Creating an Office 2016 package for App-V with the Office Deployment Tool
-
-
-Complete the following steps to create an Office 2016 package for App-V 5.0 or later.
-
->**Important** In App-V 5.0 and later, you must use the Office Deployment Tool to create a package. You cannot use the Sequencer to create packages.
-
-### Review prerequisites for using the Office Deployment Tool
-
-The computer on which you are installing the Office Deployment Tool must have:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Prerequisite
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Prerequisite software
-
.Net Framework 4
-
-
-
Supported operating systems
-
-
64-bit version of Windows 10
-
64-bit version of Windows 8 or 8.1
-
64-bit version of Windows 7
-
-
-
-
-
-
->**Note** In this topic, the term “Office 2016 App-V package” refers to subscription licensing.
-
-
-### Create Office 2016 App-V Packages Using Office Deployment Tool
-
-You create Office 2016 App-V packages by using the Office Deployment Tool. The following instructions explain how to create an Office 2016 App-V package with Subscription Licensing.
-
-Create Office 2016 App-V packages on 64-bit Windows computers. Once created, the Office 2016 App-V package will run on 32-bit and 64-bit Windows 7, Windows 8.1, and Windows 10 computers.
-
-### Download the Office Deployment Tool
-
-Office 2016 App-V Packages are created using the Office Deployment Tool, which generates an Office 2016 App-V Package. The package cannot be created or modified through the App-V sequencer. To begin package creation:
-
-1. Download the [Office 2016 Deployment Tool for Click-to-Run](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=49117).
-
-> **Important** You must use the Office 2016 Deployment Tool to create Office 2016 App-V Packages.
-> 2. Run the .exe file and extract its features into the desired location. To make this process easier, you can create a shared network folder where the features will be saved.
-
- Example: \\\\Server\\Office2016
-
-3. Check that a setup.exe and a configuration.xml file exist and are in the location you specified.
-
-### Download Office 2016 applications
-
-After you download the Office Deployment Tool, you can use it to get the latest Office 2016 applications. After getting the Office applications, you create the Office 2016 App-V package.
-
-The XML file that is included in the Office Deployment Tool specifies the product details, such as the languages and Office applications included.
-
-1. **Customize the sample XML configuration file:** Use the sample XML configuration file that you downloaded with the Office Deployment Tool to customize the Office applications:
-
- 1. Open the sample XML file in Notepad or your favorite text editor.
-
- 2. With the sample configuration.xml file open and ready for editing, you can specify products, languages, and the path to which you save the Office 2016 applications. The following is a basic example of the configuration.xml file:
-
- ```xml
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- ```
-
- >**Note** The configuration XML is a sample XML file. The file includes lines that are commented out. You can “uncomment” these lines to customize additional settings with the file. To “uncomment” these lines, remove the "" from the end of the line.
-
- The above XML configuration file specifies that Office 2016 ProPlus 32-bit edition, including Visio ProPlus, will be downloaded in English to the \\\\server\\Office 2016, which is the location where Office applications will be saved to. Note that the Product ID of the applications will not affect the final licensing of Office. Office 2016 App-V packages with various licensing can be created from the same applications through specifying licensing in a later stage. The table below summarizes the customizable attributes and elements of XML file:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Input
-
Description
-
Example
-
-
-
-
-
Add element
-
Specifies the products and languages to include in the package.
-
N/A
-
-
-
OfficeClientEdition (attribute of Add element)
-
Specifies the edition of Office 2016 product to use: 32-bit or 64-bit. The operation fails if OfficeClientEdition is not set to a valid value.
Specifies the language supported in the applications
-
Language ID="en-us"
-
-
-
Version (attribute of Add element)
-
Optional. Specifies a build to use for the package
-
Defaults to latest advertised build (as defined in v32.CAB at the Office source).
-
16.1.2.3
-
-
-
SourcePath (attribute of Add element)
-
Specifies the location in which the applications will be saved to.
-
Sourcepath = "\Server\Office2016”
-
-
-
Channel (attribute of Add element)
-
Optional. Specifies the update channel for the product that you want to download or install.
For more information about update channels, see Overview of update channels for Office 365 ProPlus.
-
Channel="Deferred"
-
-
-
-
- After editing the configuration.xml file to specify the desired product, languages, and also the location which the Office 2016 applications will be saved onto, you can save the configuration file, for example, as Customconfig.xml.
-
-2. **Download the applications into the specified location:** Use an elevated command prompt and a 64 bit operating system to download the Office 2016 applications that will later be converted into an App-V package. Below is an example command with a description of details:
-
- ``` syntax
- \\server\Office2016\setup.exe /download \\server\Office2016\Customconfig.xml
- ```
-
- In the example:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
\server\Office2016
-
is the network share location that contains the Office Deployment Tool and the custom Configuration.xml file, Customconfig.xml.
-
-
-
Setup.exe
-
is the Office Deployment Tool.
-
-
-
/download
-
downloads the Office 2016 applications that you specify in the customConfig.xml file. These bits can be later converted in an Office 2016 App-V package with Volume Licensing.
-
-
-
\server\Office2016\Customconfig.xml
-
passes the XML configuration file required to complete the download process, in this example, customconfig.xml. After using the download command, Office applications should be found in the location specified in the configuration xml file, in this example \Server\Office2016.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Convert the Office applications into an App-V package
-
-After you download the Office 2016 applications through the Office Deployment Tool, use the Office Deployment Tool to convert them into an Office 2016 App-V package. Complete the steps that correspond to your licensing model.
-
-**Summary of what you’ll need to do:**
-
-- Create the Office 2016 App-V packages on 64-bit Windows computers. However, the package will run on 32-bit and 64-bit Windows 7, Windows 8 or 8.1, and Windows 10 computers.
-
-- Create an Office App-V package for Subscription Licensing package by using the Office Deployment Tool, and then modify the CustomConfig.xml configuration file.
-
- The following table summarizes the values you need to enter in the CustomConfig.xml file for the licensing model you’re using. The steps in the sections that follow the table will specify the exact entries you need to make.
-
->**Note** You can use the Office Deployment Tool to create App-V packages for Office 365 ProPlus. Creating packages for the volume-licensed versions of Office Professional Plus or Office Standard is not supported.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Product ID
-
Subscription Licensing
-
-
-
-
-
Office 2016
-
O365ProPlusRetail
-
-
-
Office 2016 with Visio 2016
-
O365ProPlusRetail
-
VisioProRetail
-
-
-
Office 2016 with Visio 2016 and Project 2016
-
O365ProPlusRetail
-
VisioProRetail
-
ProjectProRetail
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**How to convert the Office applications into an App-V package**
-
-1. In Notepad, reopen the CustomConfig.xml file, and make the following changes to the file:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
What to change the value to
-
-
-
-
-
SourcePath
-
Point to the Office applications downloaded earlier.
-
-
-
ProductID
-
Specify Subscription licensing, as shown in the following example:
In this example, the following changes were made to create a package with Subscription licensing:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SourcePath
-
is the path, which was changed to point to the Office applications that were downloaded earlier.
-
-
-
Product ID
-
for Office was changed to O365ProPlusRetail.
-
-
-
Product ID
-
for Visio was changed to VisioProRetail.
-
-
-
-
-
-
ExcludeApp (optional)
-
Lets you specify Office programs that you don’t want included in the App-V package that the Office Deployment Tool creates. For example, you can exclude Access and InfoPath.
-
-
-
PACKAGEGUID (optional)
-
By default, all App-V packages created by the Office Deployment Tool share the same App-V Package ID. You can use PACKAGEGUID to specify a different package ID for each package, which allows you to publish multiple App-V packages, created by the Office Deployment Tool, and manage them by using the App-V Server.
-
An example of when to use this parameter is if you create different packages for different users. For example, you can create a package with just Office 2016 for some users, and create another package with Office 2016 and Visio 2016 for another set of users.
- >Note Even if you use unique package IDs, you can still deploy only one App-V package to a single device.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-2. Use the /packager command to convert the Office applications to an Office 2016 App-V package.
-
- For example:
-
- ``` syntax
- \\server\Office2016\setup.exe /packager \\server\Office2016\Customconfig.xml \\server\share\Office2016AppV
- ```
-
- In the example:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
\server\Office2016
-
is the network share location that contains the Office Deployment Tool and the custom Configuration.xml file, Customconfig.xml.
-
-
-
Setup.exe
-
is the Office Deployment Tool.
-
-
-
/packager
-
creates the Office 2016 App-V package with the type of licensing specified in the customConfig.xml file.
-
-
-
\server\Office2016\Customconfig.xml
-
passes the configuration XML file (in this case customConfig) that has been prepared for the packaging stage.
-
-
-
\server\share\Office 2016AppV
-
specifies the location of the newly created Office App-V package.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-~~~
-After you run the **/packager** command, the following folders appear up in the directory where you specified the package should be saved:
-
-- **App-V Packages** – contains an Office 2016 App-V package and two deployment configuration files.
-
-- **WorkingDir**
-
-**Note** To troubleshoot any issues, see the log files in the %temp% directory (default).
-~~~
-
-
-
-3. Verify that the Office 2016 App-V package works correctly:
-
- 1. Publish the Office 2016 App-V package, which you created globally, to a test computer, and verify that the Office 2016 shortcuts appear.
-
- 2. Start a few Office 2016 applications, such as Excel or Word, to ensure that your package is working as expected.
-
-## Publishing the Office package for App-V
-
-
-Use the following information to publish an Office package.
-
-### Methods for publishing Office App-V packages
-
-Deploy the App-V package for Office 2016 by using the same methods you use for any other package:
-
-- System Center Configuration Manager
-
-- App-V Server
-
-- Stand-alone through PowerShell commands
-
-### Publishing prerequisites and requirements
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Prerequisite or requirement
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
Enable PowerShell scripting on the App-V clients
-
To publish Office 2016 packages, you must run a script.
-
Package scripts are disabled by default on App-V clients. To enable scripting, run the following PowerShell command:
Extension points in the Office App-V package require installation at the computer level.
-
When you publish at the computer level, no prerequisite actions or redistributables are needed, and the Office 2016 package globally enables its applications to work like natively installed Office, eliminating the need for administrators to customize packages.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### How to publish an Office package
-
-Run the following command to publish an Office package globally:
-
-- `Add-AppvClientPackage | Publish-AppvClientPackage –global`
-
-- From the Web Management Console on the App-V Server, you can add permissions to a group of computers instead of to a user group to enable packages to be published globally to the computers in the corresponding group.
-
-## Customizing and managing Office App-V packages
-
-
-To manage your Office App-V packages, use the same operations as you would for any other package, but there are a few exceptions, as outlined in the following sections.
-
-- [Enabling Office plug-ins by using connection groups](#bkmk-enable-office-plugins)
-
-- [Disabling Office 2016 applications](#bkmk-disable-office-apps)
-
-- [Disabling Office 2016 shortcuts](#bkmk-disable-shortcuts)
-
-- [Managing Office 2016 package upgrades](#bkmk-manage-office-pkg-upgrd)
-
-- [Deploying Visio 2016 and Project 2016 with Office](#bkmk-deploy-visio-project)
-
-### Enabling Office plug-ins by using connection groups
-
-Use the steps in this section to enable Office plug-ins with your Office package. To use Office plug-ins, you must use the App-V Sequencer to create a separate package that contains just the plug-ins. You cannot use the Office Deployment Tool to create the plug-ins package. You then create a connection group that contains the Office package and the plug-ins package, as described in the following steps.
-
-**To enable plug-ins for Office App-V packages**
-
-1. Add a Connection Group through App-V Server, System Center Configuration Manager, or a PowerShell cmdlet.
-
-2. Sequence your plug-ins using the App-V Sequencer. Ensure that Office 2016 is installed on the computer being used to sequence the plug-in. It is recommended you use Office 365 ProPlus(non-virtual) on the sequencing computer when you sequence Office 2016 plug-ins.
-
-3. Create an App-V package that includes the desired plug-ins.
-
-4. Add a Connection Group through App-V server, System Center Configuration Manager, or a PowerShell cmdlet.
-
-5. Add the Office 2016 App-V package and the plug-ins package you sequenced to the Connection Group you created.
-
- >**Important** The order of the packages in the Connection Group determines the order in which the package contents are merged. In your Connection group descriptor file, add the Office 2016 App-V package first, and then add the plug-in App-V package.
-
-
-
-6. Ensure that both packages are published to the target computer and that the plug-in package is published globally to match the global settings of the published Office 2016 App-V package.
-
-7. Verify that the Deployment Configuration File of the plug-in package has the same settings that the Office 2016 App-V package has.
-
- Since the Office 2016 App-V package is integrated with the operating system, the plug-in package settings should match. You can search the Deployment Configuration File for “COM Mode” and ensure that your plug-ins package has that value set as “Integrated” and that both "InProcessEnabled" and "OutOfProcessEnabled" match the settings of the Office 2016 App-V package you published.
-
-8. Open the Deployment Configuration File and set the value for **Objects Enabled** to **false**.
-
-9. If you made any changes to the Deployment Configuration file after sequencing, ensure that the plug-in package is published with the file.
-
-10. Ensure that the Connection Group you created is enabled onto your desired computer. The Connection Group created will likely “pend” if the Office 2016 App-V package is in use when the Connection Group is enabled. If that happens, you have to reboot to successfully enable the Connection Group.
-
-11. After you successfully publish both packages and enable the Connection Group, start the target Office 2016 application and verify that the plug-in you published and added to the connection group works as expected.
-
-### Disabling Office 2016 applications
-
-You may want to disable specific applications in your Office App-V package. For instance, you can disable Access, but leave all other Office application main available. When you disable an application, the end user will no longer see the shortcut for that application. You do not have to re-sequence the application. When you change the Deployment Configuration File after the Office 2016 App-V package has been published, you will save the changes, add the Office 2016 App-V package, and then republish it with the new Deployment Configuration File to apply the new settings to Office 2016 App-V Package applications.
-
->**Note** To exclude specific Office applications (for example, Access and InfoPath) when you create the App-V package with the Office Deployment Tool, use the **ExcludeApp** setting.
-
-
-**To disable an Office 2016 application**
-
-1. Open a Deployment Configuration File with a text editor such as **Notepad** and search for “Applications."
-
-2. Search for the Office application you want to disable, for example, Access 2016.
-
-3. Change the value of "Enabled" from "true" to "false."
-
-4. Save the Deployment Configuration File.
-
-5. Add the Office 2016 App-V Package with the new Deployment Configuration File.
-
- ```xml
-
-
- Lync 2016
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Access 2016
-
-
-
-
- ```
-
-6. Re-add the Office 2016 App-V package, and then republish it with the new Deployment Configuration File to apply the new settings to Office 2016 App-V Package applications.
-
-### Disabling Office 2016 shortcuts
-
-You may want to disable shortcuts for certain Office applications instead of unpublishing or removing the package. The following example shows how to disable shortcuts for Microsoft Access.
-
-**To disable shortcuts for Office 2016 applications**
-
-1. Open a Deployment Configuration File in Notepad and search for “Shortcuts”.
-
-2. To disable certain shortcuts, delete or comment out the specific shortcuts you don’t want. You must keep the subsystem present and enabled. For example, in the example below, delete the Microsoft Access shortcuts, while keeping the subsystems <shortcut> </shortcut> intact to disable the Microsoft Access shortcut.
-
- ``` syntax
- Shortcuts
-
- -->
-
-
-
-
- [{Common Programs}]\Microsoft Office 2016\Access 2016.lnk
- [{AppvPackageRoot}])office16\MSACCESS.EXE
- [{Windows}]\Installer\{90150000-000F-0000-0000-000000FF1CE)\accicons.exe.Ø.ico
-
-
- Microsoft.Office.MSACCESS.EXE.15
- true
- Build a professional app quickly to manage data.
- l
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\office16\MSACCESS.EXE
-
- ```
-
-3. Save the Deployment Configuration File.
-
-4. Republish Office 2016 App-V Package with new Deployment Configuration File.
-
-Many additional settings can be changed through modifying the Deployment Configuration for App-V packages, for example, file type associations, Virtual File System, and more. For additional information on how to use Deployment Configuration Files to change App-V package settings, refer to the additional resources section at the end of this document.
-
-### Managing Office 2016 package upgrades
-
-To upgrade an Office 2016 package, use the Office Deployment Tool. To upgrade a previously deployed Office 2016 package, perform the following steps.
-
-**How to upgrade a previously deployed Office 2016 package**
-
-1. Create a new Office 2016 package through the Office Deployment Tool that uses the most recent Office 2016 application software. The most recent Office 2016 bits can always be obtained through the download stage of creating an Office 2016 App-V Package. The newly created Office 2016 package will have the most recent updates and a new Version ID. All packages created using the Office Deployment Tool have the same lineage.
-
- > **Note** Office App-V packages have two Version IDs:
- >
- >
An Office 2016 App-V Package Version ID that is unique across all packages created using the Office Deployment Tool.
- >
A second App-V Package Version ID, x.x.x.x for example, in the AppX manifest that will only change if there is a new version of Office itself. For example, if a new Office 2016 release with upgrades is available, and a package is created through the Office Deployment Tool to incorporate these upgrades, the X.X.X.X version ID will change to reflect that the Office version itself has changed. The App-V server will use the X.X.X.X version ID to differentiate this package and recognize that it contains new upgrades to the previously published package, and as a result, publish it as an upgrade to the existing Office 2016 package.
- >
-
-
-2. Globally publish the newly created Office 2016 App-V Packages onto computers where you would like to apply the new updates. Since the new package has the same lineage of the older Office 2016 App-V Package, publishing the new package with the updates will only apply the new changes to the old package, and thus will be fast.
-
-3. Upgrades will be applied in the same manner of any globally published App-V Packages. Because applications will probably be in use, upgrades might be delayed until the computer is rebooted.
-
-
-### Deploying Visio 2016 and Project 2016 with Office
-
-The following table describes the requirements and options for deploying Visio 2016 and Project 2016 with Office.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
How do I package and publish Visio 2016 and Project 2016 with Office?
-
You must include Visio 2016 and Project 2016 in the same package with Office.
-
If you aren’t deploying Office, you can create a package that contains Visio and/or Project, as long as you follow the packaging, publishing, and deployment requirements described in this topic.
-
-
-
How can I deploy Visio 2016 and Project 2016 to specific users?
-
Use one of the following methods:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
If you want to...
-
...then use this method
-
-
-
-
-
Create two different packages and deploy each one to a different group of users
-
Create and deploy the following packages:
-
-
A package that contains only Office - deploy to computers whose users need only Office.
-
A package that contains Office, Visio, and Project - deploy to computers whose users need all three applications.
-
-
-
-
If you want only one package for the whole organization, or if you have users who share computers:
-
Follows these steps:
-
-
Create a package that contains Office, Visio, and Project.
-
Deploy the package to all users.
-
Use Microsoft AppLocker to prevent specific users from using Visio and Project.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Additional resources
-
-
-[Deploying Microsoft Office 2013 by Using App-V](deploying-microsoft-office-2013-by-using-app-v.md)
-
-[Deploying Microsoft Office 2010 by Using App-V](deploying-microsoft-office-2010-by-using-app-v.md)
-
-[Office 2016 Deployment Tool for Click-to-Run](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=49117)
-
-**Connection Groups**
-
-[Deploying Connection Groups in Microsoft App-V v5](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330683)
-
-[Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups.md)
-
-**Dynamic Configuration**
-
-[About App-V 5.1 Dynamic Configuration](about-app-v-51-dynamic-configuration.md)
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-microsoft-office-2016-by-using-app-v51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-microsoft-office-2016-by-using-app-v51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 317e8df4e7..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-microsoft-office-2016-by-using-app-v51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,795 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying Microsoft Office 2016 by Using App-V
-description: Deploying Microsoft Office 2016 by Using App-V
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: e0f4876-da99-4b89-977e-2fb6e89ea3d3
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 04/19/2017
----
-
-
-# Deploying Microsoft Office 2016 by Using App-V
-
-
-Use the information in this article to use Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1, or later versions, to deliver Microsoft Office 2016 as a virtualized application to computers in your organization. For information about using App-V to deliver Office 2013, see [Deploying Microsoft Office 2013 by Using App-V](deploying-microsoft-office-2013-by-using-app-v51.md). For information about using App-V to deliver Office 2010, see [Deploying Microsoft Office 2010 by Using App-V](deploying-microsoft-office-2010-by-using-app-v51.md).
-
-This topic contains the following sections:
-
-- [What to know before you start](#bkmk-before-you-start)
-
-- [Creating an Office 2016 package for App-V with the Office Deployment Tool](#bkmk-create-office-pkg)
-
-- [Publishing the Office package for App-V 5.1](#bkmk-pub-pkg-office)
-
-- [Customizing and managing Office App-V packages](#bkmk-custmz-manage-office-pkgs)
-
-## What to know before you start
-
-
-Before you deploy Office 2016 by using App-V, review the following planning information.
-
-### Supported Office versions and Office coexistence
-
-Use the following table to get information about supported versions of Office and about running coexisting versions of Office.
-
-
Considerations for installing different versions of Office on the same computer
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Packaging, publishing, and deployment requirements
-
-Before you deploy Office by using App-V, review the following requirements.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
Requirement
-
-
-
-
-
Packaging
-
-
-
All of the Office applications that you want to deploy to users must be in a single package.
-
In App-V 5.1 and later, you must use the Office Deployment Tool to create packages. You cannot use the Sequencer.
-
If you are deploying Microsoft Visio 2016 and Microsoft Project 2016 along with Office, you must include them in the same package with Office. For more information, see Deploying Visio 2016 and Project 2016 with Office.
-
-
-
-
Publishing
-
-
You can publish only one Office package to each client computer.
-
You must publish the Office package globally. You cannot publish to the user.
-
-
-
-
Deploying any of the following products to a shared computer, for example, by using Remote Desktop Services:
-
-
-
-### Excluding Office applications from a package
-
-The following table describes the recommended methods for excluding specific Office applications from a package.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
Use the ExcludeApp setting when you create the package by using the Office Deployment Tool.
-
-
Enables you to exclude specific Office applications from the package when the Office Deployment Tool creates the package. For example, you can use this setting to create a package that contains only Microsoft Word.
Modify the DeploymentConfig.xml file after the package has been created. This file contains the default package settings for all users on a computer that is running the App-V Client.
-
-
-
-## Creating an Office 2016 package for App-V with the Office Deployment Tool
-
-
-Complete the following steps to create an Office 2016 package for App-V 5.1 or later.
-
->**Important** In App-V 5.1 and later, you must use the Office Deployment Tool to create a package. You cannot use the Sequencer to create packages.
-
-### Review prerequisites for using the Office Deployment Tool
-
-The computer on which you are installing the Office Deployment Tool must have:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Prerequisite
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Prerequisite software
-
.Net Framework 4
-
-
-
Supported operating systems
-
-
64-bit version of Windows 10
-
64-bit version of Windows 8 or 8.1
-
64-bit version of Windows 7
-
-
-
-
-
-
->**Note** In this topic, the term “Office 2016 App-V package” refers to subscription licensing.
-
-
-### Create Office 2016 App-V Packages Using Office Deployment Tool
-
-You create Office 2016 App-V packages by using the Office Deployment Tool. The following instructions explain how to create an Office 2016 App-V package with Subscription Licensing.
-
-Create Office 2016 App-V packages on 64-bit Windows computers. Once created, the Office 2016 App-V package will run on 32-bit and 64-bit Windows 7, Windows 8.1, and Windows 10 computers.
-
-### Download the Office Deployment Tool
-
-Office 2016 App-V Packages are created using the Office Deployment Tool, which generates an Office 2016 App-V Package. The package cannot be created or modified through the App-V sequencer. To begin package creation:
-
-1. Download the [Office 2016 Deployment Tool for Click-to-Run](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=49117).
-
-> **Important** You must use the Office 2016 Deployment Tool to create Office 2016 App-V Packages.
-> 2. Run the .exe file and extract its features into the desired location. To make this process easier, you can create a shared network folder where the features will be saved.
-
- Example: \\\\Server\\Office2016
-
-3. Check that a setup.exe and a configuration.xml file exist and are in the location you specified.
-
-### Download Office 2016 applications
-
-After you download the Office Deployment Tool, you can use it to get the latest Office 2016 applications. After getting the Office applications, you create the Office 2016 App-V package.
-
-The XML file that is included in the Office Deployment Tool specifies the product details, such as the languages and Office applications included.
-
-1. **Customize the sample XML configuration file:** Use the sample XML configuration file that you downloaded with the Office Deployment Tool to customize the Office applications:
-
- 1. Open the sample XML file in Notepad or your favorite text editor.
-
- 2. With the sample configuration.xml file open and ready for editing, you can specify products, languages, and the path to which you save the Office 2016 applications. The following is a basic example of the configuration.xml file:
-
- ```xml
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- ```
-
- >**Note** The configuration XML is a sample XML file. The file includes lines that are commented out. You can “uncomment” these lines to customize additional settings with the file. To “uncomment” these lines, remove the "" from the end of the line.
-
- The above XML configuration file specifies that Office 2016 ProPlus 32-bit edition, including Visio ProPlus, will be downloaded in English to the \\\\server\\Office 2016, which is the location where Office applications will be saved to. Note that the Product ID of the applications will not affect the final licensing of Office. Office 2016 App-V packages with various licensing can be created from the same applications through specifying licensing in a later stage. The table below summarizes the customizable attributes and elements of XML file:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Input
-
Description
-
Example
-
-
-
-
-
Add element
-
Specifies the products and languages to include in the package.
-
N/A
-
-
-
OfficeClientEdition (attribute of Add element)
-
Specifies the edition of Office 2016 product to use: 32-bit or 64-bit. The operation fails if OfficeClientEdition is not set to a valid value.
Specifies the language supported in the applications
-
Language ID="en-us"
-
-
-
Version (attribute of Add element)
-
Optional. Specifies a build to use for the package
-
Defaults to latest advertised build (as defined in v32.CAB at the Office source).
-
16.1.2.3
-
-
-
SourcePath (attribute of Add element)
-
Specifies the location in which the applications will be saved to.
-
Sourcepath = "\Server\Office2016”
-
-
-
Branch (attribute of Add element)
-
Optional. Specifies the update branch for the product that you want to download or install.
For more information about update branches, see Overview of update branches for Office 365 ProPlus.
-
Branch = "Business"
-
-
-
-
- After editing the configuration.xml file to specify the desired product, languages, and also the location which the Office 2016 applications will be saved onto, you can save the configuration file, for example, as Customconfig.xml.
-
-2. **Download the applications into the specified location:** Use an elevated command prompt and a 64 bit operating system to download the Office 2016 applications that will later be converted into an App-V package. Below is an example command with a description of details:
-
- ``` syntax
- \\server\Office2016\setup.exe /download \\server\Office2016\Customconfig.xml
- ```
-
- In the example:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
\server\Office2016
-
is the network share location that contains the Office Deployment Tool and the custom Configuration.xml file, Customconfig.xml.
-
-
-
Setup.exe
-
is the Office Deployment Tool.
-
-
-
/download
-
downloads the Office 2016 applications that you specify in the customConfig.xml file. These bits can be later converted in an Office 2016 App-V package with Volume Licensing.
-
-
-
\server\Office2016\Customconfig.xml
-
passes the XML configuration file required to complete the download process, in this example, customconfig.xml. After using the download command, Office applications should be found in the location specified in the configuration xml file, in this example \Server\Office2016.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Convert the Office applications into an App-V package
-
-After you download the Office 2016 applications through the Office Deployment Tool, use the Office Deployment Tool to convert them into an Office 2016 App-V package. Complete the steps that correspond to your licensing model.
-
-**Summary of what you’ll need to do:**
-
-- Create the Office 2016 App-V packages on 64-bit Windows computers. However, the package will run on 32-bit and 64-bit Windows 7, Windows 8 or 8.1, and Windows 10 computers.
-
-- Create an Office App-V package for Subscription Licensing package by using the Office Deployment Tool, and then modify the CustomConfig.xml configuration file.
-
- The following table summarizes the values you need to enter in the CustomConfig.xml file for the licensing model you’re using. The steps in the sections that follow the table will specify the exact entries you need to make.
-
->**Note** You can use the Office Deployment Tool to create App-V packages for Office 365 ProPlus. Creating packages for the volume-licensed versions of Office Professional Plus or Office Standard is not supported.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Product ID
-
Subscription Licensing
-
-
-
-
-
Office 2016
-
O365ProPlusRetail
-
-
-
Office 2016 with Visio 2016
-
O365ProPlusRetail
-
VisioProRetail
-
-
-
Office 2016 with Visio 2016 and Project 2016
-
O365ProPlusRetail
-
VisioProRetail
-
ProjectProRetail
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**How to convert the Office applications into an App-V package**
-
-1. In Notepad, reopen the CustomConfig.xml file, and make the following changes to the file:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
What to change the value to
-
-
-
-
-
SourcePath
-
Point to the Office applications downloaded earlier.
-
-
-
ProductID
-
Specify Subscription licensing, as shown in the following example:
In this example, the following changes were made to create a package with Subscription licensing:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SourcePath
-
is the path, which was changed to point to the Office applications that were downloaded earlier.
-
-
-
Product ID
-
for Office was changed to O365ProPlusRetail.
-
-
-
Product ID
-
for Visio was changed to VisioProRetail.
-
-
-
-
-
-
ExcludeApp (optional)
-
Lets you specify Office programs that you don’t want included in the App-V package that the Office Deployment Tool creates. For example, you can exclude Access and InfoPath.
-
-
-
PACKAGEGUID (optional)
-
By default, all App-V packages created by the Office Deployment Tool share the same App-V Package ID. You can use PACKAGEGUID to specify a different package ID for each package, which allows you to publish multiple App-V packages, created by the Office Deployment Tool, and manage them by using the App-V Server.
-
An example of when to use this parameter is if you create different packages for different users. For example, you can create a package with just Office 2016 for some users, and create another package with Office 2016 and Visio 2016 for another set of users.
-
- >Note Even if you use unique package IDs, you can still deploy only one App-V package to a single device.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-2. Use the /packager command to convert the Office applications to an Office 2016 App-V package.
-
- For example:
-
- ``` syntax
- \\server\Office2016\setup.exe /packager \\server\Office2016\Customconfig.xml \\server\share\Office2016AppV
- ```
-
- In the example:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
\server\Office2016
-
is the network share location that contains the Office Deployment Tool and the custom Configuration.xml file, Customconfig.xml.
-
-
-
Setup.exe
-
is the Office Deployment Tool.
-
-
-
/packager
-
creates the Office 2016 App-V package with the type of licensing specified in the customConfig.xml file.
-
-
-
\server\Office2016\Customconfig.xml
-
passes the configuration XML file (in this case customConfig) that has been prepared for the packaging stage.
-
-
-
\server\share\Office 2016AppV
-
specifies the location of the newly created Office App-V package.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-~~~
-After you run the **/packager** command, the following folders appear up in the directory where you specified the package should be saved:
-
-- **App-V Packages** – contains an Office 2016 App-V package and two deployment configuration files.
-
-- **WorkingDir**
-
-**Note** To troubleshoot any issues, see the log files in the %temp% directory (default).
-~~~
-
-
-
-3. Verify that the Office 2016 App-V package works correctly:
-
- 1. Publish the Office 2016 App-V package, which you created globally, to a test computer, and verify that the Office 2016 shortcuts appear.
-
- 2. Start a few Office 2016 applications, such as Excel or Word, to ensure that your package is working as expected.
-
-## Publishing the Office package for App-V
-
-
-Use the following information to publish an Office package.
-
-### Methods for publishing Office App-V packages
-
-Deploy the App-V package for Office 2016 by using the same methods you use for any other package:
-
-- System Center Configuration Manager
-
-- App-V Server
-
-- Stand-alone through PowerShell commands
-
-### Publishing prerequisites and requirements
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Prerequisite or requirement
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
Enable PowerShell scripting on the App-V clients
-
To publish Office 2016 packages, you must run a script.
-
Package scripts are disabled by default on App-V clients. To enable scripting, run the following PowerShell command:
Extension points in the Office App-V package require installation at the computer level.
-
When you publish at the computer level, no prerequisite actions or redistributables are needed, and the Office 2016 package globally enables its applications to work like natively installed Office, eliminating the need for administrators to customize packages.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### How to publish an Office package
-
-Run the following command to publish an Office package globally:
-
-- `Add-AppvClientPackage | Publish-AppvClientPackage –global`
-
-- From the Web Management Console on the App-V Server, you can add permissions to a group of computers instead of to a user group to enable packages to be published globally to the computers in the corresponding group.
-
-## Customizing and managing Office App-V packages
-
-
-To manage your Office App-V packages, use the same operations as you would for any other package, but there are a few exceptions, as outlined in the following sections.
-
-- [Enabling Office plug-ins by using connection groups](#bkmk-enable-office-plugins)
-
-- [Disabling Office 2016 applications](#bkmk-disable-office-apps)
-
-- [Disabling Office 2016 shortcuts](#bkmk-disable-shortcuts)
-
-- [Managing Office 2016 package upgrades](#bkmk-manage-office-pkg-upgrd)
-
-- [Deploying Visio 2016 and Project 2016 with Office](#bkmk-deploy-visio-project)
-
-### Enabling Office plug-ins by using connection groups
-
-Use the steps in this section to enable Office plug-ins with your Office package. To use Office plug-ins, you must use the App-V Sequencer to create a separate package that contains just the plug-ins. You cannot use the Office Deployment Tool to create the plug-ins package. You then create a connection group that contains the Office package and the plug-ins package, as described in the following steps.
-
-**To enable plug-ins for Office App-V packages**
-
-1. Add a Connection Group through App-V Server, System Center Configuration Manager, or a PowerShell cmdlet.
-
-2. Sequence your plug-ins using the App-V Sequencer. Ensure that Office 2016 is installed on the computer being used to sequence the plug-in. It is recommended you use Office 365 ProPlus(non-virtual) on the sequencing computer when you sequence Office 2016 plug-ins.
-
-3. Create an App-V package that includes the desired plug-ins.
-
-4. Add a Connection Group through App-V server, System Center Configuration Manager, or a PowerShell cmdlet.
-
-5. Add the Office 2016 App-V package and the plug-ins package you sequenced to the Connection Group you created.
-
- >**Important** The order of the packages in the Connection Group determines the order in which the package contents are merged. In your Connection group descriptor file, add the Office 2016 App-V package first, and then add the plug-in App-V package.
-
-
-
-6. Ensure that both packages are published to the target computer and that the plug-in package is published globally to match the global settings of the published Office 2016 App-V package.
-
-7. Verify that the Deployment Configuration File of the plug-in package has the same settings that the Office 2016 App-V package has.
-
- Since the Office 2016 App-V package is integrated with the operating system, the plug-in package settings should match. You can search the Deployment Configuration File for “COM Mode” and ensure that your plug-ins package has that value set as “Integrated” and that both "InProcessEnabled" and "OutOfProcessEnabled" match the settings of the Office 2016 App-V package you published.
-
-8. Open the Deployment Configuration File and set the value for **Objects Enabled** to **false**.
-
-9. If you made any changes to the Deployment Configuration file after sequencing, ensure that the plug-in package is published with the file.
-
-10. Ensure that the Connection Group you created is enabled onto your desired computer. The Connection Group created will likely “pend” if the Office 2016 App-V package is in use when the Connection Group is enabled. If that happens, you have to reboot to successfully enable the Connection Group.
-
-11. After you successfully publish both packages and enable the Connection Group, start the target Office 2016 application and verify that the plug-in you published and added to the connection group works as expected.
-
-### Disabling Office 2016 applications
-
-You may want to disable specific applications in your Office App-V package. For instance, you can disable Access, but leave all other Office application main available. When you disable an application, the end user will no longer see the shortcut for that application. You do not have to re-sequence the application. When you change the Deployment Configuration File after the Office 2016 App-V package has been published, you will save the changes, add the Office 2016 App-V package, and then republish it with the new Deployment Configuration File to apply the new settings to Office 2016 App-V Package applications.
-
->**Note** To exclude specific Office applications (for example, Access and InfoPath) when you create the App-V package with the Office Deployment Tool, use the **ExcludeApp** setting.
-
-
-**To disable an Office 2016 application**
-
-1. Open a Deployment Configuration File with a text editor such as **Notepad** and search for “Applications."
-
-2. Search for the Office application you want to disable, for example, Access 2016.
-
-3. Change the value of "Enabled" from "true" to "false."
-
-4. Save the Deployment Configuration File.
-
-5. Add the Office 2016 App-V Package with the new Deployment Configuration File.
-
- ```xml
-
-
- Lync 2016
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Access 2016
-
-
-
-
- ```
-
-6. Re-add the Office 2016 App-V package, and then republish it with the new Deployment Configuration File to apply the new settings to Office 2016 App-V Package applications.
-
-### Disabling Office 2016 shortcuts
-
-You may want to disable shortcuts for certain Office applications instead of unpublishing or removing the package. The following example shows how to disable shortcuts for Microsoft Access.
-
-**To disable shortcuts for Office 2016 applications**
-
-1. Open a Deployment Configuration File in Notepad and search for “Shortcuts”.
-
-2. To disable certain shortcuts, delete or comment out the specific shortcuts you don’t want. You must keep the subsystem present and enabled. For example, in the example below, delete the Microsoft Access shortcuts, while keeping the subsystems <shortcut> </shortcut> intact to disable the Microsoft Access shortcut.
-
- ``` syntax
- Shortcuts
-
- -->
-
-
-
-
- [{Common Programs}]\Microsoft Office 2016\Access 2016.lnk
- [{AppvPackageRoot}])office16\MSACCESS.EXE
- [{Windows}]\Installer\{90150000-000F-0000-0000-000000FF1CE)\accicons.exe.Ø.ico
-
-
- Microsoft.Office.MSACCESS.EXE.15
- true
- Build a professional app quickly to manage data.
- l
- [{AppVPackageRoot}]\office16\MSACCESS.EXE
-
- ```
-
-3. Save the Deployment Configuration File.
-
-4. Republish Office 2016 App-V Package with new Deployment Configuration File.
-
-Many additional settings can be changed through modifying the Deployment Configuration for App-V packages, for example, file type associations, Virtual File System, and more. For additional information on how to use Deployment Configuration Files to change App-V package settings, refer to the additional resources section at the end of this document.
-
-### Managing Office 2016 package upgrades
-
-To upgrade an Office 2016 package, use the Office Deployment Tool. To upgrade a previously deployed Office 2016 package, perform the following steps.
-
-**How to upgrade a previously deployed Office 2016 package**
-
-1. Create a new Office 2016 package through the Office Deployment Tool that uses the most recent Office 2016 application software. The most recent Office 2016 bits can always be obtained through the download stage of creating an Office 2016 App-V Package. The newly created Office 2016 package will have the most recent updates and a new Version ID. All packages created using the Office Deployment Tool have the same lineage.
-
- > **Note** Office App-V packages have two Version IDs:
- >
- >
An Office 2016 App-V Package Version ID that is unique across all packages created using the Office Deployment Tool.
- >
A second App-V Package Version ID, x.x.x.x for example, in the AppX manifest that will only change if there is a new version of Office itself. For example, if a new Office 2016 release with upgrades is available, and a package is created through the Office Deployment Tool to incorporate these upgrades, the X.X.X.X version ID will change to reflect that the Office version itself has changed. The App-V server will use the X.X.X.X version ID to differentiate this package and recognize that it contains new upgrades to the previously published package, and as a result, publish it as an upgrade to the existing Office 2016 package.
- >
-
-
-2. Globally publish the newly created Office 2016 App-V Packages onto computers where you would like to apply the new updates. Since the new package has the same lineage of the older Office 2016 App-V Package, publishing the new package with the updates will only apply the new changes to the old package, and thus will be fast.
-
-3. Upgrades will be applied in the same manner of any globally published App-V Packages. Because applications will probably be in use, upgrades might be delayed until the computer is rebooted.
-
-
-### Deploying Visio 2016 and Project 2016 with Office
-
-The following table describes the requirements and options for deploying Visio 2016 and Project 2016 with Office.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
How do I package and publish Visio 2016 and Project 2016 with Office?
-
You must include Visio 2016 and Project 2016 in the same package with Office.
-
If you aren’t deploying Office, you can create a package that contains Visio and/or Project, as long as you follow the packaging, publishing, and deployment requirements described in this topic.
-
-
-
How can I deploy Visio 2016 and Project 2016 to specific users?
-
Use one of the following methods:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
If you want to...
-
...then use this method
-
-
-
-
-
Create two different packages and deploy each one to a different group of users
-
Create and deploy the following packages:
-
-
A package that contains only Office - deploy to computers whose users need only Office.
-
A package that contains Office, Visio, and Project - deploy to computers whose users need all three applications.
-
-
-
-
If you want only one package for the whole organization, or if you have users who share computers:
-
Follows these steps:
-
-
Create a package that contains Office, Visio, and Project.
-
Deploy the package to all users.
-
Use Microsoft AppLocker to prevent specific users from using Visio and Project.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Additional resources
-
-
-[Deploying Microsoft Office 2013 by Using App-V](deploying-microsoft-office-2013-by-using-app-v.md)
-
-[Deploying Microsoft Office 2010 by Using App-V](deploying-microsoft-office-2010-by-using-app-v.md)
-
-[Office 2016 Deployment Tool for Click-to-Run](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=49117)
-
-**Connection Groups**
-
-[Deploying Connection Groups in Microsoft App-V v5](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=330683)
-
-[Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups.md)
-
-**Dynamic Configuration**
-
-[About App-V 5.1 Dynamic Configuration](about-app-v-51-dynamic-configuration.md)
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-the-app-v-50-sequencer-and-client.md b/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-the-app-v-50-sequencer-and-client.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1ad01a6915..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-the-app-v-50-sequencer-and-client.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,125 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying the App-V 5.0 Sequencer and Client
-description: Deploying the App-V 5.0 Sequencer and Client
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 84cc84bd-5bc0-41aa-9519-0ded2932c078
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/21/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying the App-V 5.0 Sequencer and Client
-
-
-The App-V 5.0 Sequencer and client enable administrators to virtualize and run virtualized applications.
-
-## Deploy the client
-
-
-The App-V 5.0 client is the component that runs a virtualized application on a target computer. The client enables users to interact with icons and to double-click file types, so that they can start a virtualized application. The client can also obtain the virtual application content from the management server.
-
-[How to Deploy the App-V Client](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-client-gb18030.md)
-
-[How to Uninstall the App-V 5.0 Client](how-to-uninstall-the-app-v-50-client.md)
-
-[How to Deploy the App-V 4.6 and the App-V 5.0 Client on the Same Computer](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-46-and-the-app-v--50-client-on-the-same-computer.md)
-
-## Client Configuration Settings
-
-
-The App-V 5.0 client stores its configuration in the registry. You can gather some useful information about the client if you understand the format of data in the registry. You can also configure many client actions by changing registry entries.
-
-[About Client Configuration Settings](about-client-configuration-settings.md)
-
-## Configure the client by using the ADMX template and Group Policy
-
-
-You can use the Microsoft ADMX template to configure the client settings for the App-V 5.0 client and the Remote Desktop Services client. The ADMX template manages common client configurations by using an existing Group Policy infrastructure and it includes settings for the App-V 5.0 client configuration.
-
-**Important**
-You can obtain the App-V 5.0 ADMX template from the Microsoft Download Center.
-
-
-
-After you download and install the ADMX template, perform the following steps on the computer that you will use to manage Group Policy. This is typically the Domain Controller.
-
-1. Save the **.admx** file to the following directory: **Windows \\ PolicyDefinitions**
-
-2. Save the **.adml** file to the following directory: **Windows \\ PolicyDefinitions \\ <Language Directory>**
-
-After you have completed the preceding steps, you can manage the App-V 5.0 client configuration settings with the **Group Policy Management** console.
-
-The App-V 5.0 client also stores its configuration in the registry. You can gather some useful information about the client if you understand the format of the data in the registry. You can also configure many client actions by changing registry entries.
-
-[How to Modify App-V 5.0 Client Configuration Using the ADMX Template and Group Policy](how-to-modify-app-v-50-client-configuration-using-the-admx-template-and-group-policy.md)
-
-## Deploy the client by using the Shared Content Store mode
-
-
-The App-V 5.0 Shared Content Store (SCS) mode enables the SCS App-V 5.0 clients to run virtualized applications without saving any of the associated package data locally. All required virtualized package data is transmitted across the network; therefore, you should only use the SCS mode in environments with a fast connection. Both the Remote Desktop Services (RDS) and the standard version of the App-V 5.0 client are supported with SCS mode.
-
-**Important**
-If the App-V 5.0 client is configured to run in the SCS mode, the location where the App-V 5.0 packages are streamed from must be available, otherwise, the virtualized package will fail. Additionally, we do not recommend deployment of virtualized applications to computers that run the App-V 5.0 client in the SCS mode across the internet.
-
-
-
-Additionally, the SCS is not a physical location that contains virtualized packages. It is a mode that allows the App-V 5.0 client to stream the required virtualized package data across the network.
-
-The SCS mode is helpful in the following scenarios:
-
-- Virtual desktop infrastructure (VDI) deployments
-
-- Remote desktop services (RDS) deployments
-
-To use SCS in your environment, you must enable the App-V 5.0 client to run in SCS mode. This setting should be specified during installation. By default, the client is not configured to use SCS mode. You should install the client by using the suggested procedure if you plan to use SCS. However, you can configure an existing App-V 5.0 client to run in SCS mode by entering the following PowerShell command on the computer that runs the App-V 5.0 client:
-
-**set-AppvClientConfiguration -SharedContentStoreMode 1**
-
-There might be cases when the administrator pre-loads some virtual applications on the computer that runs the App-V 5.0 client in SCS mode. This can be accomplished with PowerShell commands to add, publish, and mount the package. For example, if a package is pre-loaded on all computers, the administrator could add, publish, and mount the package by using PowerShell commands. The package would not stream across the network because it would be locally stored.
-
-[How to Install the App-V 5.0 Client for Shared Content Store Mode](how-to-install-the-app-v-50-client-for-shared-content-store-mode.md)
-
-## Deploy the Sequencer
-
-
-The Sequencer is a tool that is used to convert standard applications into virtual packages for deployment to computers that run the App-V 5.0 client. The Sequencer helps provide a simple and predictable conversion process with minimal changes to prior sequencing workflows. In addition, the Sequencer allows users to more easily configure applications to enable connections of virtualized applications.
-
-For a list of changes in the App-V 5.0 Sequencer, see [What's New in App-V 5.0](whats-new-in-app-v-50.md).
-
-[How to Install the Sequencer](how-to-install-the-sequencer-beta-gb18030.md)
-
-## App-V 5.0 Client and Sequencer logs
-
-
-You can use the App-V 5.0 Sequencer log information to help troubleshoot the Sequencer installation and operational events while using App-V 5.0. The Sequencer-related log information can be reviewed with the **Event Viewer**. The following line displays the specific path for Sequencer-related events:
-
-**Event Viewer \\ Applications and Services Logs \\ Microsoft \\ App V**. Sequencer-related events are prepended with **AppV\_Sequencer**. Client-related events are prepended with **AppV\_Client**.
-
-In App-V 5.0 SP3, some logs have been consolidated. See [About App-V 5.0 SP3](about-app-v-50-sp3.md#bkmk-event-logs-moved).
-
-## Other resources for deploying the Sequencer and client
-
-
-[Deploying App-V 5.0](deploying-app-v-50.md)
-
-[Planning for App-V 5.0](planning-for-app-v-50-rc.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-the-app-v-50-server.md b/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-the-app-v-50-server.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a9c5cecc6e..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-the-app-v-50-server.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,129 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying the App-V 5.0 Server
-description: Deploying the App-V 5.0 Server
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: a47f0dc8-2971-4e4d-8d57-6b69bbed4b63
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying the App-V 5.0 Server
-
-
-You can install the App-V 5.0 server features by using different deployment configurations, which described in this topic. Before you install the server features, review the server section of [App-V 5.0 Security Considerations](app-v-50-security-considerations.md).
-
-For information about deploying the App-V 5.0 SP3 Server, see [About App-V 5.0 SP3](about-app-v-50-sp3.md#bkmk-migrate-to-50sp3).
-
-**Important**
-Before you install and configure the App-V 5.0 servers, you must specify a port where each component will be hosted. You must also add the associated firewall rules to allow incoming requests to access the specified ports. The installer does not modify firewall settings.
-
-
-
-## App-V 5.0 Server overview
-
-
-The App-V 5.0 Server is made up of five components. Each component serves a different purpose within the App-V 5.0 environment. Each of the five components is briefly described here:
-
-- Management Server – provides overall management functionality for the App-V 5.0 infrastructure.
-
-- Management Database – facilitates database predeployments for App-V 5.0 management.
-
-- Publishing Server – provides hosting and streaming functionality for virtual applications.
-
-- Reporting Server – provides App-V 5.0 reporting services.
-
-- Reporting Database – facilitates database predeployments for App-V 5.0 reporting.
-
-## App-V 5.0 stand-alone deployment
-
-
-The App-V 5.0 standalone deployment provides a good topology for a small deployment or a test environment. When you use this type of implementation, all server components are deployed to a single computer. The services and associated databases will compete for the resources on the computer that runs the App-V 5.0 components. Therefore, you should not use this topology for larger deployments.
-
-[How to Deploy the App-V 5.0 Server](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-50-server-50sp3.md)
-
-[How to Deploy the App-V 5.0 Server Using a Script](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-50-server-using-a-script.md)
-
-## App-V 5.0 Server distributed deployment
-
-
-The distributed deployment topology can support a large App-V 5.0 client base and it allows you to more easily manage and scale your environment. When you use this type of deployment, the App-V 5.0 Server components are deployed across multiple computers, based on the structure and requirements of the organization.
-
-[How to Install the Management and Reporting Databases on Separate Computers from the Management and Reporting Services](how-to-install-the-management-and-reporting-databases-on-separate-computers-from-the-management-and-reporting-services.md)
-
-[How to install the Reporting Server on a Standalone Computer and Connect it to the Database](how-to-install-the-reporting-server-on-a-standalone-computer-and-connect-it-to-the-database.md)
-
-[How to Deploy the App-V 5.0 Server Using a Script](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-50-server-using-a-script.md)
-
-[How to Install the Publishing Server on a Remote Computer](how-to-install-the-publishing-server-on-a-remote-computer.md)
-
-[How to install the Management Server on a Standalone Computer and Connect it to the Database](how-to-install-the-management-server-on-a-standalone-computer-and-connect-it-to-the-database.md)
-
-## Using an Enterprise Software Distribution (ESD) solution and App-V 5.0
-
-
-You can also deploy the App-V 5.0 clients and packages by using an ESD without having to deploy App-V 5.0. The full capabilities for integration will vary depending on the ESD that you use.
-
-**Note**
-The App-V 5.0 reporting server and reporting database can still be deployed alongside the ESD to collect the reporting data from the App-V 5.0 clients. However, the other three server components should not be deployed, because they will conflict with the ESD functionality.
-
-
-
-[Deploying App-V 5.0 Packages by Using Electronic Software Distribution (ESD)](deploying-app-v-50-packages-by-using-electronic-software-distribution--esd-.md)
-
-## App-V 5.0 Server logs
-
-
-You can use App-V 5.0 server log information to help troubleshoot the server installation and operational events while using App-V 5.0. The server-related log information can be reviewed with the **Event Viewer**. The following line displays the specific path for Server-related events:
-
-**Event Viewer \\ Applications and Services Logs \\ Microsoft \\ App V**
-
-Associated setup logs are saved in the following directory:
-
-**%temp%**
-
-In App-V 5.0 SP3, some logs have been consolidated and moved. See [About App-V 5.0 SP3](about-app-v-50-sp3.md#bkmk-event-logs-moved).
-
-## App-V 5.0 reporting
-
-
-App-V 5.0 reporting allows App-V 5.0 clients to collect data and then send it back to be stored in a central repository. You can use this information to get a better view of the virtual application usage within your organization. The following list displays some of the types of information the App-V 5.0 client collects:
-
-- Information about the computer that runs the App-V 5.0 client.
-
-- Information about virtualized packages on a specific computer that runs the App-V 5.0 client.
-
-- Information about package open and shutdown for a specific user.
-
-The reporting information will be maintained until it is successfully sent to the reporting server database. After the data is in the database, you can use Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services to generate any necessary reports.
-
-If you want to retrieve report information, you must use Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) which is available with Microsoft SQL. SSRS is not installed when you install the App-V 5.0 reporting server and it must be deployed separately to generate the associated reports.
-
-Use the following link for more information [About App-V 5.0 Reporting](about-app-v-50-reporting.md).
-
-[How to Enable Reporting on the App-V 5.0 Client by Using PowerShell](how-to-enable-reporting-on-the-app-v-50-client-by-using-powershell.md)
-
-## Other resources for the App-V server
-
-
-[Deploying App-V 5.0](deploying-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-the-app-v-51-sequencer-and-client.md b/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-the-app-v-51-sequencer-and-client.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0811cc8ca8..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-the-app-v-51-sequencer-and-client.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,123 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying the App-V 5.1 Sequencer and Client
-description: Deploying the App-V 5.1 Sequencer and Client
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 74f32794-4c76-436f-a542-f9e95d89063d
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/21/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying the App-V 5.1 Sequencer and Client
-
-
-The Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 Sequencer and client enable administrators to virtualize and run virtualized applications.
-
-## Deploy the client
-
-
-The App-V 5.1 client is the component that runs a virtualized application on a target computer. The client enables users to interact with icons and to double-click file types, so that they can start a virtualized application. The client can also obtain the virtual application content from the management server.
-
-[How to Deploy the App-V Client](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-client-51gb18030.md)
-
-[How to Uninstall the App-V 5.1 Client](how-to-uninstall-the-app-v-51-client.md)
-
-[How to Deploy the App-V 4.6 and the App-V 5.1 Client on the Same Computer](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-46-and-the-app-v--51-client-on-the-same-computer.md)
-
-## Client Configuration Settings
-
-
-The App-V 5.1 client stores its configuration in the registry. You can gather some useful information about the client if you understand the format of data in the registry. You can also configure many client actions by changing registry entries.
-
-[About Client Configuration Settings](about-client-configuration-settings51.md)
-
-## Configure the client by using the ADMX template and Group Policy
-
-
-You can use the Microsoft ADMX template to configure the client settings for the App-V 5.1 client and the Remote Desktop Services client. The ADMX template manages common client configurations by using an existing Group Policy infrastructure and it includes settings for the App-V 5.1 client configuration.
-
-**Important**
-You can obtain the App-V 5.1 ADMX template from the Microsoft Download Center.
-
-
-
-After you download and install the ADMX template, perform the following steps on the computer that you will use to manage Group Policy. This is typically the Domain Controller.
-
-1. Save the **.admx** file to the following directory: **Windows \\ PolicyDefinitions**
-
-2. Save the **.adml** file to the following directory: **Windows \\ PolicyDefinitions \\ <Language Directory>**
-
-After you have completed the preceding steps, you can manage the App-V 5.1 client configuration settings with the **Group Policy Management** console.
-
-The App-V 5.1 client also stores its configuration in the registry. You can gather some useful information about the client if you understand the format of the data in the registry. You can also configure many client actions by changing registry entries.
-
-[How to Modify App-V 5.1 Client Configuration Using the ADMX Template and Group Policy](how-to-modify-app-v-51-client-configuration-using-the-admx-template-and-group-policy.md)
-
-## Deploy the client by using the Shared Content Store mode
-
-
-The App-V 5.1 Shared Content Store (SCS) mode enables the SCS App-V 5.1 clients to run virtualized applications without saving any of the associated package data locally. All required virtualized package data is transmitted across the network; therefore, you should only use the SCS mode in environments with a fast connection. Both the Remote Desktop Services (RDS) and the standard version of the App-V 5.1 client are supported with SCS mode.
-
-**Important**
-If the App-V 5.1 client is configured to run in the SCS mode, the location where the App-V 5.1 packages are streamed from must be available, otherwise, the virtualized package will fail. Additionally, we do not recommend deployment of virtualized applications to computers that run the App-V 5.1 client in the SCS mode across the internet.
-
-
-
-Additionally, the SCS is not a physical location that contains virtualized packages. It is a mode that allows the App-V 5.1 client to stream the required virtualized package data across the network.
-
-The SCS mode is helpful in the following scenarios:
-
-- Virtual desktop infrastructure (VDI) deployments
-
-- Remote desktop services (RDS) deployments
-
-To use SCS in your environment, you must enable the App-V 5.1 client to run in SCS mode. This setting should be specified during installation. By default, the client is not configured to use SCS mode. You should install the client by using the suggested procedure if you plan to use SCS. However, you can configure an existing App-V 5.1 client to run in SCS mode by entering the following PowerShell command on the computer that runs the App-V 5.1 client:
-
-**set-AppvClientConfiguration -SharedContentStoreMode 1**
-
-There might be cases when the administrator pre-loads some virtual applications on the computer that runs the App-V 5.1 client in SCS mode. This can be accomplished with PowerShell commands to add, publish, and mount the package. For example, if a package is pre-loaded on all computers, the administrator could add, publish, and mount the package by using PowerShell commands. The package would not stream across the network because it would be locally stored.
-
-[How to Install the App-V 5.1 Client for Shared Content Store Mode](how-to-install-the-app-v-51-client-for-shared-content-store-mode.md)
-
-## Deploy the Sequencer
-
-
-The Sequencer is a tool that is used to convert standard applications into virtual packages for deployment to computers that run the App-V 5.1 client. The Sequencer helps provide a simple and predictable conversion process with minimal changes to prior sequencing workflows. In addition, the Sequencer allows users to more easily configure applications to enable connections of virtualized applications.
-
-For a list of changes in the App-V 5.1 Sequencer, see [About App-V 5.1](about-app-v-51.md).
-
-[How to Install the Sequencer](how-to-install-the-sequencer-51beta-gb18030.md)
-
-## App-V 5.1 Client and Sequencer logs
-
-
-You can use the App-V 5.1 Sequencer log information to help troubleshoot the Sequencer installation and operational events while using App-V 5.1. The Sequencer-related log information can be reviewed with the **Event Viewer**. The following line displays the specific path for Sequencer-related events:
-
-**Event Viewer \\ Applications and Services Logs \\ Microsoft \\ App V**. Sequencer-related events are prepended with **AppV\_Sequencer**. Client-related events are prepended with **AppV\_Client**.
-
-## Other resources for deploying the Sequencer and client
-
-
-[Deploying App-V 5.1](deploying-app-v-51.md)
-
-[Planning for App-V 5.1](planning-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-the-app-v-51-server.md b/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-the-app-v-51-server.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 10380a684e..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/deploying-the-app-v-51-server.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,129 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying the App-V 5.1 Server
-description: Deploying the App-V 5.1 Server
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 987b61dc-00d6-49ba-8f1b-92d7b948e702
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying the App-V 5.1 Server
-
-
-You can install the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 server features by using different deployment configurations, which described in this topic. Before you install the server features, review the server section of [App-V 5.1 Security Considerations](app-v-51-security-considerations.md).
-
-For information about deploying the App-V Server, see [About App-V 5.1](about-app-v-51.md#bkmk-migrate-to-51).
-
-**Important**
-Before you install and configure the App-V 5.1 servers, you must specify a port where each component will be hosted. You must also add the associated firewall rules to allow incoming requests to access the specified ports. The installer does not modify firewall settings.
-
-
-
-## App-V 5.1 Server overview
-
-
-The App-V 5.1 Server is made up of five components. Each component serves a different purpose within the App-V 5.1 environment. Each of the five components is briefly described here:
-
-- Management Server – provides overall management functionality for the App-V 5.1 infrastructure.
-
-- Management Database – facilitates database predeployments for App-V 5.1 management.
-
-- Publishing Server – provides hosting and streaming functionality for virtual applications.
-
-- Reporting Server – provides App-V 5.1 reporting services.
-
-- Reporting Database – facilitates database predeployments for App-V 5.1 reporting.
-
-## App-V 5.1 stand-alone deployment
-
-
-The App-V 5.1 standalone deployment provides a good topology for a small deployment or a test environment. When you use this type of implementation, all server components are deployed to a single computer. The services and associated databases will compete for the resources on the computer that runs the App-V 5.1 components. Therefore, you should not use this topology for larger deployments.
-
-[How to Deploy the App-V 5.1 Server](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-51-server.md)
-
-[How to Deploy the App-V 5.1 Server Using a Script](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-51-server-using-a-script.md)
-
-## App-V 5.1 Server distributed deployment
-
-
-The distributed deployment topology can support a large App-V 5.1 client base and it allows you to more easily manage and scale your environment. When you use this type of deployment, the App-V 5.1 Server components are deployed across multiple computers, based on the structure and requirements of the organization.
-
-[How to Install the Management and Reporting Databases on Separate Computers from the Management and Reporting Services](how-to-install-the-management-and-reporting-databases-on-separate-computers-from-the-management-and-reporting-services51.md)
-
-[How to install the Management Server on a Standalone Computer and Connect it to the Database](how-to-install-the-management-server-on-a-standalone-computer-and-connect-it-to-the-database51.md)
-
-[How to Deploy the App-V 5.1 Server Using a Script](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-51-server-using-a-script.md)
-
-[How to Install the Publishing Server on a Remote Computer](how-to-install-the-publishing-server-on-a-remote-computer51.md)
-
-[How to install the Management Server on a Standalone Computer and Connect it to the Database](how-to-install-the-management-server-on-a-standalone-computer-and-connect-it-to-the-database51.md)
-
-## Using an Enterprise Software Distribution (ESD) solution and App-V 5.1
-
-
-You can also deploy the App-V 5.1 clients and packages by using an ESD without having to deploy App-V 5.1. The full capabilities for integration will vary depending on the ESD that you use.
-
-**Note**
-The App-V 5.1 reporting server and reporting database can still be deployed alongside the ESD to collect the reporting data from the App-V 5.1 clients. However, the other three server components should not be deployed, because they will conflict with the ESD functionality.
-
-
-
-[Deploying App-V 5.1 Packages by Using Electronic Software Distribution (ESD)](deploying-app-v-51-packages-by-using-electronic-software-distribution--esd-.md)
-
-## App-V 5.1 Server logs
-
-
-You can use App-V 5.1 server log information to help troubleshoot the server installation and operational events while using App-V 5.1. The server-related log information can be reviewed with the **Event Viewer**. The following line displays the specific path for Server-related events:
-
-**Event Viewer \\ Applications and Services Logs \\ Microsoft \\ App V**
-
-Associated setup logs are saved in the following directory:
-
-**%temp%**
-
-In App-V 5.0 SP3, some logs were consolidated and moved. See [About App-V 5.0 SP3](about-app-v-50-sp3.md#bkmk-event-logs-moved).
-
-## App-V 5.1 reporting
-
-
-App-V 5.1 reporting allows App-V 5.1 clients to collect data and then send it back to be stored in a central repository. You can use this information to get a better view of the virtual application usage within your organization. The following list displays some of the types of information the App-V 5.1 client collects:
-
-- Information about the computer that runs the App-V 5.1 client.
-
-- Information about virtualized packages on a specific computer that runs the App-V 5.1 client.
-
-- Information about package open and shutdown for a specific user.
-
-The reporting information will be maintained until it is successfully sent to the reporting server database. After the data is in the database, you can use Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services to generate any necessary reports.
-
-If you want to retrieve report information, you must use Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) which is available with Microsoft SQL. SSRS is not installed when you install the App-V 5.1 reporting server and it must be deployed separately to generate the associated reports.
-
-Use the following link for more information [About App-V 5.1 Reporting](about-app-v-51-reporting.md).
-
-[How to Enable Reporting on the App-V 5.1 Client by Using PowerShell](how-to-enable-reporting-on-the-app-v-51-client-by-using-powershell.md)
-
-## Other resources for the App-V server
-
-
-[Deploying App-V 5.1](deploying-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/evaluating-app-v-50.md b/mdop/appv-v5/evaluating-app-v-50.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1b2cc2ac24..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/evaluating-app-v-50.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,68 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Evaluating App-V 5.0
-description: Evaluating App-V 5.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 0b4a6b12-559d-429f-9659-dc8f4883feab
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Evaluating App-V 5.0
-
-
-Before you deploy Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 into a production environment, you should evaluate it in a lab environment. You can use the information in this topic to set up App-V 5.0 in a lab environment for evaluation purposes only.
-
-## Configure lab computers for App-V 5.0 Evaluation
-
-
-Use the following link for information about setting up the App-V 5.0 sequencer on a computer in your lab environment.
-
-### Installing the App-V 5.0 Sequencer and Creating Packages
-
-Use the following links for information about setting up the App-V 5.0 sequencer and creating packages in your lab environment.
-
-- [How to Install the Sequencer](how-to-install-the-sequencer-beta-gb18030.md)
-
-- [Creating and Managing App-V 5.0 Virtualized Applications](creating-and-managing-app-v-50-virtualized-applications.md)
-
-### Configuring the App-V 5.0 Server
-
-Use the following links for information about setting up the App-V 5.0 server in your lab environment.
-
-- [How to Deploy the App-V 5.0 Server](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-50-server-50sp3.md)
-
-- [Administering App-V 5.0 Virtual Applications by Using the Management Console](administering-app-v-50-virtual-applications-by-using-the-management-console.md)
-
-### Installing the App-V 5.0 Client
-
-Use the following link for more information about creating and managing virtualized packages in your lab environment.
-
-- [How to Deploy the App-V Client](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-client-gb18030.md)
-
-- [How to Configure the Client to Receive Package and Connection Groups Updates From the Publishing Server](how-to-configure-the-client-to-receive-package-and-connection-groups-updates-from-the-publishing-server-beta.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Getting Started with App-V 5.0](getting-started-with-app-v-50--rtm.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/evaluating-app-v-51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/evaluating-app-v-51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 84facb34f4..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/evaluating-app-v-51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,68 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Evaluating App-V 5.1
-description: Evaluating App-V 5.1
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 92d80b23-3eca-4be3-a771-e700ad1470db
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Evaluating App-V 5.1
-
-
-Before you deploy Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 into a production environment, you should evaluate it in a lab environment. You can use the information in this topic to set up App-V 5.1 in a lab environment for evaluation purposes only.
-
-## Configure lab computers for App-V 5.1 Evaluation
-
-
-Use the following link for information about setting up the App-V 5.1 sequencer on a computer in your lab environment.
-
-### Installing the App-V 5.1 Sequencer and Creating Packages
-
-Use the following links for information about setting up the App-V 5.1 sequencer and creating packages in your lab environment.
-
-- [How to Install the Sequencer](how-to-install-the-sequencer-51beta-gb18030.md)
-
-- [Creating and Managing App-V 5.1 Virtualized Applications](creating-and-managing-app-v-51-virtualized-applications.md)
-
-### Configuring the App-V 5.1 Server
-
-Use the following links for information about setting up the App-V 5.1 server in your lab environment.
-
-- [How to Deploy the App-V 5.1 Server](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-51-server.md)
-
-- [Administering App-V 5.1 Virtual Applications by Using the Management Console](administering-app-v-51-virtual-applications-by-using-the-management-console.md)
-
-### Installing the App-V 5.1 Client
-
-Use the following link for more information about creating and managing virtualized packages in your lab environment.
-
-- [How to Deploy the App-V Client](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-client-51gb18030.md)
-
-- [How to Configure the Client to Receive Package and Connection Groups Updates From the Publishing Server](how-to-configure-the-client-to-receive-package-and-connection-groups-updates-from-the-publishing-server-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Getting Started with App-V 5.1](getting-started-with-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/getting-started-with-app-v-50--rtm.md b/mdop/appv-v5/getting-started-with-app-v-50--rtm.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 861662bca5..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/getting-started-with-app-v-50--rtm.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,150 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Getting Started with App-V 5.0
-description: Getting Started with App-V 5.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 3e16eafb-ce95-4d06-b214-fe0f4b1b495f
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Getting Started with App-V 5.0
-
-
-App-V 5.0 enables administrators to deploy, update, and support applications as services in real time, on an as-needed basis. Individual applications are transformed from locally installed products into centrally managed services and are available wherever you need, without the need to preconfigure computers or to change operating system settings.
-
-App-V consists of the following elements:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Element
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
App-V Management Server
-
-
Provides a central location for managing the App-V infrastructure, which delivers virtual applications to both the App-V Desktop Client and the Remote Desktop Services (formerly Terminal Services) Client.
-
Uses Microsoft SQL Server® for its data store, where one or more App-V Management servers can share a single SQL Server data store.
-
Authenticates requests and provides security, metering, monitoring, and data gathering. The server uses Active Directory and supporting tools to manage users and applications.
-
Has a Silverlight®-based management site, which enables you to configure the App-V infrastructure from any computer. You can add and remove applications, manipulate shortcuts, assign access permissions to users and groups, and create connection groups.
-
Enables communication between the App-V Web Management Console and the SQL Server data store. These components can all be installed on a single server computer, or on one or more separate computers, depending on the required system architecture.
-
-
-
-
App-V Publishing Server
-
-
Provides App-V Clients with entitled applications for the specific user
-
Hosts the virtual application package for streaming.
-
-
-
-
App-V Desktop Client
-
-
Retrieves virtual applications
-
Publishes the applications on the clients
-
Automatically sets up and manages virtual environments at runtime on Windows endpoints.
-
Stores user-specific virtual application settings, such as registry and file changes, in each user's profile.
-
-
-
-
App-V Remote Desktop Services (RDS) Client
-
Enables Remote Desktop Session Host servers to use the capabilities of the App-V Desktop Client for shared desktop sessions.
-
-
-
App-V Sequencer
-
-
Is a wizard-based tool that you use to transform traditional applications into virtual applications.
-
Produces the application “package,” which consists of:
-
-
a sequenced application (APPV) file
-
a Windows Installer file (MSI) that can be deployed to clients configured for stand-alone operation
-
Several XML files including Report.XML, PackageName_DeploymentConfig.XML, and PackageName_UserConfig.XML. The UserConfig and DeploymentConfig XML files are used to configure custom changes to the default behavior of the package.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-For more information about these elements, see [High Level Architecture for App-V 5.0](high-level-architecture-for-app-v-50.md).
-
-If you are new to this product, we recommend that you read the documentation thoroughly. Before you deploy it to a production environment, we also recommend that you validate your deployment plan in a test network environment. You might also consider taking a class about relevant technologies. For more information about Microsoft training opportunities, see the Microsoft Training Overview at .
-
-**Note**
-A downloadable version of this administrator’s guide is not available. However, you can learn about a special mode of the TechNet Library that allows you to select articles, group them in a collection, and print them or export them to a file at (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=272491).
-
-
-
-This section of the App-V 5.0 Administrator’s Guide includes high-level information about App-V 5.0 to provide you with a basic understanding of the product before you begin the deployment planning.
-
-## Getting started with App-V 5.0
-
-
-- [About App-V 5.0](about-app-v-50.md)
-
- Provides a high-level overview of App-V 5.0 and how it can be used in your organization.
-
-- [About App-V 5.0 SP1](about-app-v-50-sp1.md)
-
- Provides a high-level overview of App-V 5.0 SP1 and how it can be used in your organization.
-
-- [About App-V 5.0 SP2](about-app-v-50-sp2.md)
-
- Provides a high-level overview of App-V 5.0 SP2 and how it can be used in your organization.
-
-- [About App-V 5.0 SP3](about-app-v-50-sp3.md)
-
- Provides a high-level overview of App-V 5.0 SP2 and how it can be used in your organization.
-
-- [Evaluating App-V 5.0](evaluating-app-v-50.md)
-
- Provides information about how you can best evaluate App-V 5.0 for use in your organization.
-
-- [High Level Architecture for App-V 5.0](high-level-architecture-for-app-v-50.md)
-
- Provides a description of the App-V 5.0 features and how they work together.
-
-- [Accessibility for App-V 5.0](accessibility-for-app-v-50.md)
-
- Provides information about features and services that make this product and its corresponding documentation more accessible for people with disabilities.
-
-## Other resources for this product
-
-
-- [Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0 Administrator's Guide](microsoft-application-virtualization-50-administrators-guide.md)
-
-- [Planning for App-V 5.0](planning-for-app-v-50-rc.md)
-
-- [Deploying App-V 5.0](deploying-app-v-50.md)
-
-- [Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-- [Troubleshooting App-V 5.0](troubleshooting-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/getting-started-with-app-v-51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/getting-started-with-app-v-51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f508e2c3a6..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/getting-started-with-app-v-51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,140 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Getting Started with App-V 5.1
-description: Getting Started with App-V 5.1
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 49a20e1f-0566-4e53-a417-1521393fc974
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Getting Started with App-V 5.1
-
-
-Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 enables administrators to deploy, update, and support applications as services in real time, on an as-needed basis. Individual applications are transformed from locally installed products into centrally managed services and are available wherever you need, without the need to preconfigure computers or to change operating system settings.
-
-App-V consists of the following elements:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Element
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
App-V Management Server
-
-
Provides a central location for managing the App-V infrastructure, which delivers virtual applications to both the App-V Desktop Client and the Remote Desktop Services (formerly Terminal Services) Client.
-
Uses Microsoft SQL Server® for its data store, where one or more App-V Management servers can share a single SQL Server data store.
-
Authenticates requests and provides security, metering, monitoring, and data gathering. The server uses Active Directory and supporting tools to manage users and applications.
-
Has a management site that lets you configure the App-V infrastructure from any computer. You can add and remove applications, manipulate shortcuts, assign access permissions to users and groups, and create connection groups.
-
Enables communication between the App-V Web Management Console and the SQL Server data store. These components can all be installed on a single server computer, or on one or more separate computers, depending on the required system architecture.
-
-
-
-
App-V Publishing Server
-
-
Provides App-V Clients with entitled applications for the specific user
-
Hosts the virtual application package for streaming.
-
-
-
-
App-V Desktop Client
-
-
Retrieves virtual applications
-
Publishes the applications on the clients
-
Automatically sets up and manages virtual environments at runtime on Windows endpoints.
-
Stores user-specific virtual application settings, such as registry and file changes, in each user's profile.
-
-
-
-
App-V Remote Desktop Services (RDS) Client
-
Enables Remote Desktop Session Host servers to use the capabilities of the App-V Desktop Client for shared desktop sessions.
-
-
-
App-V Sequencer
-
-
Is a wizard-based tool that you use to transform traditional applications into virtual applications.
-
Produces the application “package,” which consists of:
-
-
a sequenced application (APPV) file
-
a Windows Installer file (MSI) that can be deployed to clients configured for stand-alone operation
-
Several XML files including Report.XML, PackageName_DeploymentConfig.XML, and PackageName_UserConfig.XML. The UserConfig and DeploymentConfig XML files are used to configure custom changes to the default behavior of the package.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-For more information about these elements, see [High Level Architecture for App-V 5.1](high-level-architecture-for-app-v-51.md).
-
-If you are new to this product, we recommend that you read the documentation thoroughly. Before you deploy it to a production environment, we also recommend that you validate your deployment plan in a test network environment. You might also consider taking a class about relevant technologies. For more information about Microsoft training opportunities, see the Microsoft Training Overview at .
-
-**Note**
-A downloadable version of this administrator’s guide is not available. However, you can learn about a special mode of the TechNet Library that allows you to select articles, group them in a collection, and print them or export them to a file at (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=272491).
-
-
-
-This section of the App-V 5.1 Administrator’s Guide includes high-level information about App-V 5.1 to provide you with a basic understanding of the product before you begin the deployment planning.
-
-## Getting started with App-V 5.1
-
-
-- [About App-V 5.1](about-app-v-51.md)
-
- Provides a high-level overview of App-V 5.1 and how it can be used in your organization.
-
-- [Evaluating App-V 5.1](evaluating-app-v-51.md)
-
- Provides information about how you can best evaluate App-V 5.1 for use in your organization.
-
-- [High Level Architecture for App-V 5.1](high-level-architecture-for-app-v-51.md)
-
- Provides a description of the App-V 5.1 features and how they work together.
-
-- [Accessibility for App-V 5.1](accessibility-for-app-v-51.md)
-
- Provides information about features and services that make this product and its corresponding documentation more accessible for people with disabilities.
-
-## Other resources for this product
-
-
-- [Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.1 Administrator's Guide](microsoft-application-virtualization-51-administrators-guide.md)
-
-- [Planning for App-V 5.1](planning-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-- [Deploying App-V 5.1](deploying-app-v-51.md)
-
-- [Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-- [Troubleshooting App-V 5.1](troubleshooting-app-v-51.md)
-
-- [Technical Reference for App-V 5.1](technical-reference-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/high-level-architecture-for-app-v-50.md b/mdop/appv-v5/high-level-architecture-for-app-v-50.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e23df5f0a1..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/high-level-architecture-for-app-v-50.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,91 +0,0 @@
----
-title: High Level Architecture for App-V 5.0
-description: High Level Architecture for App-V 5.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: fdf8b841-918f-4672-b352-0f2b9519581b
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# High Level Architecture for App-V 5.0
-
-
-Use the following information to help you simplify you Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 deployment.
-
-## Architecture Overview
-
-
-A typical App-V 5.0 implementation consists of the following elements.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Element
-
More information
-
-
-
-
-
App-V 5.0 Management Server
-
The App-V 5.0 Management server provides overall management functionality for the App-V 5.0 infrastructure. Additionally, you can install more than one instance of the management server in your environment which provides the following benefits:
-
-
Fault Tolerance and High Availability – Installing and configuring the App-V 5.0 Management server on two separate computers can help in situations when one of the servers is unavailable or offline.
-
You can also help increase App-V 5.0 availability by installing the Management server on multiple computers. In this scenario, a network load balancer should also be considered so that server requests are balanced.
-
Scalability – You can add additional management servers as necessary to support a high load, for example you can install multiple servers behind a load balancer.
-
-
-
-
App-V 5.0 Publishing Server
-
The App-V 5.0 publishing server provides functionality for virtual application hosting and streaming. The publishing server does not require a database connection and supports the following protocols:
-
-
HTTP, and HTTPS
-
-
You can also help increase App-V 5.0 availability by installing the Publishing server on multiple computers. A network load balancer should also be considered so that server requests are balanced.
-
-
-
App-V 5.0 Reporting Server
-
The App-V 5.0 Reporting server enables authorized users to run and view existing App-V 5.0 reports and ad hoc reports that can help them manage the App-V 5.0 infrastructure. The Reporting server requires a connection to the App-V 5.0 reporting database. You can also help increase App-V 5.0 availability by installing the Reporting server on multiple computers. A network load balancer should also be considered so that server requests are balanced.
-
-
-
App-V 5.0 Client
-
The App-V 5.0 client enables packages created using App-V 5.0 to run on target computers.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Note**
-If you are using App-V 5.0 with Electronic Software Distribution (ESD) you are not required to use the App-V 5.0 Management server, however you can still utilize the reporting and streaming functionality of App-V 5.0.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Getting Started with App-V 5.0](getting-started-with-app-v-50--rtm.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/high-level-architecture-for-app-v-51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/high-level-architecture-for-app-v-51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index af616233b3..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/high-level-architecture-for-app-v-51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,91 +0,0 @@
----
-title: High Level Architecture for App-V 5.1
-description: High Level Architecture for App-V 5.1
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 90406361-55b8-40b7-85c0-449436789d4c
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# High Level Architecture for App-V 5.1
-
-
-Use the following information to help you simplify you Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 deployment.
-
-## Architecture Overview
-
-
-A typical App-V 5.1 implementation consists of the following elements.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Element
-
More information
-
-
-
-
-
App-V 5.1 Management Server
-
The App-V 5.1 Management server provides overall management functionality for the App-V 5.1 infrastructure. Additionally, you can install more than one instance of the management server in your environment which provides the following benefits:
-
-
Fault Tolerance and High Availability – Installing and configuring the App-V 5.1 Management server on two separate computers can help in situations when one of the servers is unavailable or offline.
-
You can also help increase App-V 5.1 availability by installing the Management server on multiple computers. In this scenario, a network load balancer should also be considered so that server requests are balanced.
-
Scalability – You can add additional management servers as necessary to support a high load, for example you can install multiple servers behind a load balancer.
-
-
-
-
App-V 5.1 Publishing Server
-
The App-V 5.1 publishing server provides functionality for virtual application hosting and streaming. The publishing server does not require a database connection and supports the following protocols:
-
-
HTTP, and HTTPS
-
-
You can also help increase App-V 5.1 availability by installing the Publishing server on multiple computers. A network load balancer should also be considered so that server requests are balanced.
-
-
-
App-V 5.1 Reporting Server
-
The App-V 5.1 Reporting server enables authorized users to run and view existing App-V 5.1 reports and ad hoc reports that can help them manage the App-V 5.1 infrastructure. The Reporting server requires a connection to the App-V 5.1 reporting database. You can also help increase App-V 5.1 availability by installing the Reporting server on multiple computers. A network load balancer should also be considered so that server requests are balanced.
-
-
-
App-V 5.1 Client
-
The App-V 5.1 client enables packages created using App-V 5.1 to run on target computers.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Note**
-If you are using App-V 5.1 with Electronic Software Distribution (ESD) you are not required to use the App-V 5.1 Management server, however you can still utilize the reporting and streaming functionality of App-V 5.1.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Getting Started with App-V 5.1](getting-started-with-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-access-the-client-management-console.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-access-the-client-management-console.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 90164220e0..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-access-the-client-management-console.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Access the Client Management Console
-description: How to Access the Client Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 3f6303c7-f953-4623-8211-c20d1faa846b
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Access the Client Management Console
-
-
-Use the App-V 5.0 client management console to manage packages on the computer running the App-V 5.0 client.
-
-**Note**
-To perform all of the actions available using the client management console, you must have administrative access on the computer running the App-V 5.0 client.
-
-
-
-Use the following procedure to access the client management console.
-
-**To access the client management console**
-
-1. On the computer running the App-V 5.0 client, click **Start** and select **Microsoft Application Virtualization Client**.
-
- **Note**
- For computers running the App-V 5.0 Remote Desktop Services client version, to access client management console follow step 1 of this procedure on the server running the client.
-
-
-
-2. When the App-V 5.0 client management console is displayed, click the tab you want to review and perform any required tasks. For more information about the client management console tasks see, [Using the App-V 5.0 Client Management Console](using-the-app-v-50-client-management-console.md).
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-access-the-client-management-console51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-access-the-client-management-console51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e98a45a0a3..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-access-the-client-management-console51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Access the Client Management Console
-description: How to Access the Client Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 22131251-acd5-44e7-a30b-7d389c518b6f
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Access the Client Management Console
-
-
-Use the App-V 5.1 client management console to manage packages on the computer running the App-V 5.1 client.
-
-**Note**
-To perform all of the actions available using the client management console, you must have administrative access on the computer running the App-V 5.1 client.
-
-
-
-Use the following procedure to access the client management console.
-
-**To access the client management console**
-
-1. On the computer running the App-V 5.1 client, click **Start** and select **Microsoft Application Virtualization Client**.
-
- **Note**
- For computers running the App-V 5.1 Remote Desktop Services client version, to access client management console follow step 1 of this procedure on the server running the client.
-
-
-
-2. When the App-V 5.1 client management console is displayed, click the tab you want to review and perform any required tasks. For more information about the client management console tasks see, [Using the App-V 5.1 Client Management Console](using-the-app-v-51-client-management-console.md).
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-add-or-remove-an-administrator-by-using-the-management-console.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-add-or-remove-an-administrator-by-using-the-management-console.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7f2daaca8d..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-add-or-remove-an-administrator-by-using-the-management-console.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Add or Remove an Administrator by Using the Management Console
-description: How to Add or Remove an Administrator by Using the Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 0e8ab443-1931-4b1a-95df-6ccbecc9efc5
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Add or Remove an Administrator by Using the Management Console
-
-
-Use the following procedures to add or remove an administrator on the App-V 5.0 server.
-
-**To add an administrator using the Management Console**
-
-1. Open the App-V 5.0 Management Console and click **Administrators** in the navigation pane. The navigation pane displays a list of Access Directory (AD) users and groups that currently have administrative access to the App-V 5.0 server.
-
-2. To add a new administrator, click **Add Administrator** Type the name of the administrator that you want to add in the **Active Directory Name** field. Ensure you provide the associated user account domain name. For example, **Domain** \\ **UserName**.
-
-3. Select the account that you want to add and click **Add**. The new account is displayed in the list of server administrators.
-
-**To remove an administrator using the Management Console**
-
-1. Open the App-V 5.0 Management Console and click **Administrators** in the navigation pane. The navigation pane displays a list of AD users and groups that currently have administrative access to the App-V 5.0 server.
-
-2. Right-click the account to be removed from the list of administrators and select **Remove**.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-add-or-remove-an-administrator-by-using-the-management-console51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-add-or-remove-an-administrator-by-using-the-management-console51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e4d9c802e9..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-add-or-remove-an-administrator-by-using-the-management-console51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Add or Remove an Administrator by Using the Management Console
-description: How to Add or Remove an Administrator by Using the Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 7ff8c436-9d2e-446a-9ea2-bbab7e25bf21
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Add or Remove an Administrator by Using the Management Console
-
-
-Use the following procedures to add or remove an administrator on the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 server.
-
-**To add an administrator using the Management Console**
-
-1. Open the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 Management Console and click **Administrators** in the navigation pane. The navigation pane displays a list of Access Directory (AD) users and groups that currently have administrative access to the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 server.
-
-2. To add a new administrator, click **Add Administrator** Type the name of the administrator that you want to add in the **Active Directory Name** field. Ensure you provide the associated user account domain name. For example, **Domain** \\ **UserName**.
-
-3. Select the account that you want to add and click **Add**. The new account is displayed in the list of server administrators.
-
-**To remove an administrator using the Management Console**
-
-1. Open the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 Management Console and click **Administrators** in the navigation pane. The navigation pane displays a list of AD users and groups that currently have administrative access to the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 server.
-
-2. Right-click the account to be removed from the list of administrators and select **Remove**.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-add-or-upgrade-packages-by-using-the-management-console-51-gb18030.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-add-or-upgrade-packages-by-using-the-management-console-51-gb18030.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0d643c8054..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-add-or-upgrade-packages-by-using-the-management-console-51-gb18030.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Add or Upgrade Packages by Using the Management Console
-description: How to Add or Upgrade Packages by Using the Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 62417b63-06b2-437c-8584-523e1dea97c3
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Add or Upgrade Packages by Using the Management Console
-
-
-You can the following procedure to add or upgrade a package to the App-V 5.1 Management Console. To upgrade a package that already exists in the Management Console, use the following steps and import the upgraded package using the same package **Name**.
-
-**To add a package to the Management Console**
-
-1. Click the **Packages** tab in the navigation pane of the Management Console display.
-
- The console displays the list of packages that have been added to the server along with status information about each package. When a package is selected, detailed information about the package is displayed in the **PACKAGES** pane.
-
- Click the **Ungrouped** drop-down list box and specify how the packages are to be displayed in the console. You can also click the associated column header to sort the packages.
-
-2. To specify the package you want to add, click **Add or Upgrade Packages**.
-
-3. Type the full path to the package that you want to add. Use the UNC or HTTP path format, for example **\\\\servername\\sharename\\foldername\\packagename.appv** or **http://server.1234/file.appv**, and then click **Add**.
-
- **Important**
- You must select a package with the **.appv** file name extension.
-
-
-
-4. The page displays the status message **Adding <Packagename>**. Click **IMPORT STATUS** to check the status of a package that you have imported.
-
- Click **OK** to add the package and close the **Add Package** page. If there was an error during the import, click **Detail** on the **Package Import** page for more information. The newly added package is now available in the **PACKAGES** pane.
-
-5. Click **Close** to close the **Add or Upgrade Packages** page.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-add-or-upgrade-packages-by-using-the-management-console-beta-gb18030.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-add-or-upgrade-packages-by-using-the-management-console-beta-gb18030.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ac3caca510..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-add-or-upgrade-packages-by-using-the-management-console-beta-gb18030.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Add or Upgrade Packages by Using the Management Console
-description: How to Add or Upgrade Packages by Using the Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 4e389d7e-f402-44a7-bc4c-42c2a8440573
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Add or Upgrade Packages by Using the Management Console
-
-
-You can the following procedure to add or upgrade a package to the App-V 5.0 Management Console. To upgrade a package that already exists in the Management Console, use the following steps and import the upgraded package using the same package **Name**.
-
-**To add a package to the Management Console**
-
-1. Click the **Packages** tab in the navigation pane of the Management Console display.
-
- The console displays the list of packages that have been added to the server along with status information about each package. When a package is selected, detailed information about the package is displayed in the **PACKAGES** pane.
-
- Click the **Ungrouped** drop-down list box and specify how the packages are to be displayed in the console. You can also click the associated column header to sort the packages.
-
-2. To specify the package you want to add, click **Add or Upgrade Packages**.
-
-3. Type the full path to the package that you want to add. Use the UNC or HTTP path format, for example **\\\\servername\\sharename\\foldername\\packagename.appv** or **http://server.1234/file.appv**, and then click **Add**.
-
- **Important**
- You must select a package with the **.appv** file name extension.
-
-
-
-4. The page displays the status message **Adding <Packagename>**. Click **IMPORT STATUS** to check the status of a package that you have imported.
-
- Click **OK** to add the package and close the **Add Package** page. If there was an error during the import, click **Detail** on the **Package Import** page for more information. The newly added package is now available in the **PACKAGES** pane.
-
-5. Click **Close** to close the **Add or Upgrade Packages** page.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-allow-only-administrators-to-enable-connection-groups.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-allow-only-administrators-to-enable-connection-groups.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ac99282ee1..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-allow-only-administrators-to-enable-connection-groups.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,75 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Allow Only Administrators to Enable Connection Groups
-description: How to Allow Only Administrators to Enable Connection Groups
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 60e62426-624f-4f26-851e-41cd78520883
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Allow Only Administrators to Enable Connection Groups
-
-
-You can configure the App-V client so that only administrators (not end users) can enable or disable connection groups. In earlier versions of App-V, you could not prevent end users from performing these tasks.
-
-**Note**
-**This feature is supported starting in App-V 5.0 SP3.**
-
-
-
-Use one of the following methods to allow only administrators to enable or disable connection groups.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Method
-
Steps
-
-
-
-
-
Group Policy setting
-
Enable the “Require publish as administrator” Group Policy setting, which is located in the following Group Policy Object node:
-
-
-
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-allow-only-administrators-to-enable-connection-groups51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-allow-only-administrators-to-enable-connection-groups51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1a6a35f007..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-allow-only-administrators-to-enable-connection-groups51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,75 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Allow Only Administrators to Enable Connection Groups
-description: How to Allow Only Administrators to Enable Connection Groups
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 42ca3157-5d85-467b-a148-09404f8f737a
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Allow Only Administrators to Enable Connection Groups
-
-
-You can configure the App-V client so that only administrators (not end users) can enable or disable connection groups. In earlier versions of App-V, you could not prevent end users from performing these tasks.
-
-**Note**
-**This feature is supported starting in App-V 5.0 SP3.**
-
-
-
-Use one of the following methods to allow only administrators to enable or disable connection groups.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Method
-
Steps
-
-
-
-
-
Group Policy setting
-
Enable the “Require publish as administrator” Group Policy setting, which is located in the following Group Policy Object node:
-
-
-
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-apply-the-deployment-configuration-file-by-using-powershell.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-apply-the-deployment-configuration-file-by-using-powershell.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 3f0b9b7a68..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-apply-the-deployment-configuration-file-by-using-powershell.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Apply the Deployment Configuration File by Using PowerShell
-description: How to Apply the Deployment Configuration File by Using PowerShell
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 5df5d5bc-6c72-4087-8b93-d6d4b502a1f4
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Apply the Deployment Configuration File by Using PowerShell
-
-
-The dynamic deployment configuration file is applied when a package is added or set to a computer running the App-V 5.0 client before the package has been published. The file configures the default settings for package for all users on the computer running the App-V 5.0 client. This section describes the steps used to use a deployment configuration file. The procedure is based on the following example and assumes the following package and configuration files exist on a computer:
-
-**c:\\Packages\\Contoso\\MyApp.appv**
-
-**c:\\Packages\\Contoso\\DynamicConfigurations\\deploymentconfig.xml**
-
-**To Apply the Deployment Configuration File Using PowerShell**
-
-- To specify a new default set of configurations for all users who will run the package on a specific computer, using a PowerShell console type the following:
-
- **Add-AppVClientPackage –Path c:\\Packages\\Contoso\\MyApp.appv -DynamicDeploymentConfiguration c:\\Packages\\Contoso\\DynamicConfigurations\\deploymentconfig.xml**
-
- **Note**
- This command captures the resulting object into $pkg. If the package is already present on the computer, the **Set-AppVclientPackage** cmdlet can be used to apply the deployment configuration document:
-
- **Set-AppVClientPackage –Name Myapp –Path c:\\Packages\\Contoso\\MyApp.appv -DynamicDeploymentConfiguration c:\\Packages\\Contoso\\DynamicConfigurations\\deploymentconfig.xml**
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-~~~
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-apply-the-deployment-configuration-file-by-using-powershell51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-apply-the-deployment-configuration-file-by-using-powershell51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index dac9fedce1..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-apply-the-deployment-configuration-file-by-using-powershell51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Apply the Deployment Configuration File by Using PowerShell
-description: How to Apply the Deployment Configuration File by Using PowerShell
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 78fe0f15-4a36-41e3-96d6-7d5aa77c1e06
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Apply the Deployment Configuration File by Using PowerShell
-
-
-The dynamic deployment configuration file is applied when a package is added or set to a computer running the App-V 5.1 client before the package has been published. The file configures the default settings for package for all users on the computer running the App-V 5.1 client. This section describes the steps used to use a deployment configuration file. The procedure is based on the following example and assumes the following package and configuration files exist on a computer:
-
-**c:\\Packages\\Contoso\\MyApp.appv**
-
-**c:\\Packages\\Contoso\\DynamicConfigurations\\deploymentconfig.xml**
-
-**To Apply the Deployment Configuration File Using PowerShell**
-
-- To specify a new default set of configurations for all users who will run the package on a specific computer, using a PowerShell console type the following:
-
- **Add-AppVClientPackage –Path c:\\Packages\\Contoso\\MyApp.appv -DynamicDeploymentConfiguration c:\\Packages\\Contoso\\DynamicConfigurations\\deploymentconfig.xml**
-
- **Note**
- This command captures the resulting object into $pkg. If the package is already present on the computer, the **Set-AppVclientPackage** cmdlet can be used to apply the deployment configuration document:
-
- **Set-AppVClientPackage –Name Myapp –Path c:\\Packages\\Contoso\\MyApp.appv -DynamicDeploymentConfiguration c:\\Packages\\Contoso\\DynamicConfigurations\\deploymentconfig.xml**
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-~~~
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-apply-the-user-configuration-file-by-using-powershell.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-apply-the-user-configuration-file-by-using-powershell.md
deleted file mode 100644
index bf8e5bc775..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-apply-the-user-configuration-file-by-using-powershell.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Apply the User Configuration File by Using PowerShell
-description: How to Apply the User Configuration File by Using PowerShell
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: f7d7c595-4fdd-4096-b53d-9eead111c339
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Apply the User Configuration File by Using PowerShell
-
-
-The dynamic user configuration file is applied when a package is published to a specific user and determines how the package will run.
-
-Use the following procedure to specify a user-specific configuration file. The following procedure is based on the example:
-
-**c:\\Packages\\Contoso\\MyApp.appv**
-
-**To apply a user Configuration file**
-
-1. To add the package to the computer using the PowerShell console type the following command:
-
- **Add-AppVClientPackage c:\\Packages\\Contoso\\MyApp.appv**.
-
-2. Use the following command to publish the package to the user and specify the updated the dynamic user configuration file:
-
- **Publish-AppVClientPackage $pkg –DynamicUserConfigurationPath c:\\Packages\\Contoso\\config.xml**
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-apply-the-user-configuration-file-by-using-powershell51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-apply-the-user-configuration-file-by-using-powershell51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 9ef045bf7b..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-apply-the-user-configuration-file-by-using-powershell51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Apply the User Configuration File by Using PowerShell
-description: How to Apply the User Configuration File by Using PowerShell
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 986e638c-4a0c-4a7e-be73-f4615e8b8000
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Apply the User Configuration File by Using PowerShell
-
-
-The dynamic user configuration file is applied when a package is published to a specific user and determines how the package will run.
-
-Use the following procedure to specify a user-specific configuration file. The following procedure is based on the example:
-
-**c:\\Packages\\Contoso\\MyApp.appv**
-
-**To apply a user Configuration file**
-
-1. To add the package to the computer using the PowerShell console type the following command:
-
- **Add-AppVClientPackage c:\\Packages\\Contoso\\MyApp.appv**.
-
-2. Use the following command to publish the package to the user and specify the updated the dynamic user configuration file:
-
- **Publish-AppVClientPackage $pkg –DynamicUserConfigurationPath c:\\Packages\\Contoso\\config.xml**
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-configure-access-to-packages-by-using-the-management-console-50.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-configure-access-to-packages-by-using-the-management-console-50.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b09260f550..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-configure-access-to-packages-by-using-the-management-console-50.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,77 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Configure Access to Packages by Using the Management Console
-description: How to Configure Access to Packages by Using the Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 8f4c91e4-f4e6-48cf-aa94-6085a054e8f7
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Configure Access to Packages by Using the Management Console
-
-
-Before you deploy an App-V 5.0 virtualized package, you must configure the Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) security groups that will be allowed to access and run the applications. The security groups may contain computers or users. Entitling a package to a computer group publishes the package globally to all computers in the group.
-
-Use the following procedure to configure access to virtualized packages.
-
-**To grant access to an App-V 5.0 package**
-
-1. Find the package you want to configure:
-
- 1. Open the App-V 5.0 Management console.
-
- 2. To display the **AD ACCESS** page, right-click the package to be configured, and select **Edit active directory access**. Alternatively, select the package and click **EDIT** in the **AD ACCESS** pane.
-
-2. Provision a security group for the package:
-
- 1. Go to the **FIND VALID ACTIVE DIRECTORY NAMES AND GRANT ACCESS** page.
-
- 2. Using the format **mydomain** \\ **groupname**, type the name or part of the name of an Active Directory group object, and click **Check**.
-
- **Note**
- Ensure that you provide an associated domain name for the group that you are searching for.
-
-
-
-3. To grant access to the package, select the desired group and click **Grant Access**. The newly added group is displayed in the **AD ENTITIES WITH ACCESS** pane.
-
-4.
-
- To accept the default configuration settings and close the **AD ACCESS** page, click **Close**.
-
- To customize configurations for a specific group, click the **ASSIGNED CONFIGURATIONS** drop-down and select **Custom**. To configure the custom configurations, click **EDIT**. After you grant access, click **Close**.
-
-**To remove access to an App-V 5.0 package**
-
-1. Find the package you want to configure:
-
- 1. Open the App-V 5.0 Management console.
-
- 2. To display the **AD ACCESS** page, right-click the package to be configured, and select **Edit active directory access**. Alternatively, select the package and click **EDIT** in the **AD ACCESS** pane.
-
-2. Select the group you want to remove, and click **DELETE**.
-
-3. To close the **AD ACCESS** page, click **Close**.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-configure-access-to-packages-by-using-the-management-console-51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-configure-access-to-packages-by-using-the-management-console-51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b7683c7b78..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-configure-access-to-packages-by-using-the-management-console-51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,77 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Configure Access to Packages by Using the Management Console
-description: How to Configure Access to Packages by Using the Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 4fd39bc2-d814-46de-a108-1c21fa404e8a
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Configure Access to Packages by Using the Management Console
-
-
-Before you deploy an App-V 5.1 virtualized package, you must configure the Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) security groups that will be allowed to access and run the applications. The security groups may contain computers or users. Entitling a package to a computer group publishes the package globally to all computers in the group.
-
-Use the following procedure to configure access to virtualized packages.
-
-**To grant access to an App-V 5.1 package**
-
-1. Find the package you want to configure:
-
- 1. Open the App-V 5.1 Management console.
-
- 2. To display the **AD ACCESS** page, right-click the package to be configured, and select **Edit active directory access**. Alternatively, select the package and click **EDIT** in the **AD ACCESS** pane.
-
-2. Provision a security group for the package:
-
- 1. Go to the **FIND VALID ACTIVE DIRECTORY NAMES AND GRANT ACCESS** page.
-
- 2. Using the format **mydomain** \\ **groupname**, type the name or part of the name of an Active Directory group object, and click **Check**.
-
- **Note**
- Ensure that you provide an associated domain name for the group that you are searching for.
-
-
-
-3. To grant access to the package, select the desired group and click **Grant Access**. The newly added group is displayed in the **AD ENTITIES WITH ACCESS** pane.
-
-4.
-
- To accept the default configuration settings and close the **AD ACCESS** page, click **Close**.
-
- To customize configurations for a specific group, click the **ASSIGNED CONFIGURATIONS** drop-down and select **Custom**. To configure the custom configurations, click **EDIT**. After you grant access, click **Close**.
-
-**To remove access to an App-V 5.1 package**
-
-1. Find the package you want to configure:
-
- 1. Open the App-V 5.1 Management console.
-
- 2. To display the **AD ACCESS** page, right-click the package to be configured, and select **Edit active directory access**. Alternatively, select the package and click **EDIT** in the **AD ACCESS** pane.
-
-2. Select the group you want to remove, and click **DELETE**.
-
-3. To close the **AD ACCESS** page, click **Close**.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-configure-the-client-to-receive-package-and-connection-groups-updates-from-the-publishing-server-51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-configure-the-client-to-receive-package-and-connection-groups-updates-from-the-publishing-server-51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8e6b0c9389..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-configure-the-client-to-receive-package-and-connection-groups-updates-from-the-publishing-server-51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,87 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Configure the Client to Receive Package and Connection Groups Updates From the Publishing Server
-description: How to Configure the Client to Receive Package and Connection Groups Updates From the Publishing Server
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 23b2d03a-20ce-4973-99ee-748f3b682207
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Configure the Client to Receive Package and Connection Groups Updates From the Publishing Server
-
-
-Deploying packages and connection groups using the App-V 5.1 publishing server is helpful because it offers single-point management and high scalability.
-
-Use the following steps to configure the App-V 5.1 client to receive updates from the publishing server.
-
-**Note**
-For the following procedures the management server was installed on a computer named **MyMgmtSrv**, and the publishing server was installed on a computer named **MyPubSrv**.
-
-
-
-**To configure the App-V 5.1 client to receive updates from the publishing server**
-
-1. Deploy the App-V 5.1 management and publishing servers, and add the required packages and connection groups. For more information about adding packages and connection groups, see [How to Add or Upgrade Packages by Using the Management Console](how-to-add-or-upgrade-packages-by-using-the-management-console-51-gb18030.md) and [How to Create a Connection Group](how-to-create-a-connection-group51.md).
-
-2. To open the management console click the following link, open a browser and type the following: http://MyMgmtSrv/AppvManagement/Console.html in a web browser, and import, publish, and entitle all the packages and connection groups which will be necessary for a particular set of users.
-
-3. On the computer running the App-V 5.1 client, open an elevated PowerShell command prompt, run the following command:
-
- **Add-AppvPublishingServer -Name ABC -URL http:// MyPubSrv/AppvPublishing**
-
- This command will configure the specified publishing server. You should see output similar to the following:
-
- Id : 1
-
- SetByGroupPolicy : False
-
- Name : ABC
-
- URL : http:// MyPubSrv/AppvPublishing
-
- GlobalRefreshEnabled : False
-
- GlobalRefreshOnLogon : False
-
- GlobalRefreshInterval : 0
-
- GlobalRefreshIntervalUnit : Day
-
- UserRefreshEnabled : True
-
- UserRefreshOnLogon : True
-
- UserRefreshInterval : 0
-
- UserRefreshIntervalUnit : Day
-
- The returned Id – in this case 1
-
-4. On the computer running the App-V 5.1 client, open a PowerShell command prompt, and type the following command:
-
- **Sync-AppvPublishingServer -ServerId 1**
-
- The command will query the publishing server for the packages and connection groups that need to be added or removed for this particular client based on the entitlements for the packages and connection groups as configured on the management server.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-configure-the-client-to-receive-package-and-connection-groups-updates-from-the-publishing-server-beta.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-configure-the-client-to-receive-package-and-connection-groups-updates-from-the-publishing-server-beta.md
deleted file mode 100644
index fd12886881..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-configure-the-client-to-receive-package-and-connection-groups-updates-from-the-publishing-server-beta.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,87 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Configure the Client to Receive Package and Connection Groups Updates From the Publishing Server
-description: How to Configure the Client to Receive Package and Connection Groups Updates From the Publishing Server
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: f5dfd96d-4b63-468c-8d93-9dfdf47c28fd
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Configure the Client to Receive Package and Connection Groups Updates From the Publishing Server
-
-
-Deploying packages and connection groups using the App-V 5.0 publishing server is helpful because it offers single-point management and high scalability.
-
-Use the following steps to configure the App-V 5.0 client to receive updates from the publishing server.
-
-**Note**
-For the following procedures the management server was installed on a computer named **MyMgmtSrv**, and the publishing server was installed on a computer named **MyPubSrv**.
-
-
-
-**To configure the App-V 5.0 client to receive updates from the publishing server**
-
-1. Deploy the App-V 5.0 management and publishing servers, and add the required packages and connection groups. For more information about adding packages and connection groups, see [How to Add or Upgrade Packages by Using the Management Console](how-to-add-or-upgrade-packages-by-using-the-management-console-beta-gb18030.md) and [How to Create a Connection Group](how-to-create-a-connection-group.md).
-
-2. To open the management console click the following link, open a browser and type the following: http://MyMgmtSrv/AppvManagement/Console.html in a web browser, and import, publish, and entitle all the packages and connection groups which will be necessary for a particular set of users.
-
-3. On the computer running the App-V 5.0 client, open an elevated PowerShell command prompt, run the following command:
-
- **Add-AppvPublishingServer -Name ABC -URL http:// MyPubSrv/AppvPublishing**
-
- This command will configure the specified publishing server. You should see output similar to the following:
-
- Id : 1
-
- SetByGroupPolicy : False
-
- Name : ABC
-
- URL : http:// MyPubSrv/AppvPublishing
-
- GlobalRefreshEnabled : False
-
- GlobalRefreshOnLogon : False
-
- GlobalRefreshInterval : 0
-
- GlobalRefreshIntervalUnit : Day
-
- UserRefreshEnabled : True
-
- UserRefreshOnLogon : True
-
- UserRefreshInterval : 0
-
- UserRefreshIntervalUnit : Day
-
- The returned Id – in this case 1
-
-4. On the computer running the App-V 5.0 client, open a PowerShell command prompt, and type the following command:
-
- **Sync-AppvPublishingServer -ServerId 1**
-
- The command will query the publishing server for the packages and connection groups that need to be added or removed for this particular client based on the entitlements for the packages and connection groups as configured on the management server.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-connect-to-the-management-console-51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-connect-to-the-management-console-51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b6144f08ac..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-connect-to-the-management-console-51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Connect to the Management Console
-description: How to Connect to the Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 5a15ed86-7db7-4df3-80ca-bde26f3285e1
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Connect to the Management Console
-
-
-Use the following procedure to connect to the App-V 5.1 Management Console.
-
-**To connect to the App-V 5.1 Management Console**
-
-1. Open Internet Explorer browser and type the address for the App-V 5.1. For example, **http://<Management server name>:<Management service port number>/Console.html**.
-
-2. To view different sections of the console, click the desired section in the navigation pane.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-connect-to-the-management-console-beta.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-connect-to-the-management-console-beta.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a460c12f62..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-connect-to-the-management-console-beta.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Connect to the Management Console
-description: How to Connect to the Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 67dfdfa1-e7dd-4c5e-aa50-f016bd1dc643
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Connect to the Management Console
-
-
-Use the following procedure to connect to the App-V 5.0 Management Console.
-
-**To connect to the App-V 5.0 Management Console**
-
-1. Open Internet Explorer browser and type the address for the App-V 5.0. For example, **http://<Management server name>:<Management service port number>/Console.html**.
-
-2. To view different sections of the console, click the desired section in the navigation pane.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-convert-a-package-created-in-a-previous-version-of-app-v.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-convert-a-package-created-in-a-previous-version-of-app-v.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e1e6432a8a..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-convert-a-package-created-in-a-previous-version-of-app-v.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,83 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Convert a Package Created in a Previous Version of App-V
-description: How to Convert a Package Created in a Previous Version of App-V
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: b092a5f8-cc5f-4df8-a5a2-0a68fd7bd5b2
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Convert a Package Created in a Previous Version of App-V
-
-
-You can use the package converter utility to upgrade virtual application packages that have been created with previous versions of App-V.
-
-**Note**
-If you are running a computer with a 64-bit architecture, you must use the x86 version of PowerShell.
-
-
-
-The package converter can only directly convert packages that were created by using the App-V 4.5 sequencer or a subsequent version. Packages that were created using a version prior to App-V 4.5 must be upgraded to the App-V 4.5 or App-V 4.6 format before conversion.
-
-The following information provides direction for converting existing virtual application packages.
-
-**Important**
-You must configure the package converter to always save the package ingredients file to a secure location and directory. A secure location is accessible only by an administrator. Additionally, when you deploy the package, you should save the package to a location that is secure, or make sure that no other user is allowed to be logged in during the conversion process.
-
-
-
-**Getting started**
-
-1. Install the App-V Sequencer on a computer in your environment. For information about how to install the Sequencer, see [How to Install the Sequencer](how-to-install-the-sequencer-beta-gb18030.md).
-
-2. Import the required Powershell Module
-
-```powershell
-Import-Module AppVPkgConverter
-```
-
-3. The following cmdlets are available:
-
- - Test-AppvLegacyPackage – This cmdlet is designed to check packages. It will return information about any failures with the package such as missing **.sft** files, an invalid source, **.osd** file errors, or invalid package version. This cmdlet will not parse the **.sft** file or do any in depth validation. For information about options and basic functionality for this cmdlet, using the PowerShell cmdline, type `Test-AppvLegacyPackage -?`.
-
- - ConvertFrom-AppvLegacyPackage – To convert an existing package, type `ConvertFrom-AppvLegacyPackage c:\contentStore c:\convertedPackages`. In this command, `c:\contentStore` represents the location of the existing package and `c:\convertedPackages` is the output directory to which the resulting App-V 5.0 virtual application package file will be saved. By default, if you do not specify a new name, the old package name will be used for the App-V 5.0 filename.
-
- Additionally, the package converter optimizes performance of packages in App-V 5.0 by setting the package to stream fault the App-V package. This is more performant than the primary feature block and fully downloading the package. The flag **DownloadFullPackageOnFirstLaunch** allows you to convert the package and set the package to be fully downloaded by default.
-
- **Note**
- Before you specify the output directory, you must create the output directory.
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Advanced Conversion Tips**
-
-- Piping - PowerShell supports piping. Piping allows you to call `dir c:\contentStore\myPackage | Test-AppvLegacyPackage`. In this example, the directory object that represents `myPackage` will be given as input to the `Test-AppvLegacyPackage` command and bound to the `-Source` parameter. Piping like this is especially useful when you want to batch commands together; for example, `dir .\ | Test-AppvLegacyPackage | ConvertFrom-AppvLegacyAppvPackage -Target .\ConvertedPackages`. This piped command would test the packages and then pass those objects on to actually be converted. You can also apply a filter on packages without errors or only specify a directory which contains an **.sprj** file or pipe them to another cmdlet that adds the filtered package to the server or publishes them to the App-V 5.0 client.
-
-- Batching - The PowerShell command enables batching. More specifically, the cmdlets support taking a string\[\] object for the `-Source` parameter which represents a list of directory paths. This allows you to enter `$packages = dir c:\contentStore` and then call `ConvertFrom-AppvLegacyAppvPackage-Source $packages -Target c:\ConvertedPackages` or to use piping and call `dir c:\ContentStore | ConvertFrom-AppvLegacyAppvPackage -Target C:\ConvertedPackages`.
-
-- Other functionality - PowerShell has other built-in functionality for features such as aliases, piping, lazy-binding, .NET object, and many others. All of these are usable in PowerShell and can help you create advanced scenarios for the Package Converter.
-
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-~~~
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-convert-a-package-created-in-a-previous-version-of-app-v51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-convert-a-package-created-in-a-previous-version-of-app-v51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b146f4dd7f..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-convert-a-package-created-in-a-previous-version-of-app-v51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,87 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Convert a Package Created in a Previous Version of App-V
-description: How to Convert a Package Created in a Previous Version of App-V
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 3366d399-2891-491d-8de1-f8cfdf39bbab
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Convert a Package Created in a Previous Version of App-V
-
-
-You can use the package converter utility to upgrade virtual application packages that have been created with previous versions of App-V.
-
-**Note**
-If you are running a computer with a 64-bit architecture, you must use the x86 version of PowerShell.
-
-
-
-The package converter can only directly convert packages that were created by using the App-V 4.5 sequencer or a subsequent version. Packages that were created using a version prior to App-V 4.5 must be upgraded to the App-V 4.5 or App-V 4.6 format before conversion.
-
-The following information provides direction for converting existing virtual application packages.
-
-**Important**
-You must configure the package converter to always save the package ingredients file to a secure location and directory. A secure location is accessible only by an administrator. Additionally, when you deploy the package, you should save the package to a location that is secure, or make sure that no other user is allowed to be logged in during the conversion process.
-
-
-
-**App-V 4.6 installation folder is redirected to virtual file system root**
-
-When you convert packages from App-V 4.6 to 5.1, the App-V 5.1 package can access the hardcoded drive that you were required to use when you created 4.6 packages. The drive letter will be the drive you selected as the installation drive on the 4.6 sequencing machine. (The default drive letter is Q:\\.)
-
-Prior to App-V 5.1, the 4.6 root folder was not recognized and could not be accessed by App-V 5.0 packages. Now, App-V 5.1 packages can access hardcoded files by their full path or can programmatically enumerate files under the App-V 4.6 installation root.
-
-**Technical Details:** The App-V 5.1 package converter will save the App-V 4.6 installation root folder and short folder names in the FilesystemMetadata.xml file in the Filesystem element. When the App-V 5.1 client creates the virtual process, it will map requests from the App-V 4.6 installation root to the virtual file system root.
-
-**Getting started**
-
-1. Install the App-V Sequencer on a computer in your environment. For information about how to install the Sequencer, see [How to Install the Sequencer](how-to-install-the-sequencer-51beta-gb18030.md).
-
-2.
-
- The following cmdlets are available:
-
- - Test-AppvLegacyPackage – This cmdlet is designed to check packages. It will return information about any failures with the package such as missing **.sft** files, an invalid source, **.osd** file errors, or invalid package version. This cmdlet will not parse the **.sft** file or do any in depth validation. For information about options and basic functionality for this cmdlet, using the PowerShell cmdline, type `Test-AppvLegacyPackage -?`.
-
- - ConvertFrom-AppvLegacyPackage – To convert an existing package, type `ConvertFrom-AppvLegacyPackage c:\contentStore c:\convertedPackages`. In this command, `c:\contentStore` represents the location of the existing package and `c:\convertedPackages` is the output directory to which the resulting App-V 5.1 virtual application package file will be saved. By default, if you do not specify a new name, the old package name will be used for the App-V 5.1 filename.
-
- Additionally, the package converter optimizes performance of packages in App-V 5.1 by setting the package to stream fault the App-V package. This is more performant than the primary feature block and fully downloading the package. The flag **DownloadFullPackageOnFirstLaunch** allows you to convert the package and set the package to be fully downloaded by default.
-
- **Note**
- Before you specify the output directory, you must create the output directory.
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Advanced Conversion Tips**
-
-- Piping - PowerShell supports piping. Piping allows you to call `dir c:\contentStore\myPackage | Test-AppvLegacyPackage`. In this example, the directory object that represents `myPackage` will be given as input to the `Test-AppvLegacyPackage` command and bound to the `-Source` parameter. Piping like this is especially useful when you want to batch commands together; for example, `dir .\ | Test-AppvLegacyPackage | ConvertFrom-AppvLegacyAppvPackage -Target .\ConvertedPackages`. This piped command would test the packages and then pass those objects on to actually be converted. You can also apply a filter on packages without errors or only specify a directory which contains an **.sprj** file or pipe them to another cmdlet that adds the filtered package to the server or publishes them to the App-V 5.1 client.
-
-- Batching - The PowerShell command enables batching. More specifically, the cmdlets support taking a string\[\] object for the `-Source` parameter which represents a list of directory paths. This allows you to enter `$packages = dir c:\contentStore` and then call `ConvertFrom-AppvLegacyAppvPackage-Source $packages -Target c:\ConvertedPackages` or to use piping and call `dir c:\ContentStore | ConvertFrom-AppvLegacyAppvPackage -Target C:\ConvertedPackages`.
-
-- Other functionality - PowerShell has other built-in functionality for features such as aliases, piping, lazy-binding, .NET object, and many others. All of these are usable in PowerShell and can help you create advanced scenarios for the Package Converter.
-
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-~~~
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-connection-group-with-user-published-and-globally-published-packages.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-connection-group-with-user-published-and-globally-published-packages.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f9ce72926a..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-connection-group-with-user-published-and-globally-published-packages.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,95 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Create a Connection Group with User-Published and Globally Published Packages
-description: How to Create a Connection Group with User-Published and Globally Published Packages
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 82f7ea7f-7b14-4506-8940-fdcd6c3e117f
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 11/01/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Create a Connection Group with User-Published and Globally Published Packages
-You can create user-entitled connection groups that contain both user-published and globally published packages, using either of the following methods:
-
-- [How to use PowerShell cmdlets to create the user-entitled connection groups](#bkmk-posh-userentitled-cg)
-
-- [How to use the App-V Server to create the user-entitled connection groups](#bkmk-appvserver-userentitled-cg)
-
-**What to know before you start:**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Unsupported scenarios and potential issues
-
Result
-
-
-
-
-
You cannot include user-published packages in globally entitled connection groups.
-
The connection group will fail.
-
-
-
If you publish a package globally and then create a user-published connection group in which you’ve made that package non-optional, you can still run Unpublish-AppvClientPackage <package> -global to unpublish the package, even when that package is being used in another connection group.
-
If any other connection groups are using that package, the package will fail in those connection groups.
-
To avoid inadvertently unpublishing a non-optional package that is being used in another connection group, we recommend that you track the connection groups in which you’ve used a non-optional package.
-
-
-
-
-
-**How to use PowerShell cmdlets to create user-entitled connection groups**
-
-1. Add and publish packages by using the following commands:
-
- **Add-AppvClientPackage Package1\_AppV\_file\_Path**
-
- **Add-AppvClientPackage Package2\_AppV\_file\_Path**
-
- **Publish-AppvClientPackage -PackageId Package1\_ID -VersionId Package1\_Version ID -Global**
-
- **Publish-AppvClientPackage -PackageId Package2\_ID -VersionId Package2\_ID**
-
-2. Create the connection group XML file. For more information, see [About the Connection Group File](about-the-connection-group-file.md).
-
-3. Add and publish the connection group by using the following commands:
-
- **Add-AppvClientConnectionGroup Connection\_Group\_XML\_file\_Path**
-
- **Enable-AppvClientConnectionGroup -GroupId CG\_Group\_ID -VersionId CG\_Version\_ID**
-
-**How to use the App-V Server to create user-entitled connection groups**
-
-1. Open the App-V 5.0 Management Console.
-
-2. Follow the instructions in [How to Publish a Package by Using the Management Console](how-to-publish-a-package-by-using-the-management-console-50.md) to publish packages globally and to the user.
-
-3. Follow the instructions in [How to Create a Connection Group](how-to-create-a-connection-group.md) to create the connection group, and add the user-published and globally published packages.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups.md)
-
-[How to Use Optional Packages in Connection Groups](how-to-use-optional-packages-in-connection-groups.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-connection-group-with-user-published-and-globally-published-packages51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-connection-group-with-user-published-and-globally-published-packages51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index fe42b5278b..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-connection-group-with-user-published-and-globally-published-packages51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,96 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Create a Connection Group with User-Published and Globally Published Packages
-description: How to Create a Connection Group with User-Published and Globally Published Packages
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 851b8742-0283-4aa6-b3a3-f7f6289824c3
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 11/01/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Create a Connection Group with User-Published and Globally Published Packages
-
-
-You can create user-entitled connection groups that contain both user-published and globally published packages, using either of the following methods:
-
-- [How to use PowerShell cmdlets to create the user-entitled connection groups](#bkmk-posh-userentitled-cg)
-
-- [How to use the App-V Server to create the user-entitled connection groups](#bkmk-appvserver-userentitled-cg)
-
-**What to know before you start:**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Unsupported scenarios and potential issues
-
Result
-
-
-
-
-
You cannot include user-published packages in globally entitled connection groups.
-
The connection group will fail.
-
-
-
If you publish a package globally and then create a user-published connection group in which you’ve made that package non-optional, you can still run Unpublish-AppvClientPackage <package> -global to unpublish the package, even when that package is being used in another connection group.
-
If any other connection groups are using that package, the package will fail in those connection groups.
-
To avoid inadvertently unpublishing a non-optional package that is being used in another connection group, we recommend that you track the connection groups in which you’ve used a non-optional package.
-
-
-
-
-**How to use PowerShell cmdlets to create user-entitled connection groups**
-
-1. Add and publish packages by using the following commands:
-
- **Add-AppvClientPackage Package1\_AppV\_file\_Path**
-
- **Add-AppvClientPackage Package2\_AppV\_file\_Path**
-
- **Publish-AppvClientPackage -PackageId Package1\_ID -VersionId Package1\_Version ID -Global**
-
- **Publish-AppvClientPackage -PackageId Package2\_ID -VersionId Package2\_ID**
-
-2. Create the connection group XML file. For more information, see [About the Connection Group File](about-the-connection-group-file51.md).
-
-3. Add and publish the connection group by using the following commands:
-
- **Add-AppvClientConnectionGroup Connection\_Group\_XML\_file\_Path**
-
- **Enable-AppvClientConnectionGroup -GroupId CG\_Group\_ID -VersionId CG\_Version\_ID**
-
-**How to use the App-V Server to create user-entitled connection groups**
-
-1. Open the App-V 5.1 Management Console.
-
-2. Follow the instructions in [How to Publish a Package by Using the Management Console](how-to-publish-a-package-by-using-the-management-console-51.md) to publish packages globally and to the user.
-
-3. Follow the instructions in [How to Create a Connection Group](how-to-create-a-connection-group51.md) to create the connection group, and add the user-published and globally published packages.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups51.md)
-
-[How to Use Optional Packages in Connection Groups](how-to-use-optional-packages-in-connection-groups51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-connection-group.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-connection-group.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 70a482f2c4..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-connection-group.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,65 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Create a Connection Group
-description: How to Create a Connection Group
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 9d272052-2d28-4e41-989c-89610482a0ca
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Create a Connection Group
-
-
-Use these steps to create a connection group by using the App-V Management Console. To use PowerShell to create connection groups, see [How to Manage Connection Groups on a Stand-alone Computer by Using PowerShell](how-to-manage-connection-groups-on-a-stand-alone-computer-by-using-powershell.md).
-
-When you place packages in a connection group, their package root paths are merged. If you remove packages, only the remaining packages maintain the merged root.
-
-**To create a connection group**
-
-1. In the App-V 5.0 Management Console, select **Packages**.
-
-2. Select **CONNECTION GROUPS** to display the Connection Groups library.
-
-3. Select **ADD CONNECTION GROUP** to create a new connection group.
-
-4. In the **New Connection Group** pane, type a description for the group.
-
-5. Click **EDIT** in the **CONNECTED PACKAGES** pane to add a new application to the connection group.
-
-6. In the **PACKAGES Entire Library** pane, select the application to be added, and click the arrow to add the application.
-
- To remove an application, select the application to be removed in the **PACKAGES IN** pane and click the arrow.
-
- To reprioritize the applications in your connection group, use the arrows in the **PACKAGES IN** pane.
-
- **Important**
- By default, the Active Directory Domain Services access configurations that are associated with a specific application are not added to the connection group. To transfer the Active Directory access configuration, select **ADD PACKAGE ACCESS TO GROUP ACCESS**, which is located in the **PACKAGES IN** pane.
-
-
-
-7. After adding all the applications and configuring Active Directory access, click **Apply**.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-[Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-connection-group51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-connection-group51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f5605affe1..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-connection-group51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,63 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Create a Connection Group
-description: How to Create a Connection Group
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 221e2eed-7ebb-42e3-b3d6-11c37c0578e6
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Create a Connection Group
-
-
-Use these steps to create a connection group by using the App-V Management Console. To use PowerShell to create connection groups, see [How to Manage Connection Groups on a Stand-alone Computer by Using PowerShell](how-to-manage-connection-groups-on-a-stand-alone-computer-by-using-powershell51.md).
-
-When you place packages in a connection group, their package root paths are merged. If you remove packages, only the remaining packages maintain the merged root.
-
-**To create a connection group**
-
-1. In the App-V 5.1 Management Console, select **CONNECTION GROUPS** to display the Connection Groups library.
-
-2. Select **ADD CONNECTION GROUP** to create a new connection group.
-
-3. In the **New Connection Group** pane, type a description for the group.
-
-4. Click **EDIT** in the **CONNECTED PACKAGES** pane to add a new application to the connection group.
-
-5. In the **PACKAGES Entire Library** pane, select the application to be added, and click the arrow to add the application.
-
- To remove an application, select the application to be removed in the **PACKAGES IN** pane and click the arrow.
-
- To reprioritize the applications in your connection group, use the arrows in the **PACKAGES IN** pane.
-
- **Important**
- By default, the Active Directory Domain Services access configurations that are associated with a specific application are not added to the connection group. To transfer the Active Directory access configuration, select **ADD PACKAGE ACCESS TO GROUP ACCESS**, which is located in the **PACKAGES IN** pane.
-
-
-
-6. After adding all the applications and configuring Active Directory access, click **Apply**.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-[Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-custom-configuration-file-by-using-the-app-v-50-management-console.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-custom-configuration-file-by-using-the-app-v-50-management-console.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4837568ff0..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-custom-configuration-file-by-using-the-app-v-50-management-console.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Create a Custom Configuration File by Using the App-V 5.0 Management Console
-description: How to Create a Custom Configuration File by Using the App-V 5.0 Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 0d1f6768-be30-4682-8eeb-aa95918b24c3
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Create a Custom Configuration File by Using the App-V 5.0 Management Console
-
-
-You can use a dynamic configuration to customize an App-V 5.0 package for a specific user. However, you must first create the dynamic user configuration (.xml) file or the dynamic deployment configuration file before you can use the files. Creation of the file is an advanced manual operation. For general information about dynamic user configuration files, see, [About App-V 5.0 Dynamic Configuration](about-app-v-50-dynamic-configuration.md).
-
-Use the following procedure to create a Dynamic User Configuration file by using the App-V 5.0 Management console.
-
-**To create a Dynamic User Configuration file**
-
-1. Right-click the name of the package that you want to view and select **Edit active directory access** to view the configuration that is assigned to a given user group. Alternatively, select the package, and click **Edit**.
-
-2. Using the list of **AD Entities with Access**, select the AD group that you want to customize. Select **Custom** from the drop-down list, if it is not already selected. A link named **Edit** will be displayed.
-
-3. Click **Edit**. The Dynamic User Configuration that is assigned to the AD Group will be displayed.
-
-4. Click **Advanced**, and then click **Export Configuration**. Type in a filename and click **Save**. Now you can edit the file to configure a package for a user.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-custom-configuration-file-by-using-the-app-v-51-management-console.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-custom-configuration-file-by-using-the-app-v-51-management-console.md
deleted file mode 100644
index eb1da74435..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-custom-configuration-file-by-using-the-app-v-51-management-console.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Create a Custom Configuration File by Using the App-V 5.1 Management Console
-description: How to Create a Custom Configuration File by Using the App-V 5.1 Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: f5ab426a-f49a-47b3-93f3-b9d60aada8f4
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Create a Custom Configuration File by Using the App-V 5.1 Management Console
-
-
-You can use a dynamic configuration to customize an App-V 5.1 package for a specific user. However, you must first create the dynamic user configuration (.xml) file or the dynamic deployment configuration file before you can use the files. Creation of the file is an advanced manual operation. For general information about dynamic user configuration files, see, [About App-V 5.1 Dynamic Configuration](about-app-v-51-dynamic-configuration.md).
-
-Use the following procedure to create a Dynamic User Configuration file by using the App-V 5.1 Management console.
-
-**To create a Dynamic User Configuration file**
-
-1. Right-click the name of the package that you want to view and select **Edit active directory access** to view the configuration that is assigned to a given user group. Alternatively, select the package, and click **Edit**.
-
-2. Using the list of **AD Entities with Access**, select the AD group that you want to customize. Select **Custom** from the drop-down list, if it is not already selected. A link named **Edit** will be displayed.
-
-3. Click **Edit**. The Dynamic User Configuration that is assigned to the AD Group will be displayed.
-
-4. Click **Advanced**, and then click **Export Configuration**. Type in a filename and click **Save**. Now you can edit the file to configure a package for a user.
-
- **Note**
- To export a configuration while running on Windows Server, you must disable "IE Enhanced Security Configuration". If this is enabled and set to block downloads, you cannot download anything from the App-V Server.
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-~~~
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-package-accelerator-by-using-powershell.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-package-accelerator-by-using-powershell.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0f7df5d66c..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-package-accelerator-by-using-powershell.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,60 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Create a Package Accelerator by Using PowerShell
-description: How to Create a Package Accelerator by Using PowerShell
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 8e527363-d961-4153-826a-446a4ad8d980
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Create a Package Accelerator by Using PowerShell
-
-
-App-V 5.0 package accelerators automatically sequence large, complex applications. Additionally, when you apply an App-V 5.0 package accelerator, you are not always required to manually install an application to create the virtualized package.
-
-**To create a package accelerator**
-
-1. Install the App-V 5.0 sequencer. For more information about installing the sequencer see [How to Install the Sequencer](how-to-install-the-sequencer-beta-gb18030.md).
-
-2. To open a PowerShell console click **Start** and type **PowerShell**. Right-click **Windows PowerShell** and select **Run as Administrator**. Use the **New-AppvPackageAccelerator** cmdlet.
-
-3. To create a package accelerator, make sure that you have the .appv package to create an accelerator from, the installation media or installation files, and optionally a read me file for consumers of the accelerator to use. The following parameters are required to use the package accelerator cmdlet:
-
- - **InstalledFilesPath** - specifies the application installation path.
-
- - **Installer** – specifies the path to the application installer media
-
- - **InputPackagePath** – specifies the path to the .appv package
-
- - **Path** – specifies the output directory for the package.
-
- The following example displays how you can create a package accelerator with an .appv package and the installation media:
-
- **New-AppvPackageAccelerator -InputPackagePath <path to the .appv file> -Installer <path to the installer executable> -Path <directory of the output path>**
-
- Additional optional parameters that can be used with the **New-AppvPackageAccelerator** cmdlet are displayed in the following list:
-
- - **AcceleratorDescriptionFile** - specifies the path to user created package accelerator instructions. The package accelerator instructions are **.txt** or **.rtf** description files that will be packaged with the package created using the package accelerator.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Administering App-V by Using PowerShell](administering-app-v-by-using-powershell.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-package-accelerator-by-using-powershell51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-package-accelerator-by-using-powershell51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ef6e767d58..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-package-accelerator-by-using-powershell51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,60 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Create a Package Accelerator by Using PowerShell
-description: How to Create a Package Accelerator by Using PowerShell
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 0cb98394-4477-4193-8c5f-1c1773c7263a
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Create a Package Accelerator by Using PowerShell
-
-
-App-V 5.1 package accelerators automatically sequence large, complex applications. Additionally, when you apply an App-V 5.1 package accelerator, you are not always required to manually install an application to create the virtualized package.
-
-**To create a package accelerator**
-
-1. Install the App-V 5.1 sequencer. For more information about installing the sequencer see [How to Install the Sequencer](how-to-install-the-sequencer-51beta-gb18030.md).
-
-2. To open a PowerShell console click **Start** and type **PowerShell**. Right-click **Windows PowerShell** and select **Run as Administrator**. Use the **New-AppvPackageAccelerator** cmdlet.
-
-3. To create a package accelerator, make sure that you have the .appv package to create an accelerator from, the installation media or installation files, and optionally a read me file for consumers of the accelerator to use. The following parameters are required to use the package accelerator cmdlet:
-
- - **InstalledFilesPath** - specifies the application installation path.
-
- - **Installer** – specifies the path to the application installer media
-
- - **InputPackagePath** – specifies the path to the .appv package
-
- - **Path** – specifies the output directory for the package.
-
- The following example displays how you can create a package accelerator with an .appv package and the installation media:
-
- **New-AppvPackageAccelerator -InputPackagePath <path to the .appv file> -Installer <path to the installer executable> -Path <directory of the output path>**
-
- Additional optional parameters that can be used with the **New-AppvPackageAccelerator** cmdlet are displayed in the following list:
-
- - **AcceleratorDescriptionFile** - specifies the path to user created package accelerator instructions. The package accelerator instructions are **.txt** or **.rtf** description files that will be packaged with the package created using the package accelerator.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Administering App-V 5.1 by Using PowerShell](administering-app-v-51-by-using-powershell.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-package-accelerator.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-package-accelerator.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b823c813a0..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-package-accelerator.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,118 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Create a Package Accelerator
-description: How to Create a Package Accelerator
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: dfe305e5-7cf8-498f-9581-4805ffc722bd
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Create a Package Accelerator
-
-
-App-V 5.0 package accelerators automatically generate new virtual application packages.
-
-**Note**
-You can use PowerShell to create a package accelerator. For more information see [How to Create a Package Accelerator by Using PowerShell](how-to-create-a-package-accelerator-by-using-powershell.md).
-
-
-
-Use the following procedure to create a package accelerator.
-
-**Important**
-Package Accelerators can contain password and user-specific information. Therefore you must save Package Accelerators and the associated installation media in a secure location, and you should digitally sign the Package Accelerator after you create it so that the publisher can be verified when the App-V 5.0 Package Accelerator is applied.
-
-
-
-**Important**
-Before you begin the following procedure, you should perform the following:
-
-- Copy the virtual application package that you will use to create the package accelerator locally to the computer running the sequencer.
-
-- Copy all required installation files associated with the virtual application package to the computer running the sequencer.
-
-
-
-**To create a package accelerator**
-
-1. **Important**
- The App-V 5.0 Sequencer does not grant any license rights to the software application you are using to create the Package Accelerator. You must abide by all end user license terms for the application you are using. It is your responsibility to make sure the software application’s license terms allow you to create a Package Accelerator using App-V 5.0 Sequencer.
-
-
-
-~~~
-To start the App-V 5.0 sequencer, on the computer that is running the sequencer, click **Start** / **All Programs** / **Microsoft Application Virtualization** / **Microsoft Application Virtualization Sequencer**.
-~~~
-
-2. To start the App-V 5.0 **Create Package Accelerator** wizard, in the App-V 5.0 sequencer console, click **Tools** / **Create Accelerator**.
-
-3. On the **Select Package** page, to specify an existing virtual application package to use to create the Package Accelerator, click **Browse**, and locate the existing virtual application package (.appv file).
-
- **Tip**
- Copy the files associated with the virtual application package you plan to use locally to the computer running the Sequencer.
-
-
-
-~~~
-Click **Next**.
-~~~
-
-4. On the **Installation Files** page, to specify the folder that contains the installation files that you used to create the original virtual application package, click **Browse**, and then select the directory that contains the installation files.
-
- **Tip**
- Copy the folder that contains the required installation files to the computer running the Sequencer.
-
-
-
-5. If the application is already installed on the computer running the sequencer, to specify the installation file, select **Files installed on local system**. To use this option, the application must already be installed in the default installation location.
-
-6. On the **Gathering Information** page, review the files that were not found in the location specified on the **Installation Files** page of this wizard. If the files displayed are not required, select **Remove these files**, and then click **Next**. If the files are required, click **Previous** and copy the required files to the directory specified on the **Installation Files** page.
-
- **Note**
- You must either remove the unrequired files, or click **Previous** and locate the required files to advance to the next page of this wizard.
-
-
-
-7. On the **Select Files** page, carefully review the files that were detected, and clear any file that should be removed from the package accelerator. Select only files that are required for the application to run successfully, and then click **Next**.
-
-8. On the **Verify Applications** page, confirm that all installation files that are required to build the package are displayed. When the Package Accelerator is used to create a new package, all installation files displayed in the **Applications** pane are required to create the package.
-
- If necessary, to add additional Installer files, click **Add**. To remove unnecessary installation files, select the Installer file, and then click **Delete**. To edit the properties associated with an installer, click **Edit**. The installation files specified in this step will be required when the Package Accelerator is used to create a new virtual application package. After you have confirmed the information displayed, click **Next**.
-
-9. On the **Select Guidance** page, to specify a file that contains information about how the Package Accelerator, click **Browse**. For example, this file can contain information about how the computer running the Sequencer should be configured, application prerequisite information for target computers, and general notes. You should provide all required information for the Package Accelerator to be successfully applied. The file you select must be in rich text (.rtf) or text file (.txt) format. Click **Next**.
-
-10. On the **Create Package Accelerator** page, to specify where to save the Package Accelerator, click **Browse** and select the directory.
-
-11. On the **Completion** page, to close the **Create Package Accelerator** wizard, click **Close**.
-
- **Important**
- To help ensure that the package accelerator is as secure as possible, and so that the publisher can be verified when the package accelerator is applied, you should always digitally sign the package accelerator.
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-~~~
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-[How to Create a Virtual Application Package Using an App-V Package Accelerator](how-to-create-a-virtual-application-package-using-an-app-v-package-accelerator.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-package-accelerator51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-package-accelerator51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 45092fa865..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-package-accelerator51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,118 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Create a Package Accelerator
-description: How to Create a Package Accelerator
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: b61f3581-7933-443e-b872-a96bed9ff8d7
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Create a Package Accelerator
-
-
-App-V 5.1 package accelerators automatically generate new virtual application packages.
-
-**Note**
-You can use PowerShell to create a package accelerator. For more information see [How to Create a Package Accelerator by Using PowerShell](how-to-create-a-package-accelerator-by-using-powershell51.md).
-
-
-
-Use the following procedure to create a package accelerator.
-
-**Important**
-Package Accelerators can contain password and user-specific information. Therefore you must save Package Accelerators and the associated installation media in a secure location, and you should digitally sign the Package Accelerator after you create it so that the publisher can be verified when the App-V 5.1 Package Accelerator is applied.
-
-
-
-**Important**
-Before you begin the following procedure, you should perform the following:
-
-- Copy the virtual application package that you will use to create the package accelerator locally to the computer running the sequencer.
-
-- Copy all required installation files associated with the virtual application package to the computer running the sequencer.
-
-
-
-**To create a package accelerator**
-
-1. **Important**
- The App-V 5.1 Sequencer does not grant any license rights to the software application you are using to create the Package Accelerator. You must abide by all end user license terms for the application you are using. It is your responsibility to make sure the software application’s license terms allow you to create a Package Accelerator using App-V 5.1 Sequencer.
-
-
-
-~~~
-To start the App-V 5.1 sequencer, on the computer that is running the sequencer, click **Start** / **All Programs** / **Microsoft Application Virtualization** / **Microsoft Application Virtualization Sequencer**.
-~~~
-
-2. To start the App-V 5.1 **Create Package Accelerator** wizard, in the App-V 5.1 sequencer console, click **Tools** / **Create Accelerator**.
-
-3. On the **Select Package** page, to specify an existing virtual application package to use to create the Package Accelerator, click **Browse**, and locate the existing virtual application package (.appv file).
-
- **Tip**
- Copy the files associated with the virtual application package you plan to use locally to the computer running the Sequencer.
-
-
-
-~~~
-Click **Next**.
-~~~
-
-4. On the **Installation Files** page, to specify the folder that contains the installation files that you used to create the original virtual application package, click **Browse**, and then select the directory that contains the installation files.
-
- **Tip**
- Copy the folder that contains the required installation files to the computer running the Sequencer.
-
-
-
-5. If the application is already installed on the computer running the sequencer, to specify the installation file, select **Files installed on local system**. To use this option, the application must already be installed in the default installation location.
-
-6. On the **Gathering Information** page, review the files that were not found in the location specified on the **Installation Files** page of this wizard. If the files displayed are not required, select **Remove these files**, and then click **Next**. If the files are required, click **Previous** and copy the required files to the directory specified on the **Installation Files** page.
-
- **Note**
- You must either remove the unrequired files, or click **Previous** and locate the required files to advance to the next page of this wizard.
-
-
-
-7. On the **Select Files** page, carefully review the files that were detected, and clear any file that should be removed from the package accelerator. Select only files that are required for the application to run successfully, and then click **Next**.
-
-8. On the **Verify Applications** page, confirm that all installation files that are required to build the package are displayed. When the Package Accelerator is used to create a new package, all installation files displayed in the **Applications** pane are required to create the package.
-
- If necessary, to add additional Installer files, click **Add**. To remove unnecessary installation files, select the Installer file, and then click **Delete**. To edit the properties associated with an installer, click **Edit**. The installation files specified in this step will be required when the Package Accelerator is used to create a new virtual application package. After you have confirmed the information displayed, click **Next**.
-
-9. On the **Select Guidance** page, to specify a file that contains information about how the Package Accelerator, click **Browse**. For example, this file can contain information about how the computer running the Sequencer should be configured, application prerequisite information for target computers, and general notes. You should provide all required information for the Package Accelerator to be successfully applied. The file you select must be in rich text (.rtf) or text file (.txt) format. Click **Next**.
-
-10. On the **Create Package Accelerator** page, to specify where to save the Package Accelerator, click **Browse** and select the directory.
-
-11. On the **Completion** page, to close the **Create Package Accelerator** wizard, click **Close**.
-
- **Important**
- To help ensure that the package accelerator is as secure as possible, and so that the publisher can be verified when the package accelerator is applied, you should always digitally sign the package accelerator.
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-~~~
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-[How to Create a Virtual Application Package Using an App-V Package Accelerator](how-to-create-a-virtual-application-package-using-an-app-v-package-accelerator51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-virtual-application-package-using-an-app-v-package-accelerator.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-virtual-application-package-using-an-app-v-package-accelerator.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d6752dc7b3..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-virtual-application-package-using-an-app-v-package-accelerator.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,108 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Create a Virtual Application Package Using an App-V Package Accelerator
-description: How to Create a Virtual Application Package Using an App-V Package Accelerator
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 715e7526-e100-419c-8fc1-75cbfe433835
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Create a Virtual Application Package Using an App-V Package Accelerator
-
-
-**Important**
-The App-V 5.0 Sequencer does not grant any license rights to the software application that you use to create the Package Accelerator. You must abide by all end user license terms for the application that you use. It is your responsibility to make sure that the software application’s license terms allow you to create a Package Accelerator with the App-V 5.0 Sequencer.
-
-
-
-Use the following procedure to create a virtual application package with the App-V 5.0 Package Accelerator.
-
-**Note**
-Before you start this procedure, copy the required Package Accelerator locally to the computer that runs the App-V 5.0 Sequencer. You should also copy all required installation files for the package to a local directory on the computer that runs the Sequencer. This is the directory that you have to specify in step 5 of this procedure.
-
-
-
-**To create a virtual application package with an App-V 5.0 Package Accelerator**
-
-1. To start the App-V Sequencer, on the computer that runs the App-V 5.0 Sequencer, click **Start** / **All Programs** / **Microsoft Application Virtualization** / **Microsoft Application Virtualization Sequencer**.
-
-2. To start the **Create New Package Wizard**, click **Create a New Virtual Application Package**. To create the package, select the **Create Package using a Package Accelerator** check box, and then click **Next**.
-
-3. To specify the package accelerator that will be used to create the new virtual application package, click **Browse** on the **Select Package Accelerator** page. Click **Next**.
-
- **Important**
- If the publisher of the package accelerator cannot be verified and does not contain a valid digital signature, then before you click **Run**, you must confirm that you trust the source of the package accelerator. Confirm your choice in the **Security Warning** dialog box.
-
-
-
-4. On the **Guidance** page, review the publishing guidance information that is displayed in the information pane. This information was added when the Package Accelerator was created and it contains guidance about how to create and publish the package. To export the guidance information to a text (.txt) file, click **Export** and specify the location where the file should be saved, and then click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Select Installation Files** page, click **Make New Folder** to create a local folder that contains all required installation files for the package, and specify where the folder should be saved. You must also specify a name to be assigned to the folder. You must then copy all required installation files to the location that you specified. If the folder that contains the installation files already exists on the computer that runs the Sequencer, click **Browse** to select the folder.
-
- Alternatively, if you have already copied the installation files to a directory on this computer, click **Make New Folder**, browse to the folder that contains the installation files, and then click **Next**.
-
- **Note**
- You can specify the following types of supported installation files:
-
- - Windows Installer files (**.msi**)
-
- - Cabinet files (.cab)
-
- - Compressed files with a .zip file name extension
-
- - The actual application files
-
- The following file types are not supported: **.msp** and **.exe** files. If you specify an **.exe** file, you must extract the installation files manually.
-
-
-
-~~~
-If the package accelerator requires an application to be installed before you apply the Package Accelerator, and if you have already installed the required application, select **I have installed all applications**, and then click **Next** on the **Local Installation** page.
-~~~
-
-6. On the **Package Name** page, specify a name that will be associated with the package. The name that you specify identifies the package in the App-V Management Console. Click **Next**.
-
-7. On the **Create Package** page, provide comments that will be associated with the package. The comments should contain identifying information about the package that you are creating. To confirm the location where the package is created, review the information that is displayed in **Save Location**. To compress the package, select **Compress Package**. Select the **Compress Package** check box if the package will be streamed across the network, or when the package size exceeds 4 GB.
-
- To create the package, click **Create**. After the package is created, click **Next**.
-
-8. On the **Configure Software** page, to enable the Sequencer to configure the applications that are contained in the package, select **Configure Software**. In this step you can configure any associated tasks that must be completed in order to run the application on the target computers. For example, you can configure any associated license agreements.
-
- If you select **Configure Software**, the following items can be configured using the Sequencer as part of this step:
-
- - **Load Package**. The Sequencer loads the files that are associated with the package. It can take several seconds to an hour to decode the package.
-
- - **Run Each Program**. Optionally run the programs that are contained in the package. This step is helpful to complete any associated license or configuration tasks that are required to run the application before you deploy and run the package on target computers. To run all the programs at once, select at least one program, and then click **Run All**. To run specific programs, select the program or programs that you want to run, and then click **Run Selected**. Complete the required configuration tasks, and then close the applications. It can take several minutes for all programs to run. Click **Next**.
-
- - **Save Package**. The Sequencer saves the package.
-
- - **Primary Feature Block**. The Sequencer optimizes the package for streaming by rebuilding the primary feature block.
-
- If you do not want to configure the applications, click **Skip this step**, and to go to step 9 of this procedure, and then click **Next**.
-
-9. On the **Completion** page, after you review the information that is displayed in the **Virtual Application Package Report** pane, click **Close**.
-
- The package is now available in the Sequencer. To edit the package properties, click **Edit \[Package Name\]**. For more information about how to modify a package, see [How to Modify an Existing Virtual Application Package](how-to-modify-an-existing-virtual-application-package-beta.md).
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-virtual-application-package-using-an-app-v-package-accelerator51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-virtual-application-package-using-an-app-v-package-accelerator51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 2552432acc..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-a-virtual-application-package-using-an-app-v-package-accelerator51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,108 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Create a Virtual Application Package Using an App-V Package Accelerator
-description: How to Create a Virtual Application Package Using an App-V Package Accelerator
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: eae1e4f8-f14f-4bc8-9867-052561c37297
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Create a Virtual Application Package Using an App-V Package Accelerator
-
-
-**Important**
-The App-V 5.1 Sequencer does not grant any license rights to the software application that you use to create the Package Accelerator. You must abide by all end user license terms for the application that you use. It is your responsibility to make sure that the software application’s license terms allow you to create a Package Accelerator with the App-V 5.1 Sequencer.
-
-
-
-Use the following procedure to create a virtual application package with the App-V 5.1 Package Accelerator.
-
-**Note**
-Before you start this procedure, copy the required Package Accelerator locally to the computer that runs the App-V 5.1 Sequencer. You should also copy all required installation files for the package to a local directory on the computer that runs the Sequencer. This is the directory that you have to specify in step 5 of this procedure.
-
-
-
-**To create a virtual application package with an App-V 5.1 Package Accelerator**
-
-1. To start the App-V Sequencer, on the computer that runs the App-V 5.1 Sequencer, click **Start** / **All Programs** / **Microsoft Application Virtualization** / **Microsoft Application Virtualization Sequencer**.
-
-2. To start the **Create New Package Wizard**, click **Create a New Virtual Application Package**. To create the package, select the **Create Package using a Package Accelerator** check box, and then click **Next**.
-
-3. To specify the package accelerator that will be used to create the new virtual application package, click **Browse** on the **Select Package Accelerator** page. Click **Next**.
-
- **Important**
- If the publisher of the package accelerator cannot be verified and does not contain a valid digital signature, then before you click **Run**, you must confirm that you trust the source of the package accelerator. Confirm your choice in the **Security Warning** dialog box.
-
-
-
-4. On the **Guidance** page, review the publishing guidance information that is displayed in the information pane. This information was added when the Package Accelerator was created and it contains guidance about how to create and publish the package. To export the guidance information to a text (.txt) file, click **Export** and specify the location where the file should be saved, and then click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Select Installation Files** page, click **Make New Folder** to create a local folder that contains all required installation files for the package, and specify where the folder should be saved. You must also specify a name to be assigned to the folder. You must then copy all required installation files to the location that you specified. If the folder that contains the installation files already exists on the computer that runs the Sequencer, click **Browse** to select the folder.
-
- Alternatively, if you have already copied the installation files to a directory on this computer, click **Make New Folder**, browse to the folder that contains the installation files, and then click **Next**.
-
- **Note**
- You can specify the following types of supported installation files:
-
- - Windows Installer files (**.msi**)
-
- - Cabinet files (.cab)
-
- - Compressed files with a .zip file name extension
-
- - The actual application files
-
- The following file types are not supported: **.msp** and **.exe** files. If you specify an **.exe** file, you must extract the installation files manually.
-
-
-
-~~~
-If the package accelerator requires an application to be installed before you apply the Package Accelerator, and if you have already installed the required application, select **I have installed all applications**, and then click **Next** on the **Local Installation** page.
-~~~
-
-6. On the **Package Name** page, specify a name that will be associated with the package. The name that you specify identifies the package in the App-V Management Console. Click **Next**.
-
-7. On the **Create Package** page, provide comments that will be associated with the package. The comments should contain identifying information about the package that you are creating. To confirm the location where the package is created, review the information that is displayed in **Save Location**. To compress the package, select **Compress Package**. Select the **Compress Package** check box if the package will be streamed across the network, or when the package size exceeds 4 GB.
-
- To create the package, click **Create**. After the package is created, click **Next**.
-
-8. On the **Configure Software** page, to enable the Sequencer to configure the applications that are contained in the package, select **Configure Software**. In this step you can configure any associated tasks that must be completed in order to run the application on the target computers. For example, you can configure any associated license agreements.
-
- If you select **Configure Software**, the following items can be configured using the Sequencer as part of this step:
-
- - **Load Package**. The Sequencer loads the files that are associated with the package. It can take several seconds to an hour to decode the package.
-
- - **Run Each Program**. Optionally run the programs that are contained in the package. This step is helpful to complete any associated license or configuration tasks that are required to run the application before you deploy and run the package on target computers. To run all the programs at once, select at least one program, and then click **Run All**. To run specific programs, select the program or programs that you want to run, and then click **Run Selected**. Complete the required configuration tasks, and then close the applications. It can take several minutes for all programs to run. Click **Next**.
-
- - **Save Package**. The Sequencer saves the package.
-
- - **Primary Feature Block**. The Sequencer optimizes the package for streaming by rebuilding the primary feature block.
-
- If you do not want to configure the applications, click **Skip this step**, and to go to step 9 of this procedure, and then click **Next**.
-
-9. On the **Completion** page, after you review the information that is displayed in the **Virtual Application Package Report** pane, click **Close**.
-
- The package is now available in the Sequencer. To edit the package properties, click **Edit \[Package Name\]**. For more information about how to modify a package, see [How to Modify an Existing Virtual Application Package](how-to-modify-an-existing-virtual-application-package-beta.md).
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-and-use-a-project-template.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-and-use-a-project-template.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 514740a212..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-and-use-a-project-template.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,68 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Create and Use a Project Template
-description: How to Create and Use a Project Template
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 2063f0b3-47a1-4090-bf99-0f26b107331c
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Create and Use a Project Template
-
-
-You can use an App-V 5.0 project template to save commonly applied settings associated with an existing virtual application package. These settings can then be applied when you create new virtual application packages in your environment. Using a project template can streamline the process of creating virtual application packages.
-
-**Note**
-You can, and often should apply an App-V 5.0 project template during a package upgrade. For example, if you sequenced an application with a custom exclusion list, it is recommended that an associated template is created and saved for later use while upgrading the sequenced application.
-
-App-V 5.0 project templates differ from App-V 5.0 Application Accelerators because App-V 5.0 Application Accelerators are application-specific, and App-V 5.0 project templates can be applied to multiple applications.
-
-Use the following procedures to create and apply a new template.
-
-**To create a project template**
-
-1. To start the App-V 5.0 sequencer, on the computer that is running the sequencer, click **Start** / **All Programs** / **Microsoft Application Virtualization** / **Microsoft Application Virtualization Sequencer**.
-
-**Note**
- If the virtual application package is currently open in the App-V 5.0 Sequencer console, skip to step 3 of this procedure.
-
-2. To open the existing virtual application package that contains the settings you want to save with the App-V 5.0 project template, click **File** / **Open**, and then click **Edit Package**. On the **Select Package** page, click **Browse** and locate the virtual application package that you want to open. Click **Edit**.
-
-3. In the App-V 5.0 Sequencer console, to save the template file, click **File** / **Save As Template**. After you have reviewed the settings that will be saved with the new template, click **OK**. Specify a name that will be associated with the new App-V 5.0 project template. Click Save.
- The new App-V 5.0 project template is saved in the directory specified in step 3 of this procedure.
-
-**To apply a project template**
-
-**Important**
- Creating a virtual application package using a project template in conjunction with a Package Accelerator is not supported.
-
-1. To start the App-V 5.0 sequencer, on the computer that is running the sequencer, click **Start** / **All Programs** / **Microsoft Application Virtualization** / **Microsoft Application Virtualization Sequencer**.
-
-2. To create or upgrade a new virtual application package by using an App-V 5.0 project template, click **File** / **New From Template**.
-
-3. To select the project template that you want to use, browse to the directory where the project template is saved, select the project template, and then click **Open**.
-
- Create the new virtual application package. The settings saved with the specified template will be applied to the new virtual application package that you are creating.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-and-use-a-project-template51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-and-use-a-project-template51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index cc1d47dba3..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-create-and-use-a-project-template51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,79 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Create and Use a Project Template
-description: How to Create and Use a Project Template
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: e5ac1dc8-a88f-4b16-8e3c-df07ef5e4c3b
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Create and Use a Project Template
-
-
-You can use an App-V 5.1 project template to save commonly applied settings associated with an existing virtual application package. These settings can then be applied when you create new virtual application packages in your environment. Using a project template can streamline the process of creating virtual application packages.
-
-**Note**
-You can, and often should apply an App-V 5.1 project template during a package upgrade. For example, if you sequenced an application with a custom exclusion list, it is recommended that an associated template is created and saved for later use while upgrading the sequenced application.
-
-
-
-App-V 5.1 project templates differ from App-V 5.1 Application Accelerators because App-V 5.1 Application Accelerators are application-specific, and App-V 5.1 project templates can be applied to multiple applications.
-
-Use the following procedures to create and apply a new template.
-
-**To create a project template**
-
-1. To start the App-V 5.1 sequencer, on the computer that is running the sequencer, click **Start** / **All Programs** / **Microsoft Application Virtualization** / **Microsoft Application Virtualization Sequencer**.
-
-2. **Note**
- If the virtual application package is currently open in the App-V 5.1 Sequencer console, skip to step 3 of this procedure.
-
-
-
-~~~
-To open the existing virtual application package that contains the settings you want to save with the App-V 5.1 project template, click **File** / **Open**, and then click **Edit Package**. On the **Select Package** page, click **Browse** and locate the virtual application package that you want to open. Click **Edit**.
-~~~
-
-3. In the App-V 5.1 Sequencer console, to save the template file, click **File** / **Save As Template**. After you have reviewed the settings that will be saved with the new template, click **OK**. Specify a name that will be associated with the new App-V 5.1 project template. Click Save.
-
- The new App-V 5.1 project template is saved in the directory specified in step 3 of this procedure.
-
-**To apply a project template**
-
-1. **Important**
- Creating a virtual application package using a project template in conjunction with a Package Accelerator is not supported.
-
-
-
-~~~
-To start the App-V 5.1 sequencer, on the computer that is running the sequencer, click **Start** / **All Programs** / **Microsoft Application Virtualization** / **Microsoft Application Virtualization Sequencer**.
-~~~
-
-2. To create or upgrade a new virtual application package by using an App-V 5.1 project template, click **File** / **New From Template**.
-
-3. To select the project template that you want to use, browse to the directory where the project template is saved, select the project template, and then click **Open**.
-
- Create the new virtual application package. The settings saved with the specified template will be applied to the new virtual application package that you are creating.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-customize-virtual-applications-extensions-for-a-specific-ad-group-by-using-the-management-console.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-customize-virtual-applications-extensions-for-a-specific-ad-group-by-using-the-management-console.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 110fce61e0..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-customize-virtual-applications-extensions-for-a-specific-ad-group-by-using-the-management-console.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Customize Virtual Applications Extensions for a Specific AD Group by Using the Management Console
-description: How to Customize Virtual Applications Extensions for a Specific AD Group by Using the Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 4f249ee3-cc2d-4b1e-afe5-d1cbf9cabd88
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Customize Virtual Applications Extensions for a Specific AD Group by Using the Management Console
-
-
-Use the following procedure to customize the virtual application extensions for an Active Directory (AD) group.
-
-**To customize virtual applications extensions for an AD group**
-
-1. To view the package that you want to configure, open the App-V 5.0 Management Console. To view the configuration that is assigned to a given user group, select the package, and right-click the package name and select **Edit active directory access**. Alternatively, select the package and click **EDIT** in the **AD ACCESS** pane.
-
-2. To customize an AD group, you can find the group from the list of **AD Entities with Access**. Then, using the drop-down box in the **Assigned Configuration** pane, select **Custom**, and then click **EDIT**.
-
-3. To disable all extensions for a given application, clear **ENABLE**.
-
- To add a new shortcut for the selected application, right-click the application in the **SHORTCUTS** pane, and select **Add new shortcut**. To remove a shortcut, right-click the application in the **SHORTCUTS** pane, and select **Remove Shortcut**. To edit an existing shortcut, right-click the application, and select **Edit Shortcut**.
-
-4. To view any other application extensions, click **Advanced**, and click **Export Configuration**. Type in a filename and click **Save**. You can view all application extensions that are associated with the package using the configuration file.
-
-5. To edit additional application extensions, modify the configuration file and click **Import and Overwrite this Configuration**. Select the modified file and click **Open**. In the dialog, click **Overwrite** to complete the process.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-customize-virtual-applications-extensions-for-a-specific-ad-group-by-using-the-management-console51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-customize-virtual-applications-extensions-for-a-specific-ad-group-by-using-the-management-console51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4d7754f265..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-customize-virtual-applications-extensions-for-a-specific-ad-group-by-using-the-management-console51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Customize Virtual Applications Extensions for a Specific AD Group by Using the Management Console
-description: How to Customize Virtual Applications Extensions for a Specific AD Group by Using the Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: dd71df05-512f-4eb4-a55f-e5b93601323d
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Customize Virtual Applications Extensions for a Specific AD Group by Using the Management Console
-
-
-Use the following procedure to customize the virtual application extensions for an Active Directory (AD) group.
-
-**To customize virtual applications extensions for an AD group**
-
-1. To view the package that you want to configure, open the App-V 5.1 Management Console. To view the configuration that is assigned to a given user group, select the package, and right-click the package name and select **Edit active directory access**. Alternatively, select the package and click **EDIT** in the **AD ACCESS** pane.
-
-2. To customize an AD group, you can find the group from the list of **AD Entities with Access**. Then, using the drop-down box in the **Assigned Configuration** pane, select **Custom**, and then click **EDIT**.
-
-3. To disable all extensions for a given application, clear **ENABLE**.
-
- To add a new shortcut for the selected application, right-click the application in the **SHORTCUTS** pane, and select **Add new shortcut**. To remove a shortcut, right-click the application in the **SHORTCUTS** pane, and select **Remove Shortcut**. To edit an existing shortcut, right-click the application, and select **Edit Shortcut**.
-
-4. To view any other application extensions, click **Advanced**, and click **Export Configuration**. Type in a filename and click **Save**. You can view all application extensions that are associated with the package using the configuration file.
-
-5. To edit additional application extensions, modify the configuration file and click **Import and Overwrite this Configuration**. Select the modified file and click **Open**. In the dialog, click **Overwrite** to complete the process.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-delete-a-connection-group.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-delete-a-connection-group.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8d3a29dee3..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-delete-a-connection-group.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Delete a Connection Group
-description: How to Delete a Connection Group
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 92654019-a5ad-4ed7-8c39-45f658f60196
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Delete a Connection Group
-
-
-Use the following procedure to delete an existing App-V connection group.
-
-**To delete a connection group**
-
-1. Open the App-V Management Console and select **Packages** > **CONNECTION GROUPS**.
-
-2. Right-click the connection group to be removed, and select **delete**.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-[Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-delete-a-connection-group51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-delete-a-connection-group51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 90aec39b89..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-delete-a-connection-group51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Delete a Connection Group
-description: How to Delete a Connection Group
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: dfdfb507-8891-4f17-9125-5759c9b74483
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Delete a Connection Group
-
-
-Use the following procedure to delete an existing App-V connection group.
-
-**To delete a connection group**
-
-1. Open the App-V Management Console and select **CONNECTION GROUPS**.
-
-2. Right-click the connection group to be removed, and select **delete**.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-[Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-delete-a-package-in-the-management-console-51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-delete-a-package-in-the-management-console-51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 51e1ae3be1..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-delete-a-package-in-the-management-console-51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Delete a Package in the Management Console
-description: How to Delete a Package in the Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 4a2be40b-bbb8-4fab-992d-7466df432858
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Delete a Package in the Management Console
-
-
-Use the following procedure to delete an App-V 5.1 package.
-
-**To delete a package in the Management Console**
-
-1. To view the package you want to delete, open the App-V 5.1 Management Console and select **Packages**. Select the package to be removed.
-
-2. Click or right-click the package. Select **Delete** to remove the package.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-delete-a-package-in-the-management-console-beta.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-delete-a-package-in-the-management-console-beta.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a9a1d7847a..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-delete-a-package-in-the-management-console-beta.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Delete a Package in the Management Console
-description: How to Delete a Package in the Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: d780aafb-4097-4417-8ecc-30efac73c33a
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Delete a Package in the Management Console
-
-
-Use the following procedure to delete an App-V 5.0 package.
-
-**To delete a package in the Management Console**
-
-1. To view the package you want to delete, open the App-V 5.0 Management Console and select **Packages**. Select the package to be removed.
-
-2. Right-click the package, and select **delete** to remove the package.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-app-v-50-packages-using-electronic-software-distribution.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-app-v-50-packages-using-electronic-software-distribution.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c84a1d788d..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-app-v-50-packages-using-electronic-software-distribution.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,79 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to deploy App-V 5.0 Packages Using Electronic Software Distribution
-description: How to deploy App-V 5.0 Packages Using Electronic Software Distribution
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 08e5e05b-dbb8-4be7-b2d8-721ef627da81
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# How to deploy App-V 5.0 Packages Using Electronic Software Distribution
-
-
-You can use an electronic software distribution (ESD) system to deploy App-V 5.0 virtual applications to App-V clients. For details, see the documentation available with the ESD you are using.
-
-For component requirements and options for using an ESD to deploy App-V packages, see [Planning to Deploy App-V 5.0 with an Electronic Software Distribution System](planning-to-deploy-app-v-50-with-an-electronic-software-distribution-system.md).
-
-Use one of the following methods to publish packages to App-V client computers with an ESD:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Method
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Functionality provided by a third-party ESD
-
Use the functionality in a third-party ESD.
-
-
-
Stand-alone Windows Installer
-
Install the application on the target client computer by using the associated Windows Installer (.msi) file that is created when you initially sequence an application. The Windows Installer file contains the associated App-V 5.0 package file information used to configure a package and copies the required package files to the client.
-
-
-
PowerShell
-
Use PowerShell cmdlets to deploy virtualized applications. For more information about using PowerShell and App-V 5.0, see Administering App-V by Using PowerShell.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**To deploy App-V 5.0 packages by using an ESD**
-
-1. Install the App-V 5.0 Sequencer on a computer in your environment. For more information about installing the sequencer, see [How to Install the Sequencer](how-to-install-the-sequencer-beta-gb18030.md).
-
-2. Use the App-V 5.0 Sequencer to create virtual application. For information about creating a virtual application, see [Creating and Managing App-V 5.0 Virtualized Applications](creating-and-managing-app-v-50-virtualized-applications.md).
-
-3. After you create the virtual application, deploy the package by using your ESD solution.
-
- If you are using System Center Configuration Manager, start by reviewing [Introduction to Application Management in Configuration Manager](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=281816) for information about using App-V 5.0 and System Center 2012 Configuration Manager.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-app-v-51-packages-using-electronic-software-distribution.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-app-v-51-packages-using-electronic-software-distribution.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6171caac63..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-app-v-51-packages-using-electronic-software-distribution.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,79 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to deploy App-V 5.1 Packages Using Electronic Software Distribution
-description: How to deploy App-V 5.1 Packages Using Electronic Software Distribution
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: e1957a5a-1f18-42da-b2c1-a5ae5a4cca7a
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# How to deploy App-V 5.1 Packages Using Electronic Software Distribution
-
-
-You can use an electronic software distribution (ESD) system to deploy App-V 5.1 virtual applications to App-V clients. For details, see the documentation available with the ESD you are using.
-
-For component requirements and options for using an ESD to deploy App-V packages, see [Planning to Deploy App-V 5.1 with an Electronic Software Distribution System](planning-to-deploy-app-v-51-with-an-electronic-software-distribution-system.md).
-
-Use one of the following methods to publish packages to App-V client computers with an ESD:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Method
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Functionality provided by a third-party ESD
-
Use the functionality in a third-party ESD.
-
-
-
Stand-alone Windows Installer
-
Install the application on the target client computer by using the associated Windows Installer (.msi) file that is created when you initially sequence an application. The Windows Installer file contains the associated App-V 5.1 package file information used to configure a package and copies the required package files to the client.
-
-
-
-**To deploy App-V 5.1 packages by using an ESD**
-
-1. Install the App-V 5.1 Sequencer on a computer in your environment. For more information about installing the sequencer, see [How to Install the Sequencer](how-to-install-the-sequencer-51beta-gb18030.md).
-
-2. Use the App-V 5.1 Sequencer to create virtual application. For information about creating a virtual application, see [Creating and Managing App-V 5.1 Virtualized Applications](creating-and-managing-app-v-51-virtualized-applications.md).
-
-3. After you create the virtual application, deploy the package by using your ESD solution.
-
- If you are using System Center Configuration Manager, start by reviewing [Introduction to Application Management in Configuration Manager](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=281816) for information about using App-V 5.1 and System Center 2012 Configuration Manager.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-46-and-the-app-v--50-client-on-the-same-computer.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-46-and-the-app-v--50-client-on-the-same-computer.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b201ab4069..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-46-and-the-app-v--50-client-on-the-same-computer.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Deploy the App-V 4.6 and the App-V 5.0 Client on the Same Computer
-description: How to Deploy the App-V 4.6 and the App-V 5.0 Client on the Same Computer
-ms.assetid: 5b7e27e4-4360-464c-b832-f1c7939e5485
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.date: 06/21/2016
----
-
-# How to Deploy the App-V 4.6 and the App-V 5.0 Client on the Same Computer
-
-**Note:** App-V 4.6 has exited Mainstream support. The following assumes that the App-V 4.6 SP3 client is already installed.
-
-Use the following information to install the App-V 5.0 client (preferably, with the latest Service Packs and hotfixes) and the App-V 4.6 SP3 client on the same computer. For supported versions, requirements, and other planning information, see [Planning for Migrating from a Previous Version of App-V](planning-for-migrating-from-a-previous-version-of-app-v.md).
-
-**To deploy the App-V 5.0 client and App-V 4.6 client on the same computer**
-
-1. Install the App-V 5.0 SP3 client on the computer that is running the App-V 4.6 version of the client. For best results, we recommend that you install all available updates to the App-V 5.0 SP3 client.
-
-2. Convert or re-sequence the packages gradually.
-
- - To convert the packages, use the App-V 5.0 package converter and convert the required packages to the App-V 5.0 (**.appv**) file format.
-
- - To re-sequence the packages, consider using the latest version of the Sequencer for best results.
-
- For more information about publishing packages, see [How to Publish a Package by Using the Management Console](how-to-publish-a-package-by-using-the-management-console-50.md).
-
-3. Deploy packages to the client computers.
-
-4. Convert extension points, as needed. For more information, see the following resources:
-
- - [How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to a Converted App-V 5.0 Package for All Users on a Specific Computer](how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-a-converted-app-v-50-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md)
-
- - [How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to App-V 5.0 for a Specific User](how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-app-v-50-for-a-specific-user.md)
-
- - [How to Convert a Package Created in a Previous Version of App-V](how-to-convert-a-package-created-in-a-previous-version-of-app-v.md)
-
-5. Test that your App-V 5.0 packages are successful, and then remove the 4.6 packages. To check the user state of your client computers, we recommend that you use [User Experience Virtualization](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn458947.aspx) or another user environment management tool.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning for Migrating from a Previous Version of App-V](planning-for-migrating-from-a-previous-version-of-app-v.md)
-
-[Deploying the App-V 5.0 Sequencer and Client](deploying-the-app-v-50-sequencer-and-client.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-46-and-the-app-v--51-client-on-the-same-computer.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-46-and-the-app-v--51-client-on-the-same-computer.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 90cb9db9a7..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-46-and-the-app-v--51-client-on-the-same-computer.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,66 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Deploy the App-V 4.6 and the App-V 5.1 Client on the Same Computer
-description: How to Deploy the App-V 4.6 and the App-V 5.1 Client on the Same Computer
-ms.assetid: 498d50c7-f13d-4fbb-8ea1-b959ade26fdf
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/21/2016
----
-
-# How to Deploy the App-V 4.6 and the App-V 5.1 Client on the Same Computer
-
-**Note:** App-V 4.6 has exited Mainstream support.
-
-Use the following information to install the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 client (preferably, with the latest Service Packs and hotfixes) and the App-V 4.6 SP2 client or the App-V 4.6 S3 client on the same computer. For supported versions, requirements, and other planning information, see [Planning for Migrating from a Previous Version of App-V](planning-for-migrating-from-a-previous-version-of-app-v51.md).
-
-**To deploy the App-V 5.1 client and App-V 4.6 client on the same computer**
-
-1. Install the following version of the App-V client on the computer that is running App-V 4.6.
-
- - [Microsoft Application Virtualization 4.6 Service Pack 3](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=41187)
-
-2. Install the App-V 5.1 client on the computer that is running the App-V 4.6 SP3 version of the client. For best results, we recommend that you install all available updates to the App-V 5.1 client.
-
-3. Convert or re-sequence the packages gradually.
-
- - To convert the packages, use the App-V 5.1 package converter and convert the required packages to the App-V 5.1 (**.appv**) file format.
-
- - To re-sequence the packages, consider using the latest version of the Sequencer for best results.
-
- For more information about publishing packages, see [How to Publish a Package by Using the Management Console](how-to-publish-a-package-by-using-the-management-console-51.md).
-
-4. Deploy packages to the client computers.
-
-5. Convert extension points, as needed. For more information, see the following resources:
-
- - [How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to a Converted App-V 5.1 Package for All Users on a Specific Computer](how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-a-converted-app-v-51-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md)
-
- - [How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to App-V 5.1 for a Specific User](how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-app-v-51-for-a-specific-user.md)
-
- - [How to Convert a Package Created in a Previous Version of App-V](how-to-convert-a-package-created-in-a-previous-version-of-app-v51.md)
-
-6. Test that your App-V 5.1 packages are successful, and then remove the 4.6 packages. To check the user state of your client computers, we recommend that you use [User Experience Virtualization](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn458947.aspx) or another user environment management tool.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning for Migrating from a Previous Version of App-V](planning-for-migrating-from-a-previous-version-of-app-v51.md)
-
-[Deploying the App-V 5.1 Sequencer and Client](deploying-the-app-v-51-sequencer-and-client.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-50-server-50sp3.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-50-server-50sp3.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b58dcbe9cc..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-50-server-50sp3.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,280 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Deploy the App-V 5.0 Server
-description: How to Deploy the App-V 5.0 Server
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 4f8f16af-7d74-42b4-84b8-b04ce668225d
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Deploy the App-V 5.0 Server
-
-
-Use the following procedure to install the App-V 5.0 server. For information about deploying the App-V 5.0 SP3 Server, see [About App-V 5.0 SP3](about-app-v-50-sp3.md#bkmk-migrate-to-50sp3).
-
-**Before you start:**
-
-- Ensure that you’ve installed prerequisite software. See [App-V 5.0 Prerequisites](app-v-50-prerequisites.md).
-
-- Review the server section of [App-V 5.0 Security Considerations](app-v-50-security-considerations.md).
-
-- Specify a port where each component will be hosted.
-
-- Add firewall rules to allow incoming requests to access the specified ports.
-
-- If you use SQL scripts, instead of the Windows Installer, to set up the Management database or Reporting database, you must run the SQL scripts before installing the Management Server or Reporting Server. See [How to Deploy the App-V Databases by Using SQL Scripts](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-databases-by-using-sql-scripts.md).
-
-**To install the App-V 5.0 server**
-
-1. Copy the App-V 5.0 server installation files to the computer on which you want to install it.
-
-2. Start the App-V 5.0 server installation by right-clicking and running **appv\_server\_setup.exe** as an administrator, and then click **Install**.
-
-3. Review and accept the license terms, and choose whether to enable Microsoft updates.
-
-4. On the **Feature Selection** page, select all of the following components.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Component
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Management server
-
Provides overall management functionality for the App-V infrastructure.
-
-
-
Management database
-
Facilitates database predeployments for App-V management.
-
-
-
Publishing server
-
Provides hosting and streaming functionality for virtual applications.
-
-
-
Reporting server
-
Provides App-V 5.0 reporting services.
-
-
-
Reporting database
-
Facilitates database predeployments for App-V reporting.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-5. On the **Installation Location** page, accept the default location where the selected components will be installed, or change the location by typing a new path on the **Installation Location** line.
-
-6. On the initial **Create New Management Database** page, configure the **Microsoft SQL Server instance** and **Management Server database** by selecting the appropriate option below.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Method
-
What you need to do
-
-
-
-
-
You are using a custom Microsoft SQL Server instance.
-
Select Use the custom instance, and type the name of the instance.
-
Use the format INSTANCENAME. The assumed installation location is the local computer.
-
Not supported: A server name using the format ServerName<strong>INSTANCE.
-
-
-
You are using a custom database name.
-
Select Custom configuration and type the database name.
-
The database name must be unique, or the installation will fail.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-7. On the **Configure** page, accept the default value **Use this local computer**.
-
- **Note**
- If you are installing the Management server and Management database side by side, some options on this page are not available. In this case, the appropriate options are selected by default and cannot be changed.
-
-
-
-8. On the initial **Create New Reporting Database** page, configure the **Microsoft SQL Server instance** and **Reporting Server database** by selecting the appropriate option below.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Method
-
What you need to do
-
-
-
-
-
You are using a custom Microsoft SQL Server instance.
-
Select Use the custom instance, and type the name of the instance.
-
Use the format INSTANCENAME. The assumed installation location is the local computer.
-
Not supported: A server name using the format ServerName<strong>INSTANCE.
-
-
-
You are using a custom database name.
-
Select Custom configuration and type the database name.
-
The database name must be unique, or the installation will fail.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-9. On the **Configure** page, accept the default value: **Use this local computer**.
-
- **Note**
- If you are installing the Management server and Management database side by side, some options on this page are not available. In this case, the appropriate options are selected by default and cannot be changed.
-
-
-
-10. On the **Configure** (Management Server Configuration) page, specify the following:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Item to configure
-
Description and examples
-
-
-
-
-
Type the AD group with sufficient permissions to manage the App-V environment.
-
Example: MyDomain\MyUser
-
After installation, you can add additional users or groups by using the Management console. However, global security groups and Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) distribution groups are not supported. You must use Domain local or Universal groups are required to perform this action.
-
-
-
Website name: Specify the custom name that will be used to run the publishing service.
-
If you do not have a custom name, do not make any changes.
-
-
-
Port binding: Specify a unique port number that will be used by App-V.
-
Example: 12345
-
Ensure that the port specified is not being used by another website.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-11. On the **Configure** **Publishing Server Configuration** page, specify the following:
-
-
Website name: Specify the custom name that will be used to run the publishing service.
-
If you do not have a custom name, do not make any changes.
-
-
-
Port binding: Specify a unique port number that will be used by App-V.
-
Example: 54321
-
Ensure that the port specified is not being used by another website.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-12. On the **Reporting Server** page, specify the following:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Item to configure
-
Description and examples
-
-
-
-
-
Website name: Specify the custom name that will be used to run the Reporting Service.
-
If you do not have a custom name, do not make any changes.
-
-
-
Port binding: Specify a unique port number that will be used by App-V.
-
Example: 55555
-
Ensure that the port specified is not being used by another website.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-13. To start the installation, click **Install** on the **Ready** page, and then click **Close** on the **Finished** page.
-
-14. To verify that the setup completed successfully, open a web browser, and type the following URL:
-
- **http://<Management server machine name>:<Management service port number>/Console.html**.
-
- Example: **http://localhost:12345/console.html**. If the installation succeeded, the App-V Management console is displayed with no errors.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying App-V 5.0](deploying-app-v-50.md)
-
-[How to Install the Management and Reporting Databases on Separate Computers from the Management and Reporting Services](how-to-install-the-management-and-reporting-databases-on-separate-computers-from-the-management-and-reporting-services.md)
-
-[How to Install the Publishing Server on a Remote Computer](how-to-install-the-publishing-server-on-a-remote-computer.md)
-
-[How to Deploy the App-V 5.0 Server Using a Script](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-50-server-using-a-script.md)
-
-[How to Enable Reporting on the App-V 5.0 Client by Using PowerShell](how-to-enable-reporting-on-the-app-v-50-client-by-using-powershell.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-50-server-using-a-script.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-50-server-using-a-script.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 03f183eae8..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-50-server-using-a-script.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,757 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Deploy the App-V 5.0 Server Using a Script
-description: How to Deploy the App-V 5.0 Server Using a Script
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: b91a35c8-df9e-4065-9187-abafbe565b84
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/15/2018
----
-
-
-# How to Deploy the App-V 5.0 Server Using a Script
-
-
-In order to complete the **appv\_server\_setup.exe** Server setup successfully using the command line, you must specify and combine multiple parameters.
-
-Use the following tables for more information about installing the App-V 5.0 server using the command line.
-
->[!NOTE]
-> The information in the following tables can also be accessed using the command line by typing the following command:
->```
-> appv\_server\_setup.exe /?
->```
-
-## Common parameters and Examples
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
To Install the Management server and Management database on a local machine.
-
To use the default instance of Microsoft SQL Server, use the following parameters:
-
-
/MANAGEMENT_SERVER
-
/MANAGEMENT_ADMINACCOUNT
-
/MANAGEMENT_WEBSITE_NAME
-
/MANAGEMENT_WEBSITE_PORT
-
/DB_PREDEPLOY_MANAGEMENT
-
/MANAGEMENT_DB_SQLINSTANCE_USE_DEFAULT
-
/MANAGEMENT_DB_NAME
-
-
To use a custom instance of Microsoft SQL Server, use the following parameters:
-
-
/MANAGEMENT_SERVER
-
/MANAGEMENT_ADMINACCOUNT
-
/MANAGEMENT_WEBSITE_NAME
-
/MANAGEMENT_WEBSITE_PORT
-
/DB_PREDEPLOY_MANAGEMENT
-
/MANAGEMENT_DB_CUSTOM_SQLINSTANCE
-
/MANAGEMENT_DB_NAME
-
-
Using a custom instance of Microsoft SQL Server example:
-
-## Parameter Definitions
-
-### General Parameters
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
Information
-
-
-
-
-
/QUIET
-
Specifies silent install.
-
-
-
/UNINSTALL
-
Specifies an uninstall.
-
-
-
/LAYOUT
-
Specifies layout action. This extracts the MSIs and script files to a folder without actually installing the product. No value is expected.
-
-
-
/LAYOUTDIR
-
Specifies the layout directory. Takes a string. For example, /LAYOUTDIR=”C:\Application Virtualization Server”
-
-
-
/INSTALLDIR
-
Specifies the installation directory. Takes a string. E.g. /INSTALLDIR=”C:\Program Files\Application Virtualization\Server”
-
-
-
/MUOPTIN
-
Enables Microsoft Update. No value is expected
-
-
-
/ACCEPTEULA
-
Accepts the license agreement. This is required for an unattended installation. Example usage: /ACCEPTEULA or /ACCEPTEULA=1.
-
-
-
-
-### Management Server Installation Parameters
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
Information
-
-
-
-
-
/MANAGEMENT_SERVER
-
Specifies that the management server will be installed. No value is expected
-
-
-
/MANAGEMENT_ADMINACCOUNT
-
Specifies the account that will be allowed to Administrator access to the management server This account can be an individual user account or a group. Example usage: /MANAGEMENT_ADMINACCOUNT=”mydomain\admin”. If /MANAGEMENT_SERVER is not specified, this will be ignored. Specifies the account that will be allowed to Administrator access to the management server. This can be a user account or a group. For example, /MANAGEMENT_ADMINACCOUNT="mydomain\admin".
-
-
-
/MANAGEMENT_WEBSITE_NAME
-
Specifies name of the website that will be created for the management service. For example, /MANAGEMENT_WEBSITE_NAME=”Microsoft App-V Management Service”
-
-
-
MANAGEMENT_WEBSITE_PORT
-
Specifies the port number that will be used by the management service will use. For example, /MANAGEMENT_WEBSITE_PORT=82.
-
-
-
-
-### Parameters for the Management Server Database
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
Information
-
-
-
-
-
/DB_PREDEPLOY_MANAGEMENT
-
Specifies that the management database will be installed. You must have sufficient database permissions to complete this installation. No value is expected
-
-
-
/MANAGEMENT_DB_SQLINSTANCE_USE_DEFAULT
-
Indicates that the default SQL instance should be used. No value is expected.
-
-
-
/MANAGEMENT_DB_ CUSTOM_SQLINSTANCE
-
Specifies the name of the custom SQL instance that should be used to create a new database. Example usage: /MANAGEMENT_DB_ CUSTOM_SQLINSTANCE=”MYSQLSERVER”. If /DB_PREDEPLOY_MANAGEMENT is not specified, this will be ignored.
-
-
-
/MANAGEMENT_DB_NAME
-
Specifies the name of the new management database that should be created. Example usage: /MANAGEMENT_DB_NAME=”AppVMgmtDB”. If /DB_PREDEPLOY_MANAGEMENT is not specified, this will be ignored.
-
-
-
/MANAGEMENT_SERVER_MACHINE_USE_LOCAL
-
Indicates if the management server that will be accessing the database is installed on the local server. Switch parameter so no value is expected.
-
-
-
/MANAGEMENT_REMOTE_SERVER_MACHINE_ACCOUNT
-
Specifies the machine account of the remote machine that the management server will be installed on. Example usage: /MANAGEMENT_REMOTE_SERVER_MACHINE_ACCOUNT=”domain\computername”
-
-
-
/MANAGEMENT_SERVER_INSTALL_ADMIN_ACCOUNT
-
Indicates the Administrator account that will be used to install the management server. Example usage: /MANAGEMENT_SERVER_INSTALL_ADMIN_ACCOUNT =”domain\alias”
-
-
-
-
-### Parameters for Installing Publishing Server
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
Information
-
-
-
-
-
/PUBLISHING_SERVER
-
Specifies that the Publishing Server will be installed. No value is expected
-
-
-
/PUBLISHING_MGT_SERVER
-
Specifies the URL to Management Service the Publishing server will connect to. Example usage: http://<management server name>:<Management server port number>. If /PUBLISHING_SERVER is not used, this parameter will be ignored
-
-
-
/PUBLISHING_WEBSITE_NAME
-
Specifies name of the website that will be created for the publishing service. For example, /PUBLISHING_WEBSITE_NAME=”Microsoft App-V Publishing Service”
-
-
-
/PUBLISHING_WEBSITE_PORT
-
Specifies the port number used by the publishing service. For example, /PUBLISHING_WEBSITE_PORT=83
-
-
-
-
-### Parameters for Reporting Server
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
Information
-
-
-
-
-
/REPORTING_SERVER
-
Specifies that the Reporting Server will be installed. No value is expected
-
-
-
/REPORTING_WEBSITE_NAME
-
Specifies name of the website that will be created for the Reporting Service. E.g. /REPORTING_WEBSITE_NAME="Microsoft App-V ReportingService"
-
-
-
/REPORTING_WEBSITE_PORT
-
Specifies the port number that the Reporting Service will use. E.g. /REPORTING_WEBSITE_PORT=82
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Parameters for using an Existing Reporting Server Database
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
Information
-
-
-
-
-
/EXISTING_REPORTING_DB_SQL_SERVER_USE_LOCAL
-
Indicates that the Microsoft SQL Server is installed on the local server. Switch parameter so no value is expected.
-
-
-
/EXISTING_REPORTING_DB_REMOTE_SQL_SERVER_NAME
-
Specifies the name of the remote computer that SQL Server is installed on. Takes a string. E.g. /EXISTING_REPORTING_DB_ REMOTE_SQL_SERVER_NAME="mycomputer1"
-
-
-
/EXISTING_ REPORTING DB_SQLINSTANCE_USE_DEFAULT
-
Indicates that the default SQL instance is to be used. Switch parameter so no value is expected.
-
-
-
/EXISTING REPORTING_DB_CUSTOM_SQLINSTANCE
-
Specifies the name of the custom SQL instance that should be used. Takes a string. E.g. /EXISTING_REPORTING_DB_ CUSTOM_SQLINSTANCE="MYSQLSERVER"
-
-
-
/EXISTING_ REPORTING _DB_NAME
-
Specifies the name of the existing Reporting database that should be used. Takes a string. E.g. /EXISTING_REPORTING_DB_NAME="AppVReporting"
-
-
-
-
-### Parameters for installing Reporting Server Database
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
Information
-
-
-
-
-
/DB_PREDEPLOY_REPORTING
-
Specifies that the Reporting Database will be installed. DBA permissions are required for this installation. No value is expected
-
-
-
/REPORTING_DB_SQLINSTANCE_USE_DEFAULT
-
Specifies the name of the custom SQL instance that should be used. Takes a string. E.g. /REPORTING_DB_ CUSTOM_SQLINSTANCE="MYSQLSERVER"
-
-
-
/REPORTING_DB_NAME
-
Specifies the name of the new Reporting database that should be created. Takes a string. E.g. /REPORTING_DB_NAME="AppVMgmtDB"
-
-
-
/REPORTING_SERVER_MACHINE_USE_LOCAL
-
Indicates that the Reporting server that will be accessing the database is installed on the local server. Switch parameter so no value is expected.
-
-
-
/REPORTING_REMOTE_SERVER_MACHINE_ACCOUNT
-
Specifies the machine account of the remote machine that the Reporting server will be installed on. Takes a string. E.g. /REPORTING_REMOTE_SERVER_MACHINE_ACCOUNT = "domain\computername"
-
-
-
/REPORTING_SERVER_INSTALL_ADMIN_ACCOUNT
-
Indicates the Administrator account that will be used to install the App-V Reporting Server. Takes a string. E.g. /REPORTING_SERVER_INSTALL_ADMIN_ACCOUNT = "domain\alias"
-
-
-
-
-### Parameters for using an existing Management Server Database
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
Information
-
-
-
-
-
/EXISTING_MANAGEMENT_DB_SQL_SERVER_USE_LOCAL
-
Indicates that the SQL Server is installed on the local server. Switch parameter so no value is expected.If /DB_PREDEPLOY_MANAGEMENT is specified, this will be ignored.
-
-
-
/EXISTING_MANAGEMENT_DB_REMOTE_SQL_SERVER_NAME
-
Specifies the name of the remote computer that SQL Server is installed on. Takes a string. E.g. /EXISTING_MANAGEMENT_DB_ REMOTE_SQL_SERVER_NAME="mycomputer1"
-
-
-
/EXISTING_ MANAGEMENT_DB_SQLINSTANCE_USE_DEFAULT
-
Indicates that the default SQL instance is to be used. Switch parameter so no value is expected. If /DB_PREDEPLOY_MANAGEMENT is specified, this will be ignored.
-
-
-
/EXISTING_MANAGEMENT_DB_ CUSTOM_SQLINSTANCE
-
Specifies the name of the custom SQL instance that will be used. Example usage /EXISTING_MANAGEMENT_DB_ CUSTOM_SQLINSTANCE=”AppVManagement”. If /DB_PREDEPLOY_MANAGEMENT is specified, this will be ignored.
-
-
-
/EXISTING_MANAGEMENT_DB_NAME
-
Specifies the name of the existing management database that should be used. Example usage: /EXISTING_MANAGEMENT_DB_NAME=”AppVMgmtDB”. If /DB_PREDEPLOY_MANAGEMENT is specified, this will be ignored.
-
-
Got a suggestion for App-V? Add or vote on suggestions here. Got an App-V issue? Use the App-V TechNet Forum.
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-[Deploying the App-V 5.0 Server](deploying-the-app-v-50-server.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-51-server-using-a-script.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-51-server-using-a-script.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e3c13b3c79..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-51-server-using-a-script.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,796 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Deploy the App-V 5.1 Server Using a Script
-description: How to Deploy the App-V 5.1 Server Using a Script
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 15c33d7b-9b61-4dbc-8674-399bb33e5f7e
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Deploy the App-V 5.1 Server Using a Script
-
-
-In order to complete the **appv\_server\_setup.exe** Server setup successfully using the command line, you must specify and combine multiple parameters.
-
-**To Install the App-V 5.1 server using a script**
-
-- Use the following tables for more information about installing the App-V 5.1 server using the command line.
-
- **Note**
- The information in the following tables can also be accessed using the command line by typing the following command: **appv\_server\_setup.exe /?**.
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Common parameters and Examples**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
To Install the Management server and Management database on a local machine.
-
To use the default instance of Microsoft SQL Server, use the following parameters:
-
-
/MANAGEMENT_SERVER
-
/MANAGEMENT_ADMINACCOUNT
-
/MANAGEMENT_WEBSITE_NAME
-
/MANAGEMENT_WEBSITE_PORT
-
/DB_PREDEPLOY_MANAGEMENT
-
/MANAGEMENT_DB_SQLINSTANCE_USE_DEFAULT
-
/MANAGEMENT_DB_NAME
-
-
To use a custom instance of Microsoft SQL Server, use the following parameters:
-
-
/MANAGEMENT_SERVER
-
/MANAGEMENT_ADMINACCOUNT
-
/MANAGEMENT_WEBSITE_NAME
-
/MANAGEMENT_WEBSITE_PORT
-
/DB_PREDEPLOY_MANAGEMENT
-
/MANAGEMENT_DB_CUSTOM_SQLINSTANCE
-
/MANAGEMENT_DB_NAME
-
-
Using a custom instance of Microsoft SQL Server example:
Specifies layout action. This extracts the MSIs and script files to a folder without actually installing the product. No value is expected.
-
-
-
/LAYOUTDIR
-
Specifies the layout directory. Takes a string. For example, /LAYOUTDIR=”C:\Application Virtualization Server”
-
-
-
/INSTALLDIR
-
Specifies the installation directory. Takes a string. E.g. /INSTALLDIR=”C:\Program Files\Application Virtualization\Server”
-
-
-
/MUOPTIN
-
Enables Microsoft Update. No value is expected
-
-
-
/ACCEPTEULA
-
Accepts the license agreement. This is required for an unattended installation. Example usage: /ACCEPTEULA or /ACCEPTEULA=1.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Management Server Installation Parameters**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
Information
-
-
-
-
-
/MANAGEMENT_SERVER
-
Specifies that the management server will be installed. No value is expected
-
-
-
/MANAGEMENT_ADMINACCOUNT
-
Specifies the account that will be allowed to Administrator access to the management server This account can be an individual user account or a group. Example usage: /MANAGEMENT_ADMINACCOUNT=”mydomain\admin”. If /MANAGEMENT_SERVER is not specified, this will be ignored. Specifies the account that will be allowed to Administrator access to the management server. This can be a user account or a group. For example, /MANAGEMENT_ADMINACCOUNT="mydomain\admin".
-
-
-
/MANAGEMENT_WEBSITE_NAME
-
Specifies name of the website that will be created for the management service. For example, /MANAGEMENT_WEBSITE_NAME=”Microsoft App-V Management Service”
-
-
-
MANAGEMENT_WEBSITE_PORT
-
Specifies the port number that will be used by the management service will use. For example, /MANAGEMENT_WEBSITE_PORT=82.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Parameters for the Management Server Database**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
Information
-
-
-
-
-
/DB_PREDEPLOY_MANAGEMENT
-
Specifies that the management database will be installed. You must have sufficient database permissions to complete this installation. No value is expected
-
-
-
/MANAGEMENT_DB_SQLINSTANCE_USE_DEFAULT
-
Indicates that the default SQL instance should be used. No value is expected.
-
-
-
/MANAGEMENT_DB_ CUSTOM_SQLINSTANCE
-
Specifies the name of the custom SQL instance that should be used to create a new database. Example usage: /MANAGEMENT_DB_ CUSTOM_SQLINSTANCE=”MYSQLSERVER”. If /DB_PREDEPLOY_MANAGEMENT is not specified, this will be ignored.
-
-
-
/MANAGEMENT_DB_NAME
-
Specifies the name of the new management database that should be created. Example usage: /MANAGEMENT_DB_NAME=”AppVMgmtDB”. If /DB_PREDEPLOY_MANAGEMENT is not specified, this will be ignored.
-
-
-
/MANAGEMENT_SERVER_MACHINE_USE_LOCAL
-
Indicates if the management server that will be accessing the database is installed on the local server. Switch parameter so no value is expected.
-
-
-
/MANAGEMENT_REMOTE_SERVER_MACHINE_ACCOUNT
-
Specifies the machine account of the remote machine that the management server will be installed on. Example usage: /MANAGEMENT_REMOTE_SERVER_MACHINE_ACCOUNT=”domain\computername”
-
-
-
/MANAGEMENT_SERVER_INSTALL_ADMIN_ACCOUNT
-
Indicates the Administrator account that will be used to install the management server. Example usage: /MANAGEMENT_SERVER_INSTALL_ADMIN_ACCOUNT =”domain\alias”
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Parameters for Installing Publishing Server**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
Information
-
-
-
-
-
/PUBLISHING_SERVER
-
Specifies that the Publishing Server will be installed. No value is expected
-
-
-
/PUBLISHING_MGT_SERVER
-
Specifies the URL to Management Service the Publishing server will connect to. Example usage: http://<management server name>:<Management server port number>. If /PUBLISHING_SERVER is not used, this parameter will be ignored
-
-
-
/PUBLISHING_WEBSITE_NAME
-
Specifies name of the website that will be created for the publishing service. For example, /PUBLISHING_WEBSITE_NAME=”Microsoft App-V Publishing Service”
-
-
-
/PUBLISHING_WEBSITE_PORT
-
Specifies the port number used by the publishing service. For example, /PUBLISHING_WEBSITE_PORT=83
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Parameters for Reporting Server**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
Information
-
-
-
-
-
/REPORTING_SERVER
-
Specifies that the Reporting Server will be installed. No value is expected
-
-
-
/REPORTING_WEBSITE_NAME
-
Specifies name of the website that will be created for the Reporting Service. E.g. /REPORTING_WEBSITE_NAME="Microsoft App-V ReportingService"
-
-
-
/REPORTING_WEBSITE_PORT
-
Specifies the port number that the Reporting Service will use. E.g. /REPORTING_WEBSITE_PORT=82
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Parameters for using an Existing Reporting Server Database**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
Information
-
-
-
-
-
/EXISTING_REPORTING_DB_SQL_SERVER_USE_LOCAL
-
Indicates that the Microsoft SQL Server is installed on the local server. Switch parameter so no value is expected.
-
-
-
/EXISTING_REPORTING_DB_REMOTE_SQL_SERVER_NAME
-
Specifies the name of the remote computer that SQL Server is installed on. Takes a string. E.g. /EXISTING_REPORTING_DB_ REMOTE_SQL_SERVER_NAME="mycomputer1"
-
-
-
/EXISTING_ REPORTING _DB_SQLINSTANCE_USE_DEFAULT
-
Indicates that the default SQL instance is to be used. Switch parameter so no value is expected.
-
-
-
/EXISTING_ REPORTING_DB_CUSTOM_SQLINSTANCE
-
Specifies the name of the custom SQL instance that should be used. Takes a string. E.g. /EXISTING_REPORTING_DB_ CUSTOM_SQLINSTANCE="MYSQLSERVER"
-
-
-
/EXISTING_ REPORTING _DB_NAME
-
Specifies the name of the existing Reporting database that should be used. Takes a string. E.g. /EXISTING_REPORTING_DB_NAME="AppVReporting"
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Parameters for installing Reporting Server Database**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
Information
-
-
-
-
-
/DB_PREDEPLOY_REPORTING
-
Specifies that the Reporting Database will be installed. DBA permissions are required for this installation. No value is expected
-
-
-
/REPORTING_DB_SQLINSTANCE_USE_DEFAULT
-
Specifies the name of the custom SQL instance that should be used. Takes a string. E.g. /REPORTING_DB_ CUSTOM_SQLINSTANCE="MYSQLSERVER"
-
-
-
/REPORTING_DB_NAME
-
Specifies the name of the new Reporting database that should be created. Takes a string. E.g. /REPORTING_DB_NAME="AppVMgmtDB"
-
-
-
/REPORTING_SERVER_MACHINE_USE_LOCAL
-
Indicates that the Reporting server that will be accessing the database is installed on the local server. Switch parameter so no value is expected.
-
-
-
/REPORTING_REMOTE_SERVER_MACHINE_ACCOUNT
-
Specifies the machine account of the remote machine that the Reporting server will be installed on. Takes a string. E.g. /REPORTING_REMOTE_SERVER_MACHINE_ACCOUNT = "domain\computername"
-
-
-
/REPORTING_SERVER_INSTALL_ADMIN_ACCOUNT
-
Indicates the Administrator account that will be used to install the App-V Reporting Server. Takes a string. E.g. /REPORTING_SERVER_INSTALL_ADMIN_ACCOUNT = "domain\alias"
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Parameters for using an existing Management Server Database**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
Information
-
-
-
-
-
/EXISTING_MANAGEMENT_DB_SQL_SERVER_USE_LOCAL
-
Indicates that the SQL Server is installed on the local server. Switch parameter so no value is expected.If /DB_PREDEPLOY_MANAGEMENT is specified, this will be ignored.
-
-
-
/EXISTING_MANAGEMENT_DB_REMOTE_SQL_SERVER_NAME
-
Specifies the name of the remote computer that SQL Server is installed on. Takes a string. E.g. /EXISTING_MANAGEMENT_DB_ REMOTE_SQL_SERVER_NAME="mycomputer1"
-
-
-
/EXISTING_ MANAGEMENT_DB_SQLINSTANCE_USE_DEFAULT
-
Indicates that the default SQL instance is to be used. Switch parameter so no value is expected. If /DB_PREDEPLOY_MANAGEMENT is specified, this will be ignored.
-
-
-
/EXISTING_MANAGEMENT_DB_ CUSTOM_SQLINSTANCE
-
Specifies the name of the custom SQL instance that will be used. Example usage /EXISTING_MANAGEMENT_DB_ CUSTOM_SQLINSTANCE=”AppVManagement”. If /DB_PREDEPLOY_MANAGEMENT is specified, this will be ignored.
-
-
-
/EXISTING_MANAGEMENT_DB_NAME
-
Specifies the name of the existing management database that should be used. Example usage: /EXISTING_MANAGEMENT_DB_NAME=”AppVMgmtDB”. If /DB_PREDEPLOY_MANAGEMENT is specified, this will be ignored.
-
-
Got a suggestion for App-V? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). Got an App-V issue? Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-
-
-~~~
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the App-V 5.1 Server](deploying-the-app-v-51-server.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-51-server.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-51-server.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 97b1877022..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-51-server.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,278 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Deploy the App-V 5.1 Server
-description: How to Deploy the App-V 5.1 Server
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 4729beda-b98f-481b-ae74-ad71c59b1d69
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Deploy the App-V 5.1 Server
-
-
-Use the following procedure to install the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 server. For information about deploying the App-V 5.1 Server, see [About App-V 5.1](about-app-v-51.md#bkmk-migrate-to-51).
-
-**Before you start:**
-
-- Ensure that you’ve installed prerequisite software. See [App-V 5.1 Prerequisites](app-v-51-prerequisites.md).
-
-- Review the server section of [App-V 5.1 Security Considerations](app-v-51-security-considerations.md).
-
-- Specify a port where each component will be hosted.
-
-- Add firewall rules to allow incoming requests to access the specified ports.
-
-- If you use SQL scripts, instead of the Windows Installer, to set up the Management database or Reporting database, you must run the SQL scripts before installing the Management Server or Reporting Server. See [How to Deploy the App-V Databases by Using SQL Scripts](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-databases-by-using-sql-scripts51.md).
-
-**To install the App-V 5.1 server**
-
-1. Copy the App-V 5.1 server installation files to the computer on which you want to install it.
-
-2. Start the App-V 5.1 server installation by right-clicking and running **appv\_server\_setup.exe** as an administrator, and then click **Install**.
-
-3. Review and accept the license terms, and choose whether to enable Microsoft updates.
-
-4. On the **Feature Selection** page, select all of the following components.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Component
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Management server
-
Provides overall management functionality for the App-V infrastructure.
-
-
-
Management database
-
Facilitates database predeployments for App-V management.
-
-
-
Publishing server
-
Provides hosting and streaming functionality for virtual applications.
-
-
-
Reporting server
-
Provides App-V 5.1 reporting services.
-
-
-
Reporting database
-
Facilitates database predeployments for App-V reporting.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-5. On the **Installation Location** page, accept the default location where the selected components will be installed, or change the location by typing a new path on the **Installation Location** line.
-
-6. On the initial **Create New Management Database** page, configure the **Microsoft SQL Server instance** and **Management Server database** by selecting the appropriate option below.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Method
-
What you need to do
-
-
-
-
-
You are using a custom Microsoft SQL Server instance.
-
Select Use the custom instance, and type the name of the instance.
-
Use the format INSTANCENAME. The assumed installation location is the local computer.
-
Not supported: A server name using the format ServerName<strong>INSTANCE.
-
-
-
You are using a custom database name.
-
Select Custom configuration and type the database name.
-
The database name must be unique, or the installation will fail.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-7. On the **Configure** page, accept the default value **Use this local computer**.
-
- **Note**
- If you are installing the Management server and Management database side by side, some options on this page are not available. In this case, the appropriate options are selected by default and cannot be changed.
-
-
-
-8. On the initial **Create New Reporting Database** page, configure the **Microsoft SQL Server instance** and **Reporting Server database** by selecting the appropriate option below.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Method
-
What you need to do
-
-
-
-
-
You are using a custom Microsoft SQL Server instance.
-
Select Use the custom instance, and type the name of the instance.
-
Use the format INSTANCENAME. The assumed installation location is the local computer.
-
Not supported: A server name using the format ServerName<strong>INSTANCE.
-
-
-
You are using a custom database name.
-
Select Custom configuration and type the database name.
-
The database name must be unique, or the installation will fail.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-9. On the **Configure** page, accept the default value: **Use this local computer**.
-
- **Note**
- If you are installing the Management server and Management database side by side, some options on this page are not available. In this case, the appropriate options are selected by default and cannot be changed.
-
-
-
-10. On the **Configure** (Management Server Configuration) page, specify the following:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Item to configure
-
Description and examples
-
-
-
-
-
Type the AD group with sufficient permissions to manage the App-V environment.
-
Example: MyDomain\MyUser
-
After installation, you can add additional users or groups by using the Management console. However, global security groups and Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) distribution groups are not supported. You must use Domain local or Universal groups are required to perform this action.
-
-
-
Website name: Specify the custom name that will be used to run the publishing service.
-
If you do not have a custom name, do not make any changes.
-
-
-
Port binding: Specify a unique port number that will be used by App-V.
-
Example: 12345
-
Ensure that the port specified is not being used by another website.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-11. On the **Configure** **Publishing Server Configuration** page, specify the following:
-
-
Website name: Specify the custom name that will be used to run the publishing service.
-
If you do not have a custom name, do not make any changes.
-
-
-
Port binding: Specify a unique port number that will be used by App-V.
-
Example: 54321
-
Ensure that the port specified is not being used by another website.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-12. On the **Reporting Server** page, specify the following:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Item to configure
-
Description and examples
-
-
-
-
-
Website name: Specify the custom name that will be used to run the Reporting Service.
-
If you do not have a custom name, do not make any changes.
-
-
-
Port binding: Specify a unique port number that will be used by App-V.
-
Example: 55555
-
Ensure that the port specified is not being used by another website.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-13. To start the installation, click **Install** on the **Ready** page, and then click **Close** on the **Finished** page.
-
-14. To verify that the setup completed successfully, open a web browser, and type the following URL:
-
- **http://<Management server machine name>:<Management service port number>/Console.html**.
-
- Example: **http://localhost:12345/console.html**. If the installation succeeded, the App-V Management console is displayed with no errors.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying App-V 5.1](deploying-app-v-51.md)
-
-[How to Install the Management and Reporting Databases on Separate Computers from the Management and Reporting Services](how-to-install-the-management-and-reporting-databases-on-separate-computers-from-the-management-and-reporting-services51.md)
-
-[How to Install the Publishing Server on a Remote Computer](how-to-install-the-publishing-server-on-a-remote-computer51.md)
-
-[How to Deploy the App-V 5.1 Server Using a Script](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-51-server-using-a-script.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-client-51gb18030.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-client-51gb18030.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f89ee280f9..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-client-51gb18030.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,374 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Deploy the App-V Client
-description: How to Deploy the App-V Client
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 981f57c9-56c3-45da-8261-0972bfad3e5b
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 11/01/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Deploy the App-V Client
-
-
-Use the following procedure to install the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 client and Remote Desktop Services client. You must install the version of the client that matches the operating system of the target computer.
-
-**What to do before you start**
-
-1. Review and install the software prerequisites:
-
- Install the prerequisite software that corresponds to the version of App-V that you are installing:
-
- - [About App-V 5.1](about-app-v-51.md)
-
- - [App-V 5.1 Prerequisites](app-v-51-prerequisites.md)
-
-2. Review the client coexistence and unsupported scenarios, as applicable to your installation:
-
-
See the error log in the %temp% folder. To review the log files, click Start, type %temp%, and then look for the appv_ log.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**To install the App-V 5.1 Client**
-
-1. Copy the App-V 5.1 client installation file to the computer on which it will be installed. Choose from the following client types:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Client type
-
File to use
-
-
-
-
-
Standard version of the client
-
appv_client_setup.exe
-
-
-
Remote Desktop Services version of the client
-
appv_client_setup_rds.exe
-
-
-
-
-
-
-2. Double-click the installation file, and click **Install**. Before the installation begins, the installer checks the computer for any missing [App-V 5.1 Prerequisites](app-v-51-prerequisites.md).
-
-3. Review and accept the Software License Terms, choose whether to use Microsoft Update and whether to participate in the Microsoft Customer Experience Improvement Program, and click **Install**.
-
-4. On the **Setup completed successfully** page, click **Close**.
-
- The installation creates the following entries for the App-V client in **Programs**:
-
- - **.exe**
-
- - **.msi**
-
- - **language pack**
-
- **Note**
- After the installation, only the .exe file can be uninstalled.
-
-
-
-**To install the App-V 5.1 client using a script**
-
-1. Install all of the required prerequisite software on the target computers. See [What to do before you start](#bkmk-clt-install-prereqs). If you install the client by using an .msi file, the installation will fail if any prerequisites are missing.
-
-2. To use a script to install the App-V 5.1 client, use the following parameters with **appv\_client\_setup.exe**.
-
- **Note**
- The client Windows Installer (.msi) supports the same set of switches, except for the **/LOG** parameter.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
/INSTALLDIR
-
Specifies the installation directory. Example usage: /INSTALLDIR=C:\Program Files\AppV Client
-
-
-
/CEIPOPTIN
-
Enables participation in the Customer Experience Improvement Program. Example usage: /CEIPOPTIN=[0|1]
-
-
-
/MUOPTIN
-
Enables Microsoft Update. Example usage: /MUOPTIN=[0|1]
-
-
-
/PACKAGEINSTALLATIONROOT
-
Specifies the directory in which to install all new applications and updates. Example usage: /PACKAGEINSTALLATIONROOT='C:\App-V Packages'
-
-
-
/PACKAGESOURCEROOT
-
Overrides the source location for downloading package content. Example usage: /PACKAGESOURCEROOT='http://packageStore'
-
-
-
/AUTOLOAD
-
Specifies how new packages will be loaded by App-V 5.1 on a specific computer. The following options are enabled: [1]; automatically load all packages [2]; or automatically load no packages [0].Example usage: /AUTOLOAD=[0|1|2]
-
-
-
/SHAREDCONTENTSTOREMODE
-
Specifies that streamed package contents will be not be saved to the local hard disk. Example usage: /SHAREDCONTENTSTOREMODE=[0|1]
-
-
-
/MIGRATIONMODE
-
Allows the App-V 5.1 client to modify the shortcuts and FTAs that are associated with the packages that are created with a previous version. Example usage: /MIGRATIONMODE=[0|1]
-
-
-
/ENABLEPACKAGESCRIPTS
-
Enables the scripts that are defined in the package manifest file or configuration files that should run. Example usage: /ENABLEPACKAGESCRIPTS=[0|1]
-
-
-
/ROAMINGREGISTRYEXCLUSIONS
-
Specifies the registry paths that will not roam with a user profile. Example usage: /ROAMINGREGISTRYEXCLUSIONS=software\classes;software\clients
-
-
-
/ROAMINGFILEEXCLUSIONS
-
Specifies the file paths relative to %userprofile% that do not roam with a user's profile. Example usage: /ROAMINGFILEEXCLUSIONS 'desktop;my pictures'
-
-
-
/S[1-5]PUBLISHINGSERVERNAME
-
Displays the name of the publishing server. Example usage: /S2PUBLISHINGSERVERNAME=MyPublishingServer
-
-
-
/S[1-5]PUBLISHINGSERVERURL
-
Displays the URL of the publishing server. Example usage: /S2PUBLISHINGSERVERURL=\pubserver
-
-
-
/S[1-5]GLOBALREFRESHENABLED -
-
Enables a global publishing refresh. Example usage: /S2GLOBALREFRESHENABLED=[0|1]
-
-
-
/S[1-5]GLOBALREFRESHONLOGON
-
Initiates a global publishing refresh when a user logs on. Example usage: /S2LOGONREFRESH=[0|1]
-
-
-
/S[1-5]GLOBALREFRESHINTERVAL -
-
Specifies the publishing refresh interval, where 0 indicates do not periodically refresh. Example usage: /S2PERIODICREFRESHINTERVAL=[0-744]
-
-
-
/S[1-5]GLOBALREFRESHINTERVALUNIT
-
Specifies the interval unit (Hours[0], Days[1]). Example usage: /S2GLOBALREFRESHINTERVALUNIT=[0|1]
-
-
-
/S[1-5]USERREFRESHENABLED
-
Enables user publishing refresh. Example usage: /S2USERREFRESHENABLED=[0|1]
-
-
-
/S[1-5]USERREFRESHONLOGON
-
Initiates a user publishing refresh when a user logs on. Example usage: /S2LOGONREFRESH=[0|1]
-
-
-
/S[1-5]USERREFRESHINTERVAL -
-
Specifies the publishing refresh interval, where 0 indicates do not periodically refresh. Example usage: /S2PERIODICREFRESHINTERVAL=[0-744]
-
-
-
/S[1-5]USERREFRESHINTERVALUNIT
-
Specifies the interval unit (Hours[0], Days[1]). Example usage: /S2USERREFRESHINTERVALUNIT=[0|1]
-
-
-
/Log
-
Specifies a location where the log information is saved. The default location is %Temp%. Example usage: /log C:\logs\log.log
-
-
-
/q
-
Specifies an unattended installation.
-
-
-
/REPAIR
-
Repairs a previous client installation.
-
-
-
/NORESTART
-
Prevents the computer from rebooting after the client installation.
-
The parameter prevents the end-user computer from rebooting after each update is installed and lets you schedule the reboot at your convenience. For example, you can install App-V 5.1 and then install Hotfix Package Y without rebooting after the Service Pack installation. After the installation, you must reboot before you start using App-V.
-
-
-
/UNINSTALL
-
Uninstalls the client.
-
-
-
/ACCEPTEULA
-
Accepts the license agreement. This is required for an unattended installation. Example usage: /ACCEPTEULA or /ACCEPTEULA=1.
-
-
-
/LAYOUT
-
Specifies the associated layout action. It also extracts the Windows Installer (.msi) and script files to a folder without installing App-V 5.1. No value is expected.
-
-
-
/LAYOUTDIR
-
Specifies the layout directory. Requires a string value. Example usage: /LAYOUTDIR=”C:\Application Virtualization Client”.
-
-
-
/?, /h, /help
-
Requests help about the previous installation parameters.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**To install the App-V 5.1 client by using the Windows Installer (.msi) file**
-
-1. Install the required prerequisites on the target computers. See [What to do before you start](#bkmk-clt-install-prereqs). If any prerequisites are not met, the installation will fail.
-
-2. Ensure that the target computers do not have any pending restarts before you install the client using the App-V 5.1 Windows Installer (.msi) files. The Windows Installer files do not flag a pending restart.
-
-3. Deploy one of the following Windows Installer files to the target computer. The file that you specify must match the configuration of the target computer.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Type of deployment
-
Deploy this file
-
-
-
-
-
Computer is running a 32-bit Microsoft Windows operating system
-
appv_client_MSI_x86.msi
-
-
-
Computer is running a 64-bit Microsoft Windows operating system
-
appv_client_MSI_x64.msi
-
-
-
You are deploying the App-V 5.1 Remote Desktop Services client
-
appv_client_rds_MSI_x64.msi
-
-
-
-
-
-
-4. Using the information in the following table, select the appropriate language pack **.msi** to install, based on the desired language for the target computer. The **xxxx** in the table refers to the target locale of the language pack.
-
- **What to know before you start:**
-
- - The language packs are common to both the standard App-V 5.1 client and the Remote Desktop Services version of the App-V 5.1 client.
-
- - If you install the App-V 5.1 client using the **.exe**, the installer will deploy only the language pack that matches the operating system running on the target computer.
-
- - To deploy additional language packs on a target computer, use the procedure **To install the App-V 5.1 client by using Windows Installer (.msi) file**.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Type of deployment
-
Deploy this file
-
-
-
-
-
Computer is running a 32-bit Microsoft Windows operating system
-
appv_client_LP_xxxx_ x86.msi
-
-
-
Computer is running a 64-bit Microsoft Windows operating system
-
appv_client_LP_xxxx_ x64.msi
-
-
-
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-~~~
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying App-V 5.1](deploying-app-v-51.md)
-
-[About Client Configuration Settings](about-client-configuration-settings51.md)
-
-[How to Uninstall the App-V 5.1 Client](how-to-uninstall-the-app-v-51-client.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-client-gb18030.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-client-gb18030.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 3197e02c38..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-client-gb18030.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,173 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Deploy the App-V Client
-description: How to Deploy the App-V Client
-ms.author: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 9c4e67ae-ddaf-4e23-8c16-72d029a74a27
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 11/05/2018
----
-
-
-# How to Deploy the App-V Client
-
-
-Use the following procedure to install the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 client and Remote Desktop Services client. You must install the version of the client that matches the operating system of the target computer.
-
-**What to do before you start**
-
-1. Review and install the software prerequisites:
-
- Install the prerequisite software that corresponds to the version of App-V that you are installing:
-
- - [About App-V 5.0 SP3](about-app-v-50-sp3.md)
-
- - App-V 5.0 SP1 and App-V 5.0 SP2 – no new prerequisites in these versions
-
- - [App-V 5.0 Prerequisites](app-v-50-prerequisites.md)
-
-2. Review the client coexistence and unsupported scenarios, as applicable to your installation:
-
-
- | | |
- |-----------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
- | Deploying coexisting App-V clients | [Planning for the App-V 5.0 Sequencer and Client Deployment](planning-for-the-app-v-50-sequencer-and-client-deployment.md) |
- | Unsupported or limited installation scenarios | [App-V 5.0 Supported Configurations](app-v-50-supported-configurations.md) |
-
- ---
-
-3. Review the locations for client registry, log, and troubleshooting information:
-
-#### Client registry information
-
By default, after you install the App-V 5.0 client, the client information is stored in the registry in the following registry key:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\MICROSOFT\APPV\CLIENT
When you deploy a virtualized package to a computer that is running the App-V client, the associated package data is stored in the following location:
C:\ProgramData\App-V
However, you can reconfigure this location with the following registry key:
For log file information that is associated with the App-V 5.0 Client, search in the following log:
Event logs/Applications and Services Logs/Microsoft/AppV
In App-V 5.0 SP3, some logs have been consolidated and moved to the following location:
Event logs/Applications and Services Logs/Microsoft/AppV/ServiceLog
For a list of the moved logs, see [About App-V 5.0 SP3](about-app-v-50-sp3.md#bkmk-event-logs-moved).
Packages that are currently stored on computers that run the App-V 5.0 Client are saved to the following location:
C:\ProgramData\App-V\<package id>\<version id>
-
-#### Client installation troubleshooting information
-- See the error log in the **%temp%** folder.
-- To review the log files, click **Start**, type **%temp%**, and then look for the **appv_ log**.
-
-## To install the App-V 5.0 Client
-
-1. Copy the App-V 5.0 client installation file to the computer on which it will be installed.
Choose from the following client types:
-
-
- | Client type | File to use |
- |-----------------------------------------------|-------------------------------|
- | Standard version of the client | **appv_client_setup.exe** |
- | Remote Desktop Services version of the client | **appv_client_setup_rds.exe** |
-
- ---
-
-2. Double-click the installation file, and click **Install**. Before the installation begins, the installer checks the computer for any missing [App-V 5.0 Prerequisites](app-v-50-prerequisites.md).
-
-3. Review and accept the Software License Terms, choose whether to use Microsoft Update and whether to participate in the Microsoft Customer Experience Improvement Program, and click **Install**.
-
-4. On the **Setup completed successfully** page, click **Close**.
-
- The installation creates the following entries for the App-V client in **Programs**:
-
- - **.exe**
-
- - **.msi**
-
- - **language pack**
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >After the installation, only the .exe file can be uninstalled.
-
-
-## To install the App-V 5.0 client using a script
-
-1. Install all of the required prerequisite software on the target computers. See [What to do before you start](#bkmk-clt-install-prereqs). If you install the client by using an .msi file, the installation will fail if any prerequisites are missing.
-
-2. To use a script to install the App-V 5.0 client, use the following parameters with **appv\_client\_setup.exe**.
-
- >[!NOTE]
- >The client Windows Installer (.msi) supports the same set of switches, except for the **/LOG** parameter.
-
- | | |
- |----------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
- | /INSTALLDIR | Specifies the installation directory. Example usage:
**/INSTALLDIR=C:\Program Files\AppV Client** |
- | /CEIPOPTIN | Enables participation in the Customer Experience Improvement Program. Example usage:
**/CEIPOPTIN=[0\|1\]** |
- | /MUOPTIN | Enables Microsoft Update. Example usage:
**/MUOPTIN=[0\|1\]** |
- | /PACKAGEINSTALLATIONROOT | Specifies the directory in which to install all new applications and updates. Example usage:
**/PACKAGEINSTALLATIONROOT='C:\App-V Packages'** |
- | /PACKAGESOURCEROOT | Overrides the source location for downloading package content. Example usage:
**/PACKAGESOURCEROOT=''** |
- | /AUTOLOAD | Specifies how new packages will be loaded by App-V 5.0 on a specific computer. The following options are enabled: [1]; automatically load all packages [2]; or automatically load no packages [0]. Example usage:
**/AUTOLOAD=[0\|1\|2\]** |
- | /SHAREDCONTENTSTOREMODE | Specifies that streamed package contents will be not be saved to the local hard disk. Example usage:
**/SHAREDCONTENTSTOREMODE=[0\|1\]** |
- | /MIGRATIONMODE | Allows the App-V 5.0 client to modify the shortcuts and FTAs that are associated with the packages that are created with a previous version. Example usage:
**/MIGRATIONMODE=[0\|1\]** |
- | /ENABLEPACKAGESCRIPTS | Enables the scripts that are defined in the package manifest file or configuration files that should run. Example usage:
**/ENABLEPACKAGESCRIPTS=[0\|1\]** |
- | /ROAMINGREGISTRYEXCLUSIONS | Specifies the registry paths that will not roam with a user profile. Example usage:
**/ROAMINGREGISTRYEXCLUSIONS=software\classes;software\clients** |
- | /ROAMINGFILEEXCLUSIONS | Specifies the file paths relative to %userprofile% that do not roam with a user's profile. Example usage:
**/ROAMINGFILEEXCLUSIONS 'desktop;my pictures'** |
- | /S[1-5]PUBLISHINGSERVERNAME | Displays the name of the publishing server. Example usage:
**/S2PUBLISHINGSERVERNAME=MyPublishingServer** |
- | /S[1-5]PUBLISHINGSERVERURL | Displays the URL of the publishing server. Example usage:
**/S2PUBLISHINGSERVERURL=\\pubserver** |
- | /S[1-5]GLOBALREFRESHENABLED | Enables a global publishing refresh. Example usage:
**/S2GLOBALREFRESHENABLED=[0\|1\]** |
- | /S[1-5]GLOBALREFRESHONLOGON | Initiates a global publishing refresh when a user logs on. Example usage:
**/S2LOGONREFRESH=[0\|1\]** |
- | /S[1-5]GLOBALREFRESHINTERVAL | Specifies the publishing refresh interval, where **0** indicates do not periodically refresh. Example usage: **/S2PERIODICREFRESHINTERVAL=[0-744]** |
- | /S[1-5]GLOBALREFRESHINTERVALUNIT | Specifies the interval unit (Hours[0], Days[1]). Example usage:
**/S2GLOBALREFRESHINTERVALUNIT=[0\|1\]** |
- | /S[1-5]USERREFRESHENABLED | Enables user publishing refresh. Example usage: **/S2USERREFRESHENABLED=[0\|1\]** |
- | /S[1-5]USERREFRESHONLOGON | Initiates a user publishing refresh when a user logs on. Example usage:
**/S2LOGONREFRESH=[0\|1\]** |
- | /S[1-5]USERREFRESHINTERVAL | Specifies the publishing refresh interval, where **0** indicates do not periodically refresh. Example usage: **/S2PERIODICREFRESHINTERVAL=[0-744]** |
- | /S[1-5]USERREFRESHINTERVALUNIT | Specifies the interval unit (Hours[0], Days[1]). Example usage:
**/S2USERREFRESHINTERVALUNIT=[0\|1\]** |
- | /Log | Specifies a location where the log information is saved. The default location is %Temp%. Example usage:
**/log C:\logs\log.log** |
- | /q | Specifies an unattended installation. |
- | /REPAIR | Repairs a previous client installation. |
- | /NORESTART | Prevents the computer from rebooting after the client installation.
The parameter prevents the end-user computer from rebooting after each update is installed and lets you schedule the reboot at your convenience. For example, you can install App-V 5.0 SPX and then install Hotfix Package Y without rebooting after the Service Pack installation. After the installation, you must reboot before you start using App-V. |
- | /UNINSTALL | Uninstalls the client. |
- | /ACCEPTEULA | Accepts the license agreement. This is required for an unattended installation. Example usage:
**/ACCEPTEULA** or **/ACCEPTEULA=1** |
- | /LAYOUT | Specifies the associated layout action. It also extracts the Windows Installer (.msi) and script files to a folder without installing App-V 5.0. No value is expected. |
- | /LAYOUTDIR | Specifies the layout directory. Requires a string value. Example usage:
**/LAYOUTDIR=”C:\Application Virtualization Client”** |
- | /?, /h, /help | Requests help about the previous installation parameters. |
-
- ---
-
-## To install the App-V 5.0 client by using the Windows Installer (.msi) file
-
-1. Install the required prerequisites on the target computers. See [What to do before you start](#bkmk-clt-install-prereqs). If any prerequisites are not met, the installation will fail.
-
-2. Ensure that the target computers do not have any pending restarts before you install the client using the App-V 5.0 Windows Installer (.msi) files. The Windows Installer files do not flag a pending restart.
-
-3. Deploy one of the following Windows Installer files to the target computer. The file that you specify must match the configuration of the target computer.
-
-
- | Type of deployment | Deploy this file |
- |-----------------------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------|
- | Computer is running a 32-bit Microsoft Windows operating system | appv_client_MSI_x86.msi |
- | Computer is running a 64-bit Microsoft Windows operating system | appv_client_MSI_x64.msi |
- | You are deploying the App-V 5.0 Remote Desktop Services client | appv_client_rds_MSI_x64.msi |
-
- ---
-
-4. Using the information in the following table, select the appropriate language pack **.msi** to install, based on the desired language for the target computer. The **xxxx** in the table refers to the target locale of the language pack.
-
- **What to know before you start:**
-
- - The language packs are common to both the standard App-V 5.0 client and the Remote Desktop Services version of the App-V 5.0 client.
-
- - If you install the App-V 5.0 client using the **.exe**, the installer will deploy only the language pack that matches the operating system running on the target computer.
-
- - To deploy additional language packs on a target computer, use the procedure **To install the App-V 5.0 client by using Windows Installer (.msi) file**.
-
- | Type of deployment | Deploy this file |
- |-----------------------------------------------------------------|------------------------------|
- | Computer is running a 32-bit Microsoft Windows operating system | appv_client_LP_xxxx_ x86.msi |
- | Computer is running a 64-bit Microsoft Windows operating system | appv_client_LP_xxxx_ x64.msi |
-
- ---
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on [suggestions](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization).
**Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying App-V 5.0](deploying-app-v-50.md)
-
-[About Client Configuration Settings](about-client-configuration-settings.md)
-
-[How to Uninstall the App-V 5.0 Client](how-to-uninstall-the-app-v-50-client.md)
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-databases-by-using-sql-scripts.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-databases-by-using-sql-scripts.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0427b800e1..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-databases-by-using-sql-scripts.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,87 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Deploy the App-V Databases by Using SQL Scripts
-description: How to Deploy the App-V Databases by Using SQL Scripts
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 23637936-475f-4ca5-adde-76bb27d2372b
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Deploy the App-V Databases by Using SQL Scripts
-
-
-Use the following instructions to use SQL scripts, rather than the Windows Installer, to:
-
-- Install the App-V 5.0 databases
-
-- Upgrade the 5.0 databases to a later version
-
-**How to install the App-V databases by using SQL scripts**
-
-1. Before you install the database scripts, review and keep a copy of the App-V license terms. By running the database scripts, you are agreeing to the license terms. If you do not accept them, you should not use this software.
-
-2. Copy the **appv\_server\_setup.exe** from the App-V release media to a temporary location.
-
-3. From a command prompt, run **appv\_server\_setup.exe** and specify a temporary location for extracting the database scripts.
-
- Example: appv\_server\_setup.exe /layout c:\\<temporary location path>
-
-4. Browse to the temporary location that you created, open the extracted **DatabaseScripts** folder, and review the appropriate Readme.txt file for instructions:
-
-
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-~~~
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the App-V 5.0 Server](deploying-the-app-v-50-server.md)
-
-[How to Deploy the App-V 5.0 Server](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-50-server-50sp3.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-databases-by-using-sql-scripts51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-databases-by-using-sql-scripts51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c8faae6bae..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-deploy-the-app-v-databases-by-using-sql-scripts51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,241 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Deploy the App-V Databases by Using SQL Scripts
-description: How to Deploy the App-V Databases by Using SQL Scripts
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 1183b1bc-d4d7-4914-a049-06e82bf2d96d
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Deploy the App-V Databases by Using SQL Scripts
-
-
-Use the following instructions to use SQL scripts, rather than the Windows Installer, to:
-
-- Install the App-V 5.1 databases
-
-- Upgrade the App-V databases to a later version
-
-**Note**
-If you have already deployed the App-V 5.0 SP3 database, the SQL scripts are not required to upgrade to App-V 5.1.
-
-
-
-**How to install the App-V databases by using SQL scripts**
-
-1. Before you install the database scripts, review and keep a copy of the App-V license terms. By running the database scripts, you are agreeing to the license terms. If you do not accept them, you should not use this software.
-
-2. Copy the **appv\_server\_setup.exe** from the App-V release media to a temporary location.
-
-3. From a command prompt, run **appv\_server\_setup.exe** and specify a temporary location for extracting the database scripts.
-
- Example: appv\_server\_setup.exe /layout c:\\<temporary location path>
-
-4. Browse to the temporary location that you created, open the extracted **DatabaseScripts** folder, and review the appropriate Readme.txt file for instructions:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Database
-
Location of Readme.txt file to use
-
-
-
-
-
Management database
-
ManagementDatabase subfolder
-
-
-
Reporting database
-
ReportingDatabase subfolder
-
-
-
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Caution**
-The readme.txt file in the ManagementDatabase subfolder is out of date. The information in the updated readme files below is the most current and should supersede the readme information provided in the **DatabaseScripts** folders.
-
-
-
-**Important**
-The InsertVersionInfo.sql script is not required for versions of the App-V management database later than App-V 5.0 SP3.
-
-The Permissions.sql script should be updated according to **Step 2** in [KB article 3031340](https://support.microsoft.com/kb/3031340). **Step 1** is not required for versions of App-V later than App-V 5.0 SP3.
-~~~
-
-
-
-**Updated management database README file content**
-
-``` syntax
-******************************************************************
-Before you install and use the Application Virtualization Database Scripts you must:
-1.Review the Microsoft Application Virtualization Server 5.0 license terms.
-2.Print and retain a copy of the license terms for your records.
-By running the Microsoft Application Virtualization Database Scripts you agree to such license terms. If you do not accept them, do not use the software.
-******************************************************************
-
-
-Steps to install "AppVManagement" schema in SQL SERVER.
-
-
-## PREREQUISITES:
-
- 1. Review the installation package. The following files MUST exist:
-
- SQL files
- ---------
- Database.sql
- CreateTables.sql
- CreateStoredProcs.sql
- UpdateTables.sql
- Permissions.sql
-
- 2. Ensure the target SQL Server instance and SQL Server Agent service are running.
-
- 3. If you are not running the scripts directly on the server, ensure the
- necessary SQL Server client software is installed and available from
- the specified location. Specifically, the "osql" command must
-## be supported for these scripts to run.
-
-
-
-## PREPARATION:
-
- 1. Review the database.sql file and modify as necessary. Although the
- defaults are likely sufficient, it is suggested that the following
- settings be reviewed:
-
- DATABASE - ensure name is satisfactory - default is "AppVManagement".
-
- 2. Review the Permissions.sql file and provide all the necessary account information
- for setting up read and write access on the database. Note: Default settings
-## in the file will not work.
-
-
-
-## INSTALLATION:
-
- 1. Run the database.sql against the "master" database. Your user
- credential must have the ability to create databases.
- This script will create the database.
-
- 2. Run the following scripts against the "AppVManagement" database using the
- same account as above in order.
-
- CreateTables.sql
- CreateStoredProcs.sql
- UpdateTables.sql
-## Permissions.sql
-
-```
-
-**Updated reporting database README file content**
-
-``` syntax
-******************************************************************
-Before you install and use the Application Virtualization Database Scripts you must:
-1.Review the Microsoft Application Virtualization Server 5.0 license terms.
-2.Print and retain a copy of the license terms for your records.
-By running the Microsoft Application Virtualization Database Scripts you agree to such license terms. If you do not accept them, do not use the software.
-******************************************************************
-
-Steps to install "AppVReporting" schema in SQL SERVER.
-
-
-## PREREQUISITES:
-
- 1. Review the installation package. The following files MUST exist:
-
- SQL files
- ---------
- Database.sql
- UpgradeDatabase.sql
- CreateTables.sql
- CreateReportingStoredProcs.sql
- CreateStoredProcs.sql
- CreateViews.sql
- InsertVersionInfo.sql
- Permissions.sql
- ScheduleReportingJob.sql
-
- 2. Ensure the target SQL Server instance and SQL Server Agent service are running.
-
- 3. If you are not running the scripts directly on the server, ensure the
- necessary SQL Server client software is installed and executable from
- the location you have chosen. Specifically, the "osql" command must
-## be supported for these scripts to run.
-
-
-
-## PREPARATION:
-
- 1. Review the database.sql file and modify as necessary. Although the
- defaults are likely sufficient, it is suggested that the following
- settings be reviewed:
-
- DATABASE - ensure name is satisfactory - default is "AppVReporting".
-
- 2. Review the Permissions.sql file and provide all the necessary account information
- for setting up read and write access on the database. Note: Default settings
- in the file will not work.
-
- 3. Review the ScheduleReportingJob.sql file and make sure that the stored proc schedule
- time is acceptable. The default stored proc schedule time is at 12.01 AM (line 84).
- If this time is not suitable, you can change this to a more suitable time. The time is
-## in the format HHMMSS.
-
-
-
-## INSTALLATION:
-
- 1. Run the database.sql against the "master" database. Your user
- credential must have the ability to create databases.
- This script will create the database.
-
- 2. If upgrading the database, run UpgradeDatabase.sql This will upgrade database schema.
-
- 2. Run the following scripts against the "AppVReporting" database using the
- same account as above in order.
-
- CreateTables.sql
- CreateReportingStoredProcs.sql
- CreateStoredProcs.sql
- CreateViews.sql
- InsertVersionInfo.sql
- Permissions.sql
-## ScheduleReportingJob.sql
-
-```
-
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the App-V 5.1 Server](deploying-the-app-v-51-server.md)
-
-[How to Deploy the App-V 5.1 Server](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-51-server.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-enable-only-administrators-to-publish-packages-by-using-an-esd.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-enable-only-administrators-to-publish-packages-by-using-an-esd.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 094eff2814..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-enable-only-administrators-to-publish-packages-by-using-an-esd.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Enable Only Administrators to Publish Packages by Using an ESD
-description: How to Enable Only Administrators to Publish Packages by Using an ESD
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 03367b26-83d5-4299-ad52-b9177b9cf9a8
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Enable Only Administrators to Publish Packages by Using an ESD
-
-
-Starting in App-V 5.0 SP3, you can configure the App-V client so that only administrators (not end users) can publish or unpublish packages. In earlier versions of App-V, you could not prevent end users from performing these tasks.
-
-**To enable only administrators to publish or unpublish packages**
-
-1. Navigate to the following Group Policy Object node:
-
- **Computer Configuration > Policies > Administrative Templates > System > App-V > Publishing**.
-
-2. Enable the **Require publish as administrator** Group Policy setting.
-
- To alternatively use PowerShell to set this item, see [How to Manage App-V 5.0 Packages Running on a Stand-Alone Computer by Using PowerShell](how-to-manage-app-v-50-packages-running-on-a-stand-alone-computer-by-using-powershell.md#bkmk-admins-pub-pkgs).
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-enable-only-administrators-to-publish-packages-by-using-an-esd51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-enable-only-administrators-to-publish-packages-by-using-an-esd51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 475dc5d892..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-enable-only-administrators-to-publish-packages-by-using-an-esd51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Enable Only Administrators to Publish Packages by Using an ESD
-description: How to Enable Only Administrators to Publish Packages by Using an ESD
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: bbc9fda2-fc09-4d72-8d9a-e83d2fcfe234
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Enable Only Administrators to Publish Packages by Using an ESD
-
-
-Starting in App-V 5.0 SP3, you can configure the App-V client so that only administrators (not end users) can publish or unpublish packages. In earlier versions of App-V, you could not prevent end users from performing these tasks.
-
-**To enable only administrators to publish or unpublish packages**
-
-1. Navigate to the following Group Policy Object node:
-
- **Computer Configuration > Policies > Administrative Templates > System > App-V > Publishing**.
-
-2. Enable the **Require publish as administrator** Group Policy setting.
-
- To alternatively use PowerShell to set this item, see [How to Manage App-V 5.1 Packages Running on a Stand-Alone Computer by Using PowerShell](how-to-manage-app-v-51-packages-running-on-a-stand-alone-computer-by-using-powershell.md#bkmk-admins-pub-pkgs).
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-enable-reporting-on-the-app-v-50-client-by-using-powershell.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-enable-reporting-on-the-app-v-50-client-by-using-powershell.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 128470febf..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-enable-reporting-on-the-app-v-50-client-by-using-powershell.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,97 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Enable Reporting on the App-V 5.0 Client by Using PowerShell
-description: How to Enable Reporting on the App-V 5.0 Client by Using PowerShell
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: a7aaf553-0f83-4cd0-8df8-93a5f1ebe497
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Enable Reporting on the App-V 5.0 Client by Using PowerShell
-
-
-Use the following procedure to configure the App-V 5.0 for reporting.
-
-**To configure the computer running the App-V 5.0 client for reporting**
-
-1. Install the App-V 5.0 client. For more information about installing the client see [How to Deploy the App-V Client](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-client-gb18030.md).
-
-2. After you have installed the App-V 5.0 client, use the **Set-AppvClientConfiguration** PowerShell to configure appropriate Reporting Configuration settings:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Setting
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
ReportingEnabled
-
Enables the client to return information to a reporting server. This setting is required for the client to collect the reporting data on the client.
-
-
-
ReportingServerURL
-
Specifies the location on the reporting server where client information is saved. For example, http://<reportingservername>:<reportingportnumber>.
-
- Note
This is the port number that was assigned during the Reporting Server setup
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Reporting Start Time
-
This is set to schedule the client to automatically send the data to the server. This setting will indicate the hour at which the reporting data will start to send. It is in the 24 hour format and will take a number between 0-23.
-
-
-
ReportingRandomDelay
-
Specifies the maximum delay (in minutes) for data to be sent to the reporting server. When the scheduled task is started, the client generates a random delay between 0 and ReportingRandomDelay and will wait the specified duration before sending data.
-
-
-
ReportingInterval
-
Specifies the retry interval that the client will use to resend data to the reporting server.
-
-
-
ReportingDataCacheLimit
-
Specifies the maximum size in megabytes (MB) of the XML cache for storing reporting information. The size applies to the cache in memory. When the limit is reached, the log file will roll over.
-
-
-
ReportingDataBlockSize
-
Specifies the maximum size in megabytes (MB) of the XML cache for storing reporting information. The size applies to the cache in memory. When the limit is reached, the log file will roll over.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-3. After the appropriate settings have been configured, the computer running the App-V 5.0 client will automatically collect data and will send the data back to the reporting server.
-
- Additionally, administrators can manually send the data back in an on-demand manner using the **Send-AppvClientReport** PowerShell cmdlet.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Administering App-V by Using PowerShell](administering-app-v-by-using-powershell.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-enable-reporting-on-the-app-v-51-client-by-using-powershell.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-enable-reporting-on-the-app-v-51-client-by-using-powershell.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0bbe4ac487..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-enable-reporting-on-the-app-v-51-client-by-using-powershell.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,97 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Enable Reporting on the App-V 5.1 Client by Using PowerShell
-description: How to Enable Reporting on the App-V 5.1 Client by Using PowerShell
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: c4c58be6-cc50-44f6-bf4f-8346fc5d0c0e
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Enable Reporting on the App-V 5.1 Client by Using PowerShell
-
-
-Use the following procedure to configure the App-V 5.1 for reporting.
-
-**To configure the computer running the App-V 5.1 client for reporting**
-
-1. Install the App-V 5.1 client. For more information about installing the client see [How to Deploy the App-V Client](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-client-51gb18030.md).
-
-2. After you have installed the App-V 5.1 client, use the **Set-AppvClientConfiguration** PowerShell to configure appropriate Reporting Configuration settings:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Setting
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
ReportingEnabled
-
Enables the client to return information to a reporting server. This setting is required for the client to collect the reporting data on the client.
-
-
-
ReportingServerURL
-
Specifies the location on the reporting server where client information is saved. For example, http://<reportingservername>:<reportingportnumber>.
-
- Note
This is the port number that was assigned during the Reporting Server setup
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Reporting Start Time
-
This is set to schedule the client to automatically send the data to the server. This setting will indicate the hour at which the reporting data will start to send. It is in the 24 hour format and will take a number between 0-23.
-
-
-
ReportingRandomDelay
-
Specifies the maximum delay (in minutes) for data to be sent to the reporting server. When the scheduled task is started, the client generates a random delay between 0 and ReportingRandomDelay and will wait the specified duration before sending data.
-
-
-
ReportingInterval
-
Specifies the retry interval that the client will use to resend data to the reporting server.
-
-
-
ReportingDataCacheLimit
-
Specifies the maximum size in megabytes (MB) of the XML cache for storing reporting information. The size applies to the cache in memory. When the limit is reached, the log file will roll over.
-
-
-
ReportingDataBlockSize
-
Specifies the maximum size in megabytes (MB) of the XML cache for storing reporting information. The size applies to the cache in memory. When the limit is reached, the log file will roll over.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-3. After the appropriate settings have been configured, the computer running the App-V 5.1 client will automatically collect data and will send the data back to the reporting server.
-
- Additionally, administrators can manually send the data back in an on-demand manner using the **Send-AppvClientReport** PowerShell cmdlet.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Administering App-V 5.1 by Using PowerShell](administering-app-v-51-by-using-powershell.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-app-v-50-client-for-shared-content-store-mode.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-app-v-50-client-for-shared-content-store-mode.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b9405a9529..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-app-v-50-client-for-shared-content-store-mode.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Install the App-V 5.0 Client for Shared Content Store Mode
-description: How to Install the App-V 5.0 Client for Shared Content Store Mode
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 88f09e6f-19e7-48ea-965a-907052d1a02f
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Install the App-V 5.0 Client for Shared Content Store Mode
-
-
-Use the following procedure to install the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 client so that it uses the App-V 5.0 Shared Content Store (SCS) mode. You should ensure that all required prerequisites are installed on the computer you plan to install to. Use the following link for a [App-V 5.0 Prerequisites](app-v-50-prerequisites.md).
-
-**Note**
-Before performing this procedure if necessary uninstall any existing version of the App-V 5.0 client.
-
-
-
-For more information about SCS mode, see [Shared Content Store in Microsoft App-V 5.0 – Behind the Scenes](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316879) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316879).
-
-**Install and configure the App-V 5.0 client for SCS mode**
-
-1. Copy the App-V 5.0 client installation files to the computer on which it will be installed. Open a command line and from the directory where the installation files are saved type one of the following options depending on the version of the client you are installing:
-
- - To install the RDS version of the App-V 5.0 client type: **appv\_client\_setup\_rds.exe /SHAREDCONTENTSTOREMODE=1 /q**
-
- - To install the standard version of the App-V 5.0 client type: **appv\_client\_setup.exe /SHAREDCONTENTSTOREMODE=1 /q**
-
- **Important**
- You must perform a silent installation or the installation will fail.
-
-
-
-2. After you have completed the installation you can deploy packages to the computer running the client and all package contents will be streamed across the network.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the App-V 5.0 Sequencer and Client](deploying-the-app-v-50-sequencer-and-client.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-app-v-51-client-for-shared-content-store-mode.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-app-v-51-client-for-shared-content-store-mode.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 25741ffb48..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-app-v-51-client-for-shared-content-store-mode.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Install the App-V 5.1 Client for Shared Content Store Mode
-description: How to Install the App-V 5.1 Client for Shared Content Store Mode
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 6f3ecb1b-b5b5-4ae0-8de9-b4ffdfd2c216
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Install the App-V 5.1 Client for Shared Content Store Mode
-
-
-Use the following procedure to install the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 client so that it uses the App-V 5.1 Shared Content Store (SCS) mode. You should ensure that all required prerequisites are installed on the computer you plan to install to. Use the following link to see [App-V 5.1 Prerequisites](app-v-51-prerequisites.md).
-
-**Note**
-Before performing this procedure if necessary uninstall any existing version of the App-V 5.1 client.
-
-
-
-For more information about SCS mode, see [Shared Content Store in Microsoft App-V 5.0 – Behind the Scenes](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316879) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316879).
-
-**Install and configure the App-V 5.1 client for SCS mode**
-
-1. Copy the App-V 5.1 client installation files to the computer on which it will be installed. Open a command line and from the directory where the installation files are saved type one of the following options depending on the version of the client you are installing:
-
- - To install the RDS version of the App-V 5.1 client type: **appv\_client\_setup\_rds.exe /SHAREDCONTENTSTOREMODE=1 /q**
-
- - To install the standard version of the App-V 5.1 client type: **appv\_client\_setup.exe /SHAREDCONTENTSTOREMODE=1 /q**
-
- **Important**
- You must perform a silent installation or the installation will fail.
-
-
-
-2. After you have completed the installation you can deploy packages to the computer running the client and all package contents will be streamed across the network.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the App-V 5.1 Sequencer and Client](deploying-the-app-v-51-sequencer-and-client.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-app-v-databases-and-convert-the-associated-security-identifiers--by-using-powershell.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-app-v-databases-and-convert-the-associated-security-identifiers--by-using-powershell.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 22ca05448e..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-app-v-databases-and-convert-the-associated-security-identifiers--by-using-powershell.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,173 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Install the App-V Databases and Convert the Associated Security Identifiers by Using PowerShell
-description: How to Install the App-V Databases and Convert the Associated Security Identifiers by Using PowerShell
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 9399342b-1ea7-41df-b988-33e302f9debe
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Install the App-V Databases and Convert the Associated Security Identifiers by Using PowerShell
-
-
-Use the following PowerShell procedure to convert any number of Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) user or machine accounts into formatted Security Identifiers (SIDs) both in the standard format and in the hexadecimal format used by Microsoft SQL Server when running SQL scripts.
-
-Before attempting this procedure, you should read and understand the information and examples displayed in the following list:
-
-- **.INPUTS** – The account or accounts used to convert to SID format. This can be a single account name or an array of account names.
-
-- **.OUTPUTS** - A list of account names with the corresponding SID in standard and hexadecimal formats.
-
-- **Examples** -
-
- **.\\ConvertToSID.ps1 DOMAIN\\user\_account1 DOMAIN\\machine\_account1$ DOMAIN\\user\_account2 | Format-List**.
-
- **$accountsArray = @("DOMAIN\\user\_account1", "DOMAIN\\machine\_account1$", "DOMAIN\_user\_account2")**
-
- **.\\ConvertToSID.ps1 $accountsArray | Write-Output -FilePath .\\SIDs.txt -Width 200**
-
- \#>
-
-**To convert any number of Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) user or machine accounts into formatted Security Identifiers (SIDs)**
-
-1. Copy the following script into a text editor and save it as a PowerShell script file, for example **ConvertToSIDs.ps1**.
-
-2. To open a PowerShell console click **Start** and type **PowerShell**. Right-click **Windows PowerShell** and select **Run as Administrator**.
-
- ```powershell
- <#
- .SYNOPSIS
- This PowerShell script will take an array of account names and try to convert each of them to the corresponding SID in standard and hexadecimal formats.
-
- .DESCRIPTION
- This is a PowerShell script that converts any number of Active Directory (AD) user or machine accounts into formatted Security Identifiers (SIDs) both in the standard format and in the hexadecimal format used by SQL server when running SQL scripts.
-
- .INPUTS
- The account(s) to convert to SID format. This can be a single account name or an array of account names. Please see examples below.
-
- .OUTPUTS
- A list of account names with the corresponding SID in standard and hexadecimal formats
-
- .EXAMPLE
- .\ConvertToSID.ps1 DOMAIN\user_account1 DOMAIN\machine_account1$ DOMAIN\user_account2 | Format-List
-
- .EXAMPLE
- $accountsArray = @("DOMAIN\user_account1", "DOMAIN\machine_account1$", "DOMAIN_user_account2")
-
- .\ConvertToSID.ps1 $accountsArray | Write-Output -FilePath .\SIDs.txt -Width 200
- #>
-
- function ConvertSIDToHexFormat
- {
- param([System.Security.Principal.SecurityIdentifier]$sidToConvert)
-
- $sb = New-Object System.Text.StringBuilder
-
- [int] $binLength = $sidToConvert.BinaryLength
-
- [Byte[]] $byteArray = New-Object Byte[] $binLength
-
- $sidToConvert.GetBinaryForm($byteArray, 0)
-
- foreach($byte in $byteArray)
- {
- $sb.Append($byte.ToString("X2")) |Out-Null
- }
- return $sb.ToString()
- }
-
- [string[]]$myArgs = $args
-
-
-
- if(($myArgs.Length -lt 1) -or ($myArgs[0].CompareTo("/?") -eq 0))
- {
- [string]::Format("{0}====== Description ======{0}{0}" +
- " Converts any number of user or machine account names to string and hexadecimal SIDs.{0}" +
- " Pass the account(s) as space separated command line parameters. (For example 'ConvertToSID.exe DOMAIN\\Account1 DOMAIN\\Account2 ...'){0}" +
- " The output is written to the console in the format 'Account name SID as string SID as hexadecimal'{0}" +
- " And can be written out to a file using standard PowerShell redirection{0}" +
- " Please specify user accounts in the format 'DOMAIN\username'{0}" +
- " Please specify machine accounts in the format 'DOMAIN\machinename$'{0}" +
- " For more help content, please run 'Get-Help ConvertToSID.ps1'{0}" +
- "{0}====== Arguments ======{0}" +
-
-
-
- "{0} /? Show this help message", [Environment]::NewLine)
- }
- else
- {
- #If an array was passed in, try to split it
- if($myArgs.Length -eq 1)
- {
- $myArgs = $myArgs.Split(' ')
- }
-
- #Parse the arguments for account names
- foreach($accountName in $myArgs)
- {
- [string[]] $splitString = $accountName.Split('\') # We're looking for the format "DOMAIN\Account" so anything that does not match, we reject
-
- if($splitString.Length -ne 2)
- {
- $message = [string]::Format("{0} is not a valid account name. Expected format 'Domain\username' for user accounts or 'DOMAIN\machinename$' for machine accounts.", $accountName)
-
- Write-Error -Message $message
- continue
- }
-
- #Convert any account names to SIDs
- try
- {
- [System.Security.Principal.NTAccount] $account = New-Object System.Security.Principal.NTAccount($splitString[0], $splitString[1])
-
- [System.Security.Principal.SecurityIdentifier] $SID = [System.Security.Principal.SecurityIdentifier]($account.Translate([System.Security.Principal.SecurityIdentifier]))
- }
- catch [System.Security.Principal.IdentityNotMappedException]
- {
- $message = [string]::Format("Failed to translate account object '{0}' to a SID. Please verify that this is a valid user or machine account.", $account.ToString())
-
- Write-Error -Message $message
-
- continue
- }
-
- #Convert regular SID to binary format used by SQL
-
- $hexSIDString = ConvertSIDToHexFormat $SID
-
- $SIDs = New-Object PSObject
-
- $SIDs | Add-Member NoteProperty Account $accountName
-
- $SIDs | Add-Member NoteProperty SID $SID.ToString()
-
- $SIDs | Add-Member NoteProperty Hexadecimal $hexSIDString
-
- Write-Output $SIDs
- }
- }
- ```
-
-3. Run the script you saved in step one of this procedure passing the accounts to convert as arguments.
-
- For example,
-
- **.\\ConvertToSID.ps1 DOMAIN\\user\_account1 DOMAIN\\machine\_account1$ DOMAIN\\user\_account2 | Format-List” or “$accountsArray = @("DOMAIN\\user\_account1", "DOMAIN\\machine\_account1$", "DOMAIN\_user\_account2")**
-
- **.\\ConvertToSID.ps1 $accountsArray | Write-Output -FilePath .\\SIDs.txt -Width 200”**
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Administering App-V by Using PowerShell](administering-app-v-by-using-powershell.md)
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-app-v-databases-and-convert-the-associated-security-identifiers--by-using-powershell51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-app-v-databases-and-convert-the-associated-security-identifiers--by-using-powershell51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ed4ef04eb0..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-app-v-databases-and-convert-the-associated-security-identifiers--by-using-powershell51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,147 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Install the App-V Databases and Convert the Associated Security Identifiers by Using PowerShell
-description: How to Install the App-V Databases and Convert the Associated Security Identifiers by Using PowerShell
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 2be6fb72-f3a6-4550-bba1-6defa78ca08a
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Install the App-V Databases and Convert the Associated Security Identifiers by Using PowerShell
-
-
-Use the following PowerShell procedure to convert any number of Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) user or machine accounts into formatted Security Identifiers (SIDs) both in the standard format and in the hexadecimal format used by Microsoft SQL Server when running SQL scripts.
-
-Before attempting this procedure, you should read and understand the information and examples displayed in the following list:
-
-- **.INPUTS** – The account or accounts used to convert to SID format. This can be a single account name or an array of account names.
-
-- **.OUTPUTS** - A list of account names with the corresponding SID in standard and hexadecimal formats.
-
-- **Examples** -
-
- **.\\ConvertToSID.ps1 DOMAIN\\user\_account1 DOMAIN\\machine\_account1$ DOMAIN\\user\_account2 | Format-List**.
-
- **$accountsArray = @("DOMAIN\\user\_account1", "DOMAIN\\machine\_account1$", "DOMAIN\_user\_account2")**
-
- **.\\ConvertToSID.ps1 $accountsArray | Write-Output -FilePath .\\SIDs.txt -Width 200**
-
- \#>
-
-**To convert any number of Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) user or machine accounts into formatted Security Identifiers (SIDs)**
-
-1. Copy the following script into a text editor and save it as a PowerShell script file, for example **ConvertToSIDs.ps1**.
-
-2. To open a PowerShell console click **Start** and type **PowerShell**. Right-click **Windows PowerShell** and select **Run as Administrator**.
-
- ```powershell
- <#
- .SYNOPSIS
- This PowerShell script will take an array of account names and try to convert each of them to the corresponding SID in standard and hexadecimal formats.
- .DESCRIPTION
- This is a PowerShell script that converts any number of Active Directory (AD) user or machine accounts into formatted Security Identifiers (SIDs) both in the standard format and in the hexadecimal format used by SQL server when running SQL scripts.
- .INPUTS
- The account(s) to convert to SID format. This can be a single account name or an array of account names. Please see examples below.
- .OUTPUTS
- A list of account names with the corresponding SID in standard and hexadecimal formats
- .EXAMPLE
- .\ConvertToSID.ps1 DOMAIN\user_account1 DOMAIN\machine_account1$ DOMAIN\user_account2 | Format-List
- .EXAMPLE
- $accountsArray = @("DOMAIN\user_account1", "DOMAIN\machine_account1$", "DOMAIN_user_account2")
- .\ConvertToSID.ps1 $accountsArray | Write-Output -FilePath .\SIDs.txt -Width 200
- #>
-
- function ConvertSIDToHexFormat
- {
-
- param(\[System.Security.Principal.SecurityIdentifier\]$sidToConvert)
-
- $sb = New-Object System.Text.StringBuilder
- [int] $binLength = $sidToConvert.BinaryLength
- [Byte[]] $byteArray = New-Object Byte[] $binLength
- $sidToConvert.GetBinaryForm($byteArray, 0)
- foreach($byte in $byteArray)
- {
- $sb.Append($byte.ToString("X2")) |Out-Null
- }
- return $sb.ToString()
- }
- [string[]]$myArgs = $args
- if(($myArgs.Length -lt 1) -or ($myArgs[0].CompareTo("/?") -eq 0))
- {
-
- [string]::Format("{0}====== Description ======{0}{0}" +
- " Converts any number of user or machine account names to string and hexadecimal SIDs.{0}" +
- " Pass the account(s) as space separated command line parameters. (For example 'ConvertToSID.exe DOMAIN\\Account1 DOMAIN\\Account2 ...'){0}" +
- " The output is written to the console in the format 'Account name SID as string SID as hexadecimal'{0}" +
- " And can be written out to a file using standard PowerShell redirection{0}" +
- " Please specify user accounts in the format 'DOMAIN\username'{0}" +
- " Please specify machine accounts in the format 'DOMAIN\machinename$'{0}" +
- " For more help content, please run 'Get-Help ConvertToSID.ps1'{0}" +
- "{0}====== Arguments ======{0}" +
- "{0} /? Show this help message", [Environment]::NewLine)
- }
- else
- {
- #If an array was passed in, try to split it
- if($myArgs.Length -eq 1)
- {
- $myArgs = $myArgs.Split(' ')
- }
-
- #Parse the arguments for account names
- foreach($accountName in $myArgs)
- {
- [string[]] $splitString = $accountName.Split('\') # We're looking for the format "DOMAIN\Account" so anything that does not match, we reject
- if($splitString.Length -ne 2)
- {
- $message = [string]::Format("{0} is not a valid account name. Expected format 'Domain\username' for user accounts or 'DOMAIN\machinename$' for machine accounts.", $accountName)
- Write-Error -Message $message
- continue
- }
-
- #Convert any account names to SIDs
- try
- {
- [System.Security.Principal.NTAccount] $account = New-Object System.Security.Principal.NTAccount($splitString[0], $splitString[1])
- [System.Security.Principal.SecurityIdentifier] $SID = [System.Security.Principal.SecurityIdentifier]($account.Translate([System.Security.Principal.SecurityIdentifier]))
- }
- catch [System.Security.Principal.IdentityNotMappedException]
- {
- $message = [string]::Format("Failed to translate account object '{0}' to a SID. Please verify that this is a valid user or machine account.", $account.ToString())
- Write-Error -Message $message
- continue
- }
-
- #Convert regular SID to binary format used by SQL
- $hexSIDString = ConvertSIDToHexFormat $SID
-
- $SIDs = New-Object PSObject
- $SIDs | Add-Member NoteProperty Account $accountName
- $SIDs | Add-Member NoteProperty SID $SID.ToString()
- $SIDs | Add-Member NoteProperty Hexadecimal $hexSIDString
-
- Write-Output $SIDs
- }
- }
-3. Run the script you saved in step one of this procedure passing the accounts to convert as arguments.
-
- For example,
-
- **.\\ConvertToSID.ps1 DOMAIN\\user\_account1 DOMAIN\\machine\_account1$ DOMAIN\\user\_account2 | Format-List” or “$accountsArray = @("DOMAIN\\user\_account1", "DOMAIN\\machine\_account1$", "DOMAIN\_user\_account2")**
-
- **.\\ConvertToSID.ps1 $accountsArray | Write-Output -FilePath .\\SIDs.txt -Width 200”**
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Administering App-V 5.1 by Using PowerShell](administering-app-v-51-by-using-powershell.md)
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-management-and-reporting-databases-on-separate-computers-from-the-management-and-reporting-services.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-management-and-reporting-databases-on-separate-computers-from-the-management-and-reporting-services.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 924e89d919..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-management-and-reporting-databases-on-separate-computers-from-the-management-and-reporting-services.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,126 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Install the Management and Reporting Databases on Separate Computers from the Management and Reporting Services
-description: How to Install the Management and Reporting Databases on Separate Computers from the Management and Reporting Services
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 02afd6d6-4c33-4c0b-bd88-ae167b786fdf
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Install the Management and Reporting Databases on Separate Computers from the Management and Reporting Services
-
-
-Use the following procedure to install the database server and management server on different computers. The computer you plan to install the database server on must be running a supported version of Microsoft SQL or the installation will fail.
-
-**Note**
-After you complete the deployment, the **Microsoft SQL Server name**, **instance name** and **database name** will be required by the administrator installing the service to be able to connect to these databases.
-
-
-
-**To install the management database and the management server on separate computers**
-
-1. Copy the App-V 5.0 server installation files to the computer on which you want to install it on. To start the App-V 5.0 server installation right-click and run **appv\_server\_setup.exe** as an administrator. Click **Install**.
-
-2. On the **Getting Started** page, review and accept the license terms, and click **Next**.
-
-3. On the **Use Microsoft Update to help keep your computer secure and up-to-date** page, to enable Microsoft updates, select **Use Microsoft Update when I check for updates (recommended).** To disable Microsoft updates, select **I don’t want to use Microsoft Update**. Click **Next**.
-
-4. On the **Feature Selection** page, select the components you want to install by selecting the **Management Server Database** checkbox and click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Installation Location** page, accept the default location and click **Next**.
-
-6. On the initial **Create New Management Server Database page**, accept the default selections if appropriate, and click **Next**.
-
- If you are using a custom SQL Server instance, then select **Use a custom instance** and type the name of the instance.
-
- If you are using a custom database name, then select **Custom configuration** and type the database name.
-
-7. On the next **Create New Management Server Database** page, select **Use a remote computer**, and type the remote machine account using the following format: **Domain\\MachineAccount**.
-
- **Note**
- If you plan to deploy the management server on the same computer you must select **Use this local computer**.
-
-
-
-~~~
-Specify the user name for the management server **Install Administrator** using the following format: **Domain\\AdministratorLoginName**. Click **Next**.
-~~~
-
-8. To start the installation, click **Install**.
-
-**To install the reporting database and the reporting server on separate computers**
-
-1. Copy the App-V 5.0 server installation files to the computer on which you want to install it on. To start the App-V 5.0 server installation right-click and run **appv\_server\_setup.exe** as an administrator. Click **Install**.
-
-2. On the **Getting Started** page, review and accept the license terms, and click **Next**.
-
-3. On the **Use Microsoft Update to help keep your computer secure and up-to-date** page, to enable Microsoft updates, select **Use Microsoft Update when I check for updates (recommended).** To disable Microsoft updates, select **I don’t want to use Microsoft Update**. Click **Next**.
-
-4. On the **Feature Selection** page, select the components you want to install by selecting the **Reporting Server Database** checkbox and click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Installation Location** page, accept the default location and click **Next**.
-
-6. On the initial **Create New Reporting Server Database** page, accept the default selections if appropriate, and click **Next**.
-
- If you are using a custom SQL Server instance, then select **Use a custom instance** and type the name of the instance.
-
- If you are using a custom database name, then select **Custom configuration** and type the database name.
-
-7. On the next **Create New Reporting Server Database** page, select **Use a remote computer**, and type the remote machine account using the following format: **Domain\\MachineAccount**.
-
- **Note**
- If you plan to deploy the reporting server on the same computer you must select **Use this local computer**.
-
-
-
-~~~
-Specify the user name for the reporting server **Install Administrator** using the following format: **Domain\\AdministratorLoginName**. Click **Next**.
-~~~
-
-8. To start the installation, click **Install**.
-
-**To install the management and reporting databases using App-V 5.0 database scripts**
-
-1. Copy the App-V 5.0 server installation files to the computer on which you want to install it on.
-
-2. To extract the App-V 5.0 database scripts, open a command prompt and specify the location where the installation files are saved and run the following command:
-
- **appv\_server\_setup.exe** **/LAYOUT** **/LAYOUTDIR=”InstallationExtractionLocation”**.
-
-3. After the extraction has been completed, to access the App-V 5.0 database scripts and instructions readme file:
-
- - The App-V 5.0 Management Database scripts and instructions readme are located in the following folder: **InstallationExtractionLocation** \\ **Database Scripts** \\ **Management Database**.
-
- - The App-V 5.0 Reporting Database scripts and instructions readme are located in the following folder: **InstallationExtractionLocation** \\ **Database Scripts** \\ **Reporting Database**.
-
-4. For each database, copy the scripts to a share and modify them following the instructions in the readme file.
-
- **Note**
- For more information about modifying the required SIDs contained in the scripts see, [How to Install the App-V Databases and Convert the Associated Security Identifiers by Using PowerShell](how-to-install-the-app-v-databases-and-convert-the-associated-security-identifiers--by-using-powershell.md).
-
-
-
-5. Run the scripts on the computer running Microsoft SQL Server.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying App-V 5.0](deploying-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-management-and-reporting-databases-on-separate-computers-from-the-management-and-reporting-services51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-management-and-reporting-databases-on-separate-computers-from-the-management-and-reporting-services51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 77c7a3fd6a..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-management-and-reporting-databases-on-separate-computers-from-the-management-and-reporting-services51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,126 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Install the Management and Reporting Databases on Separate Computers from the Management and Reporting Services
-description: How to Install the Management and Reporting Databases on Separate Computers from the Management and Reporting Services
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 2a67402e-3119-40ea-a247-24d166af1ced
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Install the Management and Reporting Databases on Separate Computers from the Management and Reporting Services
-
-
-Use the following procedure to install the database server and management server on different computers. The computer you plan to install the database server on must be running a supported version of Microsoft SQL or the installation will fail.
-
-**Note**
-After you complete the deployment, the **Microsoft SQL Server name**, **instance name** and **database name** will be required by the administrator installing the service to be able to connect to these databases.
-
-
-
-**To install the management database and the management server on separate computers**
-
-1. Copy the App-V 5.1 server installation files to the computer on which you want to install it on. To start the App-V 5.1 server installation right-click and run **appv\_server\_setup.exe** as an administrator. Click **Install**.
-
-2. On the **Getting Started** page, review and accept the license terms, and click **Next**.
-
-3. On the **Use Microsoft Update to help keep your computer secure and up-to-date** page, to enable Microsoft updates, select **Use Microsoft Update when I check for updates (recommended).** To disable Microsoft updates, select **I don’t want to use Microsoft Update**. Click **Next**.
-
-4. On the **Feature Selection** page, select the components you want to install by selecting the **Management Server Database** checkbox and click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Installation Location** page, accept the default location and click **Next**.
-
-6. On the initial **Create New Management Server Database page**, accept the default selections if appropriate, and click **Next**.
-
- If you are using a custom SQL Server instance, then select **Use a custom instance** and type the name of the instance.
-
- If you are using a custom database name, then select **Custom configuration** and type the database name.
-
-7. On the next **Create New Management Server Database** page, select **Use a remote computer**, and type the remote machine account using the following format: **Domain\\MachineAccount**.
-
- **Note**
- If you plan to deploy the management server on the same computer you must select **Use this local computer**.
-
-
-
-~~~
-Specify the user name for the management server **Install Administrator** using the following format: **Domain\\AdministratorLoginName**. Click **Next**.
-~~~
-
-8. To start the installation, click **Install**.
-
-**To install the reporting database and the reporting server on separate computers**
-
-1. Copy the App-V 5.1 server installation files to the computer on which you want to install it on. To start the App-V 5.1 server installation right-click and run **appv\_server\_setup.exe** as an administrator. Click **Install**.
-
-2. On the **Getting Started** page, review and accept the license terms, and click **Next**.
-
-3. On the **Use Microsoft Update to help keep your computer secure and up-to-date** page, to enable Microsoft updates, select **Use Microsoft Update when I check for updates (recommended).** To disable Microsoft updates, select **I don’t want to use Microsoft Update**. Click **Next**.
-
-4. On the **Feature Selection** page, select the components you want to install by selecting the **Reporting Server Database** checkbox and click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Installation Location** page, accept the default location and click **Next**.
-
-6. On the initial **Create New Reporting Server Database** page, accept the default selections if appropriate, and click **Next**.
-
- If you are using a custom SQL Server instance, then select **Use a custom instance** and type the name of the instance.
-
- If you are using a custom database name, then select **Custom configuration** and type the database name.
-
-7. On the next **Create New Reporting Server Database** page, select **Use a remote computer**, and type the remote machine account using the following format: **Domain\\MachineAccount**.
-
- **Note**
- If you plan to deploy the reporting server on the same computer you must select **Use this local computer**.
-
-
-
-~~~
-Specify the user name for the reporting server **Install Administrator** using the following format: **Domain\\AdministratorLoginName**. Click **Next**.
-~~~
-
-8. To start the installation, click **Install**.
-
-**To install the management and reporting databases using App-V 5.1 database scripts**
-
-1. Copy the App-V 5.1 server installation files to the computer on which you want to install it on.
-
-2. To extract the App-V 5.1 database scripts, open a command prompt and specify the location where the installation files are saved and run the following command:
-
- **appv\_server\_setup.exe** **/LAYOUT** **/LAYOUTDIR=”InstallationExtractionLocation”**.
-
-3. After the extraction has been completed, to access the App-V 5.1 database scripts and instructions readme file:
-
- - The App-V 5.1 Management Database scripts and instructions readme are located in the following folder: **InstallationExtractionLocation** \\ **Database Scripts** \\ **Management Database**.
-
- - The App-V 5.1 Reporting Database scripts and instructions readme are located in the following folder: **InstallationExtractionLocation** \\ **Database Scripts** \\ **Reporting Database**.
-
-4. For each database, copy the scripts to a share and modify them following the instructions in the readme file.
-
- **Note**
- For more information about modifying the required SIDs contained in the scripts see, [How to Install the App-V Databases and Convert the Associated Security Identifiers by Using PowerShell](how-to-install-the-app-v-databases-and-convert-the-associated-security-identifiers--by-using-powershell51.md).
-
-
-
-5. Run the scripts on the computer running Microsoft SQL Server.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying App-V 5.1](deploying-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-management-server-on-a-standalone-computer-and-connect-it-to-the-database.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-management-server-on-a-standalone-computer-and-connect-it-to-the-database.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c27949ba3d..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-management-server-on-a-standalone-computer-and-connect-it-to-the-database.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to install the Management Server on a Standalone Computer and Connect it to the Database
-description: How to install the Management Server on a Standalone Computer and Connect it to the Database
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 95281287-cb56-4117-befd-854268ea147c
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to install the Management Server on a Standalone Computer and Connect it to the Database
-
-
-Use the following procedure to install the management server on a standalone computer and connect it to the database.
-
-**To install the management server on a standalone computer and connect it to the database**
-
-1. Copy the App-V 5.0 server installation files to the computer on which you want to install it on. To start the App-V 5.0 server installation right-click and run **appv\_server\_setup.exe** as an administrator. Click **Install**.
-
-2. On the **Getting Started** page, review and accept the license terms, and click **Next**.
-
-3. On the **Use Microsoft Update to help keep your computer secure and up-to-date** page, to enable Microsoft updates, select **Use Microsoft Update when I check for updates (recommended).** To disable Microsoft updates, select **I don’t want to use Microsoft Update**. Click **Next**.
-
-4. On the **Feature Selection** page, select the **Management Server** checkbox and click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Installation Location** page, accept the default location and click **Next**.
-
-6. On the **Configure Existing Management Database** page, select **Use a remote SQL Server**, and type the machine name of the computer running Microsoft SQL SQL, for example **SqlServerMachine**.
-
- **Note**
- If the Microsoft SQL Server is deployed on the same server, select **Use local SQL Server**.
-
-
-
-~~~
-For the SQL Server Instance, select **Use the default instance**. If you are using a custom Microsoft SQL Server instance, you must select **Use a custom instance** and then type the name of the instance.
-
-Specify the **SQL Server Database name** that this management server will use, for example **AppvManagement**.
-~~~
-
-7. On the **Configure Management Server Configuration** page, specify the AD group or account that will connect to the management console for administrative purposes for example **MyDomain\\MyUser** or **MyDomain\\AdminGroup**. The account or AD group you specify will be enabled to manage the server through the management console. You can add additional users or groups using the management console after installation
-
- Specify the **Website Name** that you want to use for the management service. Accept the default if you do not have a custom name. For the **Port Binding**, specify a unique port number to be used, for example **12345**.
-
-8. Click **Install**.
-
-9. To confirm that the setup has completed successfully, open a web browser, and type the following URL: http://managementserver:portnumber/Console.html if the installation was successful you should see the **Silverlight Management Console** appear without any error messages or warnings being displayed.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying App-V 5.0](deploying-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-management-server-on-a-standalone-computer-and-connect-it-to-the-database51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-management-server-on-a-standalone-computer-and-connect-it-to-the-database51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 988a91b3ff..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-management-server-on-a-standalone-computer-and-connect-it-to-the-database51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to install the Management Server on a Standalone Computer and Connect it to the Database
-description: How to install the Management Server on a Standalone Computer and Connect it to the Database
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 3f83c335-d976-4abd-b8f8-d7f5e50b4318
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to install the Management Server on a Standalone Computer and Connect it to the Database
-
-
-Use the following procedure to install the management server on a standalone computer and connect it to the database.
-
-**To install the management server on a standalone computer and connect it to the database**
-
-1. Copy the App-V 5.1 server installation files to the computer on which you want to install it on. To start the App-V 5.1 server installation right-click and run **appv\_server\_setup.exe** as an administrator. Click **Install**.
-
-2. On the **Getting Started** page, review and accept the license terms, and click **Next**.
-
-3. On the **Use Microsoft Update to help keep your computer secure and up-to-date** page, to enable Microsoft updates, select **Use Microsoft Update when I check for updates (recommended).** To disable Microsoft updates, select **I don’t want to use Microsoft Update**. Click **Next**.
-
-4. On the **Feature Selection** page, select the **Management Server** checkbox and click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Installation Location** page, accept the default location and click **Next**.
-
-6. On the **Configure Existing Management Database** page, select **Use a remote SQL Server**, and type the machine name of the computer running Microsoft SQL SQL, for example **SqlServerMachine**.
-
- **Note**
- If the Microsoft SQL Server is deployed on the same server, select **Use local SQL Server**.
-
-
-
-~~~
-For the SQL Server Instance, select **Use the default instance**. If you are using a custom Microsoft SQL Server instance, you must select **Use a custom instance** and then type the name of the instance.
-
-Specify the **SQL Server Database name** that this management server will use, for example **AppvManagement**.
-~~~
-
-7. On the **Configure Management Server Configuration** page, specify the AD group or account that will connect to the management console for administrative purposes for example **MyDomain\\MyUser** or **MyDomain\\AdminGroup**. The account or AD group you specify will be enabled to manage the server through the management console. You can add additional users or groups using the management console after installation
-
- Specify the **Website Name** that you want to use for the management service. Accept the default if you do not have a custom name. For the **Port Binding**, specify a unique port number to be used, for example **12345**.
-
-8. Click **Install**.
-
-9. To confirm that the setup has completed successfully, open a web browser, and type the following URL: http://managementserver:portnumber/Console. If the installation was successful, you should see the **Management Console** appear without any error messages or warnings being displayed.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying App-V 5.1](deploying-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-publishing-server-on-a-remote-computer.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-publishing-server-on-a-remote-computer.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ee45693fca..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-publishing-server-on-a-remote-computer.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,79 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Install the Publishing Server on a Remote Computer
-description: How to Install the Publishing Server on a Remote Computer
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 37970706-54ff-4799-9485-b9b49fd50f37
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Install the Publishing Server on a Remote Computer
-
-
-Use the following procedure to install the publishing server on a separate computer. Before you perform the following procedure, ensure the database and management server are available.
-
-**To install the publishing server on a separate computer**
-
-1. Copy the App-V 5.0 server installation files to the computer on which you want to install it on. To start the App-V 5.0 server installation right-click and run **appv\_server\_setup.exe** as an administrator. Click **Install**.
-
-2. On the **Getting Started** page, review and accept the license terms, and click **Next**.
-
-3. On the **Use Microsoft Update to help keep your computer secure and up-to-date** page, to enable Microsoft updates, select **Use Microsoft Update when I check for updates (recommended).** To disable Microsoft updates, select **I don’t want to use Microsoft Update**. Click **Next**.
-
-4. On the **Feature Selection** page, select the **Publishing Server** checkbox and click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Installation Location** page, accept the default location and click **Next**.
-
-6. On the **Configure Publishing Server Configuration** page, specify the following items:
-
- - The URL for the management service that the publishing server will connect to. For example, **http://ManagementServerName:12345**.
-
- - Specify the website name that you want to use for the publishing service. Accept the default if you do not have a custom name.
-
- - For the **Port Binding**, specify a unique port number that will be used by App-V 5.0, for example **54321**.
-
-7. On the **Ready to Install** page, click **Install**.
-
-8. After the installation is complete, the publishing server must be registered with the management server. In the App-V 5.0 management console, use the following steps to register the server:
-
- 1. Open the App-V 5.0 management server console.
-
- 2. In the left pane, select **Servers**, and then select **Register New Server**.
-
- 3. Type the name of this server and a description (if required) and click **Add**.
-
-9. To verify if the publishing server is running correctly, you should import a package to the management server, entitle the package to an AD group, and publish the package. Using an internet browser, open the following URL: http://publishingserver:pubport. If the server is running correctly information similar to the following will be displayed:
-
- ```xml
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- ```
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying App-V 5.0](deploying-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-publishing-server-on-a-remote-computer51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-publishing-server-on-a-remote-computer51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c9ed253251..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-publishing-server-on-a-remote-computer51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,79 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Install the Publishing Server on a Remote Computer
-description: How to Install the Publishing Server on a Remote Computer
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 1c903f78-0558-458d-a149-d5f6fb55aefb
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Install the Publishing Server on a Remote Computer
-
-
-Use the following procedure to install the publishing server on a separate computer. Before you perform the following procedure, ensure the database and management server are available.
-
-**To install the publishing server on a separate computer**
-
-1. Copy the App-V 5.1 server installation files to the computer on which you want to install it on. To start the App-V 5.1 server installation right-click and run **appv\_server\_setup.exe** as an administrator. Click **Install**.
-
-2. On the **Getting Started** page, review and accept the license terms, and click **Next**.
-
-3. On the **Use Microsoft Update to help keep your computer secure and up-to-date** page, to enable Microsoft updates, select **Use Microsoft Update when I check for updates (recommended).** To disable Microsoft updates, select **I don’t want to use Microsoft Update**. Click **Next**.
-
-4. On the **Feature Selection** page, select the **Publishing Server** checkbox and click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Installation Location** page, accept the default location and click **Next**.
-
-6. On the **Configure Publishing Server Configuration** page, specify the following items:
-
- - The URL for the management service that the publishing server will connect to. For example, **http://ManagementServerName:12345**.
-
- - Specify the website name that you want to use for the publishing service. Accept the default if you do not have a custom name.
-
- - For the **Port Binding**, specify a unique port number that will be used by App-V 5.1, for example **54321**.
-
-7. On the **Ready to Install** page, click **Install**.
-
-8. After the installation is complete, the publishing server must be registered with the management server. In the App-V 5.1 management console, use the following steps to register the server:
-
- 1. Open the App-V 5.1 management server console.
-
- 2. In the left pane, select **Servers**, and then select **Register New Server**.
-
- 3. Type the name of this server and a description (if required) and click **Add**.
-
-9. To verify if the publishing server is running correctly, you should import a package to the management server, entitle the package to an AD group, and publish the package. Using an internet browser, open the following URL: http://publishingserver:pubport. If the server is running correctly information similar to the following will be displayed:
-
- ```xml
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- ```
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying App-V 5.1](deploying-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-reporting-server-on-a-standalone-computer-and-connect-it-to-the-database.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-reporting-server-on-a-standalone-computer-and-connect-it-to-the-database.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4285fdefd0..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-reporting-server-on-a-standalone-computer-and-connect-it-to-the-database.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,78 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to install the Reporting Server on a Standalone Computer and Connect it to the Database
-description: How to install the Reporting Server on a Standalone Computer and Connect it to the Database
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: d186bdb7-e522-4124-bc6d-7d5a41ba8266
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to install the Reporting Server on a Standalone Computer and Connect it to the Database
-
-
-Use the following procedure to install the reporting server on a standalone computer and connect it to the database.
-
-**Important**
-Before performing the following procedure you should read and understand [About App-V 5.0 Reporting](about-app-v-50-reporting.md).
-
-
-
-**To install the reporting server on a standalone computer and connect it to the database**
-
-1. Copy the App-V 5.0 server installation files to the computer on which you want to install it on. To start the App-V 5.0 server installation right-click and run **appv\_server\_setup.exe** as an administrator. Click **Install**.
-
-2. On the **Getting Started** page, review and accept the license terms, and click **Next**.
-
-3. On the **Use Microsoft Update to help keep your computer secure and up-to-date** page, to enable Microsoft updates, select **Use Microsoft Update when I check for updates (recommended).** To disable Microsoft updates, select **I don’t want to use Microsoft Update**. Click **Next**.
-
-4. On the **Feature Selection** page, select the **Reporting Server** checkbox and click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Installation Location** page, accept the default location and click **Next**.
-
-6. On the **Configure Existing Reporting Database** page, select **Use a remote SQL Server**, and type the machine name of the computer running Microsoft SQL Server, for example **SqlServerMachine**.
-
- **Note**
- If the Microsoft SQL Server is deployed on the same server, select **Use local SQL Server**.
-
-
-
-~~~
-For the SQL Server Instance, select **Use the default instance**. If you are using a custom Microsoft SQL Server instance, you must select **Use a custom instance** and then type the name of the instance.
-
-Specify the **SQL Server Database name** that this reporting server will use, for example **AppvReporting**.
-~~~
-
-7. On the **Configure Reporting Server Configuration** page.
-
- - Specify the Website Name that you want to use for the Reporting Service. Leave the default unchanged if you do not have a custom name.
-
- - For the **Port binding**, specify a unique port number that will be used by App-V 5.0, for example **55555**. You should also ensure that the port specified is not being used by another website.
-
-8. Click **Install**.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[About App-V 5.0 Reporting](about-app-v-50-reporting.md)
-
-[Deploying App-V 5.0](deploying-app-v-50.md)
-
-[How to Enable Reporting on the App-V 5.0 Client by Using PowerShell](how-to-enable-reporting-on-the-app-v-50-client-by-using-powershell.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-reporting-server-on-a-standalone-computer-and-connect-it-to-the-database51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-reporting-server-on-a-standalone-computer-and-connect-it-to-the-database51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4d6223aabf..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-reporting-server-on-a-standalone-computer-and-connect-it-to-the-database51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,78 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to install the Reporting Server on a Standalone Computer and Connect it to the Database
-description: How to install the Reporting Server on a Standalone Computer and Connect it to the Database
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 11f07750-4045-4c8d-a583-7d70c9e9aa7b
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to install the Reporting Server on a Standalone Computer and Connect it to the Database
-
-
-Use the following procedure to install the reporting server on a standalone computer and connect it to the database.
-
-**Important**
-Before performing the following procedure you should read and understand [About App-V 5.1 Reporting](about-app-v-51-reporting.md).
-
-
-
-**To install the reporting server on a standalone computer and connect it to the database**
-
-1. Copy the App-V 5.1 server installation files to the computer on which you want to install it on. To start the App-V 5.1 server installation right-click and run **appv\_server\_setup.exe** as an administrator. Click **Install**.
-
-2. On the **Getting Started** page, review and accept the license terms, and click **Next**.
-
-3. On the **Use Microsoft Update to help keep your computer secure and up-to-date** page, to enable Microsoft updates, select **Use Microsoft Update when I check for updates (recommended).** To disable Microsoft updates, select **I don’t want to use Microsoft Update**. Click **Next**.
-
-4. On the **Feature Selection** page, select the **Reporting Server** checkbox and click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Installation Location** page, accept the default location and click **Next**.
-
-6. On the **Configure Existing Reporting Database** page, select **Use a remote SQL Server**, and type the machine name of the computer running Microsoft SQL Server, for example **SqlServerMachine**.
-
- **Note**
- If the Microsoft SQL Server is deployed on the same server, select **Use local SQL Server**.
-
-
-
-~~~
-For the SQL Server Instance, select **Use the default instance**. If you are using a custom Microsoft SQL Server instance, you must select **Use a custom instance** and then type the name of the instance.
-
-Specify the **SQL Server Database name** that this reporting server will use, for example **AppvReporting**.
-~~~
-
-7. On the **Configure Reporting Server Configuration** page.
-
- - Specify the Website Name that you want to use for the Reporting Service. Leave the default unchanged if you do not have a custom name.
-
- - For the **Port binding**, specify a unique port number that will be used by App-V 5.1, for example **55555**. You should also ensure that the port specified is not being used by another website.
-
-8. Click **Install**.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[About App-V 5.1 Reporting](about-app-v-51-reporting.md)
-
-[Deploying App-V 5.1](deploying-app-v-51.md)
-
-[How to Enable Reporting on the App-V 5.1 Client by Using PowerShell](how-to-enable-reporting-on-the-app-v-51-client-by-using-powershell.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-sequencer-51beta-gb18030.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-sequencer-51beta-gb18030.md
deleted file mode 100644
index dac6a4e3dc..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-sequencer-51beta-gb18030.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,114 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Install the Sequencer
-description: How to Install the Sequencer
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 5e8f1696-9bc0-4f44-8cb7-b809b2daae10
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Install the Sequencer
-
-
-Use the following procedure to install the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 sequencer. The computer that will run the sequencer must not be running any version of the App-V 5.1 client.
-
-Upgrading a previous installation of the App-V sequencer is not supported.
-
-**Important**
-For a full list of the sequencer requirements see sequencer sections of [App-V 5.1 Prerequisites](app-v-51-prerequisites.md) and [App-V 5.1 Supported Configurations](app-v-51-supported-configurations.md).
-
-
-
-You can also use the command line to install the App-V 5.1 sequencer. The following list displays information about options for installing the sequencer using the command line and **appv\_sequencer\_setup.exe**:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Command
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
/INSTALLDIR
-
Specifies the installation directory.
-
-
-
/CEIPOPTIN
-
Enables participation in the Microsoft Customer Experience Improvement Program.
-
-
-
/Log
-
Specifies where the installation log will be saved, the default location is %Temp%. For example, C:\ Logs \ log.log.
-
-
-
/q
-
Specifies a quiet or silent installation.
-
-
-
/Uninstall
-
Specifies the removal of the sequencer.
-
-
-
/ACCEPTEULA
-
Accepts the license agreement. This is required for an unattended installation. Example usage: /ACCEPTEULA or /ACCEPTEULA=1.
-
-
-
/LAYOUT
-
Specifies the associated layout action. It also extracts the Windows Installer (.msi) and script files to a folder without installing App-V 5.1. No value is expected.
-
-
-
/LAYOUTDIR
-
Specifies the layout directory. Requires a string value. Example usage: /LAYOUTDIR=”C:\Application Virtualization Client”.
-
-
-
/? Or /h or /help
-
Displays associated help.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**To install the App-V 5.1 sequencer**
-
-1. Copy the App-V 5.1 sequencer installation files to the computer on which it will be installed. Double-click **appv\_sequencer\_setup.exe** and then click **Install**.
-
-2. On the **Software License Terms** page, you should review the license terms. To accept the license terms select **I accept the license terms.** Click **Next**.
-
-3. On the **Use Microsoft Update to help keep your computer secure and up-to-date** page, to enable Microsoft updates select **Use Microsoft Update when I check for updates (recommended).** To disable Microsoft updates from running select **I don’t want to use Microsoft Update**. Click **Next**.
-
-4. On the **Customer Experience Improvement Program** page, to participate in the program select **Join the Customer Experience Improvement Program**. This will allow information to be collected about how you are using App-V 5.1. If you don’t want to participate in the program select **I don’t want to join the program at this time**. Click **Install**.
-
-5. To open the sequencer, click **Start** and then click **Microsoft Application Virtualization Sequencer**.
-
-**To troubleshoot the App-V 5.1 sequencer installation**
-
-- For more information regarding the sequencer installation, you can view the error log in the **%temp%** folder. To review the log files, click **Start**, type **%temp%**, and then look for the **appv\_ log**.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy App-V](planning-to-deploy-app-v51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-sequencer-beta-gb18030.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-sequencer-beta-gb18030.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c02d94ec51..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-install-the-sequencer-beta-gb18030.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,114 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Install the Sequencer
-description: How to Install the Sequencer
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: a122caf0-f408-458c-b119-dc84123c1d58
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Install the Sequencer
-
-
-Use the following procedure to install the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 sequencer. The computer that will run the sequencer must not be running any version of the App-V 5.0 client.
-
-Upgrading a previous installation of the App-V sequencer is not supported.
-
-**Important**
-For a full list of the sequencer requirements see sequencer sections of [App-V 5.0 Prerequisites](app-v-50-prerequisites.md) and [App-V 5.0 Supported Configurations](app-v-50-supported-configurations.md).
-
-
-
-You can also use the command line to install the App-V 5.0 sequencer. The following list displays information about options for installing the sequencer using the command line and **appv\_sequencer\_setup.exe**:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Command
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
/INSTALLDIR
-
Specifies the installation directory.
-
-
-
/CEIPOPTIN
-
Enables participation in the Microsoft Customer Experience Improvement Program.
-
-
-
/Log
-
Specifies where the installation log will be saved, the default location is %Temp%. For example, C:\ Logs \ log.log.
-
-
-
/q
-
Specifies a quiet or silent installation.
-
-
-
/Uninstall
-
Specifies the removal of the sequencer.
-
-
-
/ACCEPTEULA
-
Accepts the license agreement. This is required for an unattended installation. Example usage: /ACCEPTEULA or /ACCEPTEULA=1.
-
-
-
/LAYOUT
-
Specifies the associated layout action. It also extracts the Windows Installer (.msi) and script files to a folder without installing App-V 5.0. No value is expected.
-
-
-
/LAYOUTDIR
-
Specifies the layout directory. Requires a string value. Example usage: /LAYOUTDIR=”C:\Application Virtualization Client”.
-
-
-
/? Or /h or /help
-
Displays associated help.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**To install the App-V 5.0 sequencer**
-
-1. Copy the App-V 5.0 sequencer installation files to the computer on which it will be installed. Double-click **appv\_sequencer\_setup.exe** and then click **Install**.
-
-2. On the **Software License Terms** page, you should review the license terms. To accept the license terms select **I accept the license terms.** Click **Next**.
-
-3. On the **Use Microsoft Update to help keep your computer secure and up-to-date** page, to enable Microsoft updates select **Use Microsoft Update when I check for updates (recommended).** To disable Microsoft updates from running select **I don’t want to use Microsoft Update**. Click **Next**.
-
-4. On the **Customer Experience Improvement Program** page, to participate in the program select **Join the Customer Experience Improvement Program**. This will allow information to be collected about how you are using App-V 5.0. If you don’t want to participate in the program select **I don’t want to join the program at this time**. Click **Install**.
-
-5. To open the sequencer, click **Start** and then click **Microsoft Application Virtualization Sequencer**.
-
-**To troubleshoot the App-V 5.0 sequencer installation**
-
-- For more information regarding the sequencer installation, you can view the error log in the **%temp%** folder. To review the log files, click **Start**, type **%temp%**, and then look for the **appv\_ log**.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy App-V](planning-to-deploy-app-v.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-load-the-powershell-cmdlets-and-get-cmdlet-help-50-sp3.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-load-the-powershell-cmdlets-and-get-cmdlet-help-50-sp3.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e24a590f0a..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-load-the-powershell-cmdlets-and-get-cmdlet-help-50-sp3.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,222 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Load the PowerShell Cmdlets and Get Cmdlet Help
-description: How to Load the PowerShell Cmdlets and Get Cmdlet Help
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 0624495b-943e-485b-9e54-b50e4ee6591c
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 11/02/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Load the PowerShell Cmdlets and Get Cmdlet Help
-
-
-What this topic covers:
-
-- [Requirements for using PowerShell cmdlets](#bkmk-reqs-using-posh)
-
-- [Loading the PowerShell cmdlets](#bkmk-load-cmdlets)
-
-- [Getting help for the PowerShell cmdlets](#bkmk-get-cmdlet-help)
-
-- [Displaying the help for a PowerShell cmdlet](#bkmk-display-help-cmdlet)
-
-## Requirements for using PowerShell cmdlets
-
-
-Review the following requirements for using the App-V PowerShell cmdlets:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Requirement
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
Users can run App-V Server cmdlets only if you grant them access by using one of the following methods:
-
-
When you are deploying and configuring the App-V Server:
-
Specify an Active Directory group or individual user that has permissions to manage the App-V environment. See How to Deploy the App-V 5.0 Server.
-
-
-
-## Loading the PowerShell cmdlets
-To load the PowerShell cmdlet modules:
-
-1. Open Windows PowerShell or Windows PowerShell Integrated Scripting Environment (ISE).
-
-2. Type one of the following commands to load the cmdlets for the module you want:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
App-V component
-
Command to type
-
-
-
-
-
App-V Server
-
Import-Module AppvServer
-
-
-
App-V Sequencer
-
Import-Module AppvSequencer
-
-
-
App-V Client
-
Import-Module AppvClient
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Getting help for the PowerShell cmdlets
-Starting in App-V 5.0 SP3, cmdlet help is available in two formats:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Format
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
As a downloadable module
-
To download the latest help after downloading the cmdlet module:
-
-
Open Windows PowerShell or Windows PowerShell Integrated Scripting Environment (ISE).
-
Type one of the following commands to load the cmdlets for the module you want:
-
-
-
-## Displaying the help for a PowerShell cmdlet
-To display help for a specific PowerShell cmdlet:
-
-1. Open Windows PowerShell or Windows PowerShell Integrated Scripting Environment (ISE).
-
-2. Type **Get-Help** <*cmdlet*>, for example, **Get-Help Publish-AppvClientPackage**.
-
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue**? Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-load-the-powershell-cmdlets-and-get-cmdlet-help-51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-load-the-powershell-cmdlets-and-get-cmdlet-help-51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c8f34160ab..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-load-the-powershell-cmdlets-and-get-cmdlet-help-51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,219 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Load the PowerShell Cmdlets and Get Cmdlet Help
-description: How to Load the PowerShell Cmdlets and Get Cmdlet Help
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: b6ae5460-2c3a-4030-b132-394d9d5a541e
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 11/02/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Load the PowerShell Cmdlets and Get Cmdlet Help
-
-
-What this topic covers:
-
-- [Requirements for using PowerShell cmdlets](#bkmk-reqs-using-posh)
-
-- [Loading the PowerShell cmdlets](#bkmk-load-cmdlets)
-
-- [Getting help for the PowerShell cmdlets](#bkmk-get-cmdlet-help)
-
-- [Displaying the help for a PowerShell cmdlet](#bkmk-display-help-cmdlet)
-
-## Requirements for using PowerShell cmdlets
-
-
-Review the following requirements for using the App-V PowerShell cmdlets:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Requirement
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
Users can run App-V Server cmdlets only if you grant them access by using one of the following methods:
-
-
When you are deploying and configuring the App-V Server:
-
Specify an Active Directory group or individual user that has permissions to manage the App-V environment. See How to Deploy the App-V 5.1 Server.
-
-
-
-## Loading the PowerShell cmdlets
-
-To load the PowerShell cmdlet modules:
-
-1. Open Windows PowerShell or Windows PowerShell Integrated Scripting Environment (ISE).
-
-2. Type one of the following commands to load the cmdlets for the module you want:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
App-V component
-
Command to type
-
-
-
-
-
App-V Server
-
Import-Module AppvServer
-
-
-
App-V Sequencer
-
Import-Module AppvSequencer
-
-
-
App-V Client
-
Import-Module AppvClient
-
-
-
-
-## Getting help for the PowerShell cmdlets
-Starting in App-V 5.0 SP3, cmdlet help is available in two formats:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Format
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
As a downloadable module
-
To download the latest help after downloading the cmdlet module:
-
-
Open Windows PowerShell or Windows PowerShell Integrated Scripting Environment (ISE).
-
Type one of the following commands to load the cmdlets for the module you want:
-
-## Displaying the help for a PowerShell cmdlet
-To display help for a specific PowerShell cmdlet:
-
-1. Open Windows PowerShell or Windows PowerShell Integrated Scripting Environment (ISE).
-
-2. Type **Get-Help** <*cmdlet*>, for example, **Get-Help Publish-AppvClientPackage**.
-
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-make-a-connection-group-ignore-the-package-version.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-make-a-connection-group-ignore-the-package-version.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5cfa258188..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-make-a-connection-group-ignore-the-package-version.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,112 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Make a Connection Group Ignore the Package Version
-description: How to Make a Connection Group Ignore the Package Version
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 6ebc1bff-d190-4f4c-a6da-e09a4cca7874
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Make a Connection Group Ignore the Package Version
-
-
-Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 SP3 enables you to configure a connection group to use any version of a package, which simplifies package upgrades and reduces the number of connection groups you need to create.
-
-To upgrade a package in earlier versions of App-V, you had to perform several steps, including disabling the connection group and modifying the connection group’s XML definition file.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task description with App-V 5.0 SP3
-
How to perform the task with App-V 5.0 SP3
-
-
-
-
-
You can configure a connection group to accept any version of a package, which enables you to upgrade the package without having to disable the connection group.
-
How the feature works:
-
-
If the connection group has access to multiple versions of a package, the latest version is used.
-
If the connection group contains an optional package that has an incorrect version, the package is ignored and won’t block the connection group’s virtual environment from being created.
-
If the connection group contains a non-optional package that has an incorrect version, the connection group’s virtual environment cannot be created.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Method
-
Steps
-
-
-
-
-
App-V Server – Management Console
-
-
In the Management Console, select PACKAGES > CONNECTION GROUPS.
-
Select the correct connection group from the Connection Groups library.
-
Click EDIT in the CONNECTED PACKAGES pane.
-
Select Use Any Version check box next to the package name, and click Apply.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-make-a-connection-group-ignore-the-package-version51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-make-a-connection-group-ignore-the-package-version51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index dd0494ceee..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-make-a-connection-group-ignore-the-package-version51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,112 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Make a Connection Group Ignore the Package Version
-description: How to Make a Connection Group Ignore the Package Version
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: db16b095-dbe2-42c7-863d-b0d5d91b2f4c
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Make a Connection Group Ignore the Package Version
-
-
-Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 lets you configure a connection group to use any version of a package, which simplifies package upgrades and reduces the number of connection groups you need to create.
-
-To upgrade a package in some earlier versions of App-V, you had to perform several steps, including disabling the connection group and modifying the connection group’s XML definition file.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task description with App-V 5.1
-
How to perform the task with App-V 5.1
-
-
-
-
-
You can configure a connection group to accept any version of a package, which enables you to upgrade the package without having to disable the connection group.
-
How the feature works:
-
-
If the connection group has access to multiple versions of a package, the latest version is used.
-
If the connection group contains an optional package that has an incorrect version, the package is ignored and won’t block the connection group’s virtual environment from being created.
-
If the connection group contains a non-optional package that has an incorrect version, the connection group’s virtual environment cannot be created.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Method
-
Steps
-
-
-
-
-
App-V Server – Management Console
-
-
In the Management Console, select CONNECTION GROUPS.
-
Select the correct connection group from the Connection Groups library.
-
Click EDIT in the CONNECTED PACKAGES pane.
-
Select Use Any Version check box next to the package name, and click Apply.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-manage-app-v-50-packages-running-on-a-stand-alone-computer-by-using-powershell.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-manage-app-v-50-packages-running-on-a-stand-alone-computer-by-using-powershell.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ef45d7b6df..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-manage-app-v-50-packages-running-on-a-stand-alone-computer-by-using-powershell.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,299 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Manage App-V 5.0 Packages Running on a Stand-Alone Computer by Using PowerShell
-description: How to Manage App-V 5.0 Packages Running on a Stand-Alone Computer by Using PowerShell
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 1d6c2d25-81ec-4ff8-9262-6b4cf484a376
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Manage App-V 5.0 Packages Running on a Stand-Alone Computer by Using PowerShell
-
-
-The following sections explain how to perform various management tasks on a stand-alone client computer by using PowerShell:
-
-- [To return a list of packages](#bkmk-return-pkgs-standalone-posh)
-
-- [To add a package](#bkmk-add-pkgs-standalone-posh)
-
-- [To publish a package](#bkmk-pub-pkg-standalone-posh)
-
-- [To publish a package to a specific user](#bkmk-pub-pkg-a-user-standalone-posh)
-
-- [To add and publish a package](#bkmk-add-pub-pkg-standalone-posh)
-
-- [To unpublish an existing package](#bkmk-unpub-pkg-standalone-posh)
-
-- [To unpublish a package for a specific user](#bkmk-unpub-pkg-specfc-use)
-
-- [To remove an existing package](#bkmk-remove-pkg-standalone-posh)
-
-- [To enable only administrators to publish or unpublish packages](#bkmk-admins-pub-pkgs)
-
-- [Understanding pending packages (UserPending and GlobalPending)](#bkmk-understd-pend-pkgs)
-
-## To return a list of packages
-
-
-Use the following information to return a list of packages that are entitled to a specific user:
-
-**Cmdlet**: Get-AppvClientPackage
-
-**Parameters**: -Name -Version -PackageID -VersionID
-
-**Example**: Get-AppvClientPackage –Name “ContosoApplication” -Version 2
-
-## To add a package
-
-
-Use the following information to add a package to a computer.
-
-**Important**
-This example only adds a package. It does not publish the package to the user or the computer.
-
-
-
-**Cmdlet**: Add-AppvClientPackage
-
-**Example**: $Contoso = Add-AppvClientPackage \\\\path\\to\\appv\\package.appv
-
-## To publish a package
-
-
-Use the following information to publish a package that has been added to a specific user or globally to any user on the computer.
-
-
-
-
-
-## To publish a package to a specific user
-
-
-**Note**
-You must use App-V 5.0 SP2 Hotfix Package 5 or later to use this parameter.
-
-
-
-An administrator can publish a package to a specific user by specifying the optional **–UserSID** parameter with the **Publish-AppvClientPackage** cmdlet, where **-UserSID** represents the end user’s security identifier (SID).
-
-To use this parameter:
-
-- You can run this cmdlet from the user or administrator session.
-
-- You must be logged in with administrative credentials to use the parameter.
-
-- The end user must be logged in.
-
-- You must provide the end user’s security identifier (SID).
-
-**Cmdlet**: Publish-AppvClientPackage
-
-**Example**: Publish-AppvClientPackage “ContosoApplication” -UserSID S-1-2-34-56789012-3456789012-345678901-2345
-
-## To add and publish a package
-
-
-Use the following information to add a package to a computer and publish it to the user.
-
-**Cmdlet**: Add-AppvClientPackage
-
-**Example**: Add-AppvClientPackage \\\\path\\to\\appv\\package.appv | Publish-AppvClientPackage
-
-## To unpublish an existing package
-
-
-Use the following information to unpublish a package which has been entitled to a user but not remove the package from the computer.
-
-**Cmdlet**: Unpublish-AppvClientPackage
-
-**Example**: Unpublish-AppvClientPackage “ContosoApplication”
-
-## To unpublish a package for a specific user
-
-
-**Note**
-You must use App-V 5.0 SP2 Hotfix Package 5 or later to use this parameter.
-
-
-
-An administrator can unpublish a package for a specific user by using the optional **–UserSID** parameter with the **Unpublish-AppvClientPackage** cmdlet, where **-UserSID** represents the end user’s security identifier (SID).
-
-To use this parameter:
-
-- You can run this cmdlet from the user or administrator session.
-
-- You must be logged in with administrative credentials to use the parameter.
-
-- The end user must be logged in.
-
-- You must provide the end user’s security identifier (SID).
-
-**Cmdlet**: Unpublish-AppvClientPackage
-
-**Example**: Unpublish-AppvClientPackage “ContosoApplication” -UserSID S-1-2-34-56789012-3456789012-345678901-2345
-
-## To remove an existing package
-
-
-Use the following information to remove a package from the computer.
-
-**Cmdlet**: Remove-AppvClientPackage
-
-**Example**: Remove-AppvClientPackage “ContosoApplication”
-
-**Note**
-App-V cmdlets have been assigned to variables for the previous examples for clarity only; assignment is not a requirement. Most cmdlets can be combined as displayed in [To add and publish a package](#bkmk-add-pub-pkg-standalone-posh). For a detailed tutorial, see [App-V 5.0 Client PowerShell Deep Dive](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=324466).
-
-
-
-## To enable only administrators to publish or unpublish packages
-
-
-**Note**
-**This feature is supported starting in App-V 5.0 SP3.**
-
-
-
-Use the following cmdlet and parameter to enable only administrators (not end users) to publish or unpublish packages:
-
-
-
-
-
-To use the App-V Management console to set this configuration, see [How to Publish a Package by Using the Management Console](how-to-publish-a-package-by-using-the-management-console-50.md).
-
-## Understanding pending packages (UserPending and GlobalPending)
-
-
-**Starting in App-V 5.0 SP2**: If you run a PowerShell cmdlet that affects a package that is currently in use, the task that you are trying to perform is placed in a pending state. For example, if you try to publish a package when an application in that package is being used, and then run **Get-AppvClientPackage**, the pending status appears in the cmdlet output as follows:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Cmdlet output item
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
UserPending
-
Indicates whether the listed package has a pending task that is being applied to the user:
-
-
True
-
False
-
-
-
-
GlobalPending
-
Indicates whether the listed package has a pending task that is being applied globally to the computer:
-
-
True
-
False
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-The pending task will run later, according to the following rules:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task type
-
Applicable rule
-
-
-
-
-
User-based task, e.g., publishing a package to a user
-
The pending task will be performed after the user logs off and then logs back on.
-
-
-
Globally based task, e.g., enabling a connection group globally
-
The pending task will be performed when the computer is shut down and then restarted.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-For more information about pending tasks, see [About App-V 5.0 SP2](about-app-v-50-sp2.md#bkmk-pkg-upgr-pendg-tasks).
-
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-[Administering App-V by Using PowerShell](administering-app-v-by-using-powershell.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-manage-app-v-51-packages-running-on-a-stand-alone-computer-by-using-powershell.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-manage-app-v-51-packages-running-on-a-stand-alone-computer-by-using-powershell.md
deleted file mode 100644
index fe66e53ac9..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-manage-app-v-51-packages-running-on-a-stand-alone-computer-by-using-powershell.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,299 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Manage App-V 5.1 Packages Running on a Stand-Alone Computer by Using PowerShell
-description: How to Manage App-V 5.1 Packages Running on a Stand-Alone Computer by Using PowerShell
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: c3fd06f6-102f-43d1-a577-d5ced6ac537d
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Manage App-V 5.1 Packages Running on a Stand-Alone Computer by Using PowerShell
-
-
-The following sections explain how to perform various management tasks on a stand-alone client computer by using PowerShell:
-
-- [To return a list of packages](#bkmk-return-pkgs-standalone-posh)
-
-- [To add a package](#bkmk-add-pkgs-standalone-posh)
-
-- [To publish a package](#bkmk-pub-pkg-standalone-posh)
-
-- [To publish a package to a specific user](#bkmk-pub-pkg-a-user-standalone-posh)
-
-- [To add and publish a package](#bkmk-add-pub-pkg-standalone-posh)
-
-- [To unpublish an existing package](#bkmk-unpub-pkg-standalone-posh)
-
-- [To unpublish a package for a specific user](#bkmk-unpub-pkg-specfc-use)
-
-- [To remove an existing package](#bkmk-remove-pkg-standalone-posh)
-
-- [To enable only administrators to publish or unpublish packages](#bkmk-admins-pub-pkgs)
-
-- [Understanding pending packages (UserPending and GlobalPending)](#bkmk-understd-pend-pkgs)
-
-## To return a list of packages
-
-
-Use the following information to return a list of packages that are entitled to a specific user:
-
-**Cmdlet**: Get-AppvClientPackage
-
-**Parameters**: -Name -Version -PackageID -VersionID
-
-**Example**: Get-AppvClientPackage –Name “ContosoApplication” -Version 2
-
-## To add a package
-
-
-Use the following information to add a package to a computer.
-
-**Important**
-This example only adds a package. It does not publish the package to the user or the computer.
-
-
-
-**Cmdlet**: Add-AppvClientPackage
-
-**Example**: $Contoso = Add-AppvClientPackage \\\\path\\to\\appv\\package.appv
-
-## To publish a package
-
-
-Use the following information to publish a package that has been added to a specific user or globally to any user on the computer.
-
-
-
-
-
-## To publish a package to a specific user
-
-
-**Note**
-You must use App-V 5.0 SP2 Hotfix Package 5 or later to use this parameter.
-
-
-
-An administrator can publish a package to a specific user by specifying the optional **–UserSID** parameter with the **Publish-AppvClientPackage** cmdlet, where **-UserSID** represents the end user’s security identifier (SID).
-
-To use this parameter:
-
-- You can run this cmdlet from the user or administrator session.
-
-- You must be logged in with administrative credentials to use the parameter.
-
-- The end user must be logged in.
-
-- You must provide the end user’s security identifier (SID).
-
-**Cmdlet**: Publish-AppvClientPackage
-
-**Example**: Publish-AppvClientPackage “ContosoApplication” -UserSID S-1-2-34-56789012-3456789012-345678901-2345
-
-## To add and publish a package
-
-
-Use the following information to add a package to a computer and publish it to the user.
-
-**Cmdlet**: Add-AppvClientPackage
-
-**Example**: Add-AppvClientPackage \\\\path\\to\\appv\\package.appv | Publish-AppvClientPackage
-
-## To unpublish an existing package
-
-
-Use the following information to unpublish a package which has been entitled to a user but not remove the package from the computer.
-
-**Cmdlet**: Unpublish-AppvClientPackage
-
-**Example**: Unpublish-AppvClientPackage “ContosoApplication”
-
-## To unpublish a package for a specific user
-
-
-**Note**
-You must use App-V 5.0 SP2 Hotfix Package 5 or later to use this parameter.
-
-
-
-An administrator can unpublish a package for a specific user by using the optional **–UserSID** parameter with the **Unpublish-AppvClientPackage** cmdlet, where **-UserSID** represents the end user’s security identifier (SID).
-
-To use this parameter:
-
-- You can run this cmdlet from the user or administrator session.
-
-- You must be logged in with administrative credentials to use the parameter.
-
-- The end user must be logged in.
-
-- You must provide the end user’s security identifier (SID).
-
-**Cmdlet**: Unpublish-AppvClientPackage
-
-**Example**: Unpublish-AppvClientPackage “ContosoApplication” -UserSID S-1-2-34-56789012-3456789012-345678901-2345
-
-## To remove an existing package
-
-
-Use the following information to remove a package from the computer.
-
-**Cmdlet**: Remove-AppvClientPackage
-
-**Example**: Remove-AppvClientPackage “ContosoApplication”
-
-**Note**
-App-V cmdlets have been assigned to variables for the previous examples for clarity only; assignment is not a requirement. Most cmdlets can be combined as displayed in [To add and publish a package](#bkmk-add-pub-pkg-standalone-posh). For a detailed tutorial, see [App-V 5.0 Client PowerShell Deep Dive](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=324466).
-
-
-
-## To enable only administrators to publish or unpublish packages
-
-
-**Note**
-**This feature is supported starting in App-V 5.0 SP3.**
-
-
-
-Use the following cmdlet and parameter to enable only administrators (not end users) to publish or unpublish packages:
-
-
-
-
-
-To use the App-V Management console to set this configuration, see [How to Publish a Package by Using the Management Console](how-to-publish-a-package-by-using-the-management-console-51.md).
-
-## Understanding pending packages (UserPending and GlobalPending)
-
-
-**Starting in App-V 5.0 SP2**: If you run a PowerShell cmdlet that affects a package that is currently in use, the task that you are trying to perform is placed in a pending state. For example, if you try to publish a package when an application in that package is being used, and then run **Get-AppvClientPackage**, the pending status appears in the cmdlet output as follows:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Cmdlet output item
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
UserPending
-
Indicates whether the listed package has a pending task that is being applied to the user:
-
-
True
-
False
-
-
-
-
GlobalPending
-
Indicates whether the listed package has a pending task that is being applied globally to the computer:
-
-
True
-
False
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-The pending task will run later, according to the following rules:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task type
-
Applicable rule
-
-
-
-
-
User-based task, e.g., publishing a package to a user
-
The pending task will be performed after the user logs off and then logs back on.
-
-
-
Globally based task, e.g., enabling a connection group globally
-
The pending task will be performed when the computer is shut down and then restarted.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-For more information about pending tasks, see [About App-V 5.0 SP2](about-app-v-50-sp2.md#bkmk-pkg-upgr-pendg-tasks).
-
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-[Administering App-V 5.1 by Using PowerShell](administering-app-v-51-by-using-powershell.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-manage-connection-groups-on-a-stand-alone-computer-by-using-powershell.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-manage-connection-groups-on-a-stand-alone-computer-by-using-powershell.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 742f6905de..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-manage-connection-groups-on-a-stand-alone-computer-by-using-powershell.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,147 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Manage Connection Groups on a Stand-alone Computer by Using PowerShell
-description: How to Manage Connection Groups on a Stand-alone Computer by Using PowerShell
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: b73ae74d-8a6f-4bb3-b1f2-0067c7bd5212
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 11/01/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Manage Connection Groups on a Stand-alone Computer by Using PowerShell
-
-
-An App-V connection group allows you to run all the virtual applications as a defined set of packages in a single virtual environment. For example, you can virtualize an application and its plug-ins by using separate packages, but run them together in a single connection group.
-
-A connection group XML file defines the connection group that runs on the computer where you’ve installed the App-V client. For information about the connection group XML file and how to configure it, see [About the Connection Group File](about-the-connection-group-file.md).
-
-This topic explains the following procedures:
-
-- [To add and publish the App-V packages in the connection group](#bkmk-add-pub-pkgs-in-cg)
-
-- [To add and enable the connection group on the App-V client](#bkmk-add-enable-cg-on-clt)
-
-- [To enable or disable a connection group for a specific user](#bkmk-enable-cg-for-user-poshtopic)
-
-- [To allow only administrators to enable connection groups](#bkmk-admin-only-posh-topic-cg)
-
-**To add and publish the App-V packages in the connection group**
-
-1. To add and publish the App-V 5.0 packages to the computer running the App-V client, type the following command:
-
- Add-AppvClientPackage –path c:\\tmpstore\\quartfin.appv | Publish-AppvClientPackage
-
-2. Repeat **step 1** of this procedure for each package in the connection group.
-
-**To add and enable the connection group on the App-V client**
-
-1. Add the connection group by typing the following command:
-
- Add-AppvClientConnectionGroup –path c:\\tmpstore\\financ.xml
-
-2. Enable the connection group by typing the following command:
-
- Enable-AppvClientConnectionGroup –name “Financial Applications”
-
- When any virtual applications that are in the member packages are run on the target computer, they will run inside the connection group’s virtual environment and will be available to all the virtual applications in the other packages in the connection group.
-
-**To enable or disable a connection group for a specific user**
-
-1. Review the parameter description and requirements:
-
- - The parameter enables an administrator to enable or disable a connection group for a specific user.
-
- - You must use App-V 5.0 SP2 Hotfix Package 5 or later to use this parameter.
-
- - You can run this cmdlet from the user or administrator session.
-
- - You must be logged in with administrative credentials to use the parameter.
-
- - The end user must be logged in.
-
- - You must provide the end user’s security identifier (SID).
-
-2. Use the following cmdlets, and add the optional **–UserSID** parameter, where **-UserSID** represents the end user’s security identifier (SID):
-
-
-
-**To allow only administrators to enable connection groups**
-
-1. Review the description and requirement for using this cmdlet:
-
- - Use this cmdlet and parameter to configure the App-V client to allow only administrators (not end users) to enable or disable connection groups.
-
- - You must be using at least App-V 5.0 SP3 to use this cmdlet.
-
-2. Run the following cmdlet and parameter:
-
-
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-[Administering App-V by Using PowerShell](administering-app-v-by-using-powershell.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-manage-connection-groups-on-a-stand-alone-computer-by-using-powershell51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-manage-connection-groups-on-a-stand-alone-computer-by-using-powershell51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index fb63bd845f..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-manage-connection-groups-on-a-stand-alone-computer-by-using-powershell51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,151 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Manage Connection Groups on a Stand-alone Computer by Using PowerShell
-description: How to Manage Connection Groups on a Stand-alone Computer by Using PowerShell
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: e1589eff-d306-40fb-a0ae-727190dafe26
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 11/01/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Manage Connection Groups on a Stand-alone Computer by Using PowerShell
-
-
-An App-V connection group allows you to run all the virtual applications as a defined set of packages in a single virtual environment. For example, you can virtualize an application and its plug-ins by using separate packages, but run them together in a single connection group.
-
-A connection group XML file defines the connection group that runs on the computer where you’ve installed the App-V client. For information about the connection group XML file and how to configure it, see [About the Connection Group File](about-the-connection-group-file51.md).
-
-This topic explains the following procedures:
-
-- [To add and publish the App-V packages in the connection group](#bkmk-add-pub-pkgs-in-cg)
-
-- [To add and enable the connection group on the App-V client](#bkmk-add-enable-cg-on-clt)
-
-- [To enable or disable a connection group for a specific user](#bkmk-enable-cg-for-user-poshtopic)
-
-- [To allow only administrators to enable connection groups](#bkmk-admin-only-posh-topic-cg)
-
-*To add and publish the App-V packages in the connection group**
-
-1. To add and publish the App-V 5.1 packages to the computer running the App-V client, type the following command:
-
- Add-AppvClientPackage –path c:\\tmpstore\\quartfin.appv | Publish-AppvClientPackage
-
-2. Repeat **step 1** of this procedure for each package in the connection group.
-
-**To add and enable the connection group on the App-V client**
-
-1. Add the connection group by typing the following command:
-
- Add-AppvClientConnectionGroup –path c:\\tmpstore\\financ.xml
-
-2. Enable the connection group by typing the following command:
-
- Enable-AppvClientConnectionGroup –name “Financial Applications”
-
- When any virtual applications that are in the member packages are run on the target computer, they will run inside the connection group’s virtual environment and will be available to all the virtual applications in the other packages in the connection group.
-
-**To enable or disable a connection group for a specific user**
-
-1. Review the parameter description and requirements:
-
- - The parameter enables an administrator to enable or disable a connection group for a specific user.
-
- - You must use App-V 5.0 SP2 Hotfix Package 5 or later to use this parameter.
-
- - You can run this cmdlet from the user or administrator session.
-
- - You must be logged in with administrative credentials to use the parameter.
-
- - The end user must be logged in.
-
- - You must provide the end user’s security identifier (SID).
-
-2. Use the following cmdlets, and add the optional **–UserSID** parameter, where **-UserSID** represents the end user’s security identifier (SID):
-
-
-
-**To allow only administrators to enable connection groups**
-
-1. Review the description and requirement for using this cmdlet:
-
- - Use this cmdlet and parameter to configure the App-V client to allow only administrators (not end users) to enable or disable connection groups.
-
- - You must be using at least App-V 5.0 SP3 to use this cmdlet.
-
-2. Run the following cmdlet and parameter:
-
-
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-~~~
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-[Administering App-V 5.1 by Using PowerShell](administering-app-v-51-by-using-powershell.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-a-converted-app-v-50-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-a-converted-app-v-50-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 02c3ed99ef..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-a-converted-app-v-50-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,77 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to a Converted App-V 5.0 Package for All Users on a Specific Computer
-description: How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to a Converted App-V 5.0 Package for All Users on a Specific Computer
-ms.assetid: 3ae9996f-71d9-4ca1-9aab-25b599158e55
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/21/2016
----
-
-# How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to a Converted App-V 5.0 Package for All Users on a Specific Computer
-
-**Note:** App-V 4.6 has exited Mainstream support.
-
-Use the following procedure to migrate extension points from an App-V 4.6 package to a App-V 5.0 package using the deployment configuration file.
-
-**Note**
-The following procedure does not require an App-V 5.0 management server.
-
-
-
-**To migrate extension points from a package from an App-V 4.6 package to a converted App-V 5.0 package using the deployment configuration file**
-
-1. Locate the directory that contains the deployment configuration file for the package you want to migrate. To set the policy, make the following update to the **userConfiguration** section:
-
- **ManagingAuthority TakeoverExtensionPointsFrom46="true" PackageName=<Package ID>**
-
- The following is an example of content from a deployment configuration file:
-
- <?xml version="1.0" ?>
-
- <DeploymentConfiguration
-
- xmlns="" PackageId=<Package ID> DisplayName=<Display Name>
-
- <MachineConfiguration/>
-
- <UserConfiguration>
-
- <ManagingAuthority TakeoverExtensionPointsFrom46="true"
-
- PackageName=<Package ID>
-
- </UserConfiguration>
-
- </DeploymentConfiguration>
-
-2. To add the App-V 5.0 package, in an elevated PowerShell command prompt type:
-
- PS>**$pkg= Add-AppvClientPackage** **–Path** <Path to package location> -**DynamicDeploymentConfiguration** <Path to the deployment configuration file>
-
- PS>**Publish-AppVClientPackage $pkg**
-
-3. To test the migration, open the virtual application using associated FTAs or shortcuts. The application opens with App-V 5.0. Both, the App-V 4.6 package and the converted App-V 5.0 package are published to the user, but the FTAs and shortcuts for the applications have been assumed by the App-V 5.0 package.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[How to Revert Extension Points from an App-V 5.0 Package to an App-V 4.6 Package For All Users on a Specific Computer](how-to-revert-extension-points-from-an-app-v-50-package-to-an-app-v-46-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md)
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-a-converted-app-v-51-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-a-converted-app-v-51-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 19ee17d2ed..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-a-converted-app-v-51-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,78 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to a Converted App-V 5.1 Package for All Users on a Specific Computer
-description: How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to a Converted App-V 5.1 Package for All Users on a Specific Computer
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 4ef823a5-3106-44c5-aecc-29edf69c2fbb
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/21/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to a Converted App-V 5.1 Package for All Users on a Specific Computer
-
-
-Use the following procedure to migrate extension points from an App-V 4.6 package to a App-V 5.1 package using the deployment configuration file.
-
-**Note**
-This procedure assumes that you are running the latest version of App-V 4.6.
-The following procedure does not require an App-V 5.1 management server.
-
-
-
-**To migrate extension points from a package from an App-V 4.6 package to a converted App-V 5.1 package using the deployment configuration file**
-
-1. Locate the directory that contains the deployment configuration file for the package you want to migrate. To set the policy, make the following update to the **userConfiguration** section:
-
- **ManagingAuthority TakeoverExtensionPointsFrom46="true" PackageName=<Package ID>**
-
- The following is an example of content from a deployment configuration file:
-
- <?xml version="1.0" ?>
-
- <DeploymentConfiguration
-
- xmlns="" PackageId=<Package ID> DisplayName=<Display Name>
-
- <MachineConfiguration/>
-
- <UserConfiguration>
-
- <ManagingAuthority TakeoverExtensionPointsFrom46="true"
-
- PackageName=<Package ID>
-
- </UserConfiguration>
-
- </DeploymentConfiguration>
-
-2. To add the App-V 5.1 package, in an elevated PowerShell command prompt type:
-
- PS>**$pkg= Add-AppvClientPackage** **–Path** <Path to package location> -**DynamicDeploymentConfiguration** <Path to the deployment configuration file>
-
- PS>**Publish-AppVClientPackage $pkg**
-
-3. To test the migration, open the virtual application using associated FTAs or shortcuts. The application opens with App-V 5.1. Both, the App-V 4.6 package and the converted App-V 5.1 package are published to the user, but the FTAs and shortcuts for the applications have been assumed by the App-V 5.1 package.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[How to Revert Extension Points from an App-V 5.1 Package to an App-V 4.6 Package For All Users on a Specific Computer](how-to-revert-extension-points-from-an-app-v-51-package-to-an-app-v-46-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md)
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-app-v-50-for-a-specific-user.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-app-v-50-for-a-specific-user.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5221f2f8c7..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-app-v-50-for-a-specific-user.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to App-V 5.0 for a Specific User
-description: How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to App-V 5.0 for a Specific User
-ms.assetid: dad25992-3c75-4b7d-b4c6-c2edf43baaea
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/21/2016
----
-
-# How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to App-V 5.0 for a Specific User
-
-*Note:** App-V 4.6 has exited Mainstream support.
-
-Use the following procedure to migrate packages created with App-V using the user configuration file.
-
-**To convert a package**
-
-1. Locate the user configuration file for the package you want to convert. To set the policy, perform the following updates in the **userConfiguration** section: **ManagingAuthority TakeoverExtensionPointsFrom46="true" PackageName=<Package ID>**.
-
- The following is an example of a user configuration file:
-
- <?xml version="1.0" ?>
-
- <UserConfiguration PackageId=<Package ID> DisplayName=<Name of the Package>
-
- xmlns="; <ManagingAuthority TakeoverExtensionPointsFrom46="true"
-
- PackageName=<Package ID>
-
- </UserConfiguration>
-
-2. To add the App-V 5.0 package type the following in an elevated PowerShell command prompt:
-
- PS>**$pkg= Add-AppvClientPackage –Path** <Path to package location>
-
- PS>**Publish-AppVClientPackage $pkg -DynamicUserConfiguration** <Path to the user configuration file>
-
-3. Open the application using FTAs or shortcuts now. The application should open using App-V 5.0.
-
- The App-V SP2 package and the converted App-V 5.0 package are published to the user, but the FTAs and shortcuts for the applications have been assumed by the App-V 5.0 package.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-app-v-51-for-a-specific-user.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-app-v-51-for-a-specific-user.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ddcc67a299..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-app-v-51-for-a-specific-user.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to App-V 5.1 for a Specific User
-description: How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to App-V 5.1 for a Specific User
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 19da3776-5ebe-41e1-9890-12b84ef3c1c7
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/21/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to App-V 5.1 for a Specific User
-
-
-Use the following procedure to migrate packages created with App-V using the user configuration file.
-
-**Note**
-This procedure assumes that you are running the latest version of App-V 4.6.
-
-**To convert a package**
-
-1. Locate the user configuration file for the package you want to convert. To set the policy, perform the following updates in the **userConfiguration** section: **ManagingAuthority TakeoverExtensionPointsFrom46="true" PackageName=<Package ID>**.
-
- The following is an example of a user configuration file:
-
- <?xml version="1.0" ?>
-
- <UserConfiguration PackageId=<Package ID> DisplayName=<Name of the Package>
-
- xmlns="; <ManagingAuthority TakeoverExtensionPointsFrom46="true"
-
- PackageName=<Package ID>
-
- </UserConfiguration>
-
-2. To add the App-V 5.1 package, type the following in an elevated PowerShell command prompt window:
-
- PS>**$pkg= Add-AppvClientPackage –Path** <Path to package location>
-
- PS>**Publish-AppVClientPackage $pkg -DynamicUserConfiguration** <Path to the user configuration file>
-
-3. Open the application using FTAs or shortcuts now. The application should open using App-V 5.1.
-
- The App-V 4.6 package and the converted App-V 5.1 package are published to the user, but the FTAs and shortcuts for the applications have been assumed by the App-V 5.1 package.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-[How to Revert Extension Points From an App-V 5.1 Package to an App-V 4.6 Package for a Specific User](how-to-revert-extension-points-from-an-app-v-51-package-to-an-app-v-46-package-for-a-specific-user.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-modify-an-existing-virtual-application-package-51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-modify-an-existing-virtual-application-package-51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8a537ea939..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-modify-an-existing-virtual-application-package-51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,168 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Modify an Existing Virtual Application Package
-description: How to Modify an Existing Virtual Application Package
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 6cdeec00-e4fe-4210-b4c7-6ca1ac643ddd
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 11/01/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Modify an Existing Virtual Application Package
-
-
-This topic explains how to:
-
-- [Update an application in an existing virtual application package](#bkmk-update-app-in-pkg)
-
-- [Modify the properties associated with an existing virtual application package](#bkmk-chg-props-in-pkg)
-
-- [Add a new application to an existing virtual application package](#bkmk-add-app-to-pkg)
-
-**Before you update a package:**
-
-- Ensure that you’ve installed the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) Sequencer, which is required for modifying a virtual application package. To install the App-V Sequencer, see [How to Install the Sequencer](how-to-install-the-sequencer-51beta-gb18030.md).
-
-- Save the .appv file in a secure location and always trust the source before trying to open the package for editing.
-
-- The Managing Authority section is erroneously removed from the deployment configuration file when you update a package. Before starting the update, copy the Managing Authority section from the existing deployment configuration file, and then paste the copied section into the new configuration file after the conversion is complete.
-
-- If you click **Modify an Existing Virtual Application Package** in the Sequencer in order to edit a package, but then make no changes and close the package, the streaming behavior of the package is changed. The primary feature block is removed from the StreamMap.xml file, and any files that were listed in the publishing feature block are removed. Users who receive the edited package experience that package as if it were stream-faulted, regardless of how the original package was configured.
-
-**Update an application in an existing virtual application package**
-
-1. On the computer that runs the sequencer, click **All Programs**, point to **Microsoft Application Virtualization**, and then click **Microsoft Application Virtualization Sequencer**.
-
-2. In the App-V Sequencer, click **Modify an Existing Virtual Application Package** > **Next**.
-
-3. On the **Select Task** page, click **Update Application in Existing Package** > **Next**.
-
-4. On the **Select Package** page, click **Browse** to locate the virtual application package that contains the application to update, and then click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Prepare Computer** page, review the issues that could cause the application update to fail or cause the updated application to contain unnecessary data. Resolve all potential issues before you continue. After making any corrections and resolving all potential issues, click **Refresh** > **Next**.
-
- **Important**
- If you are required to disable virus scanning software, first scan the computer that runs the sequencer to ensure that no unwanted or malicious files are added to the package.
-
-6. On the **Select Installer** page, click **Browse** and specify the update installation file for the application. If the update does not have an associated installer file, and if you plan to run all installation steps manually, select the **Select this option to perform a custom installation** check box, and then click **Next**.
-
-7. On the **Installation** page, when the sequencer and application installer are ready you can proceed to install the application update so the sequencer can monitor the installation process. If additional installation files must be run as part of the installation, click **Run**, and then locate and run the additional installation files. When you are finished with the installation, select **I am finished installing**. Click **Next**.
-
- **Note**
- The sequencer monitors all changes and installations that occur on the computer that runs the sequencer. This includes any changes and installations that are performed outside of the sequencing wizard.
-
-8. On the **Installation Report** page, you can review information about the updated virtual application. In **Additional Information**, double-click the event to obtain more detailed information. To proceed, click **Next**.
-
-9. On the **Streaming** page, run each program so that it can be optimized and run more efficiently on target computers. It can take several minutes for all of the applications to run. After all applications have run, close each of the applications, and then click **Next**.
-
- **Note**
- You can stop an application from loading during this step. In the **Application Launch** dialog box, click **Stop**, and then select either **Stop all applications** or **Stop this application only**.
-
-10. On the **Create Package** page, to modify the package without saving it, select the check box for **Continue to modify package without saving using the package editor**. When you select this option, the package opens in the App-V Sequencer console, where you can modify the package before it is saved. Click **Next**.
-
- To save the package immediately, select the default **Save the package now**. Add optional **Comments** to associate with the package. Comments are useful to identify the application version and provide other information about the package. The default **Save Location** is also displayed. To change the default location, click **Browse** and specify the new location. Click **Create**.
-
-11. On the **Completion** page, click **Close** to close the wizard. The package is now available in the sequencer.
-
-**Modify the properties associated with an existing virtual application package**
-
-1. On the computer that runs the sequencer, click **All Programs**, point to **Microsoft Application Virtualization**, and then click **Microsoft Application Virtualization Sequencer**.
-
-2. In the App-V Sequencer, click **Modify an Existing Virtual Application Package** > **Next**.
-
-3. On the **Select Task** page, click **Edit Package** > **Next**.
-
-4. On the **Select Package** page, click **Browse** to locate the virtual application package that contains the application properties to modify, and then click **Edit**.
-
-5. In the App-V Sequencer console, perform any of the following tasks as needed:
-
- - Import and export the manifest file.
-
- - Enable or disable Browser Helper Objects.
-
- - Import or export a VFS file.
-
- - Import a directory into the virtual file system.
-
- - Import and export virtual registry keys.
-
- - View package properties.
-
- - View associated package files.
-
- - Edit registry settings.
-
- - Review additional package settings (except operating system file properties).
-
- - Set virtualized registry key state (override or merge).
-
- - Set virtualized folder state.
-
- - Add or edit shortcuts and file type associations.
-
- **Note**
- To edit shortcuts or file type associations, you must first open the package for upgrade to add a new application, and then proceed to the final editing page.
-
-6. When you finish changing the package properties, click **File** > **Save** to save the package.
-
-**Add a new application to an existing virtual application package**
-
-1. On the computer that runs the sequencer, click **All Programs**, point to **Microsoft Application Virtualization**, and then click **Microsoft Application Virtualization Sequencer**.
-
-2. In the App-V Sequencer, click **Modify an Existing Virtual Application Package** > **Next**.
-
-3. On the **Select Task** page, click **Add New Application** > **Next**.
-
-4. On the **Select Package** page, click **Browse** to locate the virtual application package to which you will add the application, and then click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Prepare Computer** page, review the issues that could cause the package creation to fail or cause the revised package to contain unnecessary data. Resolve all potential issues before you continue. After making any corrections and resolving all potential issues, click **Refresh** > **Next**.
-
- **Important**
- If you are required to disable virus scanning software, first scan the computer that runs the sequencer to ensure that no unwanted or malicious files can be added to the package.
-
-6. On the **Select Installer** page, click **Browse** and specify the installation file for the application. If the application does not have an associated installer file and you plan to run all installation steps manually, select the **Select this option to perform a custom installation** check box, and then click **Next**.
-
-7. On the **Installation** page, when the sequencer and application installer are ready, install the application so that the sequencer can monitor the installation process. If additional installation files must be run as part of the installation, click **Run**, and locate and run the additional installation files. When you finish the installation, select **I am finished installing** > **Next**. In the **Browse for Folder** dialog box, specify the primary directory where the application will be installed. Ensure that this is a new location so that you don’t overwrite the existing version of the virtual application package.
-
- **Note**
- The sequencer monitors all changes and installations that occur on the computer that runs the sequencer. This includes any changes and installations that are performed outside of the sequencing wizard.
-
-8. On the **Configure Software** page, optionally run the programs contained in the package. This step completes any associated license or configuration tasks that are required to run the application before you deploy and run the package on target computers. To run all the programs at the same time, select at least one program, and then click **Run All**. To run specific programs, select the program or programs you want to run, and then click **Run Selected**. Complete the required configuration tasks and then close the applications. It can take several minutes for all programs to run. Click **Next**.
-
-9. On the **Installation Report** page, you can review information about the updated virtual application. In **Additional Information**, double-click the event to obtain more detailed information, and then click **Next** to open the **Customize** page.
-
-10. If you are finished installing and configuring the virtual application, select **Stop now** and skip to step 13 of this procedure. If you want to perform the following described customization, click **Customize**.
-
- If you are customizing, prepare the virtual package for streaming, and then click **Next**. Streaming improves the experience when the virtual application package is run on target computers.
-
-11. On the **Streaming** page, run each program so that it can be optimized and run more efficiently on target computers. It can take several minutes for all the applications to run. After all applications have run, close each of the applications, and then click **Next**.
-
- **Note**
- You can stop an application from loading during this step. In the **Application Launch** dialog box, click **Stop** and then select either **Stop all applications** or **Stop this application only**.
-
-12. On the **Create Package** page, to modify the package without saving it, select the **Continue to modify package without saving using the package editor** check box. Selecting this option opens the package in the App-V Sequencer console, where you can modify the package before saving it. Click **Next**.
-
- To save the package immediately, select the default **Save the package now**. Add optional **Comments** to associate with the package. Comments are useful for providing application versions and other information about the package. The default **Save Location** is also displayed. To change the default location, click **Browse** and specify the new location. The uncompressed package size is displayed. Click **Create**.
-
-13. On the **Completion** page, click **Close**. The package is now available in the sequencer.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-modify-an-existing-virtual-application-package-beta.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-modify-an-existing-virtual-application-package-beta.md
deleted file mode 100644
index cb4d6428ca..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-modify-an-existing-virtual-application-package-beta.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,158 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Modify an Existing Virtual Application Package
-description: How to Modify an Existing Virtual Application Package
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 86b0fe21-52b0-4a9c-9a66-c78935fe74f1
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 11/01/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Modify an Existing Virtual Application Package
-
-
-This topic explains how to:
-
-- [Update an application in an existing virtual application package](#bkmk-update-app-in-pkg)
-
-- [Modify the properties associated with an existing virtual application package](#bkmk-chg-props-in-pkg)
-
-- [Add a new application to an existing virtual application package](#bkmk-add-app-to-pkg)
-
-**Before you update a package:**
-
-- Ensure that you’ve installed the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) Sequencer, which is required for modifying a virtual application package. To install the App-V Sequencer, see [How to Install the Sequencer](how-to-install-the-sequencer-beta-gb18030.md).
-
-- Save the .appv file in a secure location and always trust the source before trying to open the package for editing.
-
-- The Managing Authority section is erroneously removed from the deployment configuration file when you update a package. Before starting the update, copy the Managing Authority section from the existing deployment configuration file, and then paste the copied section into the new configuration file after the conversion is complete.
-
-- If you click **Modify an Existing Virtual Application Package** in the Sequencer in order to edit a package, but then make no changes and close the package, the streaming behavior of the package is changed. The primary feature block is removed from the StreamMap.xml file, and any files that were listed in the publishing feature block are removed. Users who receive the edited package experience that package as if it were stream-faulted, regardless of how the original package was configured.
-
-**Update an application in an existing virtual application package**
-
-1. On the computer that runs the sequencer, click **All Programs**, point to **Microsoft Application Virtualization**, and then click **Microsoft Application Virtualization Sequencer**.
-
-2. In the App-V Sequencer, click **Modify an Existing Virtual Application Package** > **Next**.
-
-3. On the **Select Task** page, click **Update Application in Existing Package** > **Next**.
-
-4. On the **Select Package** page, click **Browse** to locate the virtual application package that contains the application to update, and then click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Prepare Computer** page, review the issues that could cause the application update to fail or cause the updated application to contain unnecessary data. Resolve all potential issues before you continue. After making any corrections and resolving all potential issues, click **Refresh** > **Next**.
-
- **Important**
- If you are required to disable virus scanning software, first scan the computer that runs the sequencer to ensure that no unwanted or malicious files are added to the package.
-
-6. On the **Select Installer** page, click **Browse** and specify the update installation file for the application. If the update does not have an associated installer file, and if you plan to run all installation steps manually, select the **Select this option to perform a custom installation** check box, and then click **Next**.
-
-7. On the **Installation** page, when the sequencer and application installer are ready you can proceed to install the application update so the sequencer can monitor the installation process. If additional installation files must be run as part of the installation, click **Run**, and then locate and run the additional installation files. When you are finished with the installation, select **I am finished installing**. Click **Next**.
-
- **Note**
- The sequencer monitors all changes and installations that occur on the computer that runs the sequencer. This includes any changes and installations that are performed outside of the sequencing wizard.
-
-8. On the **Installation Report** page, you can review information about the updated virtual application. In **Additional Information**, double-click the event to obtain more detailed information. To proceed, click **Next**.
-
-9. On the **Streaming** page, run each program so that it can be optimized and run more efficiently on target computers. It can take several minutes for all of the applications to run. After all applications have run, close each of the applications, and then click **Next**.
-
- **Note**
- You can stop an application from loading during this step. In the **Application Launch** dialog box, click **Stop**, and then select either **Stop all applications** or **Stop this application only**.
-
-10. On the **Create Package** page, to modify the package without saving it, select the check box for **Continue to modify package without saving using the package editor**. When you select this option, the package opens in the App-V Sequencer console, where you can modify the package before it is saved. Click **Next**.
-
- To save the package immediately, select the default **Save the package now**. Add optional **Comments** to associate with the package. Comments are useful to identify the application version and provide other information about the package. The default **Save Location** is also displayed. To change the default location, click **Browse** and specify the new location. Click **Create**.
-
-11. On the **Completion** page, click **Close** to close the wizard. The package is now available in the sequencer.
-
-**Modify the properties associated with an existing virtual application package**
-
-1. On the computer that runs the sequencer, click **All Programs**, point to **Microsoft Application Virtualization**, and then click **Microsoft Application Virtualization Sequencer**.
-
-2. In the App-V Sequencer, click **Modify an Existing Virtual Application Package** > **Next**.
-
-3. On the **Select Task** page, click **Edit Package** > **Next**.
-
-4. On the **Select Package** page, click **Browse** to locate the virtual application package that contains the application properties to modify, and then click **Edit**.
-
-5. In the App-V Sequencer console, perform any of the following tasks as needed:
-
- - View package properties.
-
- - View associated package files.
-
- - Edit registry settings.
-
- - Review additional package settings (except operating system file properties).
-
- - Set virtualized registry key state (override or merge).
-
- - Set virtualized folder state.
-
- - Add or edit shortcuts and file type associations.
-
- **Note**
- To edit shortcuts or file type associations, you must first open the package for upgrade to add a new application, and then proceed to the final editing page.
-
-6. When you finish changing the package properties, click **File** > **Save** to save the package.
-
-**Add a new application to an existing virtual application package**
-
-1. On the computer that runs the sequencer, click **All Programs**, point to **Microsoft Application Virtualization**, and then click **Microsoft Application Virtualization Sequencer**.
-
-2. In the App-V Sequencer, click **Modify an Existing Virtual Application Package** > **Next**.
-
-3. On the **Select Task** page, click **Add New Application** > **Next**.
-
-4. On the **Select Package** page, click **Browse** to locate the virtual application package to which you will add the application, and then click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Prepare Computer** page, review the issues that could cause the package creation to fail or cause the revised package to contain unnecessary data. Resolve all potential issues before you continue. After making any corrections and resolving all potential issues, click **Refresh** > **Next**.
-
- **Important**
- If you are required to disable virus scanning software, first scan the computer that runs the sequencer to ensure that no unwanted or malicious files can be added to the package.
-
-6. On the **Select Installer** page, click **Browse** and specify the installation file for the application. If the application does not have an associated installer file and you plan to run all installation steps manually, select the **Select this option to perform a custom installation** check box, and then click **Next**.
-
-7. On the **Installation** page, when the sequencer and application installer are ready, install the application so that the sequencer can monitor the installation process. If additional installation files must be run as part of the installation, click **Run**, and locate and run the additional installation files. When you finish the installation, select **I am finished installing** > **Next**. In the **Browse for Folder** dialog box, specify the primary directory where the application will be installed. Ensure that this is a new location so that you don’t overwrite the existing version of the virtual application package.
-
- **Note**
- The sequencer monitors all changes and installations that occur on the computer that runs the sequencer. This includes any changes and installations that are performed outside of the sequencing wizard.
-
-8. On the **Configure Software** page, optionally run the programs contained in the package. This step completes any associated license or configuration tasks that are required to run the application before you deploy and run the package on target computers. To run all the programs at the same time, select at least one program, and then click **Run All**. To run specific programs, select the program or programs you want to run, and then click **Run Selected**. Complete the required configuration tasks and then close the applications. It can take several minutes for all programs to run. Click **Next**.
-
-9. On the **Installation Report** page, you can review information about the updated virtual application. In **Additional Information**, double-click the event to obtain more detailed information, and then click **Next** to open the **Customize** page.
-
-10. If you are finished installing and configuring the virtual application, select **Stop now** and skip to step 13 of this procedure. If you want to perform the following described customization, click **Customize**.
-
- If you are customizing, prepare the virtual package for streaming, and then click **Next**. Streaming improves the experience when the virtual application package is run on target computers.
-
-11. On the **Streaming** page, run each program so that it can be optimized and run more efficiently on target computers. It can take several minutes for all the applications to run. After all applications have run, close each of the applications, and then click **Next**.
-
- **Note**
- You can stop an application from loading during this step. In the **Application Launch** dialog box, click **Stop** and then select either **Stop all applications** or **Stop this application only**.
-
-12. On the **Create Package** page, to modify the package without saving it, select the **Continue to modify package without saving using the package editor** check box. Selecting this option opens the package in the App-V Sequencer console, where you can modify the package before saving it. Click **Next**.
-
- To save the package immediately, select the default **Save the package now**. Add optional **Comments** to associate with the package. Comments are useful for providing application versions and other information about the package. The default **Save Location** is also displayed. To change the default location, click **Browse** and specify the new location. The uncompressed package size is displayed. Click **Create**.
-
-13. On the **Completion** page, click **Close**. The package is now available in the sequencer.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-modify-app-v-50-client-configuration-using-the-admx-template-and-group-policy.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-modify-app-v-50-client-configuration-using-the-admx-template-and-group-policy.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8ad3680354..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-modify-app-v-50-client-configuration-using-the-admx-template-and-group-policy.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Modify App-V 5.0 Client Configuration Using the ADMX Template and Group Policy
-description: How to Modify App-V 5.0 Client Configuration Using the ADMX Template and Group Policy
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 79d03a2b-2586-4ca7-bbaa-bdeb0a694279
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Modify App-V 5.0 Client Configuration Using the ADMX Template and Group Policy
-
-
-Use the App-V 5.0 ADMX template to configure App-V 5.0 client settings using the ADMX Template and Group Policy.
-
-**To modify App-V 5.0 client configuration using Group Policy**
-
-1. To modify the App-V 5.0 client configuration, locate the **ADMXTemplate** files that are available with App-V 5.0.
-
- **Note**
- Use the following link to download the App-V 5.0 **ADMX Templates**: .
-
-
-
-2. On the computer where you manage group Policy, typically the domain controller, copy the template **.admx** file to the following directory: **<Installation Drive> \\ Windows \\ PolicyDefinitions**.
-
- Next, on the same computer, copy the **.adml** file to the following directory: **<InstallationDrive> \\ Windows \\ PolicyDefinitions \\ en-US**.
-
-3. After you have copied the files open the Group Policy Management Console, to modify the policies associated with your App-V 5.0 clients browse to **Computer Configuration** / **Policies** / **Administrative Templates** / **System** / **App-V**.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying App-V 5.0](deploying-app-v-50.md)
-
-[About Client Configuration Settings](about-client-configuration-settings.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-modify-app-v-51-client-configuration-using-the-admx-template-and-group-policy.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-modify-app-v-51-client-configuration-using-the-admx-template-and-group-policy.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b316fe6660..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-modify-app-v-51-client-configuration-using-the-admx-template-and-group-policy.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Modify App-V 5.1 Client Configuration Using the ADMX Template and Group Policy
-description: How to Modify App-V 5.1 Client Configuration Using the ADMX Template and Group Policy
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 0d9cf13a-b29c-4c87-a776-15fea34027dd
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Modify App-V 5.1 Client Configuration Using the ADMX Template and Group Policy
-
-
-Use the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 ADMX template to configure App-V 5.1 client settings using the ADMX Template and Group Policy.
-
-**To modify App-V 5.1 client configuration using Group Policy**
-
-1. To modify the App-V 5.1 client configuration, locate the **ADMXTemplate** files that are available with App-V 5.1.
-
- **Note**
- Use the following link to download the App-V 5.1 **ADMX Templates**: .
-
-
-
-2. On the computer where you manage group Policy, typically the domain controller, copy the template **.admx** file to the following directory: **<Installation Drive> \\ Windows \\ PolicyDefinitions**.
-
- Next, on the same computer, copy the **.adml** file to the following directory: **<InstallationDrive> \\ Windows \\ PolicyDefinitions \\ en-US**.
-
-3. After you have copied the files open the Group Policy Management Console, to modify the policies associated with your App-V 5.1 clients browse to **Computer Configuration** / **Policies** / **Administrative Templates** / **System** / **App-V**.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying App-V 5.1](deploying-app-v-51.md)
-
-[About Client Configuration Settings](about-client-configuration-settings51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-modify-client-configuration-by-using-powershell.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-modify-client-configuration-by-using-powershell.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b51429c229..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-modify-client-configuration-by-using-powershell.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Modify Client Configuration by Using PowerShell
-description: How to Modify Client Configuration by Using PowerShell
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 53ccb2cf-ef81-4310-a853-efcb395f006e
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Modify Client Configuration by Using PowerShell
-
-
-Use the following procedure to configure the App-V 5.0 client configuration.
-
-**To modify App-V 5.0 client configuration using PowerShell**
-
-1. To configure the client settings using PowerShell, use the **Set-AppvClientConfiguration** cmdlet.
-
-2. To modify the client configuration, open a PowerShell Command prompt and run the following cmdlet **Set-AppvClientConfiguration** with any required parameters. For example:
-
- `$config = Get-AppvClientConfiguration`
-
- `Set-AppvClientConfiguration $config`
-
- `Set-AppvClientConfiguration –AutoLoad 2`
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-modify-client-configuration-by-using-powershell51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-modify-client-configuration-by-using-powershell51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ba031caf40..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-modify-client-configuration-by-using-powershell51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Modify Client Configuration by Using PowerShell
-description: How to Modify Client Configuration by Using PowerShell
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: c3a59592-bb0d-43b6-8f4e-44f3a2d5b7ea
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Modify Client Configuration by Using PowerShell
-
-
-Use the following procedure to configure the App-V 5.1 client configuration.
-
-**To modify App-V 5.1 client configuration using PowerShell**
-
-1. To configure the client settings using PowerShell, use the **Set-AppvClientConfiguration** cmdlet. For more information about installing PowerShell, and a list of cmdlets see, [How to Load the PowerShell Cmdlets and Get Cmdlet Help](how-to-load-the-powershell-cmdlets-and-get-cmdlet-help-51.md).
-
-2. To modify the client configuration, open a PowerShell Command prompt and run the following cmdlet **Set-AppvClientConfiguration** with any required parameters. For example:
-
- `$config = Get-AppvClientConfiguration`
-
- `Set-AppvClientConfiguration $config`
-
- `Set-AppvClientConfiguration –AutoLoad 2`
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-move-the-app-v-server-to-another-computer.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-move-the-app-v-server-to-another-computer.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 75439a513b..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-move-the-app-v-server-to-another-computer.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Move the App-V Server to Another Computer
-description: How to Move the App-V Server to Another Computer
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 4fda21be-4d6b-499c-a38a-5afd57b34a47
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Move the App-V Server to Another Computer
-
-
-Use the following information to create a new management server console in your environment.
-
-## To create a new management server console
-
-
-The following list displays the steps necessary to create a new management server console:
-
-1. Install the management server on a computer in your environment. For more information about installing the management server see [Deploying the App-V 5.0 Server](deploying-the-app-v-50-server.md).
-
-2. After you have completed the installation, use the following link to connect it to the App-V 5.0 database - [How to install the Management Server on a Standalone Computer and Connect it to the Database](how-to-install-the-management-server-on-a-standalone-computer-and-connect-it-to-the-database.md).
-
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-move-the-app-v-server-to-another-computer51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-move-the-app-v-server-to-another-computer51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 65179dff17..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-move-the-app-v-server-to-another-computer51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Move the App-V Server to Another Computer
-description: How to Move the App-V Server to Another Computer
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 853af9eb-db5b-421d-a0fe-79ded8752cef
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Move the App-V Server to Another Computer
-
-
-Use the following information to create a new management server console in your environment.
-
-## To create a new management server console
-
-
-The following list displays the steps necessary to create a new management server console:
-
-1. Install the management server on a computer in your environment. For more information about installing the management server see [Deploying the App-V 5.1 Server](deploying-the-app-v-51-server.md).
-
-2. After you have completed the installation, use the following link to connect it to the App-V 5.1 database - [How to install the Management Server on a Standalone Computer and Connect it to the Database](how-to-install-the-management-server-on-a-standalone-computer-and-connect-it-to-the-database51.md).
-
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-publish-a-connection-group.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-publish-a-connection-group.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d3e96c272e..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-publish-a-connection-group.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Publish a Connection Group
-description: How to Publish a Connection Group
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: c61db00a-8393-485c-949e-af2098b9e258
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Publish a Connection Group
-
-
-After you create a connection group, you must publish it to computers that run the App-V client.
-
-**To publish a connection group**
-
-1. Open the App-V Management Console, and select **Packages** > **CONNECTION GROUPS**.
-
-2. Right-click the connection group to be published, and select **publish**.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-[Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-publish-a-connection-group51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-publish-a-connection-group51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 523eb51739..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-publish-a-connection-group51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Publish a Connection Group
-description: How to Publish a Connection Group
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: fe89601c-23c6-4b7c-a61b-4ca50908f1b4
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Publish a Connection Group
-
-
-After you create a connection group, you must publish it to computers that run the App-V client.
-
-**To publish a connection group**
-
-1. Open the App-V Management Console, and select **CONNECTION GROUPS**.
-
-2. Right-click the connection group to be published, and select **publish**.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-[Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-publish-a-package-by-using-the-management-console-50.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-publish-a-package-by-using-the-management-console-50.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 99df93599f..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-publish-a-package-by-using-the-management-console-50.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Publish a Package by Using the Management Console
-description: How to Publish a Package by Using the Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 7c6930fc-5c89-4519-a901-512dae155fd2
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Publish a Package by Using the Management Console
-
-
-Use the following procedure to publish an App-V 5.0 package. Once you publish a package, computers that are running the App-V 5.0 client can access and run the applications in that package.
-
-**Note**
-The ability to enable only administrators to publish or unpublish packages (described below) is supported starting in App-V 5.0 SP3.
-
-
-
-**To publish an App-V 5.0 package**
-
-1. In the App-V 5.0 Management console. right-click the name of the package to be published, and select **Publish**.
-
-2. Review the **Status** column to verify that the package has been published and is now available. If the package is available, the status **published** is displayed.
-
- If the package is not published successfully, the status **unpublished** is displayed, along with error text that explains why the package is not available.
-
-**To enable only administrators to publish or unpublish packages**
-
-1. Navigate to the following Group Policy Object node:
-
- **Computer Configuration > Policies > Administrative Templates > System > App-V > Publishing**.
-
-2. Enable the **Require publish as administrator** Group Policy setting.
-
- To alternatively use PowerShell to set this item, see [How to Manage App-V 5.0 Packages Running on a Stand-Alone Computer by Using PowerShell](how-to-manage-app-v-50-packages-running-on-a-stand-alone-computer-by-using-powershell.md#bkmk-admins-pub-pkgs).
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-[How to Configure Access to Packages by Using the Management Console](how-to-configure-access-to-packages-by-using-the-management-console-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-publish-a-package-by-using-the-management-console-51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-publish-a-package-by-using-the-management-console-51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 9a64b6ff65..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-publish-a-package-by-using-the-management-console-51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Publish a Package by Using the Management Console
-description: How to Publish a Package by Using the Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: e34d2bcf-15ac-4a75-9dc8-79380b36a25f
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Publish a Package by Using the Management Console
-
-
-Use the following procedure to publish an App-V 5.1 package. Once you publish a package, computers that are running the App-V 5.1 client can access and run the applications in that package.
-
-**Note**
-The ability to enable only administrators to publish or unpublish packages (described below) is supported starting in App-V 5.0 SP3.
-
-
-
-**To publish an App-V 5.1 package**
-
-1. In the App-V 5.1 Management console. Click or right-click the name of the package to be published. Select **Publish**.
-
-2. Review the **Status** column to verify that the package has been published and is now available. If the package is available, the status **published** is displayed.
-
- If the package is not published successfully, the status **unpublished** is displayed, along with error text that explains why the package is not available.
-
-**To enable only administrators to publish or unpublish packages**
-
-1. Navigate to the following Group Policy Object node:
-
- **Computer Configuration > Policies > Administrative Templates > System > App-V > Publishing**.
-
-2. Enable the **Require publish as administrator** Group Policy setting.
-
- To alternatively use PowerShell to set this item, see [How to Manage App-V 5.1 Packages Running on a Stand-Alone Computer by Using PowerShell](how-to-manage-app-v-51-packages-running-on-a-stand-alone-computer-by-using-powershell.md#bkmk-admins-pub-pkgs).
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-[How to Configure Access to Packages by Using the Management Console](how-to-configure-access-to-packages-by-using-the-management-console-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-register-and-unregister-a-publishing-server-by-using-the-management-console.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-register-and-unregister-a-publishing-server-by-using-the-management-console.md
deleted file mode 100644
index abd93c7e0a..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-register-and-unregister-a-publishing-server-by-using-the-management-console.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,56 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Register and Unregister a Publishing Server by Using the Management Console
-description: How to Register and Unregister a Publishing Server by Using the Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: c24f3b43-4888-41a9-9a39-973657f2b917
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Register and Unregister a Publishing Server by Using the Management Console
-
-
-You can register and unregister publishing servers that will synchronize with the App-V 5.0 management server. You can also see the last attempt that the publishing server made to synchronize the information with the management server.
-
-Use the following procedure to register or unregister a publishing server.
-
-**To register a publishing server using the Management Console**
-
-1. Connect to the Management Console and select **Servers**. For more information about how to connect to the Management Console, see [How to Connect to the Management Console](how-to-connect-to-the-management-console-beta.md).
-
-2. A list of publishing servers that already synchronize with the management server is displayed. Click Register New Server to register a new server.
-
-3. Type a computer name of a domain joined computer on the **Server Name** line, to specify a name for the server. You should also include a domain name, for example, **MyDomain\\TestServer**. Click **Check**.
-
-4. Select the computer and click **Add** to add the computer to the list of servers. The new server will be displayed in the list.
-
-**To unregister a publishing server using the Management Console**
-
-1. Connect to the Management Console and select **Servers**. For more information about how to connect to the Management Console, see [How to Connect to the Management Console](how-to-connect-to-the-management-console-beta.md).
-
-2. A list of publishing servers that synchronize with the management server is displayed.
-
-3. To unregister the server, right-click the computer name and select the computer name and select **unregister server**.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-register-and-unregister-a-publishing-server-by-using-the-management-console51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-register-and-unregister-a-publishing-server-by-using-the-management-console51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7e06b09dbc..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-register-and-unregister-a-publishing-server-by-using-the-management-console51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,56 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Register and Unregister a Publishing Server by Using the Management Console
-description: How to Register and Unregister a Publishing Server by Using the Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 69cef0a8-8102-4697-b1ba-f16e0f25216b
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Register and Unregister a Publishing Server by Using the Management Console
-
-
-You can register and unregister publishing servers that will synchronize with the App-V 5.1 management server. You can also see the last attempt that the publishing server made to synchronize the information with the management server.
-
-Use the following procedure to register or unregister a publishing server.
-
-**To register a publishing server using the Management Console**
-
-1. Connect to the Management Console and select **Servers**. For more information about how to connect to the Management Console, see [How to Connect to the Management Console](how-to-connect-to-the-management-console-51.md).
-
-2. A list of publishing servers that already synchronize with the management server is displayed. Click Register New Server to register a new server.
-
-3. Type a computer name of a domain joined computer on the **Server Name** line, to specify a name for the server. You should also include a domain name, for example, **MyDomain\\TestServer**. Click **Check**.
-
-4. Select the computer and click **Add** to add the computer to the list of servers. The new server will be displayed in the list.
-
-**To unregister a publishing server using the Management Console**
-
-1. Connect to the Management Console and select **Servers**. For more information about how to connect to the Management Console, see [How to Connect to the Management Console](how-to-connect-to-the-management-console-51.md).
-
-2. A list of publishing servers that synchronize with the management server is displayed.
-
-3. To unregister the server, right-click the computer name and select the computer name and select **unregister server**.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-revert-extension-points-from-an-app-v-50-package-to-an-app-v-46-package-for-a-specific-user.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-revert-extension-points-from-an-app-v-50-package-to-an-app-v-46-package-for-a-specific-user.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 76656d39e1..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-revert-extension-points-from-an-app-v-50-package-to-an-app-v-46-package-for-a-specific-user.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,57 +0,0 @@
----
-ms.reviewer:
-title: How to Revert Extension Points From an App-V 5.0 Package to an App-V 4.6 Package for a Specific User
-description: How to Revert Extension Points From an App-V 5.0 Package to an App-V 4.6 Package for a Specific User
-ms.assetid: f1d2ab1f-0831-4976-b49f-169511d3382a
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: f1d2ab1f-0831-4976-b49f-169511d3382a
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/21/2016
----
-
-# How to Revert Extension Points From an App-V 5.0 Package to an App-V 4.6 Package for a Specific User
-
-*Note:** App-V 4.6 has exited Mainstream support.
-
-Use the following procedure to revert an App-V 5.0 package to the App-V file format using the user configuration file.
-
-**To revert a package**
-
-1. Ensure that App-V 4.6 package is published to the users but the FTAs and shortcuts have been assumed by App-V 5.0 package using the following migration method, [How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to App-V 5.0 for a Specific User](how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-app-v-50-for-a-specific-user.md).
-
- In the **userConfiguration** section of the deployment configuration file for the converted package, to set the policy, make the following update to the **userConfiguration** section: **ManagingAuthority TakeoverExtensionPointsFrom46="false" PackageName=<Package ID>**
-
-2. From an elevated command prompt, type:
-
- PS>**Publish-AppVClientPackage $pkg –DynamicUserConfigurationPath** <path to user configuration file>
-
-3. Perform a publishing refresh, or wait for the next scheduled publishing refresh for the App-V 4.6. Open the application using FTAs or shortcuts. The Application should now open using App-V 4.6 SP2.
-
- **Note**
- If you do not need the App-V 5.0 package anymore, you can unpublish the App-V 5.0 package and the extension points will automatically revert to App-V 4.6.
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-~~~
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-revert-extension-points-from-an-app-v-50-package-to-an-app-v-46-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-revert-extension-points-from-an-app-v-50-package-to-an-app-v-46-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d8bed1b729..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-revert-extension-points-from-an-app-v-50-package-to-an-app-v-46-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
----
-title: "How to Revert Extension Points from an App-V 5.0 Package to an App-V 4.6 Package For All Users on a Specific Computer"
-description: How to Revert Extension Points from an App-V 5.0 Package to an App-V 4.6 Package For All Users on a Specific Computer
-ms.assetid: 2a43ca1b-6847-4dd1-ade2-336ac4ac6af0
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/21/2016
----
-
-# How to Revert Extension Points from an App-V 5.0 Package to an App-V 4.6 Package For All Users on a Specific Computer
-
-*Note:** App-V 4.6 has exited Mainstream support. The following assumes that the App-V 4.6 SP3 client is already installed.
-
-Use the following procedure to revert extension points from an App-V 5.0 package to the App-V 4.6 file format using the deployment configuration file.
-
-**To revert a package**
-
-1. Ensure that App-V 4.6 package is published to the users but the FTAs and shortcuts have been assumed by App-V 5.0 package using the following migration method, [How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to a Converted App-V 5.0 Package for All Users on a Specific Computer](how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-a-converted-app-v-50-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md).
-
- In the **userConfiguration** section of the deployment configuration file for the converted package, to set the policy, make the following update to the **userConfiguration** section: **ManagingAuthority TakeoverExtensionPointsFrom46="false" PackageName=<Package ID>**
-
-2. From an elevated command prompt, type:
-
- PS>**Set-AppvClientPackage $pkg –DynamicDeploymentConfiguration** <path to deployment configuration file>
-
- PS>**Publish-AppVClientPackage $pkg –DynamicUserConfigurationType useDeploymentConfiguration**
-
-3. Perform a publishing refresh, or wait for the next scheduled publishing refresh for the App-V 4.6 SP2 package.
-
- Open the application using FTAs or shortcuts. The Application should now open using App-V 4.6.
-
- **Note**
- If you do not need the App-V 5.0 package anymore, you can unpublish the App-V 5.0 package and the extension points will automatically revert to App-V 4.6.
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-~~~
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-revert-extension-points-from-an-app-v-51-package-to-an-app-v-46-package-for-a-specific-user.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-revert-extension-points-from-an-app-v-51-package-to-an-app-v-46-package-for-a-specific-user.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b62aea5290..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-revert-extension-points-from-an-app-v-51-package-to-an-app-v-46-package-for-a-specific-user.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Revert Extension Points From an App-V 5.1 Package to an App-V 4.6 Package for a Specific User
-description: How to Revert Extension Points From an App-V 5.1 Package to an App-V 4.6 Package for a Specific User
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: bd53c5d6-7fd2-4816-b03b-d59da0a35819
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/21/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Revert Extension Points From an App-V 5.1 Package to an App-V 4.6 Package for a Specific User
-
-
-Use the following procedure to revert an App-V 5.1 package to the App-V file format using the user configuration file.
-
-**To revert a package**
-
-1. Ensure that App-V 4.6 package is published to the users but the FTAs and shortcuts have been assumed by App-V 5.1 package using the following migration method, [How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to App-V 5.1 for a Specific User](how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-app-v-51-for-a-specific-user.md).
-
- In the **userConfiguration** section of the deployment configuration file for the converted package, to set the policy, make the following update to the **userConfiguration** section: **ManagingAuthority TakeoverExtensionPointsFrom46="false" PackageName=<Package ID>**
-
-2. From an elevated command prompt, type:
-
- PS>**Publish-AppVClientPackage $pkg –DynamicUserConfigurationPath** <path to user configuration file>
-
-3. Perform a publishing refresh, or wait for the next scheduled publishing refresh for the App-V 4.6. Open the application using FTAs or shortcuts. The Application should now open using App-V 4.6.
-
- **Note**
- If you do not need the App-V 5.1 package anymore, you can unpublish the App-V 5.1 package and the extension points will automatically revert to App-V 4.6.
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-~~~
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-revert-extension-points-from-an-app-v-51-package-to-an-app-v-46-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-revert-extension-points-from-an-app-v-51-package-to-an-app-v-46-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7c6b1455cf..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-revert-extension-points-from-an-app-v-51-package-to-an-app-v-46-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Revert Extension Points from an App-V 5.1 Package to an App-V 4.6 Package For All Users on a Specific Computer
-description: How to Revert Extension Points from an App-V 5.1 Package to an App-V 4.6 Package For All Users on a Specific Computer
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 64640b8e-de6b-4006-a33e-353d285af15e
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/21/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Revert Extension Points from an App-V 5.1 Package to an App-V 4.6 Package For All Users on a Specific Computer
-
-
-Use the following procedure to revert extension points from an App-V 5.1 package to the App-V 4.6 file format using the deployment configuration file.
-
-**To revert a package**
-
-1. Ensure that App-V 4.6 package is published to the users but the FTAs and shortcuts have been assumed by App-V 5.1 package using the following migration method, [How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to a Converted App-V 5.1 Package for All Users on a Specific Computer](how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-a-converted-app-v-51-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md).
-
- In the **userConfiguration** section of the deployment configuration file for the converted package, to set the policy, make the following update to the **userConfiguration** section: **ManagingAuthority TakeoverExtensionPointsFrom46="false" PackageName=<Package ID>**
-
-2. From an elevated command prompt, type:
-
- PS>**Set-AppvClientPackage $pkg –DynamicDeploymentConfiguration** <path to deployment configuration file>
-
- PS>**Publish-AppVClientPackage $pkg –DynamicUserConfigurationType useDeploymentConfiguration**
-
-3. Perform a publishing refresh, or wait for the next scheduled publishing refresh for the App-V 4.6 package.
-
- Open the application using FTAs or shortcuts. The Application should now open using App-V 4.6.
-
- **Note**
- If you do not need the App-V 5.1 package anymore, you can unpublish the App-V 5.1 package and the extension points will automatically revert to App-V 4.6.
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-~~~
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-sequence-a-new-application-with-app-v-50-beta-gb18030.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-sequence-a-new-application-with-app-v-50-beta-gb18030.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8652ce06d6..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-sequence-a-new-application-with-app-v-50-beta-gb18030.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,332 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Sequence a New Application with App-V 5.0
-description: How to Sequence a New Application with App-V 5.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: a263fa84-cd6d-4219-a5c2-eb6a553b826c
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Sequence a New Application with App-V 5.0
-
-
-**To review or do before you start sequencing**
-
-1. Determine the type of virtualized application package you want to create:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Application type
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Standard
-
Creates a package that contains an application or a suite of applications. This is the preferred option for most application types.
-
-
-
Add-on or plug-in
-
Creates a package that extends the functionality of a standard application, for example, a plug-in for Microsoft Excel. Additionally, you can use plug-ins for natively installed applications, or for another package that is linked by using connection groups.
-
-
-
Middleware
-
Creates a package that is required by a standard application, for example, Java. Middleware packages are used for linking to other packages by using connection groups.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-2. Copy all required installation files to the computer that is running the sequencer.
-
-3. Make a backup image of your virtual environment before sequencing an application, and then revert to that image each time after you finish sequencing an application.
-
-4. Review the following items:
-
- - If an application installer changes the security access to a new or existing file or directory, those changes are not captured in the package.
-
- - If short paths have been disabled for the virtualized package’s target volume, you must also sequence the package to a volume that was created and still has short-paths disabled. It cannot be the system volume.
-
- - Starting in App-V 5.0 SP3, the primary virtual application directory (PVAD) is hidden, but you can turn it back on. See [About App-V 5.0 SP3](about-app-v-50-sp3.md#bkmk-pvad-hidden).
-
-**To sequence a new standard application**
-
-1. On the computer that runs the sequencer, click **All Programs**, and then Click **Microsoft Application Virtualization**, and then click **Microsoft Application Virtualization Sequencer**.
-
-2. In the sequencer, click **Create a New Virtual Application Package**. Select **Create Package (default)**, and then click **Next**.
-
-3. On the **Prepare Computer** page, review the issues that could cause the package creation to fail or could cause the package to contain unnecessary data. You should resolve all potential issues before you continue. After making any corrections, click **Refresh** to display the updated information. After you have resolved all potential issues, click **Next**.
-
- **Important**
- If you are required to disable virus scanning software, you should first scan the computer that runs the sequencer in order to ensure that no unwanted or malicious files could be added to the package.
-
-
-
-4. On the **Type of Application** page, click the **Standard Application (default)** check box, and then click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Select Installer** page, click **Browse** and specify the installation file for the application.
-
- **Note**
- If the specified application installer modifies security access to a file or directory, existing or new, the associated changes will not be captured into the package.
-
-
-
-~~~
-If the application does not have an associated installer file and you plan to run all installation steps manually, select the **Perform a Custom Installation** check box, and then Click **Next**.
-~~~
-
-6. On the **Package Name** page, type a name that will be associated with the package. Use a name that helps identify the purpose and version of the application that will be added to the package. The package name is displayed in the App-V 5.0 Management Console.
-
- The **Primary Virtual Application Directory** displays the path where the application will be installed on target computers. To specify this location, select **Browse**.
-
- **Note**
- Starting in App-V 5.0 SP3, the primary virtual application directory (PVAD) is hidden, but you can turn it back on. See [About App-V 5.0 SP3](about-app-v-50-sp3.md#bkmk-pvad-hidden).
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Important**
-The primary application virtual directory should match the installation location for the application that is being sequenced. For example, if you install Notepad to **C:\\Program Files\\Notepad**; you should configure **C:\\Program Files\\Notepad** as your primary virtual directory. Alternatively, you can choose to set **C:\\Notepad** as the primary virtual application directory, as long as during installation time, you configure the installer to install to **C:\\Notepad**. Editing the Application Virtualization path is an advanced configuration task. For most applications, the default path is recommended for the following reasons:
-
-- Application Compatibility. Some virtualized applications will not function correctly, or will fail to open if the directories are not configured with identical virtual directory paths.
-
-- Performance. Since no file system redirection is required, the runtime performance can improve.
-
-
-
-**Tip**
-It is recommended that prior to Sequencing an application, you open the associated installer to determine the default installation directory, and then configure that location as the **Primary Virtual Application Directory**.
-
-
-
-Click **Next**.
-~~~
-
-7. On the **Installation** page, when the sequencer and application installer are ready you can proceed to install the application so that the sequencer can monitor the installation process.
-
- **Important**
- You should always install applications to a secure location and make sure no other users are logged on to the computer running the sequencer during monitoring.
-
-
-
-~~~
-Use the application's installation process to perform the installation. If additional installation files must be run as part of the installation, click **Run** to locate and run the additional installation files. When you are finished with the installation, select **I am finished installing**. Click **Next**.
-~~~
-
-8. On the **Installation** page, wait while the sequencer configures the virtualized application package.
-
-9. On the **Configure Software** page, optionally run the programs contained in the package. This step allows you to complete any necessary license or configuration tasks before you deploy and run the package on target computers. To run all the programs at one time, select at least one program, and then click **Run All**. To run specific programs, select the program or programs, and then click **Run Selected**. Complete the required configuration tasks and then close the applications. You may need to wait several minutes for all programs to run.
-
- **Note**
- To run first-use tasks for any application that is not available in the list, open the application. The associated information will be captured during this step.
-
-
-
-~~~
-Click **Next**.
-~~~
-
-10. On the **Installation Report** page, you can review information about the virtualized application package you have just sequenced. In **Additional Information**, double-click an event to obtain more detailed information. To proceed, click **Next**.
-
-11. The **Customize** page is displayed. If you are finished installing and configuring the virtual application, select **Stop now** and skip to step 14 of this procedure. To perform either of the following customizations, select **Customize**.
-
- - Prepare the virtual package for streaming. Streaming improves the experience when the virtual application package is run on target computers.
-
- - Specify the operating systems that can run this package.
-
- Click **Next**.
-
-12. On the **Streaming** page, run each program so that it can be optimized and run more efficiently on target computers. It can take several minutes for all the applications to run. After all applications have run, close each of the applications, and then click **Next**.
-
- **Note**
- If you do not open any applications during this step, the default streaming method is on-demand streaming delivery. This means applications will be downloaded bit by bit until it can be opened, and then depending on how the background loading is configured, will load the rest of the application.
-
-
-
-13. On the **Target OS** page, specify the operating systems that can run this package. To allow all supported operating systems in your environment to run this package, select **Allow this package to run on any operating system**. To configure this package to run only on specific operating systems, select **Allow this package to run only on the following operating systems** and select the operating systems that can run this package. Click **Next**.
-
- **Important**
- Make sure that the operating systems you specify here are supported by the application you are sequencing.
-
-
-
-14. The **Create Package** page is displayed. To modify the package without saving it, select **Continue to modify package without saving using the package editor**. This option opens the package in the sequencer console so that you can modify the package before it is saved. Click **Next**.
-
- To save the package immediately, select **Save the package now** (default). Add optional **Comments** to be associated with the package. Comments are useful for identifying the program version and other information about the package.
-
- **Important**
- The system does not support non-printable characters in **Comments** and **Descriptions**.
-
-
-
-~~~
-The default **Save Location** is also displayed on this page. To change the default location, click **Browse** and specify the new location. Click **Create**.
-~~~
-
-15. The **Completion** page is displayed. Review the information in the **Virtual Application Package Report** pane as needed, then click **Close**. This information is also available in the **Report.xml** file that is located in the directory where the package was created.
-
- The package is now available in the sequencer.
-
- **Important**
- After you have successfully created a virtual application package, you cannot run the virtual application package on the computer that is running the sequencer.
-
-
-
-**To sequence an add-on or plug-in application**
-
-1.
-
- **Note**
- Before performing the following procedure, install the parent application locally on the computer that is running the sequencer. Or if you have the parent application virtualized, you can follow the steps in the add-on or plug-in workflow to unpack the parent application on the computer.
-
- For example, if you are sequencing a plug-in for Microsoft Excel, install Microsoft Excel locally on the computer that is running the sequencer. Also install the parent application in the same directory where the application is installed on target computers. If the plug-in or add-on is going to be used with an existing virtual application package, install the application on the same virtual application drive that was used when you created the parent virtual application package.
-
-
-
-~~~
-On the computer that runs the sequencer, click **All Programs**, and then Click **Microsoft Application Virtualization**, and then click **Microsoft Application Virtualization Sequencer**.
-~~~
-
-2. *In the sequencer, click *Create a New Virtual Application Package. Select **Create Package (default)**, and then click **Next**.
-
-3. On the **Prepare Computer** page, review the issues that might cause the package creation to fail or could cause the package to contain unnecessary data. You should resolve all potential issues before you continue. After making any corrections, click **Refresh** to display the updated information. After you have resolved all potential issues, click **Next**.
-
- **Important**
- If you are required to disable virus scanning software, you should first scan the computer that runs the sequencer in order to ensure that no unwanted or malicious files could be added to the package.
-
-
-
-4. On the **Type of Application** page, select **Add-on or Plug-in**, and then click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Select Installer** page, click **Browse** and specify the installation file for the add-on or plug-in. If the add-on or plug-in does not have an associated installer file and you plan to run all installation steps manually, select the **Select this option to perform a custom installation** check box, and then click **Next**.
-
-6. On the **Install Primary** page, ensure that the primary application is installed on the computer that runs the sequencer. Alternatively, you can expand an existing package that has been saved locally on the computer that runs the sequencer. To do this, click **Expand Package**, and then select the package. After you have expanded or installed the parent program, select **I have installed the primary parent program**.
-
- Click **Next**.
-
-7. On the **Package Name** page, type a name that will be associated with the package. Use a name that helps identify the purpose and version of the application that will be added to the package. The package name will be displayed in the App-V 5.0 Management Console. The **Primary Virtual Application Directory** displays the path where the application will be installed. To specify this location, type the path, or click **Browse**.
-
- **Note**
- Starting in App-V 5.0 SP3, the primary virtual application directory (PVAD) is hidden, but you can turn it back on. See [About App-V 5.0 SP3](about-app-v-50-sp3.md#bkmk-pvad-hidden).
-
-
-
-~~~
-Click **Next**.
-~~~
-
-8. On the **Installation** page, when the sequencer and application installer are ready you can proceed to install the plug-in or add-in application so the sequencer can monitor the installation process. Use the application's installation process to perform the installation. If additional installation files must be run as part of the installation, click **Run** and locate and run the additional installation files. When you are finished with the installation, select **I am finished installing**, and then click **Next**.
-
-9. On the **Installation Report** page, you can review information about the virtual application package that you just sequenced. For a more detailed explanation about the information displayed in **Additional Information**, double-click the event. After you have reviewed the information, click **Next**.
-
-10. The **Customize** page is displayed. If you are finished installing and configuring the virtual application, select **Stop now** and skip to step 12 of this procedure. To perform either of the following customizations, select **Customize**.
-
- - Optimize how the package will run across a slow or unreliable network.
-
- - Specify the operating systems that can run this package.
-
- Click **Next**.
-
-11. On the **Streaming** page, run each program so that it can be optimized and run more efficiently on target computers. Streaming improves the experience when the virtual application package is run on target computers on high-latency networks. It can take several minutes for all the applications to run. After all applications have run, close each of the applications. You can also configure the package to be required to be fully downloaded before opening by selecting the **Force applications to be downloaded** check-box. Click **Next**.
-
- **Note**
- If necessary, you can stop an application from loading during this step. In the **Application Launch** dialog box, click **Stop** and select one of the check boxes: **Stop all applications** or **Stop this application only**.
-
-
-
-12. On the **Target OS** page, specify the operating systems that can run this package. To allow all supported operating systems in your environment to run this package, select the **Allow this package to run on any operating system** check box. To configure this package to run only on specific operating systems, select the **Allow this package to run only on the following operating systems** check box, and then select the operating systems that can run this package. Click **Next**.
-
-13. The **Create Package** page is displayed. To modify the package without saving it, select **Continue to modify package without saving using the package editor** check box. This option opens the package in the sequencer console so that you can modify the package before it is saved. Click **Next**.
-
- To save the package immediately, select **Save the package now**. Optionally, add a **Description** that will be associated with the package. Descriptions are useful for identifying the version and other information about the package.
-
- **Important**
- The system does not support non-printable characters in Comments and Descriptions.
-
-
-
-~~~
-The default **Save Location** is also displayed on this page. To change the default location, click **Browse** and specify the new location. Click **Create**.
-~~~
-
-**To sequence a middleware application**
-
-1. On the computer that runs the sequencer, click **All Programs**, and then Click **Microsoft Application Virtualization**, and then click **Microsoft Application Virtualization Sequencer**.
-
-2. *In the sequencer, click *Create a New Virtual Application Package. Select **Create Package (default)**, and then click **Next**.
-
-3. On the **Prepare Computer** page, review the issues that could cause the package creation to fail or could cause the package to contain unnecessary data. You should resolve all potential issues before you continue. After making any corrections, click **Refresh** to display the updated information. After you have resolved all potential issues, click **Next**.
-
- **Important**
- If you are required to disable virus scanning software, you should first scan the computer that runs the App-V 5.0 Sequencer in order to ensure that no unwanted or malicious files can be added to the package.
-
-
-
-4. On the **Type of Application** page, select **Middleware**, and then click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Select Installer** page, click **Browse** and specify the installation file for the application. If the application does not have an associated installer file and you plan to run all installation steps manually, select the **Select this option to perform a custom installation** check box, and then click **Next**.
-
-6. On the **Package Name** page, type a name that will be associated with the package. Use a name that helps identify the purpose and version of the application that will be added to the package. The package name is displayed in the App-V 5.0 Management Console. The **Primary Virtual Application Directory** displays the path where the application will be installed. To specify this location, type the path or click **Browse**.
-
- Click **Next**.
-
-7. On the **Installation** page, when the sequencer and middleware application installer are ready you can proceed to install the application so that the sequencer can monitor the installation process. Use the application's installation process to perform the installation. If additional installation files must be run as part of the installation, click **Run**, to locate and run the additional installation files. When you are finished with the installation, select the **I am finished installing** check box, and then click **Next**.
-
-8. On the **Installation** page, wait while the sequencer configures the virtual application package.
-
-9. On the **Installation Report** page, you can review information about the virtual application package that you have just sequenced. In **Additional Information**, double-click an event to obtain more detailed information. To proceed, click **Next**.
-
-10. On the **Target OS** page, specify the operating systems that can run this package. To enable all supported operating systems in your environment to run this package, select the **Allow this package to run on any operating system** check box. To configure this package to run only on specific operating systems, select the **Allow this package to run only on the following operating systems** check box and select the operating systems that can run this package. Click **Next**.
-
-11. On the **Create Package** page is displayed. To modify the package without saving it, select **Continue to modify package without saving using the package editor**. This option opens the package in the sequencer console so that you can modify the package before it is saved. Click **Next**.
-
- To save the package immediately, select **Save the package now**. Optionally, add a **Description** to be associated with the package. Descriptions are useful for identifying the program version and other information about the package.
-
- **Important**
- The system does not support non-printable characters in Comments and Descriptions.
-
-
-
-~~~
-The default **Save Location** is also displayed on this page. To change the default location, click **Browse** and specify the new location. Click **Create**.
-~~~
-
-12. The **Completion** page is displayed. Review the information in the **Virtual Application Package Report** pane as needed, then click **Close**. This information is also available in the **Report.xml** file that is located in the directory specified in step 11 of this procedure.
-
- The package is now available in the sequencer. To edit the package properties, click **Edit \[Package Name\]**.
-
- **Important**
- After you have successfully created a virtual application package, you cannot run the virtual application package on the computer that is running the sequencer.
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-~~~
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-sequence-a-new-application-with-app-v-51-beta-gb18030.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-sequence-a-new-application-with-app-v-51-beta-gb18030.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ba6d5a807d..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-sequence-a-new-application-with-app-v-51-beta-gb18030.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,308 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Sequence a New Application with App-V 5.1
-description: How to Sequence a New Application with App-V 5.1
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 7d7699b1-0cb8-450d-94e7-5af937e16c21
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Sequence a New Application with App-V 5.1
-
-
-**To review or do before you start sequencing**
-
-1. Determine the type of virtualized application package you want to create:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Application type
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Standard
-
Creates a package that contains an application or a suite of applications. This is the preferred option for most application types.
-
-
-
Add-on or plug-in
-
Creates a package that extends the functionality of a standard application, for example, a plug-in for Microsoft Excel. Additionally, you can use plug-ins for natively installed applications, or for another package that is linked by using connection groups.
-
-
-
Middleware
-
Creates a package that is required by a standard application, for example, Java. Middleware packages are used for linking to other packages by using connection groups.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-2. Copy all required installation files to the computer that is running the sequencer.
-
-3. Make a backup image of your virtual environment before sequencing an application, and then revert to that image each time after you finish sequencing an application.
-
-4. Review the following items:
-
- - If an application installer changes the security access to a new or existing file or directory, those changes are not captured in the package.
-
- - If short paths have been disabled for the virtualized package’s target volume, you must also sequence the package to a volume that was created and still has short-paths disabled. It cannot be the system volume.
-
-> [!NOTE]
-> The App-V 5.x Sequencer cannot sequence applications with filenames matching "CO_<x>" where x is any numeral. Error 0x8007139F will be generated.
-
-**To sequence a new standard application**
-
-1. On the computer that runs the sequencer, click **All Programs**, and then Click **Microsoft Application Virtualization**, and then click **Microsoft Application Virtualization Sequencer**.
-
-2. In the sequencer, click **Create a New Virtual Application Package**. Select **Create Package (default)**, and then click **Next**.
-
-3. On the **Prepare Computer** page, review the issues that could cause the package creation to fail or could cause the package to contain unnecessary data. You should resolve all potential issues before you continue. After making any corrections, click **Refresh** to display the updated information. After you have resolved all potential issues, click **Next**.
-
- > [!IMPORTANT]
- > If you are required to disable virus scanning software, you should first scan the computer that runs the sequencer in order to ensure that no unwanted or malicious files could be added to the package.
-
-
-
-~~~
-> [!NOTE]
-> There is currently no way to disable Windows Defender in Windows 10. If you receive a warning, you can safely ignore it. It is unlikely that Windows Defender will affect sequencing at all.
-~~~
-
-
-
-4. On the **Type of Application** page, click the **Standard Application (default)** check box, and then click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Select Installer** page, click **Browse** and specify the installation file for the application.
-
- > [!NOTE]
- > If the specified application installer modifies security access to a file or directory, existing or new, the associated changes will not be captured into the package.
-
-
-
-~~~
-If the application does not have an associated installer file and you plan to run all installation steps manually, select the **Perform a Custom Installation** check box, and then Click **Next**.
-~~~
-
-6. On the **Package Name** page, type a name that will be associated with the package. Use a name that helps identify the purpose and version of the application that will be added to the package. The package name is displayed in the App-V 5.0 Management Console.
-
- Click **Next**.
-
-7. On the **Installation** page, when the sequencer and application installer are ready you can proceed to install the application so that the sequencer can monitor the installation process.
-
- > [!IMPORTANT]
- > You should always install applications to a secure location and make sure no other users are logged on to the computer running the sequencer during monitoring.
-
-
-
-~~~
-Use the application's installation process to perform the installation. If additional installation files must be run as part of the installation, click **Run** to locate and run the additional installation files. When you are finished with the installation, select **I am finished installing**. Click **Next**.
-~~~
-
-8. On the **Installation** page, wait while the sequencer configures the virtualized application package.
-
-9. On the **Configure Software** page, optionally run the programs contained in the package. This step allows you to complete any necessary license or configuration tasks before you deploy and run the package on target computers. To run all the programs at one time, select at least one program, and then click **Run All**. To run specific programs, select the program or programs, and then click **Run Selected**. Complete the required configuration tasks and then close the applications. You may need to wait several minutes for all programs to run.
-
- > [!NOTE]
- > To run first-use tasks for any application that is not available in the list, open the application. The associated information will be captured during this step.
-
-
-
-~~~
-Click **Next**.
-~~~
-
-10. On the **Installation Report** page, you can review information about the virtualized application package you have just sequenced. In **Additional Information**, double-click an event to obtain more detailed information. To proceed, click **Next**.
-
-11. The **Customize** page is displayed. If you are finished installing and configuring the virtual application, select **Stop now** and skip to step 14 of this procedure. To perform either of the following customizations, select **Customize**.
-
- - Prepare the virtual package for streaming. Streaming improves the experience when the virtual application package is run on target computers.
-
- - Specify the operating systems that can run this package.
-
- Click **Next**.
-
-12. On the **Streaming** page, run each program so that it can be optimized and run more efficiently on target computers. It can take several minutes for all the applications to run. After all applications have run, close each of the applications, and then click **Next**.
-
- > [!NOTE]
- > If you do not open any applications during this step, the default streaming method is on-demand streaming delivery. This means applications will be downloaded bit by bit until it can be opened, and then depending on how the background loading is configured, will load the rest of the application.
-
-
-
-13. On the **Target OS** page, specify the operating systems that can run this package. To allow all supported operating systems in your environment to run this package, select **Allow this package to run on any operating system**. To configure this package to run only on specific operating systems, select **Allow this package to run only on the following operating systems** and select the operating systems that can run this package. Click **Next**.
-
- > [!IMPORTANT]
- > Make sure that the operating systems you specify here are supported by the application you are sequencing.
-
-
-
-14. The **Create Package** page is displayed. To modify the package without saving it, select **Continue to modify package without saving using the package editor**. This option opens the package in the sequencer console so that you can modify the package before it is saved. Click **Next**.
-
- To save the package immediately, select **Save the package now** (default). Add optional **Comments** to be associated with the package. Comments are useful for identifying the program version and other information about the package.
-
- > [!IMPORTANT]
- > The system does not support non-printable characters in **Comments** and **Descriptions**.
-
-
-
-~~~
-The default **Save Location** is also displayed on this page. To change the default location, click **Browse** and specify the new location. Click **Create**.
-~~~
-
-15. The **Completion** page is displayed. Review the information in the **Virtual Application Package Report** pane as needed, then click **Close**. This information is also available in the **Report.xml** file that is located in the directory where the package was created.
-
- The package is now available in the sequencer.
-
- > [!IMPORTANT]
- > After you have successfully created a virtual application package, you cannot run the virtual application package on the computer that is running the sequencer.
-
-
-
-**To sequence an add-on or plug-in application**
-
-1. > [!NOTE]
- > Before performing the following procedure, install the parent application locally on the computer that is running the sequencer. Or if you have the parent application virtualized, you can follow the steps in the add-on or plug-in workflow to unpack the parent application on the computer.
- >
- > For example, if you are sequencing a plug-in for Microsoft Excel, install Microsoft Excel locally on the computer that is running the sequencer. Also install the parent application in the same directory where the application is installed on target computers. If the plug-in or add-on is going to be used with an existing virtual application package, install the application on the same virtual application drive that was used when you created the parent virtual application package.
-
-
-
-~~~
-On the computer that runs the sequencer, click **All Programs**, and then Click **Microsoft Application Virtualization**, and then click **Microsoft Application Virtualization Sequencer**.
-~~~
-
-2. *In the sequencer, click *Create a New Virtual Application Package. Select **Create Package (default)**, and then click **Next**.
-
-3. On the **Prepare Computer** page, review the issues that might cause the package creation to fail or could cause the package to contain unnecessary data. You should resolve all potential issues before you continue. After making any corrections, click **Refresh** to display the updated information. After you have resolved all potential issues, click **Next**.
-
- > [!IMPORTANT]
- > If you are required to disable virus scanning software, you should first scan the computer that runs the sequencer in order to ensure that no unwanted or malicious files could be added to the package.
-
-
-
-4. On the **Type of Application** page, select **Add-on or Plug-in**, and then click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Select Installer** page, click **Browse** and specify the installation file for the add-on or plug-in. If the add-on or plug-in does not have an associated installer file and you plan to run all installation steps manually, select the **Select this option to perform a custom installation** check box, and then click **Next**.
-
-6. On the **Install Primary** page, ensure that the primary application is installed on the computer that runs the sequencer. Alternatively, you can expand an existing package that has been saved locally on the computer that runs the sequencer. To do this, click **Expand Package**, and then select the package. After you have expanded or installed the parent program, select **I have installed the primary parent program**.
-
- Click **Next**.
-
-7. On the **Package Name** page, type a name that will be associated with the package. Use a name that helps identify the purpose and version of the application that will be added to the package. The package name will be displayed in the App-V 5.0 Management Console.
-
- Click **Next**.
-
-8. On the **Installation** page, when the sequencer and application installer are ready you can proceed to install the plug-in or add-in application so the sequencer can monitor the installation process. Use the application's installation process to perform the installation. If additional installation files must be run as part of the installation, click **Run** and locate and run the additional installation files. When you are finished with the installation, select **I am finished installing**, and then click **Next**.
-
-9. On the **Installation Report** page, you can review information about the virtual application package that you just sequenced. For a more detailed explanation about the information displayed in **Additional Information**, double-click the event. After you have reviewed the information, click **Next**.
-
-10. The **Customize** page is displayed. If you are finished installing and configuring the virtual application, select **Stop now** and skip to step 12 of this procedure. To perform either of the following customizations, select **Customize**.
-
- - Optimize how the package will run across a slow or unreliable network.
-
- - Specify the operating systems that can run this package.
-
- Click **Next**.
-
-11. On the **Streaming** page, run each program so that it can be optimized and run more efficiently on target computers. Streaming improves the experience when the virtual application package is run on target computers on high-latency networks. It can take several minutes for all the applications to run. After all applications have run, close each of the applications. You can also configure the package to be required to be fully downloaded before opening by selecting the **Force applications to be downloaded** check-box. Click **Next**.
-
- > [!NOTE]
- > If necessary, you can stop an application from loading during this step. In the **Application Launch** dialog box, click **Stop** and select one of the check boxes: **Stop all applications** or **Stop this application only**.
-
-
-
-12. On the **Target OS** page, specify the operating systems that can run this package. To allow all supported operating systems in your environment to run this package, select the **Allow this package to run on any operating system** check box. To configure this package to run only on specific operating systems, select the **Allow this package to run only on the following operating systems** check box, and then select the operating systems that can run this package. Click **Next**.
-
-13. The **Create Package** page is displayed. To modify the package without saving it, select **Continue to modify package without saving using the package editor** check box. This option opens the package in the sequencer console so that you can modify the package before it is saved. Click **Next**.
-
- To save the package immediately, select **Save the package now**. Optionally, add a **Description** that will be associated with the package. Descriptions are useful for identifying the version and other information about the package.
-
- > [!IMPORTANT]
- > The system does not support non-printable characters in Comments and Descriptions.
-
-
-
-~~~
-The default **Save Location** is also displayed on this page. To change the default location, click **Browse** and specify the new location. Click **Create**.
-~~~
-
-**To sequence a middleware application**
-
-1. On the computer that runs the sequencer, click **All Programs**, and then Click **Microsoft Application Virtualization**, and then click **Microsoft Application Virtualization Sequencer**.
-
-2. *In the sequencer, click *Create a New Virtual Application Package. Select **Create Package (default)**, and then click **Next**.
-
-3. On the **Prepare Computer** page, review the issues that could cause the package creation to fail or could cause the package to contain unnecessary data. You should resolve all potential issues before you continue. After making any corrections, click **Refresh** to display the updated information. After you have resolved all potential issues, click **Next**.
-
- > [!IMPORTANT]
- > If you are required to disable virus scanning software, you should first scan the computer that runs the App-V 5.0 Sequencer in order to ensure that no unwanted or malicious files can be added to the package.
-
-
-
-4. On the **Type of Application** page, select **Middleware**, and then click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Select Installer** page, click **Browse** and specify the installation file for the application. If the application does not have an associated installer file and you plan to run all installation steps manually, select the **Select this option to perform a custom installation** check box, and then click **Next**.
-
-6. On the **Package Name** page, type a name that will be associated with the package. Use a name that helps identify the purpose and version of the application that will be added to the package. The package name is displayed in the App-V 5.0 Management Console.
-
- Click **Next**.
-
-7. On the **Installation** page, when the sequencer and middleware application installer are ready you can proceed to install the application so that the sequencer can monitor the installation process. Use the application's installation process to perform the installation. If additional installation files must be run as part of the installation, click **Run**, to locate and run the additional installation files. When you are finished with the installation, select the **I am finished installing** check box, and then click **Next**.
-
-8. On the **Installation** page, wait while the sequencer configures the virtual application package.
-
-9. On the **Installation Report** page, you can review information about the virtual application package that you have just sequenced. In **Additional Information**, double-click an event to obtain more detailed information. To proceed, click **Next**.
-
-10. On the **Target OS** page, specify the operating systems that can run this package. To enable all supported operating systems in your environment to run this package, select the **Allow this package to run on any operating system** check box. To configure this package to run only on specific operating systems, select the **Allow this package to run only on the following operating systems** check box and select the operating systems that can run this package. Click **Next**.
-
-11. On the **Create Package** page is displayed. To modify the package without saving it, select **Continue to modify package without saving using the package editor**. This option opens the package in the sequencer console so that you can modify the package before it is saved. Click **Next**.
-
- To save the package immediately, select **Save the package now**. Optionally, add a **Description** to be associated with the package. Descriptions are useful for identifying the program version and other information about the package.
-
- > [!IMPORTANT]
- > The system does not support non-printable characters in Comments and Descriptions.
-
-
-
-~~~
-The default **Save Location** is also displayed on this page. To change the default location, click **Browse** and specify the new location. Click **Create**.
-~~~
-
-12. The **Completion** page is displayed. Review the information in the **Virtual Application Package Report** pane as needed, then click **Close**. This information is also available in the **Report.xml** file that is located in the directory specified in step 11 of this procedure.
-
- The package is now available in the sequencer. To edit the package properties, click **Edit \[Package Name\]**.
-
- > [!IMPORTANT]
- > After you have successfully created a virtual application package, you cannot run the virtual application package on the computer that is running the sequencer.
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-~~~
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-sequence-a-package--by-using-powershell-50.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-sequence-a-package--by-using-powershell-50.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d9728ec6c1..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-sequence-a-package--by-using-powershell-50.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,77 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Sequence a Package by Using PowerShell
-description: How to Sequence a Package by Using PowerShell
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: b41feed9-d1c5-48a3-940c-9a21d594f4f8
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Sequence a Package by Using PowerShell
-
-
-Use the following procedure to create a new App-V 5.0 package using PowerShell.
-
-**Note**
-Before you use this procedure you must copy the associated installer files to the computer running the sequencer and you have read and understand the sequencer section of [Planning for the App-V 5.0 Sequencer and Client Deployment](planning-for-the-app-v-50-sequencer-and-client-deployment.md).
-
-
-
-**To create a new virtual application using PowerShell**
-
-1. Install the App-V 5.0 sequencer. For more information about installing the sequencer see [How to Install the Sequencer](how-to-install-the-sequencer-beta-gb18030.md).
-
-2. To open a PowerShell console click **Start** and type **PowerShell**. Right-click **Windows PowerShell** and select **Run as Administrator**.
-
-3. Using the PowerShell console, type the following: **import-module appvsequencer**.
-
-4. To create a package, use the **New-AppvSequencerPackage** cmdlet. The following parameters are required to create a package:
-
- - **Name** - specifies the name of the package.
-
- - **PrimaryVirtualApplicationDirectory** - specifies the path to the directory that will be used to install the application. This path must exist.
-
- - **Installer** - specifies the path to the associated application installer.
-
- - **Path** - specifies the output directory for the package.
-
- For example:
-
- **New-AppvSequencerPackage –Name <name of Package> -PrimaryVirtualApplicationDirectory <path to the package root> -Installer <path to the installer executable> -OutputPath <directory of the output path>**
-
- Wait for the sequencer to create the package. Creating a package using PowerShell can take time. If the package was not created successfully an error will be returned.
-
- The following list displays additional optional parameters that can be used with **New-AppvSequencerPackage** cmdlet:
-
- - AcceleratorFilePath – specifies the path to the accelerator .cab file to generate a package.
-
- - InstalledFilesPath - specifies the path to where the local installed files of the application are saved.
-
- - InstallMediaPath - specifies the path to where the installation media is
-
- - TemplateFilePath - specifies the path to a template file if you want to customize the sequencing process.
-
- - FullLoad - specifies that the package must be fully downloaded to the computer running the App-V 5.0 before it can be opened.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Administering App-V by Using PowerShell](administering-app-v-by-using-powershell.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-sequence-a-package--by-using-powershell-51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-sequence-a-package--by-using-powershell-51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8a8c74258e..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-sequence-a-package--by-using-powershell-51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,77 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Sequence a Package by Using PowerShell
-description: How to Sequence a Package by Using PowerShell
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 6134c6be-937d-4609-a516-92d49154b290
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Sequence a Package by Using PowerShell
-
-
-Use the following procedure to create a new App-V 5.1 package using PowerShell.
-
-**Note**
-Before you use this procedure you must copy the associated installer files to the computer running the sequencer and you have read and understand the sequencer section of [Planning for the App-V 5.1 Sequencer and Client Deployment](planning-for-the-app-v-51-sequencer-and-client-deployment.md).
-
-
-
-**To create a new virtual application using PowerShell**
-
-1. Install the App-V 5.1 sequencer. For more information about installing the sequencer see [How to Install the Sequencer](how-to-install-the-sequencer-51beta-gb18030.md).
-
-2. To open a PowerShell console click **Start** and type **PowerShell**. Right-click **Windows PowerShell** and select **Run as Administrator**.
-
-3. Using the PowerShell console, type the following: **import-module appvsequencer**.
-
-4. To create a package, use the **New-AppvSequencerPackage** cmdlet. The following parameters are required to create a package:
-
- - **Name** - specifies the name of the package.
-
- - **PrimaryVirtualApplicationDirectory** - specifies the path to the directory that will be used to install the application. This path must exist.
-
- - **Installer** - specifies the path to the associated application installer.
-
- - **Path** - specifies the output directory for the package.
-
- For example:
-
- **New-AppvSequencerPackage –Name <name of Package> -PrimaryVirtualApplicationDirectory <path to the package root> -Installer <path to the installer executable> -OutputPath <directory of the output path>**
-
- Wait for the sequencer to create the package. Creating a package using PowerShell can take time. If the package was not created successfully an error will be returned.
-
- The following list displays additional optional parameters that can be used with **New-AppvSequencerPackage** cmdlet:
-
- - AcceleratorFilePath – specifies the path to the accelerator .cab file to generate a package.
-
- - InstalledFilesPath - specifies the path to where the local installed files of the application are saved.
-
- - InstallMediaPath - specifies the path to where the installation media is
-
- - TemplateFilePath - specifies the path to a template file if you want to customize the sequencing process.
-
- - FullLoad - specifies that the package must be fully downloaded to the computer running the App-V 5.1 before it can be opened.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Administering App-V 5.1 by Using PowerShell](administering-app-v-51-by-using-powershell.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-transfer-access-and-configurations-to-another-version-of-a-package-by-using-the-management-console.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-transfer-access-and-configurations-to-another-version-of-a-package-by-using-the-management-console.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1979f1b044..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-transfer-access-and-configurations-to-another-version-of-a-package-by-using-the-management-console.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Transfer Access and Configurations to Another Version of a Package by Using the Management Console
-description: How to Transfer Access and Configurations to Another Version of a Package by Using the Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: d41d64a0-0333-4951-ab27-db595bf0f634
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Transfer Access and Configurations to Another Version of a Package by Using the Management Console
-
-
-Use the following procedure to transfer the access and default package configurations to another version of a package by using the management console.
-
-**To transfer access and configurations to another version of a package**
-
-1. To view the package that you want to configure, open the App-V 5.0 Management Console. Select the package to which you will transfer the new configuration, right-click the package and select **transfer default configuration from** or **transfer access and configurations from**, depending on the configuration that you want to transfer.
-
-2. To transfer the configuration, in the **Select Previous Version** dialog box, select the package that contains the settings that you want to transfer, and then click **OK**.
-
- If you select **transfer default configuration from**, then only the underlying dynamic deployment configuration will be transferred.
-
- If you select **transfer access and configurations from**, then all access permissions, as well as the configuration settings, will be copied.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-transfer-access-and-configurations-to-another-version-of-a-package-by-using-the-management-console51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-transfer-access-and-configurations-to-another-version-of-a-package-by-using-the-management-console51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 17e0975836..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-transfer-access-and-configurations-to-another-version-of-a-package-by-using-the-management-console51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Transfer Access and Configurations to Another Version of a Package by Using the Management Console
-description: How to Transfer Access and Configurations to Another Version of a Package by Using the Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: bf53f064-76ae-4eac-9266-d087c480cda7
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Transfer Access and Configurations to Another Version of a Package by Using the Management Console
-
-
-Use the following procedure to transfer the access and default package configurations to another version of a package by using the management console.
-
-**To transfer access and configurations to another version of a package**
-
-1. To view the package that you want to configure, open the App-V 5.1 Management Console. Select the package to which you will transfer the new configuration, right-click the package and select **transfer default configuration from** or **transfer access and configurations from**, depending on the configuration that you want to transfer.
-
-2. To transfer the configuration, in the **Select Previous Version** dialog box, select the package that contains the settings that you want to transfer, and then click **OK**.
-
- If you select **transfer default configuration from**, then only the underlying dynamic deployment configuration will be transferred.
-
- If you select **transfer access and configurations from**, then all access permissions, as well as the configuration settings, will be copied.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-uninstall-the-app-v-50-client.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-uninstall-the-app-v-50-client.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b30443d81b..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-uninstall-the-app-v-50-client.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Uninstall the App-V 5.0 Client
-description: How to Uninstall the App-V 5.0 Client
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 7566fb19-8d52-439a-be42-e004d95fed6f
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Uninstall the App-V 5.0 Client
-
-
-Use the following procedure to uninstall the App-V 5.0 client from a computer. When you uninstall the App-V 5.0 client all packages published to the computer running the client are also removed. If the uninstall operation does not complete the packages will need to be re-published to the computer running the App-V 5.0 client.
-
-**Important**
-You should ensure that the App-V 5.0 client service is running prior to performing the uninstall procedure.
-
-
-
-**To uninstall the App-V 5.0 Client**
-
-1. In Control Panel, double-click **Programs** / **Uninstall a Program**, and then double-click **Microsoft Application Virtualization Client**.
-
-2. In the dialog box that appears, click **Yes** to continue with the uninstall process.
-
- **Important**
- The uninstall process cannot be canceled or interrupted.
-
-
-
-3. A progress bar shows the time remaining. When this step finishes, you must restart the computer so that all associated drivers can be stopped to complete the uninstall process.
-
- **Note**
- You can also use the command line to uninstall the App-V 5.0 client with the following switch: **/UNINSTALL**.
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-~~~
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying App-V 5.0](deploying-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-uninstall-the-app-v-51-client.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-uninstall-the-app-v-51-client.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 119e3fda37..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-uninstall-the-app-v-51-client.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Uninstall the App-V 5.1 Client
-description: How to Uninstall the App-V 5.1 Client
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 21f2d946-fc9f-4cd3-899b-ac52b3fbc306
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Uninstall the App-V 5.1 Client
-
-
-Use the following procedure to uninstall the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 client from a computer. When you uninstall the App-V 5.1 client all packages published to the computer running the client are also removed. If the uninstall operation does not complete the packages will need to be re-published to the computer running the App-V 5.1 client.
-
-**Important**
-You should ensure that the App-V 5.1 client service is running prior to performing the uninstall procedure.
-
-
-
-**To uninstall the App-V 5.1 Client**
-
-1. In Control Panel, double-click **Programs** / **Uninstall a Program**, and then double-click **Microsoft Application Virtualization Client**.
-
-2. In the dialog box that appears, click **Yes** to continue with the uninstall process.
-
- **Important**
- The uninstall process cannot be canceled or interrupted.
-
-
-
-3. A progress bar shows the time remaining. When this step finishes, you must restart the computer so that all associated drivers can be stopped to complete the uninstall process.
-
- **Note**
- You can also use the command line to uninstall the App-V 5.1 client with the following switch: **/UNINSTALL**.
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-~~~
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying App-V 5.1](deploying-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-use-an-app-v-46-sp1-application-from-an-app-v-50-application.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-use-an-app-v-46-sp1-application-from-an-app-v-50-application.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0345a45113..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-use-an-app-v-46-sp1-application-from-an-app-v-50-application.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
----
-ms.reviewer:
-title: How to Use an App-V 4.6 Application From an App-V 5.0 Application
-description: How to Use an App-V 4.6 Application From an App-V 5.0 Application
-ms.assetid: 4e78cb32-9c8b-478e-ae8b-c474a7e42487
-author: msfttracyp
-ms.assetid: 4e78cb32-9c8b-478e-ae8b-c474a7e42487
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/21/2016
----
-
-# How to Use an App-V 4.6 Application From an App-V 5.0 Application
-
-*Note:** App-V 4.6 has exited Mainstream support. The following applies to an App-V 4.6 SP3 package.
-
-Use the following procedure to run an App-V 4.6 application with App-V 5.0 applications on a standalone client.
-
-**To run applications on a standalone client**
-
-1. Select two applications in your environment that can be opened from one another. For example, Microsoft Outlook and Adobe Acrobat Reader. You can access an email attachment created using Adobe Acrobat.
-
-2. Convert the packages, or create a new package for either of the applications using the App-V 5.0 format. For more information about converting packages see, [How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to a Converted App-V 5.0 Package for All Users on a Specific Computer](how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-a-converted-app-v-50-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md) or [How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to App-V 5.0 for a Specific User](how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-app-v-50-for-a-specific-user.md).
-
-3. Add and provision the package using the App-V 5.0 management console. For more information adding and provisioning packages see, [How to Add or Upgrade Packages by Using the Management Console](how-to-add-or-upgrade-packages-by-using-the-management-console-beta-gb18030.md) and [How to Configure Access to Packages by Using the Management Console](how-to-configure-access-to-packages-by-using-the-management-console-50.md).
-
-4. The converted application now runs using App-V 5.0 and you can open one application from the other. For example, if you converted a Microsoft Office package to an App-V 5.0 package and Adobe Acrobat is still running as an App-V 4.6 package, you can open an Adobe Acrobat Reader attachment using Microsoft Outlook.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-use-an-app-v-46-sp1-application-from-an-app-v-51-application.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-use-an-app-v-46-sp1-application-from-an-app-v-51-application.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ea81880476..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-use-an-app-v-46-sp1-application-from-an-app-v-51-application.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Use an App-V 4.6 Application From an App-V 5.1 Application
-description: How to Use an App-V 4.6 Application From an App-V 5.1 Application
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 909b4391-762b-4988-b0cf-32b67f1fcf0e
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/21/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Use an App-V 4.6 Application From an App-V 5.1 Application
-
-*Note:** App-V 4.6 has exited Mainstream support. The following applies to an App-V 4.6 SP3 package.
-
-Use the following procedure to run an App-V 4.6 application with App-V 5.1 applications on a standalone client.
-
-**Note**
-This procedure assumes that you are running the latest version of App-V 4.6.
-
-**To run applications on a standalone client**
-
-1. Select two applications in your environment that can be opened from one another. For example, Microsoft Outlook and Adobe Acrobat Reader. You can access an email attachment created using Adobe Acrobat.
-
-2. Convert the packages, or create a new package for either of the applications using the App-V 5.1 format. For more information about converting packages see, [How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to a Converted App-V 5.1 Package for All Users on a Specific Computer](how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-a-converted-app-v-51-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md) or [How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to App-V 5.1 for a Specific User](how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-app-v-51-for-a-specific-user.md).
-
-3. Add and provision the package using the App-V 5.1 management console. For more information adding and provisioning packages see, [How to Add or Upgrade Packages by Using the Management Console](how-to-add-or-upgrade-packages-by-using-the-management-console-51-gb18030.md) and [How to Configure Access to Packages by Using the Management Console](how-to-configure-access-to-packages-by-using-the-management-console-51.md).
-
-4. The converted application now runs using App-V 5.1 and you can open one application from the other. For example, if you converted a Microsoft Office package to an App-V 5.1 package and Adobe Acrobat is still running as an App-V 4.6 package, you can open an Adobe Acrobat Reader attachment using Microsoft Outlook.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-use-optional-packages-in-connection-groups.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-use-optional-packages-in-connection-groups.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d8239f46ed..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-use-optional-packages-in-connection-groups.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,301 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Use Optional Packages in Connection Groups
-description: How to Use Optional Packages in Connection Groups
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 4d08a81b-55e5-471a-91dc-9a684fb3c9a1
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Use Optional Packages in Connection Groups
-
-
-Starting in Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 SP3, you can add optional packages to your connection groups to simplify connection group management. The following table summarizes the tasks that you can complete more easily by using optional packages, and provides links to instructions for each task.
-
-**Note**
-**Optional packages are supported only in App-V 5.0 SP3.**
-
-
-
-Before using optional packages, see [Requirements for using optional packages in connection groups](#bkmk-reqs-using-cg).
-
-
Unpublish, delete, or republish an optional package without having to disable, remove, edit, add, and re-enable the connection group on the App-V Client.
-
You can also unpublish the optional package and republish it later without having to disable or republish the connection group.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Use one connection group, with optional packages, for multiple users with different packages entitled to them
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task description
-
How to perform the task
-
-
-
-
-
With App-V 5.0 SP3
-
You can add optional packages to connection groups, which enables you to provide different combinations of applications and plug-ins to different end users.
-
Example: You want to distribute Microsoft Office to your end users, but enable a certain plug-in for only a subset of users.
-
To do this, create a connection group that contains a package with Office, and another package with Office plug-ins, and then make the plug-ins package optional.
-
End users who are not entitled to the plug-in package will still be able to run Office.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Method
-
Steps
-
-
-
-
-
App-V Server – Management Console
-
-
In the Management Console, select PACKAGES to open the PACKAGES page.
-
Select CONNECTION GROUPS to display the Connection Groups library.
-
Select the correct connection group from the Connection Groups library.
-
Click EDIT in the CONNECTED PACKAGES pane.
-
Select Optional next to the package name.
-
Select the ADD PACKAGE ACCESS TO GROUP ACCESS check box. This required step adds to the connection group the package entitlements that you configured earlier when you assigned packages to Active Directory groups.
-
-
-
-
App-V Server - PowerShell cmdlet
-
Use the following cmdlet, and specify the -Optional parameter:
You had to create many connection groups to make specific application and plug-in combinations available to specific users.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Unpublish or delete an optional package, or unpublish an optional package and republish it later, without changing the connection group
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task description
-
How to perform the task
-
-
-
-
-
With App-V 5.0 SP3
-
You can unpublish, delete, or republish an optional package, which is in a connection group, without having to disable or re-enable the connection group on the App-V Client.
-
You can also unpublish an optional package and republish it later without having to disable or republish the connection group.
-
Example: If you publish an optional package that contains a Microsoft Office plug-in, and you want to remove the plug-in, you can unpublish the package without having to disable the connection group.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Method
-
Steps
-
-
-
-
-
App-V Server – Management Console
-
-
To unpublish the package: In the Management Console, select elect the PACKAGES page, right-click the package that you want to unpublish, and click unpublish.
-
To remove an optional package from a connection group: On the CONNECTION GROUPS page, select the package that you want to remove, and click the right arrow to remove the package from the connection group pane on the bottom left.
Remove the connection group from each App-V Client computer where it was enabled.
-
Unpublish the package.
-
Remove the package from the connection group’s definition.
-
Republish the connection group.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Requirements for using optional packages in connection groups
-
-
-Review the following requirements before using optional packages in connection groups:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Requirement
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
Connection groups must contain at least one non-optional package.
-
-
Check carefully that you meet this requirement, as the App-V Server and the PowerShell cmdlet don’t validate that the requirement has been met.
-
If you accidentally create a connection group that does not contain at least one non-optional package, and the end user tries to open a packaged application in that connection group, the connection group will fail.
-
-
-
-
-
-
User-published connection groups can contain packages that are published globally or to the user.
-
Globally published connection groups must contain only globally published packages.
-
-
Globally published connection groups must contain packages that are published globally to ensure that the packages will be available when starting the connection group’s virtual environment.
-
If you try to add or enable globally published connection groups that contain user-published packages, the connection group will fail.
-
-
-
You must publish all non-optional packages before publishing the connection group that contains those packages.
-
A connection group’s virtual environment cannot start if any non-optional packages are missing.
-
The App-V Client fails to add or enable a connection group if any non-optional packages have not been published.
-
-
-
Before you unpublish a globally published package, ensure that the connection groups that are entitled to all the users on that computer no longer require the package.
-
The system does not check whether the package is part of another user’s connection group. Unpublishing a global package will make it unavailable to every user on that computer, so make sure that each user’s connection groups no longer contain the package, or alternatively make the package optional.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-use-optional-packages-in-connection-groups51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-use-optional-packages-in-connection-groups51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8a87b7ff92..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-use-optional-packages-in-connection-groups51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,300 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Use Optional Packages in Connection Groups
-description: How to Use Optional Packages in Connection Groups
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 67666f18-b704-4852-a1e4-d13633bd2baf
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Use Optional Packages in Connection Groups
-
-
-Starting in Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 SP3, you can add optional packages to your connection groups to simplify connection group management. The following table summarizes the tasks that you can complete more easily by using optional packages, and provides links to instructions for each task.
-
-**Note**
-**Optional packages are not supported in releases prior to App-V 5.0 SP3.**
-
-
-
-Before using optional packages, see [Requirements for using optional packages in connection groups](#bkmk-reqs-using-cg).
-
-
Unpublish, delete, or republish an optional package without having to disable, remove, edit, add, and re-enable the connection group on the App-V Client.
-
You can also unpublish the optional package and republish it later without having to disable or republish the connection group.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Use one connection group, with optional packages, for multiple users with different packages entitled to them
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task description
-
How to perform the task
-
-
-
-
-
With App-V 5.0 SP3 and App-V 5.1
-
You can add optional packages to connection groups, which enables you to provide different combinations of applications and plug-ins to different end users.
-
Example: You want to distribute Microsoft Office to your end users, but enable a certain plug-in for only a subset of users.
-
To do this, create a connection group that contains a package with Office, and another package with Office plug-ins, and then make the plug-ins package optional.
-
End users who are not entitled to the plug-in package will still be able to run Office.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Method
-
Steps
-
-
-
-
-
App-V Server – Management Console
-
-
In the Management Console, select CONNECTION GROUPS to display the Connection Groups library.
-
Select the correct connection group from the Connection Groups library.
-
Click EDIT in the CONNECTED PACKAGES pane.
-
Select Optional next to the package name.
-
Select the ADD PACKAGE ACCESS TO GROUP ACCESS check box. This required step adds to the connection group the package entitlements that you configured earlier when you assigned packages to Active Directory groups.
-
-
-
-
App-V Server - PowerShell cmdlet
-
Use the following cmdlet, and specify the -Optional parameter:
You had to create many connection groups to make specific application and plug-in combinations available to specific users.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Unpublish or delete an optional package, or unpublish an optional package and republish it later, without changing the connection group
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task description
-
How to perform the task
-
-
-
-
-
With App-V 5.0 SP3 and App-V 5.1
-
You can unpublish, delete, or republish an optional package, which is in a connection group, without having to disable or re-enable the connection group on the App-V Client.
-
You can also unpublish an optional package and republish it later without having to disable or republish the connection group.
-
Example: If you publish an optional package that contains a Microsoft Office plug-in, and you want to remove the plug-in, you can unpublish the package without having to disable the connection group.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Method
-
Steps
-
-
-
-
-
App-V Server – Management Console
-
-
To unpublish the package: In the Management Console, select elect the PACKAGES page, click or right-click the package that you want to unpublish, and click Unpublish.
-
To remove an optional package from a connection group: On the CONNECTION GROUPS page, select the package that you want to remove, and click the right arrow to remove the package from the connection group pane on the bottom left.
Remove the connection group from each App-V Client computer where it was enabled.
-
Unpublish the package.
-
Remove the package from the connection group’s definition.
-
Republish the connection group.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Requirements for using optional packages in connection groups
-
-
-Review the following requirements before using optional packages in connection groups:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Requirement
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
Connection groups must contain at least one non-optional package.
-
-
Check carefully that you meet this requirement, as the App-V Server and the PowerShell cmdlet don’t validate that the requirement has been met.
-
If you accidentally create a connection group that does not contain at least one non-optional package, and the end user tries to open a packaged application in that connection group, the connection group will fail.
-
-
-
-
-
-
User-published connection groups can contain packages that are published globally or to the user.
-
Globally published connection groups must contain only globally published packages.
-
-
Globally published connection groups must contain packages that are published globally to ensure that the packages will be available when starting the connection group’s virtual environment.
-
If you try to add or enable globally published connection groups that contain user-published packages, the connection group will fail.
-
-
-
You must publish all non-optional packages before publishing the connection group that contains those packages.
-
A connection group’s virtual environment cannot start if any non-optional packages are missing.
-
The App-V Client fails to add or enable a connection group if any non-optional packages have not been published.
-
-
-
Before you unpublish a globally published package, ensure that the connection groups that are entitled to all the users on that computer no longer require the package.
-
The system does not check whether the package is part of another user’s connection group. Unpublishing a global package will make it unavailable to every user on that computer, so make sure that each user’s connection groups no longer contain the package, or alternatively make the package optional.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-view-and-configure-applications-and-default-virtual-application-extensions-by-using-the-management-console-beta.md b/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-view-and-configure-applications-and-default-virtual-application-extensions-by-using-the-management-console-beta.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 96723eea3e..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/how-to-view-and-configure-applications-and-default-virtual-application-extensions-by-using-the-management-console-beta.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to View and Configure Applications and Default Virtual Application Extensions by Using the Management Console
-description: How to View and Configure Applications and Default Virtual Application Extensions by Using the Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: c77e6662-7a18-4da1-8da8-b58068b65fa1
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to View and Configure Applications and Default Virtual Application Extensions by Using the Management Console
-
-
-Use the following procedure to view and configure default package extensions.
-
-**To view and configure default virtual application extensions**
-
-1. To view the package that you want to configure, open the App-V 5.0 Management Console. Select the package that you want to configure, right-click the package name and select **edit default configuration**.
-
-2. To view the applications contained in the specified package, in the **Default Configuration** pane, click **Applications**. To view the shortcuts for that package, click **Shortcuts**. To view the file type associations for that package, click **File Types**.
-
-3. To enable the application extensions, select **ENABLE**.
-
- To enable shortcuts, select **ENABLE SHORTCUTS**. To add a new shortcut for the selected application, right-click the application in the **SHORTCUTS** pane and select **Add new shortcut**. To remove a shortcut, right-click the application in the **SHORTCUTS** pane and select **Remove Shortcut**. To edit an existing shortcut, right-click the application and select **Edit Shortcut**.
-
-4. To view any other application extensions, click **Advanced** and click **Export Configuration**. Type in a filename and click **Save**. You can view all application extensions associated with the package using the configuration file.
-
-5. To edit other application extensions, modify the configuration file and click **Import and Overwrite this Configuration**. Select the modified file and click **Open**. In the dialog box, click **Overwrite** to complete the process.
-
- **Got a suggestion for App-V**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization). **Got an App-V issue?** Use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/images/checklistbox.gif b/mdop/appv-v5/images/checklistbox.gif
deleted file mode 100644
index 8af13c51d1..0000000000
Binary files a/mdop/appv-v5/images/checklistbox.gif and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/images/packageaddfileandregistrydata-global.png b/mdop/appv-v5/images/packageaddfileandregistrydata-global.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 775e290a36..0000000000
Binary files a/mdop/appv-v5/images/packageaddfileandregistrydata-global.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/images/packageaddfileandregistrydata-stream.png b/mdop/appv-v5/images/packageaddfileandregistrydata-stream.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 0e1205c62b..0000000000
Binary files a/mdop/appv-v5/images/packageaddfileandregistrydata-stream.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/images/packageaddfileandregistrydata.png b/mdop/appv-v5/images/packageaddfileandregistrydata.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 603420e627..0000000000
Binary files a/mdop/appv-v5/images/packageaddfileandregistrydata.png and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/index.md b/mdop/appv-v5/index.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c51ad7bc30..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Application Virtualization 5
-description: Application Virtualization 5
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: e82eb44b-9ccd-41aa-923b-71400230ad23
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 04/19/2017
----
-
-
-# Application Virtualization 5
-
-
-Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5 lets administrators make applications available to end users without having to install the applications directly on end user computers. App-V transforms applications into centrally managed services that are never installed and don't conflict with other applications.
-
-## App-V 5 Versions
-
-
-[Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.1 Administrator's Guide](microsoft-application-virtualization-51-administrators-guide.md)
-
-[Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0 Administrator's Guide](microsoft-application-virtualization-50-administrators-guide.md)
-
-## More Information
-
-
-[Release Notes for App-V 5.1](release-notes-for-app-v-51.md)
-View updated product information and known issues for App-V 5.1.
-
-[Release Notes for App-V 5.0 SP3](release-notes-for-app-v-50-sp3.md)
-View updated product information and known issues for App-V 5.0 SP3.
-
-[Release Notes for App-V 5.0 SP2](release-notes-for-app-v-50-sp2.md)
-View updated product information and known issues for App-V 5.0 SP2.
-
-[Release Notes for App-V 5.0](release-notes-for-app-v-50.md)
-View updated product information and known issues for App-V 5.0.
-
-[MDOP TechCenter Page](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=225286)
-Learn about the latest MDOP information and resources.
-
-[MDOP Information Experience](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=236032)
-Find documentation, videos, and other resources for MDOP technologies. You can also [send us feedback](mailto:MDOPDocs@microsoft.com) or learn about updates by following us on [Facebook](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=242445) or [Twitter](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=242447).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/maintaining-app-v-50.md b/mdop/appv-v5/maintaining-app-v-50.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a8cfb7715b..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/maintaining-app-v-50.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Maintaining App-V 5.0
-description: Maintaining App-V 5.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 66851ec3-c674-493b-ad6d-db8fcbf1956c
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Maintaining App-V 5.0
-
-
-After you have completed all the necessary planning, and then deployment of App-V 5.0, you can use the following information to maintain the App-V 5.0 infrastructure.
-
-## Move the App-V 5.0 Server
-
-
-The App-V 5.0 server connects to the App-V 5.0 database. Therefore you can install the management component to any computer on the network and then connect it to the App-V 5.0 database.
-
-[How to Move the App-V Server to Another Computer](how-to-move-the-app-v-server-to-another-computer.md)
-
-## Determine if an App-V 5.0 Application is Running Virtualized
-
-
-Independent software vendors (ISV) who want to determine if an application is running virtualized with App-V 5.0 or above, should open a named object called **AppVVirtual-<PID>** in the default namespace. For example, Windows API **GetCurrentProcessId()** can be used to obtain the current process's ID, for example 4052, and then if a named Event object called **AppVVirtual-4052** can be successfully opened using **OpenEvent()** in the default namespace for read access, then the application is virtual. If the **OpenEvent()** call fails, the application is not virtual.
-
-Additionally, ISV’s who want to explicitly virtualize or not virtualize calls on specific API’s with App-V 5.0 and above, can use the **VirtualizeCurrentThread()** and **CurrentThreadIsVirtualized()** functions implemented in the AppEntSubsystems32.dll module. These provide a way of hinting at a downstream component that the call should or should not be virtualized.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Other resources for maintaining App-V 5.0
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/maintaining-app-v-51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/maintaining-app-v-51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 005a024a2b..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/maintaining-app-v-51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Maintaining App-V 5.1
-description: Maintaining App-V 5.1
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 5abd17d3-e8af-4261-b914-741ae116b0e7
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Maintaining App-V 5.1
-
-
-After you have completed all the necessary planning, and then deployment of App-V 5.1, you can use the following information to maintain the App-V 5.1 infrastructure.
-
-## Move the App-V 5.1 Server
-
-
-The App-V 5.1 server connects to the App-V 5.1 database. Therefore you can install the management component to any computer on the network and then connect it to the App-V 5.1 database.
-
-[How to Move the App-V Server to Another Computer](how-to-move-the-app-v-server-to-another-computer51.md)
-
-## Determine if an App-V 5.1 Application is Running Virtualized
-
-
-Independent software vendors (ISV) who want to determine if an application is running virtualized with App-V 5.1 or above, should open a named object called **AppVVirtual-<PID>** in the default namespace. For example, Windows API **GetCurrentProcessId()** can be used to obtain the current process's ID, for example 4052, and then if a named Event object called **AppVVirtual-4052** can be successfully opened using **OpenEvent()** in the default namespace for read access, then the application is virtual. If the **OpenEvent()** call fails, the application is not virtual.
-
-Additionally, ISV’s who want to explicitly virtualize or not virtualize calls on specific API’s with App-V 5.1 and above, can use the **VirtualizeCurrentThread()** and **CurrentThreadIsVirtualized()** functions implemented in the AppEntSubsystems32.dll module. These provide a way of hinting at a downstream component that the call should or should not be virtualized.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Other resources for maintaining App-V 5.1
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/managing-connection-groups.md b/mdop/appv-v5/managing-connection-groups.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1c3c341ef5..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/managing-connection-groups.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Managing Connection Groups
-description: Managing Connection Groups
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 1a9c8f26-f421-4b70-b7e2-da8118e8198c
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Managing Connection Groups
-
-
-Connection groups enable the applications within a package to interact with each other in the virtual environment, while remaining isolated from the rest of the system. By using connection groups, administrators can manage packages independently and can avoid having to add the same application multiple times to a client computer.
-
-**Note**
-In previous versions of App-V 5.0, connection groups were referred to as Dynamic Suite Composition.
-
-
-
-**In this topic:**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Other resources for App-V 5.0 connection groups
-
-
-- [Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/managing-connection-groups51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/managing-connection-groups51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 43554b1ff9..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/managing-connection-groups51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Managing Connection Groups
-description: Managing Connection Groups
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 22c9d3cb-7246-4173-9742-4ba1c24b0a6a
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Managing Connection Groups
-
-
-Connection groups enable the applications within a package to interact with each other in the virtual environment, while remaining isolated from the rest of the system. By using connection groups, administrators can manage packages independently and can avoid having to add the same application multiple times to a client computer.
-
-**Note**
-In some previous versions of App-V, connection groups were referred to as Dynamic Suite Composition.
-
-
-
-**In this topic:**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Other resources for App-V 5.1 connection groups
-
-
-- [Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/microsoft-application-virtualization-50-administrators-guide.md b/mdop/appv-v5/microsoft-application-virtualization-50-administrators-guide.md
deleted file mode 100644
index fdfc5ef202..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/microsoft-application-virtualization-50-administrators-guide.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0 Administrator's Guide
-description: Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0 Administrator's Guide
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: c46e94b5-32cd-4377-8dc3-8163539be897
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-# Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0 Administrator's Guide
-
-The Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 Administrator’s Guide provides information and step-by-step procedures to help you administer the App-V 5.0 system and its components. This information will be valuable for system administrators who manage large installations with many servers and clients and for support personnel who interact directly with the computers or the end users.
-
-- [Getting Started with App-V 5.0](getting-started-with-app-v-50--rtm.md)
- - [About App-V 5.0](about-app-v-50.md)
- - [About App-V 5.0 SP1](about-app-v-50-sp1.md)
- - [About App-V 5.0 SP2](about-app-v-50-sp2.md)
- - [About App-V 5.0 SP3](about-app-v-50-sp3.md)
- - [Evaluating App-V 5.0](evaluating-app-v-50.md)
- - [High Level Architecture for App-V 5.0](high-level-architecture-for-app-v-50.md)
- - [Accessibility for App-V 5.0](accessibility-for-app-v-50.md)
-- [Planning for App-V 5.0](planning-for-app-v-50-rc.md)
- - [Preparing Your Environment for App-V 5.0](preparing-your-environment-for-app-v-50.md)
- - [Planning to Deploy App-V](planning-to-deploy-app-v.md)
- - [App-V 5.0 Planning Checklist](app-v-50-planning-checklist.md)
-- [Deploying App-V 5.0](deploying-app-v-50.md)
- - [Deploying the App-V 5.0 Sequencer and Client](deploying-the-app-v-50-sequencer-and-client.md)
- - [Deploying the App-V 5.0 Server](deploying-the-app-v-50-server.md)
- - [App-V 5.0 Deployment Checklist](app-v-50-deployment-checklist.md)
- - [Deploying Microsoft Office 2016 by Using App-V](deploying-microsoft-office-2016-by-using-app-v.md)
- - [Deploying Microsoft Office 2013 by Using App-V](deploying-microsoft-office-2013-by-using-app-v.md)
- - [Deploying Microsoft Office 2010 by Using App-V](deploying-microsoft-office-2010-by-using-app-v.md)
-- [Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
- - [Creating and Managing App-V 5.0 Virtualized Applications](creating-and-managing-app-v-50-virtualized-applications.md)
- - [Administering App-V 5.0 Virtual Applications by Using the Management Console](administering-app-v-50-virtual-applications-by-using-the-management-console.md)
- - [Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups.md)
- - [Deploying App-V 5.0 Packages by Using Electronic Software Distribution (ESD)](deploying-app-v-50-packages-by-using-electronic-software-distribution--esd-.md)
- - [Using the App-V 5.0 Client Management Console](using-the-app-v-50-client-management-console.md)
- - [Migrating from a Previous Version](migrating-from-a-previous-version-app-v-50.md)
- - [Maintaining App-V 5.0](maintaining-app-v-50.md)
- - [Administering App-V by Using PowerShell](administering-app-v-by-using-powershell.md)
-- [Troubleshooting App-V 5.0](troubleshooting-app-v-50.md)
-- [Technical Reference for App-V 5.0](technical-reference-for-app-v-50.md)
- - [Performance Guidance for Application Virtualization 5.0](performance-guidance-for-application-virtualization-50.md)
- - [Application Publishing and Client Interaction](application-publishing-and-client-interaction.md)
- - [Viewing App-V Server Publishing Metadata](viewing-app-v-server-publishing-metadata.md)
- - [Running a Locally Installed Application Inside a Virtual Environment with Virtualized Applications](running-a-locally-installed-application-inside-a-virtual-environment-with-virtualized-applications.md)
-
-#
-
-- Add or vote on suggestions on the ["Microsoft Application Virtualization" forum on UserVoice.com](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization).
-- For App-V issues, use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/microsoft-application-virtualization-51-administrators-guide.md b/mdop/appv-v5/microsoft-application-virtualization-51-administrators-guide.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b5120b6279..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/microsoft-application-virtualization-51-administrators-guide.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.1 Administrator's Guide
-description: Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.1 Administrator's Guide
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 3049996a-7253-4599-a29a-1b58f9ab14a4
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-# Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.1 Administrator's Guide
-
-The Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 Administrator’s Guide provides information and step-by-step procedures to help you administer the App-V 5.1 system and its components. This information will be valuable for system administrators who manage large installations with many servers and clients and for support personnel who interact directly with the computers or the end users.
-
-- [Getting Started with App-V 5.1](getting-started-with-app-v-51.md)
- - [About App-V 5.1](about-app-v-51.md)
- - [Evaluating App-V 5.1](evaluating-app-v-51.md)
- - [High Level Architecture for App-V 5.1](high-level-architecture-for-app-v-51.md)
- - [Accessibility for App-V 5.1](accessibility-for-app-v-51.md)
-- [Planning for App-V 5.1](planning-for-app-v-51.md)
- - [Preparing Your Environment for App-V 5.1](preparing-your-environment-for-app-v-51.md)
- - [Planning to Deploy App-V](planning-to-deploy-app-v51.md)
-- [Deploying App-V 5.1](deploying-app-v-51.md)
- - [Deploying the App-V 5.1 Sequencer and Client](deploying-the-app-v-51-sequencer-and-client.md)
- - [Deploying the App-V 5.1 Server](deploying-the-app-v-51-server.md)
- - [App-V 5.1 Deployment Checklist](app-v-51-deployment-checklist.md)
- - [Deploying Microsoft Office 2016 by Using App-V](deploying-microsoft-office-2016-by-using-app-v51.md)
- - [Deploying Microsoft Office 2013 by Using App-V](deploying-microsoft-office-2013-by-using-app-v51.md)
- - [Deploying Microsoft Office 2010 by Using App-V](deploying-microsoft-office-2010-by-using-app-v51.md)
-- [Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
- - [Creating and Managing App-V 5.1 Virtualized Applications](creating-and-managing-app-v-51-virtualized-applications.md)
- - [Administering App-V 5.1 Virtual Applications by Using the Management Console](administering-app-v-51-virtual-applications-by-using-the-management-console.md)
- - [Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups51.md)
- - [Deploying App-V 5.1 Packages by Using Electronic Software Distribution (ESD)](deploying-app-v-51-packages-by-using-electronic-software-distribution--esd-.md)
- - [Using the App-V 5.1 Client Management Console](using-the-app-v-51-client-management-console.md)
- - [Migrating to App-V 5.1 from a Previous Version](migrating-to-app-v-51-from-a-previous-version.md)
- - [Maintaining App-V 5.1](maintaining-app-v-51.md)
- - [Administering App-V 5.1 by Using PowerShell](administering-app-v-51-by-using-powershell.md)
-- [Troubleshooting App-V 5.1](troubleshooting-app-v-51.md)
-- [Technical Reference for App-V 5.1](technical-reference-for-app-v-51.md)
- - [Performance Guidance for Application Virtualization 5.1](performance-guidance-for-application-virtualization-51.md)
- - [Application Publishing and Client Interaction](application-publishing-and-client-interaction51.md)
- - [Viewing App-V Server Publishing Metadata](viewing-app-v-server-publishing-metadata51.md)
- - [Running a Locally Installed Application Inside a Virtual Environment with Virtualized Applications](running-a-locally-installed-application-inside-a-virtual-environment-with-virtualized-applications51.md)
-
-#
-
-- Add or vote on suggestions on the ["Microsoft Application Virtualization" forum on UserVoice.com](http://appv.uservoice.com/forums/280448-microsoft-application-virtualization).
-- For App-V issues, use the [App-V TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopappv).
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/migrating-from-a-previous-version-app-v-50.md b/mdop/appv-v5/migrating-from-a-previous-version-app-v-50.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c3d4ae514c..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/migrating-from-a-previous-version-app-v-50.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,199 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Migrating from a Previous Version
-description: Migrating from a Previous Version
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: a13cd353-b22a-48f7-af1e-5d54ede2a7e5
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Migrating from a Previous Version
-
-
-With App-V 5.0 you can migrate your existing App-V 4.6 infrastructure to the more flexible, integrated, and easier to manage App-V 5.0 infrastructure.
-
-Consider the following sections when you plan your migration strategy:
-
-**Note**
-For more information about the differences between App-V 4.6 and App-V 5.0, see the **Differences between App-V 4.6 and App-V 5.0 section** of [About App-V 5.0](about-app-v-50.md).
-
-
-
-## Converting packages created using a prior version of App-V
-
-
-Use the package converter utility to upgrade virtual application packages created using previous versions of App-V. The package converter uses PowerShell to convert packages and can help automate the process if you have many packages that require conversion.
-
-**Important**
-After you convert an existing package you should test the package prior to deploying the package to ensure the conversion process was successful.
-
-
-
-**What to know before you convert existing packages**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Issue
-
Workaround
-
-
-
-
-
Package scripts are not converted.
-
Test the converted package. If necessary convert the script.
-
-
-
Package registry setting overrides are not converted.
-
Test the converted package. If necessary, re-add registry overrides.
-
-
-
Virtual packages using DSC are not linked after conversion.
Environment variable conflicts are detected during conversion.
-
Resolve any conflicts in the associated .osd file.
-
-
-
Hard-coded paths are detected during conversion.
-
Hard-coded paths are difficult to convert correctly. The package converter will detect and return packages with files that contain hard-coded paths. View the file with the hard-coded path, and determine whether the package requires the file. If so, it is recommended to re-sequence the package.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-When converting a package check for failing files or shortcuts. Locate the item in App-V 4.6 package. It could possibly be hard-coded path. Convert the path.
-
-**Note**
-It is recommended that you use the App-V 5.0 sequencer for converting critical applications or applications that need to take advantage of features. See, [How to Sequence a New Application with App-V 5.0](how-to-sequence-a-new-application-with-app-v-50-beta-gb18030.md).
-
-If a converted package does not open after you convert it, it is also recommended that you re-sequence the application using the App-V 5.0 sequencer.
-
-
-
-[How to Convert a Package Created in a Previous Version of App-V](how-to-convert-a-package-created-in-a-previous-version-of-app-v.md)
-
-## Migrating Clients
-
-
-The following table displays the recommended method for upgrading clients.
-
-
-
-
-
-**Important**
-You must be running App-V 4.6 SP3 to use coexistence mode. Additionally, when you sequence a package, you must configure the Managing Authority setting, which is in the **User Configuration** is located in the **User Configuration** section.
-
-
-
-## Migrating the App-V 5.0 Server Full Infrastructure
-
-
-There is no direct method to upgrade to a full App-V 5.0 infrastructure. Use the information in the following section for information about upgrading the App-V server.
-
-
See the Converting packages created using a prior version of App-V section of this article.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Additional Migration tasks
-
-
-You can also perform additional migration tasks such as reconfiguring end points as well as opening a package created using a prior version on a computer running the App-V 5.0 client. The following links provide more information about performing these tasks.
-
-[How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to a Converted App-V 5.0 Package for All Users on a Specific Computer](how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-a-converted-app-v-50-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md)
-
-[How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to App-V 5.0 for a Specific User](how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-app-v-50-for-a-specific-user.md)
-
-[How to Revert Extension Points from an App-V 5.0 Package to an App-V 4.6 Package For All Users on a Specific Computer](how-to-revert-extension-points-from-an-app-v-50-package-to-an-app-v-46-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md)
-
-[How to Revert Extension Points From an App-V 5.0 Package to an App-V 4.6 Package for a Specific User](how-to-revert-extension-points-from-an-app-v-50-package-to-an-app-v-46-package-for-a-specific-user.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Other resources for performing App-V migration tasks
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-[A simplified Microsoft App-V 5.1 Management Server upgrade procedure](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=786330)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/migrating-to-app-v-51-from-a-previous-version.md b/mdop/appv-v5/migrating-to-app-v-51-from-a-previous-version.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 3692e67c10..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/migrating-to-app-v-51-from-a-previous-version.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,335 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Migrating to App-V 5.1 from a Previous Version
-description: Migrating to App-V 5.1 from a Previous Version
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: e7ee0edc-7544-4c0a-aaca-d922a33bc1bb
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Migrating to App-V 5.1 from a Previous Version
-
-
-With Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1, you can migrate your existing App-V 4.6 or App-V 5.0 infrastructure to the more flexible, integrated, and easier to manage App-V 5.1 infrastructure.
-However, you cannot migrate directly from App-V 4.x to App-V 5.1, you must migrate to App-V 5.0 first. For more information on migrating from App-V 4.x to App-V 5.0, see [Migrating from a Previous Version](migrating-from-a-previous-version-app-v-50.md)
-
-**Note**
-App-V 5.1 packages are exactly the same as App-V 5.0 packages. There has been no change in the package format between the versions and therefore, there is no need to convert App-V 5.0 packages to App-V 5.1 packages.
-
-For more information about the differences between App-V 4.6 and App-V 5.1, see the **Differences between App-V 4.6 and App-V 5.0 section** of [About App-V 5.0](about-app-v-50.md).
-
-
-
-## Improvements to the App-V 5.1 Package Converter
-
-
-You can now use the package converter to convert App-V 4.6 packages that contain scripts, and registry information and scripts from source .osd files are now included in package converter output.
-
-You can also use the `–OSDsToIncludeInPackage` parameter with the `ConvertFrom-AppvLegacyPackage` cmdlet to specify which .osd files’ information is converted and placed within the new package.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
New in App-V 5.1
-
Prior to App-V 5.1
-
-
-
-
-
New .xml files are created corresponding to the .osd files associated with a package; these files include the following information:
-
-
environment variables
-
shortcuts
-
file type associations
-
registry information
-
scripts
-
-
You can now choose to add information from a subset of the .osd files in the source directory to the package using the -OSDsToIncludeInPackage parameter.
-
Registry information and scripts included in .osd files associated with a package were not included in package converter output.
-
The package converter would populate the new package with information from all of the .osd files in the source directory.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Example conversion statement
-
-To understand the new process, review the following example `ConvertFrom-AppvLegacyPackage` package converter statement.
-
-**If the source directory (\\\\OldPkgStore\\ContosoApp) includes the following:**
-
-- ContosoApp.sft
-
-- ContosoApp.msi
-
-- ContosoApp.sprj
-
-- ContosoApp\_manifest.xml
-
-- X.osd
-
-- Y.osd
-
-- Z.osd
-
-**And you run this command:**
-
-``` syntax
-ConvertFrom-AppvLegacyPackage –SourcePath \\OldPkgStore\ContosoApp\
--DestinationPath \\NewPkgStore\ContosoApp\
--OSDsToIncludeInPackage X.osd,Y.osd
-```
-
-**The following is created in the destination directory (\\\\NewPkgStore\\ContosoApp):**
-
-- ContosoApp.appv
-
-- ContosoApp.msi
-
-- ContosoApp\_DeploymentConfig.xml
-
-- ContosoApp\_UserConfig.xml
-
-- X\_Config.xml
-
-- Y\_Config.xml
-
-- Z\_Config.xml
-
-**In the above example:**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
These Source directory files…
-
…are converted to these Destination directory files…
-
…and will contain these items
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
-
X.osd
-
Y.osd
-
Z.osd
-
-
-
X_Config.xml
-
Y_Config.xml
-
Z_Config.xml
-
-
-
Environment variables
-
Shortcuts
-
File type associations
-
Registry information
-
Scripts
-
-
Each .osd file is converted to a separate, corresponding .xml file that contains the items listed here in App-V 5.1 deployment configuration format. These items can then be copied from these .xml files and placed in the deployment configuration or user configuration files as desired.
-
In this example, there are three .xml files, corresponding with the three .osd files in the source directory. Each .xml file contains the environment variables, shortcuts, file type associations, registry information, and scripts in its corresponding .osd file.
-
-
-
-
X.osd
-
Y.osd
-
-
-
ContosoApp.appv
-
ContosoApp_DeploymentConfig.xml
-
ContosoApp_UserConfig.xml
-
-
-
Environment variables
-
Shortcuts
-
File type associations
-
-
The information from the .osd files specified in the -OSDsToIncludeInPackage parameter are converted and placed inside the package. The converter then populates the deployment configuration file and the user configuration file with the contents of the package, just as App-V Sequencer does when sequencing a new package.
-
In this example, environment variables, shortcuts, and file type associations included in X.osd and Y.osd were converted and placed in the App-V package, and some of this information was also included in the deployment configuration and user configuration files. X.osd and Y.osd were used because they were included as arguments to the -OSDsToIncludeInPackage parameter. No information from Z.osd was included in the package, because it was not included as one of these arguments.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Converting packages created using a prior version of App-V
-
-
-Use the package converter utility to upgrade virtual application packages created using versions of App-V prior to App-V 5.0. The package converter uses PowerShell to convert packages and can help automate the process if you have many packages that require conversion.
-
-**Important**
-After you convert an existing package you should test the package prior to deploying the package to ensure the conversion process was successful.
-
-
-
-**What to know before you convert existing packages**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Issue
-
Workaround
-
-
-
-
-
Virtual packages using DSC are not linked after conversion.
Environment variable conflicts are detected during conversion.
-
Resolve any conflicts in the associated .osd file.
-
-
-
Hard-coded paths are detected during conversion.
-
Hard-coded paths are difficult to convert correctly. The package converter will detect and return packages with files that contain hard-coded paths. View the file with the hard-coded path, and determine whether the package requires the file. If so, it is recommended to re-sequence the package.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-When converting a package check for failing files or shortcuts. Locate the item in App-V 4.6 package. It could possibly be a hard-coded path. Convert the path.
-
-**Note**
-It is recommended that you use the App-V 5.1 sequencer for converting critical applications or applications that need to take advantage of features. See, [How to Sequence a New Application with App-V 5.1](how-to-sequence-a-new-application-with-app-v-51-beta-gb18030.md).
-
-If a converted package does not open after you convert it, it is also recommended that you re-sequence the application using the App-V 5.1 sequencer.
-
-
-
-[How to Convert a Package Created in a Previous Version of App-V](how-to-convert-a-package-created-in-a-previous-version-of-app-v51.md)
-
-## Migrating Clients
-
-
-The following table displays the recommended method for upgrading clients.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
More Information
-
-
-
-
-
Upgrade your environment to the latest version of App-V 4.6
-
-
-
-**Important**
-You must be running the latest version of App-V 4.6 to use coexistence mode. Additionally, when you sequence a package, you must configure the Managing Authority setting, which is in the **User Configuration** is located in the **User Configuration** section.
-
-
-
-## Migrating the App-V 5.1 Server Full Infrastructure
-
-
-There is no direct method to upgrade to a full App-V 5.1 infrastructure. Use the information in the following section for information about upgrading the App-V server.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
More Information
-
-
-
-
-
Upgrade your environment to the latest version of App-V 4.6.
See the Converting packages created using a prior version of App-V section of this article.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Additional Migration tasks
-
-
-You can also perform additional migration tasks such as reconfiguring end points as well as opening a package created using a prior version on a computer running the App-V 5.1 client. The following links provide more information about performing these tasks.
-
-[How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to a Converted App-V 5.1 Package for All Users on a Specific Computer](how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-a-converted-app-v-51-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md)
-
-[How to Migrate Extension Points From an App-V 4.6 Package to App-V 5.1 for a Specific User](how-to-migrate-extension-points-from-an-app-v-46-package-to-app-v-51-for-a-specific-user.md)
-
-[How to Revert Extension Points from an App-V 5.1 Package to an App-V 4.6 Package For All Users on a Specific Computer](how-to-revert-extension-points-from-an-app-v-51-package-to-an-app-v-46-package-for-all-users-on-a-specific-computer.md)
-
-[How to Revert Extension Points From an App-V 5.1 Package to an App-V 4.6 Package for a Specific User](how-to-revert-extension-points-from-an-app-v-51-package-to-an-app-v-46-package-for-a-specific-user.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Other resources for performing App-V migration tasks
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-[A simplified Microsoft App-V 5.1 Management Server upgrade procedure](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=786330)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/operations-for-app-v-50.md b/mdop/appv-v5/operations-for-app-v-50.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 3df456161b..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/operations-for-app-v-50.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,78 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Operations for App-V 5.0
-description: Operations for App-V 5.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 4d0d41a6-f7da-4a2f-8ac9-2d67cc18ea93
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Operations for App-V 5.0
-
-
-This section of the App-V 5.0 Administrator’s Guide includes information about the various types of App-V 5.0 administration and operating tasks that are typically performed by an administrator. This section also includes step-by-step procedures to help you successfully perform those tasks.
-
-## Operations Information
-
-
-- [Creating and Managing App-V 5.0 Virtualized Applications](creating-and-managing-app-v-50-virtualized-applications.md)
-
- Describes how to create, modify, and convert virtualized packages.
-
-- [Administering App-V 5.0 Virtual Applications by Using the Management Console](administering-app-v-50-virtual-applications-by-using-the-management-console.md)
-
- Describes how to use the App-V Management console to perform tasks such as sequencing an application, changing a package, using a project template, and using a package accelerator.
-
-- [Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups.md)
-
- Describes how connection groups enable virtualized applications to communicate with each other in the virtual environment; explains how to create, publish, and delete them; and describes how connection groups can help you better manage your virtualized applications.
-
-- [Deploying App-V 5.0 Packages by Using Electronic Software Distribution (ESD)](deploying-app-v-50-packages-by-using-electronic-software-distribution--esd-.md)
-
- Describes how to deploy App-V packages by using an ESD.
-
-- [Using the App-V 5.0 Client Management Console](using-the-app-v-50-client-management-console.md)
-
- Describes how perform client configuration tasks using the client management console.
-
-- [Migrating from a Previous Version](migrating-from-a-previous-version-app-v-50.md)
-
- Provides instructions for migrating to App-V 5.0 from a previous version.
-
-- [Administering App-V by Using PowerShell](administering-app-v-by-using-powershell.md)
-
- Describes the set of Windows PowerShell cmdlets available for administrators performing various App-V 5.0 server tasks.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Other Resources for App-V Operations
-
-
-- [Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0 Administrator's Guide](microsoft-application-virtualization-50-administrators-guide.md)
-
-- [Getting Started with App-V 5.0](getting-started-with-app-v-50--rtm.md)
-
-- [Planning for App-V 5.0](planning-for-app-v-50-rc.md)
-
-- [Deploying App-V 5.0](deploying-app-v-50.md)
-
-- [Troubleshooting App-V 5.0](troubleshooting-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/operations-for-app-v-51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/operations-for-app-v-51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8a97413907..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/operations-for-app-v-51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,80 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Operations for App-V 5.1
-description: Operations for App-V 5.1
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: dd13b5c9-2d1e-442f-91e4-43dec7f17ea2
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Operations for App-V 5.1
-
-
-This section of the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 Administrator’s Guide includes information about the various types of App-V 5.1 administration and operating tasks that are typically performed by an administrator. This section also includes step-by-step procedures to help you successfully perform those tasks.
-
-## Operations Information
-
-
-- [Creating and Managing App-V 5.1 Virtualized Applications](creating-and-managing-app-v-51-virtualized-applications.md)
-
- Describes how to create, modify, and convert virtualized packages.
-
-- [Administering App-V 5.1 Virtual Applications by Using the Management Console](administering-app-v-51-virtual-applications-by-using-the-management-console.md)
-
- Describes how to use the App-V Management console to perform tasks such as sequencing an application, changing a package, using a project template, and using a package accelerator.
-
-- [Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups51.md)
-
- Describes how connection groups enable virtualized applications to communicate with each other in the virtual environment; explains how to create, publish, and delete them; and describes how connection groups can help you better manage your virtualized applications.
-
-- [Deploying App-V 5.1 Packages by Using Electronic Software Distribution (ESD)](deploying-app-v-51-packages-by-using-electronic-software-distribution--esd-.md)
-
- Describes how to deploy App-V packages by using an ESD.
-
-- [Using the App-V 5.1 Client Management Console](using-the-app-v-51-client-management-console.md)
-
- Describes how perform client configuration tasks using the client management console.
-
-- [Migrating to App-V 5.1 from a Previous Version](migrating-to-app-v-51-from-a-previous-version.md)
-
- Provides instructions for migrating to App-V 5.1 from a previous version.
-
-- [Administering App-V 5.1 by Using PowerShell](administering-app-v-51-by-using-powershell.md)
-
- Describes the set of Windows PowerShell cmdlets available for administrators performing various App-V 5.1 server tasks.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Other Resources for App-V Operations
-
-
-- [Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.1 Administrator's Guide](microsoft-application-virtualization-51-administrators-guide.md)
-
-- [Getting Started with App-V 5.1](getting-started-with-app-v-51.md)
-
-- [Planning for App-V 5.1](planning-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-- [Deploying App-V 5.1](deploying-app-v-51.md)
-
-- [Troubleshooting App-V 5.1](troubleshooting-app-v-51.md)
-
-- [Technical Reference for App-V 5.1](technical-reference-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/performance-guidance-for-application-virtualization-50.md b/mdop/appv-v5/performance-guidance-for-application-virtualization-50.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d8aa6ae42a..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/performance-guidance-for-application-virtualization-50.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,761 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Performance Guidance for Application Virtualization 5.0
-description: Performance Guidance for Application Virtualization 5.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 6b3a3255-b957-4b9b-8bfc-a93fe8438a81
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Performance Guidance for Application Virtualization 5.0
-
-
-Learn how to configure App-V 5.0 for optimal performance, optimize virtual app packages, and provide a better user experience with RDS and VDI.
-
-Implementing multiple methods can help you improve the end-user experience. However, your environment may not support all methods.
-
-You should read and understand the following information before reading this document.
-
-- [Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0 Administrator's Guide](microsoft-application-virtualization-50-administrators-guide.md)
-
-- [App-V 5 SP2 Application Publishing and Client Interaction](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=395206)
-
-- [Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0 Sequencing Guide](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=269953)
-
-**Note**
-Some terms used in this document may have different meanings depending on external source and context. For more information about terms used in this document followed by an asterisk **\\*** review the [Application Virtualization Performance Guidance Terminology](#bkmk-terms1) section of this document.
-
-
-
-Finally, this document will provide you with the information to configure the computer running App-V 5.0 client and the environment for optimal performance. Optimize your virtual application packages for performance using the sequencer, and to understand how to use User Experience Virtualization (UE-V) or other user environment management technologies to provide the optimal user experience with App-V 5.0 in both Remote Desktop Services (RDS) and non-persistent virtual desktop infrastructure (VDI).
-
-To help determine what information is relevant to your environment you should review each section’s brief overview and applicability checklist.
-
-## App-V 5.0 in stateful\* non-persistent deployments
-
-
-This section provides information about an approach that helps ensure a user will have access to all virtual applications within seconds after logging in. This is achieved by uniquely addressing the often long-running App-V 5.0 publishing refresh. As you will discover the basis of the approach, the fastest publishing refresh, is one that doesn’t have to actually do anything. A number of conditions must be met and steps followed to provide the optimal user experience.
-
-Use the information in the following section for more information:
-
-[Usage Scenarios](#bkmk-us) - As you review the two scenarios, keep in mind that these are the approach extremes. Based on your usage requirements, you may choose to apply these steps to a subset of users and/or virtual applications packages.
-
-- Optimized for Performance – To provide the optimal experience, you can expect the base image to include some of the App-V virtual application package. This and other requirements are discussed.
-
-- Optimized for Storage – If you are concerned with the storage impact, following this scenario will help address those concerns.
-
-[Preparing your Environment](#bkmk-pe)
-
-- Steps to Prepare the Base Image – Whether in a non-persistent VDI or RDSH environment, only a few steps must be completed in the base image to enable this approach.
-
-- Use UE-V 2.0 as the User Profile Management (UPM) solution for the App-V approach – the cornerstone of this approach is the ability of a UEM solution to persist the contents of just a few registry and file locations. These locations constitute the user integrations\*. Be sure to review the specific requirements for the UPM solution.
-
-[User Experience Walk-through](#bkmk-uewt)
-
-- Walk-through – This is a step-by-step walk-through of the App-V and UE-V operations and the expectations users should have.
-
-- Outcome – This describes the expected results.
-
-[Impact to Package Lifecycle](#bkmk-plc)
-
-[Enhancing the VDI Experience through Performance Optimization/Tuning](#bkmk-evdi)
-
-### Applicability Checklist
-
-Deployment Environment
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Non-Persistent VDI or RDSH.
-
-
-
-
User Experience Virtualization (UE-V), other UPM solutions or User Profile Disks (UPD).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Expected Configuration
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
User Experience Virtualization (UE-V) with the App-V user state template enabled or User Profile Management (UPM) software. Non-UE-V UPM software must be capable of triggering on Login or Process/Application Start and Logoff.
-
-
-
-
App-V Shared Content Store (SCS) is configured or can be configured.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-IT Administration
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Admin may need to update the VM base image regularly to ensure optimal performance or Admin may need to manage multiple images for different user groups.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Usage Scenario
-
-As you review the two scenarios, keep in mind that these approach the extremes. Based on your usage requirements, you may choose to apply these steps to a subset of users, virtual application packages, or both.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Optimized for Performance
-
Optimized for Storage
-
-
-
-
-
To provide the most optimal user experience, this approach leverages the capabilities of a UPM solution and requires additional image preparation and can incur some additional image management overhead.
-
The following describes many performance improvements in stateful non-persistent deployments. For more information, see the Sequencing Steps to Optimize Packages for Publishing Performance and reference to App-V 5.0 Sequencing Guide in the See Also section of this document.
-
The general expectations of the previous scenario still apply here. However, keep in mind that VM images are typically stored in very costly arrays; a slight alteration has been made to the approach. Do not pre-configure user-targeted virtual application packages in the base image.
-
The impact of this alteration is detailed in the User Experience Walkthrough section of this document.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Preparing your Environment
-
-The following table displays the required steps to prepare the base image and the UE-V or another UPM solution for the approach.
-
-**Prepare the Base Image**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Optimized for Performance
-
Optimized for Storage
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Install the Hotfix Package 4 for Application Virtualization 5.0 SP2 client version of the client.
-
Install UE-V and download the App-V Settings Template from the UE-V template Gallery, see the following steps.
Configure Preserve User Integrations on Login Registry DWORD.
-
Pre-configure all global-targeted packages for example, Add-AppvClientPackage.
-
Pre-configure all global-targeted connection groups for example, Add-AppvClientConnectionGroup.
-
Pre-publish all global-targeted packages.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Configurations** - For critical App-V Client configurations and for a little more context and how-to, review the following information:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Configuration Setting
-
What does this do?
-
How should I use it?
-
-
-
-
-
Shared Content Store (SCS) Mode
-
-
Configurable in PowerShell using Set- AppvClientConfiguration –SharedContentStoreMode, or
-
During installation of the App-V 5.0 client.
-
-
When running the shared content store only publishing data is maintained on hard disk; other virtual application assets are maintained in memory (RAM).
-
This helps to conserve local storage and minimize disk I/O per second (IOPS).
-
This is recommended when low-latency connections are available between the App-V Client endpoint and the SCS content server, SAN.
-
-
-
PreserveUserIntegrationsOnLogin
-
-
Configure in the Registry under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE \ Software \ Microsoft \ AppV \ Client \ Integration.
-
Create the DWORD value PreserveUserIntegrationsOnLogin with a value of 1.
-
Restart the App-V client service or restart the computer running the App-V Client.
-
-
If you have not pre-configured (Add-AppvClientPackage) a specific package and this setting is not configured, the App-V Client will de-integrate* the persisted user integrations, then re-integrate*.
-
For every package that meets the above conditions, effectively twice the work will be done during publishing/refresh.
-
If you don’t plan to pre-configure every available user package in the base image, use this setting.
-
-
-
MaxConcurrentPublishingRefresh
-
-
Configure in the Registry under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE <strong>Software \ Microsoft \ AppV <strong>Client \ Publishing.
-
Create the DWORD value MaxConcurrentPublishingrefresh with the desired maximum number of concurrent publishing refreshes.
-
The App-V client service and computer do not need to be restarted.
-
-
This setting determines the number of users that can perform a publishing refresh/sync at the same time. The default setting is no limit.
-
Limiting the number of concurrent publishing refreshes prevents excessive CPU usage that could impact computer performance. This limit is recommended in an RDS environment, where multiple users can log in to the same computer at the same time and perform a publishing refresh sync.
-
If the concurrent publishing refresh threshold is reached, the time required to publish new applications and make them available to end users after they log in could take an indeterminate amount of time.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Configure UE-V solution for App-V Approach
-
-We recommend using Microsoft User Experience Virtualization (UE-V) to capture and centralize application settings and Windows operating system settings for a specific user. These settings are then applied to the different computers that are accessed by the user, including desktop computers, laptop computers, and virtual desktop infrastructure (VDI) sessions. UE-V is optimized for RDS and VDI scenarios.
-
-For more information see [Getting Started With User Experience Virtualization 2.0](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn458936.aspx)
-
-In essence all that is required is to install the UE-V client and download the following Microsoft authored App-V settings template from the [Microsoft User Experience Virtualization (UE-V) template gallery](https://gallery.technet.microsoft.com/Authored-UE-V-Settings-bb442a33). Register the template. For more information around UE-V templates see [The UE-V specific resource for acquiring and registering the template](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn458936.aspx).
-
-**Note**
-Without performing an additional configuration step, the Microsoft User Environment Virtualization (UE-V) will not be able to synchronize the Start menu shortcuts (.lnk files) on the target computer. The .lnk file type is excluded by default.
-
-UE-V will only support removing the .lnk file type from the exclusion list in the RDS and VDI scenarios, where every user’s device will have the same set of applications installed to the same location and every .lnk file is valid for all the users’ devices. For example, UE-V would not currently support the following 2 scenarios, because the net result will be that the shortcut will be valid on one but not all devices.
-
-- If a user has an application installed on one device with .lnk files enabled and the same native application installed on another device to a different installation root with .lnk files enabled.
-
-- If a user has an application installed on one device but not another with .lnk files enabled.
-
-
-
-**Important**
-This topic describes how to change the Windows registry by using Registry Editor. If you change the Windows registry incorrectly, you can cause serious problems that might require you to reinstall Windows. You should make a backup copy of the registry files (System.dat and User.dat) before you change the registry. Microsoft cannot guarantee that the problems that might occur when you change the registry can be resolved. Change the registry at your own risk.
-
-
-
-Using the Microsoft Registry Editor (regedit.exe), navigate to **HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE** \\ **Software** \\ **Microsoft** \\ **UEV** \\ **Agent** \\ **Configuration** \\ **ExcludedFileTypes** and remove **.lnk** from the excluded file types.
-
-**Configure other User Profile Management (UPM) solution for App-V Approach**
-
-The expectation in a stateful environment is that a UPM solution is implemented and can support persistence of user data across sessions and between logins.
-
-The requirements for the UPM solution are as follows.
-
-To enable an optimized login experience, for example the App-V 5.0 approach for the user, the solution must be capable of:
-
-- Persisting the below user integrations as part of the user profile/persona.
-
-- Triggering a user profile sync on login (or application start), which can guarantee that all user integrations are applied before publishing/refresh begin, or,
-
-- Attaching and detaching a user profile disk (UPD) or similar technology that contains the user integrations.
-
-- Capturing changes to the locations, which constitute the user integrations, prior to session logoff.
-
-With App-V 5.0 when you add a publishing server (**Add-AppvPublishingServer**) you can configure synchronization, for example refresh during log on and/or after a specified refresh interval. In both cases a scheduled task is created.
-
-In previous versions of App-V 5.0, both scheduled tasks were configured using a VBScript that would initiate the user and global refresh. With Hotfix Package 4 for Application Virtualization 5.0 SP2 the user refresh on log on is initiated by **SyncAppvPublishingServer.exe**. This change was introduced to provide UPM solutions a trigger process. This process will delay the publish /refresh to allow the UPM solution to apply the user integrations. It will exit once the publishing/refresh is complete.
-
-**User Integrations**
-
-Registry – HKEY\_CURRENT\_USER
-
-- Path - Software\\Classes
-
- Exclude: Local Settings, ActivatableClasses, AppX\*
-
-- Path - Software\\Microsoft\\AppV
-
-- Path- Software\\Microsoft\\Windows\\CurrentVersion\\App Paths
-
-**File Locations**
-
-- Root – “Environment Variable” APPDATA
-
- Path – Microsoft\\AppV\\Client\\Catalog
-
-- Root – “Environment Variable” APPDATA
-
- Path – Microsoft\\AppV\\Client\\Integration
-
-- Root – “Environment Variable” APPDATA
-
- Path - Microsoft\\Windows\\Start Menu\\Programs
-
-- (To persist all desktop shortcuts, virtual and non-virtual)
-
- Root - “KnownFolder” {B4BFCC3A-DB2C-424C-B029-7FE99A87C641}FileMask - \*.lnk
-
-**Microsoft User Experience Virtualization (UE-V)**
-
-Additionally, we recommend using Microsoft User Experience Virtualization (UE-V) to capture and centralize application settings and Windows operating system settings for a specific user. These settings are then applied to the different computers that are accessed by the user, including desktop computers, laptop computers, and virtual desktop infrastructure (VDI) sessions.
-
-For more information see [Getting Started With User Experience Virtualization 1.0](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/jj680015.aspx) and [Sharing Settings Location Templates with the UE-V Template Gallery](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/jj679972.aspx).
-
-### User Experience Walk-through
-
-This following is a step-by-step walk-through of the App-V and UPM operations and the expectations users should expect.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Optimized for Performance
-
Optimized for Storage
-
-
-
-
-
After implementing this approach in the VDI/RDSH environment, on first login,
-
-
(Operation) A user-publishing/refresh is initiated. (Expectation) If this is the first time a user has published virtual applications (e.g. non-persistent), this will take the usual duration of a publishing/refresh.
-
(Operation) After the publishing/refresh, the UPM solution captures the user integrations. (Expectation) Depending on how the UPM solution is configured, this may occur as part of the logoff process. This will incur the same/similar overhead as persisting the user state.
-
-
On subsequent logins:
-
-
(Operation) UPM solution applies the user integrations to the system prior to publishing/refresh.
-
(Expectation) There will be shortcuts present on the desktop, or in the start menu, which work immediately. When the publishing/refresh completes (i.e., package entitlements change), some may go away.
-
(Operation) Publishing/refresh will process un-publish and publish operations for changes in user package entitlements. (Expectation) If there are no entitlement changes, publishing1 will complete in seconds. Otherwise, the publishing/refresh will increase relative to the number and complexity* of virtual applications
-
(Operation) UPM solution will capture user integrations again at logoff. (Expectation) Same as previous.
-
-
¹ The publishing operation (Publish-AppVClientPackage) adds entries to the user catalog, maps entitlement to the user, identifies the local store, and finishes by completing any integration steps.
-
After implementing this approach in the VDI/RDSH environment, on first login,
-
-
(Operation) A user-publishing/refresh is initiated. (Expectation)
-
-
If this is the first time a user has published virtual applications (e.g., non-persistent), this will take the usual duration of a publishing/refresh.
-
First and subsequent logins will be impacted by pre-configuring of packages (add/refresh).
-
-
-
(Operation) After the publishing/refresh, the UPM solution captures the user integrations. (Expectation) Depending on how the UPM solution is configured, this may occur as part of the logoff process. This will incur the same/similar overhead as persisting the user state
-
-
On subsequent logins:
-
-
(Operation) UPM solution applies the user integrations to the system prior to publishing/refresh.
-
(Operation) Add/refresh must pre-configure all user targeted applications. (Expectation)
-
-
This may increase the time to application availability significantly (on the order of 10’s of seconds).
-
This will increase the publishing refresh time relative to the number and complexity* of virtual applications.
-
-
-
(Operation) Publishing/refresh will process un-publish and publish operations for changes to user package entitlements.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Outcome
-
Outcome
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Because the user integrations are entirely preserved, there will be no work for example, integration for the publishing/refresh to complete. All virtual applications will be available within seconds of login.
-
The publishing/refresh will process changes to the users entitled virtual applications which impacts the experience.
-
-
Because the add/refresh must re-configure all the virtual applications to the VM, the publishing refresh time on every login will be extended.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Impact to Package Life Cycle
-
-Upgrading a package is a crucial aspect of the package lifecycle. To help guarantee users have access to the appropriate upgraded (published) or downgraded (un-published) virtual application packages, it is recommended you update the base image to reflect these changes. To understand why review the following section:
-
-App-V 5.0 SP2 introduced the concept of pending states. In the past,
-
-- If an administrator changed entitlements or created a new version of a package (upgraded) and during a publishing/refresh that package was in-use, the un-publish or publish operation, respectively, would fail.
-
-- Now, if a package is in-use the operation will be pended. The un-publish and publish-pend operations will be processed on service restart or if another publish or un-publish command is issued. In the latter case, if the virtual application is in-use otherwise, the virtual application will remain in a pending state. For globally published packages, a restart (or service restart) often needed.
-
-In a non-persistent environment, it is unlikely these pended operations will be processed. The pended operations, for example tasks are captured under **HKEY\_CURRENT\_USER** \\ **Software** \\ **Microsoft** \\ **AppV** \\ **Client** \\ **PendingTasks**. Although this location is persisted by the UPM solution, if it is not applied to the environment prior to log on, it will not be processed.
-
-### Enhancing the VDI Experience through Performance Optimization Tuning
-
-The following section contains lists with information about Microsoft documentation and downloads that may be useful when optimizing your environment for performance.
-
-**.NET NGEN Blog and Script (Highly Recommended)**
-
-About NGEN technology
-
-- [How to speed up NGEN optimization](https://blogs.msdn.com/b/dotnet/archive/2013/08/06/wondering-why-mscorsvw-exe-has-high-cpu-usage-you-can-speed-it-up.aspx)
-
-- [Script](https://aka.ms/DrainNGenQueue)
-
-**Windows Server and Server Roles**
-
-Server Performance Tuning Guidelines for
-
-- [Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn529133.aspx)
-
-- [Microsoft Windows Server 2012](https://download.microsoft.com/download/0/0/B/00BE76AF-D340-4759-8ECD-C80BC53B6231/performance-tuning-guidelines-windows-server-2012.docx)
-
-- [Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2](https://download.microsoft.com/download/6/B/2/6B2EBD3A-302E-4553-AC00-9885BBF31E21/Perf-tun-srv-R2.docx)
-
-**Server Roles**
-
-- [Remote Desktop Virtualization Host](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn567643.aspx)
-
-- [Remote Desktop Session Host](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn567648.aspx)
-
-- [IIS Relevance: App-V Management, Publishing, Reporting Web Services](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn567678.aspx)
-
-- [File Server (SMB) Relevance: If used for App-V Content Storage and Delivery in SCS Mode](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/jj134210.aspx)
-
-**Windows Client (Guest OS) Performance Tuning Guidance**
-
-- [Microsoft Windows 7](https://download.microsoft.com/download/E/5/7/E5783D68-160B-4366-8387-114FC3E45EB4/Performance Tuning Guidelines for Windows 7 Desktop Virtualization v1.9.docx)
-
-- [Optimization Script: (Provided by Microsoft Support)](http://blogs.technet.com/b/jeff_stokes/archive/2012/10/15/the-microsoft-premier-field-engineer-pfe-view-on-virtual-desktop-vdi-density.aspx)
-
-- [Microsoft Windows 8](https://download.microsoft.com/download/6/0/1/601D7797-A063-4FA7-A2E5-74519B57C2B4/Windows_8_VDI_Image_Client_Tuning_Guide.pdf)
-
-- [Optimization Script: (Provided by Microsoft Support)](http://blogs.technet.com/b/jeff_stokes/archive/2013/04/09/hot-off-the-presses-get-it-now-the-windows-8-vdi-optimization-script-courtesy-of-pfe.aspx)
-
-## Sequencing Steps to Optimize Packages for Publishing Performance
-
-
-App-V 5.0 and App-V 5.0 SP2 provide significant value in their respective releases. Several features facilitate new scenarios or enabled new customer deployment scenarios. These following features can impact the performance of the publishing and launch operations.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Step
-
Consideration
-
Benefits
-
Tradeoffs
-
-
-
-
-
No Feature Block 1 (FB1, also known as Primary FB)
-
No FB1 means the application will launch immediately and stream fault (application requires file, DLL and must pull down over the network) during launch.If there are network limitations, FB1 will:
-
-
Reduce the number of stream faults and network bandwidth used when you launch an application for the first time.
-
Delay launch until the entire FB1 has been streamed.
-
-
Stream faulting decreases the launch time.
-
Virtual application packages with FB1 configured will need to be re-sequenced.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Removing FB1
-
-Removing FB1 does not require the original application installer. After completing the following steps, it is suggested that you revert the computer running the sequencer to a clean snapshot.
-
-**Sequencer UI** - Create a New Virtual Application Package.
-
-1. Complete the sequencing steps up to Customize -> Streaming.
-
-2. At the Streaming step, do not select **Optimize the package for deployment over slow or unreliable network**.
-
-3. If desired, move on to **Target OS**.
-
-**Modify an Existing Virtual Application Package**
-
-1. Complete the sequencing steps up to Streaming.
-
-2. Do not select **Optimize the package for deployment over a slow or unreliable network**.
-
-3. Move to **Create Package**.
-
-**PowerShell** - Update an Existing Virtual Application Package.
-
-1. Open an elevated PowerShell session.
-
-2. Import-module **appvsequencer**.
-
-3. **Update-AppvSequencerPackage** - **AppvPackageFilePath**
-
- "C:\\Packages\\MyPackage.appv" -Installer
-
- "C:\\PackageInstall\\PackageUpgrade.exe empty.exe" -OutputPath
-
- "C:\\UpgradedPackages"
-
- **Note**
- This cmdlet requires an executable (.exe) or batch file (.bat). You must provide an empty (does nothing) executable or batch file.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Step
-
Considerations
-
Benefits
-
Tradeoffs
-
-
-
-
-
No SXS Install at Publish (Pre-Install SxS assemblies)
-
Virtual Application packages do not need to be re-sequenced. SxS Assemblies can remain in the virtual application package.
-
The SxS Assembly dependencies will not install at publishing time.
-
SxS Assembly dependencies must be pre-installed.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Creating a new virtual application package on the sequencer
-
-If, during sequencer monitoring, an SxS Assembly (such as a VC++ Runtime) is installed as part of an application’s installation, SxS Assembly will be automatically detected and included in the package. The administrator will be notified and will have the option to exclude the SxS Assembly.
-
-**Client Side**:
-
-When publishing a virtual application package, the App-V 5.0 SP2 Client will detect if a required SxS dependency is already installed. If the dependency is unavailable on the computer and it is included in the package, a traditional Windows Installer (.**msi**) installation of the SxS assembly will be initiated. As previously documented, simply install the dependency on the computer running the client to ensure that the Windows Installer (.msi) installation will not occur.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Step
-
Considerations
-
Benefits
-
Tradeoffs
-
-
-
-
-
Selectively Employ Dynamic Configuration files
-
The App-V 5.0 client must parse and process these Dynamic Configuration files.
-
Be conscious of size and complexity (script execution, VREG inclusions/exclusions) of the file.
-
Numerous virtual application packages may already have User- or computer–specific dynamic configurations files.
-
Publishing times will improve if these files are used selectively or not at all.
-
Virtual application packages would need to be reconfigured individually or via the App-V server management console to remove associated Dynamic Configuration files.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Disabling a Dynamic Configuration using Powershell
-
-- For already published packages, you can use `Set-AppVClientPackage –Name Myapp –Path c:\Packages\Apps\MyApp.appv` without
-
- **-DynamicDeploymentConfiguration** parameter
-
-- Similarly, when adding new packages using `Add-AppVClientPackage –Path c:\Packages\Apps\MyApp.appv`, do not use the
-
- **-DynamicDeploymentConfiguration** parameter.
-
-For documentation on How to Apply a Dynamic Configuration, see:
-
-- [How to Apply the User Configuration File by Using PowerShell](how-to-apply-the-user-configuration-file-by-using-powershell.md)
-
-- [How to Apply the Deployment Configuration File by Using PowerShell](how-to-apply-the-deployment-configuration-file-by-using-powershell.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Step
-
Considerations
-
Benefits
-
Tradeoffs
-
-
-
-
-
Account for Synchronous Script Execution during Package Lifecycle.
-
If script collateral is embedded in the package, Add (Powershell) may be significantly slower.
-
Running of scripts during virtual application launch (StartVirtualEnvironment, StartProcess) and/or Add+Publish will impact the perceived performance during one or more of these lifecycle operations.
-
Use of Asynchronous (Non-Blocking) Scripts will ensure that the lifecycle operations complete efficiently.
-
This step requires working knowledge of all virtual application packages with embedded script collateral, which have associated dynamic configurations files and which reference and run scripts synchronously.
-
-
-
Remove Extraneous Virtual Fonts from Package.
-
The majority of applications investigated by the App-V product team contained a small number of fonts, typically fewer than 20.
Desired fonts will need to be enabled/installed natively. For instructions, see Install or uninstall fonts.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Determining what virtual fonts exist in the package
-
-- Make a copy of the package.
-
-- Rename Package\_copy.appv to Package\_copy.zip
-
-- Open AppxManifest.xml and locate the following:
-
- <appv:Extension Category="AppV.Fonts">
-
- <appv:Fonts>
-
- <appv:Font Path="\[{Fonts}\]\\private\\CalibriL.ttf" DelayLoad="true"></appv:Font>
-
- **Note**
- If there are fonts marked as **DelayLoad**, those will not impact first launch.
-
-
-
-~~~
-</appv:Fonts>
-~~~
-
-### Excluding virtual fonts from the package
-
-Use the dynamic configuration file that best suits the user scope – deployment configuration for all users on computer, user configuration for specific user or users.
-
-- Disable fonts with the deployment or user configuration.
-
-Fonts
-
--->
-
-<Fonts Enabled="false" />
-
-<!--
-
-## App-V 5.0 Performance Guidance Terminology
-
-
-The following terms are used when describing concepts and actions related to App-V 5.0 performance optimization.
-
-- **Complexity** – Refers to the one or more package characteristics that may impact performance during pre-configure (**Add-AppvClientPackage**) or integration (**Publish-AppvClientPackage**). Some example characteristics are: manifest size, number of virtual fonts, number of files.
-
-- **De-Integrate** – Removes the user integrations
-
-- **Re-Integrate** – Applies the user integrations.
-
-- **Non-Persistent, Pooled** – Creates a computer running a virtual environment each time they log in.
-
-- **Persistent, Personal** – A computer running a virtual environment that remains the same for every login.
-
-- **Stateful** - For this document, implies that user integrations are persisted between sessions and a user environment management technology is used in conjunction with non-persistent RDSH or VDI.
-
-- **Stateless** – Represents a scenario when no user state is persisted between sessions.
-
-- **Trigger** – (or Native Action Triggers). UPM uses these types of triggers to initiate monitoring or synchronization operations.
-
-- **User Experience** - In the context of App-V 5.0, the user experience, quantitatively, is the sum of the following parts:
-
- - From the point that users initiate a log-in to when they are able to manipulate the desktop.
-
- - From the point where the desktop can be interacted with to the point a publishing refresh begins (in PowerShell terms, sync) when using the App-V 5.0 full server infrastructure. In standalone instances, it is when the **Add-AppVClientPackage** and **Publish-AppVClientPackage Powershell** commands are initiated.
-
- - From start to completion of the publishing refresh. In standalone instances, this is the first to last virtual application published.
-
- - From the point where the virtual application is available to launch from a shortcut. Alternatively, it is from the point at which the file type association is registered and will launch a specified virtual application.
-
-- **User Profile Management** – The controlled and structured approach to managing user components associated with the environment. For example, user profiles, preference and policy management, application control and application deployment. You can use scripting or third-party solutions configure the environment as needed.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0 Administrator's Guide](microsoft-application-virtualization-50-administrators-guide.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/performance-guidance-for-application-virtualization-51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/performance-guidance-for-application-virtualization-51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 936a78123f..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/performance-guidance-for-application-virtualization-51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,768 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Performance Guidance for Application Virtualization 5.1
-description: Performance Guidance for Application Virtualization 5.1
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 5f2643c7-5cf7-4a29-adb7-45bf9f5b0364
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Performance Guidance for Application Virtualization 5.1
-
-
-Learn how to configure App-V 5.1 for optimal performance, optimize virtual app packages, and provide a better user experience with RDS and VDI.
-
-Implementing multiple methods can help you improve the end-user experience. However, your environment may not support all methods.
-
-You should read and understand the following information before reading this document.
-
-- [Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.1 Administrator's Guide](microsoft-application-virtualization-51-administrators-guide.md)
-
-- [App-V 5 SP2 Application Publishing and Client Interaction](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=395206)
-
-- [Microsoft Application Virtualization Sequencing Guide](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=269953)
-
-**Note**
-Some terms used in this document may have different meanings depending on external source and context. For more information about terms used in this document followed by an asterisk **\\*** review the [Application Virtualization Performance Guidance Terminology](#bkmk-terms1) section of this document.
-
-
-
-Finally, this document will provide you with the information to configure the computer running App-V 5.1 client and the environment for optimal performance. Optimize your virtual application packages for performance using the sequencer, and to understand how to use User Experience Virtualization (UE-V) or other user environment management technologies to provide the optimal user experience with App-V 5.1 in both Remote Desktop Services (RDS) and non-persistent virtual desktop infrastructure (VDI).
-
-To help determine what information is relevant to your environment you should review each section’s brief overview and applicability checklist.
-
-## App-V 5.1 in stateful\* non-persistent deployments
-
-
-This section provides information about an approach that helps ensure a user will have access to all virtual applications within seconds after logging in. This is achieved by uniquely addressing the often long-running App-V 5.1 publishing refresh. As you will discover the basis of the approach, the fastest publishing refresh, is one that doesn’t have to actually do anything. A number of conditions must be met and steps followed to provide the optimal user experience.
-
-Use the information in the following section for more information:
-
-[Usage Scenarios](#bkmk-us) - As you review the two scenarios, keep in mind that these are the approach extremes. Based on your usage requirements, you may choose to apply these steps to a subset of users and/or virtual applications packages.
-
-- Optimized for Performance – To provide the optimal experience, you can expect the base image to include some of the App-V virtual application package. This and other requirements are discussed.
-
-- Optimized for Storage – If you are concerned with the storage impact, following this scenario will help address those concerns.
-
-[Preparing your Environment](#bkmk-pe)
-
-- Steps to Prepare the Base Image – Whether in a non-persistent VDI or RDSH environment, only a few steps must be completed in the base image to enable this approach.
-
-- Use UE-V 2.1 as the User Profile Management (UPM) solution for the App-V approach – the cornerstone of this approach is the ability of a UEM solution to persist the contents of just a few registry and file locations. These locations constitute the user integrations\*. Be sure to review the specific requirements for the UPM solution.
-
-[User Experience Walk-through](#bkmk-uewt)
-
-- Walk-through – This is a step-by-step walk-through of the App-V and UE-V operations and the expectations users should have.
-
-- Outcome – This describes the expected results.
-
-[Impact to Package Lifecycle](#bkmk-plc)
-
-[Enhancing the VDI Experience through Performance Optimization/Tuning](#bkmk-evdi)
-
-### Applicability Checklist
-
-Deployment Environment
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Non-Persistent VDI or RDSH.
-
-
-
-
User Experience Virtualization (UE-V), other UPM solutions or User Profile Disks (UPD).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Expected Configuration
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
User Experience Virtualization (UE-V) with the App-V user state template enabled or User Profile Management (UPM) software. Non-UE-V UPM software must be capable of triggering on Login or Process/Application Start and Logoff.
-
-
-
-
App-V Shared Content Store (SCS) is configured or can be configured.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-IT Administration
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Admin may need to update the VM base image regularly to ensure optimal performance or Admin may need to manage multiple images for different user groups.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Usage Scenario
-
-As you review the two scenarios, keep in mind that these approach the extremes. Based on your usage requirements, you may choose to apply these steps to a subset of users, virtual application packages, or both.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Optimized for Performance
-
Optimized for Storage
-
-
-
-
-
To provide the most optimal user experience, this approach leverages the capabilities of a UPM solution and requires additional image preparation and can incur some additional image management overhead.
-
The following describes many performance improvements in stateful non-persistent deployments. For more information, see the Sequencing Steps to Optimize Packages for Publishing Performance and reference to App-V Sequencing Guide in the See Also section of this document.
-
The general expectations of the previous scenario still apply here. However, keep in mind that VM images are typically stored in very costly arrays; a slight alteration has been made to the approach. Do not pre-configure user-targeted virtual application packages in the base image.
-
The impact of this alteration is detailed in the User Experience Walkthrough section of this document.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Preparing your Environment
-
-The following table displays the required steps to prepare the base image and the UE-V or another UPM solution for the approach.
-
-**Prepare the Base Image**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Optimized for Performance
-
Optimized for Storage
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Install the App-V 5.1 client version of the client.
-
Install UE-V and download the App-V Settings Template from the UE-V template Gallery, see the following steps.
Configure Preserve User Integrations on Login Registry DWORD.
-
Pre-configure all global-targeted packages for example, Add-AppvClientPackage.
-
Pre-configure all global-targeted connection groups for example, Add-AppvClientConnectionGroup.
-
Pre-publish all global-targeted packages.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Configurations** - For critical App-V Client configurations and for a little more context and how-to, review the following information:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Configuration Setting
-
What does this do?
-
How should I use it?
-
-
-
-
-
Shared Content Store (SCS) Mode
-
-
Configurable in PowerShell using Set- AppvClientConfiguration –SharedContentStoreMode, or
-
During installation of the App-V client.
-
-
When running the shared content store only publishing data is maintained on hard disk; other virtual application assets are maintained in memory (RAM).
-
This helps to conserve local storage and minimize disk I/O per second (IOPS).
-
This is recommended when low-latency connections are available between the App-V Client endpoint and the SCS content server, SAN.
-
-
-
PreserveUserIntegrationsOnLogin
-
-
Configure in the Registry under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE \ Software \ Microsoft \ AppV \ Client \ Integration.
-
Create the DWORD value PreserveUserIntegrationsOnLogin with a value of 1.
-
Restart the App-V client service or restart the computer running the App-V Client.
-
-
If you have not pre-configured (Add-AppvClientPackage) a specific package and this setting is not configured, the App-V Client will de-integrate* the persisted user integrations, then re-integrate*.
-
For every package that meets the above conditions, effectively twice the work will be done during publishing/refresh.
-
If you don’t plan to pre-configure every available user package in the base image, use this setting.
-
-
-
MaxConcurrentPublishingRefresh
-
-
Configure in the Registry under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE <strong>Software \ Microsoft \ AppV <strong>Client \ Publishing.
-
Create the DWORD value MaxConcurrentPublishingrefresh with the desired maximum number of concurrent publishing refreshes.
-
The App-V client service and computer do not need to be restarted.
-
-
This setting determines the number of users that can perform a publishing refresh/sync at the same time. The default setting is no limit.
-
Limiting the number of concurrent publishing refreshes prevents excessive CPU usage that could impact computer performance. This limit is recommended in an RDS environment, where multiple users can log in to the same computer at the same time and perform a publishing refresh sync.
-
If the concurrent publishing refresh threshold is reached, the time required to publish new applications and make them available to end users after they log in could take an indeterminate amount of time.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Configure UE-V solution for App-V Approach
-
-We recommend using Microsoft User Experience Virtualization (UE-V) to capture and centralize application settings and Windows operating system settings for a specific user. These settings are then applied to the different computers that are accessed by the user, including desktop computers, laptop computers, and virtual desktop infrastructure (VDI) sessions. UE-V is optimized for RDS and VDI scenarios.
-
-For more information see [Getting Started With User Experience Virtualization 2.0](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn458926.aspx)
-
-In essence all that is required is to install the UE-V client and download the following Microsoft authored App-V settings template from the [Microsoft User Experience Virtualization (UE-V) template gallery](https://gallery.technet.microsoft.com/Authored-UE-V-Settings-bb442a33). Register the template. For more information around UE-V templates see [The UE-V specific resource for acquiring and registering the template](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn458926.aspx).
-
-**Note**
-Without performing an additional configuration step, the Microsoft User Environment Virtualization (UE-V) will not be able to synchronize the Start menu shortcuts (.lnk files) on the target computer. The .lnk file type is excluded by default.
-
-UE-V will only support removing the .lnk file type from the exclusion list in the RDS and VDI scenarios, where every user’s device will have the same set of applications installed to the same location and every .lnk file is valid for all the users’ devices. For example, UE-V would not currently support the following 2 scenarios, because the net result will be that the shortcut will be valid on one but not all devices.
-
-- If a user has an application installed on one device with .lnk files enabled and the same native application installed on another device to a different installation root with .lnk files enabled.
-
-- If a user has an application installed on one device but not another with .lnk files enabled.
-
-
-
-**Important**
-This topic describes how to change the Windows registry by using Registry Editor. If you change the Windows registry incorrectly, you can cause serious problems that might require you to reinstall Windows. You should make a backup copy of the registry files (System.dat and User.dat) before you change the registry. Microsoft cannot guarantee that the problems that might occur when you change the registry can be resolved. Change the registry at your own risk.
-
-
-
-Using the Microsoft Registry Editor (regedit.exe), navigate to **HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE** \\ **Software** \\ **Microsoft** \\ **UEV** \\ **Agent** \\ **Configuration** \\ **ExcludedFileTypes** and remove **.lnk** from the excluded file types.
-
-**Configure other User Profile Management (UPM) solution for App-V Approach**
-
-The expectation in a stateful environment is that a UPM solution is implemented and can support persistence of user data across sessions and between logins.
-
-The requirements for the UPM solution are as follows.
-
-To enable an optimized login experience, for example the App-V 5.1 approach for the user, the solution must be capable of:
-
-- Persisting the below user integrations as part of the user profile/persona.
-
-- Triggering a user profile sync on login (or application start), which can guarantee that all user integrations are applied before publishing/refresh begin, or,
-
-- Attaching and detaching a user profile disk (UPD) or similar technology that contains the user integrations.
-
- **Note**
- App-V is supported when using UPD only when the entire profile is stored on the user profile disk.
-
- App-V packages are not supported when using UPD with selected folders stored in the user profile disk. The Copy on Write driver does not handle UPD selected folders.
-
-
-
-- Capturing changes to the locations, which constitute the user integrations, prior to session logoff.
-
-With App-V 5.1 when you add a publishing server (**Add-AppvPublishingServer**) you can configure synchronization, for example refresh during log on and/or after a specified refresh interval. In both cases a scheduled task is created.
-
-In previous versions of App-V 5.1, both scheduled tasks were configured using a VBScript that would initiate the user and global refresh. With Hotfix Package 4 for Application Virtualization 5.0 SP2 the user refresh on log on was initiated by **SyncAppvPublishingServer.exe**. This change was introduced to provide UPM solutions a trigger process. This process delays the publish /refresh to allow the UPM solution to apply the user integrations. It will exit once the publishing/refresh is complete.
-
-**User Integrations**
-
-Registry – HKEY\_CURRENT\_USER
-
-- Path - Software\\Classes
-
- Exclude: Local Settings, ActivatableClasses, AppX\*
-
-- Path - Software\\Microsoft\\AppV
-
-- Path- Software\\Microsoft\\Windows\\CurrentVersion\\App Paths
-
-**File Locations**
-
-- Root – “Environment Variable” APPDATA
-
- Path – Microsoft\\AppV\\Client\\Catalog
-
-- Root – “Environment Variable” APPDATA
-
- Path – Microsoft\\AppV\\Client\\Integration
-
-- Root – “Environment Variable” APPDATA
-
- Path - Microsoft\\Windows\\Start Menu\\Programs
-
-- (To persist all desktop shortcuts, virtual and non-virtual)
-
- Root - “KnownFolder” {B4BFCC3A-DB2C-424C-B029-7FE99A87C641}FileMask - \*.lnk
-
-**Microsoft User Experience Virtualization (UE-V)**
-
-Additionally, we recommend using Microsoft User Experience Virtualization (UE-V) to capture and centralize application settings and Windows operating system settings for a specific user. These settings are then applied to the different computers that are accessed by the user, including desktop computers, laptop computers, and virtual desktop infrastructure (VDI) sessions.
-
-For more information see [Getting Started With User Experience Virtualization 1.0](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/jj680015.aspx) and [Sharing Settings Location Templates with the UE-V Template Gallery](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/jj679972.aspx).
-
-### User Experience Walk-through
-
-This following is a step-by-step walk-through of the App-V and UPM operations and the expectations users should expect.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Optimized for Performance
-
Optimized for Storage
-
-
-
-
-
After implementing this approach in the VDI/RDSH environment, on first login,
-
-
(Operation) A user-publishing/refresh is initiated. (Expectation) If this is the first time a user has published virtual applications (e.g. non-persistent), this will take the usual duration of a publishing/refresh.
-
(Operation) After the publishing/refresh, the UPM solution captures the user integrations. (Expectation) Depending on how the UPM solution is configured, this may occur as part of the logoff process. This will incur the same/similar overhead as persisting the user state.
-
-
On subsequent logins:
-
-
(Operation) UPM solution applies the user integrations to the system prior to publishing/refresh.
-
(Expectation) There will be shortcuts present on the desktop, or in the start menu, which work immediately. When the publishing/refresh completes (i.e., package entitlements change), some may go away.
-
(Operation) Publishing/refresh will process un-publish and publish operations for changes in user package entitlements. (Expectation) If there are no entitlement changes, publishing1 will complete in seconds. Otherwise, the publishing/refresh will increase relative to the number and complexity* of virtual applications
-
(Operation) UPM solution will capture user integrations again at logoff. (Expectation) Same as previous.
-
-
¹ The publishing operation (Publish-AppVClientPackage) adds entries to the user catalog, maps entitlement to the user, identifies the local store, and finishes by completing any integration steps.
-
After implementing this approach in the VDI/RDSH environment, on first login,
-
-
(Operation) A user-publishing/refresh is initiated. (Expectation)
-
-
If this is the first time a user has published virtual applications (e.g., non-persistent), this will take the usual duration of a publishing/refresh.
-
First and subsequent logins will be impacted by pre-configuring of packages (add/refresh).
-
-
-
(Operation) After the publishing/refresh, the UPM solution captures the user integrations. (Expectation) Depending on how the UPM solution is configured, this may occur as part of the logoff process. This will incur the same/similar overhead as persisting the user state
-
-
On subsequent logins:
-
-
(Operation) UPM solution applies the user integrations to the system prior to publishing/refresh.
-
(Operation) Add/refresh must pre-configure all user targeted applications. (Expectation)
-
-
This may increase the time to application availability significantly (on the order of 10’s of seconds).
-
This will increase the publishing refresh time relative to the number and complexity* of virtual applications.
-
-
-
(Operation) Publishing/refresh will process un-publish and publish operations for changes to user package entitlements.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Outcome
-
Outcome
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Because the user integrations are entirely preserved, there will be no work for example, integration for the publishing/refresh to complete. All virtual applications will be available within seconds of login.
-
The publishing/refresh will process changes to the users entitled virtual applications which impacts the experience.
-
-
Because the add/refresh must re-configure all the virtual applications to the VM, the publishing refresh time on every login will be extended.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Impact to Package Life Cycle
-
-Upgrading a package is a crucial aspect of the package lifecycle. To help guarantee users have access to the appropriate upgraded (published) or downgraded (un-published) virtual application packages, it is recommended you update the base image to reflect these changes. To understand why review the following section:
-
-App-V 5.0 SP2 introduced the concept of pending states. In the past,
-
-- If an administrator changed entitlements or created a new version of a package (upgraded) and during a publishing/refresh that package was in-use, the un-publish or publish operation, respectively, would fail.
-
-- Now, if a package is in-use the operation will be pended. The un-publish and publish-pend operations will be processed on service restart or if another publish or un-publish command is issued. In the latter case, if the virtual application is in-use otherwise, the virtual application will remain in a pending state. For globally published packages, a restart (or service restart) often needed.
-
-In a non-persistent environment, it is unlikely these pended operations will be processed. The pended operations, for example tasks are captured under **HKEY\_CURRENT\_USER** \\ **Software** \\ **Microsoft** \\ **AppV** \\ **Client** \\ **PendingTasks**. Although this location is persisted by the UPM solution, if it is not applied to the environment prior to log on, it will not be processed.
-
-### Enhancing the VDI Experience through Performance Optimization Tuning
-
-The following section contains lists with information about Microsoft documentation and downloads that may be useful when optimizing your environment for performance.
-
-**.NET NGEN Blog and Script (Highly Recommended)**
-
-About NGEN technology
-
-- [How to speed up NGEN optimization](https://blogs.msdn.com/b/dotnet/archive/2013/08/06/wondering-why-mscorsvw-exe-has-high-cpu-usage-you-can-speed-it-up.aspx)
-
-- [Script](https://aka.ms/DrainNGenQueue)
-
-**Windows Server and Server Roles**
-
-Server Performance Tuning Guidelines for
-
-- [Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn529133.aspx)
-
-- [Microsoft Windows Server 2012](https://download.microsoft.com/download/0/0/B/00BE76AF-D340-4759-8ECD-C80BC53B6231/performance-tuning-guidelines-windows-server-2012.docx)
-
-- [Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2](https://download.microsoft.com/download/6/B/2/6B2EBD3A-302E-4553-AC00-9885BBF31E21/Perf-tun-srv-R2.docx)
-
-**Server Roles**
-
-- [Remote Desktop Virtualization Host](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn567643.aspx)
-
-- [Remote Desktop Session Host](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn567648.aspx)
-
-- [IIS Relevance: App-V Management, Publishing, Reporting Web Services](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/hardware/dn567678.aspx)
-
-- [File Server (SMB) Relevance: If used for App-V Content Storage and Delivery in SCS Mode](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/jj134210.aspx)
-
-**Windows Client (Guest OS) Performance Tuning Guidance**
-
-- [Microsoft Windows 7](https://download.microsoft.com/download/E/5/7/E5783D68-160B-4366-8387-114FC3E45EB4/Performance Tuning Guidelines for Windows 7 Desktop Virtualization v1.9.docx)
-
-- [Optimization Script: (Provided by Microsoft Support)](http://blogs.technet.com/b/jeff_stokes/archive/2012/10/15/the-microsoft-premier-field-engineer-pfe-view-on-virtual-desktop-vdi-density.aspx)
-
-- [Microsoft Windows 8](https://download.microsoft.com/download/6/0/1/601D7797-A063-4FA7-A2E5-74519B57C2B4/Windows_8_VDI_Image_Client_Tuning_Guide.pdf)
-
-- [Optimization Script: (Provided by Microsoft Support)](http://blogs.technet.com/b/jeff_stokes/archive/2013/04/09/hot-off-the-presses-get-it-now-the-windows-8-vdi-optimization-script-courtesy-of-pfe.aspx)
-
-## Sequencing Steps to Optimize Packages for Publishing Performance
-
-
-Several App-V features facilitate new scenarios or enable new customer deployment scenarios. These following features can impact the performance of the publishing and launch operations.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Step
-
Consideration
-
Benefits
-
Tradeoffs
-
-
-
-
-
No Feature Block 1 (FB1, also known as Primary FB)
-
No FB1 means the application will launch immediately and stream fault (application requires file, DLL and must pull down over the network) during launch.If there are network limitations, FB1 will:
-
-
Reduce the number of stream faults and network bandwidth used when you launch an application for the first time.
-
Delay launch until the entire FB1 has been streamed.
-
-
Stream faulting decreases the launch time.
-
Virtual application packages with FB1 configured will need to be re-sequenced.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Removing FB1
-
-Removing FB1 does not require the original application installer. After completing the following steps, it is suggested that you revert the computer running the sequencer to a clean snapshot.
-
-**Sequencer UI** - Create a New Virtual Application Package.
-
-1. Complete the sequencing steps up to Customize -> Streaming.
-
-2. At the Streaming step, do not select **Optimize the package for deployment over slow or unreliable network**.
-
-3. If desired, move on to **Target OS**.
-
-**Modify an Existing Virtual Application Package**
-
-1. Complete the sequencing steps up to Streaming.
-
-2. Do not select **Optimize the package for deployment over a slow or unreliable network**.
-
-3. Move to **Create Package**.
-
-**PowerShell** - Update an Existing Virtual Application Package.
-
-1. Open an elevated PowerShell session.
-
-2. Import-module **appvsequencer**.
-
-3. **Update-AppvSequencerPackage** - **AppvPackageFilePath**
-
- "C:\\Packages\\MyPackage.appv" -Installer
-
- "C:\\PackageInstall\\PackageUpgrade.exe empty.exe" -OutputPath
-
- "C:\\UpgradedPackages"
-
- **Note**
- This cmdlet requires an executable (.exe) or batch file (.bat). You must provide an empty (does nothing) executable or batch file.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Step
-
Considerations
-
Benefits
-
Tradeoffs
-
-
-
-
-
No SXS Install at Publish (Pre-Install SxS assemblies)
-
Virtual Application packages do not need to be re-sequenced. SxS Assemblies can remain in the virtual application package.
-
The SxS Assembly dependencies will not install at publishing time.
-
SxS Assembly dependencies must be pre-installed.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Creating a new virtual application package on the sequencer
-
-If, during sequencer monitoring, an SxS Assembly (such as a VC++ Runtime) is installed as part of an application’s installation, SxS Assembly will be automatically detected and included in the package. The administrator will be notified and will have the option to exclude the SxS Assembly.
-
-**Client Side**:
-
-When publishing a virtual application package, the App-V Client will detect if a required SxS dependency is already installed. If the dependency is unavailable on the computer and it is included in the package, a traditional Windows Installer (.**msi**) installation of the SxS assembly will be initiated. As previously documented, simply install the dependency on the computer running the client to ensure that the Windows Installer (.msi) installation will not occur.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Step
-
Considerations
-
Benefits
-
Tradeoffs
-
-
-
-
-
Selectively Employ Dynamic Configuration files
-
The App-V 5.1 client must parse and process these Dynamic Configuration files.
-
Be conscious of size and complexity (script execution, VREG inclusions/exclusions) of the file.
-
Numerous virtual application packages may already have User- or computer–specific dynamic configurations files.
-
Publishing times will improve if these files are used selectively or not at all.
-
Virtual application packages would need to be reconfigured individually or via the App-V server management console to remove associated Dynamic Configuration files.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Disabling a Dynamic Configuration using Powershell
-
-- For already published packages, you can use `Set-AppVClientPackage –Name Myapp –Path c:\Packages\Apps\MyApp.appv` without
-
- **-DynamicDeploymentConfiguration** parameter
-
-- Similarly, when adding new packages using `Add-AppVClientPackage –Path c:\Packages\Apps\MyApp.appv`, do not use the
-
- **-DynamicDeploymentConfiguration** parameter.
-
-For documentation on How to Apply a Dynamic Configuration, see:
-
-- [How to Apply the User Configuration File by Using PowerShell](how-to-apply-the-user-configuration-file-by-using-powershell51.md)
-
-- [How to Apply the Deployment Configuration File by Using PowerShell](how-to-apply-the-deployment-configuration-file-by-using-powershell51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Step
-
Considerations
-
Benefits
-
Tradeoffs
-
-
-
-
-
Account for Synchronous Script Execution during Package Lifecycle.
-
If script collateral is embedded in the package, Add (Powershell) may be significantly slower.
-
Running of scripts during virtual application launch (StartVirtualEnvironment, StartProcess) and/or Add+Publish will impact the perceived performance during one or more of these lifecycle operations.
-
Use of Asynchronous (Non-Blocking) Scripts will ensure that the lifecycle operations complete efficiently.
-
This step requires working knowledge of all virtual application packages with embedded script collateral, which have associated dynamic configurations files and which reference and run scripts synchronously.
-
-
-
Remove Extraneous Virtual Fonts from Package.
-
The majority of applications investigated by the App-V product team contained a small number of fonts, typically fewer than 20.
Desired fonts will need to be enabled/installed natively. For instructions, see Install or uninstall fonts.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Determining what virtual fonts exist in the package
-
-- Make a copy of the package.
-
-- Rename Package\_copy.appv to Package\_copy.zip
-
-- Open AppxManifest.xml and locate the following:
-
- <appv:Extension Category="AppV.Fonts">
-
- <appv:Fonts>
-
- <appv:Font Path="\[{Fonts}\]\\private\\CalibriL.ttf" DelayLoad="true"></appv:Font>
-
- **Note**
- If there are fonts marked as **DelayLoad**, those will not impact first launch.
-
-
-
-~~~
-</appv:Fonts>
-~~~
-
-### Excluding virtual fonts from the package
-
-Use the dynamic configuration file that best suits the user scope – deployment configuration for all users on computer, user configuration for specific user or users.
-
-- Disable fonts with the deployment or user configuration.
-
-Fonts
-
--->
-
-<Fonts Enabled="false" />
-
-<!--
-
-## App-V 5.1 Performance Guidance Terminology
-
-
-The following terms are used when describing concepts and actions related to App-V 5.1 performance optimization.
-
-- **Complexity** – Refers to the one or more package characteristics that may impact performance during pre-configure (**Add-AppvClientPackage**) or integration (**Publish-AppvClientPackage**). Some example characteristics are: manifest size, number of virtual fonts, number of files.
-
-- **De-Integrate** – Removes the user integrations
-
-- **Re-Integrate** – Applies the user integrations.
-
-- **Non-Persistent, Pooled** – Creates a computer running a virtual environment each time they log in.
-
-- **Persistent, Personal** – A computer running a virtual environment that remains the same for every login.
-
-- **Stateful** - For this document, implies that user integrations are persisted between sessions and a user environment management technology is used in conjunction with non-persistent RDSH or VDI.
-
-- **Stateless** – Represents a scenario when no user state is persisted between sessions.
-
-- **Trigger** – (or Native Action Triggers). UPM uses these types of triggers to initiate monitoring or synchronization operations.
-
-- **User Experience** - In the context of App-V 5.1, the user experience, quantitatively, is the sum of the following parts:
-
- - From the point that users initiate a log-in to when they are able to manipulate the desktop.
-
- - From the point where the desktop can be interacted with to the point a publishing refresh begins (in PowerShell terms, sync) when using the App-V 5.1 full server infrastructure. In standalone instances, it is when the **Add-AppVClientPackage** and **Publish-AppVClientPackage Powershell** commands are initiated.
-
- - From start to completion of the publishing refresh. In standalone instances, this is the first to last virtual application published.
-
- - From the point where the virtual application is available to launch from a shortcut. Alternatively, it is from the point at which the file type association is registered and will launch a specified virtual application.
-
-- **User Profile Management** – The controlled and structured approach to managing user components associated with the environment. For example, user profiles, preference and policy management, application control and application deployment. You can use scripting or third-party solutions configure the environment as needed.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.1 Administrator's Guide](microsoft-application-virtualization-51-administrators-guide.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-app-v-50-rc.md b/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-app-v-50-rc.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1d4bd7a75c..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-app-v-50-rc.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning for App-V 5.0
-description: Planning for App-V 5.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 69df85b3-06c7-4123-af05-29d537a687ec
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning for App-V 5.0
-
-
-Use this information to plan how to deploy Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 so that it does not disrupt your users or the network.
-
-## Planning information
-
-
-- [Preparing Your Environment for App-V 5.0](preparing-your-environment-for-app-v-50.md)
-
- This section describes the computing environment requirements and installation prerequisites that should be planned for before beginning App-V 5.0 setup.
-
-- [Planning to Deploy App-V](planning-to-deploy-app-v.md)
-
- This section describes the minimum hardware and software requirements necessary for App-V 5.0 client, sequencer and server feature installations. Additionally, associated feature planning information is also displayed.
-
-- [App-V 5.0 Planning Checklist](app-v-50-planning-checklist.md)
-
- Planning checklist that can be used to assist in App-V 5.0 deployment planning.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Other resources for App-V 5.0 Planning
-
-
-- [Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0 Administrator's Guide](microsoft-application-virtualization-50-administrators-guide.md)
-
-- [Getting Started with App-V 5.0](getting-started-with-app-v-50--rtm.md)
-
-- [Deploying App-V 5.0](deploying-app-v-50.md)
-
-- [Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-- [Troubleshooting App-V 5.0](troubleshooting-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-app-v-51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-app-v-51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 302d550ef0..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-app-v-51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,64 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning for App-V 5.1
-description: Planning for App-V 5.1
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 8d84e679-0bd3-4864-976b-a3cbe6eafba6
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning for App-V 5.1
-
-
-Use this information to plan how to deploy Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 so that it does not disrupt your users or the network.
-
-## Planning information
-
-
-- [Preparing Your Environment for App-V 5.1](preparing-your-environment-for-app-v-51.md)
-
- This section describes the computing environment requirements and installation prerequisites that should be planned for before beginning App-V 5.1 setup.
-
-- [Planning to Deploy App-V](planning-to-deploy-app-v51.md)
-
- This section describes the minimum hardware and software requirements necessary for App-V 5.1 client, sequencer and server feature installations. Additionally, associated feature planning information is also displayed.
-
-- [App-V 5.1 Planning Checklist](app-v-51-planning-checklist.md)
-
- Planning checklist that can be used to assist in App-V 5.1 deployment planning.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Other resources for App-V 5.1 Planning
-
-
-- [Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.1 Administrator's Guide](microsoft-application-virtualization-51-administrators-guide.md)
-
-- [Getting Started with App-V 5.1](getting-started-with-app-v-51.md)
-
-- [Deploying App-V 5.1](deploying-app-v-51.md)
-
-- [Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-- [Troubleshooting App-V 5.1](troubleshooting-app-v-51.md)
-
-- [Technical Reference for App-V 5.1](technical-reference-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-high-availability-with-app-v-50.md b/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-high-availability-with-app-v-50.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d23fc021f8..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-high-availability-with-app-v-50.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,156 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning for High Availability with App-V 5.0
-description: Planning for High Availability with App-V 5.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 6d9a6492-23f8-465c-82e5-49c863594156
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning for High Availability with App-V 5.0
-
-
-Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0 (App-V 5.0) system configurations can take advantage of options that maintain a high level of available service.
-
-Use the information in the following sections to help you understand the options to deploy App-V 5.0 in a highly available configuration.
-
-- [Support for Microsoft SQL Server clustering](#bkmk-sqlcluster)
-
-- [Support for IIS Network Load Balancing](#bkmk-iisloadbal)
-
-- [Support for clustered file servers when running (SCS) mode](#bkmk-clusterscsmode)
-
-- [Support for Microsoft SQL Server Mirroring](#bkmk-sqlmirroring)
-
-- [Support for Microsoft SQL Server Always On](#bkmk-sqlalwayson)
-
-## Support for Microsoft SQL Server clustering
-
-
-You can run the App-V Management database and Reporting database on computers that are running Microsoft SQL Server clusters. However, you must install the databases using scripts.
-
-For instructions, see [How to Deploy the App-V Databases by Using SQL Scripts](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-databases-by-using-sql-scripts.md).
-
-## Support for IIS Network Load Balancing
-
-
-You can use Internet Information Services (IIS) Network Load Balancing to configure a highly available environment for computers running the App-V 5.x Management, Publishing, and Reporting services which are deployed through IIS.
-
-Review the following for more information about configuring IIS and Network Load Balancing for computers running Windows Server operating systems:
-
-- Provides information about configuring Internet Information Services (IIS) 7.0.
-
- [Achieving High Availability and Scalability - ARR and NLB](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316369) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316369)
-
-- Configuring Microsoft Windows Server
-
- [Network Load Balancing](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316370) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316370).
-
- This information also applies to IIS Network Load Balancing (NLB) clusters in Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, or Windows Server 2012.
-
- **Note**
- The IIS Network Load Balancing functionality in Windows Server 2012 is generally the same as in Windows Server 2008 R2. However, some task details are changed in Windows Server 2012. For information on new ways to do tasks, see [Common Management Tasks and Navigation in Windows Server 2012 R2 Preview and Windows Server 2012](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316371) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316371).
-
-
-
-## Support for clustered file servers when running (SCS) mode
-
-
-Running App-V 5.0 in Share Content Store (SCS) mode with clustered file servers is supported.
-
-The following steps can be used to enable this configuration:
-
-- Configure App-V 5.0 to run in client SCS mode. For more information about configuring App-V 5.0 SCS mode, see [How to Install the App-V 5.0 Client for Shared Content Store Mode](how-to-install-the-app-v-50-client-for-shared-content-store-mode.md).
-
-- Configure the file server cluster configured in both the Microsoft Server 2012 scale out mode and pre **2012** mode with a virtual SAN.
-
-The following steps can be used to validate the configuration:
-
-1. Add a package on the publishing server. For more information about adding a package, see [How to Add or Upgrade Packages by Using the Management Console](how-to-add-or-upgrade-packages-by-using-the-management-console-beta-gb18030.md).
-
-2. Perform a publishing refresh on the computer running the App-V 5.0 client and open an application.
-
-3. Switch cluster nodes mid-publishing refresh and mid-streaming to ensure fail-over works correctly.
-
-Review the following for more information about configuring Windows Server Failover clusters:
-
-- [Checklist: Create a Clustered File Server](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316372) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316372).
-
-- [Use Cluster Shared Volumes in a Windows Server 2012 Failover Cluster](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316373) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316373).
-
-## Support for Microsoft SQL Server Mirroring
-
-
-Using Microsoft SQL Server mirroring, where the App-V 5.0 management server database is mirrored utilizing two SQL Server instances, for App-V 5.0 management server databases is supported.
-
-Review the following for more information about configuring Microsoft SQL Server Mirroring:
-
-- [How to: Prepare a Mirror Database for Mirroring (Transact-SQL)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316375) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316375)
-
-- [Establish a Database Mirroring Session Using Windows Authentication (SQL Server Management Studio)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316377) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316377)
-
-The following steps can be used to validate the configuration:
-
-1. Initiate a Microsoft SQL Server Mirroring session.
-
-2. Select **Failover** to designate a new master Microsoft SQL Server instance.
-
-3. Verify that the App-V 5.0 management server continues to function as expected after the failover.
-
-The connection string on the management server can be modified to include **failover partner = <server2>**. This will only help when the primary on the mirror has failed over to the secondary and the computer running the App-V 5.0 client is doing a fresh connection (say after reboot).
-
-Use the following steps to modify the connection string to include **failover partner = <server2>**:
-
-**Important**
-This topic describes how to change the Windows registry by using Registry Editor. If you change the Windows registry incorrectly, you can cause serious problems that might require you to reinstall Windows. You should make a backup copy of the registry files (System.dat and User.dat) before you change the registry. Microsoft cannot guarantee that the problems that might occur when you change the registry can be resolved. Change the registry at your own risk.
-
-
-
-1. Login to the management server and open **regedit**.
-
-2. Navigate to **HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE** \\ **Software** \\ **Microsoft** \\ **AppV** \\ **Server** \\ **ManagementService**.
-
-3. Modify the **MANAGEMENT\_SQL\_CONNECTION\_STRING** value with the **failover partner = <server2>**.
-
-4. Restart management service using the IIS console.
-
- **Note**
- Database Mirroring is on the list of Deprecated Database Engine Features for Microsoft SQL Server 2012 due to the **AlwaysOn** feature available with Microsoft SQL Server 2012.
-
-
-
-Click any of the following links for more information:
-
-- [How to: Prepare a Mirror Database for Mirroring (Transact-SQL)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=394235) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=394235).
-
-- [How to: Configure a Database Mirroring Session (SQL Server Management Studio)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=394236) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=394236).
-
-- [Establish a Database Mirroring Session Using Windows Authentication (SQL Server Management Studio)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=394237) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=394237).
-
-- [Deprecated Database Engine Features in SQL Server 2012](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=394238) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=394238).
-
-## Support for Microsoft SQL Server Always On configuration
-
-
-The App-V 5.0 management server database supports deployments to computers running Microsoft SQL Server with the **Always On** configuration.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy App-V](planning-to-deploy-app-v.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-high-availability-with-app-v-51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-high-availability-with-app-v-51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a0cfecee7c..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-high-availability-with-app-v-51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,161 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning for High Availability with App-V 5.1
-description: Planning for High Availability with App-V 5.1
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 1f190a0e-10ee-4fbe-a602-7e807e943033
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning for High Availability with App-V 5.1
-
-
-Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 system configurations can take advantage of options that maintain a high level of available service.
-
-Use the information in the following sections to help you understand the options to deploy App-V 5.1 in a highly available configuration.
-
-- [Support for Microsoft SQL Server clustering](#bkmk-sqlcluster)
-
-- [Support for IIS Network Load Balancing](#bkmk-iisloadbal)
-
-- [Support for clustered file servers when running (SCS) mode](#bkmk-clusterscsmode)
-
-- [Support for Microsoft SQL Server Mirroring](#bkmk-sqlmirroring)
-
-- [Support for Microsoft SQL Server Always On](#bkmk-sqlalwayson)
-
-## Support for Microsoft SQL Server clustering
-
-
-You can run the App-V Management database and Reporting database on computers that are running Microsoft SQL Server clusters. However, you must install the databases using scripts.
-
-For instructions, see [How to Deploy the App-V Databases by Using SQL Scripts](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-databases-by-using-sql-scripts51.md).
-
-## Support for IIS Network Load Balancing
-
-
-You can use Internet Information Services (IIS) Network Load Balancing to configure a highly available environment for computers running the App-V 5.x Management, Publishing, and Reporting services which are deployed through IIS.
-
-Review the following for more information about configuring IIS and Network Load Balancing for computers running Windows Server operating systems:
-
-- Provides information about configuring Internet Information Services (IIS) 7.0.
-
- [Achieving High Availability and Scalability - ARR and NLB](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316369) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316369)
-
-- Configuring Microsoft Windows Server
-
- [Network Load Balancing](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316370) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316370).
-
- This information also applies to IIS Network Load Balancing (NLB) clusters in Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, or Windows Server 2012.
-
- **Note**
- The IIS Network Load Balancing functionality in Windows Server 2012 is generally the same as in Windows Server 2008 R2. However, some task details are changed in Windows Server 2012. For information on new ways to do tasks, see [Common Management Tasks and Navigation in Windows Server 2012 R2 Preview and Windows Server 2012](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316371) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316371).
-
-
-
-## Support for clustered file servers when running (SCS) mode
-
-
-Running App-V 5.1 in Share Content Store (SCS) mode with clustered file servers is supported.
-
-The following steps can be used to enable this configuration:
-
-- Configure App-V 5.1 to run in client SCS mode. For more information about configuring App-V 5.1 SCS mode, see [How to Install the App-V 5.1 Client for Shared Content Store Mode](how-to-install-the-app-v-51-client-for-shared-content-store-mode.md).
-
-- Configure the file server cluster configured in both the Microsoft Server 2012 scale out mode and pre **2012** mode with a virtual SAN.
-
-The following steps can be used to validate the configuration:
-
-1. Add a package on the publishing server. For more information about adding a package, see [How to Add or Upgrade Packages by Using the Management Console](how-to-add-or-upgrade-packages-by-using-the-management-console-51-gb18030.md).
-
-2. Perform a publishing refresh on the computer running the App-V 5.1 client and open an application.
-
-3. Switch cluster nodes mid-publishing refresh and mid-streaming to ensure fail-over works correctly.
-
-Review the following for more information about configuring Windows Server Failover clusters:
-
-- [Checklist: Create a Clustered File Server](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316372) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316372).
-
-- [Use Cluster Shared Volumes in a Windows Server 2012 Failover Cluster](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316373) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316373).
-
-## Support for Microsoft SQL Server Mirroring
-
-
-Using Microsoft SQL Server mirroring, where the App-V 5.1 management server database is mirrored utilizing two SQL Server instances, for App-V 5.1 management server databases is supported.
-
-Review the following for more information about configuring Microsoft SQL Server Mirroring:
-
-- [How to: Prepare a Mirror Database for Mirroring (Transact-SQL)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316375) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316375)
-
-- [Establish a Database Mirroring Session Using Windows Authentication (SQL Server Management Studio)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316377) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=316377)
-
-The following steps can be used to validate the configuration:
-
-1. Initiate a Microsoft SQL Server Mirroring session.
-
-2. Select **Failover** to designate a new master Microsoft SQL Server instance.
-
-3. Verify that the App-V 5.1 management server continues to function as expected after the failover.
-
-The connection string on the management server can be modified to include **failover partner = <server2>**. This will only help when the primary on the mirror has failed over to the secondary and the computer running the App-V 5.1 client is doing a fresh connection (say after reboot).
-
-Use the following steps to modify the connection string to include **failover partner = <server2>**:
-
-**Important**
-This topic describes how to change the Windows registry by using Registry Editor. If you change the Windows registry incorrectly, you can cause serious problems that might require you to reinstall Windows. You should make a backup copy of the registry files (System.dat and User.dat) before you change the registry. Microsoft cannot guarantee that the problems that might occur when you change the registry can be resolved. Change the registry at your own risk.
-
-
-
-1. Login to the management server and open **regedit**.
-
-2. Navigate to **HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE** \\ **Software** \\ **Microsoft** \\ **AppV** \\ **Server** \\ **ManagementService**.
-
-3. Modify the **MANAGEMENT\_SQL\_CONNECTION\_STRING** value with the **failover partner = <server2>**.
-
-4. Restart management service using the IIS console.
-
- **Note**
- Database Mirroring is on the list of Deprecated Database Engine Features for Microsoft SQL Server 2012 due to the **AlwaysOn** feature available with Microsoft SQL Server 2012.
-
-
-
-Click any of the following links for more information:
-
-- [How to: Prepare a Mirror Database for Mirroring (Transact-SQL)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=394235) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=394235).
-
-- [How to: Configure a Database Mirroring Session (SQL Server Management Studio)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=394236) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=394236).
-
-- [Establish a Database Mirroring Session Using Windows Authentication (SQL Server Management Studio)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=394237) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=394237).
-
-- [Deprecated Database Engine Features in SQL Server 2012](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=394238) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=394238).
-
-## Support for Microsoft SQL Server Always On configuration
-
-
-The App-V 5.1 management server database supports deployments to computers running Microsoft SQL Server with the **Always On** configuration.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy App-V](planning-to-deploy-app-v51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-migrating-from-a-previous-version-of-app-v.md b/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-migrating-from-a-previous-version-of-app-v.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b802e65076..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-migrating-from-a-previous-version-of-app-v.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,145 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning for Migrating from a Previous Version of App-V
-description: Planning for Migrating from a Previous Version of App-V
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: d4ca8f09-86fd-456f-8ec2-242ff94ae9a0
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/21/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning for Migrating from a Previous Version of App-V
-
-
-Use the following information to plan how to migrate to App-V 5.0 from previous versions of App-V.
-
-## Migration requirements
-
-
-Before you start any upgrades, review the following requirements:
-
-- If you are upgrading from a version earlier than App-V 4.6 SP2, upgrade to version App-V 4.6 SP3 first before upgrading to App-V 5.0 or later. In this scenario, upgrade the App-V clients first, and then upgrade the server components.
-**Note:** App-V 4.6 has exited Mainstream support.
-
-- App-V 5.0 supports only packages that are created using App-V 5.0, or packages that have been converted to the App-V 5.0 (**.appv**) format.
-
-- App-V 5.0 SP3 only: If you are upgrading the App-V Server from App-V 5.0 SP1, see [About App-V 5.0 SP3](about-app-v-50-sp3.md#bkmk-migrate-to-50sp3) for instructions.
-
-## Running the App-V 5.0 client concurrently with App-V 4.6
-
-
-You can run the App-V 5.0 client concurrently on the same computer with the App-V 4.6 SP3 client.
-
-When you run coexisting App-V clients, you can:
-
-- Convert an App-V 4.6 SP3 package to the App-V 5.0 format and publish both packages, when you have both clients running.
-
-- Define the migration policy for the converted package, which allows the converted App-V 5.0 package to assume the file type associations and shortcuts from the App-V 4.6 package.
-
-### Supported coexistence scenarios
-
-The following table shows the supported App-V coexistence scenarios. We recommend that you install the latest available updates of a given release when you are running coexisting clients.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
App-V 4.6 client type
-
App-V 5.0 client type
-
-
-
-
-
App-V 4.6 SP3
-
App-V 5.0
-
-
-
App-V 4.6 SP3 RDS
-
App-V 5.0 RDS
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Requirements for running coexisting clients
-
-To run coexisting clients, you must:
-
-- Install the App-V 4.6 client before you install the App-V 5.0 client.
-
-- Enable the **Enable Migration Mode** Group Policy setting, which is in the **App-V** > **Client Coexistence** node. To get the deploy the .admx template, see [How to Download and Deploy MDOP Group Policy (.admx) Templates](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn659707.aspx).
-
-### Client downloads and documentation
-
-The following table provides link to the TechNet documentation about the releases. The TechNet documentation about the App-V client applies to both clients, unless stated otherwise.
-
-
-
-
-
-For more information about how to configure App-V 5.0 client coexistence, see:
-
-- [How to Deploy the App-V 4.6 and the App-V 5.0 Client on the Same Computer](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-46-and-the-app-v--50-client-on-the-same-computer.md)
-
-- [App-V 5.0 Coexistence and Migration](https://technet.microsoft.com/windows/jj835811.aspx)
-
-## Converting “previous-version” packages using the package converter
-
-
-Before migrating a package, created using App-V 4.6 SP3 or earlier, to App-V 5.0, review the following requirements:
-
-- You must convert the package to the **.appv** file format.
-
-- The Package Converter supports only the direct conversion of packages that were created by using App-V 4.5 and later. To use the package converter on a package that was created using a previous version, you must use an App-V 4.5 or later version of the sequencer to upgrade the package, and then you can perform the package conversion.
-
-For more information about using the package converter to convert a package, see [How to Convert a Package Created in a Previous Version of App-V](how-to-convert-a-package-created-in-a-previous-version-of-app-v.md). After you convert the file, you can deploy it to target computers that run the App-V 5.0 client.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy App-V](planning-to-deploy-app-v.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-migrating-from-a-previous-version-of-app-v51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-migrating-from-a-previous-version-of-app-v51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 583f61a259..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-migrating-from-a-previous-version-of-app-v51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,150 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning for Migrating from a Previous Version of App-V
-description: Planning for Migrating from a Previous Version of App-V
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 4a058047-9674-41bc-8050-c58c97a80a9b
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/21/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning for Migrating from a Previous Version of App-V
-
-
-Use the following information to plan how to migrate to Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 from previous versions of App-V.
-
-## Migration requirements
-
-
-Before you start any upgrades, review the following requirements:
-
-- If you are upgrading from a version earlier than App-V 4.6 SP2, upgrade to version App-V 4.6 SP3 first before upgrading to App-V 5.1 or later. In this scenario, upgrade the App-V clients first, and then upgrade the server components.
-**Note:** App-V 4.6 has exited Mainstream support.
-
-- App-V 5.1 supports only packages that are created using App-V 5.0 or App-V 5.1, or packages that have been converted to the **.appv** format.
-
-- If you are upgrading the App-V Server from App-V 5.0 SP1, see [About App-V 5.1](about-app-v-51.md#bkmk-migrate-to-51) for instructions.
-
-## Running the App-V 5.1 client concurrently with App-V 4.6
-
-
-You can run the App-V 5.1 client concurrently on the same computer with the App-V 4.6 SP3 client.
-
-When you run coexisting App-V clients, you can:
-
-- Convert an App-V 4.6 SP3 package to the App-V 5.1 format and publish both packages, when you have both clients running.
-
-- Define the migration policy for the converted package, which allows the converted App-V 5.1 package to assume the file type associations and shortcuts from the App-V 4.6 package.
-
-### Supported coexistence scenarios
-
-The following table shows the supported App-V coexistence scenarios. We recommend that you install the latest available updates of a given release when you are running coexisting clients.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
App-V 4.6 client type
-
App-V 5.1 client type
-
-
-
-
-
App-V 4.6 SP3
-
App-V 5.1
-
-
-
App-V 4.6 SP3 RDS
-
App-V 5.1 RDS
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Requirements for running coexisting clients
-
-To run coexisting clients, you must:
-
-- Install the App-V 4.6 client before you install the App-V 5.1 client.
-
-- Enable the **Enable Migration Mode** Group Policy setting, which is in the **App-V** > **Client Coexistence** node. To deploy the .admx template, see [How to Download and Deploy MDOP Group Policy (.admx) Templates](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn659707.aspx).
-
-**Note**
-App-V 5.1 packages can run side by side with App-V 4.6 packages if you have coexisting installations of App-V 5.1 and 4.6. However, App-V 5.1 packages cannot interact with App-V 4.6 packages in the same virtual environment.
-
-
-
-### Client downloads and documentation
-
-The following table provides links to the App-V 4.6 client downloads and to the TechNet documentation about the releases. The downloads include the App-V “regular” and RDS clients. The TechNet documentation about the App-V client applies to both clients, unless stated otherwise.
-
-
-
-
-
-For more information about how to configure App-V 5.1 client coexistence, see:
-
-- [How to Deploy the App-V 4.6 and the App-V 5.1 Client on the Same Computer](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-46-and-the-app-v--51-client-on-the-same-computer.md)
-
-- [App-V 5.0 Coexistence and Migration](https://technet.microsoft.com/windows/jj835811.aspx)
-
-## Converting “previous-version” packages using the package converter
-
-
-Before migrating a package, created using App- 4.6 SP2 or earlier, to App-V 5.1, review the following requirements:
-
-- You must convert the package to the **.appv** file format.
-
-- The Package Converter supports only the direct conversion of packages that were created by using App-V 4.5 and later. To use the package converter on a package that was created using a previous version, you must use an App-V 4.5 or later version of the sequencer to upgrade the package, and then you can perform the package conversion.
-
-For more information about using the package converter to convert a package, see [How to Convert a Package Created in a Previous Version of App-V](how-to-convert-a-package-created-in-a-previous-version-of-app-v51.md). After you convert the file, you can deploy it to target computers that run the App-V 5.1 client.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy App-V](planning-to-deploy-app-v51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-the-app-v-50-sequencer-and-client-deployment.md b/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-the-app-v-50-sequencer-and-client-deployment.md
deleted file mode 100644
index dda2baef42..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-the-app-v-50-sequencer-and-client-deployment.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,107 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning for the App-V 5.0 Sequencer and Client Deployment
-description: Planning for the App-V 5.0 Sequencer and Client Deployment
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 57a604ad-90e1-4d32-86bb-eafff59aa43a
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/21/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning for the App-V 5.0 Sequencer and Client Deployment
-
-
-Before you can start to use Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0, you must install the App-V 5.0 sequencer, the App-V 5.0 client, and optionally the App-V 5.0 shared content store. The following sections address planning for these installations.
-
-## Planning for App-V 5.0 sequencer deployment
-
-
-App-V 5.0 uses a process called sequencing to create virtualized applications and application packages. Sequencing requires the use of a computer that runs the App-V 5.0 sequencer.
-
-**Note**
-For information about the new functionality of App-V 5.0 sequencer, see the **Changes to the sequencer** section of [What's New in App-V 5.0](whats-new-in-app-v-50.md).
-
-
-
-The computer that runs the App-V 5.0 sequencer must meet the minimum system requirements. For a list of these requirements, see [App-V 5.0 Supported Configurations](app-v-50-supported-configurations.md).
-
-Ideally, you should install the sequencer on a computer running as a virtual machine. This enables you to more easily revert the computer running the sequencer to a “clean” state before sequencing another application. When you install the sequencer using a virtual machine, you should perform the following steps:
-
-1. Install all associated sequencer prerequisites.
-
-2. Install the sequencer.
-
-3. Take a “snapshot” of the environment.
-
-**Important**
-You should have your corporate security team review and approve the sequencing process plan. For security reasons, you should keep the sequencer operations in a lab that is separate from the production environment. The separation arrangement can be as simple or as comprehensive as necessary, based on your business requirements. The sequencing computers must be able to connect to the corporate network to copy finished packages to the production servers. However, because the sequencing computers are typically operated without antivirus protection, they must not be on the corporate network unprotected. For example, you might be able to operate behind a firewall or on an isolated network segment. You might also be able to use virtual machines that are configured to share an isolated virtual network. Follow your corporate security policies to safely address these concerns.
-
-
-
-[How to Install the Sequencer](how-to-install-the-sequencer-beta-gb18030.md)
-
-## Planning for App-V 5.0 client deployment
-
-
-To run virtualized packages on target computers, you must install the App-V 5.0 client on the target computers. The App-V 5.0 client is the component that runs a virtualized application on a target computer. The client enables users to interact with icons and specific file types to start virtualized applications. The client also helps obtain application content from the management server and caches the content before the client starts the application. There are two different client types: the client for Remote Desktop Services, which is used on Remote Desktop Session Host (RD Session Host) server systems and the App-V 5.0 client, which is used for all other computers.
-
-The App-V 5.0 client should be configured by using either the installer command line or by using a PowerShell script after the installation has been completed.
-
-The settings must be defined carefully in advance in order to expedite the deployment of the App-V 5.0 client software. This is especially important when you have computers in different offices where the clients must be configured to use different source locations.
-
-You must also determine how you will deploy the client software. Although it is possible to deploy the client manually on each computer, most organizations prefer to deploy the client through an automated process. A larger organization might have an operational Electronic Software Distribution (ESD) system, which is an ideal client deployment system. If no ESD system exists, you can use your organization’s standard method of installing software. Possible methods include Group Policy or various scripting techniques. Depending on the quantity and disparate locations of your client computers, this deployment process can be complex. You must use a structured approach to ensure that all computers get the client installed with the correct configuration.
-
-For a list of the client minimum requirements see [App-V 5.0 Prerequisites](app-v-50-prerequisites.md).
-
-[How to Deploy the App-V Client](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-client-gb18030.md)
-
-## Planning for App-V client coexistence
-
-
-You can deploy the App-V 5.0 client side by side with the App-V 4.6 client. Client coexistence requires that you add or publish virtualized applications by using either a deployment configuration file or a user configuration file, because there are certain settings in these configuration files that must be configured in order for App-V 5.0 to function with App-V 4.6 clients. When a package is upgraded by using either the client or the server, the package must resubmit the configuration file. This is true for any package that has a corresponding configuration file, so it is not specific to client coexistence. However, if you do not submit the configuration file during the package upgrade, then the package state will not function as expected in coexistence scenarios.
-
-App-V 5.0 dynamic configuration files customize a package for a specific user. You must create the dynamic user configuration (.xml) file or the dynamic deployment configuration file before you can use them. To create the file it requires an advanced manual operation.
-
-When a dynamic user configuration file is used, none of the App-V 5.0 information for the extension in the manifest file is used. This means that the dynamic user configuration file must include everything for the extension that is specific to App-V 5.0 in the manifest file, as well as the changes that you want to make, such as, deletions and updates. For more information about how to create a custom configuration file, see [How to Create a Custom Configuration File by Using the App-V 5.0 Management Console](how-to-create-a-custom-configuration-file-by-using-the-app-v-50-management-console.md).
-
-[How to Deploy the App-V 4.6 and the App-V 5.0 Client on the Same Computer](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-46-and-the-app-v--50-client-on-the-same-computer.md)
-
-## Planning for the App-V 5.0 Shared Content Store (SCS)
-
-
-The App-V 5.0 shared content store mode allows the computer running the App-V 5.0 client to run virtualized applications and none of the package contents is saved on the computer running the App-V 5.0 client. Virtual applications are streamed to target computers only when requested by the client.
-
-The following list displays some of the benefits of using the App-V 5.0 shared content store:
-
-- Reduced app-to-app and multi-user application conflicts and hence a reduced need for regression testing
-
-- Accelerated application deployment by reduction of deployment risk
-
-- Simplified profile management
-
-[How to Install the App-V 5.0 Client for Shared Content Store Mode](how-to-install-the-app-v-50-client-for-shared-content-store-mode.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Other resources for the App-V 5.0 deployment
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy App-V](planning-to-deploy-app-v.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-the-app-v-50-server-deployment.md b/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-the-app-v-50-server-deployment.md
deleted file mode 100644
index cfbadbc58c..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-the-app-v-50-server-deployment.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,121 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning for the App-V 5.0 Server Deployment
-description: Planning for the App-V 5.0 Server Deployment
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: fd89b324-3961-471a-ad90-c8f9ae7a8155
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning for the App-V 5.0 Server Deployment
-
-
-The Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 server infrastructure consists of a set of specialized features that can be installed on one or more server computers, based on the requirements of the enterprise.
-
-## Planning for App-V 5.0 Server Deployment
-
-
-The App-V 5.0 server consists of the following features:
-
-- Management Server – provides overall management functionality for the App-V 5.0 infrastructure.
-
-- Management Database – facilitates database predeployments for App-V 5.0 management.
-
-- Publishing Server – provides hosting and streaming functionality for virtual applications.
-
-- Reporting Server – provides App-V 5.0 reporting services.
-
-- Reporting Database – facilitates database predeployments for App-V 5.0 reporting.
-
-The following list displays the recommended methods for installing the App-V 5.0 server infrastructure:
-
-- Install the App-V 5.0 server. For more information, see [How to Deploy the App-V 5.0 Server](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-50-server-50sp3.md).
-
-- Install the database, reporting, and management features on separate computers. For more information, see [How to Install the Management and Reporting Databases on Separate Computers from the Management and Reporting Services](how-to-install-the-management-and-reporting-databases-on-separate-computers-from-the-management-and-reporting-services.md).
-
-- Use Electronic Software Distribution (ESD). For more information, see [How to deploy App-V 5.0 Packages Using Electronic Software Distribution](how-to-deploy-app-v-50-packages-using-electronic-software-distribution.md).
-
-- Install all server features on a single computer.
-
-## App-V 5.0 Server Interaction
-
-
-This section contains information about how the various App-V 5.0 server roles interact with each other.
-
-The App-V 5.0 Management Server contains the repository of packages and their assigned configurations. For Publishing Servers that are registered with the Management Server, the associated metadata is provided to the Publishing servers for use when publishing refresh requests are received from computers running the App-V 5.0 Client. App-V 5.0 publishing servers managed by a single management server can be serving different clients and can have different website names and port bindings. Additionally, all Publishing Servers managed by the same Management Server are replicas of each other.
-
-**Note**
-The Management Server does not perform any load balancing. The associated metadata is simply passed to the publishing server for use when processing client requests.
-
-
-
-## Server-Related Protocols and External Features
-
-
-The following displays information about server-related protocols used by the App-V 5.0 servers. The table also includes the reporting mechanism for each server type.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Server Type
-
Protocols
-
External Features Needed
-
Reporting
-
-
-
-
-
-
IIS server
-
HTTP
-
HTTPS
-
This server-protocol combination requires a mechanism to synchronize the content between the Management Server and the Streaming Server. When using HTTP or HTTPS, use an IIS server and a firewall to protect the server from exposure to the Internet.
-
Internal
-
-
-
-
File
-
SMB
-
This server-protocol combination requires support to synchronize the content between the Management Server and the Streaming Server. Use a client computer with file sharing or streaming capability.
-
Internal
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy App-V](planning-to-deploy-app-v.md)
-
-[Deploying the App-V 5.0 Server](deploying-the-app-v-50-server.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-the-app-v-51-sequencer-and-client-deployment.md b/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-the-app-v-51-sequencer-and-client-deployment.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 2dc56979b0..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-the-app-v-51-sequencer-and-client-deployment.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,110 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning for the App-V 5.1 Sequencer and Client Deployment
-description: Planning for the App-V 5.1 Sequencer and Client Deployment
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: d92f8773-fa7d-4926-978a-433978f91202
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/21/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning for the App-V 5.1 Sequencer and Client Deployment
-
-
-Before you can start to use Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1, you must install the App-V 5.1 sequencer, the App-V 5.1 client, and optionally the App-V 5.1 shared content store. The following sections address planning for these installations.
-
-## Planning for App-V 5.1 sequencer deployment
-
-
-App-V 5.1 uses a process called sequencing to create virtualized applications and application packages. Sequencing requires the use of a computer that runs the App-V 5.1 sequencer.
-
-**Note**
-For information about the new functionality of App-V 5.1 sequencer, see the **Sequencer Improvements** section of [About App-V 5.1](about-app-v-51.md).
-
-
-
-The computer that runs the App-V 5.1 sequencer must meet the minimum system requirements. For a list of these requirements, see [App-V 5.1 Supported Configurations](app-v-51-supported-configurations.md).
-
-Ideally, you should install the sequencer on a computer running as a virtual machine. This enables you to more easily revert the computer running the sequencer to a “clean” state before sequencing another application. When you install the sequencer using a virtual machine, you should perform the following steps:
-
-1. Install all associated sequencer prerequisites.
-
-2. Install the sequencer.
-
-3. Take a “snapshot” of the environment.
-
-**Important**
-You should have your corporate security team review and approve the sequencing process plan. For security reasons, you should keep the sequencer operations in a lab that is separate from the production environment. The separation arrangement can be as simple or as comprehensive as necessary, based on your business requirements. The sequencing computers must be able to connect to the corporate network to copy finished packages to the production servers. However, because the sequencing computers are typically operated without antivirus protection, they must not be on the corporate network unprotected. For example, you might be able to operate behind a firewall or on an isolated network segment. You might also be able to use virtual machines that are configured to share an isolated virtual network. Follow your corporate security policies to safely address these concerns.
-
-
-
-## Planning for App-V 5.1 client deployment
-
-
-To run virtualized packages on target computers, you must install the App-V 5.1 client on the target computers. The App-V 5.1 client is the component that runs a virtualized application on a target computer. The client enables users to interact with icons and specific file types to start virtualized applications. The client also helps obtain application content from the management server and caches the content before the client starts the application. There are two different client types: the client for Remote Desktop Services, which is used on Remote Desktop Session Host (RD Session Host) server systems and the App-V 5.1 client, which is used for all other computers.
-
-The App-V 5.1 client should be configured by using either the installer command line or by using a PowerShell script after the installation has been completed.
-
-The settings must be defined carefully in advance in order to expedite the deployment of the App-V 5.1 client software. This is especially important when you have computers in different offices where the clients must be configured to use different source locations.
-
-You must also determine how you will deploy the client software. Although it is possible to deploy the client manually on each computer, most organizations prefer to deploy the client through an automated process. A larger organization might have an operational Electronic Software Distribution (ESD) system, which is an ideal client deployment system. If no ESD system exists, you can use your organization’s standard method of installing software. Possible methods include Group Policy or various scripting techniques. Depending on the quantity and disparate locations of your client computers, this deployment process can be complex. You must use a structured approach to ensure that all computers get the client installed with the correct configuration.
-
-For a list of the client minimum requirements see [App-V 5.1 Prerequisites](app-v-51-prerequisites.md).
-
-## Planning for App-V client coexistence
-
-
-You can deploy the App-V 5.1 client side by side with the App-V 4.6 client. Client coexistence requires that you add or publish virtualized applications by using either a deployment configuration file or a user configuration file, because there are certain settings in these configuration files that must be configured in order for App-V 5.1 to function with App-V 4.6 clients. When a package is upgraded by using either the client or the server, the package must resubmit the configuration file. This is true for any package that has a corresponding configuration file, so it is not specific to client coexistence. However, if you do not submit the configuration file during the package upgrade, then the package state will not function as expected in coexistence scenarios.
-
-App-V 5.1 dynamic configuration files customize a package for a specific user. You must create the dynamic user configuration (.xml) file or the dynamic deployment configuration file before you can use them. To create the file it requires an advanced manual operation.
-
-When a dynamic user configuration file is used, none of the App-V 5.1 information for the extension in the manifest file is used. This means that the dynamic user configuration file must include everything for the extension that is specific to App-V 5.1 in the manifest file, as well as the changes that you want to make, such as, deletions and updates. For more information about how to create a custom configuration file, see [How to Create a Custom Configuration File by Using the App-V 5.1 Management Console](how-to-create-a-custom-configuration-file-by-using-the-app-v-51-management-console.md).
-
-## Planning for the App-V 5.1 Shared Content Store (SCS)
-
-
-The App-V 5.1 shared content store mode allows the computer running the App-V 5.1 client to run virtualized applications and none of the package contents is saved on the computer running the App-V 5.1 client. Virtual applications are streamed to target computers only when requested by the client.
-
-The following list displays some of the benefits of using the App-V 5.1 shared content store:
-
-- Reduced app-to-app and multi-user application conflicts and hence a reduced need for regression testing
-
-- Accelerated application deployment by reduction of deployment risk
-
-- Simplified profile management
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Other resources for the App-V 5.1 deployment
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy App-V](planning-to-deploy-app-v51.md)
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[How to Install the Sequencer](how-to-install-the-sequencer-51beta-gb18030.md)
-
-[How to Deploy the App-V Client](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-client-51gb18030.md)
-
-[How to Deploy the App-V 4.6 and the App-V 5.1 Client on the Same Computer](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-46-and-the-app-v--51-client-on-the-same-computer.md)
-
-[How to Install the App-V 5.1 Client for Shared Content Store Mode](how-to-install-the-app-v-51-client-for-shared-content-store-mode.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-the-app-v-51-server-deployment.md b/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-the-app-v-51-server-deployment.md
deleted file mode 100644
index cbba13e491..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-the-app-v-51-server-deployment.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,121 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning for the App-V 5.1 Server Deployment
-description: Planning for the App-V 5.1 Server Deployment
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: eedd97c9-bee0-4749-9d1e-ab9528fba398
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning for the App-V 5.1 Server Deployment
-
-
-The Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 server infrastructure consists of a set of specialized features that can be installed on one or more server computers, based on the requirements of the enterprise.
-
-## Planning for App-V 5.1 Server Deployment
-
-
-The App-V 5.1 server consists of the following features:
-
-- Management Server – provides overall management functionality for the App-V 5.1 infrastructure.
-
-- Management Database – facilitates database predeployments for App-V 5.1 management.
-
-- Publishing Server – provides hosting and streaming functionality for virtual applications.
-
-- Reporting Server – provides App-V 5.1 reporting services.
-
-- Reporting Database – facilitates database predeployments for App-V 5.1 reporting.
-
-The following list displays the recommended methods for installing the App-V 5.1 server infrastructure:
-
-- Install the App-V 5.1 server. For more information, see [How to Deploy the App-V 5.1 Server](how-to-deploy-the-app-v-51-server.md).
-
-- Install the database, reporting, and management features on separate computers. For more information, see [How to Install the Management and Reporting Databases on Separate Computers from the Management and Reporting Services](how-to-install-the-management-and-reporting-databases-on-separate-computers-from-the-management-and-reporting-services51.md).
-
-- Use Electronic Software Distribution (ESD). For more information, see [How to deploy App-V 5.1 Packages Using Electronic Software Distribution](how-to-deploy-app-v-51-packages-using-electronic-software-distribution.md).
-
-- Install all server features on a single computer.
-
-## App-V 5.1 Server Interaction
-
-
-This section contains information about how the various App-V 5.1 server roles interact with each other.
-
-The App-V 5.1 Management Server contains the repository of packages and their assigned configurations. For Publishing Servers that are registered with the Management Server, the associated metadata is provided to the Publishing servers for use when publishing refresh requests are received from computers running the App-V 5.1 Client. App-V 5.1 publishing servers managed by a single management server can be serving different clients and can have different website names and port bindings. Additionally, all Publishing Servers managed by the same Management Server are replicas of each other.
-
-**Note**
-The Management Server does not perform any load balancing. The associated metadata is simply passed to the publishing server for use when processing client requests.
-
-
-
-## Server-Related Protocols and External Features
-
-
-The following displays information about server-related protocols used by the App-V 5.1 servers. The table also includes the reporting mechanism for each server type.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Server Type
-
Protocols
-
External Features Needed
-
Reporting
-
-
-
-
-
-
IIS server
-
HTTP
-
HTTPS
-
This server-protocol combination requires a mechanism to synchronize the content between the Management Server and the Streaming Server. When using HTTP or HTTPS, use an IIS server and a firewall to protect the server from exposure to the Internet.
-
Internal
-
-
-
-
File
-
SMB
-
This server-protocol combination requires support to synchronize the content between the Management Server and the Streaming Server. Use a client computer with file sharing or streaming capability.
-
Internal
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy App-V](planning-to-deploy-app-v51.md)
-
-[Deploying the App-V 5.1 Server](deploying-the-app-v-51-server.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-using-app-v-with-office.md b/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-using-app-v-with-office.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7f570f7070..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-using-app-v-with-office.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,398 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning for Using App-V with Office
-description: Planning for Using App-V with Office
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: c4371869-4bfc-4d13-9198-ef19f99fc192
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning for Using App-V with Office
-
-
-Use the following information to plan how to deploy Office by using App-V. This article includes:
-
-- [App-V support for Language Packs](#bkmk-lang-pack)
-
-- [Supported versions of Microsoft Office](#bkmk-office-vers-supp-appv)
-
-- [Planning for using App-V with coexisting versions of Office](#bkmk-plan-coexisting)
-
-- [How Office integrates with Windows when you deploy use App-V to deploy Office](#bkmk-office-integration-win)
-
-## App-V support for Language Packs
-
-
-You can use the App-V 5.0 Sequencer to create plug-in packages for Language Packs, Language Interface Packs, Proofing Tools and ScreenTip Languages. You can then include the plug-in packages in a Connection Group, along with the Office 2013 package that you create by using the Office Deployment Toolkit. The Office applications and the plug-in Language Packs interact seamlessly in the same connection group, just like any other packages that are grouped together in a connection group.
-
-**Note**
-Microsoft Visio and Microsoft Project do not provide support for the Thai Language Pack.
-
-
-
-## Supported versions of Microsoft Office
-
-
-The following table lists the versions of Microsoft Office that App-V supports, methods of Office package creation, supported licensing, and supported deployments.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Supported Office Version
-
Supported App-V Versions
-
Package Creation
-
Supported Licensing
-
Supported Deployments
-
-
-
-
-
Office 365 ProPlus
-
Also supported:
-
-
Visio Pro for Office 365
-
Project Pro for Office 365
-
-
-
App-V 5.0
-
App-V 5.0 SP1
-
App-V 5.0 SP2
-
-
Office Deployment Tool
-
Subscription
-
-
Desktop
-
Personal VDI
-
Pooled VDI
-
RDS
-
-
-
-
Office Professional Plus 2013
-
Also supported:
-
-
Visio Professional 2013
-
Project Professional 2013
-
-
-
App-V 5.0
-
App-V 5.0 SP1
-
App-V 5.0 SP2
-
-
Office Deployment Tool
-
Volume Licensing
-
-
Desktop
-
Personal VDI
-
Pooled VDI
-
RDS
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Planning for using App-V with coexisting versions of Office
-
-
-You can install more than one version of Microsoft Office side by side on the same computer by using “Microsoft Office coexistence.” You can implement Office coexistence with combinations of all major versions of Office and with installation methods, as applicable, by using the Windows Installer-based (MSi) version of Office, Click-to-Run, and App-V 5.0 SP2. However, using Office coexistence is not recommended by Microsoft.
-
-Microsoft’s recommended best practice is to avoid Office coexistence completely to prevent compatibility issues. However, when you are migrating to a newer version of Office, issues occasionally arise that can’t be resolved immediately, so you can temporarily implement coexistence to help facilitate a faster migration to the latest product version. Using Office coexistence on a long-term basis is never recommended, and your organization should have a plan to fully transition in the immediate future.
-
-### Before you implement Office coexistence
-
-Before implementing Office coexistence, review the following Office documentation. Choose the article that corresponds to the newest version of Office for which you plan to implement coexistence.
-
-
-
-
-
-The Office documentation provides extensive guidance on coexistence for Windows Installer-based (MSi) and Click-to-Run installations of Office. This App-V topic on coexistence supplements the Office guidance with information that is more specific to App-V deployments.
-
-### Supported Office coexistence scenarios
-
-The following tables summarize the supported coexistence scenarios. They are organized according to the version and deployment method you’re starting with and the version and deployment method you are migrating to. Be sure to fully test all coexistence solutions before deploying them to a production audience.
-
-**Note**
-Microsoft does not support the use of multiple versions of Office in Windows Server environments that have the Remote Desktop Session Host role service enabled. To run Office coexistence scenarios, you must disable this role service.
-
-
-
-### Windows integrations & Office coexistence
-
-The Windows Installer-based and Click-to-Run Office installation methods integrate with certain points of the underlying Windows operating system. When you use coexistence, common operating system integrations between two Office versions can conflict, causing compatibility and user experience issues. With App-V, you can sequence certain versions of Office to exclude integrations, thereby “isolating” them from the operating system.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Mode in which App-V can sequence this version of Office
-
-
-
-
-
Office 2007
-
Always non-integrated. App-V does not offer any operating system integrations with a virtualized version of Office 2007.
-
-
-
Office 2010
-
Integrated and non-integrated mode.
-
-
-
Office 2013
-
Always integrated. Windows operating system integrations cannot be disabled.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Microsoft recommends that you deploy Office coexistence with only one integrated Office instance. For example, if you’re using App-V to deploy Office 2010 and Office 2013, you should sequence Office 2010 in non-integrated mode. For more information about sequencing Office in non-integration (isolated) mode, see [How to sequence Microsoft Office 2010 in Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0](https://support.microsoft.com/kb/2830069).
-
-### Known limitations of Office coexistence scenarios
-
-The following sections describe some issues that you might encounter when using App-V to implement coexistence with Office.
-
-### Limitations common to Windows Installer-based/Click-to-Run and App-V Office coexistence scenarios
-
-The following limitations can occur when you install the following versions of Office on the same computer:
-
-- Office 2010 by using the Windows Installer-based version
-
-- Office 2013 by using App-V
-
-After you publish Office 2013 by using App-V side by side with an earlier version of the Windows Installer-based Office 2010 might also cause the Windows Installer to start. This is because the Windows Installer-based or Click-to-Run version of Office 2010 is trying to automatically register itself to the computer.
-
-To bypass the auto-registration operation for native Word 2010, follow these steps:
-
-1. Exit Word 2010.
-
-2. Start the Registry Editor by doing the following:
-
- - In Windows 7: Click **Start**, type **regedit** in the Start Search box, and then press Enter.
-
- - In Windows 8, type **regedit** press Enter on the Start page and then press Enter.
-
- If you are prompted for an administrator password or for a confirmation, type the password, or click **Continue**.
-
-3. Locate and then select the following registry subkey:
-
- ``` syntax
- HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Office\14.0\Word\Options
- ```
-
-4. On the **Edit** menu, click **New**, and then click **DWORD Value**.
-
-5. Type **NoReReg**, and then press Enter.
-
-6. Right-click **NoReReg** and then click **Modify**.
-
-7. In the **Valuedata** box, type **1**, and then click **OK**.
-
-8. On the File menu, click **Exit** to close Registry Editor.
-
-## How Office integrates with Windows when you use App-V to deploy Office
-
-
-When you deploy Office 2013 by using App-V, Office is fully integrated with the operating system, which provides end users with the same features and functionality as Office has when it is deployed without App-V.
-
-The Office 2013 App-V package supports the following integration points with the Windows operating system:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Extension Point
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Lync meeting Join Plug-in for Firefox and Chrome
-
User can join Lync meetings from Firefox and Chrome
-
-
-
Sent to OneNote Print Driver
-
User can print to OneNote
-
-
-
OneNote Linked Notes
-
OneNote Linked Notes
-
-
-
Send to OneNote Internet Explorer Add-In
-
User can send to OneNote from IE
-
-
-
Firewall Exception for Lync and Outlook
-
Firewall Exception for Lync and Outlook
-
-
-
MAPI Client
-
Native apps and add-ins can interact with virtual Outlook through MAPI
-
-
-
SharePoint Plug-in for Firefox
-
User can use SharePoint features in Firefox
-
-
-
Mail Control Panel Applet
-
User gets the mail control panel applet in Outlook
Windows Explorer shell icon overlays when users look at folders OneDrive Pro folders
-
-
-
Shell extensions
-
-
-
-
Shortcuts
-
-
-
-
Windows Search
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-using-app-v-with-office51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-using-app-v-with-office51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6564a0e784..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-for-using-app-v-with-office51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,335 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning for Using App-V with Office
-description: Planning for Using App-V with Office
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: e7a19b43-1746-469f-bad6-8e75cf4b3f67
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 03/16/2017
----
-
-
-# Planning for Using App-V with Office
-
-
-Use the following information to plan how to deploy Office by using Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1. This article includes:
-
-- [App-V support for Language Packs](#bkmk-lang-pack)
-
-- [Supported versions of Microsoft Office](#bkmk-office-vers-supp-appv)
-
-- [Planning for using App-V with coexisting versions of Office](#bkmk-plan-coexisting)
-
-- [How Office integrates with Windows when you deploy use App-V to deploy Office](#bkmk-office-integration-win)
-
-## App-V support for Language Packs
-
-
-You can use the App-V 5.1 Sequencer to create plug-in packages for Language Packs, Language Interface Packs, Proofing Tools and ScreenTip Languages. You can then include the plug-in packages in a Connection Group, along with the Office 2013 package that you create by using the Office Deployment Toolkit. The Office applications and the plug-in Language Packs interact seamlessly in the same connection group, just like any other packages that are grouped together in a connection group.
-
->**Note**
-Microsoft Visio and Microsoft Project do not provide support for the Thai Language Pack.
-
-
-
-## Supported versions of Microsoft Office
-
-See [Microsoft Office Product IDs that App-V supports](https://support.microsoft.com/help/2842297/product-ids-that-are-supported-by-the-office-deployment-tool-for-click) for a list of supported Office products.
->**Note** You must use the Office Deployment Tool to create App-V packages for Office 365 ProPlus. Creating packages for the volume-licensed versions of Office Professional Plus or Office Standard is not supported. You cannot use the App-V Sequencer.
-
-
-
-## Planning for using App-V with coexisting versions of Office
-
-
-You can install more than one version of Microsoft Office side by side on the same computer by using “Microsoft Office coexistence.” You can implement Office coexistence with combinations of all major versions of Office and with installation methods, as applicable, by using the Windows Installer-based (MSi) version of Office, Click-to-Run, and App-V 5.1. However, using Office coexistence is not recommended by Microsoft.
-
-Microsoft’s recommended best practice is to avoid Office coexistence completely to prevent compatibility issues. However, when you are migrating to a newer version of Office, issues occasionally arise that can’t be resolved immediately, so you can temporarily implement coexistence to help facilitate a faster migration to the latest product version. Using Office coexistence on a long-term basis is never recommended, and your organization should have a plan to fully transition in the immediate future.
-
-### Before you implement Office coexistence
-
-Before implementing Office coexistence, review the following Office documentation. Choose the article that corresponds to the newest version of Office for which you plan to implement coexistence.
-
-
-
-
-
-The Office documentation provides extensive guidance on coexistence for Windows Installer-based (MSi) and Click-to-Run installations of Office. This App-V topic on coexistence supplements the Office guidance with information that is more specific to App-V deployments.
-
-### Supported Office coexistence scenarios
-
-The following tables summarize the supported coexistence scenarios. They are organized according to the version and deployment method you’re starting with and the version and deployment method you are migrating to. Be sure to fully test all coexistence solutions before deploying them to a production audience.
-
->**Note**
-Microsoft does not support the use of multiple versions of Office in Windows Server environments that have the Remote Desktop Session Host role service enabled. To run Office coexistence scenarios, you must disable this role service.
-
-
-
-### Windows integrations & Office coexistence
-
-The Windows Installer-based and Click-to-Run Office installation methods integrate with certain points of the underlying Windows operating system. When you use coexistence, common operating system integrations between two Office versions can conflict, causing compatibility and user experience issues. With App-V, you can sequence certain versions of Office to exclude integrations, thereby “isolating” them from the operating system.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Mode in which App-V can sequence this version of Office
-
-
-
-
-
Office 2007
-
Always non-integrated. App-V does not offer any operating system integrations with a virtualized version of Office 2007.
-
-
-
Office 2010
-
Integrated and non-integrated mode.
-
-
-
Office 2013
-
Always integrated. Windows operating system integrations cannot be disabled.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Microsoft recommends that you deploy Office coexistence with only one integrated Office instance. For example, if you’re using App-V to deploy Office 2010 and Office 2013, you should sequence Office 2010 in non-integrated mode. For more information about sequencing Office in non-integration (isolated) mode, see [How to sequence Microsoft Office 2010 in Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0](https://support.microsoft.com/kb/2830069).
-
-### Known limitations of Office coexistence scenarios
-
-The following sections describe some issues that you might encounter when using App-V to implement coexistence with Office.
-
-### Limitations common to Windows Installer-based/Click-to-Run and App-V Office coexistence scenarios
-
-The following limitations can occur when you install the following versions of Office on the same computer:
-
-- Office 2010 by using the Windows Installer-based version
-
-- Office 2013 by using App-V
-
-After you publish Office 2013 by using App-V side by side with an earlier version of the Windows Installer-based Office 2010 might also cause the Windows Installer to start. This is because the Windows Installer-based or Click-to-Run version of Office 2010 is trying to automatically register itself to the computer.
-
-To bypass the auto-registration operation for native Word 2010, follow these steps:
-
-1. Exit Word 2010.
-
-2. Start the Registry Editor by doing the following:
-
- - In Windows 7: Click **Start**, type **regedit** in the Start Search box, and then press Enter.
-
- - In Windows 8.1 or Windows 10, type **regedit** press Enter on the Start page and then press Enter.
-
- If you are prompted for an administrator password or for a confirmation, type the password, or click **Continue**.
-
-3. Locate and then select the following registry subkey:
-
- ``` syntax
- HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Office\14.0\Word\Options
- ```
-
-4. On the **Edit** menu, click **New**, and then click **DWORD Value**.
-
-5. Type **NoReReg**, and then press Enter.
-
-6. Right-click **NoReReg** and then click **Modify**.
-
-7. In the **Valuedata** box, type **1**, and then click **OK**.
-
-8. On the File menu, click **Exit** to close Registry Editor.
-
-## How Office integrates with Windows when you use App-V to deploy Office
-
-
-When you deploy Office 2013 by using App-V, Office is fully integrated with the operating system, which provides end users with the same features and functionality as Office has when it is deployed without App-V.
-
-The Office 2013 App-V package supports the following integration points with the Windows operating system:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Extension Point
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Lync meeting Join Plug-in for Firefox and Chrome
-
User can join Lync meetings from Firefox and Chrome
-
-
-
Sent to OneNote Print Driver
-
User can print to OneNote
-
-
-
OneNote Linked Notes
-
OneNote Linked Notes
-
-
-
Send to OneNote Internet Explorer Add-In
-
User can send to OneNote from IE
-
-
-
Firewall Exception for Lync and Outlook
-
Firewall Exception for Lync and Outlook
-
-
-
MAPI Client
-
Native apps and add-ins can interact with virtual Outlook through MAPI
-
-
-
SharePoint Plug-in for Firefox
-
User can use SharePoint features in Firefox
-
-
-
Mail Control Panel Applet
-
User gets the mail control panel applet in Outlook
Windows Explorer shell icon overlays when users look at folders OneDrive Pro folders
-
-
-
Shell extensions
-
-
-
-
Shortcuts
-
-
-
-
Windows Search
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-to-deploy-app-v-50-with-an-electronic-software-distribution-system.md b/mdop/appv-v5/planning-to-deploy-app-v-50-with-an-electronic-software-distribution-system.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0cc8198165..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-to-deploy-app-v-50-with-an-electronic-software-distribution-system.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning to Deploy App-V 5.0 with an Electronic Software Distribution System
-description: Planning to Deploy App-V 5.0 with an Electronic Software Distribution System
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 8cd3f1fb-b84e-4260-9e72-a14d01e7cadf
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning to Deploy App-V 5.0 with an Electronic Software Distribution System
-
-
-If you are using an electronic software distribution system to deploy App-V packages, review the following planning considerations. For information about using System Center Configuration Manager to deploy App-V, see [Introduction to Application Management in Configuration Manager](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=281816).
-
-Review the following component and architecture requirements options that apply when you use an ESD to deploy App-V packages:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Deployment requirement or option
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
The App-V Management server, Management database, and Publishing server are not required.
-
These functions are handled by the implemented ESD solution.
-
-
-
You can deploy the App-V Reporting server and Reporting database side by side with the ESD.
-
The side-by-side deployment lets you to collect data and generate reports.
-
If you enable the App-V client to send report information, and you are not using the App-V Reporting server, the reporting data is stored in associated .xml files.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-to-deploy-app-v-51-with-an-electronic-software-distribution-system.md b/mdop/appv-v5/planning-to-deploy-app-v-51-with-an-electronic-software-distribution-system.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6033a54f5b..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-to-deploy-app-v-51-with-an-electronic-software-distribution-system.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning to Deploy App-V 5.1 with an Electronic Software Distribution System
-description: Planning to Deploy App-V 5.1 with an Electronic Software Distribution System
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: c26602c2-5e8d-44e6-90df-adacc593607e
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning to Deploy App-V 5.1 with an Electronic Software Distribution System
-
-
-If you are using an electronic software distribution system to deploy App-V packages, review the following planning considerations. For information about using System Center Configuration Manager to deploy App-V, see [Introduction to Application Management in Configuration Manager](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=281816).
-
-Review the following component and architecture requirements options that apply when you use an ESD to deploy App-V packages:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Deployment requirement or option
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
The App-V Management server, Management database, and Publishing server are not required.
-
These functions are handled by the implemented ESD solution.
-
-
-
You can deploy the App-V Reporting server and Reporting database side by side with the ESD.
-
The side-by-side deployment lets you to collect data and generate reports.
-
If you enable the App-V client to send report information, and you are not using the App-V Reporting server, the reporting data is stored in associated .xml files.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy App-V](planning-to-deploy-app-v51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-to-deploy-app-v.md b/mdop/appv-v5/planning-to-deploy-app-v.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c12ddb523d..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-to-deploy-app-v.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,97 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning to Deploy App-V
-description: Planning to Deploy App-V
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 28d3035c-3805-4339-90fc-6c3fd3b1123e
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning to Deploy App-V
-
-
-You should consider a number of different deployment configurations and prerequisites before you create your deployment plan for Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0. This section includes information that can help you gather the information that you must have to formulate a deployment plan that best meets your business requirements.
-
-## App-V 5.0 supported configurations
-
-
-Describes the minimum hardware and operating system requirements for each App-V components. For information about software prerequisites that you must install before you install App-V, see [App-V 5.0 Prerequisites](app-v-50-prerequisites.md).
-
-[App-V 5.0 Supported Configurations](app-v-50-supported-configurations.md)
-
-## App-V 5.0 capacity planning
-
-
-Describes the available options for scaling your App-V 5.0 deployment.
-
-[App-V 5.0 Capacity Planning](app-v-50-capacity-planning.md)
-
-## Planning for high availability with App-V 5.0
-
-
-Describes the available options for ensuring high availability of App-V 5.0 databases and services.
-
-[Planning for High Availability with App-V 5.0](planning-for-high-availability-with-app-v-50.md)
-
-## Planning to Deploy App-V 5.0 with an Electronic Software Distribution System
-
-
-Describes the options and requirements for deploying App-V with an electronic software distribution system.
-
-[Planning to Deploy App-V 5.0 with an Electronic Software Distribution System](planning-to-deploy-app-v-50-with-an-electronic-software-distribution-system.md)
-
-## Planning for the App-V 5.0 Server deployment
-
-
-Describes the planning considerations for the App-V Server components and their functions.
-
-[Planning for the App-V 5.0 Server Deployment](planning-for-the-app-v-50-server-deployment.md)
-
-## Planning for the App-V 5.0 Sequencer and Client deployment
-
-
-Describes the planning considerations for the App-V Client and for the Sequencer software, which you use to create virtual applications and application packages.
-
-[Planning for the App-V 5.0 Sequencer and Client Deployment](planning-for-the-app-v-50-sequencer-and-client-deployment.md)
-
-## Planning for migrating from a previous version of App-V
-
-
-Describes the recommended path for migrating from previous versions of App-V, while ensuring that existing server configurations, packages and clients continue to work in your new App-V environment.
-
-[Planning for Migrating from a Previous Version of App-V](planning-for-migrating-from-a-previous-version-of-app-v.md)
-
-## Planning for using App-V with Office
-
-
-Describes the requirements for using App-V with Office and explains the supported scenarios, including information about coexisting versions of Office.
-
-[Planning for Using App-V with Office](planning-for-using-app-v-with-office.md)
-
-## Planning to use folder redirection with App-V
-
-
-Explains how folder redirection works with App-V.
-
-[Planning to Use Folder Redirection with App-V](planning-to-use-folder-redirection-with-app-v.md)
-
-## Other Resources for App-V 5.0 Planning
-
-
-- [Planning for App-V 5.0](planning-for-app-v-50-rc.md)[Performance Guidance for Application Virtualization 5.0](performance-guidance-for-application-virtualization-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-to-deploy-app-v51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/planning-to-deploy-app-v51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index dc0bca0071..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-to-deploy-app-v51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,99 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning to Deploy App-V
-description: Planning to Deploy App-V
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 39cbf981-d9c6-457f-b047-f9046e1a6442
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning to Deploy App-V
-
-
-You should consider a number of different deployment configurations and prerequisites before you create your deployment plan for Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1. This section includes information that can help you gather the information that you must have to formulate a deployment plan that best meets your business requirements.
-
-## App-V 5.1 supported configurations
-
-
-Describes the minimum hardware and operating system requirements for each App-V components. For information about software prerequisites that you must install before you install App-V, see [App-V 5.1 Prerequisites](app-v-51-prerequisites.md).
-
-[App-V 5.1 Supported Configurations](app-v-51-supported-configurations.md)
-
-## App-V 5.1 capacity planning
-
-
-Describes the available options for scaling your App-V 5.1 deployment.
-
-[App-V 5.1 Capacity Planning](app-v-51-capacity-planning.md)
-
-## Planning for high availability with App-V 5.1
-
-
-Describes the available options for ensuring high availability of App-V 5.1 databases and services.
-
-[Planning for High Availability with App-V 5.1](planning-for-high-availability-with-app-v-51.md)
-
-## Planning to Deploy App-V 5.1 with an Electronic Software Distribution System
-
-
-Describes the options and requirements for deploying App-V with an electronic software distribution system.
-
-[Planning to Deploy App-V 5.1 with an Electronic Software Distribution System](planning-to-deploy-app-v-51-with-an-electronic-software-distribution-system.md)
-
-## Planning for the App-V 5.1 Server deployment
-
-
-Describes the planning considerations for the App-V Server components and their functions.
-
-[Planning for the App-V 5.1 Server Deployment](planning-for-the-app-v-51-server-deployment.md)
-
-## Planning for the App-V 5.1 Sequencer and Client deployment
-
-
-Describes the planning considerations for the App-V Client and for the Sequencer software, which you use to create virtual applications and application packages.
-
-[Planning for the App-V 5.1 Sequencer and Client Deployment](planning-for-the-app-v-51-sequencer-and-client-deployment.md)
-
-## Planning for migrating from a previous version of App-V
-
-
-Describes the recommended path for migrating from previous versions of App-V, while ensuring that existing server configurations, packages and clients continue to work in your new App-V environment.
-
-[Planning for Migrating from a Previous Version of App-V](planning-for-migrating-from-a-previous-version-of-app-v51.md)
-
-## Planning for using App-V with Office
-
-
-Describes the requirements for using App-V with Office and explains the supported scenarios, including information about coexisting versions of Office.
-
-[Planning for Using App-V with Office](planning-for-using-app-v-with-office51.md)
-
-## Planning to use folder redirection with App-V
-
-
-Explains how folder redirection works with App-V.
-
-[Planning to Use Folder Redirection with App-V](planning-to-use-folder-redirection-with-app-v51.md)
-
-## Other Resources for App-V 5.1 Planning
-
-
-- [Planning for App-V 5.1](planning-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-- [Performance Guidance for Application Virtualization 5.1](performance-guidance-for-application-virtualization-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-to-use-folder-redirection-with-app-v.md b/mdop/appv-v5/planning-to-use-folder-redirection-with-app-v.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5d2759961a..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-to-use-folder-redirection-with-app-v.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,193 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning to Use Folder Redirection with App-V
-description: Planning to Use Folder Redirection with App-V
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 2a4deeed-fdc0-465c-b88a-3a2fbbf27436
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning to Use Folder Redirection with App-V
-
-
-App-V 5.0 SP2 supports the use of folder redirection, a feature that enables users and administrators to redirect the path of a folder to a new location.
-
-This topic contains the following sections:
-
-- [Requirements for using folder redirection](#bkmk-folder-redir-reqs)
-
-- [How to configure folder redirection for use with App-V](#bkmk-folder-redir-cfg)
-
-- [How folder redirection works with App-V](#bkmk-folder-redir-works)
-
-- [Overview of folder redirection](#bkmk-folder-redir-overview)
-
-## Requirements and unsupported scenarios for using folder redirection
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Requirements
-
To use %AppData% folder redirection, you must:
-
-
Have an App-V package that has an AppData virtual file system (VFS) folder.
-
Enable folder redirection and redirect users’ folders to a shared folder, typically a network folder.
-
Roam both or neither of the following:
-
-
Files under %appdata%\Microsoft\AppV\Client\Catalog
-
Registry settings under HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\AppV\Client\Packages
Ensure that the following folders are available to each user who logs into the computer that is running the App-V 5.0 SP2 or later client:
-
-
%AppData% is configured to the desired network location (with or without Offline Files support).
-
%LocalAppData% is configured to the desired local folder.
-
-
-
-
-
Unsupported scenarios
-
-
Configuring %LocalAppData% as a network drive.
-
Redirecting the Start menu to a single folder for multiple users.
-
If roaming AppData (%AppData%) is redirected to a network share that is not available, App-V applications will fail to launch as follows:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
App-V version
-
Scenario description
-
-
-
-
-
In App-V 5.0 through App-V 5.0 SP2 plus hotfixes
-
This failure will occur regardless of whether Offline Files is enabled.
-
-
-
In App-V 5.0 SP3
-
If the unavailable network share has been enabled for Offline Files, the App-V application will start successfully.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## How to configure folder redirection for use with App-V
-
-
-Folder redirection can be applied to different folders, such as Desktop, My Documents, My Pictures, etc. However, the only folder that impacts the use of App-V applications is the user’s roaming AppData folder (%AppData%). You can apply folder redirection to any other supported folders without impacting App-V.
-
-## How folder redirection works with App-V
-
-
-The following table describes how folder redirection works when %AppData% is redirected to a network and when you have met the requirements listed earlier in this article.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Virtual environment state
-
Action that occurs
-
-
-
-
-
When the virtual environment starts
-
The virtual file system (VFS) AppData folder is mapped to the local AppData folder (%LocalAppData%) instead of to the user’s roaming AppData folder (%AppData%).
-
-
LocalAppData contains a local cache of the user’s roaming AppData folder for the package in use. The local cache is located under:
The latest data from the user’s roaming AppData folder is copied to and replaces the data currently in the local cache.
-
While the virtual environment is running, data continues to be saved to the local cache. Data is served only out of %LocalAppData% and is not moved or synchronized with %AppData% until the end user shuts down the computer.
-
Entries to the AppData folder are made using the user context, not the system context.
-
-
-Note
The App-V client folder redirection sometimes fails to move files from %AppData% to %LocalAppData%. See Release Notes for App-V 5.0 SP2.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
When the virtual environment shuts down
-
The local cached data in AppData (roaming) is zipped up and copied to the “real” roaming AppData folder in %AppData%. A time stamp, which indicates the last known upload, is simultaneously saved as a registry key under:
To provide redundancy, App-V 5.0 keeps the three most recent copies of the compressed data under %AppData%.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Overview of folder redirection
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Purpose
-
Enables end users to work with files, which have been redirected to another folder, as if the files still existed on the local drive.
-
-
-
Description
-
Folder redirection allows users and administrators to redirect the path of a folder to a network location. The documents in the folder are available to the user from any computer on the network.
-
-
Folder redirection allows users and administrators to redirect the path of a folder to a network location. The documents in the folder are available to the user from any computer on the network.
-
The new location can be a folder on the local computer or a folder on a shared network.
-
Folder redirection updates the files immediately, whereas roaming data is typically synchronized when the user logs in or logs off.
-
-
-
-
Usage example
-
You can redirect the Documents folder, which is usually stored on the computer's local hard disk, to a network location. The user can access the documents in the folder from any computer on the network.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-to-use-folder-redirection-with-app-v51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/planning-to-use-folder-redirection-with-app-v51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index adf150f3e1..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/planning-to-use-folder-redirection-with-app-v51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,193 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning to Use Folder Redirection with App-V
-description: Planning to Use Folder Redirection with App-V
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 6bea9a8f-a915-4d7d-be67-ef1cca1398ed
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning to Use Folder Redirection with App-V
-
-
-Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 supports the use of folder redirection, a feature that enables users and administrators to redirect the path of a folder to a new location.
-
-This topic contains the following sections:
-
-- [Requirements for using folder redirection](#bkmk-folder-redir-reqs)
-
-- [How to configure folder redirection for use with App-V](#bkmk-folder-redir-cfg)
-
-- [How folder redirection works with App-V](#bkmk-folder-redir-works)
-
-- [Overview of folder redirection](#bkmk-folder-redir-overview)
-
-## Requirements and unsupported scenarios for using folder redirection
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Requirements
-
To use %AppData% folder redirection, you must:
-
-
Have an App-V package that has an AppData virtual file system (VFS) folder.
-
Enable folder redirection and redirect users’ folders to a shared folder, typically a network folder.
-
Roam both or neither of the following:
-
-
Files under %appdata%\Microsoft\AppV\Client\Catalog
-
Registry settings under HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\AppV\Client\Packages
Ensure that the following folders are available to each user who logs into the computer that is running the App-V 5.0 SP2 or later client:
-
-
%AppData% is configured to the desired network location (with or without Offline Files support).
-
%LocalAppData% is configured to the desired local folder.
-
-
-
-
-
Unsupported scenarios
-
-
Configuring %LocalAppData% as a network drive.
-
Redirecting the Start menu to a single folder for multiple users.
-
If roaming AppData (%AppData%) is redirected to a network share that is not available, App-V applications will fail to launch as follows:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
App-V version
-
Scenario description
-
-
-
-
-
In App-V 5.0 through App-V 5.0 SP2 plus hotfixes
-
This failure will occur regardless of whether Offline Files is enabled.
-
-
-
In App-V 5.0 SP3 and later
-
If the unavailable network share has been enabled for Offline Files, the App-V application will start successfully.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## How to configure folder redirection for use with App-V
-
-
-Folder redirection can be applied to different folders, such as Desktop, My Documents, My Pictures, etc. However, the only folder that impacts the use of App-V applications is the user’s roaming AppData folder (%AppData%). You can apply folder redirection to any other supported folders without impacting App-V.
-
-## How folder redirection works with App-V
-
-
-The following table describes how folder redirection works when %AppData% is redirected to a network and when you have met the requirements listed earlier in this article.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Virtual environment state
-
Action that occurs
-
-
-
-
-
When the virtual environment starts
-
The virtual file system (VFS) AppData folder is mapped to the local AppData folder (%LocalAppData%) instead of to the user’s roaming AppData folder (%AppData%).
-
-
LocalAppData contains a local cache of the user’s roaming AppData folder for the package in use. The local cache is located under:
The latest data from the user’s roaming AppData folder is copied to and replaces the data currently in the local cache.
-
While the virtual environment is running, data continues to be saved to the local cache. Data is served only out of %LocalAppData% and is not moved or synchronized with %AppData% until the end user shuts down the computer.
-
Entries to the AppData folder are made using the user context, not the system context.
-
-
-Note
The App-V client folder redirection sometimes fails to move files from %AppData% to %LocalAppData%. See Release Notes for App-V 5.0 SP2.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
When the virtual environment shuts down
-
The local cached data in AppData (roaming) is zipped up and copied to the “real” roaming AppData folder in %AppData%. A time stamp, which indicates the last known upload, is simultaneously saved as a registry key under:
To provide redundancy, App-V keeps the three most recent copies of the compressed data under %AppData%.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Overview of folder redirection
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Purpose
-
Enables end users to work with files, which have been redirected to another folder, as if the files still existed on the local drive.
-
-
-
Description
-
Folder redirection allows users and administrators to redirect the path of a folder to a network location. The documents in the folder are available to the user from any computer on the network.
-
-
Folder redirection allows users and administrators to redirect the path of a folder to a network location. The documents in the folder are available to the user from any computer on the network.
-
The new location can be a folder on the local computer or a folder on a shared network.
-
Folder redirection updates the files immediately, whereas roaming data is typically synchronized when the user logs in or logs off.
-
-
-
-
Usage example
-
You can redirect the Documents folder, which is usually stored on the computer's local hard disk, to a network location. The user can access the documents in the folder from any computer on the network.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/preparing-your-environment-for-app-v-50.md b/mdop/appv-v5/preparing-your-environment-for-app-v-50.md
deleted file mode 100644
index aa0bb21af5..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/preparing-your-environment-for-app-v-50.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,60 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Preparing Your Environment for App-V 5.0
-description: Preparing Your Environment for App-V 5.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 119d990e-a6c6-47b7-a7b0-52f88205e5ec
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Preparing Your Environment for App-V 5.0
-
-
-There are a number of different deployment configurations and prerequisites that you must consider before you create your deployment plan. This section includes information that can help you gather the information that you must have to formulate a deployment plan that best meets your business requirements.”
-
-## App-V 5.0 prerequisites
-
-
-- [App-V 5.0 Prerequisites](app-v-50-prerequisites.md)
-
- Lists the prerequisite software that you must install before installing App-V 5.0.
-
-## App-V 5.0 SP3 prerequisites
-
-
-- [App-V 5.0 SP3 Prerequisites](app-v-50-sp3-prerequisites.md)
-
- Lists the prerequisite software that you must install before installing App-V 5.0 SP3.
-
-## App-V 5.0 security considerations
-
-
-- [App-V 5.0 Security Considerations](app-v-50-security-considerations.md)
-
- Describes accounts, groups, log files, and other considerations for securing your App-V environment.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Other resources for App-V 5.0 Planning
-
-
-- [Planning for App-V 5.0](planning-for-app-v-50-rc.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/preparing-your-environment-for-app-v-51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/preparing-your-environment-for-app-v-51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 05f376d410..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/preparing-your-environment-for-app-v-51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Preparing Your Environment for App-V 5.1
-description: Preparing Your Environment for App-V 5.1
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 64b2e1ac-1561-4c99-9815-b4688a0ff48a
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Preparing Your Environment for App-V 5.1
-
-
-There are a number of different deployment configurations and prerequisites that you must consider before you create your deployment plan for Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1. This section includes information that can help you gather the information that you must have to formulate a deployment plan that best meets your business requirements.
-
-## App-V 5.1 prerequisites
-
-
-- [App-V 5.1 Prerequisites](app-v-51-prerequisites.md)
-
- Lists the prerequisite software that you must install before installing App-V 5.1.
-
-## App-V 5.1 security considerations
-
-
-- [App-V 5.1 Security Considerations](app-v-51-security-considerations.md)
-
- Describes accounts, groups, log files, and other considerations for securing your App-V environment.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Other resources for App-V 5.1 Planning
-
-
-- [Planning for App-V 5.1](planning-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/release-notes-for-app-v-50-sp1.md b/mdop/appv-v5/release-notes-for-app-v-50-sp1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a24b405c96..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/release-notes-for-app-v-50-sp1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,74 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Release Notes for App-V 5.0 SP1
-description: Release Notes for App-V 5.0 SP1
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 21a859cd-41b4-4cc4-9c9c-7ba236084bb0
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Release Notes for App-V 5.0 SP1
-
-
-**To search for a specific issue in these release notes, press CTRL+F.**
-
-Read these release notes thoroughly before you install App-V 5.0 SP1.
-
-These release notes contain information that is required to successfully install App-V 5.0 SP1. The release notes also contain information that is not available in the product documentation. If there is a difference between these release notes and other App-V 5.0 documentation, the latest change should be considered authoritative. These release notes supersede the content that is included with this product.
-
-## About the Product Documentation
-
-
-For information about App-V 5.0 documentation, see the App-V 5.0 home page on Microsoft TechNet.
-
-## Provide Feedback
-
-
-We are interested in your feedback on App-V 5.0. You can send your feedback to .
-
-**Note**
-This email address is not a support channel, but your feedback will help us to plan for future changes in our documentation and product releases.
-
-
-
-For the latest information about MDOP and additional learning resources, see the [MDOP Information Experience](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=236032) page.
-
-For more information about new updates or to provide feedback, follow us on [Facebook](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=242445) or [Twitter](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=242447).
-
-## Known Issues with App-V 5.0 SP1
-
-
-There are no App-V 5.0 SP1 release notes at this time. This topic will be updated if issues are reported in future.
-
-## Release Notes Copyright Information
-
-
-Microsoft, Active Directory, ActiveX, Bing, Excel, Silverlight, SQL Server, Windows, Microsoft Intune, and Windows PowerShell are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[About App-V 5.0](about-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/release-notes-for-app-v-50-sp2.md b/mdop/appv-v5/release-notes-for-app-v-50-sp2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8a8faa9757..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/release-notes-for-app-v-50-sp2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,170 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Release Notes for App-V 5.0 SP2
-description: Release Notes for App-V 5.0 SP2
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: fe73139d-240c-4ed5-8e59-6ae76ee8e80c
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Release Notes for App-V 5.0 SP2
-
-
-**To search for a specific issue in these release notes, press CTRL+F.**
-
-Read these release notes thoroughly before you install App-V 5.0 SP2.
-
-These release notes contain information that is required to successfully install App-V 5.0 SP2. The release notes also contain information that is not available in the product documentation. If there are differences between these release notes and other App-V 5.0 documentation, the latest change should be considered authoritative. These release notes supersede the content that is included with this product.
-
-## About the Product Documentation
-
-
-For information about App-V 5.0 documentation, see the App-V 5.0 home page on Microsoft TechNet.
-
-## Provide Feedback
-
-
-We are interested in your feedback on App-V 5.0. You can send your feedback to .
-
-**Note**
-This email address is not a support channel, but your feedback will help us to plan for future changes in our documentation and product releases.
-
-
-
-For the latest information about MDOP and additional learning resources, see the [MDOP Information Experience](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=236032) page.
-
-For more information about new updates or to provide feedback, follow us on [Facebook](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=242445) or [Twitter](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=242447).
-
-## Known Issues with Hotfix Package 4 for Application Virtualization 5.0 SP2
-
-
-### Packages stop working after you uninstall Hotfix Package 4 for Application Virtualization 5.0 SP2
-
-Packages published when Hotfix Package 4 for Application Virtualization 5.0 SP2 is applied stop working when Hotfix Package 4 for Application Virtualization 5.0 SP2 is removed.
-
-WORKAROUND:
-
-If the following folder exists, then you must delete it:
-
-**%localappdata%** \\ **Microsoft** \\ **AppV** \\ **Client** \\ **VFS** \\ **<package ID>** for each package that was published.
-
-**Note**
-You must have elevated privileges to delete this folder.
-
-
-
-To use a script, for each user account on the computer and for each package id that was published after installing Hotfix Package 4 for Application Virtualization 5.0 SP2:
-
-`Rd /s /q “%systemdrive%\users\[UserName]\AppData\Local\Microsoft\AppV\Client\VFS\[Package ID]`
-
-- The shortcuts will remain with the user sessions even after deleting the folder from the directory in the previous section, so you can click on the shortcut to run the application again. There is no need to re-publish the application.
-
-- This issue happens for both user published packaged and globally published packages for example, Microsoft Office 2013. The folder must be deleted for both types of packages.
-
-- You do not need to delete the VFS folder in the Roaming app data (**%appdata%**). Only the **%localappdata%** must be deleted.
-
-### Microsoft Office integration points to wrong file system location
-
-Microsoft Office integration points to wrong file system location (Groove.exe error message).
-
-WORKAROUND:
-
-Use one of the following methods:
-
-1. Delete the shortcut in the start-up folder after upgrade.
-
-2. Change the shortcut in the start-up folder using a script.
-
-3. Use the deployment configuration file to specify the shortcut target to the integration root.
-
-### Hotfix Package 4 for Application Virtualization 5.0 SP2 installer can take a long time
-
-The Hotfix Package 4 for Application Virtualization 5.0 SP2 installer can potentially take a long time depending on how many files are stored in the existing package cache.
-
-Updating associated package security descriptors during the Hotfix Package 4 for Application Virtualization 5.0 SP2 installation has a significant impact on how long it takes the installation will take. Previously, the installation install was standard in duration. However, it now depends on how many files you have staged in the package cache.
-
-WORKAROUND: None
-
-### Uninstalling Hotfix Package 4 for Application Virtualization 5.0 SP2 fails if JIT-V package is in use
-
-If you install Hotfix Package 4 for Application Virtualization 5.0 SP2 and then try to uninstall the hotfix when just-in-time virtualization (JIT-V) is being used, the operation will fail if all of the following conditions are true:
-
-- You installed by using a Windows Installer file (.msi), and then you apply updates by using a Microsoft Installer Patch File (.msp).
-
-- You try to uninstall an update by using the Add or Remove Programs item in Control Panel.
-
-- A JIT-V-enabled package is running on the computer.
-
-WORKAROUND: Complete the following steps:
-
-1. Open Windows PowerShell and run the following commands:
-
- - **Import-module appvclient**
-
- - **Get-AppvClientPackage | Stop-AppvClientPackage**
-
-2. Uninstall the update using Add or Remove Programs.
-
-## Known Issues with App-V 5.0 SP2
-
-
-### App-V client folder redirection sometimes fails to move files from %AppData% to %LocalAppData%
-
-When %AppData% is a shared network folder that you have configured for folder redirection, the changes that end users make to AppData (Roaming) can be lost when they switch computers or when their local AppData is cleared when they log off and then log back on. This error occurs because the registry key (AppDataTime), which indicates the last known upload, gets out of synchronization with the local cached AppData.
-
-WORKAROUND: Manually delete the following registry key for each relevant package when an end user logs on or off:
-
-``` syntax
-HKCU\Software\Microsoft\AppV\Client\Packages\\AppDataTime
-```
-
-The first time that end users start an application in the package after they log in, App-V forces a download of the zipped %AppData%, even if %LocalAppData% is already up to date.
-
-### App-V 5.0 Service Pack 2 (App-V 5.0 SP2) does not include a new version of the App-V Server
-
-App-V 5.0 SP2 does not include a new version of the App-V Server. If you deploy App-V 5.0 SP2 clients running Windows 8.1 in your environment and plan to manage the clients using the App-V infrastructure, you must install [Hotfix Package 2 for Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0 Service Pack 1](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=386634). (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=386634)
-
-If you are running and managing App-V 5.0 SP2 clients using any of the following methods no client update is required:
-
-- Standalone mode.
-
-- Configuration Manager.
-
-- Third party ESD.
-
-The App-V 5.0 SP2 client is fully compatible with Windows 8.1
-
-WORKAROUND: None.
-
-## Release Notes Copyright Information
-
-
-Microsoft, Active Directory, ActiveX, Bing, Excel, Silverlight, SQL Server, Windows, Microsoft Intune, and Windows PowerShell are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[About App-V 5.0 SP2](about-app-v-50-sp2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/release-notes-for-app-v-50-sp3.md b/mdop/appv-v5/release-notes-for-app-v-50-sp3.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 9eb47a741d..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/release-notes-for-app-v-50-sp3.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Release Notes for App-V 5.0 SP3
-description: Release Notes for App-V 5.0 SP3
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: bc4806e0-2aba-4c7b-9ecc-1b2cc54af1d0
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Release Notes for App-V 5.0 SP3
-
-
-The following are known issues in Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.0 SP3.
-
-## Server files fail to get deleted after a new App-V 5.0 SP3 Server installation
-
-
-If you uninstall the App-V 5.0 SP1 Server and then install the App-V 5.0 SP3 Server, the installation fails and the wrong version of the Management server is installed. The following errors are displayed:
-
-`[0A5C:06F8][2014-09-12T19:08:00]i102: Detected related bundle: {bee44f0f-05be-48e4-81dd-d34a83600b95}, type: Upgrade, scope: PerMachine, version: 5.0.1218.0, operation: MajorUpgrade``[0A5C:06F8][2014-09-12T19:08:00]i000: AppvUX: A previous version of this product is installed; requesting upgrade.``[0A5C:06F8][2014-09-12T19:08:00]i102: Detected related bundle: {e1ca9d65-0ebf-4fd5-98e5-00d6453967a4}, type: Upgrade, scope: PerMachine, version: 5.0.1224.0, operation: MajorUpgrade``[0A5C:06F8][2014-09-12T19:08:00]i000: AppvUX: A previous version of this product is installed; requesting upgrade.`
-
-The issue occurs because the Server files are not being deleted when you uninstall App-V 5.0 SP1, so the App-V 5.0 SP3 installation process erroneously does an upgrade instead of a new installation.
-
-**Workaround**: Delete the following registry key before you start installing App-V 5.0 SP3:
-
-`HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Uninstall`
-
-## Querying AD DS can cause some applications to work incorrectly
-
-
-When you receive updated packages by querying Active Directory Domain Services for updated group memberships, it can cause some applications to work incorrectly if the applications depend on the user’s access token. In addition, frequent group membership queries can cause the domain controller to overload. For more information about user access tokens, see [Access Tokens](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/desktop/aa374909.aspx).
-
-**Workaround**: Wait until the user logs off and then logs back on before you query for updated group memberships. Do not use the registry key, described in [Hotfix Package 2 for Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0 Service Pack 1](https://support.microsoft.com/kb/2897087), to query for updated group memberships.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[About App-V 5.0 SP3](about-app-v-50-sp3.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/release-notes-for-app-v-50.md b/mdop/appv-v5/release-notes-for-app-v-50.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 417148f521..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/release-notes-for-app-v-50.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,86 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Release Notes for App-V 5.0
-description: Release Notes for App-V 5.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 68a6a5a1-4b3c-4c09-b00c-9ca4237695d5
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Release Notes for App-V 5.0
-
-
-**To search for a specific issue in these release notes, press CTRL+F.**
-
-Read these release notes thoroughly before you install App-V 5.0.
-
-These release notes contain information that is required to successfully install App-V 5.0. The release notes also contain information that is not available in the product documentation. If there is a difference between these release notes and other App-V 5.0 documentation, the latest change should be considered authoritative. These release notes supersede the content that is included with this product.
-
-## About the Product Documentation
-
-
-For information about App-V 5.0 documentation, see the App-V 5.0 home page on Microsoft TechNet.
-
-## Provide Feedback
-
-
-We are interested in your feedback on App-V 5.0. You can send your feedback to .
-
-**Note**
-This email address is not a support channel, but your feedback will help us to plan for future changes in our documentation and product releases.
-
-
-
-For the latest information about MDOP and additional learning resources, see the [MDOP Information Experience](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=236032) page.
-
-For more information about new updates or to provide feedback, follow us on [Facebook](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=242445) or [Twitter](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=242447).
-
-## Known Issues with App-V 5.0
-
-
-This section contains release notes about the known issues with App-V 5.0.
-
-### Unable to terminate adding packages when using server PowerShell cmdlets
-
-When you add a package using PowerShell, there is no method to exit adding new packages.
-
-WORKAROUND: To stop adding packages, press **enter** after you have added the final package.
-
-### App-V 5.0 client rejects packages from servers whose SSL certificate has been revoked
-
-When using the HTTPS protocol, the App-V 5.0 client will by default reject packages from servers whose SSL certificate has been revoked. This behavior can be turned off through configuration by modifying the **VerifyCertificateRevocationList** setting. Applying new configuration for this setting will not take effect until the App-V 5.0 service is restarted.
-
-WORKAROUND: Restart the App-V 5.0 service.
-
-## Release Notes Copyright Information
-
-
-Microsoft, Active Directory, ActiveX, Bing, Excel, Silverlight, SQL Server, Windows, Microsoft Intune, and Windows PowerShell are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[About App-V 5.0](about-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/release-notes-for-app-v-51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/release-notes-for-app-v-51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f96c8ae1d2..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/release-notes-for-app-v-51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,205 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Release Notes for App-V 5.1
-description: Release Notes for App-V 5.1
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 62c5be3b-0a46-4512-93ed-97c23184f343
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 09/26/2016
----
-
-
-# Release Notes for App-V 5.1
-
-
-The following are known issues in Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1.
-
-## Error occurs during publishing refresh between App-V 5.0 SP3 Management Server and App-V 5.1 Client on Windows 10
-
-
-An error is generated during publishing refresh when synchronizing packages from the App-V 5.0 SP3 management server to an App-V 5.1 client on Windows 10 . This error occurs because the App-V 5.0 SP3 server does not understand the Windows 10 operating system that is specified in the publishing URL. The issue is fixed for App-V 5.1 publishing server, but is not backported to versions of App-V 5.0 SP3 or earlier.
-
-**Workaround**: Upgrade the App-V 5.0 Management server to the App-V 5.1 Management server for Windows 10 Clients.
-
-## Custom configurations do not get applied for packages that will be published globally if they are set using the App-V 5.1 Server
-
-
-If you assign a package to an AD group that contains machine accounts and apply a custom configuration to that group using the App-V Server, the custom configuration will not be applied to those machines. The App-V 5.1 Client will publish packages assigned to a machine account globally. However, it stores custom configuration files per user in each user’s profile. Globally published packages will not have access to this custom configuration.
-
-**Workaround**: Do one of the following:
-
-- Assign the package to groups containing only user accounts. This will ensure that the package’s custom configuration will be stored in each user’s profile and will be applied correctly.
-
-- Create a custom deployment configuration file and apply it to the package on the client using the Add-AppvClientPackage cmdlet with the –DynamicDeploymentConfiguration parameter. See [About App-V 5.1 Dynamic Configuration](about-app-v-51-dynamic-configuration.md) for more information.
-
-- Create a new package with the custom configuration using the App-V 5.1 Sequencer.
-
-## Server files not deleted after new App-V 5.1 Server installation
-
-
-If you uninstall the App-V 5.0 SP1 Server and then install the App-V 5.1 Server, the installation fails, the wrong version of the Management server is installed, and an error message is returned. The issue occurs because the Server files are not being deleted when you uninstall App-V 5.0 SP1, so the installation process does an upgrade instead of a new installation.
-
-**Workaround**: Delete this registry key before you start installing App-V 5.1:
-
-Under HKEY\_LOCAL\_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Wow6432Node\\Microsoft\\Windows\\CurrentVersion\\Uninstall, locate and delete the installation GUID key that contains the DWORD value "DisplayName" with value data "Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) Server". This is the only key that should be deleted.
-
-## File type associations added manually are not saved correctly
-
-
-File type associations added to an application package manually using the Shortcuts and FTAs tab at the end of the application upgrade wizard are not saved correctly. They will not be available to the App-V Client or to the Sequencer when updating the saved package again.
-
-**Workaround**: To add a file type association, open the package for modification and run the update wizard. During the Installation step, add the new file type association through the operating system. The sequencer will detect the new association in the system registry and add it to the package’s virtual registry, where it will be available to the client.
-
-## When streaming packages in Shared Content Store (SCS) mode to a client that is also managed with AppLocker, additional data is written to the local disk.
-
-
-To decrease the amount of data written to a client’s local disk, you can enable SCS mode on the App-V 5.1 Client to stream the contents of a package on demand. However, if AppLocker manages an application within the package, some data might be written to the client’s local disk that would not otherwise be written.
-
-**Workaround**: None
-
-## In the Management Console Add Package dialog box, the Browse button is not available when using Chrome or Firefox
-
-
-On the Packages page of the Management Console, if you click **Add or Upgrade** in the lower-right corner, the **Add Package** dialog box appears. If you are accessing the Management Console using Chrome or Firefox as your browser, you will not be able to browse to the location of the package.
-
-**Workaround**: Type or copy and paste the path to the package into the **Add Package** input field. If the Management Console has access to this path, you will be able to add the package. If the package is on a network share, you can browse to the location using File Explorer by doing these steps:
-
-1. While pressing **Shift**, right-click on the package file
-
-2. Select **Copy as path**
-
-3. Paste the path into the **Add Package** dialog box input field
-
-## Upgrading App-V Management Server to 5.1 sometimes fails with the message “A database error occurred”
-
-
-If you install the App-V 5.0 SP1 Management Server, and then try to upgrade to App-V 5.1 Server when multiple connection groups are configured and enabled, the following error is displayed: “A database error occurred. Reason: 'Invalid column name 'PackageOptional'. Invalid column name 'VersionOptional'.”
-
-**Workaround**: Run this command on your SQL database:
-
-`ALTER TABLE AppVManagement.dbo.PackageGroupMembers ADD PackageOptional bit NOT NULL DEFAULT 0, VersionOptional bit NOT NULL DEFAULT 0`
-
-where “AppVManagement” is the name of the database.
-
-## Users cannot open a package in a user-published connection group if you add or remove an optional package
-
-
-In environments that are running the RDS Client or that have multiple concurrent users per computer, logged-in users cannot open applications in packages that are in a user-published connection group if an optional package is added to or removed from the connection group.
-
-**Workaround**: Have users log out and then log back in.
-
-## Error message is erroneously displayed when the connection group is published only to the user
-
-
-When you run Repair-AppvClientConnectionGroup, the following error is displayed, even when the connection group is published only to the user: “Internal App-V Integration error: Package not integrated for the user. Please ensure that the package is added to the machine and published to the user.”
-
-**Workaround**: Do one of the following:
-
-- Publish all packages in a connection group.
-
- The problem arises when the connection group being repaired has packages that are missing or not available to the user (that is, not published globally or to the user). However, the repair will work if all of the connection group’s packages are available, so ensure that all packages are published.
-
-- Repair packages individually using the Repair-AppvClientPackage command rather than the Repair-AppvClientConnectionGroup command.
-
- Determine which packages are available to users and then run the Repair-AppvClientPackage command once for each package. Use PowerShell cmdlets to do the following:
-
- 1. Get all the packages in a connection group.
-
- 2. Check to see if each package is currently published.
-
- 3. If the package is currently published, run Repair-AppvClientPackage on that package.
-
-## Icons not displayed properly in Sequencer
-
-
-Icons in the Shortcuts and File Type Associations tab are not displayed correctly when modifying a package in the App-V Sequencer. This problem occurs when the size of the icons are not 16x16 or 32x32.
-
-**Workaround**: Only use icons that are 16x16 or 32x32.
-
-## InsertVersionInfo.sql script no longer required for the Management Database
-
-
-The InsertVersionInfo.sql script is not required for versions of the App-V management database later than App-V 5.0 SP3.
-
-The Permissions.sql script should be updated according to **Step 2** in [KB article 3031340](https://support.microsoft.com/kb/3031340).
-
-**Important**
-**Step 1** is not required for versions of App-V later than App-V 5.0 SP3.
-
-
-
-## Microsoft Visual Studio 2012 not supported
-
-
-App-V 5.1 does not support Visual Studio 2012.
-
-**Workaround**: None
-
-## Application filename restrictions for App-V 5.x Sequencer
-
-
-The App-V 5.x Sequencer cannot sequence applications with filenames matching "CO_<x>" where x is any numeral. Error 0x8007139F will be generated.
-
-**Workaround**: Use a different filename
-
-## Intermittent "File Not Found" error when Mounting a Package
-
-
-Occasionally when mounting a package, a "File Not Found" (0x80070002) error is generated. Typically, this occurs when a folder in an App-V package contains many files ( i.e. 20K or more). This can cause streaming to take longer than expected and to time out which generates the "File Not Found" error.
-
-**Workaround**: Starting with HF06, a new registry key has been introduced to enable extending this time-out period.
-
-
5
-Note: this value is the default if the registry key is not defined or a value <=5 is specified.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[About App-V 5.1](about-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/running-a-locally-installed-application-inside-a-virtual-environment-with-virtualized-applications.md b/mdop/appv-v5/running-a-locally-installed-application-inside-a-virtual-environment-with-virtualized-applications.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6a49308d73..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/running-a-locally-installed-application-inside-a-virtual-environment-with-virtualized-applications.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,195 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Running a Locally Installed Application Inside a Virtual Environment with Virtualized Applications
-description: Running a Locally Installed Application Inside a Virtual Environment with Virtualized Applications
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: a8affa46-f1f7-416c-8125-9595cfbfdbc7
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Running a Locally Installed Application Inside a Virtual Environment with Virtualized Applications
-
-
-You can run a locally installed application in a virtual environment, alongside applications that have been virtualized by using Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V). You might want to do this if you:
-
-- Want to install and run an application locally on client computers, but want to virtualize and run specific plug-ins that work with that local application.
-
-- Are troubleshooting an App-V client package and want to open a local application within the App-V virtual environment.
-
-Use any of the following methods to open a local application inside the App-V virtual environment:
-
-- [RunVirtual registry key](#bkmk-runvirtual-regkey)
-
-- [Get-AppvClientPackage PowerShell cmdlet](#bkmk-get-appvclientpackage-posh)
-
-- [Command line switch /appvpid:<PID>](#bkmk-cl-switch-appvpid)
-
-- [Command line hook switch /appvve:<GUID>](#bkmk-cl-hook-switch-appvve)
-
-Each method accomplishes essentially the same task, but some methods may be better suited for some applications than others, depending on whether the virtualized application is already running.
-
-## RunVirtual registry key
-
-
-To add a locally installed application to a package or to a connection group’s virtual environment, you add a subkey to the `RunVirtual` registry key in the Registry Editor, as described in the following sections.
-
-There is no Group Policy setting available to manage this registry key, so you have to use System Center Configuration Manager or another electronic software distribution (ESD) system, or manually edit the registry.
-
-### Supported methods of publishing packages when using RunVirtual
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
App-V version
-
Supported publishing methods
-
-
-
-
-
App-V 5.0 SP3
-
Published globally or to the user
-
-
-
App-V 5.0 through App-V 5.0 SP2
-
Published globally only
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Steps to create the subkey
-
-1. Using the information in the following table, create a new registry key using the name of the executable file, for example, **MyApp.exe**.
-
-
Packages that are published just globally or just to the user
-
Packages that are published globally and to the user
-
-
Either HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE or HKEY_CURRENT_USER key, but all of the following must be true:
-
-
If you want to include multiple packages in the virtual environment, you must include them in an enabled connection group.
-
Create only one subkey for one of the packages in the connection group. If, for example, you have one package that is published globally, and another package that is published to the user, you create a subkey for either of these packages, but not both. Although you create a subkey for only one of the packages, all of the packages in the connection group, plus the local application, will be available in the virtual environment.
-
The key under which you create the subkey must match the publishing method you used for the package.
-
For example, if you published the package to the user, you must create the subkey under HKEY_CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\AppV\Client\RunVirtual.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-2. Set the new registry subkey’s value to the PackageId and VersionId of the package, separating the values with an underscore.
-
- **Syntax**: <PackageId>\_<VersionId>
-
- **Example**: 4c909996-afc9-4352-b606-0b74542a09c1\_be463724-Oct1-48f1-8604-c4bd7ca92fa
-
- The application in the previous example would produce a registry export file (.reg file) like the following:
-
- ``` syntax
- Windows Registry Editor Version 5.00
- [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\AppV\Client\RunVirtual]
- @=""
- [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\AppV\Client\RunVirtual\MyApp.exe]
- @="aaaaaaaa-bbbb-cccc-dddd-eeeeeeee_11111111-2222-3333-4444-555555555
- ```
-
-## Get-AppvClientPackage PowerShell cmdlet
-
-
-You can use the **Start-AppVVirtualProcess** cmdlet to retrieve the package name and then start a process within the specified package's virtual environment. This method lets you launch any command within the context of an App-V package, regardless of whether the package is currently running.
-
-Use the following example syntax, and substitute the name of your package for **<Package>**:
-
-`$AppVName = Get-AppvClientPackage `
-
-`Start-AppvVirtualProcess -AppvClientObject $AppVName cmd.exe`
-
-If you don’t know the exact name of your package, you can use the command line **Get-AppvClientPackage \*executable\\**, where **executable* is the name of the application, for example: Get-AppvClientPackage \*Word\*.
-
-## Command line switch /appvpid:<PID>
-
-
-You can apply the **/appvpid:<PID>** switch to any command, which enables that command to run within a virtual process that you select by specifying its process ID (PID). Using this method launches the new executable in the same App-V environment as an executable that is already running.
-
-Example: `cmd.exe /appvpid:8108`
-
-To find the process ID (PID) of your App-V process, run the command **tasklist.exe** from an elevated command prompt.
-
-## Command line hook switch /appvve:<GUID>
-
-
-This switch lets you run a local command within the virtual environment of an App-V package. Unlike the **/appvid** switch, where the virtual environment must already be running, this switch enables you to start the virtual environment.
-
-Syntax: `cmd.exe /appvve:`
-
-Example: `cmd.exe /appvve:aaaaaaaa-bbbb-cccc-dddd-eeeeeeee_11111111-2222-3333-4444-55555555`
-
-To get the package GUID and version GUID of your application, run the **Get-AppvClientPackage** cmdlet. Concatenate the **/appvve** switch with the following:
-
-- A colon
-
-- Package GUID of the desired package
-
-- An underscore
-
-- Version ID of the desired package
-
-If you don’t know the exact name of your package, use the command line **Get-AppvClientPackage \*executable\\**, where **executable* is the name of the application, for example: Get-AppvClientPackage \*Word\*.
-
-This method lets you launch any command within the context of an App-V package, regardless of whether the package is currently running.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Technical Reference for App-V 5.0](technical-reference-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/running-a-locally-installed-application-inside-a-virtual-environment-with-virtualized-applications51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/running-a-locally-installed-application-inside-a-virtual-environment-with-virtualized-applications51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 26f9693b4b..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/running-a-locally-installed-application-inside-a-virtual-environment-with-virtualized-applications51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,195 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Running a Locally Installed Application Inside a Virtual Environment with Virtualized Applications
-description: Running a Locally Installed Application Inside a Virtual Environment with Virtualized Applications
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 71baf193-a9e8-4ffa-aa7f-e0bffed2e4b2
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Running a Locally Installed Application Inside a Virtual Environment with Virtualized Applications
-
-
-You can run a locally installed application in a virtual environment, alongside applications that have been virtualized by using Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V). You might want to do this if you:
-
-- Want to install and run an application locally on client computers, but want to virtualize and run specific plug-ins that work with that local application.
-
-- Are troubleshooting an App-V client package and want to open a local application within the App-V virtual environment.
-
-Use any of the following methods to open a local application inside the App-V virtual environment:
-
-- [RunVirtual registry key](#bkmk-runvirtual-regkey)
-
-- [Get-AppvClientPackage PowerShell cmdlet](#bkmk-get-appvclientpackage-posh)
-
-- [Command line switch /appvpid:<PID>](#bkmk-cl-switch-appvpid)
-
-- [Command line hook switch /appvve:<GUID>](#bkmk-cl-hook-switch-appvve)
-
-Each method accomplishes essentially the same task, but some methods may be better suited for some applications than others, depending on whether the virtualized application is already running.
-
-## RunVirtual registry key
-
-
-To add a locally installed application to a package or to a connection group’s virtual environment, you add a subkey to the `RunVirtual` registry key in the Registry Editor, as described in the following sections.
-
-There is no Group Policy setting available to manage this registry key, so you have to use System Center Configuration Manager or another electronic software distribution (ESD) system, or manually edit the registry.
-
-### Supported methods of publishing packages when using RunVirtual
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
App-V version
-
Supported publishing methods
-
-
-
-
-
App-V 5.0 SP3 and App-V 5.1
-
Published globally or to the user
-
-
-
App-V 5.0 through App-V 5.0 SP2
-
Published globally only
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Steps to create the subkey
-
-1. Using the information in the following table, create a new registry key using the name of the executable file, for example, **MyApp.exe**.
-
-
Packages that are published just globally or just to the user
-
Packages that are published globally and to the user
-
-
Either HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE or HKEY_CURRENT_USER key, but all of the following must be true:
-
-
If you want to include multiple packages in the virtual environment, you must include them in an enabled connection group.
-
Create only one subkey for one of the packages in the connection group. If, for example, you have one package that is published globally, and another package that is published to the user, you create a subkey for either of these packages, but not both. Although you create a subkey for only one of the packages, all of the packages in the connection group, plus the local application, will be available in the virtual environment.
-
The key under which you create the subkey must match the publishing method you used for the package.
-
For example, if you published the package to the user, you must create the subkey under HKEY_CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\AppV\Client\RunVirtual.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-2. Set the new registry subkey’s value to the PackageId and VersionId of the package, separating the values with an underscore.
-
- **Syntax**: <PackageId>\_<VersionId>
-
- **Example**: 4c909996-afc9-4352-b606-0b74542a09c1\_be463724-Oct1-48f1-8604-c4bd7ca92fa
-
- The application in the previous example would produce a registry export file (.reg file) like the following:
-
- ``` syntax
- Windows Registry Editor Version 5.00
- [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\AppV\Client\RunVirtual]
- @=""
- [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\AppV\Client\RunVirtual\MyApp.exe]
- @="aaaaaaaa-bbbb-cccc-dddd-eeeeeeee_11111111-2222-3333-4444-555555555
- ```
-
-## Get-AppvClientPackage PowerShell cmdlet
-
-
-You can use the **Start-AppVVirtualProcess** cmdlet to retrieve the package name and then start a process within the specified package's virtual environment. This method lets you launch any command within the context of an App-V package, regardless of whether the package is currently running.
-
-Use the following example syntax, and substitute the name of your package for **<Package>**:
-
-`$AppVName = Get-AppvClientPackage `
-
-`Start-AppvVirtualProcess -AppvClientObject $AppVName cmd.exe`
-
-If you don’t know the exact name of your package, you can use the command line **Get-AppvClientPackage \*executable\\**, where **executable* is the name of the application, for example: Get-AppvClientPackage \*Word\*.
-
-## Command line switch /appvpid:<PID>
-
-
-You can apply the **/appvpid:<PID>** switch to any command, which enables that command to run within a virtual process that you select by specifying its process ID (PID). Using this method launches the new executable in the same App-V environment as an executable that is already running.
-
-Example: `cmd.exe /appvpid:8108`
-
-To find the process ID (PID) of your App-V process, run the command **tasklist.exe** from an elevated command prompt.
-
-## Command line hook switch /appvve:<GUID>
-
-
-This switch lets you run a local command within the virtual environment of an App-V package. Unlike the **/appvid** switch, where the virtual environment must already be running, this switch enables you to start the virtual environment.
-
-Syntax: `cmd.exe /appvve:`
-
-Example: `cmd.exe /appvve:aaaaaaaa-bbbb-cccc-dddd-eeeeeeee_11111111-2222-3333-4444-55555555`
-
-To get the package GUID and version GUID of your application, run the **Get-AppvClientPackage** cmdlet. Concatenate the **/appvve** switch with the following:
-
-- A colon
-
-- Package GUID of the desired package
-
-- An underscore
-
-- Version ID of the desired package
-
-If you don’t know the exact name of your package, use the command line **Get-AppvClientPackage \*executable\\**, where **executable* is the name of the application, for example: Get-AppvClientPackage \*Word\*.
-
-This method lets you launch any command within the context of an App-V package, regardless of whether the package is currently running.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Technical Reference for App-V 5.1](technical-reference-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/technical-reference-for-app-v-50.md b/mdop/appv-v5/technical-reference-for-app-v-50.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4edd02b6e7..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/technical-reference-for-app-v-50.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Technical Reference for App-V 5.0
-description: Technical Reference for App-V 5.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: aa899158-41e8-47d3-882c-8c5b96018308
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Technical Reference for App-V 5.0
-
-
-This section provides reference information related to managing App-V 5.0.
-
-## In This Section
-
-
-- [Performance Guidance for Application Virtualization 5.0](performance-guidance-for-application-virtualization-50.md)
-
- Provides strategy and context for a number of performance optimization practices. Not all practices will be applicable although they are supported and have been tested. Using all suggested practices that are applicable to your organization will provide the optimal end-user experience.
-
-- [Application Publishing and Client Interaction](application-publishing-and-client-interaction.md)
-
- Describes how the following App-V client operations affect the local operating system: App-V files and data storage locations, package registry, package store behavior, roaming registry and data, client application lifecycle management, integration of App-V packages, dynamic configuration, side-by-side assemblies, and client logging.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Creating App-V 4.5 Databases Using SQL Scripting](../solutions/creating-app-v-45-databases-using-sql-scripting.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/technical-reference-for-app-v-51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/technical-reference-for-app-v-51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4a5b670357..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/technical-reference-for-app-v-51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Technical Reference for App-V 5.1
-description: Technical Reference for App-V 5.1
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 2b9e8b2b-4cd1-46f3-ba08-e3bc8d5c6127
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Technical Reference for App-V 5.1
-
-
-This section provides reference information related to managing App-V 5.1.
-
-## In This Section
-
-
-- [Performance Guidance for Application Virtualization 5.1](performance-guidance-for-application-virtualization-51.md)
-
- Provides strategy and context for a number of performance optimization practices. Not all practices will be applicable although they are supported and have been tested. Using all suggested practices that are applicable to your organization will provide the optimal end-user experience.
-
-- [Application Publishing and Client Interaction](application-publishing-and-client-interaction51.md)
-
- Describes how the following App-V client operations affect the local operating system: App-V files and data storage locations, package registry, package store behavior, roaming registry and data, client application lifecycle management, integration of App-V packages, dynamic configuration, side-by-side assemblies, and client logging.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Creating App-V 4.5 Databases Using SQL Scripting](../solutions/creating-app-v-45-databases-using-sql-scripting.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/troubleshooting-app-v-50.md b/mdop/appv-v5/troubleshooting-app-v-50.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7fde4fd864..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/troubleshooting-app-v-50.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,97 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Troubleshooting App-V 5.0
-description: Troubleshooting App-V 5.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: a713b345-25b7-4cdf-ba55-66df672a1f3a
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Troubleshooting App-V 5.0
-
-
-Troubleshooting content is not included in the Administrator’s Guide for this product. Instead, you can find troubleshooting information for this product on the [TechNet Wiki](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=224905).
-
-## How to Find Troubleshooting Content
-
-
-You can use the following information to find troubleshooting or additional technical content for this product.
-
-### Search the MDOP Documentation
-
-The first step to find help content in the Administrator’s Guide is to search the MDOP documentation on TechNet.
-
-After you search the MDOP documentation, your next step would be to search the troubleshooting information for the product in the TechNet Wiki.
-
-**To search the MDOP product documentation**
-
-1. Use a web browser to navigate to the [MDOP Information Experience](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=236032) TechNet home page.
-
-2. Enter applicable search terms in the **Search TechNet with Bing** search box at the top of the MDOP Information Experience home page.
-
-3. Review the search results for assistance.
-
-**To search the TechNet Wiki**
-
-1. Use a web browser to navigate to the [TechNet Wiki](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=224905) home page.
-
-2. Enter applicable search terms in the **Search TechNet Wiki** search box on the TechNet Wiki home page.
-
-3. Review the search results for assistance.
-
-## How to Create a Troubleshooting Article
-
-
-If you have a troubleshooting tip or a best practice to share that is not already included in the MDOP OnlineHelp or TechNet Wiki, you can create your own TechNet Wiki articles.
-
-**To create a TechNet Wiki troubleshooting or best practices article**
-
-1. Use a web browser to navigate to the [TechNet Wiki](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=224905) home page.
-
-2. Log in with your Windows Live ID.
-
-3. Review the **Getting Started** section to learn the basics of the TechNet Wiki and its articles.
-
-4. Select **Post an article >>** at the bottom of the **Getting Started** section.
-
-5. On the Wiki article **Add Page** page, select **Insert Template** from the toolbar, select the troubleshooting article template (**Troubleshooting.html**), and then click **Insert**.
-
-6. Be sure to give the article a descriptive title and then overwrite the template information as needed to create your troubleshooting or best practice article.
-
-7. After you review your article, be sure to include a tag that is named **Troubleshooting** and another for the product name. This helps others to find your content.
-
-8. Click **Save** to publish the article to the TechNet Wiki.
-
-## Other resources for troubleshooting App-V 5.0
-
-
-- [Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.0 Administrator's Guide](microsoft-application-virtualization-50-administrators-guide.md)
-
-- [Getting Started with App-V 5.0](getting-started-with-app-v-50--rtm.md)
-
-- [Planning for App-V 5.0](planning-for-app-v-50-rc.md)
-
-- [Deploying App-V 5.0](deploying-app-v-50.md)
-
-- [Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/troubleshooting-app-v-51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/troubleshooting-app-v-51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 27ce45c67f..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/troubleshooting-app-v-51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,97 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Troubleshooting App-V 5.1
-description: Troubleshooting App-V 5.1
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 435d0e56-0aa2-4168-b5a7-2f03a1f273d4
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Troubleshooting App-V 5.1
-
-
-Troubleshooting content is not included in the Administrator’s Guide for this product. Instead, you can find troubleshooting information for this product on the [TechNet Wiki](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=224905).
-
-## How to Find Troubleshooting Content
-
-
-You can use the following information to find troubleshooting or additional technical content for this product.
-
-### Search the MDOP Documentation
-
-The first step to find help content in the Administrator’s Guide is to search the MDOP documentation on TechNet.
-
-After you search the MDOP documentation, your next step would be to search the troubleshooting information for the product in the TechNet Wiki.
-
-**To search the MDOP product documentation**
-
-1. Use a web browser to navigate to the [MDOP Information Experience](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=236032) TechNet home page.
-
-2. Enter applicable search terms in the **Search TechNet with Bing** search box at the top of the MDOP Information Experience home page.
-
-3. Review the search results for assistance.
-
-**To search the TechNet Wiki**
-
-1. Use a web browser to navigate to the [TechNet Wiki](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=224905) home page.
-
-2. Enter applicable search terms in the **Search TechNet Wiki** search box on the TechNet Wiki home page.
-
-3. Review the search results for assistance.
-
-## How to Create a Troubleshooting Article
-
-
-If you have a troubleshooting tip or a best practice to share that is not already included in the MDOP OnlineHelp or TechNet Wiki, you can create your own TechNet Wiki articles.
-
-**To create a TechNet Wiki troubleshooting or best practices article**
-
-1. Use a web browser to navigate to the [TechNet Wiki](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=224905) home page.
-
-2. Log in with your Windows Live ID.
-
-3. Review the **Getting Started** section to learn the basics of the TechNet Wiki and its articles.
-
-4. Select **Post an article >>** at the bottom of the **Getting Started** section.
-
-5. On the Wiki article **Add Page** page, select **Insert Template** from the toolbar, select the troubleshooting article template (**Troubleshooting.html**), and then click **Insert**.
-
-6. Be sure to give the article a descriptive title and then overwrite the template information as needed to create your troubleshooting or best practice article.
-
-7. After you review your article, be sure to include a tag that is named **Troubleshooting** and another for the product name. This helps others to find your content.
-
-8. Click **Save** to publish the article to the TechNet Wiki.
-
-## Other resources for troubleshooting App-V 5.1
-
-
-- [Microsoft Application Virtualization 5.1 Administrator's Guide](microsoft-application-virtualization-51-administrators-guide.md)
-
-- [Getting Started with App-V 5.1](getting-started-with-app-v-51.md)
-
-- [Planning for App-V 5.1](planning-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-- [Deploying App-V 5.1](deploying-app-v-51.md)
-
-- [Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/using-the-app-v-50-client-management-console.md b/mdop/appv-v5/using-the-app-v-50-client-management-console.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 2ab6dea613..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/using-the-app-v-50-client-management-console.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,96 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Using the App-V 5.0 Client Management Console
-description: Using the App-V 5.0 Client Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 36398307-57dd-40f3-9d4f-b09f44fd37c3
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Using the App-V 5.0 Client Management Console
-
-
-This topic provides information about how you can configure and manage the App-V 5.0 client.
-
-## Modify App-V 5.0 client configuration
-
-
-The App-V 5.0 client has associated settings that can be configured to determine how the client will run in your environment. You can manage these settings on the computer that runs the client or by using PowerShell or Group Policy. For more information about how to modify the client using PowerShell or Group Policy configuration see, [How to Modify Client Configuration by Using PowerShell](how-to-modify-client-configuration-by-using-powershell.md).
-
-## The App-V 5.0 client management console
-
-
-You can obtain information about the App-V 5.0 client or perform specific tasks by using the App-V 5.0 client management console. Many of the tasks that you can perform in the client management console you can also perform by using PowerShell. The associated PowerShell cmdlets for each action are also displayed in the following table. For more information about how to use PowerShell, see [Administering App-V by Using PowerShell](administering-app-v-by-using-powershell.md).
-
-The client management console contains the following described main tabs.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Tab
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Overview
-
The Overview tab contains the following elements:
-
-
Update – Use the Update tile to refresh a virtualized application or to receive a new virtualized package.
-
The Last Refresh displays the current version of the virtualized package.
-
Download all virtual applications – Use the Download tile to download all of the packages provisioned to the current user.
The VIRTUAL APPS tab displays all of the packages that have been published to the user. You can also click a specific package and see all of the applications that are part of that package. This displays information about packages that are currently in use and how much of each package has been downloaded to the computer. You can also start and stop package downloads. Additionally, you can repair the user state. A repair will delete all user data that is associated with a package.
-
-
-
-
App Connection Groups
-
The APP CONNECTION GROUPS tab displays all of the connection groups that are available to the current user. Click a specific connection group to see all of the packages that are part of the selected group. This displays information about connection groups that are already in use and how much of the connection group contents have been downloaded to the computer. Additionally, you can start and stop connection group downloads. You can use this section to initiate a repair. A repair will remove all of the user state that is associated a connection group.
-
-
-
-[How to Access the Client Management Console](how-to-access-the-client-management-console.md)
-
-[How to Configure the Client to Receive Package and Connection Groups Updates From the Publishing Server](how-to-configure-the-client-to-receive-package-and-connection-groups-updates-from-the-publishing-server-beta.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.0](operations-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/using-the-app-v-51-client-management-console.md b/mdop/appv-v5/using-the-app-v-51-client-management-console.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 427f3aa60c..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/using-the-app-v-51-client-management-console.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,96 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Using the App-V 5.1 Client Management Console
-description: Using the App-V 5.1 Client Management Console
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: be6d4e35-5701-4f9a-ba8a-bede12662cf1
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Using the App-V 5.1 Client Management Console
-
-
-This topic provides information about how you can configure and manage the Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 5.1 client.
-
-## Modify App-V 5.1 client configuration
-
-
-The App-V 5.1 client has associated settings that can be configured to determine how the client will run in your environment. You can manage these settings on the computer that runs the client or by using PowerShell or Group Policy. For more information about how to modify the client using PowerShell or Group Policy configuration see, [How to Modify Client Configuration by Using PowerShell](how-to-modify-client-configuration-by-using-powershell51.md).
-
-## The App-V 5.1 client management console
-
-
-You can obtain information about the App-V 5.1 client or perform specific tasks by using the App-V 5.1 client management console. Many of the tasks that you can perform in the client management console you can also perform by using PowerShell. The associated PowerShell cmdlets for each action are also displayed in the following table. For more information about how to use PowerShell, see [Administering App-V 5.1 by Using PowerShell](administering-app-v-51-by-using-powershell.md).
-
-The client management console contains the following described main tabs.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Tab
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Overview
-
The Overview tab contains the following elements:
-
-
Update – Use the Update tile to refresh a virtualized application or to receive a new virtualized package.
-
The Last Refresh displays the current version of the virtualized package.
-
Download all virtual applications – Use the Download tile to download all of the packages provisioned to the current user.
The VIRTUAL APPS tab displays all of the packages that have been published to the user. You can also click a specific package and see all of the applications that are part of that package. This displays information about packages that are currently in use and how much of each package has been downloaded to the computer. You can also start and stop package downloads. Additionally, you can repair the user state. A repair will delete all user data that is associated with a package.
-
-
-
-
App Connection Groups
-
The APP CONNECTION GROUPS tab displays all of the connection groups that are available to the current user. Click a specific connection group to see all of the packages that are part of the selected group. This displays information about connection groups that are already in use and how much of the connection group contents have been downloaded to the computer. Additionally, you can start and stop connection group downloads. You can use this section to initiate a repair. A repair will remove all of the user state that is associated a connection group.
-
-
-
-[How to Access the Client Management Console](how-to-access-the-client-management-console51.md)
-
-[How to Configure the Client to Receive Package and Connection Groups Updates From the Publishing Server](how-to-configure-the-client-to-receive-package-and-connection-groups-updates-from-the-publishing-server-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for App-V 5.1](operations-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/viewing-app-v-server-publishing-metadata.md b/mdop/appv-v5/viewing-app-v-server-publishing-metadata.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 218bac0f4f..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/viewing-app-v-server-publishing-metadata.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,258 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Viewing App-V Server Publishing Metadata
-description: Viewing App-V Server Publishing Metadata
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 048dd42a-24d4-4cc4-81f6-7a919aadd9b2
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Viewing App-V Server Publishing Metadata
-
-
-Use this procedure to view publishing metadata, which can help you resolve publishing-related issues. You must be using the App-V Management server to use this procedure.
-
-This article contains the following information:
-
-- [App-V 5.0 SP3 requirements for viewing publishing metadata](#bkmk-50sp3-reqs-pub-meta)
-
-- [Syntax to use for viewing publishing metadata](#bkmk-syntax-view-pub-meta)
-
-- [Query values for client operating system and version](#bkmk-values-query-pub-meta)
-
-- [Definition of publishing metadata](#bkmk-whatis-pub-metadata)
-
-## App-V 5.0 SP3 requirements for viewing publishing metadata
-
-
-In App-V 5.0 SP3, you must provide the following values in the address when you query the App-V Publishing server for metadata:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Value
-
Additional details
-
-
-
-
-
ClientVersion
-
If you omit the ClientVersion parameter from the query, the metadata excludes the new App-V 5.0 SP3 features.
-
-
-
ClientOS
-
You have to provide this value only if you select specific client operating systems when you sequence the package. If you select the default (all operating systems), do not specify this value in the query.
-
If you omit the ClientOS parameter from the query, only the packages that were sequenced to support any operating system appear in the metadata.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Query syntax for viewing publishing metadata
-
-
-The following table provides the syntax and query examples.
-
-
Port to the App-V Publishing server, which you defined when you configured the Publishing server.
-
-
-
ClientVersion=<AppvClientVersion>
-
Version of the App-V client. Refer to the following table for the correct value to use.
-
-
-
ClientOS=<OSStringValue>
-
Operating system of the computer that is running the App-V client. Refer to the following table for the correct value to use.
-
-
-
-
-
To get the name of the Publishing server and the port number (http://<PubServer>:<Publishing Port#>) from the App-V Client, look at the URL configuration of the Get-AppvPublishingServer PowerShell cmdlet.
In the example, A Windows Server 2012 R2 named “pubsvr01” hosts the Management and Publishing services.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Query values for client operating system and version
-
-
-In your publishing metadata query, enter the string values that correspond to the client operating system and version that you’re using.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating system
-
Architecture
-
Operating string string value
-
-
-
-
-
Windows 8.1
-
64-bit
-
WindowsClient_6.2_x64
-
-
-
Windows 8.1
-
32-bit
-
WindowsClient_6.2_x86
-
-
-
Windows 8
-
64-bit
-
WindowsClient_6.2_x64
-
-
-
Windows 8
-
32-bit
-
WindowsClient_6.2_x86
-
-
-
Windows Server 2012 R2
-
64-bit
-
WindowsServer_6.2_x64
-
-
-
Windows Server 2012 R2
-
32-bit
-
WindowsServer_6.2_x86
-
-
-
Windows Server 2012
-
64-bit
-
WindowsServer_6.2_x64
-
-
-
Windows Server 2012
-
32-bit
-
WindowsServer_6.2_x86
-
-
-
Windows 7
-
64-bit
-
WindowsClient_6.1_x64
-
-
-
Windows 7
-
32-bit
-
WindowsClient_6.1_x86
-
-
-
Windows Server 2008 R2
-
64-bit
-
WindowsServer_6.1_x64
-
-
-
Windows Server 2008 R2
-
32-bit
-
WindowsServer_6.1_x86
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Definition of publishing metadata
-
-
-When packages are published to a computer that is running the App-V client, metadata is sent to that computer indicating which packages and connection groups are being published. The App-V Client makes two separate requests for the following:
-
-- Packages and connection groups that are entitled to the client computer.
-
-- Packages and connection groups that are entitled to the current user.
-
-The Publishing server communicates with the Management server to determine which packages and connection groups are available to the requester. The Publishing server must be registered with the Management server in order for the metadata to be generated.
-
-You can view the metadata for each request in an Internet browser by using a query that is in the context of the specific user or computer.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Technical Reference for App-V 5.0](technical-reference-for-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/viewing-app-v-server-publishing-metadata51.md b/mdop/appv-v5/viewing-app-v-server-publishing-metadata51.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5971f5c937..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/viewing-app-v-server-publishing-metadata51.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,268 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Viewing App-V Server Publishing Metadata
-description: Viewing App-V Server Publishing Metadata
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: d5fa9eb5-647c-478d-8a4d-0ecda018bce6
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Viewing App-V Server Publishing Metadata
-
-
-Use this procedure to view publishing metadata, which can help you resolve publishing-related issues. You must be using the App-V Management server to use this procedure.
-
-This article contains the following information:
-
-- [App-V 5.1 requirements for viewing publishing metadata](#bkmk-51-reqs-pub-meta)
-
-- [Syntax to use for viewing publishing metadata](#bkmk-syntax-view-pub-meta)
-
-- [Query values for client operating system and version](#bkmk-values-query-pub-meta)
-
-- [Definition of publishing metadata](#bkmk-whatis-pub-metadata)
-
-## App-V 5.1 requirements for viewing publishing metadata
-
-
-In App-V 5.1, you must provide the following values in the address when you query the App-V Publishing server for metadata:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Value
-
Additional details
-
-
-
-
-
ClientVersion
-
If you omit the ClientVersion parameter from the query, the metadata excludes the features that were new in App-V 5.0 SP3.
-
-
-
ClientOS
-
You have to provide this value only if you select specific client operating systems when you sequence the package. If you select the default (all operating systems), do not specify this value in the query.
-
If you omit the ClientOS parameter from the query, only the packages that were sequenced to support any operating system appear in the metadata.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Query syntax for viewing publishing metadata
-
-
-The following table provides the syntax and query examples.
-
-
Port to the App-V Publishing server, which you defined when you configured the Publishing server.
-
-
-
ClientVersion=<AppvClientVersion>
-
Version of the App-V client. Refer to the following table for the correct value to use.
-
-
-
ClientOS=<OSStringValue>
-
Operating system of the computer that is running the App-V client. Refer to the following table for the correct value to use.
-
-
-
-
-
To get the name of the Publishing server and the port number (http://<PubServer>:<Publishing Port#>) from the App-V Client, look at the URL configuration of the Get-AppvPublishingServer PowerShell cmdlet.
In the example, A Windows Server 2012 R2 named “pubsvr01” hosts the Management and Publishing services.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Query values for client operating system and version
-
-
-In your publishing metadata query, enter the string values that correspond to the client operating system and version that you’re using.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating system
-
Architecture
-
Operating string string value
-
-
-
-
-
Windows 10
-
64-bit
-
WindowsClient_10.0_x64
-
-
-
Windows 10
-
32-bit
-
WindowsClient_10.0_x86
-
-
-
Windows 8.1
-
64-bit
-
WindowsClient_6.2_x64
-
-
-
Windows 8.1
-
32-bit
-
WindowsClient_6.2_x86
-
-
-
Windows 8
-
64-bit
-
WindowsClient_6.2_x64
-
-
-
Windows 8
-
32-bit
-
WindowsClient_6.2_x86
-
-
-
Windows Server 2012 R2
-
64-bit
-
WindowsServer_6.2_x64
-
-
-
Windows Server 2012 R2
-
32-bit
-
WindowsServer_6.2_x86
-
-
-
Windows Server 2012
-
64-bit
-
WindowsServer_6.2_x64
-
-
-
Windows Server 2012
-
32-bit
-
WindowsServer_6.2_x86
-
-
-
Windows 7
-
64-bit
-
WindowsClient_6.1_x64
-
-
-
Windows 7
-
32-bit
-
WindowsClient_6.1_x86
-
-
-
Windows Server 2008 R2
-
64-bit
-
WindowsServer_6.1_x64
-
-
-
Windows Server 2008 R2
-
32-bit
-
WindowsServer_6.1_x86
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Definition of publishing metadata
-
-
-When packages are published to a computer that is running the App-V client, metadata is sent to that computer indicating which packages and connection groups are being published. The App-V Client makes two separate requests for the following:
-
-- Packages and connection groups that are entitled to the client computer.
-
-- Packages and connection groups that are entitled to the current user.
-
-The Publishing server communicates with the Management server to determine which packages and connection groups are available to the requester. The Publishing server must be registered with the Management server in order for the metadata to be generated.
-
-You can view the metadata for each request in an Internet browser by using a query that is in the context of the specific user or computer.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Technical Reference for App-V 5.1](technical-reference-for-app-v-51.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/whats-new-in-app-v-50-sp1.md b/mdop/appv-v5/whats-new-in-app-v-50-sp1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6968160074..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/whats-new-in-app-v-50-sp1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,63 +0,0 @@
----
-title: What's new in App-V 5.0 SP1
-description: What's new in App-V 5.0 SP1
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: e97c2dbb-7b40-46a0-8137-9ee4fc2bd071
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# What's new in App-V 5.0 SP1
-
-
-This section is for users who are already familiar with App-V and want to know what has changed in App-V 5.0 SP1. If you are not already familiar with App-V, you should start by reading [Planning for App-V 5.0](planning-for-app-v-50-rc.md).
-
-## Changes in Standard Functionality
-
-
-The following sections contain information about the changes in standard functionality for App-V 5.0 SP1.
-
-### Changes to Supported Languages
-
-For more information, see [About App-V 5.0 SP1](about-app-v-50-sp1.md).
-
-The following list contains more information about the new Language Packs:
-
-- The App-V 5.0 SP1 language packs are bundled into the **appv\_xxx\_setup.exe** installer for all the App-V 5.0 Components.
-
-- When you run the installer it will automatically install the most appropriate language pack based on the locale of the associated operating system running on the target computer.
-
-- If additional language packs are required, you must extract these language packs from the installer by running the following command: `appv_xxx_setup.exe /Layout /LayoutDir=””`. After this has been run, the contents of the installer are extracted to the specified location.
-
-- You must install the desired language pack by applying the appropriate Language pack Windows Installation file. For example, **appv\_hib\_LP\_jmmb\_x86.msi** or **appv\_hib\_LP\_jmmb\_x64.msi**, where **hib** refers to the component and **jmmb** refers to the locale.
-
-## Enhanced Support for Microsoft Office 2010
-
-
-**Microsoft Office 2010 Sequencing Kit for Application Virtualization 5.0** – helps provide users with a consistent experience using a virtualized version of Microsoft Office 2010. The **Microsoft Office 2010 Sequencing Kit for Application Virtualization 5.0** is used in conjunction with the **Microsoft Office 2010 Deployment Kit for App-V** and also provides the required Microsoft Office 2010 licensing service.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[About App-V 5.0](about-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/appv-v5/whats-new-in-app-v-50.md b/mdop/appv-v5/whats-new-in-app-v-50.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7d5f3286a2..0000000000
--- a/mdop/appv-v5/whats-new-in-app-v-50.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,174 +0,0 @@
----
-title: What's New in App-V 5.0
-description: What's New in App-V 5.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 79ff6e02-e926-4803-87d8-248a6b28099d
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, appcompat, virtualization
-ms.mktglfcycl: deploy
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# What's New in App-V 5.0
-
-
-This section is for users who are already familiar with App-V and want to know what has changed in App-V 5.0 If you are not already familiar with App-V, you should start by reading [Planning for App-V 5.0](planning-for-app-v-50-rc.md).
-
-## Changes in Standard Functionality
-
-
-The following sections contain information about the changes in standard functionality for App-V 5.0.
-
-### Changes to Supported Operating Systems
-
-For more information, see [App-V 5.0 Supported Configurations](app-v-50-supported-configurations.md).
-
-## Changes to the sequencer
-
-
-The following sections contain information about the changes in the App-V 5.0 sequencer.
-
-### Specific change to the sequencer
-
-The following table displays information about what has changed with the App-V 5.0 sequencer
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Sequencer Feature
-
App-V 5.0 Sequencer Functionality
-
-
-
-
-
Reboot processing
-
When an application prompts for a restart, you should allow the application to restart the computer running the sequencer. The computer running the sequencer will restart and the sequencer will resume in monitoring mode.
-
-
-
Specifying the virtual application directory
-
Virtual Application Directory is a mandatory parameter. For best results, it should match the installation directory of the application installer. This results in more optimal performance and application compatibility.
-
-
-
Editing shortcuts/FTAs
-
The Shortcuts/FTA page is on the Advanced editing page after the sequencing wizard has completed.
-
-
-
Change History Tab
-
The Change History tab has been removed for App-V 5.0.
-
-
-
OSD Tab
-
The OSD tab has been removed for App-V 5.0.
-
-
-
Virtual Services Tab
-
The virtual services tab has been removed for App-V 5.0.
-
-
-
Files/Virtual File System Tab
-
These tabs are combined and allow you to modify package files.
-
-
-
Deployment Tab
-
There are no longer options to configure the server URL in the packages. You should configure this now using deployment configuration, or the management server.
-
-
-
Package Converter Tool
-
You can now use PowerShell to convert packages created in previous versions.
-
-
-
Add-on/Middleware
-
You can expand parent packages when you are sequencing an Add-On or Middleware application. Add-ons and Middleware packages must be connected using connection groups in App-V 5.0.
-
-
-
Files output
-
The following files are created with App-V 5.0, Windows Installer (.msi), .appv, deployment configuration, user configuration, and the Report.XML.
-
-
-
Compression/Security descriptors/MSI packages
-
Compression and the creation of a Windows Installer (.msi) file are automatic for all packages and you can no longer override security descriptors.
-
-
-
Tools / Options
-
The Diagnostics window has been removed as well as several other settings.
-
-
-
Installation Drive
-
An installation drive is no longer required when you install an application.
-
-
-
OOS Streaming
-
If no stream optimization is performed, packages are stream faulted when they are requested by computers running the App-V 5.0 client until they can launch.
-
-
-
Q:</p>
-
App-V 5.0 uses the native file system and no longer requires a Q:.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Sequencing error detection
-
-
-The App-V 5.0 sequencer can detect common sequencing issues during sequencing. The **Installation Report** page at the end of the sequencing wizard displays diagnostic messages categorized into **Errors**, **Warnings**, and **Info** depending on the severity of the issue.
-
-To display more detailed information about an event, double-click the item you want to review in the report. The sequencing issues, as well as suggestions about how to resolve the issues are displayed. Information from the system preparation report and the installation report are summarized when you have finished creating a package. The following list displays the types of issues available in the report:
-
-- Excluded files.
-
-- Driver information.
-
-- COM+ system differences.
-
-- Side-by-side (SxS) conflicts.
-
-- Shell Extensions.
-
-- Information about unsupported services.
-
-- DCOM.
-
-## Connection Groups
-
-
-The App-V feature formerly known as **Dynamic Suite Composition** is now referred to as **Connection Groups** in App-V 5.0. For more information about using Connection Groups see [Managing Connection Groups](managing-connection-groups.md).
-
-## Licensing and Metering Functionality
-
-
-The application and licensing functionality has been removed in App-V 5.0. The actual license positions in your environment depend on the specific software title license and usage rights granted by the associated license terms.
-
-## File and Application Cache
-
-
-There is no file or application cache available with App-V 5.0.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[About App-V 5.0](about-app-v-50.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/breadcrumb/toc.yml b/mdop/breadcrumb/toc.yml
deleted file mode 100644
index 904b8033a1..0000000000
--- a/mdop/breadcrumb/toc.yml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-- name: Docs
- tocHref: /
- topicHref: /
- items:
- - name: Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack
- tocHref: /microsoft-desktop-optimization-pack
- topicHref: /microsoft-desktop-optimization-pack/index
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/TOC.md b/mdop/dart-v10/TOC.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5f3730e1c6..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/TOC.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
-# [Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 10](index.md)
-## [Getting Started with DaRT 10](getting-started-with-dart-10.md)
-### [About DaRT 10](about-dart-10.md)
-#### [Release Notes for DaRT 10](release-notes-for-dart-10.md)
-### [Overview of the Tools in DaRT 10](overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-10.md)
-### [Accessibility for DaRT 10](accessibility-for-dart-10.md)
-## [Planning for DaRT 10](planning-for-dart-10.md)
-### [Planning to Deploy DaRT 10](planning-to-deploy-dart-10.md)
-#### [DaRT 10 Supported Configurations](dart-10-supported-configurations.md)
-#### [Planning to Create the DaRT 10 Recovery Image](planning-to-create-the-dart-10-recovery-image.md)
-#### [Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT 10 Recovery Image](planning-how-to-save-and-deploy-the-dart-10-recovery-image.md)
-### [DaRT 10 Planning Checklist](dart-10-planning-checklist.md)
-## [Deploying DaRT 10](deploying-dart-10.md)
-### [Deploying DaRT 10 to Administrator Computers](deploying-dart-10-to-administrator-computers.md)
-#### [How to Deploy DaRT 10](how-to-deploy-dart-10.md)
-#### [How to Change, Repair, or Remove DaRT 10](how-to-change-repair-or-remove-dart-10.md)
-### [Creating the DaRT 10 Recovery Image](creating-the-dart-10-recovery-image.md)
-### [Deploying the DaRT Recovery Image](deploying-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-10.md)
-#### [How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as Part of a Recovery Partition](how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-part-of-a-recovery-partition-dart-10.md)
-#### [How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as a Remote Partition](how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-a-remote-partition-dart-10.md)
-### [DaRT 10 Deployment Checklist](dart-10-deployment-checklist.md)
-## [Operations for DaRT 10](operations-for-dart-10.md)
-### [Recovering Computers Using DaRT 10](recovering-computers-using-dart-10.md)
-#### [How to Recover Local Computers by Using the DaRT Recovery Image](how-to-recover-local-computers-by-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-10.md)
-#### [How to Recover Remote Computers by Using the DaRT Recovery Image](how-to-recover-remote-computers-by-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-10.md)
-### [Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer](diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer-dart-10.md)
-#### [How to Run the Crash Analyzer on an End-user Computer](how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-on-an-end-user-computer-dart-10.md)
-#### [How to Run the Crash Analyzer in Stand-alone Mode on a Computer Other than an End-user Computer](how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-in-stand-alone-mode-on-a-computer-other-than-an-end-user-computer-dart-10.md)
-#### [How to Ensure that Crash Analyzer Can Access Symbol Files](how-to-ensure-that-crash-analyzer-can-access-symbol-files-dart-10.md)
-### [Security and Privacy for DaRT 10](security-and-privacy-for-dart-10.md)
-#### [Security Considerations for DaRT 10](security-considerations-for-dart-10.md)
-#### [DaRT 10 Privacy Statement](dart-10-privacy-statement.md)
-### [Administering DaRT 10 Using PowerShell](administering-dart-10-using-powershell.md)
-#### [How to Perform DaRT Tasks by Using PowerShell Commands](how-to-perform-dart-tasks-by-using-powershell-commands-dart-10.md)
-#### [How to Use a PowerShell Script to Create the Recovery Image](how-to-use-a-powershell-script-to-create-the-recovery-image-dart-10.md)
-## [Troubleshooting DaRT 10](troubleshooting-dart-10.md)
-# [DaRT 10](dart-10--c--page.md)
-# [DaRT 10](dart-10-cover-page.md)
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/about-dart-10.md b/mdop/dart-v10/about-dart-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index bc738c6bd9..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/about-dart-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,98 +0,0 @@
----
-title: About DaRT 10
-description: About DaRT 10
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 02378035-58d1-4095-82fe-d60734a746fb
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# About DaRT 10
-
-
-DaRT 10 includes the following enhancements and changes as described in this topic.
-
-## What’s new
-
-
-- **Support for Windows 10**
-
- You can create DaRT images by using Windows 10.
-
- **Note**
- For earlier versions of the Windows operating systems, continue to use the earlier versions of DaRT.
-
-
-
-- **Windows Defender**
-
- Windows Defender is now part of the Windows 10 Preinstallation Environment (PE) image. As a result, Windows Defender has been removed from the DaRT 10 toolset.
-
-## Requirements
-
-
-- **Windows Assessment and Development Kit 10.0**
-
- Windows Assessment and Development Kit (ADK) 10.0 is a required prerequisite for the DaRT Recovery Image Wizard. Windows ADK 10.0 contains deployment tools that are used to customize, deploy, and service Windows images. It also contains the Windows Preinstallation Environment (Windows PE).
-
- **Note**
- Windows ADK 10.0 is not required if you are installing only Remote Connection Viewer or Crash Analyzer.
-
-
-
-- **Windows 10 Debugging Tools**
-
- To use the Crash Analyzer tool in DaRT 10, you need the required debugging tools, which are available in the Software Development Kit for Windows 10.
-
-## Language availability
-
-
-DaRT 10 is available in the following languages:
-
-- English (United States) en-US
-
-- French (France) fr-FR
-
-- Italian (Italy) it-IT
-
-- German (Germany) de-DE
-
-- Spanish, International Sort (Spain) es-ES
-
-- Korean (Korea) ko-KR
-
-- Japanese (Japan) ja-JP
-
-- Portuguese (Brazil) pt-BR
-
-- Russian (Russia) ru-RU
-
-- Chinese Traditional zh-TW
-
-- Chinese Simplified zh-CN
-
-## How to Get MDOP Technologies
-
-
-DaRT 10 is a part of the Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack (MDOP). MDOP is part of Microsoft Software Assurance. For more information about Microsoft Software Assurance and acquiring MDOP, see [How Do I Get MDOP](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Release Notes for DaRT 10](release-notes-for-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/accessibility-for-dart-10.md b/mdop/dart-v10/accessibility-for-dart-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d6f65c76e7..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/accessibility-for-dart-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,106 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Accessibility for DaRT 10
-description: Accessibility for DaRT 10
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 61d7a30c-3551-440d-bdcd-36333052c7b4
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Accessibility for DaRT 10
-
-
-Microsoft is committed to making its products and services easier for everyone to use. This section provides information about features and services that make this product and its corresponding documentation more accessible for people with disabilities.
-
-## Access any command with a few keystrokes
-
-
-Access keys let you quickly use a command by pressing a few keys. You can get to most commands by using two keystrokes. To use an access key:
-
-1. Press ALT.
-
- The keyboard shortcuts are displayed over each feature that is available in the current view.
-
-2. Press the letter shown in the keyboard shortcut over the feature that you want to use.
-
-**Note**
-To cancel the action that you are taking and hide the keyboard shortcuts, press ALT.
-
-
-
-## Documentation in alternative formats
-
-
-If you have difficulty reading or handling printed materials, you can obtain the documentation for many Microsoft products in more accessible formats. You can view an index of accessible product documentation on the Microsoft Accessibility website. In addition, you can obtain additional Microsoft publications from Learning Ally (formerly Recording for the Blind & Dyslexic, Inc.). Learning Ally distributes these documents to registered, eligible members of their distribution service.
-
-For information about the availability of Microsoft product documentation and books from Microsoft Press, contact:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Learning Ally (formerly Recording for the Blind & Dyslexic, Inc.)
-
20 Roszel Road
-
Princeton, NJ 08540
-
-
-
-
Telephone number from within the United States:
-
(800) 221-4792
-
-
-
Telephone number from outside the United States and Canada:
Web addresses can change, so you might be unable to connect to the website or sites mentioned here.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Customer service for people with hearing impairments
-
-
-If you are deaf or hard-of-hearing, complete access to Microsoft product and customer services is available through a text telephone (TTY/TDD) service:
-
-- For customer service, contact Microsoft Sales Information Center at (800) 892-5234 between 6:30 AM and 5:30 PM Pacific Time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.
-
-- For technical assistance in the United States, contact Microsoft Product Support Services at (800) 892-5234 between 6:00 AM and 6:00 PM Pacific Time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays. In Canada, dial (905) 568-9641 between 8:00 AM and 8:00 PM Eastern Time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.
-
-Microsoft Support Services are subject to the prices, terms, and conditions in place at the time the service is used.
-
-## For more information
-
-
-For more information about how accessible technology for computers helps to improve the lives of people with disabilities, see the [Microsoft Accessibility website](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=8431).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Getting Started with DaRT 10](getting-started-with-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/administering-dart-10-using-powershell.md b/mdop/dart-v10/administering-dart-10-using-powershell.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 566da0b7e9..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/administering-dart-10-using-powershell.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,56 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Administering DaRT 10 Using PowerShell
-description: Administering DaRT 10 Using PowerShell
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: eefe992f-077b-4e4b-8a5d-45b451614d7b
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Administering DaRT 10 Using PowerShell
-
-
-Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10 lets you use PowerShell commands to complete various DaRT 10 administrative tasks or to create the DaRT recovery image.
-
-## Perform DaRT tasks by using PowerShell commands
-
-
-DaRT 10 provides four PowerShell commands that let you do the following:
-
-- Burn an ISO to a CD, DVD, or USB drive.
-
-- Allow the source WIM file, which contains a DaRT image, to be converted into an ISO file.
-
-- Create a DaRT configuration object that is needed to apply a DaRT toolset to a Windows Image.
-
-- Apply a DartConfiguration object to a mounted Windows Image.
-
-[How to Perform DaRT Tasks by Using PowerShell Commands](how-to-perform-dart-tasks-by-using-powershell-commands-dart-10.md)
-
-## Use a PowerShell script to create the recovery image
-
-
-Rather than use the DaRT Recovery Image wizard to create the recovery image, you can use a PowerShell script and specify the parameters you want.
-
-[How to Use a PowerShell Script to Create the Recovery Image](how-to-use-a-powershell-script-to-create-the-recovery-image-dart-10.md)
-
-## Other resources for administering DaRT 10 using PowerShell
-
-
-[Operations for DaRT 10](operations-for-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/creating-the-dart-10-recovery-image.md b/mdop/dart-v10/creating-the-dart-10-recovery-image.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 01bc58f01f..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/creating-the-dart-10-recovery-image.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,266 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Creating the DaRT 10 Recovery Image
-description: Creating the DaRT 10 Recovery Image
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 173556de-2f20-4ea6-9e29-fc5ccc71ebd7
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Creating the DaRT 10 Recovery Image
-
-
-After installing Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10, you create a DaRT 10 recovery image. The recovery image starts Windows RE, from which you can then start the DaRT tools. You can generate International Organization for Standardization (ISO) files and Windows Imaging Format (WIM) images. In addition, you can use PowerShell to generate scripts that use the settings you select in the DaRT Recovery Image wizard. You can use the script later to rebuild recovery images by using the same settings. The recovery image provides a variety of recovery tools. For a description of the tools, see [Overview of the Tools in DaRT 10](overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-10.md).
-
-After you boot the computer into DaRT, you can run the different DaRT tools to try to diagnose and repair the computer. This section walks you through the process of creating the DaRT recovery image and lets you select the tools and features that you want to include as part of the image.
-
-You can create the DaRT recovery image by using either of two methods:
-
-- Use the DaRT Recovery Image wizard, which runs in a Windows environment.
-
-- Modify an example PowerShell script with the values you want. For more information, see [How to Use a PowerShell Script to Create the Recovery Image](how-to-use-a-powershell-script-to-create-the-recovery-image-dart-10.md).
-
-You can write the ISO to a recordable CD or DVD, save it to a USB flash drive, or save it in a format that you can use to boot into DaRT from a remote partition or from a recovery partition.
-
-Once you have created the ISO image, you can burn it onto a blank CD or DVD (if your computer has a CD or DVD drive). If your computer does not have a drive for this purpose, you can use most generic programs that are used to burn CDs or DVDs.
-
-## Select the image architecture and specify the path
-
-
-On the Windows 10 Media page, you select whether to create a 32-bit or 64-bit DaRT recovery image. Use the 32-bit Windows to build 32-bit DaRT recovery images, and 64-bit Windows to build 64-bit DaRT recovery images. You can use a single computer to create recovery images for both architecture types, but you cannot create one image that works on both 32-bit and 64-bit architectures. You also indicate the path of the Windows 10 installation media. Choose the architecture that matches the one of the recovery image that you are creating.
-
-**To select the image architecture and specify the path**
-
-1. On the **Windows 10 Media** page, select one of the following:
-
- - If you are creating a recovery image for 64-bit computers, select **Create x64 (64-bit) DaRT image**.
-
- - If you are creating a recovery image for 32-bit computers, select **Create x86 (32-bit) DaRT image**.
-
-2. In the **Specify the root path of the Windows 10 <64-bit or 32-bit> install media** box, type the path of the Windows 10 installation files. Use a path that matches the architecture of the recovery image that you are creating.
-
-3. Click **Next**.
-
-## Select the tools to include on the recovery image
-
-
-On the Tools page, you can select numerous tools to include on the recovery image. These tools will be available to end users when they boot into the DaRT image. However, if you enable remote connectivity when creating the DaRT image, all of the tools will be available when a help desk worker connects to the end user’s computer, regardless of which tools you chose to include on the image.
-
-To restrict end-user access to these tools, but still retain full access to the tools through the Remote Connection Viewer, do not select those tools on the Tools page. End users will be able to use only Remote Connection and will be able to see, but not access, any tools that you exclude from the recovery image.
-
-**To select the tools to include on the recovery image**
-
-1. On the **Tools** page, select the check box beside each tool that you want to include on the image.
-
-2. Click **Next**.
-
-## Choose whether to allow remote connectivity by a help desk
-
-
-On the Remote Connection page, you can choose to enable a help desk worker to remotely connect to and run the DaRT tools on an end user’s computer. The remote connectivity option is then shown as an available option in the Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset window. After help desk workers establish a remote connection, they can run the DaRT tools on the end-user computer from a remote location.
-
-**To choose whether to allow remote connectivity by help desk workers**
-
-1. On the **Remote Connection** page, select the **Allow remote connections** check box to allow remote connections, or clear the check box to prevent remote connections.
-
-2. If you cleared the **Allow remote connections** check box, click **Next**. Otherwise, go to the next step to continue configuring remote connectivity.
-
-3. Select one of the following:
-
- - Let Windows choose an open port number.
-
- - Specify the port number. If you select this option, enter a port number between 1 and 65535 in the field beneath the option. This port number will be used when establishing a remote connection. We recommend that the port number be 1024 or higher to minimize the possibility of a conflict.
-
-4. (Optional) in the **Remote connection welcome** message box, create a customized message that end users receive when they establish a remote connection. The message can be a maximum of 2048 characters.
-
-5. Click **Next**.
-
- For more information about running the DaRT tools remotely, see [How to Recover Remote Computers by Using the DaRT Recovery Image](how-to-recover-remote-computers-by-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-10.md).
-
-## Add drivers to the recovery image
-
-
-On the Drivers tab of the Advanced Options page, you can add additional device drivers that you may need when repairing a computer. These may typically include storage or network controllers that Windows 10 does not provide. Drivers are installed when the image is created.
-
-**Important**
-When you select drivers to include, be aware that wireless connectivity (such as Bluetooth or 802.11a/b/g/n) is not supported in DaRT.
-
-
-
-**To add drivers to the recovery image**
-
-1. On the **Advanced Options** page, click the **Drivers** tab.
-
-2. Click **Add**.
-
-3. Browse to the file to be added for the driver, and then click **Open**.
-
- **Note**
- The driver file is provided by the manufacturer of the storage or network controller.
-
-
-
-4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for every driver that you want to include.
-
-5. Click **Next**.
-
-## Add WinPE optional packages to the recovery image
-
-
-On the WinPE tab of the Advanced Options page, you can add WinPE optional packages to the DaRT image. These packages are part of the Windows ADK, which is an installation prerequisite for the DaRT Recovery Image wizard. The tools that you can select are all optional. Any required packages are added automatically, based on the tools you selected on the Tools page.
-
-You can also specify the size of the scratch space. Scratch space is the amount of RAM disk space that is set aside for DaRT to run. The scratch space is useful in case the end user’s hard disk is not available. If you are running additional tools and drivers, you may want to increase the scratch space.
-
-**To add WinPE optional packages to the recovery image**
-
-1. On the **Advanced Options** page, click the **WinPE** tab.
-
-2. Select the check box beside each package that you want to include on the image, or click the **Name** check box to select all of the packages.
-
-3. In the **Scratch Space** field, select the amount of RAM disk space to allocate for running DaRT in case the end user’s hard disk is not available.
-
-4. Click **Next**.
-
-## Add the debugging tools for Crash Analyzer
-
-
-If you include the Crash Analyzer tool in the ISO image, you must also include the Debugging Tools for Windows. On the Crash Analyzer tab of the Advanced Options page, you enter the path of the Windows 10 Debugging Tools, which Crash Analyzer uses to analyze memory dump files. You can use the tools that are on the computer where you are running the DaRT Recovery Image wizard, or you can use the tools that are on the end-user computer. If you decide to use the tools on the end-user computer, remember that every computer that you diagnose must have the Debugging Tools installed.
-
-If you installed the Microsoft Windows Software Development Kit (SDK) or the Microsoft Windows Development Kit (WDK), the Windows 10 Debugging Tools are added to the recovery image by default, and the path to the Debugging Tools is automatically filled in. You can change the path of the Windows 10 Debugging Tools if the files are located somewhere other than the location indicated by the default file path. A link in the wizard lets you download and install debugging tools for Windows if they are not already installed.
-
-To download the Windows Debugging Tools, see [Debugging Tools for Windows](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=266248). Install the Debugging Tools to the default location.
-
-**Note**
-The DaRT wizard checks for the tools in the `HKLM\Software\Microsoft\Windows Kits\Installed Roots\WindowsDebuggersRoot` registry key. If the registry value is not there, the wizard looks in one of the following locations, depending on your system architecture:
-
-`%ProgramFilesX86%\Windows Kits\10.0\Debuggers\x64`
-
-`%ProgramFilesX86%\Windows Kits\10.0\Debuggers\x86`
-
-
-
-**To add the debugging tools for Crash Analyzer**
-
-1. On the **Advanced Options** page, click the **Crash Analyzer** tab.
-
-2. (Optional) Click **Download the Debugging Tools** to download the Debugging Tools for Windows.
-
-3. Select one of the following options:
-
- - **Include the Windows 10 <64-bit or 32-bit> Debugging Tools**. If you select this option, browse to and select the location of the tools if the path is not already displaying.
-
- - **Use the Debugging Tools from the system that is being debugged**. If you select this option, the Crash Analyzer will not work if the Debugging Tools for Windows are not found on the problem computer.
-
-4. Click **Next**.
-
-## Select the types of recovery image files to create
-
-
-On the Create Image page, you choose an output folder for the recovery image, enter an image name, and select the types of DaRT recovery image files to create. During the recovery image creation process, Windows source files are unpacked, DaRT files are copied to it, and the image is then “re-packed” into the file formats that you select on this page.
-
-The available image file types are:
-
-- **Windows Imaging File (WIM)** - used to deploy DaRT to a preboot execution environment (PXE) or local partition).
-
-- **International Standards Organization (ISO)** – used to deploy to CD or DVD, or for use in virtual machines (VM)s). The wizard requires that the ISO image have an .iso file name extension because most programs that burn a CD or DVD require that extension. If you do not specify a different location, the ISO image is created on your desktop with the name DaRT10.ISO.
-
-- **PowerShell script** – creates a DaRT recovery image with commands that provide essentially the same options that you can select by using the DaRT Recovery Image wizard. The script also enables you to add or changes files in the DaRT recovery image.
-
-If you select the Edit Image check box on this page, you can customize the recovery image during the image creation process. For example, you can change the “winpeshl.ini” file to create a custom startup order or to add third-party tools.
-
-**To select the types of recovery image files to create**
-
-1. On the **Create Image** page, click **Browse** to choose the output folder for the image file.
-
- **Note**
- The size of the image will vary, depending on the tools that you select and the files that you add in the wizard.
-
-
-
-2. In the **Image name** box, enter a name for the DaRT recovery image, or accept the default name, which is DaRT10.
-
- The wizard creates a subfolder in the output path by this name.
-
-3. Select the types of image files that you want to create.
-
-4. Choose one of the following:
-
- - To change the files in the recovery image before you create the image files, select the **Edit Image** check box, and then click **Prepare**.
-
- - To create the recovery image without changing the files, click **Create**.
-
-5.
-
- Click **Next**.
-
-## Edit the recovery image files
-
-
-You can edit the recovery image only if you selected the Edit Image check box on the Create Image page. After the recovery image has been prepared for editing, you can add and modify the recovery image files before creating the bootable media. For example, you can create a custom order for startup, add various third-party tools, and so on.
-
-**To edit the recovery image files**
-
-1. On the **Edit Image** page, click **Open** in Windows Explorer.
-
-2. Create a subfolder in the folder that is listed in the dialog box.
-
-3. Copy the files that you want to the new subfolder, or remove files that you don’t want.
-
-4. Click **Create** to start creating the recovery image.
-
-## Generate the recovery image files
-
-
-On the Generate Files page, the DaRT recovery image is generated for the file types that you selected on the Create Image page.
-
-**To generate the recovery image files**
-
-- On the **Generate Files** page, click **Next** to generate the recovery image files.
-
-## Copy the recovery image to a CD, DVD, or USB
-
-
-On the Create Bootable Media page, you can optionally copy the image file to a CD, DVD, or USB flash drive (UFD). You can also create additional bootable media from this page by restarting the wizard.
-
-**Note**
-The Preboot execution environment (PXE) and local image deployment are not supported natively by this tool since they require additional enterprise tools, such as System Center Configuration Manager server and Microsoft Development Toolkit.
-
-
-
-**To copy the recovery image to a CD, DVD, or USB**
-
-1. On the **Create Bootable Media** page, select the iso file that you want to copy.
-
-2. Insert a CD, DVD, or USB, and then select the drive.
-
- **Note**
- If a drive is not recognized and you install a new drive, you can click **Refresh** to force the wizard to update the list of available drives.
-
-
-
-3. Click the **Create Bootable Media** button.
-
-4. To create another recovery image, click Restart, or click **Close** if you have finished creating all of the media that you want.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Overview of the Tools in DaRT 10](overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-10.md)
-
-[Deploying DaRT 10](deploying-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/dart-10--c--page.md b/mdop/dart-v10/dart-10--c--page.md
deleted file mode 100644
index edbc333edd..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/dart-10--c--page.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,66 +0,0 @@
----
-title: DaRT 10
-description: DaRT 10
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 4f62abe6-d971-44b4-b1e7-9dcaf199ca31
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# DaRT 10
-
-
-## Copyright
-
-
-This document is provided "as-is". Information and views expressed in this document, including URL and other Internet website references, may change without notice.
-
-Some examples depicted herein are provided for illustration only and are fictitious. No real association or connection is intended or should be inferred.
-
-This document does not provide you with any legal rights to any intellectual property in any Microsoft product. You may copy and use this document for your internal, reference purposes. You may modify this document for your internal, reference purposes.
-
-This document is confidential and proprietary to Microsoft. It is disclosed and can be used only pursuant to a non-disclosure agreement.
-
-
-
-Microsoft, Active Directory, ActiveX, Bing, Excel, Silverlight, SQL Server, Windows, Microsoft Intune, and Windows PowerShell are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.
-
-## Revision History
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Release Date
-
Changes
-
-
-
-
-
Month dd, yyyy
-
Original release of this guide.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/dart-10-cover-page.md b/mdop/dart-v10/dart-10-cover-page.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 93162131d7..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/dart-10-cover-page.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
----
-title: DaRT 10
-description: DaRT 10
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 875f6dc4-13f4-4625-8c6a-38215c2daf01
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# DaRT 10
-
-
-
-
-## Administrator’s Guide for <Product Name>
-
-
-Published: *<date published>*
-
-*Include an executive summary overview of the product, here.*
-
-This guide describes how to install and use *<Product Name>*. This guide is intended for administrators and IT personnel.
-
-For the most current documentation for *<Product Name>*, see the *insert link here* home page.
-
-For the release notes for *<Product Name>*, see *insert link here*.
-
-### Feedback
-
-Send suggestions and comments about this document to .
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/dart-10-deployment-checklist.md b/mdop/dart-v10/dart-10-deployment-checklist.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 51c0fb097f..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/dart-10-deployment-checklist.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
----
-title: DaRT 10 Deployment Checklist
-description: DaRT 10 Deployment Checklist
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: a6b7ba27-a969-4da9-bef0-d019739413cc
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# DaRT 10 Deployment Checklist
-
-
-This checklist can be used to help you during Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10 deployment.
-
-**Note**
-This checklist outlines the recommended steps and a high-level list of items to consider when planning for product deployment. It is recommended that you copy this checklist into a spreadsheet program and customize it for your use.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
References
-
-
-
-
-
-
Decide on the best DaRT 10 deployment option for your requirements and deploy it.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying DaRT 10](deploying-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/dart-10-planning-checklist.md b/mdop/dart-v10/dart-10-planning-checklist.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5db8a262f5..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/dart-10-planning-checklist.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
----
-title: DaRT 10 Planning Checklist
-description: DaRT 10 Planning Checklist
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: d6482534-cdf3-4997-bec0-33d0edf6924a
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# DaRT 10 Planning Checklist
-
-
-This checklist can be used to help you plan for preparing your computing environment for Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10 deployment.
-
-**Note**
-This checklist outlines the recommended steps and a high-level list of items to consider when planning for product deployment. It is recommended that you copy this checklist into a spreadsheet program and customize it for your use.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
References
-
-
-
-
-
-
Review the DaRT 10 Supported Configurations information to confirm that the computers you have selected for client or feature installation meet the minimum hardware and operating system requirements.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning for DaRT 10](planning-for-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/dart-10-privacy-statement.md b/mdop/dart-v10/dart-10-privacy-statement.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ee32260042..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/dart-10-privacy-statement.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,97 +0,0 @@
----
-title: DaRT 10 Privacy Statement
-description: DaRT 10 Privacy Statement
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 27ad36fe-6816-4fe8-8838-500c05b5b184
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# DaRT 10 Privacy Statement
-
-
-Microsoft is committed to protecting your privacy, while delivering software that brings you the performance, power, and convenience you desire in your personal computing. This privacy statement explains many of the data collection and use practices of Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (“DaRT”). This disclosure focuses on features that communicate with the Internet and is not intended to be an exhaustive list.
-
-Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (“DaRT”) enables administrators to easily recover PCs that have become unusable, rapidly diagnose probable causes of issues, and quickly repair unbootable or locked-out systems, all faster than the average time it takes to reimage the machine. When necessary, you can also quickly restore critical lost files. This release provides support for Windows 10 as well as improvements on image creation and new hardware and software coverage.
-
-## Collection and Use of Your Information
-
-
-The information we collect from you will be used by Microsoft and its controlled subsidiaries and affiliates to enable the features you are using and provide the service(s) or carry out the transaction(s) you have requested or authorized. It may also be used to analyze and improve Microsoft products and services.
-
-We may send certain mandatory service communications such as welcome letters, billing reminders, information on technical service issues, and security announcements. Some Microsoft services may send periodic member letters that are considered part of the service. We may occasionally request your feedback, invite you to participate in surveys, or send you promotional mailings to inform you of other products or services available from Microsoft and its affiliates.
-
-In order to offer you a more consistent and personalized experience in your interactions with Microsoft, information collected through one Microsoft service may be combined with information obtained through other Microsoft services. We may also supplement the information we collect with information obtained from other companies. For example, we may use services from other companies that enable us to derive a general geographic area based on your IP address in order to customize certain services to your geographic area.
-
-Except as described in this statement, personal information you provide will not be transferred to third parties without your consent. We occasionally hire other companies to provide limited services on our behalf, such as packaging, sending and delivering purchases and other mailings, answering customer questions about products or services, processing event registration, or performing statistical analysis of our services. We will only provide those companies the personal information they need to deliver the service, and they are prohibited from using that information for any other purpose.
-
-Microsoft may access or disclose information about you, including the content of your communications, in order to: (a) comply with the law or respond to lawful requests or legal process; (b) protect the rights or property of Microsoft or our customers, including the enforcement of our agreements or policies governing your use of the services; or (c) act on a good faith belief that such access or disclosure is necessary to protect the personal safety of Microsoft employees, customers, or the public. We may also disclose personal information as part of a corporate transaction such as a merger or sale of assets.
-
-Information that is collected by or sent to Microsoft by DaRT may be stored and processed in the United States or any other country in which Microsoft or its affiliates, subsidiaries, or service providers maintain facilities. Microsoft abides by the safe harbor framework as set forth by the U.S. Department of Commerce regarding the collection, use, and retention of data from the European Union, the European Economic Area, and Switzerland.
-
-## Collection and Use of Information about Your Computer
-
-
-When you use software with Internet-enabled features, information about your computer ("standard computer information") is sent to the Web sites you visit and online services you use. Microsoft uses standard computer information to provide you Internet-enabled services, to help improve our products and services, and for statistical analysis. Standard computer information typically includes information such as your IP address, operating system version, browser version, and regional and language settings. In some cases, standard computer information may also include hardware ID, which indicates the device manufacturer, device name, and version. If a particular feature or service sends information to Microsoft, standard computer information will be sent as well.
-
-The privacy details for each DaRT feature, software or service listed in this privacy statement describe what additional information is collected and how it is used.
-
-## Security of your information
-
-
-Microsoft is committed to helping protect the security of your information. We use a variety of security technologies and procedures to help protect your information from unauthorized access, use, or disclosure. For example, we store the information you provide on computer systems with limited access, which are located in controlled facilities.
-
-## Changes to this privacy statement
-
-
-We will occasionally update this privacy statement to reflect changes in our products, services, and customer feedback. When we post changes, we will revise the "last updated" date at the top of this statement. If there are material changes to this statement or in how Microsoft will use your personal information, we will notify you either by posting a notice of such changes prior to implementing the change or by directly sending you a notification. We encourage you to periodically review this statement to be informed of how Microsoft is protecting your information.
-
-## For More Information
-
-
-Microsoft welcomes your comments regarding this privacy statement. If you have questions about this statement or believe that we have not adhered to it, please [contact us](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=245853).
-
-Microsoft PrivacyMicrosoft CorporationOne Microsoft WayRedmond, Washington 98052 USA
-
-## Specific Features
-
-
-## Microsoft Update
-
-
-**What This Feature Does:**
-
-Microsoft Update is a service that provides Windows updates as well as updates for other Microsoft software.
-
-**Information Collected, Processed, or Transmitted:**
-
-For details about what information is collected and how it is used, see the Update Services Privacy Statement at .
-
-**Use of Information:**
-
-For details about what information is collected and how it is used, see the Update Services Privacy Statement at .
-
-**Choice/Control:**
-
-For details about controlling this feature, see the Update Services Privacy Statement at [https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=244000](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=244400).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Security and Privacy for DaRT 10](security-and-privacy-for-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/dart-10-supported-configurations.md b/mdop/dart-v10/dart-10-supported-configurations.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0a20396771..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/dart-10-supported-configurations.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,307 +0,0 @@
----
-title: DaRT 10 Supported Configurations
-description: DaRT 10 Supported Configurations
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: a07d6562-1fa9-499f-829c-9cc487ede0b7
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# DaRT 10 Supported Configurations
-
-
-This topic specifies the prerequisite software and supported configurations requirements that are necessary to install and run Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10 in your environment. Both the operating system requirements and the system requirements that are required to run DaRT 10 are specified. For information about prerequisites that you need to consider to create the DaRT recovery image, see [Planning to Create the DaRT 10 Recovery Image](planning-to-create-the-dart-10-recovery-image.md).
-
-For supported configurations that apply to later releases, see the documentation for the applicable release.
-
-You can install DaRT in one of two ways. You can install all functionality on an IT administrator computer, where you will perform all the tasks associated with running DaRT. Alternatively, you can install, on the administrator computer, only the DaRT functionality that creates the recovery image, and then install the functionality used to run DaRT (that is, the DaRT Remote Connection Viewer) on a help desk computer.
-
-## DaRT 10 prerequisite software
-
-
-Make sure that the following prerequisites are met before you install DaRT.
-
-### Administrator computer prerequisites
-
-The following table lists the installation prerequisites for the administrator computer when you are installing DaRT 10 and all of the DaRT tools.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Prerequisite
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
Windows Assessment and Development Kit (ADK)
-
Required for the DaRT Recovery Image wizard. Contains the Deployment Tools, which are used to customize, deploy, and service Windows images, and contains the Windows Preinstallation Environment (Windows PE). The ADK is not required if you are installing only the Remote Connection Viewer and/or Crash Analyzer.
-
-
-
Windows Development Kit OR Software Development Kit (optional)
-
Crash Analyzer requires the Windows 10 Debugging Tools from the Windows Driver Kit to analyze memory dump files.
-
-
-
Windows 10 64-bit or 32-bit ISO image
-
DaRT requires the Windows Recovery Environment (Windows RE) image from the Windows 10 media. Download the 32-bit or 64-bit version of Windows 10, depending on the type of DaRT recovery image you want to create. If you support both system types in your environment, download both versions of Windows 10.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Help desk computer prerequisites
-
-The following table lists the installation prerequisites for the help desk computer when you are running the DaRT 10 Remote Connection Viewer.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Prerequisite
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
DaRT 10 Remote Connection Viewer
-
Must be installed on a Windows 10 operating system.
-
-
-
Debugging Tools for Windows
-
Required only if you are installing the Crash Analyzer tool
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### End-user computer prerequisites
-
-There is no prerequisite software that must be installed on end-user computers, other than the Windows 10 operating system.
-
-## DaRT 10 operating system requirements
-
-
-### Administrator computer system requirements
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for the DaRT 10 administrator computer installation.
-
-**Note**
-Make sure that you allocate enough space for any additional tools that you want to install on the administrator computer.
-
-
-
-**Note**
-Microsoft provides support for the current service pack and, in some cases, the immediately preceding service pack. To find the support timelines for your product, see the [Lifecycle Supported Service Packs](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=31975). For additional information about Microsoft Support Lifecycle Policy, see [Microsoft Support Lifecycle Support Policy FAQ](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=31976).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating System
-
Edition
-
Service Pack
-
System Architecture
-
Operating System Requirements
-
RAM Requirement for Running DaRT
-
-
-
-
-
Windows 10
-
All editions
-
N/A
-
64-bit
-
2 GB
-
2.5 GB
-
-
-
Windows 10
-
All editions
-
N/A
-
32-bit
-
1 GB
-
1.5 GB
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### DaRT help desk computer system requirements
-
-If you allow a help desk to remotely troubleshoot computers, you must have the Remote Connection Viewer installed on the help desk computer. You can optionally install the Crash Analyzer tool on the help desk computer.
-
-DaRT 10 enables a help desk worker to connect to a DaRT 10 computer by using either the DaRT 7.0, DaRT 8.0, DaRt 8.1, or DaRT 10 Remote Connection Viewer. The DaRT 7.0, DaRT 8.0 and DaRt 8.1, Remote Connection Viewers require Windows 7, Windows 8, or Windows 8.1 operating systems respectively, while the DaRT 10 Remote Connection Viewer requires Windows 10. The DaRT 10 Remote Connection Viewer and all other DaRT 10 tools can be installed only on a computer running Windows 10.
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for the DaRT help desk computer installation.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating System
-
Edition
-
Service Pack
-
System Architecture
-
Operating System Requirements
-
RAM Requirements for Running DaRT
-
-
-
-
-
Windows 10
-
All editions
-
N/A
-
64-bit
-
2 GB
-
2.5 GB
-
-
-
Windows 10 (with Remote Connection Viewer 10.0 only)
-
All editions
-
N/A
-
32-bit
-
1 GB
-
1.5 GB
-
-
-
Windows 8
-
All editions
-
N/A
-
64-bit
-
2 GB
-
2.5 GB
-
-
-
Windows 8 (with Remote Connection Viewer 8.0 only)
-
All editions
-
N/A
-
32-bit
-
1 GB
-
1.5 GB
-
-
-
Windows 7 (with Remote Connection Viewer 7.0 only)
-
All editions
-
SP1, SP2
-
64-bit or 32-bit
-
1 GB
-
N/A
-
-
-
Windows Server 2012
-
Standard, Enterprise, Data Center
-
N/A
-
64-bit
-
2 GB
-
1.0 GB
-
-
-
Windows Server 2012 R2
-
Standard, Enterprise, Data Center
-
N/A
-
64-bit
-
2 GB
-
1.0 GB
-
-
-
-
-
-
-DaRT also has the following minimum hardware requirements for the end-user computer:
-
-A CD or DVD drive or a USB port - required only if you are deploying DaRT in your enterprise by using a CD, DVD, or USB.
-
-BIOS support for starting the computer from a CD or DVD, a USB flash drive, or from a remote or recovery partition.
-
-### DaRT 10 end-user computer system requirements
-
-The Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset window in DaRT 10 requires that the end-user computer use one of the following operating systems together with the specified amount of system memory available for DaRT:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating System
-
Edition
-
Service Pack
-
System Architecture
-
Operating System Requirements
-
RAM Requirements
-
-
-
-
-
Windows 10
-
All editions
-
N/A
-
64-bit
-
2 GB
-
2.5 GB
-
-
-
Windows 10
-
All editions
-
N/A
-
32-bit
-
1 GB
-
1.5 GB
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy DaRT 10](planning-to-deploy-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/deploying-dart-10-to-administrator-computers.md b/mdop/dart-v10/deploying-dart-10-to-administrator-computers.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 84b8e13959..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/deploying-dart-10-to-administrator-computers.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,57 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying DaRT 10 to Administrator Computers
-description: Deploying DaRT 10 to Administrator Computers
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: c1981cbe-10f8-41f6-8989-bcc9d57a2aa8
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying DaRT 10 to Administrator Computers
-
-
-Before you begin the deployment of Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10, review the requirements for your environment. This includes the hardware requirements for installing DaRT 10. For more information about DaRT hardware and software requirements, see [DaRT 10 Supported Configurations](dart-10-supported-configurations.md).
-
-The topics in this section can be used to help you deploy DaRT in your enterprise based on your environment and deployment strategy.
-
-## Deploy DaRT 10
-
-
-You can use the Windows Installer file for DaRT to install DaRT on a computer that you will use to first create the DaRT recovery image and then troubleshoot and fix end-user computers. Frequently, across an organization, you might install on the administrator computer only the DaRT functionality that you need to create a DaRT recovery image. Then, on a help desk administrator’s computer, you might install only the DaRT functionality that you must have to troubleshoot a problem computer, such as the DaRT Remote Connection Viewer and the Crash Analyzer.
-
-In addition to manually running the Windows Installer file to install DaRT, you can also install DaRT at the command prompt to support enterprise software deployment systems such as System Center Configuration Manager 2012.
-
-[How to Deploy DaRT 10](how-to-deploy-dart-10.md)
-
-## Change, repair, or remove DaRT 10
-
-
-You can change, repair, or remove the DaRT installation by double-clicking the DaRT installation file and then clicking the button that corresponds to the action that you want to perform or through the Windows Control Panel.
-
-[How to Change, Repair, or Remove DaRT 10](how-to-change-repair-or-remove-dart-10.md)
-
-## How to get DaRT 10
-
-
-To get the DaRT software, see [How to Get MDOP](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049).
-
-## Other resources for deploying DaRT 10 to administrator computers
-
-
-[Deploying DaRT 10](deploying-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/deploying-dart-10.md b/mdop/dart-v10/deploying-dart-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ba270e3a87..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/deploying-dart-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,65 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying DaRT 10
-description: Deploying DaRT 10
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 92cf70fd-006f-4fdc-9fb3-78d9d223148d
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying DaRT 10
-
-
-Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10 supports a number of different deployment configurations. This section includes information you should consider about the deployment of DaRT 10 and step-by-step procedures to help you successfully perform the tasks that you must complete at different stages of your deployment.
-
-## Deployment Information
-
-
-- [Deploying DaRT 10 to Administrator Computers](deploying-dart-10-to-administrator-computers.md)
-
- This section describes the different DaRT deployment options for your requirements and explains how to deploy them.
-
-- [Creating the DaRT 10 Recovery Image](creating-the-dart-10-recovery-image.md)
-
- This section describes the methods you can use to create the DaRT recovery image and provides instructions to create the recovery image by using the DaRT Recovery Image wizard.
-
-- [Deploying the DaRT Recovery Image](deploying-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-10.md)
-
- This section provides information to help you decide on the best DaRT recovery image deployment option for your requirements and provides instructions on how to deploy the recovery image.
-
-- [DaRT 10 Deployment Checklist](dart-10-deployment-checklist.md)
-
- This section contains a deployment checklist that can help you to deploy DaRT.
-
-### How to get DaRT
-
-This technology is a part of the Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack (MDOP). Enterprise customers can get MDOP with Microsoft Software Assurance. For more information about Microsoft Software Assurance and acquiring MDOP, see [How Do I Get MDOP](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=322049) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=322049).
-
-## Other Resources for deploying DaRT
-
-
-[Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 10](index.md)
-
-[Getting Started with DaRT 10](getting-started-with-dart-10.md)
-
-[Planning for DaRT 10](planning-for-dart-10.md)
-
-[Operations for DaRT 10](operations-for-dart-10.md)
-
-[Troubleshooting DaRT 10](troubleshooting-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/deploying-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-10.md b/mdop/dart-v10/deploying-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8bdf2391c1..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/deploying-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying the DaRT Recovery Image
-description: Deploying the DaRT Recovery Image
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 2b859da6-e31a-4240-8868-93a754328cf2
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying the DaRT Recovery Image
-
-
-After you have created the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) file that contains the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10 recovery image, you can deploy the DaRT 10 recovery image throughout your enterprise so that it is available to end users and help desk workers. There are four supported methods that you can use to deploy the DaRT recovery image. To review the advantages and disadvantages of each method, see [Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT 10 Recovery Image](planning-how-to-save-and-deploy-the-dart-10-recovery-image.md).
-
-Burn the ISO image file to a CD or DVD by using the DaRT Recovery Image wizard
-
-Save the contents of the ISO image file to a USB Flash Drive (UFD) by using the DaRT Recovery Image wizard
-
-Extract the boot.wim file from the ISO image and deploy as a remote partition that is available to end-user computers
-
-Extract the boot.wim file from the ISO image and deploy in the recovery partition of a new Windows 10 installation
-
-**Important**
-The **DaRT Recovery Image Wizard** provides the option to burn the image to a CD, DVD or UFD, but the other methods of saving and deploying the recovery image require additional steps that involve tools that are not included in DaRT. Some guidance and links for these other methods are provided in this section.
-
-
-
-## Deploy the DaRT recovery image as part of a recovery partition
-
-
-After you have finished running the DaRT Recovery Image wizard and created the recovery image, you can extract the boot.wim file from the ISO image file and deploy it as a recovery partition in a Windows 10 image.
-
-[How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as Part of a Recovery Partition](how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-part-of-a-recovery-partition-dart-10.md)
-
-## Deploy the DaRT recovery image as a remote partition
-
-
-You can host the recovery image on a central network boot server, such as Windows Deployment Services, and allow users or support staff to stream the image to computers on demand.
-
-[How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as a Remote Partition](how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-a-remote-partition-dart-10.md)
-
-## Other resources for deploying the DaRT recovery image
-
-
-[Deploying DaRT 10](deploying-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer-dart-10.md b/mdop/dart-v10/diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer-dart-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a13df573f8..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer-dart-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,57 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer
-description: Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 7ebef49e-a294-4173-adb1-7e6994aa01ad
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer
-
-
-The **Crash Analyzer** in Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10 lets you debug a memory dump file on a Windows-based computer and then diagnose any related computer errors. The **Crash Analyzer** uses the Microsoft Debugging Tools for Windows to examine a memory dump file for the driver that caused the computer to fail. You can run the Crash Analyzer on an end-user computer or in stand-alone mode on a computer other than an end-user computer.
-
-## Run the Crash Analyzer on an end-user-computer
-
-
-Typically, you run **Crash Analyzer** from the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window on an end-user computer that is experiencing the problem. The **Crash Analyzer** tries to locate the Debugging Tools for Windows on the problem computer. If the directory path dialog box is empty, you must enter the location, or browse to the location of the Debugging Tools for Windows (you can download the files from Microsoft). You must also provide a path to where the symbol files are located.
-
-If you included the Microsoft Debugging Tools for Windows and the symbol files when you created the DaRT 10 recovery image, the Tools and symbol files should be available when you run the **Crash Analyzer** on the problem computer. If you did not include them in the DaRT recovery image, or if disk size or network connectivity problems are preventing you from obtaining them, you can alternatively run the Crash Analyzer in stand-alone mode on a computer other than the end user’s computer, as described in the following section.
-
-[How to Run the Crash Analyzer on an End-user Computer](how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-on-an-end-user-computer-dart-10.md)
-
-## Run the Crash Analyzer in stand-alone mode on a computer other than an end user’s computer
-
-
-Although you typically run **Crash Analyzer** on the end-user computer that is experiencing the problem, you can also run the Crash Analyzer in stand-alone mode, on a computer other than an end-user computer. You might choose this option if you did not include the Windows Debugging Tools in the DaRT recovery image, or if disk size or network connectivity problems are preventing you from obtaining the Debugging Tools. In this case, you can copy the dump file from the problem computer and analyze it on a computer that has the stand-alone version of **Crash Analyzer** installed, such as on a help desk agent’s computer.
-
-[How to Run the Crash Analyzer in Stand-alone Mode on a Computer Other than an End-user Computer](how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-in-stand-alone-mode-on-a-computer-other-than-an-end-user-computer-dart-10.md)
-
-## How to ensure that Crash Analyzer can access symbol files
-
-
-To debug applications that have stopped responding, you need access to the symbol file, which is separate from the program. Although symbol files are automatically downloaded when you run Crash Analyzer, there might be times when the problem computer does not have access to the Internet. There are several ways to ensure that you have guaranteed access to symbol files.
-
-[How to Ensure that Crash Analyzer Can Access Symbol Files](how-to-ensure-that-crash-analyzer-can-access-symbol-files-dart-10.md)
-
-## Other resources for diagnosing system failures with Crash Analyzer
-
-
-[Operations for DaRT 10](operations-for-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/getting-started-with-dart-10.md b/mdop/dart-v10/getting-started-with-dart-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f81b153367..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/getting-started-with-dart-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,68 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Getting Started with DaRT 10
-description: Getting Started with DaRT 10
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 593dd317-4fba-4d51-8a80-951590acede6
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Getting Started with DaRT 10
-
-
-Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10 requires thorough planning before you deploy it or use its features. If you are new to this product, we recommend that you read the documentation carefully. Before you deploy the product to a production environment, we also recommend that you validate your deployment plan in a test network environment. You might also consider taking a class about relevant technologies.
-
->[!NOTE]
-> A downloadable version of this administrator’s guide is not available. However, you can click **Download PDF** at the bottom of the Table of Contents pane to get a PDF version of this guide.
->
->Additional information about this product can also be found on the [Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset documentation download page.](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=27754)
-
-
-## Getting started with DaRT 10
-
-
-- [About DaRT 10](about-dart-10.md)
-
- Provides information specifically related to DaRT, including what is new in DaRT 10.
-
-- [Overview of the Tools in DaRT 10](overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-10.md)
-
- Describes the tools in DaRT 10.
-
-- [Accessibility for DaRT 10](accessibility-for-dart-10.md)
-
- Provides information about features and services that make this product and its corresponding documentation more accessible for people with disabilities.
-
-## How to Get DaRT 10
-
-
-DaRT 10 is a part of the Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack (MDOP). MDOP is part of Microsoft Software Assurance. For more information about Microsoft Software Assurance and acquiring MDOP, see [How Do I Get MDOP](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049).
-
-## Other resources for this product
-
-
-[Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 10](index.md)
-
-[Planning for DaRT 10](planning-for-dart-10.md)
-
-[Deploying DaRT 10](deploying-dart-10.md)
-
-[Operations for DaRT 10](operations-for-dart-10.md)
-
-[Troubleshooting DaRT 10](troubleshooting-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-change-repair-or-remove-dart-10.md b/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-change-repair-or-remove-dart-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8bc407173f..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-change-repair-or-remove-dart-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Change, Repair, or Remove DaRT 10
-description: How to Change, Repair, or Remove DaRT 10
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: e7718c6f-06a1-48bb-b04b-1a0f659a0337
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Change, Repair, or Remove DaRT 10
-
-
-You can change, repair, or remove the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10 installation by double-clicking the DaRT 10 installation file and then clicking the button that corresponds to the action that you want to perform.
-
-You can also change, repair, or remove the DaRT installation using the Windows Control Panel by completing the following steps.
-
-## To change, repair, or remove DaRT
-
-
-1. Click **Start**, and then click **Control Panel**.
-
-2. On **Control Panel**, navigate to the feature that lets you uninstall programs.
-
-3. Click **Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 10**, and then click the button that corresponds to the action that you want to perform.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying DaRT 10 to Administrator Computers](deploying-dart-10-to-administrator-computers.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-deploy-dart-10.md b/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-deploy-dart-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f911f88b74..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-deploy-dart-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,111 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Deploy DaRT 10
-description: How to Deploy DaRT 10
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 13e8ba20-21c3-4870-94ed-6d3106d69f21
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Deploy DaRT 10
-
-
-The following instructions explain how to deploy Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10 in your environment. To get the DaRT software, see [How to Get MDOP](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049). It is assumed that you are installing all functionality on one administrator computer. If you need to deploy or uninstall DaRT 10 on multiple computers, using an electronic software distribution system, for example, it might be easier to use command line installation options. Descriptions and examples of the available command line options are provided in this section.
-
-**Important**
-Before you install DaRT, see [DaRT 10 Supported Configurations](dart-10-supported-configurations.md) to ensure that you have installed all of the prerequisite software and that the computer meets the minimum system requirements. The computer onto which you install DaRT must be running Windows 10.
-
-
-
-You can install DaRT using one of two different configurations:
-
-- Install DaRT and all of the DaRT tools on the administrator computer.
-
-- Install on the administrator computer only the tools that you need to create the DaRT recovery image, and then install the **Remote Connection Viewer** and, optionally, **Crash Analyzer** on a help desk computer.
-
-The DaRT installation file is available in both 32-bit and 64-bit versions. Install the version that matches the architecture of the computer on which you are running the DaRT Recovery Image wizard, not the computer architecture of the recovery image that you are creating.
-
-You can use either version of the DaRT installation file to create a recovery image for either 32-bit or 64-bit computers, but you cannot create one recovery image for both 32-bit and 64-bit computers.
-
-**To install DaRT and all DaRT tools on an administrator computer**
-
-1. Download the 32-bit or 64-bit version of the DaRT 10 installer file. Choose the architecture that matches the computer on which you are installing DaRT and running the DaRT Recovery Image wizard.
-
-2. From the folder into which you downloaded DaRT 10, run the **MSDaRT.msi** installation file that corresponds to your system requirements.
-
-3. On the **Welcome to the Microsoft DaRT 10 Setup Wizard** page, click **Next**.
-
-4. Accept the Microsoft Software License Terms, and then click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Microsoft Update** page, select **Use Microsoft Update when I check for updates**, and then click **Next**.
-
-6. On the **Select Installation Folder** page, select a folder, or click **Next** to install DaRT in the default installation location.
-
-7. On the **Setup Options** page, select the DaRT features that you want to install, or click **Next** to install DaRT with all of the features.
-
-8. To start the installation, click **Install**.
-
-9. After the installation has completed successfully, click **Finish** to exit the wizard.
-
-## To install DaRT and all DaRT tools on an administrator computer by using a command prompt
-
-
-When you install or uninstall DaRT, you have the option of running the installation files at the command prompt. This section describes some examples of different options that you can specify when you install or uninstall DaRT at the command prompt.
-
-The following example shows how to install all DaRT functionality.
-
-``` syntax
-msiexec /i MSDaRT.msi ADDLOCAL=CommonFiles, DaRTRecoveryImage,CrashAnalyzer,RemoteViewer
-```
-
-The following example shows how to install only the DaRT Recovery Image wizard.
-
-``` syntax
-msiexec /i MSDaRT.msi ADDLOCAL=CommonFiles, ,DaRTRecoveryImage
-```
-
-The following example shows how to install only the Crash Analyzer and the DaRT Remote Connection Viewer.
-
-``` syntax
-msiexec /i MSDaRT.msi ADDLOCAL=CommonFiles,CrashAnalyzer,RemoteViewer
-```
-
-The following example creates a setup log for the Windows Installer. This is valuable for debugging.
-
-``` syntax
-msiexec.exe /i MSDaRT.msi /l*v log.txt
-```
-
-**Note**
-You can add /qn or /qb to perform a silent installation.
-
-
-
-**To validate the DaRT installation**
-
-1. Click **Start**, and select **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset**.
-
- The **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window opens.
-
-2. Check that all of the DaRT tools that you selected for installation were successfully installed.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying DaRT 10 to Administrator Computers](deploying-dart-10-to-administrator-computers.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-a-remote-partition-dart-10.md b/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-a-remote-partition-dart-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8d2a4a4426..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-a-remote-partition-dart-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,57 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as a Remote Partition
-description: How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as a Remote Partition
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 06a5e250-b992-4f6a-ad74-e7715f9e96e7
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as a Remote Partition
-
-
-After you have finished running the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10 Recovery Image wizard and created the recovery image, you can extract the boot.wim file from the ISO image file and deploy it as a remote partition on the network.
-
-**To deploy DaRT 10 as a remote partition**
-
-1. Extract the boot.wim file from the DaRT ISO image file.
-
- 1. Mount the ISO image file that you created in the **Create Startup Image** dialog box by using your company’s preferred method of mounting an image.
-
- 2. Open the ISO image file and copy the boot.wim file from the \\sources folder in the mounted image to a location on your computer or on an external drive.
-
- **Note**
- If you burned a CD or DVD of the recovery image, you can open the files on the CD or DVD and copy the boot.wim file from the \\sources folder. This lets you skip the need to mount the image.
-
-
-
-2. Deploy the boot.wim file to a WDS server that can be accessed from end-user computers in your enterprise.
-
-3. Configure the WDS server to use the boot.wim file for DaRT by following your standard WDS deployment procedures.
-
-For more information about how to deploy DaRT as a remote partition, see [Walkthrough: Deploy an Image by Using PXE](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=212108) and [Windows Deployment Services Getting Started Guide](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=212106).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Creating the DaRT 10 Recovery Image](creating-the-dart-10-recovery-image.md)
-
-[Deploying the DaRT Recovery Image](deploying-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-10.md)
-
-[Planning for DaRT 10](planning-for-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-part-of-a-recovery-partition-dart-10.md b/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-part-of-a-recovery-partition-dart-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a147d07a7b..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-part-of-a-recovery-partition-dart-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,63 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as Part of a Recovery Partition
-description: How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as Part of a Recovery Partition
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 0d2192c1-4058-49fb-b0b6-baf4699ac7f5
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as Part of a Recovery Partition
-
-
-After you have finished running the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10 Recovery Image wizard and created the recovery image, you can extract the boot.wim file from the ISO image file and deploy it as a recovery partition in a Windows 10 image. A partition is recommended, because any corruption issues that prevent the Windows operating system from starting would also prevent the recovery image from starting. A separate partition also eliminates the need to provide the BitLocker recovery key twice. Consider hiding the partition to prevent users from storing files on it.
-
-**To deploy DaRT in the recovery partition of a Windows 10 image**
-
-1. Create a target partition in your Windows 10 image that is equal to or greater than the size of the ISO image file that you created by using the **DaRT 10 Recovery Image wizard**.
-
- The minimum size required for a DaRT partition is 500MB to accommodate the remote connection functionality in DaRT.
-
-2. Extract the boot.wim file from the DaRT ISO image file.
-
- 1. Using your company’s preferred method, mount the ISO image file that you created on the **Create Startup Image** page.
-
- 2. Open the ISO image file and copy the boot.wim file from the \\sources folder in the mounted image to a location on your computer or on an external drive.
-
- **Note**
- If you burned a CD, DVD, or USB of the recovery image, you can open the files on the removable media and copy the boot.wim file from the \\sources folder. If you copy boot.wim file, you don’t need to mount the image.
-
-
-
-3. Use the boot.wim file to create a bootable recovery partition by using your company’s standard method for creating a custom Windows RE image.
-
- For more information about how to create or customize a recovery partition, see [Customizing the Windows RE Experience](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=214222).
-
-4. Replace the target partition in your Windows 10 image with the recovery partition.
-
- For more information about how to deploy a recovery solution to reinstall the factory image in the event of a system failure, see [Deploy a System Recovery Image](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=214221).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Creating the DaRT 10 Recovery Image](creating-the-dart-10-recovery-image.md)
-
-[Deploying the DaRT Recovery Image](deploying-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-10.md)
-
-[Planning for DaRT 10](planning-for-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-ensure-that-crash-analyzer-can-access-symbol-files-dart-10.md b/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-ensure-that-crash-analyzer-can-access-symbol-files-dart-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4d6c8d968c..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-ensure-that-crash-analyzer-can-access-symbol-files-dart-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Ensure that Crash Analyzer Can Access Symbol Files
-description: How to Ensure that Crash Analyzer Can Access Symbol Files
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 39e307bd-5d21-4e44-bed6-bf532f580775
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Ensure that Crash Analyzer Can Access Symbol Files
-
-
-Typically, debugging information is stored in a symbol file that is separate from the program. You must have access to the symbol information when you debug an application that has stopped responding.
-
-Symbol files are automatically downloaded when you run **Crash Analyzer**. If the computer does not have an Internet connection or the network requires the computer to access an HTTP proxy server, the symbol files cannot be downloaded.
-
-**To ensure that Crash Analyzer can access symbol files**
-
-1. **Copy the dump file to another computer.** If the symbols cannot be downloaded because of a lack of an Internet connection, copy the memory dump file to a computer that does have an Internet connection and run the stand-alone **Crash Analyzer Wizard** on that computer.
-
-2. **Access the symbol files from another computer.** If the symbols cannot be downloaded because of a lack of an Internet connection, you can download the symbols from a computer that does have an Internet connection and then copy them to the computer that does not have an Internet connection, or you can map a network drive to a location where the symbols are available on the local network. If you run the **Crash Analyzer** in a Windows Recovery Environment (Windows RE), you can include the symbol files on the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10 recovery image.
-
-3. **Access symbol files through an HTTP proxy server.** If the symbols cannot be downloaded because an HTTP proxy server must be accessed, use the following steps to access an HTTP proxy server. In DaRT 10, the **Crash Analyzer Wizard** has a setting available on the **Specify Symbol Files Location** dialog page, marked with the label **Proxy server (optional, using the format "server:port")**. You can use this text box to specify a proxy server. Enter the proxy address in the form **<hostname>:<port>**, where the <**hostname**> is a DNS name or IP address, and the <**port**> is a TCP port number. There are two modes in which the **Crash Analyzer** can be run. Following is how you use the proxy setting in each of these modes:
-
- - **Online mode:** In this mode, if the proxy server field is left blank, the wizard uses the proxy settings from Internet Options in Control Panel. If you enter a proxy address in the text box which is provided, that address will be used, and it will override the setting in the Internet Options.
-
- - Windows Recovery Environment (Windows RE): When you run **Crash Analyzer** from the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window, there is no default proxy address. If the computer is directly connected to the Internet, a proxy address is not required. Therefore, you can leave this field blank in the wizard setting. If the computer is not directly connected to the Internet, and it is in a network environment that has a proxy server, you must set the proxy field in the wizard to access the symbol store. The proxy address can be obtained from the network administrator. Setting the proxy server is important only when the public symbol store is connected to the Internet. If the symbols are already on the DaRT recovery image, or if they are available locally, setting the proxy server is not required.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer](diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer-dart-10.md)
-
-[Operations for DaRT 10](operations-for-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-perform-dart-tasks-by-using-powershell-commands-dart-10.md b/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-perform-dart-tasks-by-using-powershell-commands-dart-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f53350ad55..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-perform-dart-tasks-by-using-powershell-commands-dart-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,72 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Perform DaRT Tasks by Using PowerShell Commands
-description: How to Perform DaRT Tasks by Using PowerShell Commands
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: f5a5c5f9-d667-4c85-9e82-7baf0b2aec6e
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Perform DaRT Tasks by Using PowerShell Commands
-
-
-Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10 provides the following listed set of Windows PowerShell cmdlets. Administrators can use these PowerShell cmdlets to perform various DaRT 10 server tasks from the command prompt rather than from the DaRT Recovery Image wizard.
-
-## To administer DaRT by using PowerShell commands
-
-
-Use the PowerShell cmdlets described here to administer DaRT.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Name
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Copy-DartImage
-
Burns an ISO to a CD, DVD, or USB drive.
-
-
-
Export-DartImage
-
Allows the source WIM file, which contains a DaRT image, to be converted into an ISO file.
-
-
-
New-DartConfiguration
-
Creates a DaRT configuration object that is needed to apply a DaRT toolset to a Windows Image.
-
-
-
Set-DartImage
-
Applies a DartConfiguration object to a mounted Windows Image. This includes adding all files, configuration, and package dependencies.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Administering DaRT 10 Using PowerShell](administering-dart-10-using-powershell.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-recover-local-computers-by-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-10.md b/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-recover-local-computers-by-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 443db6f54f..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-recover-local-computers-by-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,112 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Recover Local Computers by Using the DaRT Recovery Image
-description: How to Recover Local Computers by Using the DaRT Recovery Image
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: a6adc717-827c-45e8-b9c3-06d0e919e0bd
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Recover Local Computers by Using the DaRT Recovery Image
-
-
-Use these instructions to recover a computer when you are physically present at the end-user computer that is experiencing problems.
-
-**How to recover a local computer by using the DaRT recovery image**
-
-1. Boot the end-user computer by using the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10 recovery image.
-
- As the computer is booting into the DaRT 10 recovery image, the **NetStart** dialog box appears.
-
-2. When you are asked whether you want to initialize network services, select one of the following:
-
- **Yes** - it is assumed that a DHCP server is present on the network, and an attempt is made to obtain an IP address from the server. If the network uses static IP addresses instead of DHCP, you can later use the **TCP/IP Configuration** tool in DaRT to specify a static IP address.
-
- **No** - skip the network initialization process.
-
-3. Indicate whether you want to remap the drive letters. When you run Windows online, the system volume is typically mapped to drive C. However, when you run Windows offline under WinRE, the original system volume might be mapped to another drive, and this can cause confusion. If you decide to remap, DaRT tries to map the offline drive letters to match the online drive letters. Remapping is performed only if an offline operating system is selected later in the startup process.
-
-4. On the **System Recovery Options** dialog box, select a keyboard layout.
-
-5. Check the displayed system root directory, the kind of operating system installed, and the partition size. If you do not see your operating system listed, and suspect that the lack of drivers is a possible cause of the failure, click **Load Drivers** to load the suspect drivers, and then insert the installation media for the device and select the driver.
-
-6. Select the installation that you want to repair or diagnose, and then click **Next**.
-
- **Note**
- If the Windows Recovery Environment (WinRE) detects or suspects that Windows 10 did not start correctly the last time that it was tried, **Startup Repair** might start to run automatically.
-
-
-
-~~~
-If any of the registry hives are corrupted or missing, Registry Editor and several other DaRT utilities will have limited functionality. If no operating system is selected, some tools will not be available.
-
-The **System Recovery Options** window appears and lists various recovery tools.
-~~~
-
-7. On the **System Recovery Options** window, click **Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset**.
-
- The **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window opens. You can now run any of the individual tools or wizards that were included when the DaRT recovery image was created.
-
-You can click **Help** on the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window to open the client Help file that provides detailed instruction and information needed to run the individual DaRT tools. You can also click the **Solution Wizard** on the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window to choose the best tool for the situation, based on a brief interview that the wizard provides.
-
-For general information about any of the DaRT tools, see [Overview of the Tools in DaRT 10](overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-10.md).
-
-**How to run DaRT at the command prompt**
-
-- To run DaRT at the command prompt, specify the **netstart.exe** command then use any of the following parameters:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
Description
-
-
-
-network
-
Initializes the network services.
-
-
-
-remount
-
Remaps the drive letters.
-
-
-
-prompt
-
Displays messages that ask the end user to specify whether to initialize the network and remap the drives.
-
- Warning
The end user’s response to the prompt overrides the –network and –remount switches.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for DaRT 10](operations-for-dart-10.md)
-
-[Recovering Computers Using DaRT 10](recovering-computers-using-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-recover-remote-computers-by-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-10.md b/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-recover-remote-computers-by-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 90f2db33d1..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-recover-remote-computers-by-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,207 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Recover Remote Computers by Using the DaRT Recovery Image
-description: How to Recover Remote Computers by Using the DaRT Recovery Image
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: c0062208-39cd-4e01-adf8-36a11386e2ea
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Recover Remote Computers by Using the DaRT Recovery Image
-
-
-Use the Remote Connection feature in Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10 to run the DaRT tools remotely on an end-user computer. After the end user provides the administrator or help desk worker with certain information, the IT administrator or help desk worker can take control of the end user's computer and run the necessary DaRT tools remotely.
-
-If you disabled the DaRT tools when you created the recovery image, you still have access to all of the tools. All of the tools, except Remote Connection, are unavailable to end users.
-
-**To recover a remote computer by using the DaRT recovery image**
-
-1. Boot an end-user computer by using the DaRT recovery image.
-
- You will typically use one of the following methods to boot into DaRT to recover a remote computer, depending on how you deploy the DaRT recovery image. For more information about deploying the DaRT recovery image, see [Deploying DaRT 10](deploying-dart-10.md).
-
- - Boot into DaRT from a recovery partition on the problem computer.
-
- - Boot into DaRT from a remote partition on the network.
-
- For information about the advantages and disadvantages of each method, see [Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT 10 Recovery Image](planning-how-to-save-and-deploy-the-dart-10-recovery-image.md).
-
- Whichever method that you use to boot into DaRT, you must enable the boot device in the BIOS for the boot option or options that you want to make available to the end user.
-
- **Note**
- Configuring the BIOS is unique, depending on the kind of hard disk drive, network adapters, and other hardware that is used in your organization.
-
-
-
-~~~
-As the computer is booting into the DaRT recovery image, the **NetStart** dialog box appears.
-~~~
-
-2. When you are asked whether you want to initialize network services, select one of the following:
-
- **Yes** - it is assumed that a DHCP server is present on the network, and an attempt is made to obtain an IP address from the server. If the network uses static IP addresses instead of DHCP, you can later use the **TCP/IP Configuration** tool in DaRT to specify a static IP address.
-
- **No** - skip the network initialization process.
-
-3. Indicate whether you want to remap the drive letters. When you run Windows online, the system volume is typically mapped to drive C. However, when you run Windows offline under WinRE, the original system volume might be mapped to another drive, and this can cause confusion. If you decide to remap, DaRT tries to map the offline drive letters to match the online drive letters. Remapping is performed only if an offline operating system is selected later in the startup process.
-
-4. On the **System Recovery Options** dialog box, select a keyboard layout.
-
-5. Check the displayed system root directory, the kind of operating system installed, and the partition size. If you do not see your operating system listed, and suspect that the lack of drivers is a possible cause of the failure, click **Load Drivers** to load the suspect drivers, and then insert the installation media for the device and select the driver.
-
-6. Select the installation that you want to repair or diagnose, and then click **Next**.
-
- **Note**
- If the Windows Recovery Environment (WinRE) detects or suspects that Windows 10 did not start correctly the last time that it was tried, **Startup Repair** might start to run automatically. For information about how to resolve this issue, see [Troubleshooting DaRT 10](troubleshooting-dart-10.md).
-
-
-
-~~~
-If any of the registry hives are corrupted or missing, Registry Editor and several other DaRT utilities will have limited functionality. If no operating system is selected, some tools will not be available.
-
-The **System Recovery Options** window appears and lists various recovery tools.
-~~~
-
-7. On the **System Recovery Options** window, click **Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** to open the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset**.
-
-8. On the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window, click **Remote Connection** to open the **DaRT Remote Connection** window. If you are prompted to give the help desk remote access, click **OK**.
-
- The DaRT Remote Connection window opens and displays a ticket number, IP address, and port information.
-
-9. On the help desk computer, open the **DaRT Remote Connection Viewer**.
-
-10. Click **Start**, click **All Programs**, click **Microsoft DaRT 10**, and then click **DaRT Remote Connection Viewer**.
-
-11. In the **DaRT Remote Connection** window, enter the required ticket, IP address, and port information.
-
- **Note**
- This information is created on the end-user computer and must be provided by the end user. There might be multiple IP addresses to choose from, depending on how many are available on the end-user computer.
-
-
-
-12. Click **Connect**.
-
-The IT administrator now assumes control of the end-user computer and can run the DaRT tools remotely.
-
-**Note**
-A file is provided that is named inv32.xml and contains remote connection information, such as the port number and IP address. By default, the file is typically located at %windir%\\system32.
-
-
-
-**To customize the Remote Connection process**
-
-1. You can customize the Remote Connection process by editing the winpeshl.ini file. For more information about how to edit the winpeshl.ini file, see [Winpeshl.ini Files](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=219413).
-
- Specify the following commands and parameters to customize how a remote connection is established with an end-user computer:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Command
-
Parameter
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
RemoteRecovery.exe
-
-nomessage
-
Specifies that the confirmation prompt is not displayed. Remote Connection continues just as if the end user had responded "Yes" to the confirmation prompt.
-
-
-
WaitForConnection.exe
-
none
-
Prevents a custom script from continuing until either Remote Connection is not running or a valid connection is established with the end-user computer.
-
- Important
This command serves no function if it is specified independently. It must be specified in a script to function correctly.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-2. The following is an example of a winpeshl.ini file that is customized to open the **Remote Connection** tool as soon as an attempt is made to boot into DaRT:
-
- ```ini
- [LaunchApps]
- "%windir%\system32\netstart.exe -network -remount"
- "cmd /C start %windir%\system32\RemoteRecovery.exe -nomessage"
- "%windir%\system32\WaitForConnection.exe"
- "%SYSTEMDRIVE%\sources\recovery\recenv.exe"
- ```
-
-When DaRT starts, it creates the file inv32.xml in \\Windows\\System32\\ on the RAM disk. This file contains connection information: IP address, port, and ticket number. You can copy this file to a network share to trigger a Help desk workflow. For example, a custom program can check the network share for connection files, and then create a support ticket or send email notifications.
-
-**To run the Remote Connection Viewer at the command prompt**
-
-1. To run the **DaRT Remote Connection Viewer** at the command prompt, specify the **DartRemoteViewer.exe** command and use the following parameters:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
-ticket=<ticketnumber>
-
Where <ticketnumber> is the ticket number, including the dashes, that is generated by Remote Connection.
-
-
-
-ipaddress=<ipaddress>
-
Where <ipaddress> is the IP address that is generated by Remote Connection.
-
-
-
-port=<port>
-
Where <port> is the port that corresponds to the specified IP address.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Note**
-The variables for these parameters are created on the end-user computer and must be provided by the end user.
-~~~
-
-
-
-2. If all three parameters are specified and the data is valid, a connection is immediately tried when the program starts. If any parameter is not valid, the program starts as if there were no parameters specified.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for DaRT 10](operations-for-dart-10.md)
-
-[Recovering Computers Using DaRT 10](recovering-computers-using-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-in-stand-alone-mode-on-a-computer-other-than-an-end-user-computer-dart-10.md b/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-in-stand-alone-mode-on-a-computer-other-than-an-end-user-computer-dart-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1d01911abd..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-in-stand-alone-mode-on-a-computer-other-than-an-end-user-computer-dart-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Run the Crash Analyzer in Stand-alone Mode on a Computer Other than an End-user Computer
-description: How to Run the Crash Analyzer in Stand-alone Mode on a Computer Other than an End-user Computer
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 27c1e1c6-123a-4f8a-b7d2-5bddc9ca3249
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Run the Crash Analyzer in Stand-alone Mode on a Computer Other than an End-user Computer
-
-
-If you cannot access the Microsoft Debugging Tools for Windows or the symbol files on the end-user computer, you can copy the dump file from the problem computer and analyze it on a computer that has the stand-alone version of Crash Analyzer installed, such as a help desk computer that contains Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10.
-
-To run Crash Analyzer in stand-alone mode, you copy the memory dump file from the problem computer and analyze it on another computer, such as a help desk computer, that has the **Crash Analyzer** installed.
-
-**To run the Crash Analyzer in stand-alone mode**
-
-1. On a computer that has DaRT 10 installed, click **Start**, type **Crash Analyzer**, and then click **Crash Analyzer**.
-
-2. Follow the steps in the wizard, as described in [How to Run the Crash Analyzer on an End-user Computer](how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-on-an-end-user-computer-dart-10.md).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for DaRT 10](operations-for-dart-10.md)
-
-[Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer](diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer-dart-10.md)
-
-[How to Ensure that Crash Analyzer Can Access Symbol Files](how-to-ensure-that-crash-analyzer-can-access-symbol-files-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-on-an-end-user-computer-dart-10.md b/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-on-an-end-user-computer-dart-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7f67229645..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-on-an-end-user-computer-dart-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,60 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Run the Crash Analyzer on an End-user Computer
-description: How to Run the Crash Analyzer on an End-user Computer
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 10334800-ff8e-43ac-a9c2-d28807473ec2
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Run the Crash Analyzer on an End-user Computer
-
-
-To run **Crash Analyzer** from the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window on an end-user computer that is experiencing problems, you must have the Microsoft Debugging Tools for Windows and the symbol files installed. To download the Windows Debugging Tools, see [Debugging Tools for Windows](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=266248).
-
-**To run the Crash Analyzer on an end-user computer**
-
-1. On the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window on an end-user computer, click **Crash Analyzer**.
-
-2. Provide the required information for the Microsoft Debugging Tools for Windows.
-
-3. Provide the required information for the symbol files. For more information about symbol files, see [How to Ensure that Crash Analyzer Can Access Symbol Files](how-to-ensure-that-crash-analyzer-can-access-symbol-files-dart-10.md).
-
-4. Provide the required information for a memory dump file. To determine the location of the memory dump file:
-
- 1. Open the **System Properties** window.
-
- 2. Click **Start**, type **sysdm.cpl**, and then press **Enter**.
-
- 3. Click the **Advanced** tab.
-
- 4. In the **Startup and Recovery** area, click **Settings**.
-
- If you do not have access to the **System Properties** window, you can search for dump files on the end-user computer by using the **Search** tool in Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10.
-
- The **Crash Analyzer** scans the memory dump file and reports a probable cause of the problem. You can view more information about the failure, such as the specific memory dump message and description, the drivers loaded at the time of the failure, and the full output of the analysis.
-
-5. Identify the appropriate strategy to resolve the problem. The strategy may require disabling or updating the device driver that caused the failure by using the **Services and Drivers** node of the **Computer Management** tool in DaRT 10.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer](diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer-dart-10.md)
-
-[Operations for DaRT 10](operations-for-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-use-a-powershell-script-to-create-the-recovery-image-dart-10.md b/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-use-a-powershell-script-to-create-the-recovery-image-dart-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0b1feb848a..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/how-to-use-a-powershell-script-to-create-the-recovery-image-dart-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,91 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Use a PowerShell Script to Create the Recovery Image
-description: How to Use a PowerShell Script to Create the Recovery Image
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: cf5b0814-71a8-4f0b-b1f1-1ac6d8b51c4f
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Use a PowerShell Script to Create the Recovery Image
-
-
-## To create the DaRT recovery image by using a PowerShell script
-
-
-You can create the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10 recovery image by using a PowerShell script instead of using the DaRT 10 Recovery Image wizard. See the following example script.
-
-``
-
-`This script was auto generated by the Microsoft DaRT Recovery Image Wizard.``###``This script uses the DISM and DaRT PowerShell commands to create a bootable DaRT image.``###Both a WIM and ISO file are produced.``###``### Examples of how to burn/copy the DaRT ISO to DVD/USB are available at the end of this script.``###`
-
-`$ErrorActionPreference = "Stop";``### This variable tells PowerShell to stop if an error occurs.`
-
-`###``### Import the modules necessary for DaRT Image creation.``###`
-
-`Import-Module "Dism"`I`mport-Module "Microsoft.Dart"`
-
-`###``### Specifies where the Windows 10 media is located and where the ISO and WIM files will be saved.``### These can be changed as necessary.``###`
-
-`$Win10MediaPath = "D:\";``### This is the path of the Windows 10 media.``$DestinationWimPath = "C:\Users\Administrator\Desktop\DaRT10\x64\boot.wim";``### Specify where the WIM file will be saved.``$DestinationIsoPath = "C:\Users\Administrator\Desktop\DaRT10\x64\DaRT10.iso";``### Specify where the ISO will be saved.`
-
-`###``### These variables are used to specify temporary and output directories based on the paths above.``###`
-
-`$WimParentPath = (Split-Path -Path "$destinationWimPath" -Parent);``### Specify the directory where the DaRT WIM file will be saved.``$IsoParentPath = (Split-Path -Path "$destinationIsoPath" -Parent);``### This is the directory where the DaRT ISO file will be saved.``$TempMountPath = "$env:temp\DaRT10Mount_$(Get-Random)";``### Specify the temporary directory used to mount the Windows image.`
-
-`###``### Prepare the windows image.``###`
-
-`### Guarantee the output directories exists.``New-Item -Path $WimParentPath -Type Directory -Force``New-Item -Path $IsoParentPath -Type Directory -Force``New-Item -Path $TempMountPath -Type Directory -Force`
-
-`### Create a copy of the WIM and remove the read-only attribute.``### The WIM file will be the resulting dart image.``Copy-Item "$Win10MediaPath\sources\boot.wim" $DestinationWimPath -Force``Set-ItemProperty $DestinationWimPath -Name IsReadOnly -Value $false`
-
-`### Mount the bootable image within the WIM file (normally index 2).``Mount-WindowsImage -ImagePath $DestinationWimPath -Path $TempMountPath -Index 2`
-
-`###``### Add additional drivers to the image.``###`
-
-`###``### Installs the specified driver(s) into the image.``###`
-
-`Add-WindowsDriver -Path $TempMountPath -Driver "C:\Windows\System32\DriverStore\FileRepository``\xusb22.inf_amd64_89c20c625f14f923\xusb22.inf" -ForceUnsigned`
-
-`###``### Add additional drivers to the image.``###`
-
-`###``### Installs the specified WinPE package(s) into the image.``###`
-
-`Add-WindowsPackage -Path $TempMountPath -PackagePath "C:\Program Files (x86)\Windows Kits\10.0\Assessment and Deployment Kit\Windows Preinstallation Environment\amd64\WinPE_OCs\WinPE-Scripting.cab"``Add-WindowsPackage -Path $TempMountPath -PackagePath "C:\Program Files (x86)\Windows Kits\10.0\Assessment and Deployment Kit\Windows Preinstallation Environment\amd64\WinPE_OCs\WinPE-FMAPI.cab"``Add-WindowsPackage -Path $TempMountPath -PackagePath "C:\Program Files (x86)\Windows Kits\10.0\Assessment and Deployment Kit\Windows Preinstallation Environment\amd64\WinPE_OCs\en-us\WinPE-Scripting_en-us.cab"``Add-WindowsPackage -Path $TempMountPath -PackagePath "C:\Program Files (x86)\Windows Kits\10.0\Assessment and Deployment Kit\Windows Preinstallation Environment\amd64\WinPE_OCs\WinPE-HTA.cab"``Add-WindowsPackage -Path $TempMountPath -PackagePath "C:\Program Files (x86)\Windows Kits\10.0\Assessment and Deployment Kit\Windows Preinstallation Environment\amd64\WinPE_OCs\en-us\WinPE-HTA_en-us.cab"`
-
-`###``### Add the DaRT tools to the image.``### The New-DartConfiguration cmdlet is used to specify how the DaRT image is configured.``### Modify this statement to configure how the DaRT tools will be applied to the image.``###`
-
-`$config = New-DartConfiguration -AddComputerManagement -AddCrashAnalyzer -AddDiskCommander -AddExplorer -AddFileRestore -AddFileSearch -AddHotfixUninstall -AddRegistryEditor -AddRemoteConnection -AddSfcScan -AddSolutionWizard -AddTcpConfig -RemoteMessage "Test welcome message" -RemotePort 3388 -ScratchSpace 512``$config | Set-DartImage -Path $TempMountPath`
-
-`###``### Perform any manual user-specific customizations here.``###`
-
-`# Read-Host -Prompt "Script is paused for any manual customization. Press ENTER to continue"`
-
-`### Save the changes to the WIM file by dismounting the image.``Dismount-WindowsImage -Path $TempMountPath -Save`
-
-`### Create a bootable DaRT ISO.``Export-DartImage -IsoPath $DestinationIsoPath -WimPath $DestinationWimPath`
-
-`### The following is an example of how to burn the ISO to a writeable CD/DVD.``### Specify the correct drive letter and uncomment the statement to burn an ISO.``# Copy-DartImage -IsoPath $DestinationIsoPath -Drive "G:" -Type DVD`
-
-`### Removes all temporary files.``Remove-Item $TempMountPath -Force -Recurse`
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Administering DaRT 10 Using PowerShell](administering-dart-10-using-powershell.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/images/checklistbox.gif b/mdop/dart-v10/images/checklistbox.gif
deleted file mode 100644
index 8af13c51d1..0000000000
Binary files a/mdop/dart-v10/images/checklistbox.gif and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/images/mbam-logo-sm.gif b/mdop/dart-v10/images/mbam-logo-sm.gif
deleted file mode 100644
index 2102b4540c..0000000000
Binary files a/mdop/dart-v10/images/mbam-logo-sm.gif and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/index.md b/mdop/dart-v10/index.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5d88fce5c0..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 10
-description: Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 10
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 64403eca-ff05-4327-ac33-bdcc96e706c8
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 04/19/2017
----
-
-
-# Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 10
-
-
-Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10 lets you diagnose and repair a computer that cannot be started or that has problems starting as expected. By using DaRT 10, you can recover end-user computers that have become unusable, diagnose probable causes of issues, and quickly repair unbootable or locked-out computers. When it is necessary, you can also quickly restore important lost files and detect and remove malware, even when the computer is not online.
-
-DaRT 10 lets you create a DaRT recovery image in International Organization for Standardization (ISO) and Windows Imaging (WIM) file formats and burn the image to a CD, DVD, or USB. You can then use the recovery image files and deploy them locally or to a remote partition or a recovery partition.
-
-DaRT 10 is an important part of the Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack (MDOP), a dynamic solution available to Software Assurance customers that helps reduce software installation costs, enables delivery of applications as services, and helps manage and control enterprise desktop environments.
-
-[Getting Started with DaRT 10](getting-started-with-dart-10.md)
-
-[About DaRT 10](about-dart-10.md)**|**[Release Notes for DaRT 10](release-notes-for-dart-10.md)**|**[Overview of the Tools in DaRT 10](overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-10.md)**|**[Accessibility for DaRT 10](accessibility-for-dart-10.md)
-
-[Planning for DaRT 10](planning-for-dart-10.md)
-
-[Planning to Deploy DaRT 10](planning-to-deploy-dart-10.md)**|**[DaRT 10 Supported Configurations](dart-10-supported-configurations.md)**|**[Planning to Create the DaRT 10 Recovery Image](planning-to-create-the-dart-10-recovery-image.md)**|**[Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT 10 Recovery Image](planning-how-to-save-and-deploy-the-dart-10-recovery-image.md)**|**[DaRT 10 Planning Checklist](dart-10-planning-checklist.md)
-
-[Deploying DaRT 10](deploying-dart-10.md)
-
-[Deploying DaRT 10 to Administrator Computers](deploying-dart-10-to-administrator-computers.md)**|**[Creating the DaRT 10 Recovery Image](creating-the-dart-10-recovery-image.md)**|**[Deploying the DaRT Recovery Image](deploying-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-10.md)**|**[DaRT 10 Deployment Checklist](dart-10-deployment-checklist.md)
-
-[Operations for DaRT 10](operations-for-dart-10.md)
-
-[Recovering Computers Using DaRT 10](recovering-computers-using-dart-10.md)**|**[Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer](diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer-dart-10.md)**|**[Security and Privacy for DaRT 10](security-and-privacy-for-dart-10.md)**|**[Administering DaRT 10 Using PowerShell](administering-dart-10-using-powershell.md)
-
-[Troubleshooting DaRT 10](troubleshooting-dart-10.md)
-
-### More Information
-
-[How Do I Get MDOP](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049)
-Get information about how to download DaRT.
-
-[Release Notes for DaRT 10](release-notes-for-dart-10.md)
-View updated product information and known issues for DaRT 10.
-
-[MDOP TechCenter Page](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=225286)
-Learn about the latest MDOP information and resources.
-
-[MDOP Information Experience](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=236032)
-Find documentation, videos, and other resources for MDOP technologies. You can also [send us feedback](mailto:MDOPDocs@microsoft.com) or learn about updates by following us on [Facebook](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=242445) or [Twitter](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=242447).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/operations-for-dart-10.md b/mdop/dart-v10/operations-for-dart-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6e12927ca8..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/operations-for-dart-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Operations for DaRT 10
-description: Operations for DaRT 10
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 1776d5ed-96c6-4841-a097-721d8cf5c7f7
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Operations for DaRT 10
-
-
-This section includes information about the various types of Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10 administration and operating tasks that are typically performed by an administrator. This section also includes step-by-step procedures to help you successfully perform those tasks.
-
-## Operations information
-
-
-- [Recovering Computers Using DaRT 10](recovering-computers-using-dart-10.md)
-
- This section provides instructions on how to use DaRT 10 to recover local or remote computers by using the DaRT recovery image.
-
-- [Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer](diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer-dart-10.md)
-
- This section explains how to open and run the Crash Analyzer on either an end-user or non-end-user computer to debug a memory dump file and then diagnose computer errors.
-
-- [Security and Privacy for DaRT 10](security-and-privacy-for-dart-10.md)
-
- This section describes measures for maintaining security while using DaRT.
-
-- [Administering DaRT 10 Using PowerShell](administering-dart-10-using-powershell.md)
-
- This section lists the Windows PowerShell commands that administrators can use to perform various DaRT tasks.
-
-## Other resources for DaRT 10 operations
-
-
-[Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 10](index.md)
-
-[Getting Started with DaRT 10](getting-started-with-dart-10.md)
-
-[Planning for DaRT 10](planning-for-dart-10.md)
-
-[Deploying DaRT 10](deploying-dart-10.md)
-
-[Troubleshooting DaRT 10](troubleshooting-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-10.md b/mdop/dart-v10/overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d5908052a6..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Overview of the Tools in DaRT 10
-description: Overview of the Tools in DaRT 10
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 752467dd-b646-4335-82ce-9090d4651f65
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Overview of the Tools in DaRT 10
-
-
-From the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window in Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10, you can start any of the individual tools that you include when you create the DaRT 10 recovery image. For information about how to access the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window, see [How to Recover Local Computers by Using the DaRT Recovery Image](how-to-recover-local-computers-by-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-10.md).
-
-If it is available, you can use the **Solution Wizard** on the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window to select the tool that best addresses your particular issue, based on a brief interview that the wizard provides.
-
-## Exploring the DaRT tools
-
-
-A description of the DaRT 10 tools follows.
-
-### Computer Management
-
-**Computer Management** is a collection of Windows administrative tools that help you troubleshoot a problem computer. You can use the **Computer Management** tools in DaRT to view system information and event logs, manage disks, list autoruns, and manage services and drivers. The **Computer Management** console is customized to help you diagnose and repair problems that might be preventing the Windows operating system from starting.
-
-**Note**
-The recovery of dynamic disks with DaRT is not supported.
-
-
-
-### Crash Analyzer
-
-Use the **Crash Analyzer Wizard** to quickly determine the cause of a computer failure by analyzing the memory dump file on the Windows operating system that you are repairing. **Crash Analyzer** examines the memory dump file for the driver that caused a computer to fail. You can then disable the problem device driver by using the **Services and Drivers** node in the **Computer Management** tool.
-
-The **Crash Analyzer Wizard** requires the Debugging Tools for Windows and symbol files for the operating system that you are repairing. You can include both requirements when you create the DaRT recovery image. If they are not included on the recovery image and you do not have access to them on the computer that you are repairing, you can copy the memory dump file to another computer and use the stand-alone version of **Crash Analyzer** to diagnose the problem.
-
-Running **Crash Analyzer** is a good idea even if you plan to reimage the computer. The image could have a defective driver that is causing problems in your environment. By running **Crash Analyzer**, you can identify problem drivers and improve the image stability.
-
-For more information about **Crash Analyzer**, see [Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer](diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer-dart-10.md).
-
-### Disk Commander
-
-**Disk Commander** lets you recover and repair disk partitions or volumes by using one of the following recovery processes:
-
-- Restore the master boot record (MBR)
-
-- Recover one or more lost volumes
-
-- Restore partition tables from **Disk Commander** backup
-
-- Save partition tables to **Disk Commander** backup
-
-**Warning**
-We recommend that you back up a disk before you use **Disk Commander** to repair it. By using **Disk Commander**, you can potentially damage volumes and make them inaccessible. Additionally, changes to one volume can affect other volumes because volumes on a disk share a partition table.
-
-
-
-**Note**
-The recovery of dynamic disks with DaRT is not supported.
-
-
-
-### Disk Wipe
-
-You can use **Disk Wipe** to delete all data from a disk or volume, even the data that is left behind after you reformat a hard disk drive. **Disk Wipe** lets you select from either a single-pass overwrite or a four-pass overwrite, which meets current U.S. Department of Defense standards.
-
-**Warning**
-After wiping a disk or volume, you cannot recover the data. Verify the size and label of a volume before erasing it.
-
-
-
-### Explorer
-
-The **Explorer** tool lets you browse the computer’s file system and network shares so that you can remove important data that the user stored on the local drive before you try to repair or reimage the computer. And because you can map drive letters to network shares, you can easily copy and move files from the computer to the network for safekeeping or from the network to the computer to restore them.
-
-### File Restore
-
-**File Restore** lets you try to restore files that were accidentally deleted or that were too big to fit in the Recycle Bin. **File Restore** is not limited to regular disk volumes, but can find and restore files on lost volumes or on volumes that are encrypted by BitLocker.
-
-**Note**
-The recovery of dynamic disks with DaRT is not supported.
-
-
-
-### File Search
-
-Before reimaging a computer, recovering files from the local hard disk is important, especially when the user might not have backed up or stored the files elsewhere.
-
-The **Search** tool opens a **File Search** window that you can use to find documents when you do not know the file path or to search for general kinds of files across all local hard disks. You can search for specific file-name patterns in specific paths. You can also limit results to a date range or size range.
-
-### Hotfix Uninstall
-
-The **Hotfix Uninstall Wizard** lets you remove hotfixes or service packs from the Windows operating system on the computer that you are repairing. Use this tool when a hotfix or service pack is suspected in preventing the operating system from starting.
-
-We recommend that you uninstall only one hotfix at a time, even though the tool lets you uninstall more than one.
-
-**Important**
-Programs that were installed or updated after a hotfix was installed might not work correctly after you uninstall a hotfix.
-
-
-
-### Locksmith
-
-The **Locksmith Wizard** lets you set or change the password for any local account on the Windows operating system that you are analyzing or repairing. You do not have to know the current password. However, the password that you set must comply with any requirements that are defined by a local Group Policy Object. This includes password length and complexity.
-
-You can use **Locksmith** when the password for a local account, such as the local Administrator account, is unknown. You cannot use **Locksmith** to set passwords for domain accounts.
-
-### Registry Editor
-
-You can use **Registry Editor** to access and change the registry of the Windows operating system that you are analyzing or repairing. This includes adding, removing, and editing keys and values, and importing registry (.reg) files.
-
-**Warning**
-Serious problems can occur if you change the registry incorrectly by using **Registry Editor**. These problems might require you to reinstall the operating system. Before you make changes to the registry, you should back up any valued data on the computer. Change the registry at your own risk.
-
-
-
-### SFC Scan
-
-The **SFC Scan** tool starts the **System File Repair Wizard** and lets you repair system files that are preventing the installed Windows operating system from starting. The **System File Repair Wizard** can automatically repair system files that are corrupted or missing, or it can prompt you before it performs any repairs.
-
-### Solution Wizard
-
-The **Solution Wizard** presents a series of questions and then recommends the best tool for the situation, based on your answers. This wizard helps you determine which tool to use when you are not familiar with the tools in DaRT.
-
-### TCP/IP Config
-
-When you boot a problem computer into DaRT, it is set to automatically obtain its TCP/IP configuration (IP address and DNS server) from Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). If DHCP is unavailable, you can manually configure TCP/IP by using the **TCP/IP Config** tool. You first select a network adapter, and then configure the IP address and DNS server for that adapter.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Getting Started with DaRT 10](getting-started-with-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/planning-for-dart-10.md b/mdop/dart-v10/planning-for-dart-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d907bb9ecc..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/planning-for-dart-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning for DaRT 10
-description: Planning for DaRT 10
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 2ca0249a-6a9f-4b4e-91f1-f1b34be7b16c
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning for DaRT 10
-
-
-The goal of deployment planning is to successfully and efficiently deploy Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10 so that it does not disrupt your users or the network.
-
-Before you deploy DaRT 10, you should consider the different deployment configurations and prerequisites. This section includes information that can help you gather the information to formulate a deployment plan that best meets your business requirements.
-
-## Planning information
-
-
-- [Planning to Deploy DaRT 10](planning-to-deploy-dart-10.md)
-
- There are several deployment configurations and prerequisites that you must consider before you create your deployment plan. This section includes information that can help you gather the information that you must have to formulate a deployment plan that best meets your business requirements.
-
-- [DaRT 10 Planning Checklist](dart-10-planning-checklist.md)
-
- This checklist can assist you in preparing your computing environment for the DaRT deployment.
-
-## Other resources for DaRT planning
-
-
-[Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 10](index.md)
-
-[Getting Started with DaRT 10](getting-started-with-dart-10.md)
-
-[Deploying DaRT 10](deploying-dart-10.md)
-
-[Operations for DaRT 10](operations-for-dart-10.md)
-
-[Troubleshooting DaRT 10](troubleshooting-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/planning-how-to-save-and-deploy-the-dart-10-recovery-image.md b/mdop/dart-v10/planning-how-to-save-and-deploy-the-dart-10-recovery-image.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f76a87d4d5..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/planning-how-to-save-and-deploy-the-dart-10-recovery-image.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,97 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT 10 Recovery Image
-description: Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT 10 Recovery Image
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 9a3e5413-2621-49ce-8bd2-992616691703
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT 10 Recovery Image
-
-
-You can save and deploy the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10 recovery image by using the following methods. When you are determining the method that you will use, consider the advantages and disadvantages of each. You should also consider your infrastructure and support staff. If you have a small infrastructure, you might want to deploy DaRT 10 by using removable media, since the recovery image will always be available if you install it to the local hard drive.
-
-If your organization uses Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS), you may want to deploy recovery images as a network service by using Windows DS. Recovery images are always available to any connected computer. You can deploy multiple images from Windows DS and maintain them all in one place.
-
-**Note**
-You may want to use more than one method in your organization. For example, you can boot into DaRT from a remote partition for most situations and have a USB flash drive available in case the end-user computer cannot connect to the network.
-
-
-
-The following table shows some advantages and disadvantages of each method of using DaRT in your organization.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Method to Boot into DaRT
-
Advantages
-
Disadvantages
-
-
-
-
-
Removable Media
-
The recovery image is written to a CD, DVD, or USB drive to enable support staff to take the recovery tools with them to the unstable computer.
-
Supports scenarios in which the master boot record (MBR) is corrupted and you cannot access the hard disk and supports cases in which there is no network connection.
-
Enables you to create multiple recovery images with different tools to provide different levels of support.
-
Provides a built-in tool for burning recovery images to removable media.
-
Requires that support staff are physically at the end-user computer to boot into DaRT.
-
Requires time and maintenance to create multiple media with different configurations for 32-bit and 64-bit computers.
-
-
-
From a remote (network) partition
-
The recovery image is hosted on a network boot server like Windows Deployment Services (Windows DS), which allows users or support staff to stream it to computers on demand.
-
Available to all computers that have access to the network boot server.
-
Recovery images are hosted on a central server, which enables centralized updates.
-
Centralized help desk staff can provide repairs by using remote connectivity.
-
No local storage requirement on the clients.
-
Ability to create multiple recovery images with different tools for specific support levels.
-
The need to secure Windows DS infrastructure to ensure that regular users can start only the DaRT recovery image and not the full operating system imaging process.
-
-
-
Requires that the end-user computer is connected to the network at runtime.
-
Requires that the recovery image is brought across the network.
-
-
-
From a recovery partition on the local hard drive
-
The recovery image is installed on a local hard drive either manually or by using electronic software distribution systems like System Center Configuration Manager.
-
The recovery image is always available because it is pre-staged on the computer.
-
Centralized help desk staff can provide support by using Remote Connection.
-
The recovery image is centrally managed and deployed.
-
Additional recovery key requests on computers that are protected by Windows BitLocker drive encryption are eliminated.
-
Local storage is required.
-
A dedicated, unencrypted partition for recovery image placement is recommended to reduce the risk of a failed boot partition.
-
When updating DaRT, you must update all computers in your enterprise instead of just one partition (on the network) or removable device.
-
Additional consideration is required if you deploy the recovery image after BitLocker has been enabled.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy DaRT 10](planning-to-deploy-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/planning-to-create-the-dart-10-recovery-image.md b/mdop/dart-v10/planning-to-create-the-dart-10-recovery-image.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7089ba0bff..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/planning-to-create-the-dart-10-recovery-image.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning to Create the DaRT 10 Recovery Image
-description: Planning to Create the DaRT 10 Recovery Image
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: a0087d93-b88f-454b-81b2-3c7ce3718023
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning to Create the DaRT 10 Recovery Image
-
-
-Use the information in this section when you are planning to create the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10 recovery image.
-
-## Planning to create the DaRT 10 recovery image
-
-
-When you create the DaRT recovery image, you have to decide which tools to include on the image. To make the decision, consider that end users may have access to those tools. If support engineers will take the recovery image media to end users’ computers to diagnose issues, you may want to install all of the tools on the recovery image. If you plan to diagnose end user’s computers remotely, you may want to disable some of the tools, such as Disk Wipe and Registry Editor, and then enable other tools, including Remote Connection.
-
-When you create the DaRT recovery image, you will also specify whether you want to include additional drivers or files. Determine the locations of any additional drivers or files that you want to include on the DaRT recovery image.
-
-For more information about the DaRT tools, see [Overview of the Tools in DaRT 10](overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-10.md). For more information about how to help create a secure recovery image, see [Security Considerations for DaRT 10](security-considerations-for-dart-10.md).
-
-## Prerequisites for the recovery image
-
-
-The following items are required or recommended for creating the DaRT recovery image:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Prerequisite
-
Details
-
-
-
Windows 10 source files
-
Required to create the DaRT recovery image. Provide the path of a Windows 10 DVD or of Windows 10 source files.
-
-
-
Windows Debugging Tools for your platform
-
Required when you run the Crash Analyzer to determine the cause of a computer failure. We recommend that you specify the path of the Windows Debugging Tools at the time that you create the DaRT recovery image. You can download the Windows Debugging Tools here: Download and Install Debugging Tools for Windows.
-
-
-
Optional: Windows symbols files for use with Crash Analyzer
-
Typically, debugging information is stored in a symbol file that is separate from the program. You must have access to the symbol information when you debug an application that has stopped responding, for example, if it stopped working. For more information, see Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-[Planning to Deploy DaRT 10](planning-to-deploy-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/planning-to-deploy-dart-10.md b/mdop/dart-v10/planning-to-deploy-dart-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a3f8fabb1c..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/planning-to-deploy-dart-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning to Deploy DaRT 10
-description: Planning to Deploy DaRT 10
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 32a39e97-a889-4aae-982c-b85cdc3d9134
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning to Deploy DaRT 10
-
-
-You should consider all of the different deployment configurations and prerequisites before you create your deployment plan. This section includes information that can help you gather the information that you must have to formulate a deployment plan that best meets your business requirements.
-
-## Review the DaRT 10 software prerequisites and supported configurations
-
-
-After preparing your computing environment for DaRT 10 installation, make sure that you review the prerequisite software to install and the supported configurations to confirm that the selected computers for the installation meet the minimum hardware and operating system requirements. For information about prerequisites that you need to consider to create the DaRT recovery image, see [Planning to Create the DaRT 10 Recovery Image](planning-to-create-the-dart-10-recovery-image.md).
-
-[DaRT 10 Supported Configurations](dart-10-supported-configurations.md)
-
-## Plan for creating the DaRT 10 recovery image
-
-
-Before you start to create the DaRT recovery image, you need to consider possible security issues, the tools that you want to include on the recovery image, and the prerequisite software that you need to install.
-
-[Planning to Create the DaRT 10 Recovery Image](planning-to-create-the-dart-10-recovery-image.md)
-
-## Plan how to save and deploy the DaRT recovery image
-
-
-There are several methods that you can use to save and deploy the DaRT recovery image. Before you start to create the recovery image, review the advantages and disadvantages of each method and consider how you want to use DaRT in your enterprise.
-
-[Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT 10 Recovery Image](planning-how-to-save-and-deploy-the-dart-10-recovery-image.md)
-
-## Other resources for planning to deploy DaRT 10
-
-
-[Planning for DaRT 10](planning-for-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/recovering-computers-using-dart-10.md b/mdop/dart-v10/recovering-computers-using-dart-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a8d8499941..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/recovering-computers-using-dart-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,76 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Recovering Computers Using DaRT 10
-description: Recovering Computers Using DaRT 10
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 2ad7fab0-c22d-4171-8b5a-b2b7d7c0ad2d
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Recovering Computers Using DaRT 10
-
-
-After deploying the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10 recovery image, you can use DaRT 10 to recover computers. The information in this section describes the recovery tasks that you can perform.
-
-You have several different methods to choose from to boot into DaRT, depending on how you deploy the DaRT recovery image.
-
-- Insert a DaRT recovery image CD, DVD, or USB flash drive into the problem computer and use it to boot into the computer.
-
-- Boot into DaRT from a recovery partition on the problem computer.
-
-- Boot into DaRT from a remote partition on the network.
-
-For information about the advantages and disadvantages of each method, see [Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT 10 Recovery Image](planning-how-to-save-and-deploy-the-dart-10-recovery-image.md).
-
-Whichever method that you use to boot into DaRT, you must enable the boot device in the BIOS for the boot option or options that you want to make available to the end user.
-
-**Note**
-Configuring the BIOS is unique, depending on the kind of hard disk drive, network adapters, and other hardware that is used in your organization.
-
-
-
-## Recover a local computer by using the DaRT recovery image
-
-
-To recover a local computer by using DaRT, you must be physically present at the end-user computer that is experiencing problems that require DaRT.
-
-[How to Recover Local Computers by Using the DaRT Recovery Image](how-to-recover-local-computers-by-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-10.md)
-
-## Recover a remote computer by using the DaRT recovery image
-
-
-The Remote Connection feature in DaRT lets an IT administrator run the DaRT tools remotely on an end-user computer. After certain information is provided by the end user (or by a help desk professional working on the end-user computer), the IT administrator or help desk worker can take control of the end user's computer and run the necessary DaRT tools remotely.
-
-**Important**
-The two computers establishing a remote connection must be part of the same network.
-
-
-
-The **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window includes the option to run DaRT on an end-user computer remotely from an administrator computer. The end user opens the DaRT tools on the problem computer and starts the remote session by clicking **Remote Connection**.
-
-The Remote Connection feature on the end-user computer creates the following connection information: a ticket number, a port, and a list of all available IP addresses. The ticket number and port are generated randomly.
-
-The IT administrator or help desk worker enters this information into the **DaRT Remote Connection Viewer** to establish the terminal services connection to the end-user computer. The terminal services connection that is established lets an IT administrator remotely interact with the DaRT tools on the end-user computer. The end-user computer then processes the connection information, shares its screen, and responds to instructions from the IT administrator computer.
-
-[How to Recover Remote Computers by Using the DaRT Recovery Image](how-to-recover-remote-computers-by-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-10.md)
-
-## Other resources for recovering computers using DaRT 10
-
-
-[Operations for DaRT 10](operations-for-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/release-notes-for-dart-10.md b/mdop/dart-v10/release-notes-for-dart-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 422e6479b3..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/release-notes-for-dart-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,77 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Release Notes for DaRT 10
-description: Release Notes for DaRT 10
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: eb996980-f9c4-42cb-bde9-6b3d4b82b58c
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Release Notes for DaRT 10
-
-
-**To search these release notes, press CTRL+F.**
-
-Read these release notes thoroughly before you install Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10.
-
-These release notes contain information that is required to successfully install Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 10. The release notes also contain information that is not available in the product documentation. If there is a difference between these release notes and other DaRT documentation, the latest change should be considered authoritative. These release notes supersede the content that is included with this product.
-
-## Known issues with DaRT 10
-
-
-### Disk Commander is unable to repair a corrupt master boot record in a physical partition in Windows 10
-
-In Windows 10, the “Restore the Master Boot Record (MBR) or the header of the GUID Partition Table (GPT)” option in Disk Commander is unable to repair a corrupt master boot record in a physical partition, and therefore is unable to boot the client computer.
-
-**Workaround:** Start **Startup Repair**, click **Troubleshoot**, click **Advanced options**, and then click **Start repair**.
-
-### Multiple instances of Disk Wipe that target the same drive cause all instances except the last one to report a failure
-
-If you start multiple instances of Disk Wipe, and then try to wipe the same drive by using two separate Disk Wipe instances, all instances except the last one report a failure to wipe the drive.
-
-**Workaround:** None.
-
-### Disk Wipe may not clear all data on solid-state drives that have flash memory
-
-If you use Disk Wipe to clear data on a solid-state drive (SSD) that has flash memory, all of the data may not be erased. This issue occurs because the SSD firmware controls the physical location of writes while Disk Wipe is running.
-
-**Workaround:** None.
-
-### System restore fails when you run Locksmith Wizard or Registry Editor
-
-If you run Locksmith Wizard, Registry Editor, and possibly other tools, System Restore fails.
-
-**Workaround:** Close and restart DaRT, and then start System Restore.
-
-### System File Checker (SFC) Scan fails to run after you start and close Locksmith Wizard or Computer Management
-
-If you start and then close Locksmith Wizard or tools in Computer Management, System File Checker fails to run.
-
-**Workaround:** Close and restart DaRT, and then start System File Checker.
-
-### DaRT installer does not fail when the Windows Assessment and Deployment Kit is not installed
-
-If you install DaRT 10 by using the command line to run the Windows Installer (.msi), and the Windows Assessment and Deployment Kit (Windows ADK) has not been installed, the DaRT installation should fail. Currently, the DaRT 10 installer installs all components except the DaRT recovery image.
-
-**Workaround:** None.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[About DaRT 10](about-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/security-and-privacy-for-dart-10.md b/mdop/dart-v10/security-and-privacy-for-dart-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8a01341fe5..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/security-and-privacy-for-dart-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Security and Privacy for DaRT 10
-description: Security and Privacy for DaRT 10
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 9ce5d555-c4e9-4482-a147-27b26579c935
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Security and Privacy for DaRT 10
-
-
-Use the following information to help you plan for security and privacy considerations in Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10.
-
-## Security considerations for DaRT 10
-
-
-There are several security-related considerations that you should plan for when deploying and using DaRT in your environment. The information in this section provides a brief overview about the security-related considerations for DaRT.
-
-[Security Considerations for DaRT 10](security-considerations-for-dart-10.md)
-
-## Privacy considerations for DaRT 10
-
-
-The information in this section explains many of the data collection and use practices of DaRT.
-
-[DaRT 10 Privacy Statement](dart-10-privacy-statement.md)
-
-## Other resources for DaRT 10 security and privacy
-
-
-[Operations for DaRT 10](operations-for-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/security-considerations-for-dart-10.md b/mdop/dart-v10/security-considerations-for-dart-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 41712c5ad9..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/security-considerations-for-dart-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,74 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Security Considerations for DaRT 10
-description: Security Considerations for DaRT 10
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: c653daf1-f12a-4667-98cc-f0c89fa38e3f
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Security Considerations for DaRT 10
-
-
-This topic contains a brief overview about the accounts and groups, log files, and other security-related considerations for Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 10. For more information, follow the links within this article.
-
-## General security considerations
-
-
-**Understand the security risks**. DaRT 10 includes functionality that lets an administrator or a help desk worker run the DaRT tools remotely to resolve problems on an end-user computer. In addition, you can save the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) image to a USB flash drive or put the ISO image on a network to include its contents as a recovery partition on a computer’s hard disk. These capabilities provide flexibility, but also create potential security risks that you should consider when configuring DaRT.
-
-**Physically secure your computers**. When administrators and help desk workers are not physically at their computers, they should lock their computers and use a secured screen saver.
-
-**Apply the most recent security updates to all computers**. Stay informed about new updates for operating systems by subscribing to the Security Notification service ().
-
-## Limit end-user access to DaRT tools
-
-
-When you are creating the DaRT recovery image, you can select the tools that you want to include. For security reasons, you might want to restrict end-user access to the more powerful DaRT tools, such as Disk Wipe and Locksmith. In DaRT 10, you can disable certain tools during configuration and still make them available to help desk workers when the end user starts the Remote Connection feature.
-
-You can even configure the DaRT image so that the option to start a remote connection session is the only tool available to an end user.
-
-**Important**
-After the remote connection is established, all the tools that you included in the recovery image, including those unavailable to the end user, will become available to any help desk worker who is working on the end–user computer.
-
-
-
-For more information about including tools in the DaRT recovery image, see [Overview of the Tools in DaRT 10](overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-10.md).
-
-## Secure the DaRT recovery image
-
-
-If you deploy the DaRT recovery image by saving it to a USB flash drive or by creating a remote partition or a recovery partition, you might want to include your company’s preferred method of drive encryption on the ISO. Encrypting the ISO helps to ensure that end users cannot use DaRT functionality if they were to gain access to the recovery image, and it ensures that unauthorized users cannot boot into DaRT on computers that belong to someone else. If you use an encryption method, be sure to deploy and enable it in all computers.
-
-**Note**
-DaRT 10 supports BitLocker natively.
-
-
-
-To include drive encryption, add the encryption solution files when you create the recovery image. Your encryption solution must be able to run on WinPE. End users who boot from the ISO are then able to access that encryption solution and unblock the drive.
-
-## Maintain security between two computers when you use Remote Connection
-
-
-By default, the communication between two computers that have established a **Remote Connection** session may not be encrypted. Therefore, to help maintain security between the two computers, we recommend that both computers are a part of the same network.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Security and Privacy for DaRT 10](security-and-privacy-for-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v10/troubleshooting-dart-10.md b/mdop/dart-v10/troubleshooting-dart-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 2ba6f1ddfb..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v10/troubleshooting-dart-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,92 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Troubleshooting DaRT 10
-description: Troubleshooting DaRT 10
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 76d42a00-3f6b-4730-8857-39fe49535d37
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Troubleshooting DaRT 10
-
-
-Troubleshooting content is not included in the Administrator’s Guide for this product. Instead, you can find troubleshooting information for this product on the [TechNet Wiki](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=224905).
-
-## How to find troubleshooting content
-
-
-You can use the following information to find troubleshooting or additional technical content for this product.
-
-### Search the MDOP documentation
-
-The first step to find help content in the Administrator’s Guide is to search the MDOP documentation on TechNet.
-
-After you search the MDOP documentation, your next step would be to search the troubleshooting information for the product in the TechNet Wiki.
-
-**To search the MDOP product documentation**
-
-1. Use a web browser to navigate to the [MDOP Information Experience](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=236032) TechNet home page.
-
-2. Enter applicable search terms in the **Search TechNet with Bing** search box at the top of the MDOP Information Experience home page.
-
-3. Review the search results for assistance.
-
-**To search the TechNet wiki**
-
-1. Use a web browser to navigate to the [TechNet Wiki](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=224905) home page.
-
-2. Enter applicable search terms in the **Search TechNet Wiki** search box on the TechNet Wiki home page.
-
-3. Review the search results for assistance.
-
-## How to create a troubleshooting article
-
-
-If you have a troubleshooting tip or a best practice to share that is not already included in the MDOP OnlineHelp or TechNet Wiki, you can create your own TechNet Wiki articles.
-
-**To create a TechNet Wiki troubleshooting or best practices article**
-
-1. Use a web browser to navigate to the [TechNet Wiki](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=224905) home page.
-
-2. Log in with your Windows Live ID.
-
-3. Review the **Getting Started** section to learn the basics of the TechNet Wiki and its articles.
-
-4. Select **Post an article >>** at the bottom of the **Getting Started** section.
-
-5. On the Wiki article **Add Page** page, select **Insert Template** from the toolbar, select the troubleshooting article template (**Troubleshooting.html**), and then click **Insert**.
-
-6. Be sure to give the article a descriptive title and then overwrite the template information as needed to create your troubleshooting or best practice article.
-
-7. After you review your article, be sure to include a tag that is named **Troubleshooting** and another for the product name. This helps others to find your content.
-
-8. Click **Save** to publish the article to the TechNet Wiki.
-
-## Other resources for troubleshooting DaRT 10
-
-
-[Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 10](index.md)
-
-[Getting Started with DaRT 10](getting-started-with-dart-10.md)
-
-[Planning for DaRT 10](planning-for-dart-10.md)
-
-[Deploying DaRT 10](deploying-dart-10.md)
-
-[Operations for DaRT 10](operations-for-dart-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v65.md b/mdop/dart-v65.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ef08a90758..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v65.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 6.5
-description: Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 6.5
-author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 04/19/2017
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
----
-
-# Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 6.5
-
-Selecting the link for [Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 6.5 documentation](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/jj713388.aspx) will take you to another website. Use your browser's **Back** button to return to this page.
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/TOC.md b/mdop/dart-v7/TOC.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5688dce81f..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/TOC.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-# [Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 7](index.md)
-## [Getting Started with DaRT 7.0](getting-started-with-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-### [About DaRT 7.0](about-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-#### [Release Notes for DaRT 7.0](release-notes-for-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-### [Overview of the Tools in DaRT 7.0](overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-### [Accessibility for DaRT 7.0](accessibility-for-dart-70.md)
-## [Planning for DaRT 7.0](planning-for-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-### [Planning to Deploy DaRT 7.0](planning-to-deploy-dart-70.md)
-#### [DaRT 7.0 Supported Configurations](dart-70-supported-configurations-dart-7.md)
-#### [Planning to Create the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image](planning-to-create-the-dart-70-recovery-image.md)
-#### [Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image](planning-how-to-save-and-deploy-the-dart-70-recovery-image.md)
-### [DaRT 7.0 Planning Checklist](dart-70-planning-checklist-dart-7.md)
-## [Deploying DaRT 7.0](deploying-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-### [Deploying DaRT 7.0 to Administrator Computers](deploying-dart-70-to-administrator-computers-dart-7.md)
-#### [How to Deploy DaRT 7.0](how-to-deploy-dart-70.md)
-#### [How to Change, Repair, or Remove DaRT 7.0](how-to-change-repair-or-remove-dart-70.md)
-### [Creating the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image](creating-the-dart-70-recovery-image-dart-7.md)
-#### [How to Use the DaRT Recovery Image Wizard to Create the Recovery Image](how-to-use-the-dart-recovery-image-wizard-to-create-the-recovery-image-dart-7.md)
-#### [How to Create a Time Limited Recovery Image](how-to-create-a-time-limited-recovery-image-dart-7.md)
-### [Deploying the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image](deploying-the-dart-70-recovery-image-dart-7.md)
-#### [How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image Using a USB Flash Drive](how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-using-a-usb-flash-drive-dart-7.md)
-#### [How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as Part of a Recovery Partition](how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-part-of-a-recovery-partition-dart-7.md)
-#### [How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as a Remote Partition](how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-a-remote-partition-dart-7.md)
-### [DaRT 7.0 Deployment Checklist](dart-70-deployment-checklist-dart-7.md)
-## [Operations for DaRT 7.0](operations-for-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-### [Recovering Computers Using DaRT 7.0](recovering-computers-using-dart-70-dart-7.md)
-#### [How to Recover Local Computers Using the DaRT Recovery Image](how-to-recover-local-computers-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-7.md)
-#### [How to Recover Remote Computers Using the DaRT Recovery Image](how-to-recover-remote-computers-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-7.md)
-### [Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer](diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer--dart-7.md)
-#### [How to Run the Crash Analyzer on an End-user Computer](how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-on-an-end-user-computer-dart-7.md)
-#### [How to Run the Crash Analyzer in Stand-alone Mode on a Computer Other than an End-user Computer](how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-in-stand-alone-mode-on-a-computer-other-than-an-end-user-computer-dart-7.md)
-#### [How to Ensure that Crash Analyzer Can Access Symbol Files](how-to-ensure-that-crash-analyzer-can-access-symbol-files-dart-7.md)
-### [Security Considerations for DaRT 7.0](security-considerations-for-dart-70-dart-7.md)
-## [Troubleshooting DaRT 7.0](troubleshooting-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-## [Technical Reference for DaRT 7.0](technical-reference-for-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/about-dart-70-new-ia.md b/mdop/dart-v7/about-dart-70-new-ia.md
deleted file mode 100644
index bad11f06bb..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/about-dart-70-new-ia.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,78 +0,0 @@
----
-title: About DaRT 7.0
-description: About DaRT 7.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 217ffafc-6d73-4b80-88d9-71870460d4ab
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# About DaRT 7.0
-
-
-Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7 helps you troubleshoot and repair Windows-based desktops. This includes those desktops that cannot be started. DaRT is a powerful set of tools that extend the Windows Recovery Environment (WinRE). By using DaRT, you can analyze an issue to determine its cause, for example, by inspecting the computer’s event log or system registry.
-
-DaRT also provides tools to help you fix a problem as soon as you determine the cause. For example, you can use the tools in DaRT to disable a faulty device driver, remove hotfixes, restore deleted files, and scan the computer for malware even when you cannot or should not start the installed Windows operating system.
-
-DaRT can help you quickly recover computers that are running either 32-bit or 64-bit versions of Windows 7, typically in less time than it would take to reimage the computer.
-
-## About the DaRT 7 Recovery Image
-
-
-Functionality in DaRT lets you create a recovery image that is based on WinRE combined with a set of tools that DaRT provides. The DaRT recovery image takes advantage of WinRE, from which you can access the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window.
-
-Use the **DaRT Recovery Image Wizard** to create the DaRT recovery image. By default, the wizard creates an International Organization for Standardization (ISO) image file on your desktop that is named DaRT70.iso, although you can specify a different location and file name. The wizard also lets you burn the image to a CD or DVD. After you have finished the wizard, you can save the recovery image to a USB flash drive or save it in a format that you can use to create a remote partition or a recovery partition.
-
-When you have to use DaRT to startup an end-user computer that will not start, you can follow the instructions at [How to Recover Local Computers Using the DaRT Recovery Image](how-to-recover-local-computers-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-7.md).
-
-For detailed information about the tools in DaRT, see [Overview of the Tools in DaRT 7.0](overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-70-new-ia.md).
-
-## What’s New in DaRT 7
-
-
-DaRT 7 continues to support all the scenarios included in previous versions and it adds a new Remote Connection feature in addition to three new deployment options.
-
-### DaRT 7 Image Creation
-
-The wizard that you use to create DaRT ISO images is now called **DaRT Recovery Image** and it now supports an option to enable or disable the new Remote Connection feature. Remote Connection lets a helpdesk agent run the DaRT tools from a remote location. In previous releases, the helpdesk agent had to be physically present at the end-user computer to run the DaRT tools.
-
-The wizard also lets you customize the Welcome message for the Remote Connection feature (the message is shown when end users run the Remote Connection tool). IT Admins can also configure which Port Number should be used by Remote Connection.
-
-For more information about the **DaRT Recovery Image Wizard** or Remote Connection, see [Creating the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image](creating-the-dart-70-recovery-image-dart-7.md).
-
-### DaRT 7 ISO Deployment
-
-In addition to burning to a CD or DVD, DaRT 7 adds three new options when you deploy the ISO that contains the DaRT recovery image:
-
-- USB flash drive deployment
-
-- Remote partition deployment
-
-- Recovery partition deployment
-
-The USB flash drive deployment option lets a company use DaRT on computers that do not have CD or DVD drives available. The recovery and remote partition options let end users have easy access to the DaRT image and to enable the Remote Connection functionality.
-
-For more information about how to deploy DaRT recovery images, see [Deploying the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image](deploying-the-dart-70-recovery-image-dart-7.md).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Getting Started with DaRT 7.0](getting-started-with-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-[Release Notes for DaRT 7.0](release-notes-for-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/accessibility-for-dart-70.md b/mdop/dart-v7/accessibility-for-dart-70.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 728b5a9f48..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/accessibility-for-dart-70.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,106 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Accessibility for DaRT 7.0
-description: Accessibility for DaRT 7.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 41f7bb72-4f1d-44fb-bc3f-8b66557fec2f
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Accessibility for DaRT 7.0
-
-
-Microsoft is committed to making its products and services easier for everyone to use. This section provides information about features and services that make this product and its corresponding documentation more accessible for people with disabilities.
-
-## Access Any Command with a Few Keystrokes
-
-
-Access keys let you quickly use a command by pressing a few keys. You can get to most commands by using two keystrokes. To use an access key:
-
-1. Press ALT.
-
- The keyboard shortcuts are displayed over each feature that is available in the current view.
-
-2. Press the letter shown in the keyboard shortcut over the feature that you want to use.
-
-**Note**
-To cancel the action that you are taking and hide the keyboard shortcuts, press ALT.
-
-
-
-## Documentation in Alternative Formats
-
-
-If you have difficulty reading or handling printed materials, you can obtain the documentation for many Microsoft products in more accessible formats. You can view an index of accessible product documentation on the Microsoft Accessibility website. In addition, you can obtain additional Microsoft publications from Learning Ally (formerly Recording for the Blind & Dyslexic, Inc.). Learning Ally distributes these documents to registered, eligible members of their distribution service.
-
-For information about the availability of Microsoft product documentation and books from Microsoft Press, contact:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Learning Ally (formerly Recording for the Blind & Dyslexic, Inc.)
-
20 Roszel Road
-
Princeton, NJ 08540
-
-
-
-
Telephone number from within the United States:
-
(800) 221-4792
-
-
-
Telephone number from outside the United States and Canada:
Web addresses can change, so you might be unable to connect to the website or sites mentioned here.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Customer Service for People with Hearing Impairments
-
-
-If you are deaf or hard-of-hearing, complete access to Microsoft product and customer services is available through a text telephone (TTY/TDD) service:
-
-- For customer service, contact Microsoft Sales Information Center at (800) 892-5234 between 6:30 AM and 5:30 PM Pacific Time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.
-
-- For technical assistance in the United States, contact Microsoft Product Support Services at (800) 892-5234 between 6:00 AM and 6:00 PM Pacific Time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays. In Canada, dial (905) 568-9641 between 8:00 AM and 8:00 PM Eastern Time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.
-
-Microsoft Support Services are subject to the prices, terms, and conditions in place at the time the service is used.
-
-## For More Information
-
-
-For more information about how accessible technology for computers helps to improve the lives of people with disabilities, see the [Microsoft Accessibility website](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=8431).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Getting Started with DaRT 7.0](getting-started-with-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/creating-the-dart-70-recovery-image-dart-7.md b/mdop/dart-v7/creating-the-dart-70-recovery-image-dart-7.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7158d4abbf..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/creating-the-dart-70-recovery-image-dart-7.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,74 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Creating the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image
-description: Creating the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: ebb2ec58-0349-469d-a23f-3f944fe4c1fa
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Creating the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image
-
-
-Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7 includes the **DaRT Recovery Image Wizard** that is used in Windows to create a bootable International Organization for Standardization (ISO) image. An ISO image is a file that represents the raw contents of a CD.
-
-## Use the DaRT Recovery Image Wizard to Create the Recovery Image
-
-
-The ISO created by the DaRT Recovery Image Wizard contains the DaRT recovery image that lets you boot into a problem computer, even if it might otherwise not start. After you boot the computer into DaRT, you can run the different DaRT tools to try to diagnose and repair the computer.
-
-You can write the ISO to a recordable CD or DVD, save it to a USB flash drive, or save it in a format that you can use to boot into DaRT from a remote partition or from a recovery partition. For more information, see [Deploying the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image](deploying-the-dart-70-recovery-image-dart-7.md).
-
-**Note**
-If your computer includes a CD-RW drive, the wizard offers to burn the ISO image to a blank CD or DVD. If your computer does not include a drive that is supported by the wizard, you can burn the ISO image onto a CD or DVD by using most programs that can burn a CD or DVD.
-
-
-
-To create a bootable CD or DVD from the ISO image, you must have:
-
-- A CD-RW drive.
-
-- A recordable CD or DVD (in a format supported by the recordable drive).
-
-- Software that supports the recordable drive and supports burning an ISO image directly to CD or DVD.
-
- **Important**
- Test the CD or DVD that you create on all the different kinds of computers that you intend to support because some computers cannot start from all kinds of recordable media.
-
-
-
-To save the ISO image to a USB flash drive (UFD), you must have:
-
-- A correctly formatted UFD.
-
-- A program that you can use to mount the ISO image.
-
-[How to Use the DaRT Recovery Image Wizard to Create the Recovery Image](how-to-use-the-dart-recovery-image-wizard-to-create-the-recovery-image-dart-7.md)
-
-## Create a Time Limited Recovery Image
-
-
-You can create a DaRT recovery image that can only be used for a certain number of days after it is generated. To do this, you must run the **DaRT Recovery Image Wizard** at a command prompt and specify the number of days.
-
-[How to Create a Time Limited Recovery Image](how-to-create-a-time-limited-recovery-image-dart-7.md)
-
-## Other resources for creating the DaRT 7 recovery image
-
-
-- [Deploying DaRT 7.0](deploying-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/dart-70-deployment-checklist-dart-7.md b/mdop/dart-v7/dart-70-deployment-checklist-dart-7.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ab0a13cab2..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/dart-70-deployment-checklist-dart-7.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
----
-title: DaRT 7.0 Deployment Checklist
-description: DaRT 7.0 Deployment Checklist
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 2c68ec15-0624-4a75-8237-05c68b61ad07
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# DaRT 7.0 Deployment Checklist
-
-
-This checklist can be used to help you during Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7 deployment.
-
-**Note**
-This checklist outlines the recommended steps and a high-level list of items to consider when planning for product deployment. It is recommended that you copy this checklist into a spreadsheet program and customize it for your use.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
References
-
-
-
-
-
-
Decide on the best DaRT 7 deployment option for your requirements and deploy it.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying DaRT 7.0](deploying-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/dart-70-planning-checklist-dart-7.md b/mdop/dart-v7/dart-70-planning-checklist-dart-7.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8c9dbcaa92..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/dart-70-planning-checklist-dart-7.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
----
-title: DaRT 7.0 Planning Checklist
-description: DaRT 7.0 Planning Checklist
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: f97a2318-6597-4774-a854-bb546279a8fd
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# DaRT 7.0 Planning Checklist
-
-
-This checklist can be used to help you plan for preparing your computing environment for Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7 deployment.
-
-**Note**
-This checklist outlines the recommended steps and a high-level list of items to consider when planning for product deployment. It is recommended that you copy this checklist into a spreadsheet program and customize it for your use.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
References
-
-
-
-
-
-
Review the DaRT 7 Supported Configurations information to confirm that the computers you have selected for client or feature installation meet the minimum hardware and operating system requirements.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning for DaRT 7.0](planning-for-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/dart-70-supported-configurations-dart-7.md b/mdop/dart-v7/dart-70-supported-configurations-dart-7.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 790c2e9077..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/dart-70-supported-configurations-dart-7.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,106 +0,0 @@
----
-title: DaRT 7.0 Supported Configurations
-description: DaRT 7.0 Supported Configurations
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: e9ee87b0-3254-4625-b178-17b2f5b8f8c8
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# DaRT 7.0 Supported Configurations
-
-
-Your environment may already meet the configuration requirements provided here so that you can install and run Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7. These include the following recovery image and disk space requirements.
-
-## DaRT 7 Recovery Image Requirements
-
-
-No cross-platform recovery image creation is supported. The following table specifies the kind of recovery image that you should create and deploy in your enterprise:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Platform and DaRT Version
-
Recovery Image Requirements
-
-
-
-
-
64-Bit DaRT 7.0
-
Create and use a 64-Bit DaRT recovery image.
-
-
-
32-Bit DaRT 7.0
-
Create and use a 32-Bit DaRT recovery image.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## DaRT 7 End-user Computer Requirements
-
-
-The **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window in DaRT requires that the destination computer use one of the following operating systems together with the specified amount of system memory available for DaRT:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating System
-
System Requirements for DaRT
-
-
-
-
-
Windows 7 64-Bit (2GB)
-
2.5GB of system memory
-
-
-
Windows 7 32-Bit (1GB)
-
1.5GB of system memory
-
-
-
Windows Server 2008 R2 (512MB)
-
1GB of system memory
-
-
-
-
-
-
-DaRT also has the following minimal hardware requirements:
-
-- A CD or DVD drive or a USB port
-
- This is required if you are deploying DaRT in your enterprise by using a CD, DVD, or USB.
-
-- BIOS support for starting the computer from a CD or DVD, a USB flash drive, or from a remote or recovery partition
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy DaRT 7.0](planning-to-deploy-dart-70.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/deploying-dart-70-new-ia.md b/mdop/dart-v7/deploying-dart-70-new-ia.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4b535951b5..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/deploying-dart-70-new-ia.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying DaRT 7.0
-description: Deploying DaRT 7.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 7bc99bce-b94f-4074-ba88-986ed76f8a6c
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying DaRT 7.0
-
-
-There are a number of different deployment configurations that Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7 supports. This section includes information you should consider about the deployment of DaRT 7 and step-by-step procedures to help you successfully perform the tasks that you must complete at different stages of your deployment.
-
-## Deployment information
-
-
-- [Deploying DaRT 7.0 to Administrator Computers](deploying-dart-70-to-administrator-computers-dart-7.md)
-
- This section provides information to help you decide on the best DaRT 7 deployment option for your requirements and then how to deploy it.
-
-- [Creating the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image](creating-the-dart-70-recovery-image-dart-7.md)
-
- This section provides information to help you use the DaRT Recovery Image Wizard to create the DaRT recovery image ISO.
-
-- [Deploying the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image](deploying-the-dart-70-recovery-image-dart-7.md)
-
- This section provides information to help you decide on the best DaRT 7 recovery image deployment option for your requirements and then how to deploy it.
-
-- [DaRT 7.0 Deployment Checklist](dart-70-deployment-checklist-dart-7.md)
-
- This section provides a deployment checklist that can help you in deploying and using DaRT 7.
-
-## Other resources for deploying DaRT 7
-
-
-- [Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 7 Administrator's Guide](index.md)
-
-- [Getting Started with DaRT 7.0](getting-started-with-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-- [Planning for DaRT 7.0](planning-for-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-- [Operations for DaRT 7.0](operations-for-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-- [Troubleshooting DaRT 7.0](troubleshooting-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/deploying-dart-70-to-administrator-computers-dart-7.md b/mdop/dart-v7/deploying-dart-70-to-administrator-computers-dart-7.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 107a1f0256..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/deploying-dart-70-to-administrator-computers-dart-7.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,52 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying DaRT 7.0 to Administrator Computers
-description: Deploying DaRT 7.0 to Administrator Computers
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 8baf26aa-b168-463c-810f-a165918b9d9f
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying DaRT 7.0 to Administrator Computers
-
-
-Before you begin the deployment of Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7, review the requirements for your environment. This includes the hardware requirements for installing DaRT. For more information about DaRT hardware and software requirements, see [DaRT 7.0 Supported Configurations](dart-70-supported-configurations-dart-7.md).
-
-The topics in this section can be used to help you deploy DaRT in your enterprise based on your environment and deployment strategy.
-
-## Deploy DaRT 7.0 to administrator computers
-
-
-You can use the Windows Installer file for DaRT to install DaRT on a computer that you will use to first create the DaRT recovery image and then troubleshoot and fix end-user computers. Frequently, across an organization, you might install on the administrator computer only the DaRT functionality that you need to create a DaRT recovery image. Then, on a helpdesk administrator’s computer, you might install only the DaRT functionality that you must have to troubleshoot a problem computer, such as the DaRT Remote Connection Viewer and the Crash Analyzer.
-
-In addition to manually running the Windows Installer file to install DaRT, you can also install DaRT at the command prompt to support enterprise software deployment systems such as System Center Configuration Manager 2012.
-
-[How to Deploy DaRT 7.0](how-to-deploy-dart-70.md)
-
-## Change, repair, or remove DaRT 7.0
-
-
-You can change, repair, or remove the DaRT installation by double-clicking the DaRT installation file and then clicking the button that corresponds to the action that you want to perform or through the Windows Control Panel.
-
-[How to Change, Repair, or Remove DaRT 7.0](how-to-change-repair-or-remove-dart-70.md)
-
-## Other resources for Deploying the DaRT 7.0 to Administrator Computers
-
-
-- [Deploying DaRT 7.0](deploying-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/deploying-the-dart-70-recovery-image-dart-7.md b/mdop/dart-v7/deploying-the-dart-70-recovery-image-dart-7.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d5be1d6f03..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/deploying-the-dart-70-recovery-image-dart-7.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,68 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image
-description: Deploying the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 6bba7bff-800f-44e4-bcfc-e143115607ca
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image
-
-
-After you have created the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) file that contains the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7 recovery image, you can deploy the DaRT recovery image throughout your enterprise so that it is available to end users and helpdesk agents. There are four supported methods that you can use to deploy the DaRT recovery image.
-
-- Burn the ISO image file to a CD or DVD
-
-- Save the contents of the ISO image file to a USB Flash Drive (UFD)
-
-- Extract the boot.wim file from the ISO image and deploy as a remote partition that is available to end-user computers
-
-- Extract the boot.wim file from the ISO image and deploy in the recovery partition of a new Windows 7 installation
-
-**Important**
-The **DaRT Recovery Image Wizard** only provides the option to burn a CD or DVD. All other methods of saving and deploying the recovery image require additional steps that involve tools that are not included in DaRT. Some guidance and links for these other methods are provided in this section.
-
-
-
-## Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image Using a USB Flash Drive
-
-
-After you have finished running the DaRT Recovery Image Wizard, you can use the tool at to copy the ISO image file to a USB flash drive (UFD).
-
-[How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image Using a USB Flash Drive](how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-using-a-usb-flash-drive-dart-7.md)
-
-## Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as Part of a Recovery Partition
-
-
-After you have finished running the DaRT Recovery Image Wizard and created the recovery image, you can extract the boot.wim file from the ISO image file and deploy it as a recovery partition in a Windows 7 image.
-
-[How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as Part of a Recovery Partition](how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-part-of-a-recovery-partition-dart-7.md)
-
-## Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as a Remote Partition
-
-
-After you have finished running the DaRT Recovery Image Wizard and created the recovery image, you can extract the boot.wim file from the ISO image file and deploy it as a remote partition on the network.
-
-[How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as a Remote Partition](how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-a-remote-partition-dart-7.md)
-
-## Other resources for maintaining Deploying the DaRT Recovery Image
-
-
-- [Deploying DaRT 7.0](deploying-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer--dart-7.md b/mdop/dart-v7/diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer--dart-7.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 793f1a332e..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer--dart-7.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer
-description: Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 170d40ef-4edb-4a32-a349-c285c0ea5e56
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer
-
-
-The Crash Analyzer in Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7 lets you debug a crash dump file on a Windows-based computer and then diagnose any related computer errors. The Crash Analyzer uses the Microsoft Debugging Tools for Windows to examine a crash dump file for the driver that caused the computer to fail.
-
-## Run the Crash Analyzer on an End-user Computer
-
-
-Typically, you run Crash Analyzer from the Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset window on an end-user computer that has problems. The Crash Analyzer tries to locate the Debugging Tools for Windows on the problem computer. If the directory path dialog box is empty, you must enter the location or browse to the location of the Debugging Tools for Windows (you can download the files from Microsoft). You must also provide a path to where the symbol files are located.
-
-If you included the Microsoft Debugging Tools for Windows and the symbol files when you created the DaRT recovery image, they should be available when you run the Crash Analyzer on the problem computer.
-
-[How to Run the Crash Analyzer on an End-user Computer](how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-on-an-end-user-computer-dart-7.md)
-
-## Run the Crash Analyzer in stand-alone mode on a computer other than an end-user computer
-
-
-The Crash Analyzer tries to locate the Debugging Tools for Windows on the problem computer. If the directory path dialog box is empty, you must enter the location or browse to the location of the Debugging Tools for Windows (you can download the files from Microsoft). You must also provide a path to where the symbol files are located.
-
-If you did not include the Microsoft Debugging Tools for Windows and the symbol files when you created the DaRT recovery image, or if disk size or network connectivity problems are preventing you from obtaining them, then you can copy the dump file from the problem computer and analyze it on a computer that has the stand-alone version of Crash Analyzer installed, such as a helpdesk administrator’s computer.
-
-[How to Run the Crash Analyzer in Stand-alone Mode on a Computer Other than an End-user Computer](how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-in-stand-alone-mode-on-a-computer-other-than-an-end-user-computer-dart-7.md)
-
-## Ensure that Crash Analyzer can access symbol files
-
-
-Typically, debugging information is stored in a symbol file that is separate from the executable. You must have access to the symbol information when you debug an application that has stopped responding, for example if it crashed.
-
-Symbol files are automatically downloaded when you run Crash Analyzer. If the computer does not have an Internet connection or the network requires the computer to access an HTTP proxy server, the symbol files cannot be downloaded.
-
-[How to Ensure that Crash Analyzer Can Access Symbol Files](how-to-ensure-that-crash-analyzer-can-access-symbol-files-dart-7.md)
-
-## Other resources for diagnosing system failures with Crash Analyzer
-
-
-[Operations for DaRT 7.0](operations-for-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/getting-started-with-dart-70-new-ia.md b/mdop/dart-v7/getting-started-with-dart-70-new-ia.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4a0b5db556..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/getting-started-with-dart-70-new-ia.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,64 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Getting Started with DaRT 7.0
-description: Getting Started with DaRT 7.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 796f52ce-0935-4d3d-9437-289b4c7b16c3
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Getting Started with DaRT 7.0
-
-
-DaRT requires thorough planning before you deploy it or use its features. If you are new to this product, we recommend that you read the documentation carefully. Before you deploy the product to a production environment, we also recommend that you validate your deployment plan in a test network environment. You might also consider taking a class about relevant technologies. For more information about Microsoft training opportunities, see the Microsoft Training Overview at [https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=80347](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=80347).
-
-This section provides general information for administrators who are evaluating and using Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7.
-
-**Note**
-A downloadable version of this document and the DaRT 7 Evaluation Guide can be downloaded from .
-
-
-
-## Getting Started With DaRT 7
-
-
-- [About DaRT 7.0](about-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
- Provides information specifically related to DaRT including what is new in DaRT 7.
-
-- [Overview of the Tools in DaRT 7.0](overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
- Provides general information about the tools in Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7.
-
-- [Accessibility for DaRT 7.0](accessibility-for-dart-70.md)
-
- Provides information about features and services that make this product and its corresponding documentation more accessible for people with disabilities.
-
-## Other resources for this product
-
-
-- [Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 7 Administrator's Guide](index.md)
-
-- [Planning for DaRT 7.0](planning-for-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-- [Deploying DaRT 7.0](deploying-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-- [Operations for DaRT 7.0](operations-for-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-- [Troubleshooting DaRT 7.0](troubleshooting-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-change-repair-or-remove-dart-70.md b/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-change-repair-or-remove-dart-70.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 07c0c01702..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-change-repair-or-remove-dart-70.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Change, Repair, or Remove DaRT 7.0
-description: How to Change, Repair, or Remove DaRT 7.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: a65ff4f3-2b6d-4105-a7a0-67c87e8e7300
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Change, Repair, or Remove DaRT 7.0
-
-
-You can change, repair, or remove the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7 installation by double-clicking the DaRT installation file and then clicking the button that corresponds to the action that you want to perform.
-
-You can also change, repair, or remove the DaRT installation using the Windows Control Panel by following the steps described in the procedure in this topic.
-
-**To change, repair, or remove DaRT**
-
-1. Click **Start** and then click **Control Panel**.
-
-2. Click **Programs and Features**.
-
-3. Click **Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 7.0** and then click the button that corresponds to the action that you want to perform.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying DaRT 7.0 to Administrator Computers](deploying-dart-70-to-administrator-computers-dart-7.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-create-a-time-limited-recovery-image-dart-7.md b/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-create-a-time-limited-recovery-image-dart-7.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 91c0b79888..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-create-a-time-limited-recovery-image-dart-7.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Create a Time Limited Recovery Image
-description: How to Create a Time Limited Recovery Image
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: d2e29cac-c24c-4239-997f-0320b8a830ae
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Create a Time Limited Recovery Image
-
-
-You can create a DaRT recovery image that can only be used for a certain number of days after it is generated. To do this, you must run the **DaRT Recovery Image Wizard** at a command prompt and specify the number of days.
-
-**To create a recovery image that has a time limit**
-
-1. Open a Command Prompt with administrator credentials.
-
-2. Change the directory to the location of the ERDC.exe program.
-
-3. Using the following syntax, run the **DaRT Recovery Image Wizard**. *NumberOfDays* is a positive integer that represents the number of days that the DaRT recovery image will be usable.
-
- ``` syntax
- ERDC /e NumberOfDays
- ```
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Creating the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image](creating-the-dart-70-recovery-image-dart-7.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-deploy-dart-70.md b/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-deploy-dart-70.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 23d20d5d80..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-deploy-dart-70.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,94 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Deploy DaRT 7.0
-description: How to Deploy DaRT 7.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 30522441-40cb-4eca-99b4-dff758f5c647
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Deploy DaRT 7.0
-
-
-This topic provides instructions to deploy Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7 in your environment. The first procedure in this topic assumes that you are installing all functionality on one administrator computer. When you need to deploy or uninstall DaRT on multiple computers, using an electronic software distribution system for example, it might be easier to use command line installation options. Those options are defined in the second procedure in this topic which provides example usage for the available command line options.
-
-**Important**
-Before you install DaRT, ensure that the computer meets the minimum system requirements listed in [DaRT 7.0 Supported Configurations](dart-70-supported-configurations-dart-7.md).
-
-
-
-**To install DaRT on an administrator computer**
-
-1. Locate the DaRT installation files that you received as part of your software download.
-
-2. Double-click the DaRT installation file that corresponds to your system requirements, either 32-bit or 64-bit. The DaRT installation file is named **MSDaRT70.msi**.
-
-3. Accept the Microsoft Software License Terms, and then click **Next**.
-
-4. Select the destination folder for installing DaRT, select whether DaRT should be installed for all users or just the current user, and then click **Next**.
-
-5. Select whether the installation should be **Typical**, **Custom**, or **Complete**, and then click **Next**.
-
- - **Typical** installs the tools that are most frequently used. This method is recommended for most users.
-
- - **Custom** lets you select the tools that are installed and where they will be installed. This is recommended for advanced users, especially if you are installing different DaRT tools on different helpdesk computers.
-
- - **Complete** installs all DaRT tools and requires the most disk space.
-
- After you have selected your method of installation, click **Next**.
-
-6. To start the installation, click **Install**.
-
-7. After the installation is completed successfully, click **Finish** to exit the wizard.
-
-**To install DaRT at the command prompt**
-
-1. The following example shows how to install all DaRT functionality.
-
- ``` syntax
- msiexec /i MSDaRT70.msi ADDLOCAL=CommonFiles,MSDaRTHelp,DaRTRecoveryImage,CrashAnalyzer,RemoteViewer
- ```
-
-2. The following example shows how to install only the **DaRT Recovery Image Wizard**.
-
- ``` syntax
- msiexec /i MSDaRT70.msi ADDLOCAL=CommonFiles,MSDaRTHelp,DaRTRecoveryImage
- ```
-
-3. The following example shows how to install only the Crash Analyzer and the DaRT Remote Connection Viewer.
-
- ``` syntax
- msiexec /i MSDaRT70.msi ADDLOCAL=CommonFiles,MSDaRTHelp,CrashAnalyzer,RemoteViewer
- ```
-
-4. The following example creates a setup log for the Windows Installer. This is valuable for debugging.
-
- ``` syntax
- msiexec.exe /i MSDaRT70.msi /l*v log.txt
- ```
-
-**Note**
-You can add /qn or /qb to any of the DaRT installation command prompt options to perform a silent installation.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying DaRT 7.0 to Administrator Computers](deploying-dart-70-to-administrator-computers-dart-7.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-a-remote-partition-dart-7.md b/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-a-remote-partition-dart-7.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 39343027eb..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-a-remote-partition-dart-7.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,57 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as a Remote Partition
-description: How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as a Remote Partition
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 757c9340-8eac-42e8-85de-4302e436713a
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as a Remote Partition
-
-
-After you have finished running the DaRT Recovery Image Wizard and created the recovery image, you can extract the boot.wim file from the ISO image file and deploy it as a remote partition on the network.
-
-**To deploy DaRT as a remote partition**
-
-1. Extract the boot.wim file from the DaRT ISO image file.
-
- 1. Mount the ISO image file that you created in the **Create Startup Image** dialog box by using your company’s preferred method of mounting an image.
-
- 2. Open the ISO image file and copy the boot.wim file from the \\sources folder in the mounted image to a location on your computer or on an external drive.
-
- **Note**
- If you burned a CD or DVD of the recovery image, you can open the files on the CD or DVD and copy the boot.wim file from the \\sources folder. This lets you skip the need to mount the image.
-
-
-
-2. Deploy the boot.wim file to a WDS server that can be accessed from end-user computers in your enterprise.
-
-3. Configure the WDS server to use the boot.wim file for DaRT by following your standard WDS deployment procedures.
-
-For more information about how to deploy DaRT as a remote partition, see the following:
-
-- [Walkthrough: Deploy an Image by Using PXE](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=212108)
-
-- [Windows Deployment Services Getting Started Guide](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=212106)
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image](deploying-the-dart-70-recovery-image-dart-7.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-part-of-a-recovery-partition-dart-7.md b/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-part-of-a-recovery-partition-dart-7.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 3ec6953ff3..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-part-of-a-recovery-partition-dart-7.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as Part of a Recovery Partition
-description: How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as Part of a Recovery Partition
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 462f2d08-f03b-4a07-b2d3-c69205dc6f70
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as Part of a Recovery Partition
-
-
-After you have finished running the DaRT Recovery Image Wizard and created the recovery image, you can extract the boot.wim file from the ISO image file and deploy it as a recovery partition in a Windows 7 image.
-
-**To deploy DaRT in the recovery partition of a Windows 7 image**
-
-1. Create a target partition in your Windows 7 image that is equal to or greater than the size of the ISO image file that you created by using the **DaRT Recovery Image Wizard**.
-
- The minimum size required for a DaRT partition is approximately 300MB. However, we recommend 450MB to accommodate for the remote connection functionality in DaRT.
-
-2. Extract the boot.wim file from the DaRT ISO image file.
-
- 1. Mount the ISO image file that you created in the **Create Startup Image** dialog box by using your company’s preferred method of mounting an image.
-
- 2. Open the ISO image file and copy the boot.wim file from the \\sources folder in the mounted image to a location on your computer or on an external drive.
-
- **Note**
- If you burned a CD or DVD of the recovery image, you can open the files on the CD or DVD and copy the boot.wim file from the \\sources folder. This lets you skip the need to mount the image.
-
-
-
-3. Use the boot.wim file to create a bootable recovery partition by using your company’s standard method for creating a custom Windows RE image.
-
- For more information about how to create or customize a recovery partition, see [Customizing the Windows RE Experience](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=214222).
-
-4. Replace the target partition in your Windows 7 image with the recovery partition.
-
-After your Windows 7 image is ready, distribute the image to computers in your enterprise by using your company’s standard image deployment process. For more information about how to create a Windows 7 image, see [Building a Standard Image of Windows 7: Step-by-Step Guide](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=212103).
-
-For more information about how to deploy a recovery solution to reinstall the factory image in the event of a system failure, see [Deploy a System Recovery Image](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=214221).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image](deploying-the-dart-70-recovery-image-dart-7.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-using-a-usb-flash-drive-dart-7.md b/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-using-a-usb-flash-drive-dart-7.md
deleted file mode 100644
index aebbdbfef1..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-using-a-usb-flash-drive-dart-7.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image Using a USB Flash Drive
-description: How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image Using a USB Flash Drive
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 5b7aa843-731e-47e7-b5f9-48d08da732d6
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image Using a USB Flash Drive
-
-
-After you have finished running the **DaRT Recovery Image Wizard**, you can use the tool at to copy the ISO image file to a USB flash drive (UFD).
-
-You can also manually copy the ISO image file to a UFD by following the steps provided in this section.
-
-**To save the DaRT recovery image to a USB flash drive**
-
-1. Format the USB flash drive.
-
- 1. From a running valid operating system or Windows PE session, insert your UFD.
-
- 2. At the command prompt with administrator permissions, type **DISKPART** and then type **LIST DISK**.
-
- The Command Prompt window displays the disk number of your UFD, for example **DISK 1**.
-
- 3. Enter the following commands one at a time at the command prompt.
-
- ``` syntax
- SELECT DISK 1
- CLEAN
- CREATE PARTITION PRIMARY
- SELECT PARTITION 1
- ACTIVE
- FORMAT FS=NTFS
- ASSIGN
- EXIT
- ```
-
- **Note**
- The previous code example assumes Disk 1 is the UFD. If it is necessary, replace DISK 1 with your disk number.
-
-
-
-2. By using your company’s preferred method of mounting an image, mount the ISO image file that you created in the **Create Startup Image** dialog box of the **DaRT Recovery Image Wizard**. This requires that you have a method available to mount an image file.
-
-3. Open the mounted ISO image file and copy all its contents to the formatted USB flash drive.
-
- **Note**
- If you burned a CD or DVD of the recovery image, you can open the files on the CD or DVD and copy the contents to the UFD. This lets you skip the need to mount the image.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image](deploying-the-dart-70-recovery-image-dart-7.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-ensure-that-crash-analyzer-can-access-symbol-files-dart-7.md b/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-ensure-that-crash-analyzer-can-access-symbol-files-dart-7.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a241116de7..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-ensure-that-crash-analyzer-can-access-symbol-files-dart-7.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Ensure that Crash Analyzer Can Access Symbol Files
-description: How to Ensure that Crash Analyzer Can Access Symbol Files
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 150a2f88-68a5-40eb-8471-e5008488ab6e
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Ensure that Crash Analyzer Can Access Symbol Files
-
-
-Typically, debugging information is stored in a symbol file that is separate from the executable. You must have access to the symbol information when you debug an application that has stopped responding, for example if it crashed.
-
-Symbol files are automatically downloaded when you run the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7 Crash Analyzer. If the computer does not have an Internet connection or the network requires the computer to access an HTTP proxy server, the symbol files cannot be downloaded.
-
-## Ensure access to symbol files
-
-
-Typically, debugging information is stored in a symbol file that is separate from the executable. You must have access to the symbol information when you debug an application that has stopped responding, for example if it crashed.
-
-Symbol files are automatically downloaded when you run **Crash Analyzer**. If the computer does not have an Internet connection or the network requires the computer to access an HTTP proxy server, the symbol files cannot be downloaded.
-
-The following is a list of options that are available for guaranteeing access to symbol files:
-
-- **Copy the dump file to another computer.** If the symbols cannot be downloaded because of a lack of an Internet connection, copy the crash dump file to a computer that does have an Internet connection and run the stand-alone **Crash Analyzer Wizard** on that computer.
-
-- **Access the symbol files from another computer.** If the symbols cannot be downloaded because of a lack of an Internet connection, you can download the symbols from a computer that does have an Internet connection and then copy them to the computer that does not have an Internet connection, or you can map a network drive to a location where the symbols are available on the local network. If you run the **Crash Analyzer** in a Windows Recovery Environment (Windows RE), you can include the symbol files on the DaRT recovery image. For more information about how to create a recovery image, see [Creating the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image](creating-the-dart-70-recovery-image-dart-7.md).
-
-- **Access symbol files through an HTTP proxy server.** If the symbols cannot be downloaded because an HTTP proxy server must be accessed, use the following steps to access an HTTP proxy server. In DaRT 7, the **Crash Analyzer Wizard** has a setting available on the **Specify Symbol Files Location** dialog page, marked with the label **Proxy server (optional, using the format "server:port")**. You can use this text box to specify a proxy server. Enter the proxy address in the form **<hostname>:<port>**, where the <**hostname**> is a DNS name or IP address, and the <**port**> is a TCP port number, usually 80. There are two modes in which the **Crash Analyzer** can be run. Following is how you use the proxy setting in each of these modes:
-
- - **Online mode:** In this mode, if the proxy server field is left blank, the wizard uses the proxy settings from Internet Options in Control Panel. If you enter a proxy address in the text box which is provided, that address will be used, and it will override the setting in the Internet Options.
-
- - **Windows Recovery Environment (Windows RE):** When you run **Crash Analyzer** from the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window, there is no default proxy address. If the computer is directly connected to the Internet, a proxy address is not required. Therefore, you can leave this field blank in the wizard setting. If the computer is not directly connected to the Internet, and it is in a network environment that has a proxy server, you must set the proxy field in the wizard to access the symbol store. The proxy address can be obtained from the network administrator. Setting the proxy server is important only when the public symbol store is connected to the Internet. If the symbols are already on the DaRT recovery image, or if they are available locally, setting the proxy server is not required.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer](diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer--dart-7.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-recover-local-computers-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-7.md b/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-recover-local-computers-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-7.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f7bab54d96..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-recover-local-computers-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-7.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,104 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Recover Local Computers Using the DaRT Recovery Image
-description: How to Recover Local Computers Using the DaRT Recovery Image
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: be29b5a8-be08-4cf2-822e-77a51d3f3b65
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Recover Local Computers Using the DaRT Recovery Image
-
-
-To recover a local computer by using Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7, you must be physically present at the end-user computer that is experiencing problems that require DaRT. You can also run DaRT remotely by following the instructions at [How to Recover Remote Computers Using the DaRT Recovery Image](how-to-recover-remote-computers-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-7.md).
-
-**To recover a local computer by using DaRT**
-
-1. As the computer is booting into the DaRT recovery image, the **NetStart** dialog box appears. You are asked whether you want to initialize network services. If you click **Yes**, it is assumed that a DHCP server is present on the network and an attempt is made to obtain an IP address from the server. If the network uses static IP addresses instead of DHCP, you can later use the **TCP/IP Configuration** tool in DaRT to specify a static IP address.
-
- To skip the network initialization process, click **No**.
-
-2. Following the network initialization dialog box, you are asked whether you want to remap the drive letters. When you run Windows online, the system volume is typically mapped to drive C. However, when you run Windows offline under WinRE, the original system volume might be mapped to another drive, and this can cause confusion. If you decide to remap, DaRT tries to map the offline drive letters to match the online drive letters. Remapping is performed only if an offline operating system is selected later in the startup process.
-
-3. Following the remapping dialog box, a **System Recovery Options** dialog box appears and asks you to select a keyboard layout. Then it displays the system root directory, the kind of operating system installed, and the partition size. If you do not see your operating system listed, and suspect that the lack of drivers is a possible cause of the failure, click **Load Drivers** to load the suspect drivers. This prompts you to insert the installation media for the device and to select the driver. Select the installation that you want to repair or diagnose, and then click **Next**.
-
- **Note**
- If the Windows Recovery Environment (WinRE) detects or suspects that Windows 7 did not start correctly the last time that it was tried, **Startup Repair** might start to run automatically.
-
-
-
-~~~
-If any of the registry hives are corrupted or missing, Registry Editor, and several other DaRT utilities, will have limited functionality. If no operating system is selected, some tools will not be available.
-
-The **System Recovery Options** window appears and lists various recovery tools.
-~~~
-
-4. On the **System Recovery Options** window, click **Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset**.
-
- The **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window opens. You can now run any of the individual tools or wizards that were included when the DaRT recovery image was created.
-
-You can click **Help** on the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window to open the client Help file that provides detailed instruction and information needed to run the individual DaRT tools. You can also click the **Solution Wizard** on the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window to choose the best tool for the situation, based on a brief interview that the wizard provides.
-
-For general information about any of the DaRT tools, see [Overview of the Tools in DaRT 7.0](overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-70-new-ia.md).
-
-**To run DaRT at the command prompt**
-
-1. You can run DaRT at the command prompt by specifying the **netstart.exe** command and by using any of the following parameters:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
-network
-
Initializes the network services.
-
-
-
-remount
-
Remaps the drive letters.
-
-
-
-prompt
-
Displays messages asking the end user to specify whether to initialize the network and remap the drives.
-
- Important
The end user’s response to the prompts overrides the -network and -remount switches.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-2. You can customize DaRT so that a computer that boots into DaRT automatically opens the **Remote Connection** tool that is used to establish a remote connection with the help desk.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Recovering Computers Using DaRT 7.0](recovering-computers-using-dart-70-dart-7.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-recover-remote-computers-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-7.md b/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-recover-remote-computers-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-7.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4ed0e0e5ec..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-recover-remote-computers-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-7.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,196 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Recover Remote Computers Using the DaRT Recovery Image
-description: How to Recover Remote Computers Using the DaRT Recovery Image
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 66bc45fb-dc40-4d47-b583-5bb1ff5c97a7
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Recover Remote Computers Using the DaRT Recovery Image
-
-
-The Remote Connection feature in Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7 lets an IT administrator run the DaRT tools remotely on an end-user computer. After certain information is provided by the end user (or by a helpdesk professional working on the end-user computer), the IT administrator or helpdesk agent can take control of the end user's computer and run the necessary DaRT tools remotely.
-
-**Important**
-The two computers establishing a remote connection must be part of the same network.
-
-
-
-**To recover a remote computer by using DaRT**
-
-1. Boot an end-user computer by using the DaRT recovery image.
-
- You will typically use one of the following methods to boot into DaRT to recover a remote computer, depending on how you deploy the DaRT recovery image. For more information about deploying the DaRT recovery image, see [Deploying the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image](deploying-the-dart-70-recovery-image-dart-7.md).
-
- - Boot into DaRT from a recovery partition on the problem computer.
-
- - Boot into DaRT from a remote partition on the network.
-
- For information about the advantages and disadvantages of each method, see [Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image](planning-how-to-save-and-deploy-the-dart-70-recovery-image.md).
-
- Whichever method that you use to boot into DaRT, you must enable the boot device in the BIOS for the boot option or options that you want to make available to the end user.
-
- **Note**
- Configuring the BIOS is unique, depending on the kind of hard disk drive, network adapters, and other hardware that is used in your organization.
-
-
-
-2. As the computer is booting into the DaRT recovery image, the **NetStart** dialog box appears. You are asked whether you want to initialize network services. If you click **Yes**, it is assumed that a DHCP server is present on the network and an attempt is made to obtain an IP address from the server. If the network uses static IP addresses instead of DHCP, you can later use the **TCP/IP Configuration** tool in DaRT to specify a static IP address.
-
- To skip the network initialization process, click **No**.
-
-3. Following the network initialization dialog box, you are asked whether you want to remap the drive letters. When you run Windows online, the system volume is typically mapped to drive C. However, when you run Windows offline under WinRE, the original system volume might be mapped to another drive, and this can cause confusion. If you decide to remap, DaRT tries to map the offline drive letters to match the online drive letters. Remapping is performed only if an offline operating system is selected later in the startup process.
-
-4. Following the remapping dialog box, a **System Recovery Options** dialog box appears and asks you to select a keyboard layout. Then it displays the system root directory, the kind of operating system installed, and the partition size. If you do not see your operating system listed, and suspect that the lack of drivers is a possible cause of the failure, click **Load Drivers** to load the suspect drivers. This prompts you to insert the installation media for the device and to select the driver. Select the installation that you want to repair or diagnose, and then click **Next**.
-
- **Note**
- If the Windows Recovery Environment (WinRE) detects or suspects that Windows 7 did not start correctly the last time that it was tried, **Startup Repair** might start to run automatically. For information about this situation including how to resolve it, see [Troubleshooting DaRT 7.0](troubleshooting-dart-70-new-ia.md).
-
-
-
-~~~
-If any of the registry hives are corrupted or missing, Registry Editor, and several other DaRT utilities, will have limited functionality. If no operating system is selected, some tools will not be available.
-
-The **System Recovery Options** window appears and lists various recovery tools.
-~~~
-
-5. On the **System Recovery Options** window, select **Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** to open the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window.
-
-6. On the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window, click **Remote Connection** to open the **DaRT Remote Connection** window. If you are prompted to give the help desk remote access, click **OK**.
-
- The DaRT Remote Connection window opens and displays a ticket number, IP address, and port information.
-
-7. On the helpdesk agent computer, open the **DaRT Remote Connection Viewer**.
-
- Click **Start**, click **All Programs**, click **Microsoft DaRT 7**, and then click **DaRT Remote Connection Viewer**.
-
-8. In the **DaRT Remote Connection** window, enter the required ticket, IP address, and port information.
-
- **Note**
- This information is created on the end-user computer and must be provided by the end user. There might be multiple IP addresses to choose from, depending on how many are available on the end-user computer.
-
-
-
-9. Click **Connect**.
-
-The IT administrator now assumes control of the end-user computer and can run the DaRT tools remotely.
-
-**Note**
-A file is provided that is named inv32.xml and contains remote connection information, such as the port number and IP address. By default, the file is typically located at %windir%\\system32.
-
-
-
-**To customize the Remote Connection process**
-
-1. You can customize the Remote Connection process by editing the winpeshl.ini file. For more information about how to edit the winpeshl.ini file, see [Winpeshl.ini Files](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=219413).
-
- Specify the following commands and parameters to customize how a remote connection is established with an end-user computer:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Command
-
Parameter
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
RemoteRecovery.exe
-
-nomessage
-
Specifies that the confirmation prompt is not displayed. Remote Connection continues just as if the end user had responded "Yes" to the confirmation prompt.
-
-
-
WaitForConnection.exe
-
none
-
Prevents a custom script from continuing until either Remote Connection is not running or a valid connection is established with the end-user computer.
-
- Important
This command serves no function if it is specified independently. It must be specified in a script to function correctly.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-2. The following is an example of a winpeshl.ini file that is customized to open the **Remote Connection** tool as soon as an attempt is made to boot into DaRT:
-
- ```ini
- [LaunchApps]
- "%windir%\system32\netstart.exe -network -remount"
- "cmd /C start %windir%\system32\RemoteRecovery.exe -nomessage"
- "%windir%\system32\WaitForConnection.exe"
- "%SYSTEMDRIVE%\sources\recovery\recenv.exe"
- ```
-
-**To run the Remote Connection Viewer at the command prompt**
-
-1. You can run the **DaRT Remote Connection Viewer** at the command prompt by specifying the **DartRemoteViewer.exe** command and by using the following parameters:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
-ticket=<ticketnumber>
-
Where <ticketnumber> is the ticket number, including the dashes, that is generated by Remote Connection.
-
-
-
-ipaddress=<ipaddress>
-
Where <ipaddress> is the IP address that is generated by Remote Connection.
-
-
-
-port=<port>
-
Where <port> is the port that corresponds to the specified IP address.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Note**
-The variables for these parameters are created on the end-user computer and must be provided by the end user.
-~~~
-
-
-
-2. If all three parameters are specified and the data is valid, a connection is immediately tried when the program starts. If any parameter is not valid, the program starts as if there were no parameters specified.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Recovering Computers Using DaRT 7.0](recovering-computers-using-dart-70-dart-7.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-in-stand-alone-mode-on-a-computer-other-than-an-end-user-computer-dart-7.md b/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-in-stand-alone-mode-on-a-computer-other-than-an-end-user-computer-dart-7.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 943522849f..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-in-stand-alone-mode-on-a-computer-other-than-an-end-user-computer-dart-7.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,57 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Run the Crash Analyzer in Stand-alone Mode on a Computer Other than an End-user Computer
-description: How to Run the Crash Analyzer in Stand-alone Mode on a Computer Other than an End-user Computer
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 881d573f-2f18-4c5f-838e-2f5320179f94
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Run the Crash Analyzer in Stand-alone Mode on a Computer Other than an End-user Computer
-
-
-If you cannot access the Microsoft Debugging Tools for Windows or the symbol files on the end-user computer, you can copy the dump file from the problem computer and analyze it on a computer that has the stand-alone version of Crash Analyzer installed, such as a helpdesk administrator’s computer.
-
-**To run the Crash Analyzer in stand-alone mode**
-
-1. On a computer with DaRT 7 installed, click **Start** / **All Programs** / **Microsoft DaRT 7**.
-
-2. Provide the required information for the following:
-
- - Microsoft Debugging Tools for Windows
-
- - Symbol files
-
- For more information about symbol files, see, [How to Ensure that Crash Analyzer Can Access Symbol Files](how-to-ensure-that-crash-analyzer-can-access-symbol-files-dart-7.md).
-
- - A crash dump file
-
- **Note**
- Use the Search tool in DaRT 7 to locate the copied crash dump file.
-
-
-
-3. The **Crash Analyzer** scans the crash dump file and reports a probable cause of the crash. You can view more information about the crash, such as the specific crash message and description, the drivers loaded at the time of the crash, and the full output of the analysis.
-
-4. Decide upon an appropriate strategy to resolve the problem. This may require disabling or updating the device driver that caused the crash by using the **Services and Drivers** node of the **Computer Management** tool in DaRT.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer](diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer--dart-7.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-on-an-end-user-computer-dart-7.md b/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-on-an-end-user-computer-dart-7.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 857157396c..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-on-an-end-user-computer-dart-7.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Run the Crash Analyzer on an End-user Computer
-description: How to Run the Crash Analyzer on an End-user Computer
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 40af4ead-6588-4a81-8eaa-3dc00c397e1d
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Run the Crash Analyzer on an End-user Computer
-
-
-Typically, you run Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7 Crash Analyzer from the Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset window on an end-user computer that has problems. The Crash Analyzer tries to locate the Debugging Tools for Windows on the problem computer. If the directory path dialog box is empty, you must enter the location or browse to the location of the Debugging Tools for Windows (you can download the files from Microsoft). You must also provide a path to where the symbol files are located.
-
-**To open and run the Crash Analyzer on an end-user computer**
-
-1. On the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window on an end-user computer, click **Crash Analyzer**.
-
-2. Provide the required information for the following:
-
- - Microsoft Debugging Tools for Windows
-
- - Symbol files
-
- For more information about symbol files, see, [How to Ensure that Crash Analyzer Can Access Symbol Files](how-to-ensure-that-crash-analyzer-can-access-symbol-files-dart-7.md).
-
- - A crash dump file
-
- Follow these steps to determine the location of the crash dump file:
-
- 1. Open the **System Properties** window.
-
- Click **Start**, type sysdm.cpl, and then press Enter.
-
- 2. Click the **Advanced** tab.
-
- 3. In the **Startup and Recovery** area, click **Settings**.
-
- **Note**
- If you do not have access to the **System Properties** window, you can search for dump files on the end-user computer by using the **Search** tool in DaRT.
-
-
-
-3. The **Crash Analyzer** scans the crash dump file and reports a probable cause of the crash. You can view more information about the crash, such as the specific crash message and description, the drivers loaded at the time of the crash, and the full output of the analysis.
-
-4. Decide upon an appropriate strategy to resolve the problem. This may require disabling or updating the device driver that caused the crash by using the **Services and Drivers** node of the **Computer Management** tool in DaRT.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer](diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer--dart-7.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-use-the-dart-recovery-image-wizard-to-create-the-recovery-image-dart-7.md b/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-use-the-dart-recovery-image-wizard-to-create-the-recovery-image-dart-7.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 28abed205c..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/how-to-use-the-dart-recovery-image-wizard-to-create-the-recovery-image-dart-7.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,190 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Use the DaRT Recovery Image Wizard to Create the Recovery Image
-description: How to Use the DaRT Recovery Image Wizard to Create the Recovery Image
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 1b8ef983-fff9-4d75-a2f6-53120c5c00c9
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Use the DaRT Recovery Image Wizard to Create the Recovery Image
-
-
-Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7 includes the **DaRT Recovery Image Wizard** that is used in Windows to create a bootable International Organization for Standardization (ISO) image. An ISO image is a file that represents the raw contents of a CD.
-
-The **DaRT Recovery Image Wizard** requires the following information:
-
-- **Boot Image**˚˚You must provide the path of a Windows 7 DVD or Windows 7 source files that are required to create the DaRT recovery image.
-
-- **Tool Selection**˚˚You can select the tools to include on the DaRT recovery image.
-
-- **Remote Connections**˚˚You can select whether you want the DaRT recovery image to include the ability to establish a remote connection between the helpdesk and the end-user computer.
-
-- **Debugging Tools for Windows**˚˚You are asked to provide the location of the Debugging Tools for Windows.
-
-- **Definitions for Standalone System Sweeper**˚˚You can decide whether to download the latest definitions at the time that you create the recovery image or download the definitions later.
-
-- **Drivers**˚˚You are asked whether you want to add drivers to the ISO image.
-
-- **Additional Files**˚˚You can add files to the ISO image that might help diagnose problems.
-
-- **ISO Image Location**˚˚You are asked to specify where the ISO image should be located.
-
-- **CD/DVD Drive**˚˚You are asked to specify whether the CD or DVD drive should be used to burn the CD or DVD.
-
-**Note**
-The ISO image size can vary, depending on the tools that were selected in the **DaRT Recovery Image Wizard**.
-
-
-
-## To create the recovery image using the DaRT Recovery Image Wizard
-
-
-Follow these instructions to use the **DaRT Recovery Image Wizard** to create the DaRT recovery image.
-
-### To select the tools to include on the DaRT recovery image
-
-The **DaRT Recovery Image Wizard** presents a **Tool Selection** dialog box. You can select or remove tools from the list of tools to be included on the DaRT recovery image by highlighting a tool and then clicking the **Enable** or **Disable** buttons.
-
-After you have selected all the tools that you want to include on the recovery image, click **Next**.
-
-### To add the option to allow remote connectivity
-
-You can select the **Allow remote connections** check box to provide the option in the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window to establish a remote connection between the helpdesk agent and an end-user computer. After a helpdesk agent establishes a remote connection, they can run the DaRT tools on the end-user computer from a remote location.
-
-You can select the **Specify the port number** check box to enter a specific port number that will be used when establishing a remote connection. You can specify a port number between 1 and 65535. We recommend that the port number be 1024 or higher to minimize the possibility of a conflict.
-
-You can also create a customized message that an end user will receive when they establish a remote connection. The message can be a maximum of 2048 characters.
-
-For more information about remotely running the DaRT tools, see [How to Recover Remote Computers Using the DaRT Recovery Image](how-to-recover-remote-computers-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-7.md).
-
-### To add the Debugging Tools for Windows to the DaRT recovery image
-
-In the **Crash Analyzer** dialog box of the **DaRT Recovery Image Wizard**, you are asked to specify the location of the Debugging Tools for Windows. If you do not have a copy of the tools, you can download them from Microsoft. The following link to the download page is provided in the wizard: [Download and Install Debugging Tools for Windows](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=99934).
-
-You can either specify the location of the debugging tools on the computer where you are running the **DaRT Recovery Image Wizard**, or you can decide to use the tools that are located on the destination computer. If you decide to use a copy on another computer, you must make sure that the tools are installed on each computer on which you are diagnosing a crash.
-
-**Note**
-If you include the **Crash Analyzer** in the ISO image, we recommend that you also include the Debugging Tools for Windows.
-
-
-
-Follow these steps to add the Debugging Tools for Windows:
-
-1. (Optional) Click the hyperlink to download the Debugging Tools for Windows.
-
-2. Select one of the following options:
-
- - **Use the Debugging Tools for Windows in the following location**. If you select this option, you can browse to the location of the tools.
-
- - **Locate the Debugging Tools for Windows on the system that you are repairing**. If you select this option, the **Crash Analyzer** will not work if the Debugging Tools for Windows are not found on the problem computer.
-
-3. After you have finished, click **Next**.
-
-### To add definitions for Standalone System Sweeper to the DaRT recovery image
-
-Definitions are a repository of known malware and other potentially unwanted software. Because malware is being continually developed, **Standalone System Sweeper** relies on current definitions to determine whether software that is trying to install, run, or change settings on a computer is potentially unwanted or malicious software.
-
-To include the latest definitions in the DaRT recovery image (recommended), click **Yes, download the latest definitions.** The definition update starts automatically. You must be connected to the Internet to complete this process.
-
-To skip the definition update, click **No, manually download definitions later**. Definitions will not be included in the DaRT recovery image.
-
-If you decide not to include the latest definitions on the recovery image, or if the definitions included on the recovery image are no longer current by the time that you are ready to use **Standalone System Sweeper**, obtain the latest definitions before you begin a scan by following the instructions that are provided in the **Standalone System Sweeper**.
-
-**Important**
-You cannot scan if there are no definitions.
-
-
-
-After you have finished, click **Next**.
-
-### To add drivers to the DaRT recovery image
-
-**Caution**
-By default, when you add a driver to the DaRT recovery image, all additional files and subfolders that are located in that folder are added into the recovery image. For more information, see [Troubleshooting DaRT 7.0](troubleshooting-dart-70-new-ia.md).
-
-
-
-You should include additional drivers on the recovery image for DaRT 7 that you may need when repairing a computer. These may typically include storage or network controllers that are not included on the Windows DVD.
-
-**Important**
-When you select drivers to include, be aware that wireless connectivity (such as Bluetooth or 802.11a/b/g/n) is not supported in DaRT.
-
-
-
-**To add a storage or network controller driver to the recovery image**
-
-1. In the **Additional Drivers** dialog box of the **DaRT Recovery Image Wizard**, click **Add Device**.
-
-2. Browse to the file to be added for the driver, and then click **Open**.
-
- **Note**
- The **driver** file is provided by the manufacturer of the storage or network controller.
-
-
-
-3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for every driver that you want to include.
-
-4. After you have finished, click **Next**.
-
-### To add files to the DaRT recovery image
-
-Follow these steps to add files to the recovery image so that you can use them to diagnose computer problems.
-
-1. In the **Additional Files** dialog box of the **DaRT Recovery Image Wizard**, click **Show Files**. This opens an Explorer window that displays the folder that holds the shared files.
-
-2. Create a subfolder in the folder that is listed in the dialog box.
-
-3. Copy the files that you want to the new subfolder.
-
-4. After you have finished, click **Next.**
-
-### To select a location for the ISO that contains the DaRT recovery image
-
-Follow these steps to specify the location where the ISO image is created:
-
-1. In the **Create Startup Image** dialog box of the **DaRT Recovery Image Wizard**, click **Browse**.
-
-2. Browse to the preferred location in the **Save As** window, and then click **Save**.
-
-3. After you have finished, click **Next**.
-
-The size of the ISO image will vary, depending on the tools that you select and the files that you add in the wizard.
-
-The wizard requires the ISO image to have an **.iso** file name extension because most programs that burn a CD or DVD require that extension. If you do not specify a different location, the ISO image is created on your desktop with the name **DaRT70.ISO**.
-
-### To burn the recovery image to a CD or DVD
-
-If the **DaRT Recovery Image Wizard** detects a compatible CD-RW drive on your computer, it offers to burn the ISO image to a disc for you. If you want to burn a CD or DVD and the wizard does not recognize your drive, you must use another program, such as the program that was included with your drive. You can use a duplicator, a duplicating service, or CD or DVD-burning software to make any additional copies.
-
-1. In the **Burn to a recordable CD/DVD** dialog box of the **DaRT Recovery Image Wizard**, select **Burn the image to the following recordable CD/DVD drive**.
-
-2. Select the CD or DVD drive.
-
- **Note**
- If a drive is not recognized and you install a new drive, you can click **Refresh Drive List** to force the wizard to update the list of available drives.
-
-
-
-3. Click **Next**.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Creating the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image](creating-the-dart-70-recovery-image-dart-7.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/images/checklistbox.gif b/mdop/dart-v7/images/checklistbox.gif
deleted file mode 100644
index 8af13c51d1..0000000000
Binary files a/mdop/dart-v7/images/checklistbox.gif and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/index.md b/mdop/dart-v7/index.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ba12a07c9d..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 7 Administrator's Guide
-description: Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 7 Administrator's Guide
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: bf89eccd-fc03-48ff-9019-a8640e11dd99
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 04/19/2017
----
-
-
-# Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 7 Administrator's Guide
-
-
-Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7 lets you diagnose and repair a computer that cannot be started or that has problems starting as expected. By using DaRT, you can recover end-user computers that have become unusable, diagnose probable causes of issues, and quickly repair unbootable or locked-out computers. When it is necessary, you can also quickly restore important lost files and detect and remove malware, even when the computer is not online.
-
-DaRT is an important part of the Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack (MDOP), a dynamic solution available to Software Assurance customers that helps reduce software installation costs, enables delivery of applications as services, and helps manage and control enterprise desktop environments.
-
-[Getting Started with DaRT 7.0](getting-started-with-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-[About DaRT 7.0](about-dart-70-new-ia.md)**|**[Overview of the Tools in DaRT 7.0](overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-70-new-ia.md)**|**[Accessibility for DaRT 7.0](accessibility-for-dart-70.md)
-
-[Planning for DaRT 7.0](planning-for-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-[Planning to Deploy DaRT 7.0](planning-to-deploy-dart-70.md)**|**[DaRT 7.0 Supported Configurations](dart-70-supported-configurations-dart-7.md)**|**[Planning to Create the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image](planning-to-create-the-dart-70-recovery-image.md)**|**[Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image](planning-how-to-save-and-deploy-the-dart-70-recovery-image.md)**|**[DaRT 7.0 Planning Checklist](dart-70-planning-checklist-dart-7.md)
-
-[Deploying DaRT 7.0](deploying-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-[Deploying DaRT 7.0 to Administrator Computers](deploying-dart-70-to-administrator-computers-dart-7.md)**|**[Creating the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image](creating-the-dart-70-recovery-image-dart-7.md)**|**[Deploying the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image](deploying-the-dart-70-recovery-image-dart-7.md)**|**[DaRT 7.0 Deployment Checklist](dart-70-deployment-checklist-dart-7.md)
-
-[Operations for DaRT 7.0](operations-for-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-[Recovering Computers Using DaRT 7.0](recovering-computers-using-dart-70-dart-7.md)**|**[Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer](diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer--dart-7.md)**|**[Security Considerations for DaRT 7.0](security-considerations-for-dart-70-dart-7.md)
-
-[Troubleshooting DaRT 7.0](troubleshooting-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-[Technical Reference for DaRT 7.0](technical-reference-for-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-### More Information
-
-[Release Notes for DaRT 7.0](release-notes-for-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-View updated product information and known issues for DaRT 7.
-
-[MDOP TechCenter Page](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=225286)
-Learn about the latest MDOP information and resources.
-
-[MDOP Information Experience](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=236032)
-Find documentation, videos, and other resources for MDOP technologies. You can also [send us feedback](mailto:MDOPDocs@microsoft.com) or learn about updates by following us on [Facebook](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=242445) or [Twitter](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=242447).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/operations-for-dart-70-new-ia.md b/mdop/dart-v7/operations-for-dart-70-new-ia.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1a7b02146b..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/operations-for-dart-70-new-ia.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,57 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Operations for DaRT 7.0
-description: Operations for DaRT 7.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 5566d817-fc14-4408-ba01-1d87fbc132d9
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Operations for DaRT 7.0
-
-
-This section of the Administrator’s Guide includes information about the various types of Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7 administration and operating tasks that are typically performed by an administrator. This section also includes step-by-step procedures to help you successfully perform those tasks.
-
-## Operations information
-
-
-- [Recovering Computers Using DaRT 7.0](recovering-computers-using-dart-70-dart-7.md)
-
- This section provides information to help you recover computers using the DaRT 7 recovery image.
-
-- [Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer](diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer--dart-7.md)
-
- This section provides information to help you use the DaRT 7 Crash Analyzer to diagnose system failures.
-
-- [Security Considerations for DaRT 7.0](security-considerations-for-dart-70-dart-7.md)
-
- This section provides information to help you follow security best practices while using DaRT 7.
-
-## Other resources for DaRT operations
-
-
-- [Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 7 Administrator's Guide](index.md)
-
-- [Getting Started with DaRT 7.0](getting-started-with-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-- [Planning for DaRT 7.0](planning-for-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-- [Deploying DaRT 7.0](deploying-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-- [Troubleshooting DaRT 7.0](troubleshooting-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-70-new-ia.md b/mdop/dart-v7/overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-70-new-ia.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 30c1b4a4a7..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-70-new-ia.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,153 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Overview of the Tools in DaRT 7.0
-description: Overview of the Tools in DaRT 7.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 67c5991e-cbe6-4ce9-9fe5-f1761369d1fe
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Overview of the Tools in DaRT 7.0
-
-
-From the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window in Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7, you can start any of the individual tools that were included when the DaRT recovery image was created. For information about how to access the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window, see [How to Recover Local Computers Using the DaRT Recovery Image](how-to-recover-local-computers-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-7.md).
-
-If it is available, you can use the **Solution Wizard** on the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window to select the tool that best addresses your particular issue, based on a brief interview.
-
-## Exploring the DaRT Tools
-
-
-This section describes the various tools that are part of DaRT.
-
-### Registry Editor
-
-You can use **Registry Editor** to access and change the registry of the Windows operating system that you are analyzing or repairing. This includes adding, removing, and editing keys and values, and importing registry (.reg) files.
-
-**Caution**
-This topic describes how to change the Windows registry by using Registry Editor. If you change the Windows registry incorrectly, you can cause serious problems that might require you to reinstall Windows. You should make a backup copy of the registry files (System.dat and User.dat) before you change the registry. Microsoft cannot guarantee that the problems that might occur when you change the registry can be resolved. Change the registry at your own risk.
-
-
-
-### Locksmith
-
-The **Locksmith Wizard** lets you set or change the password for any local account on the Windows operating system that you are analyzing or repairing. You do not have to know the current password. However, the password that you set must comply with any requirements that are defined by a local Group Policy object. This includes password length and complexity.
-
-You can use **Locksmith** when the password for a local account, such as the local Administrator account, is unknown. You cannot use **Locksmith** to set passwords for domain accounts.
-
-### Crash Analyzer
-
-Use the **Crash Analyzer Wizard** to quickly determine the cause of a computer crash by analyzing the memory dump file on the Windows operating system that you are repairing. **Crash Analyzer** examines the crash dump file for the driver that caused a computer to fail. Then, you can disable the problem device driver by using the **Services and Drivers** node in the **Computer Management** tool.
-
-The **Crash Analyzer Wizard** requires the Debugging Tools for Windows and symbol files for the operating system that you are repairing. You can include both requirements when you create the DaRT recovery image. If they are not included on the recovery image and you do not have access to them on the computer that you are repairing, you can copy the memory dump file to another computer and use the stand-alone version of **Crash Analyzer** to diagnose the problem.
-
-Running **Crash Analyzer** is a good idea even if you plan to reimage the computer. The image could have a defective driver that is causing problems in your environment. By running **Crash Analyzer**, you can identify problem drivers and improve the image stability.
-
-For more information about **Crash Analyzer**, see [Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer](diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer--dart-7.md).
-
-### File Restore
-
-**File Restore** lets you try to restore files that were accidentally deleted or that were too big to fit in the Recycle Bin. **File Restore** is not limited to regular disk volumes, but can find and restore files on lost volumes or on volumes that are encrypted by BitLocker.
-
-### Disk Commander
-
-**Disk Commander** lets you recover and repair disk partitions or volumes by using one of the following recovery processes:
-
-- Restore the master boot record (MBR)
-
-- Recover one or more lost volumes
-
-- Restore partition tables from **Disk Commander** backup
-
-- Save partition tables to **Disk Commander** backup
-
-**Warning**
-We recommend that you back up a disk before you use **Disk Commander** to repair it. By using **Disk Commander**, you can potentially damage volumes and make them inaccessible. Additionally, changes to one volume can affect other volumes because volumes on a disk share a partition table.
-
-
-
-### Disk Wipe
-
-You can use **Disk Wipe** to delete all data from a disk or volume, even the data that is left behind after you reformat a hard disk drive. **Disk Wipe** lets you select from either a single-pass overwrite or a four-pass overwrite, which meets current U.S. Department of Defense standards.
-
-**Warning**
-After wiping a disk or volume, you cannot recover the data. Verify the size and label of a volume before erasing it.
-
-
-
-### Computer Management
-
-**Computer Management** is a collection of Windows administrative tools that help you troubleshoot a problem computer. You can use the **Computer Management** tools in DaRT to view system information and event logs, manage disks, list autoruns, and manage services and drivers. The **Computer Management** console is customized to help you diagnose and repair problems that might be preventing the Windows operating system from starting.
-
-### Explorer
-
-The **Explorer** tool lets you browse the computer’s file system and network shares so that you can remove important data that the user stored on the local drive before you try to repair or reimage the computer. And because you can map drive letters to network shares, you can easily copy and move files from the computer to the network for safekeeping or from the network to the computer to restore them.
-
-### Solution Wizard
-
-The **Solution Wizard** presents a series of questions and then recommends the best tool for the situation, based on your answers. This wizard helps you determine which tool to use when you are not familiar with the tools in DaRT.
-
-### TCP/IP Config
-
-When you boot a problem computer into DaRT, it is set to automatically obtain its TCP/IP configuration (IP address and DNS server) from Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). If DHCP is unavailable, you can manually configure TCP/IP by using the **TCP/IP Config** tool. You first select a network adapter, and then configure the IP address and DNS server for that adapter.
-
-### Hotfix Uninstall
-
-The **Hotfix Uninstall Wizard** lets you remove hotfixes or service packs from the Windows operating system on the computer that you are repairing. Use this tool when a hotfix or service pack is suspected in preventing the operating system from starting.
-
-We recommend that you uninstall only one hotfix at a time, even though the tool lets you uninstall more than one.
-
-**Important**
-Programs that were installed or updated after a hotfix was installed might not work correctly after you uninstall a hotfix.
-
-
-
-### SFC Scan
-
-The **SFC Scan** tool starts the **System File Repair Wizard** and lets you repair system files that are preventing the installed Windows operating system from starting. The **System File Repair Wizard** can automatically repair system files that are corrupted or missing, or it can prompt you before it performs any repairs.
-
-### Search
-
-Before reimaging a computer, recovering files from the local hard disk is important, especially when the user might not have backed up or stored the files elsewhere.
-
-The **Search** tool opens a **File Search** window that you can use to find documents when you do not know the file path or to search for general kinds of files across all local hard disks. You can search for specific file-name patterns in specific paths. You can also limit results to a date range or size range.
-
-### Standalone System Sweeper
-
-**Important**
-Environments with the Standalone System Sweeper deployed should instead use the Windows Defender Offline (WDO) protection image for malware detection. Because of how the Standalone System Sweeper tool integrates into DaRT, all supported DaRT version deployments cannot apply these anti-malware updates to their DaRT images.
-
-
-
-The **Standalone System Sweeper** can help detect malware and unwanted software and warn you of security risks. You can use this tool to scan a computer for and remove malware even when the installed Windows operating system is not running. When the **Standalone System Sweeper** detects malicious or unwanted software, it prompts you to remove, quarantine, or allow for each item.
-
-Malware that uses rootkits can mask itself from the running operating system. If a rootkit-enabled virus or spyware is in a computer, most real-time scanning and removal tools can no longer see it or remove it. Because you boot the problem computer into DaRT and the installed operating system is offline, you can detect the rootkit without it being able to mask itself.
-
-### Remote Connection
-
-The **Remote Connection** tool in DaRT lets you remotely run the DaRT tools on an end-user computer. After certain specific information is provided by the end user (or by a helpdesk professional working on the end-user computer), the IT administrator can take control of the end user's computer and run the necessary DaRT tools remotely.
-
-**Important**
-The two computers establishing a remote connection must be part of the same network.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Getting Started with DaRT 7.0](getting-started-with-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/planning-for-dart-70-new-ia.md b/mdop/dart-v7/planning-for-dart-70-new-ia.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0e8009edfe..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/planning-for-dart-70-new-ia.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning for DaRT 7.0
-description: Planning for DaRT 7.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 9a60cb08-5efb-40fe-b1e3-9ece831f3b43
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning for DaRT 7.0
-
-
-The goal of deployment planning is to successfully and efficiently deploy a product so that it does not disrupt your users or the network.
-
-There are a number of different deployment configurations and prerequisites that you must consider before you create your deployment plan. This section includes information that can help you gather the information that you must have to formulate a deployment plan that best meets your business requirements.
-
-## Planning information
-
-
-- [Planning to Deploy DaRT 7.0](planning-to-deploy-dart-70.md)
-
- There are a number of different deployment configurations and prerequisites that you must consider before you create your deployment plan. This section includes information that can help you gather the information that you must have to formulate a deployment plan that best meets your business requirements.
-
-- [DaRT 7.0 Planning Checklist](dart-70-planning-checklist-dart-7.md)
-
- This checklist can be used to help you plan for preparing your computing environment for DaRT 7 deployment.
-
-## Other resources for DaRT 7 Planning
-
-
-- [Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 7 Administrator's Guide](index.md)
-
-- [Getting Started with DaRT 7.0](getting-started-with-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-- [Deploying DaRT 7.0](deploying-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-- [Operations for DaRT 7.0](operations-for-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-- [Troubleshooting DaRT 7.0](troubleshooting-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/planning-how-to-save-and-deploy-the-dart-70-recovery-image.md b/mdop/dart-v7/planning-how-to-save-and-deploy-the-dart-70-recovery-image.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ef95afbef5..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/planning-how-to-save-and-deploy-the-dart-70-recovery-image.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,88 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image
-description: Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: d96e9363-6186-4fc3-9b83-ba15ed9694a5
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image
-
-
-Use the information in this section when you plan for saving and deploying the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7 recovery image.
-
-## Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image
-
-
-You can save and deploy the DaRT recovery image by using the following methods. When you are determining the method that you will use, consider the advantages and disadvantages of each. Also, consider how you want to use DaRT in your enterprise.
-
-**Note**
-You might want to use more than one method in your organization. For example, you can boot into DaRT from a remote partition for most situations and have a USB flash drive available in case the end-user computer cannot connect to the network.
-
-
-
-The following table shows some advantages and disadvantages of each method of using DaRT in your organization.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Method to Boot into DaRT
-
Advantages
-
Disadvantages
-
-
-
-
-
From a CD or DVD
-
Supports scenarios in which the master boot record (MBR) is corrupted and you cannot access the hard disk. Also supports cases in which there is no network connection.
-
This is most familiar to users of earlier versions of DaRT, and a CD or DVD can be burned directly from the DaRT Recovery Image Wizard.
-
Requires that someone with access to the CD or DVD is physically at the end-user computer to boot into DaRT.
-
-
-
From a USB flash drive (UFD)
-
Provides same advantages as booting from a CD or DVD and also provides support to computers that have no CD or DVD drive.
-
Requires you to format the UFD before you can use it to boot into DaRT. Also requires that someone with access to the UFD is physically at the end-user computer to boot into DaRT.
-
-
-
From a remote (network) partition
-
Lets you boot into DaRT without needing a CD, DVD, or UFD. Also allows for easy upgrades of DaRT because there is only one file location to update.
-
Does not work if the end-user computer is not connected to the network.
-
Widely available to end users and might require additional security considerations when you are creating the recovery image.
-
-
-
From a recovery partition
-
Lets you boot into DaRT without needing a CD, DVD, or UFD that includes instances in which there is no network connectivity.
-
Also, can be implemented and managed as part of your standard Windows image process by using automated distribution tools, such as System Center Configuration Manager.
-
When updating DaRT, requires you to update all computers in your enterprise instead of just one partition (on the network) or device (CD, DVD, or UFD).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy DaRT 7.0](planning-to-deploy-dart-70.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/planning-to-create-the-dart-70-recovery-image.md b/mdop/dart-v7/planning-to-create-the-dart-70-recovery-image.md
deleted file mode 100644
index fb3aeeb596..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/planning-to-create-the-dart-70-recovery-image.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning to Create the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image
-description: Planning to Create the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: e5d49bee-ae4e-467b-9976-c1203f6355f9
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning to Create the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image
-
-
-Use the information in this section when you plan for creating the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7 recovery image.
-
-## Planning to Create the DaRT 7 Recovery Image
-
-
-When you create the DaRT recovery image, you have to decide which tools to include on the image. When you make that decision, remember that end users might have access occasionally to the various DaRT tools. For more information about the DaRT tools, see [Overview of the Tools in DaRT 7.0](overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-70-new-ia.md). For more information about how to help create a secure recovery image, see [Security Considerations for DaRT 7.0](security-considerations-for-dart-70-dart-7.md).
-
-When you create the DaRT recovery image, you will also specify whether you want to include additional drivers or files. Determine the locations of any additional drivers or files that you want to include on the DaRT recovery image.
-
-## Prerequisites
-
-
-The following items are required or recommended for creating the DaRT recovery image:
-
-- Windows 7 source files
-
- You must provide the path of a Windows 7 DVD or of Windows 7 source files. Windows 7 source files are required to create the DaRT recovery image.
-
-- Windows Debugging Tools for your platform
-
- Windows Debugging Tools are required when you run **Crash Analyzer** to determine the cause of a computer crash. We recommend that you specify the path of the Windows Debugging Tools at the time that you create the DaRT recovery image. If it is necessary, you can download the Windows Debugging Tools here: [Download and Install Debugging Tools for Windows](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=99934).
-
-- Optional: **Standalone System Sweeper** definitions
-
- The latest definitions for the **Standalone System Sweeper** are required when you run this tool. Although you can download the definitions when you run **Standalone System Sweeper**, we recommend that you download the latest definitions at the time you create the DaRT recovery image. In this manner, you can still run the tool with the latest definitions even if the problem computer does not have network connectivity.
-
-- Optional: Windows symbols files for use with **Crash Analyzer**
-
- Typically, debugging information is stored in a symbol file that is separate from the executable. You must have access to the symbol information when you debug an application that has stopped responding, for example if it crashed. For more information, see [Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer](diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer--dart-7.md).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy DaRT 7.0](planning-to-deploy-dart-70.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/planning-to-deploy-dart-70.md b/mdop/dart-v7/planning-to-deploy-dart-70.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 27eb83e0aa..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/planning-to-deploy-dart-70.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,70 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning to Deploy DaRT 7.0
-description: Planning to Deploy DaRT 7.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 05e97cdb-a8c2-46e4-9c75-a7d12fe26fe8
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning to Deploy DaRT 7.0
-
-
-There are a number of different deployment configurations and prerequisites that you must consider before you create your deployment plan. This section includes information that can help you gather the information that you must have to formulate a deployment plan that best meets your business requirements.
-
-Consider the following when you plan your Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7 installation:
-
-- When you install DaRT, you can either install all functionality on an IT administrator computer where you will perform all the tasks associated with running DaRT. Or you can install only the DaRT functionality that creates the recovery image on the IT administrator computer. Then, install the functionality used to run DaRT, such as the **DaRT Remote Connection Viewer** and **Crash Analyzer**, on a helpdesk agent computer.
-
-- To be able to run DaRT remotely, make sure that the helpdesk agent computer and all computers that you might be troubleshooting remotely are on the same network.
-
-- Before you roll out DaRT into production, you can first build a lab environment for testing. A test lab should include a minimum of two computers, one to act as the IT administrator/helpdesk agent computer and one to act as an end-user computer. Or, you can use three computers in your lab if you want to separate the IT administrator responsibilities from those of the helpdesk agent.
-
-## Review the supported configurations
-
-
-You should review the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7 Supported Configurations information to confirm that the computers you have selected for client or feature installation meet the minimum hardware and operating system requirements.
-
-[DaRT 7.0 Supported Configurations](dart-70-supported-configurations-dart-7.md)
-
-## Plan for creating the DaRT recovery image
-
-
-When you create the DaRT recovery image, you have to decide which tools to include on the image. When you make that decision, remember that end users might have access occasionally to the various DaRT tools. When you create the recovery image, you will also specify whether you want to include additional drivers or files. Determine the locations of any additional drivers or files that you want to include on the DaRT recovery image.
-
-You should be aware of the prerequisites and other additional planning recommendations for creating the DaRT recovery image.
-
-[Planning to Create the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image](planning-to-create-the-dart-70-recovery-image.md)
-
-## Plan for saving and deploying the DaRT recovery image
-
-
-Several methods can be used to save and deploy the DaRT recovery image. When you are determining the method that you will use, consider the advantages and disadvantages of each. Also, consider how you want to use DaRT in your enterprise.
-
-**Note**
-You might want to use more than one method in your organization. For example, you can boot into DaRT from a remote partition for most situations and have a USB flash drive available in case the end-user computer cannot connect to the network.
-
-
-
-[Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image](planning-how-to-save-and-deploy-the-dart-70-recovery-image.md)
-
-## Other resources for Planning to Deploy DaRT
-
-
-[Planning for DaRT 7.0](planning-for-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/recovering-computers-using-dart-70-dart-7.md b/mdop/dart-v7/recovering-computers-using-dart-70-dart-7.md
deleted file mode 100644
index fb6d52dd23..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/recovering-computers-using-dart-70-dart-7.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,76 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Recovering Computers Using DaRT 7.0
-description: Recovering Computers Using DaRT 7.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: bcded7ca-237b-4971-ac34-4394b05cbc50
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Recovering Computers Using DaRT 7.0
-
-
-There are two methods available to recover computers using Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7. You can either run the DaRT 7 recovery image locally or use The Remote Connection feature available in DaRT 7 to recover a remote computer. Both methods are described in more detail in this section.
-
-## Recover Local Computers by Using the DaRT Recovery Image
-
-
-To recover a local computer by using DaRT 7, you must be physically present at the end-user computer that is experiencing problems that require DaRT.
-
-You have several different methods to choose from to boot into DaRT, depending on how you deploy the DaRT recovery image.
-
-- Insert a DaRT recovery image CD, DVD, or USB flash drive into the problem computer and use it to boot into the computer.
-
-- Boot into DaRT from a recovery partition on the problem computer.
-
-- Boot into DaRT from a remote partition on the network.
-
-For information about the advantages and disadvantages of each method, see [Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT 7.0 Recovery Image](planning-how-to-save-and-deploy-the-dart-70-recovery-image.md).
-
-Whichever method that you use to boot into DaRT, you must enable the boot device in the BIOS for the boot option or options that you want to make available to the end user.
-
-**Note**
-Configuring the BIOS is unique, depending on the kind of hard disk drive, network adapters, and other hardware that is used in your organization.
-
-
-
-[How to Recover Local Computers Using the DaRT Recovery Image](how-to-recover-local-computers-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-7.md)
-
-## Recover Remote Computers by Using the DaRT Recovery Image
-
-
-The Remote Connection feature in DaRT lets an IT administrator run the DaRT tools remotely on an end-user computer. After certain information is provided by the end user (or by a helpdesk professional working on the end-user computer), the IT administrator or helpdesk agent can take control of the end user's computer and run the necessary DaRT tools remotely.
-
-**Important**
-The two computers establishing a remote connection must be part of the same network.
-
-
-
-The **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window includes the option to run DaRT on an end-user computer remotely from an administrator computer. The end user opens the DaRT tools on the problem computer and starts the remote session by clicking **Remote Connection**.
-
-The Remote Connection feature on the end-user computer creates the following connection information: a ticket number, a port, and a list of all available IP addresses. The ticket number and port are generated randomly.
-
-The IT administrator or helpdesk agent enters this information into the **DaRT Remote Connection Viewer** to establish the terminal services connection to the end-user computer. The terminal services connection that is established lets an IT administrator remotely interact with the DaRT tools on the end-user computer. The end-user computer then processes the connection information, shares its screen, and responds to instructions from the IT administrator computer.
-
-[How to Recover Remote Computers Using the DaRT Recovery Image](how-to-recover-remote-computers-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-7.md)
-
-## Other resources for recovering computers using DaRT 7
-
-
-[Operations for DaRT 7.0](operations-for-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/release-notes-for-dart-70-new-ia.md b/mdop/dart-v7/release-notes-for-dart-70-new-ia.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 19faaa9de5..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/release-notes-for-dart-70-new-ia.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,118 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Release Notes for DaRT 7.0
-description: Release Notes for DaRT 7.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: fad227d0-5c22-4efd-9187-0e5922f7250b
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Release Notes for DaRT 7.0
-
-
-**To search these release notes, press CTRL+F.**
-
-Read these release notes thoroughly before you install Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7.
-
-## About Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 7.0
-
-
-These release notes contain information that is required to successfully install DaRT 7 and contain information that is not available in the product documentation. If there is a difference between these release notes and other DaRT platform documentation, the latest change should be considered authoritative. These release notes supersede the content included with this product.
-
-## About the Product Documentation
-
-
-Documentation for Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7 is distributed with the product and on the Connect site.
-
-For detailed help about how to use the tools in DaRT 7, see the Help file available on the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** menu.
-
-## Providing feedback
-
-
-We are interested in your feedback on DaRT 7. You can send your feedback to dart7feedback@microsoft.com. This email address is not a support channel, but your feedback will help us to plan future changes for these tools to make them more useful to you in the future.
-
-## Protect Against Security Vulnerabilities and Viruses
-
-
-To help protect against security vulnerabilities and viruses, we recommend that you install the latest available security updates for any new software being installed. For more information, see [Microsoft Security](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=3482) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=3482).
-
-## Known Issues with DaRT 7.0
-
-
-### SFC Scan cannot start if Standalone System Sweeper is open
-
-If the Standalone System Sweeper is running, SFC Scan cannot start or run because of a resource conflict between the two tools.
-
-**Workaround:** Close the Standalone System Sweeper before you try to open or run the SFC Scan tool.
-
-### Unicode characters may not be displayed in file names
-
-If you delete a file that has Unicode characters in its file name and try to restore the file by using the File Restore tool, the file is not found. This only occurs when you use characters from a language other than the language of the Windows DVD that was used to create the recovery image.
-
-**Workaround:** Make sure that the language that is used by DaRT matches the language that is used by the operating system from which it is trying to restore files.
-
-### DaRT command-line installation may fail silently
-
-DaRT command-line installation fails silently if run with the quiet mode option unless it is run by using elevated administrator permissions.
-
-**Workaround:** Run the command-line installation by using elevated administrator permissions. DaRT installation supports the typical Windows Installer options for command-line installation. Please see [Command-Line Options](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=160689) for Windows Installer for more information about the several available switches.
-
-### File Search cannot move a folder to a different volume
-
-Moving folders between volumes is not supported by the File Search application. If you try to move a folder to a different volume in File Search, the following error is returned: "An error occurred while writing the file *<filename>*. Make sure that the drive has sufficient space and the destination path is accessible."
-
-**Workaround:** Use the Explorer to move a folder to a different volume.
-
-### Some data may not be available on computers where the drive letters are remapped
-
-This problem can occur on BitLocker-enabled computers and multiboot computers. This occurs because some information in the offline registry has hard-coded drive letters, and DaRT uses different letters for the same volumes. The typical effects include not having access to certain local user accounts in Registry Editor. Additionally, some tools may be unable to obtain properties that rely on resolving file paths.
-
-**Workaround:** Use the option to remap the drive letters as DaRT starts. This usually aligns the typical drive letters to what is expected.
-
-### Hotfix Uninstall might not uninstall certain updates
-
-Some updates and service packs cannot be uninstalled because they are marked as un-installable or because they need to be uninstalled from within Windows 7. In these instances, the Hotfix Uninstall tool may indicate that these updates have been uninstalled even though they have not been.
-
-**Workaround:** Uninstall these problematic updates from Windows 7.
-
-### Disk Wipe: Disks with spanned volumes, striped volumes, or mirrored volumes cannot be deleted
-
-Disk Wipe does not support deleting disks that are spanned, mirrored, or striped across one or more volumes.
-
-**Workaround:** Select and delete each disk in the volume separately.
-
-## Release Notes Copyright Information
-
-
-This document is provided “as-is”. Information and views expressed in this document, including URL and other Internet website references, may change without notice. You bear the risk of using it.
-
-Some examples depicted herein are provided for illustration only and are fictitious. No real association or connection is intended or should be inferred.
-
-This document does not provide you with any legal rights to any intellectual property in any Microsoft product. This document is confidential and proprietary to Microsoft. It is disclosed and can be used only pursuant to a nondisclosure agreement.
-
-
-
-Microsoft, Active Directory, ActiveSync, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows Server, and Windows Vista are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies.
-
-All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[About DaRT 7.0](about-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/security-considerations-for-dart-70-dart-7.md b/mdop/dart-v7/security-considerations-for-dart-70-dart-7.md
deleted file mode 100644
index bba2b7aa94..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/security-considerations-for-dart-70-dart-7.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,71 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Security Considerations for DaRT 7.0
-description: Security Considerations for DaRT 7.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 52ad7e6c-c169-4ba4-aa76-56335a585eb8
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Security Considerations for DaRT 7.0
-
-
-Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 7 includes functionality that lets an administrator run the DaRT tools remotely to resolve problems on an end-user computer. In earlier releases of DaRT, a help desk technician or administrator had to physically be at an end-user computer and boot into DaRT by using the CD or DVD that included the DaRT recovery image. Now, the help desk technician or administrator can perform the same procedures remotely.
-
-Also in DaRT 7, in addition to burning a CD or DVD, you are now able to save the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) image to a USB flash drive. You can also put the ISO image on a network or include its contents as a recovery partition on a computer hard disk.
-
-The **Remote Connection** feature in DaRT 7 lets end users access DaRT by using one of these new deployment methods. Therefore, they can more easily start DaRT and access the DaRT tools.
-
-The new functionalities in DaRT 7 provide much more flexibility in how you use DaRT in your enterprise. However, they also create their own set of security issues that must be addressed. We recommend that you consider the following security tips when you configure DaRT.
-
-## To help maintain security when you create the DaRT recovery image
-
-
-When you are creating the DaRT recovery image, you can select the tools that you want to include. For security reasons, you might want to restrict end-user access to the more powerful DaRT tools, such as Disk Wipe and Locksmith. In DaRT 7, you can disable certain tools during configuration and still make them available to helpdesk agents when the end user starts the Remote Connection feature.
-
-You can even configure the DaRT image so that the option to start a remote connection session is the only tool available to an end user.
-
-**Important**
-After the remote connection is established, all the tools that you included in the recovery image, including those unavailable to the end user, will become available to the helpdesk agent working on the end–user computer.
-
-
-
-For more information about including tools in the DaRT recovery image, see [How to Use the DaRT Recovery Image Wizard to Create the Recovery Image](how-to-use-the-dart-recovery-image-wizard-to-create-the-recovery-image-dart-7.md).
-
-## To help maintain security by encrypting the DaRT recovery image
-
-
-If you use one of the deployment options new in DaRT 7, for example, saving to a USB flash drive or creating a remote partition or a recovery partition, you can include your company’s preferred method of drive encryption on the ISO. This will help make sure that an end user cannot use the functionality of DaRT should they gain access to the recovery image. And it will also make sure that unauthorized users cannot boot into DaRT on computers that belong to someone else.
-
-Your encryption method should be deployed and enabled in all computers.
-
-**Note**
-DaRT 7 supports BitLocker natively.
-
-
-
-## To help maintain security between two computers during Remote Connection
-
-
-By default, the communication between two computers that have established a **Remote Connection** session may not be encrypted. Therefore, to help maintain security between the two computers, we recommend that both computers are a part of the same network.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for DaRT 7.0](operations-for-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/technical-reference-for-dart-70-new-ia.md b/mdop/dart-v7/technical-reference-for-dart-70-new-ia.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 71ac50f9ae..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/technical-reference-for-dart-70-new-ia.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Technical Reference for DaRT 7.0
-description: Technical Reference for DaRT 7.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: f55c7e5e-713a-42d1-84c9-88370155f934
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Technical Reference for DaRT 7.0
-
-
-This section includes technical reference information about Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 that provide additional information an administrator.
-
-## Other resources for DaRT operations
-
-
-- [Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 7 Administrator's Guide](index.md)
-
-- [Getting Started with DaRT 7.0](getting-started-with-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-- [Planning for DaRT 7.0](planning-for-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-- [Deploying DaRT 7.0](deploying-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-- [Operations for DaRT 7.0](operations-for-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-- [Troubleshooting DaRT 7.0](troubleshooting-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v7/troubleshooting-dart-70-new-ia.md b/mdop/dart-v7/troubleshooting-dart-70-new-ia.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6c38d06409..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v7/troubleshooting-dart-70-new-ia.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,92 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Troubleshooting DaRT 7.0
-description: Troubleshooting DaRT 7.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 24c50efa-e9ac-45c4-aca2-b1dcfe834fdd
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Troubleshooting DaRT 7.0
-
-
-Troubleshooting content is not included in the Administrator’s Guide for this product. Instead, you can find troubleshooting information for this product on the [TechNet Wiki](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=224905).
-
-## How to Find Troubleshooting Content
-
-
-You can use the following information to find troubleshooting or additional technical content for this product.
-
-### Search the MDOP Documentation
-
-The first step to find help content in the Administrator’s Guide is to search the MDOP documentation on TechNet.
-
-After you search the MDOP documentation, your next step would be to search the troubleshooting information for the product in the TechNet Wiki.
-
-**To search the MDOP product documentation**
-
-1. Use a web browser to navigate to the [MDOP Information Experience](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=236032) TechNet home page.
-
-2. Enter applicable search terms in the **Search TechNet with Bing** search box at the top of the MDOP Information Experience home page.
-
-3. Review the search results for assistance.
-
-**To search the TechNet Wiki**
-
-1. Use a web browser to navigate to the [TechNet Wiki](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=224905) home page.
-
-2. Enter applicable search terms in the **Search TechNet Wiki** search box on the TechNet Wiki home page.
-
-3. Review the search results for assistance.
-
-## How to Create a Troubleshooting Article
-
-
-If you have a troubleshooting tip or a best practice to share that is not already included in the MDOP OnlineHelp or TechNet Wiki, you can create your own TechNet Wiki articles.
-
-**To create a TechNet Wiki troubleshooting or best practices article**
-
-1. Use a web browser to navigate to the [TechNet Wiki](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=224905) home page.
-
-2. Log in with your Windows Live ID.
-
-3. Review the **Getting Started** section to learn the basics of the TechNet Wiki and its articles.
-
-4. Select **Post an article >>** at the bottom of the **Getting Started** section.
-
-5. On the Wiki article **Add Page** page, select **Insert Template** from the toolbar, select the troubleshooting article template (**Troubleshooting.html**), and then click **Insert**.
-
-6. Be sure to give the article a descriptive title and then overwrite the template information as needed to create your troubleshooting or best practice article.
-
-7. After you review your article, be sure to include a tag that is named **Troubleshooting** and another for the product name. This helps others to find your content.
-
-8. Click **Save** to publish the article to the TechNet Wiki.
-
-## Other resources for troubleshooting DaRT 7
-
-
-- [Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 7 Administrator's Guide](index.md)
-
-- [Getting Started with DaRT 7.0](getting-started-with-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-- [Planning for DaRT 7.0](planning-for-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-- [Deploying DaRT 7.0](deploying-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-- [Operations for DaRT 7.0](operations-for-dart-70-new-ia.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/TOC.md b/mdop/dart-v8/TOC.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b2c907364b..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/TOC.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
-# [Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 8](index.md)
-## [Getting Started with DaRT 8.0](getting-started-with-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-### [About DaRT 8.0](about-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-#### [Release Notes for DaRT 8.0](release-notes-for-dart-80--dart-8.md)
-### [About DaRT 8.0 SP1](about-dart-80-sp1.md)
-#### [Release Notes for DaRT 8.0 SP1](release-notes-for-dart-80-sp1.md)
-### [About DaRT 8.1](about-dart-81.md)
-#### [Release Notes for DaRT 8.1](release-notes-for-dart-81.md)
-### [Overview of the Tools in DaRT 8.0](overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-### [Accessibility for DaRT 8.0](accessibility-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-## [Planning for DaRT 8.0](planning-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-### [Planning to Deploy DaRT 8.0](planning-to-deploy-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-#### [DaRT 8.0 Supported Configurations](dart-80-supported-configurations-dart-8.md)
-#### [Planning to Create the DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image](planning-to-create-the-dart-80-recovery-image-dart-8.md)
-#### [Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image](planning-how-to-save-and-deploy-the-dart-80-recovery-image-dart-8.md)
-### [DaRT 8.0 Planning Checklist](dart-80-planning-checklist-dart-8.md)
-## [Deploying DaRT 8.0](deploying-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-### [Deploying DaRT 8.0 to Administrator Computers](deploying-dart-80-to-administrator-computers-dart-8.md)
-#### [How to Deploy DaRT 8.0](how-to-deploy-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-#### [How to Change, Repair, or Remove DaRT 8.0](how-to-change-repair-or-remove-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-### [Creating the DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image](creating-the-dart-80-recovery-image-dart-8.md)
-### [Deploying the DaRT Recovery Image](deploying-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-8.md)
-#### [How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as Part of a Recovery Partition](how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-part-of-a-recovery-partition-dart-8.md)
-#### [How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as a Remote Partition](how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-a-remote-partition-dart-8.md)
-### [DaRT 8.0 Deployment Checklist](dart-80-deployment-checklist-dart-8.md)
-## [Operations for DaRT 8.0](operations-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-### [Recovering Computers Using DaRT 8.0](recovering-computers-using-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-#### [How to Recover Local Computers by Using the DaRT Recovery Image](how-to-recover-local-computers-by-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-8.md)
-#### [How to Recover Remote Computers by Using the DaRT Recovery Image](how-to-recover-remote-computers-by-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-8.md)
-### [Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer](diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer--dart-8.md)
-#### [How to Run the Crash Analyzer on an End-user Computer](how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-on-an-end-user-computer-dart-8.md)
-#### [How to Run the Crash Analyzer in Stand-alone Mode on a Computer Other than an End-user Computer](how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-in-stand-alone-mode-on-a-computer-other-than-an-end-user-computer-dart-8.md)
-#### [How to Ensure that Crash Analyzer Can Access Symbol Files](how-to-ensure-that-crash-analyzer-can-access-symbol-files.md)
-### [Security and Privacy for DaRT 8.0](security-and-privacy-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-#### [Security Considerations for DaRT 8.0](security-considerations-for-dart-80--dart-8.md)
-#### [DaRT 8.0 Privacy Statement](dart-80-privacy-statement-dart-8.md)
-### [Administering DaRT 8.0 Using PowerShell](administering-dart-80-using-powershell-dart-8.md)
-#### [How to Perform DaRT Tasks by Using PowerShell Commands](how-to-perform-dart-tasks-by-using-powershell-commands-dart-8.md)
-#### [How to Use a PowerShell Script to Create the Recovery Image](how-to-use-a-powershell-script-to-create-the-recovery-image-dart-8.md)
-## [Troubleshooting DaRT 8.0](troubleshooting-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-## [Technical Reference for DaRT 8.0](technical-reference-for-dart-80-new-ia.md)
-### [Use Windows Defender Offline (WDO) for malware protection, not DaRT ](use-windows-defender-offline-wdo-for-malware-protection-not-dart.md)
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/about-dart-80-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/about-dart-80-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 9820c5e742..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/about-dart-80-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,83 +0,0 @@
----
-title: About DaRT 8.0
-description: About DaRT 8.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: ce91efd6-7d78-44cb-bb8f-1f43f768ebaa
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# About DaRT 8.0
-
-
-Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 helps you troubleshoot and repair Windows-based computers. This includes those computers that cannot be started. DaRT 8.0 is a powerful set of tools that extend the Windows Recovery Environment (WinRE). By using DaRT, you can analyze an issue to determine its cause, for example, by inspecting the computer’s event log or system registry. DaRT supports the recovery of basic hard disks that contain partitions, for example, primary partitions and logical drives, and supports the recovery of volumes.
-
-**Note**
-DaRT does not support the recovery of dynamic disks.
-
-
-
-DaRT also provides tools to help you fix a problem as soon as you determine the cause. For example, you can use the tools in DaRT to disable a faulty device driver, remove hotfixes, restore deleted files, and scan the computer for malware even when you cannot or should not start the installed Windows operating system.
-
-DaRT can help you quickly recover computers that are running either 32-bit or 64-bit versions of Windows 8, typically in less time than it would take to reimage the computer.
-
-Functionality in DaRT lets you create a recovery image. The recovery image starts Windows Recovery Environment (Windows RE), from which you can start the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window and access the DaRT tools.
-
-Use the **DaRT Recovery Image Wizard** to create the DaRT recovery image. By default, the wizard creates an International Organization for Standardization (ISO) image file and a Windows Imaging Format (WIM) file and let you burn the image to a CD, DVD, or USB. You can deploy the image locally at end user’s computers, or you can deploy it from a remote network partition or a recovery partition on the local hard drive.
-
-## What’s new in DaRT 8.0
-
-
-DaRT 8.0 can help you quickly recover computers that are running either 32-bit or 64-bit versions of Windows 8, typically in less time than it would take to reimage the computer. DaRT 8.0 has the following new features.
-
-### Create DaRT images by using Windows 8 or Windows Server 2012
-
-DaRT 8.0 enables you to create DaRT images using either Windows® 8 or Windows Server® 2012. For versions of Windows earlier than Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012, customers should continue to use earlier versions of DaRT.
-
-### Generate both 32- and 64-bit images from one computer
-
-DaRT 8.0 enables you to generate both 32-bit and 64-bit images from a single computer that is running DaRT, regardless of whether the computer is a 32-bit or 64-bit computer. In DaRT 7, the image that was created had to be the same, bit-wise, as the computer that was running DaRT.
-
-### Create one image that supports computers that have either a BIOS or UEFI interface
-
-DaRT 8.0’s support for both the Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) and BIOS interfaces enables you to create just one image that works with computers that have either interface.
-
-### Use a GUID partition table (GPT) for partitioning
-
-DaRT 8.0 tools now support Windows 8 GPT disks, which provide a more flexible mechanism for partitioning disks than the older master boot record (MBR) partitioning scheme. DaRT 8.0 tools continue to support MBR partitioning.
-
-### Install Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012 on the local hard disk
-
-DaRT 8.0 tools can be used only when Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012 are installed on the local hard disk. Currently, there is no support for Windows To Go.
-
-### DaRT 8.0 release notes
-
-For more information, and for late-breaking news that did not make it into the documentation, see the [Release Notes for DaRT 8.0](release-notes-for-dart-80--dart-8.md).
-
-## How to Get DaRT 8.0
-
-
-This technology is a part of the Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack (MDOP). MDOP is part of Microsoft Software Assurance. For more information about Microsoft Software Assurance and acquiring MDOP, see [How Do I Get MDOP](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Getting Started with DaRT 8.0](getting-started-with-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Release Notes for DaRT 8.0](release-notes-for-dart-80--dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/about-dart-80-sp1.md b/mdop/dart-v8/about-dart-80-sp1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e44c7a09be..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/about-dart-80-sp1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,71 +0,0 @@
----
-title: About DaRT 8.0 SP1
-description: About DaRT 8.0 SP1
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 2e166444-4097-4b23-9f50-d8819f1f4960
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# About DaRT 8.0 SP1
-
-
-Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 Service Pack 1 (SP1) provides the following enhancements, which are described in this topic.
-
-**Translation of Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 into Ten Languages plus English**
-
-DaRT 8.0 is now available in the following languages, in addition to English:
-
-- French (FR)
-
-- Italian (IT)
-
-- German (DE)
-
-- Spanish (ES)
-
-- Korean (KO)
-
-- Japanese (JA)
-
-- Brazilian Portuguese (PT-BR)
-
-- Russian (RU)
-
-- Chinese Traditional (ZH-TW)
-
-- Chinese Simplified (ZH-CN)
-
-**Updates to the DaRT Defender tool**
-
-Defender has been updated to include improved protection capabilities. The changes do not impact how you use Defender.
-
-**Customer feedback rollup**
-
-DaRT 8.0 SP1 includes a rollup of fixes to address issues found since the DaRT 8.0 release.
-
-## How to Get DaRT 8.0 SP1
-
-
-DaRT 8.0 SP1 is a part of the Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack (MDOP). MDOP is part of Microsoft Software Assurance. For more information about Microsoft Software Assurance and acquiring MDOP, see [How Do I Get MDOP](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Release Notes for DaRT 8.0 SP1](release-notes-for-dart-80-sp1.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/about-dart-81.md b/mdop/dart-v8/about-dart-81.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b6da659173..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/about-dart-81.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,122 +0,0 @@
----
-title: About DaRT 8.1
-description: About DaRT 8.1
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: dcaddc57-0111-4a9d-8be9-f5ada0eefa7d
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# About DaRT 8.1
-
-
-Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.1 provides the following enhancements, which are described in this topic.
-
-## What’s new
-
-
-- **Support for WIMBoot**
-
- Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 8.1 supports the Windows image file boot (WIMBoot) environment if these conditions are met:
-
- - WIMBoot is based on Windows 8.1 Update 1 or later.
-
- - The DaRT 8.1 image is built on Windows 8.1 Update 1 or later.
-
- For more information about WIMBoot, see [Windows Image File Boot (WIMBoot) Overview](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=517536).
-
-- **Support for Windows Server 2012 R2 and Windows 8.1**
-
- You can create DaRT images by using Windows Server 2012 R2 or Windows 8.1.
-
- **Note**
- For earlier versions of the Windows Server and Windows operating systems, continue to use the earlier versions of DaRT.
-
-
-
-- **Customer feedback**
-
- DaRT 8.1 includes updates that address issues found since the DaRT 8.0 SP1 release.
-
-- **Windows Defender**
-
- Windows Defender in Windows 8.1 includes improved protection. The changes do not impact how you use DaRT with Windows Defender.
-
-## Requirements
-
-
-- **Windows Assessment and Development Kit 8.1**
-
- Windows Assessment and Development Kit (ADK) 8.1 is a required prerequisite for the DaRT Recovery Image Wizard. Windows ADK 8.1 contains deployment tools that are used to customize, deploy, and service Windows images. It also contains the Windows Preinstallation Environment (Windows PE).
-
- **Note**
- Windows ADK 8.1 is not required if you are installing only Remote Connection Viewer or Crash Analyzer.
-
-
-
-~~~
-To download Windows ADK 8.1, see [Windows Assessment and Deployment Kit (Windows ADK) for Windows 8.1](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=39982) in the Microsoft Download Center.
-~~~
-
-- **Microsoft .NET Framework 4.5.1**
-
- DaRT 8.1 requires that .NET Framework 4.5.1 is installed. To download, see [Microsoft.NET Framework 4.5.1](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=329038) in the Microsoft Download Center.
-
-- **Windows 8.1 Debugging Tools**
-
- To use the Crash Analyzer tool in DaRT 8.1, you need the required debugging tools, which are available in the Software Development Kit for Windows 8.1.
-
- To download, see [Windows Software Development Kit (SDK) for Windows 8.1](https://msdn.microsoft.com/library/windows/desktop/bg162891.aspx) in the Microsoft Download Center.
-
-## Language availability
-
-
-DaRT 8.1 is available in the following languages:
-
-- English (United States) en-US
-
-- French (France) fr-FR
-
-- Italian (Italy) it-IT
-
-- German (Germany) de-DE
-
-- Spanish, International Sort (Spain) es-ES
-
-- Korean (Korea) ko-KR
-
-- Japanese (Japan) ja-JP
-
-- Portuguese (Brazil) pt-BR
-
-- Russian (Russia) ru-RU
-
-- Chinese Traditional zh-TW
-
-- Chinese Simplified zh-CN
-
-## How to Get MDOP Technologies
-
-
-DaRT 8.1 is a part of the Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack (MDOP). MDOP is part of Microsoft Software Assurance. For more information about Microsoft Software Assurance and acquiring MDOP, see [How Do I Get MDOP](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Release Notes for DaRT 8.1](release-notes-for-dart-81.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/accessibility-for-dart-80-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/accessibility-for-dart-80-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6980d28973..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/accessibility-for-dart-80-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,106 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Accessibility for DaRT 8.0
-description: Accessibility for DaRT 8.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 95f426de-222c-4ec0-9b9b-af817c7fff9b
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Accessibility for DaRT 8.0
-
-
-Microsoft is committed to making its products and services easier for everyone to use. This section provides information about features and services that make this product and its corresponding documentation more accessible for people with disabilities.
-
-## Access any command with a few keystrokes
-
-
-Access keys let you quickly use a command by pressing a few keys. You can get to most commands by using two keystrokes. To use an access key:
-
-1. Press ALT.
-
- The keyboard shortcuts are displayed over each feature that is available in the current view.
-
-2. Press the letter shown in the keyboard shortcut over the feature that you want to use.
-
-**Note**
-To cancel the action that you are taking and hide the keyboard shortcuts, press ALT.
-
-
-
-## Documentation in alternative formats
-
-
-If you have difficulty reading or handling printed materials, you can obtain the documentation for many Microsoft products in more accessible formats. You can view an index of accessible product documentation on the Microsoft Accessibility website. In addition, you can obtain additional Microsoft publications from Learning Ally (formerly Recording for the Blind & Dyslexic, Inc.). Learning Ally distributes these documents to registered, eligible members of their distribution service.
-
-For information about the availability of Microsoft product documentation and books from Microsoft Press, contact:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Learning Ally (formerly Recording for the Blind & Dyslexic, Inc.)
-
20 Roszel Road
-
Princeton, NJ 08540
-
-
-
-
Telephone number from within the United States:
-
(800) 221-4792
-
-
-
Telephone number from outside the United States and Canada:
Web addresses can change, so you might be unable to connect to the website or sites mentioned here.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Customer service for people with hearing impairments
-
-
-If you are deaf or hard-of-hearing, complete access to Microsoft product and customer services is available through a text telephone (TTY/TDD) service:
-
-- For customer service, contact Microsoft Sales Information Center at (800) 892-5234 between 6:30 AM and 5:30 PM Pacific Time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.
-
-- For technical assistance in the United States, contact Microsoft Product Support Services at (800) 892-5234 between 6:00 AM and 6:00 PM Pacific Time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays. In Canada, dial (905) 568-9641 between 8:00 AM and 8:00 PM Eastern Time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.
-
-Microsoft Support Services are subject to the prices, terms, and conditions in place at the time the service is used.
-
-## For more information
-
-
-For more information about how accessible technology for computers helps to improve the lives of people with disabilities, see the [Microsoft Accessibility website](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=8431).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Getting Started with DaRT 8.0](getting-started-with-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/administering-dart-80-using-powershell-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/administering-dart-80-using-powershell-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 49ed66516c..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/administering-dart-80-using-powershell-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,56 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Administering DaRT 8.0 Using PowerShell
-description: Administering DaRT 8.0 Using PowerShell
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 776430e0-d5c9-4919-877a-fab503451b37
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Administering DaRT 8.0 Using PowerShell
-
-
-Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 lets you use PowerShell commands to complete various DaRT 8.0 administrative tasks or to create the DaRT recovery image.
-
-## Perform DaRT tasks by using PowerShell commands
-
-
-DaRT 8.0 provides four PowerShell commands that let you do the following:
-
-- Burn an ISO to a CD, DVD, or USB drive.
-
-- Allow the source WIM file, which contains a DaRT image, to be converted into an ISO file.
-
-- Create a DaRT configuration object that is needed to apply a DaRT toolset to a Windows Image.
-
-- Apply a DartConfiguration object to a mounted Windows Image.
-
-[How to Perform DaRT Tasks by Using PowerShell Commands](how-to-perform-dart-tasks-by-using-powershell-commands-dart-8.md)
-
-## Use a PowerShell script to create the recovery image
-
-
-Rather than use the DaRT Recovery Image wizard to create the recovery image, you can use a PowerShell script and specify the parameters you want.
-
-[How to Use a PowerShell Script to Create the Recovery Image](how-to-use-a-powershell-script-to-create-the-recovery-image-dart-8.md)
-
-## Other resources for administering DaRT 8.0 using PowerShell
-
-
-[Operations for DaRT 8.0](operations-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/creating-the-dart-80-recovery-image-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/creating-the-dart-80-recovery-image-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 9284d0c20e..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/creating-the-dart-80-recovery-image-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,290 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Creating the DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image
-description: Creating the DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 39001b8e-86c0-45ef-8f34-2d6199f9922d
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/21/2017
----
-
-
-# Creating the DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image
-
-
-After installing Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0, you create a DaRT 8.0 recovery image. The recovery image starts Windows RE, from which you can then start the DaRT tools. You can generate International Organization for Standardization (ISO) files and Windows Imaging Format (WIM) images. In addition, you can use PowerShell to generate scripts that use the settings you select in the DaRT Recovery Image wizard. You can use the script later to rebuild recovery images by using the same settings. The recovery image provides a variety of recovery tools. For a description of the tools, see [Overview of the Tools in DaRT 8.0](overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-80-dart-8.md).
-
-After you boot the computer into DaRT, you can run the different DaRT tools to try to diagnose and repair the computer. This section walks you through the process of creating the DaRT recovery image and lets you select the tools and features that you want to include as part of the image.
-
-You can create the DaRT recovery image by using either of two methods:
-
-- Use the DaRT Recovery Image wizard, which runs in a Windows environment.
-
-- Modify an example PowerShell script with the values you want. For more information, see [How to Use a PowerShell Script to Create the Recovery Image](how-to-use-a-powershell-script-to-create-the-recovery-image-dart-8.md).
-
-You can write the ISO to a recordable CD or DVD, save it to a USB flash drive, or save it in a format that you can use to boot into DaRT from a remote partition or from a recovery partition.
-
-Once you have created the ISO image, you can burn it onto a blank CD or DVD (if your computer has a CD or DVD drive). If your computer does not have a drive for this purpose, you can use most generic programs that are used to burn CDs or DVDs.
-
-## Select the image architecture and specify the path
-
-
-On the Windows 8 Media page, you select whether to create a 32-bit or 64-bit DaRT recovery image. Use the 32-bit Windows to build 32-bit DaRT recovery images, and 64-bit Windows to build 64-bit DaRT recovery images. You can use a single computer to create recovery images for both architecture types, but you cannot create one image that works on both 32-bit and 64-bit architectures. You also indicate the path of the Windows 8 installation media. Choose the architecture that matches the one of the recovery image that you are creating.
-
-**To select the image architecture and specify the path**
-
-1. On the **Windows 8 Media** page, select one of the following:
-
- - If you are creating a recovery image for 64-bit computers, select **Create x64 (64-bit) DaRT image**.
-
- - If you are creating a recovery image for 32-bit computers, select **Create x86 (32-bit) DaRT image**.
-
-2. In the **Specify the root path of the Windows 8 <64-bit or 32-bit> install media** box, type the path of the Windows 8 installation files. Use a path that matches the architecture of the recovery image that you are creating.
-
-3. Click **Next**.
-
-## Select the tools to include on the recovery image
-
-
-On the Tools page, you can select numerous tools to include on the recovery image. These tools will be available to end users when they boot into the DaRT image. However, if you enable remote connectivity when creating the DaRT image, all of the tools will be available when a help desk worker connects to the end user’s computer, regardless of which tools you chose to include on the image.
-
-To restrict end-user access to these tools, but still retain full access to the tools through the Remote Connection Viewer, do not select those tools on the Tools page. End users will be able to use only Remote Connection and will be able to see, but not access, any tools that you exclude from the recovery image.
-
-**To select the tools to include on the recovery image**
-
-1. On the **Tools** page, select the check box beside each tool that you want to include on the image.
-
-2. Click **Next**.
-
-## Choose whether to allow remote connectivity by a help desk
-
-
-On the Remote Connection page, you can choose to enable a help desk worker to remotely connect to and run the DaRT tools on an end user’s computer. The remote connectivity option is then shown as an available option in the Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset window. After help desk workers establish a remote connection, they can run the DaRT tools on the end-user computer from a remote location.
-
-**To choose whether to allow remote connectivity by help desk workers**
-
-1. On the **Remote Connection** page, select the **Allow remote connections** check box to allow remote connections, or clear the check box to prevent remote connections.
-
-2. If you cleared the **Allow remote connections** check box, click **Next**. Otherwise, go to the next step to continue configuring remote connectivity.
-
-3. Select one of the following:
-
- - Let Windows choose an open port number.
-
- - Specify the port number. If you select this option, enter a port number between 1 and 65535 in the field beneath the option. This port number will be used when establishing a remote connection. We recommend that the port number be 1024 or higher to minimize the possibility of a conflict.
-
-4. (Optional) in the **Remote connection welcome** message box, create a customized message that end users receive when they establish a remote connection. The message can be a maximum of 2048 characters.
-
-5. Click **Next**.
-
- For more information about running the DaRT tools remotely, see [How to Recover Remote Computers by Using the DaRT Recovery Image](how-to-recover-remote-computers-by-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-8.md).
-
-## Add drivers to the recovery image
-
-
-On the Drivers tab of the Advanced Options page, you can add additional device drivers that you may need when repairing a computer. These may typically include storage or network controllers that Windows 8 does not provide. Drivers are installed when the image is created.
-
-**Important**
-When you select drivers to include, be aware that wireless connectivity (such as Bluetooth or 802.11a/b/g/n) is not supported in DaRT.
-
-
-
-**To add drivers to the recovery image**
-
-1. On the **Advanced Options** page, click the **Drivers** tab.
-
-2. Click **Add**.
-
-3. Browse to the file to be added for the driver, and then click **Open**.
-
- **Note**
- The driver file is provided by the manufacturer of the storage or network controller.
-
-
-
-4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for every driver that you want to include.
-
-5. Click **Next**.
-
-## Add WinPE optional packages to the recovery image
-
-
-On the WinPE tab of the Advanced Options page, you can add WinPE optional packages to the DaRT image. These packages are part of the Windows ADK, which is an installation prerequisite for the DaRT Recovery Image wizard. The tools that you can select are all optional. Any required packages are added automatically, based on the tools you selected on the Tools page.
-
-You can also specify the size of the scratch space. Scratch space is the amount of RAM disk space that is set aside for DaRT to run. The scratch space is useful in case the end user’s hard disk is not available. If you are running additional tools and drivers, you may want to increase the scratch space.
-
-**To add WinPE optional packages to the recovery image**
-
-1. On the **Advanced Options** page, click the **WinPE** tab.
-
-2. Select the check box beside each package that you want to include on the image, or click the **Name** check box to select all of the packages.
-
-3. In the **Scratch Space** field, select the amount of RAM disk space to allocate for running DaRT in case the end user’s hard disk is not available.
-
-4. Click **Next**.
-
-## Add the debugging tools for Crash Analyzer
-
-
-If you include the Crash Analyzer tool in the ISO image, you must also include the Debugging Tools for Windows. On the Crash Analyzer tab of the Advanced Options page, you enter the path of the Windows 8 Debugging Tools, which Crash Analyzer uses to analyze memory dump files. You can use the tools that are on the computer where you are running the DaRT Recovery Image wizard, or you can use the tools that are on the end-user computer. If you decide to use the tools on the end-user computer, remember that every computer that you diagnose must have the Debugging Tools installed.
-
-If you installed the Microsoft Windows Software Development Kit (SDK) or the Microsoft Windows Development Kit (WDK), the Windows 8 Debugging Tools are added to the recovery image by default, and the path to the Debugging Tools is automatically filled in. You can change the path of the Windows 8 Debugging Tools if the files are located somewhere other than the location indicated by the default file path. A link in the wizard lets you download and install debugging tools for Windows if they are not already installed.
-
-To download the Windows Debugging Tools, see [Debugging Tools for Windows](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=266248). Install the Debugging Tools to the default location.
-
-**Note**
-The DaRT wizard checks for the tools in the `HKLM\Software\Microsoft\Windows Kits\Installed Roots\WindowsDebuggersRoot` registry key. If the registry value is not there, the wizard looks in one of the following locations, depending on your system architecture:
-
-`%ProgramFilesX86%\Windows Kits\8.0\Debuggers\x64`
-
-`%ProgramFilesX86%\Windows Kits\8.0\Debuggers\x86`
-
-
-
-**To add the debugging tools for Crash Analyzer**
-
-1. On the **Advanced Options** page, click the **Crash Analyzer** tab.
-
-2. (Optional) Click **Download the Debugging Tools** to download the Debugging Tools for Windows.
-
-3. Select one of the following options:
-
- - **Include the Windows 8 <64-bit or 32-bit> Debugging Tools**. If you select this option, browse to and select the location of the tools if the path is not already displaying.
-
- - **Use the Debugging Tools from the system that is being debugged**. If you select this option, the Crash Analyzer will not work if the Debugging Tools for Windows are not found on the problem computer.
-
-4. Click **Next**.
-
-## Add definitions for the Defender tool
-
-
-On the Defender tab of the Advanced Options page, you add definitions, which are used by the Defender tool to determine whether software that is trying to install, run, or change settings on a computer is unwanted or malicious software.
-
-**To add definitions for the Defender tool**
-
-1. On the **Advanced Options** page, click the **Defender** tab.
-
-2. Select one of the following options:
-
- - **Download the latest definitions (Recommended)** – The definition update starts automatically, and the definitions are added to the DaRT recovery image. This option is recommended to help you avoid cases where the definitions might not be available. You must be connected to the Internet to download the definitions.
-
- - **Download the definitions later** – Definitions will not be included in the DaRT recovery image, and you will need to download the definitions from the computer that is running DaRT.
-
- If you decide not to include the latest definitions on the recovery image, or if the definitions included on the recovery image are no longer current by the time that you are ready to use Defender, obtain the latest definitions before you begin a scan by following the instructions that are provided in Defender.
-
- **Important**
- You cannot scan if there are no definitions.
-
-
-
-3. Click **Next**.
-
-## Select the types of recovery image files to create
-
-
-On the Create Image page, you choose an output folder for the recovery image, enter an image name, and select the types of DaRT recovery image files to create. During the recovery image creation process, Windows source files are unpacked, DaRT files are copied to it, and the image is then “re-packed” into the file formats that you select on this page.
-
-The available image file types are:
-
-- **Windows Imaging File (WIM)** - used to deploy DaRT to a preboot execution environment (PXE) or local partition).
-
-- **ISO image file** – used to deploy to CD or DVD, or for use in virtual machines (VM)s). The wizard requires that the ISO image have an .iso file name extension because most programs that burn a CD or DVD require that extension. If you do not specify a different location, the ISO image is created on your desktop with the name DaRT8.ISO.
-
-- **PowerShell script** – creates a DaRT recovery image with commands that provide essentially the same options that you can select by using the DaRT Recovery Image wizard. The script also enables you to add or changes files in the DaRT recovery image.
-
-If you select the Edit Image check box on this page, you can customize the recovery image during the image creation process. For example, you can change the “winpeshl.ini” file to create a custom startup order or to add third-party tools.
-
-**To select the types of recovery image files to create**
-
-1. On the **Create Image** page, click **Browse** to choose the output folder for the image file.
-
- **Note**
- The size of the image will vary, depending on the tools that you select and the files that you add in the wizard.
-
-
-
-2. In the **Image name** box, enter a name for the DaRT recovery image, or accept the default name, which is DaRT8.
-
- The wizard creates a subfolder in the output path by this name.
-
-3. Select the types of image files that you want to create.
-
-4. Choose one of the following:
-
- - To change the files in the recovery image before you create the image files, select the **Edit Image** check box, and then click **Prepare**.
-
- - To create the recovery image without changing the files, click **Create**.
-
-5.
-
- Click **Next**.
-
-## Edit the recovery image files
-
-
-You can edit the recovery image only if you selected the Edit Image check box on the Create Image page. After the recovery image has been prepared for editing, you can add and modify the recovery image files before creating the bootable media. For example, you can create a custom order for startup, add various third-party tools, and so on.
-
-**To edit the recovery image files**
-
-1. On the **Edit Image** page, click **Open** in Windows Explorer.
-
-2. Create a subfolder in the folder that is listed in the dialog box.
-
-3. Copy the files that you want to the new subfolder, or remove files that you don’t want.
-
-4. Click **Create** to start creating the recovery image.
-
-## Generate the recovery image files
-
-
-On the Generate Files page, the DaRT recovery image is generated for the file types that you selected on the Create Image page.
-
-**To generate the recovery image files**
-
-- On the **Generate Files** page, click **Next** to generate the recovery image files.
-
-## Copy the recovery image to a CD, DVD, or USB
-
-
-On the Create Bootable Media page, you can optionally copy the image file to a CD, DVD, or USB flash drive (UFD). You can also create additional bootable media from this page by restarting the wizard.
-
-**Note**
-The Preboot execution environment (PXE) and local image deployment are not supported natively by this tool since they require additional enterprise tools, such as System Center Configuration Manager server and Microsoft Development Toolkit.
-
-
-
-**To copy the recovery image to a CD, DVD, or USB**
-
-1. On the **Create Bootable Media** page, select the iso file that you want to copy.
-
-2. Insert a CD, DVD, or USB, and then select the drive.
-
- **Note**
- If a drive is not recognized and you install a new drive, you can click **Refresh** to force the wizard to update the list of available drives.
-
-
-
-3. Click the **Create Bootable Media** button.
-
-4. To create another recovery image, click Restart, or click **Close** if you have finished creating all of the media that you want.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Overview of the Tools in DaRT 8.0](overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Deploying DaRT 8.0](deploying-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/dart-80-deployment-checklist-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/dart-80-deployment-checklist-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b0585c84fc..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/dart-80-deployment-checklist-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
----
-title: DaRT 8.0 Deployment Checklist
-description: DaRT 8.0 Deployment Checklist
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 74e071fb-697c-463f-adce-d09b8d86495f
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# DaRT 8.0 Deployment Checklist
-
-
-This checklist can be used to help you during Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 deployment.
-
-**Note**
-This checklist outlines the recommended steps and a high-level list of items to consider when planning for product deployment. It is recommended that you copy this checklist into a spreadsheet program and customize it for your use.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
References
-
-
-
-
-
-
Decide on the best DaRT 8.0 deployment option for your requirements and deploy it.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying DaRT 8.0](deploying-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/dart-80-planning-checklist-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/dart-80-planning-checklist-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ceb155c30e..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/dart-80-planning-checklist-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
----
-title: DaRT 8.0 Planning Checklist
-description: DaRT 8.0 Planning Checklist
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 0a0f5a71-b1d6-424c-8174-fc5aad506928
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# DaRT 8.0 Planning Checklist
-
-
-This checklist can be used to help you plan for preparing your computing environment for Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 deployment.
-
-**Note**
-This checklist outlines the recommended steps and a high-level list of items to consider when planning for product deployment. It is recommended that you copy this checklist into a spreadsheet program and customize it for your use.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
References
-
-
-
-
-
-
Review the DaRT 8.0 Supported Configurations information to confirm that the computers you have selected for client or feature installation meet the minimum hardware and operating system requirements.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning for DaRT 8.0](planning-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/dart-80-privacy-statement-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/dart-80-privacy-statement-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 73939a6af0..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/dart-80-privacy-statement-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,116 +0,0 @@
----
-title: DaRT 8.0 Privacy Statement
-description: DaRT 8.0 Privacy Statement
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: db474241-e44e-4bca-9be4-3557a3614c2a
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# DaRT 8.0 Privacy Statement
-
-
-Microsoft is committed to protecting your privacy, while delivering software that brings you the performance, power, and convenience you desire in your personal computing. This privacy statement explains many of the data collection and use practices of Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (“DaRT”). This disclosure focuses on features that communicate with the Internet and is not intended to be an exhaustive list.
-
-Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (“DaRT”) enables administrators to easily recover PCs that have become unusable, rapidly diagnose probable causes of issues, and quickly repair unbootable or locked-out systems, all faster than the average time it takes to reimage the machine. When necessary, you can also quickly restore critical lost files. This release provides support for Windows 8 Beta as well as improvements on image creation and new hardware and software coverage.
-
-## Collection and Use of Your Information
-
-
-The information we collect from you will be used by Microsoft and its controlled subsidiaries and affiliates to enable the features you are using and provide the service(s) or carry out the transaction(s) you have requested or authorized. It may also be used to analyze and improve Microsoft products and services.
-
-We may send certain mandatory service communications such as welcome letters, billing reminders, information on technical service issues, and security announcements. Some Microsoft services may send periodic member letters that are considered part of the service. We may occasionally request your feedback, invite you to participate in surveys, or send you promotional mailings to inform you of other products or services available from Microsoft and its affiliates.
-
-In order to offer you a more consistent and personalized experience in your interactions with Microsoft, information collected through one Microsoft service may be combined with information obtained through other Microsoft services. We may also supplement the information we collect with information obtained from other companies. For example, we may use services from other companies that enable us to derive a general geographic area based on your IP address in order to customize certain services to your geographic area.
-
-Except as described in this statement, personal information you provide will not be transferred to third parties without your consent. We occasionally hire other companies to provide limited services on our behalf, such as packaging, sending and delivering purchases and other mailings, answering customer questions about products or services, processing event registration, or performing statistical analysis of our services. We will only provide those companies the personal information they need to deliver the service, and they are prohibited from using that information for any other purpose.
-
-Microsoft may access or disclose information about you, including the content of your communications, in order to: (a) comply with the law or respond to lawful requests or legal process; (b) protect the rights or property of Microsoft or our customers, including the enforcement of our agreements or policies governing your use of the services; or (c) act on a good faith belief that such access or disclosure is necessary to protect the personal safety of Microsoft employees, customers, or the public. We may also disclose personal information as part of a corporate transaction such as a merger or sale of assets.
-
-Information that is collected by or sent to Microsoft by DaRT may be stored and processed in the United States or any other country in which Microsoft or its affiliates, subsidiaries, or service providers maintain facilities. Microsoft abides by the safe harbor framework as set forth by the U.S. Department of Commerce regarding the collection, use, and retention of data from the European Union, the European Economic Area, and Switzerland.
-
-## Collection and Use of Information about Your Computer
-
-
-When you use software with Internet-enabled features, information about your computer ("standard computer information") is sent to the Web sites you visit and online services you use. Microsoft uses standard computer information to provide you Internet-enabled services, to help improve our products and services, and for statistical analysis. Standard computer information typically includes information such as your IP address, operating system version, browser version, and regional and language settings. In some cases, standard computer information may also include hardware ID, which indicates the device manufacturer, device name, and version. If a particular feature or service sends information to Microsoft, standard computer information will be sent as well.
-
-The privacy details for each DaRT feature, software or service listed in this privacy statement describe what additional information is collected and how it is used.
-
-## Security of your information
-
-
-Microsoft is committed to helping protect the security of your information. We use a variety of security technologies and procedures to help protect your information from unauthorized access, use, or disclosure. For example, we store the information you provide on computer systems with limited access, which are located in controlled facilities.
-
-## Changes to this privacy statement
-
-
-We will occasionally update this privacy statement to reflect changes in our products, services, and customer feedback. When we post changes, we will revise the "last updated" date at the top of this statement. If there are material changes to this statement or in how Microsoft will use your personal information, we will notify you either by posting a notice of such changes prior to implementing the change or by directly sending you a notification. We encourage you to periodically review this statement to be informed of how Microsoft is protecting your information.
-
-## For More Information
-
-
-Microsoft welcomes your comments regarding this privacy statement. If you have questions about this statement or believe that we have not adhered to it, please [contact us](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=245853).
-
-Microsoft PrivacyMicrosoft CorporationOne Microsoft WayRedmond, Washington 98052 USA
-
-## Specific Features
-
-
-## Microsoft Update
-
-
-**What This Feature Does:**
-
-Microsoft Update is a service that provides Windows updates as well as updates for other Microsoft software.
-
-**Information Collected, Processed, or Transmitted:**
-
-For details about what information is collected and how it is used, see the Update Services Privacy Statement at .
-
-**Use of Information:**
-
-For details about what information is collected and how it is used, see the Update Services Privacy Statement at .
-
-**Choice/Control:**
-
-For details about controlling this feature, see the Update Services Privacy Statement at [https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=244000](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=244400).
-
-## Windows Defender Offline
-
-
-**What This Feature Does:**
-
-Windows Defender Offline (WDO) is included in the DaRT download. WDO helps protect your PC from malicious software (malware) such as viruses, spyware, and other potentially harmful software.
-
-**Information Collected, Processed, or Transmitted:**
-
-For details about what information is collected and how it is used, see the WDO Privacy Statement at [https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=246081](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=211807).
-
-**Use of Information:**
-
-For details about what information is collected and how it is used, see the WDO Privacy Statement at .
-
-**Choice/Control:**
-
-For details about controlling this feature, see the Windows Defender Offline Privacy Statement at .
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Security and Privacy for DaRT 8.0](security-and-privacy-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/dart-80-supported-configurations-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/dart-80-supported-configurations-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ba3ca72434..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/dart-80-supported-configurations-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,307 +0,0 @@
----
-title: DaRT 8.0 Supported Configurations
-description: DaRT 8.0 Supported Configurations
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 95d68e5c-d202-4f4a-adef-d2098328172e
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# DaRT 8.0 Supported Configurations
-
-
-This topic specifies the prerequisite software and supported configurations requirements that are necessary to install and run Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 in your environment. Both the operating system requirements and the system requirements that are required to run DaRT 8.0 are specified. For information about prerequisites that you need to consider to create the DaRT recovery image, see [Planning to Create the DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image](planning-to-create-the-dart-80-recovery-image-dart-8.md).
-
-For supported configurations that apply to later releases, see the documentation for the applicable release.
-
-You can install DaRT in one of two ways. You can install all functionality on an IT administrator computer, where you will perform all the tasks associated with running DaRT. Alternatively, you can install, on the administrator computer, only the DaRT functionality that creates the recovery image, and then install the functionality used to run DaRT (that is, the DaRT Remote Connection Viewer) on a help desk computer.
-
-## DaRT 8.0 prerequisite software
-
-
-Make sure that the following prerequisites are met before you install DaRT.
-
-### Administrator computer prerequisites
-
-The following table lists the installation prerequisites for the administrator computer when you are installing DaRT 8.0 and all of the DaRT tools.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Prerequisite
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
Windows Assessment and Development Kit (ADK)
-
Required for the DaRT Recovery Image wizard. Contains the Deployment Tools, which are used to customize, deploy, and service Windows images, and contains the Windows Preinstallation Environment (Windows PE). The ADK is not required if you are installing only the Remote Connection Viewer and/or Crash Analyzer.
-
-
-
.NET Framework 4.5
-
Required by the DaRT Recovery Image wizard.
-
-
-
Windows Development Kit OR Software Development Kit (optional)
-
Crash Analyzer requires the Windows 8 Debugging Tools from the Windows Driver Kit to analyze memory dump files.
-
-
-
Windows 8 64-bit ISO image
-
DaRT requires the Windows Recovery Environment (Windows RE) image from the Windows 8 media. Download the 32-bit or 64-bit version of Windows 8, depending on the type of DaRT recovery image you want to create. If you support both system types in your environment, download both versions of Windows 8.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Help desk computer prerequisites
-
-The following table lists the installation prerequisites for the help desk computer when you are running the DaRT 8.0 Remote Connection Viewer.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Prerequisite
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
DaRT 8.0 Remote Connection Viewer
-
Must be installed on a Windows 8 operating system.
-
-
-
NET Framework 4.5
-
Required by the DaRT Recovery Image wizard
-
-
-
Debugging Tools for Windows
-
Required only if you are installing the Crash Analyzer tool
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### End-user computer prerequisites
-
-There is no prerequisite software that must be installed on end-user computers, other than the Windows 8 operating system.
-
-## DaRT operating system requirements
-
-
-### Administrator computer system requirements
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for the DaRT administrator computer installation.
-
-**Note**
-Make sure that you allocate enough space for any additional tools that you want to install on the administrator computer.
-
-
-
-**Note**
-Microsoft provides support for the current service pack and, in some cases, the immediately preceding service pack. To find the support timelines for your product, see the [Lifecycle Supported Service Packs](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=31975). For additional information about Microsoft Support Lifecycle Policy, see [Microsoft Support Lifecycle Support Policy FAQ](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=31976).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating System
-
Edition
-
Service Pack
-
System Architecture
-
Operating System Requirements
-
RAM Requirement for Running DaRT
-
-
-
-
-
Windows 8
-
All editions
-
N/A
-
64-bit
-
2 GB
-
2.5 GB
-
-
-
Windows 8
-
All editions
-
N/A
-
32-bit
-
1 GB
-
1.5 GB
-
-
-
Windows Server 2012
-
Standard, Enterprise, Data Center
-
N/A
-
64-bit
-
512 MB
-
1 .0 GB
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### DaRT help desk computer system requirements
-
-If you allow a help desk to remotely troubleshoot computers, you must have the Remote Connection Viewer installed on the help desk computer. You can optionally install the Crash Analyzer tool on the help desk computer.
-
-DaRT 8.0 enables a help desk worker to connect to a DaRT 8.0 computer by using either the DaRT 7.0 or DaRT 8.0 Remote Connection Viewer. The DaRT 7.0 Remote Connection Viewer requires a Windows 7 operating system, while the DaRT 8.0 Remote Connection Viewer requires Windows 8. The DaRT 8.0 Remote Connection Viewer and all other DaRT 8.0 tools can be installed only on a computer running Windows 8.
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for the DaRT help desk computer installation.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating System
-
Edition
-
Service Pack
-
System Architecture
-
Operating System Requirements
-
RAM Requirements for Running DaRT
-
-
-
-
-
Windows 8
-
All editions
-
N/A
-
64-bit
-
2 GB
-
2.5 GB
-
-
-
Windows 8 (with Remote Connection Viewer 8.0 only)
-
All editions
-
N/A
-
32-bit
-
1 GB
-
1.5 GB
-
-
-
Windows 7 (with Remote Connection Viewer 7.0 only)
-
All editions
-
SP1, SP2
-
64-bit or 32-bit
-
1 GB
-
N/A
-
-
-
Windows Server 2012
-
Standard, Enterprise, Data Center
-
N/A
-
64-bit
-
51
-
1.0 GB
-
-
-
-
-
-
-DaRT also has the following minimum hardware requirements for the end-user computer:
-
-A CD or DVD drive or a USB port - required only if you are deploying DaRT in your enterprise by using a CD, DVD, or USB.
-
-BIOS support for starting the computer from a CD or DVD, a USB flash drive, or from a remote or recovery partition.
-
-### DaRT end-user computer system requirements
-
-The Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset window in DaRT requires that the end-user computer use one of the following operating systems together with the specified amount of system memory available for DaRT:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating System
-
Edition
-
Service Pack
-
System Architecture
-
Operating System Requirements
-
RAM Requirements
-
-
-
-
-
Windows 8
-
All editions
-
N/A
-
64-bit
-
2 GB
-
2.5 GB
-
-
-
Windows 8
-
All editions
-
N/A
-
32-bit
-
1 GB
-
1.5 GB
-
-
-
Windows Server 2012
-
Standard, Enterprise, Data Center
-
N/A
-
64-bit
-
512 MB
-
1.0 GB
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy DaRT 8.0](planning-to-deploy-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/deploying-dart-80-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/deploying-dart-80-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0bfff42e41..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/deploying-dart-80-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,65 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying DaRT 8.0
-description: Deploying DaRT 8.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 5a976d4e-3372-4ef6-9095-1b48e99af21b
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying DaRT 8.0
-
-
-Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 supports a number of different deployment configurations. This section includes information you should consider about the deployment of DaRT 8.0 and step-by-step procedures to help you successfully perform the tasks that you must complete at different stages of your deployment.
-
-## Deployment Information
-
-
-- [Deploying DaRT 8.0 to Administrator Computers](deploying-dart-80-to-administrator-computers-dart-8.md)
-
- This section describes the different DaRT deployment options for your requirements and explains how to deploy them.
-
-- [Creating the DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image](creating-the-dart-80-recovery-image-dart-8.md)
-
- This section describes the methods you can use to create the DaRT recovery image and provides instructions to create the recovery image by using the DaRT Recovery Image wizard.
-
-- [Deploying the DaRT Recovery Image](deploying-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-8.md)
-
- This section provides information to help you decide on the best DaRT recovery image deployment option for your requirements and provides instructions on how to deploy the recovery image.
-
-- [DaRT 8.0 Deployment Checklist](dart-80-deployment-checklist-dart-8.md)
-
- This section contains a deployment checklist that can help you to deploy DaRT.
-
-### How to get DaRT
-
-This technology is a part of the Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack (MDOP). Enterprise customers can get MDOP with Microsoft Software Assurance. For more information about Microsoft Software Assurance and acquiring MDOP, see [How Do I Get MDOP](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=322049) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=322049).
-
-## Other Resources for deploying DaRT
-
-
-[Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 8 Administrator's Guide](index.md)
-
-[Getting Started with DaRT 8.0](getting-started-with-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Planning for DaRT 8.0](planning-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Operations for DaRT 8.0](operations-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Troubleshooting DaRT 8.0](troubleshooting-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/deploying-dart-80-to-administrator-computers-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/deploying-dart-80-to-administrator-computers-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 9a76b0e3ae..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/deploying-dart-80-to-administrator-computers-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,57 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying DaRT 8.0 to Administrator Computers
-description: Deploying DaRT 8.0 to Administrator Computers
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: f918ead8-742e-464a-8bf6-1fcedde66cae
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying DaRT 8.0 to Administrator Computers
-
-
-Before you begin the deployment of Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0, review the requirements for your environment. This includes the hardware requirements for installing DaRT 8.0. For more information about DaRT hardware and software requirements, see [DaRT 8.0 Supported Configurations](dart-80-supported-configurations-dart-8.md).
-
-The topics in this section can be used to help you deploy DaRT in your enterprise based on your environment and deployment strategy.
-
-## Deploy DaRT 8.0
-
-
-You can use the Windows Installer file for DaRT to install DaRT on a computer that you will use to first create the DaRT recovery image and then troubleshoot and fix end-user computers. Frequently, across an organization, you might install on the administrator computer only the DaRT functionality that you need to create a DaRT recovery image. Then, on a help desk administrator’s computer, you might install only the DaRT functionality that you must have to troubleshoot a problem computer, such as the DaRT Remote Connection Viewer and the Crash Analyzer.
-
-In addition to manually running the Windows Installer file to install DaRT, you can also install DaRT at the command prompt to support enterprise software deployment systems such as System Center Configuration Manager 2012.
-
-[How to Deploy DaRT 8.0](how-to-deploy-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-## Change, repair, or remove DaRT 8.0
-
-
-You can change, repair, or remove the DaRT installation by double-clicking the DaRT installation file and then clicking the button that corresponds to the action that you want to perform or through the Windows Control Panel.
-
-[How to Change, Repair, or Remove DaRT 8.0](how-to-change-repair-or-remove-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-## How to get DaRT 8.0
-
-
-To get the DaRT software, see [How to Get MDOP](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049).
-
-## Other resources for deploying the DaRT 8.0 to administrator computers
-
-
-[Deploying DaRT 8.0](deploying-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/deploying-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/deploying-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 38d53ac43d..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/deploying-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying the DaRT Recovery Image
-description: Deploying the DaRT Recovery Image
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: df5cb54a-be8c-4ed2-89ea-d3c67c2ef4d4
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying the DaRT Recovery Image
-
-
-After you have created the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) file that contains the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 recovery image, you can deploy the DaRT 8.0 recovery image throughout your enterprise so that it is available to end users and help desk workers. There are four supported methods that you can use to deploy the DaRT recovery image. To review the advantages and disadvantages of each method, see [Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image](planning-how-to-save-and-deploy-the-dart-80-recovery-image-dart-8.md).
-
-Burn the ISO image file to a CD or DVD by using the DaRT Recovery Image wizard
-
-Save the contents of the ISO image file to a USB Flash Drive (UFD) by using the DaRT Recovery Image wizard
-
-Extract the boot.wim file from the ISO image and deploy as a remote partition that is available to end-user computers
-
-Extract the boot.wim file from the ISO image and deploy in the recovery partition of a new Windows 8 installation
-
-**Important**
-The **DaRT Recovery Image Wizard** provides the option to burn the image to a CD, DVD or UFD, but the other methods of saving and deploying the recovery image require additional steps that involve tools that are not included in DaRT. Some guidance and links for these other methods are provided in this section.
-
-
-
-## Deploy the DaRT recovery image as part of a recovery partition
-
-
-After you have finished running the DaRT Recovery Image wizard and created the recovery image, you can extract the boot.wim file from the ISO image file and deploy it as a recovery partition in a Windows 8 image.
-
-[How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as Part of a Recovery Partition](how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-part-of-a-recovery-partition-dart-8.md)
-
-## Deploy the DaRT recovery image as a remote partition
-
-
-You can host the recovery image on a central network boot server, such as Windows Deployment Services, and allow users or support staff to stream the image to computers on demand.
-
-[How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as a Remote Partition](how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-a-remote-partition-dart-8.md)
-
-## Other resources for deploying the DaRT recovery image
-
-
-[Deploying DaRT 8.0](deploying-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer--dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer--dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4553af5ce2..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer--dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,57 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer
-description: Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: ce3d3186-54fb-45b2-b5ce-9bb7841db28f
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer
-
-
-The **Crash Analyzer** in Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 lets you debug a memory dump file on a Windows-based computer and then diagnose any related computer errors. The **Crash Analyzer** uses the Microsoft Debugging Tools for Windows to examine a memory dump file for the driver that caused the computer to fail. You can run the Crash Analyzer on an end-user computer or in stand-alone mode on a computer other than an end-user computer.
-
-## Run the Crash Analyzer on an end-user-computer
-
-
-Typically, you run **Crash Analyzer** from the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window on an end-user computer that is experiencing the problem. The **Crash Analyzer** tries to locate the Debugging Tools for Windows on the problem computer. If the directory path dialog box is empty, you must enter the location, or browse to the location of the Debugging Tools for Windows (you can download the files from Microsoft). You must also provide a path to where the symbol files are located.
-
-If you included the Microsoft Debugging Tools for Windows and the symbol files when you created the DaRT 8.0 recovery image, the Tools and symbol files should be available when you run the **Crash Analyzer** on the problem computer. If you did not include them in the DaRT recovery image, or if disk size or network connectivity problems are preventing you from obtaining them, you can alternatively run the Crash Analyzer in stand-alone mode on a computer other than the end user’s computer, as described in the following section.
-
-[How to Run the Crash Analyzer on an End-user Computer](how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-on-an-end-user-computer-dart-8.md)
-
-## Run the Crash Analyzer in stand-alone mode on a computer other than an end user’s computer
-
-
-Although you typically run **Crash Analyzer** on the end-user computer that is experiencing the problem, you can also run the Crash Analyzer in stand-alone mode, on a computer other than an end-user computer. You might choose this option if you did not include the Windows Debugging Tools in the DaRT recovery image, or if disk size or network connectivity problems are preventing you from obtaining the Debugging Tools. In this case, you can copy the dump file from the problem computer and analyze it on a computer that has the stand-alone version of **Crash Analyzer** installed, such as on a help desk agent’s computer.
-
-[How to Run the Crash Analyzer in Stand-alone Mode on a Computer Other than an End-user Computer](how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-in-stand-alone-mode-on-a-computer-other-than-an-end-user-computer-dart-8.md)
-
-## How to ensure that Crash Analyzer can access symbol files
-
-
-To debug applications that have stopped responding, you need access to the symbol file, which is separate from the program. Although symbol files are automatically downloaded when you run Crash Analyzer, there might be times when the problem computer does not have access to the Internet. There are several ways to ensure that you have guaranteed access to symbol files.
-
-[How to Ensure that Crash Analyzer Can Access Symbol Files](how-to-ensure-that-crash-analyzer-can-access-symbol-files.md)
-
-## Other resources for diagnosing system failures with Crash Analyzer
-
-
-[Operations for DaRT 8.0](operations-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/getting-started-with-dart-80-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/getting-started-with-dart-80-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 66f6c6ad7d..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/getting-started-with-dart-80-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Getting Started with DaRT 8.0
-description: Getting Started with DaRT 8.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 579d18c5-7434-4a0e-9725-fb81ca5e3c6d
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Getting Started with DaRT 8.0
-
-
-Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 requires thorough planning before you deploy it or use its features. If you are new to this product, we recommend that you read the documentation carefully. Before you deploy the product to a production environment, we also recommend that you validate your deployment plan in a test network environment. You might also consider taking a class about relevant technologies. For more information about Microsoft training opportunities, see the Microsoft Training Overview at [https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=80347](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=80347).
-
-**Note**
-A downloadable version of this administrator’s guide is not available. However, you can learn about a special mode of the TechNet Library that allows you to select articles, group them in a collection, and print them or export them to a file at (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=272493).
-
-Additional downloadable information about this product can also be found at .
-
-
-
-## Getting started with DaRT 8.0
-
-
-- [About DaRT 8.0](about-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
- Provides information specifically related to DaRT, including what is new in DaRT 8.0.
-
-- [Overview of the Tools in DaRT 8.0](overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
- Describes the tools in DaRT 8.0.
-
-- [Accessibility for DaRT 8.0](accessibility-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
- Provides information about features and services that make this product and its corresponding documentation more accessible for people with disabilities.
-
-## How to Get DaRT 8.0
-
-
-DaRT 8.0 is a part of the Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack (MDOP). MDOP is part of Microsoft Software Assurance. For more information about Microsoft Software Assurance and acquiring MDOP, see [How Do I Get MDOP](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049).
-
-## Other resources for this product
-
-
-[Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 8 Administrator's Guide](index.md)
-
-[Planning for DaRT 8.0](planning-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Deploying DaRT 8.0](deploying-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Operations for DaRT 8.0](operations-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Troubleshooting DaRT 8.0](troubleshooting-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-change-repair-or-remove-dart-80-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-change-repair-or-remove-dart-80-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 07b0c8b5bf..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-change-repair-or-remove-dart-80-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Change, Repair, or Remove DaRT 8.0
-description: How to Change, Repair, or Remove DaRT 8.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: a9737635-aaf5-45bd-861f-f9dff4f02336
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Change, Repair, or Remove DaRT 8.0
-
-
-You can change, repair, or remove the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 installation by double-clicking the DaRT 8.0 installation file and then clicking the button that corresponds to the action that you want to perform.
-
-You can also change, repair, or remove the DaRT installation using the Windows Control Panel by completing the following steps.
-
-## To change, repair, or remove DaRT
-
-
-1. Click **Start**, and then click **Control Panel**.
-
-2. On **Control Panel**, navigate to the feature that lets you uninstall programs.
-
-3. Click **Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 8.0**, and then click the button that corresponds to the action that you want to perform.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying DaRT 8.0 to Administrator Computers](deploying-dart-80-to-administrator-computers-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-deploy-dart-80-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-deploy-dart-80-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 64defad414..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-deploy-dart-80-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,111 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Deploy DaRT 8.0
-description: How to Deploy DaRT 8.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: ab772e7a-c02f-4847-acdf-8bd362769a77
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Deploy DaRT 8.0
-
-
-The following instructions explain how to deploy Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 in your environment. To get the DaRT software, see [How to Get MDOP](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049). It is assumed that you are installing all functionality on one administrator computer. If you need to deploy or uninstall DaRT 8.0 on multiple computers, using an electronic software distribution system, for example, it might be easier to use command line installation options. Descriptions and examples of the available command line options are provided in this section.
-
-**Important**
-Before you install DaRT, see [DaRT 8.0 Supported Configurations](dart-80-supported-configurations-dart-8.md) to ensure that you have installed all of the prerequisite software and that the computer meets the minimum system requirements. The computer onto which you install DaRT must be running Windows 8 or Windows Server 2012.
-
-
-
-You can install DaRT using one of two different configurations:
-
-- Install DaRT and all of the DaRT tools on the administrator computer.
-
-- Install on the administrator computer only the tools that you need to create the DaRT recovery image, and then install the **Remote Connection Viewer** and, optionally, **Crash Analyzer** on a help desk computer.
-
-The DaRT installation file is available in both 32-bit and 64-bit versions. Install the version that matches the architecture of the computer on which you are running the DaRT Recovery Image wizard, not the computer architecture of the recovery image that you are creating.
-
-You can use either version of the DaRT installation file to create a recovery image for either 32-bit or 64-bit computers, but you cannot create one recovery image for both 32-bit and 64-bit computers.
-
-**To install DaRT and all DaRT tools on an administrator computer**
-
-1. Download the 32-bit or 64-bit version of the DaRT 8.0 installer file. Choose the architecture that matches the computer on which you are installing DaRT and running the DaRT Recovery Image wizard.
-
-2. From the folder into which you downloaded DaRT 8.0, run the **MSDaRT80.msi** installation file that corresponds to your system requirements.
-
-3. On the **Welcome to the Microsoft DaRT 8.0 Setup Wizard** page, click **Next**.
-
-4. Accept the Microsoft Software License Terms, and then click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Microsoft Update** page, select **Use Microsoft Update when I check for updates**, and then click **Next**.
-
-6. On the **Select Installation Folder** page, select a folder, or click **Next** to install DaRT in the default installation location.
-
-7. On the **Setup Options** page, select the DaRT features that you want to install, or click **Next** to install DaRT with all of the features.
-
-8. To start the installation, click **Install**.
-
-9. After the installation has completed successfully, click **Finish** to exit the wizard.
-
-## To install DaRT and all DaRT tools on an administrator computer by using a command prompt
-
-
-When you install or uninstall DaRT, you have the option of running the installation files at the command prompt. This section describes some examples of different options that you can specify when you install or uninstall DaRT at the command prompt.
-
-The following example shows how to install all DaRT functionality.
-
-``` syntax
-msiexec /i MSDaRT80.msi ADDLOCAL=CommonFiles, DaRTRecoveryImage,CrashAnalyzer,RemoteViewer
-```
-
-The following example shows how to install only the DaRT Recovery Image wizard.
-
-``` syntax
-msiexec /i MSDaRT80.msi ADDLOCAL=CommonFiles, ,DaRTRecoveryImage
-```
-
-The following example shows how to install only the Crash Analyzer and the DaRT Remote Connection Viewer.
-
-``` syntax
-msiexec /i MSDaRT80.msi ADDLOCAL=CommonFiles,CrashAnalyzer,RemoteViewer
-```
-
-The following example creates a setup log for the Windows Installer. This is valuable for debugging.
-
-``` syntax
-msiexec.exe /i MSDaRT80.msi /l*v log.txt
-```
-
-**Note**
-You can add /qn or /qb to perform a silent installation.
-
-
-
-**To validate the DaRT installation**
-
-1. Click **Start**, and select **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset**.
-
- The **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window opens.
-
-2. Check that all of the DaRT tools that you selected for installation were successfully installed.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying DaRT 8.0 to Administrator Computers](deploying-dart-80-to-administrator-computers-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-a-remote-partition-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-a-remote-partition-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index db1b6db9c4..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-a-remote-partition-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,57 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as a Remote Partition
-description: How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as a Remote Partition
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 58f4a6c6-6193-42bd-a095-0de868711af9
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as a Remote Partition
-
-
-After you have finished running the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 Recovery Image wizard and created the recovery image, you can extract the boot.wim file from the ISO image file and deploy it as a remote partition on the network.
-
-**To deploy DaRT 8.0 as a remote partition**
-
-1. Extract the boot.wim file from the DaRT ISO image file.
-
- 1. Mount the ISO image file that you created in the **Create Startup Image** dialog box by using your company’s preferred method of mounting an image.
-
- 2. Open the ISO image file and copy the boot.wim file from the \\sources folder in the mounted image to a location on your computer or on an external drive.
-
- **Note**
- If you burned a CD or DVD of the recovery image, you can open the files on the CD or DVD and copy the boot.wim file from the \\sources folder. This lets you skip the need to mount the image.
-
-
-
-2. Deploy the boot.wim file to a WDS server that can be accessed from end-user computers in your enterprise.
-
-3. Configure the WDS server to use the boot.wim file for DaRT by following your standard WDS deployment procedures.
-
-For more information about how to deploy DaRT as a remote partition, see [Walkthrough: Deploy an Image by Using PXE](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=212108) and [Windows Deployment Services Getting Started Guide](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=212106).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Creating the DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image](creating-the-dart-80-recovery-image-dart-8.md)
-
-[Deploying the DaRT Recovery Image](deploying-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-8.md)
-
-[Planning for DaRT 8.0](planning-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-part-of-a-recovery-partition-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-part-of-a-recovery-partition-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 2f572440c7..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-deploy-the-dart-recovery-image-as-part-of-a-recovery-partition-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,63 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as Part of a Recovery Partition
-description: How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as Part of a Recovery Partition
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 07c5d539-51d9-4759-adc7-72b40d5d7bb3
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Deploy the DaRT Recovery Image as Part of a Recovery Partition
-
-
-After you have finished running the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 Recovery Image wizard and created the recovery image, you can extract the boot.wim file from the ISO image file and deploy it as a recovery partition in a Windows 8 image. A partition is recommended, because any corruption issues that prevent the Windows operating system from starting would also prevent the recovery image from starting. A separate partition also eliminates the need to provide the BitLocker recovery key twice. Consider hiding the partition to prevent users from storing files on it.
-
-**To deploy DaRT in the recovery partition of a Windows 8 image**
-
-1. Create a target partition in your Windows 8 image that is equal to or greater than the size of the ISO image file that you created by using the **DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image wizard**.
-
- The minimum size required for a DaRT partition is 500MB to accommodate the remote connection functionality in DaRT.
-
-2. Extract the boot.wim file from the DaRT ISO image file.
-
- 1. Using your company’s preferred method, mount the ISO image file that you created on the **Create Startup Image** page.
-
- 2. Open the ISO image file and copy the boot.wim file from the \\sources folder in the mounted image to a location on your computer or on an external drive.
-
- **Note**
- If you burned a CD, DVD, or USB of the recovery image, you can open the files on the removable media and copy the boot.wim file from the \\sources folder. If you copy boot.wim file, you don’t need to mount the image.
-
-
-
-3. Use the boot.wim file to create a bootable recovery partition by using your company’s standard method for creating a custom Windows RE image.
-
- For more information about how to create or customize a recovery partition, see [Customizing the Windows RE Experience](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=214222).
-
-4. Replace the target partition in your Windows 8 image with the recovery partition.
-
- For more information about how to deploy a recovery solution to reinstall the factory image in the event of a system failure, see [Deploy a System Recovery Image](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=214221).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Creating the DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image](creating-the-dart-80-recovery-image-dart-8.md)
-
-[Deploying the DaRT Recovery Image](deploying-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-8.md)
-
-[Planning for DaRT 8.0](planning-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-ensure-that-crash-analyzer-can-access-symbol-files.md b/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-ensure-that-crash-analyzer-can-access-symbol-files.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e6b4f6ad25..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-ensure-that-crash-analyzer-can-access-symbol-files.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Ensure that Crash Analyzer Can Access Symbol Files
-description: How to Ensure that Crash Analyzer Can Access Symbol Files
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 99839013-1cd8-44d1-8484-0e15261c5a4b
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Ensure that Crash Analyzer Can Access Symbol Files
-
-
-Typically, debugging information is stored in a symbol file that is separate from the program. You must have access to the symbol information when you debug an application that has stopped responding.
-
-Symbol files are automatically downloaded when you run **Crash Analyzer**. If the computer does not have an Internet connection or the network requires the computer to access an HTTP proxy server, the symbol files cannot be downloaded.
-
-**To ensure that Crash Analyzer can access symbol files**
-
-1. **Copy the dump file to another computer.** If the symbols cannot be downloaded because of a lack of an Internet connection, copy the memory dump file to a computer that does have an Internet connection and run the stand-alone **Crash Analyzer Wizard** on that computer.
-
-2. **Access the symbol files from another computer.** If the symbols cannot be downloaded because of a lack of an Internet connection, you can download the symbols from a computer that does have an Internet connection and then copy them to the computer that does not have an Internet connection, or you can map a network drive to a location where the symbols are available on the local network. If you run the **Crash Analyzer** in a Windows Recovery Environment (Windows RE), you can include the symbol files on the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 recovery image.
-
-3. **Access symbol files through an HTTP proxy server.** If the symbols cannot be downloaded because an HTTP proxy server must be accessed, use the following steps to access an HTTP proxy server. In DaRT 8.0, the **Crash Analyzer Wizard** has a setting available on the **Specify Symbol Files Location** dialog page, marked with the label **Proxy server (optional, using the format "server:port")**. You can use this text box to specify a proxy server. Enter the proxy address in the form **<hostname>:<port>**, where the <**hostname**> is a DNS name or IP address, and the <**port**> is a TCP port number, usually 80. There are two modes in which the **Crash Analyzer** can be run. Following is how you use the proxy setting in each of these modes:
-
- - **Online mode:** In this mode, if the proxy server field is left blank, the wizard uses the proxy settings from Internet Options in Control Panel. If you enter a proxy address in the text box which is provided, that address will be used, and it will override the setting in the Internet Options.
-
- - Windows Recovery Environment (Windows RE): When you run **Crash Analyzer** from the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window, there is no default proxy address. If the computer is directly connected to the Internet, a proxy address is not required. Therefore, you can leave this field blank in the wizard setting. If the computer is not directly connected to the Internet, and it is in a network environment that has a proxy server, you must set the proxy field in the wizard to access the symbol store. The proxy address can be obtained from the network administrator. Setting the proxy server is important only when the public symbol store is connected to the Internet. If the symbols are already on the DaRT recovery image, or if they are available locally, setting the proxy server is not required.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer](diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer--dart-8.md)
-
-[Operations for DaRT 8.0](operations-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-perform-dart-tasks-by-using-powershell-commands-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-perform-dart-tasks-by-using-powershell-commands-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8e49329140..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-perform-dart-tasks-by-using-powershell-commands-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,72 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Perform DaRT Tasks by Using PowerShell Commands
-description: How to Perform DaRT Tasks by Using PowerShell Commands
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: bc788b00-38c7-4f57-a832-916b68264d89
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Perform DaRT Tasks by Using PowerShell Commands
-
-
-Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 provides the following listed set of Windows PowerShell cmdlets. Administrators can use these PowerShell cmdlets to perform various DaRT 8.0 server tasks from the command prompt rather than from the DaRT Recovery Image wizard.
-
-## To administer DaRT by using PowerShell commands
-
-
-Use the PowerShell cmdlets described here to administer DaRT.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Name
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Copy-DartImage
-
Burns an ISO to a CD, DVD, or USB drive.
-
-
-
Export-DartImage
-
Allows the source WIM file, which contains a DaRT image, to be converted into an ISO file.
-
-
-
New-DartConfiguration
-
Creates a DaRT configuration object that is needed to apply a DaRT toolset to a Windows Image.
-
-
-
Set-DartImage
-
Applies a DartConfiguration object to a mounted Windows Image. This includes adding all files, configuration, and package dependencies.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Administering DaRT 8.0 Using PowerShell](administering-dart-80-using-powershell-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-recover-local-computers-by-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-recover-local-computers-by-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index fc95efeecd..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-recover-local-computers-by-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,112 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Recover Local Computers by Using the DaRT Recovery Image
-description: How to Recover Local Computers by Using the DaRT Recovery Image
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: f679d522-49ab-429c-93d0-294c3f3e5639
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Recover Local Computers by Using the DaRT Recovery Image
-
-
-Use these instructions to recover a computer when you are physically present at the end-user computer that is experiencing problems.
-
-**How to recover a local computer by using the DaRT recovery image**
-
-1. Boot the end-user computer by using the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 recovery image.
-
- As the computer is booting into the DaRT 8.0 recovery image, the **NetStart** dialog box appears.
-
-2. When you are asked whether you want to initialize network services, select one of the following:
-
- **Yes** - it is assumed that a DHCP server is present on the network, and an attempt is made to obtain an IP address from the server. If the network uses static IP addresses instead of DHCP, you can later use the **TCP/IP Configuration** tool in DaRT to specify a static IP address.
-
- **No** - skip the network initialization process.
-
-3. Indicate whether you want to remap the drive letters. When you run Windows online, the system volume is typically mapped to drive C. However, when you run Windows offline under WinRE, the original system volume might be mapped to another drive, and this can cause confusion. If you decide to remap, DaRT tries to map the offline drive letters to match the online drive letters. Remapping is performed only if an offline operating system is selected later in the startup process.
-
-4. On the **System Recovery Options** dialog box, select a keyboard layout.
-
-5. Check the displayed system root directory, the kind of operating system installed, and the partition size. If you do not see your operating system listed, and suspect that the lack of drivers is a possible cause of the failure, click **Load Drivers** to load the suspect drivers, and then insert the installation media for the device and select the driver.
-
-6. Select the installation that you want to repair or diagnose, and then click **Next**.
-
- **Note**
- If the Windows Recovery Environment (WinRE) detects or suspects that Windows 8 did not start correctly the last time that it was tried, **Startup Repair** might start to run automatically.
-
-
-
-~~~
-If any of the registry hives are corrupted or missing, Registry Editor and several other DaRT utilities will have limited functionality. If no operating system is selected, some tools will not be available.
-
-The **System Recovery Options** window appears and lists various recovery tools.
-~~~
-
-7. On the **System Recovery Options** window, click **Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset**.
-
- The **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window opens. You can now run any of the individual tools or wizards that were included when the DaRT recovery image was created.
-
-You can click **Help** on the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window to open the client Help file that provides detailed instruction and information needed to run the individual DaRT tools. You can also click the **Solution Wizard** on the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window to choose the best tool for the situation, based on a brief interview that the wizard provides.
-
-For general information about any of the DaRT tools, see [Overview of the Tools in DaRT 8.0](overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-80-dart-8.md).
-
-**How to run DaRT at the command prompt**
-
-- To run DaRT at the command prompt, specify the **netstart.exe** command then use any of the following parameters:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
Description
-
-
-
-network
-
Initializes the network services.
-
-
-
-remount
-
Remaps the drive letters.
-
-
-
-prompt
-
Displays messages that ask the end user to specify whether to initialize the network and remap the drives.
-
- Warning
The end user’s response to the prompt overrides the –network and –remount switches.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for DaRT 8.0](operations-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Recovering Computers Using DaRT 8.0](recovering-computers-using-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-recover-remote-computers-by-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-recover-remote-computers-by-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e8ceaf560b..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-recover-remote-computers-by-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,207 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Recover Remote Computers by Using the DaRT Recovery Image
-description: How to Recover Remote Computers by Using the DaRT Recovery Image
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 363ccd48-6820-4b5b-a43a-323c0b208a9d
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Recover Remote Computers by Using the DaRT Recovery Image
-
-
-Use the Remote Connection feature in Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 to run the DaRT tools remotely on an end-user computer. After the end user provides the administrator or help desk worker with certain information, the IT administrator or help desk worker can take control of the end user's computer and run the necessary DaRT tools remotely.
-
-If you disabled the DaRT tools when you created the recovery image, you still have access to all of the tools. All of the tools, except Remote Connection, are unavailable to end users.
-
-**To recover a remote computer by using the DaRT recovery image**
-
-1. Boot an end-user computer by using the DaRT recovery image.
-
- You will typically use one of the following methods to boot into DaRT to recover a remote computer, depending on how you deploy the DaRT recovery image. For more information about deploying the DaRT recovery image, see [Deploying DaRT 8.0](deploying-dart-80-dart-8.md).
-
- - Boot into DaRT from a recovery partition on the problem computer.
-
- - Boot into DaRT from a remote partition on the network.
-
- For information about the advantages and disadvantages of each method, see [Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image](planning-how-to-save-and-deploy-the-dart-80-recovery-image-dart-8.md).
-
- Whichever method that you use to boot into DaRT, you must enable the boot device in the BIOS for the boot option or options that you want to make available to the end user.
-
- **Note**
- Configuring the BIOS is unique, depending on the kind of hard disk drive, network adapters, and other hardware that is used in your organization.
-
-
-
-~~~
-As the computer is booting into the DaRT recovery image, the **NetStart** dialog box appears.
-~~~
-
-2. When you are asked whether you want to initialize network services, select one of the following:
-
- **Yes** - it is assumed that a DHCP server is present on the network, and an attempt is made to obtain an IP address from the server. If the network uses static IP addresses instead of DHCP, you can later use the **TCP/IP Configuration** tool in DaRT to specify a static IP address.
-
- **No** - skip the network initialization process.
-
-3. Indicate whether you want to remap the drive letters. When you run Windows online, the system volume is typically mapped to drive C. However, when you run Windows offline under WinRE, the original system volume might be mapped to another drive, and this can cause confusion. If you decide to remap, DaRT tries to map the offline drive letters to match the online drive letters. Remapping is performed only if an offline operating system is selected later in the startup process.
-
-4. On the **System Recovery Options** dialog box, select a keyboard layout.
-
-5. Check the displayed system root directory, the kind of operating system installed, and the partition size. If you do not see your operating system listed, and suspect that the lack of drivers is a possible cause of the failure, click **Load Drivers** to load the suspect drivers, and then insert the installation media for the device and select the driver.
-
-6. Select the installation that you want to repair or diagnose, and then click **Next**.
-
- **Note**
- If the Windows Recovery Environment (WinRE) detects or suspects that Windows 8 did not start correctly the last time that it was tried, **Startup Repair** might start to run automatically. For information about how to resolve this issue, see [Troubleshooting DaRT 8.0](troubleshooting-dart-80-dart-8.md).
-
-
-
-~~~
-If any of the registry hives are corrupted or missing, Registry Editor and several other DaRT utilities will have limited functionality. If no operating system is selected, some tools will not be available.
-
-The **System Recovery Options** window appears and lists various recovery tools.
-~~~
-
-7. On the **System Recovery Options** window, click **Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** to open the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset**.
-
-8. On the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window, click **Remote Connection** to open the **DaRT Remote Connection** window. If you are prompted to give the help desk remote access, click **OK**.
-
- The DaRT Remote Connection window opens and displays a ticket number, IP address, and port information.
-
-9. On the help desk computer, open the **DaRT Remote Connection Viewer**.
-
-10. Click **Start**, click **All Programs**, click **Microsoft DaRT 8.0**, and then click **DaRT Remote Connection Viewer**.
-
-11. In the **DaRT Remote Connection** window, enter the required ticket, IP address, and port information.
-
- **Note**
- This information is created on the end-user computer and must be provided by the end user. There might be multiple IP addresses to choose from, depending on how many are available on the end-user computer.
-
-
-
-12. Click **Connect**.
-
-The IT administrator now assumes control of the end-user computer and can run the DaRT tools remotely.
-
-**Note**
-A file is provided that is named inv32.xml and contains remote connection information, such as the port number and IP address. By default, the file is typically located at %windir%\\system32.
-
-
-
-**To customize the Remote Connection process**
-
-1. You can customize the Remote Connection process by editing the winpeshl.ini file. For more information about how to edit the winpeshl.ini file, see [Winpeshl.ini Files](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=219413).
-
- Specify the following commands and parameters to customize how a remote connection is established with an end-user computer:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Command
-
Parameter
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
RemoteRecovery.exe
-
-nomessage
-
Specifies that the confirmation prompt is not displayed. Remote Connection continues just as if the end user had responded "Yes" to the confirmation prompt.
-
-
-
WaitForConnection.exe
-
none
-
Prevents a custom script from continuing until either Remote Connection is not running or a valid connection is established with the end-user computer.
-
- Important
This command serves no function if it is specified independently. It must be specified in a script to function correctly.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-2. The following is an example of a winpeshl.ini file that is customized to open the **Remote Connection** tool as soon as an attempt is made to boot into DaRT:
-
- ```ini
- [LaunchApps]
- "%windir%\system32\netstart.exe -network -remount"
- "cmd /C start %windir%\system32\RemoteRecovery.exe -nomessage"
- "%windir%\system32\WaitForConnection.exe"
- "%SYSTEMDRIVE%\sources\recovery\recenv.exe"
- ```
-
-When DaRT starts, it creates the file inv32.xml in \\Windows\\System32\\ on the RAM disk. This file contains connection information: IP address, port, and ticket number. You can copy this file to a network share to trigger a Help desk workflow. For example, a custom program can check the network share for connection files, and then create a support ticket or send email notifications.
-
-**To run the Remote Connection Viewer at the command prompt**
-
-1. To run the **DaRT Remote Connection Viewer** at the command prompt, specify the **DartRemoteViewer.exe** command and use the following parameters:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
-ticket=<ticketnumber>
-
Where <ticketnumber> is the ticket number, including the dashes, that is generated by Remote Connection.
-
-
-
-ipaddress=<ipaddress>
-
Where <ipaddress> is the IP address that is generated by Remote Connection.
-
-
-
-port=<port>
-
Where <port> is the port that corresponds to the specified IP address.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Note**
-The variables for these parameters are created on the end-user computer and must be provided by the end user.
-~~~
-
-
-
-2. If all three parameters are specified and the data is valid, a connection is immediately tried when the program starts. If any parameter is not valid, the program starts as if there were no parameters specified.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for DaRT 8.0](operations-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Recovering Computers Using DaRT 8.0](recovering-computers-using-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-in-stand-alone-mode-on-a-computer-other-than-an-end-user-computer-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-in-stand-alone-mode-on-a-computer-other-than-an-end-user-computer-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8f3cdb66ed..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-in-stand-alone-mode-on-a-computer-other-than-an-end-user-computer-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Run the Crash Analyzer in Stand-alone Mode on a Computer Other than an End-user Computer
-description: How to Run the Crash Analyzer in Stand-alone Mode on a Computer Other than an End-user Computer
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: b2f87144-6379-478a-802b-9cfef5242f34
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Run the Crash Analyzer in Stand-alone Mode on a Computer Other than an End-user Computer
-
-
-If you cannot access the Microsoft Debugging Tools for Windows or the symbol files on the end-user computer, you can copy the dump file from the problem computer and analyze it on a computer that has the stand-alone version of Crash Analyzer installed, such as a help desk computer that contains Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0.
-
-To run Crash Analyzer in stand-alone mode, you copy the memory dump file from the problem computer and analyze it on another computer, such as a help desk computer, that has the **Crash Analyzer** installed.
-
-**To run the Crash Analyzer in stand-alone mode**
-
-1. On a computer that has DaRT 8.0 installed, click **Start**, type **Crash Analyzer**, and then click **Crash Analyzer**.
-
-2. Follow the steps in the wizard, as described in [How to Run the Crash Analyzer on an End-user Computer](how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-on-an-end-user-computer-dart-8.md).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for DaRT 8.0](operations-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer](diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer--dart-8.md)
-
-[How to Ensure that Crash Analyzer Can Access Symbol Files](how-to-ensure-that-crash-analyzer-can-access-symbol-files.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-on-an-end-user-computer-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-on-an-end-user-computer-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 82ae23319c..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-run-the-crash-analyzer-on-an-end-user-computer-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,60 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Run the Crash Analyzer on an End-user Computer
-description: How to Run the Crash Analyzer on an End-user Computer
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: d36213e5-7719-44d7-be65-971c3ef7df2c
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Run the Crash Analyzer on an End-user Computer
-
-
-To run **Crash Analyzer** from the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window on an end-user computer that is experiencing problems, you must have the Microsoft Debugging Tools for Windows and the symbol files installed. To download the Windows Debugging Tools, see [Debugging Tools for Windows](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=266248).
-
-**To run the Crash Analyzer on an end-user computer**
-
-1. On the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window on an end-user computer, click **Crash Analyzer**.
-
-2. Provide the required information for the Microsoft Debugging Tools for Windows.
-
-3. Provide the required information for the symbol files. For more information about symbol files, see [How to Ensure that Crash Analyzer Can Access Symbol Files](how-to-ensure-that-crash-analyzer-can-access-symbol-files.md).
-
-4. Provide the required information for a memory dump file. To determine the location of the memory dump file:
-
- 1. Open the **System Properties** window.
-
- 2. Click **Start**, type **sysdm.cpl**, and then press **Enter**.
-
- 3. Click the **Advanced** tab.
-
- 4. In the **Startup and Recovery** area, click **Settings**.
-
- If you do not have access to the **System Properties** window, you can search for dump files on the end-user computer by using the **Search** tool in Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0.
-
- The **Crash Analyzer** scans the memory dump file and reports a probable cause of the problem. You can view more information about the failure, such as the specific memory dump message and description, the drivers loaded at the time of the failure, and the full output of the analysis.
-
-5. Identify the appropriate strategy to resolve the problem. The strategy may require disabling or updating the device driver that caused the failure by using the **Services and Drivers** node of the **Computer Management** tool in DaRT 8.0.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer](diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer--dart-8.md)
-
-[Operations for DaRT 8.0](operations-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-use-a-powershell-script-to-create-the-recovery-image-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-use-a-powershell-script-to-create-the-recovery-image-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 33e32407c5..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/how-to-use-a-powershell-script-to-create-the-recovery-image-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,91 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Use a PowerShell Script to Create the Recovery Image
-description: How to Use a PowerShell Script to Create the Recovery Image
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: d0c71092-535e-43b1-9b1d-6ac819508348
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Use a PowerShell Script to Create the Recovery Image
-
-
-## To create the DaRT recovery image by using a PowerShell script
-
-
-You can create the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 recovery image by using a PowerShell script instead of using the DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image wizard. See the following example script.
-
-``
-
-`This script was auto generated by the Microsoft DaRT Recovery Image Wizard.``###``This script uses the DISM and DaRT PowerShell commands to create a bootable DaRT image.``###Both a WIM and ISO file are produced.``###``### Examples of how to burn/copy the DaRT ISO to DVD/USB are available at the end of this script.``###`
-
-`$ErrorActionPreference = "Stop";``### This variable tells PowerShell to stop if an error occurs.`
-
-`###``### Import the modules necessary for DaRT Image creation.``###`
-
-`Import-Module "Dism"`I`mport-Module "Microsoft.Dart"`
-
-`###``### Specifies where the Windows 8 media is located and where the ISO and WIM files will be saved.``### These can be changed as necessary.``###`
-
-`$Win8MediaPath = "D:\";``### This is the path of the Windows 8 media.``$DestinationWimPath = "C:\Users\Administrator\Desktop\DaRT8\x64\boot.wim";``### Specify where the WIM file will be saved.``$DestinationIsoPath = "C:\Users\Administrator\Desktop\DaRT8\x64\DaRT8.iso";``### Specify where the ISO will be saved.`
-
-`###``### These variables are used to specify temporary and output directories based on the paths above.``###`
-
-`$WimParentPath = (Split-Path -Path "$destinationWimPath" -Parent);``### Specify the directory where the DaRT WIM file will be saved.``$IsoParentPath = (Split-Path -Path "$destinationIsoPath" -Parent);``### This is the directory where the DaRT ISO file will be saved.``$TempMountPath = "$env:temp\DaRT8Mount_$(Get-Random)";``### Specify the temporary directory used to mount the Windows image.`
-
-`###``### Prepare the windows image.``###`
-
-`### Guarantee the output directories exists.``New-Item -Path $WimParentPath -Type Directory -Force``New-Item -Path $IsoParentPath -Type Directory -Force``New-Item -Path $TempMountPath -Type Directory -Force`
-
-`### Create a copy of the WIM and remove the read-only attribute.``### The WIM file will be the resulting dart image.``Copy-Item "$Win8MediaPath\sources\boot.wim" $DestinationWimPath -Force``Set-ItemProperty $DestinationWimPath -Name IsReadOnly -Value $false`
-
-`### Mount the bootable image within the WIM file (normally index 2).``Mount-WindowsImage -ImagePath $DestinationWimPath -Path $TempMountPath -Index 2`
-
-`###``### Add additional drivers to the image.``###`
-
-`###``### Installs the specified driver(s) into the image.``###`
-
-`Add-WindowsDriver -Path $TempMountPath -Driver "C:\Windows\System32\DriverStore\FileRepository``\xusb22.inf_amd64_89c20c625f14f923\xusb22.inf" -ForceUnsigned`
-
-`###``### Add additional drivers to the image.``###`
-
-`###``### Installs the specified WinPE package(s) into the image.``###`
-
-`Add-WindowsPackage -Path $TempMountPath -PackagePath "C:\Program Files (x86)\Windows Kits\8.0\Assessment and Deployment Kit\Windows Preinstallation Environment\amd64\WinPE_OCs\WinPE-Scripting.cab"``Add-WindowsPackage -Path $TempMountPath -PackagePath "C:\Program Files (x86)\Windows Kits\8.0\Assessment and Deployment Kit\Windows Preinstallation Environment\amd64\WinPE_OCs\WinPE-FMAPI.cab"``Add-WindowsPackage -Path $TempMountPath -PackagePath "C:\Program Files (x86)\Windows Kits\8.0\Assessment and Deployment Kit\Windows Preinstallation Environment\amd64\WinPE_OCs\en-us\WinPE-Scripting_en-us.cab"``Add-WindowsPackage -Path $TempMountPath -PackagePath "C:\Program Files (x86)\Windows Kits\8.0\Assessment and Deployment Kit\Windows Preinstallation Environment\amd64\WinPE_OCs\WinPE-HTA.cab"``Add-WindowsPackage -Path $TempMountPath -PackagePath "C:\Program Files (x86)\Windows Kits\8.0\Assessment and Deployment Kit\Windows Preinstallation Environment\amd64\WinPE_OCs\en-us\WinPE-HTA_en-us.cab"`
-
-`###``### Add the DaRT tools to the image.``### The New-DartConfiguration cmdlet is used to specify how the DaRT image is configured.``### Modify this statement to configure how the DaRT tools will be applied to the image.``###`
-
-`$config = New-DartConfiguration -AddComputerManagement -AddCrashAnalyzer -AddDefender -AddDiskCommander -AddExplorer -AddFileRestore -AddFileSearch -AddHotfixUninstall -AddRegistryEditor -AddRemoteConnection -AddSfcScan -AddSolutionWizard -AddTcpConfig -RemoteMessage "Test welcome message" -RemotePort 3388 -ScratchSpace 512 -UpdateDefender``$config | Set-DartImage -Path $TempMountPath`
-
-`###``### Perform any manual user-specific customizations here.``###`
-
-`# Read-Host -Prompt "Script is paused for any manual customization. Press ENTER to continue"`
-
-`### Save the changes to the WIM file by dismounting the image.``Dismount-WindowsImage -Path $TempMountPath -Save`
-
-`### Create a bootable DaRT ISO.``Export-DartImage -IsoPath $DestinationIsoPath -WimPath $DestinationWimPath`
-
-`### The following is an example of how to burn the ISO to a writeable CD/DVD.``### Specify the correct drive letter and uncomment the statement to burn an ISO.``# Copy-DartImage -IsoPath $DestinationIsoPath -Drive "G:" -Type DVD`
-
-`### Removes all temporary files.``Remove-Item $TempMountPath -Force -Recurse`
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Administering DaRT 8.0 Using PowerShell](administering-dart-80-using-powershell-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/images/checklistbox.gif b/mdop/dart-v8/images/checklistbox.gif
deleted file mode 100644
index 8af13c51d1..0000000000
Binary files a/mdop/dart-v8/images/checklistbox.gif and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/index.md b/mdop/dart-v8/index.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d51694005d..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,66 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 8 Administrator's Guide
-description: Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 8 Administrator's Guide
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 33685dd7-844f-4864-b504-3ef384ef01de
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 10/03/2017
----
-
-
-# Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 8 Administrator's Guide
-
-
-Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 lets you diagnose and repair a computer that cannot be started or that has problems starting as expected. By using DaRT 8.0, you can recover end-user computers that have become unusable, diagnose probable causes of issues, and quickly repair unbootable or locked-out computers. When it is necessary, you can also quickly restore important lost files and detect and remove malware, even when the computer is not online.
-
-DaRT 8.0 lets you create a DaRT recovery image in International Organization for Standardization (ISO) and Windows Imaging (WIM) file formats and burn the image to a CD, DVD, or USB. You can then use the recovery image files and deploy them locally or to a remote partition or a recovery partition.
-
-DaRT 8.0 is an important part of the Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack (MDOP), a dynamic solution available to Software Assurance customers that helps reduce software installation costs, enables delivery of applications as services, and helps manage and control enterprise desktop environments.
-
-[Getting Started with DaRT 8.0](getting-started-with-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[About DaRT 8.0](about-dart-80-dart-8.md)**|**[Release Notes for DaRT 8.0](release-notes-for-dart-80--dart-8.md)**|**[About DaRT 8.0 SP1](about-dart-80-sp1.md)**|**[Release Notes for DaRT 8.0 SP1](release-notes-for-dart-80-sp1.md)**|**[About DaRT 8.1](about-dart-81.md)**|**[Release Notes for DaRT 8.1](release-notes-for-dart-81.md)**|**[Overview of the Tools in DaRT 8.0](overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-80-dart-8.md)**|**[Accessibility for DaRT 8.0](accessibility-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Planning for DaRT 8.0](planning-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Planning to Deploy DaRT 8.0](planning-to-deploy-dart-80-dart-8.md)**|**[DaRT 8.0 Supported Configurations](dart-80-supported-configurations-dart-8.md)**|**[Planning to Create the DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image](planning-to-create-the-dart-80-recovery-image-dart-8.md)**|**[Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image](planning-how-to-save-and-deploy-the-dart-80-recovery-image-dart-8.md)**|**[DaRT 8.0 Planning Checklist](dart-80-planning-checklist-dart-8.md)
-
-[Deploying DaRT 8.0](deploying-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Deploying DaRT 8.0 to Administrator Computers](deploying-dart-80-to-administrator-computers-dart-8.md)**|**[Creating the DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image](creating-the-dart-80-recovery-image-dart-8.md)**|**[Deploying the DaRT Recovery Image](deploying-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-8.md)**|**[DaRT 8.0 Deployment Checklist](dart-80-deployment-checklist-dart-8.md)
-
-[Operations for DaRT 8.0](operations-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Recovering Computers Using DaRT 8.0](recovering-computers-using-dart-80-dart-8.md)**|**[Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer](diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer--dart-8.md)**|**[Security and Privacy for DaRT 8.0](security-and-privacy-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)**|**[Administering DaRT 8.0 Using PowerShell](administering-dart-80-using-powershell-dart-8.md)
-
-[Technical Reference for DaRT 8.0](technical-reference-for-dart-80-new-ia.md)
-
-[Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) users should use Windows Defender Offline (WDO) for malware detection-->](use-windows-defender-offline-wdo-for-malware-protection-not-dart.md)
-
-[Troubleshooting DaRT 8.0](troubleshooting-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-### More Information
-
-[How Do I Get MDOP](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049)
-Get information about how to download DaRT.
-
-[Release Notes for DaRT 8.0](release-notes-for-dart-80--dart-8.md)
-View updated product information and known issues for DaRT 8.0.
-
-[MDOP TechCenter Page](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=225286)
-Learn about the latest MDOP information and resources.
-
-[MDOP Information Experience](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=236032)
-Find documentation, videos, and other resources for MDOP technologies. You can also [send us feedback](mailto:MDOPDocs@microsoft.com), or learn about updates by following us on [Facebook](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=242445) or [Twitter](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=242447).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/operations-for-dart-80-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/operations-for-dart-80-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a629db0966..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/operations-for-dart-80-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Operations for DaRT 8.0
-description: Operations for DaRT 8.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: a31615de-eb6e-41af-909c-d0b6f3eb3f2f
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Operations for DaRT 8.0
-
-
-This section includes information about the various types of Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 administration and operating tasks that are typically performed by an administrator. This section also includes step-by-step procedures to help you successfully perform those tasks.
-
-## Operations information
-
-
-- [Recovering Computers Using DaRT 8.0](recovering-computers-using-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
- This section provides instructions on how to use DaRT 8.0 to recover local or remote computers by using the DaRT recovery image.
-
-- [Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer](diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer--dart-8.md)
-
- This section explains how to open and run the Crash Analyzer on either an end-user or non-end-user computer to debug a memory dump file and then diagnose computer errors.
-
-- [Security and Privacy for DaRT 8.0](security-and-privacy-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
- This section describes measures for maintaining security while using DaRT.
-
-- [Administering DaRT 8.0 Using PowerShell](administering-dart-80-using-powershell-dart-8.md)
-
- This section lists the Windows PowerShell commands that administrators can use to perform various DaRT tasks.
-
-## Other resources for DaRT 8.0 operations
-
-
-[Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 8 Administrator's Guide](index.md)
-
-[Getting Started with DaRT 8.0](getting-started-with-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Planning for DaRT 8.0](planning-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Deploying DaRT 8.0](deploying-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Troubleshooting DaRT 8.0](troubleshooting-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-80-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-80-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ec7b892511..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-80-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,159 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Overview of the Tools in DaRT 8.0
-description: Overview of the Tools in DaRT 8.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 1766c82e-c099-47d4-b186-4689b026a7e0
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 10/03/2016
----
-
-
-# Overview of the Tools in DaRT 8.0
-
-
-From the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window in Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0, you can start any of the individual tools that you include when you create the DaRT 8.0 recovery image. For information about how to access the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window, see [How to Recover Local Computers by Using the DaRT Recovery Image](how-to-recover-local-computers-by-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-8.md).
-
-If it is available, you can use the **Solution Wizard** on the **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window to select the tool that best addresses your particular issue, based on a brief interview that the wizard provides.
-
-## Exploring the DaRT tools
-
-
-A description of the DaRT 8.0 tools follows.
-
-### Computer Management
-
-**Computer Management** is a collection of Windows administrative tools that help you troubleshoot a problem computer. You can use the **Computer Management** tools in DaRT to view system information and event logs, manage disks, list autoruns, and manage services and drivers. The **Computer Management** console is customized to help you diagnose and repair problems that might be preventing the Windows operating system from starting.
-
-**Note**
-The recovery of dynamic disks with DaRT is not supported.
-
-
-
-### Crash Analyzer
-
-Use the **Crash Analyzer Wizard** to quickly determine the cause of a computer failure by analyzing the memory dump file on the Windows operating system that you are repairing. **Crash Analyzer** examines the memory dump file for the driver that caused a computer to fail. You can then disable the problem device driver by using the **Services and Drivers** node in the **Computer Management** tool.
-
-The **Crash Analyzer Wizard** requires the Debugging Tools for Windows and symbol files for the operating system that you are repairing. You can include both requirements when you create the DaRT recovery image. If they are not included on the recovery image and you do not have access to them on the computer that you are repairing, you can copy the memory dump file to another computer and use the stand-alone version of **Crash Analyzer** to diagnose the problem.
-
-Running **Crash Analyzer** is a good idea even if you plan to reimage the computer. The image could have a defective driver that is causing problems in your environment. By running **Crash Analyzer**, you can identify problem drivers and improve the image stability.
-
-For more information about **Crash Analyzer**, see [Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer](diagnosing-system-failures-with-crash-analyzer--dart-8.md).
-
-### Defender
-
-**Important**
-Environments with the DaRT Defender deployed should instead use the Windows Defender Offline (WDO) protection image for malware detection. Because of how the Defender tool integrates into DaRT, all supported DaRT version deployments cannot apply these anti-malware updates to their DaRT images. For more information, see [Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) users should use Windows Defender Offline (WDO) for malware detection-->](use-windows-defender-offline-wdo-for-malware-protection-not-dart.md).
-
-
-
-**Defender** can help detect malware and unwanted software and warn you of security risks. You can use this tool to scan a computer for and remove malware even when the installed Windows operating system is not running. When **Defender** detects malicious or unwanted software, it prompts you to remove, quarantine, or allow for each item.
-
-Malware that uses rootkits can mask itself from the running operating system. If a rootkit-enabled virus or spyware is in a computer, most real-time scanning and removal tools can no longer see it or remove it. Because you boot the problem computer into DaRT and the installed operating system is offline, you can detect the rootkit without it being able to mask itself.
-
-### Disk Commander
-
-**Disk Commander** lets you recover and repair disk partitions or volumes by using one of the following recovery processes:
-
-- Restore the master boot record (MBR)
-
-- Recover one or more lost volumes
-
-- Restore partition tables from **Disk Commander** backup
-
-- Save partition tables to **Disk Commander** backup
-
-**Warning**
-We recommend that you back up a disk before you use **Disk Commander** to repair it. By using **Disk Commander**, you can potentially damage volumes and make them inaccessible. Additionally, changes to one volume can affect other volumes because volumes on a disk share a partition table.
-
-
-
-**Note**
-The recovery of dynamic disks with DaRT is not supported.
-
-
-
-### Disk Wipe
-
-You can use **Disk Wipe** to delete all data from a disk or volume, even the data that is left behind after you reformat a hard disk drive. **Disk Wipe** lets you select from either a single-pass overwrite or a four-pass overwrite, which meets current U.S. Department of Defense standards.
-
-**Warning**
-After wiping a disk or volume, you cannot recover the data. Verify the size and label of a volume before erasing it.
-
-
-
-### Explorer
-
-The **Explorer** tool lets you browse the computer’s file system and network shares so that you can remove important data that the user stored on the local drive before you try to repair or reimage the computer. And because you can map drive letters to network shares, you can easily copy and move files from the computer to the network for safekeeping or from the network to the computer to restore them.
-
-### File Restore
-
-**File Restore** lets you try to restore files that were accidentally deleted or that were too big to fit in the Recycle Bin. **File Restore** is not limited to regular disk volumes, but can find and restore files on lost volumes or on volumes that are encrypted by BitLocker.
-
-**Note**
-The recovery of dynamic disks with DaRT is not supported.
-
-
-
-### File Search
-
-Before reimaging a computer, recovering files from the local hard disk is important, especially when the user might not have backed up or stored the files elsewhere.
-
-The **Search** tool opens a **File Search** window that you can use to find documents when you do not know the file path or to search for general kinds of files across all local hard disks. You can search for specific file-name patterns in specific paths. You can also limit results to a date range or size range.
-
-### Hotfix Uninstall
-
-The **Hotfix Uninstall Wizard** lets you remove hotfixes or service packs from the Windows operating system on the computer that you are repairing. Use this tool when a hotfix or service pack is suspected in preventing the operating system from starting.
-
-We recommend that you uninstall only one hotfix at a time, even though the tool lets you uninstall more than one.
-
-**Important**
-Programs that were installed or updated after a hotfix was installed might not work correctly after you uninstall a hotfix.
-
-
-
-### Locksmith
-
-The **Locksmith Wizard** lets you set or change the password for any local account on the Windows operating system that you are analyzing or repairing. You do not have to know the current password. However, the password that you set must comply with any requirements that are defined by a local Group Policy Object. This includes password length and complexity.
-
-You can use **Locksmith** when the password for a local account, such as the local Administrator account, is unknown. You cannot use **Locksmith** to set passwords for domain accounts.
-
-### Registry Editor
-
-You can use **Registry Editor** to access and change the registry of the Windows operating system that you are analyzing or repairing. This includes adding, removing, and editing keys and values, and importing registry (.reg) files.
-
-**Warning**
-Serious problems can occur if you change the registry incorrectly by using **Registry Editor**. These problems might require you to reinstall the operating system. Before you make changes to the registry, you should back up any valued data on the computer. Change the registry at your own risk.
-
-
-
-### SFC Scan
-
-The **SFC Scan** tool starts the **System File Repair Wizard** and lets you repair system files that are preventing the installed Windows operating system from starting. The **System File Repair Wizard** can automatically repair system files that are corrupted or missing, or it can prompt you before it performs any repairs.
-
-### Solution Wizard
-
-The **Solution Wizard** presents a series of questions and then recommends the best tool for the situation, based on your answers. This wizard helps you determine which tool to use when you are not familiar with the tools in DaRT.
-
-### TCP/IP Config
-
-When you boot a problem computer into DaRT, it is set to automatically obtain its TCP/IP configuration (IP address and DNS server) from Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). If DHCP is unavailable, you can manually configure TCP/IP by using the **TCP/IP Config** tool. You first select a network adapter, and then configure the IP address and DNS server for that adapter.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Getting Started with DaRT 8.0](getting-started-with-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/planning-for-dart-80-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/planning-for-dart-80-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 79fd2ee510..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/planning-for-dart-80-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning for DaRT 8.0
-description: Planning for DaRT 8.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: c8be3ab3-dc54-43b9-b9ff-fbd5e1ef29a7
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning for DaRT 8.0
-
-
-The goal of deployment planning is to successfully and efficiently deploy Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 so that it does not disrupt your users or the network.
-
-Before you deploy DaRT 8.0, you should consider the different deployment configurations and prerequisites. This section includes information that can help you gather the information to formulate a deployment plan that best meets your business requirements.
-
-## Planning information
-
-
-- [Planning to Deploy DaRT 8.0](planning-to-deploy-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
- There are several deployment configurations and prerequisites that you must consider before you create your deployment plan. This section includes information that can help you gather the information that you must have to formulate a deployment plan that best meets your business requirements.
-
-- [DaRT 8.0 Planning Checklist](dart-80-planning-checklist-dart-8.md)
-
- This checklist can assist you in preparing your computing environment for the DaRT deployment.
-
-## Other resources for DaRT planning
-
-
-[Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 8 Administrator's Guide](index.md)
-
-[Getting Started with DaRT 8.0](getting-started-with-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Deploying DaRT 8.0](deploying-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Operations for DaRT 8.0](operations-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Troubleshooting DaRT 8.0](troubleshooting-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/planning-how-to-save-and-deploy-the-dart-80-recovery-image-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/planning-how-to-save-and-deploy-the-dart-80-recovery-image-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index cebf48b625..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/planning-how-to-save-and-deploy-the-dart-80-recovery-image-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,97 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image
-description: Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 939fbe17-0e30-4c85-8782-5b84d69442a7
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image
-
-
-You can save and deploy the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 recovery image by using the following methods. When you are determining the method that you will use, consider the advantages and disadvantages of each. You should also consider your infrastructure and support staff. If you have a small infrastructure, you might want to deploy DaRT 8.0 by using removable media, since the recovery image will always be available if you install it to the local hard drive.
-
-If your organization uses Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS), you may want to deploy recovery images as a network service by using Windows DS. Recovery images are always available to any connected computer. You can deploy multiple images from Windows DS and maintain them all in one place.
-
-**Note**
-You may want to use more than one method in your organization. For example, you can boot into DaRT from a remote partition for most situations and have a USB flash drive available in case the end-user computer cannot connect to the network.
-
-
-
-The following table shows some advantages and disadvantages of each method of using DaRT in your organization.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Method to Boot into DaRT
-
Advantages
-
Disadvantages
-
-
-
-
-
Removable Media
-
The recovery image is written to a CD, DVD, or USB drive to enable support staff to take the recovery tools with them to the unstable computer.
-
Supports scenarios in which the master boot record (MBR) is corrupted and you cannot access the hard disk and supports cases in which there is no network connection.
-
Enables you to create multiple recovery images with different tools to provide different levels of support.
-
Provides a built-in tool for burning recovery images to removable media.
-
Requires that support staff are physically at the end-user computer to boot into DaRT.
-
Requires time and maintenance to create multiple media with different configurations for 32-bit and 64-bit computers.
-
-
-
From a remote (network) partition
-
The recovery image is hosted on a network boot server like Windows Deployment Services (Windows DS), which allows users or support staff to stream it to computers on demand.
-
Available to all computers that have access to the network boot server.
-
Recovery images are hosted on a central server, which enables centralized updates.
-
Centralized help desk staff can provide repairs by using remote connectivity.
-
No local storage requirement on the clients.
-
Ability to create multiple recovery images with different tools for specific support levels.
-
The need to secure Windows DS infrastructure to ensure that regular users can start only the DaRT recovery image and not the full operating system imaging process.
-
-
-
Requires that the end-user computer is connected to the network at runtime.
-
Requires that the recovery image is brought across the network.
-
-
-
From a recovery partition on the local hard drive
-
The recovery image is installed on a local hard drive either manually or by using electronic software distribution systems like System Center Configuration Manager.
-
The recovery image is always available because it is pre-staged on the computer.
-
Centralized help desk staff can provide support by using Remote Connection.
-
The recovery image is centrally managed and deployed.
-
Additional recovery key requests on computers that are protected by Windows BitLocker drive encryption are eliminated.
-
Local storage is required.
-
A dedicated, unencrypted partition for recovery image placement is recommended to reduce the risk of a failed boot partition.
-
When updating DaRT, you must update all computers in your enterprise instead of just one partition (on the network) or removable device.
-
Additional consideration is required if you deploy the recovery image after BitLocker has been enabled.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy DaRT 8.0](planning-to-deploy-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/planning-to-create-the-dart-80-recovery-image-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/planning-to-create-the-dart-80-recovery-image-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c75e4671f5..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/planning-to-create-the-dart-80-recovery-image-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,79 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning to Create the DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image
-description: Planning to Create the DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: cfd0e1e2-c379-4460-b545-3f7be9f33583
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning to Create the DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image
-
-
-Use the information in this section when you are planning to create the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 recovery image.
-
-## Planning to create the DaRT 8.0 recovery image
-
-
-When you create the DaRT recovery image, you have to decide which tools to include on the image. To make the decision, consider that end users may have access to those tools. If support engineers will take the recovery image media to end users’ computers to diagnose issues, you may want to install all of the tools on the recovery image. If you plan to diagnose end user’s computers remotely, you may want to disable some of the tools, such as Disk Wipe and Registry Editor, and then enable other tools, including Remote Connection.
-
-When you create the DaRT recovery image, you will also specify whether you want to include additional drivers or files. Determine the locations of any additional drivers or files that you want to include on the DaRT recovery image.
-
-For more information about the DaRT tools, see [Overview of the Tools in DaRT 8.0](overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-80-dart-8.md). For more information about how to help create a secure recovery image, see [Security Considerations for DaRT 8.0](security-considerations-for-dart-80--dart-8.md).
-
-## Prerequisites for the recovery image
-
-
-The following items are required or recommended for creating the DaRT recovery image:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Prerequisite
-
Details
-
-
-
Windows 8 source files
-
Required to create the DaRT recovery image. Provide the path of a Windows 8 DVD or of Windows 8 source files.
-
-
-
Windows Debugging Tools for your platform
-
Required when you run the Crash Analyzer to determine the cause of a computer failure. We recommend that you specify the path of the Windows Debugging Tools at the time that you create the DaRT recovery image. You can download the Windows Debugging Tools here: Download and Install Debugging Tools for Windows.
-
-
-
Optional: Defender definitions
-
The latest definitions for Defender are required when you run Defender. Although you can download the definitions when you run Defender, we recommend that you download the latest definitions at the time you create the DaRT recovery image so that you can still run the tool with the latest definitions even if the problem computer does not have network connectivity.
-
-
-
Optional: Windows symbols files for use with Crash Analyzer
-
Typically, debugging information is stored in a symbol file that is separate from the program. You must have access to the symbol information when you debug an application that has stopped responding, for example, if it stopped working. For more information, see Diagnosing System Failures with Crash Analyzer.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy DaRT 8.0](planning-to-deploy-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/planning-to-deploy-dart-80-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/planning-to-deploy-dart-80-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index dd46acd8ee..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/planning-to-deploy-dart-80-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning to Deploy DaRT 8.0
-description: Planning to Deploy DaRT 8.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 36f2babb-9ac5-4ea2-932c-12c6211f5be2
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning to Deploy DaRT 8.0
-
-
-You should consider all of the different deployment configurations and prerequisites before you create your deployment plan. This section includes information that can help you gather the information that you must have to formulate a deployment plan that best meets your business requirements.
-
-## Review the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 software prerequisites and supported configurations
-
-
-After preparing your computing environment for DaRT 8.0 installation, make sure that you review the prerequisite software to install and the supported configurations to confirm that the selected computers for the installation meet the minimum hardware and operating system requirements. For information about prerequisites that you need to consider to create the DaRT recovery image, see [Planning to Create the DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image](planning-to-create-the-dart-80-recovery-image-dart-8.md).
-
-[DaRT 8.0 Supported Configurations](dart-80-supported-configurations-dart-8.md)
-
-## Plan for creating the DaRT 8.0 recovery image
-
-
-Before you start to create the DaRT recovery image, you need to consider possible security issues, the tools that you want to include on the recovery image, and the prerequisite software that you need to install.
-
-[Planning to Create the DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image](planning-to-create-the-dart-80-recovery-image-dart-8.md)
-
-## Plan how to save and deploy the DaRT recovery image
-
-
-There are several methods that you can use to save and deploy the DaRT recovery image. Before you start to create the recovery image, review the advantages and disadvantages of each method and consider how you want to use DaRT in your enterprise.
-
-[Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image](planning-how-to-save-and-deploy-the-dart-80-recovery-image-dart-8.md)
-
-## Other resources for planning to deploy DaRT 8.0
-
-
-[Planning for DaRT 8.0](planning-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/recovering-computers-using-dart-80-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/recovering-computers-using-dart-80-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0cec24ac75..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/recovering-computers-using-dart-80-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,76 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Recovering Computers Using DaRT 8.0
-description: Recovering Computers Using DaRT 8.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 0caeb7d9-c1e6-4f32-bc27-157b91630989
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Recovering Computers Using DaRT 8.0
-
-
-After deploying the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 recovery image, you can use DaRT 8.0 to recover computers. The information in this section describes the recovery tasks that you can perform.
-
-You have several different methods to choose from to boot into DaRT, depending on how you deploy the DaRT recovery image.
-
-- Insert a DaRT recovery image CD, DVD, or USB flash drive into the problem computer and use it to boot into the computer.
-
-- Boot into DaRT from a recovery partition on the problem computer.
-
-- Boot into DaRT from a remote partition on the network.
-
-For information about the advantages and disadvantages of each method, see [Planning How to Save and Deploy the DaRT 8.0 Recovery Image](planning-how-to-save-and-deploy-the-dart-80-recovery-image-dart-8.md).
-
-Whichever method that you use to boot into DaRT, you must enable the boot device in the BIOS for the boot option or options that you want to make available to the end user.
-
-**Note**
-Configuring the BIOS is unique, depending on the kind of hard disk drive, network adapters, and other hardware that is used in your organization.
-
-
-
-## Recover a local computer by using the DaRT recovery image
-
-
-To recover a local computer by using DaRT, you must be physically present at the end-user computer that is experiencing problems that require DaRT.
-
-[How to Recover Local Computers by Using the DaRT Recovery Image](how-to-recover-local-computers-by-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-8.md)
-
-## Recover a remote computer by using the DaRT recovery image
-
-
-The Remote Connection feature in DaRT lets an IT administrator run the DaRT tools remotely on an end-user computer. After certain information is provided by the end user (or by a help desk professional working on the end-user computer), the IT administrator or help desk worker can take control of the end user's computer and run the necessary DaRT tools remotely.
-
-**Important**
-The two computers establishing a remote connection must be part of the same network.
-
-
-
-The **Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset** window includes the option to run DaRT on an end-user computer remotely from an administrator computer. The end user opens the DaRT tools on the problem computer and starts the remote session by clicking **Remote Connection**.
-
-The Remote Connection feature on the end-user computer creates the following connection information: a ticket number, a port, and a list of all available IP addresses. The ticket number and port are generated randomly.
-
-The IT administrator or help desk worker enters this information into the **DaRT Remote Connection Viewer** to establish the terminal services connection to the end-user computer. The terminal services connection that is established lets an IT administrator remotely interact with the DaRT tools on the end-user computer. The end-user computer then processes the connection information, shares its screen, and responds to instructions from the IT administrator computer.
-
-[How to Recover Remote Computers by Using the DaRT Recovery Image](how-to-recover-remote-computers-by-using-the-dart-recovery-image-dart-8.md)
-
-## Other resources for recovering computers using DaRT 8.0
-
-
-[Operations for DaRT 8.0](operations-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/release-notes-for-dart-80--dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/release-notes-for-dart-80--dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 501dfef1e7..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/release-notes-for-dart-80--dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,101 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Release Notes for DaRT 8.0
-description: Release Notes for DaRT 8.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: e8b373c8-7aa5-4930-a8f9-743d26145dad
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Release Notes for DaRT 8.0
-
-
-**To search these release notes, press CTRL+F.**
-
-Read these release notes thoroughly before you install Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0.
-
-These release notes contain information that is required to successfully install DaRT 8.0. The release notes also contain information that is not available in the product documentation. If there is a difference between these release notes and other DaRT documentation, the latest change should be considered authoritative. These release notes supersede the content that is included with this product.
-
-To get the DaRT software, see [How to Get MDOP](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049).
-
-## About the product documentation
-
-
-For information about documentation for DaRT, see the [DaRT home page](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=252096) on Microsoft TechNet.
-
-To obtain a downloadable copy of DaRT documentation, see on the Microsoft Download Center.
-
-## Providing feedback
-
-
-We are interested in your feedback on DaRT 8.0. You can send your feedback to .
-
-**Note**
-This email address is not a support channel, but your feedback will help us to plan future changes for our documentation and product releases.
-
-
-
-For the latest information about MDOP and additional learning resources, see the [MDOP Information Experience](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=236032) page.
-
-For more information about new updates or to provide feedback, follow us on [Facebook](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=242445) or [Twitter](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=242447).
-
-## Known issues with DaRT 8.0
-
-
-### System restore fails when you run Locksmith or Registry Editor
-
-If you run Locksmith, Registry Editor, and possibly other tools, System Restore fails.
-
-**Workaround:** Close and restart DaRT and then start System Restore.
-
-### SFC scan fails to run after you launch and close Locksmith or Computer Management
-
-If you start and then close the Locksmith or Computer Management tools, System File Checker fails to run.
-
-**Workaround:** Close and restart DaRT and then start SFC.
-
-### DaRT installer does not fail when ADK has not been installed
-
-If you install DaRT 8.0 by using the command line to execute the MSI, and the ADK has not been installed, the DaRT installation should fail. Currently, the DaRT 8.0 installer installs all components except the DaRT 8.0 recovery image.
-
-**Workaround:** None.
-
-### Defender cannot be launched after Locksmith, RegEdit, Crash Analyzer, and Computer Management are launched
-
-Defender does not launch if you have already launched Locksmith, RegEdit, Crash Analyzer, and Computer Management.
-
-**Workaround:** Close and restart DaRT and then launch Defender.
-
-### Defender may be slow to launch
-
-Defender sometimes takes a few minutes to launch. The progress bar indicates the current loading status.
-
-**Workaround:** None.
-
-## Release notes copyright information
-
-
-Microsoft, Active Directory, ActiveX, Bing, Excel, Silverlight, SQL Server, Windows, Microsoft Intune, and Windows PowerShell are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[About DaRT 8.0](about-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/release-notes-for-dart-80-sp1.md b/mdop/dart-v8/release-notes-for-dart-80-sp1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 063f9be979..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/release-notes-for-dart-80-sp1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,83 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Release Notes for DaRT 8.0 SP1
-description: Release Notes for DaRT 8.0 SP1
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: fa7512d8-fb00-4c27-8f65-c15f3a8ff1cc
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Release Notes for DaRT 8.0 SP1
-
-
-**To search these release notes, press CTRL+F.**
-
-Read these release notes thoroughly before you install Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 Service Pack 1 (SP1).
-
-These release notes contain information that is required to successfully install Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 8.0 SP1. The release notes also contain information that is not available in the product documentation. If there is a difference between these release notes and other DaRT documentation, the latest change should be considered authoritative. These release notes supersede the content that is included with this product.
-
-## About the product documentation
-
-
-For information about documentation for DaRT, see the [DaRT home page](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=252096) on Microsoft TechNet.
-
-## Known issues with DaRT 8.0 SP1
-
-
-### System restore fails when you run Locksmith or Registry Editor
-
-If you run Locksmith, Registry Editor, and possibly other tools, System Restore fails.
-
-**Workaround:** Close and restart DaRT and then start System Restore.
-
-### SFC scan fails to run after you launch and close Locksmith or Computer Management
-
-If you start and then close the Locksmith or Computer Management tools, System File Checker fails to run.
-
-**Workaround:** Close and restart DaRT and then start SFC.
-
-### DaRT installer does not fail when ADK has not been installed
-
-If you install DaRT 8.0 SP1 by using the command line to run the MSI, and the ADK has not been installed, the DaRT installation should fail. Currently, the DaRT 8.0 SP1 installer installs all components except the DaRT recovery image.
-
-**Workaround:** None.
-
-### Defender cannot be launched after Locksmith, RegEdit, Crash Analyzer, and Computer Management are launched
-
-Defender does not launch if you have already launched Locksmith, RegEdit, Crash Analyzer, and Computer Management.
-
-**Workaround:** Close and restart DaRT and then launch Defender.
-
-### Defender may be slow to launch
-
-Defender sometimes takes a few minutes to launch. The progress bar indicates the current loading status.
-
-**Workaround:** None.
-
-## Release notes copyright information
-
-
-Microsoft, Active Directory, ActiveX, Bing, Excel, Silverlight, SQL Server, Windows, Microsoft Intune, and Windows PowerShell are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[About DaRT 8.0 SP1](about-dart-80-sp1.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/release-notes-for-dart-81.md b/mdop/dart-v8/release-notes-for-dart-81.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 9b8d9d6639..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/release-notes-for-dart-81.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,89 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Release Notes for DaRT 8.1
-description: Release Notes for DaRT 8.1
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 44303107-60f4-485c-848a-7e0529f142d4
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Release Notes for DaRT 8.1
-
-
-**To search these release notes, press CTRL+F.**
-
-Read these release notes thoroughly before you install Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.1.
-
-These release notes contain information that is required to successfully install Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 8.1. The release notes also contain information that is not available in the product documentation. If there is a difference between these release notes and other DaRT documentation, the latest change should be considered authoritative. These release notes supersede the content that is included with this product.
-
-## Known issues with DaRT 8.1
-
-
-### Disk Commander is unable to repair a corrupt master boot record in a physical partition in Windows 8.1
-
-In Windows 8.1, the “Restore the Master Boot Record (MBR) or the header of the GUID Partition Table (GPT)” option in Disk Commander is unable to repair a corrupt master boot record in a physical partition, and therefore is unable to boot the client computer.
-
-**Workaround:** Start **Startup Repair**, click **Troubleshoot**, click **Advanced options**, and then click **Start repair**.
-
-### Multiple instances of Disk Wipe that target the same drive cause all instances except the last one to report a failure
-
-If you start multiple instances of Disk Wipe, and then try to wipe the same drive by using two separate Disk Wipe instances, all instances except the last one report a failure to wipe the drive.
-
-**Workaround:** None.
-
-### Disk Wipe may not clear all data on solid-state drives that have flash memory
-
-If you use Disk Wipe to clear data on a solid-state drive (SSD) that has flash memory, all of the data may not be erased. This issue occurs because the SSD firmware controls the physical location of writes while Disk Wipe is running.
-
-**Workaround:** None.
-
-### System restore fails when you run Locksmith Wizard or Registry Editor
-
-If you run Locksmith Wizard, Registry Editor, and possibly other tools, System Restore fails.
-
-**Workaround:** Close and restart DaRT, and then start System Restore.
-
-### System File Checker (SFC) Scan fails to run after you start and close Locksmith Wizard or Computer Management
-
-If you start and then close Locksmith Wizard or tools in Computer Management, System File Checker fails to run.
-
-**Workaround:** Close and restart DaRT, and then start System File Checker.
-
-### DaRT installer does not fail when the Windows Assessment and Deployment Kit is not installed
-
-If you install DaRT 8.1 by using the command line to run the Windows Installer (.msi), and the Windows Assessment and Deployment Kit (Windows ADK) has not been installed, the DaRT installation should fail. Currently, the DaRT 8.1 installer installs all components except the DaRT recovery image.
-
-**Workaround:** None.
-
-### Windows Defender cannot start after Locksmith Wizard, Registry Editor, Crash Analyzer, and Computer Management are started
-
-Windows Defender does not start if you have already started Locksmith Wizard, Registry Editor, Crash Analyzer, and Computer Management.
-
-**Workaround:** Close and restart DaRT, and then start Windows Defender.
-
-### Windows Defender may be slow to start
-
-Windows Defender sometimes takes a few minutes to start. The progress bar indicates the current loading status.
-
-**Workaround:** None.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[About DaRT 8.1](about-dart-81.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/security-and-privacy-for-dart-80-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/security-and-privacy-for-dart-80-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index bb8ae3ba3b..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/security-and-privacy-for-dart-80-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Security and Privacy for DaRT 8.0
-description: Security and Privacy for DaRT 8.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 668188fc-d9e9-4607-b90a-9e50bf53bc88
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Security and Privacy for DaRT 8.0
-
-
-Use the following information to help you plan for security and privacy considerations in Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0.
-
-## Security considerations for DaRT 8.0
-
-
-There are several security-related considerations that you should plan for when deploying and using DaRT in your environment. The information in this section provides a brief overview about the security-related considerations for DaRT.
-
-[Security Considerations for DaRT 8.0](security-considerations-for-dart-80--dart-8.md)
-
-## Privacy considerations for DaRT 8.0
-
-
-The information in this section explains many of the data collection and use practices of DaRT.
-
-[DaRT 8.0 Privacy Statement](dart-80-privacy-statement-dart-8.md)
-
-## Other resources for DaRT 8.0 security and privacy
-
-
-[Operations for DaRT 8.0](operations-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/security-considerations-for-dart-80--dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/security-considerations-for-dart-80--dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 918f14acaf..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/security-considerations-for-dart-80--dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,74 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Security Considerations for DaRT 8.0
-description: Security Considerations for DaRT 8.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 45ef8164-fee7-41a1-9a36-de4e3264e7a8
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Security Considerations for DaRT 8.0
-
-
-This topic contains a brief overview about the accounts and groups, log files, and other security-related considerations for Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0. For more information, follow the links within this article.
-
-## General security considerations
-
-
-**Understand the security risks**. DaRT 8.0 includes functionality that lets an administrator or a help desk worker run the DaRT tools remotely to resolve problems on an end-user computer. In addition, you can save the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) image to a USB flash drive or put the ISO image on a network to include its contents as a recovery partition on a computer’s hard disk. These capabilities provide flexibility, but also create potential security risks that you should consider when configuring DaRT.
-
-**Physically secure your computers**. When administrators and help desk workers are not physically at their computers, they should lock their computers and use a secured screen saver.
-
-**Apply the most recent security updates to all computers**. Stay informed about new updates for operating systems by subscribing to the Security Notification service ().
-
-## Limit end-user access to DaRT tools
-
-
-When you are creating the DaRT recovery image, you can select the tools that you want to include. For security reasons, you might want to restrict end-user access to the more powerful DaRT tools, such as Disk Wipe and Locksmith. In DaRT 8.0, you can disable certain tools during configuration and still make them available to help desk workers when the end user starts the Remote Connection feature.
-
-You can even configure the DaRT image so that the option to start a remote connection session is the only tool available to an end user.
-
-**Important**
-After the remote connection is established, all the tools that you included in the recovery image, including those unavailable to the end user, will become available to any help desk worker who is working on the end–user computer.
-
-
-
-For more information about including tools in the DaRT recovery image, see [Overview of the Tools in DaRT 8.0](overview-of-the-tools-in-dart-80-dart-8.md).
-
-## Secure the DaRT recovery image
-
-
-If you deploy the DaRT recovery image by saving it to a USB flash drive or by creating a remote partition or a recovery partition, you might want to include your company’s preferred method of drive encryption on the ISO. Encrypting the ISO helps to ensure that end users cannot use DaRT functionality if they were to gain access to the recovery image, and it ensures that unauthorized users cannot boot into DaRT on computers that belong to someone else. If you use an encryption method, be sure to deploy and enable it in all computers.
-
-**Note**
-DaRT 8.0 supports BitLocker natively.
-
-
-
-To include drive encryption, add the encryption solution files when you create the recovery image. Your encryption solution must be able to run on WinPE. End users who boot from the ISO are then able to access that encryption solution and unblock the drive.
-
-## Maintain security between two computers when you use Remote Connection
-
-
-By default, the communication between two computers that have established a **Remote Connection** session may not be encrypted. Therefore, to help maintain security between the two computers, we recommend that both computers are a part of the same network.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Security and Privacy for DaRT 8.0](security-and-privacy-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/technical-reference-for-dart-80-new-ia.md b/mdop/dart-v8/technical-reference-for-dart-80-new-ia.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6fefab5848..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/technical-reference-for-dart-80-new-ia.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Technical Reference for DaRT 8.0
-description: Technical Reference for DaRT 8.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 1d0bf98b-b56b-4ce6-ad19-eb85e1ff1287
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 10/03/2016
----
-
-
-# Technical Reference for DaRT 8.0
-
-
-This section includes technical reference information about Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) 8.0 that provide additional information an administrator.
-
-## Technical reference
-
-
-[Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) users should use Windows Defender Offline (WDO) for malware detection-->](use-windows-defender-offline-wdo-for-malware-protection-not-dart.md)
-
- Environments with the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) Defender tool deployed should instead use the Windows Defender Offline (WDO) protection image for malware detection.
-
-## Other resources for DaRT 8.0 operations
-
-
-[Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 8 Administrator's Guide](index.md)
-
-[Getting Started with DaRT 8.0](getting-started-with-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Planning for DaRT 8.0](planning-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Deploying DaRT 8.0](deploying-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Operations for DaRT 8.0](operations-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Troubleshooting DaRT 8.0](troubleshooting-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/troubleshooting-dart-80-dart-8.md b/mdop/dart-v8/troubleshooting-dart-80-dart-8.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1ad577b12a..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/troubleshooting-dart-80-dart-8.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,92 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Troubleshooting DaRT 8.0
-description: Troubleshooting DaRT 8.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 0444a390-3251-47f4-b6c8-828d4a2e8af4
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Troubleshooting DaRT 8.0
-
-
-Troubleshooting content is not included in the Administrator’s Guide for this product. Instead, you can find troubleshooting information for this product on the [TechNet Wiki](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=224905).
-
-## How to find troubleshooting content
-
-
-You can use the following information to find troubleshooting or additional technical content for this product.
-
-### Search the MDOP documentation
-
-The first step to find help content in the Administrator’s Guide is to search the MDOP documentation on TechNet.
-
-After you search the MDOP documentation, your next step would be to search the troubleshooting information for the product in the TechNet Wiki.
-
-**To search the MDOP product documentation**
-
-1. Use a web browser to navigate to the [MDOP Information Experience](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=236032) TechNet home page.
-
-2. Enter applicable search terms in the **Search TechNet with Bing** search box at the top of the MDOP Information Experience home page.
-
-3. Review the search results for assistance.
-
-**To search the TechNet wiki**
-
-1. Use a web browser to navigate to the [TechNet Wiki](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=224905) home page.
-
-2. Enter applicable search terms in the **Search TechNet Wiki** search box on the TechNet Wiki home page.
-
-3. Review the search results for assistance.
-
-## How to create a troubleshooting article
-
-
-If you have a troubleshooting tip or a best practice to share that is not already included in the MDOP OnlineHelp or TechNet Wiki, you can create your own TechNet Wiki articles.
-
-**To create a TechNet Wiki troubleshooting or best practices article**
-
-1. Use a web browser to navigate to the [TechNet Wiki](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=224905) home page.
-
-2. Log in with your Windows Live ID.
-
-3. Review the **Getting Started** section to learn the basics of the TechNet Wiki and its articles.
-
-4. Select **Post an article >>** at the bottom of the **Getting Started** section.
-
-5. On the Wiki article **Add Page** page, select **Insert Template** from the toolbar, select the troubleshooting article template (**Troubleshooting.html**), and then click **Insert**.
-
-6. Be sure to give the article a descriptive title and then overwrite the template information as needed to create your troubleshooting or best practice article.
-
-7. After you review your article, be sure to include a tag that is named **Troubleshooting** and another for the product name. This helps others to find your content.
-
-8. Click **Save** to publish the article to the TechNet Wiki.
-
-## Other resources for troubleshooting DaRT 8.0
-
-
-[Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset 8 Administrator's Guide](index.md)
-
-[Getting Started with DaRT 8.0](getting-started-with-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Planning for DaRT 8.0](planning-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Deploying DaRT 8.0](deploying-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-[Operations for DaRT 8.0](operations-for-dart-80-dart-8.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/dart-v8/use-windows-defender-offline-wdo-for-malware-protection-not-dart.md b/mdop/dart-v8/use-windows-defender-offline-wdo-for-malware-protection-not-dart.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6265073d6b..0000000000
--- a/mdop/dart-v8/use-windows-defender-offline-wdo-for-malware-protection-not-dart.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Use Windows Defender Offline (WDO) for malware protection not DaRT
-description: Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) users should use Windows Defender Offline (WDO) for malware detection
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 59678283-4b44-4d02-ba8f-0e7315efd5d1
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: support
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 09/25/2019
----
-
-
-# Use Windows Defender Offline (WDO) for malware protection, not DaRT.
-
-Environments that have the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT) Defender tool deployed should instead use the Windows Defender Offline (WDO) protection image for malware detection. This applies to all currently supported versions of DaRT. These versions include DaRT 7, DaRT 8, and DaRT 8.1, together with their service packs.
-
-## About Windows Defender
-
-
-The Windows Defender tool distributes anti-malware updates more frequently than the DaRT Defender tool. Because of how the Defender tool integrates into DaRT, all supported DaRT version deployments cannot apply these anti-malware updates to their DaRT images. Without these updates, the DaRT Defender tool quickly becomes outdated. To make sure of up-to-date protection at scan time, you should download Windows Defender Offline to create a bootable image for scanning.
-
-Currently deployed DaRT images do not have to be removed or updated. We recommend that you deploy the bootable image that is provided by Windows Defender Offline for all future malware scans. Using an outdated version of the DaRT Defender tool could result in undetected malware.
-
-For more information about Windows Defender Offline downloads and FAQs, go to the following website: [What is Windows Defender Offline?](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=394127).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/docfx.json b/mdop/docfx.json
index e6f79ff24a..abcead924c 100644
--- a/mdop/docfx.json
+++ b/mdop/docfx.json
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@
"ms.topic": "article",
"ms.date": "04/05/2017",
"feedback_system": "GitHub",
- "feedback_github_repo": "MicrosoftDocs/windows-itpro-docs",
+ "feedback_github_repo": "https://github.com/MicrosoftDocs/mdop-docs",
"feedback_product_url": "https://support.microsoft.com/help/4021566/windows-10-send-feedback-to-microsoft-with-feedback-hub-app",
"_op_documentIdPathDepotMapping": {
"./": {
diff --git a/mdop/index.md b/mdop/index.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 93ce634a80..0000000000
--- a/mdop/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,179 +0,0 @@
----
-title: MDOP Information Experience
-description: MDOP Information Experience
-ms.assetid: 12b8ab56-3267-450d-bb22-1c7e44cb8e52
-author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 07/24/2018
----
-
-# MDOP Information Experience
-
-
-The Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack (MDOP) is a portfolio of technologies available as a subscription for Software Assurance customers. MDOP helps to improve compatibility and management, reduce support costs, improve asset management, and improve policy control.
-
-The MDOP Information Experience provides product documentation, videos, blogs, and other resources to help users implement and optimize their experience with the MDOP technologies. You can learn about updates and events by following us on [Facebook](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=242445) or [Twitter](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=242447).
-
-## MDOP Documentation Links
-
-
-The following table provides links to the product documentation for the MDOP products by version.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft Advanced Group Policy Management (AGPM) extends the capabilities of the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC) to provide change control and improved management.
-
AGPM 4.0 SP3 – Windows 10, Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, Windows Vista SP1, Windows Server 2012, Windows Server 2012 R2, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2
-
AGPM 4.0 SP2 - Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, Windows Vista SP1, Windows Server 2012, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2
-
AGPM 4.0 SP1 - Windows 8, Windows 7, Windows Vista SP1, Windows Server 2012, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2
-
AGPM 4.0 - Windows Vista SP1, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2
Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) lets you make applications available to end user computers without installing the applications directly on those computers.
Microsoft User Experience Virtualization (UE-V) captures settings to apply to computers accessed by the user including desktop computers, laptop computers, and VDI sessions.
-
-
-
-## Supplemental MDOP Product Guidance
-
-
-In addition to the product documentation available online, supplemental product guidance such as informational videos and virtual labs are available for most MDOP products.
-
-
-
-
-
-## How to Get MDOP
-
-
-MDOP is a suite of products that can help streamline desktop deployment, management, and support across the enterprise. MDOP is available as an additional subscription for Software Assurance customers.
-
-**Download MDOP**
-MDOP subscribers can download the software at the [Microsoft Volume Licensing website (MVLS)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=166331).
-
-**Purchase MDOP**
-Visit the enterprise [Purchase Windows Enterprise Licensing](https://www.microsoft.com/licensing/how-to-buy/how-to-buy) website to find out how to purchase MDOP for your business.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/TOC.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/TOC.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8d49baf940..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/TOC.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
-# [Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 1](index.md)
-## [Getting Started with MBAM 1.0](getting-started-with-mbam-10.md)
-### [About MBAM 1.0](about-mbam-10.md)
-#### [Release Notes for MBAM 1.0](release-notes-for-mbam-10.md)
-### [Evaluating MBAM 1.0](evaluating-mbam-10.md)
-### [High Level Architecture for MBAM 1.0](high-level-architecture-for-mbam-10.md)
-### [Accessibility for MBAM 1.0](accessibility-for-mbam-10.md)
-## [Planning for MBAM 1.0](planning-for-mbam-10.md)
-### [Preparing your Environment for MBAM 1.0](preparing-your-environment-for-mbam-10.md)
-#### [MBAM 1.0 Deployment Prerequisites](mbam-10-deployment-prerequisites.md)
-#### [Planning for MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Requirements](planning-for-mbam-10-group-policy-requirements.md)
-#### [Planning for MBAM 1.0 Administrator Roles](planning-for-mbam-10-administrator-roles.md)
-### [Planning to Deploy MBAM 1.0](planning-to-deploy-mbam-10.md)
-#### [MBAM 1.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-10-supported-configurations.md)
-#### [Planning for MBAM 1.0 Server Deployment](planning-for-mbam-10-server-deployment.md)
-#### [Planning for MBAM 1.0 Client Deployment](planning-for-mbam-10-client-deployment.md)
-### [MBAM 1.0 Planning Checklist](mbam-10-planning-checklist.md)
-## [Deploying MBAM 1.0](deploying-mbam-10.md)
-### [Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Server Infrastructure](deploying-the-mbam-10-server-infrastructure.md)
-#### [How to Install and Configure MBAM on a Single Server](how-to-install-and-configure-mbam-on-a-single-server-mbam-1.md)
-#### [How to Install and Configure MBAM on Distributed Servers](how-to-install-and-configure-mbam-on-distributed-servers-mbam-1.md)
-#### [How to Configure Network Load Balancing for MBAM](how-to-configure-network-load-balancing-for-mbam.md)
-### [Deploying MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Objects](deploying-mbam-10-group-policy-objects.md)
-#### [How to Install the MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Template](how-to-install-the-mbam-10-group-policy-template.md)
-#### [How to Edit MBAM 1.0 GPO Settings](how-to-edit-mbam-10-gpo-settings.md)
-#### [How to Hide Default BitLocker Encryption in The Windows Control Panel](how-to-hide-default-bitlocker-encryption-in-the-windows-control-panel.md)
-### [Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Client](deploying-the-mbam-10-client.md)
-#### [How to Deploy the MBAM Client to Desktop or Laptop Computers](how-to-deploy-the-mbam-client-to-desktop-or-laptop-computers-mbam-1.md)
-#### [How to Deploy the MBAM Client as Part of a Windows Deployment](how-to-deploy-the-mbam-client-as-part-of-a-windows-deployment-mbam-1.md)
-### [Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Language Release Update](deploying-the-mbam-10-language-release-update.md)
-#### [How to Install the MBAM Language Update on a Single Server](how-to-install-the-mbam-language-update-on-a-single-server-mbam-1.md)
-#### [How to Install the MBAM Language Update on Distributed Servers](how-to-install-the-mbam-language-update-on-distributed-servers-mbam-1.md)
-#### [Known Issues in the MBAM International Release](known-issues-in-the-mbam-international-release-mbam-1.md)
-### [MBAM 1.0 Deployment Checklist](mbam-10-deployment-checklist.md)
-## [Operations for MBAM 1.0](operations-for-mbam-10.md)
-### [Administering MBAM 1.0 Features](administering-mbam-10-features.md)
-#### [How to Manage MBAM Administrator Roles](how-to-manage-mbam-administrator-roles-mbam-1.md)
-#### [How to Manage Hardware Compatibility](how-to-manage-hardware-compatibility-mbam-1.md)
-#### [How to Manage Computer BitLocker Encryption Exemptions](how-to-manage-computer-bitlocker-encryption-exemptions.md)
-#### [How to Manage User BitLocker Encryption Exemptions](how-to-manage-user-bitlocker-encryption-exemptions-mbam-1.md)
-#### [How to Manage MBAM Client BitLocker Encryption Options by Using the Control Panel](how-to-manage-mbam-client-bitlocker-encryption-options-by-using-the-control-panel-mbam-1.md)
-### [Monitoring and Reporting BitLocker Compliance with MBAM 1.0](monitoring-and-reporting-bitlocker-compliance-with-mbam-10.md)
-#### [Understanding MBAM Reports](understanding-mbam-reports-mbam-1.md)
-#### [How to Generate MBAM Reports](how-to-generate-mbam-reports-mbam-1.md)
-### [Performing BitLocker Management with MBAM](performing-bitlocker-management-with-mbam.md)
-#### [How to Reset a TPM Lockout](how-to-reset-a-tpm-lockout-mbam-1.md)
-#### [How to Recover a Drive in Recovery Mode](how-to-recover-a-drive-in-recovery-mode-mbam-1.md)
-#### [How to Recover a Moved Drive](how-to-recover-a-moved-drive-mbam-1.md)
-#### [How to Recover a Corrupted Drive](how-to-recover-a-corrupted-drive-mbam-1.md)
-#### [How to Determine the BitLocker Encryption State of a Lost Computers](how-to-determine-the-bitlocker-encryption-state-of-a-lost-computers-mbam-1.md)
-### [Maintaining MBAM 1.0](maintaining-mbam-10.md)
-#### [High Availability for MBAM 1.0](high-availability-for-mbam-10.md)
-#### [How to Move MBAM 1.0 Features to Another Computer](how-to-move-mbam-10-features-to-another-computer.md)
-### [Security and Privacy for MBAM 1.0](security-and-privacy-for-mbam-10.md)
-#### [Security Considerations for MBAM 1.0](security-considerations-for-mbam-10.md)
-#### [Privacy Statement for MBAM 1.0](privacy-statement-for-mbam-10.md)
-### [Administering MBAM 1.0 by Using PowerShell](administering-mbam-10-by-using-powershell.md)
-## [Troubleshooting MBAM 1.0](troubleshooting-mbam-10.md)
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/about-mbam-10.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/about-mbam-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 3d6a3f705f..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/about-mbam-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,56 +0,0 @@
----
-title: About MBAM 1.0
-description: About MBAM 1.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 99254aaa-2b30-4b2e-8365-0d4b67a89a0c
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# About MBAM 1.0
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) provides a simplified administrative interface to BitLocker drive encryption and offers enhanced protection against data theft or data exposure for computers that are lost or stolen. BitLocker encrypts all data that is stored on the Windows operating system volume and configured data volumes, which includes the Windows operating system, hibernation and paging files, applications, and the data that is used by applications.
-
-With Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring, you can select the BitLocker encryption policy options that are appropriate for your enterprise so that you can monitor the client compliance with those policies and then report the encryption status of both the enterprise and individual computers. In addition, you can access recovery key information when users forget their PIN or password or when their BIOS or boot record changes.
-
-**Note**
-BitLocker is not covered in detail in this guide. For an overview of BitLocker, see [BitLocker Drive Encryption Overview](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=225013).
-
-
-
-The following groups might be interested in using MBAM to manage BitLocker:
-
-- Administrators, IT security professionals, and compliance officers who are tasked with ensuring that confidential data is not disclosed without authorization
-
-- Administrators who are responsible for securing computers in remote or branch offices
-
-- Administrators who are responsible for servers or Windows client computers that are mobile
-
-- Administrators who are responsible for decommissioning servers that contain confidential data
-
-## MBAM 1.0 Release Notes
-
-
-For more information and for latest updates, see [Release Notes for MBAM 1.0](release-notes-for-mbam-10.md).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Getting Started with MBAM 1.0](getting-started-with-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/accessibility-for-mbam-10.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/accessibility-for-mbam-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index bfe5549622..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/accessibility-for-mbam-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,106 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Accessibility for MBAM 1.0
-description: Accessibility for MBAM 1.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 5c1bf1a3-76cf-458c-ac4a-cd343aace4de
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Accessibility for MBAM 1.0
-
-
-Microsoft is committed to making its products and services easier for everyone to use. This section provides information about features and services that make this product and its corresponding documentation more accessible for people with disabilities.
-
-## Access Any Command with a Few Keystrokes
-
-
-Access keys let you quickly use a command by pressing a few keys. You can get to most commands by using two keystrokes. To use an access key:
-
-1. Press ALT.
-
- The keyboard shortcuts are displayed over each feature that is available in the current view.
-
-2. Press the letter shown in the keyboard shortcut over the feature that you want to use.
-
-**Note**
-To cancel the action that you are taking and hide the keyboard shortcuts, press ALT.
-
-
-
-## Documentation in Alternative Formats
-
-
-If you have difficulty reading or handling printed materials, you can obtain the documentation for many Microsoft products in more accessible formats. You can view an index of accessible product documentation on the Microsoft Accessibility website. In addition, you can obtain additional Microsoft publications from Learning Ally (formerly Recording for the Blind & Dyslexic, Inc.). Learning Ally distributes these documents to registered, eligible members of their distribution service.
-
-For information about the availability of Microsoft product documentation and books from Microsoft Press, contact:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Learning Ally (formerly Recording for the Blind & Dyslexic, Inc.)
-
20 Roszel Road
-
Princeton, NJ 08540
-
-
-
-
Telephone number from within the United States:
-
(800) 221-4792
-
-
-
Telephone number from outside the United States and Canada:
Web addresses can change, so you might be unable to connect to the website or sites mentioned here.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Customer Service for People with Hearing Impairments
-
-
-If you are deaf or hard-of-hearing, complete access to Microsoft product and customer services is available through a text telephone (TTY/TDD) service:
-
-- For customer service, contact Microsoft Sales Information Center at (800) 892-5234 between 6:30 AM and 5:30 PM Pacific Time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.
-
-- For technical assistance in the United States, contact Microsoft Product Support Services at (800) 892-5234 between 6:00 AM and 6:00 PM Pacific Time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays. In Canada, dial (905) 568-9641 between 8:00 AM and 8:00 PM Eastern Time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.
-
-Microsoft Support Services are subject to the prices, terms, and conditions in place at the time the service is used.
-
-## For More Information
-
-
-For more information about how accessible technology for computers helps to improve the lives of people with disabilities, see the [Microsoft Accessibility website](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=8431).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Getting Started with MBAM 1.0](getting-started-with-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/administering-mbam-10-by-using-powershell.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/administering-mbam-10-by-using-powershell.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1609db7fb7..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/administering-mbam-10-by-using-powershell.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,88 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Administering MBAM 1.0 by Using PowerShell
-description: Administering MBAM 1.0 by Using PowerShell
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 3bf2eca5-4ab7-4e84-9e80-c0c7d709647b
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Administering MBAM 1.0 by Using PowerShell
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) provides the following listed set of Windows PowerShell cmdlets. Administrators can use these PowerShell cmdlets to perform various MBAM server tasks from the command prompt rather than from the MBAM administration website.
-
-## How to administer MBAM by using PowerShell
-
-
-Use the PowerShell cmdlets described here to administer MBAM.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Name
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Add-MbamHardwareType
-
Adds a new hardware model to the MBAM hardware inventory. This cmdlet can also specify whether the hardware is supported or unsupported for BitLocker drive encryption.
-
-
-
Get-MbamBitLockerRecoveryKey
-
Requests an MBAM recovery key that will enable a user to unlock a computer or encrypted drive.
-
-
-
Get-MbamHardwareType
-
Gets a master hardware inventory that contains data that indicates whether hardware models are compatible or incompatible with BitLocker drive encryption.
-
-
-
Get-MbamTPMOwnerPassword
-
Provides a TPM owner password for a user to manage their TPM (Trusted Platform Module) access. Helps users when TPM has locked them out and will no longer accept their PIN.
-
-
-
Install-Mbam
-
Installs MBAM features that provide advanced group policy, encryption, key recovery, and compliance reporting tools.
-
-
-
Remove-MbamHardwareType
-
Removes the hardware models from the hardware inventory.
-
-
-
Set-MbamHardwareType
-
Allows management of a master hardware inventory to designate whether or not hardware models are capable or incapable to perform BitLocker encryption.
-
-
-
Uninstall-Mbam
-
Removes previously installed MBAM features that provide advanced policy, encryption, key recovery, and compliance reporting tools.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for MBAM 1.0](operations-for-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/administering-mbam-10-features.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/administering-mbam-10-features.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5f4fbb0244..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/administering-mbam-10-features.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,71 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Administering MBAM 1.0 Features
-description: Administering MBAM 1.0 Features
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: dd9a9eff-f1ad-4af3-85d9-c19131a4ad22
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Administering MBAM 1.0 Features
-
-
-After you complete all necessary Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) planning and deployment, you can configure and use MBAM to manage enterprise BitLocker encryption. The information in this section describes post-installation day-to-day MBAM feature operations tasks.
-
-## Manage MBAM Administrator Roles
-
-
-After MBAM Setup is complete for all server features, administrative users must be granted access to these server features. As a best practice, administrators who will manage or use MBAM server features, should be assigned to Active Directory security groups and then those groups should be added to the appropriate MBAM administrative local group.
-
-[How to Manage MBAM Administrator Roles](how-to-manage-mbam-administrator-roles-mbam-1.md)
-
-## Manage Hardware Compatibility
-
-
-The MBAM Hardware Compatibility feature can help you to ensure that only the computer hardware that you specify as supporting BitLocker will be encrypted. When this feature is turned on, bit\_admmontla will encrypt only computers that are marked as Compatible.
-
-**Important**
-When this feature is turned off, all computers where the MBAM policy is deployed will be encrypted.
-
-
-
-MBAM can collect information on both the make and model of client computers if you deploy the “Allow Hardware Compatibility Checking” Group Policy. If you configure this policy, the MBAM agent reports the computer make and model information to the MBAM Server when the MBAM Client is deployed on a client computer.
-
-[How to Manage Hardware Compatibility](how-to-manage-hardware-compatibility-mbam-1.md)
-
-[How to Manage User BitLocker Encryption Exemptions](how-to-manage-user-bitlocker-encryption-exemptions-mbam-1.md)
-
-## Manage BitLocker encryption exemptions
-
-
-MBAM can grant two forms of exemption from BitLocker encryption: computer exemption and user exemption. Computer exemption is typically used when a company has computers that do not have to be encrypted, such as computers that are used in development or testing, or older computers that do not support BitLocker. In some cases, local law may also require that certain computers are not encrypted. You may also choose to exempt users who do not need or want their drives encrypted.
-
-[How to Manage Computer BitLocker Encryption Exemptions](how-to-manage-computer-bitlocker-encryption-exemptions.md)
-
-## Manage MBAM Client BitLocker Encryption Options by using the Control Panel
-
-
-If enabled through a Group Policy Objects (GPO), a custom MBAM control panel that is named BitLocker Encryption Options will be available under **System and Security**. This customized control panel replaces the default Windows BitLocker control panel. The MBAM control panel enables you to unlock encrypted drives (fixed and removable), and also helps you manage your PIN or password.
-
-[How to Manage MBAM Client BitLocker Encryption Options by Using the Control Panel](how-to-manage-mbam-client-bitlocker-encryption-options-by-using-the-control-panel-mbam-1.md)
-
-## Other resources for Administering MBAM features
-
-
-[Operations for MBAM 1.0](operations-for-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/deploying-mbam-10-group-policy-objects.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/deploying-mbam-10-group-policy-objects.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 37436151d6..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/deploying-mbam-10-group-policy-objects.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Objects
-description: Deploying MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Objects
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 2129291e-d2b2-41ed-b643-1e311c49fee7
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Objects
-
-
-To successfully deploy Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM), you must first determine the Group Policies that you will use in your implementation of MBAM. For more information about the various available policies, see [Planning for MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Requirements](planning-for-mbam-10-group-policy-requirements.md). When you have determined the policies that you are going to use, you must use the MBAM 1.0 Group Policy template to create and deploy one or more Group Policy objects (GPO) that include the MBAM policy settings.
-
-## Install the MBAM 1.0 Group Policy template
-
-
-In addition to providing server-related features of MBAM, the server setup application includes an MBAM Group Policy template. You can install this template on any computer that is able to run the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC) or Advanced Group Policy Management (AGPM).
-
-[How to Install the MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Template](how-to-install-the-mbam-10-group-policy-template.md)
-
-## Deploy MBAM 1.0 Group Policy settings
-
-
-After you create the necessary GPOs, you must deploy the MBAM Group Policy settings to your organization’s client computers.
-
-[How to Edit MBAM 1.0 GPO Settings](how-to-edit-mbam-10-gpo-settings.md)
-
-## Display the MBAM Control Panel in Windows
-
-
-Because MBAM offers a customized MBAM control panel that can replace the default Windows BitLocker control panel, you can also choose to hide the default BitLocker Control Panel from end users by using Group Policy.
-
-[How to Hide Default BitLocker Encryption in The Windows Control Panel](how-to-hide-default-bitlocker-encryption-in-the-windows-control-panel.md)
-
-## Other resources for deploying MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Objects
-
-
-[Deploying MBAM 1.0](deploying-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/deploying-mbam-10.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/deploying-mbam-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ab3420e5c6..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/deploying-mbam-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,65 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying MBAM 1.0
-description: Deploying MBAM 1.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: ff952ed6-08b2-4ed0-97b8-bf89f22cccbc
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying MBAM 1.0
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) supports a number of different deployment configurations. This section of the Administrator’s Guide for Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring includes information that you should consider about the deployment of MBAM and step-by-step procedures to help you successfully perform the tasks that you must complete at different stages of your deployment.
-
-## Deployment information
-
-
-- [Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Server Infrastructure](deploying-the-mbam-10-server-infrastructure.md)
-
- This section describes the different topology options for MBAM deployment and how to use MBAM Setup to deploy MBAM Server features.
-
-- [Deploying MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Objects](deploying-mbam-10-group-policy-objects.md)
-
- This section describes how to create and deploy the MBAM Group Policy Objects that are required to manage MBAM Clients and BitLocker encryption policies throughout the enterprise.
-
-- [Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Client](deploying-the-mbam-10-client.md)
-
- This section describes how to use the MBAM Client Windows Installer files to deploy the MBAM Client software.
-
-- [Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Language Release Update](deploying-the-mbam-10-language-release-update.md)
-
- This section describes how to deploy the MBAM language release update to provide support for additional non-English language user interfaces.
-
-- [MBAM 1.0 Deployment Checklist](mbam-10-deployment-checklist.md)
-
- This section provides a deployment checklist that can help you deploy MBAM Server and MBAM Client.
-
-## Other Resources for deploying MBAM
-
-
-- [Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 1 Administrator's Guide](index.md)
-
-- [Getting Started with MBAM 1.0](getting-started-with-mbam-10.md)
-
-- [Planning for MBAM 1.0](planning-for-mbam-10.md)
-
-- [Operations for MBAM 1.0](operations-for-mbam-10.md)
-
-- [Troubleshooting MBAM 1.0](troubleshooting-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/deploying-the-mbam-10-client.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/deploying-the-mbam-10-client.md
deleted file mode 100644
index cba12f248f..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/deploying-the-mbam-10-client.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Client
-description: Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Client
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: f7ca233f-5035-4ff9-ab3a-f2453b4929d1
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Client
-
-
-The Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) Client enables administrators to enforce and monitor BitLocker drive encryption on computers in the enterprise. The BitLocker client can be integrated into an organization by deploying the client through tools like Active Directory Domain Services or by directly encrypting the client computers as part of the initial imaging process.
-
-Depending on when you deploy the MBAM Client, you can enable BitLocker encryption on a computer in your organization either before or after the end user receives the computer. To control this timing, you configure Group Policy and deploy the MBAM Client software by using an enterprise software deployment system.
-
-You can use either or both of these methods in your organization. If you use both methods, you can improve compliance, reporting, and key recovery support.
-
-## Deploy the MBAM Client to desktop or laptop computers
-
-
-After you have configured Group Policy, you can deploy the MBAM Client installation Windows Installer files to target computers. You can do this by use of an enterprise software deployment system product like Microsoft System Center 2012 Configuration Manager or Active Directory Domain Services. The two available MBAM Client installation Windows Installer files are MBAMClient-64bit.msi and MBAMClient-32bit.msi. These files are provided with the MBAM software. For more information about how to deploy MBAM Group Policy Objects, see [Deploying MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Objects](deploying-mbam-10-group-policy-objects.md).
-
-[How to Deploy the MBAM Client to Desktop or Laptop Computers](how-to-deploy-the-mbam-client-to-desktop-or-laptop-computers-mbam-1.md)
-
-## Deploy the MBAM Client as part of a Windows deployment
-
-
-In some organizations, new computers are received and configured centrally. This situation enables administrators to install the MBAM Client to manage BitLocker encryption on each computer before any user data is written to the computer. This approach helps to ensure that computers are properly encrypted because the administrator performs the action without reliance on end-user action. A key assumption for this scenario is that the policy of the organization installs a corporate Windows image before the computer is delivered to the user.
-
-[How to Deploy the MBAM Client as Part of a Windows Deployment](how-to-deploy-the-mbam-client-as-part-of-a-windows-deployment-mbam-1.md)
-
-## Other resources for deploying the MBAM Client
-
-
-[Deploying MBAM 1.0](deploying-mbam-10.md)
-
-[Planning for MBAM 1.0 Client Deployment](planning-for-mbam-10-client-deployment.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/deploying-the-mbam-10-language-release-update.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/deploying-the-mbam-10-language-release-update.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 22cac957e6..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/deploying-the-mbam-10-language-release-update.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,105 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Language Release Update
-description: Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Language Release Update
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 9dbd85c3-e470-4752-a90f-25754dd46dab
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Language Release Update
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) 1.0 Language Release is an update to MBAM and includes the support of new languages. The new languages are:
-
-- English (en-us)
-
-- French (fr)
-
-- Italian (it)
-
-- German (de)
-
-- Spanish (es)
-
-- Korean (ko)
-
-- Japanese (ja)
-
-- Brazilian Portuguese (pt-br)
-
-- Russian (ru)
-
-- Chinese Traditional (zh-tw)
-
-- Chinese Simplified (zh-cn)
-
-The MBAM 1.0 language update will change the version number from MBAM 1.0.1237.1 to MBAM 1.0.2001.
-
-You do not need to reinstall all of the MBAM features in order to add these additional languages. This topic defines the steps required to add the newly supported languages.
-
-## Deploy the MBAM international release to MBAM Server features
-
-
-To begin, you must update the following MBAM server features:
-
-- Compliance and Audit Report
-
-- Administration and Monitoring Server
-
-- Policy Templates
-
-Then, you must run **MbamSetup.exe** to upgrade the MBAM features that run on the same server at the same time.
-
-[How to Install the MBAM Language Update on a Single Server](how-to-install-the-mbam-language-update-on-a-single-server-mbam-1.md)
-
-[How to Install the MBAM Language Update on Distributed Servers](how-to-install-the-mbam-language-update-on-distributed-servers-mbam-1.md)
-
-## Install the MBAM language update for Group Policies
-
-
-The MBAM Group Policy templates can be installed on each management workstation or they can be copied to the Group Policy central store, in order to make the templates available to all Group Policy administrators. The policy templates cannot be directly installed on a domain controller. If you do not use a Group Policy central store, then you must copy the policies manually to each domain controller that manages MBAM Group Policy.
-
-To add the MBAM language policies templates, copy the Group Policy language files from %SystemRoot%\\PolicyDefinitions on the computer where the “Policy Templates” role was installed to the same location on the workstation computer. Here are some examples of Group Policy files:
-
-- BitLockerManagement.admx
-
-- BitLockerUserManagement.admx
-
-- en-us\\BitLockerManagement.adml
-
-- en-us\\BitLockerUserManagement.adml
-
-- fr-fr\\ BitLockerManagement.adml
-
-- fr-fr\\ BitLockerUserManagement.adml
-
-- (and similarly for each supported language)
-
-## Known issues in the MBAM international release
-
-
-This topic contains known issues for Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring International Release.
-
-[Known Issues in the MBAM International Release](known-issues-in-the-mbam-international-release-mbam-1.md)
-
-## Other resources for deploying the MBAM 1.0 Language Update
-
-
-[Deploying MBAM 1.0](deploying-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/deploying-the-mbam-10-server-infrastructure.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/deploying-the-mbam-10-server-infrastructure.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 22d1fabb5c..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/deploying-the-mbam-10-server-infrastructure.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Server Infrastructure
-description: Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Server Infrastructure
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 90529379-b70e-4c92-b188-3d7aaf1844af
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Server Infrastructure
-
-
-You can install Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) Server features in different configurations by using one to five servers. Generally, you should use a configuration of three to five servers for production environments, depending on your scalability needs. For more information about performance scalability of MBAM and recommended deployment topologies, see the [MBAM Scalability and High-Availability Guide White Paper](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=258314).
-
-## Deploy all MBAM 1.0 on a single server
-
-
-In this configuration, all MBAM features are installed on a single server. This deployment topology for MBAM server infrastructure will support up to 21,000 MBAM client computers.
-
-**Important**
-This configuration is supported, but we recommend it for testing only.
-
-
-
-The procedures in this section describe the full installation of the MBAM features on a single server.
-
-[How to Install and Configure MBAM on a Single Server](how-to-install-and-configure-mbam-on-a-single-server-mbam-1.md)
-
-## Deploy MBAM 1.0 on distributed servers
-
-
-MBAM features can be installed in different configurations, depending on your scalability needs. For more information about how to plan for MBAM server feature deployment, see [Planning for MBAM 1.0 Server Deployment](planning-for-mbam-10-server-deployment.md).
-
-The procedures in this section describe the full installation of the MBAM features on distributed servers.
-
-### Three-computer configuration
-
-The following diagram displays the three-computer deployment topology for MBAM. We recommend this topology for production environments that support up to 55,000 MBAM Clients.
-
-
-
-In this configuration, MBAM features are installed in the following configuration:
-
-1. Recovery and Hardware Database, Compliance and Audit Database, and Compliance and Audit Reports are installed on a server.
-
-2. Administration and Monitoring Server feature is installed on a server.
-
-3. MBAM Group Policy template is installed on a computer that is capable of modifying Group Policy Objects (GPO).
-
-### Four-computer configuration
-
-The following diagram displays the four-computer deployment topology for MBAM. We recommended this topology for production environments that support up to 110,000 MBAM Clients.
-
-
-
-In this configuration, MBAM features are installed in the following configuration:
-
-1. Recovery and Hardware Database, Compliance and Audit Database, and Compliance and Audit Reports are installed on a server.
-
-2. Administration and Monitoring Server feature is installed on a server that is configured in a Network Load Balancing (NLB) Server Cluster.
-
-3. MBAM Group Policy template is installed on a computer that is capable of modifying the Group Policy Objects.
-
-### Five-computer configuration
-
-The following diagram displays the five-computer deployment topology for MBAM. We recommend this topology for production environments that support up to 135,000 MBAM Clients.
-
-
-
-In this configuration, MBAM features are installed in the following configuration:
-
-1. Recovery and Hardware Database is installed on a server.
-
-2. The Compliance and Audit Database and Compliance and Audit Reports are installed on a server.
-
-3. Administration and Monitoring Server feature is installed on a server that is configured in a Network Load Balancing (NLB) Server Cluster.
-
-4. MBAM Group Policy template is installed on a computer that is capable of modifying Group Policy Objects.
-
-[How to Install and Configure MBAM on Distributed Servers](how-to-install-and-configure-mbam-on-distributed-servers-mbam-1.md)
-
-[How to Configure Network Load Balancing for MBAM](how-to-configure-network-load-balancing-for-mbam.md)
-
-## Other resources for MBAM 1.0 Server features deployment
-
-
-[Deploying MBAM 1.0](deploying-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/evaluating-mbam-10.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/evaluating-mbam-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c7a6729376..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/evaluating-mbam-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,184 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Evaluating MBAM 1.0
-description: Evaluating MBAM 1.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: a1e2b674-eda9-4e1c-9b4c-e748470c71f2
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Evaluating MBAM 1.0
-
-
-Before you deploy Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) into a production environment, you should evaluate it in a lab environment. You can use the information in this topic to set up MBAM in a single server lab environment for evaluation purposes only.
-
-While the actual deployment steps are very similar to the scenario that is described in [How to Install and Configure MBAM on a Single Server](how-to-install-and-configure-mbam-on-a-single-server-mbam-1.md), this topic contains additional information to enable you to set up an MBAM evaluation environment in the least amount of time.
-
-## Set up the Lab Environment
-
-
-Even when you set up a non-production instance of MBAM to evaluate in a lab environment, you should still verify that you have met the deployment prerequisites and the hardware and software requirements. For more information, see [MBAM 1.0 Deployment Prerequisites](mbam-10-deployment-prerequisites.md) and [MBAM 1.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-10-supported-configurations.md). You should also review [Preparing your Environment for MBAM 1.0](preparing-your-environment-for-mbam-10.md) before you begin the MBAM evaluation deployment.
-
-### Plan for an MBAM Evaluation Deployment
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
References
-
Notes
-
-
-
-
-
-
Review the Getting Started information about MBAM to gain a basic understanding of the product before you begin your deployment planning.
Prepare your computing environment for the MBAM installation. To do so, you must enable the Transparent Data Encryption (TDE) on the SQL Server instances that will host MBAM databases. To enable TDE in your lab environment, you can create a .sql file to run against the master database that is hosted on the instance of the SQL Server that MBAM will use.
-
-Note
You can use the following example to create a .sql file for your lab environment to quickly enable TDE on the SQL Server instance that will host the MBAM databases. These SQL Server commands will enable TDE by using a locally signed SQL Server certificate. Make sure to back up the TDE certificate and its associated encryption key to the example local backup path of C:\Backup</em>. The TDE certificate and key are required when recover the database or move the certificate and key to another server that has TDE encryption in place.
-
-
-
-
-
USE master;
-GO
-CREATE MASTER KEY ENCRYPTION BY PASSWORD = &#39;P@55w0rd';
-GO
-CREATE CERTIFICATE tdeCert WITH SUBJECT = 'TDE Certificate';
-GO
-BACKUP CERTIFICATE tdeCert TO FILE = 'C:\Backup\TDECertificate.cer'
- WITH PRIVATE KEY (
- FILE = 'C:\Backup\TDECertificateKey.pvk',
- ENCRYPTION BY PASSWORD = &#39;P@55w0rd');
-GO
-
-
-
-### Perform an MBAM Evaluation Deployment
-
-After you complete the necessary planning and software prerequisite installations to prepare your computing environment for an MBAM installation, you can begin the MBAM evaluation deployment.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Review the MBAM supported configurations information to make sure that the selected client and server computers are supported for the MBAM feature installation.
Add the Active Directory Domain Services security groups that you created during the planning phase to the appropriate local MBAM Server feature local groups on the new MBAM server.
-
-
-
-## Configure Lab Computers for MBAM Evaluation
-
-
-You can change the frequency settings on the MBAM Client status reporting by using Registry Editor. However, these modifications should be used for testing purposes only.
-
-**Warning**
-This topic describes how to change the Windows registry by using Registry Editor. If you change the Windows registry incorrectly, you can cause serious problems that might require you to reinstall Windows. You should make a backup copy of the registry files (System.dat and User.dat) before you change the registry. Microsoft cannot guarantee that the problems that might occur when you change the registry can be resolved. Change the registry at your own risk.
-
-
-
-### Modify the Frequency Settings on MBAM Client Status Reporting
-
-The MBAM Client wakeup and status reporting frequencies have a minimum value of 90 minutes when they are set to use Group Policy. You can change these frequencies on MBAM client computers by editing the Windows registry to lower values, which will help speed up the testing. To modify the frequency settings on MBAM Client status reporting, use a registry editor to navigate to **HKLM\\Software\\Policies\\FVE\\MDOPBitLockerManagement**, change the values for **ClientWakeupFrequency** and **StatusReportingFrequency** to **1** as the minimum client supported value, and then restart BitLocker Management Client Service. When you make this change, the MBAM Client will report every minute. You can set values this low only when you do so manually in the registry.
-
-### Modify the Startup Delay on MBAM Client Service
-
-In addition to the MBAM Client wakeup and status reporting frequencies, there is a random delay of up to 90 minutes when the MBAM Client agent service starts on client computers. If you do not want the random delay, create a **DWORD** value of **NoStartupDelay** under **HKLM\\Software\\Microsoft\\MBAM**, set its value to **1**, and then restart BitLocker Management Client Service.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Getting Started with MBAM 1.0](getting-started-with-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/getting-started-with-mbam-10.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/getting-started-with-mbam-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7d1f4c4060..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/getting-started-with-mbam-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Getting Started with MBAM 1.0
-description: Getting Started with MBAM 1.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 4fab4e4a-d25e-4661-b235-2b45bf5ac3e4
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-# Getting Started with MBAM 1.0
-
-> **IMPORTANT**
-> MBAM 1.0 will reach end of support on September 14, 2021.
-> See our [lifecycle page](https://support.microsoft.com/lifecycle/search?alpha=Microsoft%20BitLocker%20Administration%20and%20Monitoring%201.0) for more information. We recommend [migrating to MBAM 2.5](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-desktop-optimization-pack/mbam-v25/upgrading-to-mbam-25-or-mbam-25-sp1-from-previous-versions) or another supported version of MBAM, or migrating your BitLocker management to [Microsoft Endpoint Manager](https://www.microsoft.com/microsoft-365/microsoft-endpoint-manager).
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) requires thorough planning before you deploy it or use its features. Because this product can affect every computer in your organization, you might disrupt your entire network if you do not plan your deployment carefully. However, if you plan your deployment carefully and manage it so that it meets your business needs, MBAM can help reduce your administrative overhead and total cost of ownership.
-
-If you are new to this product, we recommend that you read the documentation thoroughly. Before you deploy it to a production environment, we also recommend that you validate your deployment plan in a test network environment. You might also consider taking a class about relevant technologies. For more information about Microsoft training opportunities, see the Microsoft Training Overview at .
-
-**Note**
-You can find a downloadable version of this documentation and the MBAM Evaluation Guide at .
-
-
-
-This section of the MBAM Administrator’s Guide includes high-level information about MBAM to provide you with a basic understanding of the product before you begin the deployment planning. Additional MBAM documentation can be found on the MBAM Documentation Resources Download page at .
-
-## Getting started with MBAM 1.0
-
-
-- [About MBAM 1.0](about-mbam-10.md)
-
- Provides a high-level overview of MBAM and how it can be used in your organization.
-
-- [Evaluating MBAM 1.0](evaluating-mbam-10.md)
-
- Provides information about how you can best evaluate MBAM for use in your organization.
-
-- [High Level Architecture for MBAM 1.0](high-level-architecture-for-mbam-10.md)
-
- Provides a description of the MBAM features and how they work together.
-
-- [Accessibility for MBAM 1.0](accessibility-for-mbam-10.md)
-
- Provides information about features and services that make this product and its corresponding documentation more accessible for people with disabilities.
-
-## Other resources for this product
-
-
-- [Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 1 Administrator's Guide](index.md)
-
-- [Planning for MBAM 1.0](planning-for-mbam-10.md)
-
-- [Deploying MBAM 1.0](deploying-mbam-10.md)
-
-- [Operations for MBAM 1.0](operations-for-mbam-10.md)
-
-- [Troubleshooting MBAM 1.0](troubleshooting-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/high-availability-for-mbam-10.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/high-availability-for-mbam-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 90c23329c3..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/high-availability-for-mbam-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,57 +0,0 @@
----
-title: High Availability for MBAM 1.0
-description: High Availability for MBAM 1.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 5869ecf8-1056-4c32-aecb-838a37e05d39
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# High Availability for MBAM 1.0
-
-
-This topic describes how to configure a highly available installation of Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM).
-
-## High Availability Scenarios for MBAM
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) is designed to be fault-tolerant. If a server becomes unavailable, the users should not be negatively affected. For example, if the MBAM agent cannot connect to the MBAM web server, users should not be prompted for action.
-
-When you plan your MBAM installation, consider the following concerns that can affect the availability of the MBAM service:
-
-- Drive encryption and recovery password – If a recovery password cannot be escrowed, the encryption will not start on the client computer.
-
-- Compliance status data upload – If the server that hosts the compliance status report service is not available, the compliance data will not remain current.
-
-- Help Desk recovery key access - If the Help Desk cannot access MBAM database information, they will be unable to provide recovery keys to users.
-
-- Availability of reports – Reports will not be available if the server that hosts the Compliance and Audit Reports is not available.
-
-The main concern for MBAM high availability is BitLocker key recovery availability. If the help desk cannot provide recovery keys, users who are locked out cannot unlock their computers. To avoid this problem, consider implementing redundant web servers and databases to ensure high availability.
-
-For more information about MBAM scalability and high availability, see the [MBAM Scalability White Paper](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=229025) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=229025).
-
-For general guidance on high availability for Microsoft SQL Server, see [High Availability](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=221504) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=221504).
-
-For general guidance on availability and scalability for web servers, see [Availability and Scalability](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=221503) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=221503).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Maintaining MBAM 1.0](maintaining-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/high-level-architecture-for-mbam-10.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/high-level-architecture-for-mbam-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4b98af6d48..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/high-level-architecture-for-mbam-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,68 +0,0 @@
----
-title: High Level Architecture for MBAM 1.0
-description: High Level Architecture for MBAM 1.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: b1349196-88ed-4d6c-8a1d-998f18127b6b
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# High Level Architecture for MBAM 1.0
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) is a client/server data encryption solution that can help you simplify BitLocker provisioning and deployment, improve BitLocker compliance and reporting, and reduce support costs. MBAM includes the features that are described in this topic.
-
-Additionally, there is a video that provides an overview of the MBAM architecture and MBAM Setup. For more information, see [MBAM Deployment and Architecture Overview](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=258392).
-
-## Architecture Overview
-
-
-The following diagram displays the MBAM architecture. The single-server MBAM deployment topology is shown to introduce the MBAM features. However, this MBAM deployment topology is recommended only for lab environments.
-
-**Note**
-At least a three-computer MBAM deployment topology is recommended for a production deployment. For more information about MBAM deployment topologies, see [Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Server Infrastructure](deploying-the-mbam-10-server-infrastructure.md).
-
-
-
-
-
-1. **Administration and Monitoring Server**. The MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server is installed on a Windows server and hosts the MBAM Administration and Management website and the monitoring web services. The MBAM Administration and Management website is used to determine enterprise compliance status, to audit activity, to manage hardware capability, and to access recovery data, such as the BitLocker recovery keys. The Administration and Monitoring Server connects to the following databases and services:
-
- - Recovery and Hardware Database. The Recovery and Hardware database is installed on a Windows-based server and supported SQL Server instance. This database stores recovery data and hardware information that is collected from MBAM client computers.
-
- - Compliance and Audit Database. The Compliance and Audit Database is installed on a Windows server and supported SQL Server instance. This database stores compliance data for MBAM client computers. This data is used primarily for reports that are hosted by SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS).
-
- - Compliance and Audit Reports. The Compliance and Audit Reports are installed on a Windows-based server and supported SQL Server instance that has the SSRS feature installed. These reports provide Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring reports. These reports can be accessed from the MBAM Administration and Management website or directly from the SSRS Server.
-
-2. **MBAM Client**. The Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring Client performs the following tasks:
-
- - Uses Group Policy to enforce the BitLocker encryption of client computers in the enterprise.
-
- - Collects the recovery key for the three BitLocker data drive types: operating system drives, fixed data drives, and removable data (USB) drives.
-
- - Collects recovery information and hardware information about the client computers.
-
- - Collects compliance data for the computer and passes the data to the reporting system.
-
-3. **Policy Template**. The MBAM Group Policy template is installed on a supported Windows-based server or client computer. This template is used to specify the MBAM implementation settings for BitLocker drive encryption.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Getting Started with MBAM 1.0](getting-started-with-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-configure-network-load-balancing-for-mbam.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-configure-network-load-balancing-for-mbam.md
deleted file mode 100644
index aa02943b12..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-configure-network-load-balancing-for-mbam.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,119 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Configure Network Load Balancing for MBAM
-description: How to Configure Network Load Balancing for MBAM
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: df2208c3-352b-4a48-9722-237b0c8cd6a5
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Configure Network Load Balancing for MBAM
-
-
-To verify that you have met the prerequisites and hardware and software requirements to install the Administration and Monitoring Server feature, see [MBAM 1.0 Deployment Prerequisites](mbam-10-deployment-prerequisites.md) and [MBAM 1.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-10-supported-configurations.md).
-
-**Note**
-To obtain the setup log files, you must install Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) by using the **msiexec** package and the **/l** <location> option. The Log files are created in the location that you specify.
-
-Additional setup log files are created in the %temp% folder of the user who installs MBAM.
-
-
-
-The Network Load Balancing (NLB) clusters for the Administration and Monitoring Server feature provides scalability in MBAM and it should support more than 55,000 MBAM client computers.
-
-**Note**
-Windows Server Network Load Balancing distributes client requests across a set of servers that are configured into a single server cluster. When Network Load Balancing is installed on each of the servers (hosts) in a cluster, the cluster presents a virtual IP address or fully qualified domain name (FQDN) to client requests. The initial client requests go to all the hosts in the cluster, but only one host accepts and handles the request.
-
-All computers that will be part of a NLB cluster have the following requirements:
-
-- All computers in the NLB cluster must be in the same domain.
-
-- Each computer in the NLB cluster must use a static IP address.
-
-- Each computer in the NLB cluster must have Network Load Balancing enabled.
-
-- The NLB cluster requires a static IP address, and a host record must be manually created in the domain name system (DNS).
-
-
-
-## Configuring Network Load Balancing for MBAM Administration and Monitoring Servers
-
-
-The following steps describe how to configure an NLB cluster virtual name and IP address for two MBAM Administration and Monitoring servers, and how to configure MBAM Clients to use the NLB Cluster.
-
-Before you begin the procedures described in this topic, you must have the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server feature successfully installed by using the same IIS port binding on two separate server computers that meet the prerequisites for both MBAM Server feature installation and NLB Cluster configuration.
-
-**Note**
-This topic describes the basic process of using Network Load Balancing Manager to create an NLB Cluster. The exact steps to configure a Windows Server as part of an NLB cluster depend on the Windows Server version in use.. For more information about how to create NLBs on Windows Server 2008, see [Creating Network Load Balancing Clusters](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=197176) in the Windows Server 2008 TechNet library.
-
-
-
-**To configure an NLB Cluster Virtual Name and IP address for two MBAM Administration and Monitoring Servers**
-
-1. Click **Start**, click **All Programs**, click **Administrative Tools**, and then click **Network Load Balancing Manager**.
-
- **Note**
- If the NLB Manager is not present, you can install it as a Windows Server feature. You must install this feature on both MBAM Administration and Monitoring servers if you want to configure it into the NLB cluster.
-
-
-
-2. On the menu bar, click **Cluster**, and then click **New** to open the **Cluster Parameters** dialog box.
-
-3. In the **Cluster Parameters** dialog box, enter the information for the NLB cluster IP configuration:
-
- - **IP address:** NLB cluster IP address registered in DNS
-
- - **Subnet mask:** NLB cluster IP address subnet mask registered in DNS
-
- - **Full Internet name:** FQDN of NLB cluster name registered in DNS
-
-4. Ensure that **Unicast** is selected in **Cluster operation mode**, and then click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Cluster IP Addresses** page, click **Next**.
-
-6. On the **Port Rules** page, click **Edit** to define the ports that the NLB cluster will respond to and configure the ports that are used for client-to-site system communication as they are defined for the site, or click **Next** to enable the NLB cluster IP address to respond to all TCP/IP ports.
-
- **Note**
- Ensure that **Affinity** is set to **Single**.
-
-
-
-7. On the **Connect** page, enter an MBAM Administration and Monitoring server instance host name that will be part of the NLB cluster in **Host**, and then click **Connect**.
-
-8. In **Interfaces available for configuring a new cluster**, select the networking interface that will be configured to respond to NLB cluster communication, and then click **Next**.
-
-9. On the **Host Parameters** page, review the information displayed to ensure that the **Dedicated IP configuration** settings display the dedicated host IP configuration for the correct NLB cluster host, check that the Initial host state **Default state:** is **Started**, and then click **Finish**.
-
- **Note**
- The **Host Parameters** page also displays the NLB cluster host priority, which is 1 through 32. As new hosts are added to the NLB cluster, the host priority must differ from the previously added hosts. The priority is automatically incremented when you use the Network Load Balancing Manager.
-
-
-
-10. Click **<NLB cluster name>** and ensure that the NLB host interface **Status** displays **Converged** before you continue. This step might require that you refresh the NLB cluster display as the host TCP/IP configuration that is being modified by the NLB Manager.
-
-11. To add additional hosts to the NLB cluster, right-click **<NLB cluster name>**, click **Add Host to Cluster,** and then repeat steps 7 through 10 for each site system that will be part of the NLB cluster.
-
-12. On a computer that has MBAM Group Policy template installed, modify the MBAM Group Policy settings to configure the MBAM services endpoints to use the NLB Cluster name and the appropriate IIS port binding to access the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server features that are installed on the NLB Cluster computers. For more information about how to edit MBAM GPO settings, see [How to Edit MBAM 1.0 GPO Settings](how-to-edit-mbam-10-gpo-settings.md). If the MBAM Administration and Monitoring servers are new to your environment, ensure that the required local security group memberships have been properly configured. For more information about security group requirements, see [Planning for MBAM 1.0 Administrator Roles](planning-for-mbam-10-administrator-roles.md).
-
-13. When the NLB Cluster configuration is complete, we recommend that you validate that the MBAM Administration and Monitoring NLB Cluster is functional. To do this, open a web browser on a computer other than the servers that are configured in the NLB, and ensure that you can access the MBAM Administration and Monitoring web site by using the NLB FQDN.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Server Infrastructure](deploying-the-mbam-10-server-infrastructure.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-deploy-the-mbam-client-as-part-of-a-windows-deployment-mbam-1.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-deploy-the-mbam-client-as-part-of-a-windows-deployment-mbam-1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0653f76736..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-deploy-the-mbam-client-as-part-of-a-windows-deployment-mbam-1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,121 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Deploy the MBAM Client as Part of a Windows Deployment
-description: How to Deploy the MBAM Client as Part of a Windows Deployment
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 8704bf33-535d-41da-b9b2-45b60754367e
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Deploy the MBAM Client as Part of a Windows Deployment
-
-
-The Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) Client enables administrators to enforce and monitor BitLocker drive encryption on computers in the enterprise. The BitLocker Client can be integrated into an organization by enabling BitLocker management and encryption on client computers during the computer imaging and Windows deployment process.
-
-**Note**
-To review the MBAM Client system requirements, see [MBAM 1.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-10-supported-configurations.md).
-
-
-
-Encryption of client computers with BitLocker during the initial imaging stage of a Windows deployment can lower the administrative overhead for MBAM implementation. This approach also ensures that every computer that is deployed already has BitLocker running and is configured correctly.
-
-**Warning**
-This topic describes how to change the Windows registry by using Registry Editor. If you change the Windows registry incorrectly, you can cause serious problems that might require you to reinstall Windows. You should make a backup copy of the registry files (System.dat and User.dat) before you change the registry. Microsoft cannot guarantee that the problems that might occur when you change the registry can be resolved. Change the registry at your own risk.
-
-
-
-**To encrypt a computer as part of Windows deployment**
-
-1. If your organization plans to use the Trusted Platform Module (TPM) protector or the TPM + PIN protector options in BitLocker, you must activate the TPM chip before the initial deployment of MBAM. When you activate the TPM chip, you avoid a reboot later in the process, and you ensure that the TPM chips are correctly configured according to the requirements of your organization. You must activate the TPM chip manually in the computer's BIOS. Refer to the manufacturer documentation for more details about how to configure the TPM chip.
-
-2. Install the MBAM client agent.
-
-3. We recommend that you join the computer to a domain...
-
- - If the computer is not joined to a domain, the recovery password is not stored in the MBAM Key Recovery service. By default, MBAM does not allow encryption to occur unless the recovery key can be stored.
-
- - If a computer starts in recovery mode before the recovery key is stored on the MBAM server, the computer has to be reimaged. No recovery method is available.
-
-4. Open a command prompt as an administrator, stop the MBAM service, and then set the service to **manual** or **on demand**. Then, run the following commands:
-
- **net stop mbamagent**
-
- **sc config mbamagent start= demand**
-
-5. Set the registry settings for the MBAM agent to ignore Group Policy and run the TPM for **operating system only encryption** To do this, run **regedit**, and then import the registry key template from C:\\Program Files\\Microsoft\\MDOP MBAM\\MBAMDeploymentKeyTemplate.reg.
-
-6. In regedit, go to HKLM\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM and configure the settings that are listed in the following table.
-
- Registry entry
-
- Configuration settings
-
- DeploymentTime
-
- 0 = OFF
-
- 1 = Use deployment time policy settings (default)
-
- UseKeyRecoveryService
-
- 0 = Do not use key escrow (The next two registry entries are not required in this case.)
-
- 1 = Use key escrow in Key Recovery system (default)
-
- Recommended: The computer must be able to communicate with the Key Recovery service. Verify that the computer can communicate with the service before you proceed.
-
- KeyRecoveryOptions
-
- 0 = Upload Recovery Key Only
-
- 1 = Upload Recovery Key and Key Recovery Package (default)
-
- KeyRecoveryServiceEndPoint
-
- Set this value to the URL for the Key Recovery web server.
-
- Example: http://<computer name>/MBAMRecoveryAndHardwareService/CoreService.svc.
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Note**
-MBAM policy or registry values can be set here to override the previously set values.
-~~~
-
-
-
-7. The MBAM agent restarts the system during MBAM client deployment. When you are ready for this reboot, run the following command at a command prompt as an administrator:
-
- **net start mbamagent**
-
-8. When the computers restarts and the BIOS prompts you to accept a TPM change, accept the change.
-
-9. During the Windows client operating system imaging process, when you are ready to start encryption, restart the MBAM agent service. Then, to set start to **automatic**, open a command prompt as an administrator and run the following commands:
-
- **sc config mbamagent start= auto**
-
- **net start mbamagent**
-
-10. Remove the bypass registry values. To do this, run regedit, browse to the HKLM\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft registry entry, right-click the **MBAM** node, and then click **Delete**.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Client](deploying-the-mbam-10-client.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-deploy-the-mbam-client-to-desktop-or-laptop-computers-mbam-1.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-deploy-the-mbam-client-to-desktop-or-laptop-computers-mbam-1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index be6480250c..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-deploy-the-mbam-client-to-desktop-or-laptop-computers-mbam-1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,57 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Deploy the MBAM Client to Desktop or Laptop Computers
-description: How to Deploy the MBAM Client to Desktop or Laptop Computers
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: f32927a2-4c05-4da8-acca-1108d1dfdb7e
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Deploy the MBAM Client to Desktop or Laptop Computers
-
-
-The Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) Client enables administrators to enforce and monitor BitLocker drive encryption on computers in the enterprise. The MBAM Client can be integrated into an organization by deploying the client through tools, such as Active Directory Domain Services or an enterprise software deployment tool such as Microsoft System Center 2012 Configuration Manager.
-
-**Note**
-To review the MBAM Client system requirements, see [MBAM 1.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-10-supported-configurations.md).
-
-
-
-**To deploy the MBAM Client to desktop or laptop computers**
-
-1. Locate the MBAM Client installation files that are provided with the MBAM software.
-
-2. Deploy the Windows Installer package to target computers by using Active Directory Domain Services or an enterprise software deployment tool, such as Microsoft System Center 2012 Configuration Manager.
-
- **Note**
- You should not use Group Policy to deploy the Windows Installer package.
-
-
-
-3. Configure the distribution settings or Group Policy to run the MBAM Client installation file. After successful installation, the MBAM Client applies the Group Policy settings that are received from a domain controller to begin BitLocker encryption and management functions. For more information about MBAM Group Policy settings, see [Planning for MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Requirements](planning-for-mbam-10-group-policy-requirements.md).
-
- **Important**
- The MBAM Client will not start BitLocker encryption actions if a remote desktop protocol connection is active. All remote console connections must be closed before BitLocker encryption will begin.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Client](deploying-the-mbam-10-client.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-determine-the-bitlocker-encryption-state-of-a-lost-computers-mbam-1.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-determine-the-bitlocker-encryption-state-of-a-lost-computers-mbam-1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 218739fbbf..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-determine-the-bitlocker-encryption-state-of-a-lost-computers-mbam-1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Determine the BitLocker Encryption State of a Lost Computers
-description: How to Determine the BitLocker Encryption State of a Lost Computers
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 9440890a-9c63-463b-9113-f46071446388
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Determine the BitLocker Encryption State of a Lost Computers
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) enables you to determine the last known BitLocker encryption status of computers that are lost or stolen. Use the following procedure to determine whether the volumes have been encrypted on computers that are no longer in your possession.
-
-**Determine a Computer's Last Known BitLocker Encryption state**
-
-1. Open the MBAM website.
-
- **Note**
- The default address for the MBAM website is http://*<computername>*. Use the fully qualified server name for faster browsing results.
-
-
-
-2. Select the **Report** node from the navigation pane, and then select the **Computer Compliance Report**.
-
-3. Use the filter fields in the right-side pane to narrow the search results, and then click **Search**. Results will be shown below your search query.
-
-4. Take the appropriate action as determined by your policy for lost devices.
-
- **Note**
- Device compliance is determined by the deployed BitLocker policies. You should verify these deployed policies when you are trying to determine the BitLocker encryption state of a device.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Performing BitLocker Management with MBAM](performing-bitlocker-management-with-mbam.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-edit-mbam-10-gpo-settings.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-edit-mbam-10-gpo-settings.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 96e8628560..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-edit-mbam-10-gpo-settings.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,91 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Edit MBAM 1.0 GPO Settings
-description: How to Edit MBAM 1.0 GPO Settings
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 03d12fbc-4302-43fc-9b38-440607d778a1
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Edit MBAM 1.0 GPO Settings
-
-
-To successfully deploy Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM), you must first determine the Group Policies that you will use in your implementation of Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring. For more information about the various available policies, see [Planning for MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Requirements](planning-for-mbam-10-group-policy-requirements.md). After you have determined the policies that you are going to use, you then must modify one or more Group Policy Objects (GPO) that include the MBAM policy settings.
-
-The following steps describe how to configure the basic, recommended Group Policy object (GPO) settings to enable MBAM to manage BitLocker encryption for your organization’s client computers.
-
-**To edit the MBAM Client GPO settings**
-
-1. On a computer that has MBAM Group Policy template installed, make sure that MBAM services are enabled.
-
-2. Use the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC.msc) or the Advanced Group Policy Management (AGPM) MDOP product for these actions: Select **Computer configuration**, choose **Policies**, click **Administrative Templates**, select **Windows Components**, and then click **MDOP MBAM (BitLocker Management)**.
-
-3. Edit the Group Policy Object settings that are required to enable MBAM Client services on client computers. For each policy in the table that follows, select **Policy Group**, click the **Policy**, and then configure the **Setting**.
-
- Policy Group
-
- Policy
-
- Setting
-
- Client Management
-
- Configure MBAM Services
-
- Enabled. Set **MBAM Recovery and Hardware service endpoint** and **Select BitLocker recovery information to store**.
-
- Set **MBAM compliance service endpoint** and **Enter status report frequency in (minutes)**.
-
- Allow hardware compatibility checking
-
- Disabled. This policy is enabled by default, but is not needed for a basic MBAM implementation.
-
- Operating System Drive
-
- Operating system drive encryption settings
-
- Enabled. Set **Select protector for operating system drive**. This is required to save operating system drive data to the MBAM Key Recovery server.
-
- Removable Drive
-
- Control Use of BitLocker on removable drives
-
- Enabled. This is required if MBAM will save removable drive data to the MBAM Key Recovery server.
-
- Fixed Drive
-
- Control Use of BitLocker on fixed drives
-
- Enabled. This is required if MBAM will save fixed drive data to the MBAM Key Recovery server.
-
- Set **Choose how BitLocker-protected drives can be recovered** and **Allow data recovery agent**.
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Important**
-Depending on the policies that your organization decides to deploy, you may have to configure additional policies. See [Planning for MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Requirements](planning-for-mbam-10-group-policy-requirements.md) for Group Policy configuration details for all of the available MBAM GPO policy options.
-~~~
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Objects](deploying-mbam-10-group-policy-objects.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-generate-mbam-reports-mbam-1.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-generate-mbam-reports-mbam-1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 19ff56c01c..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-generate-mbam-reports-mbam-1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,129 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Generate MBAM Reports
-description: How to Generate MBAM Reports
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: cdf4ae76-040c-447c-8736-c9e57068d221
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Generate MBAM Reports
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) generates various reports to monitor BitLocker encryption usage and compliance. This topic describes how to open the MBAM administration website and how to generate MBAM reports on enterprise compliance, individual computers, hardware compatibility, and key recovery activity. For more information about MBAM reports, see [Understanding MBAM Reports](understanding-mbam-reports-mbam-1.md).
-
-**Note**
-To run the reports, you must be a member of the **Report Users** role on the computers where you have installed the Administration and Monitoring Server features, Compliance and Audit Database, and Compliance and Audit Reports.
-
-
-
-**To open the MBAM Administration website**
-
-1. Open a web browser and navigate to the MBAM website. The default URL for the website is *http://<computername>* of the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring server.
-
- **Note**
- If the MBAM administration website was installed on a port other than port 80, you must specify that port number in the URL. For example, *http://<computername>:<port>*. If you specified a Host Name for the MBAM administration website during the installation, the URL would be *http://<hostname>*.
-
-
-
-2. In the navigation pane, click **Reports**. In the main pane, click the tab for your report type: **Enterprise Compliance Report**, **Computer Compliance Report**, **Hardware Audit Report**, or **Recovery Audit Report**.
-
- **Note**
- Historical MBAM Client data is retained in the compliance database. This retained data may be needed in case a computer is lost or stolen. When running enterprise reports, you should use appropriate start and end dates to scope the time frames for the reports from one to two weeks to increase the reporting data accuracy.
-
-
-
-**To generate an enterprise Compliance Report**
-
-1. On the MBAM administration website, click **Reports** in the navigation pane, then click the **Enterprise Compliance Report** tab and select the appropriate filters for your report. For the Enterprise Compliance Report, you can set the following filters.
-
- - **Compliance Status**. Use this filter to specify the compliance status types (for example, Compliant or Noncompliant) to include in the report.
-
- - **Error State**. Use this filter to specify the Error State types, such as No Error or Error, to include in the report.
-
-2. Click **View Report** to display the specified report.
-
- The report results can be saved in any of several available file formats such as HTML, Microsoft Word, and Microsoft Excel.
-
- **Note**
- The Enterprise Compliance report is generated by a SQL job that runs every six hours. Therefore, the first time you try to view the report you may find that some data is missing.
-
-
-
-3. To view information about a computer in the Computer Compliance Report, select the computer name.
-
-4. Select the plus sign (+) next to the computer name to view information about the volumes on the computer.
-
-**To generate the Computer Compliance Report**
-
-1. In the MBAM administration website, select the **Report** node in the navigation pane, and then select the **Computer Compliance Report**. Use the Computer Compliance report to search for **user name** or **computer name**.
-
-2. Click **View Report** to view the computer report.
-
- Results can be saved in any of several available file formats such as HTML, Microsoft Word, and Microsoft Excel.
-
-3. To display more information about a computer in the Computer Compliance Report, select the computer name.
-
-4. Select the plus sign (+) next to the computer name to view information about the volumes on the computer.
-
- **Note**
- An MBAM Client computer is considered compliant if the computer matches the requirements of the MBAM policy settings or the computer’s hardware model is set to incompatible. Therefore, when you are viewing detailed information about the disk volumes associated with the computer, computers that are exempt from BitLocker encryption due to hardware compatibility can be displayed as compliant even though their drive volume encryption status is displayed as noncompliant.
-
-
-
-**To generate the Hardware Compatibility Audit Report**
-
-1. From the MBAM administration website, select the **Report** node from the navigation pane, and then select the **Hardware Audit Report**. Select the appropriate filters for your Hardware Audit report. The Hardware Audit report offers the following available filters:
-
- - **User (Domain\\User)**. Specifies the name of the user who made a change.
-
- - **Change Type**. Specifies the type of changes you are looking for.
-
- - **Start Date**. Specifies the Start Date part of the date range that you want to report on.
-
- - **End Date**. Specifies the End Date part of the date range that you want to report on.
-
-2. Click **View Report** to view the report.
-
- Results can be saved in several available file formats such as HTML, Microsoft Word, and Microsoft Excel.
-
-**To generate the Recovery Key Audit Report**
-
-1. From the MBAM administration website, select the **Report** node in the navigation pane, and then select the **Recovery Audit Report**. Select the filters for your Recovery Key Audit report. The available filters for Recovery Key audits are as follows:
-
- - **Requestor**. Specifies the user name of the requestor. The requestor is the person in the help desk who accessed the key on behalf of a user.
-
- - **Requestee**. Specifies the user name of the requestee. The requestee is the person who called the help desk to obtain a recovery key.
-
- - **Request Result** Specifies the request result types, such as: Success or Failed. For example, you may want to view failed key access attempts.
-
- - **Key Type**. Specifies the Key Type, such as: Recovery Key Password or TPM Password Hash.
-
- - **Start Date**. Specifies the Start Date part of the date range.
-
- - **End Date**. Specifies the End Date part of the date range.
-
-2. Click **View Report** to display the report.
-
- Results can be saved in several available file formats such as HTML, Microsoft Word, and Microsoft Excel.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Monitoring and Reporting BitLocker Compliance with MBAM 1.0](monitoring-and-reporting-bitlocker-compliance-with-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-hide-default-bitlocker-encryption-in-the-windows-control-panel.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-hide-default-bitlocker-encryption-in-the-windows-control-panel.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4eab4444f5..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-hide-default-bitlocker-encryption-in-the-windows-control-panel.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Hide Default BitLocker Encryption in The Windows Control Panel
-description: How to Hide Default BitLocker Encryption in The Windows Control Panel
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: c8503743-220c-497c-9785-e2feeca484d6
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Hide Default BitLocker Encryption in The Windows Control Panel
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) offers a customized control panel for MBAM client computers that is named called BitLocker Encryption Options. This customized control panel can replace the default Windows BitLocker control panel that is named BitLocker Drive Encryption. The BitLocker Encryption Options control panel, located under System and Security in the Windows control panel, enables users to manage their PIN and passwords, unlock drives, and hides the interface that allows administrators to decrypt a drive or to suspend or resume BitLocker encryption.
-
-**To hide default BitLocker Encryption in the Windows Control Panel**
-
-1. Browse to **User configuration** by using the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC), the Advanced Group Policy Management (AGPM), or the Local Group Policy Editor on the BitLocker Group Policies computer.
-
-2. Click **Policies**, select **Administrative Templates**, and then click **Control Panel**.
-
-3. In the **Details** pane, double-click **Hide specified Control Panel items**, and then select **Enabled**.
-
-4. Click **Show**, **click Add…**, and then type Microsoft.BitLockerDriveEncryption. This policy hides the default Windows BitLocker Management tool from the Windows Control Panel and allows the user to open the updated MBAM BitLocker Encryption Options tool from the Windows Control Panel.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Objects](deploying-mbam-10-group-policy-objects.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-install-and-configure-mbam-on-a-single-server-mbam-1.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-install-and-configure-mbam-on-a-single-server-mbam-1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b4654bbd91..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-install-and-configure-mbam-on-a-single-server-mbam-1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,184 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Install and Configure MBAM on a Single Server
-description: How to Install and Configure MBAM on a Single Server
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 55841c63-bad9-44e7-b7fd-ea7037febbd7
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Install and Configure MBAM on a Single Server
-
-
-The procedures in this topic describe the full installation of the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) features on a single server.
-
-Each server feature has certain prerequisites. To verify that you have met the prerequisites and the hardware and software requirements, see [MBAM 1.0 Deployment Prerequisites](mbam-10-deployment-prerequisites.md) and [MBAM 1.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-10-supported-configurations.md). In addition, some features also have information that must be provided during the installation process to successfully deploy the feature. You should also review [Preparing your Environment for MBAM 1.0](preparing-your-environment-for-mbam-10.md) before you begin the MBAM deployment.
-
-**Note**
-To obtain the setup log files, you must install MBAM by using the **msiexec** package and the **/l** <location> option. Log files are created in the location that you specify.
-
-Additional setup log files are created in the %temp% folder of the user who is installing MBAM.
-
-
-
-## To install MBAM Server features on a single server
-
-
-The following steps describe how to install general MBAM features.
-
-**Note**
-Make sure that you use the 32-bit setup on 32-bit servers and the 64-bit setup on 64-bit servers.
-
-
-
-**To start MBAM Server features installation**
-
-1. Start the MBAM installation wizard. Click **Install** at the Welcome page.
-
-2. Read and accept the Microsoft Software License Terms, and then click **Next** to continue the installation.
-
-3. By default, all MBAM features are selected for installation. Features that will be installed on the same computer must be installed together at the same time. Clear the features that you want to install elsewhere. You must install the MBAM features in the following order:
-
- - Recovery and Hardware Database
-
- - Compliance and Audit Database
-
- - Compliance Audit and Reports
-
- - Administration and Monitoring Server
-
- - MBAM Group Policy Template
-
- **Note**
- The installation wizard checks the prerequisites for your installation and displays the prerequisites that are missing. If all the prerequisites are met, the installation continues. If a missing prerequisite is detected, you must resolve the missing prerequisites, and then click **Check prerequisites again**. After all prerequisites are met, the installation resumes.
-
-
-
-4. You are prompted to configure the network communication security. MBAM can encrypt the communication between the Recovery and Hardware Database, the Administration and Monitoring Server, and the clients. If you decide to encrypt the communication, you are asked to select the authority-provisioned certificate that will be used for encryption.
-
-5. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-6. The MBAM Setup wizard will display the installation pages for the selected features.
-
-**To deploy MBAM Server features**
-
-1. In the **Configure the Recovery and Hardware database** window, specify the instance of SQL Server and the name of the database that will store the recovery and hardware data. You must also specify both the database files location and the log information location.
-
-2. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-3. In the **Configure the Compliance and Audit database** window, specify the instance of the SQL Server and the name of the database that will store the compliance and audit data. Then, specify the database files location and the log information location.
-
-4. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-5. In the **Compliance and Audit Reports** window, specify the report service instance that will be used and provide a domain user account for accessing the database. This should be a user account that is provisioned specifically for this use. The user account should be able to access all data available to the MBAM Reports Users group.
-
-6. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-7. In the **Configure the Administration and Monitoring Server** window, enter the **Port Binding**, the **Host Name** (optional), and the **Installation Path** for the MBAM Administration and Monitoring server.
-
- **Warning**
- The port number that you specify must be an unused port number on the Administration and Monitoring server, unless a unique host header name is specified.
-
-
-
-8. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-9. Specify whether to use Microsoft Updates to help keep your computer secure, and then click **Next**. The Microsoft Updates option does not turn on the Automatic Updates in Windows.
-
-10. When the Setup wizard has collected the necessary feature information, the MBAM installation is ready to start. Click **Back** to move back through the wizard if you want to review or change your installation settings. Click **Install** to begin the installation. Click **Cancel** to exit Setup. Setup installs the MBAM features and notifies you that the installation is completed.
-
-11. Click **Finish** to exit the wizard.
-
-12. After you install MBAM server features, you must add users to the MBAM roles. For more information, see [Planning for MBAM 1.0 Administrator Roles](planning-for-mbam-10-administrator-roles.md).
-
-**To perform post installation configuration**
-
-1. After Setup is finished, you must add user roles so that you can give users access to features in the MBAM administration website. On the Administration and Monitoring Server, add users to the following local groups:
-
- - **MBAM Hardware Users**: Members of this local group can access the Hardware feature in the MBAM administration website.
-
- - **MBAM Helpdesk Users**: Members of this local group can access the Drive Recovery and Manage TPM features in the MBAM administration website. All fields in Drive Recovery and Manage TPM are required fields for a Helpdesk User.
-
- - **MBAM Advanced Helpdesk Users**: Members of this local group have advanced access to the Drive Recovery and Manage TPM features in the MBAM administration website. For Advanced Helpdesk Users, only the Key ID field is required in Drive Recovery. For Manage TPM users, only the Computer Domain field and Computer Name field are required.
-
-2. On the Administration and Monitoring Server, Compliance and Audit Database, and on the computer that hosts the Compliance and Audit Reports, add users to the following local group to enable them to access the Reports feature in the MBAM administration website:
-
- - **MBAM Report Users**: Members of this local group can access the Reports features in the MBAM administration website.
-
- **Note**
- Identical user membership or group membership of the **MBAM Report Users** local group must be maintained on all computers where the Administration and Monitoring Server features, Compliance and Audit Database, and Compliance and Audit Reports are installed.
-
- To maintain identical memberships on all computers, you should create a domain security group and add that domain group to each local MBAM Report Users group. When you do this, you can manage the group memberships by using the domain group.
-
-
-
-## Validating the MBAM Server feature installation
-
-
-When the MBAM installation is complete, validate that the installation has successfully set up all the necessary MBAM features that are required for BitLocker management. Use the following procedure to confirm that the MBAM service is functional:
-
-**To validate MBAM Server feature installation**
-
-1. On each server where an MBAM feature is deployed, open **Control Panel**. Click **Programs**, and then click **Programs and Features**. Verify that **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring** appears in the **Programs and Features** list.
-
- **Note**
- To validate the installation, you must use a Domain Account that has local computer administrative credentials on each server.
-
-
-
-2. On the server where the Recovery and Hardware Database is installed, open SQL Server Management Studio and verify that the **MBAM Recovery and Hardware** database is installed.
-
-3. On the server where the Compliance and Audit Database is installed, open SQL Server Management Studio and verify that the **MBAM Compliance and Audit Database** is installed.
-
-4. On the server where the Compliance and Audit Reports are installed, open a web browser with administrative privileges and browse to the “Home” of the SQL Server Reporting Services site.
-
- The default Home location of a SQL Server Reporting Services site instance is at http://<NameofMBAMReportsServer>/Reports. To find the actual URL, use the Reporting Services Configuration Manager tool and select the instances specified during setup.
-
- Confirm that a folder named **Malta Compliance Reports** is listed and that it contains five reports and one data source.
-
- **Note**
- If SQL Server Reporting Services was configured as a named instance, the URL should resemble the following:http://*<NameofMBAMReportsServer>*/Reports\_*<SRSInstanceName>*
-
-
-
-5. On the server where the Administration and Monitoring feature is installed, run **Server Manager** and browse to **Roles**, select **Web Server (IIS)**, and click **Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager**
-
-6. In **Connections**, browse to *<computername>*, select **Sites**, and select **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring**. Verify that **MBAMAdministrationService**, **MBAMComplianceStatusService**, and **MBAMRecoveryAndHardwareService** are listed.
-
-7. On the server where the Administration and Monitoring feature is installed, open a web browser with administrative privileges, and then browse to the following locations in the MBAM website to verify that they load successfully:
-
- - *http://<computername>/default.aspx* and confirm each of the links for navigation and reports
-
- - *http://<computername>/MBAMAdministrationService/AdministrationService.svc*
-
- - *http://<computername>/MBAMComplianceStatusService/StatusReportingService.svc*
-
- - *http://<computername>/MBAMRecoveryAndHardwareService/CoreService.svc*
-
- **Note**
- Typically, the services are installed on the default port 80 without network encryption. If the services are installed on a different port, change the URLs to include the appropriate port. For example, http://*<computername>:<port>*/default.aspx or http://<hostheadername>/default.aspx.
-
- If the services are installed with network encryption, change http:// to https://.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Server Infrastructure](deploying-the-mbam-10-server-infrastructure.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-install-and-configure-mbam-on-distributed-servers-mbam-1.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-install-and-configure-mbam-on-distributed-servers-mbam-1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5801740a1e..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-install-and-configure-mbam-on-distributed-servers-mbam-1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,246 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Install and Configure MBAM on Distributed Servers
-description: How to Install and Configure MBAM on Distributed Servers
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 9ee766aa-6339-422a-8d00-4f58e4646a5e
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Install and Configure MBAM on Distributed Servers
-
-
-The procedures in this topic describe the full installation of the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) features on distributed servers.
-
-Each server feature has certain prerequisites. To verify that you have met the prerequisites and hardware and software requirements, see [MBAM 1.0 Deployment Prerequisites](mbam-10-deployment-prerequisites.md) and [MBAM 1.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-10-supported-configurations.md). In addition, some features require that you provide certain information during the installation process to successfully deploy the feature.
-
-**Note**
-To obtain the setup log files, you have to install MBAM by using the **msiexec** package and the **/l <location>** option. Log files are created in the location that you specify.
-
-Additional setup log files are created in the %temp% folder of the user that runs the MBAM installation.
-
-
-
-## Deploy the MBAM Server features
-
-
-The following steps describe how to install the general MBAM features.
-
-**Note**
-Make sure that you use the 32-bit setup on 32-bit servers and the 64-bit setup on 64-bit servers.
-
-
-
-**To Deploy MBAM Server features**
-
-1. Start the MBAM installation wizard, and click **Install** at the Welcome page.
-
-2. Read and accept the Microsoft Software License Terms, and then click **Next** to continue the installation.
-
-3. By default, all MBAM features are selected for installation. Clear the features that you want to install elsewhere. Features that you want to install on the same computer must be installed all at the same time. MBAM features must be installed in the following order:
-
- - Recovery and Hardware Database
-
- - Compliance and Audit Database
-
- - Compliance Audit and Reports
-
- - Administration and Monitoring Server
-
- - MBAM Group Policy Template
-
- **Note**
- The installation wizard checks the prerequisites for your installation and displays the prerequisites that are missing. If all the prerequisites are met, the installation continues. If a missing prerequisite is detected, you have to resolve the missing prerequisites, and then click **Check prerequisites again**. If all prerequisites are met this time, the installation will resume.
-
-
-
-4. The MBAM Setup wizard will display the installation pages for the selected features. The following sections describe the installation procedures for each feature.
-
- **Note**
- Typically, each feature is installed on a separate server. If you want to install multiple features on a single server, you may change or eliminate some of the following steps.
-
-
-
-~~~
-**To install the Recovery and Hardware Database**
-
-1. Choose an option for MBAM communication encryption. MBAM can encrypt the communication between the Recovery and Hardware Database and the Administration and Monitoring servers. If you choose the option to encrypt communication, you are asked to select the authority-provisioned certificate that is used for encryption.
-
-2. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-3. Specify the names of the computers that will be running the Administration and Monitoring Server feature, to configure access to the Recovery and Hardware Database.. Once the Administration and Monitoring Server feature is deployed, it connects to the database by using its domain account.
-
-4. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-5. Specify the **Database Configuration** for the SQL Server instance that stores the recovery and hardware data. You must also specify where the database will be located and where the log information will be located.
-
-6. Click **Next** to continue with the MBAM Setup wizard.
-
-**To install the Compliance and Audit Database**
-
-1. Choose an option for the MBAM communication encryption. MBAM can encrypt the communication between the Compliance and Audit Database and the Administration and Monitoring servers. If you choose the option to encrypt communication, you are asked to select the authority-provisioned certificate that will be used for encryption.
-
-2. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-3. Specify the user account that will be used to access the database for reports.
-
-4. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-5. Specify the computer names of the computers that you want to run the Administration and Monitoring Server and the Compliance and Audit Reports, to configure the access to the Compliance and Audit Database.. After the Administration and Monitoring and the Compliance and Audit Reports Server are deployed, they will connect to the databases by using their domain accounts.
-
-6. Specify the **Database Configuration** for the SQL Server instance that will store the compliance and audit data. You must also specify where the database will be located and where the log information will be located.
-
-7. Click **Next** to continue with the MBAM Setup wizard.
-
-**To install the Compliance and Audit Reports**
-
-1. Specify the remote SQL Server instance. For example, *<ServerName>*,where the Compliance and Audit Database are installed.
-
-2. Specify the name of the Compliance and Audit Database. By default, the database name is “MBAM Compliance Status”, but you can change the name when you install the Compliance and Audit Database.
-
-3. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-4. Select the SQL Server Reporting Services instance where the Compliance and Audit Reports will be installed. Provide the username and password used to access the compliance database.
-
-5. Click **Next** to continue with the MBAM Setup wizard.
-
-**To install the Administration and Monitoring Server feature**
-
-1. Choose an option for the MBAM communication encryption. MBAM can encrypt the communication between the Recovery and Hardware Database and the Administration and Monitoring servers. If you choose the option to encrypt communication, you are asked to select the authority-provisioned certificate that is used for encryption.
-
-2. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-3. Specify the remote SQL Server instance, For example, *<ServerName>*, where the Compliance and Audit Database are installed.
-
-4. Specify the name of the Compliance and Audit Database. By default, the database name is MBAM Compliance Status, but, you can change the name when you install the Compliance and Audit Database.
-
-5. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-6. Specify the remote SQL Server instance. For example, *<ServerName>*,where the Recovery and Hardware Database are installed.
-
-7. Specify the name of the Recovery and Hardware Database. By default, the database name is **MBAM Recovery and Hardware**, but you can change the name when you install the Recovery and Hardware Database feature.
-
-8. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-9. Specify the URL for the “Home” of the SQL Server Reporting Services (SRS) site. The default Home location of a SQL Server Reporting Services site instance is at:
-
- http://*<NameofMBAMReportsServer>/*ReportServer
-
- **Note**
- If you configured the SQL Server Reporting Services as a named instance, the URL resembles the following:http://*<NameofMBAMReportsServer>*/ReportServer\_*<SRSInstanceName>*
-
-
-
-10. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-11. Enter the **Port Number**, the **Host Name** (optional), and the **Installation Path** for the MBAM Administration and Monitoring server
-
- **Warning**
- The port number that you specify must be an unused port number on the Administration and Monitoring server, unless you specify a unique host header name.
-
-
-
-12. Click **Next** to continue with the MBAM Setup wizard.
-~~~
-
-5.
-
- Specify whether to use Microsoft Updates to help keep your computer secure, and then click **Next**.
-
-6. When the selected MBAM feature information is complete, you are ready to start the MBAM installation by using the Setup wizard. Click **Back** to move through the wizard if you have to review or change your installation settings. Click **Install** to begin the installation. Click **Cancel** to exit the Wizard. Setup installs the MBAM features that you selected and notifies you that the installation is finished.
-
-7. Click **Finish** to exit the wizard.
-
-8. Add users to appropriate MBAM roles, after the MBAM server features are installed.. For more information, see [Planning for MBAM 1.0 Administrator Roles](planning-for-mbam-10-administrator-roles.md).
-
-**Post-installation configuration**
-
-1. After MBAM Setup is finished, you must add user Roles before users can access to features in the MBAM administration website. On the Administration and Monitoring Server, add users to the following local groups.
-
- - **MBAM Hardware Users**: Members of this local group can access the Hardware feature in the MBAM administration website.
-
- - **MBAM Helpdesk Users**: Members of this local group can access the Drive Recovery and Manage Trusted Platform Modules (TPM) features in the MBAM administration website. All fields in Drive Recovery and Manage TPM are required fields for a Helpdesk User.
-
- - **MBAM Advanced Helpdesk Users**: Members of this local group have advanced access to the Drive Recovery and Manage TPM features in the MBAM administration website. For Advanced Helpdesk Users, only the Key ID field is required in Drive Recovery. In Manage TPM, only the Computer Domain field and Computer Name field are required.
-
-2. On the Administration and Monitoring Server, Compliance and Audit Database, and on the server that hosts the Compliance and Audit Reports, add users to the following local group to give them access to the Reports feature in the MBAM administration website.
-
- - **MBAM Report Users**: Members of this local group can access the Reports in the MBAM administration website.
-
- **Note**
- Identical user or group membership of the **MBAM Report Users** local group must be maintained on all computers where the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server features, Compliance and Audit Database, and the Compliance and Audit Reports are installed.
-
-
-
-## Validate the MBAM Server feature installation
-
-
-When the MBAM Server feature installation is complete, you should validate that the installation has successfully set up all the necessary features for MBAM. Use the following procedure to confirm that the MBAM service is functional.
-
-**To validate an MBAM installation**
-
-1. On each server, where an MBAM feature is deployed, open **Control Panel**, click **Programs**, and then click **Programs and Features**. Verify that **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring** appears in the **Programs and Features** list.
-
- **Note**
- To validate the MBAM installation, you must use a Domain Account that has local computer administrative credentials on each server.
-
-
-
-2. On the server where the Recovery and Hardware Database is installed, open SQL Server Management Studio and verify that the **MBAM Recovery and Hardware** database is installed.
-
-3. On the server where the Compliance and Audit Database is installed, open SQL Server Management Studio and verify that the **MBAM Compliance Status** database is installed.
-
-4. On the server where the Compliance and Audit Reports are installed, open a web browser with administrative privileges and browse to the “Home” of the SQL Server Reporting Services site.
-
- The default Home location of a SQL Server Reporting Services site instance can be found at http://<NameofMBAMReportsServer>/Reports.aspx. To find the actual URL, use the Reporting Services Configuration Manager tool and select the instances specified during setup.
-
- Confirm that a folder named **Malta Compliance Reports** is listed and that it contains five reports and one data source.
-
- **Note**
- If SQL Server Reporting Services was configured as a named instance, the URL should resemble the following:http://*<NameofMBAMReportsServer>*/Reports\_*<SRSInstanceName>*
-
-
-
-5. On the server where the Administration and Monitoring feature is installed, run **Server Manager** and browse to **Roles**, select **Web Server (IIS)**, and then click **Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager**. In **Connections** browse to *<computername>*, click **Sites**, and click **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring**. Verify that **MBAMAdministrationService**, **MBAMComplianceStatusService**, and **MBAMRecoveryAndHardwareService** are listed.
-
-6. On the server where the Administration and Monitoring feature is installed, open a web browser with administrative privileges and browse to the following locations in the MBAM web site, to verify that they load successfully:
-
- - *http://<computername>/default.aspx* and confirm each of the links for navigation and reports
-
- - *http://<computername>/MBAMAdministrationService/AdministrationService.svc*
-
- - *http://<computername>/MBAMComplianceStatusService/StatusReportingService.svc*
-
- - *http://<computername>/MBAMRecoveryAndHardwareService/CoreService.svc*
-
- **Note**
- Typically, services are installed on the default port 80 without network encryption. If the services are installed on a different port, change the URLs to include the appropriate port. For example, http://*<computername>:<port>*/default.aspx or http://<hostheadername>/default.aspx
-
- If the services were installed with network encryption, change http:// to https://.
-
-
-
-~~~
-Verify that each web page loads successfully.
-~~~
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Server Infrastructure](deploying-the-mbam-10-server-infrastructure.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-install-the-mbam-10-group-policy-template.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-install-the-mbam-10-group-policy-template.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 47f9d4d6f4..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-install-the-mbam-10-group-policy-template.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,56 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Install the MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Template
-description: How to Install the MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Template
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 451a50b0-939c-47ad-9248-a138deade550
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Install the MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Template
-
-
-In addition to the server-related features of Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM), the server setup application includes an MBAM Group Policy template. You can install this template on any computer that is capable of running the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC) or Advanced Group Policy Management (AGPM).
-
-The following steps describe how to install the MBAM Group Policy template.
-
-**Note**
-Make sure that you use the 32-bit setup on 32-bit servers and the 64-bit setup on 64-bit servers.
-
-
-
-**To install the MBAM Group Policy template**
-
-1. Start the MBAM installation wizard; then, click **Install** on the Welcome page.
-
-2. Read and accept the Microsoft Software License Terms, and then click **Next** to continue the installation.
-
-3. By default, all MBAM features are selected for installation. Clear all feature options except for **Policy Template**, and then click **Next** to continue the installation.
-
- **Note**
- The installation wizard checks the prerequisites for your installation and displays the prerequisites that are missing. If all the prerequisites are met, the installation continues. If a missing prerequisite is detected, you must resolve the missing prerequisite and then click **Check prerequisites again**. Once all prerequisites are met, the installation will resume.
-
-
-
-4. After the MBAM Setup wizard displays installation pages for the selected features, click **Finish** to close MBAM Setup.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Objects](deploying-mbam-10-group-policy-objects.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-install-the-mbam-language-update-on-a-single-server-mbam-1.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-install-the-mbam-language-update-on-a-single-server-mbam-1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ae463cffe6..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-install-the-mbam-language-update-on-a-single-server-mbam-1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,70 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Install the MBAM Language Update on a Single Server
-description: How to Install the MBAM Language Update on a Single Server
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: e6fe59a3-a3e1-455c-a059-1f23ee083cf6
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Install the MBAM Language Update on a Single Server
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) includes four server roles that can be run on one or more computers. However, only two MBAM Server features require the update to support installation of the MBAM 1.0 language release and the MBAM Policy Template. To update all three of the required MBAM features to be installed on one computer, perform the steps described in this topic.
-
-**To install the MBAM language update on a single server**
-
-1. Open the Internet Information Services (IIS) Management Console, go to **Sites**, and then shut down the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring website.
-
-2. Edit the bindings for the MBAM website, and then temporarily modify the bindings of the site. For example, change the port from 443 to 9443.
-
-3. Locate and run the MBAM setup wizard (MBAMsetup.exe) and select the following three features:
-
- 1. Compliance and Audit Reports
-
- 2. Administration and Monitoring Server
-
- 3. Group Policy Templates
-
- **Important**
- The MBAM server features must be updated in the following order: Compliance and Audit Reports first, then Administration and Monitoring Server. The Group Policy templates can be updated at any time without concern for sequence.
-
-
-
-4. After you upgrade the server database, open the IIS Management Console and review the bindings of the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring website.
-
-5. Delete one of the bindings and ensure that the remaining binding has the correct host name, certificate, and port number for the MBAM enterprise configuration.
-
-6. Restart the MBAM website.
-
-7. Test the MBAM website functionality:
-
- - Open the MBAM web interface and ensure you can fetch a recovery key for a client.
-
- - Enforce encryption of a new or manually decrypted client computer.
-
- **Note**
- The MBAM client opens only if it can communicate with the Recovery and Hardware database.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Language Release Update](deploying-the-mbam-10-language-release-update.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-install-the-mbam-language-update-on-distributed-servers-mbam-1.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-install-the-mbam-language-update-on-distributed-servers-mbam-1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8a88aa7e8a..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-install-the-mbam-language-update-on-distributed-servers-mbam-1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,74 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Install the MBAM Language Update on Distributed Servers
-description: How to Install the MBAM Language Update on Distributed Servers
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 5ddc64c6-0417-4a04-843e-b5e18d9f1a52
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Install the MBAM Language Update on Distributed Servers
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) includes four server roles that can be run on one or more computers. However, only two MBAM Server features require the update to support the installation of the MBAM 1.0 language release and the MBAM Policy Template. In configurations with the MBAM Server features installed on multiple computers, only the following server features need to be updated:
-
-- The MBAM Compliance and Audit Reports
-
-- The MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server
-
-**Important**
-The MBAM server features must be updated in this order: Compliance and Audit Reports first, and then the Administration and Monitoring Server. The MBAM Group Policy templates can be updated at any time without concern for sequence.
-
-
-
-**To install the MBAM Language Update on the MBAM Compliance and Audit Report Server feature**
-
-1. On the computer running the MBAM Compliance and Audit Report feature, locate and run the MBAM Language Update setup wizard (MBAMsetup.exe).
-
-2. Complete the wizard for the Compliance and Audit Reports and then close the wizard.
-
-**To install the MBAM Language Update on the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server feature**
-
-1. On the computer that is running the MBAM Administration and Monitoring feature, open the Internet Information Services (IIS) management console, go to **Sites**, and then shut down the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring website.
-
-2. Choose to edit the bindings for the MBAM website, and then modify the bindings of the site. For example, change the port from 443 to 9443.
-
-3. Locate and run the MBAM Language Update setup wizard (MBAMsetup.exe). Complete the wizard for the Administration and Monitoring Server feature and then close the wizard.
-
-4. After you upgrade the server database, open IIS Management Console and review the bindings of the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring website.
-
-5. Delete the old binding and ensure that the remaining binding has the correct host name, certificate, and port number for the MBAM enterprise configuration.
-
-6. Restart the MBAM web site.
-
-7. Test the MBAM web site functionality:
-
- - Open the MBAM web interface and ensure that you can obtain a recovery key for a client.
-
- - Enforce encryption of a new or manually decrypted client computer.
-
- **Note**
- The MBAM client opens only if it can communicate with the Recovery and Hardware database.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Language Release Update](deploying-the-mbam-10-language-release-update.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-manage-computer-bitlocker-encryption-exemptions.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-manage-computer-bitlocker-encryption-exemptions.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 15689e60c3..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-manage-computer-bitlocker-encryption-exemptions.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,49 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Manage Computer BitLocker Encryption Exemptions
-description: How to Manage Computer BitLocker Encryption Exemptions
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: d4400a0d-b36b-4cf5-a294-1f53ec47f9ee
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Manage Computer BitLocker Encryption Exemptions
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) can be used to exempt certain computers from BitLocker protection. For example, an organization may decide to control BitLocker exemption on a computer-by-computer basis.
-
-To exempt a computer from BitLocker encryption, you must add the computer to a security group in Active Directory Domain Services in order to bypass any computer-based BitLocker protection rules.
-
-**Note**
-If the computer is already BitLocker-protected, the computer exemption policy has no effect.
-
-
-
-**To exempt a computer from BitLocker encryption**
-
-1. Add the computer account that you want to be exempted to a security group in Active Directory Domain Services. This allows you to bypass any computer-based BitLocker protection rules.
-
-2. Create a Group Policy Object by using the MBAM Group Policy template, then associate the Group Policy Object with the Active Directory group that you created in the previous step. For more information about creating the necessary Group Policy Objects, see [Deploying MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Objects](deploying-mbam-10-group-policy-objects.md).
-
-3. When an exempted computer starts, the MBAM client checks the Computer Exemption Policy setting and suspends protection based on whether the computer is part of the BitLocker exemption security group.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Administering MBAM 1.0 Features](administering-mbam-10-features.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-manage-hardware-compatibility-mbam-1.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-manage-hardware-compatibility-mbam-1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0072ad71f7..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-manage-hardware-compatibility-mbam-1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Manage Hardware Compatibility
-description: How to Manage Hardware Compatibility
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: c74b96b9-8161-49bc-b5bb-4838734e7df5
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Manage Hardware Compatibility
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) can collect information about the manufacturer and model of client computers after you deploy the Allow Hardware Compatibility Checking Group Policy. If you configure this policy, the MBAM agent reports the computer make and model information to the MBAM Server when the MBAM Client is deployed on a client computer.
-
-The Hardware Compatibility feature is helpful when your organization has older computer hardware or computers that do not support Trusted Platform Module (TPM) chips. In these cases, you can use the Hardware Compatibility feature to ensure that BitLocker encryption is applied only to computer models that support it. If all computers in your organization will support BitLocker, you do not have to use the Hardware Compatibility feature.
-
-**Note**
-By default, MBAM Hardware Compatibility feature is not enabled. To enable it, select the **Hardware Compatibility** feature under the **Administration and Monitoring Server** feature during setup. For more information about how to set up and configure Hardware Compatibility, see [Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Server Infrastructure](deploying-the-mbam-10-server-infrastructure.md).
-
-
-
-The Hardware Compatibility feature works in the following way.
-
-****
-
-1. The MBAM client agent discovers basic computer information such as manufacturer, model, BIOS maker, BIOS version, TPM maker, and TPM version, and then passes this information to the MBAM server.
-
-2. The MBAM server generates a list of client computer makes and models to enable you to differentiate between those that can or cannot support BitLocker
-
-3. The MBAM client agents that are deployed in the enterprise automatically update this list with all new computer makes and models that are discovered with a state of **Unknown**. An administrator can then use the MBAM administration website to change list entries to specify a particular computer make and model as **Compatible** or **Incompatible**.
-
-4. Before the MBAM client agent begins encrypting a drive, the agent first verifies the BitLocker encryption compatibility of the hardware it is running on.
-
- - If the hardware is marked as compatible, the BitLocker encryption process starts. MBAM will also recheck the hardware compatibility status of the computer one time per day.
-
- - If the hardware is marked as incompatible, the agent logs an event and passes a “hardware exempted” state as part of compliance reporting. The agent checks every seven days to see whether the state has changed to “compatible.”
-
- - If the hardware is marked as unknown, the BitLocker encryption process will not begin. The MBAM client agent will recheck the hardware compatibility status of the computer one time per day.
-
-**Warning**
-If the MBAM client agent tries to encrypt a computer that does not support BitLocker drive encryption, there is a possibility that the computer will become corrupted. Ensure that the hardware compatibility feature is correctly configured when your organization has older hardware that does not support BitLocker.
-
-
-
-**To manage hardware compatibility**
-
-1. Open a web browser and navigate to the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring website. Select **Hardware** in the left menu bar.
-
-2. On the right pane, click **Advanced Search**, and then filter to display a list of all computer models that have a **Capability** status of **Unknown**. A list of computer models matching the search criteria is displayed. Administrators can add, edit, or remove new computer types from this page.
-
-3. Review each unknown hardware configuration to determine whether the configuration should be set to **Compatible** or **Incompatible**.
-
-4. Select one or more rows, and then click either **Set Compatible** or **Set Incompatible** to set the BitLocker compatibility, as appropriate, for the selected computer models. If set to **Compatible**, BitLocker tries to enforce drive encryption policy on computers that match the supported model. If set to **Incompatible**, BitLocker will not enforce drive encryption policy on those computers.
-
- **Note**
- After you set a computer model as compatible, it can take more than twenty-four hours for the MBAM Client to begin BitLocker encryption on the computers matching that hardware model.
-
-
-
-5. Administrators should regularly monitor the hardware compatibility list to review new models that are discovered by the MBAM agent, and then update their compatibility setting to **Compatible** or **Incompatible** as appropriate.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Administering MBAM 1.0 Features](administering-mbam-10-features.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-manage-mbam-administrator-roles-mbam-1.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-manage-mbam-administrator-roles-mbam-1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 748fa21f52..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-manage-mbam-administrator-roles-mbam-1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,52 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Manage MBAM Administrator Roles
-description: How to Manage MBAM Administrator Roles
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: c0f25a42-dbff-418d-a776-4fe23ee07d16
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Manage MBAM Administrator Roles
-
-
-After Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) Setup is complete for all server features, administrative users must be granted access to these server features. As a best practice, administrators who will manage or use MBAM server features, should be assigned to Active Directory security groups and then those groups should be added to the appropriate MBAM administrative local group.
-
-**To manage MBAM Administrator Role memberships**
-
-1. Assign administrative users to security groups in Active Directory Domain Services.
-
-2. Add Active Directory Domain Services security groups to the roles for MBAM administrative local groups on the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring server for the respective features. The user roles are as follows:
-
- - **MBAM System Administrators** have access to all Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring features in the MBAM administration website.
-
- - **MBAM Hardware Users** have access to the Hardware Compatibility features in the MBAM administration website.
-
- - **MBAM Helpdesk Users** have access to the Manage TPM and Drive Recovery options in the MBAM administration website, but must fill in all fields when they use either option.
-
- - **MBAM Report Users** have access to the Compliance and Audit reports in the MBAM administration website.
-
- - **MBAM Advanced Helpdesk Uses** have access to the Manage TPM and Drive Recovery options in the MBAM administration website. These users are not required to fill in all fields when they use either option.
-
- For more information about roles for Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring, see [Planning for MBAM 1.0 Administrator Roles](planning-for-mbam-10-administrator-roles.md).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Administering MBAM 1.0 Features](administering-mbam-10-features.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-manage-mbam-client-bitlocker-encryption-options-by-using-the-control-panel-mbam-1.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-manage-mbam-client-bitlocker-encryption-options-by-using-the-control-panel-mbam-1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0812e74168..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-manage-mbam-client-bitlocker-encryption-options-by-using-the-control-panel-mbam-1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Manage MBAM Client BitLocker Encryption Options by Using the Control Panel
-description: How to Manage MBAM Client BitLocker Encryption Options by Using the Control Panel
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: c08077e1-5529-468f-9370-c3b33fc258f3
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Manage MBAM Client BitLocker Encryption Options by Using the Control Panel
-
-
-A Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) control panel application, called BitLocker Encryption Options, will be available under **System and Security** when the MBAM Client is installed. This customized MBAM control panel replaces the default Windows BitLocker control panel. The MBAM control panel enables you to unlock encrypted drives (fixed and removable), and also helps you manage your PIN or password. For more information about enabling the MBAM control panel, see [How to Hide Default BitLocker Encryption in The Windows Control Panel](how-to-hide-default-bitlocker-encryption-in-the-windows-control-panel.md).
-
-**Note**
-For the BitLocker client, the Admin and Operational log files are located in Event Viewer, under **Application and Services Logs** / **Microsoft** / **Windows** / **BitLockerManagement**.
-
-
-
-**To use the MBAM Client Control Panel**
-
-1. To open BitLocker Encryption Options, click **Start**, and then select **Control Panel**. When **Control Panel** opens, select **System and Security**.
-
-2. Double-click **BitLocker Encryption Options** to open the customized MBAM control panel. You will see a list of all the hard disk drives on the computer and their encryption status. You will also see an option to manage your PIN or passwords.
-
-3. Use the list of hard disk drives on the computer to verify the encryption status, unlock a drive, or request an exemption for BitLocker protection if the User and Computer Exemption policies have been deployed.
-
-4. Non-administrators can use the BitLocker Encryption Options control panel to manage PINs or passwords. A user can select **Manage PIN,** and then enter both a current PIN and a new PIN. Users can also confirm their new PIN. The **Update PIN** function will reset the PIN to the new one that the user selects.
-
-5. To manage your password, select **Unlock drive** and enter your current password. As soon as the drive is unlocked, select **Reset Password** to change your current password.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Administering MBAM 1.0 Features](administering-mbam-10-features.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-manage-user-bitlocker-encryption-exemptions-mbam-1.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-manage-user-bitlocker-encryption-exemptions-mbam-1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 9dee32aef0..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-manage-user-bitlocker-encryption-exemptions-mbam-1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,111 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Manage User BitLocker Encryption Exemptions
-description: How to Manage User BitLocker Encryption Exemptions
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 48d69721-504f-4524-8a04-b9ce213ac9b4
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Manage User BitLocker Encryption Exemptions
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) can be used to manage BitLocker protection by exempting users who do not need or want their drives encrypted.
-
-To exempt users from BitLocker protection, an organization must first create an infrastructure to support such exemptions. The supporting infrastructure might include a contact telephone number, webpage, or mailing address to request exemption. Also, any exempt user will have to be added to a security group for Group Policy created specifically for exempted users. When members of this security group log on to a computer, the user Group Policy shows that the user is exempted from BitLocker protection. The user policy overwrites the computer policy, and the computer will remain exempt from BitLocker encryption.
-
-**Note**
-If the computer is already BitLocker-protected, the user exemption policy has no effect.
-
-
-
-The following table shows how BitLocker protection is applied based on how exemptions are set.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
User Status
-
Computer Not Exempt
-
Computer Exempt
-
-
-
-
-
User not exempt
-
BitLocker protection is enforced on the computer.
-
BitLocker protection is not enforced on the computer.
-
-
-
User exempt
-
BitLocker protection is not enforced on the computer.
-
BitLocker protection is not enforced on the computer.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**To exempt a user from BitLocker Encryption**
-
-1. Create an Active Directory Domain Services security group that will be used to manage user exemptions from BitLocker encryption.
-
-2. Create a Group Policy Object setting by using the MBAM Group Policy template. Associate the Group Policy Object with the Active Directory group that you created in the previous step. For more information about the necessary policy settings to enable users to request exemption from BitLocker encryption, see the Configure User Exemption Policy section in [Planning for MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Requirements](planning-for-mbam-10-group-policy-requirements.md).
-
-3. After creating a security group for BitLocker-exempted users, add to this group the names of the users who are requesting exemption. When a user logs on to a computer controlled by BitLocker, the MBAM client will check the User Exemption Policy setting and will suspend protection based on whether the user is part of the BitLocker exemption security group.
-
- **Note**
- Shared computer scenarios require special consideration regarding user exemption. If a non-exempt user logs on to a computer shared with an exempt user, the computer may be encrypted.
-
-
-
-**To enable users to request exemption from BitLocker Encryption**
-
-1. After you have configured user-exemption policies by usingwith the MBAM Policy template, a user can request exemption from BitLocker protection through the MBAM client.
-
-2. When a user logs on to a computer that is marked as **Compatible** in the MBAM Hardware Compatibility list, the system presents the user with a notification that the computer is going to be encrypted. The user can select **Request Exemption** and postpone the encryption by selecting **Later**, or select **Start** to accept the BitLocker encryption.
-
- **Note**
- Selecting **Request Exemption** will postpone the BitLocker protection until the maximum time set in the User Exemption Policy.
-
-
-
-3. When a user selects **Request Exemption**, the user is notified to contact the organization's BitLocker administration group. Depending on how the Configure User Exemption Policy is configured, users are provided with one or more of the following contact methods:
-
- - Phone Number
-
- - Webpage URL
-
- - Mailing Address
-
- After submittal of the request, the MBAM Administrator can decide if it is appropriate to add the user to the BitLocker Exemption Active Directory group.
-
- **Note**
- Once the postpone time limit from the User Exemption Policy has expired, users will not see the option to request exemption to the encryption policy. At this point, users must contact the MBAM administrator directly in order to receive exemption from BitLocker Protection.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Administering MBAM 1.0 Features](administering-mbam-10-features.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-move-mbam-10-features-to-another-computer.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-move-mbam-10-features-to-another-computer.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c691779c7b..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-move-mbam-10-features-to-another-computer.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,698 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Move MBAM 1.0 Features to Another Computer
-description: How to Move MBAM 1.0 Features to Another Computer
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: e1907d92-6b42-4ba3-b0e4-60a9cc8285cc
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Move MBAM 1.0 Features to Another Computer
-
-
-This topic describes the steps that you should take to move one or more Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) features to a different computer. When you move more than one MBAM feature to another computer, you should move them in the following order:
-
-1. Recovery and Hardware Database
-
-2. Compliance and Audit Database
-
-3. Compliance and Audit Reports
-
-4. Administration and Monitoring
-
-## To move the Recovery and Hardware Database
-
-
-You can use the following procedure to move the MBAM Recovery and Hardware Database from one computer to another (you can move this MBAM Server feature from Server A to Server B):
-
-****
-
-1. Stop all instances of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring web site.
-
-2. Run the MBAM Setup on Server B.
-
-3. Back up the MBAM Recovery and Hardware database on Server A.
-
-4. MBAM Recovery and Hardware database from Server A to B
-
-5. Restore the MBAM Recovery and Hardware database on Server B
-
-6. Configure the access to the MBAM Recovery and Hardware database on Server B
-
-7. Update the database connection data on MBAM Administration and Monitoring servers
-
-8. Resume all instances of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring web site
-
-**To stop all instances of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website**
-
-1. Use the Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager console to stop the MBAM website on each of the servers that run the MBAM Administration and Monitoring feature. The MBAM website is named **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring**.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use a command at the command prompt that is similar to the following, by using Windows PowerShell:
-
- `PS C:\> Stop-Website “Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring”`
-
- **Note**
- To run this PowerShell command prompt, you must add the IIS Module for PowerShell to the current instance of PowerShell. In addition, you must update the PowerShell execution policy to enable the execution of scripts.
-
-
-
-**To run MBAM setup on Server B**
-
-1. Run the MBAM setup on Server B and select the Recovery and Hardware Database for installation.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use a command at the command prompt that is similar to the following, by using Windows PowerShell:
-
- `PS C:\> MbamSetup.exe /qn I_ACCEPT_ENDUSER_LICENSE_AGREEMENT=1 AddLocal=KeyDatabase ADMINANDMON_MACHINENAMES=$DOMAIN$\$SERVERNAME$$ RECOVERYANDHWDB_SQLINSTANCE=$SERVERNAME$\$SQLINSTANCENAME$`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the following values in the example above with those that match your environment:
-
- - $SERVERNAME$\\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ - Enter the name of the server and instance to which the Recovery and Hardware database will be moved.
-
- - $DOMAIN$\\$SERVERNAME$ - Enter the domain and server names of each MBAM Application and Monitoring Server that will contact the Recovery and Hardware database. If there are multiple domain and server names, use a semicolon to separate each one of them in the list. For example, $DOMAIN\\SERVERNAME$;$DOMAIN\\$SERVERNAME$$. Additionally, each server name must be followed by a **$**. For example, MyDomain\\MyServerName1$, MyDomain\\MyServerName2$.
-
-
-
-**To back up the Database on Server A**
-
-1. To back up the Recovery and Hardware database on Server A, use SQL Server Management Studio and the Task named **Back Up…**. By default, the database name is **MBAM Recovery and Hardware Database**.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, create a SQL file (.sql) that contains the following SQL script:
-
- Modify the MBAM Recovery and Hardware Database to use the full recovery mode.
-
- ```sql
- USE master;
-
- GO
-
- ALTER DATABASE "MBAM Recovery and Hardware"
-
- SET RECOVERY FULL;
-
- GO
- ```
-
- Create MBAM Recovery and Hardware Database Data and MBAM Recovery logical backup devices.
-
- ```sql
- USE master
-
- GO
-
- EXEC sp_addumpdevice 'disk', 'MBAM Recovery and Hardware Database Data Device',
-
- 'Z:\MBAM Recovery and Hardware Database Data.bak';
-
- GO
- ```
-
- Back up the full MBAM Recovery and Hardware database.
-
- ```sql
- BACKUP DATABASE [MBAM Recovery and Hardware] TO [MBAM Recovery and Hardware Database Data Device];
-
- GO
-
- BACKUP CERTIFICATE [MBAM Recovery Encryption Certificate]
-
- TO FILE = 'Z:\SQLServerInstanceCertificateFile'
-
- WITH PRIVATE KEY
-
- (
-
- FILE = ' Z:\SQLServerInstanceCertificateFilePrivateKey',
-
- ENCRYPTION BY PASSWORD = '$PASSWORD$'
-
- );
-
- GO
- ```
-
- **Note**
- Replace the values from the preceding example with those that match your environment:
-
- - $PASSWORD$ - Enter a password that you will use to encrypt the Private Key file.
-
-
-
-3. Execute the SQL file by using SQL Server PowerShell and a command that is similar to the following:
-
- `PS C:\> Invoke-Sqlcmd -InputFile 'Z:\BackupMBAMRecoveryandHardwarDatabaseScript.sql' -ServerInstance $SERVERNAME$\$SQLINSTANCENAME$`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the value in the previous example with those that match your environment:
-
- - $SERVERNAME$\\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ - Enter the name of the server and the instance from which you back up the Recovery and Hardware database.
-
-
-
-**To move the Database and Certificate from Server A to B**
-
-1. Move the MBAM Recovery and Hardware database data.bak from Server A to Server B by using Windows Explorer.
-
-2. To move the certificate for the encrypted database, you will need to use the following automation steps. To automate this procedure, you can use Windows PowerShell to enter a command that is similar to the following:
-
- `PS C:\> Copy-Item “Z:\MBAM Recovery and Hardware Database Data.bak” \\$SERVERNAME$\$DESTINATIONSHARE$`
-
- `PS C:\> Copy-Item “Z:\SQLServerInstanceCertificateFile” \\$SERVERNAME$\$DESTINATIONSHARE$`
-
- `PS C:\> Copy-Item “Z:\SQLServerInstanceCertificateFilePrivateKey” \\$SERVERNAME$\$DESTINATIONSHARE$`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the value from the preceding example with those that match your environment:
-
- - $SERVERNAME$ - Enter the name of the server to which the files will be copied.
-
- - $DESTINATIONSHARE$ - Enter the name of the share and path to which the files will be copied.
-
-
-
-**To restore the Database on Server B**
-
-1. Restore the Recovery and Hardware database on Server B by using the SQL Server Management Studio and the Task named **Restore Database**.
-
-2. Once the task has been executed, choose the database backup file by selecting the **From Device** option, and then use the **Add** command to choose the MBAM Recovery and Hardware database **Data.bak** file.
-
-3. Select **OK** to complete the restoration process.
-
-4. To automate this procedure, create a SQL file (.sql) that contains the following SQL script:
-
- ```sql
- -- Restore MBAM Recovery and Hardware Database.
-
- USE master
-
- GO
- ```
-
- Drop the certificate created by MBAM Setup.
-
- ```sql
- DROP CERTIFICATE [MBAM Recovery Encryption Certificate]
-
- GO
- ```
-
- Add certificate
-
- ```sql
- CREATE CERTIFICATE [MBAM Recovery Encryption Certificate]
-
- FROM FILE = 'Z: \SQLServerInstanceCertificateFile'
-
- WITH PRIVATE KEY
-
- (
-
- FILE = ' Z:\SQLServerInstanceCertificateFilePrivateKey',
-
- DECRYPTION BY PASSWORD = '$PASSWORD$'
-
- );
-
- GO
- ```
-
- Restore the MBAM Recovery and Hardware database data and the log files.
-
- ```sql
- RESTORE DATABASE [MBAM Recovery and Hardware]
-
- FROM DISK = 'Z:\MBAM Recovery and Hardware Database Data.bak'
-
- WITH REPLACE
- ```
-
- **Note**
- Replace the values from the preceding example with those that match your environment:
-
- - $PASSWORD$ - Enter the password that you used to encrypt the Private Key file.
-
-
-
-5. Use Windows PowerShell to enter a command line that is similar to the following:
-
- `PS C:\> Invoke-Sqlcmd -InputFile 'Z:\RestoreMBAMRecoveryandHardwarDatabaseScript.sql' -ServerInstance $SERVERNAME$\$SQLINSTANCENAME$`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the value from the receding example with those that match your environment:
-
- - $SERVERNAME$\\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ - Enter the name of the server and the instance to which the Recovery and Hardware Database will be restored.
-
-
-
-**Configure the access to the Database on Server B**
-
-1. On Server B, use the Local user and Groups snap-in from Server Manager, to add the computer accounts from each server that runs the MBAM Administration and Monitoring feature to the Local Group named **MBAM Recovery and Hardware DB Access**.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use Windows PowerShell on Server B to enter a command that is similar to the following:
-
- `PS C:\> net localgroup "MBAM Recovery and Hardware DB Access" $DOMAIN$\$SERVERNAME$$ /add`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the values from the preceding example with the applicable values for your environment:
-
- - $DOMAIN$\\$SERVERNAME$$ - Enter the domain name and machine name of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server. The server name must be followed by a **$**, for example, MyDomain\\MyServerName1$.
-
-
-
-~~~
-You must run the command for each Administration and Monitoring Server that will be accessing the database in your environment.
-~~~
-
-**To update the Database Connection data on MBAM Administration and Monitoring Servers**
-
-1. On each of the servers that run the MBAM Administration and Monitoring feature, use the Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager console to update the Connection String information for the following applications, which are hosted in the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring website:
-
- - MBAM Administration Service
-
- - MBAM Recovery And Hardware Service
-
-2. Select each application and use the **Configuration Editor** feature, which is located under the **Management** section of the **Feature View**.
-
-3. Select the **configurationStrings** option from the Section list control.
-
-4. Choose the row named **(Collection)**, and open the **Collection Editor** by selecting the button on the right side of the row.
-
-5. In the **Collection Editor**, choose the row named **KeyRecoveryConnectionString** when you updated the configuration for the ‘MBAMAdministrationService’ application, or choose the row named Microsoft.Mbam.RecoveryAndHardwareDataStore.ConnectionString, when updating the configuration for the ‘MBAMRecoveryAndHardwareService’.
-
-6. Update the **Data Source=** value for the **configurationStrings** property to list the server name and the instance where the Recovery and Hardware Database was moved to. For example, $SERVERNAME$\\$SQLINSTANCENAME$.
-
-7. To automate this procedure, you can use a command that is similar to the following one, by using Windows PowerShell on each Administration and Monitoring Server:
-
- `PS C:\> Set-WebConfigurationProperty '/connectionStrings/add[@name="KeyRecoveryConnectionString"]' -PSPath "IIS:\sites\Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring\MBAMAdministrationService" -Name "connectionString" -Value “Data Source=$SERVERNAME$\$SQLINSTANCENAME$;Initial Catalog=MBAM Recovery and Hardware;Integrated Security=SSPI;”`
-
- `PS C:\> Set-WebConfigurationProperty '/connectionStrings/add[@name="Microsoft.Mbam.RecoveryAndHardwareDataStore.ConnectionString"]' -PSPath "IIS:\sites\Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring\MBAMRecoveryAndHardwareService" -Name "connectionString" -Value "Data Source=$SERVERNAME$\$SQLINSTANCENAME$;Initial Catalog=MBAM Recovery and Hardware;Integrated Security=SSPI;"`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the value from the preceding example with those that match your environment:
-
- - $SERVERNAME$\\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ - Enter the server name and instance where the Recovery and Hardware database is.
-
-
-
-**To resume all instances of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website**
-
-1. On each of the servers that run the MBAM Administration and Monitoring feature, use the Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager console to Start the MBAM website, which is named **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring**.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use a command that is similar to the following one, by using Windows PowerShell:
-
- `PS C:\> Start-Website “Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring”`
-
-## To move the Compliance Status Database feature
-
-
-If you choose to move the MBAM Compliance Status Database feature from one computer to another, such as from Server A to Server B, you should use the following procedure:
-
-1. Stop all instances of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website
-
-2. Run MBAM setup on Server B
-
-3. Backup the Database on Server A
-
-4. Move the Database from Server A to B
-
-5. Restore the Database on Server B
-
-6. Configure Access to the Database on Server B
-
-7. Update database connection data on MBAM Administration and Monitoring servers
-
-8. Resume all instances of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website
-
-**To stop all instances of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website**
-
-1. On each of the servers that run the MBAM Administration and Monitoring feature, use the Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager console to Stop the MBAM website, which is named **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring**.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use a command that is similar to the following one,by using Windows PowerShell:
-
- `PS C:\> Stop-Website “Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring”`
-
- **Note**
- To execute this command, you must add the IIS Module for PowerShell to current instance of PowerShell. In addition, you must update the PowerShell execution policy to enable the execution of scripts.
-
-
-
-**To run MBAM Setup on Server B**
-
-1. Run MBAM Setup on Server B and select the Compliance Status Database feature for installation.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use a command that is similar to the following one, by using Windows PowerShell:
-
- `PS C:\> MbamSetup.exe /qn I_ACCEPT_ENDUSER_LICENSE_AGREEMENT=1 AddLocal= ReportsDatabase ADMINANDMON_MACHINENAMES=$DOMAIN$\$SERVERNAME$ COMPLIDB_SQLINSTANCE=$SERVERNAME$\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ REPORTS_USERACCOUNT=$DOMAIN$\$USERNAME$`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the values from the preceding example with those that match your environment:
-
- - $SERVERNAME$\\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ - Enter the server name and instance where the Compliance Status Database will be moved to.
-
- - $DOMAIN$\\$SERVERNAME$ - Enter the domain names and server names of each MBAM Application and Monitoring Server that will contact the Compliance Status Database. If there are multiple domain names and server names, use a semicolon to separate each one of them in the list. For example, $DOMAIN\\SERVERNAME$;$DOMAIN\\$SERVERNAME$$. Each server name must be followed by a **$** as shown in the example. For example, MyDomain\\MyServerName1$, MyDomain\\MyServerName2$.
-
- - $DOMAIN$\\$USERNAME$ - Enter the domain and user name that will be used by the Compliance and Audit reports feature to connect to the Compliance Status Database.
-
-
-
-**To back up the Compliance Database on Server A**
-
-1. To back up the Compliance Database on Server A, use SQL Server Management Studio and the Task named **Back Up…**. By default, the database name is **MBAM Compliance Status Database**.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, create a SQL file (.sql) that contains the following-SQL script:
-
- ```sql
- -- Modify the MBAM Compliance Status Database to use the full recovery model.
-
- USE master;
-
- GO
-
- ALTER DATABASE "MBAM Compliance Status"
-
- SET RECOVERY FULL;
-
- GO
-
- -- Create MBAM Compliance Status Data logical backup devices.
-
- USE master
-
- GO
-
- EXEC sp_addumpdevice 'disk', 'MBAM Compliance Status Database Data Device',
-
- 'Z: \MBAM Compliance Status Database Data.bak';
-
- GO
-
- -- Back up the full MBAM Recovery and Hardware database.
-
- BACKUP DATABASE [MBAM Compliance Status] TO [MBAM Compliance Status Database Data Device];
-
- GO
- ```
-
-3. Run the SQL file with a command that is similar to the following one, by using the SQL Server PowerShell:
-
- `PS C:\> Invoke-Sqlcmd -InputFile "Z:\BackupMBAMComplianceStatusDatabaseScript.sql" –ServerInstance $SERVERNAME$\$SQLINSTANCENAME$`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the value from the preceding example with those that match your environment:
-
- - $SERVERNAME$\\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ - Enter the server name and the instance from where the Compliance Status database will be backed up.
-
-
-
-**To move the Database from Server A to B**
-
-1. Move the following files from Server A to Server B, by using Windows Explorer:
-
- - MBAM Compliance Status Database Data.bak
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use a command that is similar to the following using Windows PowerShell:
-
- `PS C:\> Copy-Item “Z:\MBAM Compliance Status Database Data.bak” \\$SERVERNAME$\$DESTINATIONSHARE$`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the value from the preceding example with those that match your environment:
-
- - $SERVERNAME$ - Enter the server name where the files will be copied to.
-
- - $DESTINATIONSHARE$ - Enter the name of share and path where the files will be copied to.
-
-
-
-**To restore the Database on Server B**
-
-1. Restore the Compliance Status database on Server B by using SQL Server Management Studio and the Task named **Restore Database…**.
-
-2. Once the task is executed, select the database backup file, by selecting the From Device option, and then use the Add command to choose the MBAM Compliance Status Database Data.bak file. Click OK to complete the restoration process.
-
-3. To automate this procedure, create a SQL file (.sql) that contains the following-SQL script:
-
- ```sql
- -- Create MBAM Compliance Status Database Data logical backup devices.
-
- Use master
-
- GO
-
- -- Restore the MBAM Compliance Status database data files.
-
- RESTORE DATABASE [MBAM Compliance Status Database]
-
- FROM DISK = 'C:\test\MBAM Compliance Status Database Data.bak'
-
- WITH REPLACE
- ```
-
-4. Run the SQL File with a command that is similar to the following one, by using the SQL Server PowerShell:
-
- `PS C:\> Invoke-Sqlcmd -InputFile "Z:\RestoreMBAMComplianceStatusDatabaseScript.sql" -ServerInstance $SERVERNAME$\$SQLINSTANCENAME$`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the value from the preceding example with those that match your environment:
-
- - $SERVERNAME$\\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ - Enter the server name and instance where the Compliance Status Database will be restored to.
-
-
-
-**To configure the Access to the Database on Server B**
-
-1. On Server B use the Local user and Groups snap-in from Server Manager to add the machine accounts from each server that runs the MBAM Administration and Monitoring feature to the Local Group named **MBAM Compliance Status DB Access**.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use a command that is similar to the following one, by using Windows PowerShell on Server B:
-
- `PS C:\> net localgroup "MBAM Compliance Auditing DB Access" $DOMAIN$\$SERVERNAME$$ /add`
-
- `PS C:\> net localgroup "MBAM Compliance Auditing DB Access" $DOMAIN$\$REPORTSUSERNAME$ /add`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the value from the preceding example with the applicable values for your environment:
-
- - $DOMAIN$\\$SERVERNAME$$ - Enter the domain and machine name of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server. The server name must be followed by a **$**.For example, MyDomain\\MyServerName1$.
-
- - $DOMAIN$\\$REPORTSUSERNAME$ - Enter the user account name that was used to configure the data source for the Compliance and Audit reports
-
-
-
-~~~
-For each Administration and Monitoring Server that will access the database of your environment, you must run the command that will add the servers to the MBAM Compliance Auditing DB Access local group.
-~~~
-
-**To update the database connection data on MBAM Administration and Monitoring servers**
-
-1. On each of the servers that run the MBAM Administration and Monitoring feature, use the Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager console to update the Connection String information for the following Applications, which are hosted in the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring website:
-
- - MBAMAdministrationService
-
- - MBAMComplianceStatusService
-
-2. Select each application and use the **Configuration Editor** feature, which is located under the **Management** section of the **Feature View**.
-
-3. Select the **configurationStrings** option from the Section list control.
-
-4. Select the row named **(Collection)**, and open the Collection Editor by selecting the button on the right side of the row.
-
-5. In the **Collection Editor**, select the row named **ComplianceStatusConnectionString**, when you update the configuration for the MBAMAdministrationService application, or the row named **Microsoft.Windows.Mdop.BitLockerManagement.StatusReportDataStore.ConnectionString**, when you update the configuration for the MBAMComplianceStatusService.
-
-6. Update the **Data Source=** value for the **configurationStrings** property to list the server name and the instance name. For example, $SERVERNAME$\\$SQLINSTANCENAME, to which the Recovery and Hardware Database was moved.
-
-7. To automate this procedure, you can use Windows PowerShell to enter a command that is similar to the following one on each Administration and Monitoring Server:
-
- `PS C:\> Set-WebConfigurationProperty '/connectionStrings/add[@name="ComplianceStatusConnectionString"]' -PSPath "IIS:\sites\Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring\MBAMAdministrationService" -Name "connectionString" -Value "Data Source=$SERVERNAME$\$SQLINSTANCENAME$;Initial Catalog=MBAM Compliance Status;Integrated Security=SSPI;"`
-
- `PS C:\> Set-WebConfigurationProperty '/connectionStrings/add[@name="Microsoft.Windows.Mdop.BitLockerManagement.StatusReportDataStore.ConnectionString"]' -PSPath "IIS:\sites\Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring\MBAMComplianceStatusService" -Name "connectionString" -Value "Data Source=$SERVERNAME$\$SQLINSTANCENAME;Initial Catalog=MBAM Compliance Status;Integrated Security=SSPI;"`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the value from the preceding example with those that match your environment:
-
- - $SERVERNAME$\\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ - Enter the server name and instance name where the Recovery and Hardware Database is located.
-
-
-
-**To resume all instances of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website**
-
-1. On each of the servers running the MBAM Administration and Monitoring feature, use the Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager console to start the MBAM web site named **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring**.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use Windows PowerShell to enter a command that is similar to the following:
-
- **PS C:\\> Start-Website “Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring”**
-
-## To moving the Compliance and Audit Reports
-
-
-If you choose to move the MBAM Compliance and Audit Reports from one computer to another (specifically, if you move feature from Server A to Server B), you should use the following procedure and steps:
-
-1. Run MBAM setup on Server B
-
-2. Configure Access to the Compliance and Audit Reports on Server B
-
-3. Stop all instances of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website
-
-4. Update the reports connection data on MBAM Administration and Monitoring servers
-
-5. Resume all instances of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website
-
-**To run MBAM setup on Server B**
-
-1. Run MBAM setup on Server B and only select the Compliance and Audit feature for installation.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use a command that is similar to the following, by using Windows PowerShell:
-
- `PS C:\> MbamSetup.exe /qn I_ACCEPT_ENDUSER_LICENSE_AGREEMENT=1 AddLocal=Reports COMPLIDB_SQLINSTANCE=$SERVERNAME$\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ REPORTS_USERACCOUNTPW=$PASSWORD$`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the values from the preceding example with those that match your environment:
-
- - $SERVERNAME$\\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ - Enter the server name and instance where the Compliance Status Database is located.
-
- - $DOMAIN$\\$USERNAME$ - Enter the domain name and user name that will be used by the Compliance and Audit reports feature to connect to the Compliance Status Database.
-
- - $PASSWORD$ - Enter the password of the user account that will be used to connect to the Compliance Status Database.
-
-
-
-**To configure the access to the Compliance and Audit Reports on Server B**
-
-1. On Server B, use the Local user and Groups snap-in from Server Manager to add the user accounts that will have access to the Compliance and Audit Reports. Add the user accounts to the local group named “MBAM Report Users”.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use a command that is similar to the following, by using Windows PowerShell on Server B.
-
- `PS C:\> net localgroup "MBAM Report Users" $DOMAIN$\$REPORTSUSERNAME$ /add`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the following value from the preceding example with the applicable values for your environment:
-
- - $DOMAIN$\\$REPORTSUSERNAME$ - Enter the user account name that was used to configure the data source for the Compliance and Audit reports
-
-
-
-~~~
-The command to add the users to the MBAM Report Users local group must be run for each user that will be accessing the reports in your environment.
-~~~
-
-**To stop all instances of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website**
-
-1. On each of the servers that run the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Feature use the Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager console to Stop the MBAM website named **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring**.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use a command that is similar to the following one, by using Windows PowerShell:
-
- `PS C:\> Stop-Website “Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring”`
-
-**To update the Database Connection Data on MBAM Administration and Monitoring Servers**
-
-1. On each of the servers that run the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Feature, use the Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager console to update the Compliance Reports URL.
-
-2. Select the **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring** website and use the **Configuration Editor** feature which can be found under the **Management** section of the **Feature View**.
-
-3. Select the **appSettings** option from the Section list control.
-
-4. From here, select the row named **(Collection)**, and open the **Collection Editor** by selecting the button on the right side of the row.
-
-5. In the **Collection Editor**, select the row named “Microsoft.Mbam.Reports.Url”.
-
-6. Update the value for Microsoft.Mbam.Reports.Url to reflect the server name for Server B. If the Compliance and Audit reports feature was installed on a named SQL Reporting Services instance, make sure that you add or update the name of the instance to the URL. For example, http://$SERVERNAME$/ReportServer\_$SQLSRSINSTANCENAME$/Pages....
-
-7. To automate this procedure, you can use Windows PowerShell to enter a command that is similar to the following one on each Administration and Monitoring Server:
-
- `PS C:\> Set-WebConfigurationProperty '/appSettings/add[@key="Microsoft.Mbam.Reports.Url"]' -PSPath "IIS:\sites\Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring" -Name "Value" -Value “http://$SERVERNAME$/ReportServer_$SRSINSTANCENAME$/Pages/ReportViewer.aspx?/Malta+Compliance+Reports/”`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the value from the preceding example with those that match your environment:
-
- - $SERVERNAME$ - Enter the name of the server to which the Compliance and Audit Reports were installed.
-
- - $SRSINSTANCENAME$ - Enter the name of the SQL Reporting Services instance to which the Compliance and Audit Reports were installed.
-
-
-
-**To resume all instances of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website**
-
-1. On each of the servers that run the MBAM Administration and Monitoring feature, use the Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager console to Start the MBAM web site named **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring**.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use a command that is similar to the following one, by using Windows PowerShell:
-
- `PS C:\> Start-Website “Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring”`
-
- **Note**
- To execute this command, the IIS Module for PowerShell must be added to the current instance of PowerShell. In addition, you must update the PowerShell execution policy to enable execution of scripts.
-
-
-
-## To move the Administration and Monitoring feature
-
-
-If you choose to move the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Reports feature from one computer to another, (if you move feature from Server A to Server B), you should use the following procedure. The process includes the following steps:
-
-1. Run MBAM setup on Server B
-
-2. Configure Access to the Database on Server B
-
-**To run MBAM setup on Server B**
-
-1. Run MBAM setup on Server B and only select the Administration feature for installation.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use a command that is similar to the following one, by using Windows PowerShell:
-
- `PS C:\> MbamSetup.exe /qn I_ACCEPT_ENDUSER_LICENSE_AGREEMENT=1 AddLocal=AdministrationMonitoringServer,HardwareCompatibility COMPLIDB_SQLINSTANCE=$SERVERNAME$\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ RECOVERYANDHWDB_SQLINSTANCE=$SERVERNAME$\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ SRS_REPORTSITEURL=$REPORTSSERVERURL$`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the values from the preceding example with those that match your environment:
-
- - $SERVERNAME$\\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ - For the COMPLIDB\_SQLINSTANCE parameter, input the server name and instance where the Compliance Status Database is located. For the RECOVERYANDHWDB\_SQLINSTANCE parameter, input the server name and instance where the Recovery and Hardware Database is located.
-
- - $DOMAIN$\\$USERNAME$ - Enter the domain and user name that will be used by the Compliance and Audit reports feature to connect to the Compliance Status Database.
-
- - $ REPORTSSERVERURL$ - Enter the URL for the Home location of the SQL Reporting Service website. If the reports were installed to a default SRS instance the URL format will formatted “http:// $SERVERNAME$/ReportServer”. If the reports were installed to a default SRS instance, the URL format will be formatted to “http://$SERVERNAME$/ReportServer\_$SQLINSTANCENAME$”.
-
-
-
-**To configure the Access to the Databases**
-
-1. On server or servers where the Recovery and Hardware, and Compliance and Audit databases are deployed, use the Local user and Groups snap-in from Server Manager to add the machine accounts from each server that run the MBAM Administration and Monitoring feature to the Local Groups named “MBAM Recovery and Hardware DB Access” (Recovery and Hardware DB Server) and “MBAM Compliance Status DB Access” (Compliance and Audit DB Server).
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use a command that is similar to the following one, by using Windows PowerShell on the server where the Compliance and Audit databases were deployed.
-
- `PS C:\> net localgroup "MBAM Compliance Auditing DB Access" $DOMAIN$\$SERVERNAME$$ /add`
-
- `PS C:\> net localgroup "MBAM Compliance Auditing DB Access" $DOMAIN$\$REPORTSUSERNAME$ /add`
-
-3. On the server where the Recovery and Hardware databases were deployed, run a command that is similar to the following one, by using Windows PowerShell.
-
- `PS C:\> net localgroup "MBAM Recovery and Hardware DB Access" $DOMAIN$\$SERVERNAME$$ /add`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the value from the preceding example with the applicable values for your environment:
-
- - $DOMAIN$\\$SERVERNAME$$ - Enter the domain and machine name of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server. The server name must be followed by a **$**. For example, MyDomain\\MyServerName1$)
-
- - $DOMAIN$\\$REPORTSUSERNAME$ - Enter the user account name that was used to configure the data source for the Compliance and Audit reports.
-
-
-
-~~~
-The commands listed for adding the server computer accounts to the MBAM local groups must be run for each Administration and Monitoring Server that will be accessing the databases in your environment.
-~~~
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Administering MBAM 1.0 Features](administering-mbam-10-features.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-recover-a-corrupted-drive-mbam-1.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-recover-a-corrupted-drive-mbam-1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b0dee3080f..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-recover-a-corrupted-drive-mbam-1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Recover a Corrupted Drive
-description: How to Recover a Corrupted Drive
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 715491ae-69c0-4fae-ad3f-3bd19a0db2f2
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Recover a Corrupted Drive
-
-
-To recover a corrupted drive that has been protected by BitLocker, a Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) help desk user must create a recovery key package file. This package file can be copied to the computer that contains the corrupted drive and then used to recover the drive. To accomplish this, use the following procedure.
-
-**To Recover a Corrupted Drive**
-
-1. Open the MBAM administration website.
-
-2. Select **Drive Recovery** from the navigation pane. Enter the user’s domain name and user name, the reason for unlocking the drive, and the user’s recovery password ID.
-
- **Note**
- If you are a member of the Help Desk Administrators role, you do not have to enter the user’s domain name or user name.
-
-
-
-3. Click **Submit**. The recovery key will be displayed.
-
-4. Click **Save**, and then select **Recovery Key Package**. The recovery key package will be created on your computer.
-
-5. Copy the recovery key package to the computer that has the corrupted drive.
-
-6. Open an elevated command prompt. To do this, click **Start** and type `cmd` in the **Search programs and files** box. In the search results list, right-click **cmd.exe** and select **Run as Administrator**.
-
-7. At the command prompt, type the following:
-
- `repair-bde -kp -rp `
-
- **Note**
- For the <fixed drive> in the command, specify an available storage device that has free space equal to or larger than the data on the corrupted drive. Data on the corrupted drive is recovered and moved to the specified fixed drive.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Performing BitLocker Management with MBAM](performing-bitlocker-management-with-mbam.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-recover-a-drive-in-recovery-mode-mbam-1.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-recover-a-drive-in-recovery-mode-mbam-1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index fe926539db..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-recover-a-drive-in-recovery-mode-mbam-1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,71 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Recover a Drive in Recovery Mode
-description: How to Recover a Drive in Recovery Mode
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 09d27e4b-57fa-47c7-a004-8b876a49f27e
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Recover a Drive in Recovery Mode
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) includes Encrypted Drive Recovery features. These features ensure the capture and storage of data and availability of tools that are required to access a BitLocker-protected volume when BitLocker puts that volume into recovery mode. A BitLocker-protected volume goes into recovery mode when a PIN or password is lost or forgotten, or when the Trusted Module Platform (TPM) chip detects a change to the computer's BIOS or startup files.
-
-Use this procedure to access the centralized Key Recovery data system that can provide a recovery password when a recovery password ID and associated user identifier are supplied.
-
-**Important**
-MBAM generates single-use recovery keys. Under this limitation, a recovery key can be used only once and then it is no longer valid. The single use of a recovery password is automatically applied to operating system drives and fixed drives. On removable drives, the single use is applied when the drive is removed and then re-inserted and unlocked on a computer that has the group policy settings activated to manage removable drives.
-
-
-
-**To recover a drive in Recovery Mode**
-
-1. Open the MBAM website.
-
-2. In the navigation pane, click **Drive Recovery**. The **Recover access to an encrypted drive** webpage opens.
-
-3. Enter the user's Windows Logon domain and user name and the first eight digits of the recovery key ID, to receive a list of possible matching recovery keys. Alternatively, enter the entire recovery key ID to receive the exact recovery key. Select one of the predefined options in the **Reason for Drive Unlock** drop-down list, and then click **Submit**.
-
- **Note**
- If you are an MBAM Advanced Helpdesk User, the user domain and user ID entries are not required.
-
-
-
-4. MBAM returns the following:
-
- 1. An error message if no matching recovery password is found
-
- 2. Multiple possible matches if the user has multiple matching recovery passwords
-
- 3. The recovery password and recovery package for the submitted user
-
- **Note**
- If you are recovering a damaged drive, the recovery package option provides BitLocker with the critical information necessary to attempt the recovery.
-
-
-
-5. After the recovery password and recovery package are retrieved, the recovery password is displayed. To copy the password, click **Copy Key**, and then paste the recovery password into an email or other text file for temporary storage. Or, to save the recovery password to a file, click **Save**.
-
-6. When the user types the recovery password into the system or uses the recovery package, the drive is unlocked.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Performing BitLocker Management with MBAM](performing-bitlocker-management-with-mbam.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-recover-a-moved-drive-mbam-1.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-recover-a-moved-drive-mbam-1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 77052fa258..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-recover-a-moved-drive-mbam-1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Recover a Moved Drive
-description: How to Recover a Moved Drive
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 0c7199d8-9463-4f44-9af3-b70eceeaff1d
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Recover a Moved Drive
-
-
-When you move an operating system drive that has been previously encrypted by using Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM), you must resolve certain issues. After a PIN is attached to the new computer, the drive will not accept the start-up PIN that was used in previous computer. The system considers the PIN to be invalid because of the change to the Trusted Platform Module (TPM) chip. You must obtain a recovery key ID to retrieve the recovery password in order to use the moved drive. To do this, use the following procedure.
-
-**To recover a moved drive**
-
-1. On the computer that contains the moved drive, start in Windows Recovery Environment (WinRE) mode, or start the computer by using the Microsoft Diagnostics and Recovery Toolset (DaRT).
-
-2. Once the computer has been started with WinRE or DaRT, MBAM will treat the moved operating system drive as a data drive. MBAM will then display the drive’s recovery password ID and ask for the recovery password.
-
- **Note**
- In some cases, you might be able to click **I forget the PIN** during the startup process to enter the recovery mode. This also displays the recovery key ID.
-
-
-
-3. On the MBAM administration website, use the recovery key ID to retrieve the recovery password and unlock the drive.
-
-4. If the moved drive was configured to use a TPM chip on the original computer, you must take additional steps after you unlock the drive and complete the start process. In WinRE mode, open a command prompt and use the **manage-bde** tool to decrypt the drive. The use of this tool is the only way to remove the TPM-plus-PIN protection without the original TPM chip.
-
-5. After the removal is complete, start the system normally. The MBAM agent will proceed to enforce the policy to encrypt the drive with the new computer’s TPM plus PIN.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Performing BitLocker Management with MBAM](performing-bitlocker-management-with-mbam.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-reset-a-tpm-lockout-mbam-1.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-reset-a-tpm-lockout-mbam-1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0dd2c800ef..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/how-to-reset-a-tpm-lockout-mbam-1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Reset a TPM Lockout
-description: How to Reset a TPM Lockout
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 91ec6666-1ae2-4e76-9459-ad65c405f639
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Reset a TPM Lockout
-
-
-The Encrypted Drive Recovery feature of Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) encompasses both the capture and storage of data and the availability for tools that are required to manage the Trusted Platform Module (TPM). This topic covers how to access the centralized Key Recovery data system in the bit\_admmon\_tlanextref administration website. The Key Recovery data system can provide a TPM owner password file when the computer identity and the associated user identifier are supplied.
-
-A TPM lockout can occur if a user enters an incorrect PIN too many times. The number of times that a user can enter an incorrect PIN before the TPM lockout is based on the computer manufacturer's specification.
-
-**To reset a TPM lockout**
-
-1. Open the MBAM administration website.
-
-2. In the navigation pane, select **Manage TPM**. This opens the **Manage TPM** page.
-
-3. Enter the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) for the computer and the computer name. Enter the user’s Windows Logon domain and the user’s user name. Select one of the predefined options in the **Reason for requesting TPM owner password file** drop-down menu. Click **Submit**.
-
-4. MBAM will return one of the following:
-
- - An error message if no matching TPM owner password file is found
-
- - The TPM owner password file for the submitted computer
-
- **Note**
- If you are an Advanced Helpdesk User, the user domain and user ID fields are not required.
-
-
-
-5. Upon retrieval, the owner password is displayed. To save this password to a .tpm file, click the **Save** button.
-
-6. The user will run the TPM management console and select the **Reset TPM lockout** option and provide the TPM owner password file to reset the TPM lockout.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Performing BitLocker Management with MBAM](performing-bitlocker-management-with-mbam.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/images/checklistbox.gif b/mdop/mbam-v1/images/checklistbox.gif
deleted file mode 100644
index 8af13c51d1..0000000000
Binary files a/mdop/mbam-v1/images/checklistbox.gif and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/images/mbam-1-server.jpg b/mdop/mbam-v1/images/mbam-1-server.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index f49d4978c9..0000000000
Binary files a/mdop/mbam-v1/images/mbam-1-server.jpg and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/images/mbam-3-server.jpg b/mdop/mbam-v1/images/mbam-3-server.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index ffd6420bda..0000000000
Binary files a/mdop/mbam-v1/images/mbam-3-server.jpg and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/images/mbam-4-computer.jpg b/mdop/mbam-v1/images/mbam-4-computer.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 9b1aa2ab35..0000000000
Binary files a/mdop/mbam-v1/images/mbam-4-computer.jpg and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/images/mbam-5-computer.jpg b/mdop/mbam-v1/images/mbam-5-computer.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index cd7b2668ae..0000000000
Binary files a/mdop/mbam-v1/images/mbam-5-computer.jpg and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/index.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/index.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b25186a196..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 1 Administrator's Guide
-description: Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 1 Administrator's Guide
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 4086e721-db24-4439-bdcd-ac5ef901811f
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 04/19/2017
----
-
-# Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 1 Administrator's Guide
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) provides a simplified administrative interface that you can use to manage BitLocker drive encryption. With MBAM, you can select BitLocker encryption policy options that are appropriate to your enterprise and then use them to monitor client compliance with those policies. You can also report on the encryption status of an individual computer and on the entire enterprise. In addition, you can access recovery key information when users forget their PIN or password, or when their BIOS or boot record changes.
-
-- [Getting Started with MBAM 1.0](getting-started-with-mbam-10.md)
- - [About MBAM 1.0](about-mbam-10.md)
- - [Release Notes for MBAM 1.0](release-notes-for-mbam-10.md)
- - [Evaluating MBAM 1.0](evaluating-mbam-10.md)
- - [High Level Architecture for MBAM 1.0](high-level-architecture-for-mbam-10.md)
- - [Accessibility for MBAM 1.0](accessibility-for-mbam-10.md)
- - [Privacy Statement for MBAM 1.0](privacy-statement-for-mbam-10.md)
-- [Planning for MBAM 1.0](planning-for-mbam-10.md)
- - [Preparing your Environment for MBAM 1.0](preparing-your-environment-for-mbam-10.md)
- - [MBAM 1.0 Deployment Prerequisites](mbam-10-deployment-prerequisites.md)
- - [Planning to Deploy MBAM 1.0](planning-to-deploy-mbam-10.md)
- - [MBAM 1.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-10-supported-configurations.md)
- - [MBAM 1.0 Planning Checklist](mbam-10-planning-checklist.md)
-- [Deploying MBAM 1.0](deploying-mbam-10.md)
- - [Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Server Infrastructure](deploying-the-mbam-10-server-infrastructure.md)
- - [Deploying MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Objects](deploying-mbam-10-group-policy-objects.md)
- - [Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Client](deploying-the-mbam-10-client.md)
- - [Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Language Release Update](deploying-the-mbam-10-language-release-update.md)
- - [MBAM 1.0 Deployment Checklist](mbam-10-deployment-checklist.md)
-- [Operations for MBAM 1.0](operations-for-mbam-10.md)
- - [Administering MBAM 1.0 Features](administering-mbam-10-features.md)
- - [Monitoring and Reporting BitLocker Compliance with MBAM 1.0](monitoring-and-reporting-bitlocker-compliance-with-mbam-10.md)
- - [Performing BitLocker Management with MBAM](performing-bitlocker-management-with-mbam.md)
- - [Administering MBAM 1.0 by Using PowerShell](administering-mbam-10-by-using-powershell.md)
-- [Troubleshooting MBAM 1.0](troubleshooting-mbam-10.md)
-
-## More Information
-- [MDOP Information Experience](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=236032)
- Find documentation, videos, and other resources for MDOP technologies.
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/known-issues-in-the-mbam-international-release-mbam-1.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/known-issues-in-the-mbam-international-release-mbam-1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 965278e188..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/known-issues-in-the-mbam-international-release-mbam-1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Known Issues in the MBAM International Release
-description: Known Issues in the MBAM International Release
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: bbf888dc-93c1-4323-b43c-0ded098e9b93
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Known Issues in the MBAM International Release
-
-
-This section contains known issues for Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) International Release.
-
-## Known Issues in the MBAM International Release
-
-
-### The Installation Process Does Not Specify Update
-
-Upon updating the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring server or servers, the Setup program does not state that an update is being installed.
-
-**Workaround**: None.
-
-### Certificates Used for the Administration and Monitoring Server Role
-
-If you are using a certificate for authentication between MBAM servers, after updating the MBAM Administration and Monitoring server you must ensure that the certificate is valid and not revoked or expired.
-
-**Workaround**: None.
-
-### MBAM Svclog File Filling Disk Space
-
-If you have followed Knowledge Base article 2668170, [http://support.microsoft.com/kb/2668170](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=247277), you might have to repeat the KB steps after you install this update.
-
-**Workaround**: None.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Language Release Update](deploying-the-mbam-10-language-release-update.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/maintaining-mbam-10.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/maintaining-mbam-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ed8099b713..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/maintaining-mbam-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,57 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Maintaining MBAM 1.0
-description: Maintaining MBAM 1.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 02ffb093-c364-4837-bbe8-23d4c09fbd3d
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Maintaining MBAM 1.0
-
-
-After you complete all the necessary planning and then deploy Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM), you can configure MBAM to run in a highly available fashion while using it to manage enterprise BitLocker encryption operations. The information in this section describes high availability options for MBAM, as well as how to move MBAM Server features if necessary.
-
-## MBAM Management Pack
-
-
-The Microsoft System Center Operations Manager Management Pack for MBAM is available for download from the Microsoft Download Center.
-
-This management pack monitors the critical interactions in the server-side infrastructure, such as the connections between the web services and databases and the operational calls between websites and their supportive web service. It also uploads the requests between desktop clients and their respective receiving web service endpoints.
-
-[Microsoft BitLocker Administration And Monitoring Management Pack](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=258390)
-
-## Ensure high availability for MBAM 1.0
-
-
-MBAM is designed to be fault-tolerant. If a server becomes unavailable, the users should not be negatively affected. The information in this section can be used to configure a highly available MBAM installation.
-
-[High Availability for MBAM 1.0](high-availability-for-mbam-10.md)
-
-## Move MBAM 1.0 features to another server
-
-
-When you need to move an MBAM Server feature from one server computer to another, there is a specific order and required steps that you should follow to avoid loss of productivity or data. This section describes the steps that you should take to move one or more MBAM Server features to a different computer.
-
-[How to Move MBAM 1.0 Features to Another Computer](how-to-move-mbam-10-features-to-another-computer.md)
-
-## Other resources for maintaining MBAM
-
-
-[Operations for MBAM 1.0](operations-for-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/mbam-10-deployment-checklist.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/mbam-10-deployment-checklist.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8b7b659b06..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/mbam-10-deployment-checklist.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,109 +0,0 @@
----
-title: MBAM 1.0 Deployment Checklist
-description: MBAM 1.0 Deployment Checklist
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 7e00be23-36a0-4b0f-8663-3c4f2c71546d
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# MBAM 1.0 Deployment Checklist
-
-
-This checklist is designed to facilitate your deployment of Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM).
-
-**Note**
-This checklist outlines the recommended steps and provides a high-level list of items to consider when you deploy the MBAM features. We recommend that you copy this checklist into a spreadsheet program and customize it for your specific needs.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
References
-
Notes
-
-
-
-
-
-
Complete the planning phase to prepare the computing environment for MBAM deployment.
Review the information on MBAM supported configurations to make sure that your selected client and server computers are supported for MBAM feature installation.
Add Active Directory Domain Services security groups created during the planning phase to the appropriate local MBAM Server feature administrators groups on the appropriate servers.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying MBAM 1.0](deploying-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/mbam-10-deployment-prerequisites.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/mbam-10-deployment-prerequisites.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0b59eb0f40..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/mbam-10-deployment-prerequisites.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,167 +0,0 @@
----
-title: MBAM 1.0 Deployment Prerequisites
-description: MBAM 1.0 Deployment Prerequisites
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: bd9e1010-7d25-43e7-8dc6-b521226a659d
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# MBAM 1.0 Deployment Prerequisites
-
-
-Before you begin the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) Setup, make sure that you meet the necessary prerequisites to install the product. This section contains information to help you successfully prepare your computing environment before you deploy the MBAM Clients and Server features.
-
-## Installation prerequisites for MBAM Server features
-
-
-Each of the MBAM server features has specific prerequisites that must be met before they can be successfully installed. MBAM Setup verifies if all prerequisites are met before the installation starts.
-
-### Installation prerequisites for Administration and Monitoring Server
-
-The following table contains the installation prerequisites for the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Prerequisite
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
Windows ServerWeb Server Role
-
This role must be added to a server operating system supported for the mbam Administration and Monitoring Server feature.
-
-
-
Web Server (IIS) Management Tools
-
IIS Management Scripts and Tools
-
-
-
Web Server Role Services
-
Common HTTP Features:
-
-
Static Content
-
Default Document
-
-
Application Development:
-
-
ASP.NET
-
.NET Extensibility
-
ISAPI Extensions
-
ISAPI Filters
-
-
Security:
-
-
Windows Authentication
-
Request Filtering
-
-
-
-
Windows Server Features
-
Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5.1 features:
-
-
.NET Framework 3.5.1
-
WCF Activation
-
-
HTTP Activation
-
Non-HTTP Activation
-
-
-
Windows Process Activation Service
-
-
Process Model
-
.NET Environment
-
Configuration APIs
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Note**
-For a list of supported operating systems, see [MBAM 1.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-10-supported-configurations.md).
-
-
-
-### Installation prerequisites for the Compliance and Audit Reports
-
-The Compliance and Audit Reports must be installed on a supported version of SQL Server. Installation prerequisites for this feature include SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS).
-
-SSRS must be installed and running during MBAM server installation. SSRS should also be configured in “native” mode, not in the “unconfigured” or “SharePoint” mode.
-
-**Note**
-For a list of supported operating systems and SQL Server versions, see [MBAM 1.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-10-supported-configurations.md).
-
-
-
-### Installation prerequisites for the Recovery and Hardware Database
-
-The Recovery and Hardware Database must be installed on a supported version of SQL Server.
-
-SQL Server must have Database Engine Services installed and running during the MBAM server installation. The Transparent Data Encryption (TDE) feature must be enabled.
-
-**Note**
-For a list of supported operating systems and SQL Server versions, see [MBAM 1.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-10-supported-configurations.md).
-
-
-
-The TDE SQL Server feature performs real-time input/output (I/O) encryption and decryption of the data and log files. TDE protects data that is "at rest,” which include the data and the log files. It provides the ability to comply with many laws, regulations, and guidelines that are established in various industries.
-
-**Note**
-Because TDE performs real-time decryption of database information, the recovery key information will be visible if the account under which you are logged in has permissions to the database when you view the recovery key information SQL tables.
-
-
-
-### Installation prerequisites for the Compliance and Audit Database
-
-The Compliance and Audit Database must be installed on a supported version of SQL Server.
-
-SQL Server must have Database Engine Services installed and running during MBAM server installation.
-
-**Note**
-For a list of supported operating systems and SQL Server versions, see [MBAM 1.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-10-supported-configurations.md).
-
-
-
-## Installation prerequisites for MBAM Clients
-
-
-The necessary prerequisites that you must meet before you begin the MBAM Client installation are the following:
-
-- Trusted Platform Module (TPM) v1.2 capability
-
-- The TPM chip must be turned on in the BIOS and it must be resettable from the operating system. For more information, see the BIOS documentation.
-
-**Warning**
-Ensure that the keyboard, mouse, and video are directly connected to the computer, instead of to a keyboard, video, mouse (KVM) switch. A KVM switch can interfere with the ability of the computer to detect the physical presence of hardware.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy MBAM 1.0](planning-to-deploy-mbam-10.md)
-
-[MBAM 1.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-10-supported-configurations.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/mbam-10-planning-checklist.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/mbam-10-planning-checklist.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0324216e06..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/mbam-10-planning-checklist.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,108 +0,0 @@
----
-title: MBAM 1.0 Planning Checklist
-description: MBAM 1.0 Planning Checklist
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: e9439f16-d68b-48ed-99ce-5949356b180b
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# MBAM 1.0 Planning Checklist
-
-
-You can use this checklist to plan and prepare your computing environment for Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) deployment.
-
-**Note**
-This checklist outlines the recommended steps and a high-level list of items to consider when you plan for an MBAM deployment. We recommend that you copy this checklist into a spreadsheet program and customize it for your use.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
References
-
Notes
-
-
-
-
-
-
Review the “getting started” information about MBAM to gain a basic understanding of the product before you begin the deployment planning.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning for MBAM 1.0](planning-for-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/mbam-10-supported-configurations.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/mbam-10-supported-configurations.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 80ed363018..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/mbam-10-supported-configurations.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,193 +0,0 @@
----
-title: MBAM 1.0 Supported Configurations
-description: MBAM 1.0 Supported Configurations
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 1f5ac58e-6a3f-47df-8a9b-4b57631ab9ee
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# MBAM 1.0 Supported Configurations
-
-
-This topic specifies the necessary requirements to install and run Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) in your environment.
-
-## MBAM server system Requirements
-
-
-### Server operating system requirements
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring Server installation.
-
-**Note**
-Microsoft provides support for the current service pack and, in some cases, the immediately preceding service pack. To find the support timelines for your product, see the [Lifecycle Supported Service Packs](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=31975). For additional information about Microsoft Support Lifecycle Policy, see [Microsoft Support Lifecycle Support Policy FAQ](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=31976).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating System
-
Edition
-
Service Pack
-
System Architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Windows Server 2008
-
Standard, Enterprise, Datacenter, or Web Server
-
SP2 only
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Windows Server 2008 R2
-
Standard, Enterprise, Datacenter, or Web Server
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Warning**
-There is no support for installing MBAM services, reports, or databases on a domain controller computer.
-
-
-
-### Server random access memory (RAM) requirements
-
-There are no RAM requirements that are specific to MBAM Server installation.
-
-### SQL Server Database requirements
-
-The following table lists the SQL Server versions that are supported for the MBAM Server feature installation.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
MBAM Server Feature
-
SQL Server Version
-
Edition
-
Service Pack
-
System Architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Compliance and Audit Reports
-
Microsoft SQL Server 2008
-
R2, Standard, Enterprise, Datacenter, or Developer Edition
-
SP2
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Recovery and Hardware Database
-
Microsoft SQL Server 2008
-
R2, Enterprise, Datacenter, or Developer Edition
-
-Important
SQL Server Standard Editions are not supported for MBAM Recovery and Hardware Database Server feature installation.
-
-
-
-
-
SP2
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Compliance and Audit Database
-
Microsoft SQL Server 2008
-
R2, Standard, Enterprise, Datacenter, or Developer Edition
-
SP2
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## MBAM Client system requirements
-
-
-### Client operating system requirements
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for MBAM Client installation.
-
-**Note**
-Microsoft provides support for the current service pack and, in some cases, the immediately preceding service pack. To find the support timelines for your product, see the [Lifecycle Supported Service Packs](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=31975). For additional information about Microsoft Support Lifecycle Policy, see [Microsoft Support Lifecycle Support Policy FAQ](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=31976).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating System
-
Edition
-
Service Pack
-
System Architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Windows 7
-
Enterprise Edition
-
None, SP1
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Windows 7
-
Ultimate Edition
-
None, SP1
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Client RAM requirements
-
-There are no RAM requirements that are specific to the MBAM Client installation.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy MBAM 1.0](planning-to-deploy-mbam-10.md)
-
-[MBAM 1.0 Deployment Prerequisites](mbam-10-deployment-prerequisites.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/monitoring-and-reporting-bitlocker-compliance-with-mbam-10.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/monitoring-and-reporting-bitlocker-compliance-with-mbam-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index beb0deea35..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/monitoring-and-reporting-bitlocker-compliance-with-mbam-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Monitoring and Reporting BitLocker Compliance with MBAM 1.0
-description: Monitoring and Reporting BitLocker Compliance with MBAM 1.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: fb497d3f-ff33-4747-8e34-366440ee25c2
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Monitoring and Reporting BitLocker Compliance with MBAM 1.0
-
-
-If you use Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM), you can generate various reports to monitor BitLocker usage and compliance activities.
-
-## Understand MBAM reports
-
-
-MBAM reports have many fields that you should be familiar with before you generate MBAM reports.
-
-[Understanding MBAM Reports](understanding-mbam-reports-mbam-1.md)
-
-## Generate MBAM Reports
-
-
-If you use MBAM reporting, you can generate reports on enterprise compliance, individual computers, hardware compatibility, and key recovery activity.
-
-[How to Generate MBAM Reports](how-to-generate-mbam-reports-mbam-1.md)
-
-## Other resources for Monitoring and Reporting BitLocker Compliance with MBAM
-
-
-[Operations for MBAM 1.0](operations-for-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/operations-for-mbam-10.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/operations-for-mbam-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 560b76d3ff..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/operations-for-mbam-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Operations for MBAM 1.0
-description: Operations for MBAM 1.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 2c358fa1-4795-45ab-9316-02db4aaa6d5f
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Operations for MBAM 1.0
-
-
-This section of the Administrator’s Guide for Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) includes information about the various types of Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring administration and operating tasks that are typically performed by an administrator. This section also includes step-by-step procedures to help you successfully perform those tasks.
-
-## Operations information
-
-
-- [Administering MBAM 1.0 Features](administering-mbam-10-features.md)
-
- After you complete all necessary MBAM planning and deploying, you can configure and use MBAM features to manage enterprise BitLocker encryption. The information in this section describes post-installation day-to-day MBAM feature operations and maintenance tasks.
-
-- [Monitoring and Reporting BitLocker Compliance with MBAM 1.0](monitoring-and-reporting-bitlocker-compliance-with-mbam-10.md)
-
- This section describes how to generate and understand the various MBAM reports to help you monitor the BitLocker usage and compliance activities throughout your enterprise environment.
-
-- [Performing BitLocker Management with MBAM](performing-bitlocker-management-with-mbam.md)
-
- This section describes post-installation day-to-day BitLocker encryption management tasks that are accomplished by using MBAM.
-
-- [Maintaining MBAM 1.0](maintaining-mbam-10.md)
-
- This section describes how to configure MBAM to run in a highly available manner. It also describes how to use MBAM to manage enterprise BitLocker encryption operations. The information in this section describes high availability options for MBAM, as well as how to move MBAM Server features if necessary.
-
-- [Security and Privacy for MBAM 1.0](security-and-privacy-for-mbam-10.md)
-
- This section provides an overview of MBAM security considerations and explains many of the data collection and use practices of MBAM.
-
-- [Administering MBAM 1.0 by Using PowerShell](administering-mbam-10-by-using-powershell.md)
-
- This section describes the set of Windows PowerShell cmdlets that are available for administrators to perform various MBAM server tasks from the command prompt rather than from the MBAM administration website.
-
-## Other resources for MBAM operations
-
-
-- [Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 1 Administrator's Guide](index.md)
-
-- [Getting Started with MBAM 1.0](getting-started-with-mbam-10.md)
-
-- [Planning for MBAM 1.0](planning-for-mbam-10.md)
-
-- [Deploying MBAM 1.0](deploying-mbam-10.md)
-
-- [Troubleshooting MBAM 1.0](troubleshooting-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/performing-bitlocker-management-with-mbam.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/performing-bitlocker-management-with-mbam.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b37c05e208..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/performing-bitlocker-management-with-mbam.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Performing BitLocker Management with MBAM
-description: Performing BitLocker Management with MBAM
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 2d24390a-87bf-48b3-96a9-3882d6f2a15c
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Performing BitLocker Management with MBAM
-
-
-After you deploy Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM), you can configure and use MBAM to manage enterprise BitLocker encryption. This section describes post-installation, day-to-day BitLocker encryption management tasks that can be accomplished by using MBAM.
-
-## Reset a TPM Lockout with MBAM
-
-
-A Trusted Platform Module (TPM) microchip provides basic security-related functions. These functions are accomplished primarily by the use of encryption keys. The TPM is typically installed on the motherboard of a computer or laptop and communicates with the rest of the system by using a hardware bus. Computers that incorporate a TPM can create cryptographic keys that can be decrypted only by the TPM. A TPM lockout can occur if a user enters an incorrect PIN too many times. The number of times that a user can enter an incorrect PIN before the TPM locks varies from manufacturer to manufacturer. The Key Recovery data system on the MBAM administration website enables you to obtain a reset TPM owner password file.
-
-[How to Reset a TPM Lockout](how-to-reset-a-tpm-lockout-mbam-1.md)
-
-## Recover drives with MBAM
-
-
-Make sure that you know how to attempt data recovery from encrypted drives in the event of hardware failure, changes in personnel, or other situations in which encryption keys are lost. The Encrypted Drive Recovery features of MBAM provide the capture and storage of data and availability of tools required to access a BitLocker-protected volume when the volume goes into recovery mode, is moved, or becomes corrupted.
-
-[How to Recover a Drive in Recovery Mode](how-to-recover-a-drive-in-recovery-mode-mbam-1.md)
-
-[How to Recover a Moved Drive](how-to-recover-a-moved-drive-mbam-1.md)
-
-[How to Recover a Corrupted Drive](how-to-recover-a-corrupted-drive-mbam-1.md)
-
-## Determine BitLocker Encryption State of lost computers by Using MBAM
-
-
-When you use MBAM, you can determine the last known BitLocker encryption status of computers that were lost or stolen.
-
-[How to Determine the BitLocker Encryption State of a Lost Computers](how-to-determine-the-bitlocker-encryption-state-of-a-lost-computers-mbam-1.md)
-
-## Other resources for performing BitLocker Management with MBAM
-
-
-[Operations for MBAM 1.0](operations-for-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/planning-for-mbam-10-administrator-roles.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/planning-for-mbam-10-administrator-roles.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6ed9a49fe7..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/planning-for-mbam-10-administrator-roles.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,57 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning for MBAM 1.0 Administrator Roles
-description: Planning for MBAM 1.0 Administrator Roles
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 95be0eb4-25e9-43ca-a8e7-27373d35544d
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning for MBAM 1.0 Administrator Roles
-
-
-This topic includes and describes the administrator roles that are available in Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM), as well as the server locations where the local groups are created.
-
-## MBAM Administrator roles
-
-
- **MBAM System Administrators**
-Administrators in this role have access to all MBAM features. The local group for this role is installed on the Administration and Monitoring Server.
-
- **MBAM Hardware Users**
-Administrators in this role have access to the Hardware Capability features from MBAM. The local group for this role is installed on the Administration and Monitoring Server.
-
- **MBAM Helpdesk Users**
-Administrators in this role have access to the Helpdesk features from MBAM. The local group for this role is installed on the Administration and Monitoring Server.
-
- **MBAM Report Users**
-Administrators in this role have access to the Compliance and Audit Reports feature from MBAM. The local group for this role is installed on the Administration and Monitoring Server, Compliance and Audit Database, and on the server that hosts the Compliance and Audit Reports.
-
- **MBAM Advanced Helpdesk Users**
-Administrators in this role have increased access to the Helpdesk features from MBAM. The local group for this role is installed on the Administration and Monitoring Server. If a user is a member of both MBAM Helpdesk Users and MBAM Advanced Helpdesk Users, the MBAM Advanced Helpdesk Users permissions will overwrite the MBAM Helpdesk User permissions.
-
-**Important**
-To view the reports, an administrative user must be a member of the **MBAM Report Users** security group on the Administration and Monitoring Server, Compliance and Audit Database, and on the server that hosts the Compliance and Reports feature. As a best practice, create a security group in Active Directory with rights on the local **MBAM Report Users** security group on both the Administration and Monitoring Server and on the server that hosts the Compliance and Reports.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Preparing your Environment for MBAM 1.0](preparing-your-environment-for-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/planning-for-mbam-10-client-deployment.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/planning-for-mbam-10-client-deployment.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 352f0f8fba..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/planning-for-mbam-10-client-deployment.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning for MBAM 1.0 Client Deployment
-description: Planning for MBAM 1.0 Client Deployment
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 3af2e7f3-134b-4ab9-9847-b07474ca6ac3
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning for MBAM 1.0 Client Deployment
-
-
-Depending on when you deploy the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) Client, you can enable BitLocker encryption on a computer in your organization either before the end user receives the computer or afterwards. To enable BitLocker encryption after the end user receives the computer, configure Group Policy. To enable BitLocker encryption before the end user receives the computer, deploy the MBAM Client software by using an enterprise software deployment system.
-
-You can use one or both methods in your organization. If you use both methods, you can improve compliance, reporting, and key recovery support.
-
-**Note**
-To review the MBAM Client system requirements, see [MBAM 1.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-10-supported-configurations.md).
-
-
-
-## Deploying the MBAM Client to enable BitLocker encryption after computer distribution to end users
-
-
-After you configure the Group Policy, you can use an enterprise software deployment system product, such as Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012 or Active Directory Domain Services, to deploy the MBAM Client installation Windows Installer files to the target computers. The two MBAM Client installation Windows Installer files are MBAMClient-64bit.msi and MBAMClient-32bit.msi, which are provided with the MBAM software. For more information about how to deploy MBAM Group Policy Objects, see [Deploying MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Objects](deploying-mbam-10-group-policy-objects.md).
-
-When you deploy the MBAM Client, after you distribute the computers to end users, the end users are prompted to encrypt their computers. This lets MBAM collect the data, to include the PIN and password, and then begin the encryption process.
-
-**Note**
-In this approach, users are prompted to activate and initialize the Trusted Platform Module (TPM) chip, if it has not been previously activated.
-
-
-
-## Using the MBAM Client to enable BitLocker encryption before computer distribution to end users
-
-
-In organizations where computers are received and configured centrally, you can install the MBAM Client to manage BitLocker encryption on each computer before any user data is written on it. The benefit of this process is that every computer will then be compliant with the BitLocker encryption. This method does not rely on user action because the administrator has already encrypted the computer. A key assumption for this scenario is that the policy of the organization installs a corporate Windows image before the computer is delivered to the user.
-
-If your organization wants to use (TPM) to encrypt computers, the administrator must encrypt the operating system volume of the computer with TPM protector. If your organization wants to use the TPM chip and a PIN protector, the administrator must encrypt the system volume with the TPM protector, and then the users select a PIN the first time they log on. If your organization decides to use only the PIN protector, the administrator does not have to encrypt the volume first. When users log on their computers, MBAM prompts them to provide a PIN or a PIN and a password that they will use when they restart their computer later.
-
-**Note**
-The TPM protector option requires for the administrator to accept the BIOS prompt to activate and initialize the TPM before delivering the computer to the user.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy MBAM 1.0](planning-to-deploy-mbam-10.md)
-
-[Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Client](deploying-the-mbam-10-client.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/planning-for-mbam-10-group-policy-requirements.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/planning-for-mbam-10-group-policy-requirements.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4b825a4bea..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/planning-for-mbam-10-group-policy-requirements.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,328 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning for MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Requirements
-description: Planning for MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Requirements
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 0fc9c509-7850-4a8e-bb82-b949025bcb02
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning for MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Requirements
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) Client management requires custom Group Policy settings to be applied. This topic describes the available policy options for Group Policy Object (GPO) when you use MBAM to manage BitLocker Drive Encryption in the enterprise.
-
-**Important**
-MBAM does not use the default GPO settings for Windows BitLocker drive encryption. If the default settings are enabled, they can cause conflicting behavior. To enable MBAM to manage BitLocker, you must define the GPO policy settings after you install the MBAM Group Policy Template.
-
-
-
-After you install the MBAM Group Policy template, you can view and modify the available custom MBAM GPO policy settings that enable MBAM to manage the enterprise BitLocker encryption. The MBAM Group Policy template must be installed on a computer that is capable of running the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC) or the Advanced Group Policy Management (AGPM) MDOP technology. Next, to edit the applicable GPO, open the GPMC or AGPM, and then navigate to the following GPO node: **Computer Configuration**\\**Administrative Templates**\\**Windows Components**\\**MDOP MBAM (BitLocker Management)**.
-
-The MDOP MBAM (BitLocker Management) GPO node contains four global policy settings and four child GPO setting nodes, respectively. The four GPO global policy settings are: Client Management, Fixed Drive, Operating System Drive, and Removable Drive. The following sections provide policy definitions and suggested policy settings to help you plan for the MBAM GPO policy setting requirements.
-
-**Note**
-For more information about configuring the minimum suggested GPO settings to enable MBAM to manage BitLocker encryption, see [How to Edit MBAM 1.0 GPO Settings](how-to-edit-mbam-10-gpo-settings.md).
-
-
-
-## Global policy definitions
-
-
-This section describes the MBAM Global policy definitions, which can be found at the following GPO node: **Computer Configuration**\\**Administrative Templates**\\**Windows Components**\\**MDOP MBAM (BitLocker Management)**.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Policy Name
-
Overview and Suggested Policy Setting
-
-
-
-
-
Choose drive encryption method and cipher strength
-
Suggested Configuration: Not Configured
-
Configure this policy to use a specific encryption method and cipher strength.
-
When this policy is not configured, BitLocker uses the default encryption method of AES 128-bit with Diffuser or the encryption method specified by the setup script.
-
-
-
Prevent memory overwrite on restart
-
Suggested Configuration: Not Configured
-
Configure this policy to improve restart performance without overwriting BitLocker secrets in memory on restart.
-
When this policy is not configured, BitLocker secrets are removed from memory when the computer restarts.
-
-
-
Validate smart card certificate usage rule
-
Suggested Configuration: Not Configured
-
Configure this policy to use smartcard certificate-based BitLocker protection.
-
When this policy is not configured, a default object identifier 1.3.6.1.4.1.311.67.1.1 is used to specify a certificate.
-
-
-
Provide the unique identifiers for your organization
-
Suggested Configuration: Not Configured
-
Configure this policy to use a certificate-based data recovery agent or the BitLocker To Go reader.
-
When this policy is not configured, the Identification field is not used.
-
If your company requires higher security measurements, you may want to configure the Identification field to make sure that all USB devices have this field set and that they are aligned with this Group Policy setting.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Client Management policy definitions
-
-
-This section describes the Client Management policy definitions for MBAM, found at the following GPO node: **Computer Configuration**\\**Administrative Templates**\\**Windows Components**\\**MDOP MBAM (BitLocker Management)** \\ **Client Management**.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Policy Name
-
Overview and Suggested Policy Settings
-
-
-
-
-
Configure MBAM Services
-
Suggested Configuration: Enabled
-
-
MBAM Recovery and Hardware service endpoint. This is the first policy setting that you must configure to enable the MBAM Client BitLocker encryption management. For this setting, enter the endpoint location similar to the following example: http://<MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server Name>:<port the web service is bound to>/MBAMRecoveryAndHardwareService/CoreService.svc.
-
Select BitLocker recovery information to store. This policy setting lets you configure the key recovery service to back up the BitLocker recovery information. It also lets you configure the status reporting service for collecting compliance and audit reports. The policy provides an administrative method of recovering data encrypted by BitLocker to help prevent data loss due to the lack of key information. Status report and key recovery activity will automatically and silently be sent to the configured report server location.
-
If you do not configure or if you disable this policy setting, the key recovery information will not be saved, and status report and key recovery activity will not be reported to server. When this setting is set to Recovery Password and key package, the recovery password and key package will be automatically and silently backed up to the configured key recovery server location.
-
Enter the client checking status frequency in minutes. This policy setting manages how frequently the client checks the BitLocker protection policies and the status on the client computer. This policy also manages how frequently the client compliance status is saved to the server. The client checks the BitLocker protection policies and status on the client computer, and it also backs up the client recovery key at the configured frequency.
-
Set this frequency based on the requirement established by your company on how frequently to check the compliance status of the computer, and how frequently to back up the client recovery key.
-
MBAM Status reporting service endpoint. This is the second policy setting that you must configure to enable MBAM Client BitLocker encryption management. For this setting, enter the endpoint location by using the following example: http://<MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server Name>:<port the web service is bound to>/MBAMComplianceStatusService/StatusReportingService. svc.
-
-
-
-
Allow hardware compatibility checking
-
Suggested Configuration: Enabled
-
This policy setting lets you manage the verification of hardware compatibility before you enable BitLocker protection on drives of MBAM client computers.
-
You should enable this policy option if your enterprise has older computer hardware or computers that do not support Trusted Platform Module (TPM). If either of these criteria is true, enable the hardware compatibility verification to make sure that MBAM is applied only to computer models that support BitLocker. If all computers in your organization support BitLocker, you do not have to deploy the Hardware Compatibility, and you can set this policy to Not Configured.
-
If you enable this policy setting, the model of the computer is validated against the hardware compatibility list once every 24 hours, before the policy enables BitLocker protection on a computer drive.
-
-Note
Before enabling this policy setting, make sure that you have configured the MBAM Recovery and Hardware service endpoint setting in the Configure MBAM Services policy options.
-
-
-
-
-
If you either disable or do not configure this policy setting, the computer model is not validated against the hardware compatibility list.
-
-
-
Configure user exemption policy
-
Suggested Configuration: Not Configured
-
This policy setting lets you configure a web site address, email address, or phone number that will instruct a user to request an exemption from BitLocker encryption.
-
If you enable this policy setting and provide a web site address, email address, or phone number, users will see a dialog with instructions on how to apply for an exemption from BitLocker protection. For more information about how to enable BitLocker encryption exemptions for users, see How to Manage User BitLocker Encryption Exemptions.
-
If you either disable or do not configure this policy setting, the instructions about how to apply for an exemption request will not be presented to users.
-
-Note
User exemption is managed per user, not per computer. If multiple users log on to the same computer and one user is not exempt, the computer will be encrypted.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Fixed Drive policy definitions
-
-
-This section describes the Fixed Drive policy definitions for MBAM, which can be found at the following GPO node: **Computer Configuration**\\**Administrative Templates**\\**Windows Components**\\**MDOP MBAM (BitLocker Management)** \\ **Fixed Drive**.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Policy Name
-
Overview and Suggested Policy Setting
-
-
-
-
-
Fixed data drive encryption settings
-
Suggested Configuration: Enabled, and select the Enable auto-unlock fixed data drive check box if the operating system volume is required to be encrypted.
-
This policy setting lets you manage whether or not to encrypt the fixed drives.
-
When you enable this policy, do not disable the Configure use of password for fixed data drives policy.
-
If the Enable auto-unlock fixed data drive check box is selected, the operating system volume must be encrypted.
-
If you enable this policy setting, users are required to put all fixed drives under BitLocker protection, which will encrypt the drives.
-
If you do not configure this policy or if you disable this policy, users are not required to put fixed drives under BitLocker protection.
-
If you disable this policy, the MBAM agent decrypts any encrypted fixed drives.
-
If encrypting the operating system volume is not required, clear the Enable auto-unlock fixed data drive check box.
-
-
-
Deny “write” permission to fixed drives that are not protected by BitLocker
-
Suggested Configuration: Not Configured
-
This policy setting determines if BitLocker protection is required for fixed drives on a computer so that they are writable. This policy setting is applied when you turn on BitLocker.
-
When the policy is not configured, all fixed drives on the computer are mounted with read/write permissions.
-
-
-
Allow access to BitLocker-protected fixed drives from earlier versions of Windows
-
Suggested configuration: Not Configured
-
Enable this policy to unlock and view the fixed drives that are formatted with the file allocation table (FAT) file system on computers that are running Windows Server 2008, Windows Vista, Windows XP with SP3, or Windows XP with SP2.
-
These operating systems have read-only permissions to BitLocker-protected drives.
-
When the policy is disabled, fixed drives formatted with the FAT file system cannot be unlocked and their content cannot be viewed on computers that are running Windows Server 2008, Windows Vista, Windows XP with SP3, or Windows XP with SP2.
-
-
-
Configure use of password for fixed drives
-
Suggested configuration: Not Configured
-
Enable this policy to configure password protection on fixed drives.
-
When the policy is not configured, passwords will be supported with the default settings, which do not include password complexity requirements and require only eight characters.
-
For higher security, enable this policy and select Require password for fixed data drive, select Require password complexity, and set the desired minimum password length.
-
-
-
Choose how BitLocker-protected fixed drives can be recovered
-
Suggested Configuration: Not Configured
-
Configure this policy to enable the BitLocker data recovery agent or to save BitLocker recovery information to Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS).
-
When this policy is not configured, the BitLocker data recovery agent is allowed, and recovery information is not backed up to AD DS. MBAM does not require the recovery information to be backed up to AD DS.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Operating System Drive policy definitions
-
-
-This section describes the Operating System Drive policy definitions for MBAM, found at the following GPO node: **Computer Configuration**\\**Administrative Templates**\\**Windows Components**\\**MDOP MBAM (BitLocker Management)** \\ **Operating System Drive**.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Policy Name
-
Overview and Suggested Policy Setting
-
-
-
-
-
Operating system drive encryption settings
-
Suggested configuration: Enabled
-
This policy setting determines if the operating system drive will be encrypted.
-
Configure this policy to do the following:
-
-
Enforce BitLocker protection for the operating system drive.
-
Configure PIN usage to use a Trusted Platform Module (TPM) PIN for operating system protection.
-
Configure enhanced startup PINs to permit characters such as uppercase and lowercase letters, and numbers. MBAM does not support the use of symbols and spaces for enhanced PINs, even though BitLocker supports symbols and spaces.
-
-
If you enable this policy setting, users are required to secure the operating system drive by using BitLocker.
-
If you do not configure or if you disable the setting, users are not required to secure the operating system drive by using BitLocker.
-
If you disable this policy, the MBAM agent decrypts the operating system volume if it is encrypted.
-
When it is enabled, this policy setting requires users to secure the operating system by using BitLocker protection, and the drive is encrypted. Based on your encryption requirements, you may select the method of protection for the operating system drive.
-
For higher security requirements, use TPM + PIN, allow enhanced PINs, and set the minimum PIN length to eight characters.
-
When this policy is enabled with the TPM + PIN protector, you can consider disabling the following policies under System / Power Management / Sleep Settings:
-
-
Allow Standby States (S1-S3) When Sleeping (Plugged In)
-
Allow Standby States (S1-S3) When Sleeping (On Battery)
-
-
-
-
Configure TPM platform validation profile
-
Suggested Configuration: Not Configured
-
This policy setting lets you configure how the TPM security hardware on a computer secures the BitLocker encryption key. This policy setting does not apply if the computer does not have a compatible TPM or if BitLocker already has TPM protection enabled.
-
When this policy is not configured, the TPM uses the default platform validation profile or the platform validation profile specified by the setup script.
-
-
-
Choose how to recover BitLocker-protected operating system drives
-
Suggested Configuration: Not Configured
-
Configure this policy to enable the BitLocker data recovery agent or to save BitLocker recovery information to Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS).
-
When this policy is not configured, the data recovery agent is allowed, and the recovery information is not backed up to AD DS.
-
MBAM operation does not require the recovery information to be backed up to AD DS.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Removable Drive policy definitions
-
-
-This section describes the Removable Drive Policy definitions for MBAM, found at the following GPO node: **Computer Configuration**\\**Administrative Templates**\\**Windows Components**\\**MDOP MBAM (BitLocker Management)** \\ **Removable Drive**.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Policy Name
-
Overview and Suggested Policy Setting
-
-
-
-
-
Control the use of BitLocker on removable drives
-
Suggested configuration: Enabled
-
This policy controls the use of BitLocker on removable data drives.
-
Enable the Allow users to apply BitLocker protection on removable data drives option, to allow users to run the BitLocker setup wizard on a removable data drive.
-
Enable the Allow users to suspend and decrypt BitLocker on removable data drives option to allow users to remove BitLocker drive encryption from the drive or to suspend the encryption while maintenance is performed.
-
When this policy is enabled and the Allow users to apply BitLocker protection on removable data drives option is selected, the MBAM Client saves the recovery information about removable drives to the MBAM key recovery server, and it allows users to recover the drive if the password is lost.
-
-
-
Deny the “write” permissions to removable drives that are not protected by BitLocker
-
Suggested Configuration: Not Configured
-
Enable this policy to allow write-only permissions to BitLocker protected drives.
-
When this policy is enabled, all removable data drives on the computer require encryption before write permissions are allowed.
-
-
-
Allow access to BitLocker-protected removable drives from earlier versions of Windows
-
Suggested Configuration: Not Configured
-
Enable this policy to unlock and view the fixed drives that are formatted with the (FAT) file system on computers that are running Windows Server 2008, Windows Vista, Windows XP with SP3, or Windows XP with SP2.
-
These operating systems have read-only permissions to BitLocker-protected drives.
-
When the policy is disabled, removable drives formatted with the FAT file system cannot be unlocked and their content cannot be viewed on computers that are running Windows Server 2008, Windows Vista, Windows XP with SP3, or Windows XP with SP2.
-
-
-
Configure the use of password for removable data drives
-
Suggested configuration: Not Configured
-
Enable this policy to configure password protection on removable data drives.
-
When this policy is not configured, passwords are supported with the default settings, which do not include password complexity requirements and require only eight characters.
-
For increased security, you can enable this policy and select Require password for removable data drive, select Require password complexity, and then set the preferred minimum password length.
-
-
-
Choose how BitLocker-protected removable drives can be recovered
-
Suggested Configuration: Not Configured
-
You can configure this policy to enable the BitLocker data recovery agent or to save BitLocker recovery information to Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS).
-
When the policy is set to Not Configured, the data recovery agent is allowed and recovery information is not backed up to AD DS.
-
MBAM operation does not require the recovery information to be backed up to AD DS.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Preparing your Environment for MBAM 1.0](preparing-your-environment-for-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/planning-for-mbam-10-server-deployment.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/planning-for-mbam-10-server-deployment.md
deleted file mode 100644
index fe9b06d826..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/planning-for-mbam-10-server-deployment.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,80 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning for MBAM 1.0 Server Deployment
-description: Planning for MBAM 1.0 Server Deployment
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 3cbef284-3092-4c42-9234-2826b18ddef1
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning for MBAM 1.0 Server Deployment
-
-
-The Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) server infrastructure depends on a set of server features that can be installed on one or more server computers, based on the requirements of your enterprise.
-
-## Planning for MBAM Server deployment
-
-
-The following MBAM features represent the server infrastructure for an MBAM server deployment:
-
-- Recovery and Hardware Database
-
-- Compliance and Audit Database
-
-- Compliance and Audit Reports
-
-- Administration and Monitoring Server
-
-MBAM server databases and features can be installed in different configurations, depending on your scalability needs. All MBAM Server features can be installed on a single server or distributed across multiple servers. Generally, we recommend that you use a three-server or five-server configuration for production environments, although configurations of two or four servers can also be used, depending on your computing needs.
-
-**Note**
-For more information about performance scalability of MBAM and recommended deployment topologies, see the MBAM Scalability and High-Availability Guide white paper at .
-
-
-
-Each MBAM feature has specific prerequisites. For a full list of server feature prerequisites and hardware and software requirements, see [MBAM 1.0 Deployment Prerequisites](mbam-10-deployment-prerequisites.md) and [MBAM 1.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-10-supported-configurations.md).
-
-In addition to the server-related MBAM features, the server Setup application includes an MBAM Group Policy template. This template can be installed on any computer that is able to run the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC) or Advanced Group Policy Management (AGPM).
-
-## Order of deployment of MBAM Server Features
-
-
-When you deploy the MBAM Server features, install the features in the following order:
-
-1. Recovery and Hardware Database
-
-2. Compliance and Audit Database
-
-3. Compliance Audit and Reports
-
-4. Administration and Monitoring Server
-
-5. Policy Template
-
-**Note**
-Keep track of the names of the computers on which you install each feature. You will use this information throughout the installation process. You can print and use a deployment checklist to assist you in the installation process. For more information about the MBAM deployment checklist, see [MBAM 1.0 Deployment Checklist](mbam-10-deployment-checklist.md).
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy MBAM 1.0](planning-to-deploy-mbam-10.md)
-
-[Deploying the MBAM 1.0 Server Infrastructure](deploying-the-mbam-10-server-infrastructure.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/planning-for-mbam-10.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/planning-for-mbam-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 53583513c7..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/planning-for-mbam-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning for MBAM 1.0
-description: Planning for MBAM 1.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: d4e8a42f-2836-48c8-83c1-40bd58270e19
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning for MBAM 1.0
-
-
-The goal of deployment planning is to successfully and efficiently deploy Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) so that it does not disrupt your users or the network.
-
-There are a number of different deployment configurations and prerequisites that you should consider before you try to deploy the MBAM. This section includes information that can help you gather the information that you need to formulate a deployment plan that best meets your business requirements. It can assist you in preparing your network and computing environment, and it provides the information necessary for you to properly plan to deploy MBAM features.
-
-## Planning information
-
-
-- [Preparing your Environment for MBAM 1.0](preparing-your-environment-for-mbam-10.md)
-
- This section describes the computing environment requirements and installation prerequisites that you should plan for before you begin the MBAM Setup.
-
-- [Planning to Deploy MBAM 1.0](planning-to-deploy-mbam-10.md)
-
- This section describes the minimum hardware and software requirements necessary for the MBAM Client and Server feature installation. It also provides information about the MBAM deployment topology that you can use, and other MBAM Server and Client planning considerations.
-
-- [MBAM 1.0 Planning Checklist](mbam-10-planning-checklist.md)
-
- This section provides a planning checklist that you can use throughout the MBAM deployment.
-
-## Other resources for MBAM planning
-
-
-- [Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 1 Administrator's Guide](index.md)
-
-- [Getting Started with MBAM 1.0](getting-started-with-mbam-10.md)
-
-- [Deploying MBAM 1.0](deploying-mbam-10.md)
-
-- [Operations for MBAM 1.0](operations-for-mbam-10.md)
-
-- [Troubleshooting MBAM 1.0](troubleshooting-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/planning-to-deploy-mbam-10.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/planning-to-deploy-mbam-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c35e32933a..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/planning-to-deploy-mbam-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning to Deploy MBAM 1.0
-description: Planning to Deploy MBAM 1.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 30ad4304-45c6-427d-8e33-ebe8053c7871
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning to Deploy MBAM 1.0
-
-
-You should consider a number of different deployment configurations and prerequisites before you create your Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) 1.0 deployment plan. This section includes information that can help you gather the information that you must have to formulate a deployment plan that best meets your business requirements.
-
-## Review the MBAM 1.0 supported configurations
-
-
-After you prepare your computing environment for the MBAM Client and Server feature installation, make sure that you review the Supported Configurations information for MBAM to confirm that the computers on which you install MBAM meet the minimum hardware and operating system requirements. For more information about MBAM deployment prerequisites, see [MBAM 1.0 Deployment Prerequisites](mbam-10-deployment-prerequisites.md).
-
-[MBAM 1.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-10-supported-configurations.md)
-
-## Plan for MBAM 1.0 Server and Client deployment
-
-
-The MBAM server infrastructure depends on a set of server features that can be installed on one or more server computers, based on the requirements of the enterprise. These features can be installed on a single server or distributed across multiple servers.
-
-The MBAM Client enables administrators to enforce and monitor the BitLocker drive encryption on computers in the enterprise. The BitLocker client can be integrated into an organization by deploying the client through tools like Active Directory Domain Services or by directly encrypting the client computers as part of the initial imaging process.
-
-With MBAM, you can encrypt a computer in your organization either before the end user receives the computer or afterwards, by using Group Policy. You can use one or both methods in your organization. If you choose to use both methods, you can improve compliance, reporting, and key recovery support.
-
-[Planning for MBAM 1.0 Server Deployment](planning-for-mbam-10-server-deployment.md)
-
-[Planning for MBAM 1.0 Client Deployment](planning-for-mbam-10-client-deployment.md)
-
-## Other resources for MBAM planning
-
-
-- [Planning for MBAM 1.0](planning-for-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/preparing-your-environment-for-mbam-10.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/preparing-your-environment-for-mbam-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 931b7c9924..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/preparing-your-environment-for-mbam-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Preparing your Environment for MBAM 1.0
-description: Preparing your Environment for MBAM 1.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 915f7c3c-70ad-4a90-a434-73e7fba97ecb
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Preparing your Environment for MBAM 1.0
-
-
-Before you begin the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) Setup, make sure that you have met the necessary prerequisites to install the product. If you know the prerequisites in advance, you can efficiently deploy the product and enable its features, which can support the business objectives of your organization more effectively.
-
-## Review MBAM 1.0 deployment prerequisites
-
-
-The MBAM Client and each of the MBAM Server features have specific prerequisites that must be met before they can be successfully installed.
-
-To ensure successful installation of MBAM Clients and MBAM Server features, you should plan to ensure that computers specified for MBAM Client or MBAM Server feature installation are properly prepared for MBAM Setup.
-
-**Note**
-MBAM Setup verifies if all prerequisites are met before installation starts. If they are not met, Setup will fail.
-
-
-
-[MBAM 1.0 Deployment Prerequisites](mbam-10-deployment-prerequisites.md)
-
-## Plan for MBAM 1.0 Group Policy requirements
-
-
-Before MBAM can manage clients in the enterprise, you must define the Group Policy for the encryption requirements of your environment.
-
-**Important**
-MBAM will not work with policies for stand-alone BitLocker drive encryption. Group Policy must be defined for MBAM; otherwise, the BitLocker encryption and enforcement will fail.
-
-
-
-[Planning for MBAM 1.0 Group Policy Requirements](planning-for-mbam-10-group-policy-requirements.md)
-
-## Plan for MBAM 1.0 administrator roles
-
-
-MBAM administrator roles are managed by local groups that are created by MBAM Setup when you install the following: BitLocker Administration and Monitoring Server, the Compliance and Audit Reports feature, and the Compliance and Audit Status Database.
-
-The membership of MBAM roles can be managed more effectively if you create security groups in Active Directory Domain Services, add the appropriate administrator accounts to those groups, and then add those security groups to the MBAM local groups. For more information, see [How to Manage MBAM Administrator Roles](how-to-manage-mbam-administrator-roles-mbam-1.md).
-
-[Planning for MBAM 1.0 Administrator Roles](planning-for-mbam-10-administrator-roles.md)
-
-## Other resources for MBAM planning
-
-
-[Planning for MBAM 1.0](planning-for-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/privacy-statement-for-mbam-10.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/privacy-statement-for-mbam-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f54a72fb5e..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/privacy-statement-for-mbam-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Privacy Statement for MBAM 1.0
-description: Privacy Statement for MBAM 1.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: db18cc93-a1c1-44da-a450-a5399a4427b9
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Privacy Statement for MBAM 1.0
-
-
-## Privacy Statement
-
-
-At Microsoft, we're working hard to protect your privacy while delivering products that bring you the performance, power, and convenience that you want in your personal computing. This privacy statement explains many of the data collection and use practices of Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM). This privacy statement focuses on features that communicate with the Internet and is not intended to be an exhaustive list. This privacy statement does not apply to other online or offline Microsoft sites, products or services.
-
-Collection and Use of Your Personal Information:
-
-When we need information that personally identifies you or allows us to contact you, we will explicitly ask you for it. The personal information we collect from you will be used by Microsoft and its controlled subsidiaries and affiliates to provide the service(s) or carry out the transaction(s) you have requested or authorized, and may also be used to request additional information on feedback that you provide about the product or service that you are using; to provide critical updates and notifications regarding the software; to improve the product or service, for example bug and survey form inquiries, or to provide you with advance notice of events or to tell you about new product releases.
-
-Except as described in this statement, personal information you provide will not be transferred to third parties without your consent. We occasionally hire other companies to provide limited services on our behalf, such as performing statistical analysis of our services. We will only provide those companies the personal information they need to deliver the service, and they are prohibited from using that information for any other purpose.
-
-Information that is collected by or sent to Microsoft may be stored and processed in the United States or any other country in which Microsoft or its affiliates, subsidiaries or agents maintain facilities, and by using a Microsoft site or service, you consent to any such transfer of information outside of your country. Microsoft abides by the safe harbor framework as set forth by the U.S. Department of Commerce regarding the collection, use, and retention of data from the European Union. Microsoft may disclose personal information about you if required to do so by law or in the good faith belief that such action is necessary to: (a) conform to the edicts of the law or comply with legal process served on Microsoft or the site; (b) protect and defend the rights or property of Microsoft (including enforcing our agreements); or (c) act in urgent circumstances to protect the personal safety of Microsoft employees, users of Microsoft products or services, or members of the public.
-
-Collection and Use of Information about Your Computer:
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring contains Internet-enabled features that can collect certain standard information from your computer ("standard computer information") along with information needed for a specific feature and send it to Microsoft. Standard computer information includes information such as your IP address, operating system version, a code that identifies the manufacturer of your computer, and your regional and language settings. This computer information is generally not personally identifiable.
-
-Security of Your Information:
-
-Microsoft is committed to protecting the security of your personal information. We use a variety of security technologies and procedures to help protect your personal information from unauthorized access, use, or disclosure. For example, we store the information you provide on computer servers with limited access that are located in controlled facilities.
-
-Changes to the Privacy Statement:
-
-We may occasionally update this privacy statement. When we do, we will revise the "last updated" date at the top of the privacy statement. We encourage you to periodically review this privacy statement to be informed of how Microsoft is protecting your information.
-
-For More Information:
-
-Microsoft welcomes your comments regarding this privacy statement. If you have questions about this statement, please contact us at:
-
-Microsoft Privacy
-
-Microsoft Corporation
-
-One Microsoft Way
-
-Redmond, Washington 98052 USA
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Getting Started with MBAM 1.0](getting-started-with-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/release-notes-for-mbam-10.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/release-notes-for-mbam-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 61041c666a..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/release-notes-for-mbam-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,160 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Release Notes for MBAM 1.0
-description: Release Notes for MBAM 1.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: d82fddde-c360-48ef-86a0-d9b5fe066861
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Release Notes for MBAM 1.0
-
-
-**To search for a specific issue in these release notes, press CTRL+F.**
-
-Read these release notes thoroughly before you install Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM).
-
-These release notes contain information that is required to successfully install MBAM. The release notes also contain information that is not available in the product documentation. If there is a difference between these release notes and other MBAM documentation, the latest change should be considered authoritative. These release notes supersede the content that is included with this product.
-
-## About the Product Documentation
-
-
-For information about MBAM documentation, see the MBAM home page on Microsoft TechNet.
-
-To obtain a downloadable copy of the MBAM documentation, see on the Microsoft Download Center.
-
-## Provide Feedback
-
-
-We are interested in your feedback on MBAM. You can send your feedback to .
-
-**Note**
-This email address is not a support channel, but your feedback will help us to plan for future changes in our documentation and product releases.
-
-
-
-For the latest information about MDOP and additional learning resources, see the [MDOP Information Experience](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=236032) page.
-
-For more information about new updates or to provide feedback, follow us on [Facebook](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=242445) or [Twitter](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=242447).
-
-## Known Issues with MBAM 1.0
-
-
-This section contains release notes about the known issues with MBAM setup and installation.
-
-### If you select the “Use a certificate to encrypt the network communication” option during Setup, existing database connections and dependent applications can stop functioning
-
-You can configure MBAM for **Encrypted network communication** after you install either the Recovery and Hardware Database or the Compliance Status Database features. If you choose to configure MBAM for Encrypted network communication, MBAM Setup configures the instance of the SQL Server Database Engine to use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) for communication between the applicable database and both the Administration and Monitoring Server and the Compliance and Audit Report Server features.
-
-- If the instance of the SQL Server Database Engine is not already configured to use SSL, MBAM Setup configures it to do so. This can prevent applications that try to use non-MBAM databases on the instance of the SQL Server Database Engine from communicating with their databases.
-
-- If the instance of the SQL Server Database Engine is already configured to use SSL, it is configured to use the certificate that the user selected during setup. If this certificate differs from the one that was already in use, it can prevent applications that use SQL Server databases on the instance of the SQL Server Database Engine from running.
-
-**WORKAROUND:** None
-
-### MBAM Setup fails during installation when you use a local Administrator account
-
-MBAM Setup fails when you use a local Administrator account. The log file contains the following information:
-
-``` syntax
-Locating group 'MBAM Report Users'
-Adding ' to group 'MBAM Report Users'
-Locating group 'MBAM Recovery and Hardware DB Access'
-Adding 'S-1-5-20' to group 'MBAM Recovery and Hardware DB Access'
-Exception: A new member could not be added to a local group because the member has the wrong account type.
-
- StackTrace: at System.DirectoryServices.AccountManagement.SAMStoreCtx.UpdateGroupMembership(Principal group, DirectoryEntry de, NetCred credentials, AuthenticationTypes authTypes)
- at System.DirectoryServices.AccountManagement.SDSUtils.ApplyChangesToDirectory(Principal p, StoreCtx storeCtx, GroupMembershipUpdater updateGroupMembership, NetCred credentials, AuthenticationTypes authTypes)
- at System.DirectoryServices.AccountManagement.SAMStoreCtx.Update(Principal p)
- at Microsoft.Windows.Mdop.BitlockerManagement.Setup.Groups.CreateGroupsDeferred(Session session)
- InnerException:Exception: A new member could not be added to a local group because the member has the wrong account type.
-
- InnerException:StackTrace: at System.DirectoryServices.AccountManagement.UnsafeNativeMethods.IADsGroup.Add(String bstrNewItem)
- at System.DirectoryServices.AccountManagement.SAMStoreCtx.UpdateGroupMembership(Principal group, DirectoryEntry de, NetCred credentials, AuthenticationTypes authTypes)
-CustomAction MbamCreateGroupsDeferred returned actual error code 1603 (note this may not be 100% accurate if translation happened inside sandbox)
-Action ended 11:41:29: InstallExecute. Return value 3.
-```
-
-**WORKAROUND:** Use a domain account with administrative credentials on the server computer when you install MBAM.
-
-### MBAM Setup reconfigures the instance of the SQL Server Database Engine to not use SSL if you select “Do not encrypt network communication”
-
-When you install either the Recovery and Hardware Database or the Compliance Status Database, you can use Setup to configure MBAM by selecting **Encrypted network communication**. If you decide not to encrypt the network communication, MBAM Setup reconfigures the instance of the SQL Server Database Engine so that it does not use SSL.
-
-- If the instance of the SQL Server Database Engine is already configured to use SSL, MBAM Setup disables SSL on the instance of the SQL Server Database Engine. This changes the communication security between the applications that use databases that are not related to MBAM databases on the instance of the SQL Server Database Engine.
-
-**WORKAROUND:** None
-
-### Missing prerequisite for the Internet Information Services (IIS) Management Scripts and Tools web server feature
-
-MBAM Setup is dependent on the IIS Management Scripts and Tools web server feature, but it is not an enforced prerequisite. Server setup lets you install MBAM when this feature is missing. However, this will cause the backup service MBAM VSS Writer to start and then stop, because it cannot locate the Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI) and the Internet Information Services (IIS) provider. There is no error message for this condition, except that which occurs in the event log. Installation of MBAM without IIS Management Scripts and Tools causes the backup operations not to run for MBAM.
-
-**WORKAROUND:** Ensure that the IIS Management Scripts and Tools web server feature is installed before you start the MBAM Setup.
-
-### MBAM Setup stops responding during the “Installing selected features” phase when setup is configured to use a certificate
-
-MBAM Setup stops responding during the **Installing selected features** phase of setup. This occurs during the installation of the Recovery and Hardware Database or the Compliance Status Database, after you select the **Use a certificate to encrypt the network communication** option. Furthermore, the MBAM Setup stops responding if the instance of the SQL Server Database Engine cannot access the certificate that was specified during setup.
-
-**WORKAROUND:** Update the permissions on the certificate, so that the Windows service for the applicable instance of the SQL Server Database Engine can access the certificate. You can also change the account under which the instance of the SQL Server Database Engine runs, for the database engine to use the certificate. To determine the permissions for the certificate, type the following command at the command prompt: **certutil -v -store MY**
-
-### MBAM Setup pauses when you install SQL Server Reporting Services
-
-During MBAM installation, when you select an instance of SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) and SSRS instance is not available or it is configured incorrectly, the MBAM Setup might pause for up to one minute while it attempts to communicate with the SSRS instance.
-
-**WORKAROUND:** Wait for at least one minute for MBAM Setup to resume while the Setup program attempts to contact the instance of SSRS.
-
-### Administration and Monitoring Server does not run after setup
-
-After MBAM Setup successfully installs the Administration and Monitoring Server feature, MBAM displays error messages when you try to access the MBAM administrator website. This issue occurs for one of the following reasons:
-
-- One or more prerequisites on the Administration and Monitoring Server were removed after the MBAM installation.
-
-- One or more prerequisites were installed on the server and later they were removed before running the MBAM Setup.
-
-**WORKAROUND:** Review the MBAM documentation and confirm that all MBAM prerequisites are installed.
-
-### Clicking documentation links during Setup results in an application error after Setup is finished
-
-When you click a documentation link during setup and then close the Setup program by clicking **Cancel** or **Finish** after Setup has successfully finished, an application error message appears.. The problem is caused by an access violation error in the Windows Task Scheduler.
-
-**WORKAROUND:** None. You can ignore this error.
-
-### Failed MBAM Setup does not remove new databases
-
-If the MBAM Setup fails, Setup might not remove the newly created databases. This can cause failures during subsequent installations.
-
-**WORKAROUND:** Choose a different name for the database instance during the subsequent installation.
-
-### MBAM Setup does not recognize valid network load-balancing cluster certificates
-
-During the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server installation, with the network encryption option selected, the cluster certificate is not recognized as a valid certificate. It is recognized as valid when the certificate for communication with the database is installed, but it is rejected for communication by the load-balancing cluster.
-
-**WORKAROUND:** Confirm that the certificate revocation list (CRL) associated with the certificate is accessible, or use a certificate that does not require validation by using the CRL.
-
-## Release Notes Copyright Information
-
-
-Microsoft, Active Directory, ActiveX, Bing, Excel, Silverlight, SQL Server, Windows, Microsoft Intune, and Windows PowerShell are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[About MBAM 1.0](about-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/security-and-privacy-for-mbam-10.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/security-and-privacy-for-mbam-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8ef48ada78..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/security-and-privacy-for-mbam-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Security and Privacy for MBAM 1.0
-description: Security and Privacy for MBAM 1.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: ba4497f1-b9e3-41be-8953-3637d1f83f01
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Security and Privacy for MBAM 1.0
-
-
-The topics in this guide will help you plan for security and privacy considerations for Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM).
-
-## Security considerations for MBAM 1.0
-
-
-Before you deploy and use MBAM in your computing environment, you should consider potential security-related issues. The information in the Security Considerations topic provides a brief overview of Active Directory Domain Services user accounts and groups, log files, and other security-related considerations for MBAM.
-
-[Security Considerations for MBAM 1.0](security-considerations-for-mbam-10.md)
-
-## Privacy for MBAM 1.0
-
-
-This topic covers many of the data collection and use practices of MBAM.
-
-[Privacy Statement for MBAM 1.0](privacy-statement-for-mbam-10.md)
-
-## Other resources MBAM Security and Privacy
-
-
-- [Operations for MBAM 1.0](operations-for-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/security-considerations-for-mbam-10.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/security-considerations-for-mbam-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 340bd2e376..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/security-considerations-for-mbam-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,207 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Security Considerations for MBAM 1.0
-description: Security Considerations for MBAM 1.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 5e1c8b8c-235b-4a92-8b0b-da50dca17353
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Security Considerations for MBAM 1.0
-
-
-This topic contains a brief overview of the accounts and groups, log files, and other security-related considerations for Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM). For more information, follow the links in this article.
-
-## General security considerations
-
-
-**Understand the security risks.** The most serious risk to MBAM is that its functionality could be hijacked by an unauthorized user who could then reconfigure BitLocker encryption and gain BitLocker encryption key data on MBAM Clients. However, the loss of MBAM functionality for a short period of time due to a denial-of-service attack would not generally have a catastrophic impact.
-
-**Physically secure your computers**. Security is incomplete without physical security. Anyone with physical access to an MBAM Server could potentially attack the entire client base. Any potential physical attacks must be considered high risk and mitigated appropriately. MBAM servers should be stored in a physically secure server room with controlled access. Secure these computers when administrators are not physically present by having the operating system lock the computer, or by using a secured screen saver.
-
-**Apply the most recent security updates to all computers**. Stay informed about new updates for operating systems, Microsoft SQL Server, and MBAM by subscribing to the Security Notification service ().
-
-**Use strong passwords or pass phrases**. Always use strong passwords with 15 or more characters for all MBAM and MBAM administrator accounts. Never use blank passwords. For more information about password concepts, see the “Account Passwords and Policies” white paper on TechNet ().
-
-## Accounts and Groups in MBAM
-
-
-A best practice for user account management is to create domain global groups and add user accounts to them. Then, add the domain global accounts to the necessary MBAM local groups on the MBAM Servers.
-
-### Active Directory Domain Services Groups
-
-No groups are created automatically during MBAM Setup. However, you should create the following Active Directory Domain Services global groups to manage MBAM operations.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Group Name
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
MBAM Advanced Helpdesk Users
-
Create this group to manage members of the MBAM Advanced Helpdesk Users local group that was created during MBAM Setup.
-
-
-
MBAM Compliance Auditing DB Access
-
Create this group to manage members of the MBAM Compliance Auditing DB Access local group that was created during MBAM Setup.
-
-
-
MBAM Hardware Users
-
Create this group to manage members of the MBAM Hardware Users local group that was created during MBAM Setup.
-
-
-
MBAM Helpdesk Users
-
Create this group to manage members of the MBAM Helpdesk Users local group that was created during MBAM Setup.
-
-
-
MBAM Recovery and Hardware DB Access
-
Create this group to manage members of the MBAM Recovery and Hardware DB Access local group that was created during MBAM Setup.
-
-
-
MBAM Report Users
-
Create this group to manage members of the MBAM Report Users local group that was created during MBAM Setup.
-
-
-
MBAM System Administrators
-
Create this group to manage members of the MBAM System Administrators local group that was created during MBAM Setup.
-
-
-
BitLocker Encryption Exemptions
-
Create this group to manage user accounts that should be exempted from BitLocker encryption starting on computers that they log on to.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### MBAM Server Local Groups
-
-MBAM Setup creates local groups to support MBAM operations. You should add the Active Directory Domain Services Global Groups to the appropriate MBAM local groups to configure MBAM security and data access permissions.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Group Name
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
MBAM Advanced Helpdesk Users
-
Members of this group have expanded access to the Helpdesk features of Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring.
-
-
-
MBAM Compliance Auditing DB Access
-
This group contains the machines that have access to the MBAM Compliance Auditing Database.
-
-
-
MBAM Hardware Users
-
Members of this group have access to some of the Hardware Capability features from Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring.
-
-
-
MBAM Helpdesk Users
-
Members of this group have access to some of the Helpdesk features from Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring.
-
-
-
MBAM Recovery and Hardware DB Access
-
This group contains the computers that have access to the MBAM Recovery and Hardware Database.
-
-
-
MBAM Report Users
-
Members of this group have access to the Compliance and Audit reports from Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring.
-
-
-
MBAM System Administrators
-
Members of this group have access to all the features of Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### SSRS Reports Access Account
-
-The SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) Reports Service Account provides the security context to run the MBAM reports available through SSRS. This account is configured during MBAM Setup.
-
-## MBAM Log Files
-
-
-During MBAM Setup, the following MBAM Setup log files are created in the %temp% folder of the user who installs the
-
-**MBAM Server Setup log files**
-
-MSI<five random characters>.log
-Logs the actions taken during MBAM Setup and MBAM Server Feature installation.
-
-InstallComplianceDatabase.log
-Logs the actions taken to create the MBAM Compliance Status database setup.
-
-InstallKeyComplianceDatabase.log
-Logs the actions taken to create the MBAM Recovery and Hardware database.
-
-AddHelpDeskDbAuditUsers.log
-Logs the actions taken to create the SQL Server logins on the MBAM Compliance Status database and authorize helpdesk web service to the database for reports.
-
-AddHelpDeskDbUsers.log
-Logs the actions taken to authorize web services to database for key recovery and create logins to the MBAM Recovery and Hardware database.
-
-AddKeyComplianceDbUsers.log
-Logs the actions taken to authorize web services to MBAM Compliance Status database for compliance reporting.
-
-AddRecoveryAndHardwareDbUsers.log
-Logs the actions taken to authorize web services to MBAM Recovery and Hardware database for key recovery.
-
-**Note**
-In order to obtain additional MBAM Setup log files, you must install Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring by using the **msiexec** package and the **/l** <location> option. Log files are created in the location specified.
-
-
-
-**MBAM Client Setup log files**
-
-MSI<five random characters>.log
-Logs the actions taken during MBAM Client installation.
-
-## MBAM Database TDE considerations
-
-
-The Transparent Data Encryption (TDE) feature available in SQL Server 2008 is a required installation prerequisite for the database instances that will host MBAM database features.
-
-With TDE, you can perform real-time, full database-level encryption. TDE is a well-suited choice for bulk encryption to meet regulatory compliance or corporate data security standards. TDE works at the file level, which is similar to two Windows features: the Encrypting File System (EFS) and BitLocker Drive Encryption, both of which also encrypt data on the hard drive. TDE does not replace cell-level encryption, EFS, or BitLocker.
-
-When TDE is enabled on a database, all backups are encrypted. Thus, special care must be taken to ensure that the certificate that was used to protect the Database Encryption Key (DEK) is backed up and maintained with the database backup. Without a certificate, the data will be unreadable. Back up the certificate along with the database. Each certificate backup should have two files; both of these files should be archived .It is best to archive them separately from the database backup file for security.
-
-For an example of how to enable TDE for MBAM database instances, see [Evaluating MBAM 1.0](evaluating-mbam-10.md).
-
-For more information about TDE in SQL Server 2008, see [Database Encryption in SQL Server 2008 Enterprise Edition](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=269703).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Security and Privacy for MBAM 1.0](security-and-privacy-for-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/troubleshooting-mbam-10.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/troubleshooting-mbam-10.md
deleted file mode 100644
index bcf03fa8b3..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/troubleshooting-mbam-10.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,92 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Troubleshooting MBAM 1.0
-description: Troubleshooting MBAM 1.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 7d47fbfe-51c0-4619-bed3-163dfd18cdec
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Troubleshooting MBAM 1.0
-
-
-Troubleshooting content is not included in the Administrator’s Guide for this product. Instead, you can find troubleshooting information for this product on the [TechNet Wiki](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=224905).
-
-## How to Find Troubleshooting Content
-
-
-You can use the following information to find troubleshooting or additional technical content for this product.
-
-### Search the MDOP Documentation
-
-The first step to find help content in the Administrator’s Guide is to search the MDOP documentation on TechNet.
-
-After you search the MDOP documentation, your next step would be to search the troubleshooting information for the product in the TechNet Wiki.
-
-**To search the MDOP product documentation**
-
-1. Use a web browser to navigate to the [MDOP Information Experience](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=236032) TechNet home page.
-
-2. Enter applicable search terms in the **Search TechNet with Bing** search box at the top of the MDOP Information Experience home page.
-
-3. Review the search results for assistance.
-
-**To search the TechNet Wiki**
-
-1. Use a web browser to navigate to the [TechNet Wiki](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=224905) home page.
-
-2. Enter applicable search terms in the **Search TechNet Wiki** search box on the TechNet Wiki home page.
-
-3. Review the search results for assistance.
-
-## How to Create a Troubleshooting Article
-
-
-If you have a troubleshooting tip or a best practice to share that is not already included in the MDOP OnlineHelp or TechNet Wiki, you can create your own TechNet Wiki articles.
-
-**To create a TechNet Wiki troubleshooting or best practices article**
-
-1. Use a web browser to navigate to the [TechNet Wiki](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=224905) home page.
-
-2. Log in with your Windows Live ID.
-
-3. Review the **Getting Started** section to learn the basics of the TechNet Wiki and its articles.
-
-4. Select **Post an article >>** at the bottom of the **Getting Started** section.
-
-5. On the Wiki article **Add Page** page, select **Insert Template** from the toolbar, select the troubleshooting article template (**Troubleshooting.html**), and then click **Insert**.
-
-6. Be sure to give the article a descriptive title and then overwrite the template information as needed to create your troubleshooting or best practice article.
-
-7. After you review your article, be sure to include a tag that is named **Troubleshooting** and another for the product name. This helps others to find your content.
-
-8. Click **Save** to publish the article to the TechNet Wiki.
-
-## Other resources for troubleshooting MBAM 1.0
-
-
-- [Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 1 Administrator's Guide](index.md)
-
-- [Getting Started with MBAM 1.0](getting-started-with-mbam-10.md)
-
-- [Planning for MBAM 1.0](planning-for-mbam-10.md)
-
-- [Deploying MBAM 1.0](deploying-mbam-10.md)
-
-- [Operations for MBAM 1.0](operations-for-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v1/understanding-mbam-reports-mbam-1.md b/mdop/mbam-v1/understanding-mbam-reports-mbam-1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index eb7557d3a6..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v1/understanding-mbam-reports-mbam-1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,389 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Understanding MBAM Reports
-description: Understanding MBAM Reports
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 34e4aaeb-7f89-41a1-b816-c6fe8397b060
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Understanding MBAM Reports
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) generates various reports to monitor BitLocker usage and compliance. This topic describes the MBAM reports for enterprise compliance, individual computers, hardware compatibility, and key recovery activity.
-
-## Understanding Reports
-
-
-To access the Reports feature of MBAM, open the MBAM administration website. Select **Reports** in the navigation pane. Then, in the main content pane, click the tab for your report type: **Enterprise Compliance Report**, **Computer Compliance Report**, **Hardware Audit Report**, or **Recovery Audit Report**.
-
-### Enterprise Compliance Report
-
-An Enterprise Compliance Report provides information on overall BitLocker compliance in your organization. The available filters for this report allow you to narrow your search results according to Compliance state and Error status. This report runs every six hours.
-
-**Enterprise Compliance Report fields**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Column Name
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Computer Name
-
The user-specified DNS name that is being managed by MBAM.
-
-
-
Domain Name
-
The fully qualified domain name where the client computer resides and is managed by MBAM.
-
-
-
Compliance Status
-
The state of compliance for the computer, according to the policy specified for the computer. The possible states are Noncompliant and Compliant. For more information, see Enterprise Compliance Report Compliance States in this topic.
-
-
-
Exemption
-
The state of the computer hardware for determining the identification of the hardware type and whether the computer is exempt from policy. There are three possible states: Hardware Unknown (the hardware type has not been identified by MBAM), Hardware Exempt (the hardware type was identified and was marked as exempt from MBAM policy), and Not Exempt (the hardware was identified and is not exempt from policy).
-
-
-
Device Users
-
Known users on the computer that is being managed by MBAM.
-
-
-
Compliance Status Details
-
Error and status messages about the compliance state of the computer in accordance to the specified policy.
-
-
-
Last Contact
-
Date and time when the computer last contacted the server to report compliance status. This time is configurable. See MBAM policy settings.
The computer is noncompliant according to the specified policy, and the hardware type has not been indicated as exempt from policy.
-
Click Computer Name to expand the Computer Compliance Report and determine whether the state of each drive complies with the specified policy. If the encryption state indicates that the computer is not encrypted, encryption might still be in process, or there might be an error on the computer. If there is no error, the likely cause is that the computer is still in the process of connecting or establishing the encryption status. Check back later to determine if the state changes.
-
-
-
Compliant
-
Not Exempt
-
The computer is compliant in accordance with the specified policy.
-
No Action needed. Optionally, you can view the Computer Compliance Report to confirm the state of the computer.
-
-
-
Compliant
-
Hardware Exempt
-
If the Hardware type is exempt. Regardless of how the policy is set or the individual status of each hard-drive, the overall state is considered to be compliant.
-
No action needed.
-
-
-
Compliant
-
Hardware Unknown
-
MBAM recognizes the hardware type, but MBAM does not know whether it is exempt or not exempt. This occurs if the administrator has not set the Compatible status for the hardware. Therefore, MBAM reverts to Compliant status by default.
-
This is the initial state of a newly deployed MBAM client. It is typically only a transient state. Even if the administrator has marked the Hardware as Compatible, there can be a significant delay or configurable wait time before the client computer reports back in. Make note of the time of Last Contact, and check in again after the specified interval to see if the state has changed. If the state has not changed, there may be an error for this computer or hardware type.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Computer Compliance Report
-
-The Computer Compliance Report displays information that is specific to a computer or user.
-
-The Computer Compliance Report provides detailed encryption information and applicable policies for each drive on a computer, including operating system drives and fixed data drives. To view this report type, click the computer name in the Enterprise Compliance Report or type the computer name in the Computer Compliance Report. To view the details of each drive, expand the Computer Name entry.
-
-**Note**
-This report does not provide encryption status for Removable Data Volumes.
-
-
-
-**Computer Compliance Report fields**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Column Name
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Computer Name
-
The user-specified DNS computer name that is being managed by MBAM.
-
-
-
Domain Name
-
The fully qualified domain name where the client computer resides and is managed by MBAM.
-
-
-
Computer Type
-
The portability type of computer. Valid types are non-Portable and Portable.
-
-
-
Operating System
-
Operating System type installed on the MBAM managed client computer.
-
-
-
Compliance Status
-
The overall Compliance Status of the computer managed by MBAM. Valid states are Compliant and Noncompliant. While it is possible to have Compliant and Noncompliant drives in the same computer, this field indicates the overall computer compliance per specified policy.
-
-
-
Policy Cypher Strength
-
The Cipher Strength selected by the Administrator during MBAM policy specification. For example, 128-bit with Diffuser
-
-
-
Policy Operating System Drive
-
Indicates whether encryption is required for the O/S and the protector type as applicable.
-
-
-
Policy Fixed Data Drive
-
Indicates whether encryption is required for the Fixed Drive.
-
-
-
Policy Removable Data Drive
-
Indicates whether encryption is required for the Removable Drive.
-
-
-
Device Users
-
Provides the identity of known users on the computer.
-
-
-
Exemption
-
Indicates whether the computer hardware type is recognized by MBAM and, if known, whether the computer has been indicated as exempt from policy. There are three states: Hardware Unknown (the hardware type has not been identified by MBAM); Hardware Exempt (the hardware type was identified and was marked as exempt from MBAM policy); and Not Exempt (the hardware was identified and is not exempt from policy).
-
-
-
Manufacturer
-
The computer manufacturer name as it appears in the computer BIOS.
-
-
-
Model
-
The computer manufacturer model name as it appears in the computer BIOS.
-
-
-
Compliance Status Details
-
Error and status messages of the compliance state of the computer in accordance with the specified policy.
-
-
-
Last Contact
-
Date and time that the computer last contacted the server to report compliance status. T
Computer drive letter that was assigned to this particular drive by the user.
-
-
-
Drive Type
-
Type of drive. Valid values are Operating System Drive and Fixed Data Drive. These are physical drives rather than logical volumes.
-
-
-
Cypher Strength
-
Cipher Strength selected by the Administrator during MBAM policy specification.
-
-
-
Protector Type
-
Type of protector selected via policy used to encrypt an operating system or Fixed volume. The valid protector types on an operating system drive are TPM or TPM+PIN. The only valid protector type for a Fixed Data Volume is Password.
-
-
-
Protector State
-
This field indicates whether the computer has enabled the protector type specified in the policy. The valid states are ON or OFF.
-
-
-
Encryption State
-
This is the current encryption state of the drive. Valid states are Encrypted, Not Encrypted, and Encrypting.
-
-
-
Compliance Status
-
Indicates whether the drive is in accordance with the policy. States are Noncompliant and Compliant.
-
-
-
Compliance Status Details
-
Contains error and status messages regarding the compliance state of the computer.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Hardware Audit Report
-
-This report can help you audit changes to the Hardware Compatibility status of specific computer makes and models. To help you narrow your search results, this report includes filtering on criteria such as type of change and time of occurrence. Each state change is tracked by user and date and time. The Hardware Type is automatically populated by the MBAM agent that runs on the client computer. This report tracks user changes to the information collected directly from the MBAM managed computer. A typical administrative change is changing from Compatible to incompatible. However, the administrator can also revise any field.
-
-**Hardware Audit Report fields**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Column Name
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Date and Time
-
Date and time that a change was made to the Hardware Type. Note that every unique hardware type is assigned to at least one entry.
-
-
-
User
-
Administrative user that has made the change for the particular entry.
-
-
-
Change Type
-
Type of change that was made to the hardware type information. Valid values are Addition (new entry), Update (change existing entry), or Deletion (remove existing entry).
-
-
-
Original Value
-
Value of the hardware type specification before the change was made.
-
-
-
Current Value
-
Value of the hardware type specification after the change was made.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Recovery Audit Report
-
-The Recovery Audit Report can help you audit users who have requested access to recovery keys. The filter criteria for this report includes type of user making the request, type of key requested, time of occurrence, success or fail, time of occurrence, and type of user requesting (help desk, end user). This report enables administrators to produce contextual reports based on need.
-
-**Recovery Audit Report Fields**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Column Name
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Request Date and Time
-
The date and time that a key retrieval request was made by an end user or help desk user.
-
-
-
Request Status
-
Status of the request. Valid statuses are either Successful (the key was retrieved) or Failed (the key was not retrieved).
-
-
-
Helpdesk User
-
The help desk user who initiated the request for key retrieval. If the help desk user retrieves the key on behalf of an end user, the End User field will be blank.
-
-
-
User
-
The end user who initiated the request for key retrieval.
-
-
-
Key Type
-
The type of key that was requested. MBAM collects three key types: Recovery Key Password (to recovery a computer in recovery mode); Recovery Key ID (to recover a computer in recovery mode on behalf of another user); and Trusted Platform Module (TPM) Password Hash (to recover a computer with a locked TPM).
-
-
-
Reason Description
-
The reason that the specified Key Type was requested. The reasons are specified in the Drive Recovery and Manage TPM features of the Administrative web site. Valid entries include user-entered text or one of the following reason codes:
-
-
Operating System Boot Order changed
-
BIOS changed
-
Operating System files changed
-
Lost Startup key
-
Lost PIN
-
TPM Reset
-
Lost Passphrase
-
Lost Smartcard
-
Reset PIN lockout
-
Turn on TPM
-
Turn off TPM
-
Change TPM password
-
Clear TPM
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Note**
-To save report results to a file, click the **Export** button on the reports menu bar.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Monitoring and Reporting BitLocker Compliance with MBAM 1.0](monitoring-and-reporting-bitlocker-compliance-with-mbam-10.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/TOC.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/TOC.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4bb822bfb4..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/TOC.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
-# [Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 2](index.md)
-## [Getting Started with MBAM 2.0](getting-started-with-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-### [About MBAM 2.0](about-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-#### [Release Notes for MBAM 2.0](release-notes-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-### [About MBAM 2.0 SP1](about-mbam-20-sp1.md)
-#### [Release Notes for MBAM 2.0 SP1](release-notes-for-mbam-20-sp1.md)
-### [Evaluating MBAM 2.0](evaluating-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-### [High-Level Architecture for MBAM 2.0](high-level-architecture-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-### [Accessibility for MBAM 2.0](accessibility-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-## [Planning for MBAM 2.0](planning-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-### [Preparing your Environment for MBAM 2.0](preparing-your-environment-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-#### [MBAM 2.0 Deployment Prerequisites](mbam-20-deployment-prerequisites-mbam-2.md)
-#### [Planning for MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Requirements](planning-for-mbam-20-group-policy-requirements-mbam-2.md)
-#### [Planning for MBAM 2.0 Administrator Roles](planning-for-mbam-20-administrator-roles-mbam-2.md)
-### [Planning to Deploy MBAM 2.0](planning-to-deploy-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-#### [MBAM 2.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-20-supported-configurations-mbam-2.md)
-#### [Planning for MBAM 2.0 Server Deployment](planning-for-mbam-20-server-deployment-mbam-2.md)
-#### [Planning for MBAM 2.0 Client Deployment](planning-for-mbam-20-client-deployment-mbam-2.md)
-### [MBAM 2.0 Planning Checklist](mbam-20-planning-checklist-mbam-2.md)
-## [Deploying MBAM 2.0](deploying-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-### [Deploying the MBAM 2.0 Server Infrastructure](deploying-the-mbam-20-server-infrastructure-mbam-2.md)
-#### [How to Install and Configure MBAM on a Single Server](how-to-install-and-configure-mbam-on-a-single-server-mbam-2.md)
-#### [How to Install and Configure MBAM on Distributed Servers](how-to-install-and-configure-mbam-on-distributed-servers-mbam-2.md)
-#### [How to Use a Command Line to Install the MBAM Server](how-to-use-a-command-line-to-install-the-mbam-server.md)
-#### [How to Brand the Self-Service Portal](how-to-brand-the-self-service-portal.md)
-### [Deploying MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Objects](deploying-mbam-20-group-policy-objects-mbam-2.md)
-#### [How to Install the MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Template](how-to-install-the-mbam-20-group-policy-template-mbam-2.md)
-#### [How to Edit MBAM 2.0 GPO Settings](how-to-edit-mbam-20-gpo-settings-mbam-2.md)
-#### [How to Hide Default BitLocker Encryption in the Windows Control Panel](how-to-hide-default-bitlocker-encryption-in-the-windows-control-panel-mbam-2.md)
-### [Deploying the MBAM 2.0 Client](deploying-the-mbam-20-client-mbam-2.md)
-#### [How to Deploy the MBAM Client to Desktop or Laptop Computers](how-to-deploy-the-mbam-client-to-desktop-or-laptop-computers-mbam-2.md)
-#### [How to Deploy the MBAM Client as Part of a Windows Deployment](how-to-deploy-the-mbam-client-as-part-of-a-windows-deployment-mbam-2.md)
-#### [How to Use a Command Line to Install the MBAM Client](how-to-use-a-command-line-to-install-the-mbam-client.md)
-### [MBAM 2.0 Deployment Checklist](mbam-20-deployment-checklist-mbam-2.md)
-### [Upgrading from Previous Versions of MBAM](upgrading-from-previous-versions-of-mbam.md)
-## [Operations for MBAM 2.0](operations-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-### [Using MBAM with Configuration Manager](using-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md)
-#### [Getting Started - Using MBAM with Configuration Manager](getting-started---using-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md)
-#### [Planning to Deploy MBAM with Configuration Manager](planning-to-deploy-mbam-with-configuration-manager-2.md)
-#### [Deploying MBAM with Configuration Manager](deploying-mbam-with-configuration-manager-mbam2.md)
-##### [How to Create or Edit the mof Files](how-to-create-or-edit-the-mof-files.md)
-###### [Edit the Configuration.mof File](edit-the-configurationmof-file.md)
-###### [Create or Edit the Sms_def.mof File](create-or-edit-the-sms-defmof-file.md)
-##### [How to Install MBAM with Configuration Manager](how-to-install-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md)
-##### [How to Validate the MBAM Installation with Configuration Manager](how-to-validate-the-mbam-installation-with-configuration-manager.md)
-#### [Understanding MBAM Reports in Configuration Manager](understanding-mbam-reports-in-configuration-manager.md)
-### [Administering MBAM 2.0 Features](administering-mbam-20-features-mbam-2.md)
-#### [How to Manage MBAM Administrator Roles](how-to-manage-mbam-administrator-roles-mbam-2.md)
-#### [How to Manage User BitLocker Encryption Exemptions](how-to-manage-user-bitlocker-encryption-exemptions-mbam-2.md)
-#### [How to Manage MBAM Client BitLocker Encryption Options by Using the Control Panel](how-to-manage-mbam-client-bitlocker-encryption-options-by-using-the-control-panel-mbam-2.md)
-### [Monitoring and Reporting BitLocker Compliance with MBAM 2.0](monitoring-and-reporting-bitlocker-compliance-with-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-#### [Understanding MBAM Reports](understanding-mbam-reports-mbam-2.md)
-#### [How to Generate MBAM Reports](how-to-generate-mbam-reports-mbam-2.md)
-### [Performing BitLocker Management with MBAM](performing-bitlocker-management-with-mbam-mbam-2.md)
-#### [How to Use the Help Desk Portal](how-to-use-the-help-desk-portal.md)
-#### [How to Reset a TPM Lockout](how-to-reset-a-tpm-lockout-mbam-2.md)
-#### [How to Recover a Drive in Recovery Mode](how-to-recover-a-drive-in-recovery-mode-mbam-2.md)
-#### [How to Recover a Moved Drive](how-to-recover-a-moved-drive-mbam-2.md)
-#### [How to Recover a Corrupted Drive](how-to-recover-a-corrupted-drive-mbam-2.md)
-#### [How to Determine BitLocker Encryption State of Lost Computers](how-to-determine-bitlocker-encryption-state-of-lost-computers-mbam-2.md)
-#### [How to Use the Self-Service Portal to Regain Access to a Computer](how-to-use-the-self-service-portal-to-regain-access-to-a-computer.md)
-#### [Helping End Users Manage BitLocker](helping-end-users-manage-bitlocker.md)
-##### [Using Your PIN or Password](using-your-pin-or-password.md)
-##### [About the Computer TPM Chip](about-the-computer-tpm-chip.md)
-### [Maintaining MBAM 2.0](maintaining-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-#### [High Availability for MBAM 2.0](high-availability-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-#### [How to Move MBAM 2.0 Features to Another Computer](how-to-move-mbam-20-features-to-another-computer-mbam-2.md)
-### [Security and Privacy for MBAM 2.0](security-and-privacy-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-#### [MBAM 2.0 Security Considerations](mbam-20-security-considerations-mbam-2.md)
-#### [MBAM 2.0 Privacy Statement](mbam-20-privacy-statement-mbam-2.md)
-### [Administering MBAM 2.0 Using PowerShell](administering-mbam-20-using-powershell-mbam-2.md)
-## [Troubleshooting MBAM 2.0](troubleshooting-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/about-mbam-20-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/about-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 9fb055be15..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/about-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,115 +0,0 @@
----
-title: About MBAM 2.0
-description: About MBAM 2.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: b43a0ba9-1c83-4854-a2c5-14eea0070e36
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# About MBAM 2.0
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) 2.0 provides a simplified administrative interface to BitLocker drive encryption. BitLocker offers enhanced protection against data theft or data exposure for computers that are lost or stolen. BitLocker encrypts all data that is stored on the Windows operating system volume and configured data volumes.
-
-## About MBAM 2.0
-
-
-BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 2.0 enforces the BitLocker encryption policy options that you set for your enterprise, monitors the compliance of client computers with those policies, and reports on the encryption status of both the enterprise and the individual computers. In addition, MBAM lets you access the recovery key information when users forget their PIN or password, or when their BIOS or boot record changes.
-
-**Note**
-BitLocker is not covered in detail in this guide. For an overview of BitLocker, see [BitLocker Drive Encryption Overview](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=225013).
-
-
-
-The following groups might be interested in using MBAM to manage BitLocker:
-
-- Administrators, IT security professionals, and compliance officers who are responsible for ensuring that confidential data is not disclosed without authorization
-
-- Administrators who are responsible for computer security in remote or branch offices
-
-- Administrators who are responsible for client computers that are running Windows
-
-## What’s New in MBAM 2.0
-
-
-MBAM 2.0 provides the following new features and functionality.
-
-### Integration of System Center Configuration Manager with MBAM
-
-MBAM now supports integration with System Center Configuration Manager. This integration moves the MBAM compliance infrastructure into the native environment of Configuration Manager. IT administrators who use Configuration Manager in their enterprise can now view the compliance status of their enterprise in the Microsoft Management Console and drill into reports to view individual computers.
-
-### Hardware Compatibility is Available Only in the Configuration Manager Integration Topology
-
-Integrating Configuration Manager with MBAM enables Configuration Manager capabilities that allow or prohibit the use of certain hardware types with MBAM and provides more flexibility than the hardware compatibility that was available in MBAM 1.0. IT administrators can create their own collections to limit hardware and can deploy the MBAM configuration baseline to those collections. The MBAM hardware compatibility that was present in MBAM 1.0 is now available only in the MBAM Configuration Manager topology and is administered from Configuration Manager.
-
-### Protectors Flexible Policy
-
-Computers that are already encrypted with a protector (for example, TPM + PIN or Auto-Unlock and password) and that receive an MBAM policy that requires a subset of that encryption (for example, TPM or Auto-Unlock) are considered compliant. In the example above, PIN and password would not be removed automatically unless the IT administrator specifically defines these features as no longer allowed.
-
-Computers that are not encrypted and that receive an MBAM policy (for example, TPM or Auto-Unlock) are encrypted accordingly. Users who are local administrators are allowed to use the BitLocker tools (Control Panel item BitLocker Drive Encryption or Manage-bde) to add or modify the existing protectors (for example, TPM + PIN or Auto-Unlock and password). They remain compliant unless MBAM policies specifically define them.
-
-### Ability to Upgrade the MBAM Client
-
-The MBAM 2.0 Client Windows Installer detects the version of the existing client and performs the required steps to upgrade to the MBAM 2.0 Client from previous versions.
-
-### Ability to Upgrade the MBAM Server from Previous Versions
-
-You can upgrade the MBAM 2.0 Server infrastructure from previous versions of MBAM as follows:
-
-**Manual in-place server replacement** – You must manually uninstall the existing MBAM server infrastructure, and then install the MBAM 2.0 Server infrastructure. You do not have to remove the databases to do the upgrade. Instead, you select the existing databases, which the previous version of the MBAM Client created. The MBAM 2.0 upgrade installation then migrates the existing databases to MBAM 2.0.
-
-**Distributed client upgrade** – If you are using the Stand-alone MBAM topology, you can upgrade the MBAM Clients gradually after you install the MBAM 2.0 Server infrastructure. The MBAM 2.0 Server detects the version of the existing Client and performs the required steps to upgrade to the 2.0 Client.
-
-After you upgrade the MBAM 2.0 Server infrastructure, MBAM 1.0 Clients continue to report to the MBAM 2.0 Server successfully, escrowing recovery data, but compliance will be based on the policies in MBAM 1.0. You must upgrade clients to MBAM 2.0 to have client computers accurately report compliance against the MBAM 2.0 policies. You can upgrade the clients to the MBAM 2.0 Client without uninstalling the previous client, and the client will start to apply and report MBAM 2.0 policies.
-
-If you are using MBAM with Configuration Manager, you must upgrade the MBAM 1.0 clients to MBAM 2.0.
-
-### MBAM Support for BitLocker’s Enterprise Scenarios on the Windows 8 Platform
-
-MBAM supports the Windows 8 operating system as a target platform for the MBAM Client installation. This support enables IT administrators to install the MBAM agent, to encrypt Windows 8 operating system drives, and to report on the compliance of the computers. MBAM leverages the TPM and TPM+PIN protectors to manage the Windows 8 operating system just as it does the Windows 7 operating system. MBAM 2.0 also adds support for encrypting Windows To Go clients.
-
-### Addition of the Self-Service Portal
-
-End users can now use the Self-Service Portal to recover their recovery keys. The Self-Service Portal can be deployed on a single server with the other MBAM features, or on a separate server that gives IT administrators the flexibility to expose the Self-Server Portal to users, as required. After the Self-Service Portal authenticates users, users have to enter only the first eight digits of the recovery key ID to receive their recovery key.
-
-MBAM also secures the key by allowing users to recover keys only for those computers on which they are users, which reduces the risk that other users gain unauthorized access.
-
-### Ability to Automatically Resume BitLocker Protection from a Suspended State
-
-MBAM no longer allows IT administrators to keep BitLocker suspended and unprotected for prolonged periods of time. If an IT administrator suspends BitLocker, MBAM re-enables it automatically when the computer is rebooted, which reduces the risk that the computer can be attacked.
-
-### Fixed Data Drives Can Be Configured to Automatically Unlock Without a Password
-
-A Fixed Data Drive (FDD) policy can now be configured to allow automatic unlocking of the drive without a password. Users are not prompted for a password before the FDD is encrypted, and the FDD will be secured and auto-unlocked with the operating system drive.
-
-## MBAM 2.0 Release Notes
-
-
-For more information, and for late-breaking news that is not included in the documentation, see the [Release Notes for MBAM 2.0](release-notes-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md).
-
-## How to Get MBAM 2.0
-
-
-This technology is a part of the Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack (MDOP). Enterprise customers can get MDOP with Microsoft Software Assurance. For more information about Microsoft Software Assurance and acquiring MDOP, see [How Do I Get MDOP?](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=322049)
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Getting Started with MBAM 2.0](getting-started-with-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/about-mbam-20-sp1.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/about-mbam-20-sp1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ab210f8c1c..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/about-mbam-20-sp1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,490 +0,0 @@
----
-title: About MBAM 2.0 SP1
-description: About MBAM 2.0 SP1
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 5ba89ed8-bb6e-407b-82c2-e2e36dd1078e
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# About MBAM 2.0 SP1
-
-
-This topic describes the changes in Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) 2.0 Service Pack 1 (SP1). For a general description of MBAM, see [Getting Started with MBAM 2.0](getting-started-with-mbam-20-mbam-2.md).
-
-## What’s new in MBAM 2.0 SP1
-
-
-This version of MBAM provides the following new features and functionality.
-
-### Support for Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2, and System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) 2.0 Service Pack 1 (SP1) adds support for Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2, and System Center 2012 R2 Configuration Manager.
-
-### Support for Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 SP2
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) 2.0 Service Pack 1 (SP1) adds support for Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 SP2. You must use Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 or higher if you are running Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2007 R2.
-
-### Customer feedback rollup
-
-MBAM 2.0 SP1 includes a rollup of fixes to address issues that were found since the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) 2.0 release. As part of these changes, the Computer Name field now appears in the BitLocker Computer Compliance and BitLocker Enterprise Compliance Details reports when you run MBAM with Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2007.
-
-### Firewall exception must be set on ports for the Self-Service Portal and the Administration and Monitoring website
-
-When you configure the Self-Service Portal and the Administration and Monitoring website, you must set a firewall exception to enable communication through the specified ports. Previously, the MBAM server installation opened the ports automatically in Windows Firewall.
-
-### Location of MBAM reports has changed in Configuration Manager
-
-MBAM reports for the Configuration Manager integrated topology are now available under subfolders within the MBAM node. The subfolder names represent the language of the reports within the subfolder.
-
-### Ability to install MBAM on a primary site server when you install MBAM with Configuration Manager
-
-You can install MBAM on a primary site server or a central administration site server when you install MBAM with the Configuration Manager integrated topology. Previously, you were required to install MBAM on a central administration site server.
-
-**Important**
-The server on which you install MBAM must be the top-tier server in your hierarchy.
-
-
-
-The MBAM installation works differently for Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2007 and Microsoft System Center 2012 Configuration Manager as follows:
-
-- **Configuration Manager 2007** : If you install MBAM on a primary site server that is part of a larger Configuration Manager hierarchy and has a central site parent server, MBAM resolves the central site parent server and performs all of the installation actions on that parent server. The installation actions include checking prerequisites and installing the Configuration Manager objects and reports. For example, if you install MBAM on a primary site server that is a child of a central site parent server, MBAM installs all of the Configuration Manager objects and reports on the parent server. If you install MBAM on the parent server, MBAM performs all of the installation actions on that parent server.
-
-- **System Center 2012 Configuration Manager** : If you install MBAM on a primary site server or on a central administration server, MBAM performs all of the installation actions on that site server.
-
-### Configuration Manager Console must be installed on the computer on which you install the MBAM Server
-
-When you install MBAM with the Configuration Manager integrated topology, you must install the Configuration Manager Console on the same computer on which MBAM will be installed. If you use the recommended architecture, which is described in [Getting Started - Using MBAM with Configuration Manager](getting-started---using-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md), you would install MBAM on the Configuration Manager Primary Site Server.
-
-### New setup command-line parameters for the Configuration Manager integrated topology
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Command-Line Parameter
-
Description
-
Example
-
-
-
-
-
CM_SSRS_REMOTE_SERVER_NAME
-
Enables you to install the Configuration Manager reports on a remote SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) server that is part of the same Configuration Manager site to which MBAM is installed. You can set the value to the fully qualified domain name of the remote SSRS point role server.
Enables you to install only the Configuration Manager reports, without other Configuration Manager objects, such as the baseline, collection, and configuration items.
-
-Note
You must combine this parameter with the CM_REPORTS_COLLECTION_ID parameter.
-
-
-
-
-
Valid parameter values:
-
-
True
-
False
-
-
You can combine this parameter with the CM_SSRS_REMOTE_SERVER_NAME parameter if you want to install the reports only to a remote SSRS point role server.
-
If you do not set the parameter or if you set it to False, MBAM Setup installs all of the Configuration Manager objects, including the reports.
-
MbamSetup.exe CM_REPORTS_ONLY=True
-
CM_REPORTS_COLLECTION_ID=SMS00001
-
-
-
CM_REPORTS_COLLECTION_ID
-
An existing collection ID that identifies the collection for which reporting compliance data will be displayed. You can specify any collection ID. You are not required to use the “MBAM Supported Computers” collection ID.
-
MbamSetup.exe CM_REPORTS_ONLY=True
-
CM_REPORTS_COLLECTION_ID=SMS00001
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Ability to turn Self-Service Portal notice text on or off
-
-MBAM 2.0 SP1 enables you to turn off the notice text on the Self-Service Portal. Previously, the notice text displayed by default, and you could not turn it off.
-
-**To turn off the notice text**
-
-1. On the server where you installed the Self-Service Portal, open Internet Information Services (IIS) and browse to **Sites > Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring > SelfService > Application Settings**.
-
-2. From the **Name** column, select **DisplayNotice**, and set the value to **false**.
-
-### Ability to localize the HelpdeskText statement that points users to more Self-Service Portal information
-
-You can configure a localized version of the Self-Service Portal “HelpdeskText” statement, which tells end users how to get additional help when they are using the Self-Service Portal. If you configure localized text for the statement, as described in the following instructions, MBAM will display the localized version. If MBAM does not find the localized version, it displays the value that is in the **HelpdeskText** parameter.
-
-**To display a localized version of the HelpdeskText statement**
-
-1. On the server where you installed the Self-Service Portal, open IIS and browse to **Sites > Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring > SelfService > Application Settings**.
-
-2. In the **Actions** pane, click **Add** to open the **Add Application Setting** dialog box.
-
-3. In the **Name** field, type **HelpdeskText**\_<*language*>, where <*language*> is the appropriate language code for the text. For example, to create a localized HelpdeskText statement in Spanish, you would name the parameter HelpdeskText\_es-es. For a list of the valid language codes that you can use, see [National Language Support (NLS) API Reference](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=317947).
-
-4. In the **Value** field, type the localized text that you want to display to end users.
-
-### Ability to localize the Self-Service Portal HelpdeskURL
-
-You can configure a localized version of the Self-Service Portal HelpdeskURL to display to end users by default. If you create a localized version, as described in the following instructions, MBAM finds and displays the localized version. If MBAM does not find a localized version, it displays the URL that is configured for the HelpDeskURL parameter.
-
-**To display a localized HelpdeskURL**
-
-1. On the server where you installed the Self-Service Portal, open IIS and browse to **Sites > Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring > SelfService > Application Settings**.
-
-2. In the **Actions** pane, click **Add** to open the **Add Application Setting** dialog box.
-
-3. In the **Name** field, type **HelpdeskURL**\_<*language*>, where <*language*> is the appropriate language code for the URL. For example, to create a localized HelpdeskURL in Spanish, you would name the parameter HelpdeskURL\_es-es. For a list of the valid language codes you can use, see [National Language Support (NLS) API Reference](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=317947).
-
-4. In the **Value** field, type the localized HelpdeskURL that you want to display to end users.
-
-### Ability to localize the Self-Service Portal notice text
-
-You can configure localized notice text to display to end users by default in the Self-Service Portal. The notice.txt file, which displays the notice text, is located in the following root directory:
-
-<*MBAM Self-Service Install Directory*>\\Self Service Website\\
-
-To display localized notice text, you create a localized notice.txt file and save it under a specific language folder in the following directory:
-
-<*MBAM Self-Service Install Directory*>\\Self Service Website\\
-
-MBAM displays the notice text, based on the following rules:
-
-- If you create a localized notice.txt file in the appropriate language folder, MBAM displays the localized notice text.
-
-- If MBAM does not find a localized version of the notice.txt file, it displays the text in the default notice.txt file.
-
-- If MBAM does not find a default notice.txt file, it displays the default text in the Self-Service Portal.
-
-**Note**
-If an end user’s browser is set to a language that does not have a corresponding language subfolder or notice.txt, the text that is in the notice.txt file in the following root directory is displayed:
-
-<*MBAM Self-Service Install Directory*>\\Self Service Website\\
-
-
-
-**To create a localized notice.txt file**
-
-1. On the server where you installed the Self-Service Portal, create a <*language*> folder in the following directory, where <*language*> represents the name of the localized language:
-
- <*MBAM Self-Service Install Directory*>\\Self Service Website\\
-
- **Note**
- Some language folders already exist, so you may not have to create one. If you do need to create a language folder, see [National Language Support (NLS) API Reference](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=317947) for a list of the valid names that you can use for the <*language*> folder.
-
-
-
-2. Create a notice.txt file that contains the localized notice text.
-
-3. Save the notice.txt file in the <*language*> folder. For example, to create a localized notice.txt file in Spanish, you would save the localized notice.txt file in the following folder:
-
- <*MBAM Self-Service Install Directory*>\\Self Service Website\\es-es
-
-## Upgrading to MBAM 2.0 SP1
-
-
-You can upgrade to MBAM 2.0 SP1 from any previous version of MBAM.
-
-### Upgrading the MBAM infrastructure
-
-You can upgrade the MBAM Server infrastructure to MBAM 2.0 SP1 as follows:
-
-**Manual in-place server replacement**: You must manually uninstall the existing MBAM Server infrastructure, and then install the MBAM 2.0 SP1 Server infrastructure. You do not have to remove the databases to do the upgrade. Instead, you select the existing databases, which the previous version of MBAM created. The MBAM 2.0 SP1 upgrade installation then migrates the existing databases to MBAM 2.0 SP1.
-
-**Distributed client upgrade**: If you are using the Stand-alone MBAM topology, you can upgrade the MBAM Clients gradually after you install the MBAM 2.0 SP1 Server infrastructure.
-
-After you upgrade the MBAM Server infrastructure, MBAM 1.0 or 2.0 Clients will report to the MBAM 2.0 SP1 Server successfully and will store the recovery data, but compliance will be based on the policies available for the MBAM Client version that is currently installed. To enable reporting against MBAM 2.0 SP1 policies, you must upgrade client computers to MBAM 2.0 SP1. You can upgrade the client computers to the MBAM 2.0 SP1 Client without uninstalling the previous Client, and the Client will start to apply and report, based on the MBAM 2.0 SP1 policies.
-
-For more information about upgrading the MBAM servers, see [Upgrading from Previous Versions of MBAM](upgrading-from-previous-versions-of-mbam.md).
-
-### Upgrading the MBAM Client to MBAM 2.0 SP1
-
-To upgrade end-user computers to the MBAM 2.0 SP1 Client, run **MbamClientSetup.exe** on each client computer. The installer automatically updates the Client to the MBAM 2.0 SP1 Client. After the installation, client computers do not have to be rebooted, and the MBAM 2.0 SP1 Client starts to apply and report against MBAM 2.0 SP1 policies.
-
-If you are using MBAM with Configuration Manager, you must upgrade the MBAM client computers to MBAM 2.0 SP1.
-
-For more information about upgrading the MBAM client computers, see [Upgrading from Previous Versions of MBAM](upgrading-from-previous-versions-of-mbam.md).
-
-## Installing or upgrading to MBAM 2.0 SP1 with Configuration Manager
-
-
-This section describes the requirements when you are installing MBAM 2.0 SP1 as a new installation or as an upgrade to a previous MBAM 2.0 SP1 installation.
-
-### Required files for installing MBAM 2.0 SP1 if you are using MBAM with Configuration Manager
-
-If you are installing MBAM for the first time and you are using MBAM 2.0 SP1 with System Center Configuration Manager, you must create or edit mof files to enable MBAM to work correctly with Configuration Manager.
-
-- **configuration.mof file**
-
- - If you are using Configuration Manager 2007, you must edit the configuration.mof file by completing step 3 from the item **Update the configuration.mof file if you upgrade to MBAM 2.0 SP1 and you are using MBAM with Configuration Manager 2007**, which follows this item.
-
- - If you are using System Center 2012 Configuration Manager, edit the configuration.mof file by following the instructions in [Edit the Configuration.mof File](edit-the-configurationmof-file.md).
-
-- **sms\_def.mof file** – follow the instructions in [Create or Edit the Sms\_def.mof File](create-or-edit-the-sms-defmof-file.md).
-
-### Update the configuration.mof file if you upgrade to MBAM 2.0 SP1 and you are using MBAM with Configuration Manager 2007
-
-If you are upgrading to MBAM 2.0 SP1 and you are using MBAM with Configuration Manager 2007, you must update the configuration.mof file to ensure that MBAM 2.0 SP1 works correctly.
-
-**To update the configuration.mof file:**
-
-1. On the Configuration Manager Server, browse to the location of the Configuration.mof file:
-
- <CMInstallLocation>\\Inboxes\\clifiles.src\\hinv\\
-
- On a default installation, the installation location is %systemdrive%\\Program Files (x86)\\Microsoft Configuration Manager.
-
-2. Review the block of code that you appended to the configuration.mof file, and delete it. The block of code will be similar to the one shown in the following step.
-
-3. Copy the following block of code, and then append it to the configuration.mof file to add the following required MBAM classes to the file:
-
- ``` syntax
- //===================================================
- // Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring
- //===================================================
-
-# pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2")
-# pragma deleteclass("Win32_BitLockerEncryptionDetails", NOFAIL)
- [Union, ViewSources{"select DeviceId, BitlockerPersistentVolumeId, BitLockerManagementPersistentVolumeId, BitLockerManagementVolumeType, DriveLetter, Compliant, ReasonsForNonCompliance, KeyProtectorTypes, EncryptionMethod, ConversionStatus, ProtectionStatus, IsAutoUnlockEnabled from Mbam_Volume"}, ViewSpaces{"\\\\.\\root\\microsoft\\mbam"}, dynamic, Provider("MS_VIEW_INSTANCE_PROVIDER")]
- class Win32_BitLockerEncryptionDetails
- {
- [PropertySources{"DeviceId"},key]
- String DeviceId;
- [PropertySources{"BitlockerPersistentVolumeId"}]
- String BitlockerPersistentVolumeId;
- [PropertySources{"BitLockerManagementPersistentVolumeId"}]
- String MbamPersistentVolumeId;
- //UNKNOWN = 0, OS_Volume = 1, FIXED_VOLUME = 2, REMOVABLE_VOLUME = 3
- [PropertySources{"BitLockerManagementVolumeType"}]
- SInt32 MbamVolumeType;
- [PropertySources{"DriveLetter"}]
- String DriveLetter;
- //VOLUME_NOT_COMPLIANT = 0, VOLUME_COMPLIANT = 1, NOT_APPLICABLE = 2
- [PropertySources{"Compliant"}]
- SInt32 Compliant;
- [PropertySources{"ReasonsForNonCompliance"}]
- SInt32 ReasonsForNonCompliance[];
- [PropertySources{"KeyProtectorTypes"}]
- SInt32 KeyProtectorTypes[];
- [PropertySources{"EncryptionMethod"}]
- SInt32 EncryptionMethod;
- [PropertySources{"ConversionStatus"}]
- SInt32 ConversionStatus;
- [PropertySources{"ProtectionStatus"}]
- SInt32 ProtectionStatus;
- [PropertySources{"IsAutoUnlockEnabled"}]
- Boolean IsAutoUnlockEnabled;
- };
-
-# pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2")
-# pragma deleteclass("Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy", NOFAIL)
- [DYNPROPS]
- Class Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy
- {
- [key]
- string KeyName;
-
- //General encryption requirements
- UInt32 OsDriveEncryption;
- UInt32 FixedDataDriveEncryption;
- UInt32 EncryptionMethod;
-
- //Required protectors properties
- UInt32 OsDriveProtector;
- UInt32 FixedDataDriveAutoUnlock;
- UInt32 FixedDataDrivePassphrase;
-
- //MBAM agent fields
- Uint32 MBAMPolicyEnforced;
- string LastConsoleUser;
- datetime UserExemptionDate;
- UInt32 MBAMMachineError;
-
- // Encoded computer name
- string EncodedComputerName;
- };
-
- [DYNPROPS]
- Instance of Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy
- {
- KeyName="BitLocker policy";
-
- //General encryption requirements
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies\\Microsoft\\FVE\\MDOPBitLockerManagement|ShouldEncryptOsDrive"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- OsDriveEncryption;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies\\Microsoft\\FVE\\MDOPBitLockerManagement|ShouldEncryptFixedDataDrive"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- FixedDataDriveEncryption;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies\\Microsoft\\FVE|EncryptionMethod"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- EncryptionMethod;
-
- //Required protectors properties
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|OSVolumeProtectorPolicy"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- OsDriveProtector;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies\\Microsoft\\FVE\\MDOPBitLockerManagement|AutoUnlockFixedDataDrive"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- FixedDataDriveAutoUnlock;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies\\Microsoft\\FVE|FDVPassphrase"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- FixedDataDrivePassphrase;
-
- //MBAM agent fields
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|MBAMPolicyEnforced"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- MBAMPolicyEnforced;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|LastConsoleUser"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- LastConsoleUser;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|UserExemptionDate"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- UserExemptionDate; //Registry value should be string in the format of yyyymmddHHMMSS.mmmmmmsUUU
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|MBAMMachineError"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- MBAMMachineError;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|EncodedComputerName"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- EncodedComputerName;
- };
-
-# pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2")
-# pragma deleteclass("Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy_64", NOFAIL)
- [DYNPROPS]
- Class Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy_64
- {
- [key]
- string KeyName;
-
- //General encryption requirements
- UInt32 OsDriveEncryption;
- UInt32 FixedDataDriveEncryption;
- UInt32 EncryptionMethod;
-
- //Required protectors properties
- UInt32 OsDriveProtector;
- UInt32 FixedDataDriveAutoUnlock;
- UInt32 FixedDataDrivePassphrase;
-
- //MBAM agent fields
- Uint32 MBAMPolicyEnforced;
- string LastConsoleUser;
- datetime UserExemptionDate; //Registry value should be string in the format of yyyymmddHHMMSS.mmmmmmsUUU
- UInt32 MBAMMachineError;
-
- // Encoded computer name
- string EncodedComputerName;
- };
-
- [DYNPROPS]
- Instance of Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy_64
- {
- KeyName="BitLocker policy 64";
-
- //General encryption requirements
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies\\Microsoft\\FVE\\MDOPBitLockerManagement|ShouldEncryptOsDrive"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- OsDriveEncryption;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies\\Microsoft\\FVE\\MDOPBitLockerManagement|ShouldEncryptFixedDataDrive"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- FixedDataDriveEncryption;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies\\Microsoft\\FVE|EncryptionMethod"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- EncryptionMethod;
-
- //Required protectors properties
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|OSVolumeProtectorPolicy"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- OsDriveProtector;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies\\Microsoft\\FVE\\MDOPBitLockerManagement|AutoUnlockFixedDataDrive"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- FixedDataDriveAutoUnlock;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies\\Microsoft\\FVE|FDVPassphrase"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- FixedDataDrivePassphrase;
-
- //MBAM agent fields
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|MBAMPolicyEnforced"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- MBAMPolicyEnforced;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|LastConsoleUser"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- LastConsoleUser;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|UserExemptionDate"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- UserExemptionDate; //Registry value should be string in the format of yyyymmddHHMMSS.mmmmmmsUUU
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|MBAMMachineError"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- MBAMMachineError;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|EncodedComputerName"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- EncodedComputerName;
- };
-
-# pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2")
-# pragma deleteclass("CCM_OperatingSystemExtended", NOFAIL)
- [Union, ViewSources{"select Name,OperatingSystemSKU from Win32_OperatingSystem"}, ViewSpaces{"\\\\.\\root\\cimv2"},
- dynamic,Provider("MS_VIEW_INSTANCE_PROVIDER")]
- class CCM_OperatingSystemExtended
- {
- [PropertySources{"Name"},key]
- string Name;
- [PropertySources{"OperatingSystemSKU"}]
- uint32 SKU;
- };
-
-# pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2")
-# pragma deleteclass("CCM_ComputerSystemExtended", NOFAIL)
- [Union, ViewSources{"select Name,PCSystemType from Win32_ComputerSystem"}, ViewSpaces{"\\\\.\\root\\cimv2"},
- dynamic,Provider("MS_VIEW_INSTANCE_PROVIDER")]
- class CCM_ComputerSystemExtended
- {
- [PropertySources{"Name"},key]
- string Name;
- [PropertySources{"PCSystemType"}]
- uint16 PCSystemType;
- };
-
- //=======================================================
- // Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring end
- //=======================================================
-
- ```
-
-### Translation of MBAM 2.0 SP1
-
-MBAM 2.0 SP1 is now available in the following languages:
-
-- English (United States) en-US
-
-- French (France) fr-FR
-
-- Italian (Italy) it-IT
-
-- German (Germany) de-DE
-
-- Spanish, International Sort (Spain) es-ES
-
-- Korean (Korea) ko-KR
-
-- Japanese (Japan) ja-JP
-
-- Portuguese (Brazil) pt-BR
-
-- Russian (Russia) ru-RU
-
-- Chinese Traditional zh-TW
-
-- Chinese Simplified zh-CN
-
-## How to Get MDOP Technologies
-
-
-MBAM 2.0 SP1 is a part of the Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack (MDOP). MDOP is part of Microsoft Software Assurance. For more information about Microsoft Software Assurance and acquiring MDOP, see [How Do I Get MDOP](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049) (https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Release Notes for MBAM 2.0 SP1](release-notes-for-mbam-20-sp1.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/about-the-computer-tpm-chip.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/about-the-computer-tpm-chip.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8c951c73f2..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/about-the-computer-tpm-chip.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
----
-title: About the Computer TPM Chip
-description: About the Computer TPM Chip
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 6f1cf18c-277a-4932-886d-14202ca8d175
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# About the Computer TPM Chip
-
-
-BitLocker provides additional protection when it is used with a Trusted Platform Module (TPM) chip. The TPM chip is a hardware component that is installed in many newer computers by the computer manufacturers. Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) uses BitLocker, in addition to the TPM chip, to help provide additional protection of your data and to make sure that your computer has not been tampered with.
-
-## How to Set Up Your TPM
-
-
-When you start the BitLocker Drive Encryption wizard on your computer, BitLocker checks for a TPM chip if your organization has configured BitLocker to use a TPM chip. If BitLocker finds a compatible TPM chip, you may be prompted to restart your computer to enable the TPM chip for use. As soon as your computer has restarted, follow the instructions to configure the TPM chip in the BIOS (the BIOS is a pre-Windows layer of your computer software).
-
-After BitLocker is configured, you can access additional information about the TPM chip by opening the BitLocker Encryption Options tool in the Windows Control Panel, and then selecting **TPM Administration**.
-
-**Note**
-You must have administrative credentials on your computer to access this tool.
-
-
-
-In a TPM failure, a change in the BIOS, or certain Windows Updates, BitLocker will lock your computer and require you to contact your Help Desk to unlock it. You have to provide the name of your computer as well as your computer’s domain. Help Desk can give you a password file that can be used to unlock your computer.
-
-## Troubleshooting TPM Issues
-
-
-If a TPM failure, change in the BIOS, or certain Windows Updates occur, BitLocker will lock your computer and require you to contact your Help Desk to unlock it. You have to provide the name of your computer as well as your computer’s domain. The Help Desk can give you a password file that you can use to unlock your computer.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Helping End Users Manage BitLocker](helping-end-users-manage-bitlocker.md)
-
-[Using Your PIN or Password](using-your-pin-or-password.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/accessibility-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/accessibility-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0103e4791e..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/accessibility-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,106 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Accessibility for MBAM 2.0
-description: Accessibility for MBAM 2.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 9cd628f1-f594-43ab-8095-4663272940a9
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Accessibility for MBAM 2.0
-
-
-Microsoft is committed to making its products and services easier for everyone to use. This section provides information about features and services that make this product and its corresponding documentation more accessible for people with disabilities.
-
-## Access Any Command with a Few Keystrokes
-
-
-Access keys let you quickly use a command by pressing a few keys. You can get to most commands by using two keystrokes. To use an access key:
-
-1. Press ALT.
-
- The keyboard shortcuts are displayed over each feature that is available in the current view.
-
-2. Press the letter shown in the keyboard shortcut over the feature that you want to use.
-
-**Note**
-To cancel the action that you are taking and hide the keyboard shortcuts, press ALT.
-
-
-
-## Documentation in Alternative Formats
-
-
-If you have difficulty reading or handling printed materials, you can obtain the documentation for many Microsoft products in more accessible formats. You can view an index of accessible product documentation on the Microsoft Accessibility website. In addition, you can obtain additional Microsoft publications from Learning Ally (formerly Recording for the Blind & Dyslexic, Inc.). Learning Ally distributes these documents to registered, eligible members of their distribution service.
-
-For information about the availability of Microsoft product documentation and books from Microsoft Press, contact:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Learning Ally (formerly Recording for the Blind & Dyslexic, Inc.)
-
20 Roszel Road
-
Princeton, NJ 08540
-
-
-
-
Telephone number from within the United States:
-
(800) 221-4792
-
-
-
Telephone number from outside the United States and Canada:
Web addresses can change, so you might be unable to connect to the website or sites mentioned here.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Customer Service for People with Hearing Impairments
-
-
-If you are deaf or hard-of-hearing, complete access to Microsoft product and customer services is available through a text telephone (TTY/TDD) service:
-
-- For customer service, contact Microsoft Sales Information Center at (800) 892-5234 between 6:30 AM and 5:30 PM Pacific Time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.
-
-- For technical assistance in the United States, contact Microsoft Product Support Services at (800) 892-5234 between 6:00 AM and 6:00 PM Pacific Time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays. In Canada, dial (905) 568-9641 between 8:00 AM and 8:00 PM Eastern Time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.
-
-Microsoft Support Services are subject to the prices, terms, and conditions in place at the time the service is used.
-
-## For More Information
-
-
-For more information about how accessible technology for computers helps to improve the lives of people with disabilities, see the [Microsoft Accessibility website](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=8431).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Getting Started with MBAM 2.0](getting-started-with-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/administering-mbam-20-features-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/administering-mbam-20-features-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index fc6335b69f..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/administering-mbam-20-features-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,60 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Administering MBAM 2.0 Features
-description: Administering MBAM 2.0 Features
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 065e0704-069e-4372-9b86-0b57dd7638dd
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Administering MBAM 2.0 Features
-
-
-After completing all necessary planning and then deploying Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM), you can configure and use it to manage BitLocker encryption across the enterprise The information in this section describes post-installation day-to-day Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring feature operations tasks.
-
-## Manage MBAM Administrator Roles
-
-
-After MBAM Setup is complete for all server features, administrative users have to be granted access to them. As a best practice, administrators who will manage or use MBAM server features should be assigned to Active Directory Domain Services security groups, and then those groups should be added to the appropriate MBAM administrative local group.
-
-[How to Manage MBAM Administrator Roles](how-to-manage-mbam-administrator-roles-mbam-2.md)
-
-## Manage BitLocker Encryption Exemptions
-
-
-MBAM lets you grant encryption exemptions to specific users who do not need or want their drives encrypted. Computer exemption is typically used when a company has computers that do not have to be encrypted, such as computers that are used in development or testing, or older computers that do not support BitLocker. In some cases, local law may also require that certain computers are not encrypted.
-
-[How to Manage User BitLocker Encryption Exemptions](how-to-manage-user-bitlocker-encryption-exemptions-mbam-2.md)
-
-## Manage MBAM Client BitLocker Encryption Options by Using the Control Panel
-
-
-MBAM provides a custom control panel, called BitLocker Encryption Options, that will appear under **System and Security**. The MBAM control panel can be used to unlock encrypted fixed and removable drives, and also manage your PIN or password.
-
-**Note**
-This customized control panel does not replace the default Windows BitLocker control panel.
-
-
-
-[How to Manage MBAM Client BitLocker Encryption Options by Using the Control Panel](how-to-manage-mbam-client-bitlocker-encryption-options-by-using-the-control-panel-mbam-2.md)
-
-## Other Resources for Administering MBAM Features
-
-
-[Operations for MBAM 2.0](operations-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/administering-mbam-20-using-powershell-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/administering-mbam-20-using-powershell-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 87d58f9e89..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/administering-mbam-20-using-powershell-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,72 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Administering MBAM 2.0 Using PowerShell
-description: Administering MBAM 2.0 Using PowerShell
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: d785a8df-0a8c-4d70-abd2-93a762b4f3de
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Administering MBAM 2.0 Using PowerShell
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) provides the following listed set of Windows PowerShell cmdlets. Administrators can use these PowerShell cmdlets to perform various Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring server tasks from the command line rather than from the MBAM administration website.
-
-## How to Administer MBAM Using PowerShell
-
-
-Use the PowerShell cmdlets described here to administer MBAM.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Name
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Install-Mbam
-
Installs the MBAM features that provide advanced policy, encryption, key recovery, and compliance reporting.
-
-
-
Uninstall-Mbam
-
Removes the MBAM features that provide advanced policy, encryption, key recovery, and compliance reporting tools.
-
-
-
Get-MbamBitLockerRecoveryKey
-
Requests an MBAM recovery key that will enable users to unlock a computer or encrypted drive.
-
-
-
Get-MbamTPMOwnerPassword
-
Provides users with a TPM owner password that they can use to unlock a Trusted Platform Module (TPM) when the TPM has locked them out and will no longer accept their PIN.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for MBAM 2.0](operations-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/create-or-edit-the-sms-defmof-file.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/create-or-edit-the-sms-defmof-file.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 9d05e02689..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/create-or-edit-the-sms-defmof-file.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,381 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Create or Edit the Sms\_def.mof File
-description: Create or Edit the Sms\_def.mof File
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: d1747e43-484e-4031-a63b-6342fe588aa2
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/04/2017
----
-
-
-# Create or Edit the Sms\_def.mof File
-
-
-To enable the client computers to report BitLocker compliance details through the MBAM Configuration Manager reports, you have to create or edit the Sms\_def.mof file.
-
-If you are using System Center 2012 Configuration Manager, you must create the file.
-
-In Configuration Manager 2007, the file already exists, so you only have to edit it. **Do not overwrite the existing file**.
-
-In the following sections, complete the instructions that correspond to the version of Configuration Manager that you are using.
-
-**To create the Sms\_def.mof file for System Center 2012 Configuration Manager**
-
-1. On the Configuration Manager Server, browse to the location where you have to create the Sms\_def.mof file, for example, the Desktop.
-
-2. Create a text file called **Sms\_def.mof** and copy the following code to populate the file with the following Sms\_def.mof MBAM classes:
-
- ``` syntax
- //===================================================
- // Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring
- //===================================================
-
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2\\SMS")
- #pragma deleteclass("Win32_BitLockerEncryptionDetails", NOFAIL)
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE),
- SMS_Group_Name ("BitLocker Encryption Details"),
- SMS_Class_ID ("MICROSOFT|BITLOCKER_DETAILS|1.0")]
- class Win32_BitLockerEncryptionDetails : SMS_Class_Template
- {
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE), key ]
- String DeviceId;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- String BitlockerPersistentVolumeId;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- String MbamPersistentVolumeId;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- //UNKNOWN = 0, OS_Volume = 1, FIXED_VOLUME = 2, REMOVABLE_VOLUME = 3
- SInt32 MbamVolumeType;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- String DriveLetter;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- //VOLUME_NOT_COMPLIANT = 0, VOLUME_COMPLIANT = 1, NOT_APPLICABLE = 2
- SInt32 Compliant;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- SInt32 ReasonsForNonCompliance[];
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- SInt32 KeyProtectorTypes[];
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- SInt32 EncryptionMethod;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- SInt32 ConversionStatus;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- SInt32 ProtectionStatus;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- Boolean IsAutoUnlockEnabled;
- };
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2\\SMS")
-
- #pragma deleteclass("Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy", NOFAIL)
- [ SMS_Report(TRUE),
- SMS_Group_Name("BitLocker Policy"),
- SMS_Class_ID("MICROSOFT|MBAM_POLICY|1.0")]
-
- Class Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy: SMS_Class_Template
- {
- [SMS_Report(TRUE),key]
- string KeyName;
-
- //General encryption requirements
- [SMS_Report(TRUE)]
- UInt32 OsDriveEncryption;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 FixedDataDriveEncryption;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 EncryptionMethod;
-
- //Required protectors properties
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 OsDriveProtector;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 FixedDataDriveAutoUnlock;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 FixedDataDrivePassphrase;
-
- //MBAM agent fields
- //Policy not enforced (0), enforced (1), pending user exemption request (2) or exempted user (3)
- [SMS_Report(TRUE)]
- Uint32 MBAMPolicyEnforced;
- [SMS_Report(TRUE)]
- string LastConsoleUser;
- //Date of the exemption request of the last logged on user,
- //or the first date the exemption was granted to him on this machine.
- [SMS_Report(TRUE)]
- datetime UserExemptionDate;
- //Errors encountered by MBAM agent.
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 MBAMMachineError;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- string EncodedComputerName;
- };
-
- //Read Win32_OperatingSystem.SKU WMI property in a new class - because SKU is not available before Vista.
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2\\SMS")
- #pragma deleteclass("CCM_OperatingSystemExtended", NOFAIL)
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE),
- SMS_Group_Name ("Operating System Ex"),
- SMS_Class_ID ("MICROSOFT|OPERATING_SYSTEM_EXT|1.0") ]
- class CCM_OperatingSystemExtended : SMS_Class_Template
- {
- [SMS_Report (TRUE), key ]
- string Name;
- [SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- uint32 SKU;
- };
-
- //Read Win32_ComputerSystem.PCSystemType WMI property in a new class - because PCSystemType is not available before Vista.
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2\\SMS")
- #pragma deleteclass("CCM_ComputerSystemExtended", NOFAIL)
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE),
- SMS_Group_Name ("Computer System Ex"),
- SMS_Class_ID ("MICROSOFT|COMPUTER_SYSTEM_EXT|1.0") ]
- class CCM_ComputerSystemExtended : SMS_Class_Template
- {
- [SMS_Report (TRUE), key ]
- string Name;
- [SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- uint16 PCSystemType;
- };
- //=======================================================
- // Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring end
- //=======================================================
- ```
-
-3. Import the **Sms\_def.mof** file by doing the following:
-
- 1. Open the **System Center 2012 Configuration Manager console** and select the **Administration** tab.
-
- 2. On the **Administration** tab, select **Client Settings**.
-
- 3. Right-click **Default Client Settings**, and then select **Properties**.
-
- 4. In the **Default Settings** window, select **Hardware Inventory**.
-
- 5. Click **Set Classes**, and then click **Import**.
-
- 6. In the browser that opens, select your **.mof** file, and then click **Open**. The **Import Summary** window opens.
-
- 7. In the **Import Summary** window, ensure that the option to import both hardware inventory classes and class settings is selected, and then click **Import**.
-
- 8. In both the **Hardware Inventory Classes** window and the **Default Settings** window, click **OK**.
-
-4. Enable the **Win32\_Tpm** class as follows:
-
- 1. Open the **System Center 2012 Configuration Manager console** and select the **Administration** tab.
-
- 2. On the **Administration** tab, select **Client Settings**.
-
- 3. Right-click **Default Client Settings**, and then select **Properties**.
-
- 4. In the **Default Settings** window, select **Hardware Inventory**.
-
- 5. Click **Set Classes**.
-
- 6. In the main window, scroll down, and then select the **TPM (Win32\_Tpm)** class.
-
- 7. Under **TPM**, ensure that the **SpecVersion** property is selected.
-
- 8. In both the **Hardware Inventory Classes** window and the **Default Settings** window, click **OK**.
-
-**To edit the sms\_def.mof file for Configuration Manager 2007**
-
-1. On the Configuration Manager Server, browse to the location of the **sms\_def.mof** file:
-
- <CMInstallLocation>\\Inboxes\\clifiles.src\\hinv\\
-
- On a default installation, the installation location is %systemdrive% \\Program Files (x86)\\Microsoft Configuration Manager.
-
-2. Copy the following code, and then append it to **Sms\_def.mof** file to add the following required MBAM classes to the file:
-
- ``` syntax
- //===================================================
- // Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring
- //===================================================
-
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2\\SMS")
- #pragma deleteclass("Win32_BitLockerEncryptionDetails", NOFAIL)
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE),
- SMS_Group_Name ("BitLocker Encryption Details"),
- SMS_Class_ID ("MICROSOFT|BITLOCKER_DETAILS|1.0")]
- class Win32_BitLockerEncryptionDetails : SMS_Class_Template
- {
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE), key ]
- String DeviceId;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- String BitlockerPersistentVolumeId;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- String MbamPersistentVolumeId;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- //UNKNOWN = 0, OS_Volume = 1, FIXED_VOLUME = 2, REMOVABLE_VOLUME = 3
- SInt32 MbamVolumeType;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- String DriveLetter;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- //VOLUME_NOT_COMPLIANT = 0, VOLUME_COMPLIANT = 1, NOT_APPLICABLE = 2
- SInt32 Compliant;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- SInt32 ReasonsForNonCompliance[];
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- SInt32 KeyProtectorTypes[];
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- SInt32 EncryptionMethod;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- SInt32 ConversionStatus;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- SInt32 ProtectionStatus;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- Boolean IsAutoUnlockEnabled;
- };
-
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2\\SMS")
- #pragma deleteclass("Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy", NOFAIL)
- [ SMS_Report(TRUE),
- SMS_Group_Name("BitLocker Policy"),
- SMS_Class_ID("MICROSOFT|MBAM_POLICY|1.0"),
- SMS_Context_1("__ProviderArchitecture=32|uint32"),
- SMS_Context_2("__RequiredArchitecture=true|boolean")]
- Class Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy: SMS_Class_Template
- {
- [SMS_Report(TRUE),key]
- string KeyName;
-
- //General encryption requirements
- [SMS_Report(TRUE)]
- UInt32 OsDriveEncryption;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 FixedDataDriveEncryption;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 EncryptionMethod;
-
- //Required protectors properties
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 OsDriveProtector;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 FixedDataDriveAutoUnlock;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 FixedDataDrivePassphrase;
-
- //MBAM Agent fields
- //Policy not enforced (0), enforced (1), pending user exemption request (2) or exempted user (3)
- [SMS_Report(TRUE)]
- Uint32 MBAMPolicyEnforced;
- [SMS_Report(TRUE)]
- string LastConsoleUser;
- //Date of the exemption request of the last logged on user,
- //or the first date the exemption was granted to him on this machine.
- [SMS_Report(TRUE)]
- datetime UserExemptionDate;
- //Errors encountered by MBAM agent.
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 MBAMMachineError;
- // Encoded Computer Name
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- string EncodedComputerName;
- };
-
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2\\SMS")
- #pragma deleteclass("Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy_64", NOFAIL)
- [ SMS_Report(TRUE),
- SMS_Group_Name("BitLocker Policy"),
- SMS_Class_ID("MICROSOFT|MBAM_POLICY|1.0"),
- SMS_Context_1("__ProviderArchitecture=64|uint32"),
- SMS_Context_2("__RequiredArchitecture=true|boolean")]
- Class Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy_64: SMS_Class_Template
- {
- [SMS_Report(TRUE),key]
- string KeyName;
-
- //General encryption requirements
- [SMS_Report(TRUE)]
- UInt32 OsDriveEncryption;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 FixedDataDriveEncryption;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 EncryptionMethod;
-
- //Required protectors properties
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 OsDriveProtector;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 FixedDataDriveAutoUnlock;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 FixedDataDrivePassphrase;
-
- //MBAM Agent fields
- //Policy not enforced (0), enforced (1), pending user exemption request (2) or exempted user (3)
- [SMS_Report(TRUE)]
- Uint32 MBAMPolicyEnforced;
- [SMS_Report(TRUE)]
- string LastConsoleUser;
- //Date of the exemption request of the last logged on user,
- //or the first date the exemption was granted to him on this machine.
- [SMS_Report(TRUE)]
- datetime UserExemptionDate;
- //Errors encountered by MBAM agent.
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 MBAMMachineError;
- // Encoded Computer Name
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- string EncodedComputerName;
- };
-
- //Read Win32_OperatingSystem.SKU WMI property in a new class - because SKU is not available before Vista.
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2\\SMS")
- #pragma deleteclass("CCM_OperatingSystemExtended", NOFAIL)
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE),
- SMS_Group_Name ("Operating System Ex"),
- SMS_Class_ID ("MICROSOFT|OPERATING_SYSTEM_EXT|1.0") ]
- class CCM_OperatingSystemExtended : SMS_Class_Template
- {
- [SMS_Report (TRUE), key ]
- string Name;
- [SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- uint32 SKU;
- };
-
- //Read Win32_ComputerSystem.PCSystemType WMI property in a new class - because PCSystemType is not available before Vista.
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2\\SMS")
- #pragma deleteclass("CCM_ComputerSystemExtended", NOFAIL)
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE),
- SMS_Group_Name ("Computer System Ex"),
- SMS_Class_ID ("MICROSOFT|COMPUTER_SYSTEM_EXT|1.0") ]
- class CCM_ComputerSystemExtended : SMS_Class_Template
- {
- [SMS_Report (TRUE), key ]
- string Name;
- [SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- uint16 PCSystemType;
- };
-
- //=======================================================
- // Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring end
- //=======================================================
- ```
-
-3. Modify the **Win32\_Tpm** class as follows:
-
- - Set **SMS\_REPORT** to **TRUE** in the class attributes.
-
- - Set **SMS\_REPORT** to **TRUE** in the **SpecVersion** property attribute.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[How to Create or Edit the mof Files](how-to-create-or-edit-the-mof-files.md)
-
-[Deploying MBAM with Configuration Manager](deploying-mbam-with-configuration-manager-mbam2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/deploying-mbam-20-group-policy-objects-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/deploying-mbam-20-group-policy-objects-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index da944127c7..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/deploying-mbam-20-group-policy-objects-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Objects
-description: Deploying MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Objects
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: f17f3897-73ab-431b-a6ec-5a6cff9f279a
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Objects
-
-
-To successfully deploy Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM), you first have to determine the Group Policies that you will use in your implementation of Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring. See [Planning for MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Requirements](planning-for-mbam-20-group-policy-requirements-mbam-2.md) for more information on the different policies that are available. When you have determined the policies that you are going to use, you then must create and deploy one or more Group Policy Objects (GPO) that include the policy settings for MBAM by using the MBAM 2.0 Group Policy template.
-
-## Install the MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Template
-
-
-In addition to the server-related Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring features, the server setup application includes a MBAM Group Policy template. This template can be installed on any computer able to run the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC) or Advanced Group Policy Management (AGPM).
-
-[How to Install the MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Template](how-to-install-the-mbam-20-group-policy-template-mbam-2.md)
-
-## Deploy MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Settings
-
-
-After you create the necessary GPOs, you must deploy the MBAM Group Policy settings to your organization’s client computers.
-
-[How to Edit MBAM 2.0 GPO Settings](how-to-edit-mbam-20-gpo-settings-mbam-2.md)
-
-## Display the MBAM Control Panel in Windows
-
-
-Because MBAM offers a customized MBAM control panel that can replace the default Windows BitLocker control panel, you can also choose to hide the default BitLocker Control Panel from end users by using Group Policy.
-
-[How to Hide Default BitLocker Encryption in the Windows Control Panel](how-to-hide-default-bitlocker-encryption-in-the-windows-control-panel-mbam-2.md)
-
-## Other Resources for Deploying MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Objects
-
-
-[Deploying MBAM 2.0](deploying-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/deploying-mbam-20-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/deploying-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6f40b9722f..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/deploying-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying MBAM 2.0
-description: Deploying MBAM 2.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 4b0eaf10-81b4-427e-9d43-eb833de935a3
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying MBAM 2.0
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) supports a number of different deployment configurations. This section includes information that you should consider about the deployment of MBAM and step-by-step procedures to help you successfully perform the tasks that you must complete at different stages of your deployment.
-
-You can deploy MBAM either in a Stand-alone topology, or with a topology that integrates MBAM with Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2007 or Microsoft System Center 2012 Configuration Manager. For information about installing MBAM with the Configuration Manager integrated topology, see [Using MBAM with Configuration Manager](using-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md).
-
-## Deployment Information
-
-
-- [Deploying the MBAM 2.0 Server Infrastructure](deploying-the-mbam-20-server-infrastructure-mbam-2.md)
-
- This section describes the different MBAM deployment topology options and how to use MBAM Setup to deploy MBAM Server features.
-
-- [Deploying MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Objects](deploying-mbam-20-group-policy-objects-mbam-2.md)
-
- This section describes how to create and deploy MBAM Group Policy Objects that are required for managing MBAM Clients and BitLocker encryption policies throughout the enterprise.
-
-- [Deploying the MBAM 2.0 Client](deploying-the-mbam-20-client-mbam-2.md)
-
- This section describes how to use the MBAM Client Installer files to deploy the MBAM Client software.
-
-- [MBAM 2.0 Deployment Checklist](mbam-20-deployment-checklist-mbam-2.md)
-
- This section provides a deployment checklist that can be used to assist in MBAM Server feature and MBAM Client deployment.
-
-- [Upgrading from Previous Versions of MBAM](upgrading-from-previous-versions-of-mbam.md)
-
- This section provides instructions for upgrading MBAM from previous versions.
-
-## Other Resources for Deploying MBAM
-
-
-[Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 2 Administrator's Guide](index.md)
-
-[Getting Started with MBAM 2.0](getting-started-with-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-[Planning for MBAM 2.0](planning-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-[Operations for MBAM 2.0](operations-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-[Troubleshooting MBAM 2.0](troubleshooting-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/deploying-mbam-with-configuration-manager-mbam2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/deploying-mbam-with-configuration-manager-mbam2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ae87ad3b57..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/deploying-mbam-with-configuration-manager-mbam2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying MBAM with Configuration Manager
-description: Deploying MBAM with Configuration Manager
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 89d03e29-457a-471d-b893-e0b74a83ec50
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying MBAM with Configuration Manager
-
-
-The following procedures describe how to deploy Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) with Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2007 or Microsoft System Center 2012 Configuration Manager by usingthe recommended configuration, which is described in [Getting Started - Using MBAM with Configuration Manager](getting-started---using-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md). The recommended configuration is to install the Administration and Monitoring features on one or more Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring servers, and install Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2007 or Microsoft System Center 2012 Configuration Manager on a separate server.
-
-Before you start the installation, ensure that you have met the prerequisites and hardware and software requirements for installing MBAM with Configuration Manager by reviewing [Planning to Deploy MBAM with Configuration Manager](planning-to-deploy-mbam-with-configuration-manager-2.md).
-
-If you ever have to reinstall MBAM with the Configuration Manager topology, you will need to remove certain Configuration Manager objects first. Read the [Knowledge Base article](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=286306) for more information.
-
-The steps to install MBAM with Configuration Manager are grouped into the following categories. Complete the steps for each category to complete the installation.
-
-## How to Create or Edit the mof Files
-
-
-To enable the client computers to report BitLocker compliance details through the MBAM Configuration Manager reports, you have to edit the **Configuration.mof** file, and either edit or create the Sms\_def.mof file, depending on which version of Configuration Manager you are using.
-
-[How to Create or Edit the mof Files](how-to-create-or-edit-the-mof-files.md)
-
-## How to Install MBAM with Configuration Manager
-
-
-This section provides steps about how to install the following: MBAM on the Configuration Manager Server; the Recovery and Audit Databases on the Database Server; and the Administration and Monitoring Server features on the Administration and Monitoring Server.
-
-[How to Install MBAM with Configuration Manager](how-to-install-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md)
-
-## How to Validate the MBAM Server Feature Installation on the Configuration Manager Server
-
-
-When the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring installation is complete, validate that the installation has successfully set up all the necessary MBAM features required for the Configuration Manager Server.
-
-[How to Validate the MBAM Installation with Configuration Manager](how-to-validate-the-mbam-installation-with-configuration-manager.md)
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Using MBAM with Configuration Manager](using-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/deploying-the-mbam-20-client-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/deploying-the-mbam-20-client-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 66a8831e05..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/deploying-the-mbam-20-client-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,57 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying the MBAM 2.0 Client
-description: Deploying the MBAM 2.0 Client
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 3dd584fe-2a54-40f0-9bab-13ea74040b01
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying the MBAM 2.0 Client
-
-
-The Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) Client enables administrators to enforce and monitor BitLocker drive encryption on computers in the enterprise. The BitLocker client can be integrated into an organization by deploying the client through an electronic software distribution system, such as Active Directory Domain Services, or by directly encrypting the client computers as part of the initial imaging process.
-
-Depending on when you deploy the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring Client, you can enable BitLocker encryption on a computer in your organization either before the end user receives the computer or afterwards by configuring Group Policy and deploying the MBAM Client software by using an enterprise software deployment system.
-
-## Deploy the MBAM Client to Desktop or Laptop Computers
-
-
-After configuring Group Policy, you can use an enterprise software deployment system product like Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012 or Active Directory Domain Services to deploy the MBAM Client installation Windows Installer files to target computers. You can deploy the client by using either the 32-bit or 64-bit MbamClientSetup.exe files, or the 32-bit or 64-bit MBAMClient.msi files, which are provided with the MBAM software. For more information about deploying MBAM Group Policy Objects, see [Deploying MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Objects](deploying-mbam-20-group-policy-objects-mbam-2.md).
-
-[How to Deploy the MBAM Client to Desktop or Laptop Computers](how-to-deploy-the-mbam-client-to-desktop-or-laptop-computers-mbam-2.md)
-
-## Deploy the MBAM Client as Part of a Windows Deployment
-
-
-In organizations where computers are received and configured centrally, you can install the MBAM Client to manage BitLocker encryption on each computer before any user data is written to it. The benefit of this process is that every computer is then BitLocker encryption compliant. This method does not rely on user action because the administrator has already encrypted the computer. A key assumption for this scenario is that the policy of the organization installs a corporate Windows image before the computer is delivered to the user. If the Group Policy has been configured to require a PIN, users are prompted to set a PIN after they receive the Group Policy.
-
-[How to Deploy the MBAM Client as Part of a Windows Deployment](how-to-deploy-the-mbam-client-as-part-of-a-windows-deployment-mbam-2.md)
-
-## How to Use a Command Line to Install the MBAM Client
-
-
-This section explains how to install the MBAM Client by using a command line.
-
-[How to Use a Command Line to Install the MBAM Client](how-to-use-a-command-line-to-install-the-mbam-client.md)
-
-## Other Resources for Deploying the MBAM Client
-
-
-[Deploying MBAM 2.0](deploying-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)[Planning for MBAM 2.0 Client Deployment](planning-for-mbam-20-client-deployment-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/deploying-the-mbam-20-server-infrastructure-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/deploying-the-mbam-20-server-infrastructure-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ba8831debe..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/deploying-the-mbam-20-server-infrastructure-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,76 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying the MBAM 2.0 Server Infrastructure
-description: Deploying the MBAM 2.0 Server Infrastructure
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 52e68d94-e2b4-4b06-ae55-f900ea6cc59f
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Deploying the MBAM 2.0 Server Infrastructure
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) Server features for the Stand-alone topology can be installed in different configurations on two or more servers in a production environment. The recommended configuration is two servers for a production environment, depending on your scalability requirements. Use a single server for an MBAM installation only in test environments. For more information about planning for the MBAM Server feature deployment, see [Planning for MBAM 2.0 Server Deployment](planning-for-mbam-20-server-deployment-mbam-2.md).
-
-The following diagram shows an example of how you can configure the recommended two-server MBAM deployment. This configuration supports up to 200,000 MBAM clients in a production environment. The server features and databases in the architecture image are described in the following section and are listed under the computer or server where we recommend that you install them.
-
-
-
-## Administration and Monitoring Server
-
-
-The following features are installed on this server:
-
-- **Administration and Monitoring Server**. The Administration and Monitoring Server feature is installed on a Windows server and consists of the Help Desk website and the monitoring web services.
-
-- **Self-Service Portal**. The Self-Service Portal is installed on a Windows server. The Self-Service Portal enables end users on client computers to independently log on to a website, where they can obtain a recovery key to recover a locked BitLocker volume.
-
-## Database Server
-
-
-The following features are installed on this server:
-
-- **Recovery Database**. The Recovery Database is installed on a Windows server and a supported instance of Microsoft SQL Server. This database stores recovery data that is collected from MBAM client computers.
-
-- **Compliance and Audit Database**. The Compliance and Audit Database is installed on a Windows server and a supported instance of SQL Server. This database stores compliance data for MBAM client computers. This data is used primarily for reports that SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) hosts.
-
-- **Compliance and Audit Reports**. The Compliance and Audit Reports are installed on a Windows server and a supported instance of SQL Server that has the SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) feature installed. These reports provide MBAM reports that you can access from the Help Desk website or directly from the SSRS server.
-
-## Management Workstation
-
-
-The following feature is installed on the Management Workstation, which can be a Windows server or a client computer.
-
-- **Policy Template**. The Policy Template consists of Group Policies that define MBAM implementation settings for BitLocker drive encryption. You can install the Policy template on any server or workstation, but it is commonly installed on a management workstation, which is a supported Windows server or client computer. The workstation does not have to be a dedicated computer.
-
-## MBAM Client
-
-
-The MBAM Client is installed on a Windows computer and has the following characteristics:
-
-- Uses Group Policy to enforce the BitLocker drive encryption of client computers in the enterprise.
-
-- Collects the recovery key for the three BitLocker data drive types: operating system drives, fixed data drives, and removable data (USB) drives.
-
-- Collects compliance data for the computer and passes the data to the reporting system.
-
-## Other Resources for Deploying MBAM 2.0 Server Features
-
-
-[Deploying MBAM 2.0](deploying-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/edit-the-configurationmof-file.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/edit-the-configurationmof-file.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d1b6c423a7..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/edit-the-configurationmof-file.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,389 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Edit the Configuration.mof File
-description: Edit the Configuration.mof File
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 23e50ec9-4083-4b12-ad96-626cf30960bb
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/03/2017
----
-
-
-# Edit the Configuration.mof File
-
-
-To enable the client computers to report BitLocker compliance details through the MBAM Configuration Manager reports, you have to edit the **Configuration.mof** file, whether you are using Configuration Manager 2007 or System Center 2012 Configuration Manager. Complete the following instructions for the version of Configuration Manager that you are using.
-
-**Important**
-If you are installing Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) 2.0 Service Pack 1 (SP1), either by doing a new installation or by upgrading from a previous version, see the appropriate item in [About MBAM 2.0 SP1](about-mbam-20-sp1.md) as described in the following bullets:
-
-- For a new MBAM 2.0 SP1 installation, see **Required files for installing MBAM 2.0 SP1 if you are using MBAM with Configuration Manager**.
-
-- For an upgrade to MBAM 2.0 SP1, see **Update the configuration.mof file if you upgrade to MBAM 2.0 SP1 and you are using MBAM with Configuration Manager 2007**.
-
-
-
-**To create the configuration.mof file if you are using MBAM 2.0 SP1 with Configuration Manager**
-
-- See the “Important” note about MBAM 2.0 SP1 earlier in this topic for the appropriate instructions to follow in [About MBAM 2.0 SP1](about-mbam-20-sp1.md).
-
-**To edit the Configuration.mof file for System Center 2012 Configuration Manager**
-
-1. On the Configuration Manager Server, browse to the location of the **Configuration.mof** file:
-
- <CMInstallLocation>\\Inboxes\\clifiles.src\\hinv\\
-
- On a default installation, the installation location is %systemdrive%\\Program Files \\Microsoft Configuration Manager.
-
-2. Edit the **Configuration.mof** file to append the following MBAM classes:
-
- ``` syntax
- //===================================================
- // Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring
- //===================================================
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2")
- #pragma deleteclass("Win32_BitLockerEncryptionDetails", NOFAIL)
- [Union, ViewSources{"select DeviceId, BitlockerPersistentVolumeId, BitLockerManagementPersistentVolumeId, BitLockerManagementVolumeType, DriveLetter, Compliant, ReasonsForNonCompliance, KeyProtectorTypes, EncryptionMethod, ConversionStatus, ProtectionStatus, IsAutoUnlockEnabled from Mbam_Volume"}, ViewSpaces{"\\\\.\\root\\microsoft\\mbam"}, dynamic, Provider("MS_VIEW_INSTANCE_PROVIDER")]
- class Win32_BitLockerEncryptionDetails
- {
- [PropertySources{"DeviceId"},key]
- String DeviceId;
- [PropertySources{"BitlockerPersistentVolumeId"}]
- String BitlockerPersistentVolumeId;
- [PropertySources{"BitLockerManagementPersistentVolumeId"}]
- String MbamPersistentVolumeId;
- //UNKNOWN = 0, OS_Volume = 1, FIXED_VOLUME = 2, REMOVABLE_VOLUME = 3
- [PropertySources{"BitLockerManagementVolumeType"}]
- SInt32 MbamVolumeType;
- [PropertySources{"DriveLetter"}]
- String DriveLetter;
- //VOLUME_NOT_COMPLIANT = 0, VOLUME_COMPLIANT = 1, NOT_APPLICABLE = 2
- [PropertySources{"Compliant"}]
- SInt32 Compliant;
- [PropertySources{"ReasonsForNonCompliance"}]
- SInt32 ReasonsForNonCompliance[];
- [PropertySources{"KeyProtectorTypes"}]
- SInt32 KeyProtectorTypes[];
- [PropertySources{"EncryptionMethod"}]
- SInt32 EncryptionMethod;
- [PropertySources{"ConversionStatus"}]
- SInt32 ConversionStatus;
- [PropertySources{"ProtectionStatus"}]
- SInt32 ProtectionStatus;
- [PropertySources{"IsAutoUnlockEnabled"}]
- Boolean IsAutoUnlockEnabled;
- };
-
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2")
- #pragma deleteclass("Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy", NOFAIL)
- [DYNPROPS]
- Class Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy
- {
- [key]
- string KeyName;
-
- //General encryption requirements
- UInt32 OsDriveEncryption;
- UInt32 FixedDataDriveEncryption;
- UInt32 EncryptionMethod;
-
- //Required protectors properties
- UInt32 OsDriveProtector;
- UInt32 FixedDataDriveAutoUnlock;
- UInt32 FixedDataDrivePassphrase;
-
- //MBAM agent fields
- Uint32 MBAMPolicyEnforced;
- string LastConsoleUser;
- datetime UserExemptionDate;
- UInt32 MBAMMachineError;
-
- // Encoded computer name
- string EncodedComputerName;
- };
-
- [DYNPROPS]
- Instance of Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy
- {
- KeyName="BitLocker policy";
-
- //General encryption requirements
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies\\Microsoft\\FVE\\MDOPBitLockerManagement|ShouldEncryptOsDrive"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- OsDriveEncryption;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies\\Microsoft\\FVE\\MDOPBitLockerManagement|ShouldEncryptFixedDataDrive"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- FixedDataDriveEncryption;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies\\Microsoft\\FVE|EncryptionMethod"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- EncryptionMethod;
-
- //Required protectors properties
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|OSVolumeProtectorPolicy"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- OsDriveProtector;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies\\Microsoft\\FVE\\MDOPBitLockerManagement|AutoUnlockFixedDataDrive"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- FixedDataDriveAutoUnlock;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies\\Microsoft\\FVE|FDVPassphrase"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- FixedDataDrivePassphrase;
-
- //MBAM agent fields
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|MBAMPolicyEnforced"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- MBAMPolicyEnforced;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|LastConsoleUser"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- LastConsoleUser;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|UserExemptionDate"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- UserExemptionDate; //Registry value should be string in the format of yyyymmddHHMMSS.mmmmmmsUUU
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|MBAMMachineError"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- MBAMMachineError;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|EncodedComputerName"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- EncodedComputerName;
- };
-
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2")
- #pragma deleteclass("CCM_OperatingSystemExtended", NOFAIL)
- [Union, ViewSources{"select Name,OperatingSystemSKU from Win32_OperatingSystem"}, ViewSpaces{"\\\\.\\root\\cimv2"},
- dynamic,Provider("MS_VIEW_INSTANCE_PROVIDER")]
- class CCM_OperatingSystemExtended
- {
- [PropertySources{"Name"},key]
- string Name;
- [PropertySources{"OperatingSystemSKU"}]
- uint32 SKU;
- };
-
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2")
- #pragma deleteclass("CCM_ComputerSystemExtended", NOFAIL)
- [Union, ViewSources{"select Name,PCSystemType from Win32_ComputerSystem"}, ViewSpaces{"\\\\.\\root\\cimv2"},
- dynamic,Provider("MS_VIEW_INSTANCE_PROVIDER")]
- class CCM_ComputerSystemExtended
- {
- [PropertySources{"Name"},key]
- string Name;
- [PropertySources{"PCSystemType"}]
- uint16 PCSystemType;
- };
-
- //=======================================================
- // Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring end
- //=======================================================
- ```
-
-**To edit the Configuration.mof file for Configuration Manager 2007**
-
-1. On the Configuration Manager Server, browse to the location of the **Configuration.mof** file:
-
- <CMInstallLocation>\\Inboxes\\clifiles.src\\hinv\\
-
- On a default installation, the installation location is %systemdrive%\\Program Files (x86)\\Microsoft Configuration Manager.
-
-2. Edit the **Configuration.mof** file to append the following MBAM classes:
-
- ``` syntax
- //===================================================
- // Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring
- //===================================================
-
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2")
- #pragma deleteclass("Win32_BitLockerEncryptionDetails", NOFAIL)
- [Union, ViewSources{"select DeviceId, BitlockerPersistentVolumeId, BitLockerManagementPersistentVolumeId, BitLockerManagementVolumeType, DriveLetter, Compliant, ReasonsForNonCompliance, KeyProtectorTypes, EncryptionMethod, ConversionStatus, ProtectionStatus, IsAutoUnlockEnabled from Mbam_Volume"}, ViewSpaces{"\\\\.\\root\\microsoft\\mbam"}, dynamic, Provider("MS_VIEW_INSTANCE_PROVIDER")]
- class Win32_BitLockerEncryptionDetails
- {
- [PropertySources{"DeviceId"},key]
- String DeviceId;
- [PropertySources{"BitlockerPersistentVolumeId"}]
- String BitlockerPersistentVolumeId;
- [PropertySources{"BitLockerManagementPersistentVolumeId"}]
- String MbamPersistentVolumeId;
- //UNKNOWN = 0, OS_Volume = 1, FIXED_VOLUME = 2, REMOVABLE_VOLUME = 3
- [PropertySources{"BitLockerManagementVolumeType"}]
- SInt32 MbamVolumeType;
- [PropertySources{"DriveLetter"}]
- String DriveLetter;
- //VOLUME_NOT_COMPLIANT = 0, VOLUME_COMPLIANT = 1, NOT_APPLICABLE = 2
- [PropertySources{"Compliant"}]
- SInt32 Compliant;
- [PropertySources{"ReasonsForNonCompliance"}]
- SInt32 ReasonsForNonCompliance[];
- [PropertySources{"KeyProtectorTypes"}]
- SInt32 KeyProtectorTypes[];
- [PropertySources{"EncryptionMethod"}]
- SInt32 EncryptionMethod;
- [PropertySources{"ConversionStatus"}]
- SInt32 ConversionStatus;
- [PropertySources{"ProtectionStatus"}]
- SInt32 ProtectionStatus;
- [PropertySources{"IsAutoUnlockEnabled"}]
- Boolean IsAutoUnlockEnabled;
- };
-
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2")
- #pragma deleteclass("Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy", NOFAIL)
- [DYNPROPS]
- Class Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy
- {
- [key]
- string KeyName;
-
- //General encryption requirements
- UInt32 OsDriveEncryption;
- UInt32 FixedDataDriveEncryption;
- UInt32 EncryptionMethod;
-
- //Required protectors properties
- UInt32 OsDriveProtector;
- UInt32 FixedDataDriveAutoUnlock;
- UInt32 FixedDataDrivePassphrase;
-
- //MBAM agent fields
- Uint32 MBAMPolicyEnforced;
- string LastConsoleUser;
- datetime UserExemptionDate;
- UInt32 MBAMMachineError;
-
- // Encoded computer name
- string EncodedComputerName;
- };
-
- [DYNPROPS]
- Instance of Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy
- {
- KeyName="BitLocker policy";
-
- //General encryption requirements
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies\\Microsoft\\FVE\\MDOPBitLockerManagement|ShouldEncryptOsDrive"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- OsDriveEncryption;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies\\Microsoft\\FVE\\MDOPBitLockerManagement|ShouldEncryptFixedDataDrive"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- FixedDataDriveEncryption;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies\\Microsoft\\FVE|EncryptionMethod"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- EncryptionMethod;
-
- //Required protectors properties
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|OSVolumeProtectorPolicy"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- OsDriveProtector;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies\\Microsoft\\FVE\\MDOPBitLockerManagement|AutoUnlockFixedDataDrive"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- FixedDataDriveAutoUnlock;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies\\Microsoft\\FVE|FDVPassphrase"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- FixedDataDrivePassphrase;
-
- //MBAM agent fields
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|MBAMPolicyEnforced"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- MBAMPolicyEnforced;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|LastConsoleUser"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- LastConsoleUser;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|UserExemptionDate"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- UserExemptionDate; //Registry value should be string in the format of yyyymmddHHMMSS.mmmmmmsUUU
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|MBAMMachineError"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- MBAMMachineError;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|EncodedComputerName"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- EncodedComputerName;
- };
-
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2")
- #pragma deleteclass("Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy_64", NOFAIL)
- [DYNPROPS]
- Class Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy_64
- {
- [key]
- string KeyName;
-
- //General encryption requirements
- UInt32 OsDriveEncryption;
- UInt32 FixedDataDriveEncryption;
- UInt32 EncryptionMethod;
-
- //Required protectors properties
- UInt32 OsDriveProtector;
- UInt32 FixedDataDriveAutoUnlock;
- UInt32 FixedDataDrivePassphrase;
-
- //MBAM agent fields
- Uint32 MBAMPolicyEnforced;
- string LastConsoleUser;
- datetime UserExemptionDate; //Registry value should be string in the format of yyyymmddHHMMSS.mmmmmmsUUU
- UInt32 MBAMMachineError;
-
- // Encoded computer name
- string EncodedComputerName;
- };
-
- [DYNPROPS]
- Instance of Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy_64
- {
- KeyName="BitLocker policy";
-
- //General encryption requirements
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies\\Microsoft\\FVE\\MDOPBitLockerManagement|ShouldEncryptOsDrive"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- OsDriveEncryption;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies\\Microsoft\\FVE\\MDOPBitLockerManagement|ShouldEncryptFixedDataDrive"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- FixedDataDriveEncryption;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies\\Microsoft\\FVE|EncryptionMethod"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- EncryptionMethod;
-
- //Required protectors properties
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|OSVolumeProtectorPolicy"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- OsDriveProtector;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies\\Microsoft\\FVE\\MDOPBitLockerManagement|AutoUnlockFixedDataDrive"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- FixedDataDriveAutoUnlock;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Policies\\Microsoft\\FVE|FDVPassphrase"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- FixedDataDrivePassphrase;
-
- //MBAM agent fields
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|MBAMPolicyEnforced"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- MBAMPolicyEnforced;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|LastConsoleUser"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- LastConsoleUser;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|UserExemptionDate"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- UserExemptionDate; //Registry value should be string in the format of yyyymmddHHMMSS.mmmmmmsUUU
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|MBAMMachineError"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- MBAMMachineError;
- [PropertyContext("Local|HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM|EncodedComputerName"),Dynamic,Provider("RegPropProv")]
- EncodedComputerName;
- };
-
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2")
- #pragma deleteclass("CCM_OperatingSystemExtended", NOFAIL)
- [Union, ViewSources{"select Name,OperatingSystemSKU from Win32_OperatingSystem"}, ViewSpaces{"\\\\.\\root\\cimv2"},
- dynamic,Provider("MS_VIEW_INSTANCE_PROVIDER")]
- class CCM_OperatingSystemExtended
- {
- [PropertySources{"Name"},key]
- string Name;
- [PropertySources{"OperatingSystemSKU"}]
- uint32 SKU;
- };
-
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2")
- #pragma deleteclass("CCM_ComputerSystemExtended", NOFAIL)
- [Union, ViewSources{"select Name,PCSystemType from Win32_ComputerSystem"}, ViewSpaces{"\\\\.\\root\\cimv2"},
- dynamic,Provider("MS_VIEW_INSTANCE_PROVIDER")]
- class CCM_ComputerSystemExtended
- {
- [PropertySources{"Name"},key]
- string Name;
- [PropertySources{"PCSystemType"}]
- uint16 PCSystemType;
- };
-
- //=======================================================
- // Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring end
- //=======================================================
-
- ```
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[How to Create or Edit the mof Files](how-to-create-or-edit-the-mof-files.md)
-
-[Deploying MBAM with Configuration Manager](deploying-mbam-with-configuration-manager-mbam2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/evaluating-mbam-20-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/evaluating-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 9381657ebb..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/evaluating-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,178 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Evaluating MBAM 2.0
-description: Evaluating MBAM 2.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: bfc77eec-0fd7-4fec-9c78-6870afa87152
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Evaluating MBAM 2.0
-
-
-Before deploying Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) into a production environment, you should evaluate it in a test environment. The information in this topic can be used to set up Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring with a Stand-alone topology in a single-server test environment for evaluation purposes only. A single-server topology is not recommended for production environments.
-
-For instructions on deploying MBAM in a test environment, see [How to Install and Configure MBAM on a Single Server](how-to-install-and-configure-mbam-on-a-single-server-mbam-2.md).
-
-## Setting up the Test Environment
-
-
-Even though you are setting up a non-production instance of MBAM to evaluate in a test environment, you should still verify that you have met the prerequisites and hardware and software requirements. Before you start the installation, see [MBAM 2.0 Deployment Prerequisites](mbam-20-deployment-prerequisites-mbam-2.md), [MBAM 2.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-20-supported-configurations-mbam-2.md), and [Preparing your Environment for MBAM 2.0](preparing-your-environment-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md).
-
-### Plan for an MBAM Evaluation Deployment
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
References
-
Notes
-
-
-
-
-
-
Review the Getting Started information about MBAM to gain a basic understanding of the product before beginning deployment planning.
-
-
-
-### Perform an MBAM Evaluation Deployment
-
-After completing the necessary planning and software prerequisite installations to prepare your computing environment for the MBAM installation, you can begin the MBAM evaluation deployment.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Review the MBAM supported configurations information to make sure that selected client and server computers are supported for MBAM feature installation.
Add Active Directory Domain Services security groups, that you created during the planning phase, to the appropriate local MBAM Server feature local groups on the new MBAM Server.
-
-
-
-## Configure Lab Computers for MBAM Evaluation
-
-
-This section contains information that can be used to speed up the MBAM Client status reporting. However, these modifications should be used for testing purposes only.
-
-**Note**
-The information in following section describes how to modify the Windows registry. Using Registry Editor incorrectly can cause serious problems that may require you to reinstall Windows. Microsoft cannot guarantee that problems resulting from the incorrect use of Registry Editor can be solved. Use Registry Editor at your own risk.
-
-
-
-### Modify MBAM Client Status Reporting Frequency Settings
-
-The MBAM Client wakeup and status reporting frequencies have a minimum value of 90 minutes when they are set using Group Policy. You can use the Windows registry to change these frequencies to a lower value on MBAM client computers to help speed up testing.
-
-To modify the MBAM Client status reporting frequency settings:
-
-1. Use a registry editor to navigate to **HKLM\\Software\\Policies\\Microsoft\\FVE\\MDOPBitLockerManagement**.
-
-2. Change the values for **ClientWakeupFrequency** and **StatusReportingFrequency** to **1** as the minimum client-supported value. This change causes the MBAM Client to report every minute.
-
-3. Restart **BitLocker Management Client Service**.
-
-**Note**
-To set values that are this low, you must set them in the registry manually.
-
-
-
-### Modify MBAM Client Service Startup Delay
-
-In addition to the MBAM Client wakeup and status reporting frequencies, there is a random delay of up to 90 minutes when the MBAM Client agent service starts on client computers. If you do not want the random delay, create a **DWORD** value of **NoStartupDelay** under **HKLM\\Software\\Microsoft\\MBAM**, set its value to **1**, and then restart **BitLocker Management Client Service**.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Getting Started with MBAM 2.0](getting-started-with-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/getting-started---using-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/getting-started---using-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a2a80d1262..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/getting-started---using-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,107 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Getting Started - Using MBAM with Configuration Manager
-description: Getting Started - Using MBAM with Configuration Manager
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: b0a1d3cc-0b01-4b69-a2cd-fd09fb3beda4
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Getting Started - Using MBAM with Configuration Manager
-
-
-When you install Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM), you can choose a topology that integrates MBAM with Configuration Manager 2007 or System Center 2012 Configuration Manager. For a list of the supported versions of Configuration Manager that MBAM supports, see [Planning to Deploy MBAM with Configuration Manager](planning-to-deploy-mbam-with-configuration-manager-2.md). In the integrated topology, the hardware compliance and reporting features are removed from MBAM and are accessed from Configuration Manager.
-
-**Important**
-Windows To Go is not supported when you install the integrated topology of MBAM with Configuration Manager 2007.
-
-
-
-## Using MBAM with Configuration Manager
-
-
-The integration of MBAM is based on a new Configuration Pack that installs the following three items into Configuration Manager 2007 or System Center 2012 Configuration Manager, which are described in detail in the following sections:
-
-Configuration data that consists of configuration items and a configuration baseline
-
-Collection
-
-Reports
-
-### Configuration Data
-
-The configuration data installs a configuration baseline, called “BitLocker Protection,” which contains two configuration items: “BitLocker Operating System Drive Protection” and “BitLocker Fixed Data Drives Protection.” The configuration baseline is deployed to the collection, which is also created when MBAM is installed. The two configuration items provide the basis for evaluating the compliance status of the client computers. This information is captured, stored, and evaluated in Configuration Manager. The configuration items are based on the compliance requirements for operating system drives (OSDs) and Fixed Data Drives (FDDs). The required details for the deployed computers are collected so that the compliance for those drive types can be evaluated. By default, the configuration baseline evaluates the compliance status every 12 hours and sends the compliance data to Configuration Manager.
-
-### Collection
-
-MBAM creates a collection that is called MBAM Supported Computers. The configuration baseline is targeted to client computers that are in this collection. This is a dynamic collection that, by default, runs every 12 hours and evaluates membership. Membership is based on three criteria:
-
-- It is a supported version of the Windows operating system. Currently, MBAM supports only Windows 7 Enterprise and Windows 7 Ultimate, Windows 8 Enterprise, and Windows To Go, when Windows To Go is running on Windows 8 Enterprise.
-
-- It is a physical computer. Virtual machines are not supported.
-
-- Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is available. A compatible version of TPM 1.2 or later is required for Windows 7. Windows 8 and Windows To Go do not require a TPM.
-
-The collection is evaluated against all computers and creates the subset of compatible computers that provides the basis for compliance evaluation and reporting for the MBAM integration.
-
-### Reports
-
-There are four reports that you can use to view compliance. They are:
-
-- **BitLocker Enterprise Compliance Dashboard** – gives IT administrators three different views of information on a single report: Compliance Status Distribution, Non Compliant – Errors Distribution, and Compliance Status Distribution By Drive Type. Drill-down options on the report let IT administrators click through the data and view a list of computers that match the state that you select.
-
-- **BitLocker Enterprise Compliance Details** – lets IT administrators view information about the BitLocker encryption compliance status of the enterprise and includes the compliance status for each computer. Drill-down options on the report let IT administrators click through the data and view a list of computers that match the state that you select.
-
-- **BitLocker Computer Compliance** – lets IT administrators view an individual computer and determine why it was reported with a given status of compliant or not compliant. The report also displays the encryption state of the operating system drives (OSD) and fixed data drives (FDDs).
-
-- **BitLocker Enterprise Compliance Summary** – lets IT administrators view the status of the compliance of the enterprise with MBAM policy. Each computer’s state is evaluated, and the report shows a summary of the compliance of all computers in the enterprise against the policy. Drill-down options on the report let IT administrators click through the data and view a list of computers that match the state that you select.
-
-## High-Level Architecture of MBAM with Configuration Manager
-
-
-The following image shows the MBAM architecture with the Configuration Manager topology. This configuration supports up to 200,000 MBAM clients in a production environment.
-
-
-
-A description of the servers, databases, and features of this architecture follows. The server features and databases in the architecture image are listed under the computer or server where we recommend that you install them.
-
-- **Database Server** – The **Recovery Database**, **Audit Database**, and **Audit Reports** are installed on a Windows server and supported SQL Server instance. The Recovery database stores recovery data that is collected from MBAM client computers. The Audit Database stores audit activity data that is collected from client computers that have accessed recovery data. The Audit Reports provide data about the compliance status of client computers in your enterprise.
-
-- **Configuration Manager Primary Site Server** – The Configuration Manager Server contains of the MBAM server installation with the System Center Configuration Manager Integration topology, which must be installed on a Configuration Manager primary site server. The Configuration Manager Server collects the hardware inventory information from client computers and is used to report BitLocker compliance of client computers. When you run the MBAM Setup server installation, a collection and the configuration data are installed on the Configuration Manager Primary Site Server.
-
-- **Administration and Monitoring Server** - The **Administration and Monitoring Server** is installed on a Windows server and consists of the Administration and Monitoring website and the monitoring web services. The Administration and Monitoring website is used to audit activity and to access recovery data (for example, BitLocker recovery keys). The **Self-Service Portal** is also installed on the Administration and Monitoring Server. The Portal enables end users on client computers to independently log onto a website to get a recovery key if they lose or forget their BitLocker password. The Audit reports are also installed on the Administration and Monitoring Server.
-
-- **Management Workstation** - The **Policy Template** consists of Group Policy Objects that define MBAM implementation settings for BitLocker drive encryption. You can install the Policy template on any server or workstation, but it is commonly installed on a management workstation that is a supported Windows server or client computer. The workstation does not have to be a dedicated computer.
-
-- **MBAM Client** and **Configuration Manager Client** computer
-
- - The **MBAM Client** performs the following tasks:
-
- - Uses Group Policy Objects to enforce the BitLocker encryption of client computers in the enterprise.
-
- - Collects the recovery key for the three BitLocker data drive types: operating system drives, fixed data drives, and removable data (USB) drives.
-
- - Collects recovery information and computer information about the client computers.
-
- - **Configuration Manager Client** – The Configuration Manager client enables Configuration Manager to collect hardware compatibility data about the client computers, and enables Configuration Manager to report compliance information.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Using MBAM with Configuration Manager](using-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/getting-started-with-mbam-20-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/getting-started-with-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0183c9e902..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/getting-started-with-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,65 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Getting Started with MBAM 2.0
-description: Getting Started with MBAM 2.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 29f5c9af-5bbf-4d37-aa0f-0716046904af
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Getting Started with MBAM 2.0
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) 2.0 requires thorough planning before you deploy it or use its features. Because this product can affect every computer in your organization, you might disrupt your entire network if you do not plan your deployment carefully. However, if you plan your deployment carefully and manage it so that it meets your business requirements, BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 2.0 can help reduce your administrative overhead and total cost of ownership.
-
-If you are new to this product, we recommend that you read the documentation carefully. To get the MBAM software, see [How Do I Get MDOP?](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=322049). Before you deploy MBAM to a production environment, we also recommend that you validate your deployment plan in a test environment. You might also consider taking a class about relevant technologies. For more information about Microsoft training opportunities, see the Microsoft Training Overview at .
-
-This section of the MBAM 2.0 Administrator’s Guide includes high-level information about MBAM 2.0 to provide a basic understanding of the product before you begin to plan deployment. For specific information about deploying MBAM with the Configuration Manager integrated topology, see [Using MBAM with Configuration Manager](using-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md). You can find additional MBAM documentation on the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) Documentation Resources Download Page at .
-
-## Getting Started with MBAM 2.0
-
-
-- [About MBAM 2.0](about-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
- Provides a high-level overview of MBAM 2.0 and describes how it can be used in your organization.
-
-- [Evaluating MBAM 2.0](evaluating-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
- Provides information about how you can best evaluate MBAM 2.0 for use in your organization.
-
-- [High-Level Architecture for MBAM 2.0](high-level-architecture-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
- Describes the MBAM 2.0 features and the recommended architecture for a production environment.
-
-- [Accessibility for MBAM 2.0](accessibility-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
- Describes the keyboard shortcuts that are available for MBAM 2.0.
-
-## Other Resources for this Product
-
-
-[Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 2 Administrator's Guide](index.md)
-
-[Planning for MBAM 2.0](planning-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-[Deploying MBAM 2.0](deploying-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-[Operations for MBAM 2.0](operations-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-[Troubleshooting MBAM 2.0](troubleshooting-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/helping-end-users-manage-bitlocker.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/helping-end-users-manage-bitlocker.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b3c0e338c5..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/helping-end-users-manage-bitlocker.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,91 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Helping End Users Manage BitLocker
-description: Helping End Users Manage BitLocker
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 47776fb3-2d94-4970-b687-c35ec3dd6c64
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Helping End Users Manage BitLocker
-
-
-Content on a lost or stolen computer is vulnerable to unauthorized access, which can present a security risk to both people and companies. Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) uses BitLocker to help prevent unauthorized access by locking your computer to help protect sensitive data from malicious users.
-
-## What is BitLocker?
-
-
-BitLocker Drive Encryption can provide protection for operating system drives, data drives, and removable drives (such as a USB thumb drive) by encrypting the drives. Depending on how BitLocker is configured, users may have to provide a key (a password or PIN) to unlock the information that is stored on the encrypted drives.
-
-When you add new files to a drive that is encrypted with BitLocker, BitLocker encrypts them automatically. Files remain encrypted only while they are stored in the encrypted drive. Files that are copied to another drive or computer are decrypted. If you share files with other users, such as through a network, these files are encrypted while stored on the encrypted drive, but they can be accessed normally by authorized users.
-
-If you encrypt the operating system drive, BitLocker checks the computer during startup for any conditions that could represent a security risk (for example, a change to the BIOS or changes to any startup files). If a potential security risk is detected, BitLocker will lock the operating system drive and require a special BitLocker recovery key to unlock it. Make sure that you create this recovery key when you turn on BitLocker for the first time. Otherwise, you could permanently lose access to your files.
-
-If you encrypt data drives (fixed or removable), you can unlock an encrypted drive with a password or a smart card, or set the drive to automatically unlock when you log on to the computer.
-
-In addition to passwords and PINs, BitLocker can use the Trusted Platform Module (TPM) chip that is provided in many newer computers. The TPM chip is used to ensure that your computer has not been tampered with before BitLocker will unlock the operating system drive. During the encryption process, you may have to enable the TPM chip. When you start your computer, BitLocker asks the TPM for the keys to the drive and unlocks it. To enable the TPM chip, you will have to restart your computer and then change a setting in the BIOS, a pre-Windows layer of your computer software. For more information about the TPM, see [About the Computer TPM Chip](about-the-computer-tpm-chip.md).
-
-Once your computer is protected by BitLocker, you may have to enter a PIN or password every time that the computer wakes from hibernation or starts. The Help Desk for your company or organization can help if you ever forget your PIN or password.
-
-You can turn off BitLocker, either temporarily, by suspending it, or permanently, by decrypting the drive.
-
-**Note**
-Because BitLocker encrypts the whole drive and not just the individual files themselves, be careful when you move sensitive data between drives. If you move a file from a BitLocker-protected drive to a nonencrypted drive, the file will no longer be encrypted.
-
-
-
-## About the BitLocker Encryption Options Application
-
-
-To unlock hard disk drives on your computer and to manage your PIN and passwords, use the BitLocker Encryption Options application in the Windows Control Panel by following the procedure outlined here. You can enter passwords to unlock protected drives and can check the BitLocker status of attached drives by using this application.
-
-**To open the BitLocker Encryption Options application**
-
-1. Click **Start**, and select **Control Panel**. The Control Panel opens in a new window.
-
-2. In **Control Panel**, select **System and Security**.
-
-3. Select **BitLocker Encryption Options** to open the BitLocker Encryption Options application.
-
- For a description of the available options, see the following section.
-
-## Options on the BitLocker Encryption Options Application
-
-
-The BitLocker Encryption Options application on Control Panel lets you manage your PIN and passwords, which BitLocker uses to protect your computer.
-
-**BitLocker Drive Encryption – Fixed Disk Drives:**
-
-In this section, you can view information about hard disk drives connected to your computer and their current BitLocker Encryption status.
-
-- **Manage your PIN** - changes the PIN used by BitLocker to unlock your operating system drive.
-
-- **Manage your password** - changes the password that is used by BitLocker to unlock your other internal drives.
-
-**BitLocker Drive Encryption - External Drives:**
-
-In this section, you can view information about external drives (such as a USB thumb drive) connected to your computer, and their current BitLocker encryption status.
-
-- **Manage your password** - changes the password that is used by BitLocker to unlock your other internal drives.
-
-**Advanced:**
-
-- **TPM Administration** - opens the TPM Administration tool in a separate window. From here you can configure common TPM tasks and obtain information about the TPM chipset. You must have administrative permissions on your computer to access this tool.
-
-- **Disk Management** -open the Disk Management tool. From here you can view the information for all hard drives connected to the computer and configure partitions and drive options. You must have administrative rights on your computer to access this tool.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/high-availability-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/high-availability-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 810ca0e569..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/high-availability-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,56 +0,0 @@
----
-title: High Availability for MBAM 2.0
-description: High Availability for MBAM 2.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 244ee013-9e2a-48d2-b842-4e10594fd74f
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# High Availability for MBAM 2.0
-
-
-This topic provides basic information about a highly available installation of Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM). High-availability scenarios are not fully supported in this version of MBAM, so they are not described here. It is recommended that you search related blogs and forums, where users describe how they have successfully configured high availability for MBAM in their environments.
-
-## High Availability Scenarios for MBAM
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring is designed to be fault-tolerant. If a server becomes unavailable, users should not be negatively affected. For example, if the MBAM agent cannot connect to the MBAM web server, users should not be prompted for action.
-
-When you plan your MBAM installation, consider the following items, which can affect the availability of the MBAM service:
-
-- Drive encryption and recovery password – If a recovery password cannot be escrowed, the encryption does not start on the client computer.
-
-- Compliance status data upload – If the server that hosts the compliance status report service is not available, the compliance data does not remain current.
-
-- Help Desk recovery key access - If the Help Desk cannot access MBAM database information, the Help Desk cannot provide recovery keys to users.
-
-- Availability of reports –If the server that hosts the Compliance and Audit Reports is not available, reports will not be available.
-
-## How the MBAM Backup Uses the Volume Shadow Copy Service (VSS)
-
-
-MBAM 2.0 provides a Volume Shadow Copy Service (VSS) writer, called the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Management Writer, which facilitates the backup of the Compliance and Audit Database and the Recovery Database.
-
-The MBAM Server Windows Installer registers the MBAM VSS Writer. Any failure during the VSS writer registration causes the MBAM Server installation to roll back. In a topology where the Compliance and Audit Database and the Recovery Database are installed on different servers, a separate instance of MBAM VSS Writer is registered on each server. The MBAM VSS Writer is dependent on the SQL Server VSS Writer. The SQL Server VSS Writer is registered as part of the Microsoft SQL Server installation. Any backup technology that uses VSS writers to perform backup can discover the MBAM VSS Writer.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Maintaining MBAM 2.0](maintaining-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/high-level-architecture-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/high-level-architecture-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 99d1616b22..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/high-level-architecture-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,83 +0,0 @@
----
-title: High-Level Architecture for MBAM 2.0
-description: High-Level Architecture for MBAM 2.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 7f73dd3a-0b1f-4af6-a2f0-d0c5bc5d183a
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# High-Level Architecture for MBAM 2.0
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) is a client/server solution that can help you simplify BitLocker provisioning and deployment, improve compliance and reporting on BitLocker, and reduce support costs. Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring includes the features that are described in this topic.
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring can be deployed in the Stand-alone topology, or in a topology that is integrated with Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2007 or Microsoft System Center 2012 Configuration Manager. This topic describes the architecture for the Stand-alone topology. For information about deploying in the integrated Configuration Manager topology, see [Using MBAM with Configuration Manager](using-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md).
-
-The following diagram shows the MBAM recommended architecture for a production environment, which consists of two servers and a management workstation. This architecture supports up to 200,000 MBAM clients. The server features and databases in the architecture image are described in the following section and are listed under the computer or server where we recommend that you install them.
-
-**Note**
-A single-server architecture should be used only in test environments.
-
-
-
-
-
-## Administration and Monitoring Server
-
-
-The following features are installed on this server:
-
-- **Administration and Monitoring Server**. The Administration and Monitoring Server feature is installed on a Windows server and consists of the Administration and Monitoring website, which includes the reports and the Help Desk Portal, and the monitoring web services.
-
-- **Self-Service Portal**. The Self-Service Portal is installed on a Windows server. The Self-Service Portal enables end users on client computers to independently log on to a website, where they can obtain a recovery key to recover a locked BitLocker volume.
-
-## Database Server
-
-
-The following features are installed on this server:
-
-- **Recovery Database**. The Recovery Database is installed on a Windows server and a supported instance of Microsoft SQL Server. This database stores recovery data that is collected from MBAM client computers.
-
-- **Compliance and Audit Database**. The Compliance and Audit Database is installed on a Windows server and a supported instance of SQL Server. This database stores compliance data for MBAM client computers. This data is used primarily for reports that SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) hosts.
-
-- **Compliance and Audit Reports**. The Compliance and Audit Reports are installed on a Windows server and a supported instance of SQL Server that has the SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) feature installed. These reports provide MBAM reports that you can access from the Administration and Monitoring website or directly from the SSRS server.
-
-## Management Workstation
-
-
-The following feature is installed on the Management workstation, which can be a Windows server or a client computer.
-
-- **Policy Template**. The Policy Template consists of Group Policy settings that define MBAM implementation settings for BitLocker drive encryption. You can install the Policy template on any server or workstation, but it is commonly installed on a management workstation, which is a supported Windows server or client computer. The workstation does not have to be a dedicated computer.
-
-## MBAM Client
-
-
-The MBAM Client is installed on a Windows computer and has the following characteristics:
-
-- Uses Group Policy to enforce the BitLocker drive encryption of client computers in the enterprise.
-
-- Collects the recovery key for the three BitLocker data drive types: operating system drives, fixed data drives, and removable data (USB) drives.
-
-- Collects compliance data for the computer and passes the data to the reporting system.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Getting Started with MBAM 2.0](getting-started-with-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-brand-the-self-service-portal.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-brand-the-self-service-portal.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e7b09a94a5..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-brand-the-self-service-portal.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,105 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Brand the Self-Service Portal
-description: How to Brand the Self-Service Portal
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 3ef9e951-7c42-4f7f-b131-3765d39b3207
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Brand the Self-Service Portal
-
-
-After you install the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) Self-Service Portal, you can brand the Self-Service Portal with your company name, Help Desk URL, and “notice” text. You can also change the Session Timeout setting to make the end user’s session expire after a specified period of inactivity.
-
-**To set the session time-out and branding for the Self-Service Portal**
-
-1. To set the time-out period for the end user’s session, start the **Internet Information Services Manager**, or run **inetmgr.exe**.
-
-2. Browse to **Sites** > **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring** > **SelfService** > **ASP.NET** > **Session State**, and change the **Time-out** value under **Cookie Settings** to the number of minutes after which the end user’s Self-Service Portal session will expire. The default is 5. To disable the setting so that there is no time-out, set the value to **0**.
-
-3. To set the branding items for the Self-Service Portal, start the **Internet Information Services Manager**, or run **inetmgr.exe**.
-
-4. Browse to **Sites** > **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring** > **SelfService** > **Application Settings**.
-
-5. From the **Name** column, select the item that you want to change, and change the default value to reflect the name that you want to use. The following table lists the values that you can set.
-
- **Caution**
- Do not change the value in the Name column (CompanyName\*), as it will cause the Self-Service Portal to stop working.
-
-
-
-~~~
-
You can edit the Notice text either by using the IIS Manager or by opening and changing the Notice.txt file in the installation directory.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-~~~
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the MBAM 2.0 Server Infrastructure](deploying-the-mbam-20-server-infrastructure-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-create-or-edit-the-mof-files.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-create-or-edit-the-mof-files.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c74822c16c..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-create-or-edit-the-mof-files.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Create or Edit the mof Files
-description: How to Create or Edit the mof Files
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 4d19d707-b90f-4057-a6e9-e4221a607190
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Create or Edit the mof Files
-
-
-Before you install Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) with Configuration Manager, you need to edit the Configuration.mof file. You also need to either edit or create the Sms\_def.mof file, depending on which version of Configuration Manager you are using.
-
-## Edit the Configuration.mof File
-
-
-To enable the client computers to report BitLocker compliance details through the MBAM Configuration Manager reports, you have to edit the Configuration.mof file for Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2007 and System Center 2012 Configuration Manager.
-
-[Edit the Configuration.mof File](edit-the-configurationmof-file.md)
-
-## Create or Edit the Sms\_def.mof File
-
-
-To enable the client computers to report BitLocker compliance details in the MBAM Configuration Manager reports, you have to create or edit the Sms\_def.mof file. In Configuration Manager 2007, the file already exists, so you need to edit, but not overwrite, the existing file. If you are using System Center 2012 Configuration Manager, you must create the file.
-
-[Create or Edit the Sms\_def.mof File](create-or-edit-the-sms-defmof-file.md)
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying MBAM with Configuration Manager](deploying-mbam-with-configuration-manager-mbam2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-deploy-the-mbam-client-as-part-of-a-windows-deployment-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-deploy-the-mbam-client-as-part-of-a-windows-deployment-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 59996d8297..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-deploy-the-mbam-client-as-part-of-a-windows-deployment-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,124 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Deploy the MBAM Client as Part of a Windows Deployment
-description: How to Deploy the MBAM Client as Part of a Windows Deployment
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 67387de7-8b02-4412-9850-3b8d8e5c18af
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Deploy the MBAM Client as Part of a Windows Deployment
-
-
-The Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) Client enables administrators to enforce and monitor BitLocker drive encryption on computers in the enterprise. If computers that have a Trusted Platform Module (TPM) chip, the BitLocker client can be integrated into an organization by enabling BitLocker management and encryption on client computers as part of the imaging and Windows deployment process.
-
-**Note**
-To review the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring Client system requirements, see [MBAM 2.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-20-supported-configurations-mbam-2.md).
-
-
-
-Encrypting client computers with BitLocker during the initial imaging stage of a Windows deployment can lower the administrative overhead necessary for implementing MBAM in an organization. It also ensures that every computer that is deployed already has BitLocker running and is configured correctly.
-
-**Note**
-The procedure in this topic describes modifying the Windows registry. Using Registry Editor incorrectly can cause serious problems that may require you to reinstall Windows. Microsoft cannot guarantee that problems resulting from the incorrect use of Registry Editor can be solved. Use Registry Editor at your own risk.
-
-
-
-**To encrypt a computer as part of Windows deployment**
-
-1. If your organization is planning to use the Trusted Platform Module (TPM) protector or the TPM + PIN protector options in BitLocker, you must activate the TPM chip before the initial deployment of MBAM. When you activate the TPM chip, you avoid a reboot later in the process, and you ensure that the TPM chips are correctly configured according to the requirements of your organization. You must activate the TPM chip manually in the BIOS of the computer.
-
- **Note**
- Some vendors provide tools to turn on and activate the TPM chip in the BIOS from within the operating system. Refer to the manufacturer documentation for more details about how to configure the TPM chip.
-
-
-
-2. Install the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring client agent.
-
-3. Join the computer to a domain (recommended).
-
- - If the computer is not joined to the domain, the recovery password is not stored in the MBAM Key Recovery service. By default, MBAM does not allow encryption to occur unless the recovery key can be stored.
-
- - If a computer starts in recovery mode before the recovery key is stored on the MBAM Server, the computer has to be reimaged. No recovery method is available.
-
-4. Run the command prompt as an administrator, stop the MBAM service, and then set the service to **manual** or **on demand**, and then start by typing the following commands:
-
- **net stop mbamagent**
-
- **sc config mbamagent start= demand**
-
-5. Set the registry settings for the MBAM agent to ignore Group Policy and run the TPM for **operating system only encryption** by running **Regedit**, and then importing the registry key template from C:\\Program Files\\Microsoft\\MDOP MBAM\\MBAMDeploymentKeyTemplate.reg.
-
-6. In regedit, go to HKLM\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\MBAM, and configure the settings that are listed in the following table.
-
- Registry entry
-
- Configuration settings
-
- DeploymentTime
-
- 0 = OFF
-
- 1 = Use deployment time policy settings (default)
-
- UseKeyRecoveryService
-
- 0 = Do not use key escrow ( the next two registry entries are not required in this case)
-
- 1 = Use key escrow in Key Recovery system (default)
-
- Recommended: The computer must be able to communicate with the Key Recovery service. Verify that the computer can communicate with the service before you proceed.
-
- KeyRecoveryOptions
-
- 0 = Uploads Recovery Key Only
-
- 1 = Uploads Recovery Key and Key Recovery Package (default)
-
- KeyRecoveryServiceEndPoint
-
- Set this value to the URL for the Key Recovery web server, for example, http://<computer name>/MBAMRecoveryAndHardwareService/CoreService.svc.
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Note**
-MBAM policy or registry values can be set here to override previously set values.
-~~~
-
-
-
-7. The MBAM agent restarts the system during MBAM client deployment. When you are ready for this reboot, run the following command at a command prompt as an administrator:
-
- **net start mbamagent**
-
-8. When the computers restarts, and the BIOS prompts you to accept a TPM change, accept the change.
-
-9. During the Windows client operating system imaging process, when you are ready to start encryption, restart the MBAM agent service, and set start to **automatic** by running a command prompt as an administrator and typing the following commands:
-
- **sc config mbamagent start= auto**
-
- **net start mbamagent**
-
-10. Remove the bypass registry values by running Regedit and going to the HKLM\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft registry entry. To delete the **MBAM** node, right-click the node and click **Delete**.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the MBAM 2.0 Client](deploying-the-mbam-20-client-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-deploy-the-mbam-client-to-desktop-or-laptop-computers-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-deploy-the-mbam-client-to-desktop-or-laptop-computers-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c7b5c03238..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-deploy-the-mbam-client-to-desktop-or-laptop-computers-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,52 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Deploy the MBAM Client to Desktop or Laptop Computers
-description: How to Deploy the MBAM Client to Desktop or Laptop Computers
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 56744922-bfdd-48f6-ae01-645ff53b64a8
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Deploy the MBAM Client to Desktop or Laptop Computers
-
-
-The Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) client enables administrators to enforce and monitor BitLocker drive encryption on computers in the enterprise. The BitLocker client can be integrated into an organization by deploying the client through an electronic software distribution system, such as Active Directory Domain Services or Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager.
-
-**Note**
-To review the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring Client system requirements, see [MBAM 2.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-20-supported-configurations-mbam-2.md).
-
-
-
-**To deploy the MBAM Client to desktop or laptop computers**
-
-1. Locate the MBAM client installation files that are provided with the MBAM software.
-
-2. Use Active Directory Domain Services or an enterprise software deployment tool like Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager to deploy the Windows Installer package to target computers.
-
-3. Configure the distribution settings or Group Policy to run the MBAM Client installation file. After successful installation, the MBAM Client applies the Group Policy settings that are received from a domain controller to begin BitLocker encryption and management functions. For more information about MBAM group policy settings, see [Planning for MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Requirements](planning-for-mbam-20-group-policy-requirements-mbam-2.md).
-
- **Important**
- The MBAM Client will not start BitLocker encryption actions if a remote desktop protocol connection is active. All remote console connections must be closed before BitLocker encryption will begin.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the MBAM 2.0 Client](deploying-the-mbam-20-client-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-determine-bitlocker-encryption-state-of-lost-computers-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-determine-bitlocker-encryption-state-of-lost-computers-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 46c10f9c67..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-determine-bitlocker-encryption-state-of-lost-computers-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Determine BitLocker Encryption State of Lost Computers
-description: How to Determine BitLocker Encryption State of Lost Computers
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: dbd23b64-dff3-4913-9acd-affe67b9462e
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Determine BitLocker Encryption State of Lost Computers
-
-
-You can use Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) to determine the last known BitLocker encryption status of computers that were lost or stolen. The following procedure explains how to determine whether the volumes on a computer are encrypted if there is a loss or theft.
-
-**To determine the last known BitLocker encryption state of lost computers**
-
-1. Open a web browser and navigate to the Administration and Monitoring website.
-
- **Note**
- Note: The default address for the Administration and Monitoring website is http://*<computername>*. Using the fully qualified server name will yield faster browsing results.
-
-
-
-2. Selects the **Report** node from the navigation pane, and select the **Computer Compliance Report**.
-
-3. Use the filter fields in the right pane to narrow the search results, and then click **Search**. Results are shown below your search query.
-
-4. Take the appropriate action, as determined by your policy for lost devices.
-
- **Note**
- Device compliance is determined by the BitLocker policies that your enterprise has deployed. You may want to verify your deployed policies before you try to determine the BitLocker encryption state of a device.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Performing BitLocker Management with MBAM](performing-bitlocker-management-with-mbam-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-edit-mbam-20-gpo-settings-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-edit-mbam-20-gpo-settings-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 457d479a15..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-edit-mbam-20-gpo-settings-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,91 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Edit MBAM 2.0 GPO Settings
-description: How to Edit MBAM 2.0 GPO Settings
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: f5ffa93d-b4d2-4317-8a1c-7d2be0264fe3
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Edit MBAM 2.0 GPO Settings
-
-
-To successfully deploy Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM), you first have to determine the Group Policies that you will use in your implementation of Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring. See [Planning for MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Requirements](planning-for-mbam-20-group-policy-requirements-mbam-2.md) for more information on the different policies that are available. After you have determined the policies that you are going to use, you then must modify one or more Group Policy Objects (GPO) that include the policy settings for MBAM.
-
-You can use the following steps to configure the basic, recommended GPO settings to enable MBAM to manage BitLocker encryption for your organization’s client computers.
-
-**To Edit MBAM Client GPO Settings**
-
-1. On a computer that has MBAM Group Policy template installed, make sure that MBAM services are enabled.
-
-2. Using the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC.msc) or the Advanced Group Policy Management (AGPM) MDOP product on a computer with the MBAM Group Policy template installed, select **Computer configuration**, choose **Policies**, click **Administrative Templates**, select **Windows Components**, and then click **MDOP MBAM (BitLocker Management)**.
-
-3. Edit the Group Policy Object settings that are required to enable MBAM Client services on client computers. For each policy in the table that follows, select **Policy Group**, click the **Policy**, and then configure the **Setting**:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Policy Group
-
Policy
-
Setting
-
-
-
-
-
Client Management
-
Configure MBAM Services
-
Enabled. Set MBAM Recovery and Hardware service endpoint and Select BitLocker recovery information to store. Set MBAM compliance service endpoint and Enter status report frequency in (minutes).
-
-
-
Operating System Drive
-
Operating system drive encryption settings
-
Enabled. Set Select protector for operating system drive. Required to save operating system drive data to the MBAMKey Recovery server.
-
-
-
Removable Drive
-
Control Use of BitLocker on removable drives
-
Enabled. Required if MBAM will save removable drive data to the MBAM Key Recovery server.
-
-
-
Fixed Drive
-
Control Use of BitLocker on fixed drives
-
Enabled. Required if MBAM will save fixed drive data to the MBAM Key Recovery server.
-
Set Choose how BitLocker-protected drives can be recovered and Allow data recovery agent.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Important**
-Depending on the policies that your organization decides to deploy, you may have to configure additional policies. See [Planning for MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Requirements](planning-for-mbam-20-group-policy-requirements-mbam-2.md) for Group Policy configuration details for all of the available MBAM GPO policy options.
-~~~
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Objects](deploying-mbam-20-group-policy-objects-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-generate-mbam-reports-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-generate-mbam-reports-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 601184d6e5..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-generate-mbam-reports-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,115 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Generate MBAM Reports
-description: How to Generate MBAM Reports
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 083550cb-8c3f-49b3-a30e-97d85374d2f4
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Generate MBAM Reports
-
-
-When you install Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) with the Stand-alone topology, you can generate different reports to monitor BitLocker encryption usage and compliance. The procedures in this topic describe how to open the Administration and Monitoring website and the steps that are needed to generate Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring reports on enterprise compliance, individual computers, and key recovery activity. For detailed information to help understand MBAM reports, see [Understanding MBAM Reports](understanding-mbam-reports-mbam-2.md).
-
-**Note**
-To run the reports, you must be a member of the **Report Users Role** on the computers where the Administration and Monitoring Server features, Compliance and Audit Database, and Compliance and Audit Reports are installed.
-
-
-
-**To open the Administration and Monitoring website**
-
-1. Open a web browser and navigate to the Administration and Monitoring website. The default URL for the Administration and Monitoring website is *http://<computername>*.
-
- **Note**
- If the Administration and Monitoring website was installed on a port other than 80, you have to specify the port in the URL (for example, *http://<computername>:<port>*. If you specified a host name for the Administration and Monitoring website during the installation, the URL is *http://<hostname>*.
-
-
-
-2. In the left pane, click **Reports** and then select the report you want to run from the top menu bar.
-
- Historical MBAM client data is retained in the compliance database for historical reference in case a computer is lost or stolen. When running enterprise reports, we recommend that you use appropriate start and end dates to scope the time frames for the reports from one to two weeks to increase reporting data accuracy.
-
- **Note**
- If SSRS was not configured to use Secure Socket Layer, the URL for the reports will be set to HTTP instead of to HTTPS when you install the MBAM Server. If you then go to the Help Desk portal and select a report, the following message displays: “Only Secure Content is Displayed.” To show the report, click **Show All Content**.
-
-
-
-**To generate an Enterprise Compliance Report**
-
-1. From the Administration and Monitoring website, select the **Reports** node from the left navigation pane, select **Enterprise Compliance Report**, and select the filters that you want to use. The available filters for the Enterprise Compliance Report are the following:
-
- - **Compliance Status**. Use this filter to specify the compliance status types (for example, Compliant, or Noncompliant) of the report.
-
- - **Error State**. Use this filter to specify the error state types (for example, No Error, or Error) of the report.
-
-2. Click **View Report** to display the selected report.
-
- Results can be saved in different formats, such as HTML, Microsoft Word, and Microsoft Excel.
-
- **Note**
- The Enterprise Compliance report is generated by a SQL job that runs every six hours. Therefore, the first time you view the report, you may find that some data is missing. You can generate updated report data manually by using SQL Management Studio. From the **Object Explorer** window, expand **SQL Server Agent**, expand **Jobs**, right-click the **CreateCache** job, and select **Start Job at Step….**
-
-
-
-3. Select a computer name to view information about the computer in the Computer Compliance Report.
-
-4. Select the plus sign (+) next to the computer name to view information about the volumes on the computer.
-
-**To generate the Computer Compliance Report**
-
-1. In the Administration and Monitoring website, select the **Report** node from the left navigation pane, and then select the **Computer Compliance Report**. Use the Computer Compliance report to search for **user name** or **computer name**.
-
-2. Click **View Report** to view the computer report.
-
- Results can be saved in different formats, such as HTML, Microsoft Word, and Microsoft Excel.
-
-3. Select a computer name to display more information about the computer in the Computer Compliance Report.
-
-4. Select the plus sign (+) next to the computer name to view information about the volumes on the computer.
-
- **Note**
- An MBAM client computer is considered compliant if the computer matches the requirements of the MBAM policy settings.
-
-
-
-**To generate the Recovery Key Audit Report**
-
-1. From the Administration and Monitoring website, select the **Report** node in the left navigation pane, and then select the **Recovery Audit Report**. Select the filters for your Recovery Key Audit report. The available filters for Recovery Key audits are as follows:
-
- - **Requestor**. This filter enables users to specify the user name of the requester. The requester is the person in the Help Desk who accessed the key on behalf of a user.
-
- - **Requestee**. This filter enables users to specify the user name of the requestee. The requestee is the person who called the Help Desk to obtain a recovery key.
-
- - **Request Result**. This filter enables users to specify the request result types (for example, Success or Failed) that they want to base the report on. For example, users may want to view failed key access attempts.
-
- - **Key Type**. This filter enables users to specify the Key Type (for example: Recovery Key Password or TPM Password Hash) that they want to base the report on.
-
- - **Start Date**. This filter is used to define the Start Date part of the date range that the user wants to report on.
-
- - **End Date**. This filter is used to define the End Date part of the date range that the users want to report on.
-
-2. Click **View Report** to view the report.
-
- Results can be saved in different formats, such as HTML, Microsoft Word, and Microsoft Excel.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Monitoring and Reporting BitLocker Compliance with MBAM 2.0](monitoring-and-reporting-bitlocker-compliance-with-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-hide-default-bitlocker-encryption-in-the-windows-control-panel-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-hide-default-bitlocker-encryption-in-the-windows-control-panel-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 73915791b9..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-hide-default-bitlocker-encryption-in-the-windows-control-panel-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Hide Default BitLocker Encryption in the Windows Control Panel
-description: How to Hide Default BitLocker Encryption in the Windows Control Panel
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 6674aa51-2b5d-4e4a-8b43-2cc18d008285
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Hide Default BitLocker Encryption in the Windows Control Panel
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) offers a customized control panel for Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring client computers, called BitLocker Encryption Options. This customized control panel can replace the default Windows BitLocker control panel, which is called BitLocker Drive Encryption. The customized control panel, which is in Control Panel under System and Security, enables users to manage their PIN and passwords and to unlock drives, and hides the interface that enables administrators to decrypt a drive or to suspend or resume BitLocker drive encryption.
-
-**To hide default BitLocker drive encryption in Windows Control Panel**
-
-1. In the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC), the Advanced Group Policy Management (AGPM), or the Local Group Policy Editor on the BitLocker Group Policies computer, browse to **User configuration**.
-
-2. Next, click **Policies**, select **Administrative Templates**, and then click **Control Panel**.
-
-3. Double-click **Hide specified Control Panel items** in the **Details** pane, and then select **Enabled**.
-
-4. Click **Show**, click **Add**, and then type **Microsoft.BitLockerDriveEncryption**. This policy hides the default Windows BitLocker Management tool from the Windows Control Panel and, in Control Panel, lets the user open the updated MBAM BitLocker Encryption Options tool under System and Security.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Objects](deploying-mbam-20-group-policy-objects-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-install-and-configure-mbam-on-a-single-server-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-install-and-configure-mbam-on-a-single-server-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 593e8d34e5..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-install-and-configure-mbam-on-a-single-server-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,206 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Install and Configure MBAM on a Single Server
-description: How to Install and Configure MBAM on a Single Server
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 45e6a012-6c8c-4d90-902c-d09de9a0cbea
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Install and Configure MBAM on a Single Server
-
-
-The procedures in this topic describe how to install Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) in the Stand-alone topology on a single server. Use the single-server configuration only in a test environment. For production environments, use two or more servers. If you are installing Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring by using the Configuration Manager topology, see [Deploying MBAM with Configuration Manager](deploying-mbam-with-configuration-manager-mbam2.md).
-
-The following diagram shows an example of a single-server architecture. For a description of the databases and features, see [High-Level Architecture for MBAM 2.0](high-level-architecture-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md).
-
-
-
-Each server feature has certain prerequisites. To verify that you have met the prerequisites and hardware and software requirements, see [MBAM 2.0 Deployment Prerequisites](mbam-20-deployment-prerequisites-mbam-2.md) and [MBAM 2.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-20-supported-configurations-mbam-2.md). In addition, some features also have information that must be provided during the installation process to successfully deploy the feature. You should also review [Preparing your Environment for MBAM 2.0](preparing-your-environment-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md) before you start MBAM deployment.
-
-**Note**
-To obtain the setup log files, you have use the Msiexec package and the **/L** <location> option to install MBAM. Log files are created in the location that you specify.
-
-Additional setup log files are created in the %temp% folder on the server of the user who is installing MBAM.
-
-
-
-## To install MBAM Server features on a single server
-
-
-The following steps describe how to install general MBAM features.
-
-**To start the MBAM Server features installation**
-
-1. On the server where you want to install MBAM, run **MBAMSetup.exe** to start the MBAM installation wizard.
-
-2. On the **Welcome** page, optionally select the **Customer Experience Improvement Program**, and then click **Start**.
-
-3. Read and accept the Microsoft Software License Agreement, and then click **Next** to continue the installation.
-
-4. On the **Topology Selection** page, select the **Stand-alone** topology, and then click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Select features to install** page, select the features that you want to install. By default, all MBAM features are selected for installation. Features that are to be installed on the same computer must be installed together at the same time. Clear the check boxes for any features that you want to install elsewhere. You must install MBAM features in the following order:
-
- - Recovery Database
-
- - Compliance and Audit Database
-
- - Compliance and Audit Reports
-
- - Self-Service Server
-
- - Administration and Monitoring Server
-
- - MBAM Group Policy template
-
- **Note**
- The installation wizard checks the prerequisites for your installation and displays the prerequisites that are missing. If all of the prerequisites are met, the installation continues. If a missing prerequisite is detected, you have to resolve the missing prerequisites, and then click **Check prerequisites again**. If all prerequisites are met this time, the installation resumes.
-
-
-
-6. On the **Configure network communication security** page, choose whether to encrypt the communication between the Web Services on the Administration and Monitoring Server and the clients. If you decide to encrypt the communication, select the certification authority-provisioned certificate to use for encryption. The certificate must be created prior to this step to enable you to select it on this page.
-
- **Note**
- This page appears only if you selected the Self-Service Portal or the Administration and Monitoring Server feature on the **Select features to install** page.
-
-
-
-7. Click **Next**, and then continue to the next set of steps to configure the MBAM Server features.
-
-**To configure the MBAM Server features**
-
-1. On the **Configure the Recovery database** page, specify the SQL Server instance name and the name of the database that will store the recovery data. You must also specify both where the database files will be located and where the log information will be located.
-
-2. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-3. On the **Configure the Compliance and Audit database** page, specify the SQL Server instance name and the name of the database that will store the compliance and audit data. You must also specify where the database files will be located and where the log information will be located.
-
-4. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-5. On the **Configure the Compliance and Audit Reports** page, specify the SQL Server Reporting Services instance where the Compliance and Audit reports will be installed, and provide a domain user account and password for accessing the Compliance and Audit database. Configure the password for this account to never expire. The user account should be able to access all data available to the MBAM Reports Users group.
-
-6. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-7. On the **Configure the Self-Service Portal** page, enter the port number, host name, virtual directory name, and installation path for the Self-Service Portal.
-
- **Note**
- The port number that you specify must be an unused port number on the Administration and Monitoring Server unless you specify a unique host header name. If you are using Windows Firewall, the port will be opened automatically.
-
-
-
-8. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-9. Specify whether to use Microsoft Updates to help keep your computer secure, and then click **Next**. This does not turn on Automatic Updates in Windows.
-
-10. On the **Configure the Administration and Monitoring Server** page, enter the port number, host name, virtual directory name, and installation path for the Help Desk website.
-
- **Note**
- The port number that you specify must be an unused port number on the Administration and Monitoring Server unless you specify a unique host header name. If you are using Windows Firewall, the port will be opened automatically.
-
-
-
-11. On the **Installation Summary** page, review the list of features that will be installed, and click **Install** to start installing the MBAM features. Click **Back** to move back through the wizard if you have to review or change your installation settings, or click **Cancel** to exit Setup. Setup installs the MBAM features and notifies you that the installation is complete.
-
-12. Click **Finish** to exit the wizard. After the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring Server features have been installed, continue to the next section and complete the steps have to add users to the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring roles. For more information about roles, see [Planning for MBAM 2.0 Administrator Roles](planning-for-mbam-20-administrator-roles-mbam-2.md).
-
-**To perform post-installation configuration**
-
-1. On the Administration and Monitoring Server, add users to the following local groups to give them access to the MBAM Help Desk website features:
-
- - **MBAM Helpdesk Users**: Members of this local group can access the Drive Recovery and Manage TPM features on the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website. All fields in Drive Recovery and Manage TPM are required fields for a Helpdesk User.
-
- - **MBAM Advanced Helpdesk Users**: Members of this local group have advanced access to the Drive Recovery and Manage TPM features on the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website. For Advanced Helpdesk Users, only the **Key ID** field is required in Drive Recovery. In Manage TPM, only the **Computer Domain** field and **Computer Name** field are required.
-
-2. On the Administration and Monitoring Server, add users to the following local group to enable them to access the Reports feature on the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website:
-
- - **MBAM Report Users**: Members of this local group can access the Reports features on the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website.
-
- - Brand the Self-Service Portal with your company name, notice text, and other company-specific information. For instructions, see [How to Brand the Self-Service Portal](how-to-brand-the-self-service-portal.md).
-
- **Note**
- Identical user or group membership of the **MBAM Report Users** local group must be maintained on all computers where the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server features, Compliance and Audit Database, and Compliance and Audit Reports are installed. The recommended way to do this is to create a domain security group and add that domain group to each local MBAM Report Users group. When you use this process, manage the group memberships by way of the domain group.
-
-
-
-## Validating the MBAM Server feature installation
-
-
-When the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring installation is completed, validate that the installation has successfully set up all the necessary MBAM features that are required for BitLocker management. Use the following procedure to confirm that the MBAM service is functional.
-
-**To validate the MBAM Server feature installation**
-
-1. On each server where a MBAM feature is deployed, open **Control Panel**. Select **Programs**, and then select **Programs and Features**. Verify that **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring** appears in the **Programs and Features** list.
-
- **Note**
- To validate the installation, you must use a domain account that has local computer administrative credentials on each server.
-
-
-
-2. On the server where the Recovery Database is installed, open SQL Server Management Studio, and verify that the **MBAM Recovery and Hardware** database is installed.
-
-3. On the server where the Compliance and Audit Database is installed, open SQL Server Management Studio, and verify that the **MBAM Compliance Status Database** is installed.
-
-4. On the server where the Compliance and Audit Reports are installed, open a web browser with administrative credentials and browse to the “Home” of the SQL Server Reporting Services site.
-
- The default Home location of a SQL Server Reporting Services site instance is at http://<NameofMBAMReportsServer>/Reports. To find the actual URL, use the Reporting Services Configuration Manager tool and select the instances that are specified during setup.
-
- Confirm that a Reports folder named Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring contains a data source called **MaltaDataSource** and that an **en-us** folder contains four reports.
-
- **Note**
- If SQL Server Reporting Services was configured as a named instance, the URL should resemble the following: http://*<NameofMBAMReportsServer>*/Reports\_*<SRSInstanceName>*
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Note**
-If SSRS was not configured to use Secure Socket Layer (SSL), the URL for the reports will be set to HTTP instead of HTTPS when you install the MBAM Server. If you then go to the Administration and Monitoring website and select a report, the following message appears: “Only Secure Content is Displayed.” To show the report, click **Show All Content**.
-~~~
-
-
-
-5. On the server where the Administration and Monitoring feature is installed, run **Server Manager** and browse to **Roles**. Select **Web Server (IIS)**, and then click **Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager.**
-
-6. In **Connections,** browse to *<computername>*, select **Sites**, and then select **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring**. Verify that **MBAMAdministrationService**, **MBAMUserSupportService**, **MBAMComplianceStatusService**, and **MBAMRecoveryAndHardwareService** are listed.
-
-7. On the server where the Administration and Monitoring features and Self-Service Portal are installed, open a web browser with administrative credentials and browse to the following locations to verify that they load successfully:
-
- - *http://<hostname>/HelpDesk/default.aspx* and confirm each of the links for navigation and reports
-
- - *http://<hostname>/SelfService>/*
-
- - *http://<computername>/MBAMAdministrationService/AdministrationService.svc*
-
- - *http://<hostname>/MBAMUserSupportService/UserSupportService.svc*
-
- - *http://<computername>/MBAMComplianceStatusService/StatusReportingService.svc*
-
- - *http://<computername>/MBAMRecoveryAndHardwareService/CoreService.svc*
-
- **Note**
- It is assumed that the server features were installed on the default port without network encryption. If you installed the server features on a different port or virtual directory, change the URLs to include the appropriate port, for example, *http://<hostname>:<port>/HelpDesk/default.asp*x or*http://<hostname>:<port>/<virtualdirectory>/default.aspx*
-
- If the server features were installed with network encryption, change http:// to https://.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the MBAM 2.0 Server Infrastructure](deploying-the-mbam-20-server-infrastructure-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-install-and-configure-mbam-on-distributed-servers-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-install-and-configure-mbam-on-distributed-servers-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c4e74fd53a..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-install-and-configure-mbam-on-distributed-servers-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,345 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Install and Configure MBAM on Distributed Servers
-description: How to Install and Configure MBAM on Distributed Servers
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 67b91e6b-ae2e-4e47-9ef2-6819aba95976
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Install and Configure MBAM on Distributed Servers
-
-
-The procedures in this topic describe how to install Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) 2.0 in the Stand-alone topology on distributed servers. To see a diagram of the recommended architecture, along with a description of the databases and features, see [Deploying the MBAM 2.0 Server Infrastructure](deploying-the-mbam-20-server-infrastructure-mbam-2.md). To install Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring with the Configuration Manager topology, see [Deploying MBAM with Configuration Manager](deploying-mbam-with-configuration-manager-mbam2.md).
-
-Each server feature has certain prerequisites. To verify that you have met the prerequisites and hardware and software requirements, see [MBAM 2.0 Deployment Prerequisites](mbam-20-deployment-prerequisites-mbam-2.md) and [MBAM 2.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-20-supported-configurations-mbam-2.md). In addition, some features require that you provide certain information during the installation process to successfully deploy the feature. You should also review [Planning for MBAM 2.0 Server Deployment](planning-for-mbam-20-server-deployment-mbam-2.md) before you start the MBAM deployment.
-
-**Note**
-To obtain the setup log files, you have to use the Msiexec package and the **/L** <location> option to install MBAM. Log files are created in the location that you specify.
-
-Additional setup log files are created in the %temp% folder on the server of the user who is installing MBAM.
-
-
-
-## Deploying MBAM Server Features
-
-
-The following steps describe how to install general MBAM features.
-
-**To start the MBAM Server installation wizard**
-
-1. On the server where you want to install Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring, run **MBAMSetup.exe** to start the MBAM installation wizard.
-
-2. On the **Welcome** page, optionally select the **Customer Experience Improvement Program**, and then click **Start**.
-
-3. Read and accept the Microsoft Software License Agreement, and then click **Next** to continue the installation.
-
-4. On the **Topology Selection** page, select the **Stand-alone** topology, and then click **Next**.
-
- **Note**
- If you want to install MBAM with the Configuration Manager integrated topology, see [Deploying MBAM with Configuration Manager](deploying-mbam-with-configuration-manager-mbam2.md).
-
-
-
-5. Select the features that you want to install. By default, all MBAM features are selected for installation. Clear the features that you want to install elsewhere. Features that will be installed on the same computer must be installed together at the same time. You must install MBAM features in the following order:
-
- - Recovery Database
-
- - Compliance and Audit Database
-
- - Compliance and Audit Reports
-
- - Self-Service Portal
-
- - Administration and Monitoring Server
-
- - MBAM Group Policy template
-
- **Note**
- The installation wizard checks the prerequisites for your installation and displays the prerequisites that are missing. If all of the prerequisites are met, the installation continues. If a missing prerequisite is detected, you have to resolve the missing prerequisites, and then click **Check prerequisites again**. If all prerequisites are met this time, the installation resumes.
-
-
-
-~~~
-The MBAM Setup wizard displays installation pages for the features that you select. The following sections describe the installation procedures for each feature.
-
-**Note**
-For the following instructions, it is assumed that each feature is to be installed on a separate server. If you install multiple features on a single server, you can change or eliminate some steps.
-~~~
-
-
-
-**To install the Recovery Database**
-
-1. On the **Configure the Recovery database** page, specify the names of the computers that will be running the Administration and Monitoring Server feature. After the Administration and Monitoring Server feature is deployed, it uses its domain account to connect to the database.
-
-2. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-3. Specify the SQL Server instance name and the name of the database that will store the recovery data. You must also specify both where the database will be located and where the log information will be located.
-
-4. Click **Next** to continue with the MBAM Setup wizard.
-
-**To install the Compliance and Audit Database**
-
-1. On the **Configure the Compliance and Audit Database** page, specify the user account that will be used to access the database for reports.
-
-2. Specify the computer names of the computers that will be running the Administration and Monitoring Server and the Compliance and Audit Reports. After the Administration and Monitoring and the Compliance and Audit Reports Server are deployed, they use their domain accounts to connect to the databases.
-
- **Note**
- If you are installing the Compliance and Audit Database without the Compliance and Audit Reports feature, you must add an exception on the Compliance and Audit Database computer to enable inbound traffic on the Microsoft SQL Server port. The default port number is 1433.
-
-
-
-3. Specify the SQL Server instance name and the name of the database that will store the compliance and audit data. You must also specify where the database and log information will be located.
-
-4. Click **Next** to continue with the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring Setup wizard.
-
-**To install the Compliance and Audit Reports**
-
-1. On the **Configure the Compliance and Audit Reports** page, specify the remote SQL Server instance name (for example, <ServerName>) where the Compliance and Audit Database was installed.
-
- **Note**
- If you are installing the Compliance and Audit Reports without the Administration and Monitoring Server, you must add an exception on the Compliance and Audit Report computer to enable inbound traffic on the Reporting Server port (the default port is 80).
-
-
-
-2. Specify the name of the Compliance and Audit Database. By default, the database name is MBAM Compliance Status, although you can change the name when you install the Compliance and Audit Database.
-
-3. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-4. Select the instance of SQL Server Reporting Services where the Compliance and Audit Reports will be installed. Provide a domain user account and password to access the Compliance and Audit Database. Configure the password for this account to never expire. The user account should be able to access all data that is available to the MBAM Reports Users group.
-
-5. Click **Next** to continue with the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring Setup wizard.
-
-**To install the Self-Service Portal**
-
-1. On the **Configure the Self-Service Portal** page, you can optionally encrypt the communication between the Self-Service Portal and the Administration and Monitoring servers. If you choose the option to encrypt the communication, you are prompted to select the certification authority-provisioned certificate to use for encryption.
-
-2. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-3. Specify the remote instance of SQL Server (for example, *<ServerName>*) where the Compliance and Audit Database was installed.
-
-4. Specify the name of the Compliance and Audit Database. By default, the database name is MBAM Compliance Status. However, you can change the name when you install the Compliance and Audit Database.
-
-5. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-6. Specify the remote instance of SQL Server (for example, *<ServerName>*) where the Recovery Database was installed.
-
-7. Specify the name of the Recovery Database. By default, the database name is **MBAM Recovery and Hardware**. However, you can change the name when you install the Recovery Database feature.
-
-8. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-9. Enter the **Port Number**, the **Host Name** (optional), and the **Installation Path** for the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server.
-
- **Note**
- The port number that you specify must be an unused port number on the Administration and Monitoring server unless you specify a unique host header name. If you are using Windows Firewall, the port will be opened automatically.
-
-
-
-10. To optionally register a Service Principal Name (SPN) for the Self-Service Portal, select **Register this machine’s Service Principal Names (SPN) with Active Directory (Required for Windows Authentication)**. If you select this check box, MBAM Setup will not try to register the existing SPNs, and you can manually register the SPN before or after the MBAM installation. For instructions on registering the SPN manually, see [Manual SPN Registration](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=286758).
-
-11. Click **Next** to continue with the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring Setup wizard.
-
-12. Specify whether to use Microsoft Updates to help keep your computer secure, and then click **Next**.
-
-13. When the selected MBAM feature information is completed, you are ready to start the MBAM installation by using the Setup wizard. Click **Back** to move through the wizard if you have to review or change your installation settings. Click **Install** to start the installation. Click **Cancel** to exit the wizard. Setup installs the MBAM features that you selected and notifies you that the installation is finished.
-
-14. Click **Finish** to exit the wizard.
-
- **Note**
- To configure the Self-Service Portal after you installed it, brand the Self-Service Portal with your company name and other company-specific information, see [How to Brand the Self-Service Portal](how-to-brand-the-self-service-portal.md) for instructions.
-
-
-
-15. If the client computers have access to the Microsoft Content Delivery Network (CDN), which gives the Self-Service Portal the required access to certain JavaScript files, you are finished with the Self-Service Portal installation. If the client computers does not have access to the Microsoft CDN, complete the steps in the next section to configure the Self-Service Portal to reference the JavaScript files from an accessible source.
-
-**To configure the Self-Service Portal when end users cannot access the Microsoft Content Delivery Network**
-
-1. If the client computers have access to the Microsoft Content Delivery Network (CDN), which gives the Self-Service Portal the required access to certain JavaScript files, the Self-Service Portal installation is completed. If the client computers do not have access to the Microsoft CDN, complete the remaining steps in this section to configure the Self-Service Portal to reference the JavaScript files from an accessible source.
-
-2. Download the four JavaScript files from the Microsoft CDN:
-
- - jQuery-1.7.2.min.js - [https://go.microsoft.com/p/fwlink/?LinkID=271736](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkID=271736)
-
- - MicrosoftAjax.js –[https://go.microsoft.com/p/fwlink/?LinkId=272283](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=272283)
-
- - MicrosoftMvcAjax.js - [https://go.microsoft.com/p/fwlink/?LinkId=272284](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=272284)
-
- - MicrosoftMvcValidation.js -
-
-3. Copy the JavaScript files to the **Scripts** directory of the Self-Service Portal. This directory is located in <MBAM Self-Service Install Directory>\\Self Service Website\\Scripts.
-
-4. Open **Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager**.
-
-5. Expand **Sites** > **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring**, and highlight **SelfService**.
-
- **Note**
- *SelfService* is the default virtual directory name. If you chose a different name for this directory during installation, remember to replace *SelfService* in the rest of these instructions with the name you chose.
-
-
-
-6. In the middle pane, double-click **Application Settings**.
-
-7. For each item in the following list, edit the application settings to reference the new location by replacing <virtual directory> with /SelfService/ (or the name you chose during installation). For example, the virtual directory path will be similar to /selfservice/scripts/jquery-1.7.2.min.js.
-
- - jQueryPath: /<virtual directory>/Scripts/ jQuery-1.7.2.min.js
-
- - MicrosoftAjaxPath: /<virtual directory>/Scripts/ MicrosoftAjax.js
-
- - MicrosoftMvcAjaxPath: /<virtual directory>/Scripts/ MicrosoftMvcAjax.js
-
- - MicrosoftMvcValidationPath: /<virtual directory>/Scripts/ MicrosoftMvcValidation.js
-
-**To install the Administration and Monitoring Server feature**
-
-1. MBAM can encrypt the communication between the Web Services and the Administration and Monitoring servers. If you choose the option to encrypt the communication, you are prompted to select the certification authority-provisioned certificate to use for encryption.
-
-2. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-3. Specify the remote instance of SQL Server (for example: *<ServerName>*) where the Compliance and Audit Database was installed.
-
-4. Specify the name of the Compliance and Audit Database. By default, the database name is MBAM Compliance Status. However, you can change the name when you install the Compliance and Audit Database.
-
-5. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-6. Specify the remote instance of SQL Server (for example: *<ServerName>*) where the Recovery Database was installed.
-
-7. Specify the name of the Recovery Database. By default, the database name is **MBAM Recovery and Hardware**. However, you can change the name when you install the Recovery Database feature.
-
-8. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-9. Specify the URL for the “Home” of the SQL Server Reporting Services (SRS) site. The default Home location of a SQL Server Reporting Services site instance is at:
-
- http://<NameofMBAMReportsServer>/ReportServer
-
- **Note**
- If SQL Server Reporting Services was configured as a named instance, the URL resembles the following: http://*<NameofMBAMReportsServer>*/ReportServer\_*<SRSInstanceName>*.
-
-
-
-10. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-11. Enter the **Port Number**, the **Host Name** (optional), and the **Installation Path** for the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server.
-
- **Note**
- The port number that you specify must be an unused port number on the Administration and Monitoring server unless you specify a unique host header name. If you are using Windows Firewall, the port will be opened automatically.
-
-
-
-12. To optionally register a Service Principal Name (SPN) for the Self-Service Portal, select **Register this machine’s Service Principal Names (SPN) with Active Directory (Required for Windows Authentication)**. If you select this check box, MBAM Setup will not try to register the existing SPNs, and you can manually register the SPN before or after the MBAM installation. For instructions on registering the SPN manually, see [Manual SPN Registration](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=286758).
-
-13. Click **Next** to continue with the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring Setup wizard.
-
-14. Specify whether to use Microsoft Updates to help keep your computer secure, and then click **Next**.
-
-15. When the selected MBAM feature information is completed, you are ready to start the MBAM installation by using the Setup wizard. Click **Back** to move through the wizard if you have to review or change your installation settings. Click **Install** to being the installation. Click **Cancel** to exit the wizard. Setup installs the MBAM features that you selected and notifies you that the installation is finished.
-
-16. Click **Finish** to exit the wizard.
-
-**To perform post-installation configuration**
-
-1. On the Administration and Monitoring Server, add users to the following local groups to give them access to the features on the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website.
-
- - **MBAM Helpdesk Users**: Members of this local group can access the Drive Recovery and Manage TPM features on the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website. All fields in Drive Recovery and Manage TPM are required fields for a Helpdesk User.
-
- - **MBAM Advanced Helpdesk Users**: Members of this local group have advanced access to the Drive Recovery and Manage TPM features on the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website. For Advanced Helpdesk Users, only the Key ID field is required in Drive Recovery. In **Manage TPM**, only the **Computer Domain** field and **Computer Name** field are required.
-
-2. On the server that hosts Administration and Monitoring Server and the Compliance and Audit Database and on the server that hosts the Compliance and Audit Reports, add users to the following local group to give them access to the Reports feature on the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website.
-
- - **MBAM Report Users**: Members of this local group can access the reports on the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website.
-
- **Note**
- Identical user or group membership of the **MBAM Report Users** local group must be maintained on all computers where the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server features, Compliance and Audit Database, and the Compliance and Audit Reports are installed.
-
-
-
-## Validating the MBAM Server Feature Installation
-
-
-When Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring Server feature installation is completed, we recommend that you validate that the installation has successfully set up all the necessary features for MBAM. Use the following procedure to confirm that the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring service is functional.
-
-**To validate an MBAM Server installation**
-
-1. On each server where an MBAM feature is deployed, open **Control Panel**, select **Programs**, and then select **Programs and Features**. Verify that **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring** appears in the **Programs and Features** list.
-
- **Note**
- To validate the MBAM installation, you must use a domain account that has local computer administrative credentials on each server.
-
-
-
-2. On the server where the Recovery Database is installed, open SQL Server Management Studio and verify that the **MBAM Recovery and Hardware** database is installed.
-
-3. On the server where the Compliance and Audit Database is installed, open SQL Server Management Studio and verify that the **MBAM Compliance Status Database** is installed.
-
-4. On the server where the Compliance and Audit Reports are installed, open a web browser with administrative credentials and browse to the “Home” of the SQL Server Reporting Services site.
-
- The default Home location of a SQL Server Reporting Services site instance can be found is at http://<NameofMBAMReportsServer>/Reports.aspx. To find the actual URL, use the Reporting Services Configuration Manager tool and select the instances that were specified during setup.
-
- Confirm that a reports folder named **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring** contains a data source called **MaltaDataSource** and that an **en-us** folder contains four reports.
-
- **Note**
- If SQL Server Reporting Services was configured as a named instance, the URL should resemble the following:http://*<NameofMBAMReportsServer>*/Reports\_*<SRSInstanceName>*
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Note**
-If SSRS was not configured to use Secure Socket Layer (SSL), the URL for the reports will be set to HTTP instead of HTTPS when you install the MBAM Server. If you then go to the Administration and Monitoring website and select a report, the following message appears: “Only Secure Content is Displayed.” To show the report, click **Show All Content**.
-~~~
-
-
-
-5. On the server where the Administration and Monitoring feature is installed, run **Server Manager** and browse to **Roles**. Select **Web Server (IIS)**, and then click **Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager**.
-
-6. In **Connections**, browse to *<computername>*, select **Sites**, and select **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring**. Verify that **MBAMAdministrationService**, **MBAMComplianceStatusService**, and **MBAMRecoveryAndHardwareService** are listed.
-
-7. On the server where the Administration and Monitoring features and Self-Service Portal are installed, open a web browser with administrative credentials and browse to the following locations to verify that they load successfully.
-
- **Note**
- The URLs ending in “.svc” do not display a website. Success is indicated by the message “Metadata publishing for this service is currently disabled” or by information resembling code. If you see some other error message or if the page cannot be found, the page has not loaded successfully.
-
-
-
-~~~
-- *http://<hostname>/HelpDesk/default.aspx* and confirm each of the links for navigation and reports
-
-- *http://<hostname>/SelfService>/*
-
-- *http://<computername>/MBAMAdministrationService/AdministrationService.svc*
-
-- *http://<hostname>/MBAMUserSupportService/UserSupportService.svc*
-
-- *http://<computername>/MBAMComplianceStatusService/StatusReportingService.svc*
-
-- *http://<computername>/MBAMRecoveryAndHardwareService/CoreService.svc*
-
-**Note**
-It is assumed that the server features were installed on the default port without network encryption. If you installed the server features on a different port or virtual directory, change the URLs to include the appropriate port, for example, *http://<hostname>:<port>/HelpDesk/default.aspx* or*http://<hostname>:<port>/<virtualdirectory>/default.aspx*
-
-If the server features were installed with network encryption, change http:// to https://.
-~~~
-
-
-
-8. Verify that each webpage loads successfully.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the MBAM 2.0 Server Infrastructure](deploying-the-mbam-20-server-infrastructure-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-install-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-install-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ef5c19da6f..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-install-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,149 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Install MBAM with Configuration Manager
-description: How to Install MBAM with Configuration Manager
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: fd0832e4-3b79-4e56-9550-d2f396be6d09
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Install MBAM with Configuration Manager
-
-
-This section describes the steps to install MBAM with Configuration Manager by using the recommended configuration, which is illustrated in [Getting Started - Using MBAM with Configuration Manager](getting-started---using-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md). The steps are divided into the following tasks:
-
-- Install and configure MBAM on the Configuration Manager Server
-
-- Install the Recovery and Audit Databases on the Database Server
-
-- Install the Administration and Monitoring Server features on the Administration and Monitoring Server
-
-Before you begin the installation, ensure that you have edited or created the necessary mof files. For instructions, see [How to Create or Edit the mof Files](how-to-create-or-edit-the-mof-files.md).
-
-**Important**
-If you are using a non-default SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) instance, you must start the MBAM Setup by using the following command line to specify the SSRS named instance:
-
-`MbamSetup.exe CM_SSRS_INSTANCE_NAME=`
-
-
-
-**To install MBAM on the Configuration Manager Server**
-
-1. On the Configuration Manager Server, run **MBAMSetup.exe** to start the MBAM installation wizard.
-
- **Note**
- To obtain the setup log files, you have to use the Msiexec package and the **/L** <location> option to install Configuration Manager. Log files are created in the location that you specify.
-
- Additional setup log files are created in the %temp% folder on the computer of the user who is installing Configuration Manager.
-
-
-
-2. On the **Welcome** page, optionally select the **Customer Experience Improvement Program**, and then click **Start**.
-
-3. Read and accept the Microsoft Software License Agreement, and then click **Next** to continue the installation.
-
-4. On the **Topology Selection** page, select **System Center Configuration Manager Integration**, and then click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Select features to install** page, select **System Center Configuration Manager Integration**.
-
- **Note**
- On the **Checking Prerequisites** page, click **Next** after the installation wizard checks the prerequisites for your installation and confirms that none are missing. If a missing prerequisite is detected, you have to resolve the missing prerequisites, and then click **Check prerequisites again.**
-
-
-
-6. Specify whether to use Microsoft Updates to help keep your computer secure, and then click **Next**. Using Microsoft Updates does not turn on Automatic Updates in Windows.
-
-7. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-8. On the **Installation Summary** page, review the list of features that will be installed, and click **Install** to start installing the MBAM features. Click **Back** to move back through the wizard if you have to review or change your installation settings, or click **Cancel** to exit Setup. Setup installs the MBAM features and notifies you that the installation is completed.
-
-9. Click **Finish** to exit the wizard.
-
-**To install the Recovery and Audit Databases on the Database Server**
-
-1. On the Database Server, run **MBAMSetup.exe** to start the MBAM installation wizard.
-
-2. On the **Welcome** page, optionally select the **Customer Experience Improvement Program**, and then click **Start**.
-
-3. Read and accept the Microsoft Software License Agreement, and then click **Next** to continue the installation.
-
-4. On the **Topology Selection** page, select the **System Center Configuration Manager Integration** topology, and then click **Next**.
-
-5. From the list of features to install, select **Recovery Database** and **Audit Database**, and clear the remaining features.
-
- **Note**
- The installation wizard checks the prerequisites for your installation and displays the prerequisites that are missing. If all of the prerequisites are met, the installation continues. If a missing prerequisite is detected, you have to resolve the missing prerequisites, and then click **Check prerequisites again**. If all prerequisites are met this time, the installation resumes.
-
-
-
-6. On the **Configure the Recovery Database** page, specify the names of the computers that will be running the Administration and Monitoring Server feature. After the Administration and Monitoring Server feature is deployed, it uses its domain account to connect to the database.
-
-7. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-8. Specify the SQL Server instance name and the name of the database that will store the recovery data. You must also specify both where the database will be located and where the log information will be located.
-
-9. Click **Next** to continue with the MBAM Setup installation wizard.
-
-10. On the **Configure the Audit Database** page, specify the user account that will be used to access the database for reports.
-
-11. Specify the computer names of the computers that will be running the Administration and Monitoring Server and the Audit Reports. After the Administration and Monitoring and the Audit Reports features are deployed, their domain accounts will be used to connect to the databases.
-
- **Note**
- If you are installing the Audit Database without the Audit Reports feature, you must add an exception on the Audit Database computer to enable inbound traffic on the Microsoft SQL Server port. The default port number is 1433.
-
-
-
-12. Specify the SQL Server instance name and the name of the database that will store the audit data. You must also specify where the database and log information will be located.
-
-13. Click **Install** to start the installation, and then click **Finish** to complete the installation.
-
-**To install the Administration and Monitoring Server features on the Administration and Monitoring Server**
-
-1. On the Administration and Monitoring Server, run **MBAMSetup.exe** to start the MBAM installation wizard.
-
-2. On the **Welcome** page, optionally select the **Customer Experience Improvement Program**, and then click **Start**.
-
-3. Read and accept the Microsoft Software License Agreement, and then click **Next** to continue the installation.
-
-4. On the **Topology Selection** page, select the **System Center Configuration Manager Integration** topology, and then click **Next**.
-
-5. From the list of features to install, select **Administration and Monitoring Server** and **Self-Service Portal**, and clear the remaining features.
-
- **Note**
- The installation wizard checks the prerequisites for your installation and displays the prerequisites that are missing. If all of the prerequisites are met, the installation continues. If a missing prerequisite is detected, you have to resolve the missing prerequisites, and then click **Check prerequisites again**. If all prerequisites are met this time, the installation resumes.
-
-
-
-6. Install the Self-Service Portal by following the steps in the **To install the Self-Service Portal** section in [How to Install and Configure MBAM on Distributed Servers](how-to-install-and-configure-mbam-on-distributed-servers-mbam-2.md).
-
- **Note**
- If the client computers will not have access to the Microsoft Content Delivery Network (CDN), which gives the Self-Service Portal the required access to certain JavaScript files, complete the steps in the **To configure the Self-Service Portal when end users cannot access the Microsoft Content Delivery Network** section [How to Install and Configure MBAM on Distributed Servers](how-to-install-and-configure-mbam-on-distributed-servers-mbam-2.md) to configure the Self-Service Portal to reference the JavaScript files from an accessible source.
-
-
-
-7. Install the Administration and Monitoring Server features by following the steps in the **To install the Administration and Monitoring Server feature** section in [How to Install and Configure MBAM on Distributed Servers](how-to-install-and-configure-mbam-on-distributed-servers-mbam-2.md).
-
-8. Click **Finish** to complete the installation.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[How to Validate the MBAM Installation with Configuration Manager](how-to-validate-the-mbam-installation-with-configuration-manager.md)
-
-[Deploying MBAM with Configuration Manager](deploying-mbam-with-configuration-manager-mbam2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-install-the-mbam-20-group-policy-template-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-install-the-mbam-20-group-policy-template-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 88d1e84dc4..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-install-the-mbam-20-group-policy-template-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,60 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Install the MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Template
-description: How to Install the MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Template
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: bc193232-d060-4285-842e-d194a74dd3c9
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Install the MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Template
-
-
-In addition to the server-related Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) features, the server setup application includes an Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring Group Policy template. This template can be installed on any computer capable of running the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC) or Advanced Group Policy Management (AGPM).
-
-The following steps describe how to install the MBAM Group Policy template.
-
-**Note**
-Make sure that you use the 32-bit setup on 32-bit servers and the 64-bit setup on 64-bit servers.
-
-
-
-**To install the MBAM Group Policy template**
-
-1. On the server where you want to install MBAM, run **MBAMSetup.exe** to start the MBAM installation wizard.
-
-2. On the **Welcome** page, optionally select the **Customer Experience Improvement Program**, and then click **Start**.
-
-3. Read and accept the Microsoft Software License Terms, and then click **Next** to continue the installation.
-
-4. By default, all Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring features are selected for installation. Clear all feature options except for **Policy Template**, and then click **Next** to continue the installation.
-
- **Note**
- The installation wizard checks the prerequisites for your installation and displays prerequisites that are missing. If all the prerequisites are met, the installation continues. If a missing prerequisite is detected, you have to resolve the missing prerequisites, and then click **Check prerequisites again**. Once all prerequisites are met, the installation will resume.
-
-
-
-5. For specific steps about how and where to install the templates, see [How to Download and Deploy MDOP Group Policy (.admx) Templates](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn659707.aspx).
-
-6. After the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring Setup wizard displays installation pages for the selected features, click **Finish** to close MBAM Setup.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Objects](deploying-mbam-20-group-policy-objects-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-manage-mbam-administrator-roles-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-manage-mbam-administrator-roles-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4f2389ef54..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-manage-mbam-administrator-roles-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Manage MBAM Administrator Roles
-description: How to Manage MBAM Administrator Roles
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 813ac0c4-3cf9-47af-b4cb-9395fd915e5c
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Manage MBAM Administrator Roles
-
-
-After Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) Setup is complete for all server features, administrative users will have to be granted access to them. As a best practice, administrators who will manage or use Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring Server features should be assigned to Domain Services security groups, and then those groups should be added to the appropriate MBAM administrative local group.
-
-**To manage MBAM Administrator Role memberships**
-
-1. Assign administrative users to security groups in Active Directory Domain Services.
-
-2. Add Active Directory security groups to the roles for MBAM administrative local groups on the MBAM server for the respective features.
-
- - **MBAM System Administrators** have access to all MBAM features in the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website.
-
- - **MBAM Helpdesk Users** have access to the Manage TPM and Drive Recovery options in the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website, but must fill in all fields when they use either option.
-
- - **MBAM Report Users** have access to the Compliance and Audit reports in the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website.
-
- - **MBAM Advanced Helpdesk Users** have access to the Manage TPM and Drive Recovery options in the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website, but are not required to fill in all fields when they use either option.
-
- For more information about roles for Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring, see [Planning for MBAM 2.0 Administrator Roles](planning-for-mbam-20-administrator-roles-mbam-2.md).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Administering MBAM 2.0 Features](administering-mbam-20-features-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-manage-mbam-client-bitlocker-encryption-options-by-using-the-control-panel-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-manage-mbam-client-bitlocker-encryption-options-by-using-the-control-panel-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index fafcf4f205..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-manage-mbam-client-bitlocker-encryption-options-by-using-the-control-panel-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Manage MBAM Client BitLocker Encryption Options by Using the Control Panel
-description: How to Manage MBAM Client BitLocker Encryption Options by Using the Control Panel
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: e2ff153e-5770-4a12-b79d-cda998b8a8ab
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Manage MBAM Client BitLocker Encryption Options by Using the Control Panel
-
-
-A Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) control panel application, called BitLocker Encryption Options, will be available under **System and Security** when the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring Client is installed. This custom MBAM control panel is an additional control panel. It does not replace the default Windows BitLocker control panel. The MBAM control panel can be used to unlock encrypted fixed and removable drives, and also manage your PIN or password. For more information about enabling the MBAM control panel, see [How to Hide Default BitLocker Encryption in the Windows Control Panel](how-to-hide-default-bitlocker-encryption-in-the-windows-control-panel-mbam-2.md).
-
-**To use the MBAM Client Control Panel**
-
-1. To open BitLocker Encryption Options, click **Start** and then select **Control Panel**. When **Control Panel** opens, select **System and Security**.
-
-2. Double-click **BitLocker Encryption Options** to open the customized MBAM control panel. You will see a list of all the hard disk drives on the computer and their encryption status, in addition to an option to manage your PIN or passwords.
-
- The list of hard disk drives on the computer can be used to verify encryption status, unlock a drive, or request an exemption for BitLocker protection if the User and Computer Exemption policies have been deployed.
-
- The BitLocker Encryption Options control panel also allows for non-administrator users to manage their PIN or passwords. By selecting **Manage PIN**, users are prompted to enter both a current PIN and a new PIN (in addition to confirming the new PIN). Selecting **Update PIN** will reset the PIN to the new one that the users selected.
-
- To manage your password, select **Unlock drive** and enter your current password. As soon as the drive is unlocked, select **Reset Password** to change your current password.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Administering MBAM 2.0 Features](administering-mbam-20-features-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-manage-user-bitlocker-encryption-exemptions-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-manage-user-bitlocker-encryption-exemptions-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a19aea482c..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-manage-user-bitlocker-encryption-exemptions-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,111 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Manage User BitLocker Encryption Exemptions
-description: How to Manage User BitLocker Encryption Exemptions
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 1bfd9d66-6a9a-4d0e-b54a-e5a6627f5ada
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Manage User BitLocker Encryption Exemptions
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) can be used to manage BitLocker protection by exempting users if there are users who do not need or want their drives encrypted.
-
-To exempt users from BitLocker protection, an organization will have to create an infrastructure to support exempted users, such as giving the user a contact telephone number, webpage, or mailing address to use to request an exemption. Also, an exempt user will have to be added to a security group for a Group Policy Object that was created specifically for exempted users. When members of this security group log on to a computer, the user’s Group Policy setting shows that the user is exempted from BitLocker protection. The user’s Group Policy setting overwrites the computer policy, and the computer will remain exempt from BitLocker encryption.
-
-**Note**
-If the computer is already BitLocker-protected, the user exemption policy has no effect.
-
-
-
-The following table shows how BitLocker protection is applied based on how exemptions are set.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
User Status
-
Computer Not Exempt
-
Computer Exempt
-
-
-
-
-
User not exempt
-
BitLocker protection is enforced on computer
-
BitLocker protection is not enforced on computer
-
-
-
User exempt
-
BitLocker protection is not enforced on computer
-
BitLocker protection is not enforced on computer
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**To exempt a user from BitLocker encryption**
-
-1. Create an Active Directory Domain Services security group that will be used to manage user exemptions from BitLocker encryption requirements.
-
-2. Create a Group Policy Object setting by using the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring Group Policy template and associate it with the Active Directory group that you created in the previous step. The policy settings to exempt users can be found under **UserConfiguration\\Administrative Templates\\Windows Components\\MDOP MBAM (BitLocker Management)**.
-
-3. After creating a security group for BitLocker-exempted users, add to this group the names of the users who are requesting an exemption. When users log on to a computer controlled by BitLocker, the MBAM client will check the User Exemption Policy setting and will suspend protection based on whether the user is part of the BitLocker exemption security group.
-
- **Important**
- Shared computer scenarios require special consideration when using user exemptions. If a non-exempt user logs on to a computer shared with an exempt user, the computer may be encrypted.
-
-
-
-**To enable users to request an exemption from BitLocker encryption**
-
-1. If you have configured user exemption policies by using the MBAM policy template, a user can request an exemption from BitLocker protection through the MBAM client.
-
-2. When users log on to a computer that is required to be encrypted, they receive a notification that their computer is going to be encrypted. They can select **Request Exemption** and postpone the encryption by selecting **Later**, or select **Start** to accept the BitLocker encryption.
-
- **Note**
- Selecting **Request Exemption** postpones the BitLocker protection until the maximum time that is set in the User Exemption Policy.
-
-
-
-3. If users select **Request Exemption**, they receive a notification telling them to contact your organization’s BitLocker administration group. Depending on how the Configure User Exemption Policy is configured, users are provided with one or more of the following contact methods:
-
- - Phone Number
-
- - Webpage URL
-
- - Mailing Address
-
- After the exemption request is received, the MBAM Administrator can take decide if it is appropriate to add the user to the BitLocker Exemption Active Directory group.
-
- **Note**
- Once a user submits an exemption request, the MBAM agent reports the user as “temporarily exempt” and then waits a configurable number of days before it checks the computer’s compliance again. If the MBAM administrator rejects the exemption request, the exemption request option is deactivated, which prevents the user from being able to request the exemption again.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Administering MBAM 2.0 Features](administering-mbam-20-features-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-move-mbam-20-features-to-another-computer-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-move-mbam-20-features-to-another-computer-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 353753ffd1..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-move-mbam-20-features-to-another-computer-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,700 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Move MBAM 2.0 Features to Another Computer
-description: How to Move MBAM 2.0 Features to Another Computer
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 49bc0792-60a4-473f-89cc-ada30191e04a
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Move MBAM 2.0 Features to Another Computer
-
-
-This topic describes the steps that you should take to move one or more Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) features to a different computer. When moving more than one Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring feature, you should move them in the following order:
-
-1. Recovery Database
-
-2. Compliance and Audit Database
-
-3. Compliance and Audit Reports
-
-4. Administration and Monitoring
-
-## Moving the Recovery Database
-
-
-To move the Recovery Database from one computer to another (for example, from Server A to Server B), use the following procedure.
-
-1. Stop all instances of the Administration and Monitoring web site.
-
-2. Run MBAM Setup on Server B.
-
-3. Back up the MBAM Recovery Database on Server A.
-
-4. Move the MBAM Recovery Database from Server A to B.
-
-5. Restore the MBAM Recovery Database on Server B.
-
-6. Configure access to the MBAM Recovery Database on Server B.
-
-7. Update the database connection data on MBAM Administration and Monitoring servers.
-
-8. Resume all instances of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website.
-
-**Stop All Instances of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Website**
-
-1. On each of the servers running the MBAM Administration and Monitoring feature, use the Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager console to stop the MBAM website, which is named **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring**.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use Windows PowerShell to enter command line that is similar to the:
-
- `PS C:\> Stop-Website “Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring”`
-
- **Note**
- To run this PowerShell command line, the IIS Module for PowerShell must be added to current instance of PowerShell. In addition, you must update the PowerShell execution policy to enable execution of scripts.
-
-
-
-**Run MBAM Setup on Server B**
-
-1. Run MBAM Setup on Server B and select only the **Recovery Database** for installation.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use Windows PowerShell to enter command line that is similar to the following:
-
- `PS C:\> MbamSetup.exe /qn I_ACCEPT_ENDUSER_LICENSE_AGREEMENT=1 AddLocal=KeyDatabase ADMINANDMON_MACHINENAMES=$DOMAIN$\$SERVERNAME$$ RECOVERYANDHWDB_SQLINSTANCE=$SERVERNAME$\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ TOPOLOGY=$X$`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the following values in the example above with those that match your environment:
-
- - $SERVERNAME$\\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ - Enter the name of the server and instance to which the Recovery Database will be moved.
-
- - $DOMAIN$\\$SERVERNAME$ - Enter the domain and server names of each MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server that will contact the Recovery Database. Use a semi-colon to separate each domain and server pairs in the list (for example, $DOMAIN\\SERVERNAME$;$DOMAIN\\$SERVERNAME$$). Each server name must be followed by a “$” symbol, as shown in the example (MyDomain\\MyServerName1$; MyDomain\\MyServerName2$).
-
- - $X$ - Enter **0** if you are installing the MBAM Stand-alone topology, or **1** if you are installing the MBAM Configuration Manager topology.
-
-
-
-**Back Up the Recovery Database on Server A**
-
-1. To back up the Recovery Database on Server A, use SQL Server Management Studio and the Task named Back Up. By default, the database name is **MBAM Recovery Database**.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, create a SQL file (.sql) that contains the following SQL script:
-
- Modify the MBAM Recovery Database to use the full recovery mode.
-
- ```sql
- USE master;
-
- GO
-
- ALTER DATABASE "MBAM Recovery and Hardware"
-
- SET RECOVERY FULL;
-
- GO
-
- -- Create MBAM Recovery Database Data and MBAM Recovery logical backup devices.
-
- USE master
-
- GO
-
- EXEC sp_addumpdevice 'disk', 'MBAM Recovery and Hardware Database Data Device',
-
- 'Z:\MBAM Recovery Database Data.bak';
-
- GO
-
- -- Back up the full MBAM Recovery Database.
-
- BACKUP DATABASE [MBAM Recovery and Hardware] TO [MBAM Recovery and Hardware Database Data Device];
-
- GO
-
- BACKUP CERTIFICATE [MBAM Recovery Encryption Certificate]
-
- TO FILE = 'Z:\SQLServerInstanceCertificateFile'
-
- WITH PRIVATE KEY
-
- (
-
- FILE = ' Z:\SQLServerInstanceCertificateFilePrivateKey',
-
- ENCRYPTION BY PASSWORD = '$PASSWORD$'
-
- );
-
- GO
- ```
-
- **Note**
- Replace the following values in the example above with those that match your environment:
-
- - $PASSWORD$ - Enter a password that you will use to encrypt the Private Key file.
-
-
-
-3. Run the SQL File by using SQL Server PowerShell and a command line that is similar to the following:
-
- `PS C:\> Invoke-Sqlcmd -InputFile 'Z:\BackupMBAMRecoveryandHardwarDatabaseScript.sql' -ServerInstance $SERVERNAME$\$SQLINSTANCENAME$`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the following values in the example above with those that match your environment:
-
- - $SERVERNAME$\\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ - Enter the name of the server and instance from which the Recovery Database will be backed up.
-
-
-
-**Move the Recovery Database and Certificate from Server A to Server B**
-
-1. Move the following file from Server A to Server B by using Windows Explorer.
-
- - MBAM Recovery Database data.bak
-
-2. To move the certificate for the encrypted database, use the following automation steps. To automate this procedure, you can use Windows PowerShell to enter a command line that is similar to the following:
-
- `PS C:\> Copy-Item “Z:\MBAM Recovery Database Data.bak” \\$SERVERNAME$\$DESTINATIONSHARE$`
-
- `PS C:\> Copy-Item “Z:\SQLServerInstanceCertificateFile” \\$SERVERNAME$\$DESTINATIONSHARE$`
-
- `PS C:\> Copy-Item “Z:\SQLServerInstanceCertificateFilePrivateKey” \\$SERVERNAME$\$DESTINATIONSHARE$`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the following value in the example above with those that match your environment:
-
- - $SERVERNAME$ - Enter the name of the server to which the files will be copied.
-
- - $DESTINATIONSHARE$ - Enter the name of the share and path to which the files will be copied.
-
-
-
-**Restore the Recovery Database on Server B**
-
-1. Restore the Recovery Database on Server B by using SQL Server Management Studio and the task named **Restore Database**.
-
-2. Once the task has been completed, select the database backup file by selecting the **From Device** option and then use the **Add** command to select the MBAM Recovery database **Data.bak** file.
-
-3. Select **OK** to complete the restoration process.
-
-4. To automate this procedure, create a SQL file (.sql) that contains the following-SQL script:
-
- ```sql
- -- Restore MBAM Recovery Database.
-
- USE master
-
- GO
-
- -- Drop certificate created by MBAM Setup.
-
- DROP CERTIFICATE [MBAM Recovery Encryption Certificate]
-
- GO
-
- --Add certificate
-
- CREATE CERTIFICATE [MBAM Recovery Encryption Certificate]
-
- FROM FILE = 'Z: \SQLServerInstanceCertificateFile'
-
- WITH PRIVATE KEY
-
- (
-
- FILE = ' Z:\SQLServerInstanceCertificateFilePrivateKey',
-
- DECRYPTION BY PASSWORD = '$PASSWORD$'
-
- );
-
- GO
-
- -- Restore the MBAM Recovery Database data and log files.
-
- RESTORE DATABASE [MBAM Recovery and Hardware]
-
- FROM DISK = 'Z:\MBAM Recovery Database Data.bak'
-
- WITH REPLACE
- ```
-
- **Note**
- Replace the following values in the example above with those that match your environment:
-
- - $PASSWORD$ - Enter a password that you used to encrypt the Private Key file.
-
-
-
-5. You can use Windows PowerShell to enter a command line that is similar to the following:
-
- `PS C:\> Invoke-Sqlcmd -InputFile 'Z:\RestoreMBAMRecoveryandHardwarDatabaseScript.sql' -ServerInstance $SERVERNAME$\$SQLINSTANCENAME$`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the following value in the example above with those that match your environment:
-
- - $SERVERNAME$\\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ - Enter the name of the server and instance to which the Recovery Database will be restored.
-
-
-
-**Configure Access to the Recovery Database on Server B**
-
-1. On Server B, use the Local user and Groups snap-in from Server Manager to add the computer accounts from each server that is running the MBAM Administration and Monitoring feature to the Local Group named **MBAM Recovery and Hardware DB Access**.
-
-2. Verify that the SQL login **MBAM Recovery and Hardware DB Access** on the restored database is mapped to the login name **$MachineName$\\MBAM Recovery and Hardware DB Access**. If it is not mapped as described, create another login with similar group memberships, and map it to the login name **$MachineName$\\MBAM Recovery and Hardware DB Access**.
-
-3. To automate this procedure, you can use Windows PowerShell on Server B to enter a command line that is similar to the following:
-
- `PS C:\> net localgroup "MBAM Recovery and Hardware DB Access" $DOMAIN$\$SERVERNAME$$ /add`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the following values in the example above with the applicable values for your environment:
-
- - $DOMAIN$\\$SERVERNAME$$ - Enter the domain and machine name of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server. The server name must be followed by a $, as shown in the example (for example, MyDomain\\MyServerName1$).
-
-
-
-~~~
-This command line must be run for each Administration and Monitoring Server that will be accessing the database in your environment.
-~~~
-
-**Update the Recovery Database Connection Data on the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Servers**
-
-1. On each of the servers running the MBAM Administration and Monitoring feature, use the Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager console to update the Connection String information for the following applications, which are hosted in the Administration and Monitoring website:
-
- - MBAMAdministrationService
-
- - MBAMRecoveryAndHardwareService
-
-2. Select each application and use the **Configuration Editor** feature, which is located under the **Management** section of the **Feature View**.
-
-3. Select the **configurationStrings** option from the **Section list** control.
-
-4. Select the row named **(Collection)** and open the **Collection Editor** by selecting the button on the right side of the row.
-
-5. In the **Collection Editor**, select the row named **KeyRecoveryConnectionString** when updating the configuration for the MBAMAdministrationService application or the row named Microsoft.Mbam.RecoveryAndHardwareDataStore.ConnectionString when updating the configuration for the MBAMRecoveryAndHardwareService.
-
-6. Update the **Data Source=** value for the **configurationStrings** property to list the server name and instance (for example, $SERVERNAME$\\$SQLINSTANCENAME$) where the Recovery Database was moved to.
-
-7. To automate this procedure, you can use Windows to enter a command line, that is similar to the following, on each Administration and Monitoring Server:
-
- `PS C:\> Set-WebConfigurationProperty '/connectionStrings/add[@name="KeyRecoveryConnectionString"]' -PSPath "IIS:\sites\Microsoft Bitlocker Administration and Monitoring\MBAMAdministrationService" -Name "connectionString" -Value “Data Source=$SERVERNAME$\$SQLINSTANCENAME$;Initial Catalog=MBAM Recovery and Hardware;Integrated Security=SSPI;”`
-
- `PS C:\> Set-WebConfigurationProperty '/connectionStrings/add[@name="Microsoft.Mbam.RecoveryAndHardwareDataStore.ConnectionString"]' -PSPath "IIS:\sites\Microsoft Bitlocker Administration and Monitoring\MBAMRecoveryAndHardwareService" -Name "connectionString" -Value "Data Source=$SERVERNAME$\$SQLINSTANCENAME$;Initial Catalog=MBAM Recovery and Hardware;Integrated Security=SSPI;"`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the following value in the example above with those that match your environment:
-
- - $SERVERNAME$\\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ - Enter the server name and instance where the Recovery Database is.
-
-
-
-**Resume all Instances of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Website**
-
-1. On each server that is running the MBAM Administration and Monitoring feature, use the Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager console to start the MBAM website, which is named **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring**.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use Windows PowerShell to enter a command line that is similar to the:
-
- `PS C:\> Start-Website “Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring”`
-
-## Moving the Compliance and Audit Database Feature
-
-
-If you want to move the MBAM Compliance and Audit Database from one computer to another (that is, move the database from Server A to Server B), use the following procedure. The process includes the following high-level steps:
-
-1. Stop all instances of the Administration and Monitoring website.
-
-2. Run MBAM setup on Server B.
-
-3. Back up the Database on Server A.
-
-4. Move the Database from Server A to B.
-
-5. Restore the Database on Server B.
-
-6. Configure access to the Database on Server B.
-
-7. Update the database connection data on the MBAM Administration and Monitoring servers.
-
-8. Update the SSRS reports data source connection string with the new location of the Compliance and Audit Database.
-
-9. Resume all instances of the Administration and Monitoring website.
-
-**Stop All Instances of the Administration and Monitoring Website**
-
-1. On each server that is running the MBAM Administration and Monitoring feature, use the Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager console to stop the MBAM website named **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring**.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use Windows PowerShell to enter a command line that is similar to the following:
-
- `PS C:\> Stop-s “Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring”`
-
- **Note**
- To run this command line, you must add the IIS Module for PowerShell to the current instance of PowerShell. In addition, you must update the PowerShell execution policy to enable scripts to be run.
-
-
-
-**Run MBAM Setup on Server B**
-
-1. Run MBAM Setup on Server B and select only the **Compliance and Audit Database** for installation.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use Windows PowerShell to enter a command line that is similar to the following:
-
- `PS C:\> MbamSetup.exe /qn I_ACCEPT_ENDUSER_LICENSE_AGREEMENT=1 AddLocal= ReportsDatabase ADMINANDMON_MACHINENAMES=$DOMAIN$\$SERVERNAME$ COMPLIDB_SQLINSTANCE=$SERVERNAME$\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ REPORTS_USERACCOUNT=$DOMAIN$\$USERNAME$ TOPOLOGY=$X$`
-
- **Note**
- Note: Replace the following values in the example above with those that match your environment:
-
- - $SERVERNAME$\\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ - Enter the server name and instance where the Compliance and Audit Database will be moved to.
-
- - $DOMAIN$\\$SERVERNAME$ - Enter the domain and server names of each MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server that will contact the Compliance and Audit Database. Use a semi-colon to separate each domain and server pair in the list (for example, $DOMAIN\\SERVERNAME$;$DOMAIN\\$SERVERNAME$$). Each server name must be followed by a “$” symbol, as shown in the example (MyDomain\\MyServerName1$; MyDomain\\MyServerName2$).
-
- - $DOMAIN$\\$USERNAME$ - Enter the domain and user name that will be used by the Compliance and Audit Reports feature to connect to the Compliance and Audit Database.
-
- - $X$ - Enter **0** if you are installing the MBAM Stand-alone topology, or **1** if you are installing the MBAM Configuration Manager topology.
-
-
-
-**Back Up the Compliance and Audit Database on Server A**
-
-1. To back up the Compliance and Audit Database on Server A, use SQL Server Management Studio and the task named **Back Up**. By default, the database name is **MBAM Compliance Status Database**.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, create a SQL file (.sql) that contains the following-SQL script:
-
- ```sql
- -- Modify the MBAM Compliance Status Database to use the full recovery model.
-
- USE master;
-
- GO
-
- ALTER DATABASE "MBAM Compliance Status"
-
- SET RECOVERY FULL;
-
- GO
-
- -- Create MBAM Compliance Status Data logical backup devices.
-
- USE master
-
- GO
-
- EXEC sp_addumpdevice 'disk', 'MBAM Compliance Status Database Data Device',
-
- 'Z: \MBAM Compliance Status Database Data.bak';
-
- GO
-
- -- Back up the full MBAM Recovery database.
-
- BACKUP DATABASE [MBAM Compliance Status] TO [MBAM Compliance Status Database Data Device];
-
- GO
- ```
-
-3. Run the SQL file by using a Windows PowerShell command line that is similar to the following:
-
- `PS C:\> Invoke-Sqlcmd -InputFile "Z:\BackupMBAMComplianceStatusDatabaseScript.sql" –ServerInstance $SERVERNAME$\$SQLINSTANCENAME$`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the following value in the example above with those that match your environment:
-
- - $SERVERNAME$\\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ - Enter the server name and instance where the Compliance and Audit database will be backed up from.
-
-
-
-**Move the Compliance and Audit Database from Server A to B**
-
-1. Move the following files from Server A to Server B using Windows Explorer.
-
- - MBAM Compliance Status Database Data.bak
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use Windows PowerShell to enter a command line that is similar to the following:
-
- `PS C:\> Copy-Item “Z:\MBAM Compliance Status Database Data.bak” \\$SERVERNAME$\$DESTINATIONSHARE$`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the following values in the example above with those that match your environment:
-
- - $SERVERNAME$ - Enter the server name where the files will be copied to.
-
- - $DESTINATIONSHARE$ - Enter the name of share and path where the files will be copied to.
-
-
-
-**Restore the Compliance and Audit Database on Server B**
-
-1. Restore the Compliance and Audit Database on Server B by using SQL Server Management Studio and the task named **Restore Database**.
-
-2. Once the task has been completed, select the database backup file by selecting the **From Device** option and then use the **Add** command to select the MBAM Compliance Status Database Data.bak file. Select **OK** to complete the restoration process.
-
-3. To automate this procedure, create a SQL file (.sql) that contains the following-SQL script:
-
- ```sql
- -- Create MBAM Compliance Status Database Data logical backup devices.
-
- Use master
-
- GO
-
- -- Restore the MBAM Compliance Status database data files.
-
- RESTORE DATABASE [MBAM Compliance Status]
-
- FROM DISK = 'C:\test\MBAM Compliance Status Database Data.bak'
-
- WITH REPLACE
- ```
-
-4. Run the SQL File by using a Windows PowerShell command line that is similar to the following:
-
- `PS C:\> Invoke-Sqlcmd -InputFile "Z:\RestoreMBAMComplianceStatusDatabaseScript.sql" -ServerInstance $SERVERNAME$\$SQLINSTANCENAME$`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the following value in the example above with those that match your environment:
-
- - $SERVERNAME$\\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ - Enter the server name and instance where the Compliance and Audit Database will be restored to.
-
-
-
-**Configure Access to the Compliance and Audit Database on Server B**
-
-1. On Server B, use the Local user and Groups snap-in from Server Manager to add the computer accounts from each server that is running the MBAM Administration and Monitoring feature to the local group named **MBAM Compliance Status DB Access**.
-
-2. Verify that the SQL login **MBAM Compliance Auditing DB Access** on the restored database is mapped to the login name **$MachineName$\\ MBAM Compliance Auditing DB Access**. If it is not mapped as described, create another login with similar group memberships, and map it to the login name **$MachineName$\\ MBAM Compliance Auditing DB Access**.
-
-3. To automate this procedure, you can use Windows PowerShell to enter a command line on Server B that is similar to the following:
-
- `PS C:\> net localgroup "MBAM Compliance Auditing DB Access" $DOMAIN$\$SERVERNAME$$ /add`
-
- `PS C:\> net localgroup "MBAM Compliance Auditing DB Access" $DOMAIN$\$REPORTSUSERNAME$ /add`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the following values in the example above with the applicable values for your environment:
-
- - $DOMAIN$\\$SERVERNAME$$ - Enter the domain and machine name of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server. The server name must be followed by a “$” as shown in the example. (for example, MyDomain\\MyServerName1$)
-
- - $DOMAIN$\\$REPORTSUSERNAME$ - Enter the user account name that was used to configure the data source for the Compliance and Audit Reports.
-
-
-
-~~~
-The command line for adding the servers to the MBAM Compliance and Audit Database access local group must be run for each Administration and Monitoring Server that will be accessing the database in your environment.
-~~~
-
-**Update the Database Connection Data on MBAM Administration and Monitoring Servers**
-
-1. On each server that is running the MBAM Administration and Monitoring feature, use the Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager console to update the connection string information for the following applications, which are hosted in the Administration and Monitoring website:
-
- - MBAMAdministrationService
-
- - MBAMComplianceStatusService
-
-2. Select each application and use the **Configuration Editor** feature, which is located under the **Management** section of the **Feature View**.
-
-3. Select the **configurationStrings** option from the **Section list** control.
-
-4. Select the row named **(Collection)**, and open the **Collection Editor** by selecting the button on the right side of the row.
-
-5. In the **Collection Editor**, select the row named **ComplianceStatusConnectionString** when updating the configuration for the MBAMAdministrationService application, or the row named **Microsoft.Windows.Mdop.BitLockerManagement.StatusReportDataStore.ConnectionString** when updating the configuration for the MBAMComplianceStatusService.
-
-6. Update the **Data Source=** value for the **configurationStrings** property to list the name of the server and instance (for example, $SERVERNAME$\\$SQLINSTANCENAME) to which the Recovery Database was moved.
-
-7. To automate this procedure, you can use Windows to enter a command line on each Administration and Monitoring Server that is similar to the following:
-
- `PS C:\> Set-WebConfigurationProperty '/connectionStrings/add[@name="ComplianceStatusConnectionString"]' -PSPath "IIS:\sites\Microsoft Bitlocker Administration and Monitoring\MBAMAdministrationService" -Name "connectionString" -Value "Data Source=$SERVERNAME$\$SQLINSTANCENAME$;Initial Catalog=MBAM Compliance Status;Integrated Security=SSPI;"`
-
- `PS C:\> Set-WebConfigurationProperty '/connectionStrings/add[@name="Microsoft.Windows.Mdop.BitLockerManagement.StatusReportDataStore.ConnectionString"]' -PSPath "IIS:\sites\Microsoft Bitlocker Administration and Monitoring\MBAMComplianceStatusService" -Name "connectionString" -Value "Data Source=$SERVERNAME$\$SQLINSTANCENAME;Initial Catalog=MBAM Compliance Status;Integrated Security=SSPI;"`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the following values in the example above with those that match your environment:
-
- - $SERVERNAME$\\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ - Enter the server name and instance where the Recovery Database is located.
-
-
-
-**Resume All Instances of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Website**
-
-1. On each server that is running the MBAM Administration and Monitoring feature, use the Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager console to start the MBAM website named **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring**.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use Windows PowerShell to enter a command line that is similar to the following:
-
- `PS C:\> Start-Website “Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring”`
-
-## Moving the Compliance and Audit Reports
-
-
-If you want to move the MBAM Compliance and Audit Reports from one computer to another (that is, move the reports from Server A to Server B), use the following procedure, which includes the following high-level steps:
-
-1. Run MBAM setup on Server B.
-
-2. Configure access to the Compliance and Audit Reports on Server B.
-
-3. Stop all instances of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website.
-
-4. Update the reports connection data on MBAM Administration and Monitoring servers.
-
-5. Resume all instances of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website.
-
-**Run MBAM Setup on Server B**
-
-1. Run MBAM Setup on Server B and select only the **Compliance and Audit Reports** feature for installation.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use Windows PowerShell to enter a command line that is similar to the following:
-
- `PS C:\> MbamSetup.exe /qn I_ACCEPT_ENDUSER_LICENSE_AGREEMENT=1 AddLocal=Reports COMPLIDB_SQLINSTANCE=$SERVERNAME$\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ REPORTS_USERACCOUNTPW=$PASSWORD$ TOPOLOGY=$X$`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the following values in the example above with those that match your environment:
-
- - $SERVERNAME$\\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ - Enter the server name and instance where the Compliance and Audit Database is located.
-
- - $DOMAIN$\\$USERNAME$ - Enter the domain and user name that will be used by the Compliance and Audit Reports feature to connect to the Compliance and Audit Database.
-
- - $PASSWORD$ - Enter the password of the user account that will be used to connect to the Compliance and Audit Database.
-
- - $X$ - Enter **0** if you are installing the MBAM Stand-alone topology, or **1** if you are installing the MBAM Configuration Manager topology.
-
-
-
-**Configure Access to the Compliance and Audit Reports on Server B**
-
-1. On Server B, use the Local user and Groups snap-in from Server Manager to add the user accounts that will have access to the Compliance and Audit Reports. Add the user accounts to the local group named MBAM Report Users.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use Windows PowerShell to enter a command line on Server B that is similar to the following:
-
- `PS C:\> net localgroup "MBAM Report Users" $DOMAIN$\$REPORTSUSERNAME$ /add`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the following values in the example above with the applicable values for your environment:
-
- - $DOMAIN$\\$REPORTSUSERNAME$ - Enter the user account name that was used to configure the data source for the Compliance and Audit reports.
-
-
-
-~~~
-The command line for adding the users to the MBAM Report Users local group must be run for each user that will be accessing the reports in your environment.
-~~~
-
-**Stop All Instances of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Website**
-
-1. On each server that is running the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server feature, use the Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager console to stop the MBAM website named **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring**.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use Windows PowerShell to enter a command line that is similar to the following:
-
- `PS C:\> Stop-Website “Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring”`
-
-**Update the Database Connection Data on the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Servers**
-
-1. On each server that is running the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server feature, use the Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager console to update the Compliance and Audit Reports URL.
-
-2. Select the **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring** website, and use the **Configuration Editor** feature that is location under the **Management** section of the **Feature View**.
-
-3. Select the **appSettings** option from the **Section list** control.
-
-4. Select the row named **(Collection)** and open the **Collection Editor** by selecting the button on the right side of the row.
-
-5. In the **Collection Editor**, select the row named **Microsoft.Mbam.Reports.Url**.
-
-6. Update the value for **Microsoft.Mbam.Reports.Url** to reflect the server name for Server B. If the Compliance and Audit Reports feature was installed on a named SQL Reporting Services instance, be sure to add or update the name of the instance to the URL (for example, http://$SERVERNAME$/ReportServer\_$SQLSRSINSTANCENAME$/Pages....)
-
-7. To automate this procedure, you can use Windows PowerShell to enter a command line on each Administration and Monitoring Server that is similar to the following:
-
- `PS C:\> Set-WebConfigurationProperty '/appSettings/add[@key="Microsoft.Mbam.Reports.Url"]' -PSPath "IIS:\ \sites\Microsoft Bitlocker Administration and Monitoring\HelpDesk" -Name "Value" -Value “http://$SERVERNAME$/ReportServer_$SRSINSTANCENAME$/Pages/ReportViewer.aspx?/ Microsoft+BitLocker+Administration+and+Monitoring/”`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the following values in the example above with those that match your environment:
-
- - $SERVERNAME$ - Enter the name of the server name to which the Compliance and Audit Reports were installed.
-
- - $SRSINSTANCENAME$ - Enter the name of the SQL Reporting Services instance to which the Compliance and Audit Reports were installed.
-
-
-
-**Resume All Instances of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Website**
-
-1. On each server that is running the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server feature, use the Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager console to Start the MBAM website named **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring**.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use Windows PowerShell to enter a command line that is similar to the following:
-
- `PS C:\> Start-Website “Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring”`
-
- **Note**
- To run this command line, you must add the IIS Module for PowerShell to current instance of PowerShell. In addition, you must update the PowerShell execution policy to enable scripts to be run.
-
-
-
-## Moving the Administration and Monitoring Feature
-
-
-If you want to move the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Reports feature from one computer to another (that is, move the feature from Server A to Server B), use the following procedure, which includes the following high-level steps:
-
-1. Run MBAM Setup on Server B.
-
-2. Configure access to the Database on Server B.
-
-**Run MBAM Setup on Server B**
-
-1. Run MBAM Setup on Server B and select only the **Administration and Monitoring Server** feature for installation.
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use Windows PowerShell to enter a command line that is similar to the following:
-
- `PS C:\> MbamSetup.exe /qn I_ACCEPT_ENDUSER_LICENSE_AGREEMENT=1 AddLocal=AdministrationMonitoringServer, COMPLIDB_SQLINSTANCE=$SERVERNAME$\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ RECOVERYANDHWDB_SQLINSTANCE=$SERVERNAME$\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ SRS_REPORTSITEURL=$REPORTSSERVERURL$ TOPOLOGY=$X$`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the following values in the example above with those that match your environment:
-
- - $SERVERNAME$\\$SQLINSTANCENAME$ - For the COMPLIDB\_SQLINSTANCE parameter, enter the server name and instance where the Compliance and Audit Database is located. For the RECOVERYANDHWDB\_SQLINSTANCE parameter, enter the server name and instance where the Recovery Database is located.
-
- - $DOMAIN$\\$USERNAME$ - Enter the domain and user name that will be used by the Compliance and Audit Reports feature to connect to the Compliance and Audit Database.
-
- - $ REPORTSSERVERURL$ - Enter the URL for the Home location of the SQL Reporting Service website. If the reports were installed to a default SRS instance, the URL format will have the format “http:// $SERVERNAME$/ReportServer”. If the reports were installed to a default SRS instance, the URL format will have the format “http://$SERVERNAME$/ReportServer\_$SQLINSTANCENAME$”.
-
- - $X$ - Enter **0** if you are installing the MBAM Stand-alone topology, or **1** if you are installing the MBAM Configuration Manager topology.
-
-
-
-**Configure Access to the Databases**
-
-1. On the server or servers where the Recovery Database and Compliance and Audit Database are deployed, use the Local user and Groups snap-in from Server Manager to add the computer accounts from each server that is running the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server feature to the local groups named **MBAM Recovery and Hardware DB Access** (Recovery DB Server) and **MBAM Compliance Status DB Access** (Compliance and Audit Database Server).
-
-2. To automate this procedure, you can use Windows PowerShell to enter a command line, that is similar to the following, on the server where the Compliance and Audit Database was deployed.
-
- `PS C:\> net localgroup "MBAM Compliance Auditing DB Access" $DOMAIN$\$SERVERNAME$$ /add`
-
-3. On the server where the Recovery database was deployed, you can use Windows PowerShell to enter a command line that is similar to the following:
-
- `PS C:\> net localgroup "MBAM Recovery and Hardware DB Access" $DOMAIN$\$SERVERNAME$$ /add`
-
- **Note**
- Replace the following value in the example above with the applicable values for your environment:
-
- - $DOMAIN$\\$SERVERNAME$$ - Enter the domain and machine name of the Administration and Monitoring Server. The server name must be followed by a “$” symbol, as shown in the example (for example, MyDomain\\MyServerName1$).
-
- - $DOMAIN$\\$REPORTSUSERNAME$ - Enter the user account name that was used to configure the data source for the Compliance and Audit Reports.
-
-
-
-~~~
-The command lines that are listed for adding server computer accounts to the MBAM local groups must be run for each Administration and Monitoring Server that will be accessing the databases in your environment.
-~~~
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Maintaining MBAM 2.0](maintaining-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-recover-a-corrupted-drive-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-recover-a-corrupted-drive-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0bc49581fa..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-recover-a-corrupted-drive-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Recover a Corrupted Drive
-description: How to Recover a Corrupted Drive
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: b0457a00-f72e-4ad8-ab3b-7701851ca87e
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Recover a Corrupted Drive
-
-
-To recover a corrupted drive protected by BitLocker, a Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) Help Desk user will need to create a recovery key package file. This package file can then be copied to the computer that contains the corrupted drive, and then used to recover the drive. Use the following procedure for the steps needed to do this.
-
-**Important**
-To avoid a potential loss of data, it is strongly recommended that you read the “repair-bde” help and clearly understand how to use the command before completing the following instructions.
-
-
-
-**To recover a corrupted drive**
-
-1. To create the recovery key package necessary to recover a corrupted drive, start a web browser and open the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website.
-
-2. Select **Drive Recovery** from the left navigation pane. Enter the user’s domain name, user name, reason for unlocking the drive, and the user’s recovery password ID.
-
- **Note**
- If you are a member of the Help Desk Administrators role, you do not have to enter the user’s domain name or user name.
-
-
-
-3. Click **Submit**. The recovery key will be displayed.
-
-4. Click **Save**, and then select **Recovery Key Package**. The recovery key package will be created on your computer.
-
-5. Copy the recovery key package to the computer that has the corrupted drive.
-
-6. Open an elevated command prompt. To do this, click **Start** and type `cmd` in the **Search programs and files box**. Right-click **cmd.exe** and select **Run as Administrator**.
-
-7. At the command prompt, type the following:
-
- `repair-bde -kp -rp `
-
- **Note**
- Replace <fixed drive> with an available hard disk drive that has free space equal to or larger than the data on the corrupted drive. Data on the corrupted drive is recovered and moved to the specified hard disk drive.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Performing BitLocker Management with MBAM](performing-bitlocker-management-with-mbam-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-recover-a-drive-in-recovery-mode-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-recover-a-drive-in-recovery-mode-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a4e2df88a3..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-recover-a-drive-in-recovery-mode-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,77 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Recover a Drive in Recovery Mode
-description: How to Recover a Drive in Recovery Mode
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 8b792bc8-b671-4345-9d37-0208db3e5b03
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Recover a Drive in Recovery Mode
-
-
-The encrypted drive recovery features of Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) ensure the capture and storage of data and availability of tools required to access a BitLocker-protected volume when BitLocker goes into recovery mode. A BitLocker-protected volume goes into recovery mode when a PIN or password is lost or forgotten, or when the Trusted Module Platform (TPM) chip detects changes to the BIOS or startup files of a computer.
-
-Use this procedure to access the centralized key recovery data system, which can provide a recovery password if a recovery password ID and associated user identifier are supplied.
-
-**Important**
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring uses single-use recovery keys that expire upon use. The single use of a recovery password is automatically applied to operating system drives and fixed drives. On removable drives, it is applied when the drive is removed and then re-inserted and unlocked on a computer that has Group Policy settings activated to manage removable drives.
-
-
-
-**To recover a drive in recovery mode**
-
-1. Open a web browser and navigate to the Administration and Monitoring website.
-
-2. In the navigation pane, click **Drive Recovery**. The “Recover access to an encrypted drive” webpage opens.
-
-3. Enter the Windows Logon domain and user name of the user to view recovery information and the first eight digits of the recovery key ID to receive a list of possible matching recovery keys or the entire recovery key ID to receive the exact recovery key.
-
-4. Select one of the predefined options from the **Reason for Drive Unlock** list, and then click **Submit**.
-
- **Note**
- If you are an MBAM Advanced Helpdesk user, the user domain and user ID entries are not required.
-
-
-
-~~~
-MBAM returns the following:
-
-- An error message if no matching recovery password is found
-
-- Multiple possible matches if the user has multiple matching recovery passwords
-
-- The recovery password and recovery package for the submitted user
-
- **Note**
- If you are recovering a damaged drive, the recovery package option provides BitLocker with critical information that it needs to recover the drive.
-
-
-
-After the recovery password and recovery package are retrieved, the recovery password is displayed.
-~~~
-
-5. To copy the password, click **Copy Key**, and then paste the recovery password into an email message. Alternatively, click **Save** to save the recovery password to a file.
-
- When the user types the recovery password into the system or uses the recovery package, the drive is unlocked.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Performing BitLocker Management with MBAM](performing-bitlocker-management-with-mbam-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-recover-a-moved-drive-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-recover-a-moved-drive-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8c02d3e434..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-recover-a-moved-drive-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Recover a Moved Drive
-description: How to Recover a Moved Drive
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 697cd78d-962c-411e-901a-2e9220ba6552
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Recover a Moved Drive
-
-
-When you move an operating system drive that is encrypted by using Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM), the drive will not accept the PIN that was used in a previous computer because of the change to the Trusted Platform Module (TPM) chip. To use the moved drive, you will need a way to obtain the recovery key ID to retrieve the recovery password. Use the following procedure to recover a drive that has moved.
-
-**To recover a moved drive**
-
-1. On the computer that contains the moved drive, start the computer in Windows recovery environment (WinRE) mode, or start the computer by using the Microsoft Diagnostic and Recovery Toolset (DaRT).
-
-2. Once the computer has been started with WinRE or DaRT, Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring will treat the moved operating system drive as a data drive. MBAM will then display the drive’s recovery password ID and ask for the recovery password.
-
- **Note**
- In some cases, you may be able to click **I forgot the PIN** during the startup process, and then enter the recovery mode to display the recovery key ID.
-
-
-
-3. Use the recovery key ID to retrieve the recovery password and unlock the drive from the Administration and Monitoring website.
-
-4. If the moved drive was configured to use a TPM chip on the original computer, you must take additional steps after unlocking the drive and completing the start process. In WinRE mode, open a command prompt and use the **manage-bde** tool to decrypt the drive. Using this tool is the only way to remove the TPM plus PIN protector without the original TPM chip.
-
-5. Once the removal is completed, start the computer normally. The MBAM agent will now enforce the policy to encrypt the drive with the new computer’s TPM plus PIN.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Performing BitLocker Management with MBAM](performing-bitlocker-management-with-mbam-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-reset-a-tpm-lockout-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-reset-a-tpm-lockout-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b41efb0bd6..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-reset-a-tpm-lockout-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,72 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Reset a TPM Lockout
-description: How to Reset a TPM Lockout
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 20719ab2-18ae-4d3b-989a-539341909816
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Reset a TPM Lockout
-
-
-The Encrypted Drive Recovery feature of Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) encompasses both the capture and storage of data and the availability for tools that are needed to manage the Trusted Platform Module (TPM). This topic covers how to access the centralized Key Recovery data system in the Administration and Monitoring website, which can provide a TPM owner password file when a computer ID and associated user identifier are supplied.
-
-A TPM lockout can occur if a user enters the incorrect PIN too many times. The number of times that a user can enter an incorrect PIN before the TPM locks varies from manufacturer to manufacturer.
-
-You can reset a TPM lockout only if MBAM owns the TPM.
-
-**To reset a TPM lockout**
-
-1. Open a web browser and navigate to the Administration and Monitoring website.
-
-2. In the left navigation pane, select **Manage TPM** to open the **Manage TPM** page.
-
-3. Enter the fully qualified domain name for the computer and the computer name, and enter the user’s Windows logon domain and the user’s user name to retrieve the TPM owner password file.
-
-4. From the **Reason for requesting TPM owner password file** list, select a reason for the request, and click **Submit**.
-
- MBAM returns one of the following:
-
- - An error message, if no matching TPM owner password file is found
-
- - The TPM owner password file for the submitted computer
-
- **Note**
- If you are an Advanced Helpdesk user, the user domain and user ID fields are not required.
-
-
-
-~~~
-After the TPM owner password is retrieved, the owner password is displayed.
-~~~
-
-5. To save the password to a .tpm file, click the **Save** button.
-
- The user will run the TPM management console, select the **Reset TPM lockout** option, and provide the TPM owner password file to reset the TPM lockout.
-
- **Important**
- Help Desk administrators should not give the TPM hash value or TPM owner password file to end users. The TPM information does not change, so it could pose a security risk if the file is given to end users.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Performing BitLocker Management with MBAM](performing-bitlocker-management-with-mbam-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-use-a-command-line-to-install-the-mbam-client.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-use-a-command-line-to-install-the-mbam-client.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b28772f06b..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-use-a-command-line-to-install-the-mbam-client.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Use a Command Line to Install the MBAM Client
-description: How to Use a Command Line to Install the MBAM Client
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 4dc8f944-c2fd-4d89-aed6-e9dc77de3ae4
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Use a Command Line to Install the MBAM Client
-
-
-You can use a command line to deploy the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) 2.0 Client.
-
-## Command Line for Deploying the MBAM 2.0 Client
-
-
-Use the following command line to deploy the MBAM Client:
-
-`MBAMClientSetup.exe /q`
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the MBAM 2.0 Client](deploying-the-mbam-20-client-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-use-a-command-line-to-install-the-mbam-server.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-use-a-command-line-to-install-the-mbam-server.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 856a5c7584..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-use-a-command-line-to-install-the-mbam-server.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,219 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Use a Command Line to Install the MBAM Server
-description: How to Use a Command Line to Install the MBAM Server
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 6ffc6d41-a793-42c2-b997-95ba47550648
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Use a Command Line to Install the MBAM Server
-
-
-You can use a command line to install the MBAM Server with either the Stand-alone or Configuration Manager topology. The following command line example is for deploying MBAM on a single server, which is an architecture that should be used only in a test environment. You will need to change the command line accordingly when you deploy MBAM to a production environment, which should have multiple servers.
-
-## Command Line for Deploying the MBAM 2.0 Server with the Stand-alone Topology
-
-
-You can use a command line that is similar to the following to install the MBAM Server with the Stand-alone topology.
-
-``` syntax
-MbamSetup.exe /qb /l*v MaltaServerInstall.log TOPOLOGY=0 I_ACCEPT_ENDUSER_LICENSE_AGREEMENT=1 ADDLOCAL=KeyDatabase,ReportsDatabase,Reports,AdministrationMonitoringServer,SelfServiceServer,PolicyTemplate,REPORTS_USERACCOUNT=[UserDomain]\[UserName1] REPORTS_USERACCOUNTPW=[UserPwd1] COMPLIDB_SQLINSTANCE=%computername% RECOVERYANDHWDB_SQLINSTANCE=%computername% SRS_INSTANCENAME=%computername% ADMINANDMON_WEBSITE_PORT=83 WEBSITE_PORT=83
-```
-
-The following table describes the command line parameters for deploying the MBAM Server with the Stand-alone topology.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
Parameter Value
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
TOPOLOGY
-
0
-
0 – Stand-alone topology
-
-
-
I_ACCEPT_ENDUSER_LICENSE_AGREEMENT
-
01
-
0 – do not accept the license agreement1 – accept the license agreement
-
-
-
ADDLOCAL
-
-
Features to be installed on the Server
-
-
-
-
KeyDatabase
-
Recovery Database
-
-
-
-
ReportsDatabase
-
Compliance and Audit Reports Database
-
-
-
-
Reports
-
Compliance and Audit Reports
-
-
-
-
AdministrationMonitoringServer
-
Administration and Monitoring website
-
-
-
-
SelfServiceServer
-
Self-Service Portal
-
-
-
-
PolicyTemplate
-
MBAM Group Policy template
-
-
-
REPORTS_USERACCOUNT
-
[UserDomain][UserName1]
-
Domain and user account of the Reporting Services service account that will access the Compliance and Audit database
-
-
-
REPORTS_USERACCOUNTPW
-
[UserPwd1]
-
Password of the Reporting Services service account that will access the Compliance and Audit database
-
-
-
COMPLIDB_SQLINSTANCE
-
%computername%
-
SQL Server instance name for the Compliance and Audit Database – replace %computername% with the computer name
-
-
-
RECOVERYANDHWDB_SQLINSTANCE
-
%computername%
-
SQL Server instance name for the Recovery Database – replace %computername% with the computer name
-
-
-
SRS_INSTANCENAME
-
%computername%
-
SQL Server Reporting Server instance where the Compliance and Audit reports will be installed – replace %computername% with the computer name
-
-
-
ADMINANDMON_WEBSITE_PORT
-
83
-
Port for the Administration and Monitoring website; “83” is only an example
-
-
-
WEBSITE_PORT
-
83
-
Port for the Self-Service Portal website; “83” is only an example
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Command Line for Deploying the MBAM 2.0 Server with the Configuration Manager Topology
-
-
-You can use a command line that is similar to the following to install the MBAM Server with the Configuration Manager topology.
-
-``` syntax
-MbamSetup.exe /qn /l*v MaltaServerInstall.log I_ACCEPT_ENDUSER_LICENSE_AGREEMENT=1 TOPOLOGY=1 COMPLIDB_SQLINSTANCE=%computername% RECOVERYANDHWDB_SQLINSTANCE=%computername% SRS_INSTANCENAME=%computername% REPORTS_USERACCOUNT=[UserDomain]\[UserName] REPORTS_USERACCOUNTPW=[UserPwd] ADMINANDMON_WEBSITE_PORT=83 WEBSITE_PORT=83
-```
-
-The following table describes the command line parameters for installing the MBAM 2.0 Server with the Configuration Manager topology.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Parameter
-
Parameter Value
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
TOPOLOGY
-
1
-
1 – Configuration Manager topology
-
-
-
I_ACCEPT_ENDUSER_LICENSE_AGREEMENT
-
01
-
0 – do not accept the license agreement1 – accept the license agreement
-
-
-
COMPLIDB_SQLINSTANCE
-
%computername%
-
SQL Server instance name for the Audit Database – replace %computername% with the computer name
-
-
-
RECOVERYANDHWDB_SQLINSTANCE
-
%computername%
-
SQL Server instance name for the Recovery Database - replace %computername% with the computer name
-
-
-
SRS_INSTANCENAME
-
%computername%
-
SQL Server Reporting Server instance where the Audit reports will be installed – replace %computername% with the computer name
-
-
-
REPORTS_USERACCOUNT
-
[UserDomain][UserName1]
-
Domain and user account of the Reporting Services service account that will access the Compliance and Audit database
-
-
-
REPORTS_USERACCOUNTPW
-
[UserPwd1]
-
Password of the Reporting Services service account that will access the Compliance and Audit database
-
-
-
ADMINANDMON_WEBSITE_PORT
-
83
-
Port for the Administration and Monitoring website; “83” is only an example
-
-
-
WEBSITE_PORT
-
83
-
Port for the Self-Service Portal website; “83” is only an example
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying the MBAM 2.0 Server Infrastructure](deploying-the-mbam-20-server-infrastructure-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-use-the-help-desk-portal.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-use-the-help-desk-portal.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4b4a4b1d73..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-use-the-help-desk-portal.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,84 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Use the Help Desk Portal
-description: How to Use the Help Desk Portal
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: c27f7737-10c8-4164-9de8-57987292c89c
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Use the Help Desk Portal
-
-
-The MBAM Administration and Monitoring website, also referred to as the Help Desk Portal, is an administrative interface to BitLocker drive encryption that is installed as part of the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) server infrastructure. The following sections describe how you can use this website to review reports, recover end users’ drives, and manage end users’ TPMs.
-
-## Reports
-
-
-MBAM collects information from Active Directory and client computers, which enables you to run different reports to monitor BitLocker usage and compliance. Using the **Reports** section of the Administration and Monitoring website, you can generate reports on enterprise compliance, individual computers, and key recovery activity. For a description of each report, see [Understanding MBAM Reports](understanding-mbam-reports-mbam-2.md).
-
-**To access reports**
-
-1. Open a web browser and navigate to the MBAM Administration and Monitoring website.
-
-2. Select **Reports** in the left pane.
-
-3. From the top menu bar, select the report type you want to generate. To save reports, click the **Export** button on the Reports menu bar.
-
-For additional information about how to run MBAM reports, see [How to Generate MBAM Reports](how-to-generate-mbam-reports-mbam-2.md).
-
-## Drive Recovery
-
-
-The **Drive Recovery** feature of the Administration and Monitoring website allows users with specific administrator roles (for example, Help Desk Users) to access recovery key data that has been collected by the MBAM Client. This data can be used to access a BitLocker-protected drive when BitLocker goes into recovery mode. For instructions on how to recover a drive that is in recovery mode, see [How to Recover a Drive in Recovery Mode](how-to-recover-a-drive-in-recovery-mode-mbam-2.md).
-
-You can also recover drives that have been moved or that are corrupted:
-
-- [How to Recover a Moved Drive](how-to-recover-a-moved-drive-mbam-2.md)
-
-- [How to Recover a Corrupted Drive](how-to-recover-a-corrupted-drive-mbam-2.md)
-
-For additional information about how to recover a BitLocker-protected drive, see [Performing BitLocker Management with MBAM](performing-bitlocker-management-with-mbam-mbam-2.md).
-
-## Manage TPM
-
-
-The Manage TPM feature of the Administration and Monitoring website gives users with certain administrator roles (for example, “MBAM Helpdesk Users”) access to TPM data that has been collected by the MBAM Client. In a TPM lockout, an administrator can use the Administration and Monitoring website to retrieve the necessary password file to unlock the TPM. For instructions on how to reset a TPM after a TPM lockout, see [How to Reset a TPM Lockout](how-to-reset-a-tpm-lockout-mbam-2.md).
-
-## MBAM Help Desk Tasks
-
-
-You can use the Administration and Monitoring website for many administrative tasks, such as managing BitLocker-protected hardware, recovering drives, and running reports. By default, the URL for the Administration and Monitoring website is http://<*MBAMAdministrationServername*>, although you can customize it during the installation process.
-
-**Note**
-To access the various features offered by the Administration and Monitoring website, you must have the appropriate roles associated with your user account. For more information about understanding user roles, see [How to Manage MBAM Administrator Roles](how-to-manage-mbam-administrator-roles-mbam-2.md).
-
-
-
-Use the following links to find information about the tasks that you can perform by using the Administration and Monitoring website:
-
-- [How to Reset a TPM Lockout](how-to-reset-a-tpm-lockout-mbam-2.md)
-
-- [How to Recover a Drive in Recovery Mode](how-to-recover-a-drive-in-recovery-mode-mbam-2.md)
-
-- [How to Recover a Moved Drive](how-to-recover-a-moved-drive-mbam-2.md)
-
-- [How to Recover a Corrupted Drive](how-to-recover-a-corrupted-drive-mbam-2.md)
-
-- [How to Determine BitLocker Encryption State of Lost Computers](how-to-determine-bitlocker-encryption-state-of-lost-computers-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-use-the-self-service-portal-to-regain-access-to-a-computer.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-use-the-self-service-portal-to-regain-access-to-a-computer.md
deleted file mode 100644
index bb6cf70424..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-use-the-self-service-portal-to-regain-access-to-a-computer.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Use the Self-Service Portal to Regain Access to a Computer
-description: How to Use the Self-Service Portal to Regain Access to a Computer
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: bcf095de-0237-4bb0-b450-da8fb6d6f3d0
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Use the Self-Service Portal to Regain Access to a Computer
-
-
-If end users get locked out of Windows by BitLocker because they forgot their password or PIN, or because they changed operating system files or changed the BIOS or the Trusted Platform Module (TPM), they can use the Self-Service Portal to regain access to Windows without having to ask their Help Desk for assistance.
-
-**Note**
-If the IT administrator configured an IIS Session State time-out, a message is displayed 60 seconds prior to the time-out.
-
-
-
-**Note**
-These instructions are written for and from the perspective of end users.
-
-
-
-**To use the Self-Service Portal to regain access to a computer**
-
-1. In the **Recovery KeyId** field, enter a minimum of eight of the 32-digit BitLocker Key ID that is displayed on the BitLocker recovery screen of your computer.
-
- **Note**
- If the first eight digits match multiple keys, a message displays that requires you to enter all 32 digits of the recovery key ID.
-
-
-
-2. In the **Reason** field, select a reason for your request for the recovery key.
-
-3. Click **Get Key**. Your BitLocker recovery key is displayed in the “Your BitLocker Recovery Key” field.
-
-4. Enter the 48-digit code into the BitLocker recovery screen on your computer to regain access to the computer.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Performing BitLocker Management with MBAM](performing-bitlocker-management-with-mbam-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-validate-the-mbam-installation-with-configuration-manager.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-validate-the-mbam-installation-with-configuration-manager.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ad2f0f4528..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/how-to-validate-the-mbam-installation-with-configuration-manager.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,79 +0,0 @@
----
-title: How to Validate the MBAM Installation with Configuration Manager
-description: How to Validate the MBAM Installation with Configuration Manager
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 8e268539-91c3-4e8a-baae-faf3605da818
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# How to Validate the MBAM Installation with Configuration Manager
-
-
-After installing Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) with Configuration Manager, validate that the installation has successfully set up all the necessary features for MBAM by completing the following steps.
-
-**To validate the MBAM Server feature installation with Configuration Manager**
-
-1. On the server where System Center Configuration Manager is deployed, open **Control Panel**. Select the program that is used to uninstall or change a program. Verify that **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring** appears in the list of programs and features.
-
- **Note**
- To validate the installation, you must use a domain account that has local computer administrative credentials on each server.
-
-
-
-2. Use the Configuration Manager console to confirm that a new collection, called “MBAM Supported Computers,” is displayed.
-
- To view the collection with Configuration Manager 2007: Click **Site Database** (<**SiteCode**> - <**ServerName**>, <**SiteName**>), **Computer Management**.
-
- To view the collection with System Center 2012 Configuration Manager: Click the **Assets and Compliance** workspace, **Device Collections**.
-
-3. Use the Configuration Manager console to verify that the following reports are listed in the **MBAM** folder:
-
- - BitLocker Computer Compliance
-
- - BitLocker Enterprise Compliance Dashboard
-
- - BitLocker Enterprise Compliance Details
-
- - BitLocker Enterprise Compliance Summary
-
- To view the reports with Configuration Manager 2007: Click **Reporting**, **Reporting Services**, \\\\<**ServerName**>, **Report Folders**
-
- To view the reports with System Center 2012 Configuration Manager: Click the **Monitoring** workspace, **Reporting**, **Reports**.
-
-4. Use the Configuration Manager console to confirm that the configuration baseline “BitLocker Protection” is listed.
-
- To view the configuration baselines with Configuration Manager 2007: Click **Desired Configuration Management**, **Configuration Baselines**.
-
- To view the configuration baselines with System Center 2012 Configuration Manager: Click the **Assets and Compliance** workspace, **Compliance Settings**, **Configuration Baselines**.
-
-5. Use the Configuration Manager console to confirm that the following new configuration items are displayed:
-
- - BitLocker Fixed Data Drives Protection
-
- - BitLocker Operating System Drive Protection
-
- To view the configuration items with Configuration Manager 2007: Click **Desired Configuration Management**, **Configuration Items**.
-
- To view the configuration items with System Center 2012 Configuration Manager: Click the **Assets and Compliance** workspace, **Compliance Settings**, **Configuration Items**.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying MBAM with Configuration Manager](deploying-mbam-with-configuration-manager-mbam2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/images/checklistbox.gif b/mdop/mbam-v2/images/checklistbox.gif
deleted file mode 100644
index 8af13c51d1..0000000000
Binary files a/mdop/mbam-v2/images/checklistbox.gif and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/images/mbam2-1-server.gif b/mdop/mbam-v2/images/mbam2-1-server.gif
deleted file mode 100644
index 20f3f5adcb..0000000000
Binary files a/mdop/mbam-v2/images/mbam2-1-server.gif and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/images/mbam2-3-servers.gif b/mdop/mbam-v2/images/mbam2-3-servers.gif
deleted file mode 100644
index 62f5d02a39..0000000000
Binary files a/mdop/mbam-v2/images/mbam2-3-servers.gif and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/images/mbam2-cmserver.gif b/mdop/mbam-v2/images/mbam2-cmserver.gif
deleted file mode 100644
index 80a0444483..0000000000
Binary files a/mdop/mbam-v2/images/mbam2-cmserver.gif and /dev/null differ
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/index.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/index.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ba76b06b55..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 2 Administrator's Guide
-description: Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 2 Administrator's Guide
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: fdb43f62-960a-4811-8802-50efdf04b4af
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 04/19/2017
----
-
-# Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 2 Administrator's Guide
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) 2.0 provides a simplified administrative interface that you can use to manage BitLocker drive encryption. In BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 2.0, you can select BitLocker drive encryption policy options that are appropriate for your enterprise, and then use them to monitor client compliance with those policies. You can also report on the encryption status of an individual computer and on the enterprise as a whole. In addition, you can access recovery key information when users forget their PIN or password or when their BIOS or boot record changes.
-
-## Outline
-
-- [Getting Started with MBAM 2.0](getting-started-with-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
- - [About MBAM 2.0](about-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
- - [Release Notes for MBAM 2.0](release-notes-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
- - [About MBAM 2.0 SP1](about-mbam-20-sp1.md)
- - [Release Notes for MBAM 2.0 SP1](release-notes-for-mbam-20-sp1.md)
- - [Evaluating MBAM 2.0](evaluating-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
- - [High-Level Architecture for MBAM 2.0](high-level-architecture-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
- - [Accessibility for MBAM 2.0](accessibility-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-- [Planning for MBAM 2.0](planning-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
- - [Preparing your Environment for MBAM 2.0](preparing-your-environment-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
- - [MBAM 2.0 Deployment Prerequisites](mbam-20-deployment-prerequisites-mbam-2.md)
- - [Planning to Deploy MBAM 2.0](planning-to-deploy-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
- - [MBAM 2.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-20-supported-configurations-mbam-2.md)
- - [MBAM 2.0 Planning Checklist](mbam-20-planning-checklist-mbam-2.md)
-- [Deploying MBAM 2.0](deploying-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
- - [Deploying the MBAM 2.0 Server Infrastructure](deploying-the-mbam-20-server-infrastructure-mbam-2.md)
- - [Deploying MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Objects](deploying-mbam-20-group-policy-objects-mbam-2.md)
- - [Deploying the MBAM 2.0 Client](deploying-the-mbam-20-client-mbam-2.md)
- - [MBAM 2.0 Deployment Checklist](mbam-20-deployment-checklist-mbam-2.md)
- - [Upgrading from Previous Versions of MBAM](upgrading-from-previous-versions-of-mbam.md)
-- [Operations for MBAM 2.0](operations-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
- - [Using MBAM with Configuration Manager](using-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md)
- - [Administering MBAM 2.0 Features](administering-mbam-20-features-mbam-2.md)
- - [Monitoring and Reporting BitLocker Compliance with MBAM 2.0](monitoring-and-reporting-bitlocker-compliance-with-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
- - [Performing BitLocker Management with MBAM](performing-bitlocker-management-with-mbam-mbam-2.md)
- - [Maintaining MBAM 2.0](maintaining-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
- - [Security and Privacy for MBAM 2.0](security-and-privacy-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
- - [Administering MBAM 2.0 Using PowerShell](administering-mbam-20-using-powershell-mbam-2.md)
-- [Troubleshooting MBAM 2.0](troubleshooting-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-## More Information
-
-- [MDOP Information Experience](index.md)
-
- Find documentation, videos, and other resources for MDOP technologies.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/maintaining-mbam-20-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/maintaining-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d83b165ded..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/maintaining-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Maintaining MBAM 2.0
-description: Maintaining MBAM 2.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 6479e093-840d-45d5-b759-1179aeeeefeb
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Maintaining MBAM 2.0
-
-
-After completing all necessary planning and then deploying Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM), you can configure Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring to run in a highly available fashion while using it to manage enterprise BitLocker encryption operations. The information in this section describes high availability options for MBAM as well as how to move MBAM Server features.
-
-## Ensure High Availability for MBAM 2.0
-
-
-MBAM was designed to be fault-tolerant and not negatively affect the users if a server is not available. The information in this section can be used to configure a highly available MBAM installation.
-
-[High Availability for MBAM 2.0](high-availability-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-## Move MBAM 2.0 Features to Another Server
-
-
-If you need to move an MBAM Server feature from one server computer to another, you must complete required steps in a specific order to avoid a loss of productivity or data. This section describes the steps that you must complete to move one or more MBAM Server features to a different computer.
-
-[How to Move MBAM 2.0 Features to Another Computer](how-to-move-mbam-20-features-to-another-computer-mbam-2.md)
-
-## Other resources for Maintaining MBAM
-
-
-[Operations for MBAM 2.0](operations-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/mbam-20-deployment-checklist-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/mbam-20-deployment-checklist-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 74f3cbeaca..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/mbam-20-deployment-checklist-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,110 +0,0 @@
----
-title: MBAM 2.0 Deployment Checklist
-description: MBAM 2.0 Deployment Checklist
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 7905d31d-f21c-4683-b9c4-95b815e08fab
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# MBAM 2.0 Deployment Checklist
-
-
-This checklist can be used to help you during Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) deployment with a Stand-alone topology.
-
-**Note**
-This checklist outlines the recommended steps and a high-level list of items to consider when deploying Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring features. It is recommended that you copy this checklist into a spreadsheet program and customize it for your use.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
References
-
Notes
-
-
-
-
-
-
Complete the planning phase to prepare the computing environment for MBAM deployment.
Add Active Directory Domain Services security groups created during the planning phase to the appropriate local MBAM Server feature administrators groups on appropriate servers.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying MBAM 2.0](deploying-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/mbam-20-deployment-prerequisites-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/mbam-20-deployment-prerequisites-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4901f54cfe..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/mbam-20-deployment-prerequisites-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,347 +0,0 @@
----
-title: MBAM 2.0 Deployment Prerequisites
-description: MBAM 2.0 Deployment Prerequisites
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 57d1c2bb-5ea3-457e-badd-dd9206ff0f20
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# MBAM 2.0 Deployment Prerequisites
-
-
-Before you start Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) Setup, you should ensure that you have met the prerequisites to install the product. This section contains information to help you successfully plan your computing environment before you deploy Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring Server features and Clients. If you are installing MBAM with Configuration Manager, see [Planning to Deploy MBAM with Configuration Manager](planning-to-deploy-mbam-with-configuration-manager-2.md) for additional prerequisites.
-
-## Installation Prerequisites for MBAM Server Features
-
-
-Each of the MBAM Server features has specific prerequisites that must be met before the MBAM features can be successfully installed. MBAM Setup checks that all prerequisites are met before the installation starts.
-
-### Prerequisites for Administration and Monitoring Server
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Prerequisite
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
Windows Server Web Server Role
-
This role must be added to a server operating system that is supported for the Administration and Monitoring Server feature.
-
-
-
Web Server (IIS) Management Tools
-
Select IIS Management Scripts and Tools.
-
-
-
SSL Certificate
-
Optional. To secure communication between the clients and the web services, you have to obtain and install a certificate that a trusted security authority signed.
-
-
-
Web Server Role Services
-
Common HTTP Features:
-
-
Static Content
-
Default Document
-
-
Application Development:
-
-
ASP.NET
-
.NET Extensibility
-
ISAPI Extensions
-
ISAPI Filters
-
-
Security:
-
-
Windows Authentication
-
Request Filtering
-
-
-
-
Windows Server Features
-
.NET Framework 3.5.1 features:
-
-
.NET Framework 3.5.1
-
WCF Activation
-
-
HTTP Activation
-
Non-HTTP Activation
-
-
-
Windows Process Activation Service:
-
-
Process Model
-
.NET Environment
-
Configuration APIs
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Note**
-For a list of supported operating systems, see [MBAM 2.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-20-supported-configurations-mbam-2.md).
-
-
-
-### Prerequisites for the Compliance and Audit Reports
-
-
Optional - Install Transparent Data Encryption (TDE) feature available in SQL Server
-
The TDE SQL Server feature performs real-time I/O encryption and decryption of the data and log files, which can help you to comply with many laws, regulations, and guidelines established in various industries.
-
-Note
TDE performs real-time decryption of database information, which means that, if the account under which you are logged on has permissions to the database while you are viewing the recovery key information in the SQL Server tables, the recovery key information is visible.
Optional - Install Transparent Data Encryption (TDE) feature in SQL Server.
-
The TDE SQL Server feature performs real-time I/O encryption and decryption of the data and log files, which can help you to comply with many laws, regulations, and guidelines established in various industries.
-
-Note
TDE performs real-time decryption of database information, which means that, if the account under which you are logged on has permissions to the database while you are viewing the recovery key information in the SQL Server tables, the recovery key information is visible.
Windows 7 clients only - must have Trusted Platform Module (TPM) capability.
-
TPM version must be 1.2 or later.
-
-
-
The TPM chip must be turned on in the BIOS and be resettable from the operating system.
-
For more information, see the BIOS documentation.
-
-
-
Windows 8 clients only: To have MBAM store and manage the TPM recovery keys: TPM auto-provisioning must be turned off, and MBAM must be set as the owner of the TPM before you deploy MBAM. To turn off TPM auto-provisioning, see Disable-TpmAutoProvisioning.
-
-
TPM auto-provisioning must be turned off.
-
MBAM must be set as the owner of the TPM before you deploy MBAM.
Ensure that the keyboard, video, or mouse are directly connected and not managed through a keyboard, video, or mouse (KVM) switch. A KVM switch can interfere with the ability of the computer to detect the physical presence of hardware.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy MBAM 2.0](planning-to-deploy-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-[MBAM 2.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-20-supported-configurations-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/mbam-20-planning-checklist-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/mbam-20-planning-checklist-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index dd323a9429..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/mbam-20-planning-checklist-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,108 +0,0 @@
----
-title: MBAM 2.0 Planning Checklist
-description: MBAM 2.0 Planning Checklist
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 16b27c27-5f5e-41e2-b526-89a036672fb8
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# MBAM 2.0 Planning Checklist
-
-
-This checklist can be used to help you plan for preparing your computing environment for Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) deployment.
-
-**Note**
-This checklist outlines the recommended steps and a high-level list of items to consider when planning for an Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring deployment. It is recommended that you copy this checklist into a spreadsheet program and customize it for your use.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
References
-
Notes
-
-
-
-
-
-
Review the getting started information about MBAM to gain a basic understanding of the product before beginning deployment planning.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning for MBAM 2.0](planning-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/mbam-20-privacy-statement-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/mbam-20-privacy-statement-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 2c93b51293..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/mbam-20-privacy-statement-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,145 +0,0 @@
----
-title: MBAM 2.0 Privacy Statement
-description: MBAM 2.0 Privacy Statement
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: fce72ad4-a837-4d17-8d3b-4d93f1a399be
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# MBAM 2.0 Privacy Statement
-
-
-## Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) v2 Privacy Statement
-
-
-Microsoft is committed to protecting your privacy, while delivering software that brings you the performance, power, and convenience you desire in your personal computing. This privacy statement explains many of the data collection and use practices of Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring v2 (MBAM). This is a preliminary disclosure that focuses on features that communicate with the Internet and is not intended to be an exhaustive list.
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) enhances BitLocker by simplifying deployment and key recovery, centralizing provisioning, monitoring and reporting of encryption status for fixed and removable drives, and minimizing support costs. This release provides support for Windows 8 as well as improvements on Configuration Manager Integration and key recovery functionality.
-
-### Collection and Use of Your Information
-
-The information we collect from you will be used by Microsoft and its controlled subsidiaries and affiliates to enable the features you are using and provide the service(s) or carry out the transaction(s) you have requested or authorized. It may also be used to analyze and improve Microsoft products and services.
-
-We may send certain mandatory service communications such as welcome letters, billing reminders, information on technical service issues, and security announcements. Some Microsoft services may send periodic member letters that are considered part of the service. We may occasionally request your feedback, invite you to participate in surveys, or send you promotional mailings to inform you of other products or services available from Microsoft and its affiliates.
-
-In order to offer you a more consistent and personalized experience in your interactions with Microsoft, information collected through one Microsoft service may be combined with information obtained through other Microsoft services. We may also supplement the information we collect with information obtained from other companies. For example, we may use services from other companies that enable us to derive a general geographic area based on your IP address in order to customize certain services to your geographic area.
-
-Except as described in this statement, personal information you provide will not be transferred to third parties without your consent. We occasionally hire other companies to provide limited services on our behalf, such as packaging, sending and delivering purchases and other mailings, answering customer questions about products or services, processing event registration, or performing statistical analysis of our services. We will only provide those companies the personal information they need to deliver the service, and they are prohibited from using that information for any other purpose.
-
-Microsoft may access or disclose information about you, including the content of your communications, in order to: (a) comply with the law or respond to lawful requests or legal process; (b) protect the rights or property of Microsoft or our customers, including the enforcement of our agreements or policies governing your use of the services; or (c) act on a good faith belief that such access or disclosure is necessary to protect the personal safety of Microsoft employees, customers, or the public. We may also disclose personal information as part of a corporate transaction such as a merger or sale of assets.
-
-Information that is collected by or sent to Microsoft by MBAM may be stored and processed in the United States or any other country in which Microsoft or its affiliates, subsidiaries, or service providers maintain facilities. Microsoft abides by the safe harbor framework as set forth by the U.S. Department of Commerce regarding the collection, use, and retention of data from the European Union, the European Economic Area, and Switzerland.
-
-### Collection and Use of Information about Your Computer
-
-When you use software with Internet-enabled features, information about your computer ("standard computer information") is sent to the Web sites you visit and online services you use. Microsoft uses standard computer information to provide you Internet-enabled services, to help improve our products and services, and for statistical analysis. Standard computer information typically includes information such as your IP address, operating system version, browser version, and regional and language settings. In some cases, standard computer information may also include hardware ID, which indicates the device manufacturer, device name, and version. If a particular feature or service sends information to Microsoft, standard computer information will be sent as well.
-
-Because this is a pre-release version of the software, some of these Internet-enabled features are turned on by default so that we can collect enough information about how the software is working in order to improve the commercially released software. The default settings in this pre-release software do not necessarily reflect how these features will be configured in the commercially released software.
-
-The privacy details for each MBAM feature, software or service listed in this privacy statement describe what additional information is collected and how it is used.
-
-### Security of your information
-
-Microsoft is committed to helping protect the security of your information. We use a variety of security technologies and procedures to help protect your information from unauthorized access, use, or disclosure. For example, we store the information you provide on computer systems with limited access, which are located in controlled facilities.
-
-### Changes to this privacy statement
-
-We will occasionally update this privacy statement to reflect changes in our products, services, and customer feedback. When we post changes, we will revise the "last updated" date at the top of this statement. If there are material changes to this statement or in how Microsoft will use your personal information, we will notify you either by posting a notice of such changes prior to implementing the change or by directly sending you a notification. We encourage you to periodically review this statement to be informed of how Microsoft is protecting your information.
-
-### For More Information
-
-Microsoft welcomes your comments regarding this privacy statement. If you have questions about this statement or believe that we have not adhered to it, please contact us.
-
-Microsoft Privacy Microsoft Corporation One Microsoft Way Redmond, Washington 98052 USA
-
-### Specific Features
-
-### Microsoft Error Reporting
-
-The remainder of this document will address the following specific features:
-
-**What This Feature Does:**
-
-Microsoft Error Reporting provides a service that allows you to report problems you may be having with MBAM to Microsoft and to receive information that may help you avoid or solve such problems.
-
-**Information Collected, Processed, or Transmitted:**
-
-For information about the information collected, processed, or transmitted by Microsoft Error Reporting, see the Microsoft Error Reporting privacy statement at [https://go.microsoft.com](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=244395).
-
-**Use of Information:**
-
-We use the error reporting data to solve customer problems and improve our software and services.
-
-**Choice and control:**
-
-Microsoft Error Reporting is not turned on or off by MBAM. MBAM will utilize whatever configuration is active in Windows. You can change your Microsoft Error Reporting settings at any time disabling the automatic reporting of errors that may contain the names of folders on your PC by creating a registry value named "DisableGenericReports" with any type or value under:
-
-"HKLM\\Software\\Microsoft\\Microsoft Standalone System Sweeper Tool" (for the 32-bit version)
-
-"HKLM\\Software\\Wow6432Node\\Microsoft\\Microsoft Standalone System Sweeper Tool" (for the 64-bit version)
-
-**Warning**
-
-Incorrectly editing the registry may severely damage your system. Before making changes to the registry, you should back up any valued data on the PC. You can also use the Last Known Good Configuration startup option if you encounter problems after manual changes have been applied.
-
-Important Information: Enterprise customers can use Group Policy to configure how Microsoft Error Reporting behaves on their PCs. Configuration options include the ability to turn off Microsoft Error Reporting. If you are an administrator and wish to configure Group Policy for Microsoft Error Reporting, technical details are available on [TechNet](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc709644.aspx).
-
-Additional information on how to modify enable and disable error reporting is available at this support article: [(http://support.microsoft.com/kb/188296)](https://support.microsoft.com/kb/188296).
-
-### Microsoft Update
-
-**What This Feature Does:**
-
-Microsoft Update is a service that provides Windows updates as well as updates for other Microsoft software.
-
-**Information Collected, Processed, or Transmitted:**
-
-For details about what information is collected and how it is used, see the Update Services Privacy Statement at .
-
-**Use of Information:**
-
-For details about what information is collected and how it is used, see the Update Services Privacy Statement at .
-
-**Choice/Control:**
-
-For details about controlling this feature, see the Update Services Privacy Statement at .
-
-### Customer Experience Improvement Program
-
-**What This Feature Does:**
-
-The Customer Experience Improvement Program (“CEIP”) collects basic information about your hardware configuration and how you use our software and services in order to identify trends and usage patterns. CEIP also collects the type and number of errors you encounter, software and hardware performance, and the speed of services. We won't collect your name, address, or other contact information.
-
-**Information Collected, Processed, or Transmitted:**
-
-For more information about the information collected, processed, or transmitted by CEIP, see the CEIP privacy statement at .
-
-**Use of Information:**
-
-We use this information to improve the quality, reliability, and performance of Microsoft software and services.
-
-**Choice/Control:**
-
-CEIP is off by default. You're offered the opportunity to participate in CEIP during setup. If you choose to participate and later change your mind, you can turn off CEIP at any time by: Using the CEIP Opt-out run-time dialog. From the Help menu, open the link named “Customer Experience Improvement Program” and check the ‘Don’t Join’ radio button.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Security and Privacy for MBAM 2.0](security-and-privacy-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/mbam-20-security-considerations-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/mbam-20-security-considerations-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 74670be60b..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/mbam-20-security-considerations-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,206 +0,0 @@
----
-title: MBAM 2.0 Security Considerations
-description: MBAM 2.0 Security Considerations
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 0aa5c6e2-d92c-4e30-9f6a-b48abb667ae5
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# MBAM 2.0 Security Considerations
-
-
-This topic contains a brief overview about the accounts and groups, log files, and other security-related considerations for Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM). For more information, follow the links within this article.
-
-## General Security Considerations
-
-
-**Understand the security risks.** The most serious risk from Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring is that its functionality could be hijacked by an unauthorized user who could then reconfigure BitLocker encryption and gain BitLocker encryption key data on MBAM Clients. However, the loss of MBAM functionality for a short period of time, due to a denial-of-service attack, does not generally have a catastrophic impact, unlike, for example, e-mail, network communications, light, and power.
-
-**Physically secure your computers**. There is no security without physical security. An attacker who gets physical access to an MBAM Server could potentially use it to attack the entire client base. All potential physical attacks must be considered high risk and mitigated appropriately. MBAM servers should be stored in a secure server room with controlled access. Secure these computers when administrators are not physically present by having the operating system lock the computer, or by using a secured screen saver.
-
-**Apply the most recent security updates to all computers**. Stay informed about new updates for operating systems, Microsoft SQL Server, and MBAM by subscribing to the Security Notification service ().
-
-**Use strong passwords or pass phrases**. Always use strong passwords with 15 or more characters for all MBAM and MBAM administrator accounts. Never use blank passwords. For more information about password concepts, see the “Account Passwords and Policies” white paper on TechNet ().
-
-## Accounts and Groups in MBAM
-
-
-The best practice for managing user accounts is to create domain global groups and add user accounts to them. Then, add the domain global accounts to the necessary MBAM local groups on the MBAM Servers.
-
-### Active Directory Domain Services Groups
-
-No Active Directory groups are created automatically during the MBAM setup process. However, it is recommended that you create the following Active Directory Domain Services global groups to manage MBAM operations.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Group Name
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
MBAM Advanced Helpdesk Users
-
Create this group to manage members of the MBAM Advanced Helpdesk Users local group created during MBAM Setup.
-
-
-
MBAM Compliance Auditing DB Access
-
Create this group to manage members of the MBAM Compliance Auditing DB Access local group created during MBAM Setup.
-
-
-
MBAM Helpdesk Users
-
Create this group to manage members of the MBAM Helpdesk Users local group created during MBAM Setup.
-
-
-
MBAM Recovery and Hardware DB Access
-
Create this group to manage members of the MBAM Recovery and Hardware DB Access local group created during MBAM Setup.
-
-
-
MBAM Report Users
-
Create this group to manage members of the MBAM Report Users local group created during MBAM Setup.
-
-
-
MBAM System Administrators
-
Create this group to manage members of the MBAM System Administrators local group created during MBAM Setup.
-
-
-
BitLocker Encryption Exemptions
-
Create this group to manage user accounts that should be exempted from BitLocker encryption starting on computers that they log on to.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### MBAM Server Local Groups
-
-MBAM Setup creates local groups to support MBAM operations. You should add the Active Directory Domain Services global groups to the appropriate MBAM local groups to configure MBAM security and data access permissions.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Group Name
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
MBAM Advanced Helpdesk Users
-
Members of this group have increased access to the Help Desk features from MBAM.
-
-
-
MBAM Compliance Auditing DB Access
-
Contains the machines that have access to the MBAM Compliance and Auditing Database.
-
-
-
MBAM Helpdesk Users
-
Members of this group have access to some of the Help Desk features from MBAM.
-
-
-
MBAM Recovery and Hardware DB Access
-
Contains the machines that have access to the MBAM Recovery Database.
-
-
-
MBAM Report Users
-
Members of this group have access to the Compliance and Audit reports from MBAM.
-
-
-
MBAM System Administrators
-
Members of this group have access to all MBAM features.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### SSRS Reports Service Account
-
-The SSRS Reports service account provides the security context to run the MBAM reports available through SSRS. It is configured during MBAM Setup.
-
-When you configure the SSRS Reports service account, specify a domain user account, and configure the password to never expire.
-
-**Note**
-If you change the name of the service account after you deploy MBAM, you must reconfigure the reporting data source to use the new service account credentials. Otherwise, you will not be able to access the Help Desk Portal.
-
-
-
-## MBAM Log Files
-
-
-The following MBAM Setup log files are created in the installing user’s %temp% folder during MBAM Setup:
-
-**MBAM Server Setup log files**
-
-MSI<five random characters>.log
-Logs the actions taken during MBAM Setup and MBAM Server Feature installation.
-
-InstallComplianceDatabase.log
-Logs actions taken to create the MBAM Compliance and Audit Database setup.
-
-InstallKeyComplianceDatabase.log
-Logs actions taken to create the MBAM Recovery Database.
-
-AddHelpDeskDbAuditUsers.log
-Logs actions taken to create the SQL Server logins on the MBAM Compliance and Audit database and authorize the HelpDesk web service to the database for reports.
-
-AddHelpDeskDbUsers.log
-Logs actions taken to authorize web services to database for key recovery and create logins to the MBAM Recovery Database.
-
-AddKeyComplianceDbUsers.log
-Logs actions taken to authorize web services to MBAM Compliance and Audit Database for compliance reporting.
-
-AddRecoveryAndHardwareDbUsers.log
-Logs actions taken to authorize web services to the MBAM Recovery database for key recovery.
-
-**Note**
-In order to obtain additional MBAM Setup log files, you have to install MBAM by using the msiexec package and the /L <location> option. Log files are created in the location specified.
-
-
-
-**MBAM Client Setup log files**
-
-MSI<five random characters>.log
-Logs the actions taken during MBAM Client installation.
-
-## MBAM Database TDE Considerations
-
-
-The transparent data encryption (TDE) feature that is available in SQL Server is an optional installation for the database instances that will host MBAM database features.
-
-With TDE, you can perform real-time, full database-level encryption. TDE is the optimal choice for bulk encryption to meet regulatory compliance or corporate data security standards. TDE works at the file level, which is similar to two Windows features: the Encrypting File System (EFS) and BitLocker Drive Encryption, both of which also encrypt data on the hard drive. TDE does not replace cell-level encryption, EFS, or BitLocker.
-
-When TDE is enabled on a database, all backups are encrypted. Thus, special care must be taken to ensure that the certificate that was used to protect the database encryption key is backed up and maintained with the database backup. If this certificate (or certificates) is lost, the data will be unreadable. Back up the certificate along with the database. Each certificate backup should have two files. Both of these files should be archived (ideally separately from the database backup file for security). You can alternatively consider using the extensible key management (EKM) feature (see Extensible Key Management) for storage and maintenance of keys used for TDE.
-
-For an example of how to enable TDE for MBAM database instances, see [Evaluating MBAM 2.0](evaluating-mbam-20-mbam-2.md).
-
-For more information about TDE in SQL Server 2008, see [SQL Server Encryption]( https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=299883).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Security and Privacy for MBAM 2.0](security-and-privacy-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/mbam-20-supported-configurations-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/mbam-20-supported-configurations-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 43687475bb..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/mbam-20-supported-configurations-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,302 +0,0 @@
----
-title: MBAM 2.0 Supported Configurations
-description: MBAM 2.0 Supported Configurations
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: dca63391-39fe-4273-a570-76d0a2f8a0fd
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# MBAM 2.0 Supported Configurations
-
-
-This topic specifies the requirements to install and run Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) 2.0 in your environment by using the Stand-alone topology. For supported configurations that apply to later releases, see the documentation for the applicable release.
-
-If you plan to install MBAM 2.0 by using the Configuration Manager topology and want to review a list of the system requirements, see [Planning to Deploy MBAM with Configuration Manager](planning-to-deploy-mbam-with-configuration-manager-2.md).
-
-The recommended configuration for running MBAM in a production environment is with two servers, depending on your scalability requirements. This configuration supports up to 200,000 MBAM clients. For an image and descriptions of the Stand-alone MBAM server infrastructure, see [High-Level Architecture for MBAM 2.0](high-level-architecture-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md).
-
-**Note**
-Microsoft provides support for the current service pack and, in some cases, the immediately preceding service pack. To find the support timelines for your product, see the [Lifecycle Supported Service Packs](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=31975). For additional information about Microsoft Support Lifecycle Policy, see [Microsoft Support Lifecycle Support Policy FAQ](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=31976).
-
-
-
-## MBAM Server System Requirements
-
-
-### Server Operating System Requirements
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring Server installation.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating system
-
Edition
-
Service pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Windows Server 2008 R2
-
Standard, Enterprise, or Datacenter Edition
-
SP1
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Windows Server 2012
-
Standard or Datacenter Edition
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Note**
-There is no support for installing MBAM services, reports, or databases on a domain controller computer.
-
-
-
-### Server Processor, RAM, and Disk Space Requirements
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Hardware component
-
Minimum requirement
-
Recommended requirement
-
-
-
-
-
Processor
-
2.33 GHz
-
2.33 GHz or greater
-
-
-
RAM
-
8 GB
-
12 GB
-
-
-
Free disk space
-
1 GB
-
2 GB
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### SQL Server Database Requirements
-
-The following table lists the SQL Server versions that are supported for the Administration and Monitoring Server feature installation, which includes the Recovery Database, Compliance and Audit Database, and Compliance and Audit Reports. The databases additionally require the installation of SQL Server Management Tools.
-
-**Note**
-MBAM does not natively support SQL clustering, mirroring, or Availability Groups. To install the databases, you must run the MBAM Server installation on a stand-alone SQL server.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SQL Server version
-
Edition
-
Service pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2
-
Standard, Enterprise, or Datacenter Edition
-
SP1
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Microsoft SQL Server 2012
-
Standard, Enterprise, or Datacenter Edition
-
SP1
-
64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Hardware component
-
Minimum requirement
-
Recommended requirement
-
-
-
-
-
Processor
-
2.33 GHz
-
2.33 GHz or greater
-
-
-
RAM
-
8 GB
-
12 GB
-
-
-
Free disk space
-
5 GB
-
5 GB or greater
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## MBAM Client System Requirements
-
-
-### Client Operating System Requirements
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring Client installation.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating system
-
Edition
-
Service pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Windows 7
-
Enterprise or Ultimate Edition
-
SP1
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Windows 8
-
Enterprise Edition
-
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Windows To Go
-
Windows 8 Enterprise Edition
-
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Client RAM Requirements
-
-There are no RAM requirements that are specific to the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring Client installation.
-
-## MBAM Group Policy System Requirements
-
-
-The following table lists the operating systems that are supported for Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring Group Policy template installation.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating system
-
Edition
-
Service pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Windows 7
-
Enterprise, or Ultimate Edition
-
SP1
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Windows 8
-
Enterprise Edition
-
-
32-bit or 64-bit
-
-
-
Windows Server 2008 R2
-
Standard, Enterprise, or Datacenter Edition
-
SP1
-
64-bit
-
-
-
Windows Server 2012
-
Standard or Datacenter Edition
-
-
64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy MBAM 2.0](planning-to-deploy-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-[MBAM 2.0 Deployment Prerequisites](mbam-20-deployment-prerequisites-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/monitoring-and-reporting-bitlocker-compliance-with-mbam-20-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/monitoring-and-reporting-bitlocker-compliance-with-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index be5f19b3a8..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/monitoring-and-reporting-bitlocker-compliance-with-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Monitoring and Reporting BitLocker Compliance with MBAM 2.0
-description: Monitoring and Reporting BitLocker Compliance with MBAM 2.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 0b9ba701-0aad-4e16-9b32-73d358047ccc
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Monitoring and Reporting BitLocker Compliance with MBAM 2.0
-
-
-You can generate different reports to monitor BitLocker usage and compliance activities.
-
-If you chose the Configuration Manager topology when you installed Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM), reports are generated from Configuration Manager rather than from MBAM. See [Understanding MBAM Reports in Configuration Manager](understanding-mbam-reports-in-configuration-manager.md) for more information.
-
-## Understand MBAM Reports
-
-
-MBAM reports have many fields that you may want to be familiar with before generating MBAM reports.
-
-[Understanding MBAM Reports](understanding-mbam-reports-mbam-2.md)
-
-## Generate MBAM Reports
-
-
-You can generate reports on enterprise compliance, individual computer compliance, and key recovery activity.
-
-[How to Generate MBAM Reports](how-to-generate-mbam-reports-mbam-2.md)
-
-## Other Resources for Monitoring and Reporting BitLocker Compliance with MBAM
-
-
-[Operations for MBAM 2.0](operations-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/operations-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/operations-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5de22fee46..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/operations-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Operations for MBAM 2.0
-description: Operations for MBAM 2.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: ece72016-4ffa-48df-8c12-1e442ee9e980
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Operations for MBAM 2.0
-
-
-This section of the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) Administrator’s Guide includes information about the various types of Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring administration and operating tasks that are typically performed by an administrator. This section also includes step-by-step procedures to help you successfully perform those tasks.
-
-## Operations Information
-
-
-- [Using MBAM with Configuration Manager](using-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md)
-
- If you want to install MBAM to work with Configuration Manager 2007 or Microsoft System Center 2012 Configuration Manager, refer to this section for information about architecture, planning, deployment, and reporting.
-
-- [Administering MBAM 2.0 Features](administering-mbam-20-features-mbam-2.md)
-
- After completing all necessary planning and then deploying MBAM, you can configure and use it to manage enterprise BitLocker encryption. The information in this section describes post-installation day-to-day MBAM feature operations and maintenance tasks.
-
-- [Monitoring and Reporting BitLocker Compliance with MBAM 2.0](monitoring-and-reporting-bitlocker-compliance-with-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
- This section describes how to generate and understand the different MBAM reports to monitor BitLocker usage and compliance activities throughout your enterprise environment.
-
-- [Performing BitLocker Management with MBAM](performing-bitlocker-management-with-mbam-mbam-2.md)
-
- This section describes post-installation day-to-day BitLocker encryption management tasks that are accomplished by using MBAM.
-
-- [Maintaining MBAM 2.0](maintaining-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
- This section describes how to configure MBAM to run in a highly available fashion while using it to manage enterprise BitLocker encryption operations. The information in this section describes high availability options for MBAM as well as how to move MBAM Server features if necessary.
-
-- [Security and Privacy for MBAM 2.0](security-and-privacy-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
- This section describes an overview of MBAM security considerations and explains many of the data collection and use practices of MBAM.
-
-- [Administering MBAM 2.0 Using PowerShell](administering-mbam-20-using-powershell-mbam-2.md)
-
- This section describes the set of Windows PowerShell cmdlets available for administrators performing various MBAM Server tasks from the command line rather than from the Administration and Monitoring website.
-
-## Other Resources for MBAM Operations
-
-
-[Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 2 Administrator's Guide](index.md)
-
-[Getting Started with MBAM 2.0](getting-started-with-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-[Planning for MBAM 2.0](planning-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-[Deploying MBAM 2.0](deploying-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-[Troubleshooting MBAM 2.0](troubleshooting-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/performing-bitlocker-management-with-mbam-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/performing-bitlocker-management-with-mbam-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c132428d23..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/performing-bitlocker-management-with-mbam-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,70 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Performing BitLocker Management with MBAM
-description: Performing BitLocker Management with MBAM
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 9bfc6c67-f12c-4daa-8f08-5884fb47443c
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Performing BitLocker Management with MBAM
-
-
-After planning and then deploying Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM), you can configure and use it to manage enterprise BitLocker encryption. The information in this section describes post-installation day-to-day BitLocker encryption management tasks that are accomplished by using Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring.
-
-## Reset a TPM Lockout by Using MBAM
-
-
-A Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is a microchip that is designed to provide basic security-related functions, primarily involving encryption keys. The TPM is usually installed on the motherboard of a computer or laptop, and communicates with the rest of the system by using a hardware bus. Computers that incorporate a TPM have the ability to create cryptographic keys and encrypt them so that they can be decrypted only by the TPM.
-
-A TPM lockout can occur if a user enters the incorrect PIN too many times. The number of times that a user can enter an incorrect PIN before the TPM locks varies from manufacturer to manufacturer. You can use MBAM to access the centralized Key Recovery data system in the Administration and Monitoring website, where you can retrieve a TPM owner password file when you supply a computer ID and associated user identifier.
-
-[How to Reset a TPM Lockout](how-to-reset-a-tpm-lockout-mbam-2.md)
-
-## Recover Drives with MBAM
-
-
-When you are dealing with the encryption of data, especially in an enterprise environment, consider how that data can be recovered in the event of a hardware failure, changes in personnel, or other situations in which encryption keys can be lost.
-
-The encrypted drive recovery features of MBAM ensure that data can be captured and stored and that the required tools are available to access a BitLocker-protected volume when BitLocker goes into recovery mode, is moved, or becomes corrupted.
-
-[How to Recover a Drive in Recovery Mode](how-to-recover-a-drive-in-recovery-mode-mbam-2.md)
-
-[How to Recover a Moved Drive](how-to-recover-a-moved-drive-mbam-2.md)
-
-[How to Recover a Corrupted Drive](how-to-recover-a-corrupted-drive-mbam-2.md)
-
-## Determine BitLocker Encryption State of Lost Computers by Using MBAM
-
-
-Using MBAM, you can determine the last known BitLocker encryption status of computers that were lost or stolen.
-
-[How to Determine BitLocker Encryption State of Lost Computers](how-to-determine-bitlocker-encryption-state-of-lost-computers-mbam-2.md)
-
-## Use the Self-Service Portal to Regain Access to a Computer
-
-
-If end users get locked out of Windows by BitLocker, they can use the instructions in this section to get a BitLocker recovery key to regain access to their computer.
-
-[How to Use the Self-Service Portal to Regain Access to a Computer](how-to-use-the-self-service-portal-to-regain-access-to-a-computer.md)
-
-## Other Resources for Performing BitLocker Management with MBAM
-
-
-[Operations for MBAM 2.0](operations-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/planning-for-mbam-20-administrator-roles-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/planning-for-mbam-20-administrator-roles-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index dcc4dfb344..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/planning-for-mbam-20-administrator-roles-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning for MBAM 2.0 Administrator Roles
-description: Planning for MBAM 2.0 Administrator Roles
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 6f813297-6479-42d3-a21b-896d54466b5b
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning for MBAM 2.0 Administrator Roles
-
-
-This topic lists and describes the available administrator roles that are available in Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) as well as the server locations where the local groups are created.
-
-## MBAM Administrator Roles
-
-
- **MBAM System Administrators**
-Administrators in this role have access to all Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring features. The local group for this role is installed on the Administration and Monitoring Server.
-
- **MBAM Helpdesk Users**
-Administrators in this role have access to the Help Desk features from MBAM. The local group for this role is installed on the Administration and Monitoring Server.
-
- **MBAM Report Users**
-Administrators in this role have access to the Compliance and Audit Reports from MBAM. The local group for this role is installed on the Administration and Monitoring Server, Compliance and Audit Database, and on the server that hosts the Compliance and Audit Reports.
-
- **MBAM Advanced Helpdesk Users**
-Administrators in this role have increased access to the Help Desk features from MBAM. The local group for this role is installed on the Administration and Monitoring Server. If a user is a member of both MBAM Helpdesk Users and MBAM Advanced Helpdesk Users, the MBAM Advanced Helpdesk Users permissions will override the MBAM Helpdesk User permissions.
-
-**Important**
-To view reports, an administrative user must be a member of the **MBAM Report Users** security group on the Administration and Monitoring Server, Compliance and Audit Database, and on the server that hosts the Compliance and Audit Reports feature. As a best practice, create a security group in Active Directory Domain Services with rights on the local **MBAM Report Users** security group on both the Administration and Monitoring Server and the server that hosts the Compliance and Audit Reports.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Preparing your Environment for MBAM 2.0](preparing-your-environment-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/planning-for-mbam-20-client-deployment-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/planning-for-mbam-20-client-deployment-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index cc8dfa17dc..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/planning-for-mbam-20-client-deployment-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning for MBAM 2.0 Client Deployment
-description: Planning for MBAM 2.0 Client Deployment
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 3a92cf29-092f-4cad-bdfa-d5f6aafe554b
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning for MBAM 2.0 Client Deployment
-
-
-Depending on when you deploy the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) Client, you can enable BitLocker drive encryption on a computer in your organization either before the end user receives the computer or afterwards. For both the MBAM Stand-alone and the Configuration Manager topologies, you have to configure Group Policy settings for MBAM.
-
-If you are using the MBAM Stand-alone topology, it is recommended that you use an enterprise software deployment system to deploy the MBAM Client software to end-user computers.
-
-If you deploy MBAM with the Configuration Manager topology, you can use Configuration Manager to deploy the MBAM Client software to end-user computers. In Configuration Manager, the MBAM installation creates a collection of computers that MBAM can manage. This collection includes workstations and devices that do not have a Trusted Platform Module (TPM), but that are running Windows 8.
-
-**Note**
-Windows To Go is not supported for integrated Configuration Manager installations of MBAM if you are using Configuration Manager 2007.
-
-
-
-## Deploying the MBAM Client to Enable BitLocker Encryption After Computer Distribution to End Users
-
-
-After you configure Group Policy, you can use an enterprise software deployment system product like Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager or Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) to deploy the Windows Installer files of the MBAM Client installation to target computers. To deploy the MBAM Client, you can use either the 32-bit or 64-bit MbamClientSetup.exe files or MBAMClient.msi files, which are provided with the MBAM software.
-
-When you deploy the MBAM Client after you distribute computers to client computers, end users are prompted to encrypt their computer. This enables MBAM to collect the data, which includes the PIN and password, and then to begin the encryption process.
-
-**Note**
-In this approach, users who have computers with a TPM chip are prompted to activate and initialize the TPM chip if the chip has not been previously activated.
-
-
-
-## Using the MBAM Client to Enable BitLocker Encryption Before Computer Distribution to End Users
-
-
-In organizations where computers are received and configured centrally, and where computers have a compliant TPM chip, you can install the MBAM Client to manage BitLocker encryption on each computer before any user data is written to it. The benefit of this process is that every computer will then be BitLocker encryption-compliant. This method does not rely on user action because the administrator has already encrypted the computer. A key assumption for this scenario is that the policy of the organization installs a corporate Windows image before the computer is delivered to the user.
-
-If your organization wants to use the TPM chip to encrypt computers, the administrator adds the TPM protector to encrypt the operating system volume of the computer. If your organization wants to use the TPM chip and a PIN protector, the administrator encrypts the operating system volume with the TPM protector, and then users select a PIN when they log on for the first time. If your organization decides to use only the PIN protector, the administrator does not have to encrypt the volume first. When users log on, Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring prompts them to provide a PIN, or a PIN and password to be used on later computer restarts.
-
-**Note**
-The TPM protector option requires the administrator to accept the BIOS prompt to activate and initialize the TPM before the computer is delivered to the user.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy MBAM 2.0](planning-to-deploy-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-[Deploying the MBAM 2.0 Client](deploying-the-mbam-20-client-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/planning-for-mbam-20-group-policy-requirements-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/planning-for-mbam-20-group-policy-requirements-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d5311487bf..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/planning-for-mbam-20-group-policy-requirements-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,328 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning for MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Requirements
-description: Planning for MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Requirements
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: f5e19dcb-eb15-4722-bb71-0734b3799eb8
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning for MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Requirements
-
-
-To manage Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) client computers, you need to consider the types of BitLocker protectors that you want to support in your organization, and then configure the corresponding Group Policy settings that you want to apply. This topic describes the Group Policy settings that are available for use when you are using Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring to manage BitLocker Drive Encryption in the enterprise.
-
-MBAM supports the following types of BitLocker protectors for operating system drives: Trusted Platform Module (TPM), TPM + PIN, TPM + USB key, and TPM + PIN + USB key, password, numerical password, and Data Recovery Agent. The password protector is supported only for Windows To Go devices and for Windows 8 devices that do not have a TPM. MBAM supports the TPM + USB key and the TPM + PIN + USB key protectors only when the operating system volume is encrypted before MBAM is installed.
-
-MBAM supports the following types of BitLocker protectors for fixed data drives: password, auto-unlock, numerical password, and Data Recovery Agent.
-
-The numeric password protector is applied automatically as part of volume encryption and does not need to be configured.
-
-**Important**
-The default Windows BitLocker drive encryption Group Policy Object (GPO) settings are not used by MBAM and can cause conflicting behavior if they are enabled. To enable MBAM to manage BitLocker, you must define the MBAM Group Policy settings only after installing the MBAM Group Policy template.
-
-
-
-Enhanced startup PINs can contain characters, such as uppercase and lowercase letters, and numbers. Unlike BitLocker, MBAM does not support the use of symbols and spaces for enhanced PINs.
-
-Install the MBAM Group Policy template on a computer that is capable of running the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC) or the Advanced Group Policy Management (AGPM) MDOP technology. To edit the GPO settings that enable MBAM functionality, you must first install the MBAM Group Policy template, open the GPMC or AGPM to edit the applicable GPO, and then navigate to the following GPO node: **Computer Configuration**\\**Policies**\\**Administrative Templates**\\**Windows Components**\\**MDOP MBAM (BitLocker Management).**
-
-The MDOP MBAM (BitLocker Management) GPO node contains four global policy settings and four child GPO settings nodes: Client Management, Fixed Drive, Operating System Drive, and Removable Drive. The following sections provide policy definitions and suggested policy settings to assist you in planning for MBAM GPO policy setting requirements.
-
-**Note**
-For more information about configuring the minimum, recommended GPO settings to enable MBAM to manage BitLocker encryption, see [How to Edit MBAM 2.0 GPO Settings](how-to-edit-mbam-20-gpo-settings-mbam-2.md).
-
-
-
-## Global Policy Definitions
-
-
-This section describes MBAM Global policy definitions found at the following GPO node: **Computer Configuration**\\**Policies**\\**Administrative Templates**\\**Windows Components**\\**MDOP MBAM (BitLocker Management)**.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Policy Name
-
Overview and Suggested Policy Setting
-
-
-
-
-
Choose drive encryption method and cipher strength
-
Suggested Configuration: Not Configured
-
Configure this policy to use a specific encryption method and cipher strength.
-
When this policy is not configured, BitLocker uses the default encryption method of AES 128-bit with Diffuser or the encryption method specified by the setup script.
-
-
-
Prevent memory overwrite on restart
-
Suggested Configuration: Not Configured
-
Configure this policy to improve restart performance without overwriting BitLocker secrets in memory on restart.
-
When this policy is not configured, BitLocker secrets are removed from memory when the computer restarts.
-
-
-
Validate smart card certificate usage rule
-
Suggested Configuration: Not Configured
-
Configure this policy to use smartcard certificate-based BitLocker protection.
-
When this policy is not configured, a default object identifier 1.3.6.1.4.1.311.67.1.1 is used to specify a certificate.
-
-
-
Provide the unique identifiers for your organization
-
Suggested Configuration: Not Configured
-
Configure this policy to use a certificate-based data recovery agent or the BitLocker To Go reader.
-
When this policy is not configured, the Identification field is not used.
-
If your company requires higher security measurements, you may want to configure the Identification field to make sure that all USB devices have this field set and that they are aligned with this Group Policy setting.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Client Management Policy Definitions
-
-
-This section describes Client Management policy definitions for Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring found at the following GPO node: **Computer Configuration**\\**Policies**\\**Administrative Templates**\\**Windows Components**\\**MDOP MBAM (BitLocker Management)**\\**Client Management**.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Policy Name
-
Overview and Suggested Policy Settings
-
-
-
-
-
Configure MBAM Services
-
Suggested Configuration: Enabled
-
-
MBAM Recovery and Hardware service endpoint. Use this setting to enable MBAM Client BitLocker encryption management. Enter an endpoint location that is similar to the following example: http://<MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server Name>:<port the web service is bound to>/MBAMRecoveryAndHardwareService/CoreService.svc.
-
Select BitLocker recovery information to store. This policy setting lets you configure the key recovery service to back up BitLocker recovery information. It also lets you configure status reporting service for collecting compliance and audit reports. The policy provides an administrative method of recovering data encrypted by BitLocker to prevent data loss due to the lack of key information. Status report and key recovery activity will automatically and silently be sent to the configured report server location.
-
If you do not configure or if you disable this policy setting, the Key recovery information will not be saved, and status report and key recovery activity will not be reported to server. When this setting is set to Recovery Password and key package, the recovery password and key package will be automatically and silently backed up to the configured key recovery server location.
-
Enter client checking status frequency in minutes. This policy setting manages how frequently the client checks the BitLocker protection policies and status on the client computer. This policy also manages how frequently the client compliance status is saved to the server. The client checks the BitLocker protection policies and status on the client computer and also backs up the client recovery key at the configured frequency.
-
Set this frequency based on the requirement set by your company on how frequently to check the compliance status of the computer, and how frequently to back up the client recovery key.
-
MBAM Status reporting service endpoint. You must configure this setting to enable MBAM Client BitLocker encryption management. Enter an endpoint location that is similar to the following example: http://<MBAM Administration and Monitoring Server Name>:<port the web service is bound to>/MBAMComplianceStatusService/StatusReportingService.svc.
-
-
-
-
Configure user exemption policy
-
Suggested Configuration: Not Configured
-
This policy setting lets you configure a web site address, email address, or phone number that will instruct a user to request an exemption from BitLocker encryption.
-
If you enable this policy setting and provide a web site address, email address, or phone number, users will see a dialog that gives them instructions on how to apply for an exemption from BitLocker protection. For more information about enabling BitLocker encryption exemptions for users, see How to Manage User BitLocker Encryption Exemptions.
-
If you either disable or do not configure this policy setting, the exemption request instructions will not be presented to users.
-
-Note
User exemption is managed per user, not per computer. If multiple users log on to the same computer and any one user is not exempt, the computer will be encrypted.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Configure customer experience improvement program
-
This policy setting lets you configure how MBAM users can join the Customer Experience Improvement Program. This program collects information about computer hardware and how users use MBAM without interrupting their work. The information helps Microsoft to identify which MBAM features to improve. Microsoft will not use this information to identify or contact MBAM users.
-
If you enable this policy setting, users will be able to join the Customer Experience Improvement Program.
-
If you disable this policy setting, users will not be able to join the Customer Experience Improvement Program.
-
If you do not configure this policy setting, users will have the option to join the Customer Experience Improvement Program.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Fixed Drive Policy Definitions
-
-
-This section describes Fixed Drive policy definitions for Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring found at the following GPO node: **Computer Configuration**\\**Policies**\\**Administrative Templates**\\**Windows Components**\\**MDOP MBAM (BitLocker Management)**\\**Fixed Drive**.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Policy Name
-
Overview and Suggested Policy Setting
-
-
-
-
-
Fixed data drive encryption settings
-
Suggested Configuration: Enabled
-
This policy setting let you manage whether fixed drives must be encrypted.
-
If the operating system volume is required to be encrypted, select the Enable auto-unlock fixed data drive option.
-
When enabling this policy, you must not disable the Configure use of password for fixed data drives policy unless the use of Auto-Unlock for fixed data drives is allowed or required.
-
If you require the use of Auto-Unlock for fixed data drives, you must configure operating system volumes to be encrypted.
-
If you enable this policy setting, users are required to put all fixed drives under BitLocker protection, and the drives will be encrypted.
-
If you do not configure this policy setting, users are not required to put fixed drives under BitLocker protection. If you apply this policy after fixed data drives are encrypted, the MBAM agent decrypts the encrypted fixed drives.
-
If you disable this policy setting, users will not be able to put their fixed data drives under BitLocker protection.
-
-
-
Deny write access to fixed drives not protected by BitLocker
-
Suggested Configuration: Not Configured
-
This policy setting determines whether BitLocker protection is required for fixed drives to be writable on a computer. This policy setting is applied when you turn on BitLocker.
-
When the policy is not configured, all fixed data drives on the computer are mounted with read and write access.
-
-
-
Allow access to BitLocker-protected fixed drives from earlier versions of Windows
-
Suggested configuration: Not Configured
-
Enable this policy to let fixed drives with the FAT file system be unlocked and viewed on computers that are running Windows Server 2008, Windows Vista, Windows XP with SP3, or Windows XP with SP2.
-
When the policy is enabled or not configured, fixed drives formatted with the FAT file system can be unlocked and their content can be viewed on computers that are running Windows Server 2008, Windows Vista, Windows XP with SP3, or Windows XP with SP2. These operating systems have read-only access to BitLocker-protected drives.
-
When the policy is disabled, fixed drives formatted with the FAT file system cannot be unlocked and their content cannot be viewed on computers that are running Windows Server 2008, Windows Vista, Windows XP with SP3, or Windows XP with SP2.
-
-
-
Configure use of password for fixed drives
-
Suggested configuration: Not Configured
-
Use this policy to specify whether a password is required to unlock BitLocker-protected fixed data drives.
-
If you enable this policy setting, users can configure a password that meets the requirements you define. BitLocker will allow users to unlock a drive with any of the protectors that are available on the drive.
-
These settings are enforced when turning on BitLocker, not when unlocking a volume.
-
If you disable this policy setting, users are not allowed to use a password.
-
When the policy is not configured, passwords are supported with the default settings, which do not include password complexity requirements and which require only eight characters.
-
For higher security, enable this policy and select Require password for fixed data drive, select Require password complexity, and set the desired minimum password length.
-
If you disable this policy setting, users are not allowed to use a password.
-
If you do not configure this policy setting, passwords will be supported with the default settings, which do not include password complexity requirements and which require only eight characters.
-
-
-
Choose how BitLocker-protected fixed drives can be recovered
-
Suggested Configuration: Not Configured
-
Configure this policy to enable the BitLocker data recovery agent or to save BitLocker recovery information to Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS).
-
When the policy is not configured, the BitLocker data recovery agent is allowed, and recovery information is not backed up to AD DS. MBAM does not require recovery information to be backed up to AD DS.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Operating System Drive Policy Definitions
-
-
-This section describes Operating System Drive policy definitions for Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring found at the following GPO node: **Computer Configuration**\\**Policies**\\**Administrative Templates**\\**Windows Components**\\**MDOP MBAM (BitLocker Management)**\\**Operating System Drive**.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Policy Name
-
Overview and Suggested Policy Setting
-
-
-
-
-
Operating system drive encryption settings
-
Suggested configuration: Enabled
-
This policy setting lets you manage whether the operating system drive must be encrypted.
-
For higher security, consider disabling the following policy settings in System/Power Management/Sleep Settings when you enable them with TPM + PIN protector:
-
-
Allow Standby States (S1-S3) When Sleeping (Plugged In)
-
Allow Standby States (S1-S3) When Sleeping (On Battery)
-
-
If you are running Microsoft Windows 8 or later, and you want to use BitLocker on a computer without a TPM, select the Allow BitLocker without a compatible TPM check box. In this mode, a password is required for startup. If you forget the password, you have to use one of the BitLocker recovery options to access the drive.
-
On a computer with a compatible TPM, two types of authentication methods can be used at startup to provide added protection for encrypted data. When the computer starts, it can use only the TPM for authentication, or it can also require the entry of a personal identification number (PIN).
-
If you enable this policy setting, users have to put the operating system drive under BitLocker protection, and the drive will be encrypted.
-
If you disable this policy, users will not be able to put the operating system drive under BitLocker protection. If you apply this policy after the operating system drive is encrypted, the drive will be decrypted.
-
If you do not configure this policy, the operating system drive is not required to be placed under BitLocker protection.
-
-
-
Configure TPM platform validation profile
-
Suggested Configuration: Not Configured
-
This policy setting lets you configure how the TPM security hardware on a computer secures the BitLocker encryption key. This policy setting does not apply if the computer does not have a compatible TPM or if BitLocker has already been turned on with TPM protection.
-
When this policy setting is not configured, the TPM uses the default platform validation profile or the platform validation profile that is specified by the setup script.
-
-
-
Choose how BitLocker-protected operating system drives can be recovered
-
Suggested Configuration: Not Configured
-
Configure this policy to enable the BitLocker data recovery agent or to save BitLocker recovery information to Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS).
-
When this policy is not configured, the data recovery agent is allowed, and recovery information is not backed up to AD DS.
-
MBAM operation does not require recovery information to be backed up to AD DS.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Removable Drive Policy Definitions
-
-
-This section describes Removable Drive Policy definitions for Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring found at the following GPO node: **Computer Configuration**\\**Policies**\\**Administrative Templates**\\**Windows Components**\\**MDOP MBAM (BitLocker Management)** \\ **Removable Drive**.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Policy Name
-
Overview and Suggested Policy Setting
-
-
-
-
-
Control use of BitLocker on removable drives
-
Suggested configuration: Enabled
-
This policy controls the use of BitLocker on removable data drives.
-
Enable the Allow users to apply BitLocker protection on removable data drives option to allow users to run the BitLocker setup wizard on a removable data drive.
-
Enable the Allow users to suspend and decrypt BitLocker on removable data drives option to allow users to remove BitLocker drive encryption from the drive or to suspend the encryption while maintenance is performed.
-
When this policy is enabled and the Allow users to apply BitLocker protection on removable data drives option is selected, the MBAM Client saves the recovery information about removable drives to the MBAM key recovery server and allows users to recover the drive if the password is lost.
-
-
-
Deny write access to removable drives not protected by BitLocker
-
Suggested Configuration: Not Configured
-
Enable this policy to allow only write access to BitLocker protected drives.
-
When this policy is enabled, all removable data drives on the computer require encryption before write access is allowed.
-
-
-
Allow access to BitLocker-protected removable drives from earlier versions of Windows
-
Suggested Configuration: Not Configured
-
Enable this policy to allow fixed drives with the FAT file system to be unlocked and viewed on computers that are running Windows Server 2008, Windows Vista, Windows XP with SP3, or Windows XP with SP2.
-
When this policy is not configured, removable data drives formatted with the FAT file system can be unlocked on computers that are running Windows Server 2008, Windows Vista, Windows XP with SP3, or Windows XP with SP2, and their content can be viewed. These operating systems have read-only access to BitLocker-protected drives.
-
When the policy is disabled, removable drives formatted with the FAT file system cannot be unlocked and their content cannot be viewed on computers that are running Windows Server 2008, Windows Vista, Windows XP with SP3, or Windows XP with SP2.
-
-
-
Configure use of password for removable data drives
-
Suggested configuration: Not Configured
-
Enable this policy to configure password protection on removable data drives.
-
When this policy is not configured, passwords are supported with the default settings, which do not include password complexity requirements and which require only eight characters.
-
For increased security, you may enable this policy and check Require password for removable data drive, select Require password complexity, and set the preferred minimum password length.
-
-
-
Choose how BitLocker-protected removable drives can be recovered
-
Suggested Configuration: Not Configured
-
Configure this policy to enable the BitLocker data recovery agent or to save BitLocker recovery information to Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS).
-
When set to Not Configured, the data recovery agent is allowed and recovery information is not backed up to AD DS.
-
MBAM operation does not require recovery information to be backed up to AD DS.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[MBAM 2.0 Deployment Prerequisites](mbam-20-deployment-prerequisites-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/planning-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/planning-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 32ad03c576..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/planning-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning for MBAM 2.0
-description: Planning for MBAM 2.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 1206bd18-05ea-4ca8-9362-07e512503c3f
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning for MBAM 2.0
-
-
-The goal of deployment planning is to successfully and efficiently deploy Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) with the Stand-alone topology so that it does not disrupt your users or the network. If you want to install Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring with the Configuration Manager topology, see [Planning to Deploy MBAM with Configuration Manager](planning-to-deploy-mbam-with-configuration-manager-2.md).
-
-You should consider a number of different deployment configurations and prerequisites before you deploy MBAM. This section describes the information that you need to formulate a deployment plan that best meets your business requirements, assists you in preparing your network and computing environment, and provides the information necessary for you to properly plan to deploy MBAM features.
-
-## Planning Information
-
-
-- [Preparing your Environment for MBAM 2.0](preparing-your-environment-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
- This section describes the computing environment requirements and installation prerequisites that you should consider before beginning MBAM Setup.
-
-- [Planning to Deploy MBAM 2.0](planning-to-deploy-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
- This section describes the minimum hardware and software requirements for MBAM Client and Server feature installation. It also provides information about choosing an MBAM deployment topology, and lists other MBAM Server and Client planning considerations.
-
-- [MBAM 2.0 Planning Checklist](mbam-20-planning-checklist-mbam-2.md)
-
- This section provides a planning checklist that can assist you in MBAM deployment planning.
-
-## Other Resources for Planning for MBAM
-
-
-[Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 2 Administrator's Guide](index.md)
-
-[Getting Started with MBAM 2.0](getting-started-with-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-[Deploying MBAM 2.0](deploying-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-[Operations for MBAM 2.0](operations-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-[Troubleshooting MBAM 2.0](troubleshooting-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/planning-for-mbam-20-server-deployment-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/planning-for-mbam-20-server-deployment-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c345da750c..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/planning-for-mbam-20-server-deployment-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,88 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning for MBAM 2.0 Server Deployment
-description: Planning for MBAM 2.0 Server Deployment
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: b57f1a42-134f-4997-8697-7fbed08e2fc4
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning for MBAM 2.0 Server Deployment
-
-
-The Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) server infrastructure depends on a set of server features that can be installed on one or more server computers, based on the requirements of the enterprise. If you are installing Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring with the Configuration Manager topology, see [Planning to Deploy MBAM with Configuration Manager](planning-to-deploy-mbam-with-configuration-manager-2.md).
-
-**Note**
-Installations of Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring on a single server are recommended only for test environments.
-
-
-
-## Planning for MBAM Server Deployment
-
-
-The infrastructure for an MBAM Server deployment includes the following features:
-
-- Recovery Database
-
-- Compliance and Audit Database
-
-- Compliance and Audit Reports
-
-- Self-Service Portal
-
-- Administration and Monitoring Server
-
-- MBAM Group Policy Template
-
-MBAM Server databases and features can be installed in different configurations, depending on your scalability requirements. All MBAM Server features can be installed on a single server or distributed across multiple servers. We recommend that you use a two-server configuration for production environments, although configurations of two to four servers can also be used, depending on your computing requirements.
-
-Each MBAM feature has specific prerequisites. For a full list of server feature prerequisites and hardware and software requirements, see [MBAM 2.0 Deployment Prerequisites](mbam-20-deployment-prerequisites-mbam-2.md) and [MBAM 2.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-20-supported-configurations-mbam-2.md).
-
-In addition to the server-related MBAM features, the Server Setup application includes an MBAM Group Policy template. The template contains Group Policy Object (GPO) settings that you configure to manage BitLocker Drive Encryption in the enterprise. You can install this template on any computer that can run the Group Policy Management Console (GPMC) or Advanced Group Policy Management (AGPM).
-
-As you plan the MBAM Server deployment, consider that BitLocker recovery keys in MBAM are intended for single use only, after which recovery keys expire. In order for the keys to expire after use, they must be retrieved through the Help Desk Portal or the Self-Service Portal.
-
-## Order of Deployment of MBAM Server Features
-
-
-To deploy MBAM features on multiple servers, you have to install the features in the following order:
-
-1. Recovery Database
-
-2. Compliance and Audit Database
-
-3. Compliance Audit and Reports
-
-4. Self-Service Portal
-
-5. Administration and Monitoring Server
-
-6. MBAM Group Policy Template
-
-**Note**
-Keep track of the names of the computers on which you install each feature. You have to use this information throughout the installation process. You can print and use a deployment checklist to assist in this effort. For more information about the MBAM Deployment Checklist, see [MBAM 2.0 Deployment Checklist](mbam-20-deployment-checklist-mbam-2.md).
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Planning to Deploy MBAM 2.0](planning-to-deploy-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-[Deploying the MBAM 2.0 Server Infrastructure](deploying-the-mbam-20-server-infrastructure-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/planning-to-deploy-mbam-20-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/planning-to-deploy-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 118968c502..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/planning-to-deploy-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning to Deploy MBAM 2.0
-description: Planning to Deploy MBAM 2.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 2dc05fcd-aed9-4315-aeaf-92aaa9e0e955
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning to Deploy MBAM 2.0
-
-
-You should consider a number of different deployment configurations and prerequisites before you create your deployment plan for Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM). This section includes information that can help you gather the necessary information to formulate a deployment plan that best meets your business requirements. If you are installing MBAM with the Configuration Manager topology, see [Planning to Deploy MBAM with Configuration Manager](planning-to-deploy-mbam-with-configuration-manager-2.md) for additional planning information.
-
-## Review the MBAM 2.0 Supported Configurations
-
-
-After preparing your computing environment for the MBAM Server and Client feature installation, make sure that you review the Supported Configurations to confirm that the computers on which you are installing MBAM meet the minimum hardware and operating system requirements. For more information about MBAM deployment prerequisites, see [MBAM 2.0 Deployment Prerequisites](mbam-20-deployment-prerequisites-mbam-2.md).
-
-[MBAM 2.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-20-supported-configurations-mbam-2.md)
-
-## Plan for MBAM 2.0 Server and Client Deployment
-
-
-The MBAM Server infrastructure depends on a set of server features that can be installed on one or more server computers, based on the requirements of the enterprise. These features can be installed in a distributed configuration across multiple servers.
-
-**Note**
-An MBAM installation on a single server is recommended only for lab environments.
-
-
-
-The MBAM Client enables administrators to enforce and monitor BitLocker drive encryption on computers in the enterprise. The BitLocker client can be integrated into an organization by deploying the client through an enterprise software delivery system or by installing the client agent on client computers as part of the initial imaging process.
-
-With MBAM, you can encrypt a computer in your organization either before the end user receives the computer, or afterwards by using Group Policy.
-
-[Planning for MBAM 2.0 Server Deployment](planning-for-mbam-20-server-deployment-mbam-2.md)
-
-[Planning for MBAM 2.0 Client Deployment](planning-for-mbam-20-client-deployment-mbam-2.md)
-
-## Other Resources for MBAM Planning
-
-
-[Planning for MBAM 2.0](planning-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/planning-to-deploy-mbam-with-configuration-manager-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/planning-to-deploy-mbam-with-configuration-manager-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 59aa487003..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/planning-to-deploy-mbam-with-configuration-manager-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,368 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Planning to Deploy MBAM with Configuration Manager
-description: Planning to Deploy MBAM with Configuration Manager
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: fb768306-48c2-40b4-ac4e-c279db987391
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Planning to Deploy MBAM with Configuration Manager
-
-
-To deploy MBAM with the Configuration Manager topology, a three-server architecture, which supports 200,000 clients, is recommended. Use a separate server to run Configuration Manager, and install the basic Administration and Monitoring features on two servers, as shown in the architecture image in [Getting Started - Using MBAM with Configuration Manager](getting-started---using-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md).
-
-**Important**
-Windows To Go is not supported when you install the integrated topology of MBAM with Configuration Manager 2007.
-
-
-
-## Deployment Prerequisites for Installing MBAM with Configuration Manager
-
-
-Ensure that you have met the following prerequisites before you install MBAM with Configuration Manager:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Prerequisite
-
Additional Information
-
-
-
-
-
Ensure that the Configuration Manager Server is a primary site in the Configuration Manager system.
-
N/A
-
-
-
Enable the Hardware Inventory Client Agent on the Configuration Manager Server.
Enable the Desired Configuration Management (DCM) agent or the compliance settings, depending on the version of Configuration Manager that you are using.
-
-
-
-## Configuration Manager Supported Versions
-
-
-MBAM supports the following versions of Configuration Manager:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Supported version
-
Service pack
-
System architecture
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2007 R2
-
SP1 or later
-
64-bit
-
-Note
Although Configuration Manager 2007 is 32 bit, you must install it and SQL Server on a 64-bit operating system in order to match the 64-bit MBAM software.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Microsoft System Center 2012 Configuration Manager
-
SP1
-
64-bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-For a list of supported configurations for the Configuration Manager Server, see the appropriate webpage for the version of Configuration Manager that you are using. MBAM has no additional system requirements for the Configuration Manager Server.
-
-## MBAM and SQL Server System Requirements
-
-
-The supported configurations and system requirements for the MBAM servers and SQL Server for the Configuration Manager topology are the same as those for the Stand-alone topology. For the Stand-alone system requirements, see [MBAM 2.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-20-supported-configurations-mbam-2.md). For the MBAM Server and SQL Server processor, RAM, and disk space requirements for the Configuration Manager topology, see the following sections.
-
-## MBAM Server Processor, RAM, and Disk Space Requirements for MBAM
-
-
-The following table lists the server processor, RAM, and disk space requirements for MBAM servers when you are using the Configuration Manager Integration topology.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Hardware Component
-
Minimum Requirement
-
Recommended Requirement
-
-
-
-
-
Processor
-
2.33 GHz
-
2.33 GHz or greater
-
-
-
RAM
-
4 GB
-
8 GB
-
-
-
Free disk space
-
1 GB
-
2 GB
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## SQL Server Processor, RAM, and Disk Space Requirements
-
-
-The following table lists the server processor, RAM, and disk space requirements for the SQL Server computer when you are using the Configuration Manager Integration topology.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Hardware Component
-
Minimum Requirement
-
Recommended Requirement
-
-
-
-
-
Processor
-
2.33 GHz
-
2.33 GHz or greater
-
-
-
RAM
-
4 GB
-
8 GB
-
-
-
Free disk space
-
5 GB
-
5 GB or greater
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Required permissions to install the MBAM Server
-
-
-To install MBAM with Configuration Manager, you must have an administrative user in Configuration Manager who has a security role with the minimum permissions listed in the following table. The table also shows the rights that you must have, beyond basic computer administrator rights, to install the MBAM Server.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Permissions
-
MBAM Server Feature
-
-
-
-
-
SQL instance Login Server Roles: - dbcreator- processadmin
-
-
-
-## Order of Deployment of MBAM Features for the Configuration Manager Topology
-
-
-When deploying MBAM on the Configuration Manager Server, you must complete the deployment tasks in the following order:
-
-1. Edit the configuration.mof file on the Configuration Manager Server.
-
-2. Create or edit the sms\_def.mof file Configuration Manager Server.
-
-3. Install MBAM on the Configuration Manager Server.
-
-4. Install the Recovery Database and the Audit Database on the Database server.
-
-5. Install the MBAM features on the Administration and Monitoring Server.
-
-## Planning Checklist for Installing MBAM with Configuration Manager
-
-
-This checklist outlines the recommended steps and a high-level list of items to consider when planning for an Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring deployment with Configuration Manager. It is recommended that you copy this checklist into a spreadsheet program and customize it for your use.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Task
-
References
-
Notes
-
-
-
-
-
-
Review the getting started information, which describes how Configuration Manager works with MBAM and shows the recommended high-level architecture.
Review the planning information, which describes the deployment prerequisites, supported configurations, required permissions, and deployment order for each feature.
-
Planning to Deploy MBAM with Configuration Manager
-
-
-
-
-
Plan for and configure MBAM Group Policy requirements.
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Using MBAM with Configuration Manager](using-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/preparing-your-environment-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/preparing-your-environment-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index c726106add..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/preparing-your-environment-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,71 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Preparing your Environment for MBAM 2.0
-description: Preparing your Environment for MBAM 2.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 5fb01da9-620e-4992-9e54-2ed3fb69e6af
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Preparing your Environment for MBAM 2.0
-
-
-Before beginning Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) Setup, you should make sure that you have met the prerequisites to install the product. When you know what the prerequisites are ahead of time, you can efficiently deploy the product and enable its features so that it most effectively supports your organization’s business objectives.
-
-If you are deploying Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring with Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2007 or Microsoft System Center 2012 Configuration Manager, see [Planning to Deploy MBAM with Configuration Manager](planning-to-deploy-mbam-with-configuration-manager-2.md).
-
-## Review MBAM 2.0 Deployment Prerequisites
-
-
-The MBAM Client and each of the MBAM Server features have specific prerequisites that must be met before they can be successfully installed.
-
-To ensure successful installation of MBAM Clients and MBAM Server features, ensure that computers specified for MBAM Client or MBAM Server feature installation are properly prepared for MBAM Setup.
-
-**Note**
-MBAM Setup checks that all prerequisites are met before installation starts. If all prerequisites are not met, Setup will fail.
-
-
-
-[MBAM 2.0 Deployment Prerequisites](mbam-20-deployment-prerequisites-mbam-2.md)
-
-## Plan for MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Requirements
-
-
-Before MBAM can manage clients in the enterprise, you must define Group Policy for the encryption requirements of your environment.
-
-**Important**
-MBAM will not work with policies for stand-alone BitLocker drive encryption. Group Policy settings must be defined for MBAM, or BitLocker encryption and enforcement will fail.
-
-
-
-[Planning for MBAM 2.0 Group Policy Requirements](planning-for-mbam-20-group-policy-requirements-mbam-2.md)
-
-## Plan for MBAM 2.0 Administrator Roles
-
-
-MBAM administrator roles are managed by local groups that are created by MBAM Setup when you install the BitLocker Administration and Monitoring Server, the Compliance and Audit Reports feature, and the Compliance and Audit Status Database.
-
-The membership of Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring roles can best be managed by creating security groups in Active Directory Domain Services, adding the appropriate administrator accounts to those groups, and then adding those security groups to the BitLocker Administration and Monitoring local groups. For more information, see [How to Manage MBAM Administrator Roles](how-to-manage-mbam-administrator-roles-mbam-2.md).
-
-## Other Resources for MBAM Planning
-
-
-[Planning for MBAM 2.0](planning-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-[MBAM 2.0 Supported Configurations](mbam-20-supported-configurations-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/release-notes-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/release-notes-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 2bbbd782ed..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/release-notes-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,296 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Release Notes for MBAM 2.0
-description: Release Notes for MBAM 2.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: c3f16cf3-94f2-47ac-b3a4-3dc505c6a8dd
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Release Notes for MBAM 2.0
-
-
-To search these release notes, press Ctrl+F.
-
-Read these release notes thoroughly before you install Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) 2.0. These release notes contain information that is required to successfully install BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 2.0 and contain information that is not available in the product documentation. If there is a difference between these release notes and other MBAM 2.0 documentation, the latest change should be considered authoritative. These release notes supersede the content that is included with this product.
-
-## MBAM 2.0 Known Issues
-
-
-This section contains release notes for MBAM 2.0.
-
-### Computer Name field may not appear in the BitLocker Computer Compliance and BitLocker Enterprise Compliance Details reports when you run MBAM with Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2007
-
-The Computer Name field may be blank in the BitLocker Computer Compliance and BitLocker Enterprise Compliance Details reports when you use MBAM with Configuration Manager 2007.
-
-WORKAROUND: None.
-
-### Enterprise Compliance Report fails to update after you upgrade the Stand-alone MBAM server infrastructure
-
-If you are using the MBAM Stand-alone topology, and you upgrade the server infrastructure from version 1.0 to 2.0, the Enterprise Compliance Report fails to update.
-
-WORKAROUND: After the upgrade, run the following script on the Compliance and Audit Database:
-
-```sql
--- =============================================
--- Script Template
--- =============================================
-
-DECLARE @DatabaseName nvarchar(255);
-SET @DatabaseName = DB_NAME()
-
-USE msdb;
-
-DECLARE @JobID BINARY(16)
-SELECT @JobID = job_id
-FROM msdb.dbo.sysjobs
-WHERE (name = N'CreateCache')
-
-if (@JobID IS NOT NULL)
-BEGIN
- EXEC dbo.sp_delete_job
- @job_name = N'CreateCache';
-END
-
-EXEC dbo.sp_add_job
- @job_name = N'CreateCache',
- @enabled = 1;
-
-EXEC dbo.sp_add_jobstep
- @job_name = N'CreateCache',
- @step_name = N'Copy Data',
- @subsystem = N'TSQL',
- @command = N'EXEC [ComplianceCore].UpdateCache',
- @database_name = @DatabaseName,
- @retry_attempts = 5,
- @retry_interval = 5;
-
-
-EXEC dbo.sp_add_jobschedule
- @job_name = N'CreateCache',
- @name = N'ReportCacheSchedule1am',
- @freq_type = 4,
- @freq_interval = 1,
- @active_start_time = 010000,
- @active_end_time = 020000;
-
-EXEC dbo.sp_attach_schedule
- @job_name = N'CreateCache',
- @schedule_name = N'ReportCacheSchedule1am';
-
-EXEC dbo.sp_add_jobschedule
- @job_name = N'CreateCache',
- @name = N'ReportCacheSchedule7am',
- @freq_type = 4,
- @freq_interval = 1,
- @active_start_time = 070000,
- @active_end_time = 080000;
-
-EXEC dbo.sp_attach_schedule
- @job_name = N'CreateCache',
- @schedule_name = N'ReportCacheSchedule7am';
-
-EXEC dbo.sp_add_jobschedule
- @job_name = N'CreateCache',
- @name = N'ReportCacheSchedule1pm',
- @freq_type = 4,
- @freq_interval = 1,
- @active_start_time = 130000,
- @active_end_time = 140000;
-
-EXEC dbo.sp_attach_schedule
- @job_name = N'CreateCache',
- @schedule_name = N'ReportCacheSchedule1pm';
-
-EXEC dbo.sp_add_jobschedule
- @job_name = N'CreateCache',
- @name = N'ReportCacheSchedule7pm',
- @freq_type = 4,
- @freq_interval = 1,
- @active_start_time = 190000,
- @active_end_time = 200000;
-
-EXEC dbo.sp_attach_schedule
- @job_name = N'CreateCache',
- @schedule_name = N'ReportCacheSchedule7pm';
-
-EXEC dbo.sp_add_jobserver
- @job_name = N'CreateCache';
-```
-
-### Reports in the Help Desk Portal display a warning if SSL is not configured in SSRS
-
-If SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) was not configured to use Secure Socket Layer (SSL), the URL for the reports will be set to HTTP instead of HTTPS when you install the MBAM Server. If you then browse to the Help Desk Portal and select a report, the following message displays: “Only Secure Content is Displayed.”
-
-WORKAROUND: To show the report, click **Show All Content**. To address this issue, go to the MBAM computer where SQL Server Reporting Services is installed, run **Reporting Services Configuration Manager**, and then click **Web Service URL**. Select the appropriate SSL certificate for the server, enter the appropriate SSL port (the default port is 443), and then click **Apply**.
-
-### Non-default instances of the Configuration Manager database are not supported
-
-MBAM looks only for the default instance of the Configuration Manager database in Configuration Manager 2007 and System Center 2012 Configuration Manager. If you use a non-default instance, you cannot install MBAM.
-
-WORKAROUND: None.
-
-### Clicking “Back” in the Compliance Summary report might throw an error
-
-If you drill down into a Compliance Summary report, and then click the **Back** link in the SSRS report, an error might be thrown.
-
-WORKAROUND: None.
-
-### Used Space Only Encryption does not work correctly
-
-If you encrypt a computer for the first time after you install the MBAM Client, and you have set a Group Policy Object to implement Used Space Only encryption, MBAM erroneously encrypts the entire disk instead of encrypting only the disk’s used space. If a computer is already encrypted when you install the MBAM Client, and you have set the same Group Policy Object, the encryption works correctly and encrypts only the used disk space on your computer.
-
-WORKAROUND: None.
-
-### Cipher strength displays incorrectly on the Computer Compliance report
-
-If you do not set a specific cipher strength in the **Choose drive encryption method and cipher strength** Group Policy Object, the Computer Compliance report in the Configuration Manager Integration topology always displays “unknown” for the cipher strength, even when the cipher strength uses the default of 128-bit encryption. The report displays the correct cipher strength if you set a specific cipher strength in the Group Policy Object.
-
-WORKAROUND: Always set a specific cipher strength in the **Choose drive encryption method and cipher strength** Group Policy Object.
-
-### Compliance Status Distribution By Drive Type displays old data after you update configuration items
-
-After you update MBAM configuration items in System Center 2012 Configuration Manager, the Compliance Status Distribution By Drive Type bar chart on the BitLocker Enterprise Compliance Dashboard shows data that is based on information from old versions of the configuration items.
-
-WORKAROUND: None. Modification of the MBAM configuration items is not supported, and the report might not appear as expected.
-
-### Enhanced Security Configuration may cause reports to display incorrectly
-
-If Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration (ESC) is turned on, an “Access Denied” message might appear when you try to view reports on the MBAM Server. By default, ESC is turned on to protect the server by decreasing the server’s exposure to potential attacks that can occur through web content and application scripts.
-
-WORKAROUND: If the “Access Denied” message appears when you try to view reports on the MBAM Server, you can set a Group Policy Object or change the default manually in your image to disable Enhanced Security Configuration. You can also alternatively view the reports from another computer on which ESC is not enabled.
-
-### MBAM Server installation fails when you upgrade from SQL Server 2008 to SQL Server 2012
-
-If you upgrade from SQL Server 2008 to SQL Server 2012, and then try to install the Compliance and Audit Database or the Recovery Database, the installation fails and rolls back. The failure occurs because the required SQLCMD.exe file was removed during the SQL upgrade and cannot be found by the MBAM installer. The MSI log file lines may look similar to the following:
-
-RunDbInstallScript Recovery Db CA: BinDir - E:\\MSSQL\\100\\Tools\\Binn\\SqlCmd.exeRunDbInstallScript Recovery Db CA: dbInstance - xxxxxx\\I01RunDbInstallScript Recovery Db CA: sqlScript- C:\\Program Files\\Microsoft\\Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring\\Setup\\KeyRecovery.sqlRunDbInstallScript Recovery Db CA: dbName- MBAM\_Recovery\_and\_HardwareRunDbInstallScript Recovery Db CA: defaultFileName- MBAM\_Recovery\_and\_HardwareRunDbInstallScript Recovery Db CA: defaultDataPath- F:\\MSSQL\\MSSQL10.I01\\MSSQL\\DATA\\RunDbInstallScript Recovery Db CA: defaultLogPath- K:\\MSSQL\\MSSQL10.I01\\MSSQL\\Data\\RunDbInstallScript Recovery Db CA: scriptLogPath - C:\\Users\\xxxxxx\\AppData\\Local\\Temp\\InstallKeyComplianceDatabase.log-e -E -S xxxxxxx\\I01 -i "C:\\Program Files\\Microsoft\\Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring\\Setup\\KeyRecovery.sql" -v DatabaseName="MBAM\_Recovery\_and\_Hardware" DefaultFileName="MBAM\_Recovery\_and\_Hardware" DefaultDataPath="F:\\MSSQL\\MSSQL10.I01\\MSSQL\\DATA\\" DefaultLogPath="K:\\MSSQL\\MSSQL10.I01\\MSSQL\\Data\\" -o "C:\\Users\\xxxxxx\\AppData\\Local\\Temp\\InstallKeyComplianceDatabase.log"RunDbInstallScript Recovery Db CA:Starting to run the Recovery database install scriptRunDbInstallScript Recovery Db CA: Sqlcmd log file is located in C:\\Users\\xxxxxx\\AppData\\Local\\Temp\\\\InstallKeyRecoveryDatabase.logRunDbInstallScript Recovery Db CA Exception: Install Recovery database Custom Action command line output Exception: The system cannot find the file specified
-
-The MBAM Server Windows Installer is hardcoded to find the SQLCMD.exe path by looking in the Path string value in the registry under HKLM\\Software\\Microsoft\\Microsoft SQL Server\\100\\Tools\\ClientSetup. The key is still present during the migration from SQL Server 2008 to SQL Server 2012, but the path that is referenced by the data value does not contain the SQLCMD.exe file, because the SQL upgrade process removed the file.
-
-WORKAROUND: Temporarily rename the HKLM\\Software\\Microsoft\\Microsoft SQL Server\\100\\Tools\\ClientSetup Path string value to **Path\_old**, and then re-run the MBAM Server Windows Installer. When the installation completes successfully and creates the databases in SQL Server 2012, rename the **Path\_old** value to **Path**.
-
-## Hotfixes and Knowledge Base articles for MBAM 2.0
-
-
-This section contains hotfixes and KB articles for MBAM 2.0.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
KB Article
-
Title
-
Link
-
-
-
-
-
2831166
-
Installing Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) 2.0 fails with "System Center CM Objects Already Installed"
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[About MBAM 2.0](about-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/release-notes-for-mbam-20-sp1.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/release-notes-for-mbam-20-sp1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 9fb4028a56..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/release-notes-for-mbam-20-sp1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,244 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Release Notes for MBAM 2.0 SP1
-description: Release Notes for MBAM 2.0 SP1
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: b39002ba-33c6-45ec-9d1b-464327b60f5c
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Release Notes for MBAM 2.0 SP1
-
-
-To search these release notes, press Ctrl+F.
-
-Read these release notes thoroughly before you install Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) 2.0 Service Pack 1 (SP1). These release notes contain information that is required to successfully install BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 2.0 SP1, and they contain information that is not available in the product documentation. If there is a difference between these release notes and other MBAM 2.0 SP1 documentation, the latest change should be considered authoritative. These release notes supersede the content that is included with this product.
-
-## MBAM 2.0 SP1 known issues
-
-
-This section contains known issues for MBAM 2.0 SP1.
-
-### Upgrade of MBAM with Configuration Manager Integrated topology to MBAM 2.0 SP1 requires manual removal of Configuration Manager objects
-
-If you are using MBAM with Configuration Manager, and you want to upgrade to MBAM 2.0 SP1, you must manually remove all of the Configuration Manager objects that were installed into Configuration Manager as a part of the MBAM installation. The objects that you must manually remove are the MBAM reports, MBAM Supported Computers collection, and the BitLocker Protection Configuration Baseline and its associated configuration items.
-
-**Workaround**: Upgrade the Configuration Manager objects by completing the following steps:
-
-1. Back up existing compliance data to an external file, as described in the following steps.
-
- **Note**
- All existing BitLocker compliance data will be deleted when you delete the existing baseline in Configuration Manager. The data will be regenerated over time, but it is recommended that you save a copy of the data in case you need the compliance data for a particular computer before the compliance data has been regenerated.
-
-
-
- 1. To save historical BitLocker compliance data, open the **BitLocker Enterprise Compliance Details** Report.
-
- 2. Click the **Save** icon in the report and select **Excel**.
-
- The saved report will contain data such as the computer name, domain name, compliance status, exemption, device users, compliance status details, and last contact date/time. Some information, such as detailed volume information and encryption strength, are not saved.
-
-2. Uninstall **MBAM** from the server by using the **MBAM** installer.
-
-3. Manually delete the following objects from Configuration Manager:
-
- - MBAM Supported Computers collection
-
- - BitLocker Protection baseline
-
- - BitLocker Operating System Drive Protection configuration item
-
- - BitLocker Fixed Data Drives Protection configuration item
-
-4. Manually delete the MBAM Reports folder in the Configuration Manager SQL Server Reporting Services site. To do this:
-
- 1. Use Internet Explorer to browse to the reporting services point, for example, http://<yourcmserver>/reports.
-
- 2. Click the appropriate Configuration Manager site code link.
-
- 3. Delete the MBAM folder.
-
-5. Use the MBAM Server installer to reinstall the Configuration Manager Integration objects. The client computers will begin to upload BitLocker compliance data again over time.
-
-### Submit button on Self-Service Portal does not work in Internet Explorer 10
-
-When you use Internet Explorer 10 to access the Administration and Monitoring Website, the **Submit** button on the website does not work.
-
-**Workaround**: On the server where you installed the Administration and Monitoring Website, install [Hotfix for ASP.NET browser definition files](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=317798).
-
-### International domain names are not supported
-
-MBAM 2.0 SP1 does not support international domain names.
-
-**Workaround**: None.
-
-### Reports in the Administration and Monitoring website display a warning if SSL is not configured in SSRS
-
-If SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) was not configured to use Secure Socket Layer (SSL), the URL for the reports will be set to HTTP instead of HTTPS when you install the MBAM Server. If you then browse to the Administration and Monitoring website and select a report, the following message displays: “Only Secure Content is Displayed.”
-
-**Workaround**: To correct this issue, configure SSL in **Reporting Services Configuration Manager** on the MBAM server where SQL Server Reporting Services is installed. Uninstall and then reinstall the Administration and Monitoring Server website.
-
-### Clicking Back in the Compliance Summary report might create an error
-
-If you drill down into a Compliance Summary report, and then click the **Back** link in the SSRS report, an error might occur.
-
-**Workaround**: None.
-
-### Used Space Only Encryption does not work correctly
-
-If you encrypt a computer for the first time after you install the MBAM Client, and you have set a Group Policy Object to implement Used Space Only Encryption, MBAM erroneously encrypts the entire disk instead of encrypting only the disk’s used space. If a computer is already encrypted with Used Space Only Encryption before you install the MBAM Client, and you have set the same Used Space Only Encryption Group Policy Object, MBAM recognizes the setting and reports the encryption correctly in the compliance reports.
-
-**Workaround**: None.
-
-### Cipher strength displays incorrectly in the Computer Compliance report
-
-If you do not set a specific cipher strength in the **Choose drive encryption method and cipher strength** Group Policy Object, the Computer Compliance report in the Configuration Manager integrated topology always displays **Unknown** for the cipher strength, even when the cipher strength uses the default of 128-bit encryption. The report displays the correct cipher strength if you set a specific cipher strength in the Group Policy Object.
-
-**Workaround**: Always set a specific cipher strength in the **Choose drive encryption method and cipher strength** Group Policy Object.
-
-### Compliance Status Distribution By Drive Type displays old data after you update configuration items
-
-After you update MBAM configuration items in System Center 2012 Configuration Manager, the Compliance Status Distribution By Drive Type bar chart on the BitLocker Enterprise Compliance Dashboard shows data that is based on information from old versions of the configuration items.
-
-**Workaround**: None. Modification of the MBAM configuration items is not supported, and the report might not appear as expected.
-
-### Enhanced Security Configuration may cause reports to display incorrectly
-
-If Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration (ESC) is turned on, an **Access Denied** message might appear when you try to view reports on the MBAM Server. By default, Enhanced Security Configuration is turned on to protect the server by decreasing the server’s exposure to potential attacks that can occur through web content and application scripts.
-
-**Workaround**: If the **Access Denied** message appears when you try to view reports on the MBAM Server, you can set a Group Policy Object or change the default manually in your image to disable Enhanced Security Configuration. You can also alternatively view the reports from another computer on which Enhanced Security Configuration is not enabled.
-
-### MBAM Server installation fails when you upgrade from SQL Server 2008 to SQL Server 2012
-
-If you upgrade from SQL Server 2008 to SQL Server 2012, and then try to install the Compliance and Audit Database or the Recovery Database, the installation fails and rolls back. The failure occurs because the required SQLCMD.exe file was removed during the SQL Server upgrade, and it cannot be found by the MBAM installer. The MSI log file lines may look similar to the following:
-
-RunDbInstallScript Recovery Db CA: BinDir - E:\\MSSQL\\100\\Tools\\Binn\\SqlCmd.exeRunDbInstallScript Recovery Db CA: dbInstance - xxxxxx\\I01RunDbInstallScript Recovery Db CA: sqlScript- C:\\Program Files\\Microsoft\\Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring\\Setup\\KeyRecovery.sqlRunDbInstallScript Recovery Db CA: dbName- MBAM\_Recovery\_and\_HardwareRunDbInstallScript Recovery Db CA: defaultFileName- MBAM\_Recovery\_and\_HardwareRunDbInstallScript Recovery Db CA: defaultDataPath- F:\\MSSQL\\MSSQL10.I01\\MSSQL\\DATA\\RunDbInstallScript Recovery Db CA: defaultLogPath- K:\\MSSQL\\MSSQL10.I01\\MSSQL\\Data\\RunDbInstallScript Recovery Db CA: scriptLogPath - C:\\Users\\xxxxxx\\AppData\\Local\\Temp\\InstallKeyComplianceDatabase.log-e -E -S xxxxxxx\\I01 -i "C:\\Program Files\\Microsoft\\Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring\\Setup\\KeyRecovery.sql" -v DatabaseName="MBAM\_Recovery\_and\_Hardware" DefaultFileName="MBAM\_Recovery\_and\_Hardware" DefaultDataPath="F:\\MSSQL\\MSSQL10.I01\\MSSQL\\DATA\\" DefaultLogPath="K:\\MSSQL\\MSSQL10.I01\\MSSQL\\Data\\" -o "C:\\Users\\xxxxxx\\AppData\\Local\\Temp\\InstallKeyComplianceDatabase.log"RunDbInstallScript Recovery Db CA:Starting to run the Recovery database install scriptRunDbInstallScript Recovery Db CA: Sqlcmd log file is located in C:\\Users\\xxxxxx\\AppData\\Local\\Temp\\\\InstallKeyRecoveryDatabase.logRunDbInstallScript Recovery Db CA Exception: Install Recovery database Custom Action command line output Exception: The system cannot find the file specified
-
-The MBAM Server Windows Installer is hardcoded to find the SQLCMD.exe path by looking in the Path string value in the registry under HKLM\\Software\\Microsoft\\Microsoft SQL Server\\100\\Tools\\ClientSetup. The key is still present during the migration from SQL Server 2008 to SQL Server 2012, but the path that is referenced by the data value does not contain the SQLCMD.exe file, because the SQL upgrade process removed the file.
-
-**Workaround**: Temporarily rename the HKLM\\Software\\Microsoft\\Microsoft SQL Server\\100\\Tools\\ClientSetup path string value to **Path\_old**, and then run Windows Installer on the MBAM Server again. When the installation completes successfully and creates the databases in SQL Server 2012, rename **Path\_old** to **Path**.
-
-## Hotfixes and Knowledge Base articles for MBAM 2.0 SP1
-
-
-This section contains hotfixes and KB articles for MBAM 2.0 SP1.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
KB Article
-
Title
-
Link
-
-
-
-
-
2831166
-
Installing Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) 2.0 fails with "System Center CM Objects Already Installed"
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[About MBAM 2.0 SP1](about-mbam-20-sp1.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/security-and-privacy-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/security-and-privacy-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0a0a6f60c0..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/security-and-privacy-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Security and Privacy for MBAM 2.0
-description: Security and Privacy for MBAM 2.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 1b2859f8-2381-4ad7-8744-2caed88570ad
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Security and Privacy for MBAM 2.0
-
-
-Use the following information to help you plan for security and privacy considerations in Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM).
-
-## Security Considerations for MBAM 2.0
-
-
-There are many security-related considerations that should be planned for when deploying and using MBAM in your environment. The information in this section provides a brief overview about the Active Directory Domain Services user accounts and groups, log files, and other security-related considerations for MBAM.
-
-[MBAM 2.0 Security Considerations](mbam-20-security-considerations-mbam-2.md)
-
-## Privacy for MBAM 2.0
-
-
-The information in this section explains many of the data collection and use practices of MBAM.
-
-[MBAM 2.0 Privacy Statement](mbam-20-privacy-statement-mbam-2.md)
-
-## Other resources MBAM Security and Privacy
-
-
-[Operations for MBAM 2.0](operations-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/troubleshooting-mbam-20-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/troubleshooting-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7ea7004d1c..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/troubleshooting-mbam-20-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,92 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Troubleshooting MBAM 2.0
-description: Troubleshooting MBAM 2.0
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 43933ec7-b5b8-49c5-813f-4c06aa7314ed
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Troubleshooting MBAM 2.0
-
-
-Troubleshooting content is not included in the Administrator’s Guide for this product. Instead, you can find troubleshooting information for this product on the [TechNet Wiki](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=224905).
-
-## How to Find Troubleshooting Content
-
-
-You can use the following information to find troubleshooting or additional technical content for this product.
-
-### Search the MDOP Documentation
-
-The first step to find help content in the Administrator’s Guide is to search the MDOP documentation on TechNet.
-
-After you search the MDOP documentation, your next step would be to search the troubleshooting information for the product in the TechNet Wiki.
-
-**To search the MDOP product documentation**
-
-1. Use a web browser to navigate to the [MDOP Information Experience](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=236032) TechNet home page.
-
-2. Enter applicable search terms in the **Search TechNet with Bing** search box at the top of the MDOP Information Experience home page.
-
-3. Review the search results for assistance.
-
-**To search the TechNet Wiki**
-
-1. Use a web browser to navigate to the [TechNet Wiki](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=224905) home page.
-
-2. Enter applicable search terms in the **Search TechNet Wiki** search box on the TechNet Wiki home page.
-
-3. Review the search results for assistance.
-
-## How to Create a Troubleshooting Article
-
-
-If you have a troubleshooting tip or a best practice to share that is not already included in the MDOP OnlineHelp or TechNet Wiki, you can create your own TechNet Wiki articles.
-
-**To create a TechNet Wiki troubleshooting or best practices article**
-
-1. Use a web browser to navigate to the [TechNet Wiki](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=224905) home page.
-
-2. Log in with your Windows Live ID.
-
-3. Review the **Getting Started** section to learn the basics of the TechNet Wiki and its articles.
-
-4. Select **Post an article >>** at the bottom of the **Getting Started** section.
-
-5. On the Wiki article **Add Page** page, select **Insert Template** from the toolbar, select the troubleshooting article template (**Troubleshooting.html**), and then click **Insert**.
-
-6. Be sure to give the article a descriptive title and then overwrite the template information as needed to create your troubleshooting or best practice article.
-
-7. After you review your article, be sure to include a tag that is named **Troubleshooting** and another for the product name. This helps others to find your content.
-
-8. Click **Save** to publish the article to the TechNet Wiki.
-
-## Other resources for troubleshooting MBAM
-
-
-[Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 2 Administrator's Guide](index.md)
-
-[Getting Started with MBAM 2.0](getting-started-with-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-[Planning for MBAM 2.0](planning-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-[Deploying MBAM 2.0](deploying-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-[Operations for MBAM 2.0](operations-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/understanding-mbam-reports-in-configuration-manager.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/understanding-mbam-reports-in-configuration-manager.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4e367f90d7..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/understanding-mbam-reports-in-configuration-manager.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,450 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Understanding MBAM Reports in Configuration Manager
-description: Understanding MBAM Reports in Configuration Manager
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: b2582190-c9de-4e64-bd5a-f31ac1916f53
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Understanding MBAM Reports in Configuration Manager
-
-
-When Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) is installed with the Configuration Manager Integrated topology, the hardware compliance and reporting features are moved into the Configuration Manager infrastructure and out of MBAM. When you use the Configuration Manager topology, you run reports from Configuration Manager rather than from MBAM, except for the Recovery Audit Report, which you continue to access by using the Administration and Monitoring Website.
-
-The reports for the Configuration Manager Integrated topology show BitLocker compliance for the enterprise and for individual computers and devices that MBAM manages. The reports provide both tabular information and charts, and enable you to filter reports to view data from different perspectives.
-
-The information in this topic describes the MBAM reports that you run from Configuration Manager. For information about MBAM reports for the Stand-alone topology, see [Understanding MBAM Reports](understanding-mbam-reports-mbam-2.md).
-
-## Accessing Reports in Configuration Manager
-
-
-To access the Reports feature in Configuration Manager, open the **Configuration Manager console**. To display the list of available reports:
-
-- In Configuration Manager 2007, expand the **Computer Management** node, and then expand the **Reporting** node.
-
-- In System Center 2012 Configuration Manager, in the Monitoring workspace under **Overview**, expand the **Reporting** node and then click **Reports**.
-
-### BitLocker Enterprise Compliance Dashboard
-
-The BitLocker Enterprise Compliance Dashboard provides the following graphs, which show BitLocker compliance status across the enterprise:
-
-- Compliance Status Distribution
-
-- Non Compliant Errors Distribution
-
-- Compliance Status Distribution by Drive Type
-
-**Compliance Status Distribution**
-
-This pie chart shows computer compliance statuses within the enterprise, and shows the percentage of computers, compared to the total number of computers in the selected collection, that have that compliance status. The actual number of computers with each status is also shown. The pie chart shows the following compliance statuses:
-
-- Compliant
-
-- Non Compliant
-
-- User Exempt
-
-- Temporary User Exempt
-
-- Policy Not Enforced
-
-- Unknown -computers whose status was reported as an error, or devices that are part of the collection but have never reported their compliance status, for example, if they are disconnected from the organization
-
-**Non Compliant Errors Distribution**
-
-This pie chart shows the categories of computers in the enterprise that are not compliant with the BitLocker drive encryption policy, and shows the number of computers in each category. Each category percentage is calculated from the total number of non-compliant computers in the collection.
-
-- User postponed encryption
-
-- Unable to find compatible TPM
-
-- System Partition not available or large enough
-
-- Policy conflict
-
-- Waiting for TPM auto provisioning
-
-- An unknown error has occurred
-
-- No information – computers that do not have the MBAM Client installed, or that have the MBAM Client installed but not activated, for example, the service is not working
-
-**Compliance Status Distribution by Drive Type**
-
-This bar chart shows the current BitLocker compliance status by drive type. The statuses are “Compliant” and “Non Compliant.” Bars are shown for fixed data drives and operating system drives. Computers that do not have a fixed data drive are included and show a value only in the Operating System Drive bar. The chart does not include users who have been granted an exemption from the BitLocker drive encryption policy or the “No Policy” category.
-
-### BitLocker Enterprise Compliance Details Report
-
-This report shows information about the overall BitLocker compliance across your enterprise for the collection of computers that is targeted for BitLocker use.
-
-**BitLocker Enterprise Compliance Details Report Fields**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Column Name
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Managed Computers
-
Number of computers that MBAM manages.
-
-
-
% Compliant
-
Percentage of compliant computers in the enterprise.
-
-
-
% Non-Compliant
-
Percentage of non-compliant computers in the enterprise.
-
-
-
% Unknown Compliance
-
Percentage of computers whose compliance state is not known.
-
-
-
% Exempt
-
Percentage of computers exempt from the BitLocker encryption requirement.
-
-
-
% Non-Exempt
-
Percentage of computers exempt from the BitLocker encryption requirement.
-
-
-
Compliant
-
Percentage of compliant computers in the enterprise.
-
-
-
Non-Compliant
-
Percentage of non-compliant computers in the enterprise.
-
-
-
Unknown Compliance
-
Percentage of computers whose compliance state is not known.
-
-
-
Exempt
-
Total computers that are exempt from the BitLocker encryption requirement.
-
-
-
Non-Exempt
-
Total computers that are not exempt from the BitLocker encryption requirement.
The computer is noncompliant, according to the specified policy.
-
-
-
Compliant
-
Not Exempt
-
The computer is compliant in accordance with the specified policy.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### BitLocker Enterprise Compliance Summary Report
-
-Use this report type to show information about the overall BitLocker compliance across your enterprise and to show the compliance for individual computers that are in the collection of computers that is targeted for BitLocker use.
-
-**BitLocker Enterprise Compliance Summary Report Fields**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Column Name
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Managed Computers
-
Number of computers that MBAM manages.
-
-
-
% Compliant
-
Percentage of compliant computers in the enterprise.
-
-
-
% Non-Compliant
-
Percentage of non-compliant computers in the enterprise.
-
-
-
% Unknown Compliance
-
Percentage of computers whose compliance state is not known.
-
-
-
% Exempt
-
Percentage of computers exempt from the BitLocker encryption requirement.
-
-
-
% Non-Exempt
-
Percentage of computers exempt from the BitLocker encryption requirement.
-
-
-
Compliant
-
Percentage of compliant computers in the enterprise.
-
-
-
Non-Compliant
-
Percentage of non-compliant computers in the enterprise.
-
-
-
Unknown Compliance
-
Percentage of computers whose compliance state is not known.
-
-
-
Exempt
-
Total computers that are exempt from the BitLocker encryption requirement.
-
-
-
Non-Exempt
-
Total computers that are not exempt from the BitLocker encryption requirement.
User-specified DNS computer name that is being managed by MBAM.
-
-
-
Domain Name
-
Fully qualified domain name, where the client computer resides and is managed by MBAM.
-
-
-
Compliance Status
-
Overall Compliance Status of the computer managed by MBAM. Valid states are Compliant and Noncompliant. Notice that the compliance status per drive (see table that follows) may indicate different compliance states. However, this field represents that compliance state, in accordance with the policy specified.
-
-
-
Exemption
-
Status that indicates whether the user is exempt or non-exemption from the BitLocker policy.
-
-
-
Device Users
-
User of the device.
-
-
-
Compliance Status Details
-
Error and status messages of the compliance state of the computer in accordance to the policy specified.
-
-
-
Last Contact
-
Date and time that the computer last contacted the server to report compliance status. The contact frequency is configurable (see MBAM policy settings).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### BitLocker Computer Compliance Report
-
-Use this report type to collect information that is specific to a computer. The Computer Compliance Report provides detailed encryption information about each drive (Operating System and Fixed data drives) on a computer, and also an indication of the policy that is applied to each drive type on the computer. To view the details of each drive, expand the Computer Name entry.
-
-**Note**
-Removable Data Volume encryption status is not shown in the report.
-
-
-
-**BitLocker Computer Compliance Report – Computer Details Fields**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Column Name
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Computer Name
-
User-specified DNS computer name that is being managed by MBAM.
-
-
-
Domain Name
-
Fully qualified domain name, where the client computer resides and is managed by MBAM.
-
-
-
Computer Type
-
Type of computer. Valid types are non-Portable and Portable.
-
-
-
Operating System
-
Operating System type found on the MBAM managed client computer.
-
-
-
Overall Compliance
-
Overall Compliance Status of the computer managed by MBAM. Valid states are Compliant and Noncompliant. Notice that the compliance status per drive (see table that follows) may indicate different compliance states. However, this field represents that compliance state, in accordance with the policy specified.
-
-
-
Operating System Compliance
-
Compliance status of the operating system that is managed by MBAM. Valid states are Compliant and Noncompliant.
-
-
-
Fixed Data Drive Compliance
-
Compliance status of the Fixed Data Drive that is managed by MBAM. Valid states are Compliant and Noncompliant.
-
-
-
Last Update Date
-
Date and time that the computer last contacted the server to report compliance status. The contact frequency is configurable (see MBAM policy settings).
-
-
-
Exemption
-
Status that indicates whether the user is exempt or non-exemption from the BitLocker policy.
-
-
-
Exempted User
-
User who is exempt from the BitLocker policy.
-
-
-
Exemption Date
-
Date on which the exemption was granted.
-
-
-
Compliance Status Details
-
Error and status messages of the compliance state of the computer in accordance to the policy specified.
-
-
-
Policy Cipher Strength
-
Cipher Strength selected by the Administrator during MBAM policy specification. (for example, 128-bit with Diffuser).
-
-
-
Policy: Operating System Drive
-
Indicates if encryption is required for the O/S and the appropriate protector type.
-
-
-
Policy:Fixed Data Drive
-
Indicates if encryption is required for the Fixed Drive.
-
-
-
Manufacturer
-
Computer manufacturer name as it appears in the computer BIOS.
-
-
-
Model
-
Computer manufacturer model name as it appears in the computer BIOS.
-
-
-
Device Users
-
Known users on the computer that is being managed by MBAM.
Computer drive letter that was assigned to the particular drive by the user.
-
-
-
Drive Type
-
Type of drive. Valid values are Operating System Drive and Fixed Data Drive. These are physical drives rather than logical volumes.
-
-
-
Cipher Strength
-
Cipher Strength selected by the Administrator during MBAM policy specification.
-
-
-
Protector Types
-
Type of protector selected via policy used to encrypt an operating system or Fixed volume. The valid protector types on an operating system are TPM or TPM+PIN and for a Fixed Data Volume is Password.
-
-
-
Protector State
-
Indicates that the computer being managed by MBAM has enabled the protector type specified in the policy. The valid states are ON or OFF.
-
-
-
Encryption State
-
Encryption state of the drive. Valid states are Encrypted, Not Encrypted, and Encrypting.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Using MBAM with Configuration Manager](using-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/understanding-mbam-reports-mbam-2.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/understanding-mbam-reports-mbam-2.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4e1f2addc4..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/understanding-mbam-reports-mbam-2.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,326 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Understanding MBAM Reports
-description: Understanding MBAM Reports
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 8778f333-760e-4f26-acb4-4e73b6fbb536
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Understanding MBAM Reports
-
-
-If you chose the Stand-alone topology when you installed Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM), you can run different reports in MBAM to monitor BitLocker usage and compliance. MBAM reports compliance and other information about all of the computers and devices it manages. The information in this topic can be used to help you understand the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring reports for enterprise and individual computer compliance and for key recovery activity.
-
-**Note**
-If you chose the Configuration Manager topology when you installed Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM), reports are generated from Configuration Manager rather than from MBAM. For more information about reports that are run from Configuration Manager, see [Understanding MBAM Reports in Configuration Manager](understanding-mbam-reports-in-configuration-manager.md).
-
-
-
-## Understanding Reports
-
-
-To access the Reports feature of Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring, open a web browser and open the Administration and Monitoring website. Select **Reports** in the left menu bar and then select from the top menu bar the kind of report that you want to generate.
-
-### Enterprise Compliance Report
-
-Use this report type to collect information on overall BitLocker compliance in your organization. You can use different filters to narrow your search results to Compliance state and Error status. The report information is updated every six hours.
-
-**Enterprise Compliance Report Fields**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Column Name
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Computer Name
-
User-specified DNS name that is being managed by MBAM.
-
-
-
Domain Name
-
Fully qualified domain name where the client computer resides and is managed by MBAM.
-
-
-
Compliance Status
-
State of compliance for the computer, according to the policy specified for the computer. The states are Noncompliant and Compliant. See the Enterprise Compliance Report Compliance States table for more information about how to interpret compliance states.
-
-
-
Compliance Status Details
-
Error and status messages of the compliance state of the computer in accordance to the policy specified.
-
-
-
Last Contact
-
Date and time when the computer last contacted the server to report compliance status. The contact frequency is configurable (see MBAM policy settings).
The computer is noncompliant, according to the specified policy.
-
Expand the Computer Compliance Report details by clicking Computer Name, and determine whether the state of each drive complies with the specified policy. If the encryption state indicates that the computer is not encrypted, encryption may be in process, or there is an error on the computer. If there is no error, the likely cause is that the computer is still in the process of connecting or establishing the encryption status. Check back later to determine if the state changes.
-
-
-
Compliant
-
Not Exempt
-
The computer is compliant, according to the specified policy.
-
No action needed; the state of the computer can be confirmed by viewing the Computer Compliance Report.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Computer Compliance Report
-
-Use this report type to collect information that is specific to a computer or user.
-
-This report can be viewed by clicking the computer name in the Enterprise Compliance Report, or by typing the computer name in the Computer Compliance Report. The Computer Compliance Report provides detailed encryption information about each drive (operating system and fixed data drives) on a computer, and also an indication of the policy that is applied to each drive type on the computer. To view the details of each drive, expand the Computer Name entry.
-
-**Note**
-Removable Data Volume encryption status will not be shown in the report.
-
-
-
-**Computer Compliance Report Fields**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Column Name
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Computer Name
-
User-specified DNS computer name that is being managed by MBAM.
-
-
-
Domain Name
-
Fully qualified domain name, where the client computer resides and is managed by MBAM.
-
-
-
Computer Type
-
Type of computer. Valid types are non-Portable and Portable.
-
-
-
Operating System
-
Operating system type found on the MBAM-managed client computer.
-
-
-
Compliance Status
-
Overall compliance status of the computer managed by MBAM. Valid states are Compliant and Noncompliant. Notice that the compliance status per drive (see the following table) may indicate different compliance states. However, this field represents that compliance state, according to the specified policy.
-
-
-
Policy Cipher Strength
-
Cipher strength selected by the administrator during MBAM policy specification (for example, 128-bit with Diffuser).
-
-
-
Policy Operating System Drive
-
Indicates if encryption is required for the operating system and shows the appropriate protector type.
-
-
-
Policy-Fixed Data Drive
-
Indicates if encryption is required for the fixed data drive.
-
-
-
Policy Removable Data Drive
-
Indicates if encryption is required for the removable drive.
-
-
-
Device Users
-
Known users on the computer that is being managed by MBAM.
-
-
-
Manufacturer
-
Computer manufacturer name, as it appears in the computer BIOS.
-
-
-
Model
-
Computer manufacturer model name, as it appears in the computer BIOS.
-
-
-
Compliance Status Details
-
Error and status messages of the compliance state of the computer, in accordance with the specified policy.
-
-
-
Last Contact
-
Date and time that the computer last contacted the server to report compliance status. The contact frequency is configurable (see MBAM policy settings).
Computer drive letter that was assigned to the particular drive by the user.
-
-
-
Drive Type
-
Type of drive. Valid values are Operating System Drive and Fixed Data Drive. These are physical drives rather than logical volumes.
-
-
-
Cipher Strength
-
Cipher strength selected by the administrator during MBAM policy specification.
-
-
-
Protector Type
-
Type of protector selected via the policy used to encrypt an operating system or fixed data volume.
-
-
-
Protector State
-
Indicates that the computer being managed by MBAM has enabled the protector type that is specified in the policy. The valid states are ON or OFF.
-
-
-
Encryption State
-
Encryption state of the drive. Valid states are Encrypted, Not Encrypted, and Encrypting.
-
-
-
Compliance Status
-
State that indicates whether the drive is in accordance with the policy. States are Noncompliant and Compliant.
-
-
-
Compliance Status Details
-
Error and status messages of the compliance state of the computer, according to the specified policy.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Recovery Audit Report
-
-Use this report type to audit users who have requested access to recovery keys. The report offers several filters based on the desired filtering criteria. Users can filter on a specific type of user, either a Help Desk user or an end user, whether the request failed or was successful, the specific type of key requested, and a date range during which the retrieval occurred. The administrator can produce contextual reports based on need.
-
-**Recovery Audit Report Fields**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Column Name
-
Description
-
-
-
-
-
Request Date and Time
-
Date and time that a key retrieval request was made by an end user or Help Desk user.
-
-
-
Request Status
-
Status of the request. Valid statuses are either Successful (the key was retrieved), or Failed (the key was not retrieved).
-
-
-
Helpdesk User
-
Help Desk user that initiated the request for key retrieval. Note: If the Help Desk user retrieves the key on behalf on an end-user, the End User field will be blank.
-
-
-
User
-
End user who initiated the request for key retrieval.
-
-
-
Key Type
-
Type of key that was requested by either the Help Desk user or the end user. The three types of keys that MBAM collects are: Recovery Key Password (used to recovery a computer in recovery mode), Recovery Key ID (used to recover a computer in recovery mode on behalf of another user), and TPM Password Hash (used to recover a computer with a locked TPM).
-
-
-
Reason Description
-
Reason the specified Key Type was requested by the Help Desk user or the end user. The reasons are specified in the Drive Recovery and Manage TPM features of the Administration and Monitoring website. The valid entries are either user-entered text, or one of the following reason codes:
-
-
Operating System Boot Order changed
-
BIOS Changed
-
Operating System files changed
-
Lost Startup key
-
Lost PIN
-
TPM Reset
-
Lost Passphrase
-
Lost Smartcard
-
Reset PIN lockout
-
Turn on TPM
-
Turn off TPM
-
Change TPM password
-
Clear TPM
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Note**
-Report results can be saved to a file by clicking the **Export** button on the reports menu bar. For more information about how to run MBAM reports, see [How to Generate MBAM Reports](how-to-generate-mbam-reports-mbam-2.md).
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Monitoring and Reporting BitLocker Compliance with MBAM 2.0](monitoring-and-reporting-bitlocker-compliance-with-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/upgrading-from-previous-versions-of-mbam.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/upgrading-from-previous-versions-of-mbam.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ab076703c4..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/upgrading-from-previous-versions-of-mbam.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,140 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Upgrading from Previous Versions of MBAM
-description: Upgrading from Previous Versions of MBAM
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 73b425cf-9cd9-4ebc-a35e-1b3bf18596ce
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Upgrading from Previous Versions of MBAM
-
-
-You can upgrade Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) to MBAM 2.0, with the Stand-alone topology or Configuration Manager topology, by doing the following:
-
-- **Manual in-place server replacement** – To upgrade the MBAM Server, manually uninstall MBAM by using either the installer or Control Panel, and then install the MBAM 2.0 infrastructure. You do not have to remove the databases. Uninstalling the MBAM 1.0 Server leaves the MBAM databases intact. If you specify the same databases that MBAM 1.0 was using, the MBAM 2.0 installation retains MBAM 1.0 data in the databases and converts the databases to work with MBAM 2.0.
-
-- **Distributed Client Upgrade** - If you are using the Stand-alone MBAM topology, you can upgrade the MBAM Clients gradually after you install the MBAM 2.0 Server infrastructure. The MBAM 2.0 Server detects the version of the existing Client and performs the required steps to upgrade to the 2.0 Client.
-
- After you upgrade the MBAM 2.0 Server infrastructure, MBAM 1.0 Clients continue to report to the MBAM 2.0 Server successfully, escrowing recovery data, but compliance will be based on the policies in MBAM 1.0. You must upgrade clients to MBAM 2.0 to have client computers accurately report compliance against the MBAM 2.0 policies. You can upgrade the clients to the MBAM 2.0 Client without uninstalling the previous client, and the client will start to apply and report MBAM 2.0 policies.
-
- If you are using MBAM with Configuration Manager, you must upgrade the MBAM 1.0 clients to MBAM 2.0.
-
-## Upgrading MBAM from a Two-Server Architecture
-
-
-Use the following instructions to upgrade from a previous version of MBAM when you are using a two-server architecture, where one server is hosting the Microsoft SQL Server components, and the other server is hosting the websites and services.
-
-**To upgrade MBAM from a two-server architecture**
-
-1. On the server with the SQL Server features, in Control Panel, select **Programs and Features**, and then uninstall **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring**. The Recovery Database and Compliance and Audit database remain unchanged.
-
-2. Run **MBAMSetup.exe** for version MBAM 2.0, optionally select the **Customer Experience Improvement Program**, and then click **Start**.
-
-3. Read and accept the Microsoft Software License Agreement, and then click **Next** to continue the installation.
-
-4. On the **Topology Selection** page, select the **Stand-alone** or **System Center Configuration Manager Integration** topology, and then click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Select features to install** page, clear the **Self-Service Server** and **Administration and Monitoring Server** features, and then click **Next**.
-
-6. Wait for the prerequisite checks to finish, and then click **Next**. If a missing prerequisite is detected, resolve the missing prerequisites, and then click **Check prerequisites again**.
-
-7. On the **Provide account used to access the MBAM databases** page, provide the computer name for the server that will host the sites and services, and then click **Next**.
-
-8. On the **Configure the Recovery database** page, specify the SQL Server instance name and the name of the database that will store the recovery data. You must also specify where the database files and log information will be located.
-
-9. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-10. On the **Configure the Compliance and Audit database** page, specify the SQL Server instance name and the name of the database that will store the compliance and audit data.
-
-11. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-12. On the **Configure the Compliance and Audit Reports** page, specify the SQL Server Reporting Services instance where the Compliance and Audit reports will be installed, and provide a domain user account and password to access the Compliance and Audit database. Configure the password for this account to never expire. The user account can access all data available to the MBAM Reports Users group.
-
-13. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-14. Specify whether to use Microsoft Updates to help keep your computer secure, and then click **Next**. This does not turn on Automatic Updates in Windows. If you previously chose to use Microsoft Update for this product or another product, the Microsoft Update page does not appear.
-
-15. On the **Installation Summary** page, review the features that will be installed, and then click **Install** to start the installation.
-
-**To uninstall the Administration and Monitoring Server features and to complete the upgrade**
-
-1. On the computer that hosts the Administration and Monitoring Server features, in Control Panel, select **Programs and Features**, and then uninstall MBAM to remove the previously installed websites and services.
-
-2. Run the **MBAMSetup.exe** for version 2.0, optionally select the **Customer Experience Improvement Program**, and then click **Start**.
-
-3. Read and accept the Microsoft Software License Agreement, and then click **Next** to continue the installation.
-
-4. On the **Topology Selection** page, select the **Stand-alone** or **System Center Configuration Manager Integration** topology, and then click **Next**.
-
-5. On the **Select features to install** page, clear the **Recovery Database** and **Compliance and Audit Database** and **Compliance and Audit Reports** features, and then click **Next**.
-
-6. Wait for the prerequisite checks to finish, and then click **Next**. If a missing prerequisite is detected, resolve the missing prerequisites first, and then click **Check prerequisites again**.
-
-7. On the **Configure network communication security** page, choose whether to use Secure Socket Layer (SSL) encryption for the websites and services. If you decide to encrypt the communication, select the certification authority (CA) certificate to use for encryption.
-
- **Note**
- The certificate must be created before this step to enable you to select it on this page.
-
-
-
-8. On the **Configure the location of the Compliance Status database** page, specify the SQL Server instance name and the name of the database that stores the compliance and audit data. You must also specify where the database files and log information will be located.
-
-9. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-10. On the **Configure the location of the Recovery Database** page, specify the SQL Server instance name and the name of the database that stores the recovery data.
-
-11. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-12. On the **Configure the Compliance and Audit Reports** page, enter the URL for the reporting instance that you configured on the other server. Use the **Test** button to verify that you can reach the site.
-
-13. Click **Next** to continue.
-
-14. On the **Configure the Self-Service Portal** page, enter the port number, host name, virtual directory name, and installation path for the Self-Service Portal.
-
- **Note**
- The port number that you specify must be an unused port number on the Administration and Monitoring Server unless you specify a unique host header name.
-
-
-
-15. On the **Configure the Administration and Monitoring Server** page, specify the desired virtual directory for the Help Desk website.
-
-16. Specify whether to use Microsoft Updates to help keep your computer secure, and then click **Next**. This step does not turn on Automatic Updates in Windows. If you previously chose to use Microsoft Update for this product or another product, the Microsoft Update page does not appear.
-
-17. On the **Installation Summary** page, review the features that will be installed, and then click **Install** to start the installation.
-
-18. To validate that the upgrade was successful, verify that you can reach each site from another computer in the domain.
-
-## Upgrading the MBAM Client on End-User Computers
-
-
-To upgrade end-user computers to the MBAM 2.0 Client, run **MbamClientSetup.exe** on each client computer. The installer automatically updates the Client to the MBAM 2.0 Client. You can install the MBAM Client through an electronic software distribution system, tools such as Active Directory Domain Services or System Center Configuration Manager.
-
-To validate the Client upgrade, do the following:
-
-1. Wait until the configured reporting cycle is finished, and then start **SQL Server Management Studio** on the SQL Server computer.
-
-2. On the SQL Server computer, start **SQL Server Management Studio**.
-
-3. Verify that the **RecoveryAndHardwareCore.Machines** table contains a row that shows the end-user’s computer name.
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying MBAM 2.0](deploying-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/using-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/using-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 10be5afa15..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/using-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Using MBAM with Configuration Manager
-description: Using MBAM with Configuration Manager
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 03868717-4aa7-4897-8166-9a3df5e9519e
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Using MBAM with Configuration Manager
-
-
-When you install Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM), you can choose an installation that integrates Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring with System Center Configuration Manager. For a list of the supported versions of Configuration Manager, see [Planning to Deploy MBAM with Configuration Manager](planning-to-deploy-mbam-with-configuration-manager-2.md).
-
-This integration moves the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring compliance and reporting infrastructure into the native environment of Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager. With the Configuration Manager topology, IT administrators can view reports and the compliance status of their enterprise from the Configuration Manager Management Console.
-
-**Important**
-Windows To Go is not supported when you install the integrated topology of MBAM with Configuration Manager 2007.
-
-
-
-## Getting Started – Using MBAM with Configuration Manager
-
-
-This section describes how MBAM works with Configuration Manager and explains the recommended architecture for deploying MBAM with the Configuration Manager Integration topology.
-
-[Getting Started - Using MBAM with Configuration Manager](getting-started---using-mbam-with-configuration-manager.md)
-
-## Planning to Deploy MBAM with Configuration Manager
-
-
-This section describes the installation prerequisites, supported configurations, and hardware and software requirements that you need to consider before you install MBAM with the Configuration Manager topology.
-
-[Planning to Deploy MBAM with Configuration Manager](planning-to-deploy-mbam-with-configuration-manager-2.md)
-
-## Deploying MBAM with Configuration Manager
-
-
-This section describes how to deploy MBAM with Configuration Manager, and includes instructions for installing and configuring the MBAM on the Administration and Monitoring Server and Configuration Manager Server.
-
-[Deploying MBAM with Configuration Manager](deploying-mbam-with-configuration-manager-mbam2.md)
-
-## Understanding MBAM Reports in Configuration Manager
-
-
-This section describes the MBAM reports that you can run from Configuration Manager to show the compliance of your enterprise and compliance of individual computers in your enterprise.
-
-[Understanding MBAM Reports in Configuration Manager](understanding-mbam-reports-in-configuration-manager.md)
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Operations for MBAM 2.0](operations-for-mbam-20-mbam-2.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v2/using-your-pin-or-password.md b/mdop/mbam-v2/using-your-pin-or-password.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b2e8471007..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v2/using-your-pin-or-password.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Using Your PIN or Password
-description: Using Your PIN or Password
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 7fe2aef4-d3e0-49c8-877d-7fee13dc5b7b
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Using Your PIN or Password
-
-
-BitLocker helps secure your computer by requiring a personal identification number (PIN) or password to unlock the information that is stored on your computer. The PIN or password requirements are set by your organization and depend on the kind of drive being encrypted. Data on the encrypted drives cannot be viewed without entering the PIN or password. If your computer hardware includes an enabled Trusted Platform Module (TPM), the TPM chip prompts you for your PIN before Windows starts on your computer.
-
-## About Your BitLocker PIN and Passwords
-
-
-Your company specifies the complexity required for your PIN or password. These requirements for your PIN or password are explained during the BitLocker setup process.
-
-The password is used to unlock drives on your computer that do not contain the operating system. BitLocker will ask for your password after the PIN is requested during startup. Each BitLocker protected hard disk on your computer has its own unique password. You cannot unlock a BitLocker protected drive until you provide your password.
-
-**Note**
-Your Help Desk may set drives to unlock automatically. This eliminates the need to provide a PIN or password to view the information on the drives.
-
-
-
-## Unlocking Your Computer if You Forget Your PIN or Password
-
-
-If you forget your PIN or password, your Help Desk can help you unlock BitLocker protected drives. To unlock a drive protected with BitLocker, contact your Help Desk if you need help.
-
-**How to unlock your computer if you forget your PIN or password**
-
-1. When you contact your Help Desk, you will need to provide them with the following information:
-
- - Your user name
-
- - Your domain
-
- - The first eight digits of your recovery key ID. This is a 32-digit code that BitLocker will display if you forget your PIN or password.
-
- - If you forget your PIN, you will have to enter the first eight digits of the recovery key ID, which will appear in the BitLocker Recovery console. The BitLocker Recovery console is a pre-Windows screen that will be displayed if you do not enter the correct PIN.
-
- - If you forget your password, look for the recovery key ID in the BitLocker Encryption Options Control Panel application. Select **Unlock Drive** and then click **I cannot remember my password**. The BitLocker Encryption Options application will then display a recovery key ID that you provide to Help Desk.
-
-2. Once your Help Desk receives the necessary information, it will provide you with a recovery key over the phone or through e-mail.
-
- - If you forgot your PIN, enter the recovery key in the BitLocker Recovery console to unlock your computer.
-
- - If you forgot your password, enter the recovery key in the BitLocker Encryption Options Control Panel application, in the same location where you found the recovery key ID earlier. This will unlock the protected hard drive.
-
-## Changing your PIN or Password
-
-
-Before you can change the password on a BitLocker protected drive, you must unlock the drive. If the drive is not unlocked, select **Unlock Drive**, and then enter your current password. As soon as the drive is unlocked, you can select **Manage your Password** to change your current password.
-
-**How to Change your PIN or password**
-
-1. Click **Start**, and then select **Control Panel**. Control Panel opens in a new window.
-
-2. Select **System and Security**, and then select **BitLocker Encryption Options**.
-
- - To change your PIN, select **Manage Your PIN**. Type your new PIN into both fields and select **Reset PIN**.
-
- - To change your password, select **Manage Your Password**. Enter your new password into both fields and select **Reset Password**.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v25/TOC.md b/mdop/mbam-v25/TOC.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8a6984ffb5..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v25/TOC.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,94 +0,0 @@
-# [Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 2.5](index.md)
-## [Getting Started with MBAM 2.5](getting-started-with-mbam-25.md)
-### [About MBAM 2.5](about-mbam-25.md)
-#### [Release Notes for MBAM 2.5](release-notes-for-mbam-25.md)
-### [About MBAM 2.5 SP1](about-mbam-25-sp1.md)
-#### [Release Notes for MBAM 2.5 SP1](release-notes-for-mbam-25-sp1.md)
-### [Evaluating MBAM 2.5 in a Test Environment](evaluating-mbam-25-in-a-test-environment.md)
-### [High-Level Architecture for MBAM 2.5](high-level-architecture-for-mbam-25.md)
-#### [High-Level Architecture of MBAM 2.5 with Stand-alone Topology](high-level-architecture-of-mbam-25-with-stand-alone-topology.md)
-#### [High-Level Architecture of MBAM 2.5 with Configuration Manager Integration Topology](high-level-architecture-of-mbam-25-with-configuration-manager-integration-topology.md)
-#### [Illustrated Features of an MBAM 2.5 Deployment](illustrated-features-of-an-mbam-25-deployment.md)
-### [Accessibility for MBAM 2.5](accessibility-for-mbam-25.md)
-## [Planning for MBAM 2.5](planning-for-mbam-25.md)
-### [Preparing your Environment for MBAM 2.5](preparing-your-environment-for-mbam-25.md)
-#### [MBAM 2.5 Deployment Prerequisites](mbam-25-deployment-prerequisites.md)
-##### [MBAM 2.5 Server Prerequisites for Stand-alone and Configuration Manager Integration Topologies](mbam-25-server-prerequisites-for-stand-alone-and-configuration-manager-integration-topologies.md)
-##### [MBAM 2.5 Server Prerequisites that Apply Only to the Configuration Manager Integration Topology](mbam-25-server-prerequisites-that-apply-only-to-the-configuration-manager-integration-topology.md)
-###### [Prerequisites for the Configuration Manager Integration Feature](prerequisites-for-the-configuration-manager-integration-feature.md)
-###### [Edit the Configuration.mof File](edit-the-configurationmof-file-mbam-25.md)
-###### [Create or Edit the Sms_def.mof File](create-or-edit-the-sms-defmof-file-mbam-25.md)
-##### [Prerequisites for MBAM 2.5 Clients](prerequisites-for-mbam-25-clients.md)
-#### [Planning for MBAM 2.5 Group Policy Requirements](planning-for-mbam-25-group-policy-requirements.md)
-#### [Planning for MBAM 2.5 Groups and Accounts](planning-for-mbam-25-groups-and-accounts.md)
-#### [Planning How to Secure the MBAM Websites](planning-how-to-secure-the-mbam-websites.md)
-### [Planning to Deploy MBAM 2.5](planning-to-deploy-mbam-25.md)
-#### [MBAM 2.5 Supported Configurations](mbam-25-supported-configurations.md)
-#### [Planning for MBAM 2.5 Server Deployment](planning-for-mbam-25-server-deployment.md)
-#### [Planning for MBAM 2.5 Client Deployment](planning-for-mbam-25-client-deployment.md)
-#### [Planning for MBAM 2.5 High Availability](planning-for-mbam-25-high-availability.md)
-#### [MBAM 2.5 Security Considerations](mbam-25-security-considerations.md)
-### [MBAM 2.5 Planning Checklist](mbam-25-planning-checklist.md)
-## [Deploying MBAM 2.5](deploying-mbam-25.md)
-### [Deploying the MBAM 2.5 Server Infrastructure](deploying-the-mbam-25-server-infrastructure.md)
-#### [Installing the MBAM 2.5 Server Software](installing-the-mbam-25-server-software.md)
-#### [Configuring the MBAM 2.5 Server Features](configuring-the-mbam-25-server-features.md)
-##### [How to Configure the MBAM 2.5 Databases](how-to-configure-the-mbam-25-databases.md)
-##### [How to Configure the MBAM 2.5 Reports](how-to-configure-the-mbam-25-reports.md)
-##### [How to Configure the MBAM 2.5 Web Applications](how-to-configure-the-mbam-25-web-applications.md)
-###### [How to Configure the Self-Service Portal When Client Computers Cannot Access the Microsoft Content Delivery Network](how-to-configure-the-self-service-portal-when-client-computers-cannot-access-the-microsoft-content-delivery-network.md)
-###### [Customizing the Self-Service Portal for Your Organization](customizing-the-self-service-portal-for-your-organization.md)
-####### [How to Set the Self-Service Portal Branding and Session Time-out](how-to-set-the-self-service-portal-branding-and-session-time-out.md)
-####### [How to Turn the Self-Service Portal Notice Text On or Off](how-to-turn-the-self-service-portal-notice-text-on-or-off.md)
-####### [How to Localize the “HelpdeskText” Statement that Points Users to More Self-Service Portal Information](how-to-localize-the-helpdesktext-statement-that-points-users-to-more-self-service-portal-information.md)
-####### [How to Localize the Self-Service Portal “HelpdeskURL”](how-to-localize-the-self-service-portal-helpdeskurl.md)
-####### [How to Localize the Self-Service Portal Notice Text](how-to-localize-the-self-service-portal-notice-text.md)
-##### [How to Configure the MBAM 2.5 System Center Configuration Manager Integration](how-to-configure-the-mbam-25-system-center-configuration-manager-integration.md)
-##### [Configuring MBAM 2.5 Server Features by Using Windows PowerShell](configuring-mbam-25-server-features-by-using-windows-powershell.md)
-#### [Validating the MBAM 2.5 Server Feature Configuration](validating-the-mbam-25-server-feature-configuration.md)
-### [Deploying MBAM 2.5 Group Policy Objects](deploying-mbam-25-group-policy-objects.md)
-#### [Copying the MBAM 2.5 Group Policy Templates](copying-the-mbam-25-group-policy-templates.md)
-#### [Editing the MBAM 2.5 Group Policy Settings](editing-the-mbam-25-group-policy-settings.md)
-#### [Hiding the Default BitLocker Drive Encryption Item in Control Panel](hiding-the-default-bitlocker-drive-encryption-item-in-control-panel-mbam-25.md)
-### [Deploying the MBAM 2.5 Client](deploying-the-mbam-25-client.md)
-#### [How to Deploy the MBAM Client to Desktop or Laptop Computers](how-to-deploy-the-mbam-client-to-desktop-or-laptop-computers-mbam-25.md)
-#### [How to Enable BitLocker by Using MBAM as Part of a Windows Deployment](how-to-enable-bitlocker-by-using-mbam-as-part-of-a-windows-deploymentmbam-25.md)
-#### [How to Deploy the MBAM Client by Using a Command Line](how-to-deploy-the-mbam-client-by-using-a-command-line.md)
-### [MBAM 2.5 Deployment Checklist](mbam-25-deployment-checklist.md)
-### [Upgrading to MBAM 2.5 SP1 from MBAM 2.5](upgrading-to-mbam-25-sp1-from-mbam-25.md)
-### [Upgrading to MBAM 2.5 or MBAM 2.5 SP1 from Previous Versions](upgrading-to-mbam-25-or-mbam-25-sp1-from-previous-versions.md)
-### [Removing MBAM Server Features or Software](removing-mbam-server-features-or-software.md)
-## [Operations for MBAM 2.5](operations-for-mbam-25.md)
-### [Administering MBAM 2.5 Features](administering-mbam-25-features.md)
-#### [How to Manage User BitLocker Encryption Exemptions](how-to-manage-user-bitlocker-encryption-exemptions-mbam-25.md)
-#### [Understanding the BitLocker Encryption Options and BitLocker Drive Encryption Items in Control Panel](understanding-the-bitlocker-encryption-options-and-bitlocker-drive-encryption-items-in-control-panel.md)
-### [Monitoring and Reporting BitLocker Compliance with MBAM 2.5](monitoring-and-reporting-bitlocker-compliance-with-mbam-25.md)
-#### [Viewing MBAM 2.5 Reports for the Stand-alone Topology](viewing-mbam-25-reports-for-the-stand-alone-topology.md)
-##### [Understanding MBAM 2.5 Stand-alone Reports](understanding-mbam-25-stand-alone-reports.md)
-##### [Generating MBAM 2.5 Stand-alone Reports](generating-mbam-25-stand-alone-reports.md)
-#### [Viewing MBAM 2.5 Reports for the Configuration Manager Integration Topology](viewing-mbam-25-reports-for-the-configuration-manager-integration-topology.md)
-### [Performing BitLocker Management with MBAM 2.5](performing-bitlocker-management-with-mbam-25.md)
-#### [How to Use the Administration and Monitoring Website](how-to-use-the-administration-and-monitoring-website.md)
-##### [How to Reset a TPM Lockout](how-to-reset-a-tpm-lockout-mbam-25.md)
-##### [How to Recover a Drive in Recovery Mode](how-to-recover-a-drive-in-recovery-mode-mbam-25.md)
-##### [How to Recover a Moved Drive](how-to-recover-a-moved-drive-mbam-25.md)
-##### [How to Recover a Corrupted Drive](how-to-recover-a-corrupted-drive-mbam-25.md)
-##### [How to Determine BitLocker Encryption State of Lost Computers](how-to-determine-bitlocker-encryption-state-of-lost-computers-mbam-25.md)
-#### [How to Use the Self-Service Portal to Regain Access to a Computer](how-to-use-the-self-service-portal-to-regain-access-to-a-computer-mbam-25.md)
-### [Maintaining MBAM 2.5](maintaining-mbam-25.md)
-#### [Moving MBAM 2.5 Features to Another Server](moving-mbam-25-features-to-another-server.md)
-##### [How to Move the MBAM 2.5 Databases](how-to-move-the-mbam-25-databases.md)
-##### [How to Move the MBAM 2.5 Reports](how-to-move-the-mbam-25-reports.md)
-##### [How to Move the MBAM 2.5 Websites](how-to-move-the-mbam-25-websites.md)
-#### [Monitoring Web Service Request Performance Counters](monitoring-web-service-request-performance-counters.md)
-### [Using Windows PowerShell to Administer MBAM 2.5](using-windows-powershell-to-administer-mbam-25.md)
-## [Troubleshooting MBAM 2.5](troubleshooting-mbam-25.md)
-### [Upgrade from MBAM 2.5 to MBAM 2.5 SP1](upgrade-mbam2.5-sp1.md)
-### [Troubleshooting MBAM 2.5 installation problems](troubleshooting-mbam-installation.md)
-### [Deploying MBAM 2.5 in a stand-alone configuration](deploy-mbam.md)
-## [Applying hotfixes on MBAM 2.5 SP1](apply-hotfix-for-mbam-25-sp1.md)
-## [Technical Reference for MBAM 2.5](technical-reference-for-mbam-25.md)
-### [Client Event Logs](client-event-logs.md)
-### [Server Event Logs](server-event-logs.md)
-### [Determining why a Device Receives a Noncompliance Message](determining-why-a-device-receives-a-noncompliance-message.md)
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v25/about-mbam-25-sp1.md b/mdop/mbam-v25/about-mbam-25-sp1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e9fefc297b..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v25/about-mbam-25-sp1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,253 +0,0 @@
----
-title: About MBAM 2.5 SP1
-description: About MBAM 2.5 SP1
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 6f12e605-44e6-4646-9c20-aee89c8ff0b7
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 09/27/2016
----
-
-
-# About MBAM 2.5 SP1
-
-
-MBAM 2.5 SP1 provides a simplified administrative interface for BitLocker Drive Encryption. BitLocker offers enhanced protection against data theft or data exposure for computers that are lost or stolen. BitLocker encrypts all data that is stored on the Windows operating system and drives and configured data drives.
-
-## Overview of MBAM
-
-
-MBAM 2.5 SP1 has the following features:
-
-- Enables administrators to automate the process of encrypting volumes on client computers across the enterprise.
-
-- Enables security officers to quickly determine the compliance state of individual computers or even of the enterprise itself.
-
-- Provides centralized reporting and hardware management with Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager.
-
-- Reduces the workload on the Help Desk to assist end users with BitLocker PIN and recovery key requests.
-
-- Enables end users to recover encrypted devices independently by using the Self-Service Portal.
-
-- Enables security officers to easily audit access to recover key information.
-
-- Empowers Windows Enterprise users to continue working anywhere with the assurance that their corporate data is protected.
-
-MBAM enforces the BitLocker encryption policy options that you set for your enterprise, monitors the compliance of client computers with those policies, and reports on the encryption status of the enterprise’s and individual’s computers. In addition, MBAM lets you access the recovery key information when users forget their PIN or password, or when their BIOS or boot records change.
-
-The following groups might be interested in using MBAM to manage BitLocker:
-
-- Administrators, IT security professionals, and compliance officers who are responsible for ensuring that confidential data is not disclosed without authorization
-
-- Administrators who are responsible for computer security in remote or branch offices
-
-- Administrators who are responsible for client computers that are running Windows
-
-**Note**
-BitLocker is not explained in detail in this MBAM documentation. For more information, see [BitLocker Drive Encryption Overview](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=225013).
-
-
-
-## What’s new in MBAM 2.5 SP1
-
-
-This section describes the new features in MBAM 2.5 SP1.
-
-### Newly Supported Languages for the MBAM 2.5 SP1 Client
-
-The following additional languages are now supported in MBAM 2.5 SP1 for the MBAM Client only, including the Self-Service Portal:
-
-Czech (Czech Republic) cs-CZ
-
-Danish (Denmark) da-DK
-
-Dutch (Netherlands) nl-NL
-
-Finnish (Finland) fi-FI
-
-Greek (Greece) el-GR
-
-Hungarian (Hungary) hu-HU
-
-Norwegian, Bokmål (Norway) nb-NO
-
-Polish (Poland) pl-PL
-
-Portuguese (Portugal) pt-PT
-
-Slovak (Slovakia) sk-SK
-
-Slovenian (Slovenia) sl-SI
-
-Swedish (Sweden) sv-SE
-
-Turkish (Turkey) tr-TR
-
-For a list of all languages supported for client and server in MBAM 2.5 and MBAM 2.5 SP1, see [MBAM 2.5 Supported Configurations](mbam-25-supported-configurations.md).
-
-### Support for Windows 10
-
-MBAM 2.5 SP1 adds support for Windows 10 and Windows Server 2016, in addition to the same software that is supported in earlier versions of MBAM.
-
-Windows 10 is supported in both MBAM 2.5 and MBAM 2.5 SP1.
-
-### Support for Microsoft SQL Server 2014 SP1
-
-MBAM 2.5 SP1 adds support for Microsoft SQL Server 2014 SP1, in addition to the same software that is supported in earlier versions of MBAM.
-
-### MBAM no longer ships with separate MSI
-
-Beginning in MBAM 2.5 SP1, a separate MSI is no longer included with the MBAM product. However, you can extract the MSI from the executable file (.exe) that is included with the product.
-
-### MBAM can escrow OwnerAuth passwords without owning the TPM
-
-Previously, if MBAM did not own the TPM, the TPM OwnerAuth could not be escrowed to the MBAM database. To configure MBAM to own the TPM and to store the passwords, you had to disable TPM auto-provisioning and clear the TPM on the client computer.
-
-In Windows 8 and higher, MBAM 2.5 SP1 can now escrow the OwnerAuth passwords without owning the TPM. During service startup, MBAM queries to see if the TPM is already owned and if so, it requests the passwords from the operating system. The passwords are then escrowed to the MBAM database. In addition, Group Policy must be set to prevent the OwnerAuth from being deleted locally.
-
-In Windows 7, MBAM must own the TPM to automatically escrow TPM OwnerAuth information in the MBAM database. If MBAM does not own the TPM and Active Directory (AD) backup of the TPM is configured through Group Policy, you must use the **MBAM Active Directory (AD) Data Import cmdlets** to copy TPM OwnerAuth from AD into the MBAM database. These are five new PowerShell cmdlets that pre-populate MBAM databases with the Volume recovery and TPM owner information stored in Active Directory.
-
-For more information, see [MBAM 2.5 Security Considerations](mbam-25-security-considerations.md#bkmk-tpm).
-
-### MBAM can automatically unlock the TPM after a lockout
-
-On computers running TPM 1.2, you can now configure MBAM to automatically unlock the TPM in case of a lockout. If the TPM lockout auto reset feature is enabled, MBAM can detect that a user is locked out and then get the OwnerAuth password from the MBAM database to automatically unlock the TPM for the user.
-
-This feature must be enabled on both the server side and in Group Policy on the client side. For more information, see [MBAM 2.5 Security Considerations](mbam-25-security-considerations.md#bkmk-autounlock).
-
-### Support for FIPS-compliant BitLocker numerical password protectors
-
-In MBAM 2.5, support was added for Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS)-compliant BitLocker recovery keys on devices running the Windows 8.1 operating system. However, Windows did not implement FIPS-compliant recovery keys in Windows 7. Therefore, Windows 7 and Windows 8 devices still required a Data Recovery Agent (DRA) protector for recovery.
-
-The Windows team has backported FIPS-compliant recovery keys with a hotfix, and MBAM 2.5 SP1 has added support for them as well.
-
-**Note**
-Client computers that are running the Windows 8 operating system still require a DRA protector since the hotfix was not backported to that OS. See [Hotfix Package 2 for BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 2.5](https://support.microsoft.com/kb/3015477) to download and install the BitLocker hotfix for Windows 7 and Windows 8 computers. For information about DRA, see [Using Data Recovery Agents with BitLocker](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=393557).
-
-
-
-To enable FIPS compliance in your organization, you must configure the Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) Group Policy settings. For configuration instructions, see [BitLocker Group Policy Settings](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=393560).
-
-### Customize pre-boot recovery message and URL with new Group Policy setting
-
-A new Group Policy setting, **Configure pre-boot recovery message and URL**, lets you configure a custom recovery message or specify a URL that is then displayed on the pre-boot BitLocker recovery screen when the OS drive is locked. This setting is only available on client computers running Windows 10.
-
-If you enable this policy setting, you can you can select one of these options for the pre-boot recovery message:
-
-- **Use custom recovery message**: Select this option to include a custom message in the pre-boot BitLocker recovery screen.
-
-- **Use custom recovery URL**: Select this option to replace the default URL that is displayed in the pre-boot BitLocker recovery screen.
-
-- **Use default recovery message and URL**: Select this option to display the default BitLocker recovery message and URL in the pre-boot BitLocker recovery screen. If you previously configured a custom recovery message or URL and want to revert to the default message, you must enable this policy and select this option.
-
-The new Group Policy setting is located in the following GPO node: **Computer Configuration** > **Policies** > **Administrative Templates** > **Windows Components** > **MDOP MBAM (BitLocker Management)** > **Operating System Drive**. For more information, see [Planning for MBAM 2.5 Group Policy Requirements](planning-for-mbam-25-group-policy-requirements.md).
-
-### MBAM added support for Used Space Encryption
-
-In MBAM 2.5 SP1, if you enable Used Space Encryption via BitLocker Group Policy, the MBAM Client honors it.
-
-This Group Policy setting is called **Enforce drive encryption type on operating system drives** and is located in the following GPO node: **Computer Configuration** > **Administrative Templates** > **Windows Components** > **BitLocker Drive Encryption** > **Operating System Drives**. If you enable this policy and select the encryption type as **Used Space Only encryption**, MBAM will honor the policy and BitLocker will only encrypt disk space that is used on the volume.
-
-For more information, see [Planning for MBAM 2.5 Group Policy Requirements](planning-for-mbam-25-group-policy-requirements.md).
-
-### MBAM Client support for Encrypted Hard Drives
-
-MBAM supports BitLocker on Encrypted Hard Drives that meet TCG specification requirements for Opal as well as IEEE 1667 standards. When BitLocker is enabled on these devices, it will generate keys and perform management functions on the encrypted drive. See [Encrypted Hard Drive](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/hh831627.aspx) for more information.
-
-### Delegation configuration no longer required when registering SPNs
-
-The requirement to configure constrained delegation for SPNs that you register for the application pool account is no longer necessary in MBAM 2.5 SP1. However, it is still a requirement for MBAM 2.5.
-
-### Enable BitLocker using MBAM as Part of a Windows Deployment
-
-In MBAM 2.5 SP1, you can use a PowerShell script to configure BitLocker drive encryption and escrow recovery keys to the MBAM Server.
-
-For more information, see [How to Enable BitLocker by Using MBAM as Part of a Windows Deployment](how-to-enable-bitlocker-by-using-mbam-as-part-of-a-windows-deploymentmbam-25.md)
-
-### Self-Service Portal can be customized by using either PowerShell or the SSP customization wizard
-
-As of MBAM 2.5 SP1, the Self-Service Portal can be configured by using the customization wizard as well as by using PowerShell. See [How to Configure the MBAM 2.5 Web Applications](how-to-configure-the-mbam-25-web-applications.md).
-
-### Web browser no longer unintentionally runs as administrator
-
-An issue in MBAM 2.5 caused help links in the Server Configuration tool to cause browser windows to open with administrator rights. This issue is fixed in MBAM 2.5 SP1.
-
-### No longer need to download the JavaScript files to configure the Self-Service Portal when the CDN is inaccessible
-
-In MBAM 2.5 and earlier, the jQuery files used for configuration of the Self-Service Portal had to be downloaded from the CDN in advance if clients accessing the Self-Service Portal did not have internet access. In MBAM 2.5 SP1, all JavaScript files are included in the product, so downloading them is unnecessary.
-
-### Reports can be opened in Report Builder 3.0
-
-In MBAM 2.5 SP1, the reports have been updated to the latest report definition language schema, allowing users to open and customize the reports in Report Builder 3.0 and save them immediately without corrupting the report file.
-
-### New PowerShell cmdlets
-
-New PowerShell cmdlets for MBAM 2.5 SP1 enable you to configure and manage different MBAM features, including databases, reports, and web applications. Each feature has a corresponding PowerShell cmdlet that you can use to enable or disable features, or to get information about the feature.
-
-The following cmdlets have been implemented for MBAM 2.5 SP1:
-
-- Write-MbamTpmInformation
-
-- Write-MbamRecoveryInformation
-
-- Read-ADTpmInformation
-
-- Read-ADRecoveryInformation
-
-- Write-MbamComputerUser
-
-The following parameters have been implemented in the Enable-MbamWebApplication and Test-MbamWebApplication cmdlets for MBAM 2.5 SP1:
-
-- DataMigrationAccessGroup
-
-- TpmAutoUnlock
-
-For information about the cmdlets, see [MBAM 2.5 Security Considerations](mbam-25-security-considerations.md) and [Microsoft Bitlocker Administration and Monitoring Cmdlet Help](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dn720418.aspx).
-
-### MBAM agent detects presentation mode
-
-The MBAM agent can detect when the computer is in presentation mode and avoid invoking the MBAM UI at that time.
-
-### MBAM agent service now configured to use delayed start
-
-After installation, the service will now set the MBAM agent service to use delayed start, decreasing the amount of time it takes to start Windows.
-
-### Locked Fixed Data volumes now report as Compliant
-
-The compliance calculation logic for "Locked Fixed Data" volumes has been changed to report the volumes as "Compliant," but with a Protector State and Encryption State of "Unknown" and with a Compliance Status Detail of "Volume is locked". Previously, locked volumes were reported as “Non-Compliant”, a Protector State of "Encrypted", an Encryption State of "Unknown", and a Compliance Status Detail of "An unknown error".
-
-
-## How to Get MDOP Technologies
-
-
-MBAM is a part of the Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack (MDOP). MDOP is part of the Microsoft Software Assurance program. For more information about the Microsoft Software Assurance program and how to acquire the MDOP, see [How Do I Get MDOP?](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049).
-
-## MBAM 2.5 SP1 Release Notes
-
-
-For more information and late-breaking news that is not included in this documentation, see [Release Notes for MBAM 2.5 SP1](release-notes-for-mbam-25-sp1.md).
-
-## Got a suggestion for MBAM?
-- Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://mbam.uservoice.com/forums/268571-microsoft-bitlocker-administration-and-monitoring).
-- For MBAM issues, use the [MBAM TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopmbam).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 2.5](index.md)
-
-[Getting Started with MBAM 2.5](getting-started-with-mbam-25.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v25/about-mbam-25.md b/mdop/mbam-v25/about-mbam-25.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7afb0c3d9f..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v25/about-mbam-25.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,378 +0,0 @@
----
-title: About MBAM 2.5
-description: About MBAM 2.5
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 1ce218ec-4d2e-4a75-8d1a-68d737a8f3c9
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# About MBAM 2.5
-
-
-Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) 2.5 provides a simplified administrative interface for BitLocker Drive Encryption. BitLocker offers enhanced protection against data theft or data exposure for computers that are lost or stolen. BitLocker encrypts all data that is stored on the Windows operating system volumes and drives and configured data drives.
-
-## Overview of MBAM
-
-
-MBAM 2.5 has the following features:
-
-- Enables administrators to automate the process of encrypting volumes on client computers across the enterprise.
-
-- Enables security officers to quickly determine the compliance state of individual computers or even of the enterprise itself.
-
-- Provides centralized reporting and hardware management with Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager.
-
-- Reduces the workload on the Help Desk to assist end users with BitLocker PIN and recovery key requests.
-
-- Enables end users to recover encrypted devices independently by using the Self-Service Portal.
-
-- Enables security officers to easily audit access to recover key information.
-
-- Empowers Windows Enterprise users to continue working anywhere with the assurance that their corporate data is protected.
-
-MBAM enforces the BitLocker encryption policy options that you set for your enterprise, monitors the compliance of client computers with those policies, and reports on the encryption status of the enterprise’s and individual’s computers. In addition, MBAM lets you access the recovery key information when users forget their PIN or password, or when their BIOS or boot records change.
-
-The following groups might be interested in using MBAM to manage BitLocker:
-
-- Administrators, IT security professionals, and compliance officers who are responsible for ensuring that confidential data is not disclosed without authorization
-
-- Administrators who are responsible for computer security in remote or branch offices
-
-- Administrators who are responsible for client computers that are running Windows
-
-**Note**
-BitLocker is not explained in detail in this MBAM documentation. For more information, see [BitLocker Drive Encryption Overview](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=225013).
-
-
-
-## What’s new in MBAM 2.5
-
-
-This section describes the new features in MBAM 2.5.
-
-### Support for Microsoft SQL Server 2014
-
-MBAM adds support for Microsoft SQL Server 2014, in addition to the same software that is supported in earlier versions of MBAM.
-
-### MBAM Group Policy Templates downloaded separately
-
-The MBAM Group Policy Templates must be downloaded separately from the MBAM installation. In previous versions of MBAM, the MBAM installer included an MBAM Policy Template, which contained the required MBAM-specific Group Policy Objects (GPOs) that define MBAM implementation settings for BitLocker Drive Encryption. These GPOs have been removed from the MBAM installer. You now download the GPOs from [How to Get MDOP Group Policy (.admx) Templates](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/p/?LinkId=393941) and copy them to a server or workstation before you begin the MBAM Client installation. You can copy the Group Policy Templates to any server or workstation that is running a supported version of the Windows Server or Windows operating system.
-
-**Important**
-Do not change the Group Policy settings in the **BitLocker Drive Encryption** node, or MBAM will not work correctly. When you configure the Group Policy settings in the **MDOP MBAM (BitLocker Management)** node, MBAM automatically configures the BitLocker Drive Encryption settings for you.
-
-
-
-The template files that you need to copy to a server or workstation are:
-
-- BitLockerManagement.adml
-
-- BitLockerManagement.admx
-
-- BitLockerUserManagement.adml
-
-- BitLockerUserManagement.admx
-
-Copy the template files to the location that best meets your needs. For the language-specific files, which must be copied to a language-specific folder, the Group Policy Management Console is required to view the files.
-
-- To install the template files locally on a server or workstation, copy the files to one of the following locations.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
File type
-
File location
-
-
-
-
-
language neutral (.admx)
-
%systemroot%\policyDefinitions
-
-
-
language specific (.adml)
-
%systemroot%\policyDefinitions[MUIculture] (for example, the U.S. English language specific file will be stored in %systemroot%</em>policyDefinitions\en-us)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-- To make the templates available to all Group Policy administrators in a domain, copy the files to one of the following locations on a domain controller.
-
-
%systemroot%\sysvol\domain\policies\PolicyDefinitions[MUIculture] (for example, the U.S. English language-specific file will be stored in %systemroot%\sysvol\domain\policies\PolicyDefinitions\en-us)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-For more information about template files, see [Managing Group Policy ADMX Files Step-by-Step Guide](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=392818).
-
-### Ability to enforce encryption policies on operating system and fixed data drives
-
-MBAM 2.5 enables you to enforce encryption policies on operating system and fixed data drives for computers in your organization and limit the number of days that end users can request a postponement of the requirement to comply with MBAM encryption policies.
-
-To enable you to configure encryption policy enforcement, a new Group Policy setting, called Encryption Policy Enforcement Settings, has been added for operating system drives and fixed data drives. This policy is described in the following table.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Group Policy setting
-
Description
-
Group Policy node used to configure this setting
-
-
-
-
-
Encryption Policy Enforcement Settings (Operating System Drive)
-
For this setting, use the option Configure the number of noncompliance grace period days for operating system drives to configure a grace period.
-
The grace period specifies the number of days that end users can postpone compliance with MBAM policies for their operating system drive after the drive is first detected as noncompliant.
-
After the configured grace period expires, users cannot postpone the required action or request an exemption from it.
-
If user interaction is required (for example, if you are using the Trusted Platform Module (TPM) + PIN or using a password protector), a dialog box appears, and users cannot close it until they provide the required information. If the protector is TPM only, encryption begins immediately in the background without user input.
-
Users cannot request exemptions through the BitLocker encryption wizard. Instead, they must contact their Help Desk or use whatever process their organization uses for exemption requests.
-
Computer Configuration > Policies > Administrative Templates > Windows Components > MDOP MBAM (BitLocker Management) > Operating System Drive
-
-
-
Encryption Policy Enforcement Settings (Fixed Data Drives)
-
For this setting, use the option Configure the number of noncompliance grace period days for fixed drives to configure a grace period.
-
The grace period specifies the number of days that end users can postpone compliance with MBAM policies for their fixed drive after the drive is first detected as noncompliant.
-
The grace period begins when the fixed drive is determined to be noncompliant. If you are using auto-unlock, the policy will not be enforced until the operating system drive is compliant. However, if you are not using auto-unlock, encryption of the fixed data drive can begin before the operating system drive is fully encrypted.
-
After the configured grace period expires, users cannot postpone the required action or request an exemption from it. If user interaction is required, a dialog box appears and users cannot close it until they provide the required information.
-
-
-
-### Ability to provide a URL in the BitLocker Drive Encryption wizard to point to your security policy
-
-A new Group Policy setting, **Provide the URL for the Security Policy link**, enables you to configure a URL that will be presented to end users as a link called **Company Security Policy**. This link will appear when MBAM prompts users to encrypt a volume.
-
-If you enable this policy setting, you can configure the URL for the **Company Security Policy** link. If you disable or do not configure this policy setting, the **Company Security Policy** link is not displayed to users.
-
-The new Group Policy setting is located in the following GPO node: **Computer Configuration** > **Policies** > **Administrative Templates** > **Windows Components** > **MDOP MBAM (BitLocker Management) > Client Management**.
-
-### Support for FIPS-compliant recovery keys
-
-MBAM 2.5 supports Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS)-compliant BitLocker recovery keys on devices that are running the Windows 8.1 operating system. The recovery key was not FIPS compliant in earlier versions of Windows. This enhancement improves the drive recovery process in organizations that require FIPS compliance because it enables end users to use the Self-Service Portal or Administration and Monitoring Website (Help Desk) to recover their drives if they forget their PIN or password or get locked out of their computers. The new FIPS compliance feature does not extend to password protectors.
-
-To enable FIPS compliance in your organization, you must configure the Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) Group Policy settings. For configuration instructions, see [BitLocker Group Policy Settings](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=393560).
-
-For client computers that are running the Windows 8 or Windows 7 operating systems without the [installed BitLocker hotfix](https://support.microsoft.com/kb/3015477), IT administrators will continue to use the Data Recovery Agents (DRA) protector in FIPS-compliant environments. For information about DRA, see [Using Data Recovery Agents with BitLocker](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=393557).
-
-See [Hotfix Package 2 for BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 2.5](https://support.microsoft.com/kb/3015477) to download and install the BitLocker hotfix for Windows 7 and Windows 8 computers.
-
-### Support for high availability deployments
-
-MBAM supports the following high-availability scenarios in addition to the standard two-server and Configuration Manager Integration topologies:
-
-- SQL Server AlwaysOn availability groups
-
-- SQL Server clustering
-
-- Network load balancing (NLB)
-
-- SQL Server mirroring
-
-- Volume Shadow Copy Service (VSS) Backup
-
-For more information about these features, see [Planning for MBAM 2.5 High Availability](planning-for-mbam-25-high-availability.md).
-
-### Management of roles for Administration and Monitoring Website changed
-
-In MBAM 2.5, you must create security groups in Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) to manage the roles that provide access rights to the Administration and Monitoring Website. Roles enable users who are in specific security groups to perform different tasks in the website such as viewing reports or helping end users recover encrypted drives. In previous versions of MBAM, roles were managed by using local groups.
-
-In MBAM 2.5, the term “roles” replaces the term “administrator roles,” which was used in earlier versions of MBAM. In addition, in MBAM 2.5 the “MBAM System Administrators” role has been removed.
-
-The following table lists the security groups that you must create in AD DS. You can use any name for the security groups.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Role
-
Access rights for this role on the Administration and Monitoring Website
-
-
-
-
-
MBAM Helpdesk Users
-
Provides access to the Manage TPM and Drive Recovery areas of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Website. Users who have access to these areas must fill in all fields when they use either area.
-
-
-
MBAM Report Users
-
Provides access to the Reports in the Administration and Monitoring Website.
-
-
-
MBAM Advanced Helpdesk Users
-
Provides access to all areas in the Administration and Monitoring Website. Users in this group have to enter only the recovery key, not the end user’s domain and user name, when helping end users recover their drives. If a user is a member of the MBAM Helpdesk Users group and the MBAM Advanced Helpdesk Users group, the MBAM Advanced Helpdesk Users group permissions override the MBAM Helpdesk Users group permissions.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-After you create the security groups in AD DS, assign users and/or groups to the appropriate security group to enable the corresponding level of access to the Administration and Monitoring Website. To enable individuals with each role to access the Administration and Monitoring Website, you must also specify each security group when you are configuring the Administration and Monitoring Website.
-
-### Windows PowerShell cmdlets for configuring MBAM Server features
-
-Windows PowerShell cmdlets for MBAM 2.5 enable you to configure and manage the MBAM Server features. Each feature has a corresponding Windows PowerShell cmdlet that you can use to enable or disable features, or to get information about the feature.
-
-For prerequisites and prerequisites for using Windows PowerShell, see [Configuring MBAM 2.5 Server Features by Using Windows PowerShell](configuring-mbam-25-server-features-by-using-windows-powershell.md).
-
-**To load the MBAM 2.5 Help for Windows PowerShell cmdlets after installing the MBAM Server software**
-
-1. Open Windows PowerShell or Windows PowerShell Integrated Scripting Environment (ISE).
-
-2. Type **Update-Help –Module Microsoft.MBAM**.
-
-Windows PowerShell Help for MBAM is available in the following formats:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Windows PowerShell Help format
-
More information
-
-
-
-
-
At a Windows PowerShell command prompt, type Get-Help <cmdlet>
-
To upload the latest Windows PowerShell cmdlets, follow the instructions in the previous section on how to load Windows PowerShell Help for MBAM.
-
-
-
-### Support for ASCII-only and enhanced PINs and ability to prevent sequential and repeating characters
-
-**Allow enhanced PINs for startup Group Policy setting**
-
-The Group Policy setting, **Allow enhanced PINs for startup**, enables you to configure whether enhanced startup PINs are used with BitLocker. Enhanced startup PINs permit users to enter any keys on a full keyboard, including uppercase and lowercase letters, symbols, numbers, and spaces. If you enable this policy setting, all new BitLocker startup PINs that are set will be enhanced PINs. If you disable or do not configure this policy setting, enhanced PINs cannot be used.
-
-Not all computers support the entry of enhanced PINs in the Pre-Boot Execution Environment (PXE). Before you enable this Group Policy setting for your organization, run a system check during the BitLocker setup process to ensure that the computer’s BIOS supports the use of the full keyboard in PXE. For more information, see [Planning for MBAM 2.5 Group Policy Requirements](planning-for-mbam-25-group-policy-requirements.md).
-
-**Require ASCII-only PINs check box**
-
-The **Allow enhanced PINs for startup** Group Policy setting also contains a **Require ASCII-only PINs** check box. If the computers in your organization do not support the use of the full keyboard in PXE, you can enable the **Allow enhanced PINs for startup** Group Policy setting, and then select the **Require ASCII-only PINs** check box to require that enhanced PINs use only printable ASCII characters.
-
-**Enforced use of nonsequential and nonrepeating characters**
-
-MBAM 2.5 prevents end users from creating PINs that consist of repeating numbers (such as 1111) or sequential numbers (such as 1234). If end users try to enter a password that contains three or more repeating or sequential numbers, the Bitlocker Drive Encryption wizard displays an error message and prevents users from entering a PIN with the prohibited characters.
-
-### Addition of DRA Certificate to BitLocker Computer Compliance report
-
-A new protector type, the Data Recovery Agent (DRA) Certificate, has been added to the BitLocker Computer Compliance Report in Configuration Manager. This protector type applies to operating system drives, and it appears in the **Computer Volume(s)** section in the **Protector Types** column.
-
-### Support for multi-forest support deployments
-
-MBAM 2.5 supports the following types of multi-forest deployments:
-
-- Single forest with single domain
-
-- Single forest with a single tree and multiple domains
-
-- Single forest with multiple trees and disjoint namespaces
-
-- Multiple forests in a central forest topology
-
-- Multiple forests in a resource forest topology
-
-There is no support for forest migration (going from single to multiple, multiple to single, resource to across the forest, etc.), or upgrade or downgrade.
-
-The prerequisites for deploying MBAM in multi-forest deployments are:
-
-- Forest must be running on supported versions of Windows Server.
-
-- A two-way or one-way trust is required. One-way trusts require that the server’s domain trusts the client’s domain. In other words, the server’s domain is pointed at the client’s domain.
-
-### MBAM Client support for Encrypted Hard Drives
-
-MBAM supports BitLocker on Encrypted Hard Drives that meet TCG specification requirements for Opal as well as IEEE 1667 standards. When BitLocker is enabled on these devices, it will generate keys and perform management functions on the encrypted drive. See [Encrypted Hard Drive](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/hh831627.aspx) for more information.
-
-## How to Get MDOP Technologies
-
-
-MBAM is a part of the Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack (MDOP). MDOP is part of the Microsoft Software Assurance program. For more information about the Microsoft Software Assurance program and how to acquire the MDOP, see [How Do I Get MDOP?](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=322049).
-
-## MBAM 2.5 Release Notes
-
-
-For more information and late-breaking news that is not included in this documentation, see [Release Notes for MBAM 2.5](release-notes-for-mbam-25.md).
-
-## Got a suggestion for MBAM?
-- Send your feedback [here](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4021566/windows-10-send-feedback-to-microsoft-with-feedback-hub).
-- For MBAM issues, use the [MBAM TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopmbam).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring 2.5](index.md)
-
-[Getting Started with MBAM 2.5](getting-started-with-mbam-25.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v25/accessibility-for-mbam-25.md b/mdop/mbam-v25/accessibility-for-mbam-25.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5618291576..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v25/accessibility-for-mbam-25.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,110 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Accessibility for MBAM 2.5
-description: Accessibility for MBAM 2.5
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 03b343a6-9e8e-4868-a52b-cedf0b696d56
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Accessibility for MBAM 2.5
-
-
-Microsoft is committed to making its products and services easier for everyone to use. This section provides information about features and services that make this product and its corresponding documentation more accessible for people with disabilities.
-
-## Access any command with a few keystrokes
-
-
-Access keys let you quickly use a command by pressing a few keys. You can get to most commands by using two keystrokes. To use an access key:
-
-1. Press ALT.
-
- The keyboard shortcuts are displayed over each feature that is available in the current view.
-
-2. Press the letter shown in the keyboard shortcut over the feature that you want to use.
-
-**Note**
-To cancel the action that you are taking and hide the keyboard shortcuts, press ALT.
-
-
-
-## Documentation in alternative formats
-
-
-If you have difficulty reading or handling printed materials, you can obtain the documentation for many Microsoft products in more accessible formats. You can view an index of accessible product documentation on the Microsoft Accessibility website. In addition, you can obtain additional Microsoft publications from Learning Ally (formerly Recording for the Blind & Dyslexic, Inc.). Learning Ally distributes these documents to registered, eligible members of their distribution service.
-
-For information about the availability of Microsoft product documentation and books from Microsoft Press, contact:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Learning Ally (formerly Recording for the Blind & Dyslexic, Inc.)
-
20 Roszel Road
-
Princeton, NJ 08540
-
-
-
-
Telephone number from within the United States:
-
(800) 221-4792
-
-
-
Telephone number from outside the United States and Canada:
Web addresses can change, so you might be unable to connect to the website or sites mentioned here.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Customer service for people with hearing impairments
-
-
-If you are deaf or hard-of-hearing, complete access to Microsoft product and customer services is available through a text telephone (TTY/TDD) service:
-
-- For customer service, contact Microsoft Sales Information Center at (800) 892-5234 between 6:30 AM and 5:30 PM Pacific Time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.
-
-- For technical assistance in the United States, contact Microsoft Product Support Services at (800) 892-5234 between 6:00 AM and 6:00 PM Pacific Time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays. In Canada, dial (905) 568-9641 between 8:00 AM and 8:00 PM Eastern Time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.
-
-Microsoft Support Services are subject to the prices, terms, and conditions in place at the time the service is used.
-
-## For more information
-
-
-For more information about how accessible technology for computers helps to improve the lives of people with disabilities, see the [Microsoft Accessibility website](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=8431).
-
-## Got a suggestion for MBAM?
-- Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://mbam.uservoice.com/forums/268571-microsoft-bitlocker-administration-and-monitoring).
-- For MBAM issues, use the [MBAM TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopmbam).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Getting Started with MBAM 2.5](getting-started-with-mbam-25.md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v25/administering-mbam-25-features.md b/mdop/mbam-v25/administering-mbam-25-features.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ba93616f8c..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v25/administering-mbam-25-features.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,57 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Administering MBAM 2.5 Features
-description: Administering MBAM 2.5 Features
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: ca15f818-cf07-4437-8ffa-425af603a3c8
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Administering MBAM 2.5 Features
-
-
-After completing all necessary planning and then deploying Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM), you can configure and use it to manage BitLocker encryption across the enterprise The information in this section describes post-installation day-to-day Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring feature operations tasks.
-
-## Manage BitLocker Encryption Exemptions
-
-
-MBAM lets you grant encryption exemptions to specific users who do not need or want their drives encrypted. Computer exemption is typically used when a company has computers that do not have to be encrypted, such as computers that are used in development or testing, or older computers that do not support BitLocker. In some cases, local law may also require that certain computers are not encrypted.
-
-[How to Manage User BitLocker Encryption Exemptions](how-to-manage-user-bitlocker-encryption-exemptions-mbam-25.md)
-
-## Understand the BitLocker Encryption Options and BitLocker Drive Encryption Items in Control Panel
-
-
-MBAM provides a custom control panel, called BitLocker Encryption Options, that appears under **System and Security**. The MBAM control panel can be used to unlock encrypted fixed and removable drives, and also manage your PIN or password.
-
-**Note**
-This customized control panel does not replace the default Windows BitLocker control panel.
-
-
-
-[Understanding the BitLocker Encryption Options and BitLocker Drive Encryption Items in Control Panel](understanding-the-bitlocker-encryption-options-and-bitlocker-drive-encryption-items-in-control-panel.md)
-
-## Other Resources for Administering MBAM Features
-
-
-[Operations for MBAM 2.5](operations-for-mbam-25.md)
-
-## Got a suggestion for MBAM?
-- Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://mbam.uservoice.com/forums/268571-microsoft-bitlocker-administration-and-monitoring).
-- For MBAM issues, use the [MBAM TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopmbam).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v25/apply-hotfix-for-mbam-25-sp1.md b/mdop/mbam-v25/apply-hotfix-for-mbam-25-sp1.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 3ed2c2c111..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v25/apply-hotfix-for-mbam-25-sp1.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,32 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Applying hotfixes on MBAM 2.5 SP1
-description: Applying hotfixes on MBAM 2.5 SP1
-ms.author: ppriya-msft
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid:
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 8/30/2018
-ms.author: pashort
-author: shortpatti
----
-
-# Applying hotfixes on MBAM 2.5 SP1
-This topic describes the process for applying the hotfixes for Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) Server 2.5 SP1
-
-### Before you begin, download the latest hotfix of Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) Server 2.5 SP1
-[Desktop Optimization Pack](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=58345)
-
-#### Steps to update the MBAM Server for existing MBAM environment
-1. Remove MBAM server feature (do this by opening the MBAM Server Configuration Tool, then selecting Remove Features).
-2. Remove MDOP MBAM from Control Panel | Programs and Features.
-3. Install MBAM 2.5 SP1 RTM server components.
-4. Install lastest MBAM 2.5 SP1 hotfix rollup.
-5. Configure MBAM features using MBAM Server Configurator.
-
-#### Steps to install the new MBAM 2.5 SP1 server hotfix
-Refer to the document for [new server installation](deploying-the-mbam-25-server-infrastructure.md).
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v25/client-event-logs.md b/mdop/mbam-v25/client-event-logs.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 747ad55211..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v25/client-event-logs.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,275 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Client Event Logs
-description: Client Event Logs
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: d5c2f270-db6a-45f1-8557-8c6fb28fd568
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Client Event Logs
-
-MBAM Client event logs are located in Event Viewer – Applications and Services Logs – Microsoft – Windows – MBAM - Operational path.
-The following table contains event IDs that can occur on the MBAM Client.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Event ID
-
Channel
-
Event symbol
-
Message
-
-
-
-
-
1
-
Operational
-
VolumeEnactmentSuccessful
-
The MBAM policies were applied successfully.
-
-
-
2
-
Admin
-
VolumeEnactmentFailed
-
An error occurred while applying MBAM policies.
-
-
-
3
-
Operational
-
TransferStatusDataSuccessful
-
The encryption status data was sent successfully.
-
-
-
4
-
Admin
-
TransferStatusDataFailed
-
An error occurred while sending encryption status data.
-
-
-
8
-
Admin
-
SystemVolumeNotFound
-
The system volume is missing. SystemVolume is needed to encrypt the operating system drive.
-
-
-
9
-
Admin
-
TPMNotFound
-
The TPM hardware is missing. TPM is needed to encrypt the operating system drive with any TPM protector.
-
-
-
10
-
Admin
-
MachineHWExempted
-
The computer is exempted from Encryption. Machine’s hardware status: Exempted
-
-
-
11
-
Admin
-
MachineHWUnknown
-
The computer is exempted from encryption. Machine’s hardware status: Unknown
-
-
-
12
-
Admin
-
HWCheckFailed
-
Hardware exemption check failed.
-
-
-
13
-
Admin
-
UserIsExempted
-
The user is exempt from encryption.
-
-
-
14
-
Admin
-
UserIsWaiting
-
The user requested an exemption.
-
-
-
15
-
Admin
-
UserExemptionCheckFailed
-
User exemption check failed.
-
-
-
16
-
Admin
-
UserPostponed
-
The user postponed the encryption process.
-
-
-
17
-
Admin
-
TPMInitializationFailed
-
TPM initialization failed. The user rejected the BIOS changes.
-
-
-
18
-
Admin
-
CoreServiceDown
-
Unable to connect to the MBAM Recovery and Hardware service.
-
-
-
19
-
Operational
-
CoreServiceUp
-
Successfully connected to the MBAM Recovery and Hardware service.
-
-
-
20
-
Admin
-
PolicyMismatch
-
The MBAM policy is in conflict or corrupt.
-
-
-
21
-
Admin
-
ConflictingOSVolumePolicies
-
Detected OS volume encryption policies conflict. Check BitLocker and MBAM policies related to OS drive protectors.
-
-
-
22
-
Admin
-
ConflictingFDDVolumePolicies
-
Detected Fixed Data Drive volume encryption policies conflict. Check BitLocker and MBAM policies related to FDD drive protectors.
-
-
-
27
-
Admin
-
EncryptionFailedNoDra
-
An error occurred while encrypting. A Data Recovery Agent (DRA) protector is required in FIPS mode for pre-Windows 8.1 machines.
-
-
-
28
-
Operational
-
TpmOwnerAuthEscrowed
-
The TPM OwnerAuth has been escrowed.
-
-
-
29
-
Operational
-
RecoveryKeyEscrowed
-
The BitLocker recovery key for the volume has been escrowed.
-
-
-
30
-
Operational
-
RecoveryKeyReset
-
The BitLocker recovery key for the volume has been updated.
-
-
-
31
-
Operational
-
EnforcePolicyDateSet
-
The enforce policy date, <date>, has been set for the volume
-
-
-
32
-
Operational
-
EnforcePolicyDateCleared
-
The enforce policy date, <date>, has been cleared for the volume.
-
-
-
33
-
Operational
-
TpmLockOutResetSucceeded
-
Successfully reset TPM lockout.
-
-
-
34
-
Admin
-
TpmLockOutResetFailed
-
Failed to reset TPM lockout.
-
-
-
35
-
Operational
-
TpmOwnerAuthRetrievalSucceeded
-
Successfully retrieved TPM OwnerAuth from MBAM services.
-
-
-
36
-
Admin
-
TpmOwnerAuthRetrievalFailed
-
Failed to retrieve TPM OwnerAuth from MBAM services.
-
-
-
37
-
Admin
-
WmiProviderDllSearchPathUpdateFailed
-
Failed to update the DLL search path for WMI provider.
-
-
-
38
-
Admin
-
TimedOutWaitingForWmiProvider
-
Agent Stopping - Timed-out waiting for MBAM WMI Provider Instance.
-
-
-
39
-
Operational
-
RemovableDriveMounted
-
Removable drive was mounted.
-
-
-
40
-
Operational
-
RemovableDriveDismounted
-
Removable drive was unmounted.
-
-
-
41
-
Operational
-
FailedToEnactEndpointUnreachable
-
Failure to connect to the MBAM Recovery and Hardware service prevented MBAM policies from being applied successfully to the volume.
-
-
-
42
-
Operational
-
FailedToEnactLockedVolume
-
Locked volume state prevented MBAM policies from being applied successfully to the volume.
-
-
-
43
-
Operational
-
TransferStatusDataFailedEndpointUnreachable
-
Failure to connect to the MBAM Compliance and Status service prevented the transfer of encryption status data.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-[Technical Reference for MBAM 2.5](technical-reference-for-mbam-25.md)
-
-[Server Event Logs](server-event-logs.md)
-
-
-
-
-## Got a suggestion for MBAM?
-- Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://mbam.uservoice.com/forums/268571-microsoft-bitlocker-administration-and-monitoring).
-- For MBAM issues, use the [MBAM TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopmbam).
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v25/configuring-mbam-25-server-features-by-using-windows-powershell.md b/mdop/mbam-v25/configuring-mbam-25-server-features-by-using-windows-powershell.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 3e68d38e01..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v25/configuring-mbam-25-server-features-by-using-windows-powershell.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,376 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Configuring MBAM 2.5 Server Features by Using Windows PowerShell
-description: Configuring MBAM 2.5 Server Features by Using Windows PowerShell
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 826429fd-29bb-44be-b47e-5f5c7d20dd1d
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 08/30/2016
----
-
-
-# Configuring MBAM 2.5 Server Features by Using Windows PowerShell
-
-
-After you install the MBAM 2.5 Server software, you can use configure MBAM 2.5 Server features by using Windows PowerShell cmdlets or the MBAM Server Configuration wizard. This topic describes how to configure MBAM 2.5 by using the Windows PowerShell cmdlets. To use the wizard instead, see [Configuring the MBAM 2.5 Server Features](configuring-the-mbam-25-server-features.md).
-
-## In this topic
-
-
-This topic includes the following information about using Windows PowerShell to configure MBAM:
-
-- [How to load Windows PowerShell Help for MBAM 2.5](#bkmk-load-posh-help)
-
-- [How to get Help about an MBAM Windows PowerShell cmdlet](#bkmk-help-specific-cmdlet)
-
-- [Configurations that you can do only with Windows PowerShell but not with the MBAM Server Configuration wizard](#bkmk-config-only-posh)
-
-- [Prerequisites and requirements for using Windows PowerShell to configure MBAM Server features](#bkmk-prereqs-posh-mbamsvr)
-
-- [Using Windows PowerShell to configure MBAM on a remote computer](#bkmk-remote-config)
-
-- [Required accounts and corresponding Windows PowerShell cmdlet parameters](#bkmk-reqd-posh-accts)
-
-For information about the **Get-MbamBitLockerRecoveryKey** and **Get-MbamTPMOwnerPassword** Windows PowerShell cmdlets, which are used to administer MBAM, see [Using Windows PowerShell to Administer MBAM 2.5](using-windows-powershell-to-administer-mbam-25.md).
-
-## How to load Windows PowerShell Help for MBAM 2.5
-
-
-For a list of the Windows PowerShell cmdlets on TechNet, see [Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack Automation with Windows PowerShell](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=392816).
-
-**To load the MBAM 2.5 Help for Windows PowerShell cmdlets after installing the MBAM Server software**
-
-1. Open Windows PowerShell or Windows PowerShell Integrated Scripting Environment (ISE).
-
-2. Type **Update-Help –Module Microsoft.MBAM**.
-
-## How to get Help about an MBAM Windows PowerShell cmdlet
-
-
-Windows PowerShell Help for MBAM is available in the following formats:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Windows PowerShell Help format
-
More information
-
-
-
-
-
At a Windows PowerShell command prompt, type Get-Help <cmdlet>
-
To upload the latest Windows PowerShell cmdlets, follow the instructions in the previous section on how to load Windows PowerShell Help for MBAM.
-
-
-
-## Configurations that you can do only with Windows PowerShell but not with the MBAM Server Configuration wizard
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Configurations that you can do only by using Windows PowerShell
-
Details
-
-
-
-
-
Install the web services on a separate computer from the web applications.
-
Using the wizard, you must install the web services and web applications on the same computer.
-
-
-
Enable reports on a separate reporting services point without installing all of the Configuration Manager objects.
-
-
-
-
Delete all of the objects from Configuration Manager.
-
Deleting the objects in turn deletes all of the compliance data from Configuration Manager.
-
-
-
Enter a custom connection string for the databases.
-
Example: To configure the web applications to work with mirroring, you must use the Enable-MbamWebApplication cmdlet to specify the appropriate failover partner syntax in the connection string.
-
-
-
Skip validation and configure a feature even though the prerequisite check failed.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Note**
-You cannot disable the MBAM databases with a Windows PowerShell cmdlet or the MBAM Server Configuration wizard. To prevent the accidental removal of your compliance and audit data, database administrators must remove databases manually.
-
-
-
-## Prerequisites and requirements for using Windows PowerShell to configure MBAM Server features
-
-
-Before starting the configuration, complete the following prerequisites.
-
-**Account-related prerequisites**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Prerequisite
-
Details or additional information
-
-
-
-
-
Create the required accounts.
-
See section Required accounts and corresponding Windows PowerShell cmdlet parameters later in this topic.
-
-
-
User accounts and groups that you pass as parameters to the Windows PowerShell cmdlets must be valid accounts in the domain.
-
You cannot use local accounts.
-
-
-
Specify accounts in the down-level format.
-
Examples:
-
domainNetBiosName\userdomainNetBiosName\group
-
-
-
-
-
-
-**Permission-related prerequisites**
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Prerequisite
-
Details or additional information
-
-
-
-
-
You must be an administrator on the local computer where you are configuring the MBAM feature.
-
-
-
-
Use an elevated Windows PowerShell command prompt to run all Windows PowerShell cmdlets.
-
-
-
-
For the Enable-MbamDatabase cmdlet only:
-
You must have "create any database" permissions on the instance of the target Microsoft SQL Server database.
-
This user account must be a part of the local administrators group or the Backup Operators group to register the MBAM Volume Shadow Copy Service (VSS) Writer.
-
By default, the database administrator or system administrator has the required "create any database" permissions.
-
-
-
-## Using Windows PowerShell to configure MBAM on a remote computer
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
When to use this capability
-
When you want to configure the MBAM 2.5 Server features on a remote computer. The Windows PowerShell cmdlets are running on one computer, and you are configuring the features on a different, remote computer.
-
-
-
What you have to do
-
To use Windows PowerShell to configure MBAM 2.5 Server features on a remote computer, you must:
-
-
Ensure that the MBAM 2.5 Server software has been installed on the remote computer.
-
Use the Credential Security Support Provider (CredSSP) Protocol to open the Windows PowerShell session.
-
Enable Windows Remote Management (WinRM). If you fail to enable WinRM and to configure it correctly, the New-PSSession cmdlet that is described in this table displays an error and describes how to fix the issue. For more information about WinRM, see Using Windows Remote Management.
-
-
-
-
Why you have to do it
-
This protocol enables the Windows PowerShell cmdlets to connect to Active Directory Domain Services by using the user’s administrative credentials. You might get a validation error if you start the Windows PowerShell session without this protocol.
-
-
-
How to start a Windows PowerShell session with the CredSSP protocol
-
Type the following code at the Windows PowerShell prompt:
-
-
-
-## Required accounts and corresponding Windows PowerShell cmdlet parameters
-
-
-The following table describes the accounts that are required to configure MBAM 2.5 Server features. It also lists the corresponding Windows PowerShell cmdlet and parameter for which you have to specify the account during configuration.
-
-Cmdlet
-Parameter
-Type (User or Group)
-Description
-Enable-MBAMDatabase
-
-AccessAccount
-
-User or Group
-
-Specify a domain user or group that has read/write permission to this database to give the web applications access to data and reports in this database. If the value is a domain user, then the **WebServiceApplicationPoolCredential** parameter that is used when running the **Enable-MbamWebApplication** cmdlet must use the same user account. If the value is a domain Users group, then the domain account that is used by the **WebServiceApplicationPoolCredential** parameter must be a member of this group.
-
-ReportAccount
-
-User or Group
-
-Specify a domain user or Users group that has read-only permission to this database to provide the MBAM reports access to the compliance and audit data. If the value is a domain user, then the **ComplianceAndAuditDBCredential** parameter of the **Enable-MbamReport** cmdlet must use the same user account. If the value is a domain Users group, then the domain account that is used by the **ComplianceAndAuditDBCredential** parameter must be a member of this group.
-
-Enable-MbamReport
-
-ComplianceAndAuditDBCredential
-
-User
-
-Specifies the administrative credential that the local SSRS instance uses to connect to the MBAM Compliance and Audit Database. The domain user in the administrative credential must be the same as the user account that is used for the **ReportAccount** parameter, which is used while running the **Enable-MbamDatabase** cmdlet. If a domain Users group was used with the **ReportAccount** parameter, this account should be a member of that group.
-
-**Important**
-The account specified in the administrative credentials should have limited user rights for improved security. Also, the password of the account should be set to not expire.
-
-
-
-ReportsReadOnlyAccessGroup
-
-Group
-
-Specifies the domain user group that has read permissions to the reports. The specified group must be the same group that is used for the **ReportsReadOnlyAccessGroup** parameter in the **Enable-MbamWebApplication** cmdlet.
-
-Enable-MBAMWebApplication
-
-AdvancedHelpdeskAccessGroup
-
-Group
-
-Specifies the domain Users group that has access to all areas of the Administration and Monitoring Website except the Reports area.
-
-HelpdeskAccessGroup
-
-Group
-
-Specifies the domain Users group that has access to the **Manage TPM** and **Drive Recovery** areas of the Administration and Monitoring Website.
-
-ReportsReadOnlyAccessGroup
-
-Group
-
-Specifies the domain Users group that has read permission to the **Reports** area of the Administration and Monitoring Website. The specified group must be the same group that is used for the **ReportsReadOnlyAccessGroup** parameter in the **Enable-MbamReport** cmdlet.
-
-WebServiceApplicationPoolCredential
-
-User
-
-Specifies the domain user to be used by the application pool for the MBAM web applications. It must be the same domain user account that is specified in the **AccessAccount** parameter of the **Enable-MbamDatabase** cmdlet. If a domain Users group was used by the **AccessAccount** parameter when running the **Enable-MbamDatabase** cmdlet, the domain user that is specified here must be a member of that group. If you do not specify the administrative credentials, the administrative credentials that were specified by any previously enabled web application are used. All of the web applications use the same application pool identity. If it is specified multiple times, the most recently specified value is used.
-
-**Important**
-For improved security, set the account that is specified in the administrative credentials to limited user rights. Also, set the password of the account to never expire. Ensure that either the built-in IIS\_IUSRS account or the account that is used for the **WebServiceApplicationPoolCredential** parameter has been added to the **Impersonate a client after authentication** local security setting.
-
-To view the local security setting, open the **Local Security Policy editor**, expand the **Local Policies** node, select the **User Rights Assignment** node, and then double-click the **Impersonate a client after authentication** and **Log on as a batch job** Group Policy settings in the details pane.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Configuring the MBAM 2.5 Server Features](configuring-the-mbam-25-server-features.md)
-
-[Validating the MBAM 2.5 Server Feature Configuration](validating-the-mbam-25-server-feature-configuration.md)
-
-[Using Windows PowerShell to Administer MBAM 2.5](using-windows-powershell-to-administer-mbam-25.md)
-
-
-## Got a suggestion for MBAM?
-- Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://mbam.uservoice.com/forums/268571-microsoft-bitlocker-administration-and-monitoring).
-- For MBAM issues, use the [MBAM TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopmbam).
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v25/configuring-the-mbam-25-server-features.md b/mdop/mbam-v25/configuring-the-mbam-25-server-features.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d5431e95f6..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v25/configuring-the-mbam-25-server-features.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,126 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Configuring the MBAM 2.5 Server Features
-description: Configuring the MBAM 2.5 Server Features
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 894d1080-5f13-48f7-8fde-82f8d440a4ed
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Configuring the MBAM 2.5 Server Features
-
-
-Use this information as a starting place for configuring Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) 2.5 Server features after [Installing the MBAM 2.5 Server Software](installing-the-mbam-25-server-software.md). There are two methods you can use to configure MBAM:
-
-- MBAM Server Configuration wizard
-
-- Windows PowerShell cmdlets
-
-## Before you start configuring MBAM Server features
-
-
-Review and complete the following steps before you start configuring the MBAM Server features:
-
-
Review the prerequisites for using Windows PowerShell to configure MBAM Server features (if you are using this method to configure MBAM Server features).
-
-
-
-## Steps for configuring MBAM Server features
-
-
-Each row in the following table describes the features that you will configure on a separate server, according to the recommended [High-Level Architecture for MBAM 2.5](high-level-architecture-for-mbam-25.md).
-
-
-
-
-
-For a list of events about MBAM Server feature configuration, see [Server Event Logs](server-event-logs.md).
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-Configuring the MBAM 2.5 Server Features
-
-
-
-## Got a suggestion for MBAM?
-- Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://mbam.uservoice.com/forums/268571-microsoft-bitlocker-administration-and-monitoring).
-- For MBAM issues, use the [MBAM TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopmbam).
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v25/copying-the-mbam-25-group-policy-templates.md b/mdop/mbam-v25/copying-the-mbam-25-group-policy-templates.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 166bfb30c5..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v25/copying-the-mbam-25-group-policy-templates.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,120 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Copying the MBAM 2.5 Group Policy Templates
-description: Copying the MBAM 2.5 Group Policy Templates
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: e526ecec-07ff-435e-bc90-3084b617b84b
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/28/2017
----
-
-
-# Copying the MBAM 2.5 Group Policy Templates
-
-
-Before deploying the MBAM Client installation, you must download the MBAM Group Policy Templates, which contain Group Policy settings that define MBAM implementation settings for BitLocker Drive Encryption. After downloading the templates, you then set the Group Policy settings to implement across your enterprise.
-
-## Downloading and deploying the MDOP Group Policy templates
-
-
-MDOP Group Policy templates are available for download in a self-extracting, compressed file, grouped by technology and version.
-
-**How to download and deploy the MDOP Group Policy templates**
-
-1. Download the MDOP Group Policy templates from [Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack Group Policy Administrative Templates](https://www.microsoft.com/download/details.aspx?id=55531).
-
-2. Run the downloaded file to extract the template folders.
-
- **Warning**
- Do not extract the templates directly to the Group Policy deployment directory. Multiple technologies and versions are bundled in this file.
-
-
-
-3. In the extracted folder, locate the technology-version .admx file. Certain MDOP technologies have multiple sets of Group Policy Objects (GPOs). For example, MBAM includes MBAM Management settings and MBAM User settings.
-
-4. Locate the appropriate .adml file by language-culture (that is, *en* for English-United States).
-
-5. Copy the .admx and .adml files to a policy definition folder. Depending on where you store the templates, you can configure Group Policy settings from the local device or from any computer on the domain.
-
- **Local files.** To configure Group Policy settings from the local device, copy template files to the following locations:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
File type
-
File location
-
-
-
-
-
Group Policy template (.admx)
-
%systemroot%<strong>policyDefinitions
-
-
-
Group Policy language file (.adml)
-
%systemroot%<strong>policyDefinitions[MUIculture]
-
-
-
-
-
-
-~~~
-**Domain central store.** To enable Group Policy settings configuration by a Group Policy administrator from any computer on the domain, copy files to the following locations on the domain controller:
-
-
For example, the U.S. English ADML language-specific file will be stored in %systemroot%\sysvol\domain\policies\PolicyDefinitions\en-us.
-
-
-
-~~~
-
-
-
-6. Edit the Group Policy settings using Group Policy Management Console (GPMC) or Advanced Group Policy Management (AGPM) to configure Group Policy settings for the MDOP technology. See [Editing the MBAM 2.5 Group Policy Settings](editing-the-mbam-25-group-policy-settings.md) for more information.
-
- For descriptions of the Group Policy settings, see [Planning for MBAM 2.5 Group Policy Requirements](planning-for-mbam-25-group-policy-requirements.md).
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[Deploying MBAM 2.5 Group Policy Objects](deploying-mbam-25-group-policy-objects.md)
-
-
-## Got a suggestion for MBAM?
-- Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://mbam.uservoice.com/forums/268571-microsoft-bitlocker-administration-and-monitoring).
-- For MBAM issues, use the [MBAM TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopmbam).
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v25/create-or-edit-the-sms-defmof-file-mbam-25.md b/mdop/mbam-v25/create-or-edit-the-sms-defmof-file-mbam-25.md
deleted file mode 100644
index efae4b682d..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v25/create-or-edit-the-sms-defmof-file-mbam-25.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,395 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Create or Edit the Sms\_def.mof File
-description: Create or Edit the Sms\_def.mof File
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: 0bc5e7d8-9747-4da6-a1b3-38d8f27ba121
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Create or Edit the Sms\_def.mof File
-
-
-To enable the client computers to report BitLocker compliance details through the MBAM Configuration Manager reports, you have to create or edit the Sms\_def.mof file.
-
-If you are using System Center 2012 Configuration Manager, you must create the file. Create the file on the top-tier site. The changes will be replicated to the other sites in your infrastructure.
-
-In Configuration Manager 2007, the file already exists, so you only have to edit it. **Do not overwrite the existing file.**
-
-In the following sections, complete the instructions that correspond to the version of Configuration Manager that you are using.
-
-**To create the Sms\_def.mof file for System Center 2012 Configuration Manager**
-
-1. On the Configuration Manager Server, browse to the location where you have to create the Sms\_def.mof file, for example, the Desktop.
-
-2. Create a text file called **Sms\_def.mof** and copy the following code to populate the file with the following Sms\_def.mof MBAM classes:
-
- ``` syntax
- //===================================================
- // Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring
- //===================================================
-
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2\\SMS")
- #pragma deleteclass("Win32_BitLockerEncryptionDetails", NOFAIL)
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE),
- SMS_Group_Name ("BitLocker Encryption Details"),
- SMS_Class_ID ("MICROSOFT|BITLOCKER_DETAILS|1.0")]
- class Win32_BitLockerEncryptionDetails : SMS_Class_Template
- {
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE), key ]
- String DeviceId;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- String BitlockerPersistentVolumeId;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- String MbamPersistentVolumeId;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- //UNKNOWN = 0, OS_Volume = 1, FIXED_VOLUME = 2, REMOVABLE_VOLUME = 3
- SInt32 MbamVolumeType;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- String DriveLetter;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- //VOLUME_NOT_COMPLIANT = 0, VOLUME_COMPLIANT = 1, NOT_APPLICABLE = 2
- SInt32 Compliant;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- SInt32 ReasonsForNonCompliance[];
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- SInt32 KeyProtectorTypes[];
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- SInt32 EncryptionMethod;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- SInt32 ConversionStatus;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- SInt32 ProtectionStatus;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- Boolean IsAutoUnlockEnabled;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- String NoncomplianceDetectedDate;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- String EnforcePolicyDate;
- };
-
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2\\SMS")
- #pragma deleteclass("Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy", NOFAIL)
- [ SMS_Report(TRUE),
- SMS_Group_Name("BitLocker Policy"),
- SMS_Class_ID("MICROSOFT|MBAM_POLICY|1.0")]
- Class Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy: SMS_Class_Template
- {
- [SMS_Report(TRUE),key]
- string KeyName;
-
- //General encryption requirements
- [SMS_Report(TRUE)]
- UInt32 OsDriveEncryption;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 FixedDataDriveEncryption;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 EncryptionMethod;
-
- //Required protectors properties
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 OsDriveProtector;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 FixedDataDriveAutoUnlock;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 FixedDataDrivePassphrase;
-
- //MBAM Agent fields
- //Policy not enforced (0), enforced (1), pending user exemption request (2) or exempted user (3)
- [SMS_Report(TRUE)]
- Uint32 MBAMPolicyEnforced;
- [SMS_Report(TRUE)]
- string LastConsoleUser;
- //Date of the exemption request of the last logged on user,
- //or the first date the exemption was granted to him on this machine.
- [SMS_Report(TRUE)]
- datetime UserExemptionDate;
- //Errors encountered by MBAM agent.
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 MBAMMachineError;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- string EncodedComputerName;
- };
-
- //Read Win32_OperatingSystem.SKU WMI property in a new class - because SKU is not available before Vista.
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2\\SMS")
- #pragma deleteclass("CCM_OperatingSystemExtended", NOFAIL)
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE),
- SMS_Group_Name ("Operating System Ex"),
- SMS_Class_ID ("MICROSOFT|OPERATING_SYSTEM_EXT|1.0") ]
- class CCM_OperatingSystemExtended : SMS_Class_Template
- {
- [SMS_Report (TRUE), key ]
- string Name;
- [SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- uint32 SKU;
- };
-
- //Read Win32_ComputerSystem.PCSystemType WMI property in a new class - because PCSystemType is not available before Vista.
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2\\SMS")
- #pragma deleteclass("CCM_ComputerSystemExtended", NOFAIL)
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE),
- SMS_Group_Name ("Computer System Ex"),
- SMS_Class_ID ("MICROSOFT|COMPUTER_SYSTEM_EXT|1.0") ]
- class CCM_ComputerSystemExtended : SMS_Class_Template
- {
- [SMS_Report (TRUE), key ]
- string Name;
- [SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- uint16 PCSystemType;
- };
-
- //=======================================================
- // Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring end
- //=======================================================
- ```
-
-3. Import the **Sms\_def.mof** file by doing the following:
-
- 1. Open the **System Center 2012 Configuration Manager console** and select the **Administration** tab.
-
- 2. On the **Administration** tab, select **Client Settings**.
-
- 3. Right-click **Default Client Settings**, and then select **Properties**.
-
- 4. In the **Default Settings** window, select **Hardware Inventory**.
-
- 5. Click **Set Classes**, and then click **Import**.
-
- 6. In the browser that opens, select your **.mof** file, and then click **Open**. The **Import Summary** window opens.
-
- 7. In the **Import Summary** window, ensure that the option to import both hardware inventory classes and class settings is selected, and then click **Import**.
-
- 8. In both the **Hardware Inventory Classes** window and the **Default Settings** window, click **OK**.
-
-4. Enable the **Win32\_Tpm** class as follows:
-
- 1. Open the **System Center 2012 Configuration Manager console** and select the **Administration** tab.
-
- 2. On the **Administration** tab, select **Client Settings**.
-
- 3. Right-click **Default Client Settings**, and then select **Properties**.
-
- 4. In the **Default Settings** window, select **Hardware Inventory**.
-
- 5. Click **Set Classes**.
-
- 6. In the main window, scroll down, and then select the **TPM (Win32\_Tpm)** class.
-
- 7. Under **TPM**, ensure that the **SpecVersion** property is selected.
-
- 8. In both the **Hardware Inventory Classes** window and the **Default Settings** window, click **OK**.
-
-**To edit the sms\_def.mof file for Configuration Manager 2007**
-
-1. On the Configuration Manager Server, browse to the location of the **sms\_def.mof** file:
-
- <CMInstallLocation>\\Inboxes\\clifiles.src\\hinv\\
-
- On a default installation, the installation location is %systemdrive% \\Program Files (x86)\\Microsoft Configuration Manager.
-
-2. Copy the following code, and then append it to **Sms\_def.mof** file to add the following required MBAM classes to the file:
-
- ``` syntax
- //===================================================
- // Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring
- //===================================================
-
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2\\SMS")
- #pragma deleteclass("Win32_BitLockerEncryptionDetails", NOFAIL)
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE),
- SMS_Group_Name ("BitLocker Encryption Details"),
- SMS_Class_ID ("MICROSOFT|BITLOCKER_DETAILS|1.0")]
- class Win32_BitLockerEncryptionDetails : SMS_Class_Template
- {
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE), key ]
- String DeviceId;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- String BitlockerPersistentVolumeId;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- String MbamPersistentVolumeId;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- //UNKNOWN = 0, OS_Volume = 1, FIXED_VOLUME = 2, REMOVABLE_VOLUME = 3
- SInt32 MbamVolumeType;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- String DriveLetter;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- //VOLUME_NOT_COMPLIANT = 0, VOLUME_COMPLIANT = 1, NOT_APPLICABLE = 2
- SInt32 Compliant;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- SInt32 ReasonsForNonCompliance[];
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- SInt32 KeyProtectorTypes[];
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- SInt32 EncryptionMethod;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- SInt32 ConversionStatus;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- SInt32 ProtectionStatus;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- Boolean IsAutoUnlockEnabled;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- String NoncomplianceDetectedDate;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- String EnforcePolicyDate;
- };
-
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2\\SMS")
- #pragma deleteclass("Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy", NOFAIL)
- [ SMS_Report(TRUE),
- SMS_Group_Name("BitLocker Policy"),
- SMS_Class_ID("MICROSOFT|MBAM_POLICY|1.0"),
- SMS_Context_1("__ProviderArchitecture=32|uint32"),
- SMS_Context_2("__RequiredArchitecture=true|boolean")]
- Class Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy: SMS_Class_Template
- {
- [SMS_Report(TRUE),key]
- string KeyName;
-
- //General encryption requirements
- [SMS_Report(TRUE)]
- UInt32 OsDriveEncryption;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 FixedDataDriveEncryption;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 EncryptionMethod;
-
- //Required protectors properties
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 OsDriveProtector;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 FixedDataDriveAutoUnlock;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 FixedDataDrivePassphrase;
-
- //MBAM Agent fields
- //Policy not enforced (0), enforced (1), pending user exemption request (2) or exempted user (3)
- [SMS_Report(TRUE)]
- Uint32 MBAMPolicyEnforced;
- [SMS_Report(TRUE)]
- string LastConsoleUser;
- //Date of the exemption request of the last logged on user,
- //or the first date the exemption was granted to him on this machine.
- [SMS_Report(TRUE)]
- datetime UserExemptionDate;
- //Errors encountered by MBAM agent.
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 MBAMMachineError;
- // Encoded Computer Name
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- string EncodedComputerName;
- };
-
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2\\SMS")
- #pragma deleteclass("Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy_64", NOFAIL)
- [ SMS_Report(TRUE),
- SMS_Group_Name("BitLocker Policy"),
- SMS_Class_ID("MICROSOFT|MBAM_POLICY|1.0"),
- SMS_Context_1("__ProviderArchitecture=64|uint32"),
- SMS_Context_2("__RequiredArchitecture=true|boolean")]
- Class Win32Reg_MBAMPolicy_64: SMS_Class_Template
- {
- [SMS_Report(TRUE),key]
- string KeyName;
-
- //General encryption requirements
- [SMS_Report(TRUE)]
- UInt32 OsDriveEncryption;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 FixedDataDriveEncryption;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 EncryptionMethod;
-
- //Required protectors properties
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 OsDriveProtector;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 FixedDataDriveAutoUnlock;
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 FixedDataDrivePassphrase;
-
- //MBAM Agent fields
- //Policy not enforced (0), enforced (1), pending user exemption request (2) or exempted user (3)
- [SMS_Report(TRUE)]
- Uint32 MBAMPolicyEnforced;
- [SMS_Report(TRUE)]
- string LastConsoleUser;
- //Date of the exemption request of the last logged on user,
- //or the first date the exemption was granted to him on this machine.
- [SMS_Report(TRUE)]
- datetime UserExemptionDate;
- //Errors encountered by MBAM agent.
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- UInt32 MBAMMachineError;
- // Encoded Computer Name
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- string EncodedComputerName;
- };
-
- //Read Win32_OperatingSystem.SKU WMI property in a new class - because SKU is not available before Vista.
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2\\SMS")
- #pragma deleteclass("CCM_OperatingSystemExtended", NOFAIL)
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE),
- SMS_Group_Name ("Operating System Ex"),
- SMS_Class_ID ("MICROSOFT|OPERATING_SYSTEM_EXT|1.0") ]
- class CCM_OperatingSystemExtended : SMS_Class_Template
- {
- [SMS_Report (TRUE), key ]
- string Name;
- [SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- uint32 SKU;
- };
-
- //Read Win32_ComputerSystem.PCSystemType WMI property in a new class - because PCSystemType is not available before Vista.
- #pragma namespace ("\\\\.\\root\\cimv2\\SMS")
- #pragma deleteclass("CCM_ComputerSystemExtended", NOFAIL)
- [ SMS_Report (TRUE),
- SMS_Group_Name ("Computer System Ex"),
- SMS_Class_ID ("MICROSOFT|COMPUTER_SYSTEM_EXT|1.0") ]
- class CCM_ComputerSystemExtended : SMS_Class_Template
- {
- [SMS_Report (TRUE), key ]
- string Name;
- [SMS_Report (TRUE) ]
- uint16 PCSystemType;
- };
-
- //=======================================================
- // Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring end
- //=======================================================
- ```
-
-3. Modify the **Win32\_Tpm** class as follows:
-
- - Set **SMS\_REPORT** to **TRUE** in the class attributes.
-
- - Set **SMS\_REPORT** to **TRUE** in the **SpecVersion** property attribute.
-
- **Got a suggestion for MBAM**? Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://mbam.uservoice.com/forums/268571-microsoft-bitlocker-administration-and-monitoring). **Got a MBAM issue**? Use the [MBAM TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopmbam).
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[MBAM 2.5 Server Prerequisites that Apply Only to the Configuration Manager Integration Topology](mbam-25-server-prerequisites-that-apply-only-to-the-configuration-manager-integration-topology.md)
-
-[Edit the Configuration.mof File](edit-the-configurationmof-file-mbam-25.md)
-
-[MBAM 2.5 Server Prerequisites for Stand-alone and Configuration Manager Integration Topologies](mbam-25-server-prerequisites-for-stand-alone-and-configuration-manager-integration-topologies.md)
-
-
-
-
-## Got a suggestion for MBAM?
-- Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://mbam.uservoice.com/forums/268571-microsoft-bitlocker-administration-and-monitoring).
-- For MBAM issues, use the [MBAM TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopmbam).
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v25/customizing-the-self-service-portal-for-your-organization.md b/mdop/mbam-v25/customizing-the-self-service-portal-for-your-organization.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b5343853e6..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v25/customizing-the-self-service-portal-for-your-organization.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,80 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Customizing the Self-Service Portal for Your Organization
-description: Customizing the Self-Service Portal for Your Organization
-author: dansimp
-ms.assetid: f007e02b-e2df-47a9-9762-5909e230aa3f
-ms.reviewer:
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: dansimp
-ms.pagetype: mdop, security
-ms.mktglfcycl: manage
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 06/16/2016
----
-
-
-# Customizing the Self-Service Portal for Your Organization
-
-
-After configuring the Self-Service Portal, you will want to customize it for your organization by adding custom notice text, your company name, and other company-specific information.
-
-## Customizing the Self-Service Portal information
-
-
-You can customize the Self-Service Portal in the following ways:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
What you can do
-
Instructions
-
-
-
-
-
You can brand the Self-Service Portal with your company name, Help Desk URL, and can change the Session Time-out setting to make the end user’s session expire after a specified period of inactivity.
You can configure a localized version of the Self-Service Portal "HelpdeskText" statement, which tells end users how to get additional help when they are using the Self-Service Portal.
-
-
-
-
-
-## Related topics
-
-
-[How to Configure the MBAM 2.5 Web Applications](how-to-configure-the-mbam-25-web-applications.md)
-
-
-
-## Got a suggestion for MBAM?
-- Add or vote on suggestions [here](http://mbam.uservoice.com/forums/268571-microsoft-bitlocker-administration-and-monitoring).
-- For MBAM issues, use the [MBAM TechNet Forum](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/home?forum=mdopmbam).
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/mdop/mbam-v25/deploy-mbam.md b/mdop/mbam-v25/deploy-mbam.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a921105176..0000000000
--- a/mdop/mbam-v25/deploy-mbam.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,595 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Deploying MBAM 2.5 in a stand-alone configuration
-description: Introducing how to deploy MBAM 2.5 in a stand-alone configuration.
-author: Deland-Han
-ms.reviewer: dcscontentpm
-manager: dansimp
-ms.author: delhan
-ms.sitesec: library
-ms.prod: w10
-ms.date: 09/16/2019
-manager: dcscontentpm
----
-
-# Deploying MBAM 2.5 in a standalone configuration
-
-This article provides step-by-step instructions for installing Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring (MBAM) 2.5 in a standalone configuration. In this guide we will use a two-server configuration. One of the two servers will be a database server running Microsoft SQL Server 2012. This server will host the MBAM databases and reports. The additional server will be a Windows Server 2012 web server hosting "Administration and Monitoring Server" and "Self-Service Portal."
-
-## Preparation steps before installing MBAM 2.5 server software
-
-### Step 1: Installation and configuration of servers
-
-Before we start configuring MBAM 2.5, we have to make sure that both servers are configured as per MBAM system requirements. See the [MBAM minimum system requirements](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-desktop-optimization-pack/mbam-v25/mbam-25-supported-configurations#-mbam-server-system-requirements), and select a configuration that meets these requirements.
-
-#### Step 1.1: Deploying prerequisites for database and reporting server
-
-1. Install and configure a server running Windows Server 2008 R2 (or later) operating system.
-
-2. Install Windows PowerShell 3.0.
-
-3. Install Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 or a later version that includes the latest service pack. If you are installing a new instance of SQL Server for MBAM, make sure the SQL Server you install includes the SQL_Latin1_General_CP1_CI_AS collation. You’ll have to install the following SQL Server features:
-
- * Database Engine
- * Reporting Services
- * Client Tools Connectivity
- * Management Tools – Complete
-
- > [!Note]
- > Optionally, you can also install the [Transparent Data Encryption (TDE) feature in SQL Server](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-desktop-optimization-pack/mbam-v25/mbam-25-security-considerations).
-
- SQL Server Reporting Services must be installed and configured in "native" mode and not in unconfigured or "SharePoint" mode.
-
- 
-
-4. If you plan to use SSL for the Administration and Monitoring website, make sure that you configure SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) to use the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol before you configure the Administration and Monitoring website. Otherwise, the Reports feature will use unencrypted (HTTP) data transport instead of encrypted (HTTPS).
-
- You can follow [Configure SSL Connections](https://docs.microsoft.com/sql/reporting-services/security/configure-ssl-connections-on-a-native-mode-report-server?view=sql-server-2017) on a Native Mode Report Server to configure SSL on Report Server.
-
- > [!Note]
- > You can follow the SQL Server Installation Guide for your respective version of SQL Server to install SQL Server. The links are as follows:
- > * [SQL Server 2014](https://docs.microsoft.com/sql/sql-server/install/planning-a-sql-server-installation?view=sql-server-2014)
- > * [SQL Server 2012](https://docs.microsoft.com/previous-versions/sql/sql-server-2012/bb500442(v=sql.110))
- > * [SQL Server 2008 R2](https://docs.microsoft.com/previous-versions/sql/sql-server-2012/bb500442(v=sql.110))
-
-5. In the post-installation of SQL Server, make sure that you provision the user account in SQL Server, and assign the following permissions to the user who will configure the MBAM database and reporting roles on the database server.
-
- Roles for the instance of SQL Server:
-
- * dbcreator
- * processadmin
-
- Rights for the instance of SQL Server Reporting Services:
-
- * Create Folders
- * Publish Reports
-
-Your database server is ready for configuration of MBAM 2.5 roles. Let’s move to the next server.
-
-#### Step 1.2: Deploying prerequisites for administration and monitoring server
-
-Choose a server that meets the hardware configuration as explained in the [MBAM system requirements document](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-desktop-optimization-pack/mbam-v25/mbam-25-supported-configurations#-mbam-server-system-requirements). It must be running Windows Server 2008 R2 or a later operating system together with latest service pack and updates. After the server is ready, install the following roles and features:
-
-##### Roles
-
-* Web Server (IIS) Management Tools (Select IIS Management Scripts and Tools.)
-
-* Web Server Role Services
-
- * Common HTTP features
- Static Content
- Default Document
-
- * Application development
- ASP.NET
- .NET Extensibility
- ISAPI Extensions
- ISAPI Filters
- Security
- Windows Authentication
- Request Filtering
-
- * Web Service IIS Management Tools
-
-##### Feature
-
-* .NET Framework 4.5 features
-
- * Microsoft .NET Framework 4.5
-
- For Windows Server 2012 or Windows Server 2012 R2, .NET Framework 4.5 is already installed for these versions of Windows Server. However, you must enable it.
-
- For Windows Server 2008 R2, .NET Framework 4.5 is not included with Windows Server 2008 R2. So, you must download .NET Framework 4.5 and install it separately.
-
- * WCF Activation
- HTTP Activation
- Non-HTTP Activation
-
- * TCP Activation
-
- * Windows Process Activation Service:
- Process Model
- .NET Framework Environment
- Configuration APIs
-
-For the self-service portal to work, you should also [download and install ASP.NET MVC 4.0](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=392271).
-
-The next step is to create the required MBAM users and groups in Active Directory.
-
-### Step 2: Creating users and groups in Active Directory Domain Services
-
-As part of the prerequisites, you must define certain roles and accounts that are used in MBAM to provide security and access rights to specific servers and features, such as the databases that are running on the instance of SQL Server and the web applications that are running on the Administration and Monitoring Server.
-
-Create the following groups and users in Active Directory. (You can use any name for the groups and users.) Users do not have to have greater user rights. A domain user account is sufficient. You’ll have to specify the name of these groups during configuration of MBAM 2.5:
-
-* **MBAMAppPool**
-
- **Type**: Domain User
-
- **Description**: Domain user who has Read or Write permission to the Compliance and Audit Database and the Recovery Database to enable the web applications to access the data and reports in these databases. It will also be used by the application pool for the web applications.
-
- **Account Roles (During Configuration of MBAM)**:
-
- 1. Web service application pool domain account
-
- 2. Compliance and Audit Database and Recovery Database read/write user for reports
-
-* **MBAMROUser**
-
- **Type**: Domain User
-
- **Description**: Domain user who will have Read-Only access to the Compliance and Audit Database to enable the reports to access the compliance and audit data in this database. It will also be the domain user account that the local SQL Server Reporting Services instance uses to access the Compliance and Audit Database.
-
- **Account Roles (During Configuration of MBAM)**:
-
- 1. Compliance and Audit Database read-only user for reports
-
- 2. Compliance and Audit Database domain user account
-
-* **MBAMAdvHelpDsk**
-
- **Type**: Domain Group
-
- **Description**: MBAM Advanced Helpdesk Users access group: Domain user group whose members have access to all areas of the Administration and Monitoring Website. Users who have this role have to enter only the recovery key, not the user’s domain and user name, when they are helping users recover their drives. If a user is a member of both the MBAM Helpdesk Users group and the MBAM Advanced Helpdesk Users group, the MBAM Advanced Helpdesk Users group permissions override the MBAM Helpdesk Group permissions.
-
- **Account Roles (During Configuration of MBAM)**: MBAM Advanced Helpdesk Users
-
-* **MBAMHelpDsk**
-
- **Type**: Domain Group
-
- **Description**: MBAM Helpdesk Users access group: Domain user group whose members have access to the Manage TPM and Drive Recovery areas of the MBAM Administration and Monitoring Website. People who have this role must fill in all fields when they use either option. This includes the user’s domain and account name.
-
- **Account Roles (During Configuration of MBAM)**: MBAM Helpdesk Users
-
-* **MBAMRUGrp**
-
- **Type**: Domain Group
-
- **Description**: Domain user group whose members have read-only access to the reports in the Reports area of the Administration and Monitoring Website.
-
- **Account Roles (During Configuration of MBAM)**:
-
- 1. Reports read-only domain access group
-
- 2. MBAM Report Users access group
-
-### Step 3 (Optional): Configure and install SSL certificate on administration and monitoring server
-
-Although it’s optional, we highly recommend that you use a certificate to help secure the communication between the MBAM Client and the Administration and Monitoring Website and the Self-Service Portal websites. We do not recommend that you use self-signed certificates because of obvious security reasons. We suggest that you use a Web Server Type Certificate from a trusted Certification Authority. To do this, you can refer the "Using Certificate Approved by Certificate Authority" section from [KB 2754259](https://support.microsoft.com/help/2754259).
-
-After the certificate is issued, you should add the certificate to the personal store of the Administration and Monitoring Server. To add the certificate, open the Certificates store on the local computer. To do this, follow these steps:
-
-1. Right-select Start, and then select Run.
-
- 
-
-2. Type "MMC.EXE" (without the quotation marks), and then select **OK**.
-
- 
-
-3. Select **File** in the new MMC that you opened, and then select **Add/Remove Snap-in**.
-
- 
-
-4. Highlight the **Certificates** snap-in, and then select **Add**.
-
- 
-
-5. Select the **Computer account** option, and then select **Next**.
-
- 
-
-6. Select **Local Computer** on the next screen, and then select **Finish**.
-
- 
-
-7. You have now added the Certificates snap-in. This will enable you to work with any certificates in your computer's certificate store.
-
- 
-
-8. Import the web server certificate into your computer's certificate store.
-
- Now that you have access to the Certificates snap-in, you can import the web server certificate into your computer's certificate store. To do this, follow the next steps.
-
-9. Open the Certificates (Local Computer) snap-in, and browse to **Personal** and then **Certificates**.
-
- 
-
- > [!Note]
- > The Certificates snap-in may not be listed. If it is not, no certificates are installed.
-
-10. Right-select **Certificates**, select **All Tasks**, and then select **Import**.
-
- 
-
-11. When the wizard starts, select **Next**. Browse to the file that you created that contains your server certificate and private key, and then select **Next**.
-
- 
-
-12. Enter the password if you specified one for the file when you created it.
-
- 
-
- > [!Note]
- > Make sure that the **Mark the key as exportable** option is selected if you want to be able to export the key pair again from this computer. As an added security measure, you may want to leave this option cleared to make sure that no one can make a backup of your private key.
-
-13. Select **Next**, and then select the **Certificate Store** to which you want to save the certificate.
-
- 
-
- > [!Note]
- > You should select **Personal**, because it is a web server certificate. If you included the certificate in the certification hierarchy, it will also be added to this store.
-
-14. Select **Next**, and then select **Finish**.
-
- 
-
-You will now see the server certificate for your web server in the Personal Certificates list. It will be denoted by the common name of the server. (You can find this in the subject section of the certificate.)
-
-For further reference:
-
-[MBAM 2.5 Security Considerations](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-desktop-optimization-pack/mbam-v25/mbam-25-security-considerations)
-
-[Planning How to Secure the MBAM Websites](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-desktop-optimization-pack/mbam-v25/planning-how-to-secure-the-mbam-websites)
-
-The next step is to register a service principle name for the application pool account.
-
-### Step 4: Configuring SSL certificate for MBAM Web Server
-
-If you are using SSL communication between the client and server, you should make sure that the certificate has Enhanced Key Usage OIDs (1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.1) and (1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.2). That is, you should make sure that Server Authentication and Client Authentication are added.
-
-If you receive a certificate error when you try to browse service URLs, you are using a certificate that was issued to a different name, or you are browsing by using an incorrect URL.
-
-Although the browser may prompt you with a certificate error message but let you continue, the MBAM web service will not ignore certificate errors and will block the connection. You will notice certificate-related errors in the MBAM client’s MBAM Admin event log. If you are using an alias to connect to the Administration and Monitoring server, you should issue a certificate to the alias name. That is, the subject name of the certificate should be the alias name, and the local server’s DNS name should be added to the **Subject Alternative Name** field of the certificate.
-
-Example:
-
-If the virtual name is "bitlocker.contoso.com" and the MBAM Administration and Monitoring server name is "adminserver.contoso.com," the certificate should be issued to bitlocker.contoso.com (subject name), and adminserver.contoso.com should be added to **Subject Alternative Name** field of the certificate.
-
-Similarly, if you have multiple Administration and Monitoring servers installed to balance the load by using a load balancer, you should issue the SSL certificate to the virtual name. That is, the subject name field of the certificate should have the virtual name, and the names of all the local servers should be added in the **Subject Alternative Name** field of the certificate.
-
-Example:
-
-If the virtual name is "bitlocker.contoso.com" and the servers are "adminserver1.contoso.com" and "adminiserver2.contoso.com," the certificate should be issued to bitlocker.contoso.com (subject name) and adminserver1.contoso.com, and adminiserver2.contoso.com should be added to the **Subject Alternative Name** field of the certificate.
-
-The steps to configure SSL communication by using MBAM are described in the following Knowledge Base article: [KB 2754259](https://support.microsoft.com/help/2754259).
-
-### Step 5: Register SPNS for the application pool account and configure constrained delegation
-
-> [!Note]
-> Constrained delegation is required only for 2.5 and is not required for 2.5 Service Pack 1 and later.
-
-To enable the MBAM servers to authenticate communication from the Administration and Monitoring Website and the Self-Service Portal, you must register a Service Principal Name (SPN) for the host name under the domain account that you are using for the web application pool. The following article contains step-by-step instructions to register SPNs: [Planning How to Secure the MBAM Websites](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-desktop-optimization-pack/mbam-v25/planning-how-to-secure-the-mbam-websites)
-
-After you have the SPN configured, you should set up constrained delegation on the SPN. To do this, follow these steps:
-
-1. Go to Active Directory, and find the app pool credentials that you configured for MBAM websites in the previous steps.
-
-2. Right-click the credentials, and then select **properties**.
-
-3. Select the **delegation** tab.
-
-4. Select the option for Kerberos authentication.
-
-5. Select **browse**, and browse again for your app pool credentials. You should then see the all the SPNs that are set up on the app pool creds account. (The SPN should resemble "http/bitlocker.fqdn.com"). Highlight the SPN that is the same as the host name that you specified during the MBAM installation.
-
-6. Select **OK**.
-
-Now you are good with prerequisites. In the next steps, you will install the MBAM software on the servers and configure it.
-
-## Installing and configuring MBAM 2.5 server software
-
-### Step 6: Install MBAM 2.5 server software
-
-To install the MBAM Server software by using the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring Setup wizard both on Database Server and on Administration and Monitoring Server, follow these steps.
-
-1. On the server on which you want to install MBAM, run MBAMserversetup.exe to start the Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring Setup wizard.
-
-2. On the Welcome page, select **Next**.
-
-3. Read and accept the Microsoft Software License Agreement, and then select **Next** to continue the installation.
-
-4. Decide whether to use Microsoft Update when you check for updates, and then select **Next**.
-
-5. Decide whether to participate in the Customer Experience Improvement Program, and then select **Next**.
-
-6. To start the installation, select **Install**.
-
-7. To configure the server features after the MBAM Server software finishes installing, select the **Run MBAM Server Configuration after the wizard closes** check box. Or, you can configure MBAM later by using the **MBAM Server Configuration** shortcut that the server installation creates on your **Start** menu.
-
-8. Select **Finish**.
-
-For more information, see [Installing the MBAM 2.5 Server Software](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-desktop-optimization-pack/mbam-v25/installing-the-mbam-25-server-software).
-
-### Step 7: Configure MBAM 2.5 database and reports role
-
-In this step, we will configure the MBAM 2.5 databases and reporting component by using the MBAM Wizard:
-
-1. Configure the Compliance and Audit Database and the Recovery Database by using the wizard:
-
- 1. On the server on which you want to configure the databases, start the **MBAM Server Configuration wizard**. You can select **MBAM Server Configuration** on the **Start** menu to open the wizard.
-
- 2. Select **Add New Features**, select **Compliance and Audit Database**, **Recovery Database and Reports**, and then select **Next**. The wizard checks that all prerequisites for the databases are met.
-
- 3. If the prerequisite check is successful, select **Next** to continue. Otherwise, resolve any missing prerequisites, and then select **Check prerequisites again**.
-
- 4. Using the following descriptions, enter the field values in the wizard:
-
-2. Compliance and audit database
-
- |Field |Description|
- |-------|-------|
- |SQL Server name |Name of the server on which you are configuring the Compliance and Audit Database. You must add an exception on the Compliance and Audit Database computer to enable incoming inbound traffic on the SQL Server port. The default port number is 1433.|
- |SQL Server database instance |Name of the database instance where the compliance and audit data will be stored. If you are using the default instance, you must leave this field blank. You must also specify where the database information will be located.|
- |Database name |Name of the database that will store the compliance data. You must note the name of the database that you are specifying here because you will have to provide this information in later steps.|
- |Read/write permission domain user or group |Specify the name of the MBAMAppPool user as configured in step 2.|
- |Read-only access domain user or group |Specify the name of the MBAMROUser user as configured in step 2.|
-
-3. Recovery database.
-
- |Field |Description|
- |-----|-----|
- |SQL Server name |Name of the server on which you are configuring the Recovery Database. You must add an exception on the Recovery Database computer to enable incoming inbound traffic on the SQL Server port. The default port number is 1433.|
- |SQL Server database instance |Name of the database instance where the recovery data will be stored. If you are using the default instance, you must leave this field blank. You must also specify where the database information will be located.|
- |Database name |Name of the database that will store the recovery data.|
- |Read/write permission domain user or group |Domain user or group that has read/write permission to this database to enable the web applications to access the data and reports in this database. If you enter a user in this field, it must be the same value as the value in the **Web service application pool domain account** field on the **Configure Web Applications** page. If you enter a group in this field, the value in the **Web service application pool domain account** field on the **Configure Web Applications** page must be a member of the group that you enter in this field.|
-
- When you finish your entries, select **Next**. The wizard checks that all prerequisites for the databases are met.
-
- If the prerequisite check is successful, select **Next** to continue. Otherwise, resolve any missing prerequisites, and then select **Next** again.
-
-4. Reports.
-
- |Field |Description|
- |----|----|
- |SQL Server Reporting Services instance |Instance of SQL Server Reporting Services where the reports will be configured. If you are using the default instance, you must leave this field blank.|
- |Reporting role domain group |Specify the name of the MBAMRUGrp as mentioned in step 2.|
- |SQL Server name |Name of the server on which the Compliance and Audit Database is configured.|
- |SQL Server database instance |Name of the database instance where the compliance and audit data is configured. If you are using the default instance, you must leave this field blank. You must add an exception on the Reports computer to enable incoming traffic on the port of the Reporting Server. (The default port is 80.)|
- |Database name| Name of the Compliance and Audit Database. By default, the database name is MBAM Compliance Status.|
- |Compliance and Audit Database domain account |Specify the name of the MBAMROUser user as configured in step 2.|
-
- When you finish your entries, select **Next**. The wizard checks that all prerequisites for the Reports feature are met. Select Next to continue. On the **Summary** page, review the features that will be added.
-
- For more information, see the following article: [How to Configure the MBAM 2.5 Databases](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-desktop-optimization-pack/mbam-v25/how-to-configure-the-mbam-25-databases).
-
-### Step 8: Configure the MBAM 2.5 Web applications role
-
-1. On the server on which you want to configure the web applications, start the MBAM Server Configuration wizard. You can select **MBAM Server Configuration** on the **Start** menu to open the wizard.
-
-2. Select **Add New Features**, select **Administration and Monitoring Website** and **Self-Service Portal**, and then select **Next**. The wizard checks that all prerequisites for the databases are met.
-
-3. If the prerequisite check is successful, select **Next** to continue. Otherwise, resolve any missing prerequisites, and then select **Check prerequisites again**.
-
-4. Use the following descriptions to enter the field values in the wizard.
-
- |Field |Description|
- |-----|-----|
- |Security certificate |Select a previously created certificate in step 3 to optionally encrypt the communication between the web services and the server on which you are configuring the Administration and Monitoring Website. If you select Do not use a certificate, your web communication may not be secure.|
- |Host name |Name of the host computer on which you are configuring the Administration and Monitoring Website. It does not have to be the hostname of the machine, it could be anything. However, if the hostname is different than the netbios name of the computer, you have to create an A record and make sure the SPN uses the custom hostname, not the netbios name. This is common on load balancing scenarios.|
- |Installation path |Path on which you are installing the Administration and Monitoring Website.|
- |Port |Port number to use for website communication. You must set a firewall exception to enable communication through the specified port.|
- |Web service application pool domain account and password |Specify the user account and password of the MBAMAppPool user as configured in step 2. For improved security, set the account that is specified in the credentials to have limited user rights. Also, set the password of the account to never expire.|
-
-5. Verify that the built-in IIS_IUSRS account or the application pool account was added to the **Impersonate a client after authentication** and the **Log on as a batch job** local security settings.
-
- To check whether the account was added to the local security settings, open the **Local Security Policy editor**, expand the **Local Policies** node, select the **User Rights Assignment** node, and double-select **Impersonate a client after authentication** and **Log on as a batch job** policies in the right-side pane.
-
-6. Use the following field descriptions to configure the connection information in the wizard for the Compliance and Audit Database.
- |Field |Description|
- |------|------|
- |SQL Server name |Name of the server on which the Compliance and Audit Database is configured.|
- |SQL Server database instance |Name of the instance of SQL Server (for example, \) and on which the Compliance and Audit Database is configured. Leave this blank if you are using the default instance.|
- |Database name |Name of the Compliance and Audit Database. By default, it’s "MBAM Compliance Status".|
-
-7. Use the following field descriptions to configure the connection information in the wizard for the Recovery Database.
- |Field |Description|
- |----|----|
- |SQL Server name |Name of the server on which the Recovery Database is configured.|
- |SQL Server database instance |Name of the instance of SQL Server (for example, \) on which the Recovery Database is configured. Leave this blank if you are using the default instance.|
- |Database name |Name of the Recovery Database. By default, it’s "MBAM Recovery and Hardware".|
-
-8. Use the following descriptions to enter the field values in the wizard to configure the Administration and Monitoring Website.
- |Field |Description|
- |----|----|
- |Advanced Helpdesk role domain group |Specify the name of the MBAMAdvHelpDsk Group as configured in step 2.|
- |Helpdesk role domain group |Specify the name of the MBAMHelpDsk Group as configured in step 2.|
- |Use System Center Configuration Manager Integration |Select to clear this check box. |
- |Reporting role domain group |Specify the name of the MBAMRUGrp Group as configured in step 2. |
- |SQL Server Reporting Services URL |Specify the Web Service URL for the SSRS server on which the MBAM reports are configured. You can find this information by logging in to Reporting Services Configuration Manager on the Database Server. Example of a fully qualified domain name: https://MyReportServer.Contoso.com/ReportServer Example of a custom host name: https://MyReportServer/ReportServer|
- |Virtual directory |Virtual directory of the Administration and Monitoring Website. This name corresponds to the website’s physical directory on the server and is appended to the website’s host name. For example: http(s)://*\*:*\*/HelpDesk/ If you do not specify a virtual directory, the value HelpDesk will be used. |
-
-9. Use the following description to enter the field values in the wizard to configure the Self-Service Portal.
-
- |Field |Description|
- |----|----|
- |Virtual directory |Virtual directory of the web application. This name corresponds to the website’s physical directory on the server and is appended to the website’s host name. For example: http(s)://*\*:*\*/SelfService/ If you do not specify a virtual directory, the value "SelfService" will be used.|
-
-10. When you finish your entries, select **Next**. The wizard checks that all prerequisites for the web applications are met.
-
-11. Select **Next** to continue.
-
-12. On the **Summary** page, review the features that will be added.
-
-13. Select **Add** to add the web applications to the server, and then select **Close**.
-
-## Customizing and validating steps after installing MBAM 2.5 server software
-
-### Step 9: Customizing the self-server portal for your organization
-
-To customize the Self-Service Portal by adding custom notice text, your company name, pointers to more information, and so on, see [Customizing the Self-Service Portal for Your Organization](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-desktop-optimization-pack/mbam-v25/customizing-the-self-service-portal-for-your-organization).
-
-### Step 10: Configure the self-server portal if client computers cannot access the CDN
-
-Determine whether your client computers have access to the Microsoft AJAX Content Delivery Network (CDN). The CDN gives the Self-Service Portal the access it requires to certain JavaScript files. If you don’t configure the Self-Service Portal when client computers cannot access the CDN, only the company name and the account under which the user signed in will be displayed. No error message will be shown.
-
-Do one of the following:
-
-* If your client computers have access to the CDN, do nothing. Your Self-Service Portal configuration is complete.
-
-* If your client computers do not have access to the CDN, follow the steps in [How to Configure the Self-Service Portal When Client Computers Cannot Access the Microsoft Content Delivery Network](https://docs.microsoft.com/microsoft-desktop-optimization-pack/mbam-v25/how-to-configure-the-self-service-portal-when-client-computers-cannot-access-the-microsoft-content-delivery-network).
-
-### Step 11: Validate the MBAM 2.5 server feature configuration
-
-To validate your MBAM Server deployment to use the standalone topology, follow these steps.
-
-1. On each server on which an MBAM feature is deployed, select **Control Panel** > **Programs** > **Programs and Features**. Verify that **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring** appears in the **Programs and Features** list.
- > [!Note]
- > To perform the validation, you must use a domain account that has local computer administrative credentials on each server.
-
-2. On the server on which the Recovery Database is configured, open SQL Server Management Studio, and verify that the **MBAM Recovery and Hardware** database is configured.
-
-3. On the server om which the Compliance and Audit Database is configured, open SQL Server Management Studio, and verify that the MBAM Compliance Status Database is configured.
-
-4. On the server onm which the Reports feature is configured, open a web browser by using administrative credentials, and browse to the homepage of the SQL Server Reporting Services site.
-
- The default homepage location of a SQL Server Reporting Services site instance is as follows:
- http(s)://*\*:*\*/Reports.aspx
-
- To find the actual URL, use the Reporting Services Configuration Manager tool, and select the instances that you specified during setup.
-
-5. Verify that a reports folder that is named Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring contains a data source that is named MaltaDataSource. This data source contains folders that have names that represent language locales (for example, en-us). The reports are in the language folders.
-
- > [!Note]
- > If SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) was configured as a named instance, the URL should resemble the following:
- > http(s)://\:\/Reports_\
- >
- > If SSRS was not configured to use Secure Socket Layer (SSL), the URL for the reports will be set to "HTTP" instead of "HTTPS" when you install the MBAM server. If you then go to the Administration and Monitoring Website (also known as Helpdesk) and select a report, you receive the following message: "Only Secure Content is Displayed." To show the report, select **Show All Content**.
-
-6. On the server on which the Administration and Monitoring Website feature is configured, run Server Manager, browse to **Roles**, and then select **Web Server (IIS)** > **Internet Information Services (IIS)** Manager.
-
-7. In **Connections**, browse to \ and then select **Sites** > **Microsoft BitLocker Administration and Monitoring**. Verify that the following are listed:
-
- * MBAMAdministrationService
- * MBAMComplianceStatusService
- * MBAMRecoveryAndHardwareService
-
-8. On the server on which the Administration and Monitoring Website and Self-Service Portal are configured, open a web browser by using administrative credentials.
-
-9. Browse to the following websites to verify that they load successfully:
- * https(s)://\:\/HelpDesk/ (confirm each link for navigation and reports)
- * http(s)://\:\/SelfService/
-
- > [!Note]
- > It is assumed that you configured the server features on the default port without network encryption. If you configured the server features on a different port or virtual directory, change the URLs to include the appropriate port. For example:
- > http(s)://\:\/HelpDesk/
- > http(s)://\